《My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World》


 Chapter 1

    Chapter 1


    ¡°¡­ Phew¡­ That was another hard day.¡±


    At midnight when the date was about to change, I was finally finishing my work and ready to return home.


    I don¡¯t remember returning on time recently.


    It¡¯s been two years since I started this job. I don¡¯t have any days off, and I think it¡¯s apletely ck workce with constant overtime.


    However, I haven¡¯t had time to look for another job, so I¡¯m continuing my current one.


    ¡°Ah¡­I feel a little dizzy.¡±


    Before, when I was working continuously for 3 months without a break, I once copsed at home.


    At that time, I woke up immediately, but I took a day off from work and went to the hospital because I thought this was dangerous.


    But when I went to work the next day, my superiors were angry and my coworkers gave me dirty looks.


    While this wasn¡¯t as bad as that time, my walking was a little strange.


    I wasn¡¯t drinking.


    I have just reached adulthood, and while I have drunk alcohol, I haven¡¯t drunk enough so that it seems delicious.


    The boss once took me to a drinking party on a day when there was little overtime, and I remember being forced to drink a lot of beer and having to rush to the bathroom many times.


    ¡°What is with¡­this workce.¡±


    While mumbling to myself, I walked from the nearest station to my home.


    ¡°Oh, I should stop at the convenience store. I haven¡¯t eaten anything today¡­ And I can buy something for her and go home.¡±


    I entered a convenience store on the way to my house and bought a lunch box and sausages, remembering that I hadn¡¯t eaten anything today.


    She must always feel lonely, and so sometimes I want to buy her favorite food and make her happy.


    I left the convenience store and headed home again at a slightly odd pace.


    I arrived at the apartment after walking for about 10 minutes, and took out the key from my pocket in front of the namete that read Takumi Hirooka, and opened the door.


    ¡°I¡¯m home.¡±


    I opened the door and went inside while calling out to her.


    I could hear the sound of scratching behind the door, at the back of the corridor leading from the entrance.


    ¡°Good, good. You¡¯re lively today. I¡¯ll open it now, so wait!¡±


    I take off my shoes, go up to the corridor, stand in front of the door and open it.


    As soon as the door was opened, a white object rushed out from inside.


    ¡°Kuuun¡­ Kuuun¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha, okay-okay. Were you a good girl?¡±


    It was Leo, a Maltese, that jumped at me.


    Our first encounter was when I found her as a puppy in a cardboard box that was thrown away a few years ago.


    As a student at that time, I had just started living alone, but thanks to Leo, I wasn¡¯t lonely.


    When I picked her up, I called her Leo without thinking, butter realized that she was a female. That was a good memory.


    I¡¯m sorry Leo, I gave you such a name in spite of being a girl.


    ¡°See, I bought your favorite sausage today!¡±


    ¡°Kuun¡­ Wuff-wuff.¡±


    When I showed the sausage, the tail that had been wagging a while ago began to wag even more violently.


    She put her nose close to the sausage and was about to open her mouth and bite into it.


    ¡°Hahaha. Wait, wait. You can¡¯t eat it like this. ¡­Here, you have to take it out of the wrapper first.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff! ¡­Chomp-chomp.¡±


    I took the sausage out of the wrappings and put it on the floor. She pounced on it and started to eat.


    I better eat my own dinner as well.


    It had been heated at the convenience store, and so I put it on the table, took off the lid and started to eat.


    ¡­It didn¡¯t have much taste¡­ Had they gone with a milder vor today?


    Regardless, I was hungry, and would not let any of it go to waste.


    While I was eating, Leo finished her sausage and started to paw at me.


    ¡°Kuuun¡­kyuun.¡±


    ¡°What? Do you want to y? Just wait a little. I¡¯m almost finished eating.¡±


    ¡°¡­Kuun.¡±


    I petted Leo so that she would calm down, and then I ate the rest of my food.


    Then I put all of the garbage in the convenience store bag and left it in a corner of the room.


    It was unburnable garbage day tomorrow, so I would have to remember to take it out before I go to work.


    ¡°Alright,e here, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Kyuun¡­kyuun.¡±


    ¡°What? I thought you wanted to y?¡±


    ¡°¡­.Kyuuun¡­kyuun.¡±


    For some reason, today she was pushing her nose into my face and licking me a lot¡­


    Had she noticed that my health seemed worse than usual?


    While it was rather odd, I remembered something just as I was considering going to bed.


    ¡°Ah, I better take a bath.¡±


    I couldn¡¯t go straight to sleep like this after returning.


    Upon hearing the word ¡®bath,¡¯ Leo jumped away from me.


    She always hated baths¡­


    I chuckled at her and then got up in order to take a shower. That¡¯s when my vision swayed.


    ¡°¡­Is it an earthquake?¡±


    For some reason, it seemed like it was shaking¡­ No, wait, was it me who was shaking¡­?


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    Leo was barking loudly in the corner of my vision, but without being able to reply, I fell to the floor.


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff! Wuff! ¡­Kuun. Kuuun.¡±


    Perhaps she was worried about me. I could clearly feel that she hade close. But I could do nothing as my consciousness faded.


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¨C


    ¡°¡­Hmm.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    I felt the wind blowing as I opened my eyes.


    Had I been sleeping? And was this fluffy thing covering my face Leo?


    ¡°Sorry, Leo. Can you move a little. ¡­You¡¯ve gotten heavy.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Leo¡¯s voice sounded lower than usual as I moved her away and opened my eyes.


    ¡­The thing that entered my vision was a forest that I had never seen before.


    ¡°¡­Where¡­am I? Is this a dream?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Hadn¡¯t I been sleeping in my room? I remember eating dinner, but I don¡¯t remember getting into bed.


    Why was I in this forest¡­?


    Thinking that it must be a dream, I pinched my cheeks, but it hurt.


    ¡°So it¡¯s not a dream¡­? But why am I in a forest¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    And Leo¡¯s barking wasn¡¯t just lower than usual, but also sounded more powerful for some reason.


    As she had been barking next to me as if she wanted attention, I turned my head towards her.


    Now that was a surprise.


    ¡°What? Hey! So you¡¯re not Leo!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    The thing that was sitting next to me with its head tilted to the side was a wolf that I had never seen before. It was also much bigger than me.


    ¡°¡­!¡±


    I tried to get up so that I could run away, but perhaps due to having only just woken up, and the fatigue of the previous day¡¯s work, I could not move my body well.


    As I tried to scramble away, the wolf¡¯s face came close to mine.


    I was going to be eaten! I braced myself and shut my eyes tightly.


    ¡°Kuuun.¡±


    My eyes were closed, but that voice was familiar. And then I felt my face being licked.


    Surely you¡¯re not actually¡­


    ¡°You¡­ Are you Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    She nodded and then barked as if to say ¡®that¡¯s right!¡¯


    ¡°But why are you so big¡­¡±


    What I first saw after waking up in a strange ce, was that my beloved dog had be very big.

 Chapter 2

    Chapter 2


    <em><strong>I Wandered Through The Forest</strong></em>


    Leo used to be a small Maltese.


    But there wasn¡¯t a shadow of her former self remaining. She was now huge and muchrger than me, and her teeth looked like sharp fangs.


    Her face was fearless and was simr to a Japanese wolf.


    ¡­The adorable Maltese waspletely gone.


    Leo was a female, but looked so cool now.


    Of course, the wolves I saw in pictures always looked cool, regardless of being male or female.


    ¡°You¡¯ve¡­sure grown a lot.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    That gesture of tilting her head to the side when I talk to her.


    Ever since I picked Leo up, I had thought she was a little odd.


    They often say that Maltese dogs are smart, but my Leo would asionally act in a strangely human way ever since she was a pup.


    Sometimes it was almost as if she could understand the words that I was saying.


    I had been able to interact with other dogs several times, but had never seen a dog that understood spoken words as much as Leo.


    ¡°In fact, I think you¡¯ve grown way too much? I was always the one who picked you up, but now I might be able to ride on top of you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wou! Wou!¡±


    ¡®Then why don¡¯t you?¡¯ Leo seemed to say as she lowered her back.


    ¡­She really did understand what I was saying.


    ¡°Well, maybe some other time. In any case, I have to find out where we are.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Seeming to understand me, Leo stood up and looked towards the forest.


    I also pulled myself off of the ground and stood up on my feet.


    That dizziness I had felt before sleeping was now gone.


    Well, I didn¡¯t actually have any memory of sleeping, but I wouldn¡¯t think about it.


    More importantly, I want to find out what this ce was.


    ¡­I¡¯ll probably bete for work today¡­ I¡¯ll be in so much trouble.


    ¡°Hmm. The trees block the view, so I can¡¯t see very far. I suppose we better walk.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    And so I chose a random direction and started walking.


    Leo walked close right next to me, but I wondered if she could walk through the trees in spite of being so big?


    ¡­But she weaved through the trees cleverly.


    After that, we walked through the trees for what seemed like a long time, but the forest did not end.


    Since it was a dim forest, it was hard to maintain a sense of time.


    But there were still rays of light that shone through the gaps in the trees, so I at least knew that it wasn¡¯t night yet.


    If this continues, we might just get lost here¡­


    There was no way that I could make it to work now.


    ¡°What should I do¡­ Still, I¡¯m quite thirsty¡­ If only there was a river.¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wou! Wou!¡±


    As I muttered to myself, Leo must have heard, as she suddenly started to bark and then lead the way.


    ¡°What is it, Leo? You want me to follow you?¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    She barked and then seemed to nod at me.


    Yes, she definitely understood¡­


    ¡­And since I had no better ideas, I decided to go and follow her.


    Was she going to say, ¡®Dig here! Bark! Bark!¡¯ or something?


    I joked to myself as I followed.


    Her fur used to be white, but it was now a shiny silver, and so Leo looked very cool as she walked with her glossy fur flowing in the wind.


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    After walking for some time, Leo stopped, turned to look at me, and barked once.


    As I wondered what it could be, I heard the sounds of running water in the direction that Leo was standing.


    ¡°Is that the sound¡­of a river?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Leo started to walk again, so I followed her until we came out into a clearing.


    Here, a crystal clear river was running, and it seemed a lot brighter, due to there being fewer trees in the area.


    ¡°I can see the sky now. Judging by the sun, it is probably midday.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Guff-guff.¡±


    As I looked up at the sky, Leo ran forward and jumped into the river, which she then started top up.


    For a moment I wondered if it was really okay to drink this river water, but Leo was drinking it greedily as if it was delicious, so it was probably fine.


    And so I followed Leo over to the river.


    When I put my hand in the flowing water, it was cool and rxing.


    ¡°Mmm¡­glug¡­glug¡­¡±


    As I had walked for quite some time in the forest, I was very thirsty.


    Scooping up the water with my hands was not enough, and so I dunked my head into the river and drank.


    ¡°Ahhh!¡±


    I drank and then pulled my head out.


    It was like I had washed my face in the cool river water, and it felt good.


    ¡°We should rest here for a while.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    I sat down close to the river and rested my body.


    Leo seemed to be satisfied as well, as she got out of the river, shook her body to dry herself, and then sat down next to me.


    ¡°Woou!¡±


    She must have felt quite rxed, as she ced her head on myp.


    ¡°¡­I used to be able to put you on myp when you were small. But now it¡¯s just your head. And your head alone is heavier than what you were before.¡±


    ¡°Wou!? Wou!¡±


    Perhaps she was protesting the notion that she was heavy, as she sounded a little displeased.


    Well, in spite of her appearance, she was a girl. So I shouldn¡¯t say that she is heavy.


    ¡°Now¡­ What should I do¡­¡±


    ¡°Wou?¡±


    I looked up at the sky and thought.


    I had appeared in this forest out of nowhere.


    And so I started walking, thinking that I could get out of it, but the end was nowhere in sight.


    We might be stranded here.


    Thanks to Leo, we found a river, so we wouldn¡¯t have to worry about water. But I was still worried about food.


    I didn¡¯t know much about wild nts, but I knew that it was dangerous to go around and eat things randomly.


    None of the trees I had seen up until now had any fruit, so I had no hopes there.


    ¡°¡­What to do¡­¡±


    I just didn¡¯t have knowledge for surviving in the wild.


    After all, I was more of an indoors person.


    I had only ever camped outside as part of a school trip.


    The idea of some real camping had not been appealing to me. But more than anything, my job had kept me so busy that I wouldn¡¯t have had time to do it.


    ¡°Ahh¡­ Still, the air is so fresh here.¡±


    ¡°Woou.¡±


    I listened to Leo¡¯s reply and took a deep breath.


    With a river nearby, and trees everywhere, the air here waspletely differentpared to the city.


    Had I not been worried about how I was going to get out of the forest, I would have been more rxed than I had been since¡­ Since when, I wonder¡­?


    Even when I was in school, I was busy with my part time job in order to support myself.


    And once I started working full time, it became normal to only have one day off every few months.


    It was also normal to work overtime up until midnight. And so even if I did have a day off, I would just rest in order to recover from exhaustion.


    Perhaps it was actually my first time ever being able to rx out in nature like this¡­

 Chapter 3

    Chapter 3


    <em><strong>I Encountered A Creature I Had Never Seen Before</strong></em>


    ¡°¡­Sorry, Leo. I wasn¡¯t able to spend much time with you up until now.¡±


    ¡°Wou? Wuff!¡±


    When I thought back on everything up until now, it wasn¡¯t not being able to rx that I most regretted. It was that I hadn¡¯t been able to give Leo enough attention.


    After rescuing her, I put her in a room and fed her. But I only took her for a walk once every week.


    So many times she had to wait until midnight for my return¡­


    If we escaped this forest and returned home, I would quit my current job and search for something that would give me more free time.


    As I had worked so hard, I didn¡¯t have any time to spend my money, so I should have a decent amount saved up.


    I would be able to live off of that, and spend plenty of time with Leo.


    As I thought of such things and petted Leo¡¯s silver fur, she suddenly raised her head and licked my cheek once.


    ¡°Wou. Wuff!¡±


    ¡°¡­Are you saying that I shouldn¡¯t worry about it?¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    Thanks, Leo.


    It was because of you that I never felt that lonely.


    Still feeling a little emotional, I rxed and petted Leo, who rested her head on myp again.


    After some time had passed, I felt that it would be unwise if we didn¡¯t get a move on. And then Leo suddenly stood up as if bouncing.


    ¡°What is it, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wooooo!¡±


    Instead of answering me, Leo turned away from the river and began to howl in the direction that we hade from.


    ¡°What is it? Is there something in the forest?¡±


    ¡°Woooo!¡±


    But she didn¡¯t react when I talked to her. She just kept howling towards the tree.


    Thinking that there must be something there, I turned to face it as well, but the trees were in the way and I couldn¡¯t see anything.


    However, I started to hear something from the forest that wasn¡¯t Leo or the river.


    The sounds of something stepping on grass and moving through bushes.


    The sound of somethinging towards us.


    ¡°Woooo!¡±


    Just as Leo howled and bared her fangs, the thing that was making the noise stepped out from the trees.


    What it was¡­was a creature that I had never seen before.


    It was about as tall as a human and walked on two legs.


    It held a spear in its hands, and it pointed it in our direction.


    The creature was stout, with a round belly as well.


    You almost thought it was human, until you saw its face.


    It was the face of a pig.


    ¡°Huh? A pig? But it¡¯s walking on two legs¡­and the spear? What?¡±


    The sight of it just confused me.


    I had awoken in an unfamiliar forest, and then when I started resting by a river, a pig human appeared.


    I didn¡¯t understand what I was supposed to do.


    ¡­Uhh¡­ But I did feel as if I had seen something like it before¡­ Uh, but where¡­


    ¡­Ah! In a game! They were pig-like monsters known as orcs!


    I didn¡¯t know much about games, but I had yed a few.


    Just the famous ones.


    ¡°Uh, huh? So it¡¯s an orc? Really!?¡±


    While I didn¡¯t know what forest this was, we were in Japan, right?


    But I had never heard of such a creature being discovered in Japan¡­


    There was a corner of my mind that thought of the light novels that a coworker had been reading recently, but I ignored it.


    It was just too unrealistic.


    ¡°Wooo¡­ Grrraau!¡±


    As I looked at the creature in confusion, Leo, who had been growling up until now, suddenly jumped at the orc.


    ¡°Grrauu! Grrrau!¡±


    ¡°Gyuuuoooo!¡±


    The ws on Leo¡¯s front paws shed through the orc, and then her fangs sunk into its throat.


    Leo was so fast but I had somehow managed to follow her movements. But it was too fast for me to react.


    ¡­Leo sure was strong¡­


    The creature that was likely an orc, let out a scream before falling to the ground. It stayed there, motionless.


    ¡°Graauuu. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Leo¡¯s tail wagged and then she looked at me with a proud expression before dragging her prey by its arm towards me.


    ¡°Wou! Wou!¡±


    ¡°Uh, you want me to eat it? This?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Leo nodded at my words.


    ¡­Uh. I did not like the idea of eating something humanoid that walked on two legs.


    Though, it did have the face of a pig, so maybe it was pork¡­


    Leo looked at me with expectant eyes.


    And I was hungry after all the walking in the forest.


    ¡°¡­If we could at least cook it.¡±


    ¡°Wou? Woou! Wuff!¡±


    Leo looked like she was thinking. And then she started to pick up fallen branches and bring them to me.


    ¡°You think we should make a fire?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    That being said, I had never made a fire without any tools before.


    But I didn¡¯t want to eat raw meat¡­ And that orc looked very filthy¡­


    I had no choice then. I would have to try it.


    While we were near a river, this was still a forest.


    And there was no signs of recent rain, so dried fallen branches were easy to find.


    And so Leo and I worked together to get as many branches we could get to make a fire.


    ¡°Now, the problem is whether or not I can light it¡­¡±


    From what I had seen on tv, you were supposed to rotate a branch on a wooden board¡­I think?


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    As I tried to think of a way to start a fire, Leo moved her face close to the pile of branches.


    ¡°Grauu!¡±


    She barked once, and a small me shot out from her mouth, and the branches caught on fire.


    ¡°¡­Leo? What did you do?¡±


    ¡°Wou? Wuff!¡±


    Leo looked a little smug.


    Ever since I had woken up, everything that happened seemed to be so removed from reality. I didn¡¯t even know where to start.


    There were so many questions swimming in my head, but I ignored them for now.


    The first thing to do was to eat.


    ¡°Leo. Could you cut it up with your ws or fangs?¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    Leo used the ws on her front paws to lightly sh the orc into thin strips.


    ¡°¡­I¡¯ll ept things as they are.¡±


    Perhaps this was enlightenment¡­


    That Leo had be bigger and was slicing up an orc. All these questions. I threw them into the endlessness of space.


    ¡°Thanks, Leo. I guess I¡¯ll cook it then.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    I lightly washed some of the thin branches in the river, and then skewered the meat with them.


    As they were dripping with blood, I washed them in the river as well before piercing them into the ground around the fire.


    I wanted to cook them like in a barbecue, but had to be careful so that the branches didn¡¯t burn.


    Though, I had no idea if the meat would actually taste good¡­


    I made several more of the meat skewers and ced them around the fire.


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    Leo looked quite happy as she watched the meat sizzle and cook.


    It will be ready soon. Just wait a little longer!


    A few minutester, I thought that it must be cooked through, and so I moved the meat away from the fire.


    It looked just like ordinary cooked pork to me.


    I gave the first one to Leo, and then grabbed a different one and started to eat it.


    ¡­The moment that it entered my mouth, I thought of the creature that had been standing there only a moment ago, and hesitated. However, my appetite won, and I ate it.


    ¡°Mogu¡­mogu¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­mosha¡­mosha¡­¡±


    It must have tasted good to her, as Leo tore into it greedily.


    ¡­It really did taste like normal pork.


    In fact, I would even say that it was good enough to be expensive pork.


    So in spite of appearances, it really did taste like a pig¡­


    ¡°Mogu¡­mogu¡­¡±


    However, I wish we had salt and pepper or other condiments¡­

 Chapter 4

    Chapter 4


    <em><strong>I Helped a Strange Woman</strong></em>


    Thanks to Leo, we had an unexpected meal.


    Now that my stomach was full, it was time to really start thinking about how I was going to get out of this forest.


    ¡°Leo. What should we do to leave this forest?¡±


    ¡°Wou? Wuff!¡±


    I didn¡¯t want to rely on Leo every time I needed help, but Leo had done so much today, so I couldn¡¯t help but be a little expectant.


    However, even she did not seem to know, as Leo just tilted her head to the side.


    ¡°¡­Hmm. Well, there¡¯s a river, so maybe we should just follow it.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Because if there was water, we at least didn¡¯t have to worry about getting thirsty.


    As for the remaining orc meat¡­ I didn¡¯t have a bag or anything, so I¡¯d just skewer what I could and carry it with me.


    Once I had finished preparations, I put out the fire with some river water, and then we started walking along the edge of the river.


    As the water was flowing, that meant it should be a slope. But it was so gentle that it didn¡¯t feel like we were climbing up.


    So this was likely just a forest and not a mountain.


    Being lost in a mountain seemed like it would be worse¡­I think.


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    Leo looked to be in a very good mood as she walked next to me.


    Was it because she had eaten so much?


    ¡°You¡¯ve be so strong, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I said as I recalled how she had killed the orc and then cut it into small pieces.


    Leo turned to look at me. There was something like pride in her expression.


    This was the same Leo that had been shaking and was so scared when I found her.


    I was in an unknown ce and encountered unknown creatures. But I felt confident because Leo was with me.


    Now that I thought about it, ever since I had rescued Leo, I never felt lonely.


    I thought that it was I who had rescued the abandoned Leo, but it was me who had been rescued¡­


    ¡°I¡¯ve said it many times before, but thanks, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wou? Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Leo tilted her head once and then barked. It was as if she was saying that we helped each other.


    This pleasant atmosphere continued as we walked for some time. And then suddenly, I noticed something while looking at the trees.


    ¡°The trees that grow in this forest¡­I¡¯ve never seen them before¡­¡±


    ¡°Wou?¡±


    It wasn¡¯t like I knew a lot about trees, but I knew what kind of trees grew in Japan.


    And I had never seen trees like this there.


    They weren¡¯t terribly strange or anything. But the shape of the leaves and the length of the branches were just different.


    Well, it was possible that they just happened to be a type of tree that I didn¡¯t know about¡­


    ¡°Surely we can¡¯t be in a ce that isn¡¯t Japan.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    It all felt like a bad joke to me.


    How could I wake up one morning and end up in a ce that was not Japan?


    Of course, suddenly waking up in the forest was already quite ridiculous enough. But I tried to not think about it.


    Leo¡¯s voice seemed to disagree, but I ignored it.


    But maybe I was just trying to escape from reality¡­


    ¡°¡­!¡±


    ¡°Hmm?¡±


    I thought that I heard something.


    ¡°¡­ka! ¡­ii!¡±


    ¡°!¡±


    It was a human voice!


    I could hear that someone was shouting up ahead!


    ¡°Let¡¯s go, Leo!¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    If it really was a normal person, then I might be able to ask them for directions.


    Thinking this, Leo and I dashed in the direction that we heard the voice.


    ¡­While I was running as fast as I could, Leo kept up with me with movements that were the same as when she walked.


    It was amazing¡­


    As for the meat I was holding, I threw it away before I started running.


    I had heard a human voice, so food wasn¡¯t a priority now¡­though¡­ That was my dinner¡­


    ¡°Someone! Please help me!¡±


    It was the voice of a woman.


    I could hear it more clearly now that we were closer.


    Something must have happened for her to need help in a ce like this.


    Had she gotten lost, just like me?


    If so, I wouldn¡¯t be able to ask for directions¡­


    In any case, we rushed to the ce where the voice came from.


    ¡°Ha¡­ Ha¡­ Ha¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I was getting out of breath while running, but Leo still seemed perfectly fine.


    I suppose it was because of ack of exercise that I was like this.


    ¡°Someone!¡±


    ¡°¡­That¡­¡±


    As we got closer to the area that the voice wasing from, what I saw was the back of an orc.


    And in front of the orc, was a woman who had fallen on the ground and was shouting for help.


    ¡­Blonde hair?


    She had pretty, long blonde hair which was rather unusual in Japan.


    The orc looked down at the screaming woman and raised its spear.


    ¡°She¡¯s in danger! Leo!¡±


    ¡°Gaau!!¡±


    Leo reacted immediately, and in a sh, she passed me as I ran and jumped on the orc.


    ¡°Graauu!¡±


    Leo barked and swung her ws. And like that, the orc was split into two.


    The orc wasn¡¯t even able to scream as the two pieces fell apart and sunk to the ground.


    ¡°Ha¡­ha¡­ha¡­ Leo¡­well done¡­ha¡­ha¡­¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    I finally reached Leo and praised her with a feeling of pride. Then I caught my breath and called out to the woman.


    ¡°¡­Ha¡­ha¡­are you all right?¡±


    ¡°¡­Uh¡­yes. ¡­Somehow¡­I¡¯m fine.¡±


    The woman who answered looked to be in her twenties. And her face was every bit as pretty as her golden hair.


    I felt that if she were to walk through town, every man would turn their head to look at her. That was how beautiful she was.


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Um¡­is something wrong?¡±


    ¡°¡­Ah. No, I¡¯m sorry. ¡­Are you hurt?¡±


    ¡°No.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    Damn it. She was so pretty that I had been staring.


    I hoped that she didn¡¯t think that I was a strange person.


    Leo. Don¡¯t look at me with that exasperated expression.


    ¡°Thank you for helping me. Uh¡­the Silver Fenrir that defeated the orc. Is it your familiar?¡±


    ¡°¡­Silver Fenrir? Familiar?¡±


    ¡°Wou?¡±


    For some reason, she was calling Leo a Silver Fenrir¡­ But Leo is a Maltese. Well, though she hardly resembled one now.


    Leo also looked puzzled.


    Were Fenrir those wolf monsters from games?


    And what is a familiar?


    ¡°Um¡­what is a familiar?¡±


    ¡°Huh? Well¡­it¡¯s a monster who obeys and works for you¡­¡±


    Monster¡­yes, monster¡­


    Had I been ying video games before falling asleep¡­?


    ¡°And what exactly are monsters?¡±


    ¡°¡­Huh? You don¡¯t know what monsters are!?¡±


    She looked at me with a shocked expression.


    Was it really so surprising?


    Did everyone know about them here?


    My idea of what wasmon knowledge was starting to copse¡­


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, I really don¡¯t know much about anything¡­ Could you possibly tell me?¡±


    ¡°¡­Ah¡­ Uh, monsters are creatures that appear in nature. No one knows why, but they just seem to appear. It is said that if left alone, they will breed in great numbers. Many, like the orcs, are known to attack indiscriminately, so you have to be very careful and avoid encountering them whening here.¡±


    ¡°Monsters that attack humans¡­huh.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±

 Chapter 5

    Chapter 5


    <em><strong>Leo Had Be A Silver Fenrir</strong></em>


    I looked at Leo.


    Leo looked back at me with a puzzled expression. She didn¡¯t look like she would attack anyone.


    It was true that her face was wild and fierce like a wolf now. And her body was much bigger. But there was no way that such a cute doggy would attack humans.


    In any case, it seemed like the monsters here were much like the ones from games and cartoons.


    ¡­I really must be dreaming then.


    The thought of light novels that I had been trying to ignore were resurfacing in my mind, but I pushed it away again.


    ¡°Uh, so¡­ What is a Silver Fenrir?¡±


    ¡°That monster over there. Is it not?¡±


    ¡°Huh? Well¡­I suppose, yes. A Silver Fenrir.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    I just decided to go along with it.


    Leo was a Maltese, but now that she had changed so much, she probably resembled these Silver Fenrir creatures.


    ¡°That is quite amazing. Having a Silver Fenrir as a familiar!¡±


    ¡°Oh? Is-is that right¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. It is said that they are the most powerful monsters and would never yield to humans. Many people have tried in the past, but I heard that none have ever been sessful. Besides, people cannot even hunt them. It is known that one must never get close to a Silver Fenrir!¡±


    ¡°¡­You¡¯re¡­the most powerful monster?¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    Leo looked quite proud of herself.


    I could not wrap my head around the idea of a Maltese being so powerful.


    ¡°It is said that a Silver Fenrir is faster than the wind, breathes fire, cuts through anything with their ws, and breaks anything with their fangs.¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡­Well, it is true that fire came out of her mouth a short while ago¡­


    And she had bitten into the orc and cut it up with her ws¡­


    Leo¡­were you not a Maltese after all? Are you a Silver Fenrir¡­?


    ¡°The shining silver fur of a Silver Fenrir is the symbol of their power. And it is even used on the crest of the royal family in this kingdom.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    ¡°Documents say that they can not only breathe fire, but can use all kinds of magic as well. But no one has ever seen it.¡±


    ¡°No one at all?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Besides, witnessing such a thing would mean facing a Silver Fenrir. There is no way that someone could survive such an encounter.¡±


    ¡°¡­But, I¡¯m standing right next to one¡­.¡±


    ¡°That is why this is so amazing! You have a Silver Fenrir familiar! This will go down in history!¡±


    ¡°¡­Uh¡­¡±


    I would go down in history just by being with Leo. What the hell¡­


    There was so much confusing informationing in that my head wasn¡¯t able to process it all.


    For now, I understood that Leo was very strong. But she was like a buddy I had lived with for so long.


    I didn¡¯t know anything about familiars, but I wasn¡¯t forcing her to obey me or anything.


    ¡°This is Leo. My buddy.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    I said, and then Leo licked my face happily.


    ¡°A Silver Fenrir is your buddy¡­ Who are you¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Just an average person?¡±


    ¡°You cannot be an average person if you are friends with a Silver Fenrir! You must be very famous!¡±


    ¡°No, I¡¯m really not anyone special¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­May I ask you what your name is?¡±


    ¡°Of course. My name is Takumi Hirooka.¡±


    ¡°Takumi¡­Hirooka¡­ No, I have not heard that name before¡­¡±


    ¡°Right? So I¡¯m not famous at all.¡±


    Indeed, she pronounced my name very oddly.


    And she had pretty blonde hair, so perhaps she was a foreigner?


    Now that I thought about it, I hadn¡¯t asked what her name was yet.


    ¡°I didn¡¯t catch your name yet. What is it?¡±


    ¡°¡­How rude of me. My name is ire Liebert. Thank you for helping me when I was in danger.¡±


    She took a step back, held the hems of her skirt and then curtsied.


    There was something about her that made me think she was ady of the upper ss.


    I had never seen such a perfect curtsy.


    But if we were talking about bowing heads to apologize to clients, I had done and witnessed it many times¡­


    ¡°¡­Is something wrong?¡±


    ¡°¡­Ah, no, not at all. It¡¯s nothing.¡±


    As she looked so beautiful while doing it, I could not help but stare in awe.


    ¡°Uh, Miss Liebert?¡±


    ¡°Please just call me ire, Sir Hirooka.¡±


    ¡°¡­Alright, ire. But then you must call me Takumi. And you don¡¯t need to call me sir.¡±


    ¡°Very well. Takumi.¡±


    So ire was her first name and Liebert was her family name.


    In other countries, the family name came after.


    And her name wasn¡¯t Japanese at all! So she was a foreigner!


    ¡°Uh, so, Miss ire¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, what is it?¡±


    ¡°Why are you in this forest?¡±


    ¡°I came here to gather some medicinal herbs. But it seems I wandered deep into the forest while searching for them. I was so preupied that I didn¡¯t realize¡­ And my horse ran away when the orc appeared.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    A horse¡­huh¡­


    Indeed, Miss ire would probably look very good riding on a horse¡­ But I was hoping for a car.


    ¡°And why are you here, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°¡­Hmm? That¡¯s what I would like to know.¡±


    ¡°Wou?¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    ¡°No, it¡¯s just that I was in this forest when I woke up. And I¡¯ve been wandering around and trying to get out.¡±


    ¡°¡­So you don¡¯t know why you¡¯re in the forest¡­ How can that be¡­?¡±


    ¡°I really don¡¯t know¡­¡±


    ¡°I¡­see¡­¡±


    In fact, I still suspected that this was all a dream.


    While pinching my cheeks had hurt, it wasn¡¯t enough of a confirmation that this was real.


    Come on. Wakeup!


    You have to wake up so that you can y with Leo!


    Huh? But they do say that dreams are a way of organizing memories¡­


    But I had never seen this beautiful person called ire before.


    Was it a wish? Desire?


    As I thought of such things, ire addressed me in a hesitant voice.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Would you mind if I made a request?¡±


    ¡°¡­What is it? If it is something that I can do, please don¡¯t hesitate to ask.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. I said that I came to this forest to search for herbs. Would you mind searching for them with me?¡±


    ¡°Herbs, huh? I don¡¯t know if I will be of much use, but I will go with you.¡±


    It must have been fate that brought us here.


    Besides, how could I refuse the request of someone so pretty?

 Chapter 6

    Chapter 6


    <em><strong>I Searched For Herbs</strong></em>


    ¡°You will!? Thank you so much. If you are with me, Mr. Takumi, then I won¡¯t be scared even if we¡¯re attacked by orcs again!¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. Well, I didn¡¯t do anything!¡±


    ¡°But I think it must be because of your power that Leo is with you.¡±


    ¡°¡­Hmm¡­ You think so?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    All I did was feel sorry that she had been abandoned on the side of the road. And so I had taken her home with me.


    But Leo was nodding her head as if she agreed¡­


    ¡­I was starting to get used to the idea that Leo understood words and couldmunicate with me.


    ¡°What kind of herbs were you looking for?¡±


    ¡°They are called Ramogi. They look like¡­¡±


    And so Ms. ire told us what they looked like, and Leo and I started searching for them.


    I had thought it when she exined it to us, but perhaps she was talking about artemisia capiries.


    It was said that they grew near rivers and could help lower a fever.


    However, Ms. ire called it Ramogi, so maybe it was different.


    She said that her younger sister had be ill and bed-ridden. And a doctor had told her that a herb in this forest that would help with her symptoms.


    That being said, I was pretty sure that you could just go to a drug store and buy something for a fever¡­


    But since Ms. ire said that she wanted to search for it, I would go along with her.


    ¡°There doesn¡¯t seem to be any here¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­But I heard that they grew around this river.¡±


    ¡°Wou! Wou! Wuff!¡±


    Leo must have be bored of searching, as she was now ying in the river.


    And since Leo was so big, searching for small nts didn¡¯t really suit her.


    It did cross my mind that a dog might be able to use their sense of smell¡­but then again, she couldn¡¯t search for something if she didn¡¯t know what it smelled like.


    And so it was best for Leo to y on her own for now.


    I had never been able to take her to a river like this before.


    However¡­we had been searching for awhile now, but we were not able to find any nts that matched her description.


    I looked down as I walked and squated every time I saw something simr. But since I wasn¡¯t used to this kind of work, my back was starting to hurt a little.


    ¡°Hmm¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Hmm¡­¡±


    I arched my back in order to stretch, and then saw that Ms. ire was doing the same.


    Her back must be hurting as well.


    It¡¯s what happened when you did something you weren¡¯t used to.


    After stretching, our eyes met and we chuckled before returning to our work of searching for the Ramogi.


    ¡°¡­I can¡¯t find any.¡±


    I was walking down the river while searching for them, but since this was proving to be fruitless, I decided to sit down and rest for a while.


    As my hands touched the ground and I slowly lowered myself, I thought once again about the features of the Ramogi.


    The stem was hard like wood, its leaves were covered in fluff, making it look white. You were supposed to pick the flower directly from the stem and use it for medicine¡­


    ¡°Hmm?¡±


    I looked at my hand which was on the ground. Between my fingers, I saw a nt that matched the description of the Ramogi I had been searching for.


    Five of them had sprouted from the ground and started to grow. As I sat there in shock, flowers began to bloom from the nts, which looked like small trees.


    ¡°¡­What is happening¡­?¡±


    This shouldn¡¯t be possible. A nt had sprouted and suddenly grown right in front of me¡­


    And yet I knew what I had seen.


    Yes, this must be a dream.


    But this was not the time for that. I had to go and tell Ms. ire.


    ¡°Ms. ire! I¡¯ve found some Ramogi!¡±


    ¡°Really!?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!?¡±


    I shouted, and then Ms. ire, who had been searching a short distance away, came running.


    Leo also came out of the river, and ran towards me while shaking the water from her fur.


    ¡°It¡¯s this, isn¡¯t it?¡±


    As Ms. ire approached me, I pointed at the Ramogi.


    ¡°¡­Yes. There is no doubt about it.¡±


    ¡°So we¡¯ve finally found it.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Thanks to you, Mr. Takumi. I am so grateful!¡±


    ¡°No, not at all. It¡¯s because you searched so hard for it.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Ms. ire was thanking me with great emotion, but we had to pick the flowers from the Ramogi first.


    And so Ms. ire and I picked the flowers from all five of the Ramogi stems.


    Ms. ire carefully put them into a leather bag and then bowed once again.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, thank you so much for your help. Thanks to you, I was able to find the Ramogi that I came here for.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha, it¡¯s nothing. I¡¯m just d that I was able to be of help.¡±


    ¡°Now, I must take this Ramogi and return at once. But¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm?¡±


    ¡°My horse ran away after the orc attacked me¡­¡±


    ¡°Ahh¡­ So, I suppose you¡¯ll have to walk?¡±


    ¡°I have no choice¡­ But I want to return as soon as possible¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, there¡¯s no point in worrying about what you can¡¯t change.¡±


    ¡°¡­That is true.¡±


    ¡°Wou? Wou! Wou!¡±


    ¡°Hm? What is it, Leo?¡±


    Leo started barking suddenly, and then she sat down with her back towards me and Ms. ire.


    Did she want us to ride on top?


    ¡°Leo. Are you going to carry us?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    But could she really carry people¡­


    Well, her back did look big enough to carry four or five people.


    ¡°Ms. ire. Would you like to ride on Leo?¡±


    ¡°¡­On a Silver Fenrir¡­ Are you sure?¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    Leo barked as if to say that it was fine.


    ire seemed to make a decision upon hearing this. She gulped once and then bowed again.


    ¡°¡­If you don¡¯t mind, great Leo, I would be honored to.¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    And so it was decided that we would ride on Leo.


    First, I got onto Leo¡¯s back and held onto her neck.


    ¡­But I had no experience riding horses or any other living creatures.


    Judging from what I had seen up until now, Leo was capable of running with tremendous speed, and so I would have to hold on tight if I didn¡¯t want to get shaken off.


    ire then followed me and got onto Leo¡¯s back.


    As she leaned forward and held onto me, I could feel her chest press into my back, and my face grew hot.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°N-not at all. It¡¯s fine. Let¡¯s just go like this!¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    ¡°Wou? Wuff!¡±


    Ms. ire didn¡¯t seem to mind.


    I was the one that felt shaken and a little embarrassed.


    Leo barked as if to say, ¡®Are you on? Then let¡¯s go,¡¯ and she started running.


    ¡­Huh? Wait a minute.


    ¡°Leo. Do you even know where to go?¡±


    ¡°¡­Wou.¡±


    Apparently, not. She stopped immediately and looked a little disheartened.


    So she had gotten carried away with excitement.


    If you don¡¯t know your destination and the direction you¡¯re headed in, who knows what ce you would end up?

 Chapter 7

    Chapter 7


    <em><strong>Ms. ire Lived in a Luxurious Mansion</strong></em>


    ¡°¡­Ms. ire, please show us the way.¡±


    ¡°Very well. Hehe. Your Leo is quite cute.¡±


    ¡°Haha. She can sometimes be a little careless, which is adorable.¡±


    ¡°Wou! Wou!¡±


    Perhaps she was bashful or embarrassed. Leo raised her voice in protest, but Ms. ire and I just watched her and smiled.


    After that, under Ms. ire¡¯s guidance, Leo was able to run through and out of the forest in just ten minutes.


    Perhaps if I had just rode Leo and made her run in a straight line, we would have been able to get out easily¡­


    Well, we wouldn¡¯t have been able to help Ms. ire if we did that, so I wouldn¡¯t think about it now.


    In the first ce, I could hardly understand how Leo was able to weave through the trees at a speed that rivaled cars on a highway. And so I just decided to not think about things that I couldn¡¯t understand.


    ¡°Turn right here. There will be a road up ahead, and you just need to go straight down it.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    As Ms. ire gave the order, Leo changed directions and kept running.


    I hadn¡¯t talked at all this whole time.


    Why didn¡¯t I talk?


    It wasn¡¯t that I couldn¡¯t talk because Leo was so fast.


    The reason was the view that I could see from Leo¡¯s back.


    Because of what I started to see after exiting the forest.


    Aside from the forest that we were in, there was nothing else as far as the eye could see.


    There were some trees in the distance, but it was mostly just a vast in.


    Leo was running on a road that looked like it was made of sand. But did such a ce exist in Japan?


    These days, even the countryside have proper asphalt roads.


    I haven¡¯t seen a road made of sand since I went mountain climbing as a child.


    ¡°¡­What is this ce?¡±


    I muttered under my breath so that Leo and Ms. ire would not hear me.


    How could there be nothing at all as far as I could see?


    Even the horizon was visible in the distance¡­


    ¡­Am I really not in Japan then¡­


    The stories from light novels that I had been trying to ignore came back again.


    If this isn¡¯t a dream, could it be that¡­that this ce is¡­another world¡­?


    I went to sleep and woke up in another world¡­who would believe such a thing¡­


    And Leo hade with me as well¡­


    Half a day had passed since I came here, but I showed no signs of waking up.


    This might not be a dream¡­the idea was bing more stronger.


    Uh¡­so if this is actually real¡­then ording to the light novels, this is¡­what was it again¡­another world¡­transfer¡­?


    So that¡¯s what happened to me?


    Then do I have a cheat? Or is that Leo?


    Haha. I don¡¯t care what happens anymore.


    It was too confusing to think about, and so I stopped.


    It¡¯s one of those things. If you think about it, you lose¡­ My coworker used to say that all of the time.


    ¡°Good Leo, we¡¯re almost there. Please stop at that house up ahead.¡±


    I stopped thinking as I heard Ms. ire¡¯s voice came from behind me, and I looked up ahead.


    I then saw the building that was our destination.


    Ah, there was something about seeing a man-made building that was reassuring to me. Up until now, all I had seen was natural things like trees, rivers and grass.


    Still, that building was quite small¡­ Hmm, what? It keeps getting bigger.


    The closer we got, therger the building looked.


    So I had only thought it was small because we were still far away¡­


    ¡°¡­Is that a mansion?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s a vi. I¡¯m afraid it is not very luxurious.¡±


    ire corrected me from behind. But it looked more than impressive to me.


    Yes, she must really be the daughter of some noble family.


    It was no wonder that her curtsy was so pretty.


    And this great mansion was just a vi¡­ Some people seemed to have all the money.


    Even now, Leo was running towards the building at top speed.


    As we got closer, I saw not just the building, but a wall made of reddish brown bricks.


    It was quite high for a wall around your house¡­


    ¡°Good Leo, please stop in front of that gate.¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    A grand gate came into view.


    I saw that there were four people with spears and heavy armor standing in front of the gate¡­would everything be okay?


    When the people saw that Leo was running towards them, they pointed their spears at us.


    But Leo didn¡¯t seem to care as she stopped right in front of the gate.


    The spear wielders stood in a line as if to guard the entrance.


    ¡°Lower your spears. It is just me.¡±


    ¡°¡­L-Lady ire! You are safe!¡±


    When Ms. ire called out to them, one of them raised his voice in surprise.


    ¡°Lady ire¡­this monster is¡­¡±


    ¡°An important guest. Please be polite.¡±


    ¡°Yes, mydy!¡±


    The four guards lowered their spears and opened the gate.


    I thought we would go through then, but Ms. ire dismounted from Leo first, and so I followed her lead.


    ¡­Still, the ride with Ms. ire had been a happy one while itsted¡­


    Hey, Leo. Don¡¯t give me that look.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Let¡¯s go.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    And so we followed Ms. ire through the gates.


    Though, I did feel a little intimidated as two guards stood on each side and red at us.


    Passing the gates, there was a stone-paved path that led to the big mansion. And around it were carefully tended nts and flowers. It was like some kind of garden.


    Once we were at the midway point of the path, the mansion doors flung open and out flew a middle aged man with white hair.


    ¡­What was going on?


    ¡°Lady ire! I am so d to see you back safely! I wasn¡¯t sure how I would be able to tell the master if something happened to you! Are you not hurt?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry to have caused you to worry, Sebastian. But I am fine¡­ As you can see, I¡¯m not injured at all. Mr. Takumi saved me.¡±


    ¡°Oh, so you helped our Lady ire. I am truly grateful. Am Sebastian, the butler of the Liebert household. On behalf of my master, I thank you.¡±


    ¡°Well, I just happened to be passing by¡­¡±


    While Sebastian was bowing politely and thanking me, I felt as if I hadn¡¯t really done anything.


    It was Leo who saved her.


    Also, his name was Sebastian¡­ It was like he was born to be a butler.


    Or maybe it was just a coincidence¡­


    ¡°Now Sebastian, how is Tilura?¡±


    ¡°¡­She is the same as when you left. Her fever is high, and she remains in bed.¡±


    ¡°I see. So we really do need the medicine.¡±


    ¡°But currently, the necessary medicine for Tilura¡¯s ailment cannot be found here or in the neighboring town.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s why I went to the forest. Though, it was quite dangerous, and I was attacked by orcs. Thankfully, Mr. Takumi rescued me.¡±

 Chapter 8

    Chapter 8


    <em><strong>I Was Invited to the Mansion</strong></em>


    ¡°My goodness¡­an orc¡­Mr. Takumi, I cannot thank you enough. I did not know what to do when Lady ire left the mansion in order to get some medicine¡­ It was only now that I started to put together a team of men to send to the forest.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha¡­ But I really didn¡¯t do much. Besides, it was Leo here who saved her.¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    He kept thanking me, but I really didn¡¯t do anything.


    I just found Ms. ire as we were trying to get out of the forest, that¡¯s all.


    And it was Leo who defeated the orc.


    Leo looked proud as I petted her. And then I exined everything to Sebastian.


    ¡°So you used your familiar to save Lady ire. But this familiar¡­sure it is not¡­¡±


    ¡°Sebastian. I saw it cut an orc open with my own eyes. There is no doubt in my mind that such a thing is only possible because Leo is a Silver Fenrir.¡±


    ¡°I thought so, judging from its appearance. So it really is a Silver Fenrir¡­I did know about them from reading, but I never thought the day woulde where I could see one with my own eyes.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I never thought that I would see one either.¡±


    ¡°The Silver Fenrir is a symbol of this country, an absolutely invible being. I can hardly believe that there is someone who can control one as a familiar¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­No¡­I wouldn¡¯t say control. I just rescued her a few years ago¡­ While she has really taken to me, she isn¡¯t a familiar or anything. I think of her as a buddy.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°¡­Rescue a Silver Fenrir¡­how can that be¡­¡±


    After hearing my words, Leo pushed her face towards me again, and so I patted her head.


    However, to Sebastian, me calling her my buddy was not as surprising as the fact that I had rescued her.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Silver Fenrir are known to take good care of their family. Usually a parent would be near a Silver Fenrir pup, so rescuing one would have to be a very rare urrence.¡±


    ¡°¡­Is that so¡­¡±


    Well, she was actually a Maltese, not a Silver Fenrir.


    I had just seen her abandoned inside of a cardboard box on the side of the road.


    There were no dogs around that could have been a parent. My guess was that the newborn pup could not be raised for some reason, and so they had left her there.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. How did you ever manage to¡­¡±


    ¡°You should talk with Mr. Takumi about itter, when there is time. Tilura muste first. Her fever has not broken, yes? But Mr. Takumi has found some Ramogi. We should be able to heal Tilura with it.¡±


    ¡°So you have even found some Ramogi. I do not know how to express my gratitude.¡±


    ¡°In any case, there is no point in standing here talking. So let us go inside.¡±


    ¡°Of course, forgive me. Mr. Takumi, wee to the Liebert family vi. I and all the servants of the house will be d to receive you.¡±


    Sebastian said with a bow, and then he opened the doors wide and urged us to enter.


    Ms. ire entered without concern, as it was her own house that she was familiar with. Leo also followed after her with a leisurely stride.


    But I had never been in such a fancy mansion before. I didn¡¯t know what it was like to be received by butlers and servants. Would my manners be alright¡­


    I tried to prevent it from showing, but inside, I was feeling very nervous as I stepped into the mansion.


    ¡°Wee home, Lady ire!¡±


    As soon as we entered the entrance hall, we were greeted by the maids and other butlers.


    This was even more overwhelming than the building itself.


    Sebastian had said that there were other servants, but I didn¡¯t expect there to be this many¡­


    There were around twenty of them.


    ¡°Thank you. Sebastian, I¡¯ll leave the Ramogi to you.¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    ¡°Our guests are the ones who saved me. Please treat them courteously.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    Ms. ire carefully took out the Ramogi and handed it to Sebastian, before calling out to the other servants.


    The servants replied, and then most of them scattered off in different directions.


    Then the two remaining maids walked up to me.


    ¡°Thank you for helping our Lady ire. It is my job to take care of visitors. My name is Lyra.¡±


    ¡°I will also attend to your needs. My name is Gelda.¡±


    ¡°¡­Ah¡­ Thank you.¡±


    I had never met a maid before, and so I didn¡¯t know how to react.


    Perhaps I should have gone to a maid cafe at least once.


    While meeting the servants was overwhelming, the entrance hall was as well.


    While there had been over twenty people here a moment ago, it was so big that it hadn¡¯t felt crowded. A red carpet stretched out from the entrance, through the hall and then up some stairs.


    I felt like I had seen such an entrance hall before¡­


    Ah, that¡¯s what it was frome.


    A certain horror game where you used guns to shoot zombies.


    I had tried it once, after a friend rmended it to me. But I disliked the genre, and I didn¡¯t have time due to work, and so I never finished it.


    Well, if I had enough time to y games, then I would rather use that time to y with Leo.


    Though this entrance hall looked very simr, being filled with people ensured that the atmosphere was less scary.


    If anything, there was a certain warmth to it.


    Perhaps it was because the maids and butlers had such cheerful expressions?


    That being said, I would still want to avoiding out into this hall in the middle of the night where there was no one else there¡­


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, I must go and see Tilura¡­my younger sister.¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course.¡±


    ¡°Lyra, Gelda. See to it that our guests are properly attended to.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Lady ire.¡±


    ¡°I will do my best!¡±


    And so Ms. ire left us and went up the stairs.


    She must be very worried about her sister. What a kind person.


    Lyra had long ck hair and was very pretty. Gelda had short brown hair and a freckled face that looked tense and nervous.


    But I wish that she wouldn¡¯t be. I would not mind at all if they treated me carelessly.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Please follow us to the guest room. It¡¯s right this way.¡±


    ¡°Pleasee with us!¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­uh. Can Leoe with us?¡±


    ¡°Yes. The room is more than big enough.¡±


    ¡°It will be fine!¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s good. Alright, then please lead the way.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±

 Chapter 9

    Chapter 9


    <em><strong>I Talked to the Maids in the Guest Room</strong></em>


    The two maids led the way, and so Leo and I arrived at the guest room.


    The room was indeed quiterge. I thought that over ten people could fit in there and remain quitefortable.


    And that light that hung down from the ceiling¡­was it a chandelier? I had never seen one before.


    It must be very hard to light candles so high up¡­


    ¡°Well then, I will go and prepare some tea, so please wait for a while. ¡­Oh, what should I bring for the great Leo¡­?¡±


    ¡°Ah, Leo¡­Water or milk, please.¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    ¡°It won¡¯t take long!¡±


    ¡°Please don¡¯t rush¡­¡±


    The maids bowed and then left the room. I suppose it was my Japanese nature to say something like ¡®please don¡¯t rush¡¯ during times like this.


    I had seen Ms. Gelda smile a little just before the door closed.


    Well, she had been very nervous at first, so if she was rxed now, that was good.


    As standing there seemed awkward, I walked up to the table in the middle of the room and sat down on one of the chairs.


    Leo followed me and theny down next to the chair.


    It was nice to see that she was rxed. If Leo wasn¡¯t on her guard, that must mean that there was nothing dangerous here.


    She had detected the orc, after all.


    Well, I highly doubted someone like Ms. ire would put her rescuers in harm¡¯s way after inviting them to her house.


    Still¡­


    I was in an unfamiliar ce. And the idea that this was another world made me feel just a little cautious.


    ¡­Though, I also still thought that this could all be a dream.


    ¡°Wou?¡±


    ¡°Maybe it¡¯s not a dream. But I still find it difficult to believe that you¡¯ve be this big, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Leo. Do you want to y?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I petted Leo, who barked as if she wanted to y. And so I looked around the room.


    ¡°¡­I don¡¯t think this is the best ce for that.¡±


    ¡°¡­Wuff.¡±


    Leo was big enough for several people to ride on her back.


    While she was lying down and looking up at me now, I would be the one looking up at her if she stood up.


    It was a good thing that this mansion was sorge¡­


    Or there wouldn¡¯t have been enough space for Leo to get in at all.


    That being said, even though it was big, it wasn¡¯t big enough for Leo to run or y in.


    ¡­I suppose I could take her out to the gardenter.


    However¡­judging from what I had seen while walking from the gate to the entrance, it was a resplendent garden, so I¡¯d have to be careful that she didn¡¯t break anything.


    I thought of such things while scratching Leo¡¯s head. Then there was a knock on the door and then it opened.


    ¡°Excuse me. I¡¯ve brought you the tea.¡±


    ¡°We did!¡±


    Ms. Lyra bowed while carrying a tray with a white teacup on top.


    Ms. Gelda looked a little nervous again.


    ¡°Enjoy.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    She walked up to me and ced the cup on the table.


    Ms. Gelda was carrying a bowl of milk that was the size of a bucket.


    She nervously ced it in front of Leo.


    ¡­Indeed. Leo did have the appearance of a frightening wolf.


    So it was no wonder that she was afraid.


    ¡°Leo. Say thank you before drinking.¡±


    ¡°Wou! ¡­Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Leo barked once as if to reply to me, and then she turned to Ms. Gelda and barked again.


    That was Leo¡¯s way of saying thank you.


    While Ms. Gelda flinched after being barked at, she quickly understood what Leo meant by it. And so she muttered, ¡®enjoy.¡¯


    Leo then started to drink the milk hungrily, and so I took a sip of the tea as well.


    ¡°¡­Mmm. It¡¯s very good.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°¡­Thank you.¡±


    Leo seemed to approve of the milk as well.


    The tea was so delicious that I drank it all very quickly.


    Leo had been drinking vigorously, but I suppose I had not been any different.


    They say that dogs take after their owners. Perhaps it was true.


    ¡­I was a little embarrassed.


    ¡°Would you like another cup?¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes, please.¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    She picked up the teapot and filled my cup once again.


    The fragrance of the tea wafted around me.


    I hadn¡¯t really thought about it, but was this ck tea?


    I didn¡¯t know much about tea, and had only drunk ck tea from cans and bottles.


    But this was much more refreshing in terms of taste and smell.


    While I was enjoying my tea, I was also a little anxious about the way that Ms. Gelda seemed to be terrified of Leo.


    While it couldn¡¯t be helped for her to be scared at first, I was sure that she would change her mind if I talked to her.


    ¡°¡­Ms. Gelda, right?¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°You really don¡¯t need to be afraid. Leo won¡¯t attack humans.¡±


    ¡°¡­I¡¯m sorry.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m terribly sorry, Mr. Takumi. Gelda, you mustn¡¯t show your emotions like that in front of a guest!¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    ¡°No, no, it¡¯s fine. I¡¯m really not upset or anything like that. I do agree that Leo can be frightening to look at. I understand why women may be afraid.¡±


    ¡°And yet I think that your Leo is very adorable.¡±


    ¡°Is that right?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Leo follows you so closely and seems to be very protective. He was also barking very quietly as if to avoid scaring Gelda. I think that it is rather cute for someone of that size to behave in such a way.¡±


    ¡°Hahah. That¡¯s true. But Leo is a girl. And overall, she is cuter than she is scary.¡±


    ¡°¡­So she is a girl.¡±


    Apparently, Ms. Lyra found Leo¡¯s movements very cute.


    Ms. Gelda was very surprised to hear that Leo was female.


    ¡°She is a cute girl, just like you, Ms. Gelda. So if possible, please don¡¯t be afraid of her.¡±


    ¡°¡­I¡¯m cute¡­ ha¡­ha¡­I understand!¡±


    ¡°Hehe. You are quite the tterer, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°No, I just said what was on my mind.¡±


    Ms. Gelda was constantly nervous, just like someone who was new to a job. And yet she tried her best. I thought that was endearing.


    Well, it wasn¡¯t just her personality, though¡­ Now that I thought about it, it wasn¡¯t just Ms. ire, but the maids had all been attractive¡­ Even Sebastian, who was an older man, had been a handsome gentleman. As were the other butlers¡­


    ¡­It made me feel a little out of ce, being the only one with such in looks.


    ¡°Wou¡­wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°What is it Leo? Are you trying tofort me?¡±


    ¡°Wou-wou!¡±


    Leo must have noticed that I looked a little crestfallen, and so she pressed her face against mine consolingly.


    Thanks, Leo.


    But maybe don¡¯t lick my face right afterpping up so much milk¡­


    I took out a handkerchief from my pocket and wiped my face with it.


    Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda smiled as if this was a heartwarming moment, and I felt a little embarrassed.

 Chapter 10

    Chapter 10


    <em><strong>I Finally Decided to ept That This Is Another World</strong></em>


    ¡°Ah, by the way, Ms. Lyra.¡±


    ¡°Yes, what is it?¡±


    ¡°Are there any wide open spaces in the garden? It doesn¡¯t have to be right now, but I want to let Leo y outside.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ In that case, there is a lot of space behind the mansion. Leo should be able to y there. I will show you where it ister.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Did you hear that, Leo? There is a ce for you to y.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff-wuff!¡±


    Leo wagged her tail happily.


    Ahh, please wag your tail a little more slowly, Leo.


    She was wagging her huge tail so vigorously, that Ms. Gelda¡¯s skirt nearly blew upwards, much to her embarrassment.


    I turned my head away, just in case.


    Just then, there was another knock on the door.


    Ms. Lyra went over to the door and opened it, and then Ms. ire and Sebastian walked it.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry to keep you waiting, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Ms. ire. Please don¡¯t be. I was just enjoying this delicious tea.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m d to hear it.¡±


    She replied cheerfully and then sat down on the opposite side of the table.


    Sebastian immediately prepared a cup for her and Ms. Lyra poured the tea.


    ¡°Ms. ire. How was your sister?¡±


    ¡°Yes. As Sebastian said earlier, nothing has changed since I headed out to the forest. However, the Ramogi that you found is being prepared to turn into medicine. I think that she should improve as soon as she takes it.¡±


    ¡°I see. I do hope that she recovers quickly.¡±


    ¡°Yes. And it is all thanks to you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. I barely did anything. I feel like I¡¯ve been taking too much credit recently.¡±


    ¡°¡­Is that so? Very well. I will stop thanking you then.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    Both Ms. ire and Sebastian had thanked me many times already.


    And since I felt that I hadn¡¯t done anything, it didn¡¯t feel right to keep hearing it.


    ¡°So, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes?¡±


    ¡°If it is not too much trouble, could you tell me where you are from?¡±


    ¡°Where I¡¯m¡­from?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I know that you are not a bad person. You saved me and found the Ramogi. However, you knew nothing about familiars or Silver Fenrirs. You don¡¯t even know about monsters.¡±


    ¡°¡­That¡¯s true.¡±


    ¡°But everyone who lives in this country knows about monsters and Silver Fenrirs. And so I must assume that you are not from this country.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Well, there was a lot that I didn¡¯t know.


    So it wasn¡¯t surprising that they would be suspicious.


    Of course, it would make sense if this really was another world.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, Mr. Takumi. You don¡¯t have to exin if you don¡¯t want to. You helped me, and that is enough. And so you will be wee here.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t need to tell you?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Some people have things that they can¡¯t talk about. Besides, it¡¯s merely curiosity that led me to ask you. It¡¯s not something that is terribly important.¡±


    ¡°Curiosity?¡±


    ¡°Yes. You said that you woke up in that forest. That is not something that seems very possible. However, you were with a Silver Fenrir, who makes the impossible possible, and you two are close. And there is one other thing¡­ I have never seen your garments before.¡±


    ¡°Ah, this?¡±


    I looked down at my clothes.


    As I was so tired, I hadn¡¯t even changed my clothes after returning from work. So I was still wearing a dress shirt and cks.


    I wasn¡¯t wearing my suit jacket because I had taken it off before eating dinner.


    ¡°I asked Sebastian, and he too says that he has never seen them before.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I have never seen such clothing in my line of work.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    They had never seen a dress shirt and cks¡­this really wasn¡¯t Japan.


    Not only that, but could there be any country in the world where rtively wealthy people had never seen this clothing?


    Part of me thought, ¡®I knew it!¡¯ and the other thought, ¡®there is no way.¡¯


    However, at this point, I was closer to believing it.


    ¡°You wear unfamiliar garments and have a Silver Fenrir obey you. Yes, I am terribly curious about what kind of person you are, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­¡±


    Ms. ire chuckled after saying this, and there was something very appealing about it.


    And what man wouldn¡¯t be defeated after she expressed having such an interest in them?


    Well, it wasn¡¯t even something to hide. And so I would talk about myself¡­ Though, I wasn¡¯t sure if they would believe me¡­


    Ms. ire looked like a trustworthy person, so I doubted she would look at me strangely if I told her¡­I hope.


    And so I stopped rejecting the idea that this was another world, and decided to ept it.


    ¡°Let me see¡­ You may not believe what I have to say¡­¡±


    ¡°We are looking at a Silver Fenrir that obeys you calmly. Nothing can surprise me now.¡±


    ¡°Is that so? Then I will tell you.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°First, as I said before, I had fallen asleep and then woke up in that forest.¡±


    ¡°Yes, you did say that. So you were moved to that forest while you slept¡­ For what purpose?¡±


    ¡°¡­Abduction¡­? ¡­No, Surely the great Leo would not allow that. ¡­Oh, pardon me. Please continue.¡±


    Mr. Sebastian seemed to think I might have been abducted, but there was no reason anyone would want to abduct me to begin with.


    I couldn¡¯t pay any ransom. I was just a man tired of his job.


    And since Leo was actually a Maltese, she could be restrained easily if they wanted to.


    Well, it was safe to say that it wasn¡¯t abduction.


    So, why was I in the forest? I really did not know the answer¡­

 Chapter 11

    Chapter 11


    <strong>I Talked About Coming From Another World</strong>


    ¡°There was something that really surprised me when I woke up in the forest.¡±


    ¡°¡­What was it?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­that Leo had suddenly grown very big.¡±


    ¡°What? But she is a Silver Fenrir. Surely it¡¯s only natural that she would be so big?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t really know anything about these Silver Fenrirs, but Leo was originally a dog that was small enough for me to carry.¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    It wasn¡¯t just Ms. ire and Sebastian. Even Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda, who were listening in the same room, looked at Leo with suspicious expressions.


    Now that all eyes were on her, Leo tilted her head in puzzlement.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Is it really true that Leo became bigger?¡±


    ¡°Yes, it is. I rescued her a few years ago after she had been abandoned¡­ Even as an adult, she was small enough for me to carry her.¡±


    ¡°Perhaps you were raising a Silver Fenrir pup all along, and it just grew up?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Well, you did say previously that Silver Fenrirs care deeply and would never abandon a pup. But she was definitely abandoned when I found her, and there were no signs of any parent in the area.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    ¡°And so my own conclusion is that I never raised or tamed a Silver Fenrir, but my dog somehow changed into a Silver Fenrir.¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed. So she was not originally a Silver Fenrir.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°But I¡¯ve never heard any stories about small animals transforming into Silver Fenrirs.¡±


    ¡°About that¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes?¡±


    The rest was a lot more difficult to talk about.


    Not only were they unlikely to believe me, but I didn¡¯t fully believe it myself.


    But I had already said so much, and there was no going back now.


    ¡°I think that I probably came from another world.¡±


    ¡°¡­Another world?¡±


    ¡°Yes. A world different from this one. Ever since I appeared in that forest, I¡¯ve seen so many things that are unfamiliar to me. And that includes Leo after turning into a Silver Fenrir. In my world, orcs are creatures that only appear in story books.¡±


    ¡°So that¡¯s why you didn¡¯t know about monsters. Those who live in this country¡­ No¡­to borrow your words, Mr. Takumi, those from this world., know about monsters and orcs. Even children. ¡­Another world¡­I see¡­¡±


    ¡°I know that it is difficult to believe. I still have my doubts about it.¡±


    ¡°Is that so?¡±


    ¡°Yes. What if I am just sleeping, and this is all a dream?¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, I¡¯ve done so much here and still haven¡¯t managed to wake up. And it¡¯s odd that I should meet someone like you, Ms. ire, who I have never met before. And so it¡¯s bing increasingly difficult for me to deny it.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I am quite sure that this isn¡¯t a dream.¡±


    ¡°But¡­if this isn¡¯t a dream, then the only other exnation is that this is another world.¡±


    Seeing monsters, meeting a beautiful woman, Leo growing so big¡­ If this wasn¡¯t a dream, then it had to be another world.


    ¡­Surely there was no other exnation?


    ¡°And in my world, there were lots of stories about people who were transferred to other worlds. And more often than not, they would gain special powers.¡±


    ¡°Special powers¡­¡±


    At least, it had been the case with the light novels that my coworker showed me.


    I think they were called cheats? And with these abilities, they would be the strongest person in the world.


    Such stories were also depicted in cartoons andics.


    I didn¡¯t know a lot about them, but they too generally showed the protagonist gaining some kind of power.


    ¡°And so I¡¯m starting to think that the special power was Leo¡¯s transformation.¡±


    ¡°Leo¡­¡±


    ¡°While Leo was originally a small dog, she gained a special power in this world that turned her into a Silver Fenrir¡­that is my guess.¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s possible that Leo somehow got wrapped up in mying here. So perhaps this was something that she never wanted.¡±


    ¡°¡­Wuff¡­wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Hey, Leo. Stop that. You aren¡¯t angry about it? Alright, I get it.¡±


    Leo seemed to be reacting to what I said, as she started to lick my face.


    It was like she was saying that she was never troubled by having to be with me.


    I felt as if I was able to understand her a lot better aftering to this world.


    Well, I also felt that Leo understood me better as well. So the change might have affected both of us.


    I made her stop licking me and patted her on the head as she calmed down.


    ¡°Lady ire, what he just said is¡­¡±


    ¡°Sebastian. I do understand that it¡¯s a fantastical and unbelievable story. But¡­I am going to believe what Mr. Takumi says.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see. If that is how you feel, Lady ire, then I have nothing to say. ¡­Besides, you have always had an eye for judging a person¡¯s character.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°I also think that you are a good judge of character. You chose all of the servants of this household yourself, and they have done their work brilliantly.¡±


    ¡°I was hired to work here because of you, Lady ire. And I will continue to work hard so that you won¡¯t regret the decision!¡±


    ¡°Lyra, Gelda¡­ Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Hehe. Does Leo trust me too then? Thank you.¡±


    It was clear that everyone present had a high opinion of Ms. ire.


    And since she had left the mansion in order to find medicine for her sister, she must be verypassionate.


    I watched this disy of trust with a smile.


    It was good when employees and employers trusted each other. In my workce, superiors forced us to do more work than we could handle, and so people would talk angrily about them behind their backs¡­

 Chapter 12

    Chapter 12


    <strong>I Was Able to Dry the Ramogi</strong>


    ¡°Now, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes?¡±


    ¡°If what you say is true, then you have no one here to rely on or help you?¡±


    ¡°That is right. The only people who I am acquainted with in this world are the people in this very room right now.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. In that case, why don¡¯t you stay with us in this mansion for a while? While I may have offered you words of gratitude, I have not been able to do anything else yet.¡±


    ¡°You really don¡¯t have to do anything. But, are you sure that I can stay here?¡±


    ¡°For as long as you wish, Mr. Takumi. Besides, I¡¯m certain that my sister, Tilura, will want to thank you when she is recovered.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Well, while I don¡¯t know how long it will take for me to be able to live independently in this world, I would like to stay here until then. Thank you for having me.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Sebastian. Lyra, Gelda. You heard it, didn¡¯t you? Mr. Takumi is to be my guest here. Please see to it that he is madefortable. Also, prepare a room for him at once.¡±


    ¡°Yes, mydy.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Y-yes!¡±


    Upon hearing Ms. ire¡¯s words, the three left the room immediately.


    I suppose they were going to prepare a room for me.


    But I really didn¡¯t mind sleeping on some couch in a corner¡­


    Before leaving, Lyra had seen that our cups were empty, and so she filled them with tea again.


    ¡°By the way, your sister¡­Ms. Tilura¡­was it?¡±


    ¡°Yes. My sister¡¯s name is Tilura Liebert.¡±


    ¡°Were you able to prepare the medicine for her?¡±


    ¡°About that¡­ In order to make medicine out of the Ramogi, the flowers must be chopped up and dried. And so it won¡¯t be ready until midday tomorrow at the earliest.¡±


    ¡°I see. Ah, and was there enough Ramogi? I believe I was only able to find five of them.¡±


    ¡°There was more than enough. In fact, we really just needed one for Tilura. I was told that five was most excessive.¡±


    So saying, Ms. ire took out the remaining four Ramogi flowers.


    She had been carrying the ones that wouldn¡¯t be used for medicine. She chuckled and ced them on the table.


    ¡°So one was enough. Maybe I shouldn¡¯t have picked the others then. Well, I suppose it¡¯s good to have them in stock in case someone falls ill again.¡±


    ¡°Yes. We will keep them so that we will be prepared if such a thing happens in the future.¡±


    ¡°¡­Wuff¡­wuff?¡±


    As I sipped some tea and chattednguidly with Ms. ire, Leo seemed to take an interest in the Ramogi, as she brought her face close to it and sniffed.


    ¡°Leo. That¡¯s not food, so you can¡¯t eat it.¡±


    ¡°Perhaps she is hungry. It is nearly time for dinner.¡±


    ¡°Yes, the sun is starting to set.¡±


    ¡°I will have the cooks prepare something. I myself am feeling hungry¡­ I had been thinking of nothing but finding Ramogi while in the forest, and so I forgot to eat lunch.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. Then it¡¯s no wonder that you are hungry. As for me, I was so hungry that I ate an orc that Leo killed, just before meeting you¡­ I think that was about lunch time.¡±


    ¡°Hehe. So you must be hungry as well then. Well, I¡¯ll have something prepared then. Yes, we¡¯ll have a weing party for you.¡±


    ¡°Please don¡¯t do anything too fancy. I¡¯m really not used to that kind of etiquette.¡±


    ¡°You really don¡¯t need to worry about etiquette. It¡¯s just me and the servants here. Oh, and what would the great Leo like to eat?¡±


    ¡°She really likes¡­do you have any sausages? It¡¯s her favorite. ¡­You know, they are stuffed with meat and¡­well, I don¡¯t know if you have them in this world¡­¡±


    ¡°We certainly do. Hehe. But it would be very interesting if we couldterpare the foods in our worlds and find out what we have and don¡¯t have.¡±


    ¡°Yes, it would. ¡­Leo. It looks like you¡¯ll be able to eat sausages.¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wou! Wou! Wou!¡±


    ¡°Yeah? You look so happy.¡±


    Leo reacted strongly to the word ¡®sausage.¡¯


    Her tail wagged and she nearly jumped on me¡­ But wait! I would get crushed if you jumped on me with that huge body!


    ¡°¡­Wou?¡±


    I somehow managed to make Leo calm down and stop her from pouncing on me.


    Things were finally starting to go well for me in this world, and I didn¡¯t want to end the lucky streak by getting ttened under my dog. That wouldn¡¯t even be funny.


    I patted the calmed down Leo on the head, and then she raised her face to look at me.


    Just then, the Ramogi that was on the table fell down.


    Apparently, Leo¡¯s excitement earlier had caused the table to shake, and so the Ramogi was already on the edge.


    ¡°Ah.¡±


    ¡°Oh.¡±


    I managed to catch three of them before they hit the floor.


    Ms. ire reached out a hand to pick up the single flower that was on the carpet.


    As I was about to return the Ramogi to the table, I couldn¡¯t help but look at the flowers and wonder over how they could turn into medicine.


    In Japan, I never had the opportunity to see nts before decoction.


    All the medicine in drug stores and hospitals had already been processed into powders and tablets.


    While I didn¡¯t know if it was the same thing, I did know that Kawara-yomogi(Artemisia capiris) could help alleviate a fever.


    But I had never actually seen it used as medicine.


    ¡­Though, I had a vague recollection that they also chopped and dried the flowers.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°¡­Ah, I¡¯m sorry. I got lost in thought.¡±


    Ms. ire had been looking at me with a slightly worried expression.


    I rushed to put the Ramogi back on the table and then noticed the change.


    ¡°¡­Uh¡­Ms. ire. This¡­¡±


    ¡°What?¡±


    I showed her the Ramogi in my hand.


    ¡°¡­It¡¯s¡­dried¡­¡±


    ¡°Isn¡¯t it¡­? But it hadn¡¯t been dry at all when it fell off the table and I caught it¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­did you do something?¡±


    ¡°No. I just caught it in the air, that¡¯s all¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. From what I could see, that is what happened¡­¡±


    ¡°Wou?¡±


    After witnessing such a strange thing, Ms. ire and I had expressions of disbelief.


    Leo looked at us and tilted her head to the side.


    ¡°¡­Ah, yes. Ms. ire. Couldn¡¯t you use this to make medicine?¡±


    ¡°Ah! That¡¯s right! They do seem to be properly dried. I will go and tell Sebastian at once!¡±


    Ms. ire epted the dried Ramogi and rushed out of the room.


    Now that it was just me and Leo in the room, my stomach seemed to growl noisily.


    ¡°¡­Well¡­I think we might have to wait a little longer for dinner now¡­ Of course, it¡¯s only natural to prioritize giving a sick person medicine. ¡­Still, what exactly happened¡­?¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­ Wou! Wou!¡±


    ¡°Leo. You¡¯ll have to wait a little longer for your sausages.¡±


    ¡°¡­Wou¡­¡±


    I patted the disappointed Leo and thought about the strange phenomenon as I waited for someone to return to the guest room.

 Chapter 13

    Chapter 13


    <strong>I Learned About Abilities Called Gifts</strong>


    I think about two hours passed after that.


    I couldn¡¯t confirm it, as I didn¡¯t have a watch with me, but it felt like it was that long.


    While Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda came in and brought me more tea and Leo more milk several times, drinking so much tea to help ward off hunger had made my stomach feel rather bloated.


    As I had drunken so much, I once asked Ms. Lyra if I could use the bathroom. Unsurprisingly, it was not a flush toilet.


    Leo also went out to the back of the garden to relieve herself once.


    I was able to see the garden at the same time, and it was indeedrge enough for Leo to y in.


    I didn¡¯t know how much it would cost to have such arge house and vastnds surrounding it in Japan. The fact that I even thought of it showed how much of amoner I was.


    And so I spent the time petting and ying with Leo or looking at the beautiful furnishings in the guest room. And then finally, there was a knock on the door and Ms. ire and Sebastian entered.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, thank you so much. We were able to make the Ramogi medicine, and give it to Tilura.¡±


    ¡°I see. Do you think it will work?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Lady Tilura fell asleep immediately after drinking it, and seemed much calmer than before. And her fever has also lowered a little.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s good. I hope she recovers soon.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°So, Mr. Takumi. I heard from Lady ire that¡­the Ramogi dried when you touched it¡­¡±


    ¡°Ahh¡­ Yes, that did happen. I don¡¯t know why, but when I grabbed the Ramogi that fell off of the table, it somehow dried.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see¡­¡±


    ¡°Sebastian. Do you know why?¡±


    ¡°No¡­ Well, I am not certain of it. But I wondered if it could not be rted to Gifts.¡±


    ¡°Gifts¡­?¡±


    ¡°Those Gifts?¡±


    But what were gifts¡­


    Something like a present¡­? What did that have to do with drying Ramogi?


    ¡°Yes. I suppose I have to exin them to you, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Please do.¡±


    ¡°Gifts are also called ¡®Gifts from God.¡¯ It is said that one in every few million are born with a Gift.¡±


    ¡°From god¡­¡±


    ¡°Neither Sebastian nor I have seen anyone with a Gift before. However, those who have it are supposed to have specific abilities that far surpass anyone else.¡±


    ¡°Currently, there are no known persons in this country with the Gift. However¡­there are documents of them existing in the past.¡±


    ¡°What do you mean by specific abilities?¡±


    ¡°They usually have some kind of ability that they are very good at. For instance, someone with a smithing Gift will be able to make anything. They could make a sharp sword as if it was nothing. Someone with a water Gift would be able to create water no matter where they are, and so they would never be thirsty. Someone with the Gift of magic would have more powerful magic than normal, and would be able to do any kind of magic with ease. A person with the sage Gift will be wise and understand everything. Etcetera.¡±


    ¡°¡­Magic¡­¡±


    The word magic had popped up during Sebastian¡¯s exnation.


    It wouldn¡¯t be unusual in another world. So I guess this world had magic as well?


    ¡°I have never heard of magic being used to quickly dry nts like Ramogi. The only thing I can think of is¡­using fire magic to help it dry faster. But I hear that you dried them in an instant. That shouldn¡¯t be possible with just magic.¡±


    ¡°Besides, if it was magic the energy should be detectable. But I didn¡¯t detect anything at all.¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°No magic energy was detected, and it isn¡¯t possible to do it with magic to begin with. There is no other exnation. It is a Gift.¡±


    ¡°Also, when Mr. Takumi spoke of stories about going to other worlds, he said they would get special powers.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes, that¡¯s true.¡±


    It happened a lot in stories about people being reincarnated or transferred to another world.


    I had told them about it earlier.


    ¡°Perhaps that special power isn¡¯t just that your Leo turned into a Silver Fenrir, but you maybe have also been given a power of your own. That is what I think.¡±


    ¡°Being given a special power. We think it must be the Gift from God.¡±


    ¡°A gift¡­ Are you saying there is some weird ability that allows me to dry nts¡­?¡±


    ¡°I have never seen any mention of that ability in any documents. However, Gifts are always unique, and no two are alike.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Perhaps drying Ramogi is only a small part of your ability. And the real ability is something else.¡±


    ¡°Something else¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. There is something that allows you to find out what a person¡¯s Gift is. So if we use it, you might find the answer to your question.¡±


    ¡°There is something so convenient?¡±


    ¡°Well, it isn¡¯t actually used for finding out a person¡¯s Gift. It is for magic energy. However, it does also tell you about your Gift¡¯s ability as well.¡±


    ¡°It is likely because the person who invented it happened to be a Gifted individual.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Well, I would like to find out then.¡±


    If I really did have a useful ability, I wanted to know what it was.


    By knowing what it was, I could think about how I would put it to use.


    Well, it was also possible that drying nts was all I could do, which would be a little disappointing.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. We don¡¯t actually have the thing with us right here. And so we will have to go to townter.¡±


    ¡°I see. Very well.¡±


    Town, huh¡­ I wonder what towns are like in this world?


    I immediately thought of medieval towns, and judging from this mansion, it was probably not too far from that.


    ¡°Now, Mr. Takumi. Dinner has been prepared. And so it will be brought to you here.¡±


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right. I¡¯m practically starving. Thank you so much.¡±


    ¡°Certainly. It will be brought to you soon, so just wait one moment.¡±


    So saying, Sebastian bowed and left the room.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, Mr. Takumi. I¡¯m afraid it¡¯s be quitete, as there was the matter of the medicine.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. It was for your sister, Ms. Tilura. And so I don¡¯t mind. Though, I probably shouldn¡¯t have drunk so much tea.¡±


    ¡°Oh, Mr. Takumi. It is not good to drink so much at once. I am quite hungry as well. Please don¡¯t be modest, and eat as much as you like tonight. And we¡¯ve prepared food for Leo as well.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    So we would finally be able to eat dinner.


    Leo was in a good mood now that she could expect the sausages to arrive soon.


    Now that I think about it, I had wanted to ask about magic¡­ Well, I would do thatter. Right now, I should focus on the food that was being brought to us.


    It was being made by the household cooks of such a great mansion, and so it must be something delicious. With great expectations, I waited for Sebastian to return.

 Chapter 14

    Chapter 14


    <strong>Sebastian Exined Magic To Me</strong>


    After dinner, Ms. ire and I drank tea in the guest room with a rxed atmosphere.


    As Sebastian and the two maids were servants, they did not sit down but waited behind us.


    It must be tiring to have to stand for so long.


    And so I asked them to sit and rest, but they firmly refused.


    I suppose it was their pride as servants.


    ¡°Well, that was very delicious, Ms. ire.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m happy that you enjoyed it. I will be sure to tell the cook.¡±


    ¡°Yes, please do.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Leo had also eaten sausages to her heart¡¯s content.


    As Leo was so big, I felt bad that she was eating so much. But when I tried to stop her, Ms. ire assured me that it was fine.


    Apparently, sausages were a verymon food and hardly luxurious. And she insisted that Leo eat as much as she wanted.


    Of course, I had tasted some as well. And I was amazed that such delicious sausages could be served in that quantity.


    It almost made me feel bad for the sausages I bought from the convenience store.


    Aside from that, there were meat dishes, soups and sds. It really did feel like a feast.


    Everything was delicious, but there was so much that I could not eat all of it. That did feel like a bit of a waste.


    ¡°As it was a weing dinner, I had them make more than usual, and served with the best tableware. But it really isn¡¯t too different from what we normally eat. As you requested that we do nothing that is too fancy.¡±


    ¡°¡­Uh, I actually thought that it was very fancy¡­¡±


    The amount of it aside, if that¡¯s what they usually ate¡­then they must eat very well indeed.


    I suppose that was how it was for ady of such a great house as this.


    ¡°Now that I think about it, Mr. Takumi. Were you not trying to ask me something before dinner¡­?¡±


    ¡°Ah, so you could tell¡­¡±


    When he was talking about Gifts, the word ¡®magic¡¯ popped up, and I had been wondering about it ever since.


    In my world, magic was just something from stories, and didn¡¯t actually exist.


    Well, there were metaphors about how technology was like magic.


    But Sebastian and Ms. ire had been talking about magic and magic energy.


    And I couldn¡¯t say that the idea of magic didn¡¯t appeal to me.


    While I didn¡¯t know a lot about it, magic was often used in cartoons,ics and novels.


    Even though I wasn¡¯t sure if I¡¯d be able to use it, if magic really did exist here, then it was only normal for me to want to know more about it.


    ¡°Um¡­ You said something about magic earlier. Is there really magic in this world?¡±


    ¡°Oh? Yes. It is amon enough skill.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°The most popr types of magic are for lighting firewood or creating wind. Is there a problem?¡±


    ¡°¡­No, uh¡­ It¡¯s just that magic doesn¡¯t exist in the world that I¡¯m from.¡±


    ¡°It doesn¡¯t!?¡±


    ¡°What!?¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    Ms. ire and Sebastian raised their voices in astonishment.


    Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda managed to keep silent, but their faces expressed the same shock as they looked at me.


    So magic was normal in this world. And they could not imagine a world without it.


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Perhaps because the conversation had nothing to do with her, Leo was curled up on the floor and rxing in the satisfaction of having eaten so many sausages.


    While she was curled up, she was so big that it looked like a giant silver, fluffy ball was lying right next to me.


    ¡°¡­Do you really not have any magic in your world, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Yes. It does exist in story books, but no one can actually use magic.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    ¡°¡­Then I suppose I will have to exin it to you, much like Gifts?¡±


    ¡°Yes, if you would be so kind. I am curious to know if I can use it too.¡±


    ¡°Oh, everyone can use magic. Of course, there are differences when ites to the effect.¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­¡±


    Anyone could use magic¡­


    Perhaps I could use it too then.


    I had wanted to use magic ever since I was a child. And so the thought made me very excited.


    Ah, but first, I had to listen to his exnation.


    It was possible that there were downsides to using it.


    In the stories, you sometimes had to make a contract with someone in order to gain such powers. And there were other stories with various consequences.


    And so I turned to Sebastian, who looked like he could not wait to tell me about it in detail.


    ¡­He clearly liked exining things to people.


    He had looked quite happy when talking about Gifts earlier, and just seemed more livelier in general. He almost looked more youthful.


    I started to think of nicknames for him like Old Exiner Man, but did not say it, because that would be very rude.


    ¡°Uh¡­please tell me about magic in detail.¡±


    ¡°Sebastian. Please exin it to Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes, certainly. Ah, there really is something nice about being able to exin things.¡±


    I knew it!


    Sebastian smiled broadly with satisfaction and then began to exin.


    ¡°What is magic? To put it simply, it is the controlling of magic energy that exists in your body. This energy resides in all living creatures. In fact, it is said that one cannot survive if they lose that energy.¡±


    ¡°You can¡¯t live without magic energy?¡±


    Was it like moisture?


    Everyone knew that humans couldn¡¯t live without water. Was it something simr to that?


    ¡°Yes. There are records of people who have died after using magic until they had no energy left. Of course, such experiments are not conducted today.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    So they had actually put it to the test..


    It seemed very inhumane to conduct lethal experiments, but I doubted they had understood the danger at the time.


    Perhaps it was because someone died that they stopped experimenting with it altogether.

 Chapter 15

    Chapter 15


    <strong>Ms. ire¡¯s Sister Intruded</strong>


    ¡°It takes magic energy to use magic. That is obvious, but magic energy alone does not allow you to use magic. The most important part about using magic is the spell. It is when you gather together the magic energy inside of your body and convert it for the purpose of using magic.¡±


    ¡°So you can use magic with spells.¡±


    ¡°There are fixed spells for different kinds of magic. Like fire magic, water magic, wind magic and earth magic. And the spells decide how they are activated. I once read in a book that in order to activate very powerful magic, you would have to chant all day and all night.¡±


    ¡°All day and night¡­¡±


    So you had to keep chanting some really long spell¡­that seemed painful.


    ¡°Spells decide the attribute and how the magic is activated. The more powerful the magic is, the more minute details you have to decide on. And so the spell bes long, and it takes more time to activate.¡±


    ¡°So, what is the easiest kind of magic spell?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­allow me to demonstrate then. Will that be all right, Lady ire?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I don¡¯t mind.¡±


    ¡°Well then¡­ Fire Elemental Candle.¡±


    As soon as Sebastian finished chanting, a small me erupted from the tip of his finger, just like a candle.


    Woah. With this, you wouldn¡¯t need a lighter to make a fire.


    It did seem pretty useful.


    ¡°Like this, the spell converts energy into fire, creating a fire like a candle¡¯s me. Of course, the utility does not extend much further than lighting candles and firewood. It is used widely in many households.¡±


    It was like a magic lighter.


    ¡°As for the spell that I just chanted, if one were to use magic with a greater effect, it would be two or three times longer. However, Mr. Takumi. I think you can understand that it is not realistic to be chanting for so long while facing a monster?¡±


    ¡°¡­That¡¯s true. I doubt you would have enough time to chant like that during a dangerous battle.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. From the beginning of the fight until the end. How likely is it that you¡¯ll have enough time? In that case¡­you can use silent spells.¡±


    ¡°Silent spells?¡±


    Does that mean you don¡¯t have to chant?


    But I thought he said the chanting converts the energy into magic.


    He seemed to be contradicting himself¡­


    ¡°As the name implies, it is a method of using magic without chanting. But one must train in order to do it. As for how much magic one can use without chanting, it is really up to the user¡¯s ability. Now, normally, magic will not activate unless you chant. And so silent spells seem to contradict this.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I don¡¯t really understand how it is possible.¡±


    ¡°Of course. But there are rules for this as well. As for how silent spells are possible¡­¡±


    As Sebastian was about to exin, there was a knock on the door of the guest room.


    ¡­Who could it be? We had just got to the interesting part¡­


    ¡°Come in.¡±


    Said Ms. ire, and then the door burst open and a small figure flew in.


    ¡°Wuff!?¡±


    Leo had been rxing, and so she barked in surprise at this sudden intrusion. But the person ignored this and ran towards Ms. ire.


    ¡°Sister!¡±


    Sister?


    Was this Ms. ire¡¯s younger sister then?


    But I thought she was sleeping in bed because she was sick?


    Though, they did say that she was recovering after drinking the Ramogi medicine.


    ¡°Tilura!?¡±


    ¡°Yes, it¡¯s me. Tilura!¡±


    Without losing any momentum sinceunching herself through the doorway, the intruder threw herself onto Ms. ire. She seemed to be about ten years old.


    Unlike Ms. ire, she had fiery red hair.


    And though she was much younger, the face bore a striking resemnce to Ms. ire.


    She would likely grow up to be very pretty as well.


    Really, why was everyone in this world like that?


    ¡°Tilura. What happened? Shouldn¡¯t you be in bed?¡±


    ¡°But sister, I feel so much better after drinking the medicine!¡±


    She answered energetically to Ms. ire¡¯s question.


    Yes, it was best for children to be energetic.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, I¡¯m very sorry to have your talk interrupted¡­¡±


    ¡°No, I don¡¯t mind. I can listen to the exnation some other time. Tilura, was it? I¡¯m d to see that she¡¯s well.¡±


    ¡°Sister. Who is this?¡±


    ¡°Tilura, he is a guest. He is called Mr. Takumi, and he saved me when I was being attacked by an orc. Also¡­he¡¯s the one who found the Ramogi medicine that you drank.¡±


    ¡°Is that so!¡±


    ¡°Hello. I¡¯m Takumi Hirooka. But you can just call me Takumi, like the others do.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Mr. Takumi. I am Tilura Liebert. But just call me Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Ms. Tilura.¡±


    Once the introductions were over, I turned to the side and saw that Sebastian looked horribly disappointed that his exnation had been interrupted so suddenly.


    Ms. Lyra was trying to console him.


    He really wanted to tell me about it, huh¡­ Well, it really had been getting interesting.


    ¡°But Tilura. You are only just recovering! You have to get some rest.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, sister. But I¡¯ve been forced to stay in bed ever since I got the fever¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, that is true. It would be hard to spend so much time sleeping, and then sleep again now that you are better.¡±


    ¡°You understand, Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°Oh, you¡­¡±


    While Ms. ire looked a little troubled, her eyes were very gentle when she looked at Tilura.


    Whenparing the two, they really did look like they were many years apart. And so she likely couldn¡¯t bear seeing her sister so ill, and had gone to the forest.


    She was a good older sister who looked after Tilura.


    I wish that I had a younger sister or brother.


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Leo looked at Tilura and barked once.


    Upon hearing this, Tilura looked at Leo and she smiled brightly.


    ¡°Sister. Where did that doge from!?¡±


    ¡°No, Tilura. Our guest is a Silver Fenrir. You know about Silver Fenrirs, don¡¯t you? They are very powerful monsters.¡±


    Well, she actually was a dog¡­


    But I suppose she was considered a Silver Fenrir now. A strong and frightful monster.


    ¡°So that¡¯s a Silver Fenrir¡­ But I thought they don¡¯t listen to anyone. Why is it here?¡±


    ¡°This Silver Fenrir is called Leo. And she is here because she obeys Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Is that so!? You must be a great person, Mr. Takumi!¡±

 Chapter 16

    Chapter 16


    <strong>Ms. ire Woke Me Up</strong>


    While Tilura was looking up at me with an expression of admiration, I really wasn¡¯t anyone special.


    I just rescued a puppy on the side of the road. And then when we came to this world, she had turned into something that was called a Silver Fenrir.


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Ah, I think it¡¯s fine. Ms. ire, bring Tilura over here.¡±


    ¡°Huh? ¡­Oh. Tilura?¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    Tilura has been holding onto Ms. ire up until now, but she let go as Ms. ire pushed her towards me.


    Perhaps she was surprised or scared to see a Silver Fenrir for the first time, as she came towards us with a look of caution.


    ¡°Wuff! Wou!¡±


    ¡°Ahh!¡±


    Leo moved closer as if to get a closer look at Tilura. And then she licked Tilura¡¯s face.


    ¡°Ms. Tilura. Leo really likes to y with children. So please y with her. Oh, but don¡¯t break anything, Leo.¡±


    ¡°¡­Sister. May I?¡±


    ¡°If Mr. Takumi says that it is fine, then it must be. Besides, Leo is very cute and yful.¡±


    ¡°Really? ¡­Uh¡­Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wou-wou!¡±


    ¡°Ahh! Ahaha. Leo!¡±


    After Tilura cautiously called Leo¡¯s name, Leo moved closer again and pressed her silvery, soft and furry cheek into Tilura¡¯s face.


    It must have tickled, as Tilura burst intoughter and then threw her arms around Leo¡¯s body. She seemed to be enjoying the feel of the silver fur.


    ¡°Thank you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. Leo really does like to y with children. While she cannot run around in a room like this, I¡¯m d that she was able to make Ms. Tilura happy.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I have rarely seen Tilura look so happy when with someone other than me¡­ I am very thankful to Leo.¡±


    Ms. ire watched Tilura and Leo with very gentle eyes.


    And when I nced over to Sebastian and the two maids, they too were watching over Leo and Tilura with cheerful expressions.


    It was clear that Tilura was loved not just by her sister, but the servants as well.


    ¡°Ms. ire. I would like to take Leo out to the gardens to y tomorrow. Is that alright?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I don¡¯t mind. I¡¯m sure that Tilura will want to join you. Hehe.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true.¡±


    Ms. ire and I chuckled amidst the warm atmosphere, and we watched Leo and Tilura y.


    After some time had passed, perhaps due to bing tired of ying or not having fully recovered, Tilura fell asleep while wrapped up in Leo¡¯s silvery coat.


    As she could not be left to sleep like this, Ms. Gelda picked up Tilura and carried her off to her room.


    But as she was holding onto Leo, it had taken a lot of effort to peel her away.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. It¡¯s quitete now, so perhaps you would like to get some rest?¡±


    ¡°Yes. It¡¯s been a busy day for me, and so I am tired.¡±


    ¡°A room has been prepared for you. Pleasee this way.¡±


    ¡°Ah, thank you.¡±


    ¡°Please see to it that he isfortable, Lyra.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Lady ire.¡±


    ¡°Now, good night, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Good night, Ms. ire. And Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Good night.¡±


    After saying good night to Ms. ire and Sebastian, Leo and I followed Ms. Lyra to the room that had been prepared for us.


    When I entered the room, I saw that some hot water and a towel had been ced next to the bed. And so I wiped my body with it and fell into bed.


    We had wandered for a long time in the forest. And so I felt quite refreshed after wiping away the sweat and dust.


    Leo curled up right next to the bed to sleep.


    While the bed was ratherrge, Leo was still too big to sleep on it.


    And since I had eaten so much, drowsiness came to me quickly, and I soon fell asleep.


    So, I never did wake up from a dream. I suppose this really is another world¡­


    In fact, the room that I was in was about three timesrger than the one room apartment I had lived in.


    Yes, even the rooms in this mansion were big.


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª-


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    I could hear Leo¡¯s voice¡­


    Was it morning already¡­?


    ¡°Wou! Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    ¡°¡­Let me sleep a little longer¡­¡±


    ¡°Hehe. I see that you are not a morning person, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°!¡±


    I had thought it was just Leo here, but there was a woman¡¯s voice.


    I jumped up and rubbed my eyes before looking around the room.


    ¡°¡­Wuff.¡±


    Leo sighed right next to me. And Ms. Tilura was clinging onto Leo.


    And then I noticed that Ms. ire was standing to the side of the bed and smiling.


    ¡°Ms. ire!?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Good morning, Mr. Takumi. Did you sleep well?¡±


    ¡°¡­Good morning. Yes, thank you. I had a good sleep.¡±


    The bed had been so fluffy, that I wondered how I had managed to sleep on any other bed up until now.


    It was like being gently enveloped every time I rolled over. And so I slept better than ever before.


    I looked at Ms. ire again after saying good morning. She was standing so that she was bathed in sunlight from the window, which made it look like she was glowing.


    There was something angelic about it.


    The golden hair was almost blinding under the sun.


    ¡­That being said, Leo. You could have woken me up a little earlier if Ms. ire came to visit. This is rather embarrassing.


    Hmm? Had Leo sighed because I wouldn¡¯t get up sooner?


    ¡­Well, then it¡¯s this bed¡¯s fault for being sofortable. Yes, we¡¯ll leave it at that.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Breakfast is ready, so would you minding down to the drawing room?¡±


    ¡°Of course. I¡¯ll be there right away.¡±


    ¡°You don¡¯t have to rush. I¡¯m sure you would like to wash up first. Now, let¡¯s go, Tilura.¡±


    ¡°But I want to be with Leo!¡±


    ¡°No, Tilura. Look, Leo seems troubled.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. I see that Ms. Tilura has really taken to Leo.¡±


    ¡°Yes! Leo is so gentle!¡±


    Well, she had a good eye for judging people, if she could tell that about Leo.


    Because Leo looked like a scary wolf¡­ Yet she quickly understood that Leo was nice.


    ¡°Mr Takumi. You can just call my Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Really?¡±


    ¡°Yes. You are much older than me and are inmand of the great Leo!¡±


    ¡°¡­But I really am an ordinary person. Well¡­so be it, Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s good!¡±


    And so at Tilura¡¯s request, I stopped calling her Ms. Tilura.

 Chapter 17

    Chapter 17


    <strong>I Realized That I Didn¡¯t Have Clothes Or Personal Effects</strong>


    I should prepare before going down to eat breakfast. Like washing up.


    But first, I need to get Leo away from Telura¡­ She did not seem like she wanted to separate from Leo, but I didn¡¯t want her here while I was getting ready.


    While I wasn¡¯t going to do anything strange, it was a little embarrassing to have someone in the room, even if they were a child.


    Besides, there was nothing more boring than seeing a man prepare himself in the morning.


    ¡°Tilura. Everyone is going to eat breakfast now. If you stay here with Leo, neither of you will be able to eat.¡±


    ¡°¡­That¡¯s¡­not good. I am hungry as well.¡±


    ¡°Yes. So, why don¡¯t we all eat first? And then we can go out in the garden and y. Your sister already gave her permission.¡±


    ¡°Is that true, sister?!¡±


    ¡°Yes. But only if you eat your breakfast first.¡±


    ¡°Very well. I will go and eat at once!¡±


    Once she understood that she could y with Leo after breakfast, Tilura moved away and dashed out of the room.


    ¡°Tilura. She is such a¡­ I really did not expect her to be so fond of your Leo. I¡¯m really sorry, to both of you.¡±


    ¡°No, it¡¯s fine. It¡¯s good to see a child so full of energy. Besides, I¡¯ve seen worse.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    Leo nodded as if in agreement.


    Now that I thought of it, there was something very clever about the way she nodded now.


    Was it because she was a Silver Fenrir?


    ¡°Well, I¡¯ll leave you alone now, Mr. Takumi. We¡¯ll be waiting for you in the drawing room.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I¡¯ll go as soon as I¡¯m ready.¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    I watched as Ms. ire left the room, and then I got out of the bed in order to get ready for the day.


    That being said, I didn¡¯t have anything to change into.


    I patted Leo on the head and thought about what I should do. But there really wasn¡¯t anything that I could do.


    ¡°Sniff¡­sniff¡­ At least I don¡¯t¡­smell¡­right?¡±


    ¡°Wuff? ¡­Wuff¡­wou!¡±


    Leo sniffed me as well, and seemed to agree that I was fine.


    ¡­But while Leo would definitely have a sharp sense of smell, there was no guarantee that her idea of stench was simr enough to humans.


    In any case, even if this was fine for today. What should I do tomorrow¡­


    I could not continue to wear the same clothes every day.


    I suppose I could discuss the matter with Sebastianter¡­


    ¡°I hope there is something that I can wear¡­¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    I was about the same height as Sebastian, so maybe he would lend me some of his clothes?


    But what if he only has butler uniforms¡­ It¡¯s not that I didn¡¯t want to wear them, it was just difficult to imagine what I would look like.


    Regardless, I decided to stop thinking about clothes and wash my face instead.


    Someone must have changed it while I was sleeping, as there was a new basin of hot water and a towel next to my bed. And so I washed my face and wiped my body with it.


    ¡°I suppose Ms. Lyra prepared it? Or maybe it was Ms. ire, who woke me up¡­ I¡¯ll have to thank herter.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I wanted to shave as well, but there were no razors in the room.


    That was another thing that I would have to ask Sebastian about.


    If this world really was at a simr level to medieval European culture, then there would be no electric shavers or cartridge razors. But they would still have something to shave with.


    ¡°Well, I¡¯m sure it will work out. ¡­Besides, it might be amusing to just grow out a beard. I could look quite dandy¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Wuff¡­ Wuff, wuff.¡±


    Leo sounded like she was telling me that this would be a bad idea.


    Or maybe it was just my imagination.


    ¡­A dandy man with a beard¡­perhaps that isn¡¯t me¡­my coworkers always said that I looked young for my age¡­ Ha¡­


    ¡°Oh, I shouldn¡¯t keep them waiting.¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    I did my best to look presentable and then I left the room with Leo.


    As Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda were waiting right outside of the room, I said good morning and then followed them to the drawing room.


    I had been quite surprised to see them standing there in front of the wall¡­


    Was it really necessary to be this orderly?


    Also, the reason why they took me to the same drawing room as yesterday, was because I still didn¡¯t know my way around the mansion.


    The ce was so big, so I didn¡¯t even know how to reach it from my room.


    The only thing I had memorised was the location of the bathroom.


    And so I stopped there once before going to the drawing room.


    Though, I felt bad for keeping Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda waiting.


    ¡°Sorry to keep you all waiting.¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi! Good morning! Good morning, Leo!¡±


    ¡°Good morning. Good morning, Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Mr. Takumi. I hope you were able to sleep wellst night?¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you for letting me sleep in such a big room with a great bed.¡±


    Ms. ire and Tilura were already sitting at the table and waiting for my arrival.


    Tilura looked like she couldn¡¯t wait to eat¡­ Had I taken longer than I thought?


    Sebastian and the two maids were waiting at the back of the table.


    And so after greeting everyone, I took a seat.


    Leo sat down next to me on the ground.


    Still, her head loomed over the table, and so she would have no trouble eating from it. That was how big she was.


    And on the table, bread, sd, sausages and other meats had been prepared, along with soup.


    Of course, there was an especiallyrge te of sausages for Leo.


    ¡­It was quite the sumptuous breakfast.


    When it was just me and Leo, breakfast was cheap bread and milk or asionally cereal and milk.


    And if I didn¡¯t have time, I would eat some kind of protein bar with an energy drink.


    ¡°So, now that everyone is here, let¡¯s eat.¡±


    ¡°Itadakimasu(Let¡¯s eat.)¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    While I put my hands together and said ¡®itadakimasu,¡¯ no one else did anything like that.


    I suppose it was not part of Ms. ire and Tilura¡¯s culture.


    I didn¡¯t know what kind of religion they had in this world, but they didn¡¯t offer any prayers to god like they do in other countries¡­ Well, this was another world, after all.


    And so everyone¡¯s hands stretched out and we began to eat.


    Leo¡¯s head moved forward and she bit into the sausages hungrily.


    I picked up a fork and reached for the sd first.


    It was important to eat your vegetables.

 Chapter 18

    Chapter 18


    <strong>We All Ate Breakfast Together</strong>


    ¡°This sd is very delicious.¡±


    ¡°Hehe. I¡¯m d that you enjoy it.¡±


    ¡°The soup is good too, Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°Wuff, wuff¡­ Guff, guff!¡±


    It was a green vegetable sd.


    Because it was morning, the sd dressing was mild, and went well with bread as well.


    As for the soup that Tilura rmended, it contained meat but was also light and easy to eat.


    I couldn¡¯t remember thest time I had eaten such a good breakfast¡­


    ¡°Leo. I think you¡¯re eating a little too quickly. No one is going to take it away, so slow down.¡±


    ¡°Leo sure eats a lot.¡±


    ¡°And with such speed!¡±


    ¡°Guff-guff¡­ Wou?¡±


    Leo realized that everyone was looking at her, and so she tilted her head questioningly.


    ¡­It was so cute¡­ Well, it seemed like Ms. ire didn¡¯t mind, so I suppose she could continue eating like that.


    ¡°Ah, Sebastian. Can I have a word with you?¡±


    ¡°Yes. What is it?¡±


    I thought that it might be bad manners to talk to him while eating, and so I called out to him after I had finished.


    While I had eaten quickly, this breakfast was just as good asst night¡¯s dinner.


    I gestured for Sebastian toe, and then whispered near his ear as he leaned forward.


    ¡°Um, do you have any extra clothes that I can borrow? I came here without bringing anything¡­¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m terribly sorry for not noticing that earlier. A change of clothes¡­ If you don¡¯t mind it being the same size as me, I can prepare something.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Also, I would like to shave¡­¡±


    ¡°That can be prepared as well. I will have everything brought to your roomter.¡±


    ¡°Thank you very much.¡±


    I was especially quiet when talking about shaving.


    It wasn¡¯t something that you talked about in front ofdies.


    Well, it was mostly because I felt embarrassed about the whole thing.


    Once we were finished talking, Sebastian went over to Ms. Lyra, and whispered something to her. She then left the room.


    ¡­Ah, so now the information went to her¡­


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. What were you and Sebastian talking about?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ I just had something to discuss with regards to my clothes.¡±


    ¡°I see. Sebastian and Lyra are wonderful at what they do. So you must consult them if you ever need anything.¡±


    ¡°Yes. ¡­Is Ms. Gelda any different?¡±


    ¡°Gelda is still new here, so we¡¯ll just say that I hope for the best. Hehe.¡±


    ¡°I will exert myself to the utmost!¡±


    Ms. Gelda seemed almost a little too excited.


    But if that¡¯s how she felt, I didn¡¯t see any reason to dampen her enthusiasm.


    Though, being so nervous could lead to making more mistakes¡­


    Well, there was no point in thinking about that right now.


    ¡°Sister, I finished eating! Now I can y with Leo!¡±


    ¡°Tilura, you really should calm down.¡±


    ¡°¡­I¡¯m sorry.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. Sorry, Tilura. But Leo is still eating. Could you wait just a little longer?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I understand!¡±


    Tilura looked a little disappointed after she was scolded by her sister, but she waited patiently after I asked her to.


    She just watched Leo eating and grinned.


    ¡°¡­Do you have any siblings, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Huh? Oh, I¡¯ve always wanted brothers or sisters, but never had any.¡±


    ¡°I see.. But you seem to be ustomed to dealing with children.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. That is probably because of Leo.¡±


    ¡°Because of Leo?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I was so busy with work¡­that I wasn¡¯t able to pay her enough attention. But whenever I did take her out, children from the neighborhood would approach her.¡±


    ¡°Indeed, so that is why.¡±


    ¡°And so I got used to having them around while they yed with Leo. And Leo always enjoyed ying with them.¡±


    Children could be so energetic.


    But Leo was always able to keep up with them. I had a little more trouble there, and so I suppose I had to learn how to deal with children.


    Like make them chase after Leo instead of me, or how to make them calm down.


    Now that I thought about it, there was one girl who had been especially fond of Leo. I wonder what she¡¯s doing now?


    Perhaps it wasn¡¯t just me, and Leo missed the people from our world.


    That girl had been a simr age to Tilura, and had been simrly obsessed with ying with Leo.


    ¡°Guff-guff-guff¡­wuff!¡±


    ¡°Oh, are you finished eating?¡±


    ¡°Leo finished eating!¡±


    The te that had been filled with sausages was now licked clean.


    As if to take a break after finishing the sausages, Leo drank from a bucket that was filled with milk and then let out a sigh.


    ¡­Leo, that¡¯s not verydy-like, is it?


    Well, perhaps it was found in the world of wolves and dogs.


    ¡°Ms. ire. Will it be all right for Leo and Tilura to go out and y now?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I don¡¯t mind. Now, Tilura. Let¡¯s go to the back garden.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Ah, Ms. ire.¡±


    ¡°Yes, what is it?¡±


    ¡°Could I leave Leo with you for a short while? I need to return to my room once. It concerns the matter I discussed with Sebastian¡­¡±


    ¡°Very well. Leo. Do you mind being away from Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Wuff? ¡­Wou!¡±


    Leo looked very satisfied after eating until she was full. She looked a little surprised that Ms. ire was addressing her, but then she nodded as if in reply.


    ¡°Well, see youter then, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I¡¯ll go to the gardenter.¡±


    ¡°Let¡¯s go, Leo!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    And so Ms. ire, Leo, and Tilura, who was hanging onto Leo¡¯s back, left the room.


    ¡°Ah, Ms. Gelda, please wait.¡±


    ¡°Yes, what is it?¡±


    ¡°¡­I¡¯m very sorry, but could you take me to my room?¡±


    ¡°Very well.¡±


    I stopped Ms. Gelda as she made to follow the others, and asked her to take me back to my room.


    ¡­Because I still wasn¡¯t confident that I could get back¡­ And getting lost would be more embarrassing than anything.


    And so Sebastian went with Ms. ire and the others while Ms. Gelda and I went to my room.

 Chapter 19

    Chapter 19


    <strong>I was able to borrow clothes and other items</strong>


    Ms. Gelda led me to my room and I went inside.


    Ms. Lyra was carrying some folded clothes as she waited there for me.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Please change into these.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    Thankfully, the clothes Ms. Lyra handed to me were not butler clothes.


    The first was¡­how could I put this¡­I think they were called doublets.


    A long time ago, when I was studying history, I remember seeing them described as clothes worn in medieval Europe.


    But weren¡¯t they supposed to be worn under your armor?


    Well, while I wasn¡¯t going to be wearing armor, this was still better than wearing the same clothes every day.


    Aside from the doublet, I was given a waistcoat¡­which was like a vest.


    ¡°Since you are not wearing boots, please put these on.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    She handed me a pair of pants, which were quite ordinary.


    If I wasn¡¯t wrong, the style during the medieval era was to wear boots that went up to your knees and shorts.


    But since I wasn¡¯t wearing boots, they gave me long pants.


    I believe they were called Braies.


    Though, I hadn¡¯t paid a lot of attention when studying history, so I wasn¡¯t sure if I was right. Besides, while this ce may be simr, it wasn¡¯t actually medieval Europe.


    Had I been wearing boots, I would have worn Braies over them along with the doublet and waistcoat and upper garments. Then I would have looked like some nobleman.


    It wouldn¡¯t have looked good on me at all, and so I¡¯m d it turned out this way.


    I thought of such things as I picked up the clothes and was about to change. But then I realized something.


    ¡°Um¡­Ms. Lyra?¡±


    ¡°Yes, what is it?¡±


    ¡°Are you going to stand there while I change?¡±


    ¡°¡­Ah! Pardon me. I will leave you alone at once.¡±


    ¡°Thank you¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­But first, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes?¡±


    It was just as I thought about how even Ms. Lyra had a scatterbrained side as well, that she suddenly stopped at the door and turned around as if remembering something.


    ¡°Please use this to shave.¡±


    ¡°¡­That¡¯s a¡­¡±


    She handed me something that looked like a small fruit knife.


    I had wanted something more like a razor that barbers use¡­ Perhaps they didn¡¯t have those.


    I epted the small knife and then Ms. Lyra exited the room.


    ¡°¡­Can I really shave with this thing?¡±


    Perhaps it was the mostmon way of shaving in this world¡­


    When in Rome¡­but¡­I feel like I¡¯ll cut myself.


    Feeling too indecisive, I decided to change my clothes first.


    The material for the clothes must have been of very high quality, as they were smooth to the touch and just asfortable as a dress shirt and cks.


    I had assumed that the clothes would be of much coarser material, due to the level of civilization, but was pleasantly surprised.


    The upper ss sure had it good.


    Now that I was changed, the only thing left to do was to shave.


    Thest time I shaved was the morning before I came here. While I was preparing to go to work.


    So it was nearly two days. When I looked in the mirror, the scruff was long enough that I could pull it with my fingers.


    I felt a little embarrassed about walking out in front of the others in this state.


    Seeing myself like this, I felt even more foolish about how before breakfast, I had thoughts of growing out my beard and looking dandy.


    Yes, this needed to be shaved off.


    I picked up the knife with a resolved expression and began to shave away.


    Ten minutester, I looked at myself in the mirror.


    ¡­There was blood here and there. But it was likely because I wasn¡¯t used to doing it like this. At least, I hoped it was the case.


    There was a new bowl of hot water and a towel in the same ce as this morning. Ms. Lyra must have prepared it. And so I washed my freshly shaven face and then washed and dried the knife.


    I put the knife down on the desk next to the bed and then inspected my face in the mirror once again.


    ¡°It stung a bit when I washed up, but it seems to be fine.¡±


    The cuts were still visible, but were bleeding anymore. And all of the stubble was gone.


    ¡°Alright, this is fine.¡±


    With the inspection done, I left the room in order to meet the others in the garden.


    Ms. Lyra gave me a fright again as she stood waiting in front of my door, but I managed to hide my surprise. She then led me to the back garden.


    ¡­I was the type who hated jump scares in horror films¡­


    ¡°Ahahahaha. Leo! Over here!¡±


    ¡°Wou! Wou!¡±


    When we came out into the garden, I could hear Tilura¡¯s cheerful voice.


    Tilura was running around, and Leo was chasing her at a purposely slower pace.


    ¡°Oh, Mr. Takumi. I almost didn¡¯t recognize you.¡±


    ¡°Ah, Ms. ire, Sebastian. I feel very refreshed now.¡±


    Ms. ire stood and watched over the two protectively, while Sebastian stood in the back. But he approached me when he saw that I was there.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Those clothes suit you very well.¡±


    ¡°Do you think so? That¡¯s good.¡±


    ¡°It was really all we could prepare¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, no. It really is more than enough. Thank you, Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°No, I¡¯m at your service whenever you need something.¡±


    I thanked Sebastian and he bowed once and then took a step back in order to stand behind Ms. ire again.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, so you were talking to Sebastian about changing your clothes. And your beard is gone.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I thought it would be better to consult a man about that. My beard as well.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Though, I thought the beard looked rather nice on you.¡±


    ¡°You did? But a stubbly beard just looks ungainly.¡±


    Don¡¯t tter me too much, Ms. ire.


    I might start having thoughts about trying to look dandy again.


    ¡°Still, I¡¯m d to see that Tilura is very well now.¡±


    ¡°Yes, really. And she is able to run around like this because you found the Ramaogi.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. Well, you did the most by worrying for her so much that you left the house in order to search for it.¡±


    ¡°¡­Lady ire. I must say that what you did gave me such a fright. From now on, please take a guard with you when leaving the mansion.¡±


    ¡°Ah, I¡¯m being scolded by Sebastian now.¡±

 Chapter 20

    Chapter 20


    <strong>We yed With Tilura</strong>


    Ms. ireughed a little yfully, but what Sebastian said was true.


    What would have happened to her had Leo and I not heard her voice¡­


    Besides, Ms. ire was very pretty, so it would probably be best for her to take an escort when going to town as well.


    Strange men might try to approach her¡­ Well, I didn¡¯t know if people hit on women like that in this world.


    Regardless, many people would be sad if something ever happened to her.


    ¡°Ms. ire, what about the others? Tilura and Sebastian would be heartbroken if something happened to you.¡±


    ¡°Now you¡¯re upset as well, Mr. Takumi. ¡­Indeed, I would not want my sister to be sad.¡±


    ¡°And what about Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°Sebastian is fine. He was originally my father¡¯s personal butler. But he¡¯s been put here just to monitor me.¡±


    ¡°Mydy, it¡¯s because your father was so worried¡­¡±


    ¡°I know. ¡­And I will do my best so that you aren¡¯t too worried about me in the future.¡±


    ¡°Too worried. So you will still make him worry.¡±


    ¡°That¡­ Well¡­just pretend you didn¡¯t hear that, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Haha. Very well.


    Perhaps Ms. ire was just a free spirit.


    Well, a more delicatedy would not have left the mansion and gone to a forest with monsters, even if it was for her own sister.


    I already had a high opinion of Ms. ire from our interactions, but I felt an even stronger affinity now.


    While there was nothing wrong with a refineddy, it was also nice to see someone a little more adventurous.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, you must scold her a little more than that.¡±


    ¡°Haha. But I don¡¯t see the problem. It is a very endearing trait, I think. And as long as I am a guest here, I could have Leo protect her.¡±


    ¡°¡­If Leo was to be with her, that would be moreforting than any other guard.¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t you agree?¡±


    Sebastian and Iughed, but Ms. ire had grown quiet.


    I looked at her to see what it was, and saw that her face had grown a little red as she looked down.


    Why?


    Was it because I had said she was endearing? But surely someone like her received much betterpliments regrly.


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi said I was¡­endearing¡­¡±


    She whispered to herself, but I couldn¡¯t hear the rest.


    ¡°But mydy, even if you have Leo with you, you must be careful.¡±


    ¡°¡­I understand.¡±


    She raised her head and answered when Sebastian talked to her.


    Her face had returned to normal and she had the usual cheerful expression.


    What was it?


    ¡°Wou? Wou! Wou!¡±


    ¡°Ah, Leo! Wait!¡±


    Leo saw that I had arrived, and so she wagged her tail and came running towards me.


    Tilura ran after her.


    Their roles had now been reversed.


    ¡°What is it, Leo? You can keep ying if you want to?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff¡­ Wou!¡±


    Leo bit my new clothes and started to pull on them.


    Perhaps she wanted me to join in¡­


    ¡°Wait a minute, Leo. Surely you don¡¯t want me to run around like that¡­¡±


    ¡°You should y too, Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°Wou! Wou!¡±


    Realizing the prospect of someone joining in, Tilura smiled at me with great expectation in her eyes.


    Leo continued to tug at my clothes and would not let go¡­


    ¡­I suppose I had no choice but to yield and y with them.


    While I didn¡¯t consider myself old, it could still be very exhausting when you had to run around and y with children and dogs.


    ¡°Hehe. Sorry, Mr. Takumi, but it looks like you¡¯ve been enlisted.¡±


    ¡°¡­Ms. ire¡­ Very well. I¡¯ll go.¡±


    ¡°Yes, do enjoy!¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, hurry!¡±


    ¡°Hehehe. I will watch you from here with Lady ire, so please y with them thoroughly.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    I was practically dragged away from the mansion and to the open space in the back garden. This was where Tilura and Leo had been running around a moment ago.


    After cheerfully seeing me off, Ms. ire and Sebastian smiled and watched over us.


    I will likely have sore muscles tomorrow¡­ Still, if it would make Leo and Tilura happy, it was fine.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, what game should we y?¡±


    ¡°Wou?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ What if I throw a stick, and Leo has to catch it before it hits the ground?¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°But what should I do?¡±


    ¡°You can ride on Leo¡¯s back. It¡¯s quite fun to feel the speed while Leo is running!¡±


    ¡°That does sound like fun!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    It was as if Leo understood my words without a doubt. And she then crouched low so that Tilura could get on top.


    She wasying lower than when Ms. ire and I had got on top, because Tilura was much shorter.


    So Leo was able to be considerate of others now¡­


    I felt a little bit emotional as I thought of such things and picked up a few tree branches that were on the ground.


    I suppose they were here because the back garden wasn¡¯t tended to as much.


    Or perhaps they were left there on purpose?


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, I¡¯m ready!¡±


    ¡°Alright then. Leo, let¡¯s go!¡¯


    Leo stood up and prepared to run now that Tilura was on her back.


    I faced the opposite direction of the mansion, and then threw the tree branch as far as I could.


    ¡­I really need to exercise more¡­ The branch did not go as far as I had hoped. It drew an arch through the air and looked like it wouldnd about twenty meters ahead.


    ¡°You can do it, Leo!¡±


    ¡°Gauu!¡±


    As Tilura cheered, Leo barked once that then dashed out like the wind.


    But I could see that she was trying to run steadily so that Tilura wouldn¡¯t fall off¡­that was very clever of Leo.


    Now that I think about it, weren¡¯t dogs faster than horses when it came to short distance races?


    Because dogs could reach their maximum speed much faster¡­ Well, my memory wasn¡¯t too clear about it, so I could be wrong.


    In the first ce, Leo wasrger than any horse, so she must be faster than race horses.


    In fact, when riding on her, her speed feltparable to riding a car down the highway.


    It could have been nearly 100 kilometer per hour?


    ¡­I wonder how shepared to cheetahs, who were said to be the fastestnd animal in the world¡­ If there was a simr animal in this world, I would like to see them race.


    It was with such thoughts that I watched Leo run.

 Chapter 21

    Chapter 21


    <strong>I Decided to go Shopping</strong>


    ¡°Guff!¡±


    ¡°Ahh! Leo is amazing!¡±


    Tilura seemed to be enjoying the speed at which Leo ran.


    While the branch I had thrown was drawing an arch in the air as it fell, Leo ran like the wind and caught it in her mouth.


    And with her jaw mped tightly around the tree branch, she came running back to me.


    ¡°Woah. Good job, Leo!¡±


    ¡°Wou! Wou!¡±


    ¡°Leo is amazing!¡±


    I took the branch from Leo¡¯s mouth, and since she lowered her head so that I could reach it, I patted her affectionately.


    Perhaps Tilura was copying me, as she too began to gently pat Leo on the back.


    Ah, the branch was broken¡­ Well, it should be expected, given her momentum when grabbing it.


    Next¡­let¡¯s see¡­ I wasn¡¯t able to throw it very far, so it was too easy for her.


    In that case¡­


    ¡°Alright. Leo, I¡¯m going to throw multiple branches at the same time! Can you catch them?¡±


    ¡°You can do it, Leo!¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    I sensed that Leo was saying that she would catch them all. And so I held the remaining branches and threw four of them together in the same direction as the first, but kept one.


    Leo jumped out at the same time and caught the first one in the air. And then she moved on to the next branch.


    And as I watched, I turned in a different direction¡­ If Leo¡¯s direction was 12 o¡¯clock, then I was at 3 o¡¯clock as I threw thest remaining branch.


    This one went farther and faster. Would Leo be able to catch it?


    ¡­Perhaps I was being a little mean¡­I would apologize to Leo about itter.


    But as I was thinking this, Leo turned around on paws that moved too fast for my eyes to follow, and then she caught the other branch.


    Uh, there were five branches in her mouth¡­ Ah, so she had caught all of them¡­that¡¯s amazing, Leo.


    Even I was surprised.


    However, Tilura did look like she was about to fall off.


    Things could get a little dangerous, so I would stop it here.


    ¡°Wou¡­wuff!¡±


    Leo returned and offered me the branches with a proud look on her face.


    ¡°That was incredible, Leo! You moved so quickly and caught all of them!¡±


    Tilura was also very excited as she rode on Leo¡¯s back.


    ¡°Leo, I really didn¡¯t think you would be able to catch them all. That was amazing.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Leo looked a little smug as I praised her and patted her on the head.


    ¡°How was it, Tilura?¡±


    ¡°Yes, it was fun! I¡¯ve never had so much fun in my life!¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s good to hear.¡±


    Ah, I realized that I wasn¡¯t using formalnguage with Tilura.


    But perhaps it wasn¡¯t necessary with children.


    Children seem to prefer it if you talk from their level.


    Regardless, I continued to y with Leo and Tilura in the back garden for some time after that.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, it¡¯s nearly time for lunch.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, the food has been prepared, so pleasee to the drawing room.¡±


    We seemed to have forgotten the time as we yed until Ms. ire and Sebastian called out to us. And so we all returned to the mansion in order to eat.


    As Tilura had been ying since finishing breakfast, she looked a little tired now.


    Well, she had been ill until recently. So we should probably not y anymore today¡­it would not be good for her.


    Besides, I also felt rather tired after being made to y with Leo and Tilura.


    But in spite of all that running, Leo did not look tired at all. And she wagged her tail with great expectation as she headed towards the drawing room.


    Just like during the morning, we sat around the table and ate some delicious food.


    Once Tilura had eaten enough, she began to rub her eyes, as if tired after all the excitement.


    Perhaps she took naps after lunch?


    Children should eat and sleep well so that they can grow.


    Ms. ire smiled as she watched her sister. And then she suddenly opened her mouth as if remembering something.


    ¡°By the way, Mr. Takumi. We will have to do something about yourck of personal effects.¡±


    Ah¡­ It¡¯s true that I dide here empty handed.


    The only thing I had were my clothes and a handkerchief.


    I didn¡¯t even have my phone or pocket book¡­


    ¡°Ah, but¡­ I don¡¯t have any money with me¡­¡±


    ¡°There¡¯s no need to worry about that. This house will pay for whatever it is that you need. After all, we owe you a debt for saving Tilura and myself. This is nothing inparison.¡±


    Hmm. She had kept speaking of gratitude and debts since yesterday, and had prepared a room and meals for me.


    But I didn¡¯t want to continue to rely on their hospitality¡­that being said, the fact was that I was dead broke.


    So for now, I would have to ept their help.


    Besides, being too modest could look rude. I would just borrow the money and repay it when I could. Yes, I would tell that to Sebastian.


    ¡­Because I had a feeling that Ms. ire would hear nothing of repaying them.


    And so I decided to think of it like that.


    ¡°¡­Well, then. I will be grateful for your help. I really don¡¯t have anything with me¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. Please don¡¯t hesitate to ept it. Now, I think we should head out to town after lunch so that we can go shopping.¡±


    ¡°To the town? After lunch?¡±


    ¡°These sorts of things should be taken care of quickly. Besides, it is a short trip if you go by horse. We will be able to return on the same day.¡±


    ¡°I see. Very well. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Good.¡±


    The town, huh¡­ I hadn¡¯t seen any other buildings on my way to this mansion while riding Leo, but I suppose it was a few kilometers away from here.


    If we could return on the same day, then it wouldn¡¯t be too far.


    But more importantly, I didn¡¯t know how to ride on a horse¡­


    ¡°Must I ride horseback? I¡¯ve never done that before¡­¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. We have a carriage here that you can use. Then it won¡¯t matter if you¡¯ve ridden one before or not.¡±


    ¡°If you are to go by carriage, then I will drive you.¡±


    ¡°Wou! Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    Oh, what is it? Leo?


    Up until a second ago she had been preupied with eating her sausages. But she suddenly interrupted my conversation with Ms. ire and Sebastian.


    Could it be that she¡­

 Chapter 22

    Chapter 22


    <strong>The Reason that Tilura was Holding onto Leo in the Morning</strong>


    ¡°Leo. Are you saying that I should ride on you?¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    Leo nodded to me.


    Upon seeing this, Ms. ire turned to Leo.


    ¡°Good Leo, I¡¯m terribly sorry, but could you not wait at the mansion for our return today?¡±


    ¡°Wou?¡±


    ¡°You want Leo to stay here?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I think that would be best. The very sight of Leo is bound to rm the people of the town.¡±


    ¡°¡­That¡¯s true.¡±


    Yes, Leo was a Silver Fenrir now.


    She was big enough to carry people, and had a wild and fierce face with visible fangs that could easily crush a human.


    And the beautiful silvery coat had both the majesty and sense of intimidation of wolves.


    I didn¡¯t know if the people in the nearby town knew a lot about Silver Fenrirs, but regardless, it would only be natural for them to be surprised if such arge wolf appeared there.


    ¡°¡­Wou?¡±


    Leo looked at me with a sad expression as if to say, ¡®you¡¯re leaving me behind?¡¯


    ¡°¡­Don¡¯t look at me like that¡­¡±


    There was nothing that I could do¡­ I still didn¡¯t know much about this world, and so it would be best to not cause a scene¡­ But¡­


    ¡°¡­Ms. ire.¡±


    ¡°¡­Well, after seeing Leo¡¯s face¡­it cannot be helped¡­ She really does like you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Wou! Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    Ms. ire gave her permission.


    Was she too soft when it came to Leo?


    Now that she was allowed toe with us, Leo moved close to me and licked my face once. It was her way of showing that she was happy.


    And perhaps it really was a good thing.


    Ever since I had rescued her, she had almost always had to stay home while I went to school or work.


    There were times when she would sulk or be very sad.


    And while I had thought that she might have gotten used to it, she really hadn¡¯t.


    Leo liked being around people, and so¡­.she would be a lot happier if she could be around me.


    ¡°I¡¯m happy for you, Leo. Now, say thank you to Ms. ire.¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­ Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Hehehe¡­ There are many people in town, and they may look at you with surprise, but it would be very helpful to us if you could stay calm.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    She barked once at Ms. ire and then nodded as if in agreement.


    Ms. ire watched this with a smile¡­and then Tilura, who had been rubbing her eyes, seemed to have finished eating.


    ¡°Sister. If Leo is going to town, then I want to go too!¡±


    ¡°¡­Tilura¡­¡±


    Tilura had be very attached to Leo.


    And she now wanted to follow Leo wherever she went.


    ¡°No, Tilura. You have only just recovered from your illness, and you are not yet in perfect condition. Besides, you are tired after ying with Leo and Mr. Takumi. You must stay home today.¡±


    ¡°Hmph. But I want to go to town with Leo¡­¡±


    Tilura grumbled to herself.


    Indeed, she had not recovered all of her energy yet.


    And she even looked tired right now, so it was best that she rested today.


    ¡°Lady Tilura¡­ As you were bed-ridden for so long, you got up this morning without sleeping much at all. If you take a nap now, you will feel much better, and Mr. Takumi and Leo would have returned by then.¡±


    ¡°¡­I understand.¡±


    Tilura nodded with reluctance. And then she looked down and became silent.


    ¡­I suppose we¡¯d have to buy her a gift in order to cheer her up? ¡­But I didn¡¯t have any money.


    ¡°Tilura. You woke up earlier than me or Sebastian, didn¡¯t you? And so you must go to bed withoutining.¡±


    ¡°I went to Lady Tilura¡¯s room this morning, but she was not there. I had to search the whole house.¡±


    ¡°Is that so?¡±


    ¡°Yes. She seemed very lively the night before, but I was worried that she might have a fever again in the morning. And so Sebastian and I went to her room. You can imagine how frantic we were when she wasn¡¯t there.¡±


    ¡°Lady ire and I gathered the servants together in order to search for her. As there are soldiers guarding the outside of the house, I asked them if they saw anyone leave, but they had not. And so we just searched the inside of the house.¡±


    So Tilura not being in her room could cause such a stir.


    Well, she had been sick, so it was understandable that they were worried.


    ¡°And so after we searched everywhere, we went to your room, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°¡­You mean¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. Tilura was clinging onto Leo and looked very peaceful¡­¡±


    ¡°She had wanted to be with Leo. Leo is veryfortable to hold.¡±


    So all of that had happened while I was sleeping¡­


    Because they had met yesterday and yed a little, Leo hadn¡¯t made any noise when Tilura came, and so she watched over her until Ms. ire arrived.


    Well, it was true that Leo¡¯s fur was incredibly soft.


    You could use her as a pillow and sleep veryfortably.


    ¡°So that¡¯s why I was woken up by Ms. ire this morning.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry. You looked sofortable sleeping there, but I couldn¡¯t pull Tilura away without saying anything and¡­besides, breakfast was ready.¡±


    ¡°No, I¡¯m d that you woke me up. I would have probably kept sleeping there for quite some time. That¡¯s howfortable the bed was.¡±


    If anything, it was my fault for not being able to wake up when someone came into the room¡­


    Previously, no matter how exhausted I was, I would always get up when my phone would start ringing for something job rted. And I would always wake up with the sun in order to feed Leo and go to work.


    ¡­I¡¯ll just say that it was because of the bed.


    ¡°Tilura. I understand that you wanted to see Leo, but you must not enter people¡¯s rooms without permission. Understand?¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes. I understand.¡±


    After berating Tilura, we all returned to our rooms in order to prepare to go to town.


    Yes, it was bad manners to enter a room where someone was sleeping, especially as ady¡­ Ms. ire was likely strict about such things.

 Chapter 23

    Chapter 23


    <strong>We Went Out To The Town</strong>


    While Tilura continued to look like she wanted toe with us until the end, her drowsiness finally caught up with her, and she fell asleep. And so Ms. Lyra had to carry her back to her room.


    Sebastian went to have the carriage prepared, and Ms. ire went to her room to prepare for the trip. I had also returned to my room(I was finally able to find it without a guide), but as I had no belongings, there wasn¡¯t really a need to get ready.


    Still, I decided to use the bathroom, as I didn¡¯t know what would happen while traveling or in the town.


    Nearly an hourter, I, Leo, Ms. ire and Sebastian gathered at the entrance hall.


    About ten butlers and maids were lined up at the entrance in order to see us off.


    Once we were all there, the door opened and two armored people stepped in.


    They were likely the people who had been guarding the gate when I first came here.


    ¡°Mr. Sebastian, the carriage is read.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Mr. Takumi, these are the two guards who will be apanying you.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m Takumi. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°I am Phillip. I am captain of the guards for the Liebert house. And I¡¯ve been charged with protecting you and Lady ire today.¡±


    ¡°I am Johanna. I am a guard for the Liebert house. And I too have been charged with protecting you.¡±


    Phillip and Johanna bowed together.


    I bowed back after thanking them.


    Now that I thought about it, they weren¡¯t holding the spears that I had seen them with yesterday¡­ Perhaps it was because they were inside the mansion now.


    As I wondered about this, I decided to ask Sebastian.


    ¡°While they do not carry them inside the house, it is also because they will be escorts in the town. It will be much easier to carry swords than long weapons like spears.¡±


    ¡°I see. I understand now.¡±


    Besides, they would get in the way of others and might be awkward inside of buildings.


    While it may be possible, swords would be easier to use in tight spaces. Even I could understand that.


    ¡°Now then, shall we go, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Ms. ire said, and so I was about to walk outside¡­


    ¡°Have a good day, Lady ire, Mr. Takumi. Please return safely!¡±


    I was about to move, and then those words came out of the mouths of ten servants all at once.


    Woah. It was rather amazing that so many people could synchronize their voices and bow like that.


    I couldn¡¯t help but flinch in surprise.


    This mansion really did have servants that were well trained. It showed how much of an upper ssdy Ms. ire was. It was with such thoughts that I stepped outside.


    Outside, I looked down the road that led to the gates, and saw that there was now a carriage and two horses attached to it, and two horses that were not.


    ¡°So this is a carriage¡­¡±


    I had been thinking about the kind with a roof, that I often saw in pictures and videos.


    But the one in front of me was a lot smaller.


    About two or three passengers could ride in the back, and then there was the driver¡¯s seat.


    It was shaped like a¡­how could I describe it¡­it reminded me of those two-wheeled rickshaws that you see in tourist areas in Japan.


    Only there was a driver¡¯s seat instead of handles for the person to hold, and there were four wheels instead of two.


    And then it was attached to the horses so that they could pull it.


    As I looked at it with a curious expression, I saw that there was something like a drawer underneath the passenger seat.


    I suppose that was where you could put your luggage.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, please get inside.¡±


    ¡°Ah, right.¡±


    Said Mr. Sebastian, and so I got into the carriage.


    Ms. ire climbed in after and sat down next to me.


    While I did get a little nervous at the proximity, I made sure that she didn¡¯t notice!


    I looked away until my heart calmed down, and saw that Phillip and Johanna had mounted their horses.


    I see. So they would ride separately to the side or behind us.


    ¡°And off we go. Ha!¡±


    Said Sebastian as he held the reins and made the horses trot.


    So I was headed to a town in this world¡­I wonder what it will be like¡­


    I imagined something like a medieval European town, so I suppose all of the houses will be made of stone or bricks?


    The mansion was made of stone. But it was marble, and had the look of a luxurious building, and was not other worldly.


    Though, there were small details that reminded me that this was another world.


    And so it was with a feeling of excitement that I rocked in the carriage as it headed towards the town.


    ¡°Now that I think about it, the Gifts that we talked about yesterday¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, what about them?¡±


    ¡°Since we are going to town, I thought that we could find out if I really have this ability.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Sebsastian, what do you think?¡±


    ¡°Yes. After you have finished shopping, I think we should go and look into it. I¡¯ve already told the others.¡±


    ¡°I see. Then we will find out if you have the Gift, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    We talked in the swaying carriage.


    Though, it didn¡¯t sway as much as I thought it would. Was it because it was a good carriage? Or was it that the roads were nicely maintained¡­


    From what I could see, the roads were made of gravel.


    It wasn¡¯t asphalt like the roads in Japan.


    I decided to assume that it was the carriage.


    By the way, Leo was riding alongside the carriage with the horses that the guards rode on.


    What I found surprising was that the horses weren¡¯t afraid of Leo.


    I had heard that horses scared easily, and were prone to being surprised or would run away if they encountered a frightening animal. But these horses may have been trained properly.


    But then again, Ms. ire had rode a horse to the forest, and she said that it ran away at the sight of an orc¡­


    Perhaps there was something about Leo that put the horses at ease.


    Before departure, Leo had licked the face of one horse and rubbed against its cheek. So maybe that was why.


    In any case, I was most curious about this Gift right now.


    It was an ability that was supposed to be a ¡®gift from god.¡¯


    And so I thought that it must be simr to the cheat abilities that characters always got in cartoons andics.


    Perhaps someone else from Japan hade to this world in the past, and they acquired an ability and called it a ¡®gift.¡¯


    Well, who knows what the reason was.


    And so I sat in the rocking carriage and wondered about what these Gifts were.

 Chapter 24

    Chapter 24


    <strong>We Arrived in the town of Ractos</strong>


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, why do you look so serious?¡±


    ¡°No¡­I was just thinking about what these Gifts are.¡±


    ¡°What they are¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, while it is said that Gifts are something that give various abilities, there are not many people who have them. And so people who do are treated as very special in their city or even country. However, it is not yet known why a person has the Gift.¡±


    ¡°Have they not studied people with Gifts?¡±


    ¡°I am sure that they have¡­ But ording to the books on the subject, no one has ever understood why and to whom they are given to.¡±


    ¡°So I suppose studying is not enough to find out.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Besides, there are all kinds of people. Some were recognized as having the Gift as soon as they were born, while others were suddenly able to use an ability after living for decades. I don¡¯t know if there are special conditions that have to be met, but studying just a few people is not likely to give you an answer.¡±


    ¡°I see. And people with them are very rare?¡±


    ¡°Yes. It is said that there is one in every few million.¡±


    In that case, there were probably a lot of people who had it but weren¡¯t known¡­


    Well, I suppose it depends on the poption of this world.


    The world that I was from had billions of people, so even if it was one in a few million, there could be around a thousand of them. But I doubted the poption was that big in this world.


    ¡°Then I suppose there is no point in trying to figure out what it is.¡±


    ¡°That is true, Mr. Takumi. Besides, with Gifts and other abilities¡­I think what is important is how you use them.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ You are saying that no matter how great your ability is, it is pointless if you don¡¯t use it. And an ability that seems insignificant can aplish great things if you know how to use it.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Indeed, it was about using an ability the right way.


    I didn¡¯t know if I really did have a Gift, but if I did, I would have to think carefully about how I meant to use it.


    Well, it really could be something useless or I may not have any Gift at all.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, Lady ire. We will arrive shortly.¡±


    We had traveled quite a lot as I was thinking, and so we were now close to the town.


    It had been about an hour since we left the mansion¡­it really wasn¡¯t far at all.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, we will leave the horses at the stable as soon as we enter the town. So please wait nearby after getting out.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I understand.¡±


    ¡°And you will have to keep an eye on Leo.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true.¡±


    I would do just as Ms. ire said and watch Leo carefully.


    Well, I doubted Leo would actually move away from me.


    But there was no telling what the surprised townspeople would do when they saw her.


    ¡­At least, Leo would not do anything¡­I think.


    The carriage stopped at the gate of the town that was surrounded by a high wall made of stone. After Sebastian talked with someone who I assumed was a guard, we were quickly let through.


    I did note that while we were passing through, the guards looked at Leo with great surprise.


    But who wouldn¡¯t be if they saw a wolf of that size?


    Once we were passed the gate, we rode the carriage for a little longer until we came out into a za.


    ¡°Now, Lady ire and Takumi, you can get off here.¡±


    ¡°Very well.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Apparently, this was the ce that they would park the carriage that Sebastian was talking about.


    So Ms. ire and I got out slowly, and then Sebastian took the horses and carriage, and Phillip took the two horses, and they left.


    Johanna would stay with us for protection.


    Leo was currently sitting quietly right next to me.


    I watched the horses and carriage move away and then scanned the za.


    It was filled with other people who had also traveled here by carriage.


    Some were the kind of roofed carriages that I had imagined, while others were like a wooden box with two wheels, etcetera. They were very unusual and I enjoyed just looking at them.


    But as I idly watched people unload their baggage, Ms. ire called out to me.


    ¡°What do you think? Now that you¡¯re in Ractos.¡±


    ¡°So this town is called Ractos? Well, I don¡¯t know, as I¡¯ve only just entered it. But it seems like it has a lot of people going in and out.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. This is not a very big town, but you must pass through it in order to go to the royal capital, so the traffic is always quite lively.¡±


    ¡°So everyone passes through, huh?¡±


    If you had to stop by on your travels, it would exin why there were so many people.


    But why did they have to go through it?


    ¡°One reason is because it¡¯s close to the royal capital, but the biggest reason is the forest and mountains around this town.¡±


    ¡°Do you mean that forest that I was in?¡±


    ¡°Yes. That forest is to the south of this town, but¡­ Monsters are often sighted in the forest and nearby area. It is the same with the forest and mountains to the north. And so many people will go through this town in order to travel safely.¡±


    ¡°I see. It¡¯s better to go through a safe town, rather than expose yourself to danger.¡±


    So this town would be the only way.


    I doubted there was anyone who prefered to travel through dangerous forests and mountains¡­unless their work required it¡­if there was such work.


    It was safer to go through the town, especially since going around the forest and mountains would waste a lot of time.


    That was why this town was so lively.


    ¡°That building on the other side of the za¡­ Is it made of wood?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Most of the buildings in this town are made of wood. While there are monsters, the forests ensure that there is no shortage of wood materials.¡±


    So the buildings weren¡¯t made of stone¡­ Well, building out of wood should be both easier and cheaper.


    Especially since they didn¡¯tck the resources.

 Chapter 25

    Chapter 25


    <strong>Ms. ire¡¯s Rich Lady Remark</strong>


    As I talked with Ms. ire and enjoyed the view of the town from the za, Sebastian and Philip returned after they had dropped off the horses and carriage.


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting. Now, let us head to a store where Mr. Takumi can buy some personal effects.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Of course.¡±


    Sebastian led the way out of the za, and Ms. ire and I followed. The two guards trailed behind us.


    We then went out into a big street.


    Many people walked in both directions, and the ce was filled with the ringing voices of merchants. It was even more lively than the za.


    ¡°This is the biggest market area in the town. They mostly sell food.¡±


    ¡°Oh.¡±


    ¡°In fact, Mr. Takumi, almost all of our food is bought from this market.¡±


    So all the ingredients for those delicious meals were bought here.


    Indeed, when I looked around, I could see that in the stores and street stalls, they were selling vegetables and meat.


    Ah, Leo¡­just because you found a ce that is filled with strings of hanging sausages, doesn¡¯t mean you can go over there.


    You ate so much for breakfast and lunch. And you¡¯re going to want it for dinner, aren¡¯t you? So you¡¯ll just have to be patient.


    I had to grab Leo¡¯s leg as she nearly wandered off towards the sausage store.


    ¡°¡­Wou¡­¡±


    Leo barked in a tone that was either apologetic or disappointment. I wasn¡¯t really sure. However, she did be quiet after that.


    ¡°Hehe. Leo really does like sausages.¡±


    ¡°Perhaps she likes them too much. There are times when she goes wild, so I have to be careful.¡±


    ¡°Well, we¡¯ll give you so much sausages tonight so that won¡¯t happen, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Ms. ire wasughing, but if Leo went berserk over her craving for sausages at her current size, then I might not be able to stop her.


    And so I needed to make sure to calm her down before it happened.


    Yes, Ms. ire really was soft when it came to Leo, wasn¡¯t she?


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Do you see any food here that catches your interest?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Nothing yet¡­from what I can see. I might find something if I take a closer look.¡±


    ¡°I see. Well, we didn¡¯te here today to buy food, so perhaps you can do that next time.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I would like to take my time and browse the area some other day.¡±


    That being said, everything that I could see now looked familiar enough to food from my own world.


    While they didn¡¯t sell any fish, the vegetables all looked mostly the same.


    The stall that we just passed seemed to be selling cabbages, and the stall to the right had pumpkins.


    It was the same with the meat. I didn¡¯t notice anything different.


    I suppose there were normal pigs and cows in this world?


    The orc that Leo killed in the forest had tasted like pork, so perhaps what looked like pork here was actually orc meat.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. There is a tailor at the end of this street. We should go there and get you some clothes.¡±


    As Sebastian led the way, we went through the great street market until we reached a small store that was made of wood.


    I then had Leo wait outside.


    She was much too big to fit in the store.


    ¡°Wee. ¡­Ah, if it isn¡¯t Lady ire. It¡¯s good to see you again.¡±


    When we entered, a man in his forties greeted us after seeing Ms. ire.


    ¡°Mr. Halton. I¡¯d like you to tailor some clothes for Mr. Takumi over here. Mr. Takumi, this is the owner, Mr. Halton.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m Takumi. It¡¯s nice to meet you.¡±


    ¡°Halton. I¡¯m very pleased to meet you too. So, you¡¯ll be needing some clothes? Very well, just wait one moment while I prepare.¡±


    ¡­Tailor?


    Were they going to be custom made clothes?


    But I didn¡¯t mind wearing clothes that were already made¡­


    Mr. Halton went to the back. I could see that he was preparing some kind of measuring instrument.


    ¡°Ms. ire, is it really necessary? I don¡¯t mind having something mass produced¡­¡±


    ¡°What? Mass produced clothing?¡±


    Huh? They don¡¯t have that here?


    There are no factories that mass produce the same clothes in different colors and sizes?


    ¡°Lady ire, most people buy clothes that are already made and are their size.¡±


    ¡°¡­Is that true? But I have never worn clothes that weren¡¯t tailored for me.¡±


    This is what it was like to hear rich people talk¡­


    She lived in such a great mansion, so I knew that she must have a lot of money, but she was even more removed from normal people than I thought.


    Regardless, I was relieved to learn that you could still buy clothes that were already made.


    ¡°¡­Uhh, could I look at the clothes you already have?¡±


    ¡°Oh? Ah, of course. Right over here.¡±


    I called to Mr. Halton who was preparing to take my measurements. And asked if I could see the clothes first.


    ¡°But I think you should have them tailored¡­¡±


    Ms. ire muttered behind me.


    Uh, but Ms. ire, wouldn¡¯t it be very expensive to have all of them custom made? Even though she would be lending me the money, I wanted to avoid spendingrge sums of money as much as possible.


    And so I talked with Mr. Halton about sizes and colors as I selected some clothes.


    I was also able to buy some underwear, including under shirts that were made of a material that would absorb sweat.


    While I say that I bought them, it was Sebastian who paid for them, and that money was from Ms. ire.


    ¡­I¡¯m sorry. But I will pay it back once I can earn some money.


    It was just as I was about to leave the store as a satisfied customer that Ms. ire suddenly put her foot down.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. I must insist that you have at least one item tailored for you.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ But these clothes really are enough for me¡­¡±


    ¡°No! It will not do! Surely you must also have some proper clothing as well!¡±


    ¡°¡­Ah¡­¡±


    I was starting to get a little scared of Ms. ire.


    Ultimately, I was overwhelmed by her intensity, and so it was decided that I would have something tailored for me.


    Mr. Halton took my measurements and then we discussed what should be made.


    But as I didn¡¯t really know what kind of clothes could be made, I just asked him to make something simr to the clothes I was currently wearing, which I had borrowed from Sebastian.

 Chapter 26

    Chapter 26


    <strong>I Encountered some Decadent? People in Another World</strong>


    While choosing clothes at the tailors, I found some shoes, and so I bought those as well.


    The shoes were either made of leather or wood. But as wooden shoes were hard and heavy, I chose the leather ones.


    I would be able to wear them just like the business shoes I usually wore to work.


    In fact, I was wearing those shoes right now.


    Now that I think about it, aside from my shoes, everything I had on me was the same as what I was wearing in my room before going to sleep. And yet, I somehow came here with my usual pair of shoes as well.


    There was no way that I would have been wearing them in my room. And I wouldn¡¯t have put them on before going to bed¡­ So, why then?


    ¡­As there was no point in thinking about it, I decided to push it into a corner in my mind.


    I should just consider myself lucky that I didn¡¯t have to walk through a forest with bare feet.


    ¡°Now then, it will take a few days for the clothes to be finished, so please visit around that time.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Thank you, Mr. Halton.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°It was my pleasure. As it is a request from Lady ire, you can be assured that the finished clothes will be most marvelous!¡±


    Mr. Halton said with surprising excitement, and then we left the shop behind us.


    ¡°Now we must buy some small items for your room. I think a general store will do. This way, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Sebastian guided the way, and we entered a different street then therge one we had been in earlier.


    After walking for some time, our way was blocked by six men who stood in front of us.


    ¡°Ah, look at these rich folks.¡±


    ¡°Hey, it just so happens that we¡¯re in some financial trouble.¡±


    ¡°Now, hand over whatever you got.¡±


    ¡°Ho, aren¡¯t you a prettydy.¡±


    ¡°Didn¡¯t they juste out of that tailor shop?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s a luxurious shop, so you must have some spare coins.¡±


    ¡­I don¡¯t know, but it seemed very cliche? They were talking like criminals from a certain era.


    And I was very annoyed that one of them was giving Ms. ire an odd look.


    ¡°¡­Lady ire, please step back.¡±


    Sebastian was standing in front of Ms. ire and I, but Phillip and Johanna now moved in front of him.


    They looked very ready to unsheath their swords.


    The men were armed with short des that were probably short swords? So it was no wonder that our guards were prepared for a fight.


    ¡°Oh? So that¡¯s how you want to do it?¡±


    ¡°Ha! Do you think we can be stopped with swords like that?¡±


    ¡°There are six of us and only two of you. This will be quick work. Hahahaha!¡±


    ¡°Ahahahaha!¡±


    They all started tough decadently.


    Even their appearance was telling, as they had spikes on their damaged clothes and the typical hair styles.


    The appearances and lines were like from a temte¡­I felt smart for being able to see it.


    As I mused about such things and watched, Leo quietly stepped forward.


    ¡°Wh-what is that!¡±


    ¡°A wolf? But it¡¯s so big¡­¡±


    ¡°Tsk. It¡¯s just a monster!¡±


    ¡°Vermin!¡±


    Perhaps it was just a bluff, but one of the men swung down his short sword in Leo¡¯s direction.


    ¡°Leo!¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Leo easily caught the swinging de between her teeth and then crushed it into pieces.


    ¡°¡­.What?¡±


    Upon seeing the short sword turn into fragments, the men were so surprised that their mouths hung open dumbly.


    Ah¡­the man who had swung was looking at the handle that he was holding as if he didn¡¯t understand what had happened.


    ¡°¡­Leo. Don¡¯t eat anything that you shouldn¡¯t.¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    And so Leo spat out the fragments in her mouth.


    Perhaps it was out of fear, but the men only watched, and seemed unable to move.


    ¡°Uh, Ms. ire. What should we do?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Phillip. Could you go and call the guards?¡±


    ¡°Yes, Lady ire!¡±


    Ms. ire called out to Phillip after thinking about it for a moment.


    Phillip replied quickly and then went running back the way we came in order to call the town guards.


    ¡°Sebastian, Johanna.¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    She then addressed Sebastian and Johanna, who quickly secured some rope and began to tie up the six men.


    ¡°While this is a very busy town¡­it¡¯s not a very safe one.¡±


    ¡°Are there many people like this?¡±


    ¡°I would not say that there are a lot, but they appear from time to time. They think that it will be easy to extort money from the merchants and travelers who pass through.¡±


    A lot of people visiting this town meant that there would also be a lot of people with money. Merchants who came to do business, and travelers with traveling funds.


    So there would be people who would target them¡­like these men.


    ¡°Lady ire, we have finished.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    Sebastian and Johanna swiftly tied up the men. By then, the men seemed to have finally recovered from the shock, and they started to shout.


    ¡°Let me go!¡±


    ¡°Untie me!¡±


    ¡°Damn it! Don¡¯t think that this is over!¡±


    ¡°It feels a little nice¡­¡±


    They shouted¡­different things. But they quieted down again when Leo opened her mouth, showing her great fangs as she howled at them.


    One of the men, who had been bound by Johanna, seemed to be taking the experience a little differently, but I ignored it.


    After that, Phillip returned with four town guards.


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting.¡±


    ¡°These must be the ruffians then? I am so very sorry, Lady ire. We will take them away at once.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    So Ms. ire was quite well known in this town.


    They had recognized her without any introductions.


    Well, she lived in such a big mansion that was near the town, so I suppose it wasn¡¯t surprising that she was famous.


    And they had spoken to her so formally and politely¡­


    When we get back, I might have to ask Sebastian about what kind of person Ms. ire was.


    Now that I think about it, there were so many things I hadn¡¯t asked yet. Such as why they were living in that mansion.


    She had called it a vi, which would suggest her real house was somewhere else. So, why was she living in the vi? I would like to ask about that.


    As I thought of such things, the guards took the tied up men away.

 Chapter 27

    Chapter 27


    <strong>I Told the Townspeople that Leo was Not Dangerous</strong>


    ¡°Hey, walk faster.¡±


    ¡°Stop trying to run away!¡±


    ¡°You really picked the wrong people to target.¡±


    ¡°How foolish of them¡­¡±


    I watched as the guards escorted the captured men away.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, I¡¯m very sorry. Leo shouldn¡¯t have to deal with people like that.¡±


    ¡°No, please don¡¯t worry about that. Well, it¡¯s not like I even said anything to Leo¡­¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­ Wuff! Wuf!¡±


    Somehow, I felt that Leo was saying, ¡®people like that need to be driven away.¡¯


    Andpared to them, the orc we saw in the forest had been much scarier.


    It was the first monster that I ever saw. The fact that I was being attacked by a pig faced spear-wielding creature was enough to scare someone like me, who had no idea what was happening.


    Of course, Leo still defeated it in an instant.


    Perhaps due to their clothes, those men had looked outrightical.


    Even if Leo wasn¡¯t here, Phillip and Johanna would have been enough to deal with them¡­that was the feeling I got.


    ¡°Um, excuse me.¡±


    ¡°Yes?¡±


    I was talking to Ms. ire after the men were taken away, when someone called out to me.


    It was a young woman.


    She looked a little younger than twenty. It wasn¡¯t often that I was approached by a woman, so I wondered what it could be.


    ¡°Is this wolf your familiar? And thedy next to you¡­did the guards say that she is Lady ire?¡±


    ¡°Uhh¡­this is Leo. I think that panion¡¯ would be a better word. And¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. I am ire. Is there a problem?¡±


    Ms. ire and I answered, and then the woman rushed up to us and fell to one knee like she was some kind of knight.


    Huh? Was it the way that knights knelt¡­? No, it was a little different¡­I was sure that I learned about it in history ss¡­ I think it was a way to greet your superiors.


    Perhaps it was something thatmon folk did towards the nobility.


    ¡°Pardon me. Lady ire, this is an auspicious day¡­¡±


    ¡°I am not here on public business today. And so there is no need for you¡­for you people to do that.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes. Thank you.¡±


    Upon hearing those words, the woman raised her head and stood up.


    You people?


    Wondering this, I looked around and saw that there were now a few dozen other people around us.


    What was happening!?


    ¡°Lady ire, is this wolf that is with you¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Being secretive might just result in troublesome rumors.¡±


    ¡°I believe so, Lady ire.¡±


    Ms. ire and Sebastian whispered to each other after hearing the woman¡¯s question.


    Oh, now they have turned to me?


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. About Leo¡­¡±


    ¡°What about her?¡±


    ¡°After seeing her size and how she broke that short sword, people will wonder what she is¡­ Would you allow us to tell them?¡±


    Sebastian asked.


    About Leo¡­ Did they mean about her being a Silver Fenrir?


    I didn¡¯t know why we should hide it.


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s fine. I had no intention of hiding that about Leo in the first ce.¡±


    ¡°Very well. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°¡­Uhh¡­?¡±


    As we were talking, the woman looked like she had been left behind.


    ¡°Um, what is your name?¡±


    ¡°Y-yes. I am Emeralda!¡±


    ¡°So, Emeralda. What were you going to say earlier?¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes. Um, it-it¡¯s about that wolf. It has silver fur and is with Lady ire. And it¡¯s so big, and it shattered a sword. So I think that it must be a Silver Fenrir. The teeth of a normal wolf would not have been able to do that.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s true. Your assumption is correct. This is the great Leo, a Silver Fenrir and familiar for Mr. Takumi over here. And so there is no danger.¡±


    ¡°Is that¡­so¡­?¡±


    The woman¡­Emeralda, looked at Leo fearfully.


    I recalled Ms. Gelda¡¯s reaction when we first went to the mansion.


    Hmm¡­ And there was one other thing that bothered me. How was Leo being with Ms. ire connected to her assumption about Leo being a Silver Fenrir¡­?


    I would have to ask about thatter.


    Sebastian would likely be very d to exin that to me.


    But right now, we had to make the people understand that Leo wasn¡¯t dangerous.


    Not just Emeralda, but the others who had gathered were clearly afraid as well.


    Some of them looked like their world was about to end. But Leo really wasn¡¯t that scary.


    ¡°Ms. Emeralda.¡±


    ¡°Ye-yes.¡±


    ¡°Leo is very sweet and not someone to fear. So please be at ease.¡±


    ¡°¡­But¡­ Silver Fenrirs are the strongest of monsters. Surely they are not sweet¡­¡±


    ¡°Leo, sit. ¡­See? What do you call that?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°¡­What?¡±


    I made Leo lie low and then patted her on the head.


    Upon seeing this, Ms. Emeralda and the other spectators became frozen with shock.


    ¡°Leo won¡¯t attack anyone. Besides, nothing has happened since we entered the town, and so the guards haven¡¯t said anything. Surely that is proof that Leo is harmless?¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­indeed¡­ When you put it like that, the guards did leave without saying anything¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­It¡¯s because I told them that Lady ire would guarantee their safety.¡±


    ¡­Sebastian muttered behind me.


    I hadn¡¯t known that he said such things to the guards, but it would exin why they didn¡¯t say anything at the gate, or when they came to take the prisoners.


    ¡°Ms. Miralda. Could youe over here?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­but¡­¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t be afraid. Here.¡±


    ¡°Ye-yes.¡±


    I called Ms. Emeralda over to Leo and raised her hand so that she patted Leo on the head.


    Leo didn¡¯t mind being petted by strangers, and she looked quite rxed.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°¡­It¡­does seem to be gentle.¡±


    ¡°Right?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ And the fur¡­it is so soft¡­ I didn¡¯t know that Silver Fenrirs felt like this¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, Leo does have a nice coat.¡±


    There was something about touching Leo¡¯s fur that soothed people¡­


    It was so soft and fluffy.


    That¡¯s why I could understand why Tilura liked to hug Leo so much.


    If only there was a pillow that felt the same as Leo¡­ I couldn¡¯t help but think such nonsensical thoughts.

 Chapter 28

    Chapter 28


    <strong>The General Store Was Very Big</strong>


    Ms. Emeralda was hesitant at first, but once she saw how calm Leo was, her expression softened and she looked like she was dreaming.


    ¡­It was not the kind of expression that mostdies would make in public.


    I was just a little put off by Ms. Emeralda¡¯s expression.


    ¡°Ms. Emeralda.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    As her expression started to turn to that of a drunken stupor, Ms. ire called to her.


    Emeralda suddenly returned to herself and pulled her hand back as she turned in Ms. ire¡¯s direction.


    ¡°Leo is a Silver Fenrir and our honored guest. Do you need any further assurance of safety?¡±


    ¡°N-no, indeed. I am¡­terribly sorry for being frightened.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. It¡¯s fine. It¡¯s true that Leo looks frightening.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    When I said that Leo looked frightening, Leo howled in protest.


    Sorry, Leo.


    I don¡¯t actually think you look frightening. I think you look very cool.


    ¡­But maybe Leo didn¡¯t find that ttering either?


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Perhaps Leo had read my expression, as she nodded with satisfaction.


    So she doesn¡¯t mind being cool¡­


    After that, we called the others around Emeralda and exined to them as well.


    While not all of them, most were satisfied in the end.


    Some of them even said that they would help spread the word in town that Leo was a safe Silver Fenrir.


    What a relief, Leo¡­ I would feel bad for her if people were afraid every time she visited.


    However, we were still not able to reach our destination, which was the general store, immediately.


    This was because, in order to prove that Leo was gentle, the people who had gathered had started to pet her.


    But I thought that Leo wouldn¡¯t like it if everyone was allowed to pet her freely, and so we had them line up for a turn to pet Leo¡¯s paw.


    Some people were in tears as they thanked her, or even bowed as if in worship. However, the line felt like it would never end.


    Nearly two hourster, the line of people who wanted to pet Leo had finally ended, and we also separated from Ms. Emeralda. After that, we were able to go to the general store.


    ¡°While we were greatly dyed¡­ Mr. Takumi, here is the biggest general store in Ractos.¡±


    ¡°Woah.¡±


    I couldn¡¯t help but mutter.


    While it wasn¡¯t as big as Ms. ire¡¯s mansion, it was bigger than any building that I had seen in the town so far.


    It was three stories tall and made of wood. And the entrance looked more like a great gate.


    Sebastian then led us inside.


    But as there would not be enough space, I had Leo wait outside again.


    Please stay with Phillip, Leo.


    I felt a little bad, as she looked at me with sad eyes as we entered the store.


    ¡°Wee to our store, Lady ire.¡±


    ¡°Hein, it¡¯s good to see you today.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. And who is¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, I¡¯m Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. I am Hein. The owner of this shop.¡±


    Mr. Hein was a slightly plump man who wore expensive-looking clothes and had a mustache that twirled out on both sides.


    That moustache¡­I think they called it a kaiser mustache.


    I had wanted to grow one like that when I was a child¡­but I won¡¯t do it now, as I know it won¡¯t suit me.


    Sebastian had been leading us until now, but Mr. Hein took the lead as he showed us the different products in the store.


    They had all kinds of items, including food.


    But I was a little surprised when I saw a certain section on the second floor.


    This was because they had a variety of swords, spears, and armor.


    ording to Mr. Hein, they were not as good as what you could get at a store that specializes in such things. But they were good for beginners or people who wanted to use them as decoration.


    And so they were appropriately cheap.


    I had also once dreamed of fighting with a sword, but I decided to refrain from buying one here.


    Even if it was affordable, this wasn¡¯t my money.


    I would probably buy one once I could find a way to make money on my own.


    Mr. Hein continued to take us around the store, but the ce¡­had so much stuff. It was almost more like a shopping center than a general store.


    Though, he owned everything, so it wasn¡¯t like there were separate stores inside.


    It was just a single store that happened to have a great variety of products.


    There was another thing that caught my interest as Mr. Hein showed me around. It was the clocks.


    There were pocket watches andrger table clocks etcetera.


    The clocks themselves looked ordinary enough, until I noticed something while staring at them.


    They didn¡¯t have hands for minutes and seconds.


    While walking, I asked Ms. ire about it, and she said that in this world, clocks only measured the hours, and they didn¡¯t think about minutes and seconds.


    And so she was quite surprised when I told her that an hour was 60 minutes and a minute was sixty seconds.


    However, I was even more surprised when I inspected the clocks further.


    In my world, there were 12 numbers, and once the hand made two full rotations, it was a single day.


    However, there were 14 numbers on these clocks, and they rotated twice to make a day. In other words, there were 28 hours in a day here.


    Perhaps the rotation speed was different? Or they thought of numbers differently¡­


    Up until this point, the only big divergence between this world and mind had been monsters. So this was rather surprising.


    I suppose that an hour would not be 60 minutes then.


    ¡°Is there something that has caught your interest?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ I was wondering about the clocks.¡±


    ¡°You will be able to tell the time with precision if you have a clock. You could ce one in your room.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I would like to have a pocket watch to carry with me, and one to put in my room¡­¡±


    But it was Mr. ire who was buying them.


    And so it was always a little awkward to say that I wanted something.


    ¡°I do not mind. You should buy those two.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    Ms. ire happily agreed as she picked them up and handed them to Mr. Hein.


    ¡°Thank you. Is there anything else that you need?¡±


    ¡°Let me see¡­¡±


    While I couldn¡¯t just buy anything that caught my interest, I did want to get things that I actually needed.


    And so I followed Mr. Hein around the store and bought a few items that I thought I would need.


    I was quite pleased to find something that looked closer to an actual shaving razor than the knife I had been given in the morning.


    It wasn¡¯t shaped like ¡®T¡¯ but it should make shaving a little easier.


    I didn¡¯t want to have to cut up my face every morning.


    Now my morning shaving would be perfect¡­maybe.


    ¡­I had to hurry up and get used to using it.

 Chapter 29

    Chapter 29


    <strong>On our way back, I remembered something</strong>


    For a while, I continued to look at the products that Mr. Hein showed me, when Sebastian rmended that I buy two small leather bags and two big ones. He said that I would need them eventually.


    Therge bags were about the size of my face, and the smaller ones were slightlyrger than my fist.


    Apparently, in this world, they were used like wallets.


    They did not use paper money here. Everything was in coins, and so they used bags like this instead of long wallets.


    I also got a bag to carry belongings when going out.


    Well, it was more of a knapsack with just one string.


    You pulled the durable-looking string, and the opening would close, and you could hang the bag over your shoulder.


    There were a few other small items that I picked up before paying.


    The payments I left to Sebastian.


    Sorry, and thank you.


    But before he paid, I pulled Sebastian away from Ms. ire so that we could talk in private.


    ¡°Excuse me, Sebastian. Do you have a minute?¡±


    ¡°Oh, what is it, Mr. Takumi? Is there something else that you want?¡±


    ¡°No, it¡¯s not that. But I want to buy these two essories¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm. I didn¡¯t know that you liked to wear such things, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°No, not for me. ¡­Um¡­for Ms. ire and Tilura¡­¡±


    ¡°I see. So it¡¯s a present.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s right¡­ But as you know, I don¡¯t have any money right now.¡±


    ¡°That is true.¡±


    ¡°But I intend on paying it back one day. So if you could put it down as a loan?¡±


    ¡°Hmmm¡­ It seems hardly necessary just for some essories¡­but I suppose it would be best if they are from you, Mr. Takumi. Very well.¡±


    ¡°Thank you! I¡¯ll make money and return it very soon!¡±


    ¡°Hohoho. You really do not need to rush. You should get ustomed to this world first.¡±


    ¡°Well, it wouldn¡¯t feel right if I did that.¡±


    ¡°I see. You are certainly an honest person, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    As we talked, I handed them to Sebastian. One was a hair ornament that looked like a pretty flower, and the other was a ne that was shaped like a silver wolf.


    ¡°Thank you for your patronage. We look forward to seeing you again.¡±


    ¡°Yes, we wille again.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Mr. Hein.¡±


    When the shopping was finished, we took the items and headed towards the za where we left the carriages.


    Of course, I carried most of the stuff.


    As I was the one who was going to use it, I couldn¡¯t trouble Sebastian or the guards by making them carry so much. Of course, it was the same with Ms. ire.


    As there were clothes too, it was a lot to hold, but not so heavy that I couldn¡¯t manage.


    Leo was waiting for us outside of the shop. Her tail wagged as she greeted us, and then we went off towards the za.


    ¡°That scene earlier has caused quite the dy for us.¡±


    ¡°Yes. It will likely be night by the time we get back.¡±


    When I looked up at the sky, I saw that the sun was already descending.


    It would start to get dark by the time we reached the carriage.


    ¡°Do you think that Tilura will be sleeping quietly?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know¡­ She looked quite tired before we left the mansion, but she might be awake now and waiting for Leo to return.¡±


    ¡°I feel bad for making her wait.¡±


    ¡°It is fine. Ady must learn how to wait.¡±


    ¡°Ady, huh? ¡­And yet, Ms. ire, you were so worried about Tilura, that you went to the forest because you couldn¡¯t wait to get medicine from town?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. You mustn¡¯t keep bringing that up!¡±


    Ms. ire looked away with an embarrassed expression.


    Sebastian watched us with a smile.


    Still, I found that I really enjoyed myself when walking down the road like this and soaking up the atmosphere of the town.


    Perhaps it was because I had rarely just taken a rxed stroll through town or gone shopping.


    Ever since I started to live alone, it was just part-time work and school¡­and then I graduated and worked full time.


    Any moment I had to spare was spent with Leo.


    I had fun ying with Leo, but it probably is important to be able to spend time with other people like this.


    And so I relished this enjoyable moment and walked towards the za on light feet.


    But as I thought of such things, I realized that I had forgotten something.


    ¡°Now that I think about it¡­¡±


    ¡°What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Weren¡¯t we going to look into my Gift?¡±


    ¡°¡­I had forgotten.¡±


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi, while we will be dyed a little, let us go and find out right now. The ce is close to the za.¡±


    ¡°Very well.¡±


    I didn¡¯t know how long it would take, but if it was close to the za, then we probably won¡¯t be dyed too much.


    And so I quickened my pace and hurried off to this ce that Sebastian led us to.


    The ce could be reached from the great street after turning into an alley and walking a short distance.


    There was a sign with a hexagram, ck doors, and the walls of the building were gray. At a nce, it looked very suspicious indeed.


    But since it was Sebastian who guided us, it must be safe. Though, I probably wouldn¡¯t have entered such a ce if I had been passing by on my own¡­


    ¡°Excuse me.¡±


    Sebastian said as he entered the building first.


    Of course, Leo waited outside. This time Johanna stayed with her.


    After Sebastian entered and announced himself, a woman came out from the back.


    ¡°You¡¯rete. I grew tired of waiting.¡±


    She was a woman in her sixties and with hair that had gonepletely white. And her back was a little crooked.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, Isabelle. Something unexpected happened, and we were dyed.¡±


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s fine. And I¡¯m delighted to see you, Lady ire.¡±


    ¡°Yes, grandmother Isabelle. It has been too long.¡±


    ¡°It really has. ¡­Now, Sebastian. Is this the man who wants to have his magic energy tested?¡±


    ¡°Yes, he is.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    Magic energy? Weren¡¯t we supposed to find out about my Gift?


    Ah, wait¡­ Ms. ire did say that looking into the amount of magic energy could tell you about the Gift.


    So I suppose we should just do it.


    But I feel a little nervous now¡­

 Chapter 30

    Chapter 30


    <strong>I found out that I had the Gift of Weed Cultivation</strong>


    ¡°My name is Isabelle. I¡¯m a stingy old woman who runs this magic item shop.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s nice to meet you. I¡¯m Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Takumi¡­eh? Alright, then put your hand on this crystal ball.¡±


    ¡°All right.¡±


    I moved over to Ms. Isabelle and touched the crystal ball thaty on top of the store counter.


    It was about the size of a bowling ball. And while it wasn¡¯tpletely transparent, it was decently clear.


    And due to Ms. Isabelle¡¯s appearance, I felt like I was seeing a fortune teller.


    However, there was something about the crystal that was different from any crystal from my world.


    In the center of the sphere, there was a red dot.


    I doubted it was something that had got mixed inside as the crystal wasn¡¯t ss. And the red dot seemed to be blinking at even intervals.


    Well, it was a magic item.


    Once my hand was on it, the red dot began to blink faster. Then it suddenly turned a green color and unleashed a light that illuminated the whole room.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ This¡­¡±


    ¡°How is it, Isabelle?¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t rush me¡­ Yes, I see¡­¡±


    Deep in thought, Ms. Isabelle gazed into the crystal ball.


    In the meantime, the crystal continued to alternate between red and green as it blinked.


    While it wasn¡¯t blindingly bright, the red and green lights felt like they would be bad for your eyes.


    ¡°I understand it now, your magic energy, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°¡­How is it?¡±


    I asked. And then Ms. Isabelle narrowed her eyebrows and began to talk.


    ¡°You have quite a lot of magic energy. Enough that I think you could be a decent sorcerer if you learned how to use it.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    If I had a lot of magic energy, I should be able to use magic.


    That meant my childhood dream of fighting with magic could be true.


    Not that I wanted to fight.


    ¡°But¡­this¡­¡±


    ¡°What?¡±


    ¡°Did something happen? Isabelle?¡±


    ¡°¡­You. You have the Gift.¡±


    ¡°So he has it after all.¡±


    ¡°Did you know, Lady ire?¡±


    ¡°Not exactly¡­ But there was something that happened that could only be exined if he had it.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    ¡°So, what kind of Gift is it?¡±


    Sebastian asked Isabelle as if he couldn¡¯t wait to find out.


    It was like Sebastian was more curious about my Gift than I was.


    Of course, I was also looking forward to knowing what my Gift would allow me to do.


    ¡°The Gift is called ¡®Weed Cultivation¡¯¡­ Well, it seems to be what it sounds like. You have the ability to cultivate weeds.¡±


    ¡°Weed Cultivation¡­¡±


    Uh¡­ That soundedpletely useless to me¡­


    As my expectations had been high, I felt rather shocked.


    ¡°And what can this Gift be used for?¡±


    ¡°Small nts, other than vegetables¡­or any farm nts, really. You can cultivate them wherever you are. That¡¯s what it does.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see. So then the Ramogi really was¡­¡±


    ¡°Is there something you witnessed, Lady ire?¡±


    ¡°Yes. When I first met Mr. Takumi in the forest, we were searching for Ramogi¡­ But we couldn¡¯t find it anywhere. But then, when Mr. Takumi sat down to rest, there just happened to be some Ramogi there by coincidence¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­In other words, Lady ire, you believe it was because of his Weed Cultivation ability?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I do believe that. What do you think, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed¡­¡±


    At that time, I had been thinking about what Ramogi was while I sat down.


    And I remember that Ramogi was growing where I ced my hand.


    In other words, it would suggest that my desire for Ramogi had activated the Gift so that it grew.


    ¡°¡­During that time, I was imagining what this elusive Ramogi was. And while I didn¡¯t tell Ms. ire about it, the Ramogi grew from the ground where I ced my hand.¡±


    ¡°Is that so? Then it¡¯s true. We were able to get the Ramogi because of your gift, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°It appears to be the case.¡±


    ¡°Takumi. That story matched what I saw. You are able to make nts grow by just thinking about them. ¡­It is a useful ability.¡±


    Was it really¡­? What if the Ramogi really had just been there by coincidence. And could growing weeds really be useful?


    ¡°Oh, and Mr. Takumi also dried the Ramogi once. Is that also part of his Weed Cultivation ability?¡±


    ¡°Ah, yes. It dried after I held it. And so it could be used as medicine immediately.¡±


    ¡°That must be part of the Weed Cultivation ability as well. So you can change nts so that they are in a state where they can be used for medicine.¡±


    ¡°When that happened, I was also thinking about how we could use it immediately if it was only dried.¡±


    ¡°Yes, there is no mistake then.¡±


    In other words, I could make nts other than vegetables grow. And I could change them into a state for immediate use¡­


    Hmm. It sounded sort of useful, but not that useful¡­


    I suppose if I wanted to open up my own medicine shop.


    ¡°Thank you, Ms. Isabelle. Now I know what my ability is.¡±


    ¡°All I did was check your magic energy. Listen to me, Takumi¡­ I have one word of advice.¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    ¡°A Gift is a special power. It¡¯s up to you how you use it. And you are the only one who can know its true potential. And so you must think about it carefully before using it.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes. I understand.¡±


    ¡®Weed Cultivation.¡¯ ¡­The name had made me think it was pretty useless at first, but perhaps I was wrong.


    Yes, I would think hard about how I could put this ability to use in the future.


    ¡°Well, since Mr. Takumi knows about his ability now, it¡¯s time that we take our leave.¡±


    ¡°What? You¡¯re leaving already?¡±


    ¡°Yes. The sun ising down. We need to hurry and return to the mansion. Lady Tilura will be waiting.¡±


    ¡°I see. But then you muste earlier next time. So we will have plenty of time to talk.¡±


    ¡°Yes, we will do that.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Isabelle.¡±


    ¡°Ms. Isabelle. Thank you so much.¡±


    We thanked Ms. Isabelle and then left the store.


    Perhaps she was lonely, as she had to run the store by herself.


    The next time we came to town, I would like to visit her and hear stories about magic tools.


    We reunited with Leo and Johanna, who were waiting outside, and then we rushed back down the road in the carriage, so as to not keep Tilura waiting too long.


    Phillip had entered the store with us, but aside from looking a little surprised when he heard about my gift, he waited quietly behind us.


    He was a hard-working guard.

 Chapter 31

    Chapter 31


    <strong>We Returned to the Mansion</strong>


    ¡°Lady ire, Mr. Takumi. We¡¯ve arrived.¡±


    Sebastian said as the carriage passed through the gate to the mansion.


    It continued a little farther and then stopped in front of the entrance.


    ¡°This is so muchter than nned.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I hope that Tilura hasn¡¯t grown tired of waiting¡­¡±


    The sun had fallenpletely, and it was now night time.


    I nced at the pocket watch that I had bought, and it showed that it was 10 o¡¯clock.


    ¡­Which I suppose would be 8 or 9 o¡¯clock in Japan.


    ¡°Wee back, Lady ire and Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    ¡°¡­Thank you for greeting us. We¡¯re finally back.¡±


    When we entered the mansion, the entrance hall was filled with the same number of servants as had been there when I arrived yesterday.


    I had felt the same when leaving, but it was a little embarrassing to have so many people see you off.


    Up until recently, there had been no one to see me off or wee me back, except for Leo.


    ¡°Lady ire. Preparations for dinner have beenpleted.¡±


    ¡°Very good. Well, Mr. Takumi, let¡¯s eat in the dining hall once you have dropped off your belongings.¡±


    ¡°Yes. ¡­Ah, where is the dining hall?¡±


    Apparently, that¡¯s where they were going to eat.


    Previously, we had been eating in the guest room, and so I had not gone to the dining hall yet.


    ¡°Then I will show you the way. But we must take your belongings first, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    Lyra stepped forward and took half of my baggage.


    While she was a servant, my pride would not allow a woman to carry all of it, and so I carried half of them myself.


    ¡°I¡¯ll leave it to you, Lyra.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Lady ire.¡±


    Lyra bowed to Lady ire while holding the things, and then she walked with me towards the room that I was staying in.


    ¡°Phew¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I let out a sigh once we had arrived and I put my things down on the ground.


    I was still not ustomed to this world, and we had gone to a town for the first time¡­ It seemed that I was more tired than I had thought.


    That being said, this was still nothingpared to how things were in my world, where I might have to work for over a month without rest¡­


    Lyra also put everything onto the ground. I decided to organizeter and head to the dining hall, when I stopped.


    First, I had to praise Leo.


    ¡°Leo,e here.¡±


    ¡°Wou?¡±


    ¡°You were so good for letting the townspeople pet you like that. Because of that, they¡¯ll now understand that you¡¯re not to be feared.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    Leo came to me and put her face close to mine, and so I petted her thoroughly and praised her.


    It was important to praise her when she did something good.


    ¡°Also, you really helped us when those strange people attacked us. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    Judging from her manner, I had a feeling that Leo was saying, ¡®they were easy!¡¯


    Indeed, it probably was easy for Leo. If anything, I almost felt sorry for the men.


    This time, Leo had only destroyed one sword, but if she had gone at them seriously, she would have easily torn through them with her ws.


    But monsters were one thing. I hoped she wouldn¡¯t have to fight people if possible.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. Thanks to you, I have nothing to worry about, even when in an unfamiliar ce.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Leo rubbed her face against mine yfully as I thanked her.


    Really. While I had been thinking about the Gift and magic energy a lot today, I felt confident and not lonely as long as Leo was with me.


    I was so thankful for her.


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi. We should be going¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, right. ¡­Sorry.¡±


    ¡°¡­Not at all.¡±


    As I continued to sit there and pet Leo, Ms. Lyra called to me.


    ¡­I had be too relieved after returning to my room, and forgot that she was there¡­


    I felt a little embarrassed that she had been watching us this whole time.


    I could feel that my face had grown a little hot as Leo and I followed after Lyra towards the dining hall.


    Lyra¡­would asionally nce towards Leo, and her fingers would twitch¡­ Could it be that she wanted to pet Leo?


    Now that I thought about it, from the very beginning, she had not been afraid of Leo and said that she found her cute.


    If we had timeter, I would let her pet Leo.


    Besides, Leo seemed to have taken to Lyra and the other servants, as they were the ones to bring out the milk and sausages.


    We entered the dining hall, which was arge room with a long table.


    I think that about twenty people could sit at it?


    Ms. ire sat at the head of the table.


    And Tilura sat down next to her.


    As always, Sebastian stood waiting right behind them.


    Now that I think about it, when did the servants eat¡­?


    ¡°Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting, Ms. ire. And sorry for being sote, Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Wee back Mr. Takumi! And you too Leo!¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    Tilura¡¯s eyes shone as she looked at me¡­well, Leo.


    She really had be attached to her.


    Even now, she was about to jump out of her seat and pounce on Leo. And it was only because Ms. ire had grabbed the hem of her dress that she didn¡¯t do just that.


    Now, I should take a seat¡­ But where was I supposed to sit¡­?


    ¡°Uhh¡­where should I sit?¡±


    I didn¡¯t want to be known as someone who had ill manners. But making a mistake would be even more embarrassing.


    It was momentarily embarrassing to ask, but eternally embarrassing to not ask.


    ¡°Please sit over here.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Seeing the table from the entrance, Ms. ire and Tilura were sitting to the far right.


    Lyra guided me to the far left seat.


    There was no chair next to me, so Leo would have room to sit at the table.


    Internally, I thanked the servants for their consideration.


    ¡°Normally, it would be proper for you to sit next to Tilura. But we don¡¯t want to be so formal now, and so I had you sit on the opposite side of us. It will be easier to talk if we can see each other¡¯s faces.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha, that is true. I¡¯m d, as I don¡¯t know a lot about such manners. I would very much appreciate it if you told me when I do something wrong.¡±


    ¡°Yes, you can count on it.¡±


    ¡°I will tell you too!¡±


    ¡°In your case, Tilura, you will have to actually learn some manners first.¡±


    ¡°¡­I will try.¡±


    ¡°Wou! Wou!¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. Tilura, I¡¯ll do my best to learn with you. And look, Leo is cheering you on.¡±


    ¡°Yes! I will do my best!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±

 Chapter 32

    Chapter 32


    <strong>I Thanked the Head Cook for Making Dinner</strong>


    I talked with Ms. ire and Tilura amidst a harmonious atmosphere, when the doors to the dining hall opened and the food was carried in on a wagon.


    Tonight¡¯s dinner was a saut¨¦ meat with sauce, a sd with a much thicker dressing than the one served at breakfast, and a white soup¡­or was it a potage?


    They had said that since yesterday was a wee dinner for me and Leo, they had served extra food and put a lot of effort into the presentation.


    I think that this was probably closer to how they usually dined.


    There was a te of sausages in front of Leo now, but there were fewer sausages than yesterday. But she had a sd to make up for it.


    And on the floor, right where Leo sat, there was arge bowl that was filled with milk.


    ¡°Lady ire, Lady Tilura, Mr. Takumi. Please eat.¡±


    Said a woman, who looked like the cook, as she wore a chef¡¯s hat. And so we began to eat.


    First, was the sd¡­unlike the refreshing dressing from this morning, this one was rich and tasty.


    One had to eat a lot of vegetables to stay healthy!


    Next was the main dish, the meat.


    The texture and vor was simr to beef, and it was quite juicy, and delicious whenbined with the sauce.


    I then tried the soup.


    It was light, and easily washed away the oil in my mouth. It perfectlyplemented the meat.


    ¡­All of the food in this world was incredibly delicious.


    While there were differences in culture, as they did not have rice or miso here, I had noints regarding the food, which greatly helped in easing my anxiety about the future.


    ¡°Mmm. This really is delicious.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    When Leo and Iplemented the food, the woman in the chef¡¯s hat thanked us.


    ¡°You really seem to enjoy the food, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°More than I can express. Everything I¡¯ve eaten sinceing here has been amazing.¡±


    ¡°Hehehe. You must be very pleased, Helena.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Lady ire. As cooks, hearing that our food is delicious is our greatest joy.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, this is Helena. The head cook of this house.¡±


    ¡°Ms. Helena¡­ Thank you for such a wonderful meal.¡±


    ¡°No, thank you for being soplimentary towards the food that we made.¡±


    She thanked me back, and the atmosphere became a little awkward.


    Well, one was thankful for the food, and the other thankful for thepliments. I suppose it was a good thing¡­I think.


    Also, she looked rather young¡­perhaps in her twenties. It must be rather difficult, being the head cook at that age.


    Most of the head cooks I had seen at restaurants were middle-aged men.


    Well, maybe it was just me. Regardless, it was pretty impressive that she had that position.


    And since everything I had eaten was delicious, it was clear that she was very capable.


    ¡°Helena! Your food is delicious as always!¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Lady Tilura.¡±


    Tilura had the biggest smile on her face as she ate her dinner.


    As she had taken a nap, she was full of energy and in a good mood.


    ¡­Leo might have to stay up quitete tonight.


    After dinner, there was tea time.


    The tea that Ms. Lyra made was always great.


    Leo was full after eating sausages, and she was now curled up on the floor.


    Tilura was pressed up against Leo¡¯s stomach, and seemed to be very happy as she was enveloped in the soft, silvery fur.


    I had thought that she¡¯d want to y, but she was surprisingly quiet.


    It must be because Leo¡¯s fur was thatfortable to be wrapped in.


    Sebastian, Lyra, and Gelda were standing in the back. And they would quickly pour us more tea when a cup was empty.


    ¡­Thank you. They are delicious.


    Thoroughly satisfied at the sight of us smacking our lips at her work, Ms. Helena had taken the dish and left the dining hall.


    Since this was such aid back atmosphere, I could perhaps ask some questions without hesitating.


    I really knew almost nothing about Ms. ire.


    ¡°Ms. ire.¡±


    ¡°What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Um, I was just wondering¡­ Yesterday, I told you about myself. So today, I would like to learn more about you.¡±


    ¡°About¡­me? Oh¡­well, I¡­ What can I say¡­ I¡¯m starting to get nervous¡­¡±


    Had I said something wrong?


    While Ms. ire looked taken aback for a moment, she then blushed and began to mutter to herself.


    And since she was on the other side of the table, I was not able to hear her.


    ¡°¡­Uh, well. I met you in the forest yesterday, but I was wondering about how you came to live in this mansion. Also, it¡¯s not just the servants, but even the townspeople seemed to have a great respect for you. And I was wondering why that¡­is¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­I see¡­ Very well. It would not be fair for me to have asked about you, and not say anything about myself¡­ Really, I almost took that a different way¡­¡±


    Huh? What¡­what did she just say¡­?


    ¡°Ms. ire?¡±


    ¡°¡­No, it¡¯s nothing. Um, yes, about why I am living in this mansion, yes?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°To put it simply, Tilura and I are here in order to be away from our father.¡±


    Away from their father. That sounded a little ominous¡­ Had their father done something?

 Chapter 33

    Chapter 33


    <strong>I Listened to Ms. ire¡¯s Story</strong>


    ¡°Father¡­ You are here to be away from your own father, Ms. ire?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Our father is very fond of us, but¡­ He keeps talking about how I need to get married.¡±


    ¡°Married¡­¡±


    ¡°Nearly every day, he talks about acquaintances and colleagues who are unmarried. On one of the worst days, he brought over five people¡­ It was very tiring to have to turn them all down¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ He sounds very entric.¡±


    I had no children, and wasn¡¯t even married myself, so I didn¡¯t know the feeling. But I always thought that fathers who doted on their daughters tended to not want them to marry.


    Of course, I¡¯m sure there were exceptions. Especially if the daughter remained unmarried for a very long time¡­


    That being said, Ms. ire was still quite young.


    And everyone would agree that she was a great beauty.


    So surely she wouldn¡¯t have trouble finding someone, without a father busily trying to find a match.


    ¡­I had to admit, there was a slight pang in my chest when this subject was brought up, but I wouldn¡¯t think about it.


    That being said, it at least seemed like this wasn¡¯t a matter of father and daughter not getting along.


    I was d to learn that it wasn¡¯t so serious.


    Well, perhaps it was very troublesome for Ms. ire.


    ¡°And to make matters worse, he is already talking about matches for Tilura. And she has only just turned 10.¡±


    ¡°Even Tilura¡­¡±


    I looked at the girl who was wrapped up in Leo. She looked back at me with a puzzled expression after hearing her name.


    ¡°Day after day, he would talk about marriage. I grew very tired of it and¡­and decided that I would leave and live in this mansion.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Yes, I can imagine how that would get old very quickly.¡±


    ¡°Exactly! Mr. Takumi, listen to me! Father would¡­¡±


    After that, Ms. ire aired her grievances about her father for what seemed like half an hour.


    Women were very intimidating when they became like this¡­


    Well, I could only imagine how stressful it must have been to keep these emotions to herself for so long. She did not seem like the type toin about others to servants.


    I could see that even Sebastian and the maids were smiling awkwardly in the back.


    ¡°¡­Oh, forgive me.¡±


    ¡°No, I think that it¡¯s very important to let it all out once in a while.¡±


    After all, I knew what it was like to be worked to exhaustion and be overwhelmed by stress.


    I wish that I had someone that I couldin to. But I had no one.


    And so my only way of releasing that stress was toin about work to Leo.


    Whether Leo understood me or not, she always looked a little bewildered¡­


    ¡°¡­Umm¡­ Oh, yes. About the townspeople.¡±


    ¡°Yes. They all called you Lady ire. And the guards recognized you immediately¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Well, that too is rted to my father¡­¡±


    Oh, were the grievances going to continue?


    ¡­But I was wrong.


    From what she told me about her father, it was no surprise that he had a great mansion as this.


    ¡°My father has the rank of duke in this country. As the head of the house, the entirend surrounding this vi¡­which includes the town of Ractos, is governed by him.¡±


    ¡°¡­Duke¡­ So you are all¡­nobles?¡±


    ¡°Yes. In this country, there are barons, viscounts, counts, margraves, marquis, dukes, and then royalty. So we are next after the royal family.¡±


    They really were at the top of the upper ss¡­


    While it wasn¡¯t something I thought about much in Japan, in medieval European society, they were the elite.


    Perhaps it was simr to being a vice-shogun during the Edo period¡­maybe¡­maybe not¡­


    I now felt as if I had been terribly rude towards them up until now¡­ What if they had punishments for such insolence¡­?


    ¡°¡­Umm, well¡­ I am aware that I¡¯ve been terribly discourteous towards you up until now¡­I hope that you can forgive¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, Mr. Takumi. I don¡¯t recall anything of the sort. Besides, you saved my life. You really should just treat me the same way as you have. ¡­And also¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Also?¡±


    ¡°You do talk to us with polite words. But it does not seem toe to you naturally. Am I right?¡±


    ¡°Ye-yes.¡±


    ¡°You seem the most natural when you are with Tilura. I only wish that you would be the same with me.¡±


    ¡°¡­Are you sure?¡±


    This wasn¡¯t just a question towards Ms. ire, but to Sebastian and the maids as well.


    But Sebastian grinned and nodded.


    ¡°If that is Lady ire¡¯s wish, then I do not mind. Besides¡­you, Mr. Takumi, are a person with the Gift, andmand a Silver Fenrir. If anything, you could be seen as someone who is above even a duke.¡±


    ¡°Above a duke¡­really?¡±


    I was taken aback by Sebastian¡¯s answer.


    It was confirmed that I indeed had the Gift, while we were in town, andbined with having a Silver Fenrir¡­being with Leo, I could be considered to be above a duke¡­


    But only the royal family was above a duke.


    ¡°I will take it from here. Surely you have noticed how I and the people here treat the great Leo with such reverence.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Sometimes out of fear, and sometimes not.¡±


    ¡°Do you not think it odd¡­and I don¡¯t mean to be rude, but for a duke¡¯s family to treat a monster with such respect¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, now that you mention it¡­ Perhaps it is a little strange.¡±


    ¡°When I first met you, I said that the Silver Fenrir is used on the crest of the royle family. ¡­Here it is.¡±


    ¡°Yes, it is¡­the fangs and ws¡­¡±


    Ms. ire had taken out a palm-sized relief carving.


    There was engraved a standing wolf that looked just like Leo. Its mouth was opened, showing its fangs, and its front paws were raised so that its ws were visible.


    It was made of silver. Probably to match the fur of the Silver Fenrir.

 Chapter 34

    Chapter 34


    <strong>I Learned About the Duke and Silver Fenrir Connection</strong>


    ¡°The royal family uses the Silver Fenrir on their crest, as they symbolize a country that cannot be defeated. On the other hand, the Liebert crest shows the fangs and ws, which symbolizes how we will defeat any foe. Also¡­this is a very old legend, but it is said that the first head of the Liebert house was friends with a Silver Fenrir.¡±


    ¡°Friends with a Silver Fenrir¡­But didn¡¯t you say that Silver Fenrirs yielded to no one?¡±


    ¡°Yes, it was not about yielding. They were said to be of equal standing. Well, I do not know how it really was, but this friendship helped my ancestor greatly, and after aplishing great feats in battle, my ancestor rose to the rank of duke.¡±¡¯


    ¡°Great feats in battle¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. This country was fighting many wars during that time. And it is said that when the first Liebert went to war, the Silver Fenrir appeared like the wind and saved the duke.¡±


    So if he fought, the powerful Silver Silver Fenrir would save him.


    I knew that they were strong. They were said to be the strongest of monsters. How much impact had it had during the war, I wonder?


    Well, he had ultimately be someone who was only under the royal family, so it must have been glorious indeed.


    ¡°It is because of the results of the war, and victory for the country, that House Liebert decided to use the Silver Fenrir on our crest. Ever since then, it has be our duty to respect the Silver Fenrirs.¡±


    In other words, if it was because of the Silver Fenrir that he rose to duke, they had to show their gratitude towards it.


    But it was hard to think of Leo as the same kind of Silver Fenrir. Not when she had just stuffed herself with sausages and was now curled up on the floor¡­


    ¡°Wou?¡±


    As I looked at Leo and thought of such things, she raised her head and barked as if to say, ¡®What?¡¯


    You are a reliable buddy.


    I said to Leo with my eyes¡­ But I didn¡¯t know if she understood me.


    ¡°Many people who live in towns or viges governed by House Liebert are aware of the connection to Silver Fenrirs.¡±


    ¡°Because of the stories about the first duke¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. For instance, Ms. Emeralda, who we met today. She thought Leo was a Silver Fenrir because I was there.¡±


    Yes, she had said something like that.


    I think it was¡­ ¡®It has silver fur and is with Lady ire.¡¯


    As the duke¡¯s daughter, and knowing that their family crest is the Silver Fenrir, she would have quickly assumed that Leo was a Silver Fenrir.


    Especially since the appearance, including the fangs, were so simr.


    ¡°And that is why House Liebert will warmly wee you and Leo. ¡­Well, aside from the personal reason that you saved me. Hehe.¡±


    ¡°Haha. It was Leo who saved you.¡±


    Ms. ire chuckled as her story ended.


    She was even more pretty when sheughed.


    I saw that Sebastian, the maids, and Tilura were all nodding with smiles, and I really did feel that we were wee here.


    I knew that, and yet I still felt awkward about having a room prepared for me, and having them pay for purchases that I made.


    Still, it wasn¡¯t as if I would continue to rely on their hospitality.


    Now that I knew I had the Gift, ¡®Weed Cultivation,¡¯ I would have to think about a way that it could be useful.


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi. Do you have a minute?¡±


    ¡°¡­What is it, Sebastian?¡±


    He had been waiting behind Ms. ire up until now, but he suddenly stepped close to me and spoke in a hushed voice.


    While Sebastian was a handsome older gentleman, I still didn¡¯t care to have another man¡¯s face so close to me¡­


    ¡°When do you intend on giving the items to thedies? I am sure they will be very pleased¡­¡±


    ¡°The items¡­ Ah!¡±


    I remembered.


    I had bought something for them.


    My sudden exmation caused Ms. ire, Tilura and the maids to turn in our direction with puzzled expressions.


    While I had bought it for the two, Sebastian had lended me the money. So it was a little awkward. Still, it would be best to give it to them now.


    ¡°¡­Do you think I should give it to them now, Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°You have both just exined your origins to each other, so it seems like the best time to do it.¡±


    ¡°I understand.¡±


    While I had left my belongings in my room, I had brought the presents with me.


    And so I took them out and ced them on the table.


    ¡°Ms. ire, Tilura.¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    ¡°What?¡±


    They answered, but also looked very curious about the things ced on the table.


    ¡°Uhh¡­ I wanted to give you something to show my gratitude¡­and thought these would suit you two¡­ But, uh, I borrowed money to pay for them and uh¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi, please pull yourself together.¡±


    As I hadn¡¯t been thinking about how I would give it to them, I ended up floundering through my speech. And Sebastian was not impressed.


    Still, the maids seemed to have understood my intent, and they watched on with supportive looks.


    I think¡­Sebastian may have told them before dinner¡­ On the other hand, Ms. ire and Tilura still looked at me uprehendingly.


    One really shouldn¡¯t do things that they weren¡¯t used to. Still, I searched for the right words to say when handing them the presents.


    ¡°It¡¯s just that¡­the thing is¡­it is a sign of my gratitude for all of the help¡­ Yes¡­ Please take it.¡±


    Surely there were better words to say¡­


    Leaving that aside, I handed Tilura the ne with the silver wolf.


    As she was so fond of Leo, she would probably like it?

 Chapter 35

    Chapter 35


    <strong>I Gave Them the Presents</strong>


    ¡°Wow! It¡¯s Leo! Thank you, Mr. Takumi!¡±


    Tilura shouted as she epted the present. She was smiling as she looked at the wolf on it¡­ Good, so she did like it.


    ¡°And¡­Ms. ire. ¡­Here.¡±


    While I felt quite nervous towards her, I handed her the hair ornament of a white flower.


    ¡­I hoped that my hand wasn¡¯t shaking¡­ It was probably fine¡­


    However, why did I get so nervous around Ms. ire¡­? I hadn¡¯t felt nervous when giving Tilura the ne¡­


    ¡°This¡­is very beautiful¡­ Thank you, Mr. Takumi. I am very happy!¡±


    ¡°Haha. I¡¯m d that you like it.¡±


    Ms. ire smiled happily as she looked at the hair ornament.


    While Tilura¡¯s smile had been cute, there was something especially gratifying about seeing a beautiful woman smile.


    Though, her cheeks had reddened a little as well. I wonder why?


    Well, I was just d that I was able to give her the present.


    ¡°¡­How do I look?¡±


    Ms. ire asked me after Lyra put it in her hair.


    ¡°Yes, it suits you very well. A beautifuldy is now even more beautiful.¡±


    ¡°!? ¡­What¡­I¡¯m not that¡­¡±


    Ms. ire looked a little embarrassed as she turned away.


    Wait, did I just¡­!


    ¡­Why had that juste out of my mouth like that!?


    Once I realized what I had said, my face started to grow hot.


    Did I now look as red as she did¡­?


    ¡°Sister. Mr. Takumi. What happened?¡±


    ¡°¡­It-it¡¯s nothing, Tilura.¡±


    ¡°¡­Ye-yes. It¡¯s nothing at all.¡±


    While she was looking at us strangely, we somehow managed to pretend that it was nothing.


    ¡­Still, she continued to tilt her head and stare at us¡­perhaps she wasn¡¯t fooled¡­


    ¡°It must be nice to be young.¡±


    ¡°Indeed.¡±


    ¡°But you are still young, Ms. Lyra.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    Ms. ire and I were still looking away and trying to avoid Tilura¡¯s questioning gaze.


    But Sebastian and the maids watched us with great amusement.


    Even Leo seemed to beughing as she watched us.


    And though our faces remained red for a while, we did our best to entertain and distract the others.


    ¡­Only Tilura looked puzzled until the end.


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¨C


    ¡°Phew.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m back, Leo.¡±


    After we were made the night¡¯s entertainment, everyone retired, as it waste.


    But as I tried to return to my room, Ms. Lyra suggested that I take a bath, and so I had done just that.


    While this world was simr to the middle ages, they did have proper baths.


    I was surprised that they even had a bathtub.


    And since the mansion was sorge, so was the bathing room.


    The bathtub was probably big enough for ten people to sit in and stretch out their feet.


    And so I scrubbed myself clean, soaked in the hot water, and came out all warmed up.


    ¡°You¡¯ll also have to take a bath soon, Leo.¡±


    ¡°¡­Wou.¡±


    She groaned quietly and moved away at the mention of a bath.


    So even when she was big, she still didn¡¯t like to take baths¡­ And yet she had happily yed in the river while in the forest.


    ¡°Wouldn¡¯t it be a shame if your pretty silver fur became dull?¡±


    ¡°Kuuunn¡­¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t give me that face¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Wuff.¡±


    Looking very dejected, Leo rolled up into a ball next to the bed.


    Was she sulking? Well, I¡¯m sure she will be fine tomorrow.


    Since Leo was like that, I decided to get into bed and think.


    ¡°Weed Cultivation¡­huh¡­¡±


    When hearing the word ¡®weed¡¯ most people would think of the nts that grew everywhere around them.


    I was the same.


    They were weeds that I didn¡¯t even know the names of. They grow on the side of the road when no one wants them there, and people would step over them as they pass by¡­ It wasn¡¯t the best image.


    And so just hearing the name made it seem like a useless ability.


    ¡­I had also thought that at first.


    However, after thinking about it, I had been able to grow nts like Ramogi, which could be used for medicine. So it was not useless at all.


    And so I would think about how to use it as Iy here in my bed.


    ¡°The activation requirement¡­¡±


    It¡¯s not like any random nt would grow.


    The only nt I had made so far with this ability was the Ramogi.


    I had been thinking about it as I touched the ground, and then it grew from that spot.


    In other words, the nt I was thinking about would grow in the exact spot that I touched.


    ¡°And I also made the Ramogi dry up in an instant¡­¡±


    Simr to when growing it, I just imagined it in a dried state, and then it had dried so that it could be used for medicine.


    The exnation for this was that it would not activate when I wasn¡¯t thinking about anything, but would activate with a touch and the right thought.


    And if I thought about what I wanted to happen to a nt and touched it, the desired change would ur.


    Think and then touch. That¡¯s what it was.


    ¡°nts will grow from what I touch¡­¡±


    Ms. Isabelle had said that this excluded farm produce such as vegetables.


    So I could not cultivate vegetables with this ability.


    ¡°¡­If I could, it would have been very useful for farming¡­¡±


    I had no experience with farming, but there had been a time when I was a little interested in plowing fields.


    However, my ability would just get in the way, and create weeds.


    They say that weeds took all of the nutrients in the soil that the vegetables needed to grow.


    While they didn¡¯t just grow randomly, I might still make weeds grow by ident while cultivating the crops.


    ¡°Had it been an ability that helped with farming, I could have made that my job in this world¡­¡±


    Well, as I couldn¡¯t use it, there was no point in thinking about it now.


    Now, how could I use this Weed Cultivation Gift?


    I was able to make Ramogi.


    In that case, I could perhaps make other nts that were used for medicine.


    It would be important to have a grasp on what nts I could make and which I could not.


    Also, I would like to test what kind of changes I could cause to ur, just like when I had dried the Ramogi.


    Was it simply about making nts ready to be used as medicine, or could I manipte them freely with thoughts?


    ¡­There were so many things that I wanted to know.


    ¡°¡­Well, I will take my time. Right, Leo?¡±


    Leo did not reply, as she was still sulking¡­that made me a little sad.

 Chapter 36

    Chapter 36


    <strong>This Morning, I Was Awakened By Tilura</strong>


    In the previous world, I was so overwhelmed with work, and had very little free time in my personal life.


    But throughing to this world, I felt as if I was starting my life over, and so I thought that I would rx more.


    Besides, I wanted to give Leo plenty of attention.


    ¡°While there is so much to think about, there is no reason to rush.¡±


    Thankfully, Ms. ire had been the first person I met in this world, and she had weed me to this mansion.


    But I couldn¡¯t rely on her hospitality forever, and I also wanted to return the money that I had borrowed in order to go shopping.


    ¡°¡­And to Sebastian as well.¡±


    If I could use Weed Cultivation to make nts that were used for medicine, then that could lead to all sorts of things.


    I would think carefully and expand on what I could do.


    Here, there was no superior who would get angry if I took a break, or would give me more work just as I finished up, or would shout at me for not being fast enough¡­


    ¡°Leo?¡±


    Just as I decided to stop thinking and go to sleep, I suddenly remembered that Leo was sulking. She had ignored me thest time that I called her name.


    I raised my head a little to look at the side of the bed, and saw that she was curled up and sleeping.


    Perhaps she was dreaming of food, as her mouth was moving a little as if chewing. It was rather amusing.


    ¡°¡­So dogs¡­Silver Fenrirs, also have dreams?¡±


    I watched Leo for a while, and then pulled the nkets over myself and closed my eyes.


    ¡°¡­Ah¡­tomorrow¡­ I¡¯ll ask if I can¡­test Weed Cultivation¡­in the back garden.¡±


    Just before falling asleep, when I was barely awake, I thought of ns for tomorrow as the day ended.


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    I heard a knock on the door.


    And then I opened my eyes.


    ¡°¡­Ah, it¡¯s morning.¡±


    The blinding morning light poured in from the window.


    After blinking a few times, my eyes got used to the light, and I got out of bed.


    In the meantime, the knocking on the door continued.


    ¡­I should not keep them waiting.


    ¡°Who is it?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, it¡¯s Tilura. Can Ie in?¡±


    So it was Tilura who was knocking.


    She sounded very cheerful even though it was early in the morning.


    Leo must have heard the knocking as well, as she uncurled her body and got up before extending her two front legs and stretching.


    ¡°You cane in.¡±


    ¡°Excuse me! Good morning, Mr. Takumi and Leo!¡±


    ¡°Good morning. You¡¯re up early.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    Tilura flew into the room and greeted us first.


    She had clearly been properly educated.


    Well, maybe not. As she had entered without knocking yesterday in order to cling onto Leo¡­


    Perhaps she only knocked this time because Ms. ire had scolded her.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, thank you for buying that ne of Leo for me.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. That¡¯s not Leo. But I thought you might like it, since it¡¯s a wolf.¡±


    ¡°Yes! I really like it! I¡¯ll take good care of it!¡±


    She was wearing it now, and she said this as she held the ne preciously with both hands.


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Leo seemed to be curious, as she pushed her nose towards Tilura¡¯s hands.


    ¡°Leo, look! It¡¯s you!¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­ Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    Tilura showed Leo the ne, and then Leo noticed the part that looked like a wolf.


    However, she did not seem to care for it, as she then shook her head.


    ¡­I think that she was saying, ¡®That¡¯s not me! I look so much cooler!¡¯


    She was a girl who wanted to be cool¡­ Also, ever sinceing to this world, I seemed to understand Leo¡¯s gestures and barks a lot more¡­


    Even when she was a puppy, she had sometimes moved in an oddly human mannerpared to most dogs, but it was like I could actually hear a voice now.


    ¡°You don¡¯t like it, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­ Wuff!¡±


    Tilura must have felt that Leo¡¯s gestures were a rejection, as she looked a little crestfallen. And so Leo rubbed her face against her as a constion.


    ¡°Ehehe. You feel so good, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    Tiluraughed as she touched Leo¡¯s fluffy fur.


    The two sure did get along¡­ Yes, it was nice to see them be friends.


    But as I smiled and watched them, my stomach suddenly rumbled.


    ¡°Ah, Mr. Takumi. Are you hungry?¡±


    ¡°¡­Ah¡­ Ahaha. Yes, I am. ¡­Well, this is a little embarrassing.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    It seemed like Leo wasughing at me.


    Damn it. I would have to be careful so that my stomach didn¡¯t rumble next time.


    ¡°Are you hungry too, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°In that case, let¡¯s go to the dining hall!¡±


    So saying, Tilura took my hand and was about to dash out of the room, but I stopped her.


    ¡°Wait a minute, Tilura. I just got up. And so I need to get ready before going down to eat.¡±


    ¡°¡­I¡¯m sorry.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. You were just concerned because we were hungry, right? That¡¯s very kind of you.¡±


    ¡°Ehehe.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I patted Tilura on the head as she chuckled bashfully.


    As Leo moved her face close to me, I patted her on the head as well.


    ¡°Well, then. I will be waiting for you at the dining hall!¡±


    ¡°Yes, I¡¯ll be right there. Ah, could you take Leo with you?¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­yes! Let¡¯s go, Leo!¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    Tilura seemed to be very happy to be able to go with Leo, as she nodded with a smile and then the two headed to the dining hall together.


    ¡°Now, it¡¯s time to use that razor I bought yesterday.¡±


    Well, it was a de that looked like a razor. But I decided to think of it as this world¡¯s razor.


    I took it out from my belongings from yesterday, and then faced the mirror.


    You had to work quickly in the morning.


    I shaved carefully so that I wouldn¡¯t cut myself, and then I washed my face.


    Then I quickly changed my clothes and then rushed to the dining hall where the others were waiting.


    Ms. ire and Sebastian would likely be waiting for me as well.


    ¡­Ms. Lyra was waiting for me outside of my door again, and while I was a little surprised, she escorted me to the dining hall.

 Chapter 37

    Chapter 37


    <strong>Today¡¯s Breakfast Looked Delicious As Well</strong>


    When I entered the dining hall, I saw that Ms. ire and Tilura were sitting and waiting in the same ce asst night.


    ¡°Good morning, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Ms. ire. Good morning. Good morning, Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Mr. Takumi. Lady ire appears to be in very high spirits today.¡±


    ¡°Is that so?¡±


    ¡°Oh, stop that, Sebastian. Mr. Takumi, it¡¯s nothing at all. I am always like this.¡±


    ¡°Ha¡­¡±


    Sebastian chuckled at Ms. ire and then retreated to the back.


    Hmm¡­ Ms. ire didn¡¯t seem all that different from yesterday¡­ Hmm. But I suppose she did look to be in a good mood¡­ I wonder why¡­


    As I thought this, my eyes wandered to Ms. ire¡¯s head.


    She was wearing the hair ornament that I had given her.


    Perhaps that was why she was in a good mood?


    I had bought it on a whim(of course, I had not forgotten that I borrowed money from Sebastian), but both Ms. ire and Tilura wore them and were very happy. I was d to see it.


    ¡°Now, let us eat.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    For breakfast, we had the same soup and sd as yesterday, as well as two types of bread.


    One was two slices of bread with some ham and melted cheese in between.


    The other had a fried egg on top.


    Uh, I think these were called croque monsieur and croque madame?


    But I thought that they were rtively recent dishes, and wouldn¡¯t have existed in medieval times.


    Well, this was another world where they had magic and Gifts, so while their culture was at a simr level, it didn¡¯t mean that everything was like the medieval era.


    ¡°The food looks as delicious as yesterday.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I think that Helena was very happy about thepliment yesterday, and woke up extra early this morning.¡±


    ¡°Is that so?¡±


    ¡°She said that it was difficult to get the cheese just right. This bread¡­is called croque, I believe.¡±


    So Helena had been working hard from early in the morning.


    I could tell just by looking at the bread that it was going to taste delicious.


    And when I nced over to Ms. ire and Tilura¡¯s tes, I saw that their bread wasn¡¯t as thick as mine.


    It looked like part of the bread had been carved out in order to put the toppings on.


    I suppose she adjusted everyone¡¯s dish to match their preferences. She really had everything thought out.


    When I looked over to Leo, I saw that she had an especiallyrge croque. And it was topped with thinly sliced sausages.


    ¡­Thank you for going through the trouble, Ms. Helena.


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Leo looked like she could not wait any longer, and she bit into the croque first.


    The croque monsieur, which was the one without egg, had a nice crunch to it, and it was overflowing with cheese.


    The thick sauce spread delightfully through my mouth.


    Humans really did be happy when they ate delicious food.


    ¡°It¡¯s good isn¡¯t it? Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Tilura said with a smile. And Leo wagged her tail as she replied.


    Ms. ire also seemed to be enjoying her food¡­yes, great food made everyone happy.


    Even though it was a lot of food for breakfast, I was able to eat all of it.


    Then the maids poured us some tea and we rested.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°That tickles, Leo!¡±


    Leo and Tilura were ying next to the chair that I was sitting on.


    Leo. You really shouldn¡¯t lick Tilura¡¯s face so soon after you drink your milk.


    ¡°Hehehe. Tilura¡¯spletely attached now.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Leo has always liked ying with children, so she seems very happy to be with Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Hehehe.¡±


    Ms. ire and I watched them and chuckled.


    Ah, that¡¯s right.


    I recalled what I had been thinking about before going to sleep.


    ¡°By the way, Ms. ire.¡±


    ¡°Yes, what is it?¡±


    ¡°Do you think that I could use the back garden for a short while?¡±


    ¡°The back garden? Are you going to y there with Leo?¡±


    ¡°No, it¡¯s just that now that I know that I have a Gift, I would like to test some things out.¡±


    ¡°Testing¡­ Can I ask you what kind of tests?¡±


    Ms. ire seemed very curious about what I was going to do.


    ¡°Yes. Since I have ¡®Weed Cultivation,¡¯ I want to find out what kinds of nts I can cultivate. I just hope that there is something useful among them.¡±


    ¡°I see. Then of course, I don¡¯t mind. That garden hasn¡¯t been used for a long time until Tilura and Leo yed in it yesterday.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. ¡­Also, Sebastian.¡±


    Now that I had Ms. ire¡¯s permission, I turned to Sebastian.


    ¡°Yes, how can I be of service?¡±


    ¡°Um¡­would you happen to have samples or books about medicinal nts that are detailed and with pictures?¡±


    ¡°Medicinal nts¡­ Indeed¡­ We have no samples, but we do have educational books stored. As there is no pharmacist here now, we keep them in case we require that knowledge.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s how I found out that Ramogi would be effective for Tilura¡¯s illness.¡±


    ¡°I see. Can I see this book? I want to use it for reference when trying Weed Cultivation.¡±


    ¡°Very well.¡±


    So saying, Sebastian called Gelda and had her fetch the book about medicinal nts.

 Chapter 38

    Chapter 38


    <strong>I Tried using ¡®Weed Cultivation¡¯</strong>


    ¡°Still, medicinal nts through Weed Cultivation¡­¡±


    ¡°Is there something wrong, Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°No, I was just thinking about how great a help it would be if medicinal nts could be acquired so easily.¡±


    ¡°You need them here?¡±


    ¡°Yes. We currently have none in storage in this house. Ramogi is not supposed to be so difficult to acquire¡­but we didn¡¯t even have that. So if you could make some, we would be able to use it if there is a need.¡±


    I see. They had to store some for medicine.


    Yes, you would be very anxious if you had no medicine to be used if someone suddenly became ill.


    Even I always made sure that I had cold medicine in stock.


    Because I would get in trouble at work if I took a day off just because of a cold¡­


    ¡°Well, I still don¡¯t know what kinds of medicinal nts I can make. But I will look at the book and see what I can do.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, can I watch too?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I don¡¯t think there is anything dangerous about it.¡±


    Right¡­?


    I was just going to see if I could make nts grow. That¡¯s all.


    ¡°Then I will watch as you use Weed Cultivation, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    Ms. ire looked at me as if she expected to see something great.


    Now I was getting a little nervous.


    After all, there was no guarantee that I would be able to use it well.


    But then again, I had been able to make the Ramogi without even trying.


    For a while after that, I enjoyed my cup of ck tea and watched Leo and Tilura y. The time passed calmly as we rested there.


    ¡°Here is the book on medicinal nts.¡±


    Once we had finished resting, Ms. Gelda gave me the book, and so I went out into the back garden along with Leo, Ms. ire, and Sebastian.


    As for Tilura¡­ah, she was riding on Leo¡¯s back.


    I suppose she must have really enjoyed the ride yesterday?


    Once we were in the back garden, I stood a short distance away from the others and then opened the book.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ There really are a lot of nts here¡­¡±


    I could feel the eyes of the others on me.


    Ms. ire seemed very serious, while Sebastian was perhaps more expectant. But regardless, their looks were piercing¡­


    ¡­It made me a little ufortable¡­


    ¡°Alright, I¡¯ll do this one.¡±


    I chose a medicinal nt from the book that was called Loe.


    It was effective against scrapes and burns. The leaves were thick and had hard thorns around them.


    The insides of the leaves were like jelly, and could even be eaten. It said that the leaves should be cut open and ced over the wound in order to heal it.


    ¡°¡­Wait, is this aloe?¡±


    I remembered when I was a child, an old woman who lived nearby would put aloe on any scrapes I would get after falling.


    The jelly-like leaves and thorns were simr. So I suppose it really was aloe.


    It was easy to imagine a nt if you already knew what it looked like.


    And so I closed the book and held it in my right hand, and then I brought up an image of aloe¡­Loe, in my head as I ced my left hand on the ground.


    ¡°I will use it now¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    ¡°¡­Please do.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m so excited.¡±


    Now their expectant gazes grew even more intense¡­


    While I was nervous, I was careful to not let it affect my concentration. And then I focused on the image of the Loe.


    Uh¡­I wonder if I should say something¡­


    ¡°Weed Cultivation.¡±


    While it was a little embarrassing, I just said the name of the Gift.


    The gazes of the others turned to painful grimaces.


    I¡¯m sure they didn¡¯t mean to be rude.


    A few seconds after the name¡­I felt something pushing up out of the ground against my hand.


    Had I seeded?


    When I pulled my left hand away, a green nt began to sprout from the ground.


    ¡°Oh!¡±


    ¡°Ah!¡±


    ¡°Wow!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    The others looked at the ground that I had been touching, and they raised their voices in amazement.


    As I watched the nt grow, leaves and thorns started toe out. And after a while, it stopped growing.


    I looked exactly like the nt I had imagined. An aloe.


    So, I really had seeded


    ¡°Is that¡­Loe?¡±


    ¡°Judging by the leaves and thorns, there is no doubt about it.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s right. I imagined the characteristics that were written in the book and then used Weed Cultivation.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s amazing, Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    Ms. ire and Sebastian were astonished, while Tilura and Leo sounded overjoyed.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­you were able to make¡­Loe.¡±


    ¡°It is incredible¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, it worked. But, uh¡­is there something that I don¡¯t know?¡±


    Aloe¡­no, Loe, was amon enough nt in Japan.


    And so I don¡¯t know why they were so surprised¡­


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi. Do you mean to say that you made it without knowing what type of nt it was?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ I read the description in the book. And it just so happened that there is a simr nt in my world. And so it was easy to visualize.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see¡­ Lady ire?¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes¡­ Sebastian, please exin to him what Loe is.¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    And so began Sebastian¡¯s lesson on Loe.


    While he was still surprised about seeing it grow, I could still tell that he was relishing the joy of being able to exin something to someone.


    He really liked doing it¡­


    ¡°About Loe¡­ Mr. Takumi, do you know about its effect?¡±


    ¡°Well, the book said that it can heal light wounds and burns¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. It is a medicinal nt that heals wounds on your body. Its effect is most wonderful. You cut the leaves open in order to extract the jelly within, and you apply that to the wound.¡±


    ¡°Ah.¡±


    So it was exactly like aloe.


    Well, the jelly could be very unpleasant depending on where you applied it.


    But when it had been used on me as a child, I felt that it healed faster than any bandaid¡­ But maybe it was just my imagination¡­


    ¡°And the moment it touches the wound, the wound will heal.¡±


    ¡°¡­The moment it¡­ Wait, so you don¡¯t have to keep it on?¡±


    ¡°Yes. You do not. After all, it will be healed as soon as it is touched by the jelly. While it cannot heal mortal wounds, even deep wounds that are cut to the bone can heal without leaving a scar.¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡­Wasn¡¯t that too effective?


    The aloe that I knew had to be covering your skin for quite a while.


    Besides, all it did was slightly raise the speed of a human¡¯s natural healing ability. So it should not be able to healpletely so that there is no scar.


    So it really waspletely different from the aloe that I knew?


    ¡­But it looked so simr


    To think that this nt that looked like aloe could be so effective¡­


    I was amazed by what Sebastian said as I stared at the Loe that had grown from the ground.

 Chapter 39

    Chapter 39


    <strong>Loe Was A Very Expensive And Effective nt</strong>


    Sebastian looked so happy when he exined things to me.


    ¡°Due to its high potency, it is in high demand. However, it is not known where exactly they will grow, and they never grow in great quantities. In other words, they are very rare medicinal nts. And being rare and in high demand results in them being very expensive.¡±


    ¡°Rare¡­¡±


    In Japan, you could see aloe growing almost anywhere.


    They were usually spotted in ces that got a lot of sun. And since they could be nted in simple pots, they weremon in most households.


    However, the effect and rarity of this nt was very different.


    Also, perhaps the climate in this world was not very suited for aloes to grow.


    ¡°I had been hoping that you would be able to make something for our storages¡­but I never expected something so valuable¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­How valuable are we talking?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ The Loe that you created has over ten leaves. You could build a house off of the profit.¡±


    ¡°¡­A house¡­¡±


    It was that valuable¡­


    ¡°So, do you think that I could start a business by selling medicinal nts¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Even if it¡¯s not Loe, I think that it can be done. At least, if you can make them easily with your Gift, you could start a business without any funds.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Are you going to make a business selling medicinal nts?¡±


    ¡°¡­No. I haven¡¯t decided anything yet. But I know that now that I am in this world, I can¡¯t just allow you and the others to help me. I need to work¡­ That is what I think.¡±


    You could not take advantage of someone¡¯s kindness.


    But more importantly, I didn¡¯t think that I would be able to bear the thought of not even working while relying on them.


    Perhaps it was because I had been doing nothing but work in my old world¡­ And so it made me ufortable to be idle.


    Was this what they called a workaholic?


    I did intend on taking things easy, but I didn¡¯t want to live without working at all.


    Besides, if I could use Weed Cultivation to grow and sell medicinal nts, then I could make money without too much work.


    And it might lead to finding other ways to make the most of my ability.


    ¡°¡­Obviously, if you sold only Loe, the price would fall greatly and it could disrupt the market.¡±


    ¡°Yes. ¡­Mr. Takumi, for now, could we add this Loe to our storage for medicine?¡±


    ¡°Oh, yes. Of course, I don¡¯t mind. That was my intention in the first ce.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Also, if you do decide to use your ability to start a business, then please tell me. I will think of a good way to do it.¡±


    ¡°A good way?¡±


    I had not known about the value of Loe, but perhaps I could give it to them as a way of paying rent for now.


    In any case, it seemed like Ms. ire had some idea when it came to starting a business.


    As for me, including my part time jobs and full time work, I had always been far away from anything rted to customer service and trade.


    And so if Ms. ire knew the best way to go about it, I would leave everything in her hands.


    Besides, I didn¡¯t like the idea of negotiating.


    ¡°Earlier, Sebastian said something about disrupting the market. Is this for cases where I make great quantities of them through Weed Cultivation and sell them?¡±


    ¡°Yes. If something used to be rare, then it would cause great confusion if there is suddenly so much of it avable.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    Yes, that did make sense.


    There was no doubt that all the merchants who had been trading it would be frantic.


    Sebastian and Ms. ire nodded.


    ¡°And so I have an idea. We, the Liebert family, will take charge of this business of selling the medicinal nts.¡±


    ¡°The Liebert family. The duke¡¯s house?¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s right.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­so that¡¯s what you mean.¡±


    While Sebastian seemed to think this was a good idea, what did it mean to have a Duke¡¯s house take charge?


    In the first ce, was a duke even allowed to start a business like this?


    ¡°The Liebert family already has various businesses, both in and outside of ournds. After all, there are expenses that the taxes we receive asndlords will not cover, such as maintaining the lifestyle of nobles¡­ Most of the tax money goes to the army, which guarantees the safety of thesends. And so we are living off the profits from these businesses.¡±


    ¡°Is that so?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Of course, there are other nobles who do not have businesses. Instead, they raise their taxes and live off of that. It is their choice to conduct or not conduct business, just as it is their choice to raise taxes. That being said, the royal family may intervene, if taxes are raised to the point where the people can barely survive.¡±


    ¡°Well, there are also plenty of nobles who squeeze all they can from their people and fill their coffers, while hiding it cleverly.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    So the noblendlords could raise taxes as they pleased.


    And they could also start businesses.


    In other words, they had a choice over how they would maintain their lifestyle as nobles.


    As long as you weren¡¯t so extreme that the royal family was alerted.


    Ms. ire talked of greedy nobles who filled their coffers. It was hardly a surprise.


    ¡°The Liebert family has always tried to keep taxes as low as possible for the benefit of our people. Thankfully, past heads of the family, as well as the current one¡­my father, and others around him, have had the talent for trade. And so we make more than enough in profits.¡±


    Well, they were living in this huge mansion.


    So they must be making a lot of money.


    Now that I thought about it, perhaps their father was constantly talking about having Ms. ire and Tilura get married, because it would help with his business.


    However, I had never met the man, so I had no way of knowing the truth.


    But I had a very bad impression of strategic marriages¡­ Perhaps it was just my prejudice.

 Chapter 40

    Chapter 40


    <strong>I was told the advantages of having a medicinal nt trade agreement with the Duke¡¯s house</strong>


    ¡°Nobles owning a business. It is like its own brand.¡±


    ¡°A brand¡­¡±


    ¡°When anded noble owns a business, the people who live on thend will often buy it, because it¡¯s a product from theirndlord. Obviously, this would only happen in cases where there is mutual trust. And so andlord who is loved by the people will have an easier time selling something than the average merchant.¡±


    ¡°Well, the quality of the product will also matter. But people trust that a noble would not sell something of low quality, because that would quickly affect their reputation.¡±


    ¡°In other words, a business that is based on trust between thendlord and the people bes its own brand?¡±


    ¡°Exactly.¡±


    Brands sold by nobles¡­would they be like luxury brands?


    I suppose that being sold by a trusted noble was part of the brand as well.


    Ms. ire¡¯s family business brought in great profits, so that must mean they had the people¡¯s trust.


    ¡°What I am thinking is this. The medicinal herbs that you make, Mr. Takumi, will be sold as a branded product of the Liebert house. By having a duke¡¯s house manage things, people will trust that the product is of good quality. And of course, Mr. Takumi, you will be properlypensated for your work.¡±


    ¡°Hmm.¡±


    ¡°So in order to avoid disrupting the market, this family will handle things while you make the medicinal nts, Mr. Takumi. As it would not be wise for you to just make anything and in great quantities, we will have to organize things with the stores, and then have you cultivate them.¡±


    So they would be sold in stores owned by the duke, and I would get orders for the amount to produce¡­was that right?


    ¡°Of course, if you would rather not rely on us and start your own business, I will not try to stop you. While I mean to pay you properly, it¡¯s possible that you could make more of a profit if you did it all alone.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Well, that¡¯s not something that I¡¯m concerned about. And I don¡¯t have any desire to be the central figure in the business either.¡±


    From my point of view, receiving the order, producing the amount, and leaving the rest to the family. If I could make enough money to live by doing that, then I had noints.


    This was still a world where I barely knew right from left. And so it felt wise to leave the actual selling to them.


    While it could not be helped that less of the profits would go to me, this was just a power I was suddenly able to use.


    It¡¯s not something that I had worked hard to attain. And so I would be making money very easily.


    These were very favorable conditions.


    ¡°I think that I will leave it to your family, Ms. ire. ¡­Besides, I surely do not have the same talent for trade.¡±


    ¡°Very well. That being said, it is just an early idea. My father is still the head of this house. And so we will not be able to add the medicinal nts to our stores without permission, nor can we ask you to cultivate them as an employee.¡±


    ¡°So, Ms. ire¡­ We won¡¯t be able to do it immediately?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I must speak with my father first. However, I doubt that he won¡¯t give his permission¡­ Though¡­¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    ¡°¡­I was just thinking about how troublesome it will be that he will bring up my marriage again when I talk to him¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­that¡¯s true¡­¡±


    She had grumbled about him for a long time yesterday. He must bring it up with her a lot¡­ She said that it had been nearly every day.


    Ms. ire was living away from her father now, and they would be meeting after a long while. And so it was very likely that he would start trying to find her a match once again.


    I felt a little sorry for her.


    ¡°I¡¯ll think about the terms of the contract and other details before I meet him. Mr. Takumi, you must also think about it very carefully and decide whether to do it or not. ¡­And I must also think of ways to turn those marriages down¡­!¡±


    ¡°¡­Of course.¡±


    She sounded the most determined during thest part¡­


    I would try to avoid bringing the subject up with her from now on.


    After that, I looked through the book and tested to see what other nts I could make with Weed Cultivation.


    While I was able to make most of the nts in the book, there were also some that I was unsessful with.


    There was one called ¡®Neegi,¡¯ which was like a Japanese green onion.


    It even said in the description that it would heal ailments if you wrapped it around your neck.


    ¡°What kind of folk medicine is¡­¡±


    Regardless, I was not able to make it through Weed Cultivation.


    When I asked Sebastian, he said that it wasmonly sold as food. If it was considered farm produce, then that would exin why I am unable to make it.


    It did make me wonder who exactly decides if a nt is part of agriculture or not, but I decided to not think about it too deeply, as there would be no answers.


    ¡°¡­Phew.¡±


    I continued to try to grow different nts until lunch time.


    A great variety of nts were now growing in the back garden so that it looked like a little field.


    However, out of all of the nts that were there, there was one single nt that was not in the book. And I had no memory of ever seeing such a nt before.


    A nt had been made when I had no knowledge of it at all.


    ¡°¡­I thought nts were only supposed to grow after I imagined them?¡±


    What had I been thinking about when making this?


    I think¡­I had been thinking vaguely about how Leo and Tilura were running around and ying in the garden, and how tired I would be if I joined them.


    After that, I thought of energy drinks, and wondered if there wasn¡¯t something here that would give me energy. And then I touched the ground.


    And before I knew it, a single purple leaf with no stem had sprouted from the dirt.


    I had then plucked it. But I wouldn¡¯t dare use or sell something if I didn¡¯t know what effect it would have.


    I showed Ms. ire and Sebastian, but neither knew of the nt either. And so I decided to take it back to my room.


    ¡°I¡¯ll put it here for now.¡±


    I ced the unfamiliar nt on the desk in my room, and then I headed to the dining hall.


    By now, I knew how to reach it, and did not need Ms. Lyra to show me the way.


    For lunch, we had pasta.


    It wasn¡¯t the thick, long type of spaghetti often eaten in Japan, as the noodles were t a few centimeters wide.


    Everything that Ms. Helena made was delicious, so this should be no different. It was with such thoughts that I picked up the fork thaty next to my te.

 Chapter 41

    Chapter 41


    <strong>The Pasta In This World Was Meat Sauce</strong>


    ¡°Lunch looks delicious today as well.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Helena does her best.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m hungry!¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    Everyone seemed to have worked up an appetite after seeing the pasta that was ced on the table.


    A great te had been prepared for Leo. And while it contained the same t noodles, they were wrapped up in separate clumps so it would be easier to eat.


    Thank you for being so considerate, Ms. Helena.


    ¡°Now, let¡¯s eat.¡±


    ¡°Let¡¯s eat.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    There was a red tomato sauce on top and the minced meat that was in the saucebined nicely with the t noodles.


    Meat sauce¡­I think it was actually called bolognese.


    While it was very delicious, I also had to be careful so that the sauce didn¡¯t get on my clothes.


    It was hard to remove any stains from it.


    ¡°Lady Tilura. Please excuse me.¡±


    While Ms. ire had no problem doing it, Tilura wasn¡¯t used to eating like this, and so she had got some of the sauce on her clothes.


    Ms. Lyra was now wiping it carefully with a cloth.


    Still, while the sauce was on the mild side, I wasn¡¯t sure if Leo would¡­


    But when I turned to Leo, the whole area around her mouth was stained a bright red. It looked like blood.


    ¡°Leo¡­ You¡¯re going to have to take a bath after this.¡±


    ¡°Wou!?¡±


    Leo seemed so rmed by these words, that she barked and moved away from her te.


    While she was usually so absorbed in her food to the point where she wouldn¡¯t react to anything else, it was a different matter when it came to bathing¡­


    ¡°Your mouth is too dirty. It won¡¯te off by just wiping it.¡±


    ¡°Wou! Wou-wou!¡±


    It sounded like she was protesting strongly, but I ignored her and continued to eat my pasta.


    ¡°Is Leo going to take a bath? I want to take one together!¡±


    ¡°No¡­I don¡¯t think you should¡­¡±


    Besides, as a man, I couldn¡¯t be there with them.


    I had only been in this world for a few days, and did not want any trouble.


    ¡°No, Tilura. You do realize that Mr. Takumi is a man? You cannot go with them.¡±


    ¡°But, sister!¡±


    While she was still young, it would not do for her to share a bath with a grown man.


    ¡°I really can¡¯t?¡±


    ¡°Of course, you cannot. The mere thought of male and females bathing together¡­¡±


    ¡°Sister?¡±


    ¡°¡­Oh, it¡¯s nothing. In any case, it is out of the question, Tilura. Men and women must never bathe together. It is not permitted.¡±


    ¡°¡­Is that true?¡±


    ¡­Tilura. Why was she asking me now?


    She should ask Sebastian or the maids if she needed confirmation¡­


    ¡°¡­Tilura. It is indeed true that men and women are not to bathe together. And so you cannote with us.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    She seemed to give up and continued to eat her pasta with a dejected look.


    Ms. ire breathed a sigh of relief. But then she nced towards me and blushed.


    Ms. ire. Did you just imagine something?


    ¡°¡­wou¡­¡±


    As for Leo, whose fate had been sealed, she had fallen into a depression and though she continued to eat, she no longer showed any enthusiasm in doing so.


    Once lunch was finished, we took a short break to help with digestion, and then Leo and I decided to go to the bathing room in the mansion.


    It was nice that the tub wasrge enough for even someone like Leo to fit inside.


    At her current size, Leo would not have fit in my old bathtub in Japan.


    Well, she wouldn¡¯t have even fit in the apartment.


    And so I carried the towels that Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda had handed us, and we made our way to the bathing room.

 Chapter 42

    Chapter 42


    <strong>I Bathed with a Sulky Leo</strong>


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    ¡°Give up, Leo. From now on, you will have to bathe regrly in order to stay clean.¡±


    ¡°Wouuu¡­¡±


    Leo looked at the floor sadly as she followed after me.


    She had been ying so excitedly in the river. So why did she hate baths so much¡­


    Was it because the water was hot? ¡­It was certainly odd.


    I took off my clothes in the changing room and entered the bathing area.


    ¡°Leo, I¡¯m going to pour hot water on you now.¡±


    ¡°¡­Wou¡­¡±


    I scooped up water with a basin and poured it over Leo.


    She shuddered a little, but then closed her eyes tightly and tried to make it through this ordeal.


    Once Leo was thoroughly drenched, I used a towel tother up some soap.


    Then I rubbed it against Leo and scrubbed the fur from her back to her toes thoroughly in order to clean off the dirt.


    ¡°¡­It¡¯s quite filthy¡­¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    Before I knew it, the bar of soap had turned ck.


    I had to wash away the dark suds with water andther it again before washing Leo.


    After repeating this several times, I finally finished washing her back.


    ¡­This was actually very tiring.


    I continued to wash her until we reached the final part, which Leo hated the most. Her face¡­ Well, it was mostly around her eyes and mouth.


    I think she probably didn¡¯t want the hot water or soap to get in her eyes.


    And perhaps the smell of the soap was too strong when near her nose.


    However, even if she didn¡¯t like it, I still had to wash her.


    ¡°Leo. Stay still, okay? I¡¯m going to wash your face now.¡±


    ¡°Wou!? Wou¡­ Wuff¡­¡±


    She seemed resigned to her fate.


    She let out a tired sigh and continued to lie on her back after I finished washing her belly. And like that, she closed her eyes and gritted her teeth.


    I carefully washed her face so that the soap would not enter her eyes, nose or mouth.


    ¡­Leo. You have so much meat sauce around your mouth.


    Even her nose was a bright red now.


    Next time, I would have to warn her before eating food that would stain her fur.


    ¡°Look, Leo. All this red will ruin your cool face!¡±


    As if in answer, Leo snorted loudly.


    Like the other areas, I had to wash the soap several times before all of the dirt and color fell away.


    ¡°Now, Leo. We¡¯re finished. You can stand up now.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    The moment that I had my permission, Leo sprung up with just the strength of her back, and did a flip in the air.


    She thennded on the ground with a smug expression.


    ¡°Leo¡­ It¡¯s amazing that you can move like that¡­but you sshed water all over me¡­¡±


    ¡°Wou? ¡­Wuff.¡±


    As Leo was still wet when flipping in the air, the water had hit me so that I was drenched from head to toe.


    ¡°Really, you have to be more careful. All right?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Now¡­next is¡­¡±


    ¡°Wou!?¡±


    Leo¡¯s face looked very rmed as if she was saying, ¡®there¡¯s more!?¡¯


    ¡°Next is this.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Before the bath, I had borrowed a brush from Ms. Lyra.


    While I had removed the dirt and grime, I still needed to untangle the fur and brush out any dust that the soap hadn¡¯t been able to remove.


    Besides, Leo never had an issue with brushing.


    ¡°Alright, Leo. Sit down first.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Leo listened obediently and sat down.


    If anything, she seemed to rather enjoy being brushed.


    Has she always liked it so much¡­?


    ¡­Ah¡­now that I think about it. She would sometimes lie on myp while I brushed her. And she would get so rxed that she would fall asleep.


    And whenever I would pick up the brush, she would wag her tail ande close.


    Only, I would usually take the brush to the shower room, so she would then turn sulky, which is what I remembered the most.


    ¡°Do you like that, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    As I gently brushed the fur on her back, Leo let out a sigh as if rxing.


    Unlike when washing her, she did not resist, and so it was a lot easier to do.


    Well, actually, it still felt like heavy manualbor, because she was so big and there was a lot to brush.


    And so it ended up taking a very long time.


    Still, I had been able to get out most of the dust.


    Lastly¡­


    ¡°Let¡¯s rinse you off once more with hot water.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!?¡±


    Leo had clearly not expected to be subjected to the hot water once more, and let out an rmed yelp. But I ignored it and picked up the basin.


    After repeating this a few times, Leo¡¯s bath was finished.


    Now that she was clean, Leo shook her body in order to dry herself.


    ¡°¡­Leo¡­ Don¡¯t do that when I¡¯m standing right next to you¡­¡±


    ¡°W¡­wou¡­¡±


    Leo said apologetically.


    Well, I could wash offter. And so I led Leo out of the bathing area.


    Then I called for Ms. Lyra through the doors and asked her to dry off Leo with a towel.


    Then I returned to the bathing area so that I could wash myself.


    After all, I had not bathed yet.


    And so I washed myself thoroughly with soap.


    Then I rinsed it off and sat in the tub that wasrge enough for me to stretch out my legs.


    ¡°Ahh¡­¡±


    It really could not be helped that I let out a sigh after sinking into the hot water.


    Taking a bath was the best thing to do after exercise.


    And washing Leo had been quite exhausting.


    And so I enjoyed the water and rxed while massaging my tired arms.

 Chapter 43

    Chapter 43


    <strong>Leo¡¯s fur glistened after getting out of the bath</strong>


    After taking my time and thoroughly warming up in the hot water, I got out and dried myself with a towel before putting on my clothes and stepping out of the changing room.


    As always, Ms. Lyra was waiting right outside of the door. And since she told me that Ms. ire and Tilura were in the drawing room, I decided to go there.


    ¡°Is Leo over there as well?¡±


    ¡°Yes. She is with thedies.¡±


    In fact, yesterday, I had gone from my room to the bath, and then returned on my own. So I knew where it was within the mansion.


    And so I didn¡¯t need Ms. Lyra to guide me.


    She seemed a little agitated as she said, ¡®I¡¯ll go put on some tea,¡¯ and then headed to the kitchens.


    ¡°¡­Perhaps she had wanted to guide me?¡±


    A lot of the servants here seemed a little entric.


    I thought of such things as I walked through the mansion, and I reached the drawing room in no time.


    I knocked lightly on the door and said,


    ¡°It¡¯s Takumi. I¡¯ve finished my bath.¡±


    ¡°Come in.¡±


    Ms. Lyra opened the door.


    Huh? Didn¡¯t she go to the kitchens?


    I had seen her trudging away just a moment ago¡­


    Right next to her, Ms. Gelda stood with a tray with a tea pot and cups.


    I¡­suppose I wasn¡¯t as used to navigating through this mansion as I thought¡­ I must have taken a long route whening here¡­ Yes, that¡¯s it¡­


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. You did a wonderful job washing Leo. It must have been very tiring to do it by yourself?¡±


    Said Ms. ire as I stepped into the room, still surprised about Ms. Lyra¡¯s presence.


    ¡°Well, Leo is ratherrge. And she doesn¡¯t very much like baths. That was the difficult part.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Perhaps I should assign some of the maids to do it from now on? It will be much easier with several people doing it.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ I think that for the time being, I can manage it. Besides, I wouldn¡¯t want to push any difficult work onto them. And I think that it¡¯s best that I am there until Leo gets more ustomed to it.¡±


    ¡°I doubt the maids would mind¡­ But, that¡¯s true. It¡¯s probably better for you to do it until she gets used to it.¡±


    ¡°We are ready to wash the great Leo whenever you need. So please ask if you require assistance!¡±


    For some reason, Ms. Lyra was very enthusiastic.


    Could it be that Ms. Lyra¡­ Wanted to touch Leo¡¯s fluffy fur so bad?


    Well, Tilura had be addicted to it, and so it was no wonder that others would as well.


    ¡°Very well. I will leave it to you when Leo is ready. But for now, there is a possibility that Leo might try and resist. And that could be dangerous now that she¡¯s so big.¡±


    ¡°The great Leo might resist¡­¡±


    Ms. Gelda must have imagined Leo in a rage, as she suddenly became very pale.


    Indeed, if that did happen, the frail Ms. Gelda could be thrown into the air quite easily.


    Of course, Leo was nice and wouldn¡¯t do such a thing.


    However, Ms. Gelda was clearly still scared of Leo.


    That too would take time to resolve.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi! Can I go with them when the timees?¡±


    Apparently, Tilura really wanted to take a bath with Leo.


    And Leo was also very fond of Tilura.


    ¡°Yes, it should be fine if you¡¯re with the maids. Is that fine, Ms. ire?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Tilura, you may go if you¡¯re with the maids.¡±


    ¡°Yay!¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    While Tilura was so overjoyed that she threw her arms around Leo, the fact that we had been talking about baths for awhile now had drained Leo of her usual energy.


    But as Tilura held onto Leo, she seemed to realize something as she buried her face in the fur and then raised her head.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Leo¡¯s fur feels so good!¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. I noticed it while bathing her, but Leo¡¯s fur was actually quite dirty. But since I brushed her thoroughly and got rid of the dirt and dust, she should be much fluffier than before.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s so soft! I didn¡¯t know that you were this fluffy, Leo! It¡¯s amazing!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Yes, her silver coat is shining more than when we first met. This must be the true appearance of a Silver Fenrir¡­¡±


    Tilura seemed very moved as she enjoyed burying her face in Leo¡¯s fur.


    And Leo rubbed her face against Tilura¡¯s.


    Ms. ire was also looking at Leo and seemed to be very impressed.


    ¡°Yes, Leo¡¯s silver fur is very pretty.¡±


    ¡°Indeed.¡±


    And I felt the same.


    Leo had originally been a Maltese, and had white fur.


    She had pretty fur back then as well, but now it was silver, and due to her great size, there was something almost divine about her.


    Actually, her fur seemed to have also grown longer. But I hadn¡¯t noticed it before because the change in size had been so dramatic.


    ¡°Silver Fenrir¡­ After seeing the luster of the silver fur, the legends of how proud and unyielding they are sound so much more convincing.¡±


    ¡°Indeed, Lady ire. While I have also read the texts, I did not know that a Silver Fenrir¡¯s coat shone to this degree¡­ And she had already looked so impressive before¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ I thought that the legends must be exaggerating, but now I feel that they must be true.¡±


    ¡°I agree.¡±


    ¡°¡­Sebastian. If everything in the legend is true, then perhaps that forest¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes, if you believe it all, it might be the case.¡±


    Sebastian and Ms. ire were talking together as they gazed at Leo¡¯s fur.


    It seemed to be about some Silver Fenrir legend, but as I had never heard the legend before, I couldn¡¯t really understand what they meant.


    Perhaps I should ask? But just as I was about to address Ms. ire, she turned to look at me.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. It¡¯s about the forest where I first met you.¡±


    ¡°Ah, yes. The forest where you searched for the Ramogi. What about it?¡±


    ¡°There is a legend that the founder of the Liebert house used to go there.¡±

 Chapter 44

    Chapter 44


    <strong>The First Forest was the Duke¡¯s Forest</strong>


    ¡°¡­The founder of this house. Do you mean the one who befriended the Silver Fenrir?¡±


    ¡°Yes. And it¡¯s said that the founder first met the Silver Fenrir in that forest. And the legend says their rtionship was that of friends of equal standing.¡±


    So they first met in that forest.


    But how exactly had he managed to befriend a Silver Fenrir?


    From what I had heard, they listened to no one, and were feared as unbeatable monsters.


    Of course, when I looked at Leo, it made me think that Silver Fenrirs wouldn¡¯t attack anyone. But that was just in Leo¡¯s case.


    Perhaps the Silver Fenrirs that were born and raised in this world did attack people?


    ¡°And how did the first duke befriend this Silver Fenrir?¡±


    ¡°¡­That¡­is not known.¡±


    ¡°No one knows?¡±


    ¡°There are legends passed down orally, including ones that were only shared through the family, as well as documents written about the first duke. However, none of this has exined how the Silver Fenrir was befriended.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    ¡°However¡­ Some of the texts say that the duke was in danger, after being surrounded by fenrirs in the forest. And then the Silver Fenrir appeared.¡±


    ¡°A pack of fenrirs¡­ Are they different from Silver Fenrirs?¡±


    ¡°Normal fenrirs are different from Silver Fenrirs liks Leo. They are small and slower. Of course, they are still fastpared to humans, and are dangerous monsters that can use fire and ice magic. Also, even though their ws and fangs aren¡¯t as sharp as those of a Silver Fenrir, they will still cut through humans with ease.¡±


    So, while these fenrirs were weaker, they were still very dangerous monsters for humans.


    ¡­I could only imagine how the first duke felt when being surrounded by a pack of them. It would have felt like you were already dead.


    ¡°Because the duke was surrounded by fenrirs, and then encountered a Silver Fenrir in that forest, it is now known as the Fenrir Forest.¡±


    ¡°Fenrir Forest¡­¡±


    From what I had heard, fenrirs were very dangerous monsters.


    And so if it was a ce where one might encounter them, then it was no surprise that the forest would be named after them.


    However, I had wandered through it for a while, and Ms. ire had entered it alone, and still, we didn¡¯t see any of them¡­


    ¡°Are there still fenrirs in that forest?¡±


    ¡°As for that¡­ever since the founder of this house died, no one has seen a Silver Fenrir, let alone the fenrirs that were said to have always lived in the forest.¡±


    ¡°Is that so¡­¡±


    The ce that was called the Fenrir Forest.


    The ce where Leo and I had appeared.


    And where Leo turned into a Silver Fenrir.


    The ce where we met Ms. ire, who was a descendant of someone who had befriended a Silver Fenrir in the past.


    ¡­While I wouldn¡¯t go as far as to say that it was deliberate, I felt something like fate from it all¡­


    ¡°But¡­¡±


    ¡°But?¡±


    What was it? Ms. ire started to think with a troubled expression.


    Was there something else regarding that forest?


    ¡°While it¡¯s true that no one has seen a fenrir in that forest since the founder died¡­it is still a legendary ce. And so many people fear it. Few have gone close, let alone investigated its depths. ¡­So one cannot be certain that there are no fenrirs there at all.¡±


    ¡°¡­Hmm.¡±


    ¡°¡­So it¡¯s possible that deep within, there could still be fenrirs, or even a Silver Fenrir¡­¡±


    ¡°You are saying they may be lurking deep in the forest, where no one can see them?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    Still, for some reason, Ms. ire seemed to be talking about this legend with great passion.


    She was usually so calm, and I hadn¡¯t thought that she was the type to get very heated while speaking¡­


    Ah¡­but now that I think about it¡­


    It was only a few days ago that she had left the mansion alone in order to get medicine for Tilura.


    So she did have a more impulsive side.


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi. What I¡¯m about to say involves the risk of danger¡­and I will not mind if you refuse. But, I would be grateful if you epted.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    What was it¡­? A secret that is supposed to stay hidden?


    Was I going to be made to listen to information that would paint a target on my back?


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Will you take me and Leo into the depths of that forest?¡±


    ¡°¡­What?¡±


    ¡°Lady ire!?¡±


    ¡°Lady ire!?¡±


    ¡°Lady ire!?¡±


    ¡°?¡±


    ¡°Wou?¡±


    Sebastian and the maids were terribly rmed by Ms. ire¡¯s request.


    Of course, they were¡­it was dangerous. There were orcs in that forest.


    And ording to the legends, there could be packs of fenrirs as well.


    And maybe even a Silver Fenrir.


    It was dangerous without a doubt.


    Sebastian and the maids quickly rushed towards Ms. ire.


    As for Leo and Tilura, who had been ying, they were tilting their heads in puzzlement. They probably hadn¡¯t been listening.


    ¡°Mydy! Even if you are with Mr. Takumi and the great Leo, it is much too dangerous!¡±


    ¡°He is right! If there really are fenrirs there, as you have said, then I doubt any human can enter it ande out alive!¡±


    ¡°Mydy, please reconsider!¡±


    ¡°¡­My goodness¡­all of you¡­¡±


    The three of them were desperately trying to stop Ms. ire.


    Well, she was the kind of person to enter a dangerous forest alone just to find herbs.


    I doubted Ms. ire had said it as a joke. She might really just put it into action. And so it was no wonder they were frantic.


    ¡°Mydy! Please, please reconsider!¡±


    ¡°Yes. If anything were to happen to you!¡±


    ¡°We¡¯re begging you! Reconsider!¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    Oh? Ms. ire had fallen silent?

 Chapter 45

    Chapter 45


    I had an idea of what Leo was trying to say


    Had she lost under the pressure of Sebastian and the maids?


    While I may have just looked like a bystander, after hearing Ms. ire talk about the Fenrir Forest, I was now quite interested in that forest we had appeared in.


    Perhaps I could find out the reason that I was brought to this world.


    Well, even if I discovered the reason and found a way to return, I had no intention of doing that.


    Here, I would not be overwhelmed by work, and I could spend more time with Leo.


    But nevermind that. Right now, we were talking about Ms. ire.


    ¡°All of you! Be silent! I am speaking to Mr. Takumi now!¡±


    ¡°¡­Please forgive me for interfering.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m terribly sorry¡­¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry¡­¡±


    After being pressured by Sebastian and the maid, Ms. ire took in a deep breath and shouted angrily at them.


    ¡­I had not known that she was capable of speaking so loudly¡­


    This time, it was the servants who were taken aback, and so they withdrew.


    The three stepped towards the back of the room.


    After seeing this, Ms. ire turned to me and asked again.


    ¡°So, Mr. Takumi. What do you say? Will you go with me to that forest?¡±


    ¡°¡­.¡±


    Ms. ire. Ms. ire. You still have the same scary expression you did while shouting at Sebastian and the maids!


    And now it was directed towards me.


    This¡­was not the time to refuse her¡­was it? Who knows what she might do¡­


    I felt as if I was being threatened by her expression and the atmosphere around her¡­


    What should I do¡­? It was true that I had a personal curiosity towards the forest now, but not enough that I wasn¡¯t worried about the danger.


    That being said, I felt as if I couldn¡¯t refuse¡­


    I scanned the room for a way to escape the predicament.


    My eyes met with Leo¡¯s.


    Tilura was hiding behind her. Perhaps she too was intimidated by her sister.


    ¡°¡­Could I¡­discuss the matter with Leo¡­?¡±


    ¡°Oh, I didn¡¯t mean to raise my voice like that¡­ I¡¯m sorry, Mr. Takumi. I will calm myself now, so please talk with Leo in the meantime.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    I had asked her hesitantly, but Ms. ire seemed to have regained her calm a little and she apologized with a rxed expression.


    ¡­Clearly, she was the one person here who I should not anger.


    It was intimidating in a way that was different from Leo or monsters¡­


    I turned my back to her and took a deep breath.


    ¡­For now, I would ask Leo.


    I could tell that she was starting to really understand my words, and I was starting to be able to understand her.


    I wasn¡¯t sure what would happen if I talked to her, but we were old friends from the previous world. And so I wanted to consult her first.


    ¡°Tilura. I need to borrow Leo for a minute. ¡­Leo,e over here¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Tilura moved away obediently and went to the corner of the drawing room.


    And while she would usually go over to Ms. ire with a smile, she stayed as far away as she could now.


    Leo tilted her head in puzzlement as she walked over to me.


    And so I took Leo to the opposite corner of the room where Tilura had gone.


    ¡°¡­Leo. We were talking about returning to the first forest with Ms. ire. What do you think?¡±


    ¡°Wou? ¡­Wuu¡­ Wuff-wuff. Wou?¡±


    After appearing to think about it for a moment, she looked at me and barked as if to say, ¡®why don¡¯t you go if you want to?¡¯


    ¡°But Leo. They say that there might be dangerous fenrirs deep inside of that forest. And there could also be a Silver Fenrir like you.¡±


    ¡°Wou! Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    Judging by Leo¡¯s voice and eyes¡­it was¡­¡®fenrirs are small fry¡¯¡­perhaps.


    It had sounded like they were very dangerous monsters for humans, but I suppose they were nothing for Leo¡­


    ¡°¡­You may not think much of fenrirs, but what if there is a Silver Fenrir as well¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff-wuff! Wou!¡±


    Uhh¡­ Even if there is a Silver Fenrir, it¡¯s arade and won¡¯t attack?


    ¡°¡­Are you sure about that?¡±


    ¡°Wou! Wuff-wuff. Wuff-wuff-wuff. Garr! Guff! Wou!¡±


    That was a long one¡­Uhh¡­ Silver Fenrirs never attack their own kind. They will wee me as a friend. And even if a pack of fenrirs attack, I can defeat them easily¡­?


    ¡°Wee as a friend¡­ But what if the fenrirs attack in arger pack than you are thinking? Besides, there are other monsters as well¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff-wuff! ¡­Wou-wou-wuff-wuff-grraar¡­ Gar-garr!¡±


    I was starting to be able to understand Leo a lot more clearly¡­ It doesn¡¯t matter how many fenrirs there are. I can defeat them easily. Besides, Silver Fenrirs are superior, and they should submit at the sight of me. And the other monsters are all small fry too! I can defeat all of them! ¡­I think that¡¯s what she said.


    ¡­Huh? Me and Leo were having a proper conversation now¡­?


    She had always tried to convey things to me with strangely human gestures, but it was quite different to understand each other so clearly.


    And I doubted it was rted to the Gift¡­


    ¡°Leo¡­ How is it that I can understand what you¡¯re saying?¡±


    I didn¡¯t know if Leo had the answer to this, but I asked anyway.


    ¡°¡­Wou?¡±


    But Leo just tilted her head questioningly.


    So Leo herself did not know the reason.


    She had just be arge Silver Fenrir.


    And so perhaps it was easier to read her expressions and gestures now. I decided to assume that it was the case.

 Chapter 46

    Chapter 46


    I told Ms. ire and the others what I had discussed with Leo


    ¡°Wou?¡±


    Oh, I had gotten lost in thought, so now Leo was looking at me strangely.


    ¡°It¡¯s nothing. Alright then, so you¡¯re fine with us going to the forest?¡±


    ¡°Wou! Wou-wuff-wou! Wuff-wuff! Wou! wuff-wuff!¡±


    Uhhh¡­ This time¡­hmm¡­okay! And I¡¯ll be able to exercise a lot and it will be fun! Because I couldn¡¯t exercise much in the room we used to live in¡­ Is that what you said?


    Leo was making faces and using her voice and paws tomunicate with me.


    Still¡­ Exercise, huh¡­?


    ¡°I don¡¯t know what to say¡­ I¡¯m sorry¡­that I couldn¡¯t take you outside so much¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    As I apologized, Leo put her face close to mine and licked my cheek.


    Apparently, she was saying, ¡®don¡¯t worry about it.¡¯


    ¡­Thank you, Leo¡­


    ¡°¡­I hope you¡¯ll continue to put up with me, buddy.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    Leo nodded eagerly.


    Even when I did take Leo outside to y, it was usually only for a short while¡­ Because I was so busy with work¡­


    Leo had nodded at the word buddy. It was because of her that in the past world, and this world as well, that I felt like I could keep going on.


    ¡­Oh, this was no time to get lost in such sentiments.


    And so I patted Leo on the head and then turned to Ms. ire and the others.


    ¡­While my feelings of gratitude and remorse towards Leo had caused my eyes to moisten a little, I blinked a few times to clear them before moving away from the corner of the room.


    ¡°Ms. ire. We have decided.¡±


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi. You look like you were crying. Are you alright?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m fine. Please don¡¯t worry about me. It¡¯s nothing.¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well. If you insist.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡­I had thought that I was in the clear, but I suppose it was still on my face.


    I suppressed the feelings of embarrassment and gave Ms. ire my answer.


    ¡°Ms. ire. We will go with you to the forest.¡±


    ¡°You will!?¡±


    Ms. ire¡¯s face lit up at this.


    There were no traces of her earlier anger.


    Yes, she looked much nicer when she smiled.


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    On the other hand, Sebastian and the maids were throwing daggers at me with their eyes¡­


    I had to tell them that it would not be that dangerous even if we entered the forest.


    Well, if Leo was to be believed, that is.


    However, I was confident that if we were with my buddy, we would be safe.


    ¡°Uh¡­ Mr. Sebastian, Ms. Lyra, Ms. Gelda.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°There may be fenrirs in the forest, as well as the strongest of all monsters, the Silver Fenrir. That¡¯s why it¡¯s considered dangerous, and you want to stop Ms. ire from going, yes?¡±


    ¡°¡­It¡¯s exactly as you say.¡±


    ¡°Sebastian¡­¡±


    Ms. ire had beposed again.


    I suppose she understood that they were sincerely worried for her, and that¡¯s what had caused them to close in on her like that.


    And she had probably be angry because she was interrupted, and because she felt that they were ignoring her desire to go.


    ¡­But I could be wrong about that.


    ¡°Mr. Sebastian, I talked with Leo about it¡­and Leo says that it will be safe if she is with us.¡±


    ¡°¡­Is that so? But even with someone like the great Leo there, a whole pack of fenrirs will be¡­they might overwhelm her with their numbers. And if a Silver Fenrir were to appear, like it did with the first duke¡­¡±


    ¡°So you think that if the fenrirs and Silver Fenrir were toe out at the same time, Leo would not be enough to deal with them?¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    I understood why they felt that way.


    However, Leo had addressed all of my fears.


    But since I was likely the only person who could understand her, I had to convey it to others.


    ¡°Uh, ording to Leo¡­¡±


    ¡°Please wait. First of all, you are able to understand what she is saying, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    As I was about to exin, Ms. Lyra spoke as she stepped forward.


    Ms. ire seemed to re at her for a moment, but also understood that they were worried about her, and so she said nothing.


    ¡°Uh¡­umm¡­ Neither I or Leo really understand why. But perhaps due to being together for so long, I have a good idea of what she¡¯s saying.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    Leo nodded at my words.


    Just like I could understand her, Leo could understand me.


    ¡°The great Leo is nodding¡­so what you say must be true, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    Seeming to be somewhat satisfied by this, Ms. Lyra bowed once to me and Ms. ire, and then stepped back.


    Ms. ire was thinking about what I had said.


    ¡°Uh, Ms. ire. May I continue now?¡±


    ¡°¡­Ah, of course. Excuse me.¡±


    ¡°And so¡­uh, ording to Leo¡­ Fenrirs are just small fry for Silver Fenrirs. And it¡¯s the same with any other monster in the forest. In fact, since Silver Fenrirs are superior to fenrirs, they would submit at the mere sight of Leo.¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    I told them that Leo said fenrirs were small fry. The maids were very astonished by this.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. While it is said that Silver Fenrir are above fenrirs¡­is this true? Fenrirs are still ferocious monsters that attack humans in packs. It¡¯s hard to imagine that they would submit to another, even a Silver Fenrir¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ It is true, isn¡¯t it, Leo?¡±


    I turned to Leo and asked for confirmation.

 Chapter 47

    Chapter 47


    We Decided to go to the Fenrir Forest


    ¡°Wuff-wuff-wou. Wou! Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Uh, now it was¡­Fenrirs know to submit. It¡¯s in their instincts. And even if they attack by some mistake, I¡¯ll defeat them all, so it¡¯s okay¡­ Something like that?


    It probably wasn¡¯t what she was saying word for word, but I could tell from Leo¡¯s expression that she was confident that she would be fine against fenrirs.


    ¡°Uh¡­so that¡¯s what she said.¡±


    ¡°¡­But Mr. Takumi¡­only you can understand what Leo is saying¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Oh, now that talking with Leo was starting to feel so natural, I forgot that the others couldn¡¯t understand her as well.


    ¡­It was a little embarrassing.


    I coughed as if to distract them and then exined what Leo had said.


    ¡°Um, so ording to Leo, the fenrirs will know to submit to Silver Fenrirs by instinct. And even if they attacked us by some ident, Leo will still be able to defeat them. And it won¡¯t matter how many of them there are.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see¡­ Well¡­then¡­ But what if multiple Silver Fenrirs appeared?¡±


    Sebastian was still not backing down.


    Well, it was because he was worried about Ms. ire. And so it couldn¡¯t be helped that he didn¡¯t want her to go to a dangerous forest.


    ¡°Regarding that, she says that it will be safer than normal fenrirs or monsters.¡±


    ¡°What do you mean?¡±


    ¡°Because Silver Fenrirs never attack their own kind. If anything, they will greet her as a friend. And so whether there is one or many, it will actually be safer to encounter them.¡±


    ¡°¡­If that¡¯s the case¡­especially since the great Leo, who is a Silver Fenrir says so¡­¡±


    ¡°Sebastian. Are you satisfied now?¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    ¡°Then it is decided. Mr. Takumi and I and Leo will go to the forest.¡±


    ¡°¡­As you wish, Lady ire.¡±


    Sebastian no longer had any good arguments left, and so he was unable to stop Ms. ire.


    However, even now, he did not feel that it waspletely safe, and he looked rather somber as he nodded.


    ¡°Ms. ire.¡±


    ¡°Yes?¡±


    ¡°Why are you so adamant about finding out if there are Silver Fenrirs there?¡±


    ¡°That¡­I will tell you on a different day. We¡¯ve already talked for so long. And Tilura is tired. If we¡¯re going to the forest, then it would be best to rest early tonight.¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well.¡±


    When I nced over to Tilura, she was in the corner of the room, and did appear to be dozing off.


    However, I did feel as if Ms. ire had just dodged the question¡­


    Perhaps she saw the doubtful look on my face, as she then put her face near my ear and whispered.


    ¡°I will tell just you and Leo when we are on our way to the forest. I don¡¯t really want Sebastian and the others to know.¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well.¡±


    I nodded and she then moved away and smiled.


    What was this reason that she didn¡¯t want the others to know about¡­?


    Well, she said that she would tell me, so I would just have to wait.


    ¡°Lyra. Please take care of Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    And so Ms. Lyra picked up Tilura and carried her off to her room.


    Not only had she eaten a lot, but we had been talking for a long time about something she wasn¡¯t interested in, and so she had be sleepy.


    There was still time until dinner, so she could take a nap for now.


    ¡°So, Mr. Takumi. I will talk to Sebastian about preparations for going to the forest.¡±


    ¡°Okay.¡±


    Ms. ire was going to talk with Sebastian then.


    Would she berate him for pressuring her earlier?


    ¡­No, if anything, he might start lecturing her about this sudden decision to go to the forest.


    And so Ms. ire and Sebastian left the drawing room.


    Only Ms. Gelda remained, and she was giving Leo some milk.


    I watched Leo drink and spent the time rxing while drinking tea.


    ¡­Well, the tea had be cold after sitting there so long.


    But it was fine, because it tasted good.


    ¡°Ah, Ms. Gelda. Can I have another cup of tea?¡±


    After drinking tea in the drawing room, Tilura woke up from her nap, and Ms. ire finished talking with Sebastian, and so we had dinner together before retiring early for the night.


    As I had taken a bath after lunch, I returned to my room right after the post-dinner tea time.


    ¡°Phew¡­ I didn¡¯t expect to return to that forest¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Leo was tilting her head and looking at me.


    It was like she was asking what was wrong.


    ¡°Well, we had wandered through it for quite a while. And since there were orcs¡­I thought that we¡¯d never go back again.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Then why are you going?


    ¡°Because Ms. ire seems like she really wants to go. It¡¯s also the first ce I came to in this world. So I am curious about what we might find.¡±


    ¡°¡­Wuff! ¡­Wuff?¡±


    ¡°What is it, Leo?¡±


    While talking, Leo seemed to have found something, and she was looking at my desk with a questioning expression.


    But I hadn¡¯t put anything on the desk¡­ Ah, I did ce that nt that I had made with Weed Cultivation. The one that I had never seen before.


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Ah, that. I don¡¯t know why, but it started growing when I used Weed Cultivation. Since I¡¯ve never seen it or heard of it before, I put it there so I could study itter. ¡­Don¡¯t eat it¡­. Ah! Hey, Leo!¡±


    ¡°Chew-chew¡­ Wuff!¡±


    ¡°¡­You ate it¡­ It was probably some kind of medicinal herb¡­I hope it¡¯s not poisonous¡­ How do you feel, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff? ¡­Woo¡­ Wuff-wuff!¡±


    Leo suddenly became very excited.


    I¡¯m sure she was holding back a little, as she was so big, but her tail was wagging furiously.


    ¡°¡­What?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff! Grau! Grauu!¡±


    Uh, let¡¯s see¡­you¡¯re full of energy and can run for miles now¡­?


    What effect was this?


    If she felt like she could keep running, was it exhaustion recovery? Energy enhancement?


    ¡°Leo¡­ Do you know what effect the nt had on you?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wuff-woof-wou-wou!¡±


    Leo was shaking her head and wagging her tail as she tried to exin to me.


    She said that she didn¡¯t feel any fatigue, and that her body felt like it was in better condition than usual.


    ¡°So your body is in better condition¡­?¡±


    What does this mean¡­?

 Chapter 48

    Chapter 48


    There was something new added to the breakfast menu


    She had eaten what I thought was a medicinal nt, and now she felt stronger¡­ Was it something that raised your physical ability? Your stamina? Well, I guess that was the same thing¡­


    What if¡­I¡­after making the Loe, had continued to create another amazing nt¡­


    In any case, until further research makes the answer clear, I would grow them in the back garden.


    This one, I had been able to make without any information, as it was just based on a random thought.


    So even for just testing out Weed Cultivation, I would have to reconsider my process¡­


    And so it was with thoughts of methods for testing tomorrow that I got into bed in order to sleep.


    ¡°¡­Hey, Leo. I understand that you¡¯re full of energy after eating it, but calm down¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    ¡°¡­Alright, alright¡­ I¡¯ll y with you just a little. And then you have to sleep.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I had wanted to go to sleep early, but due to Leo¡¯s renewed energy, I was forced to y with her until midnight.


    Once she was satisfied, she rested the top part of her body on the bed and then fell asleep.


    Since it was a good opportunity, I used Leo¡¯s fluffy fur as a pillow and went to sleep. It really wasfortable¡­


    Maybe I could make a pillow with any fur that she sheds.


    But I haven¡¯t seen her shed any yet¡­ Maybe Silver Fenrirs don¡¯t shed?


    It was with such thoughts that I slept on my Leo pillow until morning.


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¨C


    I got up the next morning, and then woke up Leo, who was still sleeping with half of her body on the bed.


    ¡°¡­Isn¡¯t it ufortable to sleep like that?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Leo got up quickly and yawned as she got down from the bed and then stretched with her front paws in front of her.


    Thanks to using Leo as a pillow, I slept very well and felt that I was in good condition.


    Ms. Lyra was waiting outside, and so I asked her for a basin of hot water.


    I then used it to wash my face, and then it was time to shave!


    ¡°¡­My skin still tingles¡­ I¡¯ll take my time and get used to it.¡±


    Once the shaving was done, and I finished getting changed, there was a knock on the door and a voice rang on the other side.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Leo. Are you up?¡±


    It was Tilura¡¯s voice.


    So she hade to meet Leo again.


    ¡°We¡¯re up. You cane in.¡±


    ¡°Excuse me!¡±


    I called from inside, and then Tilura burst through the door and entered.


    She was certainly very lively.


    ¡°Good morning, Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Good morning! Mr. Takumi and Leo!¡±


    She said with a curtsy.


    While she was ten years old, she was the daughter of a duke.


    And so she was taught proper manners. While it wasn¡¯t like how Ms. ire did it, it was still impressive.


    After the morning greeting, she wasted no time in jumping onto Leo.


    Leo also rubbed her face against Tilura.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, Leo. Let¡¯s go and have breakfast. It seems like it¡¯s been prepared.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Tilura. Thank you foring to tell us. Well, let¡¯s all go together then.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    So Tilura hade all of the way here just to tell us that breakfast was ready.


    ¡­Or maybe that was just an excuse to get to see Leo. But I didn¡¯t mind.


    Besides, Leo seemed happy that Tilura was so fond of her.


    And so the three of us left the room and headed for the dining hall.


    On the way, Leo let Tilura ride on her back, and they started ying while they walked.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, Leo. Good morning.¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Mr. Takumi and Leo.¡±


    ¡°Ms. ire and Sebastian. Good morning.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff-wuff.¡±


    We entered the dining hall and greeted Ms. ire, who was sitting at the table, and Sebastian, who stood in the back.


    Leo and I sat in the usual ce, and then Tilura got off of Leo and went to sit next to her sister.


    Some delicious looking food was already set on the table.


    There was something that looked like a pie crust that was baked with sausages and in a rectangr te.


    Uh, I think it was a dish that was called¡­ ¡®toad in the hole.¡¯


    Ms. Helena had clearly worked hard this morning.


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s eat then.¡±


    ¡°Let¡¯s eat.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    At Ms. ire¡¯s order, everyone started eating.


    Once the tes were empty, I thought we would move to the drawing room for tea time¡­but apparently, the meal wasn¡¯t finished.


    Because a dessert had been prepared with the same crust for the toad in the hole.


    ¡°This is¡­very sweet and delicious.¡±


    ¡°Isn¡¯t it? I didn¡¯t expect a Yorkshire pudding toe out¡­¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s so sweet!¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    Yorkshire pudding.


    I suppose it was like a garnish dish that used the same crust as the toad in the hole.


    Normally it was supposed to be had with a meat dish, but this one had whipped butter on it, making it a sweet dessert.


    The texture was fluffy and chewy.


    Both Ms. ire and Tilura were smiling and seemed to be enjoying it greatly.


    Leo also liked sweet things, and was eating it just as eagerly.


    I guess girls really liked sweet things.


    Though, I like them quite a lot as well.

 Chapter 49

    Chapter 49


    It was decided that Tilura would study


    ¡°¡­Did they have it where youe from, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Though, it wasn¡¯t something well known far and wide.¡±


    ¡°I see. This is my first time eating it¡­ I never thought a dessert could be so delicious¡­¡±


    ¡°While it is a dessert now, I believe that it is usually supposed to be served with meat dishes.¡±


    Is that so¡­ Helena must have put some thought into making this then. I will have to thank herter.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I am very grateful that Ms. Helena always makes such delicious food.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Me too!¡±


    Leo and Tilura agreed enthusiastically.


    Yes, you had to be thankful for people who could cook well.


    As soon as we were finished with dessert, Sebastian and Ms. Lyra prepared the tea, and we went to the drawing room.


    Also, I learned that the Yorkshire pudding was called York Puddin here.


    And so I would call it that if it was ever served again.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, do you have any ns for today?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ There are things that I¡¯d like to test with Weed Cultivation, so if that is alright¡­can I borrow your back garden again?¡±


    ¡°I do not mind. In fact, you should feel free to use it whenever you want, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°So, what will you be testing with Weed Cultivation? You already tested it quite a lot yesterday¡­.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ Actually, I¡¯m not very confident that it will work as well as yesterday, so allow me to keep it a secret for now. It¡¯s nothing dangerous, of course. And if I seed, then I will tell you.¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well¡­¡±


    Ms. ire looked just a little pouty after I said that it was a secret.


    The idea came to me after Leo ate the mysterious nt yesterday¡­ It wasn¡¯t something I had to hide, but I would rather not talk about it yet.


    Besides, I wasn¡¯t sure that I could exin it well.


    I would figure things out after I tested it with Weed Cultivation and was sessful.


    And while it was mostly just a whim, I had a feeling that things would go well.


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Oh, are youing too, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff, wuff.¡±


    ¡°I want to go with Leo!¡±


    As Leo wanted to go out into the back garden, I decided to take her. And then Tilura said that she wanted to go as well.


    I suppose I could let them y out there.


    That¡¯s what I thought, but to my surprise, Ms. ire put her foot down.


    ¡°No, Tilura. You are supposed to study until lunch time. I let you go yesterday because you had only just recovered from your illness, but you must go back to studying from today.¡±


    ¡°But sister¡­ I hate studying¡­¡±


    ¡°Even if you hate it, you must acquire proper knowledge.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes. I understand¡­¡±


    It had seemed that Ms. ire was very soft when it came to her sister, but I now saw that she was strict when it came to studying.


    Tilura nced back at Leo several times as she left through the dining hall.


    Well, at that age, it was no wonder that she would prefer to y than to study.


    I also hated school, and yed a lot¡­


    ¡­It made me feel a little nostalgic.


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°¡­It¡¯s nothing.¡±


    As I started to think of the past, Leo looked into my face with a worried expression.


    I patted her big head and then turned to Ms. ire as I had just remembered something.


    ¡°By the way, Ms. ire. When will we go to the forest that we talked about yesterday?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°Yes. ¡­Though I¡¯d rather you did not go¡­ahh! Uh, preparations to go to the forest, yes¡­ We can have everything ready today so that you can leave tomorrow.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Then we shall go tomorrow. Is that all right, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I have nothing else to do here other than to test Weed Cultivation. So we should go tomorrow.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Leo nodded as if to show her agreement. And so it was decided that we would head to the Fenrir Forest on the next day.


    As I had only been in this world for a few days, it hadn¡¯t been long at all, and yet it felt like it.


    It was the forest that I had woken up in to find that Leo had grown. And where we had encountered monsters.


    Also, it was where we met Ms. ire.


    ¡°¡­As so much has happened, I feel a deep connection, perhaps.¡±


    I muttered under my breath so that no one could hear.


    With tomorrow¡¯s ns decided, Ms. ire and Sebastian left in order to see to it that things would be ready.


    And so I went out to the back garden along with Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda.


    As soon as we arrived, Leo started to run around.


    Was she just excited or was it for exercise¡­?


    Well, since both Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda was here, perhaps this was a good opportunity.


    ¡°Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda. Would you like to try riding on Leo?¡±


    ¡°Are you sure?¡±


    ¡°¡­Is it really all right?¡±


    Ms. Lyra must have wanted to ride Leo, as she looked quite happy.


    But Ms. Gelda had always been a little afraid, and seemed worried at the prospect of riding Leo.


    ¡°It¡¯ll be fine. Hey, Leo. Come over here.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I called Leo who was running around, and after she came to me, I told her to carry Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda.


    Leo must enjoy carrying people, as she looked at the two maids and then wagged her tail.


    Ms. Lyra was already fond of Leo, and should be fine. But Ms. Gelda¡­


    At this point, she was used to being in close proximity to Leo, but she froze up once she had to climb up


    ¡°Ms. Gelda, don¡¯t worry. Don¡¯t be scared¡­ Ms. Lyra, please help her.¡±


    And so Ms. Lyra helped push Ms. Gelda onto Leo¡¯s back, and then Leo ran around the garden.


    Since it was their first time, Leo started by running much slower than she did with Tilura.


    Ms. Lyra was cheering excitedly as she rode, but Ms. Gelda still appeared to be nervous.


    ¡°I¡¯ve never seen Ms. Lyra in such high spirits before¡­¡±


    Ms. Gelda was¡­uh, well. I would let her ride a little longer until she got used to it.


    And so I watched Leo run around cheerfully as I put a hand on the ground, and started the tests for the use of Weed Cultivation that I had thought of yesterday.


    When I had made the nt grow, I had not been thinking of an actual shape¡­


    And so with trial and error, I thought of various things in my head and became absorbed in my study of Weed Cultivation.

 Chapter 50

    Chapter 50


    I Studied Weed Cultivation


    The time passed as I continued various tests with Weed Cultivation, and before I knew it, it was midday.


    Of course, Ms. Lyra and Gelda were not riding Leo the whole time, and they got off after about an hour and watched me work as Leo yed.


    Then Sebastian came and told us that lunch was ready, and so I stopped my studying for the time being.


    ¡°Well, I learned quite a lot.¡±


    Apparently, Weed Cultivation didn¡¯t just make nts that I knew about, but it could reflect my will and create nts that might not even exist.


    Of course, it still wasn¡¯t just any nt. I could still not make vegetables, etcetera, but this was more than enough.


    After eating lunch, I separated from Ms. ire, who was still making preparations for tomorrow, and Tilura, who would continue studying, and I returned to the garden in order to conduct tests with Weed Cultivation, with plenty of trial and error.


    During all of this time, Leo continued to run around in the garden.


    ¡°¡­You sure have a lot of energy, Leo.¡±


    Well, she had taken a break in between. She came to rest near where I was working, and upon seeing the nt I had made yesterday, she had happily devoured it and then went off running again.


    ¡°¡­So I¡¯m clearly the reason that she is like this¡­ But I suppose it¡¯s better than not having enough energy.¡±


    Just as the sun started to set, Tilura, who had to make up for time she didn¡¯t study while ill, finally came out into the garden when she was done.


    She then ran around with Leo and then rode on her back. Sometimes they would just rub their faces together and jump around happily.


    After some time, Ms. ire and Sebastian finished making preparations for the forest journey, and so we joined them for dinner.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Do you still refuse to tell me what you are doing with Weed Cultivation?¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. I¡¯m still studying it¡­ Please wait a little longer.¡±


    As for Weed Cultivation, Ms. ire¡¯s curiosity seemed to be without limit. Though I managed to evade it and finish dinner.


    But Ms. ire seemed a little sulky because of this, though she did smile once the york puddin dessert was brought out.


    We rested a little after dinner, and then retired early because Tilura had be quite tired after running around so much.


    Ms. ire returned to her room, and I took Leo back to mine.


    Then I left her there so I could take a bath alone.


    ¡°Phew¡­ This really is a nice bath.¡±


    As I had spent most of the day outside, I had to wash my body thoroughly.


    While Leo had been running a lot, she was going to the forest tomorrow anyway.


    She would just get dirty again, so her bath could wait for when we returned from the forest.


    I washed myself clean and then soaked in hot water until I was warmed to the bone. And then I returned to my room and yed with Leo a little before going to bed.


    I had been thinking about Weed Cultivation for nearly the entire day, and so my brain felt a little exhausted, even if my body was fine.


    ¡°And tomorrow¡­is the forest.¡±


    I better get some sleep then.


    I said goodnight to Leo, who was rolled up into a ball next to my best, and then I sunk underneath the covers.


    £­£­£­£­£­£­£­£­£­£­


    In the morning, after I finished washing up, I prepared to go to the forest and left my room.


    This time, Tilura did not pay us a visit, which was unusual.


    I wondered why, and was told that she had overslept.


    She had gotten up in time for breakfast, but there was no time to go and call me and Leo.


    After breakfast, I returned to my room to grab my belongings.


    I had already found a use for the bag that Sebastian suggested that I buy.


    ¡°Leo. Let¡¯s go!¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I put a few pairs of clothing and tools that I bought into the bag, and then I called Leo before leaving the room.


    When we reached the entrance hall, the twenty servants were standing in a line in order to see us off.


    Ms. ire, Sebastian, and Ms. Lyra were wearing the same traveling clothes¡­ They were in clothespared to what they usually wore, and had a kind of leather armor on top.


    Aside from them, Phillip and Johanna, who had apanied us to the town, were also present. And there were also two others who were armed and wore metal armor.


    ¡­Huh? This many people were going?


    ¡°Sebastian and Ms. Lyra are going too? And¡­even the guards¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. Even if you and the great Leo will be with her, we cannot allow our Lady ire to go with such small numbers. Lyra and I will be there to take care of her, and Phillip and the three other guards will escort us through the forest.¡±


    ¡°Really. I tried arguing with Sebastian, but he would not hear of us taking fewer people.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. Well, it¡¯s because he is so concerned about you, Ms. ire.¡±


    I suppose they could not allow a duke¡¯s daughter to go off with some strange man and his dog¡­his Silver Fenrir, for a few days.


    Huh? But where was Tilura?


    I thought that she would at least want to say goodbye to Leo, as they would not be able to see each other for a few days¡­


    ¡°Sister, Mr. Takumi, Leo! Please be careful! Ande back soon!¡±


    It was as I was thinking this, that Tilura burst out from between the servants.


    ¡°Tilura. You must continue to study while you wait.¡±


    ¡°We¡¯ll try and return as soon as possible.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ah¡­Leo¡­¡±


    I¡¯m sure she actually wanted toe too, but we were going to the forest, which could be dangerous. And so we could not take her.


    I was sure that she had heard plenty of that from Ms. ire already, and had decided to be patient and see us off.


    Perhaps Leo had realized this, as she licked Tilura¡¯s cheek and rubbed her face against it.


    Tilura understood this to be a greeting for Leo, and so she smiled and waved at us.


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s go then, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Good travels, Lady ire, Mr. Takumi. Please return safely. We will all be waiting for you!¡±


    ¡°Take care, sister, Mr. Takumi, Leo!¡±


    The servants all talked at once, and so it was quite loud and hurt my ears.


    And so after being sent off by the servants and Tilura, I, Leo, Ms. ire and the others left the mansion.

 Chapter 51

    Chapter 51


    We Departed for the Fenrir Forest


    Right outside of the mansion entrance, were the four horses that the guards would ride, and the carriage.


    Once again, Sebastian would be our driver, and I, Ms. ire, and Ms. Lyra would ride in the back.


    All of our belongings were stored in the drawers under the seats.


    You could fit quite a lot in there¡­


    But as it wasn¡¯t the biggest carriage, it felt a little cramped to have three people sitting in the back.


    The sitting order was me, Ms. Lyra and then Ms. ire.


    ¡°¡­Hey, Ms. Lyra¡­don¡¯t push me so much¡­¡±


    I muttered quietly so that the others wouldn¡¯t hear, and tried to sit without taking up much space.


    My face grew a little hot, but I pretended to be unbothered as we set off.


    But Leo looked at me and seemed to notice my dilemma, as she let out a sigh.


    ¡­It can¡¯t be helped¡­ It¡¯s not every day that I ride like this¡­


    Both Ms. ire and Ms. Lyra was very beautiful¡­ If anything, Ms. Lyra was a little more¡­plump and¡­I would say no more.


    It might be obvious, and was also quite rude.


    ¡°And now, we will head to the forest!¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    Sebastian shook the reins as the horses began to trot.


    Leo also barked and started to run alongside the carriage.


    As for the guards, one stayed on our right and one on the left, and there was one in the back and one lead in the front.


    Now that I thought about it, how long would it take us to reach the forest?


    ¡°Mr. Sebastian. How long will it take us to reach the forest by carriage?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­approximately three hours, I should say.¡±


    ¡°Is there a problem, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°No¡­ But I¡¯m not used to riding carriages for long hours, so I¡¯m a little worried.¡±


    I was actually more concerned about being pressed against someone for so long, but they did not need to know that.


    Until I came to this world, I had never ridden a carriage, let alone a horse. I had only seen them in pictures and videos.


    ¡°But how did you travel then? You did say that Leo only grew to this size after you came to this world.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ How should I say this¡­ There were carriages, but you normally wouldn¡¯t ride on them. Instead, there were automatic machines made of iron.¡±


    I didn¡¯t know how to exin cars to them¡­


    Obviously, it wasn¡¯t a living creature, but I doubted they had vehicles made of metal in this world¡­


    ¡°What are they like!? An automatic machine¡­ Does that mean they do not need horses to pull them? You did say that there is no magic in your world¡­ But how does such a thing move¡­?¡±


    Surprisingly, Ms. ire was very interested in this.


    Ms. Lyra was also looking at me with deep curiosity¡­but her face was so close¡­


    And while Sebastian was facing ahead, as he was the driver, he kept ncing back as if interested in what I was going to say.


    ¡­How should I exin it¡­


    ¡°Uh¡­well¡­it¡¯s not magic. We just use a kind of liquid fuel instead of firewood to make them run.¡±


    ¡°Liquid fuel¡­ Such a thing exists?¡±


    ¡°Yes. However, firewood is much better for securing warmth. But liquid fuel burns very well, and so the technology to turn it into energy has developed a lot.¡±


    ¡°Burning energy¡­ You said that it was made of iron, which would make it very heavy. ¡­And yet it still moves?¡±


    ¡°The theory behind it¡­ Well, it¡¯s outside of my expertise, so I don¡¯t know the details¡­but, yes. They do move.¡±


    ¡°They must have have amazing technology where youe from, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Well, since we don¡¯t have magic, technology was used to make our lives richer, I suppose.¡±


    I remember reading something in a book once. Something about how highly developed technology was no different from magic.


    After all, for someone who did not understand how they worked, phones, tvs and the inte could seem like magic¡­


    And so I continued to talk about the differences between my world and this world as the carriage drove closer to the forest.


    Thanks to all of this conversation, I got used to the close proximity of Lyra¡¯s face.


    Which was good, because I was able to concentrate on what I was saying.


    ¡­And if I didn¡¯t concentrate, I would not have been able to offer much exnation to Ms. ire¡¯s various questions regarding science.


    ¡°We will take a short break here.¡±


    Sebastian said to us as he stopped the carriage under a lone tree.


    One of the reasons was that I, Ms. Lyra and Ms. ire would like to take a break after being cramped in the back for so long, but they also wanted to let the horses rest as well.


    But as Leo had not been running at full speed, she showed no signs of being tired.


    As Sebastian gave water to the horses, we got out of the carriage and stretched our limbs.


    ¡°Hmm. It is quite cramped in there.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. I feel quite stiff now and uh¡­ Mmm.¡±


    Ms. ire was raising her arms and stretching, just like I was.


    Though, she seemed to be slightly embarrassed about doing it, and so her movements were more modest.


    Ms. Lyra brought out a bowl and some milk and gave it to Leo.


    While Leo wasn¡¯t tired, she must have been thirsty, as shepped it up hungrily.


    ¡°Mr. Sebastian. How much farther until we reach the forest?¡±


    ¡°This is the road that is the closest to the forest. I suppose you can say that we¡¯re just past the halfway point from the mansion. We will now leave the main road and head towards the forest¡­ I think we should arrive in about an hour.¡±


    ¡°I see. In that case, could I ride on Leo the remainder of the way?¡±


    ¡°On the Great Leo?¡±


    ¡°Yes. ¡­Uh¡­can I tell you something?¡±


    ¡°¡­What is it?¡±


    I moved closer to Sebastian and whispered.


    ¡°It¡¯s just that¡­the carriage is very small¡­and so I¡¯m pressed a little close to the others¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, I see¡­ Hohoho. Well, you are still young. But is it such a bad thing?¡±


    What was he saying¡­


    It¡¯s because they were very pretty.


    It was what made it quite embarrassing for me!


    ¡­I wasn¡¯t saying that it was bad. Yes.


    It was actually nice¡­but I also didn¡¯t want them to see me looking embarrassed.


    ¡°¡­In any case, I shall ride on Leo for the remainder of the journey.¡±


    ¡°If you insist. ¡­I do not really understand your reasoning¡­but it cannot be helped.¡±


    This guy¡­was pretty¡­uh, interesting¡­

 Chapter 52

    Chapter 52


    We arrived at the entrance for the Fenrir Forest


    After telling Sebastian that I would ride on Leo for the rest of the way, I then told Ms. ire and Ms. Lyra.


    I gave them the excuse that Leo really wanted to carry me.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry for ming you, Leo¡­¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    Leo nodded as if to say, ¡®you¡¯re hopeless, aren¡¯t you?¡¯¡­


    After resting for about thirty minutes, we set off for the forest once again.


    Perhaps because she was happy to have me with her, Leo would sometimes start running very fast, and I had to make her slow down so that we didn¡¯t leave the carriage behind.


    ¡°Leo. Calm down a little while running.¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    While she was apologetic, she still seemed like she wanted to run.


    ¡­And she wouldn¡¯t be able to run much once we entered the forest¡­hmm¡­I know what we could do.


    ¡°Leo. Follow my directions and run. Then you¡¯ll be able to run around a lot.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!? Wuff-wuff!¡±


    And so I gave directions for Leo to run around the carriage and the guards.


    Though I had been the one to suggest it, I didn¡¯t think that she could run circles around a moving carriage and horses so quickly¡­


    Several times, she would move closer to the horses before moving away again, and Ms. Lyra started to look at me with a jealous expression.


    ¡­I¡¯ll let you ride Leo again some other time, so please stop looking at me like that.


    So when we passed the carriage again and our eyes met, I nodded with an apologetic expression.


    Well, that was settled¡­was what I thought, but then I noticed that now Ms. ire was giving me jealous looks¡­


    You too!?


    And so I gave her the same nod as well..


    After that, Sebastian looked at me the same way¡­


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, I am only joking. Hohoho.¡±


    ¡­Sebastian. So this is what he was like after you got to know him then.


    I had thought that he was a stiff and proper butler¡­


    And so the party continued to move amidst this yful and calm atmosphere, until we finally reached the forest.


    The carriage stopped at the edge of the forest, and Ms. ire and Lyra stepped out.


    I also got off of Leo close to the carriage.


    ¡°Leo. Are you tired?¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff-wuff!¡±


    Leo raised her two front paws as if to say that she waspletely fine.


    Her gestures were somehow bing even more human-like.


    But more importantly, Leo had run around so much and still wasn¡¯t tired at all..


    As she was running circles around the carriage and the guards, she would have been running twice as much as the horses.


    ¡°This is as far as you can go by carriage.¡±


    Sebastian said as he got down from the driver¡¯s seat and tied the carriage to a nearby tree.


    Then the horses were rounded up in one ce and given water before being tied to a tree as well.


    ¡°What will you do with the horses while we are in the forest?¡±


    ¡°They will stay here until we return.¡±


    ¡°I will be watching them!¡±


    When I asked Sebastian the question, one of the guards answered as well.


    Indeed, when I had first met Ms. ire, she said that her horse had run away after being frightened by the orc.


    And since there was a chance that we could encounter orcs and monsters inside, it was probably better to leave them here.


    ¡°Is it so they won¡¯t get scared and try to escape?¡±


    ¡°That is one reason, but it¡¯s also difficult for them to walk in the forest.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes, now that you mention it. But wasn¡¯t Ms. ire riding a horse when she was here? Before it ran away, that is.¡±


    ¡°It is because I was near the river. I went along the river bank from outside of the forest. Ramogi usually grows near water.¡±


    ¡°Ah, I see.¡±


    Compared to the rest of the forest, the area around the river had fewer trees.


    Like Ms. ire said, if you followed the river bank then it would not be difficult to ride a horse.


    While answering the question, Ms. ire was pulling out her belongings from the carriage and handing them to Lyra.


    Oh, I better go and help them.


    ¡°Allow me to help you. Some of it is mine, after all.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. But Mr. Takumi, could you perhaps join the soldiers in gathering branches?¡±


    ¡°Branches?¡±


    ¡°Yes. The dried and thicker the better. We are going to make a bonfire.¡±


    ¡°It is midday now, so we must prepare lunch.¡±


    ¡°I see. It¡¯s so we can eat. Very well, I will gather branches. Leo,e and help me.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I took Leo and we went a little into the forest.


    Just far enough that we could still see Ms. ire and the others from between the trees.


    I didn¡¯t want to go too far in, as the others might worry about us.


    And just like us, Phillip and Johanna, who weren¡¯t watching the horses, were inside the forest and looking for branches on the ground.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Oh, good girl, Leo.¡±


    Leo was carrying several branches in her mouth as she brought them to me.


    They were about as thick as my arm.


    When I thought about it, it was pretty amazing that she was able to carry multiple branches like this at once.


    I patted Leo on the head and praised her, but also felt that I better look for some too, and so I started searching the ground.


    After gathering branches for about ten minutes, we had enough to make a bonfire.


    ¡°Now, I will light it.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Wou-wou.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? What is it, Leo?¡±


    In order to make a fire, Mr. Sebastian had put his hand over the branches.


    He was probably going to use fire magic.


    But as I watched Sebastian with interest, as I wanted to see some magic, Leo sat right next to Sebastian.


    ¡°Leo. Don¡¯t bother Sebastian right now.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wou-wou.¡±


    She looked at me and then down at the branches.


    Could it be that Leo wanted to light them on fire?

 Chapter 53

    Chapter 53


    Leo used magic to light the fire


    ¡°Mr. Sebastian, I¡¯m sorry. But it looks like Leo would like to do it.¡±


    ¡°¡­Oh. The magic of a Silver Fenrir, eh? Well, please do.¡±


    ¡°So we can see Leo do magic. It is not every day that one gets to see a Silver Fenrir use magic. I must see this.¡±


    Sebastian moved out of the way so that Leo could light the branches on fire.


    Ms. ire was also very interested.


    It seemed that she had always wanted to witness a Silver Fenrir¡¯s magic.


    ¡°Wuuu¡­ Gau!¡±


    Leo faced the pile of branches and howled once.


    At the same time, a me burst from Leo¡¯s mouth and burned the branches.


    Now that I think about it, thest time we were in this forest, Leo had done the same thing in order to cook the orc meat.


    So much had happened since then, that I had forgotten about it.


    ¡°This is the magic of a Silver Fenrir¡­ I knew that they could breathe fire from their mouths, but I didn¡¯t imagine it to be quite like this.¡±


    ¡°¡­I think maybe it¡¯s because it would be more difficult to use your paws?¡±


    Ms. ire seemed to be surprised that Leo used her mouth for magic.


    But I could tell that she was also excited, as she was smiling.


    As for Sebastian and Lyra, they had expressions that were more admiration than surprise.


    The guards, on the other hand, had not spent much time with Leo, and so they were staring at the fire as if stunned.


    Even if they knew that Silver Fenrirs could use magic, they had never seen it happen before.


    Of course not¡­ They had said that they had never even seen a Silver Fenrir before Leo.


    ¡°Well, let us cook then. Please wait a little longer, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    Ms. Lyra was carrying a bag that likely contained pots and food as she addressed Leo.


    And so Leo returned to where I was waiting, so that she would not get in the way.


    ¡­She looked a little proud about being the one to start the fire.


    ¡°You did well, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    ¡°¡­She is so fluffy.¡±


    As Leo looked like she wanted to be praised, I had her lower her head so that I could pet her.


    But as I did, another hand stretched out and petted Leo as well.


    ¡°¡­Ms. ire?¡±


    ¡°¡­I wanted to pet Leo too¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. You should pet her some more then.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    Apparently, Ms. ire had been wanting to pet Leo for quite some time now.


    And while her hands still moved hesitantly, she soon got used to how soft Leo¡¯s fur was, and began to pet her more firmly.


    Leo must have enjoyed being pet, as she soon pressed her head towards Ms. ire¡¯s hand encouragingly.


    And Ms. ire, having fulfilled her wish of petting Leo, was all smiles.


    Seeing her get on so well with Leo like this made me think that the two sisters really were alike.


    After some time passed, a delicious smell began to waft around us.


    ¡°We have finished cooking. Please eat, everyone.¡±


    Mr. Sebastian took out some wooden tes from the luggage and passed them around.


    Ms. ire, the guards and everyone would all eat lunch together.


    ¡°And here¡¯s a little extra for the great Leo.¡±


    Aside from the pot meal, Ms. Lyra had roasted a few sausages.


    She added those to the wooden te and ced them in front of Leo.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Hehe. Enjoy.¡±


    It looked like Leo was thanking Ms. Lyra.


    Ms. Lyra smiled and then Leo began to eat it hungrily.


    I should eat as well. The smell was very appetizing.


    I didn¡¯t want my stomach to start rumbling loudly in public again.


    And so Ms. Lyra poured the food from the pot into the tes for everyone.


    It was a kind of soup withrge chunks of meat and vegetables.


    Perhaps she got a good stock from the meat, as both the soup and vegetables were tasty and delicious.


    ¡°It was very delicious, Ms. Lyra.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Though, I¡¯m afraid I¡¯m not nearly as good as Helena¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, she is a professional cook. But this had the charm of a home-cooked meal, which has its own appeal too, I think.¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re very kind, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    Ms. Lyra blushed a little and thanked me.


    I didn¡¯t know why she was thanking me, when all I did was eat some delicious food.


    I scratched my cheek a little awkwardly, and then Sebastian, who had also finished his food, walked up to me.


    ¡°Lyra is a fine, family-oriented woman. Hohoho.¡±


    He chuckled and then went off somewhere.


    What¡­ Up until yesterday, my image of Sebastian was of the perfect, hard-working butler. And that image was shattering loudly¡­


    Had he always had this hobby of¡­provoking youngsters?


    ¡°So he has more hobbies than just exining things¡­¡±


    I cannot let my guard around that one¡­ Mr. Sebastian¡­


    After that, everyone finished eating so that the only thing left was to clean up.


    However, all this meant was to lightly wash the wooden tes and the pot that was used.


    I thought that maybe they would put out the fire, but as a guard was going to stay to look after the horses, they decided to leave it.


    Sebastian used water magic to create water to wash the tes.


    I had no idea that magic could do such a thing¡­


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Oh, so you can do it too, Leo? That would really help.¡±


    ¡°So Silver Fenrirs can do all kinds of magic then¡­¡±


    As Sebastian was making water for washing the tes, Leo approached him with a curious look, and then a sphere of water started to appear right in front of her face.


    Perhaps it didn¡¯te out of her mouth this time, because Leo was being considerate of us.


    Afterall, unlike fire, if the water came out of her mouth¡­everyone would hesitate to use it.

 Chapter 54

    Chapter 54


    We Entered the Forest


    While using the water made by Sebastian and Leo to wash the dishes, I asked him a little about magic.


    Apparently, while you could make drinking water with magic, it was really about gathering the moisture that was already in the air.


    And so it was possible that other substances in the air could get mixed in. And so they didn¡¯t normally acquire drinking water in this way.


    ¡°Now that I think about it, I hadpletely forgotten about drinking water¡­¡±


    It was a good thing that Sebastian and Ms. Lyra were with us.


    I didn¡¯t prepare anything to stay outdoors¡­aside from clothes and a few personal items.


    Still, you could drink the water from the river. And so we would just follow it upstream and then explore from there.


    However, they did have a few bottles of water in the leather bags, just in case.


    By traveling along the river, we could travel more lightly, and also restock on any water we used.


    ¡°I see¡­ The securing of water really should be the main priority.¡±


    Such knowledge had not really been familiar to me up until now.


    I had never spent much time outdoors. And there was never a time in Japan where I was without drinking water. So it could not be helped, I suppose.


    I didn¡¯t know if I would travel much in this world, aside from this forest, but it was good to keep that in mind.


    After we washed the wooden tes and pot, we checked our belongings.


    I also doubled-checked my clothes and other items just in case.


    Everyone had something assigned to them to carry, and when we were done checking, we set off again.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, Lady ire. Please take these before we go into the forest¡­¡±


    ¡°This¡­¡±


    Sebastian took out two small swords from his back and handed them to us.


    I suppose they were called short swords?


    They were light, and could be swung with one hand.


    Well, I had never held a sword, not even a bamboo one. So I didn¡¯t know if I could swing it properly¡­


    However, why had Sebastian handed them to Ms. ire and I?


    ¡°We do not know what is in the forest. So we must prepare for anything. Besides, you can also use it to cut down any vines that are in your way as you walk.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Thank you. I¡¯ve never used a weapon like this.. But I¡¯ll keep it, just in case.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Sebastian.¡±


    And so Ms. ire and I epted the swords and attached the sheaths to our belts.


    ¡°Wuff? ¡­Sniff-sniff.¡±


    Leo brought her head close to the sword and started to sniff it.


    She probably noticed that I was wearing something that I didn¡¯t usually wear.


    After smelling it lightly, she moved away.


    ¡°Now, everyone. We will begin our search of the forest. Are you all ready?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Of course.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m ready.¡±


    ¡°We will keep you all safe.¡±


    ¡°We will keep you all safe.¡±


    Sebastian called out to everyone, and they all replied.


    The two guards, one of them being Phillip, were very enthusiastic.


    It almost seemed like Sebastian was the leader of this group now, even though Ms. ire was the actual leader¡­or so I was told.


    I suppose that due to the vast experience and knowledge that was a result of his age, it was inevitable that we should rely on him like this.


    And so one guard was left to watch the horses, and the rest of us entered the forest.


    Sebastian took the lead, and Phillip and Ms. Lyra walked behind him.


    And behind them, there was Ms. ire and Johanna, and then Leo and I walked behind them.


    And in the very back was thest guard, whose name I had not heard yet.


    As for our luggage, Sebastian carried the pots, while Ms. Lyra carried the clothing of a few people, including Ms. ire, and other items.


    Phillip carried the camping tools, Johanna carried the clothes that Ms. Lyra couldn¡¯t hold, and the other guard carried the food supplies.


    I was in charge of drinking water, and my own belongings.


    Leo wasn¡¯t able to carry anything¡­ Perhaps she could have carried something if we strapped it to her back¡­ I would have to think of something if we ever did this again.


    Ms. ire was carrying arge leather bag on her shoulder, which contained small items and clothes she didn¡¯t want anyone else to carry.


    Didn¡¯t want anyone to carry¡­did that mean¡­ No, I wouldn¡¯t pry into that¡­


    ¡°First, we¡¯ll cut through the forest until we reach the river.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    This was to secure the water.


    We should stick near the river and explore from there.


    With argendmark like a river, we could avoid getting lost, even while in the forest where our vision would be interrupted.


    Thest thing we wanted was a situation where we were all separated and lost.


    It would be like something out of a horror film.


    ¡°Wou! Wou!¡±


    ¡°What is it Leo? You suddenly seem much happier after we entered the forest.¡±


    Leo was barking rhymically, almost like she was humming.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wou!¡±


    Was it thatfortably nostalgic for her?


    ¡°Nostalgic¡­ But Leo, it was the first time for you, just like it was for me, wasn¡¯t it? And it hasn¡¯t been that long since we were here.¡±


    As she walked, Leo adeptly avoided the trees. At the same time, her voice and expression was trying to convey something to me.


    ¡°Wou? Wou-wuff-wuff. Wou-wuff-wuff.¡±


    It was a little harder to understand, because I was moving. Uhh¡­I wonder why? I don¡¯t know the reason, but it just feels nostalgic¡­ Something like that.


    ¡°I see¡­ Perhaps it¡¯s because this ce is called the Fenrir Forest.¡±


    ¡°Wou?¡±


    Leo tilted her head as she looked down at me.


    As Leo was so big, her head was positioned very high.


    She used to be the one who had to look up at me.


    ¡°There could be a reason. After all, they say that this is the ce where Ms. ire¡¯s ancestor met a Silver Fenrir. So perhaps now that you¡¯re a Silver Fenrir, Leo, there is something to this ce that you can feel.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wuff!¡±


    While Leo didn¡¯t understand the reason clearly, she was definitely different now that we were here.


    Her fluffy tail was wagging a little.


    We were just walking normally. And Leo only wagged her tail when in a good mood.


    It had even sounded like she was humming, so there must be something that she can feel in this forest.

 Chapter 55

    Chapter 55


    Orcs Appeared


    After walking for about an hour, we started to be able to hear the sounds of running water up ahead.


    This was¡­the same sound I heard when we first got lost here.


    ¡°Everyone. The river seems to be close by. ¡­Lady ire, you will be able to rest once we reach the river.¡±


    ¡°¡­Ha¡­ha¡­very well. I can keep going¡­until we reach it¡­ha¡­¡±


    ¡°Are you all right, Lady ire?¡±


    ¡°¡­I can manage¡­ Ha¡­ha¡­¡±


    Apparently, Ms. ire wasn¡¯t used to walking in the forest, and was very tired.


    And she was quite out of breath as she answered the worried Johanna.


    Sebastian, Phillip, and Ms. Lyra all walked in the lead and cut down any ivy, grass or branches that were in the way so that it would be easier to walk.


    But the ground was still not even, and so it was difficult to walk.


    Someone who usually lived in a mansion would not have many opportunities to travel through a ce like this, and she was also a noblewoman.


    And though it was the lightest out of all the baggage, she still had to carry something.


    While I was also a little tired, I somehow managed to walk without getting out of breath.


    After all, I had been made to work until midnight several nights in a row, or given work from morning until night without breaks in the middle of summer during myst job. So this was nothing inparison.


    When I was made to work outside, it was less exhaustion and more dehydration that made me feel dizzy¡­


    Leo was walking next to me. And since she was so big, the branches and grass still hit her even after Sebastian and the others had cleared a path, but she showed no signs of noticing and was still in a good mood as she walked.


    That¡¯s a Silver Fenrir for you, huh?


    But even when she was small, it was always me who became tired first when taking her out to y.


    ¡­So she always had a lot of energy, now that I think about it.


    ¡°Lady ire, it¡¯s just a little farther now.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes¡­ Ha¡­ha¡­¡±


    Sebastian said to Ms. ire as we continued on.


    The sounds of the rushing water were getting louder.


    We would likely arrive in the next ten minutes¡­ It was just as I thought this that Leo¡¯s tail pointed upwards suddenly.


    ¡°What is it, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wou! ¡­Oooooo!¡±


    ¡°Why are you growling?¡±


    After barking once, Leo started to growl.


    ¡°Sebastian, please stop. Leo is¡­¡±


    ¡°What is it, Leo?¡±


    I called out to Sebastian, who was in the lead, and everyone stopped.


    Leo was still growling as she looked up ahead, and then red towards the right.


    ¡°Wou! Wou!¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    ¡°¡­Ha¡­ha¡­ Leo¡­ What is it?¡±


    Ms. ire looked at Leo and then turned to me with a worried expression.


    While no one was far away, I spoke in a loud voice so that they would all hear.


    ¡°I believe an orc is approaching us!¡±


    ¡°¡­Ha¡­ahh¡­an orc¡­¡±


    Thanks to everyone stopping, Ms. ire was able to catch her breath.


    ¡°An orc¡­Phillip!¡±


    ¡°Yes! Johanna, Nic. You know what to do.¡±


    ¡°Yes! We won¡¯t let them touch a hair on Lady ire¡¯s head!¡±


    ¡°Understood!¡±


    As soon as Sebastian called Philip¡¯s name, they all moved at once.


    Phillip, Johanna and Nics? all lined up in the direction that Leo was looking. And then Sebastian and Lyra stood in front of Ms. ire as if to protect her.


    ¡°Wooooooo.¡±


    Leo continued to growl.


    And then, from the direction that Leo was ring, the sounds of several figures moving through the trees and grass could be heard.


    ¡°Woof! Wou-wou-wou! Grou!¡±


    The first woof was for orc, and the three wous meant three¡­so there were three of them¡­I think?


    ¡°There are three orcs. Please be careful!¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Aye!¡±


    ¡°Understood.¡±


    ¡­One of them¡­Nics? Talked in a more formal way than the others¡­but this was not the time to be making such observations.


    The guards were all brandishing their weapons.


    Leo was also ready to pounce at any moment. Her sharp ws ended from her paws.


    Just in case, I too unsheathed my short sword that Sebastian had given me.


    ¡­I had never wielded a sword before¡­


    ¡°It¡¯s heavier than I expected¡­¡±


    I wasn¡¯t confident that I could swing it when it mattered¡­


    Once the orcs became visible through the gaps between the trees, there was an air of nervousness that overcame us.


    And just like the one I first encountered in this forest, the orcs that emerged from the trees were wielding spears with rusted heads. Their bodies were plump and they had the heads of pigs.


    ¡°Gyuuo!¡±


    ¡°Gyu-gyu!¡±


    ¡°Gyugigigigi!¡±


    While they may have resembled pigs, their voices were quite different.


    And as Leo had said, there were three of them.


    They each looked at us and cried. Then they directed their spears at us and began to run.


    However, perhaps their round stomachs got in the way, and they could not run very fast. But the weight made the sounds of their footsteps very loud.


    If they charged at you like that, a light person would easily be thrown into the air.


    Upon seeing the orcs run towards us, Phillip and the others went into a low stance in order to intercept them. But then, Leo passed the three guards and jumped onto the orcs.


    ¡°Leo!?¡±


    Leo was moving so fast that my eyes could barely follow her. And with this inhuman speed, she reached the orcs and unleashed an upper sh with the extended ws of her right paw.


    The first orc was cut from the left side of its stomach to the right armpit. It fell to the ground in two pieces.


    But without dy, Leo¡¯s left paw shed from below.


    And then the second orc fell after splitting in two from the opposite side.


    Upon seeing this, thest orc became very afraid, and it stopped and was about to turn around to flee¡­but it was toote.


    The moment that the second orc was shed open, Leo had pounced forward and caught thest orc¡¯s throat with her jaws.


    ¡°Graauu!¡±


    ¡°Gyuuaaaaa!¡±


    The orc¡¯s cry echoed through the forest. And then they were all dead.


    Both the guards and I were unable to follow all of Leo¡¯s movements. So we just stood there. Watching but not whollyprehending.

 Chapter 56

    Chapter 56


    I made a nt with Weed Cultivation to help carry the orcs


    Leo had defeated the orcs in an instant.


    My eyes were barely able to keep up with her. And I was reminded of just how strong Leo was.


    Even if I could see it, it was too fast for a human to copy, let alone deal with¡­


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Leo sounded like she had just finished a simple task as she returned to me.


    But everyone excluding me had their mouths hanging open as they watched Leo walk back.


    In the meantime, I sheathed the short sword I had been carrying.


    ¡­It was a good thing that I hadn¡¯t been forced to use it while still not ustomed to it.


    ¡°Wuff-wou. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes, very good, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuffuff.¡±


    As she returned to my side, Leo lowered her head as if she wanted to be patted, and so I reached out and patted her head.


    Upon seeing this, the guards said,


    ¡°We¡­weren¡¯t able to do anything¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­what is the point of us being¡­¡±


    ¡°I am still green¡­¡±


    Leo¡¯s disy had taken away their purpose.


    Don¡¯t worry. I¡¯m sure we still need human guards as well! ¡­I think¡­


    ¡°So this is how a Silver Fenrir fights¡­ It is no wonder they are considered to be the greatest of monsters.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ To think that the Great Leo, who is so cute¡­¡±


    ¡°It was like this when they rescued me as well. For the Great Leo, a battle with an orcsts just a second.¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff-wuff. Wuff-wuff wou!¡±


    She was looking at the orcs and moving her mouth as if to eat them¡­


    It seemed like Leo just saw the orcs as a food supply¡­


    So perhaps this was all just a casual hunt for her.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, what did Leo say?¡±


    ¡°¡­I think she said that orcs are nothing but tasty meat¡­¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    Leo nodded as if to confirm it.


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­But orcs are monsters that can even be dangerous for seasoned fighters if they let their guard down¡­¡±


    After hearing that Leo thought of orcs as meat, Ms. ire looked very surprised.


    The three guards were also too shocked to speak.


    ¡°¡­In any case, let¡¯s head to the river. And we can rest there.¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff-wuff?¡±


    Leo looked towards the orcs and then tilted her head to the side.


    Uhh¡­ As we had eaten an orc after defeating it previously, she was asking why we weren¡¯t going to do it this time.


    ¡°¡­But¡­ I don¡¯t think we can carry three of them? Mr Sebastian. Leo is saying that she wants to eat the orc meat¡­ What should we do?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Phillip. Can you carry them?¡±


    ¡°If it¡¯s the ones that the Great Leo has split into two, we might¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ In that case, let¡¯s drag them.. It will be easier than carrying them, I think. Besides, we¡¯re already close to the river.¡±


    ¡°Very well. Johanna, Nichs.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°This will be good training.¡±


    And so the three guards walked towards the orcs that Leo defeated.


    ¡°Wou? Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Leo. You can carry the orcs?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    And then Leo walked over to them and stopped at the orc whose neck she had bitten.


    ¡°Guff.¡±


    Leo¡¯s jaw went around its head and then she lifted it up.


    ¡­An orc¡¯s body was about the same size as a human¡¯s, but they were quite fat and looked heavy. But Leo seemed to barely even notice the weight.


    ¡°It will be a lot easier if the Great Leo carries one.¡±


    ¡°Then we will carry the remaining orcs.¡±


    The remaining orcs had been split in half by Leo, which meant that there were four pieces.


    And so Phillip grabbed the two torso pieces by the arms and pulled them away.


    Johanna and Nics took the remaining two pieces and dragged them by the legs.


    As all three of them were already carrying baggage, on top of wearing metal armor, it seemed quite harsh to have to carry the orcs on top of that.


    Ah, that¡¯s right¡­ There was something that I could do.


    ¡°Uh, Phillip. Please wait one moment.¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    I stopped Phillip and the other guards as they were about to start walking. And then I rummaged through my bag.


    Ah, there it is. This.


    ¡°I know it may look suspicious, but please eat this.¡±


    ¡°What is it¡­?¡±


    What I took out of the bag and handed to them was the leaves of the nt I had made yesterday while studying Weed Cultivation.


    ¡°I think it will help you while carrying the orcs.¡±


    ¡°¡­Ah.¡±


    ¡°¡­Thank you.¡±


    ¡°¡­It has a very strange color¡­¡±


    The leaves had a blue color.


    Even if you knew that it was a medicinal nt, most people would hesitate to eat it if it was the leaves that were blue, and not the flower.


    Still, the three seemed to trust me, and so they put the leaves into their mouths.


    ¡°It¡¯s not¡­bad at all¡­¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s rather good¡­¡±


    ¡°I would not have expected it to taste like this.¡±


    Oh, so they even liked the taste.


    It was probably because I was thinking about taste as well when using Weed Cultivation.


    I had tried eating a small piece myself, and it tasted like soda pop.


    However, the idea of a nt tasting like soda pop didn¡¯t make it sound any less suspicious¡­


    ¡°Hmm? My body suddenly feels lighter¡­¡±


    ¡°What is¡­¡±


    ¡°While it¡¯s only half an orc, I can lift it up easily now.¡±


    The effect was felt immediately after the three ate the nt. And Johanna and Nics raised the legs easily.


    As Phillip was carrying two, he wasn¡¯t able to do that, but it seemed that it was still easier for him now.


    That was good. So it had worked.


    While I was sure it was safe, it was still a little like an experiment. But it was probably fine.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. What is that?¡±


    Ms. ire, who had been watching the three guards, asked me.


    ¡°Something I was testing in the back garden yesterday. I wanted to see what I could do with Weed Cultivation.¡±


    ¡°So you were making this nt. That was the secret.¡±


    ¡°¡­Hmm, no. It¡¯s not just this nt. In fact, this one was made quite by ident while I was testing other things. I wasn¡¯t trying to make it.¡±


    ¡°Is that so? Then what were you really trying to do?¡±


    ¡°Well, I think we should talk about thatter. For now, let¡¯s head to the river.¡±


    ¡°¡­Hmph, very well. But I will have my answer from you when we get there.¡±

 Chapter 57

    Chapter 57


    We Arrived at the River


    I somehow managed to persuade Ms. ire, and then we started walking towards the river again, with Sebastian in the lead.


    It wasn¡¯t that I had to hide what I was researching with Weed Cultivation, but that we were in the middle of the forest and dragging orc cracasses. It wasn¡¯t the right time to talk about it.


    We would have plenty of time once we reached the river.


    The sounds of rushing water were getting quite loud now.


    Another ten minutester, and we could see the river through the trees.


    ¡°Ms. ire. It¡¯s the river.¡±


    ¡°Ha¡­ha¡­ Then we can finally rest.¡±


    So walking in the forest for so long really had been difficult for Ms. ire.


    She was panting, but her expression brightened up when she saw the river.


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Leo, who was still carrying the orc in her mouth, rushed ahead of us towards the river.


    As soon as she arrived, she left the orc on the ground and jumped into the water.


    She had jumped right in thest time we found a river as well. Leo really liked to y in the water.


    She sshed around loudly as she swam and asionally drank.


    ¡°¡­Even though Leo is a Silver Fenrir now, she still swims like a dog.¡±


    I watched her swimming as we reached the river.


    Ms. ire then sat down on arge rock and rested.


    Sebastian looked for an area to camp, and Ms. Lyra began to gather branches in order to make a fire.


    Those two really were hard workers.


    As for the three guards, they put down the orcs where Leo had, and then they began to drain the blood from the bodies.


    ¡°Huh. So that¡¯s how you do it¡­¡±


    They lifted the arms and legs upside down so that the blood flowed out.


    asionally, they would make cuts where the blood seemed to be trapped.


    As there were three orcs and five pieces, it would take quite a while for them to finish.


    They also made the blood flow directly into the river.


    Allowing the blood to pool close by would be a little too much¡­both in terms of smell and just ruining the scenery¡­


    ¡°Well, I¡¯m not as tired as Ms. ire, so I should do something too.¡±


    And so I helped Ms. Lyra with gathering branches.


    I couldn¡¯t help Sebastian find a ce to camp, as I knew nothing of camping, and it was the same with processing the meat.


    And I would feel awkward joining Leo in her y now, so it would be best to make myself useful.


    These kinds of preparations should be finished quickly.


    ¡°Ms. Lyra. Will these branches do?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Thanks to you, we have quite a lot now. Thank you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. The fire will benefit all of us. I have to do my part.¡±


    ¡°¡­But you could have rested like Lady ire if you wanted?¡±


    ¡°Well, I still have some energy. So it was no trouble at all.¡±


    We then separated the branches for what would be used for the fire now and what would be saved forter.


    As we worked, Sebastian returned.


    ¡°Lyra, Mr. Takumi. I found a ce to set up camp.¡±


    ¡°I understand. Will we go there now?¡±


    ¡°Yes, if you are able. Lyra and I will tell the others.¡±


    ¡°Then I¡¯ll tell Ms. ire. I¡¯m sure she has recovered a little by now.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    I then separated from Sebastian, who went towards the guards who were just finishing up with the meat. And I walked over to Ms. ire, who was sitting by the river.


    ¡°Ms. ire. Sabastian has found a ce for us to set up camp. Should we go now?¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    ¡°¡­Are you all right?¡±


    ¡°I did get some rest. And I can walk just fine.¡±


    Ms. ire smiled at my obvious concern, but it seemed forced.


    There was still a tiredness in her expression and her movements were slow.


    ¡­It would be best if she did not do much for the rest of the day and rest.


    ¡°Ah, there they are.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Sebastian and Lyra were now walking towards us with the three guards.


    I would have to go and call Leo soon.


    ¡°Leo. Come out of the river! We¡¯re going!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Upon hearing my voice, Leo swam towards me and then jumped right out of the water!


    Shended on the dry ground and then shook the water from her fur.


    Even though we were quite far away, the water sprayed so far that I thought it might hit us¡­ I had been hit by that force at point nk in the bathing room¡­ And bepletely drenched.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Good girl.¡±


    While she was much farther than Sebastian and the others had been, she dashed quickly after drying herself and reached us first.


    And so I patted Leo and waited for the others to arrive.


    ¡°Lady ire, Mr. Takumi. Sorry to keep you waiting. Now, I will take you to the spot.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    We answered, and then Sebastian led the way once again.


    It was not too far off, and we reached it in about ten minutes.


    Ms. Lyra and I carried the tree branches we had gathered for the bonfire, and Leo and the guards carried the orc meat, which was now a little lighter.


    As we were walking alongside the river, there were no trees in our way, and Ms. ire seemed to have an easier time walking.


    Here, the space between the river and the forest was wider, and there were fewer rocks which meant there was a lot of in dirt.


    ¡°We will camp here tonight.¡±


    ¡°Very well.¡±


    ¡°Then we will start preparing the tents.¡±


    The guards spread out their burden and began to pitch the tents.


    And so I helped Ms. Lyra start the bonfire.


    Ms. ire and Leo watched usy out the branches with deep interest.


    ¡°Ms. Lyra. Is this fine?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ No, this should be like this¡­ It will burn better if the air can move through.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    And so Ms. Lyra lectured me on making bonfires.


    ¡­So it wasn¡¯t as easy asying down some tree branches¡­

 Chapter 58

    Chapter 58


    Leo Cut the Orc Meat


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? You want to start the fire again, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    When I finishedying out the branches, Leo approached me happily.


    ¡°Ms, Lyra. Is that all right?¡±


    ¡°I would be very grateful if Leo would light up the fire. If anything, I would have requested it myself.¡±


    ¡°I see. Well, Leo. You can light it then.¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    Upon hearing my words, Leo barked once. And just like before, she breathed fire from her mouth.


    It wasn¡¯t too strong or too weak as it burned the branches in the center, and the mes spread out.


    ¡°Now the bonfire ispleted.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Thank you. And thank you, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff-wuff.¡±


    After being thanked by Ms. Lyra, I thought that Leo would want to be praised, but when I looked, Ms. ire was already there and petting her on the head.


    Leo looked very pleased as she barked.


    It was nice seeing them get along.


    ¡°Then I will cook the orc meat. While the sun is still high, it would be best to dress the meat quickly.¡±


    ¡°I see. Should I help you?¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed¡­ Three orcs is a lot of work for one person, so it would be a great help.¡±


    ¡°I understand.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Are you going too, Leo?¡±


    When Ms. Lyra and I tried to go to where the orcs were ced, Leo moved away from Ms. ire¡¯s pets, and came to stand next to me.


    Ms. ire looked a little sad that Leo was no longer within reach.


    ¡°Leo. Why don¡¯t you stay here and wait with Ms. ire?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    As if to reject this idea, Leo lifted a paw and extended her ws out.


    ¡­Now that I thought about it, Leo had dressed the meat the first time that we ate an orc¡­


    Oh, well. While it meant leaving Ms. ire alone, it wasn¡¯t even a minute¡¯s walk from here, so it should be fine.


    ¡°Lady ire. Please sit here by the fire and rest a little longer. As we are close to the river, you will get a chill if you¡¯re not careful. And being warmed by the fire will help ease your fatigue.¡±


    ¡°I did wish to watch the dressing of the orc meat up close¡­ But¡­very well then. I shall watch from here.¡±


    After Ms. Lyra spoke to Ms. ire, we left her and walked towards the meat.


    On the way, we talked to Johanna, who was pitching the tents, and told her that Ms. ire was alone.


    Upon hearing this, she exchanged a few words with the other two guards. It seemed that she was going to go to Lady ire now.


    Well, the pitching of the tents was nearly finished, so they would be done by the time we were finished with the meat.


    ¡°Have you ever cut orc meat, Ms. Lyra?¡±


    ¡°¡­No, I have not. But I have experience with other kinds of meat¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­I see¡­¡±


    Now I was getting nervous¡­


    I had just asked her for no particr reason, and it turned out she had no experience¡­


    But as I wondered what to do, Leo suddenly tried to get my attention.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    She extended her ws and waved them in front of me.


    ¡°Leo. There are three of them. Can you do it?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°¡­She says that she can. Let¡¯s leave it to her then.¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well. I¡¯m sorry that I was not able to do it.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. You¡¯ve done enough already, so this is nothing. Besides, Leo really wants to do it.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    Leo was full of enthusiasm.


    While Ms. Lyra seemed apologetic, these kinds of things were better done by someone, or some dog, that was ustomed to it.


    The dressing of meat was a rather difficult thing.


    And so after we arrived at the spot, I left everything to Leo.


    ¡°Leo. I¡¯m counting on you.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry to have to ask you, but thank you, good Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. ¡­.Gau-wou!¡±


    After Ms. Lyra and I asked Leo to do it, she calmly walked towards the orcs and waved her paw.


    As they had already been drained of blood, it wasn¡¯t exactly a reenactment from a horror movie. But the sight of orc meat being chopped up as they flew in the air was still a little shocking.


    After Leo had waved her ws for about one minute, she walked back to us with a satisfied expression.


    ¡­That was too fast, Leo¡­


    ¡°Ms. Lyra. How is the orc meat?¡±


    I asked Ms. Lyra, who waspletely stunned by Leo¡¯s movements. And then we both went to look.


    ¡°This¡­ Only a professional cook could have done it this cleanly. It is amazing!¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    The orc meat was cut so neatly that it looked like something that could be sold by a butcher.


    Of course, it would have to be washed, as it was lying on top of the ground.


    ¡°Leo can even¡­separate the cuts¡­¡±


    ¡°It looks like it. Um, this might even be better than what a human can do¡­?¡±


    The orc meat that Leo had cut was separated by parts.


    And the meat and organs were also separated.


    Even if you thought of orc meat as pork, to cut it with your ws, separate them by parts, and remove the organs was¡­


    ¡°Silver Fenrirs are so amazing¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    I decided to not think about it too deeply, and just pet Leo, who was looking at me with a proud expression.


    After that, since it could not all be eaten at once, we set some aside to cook today so the rest could be saved.


    Ms. Lyra took the meat that was to be cooked immediately and returned to Ms. ire by the fire. And then, as if to not waste any time, she took out the pot and vegetables and started to cook.


    ¡­Ms. Lyra was likely tired as well, from all the walking in the forest. And so I was very grateful.


    Ms. ire must have been watching Leo work from afar, as she was praising Leo and patting her on the head.


    Johanna was watching Ms. ire and Leo with a smile. But I saw that she would asionally reach out her hand towards Leo but then withdraw it immediately.


    ¡­She should just pet Leo if she wants to.


    As I thought this, I went to fetch some water from the river, both to drink and to cook with.


    ¡°We finished preparing the tents.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    Just as the sun started to descend, and it grew darker, Sebastian, Phillip, and Nichs returned after pitching the tents.


    I thanked Sebastian and then added more tree branches to the fire, while making sure not to get in Ms. Lyra¡¯s way as she cooked.

 Chapter 59

    Chapter 59


    I Volunteered for Guard Duty


    Phillip and Nichs both let out a sigh and then sat down by the fire.


    They had to carry their heavy loads through the forest, and then the orcs were added to that. And then there were the tents. And while they had the nts I made with Weed Cultivation, it was no wonder that they were exhausted.


    Sebastian must have been tired as well, but he showed no signs of it.


    ¡­Though, he had shown signs of other things along the way¡­ He really was a mystery.


    ¡°Dinner will be ready soon, so please rest and wait.¡±


    Ms. Lyra realized that everyone was gathered together now, and so she addressed them while looking at the contents of the pot.


    Previously, when Leo had cut the orc meat, we had just used branches as skewers and roasted it.


    But this time, Ms. Lyra was making a proper meal.


    While she wasn¡¯t a professional like Ms. Helena, her cooking during lunch time had been simple yet delicious. And so I had high expectations.


    ¡°Well, while we are waiting, we should decide who will stay up and watch during the night.¡±


    ¡°Keep watch?¡±


    ¡°Yes. After all, monsters live in this forest And there are wild beasts. If we are going to camp in such a ce, it is necessary for someone to stay up all night and keep watch. If everyone slept at the same time, it would be like asking the monsters to attack us.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true. It¡¯s just that I¡¯ve never had to think of such things in the ce that I lived¡­¡±


    ¡°No one ever had to stay up and keep watch where you are from, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Yes. There were no monsters there. We did have wild animals, but there weren¡¯t many that would actually attack humans. Besides, all the ces that we could camp in were guaranteed to be safe.¡±


    ¡°Is that so.¡±


    Ms. ire, Sebastian and the others were all interested in these safe camping areas that I talked about.


    However, it was only possible because there were not many dangerous beasts in Japan.


    Besides, people only camped in designated areas where safety was secured in advance.


    But in this world, there were also monsters to deal with.


    If there were wild beasts and monsters that attacked humans in the area, then it was only natural that they would need people to keep watch.


    It was another reminder of how different this ce was.


    ¡°While I¡¯ll be interested in hearing more about your hometer, Mr. Takumi, we should first decide who will keep watch.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°We should take turns. If one person stays up until morning, they won¡¯t be much use tomorrow.¡±


    ¡°I will take the first watch then.¡±


    ¡°Very well. Phillip will be first. And¡­Johanna and Lyra. Is that all right?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°That is fine.¡±


    ¡°Andstly¡­ Nichs and I will take the final watch.¡±


    Oh? I understood why Ms. ire was exempt, but what about me?


    ¡°Mr. Sebastian. Shouldn¡¯t I keep watch as well?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­ Judging by everything that I¡¯ve heard, you are not used to such things.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes, that is true, but¡­¡±


    I had never gone out camping before.


    So, of course, I had never kept watch for a whole night.


    However, I did not like the idea of sleeping in a tent until morning, while the others had to stay up.


    ¡°Mr. Sebastian, please let me have a turn as well. While it¡¯s true that Ick experience, I cannot allow all of you to do everything¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­I see¡­ Hmm. What should we do¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? What is it, Leo?¡±


    As I asked Sebastian, and he considered it, Leo started to bark loudly.


    Was she saying that she would keep watch with me?


    ¡°Do you want to help guard the camp, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    Leo nodded at my words.


    If Leo was with me, it would be a greatfort even if I was inexperienced.


    Sebastian must have felt the same, as he nodded with approval.


    ¡°Very well then. In that case, we will let Mr. Takumi and Leo take the first watch. Are you alright with that, Phillip?¡±


    ¡°Very well.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°As this is your first time, please wake someone up if you notice even the slightest irregrity. ¡­Though, I doubt we have anything to worry about with Leo here.¡±


    ¡°Leo? While she is very reliable, are you sure?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Earlier, when we were in the forest, Leo noticed the presence of the orcs before any of us did. And so she will likely detect any monsters before they get close to our camp.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Leo nodded as if to say ¡®leave it to me!¡¯


    Now that I thought about it, Leo had also been quick to detect the orc when we first came to this forest.


    Was it their presence? Or was it their smell that allowed Leo to detect them?


    If Leo was here, maybe I didn¡¯t even need to keep watch¡­ But I had to be useful for something, and so I would do my best.


    ¡°Well then, it will be Mr. Takumi, Leo, Phillip, Johanna, Lyra, Nichs, and myself. It will start at ten o¡¯clock at night, and we will trade ces every three hours.¡±


    ¡°Understood.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Sebastian took out a pocket watch and looked at it as he spoke.


    If it started at ten and was for three hours¡­I had to stay up until one.


    Though, I still wasn¡¯t used to the way time was measured in this world.


    I think that it would be simr to eleven to two in my old world.


    As I was thinking about the time, ire came to sit down on the opposite side of Leo as she opened her mouth.


    I had been deep in thought. I wonder what was the matter?


    ¡°¡­Sebastian. I will take the watch as well.¡±


    ¡°You, Lady ire? ¡­I cannot agree to that.¡±


    So Ms. ire wanted to be on guard duty too¡­ Perhaps she was like me, and didn¡¯t want to sleep while the others stayed up.


    However, Sebastian rejected her request tly.


    The others also nodded in agreement.


    ¡°But why? Mr. Takumi isn¡¯t ustomed to doing it, but that hasn¡¯t stopped him? And so I don¡¯t know why it should be any different with me.¡±


    ¡°Lady ire, Mr. Takumi will have the Great Leo with him. Besides, mydy, you already seem so exhausted. You must allow us to guard you as you rest.¡±


    ¡°But¡­¡±


    ¡°If you are not fully recovered by tomorrow morning, and have no strength to explore the forest, then we will have no choice but to return to the mansion. Is that what you want?¡±

 Chapter 60

    Chapter 60


    Guard Duty with Leo


    While Ms. ire tried to protest, Sebastian stopped her.


    I could understand how she felt, as I had volunteered with the same feelings.


    However, everyone could see that she was tired. And in the first ce, it had been Ms. ire who wanted toe out here and explore the forest.


    And so if she was not able to walk, then we would have no choice but to return to the mansion.


    Sebastian was talking like this because he was thinking about her energy and safety more than anything.


    ¡°¡­Very well. I will rest today in preparation for tomorrow.¡±


    ¡°Yes, mydy.¡±


    Ms. ire looked rather forlorn as she gave up.


    Well, perhaps there was something that I could do.


    Otherwise, it was possible that Ms. ire and Sebastian will not be on the best terms for the remainder of the journey.


    Even I could see that he was saying it for her sake.


    And while I was sure that she trusted Sebastian, it must be difficult to have someone reject your opinions, just as he had done when she first dered that she would go to the forest.


    ¡°¡­Well, I¡¯m not sure what I can say¡­ It is difficult.¡±


    As I wondered what would be the best thing to do, Ms. Lyra called to us.


    ¡°Dinner is ready, everyone. Pleasee and eat.¡±


    It sounded like the voice of salvation, but it was telling us that the food was ready.


    Everyone had been walking through the forest and preparing the tents, so they would be hungry. And so we immediately picked up the wooden tes and headed towards Ms. Lyra.


    ¡­Even Sebastian, who had been so stern a moment ago, and Ms. ire, who had looked so disappointed, were walking together and smiling¡­


    ¡°Huh? Why did I even worry?¡±


    Apparently, my worries were unwarranted, and the two had a strong trust in each other.


    ¡­What a waste of emotion that had been¡­


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Ah, Leo. Let¡¯s go.¡±


    And so I stopped thinking about it and went with Leo to ept our dinner.


    In fact, the atmosphere during dinner was so peaceful and warm, that I was assured that I need not have worried.


    Ms. ire and Sebastian were evaluating the quality of the meat¡­


    Well, as long as things were pleasant, it was fine.


    It was kind of like a pork pot-au-feu, with orc meat and vegetables.


    The air was a little cold, since we were close to the river, but the pot-au-feu warmed us right up.


    It was indeed aforting, homely meal that was satisfying.


    ¡°The food was very delicious, Ms. Lyra.¡±


    ¡°It was very good.¡±


    Not only Ms. ire and I, but everyone else agreed that it was good, and Ms. Lyra smiled cheerfully.


    A few hourster, everyone retired to the tents, so that it was just me and Leo by the fire.


    It was the beginning of our watch.


    As for the tents, there were two of them set up, so that the men and women were separated when they slept.


    ¡°I cannot sleep in the same tent as you, Lady ire¡­¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry about that and juste.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I will be there too, so it won¡¯t just be you and Lady ire.¡±


    As a servant, Ms. Lyra hesitated at the idea of sleeping in the same tent. But it was a rare opportunity, and so she eventually allowed Ms. ire and Johanna to drag her inside.


    They seemed to be having fun, as if they would hold a little party inside. But there was no point in thinking about such things.


    ¡°It¡¯s not as if I could join them¡­¡±


    I muttered as I watched Ms. Lyra go in.


    Once it was just me and Leo outside, we continued to hear sounds of movement and talking voices for some time, and then eventually it was just the sounds of the fire and the running river. Also, the chirping of distant crickets.


    Now that I thought of it, it was rare for me and Leo to be alone together since we came to this world.


    When we were together, I spent a lot of time thinking about my Gift, Weed Cultivation. And in my room we would y a little and then go to sleep.


    ¡­So this was a good opportunity to talk with Leo.


    ¡°Leo, you came to this world with me, but¡­ How do you feel? While you were small in the other world, it was a peaceful ce where you didn¡¯t have to fight.¡±


    ¡°Wou-wou. Wuff-wou.¡±


    Leo tilted her head to the side once and then replied.


    Uhhh, judging by her gestures and expressions¡­ I like it here better because we are always together¡­ I think.


    I see¡­ Being together was more important for Leo. Because she was often left in my apartment all day previously.


    ¡­I was happy to hear that.


    What should I ask next¡­


    ¡°You became big so suddenly. Are there any difficulties rted to that?¡±


    ¡°Wou-wuff-wuff. Wou! Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Uhh¡­ Nothing. It¡¯s easier to move now, so I like it more. And I¡¯m happy to be able to protect¡­ I think that¡¯s what she said.


    So, there were no issues rted to her current size.


    With humans, you sometimes experience growing pain when you suddenly grow taller. But such things did not happen to Leo.


    Well, it wasn¡¯t as if she had actually grown over time.


    However, I did feel a little pitiful about being the one who was protected. But I also felt grateful.


    ¡°Now that I think about it, you can also use magic now, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wou?¡±


    Should I use it? She seemed to ask with a tilt of her head.


    ¡°No, no. You don¡¯t have to do it now. But you can use it if something happens.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Leo nodded, but looked a little disappointed.


    ¡­I suppose she wanted to use it?


    However, she might wake up the others if she did it now.


    And ording to Sebastian, you could die if you ran out of magic energy, so it was best not to waste it.


    I didn¡¯t know how much magic energy Leo had¡­


    So it would be better to watch her use magic after we returned from the forest and were safe again.


    ¡­Speaking of Sebastian, he hadn¡¯t been able to finish his exnation on magic¡­ I wanted to be able to use magic myself, and so I would have to ask himter.


    ¡°What kind of magic can you use, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­Wou-wuff?¡±


    ¡°I told you, not right now. I just want to know what kind of magic you can do.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­woo¡­ Wou-wouwo! Gaugau-wuff.¡±


    Leo really did want to use magic.


    Perhaps she was like me. Now that she could do something that she hadn¡¯t been able to do before, she wanted to do it.


    After looking disappointed again, she began to tell me about what kind of magic she could do.


    Uh, a lot¡­ I¡¯m especially good with fire. And I can control water, air, and earth as well¡­ Also¡­other types.


    You needed to be a little more specific than that, Leo.


    Still, it was a marvel that I was able to understand Leo so well now.


    And it was a great thing to be able tomunicate with your buddy.

 Chapter 61

    Chapter 61


    We sat around the bonfire with Ms. ire


    ¡°So you don¡¯t know much about the others?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wou-wou.¡±


    Apparently, while she knew that she was capable of using other kinds of magic, she still did not know what kind of magic they were.


    So I suppose we wouldn¡¯t know the effects until she used it.


    Well, Leo and I had only been in this world for a few days. Of course, there would be a lot of things we still didn¡¯t know.


    If anything, I had just assumed that she knew a lot, perhaps because she was a Silver Fenrir now, and would sometimes act like she was more familiar with this world.


    Leo had looked very proud at first when she talked about the magic she could use. But her expression gradually became more apologetic as she was unable to exin some things. And so I ruffled her fur as I sat next to her.


    ¡°It can¡¯t be helped if you don¡¯t know. So don¡¯t worry. It¡¯s not as if I know a whole lot about my Gift¡­Weed Cultivation.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    I patted Leo on the back, and then she moved her face close to me, so I patted her on the head as well.


    Her thick silver fur felt so nice.


    With enough pats and words of encouragement, Leo returned to her earlier mood.


    She was currently warming herself in front of the fire, and wagging her tail to show that she enjoyed being petted.


    ¡­While it was nice that she was wagging her tail, I was worried that she was too close to the fire, and that her fur might get singed.


    And so Leo and I spent the timepletely rxed until two hours had passed. And then I heard a rustling sounding from the tents.


    Was it Phillip? However, it seemed a little early for them toe out and trade ces with me.


    As I thought this and looked towards the tent, I realized that the sound wasn¡¯t from the men¡¯s tent, but the tent where Ms. ire and Ms. Lyra were sleeping.


    ¡­I wonder what it is? Nature calling?


    I waited a little longer, and then Ms. ire stepped out of the tent.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Thank you for watching the camp.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. Are you all right? Having trouble sleeping?¡±


    ¡°No¡­ It is not that¡­ May I sit next to you?¡±


    ¡°¡­Of course.¡±


    Ms. ire sat down next to me, on the opposite side as Leo.


    I wonder what was the matter¡­ If she wasn¡¯t having trouble sleeping, then it would be best that she get a good and long rest¡­


    ¡°I just¡­wanted to talk with you, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°With¡­me¡­?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    I stole a nce towards Ms. ire, and saw that her cheeks were flushed.


    Was it because of the firelight or¡­


    In any case, she wanted to talk to me. I didn¡¯t know what it was about, but I would listen.


    Leo was being quiet so as to not bother us. Shey low on the ground next to me.


    However, she was looking in our direction, as if she was curious.


    ¡°I¡­Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes?¡±


    ¡°I wanted to thank you¡­for taking me to this forest.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ Uh¡­ It¡¯s really nothing. I was personally interested in this forest as well.¡±


    It was where we had first appeared whening here.


    I didn¡¯t know how we had been transported here, but there must be a reason that this ce was chosen.


    ording to Ms. ire and the others, this ce was called the Fenrir Forest.


    And now Leo was a Silver Fenrir. I felt that there had to be more to this forest than what we knew.


    ¡°Still, allow me to thank you. I very much doubt I would have been able toe if you weren¡¯t with me.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    ¡°Also, aside from thanking you¡­¡±


    ¡°Is there something else?¡±


    ¡°Well, no, but¡­ It¡¯s about the time when I asked you toe to this forest with me.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­yes.¡±


    I could not forget Ms. ire¡¯s expression then.


    In my old world, I had been terribly afraid of my superiors when they were angry after I made a mistake at work. Yet her face had surpassed even them¡­


    ¡°I¡­Sebastian was rather upset with me after that.¡±


    ¡°Sebastian?¡±


    While I understood that Sebastian was prone to lecturing her out of concern for her wellbeing, I found it difficult¡­to imagine him getting angry.


    ¡°Of course, Sebastian is often quite upset with me¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    Now that I thought about it, our first encounter had been the result of her leaving the mansion all alone.


    And I did remember that Sebastianined to Ms. ire once we returned.


    Well, I suppose it was the duty of a butler to berate a youngdy who is reckless?


    Ms. ire did have a very carefree side to her.


    The idea of Sebastian being angry with Ms. ire was starting to look less and less unlikely.


    ¡°And¡­he said that if I asked you¡­that you would not be able to refuse¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­¡±


    ¡°Because as a guest in the mansion, you are especially reserved. And while we have not been acquainted for very long, I can still tell by your personality that I had made the request in a way that would be very difficult for you to refuse. And I am sorry.¡±


    Indeed, I was not the type to refuse such a request.


    I did think it was something I needed to work on. But¡­before I know it, I often have people asking different things of me.


    At work, my coworkers would ask for help, and my workload would increase to the point where I couldn¡¯t handle it.


    ¡°I pulled you along without really thinking about your position. ¡­And I apologize for that.¡±


    ¡°¡­No¡­it really is fine. It is true. Not only then, but in general, I find it hard to deny a request. However, I¡¯m not lying when I say that I too am very interested in this forest.¡±


    ¡°Still, it doesn¡¯t change the fact that I practically forced you. And that is not bing for the daughter of a duke.¡±


    ¡°The duke?¡±


    Suddenly, it seemed like the conversation was blowing out of proportion¡­


    ¡°We are near the top, even among nobles. And so it is difficult for people to refuse us. While using one¡¯s position is not always a bad thing, in our house, it is strictly forbidden to use our power to control others. And I feel as if that is what I did with you.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    We were talking on a very different scale now¡­ I really did not minding¡­ However, I would first listen to everything that Ms. ire had to say.

 Chapter 62

    Chapter 62


    Ms. ire¡¯s Apology


    ¡°It is shameful for the daughter of a duke to use her authority in such a way. Besides¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes?¡±


    ¡°I knew that it was not in your nature to refuse, and took advantage of it rather forcefully. I can make no excuses for that¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    I really did not see myself as having been forced to do it¡­ If anything, a part of me thought it was a great opportunity.


    Well, I wouldn¡¯t deny that I had been afraid of Ms. ire in the moment, but that hardly made me feel manipted.


    Besides, I still remember everything she said on that day¡­ And there had been nothing about her position or authority?


    Perhaps it was just my way of thinking. But she had never brought up her father being a duke.


    And yet, she was being very hard on herself now.


    ¡­In any case, I would have to answer everything she said, one by one.


    But first¡­


    ¡°Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    I turned to Leo, who had been listening quietly. And then in a small whisper so that Ms. ire could not hear, I told her what I wanted her to do.


    Leo nodded and then got up to her feet. And then she moved away from me and went over to Ms. ire.


    Then Leoy down and rested her face on Ms. ire¡¯sp.


    ¡°Good Leo? Mr. Takumi. What is this?¡±


    ¡°For now, I think you should pet her and calm down.¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well.¡±


    And so Ms. ire did as I said and began to stroke Leo¡¯s head.


    The texture of Leo¡¯s lushious coat had a healing effect, and Ms.ire¡¯s stiff expression began to rx.


    ¡°Ms. ire.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    Oh. At the sound of my voice, she became tense again.


    Perhaps she thought that I would be cross with her, just like Sebastian?


    But please, just continue to pet Loe and rx¡­


    ¡°¡­Umm. It seems that you believe you abused your authority, but I don¡¯t agree with that. Not even a little. In fact, I don¡¯t even think you were speaking to me as a daughter of a duke during that time.¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    Alright. She was listening.


    Leo. Please stay there and keep being petted.


    I said wordlessly to Leo as our eyes met. And then I continued to speak.


    ¡­But I wasn¡¯t even sure if Leo understood what I wanted.


    ¡°I won¡¯t deny that I was a little overwhelmed when I saw you rebuke the servants. However, it wasn¡¯t directed towards me, and yet you still apologized to me about raising your voice. And that was enough for me.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°And while you may say that you took advantage of my character¡­ I do not feel as if I¡¯ve been used. If anything, I saw it as a convenient reason for me toe to this forest. ¡­Furthermore¡­¡±


    ¡°?¡±


    ¡°How could a man like me not feel happy about having a beautiful woman make a request to him?¡±


    ¡°¡­Oh¡­Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    Ms. ire¡¯s cheeks flushed¡­ Perhaps I had said too much?


    Oh, well. There was no taking it back now.


    Besides, her expression had rxed greatly.


    And it was a little difficult to see such a pretty face be tense for so long¡­


    ¡°¡­But, are you really certain about it?¡±


    Ms. ire was still not wholly convinced.


    Hmm¡­ In that case¡­


    ¡°In that case, Ms. ire. Please tell me the reason that you wanted toe to this forest. And then we can consider this entire matter settled.¡±


    ¡°¡­If that is what you want, Mr. Takumi. Of course, I already did mean to tell you.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes, you did say that.¡±


    ¡°It was just that I assumed then, that it would be only you and Leo who were with me. And that we could talk whenever we wanted.¡±


    ¡°Ahaha. Well, not Sebastian, Ms. Lyra and the guards are here too.¡±


    ¡°It is not something I want Sebastian to hear¡­ But I can speak of it now. Everyone is asleep.¡±


    ¡°Indeed.¡±


    So, Ms. ire was finally going to tell me why she wanted toe to this forest.


    The reason that warranted berating her servants and asking me rather vigorously to apany her¡­ I had been so curious that I only slept for about eight hours at night¡­


    No, that was a joke. Such pointless and unspoken thoughts drifted in my mind as I waited for Ms. ire to begin.


    ¡°I¡­ I have no actual interest in the forest itself. My real interest is with the Silver Fenrirs.¡±


    ¡°The ones that aren¡¯t Leo?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Different Silver Fenrirs¡­ To borrow your words, Mr. Takumi, the Silver Fenrirs of this world¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ And why are you interested in Silver Fenrirs?¡±


    ¡°It is because¡­ Well, my encounter with Leo is part of the reason¡­¡±


    Here she paused once and seemed to be deep in thought.


    In the meantime, Leo continued to lie there quietly under Ms. ire¡¯s hand.


    As she petted Leo, Ms. ire¡¯s face showed a gentle smile that was quite different from her expression earlier.


    Leo¡¯s healing ability was impressive¡­


    Perhaps this is what they meant when they said Silver Fenrirs were the most powerful¡­ As the silly notion came to me, Ms. ire seemed to have gathered her thoughts.


    ¡°I¡­when I was born¡­ To be precise, as far back as I can remember¡­from that time¡­a certain rumor spread through the household among the servants.¡±


    ¡°A rumor?¡±


    ¡°Yes. They were saying that I was the founder, the first lord of the Liebert house, now reborn.¡±


    ¡°Reborn¡­ Was there a reason for people to think this?¡±


    ¡°That¡­ It had to do with a painting.¡±


    ¡°A¡­painting?¡±


    ¡°There were several such paintings. They showed the growth of the first lord of the Liebert house. And one of the paintings was that of a baby. ¡­And I looked just like it.¡±


    ¡°You did? ¡­Was the founder of your house a woman then?¡±


    ¡°Yes. But in spite of being a woman, she stood on the battlefield and bravely routed out the enemy forces.¡±


    So the founder was¡­a woman¡­ Given the stories of battle that led to bing a noble, I had assumed that she was a man¡­

 Chapter 63

    Chapter 63


    Ms. ire told me the reason that she wanted toe to the forest


    ¡°And even as I grew older, I was mirroring the portraits that depicted the growth of the first lord.¡±


    ¡°So you were the spitting image of her¡­?¡±


    ¡°Yes. And so the servants of the Liebert household had great expectations as I was raised. I was the first founder reborn. Someone who would surely bring great prosperity to the house¡­¡±


    ¡°What¡­about the others¡­such as your father?¡±


    ¡°¡­Oh, my father didn¡¯t believe that just because we looked alike that we were the same person. In fact, he would often tell me that I must not believe the stories and try to copy what she did. He said that I must think and live in my own way.¡±


    ¡°¡­He sounds like a good father.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ Both Tilura and I were doted on greatly by him. ¡­That is, of course, outside of the times he would speak of marriage¡­that is¡­¡±


    ¡°Hahaha¡­ But perhaps it is because he has some great n?¡±


    ¡°If he does, I had no time to consider it when I was being crushed by the sheer numbers of suitors he pushed onto me!¡±


    Apparently, her father had made her meet many suitors.


    Obviously, I had no idea what it was like to be a father who wanted his daughter to get married.


    I didn¡¯t even have any children.


    ¡°¡­But I digress¡­ It was because of my father¡¯s words that I was able to live without having to think about these stories about being a reborn ancestor. However¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes?¡±


    ¡°For some reason, hearing people talk about the legends and stories of Silver Fenrirs makes my heart leap in my chest with excitement.¡±


    ¡°It does¡­¡±


    My eyes nearly traveled down to Ms. ire¡¯s ample chest, but the power of will stopped them.


    I would not want to be rude..


    ¡°And I feel like that when I see Leo. Something just wells up inside of me when ites to Silver Fenrirs.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know the reason for this. And felt that the only way to find out was toe to this forest where my ancestor first met a Silver Fenrir.¡±


    ¡°However¡­ There is no guarantee that there will be another Silver Fenrir, is there? Besides, you¡¯ve already met Leo?¡±


    ¡°If I cannot find one after searching the forest, then that cannot be helped. I will give up when that timees. As for Leo, I cannot exin it. But while I do feel an excitement, it is not as strong as when I hear about other Silver Fenrirs.¡±


    ¡°So you are searching for a Silver Fenrir who is not Leo¡­ Is that right?¡±


    ¡°I think that is what it is. However, in any case, it is not an impulse that I cannot control. And so I intend that if we do not find any hints or clues to finding a Silver Fenrir tomorrow, then I will abandon this endeavor.¡±


    ¡°Will you really give up?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Justing here has put not only you, but Sebastian and Lyra¡­and others at risk.¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°What lies at the end of this fascination with Silver Fenrirs¡­ I think about it often. And so for me, this expedition is not only a search to see if they are really in this forest, but also a hope that if they are not, that I can then move on and think of other things.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­I can¡­hardly say such things to Sebastian and the others.¡±


    ¡°But why is that? Surely they would understand if you exined it to them?¡±


    ¡°¡­As I said earlier¡­it was the servants who started and spread the rumors about me being the first Liebert. Now, if Sebastian were to know that such a rumor has be a burden to me, he may feel responsible.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­that is true.¡±


    While it wasn¡¯t the sole reason, the rumor had perhaps been an impetus that made Ms. ire curious of Silver Fenrirs.


    What would Sebastian do if he knew¡­ I think he would feel responsible¡­ I was not sure what his exact age was, but he did look like someone who had been around for a long time.


    And seeing as how concerned he was for Ms. ire, and how she trusted him, he was likely a butler at the Liebert house since she was born.


    In other words, he was among the servants who began the rumor.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, Mr. Takumi. To get all wrapped up in someone else¡¯s sentiments¡­ I must look rather foolish from the outside, making so much over so little¡­¡±


    ¡°No, not at all. Besides, I¡¯m d that I was able to find out what was bothering you.¡±


    ¡°You are very kind, Mr. Takumi¡­ Ah¡­¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    ¡°Well¡­It¡¯s¡­ Everything I told you now. Could you keep it a secret from Sebastian and the others?¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. Very well. I swear that what we heard here shall not leave our lips. Isn¡¯t that right, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Mr. Takumi and Leo.¡±


    There was no tension left in the air now, and for a time, I continued to sit there with Ms. ire and Leo peacefully.


    Ms. ire even spoke a little more about her reasons for being interested in Silver Fenrirs and her ancestor.


    Well, there were other questions I had as well, but I thought that I would ask her another time¡­


    I felt quite satisfied already, seeing Ms. ire¡¯s blushing and bashful expressions.


    After some time had passed, when it was nearly time to trade ces, I heard a voiceing from the direction of the mens tent.


    ¡°Ah, Mr. Takumi. Lady ire. Thank you for taking the first watch. You seem to have been enjoying yourself?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Phillip.¡±


    It was Phillip the guard who would take the next watch.


    For some reason, Phillip looked like he was trying to hold back a smile as he walked towards us.


    And had he always been this talkative?


    He had seemed so much more formal and orderly during the day¡­


    ¡°I see that you¡¯re back to your old self now that Sebastian isn¡¯t around, Phillip.¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­ How rude of me. Well, seeing as that old watcher of watchers isn¡¯t here, I thought I might as well take it easy.¡±


    ¡°¡­So, this is how Mr. Phillip is usually like.¡±


    He certainly had a casual way of talking.


    Of course, I did find it a lot more approachable than the formal way of talking¡­ That was good, right?

 Chapter 64

    Chapter 64


    Sebastian was Awake


    ¡°Hahaha. Yes, this is how I usually talk, Mr. Takumi. However, Mr. Sebastian always rebukes me, saying I should be more careful when serving a duke.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ And so you¡¯re letting it go now that Sebastian isn¡¯t here¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, yes. Something like that.¡±


    Phillip said with a light chuckle as he sat down by the fire.


    ¡°Now, Mr. Takumi. It¡¯s time for us to trade ces.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I am starting to feel sleepy.¡±


    ¡°Shouldn¡¯t you also get some rest, Lady ire? Mr. Sebastian will be angry with you again if you aren¡¯t fully recovered tomorrow.¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well.¡±


    And so Ms. ire and I stood up in order to prepare for tomorrow by getting some sleep, just like Phillip suggested.


    Even Leo, who had been lying downfortably as Ms. ire petted her, also stood up. I supposed she wanted to sleep with me.


    As we rose to our feet, Phillip smiled with amusement and said,


    ¡°Lady ire. You really shouldn¡¯t think too much of the past. Sebastian and I work at the mansion because you are there.¡±


    ¡°¡­Phillip¡­ You were listening to what I said?¡±


    ¡°¡­What could you be talking about?¡±


    Phillip looked away in order to escape Ms. ire¡¯s ring eyes. It was such an obvious attempt at feigning ignorance that I thought he was going to start whistling to himself.


    ¡­Apparently, Phillip had been listening to our conversation.


    Uh. I hadn¡¯t said anything strange, had I?


    The thought of him hearing everything that I said to Ms. ire was also a little embarrassing.


    It was too dark to see clearly, but I hoped that my face wasn¡¯t turning red¡­


    ¡°¡­Ha¡­ Let¡¯s go then, Ms. ire.¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed¡­ I would like to interrogate Phillip a little further¡­but from the looks of it, he will not be answering my questions.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Well, then. I leave the watch to you, Phillip.¡±


    ¡°Aye! I¡¯ll protect you, so sleep well!¡±


    And with that, Ms. ire and I returned to the tents.


    Ah, that¡¯s right.


    ¡°Ms. ire.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes?¡±


    Just as Ms. ire was about to enter the tent, I remembered something and shouted out to her.


    She turned around and I walked up to her and took out some herbs from my bag.


    ¡°I thought you might want to eat some of this before sleeping.¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    It was too dark to see it clearly, but it was ck dried flower.


    I handed it to Ms. ire while exining its effect.


    ¡°It¡¯s a herb that helps you sleep well. Eating it before going to bed will cause all of the day¡¯s fatigue to disappear.¡±


    ¡°Is that so? ¡­Was this also made with Weed Cultivation?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I made it while conducting different experiments.¡±


    ¡°¡­Your research¡­ I hope that it won¡¯t be long before you will tell me all about what you are doing?¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course. It¡¯s nothing that I need to hide. And so I will tell you when we have time.¡±


    ¡°Very well. Good night, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Good night.¡±


    And then I went to the mens tent.


    But when I nced over my shoulder, I saw that Ms. ire had not moved, and was eating the herb I had given her.


    When she was done, she stepped into her tent.


    ¡­I do hope that she feels well tomorrow.


    The herb that I had given her. I had made it while thinking of those supplements they used to sell while I was working. They always had these taglines about how effective they would be during those times when you were still tired after sleeping.


    I had tried eating it before bed yesterday, and woke up feeling very refreshed.


    Though, only trying it once myself was not a guarantee that it would work for everyone, but I felt that it would be fine.


    And so I ate some of the herb as well as I entered the tent.


    Leo was too big to fit inside, and so I wouldy out a nket on the ground in front for her to sleep on.


    Her coat was so long and thick, that I was sure that the cold would not bother her.


    I even asked her about it, and Leo nodded that she was all right.


    And so I petted her lightly as she rolled up into a ball, and then I got inside of the hemp sleeping bag that was in the tent¡­


    Once inside, I closed my eyes. That¡¯s when Sebastian suddenly called to me.


    ¡°Thank you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°¡­Sebastian. You were awake?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Had Sebastian also been listening in on my conversation with Ms. ire?


    Well, the distance between the tents and the bonfire was not that far, so perhaps they could hear us.


    ¡°¡­Did you hear us then?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I did not think that Lady ire would eventually feel troubled over the rumor that we servants spread.¡±


    So, Ms. ire was right. He did feel a degree of responsibility over it.


    ¡°Sebastian. That¡¯s¡­¡±


    ¡°I know. Lady ire does not wish me to feel any responsibility over it. And so we will speak of it no more. But I would still like to thank you for listening to her. I think that being able to confide in someone would have lifted some of the burden from her shoulders.¡±


    ¡°I¡­do hope so.¡±


    I would be happy if just by listening to her, Ms. ire would feel even a little bit easier.


    ¡°Well, then. Good night, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Please rest well until it is your turn to take the watch.¡±


    ¡°I will. I am no longer young, so I will have a difficult time tomorrow if I don¡¯t sleep.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. But you are still in the prime of life.¡±


    ¡°I do hope so. Hohoho.¡±


    After weughed over this, we quietly went to sleep.


    There were times when you did see Sebastian¡¯s age while looking at him. But he was so energetic¡­ Even today, he had walked through the forest and searched for a camping spot and even helped pitch the tents.


    And yet he never showed how tired he was. Clearly he was young enough.


    It was with such thoughts that consciousness faded away from me.


    ¡­Thanks to the herbs, I was able to fall into a deep, dreamless sleep.


    Perhaps these herbs are more effective than those supplements with the suspicious marketing?


    I think I will call them good sleep herbs.


    The next morning, when I awoke from my sleep, I feltpletely refreshed and without feeling anything from the previous day. And so I became sure that the herbs were effective.

 Chapter 65

    Chapter 65


    We Started To Search Through The Forest


    ¡°Good morning, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Ms. ire, and everyone.¡±


    In the morning, I got out of the tent and washed up at the river. Then I returned to the fire to see that Ms. ire was sitting there.


    Johanna sat next to her, and Ms. Lyra was already using the pot and preparing breakfast.


    As for Phillip, Sebastian and Nichs, they were discussing how we would go about exploring the forest.


    ¡­So I was thest person to get up¡­


    And so I greeted Ms. ire and then the others.


    Leo had also woken up before me, and was waiting behind Ms. Lyra.


    Clearly, she was quite hungry.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Thank you for the herbsst night. I was able to sleep very well and feel none of the fatigue from yesterday.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m d that it was so effective. I tried it myself, and it does seem that I was sessful in making them.¡±


    ¡°Lady ire. What are these herbs you speak of?¡±


    Johanna, who sat next to her, seemed very curious.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi gave them to mest night before I went to sleep. He said that they would help to rid me of any tiredness¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s supposed to help you sleep. And I suppose a good and deep sleep is what helps get rid of the tiredness of the day.¡±


    ¡°You have such a herb¡­¡±


    After that, since Sebastian and the others also showed an interest, I decided to share it amongst them.


    Of course, I did not have much with me, but there was enough for everyone to use for a night.


    It hadn¡¯t been decided yet how long we would stay here, but I told them to use it whenever they wanted.


    After that, Ms. Lyra was finished cooking.


    And so I handed Ms. Lyra her share of the herbs while epting my breakfast.


    It was the same orc meat we had yesterday.


    Because we needed to eat it before it went bad.


    Once we were finished, we would explore the forest.


    While being with Leo meant we wouldn¡¯t have to worry about being attacked by monsters, it also wasn¡¯t efficient for us to explore as onerge group.


    And so I, Leo, Ms. ire and Sebastian would explore the forest.


    Phillip and Nichs would explore the area surrounding the camp, drive away any nearby monsters and look for traces of fenrirs.


    Ms. Lyra would stay in the camp and watch the fire, and Johanna would keep her safe.


    ¡°Well, then. Let¡¯s go, Lady ire, Mr. Takumi and Leo.¡±


    ¡°Very well.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Sebastian took the lead, Leo and I followed, and Ms. ire was in the back.


    As long as Leo and I cut down the bushes and trees, it would be easier for her to walk.


    ¡­Though, this was mainly thanks to Leo¡¯s body being so big.


    We moved farther away from the river and continued to walk silently through the forest for some time.


    After about an hour had passed, the area grew dense with trees to the point where the sunlight barely got through, and it became quite dark.


    ¡°¡­It¡¯s getting dark.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ At this rate, it will be too dark to see anything that might approach us. Lady ire, are you all right?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m still fine. I¡¯m not at all tired like I was yesterday.¡±


    Unlike yesterday, Ms. ire was having no trouble keeping up with us.


    There wasn¡¯t much to carry this time, and it was easier to walk, thanks to Leo using her body to press down or break away any branches and nts that were in our path.


    ¡°¡­Still, it will be quite dangerous when we can barely see our feet. I suppose I have no choice then. Though, I had wanted to save my magic energy for emergencies.¡±


    ¡°¡­Magic?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I will use some light magic.¡±


    So saying, Sebastian raised the short sword that he was using to cut down the branches.


    ¡°Light Elemental Shine.¡±


    Sebastian chanted, and the raised de began to glow.


    ¡°Now it will be easier to see our surroundings.¡±


    The sword was now emitting a light that was so bright that it hurt to look at it directly.


    And so the dark forest brightened up, even though we could barely see our feet a moment ago.


    It wasn¡¯t quite as bright as being directly under the sun, but we could now see quite deep into the forest.


    ¡°What convenient magic.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s simple magic. All I did was create some light. You will be able to do it as well with some practice, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Magic¡­ Will you teach it to me when we return to the mansion?¡±


    ¡°If you wish.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ I could also teach you a little¡­¡±


    ¡°Hohoho. However, Lady ire. Surely you must recall that it was I who taught you the basics of magic? And so you must agree that I am more suited for the job?¡±


    ¡°¡­But I have studied since then! I can teach him as well!¡±


    ¡°Hohoho. In that case, I shall leave it to you, Lady ire. You must be very pleased, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    I muttered quietly.


    What was this¡­? It seemed like Sebastian had a habit of trying to match me up with other people.


    It seemed rather strange, since he was Ms. ire¡¯s butler?


    And he had done something simr with Ms. Lyra¡­ What was his goal here?


    We continued to talk like this as we walked deeper into the forest. However, we did not find anything that day.


    We checked our watches to keep track of time so that we would be able to return to the camp before the sun came down.


    On our way back, I talked with Sebastian and Ms. ire about it, and we decided to explore in a different direction tomorrow.


    And in spite of the fact that we did nothing but just walk, Leo seemed to have enjoyed it beginning to end.


    Perhaps it was because she said that there was something about the forest that felt nostalgic.


    And then two days passed. We continued our search, but did not find so much as a trace of the fenrirs being there.


    We did notck for food, as Leo would take down any orcs we happened to encounter, but we were running out of vegetables.


    And so after dinner, we talked about the search.


    ¡°This will now be the third day of the search and the fourth day since we entered the forest¡­ And yet we have nothing to show for it.¡±


    ¡°Yes. We have also been searching this area, and have found nothing aside from orcs¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°Maybe there really aren¡¯t any fenrirs in this forest?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    The question hade from Johanna.


    It was no surprise, seeing as we had found nothing in spite of searching for so long.


    Even Leo looked stumped.


    Yesterday, we had even extended the time we spent searching, and went far deeper into the forest. And yet there was nothing.


    We could get by on the orc meat.


    And there was a river for water. However, people were starting to get tired.


    By now, they had all eaten the herbs that I had given them.


    That would happen if you had to sleep in a tent for so many nights.


    ¡°Tomorrow, if we cannot find anything after searching, then I will give up and we will return to the mansion.¡±


    As we surrounded the fire and talked, Ms. ire had been looking down the whole time as if deep in thought.


    Perhaps Johanna¡¯s question had been the trigger. But Ms. ire had made the decision to return.

 Chapter 66

    Chapter 66


    The Last Day of the Forest Search


    ¡°Are you sure, Lady ire?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I doubt staying any longer in this forest will be much good. We should withdraw before everyone grows too tired to walk.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that is true, but¡­¡±


    Sebastian had a harsh expression as he listened to Ms. ire¡¯s decision.


    No, it wasn¡¯t just Sebastian. Phillip and the guards and Ms. Lyra also looked deeply troubled.


    But there was a reason that Sebastian and Ms. Lyra, who had initially been againsting here, had such expressions.


    It was because they had all heard what Ms. ire and I had talked about while I was on guard duty.


    While Ms. ire didn¡¯t know it, I think she might have sensed something.


    As for me, I just kept my mouth shut.


    It seemed that the way it had spread was that Phillip had told the other guards, and then Johanna had told Ms. Lyra.


    When resting in the tent, and as people changed shifts, they would ask me if it was true that Ms. ire was troubled over it, and I didn¡¯t know how to respond.


    In the end, Sebastian had calmed them all down by dering that they would get to the root of her troubles by exploring the forest.


    All of them seriously wanted to do something to help her.


    Ms. ire really was loved by the servants.


    ¡°I can¡¯t just continue to involve all of you in my whims. And so if we don¡¯t find anything tomorrow, we will return to the mansion.¡±


    ¡°¡­I understand.¡±


    With Sebastian leading the others, they all nodded with looks of disappointment.


    Of course, I felt the same.


    Especially since I had heard the words directly from Ms. ire.


    If only we could find something that was connected to the fenrirs or Silver Fenrirs.


    But no matter how much I wished for this, we could not find anything.


    Regardless, the matter had been settled, and so we went to bed, knowing that tomorrow was thest day.


    While the order in which we took the watch changed every day, we were paired up the same as during the first day.


    Once, orcs had attacked us in the middle of the night.


    Well, it was when Johanna and Ms. Lyra were on guard duty. And Leo, who was supposed to have been asleep, got up quickly and turned them into meat.


    And so in preparation for tomorrow, I ate some good sleep herbs and went to bed.


    It was thest one that I had saved after sharing the rest with the others.


    Now, I hoped that we would find something tomorrow!


    The next day, after we finished eating breakfast, we left Ms. Lyra and Johanna at the camp and the rest of us stepped foot into the forest.


    We also set the time for returning to the campter than usual, so that we could search for as long as possible.


    In fact, since it would be a waste of time to go back in order to eat lunch, Ms. Lyra had given us some orc meat that had been cooked in herbs that we could carry with us.


    And so we would eat that for lunch, and have a proper dinner when we finished our search and returned in the evening.


    Unlike previous days, we would enter the forest from an area that was reached after crossing the river.


    As the river only went up to your thighs, it wasn¡¯t too hard to cross as long as you were careful so that your feet didn¡¯t slip.


    Of course, you still got wet. And that was why we had been avoiding it.


    Now that Ms. ire had decided to return, this was no time to hesitate just because our feet might get wet.


    And so even Ms. ire did not care about getting wet as she crossed and joined us in searching.


    Well, it wasn¡¯t as if we had searched everywhere on the other side before crossing the river. However, if this was thest day, we might as well try and step out intopletely new territory. That had been Phillip¡¯s opinion.


    And so a few hours after crossing the river, we walked through the dense forest.


    Sebastian and Phillip used magic to light our path as we advanced.


    ¡°¡­We really can¡¯t find anything¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­We should take a rest once. I think that everyone is tired after searching for so many days in a row.¡±


    As Phillip and I confirmed that neither had found anything, Sebastian nced over to Ms. ire and suggested that we rest.


    As I had eaten the herb the night before, I wasn¡¯t carrying any of the fatigue from yesterday. However, it was a little tiring to walk nonstop.


    Besides, I could see the tiredness starting to appear on not just Ms. ire, but the faces of the others as well.


    And so perhaps we should rest and eat lunch.


    Though, there were no clearings nearby. So we just sat randomly on the ground and ate the food that Ms. Lyra had prepared for us.


    ¡°Are you all right, Ms. ire?¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes, I think so. I am indeed tired, but I¡¯ve gotten used to walking in the forest during these past few days.¡±


    ¡°So you can still walk then?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I¡¯m fine. This is thest search. I really must find traces of the fenrirs, no matter what.¡±


    That being said, we had not found anything of the sort yet.


    And while she said she was used to it, we had been walking for days now. She could be more tired than she realized.


    Hell, even Sebastian was massaging his feet as he ate, as if he was in pain.


    And he always put an effort into hiding that he was tired. I assumed that Ms. ire had been doing the same¡­


    ¡°What should we do, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°If we don¡¯t find something soon, we¡¯ll have to return to the mansion without obtaining anything. That would mean Ms. ire had forced everyone toe here for nothing¡­ I¡¯d really like to prevent that from happening.¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­wuff? Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°Hmm? What is it, Leo?¡±


    I had been muttering to Leo, who was sitting next to me and eating sausages. And then after a moment of thoughtful silence, she suddenly started barking at me.


    What is it¡­? Monsters?


    ¡°Are there monsters about?¡±


    ¡°Monsters?¡±


    As I asked Leo, Sebastian immediately reacted.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    But Leo shook her head to say that it was not the case.


    Sebastian and the others sighed with relief, and then they went back to eating their lunch.


    ¡°Then what is it, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­ Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    Leo pushed her face towards my hand and licked it once. And then she pointed her nose to the ground.


    ¡­Huh¡­?


    ¡°Wuff-wuff-wou-wou.¡±


    What¡­? Weed Cultivation?


    ¡­!


    ¡°I had forgotten!¡±


    Yes, I had Weed Cultivation.


    And unlike magic, it did not use up magic energy.


    I didn¡¯t understand the details of how it worked at all, but I had never felt tired after using Weed Cultivation.


    And there were so many useful things that I could do with it!

 Chapter 67

    Chapter 67


    I made something useful for exploration with Weed Cultivation


    Everyone seemed to be a little surprised by my sudden outburst, but this was no time to be concerned with such things.


    If anything, I wanted to apologize that I had forgotten about such a useful Gift.


    ¡­Why had I forgotten about it¡­ I had even given them herbs that I made with Weed Cultivation¡­


    We were in the middle of the forest.


    Which meant standing on soil.


    So I should be able to grow some nts.


    If I could do that, then the rest was easy.


    ¡°Excuse me, Ms. ire. And everyone else.¡±


    ¡°What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Why did you shout so suddenly?¡±


    They all looked at me oddly.


    And so I bowed my head to them.


    ¡°I had forgotten something very important. And I¡¯m terribly sorry. I had this all along. Weed Cultivation!¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed, you do have that Gift, Mr. Takumi. But what about it?¡±


    ¡°With it, I should be able to do something about everyone¡¯s tiredness, as well as make the search much easier!¡±


    ¡°¡­Really?¡±


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi. But isn¡¯t your Gift something that makes nts? Like Loe¡­ And you did give us something to help us rest¡­¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s it. I had been doing some tests. And the herb I gave to you was the result of those tests. Not only that, but it was a nt whose appearance and effect had beenpletely unknown to me.¡±


    ¡°What do you mean?¡±


    ¡°Hmmm¡­ I don¡¯t think we have time for a detailed exnation, so I¡¯ll avoid that now. In any case, please let me test to see if I can use Weed Cultivation here.¡±


    ¡°¡­Of course.¡±


    I said, and everyone decided to watch me quietly.


    I also patted and thanked Leo for reminding me.


    ¡°Thank you, Leo. You made me remember something important.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Leo wagged her tail happily and barked as if to say that I was wee.


    Really, why had I forgotten¡­ I had even been studying it.


    The reason was clearly my own carelessness, but now was not the time for regrets.


    And so in order to use Weed Cultivation, I ced my hands on the ground.


    ¡­First, I needed to make sure that I could do it.


    I used Weed Cultivation and tried to grow the first nt that came to my mind.


    And then a few secondster, a Loe nt sprouted from between my fingers.


    ¡°All right. Now I know that I can do it.¡±


    ¡°So this is Weed Cultivation¡­ Mr. Takumi¡¯s Gift¡­¡±


    ¡°To think that it can grow from nothing¡­¡±


    As Phillip and Nichs had never seen Weed Cultivation before, they were quite astonished. But they hadn¡¯t seen anything yet.


    For the first time since I came to this world, I was excited at the idea of really making good use of this ability as I focused on using it.


    During these past few days, as we explored the forest, I had been thinking about nts, and what effects would be useful. And so I would make them now.


    ¡­In spite of thinking of such things, I had never thought to actually use Weed Cultivation. I wanted to go back in time and punch myself.


    In any case, I had to focus now.


    I didn¡¯t want to make something that was unsatisfactory.


    And so I brought up images of the nts that I had thought about, and began to make them grow in the spaces between the trees.


    ¡°I finished.¡±


    ¡°So many¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. What kind of nts are these?¡±


    The others then helped me pick the finished nts.


    Not only that, but I then held each nt and changed it so that they would be effective as medicine.


    During previous experiments, I had discovered that Weed Cultivation was able to change nts into a state where they would have maximum effectiveness.


    Though, it was mainly because I had known that I was able to dry the Ramogi with my hands.


    And so I tested it with others, and fresh nts dried in a second.


    ¡°Uh, here. Ms. ire, Sebastian, Phillip and Nichs. Please eat these.¡±


    ¡°¡­Are you quite sure?¡±


    Ms. ire held the dried nt in her hand and looked at it skeptically.


    The others reacted in a simr way.


    Well, I could not me them.


    While they were green leaves, the leaves had purple lines running through them. And some might feel that they looked poisonous.


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. See? *gulp*.¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    In order to show them, I ate the leaf myself.


    It was in no way delicious, but since Leo was looking at me as if she wanted some too, I gave her some.


    This seemed to satisfy the others, and they all shoved the leaves into their mouths.


    And while they scowled at the taste of the leaves, they chewed and swallowed. And after a few seconds had passed, their expressions changed.


    ¡°This is¡­amazing! I have never felt so energized before!¡±


    ¡°Yes, it¡¯s true¡­ Mr. Takumi, what a wonderful nt you have created.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s¡­astonishing¡­¡±


    ¡°I feel like I do right before I start training!¡±


    Ms. ire, Sebastian, Phillip and Nichs were all surprised as they began to move around.


    ¡­It was good that they weren¡¯t tired, but perhaps moving around so much would just make them tired all over again?


    ¡°Wou! Wou!¡±


    Leo was also full of energy now, and she began to run through the forest while adeptly weaving through the trees.


    ¡­Or maybe she had always been like this?


    ¡°I¡¯m d that they were effective. Now, try¡­these ones.¡±


    ¡°There¡¯s more?¡±


    Asked Ms. ire as she epted the herbs.


    ¡°Yes. These should help with exploration. ¡­Ah, before you eat them, Sebastian and Phillip, could you turn off the magic lights?¡±


    ¡°¡­Are you sure? We won¡¯t be able to see our surroundings.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that is fine.¡±


    And so they dismissed the magic lights.


    After feeling the immediate effect of the herbs, they were more willing to believe me now, and so obeyed.


    Good¡­ Because I think that having a bright light around after eating these might be a little painful¡­


    ¡°Mmm¡­gulp.¡±


    Everyone ate the two leaves I handed them at once.


    It didn¡¯t look as poisonous as the first one, but the taste was even worse.


    And though they grimaced, I saw that they all swallowed their leaves.


    Oh, I have to eat mine as well.


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi¡­this¡­it should be too dark to see our surroundings, and yet I can see just fine!¡±


    ¡°The forest is bright? No¡­it just looks bright¡­is that it?¡±


    ¡°To be exact, it¡¯s a herb that allows you to see clearly even when you are in the dark and there is only a little light.¡±


    ¡°Amazing.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­¡±


    Phillip and Nichs looked at each other and nodded in surprise at being able to see so clearly.


    But wasn¡¯t it a little too early to be this surprised? After all, they had only eaten two types.

 Chapter 68

    Chapter 68


    Leo detected something inside of the forest


    ¡°Oh, we will surely make much better progress in the search with this.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. While we do have light magic, it does not illuminate very far.¡±


    ¡°Yes, there are always ces that are too dark to see.¡±


    Sebastian and the others were very impressed that they could now see the forest clearly without any light.


    However, Ms. ire seemed a little strange.


    ¡­Had she noticed it then?


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. I don¡¯t know if something hase over me, but¡­I feel as if I can now sense the presence and hear the voices of the forest creatures¡­¡±


    ¡°Ms. ire, it¡¯s not your imagination. That is the effect of the second herb.¡±


    ¡°This¡­¡±


    After they had eaten the herbs that revived their energy, I had given them two different herbs together.


    One was the herb that allowed them to see in the dark with only a little light, which Sebastian and the others were so impressed with.


    And the second was a herb that enhanced your ability to detect presences and sounds that were around you.


    With this, we should be able to detect any fenrirs if they were close by.


    ¡°Here¡­have some too, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­munch¡­wou¡­¡±


    ¡°It tastes bad¡­? Sorry about that.¡±


    I called over Leo, who had been running around wildly, and fed her some of the herbs.


    However, the taste had not been to Leo¡¯s liking.


    She lowered her head with a disgusted expression, but ate the rest anyway.


    Good girl, Leo.


    As Leo ate, I looked to see how the others were doing.


    ¡°This¡­I can see my surroundings without light. On top of that, I can even detect creatures and sounds that are far away and blocked by the trees¡­¡±


    ¡°Nichs¡­in that direction¡­it is probably an orc. So this is what it¡¯s like to have your senses sharpened.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. I can even hear their breathing. It is as if I can see them.¡±


    ¡°This really is the perfect herb for exploring a forest. ¡­With these sharpened senses, I think that we might just discover something today!¡±


    They were all feeling the potency of the herbs.


    Sebastian was impressed by the effects, Phillip and Nichs wereparing what they sensed and confirming that they were correct.


    The tired expression Ms. ire had a moment ago waspletely gone, and she looked quite ted and immediately started to search for some clue concerning the finrirs and Silver Fenrirs.


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Oh, Leo had finished eating her herbs.


    The reason I had Ms. ire and the others eat it, was to make it easier to navigate through the forest.


    But Leo¡¯s senses were already incredibly sharp.


    She had even detected the orcs much earlier than Phillip and the guards.


    And I thought that if those senses were sharpened even farther, then she might be able to find something.


    ¡°Leo¡­ Anything different?¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­wou!¡±


    Her expression looked sharper than before as she moved her head to scan the area. However, it seemed that there was nothing here.


    ¡°Well, tell me if you do see something.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Leo nodded in reply.


    ¡°Now, Sebastian and Ms. ire. Apparently, there is nothing here. And since we have rested enough, perhaps it is time to continue the search.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. I feel a lot better now, thanks to you, Mr. Takumi. And so we should be able to explore much farther than usual.¡±


    ¡°The ability of Weed Cultivation is amazing. I was surprised when you made the Loe, but I hadn¡¯t realized that it could also be used in this way.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. It was because I was able to borrow the back garden and do some studying. And this is the result.¡±


    ¡°Weed Cultivation¡­ I¡¯m sure there are even more ways to use it.¡±


    ¡°Indeed.¡±


    Because it had ¡®weed¡¯ in the name, people were bound to think that it was a useless ability that just created unwanted nts. But with a little thought, there was so much that you could do.


    Once we returned to the mansion, I would use the garden again and study it more thoroughly.


    And so we went deeper and deeper into the forest.


    On the way, we encountered some of the usual orcs, but this time Phillip and Nichs defeated them.


    ording to them, their senses had been so sharpened that they were able to predict how the orcs would move. And so dodging their spears and cutting them down with swords had be much easier.


    Next to me, Leo looked like she really wanted to hunt orcs as well, but I had her sit this one out.


    Because the others wanted to test out their newly sharpened senses.


    After that, we continued to walk deeper into the forest.


    However, even with these sharpened senses, and being rejuvenated, even though we were able to travel for long distances, we were still not able to find anything.


    As the sun was starting to set, it was nearly time to return to the camp.


    Because we could not camp in a ce that was so densely packed with trees that theypletely blocked the light above and the surrounding view.


    Besides, Ms. Lyra and Johanna were still at the camp site, and we had already decided to return to the mansion tomorrow.


    With Weed Cultivation, we could probably keep exploring without getting tired, but at this point, it felt like we had already spent too much time here.


    Tilura was also waiting for our return.


    ¡°¡­There really is nothing¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    Ms. ire muttered in a disheartened voice.


    ¡°The sun will be setting soon¡­it cannot be helped. We must¡­¡±


    Return.


    Everyone knew what Sebastian was going to say.


    However, at that same moment, Leo interrupted Sebastian and barked!


    ¡°Gau! Gau-gau!¡±


    She turned to the left from the direction we were headed in and barked.


    And the way she barked was clearly different from when she detected that there were orcs.


    ¡°¡­What is it, Leo!? Did you find something?¡±


    ¡°Wou-wou¡­wuff¡­gau!¡±


    Leo turned around and answered me.


    This¡­ Monsters were fighting each other?


    ¡°Sebastian. Up ahead¡­where Leo is looking¡­she says that there are monsters fighting.¡±


    ¡°Monsters¡­ Are they orcs? But I don¡¯t think that orcs would fight each other¡­¡±


    ¡°Wou! Wou! ¡­Gau!¡±


    Uhhh?


    Not orcs?


    Then what kind of monster is up ahead?


    ¡°Wuff-wuff¡­gau gau!¡±


    Leo raised her front paw as if performing a military salute. And then she shook her head and pointed her paw at Ms. ire.


    Umm¡­ Leo is a Silver Fenrir.


    But then she shook her head to say it wasn¡¯t that.


    And then she pointed, meaning it was rted to Ms. ire¡­!


    Fenrirs!?


    Not Silver Fenrirs, but were simr to Leo, and rted to Ms. ire. That must be it.


    ¡°Ms. ire!¡±


    ¡°Yes?!¡±


    ¡°She says that she¡¯s found¡­fenrirs.¡±

 Chapter 69

    Chapter 69


    The Monsters Were Fighting


    ¡°¡­Huh¡­?


    ¡°What!?¡±


    ¡°Is this true, Mr. Takumi!?¡±


    ¡°However, we cannot sense anything¡­¡±


    ¡°Leo¡¯s senses were very sharp to begin with. And then she ate the herbs.¡±


    ¡°So that means¡­¡±


    ¡°Her senses have sharpened even more. And so I think that she is able to detect far away things that even you cannot.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    Still¡­there really were finrirs here then¡­


    As we had been on the verge of giving up, the others were very surprised.


    Ms. ire and Sebastian had reacted the most to this.


    And I could hardly me them.


    ¡°Leo. Are the fenrirs attacking a monster?¡±


    I had heard that they hunted in packs.


    In that case, they likely traveled as a pack and attacked other monsters.


    And though we might be safe as long as Leo was with us, it seemed unwise to carelessly go too close to them.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff¡­ Gau-wuff-wuff!¡±


    But Leo shook her head to my question.


    It was the fenrirs who were being attacked by something?


    But what monster could be in this forest that was stronger than fenrirs¡­


    Orcs were no match for them. And Leo agreed.


    ¡°Ms. ire, Sebastian. It seems like the fenrirs are being attacked. Are there monsters who are stronger than fenrirs in this forest?¡±


    ¡°A monster that attacks fenrirs¡­¡±


    ¡°I do believe that there are monsters that would attack fenrirs¡­at least, if there are many of them, and they are attacking a single fenrir¡­ Perhaps a troll¡­¡±


    ¡°A troll¡­ What kind of monster is that?¡±


    ¡°They are giants who are three meters tall. And they have such monstrous strength, that they can knock down trees with a single hand. And while it is said that they are weaker than fenrirs, if there a multiple trolls and only a single fenrir, then it may be a fair fight.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Leo. What kind of monsters are attacking the fenrirs?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­gau-gau-gau.¡±


    Fiverge monsters that walk on two legs¡­ Yes, Sebastian was probably right, and they were trolls.


    ¡°I believe you are right, and they are trolls. Leo says that there are five of them.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°Let¡¯s go and help the fenrirs then!¡±


    Ms. ire had been silent up until now, but she suddenly shouted.


    ¡°But Lady ire, there are five trolls. And we are not enough to go up against such an enemy!¡±


    ¡°But¡­!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Just as Ms. ire was about to answer to Sebastian¡¯s protest, Leo interrupted them.


    ¡°Good Leo?¡±


    ¡°What is the matter?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff¡­ Gau-gau!¡±


    Leo raised her paw as she had before.


    And her ws were fully extended.


    ¡°Leo seems like she wants to fight.¡±


    ¡°Good Leo¡­ However, five trolls are surely¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    That again¡­ Does a strong enemy even exist for Leo?


    ¡°Uhh, Leo says that five trolls are just small fry. And it¡¯s a simple job.¡±


    ¡°Even trolls¡­¡±


    ¡°Good Leo. Can you do it?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    As Ms. ire made the request, Leo nodded firmly as if to say that we should leave it to her.


    ¡°Very well¡­ Can you lead us to them, Good Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Leo nodded once again and then took her position right in front of Sebastian, and then she started to lead us.


    After we walked for some time, the presences that only Leo had sensed, were now sensed by the rest of us.


    ¡°So these are the presences that Leo was talking about.¡±


    ¡°It looks like it¡­¡±


    ¡°This¡­is it a one-sided fight?¡±


    One of them, likely the fenrir, was not moving much.


    And it was surrounded by five monsters that were probably trolls. They seemed to be moving in and out around the fenrir over and over again.


    ¡°Apparently, the trolls are surrounding the fenrir and attacking it little by little.¡±


    ¡°¡­How horrible¡­¡±


    ¡°We must save it!¡±


    ¡°Yes, let¡¯s hurry!¡±


    Everyone felt sorry for the fenrir that was being attacked.


    Was it because it was a lone creature that was surrounded by a group?


    Or was it because they had be close to Leo, who was a Silver Fenrir?


    ¡°Leo. You go on ahead!¡±


    ¡°Gau!¡±


    And so I had Leo run ahead of us.


    She would definitely reach them faster if she went alone.


    Leo barked once and then dashed off like the wind.


    While I could no longer see her, my sharpened senses could tell where she was.


    Arge figure was moving towards the fenrir and trolls at an astonishing speed.


    And before I knew it, she had reached them.


    A secondter, one of the trolls disappeared.


    Leo must have killed it as soon as she arrived.


    ¡°We must hurry as well!¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    Said Ms. ire, and everyone began to run.


    And while the trees prevented us from running at top speed, it was still better than walking.


    And Ms. ire did not even care about the tree branches and nts that hit her as she ran.


    After a few more minutes, we arrived at the scene where the fenrir was being attacked.


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    You¡¯rete. Leo seemed to say as she turned to us and barked. Then she sat down.


    When I scanned the area, I saw that it was a decent sized clearing.


    The sun could be seen above us, and it was already starting to descend.


    And on the ground surrounding Leo, were four bodies that must have been the trolls.


    They were all shed and burned.


    Not only that, but there was even one that had been frozen with its arms raised.


    Leo had done all of this.


    As Sebastian had said, the trolls wererge and looked to be three meters tall. And their thick arms held clubs.


    I didn¡¯t want to think about what damage they could inflict with those weapons.


    ¡­Of course, it hadn¡¯t seemed to matter much for Leo.


    Considering Leo¡¯s speed, even if these clubs were the size of humans, the trolls wouldn¡¯t have been able tond any blows.


    Once we were sure that all of the trolls were dead, we caught our breath after running and then approached the sitting Leo.


    However, Leo did not move from where she was.


    Usually, Leo woulde over when we moved towards her¡­ I wonder what was the matter?


    ¡°Leo¡­ What is it?¡±


    ¡°¡­Good Leo. Where is the fenrir?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±

 Chapter 70

    Chapter 70


    The monster we saved was on the verge of death


    While I was wondering what was wrong with Leo, Ms. ire was more concerned about the fenrir that was supposed to have been attacked.


    Well, I suppose I was the only one who would think it was strange that Leo was just sitting there without moving.


    But after Ms. ire and I called to her, Leo barked weakly and then rubbed her nose against the ground, which had been drenched in red.


    ¡­No¡­that wasn¡¯t the ground¡­there was something there.


    ¡°Leo¡­is that the fenrir¡­?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°The fenrir¡­¡±


    ¡°So there really are fenrirs in this forest.¡±


    What Leo was rubbing her nose against was a living creature that was a mixture of brown and red.


    And it looked simr to Leo. Like it was a dog or a wolf.


    However, it was norger than a medium-sized dog, which seemed very smallpared to the silvery Leo who sat behind it.


    But now that I thought about it, fenrirs were supposed to be considerably smaller than Silver Fenrirs.


    Leo would asionally nce at us and then continue to rub her nose against the fenrir.


    ¡°What is it¡­Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­wuff¡­¡±


    Leo barked despondently.


    ¡°May I take a closer look?¡±


    Sebastian squinted his eyes and moved closer to Leo.


    At the same time, I moved to stand next to Leo.


    And then Ms. ire followed to stand next to me.


    ¡°¡­These are¡­terrible wounds¡­¡±


    ¡°I had thought that the fur was brown, but¡­¡±


    ¡°How horrible¡­¡±


    Sebastian¡¯s hand touched the fenrir as he inspected the wounds.


    Upon seeing this, Leo stopped rubbing her nose over it.


    And as Ms. ire and I watched, we realized that we had misunderstood.


    I had assumed that the fenrir¡¯s fur was a brown color, but it was not.


    So much blood had flowed from the wounds and then it had been covered in dirt as the trolls attacked it.


    There were patches that weren¡¯t caked in soil, and you could see that the fur was still white. This was proof that it usually had a clean, white coat.


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    Leo sounded very worried about the fenrir as she looked at Sebastian.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ This¡­¡±


    ¡°How bad is it, Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°¡­I think that we arrived toote¡­ While it is still alive now¡­that will notst for long¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­No¡­ And after it took us so long to finally find one¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    Apparently, the wounds were very bad.


    The trolls must have beaten it severely.


    On closer inspection, one of its hind legs was broken and bent in a strange direction.


    Perhaps the trolls had hit it with their giant clubs.


    The broken leg would have prevented it from running away, and then it must have been surrounded¡­


    ¡°Wou¡­wou-wou¡­¡±


    ¡°Leo¡­¡±


    Leo had a pleading expression.


    And then she barked in the same way that she did when asking me to do something.


    Apparently, Leo wanted to help this fenrir.


    ¡°¡­Isn¡¯t there anything we can do?¡±


    ¡°¡­While I do have a little knowledge, I am no doctor. And¡­I doubt that even a trained doctor would be able to do anything now¡­¡±


    While Ms. ire asked Sebastian if there wasn¡¯t any hope, he replied that there was none.


    The blood was still continuing to flow from the fenrir¡¯s wounds as it pooled on the ground.


    It must not have any energy left, as though it was still breathing, it could not move its body or raise its voice.


    ¡­Seeing it in such a state¡­even though it was a monster that attacked humans, just like orcs and trolls¡­and the fact that it resembled a dog¡­or a wolf, and looked so much like Leo, made me want to do something.


    But¡­I wasn¡¯t a doctor or a veterinarian.


    So there was nothing that I could do.


    And so I just bit my lip and watched the fenrir that was sure to die.


    ¡°¡­.Good Leo¡­Mr. Takumi¡­is there really nothing that we can do¡­?¡±


    ¡°¡­Lady ire. The wounds are too deep. It is toote¡­¡±


    Still wanting to help it, Ms. ire now turned to me and Leo. But at Sebastian¡¯s words, she closed her eyes tightly with regret.


    ¡°¡­Wuff¡­kuuun.¡±


    Leo also entreated¡­


    And I bit my lip even harder.


    ¡°There is nothing that we can do¡­¡±


    ¡°While it is a monster, and this is the way of nature¡­I do feel so powerless¡­¡±


    Even Phillip and Nichs were muttering sadly.


    They were all affected by this situation of wanting to help the fenrir, but being unable to do so.


    ¡­Suddenly, I rxed my jaw.


    There was a taste that remained in my mouth.


    ¡­It was the taste of the herb I had eaten earlier.


    It was likely still there because I hadn¡¯t had any water since then.


    And then I was reminded of something.


    ¡°¡­Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°¡­What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°The Loe I made before. You said that it¡¯s able to heal wounds in an instant, yes?¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes¡­ Loe does have that ability¡­but not when the wounds are this serious¡­¡±


    ¡°Bu¡­if it¡¯s not Loe¡­¡±


    I would use Loe as a reference and make a different herb!


    A herb that can even heal fatal wounds.


    There was no time to think about taste.


    Besides, with Loe, you extracted the gel from the leaves and covered the wounds with them.


    In that case, I should make something simr. It just had to be something that was highly effective.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Sir?¡±


    I could hear Ms. ire and Sebastian calling to me, but I ignored them and focused as I put my palms on the ground.


    ¡°¡­¡±


    And I waited silently for some time.


    They then understood that I was using Weed Cultivation, and so they watched me without saying anything.


    A few secondster, a small light, which had never shone before, shed between my hands and the ground, and then a white leaf began to sprout from the ground. It was simr in shape to Loe.


    After about twenty seconds, it was fully grown. And so I picked it and cut it open with the short sword that Sebasstian handed to me.


    And then I pared it as if it was an apple.


    Once that was done, I approached the fallen fenrir that was in front of Leo.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­I¡¯m sure that it will be fine.¡±


    As the others gulped, Ms. ire and Leo spoke to me, but I just reassured them and then touched the fenrirs wounds with the herb.

 Chapter 71

    Chapter 71


    The herbs were surprisingly effective


    ¡°¡­!¡±


    The moment that the herb touched the fenrir, it unleashed a faint light, and the wounds began to close as if time was being rewound.


    And once the light faded away, so did the herb that was in my hand. Even the fenrir¡¯s broken leg was now pointing in the right direction.


    ¡°¡­Oh, Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff! Wou!¡±


    Ms. ire¡¯s eyes welled up with tears as she covered her mouth with her hand. Leo let out a bark of joy.


    ¡°To think that there is a herb that can heal fatal wounds¡­¡±


    Sebastian had an expression of astonishment as he watched the healed fenrir.


    Well, I had not known if it would work well either. And so I was also surprised at how effective it was.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, this is amazing!¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    Ms. ire and Leo were filled with uncontainable excitement.


    ¡°¡­Hahaha. It just happened to go well. I was not at all sure that I would be able to make something like this.¡±


    ¡°Weed Cultivation¡­ What a wonderful ability!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Ms. ire and Leo were looking at me with beaming expressions.


    It was bing a little embarrassing¡­


    ¡°Is it just me, or did we witness something incredible?¡±


    ¡°Yes, we did, Phillip. A lethal wound was healed in an instant¡­ That¡¯s not an everyday urrence, I think.¡±


    Phillip and Nichs had been watching at a short distance away, but they could also not hide their reaction.


    ¡°While the wounds are healed¡­I don¡¯t think its energy has recovered.¡±


    Sebastian was the first to calm down, and he took out a small nket from his bag and wrapped it around the fenrir.


    Yes. This was no time to be talking about the herb¡¯s effect. The fenrir was more important.


    ¡°We¡¯ll have to keep it warm.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Sebastian¡­ Can I touch it¡­?¡±


    ¡°Lady ire. This fenrir was badly wounded and on the brink of death. Surely it should be left alone for now.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    Ms. ire sounded a little disappointed.


    Did she want to touch it so badly¡­?


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Oh, Leo. Thank you.¡±


    Leo put her face near Ms. ire and allowed herself to be petted instead.


    Ms. ire smiled with satisfaction.


    ¡°However, this fenrir¡­judging from its size, it must be a pup.¡±


    ¡°Is that so?¡±


    As it looked like a medium-sized dog, I had thought that it would be older.


    It was smallpared to Leo, but that was just because Leo was too big.


    And since I had heard that fenrirs were smaller, I figured that maybe this was close to their average size.


    ¡°So a fenrir pup was separated from its pack and then got attacked by trolls.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Speaking of which, what happened to the trolls that Leo defeated?¡±


    ¡°Lady ire, we took care of them while you were tending to the fenrir.¡±


    ¡°While we couldn¡¯t move the one that was frozen, we dug a whole and buried the ones that were cut up by Leo.¡±


    So that¡¯s what they had been doing.


    Well, no one would want to see the mutted corpses of monsters lying around the forest.


    Though, the one that was now an ice statue was still standing there¡­


    I¡­wonder how long it will take to melt¡­


    ¡°It is sleeping very peacefully.¡±


    Said Ms. ire as she watched the healed fenrir.


    ¡°Indeed.¡±


    As Leoy on the ground as if to envelope the fenrir with her fur, she brought her face close to it.


    A short while ago, it had been breathing weakly as if in pain, but now that the bleeding had stopped and the wounds closed, its breathing had be calm.


    ¡°It will take a while for its expended energy to return.¡±


    ¡°We should let it rest then.¡±


    While I had used a herb that healed wounds, it didn¡¯t have the effect of recovering energy.


    ¡­But perhaps this was enough. I didn¡¯t want to have to force-feed it grass while it was trying to go to sleep.


    ¡°Wou¡­Wou-wou.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? What is it, Leo?¡±


    Now that we were relieved that the fenrir was healed, we were just about to leave.


    We had to return to camp soon, as it was getting quitete.


    Ms. ire and Sebastian were looking up at the sky to see the position of the sun.


    However Leo barked at us to stop.


    ¡°Wou-wou¡­wuff.¡±


    After barking in our direction, she looked down at the fenrir she was enveloping, and moved her head as if to pick up the fenrir with her jaw.


    ¡°¡­You want to take it with you?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Leo nodded.


    Take it¡­ But could fenrirs be around humans?


    ¡°¡­Ms. ire. Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    ¡°What is wrong?¡±


    They turned away from the sky and looked towards me.


    And so I told them that Leo wanted to bring the fenrir back with us.


    ¡°Good Leo¡­the fenrir¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­I approve of it.¡±


    ¡°Lady ire. We are able to get close to this fenrir now, because it is asleep. But surely you understand that they are vicious monsters? Who knows what will happen when it wakes up¡­¡±


    ¡°But¡­ If we leave it here, it may be attacked by monsters again.¡±


    ¡°That is¡­true, but¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wuff-wou-wou!¡±


    Leo barked as if in support of Ms. ire¡¯s decision.


    And then she would gesture, raising her paws and moving her head. She was saying that it was safe to take the fenrir. And while she argued her case, she was careful to not wake the fenrir that slept in front of her.


    While it was nothing new, a dog using gestures was so very¡­ Well, she was a Silver Fenrir.


    But sometimes, Leo¡¯s gestures were veryical¡­ It was with such thoughts in my head that I told Sebastian that I too agreed that we should take the fenrir with us.

 Chapter 72

    Chapter 72


    We took the rescued fenrir back with us


    ¡°Sebastian. I also think that we should take the fenrir back with us.¡±


    ¡°You too, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    I told him that I agreed with Leo and Ms. ire.


    It was because of something that Leo had said before we came to this forest.


    ¡°Do you remember what Leo said when we were deciding whether or not toe here?¡±


    ¡°Umm¡­indeed¡­it was that if Leo was with us, then fenrirs would not attack¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. And that fenrirs would always submit to Silver Fenrirs, who were their superior. In that case, as long as Leo is here, it will not try to hurt anyone.¡±


    ¡°¡­Hmm¡­ So it¡¯s safe if Leo is with us¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Sebastian¡­¡±


    Sebastian was deep in thought at this.


    Ms. ire was looking at him with a pleading expression.


    ¡°¡­Yes¡­very well. We will take it back and watch it closely.¡±


    ¡°Thank you!¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°However! If it harms anyone in the mansion, it will be dealt with like any other hostile monster. And Leo must watch it at all times. Those are the conditions.¡±


    ¡°Of course.¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    No matter how much Leo said that it would be fine, we couldn¡¯t be sure.


    After all, the servants had never had to take care of a fenrir before.


    They were supposed to be dangerous monsters.


    So it was only natural that they would be cautious.


    And so Ms. ire, Leo and I all nodded at Sebastian¡¯s conditions.


    ¡°Now, I think it is time that we leave. The sun has nearly set.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°We now know that there are fenrirs in this forest. That is enough to make the journey worth it.¡±


    While Ms. ire might have wanted to meet a Silver Fenrir, this was still ourst day here.


    We would return to the campsite to rest. And on the following day, we would take down the tents and return to the mansion.


    We had been in this forest for nearly a week now, which was quite long, since none of us were used to it.


    ¡°I will carry it then. Is that all right, Good Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Ms. ire said as she moved close to Leo.


    Leo barked once and slowly moved away from the fenrir that she had been enveloping.


    ¡°¡­Hmm. It is a lot lighter than it looks.¡±


    The fenrir was still caked in mud and blood, but Ms. ire did not mind it getting on her clothes as she picked it up.


    ¡°Ms. ire. Can you really carry it back? We were running just a short while ago, and you must be tired?¡±


    ¡°I am fine. Perhaps I have gotten used to traversing through the forest.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff¡­ Wou!¡±


    The herb that I had given her had healed any tiredness she might have had.


    However, I did think that she might have be tired again after running, but it was not the case.


    Though, it was also possible that she was just pretending to be tough.


    But then Leo put her face close to Ms. ire and then turned to look at her back before sitting down.


    ¡­Apparently, she was saying that Ms. ire could ride on her back if she became tired.


    ¡°¡­Thank you, Good Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Ms. ire said with augh as she held the fenrir.


    Leo barked in reply.


    It was rather surprising to see Leo so concerned about the fenrir.


    After all, when asking her about going to the forest, she had called them smallfry. So I thought that she didn¡¯t have a high opinion of them.


    Perhaps it was because she had remembered her own experience of being rescued as a pup.


    It had been raining that day, and it was very cold.


    She was newborn and weak. I remember holding her in my arms as I ran home.


    ¡°Well then. Let¡¯s go.¡±


    Ah, this was no time to be thinking about the past.


    I nodded at Sebastian¡¯s words, and then we all turned around and retraced our steps.


    The sun was almostpletely set, and it became very dark on the way back. But thanks to the herbs, we could see just fine.


    Besides, no one was tired either, and so we were able to travel much faster than when we hade.


    Well, it was also because we were going back along a path that we had walked through.


    As we walked, I kept looking at Ms. ire to see if she was all right. But she was in a good mood the whole time, and would asionally look at the sleeping pup¡¯s face, and never showed signs of fatigue.


    Leo was also watching Ms. ire as she walked behind.


    Everyone seemed to be worried about the fenrir.


    From my point of view, Ms. ire looked like a person who had just rescued a dog and was overjoyed.


    Leo was more¡­like someone who had a new baby brother or sister.


    While Silver Fenrirs were very different from fenrirs, perhaps the difference didn¡¯t mean much to Leo.


    At least I didn¡¯t have to worry that Leo wouldn¡¯t watch over it.


    And like that, we made our way back to the camp.


    It was close to midnight when we arrived, and Ms. Lyra and Johanna greeted us with a hot dinner¡­or midnight meal.


    It was nice to be greeted with hot food whening home.


    Well, this was a campsite, and not actually a home.


    ¡°Lady ire¡­ What are you holding¡­?¡±


    ¡°Is it not adorable? It is a fenrir pup. It was being attacked by trolls in the forest before Leo saved it.¡±


    ¡°So there were trolls¡­ However, is it really fine to take back a fenrir pup¡±?


    ¡°We already made a promise with Sebastian, and I think it should be fine. Good Leo will watch over it. Besides, I cannot believe that this fenrir will attack anyone.¡±


    ¡°¡­But they say that fenrirs are vicious creatures that attack humans and monsters alike¡­¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know why¡­but I just know that this fenrir is different.¡±


    She herself seemed confused.


    However, as she held the fenrir, she had a feeling that it would not harm any humans.


    And while I did not understand that feeling, it was indeed difficult to watch the fenrir¡¯s calm breathing and think that it was a harmful monster.


    Well, it was probably because it looked like a cute dog or wolf.

 Chapter 73

    Chapter 73


    The Fenrir Woke Up


    ¡°¡­So Sebastian has agreed to it?¡±


    ¡°He has. Haven¡¯t you, Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°Yes. While there are some conditions, I have agreed to bring it back with us.¡±


    ¡°I suppose¡­it is all right then¡­¡±


    Ms. Lyra was satisfied by Sebastian¡¯s answer and began to mutter, ¡®a fenrir pup¡­it is indeed cute¡­¡¯ And then she returned to the pot that hung over the fire, and began to serve everyone their food.


    As I hadn¡¯t eaten anything but herbs since lunch, I was very hungry.


    And so I took my wooden te and waited in line with Phillip and the others.


    It was the familiar orc and vegetable soup, as we had limited supplies while camping out here.


    But while it was familiar, it was still delicious, and we didn¡¯t tire of it.


    As we all ate our food, we told Ms. Lyra and Johanna about what we had seen while searching through the forest.


    Phillip and Nichs did most of the talking.


    I felt that there was some exaggeration when they got to the part where I used Weed Cultivation, but I didn¡¯t correct them.


    They were so excited as they talked about it, and I didn¡¯t want to interrupt them.


    Though, I did feel quite awkward when such talk resulted in Ms. Lyra and Johanna giving me looks of astonishment and admiration.


    ¡°Still, Lady ire. Are you really fine with leaving the forest now?¡±


    Johanna asked Ms. ire when they were finished.


    ¡°Yes, it is fine. I feel that nothing good wille from staying here much longer. We¡¯ve already taken longer than nned. Besides, we did find a real fenrir. It¡¯s proof that there are others.¡±


    ¡°¡­That is true¡­ Up until now, humans never went this deep into this forest. And so no fenrirs have been sighted since the founder. But now you can refute those who would say that there are no more fenrirs here.¡±


    ¡°Yes. If I am being honest, I had hopes of meeting a Silver Fenrir, just like my ancestor, but this is enough.¡±


    ¡°Very well. If that is how you feel, Lady ire, then I will not argue.¡±


    ¡°I am d to hear that.¡±


    Ms. ire and Johanna finished talking, and everyone seemed to agree with her that finding the fenrir was enough of an achievement.


    For a while, we surrounded the campfire and rested. And just as we started to talk about sleep, the fenrir that was in Ms. ire¡¯s arms suddenly stirred.


    ¡°Kyu¡­?¡±


    ¡°It has awakened.¡±


    As Ms. ire carried it, the closed eyelids opened, and its red eyes looked up at Ms. ire¡¯s face.


    Leo, who had been curled up next to me, also realized that it was awake, and she stood up and approached the fenrir.


    ¡°Kyaau¡­¡±


    The fenrir turned away from Ms. ire to look at Leo. And then it let out a fearful yelp.


    It could tell that Leo was a Silver Fenrir.


    ¡°It is fine. Good Leo will not attack you. Do not worry.¡±


    ¡°Kuun.¡±


    Ms. ire patted the fenrir¡¯s back as she talked to it gently.


    Leo moved slowly so as not to frighten the fenrir, and then rubbed herrge cheek against it.


    ¡°Kyau? Kyu-kyu.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Apparently, Leo and the fenrir were talking.


    I could not understand what the fenrir was trying to say, but it looked like Leo was saying that it shouldn¡¯t worry.


    Then the fenrir turned its head and looked at its surroundings.


    It was trying to understand the situation it was in.


    ¡°Kyuu¡­kya-kyau¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff? ¡­Wou-wou.¡±


    The fenrir sounded like it wanted something.


    Leo realized this and spoke to it in a concerned voice.


    ¡­Perhaps the fenrir was looking for its parents?


    The voice had reminded me of when I first found Leo. She had that weak voice as if asking for help. As if wanting her parents.


    I had heard it faintly through the rain. The voice that called to her parents, or anyone who might listen.


    ¡°¡­Wou. Wou-wou.¡±


    ¡°What is it, Good Leo?¡±


    Leo moved away from the fenrir and went over to Ms. Lyra.


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    She prodded the pot with her front paws and tilted her head as if to say, ¡®There is no more?¡¯


    ¡°I think Leo is asking if there is more food.¡±


    ¡°Even I could understand what she meant just now, Mr. Takumi. However, there is no more, since everyone ate it¡­ However¡­ I could make something simple if you don¡¯t mind waiting?¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    Said Ms. Lyra, and Leo nodded as if making a request.


    ¡°Very well. Just wait one moment.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Ms. Lyra took out some leftover orc meat from her bag, as well as some vegetable scraps.


    ¡­I hadn¡¯t realized that we were so low on vegetables.


    It was a good thing we had decided to return tomorrow.


    The orc meat was as delicious as any luxury meat, but even it would feel in without some vegetables.


    After seeing that Ms. Lyra was cooking, Leo returned to Ms. ire and put her face close to the fenrir.


    ¡°Wou-wou¡­wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyuu? Kyau-kyau!¡±


    When Leo said something to the fenrir, it raised its voice happily.


    ¡°Good Leo. What did it say?¡±


    ¡°Wou-wuff wuff!¡±


    Ms. ire asked. Leo looked at her sadly once and then moved her mouth as if chewing.


    ¡­It was hungry¡­ I think.


    ¡°She says that it¡¯s hungry.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­so that¡¯s why Lyra is¡­¡±


    As the fenrir pup was hungry, Leo had asked Lyra to make something.


    Because Lyra had been the cook during this whole expedition.


    In that case¡­perhaps the fenrir had been yelping and yipping earlier because it was hungry?


    It wasn¡¯t asking for help or for its parents, but because it wanted food¡­ Perhaps I was just getting sentimental with thoughts of Leo¡¯s past¡­


    Well, at least I had just been thinking that and not saying it out loud¡­or it would have been embarrassing¡­


    And so I shook my head once and drove such thoughts away.


    And then I walked over to Ms. Lyra, who was cooking, in order to ask her something.

 Chapter 74

    Chapter 74


    Food was made for the hungry pup


    ¡°Ms. Lyra. Please make the food as soft as possible.¡±


    ¡°Oh? I was making it in the same way as I always do. Should it be softer?¡±


    ¡°Yes. This fenrir is a pup, after all. And it was terribly wounded when we found it. And though the wounds are healed, its strength has notpletely returned yet. So I think that it would be best to feed it something soft.¡±


    ¡°I see. I did hear earlier that it was hurt, so it would indeed be better to make something that is easier to eat. I will do what I can.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    After talking to Ms. Lyra about the food for the fenrir, I returned to where Ms. ire and Leo were sitting.


    The fenrir now understood that Leo was not going to attack it.


    They were licking at each other¡¯s faces and seemed to be ying.


    And then as if she just had an idea, Ms. ire extended her index finger and put it in front of the fenrir.


    ¡°Kyau? ¡­Chu-chu.¡±


    ¡°Hehe. It tickles.¡±


    The fenrir had tilted its head at first, but then it began to suck at Ms. ire¡¯s finger.


    ¡­Ms. ire. That is a fenrir you are dealing with¡­ Aren¡¯t you afraid of it biting you?


    Of course, this was my first time seeing one. I had only heard stories about these monsters before.


    And they were supposed to attack humans viciously.


    And so offering your finger to one was like asking it to tear it off.


    I was startled at first, but then saw that the fenrir was just sucking it like a baby that was drinking from a bottle of milk.


    Ms. ire was chuckling at the sensation, and I saw that Sebastian and the three guards all sighed with relief.


    ¡­So they were just like me, and had been rmed by her actions.


    But really¡­this fenrir looked a lot like a baby.


    Due to its size, I had assumed that it was a child, though perhaps a few years old. But it was also possible that it hadn¡¯t been long at all since it was born.


    It was a fenrir, after all¡­ They were supposed to be smallpared to Leo, but if this was their size when newborn, then how big would they be as adults?


    I would have to ask Sebastian about their real size and ecology once we returned to the mansion.


    It was with such thoughts that I watched the hungry fenrir suck greedily on Ms. ire¡¯s finger. And then Ms. Lyra announced that the food was ready.


    ¡°It¡¯s ready. Now, please take some to it.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Upon hearing her, Leo stood up and then picked up one of the washed wooden tes with her mouth, and walked over to Ms. Lyra.


    And then Ms. Lyra poured the food from the pot onto the te.


    However, Leo was not able to carry it now. Ms. Lyra was supporting the te with her hand and wondering what to do. And so I went over and took the te from Leo.


    ¡°I¡¯ll take it.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­of course. Thank you¡­Mr. Takumi.¡±


    Apparently, it hadn¡¯t urred to her to ask someone to help Leo.


    I chuckled at her carelessness as I held the te and walked back to the fenrir.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.


    ¡°Oh, there is no need to thank me, Good Leo.¡±


    Leo bowed once to Ms. Lyra for making the food, and then she followed after me.


    Ah, you were able to say thank you. That¡¯s a good girl.


    When I was close to the fenrir, it seemed to recognize the smell of food, and then it began to squirm in Ms. ire¡¯s arms before jumping out.


    ¡°Ah¡­¡±


    ¡°Wait, wait. Now calm down. It¡¯s still hot. You¡¯ll get burned if you eat it now.¡±


    ¡°Kyau! Kyau!¡±


    But either it didn¡¯t understand what I meant, or it was too hungry to care. And so without calming down at all, it began to run in a circle around my legs.


    Ms. ire looked a little crestfallen now that the fenrir had jumped out of her arms, and so I handed her the te.


    ¡°You feed it, Ms. ire. But let it cool a little first, as it¡¯s quite hot.¡±


    ¡°¡­Are you sure that I should do it?¡±


    ¡°While Leo was also there, it was calm the whole time that you were holding it. I think that shows that the fenrir is starting to take to you, Ms. ire.¡±


    ¡°¡­You¡­think so¡­?¡±


    ¡°Yes, so don¡¯t worry. Here.¡±


    Perhaps Ms. ire was hesitant because she didn¡¯t have any experience with feeding animals. Still, I handed her the te with instructions to let the food cool.


    All the while, the fenrir began to run impatiently around us.


    ¡­It was quite lively, huh¡­


    ¡°Gau!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    Leo barked as if to tell the little fenrir to settle down.


    Upon hearing this, the fenrir let out a short, fearful yelp, but then sat down quietly.


    ¡­Leo could be a strict discipliner.


    ¡°Now, Ms. ire.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ Fuu¡­fuuu¡­¡±


    Ms. ire blew on the steaming food in order to cool it. And then she put the te down in front of the fenrir.


    ¡°Kyuu¡­?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    The fenrir must have been very intimidated by the bark earlier, as it now looked towards Leo as if to ask for permission to eat. And then Leo nodded.


    The fenrir¡¯s red eyes shone at this, and it pounced on the te in front of it.


    ¡°How very ravenous¡­ I wonder if it¡¯s enough?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know¡­ It wouldn¡¯t be enough for Leo, but this one is still small.¡±


    The fenrir began to eat the food with surprising vigor.


    It made us worry that it wasn¡¯t going to be enough.


    We could make more¡­ Yes, there should be some orc meat left¡­


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, Ms. Lyra, but would you mind cooking some more orc meat?¡±


    ¡°No, I don¡¯t mind at all.¡±


    And so I asked Ms. Lyra to cook some more meat, just in case it wasn¡¯t enough.


    If the fenrir was full, then Leo would eat any meat that remained.


    For a while after, we all watched as the fenrir ate.


    Leo looked like she was trying to stop herself from drooling¡­ Don¡¯t think that I didn¡¯t catch that, Leo.

 Chapter 75

    Chapter 75


    The fenrir recovered its health


    ¡°Leo¡­ Let me guess. You¡¯re hungry too?¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    After returning to the camp, she had eaten her sausages as usual, as well as the food that Ms. Lyra made. But she was still hungry.


    And though she looked a little embarrassed at having been seen drooling, she quietly admitted that she was.


    ¡°¡­Ms. Lyra¡­ I¡¯m very sorry, but¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, you want some for Leo. Don¡¯t worry, we still have plenty of orc meat left.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    After hearing me make the request to Ms. Lyra, Leo barked happily and wagged her tail.


    Leo, I can understand why you are happy to be able to eat some meat. But don¡¯t wag your tail so much.


    You¡¯re hitting the fenrir, who is trying to eat.


    A short whileter, the meat that Ms. Lyra quickly prepared was ready, and both Leo and the fenrir were eating side by side.


    As they were so different in size, they looked like a parent and child.


    Also, as expected, the food was not enough for the fenrir.


    It ate so much in spite of not being that big¡­ I suppose it was trying to get back its lost energy.


    ¡°Hehehe. It eats so much.¡±


    ¡°Yes, it does.¡±


    Ms. ire watched the ravenous fenrir and chuckled.


    Then the fenrir and Leo finished eating theirte night meal, and we washed the tes in the river.


    ¡°Oh? It looks like the fenrir is sleeping again.¡±


    ¡°Yes. It must have be sleepy after eating so much. Hehe. It is just adorable.¡±


    I returned to the camp after washing the tes at the river with Sebastian, and saw that the fenrir was sleepingfortably in Ms. ire¡¯s arms, just like it had before.


    It hadn¡¯t recoveredpletely, and still needed rest.


    Ms. ire was smiling as she looked down at the peaceful fenrir. It was clear that she had be quite fond of it.


    And then, with the exception of Phillip and Nichs, who took the first watch, everyone retired to the tents in order to get some sleep.


    As the fenrir did not want to leave Ms. ire, she decided to sleep with it.


    But Leo would also sleep in front of the women¡¯s tent, just in case something happened.


    Now, I had to sleep as well. As Leo and I had the next watch.


    And so I entered the mens tent and said good night Sebastian before going to sleep.


    The next morning arrived without incident, both during the watch and while I slept.


    But just as I got out of my sleeping bag in order to prepare myself for the morning, I heard a dog-like barking sounding from outside of the tent.


    It was that fenrir we found yesterday.


    ¡°Good morning, Ms. ire.¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Kyu, kyu.¡±


    I greeted Ms. ire, who was standing outside of the tent.


    The rescued fenrir was now running around Ms. ire¡¯s legs.


    ¡­I wondered how it did not be dizzy¡­


    As for Leo, she was sitting politely nearby and watching.


    ¡°Morning, Leo. And you too, little fenrir.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    Leo replied, as did the fenrir.


    It sounded like a good morning, I suppose¡­ Could it be that this little fenrir could understand me as well?


    ¡°Good morning, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Sebastian.¡±


    As I was watching Leo and the fenrir, Sebastian started to walk towards me from the river.


    ¡°Once we have finished eating breakfast, we will pack our things and return to the mansion.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I understand.¡±


    And then Sebastian went into the mens tent.


    He was probably going to wake up Phillip.


    ¡­Phillip seemed to have trouble getting up in the morning.


    ¡°Well, I¡¯m going to go and wash up at the river then.¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course.¡±


    ¡°Kyau-kyau.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    When I told Ms. ire that I was going to the river, the fenrir came up to my legs and started barking.


    Leo was looking at it with a puzzled expression.


    ¡°Hmm? What¡¯s the matter?¡±


    I bent over to look at the fenrir inquiringly.


    ¡°Kyau¡­kyuu¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff¡­wou¡­¡±


    The fenrir clearly wanted to tell me something. But I couldn¡¯t understand what it was.


    Just then, Leo moved her nose close to the fenrir¡¯s body and sniffed. And then she seemed to grimace.


    ¡­So it smelled¡­


    ¡°Do you want to go into the river then?¡±


    ¡°Kyau! Kyau!¡±


    The fenrir barked affirmatively.


    Now that I thought about it, the fenrir had been quite dirty yesterday.


    And it was more apparent now, as it was much brighter with the sun shining down on us.


    So I suppose it wanted to wash up¡­ But more importantly, it seemed like this fenrir really did understand what I was saying.


    As I had only just started interacting with it, I could not understand what it was saying. But Leo would interpret, and it was easy tomunicate since it understood me.


    ¡°All right then. You cane with me.¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    And so the fenrir would follow after me.


    Leo was also behind me, as if ready to watch over the fenrir.


    ¡°May I go too?¡±


    ¡°¡­While it¡¯s a little embarrassing to have ady present¡­of course, you can.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Don¡¯t worry, I will not be watching you as you wash up.¡±


    So Ms. ire wasing too.


    Well, I would only be washing my face and shaving it, so it wasn¡¯t really embarrassing.


    And so Ms. ire and I took the fenrir and Leo and went to the nearby river.


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    As soon as we arrived, the fenrir jumped into the river.


    And then Leo jumped in as if to follow it.


    ying was fine, but I hoped that they would actually be cleaner whening out.


    But Ms. ire just watched them andughed.


    ¡­Well, I better start shaving.


    I had gotten used to doing it during the past few days, and no longer cut myself.


    Once that was done, Ms. ire and I watched the two y in the water until Johanna came to tell us that breakfast was ready.


    ¡°Hey! The food is ready!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    When I called to Leo and the fenrir, they both reacted with great enthusiasm and rushed out of the water.


    ¡­There really was no need to hurry¡­


    Leo came out of the river first and shook her body to dry herself.


    Upon seeing this, the fenrir also shook its body as if to mimic Leo.


    ¡­Yes, more and more they were resembling a parent and child.

 Chapter 76

    Chapter 76


    We got out of the forest safely


    We surrounded the bonfire and ate the breakfast that Ms. Lyra had made.


    While the fenrir once again hungrily ate the orc meat, it became full without having to eat the same amount as it did yesterday.


    As I had thought, it had eaten so much in order to recover its strength.


    It seemed to have worked too, as it scampered around Ms. ire.


    The two were now quite affectionate towards each other, which brought smiles to the faces of everyone who watched.


    Once we were finished eating, we started to take down the tents.


    Then the tents and other tools were packed together, and we put out the fire with water from the river.


    The tes and pot were also taken to the river to be washed before being put back into the bags.


    We had camped here for what seemed like a long time, and so I felt just a little sad now that we were leaving¡­


    Of course, we could not stay forever, and so it couldn¡¯t be helped.


    After about an hour, we were ready to leave.


    Everyone was assigned baggage to carry, just like before, and then we went back down the path we hade.


    As always, Sebastian took the lead.


    Phillip followed after him, and then it was Ms. ire and Lyra. And the fenrir.


    Then Johanna, me, and Leo.


    Nichs wasst.


    We should have all been more tired than we were whening, but a week here had made the forest feel familiar, and if anything, we all walked at a much brisker pace.


    As we walked, the fenrir would alternate between running around and sticking close to Ms. ire.


    Ms. ire and Lyra watched with gentle expressions and chuckled.


    Leo would bark at it scoldingly whenever it moved a little too far away, and made sure that it was following us.


    I suppose Leo was its guardian now.


    The sun was now high in the sky, and it was just a little past midday when we reached the entrance of the forest again.


    But Ms. ire showed no signs of being tired, so that it was hard to believe she was the same person who had been panting and having such difficulty.


    The forest really did change people.


    Or perhaps she was just too preupied with the fenrir?


    And while I mused on such things, I had also be quite used to walking in the forest.


    Once we arrived at the edge of the forest, there were about five people gathered there.


    ¡°Wee back.¡±


    ¡°Sebastian. I¡¯m d to see that you are all well. Especially you, Lady ire. Wee back.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Now that I looked closely, they were all people that I had seen at the mansion before.


    And one of them was the guard who had stayed to watch the horses.


    Three of the people were wearing armor and looked like soldiers, and one was a butler.


    It seems like they had been waiting for our return.


    ¡°You were muchter than we were expecting. Did something happen?¡±


    The butler asked Sebastian, even though his eyes were on the fenrir at Ms. ire¡¯s feet.


    ¡°Quite the opposite. It was less eventful than we had hoped. Still, we spent a lot of time exploring.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ And so¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, do not worry about that fenrir. I will tell you about the detailster.¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well.¡±


    Sebastian said, and the butler took a step back.


    We then handed over our baggage so that they could be loaded into the carriage.


    In the meantime, Ms. Lyra was preparing lunch.


    In fact, the butler and the others had brought more food supplies for us.


    They said that had we taken any longer to return, they would have entered the forest in order to search for us, and so had brought extra supplies.


    If that was the case, then we could have stayed in the forest a little longer¡­ I couldn¡¯t help but think this, but there were likely other reasons that would make it difficult.


    Ms. ire and Sebastian could not stay away from the mansion for that long without causing many people to be worried. And while I could always use Weed Cultivation to deal with physical fatigue, the mental exhaustion and stress that would build up was another thing.


    Even with tents, we were still living outside, which was very different from resting within a mansion.


    After that, we finished eating the food that Ms. Lyra had prepared, and then we cleaned up and got ready to leave.


    It was just as I was about to get into the carriage that I remembered something.


    ¡­The carriage was so cramped that I would be pressed against either Ms. ire or Ms. Lyra¡­


    ¡°What is it? Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Ah, um¡­ Well¡­¡±


    As I hesitated to get in, Ms. ire¡¯s voice sounded from behind me.


    What should I do? I couldn¡¯t tell her the real reason¡­


    I suppose that I should just ride on Leo again.


    ¡°Ah¡­ I just thought that I would prefer to ride on Leo. Please don¡¯t mind me.¡±


    ¡°You want to ride on Leo? But¡­¡±


    Ms. ire looked down at the fenrir that she was holding and hesitated.


    Was her concern rted to it then?


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. I am a little worried about leaving the fenrir alone in such a space with Lady ire and Lyra. Would you be so kind as to apany them?¡±


    ¡°Sebastian¡­¡±


    As Ms. ire tried to think of something to say, Sebastian, who was already in the driver¡¯s seat, answered for her.


    But why would you be worried about the fenrir¡­


    ¡°Surely there is nothing to worry about with Ms. ire and Ms. Lyra there? Just look at how much the fenrir adores Ms.. ire.¡±


    ¡°Kyu?¡±


    I patted the fenrir on the head as it sat quietly in Ms. ire¡¯s arms. It then looked up at me and tilted its head questioningly.


    That was another thing it did that was just like Leo¡­


    But as I thought this, it jumped out of Ms. ire¡¯s arms and onto me.


    ¡°Woah!¡±


    ¡°Kyuu!¡±


    It crashed into my chest and I had to catch it quickly so that it didn¡¯t fall to the ground.


    While it wasn¡¯t as heavy as it looked, it still hurt a little to have something of its size fly at you¡­


    ¡°See? The fenrir wants to be with you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°¡­Really?¡±


    ¡°Kyau.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    When I asked, the fenrir cried as if to confirm this.


    I could even hear Leo sighing as if to say that I should give up.


    Hmm¡­ It¡¯s not that I hated being squished in that carriage¡­but I was a man and¡­what if they were to notice things¡­


    ¡°¡­Wuff.¡±


    As I tried to make up my mind, Leo barked with exasperation and then approached Ms. Lyra.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°What? You want to carry me?¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    She stood so that her back faced Ms. Lyra and then barked. Ms. Lyra seemed a little surprised as she asked about Leo¡¯s intent.


    And Leo nodded in reply.

 Chapter 77

    Chapter 77


    Leo and the fenrir howled


    ¡°Do you mind, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°If Leo says that it¡¯s all right, then please let her carry you.¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well.¡±


    Well done, Leo!


    Now I have avoided the pleasant but awkward experience of being crammed into a carriage!


    I thanked Leo with my eyes, and she shook her head and sighed¡­ Surely there was no need to look that exasperated¡­


    And like that, Ms. ire and I and the fenrir got into the carriage.


    While we were still close together, there was a lot more room than when there were three of us.


    As this was the first time for the fenrir to ride in a carriage, it was looking around anxiously. But it eventually settled down between us and rested.


    ¡°Hehe. I suppose it likes that spot.¡±


    ¡°It must like narrow spaces. You know, that feeling of being stuck to something as if you fit in perfectly.¡±


    ¡°Is that what it is?¡±


    ¡­With dogs¡­ I think they feel safe when being in tight spaces. But I didn¡¯t know a lot about that.


    Though, when Leo was small, she often slept in the gaps in the couch.


    ¡°Now, let us depart.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Sebastian said, and the carriage began to move.


    At the same time, the guards and the butlers that were waiting by the edge of the forest also departed towards the mansion.


    ¡­Wait? That other butler. He was riding the same kind of carriage as me¡­


    Maybe I should have rode in that one?


    Riding with a man would not have been more enjoyable, but it would have been less potentially embarrassing than riding with Ms. ire and Lyra¡­ I think.


    I had made a mistake.


    ¡°Kyu.¡±


    As I thought of such things, the fenrir looked at my face and barked.


    ¡­Well, at least there was this cute face to also keep mepany¡­


    Just like Ms. ire, I was not immune to the fenrir¡¯s charm.


    The carriage continued to rock as we moved farther away from the forest and towards the mansion.


    And just like on the way here, we stopped at the halfway point on the road in order to rest.


    ¡°Kyau-kyau.¡±


    ¡°Hehehe. It is lively.¡±


    After we got out of the carriage in order to stretch our limbs, the fenrir began to run around the tree that Ms. ire was resting under.


    It really was energetic.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau.¡±


    Sometimes it would scamper towards Leo, who was resting next to me, and they would start barking as if having a conversation.


    After they had talked, the fenrir would then return to Ms. ire and start running again.


    ¡°What were you talking about?¡±


    ¡°Wou? Wuff!¡±


    I asked Leo while watching the fenrir.


    Leo tilted her head to the side once and then barked happily.


    Hmm¡­ Something about¡­fun?


    Well, if the fenrir was having fun, then I was d that we had taken it with us.


    ¡°We should start heading back soon.¡±


    Sebastian said to everyone who was resting, and so we returned to the carriage.


    Ms. ire and I entered the same carriage that Sebastian was driving, and the fenrir sat between us.


    ¡°It really does seem to enjoy sitting there?¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. It looks like it.¡±


    ¡°Kyu.¡±


    The fenrir sounded like it was agreeing with us.


    It really did seem to understand humans, just like Leo.


    But were all fenrirs like this¡­?


    As I wondered about it, Sebastian held the reins and the carriage began to move.


    Ms. ire and I pet the fenrir and yed with it as we headed towards the mansion.


    As for Ms. Lyra, who was riding on Leo, she had decided to go in the other carriage after resting.


    She had been delighted to ride on Leo at first, but since Leo would often run faster than the horses and go off in random directions, she must have be a little tired.


    And since she had been in charge of cooking during the whole expedition, she was probably very tired. So I was d that she would be able to rx in the carriage on the way back.


    Though, it was my fault for hesitating to go into the carriage in the first ce.


    ¡­Sorry, Ms. Lyra.


    The sun was starting to set, and by the time the beautiful colors of evening shone on the horizon, we arrived at the mansion.


    What was surprising to me, was that just before moving through the gates, Leo suddenly turned towards the sun and began to howl.


    The horses were also very rmed by this, but the soldiers were used to handling them, and so they were able to calm them down quickly.


    ¡ªAwooooooo! AWOOOOO!


    Leo¡¯s howl echoed into the distance.


    As Leo howled towards the setting sun a few times, the fenrir, who had been lying drowsily between Ms. rie and I, suddenly got up and began to howl as if in answer to Leo.


    ¡ªAwooooooo! AWOOOO!


    ¡ªKyaooooo! KYaoOOO!


    ¡ªAwwooooooo! AWOOOO!


    It almost sounded like they weremunicating. There would be pauses as they alternated. And then when they were done, Leo rubbed her cheek against the horses that pulled the carriage, as if to apologize for startling them.


    As for the fenrir, it let out a short ¡®Kyau¡¯ in apology and then went straight back to sleeping between us.


    ¡­What on earth was that¡­?


    ¡°I wonder what came over Leo?¡±


    ¡°I thought that something must have happened. After all, a Silver Fenrir is howling.¡±


    ¡°¡­Hmm. I¡¯m pretty sure there is some meaning to it¡­¡±


    But what was it¡­? I think it had something to do with marking their territory or calling members of the pack that had be separated.


    Regardless, it was some form ofmunication.


    ¡°Perhaps it was talking to the fenrir.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­it did sound like they were talking.¡±


    ¡°Is that right, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    The carriages and horses had all stopped during the howling so the horses could calm down.


    And so I asked Leo as sheforted them, and she turned to look at me and tilted her head.


    ¡°It kind of sounded like you were talking to the fenrir.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff. Wou-wuff-wuff.¡±


    Leo nodded once and then started to exin.

 Chapter 78

    Chapter 78


    We returned to the mansion


    Uhh¡­judging by Leo¡¯s voice and gestures¡­she was saying that the area around the mansion was her territory, and that if the fenrir wanted to join, it was wee?


    I see¡­So Leo was dering thisnd as her territory.


    ¡­But why had she been howling towards the sunset¡­? Well, seeing Leo¡¯s silvery coat glisten under the setting sun as she howled had been quite picturesque.


    ¡°¡­And what was the fenrir¡¯s answer?¡±


    ¡°Wou-wou¡­wuff!¡±


    Hmm. ¡®I will join. Thank you.¡¯ I think¡­?


    So this fenrir was pretty polite then.


    Or that was just the way that Leo interpreted it. Or I was misunderstanding Leo.


    ¡°So, this fenrir is now your friend.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wou-wou. Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    Leo said that she weed the fenrir, who was very grateful.


    So that was how their conversation had gone.


    Still¡­was it really necessary for them to howl like that¡­? Fenrirs and Silver Fenrirs were still quite a mystery to me¡­


    ¡°Ms. ire. It seems like Leo weed the fenrir here as a friend, and the fenrir was expressing its gratitude.¡±


    ¡°¡­Is that so¡­? I did hear that wolves and fenrirs are monsters that are terribly territorial. Is it like a ceremony of sorts?¡±


    ¡°I think it is something like that.¡±


    I answered as I looked down at the fenrir that was squeezed between us.


    It had dozed off again.


    Perhaps the calm expression on its face was due to the relief of having been epted by Leo.


    A few minutester, the horses were calmed by Leo¡¯s apology, and we were able to go through the gates.


    A part of me wondered why we didn¡¯t just walk, as we were so close to the house, but I didn¡¯t mention it.


    Then the carriage stopped in front of the entrance of the mansion.


    It was as Ms. ire picked up the sleeping fenrir, and we stepped out of the carriage, that the doors of the mansion burst open.


    ¡°Sister! Mr. Takumi! Leo! Wee back!¡±


    The person who flew out of the doors and rushed towards Ms. ire while shouting was none other than Tilura, who I felt I had not seen in a very long time.


    Likely, the entire mansion had heard Leo and the fenrir¡¯s howling, and so they had known we were here.


    ¡°I¡¯m back, Tilura. But you really should be more quiet. You¡¯ll awaken this little one.¡±


    ¡°Hello, Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°¡­? Sister. What is that?¡±


    Tilura noticed that Ms. ire was holding something, but she did not realize what it was.


    It would have looked like a dog to most people. This would be especially true for anyone who had never seen a fenrir, like Tilura.


    ¡°Hehe. This is a fenrir pup. We rescued it in the forest.¡±


    ¡°This is a fenrir!? It is so cute!¡±


    Ms. ire leaned forward a little so that Tilura could see it.


    Tilura¡¯s eyes shone as she peered at it.


    As Tilura said, the fenrir was very cute as it slept blissfully in Ms. ire¡¯s arms.


    ¡°Tilura. You must speak more softly. This pup was badly injured in the forest. And it is surely still tired. I want to let it sleep a little while longer.¡±


    ¡°Yes, sister. I¡¯m sorry.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. It was running around so energetically, so I¡¯m sure that it¡¯s fine.¡±


    Tilura hushed her voice and apologized after Ms. ire warned her.


    And though I chuckled, I also talked quietly so that I would not be the next person to be warned.


    Still, it really had been energetic in the morning.


    And even on the way back, it had been scampering around Ms. ire while everyone else rested.


    And so it was probably sleeping because it had run a lot, and not because of anything rted to past injuries.


    ¡°Still, I must be sure. I do not want it disturbed while it sleeps.¡±


    ¡°It does look very cute like this. So it should be left alone until it wakes up.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s so cute!¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Ms. ire was getting more attached to it by the minute. Her gaze had all the gentleness of a mother.


    And Tilura seemed like she could hardly contain her excitement as she watched the sleeping creature.


    However, Leo sounded just a little upset that Tilura was more interested in the fenrir than her.


    Leo. Tilura is still a child.


    And so she is bound to be interested in anything new.


    But she is still very fond of you, and so you can y togetherter.


    I thought while petting the sulky Leo.


    ¡°Lady ire. It is no good to stand out here. Let us go inside.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Said Sebastian, and so we left the carriages to the guards and entered the mansion.


    ¡°Wee back, Lady ire, Mr. Takumi. We have all been eagerly anticipating your safe return!¡±


    As soon as we stepped through the door, the servants greeted us with their voices ringing in unison.


    I had experienced this a few times already, but still did not know why it was necessary. Why not choose just one person to speak¡­


    Besides, it must take a lot of practice to be able to speak with such perfect timing.


    ¡­I tried imagining them all lined up and practicing these greetings. It was a little surreal.


    ¡°Thank you all. But please hush your voices, as this little one is asleep.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, mydy.¡±


    Ms. ire was now cautioning the servants as she had Tilura.


    Well, there had been no way for the servants to predict that their mistress would return from the forest with a fenrir. Or that this fenrir would be sleeping.


    But one of the butlers apologized on the behalf of the others in a hushed tone.


    And then the other servants bowed their heads.


    I think a silent bow would suffice for a greeting from now on?


    Unless there was some kind of rule for servants of a nobleman¡¯s house¡­


    I would have to ask Sebastian about itter.


    ¡­It felt like the number of things I wanted to ask Sebastian about was increasing a lot¡­ Well, it was not a bad thing, as Sebastian loved nothing more than to exin things.

 Chapter 79

    Chapter 79


    We rxed in the drawing room


    ¡°I¡¯m going to go and put this little one to bed.¡±


    ¡°Yes, mydy. And what about you, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. I¡¯m going to drop my things off in my room first. And then, can I have some tea in the drawing room? The tea you serve here is very delicious and helps me rx.¡±


    ¡°Very well. It will be prepared.¡±


    So Ms. ire was going to let the fenrir sleep in her room.


    At first, she had seemed a little anxious about being with the fenrir when Leo and I were not there, but that was no longer the case, it seemed.


    The fenrir had never shown any signs of hostility, and it just ran around yfully. And so Ms. ire probably realized that there was nothing to worry about now.


    Tilura followed after Ms. ire in order to look at the fenrir.


    ¡°Leo, let¡¯s go.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    I called Leo, who was looking sadly at Tilura leaving with the fenrir. And then I headed to my room.


    I needed to hurry up and drop off my things and go to the drawing room. Sebastian was bound to have the tea ready in no time.


    Ms. Lyra had been like that as well. The servants seemed capable of moving through the mansion with such a speed that I wondered if they were capable of teleporting.


    The tea might be ready in the drawing room by the time I reach my door.


    And so I took Leo, who kept ncing back in the direction that Tilura went, and headed for my room.


    Don¡¯t be so sulky, Leo. You¡¯ll get plenty of attentionter.


    I put down my things in the room and then changed my clothes.


    They were the clothes that I had left here, but the ones that I was wearing were much too dirty.


    Though, Ms. Lyra and Johanna had washed our clothes in the river while we were out exploring.


    However, there was no detergent in the forest, and so the clothes wouldn¡¯t bepletely cleaned. And they had gotten dirty on the journey back as well.


    After I was changed, I took Leo and walked to the drawing room.


    While walking down the hall, I looked at Leo and noticed that her silver fur looked dull.


    I suppose that I¡¯d have to bathe her again. Though, I wouldn¡¯t bring it up now.


    Leo was already feeling both sad and sulky over Tilura¡¯s attention being directed elsewhere, and she would not take the news of a bath very well.


    When we entered the drawing room, Ms. Gelda was waiting there with a pot and tea cup ced on the table.


    ¡°Wee back, Mr. Takumi. Your tea is ready.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. It¡¯s good to be back.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff-wuff.¡±


    I thanked her and sat down at the table.


    Leo also approached Ms. Gelda, and greeted her.


    Once I had sat down, Ms. Gelda poured me a cup of tea.


    ¡°Wee back, good Leo. Would you like to have some milk?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Leo nodded at Ms. Gelda¡¯s words.


    Ms. Gelda seemed to be used to Leo now.


    She used to talk to Leo so fearfully, but now she was acting quite normal.


    Perhaps it was because she and Ms. Lyra had ridden on Leo¡¯s back in the garden?


    Well, now that I looked carefully, she still seemed a little tense. But then again, I had a feeling she was always like that, even when not around Leo.


    ¡°Ah, this tea really is delicious.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    I took a sip while Ms. Gelda prepared the milk for Leo.


    I didn¡¯t feel like I had truly returned to this mansion until I had a cup of tea.


    There was something veryforting about the taste.


    ¡°Here you go, good Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    The milk must have been prepared in advance, as Ms. Gelda brought out a bowl that was the size of arge bucket, and ced it in front of Leo.


    Leo looked at Ms. Gelda and barked once with gratitude, and then she dunk her face inside and drank greedily.


    She had not been able to drink any milk while we were in the forest.


    But Leo, be careful to not stick to anyone while you have all that milk on your face, all right?


    After giving Leo her milk, Ms. Gelda stood by the door and waited.


    And so Leo and I drank our tea and milk and rxed.


    Eventually, there was a knock on the door, and Ms. ire and Tilura entered, with the fenrir by their feet.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, thank you for apanying me to the forest. I am grateful for your cooperation.¡±


    ¡°Not at all, Ms. ire. I hope you are not too tired.¡±


    Ms. ire thanked me as soon as she came in.


    She then sat at the table and Ms. Gelda poured her some tea.


    Tilura and the fenrir went straight towards Leo.


    From the looks of it, the fenrir had taken to Tilura quickly.


    It seemed a little too soon, but perhaps it was because they were both children.


    After all, children seemed to be capable of bing friends in an instant.


    ¡°So it woke up.¡±


    ¡°Yes. It woke up just as we reached my room. Hehe!¡±


    Ms. ire chuckled as if she had just remembered something. What was it?


    ¡°Did something happen?¡±


    ¡°Not really. But it was when the fenrir woke up. It fell asleep inside of the carriage, yes? And so it was surprised to suddenly wake up in this mansion. It was quite adorable as it ran about, trying to figure out where it was.¡±


    I see.


    From the fenrir¡¯s point of view, it had suddenly appeared in an unknown ce, so it was no wonder that it felt rmed.


    But I¡¯m sure it would get used to being here.


    Ms. ire recalled the moment with a smile as she watched Leo and Tilura y.


    Yes, I could imagine how cute it would have looked.


    Because the fenrir just looked like a dog¡­


    However, it would one day growrge and be a terrifying wolf.


    ¡°Now that I think about it, Mr. Takumi. Weed Cultivation, which you demonstrated in the forest¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh? What about it?¡±


    ¡°Well, you were testing all sorts of things in the garden. Perhaps it¡¯s time that you told me more about that.¡±


    ¡°Ah, yes. I haven¡¯t exined it to you yet.¡±


    So much had happened that I had forgotten.


    But we had plenty of time now, with nothing important to do. So it was a good opportunity.


    And so I started to think of how best to exin it to her. But then my mind suddenly went nk.


    No, it wasn¡¯t just my mind. But my vision.


    Huh? What is this?


    ¡°Mr. Takumi? Are you all right?¡±


    Everything was white. I couldn¡¯t see anything. But I could hear Ms. ire¡¯s concerned voice.


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Kyau?¡±


    I could only hear voices and sounds around me.


    However, the worry in Leo¡¯s voice sounded like this was a state of emergency.


    And I could hear Tilura and the fenrir as well.


    But my vision remained white and I could see nothing.


    Not only that, but a ckness started to creep in from the edges, and the sounds grew more distant.


    What is this? What was happening to me?


    No, I had experienced this before¡­yes¡­ Once, I had fainted after being forced to work for days and days without rest¡­


    Without being able to finish the thought, everything turned ck and I lost consciousness¡­

 Chapter 80

    Chapter 80


    The others were very worried about me


    I felt like I was slowly floating upwards.


    What happened to me again?


    It was as if I was waking from a dream.


    Had I been sleeping then?


    ¡­I don¡¯t know¡­ I could feel my body now.


    And I could think.


    Uhh¡­?


    I will try to move my arms and legs.


    Hmm. They move fine¡­ But I seem to be on my side.


    I suppose that I was sleeping then.


    ¡°¡­Hmm.¡±


    I opened my eyes.


    Yes. I could see.


    This¡­ It was familiar. The room that I had been assigned to me in the mansion.


    In order to change my view, I turned my head to the side.


    ¡°Huh? Ms. ire?¡±


    Ms. ire was in front of me.


    And not just her.


    Sebastian, Ms. Lyra, Ms. Gelda. Leo and the fenrir were there as well.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi!?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!?¡±


    ¡°You are awake, Mr. Takumi!¡±


    Once I saw that they were all there, Ms. ire, Leo, and Sebastian shouted at me.


    Hmm? Why were they all so surprised?


    Also, why were they inside of my room?


    ¡°Everyone. What happened?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. You do not remember?¡±


    ¡°You fainted in the drawing room.¡±


    The drawing room¡­ Now that I thought about it, I remember talking with Ms. ire.


    Yes. It was right after we returned from the forest.


    I am starting to remember different things now.


    I don¡¯t know why, but my vision had suddenly be white and I lost consciousness.


    And I had been sleeping here because someone must have carried me.


    ¡°¡­Good morning.¡±


    ¡°Ha¡­really, Mr. Takumi¡­ Good morning. You seemed to have slept well.¡±


    ¡°You gave us a terrible fright, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    Ms. ire and Sebastian sounded a little exasperated as they answered.


    Even Leo was sighing visibly¡­ Shouldn¡¯t you say good morning, Leo?


    Thinking this, I said good morning to Tilura, Ms. Lyra, Ms. Gelda, and the fenrir as well.


    It was what you were supposed to do when waking up.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Can you get up?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    As Ms. ire asked this, I sat up and then got out of my bed.


    ¡°You seem to be fine.¡±


    Sebastian said with relief as he saw me get to my feet.


    Yes, I didn¡¯t think anything was wrong. It was the same old feeling after a good night¡¯s sleep.


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°There, there.¡±


    As Leo rubbed her face into me, I patted her on the head.


    I suppose she really was worried?


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Perhaps we should go to the drawing room? Then we can tell you about how you fainted.¡±


    ¡°Very well.¡±


    Indeed, this was not the ce to start having a conversation.


    There were no chairs, and so you would have to stand or sit on the floor.


    And that might be fine for Leo or the fenrir, but Ms. ire and Tilura were the daughters of a duke, and Sebastian was not likely to permit something so ill-mannered.


    Ms. Lyra and Ms Gelda left first, and said they would prepare the drawing room.


    Ms. ire gave me a concerned look, and then said that she would be waiting for me, and then she took Tilura and left the room.


    Apparently, Sebastian woulde with me and Leo.


    I didn¡¯t know why, but I had fainted.


    So he probably wanted to make sure that I could walk properly.


    And so I quickly got ready and then headed to the drawing room with Leo and Sebastian.


    Sebastian knocked on the door and Ms. ire gave him permission to enter.


    Inside, Ms. ire and Tilura were sitting. The fenrir was on Tilura¡¯sp.


    They had clearly bonded.


    Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda waited by the door, and Sebastian moved to stand next to Ms. ire.


    Leo and I went to the table and then Ms. Lyra poured me a cup of tea.


    ¡°So, Mr. Takumi. Do you remember what happened right before you fainted?¡±


    Asked Ms. ire after I had taken a sip of the tea.


    Hmm. Before I fainted¡­


    ¡°I know that after we returned from the forest, I came to this drawing room.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s right. And you and Leo were rxing. But what about after that?¡±


    After that?


    Right, Ms. ire came to see us.


    ¡°Ms. ire and Tilura came here¡­and we were talking.¡±


    ¡°So you do remember. It was when we were speaking that you fainted.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    But what had we been talking about¡­ I think it was¡­about Weed Cultivation.


    That¡¯s right, I was going to tell Ms. ire about my research with it. And then my vision suddenly turned white.


    Thinking about it now, the sensation of everything going white returned for a second, and I shuddered.


    ¡°Are you alright? You look a little pale.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes, I¡¯m fine. I just remember the moment before I fell¡­¡±


    ¡°The moment before¡­ What did it feel like? Ah, um¡­you do not have to say it if you don¡¯t want to think about it.¡±


    Ms. ire asked as she looked at my face worriedly. But she also realized that I might not want to talk about it.


    While it wasn¡¯t something that I wanted to remember, they were all so worried about me, and so I thought that I should tell them.


    Besides, I was getting used to thinking about it¡­ Yes, it was nothing.


    ¡°I¡¯m fine. I can talk about it.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Thanks for your concern, Leo. I really am fine.¡±


    Leo was staring at me from the side. She even barked questioningly, but I was fine.


    I patted her on the head with gratitude.


    ¡°If you say so, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. Uh¡­ When it happened, my vision suddenly turned white.¡±


    ¡°White¡­ And you couldn¡¯t see anything?¡±


    ¡°Nothing but white. But I could still hear. I remember hearing the voices of Leo, Ms. ire and Tilura calling to me.¡±


    ¡°It must have been very frightening¡­to not be able to see.¡±


    Ms. ire and Tilura seemed to be imagining the moment, and they looked pale.


    I didn¡¯t know what had caused it, but it was out of the ordinary. Being suddenly robbed of your vision was indeed a frightening thing.

 Chapter 81

    Chapter 81


    I tried to think of the reason that I fainted


    ¡°Immediately after that, my vision wentpletely white, and I was unable to do anything. And then my consciousness slowly faded away. Before I knew it, I was sleeping in my bed.¡±


    ¡°I understand. Thank you for telling us.¡±


    ¡°No, it was good that I went over it and organized my thoughts.¡±


    Yes, it had sent a chill through my body at first, but I was fine when I started to talk about it calmly.


    I wouldn¡¯t want to experience it again, but thinking about it wasn¡¯t so bad.


    ¡°However, what could have caused it? I did not think that I was that tired.¡±


    We had explored a forest and slept in tents. And so there was a little fatigue from that.


    However, the nts I made with Weed Cultivation were supposed to have erased nearly all of it.


    Could it be psychological fatigue¡­? And yet, it had closely resembled the time that I fainted from over working.


    When it happened before, I had almost no time to rest, and felt lucky if I could get two or three hours of sleep.


    The only reason I returned home at all was in order to feed Leo, and then I had to go straight back to work. It seemed so ridiculous now that I thought back on it.


    And then finally, when I was able to go home again, my vision turned white and I copsed on the spot.


    Even I knew that this was bad, and I had called thepany and told them that I was ill, and then I went to the hospital.


    Well, I still had to go to work the day after, and was scolded by my boss¡­


    But never mind that. I had to figure out why I had fainted this time.


    In spite of being in the forest for so long, I should not have been that tired.


    I scanned the room. Aside from Tilura, who was puzzled, the others all looked a little grim.


    Even Leo seemed to be deep in thought¡­ She was so expressive these days¡­


    Ah, the fenrir was also clueless.


    It had the same expression as Tilura as it tilted its head to the side.


    It was a pup, after all.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, uh¡­ About how you fainted¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Sebastian had a severe look as he began to talk. Did he know the reason?


    ¡°This is merely spection, and I have no evidence. But it is possible that¡­¡±


    So Sebastian had a theory.


    As I had none, I was very curious to hear what he would say.


    Since this was serious, I straightened my back a little and faced him directly.


    ¡°It is possible that it¡¯s an effect of your Gift.¡±


    ¡°My Gift? But I¡¯ve used it plenty of times before, and nothing like this has ever happened?¡±


    Besides, I hadn¡¯t even been using it when I fainted.


    I did use it in the forest, but that was a day earlier.


    If the Gift was the reason, shouldn¡¯t I have fainted when I used it?


    ¡°As I said, I cannot firm it, but¡­I read something in a book about Gifts. ¡®¡­Some may faint after overuse of the Gift. And so one must be cautious when using it. However, there are also reports of people using their Gift continuously without ever fainting. Does it depend on the ability, or the user? The answer is still unknown to us¡­¡¯¡±


    ¡°So others have fainted after using the Gift then.¡±


    Fainting from overuse, huh?


    To cause such a thing¡­ What was this Gift anyway¡­?


    ¡°It is known that using the Gift does not consume magic energy. So while you might faint from using too much magic, this is unrted¡­ The power to use the Gift is inside of you, Mr. Takumi. And perhaps that power dried up when you fainted.¡±


    ¡°The power to use the Gift¡­ There is such a thing?¡±


    ¡°It has not been confirmed. As I said before, there are not many people who can use it. And so research on the matter is not easy.¡±


    Hmm¡­ If I were to makeparisons to games that I yed in my old world, physical energy was HP, magic was MP, and this other special power was¡­maybe SP?


    ¡­Or should I call it GP for Gift Point?


    It sounded like points you would get for sending someone a present¡­


    ¡°In the forest, Mr. Takumi, you used Weed Cultivation. I think that is the reason. Of course, it¡¯s only my guess.¡±


    ¡°¡­But why did I only faint after returning from the forest? It¡¯s been a whole day since Ist used Weed Cultivation. Shouldn¡¯t I have fainted back at the campsite?¡±


    I had thought about this before, but the Gift was the cause, then surely it should have happened in the ce where I used it?


    ¡°We thought the same thing at first. Surely it cannot be rted to the Gift then. However, once I grew suspicious, I began to search through documents about the Gift, and found something very interesting.¡±


    ¡°What did it say?¡±


    It seemed like Sebastian had been doing a lot of searching while I was asleep.


    While I still wasn¡¯t sure if it was the actual reason, I felt a little bad that they had worked so hard on my behalf.


    ¡°As it was an old document, it had to be tranted, but¡­ When using the Gift, the duration time changes depending on the ability. The longer the duration is, the heavier the burden on the user. And if it¡¯s short, then there is less of a burden.¡±


    ¡°Duration¡­¡±


    ¡°Your ability is Weed Cultivation, Mr. Takumi. And so when cultivating weeds, you use the ability and weeds¡­well, herbs¡­the moment that they have been cultivated, then you finish using the ability.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes. If cultivating them is the goal, then I wouldn¡¯t have to use the ability after that.¡±


    When using Weed Cultivation, I put my hands on the ground.


    And then nts grow immediately. After a few seconds, they finish growing and my work isplete.


    So in terms of duration, it¡¯s just a few seconds between the start and finish.


    In the end, I still don¡¯t understand why I would faint here instead of the forest¡­


    ¡°But with that ount and your own theory, Sebastian, isn¡¯t it even more odd that I would faint here?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, you created medicinal herbs to heal the fenrir, yes?¡±


    ¡°Huh? Yes. There was nothing else that could be done, and so I tried making something, even though I wasn¡¯t sure if it would work.¡±


    ¡°I think that is the reason.¡±


    That was the reason? But why?

 Chapter 82

    Chapter 82


    The Gift was the reason after all


    ¡°I¡¯ve seen you use Weed Cultivation a number of times, Mr. Takumi. But there was something strange when you made the medicinal herbs to treat the wounded fenrir.¡±


    ¡°Something strange?¡±


    Had there been something strange?


    ¡°Yes, you put your hands on the ground like you always do. However, unlike previous times, there was a light that shone from the ground.¡±


    ¡°A light¡­ Yes, there was a light, now that I think about it.¡±


    ¡°And there was also a light when you touched the fenrir with the herb.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­you¡¯re right.¡±


    There had been a light¡­ But as this was a world where magic existed, I just assumed it was because it was a magical herb, and hadn¡¯t put much thought into it¡­


    ¡°The herb that you made was simr to Loe in shape, but Loe does not glow like that.¡±


    It was likely simr because I had been thinking about Loe while creating it.


    However, I had been told that Loe was not capable of healing such grievous wounds.


    In my mind, the herb and wound would glow, and once the light faded out, the wound would be healed.


    Like some magical effect.


    ¡°And there is one other thing. After you fainted, Mr. Takumi, the fenrir seemed to weaken.¡±


    ¡°The fenrir?¡±


    ¡°Kyau?¡±


    Upon hearing this, I looked towards the fenrir, but it just looked back questioningly.


    Well, it didn¡¯t look like it was weakened at all.


    ¡°It is quite normal now, but immediately after it happened, the fenrir became limp and immobile, just like it was when we first found it in the forest.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°Thankfully, as the wounds were still healed, it recovered in a day. It was upon seeing this that I made a hypothesis.¡±


    ¡°¡­And what hypothesis is that?¡±


    ¡°The herb you made, Mr. Takumi, was not something that healed the fenrirpletely. It just maintains a state that resembles recovery. And in the meantime, its energy and other treatments arepleted more gradually.¡±


    ¡°Maintains¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. And while maintaining it, you continue to use this power that¡¯s rted to the Gift. And it reached its limit just as you returned and rested in this room.¡±


    In other words, the herb I had cultivated merely resulted in a state that resembled a healed wound.


    And after that, I would continue to expend energy in order to finish healing it¡­


    The herb I made would continue to have an effect, but its source of power was limited.


    And so the power from the Gifts kept the effect going, so that the fenrir continued to heal¡­?


    So perhaps when the light from the herb faded away, it had actually gone inside of the fenrir.


    Indeed, if this was the case, then Sebastian¡¯s theory that the duration was the reason I fainted would make sense. And it would exin why there was a dy, and why it happened after I returned.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, this is only my educated guess after some research. As I said previously, I have no evidence.¡±


    ¡°No, I think you must be right, Sebastian. I just have a feeling.¡±


    Well, that¡¯s all it was, a feeling.


    I wasn¡¯t sure if it was because I was the one who had the Gift, but I didn¡¯t feel like what Sebastian was saying was just a theory or imagination. It felt correct.


    Besides, there was no other exnation that I could think of, and so I decided to believe it for now.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, if what Sebastian says is true, perhaps it would be best if you abstain from using Weed Cultivation for a while?¡±


    Ms. ire had been listening quietly, but she now spoke up in a worried voice.


    Now that I thought of it, the entire room had been very quiet the whole time.


    Leo, Ms. ire, Ms. Lyra, and Ms. Gelda were all listening seriously.


    Only Tilura and the fenrir still looked puzzled.


    They did not understand what we were talking about.


    ¡°Ms. ire, I¡¯m grateful for your concern. But I have so many ns for Weed Cultivation and I want to be useful.¡±


    ¡°But what if you were to faint again¡­¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. If what Sebastian says is true, it should be fine as long as I don¡¯t create anything with a continuous effect. So I just need to be careful about that. After all, I had created all kinds of things in the garden during my tests, and never felt anything wrong.¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well. However, you must promise to not work too hard. Leo isn¡¯t the only one here who would worry about you.¡±


    Upon saying this, the others, including Tilura and the fenrir, all nodded.


    I was so thankful for their kindness.


    ¡°Thank you all. I will be careful.¡±


    ¡°You promise?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    I then bowed my head and thanked them.


    And promised Ms. ire that I would not strain myself.


    Overworking had been so normal for me not too long ago. But here, things were different.


    Well, it wasn¡¯t apany.


    ¡°By the way, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes?¡±


    Ms. ire suddenly seemed to remember something.


    ¡°We never finished our conversation because you fainted¡­ You were going to tell me about Weed Cultivation.¡±


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right.¡±


    While I wasn¡¯t trying to conceal or dy it, it was starting to look like it by how much time had passed since I said that I would talk about it.


    However, everyone who knew about my Gift was gathered together here now, so it seemed like the perfect time.


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s nothingplicated. Uh, it all started on the first time that I tried using Weed Cultivation. That time, there was this one nt that I made that I didn¡¯t know anything about. I believe I showed it to you and also Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Yes, you did. It was a nt that we had also never seen.¡±


    Sebastian must have been very curious, as he answered for Ms. ire.

 Chapter 83

    Chapter 83


    I exined about my Gift research


    In the end, it was Sebastian who really seemed interested in this subject.


    Perhaps because it was rted to the Gift. Though, it wasn¡¯t just him, as the others were also looking at me eagerly.


    ¡°It was a nt that I had never seen before. I checked the book that I borrowedter, and it wasn¡¯t in it.¡±


    ¡°A nt that isn¡¯t in the book¡­¡±


    ¡°And since I didn¡¯t know what it was, I left it on the table in my room¡­ But that night, Leo ate it without asking¡­¡±


    ¡°Leo did¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff? ¡­Wuff.¡±


    At this, all eyes turned to Leo.


    Leo tilted her head to the side once and then nodded as if to say, ¡®ah, that¡¯s right.¡¯


    It was a mystery nt that could have been poisonous, so you shouldn¡¯t eat such things, Leo.


    Thankfully, it had not been poisonous at all.


    ¡°Well, it was also because of Leo that I found out the nt¡¯s effect.¡±


    ¡°What effect was it?¡±


    Sebastian leaned forward as he asked this.


    ¡°In spite of it being night time, Leo became very energetic after eating the nt. She said that¡­it made her swell with power, as if it surpassed her limits and made her stronger. Right, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I asked Leo and she nodded in reply.


    ¡°Swell with power¡­ So is it like the herbs you gave us in the forest that healed our tiredness?¡±


    ¡°No, Lady ire. If it makes your body stronger, then it surely does much more than heal your tiredness.¡±


    ¡°Sebastian is right. Though, I haven¡¯t tested it enough to be sure, but I believe that it enhances your physical abilities.¡±


    Since it made you stronger, Leo continued to y after that until she finally fell asleep. It had been quite a night¡­


    She was so restless and wanted to run around, and I had to stop her over and over again.


    Leo could not run around inside of the mansion, as she was sorge and was bound to break things.


    ¡°Physical ability¡­it must be quite amazing then.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I do think that it could be very useful. I tested it myself and I was able to jump several times higher than I usually can. And things that normally feel heavy were light when I picked them up.¡±


    ¡°That¡­is astonishing.¡±


    ¡°So that¡¯s why you were hopping and rolling around, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    Ms. Lyra had been watching me as I worked in the garden.


    Now that I thought of it, I must have looked quite a fool, jumping around like that at my age.


    ¡°However, I haven¡¯t tested it as much as I¡¯d like, so there are still things that I don¡¯t know.¡±


    ¡°Like what? It seems that you know quite enough already.¡±


    ¡°Well, like just how much it enhances your physical ability. The effect may vary from person to person. Perhaps it is more effective on certain types of people.¡±


    For instance, if a person¡¯s physical ability was ¡®10¡¯ and they ate the herb.


    And then their physical ability became 20. Was this because their ability was doubled, or because the herb gives you +10?


    If it was +10, it would be 30 if someone with physical ability 20 ate it, but if it was doubling the number, then it would be 40.


    This was a big difference.


    Of course, if this was true, it would likely be much moreplex.


    Besides, I doubted a person¡¯s physical ability could be measured and turned into numbers.


    ¡°Uh, I¡¯m getting sidetracked here¡­ But after making that herb, I realized one of the possibilities of Weed Cultivation.¡±


    ¡°And what possibility is that?¡±


    Now ire was leaning forward as she asked me this.


    And while I had no idea if she truly understood, even Tilura looked quite excited as she listened to us speak.


    They really enjoyed listening to this, huh?


    Ms. ire had already proved to be someone that was full of curiosity. Perhaps it had just rubbed off onto everyone close to her?


    ¡°When cultivating the nts, at first, I was thinking about not just the effect, but the actual appearance. However, the herb I have been talking about was something that I didn¡¯t know about. In other words, I only need a vague idea of what kind of nt I want, and I can cultivate it.¡±


    ¡°What do you mean?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t have to imagine what it looks like. It doesn¡¯t even have to exist. I just need to imagine the desired effect and use Weed Cultivation. Well, it was really an ident. And so while it wasn¡¯t exactly what I had been thinking about, something simr was created.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ So that¡¯s what happened¡­ This Weed Cultivation must be an incredible ability.¡±


    Sebastian was the only one who was nodding understandingly.


    The others appeared to be pondering what I said with serious expressions.


    But it was really quite simple.


    ¡°It would be nice to have this kind of nt. Just think that, and as long as it can be categorized as a weed, then you can make it. It is that kind of ability.¡±


    ¡°If I remember correctly, you cannot make vegetables?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I cannot. However, sometimes the line between vegetable and weed can be blurry. I think there may be some loopholes if I think about it. It was because of this, that before our journey, I asked Ms. ire if I can test different things in the back garden.¡±


    ¡°So that is what you were doing. I was very curious to know about it.¡±


    Yes, that had been clear.


    She was a very curious person, and I had made it sound more mysterious than was necessary.


    Well, I still wasn¡¯t even sure what I thought at the time, so I didn¡¯t feel like talking about it.


    ¡°Hahaha. I¡¯m terribly sorry about that. I just wanted to tell you once there were some results. It was just a thought that had sprouted in my mind, and I wouldn¡¯t have been able to exin it properly yet.¡±


    ¡°No¡­ But it did cross my mind at the time, that you were being mean to me. But I know better now.¡±


    Mean¡­ Do I look like that kind of person?


    I had always strived to be gentlemanly around women¡­.


    As for whether I was seeding¡­ Well, I¡¯d rather not think about it.

 Chapter 84

    Chapter 84


    I decided to enter a contract with the duke for the selling of the herbs


    ¡°So that was how you were able to make herbs that were so useful when we were in the forest.¡±


    ¡°Yes, it was because of the testing I was able to do in advance. I¡¯m d that I was able to be of help.¡±


    ¡°Yes, it really did help us.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. To be honest, I was so tired that I did not want to walk anymore. But thanks to your herbs, Mr. Takumi, we were able to continue exploring, which led to discovering the fenrir.¡±


    ¡°It was that amazing!?¡±


    As Ms. ire and Sebastian talked about exploring the forest, Tilura interrupted them.


    ¡°Yes. It was Mr. Takumi¡¯s herb that saved the life of the fenrir you are holding right now, Tilura.¡±


    ¡°You really are amazing, Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°Kyau?¡±


    Ms. ire¡¯s deration resulted in Tilura looking at me with deep admiration¡­


    All I had done was test different things with Weed Cultivation¡­ The ones for fatigue and enhanced senses was one thing, but the herbs for healing the fenrir had been more of a gamble.


    And it had even caused me to faint¡­


    ¡°Still, now that we know of the possibility of overuse of the ability due to longer durations, it is clear that you have much to think about.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ For now, I will avoid trying to make anything with asting effect. But aside from that, I will also like to start making herbs that Ms. ire will be able to sell.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, does that mean you¡­?¡±


    I answered Sebastian while also bringing up the agreement that Ms. ire and I had previously discussed.


    I had already decided to agree to it, but hadn¡¯t been able to tell her yet.


    If Ms. ire, or the Liebert family business handled the sales of the herbs, then I would be able to earn an ie.


    And since I would be using Weed Cultivation, I could continue my research at the same time. It was two birds with one stone.


    I had been told that it was possible that I would make more money if I sold them myself, but I was greatly indebted towards Ms. ire and the family.


    While it wasn¡¯t much, I wanted to contribute something.


    Well, I also meant to avoid getting overwhelmed with work like in my old world. I would take things easy and go at my own pace.


    ¡°I¡¯ll do what I can manage without fainting. If that is fine, then I would like to make the contract to sell the herbs.¡±


    ¡°As a representative of the family, I would like to thank you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Oh, there is no need to thank me. If anything, I should be thanking you. After all, there is surely so much troublesome work that you are now taking on. If I am getting paid, then this will be a fairly easy job for me.¡±


    ¡°Of course, you will be paid. You can count on the Liebert house to deal with you honestly. I promise that you will be paid the appropriate amount. It has now been proven that using the Gift has some risks for you. And so we will not take you for granted or assume that it is easy.¡±


    I understood what she was trying to say, but this was not an ability that I originally had.


    It was something that I acquired suddenly, and so if I could make money off of it, then there was no way that I wouldn¡¯t see it as easy money.


    Well, perhaps I will get used to it one day¡­ I hope that I do.


    ¡°Now, Sebastian. We will have to discuss the matter with my father.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. We cannot start selling them without the master¡¯s permission. But, Lady ire¡­¡±


    ¡°I know¡­ When I talk to him about it, I must also prepare some excuses for turning down whatever matches he is thinking of. Yes?¡±


    ¡°Yes. You are currently staying in this vi in order to avoid seeing him for a while, but¡­ Who knows how many proposals have beening in the meantime¡­?¡±


    Sebastian now had a faraway look in his eyes.


    Ms. ire looked like she was steeling herself¡­ I had heard stories about this father¡­ But was he really that bad?


    ¡°Oh, I shall refuse them! Not just for Mr. Takumi¡¯s sake, but also for the Liebert family!¡±


    ¡°Indeed. We do owe a debt to Mr. Takumi. And for that reason, I, Sebastian¡­will do my utmost to cooperate!¡±


    What were they going on about¡­ Suddenly, Ms. ire and Sebastian had be very passionate.


    Did it really take so much preparation just to¡­turn down a marriage proposal..?


    Well, I had never been involved in any talk of arranged marriages myself, so I wouldn¡¯t know.


    But when I looked at the others, Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda were shaking their heads with exasperation.


    Leo and the fenrir lookedpletely uninterested, and Tilura¡­ Huh? Tilura was leaning forward with her face against the table.


    They had said something about arranging a marriage for her as well¡­ So maybe that is why.


    It was just then that a growling sound echoed through the drawing room.


    Ah¡­


    ¡°¡­What was that sound?¡±


    Ms. ire, you shouldn¡¯t suspect Tilura immediately every time¡­ Tilura had raised her head from the table and shook it violently in denial.


    Oh, well. I couldn¡¯t let her take the fall for this.


    ¡°¡­Sorry. That was my stomach¡­¡±


    It was so embarrassing that I had to whisper it.


    Having to admit it in front of so many people was like a punishment for losing a game¡­


    ¡°¡­So it was you, Mr. Takumi¡­ Pardon me.¡±


    ¡°It cannot be helped. Mr. Takumi slept for three days after fainting, and so he must be very hungry.¡±


    ¡°I was sleeping for¡­what? Two days!?¡±


    ¡°Yes. You slept for two whole days after fainting, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    I had slept for two days¡­


    Then it was no wonder that I was starving.


    ¡°Well, your timing is perfect. Let¡¯s eat then. Lyra, Gelda.¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    Apparently, we had been talking for quite a while, and when I looked out the window, the sun had mostly set.


    So it was the perfect time to start making dinner.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, you should eat here in the drawing room today.¡±


    ¡°Very well.¡±

 Chapter 85

    Chapter 85


    We found out the fenrir¡¯s gender


    Today, we would be eating in the drawing room instead of the dining hall.


    It wasn¡¯t that I was too hungry to be able to move, but I did feel quite sluggish. And so I was grateful.


    Nutrition really was important¡­ As I thought this, I took another sip of the tea that Ms. Lyra had poured me before leaving the room.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, Mr. Takumi. We should have had something ready for you as soon as you woke up.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. I woke up at an odd hour. It is fine. Besides, I had a lot to talk about, so this is perfect.¡±


    ¡°Sebastian was especially interested in your Gift.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha.¡±


    ¡°Lady ire, I was not that¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh? Who was the one who was reading all of the books in this mansion after Mr. Takumi fainted? Besides, you were about to topple over with how you leaned forward in order to listen to Mr. Takumi.¡±


    In my opinion, Ms. ire had been listening with equal intensity¡­


    Well, she did like to tease Sebastian, and so I wouldn¡¯t say anything.


    It wasn¡¯t until Tilura pointed out that everyone, including her sister, had been listening with rapt attention, that she finally stopped.


    Sometimes children just bluntly said what adults couldn¡¯t¡­


    Though, it waspletely inconsequential on this asion.


    After some time passed, the food was ready, and it was brought in by Ms. Lyra and Ms. ire.


    As I had slept for two days, it had been decided that it would not be good for me to eat anything heavy, and so I was served what looked like oatmeal wrapped in cabbage.


    I didn¡¯t real like oatmeal when it was sweet, but the rolled cabbage that Ms. Helena made went well with the consomme soup, and it was delicious.


    And in spite of their concerns, I ended up eating twice as much as Ms. ire and the others.


    ¡­Leo gave me a look of exasperation and sighed. That was a little shocking¡­


    After that, we rested during our usual tea time.


    Ms. Lyra¡¯s tea was always delicious.


    Ms. ire and I sat around the table as we drank, but Tilura and the fenrir had gone to y with Leo as soon as they finished eating.


    ¡°By the way, Ms. ire¡­¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    Ms. ire put her cup down and looked at me.


    Perhaps it was because she was a noblewoman, the mere gesture of holding her teacup was beautiful.


    Oh, never mind that.


    Sometimes I would talk to Ms. ire, only to find her staring back at me oddly, because I became distracted by her beauty for a few seconds. I had to be careful.


    Sebastian seemed to be smirking in the back, but I ignored him.


    ¡°Have you chosen a name for the fenrir?¡±


    ¡°A name¡­ Indeed¡­ It is quite inconvenient when you don¡¯t have one.¡±


    Well, even without a name, there was only one fenrir here that yed with Tilura aside from Leo. So we wouldn¡¯t have trouble calling it¡­ But yes, it would be nice to have a name.


    It wasn¡¯t until I named Leo after rescuing her that we really felt like a family.


    Of course, I had named her without even knowing she was a girl¡­ And I remember regretting it just a little¡­


    ¡°Perhaps it won¡¯t be that inconvenient, but having a proper name would make things feel more friendly.¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed¡­ I do think it should have a name¡­ However, what would be a good name for it?¡±


    Apparently, Ms. ire did not have any candidates in mind.


    Yes, you would want to give it a lot of thought if you had to name someone else.


    Though, I was one to talk, as I had named Leo on impulse.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. What made you decide on Leo¡¯s name?¡±


    ¡°Me? Uh¡­¡±


    It would be a little awkward to exin it right in front of Leo¡­ Oh, well.


    ¡°It was just on a whim. And then I found out that Leo was a girl, even though I had given her a boyish name¡­¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s quite¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Leo sighed¡­


    Sorry, Leo.


    But if anything, now that Leo was a SIlver Fenrir, the name sounded cool and appropriate.


    ¡°Sebastian. Do you have any good ideas?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­¡±


    Oh, apparently Ms. ire decided that I would be of no use.


    I suppose that I couldn¡¯t me her after picking a name like Leo.


    ¡°In that case, shouldn¡¯t we find out if the fenrir is male or female?¡±


    ¡°Ah, yes. I haven¡¯t even checked that yet.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s right. That is what we need to learn first.¡±


    Neither Ms. ire or Sebastian had checked to see the fenrir¡¯s gender.


    It was a good thing too, or they might have just repeated the mistake that I had made.


    ¡°Come over here, fenrir.¡±


    ¡°Kyau?¡±


    Ms. ire called the fenrir. And though it had been ying with Tilura, it answered her call obediently.


    Training it would likely be quite easy then.


    Well, I didn¡¯t know if the fenrir even needed to be trained. Leo seemed to have been instructing it ever since they met in the forest¡­


    ¡°Can you tell, Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ This fenrir is female.¡±


    Ms. ire held the fenrirs paws up so that its belly was exposed to Sebastian.


    Fenrirs were very vicious monsters¡­and yet it allowed itself to be held in such a defenseless position¡­ Was it because it was young? Or that it trusted Ms. ire? Or was it because of Leo¡¯s training¡­


    ¡°Female. So then it¡¯s a girl, just like Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°And me!¡±


    Tilura shouted happily when she found out that the fenrir was a girl.


    Leo nodded as if this was old news to her.


    So Leo already knew. Well, they were a very simr species.


    Though, Ms. ire and the others seemed to think that fenrirs and Silver Fenrirs werepletely different.

 Chapter 86

    Chapter 86


    We decided on a name for the fenrir


    ¡°So the fenrir is a girl¡­ All right, you can go now.¡±


    ¡°Kyau, kyau.¡±


    Ms. ire put the fenrir down, but perhaps it wanted to y with her, as it jumped on the neighboring chair and barked.


    ¡°Oh, if you insist.¡±


    Said Ms. ire. But her expression was the definition of gentle as she petted the fenrir.


    ¡°A name¡­ Do you have any good suggestions?¡±


    ¡°Indeeed¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­¡±


    I asked, and both Ms. ire and Sebastian seemed to be thinking about it.


    In the meantime, Ms. ire continued to pet the fenrir, who seemed very pleased to be getting her attention.


    ¡°Yes¡­ What about Naru?¡±


    Sebastian was the first to make a suggestion¡­but it was a very questionable one¡­


    ¡°Sebastian, I don¡¯t know what you are thinking with that name. A girl¡¯s name should be prettier.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes, mydy¡­¡±


    Ah, he looked crestfallen.


    Up until now, he had been standing behind Ms. ire and facing the rest of the room. But he turned around and hung his head low towards the wall.


    Apparently, he had no talent for thinking of names¡­ In spite of being a butler who could do almost everything else perfectly¡­


    Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda looked like they were trying to supress giggles. I was starting to feel bad for Sebastian.


    ¡°¡­Naru¡­ I think it is pretty¡­¡±


    He muttered to the wall¡­ Uh¡­ Yes, it¡¯s sort of cute. Yes.


    And so cheer up, Sebastian!


    ¡°I know!¡±


    After her rejection of Sebastian¡¯s idea, Ms. ire paid no mind to his dreariness and eximed loudly.


    ¡°What name have you thought of?¡±


    ¡°I will call her Sherry. It means ¡®darling one¡¯!¡±


    Sherry, huh? It¡¯s a good, pretty name.


    Unlike Sebastian, Ms. ire had the right sensibilities for choosing names.


    ¡°Fenrir. From now on you are called Sherry.¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    Ms. ire looked the fenrir straight in the face and said her name.


    The fenrir, who was now Sherry, nodded in agreement.


    Just then, within Ms. ire¡¯s grasp, Sherry suddenly started to glow.


    ¡°What!?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!?¡±


    ¡°Sherry!?¡±


    ¡°Lady ire!¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s so bright!¡±


    Sebastian moved close to Ms. ire protectively.


    Ms. ire was so surprised that she let go of Sherry and just stared at her.


    Leo and Tilura also raised their voices in shock.


    I too had not expected Sherry to start glowing¡­ And so I stared as well.


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    As Sherry unleashed a light that filled the drawing room, she let out a loud bark.


    And when her voice died down, the light began to fade and then disappear entirely.


    ¡°Sherry¡­ What was that?¡±


    Ms. ire asked as she looked at Sherry with a stunned expression. But Sherry just tilted her head as if she had no clue.


    What was that light¡­


    ¡°Leo. Do you know what that was?¡±


    When in doubt, ask the Silver Fenrir.


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    However, Leo also seemed to be puzzled. She did not know why Sherry had started glowing.


    Well, that was fine¡­ It wasn¡¯t like Leo knew everything.


    ¡°¡­Perhaps¡­¡±


    Oh? It looked like Sebastian had thought of something.


    When it came to these kinds of things, Sebastian¡¯s vast wealth of knowledge was very useful.


    ¡°Sebastian, do you know what happened?¡±


    ¡°I have heard of such a thing before. When making a monster your familiar, you give it a name. And if the monster epts it, the contract isplete. And the monster will glow in ordance with how powerful it is.¡±


    ¡°A familiar contract¡­¡±


    Now that I thought about it, when I first came to this world, Ms. ire had immediately assumed that Leo was a familiar.


    Also, I was astonished by the breadth of Sebastian¡¯s knowledge.


    ¡°Sherry¡­ Did you be my familiar?¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    Sherry nodded at Ms. ire¡¯s words, and then jumped on her as if to express her joy.


    ¡°Ahh! Oh, Sherry. You mustn¡¯t jump on me like that, as it is most rming.¡±


    ¡°Kyau! Kyau!¡±


    Still, Ms. ire looked quite happy as she petted Sherry. And Sherry seemed to really enjoying being held and petted by Ms. ire.


    ¡°So, Lady ire now has a familiar¡­¡±


    ¡°Is there a problem with that, Sebastian?¡±


    After the exnation, Sebastian just looked at Ms. ire and Sherry as if he could not believe what he was seeing.


    Ms. ire was the daughter of a duke.


    Perhaps having a monster as a familiar was something that was frowned upon.


    ¡°No, not really.¡±


    So there was nothing.


    I¡¯m not sure why I was even worried¡­


    ¡°If anything, this is quite wonderful. While she is not a Silver Fenrir, fenrirs are still proud and powerful monsters. She will be a perfect guard for you, mydy.¡±


    ¡°Yes, she could be like a guard.¡±


    Like a watchdog?


    Well, if she could protect Ms. ire, that was a good thing.


    However, when looking at Sherry yelping in Ms. ire¡¯s arms, I could not see this proud and powerful monster that Sebastian spoke of.


    ¡°Oh, but sister! I want one of these¡­familiars? Too!¡±


    Said Tilura jealousy as she watched her sister holding Sherry.


    ¡°Tilura, it is very difficult to make a contract with a familiar. And so you will just have to be satisfied with ying with Sherry. Go, Sherry.¡±


    ¡°Kyau.¡±


    Sherry did as instructed and scampered off towards Tilura in order to y with her.


    Leo also joined them.


    ¡°That being said, a contract with a familiar¡­ It¡¯s all thanks to you, Mr. Takumi, that I was able to do it.¡±


    ¡°No, not at all. I barely did anything.¡±


    I felt as if they were giving me credit for everything these days. But I really didn¡¯t deserve it.


    Besides, I wasn¡¯t used to hearing words of gratitude¡­

 Chapter 87

    Chapter 87


    Things became busy in the mansion


    ¡°Without you, Mr. Takumi¡­we should not have been able to find the fenrir¡­Sherry. Also, it was because of your Weed Cultivation that we were able to save her from certain death.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Yes, Sherry was helped with Weed Cultivation¡­ Though, I had no confidence in it at the time¡­ I was just hopeful.¡±


    While being thanked by a beautiful woman like Ms. ire was very pleasant¡­it was also a little embarrassing.


    Perhaps it was something I must get used to¡­


    That being said, how was one to get used to something like that?


    In any case, after discussing many things, such as the sales agreements, the familiar contract and other things, the day finally ended.


    As I had slept for two whole days, I was worried that I wouldn¡¯t be able to sleep. But after leaving the drawing room and taking a bath, I returned to my room with Leo and got into bed. And I fell asleep quite quickly.


    Leo also put just half of her body on the bed so that I could rest on her as if she was a pillow.


    She must still be worried about me.


    Thank you, Leo.


    I have a feeling that I¡¯ll have sweet dreams tonight.


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª-


    The next morning, I woke up and looked out the window. The weather was nice, and the sun¡¯s rays were almost blinding.


    I got out of bed and stretched my limbs while standing up.


    Yes, I had a good night¡¯s sleep thanks to having Leo¡¯s soft fur as a pillow.


    Though, I don¡¯t remember if I had any good dreams.


    With dreams, sometimes you remembered them, and sometimes you didn¡¯t.


    And even if you do remember them at first, you would forget about them quickly. Sometimes, you¡¯re not sure if you even saw it in the first ce.


    Well, some people say that everyone dreams when they are sleeping. And there are evaluations based on how you remember them and what you dreamed about, but I didn¡¯t know the details.


    It was with such nonsensical thoughts that I finished getting ready.


    Leo woke up around the time that I was washing my face. She pushed her paws out and stretched as she always did, and then watched me get ready while wagging her tail slowly.


    I was d to see that she was in a good mood.


    When I was finished, I left the room, thinking that breakfast would be ready soon.


    ¡°I¡¯ve be quite ustomed to living in this mansion now.¡±


    At first, I had found it quite awkward to live in such arge ce.


    And Ms. Lyra would often have to guide me from room to room.


    It wasn¡¯t that I had now memorized theyout of the whole house, but I could go to all the ces I was a regr at just fine.


    And there were not many ces in the house that I had any business in.


    And so I walked down the now familiar hallways and headed towards the dining hall. And then I saw that maids were rushing around busily near the entrance hall.


    I had to pass through it when going to the dining hall, and so I noticed it.


    ¡°Is something happening today?¡±


    I could not think of a reason for the maids to be rushing about like that.


    And though I thought it was strange, I continued to walk to the dining hall with Leo.


    I then knocked on the door and waited for a reply from the other side.


    ¡°Come in.¡±


    After being given permission, I opened the door and stepped inside.


    Ms. ire was already sitting at the table, and Sebastian was standing behind her.


    Ms. Lyra was standing next to the door I hade through¡­but Ms. Gelda wasn¡¯t here. Perhaps she was busy?


    Still, I greeted the others.


    ¡°Good morning. Ms. ire, Sebastian, Lyra.¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Sir.¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Sir.¡±


    After greeting them, I went over to my usual ce at the table and sat down.


    Leo also sat down next to me as usual.


    ¡°I see that Tilura isn¡¯t with us today. Did something happen?¡±


    Now that I thought about, Tilura hadn¡¯t woke me up today.


    She was usually the first one toe to my room in order to see Leo.


    ¡°She is still sleeping. Gelda just went to wake her up. Really¡­ It¡¯s because she stayed upte ying with Sherry¡­¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. I see.¡±


    Apparently, Tilura had continued to y with Sherry after I left.


    I wondered where Sherry was, and then noticed the white mass that was rolled up by Ms. ire¡¯s chair.


    Apparently, Sherry was also still sleepy after having stayed upte.


    ¡°Ms. ire, I would like to continue with my tests in your back garden again today. Is that alright?¡±


    ¡°¡­About that¡­ Mr. Takumi, something important is happening today.¡±


    As we had decided on this sales agreement, I wanted to get to work, and also continue my research. But it seemed that something else was happening.


    She looked rather serious. What could be the matter?


    ¡°I¡¯m sure you got a glimpse of it whening to this dining hall, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Uh, yes. I did. The maids were rushing around frantically.¡±


    So Ms. ire was aware of what was happening at the entrance hall.


    Well, she was the master of this mansion, so it was no wonder.


    ¡°Those maids are preparing to greet someone who is arriving today.¡±


    ¡°Today? Is it an important guest?¡±


    It must be a very important person for the maids to look so frantic.


    ¡­Perhaps I should stay in my room then¡­ I did not want to do something unpardonably rude towards any important guests of the duke¡­


    I still did not know anything about the manners of the upper ss in this world.


    ¡°It is someone who is very important for you as well, Mr. Takumi. And not really a guest, eigher.¡±


    ¡°Not a guest¡­ Important to me¡­ Who is it?¡±


    As I had only juste to this world, I had no acquaintances outside of this mansion.


    Well, there were the people from the shops, and the ones who petted Leo in the town of Ractos, but they were definitely not people who were important to me.

 Chapter 88

    Chapter 88


    Ms. ire¡¯s father wasing


    Ah, now that I thought about it, I hadn¡¯t picked up the clothes I ordered from the tailors¡­ We had been busy exploring the forest, and had no time to go¡­


    Still, in spite of what Ms. ire said, I could not think of anyone that fit the description. It was then that her face became even more serious, and she told me who it was.


    ¡­Oh, even Sebastian looked very serious now. Who could it be!?


    ¡°¡­Today¡­my father is returning to this house.¡±


    ¡°¡­Huh?¡±


    ¡°My¡­father.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, Lady ire¡¯s father¡­ His Grace the Duke of Liebert.¡±


    ¡­Ah.


    Well, this house would belong to her father, the duke. So it was hardly odd that he woulde here.


    And that would exin why the maids were in such a rush. They were preparing to greet their master.


    That was all fine. But was it really necessary for Ms. ire and Sebastian to look so somber?


    ¡°Uhh¡­ But why are you so serious?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­ My father ising¡­ He is bound to bring countless marriage proposals with him.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ And not just for Lady ire, but he¡¯ll want to arrange one for Lady Tilura as well¡­ As he has not been here for a while¡­they must have piled up considerably¡­¡±


    Ms. ire looked like she was in pain, and Sebastian had a far away look in his eyes.


    Indeed, I had heard that Ms. ire and Tilura found it very troublesome to keep turning such talks down.


    However, was it really as serious as they made it sound?


    ¡°¡­And you mean to refuse all of them?¡±


    ¡°Of course! It¡¯s too early to be discussing such things with Tilura! And even I¡­¡±


    ¡°Cough¡­ Lady ire.¡±


    ¡°Ah!¡±


    What was this¡­she seemed so tense.


    I understood why she would refuse for Tilura, but she had then trailed off and then nced towards me before blushing.


    Was there something on my face?


    Regardless, Sebastian had coughed loudly and Ms. ire was able topose herself.


    ¡°In any case, you will have to meet my father, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°After all, you have decided to enter an agreement with the Liebert house for the selling of the herbs. And so it¡¯s only natural that you meet with the master and discuss it directly.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ I understand that¡­¡±


    If there was a sales agreement, I would have to speak to the person who ranked the highest.


    However, I wondered if I would be all right, going out in front of Ms. ire¡¯s father¡­ I hoped that I wouldn¡¯t do anything rude.


    ¡°It¡¯s just that I¡­ I have no knowledge when ites to manners towards nobles¡­¡±


    ¡°As for that, you need not worry. My father isn¡¯t very sensitive about such things.¡±


    ¡°To put it simply¡­His Grace is a very¡­hearty person¡­ Some might even say, crude. ¡­As for me, I do wish he would put more effort into behaving like a duke¡­¡±


    ording to Ms. ire and Sebastian, he was not sensitive to manners, and would not scrutinize me in that way.


    Hearty¡­what kind of person was he¡­? When Ms. ire had confided in me in the forest, he had sounded like a good father.


    She said that he doted on them, and was clearly not a bad person.


    But then, I wasn¡¯t sure why he would keep bothering them with talk of marriage.


    ¡°Ha¡­ I wonder how many times I¡¯ll have to refuse him this time¡­¡±


    ¡°Considering how much time has passed, I predict that the number will be quite high.¡±


    Both Ms. ire and Sebastian looked quite gloomy.


    Refusing a marriage proposal did seem very troublesome¡­


    And since it wasing through her father¡­she might have to think of ways to do it without tarnishing his reputation.


    And the more there were, the harder it would be¡­ I suppose it was then understandable that Ms. ire and Sebastian were not looking forward to it.


    However, why was heing here so suddenly? I suppose I should ask about that.


    And so I turned to Ms. ire.


    ¡°Is there a reason that he ising here today?¡±


    ¡°That¡­¡±


    ¡°Allow me to exin. Early this morning, a messenger arrived from His Grace, telling us to prepare the mansion in order to wee him. The message said that he would arrive shortly after lunch.¡±


    Hmm. When important people traveled, they needed to give people time to prepare, and so they sent a message ahead of them.


    I didn¡¯t know if it was normal to do this with your own vi, but I suppose there were preparations that needed to be made here.


    The maids had looked very busy¡­so there must have been things to do.


    ¡°It is about one week to journey here from the main house¡­ I believe His Grace¡¯s purpose foring here is to see that Lady ire is safe.¡±


    ¡°Safe? That¡¯s why he ising all of the way here?¡±


    ¡°¡­Well¡­Mr. Takumi, do you remember your first meeting with Lady ire?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I do.¡±


    She had been so worried about Tilura, that she left the mansion by herself and went to look for herbs in the forest.


    Thinking back now, there were quite a lot of orcs in that forest, and so her actions seemed even more reckless.


    But it also showed how desperate she was to help her sister recover.


    ¡°As we servants were forming a search party of soldiers, we also sent a message to His Grace.¡±


    ¡°Hmm.¡±


    ¡°Really, Sebastian¡­¡±


    Ms. ire said admonishingly, but I felt that he was in the right here.


    They were obviously worried about her. And as their butler, it was his duty to send a report if she went off into a dangerous forest on her own.


    However, Ms. ire seemed to be aware of this as well. And so she sighed and looked down in resignation.


    Perhaps she knew that if she pushed it any further, Sebastian would be the one to admonish her.

 Chapter 89

    Chapter 89


    I wasn¡¯tfortable in my usual clothes


    ¡°We sent out a messenger from this mansion, and he likely headed here as soon as he heard what had happened.¡±


    It was nearly a week¡¯s journey.


    And he left immediately after another week passed¡­he would arrive today.


    I see¡­ So that means it¡¯s been two weeks since I came to this world¡­ I didn¡¯t expect to be reminded in this way.


    ¡°Once Lady ire was safe and returned to the mansion, thanks to your help, we sent out another messenger to His Grace, but¡­¡±


    ¡°But father would have left before that messenger arrived.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    He would have acted as soon as he received the first message.


    Either he was a man of action, or he worried about his daughters too much¡­ But it seemed a little rash for the head of a great house.


    Perhaps he should have at least waited for the second message.,. Well, I was not in a position to be saying anything.


    ¡°You know how father can be¡­ It is more likely that he felt it was a good opportunity to tell me about the marriage proposals that have been piling up.¡±


    ¡°But isn¡¯t heing because he is worried about you? Perhaps he has forgotten all about that?¡±


    ¡°No, Mr. Takumi. I can assure you that it is not the case.¡±


    ¡°Sebastian¡­¡±


    I suppose it was a kind of trust¡­ Both Ms. ire and Sebastian agreed that though he might havee out of concern for his daughter¡¯s safety, there was no doubt that he had other intentions foring¡­


    A few momentster, Ms. Gelda brought Tilura to the dining hall after waking her up.


    And then Leo, who had remained uninterested in our conversation, and the sleeping Sherry, got up and so we all ate.


    Once we were about halfway through breakfast, Tilura started to ask Ms. ire about why the maids were in such a rush. And upon hearing the reason, Tilura seemed to freeze.


    The breakfast continued in a dark and gloomy mood until we were finished.


    While it had been delicious¡­I couldn¡¯t really enjoy it amidst that atmosphere.


    Which made me feel bad for Ms. Helena.


    But I also felt bad for the father. The mere suggestion of his presence had caused the two daughters and butler to fall into a bleak mood¡­


    After breakfast, Ms. ire, Tilura, and Sebastian went to a different room in order to discuss strategies for dealing with the duke.


    It all seemed very overblown to me, but I just told myself that a young noblewoman likely had to do things in a proper way.


    In any case, as I would not be able to test Weed Cultivation in the back garden, I decided to return to my room with Leo.


    ¡°Well, what should we do?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    I wondered as I sat down on the edge of my bed, and petted Leo, who was lying on the floor.


    Leo looked at me questioningly with a tilt of her head, but I just patted her head as if she did not need to worry.


    So, Ms. ire¡¯s father, the duke, would arrive shortly after lunch.


    And since I was not able to use Weed Cultivation, I had quite a lot of time with nothing to do.


    I could just rest or y with Leo. But I found that I felt quite restless.


    It was likely due to nerves. For the first time, I was meeting someone in this world who had great authority as a noble.


    While Ms. ire was a noblewoman, she was not the head of the house. Besides, I had not known she was a noble when I first met her.


    Ah, now that I think about it¡­


    ¡°Ms. Lyra. Would these clothes be eptable for meeting the duke?¡±


    ¡°As Lady ire exined earlier, His Grace does care about such things. So I believe that you should be fine.¡±


    As she was charged with helping me, Ms. Lyra had followed us to my room. And ording to her, my clothes were fine.


    Still¡­ Even if they said he didn¡¯t care about such things, there was always the possibility that I could make a bad first impression if I wasn¡¯t dressed properly¡­


    Due to my work, I used to always wear a suit and tie.


    There were strict rules about dressing properly, even if you weren¡¯t outside. And so the idea of meeting someone important was making me nervous¡­


    ¡°If you are concerned about that¡­ Didn¡¯t you have some clothes tailored for you in Ractos?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I had a set made for me.¡±


    ¡°Then why don¡¯t you go and pick it up?¡±


    I see. I had asked the tailor to make clothes that were simr to the ones that I had borrowed from Sebastian.


    I had returned those clothes already, but the new ones were close enough to formal wear.


    And while I could just borrow from Sebastian again, now seemed like a bad time to bother him¡­I didn¡¯t know anything about rejecting marriage proposals¡­and did not want to get involved.


    ¡°Still, if you are going to go to the town of Ractos, you will have to hurry, or you will not make it back before His Grace¡¯s arrival.¡±


    ¡°As for that, you don¡¯t have to worry. Right, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Leo nodded as if to say that I could count on her. Yes, she was very reliable.


    Upon seeing this, Ms. Lyra nodded with satisfaction.


    ¡°I see. If you ride on the great Leo, then you will arrive in no time.¡±


    And so I took Leo and left the mansion.


    Before leaving, I asked Ms. Gelda to tell Ms. ire and the others that I was going to Ractos in order to pick up my clothes.


    They might worry about me if I left without saying anything.


    And so we walked to the gate, and then I got up onto Leo¡¯s back.


    ¡­And then¡­


    ¡°Ms. Lyra¡­ Could it be that you areing too?¡±


    ¡°Of course, I am. I was charged with taking care of you, Mr. Takumi. Besides, I must pay the tailor.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­that¡¯s right¡­ My apologies. Thank you.¡±


    Yes, there was the matter of payment.


    I had only paid for the clothes that I purchased and took back with me.


    And until the contract was settled, and I started to sell the herbs and earn an ie, I had no money whatsoever.


    And so I took Ms. Lyra, and we rode on Leo towards the town of Ractos.

 Chapter 90

    Chapter 90


    I picked up my clothes at the tailors


    It would take nearly an hour to reach the town of Ractos by carriage, but it was only half an hour with Leo.


    It would have likely been an even shorter trip if Leo ran at full speed, but if she did that, Ms. Lyra would have likely been thrown off.


    Speaking of Ms. Lyra, she had ridden on Leo quite a few times by now, and so she was able to keep calm and bnce on Leo¡¯s back without throwing her arms around me.


    ¡­It wasn¡¯t as if I was expecting her to¡­or anything¡­ Truly.


    Leo stopped right outside of the town, and we then made our way to the gate on foot.


    And while the gatekeeper stopped us, Ms. Lyra showed them a relief of the duke, and they let us through.


    Now that I thought about it, I was just some strange person walking around with a huge Silver Fenrir.


    It was no wonder that we would be stopped by the guards.


    I wonder if I could have some form of identification made? I would have to ask Ms. ire about thatter.


    After going through the gates, and feeling the gazes of the passersby on us, we went down the same road that Sebastian had led us until we reached the tailor.


    ¡°Wee¡­ Ah, Mr. Takumi. It¡¯s good to see you again. The clothes you ordered are ready.¡±


    It was the same man who took care of usst time¡­Mr. Halton, I think¡­ He appeared from the back of the shop.


    And he remembered who I was.


    Mr. Halton showed me the clothes, and I tried them on.


    If I had anyints regarding size andfort, he would be able to make adjustments here.


    In the meantime, Ms. Lyra dealt with the matter of payment.


    Sorry, I¡¯ll return it as soon as I have money from selling herbs¡­


    As the trousers were a little long, I had them fixed, and then I left the store while wearing the newly tailored clothes.


    I would carry my old clothes with me, as it would be too much of a hassle to change when we got back.


    Thinking about it now, I was rather grateful to Ms. ire for having insisted that I have at least one set of clothes made. It was with such thoughts that we made our way back to the mansion.


    It was nearly time to meet the master.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. It suits you very well.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    Even if she was just being polite, I thanked Ms. Lyra as we left the town of Ractos behind us.


    It would likely be just before midday when we got back.


    I was d that there would be plenty of time¡­ Had I been morete in realizing it, even riding on Leo might not have been fast enough to get the clothes.


    Well, they had all insured me that the duke would not mind, but I suppose that I did.


    I was finally getting used to not having to wear a suit everywhere, but in times like these, I felt morefortable in formal clothes.


    And so I had Leo run swiftly once again, and we arrived at the mansion with time to spare.


    Thanks, Leo.


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I patted Leo on the back to show my gratitude.


    Leo looked quite satisfied by this.


    Next to me, Ms. Lyra also petted Leo.


    And like this, we walked into the mansion.


    Next time, maybe I would join Leo as she yed with Sherry and Tilura.


    Inside, preparations must have beenpleted, as the floor was shining brightly, and the maids were inspecting the area around the stairs and seemed to be content with their work.


    I suppose it was a final inspection after cleaning.


    It was no longer frantic like it was this morning.


    After making note of this, I returned to my room and put down my old clothes.


    Just then, there was a knock on the door.


    ¡°Come in.¡±


    ¡°Excuse me.¡±


    It was Ms. Gelda who entered.


    ¡°Ah, Ms. Gelda. We just returned.¡±


    ¡°Wee back, Mr. Takumi. I ryed the message to Lady ire.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    I was d that she had got the message, and thanked Ms. Gelda.


    ¡°But we didn¡¯t expect you to return so quickly¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, it¡¯s because Leo did her best.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Ms. Gelda had seemed puzzled at first, but then she looked at Leo and realization spread across her face.


    Now that I think about it, I hadn¡¯t told Ms. Gelda that I would be riding on Leo.


    Well, we were in quite a rush. And so I had only been thinking about notifying Ms. ire.


    ¡°If you rode on the great Leo, that would exin things. ¡­Also, Mr. Takumi, lunch will be ready soon, so pleasee to the dining hall.¡±


    ¡°I understand.¡±


    So that was why Ms. Gelda hade.


    After that, she left the room with Ms. Lyra.


    It was just me and Leo left.


    ¡°Thanks for your help today, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Leo replied, looking a little bashful.


    I had thanked Leo and petted her earlier, but I did so again here.


    Though we were buddies, I did not want to take being together or her allowing me to ride on her for granted.


    And so after patting her thoroughly on the head, I left the room and headed for the dining hall.


    Surely Ms. ire and the others had finished talking by now?


    While Leo and I walked down the hall, we saw Ms. ire, Tilura, and Sebastian walking out into the hallway as well.


    As they wereing from the opposite direction, they were likely going to the dining hall as well.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, I heard that you went to Ractos.¡±


    ¡°Those clothes suit you very well.¡±


    ¡°You look good!¡±


    ¡°Thank you. I went with Ms. Lyra and Leo to pick them up at the tailor.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Gelda told me about that. I hope there were no problems while you were there?¡±


    ¡°There were a few small adjustments to be made, but it¡¯s veryfortable, and I have noints.¡±


    Ms. ire and Tilura praised the formal, tailored clothes as I told Sebastian about how it went.


    ¡°Now His Grace will have no reason to criticize¡­ Of course, he is not likely to do so in the first ce¡­¡±


    ¡°Father barely even cares about his own clothes¡­¡±


    ¡°Father¡­sometimes smells¡­¡±


    As Ms. Lyra said, it probably didn¡¯t matter what I was wearing.


    Well, the biggest reason was that I wanted to feelfortable in these new clothes. And so I would continue to wear them.

 Chapter 91

    Chapter 91


    I met with the head of the Liebert Family


    Still¡­to be so indifferent about your own clothes¡­ What kind of person was this¡­? He had been described as hearty.


    In any case, Tilura. I hope you won¡¯t say such things right in front of him?


    I think it was one of the top 3 things a daughter can say to her father that would shock him the most¡­


    It was then that I swore that if I ever had a daughter in the future, I would be careful to be clean and tidy.


    And so unlike breakfast time, we all entered the dining hall in a rxed mood.


    Apparently, they hade up with good strategies on how to deal with the duke.


    Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda were in the room and serving the food.


    After that, we ate until we were quite full, and then we rested and drank some of Ms. Lyra¡¯s tea as we waited for the duke¡¯s arrival.


    Immediately after lunch, a maid entered the room and announced that the house had finished preparations for weing their master.


    They must have been very busy¡­ My hat was off to them.


    ¡°Any time now¡­¡±


    ¡°Lady ire, as we discussed.¡±


    ¡°I know.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m getting nervous.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyau?¡±


    Sebastian was saying something to Ms. ire. It was probably about what she was going to say in regards to the marriage proposals.


    Tilura looked nervous about meeting her father after being away for so long. But out of everyone, I was clearly the most nervous, as I was seeing him for the first time.


    Even if the others had all assured me that he was careless or unconcerned with details, this was still a nobleman.


    They say that your first impression is important, and I did not want this to be a failure.


    As for Leo, she was leisurely drinking her milk. Sherry was riding on top of Leo¡¯s back and looking at everyone as if wondering what was going to happen now.


    Well, Leo did not seem like the type to get nervous while meeting people.


    As for Sherry, she was too young to know the significance of meeting someone who is important.


    Or perhaps it didn¡¯t matter, and they just didn¡¯t get nervous around humans to begin with.


    As I thought of such things, the door of the dining hall opened and a butler entered.


    ¡°His Grace has arrived.¡±


    And with those words, I could sense the room growing even more tense.


    It was one thing for me and the servants to be this way, but Ms. ire and Tilura were just meeting their father¡­


    Sebastian gestured for Ms. ire to move forward, and Tilura and I got to our feet.


    Leo and Sherry followed suit. Leo took her position next to me, and Sherry moved next to Ms. ire.


    ¡°¡­Let¡¯s go then. Mr. Takumi, Tilura, Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Ms. ire.¡±


    ¡°Yes, My Lady.¡±


    ¡°Let¡¯s go.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Kyau?¡±


    Leo and Sherry were just as oblivious as before, and did not understand what the fuss was about. But there was no time to exin, as we left the dining hall.


    But really, it was just the master of the house. Why was this the atmosphere of people going to fight the final boss in a game¡­?


    I was one to talk, since I was just as nervous. But this was just a family reunion, and not an actual fight.


    Yet such thoughts were not enough to calm my nerves, and like that, we came out into the entrance hall.


    Dozens of maids and butlers stood in a row here. There were so many, that I wondered if the entire household was present.


    Though, I was quite sure that it actually took many more people to manage a mansion of this size, so it was likely just those who were free at this time.


    Ah, Ms. Helena was here too.


    And I saw Phillip and Nichs near the door.


    ¡°His Grace, Duke Ekenhart Liebert has arrived!¡±


    Rang a voice from just outside, and everyone in the hall straightened their backs.


    I didn¡¯t know what I was supposed to do, but I copied the servants and fixed my posture as well.


    I was currently standing behind Ms. ire and Tilura, and next Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda.


    Still, his name was Ekenhart, huh?


    I had not been told his name before this. Still, the name gave the impression of a beautiful gentleman.


    Phillip and Nichs opened the doors from both sides, and then a man walked in, followed by three armored guards.


    ¡°Wee back, Your Grace, Duke Ekenhart!¡±


    ¡°Mmm.¡±


    The servants all raised their voices in unison and greeted their master.


    Ekenhart saw this and nodded. Then he turned to look at Ms. ire.


    Ms. ire and Tilura stepped forward.


    Sebastian was right behind them.


    ¡°It is good to have you back, father. I¡¯m afraid I must have caused you much distress, and for that I am sorry.¡±


    ¡°Wee back, father.¡±


    ¡°ire¡­I am just d that you are all right¡­ You two¡­have grown even prettier than when Ist saw you¡­ It makes me very happy.¡±


    Oh¡­? This man was covering his face with hisrge hands and crying¡­ What happened?


    In fact, he was not really the handsome gentleman I had been expecting.


    His mouth was covered in stubble, and his beard and sideburns were connected. He had a rough, wild look.


    Even his clothes made me realize that the others had been speaking the truth. Had he been walking around town, no one would suspect that he was a nobleman.


    ¡­In fact, had he been carrying an axe, people might mistake him for a bandit¡­ That was what the old man looked like. Though, he was currently crying at the sight of his daughters.


    Had he only trimmed his beard, he could look like a dandy older man¡­ I mused while looking at the sobbing Ekenhart.


    That being said, this crying had the effect of erasing any sense of nervousness that one might have felt from his physical appearance.


    Well, he still looked strong. And you would probably go flying off into the air if he hit you. But this was Ms. ire¡¯s father, and he wouldn¡¯t do anything like that¡­ I think.


    However, to think that Ms. ire came from him¡­ She must take after her mother.


    ¡°Father, I wish you wouldn¡¯t cry in front of other people like this.¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­I¡¯m sorry.¡±


    ¡°Your Grace, had you waited, you would have received a message that exined that Lady ire is well.¡±


    Upon hearing this, Mr. Ekenhart roughly wiped away the tears and stopped crying.


    Yes, Sebastian did say that he had sent out a second message after Ms. ire returned.

 Chapter 92

    Chapter 92


    Mr. Ekenhart appeared to be scared of Leo


    ¡°Yes, I received it on my way here. But even if I knew that ire was safe, I had still traveled all this way. Besides, I thought it would be nice to see my daughters again. And so I rode as fast as I could!¡±


    ¡°Father¡­¡±


    So Mr. Ekenhart knew that Ms. ire was fine.


    Still, after seeing how much of a doting parent he was, I would have thought that he¡¯d be against sending his daughters off to be married. I wonder what the reason was?


    ¡°And I see we have someone new here?¡±


    ¡°Ah, this is Mr. Takumi, father.¡±


    ¡°Your Grace, he is the one who helped Lady ire.¡±


    Oh, the conversation had shifted to me.


    And so I took a step forward and bowed.


    I was just imitating the way I had seen others bow, and so I wasn¡¯t sure if I was doing it correctly. I was no longer nervous, but that didn¡¯t help things much right now.


    As for Leo, she remained in the back and was being petted by Ms. Lyra.


    ¡°It¡¯s an honor to meet you. I am Takumi Hirooka. Please call just me Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Ah, so you are Takumi. You have my gratitude for helping ire. Sebastian told me all about you in his report.¡±


    Apparently, Sebastian had included information about me in his second message to Mr. Ekenhart.


    Mr. Ekenhart nowughed as he moved next to me and patted me on the shoulder.


    In fact, he was really just pping me. And though I understood that he was happy that his daughter was safe, it actually kind of hurt.


    ¡°You must be quite a man then. You haven¡¯t even flinched while I¡¯ve been hitting your shoulder.¡±


    ¡°Um¡­well¡­uh¡­¡±


    No, it was that the pain of it was keeping me in ce¡­


    Also, testing a person by hitting their shoulders and seeing their reaction¡­ I wish he would stop. Besides, what exactly did that say about a person anyway¡­?


    ¡°Father. Mr. Takumi looks like he¡¯s in pain.¡±


    ¡°Ah, forgive me. I might have gone too far.¡±


    ¡°No, I¡¯m fine.¡±


    He finally stopped when Ms. ire warned him.


    ¡­I hope that I¡¯m not bruised¡­ I¡¯ll have to check it when I take a bathter.


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Perhaps it was because she had witnessed this, or perhaps she just wanted Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s attention, but Leo suddenly moved away from Ms. Lyra, and stood between the duke and I.


    Mr. Ekenhart looked surprised at being pushed back, and then he realized what he was looking at and his face turned to that of surprise.


    ¡°That¡­is that a Silver Fenrir¡­?¡±


    ¡°It is, father.¡±


    Ms. ire answered his question for me.


    Sebastian might not have added this bit of information to his report then. Because Mr. Ekenhart was clearly stunned.


    Well, who wouldn¡¯t be with something as big as Leo right in front of them.


    Not only that, but as the head of the Liebert family, he must know more about Silver Fenrirs than most.


    ¡°Why is a Silver Fenrir here¡­ And¡­does it not attack people?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Leo barked as if in answer to his words. But this just caused the duke to jump.


    His reaction reminded me of Ms. Gelda when we first came here¡­ He was very hesitant.


    ¡°Your Grace, the great Leo is Mr. Takumi¡¯s familiar, would never harm anyone. At least, unless something is trying to harm Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    As Sebastian exined this to Mr. Ekenhart, Leo nodded with agreement.


    ¡­Though, I saw her as a buddy, not a familiar.


    It¡¯s not as if we had a contract like Ms. ire and Sherry.


    ¡°I-I see¡­ Still, a Silver Fenrir that obeys a human¡­¡±


    ¡°We were also astonished by this. But perhaps that can be discussedter. It would not be good to continue to stand here¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Then we must go to the drawing room. As my study is not big enough to amodate this Silver Fenrir¡­er, the great Leo, is it?¡±


    ¡°Very well. I will have the drawing room prepared immediately.¡±


    Answered Sebastian, and he and a few servants left the entrance hall.


    Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda were with him. I suppose they were going to prepare the tea.


    ¡°Now then¡­while I will learn about the great Leoter¡­ ire, what is that thing at your feet¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, this is a fenrir. And she is my familiar now. Say hello, Sherry.¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Sherry and Leo are so cute!¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart had noticed Sherry, who was sitting at Ms. ire¡¯s feet.


    Well, she was about as big as a medium-sized dog, but clearly not one.


    Ms. ire scooped up the sitting fenrir and introduced her to Mr. Ekenhart.


    Sherry sure was polite¡­I think. But she did bark once. In the meantime, Tilura was boasting about Leo and Sherry to her father.


    ¡°A familiar¡­when did this¡­ Is this also rted to Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Not only did Mr. Takumi save me, but he also saved Sherry.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ It looks like we will have a lot to discuss.¡±


    Maybe it was because Sherry wasn¡¯t veryrge, but Mr. Ekenhart didn¡¯t look too timid around her. Perhaps the fact that she was being carried by Ms. ire had something to do with it.


    As for Leo, he still looked nervous whenever he nced towards her. Was it her size or was it because she was a Silver Fenrir?


    Leo really wasn¡¯t scary at all¡­ But it was his first time seeing her, and so it couldn¡¯t be helped.


    We would just have to go slowly, like we did with Ms. Gelda.


    ¡°Your Grace, the drawing room is ready for you.¡±


    ¡°Good. Let¡¯s go then, as there is much to talk about. ¡­You three. Good work. You can go and rest now.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Your Grace!¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart dismissed the three guards who hade to the mansion with him. They bowed and headed in the direction of the other maids.


    They were probably going to some resting room. Mr. Ekenhart had said that he rode here as fast as he could, so it must have been very tiring.

 Chapter 93

    Chapter 93


    <strong>I talked about everything that had happened</strong>


    Now that I think about it¡­ When Mr. Ekenhart had said that there was a lot to talk about, Ms. ire, Tilura, and Sebastian¡¯s faces had tensed up a little¡­


    I suppose it was because they thought he was talking about the marriage proposals?


    ¡°Well then, let¡¯s go, father.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. Mr. Takumi¡­and good Leo. Please tell me about what happened in the drawing room.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    But Ms. ire¡¯s face switched to a smile in an instant, and she led her father to the drawing room. Mr. Ekenhart then told me and Leo to follow.


    I could tell by the way that he addressed Leo that he was still nervous around her.


    We both answered and then followed them to the drawing room.


    In the meantime, the servants also began to leave in order to get back to their work.


    Good work, all of you. I hope that next time, I will be able to watch you practice your greeting.


    They were all in perfect sync, and so I thought it must be interesting to see if they were so perfect when practicing.


    Well, if they even did practice.


    We then entered the drawing room and sat down at the table.


    Mr. Ekenhart sat in the center, while Ms. ire and Tilura sat on either side. Sebastian stood right behind him.


    Ms. ire was holding Sherry.


    I sat so that I would be facing everyone, and then Leo sat to the side, where a few chairs had been removed to make space for her.


    Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda were waiting by the wall, so that they would be ready to pour some more tea when needed.


    ¡­I suppose I was ced here as my and Leo¡¯s story was seen as the most important. But it made me a little nervous to be in this position¡­


    Mr. Ekenhart was looking at me sternly and head on, and while Ms. ire and Tilura were smiling, they seemed a little stiff, as if ready for a serious discussion.


    It was starting to feel like an ufortable job interview.


    ¡°Now, since we¡¯re all here and settled, let¡¯s hear what Mr. Takumi has to say. Why is there a Silver Fenrir with you? They are monsters that do not obey humans.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    And so for a while after that, I told him everything that I had already told Ms. ire and the others.


    How I hade from what I thought was another world, and that it was where I had first found Leo. How I had raised her. How I had suddenly woken up in the forest, and that Leo had turned into a Silver Fenrir. And how we wandered through the forest, and then encountered Ms. ire as she was being attacked by an orc.


    Mr. Ekenhart looked very distressed when I told him about the attack, but when I exined how Leo had saved her, his eyes welled up with tears and he thanked her.


    He clearly cared about Ms. ire a lot.


    Though, the sight of this unkempt, bandit-like man crying had quite the impact¡­


    And then I talked about my Gift, about exploring the forest with Ms. ire, and about meeting Sherry. Sebastian also added to the story by telling him about how I had likely fainted due to using the Gift too much. And like that, I finished telling him everything.


    Mr. Ekenhart had looked very agitated when I talked about Ms. ire¡¯s search for the fenrir, but he quickly calmed down, thanks to Ms. ire and Sebastian¡¯s efforts.


    Yes, a father would be worried about his beloved daughter going deep into a dangerous forest.


    ¡°¡­I see¡­ I understand your position now, Mr. Takumi. Still, whether it¡¯s going into the forest alone to help Tilura, or taking the fenrir with you, so that it¡¯s not attacked by monsters, you really are a sweet child, ire¡­ And Tilura, I¡¯m so d that you are better¡­¡±


    After everything I said¡­after all of Ms. ire, Tilura, and Sebastian¡¯s supplementary information, and Leo¡¯s nodding and barking, that was the first thing Mr. Ekenhart said¡­


    I understand that he doted on his daughters, but¡­ Was that really the right reaction for the master of the house? I was starting to worry about the Liebert family.


    Well, perhaps it was a good thing for a father to think about his daughters more than anything.


    ¡°As Leo is here as proof, I must believe everything that you¡¯ve said, Mr. Takumi. After all, our family has strong ties with the Silver Fenrir.¡±


    Ms. ire had told me all about that.


    How the founder had befriended a Silver Fenrir.


    And so Mr. Ekenhart believed that I came from another world and that I had the Gift.


    It was because Leo was here with me.


    Obviously, I could easily prove that I had the Gift, but there was no way to prove that I was from another world¡­


    I suppose I could make a show of what knowledge I had, but even that wasn¡¯t evidence.


    ¡°Now tell me¡­Mr. Takumi¡­ Can you be sure¡­that your Leo will not hurt anyone?¡±


    ¡°Yes, it should be fine. Leo is very fond of people, and will not bite without good reason. Isn¡¯t that right, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I said with a smile to the still suspicious duke. And then I asked Leo for confirmation.


    Leo barked in agreement.


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°Father. Leo has been very good to us. Don¡¯t worry, she will not harm anyone.¡±


    ¡°Leo is so cute. She lets me ride on her when she runs.¡±


    Ms. ire and Tilura tried to persuade him as well.


    ¡°Tilura¡­ So you rode on a Silver Fenrir¡­? And you were not hurt?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Leo is so gentle. She ran carefully so that I wouldn¡¯t fall off!¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    So Tilura had noticed that Leo had adjusted her speed while running.


    Again, Leo nodded her head in agreement.


    ¡°I came here because I haven¡¯t seen you two in a while¡­ And now there is a Silver Fenrir here, and ire has a fenrir familiar¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart muttered in a troubled voice. Well, I could understand how he felt. Even if I was the one who was mostly responsible for all of it.

 Chapter 94

    Chapter 94


    <strong>I asked him why he kept bringing marriage proposals</strong>


    It was only natural for Mr. Ekenhart to feel troubled.


    Some strange man was suddenly close to his daughter, and that man had a Silver Fenrir, a monster that wasn¡¯t supposed to obey anyone.


    Not only that, but there was even a fenrir, and they were also feared as vicious monsters. But his daughter imed that it was now her familiar. This would give anyone a headache.


    Still, he kept calm and sipped the tea that Ms. Lyra had poured, and we continued to talk.


    Of course, I had said everything that was important, so it was more of a casual chat that included Ms. ire, Tilura, and Sebastian.


    Though, it also seemed that he was using this idle chatter to hide his unease with the situation.


    Well, at the very least, Mr. Ekenhart seemed to like me well enough. So I was relieved.


    It made me feel even more foolish for having worried so much about manners and formal clothes.


    Though, I¡¯m sure Leo¡¯s presence had a lot to do with his trust in me.


    ¡°¡­Now, I must change the subject¡­¡±


    The time had passed peacefully for a while, but then Mr. Ekenhart suddenly changed the subject.


    Immediately, Ms. ire, Tilura, and Sebastian went rigid, and I could tell that they were bracing themselves.


    ¡°ire, Tilura. I think it¡¯s about time to make a decision. And so I brought you some offers.¡±


    ¡°¡­Father¡­¡±


    ¡°Offers¡­¡±


    ¡°Your Grace¡­¡±


    To no one¡¯s surprise, Mr. Ekenhart brought up the matter of marriage.


    Ms. ire and Tilura sighed audibly.


    Even Sebastian was sighing. Though, he did it subtly, so that his master wouldn¡¯t hear. But I didn¡¯t miss it.


    They had told me about how he would bring so many offers, and that it was always difficult to refuse every single one. So it was understandable.


    ¡°Father¡­about these offers¡­¡±


    ¡°You will not be able to reject these ones. After all, I¡¯ve brought you the best of the best this time. Besides, I need you to decide soon. For your own benefit, and for mine.¡±


    It seemed that Mr. Ekenhart was especially confident this time.


    And so even though Ms. ire had discussed this in advance, she was overwhelmed by his fervor, and became speechless. Even Tilura had an expression of resignation.


    However, I still did not understand why Mr. Ekenhart felt so strongly about it.


    It looked to me that he loved his daughters deeply.


    ¡­Maybe even too much, as he became emotional quickly. But perhaps most fathers were like that. I wouldn¡¯t know.


    But would a loving father be so eager to have his daughters go out and get married?


    Usually a doting father would want to keep his daughters for as long as possible¡­


    Well, that was what people thought back in my world.


    ¡­I might as well ask him then.


    Perhaps it would be a rude question, but at this point, I had learned that Mr. Ekenhart didn¡¯t care much about manners.


    He wasn¡¯t going to change his opinion of me over one question.


    ¡°Duke Ekenhart.¡±


    ¡°Just call me Mr. I¡¯m sure that¡¯s much easier for you? Besides, since you have a Silver Wolf with you, your position could be seen as being above a duke.¡±


    Sebastian had said something like that before.


    Because I had a Silver Fenrir, I ranked higher than a duke.


    Well, that wasn¡¯t important right now.


    ¡°Uh, Mr. Ekenhart. Why are you so insistent on having Ms. ire and Tilura get married?¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Have they not told you the reason?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ve only heard that you bring numerous offers, but not the reason¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ I thought that ire would have told you.¡±


    ¡°No, father. In fact, you haven¡¯t even told me why you are so insistent.¡±


    Apparently, Ms. ire didn¡¯t know the reason for it either.


    Mr. Ekenhart looked at his daughter with surprise and confusion.


    ¡°What are you saying, ire? If anything, it all started because of what you said.¡±


    ¡°Me? I don¡¯t remember¡­¡±


    Oh? This was going in an odd direction¡­?


    None of them had ever said anything outside of the fact that he pestered them with talk of marriage proposals.


    And yet he imed that Ms. ire had started it all.


    ¡°¡­I suppose it¡¯s not surprising that you forgot¡­¡±


    ¡°Forgot¡­ But what did I say?¡±


    ¡°It was years ago¡­ I think it was right after Tillura was born. So about ten years ago. Back then, you always wanted to hear stories about the founder of this house.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes, I do remember asking to hear those stories back then¡­¡±


    So it would be around the time that the servants were spreading rumors about Ms. ire being the reincarnation of the founder.


    Ms. ire was always so full of curiosity, and had a fixation with Silver Fenrirs, so it was easy to imagine her being interested in such stories.


    ¡°I talked about it once back then. About how she married through an arranged marriage.¡±


    I see.


    Well, if she had be a duchess, then such strategic marriages would make sense.


    But what did that have to do with Ms. ire?


    As Mr. Ekenhart talked, both Sebastian and Tilura listened with deep interest.


    But Ms. ire still looked puzzled as if she had no recollection of this.


    ¡°It was then that you started talking about how you too wanted an arranged marriage. Of course, I did not want that for you at the time, and I tried to stop you¡­¡±


    ¡°I said such a thing¡­¡±


    ¡°Lady ire¡­¡±


    ¡°Sister¡­¡±


    Ms. ire was quite stunned by this revtion.


    While she didn¡¯t remember it, she had now learned that she was the reason all along.


    Not only that, but Sebastian and Tilura were looking at her usingly.


    It was as if they were ming her for all the hardships they had faced up until now.


    However, I had also learned that Mr. Ekenhart was a typical father after all, and had not wanted to send his daughters off to be married.


    I suppose fathers really were the same everywhere.

 Chapter 95

    Chapter 95


    <strong>The conclusion of the matter of arranged marriage</strong>


    ¡°Even though I tried to stop you, ire, you left the house, iming that you were going to find someone¡­ Realizing that you were likely to pick someone most unsuitable, with your impulsive ways, I decided that I had to find someone first. And so I¡¯ve been selecting trustworthy candidates ever since.¡±


    ¡°¡­That¡­but I don¡¯t remember that at all¡­¡±


    ¡°So Lady ire¡¯s actions were the reason all along¡­¡±


    Ms. ire¡­ You can¡¯t go out and search for someone to have an arranged marriage with. That¡¯s not how it works¡­


    Even I had to give her an exasperated look when I heard this.


    I had actually thought that her ability to take action wasmendable, but this time, it had ill consequences.


    ¡°Not only that, but then you started saying that you would arrange a marriage for your newly born sister. And since there was no way that you could choose the right person, I decided to do it instead. Once you get an idea in your head, even I cannot stop you.¡±


    In other words, Mr. Ekenhart was choosing candidates before Ms. ire could do something disastrous.


    ¡°¡­I do remember that you told me about the first duchess¡¯s marriage¡­ And though it was arranged, they were fond of each other and lived happily¡­ However, I do not remember doing any of those other things¡­.¡±


    ¡°¡­Well, I do not me you¡­ It was just when she died, and you spent many days weeping. Perhaps the shock of it has affected your memory.¡±


    ¡°¡­Father¡­are you talking about mother?¡±


    ¡°Mmm.¡±


    So her ancestor had been in a happy marriage.


    But more importantly, Ms. ire¡¯s mother had died¡­.


    Now that I thought about it, while they had talked about Mr. Ekenhart many times, I had never heard anything about their mother.


    Apparently, it was when Tilura was born, so she didn¡¯t remember. But it was a sad time for Ms. ire, and she had tried to forget it.


    That might exin why Ms. ire could seem overprotective. Whether it was leaving the mansion because she was worried about Tilura¡¯s illness, or her attitude towards Sherry. Losing her mother so early might have made her feel like she had to take her mother¡¯s ce.


    ¡°Mother¡­I don¡¯t remember her¡­¡±


    ¡°Because you were just born, Tilura. It can¡¯t be helped.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart said gently to Tilura, who muttered sadly.


    Ms. ire seemed to be remembering how she felt when her mother died. And her eyes looked misty.


    And then Mr. Ekenhart continued.


    ¡°She¡­ My wife was always quite frail. She was weakened greatly after ire¡¯s birth, but managed to get through it. But that wasn¡¯t the case with Tilura¡­ But you know, ire and Tilura. She was happy to have you two.¡±


    ¡°¡­She was?¡±


    Asked Tilura. Mr. Ekenhart nodded.


    ¡°Aye, she said that she was happy. And so once she had passed away, I felt that I had to raise you two so that she would be proud. Thankfully, you two took after me when ites to physique.¡±


    Ms. ire and Tilura took after their father?


    ¡­Well, I didn¡¯t quite agree with that¡­ But perhaps it was more of a general toughness.


    ¡°Mother¡­¡±


    A tear ran down Ms. ire¡¯s face as she thought about her mother.


    I could not have predicted that talk of marriage proposals would lead to talk of the death of their mother.


    As Tilura didn¡¯t know her mother, she did not cry. But she also seemed tock her usual cheerfulness, and was in a dark mood.


    And while it had nothing to do with me, these were people I was indebted to, and I could rte to their experience as well.


    My parents had also died when I was young.


    It was an ident, but due to my age, I didn¡¯t really understand the circumstances.


    And so I was taken in and raised by my father¡¯s older brother, and they were very fond of me.


    My uncle¡¯s family were very kind, but there was a part of me that did not want to be taken care of by people who weren¡¯t my parents.


    Thinking back, it was probably abination of missing my parents, and going through a rebellious phase. Regardless, once I started highschool, I got a part time job and started living alone.


    My uncle and his family were very worried about me, but I brushed off their concerns and focused on working.


    Still, I must have been very lonely. After all, I had rescued Leo and brought her home.


    Leo helped with that feeling of loneliness, but I hade to this world without ever being able to repay my uncle and his family for their kindness.


    I had always thought that once I started a full-time job, I would be able to start giving back to them¡­ But in the end, I was so busy with work and never had time for them.


    ¡­Well, I think that is enough talk about me.


    ¡°¡­Father, while I do not remember any of that, I am sorry for the trouble I caused back then.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. Well, I knew you had a strong fixation with your ancestor. So don¡¯t worry.¡±


    After some moments, Ms. ire had collected herself and apologized to her father.


    Mr. Ekenhart justughed and forgave her with a pat on the head with hisrge hand.


    As he was very gentle, I knew that he wasn¡¯t, but¡­he still had the appearance of some bandit¡­ Oh, I was thinking rude thoughts again.


    ¡°Now, father. Can we agree to leave all this talk of marriage behind us? After all, I would very much like to make such decisions for myself.¡±


    ¡°If that¡¯s what you say, then that¡¯s what we will do. I will turn down all of the candidates myself.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Are you fine with that, Tilura?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know anything about marriage yet. And so I don¡¯t want to be meeting anyone right now.¡±


    She was too young to even understand what marriage was.


    Some girls thought of marriage even at a young age, but Tilura was not one of them.


    So it waspletely normal for her to not understand yet.


    ¡°Very well. Now, that¡¯s enough talk of that. Sebastian, is my room ready? I haven¡¯t gotten much rest on my way here. Now that I¡¯m relieved after seeing my daughters, I would like to get some sleep.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Your Grace. It has been prepared. However, there is one other matter¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Oh? It is rather unusual for you to say such things. What is it then?¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart looked at Sebastian quizzically, but Sebastian just turned to look at me.


    Was this about selling the herbs?

 Chapter 96

    Chapter 96


    <strong>Mr. Ekenhart seemed to like me</strong>


    ¡°Earlier, Mr. Takumi talked to you about having the Gift¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, that Weed Cultivation thing? Having a Silver Fenrir was surprising enough, but to have the Gift as well¡­¡±


    So it was about the selling contract for the herbs after all.


    While I had exined to him that I had the Gift, I hadn¡¯t really talked about how I would use it.


    ¡°Father, Mr. Takumi is able to use his gift to cultivate all kinds of herbs.¡±


    ¡°Oh? Such as?¡±


    ¡°First, he made some Ramogi, which was used to heal Tilura¡¯s illness. And then when testing itter, he was able to make Loe.¡±


    ¡°Loe¡­ Loe!? That rare and expensive Loe?¡±


    ¡°Yes, that is right. Mr. Takumi was able to make it very easily. I, Tilura, and Sebastian all saw him do it.¡±


    So even Mr. Ekenhart was surprised about the Loe¡­ Sebastian had told me that it was expensive, but still¡­


    After that, Ms. ire and Sebastian continued to exin to him about my Gift and the herbs I made.


    ¡°Aside from that, he¡¯s also made many other varieties of nts.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi is doing some research in order to find the best way to use his Gift. He¡¯s even created nts that I have never seen before. And Lady ire and I can confirm that they were effective.¡±


    They were talking about the herb that I passed out in the forest.


    It was known that if I used the Gift while thinking of something, I could usually create a nt that was just like what I had imagined.


    Well, I might end up fainting again like I did after returning from the forest. So I needed to be careful that I don¡¯t overuse it. And I also had to be cautious when it came to the effect.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ I see. This Weed Cultivation is clearly a useful Gift. So, what do you want me to do, ire and Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°Father, I want you sign a sales contract with Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi has already agreed to it. I¡¯m sure that Your Grace understands the advantages it will have for this family.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Mr. Takumi, is this true? It is a great Gift, and the Liebert family will surely make a profit by selling the herbs. But I have to know that the person with the Gift is fully satisfied with the arrangement.¡±


    While Ms. ire and Sebastian urged Mr. Ekenhart to make the contract, he remained calm as he turned to me.


    His beloved daughter and trusted butler were asking him, but he put more importance on my opinion. Perhaps he was a very sympathetic person.


    And if the family businesses were going well, then it meant that Mr. Ekenhart must be talented when ites to trade.


    In my old world, I would sometimes see people persuade others forcefully, and make contracts that were only profitable for their ownpany. And so it was quite refreshing.


    With someone like this, I had no reason to hesitate.


    It wouldn¡¯t be like before, where my life was nothing but work.


    ¡°Yes. As Ms. ire and Sebastian have said, I would very much like to make a contract with your family.¡±


    ¡°I see. So it¡¯s not because they asked you to do it?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Ms. ire merely told me of the advantages. And the disadvantages as well. However, I am not one to think only of profit. Besides, if I can be any use to the people who have helped me, then I intend to do just that.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­¡±


    Upon hearing this, Mr. Ekenhart was deep in thought.


    He was looking at me very seriously, as if appraising me. Perhaps he was trying to determine if I really meant what I said.


    And so I made a point to meet his gaze and not look away.


    To be honest, it was a little intimidating, due to the fact that he still looked like a bandit.


    However, I had some experience with maintaining eye contact during a presentation with a client, which came in handy here.


    Well, not that I was giving a presentation now.


    ¡°¡­Hahahaha!¡±


    ¡°Father?¡±


    ¡°Your Grace?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Kyu?¡±


    After we had stared at each other for some time, Mr. Ekenhart suddenly burst intoughter.


    Ms. ire and Sebastian were taken aback by the sudden outburst.


    Even Leo and Sherry looked puzzled as they looked at him.


    While Tilura hadn¡¯t said anything, she was also tilting her head and seemed confused.


    ¡°Well, I can see that you are not lying. You¡¯re all right, Mr. Takumi. In fact¡­I should be the one asking you.¡±


    ¡°Father. Does that mean¡­?¡±


    ¡°Aye. We shall sign this contract. It will be top priority. It¡¯s not often I meet a man who won¡¯t look away from me when being stared down.¡±


    ¡°¡­Most people are afraid of your appearance, father¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart¡­ He waspletely aware of the effect his appearance had¡­


    In any case, the matter had been settled.


    I would finally have a job and ie in this world.


    Now, I just needed to secure enough money to pay them back for the things I bought in the town.


    ¡°Sebastian will handle the contract and uses etcetera and hand it to youter. This is a matter of great importance to our family.¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    ¡°Father, you must pay Mr. Takumi properly.¡±


    ¡°Of course. I am not here to exploit him. That is not the Liebert way. It would affect the trust people have in our business. And since Mr. Takumi is a man of importance, he will be paid enough to build his own house. Hahaha!¡±


    ¡°But I¡­ I don¡¯t mind an average sry?¡±


    It was good that Mr. Ekenhart liked me, but I didn¡¯t want to be overpaid either.


    And while there were still several factors, such as being overpaid, that made me anxious, I still breathed a sigh of relief now that I would be able to make a living for myself in this world.

 Chapter 97

    Chapter 97


    <strong>I checked the terms of the contract</strong>


    After I had finished talking with Mr. Ekenhart and the others, I returned once to my room.


    ¡°Phew¡­ Things somehow wrapped nicely, eh?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    The nervousness before meeting Mr. Ekenhart had disappeared immediately, but he was still the head of a great noble house.


    And he had a different, unexpected impact. So I must have be tense without knowing it, since my shoulders were a little sore.


    It had been a while since I hadst gotten sore shoulders¡­ Maybe I could make a remedy with Weed Cultivation¡­ No, it was best not to waste it right now.


    I doubted it would be enough to have such an effect, but I had to be careful so that I didn¡¯t faint again.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? What is it, Leo?¡±


    As I sat on the bed and rotated my shoulders and stretched, Leo came close and pushed her nose into me.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    It looked like she wanted me to give her some attention.


    I had been quite busy today, after all.


    ¡°There, there. Sorry that I couldn¡¯t y with you today.¡±


    ¡°Wuff, wuff.¡±


    As I patted Leo on the head, she wagged her tail happily.


    There was still some time until dinner, so I would y with her until then.


    And so I hugged Leo, just like Tilura did, and scratched her under the jaw and between the ears, andbed her body with my fingers to her heart¡¯s content.


    However, it was while doing this that I realized that Leo was pretty dirty.


    Because we had been exploring the forest¡­ While she went swimming in the river, she still was not clean enough.


    ¡°Leo¡­you¡¯re quite dirty, huh?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!?¡±


    Leo twitched and then froze when I muttered those words.


    I guess she knew what I was going to say next.


    But even if Leo didn¡¯t like it, I couldn¡¯t let her stay this filthy¡­ And as Leo stood there frozen, I continued to announce her sentence.


    ¡°After dinner, you¡¯ll have to take a bath.¡±


    ¡°¡­Wuff¡­¡±


    The expected words came from my mouth, and Leo¡¯s head drooped weakly.


    I tried to console the depressed Leo by petting her. Then there was a knock on the door.


    What was it¡­? It was too early for it to be dinner.


    ¡°Yes?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Do you have a moment?¡±


    It was Sebastian¡¯s voice that came from the other side of the door.


    Has something happened?


    ¡°Of course.¡±


    ¡°Excuse me. Oh, I see you are ying with Leo.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I haven¡¯t been able to give her much attentiontely. And she seemed a little lonely.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°I see. That is a good thing. However, she does not appear to be in high spirits now?¡±


    ¡°Ah. Well, Leo¡¯s coat has be quite dirty. And so I said that she¡¯d need to take a bath. That¡¯s why she is like this.¡±


    ¡°Hohoho. That cannot be helped then. After all, it¡¯s important to stay clean. Especially when one¡¯s fur is as beautiful as Leo¡¯s.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true. Did you hear that, Leo? Even Sebastian agrees, so don¡¯t be so moapy about taking a bath.¡±


    ¡°¡­Wuff¡­¡±


    Leo nodded as if forced to agree.


    Still, she had already bathed once since bing so big, so I expected it would be easier this time.


    Huh? We had gotten distracted by talk of Leo. But why was Sebastian here again?


    ¡°Mr. Sebastian. I believe you wanted to say something to me?¡±


    ¡°Oh, that is right. Here, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°What¡¯s this?¡±


    Sebastian handed me several sheets of paper.


    They were close to A4 size and bound like a booklet. And each page was filled with letters.


    A quick nce at them showed that they were written in somenguage that was not Japanese. And yet I could still read it just fine.


    I wonder why¡­ But then again, we were able to speak to each other¡­perhaps I had received a bonus, aside from getting the Gift whening to this world.


    I didn¡¯t know what the answer was, but I pushed it away for now, as there was no point in thinking about it.


    ¡°This is the contract with His Grace. In your case, Mr. Takumi, you are entrusting the selling of your herbs to thepany. There are uses rted to that and payment. While His Grace and you have already agreed to it, such things need to be properly confirmed. And so you must read this carefully. And if you still agree, the contract can be signed.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    I had assumed that the matter was settled in the drawing room.


    But I suppose it had to be checked first. If it was all just verbal promises, then that could lead to trouble in the future.


    And so I stopped petting Leo and then sat down on the bed in order to read the contract carefully.


    ¡°Please read through the contents carefully. And let me know if you have any questions or if there is anything you want to change. Now, please excuse me.¡±


    ¡°I understand. I should be finished reading it by dinner, so I¡¯ll let you know if I have any questions then.¡±


    ¡°Yes, very good, sir.¡±


    And then Sebastian left the room, and I began to read through the contents of the contract.


    Now that it was decided that Leo would take a bath, she rolled up into a sulky ball on the floor.


    I was sure she would be better by dinner time.


    ¡°Hmm¡­I see¡­¡±


    I had seen contracts like these many times at my old job.


    However,pared to those ones, the contract with the duke seemed to lean highly in my favor.


    But there was still a lot that I didn¡¯t know about this world, and so I would have to ask Sebastian about themter.


    ¡­Like this stuff about dealing with monster and bandit attacks¡­


    It was probably aboutpensation when products were lost, but then again, I could be wrong.


    But the duke was doing his best to treat me fairly, and so it would be rude if I didn¡¯t even understand the contents.


    And so I would make a check mark on the parts I didn¡¯t understand or had questions regarding.


    Ah, I needed something to write with¡­ Now that I think about it, I did buy a penst time I went shopping.


    I got up from the bed and grabbed the pen that was on my desk.


    This wasn¡¯t like the fountain pens from my old world, but was a quill pen. And so it was part of a set that contained an inkpot.


    And while it looked luxurious, I was not used to writing with it, and so it was with shaky hands that I marked the contract.


    And so for a while, I read the contents until Ms. Lyra came to tell us that dinner was ready.


    By then, I had most of the contract in my head.


    And so Ms. Lyra and I woke up the sulking Leo, and then I took the contract and headed to the dining hall.

 Chapter 98

    Chapter 98


    Mr. Ekenhart did not care about manners


    When I arrived at the dining hall, Mr. Ekenhart, Ms. ire, and Tilura were already gathered there.


    And so I went over to my usual seat at the table after Ms. Lyra gestured for me to go.


    While Ms. ire said it didn¡¯t matter, I did wonder if I was just allowed to sit anywhere when Mr. Ekenhart was here¡­ There was likely a formal seating arrangement that I wasn¡¯t aware of¡­


    ¡°Be at ease, Mr. Takumi. I don¡¯t care about little details regarding manners, anyway.¡±


    ¡°¡­Okay.¡±


    As I had looked a little restless after sitting down, Mr. Ekenhart was able to tell that I was self conscious.


    Ms. ire had said the same thing, and so if both felt that way, it must be fine.


    Now that I think of it, it was probably because she had been raised by such a father that she wasn¡¯t so surprised or disturbed when looking at me.


    Once everyone was settled, the food was brought out and ced on the table.


    Ms. Helena, the head cook, served the food herself as she exined it to Mr. Ekenhart.


    The main dish was meat. Thick steaks covered in a savory sauce were ced in front of everyone.


    Of course, Leo had her sausages as usual.


    Perhaps the food was especially good today in order wee Mr. Ekenhart.


    It was served with some york pudding.


    Maybe for dessert, they would bring out some with sweet butter cream as well.


    ¡­At Ms. ire¡¯s request.


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s eat then.¡±


    Said Mr. Ekenhart, and everyone started to eat.


    First, I got to work on the thick steak that was in front of me.


    It was eaten with a knife and fork, and was more delicious than any meat dish I had ever eaten.


    No meat had ever been so tender¡­and the sauce was incredible¡­


    Was it the quality of the meat, or the skill of the cook¡­ In any case, I¡¯m sure that Ms. Helena had done her best.


    ¡°¡­Father¡­ Can you not eat with better manners?¡±


    ¡°Hmm? ¡­Gulp. ¡­Hahaha. Well, meat tastes better when you eat it boldly!¡±


    As Ms. ire had drawn attention to it, I looked over to Mr. Ekenhart and saw that he had abandoned his knife and skewered his steak with his fork, and then carried it directly to his mouth where he bit a chunk out of it.


    And then he justughed at his daughter¡¯s disapproval.


    ¡­I had been prepared for this, but it really was a sight to behold.


    Leo also had her head in her bowl and was eating her meat and sausages ravenously. The two were rather alike.


    On the other hand, Sherry was sitting on a small tform next to Tilura¡¯s chair, and it was from there that she ate her food that was set out on the table.


    It was the same steak we were all eating, only she nibbled daintily on hers from the edges.


    ¡­If only Leo would do the same. Then the area around her mouth wouldn¡¯t get so dirty¡­


    ¡°Ha¡­ You would think I would be used to it by now. But when eating with you, father, I start to wonder why I bother to have good manners at all.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. Good food must be eaten quickly! However, do not mistake me, I do eat properly when out in public!¡±


    ¡°I sincerely hope so¡­¡±


    Ms. ire muttered with a sigh. But her father justughed and continued to tear through his meat.


    Well, he was still a duke, so I¡¯m sure he did act differently during formal appearances.


    After having her food praised by the duke, Ms. Helena bowed her head and said, ¡®I¡¯m honored.¡¯


    She had clearly put a lot of effort into it, so she must be happy.


    And so I watched them enjoy their meal, and ate until I was full.


    Of course, just as I anticipated, a sweet york pudding was brought out as well.


    ¡­If I stayed in this house for too long, I would start to get fat. That¡¯s how good the food was¡­


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Did you have time to look through the documents?¡±


    ¡°Ah, yes. I read all of it.¡±


    After dinner, as I drank Ms. Lyra¡¯s tea and rested, Sebastian came up to me.


    I had been rather distracted by Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s eating habits, and the delicious food, that I had forgotten about the important contract.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, were you satisfied with the contents of the contract that Sebastian gave you?¡±


    ¡°About that, I do have a few questions, if it is all right?¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course. If you have questions or if there is anything you want altered, please say it.¡±


    ¡°Uh, let¡¯s see¡­¡±


    For some time after that, I went over the details with mainly Sebastian, and also Mr. Ekenhart.


    There were a lot of questions I wanted to ask.


    And while there weren¡¯t any changes for me to demand, there was one point I was unsure of.


    ¡°Um¡­there¡¯s onest thing.¡±


    ¡°Yes, what is it?¡±


    ¡°Well¡­about this contract. I just feel like it¡¯s terribly advantageous for me.¡±


    ¡°So that¡¯s what it is¡­hmm. Your Grace?¡±


    ¡°Aye. I can see that you¡¯ve read through it carefully. That¡¯s good.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was oddly impressed by this, but surely reading through a contract properly was normal, if not vital.


    After all, who knows what kind of trouble woulde in the future.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. The conditions of that contract were decided on through serious discussion between my father, Sebastian, and I.¡±


    ¡°Yes. And if there is a reason why it appears to be so favorable towards you, it is because you are worth that much to this house.¡±


    ¡°This field of selling herbs will be new for the family business. But with your Gift, Weed Cultivation, we will still be able to guarantee a certain quality and quantity. In other words, even with conditions that are favorable towards you, we still want to work with you.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    As for me, these were people who I felt that I owed a debt to, and so I didn¡¯t really need such conditions to convince me¡­ But if they insisted, then I suppose it was fine.


    Ah, but there was one addition I wanted to make.

 Chapter 99

    Chapter 99


    I signed the contract with the duke


    ¡°Once word about you spreads, Mr. Takumi, it won¡¯t just be just the nobles who will react, but the merchants as well.¡±


    ¡°And so we want to give you the best conditions possible, so that you will do business with us.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. What do you say?¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed¡­ To be honest, it¡¯s more than I could have hoped for. ¡­That being said, if I could make just one addition to it?¡±


    It was clear that it wasn¡¯t just Mr. Ekenhart, but Ms. ire was also making the request.


    They were both quite passionate about the matter.


    However, I wanted to make another adjustment that would be in my favor.


    While it wasn¡¯t written in the contract, it was very important for me.


    ¡°What is it? We can be flexible within reason.¡±


    ¡°¡­Umm, just for a little while longer¡­ Would I be able to stay in this mansion?¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    As Sebastian said they could be flexible, I was quite hopeful when I told them of the condition I wanted to add.


    However, they all looked at me with dumbfounded expressions.


    Well, Leo was still preupied with her milk, and Tilura was preupied with watching Sherry, who was also drinking milk.


    But the others were dead silent.


    After a few seconds, Mr. Ekenhart burst intoughter as if highly amused.


    ¡°Hahaha!¡±


    ¡°¡­Ha¡­ And to think that I was bracing myself for a ridiculous demand¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­But it¡¯s also the exact kind of thing I¡¯d expect from Mr. Takumi.¡±


    As Mr. Ekenhart¡¯sugh echoed through the room, Ms. ire and Sebastian looked at me with exasperation.


    Huh? Was it really that strange?


    As someone who had no one else to rely on in this world, it was very important¡­


    I didn¡¯t have any money yet, which meant I could not get a room at an inn. I would not even be able to buy food.


    I suppose I could have Leo hunt orcs, and I did have some experience living in the forest now, but I would still prefer a proper room and meals.


    As I thought of such things, Mr. Ekenhartughed as he said,


    ¡°Hahaha! You are a funny one, Mr. Takumi. Your wish is granted. You can stay in this house for as long as you want. I¡¯ll make sure that the maids tend to your needs. ¡­In fact, you coulde and stay at the main house, if you want?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, you can stay with us for good, if you want. After all, there is Sherry¡­ I think I would be more at ease if you were here.¡±


    ¡°¡­The contract aside, we servants had all but assumed that you would be staying here with us¡­ Still, should this be added to the contract, Your Grace?¡±


    ¡°No, that won¡¯t be necessary. Mr. Takumi is a friend now. So he can stay for as long as he wants, contract or no contract.¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­are you sure?¡±


    In short, they were weing me into the mansion.


    ording to Sebastian, they had meant for me to stay here, even if I never asked about it.


    But I would not have thought they¡¯d allow me to stay here without the contract.


    After all, there was the matter of food, especially for Leo. And so it would not have been strange for them to eventually ask that I take my leave.


    It seemed that I hadpletely underestimated the Liebert family.


    ¡°Now, Mr. Takumi. Will you agree to sign the contract for the selling of herbs?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Please.¡±


    I nodded at Sebastian¡¯s words.


    And then Ms. Lyra produced the sheet where I signed my name, and the contract was concluded.


    They didn¡¯t have signature stamps in this world.


    Well, even if they did, I didn¡¯t have one, which would be a hassle.


    Speaking of which, I had signed my name in Japanese, but when I looked at it, the name on the paper was written in thenguage of this world. And everyone was able to read it.


    ¡­I wonder if this mystery will ever be answered¡­ Perhaps I should ask Sebastian about itter.


    He seemed to enjoy finding exnations for mysteries like this.


    Once our business was done, and we had enjoyed our tea amidst a rxed atmosphere, we bade each other good night, and retired to our rooms.


    Mr. Ekenhart had rode long, and was tired, and meant to get an early rest.


    Ms. ire and Tilura were going to y with Sherry for a little while. But I hoped they wouldn¡¯t stay up toote so that they couldn¡¯t get up tomorrow¡­especially Tilura.


    As Leo and I walked back to our room, I suddenly remembered something.


    I had been quite distracted by the contract that Sebastian brought to me, but I had nned to bathe Leo tonight.


    Leo had eaten to her full, and was so satisfied that she had also forgotten about it. She was currently walking ahead of me towards the room.


    ¡°Leo¡­ Aren¡¯t you forgetting something? We need to take a bath.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!? Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Leo jumped and then she turned to look at me and shake her head in protest.


    ¡°Sorry, that¡¯s not going to work. You need to be clean and set a good example for Sherry, all right? Now, let¡¯s go.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­wuff¡­¡±


    Perhaps it was a dirty tactic, but using Sherry was an effective way of getting Leo to listen.


    Was it as an older sister? Or a mother? Not only was Leo fond of Sherry, but she had also taken the role of mentor. And so I knew she would not do anything that could be a bad influence.


    ¡­Now that I think about it, did Sherry hate baths as well¡­?


    I would ask Ms. ire about it tomorrow. If she didn¡¯t hate them, perhaps she could bathe with Tilua.


    She had wanted to bathe with Leo, so she would likely feel the same about Sherry.


    It was with such thoughts that I headed to the bathing area, along with Leo, who was mournful but obedient.


    It took a little over an hour, but I was able to wash away the dirt and clean Leo thoroughly.


    And before I got in the tub, I asked Ms. Lyra to bring some towels so that she could dry Leo.


    In the meantime, I soaked in the hot water and warmed my body.


    While I had wiped myself in the forest, I had avoided bathing in the river, as it was too cold.


    And as someone raised in Japan, soaking in hot water eased both my mind and body.


    After I was warmed up, I got out of the water and then took the clean and dried Leo and returned to my room.


    Leo seemed rather exhausted after braving the bath she hated so much. I patted her on the back and then climbed into bed.


    Today, I met the duke for the first time and signed a contract. It had been a nervous day for me, and so I was mentally exhausted.


    As soon as Iy on my side, the drowsiness I hadn¡¯t felt a moment ago suddenly washed over me. And without resisting it, I quickly fell into a deep sleep.

 Chapter 100

    Chapter 100


    I showed him Weed Cultivation


    The next day, Tilura came to our room just as I had finished getting ready, and so we headed to the dining hall together.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau. Kyau.¡±


    ¡°Leo is clean now!¡±


    Leo was carrying Tilura on her back, and seemed to be in a good mood.


    Sherry also looked happy, as she was carried in Tilura¡¯s arms.


    Tilura was feeling the texture of Leo¡¯s washed fur with relish.


    It really was a good thing that I had gotten Leo to bathe, even if she hated it.


    Now that I think about it, while fenrirs were smaller than Silver Fenrirs, if Sherry eventually grewrge enough to carry people, would Tilura be happy?


    Right now, she seemed happy that she was able to carry and hold the fenrir, but I could also imagine her being happy once Sherry grew up.


    Well, I didn¡¯t know how long it would take for her to grow to that size. Or if she even would get that big.


    ¡°Come in.¡±


    We arrived at the dining hall, and then Tilura knocked on the door while still riding on Leo¡¯s back.


    Ms. ire answered from the other side, and then Ms. Lyra, who had arrived first, opened the door.


    But she had been waiting in front of my room just a moment ago¡­ And while she had gone ahead of us, she had already finished preparing the tea and was standing by for us¡­


    Really, how did the servants in this mansion move so quickly?


    I thought of such things as I entered the room and greeted the others.


    ¡°Good morning, Ms. ire. Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Good morning, sir.¡±


    I sat down at the usual seat and then breakfast was brought in.


    ¡°Huh? Where is Mr. Ekenhart?¡±


    ¡°¡­Father is still asleep. He is very tired from yesterday.¡±


    ¡°His Grace is not good with waking up early¡­ He rarely even eats breakfast.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    ¡°Father is a sleepyhead.¡±


    When I asked about Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s absence, Ms. ire and Sebastian told me with a little exasperation.


    While it might be a little rude to say, it was true that it was harder to recover once you grew older¡­ Though, I didn¡¯t know how old Mr. Ekenhart was.


    He looked to be in his thirties, but considering Ms. ire¡¯s age, he was probably in his forties.


    Still, Tilura¡­ Sleepyhead was rather harsh¡­


    ¡°Nevermind father. Let¡¯s eat breakfast.¡±


    ¡°Yes. ¡­Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyau.¡±


    I felt a little bad about eating before their father, the head of the house, had arrived, but if he wasn¡¯t awake yet then it could not be helped.


    Ms. ire also seemed a little severe towards him, but perhaps daughters generally felt like this towards fathers at that age.


    And so as if to follow Tilura, Leo and Sherry¡¯s eager replies, I also started to eat.


    Ms. Helena¡¯s cooking was as delicious as always.


    I thanked her in my heart as I enjoyed eating until I was full.


    There was also a dessert, which was the same york pudding with buttercream that we hadst night.


    I suppose Ms. ire had requested it again¡­ She would start to get fat if she wasn¡¯t careful.


    After we ate dessert, and were about to have our tea in the drawing room, the door suddenly flung open loudly.


    ¡°Wuff!?¡±


    ¡°Kyau?¡±


    Leo and Sherry were startled by the sound, and they quickly turned their heads to look.


    Even I was surprised.


    It was Mr. Ekenhart, who came walking in.


    ¡°Morning! ire and Tilura. And I see you¡¯re here too, Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°Good morning, father.¡±


    ¡°Father! Good morning!¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Your Grace.¡±


    ¡°¡­Good morning, Mr. Ekenhart.¡±


    ¡°¡­Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyau.¡±


    He was so energetic, that it was hard to believe he would have trouble getting up in the morning.


    Ms. ire and Sebastian sighed visibly, but Tilura seemed happy to see her father.


    Sherry looked happy as well, but Leo¡¯s answer had been more of a ¡®Oh, it¡¯s you¡­¡¯


    ¡­Leo. He¡¯s the most important person here. So you should greet him properly, all right?


    ¡°Your Grace. Will you have your breakfast now?¡±


    ¡°No, I won¡¯t eat. More importantly, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes?¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart refused his breakfast and addressed me.


    I put down my cup of tea, which I had been sipping in order to calm myself after the startling appearance. And then I turned to face Mr. Ekenhart.


    ¡°About your Weed Cultivation. Can you show it to me? While we signed the contract, I haven¡¯t actually seen you use it yet.¡±


    ¡°Father¡­¡±


    ¡°Your Grace¡­¡±


    Ms. ire and Sebastian looked at him with exasperation.


    To sign a contract without even seeing the actual ability in action. It did seem rather careless for someone of his position¡­


    But then again, Ms. ire and Sebastian had vouched for me, and he also seemed to like me for some reason.


    ¡°Very well. I can show you in the back garden.¡±


    ¡°Ah, I see! So you will!¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s eyes were shining with excitement. And so there was no way that I could refuse.


    Not that I had any intention of refusing.


    After I agreed to it, Mr. Ekenhart smiled broadly.


    I ignored Ms. ire and Sebastian¡¯s less enthusiastic reactions.


    In spite of what I had heard about him, he now reminded me of a young boy who didn¡¯t really care about anything other than what interested him.


    Perhaps Ms. ire had inherited that trait.


    She too was filled with curiosity¡­ And even Sebastian became very engrossed in anything that caught his interest¡­ What was it¡­ Was this house going to be alright¡­?


    Well, it was not my ce to be worried about such things. But I couldn¡¯t help it, when they were so close by.


    And so thirty minutester, after we all finished drinking our tea, we went out into the back garden.

 Chapter 101

    Chapter 101


    I used Weed Cultivation to make herbs for the duke


    ¡°Here you go, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Is this¡­an order sheet?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I¡­thought I should create a list of herbs for you to cultivate.¡±


    As soon as we went out into the garden, Sebastian handed me a sheet of paper. It was a list of herbs with types and quantities. And it also told me how much I would receive as payment for delivering them.


    Hmm¡­ One gold per Loe leaf¡­ I see¡­ But I had no concept of money in this world, so I wasn¡¯t sure what to make of the prices¡­


    That was another thing I could discuss with someone when there was time.


    However, the number of orders were¡­


    ¡°Sebastian, I feel like the numbers are quite low?¡±


    With Weed Cultivation, it would only take a few seconds¡­or half a minute at most, to make a single herb.


    And Sebastian had watched me do it enough times to understand it¡­


    If I only had to make eight different types of herbs, including the Loe, and ten of each, then my job would be finished very quickly.


    ¡°In regards to that, Mr. Takumi, I had to think about how you fainted the other day.¡±


    ¡°We cannot overwork you, Mr. Takumi. We still do not know the limits of your ability. And so I think we should watch carefully in order to be safe. Besides, you said that you also wanted to conduct your own experiments. And so surely you should save some of your strength for that.¡±


    ¡°¡­I hadn¡¯t realized you were being so considerate. Thank you.¡±


    Whether it was a contract with favorable conditions, or allowing me to stay in this mansion, I was incredibly grateful towards them.


    But considering how it had been when I was experimenting previously, I thought I could still make a lot more. Still, I decided to ept Ms. ire and Sebstian¡¯s kindness. After all, I didn¡¯t want to be overwhelmed with work, like with my previous job.


    ¡°Oh? ire¡­you seem awfully soft towards Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°No-not at all! This is something that Sebastian and I discussed together!¡±


    ¡°No¡­it was Lady ire who insisted¡­¡±


    ¡°Sebastian!¡±


    ¡°¡­Forgive me.¡±


    At Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s words, Ms. ire became red in the face and started shouting.


    Now her father was grinning at her, and so was Sebastian, even though he had been silenced¡­ The two were quite alike¡­ I¡¯m not sure if that is a good thing.


    ¡°Uhh, now I will show you Weed Cultivation.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Leo¡­you should y with Tilura and Sherry.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll y with Leo!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    I interrupted them so that I could start testing Weed Cultivation, but then Leo suddenly started to protest.


    I think that she was worried that I would faint again. But I was fine.


    Leo looked a little crestfallen by this, but then Tilura threw her arms around her, and Sherry jumped up onto her back. She seemed to like it up there.


    And so the three moved away from us, and then Leo started to run around the garden while carrying Tilura and Sherry.


    ¡°¡­It really does carry Tilura and ys¡­in spite of being a Silver Fenrir.¡±


    ¡°Leo is very fond of people. Especially children.¡±


    ¡°The two of them y together often.¡±


    When Leo had moved forward and barked, Ms. Ekenhart had shuddered and retreated a few steps. But he now returned and muttered.


    He was still not at ease with Leo¡­ It was the fear of Silver Fenrirs. The more you knew about them, the more likely you were to be afraid of Leo.


    Though, I did hope that he would get used to her soon. I would feel bad for Leo if she continued to be the object of fear.


    ¡°Now, I will use Weed Cultivation.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    I held the book of herbs, which I had brought from my room, in one hand, and then moved away from Mr. Ekenhart and the others.


    I still didn¡¯t know a lot about the herbs, so it was easier for me to do it while looking at the book.


    But first, I would cultivate the one that I knew by memory. Loe.


    And so I imagined the shape and effect while cing my hand on the ground, and then I used Weed Cultivation.


    Approximately one hourter, there was a small prairie-like field of herbs surrounding me.


    ¡°Uhh¡­ That¡¯s everything on the order sheet, right?¡±


    ¡°Let me see¡­¡±


    I was careful not to step on any of them as I moved away from the field and over to where Sebastian was watching.


    Sebastian took out a copy of the order sheet and began to check the types and quantities of the herbs.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, how do you feel?¡±


    ¡°I feel fine, Ms. ire. This isn¡¯t any different from when I was doing my research, before going to the forest.¡±


    If anything, I had probably made more herbs that time.


    Of course, I ate some myself, and the rest were all used by the others in the forest.


    ¡°Weed Cultivation really is an amazing ability. Loe is so very rare, and yet it can be grown so easily¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart muttered as he inspected the field of herbs.


    I still wasn¡¯t sure how rare it was, but the duke was very surprised that I could make ten of them all at once.


    ¡°While it was mostly curiosity¡­this ability will surely bring great profits for our house¡­ Mr. Takumi, I must thank you once again for choosing us.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. I am the one who is grateful. You believed me and allowed me to live here, while offering such a generous contract.¡±


    I was just d that I could use my Gift to help people who I was indebted to.


    Furthermore, I would be able to earn a living. It was more than enough.


    ¡°I¡¯ve finished counting, Mr. Takumi. It¡¯s exactly what we ordered. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s good. I thought I might have gotten something wrong with the quantity or types.¡±


    ¡°No, it is perfect.¡±


    Some of them I had only ever seen in books, so I had been extra careful to not make any mistakes.


    And so I was quite relieved when Sebastian confirmed that everything was in order.


    Now, we just had to gather them so that they could be sold.


    With Weed Cultivation, you weren¡¯t merely making herbs grow, but you could make it so that they were in the state where they would be the most effective as medicine.


    ¡°Now, Sebastian. I will start gathering them.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Huh? Mr. Takumi is going to do it himself?¡±


    ¡°Yes. It¡¯s better if I do it.¡±


    I replied to Mr. Ekenhart as I walked towards the small field of herbs.

 Chapter 102

    Chapter 102


    I seeded in surprising Mr. Ekenhart


    I suspected that Mr. Ekenhart believed that Weed Cultivation was just an ability that allowed me to grow nts.


    And so I would show him.


    As I had them in front of me, it would be much faster than exining it to him.


    Sebastian moved back, and I reced him in front of the field and began to pick the herbs.


    ¡°What is he going to do?¡±


    ¡°Well, just watch him, father.¡±


    ¡°Your Grace, Mr. Takumi¡¯s Weed Cultivation ability really is something special.¡±


    Both Ms. ire and Sebastian were praising my ability and raising Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s expectations. I really wish they wouldn¡¯t do that¡­


    Especially Sebastian¡­


    Still, I did not want that to break my concentration. And so I turned my attention back to the herbs, gathering them into bundles divided by type.


    The Loe was the only herb that did not need to be processed in any way. You just needed to pick them, and then cut them open when used.


    As for the others, I relied on the exnation in the books.


    Depending on what treatment was the most effective, I dried or crushed them to various states.


    But while I was doing this, I suddenly had an idea, and used one hand to make an entirely different nt grow.


    And I also changed it so that it was in a usable state, and then my work was done.


    Overall, the entire job took about half an hour.


    It would take even less time if I could gather the herbs faster.


    ¡°¡­What did he do? I saw him picking them, but it looked like he also dried them in an instant.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s always astonishing to see¡­¡±


    ¡°Thanks to this, the time between growing and selling them will be shortened greatly.¡±


    While Mr. Ekenhart tilted his head with a puzzled expression, Ms. ire looked highly amused.


    And Sebastian was talking about how they would sell them.


    Indeed, normally the process of drying and grinding the herbs would take a lot of time.


    I handed over the herbs to Sebastian, and then walked over to Mr. Ekenhart, and gave him thest herb I had made on a whim.


    ¡°Mr. Ekenhart, you¡¯ll never know until you try. Now please eat this.¡±


    ¡°What is that? I¡¯ve never seen it before¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, it¡¯s that herb, isn¡¯t it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    Ms. ire noticed, as she had eaten it before.


    Mr. Ekenhart looked at it oddly, and hesitated to eat it.


    It was no surprise. It was a strange leaf with a purple pattern on it. And he did not know me very well.


    Still, this was the leaf I had given Ms. ire and the others in the forest. The one that cured them of their tiredness.


    I didn¡¯t know if it was due to his age, but Mr. Ekenhart still seemed tired after his sleep.


    He had ridden long and hard to get here, and it would take more than a night¡¯s rest to fully recover.


    ¡°Your Grace, both I and Lady ire have already eaten it. It is not poisonous, so please do not worry.¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well. ¡­Gulp.¡±


    With Sebastian¡¯s rmendation, Mr. Ekenhart shoved the leaf into his mouth.


    Then he closed his eyes and chewed. However, his eyebrows narrowed, probably due to the taste.


    As this was not something to eat slowly and savor, Mr. Ekenhart swallowed it hurriedly. And then his eyes opened and he looked at me with suspicion.


    But a few secondster, his expression turned to that of surprise.


    ¡°¡­What is this¡­ I feel like the fatigue is leaving my body!? It¡¯s like I was never tired to begin with¡­ Can such a nt exist!?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi created it after much testing with Weed Cultivation.¡±


    ¡°You can even make new nts¡­ I didn¡¯t realize Weed Cultivation was so amazing¡­¡±


    ¡°Not only that, but what Mr. Takumi was doing to the herbs earlier was to change them so they are in the most effective state for use. In other words, He can make them grow immediately, and then have them ready for use just as quickly.¡±


    Sebastian exined to him about my Weed Cultivation ability.


    How I had not only used Weed Cultivation to make the herbs, but had altered them.


    And that I had made herbs that aren¡¯t in any book, and how their effects were immediately tangible.


    It looked like Mr. Ekenhart was having trouble processing all of this information.


    It was almost amusing to see how his facial expression kept changing.


    Though, I did feel a little bad¡­ Perhaps it would have been better to show him at a slower pace.


    Still, he was the head of the Liebert house. And perhaps he would be able to think of different ways of selling and using these herbs in the future.


    Since he was someone who I could trust, it was best to give him all of the information needed.


    He did not look like the type of person to deceive or use people¡­ Well, I mainly trusted him because he happened to be Ms. ire¡¯s father.


    ¡°¡­I had no idea just how¡­ I cannot thank you enough for signing the contract with us¡­ Gifts¡­certainly are amazing.¡±


    ¡°Your Grace, there is still much that we don¡¯t know about Gifts. Not all of them will be useful, like Mr. Takumi¡¯s.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Mr. Takumi, the fact that you are able to use it so well, and havee up with new ways¡­ I like you even more now! Hahaha!¡±


    While not all Gifts are useful to others, mine is.


    Once again, I felt grateful to whoever it was who had given this ability to me.


    ¡­Still, it was from this point on that it would really show its worth.


    Mr. Ekenhart liked Weed Cultivation very much now, especially since he had felt its effect. And so he opened his mouth wide andughed loudly while pping me on the shoulder.


    ¡­He did that a lot¡­and it hurt quite a bit¡­


    In fact, the pping andughing was so loud, that Leo, Tilura, and Sherry were now looking at us oddly.


    Don¡¯t mind us. Just keep ying!


    I didn¡¯t say it out loud, but I hoped they understood.


    I gritted my teeth until Ms. ire came to the rescue.

 Chapter 103

    Chapter 103


    I was told that I needed a way to protect myself


    ¡°Father, you are hurting Mr. Takumi. ¡­You must do something about that habit.¡±


    ¡°Ah, I am sorry. It happens when I am happy¡­ I do try to control myself, but¡­¡±


    It was only after Ms. ire¡¯s warning that he finally stopped hitting me.


    So he did it out of habit¡­ I suppose I should guard myself from now on? ¡­Like wearing armor underneath my clothes.


    After that, Mr. Ekenhart continued to gush about the usefulness of Weed Cultivation, and Sebastian thought of different ways of expanding that usefulness further.


    I was d when Ms. ire reminded me that I mustn¡¯t overextend myself.


    Well, it wasn¡¯t as if Sebastian or Mr. Ekenhart were making unreasonable demands¡­I think.


    So I was fine.


    A maid then came to tell us that lunch was ready, and so we left the garden.


    Sebastian took the herbs to the storage, while Ms. ire and her father discussed future ns as we headed to the dining hall.


    I followed after them, while walking with Leo, who was carrying Sherry and Tilura.


    Leo seemed to be very happy about being able to y with Tilura.


    We then entered the dining hall, and once the food and Sebastian arrived, we ate.


    As we enjoyed Ms. Helena¡¯s always delicious cooking, Mr. Ekenhart suddenly muttered.


    ¡°Can you wield a sword, Mr. Takumi? Well, not just a sword, but any weapon.¡±


    ¡°Father, what are you talking about?¡±


    ¡°¡­A¡­sword¡­?¡±


    No¡­a weapon¡­


    I had never even wielded a bamboo sword¡­ And while I had held a wooden sword once¡­it was just a souvenir when I was a tourist¡­ And that wasn¡¯t going to be of much use to me.


    As for des, I¡¯ve only held a kitchen knife¡­ Though, there was also the short sword that I had borrowed from Sebastian in the forest. But I had only used it to cut down vines and tree branches.


    So I could not say that I knew how to wield it.


    ¡°I have¡­no experience with weapons.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­I see¡­¡±


    ¡°What are you thinking?¡±


    After hearing this from me, Mr. Ekenhart stopped thinking and began to stroke his beard.


    Ms. ire asked him what was on his mind, but he ignored the question.


    Was it bad if I couldn¡¯t use a weapon?


    And so for a while, the meal continued silently.


    Once everyone had finished eating, Mr. Ekenhart seemed to have gathered his thoughts together, and he began to eat again as he spoke.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. I think it would be best if you could use at least one weapon.¡±


    ¡°¡­A weapon?¡±


    ¡°Yes. While you have Leo with you, the two of you might not be together at all times.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Leo reacted to those words.


    It seemed like she was saying that she would always be close by to protect me.


    I patted her gratefully, and continued to listen to Mr. Ekenhart.


    ¡°There is no doubt in my mind that the selling of the herbs will be a sess. No other oue is fathomable. However, it will surely result in people targeting you.¡±


    ¡°¡­You think so?¡±


    ¡°Well, who would not be interested in something that guarantees sess? Of course, we will do our best to keep word from spreading¡­we will¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. No matter how much one attempts to keep information a secret, it will always leak.¡±


    Sebastian said, as if to continue from Mr. Ekenhart¡¯sst words.


    Indeed, information always did seem to leak, no matter how well kept.


    There was a saying about how you couldn¡¯t build a door over a mouth. But there was no inte in this world, so information would surely travel slowly.


    However, rumors and word of mouth would still spread. Both good and bad.


    And so even if they were careful, people would eventually know that it was me who was cultivating the herbs.


    ¡°I understand that¡­but would I really be in danger over some herbs?¡±


    ¡°You make it sound like it¡¯s nothing, but in this country, the people rely on herbs to cure illness and injury. And you, Mr. Takumi, can easily make Loe¡­¡±


    ¡°Additionally, you can also make herbs that are¡­poisonous.¡±


    ¡°Poisonous¡­¡±


    As I had not even tried to make something poisonous, I had no confirmation. But it was surely within the abilities of Weed Cultivation.


    There were herbs that could be poisonous if used wrong, and some that were poisonous to begin with.


    ¡°People who would want poison¡­are clearly up to no good. And you are likely to catch the eyes of such people. While others will simply care about profits.¡±


    ¡°And there is also the possibility that rival merchants will see you as an enemy.¡±


    What Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian were trying to say was, as I was now someone considered to be valuable, it was possible that I would be targeted by all kinds of people.


    ¡°And so, Mr. Takumi. You must be able to protect yourself. Or at least, be able to run away if you are attacked. While the guards will protect you while you are here, we do not know what could happen when you go outside.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true. And while Leo is with me now, I will likely be targeted during a time that we are separated. And so I understand what you mean.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi should learn how to use a weapon.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­wou-wou!¡±


    I see¡­ There would surely be times when I separated from Leo. Even if it was brief.


    For instance, when we go to Ractos, Leo is not able to enter the stores, and must wait outside.


    If I was attacked during such times, I might not be able to protect myself.


    Leo must have thought the same thing, as she was nodding at their words.


    ¡­Though, just a little, she had the air of someone intent on protecting me no matter what¡­but that was only when we were together¡­ Still, nothing of the sort was happening now, so you can rx, Leo.


    I patted her on the head and thanked her so that she would calm down.

 Chapter 104

    Chapter 104


    Leo agreed that I should train


    ¡°¡­Besides¡­perhaps you may need to protect ire¡­¡±


    ¡°Father. Whatever do you mean?¡±


    ¡°Well¡­should you two be married, wouldn¡¯t it be natural for him to protect you?¡±


    ¡°What!? Mr. Takumi and I? Married!?¡±


    Ms. ire¡¯s face turned bright red at her father¡¯s words.


    ¡­Hmm. Ms. ire was so beautiful, and surely there were many others more worthy of her¡­ I would feel bad if she ended up with the likes of me.


    Also, it seemed like Mr. Ekenhart had yet to shake the habit of arranging marriages for his daughter¡­ I suppose it had been this way for so long¡­


    ¡°I think you two would be a lovely couple!¡±


    ¡°You too, Tilura!?¡±


    Tilura had been listening to the conversation, and even she agreed.


    Sebastian was grinning without any attempt to hide it¡­ Was everyone here trying to push us together?


    ¡­Why were we even talking about this¡­


    ¡°¡­In any case, Mr. Ekenhart. How should I go about learning to wield weapons?¡±


    ¡°Ah, indeed¡­¡±


    I said to Mr. Ekenhart, in order to change the subject.


    Perhaps it was a little forced, but Ms. ire also looked relieved, while Sebastian looked unsatisfied.


    Really¡­this butler¡­


    ¡°For now, I will teach you to wield a sword, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°You?¡±


    ¡°¡­Father, I don¡¯t think¡­¡±


    Apparently, Mr. Ekenhart was going to teach me.


    But was this really a job for a duke?


    Though, judging from his appearance, there was no doubt in my mind that he could handle a sword just fine.


    Ms. ire let out a great sigh.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. My father has a habit of wanting to train anyone he thinks is promising. In fact, a few of the guards that work here have been trained by him.¡±


    ¡°That is impressive. Are you that skilled with the sword, Mr. Ekenhart?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­His Grace can beat even the captain of the royal knights, and is surely among the best in the country.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha! The knights captain needs to train more, that is all. But being a captain means a lot of desk work.¡±


    ¡°Your Grace, it is his job to maintain unity in the order. So it cannot be helped that he has many other duties.¡±


    So, Mr. Ekenhart was a master swordsman.


    I suppose I was lucky to have such a teacher¡­but it would likely be hard as well¡­


    ¡°The sword is like the foundation of weaponry. If you can wield a sword, you will be quick to learn with the other weapons.¡±


    ¡°¡­That is what father believes.¡±


    I didn¡¯t know if the sword really was the foundation, but it did make sense that if I learned one weapon, that it would be easier to learn the others.


    For now, I needed to get used to wielding a de.


    ¡°All right, training will begin as soon as I finish eating!¡±


    ¡°¡­Father. Mr. Takumi was using his Gift only a moment ago. I thought I told you what happens when he uses it too much.¡±


    ¡°¡­Oh, was it something about suddenly fainting?¡±


    ¡°Exactly. There is still much we don¡¯t know about the Gift¡¯s side effects. And so surely it would be safer to avoid any training today.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­however¡­ When ites to weapons, it¡¯s best to start training as soon as possible¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart had wanted me to start training after lunch, but Ms. ire and Sebastian stopped him.


    But while I had been using Weed Cultivation to make herbs, I didn¡¯t feel tired at all, so I was probably fine.


    However, I hadn¡¯t felt any tiredness when I fainted.


    So they were likely right, and I should rest for today.


    Though, I wasn¡¯t sure if the strength used for training was the same as the Gift.


    And so I watched Ms. ire and Sebastian persuade the duke as he finished eating.


    Then I returned to my room to rest.


    Leo was with me, and I started to think about what had been discussed.


    ¡°Training with a sword, huh¡­ Do you think it¡¯s necessary, Leo?¡±


    I muttered as I sat down on the bed.


    I suppose there was a part of me that always wanted to wield a sword. But now that the opportunity had presented itself, I couldn¡¯t help but hesitate.


    Because wielding a sword meant the possibility of hurting people.


    But just as Mr. Ekenhart said, I had to be able to protect myself.


    I didn¡¯t want to die here and leave Leo all alone.


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Leo said with a nod.


    So Leo agreed that I should learn to wield a weapon.


    Indeed, there were ces where Leo could not go, and we would be separated.


    Besides, I didn¡¯t like the idea of Leo being the one to always protect me.


    ¡°Yes. Mr. Ekenhart is enthusiastic about it, so I¡¯ll do what I can.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    Now that I had a more positive view of the situation, Leo barked happily at me and wagged her tail.


    Apparently, she had been quite worried that I wasn¡¯t able to fight.


    And I did not want Leo to worry.


    ¡°Thanks, Leo. I know that I can¡¯t keep on relying on you to protect me. So I¡¯ll do my best.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­wuff¡­¡±


    Leo shook her head as if to say that I didn¡¯t need to worry about that so much.


    Still, I had made my decision and would move forward.


    I didn¡¯t know how far I could go, or if I had any inherent skill.


    However, I still wanted to be able to protect myself.


    As I thought about this, a voice rang from the other side of the door.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, may Ie in?¡±


    ¡°Oh? Of course.¡±


    After the knock, it was Sebastian¡¯s voice that I heard.


    I wonder what it could be¡­ The matter of the contract had been settled, but was there something else?


    I got up from the bed, opened the door, and invited Sebastian into the room.


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Good Leo seems to be in a fine mood.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. She is happy that I¡¯ll start training with a sword. She was worried that I was so defenseless.¡±


    ¡°I see. Then perhaps she will not have to worry as much from now on.¡±

 Chapter 105

    Chapter 105


    I learned about the currency value


    I looked at Leo as she greeted Sebastian.


    We had been living in this mansion for a while now, and so Sebastian was able to tell if Leo was in a good mood or not.


    Well, perhaps butlers needed to be extra perceptive about such things.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. As you will begin your sword training tomorrow, I thought I should give you this.¡±


    ¡°Is it¡­the same sword?¡±


    ¡°Yes. The one you used in the forest.¡±


    Previously, when we had explored the forest, Sebastian had handed me this sword, just in case.


    It was short, light, and easy to use. I had swung quite a few times to cut vines and branches, and was decently familiar with it.


    Still, it did start to feel heavy after a while.


    ¡°And this too.¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    The next thing Sebastian handed to me was a small leather bag.


    When I took it, I felt both its solid weight, and the sounds of metal scraping against each other inside.


    ¡°Your payment for the herbs you made this morning. ording to the contract, you are to be paid as soon as you produce the herbs. But there was a dy, as the purpose was to demonstrate your Gift for His Grace.¡±


    ¡°Ah, I see.¡±


    That¡¯s right. I had done that for actual payment.


    I had only been thinking about Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s desire to see Weed Cultivation, that I forgot about the reward.


    I emptied the leather bag over my desk, and saw that there was quite a lot of silver and gold inside.


    Ah, now that I think about it, I didn¡¯t know the currency value in this ce. This was a good time to ask Sebastian about it.


    Leo, this might go over your head, so you can sleep quietly.


    ¡°Sebastian, I don¡¯t know much about money matters in this world¡­ Could you teach me?¡±


    ¡°¡­That is true¡­ You did say that you came from a different ce. Then I must exin it to you.¡±


    For a moment, a light shed in his eyes. I think he was happy that his moment had arrived.


    You could always count on Sebastian to give you a good exnation.


    ¡°First, the one with the least amount of value. Uh, here is one. An iron.¡±


    Sebastian picked up a gray coin from the pile and showed it to me.


    An iron, huh?


    ¡°It is made from melted scrap iron, but nevermind that. A hundred of them will get you one loaf of bread. And a hundred of these together¡­makes a copper.¡±


    ¡°Hmm.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Leo was also listening to Sebastian and nodding her head.


    Shouldn¡¯t you get some sleep¡­? Also, can you really understand?


    I didn¡¯t know if Silver Fenrirs understood anything about money, however, Leo did seem to be enjoying herself.


    ¡°Ten coppers should be enough to feed one person for a day. Well, that would depend on your lifestyle. Regardless, a hundred of these makes a silver.¡±


    ¡°I see, a silver.¡±


    It wasn¡¯t silver-ted, but actual silver.


    While it was dull, it would likely shine beautifully if polished.


    ¡°And ten silvers makes a gold, which is the most valuable. From what I understand mostmoners receive their wages in silvers and coppers.¡±


    ¡°Why silver¡­and not gold?¡±


    Wouldn¡¯t that be like¡­receiving your sry in thousand yen bills instead of ten thousand yen bills in Japan?


    I guess if you wanted it to look like there was more¡­


    ¡°Gold is difficult to use at stores. If you were to buy one loaf of bread with gold, then it would be very inconvenient for the store to give you change, and it would take a long time.¡±


    ¡°Ah, I see.¡±


    Unlike paper bills, gold and silver coins took up a lot of space.


    I wouldn¡¯t want to have to ept so many coins as change¡­


    After that, Sebastian¡¯s lecture on money continued for quite a while as Leo and I listened.


    And while my understanding of it wasn¡¯t perfect at the end, I did have a decent grasp on how money worked in this world.


    1 gold = 10 silver, 1 silver = 100 copper, 1 copper = 100 iron, and 1 iron was simr to 1 yen in Japan.


    So a 100 iron loaf would be 100 yen in Japan.


    In other words, 1 copper = 100 yen, 1 silver = 10,000 yen, 1 gold = 100,000 yen.


    Hmm¡­wait a minute¡­ Didn¡¯t they say that one Loe was 1 gold¡­ So that was 100,000 yen for a single herb!?


    Now that I understood the value, I looked at the payment I received with a feeling of frantess.


    Uhhh, irons, coppers, silvers¡­gold¡­there were 13 gold coins¡­


    So a simple job of using Weed Cultivation to make Loe and other herbs had made me more than 1.3 million yen¡­


    ¡°Um¡­Sebastian¡­¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    ¡°Can I really ept this much?¡±


    It was the kind of amount I would usually have to save up for. I had never been paid this much all at once.


    My sry at my old job was less than one fifth of this¡­


    ¡°It is in ordance with the worth of the herbs you grew today. Besides, Lady ire was actually worried that we weren¡¯t paying you enough.¡±


    ¡°No, no. I would never say that this was too little!¡±


    ¡°When ites to the herbs you grew today, particrly the Loe¡­the market value is said to be 5 gold¡­but it can rise as high as 10 gold. Considering this, I can understand why she might feel that 1 gold is too low¡­¡±


    In spite of my words of protest, Sebastian calmly exined to me of Loe¡¯s value.


    I had heard many times that it was a luxury, but¡­


    A nt that was worth 10 gold¡­a million yen¡­ It was no wonder people were so stunned when I had made them so easily¡­ I could buy a cheap, used car with this.


    While I sat there, quite stunned, Sebastian ended his exnation, bowed, and took his leave.


    And so I was left there, with a great deal of money that I didn¡¯t expect to have. However, Leo had a rather smug expression on her face, as if she had learned a lot.


    ¡­This Gift really is something¡­ But I can¡¯t let myself get carried away. So I¡¯ll try not to think about it too much¡­


    Yes, it would be best to not think so much about money¡­ Like Mr. Ekenhart and the others said, I now understood why I might have a target painted on my back.


    Though, I had been paid, and it was a bitte to being to such realizations¡­

 Chapter 106

    Chapter 106


    Tilura wanted to learn how to use a sword as well


    I looked at the money with a stunned expression for a while, but managed to pull myself together.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    Leo¡¯s fur was nice and clean after bathing yesterday, and so I ran my fingers through it, which had a calming effect.


    So I would be paid a lot more than I had been expecting. And I decided to think of it as something that would help me live in this world.


    Shortly after, it was time for dinner.


    Ms. Gelda came to call us, and so I took Leo and followed her to the dining hall.


    As Sherry and Tilura had arrived ahead of everyone, they yed and climbed onto Leo¡¯s back for a while until Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire entered the dining hall.


    And then the food was quickly served and we sat down to eat.


    Mr. Ekenhart ate ravenously like before, and we talked of things of little consequence.


    But once we were finished and were having our tea, Mr. Ekenhart turned to me.


    ¡°So, Mr. Takumi. Have you received the sword from Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°Yes. It was a sword that I used when we were in the forest, so I¡¯m quitefortable with it already.¡±


    ¡°I see. That will help, if you are used to it even a little.¡±


    ¡°Father, Mr. Takumi. Are you going to be using swords?¡±


    Tilura was very interested in our conversation, and she listened intently while carrying Sherry.


    ¡°Indeed. I will start Mr. Takumi¡¯s sword training tomorrow. ¡±


    ¡°Sword training¡­ Can I join in too?¡±


    ¡°Tilura?!¡±


    ¡°¡­Tilura. Why do you want to train with a sword?¡±


    Perhaps she was interested in swordsmanship.


    While she was a girl, children in general seemed to like the idea of wielding swords¡­


    Still, Ms. ire was quite surprised by this request, and so was I.


    ¡°I am interested in swords. But I also want a familiar like my sister. And for that, I must be able to fight!¡±


    ¡°¡­Hmm¡­ I see.¡±


    ¡°Tilura¡­ This isn¡¯t a game, you know? Takumi will be training so that he can protect himself. And just because you learn to fight, it doesn¡¯t mean you will be able to get a familiar.¡±


    ¡°I know that! I¡¯ve been studying it ever since Sherry became yours.¡±


    At this mention of studying, I saw Sebastian¡¯s eyes gleam as he stood behind Mr. Ekenhart.


    Could it be that it was Sebastian who had been teaching her about familiars¡­?


    ¡°Tilura. Is ying with Leo and Sherry not enough?¡±


    ¡°I enjoy ying with Leo and Sherry. But I still want a familiar of my own.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I didn¡¯t know if it was to have a ymate or some other reason, but Tilura was desperate to have a familiar now.


    Leo was nodding as if she agreed with Tilura¡­ Are you sure?


    ¡°Tilura, if you want a familiar, then you¡¯ll have to fight. Because they are monsters. Monsters do not obey the weak.¡±


    Said Mr. Ekenhart. And he was probably right.


    Perhaps not all of them, but monsters attacked humans.


    And in order to make them submit so that they can be tamed, you had to fight them.


    Leo wasn¡¯t my familiar, and Ms. ire and Sherry were a special case.


    Ms. ire had taken care of her when she was badly injured, and she had already been submissive, because Leo was with us. So it was no wonder that Sherry had allowed it.


    Well, maybe it was less about that, and Sherry had merely be attached to Ms. ire¡­


    ¡°Training with swords is not a game. As an instructor, I will hold back, obviously, but you might still get hurt. Besides, you are still small, Tilura. It will be very difficult for you, you know?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t mind! I want to be stronger!¡±


    Obviously, Tilura was still growing, and so would be taller eventually.


    So perhaps it would be an advantage for her to start training early. But as the training would have to be adjusted as she grew, it might be quite severe.


    Mr. Ekenhart talked like he was trying to scare Tilura, but her resolve remained firm.


    But why did Tilura want a familiar so badly?


    ¡°Tilura. Is there a reason that you want a familiar so much?¡±


    ¡°I cannot tell you that. But, I must have one no matter what!¡±


    Must have one¡­ It was like she was talking about finding her calling in life¡­


    Perhaps it was like how Ms. ire had such strong feelings when it came to Silver Fenrirs.


    ¡°You cannot say why, but you want one¡­ I see. You are a lot like ire.¡±


    ¡°Father?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I know that ire feels a special connection towards Silver Fenrirs. And perhaps you feel something simr, Tilura.¡±


    ¡°¡­You knew¡­¡±


    ¡°I am your father, am I not? I¡¯ve been watching you more closely than I watch myself¡­ Though, there is still a lot that I don¡¯t know.¡±


    However, Mr. Ekenhart understood the reason that Ms. ire had wanted to search the forest.


    For a moment I thought of praising his ability as a parent, but then I remembered the stories about arranged marriages and how he hade here when they didn¡¯t want him to. Perhaps he wasn¡¯t as perceptive as he thought.


    But then again, perhaps he came because it was close to a forest that was rted to the Silver Fenrirs¡­or I¡¯m just overthinking it.


    Like Mr. Ekenhart said, even though they were his daughters, there was a lot that he didn¡¯t know about them.


    ¡°Father, does that mean!¡±


    ¡°Aye, I will teach you the sword. ¡­However!¡±


    As Tilura looked at him with great expectation, Mr. Ekehnhart agreed to her request. But he paused and gave her a serious look.


    He had made this expression while signing the contract as well. It was rather intimidating.


    Upon seeing his gaze, Tilura seemed just a little shaken, but she straightened her posture and then looked back at him with an equally serious gaze.


    She was certainly his daughter¡­ I had a feeling that if she was in the same position, Ms. ire would have also shown a simr spirit, and would not back down. I couldn¡¯t help but imagine it.


    But I shook such thoughts aside and waited to hear what Mr. Ekenhart would say to her next.

 Chapter 107

    Chapter 107


    I was so nervous that I woke up early


    ¡°The sword training won¡¯t be easy. There would be no point if it was. Do you still want to do it?¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes!¡±


    Tilura gulped once after hearing Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s words, but then she answered loudly.


    ¡­Up until now, I had only seen her as the cute child who liked to y with Leo and Sherry, so it was surprising to see this side of her.


    ¡°Very well. Then I will teach both you and Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Thank you!¡±


    ¡°¡­Tilura¡­it¡¯s fine if you train with the sword, but you must continue your other studies as well.¡±


    ¡°¡­Sister¡­¡±


    Ms. ire¡¯s harsh words rained down over Tilura before she had much time to celebrate.


    For just a moment, the word ¡®studies¡¯ caused her shoulders to droop¡­ Well, she was that age¡­


    It always seemed that it was the more active children who did not like having to focus and stay still while studying.


    ¡°Tilura. It is your duty as the daughter of a duke. ¡­Did you really think that you wouldn¡¯t have to study anymore if you started your sword training?¡±


    ¡°¡­No¡­I didn¡¯t think that¡­ But, I did hope it would be lessened a little¡­¡±


    ¡°Hahaha! I see that you still hate studying, Tilura. But most do at your age. However, Tilura, you insisted on training with a sword. And so you must be equally serious with your studies.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes, father.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    As Tilura replied to her father with her face downcast, everyone in the dining hall, including myself, chuckled.


    But Leo rubbed her face against Tilura encouragingly, and Sherry, who was being held in her arms, licked her face in an attempt to cheer her.


    ¡­No, I doubt Sherry even knew what was happening¡­ I think she just wants to y.


    It was amidst this peaceful atmosphere that it was decided that Tilura would receive her sword training, and then we all retired to our rooms.


    I think we were supposed to sleep early, so we would be prepared for tomorrow.


    ¡­Aside from the expedition into the forest, I had not really done anything in this world that could be considered exercise, and so I was worried about my strength.


    And so I would keep the y with Leo short, and go to bed as soon as possible.


    I told Tilura that she also shouldn¡¯t stay upte ying with Sherry, and then I returned to my room.


    Then I took a bath in order to warm my body, and then I went to bed early.


    Leo had looked like she wanted attention, but must have understood that I had sword training tomorrow, as she quickly gave up and rolled up on the floor.


    Sorry, Leo.


    We can y some other time.


    Perhaps Tilura and Sherry could ride with me on Leo as she runs all of the way to the town¡­


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª-


    In the morning, I woke up as the sunlight came into the room. I got up and dressed quietly so that I wouldn¡¯t wake up Leo.


    I felt quite refreshed as I had gone to sleep early, but¡­maybe I had awakened too early as well.


    After all, training wouldn¡¯t start until we finished breakfast, so I still had some time to kill. It was with such thoughts that I sat back down on my bed and gently petted Leo. And then there was a knock on the door.


    ¡°Are you awake, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Tilura? I¡¯m awake. Come in.¡±


    I heard Tilura¡¯s voice after the knock.


    Apparently, Tilura had gotten up early as well.


    She slowly opened the door and then realized that Leo was still sleeping. And so she tip-toed in quietly.


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    ¡°I woke a little early. I would have had nothing to do if you weren¡¯t awake¡­ Sherry is still sleeping.¡±


    So, she really had woken up early, just like me.


    Though, I was sure that Ms. ire and Sebastian were already up. But Sherry was apparently still asleep.


    I suppose Ms. ire was busy with the morning preparations, so Tilura had wanted toe and see Leo.


    ¡°Sorry, Tilura. Leo is still asleep.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. I like watching Leo sleep too. ¡­Leo is so cute.¡±


    Now that I thought about it, Leo had never slept while Tilura was around.


    Her senses seemed to have be much sharper now that she was a Silver Fenrir, and so would always notice and wake up when someone entered the room.


    But today, Leo was sleeping peacefully, even after Tilura¡¯s arrival. Perhaps it was because she was so used to being in this mansion now, that she had let her guard down.


    Tilura stared at Leo¡¯s sleeping face as if peering into a window. This seemed to make her very happy.


    Well, it was true that Leo looked very cute when she was sleeping.


    Even though she was so big now, I couldn¡¯t help but be reminded of when she was still a Maltese.


    It was a little odd that her sleeping face had not really changed¡­ Even though she looked so much more powerful.


    ¡°It¡¯s good that you got up early, but did you get enough sleep?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I went to bed early like you said. So I¡¯m fine.¡±


    Tilura said quietly so as not to disturb Leo.


    She seemed to be amused, as if talking in secret.


    ¡°But I am a little nervous.¡±


    ¡°Will you be using a sword for the first time? Then it cannot be helped. I¡¯m quite nervous myself.¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re nervous, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Of course, I am. I¡¯ve never used a sword. Well, just a little in the forest¡­ But it¡¯s different when you¡¯re actually going to train with one.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    Tilura seemed relieved to hear that I was just as nervous as her.


    Doing something new always came with some anxiety.


    ¡°¡­Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Ah, she woke up.¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Leo.¡±


    While we had been talking quietly, Leo wasn¡¯t so unguarded that she would keep sleeping.


    She raised her head and looked around as if puzzled.


    ¡°Sorry, good Leo. I didn¡¯t mean to wake you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff!¡±


    While Tilura apologized, Leo rubbed her face against Tilura¡¯s cheek as if to tell her to not worry.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Hehe. Good morning.¡±


    Tilura said with a smile as Leo greeted her with a bark.

 Chapter 108

    Chapter 108


    I started my sword training


    As I watched Tilura with Leo, I thought about how much herugh resembled Ms. ire¡¯s.


    But I suppose it was no surprise, because they were sisters.


    Once they had greeted each other, Leo got to her feet and stretched her limbs.


    She was fully awake now.


    ¡°So that¡¯s what you do when you wake up, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Tilura was looking at Leo stretch with great interest.


    Her feeling of nervousness seemed to bepletely gone now.


    Tilura always seemed to be at her most normal when ying with Leo or Sherry.


    Now that Leo was awake, she yed with Tilura for a while and the time passed peacefully.


    And then Ms. Lyra arrived to tell us that breakfast was ready, and so we went down to the dining hall together.


    ¡°Good morning, Ms. ire. ¡­I see that Mr. Ekenhart isn¡¯t here again?¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Mr. Takumi. That¡¯s right. He hasn¡¯te down yet.¡±


    ¡°Good morning, sister. And Sherry.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyuu!¡±


    I greeted Ms. ire, who was already waiting for us, and then asked about Mr. Ekenhart.


    Apparently, he was still sleeping, just like yesterday.


    Tilura and Leo went over to Ms. ire, who was carrying a sleepy Sherry, and said good morning.


    And though she was sleepy, Sherry barked back in reply.


    We then sat down at the table as usual, and ate the food that Ms. Gelda brought in.


    It was a simple meal of bread, sd and soup.


    Apparently, this was Ms. Helena¡¯s day off.


    While she always worked hard to make all kinds of delicious meals, it was nice to know that she had time off.


    Besides, while simple, it was still a good and satisfying breakfast.


    Perhaps it was in preparation for her sword training, but Tilura seemed to eat a little more than usual.


    And then, just like yesterday, the door burst open while we sipped our tea, and Mr. Ekenhart entered.


    No one was surprised this time, though, Ms. ire couldn¡¯t help but sigh at her father¡¯s energy.


    ¡°Morning, all. Ah, I see Mr. Takumi and Tilura are here.¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Mr. Ekenhart.¡±


    ¡°Father¡­ Good morning.¡±


    The sight of her father seemed to bring back the nervousness, and Tilura¡¯s face grew tense.


    Hmm. And it had been such a rxing time as she yed with Sherry¡­ Well, it was probably good to be nervous when it came to training¡­ I think.


    ¡°Have you finished eating?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°I ate a lot!¡±


    ¡°Your Grace, perhaps I don¡¯t need to ask¡­but your breakfast?¡±


    ¡°No, I won¡¯t be having it.¡±


    As Mr. Ekenhart scanned the room to see that we had finished eating, Sebastian stepped in from the side.


    However, just like yesterday, Mr. Ekenhart did not want to eat.


    And then he looked at me and Tilura and nodded.


    ¡°All right, you two are ready then. I think we better begin. As for the ce¡­¡±


    ¡°Perhaps the back garden?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Then we will train in the back garden.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Certainly!¡±


    As Sebastian had suggested, the back garden wasrge enough so that you could swing a sword without disturbing anyone.


    And so Mr. Ekenhart decided it was the best ce.


    Tilura and I braced ourselves and replied.


    The training would finally begin. I was starting to feel a little nervous as well¡­


    Aside from knowing that we would be handling swords, I had no idea what Mr. Ekenhart would make us do¡­


    Perhaps it would start with simply swinging through the air? Or maybe we would learn the right way to hold them?


    I tried to guess what it would be as I returned to my room in order to retrieve the sword. And then I headed to the garden where the others waited.


    ¡°Good, you¡¯re both here now. Are you ready, Mr. Takumi and Tilura?¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°I am!¡±


    Me and Tilura stood side by side, and Mr. Ekenhart stood in front of us.


    He looked at us and nodded.


    Ms. ire, Sebastian, and even Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda was in the garden as well. Apparently, they wanted to watch.


    Leo and Sherry were also sitting quietly near Ms. ire and looking our way.


    Well, Sherry was on Leo¡¯s back and seemed to be enjoying herself.


    ¡°First, you must learn how to hold your weapon. You are both right handed, yes?¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s right.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart unsheathed the sword at his waist, and showed us how to grip it.


    The de of his sword was very long. I suppose it would have been categorized as a longsword.


    The handle was decorated, and the de was polished so that it reflected the sunlight.


    ¡­It looked very expensive.


    Tilura and I were wielding much smaller short swords.


    Hers looked a little heavy and unwieldy, but I suppose they had nothing for someone of her height.


    Besides, even if they did have something that fitted her, it would likely be of little use in actualbat.


    And so the two of us watched Mr. Ekenhart and copied the way he gripped the handle.


    ¡°That¡¯s right. Now, hold it like that and swing. And remember to focus on the direction that the de is facing. And swing it so that it follows the trajectory you have set!¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart swung as if to show us an example.


    It was so fast and powerful, that I thought it would scare away little children who watched.


    While I doubted we would be expected to do it exactly the same, we would have to get close¡­ This training was not going to be easy.


    ¡°Like this? Hmmph! ¡­It hurts.¡±


    Tilura watched her father swing and then copied the movement.


    But she was not used to the weight of the sword, and it swung down to the ground instead.


    Her hands became numb, and her eyes welled up with tears¡­


    ¡°Now, that will not do, Tilura. It didn¡¯t follow any trajectory. It won¡¯t matter how great a sword you have, you will never be able to cut something like that.¡±


    And so under Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s guidance, I swung my sword a few times.


    It seemed like I was getting better? It was then that he told us to sheath our swords again.


    ¡°¡­Now you know how to swing them. However¡­you two are being swung by your swords. Of course, it¡¯s only natural for beginners.¡±


    ¡°Sorry¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    Yes, we really weren¡¯t used to the weight, and so we could not focus on the direction of the de or its trajectory.


    So I did not think he was wrong when saying I wasn¡¯t swinging the de, so much as I was being swung by it.

 Chapter 109

    Chapter 109


    I thought of a herb that would heal muscle fatigue


    ¡°Now let¡¯s start with the basic training¡­ Especially since Tilura won¡¯t have much energy.¡±


    ¡°Basic training¡­¡±


    ¡°What will we do?¡±


    Was that like exercising?


    Indeed, if you had no strength to begin with, then you won¡¯t be able to swing a sword with any uracy.


    However, Tilura was tilting her head with a puzzled expression.


    ¡°I wanted to teach you how to hold a sword before you developed any strange habits. So do not forget that¡­ But now, we¡¯ll have to spend a lot of time toughening you both up.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°I understand.¡±


    After that, it was a lot of boring exercise.


    Pushups, squats, and situps. We also had to do back exercises as he said back muscles were important when swinging.


    All of the training involved your own weight.


    It wasn¡¯t exciting, but it should be effective.


    On top of that, he also added running to the regimen.


    As Tilura and I ran around the garden, Leo and Sherry would join us as if we were ying.


    And though we were both out of breath, Leo and Sherry looked like they were just warming up.


    Obviously, we were madepletely differently, but I couldn¡¯t help but feel a little jealous by their energy.


    Once we were thoroughly exhausted from our training, it was time to rest and eat lunch.


    ¡°You have to eat even if you¡¯re not hungry, or you won¡¯t be able to train for long.¡±


    Thankfully, Tilura, who looked like she wasn¡¯t very hungry yet, ate all of her food after hearing those words from Mr. Ekenhart.


    And after lunch, we repeated the same basic training again.


    But as I was training, I had an idea.


    ¡°Mr. Ekenhart, do you have a moment?¡±


    ¡°What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Well, there is something that I want to make with Weed Cultivation.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ As long as it doesn¡¯t get in the way of training, I don¡¯t mind.¡±


    With Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s permission, we took a short break from training.


    I just needed a few seconds to focus on Weed Cultivation.


    Once it was done, I picked the nt and gave some to Tilura¡­and also Mr. Ekenhart, as he was looking at me as if he wanted some.


    ¡°What is this, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s a herb that will heal your tiredness.¡±


    It was a blue leaf.


    I wasn¡¯t thinking about the taste while making it, so it was probably not good.


    And so I asked Ms. Lyra to bring some water before we ate it.


    After seeing me eat it, Tilura and Mr. Ekenhart also stuffed the leaves into their mouths.


    The bitter taste spread in my mouth, so I quickly drank the water.


    ¡°Mmm¡­glug¡­ It tastes bad¡­¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s horribly bitter¡­but not enough to make me vomit¡­¡±


    They said with scowls.


    It had been pretty bitter for me as well, but I did a mental fist pump, as I could immediately feel the effect.


    ¡°¡­Ah! It¡¯s amazing! I¡¯ll be able to keep training like this!¡±


    ¡°Incredible¡­ Mr. Takumi. Is this different from the herbs you made yesterday?¡±


    ¡°Yes. While this one is also for tiredness, its purpose is specifically for physical fatigue and sore muscles.¡±


    The one I made previously was for tiredness that built up in your body over time.


    And while it did help, the tiredness from training was a little different.


    So it wasn¡¯t that it wouldn¡¯t be effective, but I thought of making something more perfect.


    Something that focused on muscles used in training.


    If it was possible to get rid of muscle fatigue, then perhaps training will be more efficient. That¡¯s why I had used Weed Cultivation.


    And it looked like I had seeded.


    All the tiredness and sluggishness I had felt was gone.


    Though, unlike the other herb, it didn¡¯t seem to do much for energy¡­


    ¡°¡­It would be nice to have this from now on¡­ Well, we¡¯ll leave that for now. But now you two can endure even harsher training.¡±


    ¡°¡­What¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was true to his word, and we had to go through much harsher training after that.


    Everything was doubled, and we had to run at top speed while Mr. Ekenhart chased us while shouting.


    ¡­At least Leo and Sherry seemed to be enjoying the increased speed as they ran next to us¡­


    Also, he added sword swinging to the regimen.


    We took a few breaks in between, as I would use Weed Cultivation to make recovery herbs, and then it was back to training.


    Even without any sore muscles, our energy wasn¡¯t fully recovered, so it just felt like things got worse for us¡­


    ¡°Maybe¡­I shouldn¡¯t have made any herbs¡­¡±


    I couldn¡¯t help but mutter.


    But Mr. Ekenhart wasughing gleefully about this new efficiency as he continued to torment us.


    Training didn¡¯t end until dinner was ready in the evening.


    And so we all retired to the dining hall.


    ¡°Oh, but first¡­¡±


    We wiped ourselves with some hot water and towels.


    While we couldn¡¯t wash uppletely here, we could at least do something about the sweat¡­especially since we were about to eat.


    However, were Ms. ire and Sebastian not terribly bored watching us train?


    Thanks to the herbs, there was almost no soreness of the muscles, and so I was able to walk back to the dining hall.


    Though, theck of energy made me slow. In fact, Tilura had just hitched a ride on Leo¡¯s back.


    ¡°You two aren¡¯t terrible when ites to the basics with the sword¡­ Though, some of it is because of the herbs.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m d to hear that.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll do my best to get stronger.¡±


    ¡°So Mr. Takumi can use a sword now.¡±


    ¡°Magic, sword, and the Gift¡­ Mr. Takumi really is quite important.¡±


    Those were the words Mr. Ekenhart said as we ate.


    Both Tilura and I had promise, which was very encouraging to hear.


    Even if we were helped greatly by the herbs, I was just d that I¡¯d be able to use a sword.


    ¡°Of course, you still have a long way to go. And so the training will continue.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°I understand.¡±


    ¡°¡­Let¡¯s see¡­do one thousand swings before bed. It¡¯s necessary so that the sword bes one with your hands.¡±


    ¡°¡­What.¡±


    ¡°Before we go to bed¡­?¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart made another addition to our regimen before sleep.


    I understood that learning to swing was important, but a thousand times¡­


    ¡°¡­I¡¯ll be sure to make some more herbs then¡­ So I can give some to Tilura.¡±


    After dinner, I took my sword and went out to the garden in order to train. And I also made a lot of herbs with Weed Cultivation.


    Then I gave some to Tilura, who also came out while holding her sword. And the two of us swung silently.


    There was no one instructing us now, but we knew that cking off wouldn¡¯t benefit us at all. And so I continued to swing as Leo looked at me boredly. And then the day was done.


    ¡­When I was finished, I took a bath and washed away the sweat.

 Chapter 110

    Chapter 110


    I fought a mock battle against Mr. Ekenhart


    For a few days after that, we continued our basic training every day, as well as the one thousand sword swings.


    And just when my body was starting to get used to the training, Mr. Ekenhart came out into the back garden and told me that the training would now include some actualbat.


    ¡°Actualbat¡­ How will we do that?¡±


    ¡°Oh, a simple duel with swords. Obviously, that will mean that I¡¯ll be attacking you two as well.¡±


    ¡°With father¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was holding a sword made of wood as he faced us.


    Tilura looked at it nervously.


    A real fight then¡­ Well, we had learned how to swing a sword, and the basics, on top of our nightly training. So we should have improved a lot. But I was still anxious.


    Mr. Ekenhart wasn¡¯t even pointing the sword at us. But just by holding it, he looked intimidating.


    People who were used to fighting had a different aura¡­


    ¡°Father, are you sure about this?¡±


    ¡°Of course, I will have some restraint. This is just a test to see how much progress they made during the past few days.¡±


    Ms. ire sounded concerned, and Mr. Ekenhart replied while swinging the wooden sword a few times as if to test it.


    ¡­It definitely made a much louder sound when cutting through the air,pared to Tilura and I¡­


    As I would be starting first, Tilura stepped back, and Mr. Ekenhart and I faced each other.


    Ms. ire and the others were here again, and they watched us from a distance.


    ¡°Now then, you can start. Come at me.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    While he had a wooden sword, I had an actual de.


    And for just a second, I wondered if he would be all right. But then I remembered that such thoughts would be quite rude, considering his ability. And so I raised my sword.


    As if I was practicing, just as I had been taught¡­


    In my head, I decided on how I would move, and then I swung the sword at Mr. Ekenhart.


    Well, he hadn¡¯t taught us that much yet, and so I was mostly just swinging down with all of my might.


    ¡°Ha!¡±


    ¡°¡­Your swordsmanship has improved¡­but it¡¯s not enough.¡±


    Even though I was swinging with all the strength I could muster, Mr. Ekenhard seemed to just flick his wrist, and push my sword to the side.


    With my trajectory altered, my sword mmed into the ground instead.


    The vibrations that I could feel through the sword started to make my hands numb, but I ignored it and tried to raise the sword again. But then I saw Mr. Ekenhart sway in the corner of my vision.


    ¡°It looks like you¡¯ve died once, Mr. Takumi. You cannot take your eyes off of an enemy during a real fight.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes. Thank you.¡±


    By the time I had registered Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s movement, he already had his sword at my neck, and the battle was over.


    If this was an actual sword, and he wanted to kill me¡­ Then I would really be dead¡­


    I knew that I had made a mistake by caring only about the sword after it had been turned aside.


    Though, I doubted I would have been able to do anything even if I did keep my eyes on Mr. Ekenhart.


    ¡°Next is Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    Tilura was called by Mr. Ekenhart, and so she took a step forward and faced him.


    In the meantime, I sheathed my sword and moved back, while shaking my numb hand.


    ¡­It will feel prickly for a while¡­this hand¡­


    Tilura swung down, much like I had, but her attack was blocked, and her sword bounced away.


    Once she had lost her bnce, Mr. Ekenhart thrust the wooden sword towards her face.


    ¡°And now you are dead too, Tilura. It is not a bad thing to swing with all of your might, but you have to think about what you will do if you are thrown off bnce.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    And so in just a few minutes, both Tilura and I were defeated by Mr. Ekenhart.


    It could not be helped, as we had only been training for a few days, but I did feel a little resentful over how easy it had been for him.


    ¡°Now, I think you both can see howcking you are. It¡¯s only natural, as your training has only just begun.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°But there is not a whole lot that I can teach. In order to use a sword, you need to practice until you can be one with it. And you have to be able to think.¡±


    ¡°To think¡­¡±


    ¡°To think ahead. How will your opponent move? How should you move? And whether or not you can actually do it¡­ Well, there are also a lot of smaller details¡­¡±


    The movement and countermeasures would depend on the opponent.


    And the thing that would tell you how you should move, was your daily training.


    ording to Mr. Ekenhart, that was the basics ofbat.


    I didn¡¯t know much about fighting, but the words of someone who easily beat us sounded quite convincing.


    ¡°I¡¯m a busy man, after all. And so today will be thest day that I can oversee your training.¡±


    ¡°You are leaving, father?¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was a duke. And so it was no surprise that he was busy.


    I had to be thankful that he had spent time to train us during these past few days.


    Tilura had looked nervous and a little crestfallen when learned that he was visiting, but she looked very sad now.


    Well, she was still young, and so it made sense that she¡¯d want to be with her father. She had only been upset earlier because of the matter of arranged marriages.


    ¡°Yes, I cannot stay here forever. Besides, there is the business of selling Mr. Takumi¡¯s herbs.¡±


    ¡°I apologize for the trouble.¡±


    ¡°There is no need for you to apologize, Mr. Takumi. This is also for the benefit of our family.¡±


    After that, Mr. Ekenhart tousled Tilura¡¯s hair to cheer her up, and then he told us the next part of our training.


    It was a little less harsh than before, but still harsh enough.


    We repeated it over and over, and then he said that there was one more thing that we could do. By mastering this training, we should be able to handle a sword without any help.


    But as it was time for dinner, the training would have to wait for the following day.


    And after dinner, Tilura and I practiced our swings as usual.


    I thought back on my fight with Mr. Ekenhart as I tried swinging in different ways. And I did feel that I was swinging less aimlessly and more efficiently,pared to before.


    Mr. Ekenhart had also warned us to not develop any troublesome habits, which I had kept in mind.


    On the other hand, I hadn¡¯t been able to y with Leo very much¡­ It was with such thoughts that I went to bed.

 Chapter 111

    Chapter 111


    Drastic Measures for Leo Familiarization


    The next morning, Mr. Ekenhart woke up unusually early, and we all sat at breakfast together.


    There was a peaceful atmosphere in the room, and Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian were talking about the direction that would be taken concerning the selling of my herbs.


    ¡°Sebastian, I will take the herbs, that Mr. Takumi madest time, back with me. However, I want you to start selling in the town of Ractos immediately.¡±


    ¡°As you wish, Your Grace. I will have Mr. Takumi supply us with some more herbs, within his ability.¡±


    ¡°Good. There is a lot of traffic moving in and out of Ractos, and so news will spread quickly if we start selling there.¡±


    ¡°Perhaps you will start hearing word of it by the time you arrive, Your Grace.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. Well, that would not be strange.¡±


    Apparently, they were going to start selling the herbs at the nearest town, which I had been to before.


    I didn¡¯t mind that they were ordering more herbs, but that meant I would be paid again¡­ I would have to think about what I will do with that money.


    ¡°Father. If you¡¯re going to sell them in Ractos, will it be at that store?¡±


    ¡°Aye. As the products sold there are not always the same, it will be easier to add the herbs as a new product.¡±


    What was this store that Ms. ire and Mr. Ekenhart were talking about¡­?


    I had only been to the town of Ractos twice, so I didn¡¯t know which stores were run by the duke¡¯s family.


    But I suppose I would find out once they started selling the herbs.


    After that, Ms. ire joined the two as they discussed their ns.


    Tilura and I just listened as we ate the delicious breakfast.


    There was still too much that I didn¡¯t know, and so I couldn¡¯t join the conversation¡­


    By the time breakfast was finished, they had finished talking, and so we took our tea and rested.


    ¡°Father. Please be careful on the way back home.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll be fine. I have my guards, after all.¡±


    ¡°But still¡­¡±


    I had heard that it was nearly a week¡¯s ride back to the main house.


    And this was a world with monsters, so you never knew what might happen.


    But Mr. Ekenhart justughed at Ms. ire¡¯s concerns.


    I did think that he would be fine, judging by his strength.


    ¡°And Mr. Takumi, I doubt there is anything to worry about, as Sebastian is here, but please look after this mansion as well.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    I nodded at Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s words. It was proof that he trusted me.


    And while I doubted that anything could happen, it felt nice to be relied on.


    It was only natural for me to do something for those that helped me.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    Leo was also nodding as if to say that she could be relied on.


    Mr. Ekenhart flinched in surprise¡­ So he still wasn¡¯t used to Leo¡­


    ¡°Father. Don¡¯t you think that you should get a little more used to Leo?¡±


    ¡°¡­During the past few days, I¡¯ve seen how gentle she is¡­but¡­¡±


    Perhaps Mr. Ekenhart knew a little too much about what Silver Fenrirs were capable of.


    But aside from that knowledge, he might be more sensitive to the overwhelming power of a Silver Fenrir that Leo had.


    And she was big.


    Yes¡­ Perhaps we could do what we did with Ms. Gelda¡­


    ¡°Mr. Ekenhart. Do you still have some time before your departure?¡±


    ¡°What, Mr Takumi? ¡­I have about an hour¡­ Yes, I can spare that much.¡±


    One hour, huh¡­ It wasn¡¯t long, but it was enough time.


    ¡°In that case, Mr. Ekenhart, could youe out to the garden?¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Ah, very well.¡±


    ¡°What are you going to do, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Something that should help Mr. Ekenhart get ustomed to Leo¡¯s presence.¡±


    I said quietly to Ms. ire, so that her father could not hear. And then I took Leo and we went out into the back garden.


    ¡°What now, Mr. Takumi? Are you going to test Weed Cultivation again?¡±


    That was his guess, but he was wrong.


    And so I approached Mr. Ekenhart with Leo and told him what we were going to do.


    ¡°I think it will help you get used to Leo. Leo, I¡¯m counting on you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Leo answered me and the turned her back towards Mr. Ekenhart and then sat down.


    ¡°Now, Mr. Ekenhart. Please get onto Leo¡¯s back.¡±


    ¡°¡­On Leo¡­? But¡­¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s all right, father. Leo is very gentle, and you will not be shaken off.¡±


    Tilura told him that it was perfectly safe and she started to push him.


    And then Ms. ire joined in, so that Mr. Ekenhart had no choice but to climb onto Leo¡¯s back.


    ¡­For some reason, Sebastian also joined in, and seemed to be enjoying it¡­ Sebastian. Should you really be pushing your master around like that?


    ¡°¡­Good Leo¡­I am ready¡­¡±


    ¡°Leo. Go slowly.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    With Mr. Ekenhart now on her back, Leo got up to her feet.


    And while Mr. Ekenhart was used to riding on horses, he looked nervous and stiff as he clutched onto Leo tightly.


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyau! Kyau!¡±


    And just like that, Leo began to run freely in the vast garden.


    As the rider was afraid, she started running at a slower pace, much like the first time she had carried Tilura.


    Behind them, Sherry barked happily as she followed.


    Did she think that they were ying¡­? Well, at least Sherry would be getting some exercise from this.


    ¡°What a good idea this was, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s what helped Ms. Gelda ovee her fear. And so I thought that it would be effective.¡±


    ¡°Is that so¡­ Indeed, I haven¡¯t seen Ms. Gelda looking afraid for some time¡­¡±


    Now that I thought about it, Ms. ire had not been present during the first time I had let Ms. Gelda and Ms. Lyra ride on Leo.


    For some time after that, Mr. Ekenhart rode on Leo as she ran around the garden, and we all smiled and watched.


    And then Mr Ekenhart seemed to get used to riding her. And once he was rxed, he looked very intimidating. Like a great bandit who was riding on a giant wolf.


    ¡°Leo, it¡¯s time toe back.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    It must have been thirty or forty minutester. I thought it was long enough, and so I called Leo back.


    Leo barked in reply and then came running with increased speed.


    Then she stopped and sat down so that Mr. Ekenhart could dismount.


    His feet did look a little shaky, but he would get used to it.

 Chapter 112

    Chapter 112


    Mr. Ekenhart Returned to His Main Residence


    ¡°¡­Phew¡­ Leo is quite amazing¡­ She is able to run faster than any horse¡­¡±


    ¡°Father, are you used to being around Leo now?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ It would be strange if I was still afraid of her. ¡­Good Leo. Thank you very much.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart replied to Ms. ire and then thanked Leo.


    Leo was sitting still and allowed him to pet her gently.


    She seemed to enjoy this, and her tail was wagging from side to side.


    I doubted that it had eradicated his fearpletely, but it was certainly a great improvement.


    ¡°Thank you, Mr. Takumi. While it was a little forceful, I no longer feel any fear towards Leo.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. I am sorry for surprising you like that. But there wasn¡¯t much time, and I felt bad for Leo.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry about that. I¡¯ve seen enough of Leo to know that she doesn¡¯t attack humans, but she is still a Silver Fenrir. And so I couldn¡¯t help but wonder¡­¡±


    The knowledge of Silver Fenrirs and what they were capable of would rush back in his mind, and that would cause fear, I think.


    So it was no wonder that he was afraid. But still, I wanted him to know that Leo was really just a cute wolf.


    I suppose it was something that a lot of pet owners felt.


    ¡°Your Grace, it is almost time.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see. Very well.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Ekenhart, about the selling of the herbs¡­ Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Aye.¡±


    Sebastian had been looking at his watch, and so we went back into the mansion at his urging.


    As we walked, I thanked Mr. Ekenhart onest time.


    He nodded in reply.


    We went through the mansion and arrived at the entrance hall.


    Here, the servants of the mansion were all waiting, just like they had when he first arrived.


    ¡°Now, Your Grace. Please be careful.¡±


    ¡°Father. I pray that you¡¯ll have a safe journey.¡±


    ¡°Please be safe, father!¡±


    ¡°Thank you for everything, Mr. Ekenhart.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Takumi and Tilura. You must continue to train diligently.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll do my best.¡±


    We all said our farewells, and Mr. Ekenhart pressed us to continue with our training.


    ¡°Well, then. I look forward to the next time we will all meet.¡±


    ¡°Safe travels, Your Grace!¡±


    The servants said in unison as Mr. Ekenhart left the mansion.


    This time, I tried joining them.


    ¡­It actually felt rather good.


    ¡°Giddyup!¡±


    After Mr. Ekenhart and his guards had mounted their horses, the one in the lead shouted, and the horses began to run.


    We lost sight of them after they passed through the gates, and so we went back into the mansion.


    After that, Tilura and I started to train, as if Mr. Ekenhart was still here.


    As for Ms. ire and Sebastian, they went to a different room in order to begin preparations for selling the herbs in the town of Ractos.


    Leo carried Sherry on her back and watched us as we trained.


    And they also had fun following us when we started running.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, Tilura, you must be tired.¡±


    We finished our training, and it was now dinner time.


    Ms. ire was waiting for us in the dining hall, and urged us to take our seat at the table.


    As we had been training seriously, both Tilura and I ate ravenously.


    Perhaps, this was not very polite, but Ms. ire did not say anything, as she had when it was her father, and just watched with a smile.


    Well, we weren¡¯t eating quite as badly as him.


    After dinner, we rested with some tea, and then it was back to swinging swords outside.


    I didn¡¯t want to ck off, just because Mr. Ekenhart was no longer here.


    After all, this training wasn¡¯t for someone else. It was for my own protection.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll do my best.¡±


    Leo barked encouragingly, and Tilura seemed reinvigorated by it.


    And not wanting to fall behind a small, but determined child, I continued to train.


    Of course, I did not forget to make herbs with Weed Cultivation during breaks, as a way of being more efficient.


    After I had finished my sword swings, I took a bath in order to wash off all of the sweat and feel refreshed.


    I just knew that I would sleep well tonight.


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¨C


    The next morning, after breakfast and training, Tilura went off to study.


    Ms. ire was adamant that she focus on more than just training, and had sent her solemnly to her room.


    As for me, I continued to train alone. Though, Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda kept an eye on me.


    From tomorrow, I would start a different kind of training. The one that Mr. Ekenhart had suggested to me before leaving. And so I wanted to strengthen my body as much as possible.


    Well, there was only so much that could change in one day, but I would do what I can.


    ording to Mr. Ekenhart, if I focused on my training for this entire day, I would be able to add something new to the regimen.


    Once it was time for lunch, I joined Ms. ire, as well as Tilura, who hade out of her room.


    As Tilura was quite tired after training, she had not been able to focus on her studies as much, and so she was told she would have to continue studying after lunch.


    ¡°Really. It is fine to train, but you must be able to concentrate as well.¡±


    ¡°¡­But I hate studying¡­¡±


    During lunch, Ms. ire had nothing but sighs and warnings for her younger sister.


    Tilura was so serious and focused when she was training.


    But I suppose working with your body was very different from working with your head.


    ¡°Tilura.¡±


    ¡°What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Your studies are a part of your training too, you know?¡±


    ¡°¡­It is? I think that training would do me more good than any studying.¡±


    Apparently, she did not see how the two were rted to each other.


    Well, perhaps she saw the physical side alone as training, and didn¡¯t think the rest was part of it.


    ¡°Don¡¯t you remember what your father said? It¡¯s important to think. If you can acquire a lot of knowledge through studying, there will be so much more that you can think of while fighting with a sword.¡±


    ¡°¡­Is that so?¡±


    I didn¡¯t actually know what she was studying, but I knew that having a wider breadth of knowledge woulde in handy when fighting.


    Of course, I¡¯m sure a lot of that knowledge wouldn¡¯t help her inbat, but it would surely help her in other ways.

 Chapter 113

    Chapter 113


    Tilura Studied Hard


    You never knew when or where knowledge would be useful.


    It wasn¡¯t just knowledge. It¡¯s important to continue to use your head and think.


    Without thinking, you won¡¯t know how the other person will move, or how you should move. There would be so many things that you didn¡¯t know.


    I had only just started training, and I was not at a level to be able to instruct others. But even then, I felt that being able to think was very important.


    Because I had that experience of facing Mr. Ekenhart and swinging my sword without thinking of anything, and being easily beaten.


    ¡°Life is filled with surprises. You have nothing to lose by studying hard.¡±


    ¡°I understand¡­ I will try to study¡­so I can continue training.¡±


    Tilura seemed like she still didn¡¯t quite understand. However, she did agree to do her best with her studies.


    I think that now, she would focus a little more.


    As we had the new training tomorrow, I would feel bad for her if she couldn¡¯t participate because she needed to study.


    ¡°Thank you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. When I was that age, all I could think of was ying, and I didn¡¯t care for school at all. But that¡¯s something I regret now¡­ And I don¡¯t want Tilura to feel the same way.¡±


    While Ms. ire was thanking me, I had only said it because I didn¡¯t want her to experience what I did.


    And I had a lot more to regret when I started work¡­ Perhaps if I had studied harder, I would not have ended up at such a terriblepany.


    After lunch, I drank one cup of tea and then returned to my training.


    Ms. ire had taken Tilura back to her room.


    ¡°I hope she¡¯s able to focus properly now.¡±


    I muttered.


    Eating herbs while training meant I was capable of training for much longer than would usually be possible.


    Though, being able to focus since I was alone might have been part of it. In any case, it was much more work than what I did when Mr. Ekenhart was with us.


    ¡­And I was getting used to moving my body. Perhaps it was starting to change.


    I stopped before dinner time so that I could take a bath, and then I waited in the dining hall.


    Usually, there would be someone else waiting there already, so it was a strangely new experience.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Have some tea.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    Ms. Lyra had poured me some tea, so I took a sip.


    As always, Leo had a bowl of milk prepared by Ms. Gelda, and she drank it eagerly.


    Sherry seemed to have been with Leo all day. Perhaps it was because Tilura had no time to y with her now.


    But then again, Sherry had taken a liking to Leo¡¯s back, and had been sleeping there a lot.


    ¡°Kyau. Kyau.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Sherry had been drinking her milk next to Leo, but then she raised her head and started barking.


    And then Leo also looked up and barked.


    At the same time, the dining room¡¯s doors opened, and Ms. ire, Tilura and Sebastian walked in.


    Apparently, Leo and Sherry had been reacting to their footsteps.


    They must have very good hearing.


    ¡°Ms. ire, Tilura. Good evening.¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re quite early, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°I finished studying, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    I greeted them while drinking my tea.


    Ms. ire was a little surprised to see me waiting here.


    Well, I had been quite busy during the past few days¡­


    But Tilura seemed to have been able to concentrate, unlike during the morning, and there was a look of aplishment on her face.


    ¡°And how did it go, Tilura?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I told myself it was so I could train, and I did my best.¡±


    ¡°¡­If only you didn¡¯t need that as an incentive¡­ Well, you at least did well today.¡±


    As for Ms. ire, she did not like that sword training was the goal here. But she had observed that Tilura had indeed studied hard, and so she had to be satisfied for now.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, I won¡¯t have to study for a while, starting tomorrow!¡±


    ¡°Is that true, Ms. ire?¡±


    ¡°Yes. After lunch, Tilura studied to a shocking degree, and finished several day¡¯s worth of lessons. ¡­Of course, all the effort was for her sword training¡­¡±


    ¡°Hahaha.¡±


    Then she must have believed my words and taken the bait. And look at the results.


    Indeed, even though she sometimes looked like she was having trouble while training, I could also tell that she was having fun. She really wanted to do it¡­


    ¡°Because we¡¯re going to start the new training that father talked about. I¡¯m not going to let any studying get in the way!¡±


    ¡°Ah, I see. So that¡¯s why.¡±


    ¡°That¡­ I¡¯ll be counting on you, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Tilura was very much looking forward to tomorrow¡¯s training.


    And it happened to be something that required Leo¡¯s cooperation.


    I¡¯m counting on you too, Leo.


    Once we were all seated, the food was brought in, and we ate dinner.


    After the meal, Tilura and I went out to finish our daily sword swinging practice.


    Then I shared some herbs that would help her sleep in preparation for tomorrow, and then went to bed.


    As I had trained hard today, I would likely get a good night¡¯s sleep once again.


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    After breakfast the next morning, and a short break for digestion, Tilura and I went out into the garden, followed by Ms. ire and the others.


    From today, we will start training while holding our swords.


    I did some stretching so that I could move quickly, and then unsheathed the sword and moved away from the others.


    ¡°Leo, you¡¯re up.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, good Leo!¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    As if to answer Tilura¡¯s call, Leo barked loudly.


    Then she walked towards us and stopped so that she was facing us.


    This was the training that Mr. Ekenhart had suggested.


    While it was new, it wasn¡¯t anything special.


    Simply put, we were going to face Leo and attack her with our swords.


    ¡°You¡¯re rather intimidating when viewed like this¡­¡±


    ¡°Good Leo, you¡¯re a little scary.¡±


    ¡°Gau¡­¡±


    Leo was taking this training very seriously, and the aura of the Silver Fenrir seemed stronger than usual.


    She wasrge enough to carry multiple people, and had silvery fur that shone with dignity. And then there were the ws and fangs.


    We immediately knew that if she wanted to, she could shred us to ribbons in a sh.

 Chapter 114

    Chapter 114


    We Started The New Training


    With this training, Leo would not attack us.


    Because Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s suggestion had been that we try to hit Leo with our swords.


    He said that if we could ascertain the quick movements of a Silver Fenrir and hit her, that would be proof that we had skill as swordsmen.


    Leo¡¯s fur was soft and fluffy, and was wonderful to touch. However, when entering herbat stance, it would apparently harden enough to block swords.


    And so no matter how many times we might hit her, Leo would not actually get injured.


    Mr. Ekenhart hadn¡¯t been used to Leo at that point, and so he whispered this to me so that Leo wouldn¡¯t hear him.


    That did make me feel a little conflicted¡­


    ¡°Now, I¡¯ll give the starting signal¡­¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    Sebastian had been watching from a distance with Ms. ire, but he stepped forward now.


    As we waited for his signal, we faced Leo as if ring, and held our swords ready to attack at any moment.


    Leo was so intimidating now, that I could feel a cold sweat run down my back. But I ignored it and tried to focus.


    Tilura must have felt the same way. I could tell that she was nervous.


    ¡°Now¡­begin!¡±


    ¡°Hmm!¡±


    ¡°Ha!¡±


    As Sebastian gave the signal, we rushed forward and swung our swords at Leo.


    It was more of a test swing. I didn¡¯t know how Leo would move, and I was also still just an amateur.


    It was important to think, but I wanted to see what would happen if I just went all out and attacked Leo first.


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Though all my strength went into the swing, Leo merely moved to the side and dodged it.


    To Leo, my attack was not even a gentle breeze. I could tell by her bark that she was not concerned.


    ¡°Ha!¡±


    As soon as I had swung down, I turned my wrists and swung back upwards.


    At the same time, I took a step forward so that I could hit her where she had moved.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    And yet again, Leo calmly moved on light feet and dodged my de.


    ¡­In fact, the way Leo had moved just now¡­I could barely even see it¡­


    For nearly an hour after that, Tilura and I continued to swing our swords at Leo.


    And Leo would continue to dodge us with a series of movements including side steps and jumps.


    ¡°Ha¡­Ha¡­¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­phew¡­ Leo is too fast¡­ha¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    At first, Leo had been taking this training very seriously, but once she realized how easy it was to avoid our attacks, she started treating it like an amusing game.


    In other words, our attacks were still not good enough for her.


    ¡­That hurt my pride, a little¡­


    Still, this was a Silver Fenrir. The strongest of monsters.


    And so there was no way that beginners like us would be able to hit her so easily. I told myself this.


    ¡­But I also promised myself that I would hit her eventually.


    ¡°Are you all right, Mr. Takumi? Tilura?¡±


    ¡°Ha¡­ha¡­ I¡¯m fine.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­haa¡­I¡¯m fine too.¡±


    Ms. ire called out to us. But we were tired and panting so hard that we could barely answer.


    It was then that Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda brought us some water.


    ¡°Here.¡±


    ¡°Drink this, Lady Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Ha¡­ha¡­ Thank you¡­ha¡­glug¡­!¡±


    ¡°Thank you¡­haa¡­haa¡­glug¡­¡±


    I thanked them and drained the cup in a single gulp.


    Once we had caught our breath, Leo, who was now carrying Sherry on her back, walked towards us, along with the others.


    ¡°¡­Phew¡­ Leo. You¡¯re so fast that I couldn¡¯t hit you at all.¡±


    ¡°¡­Good Leo¡­that was amazing.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    Leo barked as if to say that it was nothing. Sherry was just happy to be riding on Leo¡¯s back.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, Lady Tilura. From what I could see, there was nothing wrong with the form of your swings. You just need to think a little more about how you willnd a hit.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ To be honest, I can barely even follow Leo¡¯s movement with my eyes. I¡¯m not sure what to do about that¡­¡±


    It was practically impossible to keep up with Leo¡¯s speed.


    After all, it wasn¡¯t like I could move so fast that others couldn¡¯t see me.


    In that case, I might have to think of some roundabout way of getting a hit¡­


    ¡°I do not know a lot about swords, but why not make your swings faster?¡±


    ¡°Faster¡­¡±


    While it would be impossible for me to be as fast as Leo, maybe I could make just my swing faster for an instant¡­


    ¡°In any case, you two will need more training.¡±


    ¡°It sure looks like it.¡±


    ¡°I will do my best!¡±


    Whether it was a roundabout way, or swinging faster, I still needed to train in order to put it into action.


    We hadn¡¯t been training for long, and while the herbs made things efficient, we still didn¡¯tpare to people with more experience.


    ¡°Leo. I¡¯ll be counting on your help again.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    From now on, it will be every day. Training with Leo, basic training, and sword swings.


    ¡­Thankfully, I was starting to really enjoy it.


    When I looked to the side, Tilura had an expression of determination, and I could see that she would continue to do her best.


    Now that the training with Leo was finished, we took a short break, and then returned to basic training.


    Swinging swords was fine, but it was no good if you ran out of energy so quickly.


    And so in order to build up my strength, I would jog until lunch time.


    Leo would run happily next to me, but Tilura looked like she was barely keeping up.


    But it was impressive, given how small she was.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, it¡¯s time for lunch.¡±


    ¡°¡­Ha¡­Ha¡­ Very well.¡±


    When the sun was high in the sky, Ms. ire called to tell us that lunch was ready.


    Resting was also important.


    There was no point in rushing with training, we just had to be diligent.


    And so we wiped ourselves with the hot towels that Ms. Lyra prepared, and then headed to the dining hall.


    ¡°Thank you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    After lunch, I went out into the garden again and trained.


    But first, I made some herbs for muscle recovery and shared it with Tilura.


    ¡°Tilura. This doesn¡¯t help with fatigue, so don¡¯t push yourself too hard, all right?¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    She replied cheerfully. And then we trained thoroughly until dinner time.

 Chapter 115

    Chapter 115


    I Decided To Watch The Herbs Being Sold


    During dinner, as I sat next to Leo and dug hungrily into my te in order recover my energy and strengthen my body, Ms. ire addressed me.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Regarding the day after tomorrow¡­ Could you take the day off from your training?¡±


    ¡°My training? Well, I can do that, but what is the reason?¡±


    There was meaning in continuing to train every day¡­ No, I would not go that far, but they did say that it took several days to make up for one lost day.


    That being said, I had been training so much recently, so surely I could rest for one day.


    Though, I did wonder what was happening on that day?


    ¡°The day after tomorrow, we will start selling your herbs in the town of Ractos. And we want you toe to Ractos so you can observe.¡±


    ¡°The herbs¡­I see¡­¡±


    When it came to the selling of the herbs, the duke¡¯s family was in charge, and I generally just left everything in their hands. However, I was still interested to see how they would be sold.


    ¡°Very well. I will go to Ractos the day after tomorrow.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    Ms. ire thanked me. But I was the one who had asked them to sell them, so I should be thanking her.


    ¡°I want to go too!¡±


    Tilura had been standing next to us and listening. She now raised her hand excitedly.


    Well, Tilura hadn¡¯t been able to apany us thest time that we went to Ractos, so it was no wonder that she wanted to go this time.


    ¡°Tilura. You have your studies, don¡¯t you? Just because you can¡¯t train that day, it doesn¡¯t mean you have nothing else to do.¡±


    ¡°But I can finish up my studies tomorrow! And then you can take me with you!¡±


    While Ms. ire was using her schooling as an excuse, Tilura insisted that she could finish it in time to go to the town.


    ¡°Still, we are going to there to watch Mr. Takumi¡¯s herbs being sold¡­ It¡¯s not to have fun, you understand?¡±


    ¡°I understand. But, I don¡¯t want to stay in the mansion all day¡­¡±


    In fact, Tilura hadn¡¯t even left the mansion since my arrival.


    She hadn¡¯t been able to go to town and had to stay behind when we explored the forest.


    The forest had its dangers, so it could not be helped. But this time, there wouldn¡¯t be any encounters with monsters, so it should be fine.


    Even with her training and studies, it was only natural for her to want to go out sometimes.


    ¡°Ms. ire. Perhaps we could allow Tilura toe with us? I don¡¯t think it will be dangerous¡­and she says that she will study to make up for it.¡±


    ¡°¡­Even you, Mr. Takumi¡­ Very well. Tilura, you cane with us.¡±


    ¡°Yes! Thank you, sister. And Mr. Takumi!¡±


    Now that she had permission, Tilura threw her hands in the air with joy.


    If it made her this happy, we should have given her an opportunity to go to town sooner.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau. Kyau.¡±


    Leo and Sherry became very loud after seeing Tilura¡¯s excitement.


    What¡­? Do you two want to go too?


    ¡°Ms. ire. It seems like Leo and Sherry want to go as well¡­¡±


    ¡°Good Leo apanied usst time, and was epted by the people of the town¡­ But Sherry¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau?¡±


    While Leo breathed a sigh of relief upon hearing this, Sherry tilted her head to the side.


    It was like she was saying, ¡®You¡¯re not going to take me?¡¯


    Leo would make very simr facial expressions¡­ It reminded me of how bad I would feel for leaving her behind in order to work¡­


    ¡°Lady ire. Sherry is a fenrir. ¡­Even if she is still young, I think she can help guard you.¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    As Ms. ire pondered over whether or not to take Sherry, Sebastian came to the pup¡¯s aid.


    Obviously, Leo was more than enough when it came to protection, but Sherry¡­ Even if she was young, she was a fenrir. So perhaps she could fight.


    When we had found her in the forest, she had been attacked by trolls. But she was surrounded, so it was no surprise that she couldn¡¯t do anything.


    Fighting againstrge numbers was difficult unless you were notably stronger than them.


    ¡°¡­Are you sure, Sherry? There will be many people in the town, and you cannot get too excited or start attacking people.¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    Ms. ire asked Sherry after hearing Sebastian¡¯s words.


    Sherry nodded reassuringly, and Leo barked as if to say that she would be watching her closely.


    ¡°Leo says she¡¯ll keep an eye on her, so I¡¯m sure it will be fine.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­very well. Sherry cane with us too.¡±


    ¡°Kyau-kyau.¡±


    ¡°You¡¯reing with us Sherry.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    My words were thest push, and Ms. ire agreed that Sherry coulde along.


    Sherry started to wag her tail happily, and then run around Ms. ire¡¯s feet.


    Tilura was also happy that Sherry wasing.


    While it wasn¡¯t for fun, it was nice that we would all be together.


    ¡°Excuse me, Mr. Takumi. There are several things I want you to make in addition, so that they can be sold in Ractos¡­¡±


    As I was watching Sherry run around, Sebastian tapped me on the shoulder.


    Apparently, Mr. Ekenhard had taken most of the stock back with him, and so we didn¡¯t have enough to sell in Ractos.


    ¡°Very well. Is there an order form¡­or can you tell me which herbs you will need?¡±


    ¡°I will have the order form prepared for you by the time that dinner is finished.¡±


    ¡°In that case, I¡¯ll prepare half of it after dinner, and the other half tomorrow.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    I could do it while I practiced my sword swings.


    I was already using Weed Cultivation to make herbs for training, which included Tilura¡¯s share, but if I split it between today and tomorrow, there shouldn¡¯t be any risk of copsing.


    ¡°Please be careful, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. I¡¯ll be fine. I¡¯ve been toughening myself up with training. I doubt that I will copse so easily now. Besides, I don¡¯t want anyone to worry about me.¡±


    ¡°¡­If that is the case¡­¡±


    But Ms. ire seemed like she was more worried about me than ever.


    Well, I had fainted right in front of her¡­ So it was a natural reaction.


    Sebastian gave me a look that seemed to say, ¡®Don¡¯t you realize that physical exercise has nothing to do with the depletion of power while using the Gift?,¡¯ but I ignored him, andughed in order to put Ms. ire¡¯s mind at ease, and the dinner continued.

 Chapter 116

    Chapter 116


    I made more herbs to be sold in Ractos


    After dinner, while I was drinking tea in the dining hall, one of the other butlers came and handed Sebastian a sheet of paper.


    Sebastian inspected it as if to check if the contents were correct, and then he dismissed the butler.


    The butler bowed to me once before leaving the room, and then Sebastian approached me and gave me the paper.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Here is the list of herbs we will need.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    So it was the order form.


    I took the paper and scanned the contents.


    Hmm. One Loe and all the other herbs¡­


    It was the same selection of herbs asst time. I suppose it meant that these were the ones that were mostmonly used.


    I wanted to see other rare types, but I suppose those woulde in a future order.


    ¡°Is this number for Loe correct?¡±


    ¡°Yes. We still have some from the first time you used Weed Cultivation. Besides, we think that it¡¯s best to not have too much of the more expensive herbs.¡±


    Now that I thought of it, I had made quite a lot of Loe the first time I tried it.


    And when we first started to discuss the partnership, they had warned that allowing too much of it to enter the market could cause a great confusion. So adjustments would have to be made.


    One way to maintain the price would be to limit avability.


    ¡°Well, I don¡¯t think I¡¯ll have to worry about fainting then. It¡¯s less than the previous order.¡±


    ¡°Indeed? That is good to hear.¡±


    Ms. ire had been looking at me worriedly, and so I smiled as I said this.


    Though, I felt that she was overreacting¡­


    I suppose the reason that it was less thanst time, was because Mr. Ekenhart hadn¡¯t taken everything with him.


    I could easily fill in this order after my swinging practice. But in order to put their minds at ease, I would still split the work between today and tomorrow.


    ¡­In any case, I needed to do more research in order to figure out my daily limit¡­ But since there was the duration, it really wasn¡¯t something I could find out easily.


    ¡°Well, Tilura. Let¡¯s go and practice our swings.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I¡¯ll do my best.¡±


    I held the order form as I got up from my seat, and then took the sword that Ms. Lyra handed me.


    It was bad manners to eat at the table with your sword.


    Tilura also took her sword and we went out to the back garden.


    I finished the sword swings first, then made a few items from the order form while also making some recovery herbs.


    Then I gave Tilura her share of recovery and sleeping herbs, and then handed the others to Ms. Lyra.


    She always stood by and watched us during training, which I was very grateful for.


    After that, I took a bath to wash off the sweat, ate the sleeping herbs and got into bed.


    Leo had been in a good mood today, and half of her body was lying on the bed, so I used her fluffy fur as a pillow.


    That inbination with the herbs guaranteed a good night¡¯s sleep.


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    The following day, I ate breakfast as I always did, and then trained with Leo like yesterday.


    Both Tilura and I tried our hardest to hit her, but were once again unsessful.


    ¡­Leo. Why are you so fast¡­?


    Well, it wouldn¡¯t benefit us for her to go easy¡­ But it was hard to admit it.


    And so Tilura and I discussed what we could do to improve, and then continued with our other training, which included running.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, it¡¯s time for lunch.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    It was easy to lose track of time when you were out training, but Ms. ire¡¯s voice brought me back.


    Focusing was good, but you had to eat as well.


    And so we returned to the mansion for lunch.


    After that, Tilura and I split up to do different things.


    I needed to finish the rest of the order.


    And Tilura needed to study.


    She had promised to do two day¡¯s worth of studying so that she could go with us to Ractos tomorrow.


    ¡°¡­That¡¯s it, then.¡±


    I finished growing the herbs and started to pick them.


    As I gathered them, I used Weed Cultivation to change them into a state so that they could be used immediately.


    I was really getting used to this work¡­ While using it too much could be dangerous, this much was nothing.


    I could do it even more speedily than when I had demonstrated for Mr. Ekenhart.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. How is it going?¡±


    ¡°Sebastian. I¡¯ve just finished.¡±


    Sebastian hade out to see how things wereing along, and so I handed him the finished herbs.


    ¡°Hmm¡­impressive as always. They are all of good quality.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s good to know.¡±


    As Sebastian had a wide breadth of knowledge, he could tell by just looking at them.


    And I was d to have his stamp of approval.


    ¡°Now, you will be paid shortly. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°No, it¡¯s nothing at all. I¡¯m a lot more used to using Weed Cultivation now.¡±


    As for the payment, I didn¡¯t care when it came, as I had no ns to spend it yet.


    Of course, Sebastian was very orderly about such things, so I would probably receive it tonight.


    Now that I had finished with the herbs, it was back to training.


    I wanted to do a little extra, as there would be no training tomorrow, since we were going to town.


    That meant I would be extra tired, but I had Weed Cultivation.


    And so I made some herbs and ate them every time I felt a little tired while training.


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. I hope you aren¡¯t pushing yourself too much¡­¡±


    But before I could finish, Leo and Ms. Lyra, who had been watching, stopped me.


    Even though I was using the herbs, they still thought it was too much.


    ¡­Maybe I was getting a little carried away with this training business¡­


    I was grateful for their concern, and ended the training for the day.


    I hadn¡¯t realized it, but it was already dinner time.


    Perhaps that was proof that I wasn¡¯t thinking enough, and pushing myself too far¡­


    Figuring out the right pacing was difficult.


    It was with such thoughts that I went with Leo and Ms. Lyra to the dining hall.

 Chapter 117

    Chapter 117


    We Went Out To Sell The Herbs


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Leo. I did my best, and now I¡¯ll be able to go to town tomorrow!¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s nice, Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Tilura studied hard today.¡±


    When we arrived at the dining hall, Tilura was overjoyed as she exined this to us.


    As she had finished in time, she had been given permission to apany us tomorrow.


    And so Leo and I praised Tilura.


    Ms. ire was also looking at her with a pleased expression.


    ¡°Ah, Mr. Takumi. Here is your payment.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    As I sat at the table, Sebastian came to me before the food arrived, and he handed me a leather bag.


    I looked inside, and confirmed that it was the same amount that had been written on the order form.


    ¡°Thank you, Mr. Takumi. Now we can start selling the herbs in Ractos tomorrow.¡±


    Said Ms. ire. And then the food was brought in and we ate.


    Once everyone had finished eating, I approached Sebastian.


    ¡°Sebastian. About the items I purchased during ourst visit to the town. How much was it in all?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, you really don¡¯t have to worry about that, you know?¡±


    Said Sebastian, but I still wasn¡¯tfortable with the idea that they had paid for everything that I had.


    When buying those things, I had said that I was just borrowing, and so I had to pay it back properly.


    Even though I knew it was just their kindness.


    ¡°But Mr. Takumi, it was really such a small amount?¡±


    ¡°No. I had made those purchases with the intent of returning them. And so it won¡¯t feel right until I do¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, that¡¯s very decent of you¡­¡±


    But was it?


    It seemed like the most normal thing. Borrowed money should be returned¡­


    Well, if I knew one thing about Ms. ire, it was that she didn¡¯t think much about such things.


    ¡°And it¡¯s thanks to you that I now have a means of earning an ie. You must allow me to start paying you back.¡±


    ¡°¡­If you insist.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. As the profits for this house are expected to be very great once we start selling the herbs, the amount you borrowed is really not significant¡­¡±


    Giving me the money had meant nothing to them, but I had been very grateful nheless.


    After all, had it not been for that shopping trip, I would be forced to continue wearing Sebastian¡¯s clothes. And I would have alsocked many things during the forest search.


    ¡°In that case¡­the amount is¡­¡±


    Sebastian whispered it to me quietly.


    I suppose you were not supposed to talk about such things in a loud voice.


    ¡°I see¡­ Yes¡­¡±


    And so I paid him from the leather bag that I had just received.


    I was d that it was an amount that I had on me.


    Of course, I still had some money left in my room, if it wasn¡¯t enough.


    That being said, tailored clothes sure were expensive¡­


    Now that I had an idea of the currency of this world, I knew just how expensive it actually was.


    It would be considered a great luxury to have a tailored suit made like this in Japan¡­ I would have to take very good care of it.


    ¡°Well, good night then.¡±


    ¡°Good night, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Tilura. You better go to sleep, all right? Good night.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyau! Kyau!¡±


    After returning the money and drinking tea, I decided to retire early for tomorrow.


    And so there would be no sword swinging tonight.


    Though, Tilura seemed so excited about going out tomorrow, that I wasn¡¯t sure she would be able to fall asleep.


    In any case, I said good night to everyone and then went to my room.


    ¡°Well, I¡¯m going to take a bath.¡±


    ¡°Wou-wou.¡±


    I said to Leo, and then left the room.


    As Leo still hated baths, she curled in a corner of the room with obvious disinterest.


    Now that I could understand Leo much better, perhaps I could find out why she felt that way.


    If we could find the reason, then maybe we could do something about it.


    ¡°Now that I think about it, I still haven¡¯t asked if Sherry hates baths as well¡­¡±


    It was with such thoughts that I headed to the bathing room.


    After washing up and soaking in the hot water, I got out and ate some sleeping herbs, and then jumped into bed before my body cooled.


    ¡°We¡¯re going to the town tomorrow. You better behave, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I said to Leo from my bed. She barked back as if to say, ¡®I know that!¡¯ And then I fell asleep.


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¨C


    The next morning, after breakfast, I finished preparations to leave, and then went with Leo to the entrance hall.


    As this was the first day that the herbs would be sold in Ractos, we had eaten breakfast a little earlier than usual.


    This was because we needed to deliver the herbs to the store that would be selling them.


    ¡°Ms. ire. Sorry to keep you waiting.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. Tilura isn¡¯t here yet.¡±


    Ms. ire had already been waiting at the entrance.


    But Tilura wasn¡¯t here yet¡­was she still getting ready?


    As I wondered about this, I heard loud footstepsing down the staircase that connected the second floor to the entrance hall.


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    It was Tilura.


    And Sherry was being held in her arms.


    ¡°Tilura. There is still some time, so stop running like that.¡±


    ¡°Sorry.¡±


    ¡°But I did expect you to be here sooner. What happened?¡±


    ¡°I almost forgot to bring this with me!¡±


    Tilura said as she pointed to the sword on her waist.


    ¡­Ah. While I doubted we would face any danger. Perhaps it wasn¡¯t a bad idea.


    Besides, I had brought my own.


    ¡°I see that everyone is here. Let us depart then.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°I can¡¯t wait!¡±


    ¡°Kyau. Kyau!¡±


    Sebastian was carrying a bag that was likely filled with the herbs. And with that, we all stepped out of the mansion.


    ¡°Have a good day!¡±


    Said the servants as we left.


    ¡­I was used to being sent off by them now.


    ¡°Lady ire, Mr. Takumi. We will be escorting you today.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    Outside, the mounted guards bowed to me and Ms. ire.


    It was Johanna and Nichs, who had apanied us to the forest.


    Well, thank you again.

 Chapter 118

    Chapter 118


    We Arrived at the Duke¡¯s Shop


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Will you ride on Leo this time? Or will you ride in the carriage?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­I think I¡¯ll ride in the carriage this time. And Tilura can ride on Leo.¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    It would take us nearly an hour to reach Ractos.


    And though it sometimes made me a little nervous, I would ride with Ms. ire in the carriage.


    Tilura was really looking forward to going out to town, and she would probably have more fun if she rode on Leo.


    ¡°Leo, you go with Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°I can ride on Leo? I can¡¯t wait!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    Leo answered me, and theny low so that Tilura could climb onto her back.


    Tilura smiled broadly as she got on.


    Sherry also climbed onto Leo¡¯s back, and sat happily next to Tilura.


    ¡°Thank you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°No, I¡¯m just d that Tilura and Sherry are having so much fun.¡±


    Ms. ire thanked me when I entered the carriage.


    But these days, I really enjoyed watching Tilura and Sherry when they were having fun.


    Perhaps it was a sign that I was getting old¡­ Even though I was still on the younger side¡­ I think.


    ¡°Now, let us depart.¡±


    We sat in the carriage, and then Sebastian took the reins and the horses began to trot.


    Likest time, the guards rode on their own horses, and then Leo stood up with Tilura and Sherry on her back.


    Once we were through the gate, Leo rushed past the carriage.


    ¡°Leo. Don¡¯t run around too much!¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    After running ahead, she would return and then circle the carriage or move close to and then away from the guards yfully. And so I called out to Leo.


    I was sure that she would be careful so that Tilura and Sherry didn¡¯t fall off, but I also didn¡¯t want them to get tired.


    ¡°I see that someone is having fun.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Leo hasn¡¯t been able to run much, as I¡¯ve been busy training. So perhaps this is her way of letting off steam.¡±


    Ms. ire and I watched them through the window as we talked.


    ¡°No, I was talking about you, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°Me?¡±


    I turned to look at her and saw that she was staring at me.


    Did I look like I was having that much fun¡­?


    ¡°Hahaha. Well, it¡¯s always been that way with Leo¡­ But I enjoy watching children like Tilura and Sherry having fun.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    For some reason, Ms. ire squinted her eyes at me.


    What was it?


    But there was no answer, and the carriage continued on its way towards Ractos.


    I could asionally hear Sebastianughing in the driver¡¯s seat. Both he and Ms. ire would sometimes act very strangely¡­ What was it?


    It was with such questions in my mind that we continued to talk.


    ¡°We have arrived. Likest time, the carriage will be dropped off, so you¡¯ll have to wait.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    In the end, we had arrived in Ractos before the question was answered¡­


    Ms. ire and I got out of the carriage and watched Sebastian and Nichs take it and the horses away.


    So Johanna would stay with Ms. ire.


    Tilura got off of Leo and went over to her sister, while Leo came to me while still carrying Sherry.


    ¡°Good girl. Are you happy after all that running?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau-kyau.¡±


    Leo sure looked satisfied as I scratched her on the head.


    Sherry was also barking happily.


    ¡­She sure seemed to enjoy riding on top of Leo¡­ But shouldn¡¯t a fenrir get some more exercise¡­?


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting. Now, let¡¯s go to the store.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Sebastian had returned, and just likest time, he led us through the town of Ractos.


    We went down the same main street and then turned into a side street halfway through. After walking a little further, we arrived at the store.


    ¡°Here it is.¡±


    ¡°This is the duke¡¯s store?¡±


    ¡°Yes. One of many, but we will start selling the herbs here.¡±


    Sebastian said as I looked at the building.


    Unlike many of the others in this town, it was made of stone and veryrge.


    Not quite as big as the general goods store, but it had two floors, with the first being the area where goods were sold.


    Perhaps it was about the size of a supermarket in Japan.


    Of course, Leo could not go inside, and so she would have to wait outside with Sherry¡­and Nichs.


    ¡°Excuse me.¡±


    ¡°Ah, Mr. Sebastian. We were waiting for you. And I see Lady ire has honored us with her presence. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°This matter is very important for the family, so it¡¯s only natural that I shoulde.¡±


    With Sebastian in the lead, we entered the store and met the middle-aged man who was waiting for us.


    He patted his balding head and greeted Sebastian and Ms. ire.


    ¡°And could this be¡­?¡±


    ¡°Yes, that is right. However¡­¡±


    ¡°I understand the situation.¡±


    After talking with Sebastian with a hushed voice, the man approached me and bowed.


    ¡°I¡¯m so happy to meet you. His Grace has entrusted me with the keeping of this store. My name is Kalis. And you are Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Yes, Takumi. Do you know about me then¡­?¡±


    He knew my name.


    ¡°Yes. Sebastian told me about you in advance.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, I have taken the liberty of informing Kalis about you. After all, he will be responsible for selling the herbs. However, I am sure he will be very discreet with that information.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    ¡°I swear on Lady ire¡¯s name, that I shall not talk to anyone about you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    So Sebastian had contacted him before our arrival.


    Still, the man vowed that he would not talk to anyone else about me.


    I suppose they wanted to keep this information secret, as there may be people who would target me because of my ability.


    Mr Kalis had to know, because he would be selling them directly.


    And since I trusted the family, I would leave it to them when it came to the decision of who to tell.


    ¡­Because I doubted I would be able to decide.


    ¡°Here are the herbs that are to be sold.¡±


    Sebastian said as he handed over the herbs that he brought from the mansion.

 Chapter 119

    Chapter 119


    We Prepared to Sell the Medicinal Herbs


    ¡°So these are the herbs we nned to sell.¡±


    Mr. Kalis took the bag from Sebastian and looked inside.


    As I had been the one to make them, I felt just a little nervous at having a real tradesman inspect them¡­


    ¡°Hmm¡­ They look to be of very fine quality¡­ Of course, I have never sold herbs myself. But I¡¯ve been a merchant for a long time¡­and have never seen herbs being sold that were of this quality.¡±


    ¡°Is that so?¡±


    Mr. Kalis was sighing with great emotion as he held the herbs and inspected them.


    And for some reason, Sebastian looked very proud as he heard this¡­even I felt a little proud.


    I didn¡¯t know why I had been given this ability, but it was now a part of me.


    And so it felt good to have something I made with it be praised.


    ¡°Well, everything is here. Hey, someone!¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    Mr. Kalis shouted to the back of the store, and a few men and women came out.


    He handed them the herbs and gave them detailed instructions.


    They were probably the clerks here.


    ¡°Now, do as I said.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°What are they going to do?¡±


    Mr. Kalis handed the bag of herbs to the clerks.


    They answered him enthusiastically and then went to a nearby table and spread out the herbs on it.


    ¡°They are separating them, as we won¡¯t be selling them inrge bundles here.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­so they are for personal use¡­?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    The herbs in the bag were merely bundled and separated by type, while the dried and powdered ones were wrapped in cloth so they wouldn¡¯t get mixed up.


    As each type was bundled together, it would be very inconvenient, unless customers wanted to buy all of it at once.


    And I doubted that anyone would do that, if it was for personal use.


    The clerks took out the herbs and started the process of separating them and wrapping them with paper or cloth.


    And then Mr. Kalis took out a long table from the back.


    ¡°What¡¯s that for?¡±


    ¡°Oomph¡­phew¡­ This is where they will be disyed. This is the first time we¡¯ll be selling them, after all. And so I want to ce them outside.¡±


    So saying, Mr. Kalis took the heavy-looking table to the front of the store.


    I see¡­ Like this, passersby will be able to see that they¡¯re selling herbs.


    It would definitely make things easy to understand.


    And since they had never sold herbs here before, it was necessary to advertise.


    No one woulde to buy herbs at a store that was known to not sell them.


    ¡°Ahhh!¡±


    It was with such thoughts that I watched Mr. Kalis go out to set the table. But just then, I heard a shrieking from outside.


    ¡­Was that Mr. Kalis? What happened?


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi, let¡¯s go and see.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­I did warn him in advance¡­¡±


    Ms. ire and I looked at each other and then headed outside.


    If something happened, we might have to help¡­ Well, Johanna was also there¡­and so was Leo.


    For some reason, Sebastian was sighing behind me, but I ignored him and went outside.


    ¡°Mr. Kalis? What¡­¡±


    ¡°There¡¯s a¡­fe¡­fenrir!¡±


    ¡°¡­It was Leo, wasn¡¯t it?¡±


    What we saw when we went outside, was Mr. Kalis, who had fallen on his buttocks after letting go of the table. And Leo was pushing her nose into him with a worried expression.


    ¡­So he was surprised because of Leo¡­?


    ¡°Kalis¡­ I told you about this already. That Mr. Takumi has a Silver Fenrir called Leo¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Ye-yes. You did say that, but¡­¡±


    Sebastian moved out between Ms. ir and I and walked over to Mr. Kalis.


    Apparently, he really had fallen after being surprised by Leo.


    ¡­But Leo was just so adorable and¡­ Well, maybe it was because she was ratherrge.


    ¡°Kalis. Good Leo would never hurt anyone. So don¡¯t worry.¡±


    Said Ms. ire. And then she went up to Leo and petted her on the head.


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau. Kyau.¡±


    ¡°Oh, you want to be petted too, Sherry? There, there.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll pet them too!¡±


    Sherry looked a little jealous as she saw Leo looking very pleased, and so she also came forward to be petted.


    Upon seeing this, Tilura started to pet them as well.


    I didn¡¯t really care, but Leo¡¯s back had really be Sherry¡¯s regr spot, huh¡­


    ¡°¡­Are you sure¡­?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Isn¡¯t that right, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Yes, it¡¯s fine. Why don¡¯t you try petting her, Mr. Kalis?¡±


    Mr. Kalis got to his feet after watching Ms. ire pet Leo.


    Leo¡¯s size and general appearance seemed to still intimidate him, but perhaps that feeling would fade once he touched Leo¡¯s fur.


    And I guided Mr. Kalis towards Leo and then raised his hand and ced it on Leo¡¯s body.


    ¡°Ooooh¡­ It¡¯s so soft¡­ So it really doesn¡¯t attack people¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    After touching Leo¡¯s fluffy fur, Mr. Kalis was greatly moved by the soft texture, as well as how tame Leo was.


    Leo nodded knowingly and barked with approval.


    ¡­Well, I don¡¯t think that Mr. Kalis waspletely over his fear yet¡­ But I hoped it wouldn¡¯t take too long.


    It didn¡¯t seem like it was so bad that he would have to be treated like Mr. Ekenhart. Besides, it wasn¡¯t really possible to carry people and run around in the town.


    ¡­If Leo ran at top speed in the town, it would certainly cause a scene¡­


    ¡°Phew¡­ I¡¯m terribly sorry, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. It¡¯s true that Leo has a surprising appearance. But you will get used to it.¡±


    Mr. Kalis apologized after he moved his hand away from Leo, and then he continued to prepare the front of the store.


    He picked up the table that he had knocked over, and then put it in ce. Then he set small signs on the table.


    They were the descriptions and prices of the herbs.


    And as always, in spite of being written in anguage that wasn¡¯t Japanese, I could read them just fine.

 Chapter 120

    Chapter 120


    Leo Was Very Popr With Children


    ¡°Some people won¡¯t know what herb it is without an exnation.¡±


    You had to know what effect it would have before buying it.


    If you bought some without knowing what it does, it wouldn¡¯t be very useful.


    Of course, there would likely be people who would want to ask directly for an exnation, and so the clerks had been instructed to talk with such customers.


    After the disy table was set, the clerks came out from inside the shop.


    ¡°We finished packaging them.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Now ce them out right here.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    The clerks followed Mr. Kalis¡¯s order, and neatly ced the wrapped up herbs on the table.


    But once every type was lined up, I realized that one was missing.


    ¡°There is no Loe? What happened?¡±


    ¡°Loe is a very expensive herb. And so it will only be brought out when a customer asks for it. Besides, it¡¯s possible that this ce will get very crowded, so it may be dangerous to leave it out here.¡±


    ¡°After all, someone might try to steal it.¡±


    Exined Mr. Kalis and Sebastian. That did make sense.


    I suppose there were people out there who would use the opportunity to steal something very valuable¡­


    I recalled the group of men who had stopped us during thest time I visited this town with Ms. ire.


    Now that I think about it, I wonder what happened to them?


    Regardless, all the preparations for selling the herbs wereplete.


    ¡°Now, we only have to wait for some customers to arrive.¡±


    The clerks waited on the other side of the table.


    They were ready.


    As Ms. ire, Tilura, Sebastian, and I were not the ones selling it, we sat at a table inside of the shop, and waited.


    I couldn¡¯t see what was happening outside, but we didn¡¯t want to be seen in front of the store either.


    While Leo and Sherry were waiting outside with Nichs, Mr. Kalis suggested that they might attract customers, and had them sit near the tables.


    I had told Leo to be calm and listen to what Mr. Kalis said, so I was sure that it would be fine.


    And while the clerks were a little rmed when they first saw her, they were quite relieved by how gentle Leo was, and by the softness of her fur.


    ¡°I want to touch it forever¡­¡±


    ¡°I didn¡¯t know that Silver Fenrirs were like this¡­¡±


    ¡°I want to make a bed and pillow out of it¡­¡±


    They muttered to each other. However, I was the only one who could use Leo¡¯s fur as a pillow.


    Though, Tilura did sometimes fall asleep while hugging Leo¡­


    I thought of such things as we waited inside and drank tea.


    ¡°It¡¯s starting to get noisy out there.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I suppose this is the time when the most customers appear?¡±


    Said Sebastian and Ms. ire. And so I listened carefully and¡­ Yes, I could hear many voicesing from outside.


    It was right before midday, so perhaps there were more people walking around?


    ¡°I¡¯m going to go and have a look.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    I said to Ms. ire as I got up from the table and headed to the door.


    Then I opened it just a crack and peered outside. Indeed, there was a crowd of people surrounding the table in front of the store.


    ¡°Would some herbs really attract so much attention?¡±


    I muttered, and then looked more closely. Mr. Kalis was walking around Leo and organizing a line.


    As for Leo, she was surrounded by children that were Tilura¡¯s age, and around them, were adults who were likely their parents.


    It seemed that as there were too many people, they had moved away from the table with the herbs.


    Upon seeing this, I moved away from the door and returned to Ms. ire and the others.


    ¡°It looks like Leo is very popr with children¡­¡±


    ¡°Leo? But why¡­¡±


    Ms. ire looked puzzled when she heard this.


    As Leo was a Silver Fenrir, people would often be intimidated by her¡­ So this was¡­


    ¡°I think Mr. Kalis knew what he was doing.¡±


    ¡°What do you mean?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, they are just like Lady Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Tilura?¡±


    ¡°Me?¡±


    As I wasn¡¯t sure what Sebastian meant, I turned to look at Tilura.


    She was blowing on her tea in order to cool it, and then looked up. Clearly she didn¡¯t know why she was being talked about.


    ¡°Children like Leo, don¡¯t they? A calm and gentle Leo will attract children, who will bring their parents. And those parents might be customers.¡±


    ¡°¡­So, like Tilura, they will want to y with Leo, and that will attract customers?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. He probably got that idea after seeing how quiet and obedient Leo was.¡±


    I see¡­ He targeted families then¡­


    Show Leo, and sell the herbs to the parents of the children whoe.


    Besides, people with children might want to have a stock of medicinal herbs in the house.


    They could be ill, just like Tilura had. And so you could rest easy if you had some that were ready to use.


    ¡°I¡¯m going to go outside.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Be careful.¡±


    I said to Sebastian, and then stepped outside.


    I was curious to see how Leo was handling all the attention.


    While she did enjoy ying with children, it would be quite different when there was a great crowd. Perhaps she wouldn¡¯t know what to do.


    ¡°How are things going, Mr. Kalis?¡±


    ¡°Ah, Mr. Takumi. Your Leo was a lot more effective than I was expecting. I¡¯m terribly sorry.¡±


    He said, and then I looked at Leo.


    She was being petted and hugged by the children, but sat quietly and did not move.


    However, there was something in her expression when she looked at me that resembled a cry for help.


    ¡­I think that since it was her first time being with so many people, she did not know what to do.


    ¡°This is her first time doing this, and she is a little taken aback, I think.¡±


    ¡°Is that so? I was worried that she might get angry¡­ Hey, wait in line! Don¡¯te in all at once!¡±


    Mr. Kalis was busy dealing with the children, but did not know how to handle Leo.


    He was doing his best to try and stop the children from charging into and jumping on Leo, but he just wasn¡¯t enough to stop the mob.


    The parents also attempted to restrain their young, but once the children were excited, they could not be stopped easily.


    Leo had been surrounded by children back in our old world, but it was usually just four or five.


    But here, there were more than twenty surrounding her. So it was no wonder that she was at a loss.

 Chapter 121

    Chapter 121


    I Organized The Leo Queue


    ¡°I think I better help her.¡±


    ¡°Yes, please do. ¡­Hey! Wait your turn!¡±


    And so I moved away from Mr. Kalis, and went over to Leo.


    Mr. Kalis seemed to be quite busy with stopping children who were running around and not waiting for their turn.


    Leo looked quite happy when she saw me walk over to her¡­ Even her tail had wagged a little.


    And then I patted her body gently.


    ¡°Leo. You were very good to wait here quietly.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I said while petting her.


    Leo¡¯s bark was very quiet, as if she did not want to startle the children.


    Now, what could be done about this chaos¡­ I know¡­


    ¡°Leo. Why don¡¯t you bark very loudly once?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Are you sure about this? Leo seemed to be asking.


    ¡°Yes. It¡¯s fine. I¡¯ll deal with the aftermath.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I reassured her, and Leo barked quietly in reply and nodded.


    And then she took a deep breath.


    ¡°¡­Grau!¡±


    Leo howled loudly.


    And then the area suddenly became very silent.


    Leo barked much louder than even I was expecting, and though my ears rang a little painfully, I looked around to see the reaction of the others.


    The clerks who were selling the herbs, Mr. Kalis, and all the children and adults who were around Leo¡­had all froze and were looking at her.


    Now that they were quiet, it was my chance.


    ¡°Uh, first of all, could everyone step away from the Silver Fenrir? Parents, please take your children and step away!¡±


    I shouted loudly as if to match Leo¡¯s volume.


    ¡­Though, I did not get close¡­


    Still, as the ce was so quiet, everyone was able to hear me.


    ¡°This Silver Fenrir¡¯s name is Leo! If you want to touch Leo, then please wait in the line in front of Mr. Kalis, over here! You can take turns ying with her!¡±


    Upon hearing my words, the children began to move away.


    And then the parents also came and fetched their children.


    All right, that should do it.


    ¡°You can take it from here, Mr. Kalis.¡±


    ¡°¡­Uh¡­very well. ¡­If you want to touch the Silver Fenrir, please form a queue over here! You must take turns! By the way, good parents! We have very potent medicinal herbs that will cure ailments and injuries. Please take a look at the table over there!¡±


    Mr. Kalis called, urging the children to wait in line.


    ¡­He also didn¡¯t forget to advertise, which showed his skill as a merchant.


    ¡°Wee. Be gentle when you touch Leo. Don¡¯t worry, she¡¯s not scary!¡±


    ¡°Can I hug her?¡±


    ¡°Of course. But do it gently. She might get startled if you do it too suddenly. You wouldn¡¯t like it if someone did that to you, would you?¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    As the children waited in front of Mr. Kalis, I instructed them on how to y with Leo.


    Leo was no longer being swarmed by them, and only a few came forward at a time.


    After that¡­I don¡¯t know how much time passed. But I felt quite busy as I continued to guide the children forward.


    I didn¡¯t know where they wereing from, but the line never seemed to end.


    There were also some adults mixed in, but as long as they were respectful towards Leo, I didn¡¯t mind.


    ¡°Aha! I see you¡¯re selling something here. Business must be booming!¡±


    It was just as my voice started to grow raspy from so much shouting, I heard a loud voiceing from the table where the herbs were being sold.


    ¡°¡­What?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Upon hearing it, even Leo and the children stopped what they were doing and turned to look.


    ¡°Hahh!¡±


    With a shout, I heard the sounds of something breaking.


    I had to stop Leo from reacting and jumping forward, and then I looked between the gaps of the crowd to see what it was.


    What I saw was the remains of the disy table after it had been broken in two.


    Thankfully, Mr. Kalis¡¯s ability as a salesman had meant that most of them were sold, and so only a few herbs were scattered on the ground.


    ¡­Still, while it was my ability, it hurt a little to see the herbs I made on the ground like this¡­


    ¡°Customer, what do you think you¡¯re doing?!¡±


    ¡°AHHH!? I¡¯m no customer! If you don¡¯t want any more trouble, hand over the profits you made just now!¡±


    While Mr. Kalis tried to deal with the situation, the man was in no mood to calm down.


    If anything, from what I could hear, he was threatening to cause more damage unless they gave him some money.


    ¡°Leo, you wait right here. It will cause a bigger scene if you get involved.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    But I can handle it so easily? Leo seemed to say in reply, but I told her to stay put. And then I walked towards the voices in the crowd.


    I moved through the spectators until I had a clear view of what was happening. There was a man there who was shouting angrily.


    ¡°You again¡­ Weren¡¯t you arrested?¡±


    The man turned to look at me.


    He was one of the men who had threatened us thest time we had alle to this town to shop.


    They had been arrested and taken away by the town guards¡­ Were they really released so quickly in this world¡­or country?


    He had a mohawk, shoulder pads with spikes, and studded leather armor. Furthermore, he was wearing spiked gloves. Like someone from a post-apocalyptic world.


    ¡°Eh!? Who the hell are you?¡±


    Apparently, the man didn¡¯t recognize me.


    Well, Leo had been the one to deal with them. Ms. ire was beautiful enough to leave asting impression, but I hadn¡¯t even been standing in the front.


    ¡°You tried to attack us before, and the guards arrested you.¡±


    ¡°So you¡¯re¡­one of them!¡±


    He finally remembered me, and then he pointed his gloved hand at me as if he had found his new target.


    He was holding a small knife.


    So that¡¯s what he had hit the table with¡­


    ¡°Well, your fenrir isn¡¯t here to save you this time¡­ You¡¯re just smallfry now.¡±


    ¡°Hahh¡­ I guess you¡¯ll have to be arrested again.¡±


    The man had seen that Leo wasn¡¯t with me, and suddenly looked confident and rxed.

 Chapter 122

    Chapter 122


    I Confronted The Man Who Caused The Ruckus


    ¡°I just escaped from there, and I am not going back!¡±


    ¡°!¡±


    Apparently, the man had escaped from the prison.


    He shouted such things as he raised his hands and then lunged forward with the knife he was carrying.


    I unsheathed the sword from my belt and swept the knife to the side.


    ¡­I was only able to do this because his movements were slow¡­ And I had studied the way Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s moved¡­


    ¡°What!?¡±


    The man was stunned that his knife had missed. I then unleashed a kick at him.


    My foot mmed into the side of his stomach, causing him to roll onto the ground. But even then, he tried to rise up in order to continue the attack. However, I thrust my sword out so that the tip pointed at his face.


    ¡°Do you still want to continue? If that¡¯s the case, I might have to push a little deeper with this?¡±


    ¡°¡­Tsk.¡±


    He must have realized that it was no use, as the man dropped the knife he was holding and the strength seemed to leave him.


    So I was able to move like this now¡­


    Not only was I thankful that I had trained so hard, but I was thankful to Mr. Ekenhart for teaching me, and to Leo for helping me train.


    ¡°Phew¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­! Gah¡­!¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Just as I had sighed and withdrawn my sword, the man snatched the knife off of the ground.


    So he was waiting for me to let my guard down¡­ However, before I could even register the danger, Leo jumped over the wall of spectators andnded so that her paw pressed down on the man¡¯s stomach.


    After being stepped on like this, the man let out a croak like a toad that was being squashed. And then he stopped moving.


    Apparently, Leo had been watching the man and detected his movement.


    ¡°Thank you, Leo. You saved me.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    I thanked Leo and patted her on the head. She was still stepping on the man.


    You should be more careful. Leo seemed to say, but it was hard to take her seriously when she was enjoying being petted at the same time.


    Just then, apuse erupted around us.


    It then grew louder as it spread.


    They were apuding Leo and I for taking down the man.


    I could also hear voices shouting.


    ¡°That was amazing, mister!¡±


    ¡°The way that the Silver Wolf swooped in¡­it was so gant.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, mister.¡±


    ¡°Leo is so cute.¡±


    Came the various voices.


    Most of them were praising us.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi!¡±


    As the crowd thanked us, Ms. ire and Sebasian must have heard the noise, as they flew out of the shop.


    Mr. Kalis came over as well.


    The clerks carried away the broken table and picked up the herbs from the ground.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, you are too reckless. You should leave such things to the guards.¡±


    ¡°Exactly, Mr. Takumi. You are too important to lose over something like this.¡±


    They were so worried about me, that they almost sounded angry. But even I couldn¡¯t exin why I had stepped forward¡­


    I had done it with a calm mind¡­ Well, it might have been because I saw the herbs on the ground.


    Perhaps it was his disregard for them that I found unforgivable.


    I might have been more angry than I realized¡­that wasn¡¯t good.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry¡­ It seems I was angry because he ruined the herbs¡­¡±


    ¡°It seems?¡±


    ¡°Well, I suppose I can understand your anger towards his actions, but¡­¡±


    Ms. ire looked a little puzzled by my words.


    The thing was, I didn¡¯t even realize that I was angry. And even now, I wasn¡¯t sure that I was.


    ¡°But more importantly, what should we do with him?¡±


    Ms. ire asked as she looked towards the man who Leo was holding down.


    We could just call the guards and have him arrested again. But it could be very troublesome if he escapes again¡­


    ¡°Tsk.¡±


    While the man seemed to be in pain under all that weight, he still red and clicked his tongue at us.


    He clearly wasn¡¯t sorry¡­ Also, Leo? Are you putting less pressure on him than it looks?


    If Leo put all of her weight down, she could easily crush a human to death.


    There were children here, and I did not want them to see a man get squished, while blood and other things flew in the air¡­ So perhaps Leo was being extra careful.


    ¡°Indeed¡­¡±


    ¡°What should we do, Sebastian?¡±


    Sebastian thought for a moment and then walked towards the man without answering Ms. ire¡¯s question. Then he said to the man,


    ¡°Did you know that this store belongs to the duke?¡±


    ¡°Ah? I don¡¯t know nothing.¡±


    ¡°So why did you choose this ce?¡±


    An interrogation?


    And so we all watched as Sebastian questioned the man.


    Though, Leo couldn¡¯t see too well, as he was under her foot.


    Mr. Kalis was looking at the fallen man with an expression of pity¡­ Why?


    ¡°I wanted money¡­ Damn it. I should have gone somewhere else!¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ You did all of this just for some money.¡±


    Sebastian then mused over those words for a moment.


    ¡°You have defied the duke on hisnds. Of course¡­he has the right to judge you.¡±


    ¡°And so what! Why are you telling me this!¡±


    The man did not understand why Sebastian was saying this, and he shouted angrily.


    Think hard¡­ Defy the duke on hisnds¡­ I didn¡¯t know much about thews of this country, but it seemed obvious to me.


    ¡°It was an attack on his house¡­threats and violence against his store¡­ Even the death penalty might not be enough for you¡­¡±


    ¡°What!?¡±


    The man went pale and then became speechless when he heard Sebastian¡¯s words.


    After hearing all of this, he finally understood the situation that he was in.


    However, Sebastian looked like he was enjoying this¡­his voice was extra low and threatening. And yet he also sounded calm, which made it all the more frightening.


    Perhaps Mr. Kalis knew what was going to happen, and that was why he pitied the man?


    ¡°¡­Now do you understand the position you¡¯re in? Ah, there is no use trying to run away. You are being held down by the great Leo. A Silver Fenrir¡­ She will not allow you to leave.¡±


    ¡°¡­So it¡¯s a Silver Fenrir¡­¡±


    ¡°Grrrrrr¡­¡±

 Chapter 123

    Chapter 123


    The Man Finally Understood His Situation


    After listening for a full minute, the man understood that Leo was a Silver Fenrir, and what it is that he had done.


    Leo seemed to have joined Sebastian, and was now growling in a low and threatening way¡­ Leo really did like to join in on the fun.


    Now that I think about it, he had just called Leo a wolfst time, and this time he seemed to think she was a fenrir.


    I suppose it was because he didn¡¯t know about Ms. ire or the duke¡¯s family.


    Now that he knew who it was he had antagonized, and what could happen to him now, the blood seemed to drain from his face as he grew pale.


    I didn¡¯t know that humans could even look that pale.


    ¡°He-help me! I was acting out of impulse!¡±


    ¡°Do you really think that¡¯s going to get you out of this¡­?¡±


    ¡°I-I¡¯m sorry! I repent! But just spare my life!¡±


    The man began to plead desperately with Sebastian.


    ¡°Sebastian¡­don¡¯t you think you¡¯re going a little too far¡­?¡±


    ¡°Hmm. But it¡¯s important to put the fear into them. Or they might do the same thing again¡­¡±


    Ms. ire muttered with uncertainty as she watched Sebastian threaten the man.


    Someone who would do the same thing after being caught once needed to learn to be afraid, or they would just repeat the same thing again.


    Well, I did think he had aplished that now¡­


    Besides, there was something very cowardly about the man.


    ¡°What should we do¡­?¡±


    ¡°I beg you! Spare me!¡±


    Sebastian continued to threaten the man, as if he was still undecided.


    This was getting very drawn out?


    ¡°I think he gets the point, Mr. Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­ He attacked you as well, didn¡¯t he? You wish to forgive him?¡±


    Uh, why did it seem like he was threatening me now?


    When Sebastian turned to face me, his eyes were still narrowed and his voice low.


    It was honestly a little unnerving¡­ You could tell that this was a man who had experienced a lot¡­


    And though I was a little overwhelmed, I continued.


    ¡°Well, he wasn¡¯t even good enough to put up a fight at all. As long as he knows that there will be no next time.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ If that¡¯s how you feel, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    So saying, Sebastian stood up straight again and let out a sigh.


    Perhaps Sebastian had continued for so long because he was waiting for Ms. ire or me to intervene.


    If that was the case, then he was quite the actor¡­


    ¡°Leo. You can get off of him now. Ah, Johanna. Can you tie his hands up?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Very well.¡±


    Leo nodded and then lifted her paw.


    Johanna had been standing next to Ms. ire, and just like thest time, she produced a rope from somewhere and used it to tie the man¡¯s hands and feet.


    ¡­I only needed his hands to be tied¡­


    As the man had no will to resist now, he justy there quietly.


    ¡°Now, you finally understand what you have done. Are you remorseful?¡±


    I asked. The man nodded repeatedly, like some kind of broken doll.


    ¡°O-of course. I am so sorry¡­ While I didn¡¯t know, I caused a lot of trouble¡­¡±


    The man said as he nodded at me.


    So he was capable of speaking politely after all¡­ Though, the mohawk moving up and down ruined the effect a little¡­


    Now, what should we do from here¡­


    After Johanna finished tying the man up, he sat upright. I watched him and pondered the question.


    As the binding around his hands and feet were also connected, the only thing he could move freely was his head.


    ¡°Ms. ire and Sebastian. I suppose it would usually be up to the duke to decide the man¡¯s fate. But would you mind if I handled it?¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed¡­ The table was broken, and there was other damage to the store¡­ But it was you who he threatened with the knife. So I do think that you have that right, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Well, you were also the one to restrain him. While this is not the passing of authority, I suppose we can turn a blind eye this time¡­ Don¡¯t you agree, Mr. Kalis?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ I will leave it to Mr. Takumi. We made more than enough profit off the new products in order to cover the cost of the table.¡±


    Ms. ire, Sebastian, and Mr. Kalis all agreed.


    Even Johanna and Nichs nodded.


    Well, perhaps there was a lot of trouble that woulde if the duke dealt with it, but Sebastian and the others said they would let it pass this time.


    I was grateful for how amodating they all were.


    ¡°But, what about everyone else who is gathered here?¡±


    ¡°Of course, it is something that everyone should know. Do you all understand? The duke¡¯s family is not involved in this matter.¡±


    The spectators who had been watching all nodded at Sebastian¡¯s words.


    As they all seemed to trust the duke, perhaps it wasn¡¯t necessary to speak so threateningly, Sebastian?


    In any case, I was d to see that everyone was satisfied here.


    Now, I had to think about what I would do with the man.


    ¡°Leo could eat¡­¡±


    ¡°Ahh!¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    I had only muttered it as a joke, but the man shuddered, and Leo shook her head with disgust.


    Don¡¯t worry, even I wouldn¡¯t make Leo eat a human.


    ¡°Well, I was just joking¡­ But still¡­¡±


    I could just hand him over to the guards, but then he might run away again¡­ Though it seemed quite unlikely with how scared he was now.


    And if I handed him over, there would be no point in having gotten everyone¡¯s permission.


    ¡°Mr. Kalis.¡±


    ¡°Yes?¡±


    As I had one idea, I called out to Mr. Kalis, who was standing nearby.


    At this point, the clerks had picked up the fallen herbs, and were lining them up on a new table that had been brought out.


    This table was smaller, but it was fine, as there were now fewer herbs to sell.


    I watched them and gathered my thoughts together before exining my idea to Mr. Kalis.

 Chapter 124

    Chapter 124


    I Thought Of What I Should Do With The Man


    ¡°Mr. Kalis. Do you have enough people working here?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ If we are going to start selling herbs like this, then perhaps we could use more help. Though, it depends on how they sell from here on¡­ But, why do you ask, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Well, I was wondering if this man could work here. He seems to be in desperate need of money.¡±


    ¡°That¡­¡±


    If they were going to sell my herbs, then they might need some help.


    However, Mr. Kalis did not seem like he wanted to hire someone who had caused such a scene right in front of his eyes.


    After all¡­he had broken the table and made threats.


    Well, what about this, then?


    ¡°What if he was hired by me? His job would be exclusively rted to herbs.¡±


    ¡°You, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°What are you thinking, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t understand the meaning of doing things like that¡­?¡±


    Not only Mr. Kalis, but Ms. ire and Sebastian were also surprised by my words.


    Well, this guy¡­had attacked me with a knife. Wanting to hire such a person was surely not normal.


    ¡°Sebastian, Mr. Kalis. When I make herbs, they will have to be delivered to this store, yes? And regrly.¡±


    ¡°Indeed.¡±


    ¡°Yes. They nearly sold out today, so we would need to restock regrly in order to avoid running out.¡±


    Sebastian and Mr. Kalis nodded.


    I could just make a lot of herbs at once and deliver them, but Ms. ire and the others would be so worried, and probably won¡¯t let me do it.


    There was the chance that I could faint again¡­ Besides, I also wanted to make herbs for my training, so it was best not to push myself too far.


    In that case, it was necessary to make smaller and regr deliveries.


    ¡°Obviously, it would be quite a hassle to deliver them here regrly.¡±


    I doubted that I, Ms. ire or Sebastian could deliver them each time.


    I had my training, and Ms. ire and Sebastian were busy with other duties.


    We only came today, because it was the first day that they were being sold.


    ¡°In that case, I thought I could hire this man to pick up the herbs from the mansion and deliver them here. And I suppose he could do some chores around the store when not making deliveries¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ So you want to make this man deliver them¡­ But do you really think that he will deliver them as you say?¡±


    Mr. Kalis understood my intention, but still didn¡¯t look convinced.


    Indeed, while fear might insure that he didn¡¯t go against us again, he still might try and run away.


    I wasn¡¯t exactly sure what to do about that¡­ I had just said what was on my mind, and perhaps needed to think about it more.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Mr. Takumi. What will you do if this man escapes?¡±


    ¡°Well¡­I¡¯m not quite sure¡­¡±


    I admitted to Sebastian that I had not given it enough thought.


    And he was only right to question me.


    ¡°I see¡­ Well, perhaps I can make a suggestion?¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    ¡°I am notpletely against your n, Mr. Takumi. After all, you will be able to keep a direct eye on him if he is working for you. However, he might still run away¡­ And so you could use magic.¡±


    ¡°Magic?¡±


    What was he going to do with magic?


    Surely it wasn¡¯t an attack¡­ Though, I wasn¡¯t really sure what you could do with magic in this world¡­


    What kind of magic was Sebastian going to use?


    ¡°There is a spell that allows you to track people. If you use it, he will not be able to run away. It¡¯s usually used on criminals.¡±


    ¡°It prevents them from running?¡±


    ¡°It doesn¡¯t prevent them, but allows you to capture them easily if they do¡­ I think this man was able to escape before the guards cast the spell on him.¡±


    I see. So if we used this spell, even if he ran away with the herbs, it would be easy to find him again¡­


    Though, that in itself was rather troublesome¡­


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? What is it, Leo?¡±


    As I thought about the magic that Sebastian told me about, Leo put her face close to mine.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff. Grr!¡±


    ¡°I see. That just might work.¡±


    ¡°What did Leo say?¡±


    ¡°She said that we should cast the spell on the man, and leave the chasing to her.¡±


    As Leo was faster than any horse, it would be easy for her to catch him as soon as he tried to run away.


    ¡°I see¡­ In that case, I will make it so that Leo will be informed if he runs.¡±


    ¡°You can do that?¡±


    ¡°Yes. With this magic, you can make multiple people aware of the target¡¯s whereabouts.¡±


    In that case, Leo would be able to detect it immediately and catch him.


    ¡°¡­And what do you think about that?¡±


    After I finished talking to Sebastian, I turned to the man who was sitting on the ground.


    He would have been listening to the conversation. With this requirement of having the spell cast on him, I would be able to hire him.


    If he epted it¡­that is.


    But if he wouldn¡¯t repent and agree to it, then I would have no choice but to leave him to the guards or Sebastian.


    ¡°¡­Uh, what do you mean?¡±


    ¡°It means that I¡¯m going to hire you. Don¡¯t worry, while I did say that I¡¯d put you to work, I do intend to pay you.¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re going to hire someone like me?¡±


    The man could not hide his surprise at this.


    Indeed, it was quite abnormal to hire someone who had attacked you with a knife.


    However, in spite of the fact that he had done something bad, I didn¡¯t know if I¡¯d be able to sleep well at night if he was executed immediately.


    In this country, such insolence against the duke might be worthy of a harsh punishment, but I was born and raised in Japan.


    I wanted him to have a chance of reform before something irreversible happened.


    ¡­That being said¡­I would have to ask if he had any other criminal record as well.


    ¡°It really depends on whether you want to reform and live a proper life. Also, we will cast the tracking spell on you. And should you try to run¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°I-I won¡¯t run! I promise!¡±

 Chapter 125

    Chapter 125


    I Decided To Hire The Man


    As if to continue from where I left off, Leo showed her fangs and growled. With a pale face, the man promised that he would not run away.


    As for whether or not he was to be believed, it all came down to how he worked from here on out. But now that he knew that Leo was a Silver Fenrir, he should understand that he could not escape. And so I doubted he would try anything foolish.


    ¡°So, will you work for me?¡±


    ¡°If you will have me¡­yes! I will do my best!¡±


    The man seemed very moved by my words as he nodded and epted.


    ¡°Well, Sebastian. Please do it.¡±


    ¡°You will be hiring a criminal. Are you sure about this?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I believe if set on the right path, he will be reformed. Of course, should he try and escape, I¡¯ll send Leo after him.¡±


    ¡°You are too soft, Mr. Takumi. From my point of view¡­ Well, I respect your way of thinking. Very well. I will cast the spell.¡±


    Sebastian was probably right, and I was being too soft.


    It was clear that he was a criminal, and there was the possibility that he would repeat the same offense again.


    However, for some reason, I could not ignore him so he would be sent off to be punished.


    ¡°Now then¡­ ck Element Mark Pursuit.¡±


    Sebastian had nodded at me once before turning to the man.


    Then he held his hand over him and chanted the spell and unleashed the magic.


    ck strands extended from his hand. They wrapped around the man and then disappeared after a few seconds.


    Now we would be able to track him¡­ It was definitely a strange sight.


    ¡°With this, you will always be able to know this man¡¯s current location. Can you see it, Good Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Leo nodded at Sebastian.


    Apparently, Leo was also able to tell, due to the magic.


    ¡­Magic really was convenient.


    ¡°Now, I will remove the ropes. I¡¯m sure that I don¡¯t have to tell you, but¡­¡±


    ¡°Ye-yes! I will stay calm!¡±


    I approached the man in order to unbind him.


    He looked at Leo and nodded readily.


    Leo was behind me and growling with bared teeth¡­ I doubted anyone would even think of doing anything violent in such a situation¡­


    ¡°All right, you¡¯re untied now.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, brother!¡±


    ¡°Brother?¡±


    ¡°Since you saved me, allow me to call you brother from now on!¡±


    ¡°Well, I suppose¡­ But you better work seriously, all right?¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    The man smiled and nodded.


    However¡­it definitely felt strange, being called ¡®brother¡¯ by someone who looked like they stepped out of a post-apocalyptic setting¡­


    ¡°Ah, Mr. Kalis. Do you have a minute?¡±


    ¡°Yes. What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    While I was dealing with the man, Mr. Kalis started selling the herbs again as if nothing had happened.


    That was quick¡­ He was certainly a tough salesman¡­


    But I called him over so that I could exin what would happen now.


    ¡°Mr. Kalis. From now on, this man will be delivering the herbs for me. And when he¡¯s not doing that, you can make him do odd jobs around the store.¡±


    ¡°Umm¡­while we could use the help, are you sure about this?¡±


    ¡°It should be fine. Sebastian had cast a magic spell on him, and he understands what will happen if he disobeys. ¡­You will work hard, won¡¯t you?¡±


    ¡°Yes! I won¡¯t do anything that would disgrace you, brother!¡±


    ¡°I can hardly believe this is the same man who caused such a scene¡­ Very well. I, Kalis, will watch over him as he works here.¡±


    Now, that was settled.


    Of course, I would have to be the one who pays him.


    That being said, since I was being paid for the herbs, I could just pay him from that¡­ I will have to discuss the matter with Sebastian and decide on a rate¡­


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s begin then¡­uh¡­what is your name?¡±


    ¡°It is Nick!¡±


    ¡°Nick¡­ Please follow me.¡±


    ¡°Yes! Goodbye, brother!¡±


    ¡°Aye. Work hard.¡±


    So the man¡¯s name was Nick¡­ Now that I thought about it, I had forgotten to ask him his name.


    And so I left Nick with Mr. Kalis, and patted Leo on the head for doing so well. And I went over to Ms. ire, who had been watching the whole scene.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Was that really wise? He attacked you with a knife¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. Not all criminals should be punished. It¡¯s better if they can be reformed. ¡­Though, Sebastian doesn¡¯t seem to agree¡­¡±


    I said with an awkward smile to Ms. ire¡¯s question.


    ¡°There is no doubt that you¡¯re too soft, Mr. Takumi. However, I stillmend the way you took care of the situation. Otherwise, it would have ended with a very harsh punishment.¡±


    ¡°Yes. It would be different if we were seen as being too lenient. It could cause confusion in thends that we govern.¡±


    ¡°So leaving it to you was likely the right thing to do, Mr. Takumi. ¡­That man¡­Nick. It¡¯s all up to him now.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sure that it will be fine. And if not, Leo will deal with him.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ording to Ms. ire and Sebastian, as the part of the duke¡¯s family, they could not have handled the situation in the same way.


    Those who stood on top had to be fair, or it would be difficult to govern.


    And in any case, there was no way that he could escape from Leo¡­ And now that I¡¯ve been training, even I could restrain him with ease.


    ¡°Wee back! What happened outside?¡±


    ¡°We¡¯re back, Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Tilura, Takumi was doing something very interesting.¡±


    After Ms. ire had led us back into the store, we were greeted by Tilura, who had been waiting patiently inside.


    Leo was still ying with the children, and I was sure that she¡¯d be able to handle them on her own now.


    Besides, Mr. Kalis and the other clerks were also used to being around her.


    Ms. ire then happily told Tilura about what had happened.


    Sebastian also filled in some details as they talked, and we enjoyed our time and rxed qwhile sipping some tea. And then a momentter, Nick walked in the door.


    ¡°Hey, brother! I came to call you because they finished selling all of the herbs.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    Mr. Kalis must have sent him in to call us.


    Since the herbs were all sold, we all stood up from the table and went outside.

 Chapter 126

    Chapter 126


    I Heard Some Rumors


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, we finished selling all of the herbs that you provided.¡±


    Said Mr. Kalis when we stepped outside.


    Now that the herbs were sold out, there were no more customers around the table, and only a few children and their parents were left ying with Leo.


    At least Leo seemed to be enjoying it¡­


    On the other hand, the herbs had sold out, and it was still a little before midday¡­


    I should be happy that things were going well, but was there really such a high demand for them?


    ¡°Mr. Kalis, is the number of people who need herbs growing?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Apparently, some dishonest physicians have infiltrated the town and started doing businesstely¡­¡±


    Sebastian asked Mr. Kalis this question.


    It did seem like there had been a lot of peopleing to buy them.


    Well, many of them had likelye to see Leo, just like Mr. Kalis had predicted, but the fact that they had sold out so quickly suggested there was still a high demand for them.


    ¡­However, what was this about dishonest physicians now?


    ¡°People are selling herbs of bad quality, or weakening the effects by adding other things to the powdered herbs, and yet still sell them at normal prices.¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­ So there are people who do such things¡­¡±


    Physicians that sell inferior medicinal herbs, huh?


    There were people like that in my old world too. So I suppose it was the same wherever you went.


    But Sebastian¡¯s eyes were shining with a suspicious light¡­ It was a little scary¡­


    ¡°It is quite bold of them to do such a thing on the duke¡¯snds¡­ This might be very interesting.¡±


    ¡°Sebastian enjoys crushing those who use cowardly methods. ¡­Perhaps it is like a hobby for him.¡±


    ¡°Lady ire, that is not true at all. It¡¯s only that I cannot forgive dishonesty. ¡­Hehe. I will make a report to His Grace as soon as we return¡­¡±


    While Ms. ire exined this to me, Sebastian denied the usation.


    However, his words and overall air after that seemed to suggest that she was actually correct.


    ¡°In any case, Mr. Takumi. About the future of the herbs¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Mr. Kalis ignored Sebastian and turned to me.


    The future¡­ If we could sell this much, perhaps I should start growing more of them?


    ¡°In terms of amount, it can either be the same or just a little more. Aside from that, I would like to increase the amount of Ramogi as well.¡±


    ¡°Ramogi? Is there so little of it then?¡±


    I had made Ramogi many times, so it would not be difficult to do.


    Well, I still had to be careful about fainting, so I couldn¡¯t just grow a lot of it without thinking.


    ¡°Yes. Recently, there has been gue that is spreading in a nearby vige and this town. And while it can be treated with Ramogi, as there are so many people who have fallen ill, there is currently not enough Ramogi to go around. Besides, with dishonest physicians selling their herbs as well, it doesn¡¯t always reach those who need it the most.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­the gue¡­¡±


    ¡°Thankfully, our shop is owned by the duke. And I¡¯ve seen the quality of your herbs, Mr. Takumi. And so if we focus on selling Ramogi here and help quell the gue, it would really help with our reputation.¡±


    Unlike those other diluted ones, my herbs would be very effective.


    And with Weed Cultivation, I can make herbs that are in the best state for maximum effectiveness.


    If we sold these good herbs, then it would help the duke¡¯s business and keep sales stable.


    ¡­If things go well, word might have spread quite far by the time Mr. Ekenhart reaches his house.


    ¡°As for the herbs that Mr. Takumi will make, I will handle the arrangements.¡±


    ¡°Sebastian¡­thank you.¡±


    Just a moment ago, Sebastian had been gleefully thinking about what he would do to the immoral physicians, but he now returned to himself and started to talk with Mr. Kalis.


    Well, I¡¯m sure that it will be fine if I leave it all to Sebastian.


    He just needed to tell me how many herbs I had to maketer on.


    ¡°Leo. You seem to be enjoying yourself.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Hehehe. Good Leo has be quite popr with the children of this town.¡±


    ¡°Of course, she is! Because she is so cute and gentle!¡±


    I moved away from Mr. Kalis and Sebastian as they talked, and stopped in front of Leo, who was ying with the three remaining children.


    Leo was wagging her tail happily as she yed with them.


    Ms. ire also watched with a smile.


    Tilura seemed very proud for some reason¡­ I suppose she was happy that someone she was close with was now popr with others.


    I petted Leo as the children wrapped themselves in her fur or rode on top of her back.


    She had done so well today¡­ With the handling of Nick, attracting customers, ying with the children. It was all because of Leo that we got through it.


    ¡°Brother¡­ Sorry to disturb you, but there¡¯s something I want to ask¡­¡±


    ¡°What is it, Nick?¡±


    As I was petting Leo, Nick came out of the store and approached me.


    However¡­being called ¡®brother¡¯ from someone who was older than me was¡­awkward, but I decided to not think about it too much.


    And so I moved away from Leo so that I could listen to what Nick had to say.


    ¡°Brother. Just earlier, you were talking about that guy who sells inferior goods, yes?¡±


    ¡°Yes, we were.¡±


    ¡°This guy¡­ He came in from a different town. But I heard him say that he was connected to a certain nobleman.¡±


    ¡°A nobleman¡­? And you really met this person?¡±


    I suppose he was talking about a noble who wasn¡¯t the duke.


    Because I couldn¡¯t believe that Sebastian or Ms. ire would be involved in such a thing.


    ¡°Well, just once, when I went to shake down the store¡­¡±


    ¡°Nick¡­¡±


    He only seemed slightly embarrassed by this. I would have hoped he would be more apologetic.


    Perhaps I will have to keep an eye on him from now on¡­

 Chapter 127

    Chapter 127


    Nick Told Me About What Was Happening


    ¡°Of course, I regret all of that now. But never mind that. It was when I was at that store¡­¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­ You better not do something like that ever again¡­ And then?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I know! ¡­And then these armored soldiers came out from the back of the store in order to suppress us. ¡­Just like that one¡­¡±


    Nick said as he pointed at Nichs.


    He was wearing iron armor, had a sword on his belt, and also wore a helmet. It was very obvious that he was a soldier.


    If these men looked the same, then they were likely soldiers as well.


    ¡°And then what did you do?¡±


    ¡°Me and the others tried to fight them, but then this man, who I assumed was the owner, came out as well¡­ And then he said this. ¡®We¡¯re here doing business with the approval of a noble house. What you are doing is a bold attack on their house.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ In other words, he was threatening you, saying that there would be retribution from the nobles?¡±


    ¡°Yes. We didn¡¯t want to get caught when we heard that, so we ran from the ce.¡±


    I see. That was quite simr to what just happened here¡­


    However, was it really true that they were backed by a noble house¡­?


    I didn¡¯t know if noble houses would involve themselves in such lowly business practices, so I could not say.


    I would have to talk about it with Sebastianter.


    ¡°Thank you for telling me. And you must never do that again.¡±


    ¡°Of course, I won¡¯t do it. I¡¯m going to do my best to be useful to you!¡±


    Nick was already acting like he was my sworn younger brother, but to me he was just a subordinate.


    It would be best if he was monitored continually.


    Though, I did hope that he would work hard.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. What were you talking about?¡±


    ¡°Ah, Ms. ire. The thing is, Nick¡­¡±


    ¡°What did he say?¡±


    I had gone back over to Leo after I finished talking with Nick, and Ms. ire wanted to know what we had been talking about. But just as I was answering, Sebastian ended his conversation with Mr. Kalis and started walking this way.


    That was good. I wanted him to hear this as well.


    ¡°Hmm¡­nobles involved with the sales of inferior herbs¡­¡±


    ¡°Mmm¡­this might get veryplicated¡­¡±


    Upon hearing what I had said, Sebastian and Ms. ire groaned and were deep in thought.


    If this involved other nobles, then merely punishing the sellers would not be enough to put the matter to rest.


    I didn¡¯t know much about the world of aristocrats, but when it came to the rtionships of powerful people, they would usually develop intoplex problems.


    ¡°In any case, I will have to report this to His Grace.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ Sebastian. Father wouldn¡¯t have arrived at the house yet, would he?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. From the mansion to the main house¡­he has probably not even reached the halfway point yet.¡±


    ¡°Would it be possible to catch him if you sent a messenger?¡±


    Ms. ire wanted to send a messenger to Mr. Ekenhart right away.


    ¡°¡­While it won¡¯t be easy¡­it must be done. His Grace will be able to n our course of action after hearing the news.¡±


    ¡°Yes. And then he¡¯ll be able to act as soon as he reaches the house. Unless, of course, he decides to return here instead.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ In any case, it would be best to get this news to him as quickly as possible. Nichs?¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    Once they hade to this conclusion, Sebastian shouted Nichs¡¯s name.


    ¡°Go and investigate the facts of the matter at once. And when that is done, make preparation and pursue His Grace. And, of course, do not forget to send someone to contact the mansion as well.¡±


    ¡°Understood.¡±


    After hearing this order, Nichs immediately made to leave.


    So it was Nichs who was going to have to go after Mr. Ekenhart¡­as he was chasing someone on horseback, he would have to ride hard with very little rest¡­ I know¡­


    ¡°Nichs. Wait a minute.¡±


    ¡°What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    I stopped Nichs and then searched inside of my bag.


    Oh, there. This is it.


    ¡°Take this with you. It¡¯s a herb to heal any muscle fatigue. And this one will get rid of tiredness.¡±


    ¡°I can have these?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I¡¯m afraid it will be a very taxing journey.¡±


    I said as I handed the two types of herbs to him.


    I had made them for my training, but I was sure they would be useful here¡­


    It was just too bad that I didn¡¯t have more.


    ¡°I ept them¡­gratefully.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Please stay safe.¡±


    Nichs epted the herbs carefully and then nodded once towards Sebastian before running off into the town.


    It will be tough, but good luck.


    ¡°Lady ire, Mr. Takumi. Lunch is ready, so pleasee this way.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Mr. Kalis.¡±


    After seeing Nichs off, we all ate lunch, which Mr. Kalis provided for us.


    And since Leo could not enter the store, we decided to eat outside at Tilura¡¯s suggestion.


    Sebastian, Johana, and Mr. Kalis joined us.


    And while Mr. Kalis¡¯s food was no match Ms. Helena¡¯s cooking, it was adequately delicious.


    Apparently, it had been bought on the streets by the other store clerks.


    If we ever had time, it might be nice to go sightseeing and buy food there.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. About your schedule after this¡­¡±


    We were almost finished eating when Ms. ire brought up my ns for the rest of the day.


    ¡°If you don¡¯t mind, I was hoping you would apany me for a while?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t mind. Where are you going?¡±


    ¡°There is an orphanage in this town. You see, this talk of gues and bad quality herbs has made me anxious¡­¡±


    An orphanage, huh¡­? They had such facilities in Japan. Fortunately, I had never been in one.


    I didn¡¯t know what they were like in this world, but Ms. ire seemed to be worried about the children there.


    And since I had no ns in particr, it might be a good idea to go and see it.


    If it turned out that they were also affected by these bad herbs, then I might have to use Weed Cultivation. Thinking this, I answered Ms. ire.

 Chapter 128

    Chapter 128


    We Went To The Ractos Orphanage


    ¡°Very well. Then we¡¯ll go to the orphanage after lunch.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Tilura. You¡¯ll be able to see the others again.¡±


    ¡°Really!? It¡¯s been so long!¡±


    Once it was decided that we would go to the orphanage, Ms. ire thanked me and then addressed her sister, who was stuffing her face with skewered meat.


    Judging by Tilura¡¯s reaction, she had been to the orphanage before.


    ¡°Well, Mr. Kalis. I look forward to working with you in the selling of the herbs. ¡­And Nick, you better work hard.¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course.¡±


    ¡°I know, brother!¡±


    After lunch, we said goodbye to Mr. Kalis and Nick then left the store.


    ¡­I was a little worried about Nick, but Sebastian said he would have someone keep an eye on him, so it was probably fine.


    Besides, there was the magic spell.


    ¡°Still, an orphanage, huh¡­? Do you go there often, Ms. ire?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ I try to visit it at least once a month.¡±


    On our way there, I asked Ms. ire about the orphanage.


    Apparently, managing the orphanage was one of the duties of nobles. And nobles who governed towns would always establish one.


    They were run with the taxes they collected. And though they differed greatly in wealth depending on location, as this one was owned by the duke, it was modest butfortable.


    ¡°Of course, it is still not muchpared to the average household¡­¡±


    While they were run on taxes, as the duke¡¯s business was seeding, he taxed the people very little.


    Which meant less funds for the orphanage. Though, these funds were also supplemented from the duke¡¯s own pockets.


    On top of that, people who were raised at the orphanage would often be hired as servants or soldiers. And they would in turn, help support the facility as a way of giving back¡­ Such was the environment.


    By the way, Ms. Lyra, as well as Ms. Gelda and Johanna, Nichs and Phillip, were all from the orphanage.


    ¡­About sixty to seventy percent of the servants in the mansion were.


    Sebastian said that it was better to hire people who were guaranteed to be loyal.


    ¡°This is the orphanage, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°So this is it.¡±


    Near the edge of the town, on the east side, that was the opposite of where we came, stood the orphanage.


    The building was nice, and well tended to.


    In fact, it looked like a church?


    There was a bell tower with a cross on top¡­ Therge doors in the front looked like they were about to burst open as newly weds ran out.


    Though, there were no stained ss windows. But the stone building otherwise looked a lot like a church.


    ¡°Is the headmistress here?¡±


    ¡°¡­Lady¡­ire? ¡­Ah, I didn¡¯t realize you were here. I will call the headmistress right away!¡±


    As I was admiring the building from outside, Ms. ire approached a woman who was sweeping the front with a broom.


    It must be someone who works here.


    ¡°¡­There is a serious atmosphere here.¡±


    ¡°Really?¡±


    Ms. ire looked a little worried as she watched the woman rush into the building in order to call the headmistress.


    As this was my first time here, I had nothing topare it to.


    However, the woman had been looking at the ground as if she was deep in thought.


    And that¡¯s why she hadn¡¯t even noticed it when Ms. ire approached her.


    ¡°Lady ire, Lady Tilura! Wee!¡±


    ¡°Anne, it¡¯s been a while.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s good to see you!¡±


    A thin, middle-aged woman appeared, along with the woman who had been sweeping.


    So this was the headmistress¡­ And just like the first woman, she was also dressed simr to a nun.


    It was ck cloth that covered her from head to toe¡­ It must be quite hot during days with strong sunlight.


    ¡°While we are always pleased to wee you two here¡­Right now¡­¡±


    ¡°Did something happen?¡±


    Head Mistress Anne looked at them apologetically.


    The other woman was also looking at the ground. Has something happened?


    ¡°No¡­it¡¯s just¡­most of the people here have be ill from the gue. And so I cannot allow you two toe in. If you should also be ill¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ So that¡¯s the reason. And what medicine?¡±


    Apparently, the gue had spread through the orphanage.


    I didn¡¯t know what kind of illness it was, but regardless, I understood why they didn¡¯t want to let the duke¡¯s daughter in.


    ¡°Medicine¡­we gave them some that we acquired cheaply¡­but it did not have much effect.¡±


    ¡°No effect¡­ Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Ms. Anne, this store you bought it from. Did they say anything about being connected to a noble house?¡±


    Ms. ire and Sebastian suspected that the medicine was connected to some malicious traders.


    If they were mixing the medicine with something else, it would weaken the effects, so it was no wonder they would not get healed.


    ¡°Huh? Yes. They did say that the store was managed by a noble. And so we thought they would be reliable¡­¡±


    ¡°I knew it¡­¡±


    ¡°So it wasn¡¯t about your house, Lady ire?¡±


    Apparently, she had assumed that it was run by the duke¡¯s family.


    Perhaps it was only normal for themon citizen to assume that it was lord of the town when they heard ¡®noble.¡¯


    ¡°No, we are not involved in that store at all. Besides, I¡¯ve heard that they sell goods of low quality. ¡­Sebastian, this¡­¡±


    ¡°It will be necessary to act at once. If left alone, it will have great consequences for the house¡¯s reputation. ¡­It was a good thing I had sent Nichs on ahead.¡±


    ¡°¡­So you aren¡¯t rted to them, Lady ire¡­ I did not know¡­¡±


    ¡°Anne. So everyone here is still troubled by the gue?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ No one has recovered, so they are still bed-ridden. And we don¡¯t have enough money to buy more medicine¡­ I¡¯m very sorry, Lady ire.¡±


    ¡°There is no need for you to apologize. It is the fault of the store who sold it to you.¡±


    So the people of the orphanage were still suffering due to the cheap medicine they had bought¡­

 Chapter 129

    Chapter 129


    The Sickness Had Spread Through The Orphanage


    ¡°As for how we will deal with this store, that can wait one moment. We must first tend to the people of the orphanage.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. ¡­Mr. Takumi, can you give them some herbs?¡±


    ¡°Very well.¡±


    ¡°¡­Who is yourpanion? And¡­that wolf¡­?¡±


    Mr. ire made the request. So it was my turn to act then.


    After all, I had Weed Cultivation, and could make something proper and of good quality.


    As for Ms. Anna, she looked at Leo and me with a puzzled expression. Now that I thought about it, we hadn¡¯t introduced ourselves yet.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi is a brilliant pharmacist. And this is Leo, a Silver Fenrir. ¡­Don¡¯t be afraid. Leo would never harm a human.¡±


    ¡°¡­Is-is that so¡­? ¡­Umm. Mr. Takumi. I am Anna, the headmistress of this orphanage.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s nice to meet you.¡±


    We bowed after Ms. ire¡¯s introduction.


    The woman who stood next to Ms. Anne looked very surprised by Leo, but she seemed to believe Ms. ire¡¯s words, and was not afraid.


    However, Ms. ire¡­I¡¯m not really a pharmacist¡­


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, it is to hide your ability. That way, it would not be strange for you to be carrying herbs.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    Sebastian whispered this to me, as if he had been reading my mind.


    Apparently, they wanted to conceal the fact that I could use the Weed Cultivation Gift.


    By minimizing the number of people who knew, I might be able to avoid being targeted by strange people.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, if you don¡¯t mind¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, but first, could I see how the patients are doing? Or I won¡¯t know what herbs will be effective.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. And I have some knowledge of herbs, and should be able to advise you.¡±


    ¡°¡­However¡­if Lady ire were to get infected¡­¡±


    Because I had to know the state of the illness when choosing the most effective herbs.


    If Sebastian were to be there and share his knowledge about them, then I would be able to grow them immediately.


    However, Ms. Anne was still worried about Ms. ire and Tilura.


    ¡°This is awful¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed.¡±


    But in spite of her worries, we entered the orphanage anyway.


    Ms. Anne finally agreed to it, though she was frowning.


    Leo, Tilura, Sherry, and Johanna all waited outside.


    As a child, Tilura was at greater risk, and Leo could not even fit inside of the building.


    Johanna stayed with them as their guard, and Sherry would keep Tilurapany.


    ¡°These symptoms¡­¡±


    ¡°What do they tell you, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    We were led to a children¡¯s room.


    It was likely a room shared by two or three people. And on the beds were children who had expressions of agony.


    I didn¡¯t have a lot of knowledge about illnesses¡­but I felt as if I had seen sights like this before.


    Their faces were red as if suffering from a fever¡­and they were coughing painfully¡­


    ¡­Maybe it was a cold¡­?


    ¡°What do you think, Sebastian?¡±


    It was dangerous for an amateur to make assumptions, and so I asked Sebastian for his opinion.


    I didn¡¯t know if they had colds in this world, but that¡¯s what it looked like to me.


    Sebastian scanned the room and then approached one of the children.


    ¡°Excuse me.¡±


    He then inspected their mouths and felt their temperature by putting his hand on their foreheads.


    ¡°Yes¡­ I believe that this is the same illness that Lady Tilura had.¡±


    ¡°Tilura¡­¡±


    Ms. ire muttered. She seemed to be terribly affected at the sight of the children, and wore a pained expression.


    Tilura had also been ill when I had first met Ms. ire.


    I had heard that the fever wouldn¡¯t subside, so something simr was happening here¡­


    A cold could have different symptoms, but this time they were the same, ording to Sebastian.


    ¡°So it¡¯s a cold¡­It¡¯s the same in this world then.¡±


    ¡°A cold? You know about this illness, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°It was verymon in the world that Ie from.¡±


    It was something that everyone experiences.


    And while it was not to be treated too lightly, you could acquire medicine very easily, and some people would get better after sleeping a little.


    It was amon illness.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, since it is the same illness as Lady Tilura¡­¡±


    ¡°Ramogi.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    While Sebastian was not a doctor, he had been watching Tilura closely while she was ill, and recognized the symptoms.


    And since Tilura had recovered immediately after drinking the Ramogi, he was sure that it would do the same here.


    And I had made Ramogi many times.


    Yes¡­it was like we were linked.


    ¡°Anna. We¡¯ll be out in the gardens. You stay here and look after these people.¡±


    ¡°Very well.¡±


    Ms. ire had been listening to us, and so told Anna to wait as the three of us went out into the orphanage garden.


    The reason that we didn¡¯t bring Anne or anyone else, was so that they wouldn¡¯t see Weed Cultivation.


    ¡°Thank you, Mr. Takumi. While this isn¡¯t rted to selling the herbs¡­¡±


    ¡°I am with you in wanting to help the children. It¡¯s fine.¡±


    ¡°You will be paid once we return to the mansion, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    As the children of the orphanage were in pain, I wanted to help them if I could.


    However, Sebastian insisted that I would be rewarded.


    I really didn¡¯t need it, as I thought of it as volunteer work¡­


    ¡°Ah, but before I use Weed Cultivation, Sebastian. How many people are there in the orphanage in all?¡±


    ¡°I believe there are thirty-one, if you count all the adults and children.¡±


    Thirty-one¡­ And add everyone who came here today¡­and some extras. Forty should be enough.


    ¡°All right, here goes.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    I said, and then I crouched and put my hands on the ground.


    And then I thought about the familiar Ramogi. The shape and effect, and then used Weed Cultivation.

 Chapter 130

    Chapter 130


    I Learned About What Happened At The Orphanage


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Thank you!¡±


    After I had finished growing the Ramogi, I passed it around to everyone in the orphanage.


    Of course, I had been sure to dry all of it so that it could be used immediately.


    Ms. Anna and the others epted it and had the sick children drink it.


    Half an hourter, most of them seemed to have recovered.


    However, a few remained weak.


    ¡°No, I¡¯m just d that I was able to help you.¡±


    Ms. Anna and the children who had recovered all came out in order to thank me.


    No longer were their faces contorted in agony, and they were all cheerful smiles.


    The sight of children suffering was not something I wished to see.


    ¡°Still, it was amazing that you were able to secure enough medicine in such a short amount of time.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi is a brilliant physician.¡±


    While Ms. Anna was astonished at my ability to provide so much of the Ramogi at once, Ms. ire exined that it was because I was a good physician.


    ¡­Was that even an exnation?


    ¡°Also, anyone who didn¡¯t get sick should drink these.¡±


    ¡°That is the same thing that the others drank¡­ But why?¡±


    ¡°Prevention and precaution. Perhaps some are ill, and just don¡¯t know it yet as there are no symptoms.¡±


    I didn¡¯t know if it was even a concept in this world¡­they did not seem to know much about medicine at all.


    Besides, there was also thetent period.


    But I didn¡¯t want to exin this, and just said it was a precaution.


    ¡°You too, Ms. ire and Sebastian. Also, Tilura and Johanna should take it as well.¡±


    ¡°Very well.¡±


    ¡°I will deliver it to them right away.¡±


    And so I handed them the Ramogi.


    Sebastian immediately went to deliver it to Tilura and Johanna, along with some water.


    Tilura had been sick only a short while ago, so she was probably fine, but there was no harm in being safe.


    That¡¯s why I had made extra herbs.


    Besides, if it was spreading through the orphanage, then it was probably spreading throughout the area. It would be best to make some for the servants once we return to the mansion as well.


    ¡°Still, it¡¯s a good thing we were able to tell what illness it was.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. However, Ramogi is supposed to be quite affordable in this town¡­ Anne. What is happening?¡±


    ¡°Well¡­once it started to spread, people started buying all of the Ramogi from the stores. Though, I did hear that there are people who are testing with different herbs in order to find a cure.¡±


    I suppose those with money were doing what they could to help heal people by conducting tests with herbs and medicine.


    However, that had resulted in there not being enough for the orphanage.


    ¡°I went around the town and asked at different stores, but it seems that starting around two weeks ago, all the herbs would be bought as soon as there was new stock. And it was as I was wondering what to do that I heard of a new store that sold Ramogi for cheap¡­¡±


    ¡°I see. And this is the store that imed to be connected to a noble house.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m back.¡±


    As I was talking to Ms. Anna, Sebastian returned.


    And so Ms. ire told him what we had just heard.


    ¡°So that¡¯s the reason¡­ It would exin why we couldn¡¯t get Ramogi for Tilura.¡±


    They had not been able to acquire Ramogi quickly when it was Tilura who was ill.


    And now it seemed like it was because there was none being sold in town.


    That¡¯s why Ms. ire had left the mansion.


    ¡°There is something suspicious about this store and the blight¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ It will require a thorough investigation.¡±


    Ms. ire and Sebastian were muttering to each other. But could there really be more to it?


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. It so happens that the store in question appeared at the same time that the illness started to spread.¡±


    ¡°From what we heard, the store appeared over two weeks ago. And the sickness started to spread around two weeks ago as well. And it was during this time that the stores started to run out of their stock of herbs¡­¡±


    ¡°So you think that it was all nned by this one store?¡±


    ¡°No. I wouldn¡¯t go that far¡­ Well, I do think it was them who bought all of the herbs to create a shortage.¡±


    Hmm¡­ In other words, once they detected the spread of the disease, they opened the store.


    And then they bought the stock from the other stores so that customers woulde to them¡­


    ¡°¡­Perhaps they were reselling those herbs after mixing them with something else.¡±


    ¡°That is definitely possible. ¡­Lady ire, I must leave you for now.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I¡¯m counting on you.¡±


    And then Sebastian left the room.


    ¡°Where did he go?¡±


    ¡°To investigate the matter. It¡¯s no longer something that Nichs can handle alone. People must be called from the mansion, and word must be sent to my father.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    So Sebastian had acted because he realized that this would require a thorough investigation and report.


    Still, what were we supposed to do after being left here?


    ¡°Could we stay here until he returns, Anna?¡±


    ¡°Of course, stay for as long as you like. The children will be happy.¡±


    So it was decided that we would wait here.


    With Ms. Anna¡¯s permission, we had the children all gather in the garden.


    Of course, it was only the children who were well. The others continued to rest in their beds.


    ¡°All right, Leo. You can y with everyone now!¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I brought Leo into the orphanage garden so that she could y with Tilura and the other children.


    While it was not asrge as the garden at the mansion, it was stillrge enough for Leo to enter.


    At the very least, she could do some light running.


    ¡°She¡¯s so big!¡±


    ¡°Wow! So fluffy!¡±


    ¡°How cool!¡±


    ¡°Kyau-kya!¡±


    ¡°I haven¡¯t been able to y with you all for a while!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    The children were excited and filled with curiosity when Leo appeared.


    Tilura had visited this ce before, and she was happy to be able to y with other children her own age.


    Even Sherry seemed to be having fun as she barked from on top of Leo¡¯s back.


    ¡°It¡¯s nice to see that they are all better.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Thanks to you, Mr. Takumi. I am d to see them having so much fun like this.¡±


    ¡°Lady ire, Mr. Takumi. Thank you so much.¡±


    A table was set out in the garden, and Ms. ire, Anna and I sat there and watched Leo y with the children.


    Ms. Anna thanked us again, but being able to see them all like this was more than enough.


    And so for some time after that, we smiled and watched the children y in the garden.

 Chapter 131

    Chapter 131


    I Talked To A Girl


    ¡°Are you the physician?¡±


    ¡°Yes?


    It was as we watched the others in the garden and enjoyed the tea that had been poured for us. A voice suddenly rang from behind.


    ¡°Who are you?¡±


    I turned around to see a child who was likely one of the orphans.


    She had long, disheveled hair and simple clothes. She appeared to be fifteen or sixteen.


    ¡°What is it, Milina?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, headmistress. I just wanted to thank the physician¡­¡±


    The girl who was called Milina smiled happily at me and then bowed.


    ¡°Thank you, physician. We are all better now because of you.¡±


    ¡°You are wee. But you really don¡¯t need to thank me. I¡¯m just d to see that you are all well now.¡±


    I replied, and then Ms. Anna exined to us about the child.


    ¡°Milina is the oldest of the children here. That being said, she is already eighteen¡­and has been an adult for some time now¡­¡±


    ¡°Headmistress, I want to settle at a job where I can help people!¡±


    ¡°¡­That¡¯s what she keeps saying. And yet she¡¯s rejected any avable work and has remained here.¡±


    Ms. Anna said with a troubled face as she looked at Milina.


    ¡­A job where you can help people, huh¡­


    ¡°That¡¯s what you were saying during myst visit, Milina. And you didn¡¯t want to be a servant.¡±


    Ms. ire said with a chuckle.


    Though, I thought that being a servant was pretty useful work as well.


    Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda have helped me so much¡­


    ¡°I am so grateful towards Headmistress Anna, and everyone here who took me in and raised me. And that¡¯s why I want to help people. ¡­But you truly are amazing, mister. You helped us all with such ease¡­¡±


    Milina said as she looked at me with awe. It reminded me of when I had first met Tilura.


    ¡°Milina. I understand you want to help people. But how do you mean to do that?¡±


    ¡°¡­Well¡­¡±


    But she only started to think, and could not give me a straight answer.


    My guess was that she just had the desire to help others, but did not know how to go about it.


    I could understand that¡­ There had been times when I wanted to do something but had no idea how to do it.


    ¡°Milina. For instance¡­there is a stall where they sell vegetables on the main street, yes?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Do you think that those people aren¡¯t helping others? Even if no one would be able to buy vegetables if no one was there?¡±


    ¡°But¡­that is just business¡­¡±


    Because it is a business, based on the trading of money and goods, which involves profit, it could not be seen as helping others. That was the way she saw it.


    ¡°But there are still people who are happy because of it. As it allows people who aren¡¯t farmers to eat vegetables. I think that is a very useful thing?¡±


    ¡°I¡­suppose.¡±


    When thinking about helping people¡­the first thing that woulde to mind is helping those in need and contributing to your country.


    But it¡¯s not as if someone in need or in danger will appear in front of you as soon as you think this.


    In the end, she just needed to decide what to do¡­and do it. And then she will be of use to others. That¡¯s what I think.


    ¡°What do you want to do, Milina? In what way do you want to make people happy?¡±


    ¡°¡­Uh¡­I¡­¡±


    Different thoughts seemed to be moving through her head.


    Her expression changed as she went from one to the next.


    ¡°¡­I was very happy that a physician treated our illness. And that we were rescued by the orphanage¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, I see.¡±


    ¡°But¡­I cannot do those things¡­¡±


    ¡°And why is that?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s not as if I can run an orphanage, and I have no knowledge of medicine.¡±


    ¡°Then you just have to study. Think about what you want to do, find out what youck in order to do it, and figure out a way to fix that. And then you¡¯ll eventually be able to do it.¡±


    Well, there are always going to be things that you can¡¯t do no matter what. But I hesitated to say such things to someone her age.


    I didn¡¯t think that it was always a good thing to push the harsh realities of the world onto someone.


    It wasn¡¯t that you should never do it, but it depended on the person.


    ¡°Study¡­ Mister Physician! Please teach me medicine!¡±


    ¡°Huh? Me?¡±


    ¡°Milina, don¡¯t be so rude to Mr. Takumi. Surely a mind as brilliant as his has better things to be doing.¡±


    After pondering the question for a moment, Milina looked at me straight in the face as she made the request.


    ¡­Teach her, huh¡­ It wasn¡¯t as if I had much knowledge of medicine myself¡­ It was only because of Weed Cultivation. But we had said that in order to hide my ability¡­


    I turned to Ms. ire for help, but she just smiled back at me.


    Oh, so she wasn¡¯t going to help¡­ If anything, she looked like she was excited to hear my answer¡­


    ¡°No, I¡¯m not that busy, but¡­ Milina. Why do you want to study medicine?¡±


    ¡°It wasn¡¯t just this time, but thest time people became ill here. I was not able to do anything. And yet you immediately knew what to do, and treated us with medicine. And look at how they are all smiling now!¡±


    Milina said with a passionate expression as she looked towards the children who were ying with Leo.


    The children were running around excitedly andughing.


    If Milina wanted to work for those smiles, then it was not a bad idea¡­


    ¡°I understand what you are trying to say. And I think that it¡¯s wonderful.¡±


    ¡°In that case!¡±


    ¡°But wait a minute. I¡¯m just a guest at Ms. ire¡¯s house. So it¡¯s not a decision I can make alone.¡±


    ¡°Oh, you¡¯re allowing me to decide, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    Milina seemed to have decided that she wanted to be my student¡­ And she was now looking at me with great expectation.


    However, I was currently living at the mansion.


    It would be difficult for me to teach someone who lived at the orphanage.


    And it would be dangerous for her toe to the mansion alone. And while I wasn¡¯t terribly busy, I still had my training and the herbs. So I could not be visiting this ce so often.


    In any case, it was something Ms. ire and I would have to discuss.

 Chapter 132

    Chapter 132


    I showed Milina ¡®Weed Cultivation¡¯


    ¡°No, Ms. ire. Surely I need your permission to work freely in that mansion?¡±


    ¡°What do you mean to do, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ To be honest, I don¡¯t have enough knowledge about medicine to teach it. However, I don¡¯t want Milina¡¯s resolve to go to waste. And so¡­ I have a request. If it¡¯s alright¡­¡±


    ¡°You want me to let her stay at the mansion. Or it will be difficult to teach her.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    Well, it would be less like teaching and more like studying together.


    I had some knowledge from the world I was previously in, but I didn¡¯t know much about medicine or medical treatments in this world.


    ¡°Indeed¡­ As we had once considered taking Milina in as a servant, that shouldn¡¯t be a problem, but¡­¡±


    ¡°Is there something else?¡±


    ¡°It won¡¯t be proper for her to stay in your room¡­¡±


    ¡°No, of course not. We must be in separate rooms. I cannot share a room with a young woman.¡±


    ¡°¡­Well, I¡¯m quite young¡­too¡­oh, maybe not so young¡­anymore¡­ Does he¡­prefer¡­a younger¡­?¡±


    ¡°Ms. ire?¡±


    Ms. ire started muttering darkly to herself after I started talking about different rooms.


    I couldn¡¯t hear what she was saying, but it sounded like she had mentioned me?


    ¡°No, it¡¯s nothing at all!¡±


    When I asked her, Ms. ire raised her head and shook it violently.


    ¡°There is no problem if you are in separate rooms. ¡­Though, it will be the same room as the servants¡­¡±


    ¡°That should be fine. I¡¯m sure she¡¯s used to living with other people at this orphanage.¡±


    After discussing this quietly with Ms. ire, I turned back to Milina, who was looking at us seriously and wondering about her fate.


    ¡°Milina. Ms. ire has given her permission. While you will have to share a room with the servants, you can live at the mansion and we can study medicine together.¡±


    ¡°Really!? Thank you!¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Are you sure?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Well, I¡¯m still learning myself, so I may not be able to teach Milina much.¡±


    I answered with a smile to Ms. Anna.


    Ms. Anna was just happy that things with Milina were finally settled, and they both bowed so low that I thought their heads would touch the ground.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, in that case, you will have to tell her about that other thing.¡±


    ¡°Sebastian¡­so you returned¡­¡±


    I hadn¡¯t even realized that he was back, but he was now whispering to me.


    ¡°I returned just now. Lady ire, I put someone in charge of the investigation. So now we just need to wait for a report. ¡­It shoulde tomorrow or the day after that.¡±


    ¡°I see. Very good. Thank you.¡±


    After telling me of his return, he turned to Ms. ire to make a report.


    ¡­Even though he had just returned, he sounded like he was aware of the situation with Milina¡­ This person really was mysterious.


    ¡°Sebastian. Ms. ire. Are you fine with this?¡±


    ¡°Yes. If that¡¯s what you want, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. She cannot stay without knowing, so I have no problem with it.¡±


    They both nodded in reply.


    And so I went towards the entrance of the orphanage with Milina, Ms. ire and Sebastian.


    We asked Ms. Anna to watch Leo and the children¡­ Milina was the only person who needed to know.


    We stood by the door¡­behind the fence that surrounded the orphanage. It was here that I would show her Weed Cultivation.


    ¡°What are you going to do here?¡±


    Milina looked puzzled, as she had no idea why we had brought her out here.


    This was no surprise, as we hadn¡¯t exined anything to her.


    ¡°Milina. You cannot tell anyone about what you will witness now, understand?¡±


    ¡°Huh? Oh, yes!¡±


    ¡°Milina. What Mr. Takumi is about to do is a secret of the duke¡¯s house. And so you cannot tell anyone, even Ms. Anna.¡±


    Milina nodded at me.


    Ms. ire then added to my words, and Milina nodded again in agreement.


    She looked quite intimidated after hearing about the duke¡­ Perhaps that part wasn¡¯t necessary, Ms. ire?


    ¡°Now, I will show you. ¡­What should I do¡­ I suppose I might as well make Ramogi for everyone in the mansion.¡±


    As I felt Milina¡¯s intent eyes on me, I ced my hands on the ground and used Weed Cultivation.


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    When the Ramogi started to grow out of the ground, Milina gasped in surprise.


    This was her first time seeing it, after all.


    ¡°That should do it.¡±


    ¡°What is this, Mister Physician?¡±


    ¡°As you can see, it is Ramogi.¡±


    While her eyes were wide open, Milina seemed like she could not understand what she was looking at.


    ¡°Milina. This is my special ability. ¡­It¡¯s because of this that I was able to prepare enough medicine for everyone.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­¡±


    ¡°Milina, allow me to exin it to you.¡±


    As Milina stood there uprehending, Sebastian stepped forward in order to exin it to her.


    He seemed very pleased by this opportunity¡­ He really did like exining this. I mused. And then I waited for Milina to finally understand.


    ¡°In other words, physician¡­I mean, Mr. Takumi is not a physician¡­is that right?¡±


    ¡°That is true¡­ Are you disappointed?¡±


    Milina slowly started to understand after listening to Sebastian.


    And so I asked her.


    Because it seemed that part of the reason why she had any admiration for me was because she thought I was a physician.


    But now she knew I had no knowledge of medicine¡­ I didn¡¯t like to crush someone¡¯s dreams, but she would have found out soon enough anyway.


    Perhaps she wouldn¡¯t want toe to the mansion and study anymore.


    It had been a deception in a way, so it couldn¡¯t be helped.


    However, as if to reject these thoughts, Milina shook her head.


    ¡°No, I¡¯m not disappointed. I¡¯m moved at the thought of such a wonderful ability existing in the world. You must be very special if you are able to use it!¡±


    ¡°Oh? Well¡­I wouldn¡¯t say special¡­¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s right, Milina. Mr. Takumi is a special person.¡±


    Milina was so impressed by the Gift, that she looked at me with great respect.


    Not only that, but Ms. ire was now encouraging her¡­


    Ms. ire¡­ This is getting embarrassing¡­

 Chapter 133

    Chapter 133


    I Was Called Master


    ¡°I was troubled over what I should do, and you offered a solution, Mr. Takumi. And I was able to find what it was that I want to do.¡±


    ¡°Is that¡­so?¡±


    Apparently, my words to Milina earlier had helped solve her problem.


    I suppose it was because she now wanted to study medicine.


    While I may not have been much of an adult, it made me happy that my words had helped direct a young person towards their goal.


    Though, I was still young myself.


    ¡°Yes. From now on¡­with your words, Mr. Takumi¡­master, in my heart, I will do my best to learn medicine!¡±


    ¡°Master¡­ I¡¯m not anyone so impressive, you know? Medicine is something that I¡¯ll have to study with you¡­¡±


    ¡°I understand that. But I suppose it¡¯s because you are a tutor when ites to life.¡±


    ¡­First it was brother, and now master¡­


    It wasn¡¯t that I hated it, but it was hard to get used to something like this¡­


    ¡°Very well. So Milina will now be Mr. Takumi¡¯s apprentice.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I look forward to being able to work with you, Master and Lady ire!¡±


    ¡°Yes, you¡¯re wee.¡±


    ¡°¡­Well, I suppose it¡¯s fine.¡±


    Milina bowed vigorously towards me and Ms. ire.


    I was thinking about telling her to stop calling me master, as it felt odd, but it would be awkward to say it now.


    Well, maybe I could just get used to it.


    ¡°Now, we should go back to the garden. I think the children might be tired of ying.¡±


    Sebastian said, and so we took Milina and headed back to the garden.


    We were greeted to the amusing sight of children sitting on Leo¡¯s back or leaning against her after falling asleep.


    I could see that Tilura and Sherry had also fallen asleep.


    ¡°Good work, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I talked to Leo quietly so as to not wake up the children, and she also replied quietly.


    I could tell by her happy expression that Leo had also enjoyed ying with the children.


    ¡°Lady ire. Did you finish talking with Milina then?¡±


    ¡°Yes. We decided that she shoulde and live at the mansion.¡±


    ¡°I see. She was taking a very long time to decide what she wanted to do, so thank you for epting her.¡±


    ¡°You should thank Mr. Takumi. He¡¯s the one who persuaded her.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Of course, we are very thankful to Mr. Takumi.¡±


    Ms. Anna thanked us, and then we talked about what Milina would do now.


    While it had been decided that she would go to the mansion, it wasn¡¯t as if she could go today.


    She had only just recovered from an illness, and she would also need to pack.


    Besides, since she was moving away from the orphanage, she would want time to say goodbye to the other children.


    Though, the mansion wasn¡¯t too far away, so she could visit as often as she wanted.


    ¡°Well, we should be taking our leave then.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. The sun is starting to set.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Thank you foring today. And thank you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    We then helped them carry the sleeping children back to their rooms in the orphanage, and then left.


    Ms. Anna and Milina saw us off by the door as we walked away.


    It had also been decided that Milina woulde to the mansion one weekter.


    That would be enough time to gather her things and say goodbye to everyone.


    On our way back, Sebastian disappeared into several alleys a few times, but we continued on until we finally reached the za where the carriage was waiting.


    ¡°There is not much information yet¡­¡±


    Sebastian said as he returned from one of his detours.


    Apparently, he had been going to listen to reports from those he had sent to gather information.


    Well, he did say that there wouldn¡¯t be any proper reports until tomorrow, so it wasn¡¯t surprising that there wasn¡¯t much information at this point.


    It had only been a few hours¡­so it was doubtful that they could gather all of the information already.


    ¡°Well, let us depart now.¡±


    ¡°Leo. Be careful that you don¡¯t drop Sherry and Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I got into the carriage with Ms. ire, and then Sebastian took the reins and drove the carriage back to the mansion.


    As Tilura and Sherry were sleeping on Leo¡¯s back, I told her to be careful that they didn¡¯t fall off.


    But I was sure that Leo would think of them, and we had even strapped them on with a rope, just in case, so I was sure they would be fine.


    Unlike before, Leo was calm during the return trip, and she ran quietly alongside the carriage.


    ¡°¡­Wee back.¡±


    We arrived at the mansion and let Johanna take the carriage and horses as we stepped inside.


    Sebastian entered first, and told the servants that Tilura was sleeping. And so they weed us in quieter voices than usual.


    ¡­But they were still perfectly in sync.


    ¡°Thank you, Good Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Ms. Gelda and another servant approached Leo.


    Leo barked softly in reply, and then crouched low so that they could pick up Tilura and Sherry.


    Ms. Gelda held Tilura, while the other picked up Sherry, and they took them away to their room.


    ¡°Sebastian. I don¡¯t want to trouble you, but¡­¡±


    ¡°I understand.¡±


    As I watched as they were taken away, Ms. ire spoke with Sebastian.


    Was this about the malicious merchants?


    While I couldn¡¯t say that it had nothing to do with me, there was also nothing that I could do¡­ I would just leave it to Sebastian.


    And there was something oddlyforting about that¡­ I suppose it was because he seemed like someone who could do anything.


    ¡°Lady ire. Dinner has been prepared.¡±


    ¡°I see. Mr. Takumi, let¡¯s go to the dining hall.¡±


    ¡°Yes. ¡­Ah, I must drop my things off in my room first.¡±


    ¡°¡­Of course.¡±


    I took Leo and returned once to my room where I dropped off my sword and other things. Then I headed to the dining hall.


    There wasn¡¯t much stuff, as we hadn¡¯t gone shopping. But I didn¡¯t want to take them with me to eat.


    ¡°Let¡¯s eat then.¡±


    ¡°Is Tilura still sleeping?¡±


    It was just me, Leo, Ms. ire and Ms. Lyra in the dining hall.


    Sebastian seemed to have a lot to do, as I had seen him moving busily around before I arrived in the room.

 Chapter 134

    Chapter 134


    I Told Them How To Avoid Getting Sick


    ¡°Lady Tilura was sleeping soundly while holding onto Sherry.¡±


    Said Ms. Lyra, who had been watching Tilura.


    ¡­And yet when I had arrived at the dining hall, not only was the food already prepared, but so was the tea¡­ How exactly did she move around the mansion so quickly¡­?


    It had only been about ten minutes between our return and my arrival here¡­


    ¡°We should let Tilura rest. It¡¯s been so long since she wasst in town, and she must have be very excited.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. And she would be tired after having yed so much with the other children in the orphanage.¡±


    It was also possible that it was all the training she had been doing since Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s visit.


    Training and studying¡­ She had been quite busy recently.


    ¡°So, Mr. Takumi. What are your thoughts after seeing the herbs being sold today?¡±


    ¡°Hmm. I¡¯m fine with leaving everything to Mr. Kalis. He seems to know what he is doing, especially with how he used Leo to attract customers, or how he sold them outside of the store.¡±


    After dinner, Ms. ire and I sipped our tea and talked about the herbs that were sold in Ractos.


    Well, Leo had been a lot more popr than expected, and he had trouble handling all of the children.


    ¡°Also¡­ ording to Ms. Anna, there are herb shortages in Ractos now. So I think we can expect the good word to be spread, which will increase the number of customers.¡±


    ¡°Yes. As the duke¡¯s family, we have to deal with this issue of shortages¡­ Still, it¡¯s a good thing that this will help the reputation of your herbs, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Well, the real problem is that there are shortages at all.¡±


    A malicious store was selling herbs and medicine of bad quality.


    It was because they were sold out at all of the other stores that the citizens had no choice but to rely on the malicious store¡­


    The more I thought about it, the more likely it seemed that they were responsible for the shortages.


    ¡­Though, it did feel ironic that it was in turn helping the sales of my own herbs.


    ¡°Indeed¡­ I¡¯m sure Sebastian is looking into it, but¡­ This is still a very wicked thing. Selling herbs of low quality to the people.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know if it was that the timing was on their side, or they were targeting¡­but there is also the illness. While those at the orphanage are healed, there are too many people in the town to be able to help all of them.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ It would be impossible for you to make enough Ramogi for all of them¡­ We can only hope that it doesn¡¯t spread any farther.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­¡±


    I answered Ms. ire, and then started to think about this illness.


    The symptoms I had seen at the orphanage resembled that of a cold.


    And while it was easily healed with some Ramogi, there was not enough of it.


    It would be best if people could avoid getting sick at all¡­


    Hmm? Prevention?


    ¡°Ms. ire. Is it not possible to avoid getting sick in the first ce?¡±


    ¡°Avoid¡­ What do you mean?¡±


    It seems like it wasn¡¯t a concept they had here¡­


    Medicine had not advanced much, and they only thought of healing people with medicine after the fact.


    ¡°Uh, well¡­ In the world that I used to live in¡­¡±


    And so I told Ms. ire what little I knew about disease prevention.


    When it came to contagious diseases, the reason was usually pathogenic bacteria.


    As I wasn¡¯t a doctor, and had never studied medicine, I only had a little knowledge. But perhaps it could still be useful.


    ¡°I see¡­ So that¡¯s what they did in your world, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Washing your hands and rinsing your mouth should be the bare minimum. Also, you should keep your body as clean as possible¡­ And your living space should also be clean.¡±


    I was only able to tell Ms. ire the basics.


    Wash your hands and gargle whening back into the house¡­ It was stuff you taught children in Japan.


    I told her some other things as well, but Ms. ire acted as if she was hearing it for the first time.


    But it was no surprise if they had no concept of prevention here¡­


    ¡°I understand. I¡¯ll have everyone who lives here practice that first. Also¡­yes¡­Lyra. Tell this to Sebastian. He¡¯ll ensure that it spreads through the town of Ractos as well.¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    Ms. Lyra bowed once and then left the dining hall.


    It might be a little difficult to make everyone in the town do this, but if word came from the duke¡¯s house, then they may be more inclined to try it.


    If we could stop the spreading of the disease even a little, that was a good thing.


    After that, I continued to drink tea with Ms. ire and talk about what could be done.


    I didn¡¯t know how useful my knowledge would be for other diseases, but it should be effective enough for colds.


    ¡°Now, since I rested yesterday, I should do some swinging today.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    You¡¯re not going to rest? Leo seemed to ask.


    Sorry. But I want to make up for resting yesterday.


    And I also had to make some extra Ramogi.


    And so I went out into the back garden and unsheathed my sword, after bringing it down.


    And then I focused on doing a thousand swings as if to make up for the previous day.


    As Tilura was still sleeping, I practiced alone.


    ¡°Now I just have to make some Ramogi¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takaumi, I heard about what happened in town today. Please don¡¯t push yourself too much¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, this is nothing. Don¡¯t worry.¡±


    As I was training, Ms. Lyra voiced her concerns, but it really wasn¡¯t anything to worry about.


    While I had no clear indicator, I was quite sure that making Ramogi did not require much power at all.


    ¡°All right, it¡¯s done. Ms. Lyra, can you make sure that the servants drink this?¡±


    ¡°Very well. It is for this prevention that you were discussing with Lady ire, I presume.¡±


    Well, something like that.


    I wasn¡¯t actually sure if drinking it in advance would be effective¡­ After all, the servants had been around Tilura when she was sick.


    As there is atent period, it was possible that there were some people who were already sick and just hadn¡¯t shown any symptoms yet.


    That¡¯s what I thought, even though Ms. Lyra seemed satisfied with the notion that it was for prevention.


    ¡°Well, Leo. Let¡¯s go back to our room.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    I said to Leo, who had been watching me train, and then I headed back to the room.


    Leo had yawned when replying, and walked behind me sluggishly.


    She had gone to town and yed with a lot of children, so perhaps she was tired?


    It was quitete now, so it was no wonder that she was sleepy.


    When we reached the room, Leo quickly curled up into a ball next to my bed and fell asleep.


    ¡°Good night, Leo. You did well today.¡±


    ¡°Wuffff¡­¡±


    I got into bed and said good night to Leo.


    Leo murmured back as if in her sleep.

 Chapter 135

    Chapter 135


    I Paid Nick the Herb Carrier


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, you have a guest.¡±


    ¡°Someone is here to see me?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    The next day, during my morning training, Ms. Gelda came to call me.


    But I barely had any acquaintances in this world. Who could havee to see me?


    For some reason, Leo was nodding with a knowing expression. Leo. How would you know, if you were with me this whole time?


    While I thought it was strange, I wiped away the sweat and followed Ms. Gelda to the entrance hall.


    ¡°Brother, good morning!¡±


    ¡°¡­Is that¡­Nick?¡±


    ¡°Yes, it is!¡±


    So it was Nick.


    But he no longer had a mohawk like yesterday. He waspletely bald¡­I suppose he had shaved it off. Well, I suppose that might be preferable if he was working at Mr. Kalis¡¯s store now.


    His clothes were also no longer covered in spikes. He was wearing regr clothes, and looked quite normal. Though, there was still an intimidating air about him.


    ¡­So that exins why Leo was nodding¡­ The spell that Sebastian had cast allowed her to know where he was.


    ¡°And what are you doing out here? Did Mr. Kalis throw you out already?¡±


    If Mr. Kalis had driven him out because he was a useless worker, then I would have to go and apologize to him.


    After all, I had been the one to hire him and ask that he be ced there.


    ¡°Oh, even I wouldn¡¯t get thrown out that quickly! I came here to pick up the herbs.¡±


    ¡°Ah, the herbs.¡±


    Now that I think about it, I had left the job of delivering the herbs to him.


    I hadpletely forgotten, as my mind was filled with the event at the orphanage, as well as thoughts of the malicious store.


    Even Sebastian was busy dealing with it.


    ¡°What should I do¡­¡±


    ¡°Are the herbs not ready?¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s just it¡­ Wait here a moment.¡±


    I left Nick at the entrance and asked Ms. Gelda where Sebastian was. Then I headed there.


    ¡°Sebastian. Do you have a moment?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi? Of course.¡±


    The room was an office for the butlers, and was located in a corner on the second floor.


    I knocked on the door and Sebastian immediately gave me permission to enter.


    ¡°Excuse me.¡±


    I opened the door and stepped inside. There were several desks lined up, and Sebastian was sitting in the back of the room among a pile of documents that were stacked on his desk.


    The room reminded me of the oldpany I used to work at in my previous world¡­


    ¡°Is something the matter?¡±


    ¡°No, it¡¯s just that Nick came to pick up the herbs¡­ What should I do?¡±


    ¡°Now that I think about it, I didn¡¯t give you the order sheet. I¡¯m very sorry, but I was busy organizing the information about this malicious store.¡±


    So Sebastian really was busy with that.


    I hadn¡¯t seen him at breakfast, even though he usually waited behind Ms. ire.


    ¡°Hmm¡­here it is. It is a little more than what was sold yesterday. Is that all right?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­yes, I think this should be fine. I could even do more if necessary.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Yes. And please don¡¯t overwork yourself either, Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Hohoho. I know that I¡¯m no longer young, and I know my own limits.¡±


    I epted the order sheet from Sebastian and then returned to the entrance hall. Then I told Nick to wait a little longer as I went out into the back garden.


    I watched Tilura train as I stood next to Leo and used Weed Cultivation.


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°These herbs are for today¡¯s order. You can¡¯t eat them.¡±


    ¡°Kyau.¡±


    As Leo was looking at me with a puzzled expression, I exined what I was doing.


    Sherry then started to sniff the nts that had grown from the ground, so I warned her.


    It was probably fine, but I didn¡¯t want her to eat them by ident.


    ¡°Still, there sure is a lot of Ramogi.¡±


    Even with the herbs that we sold yesterday, the Ramogi had been the first to sell out. And so the number had been increased for today.


    Either the illness was starting to spread through the town, or it already had¡­


    I was able to prepare all of the herbs in half an hour.


    After changing the herbs into a state where they could be used, I had Ms. Lyra help me by wrapping them up by type.


    Wrapping them individually would take time, and so I would leave that to Mr. Kalis.


    ¡°Good, it¡¯s ready. Thank you for your help, Ms. Lyra.¡±


    ¡°Not at all, I¡¯m just d that I could be of use.¡±


    After thanking Ms. Lyra, I returned to the entrance hall where Nick was waiting.


    But on the way, I met Ms. Gelda, and was told that Nick was taken to the waiting room, and so I went there instead.


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting. I¡¯ve brought the herbs.¡±


    ¡°Brother, this really is an amazing ce¡­¡±


    Nick said with a dumbfounded expression as he looked around the room.


    Well, it was the duke¡¯s mansion.


    All of the furniture looked expensive, and the room was big.


    Nick seemed like the kind of person who would not have much experience being in such ces, so it was no wonder that he was surprised.


    I myself had been stunned when I first came here¡­


    ¡°Don¡¯t do anything strange here. Now, take this with you.¡±


    ¡°Yes, sir! I¡¯ll deliver it to Mr. Kalis no matter what!¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m counting on you. ¡­Oh, also¡­¡±


    ¡°What is it, brother?¡±


    I stopped Nick just as he was about to leave the room after epting the bag of herbs.


    As he turned around, I put a single gold coin in his hand.


    ¡°Here is the payment for now. Multiple days¡¯ worth. You don¡¯t have any money, right?¡±


    ¡°¡­Brother¡­ Thank you!¡±


    Upon receiving the money, Nick¡¯s eyes seemed to be filled with emotion as he bowed his head repeatedly.


    Was it really something to be so happy about?


    Well, perhaps it was because he didn¡¯t have money, that he resorted to crime. And so I wanted to ensure that he wouldn¡¯t have that problem anymore.


    It was a good thing I had discussed the average rates with Sebastian on the way home.


    He said that one gold should cover anywhere between half a month to a month.


    ¡°Well, you¡¯ll be making many roundtrips from here to Ractos.¡±


    Since there was a lot of traveling, I had figured that I should give him an incentive.


    I suppose it was like traveling expenses, and so I would make it half a month¡¯s pay.


    After that, I would consider lowering or raising it depending on how he works.


    That was something I would have to ask Mr. Kalis aboutter.

 Chapter 136

    Chapter 136


    We Talked About The Store With The Bad Reputation


    ¡°Now¡­ Don¡¯t even think about taking the herbs and running away.¡±


    ¡°I would never do such a thing! I know what terrors you are capable of! Besides, to defy the duke would be to throw my life away!¡±


    They were nobles¡­ A beheading could be waiting for him if he wasn¡¯t careful.


    That being said, these terrors he spoke of¡­wasn¡¯t that more about Leo than me?


    In any case, I believed his words and sent him away.


    If he did anything strange, Leo or Sebastian would catch on, so it should be fine.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Let¡¯s eat lunch!¡±


    ¡°Tilura. Is it that time already?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau.¡±


    Just as I was thinking about returning to the back garden in order to train, I bumped into Tilura.


    Apparently, the herbs had taken up more time than I thought, and it was already time for lunch.


    And so I headed towards the dining hall with the hungry Tilura, and Leo and Sherry, who always had the greatest appetite.


    ¡°Lady ire, Mr. Takumi. About the store that¡¯s been causing trouble. I¡¯ve gathered enough information to make a report.¡±


    After we finished eating lunch, Sebastian came to the dining hall and started to talk about the malicious store.


    ¡°Am I allowed to listen to this too?¡±


    ¡°It does concern the herbs. And so it would be best for you to listen, Mr. Takumi. It may be that you will have to do something.¡±


    As it concerned the family business, I wondered how involved I should be as an outsider. But Sebastian assured me that it was fine, and Ms. ire nodded.


    But what did he mean that I might have to do something?


    I couldn¡¯t do anything outside of Weed Cultivation.


    ¡°You might have to prepare some Ramogi, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Ramogi?¡±


    Did he mean that the illness was spreading more than expected?


    ¡°The appearance of this store happened to be very close to the spreading of the disease¡­ And it seems like the store was aware of it.¡±


    ¡°Why is that?¡±


    ¡°It was confirmed in today¡¯s reports. This store was responsible for buying all of Ractos¡¯s stock of herbs and medicine. And Ramogi was the first thing they started to buy.¡±


    ¡°The first¡­¡±


    ¡°And after what we saw at the orphanage, there is no doubt that it is effective with the disease that is spreading. And so we must assume that they knew that it was spreading, and what would heal it.¡±


    So not only was the timing the same, but they had bought the Ramogi first.


    Surely that meant they knew about the illness.


    ¡°However, when it first started to spread, the people of Ractos tried to buy other kinds of medicine. This was because they did not have any knowledge about the illness.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Ms. Anna also seemed like she didn¡¯t know what medicine would be effective.¡±


    And so she had followed the advice of the store, and ended up buying the medicine that had been weakened.


    Ms. Anna had been tricked into buying it because it was cheap, while the store made an extra profit.


    ¡°And then the store started to buy other kinds of medicine as well. And they started to sell them. I suppose they decided to take advantage of the fact that people were ignorant. It seems like they¡¯ve been making a profit this way ever since.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    ¡°They are deceiving the people¡­ This is unforgivable.¡±


    As these people didn¡¯t know about the illness, they didn¡¯t know what medicine was effective.


    And so even when the store bought every kind of medicine and sold it after weakening the effect, they still sold well.


    It was likely that the clerks there were rmending them to customers¡­telling them to buy medicine that waspletely unrted¡­ Just like what happened with Ms. Anna.


    ¡°It¡¯s fraud.¡±


    ¡°Yes. However, in the next report¡­something was revealed that means the duke will not be able to deal with the matter immediately.¡±


    ¡°What do you mean?¡±


    ¡°Well, the situation has be moreplicated¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Is it the other noble, Sebastian?¡±


    Ah, now that I think about it. There was talk of some other noble house being involved.


    ¡°Indeed. In thest report¡­ Well, it seems like our neighbor¡­the count, is involved.¡±


    ¡°The count?¡±


    ¡°House Barsler.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Count Barsler is involved.¡±


    Apparently, the neighboringnds were owned by someone called Count Barsler.


    When looking at Ms. ire or Mr. Ekenhart, it was hard to imagine nobles doing such things, but clearly, people were different, and even nobles couldmit such crimes.


    ¡°Who is this Count Barsler?¡±


    ¡°The count ownsnds that neighbor the Liebert territories. And a duke¡¯s power alone is not enough to crush this store immediately, if it¡¯s backed by a count.¡±


    Why is that?


    Weren¡¯t dukes much higher in rank?


    But I suppose things were a lot moreplicated than that when it came to high society¡­


    ¡°And so we will not be able to take immediate action.¡±


    Indeed, it was a very troublesome matter.


    ¡°And you¡¯re sure of this? If you know this much¡­why can¡¯t you just submit the evidence¡­?¡±


    ¡°But it¡¯s still mostly spection based on circumstantial evidence that was gathered. We still haven¡¯t found anything solid. As the medicine was diluted, we don¡¯t know where it was originally sold. And the person who bought them has already left the town, so they cannot be caught.¡±


    ¡°And how did you acquire all this information?¡±


    ¡°Most of it was from an old informant of Ractos. We¡¯ve also been questioning residents. And there were eyewitnesses of this person entering and leaving the stores¡­¡±


    ¡°The person who left?¡±


    ¡°We don¡¯t know where. But it¡¯s still just eyewitness ounts, and cannot be used as evidence.¡±


    So they didn¡¯t know where this person was¡­ Well, that was certainly troublesome.


    And as Sebastian said, the words of some random residents would not be considered as strong evidence¡­

 Chapter 137

    Chapter 137


    I Went Out To Pick Up Milina


    ¡°Isn¡¯t the fact that they are selling medicine of low quality enough of a reason?¡±


    ¡°While these are dirty methods, that is not enough on its own. It would be if it were an ordinary store, but not when they are backed by a noble house¡­ After all, they might say that we were just criticizing them as rivals.¡±


    ¡°If only there was something else¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    After that, it was decided that they should wait until Mr. Ekenhart received the reports, and we all went on our way.


    Everyone seemed to be in a dark mood as they left the dining hall.


    Tilura and I went to the back garden with Leo in order to practice our swings.


    While Tilura was able to do it as usual, it was not the case for me.


    ¡°Wuff¡­wuff!¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­sorry. Thanks, Leo.¡±


    A store that made profits through hurting the people¡­ Now that I was also someone who made herbs and medicine, I had strong feelings of anger towards the store.


    However, there was no point in swinging when your emotions were so turbulent.


    I realized this when Leo pushed her head close to mine with a worried expression.


    After thanking her with some pets, I went back to swinging.


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Leo seemed relieved as she saw that I was able to concentrate this time, and she nodded.


    She was starting to feel like my guardian¡­


    In any case, while I was still mad at the store, I had to concentrate on my training now.


    I would trust that Mr. Ekenhart would know how to deal with the issue.


    ¡°Good night, Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Good night, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    When I was done swinging, I said goodnight to Tilura and we parted ways.


    I then took a bath to wash away the sweat, and then got into bed.


    I had a lot to think about, but there was still little that I could do¡­ And so I would rest.


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    A few uneventful days passed after that.


    Sebastian had still not found any solid evidence, and we were still waiting for Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s reply.


    Tilura and I continued to train every day.


    Well, Tilura also had her studies.


    ¡°I suppose I should study as well¡­¡±


    I didn¡¯t know much about this world, so I thought that perhaps I should study with her. But my training and making herbs kept me busy.


    ¡­Though, I would have to start studying eventually.


    Between training hours, I would grow herbs to be sold in Mr. Kalis¡¯s store.


    Apparently, the Ramogi was still selling very well, and it made up most of the order.


    And surprisingly, Nick was a hard worker.


    I had asked about him once, when a different clerk came with him to the mansion.


    ¡°Is Nick working properly?¡±


    ¡°Yes. There is still a lot that he needs to learn, but he does work hard. He says that he doesn¡¯t want to disgrace the reputation of his brother.¡±


    The clerk said with augh.


    I still wasn¡¯t used to being called that, but I was d that he was working hard.


    If he worked hard, and Ramogi sold well at Mr. Kalis¡¯s store, then that would lead to less sess for the malicious store.


    Other than that, Ms. ire had Sebastian spread the instructions on how to prevent getting ill in the first ce.


    Well, it was mostly just posting notices in the za, but even if only a few people followed it, it was still better than nothing.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. You¡¯re going to the orphanage today, remember?¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ That¡¯s right.¡±


    During breakfast, as I was thinking back on the past few days, Ms. ire reminded me of something that was very important.


    Yes, we were supposed to pick up Milina.


    As she would have her personal belongings, we thought it best to pick her up.


    It would be very difficult for her to carry them ande here alone.


    ¡°I have matters to discuss with Sebastian, and will not be able to go¡­¡±


    ¡°I understand. Leave it to me. I¡¯ll send Ms. Anna your regards.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    Ms. ire had something to discuss with Sebastian regarding the store.


    While they hadn¡¯t heard from Mr. Ekenhart yet, they wanted to do what they could as they waited.


    ¡°Let¡¯s go, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau.¡±


    ¡°Are youing too, Sherry?¡±


    As we were about to leave from the entrance hall, Sherry jumped onto Leo¡¯s back.


    She spent a lot of time there these days.


    ¡°Kyau. Kyau.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    I still could not understand what Sherry was saying, but Leo would sometimes trante¡­


    She said that Sherry wanted to go so she could get used to humans¡­


    ¡°Well, I suppose it can be educational. But don¡¯t you want to stay with Ms. ire and Tilura?¡±


    ¡°Kyau! Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Uhhh. They are talking about boring things. This seems more fun.


    But we¡¯re not going to y¡­. Well, I suppose it was more interesting than being with Tilura as she studied, or listening to Sebastian and Ms. ire talk.


    ¡°All right. Then you cane. But you better behave.¡±


    ¡°Kyau.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    After seeing them nod, I left the mansion.


    Outside, a carriage was waiting, along with a butler and Ms. Lyra.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. We will be apanying you.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    The butler went to the driver¡¯s seat, and Ms. Lyra and I went into the carriage.


    I suppose Ms. Lyra wasing because of Milina¡¯s belongings¡­it was best to have a woman apany us.


    ¡°Now, we will depart.¡±


    The butler said, and the carriage moved forward.


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    Leo ran happily alongside the carriage.


    Sherry seemed like she was having fun as well.


    ¡°Ah.¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    ¡°Uh, I just remembered that I didn¡¯t give Nick today¡¯s herbs¡­¡±


    He usually came just before lunch.


    It took him longer to travel from Ractos, as he wasn¡¯t riding a horse¡­


    However, as we had left shortly after breakfast, I was not able to give the herbs to him. Even though I had made themst night.

 Chapter 138

    Chapter 138


    I Almost Started Talking Heatedly About Customer Service


    ¡°We should stop at Mr. Kalis¡¯s store on the way there. I took the liberty of bringing the herbs with me.¡±


    ¡°You did¡­ Thank you.¡±


    Apparently, Ms. Lyra had loaded the herbs into the carriage.


    I had been hoping that someone in the mansion would hand them over to Nick, but Ms. Lyra had expected us to stop by the store.


    She was a capable maid.


    ¡°Well, I will follow after you in just a moment. Please go ahead to Mr. Kalis.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you. Let¡¯s go, Ms. Lyra.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    We left the butler and the carriage and hurried on to Mr. Kalis¡¯s store.


    As we hadn¡¯t seen him on the way, it was probably fine. But I wanted to get there before he departed for the mansion.


    ¡°Mr. Kalis.¡±


    ¡°Oh? Mr. Takumi. What can I do for you today?¡±


    I saw Mr. Kalis making preparations in front of the store, and so I called out to him.


    Mr. Kalis turned to us with a puzzled expression.


    Well, we hadn¡¯t told him that we were visiting.


    ¡°We had business in this town, and so I thought that I¡¯d bring the herbs as well.¡±


    Thank you for being so considerate. Your herbs have been received very well, and they are practically flying off the shelves.¡±


    Mr. Kalis epted the bag of herbs and could not stopughing.


    While it was probably the fact that they were proper herbs that were effective, unlike that other store, it was still nice to have your work praised.


    ¡°Huh? It¡¯s you, brother. Why are you here? I was just about to go to the mansion.¡±


    ¡°Nick. I happened to have business here. And so I delivered them for you.¡±


    As I was talking to Mr. Kalis, Nick came out of the store with an expression of surprise.


    I was relieved to see that he hadn¡¯t departed yet.


    ¡°Mr. Kalis. Has Nick been working hard? Judging by his regr visits at the mansion, he seems to be doing his job.¡±


    As it was a good opportunity, I decided to ask Mr. Kalis about him directly.


    I had heard from the other clerks, but perhaps they had differing opinions.


    ¡°Surprisingly, he is doing his job. As he only just started, there is a lot to learn. But I would have expected a lot less from such a violent man.¡±


    ¡°Ah. Hahaha.¡±


    Nick chuckled with an embarrassed expression as he scratched his head.


    Hmm. That was better than I was expecting.


    ¡°However¡­¡±


    ¡°So, did he do something after all?¡±


    Mr. Kalis paused with a stern expression.


    What had he done?


    ¡°He really must learn how to deal with customers properly¡­ He was quite rude towards them the other day.¡±


    ¡°Oh, that¡­ No, it was the customers fault. They were whining about your herbs, brother¡­¡±


    ¡°Ha¡­ Nick¡­ Regardless, you have to be polite when dealing with customers.¡±


    There would always be people who had unreasonableints.


    I suppose Nick was just offended on my behalf, but this was still a customer.


    Besides, other customers might have been watching his reaction¡­ You had to be very careful.


    Up until recently, he was quick to argue and fight without thinking of the consequences, and so he had to be taught when it came to such things.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, we should be¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, pardon me. Mr. Kalis, can I leave it to you then?¡±


    ¡°Yes, don¡¯t worry. Customer service is something I can beat into him.¡±


    ¡°¡­Please be gentle¡­¡±


    ¡°We must leave then.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you for delivering the herbs.¡±


    ¡°See youter, brother!¡±


    Ms. Lyra reminded me that we had to go to the orphanage.


    I didn¡¯t want to keep Milina waiting¡­ And so I left Neck in Mr. Kalis¡¯s hands, and the two of us left the store and headed towards the orphanage.


    ¡°Sorry, Ms. Lyra.¡±


    ¡°No, not at all. But it looked like you were going to start lecturing Nick, and so I had to intervene. We still have some time.¡±


    ¡°I see. But I¡¯m d that you stopped me.¡±


    I talked with Ms. Lyra as we made our way to the orphanage.


    We reunited with the butler shortly after leaving the store.


    As for Ms. Lyra¡¯s fear, I could not deny that I would have likely be carried away as I instructed him¡­


    ¡°Excuse me. We came to pick up Milina.¡±


    ¡°Ah, Mr. Takumi. Thank you foring. Milina and the headmistress have been waiting for you.¡±


    When we arrived, we were greeted by the woman who was sweeping the entrance.


    I think¡­she was the same person who was herest time.


    I couldn¡¯t help but imagine Milina waiting restlessly, and I chuckled as we were let in.


    ¡°Excuse me, Ms. Anna. We havee to pick up Milina.¡±


    ¡°Thank you foring, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ve been waiting for you, master!¡±


    We were led into a drawing room.


    I then greeted Ms. Anna and Milina.


    Upon seeing me, she broke into a bright smile and rushed towards us.


    She must be very impatient.


    ¡°Are you ready to leave?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I have all my things together!¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, please¡­take good care of her.¡±


    ¡°Yes. You have nothing to worry about.¡±


    Milina picked up some of her things and left the room.


    And then Ms. Lyra went to help her.


    I assured Ms. Anna that I would take full responsibility for her, and nodded.


    She bowed deeply in reply, and then I too left to help Milina.


    ¡°Is that all?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I never had much to begin with.¡±


    Together, we were able to carry all of her luggage, and so we stepped out of the orphanage.


    As furniture would be provided for her at the mansion, she only needed her clothes and small personal belongings.


    But while Milina assured us that she didn¡¯t have much, she was still a girl, and so it was actually a decent amount.

 Chapter 139

    Chapter 139


    We Took Milina Back With Us


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s depart then.¡±


    ¡°Indeed.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Goodbye, Milina!¡±


    ¡°Everyone¡­¡±


    Just as we were about to leave the orphanage, the children came out to see her off.


    Behind them stood Ms. Anna. There was a mixture of pride and sadness in her face as she saw Milina leave.


    ¡°¡­Headmistress. Everyone. Goodbye!¡±


    Milina closed her eyes once as if to ward off tears. And then she bid them farewell and walked away from the orphanage with us.


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Good Leo¡­you are so kind¡­¡±


    After we had walked for a while, Leo pushed gently against Milina as if concerned.


    While it was a little awkward with her carrying her belongings, she leaned against Leo and was enveloped in her fur.


    ¡°Milina¡­¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m fine¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Thank you, good Leo. I feel better now!¡±


    After feeling the soft silver fur, Milina raised her head and answered cheerfully to Leo.


    I could tell now that she had the resolve to not regret her decision.


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting.¡±


    The butler arrived with the carriage, and so we loaded it with Milina¡¯s luggage.


    Once it was all in, the only thing left to do was return home.


    ¡°Milina.¡±


    ¡°Yes, what is it, master?¡±


    She seemed to hesitate to ride in the carriage with us, and so I called her.


    ¡°I think you should ride with Leo.¡±


    ¡°With Leo? I can do that!?¡±


    ¡°Aye. Right, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Milina was very surprised by this.


    Leo then nodded as if to say that she could take it from here. And then she moved in front of Milina andy low so that it would be easier to climb onto her back.


    ¡°Are you certain?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. She won¡¯t shake you off. See?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    I encouraged her, as she seemed to be hesitating over whether she should ride on Leo¡¯s back. And so she did.


    Leo looked happy to be able to carry someone, and she wagged her tail and barked.


    Even Sherry, who had been riding on Leo this whole time, barked as if weing Milina.


    ¡°She¡¯s so soft¡­ Also¡­uh, Sherry, was it?¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    Sherry replied happily and then jumped onto Milina.


    Once I saw that she was holding Sherry securely, I got into the carriage.


    ¡°You are very kind, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Do you think so? I only said that because Leo looked like she wanted to carry someone.¡±


    ¡°¡­Or because you saw that Milina was looking lonely?¡±


    ¡°¡­Well, leaving the people and ce that raised you¡­it would make one lonely.¡±


    ¡°So you are a kind person.¡±


    Apparently, Ms. Lyra knew my intention.


    It was a little embarrassing, especially since we were sitting so close to each other¡­


    While Milina said that she was fine, it would still be sad to leave the ce you had been living in for so long.


    At least when I came to this world, I had Leo with me. But I remember when I first started living alone as a student. It had been difficult to leave the uncle who had raised me.


    ¡°We will depart now.¡±


    Said the butler, and the carriage moved forward. Leo started to run alongside it.


    Around the time that we left the town, I could see Milina through the carriage window as she looked back towards Ractos.


    ¡­She really was sad to be leaving.


    ¡°Thank you, good Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°How was the ride, Milina?¡±


    ¡°It was wonderful. Due to the soft fur, it was a lot morefortable than a rocking carriage.¡±


    As Leo¡¯s fur acted as a cushion, it was fine even when she moved.


    Indeed, you felt a lot of the shaking when in a carriage¡­ I wonder if they don¡¯t have suspensions?


    ¡°Let¡¯s bring your things in then.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Ah, let me help you. It¡¯s mine after all!¡±


    ¡°You must take it easy today, Milina. While you will be treated as a servant from tomorrow, you are a guest for today.¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well.¡±


    As Ms. Lyra unloaded her things from the carriage, several other servants came out of the mansion and helped carry them inside.


    So Milina was a guest today¡­ Well, I suppose it was fine for one day.


    ¡°Now, let¡¯s go inside!¡±


    ¡°Yes! Though¡­I do feel nervous about going into such a fine house¡­¡±


    ¡°There¡¯s no need to be so nervous. Everyone here is very kind.¡±


    I said to Milina, who was standing still by the entrance. And then we stepped inside.


    ¡°Wee back, Mr. Takumi. Wee, Lady Milina.¡±


    ¡°Ah!¡±


    ¡°Ahaha. Don¡¯t be frightened. They always greet you when youe here.¡±


    When we entered the mansion, several of the servants greeted us all at once.


    Milina looked a little tense by this sudden urrence.


    She was nervous enough as it was, and this hadn¡¯t helped things at all.


    Also, I suppose they were calling her dy¡¯ because she was a guest for now.


    ¡°Milina, it¡¯s been a while. But I¡¯m d that you¡¯re finally here!¡±


    ¡°So you came atst¡­ I feel old already¡­¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re going to be Mr. Takumi¡¯s apprentice? How very bold of you, Milina.¡±


    ¡°Everyone¡­¡±


    A few of the servants seemed to recognize her as they started to talk to Milina.


    Apparently, they knew each other from back at the orphanage.


    I see¡­ Ms. ire did say that she tried to hire from there when possible¡­


    And Milina won¡¯t be as lonely if she has acquaintances here.


    ¡°Wee back, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Ms. ire. And Sebastian. We¡¯re back.¡±


    ¡°Ah, Lady ire. Thank you for having me.¡±


    Ms. ire and Sebastian came down the stairs and greeted us.


    Milina became tense again and greeted Ms. ire awkwardly.


    ¡°Wee to the Liebert house, Milina. I¡¯m pleased to have you.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Thank you.¡±


    Ms. ire smiled cheerfully as she weed Milina.


    After that, the servants took her away to show her the room where she would be sleeping in.


    Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda were among them.


    Now that I think about it, they were also from the orphanage¡­

 Chapter 140

    Chapter 140


    I Had Them Check On Nick


    ¡°Good work, Mr. Takumi. Thank you for picking up Milina.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. It was easy, as she didn¡¯t have any heavy luggage. Also, we stopped by at Mr. Kalis¡¯s store, as we had to deliver the herbs.¡±


    ¡°I see. So that¡¯s why Nick didn¡¯t stop by today?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Thankfully, Ms. Lyra had loaded the herbs onto the carriage.¡±


    After Milina and the others left, we moved to the dining hall as we continued to talk.


    It was so we could have ate lunch.


    Apparently, Ms. ire and Sebastian had been talking so much that they hadn¡¯t eaten yet.


    Tilura had eaten ahead of them and was training now¡­ I would join her after I ate my own lunch¡­ Ah, but I also have to spend time for my Weed Cultivation research¡­ I still haven¡¯t figured out my limits for using it one day.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. About your request¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, how was it?¡±


    Sebastian brought it up as we were eating.


    I felt bad, as I knew that he was busy dealing with the malicious store, but I had asked him to look into Nick¡¯s past.


    While Mr. Kalis said that he was working seriously now, there were other things to consider, depending on the number and nature of his past crimes.


    He had made a scene in public, and regardless of whether he was capable of reform, if people started spreading rumors that I was hiding him, then it could cause trouble for Ms. ire and the others.


    And I might have to do something for the other victims as well¡­ Apologizing would not be enough.


    ¡°As for Nick¡­there were fewer offenses than I thought. While he looks like he¡¯s ustomed to threatening people, it was mostly him imitating his friends.¡±


    ¡°Is that so?¡±


    ¡°Yes. However, there are other offenses, even when ignoring the time he threatened Lady ire, as well as his escape from prison.¡±


    ¡°Uhh, can you tell me the details about how many there are?¡±


    ¡°Let me see. First, there are four counts of threatening merchants. This includes Mr. Kalis¡¯s store, as well as the malicious one. If you include the event with Lady ire, the number would be five. Also, he escaped from prison¡­ He escaped right after being caught.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ The malicious store is one thing, but what about the others?¡±


    ¡°He apparently did this while alone, so they were able to drive him out before he caused any damage.¡±


    ¡°He didn¡¯t cause any damage?¡±


    While I had been able to deal with him when I had only just started my training, he had looked so intimidating¡­ He had a shaved head now, but I wouldn¡¯t have been surprised if some ces gave him money out of fear¡­


    ¡°Well¡­it seems like he didn¡¯t look like that until recently. My guess is that he changed his appearance in order to intimidate others.¡±


    So that exined it.


    And it had been quite effective, I suppose.


    ¡°Apparently, he changed shortly before we first met him with Lady ire. It was around then that he met the others by chance.¡±


    ¡°So¡­what happened to his friends?¡±


    ¡°They had many more offenses, when I looked into it. My view of the matter is that they pulled Nick in and made him take part in their crimes.¡±


    So he was trying to be bad, but failing, and it wasn¡¯t until he changed his appearance that he caught the eyes of some gang, who then asked him to join them¡­


    It was a very¡­typical pattern for delinquents in Japan¡­


    ¡°While it was a coincidence, it gave us information about that store. And while there was no damage, I think it would be best if he went around and apologized to each store, and then the matter can be exined to the guards.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Thank you.¡±


    ¡°No, it was no trouble at all.¡±


    ¡°Not only am I grateful that you looked into it¡­but you agreed to let me hire him in spite of the possible damage to this house¡­ Thank you.¡±


    ¡°That¡­indeed, yes¡­¡±


    ¡°But Mr. Takumi. I do think you were right back then. While he is hardly an innocent man, I don¡¯t think that merely punishing everyone who has made a mistake is right.¡±


    I was thankful towards Sebastian for allowing it, especially because of the possibility that it could affect their reputation.


    But it seemed like Ms. ire was of a simr mind as me.


    It wasn¡¯t that I believed that everyone could be reformed¡­there were unforgivable crimes that could not be undone.


    And Nick had done something that no person should do.


    However, he was working seriously now, and it seemed like he could be reformed. And ording to Sebastian, his past crimes were rather light.


    Though, he would still need to make some apologies.


    ¡°Well¡­it seems like with this case, he was struggling to feed himself, which could be taken into ount. However, you will be more careful from now on, won¡¯t you?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I understand.¡±


    While it was no excuse for going around and threatening people, it made things a little more understandable.


    Though, Sebastian gave me a warning there at the end¡­ I would have to be careful¡­I think.


    We finished eating lunch, and just as I was thinking about joining up with Tilura and training, Milina came to the dining hall.


    ¡°Excuse me.¡±


    ¡°Milina. What do you think about the mansion?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m relieved that there are people here who I know. And the room was very nice¡­ Thank you, Lady ire.¡±


    Milina was asked what she thought about the mansion, and so she answered.


    She had looked lonely as soon as she left the orphanage, but now that she saw familiar faces, she seemed more cheerful.


    ¡°What are you going to do now, master?¡±


    ¡°Me? I was thinking about doing some sword practice.¡±


    ¡°A sword¡­? But when will you be studying medicine?¡±


    Ah, right. Milina hade here in order to learn about medicine¡­ We were supposed to study it together.


    ¡°Well¡­let me see¡­ I¡¯ll train for a little, and then we¡¯ll study. uh, How about one hour from now?¡±


    ¡°I understand. I¡¯ll do my best!¡±


    I left the enthusiastic Milina in the dining hall, and then I went out into the garden to join Tilura.


    There, Tilura was training quietly.


    ¡­She was working so hard and seriously, so I couldn¡¯t ck off.


    Studying Weed Cultivation, sword training, and learning about medicine. I had a lot to do, but I felt more motivated after seeing Tilura.

 Chapter 142

    Chapter 142


    I Trained With Leo


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Okay. Okay.¡±


    Leo started to bark every time me and Milina started to talk about something else, and it looked like we weren¡¯t focused on our studies.


    Hurry up and turn to the next page¡­ That¡¯s what she was saying. But was she really learning as well¡­?


    And was it necessary¡­for a Silver Fenrir to study and learn about medicine?


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, Milina. Why don¡¯t you take a break now?¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ I didn¡¯t realize that so much time had passed.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s starting to get dark.¡±


    As I, Milina and Leo concentrated on reading, Ms. Lyra called out to us.


    And when I looked outside, I saw that the sun was already descending¡­ We had been so focused, I suppose.


    ¡°Hmm. I guess that¡¯s enough for today then.¡±


    ¡°Or we could continue studying after a short break?¡±


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s almost dinner time. And there are other things that I¡¯d like to do. So this is enough for today.¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    As Ms. Lyra started to pour some tea for us, I told Milina that we would stop studying for the day.


    It was just around the point that studying was bing enjoyable, and so I understood why she felt like she hadn¡¯t had enough. But it wasn¡¯t good to study too much all at once¡­


    Besides, this was her first day, and she was bound to be tired soon.


    Even Leo was nodding her head in agreement¡­ And she really had been looking at the book the whole time¡­


    ¡°Here you are.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    I thanked Ms. Lyra as I drank the tea that she poured and sighed.


    We hadn¡¯t been moving, but studying meant using your head instead.


    And so the delicious tea helped soothe my brain¡­


    ¡°This tea is so good. I¡¯ve never had anything like it before.¡±


    ¡°Ms. Lyra¡¯s tea is always delicious.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    Milina was surprised by how good the tea was.


    The tea leaves would have been of very fine quality, and it was brewed most expertly. And so it would be very different from what she was used to at the orphanage.


    I watched as Ms. Lyra prepared milk for Leo and then I sat back and rxed.


    Then Ms. Gelda came in and said that dinner was ready, so we all moved to the dining hall.


    We were told that the things we used to study would be taken to our rooms¡­ Thank you.


    ¡°You¡¯ll be with us today, Milina.¡±


    ¡°Me¡­? Are you certain?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s fine, because you are here as a guest today.¡±


    While she would be treated as a servant tomorrow, she was a guest today. And so she would eat at the same table as Ms. ire.


    This was her first time in the mansion, and the great dining hall and huge table¡­ It was no wonder that someone raised in an orphanage might hesitate.


    ¡°Why don¡¯t you ept the kind offer?¡±


    ¡°If you say so, master¡­ I will.¡±


    Milina nodded and then sat down at the table.


    She was sitting next to Leo¡­on the other side that I was sitting.


    As always, Ms. ire sat at the other end, and Tilura, who had finished training, sat next to her.


    Sebastian must have still been busy, as he was nowhere to be seen.


    Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda stood waiting as always, but¡­ I thought Ms. Lyra had gone to put away our studying materials. Yet she had returned already¡­


    ¡°This is delicious. I never dreamed that I would eat something like this!¡±


    As soon as she started eating, Milina let out a cry of emotion at how good the food was.


    This was no surprise, since Ms. Helena had worked hard to make it.


    ¡°Hehehe. I¡¯m sure Helena will be happy to hear you say that.¡±


    Ms. ire watched with amusement as Milina gushed about the food.


    Upon realizing that she was being watched, Milina looked a little embarrassed, but she could not win against her appetite, and she continued to gorge herself.


    After that, dinner and tea time ended uneventfully.


    Milina went to her room with Ms. Gelda.


    I went out to the garden to practice swinging with Tilura.


    As I hadn¡¯t been able to train much due to my studies, I focused on my swings more than usual.


    ¡°Good work, Tilura.¡±


    ¡°I did my best today. And I¡¯ll do my best tomorrow!¡±


    After finishing, I said good night to Tilura and then washed up before returning to my room.


    ¡°I suppose I should read ahead.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    When I returned to my room, I noticed that the book we had been reading was now lying on my desk.


    Ms. Lyra must have put it there.


    And so I sat down and started to read it.


    If I was going to be called master, then I should at least prepare ahead for tomorrow¡¯s lesson.


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°You can read, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    As Leo had muttered as if deep in thought while looking over my shoulder, I asked her.


    Leo nodded¡­ So she could read¡­ That was amazing. Silver Fenrirs¡­


    Though, I didn¡¯t know how much of it she understood.


    ¡°Hmm¡­hmm¡­ I see.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Wuff-wuff.¡±


    And so Leo and I read the book togetherte into the night.


    While it meant less sleep, this was still important.


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¨C


    After breakfast on the following day, I went out into the garden with Milina in order to show her Weed Cultivation.


    I had already finished my training with Leo, and so I moved over to a secluded area and used Weed Cultivation.


    ¡­Once again, I hadn¡¯t been able to hit Leo¡­ I knew it wouldn¡¯t be easy, but it still made me feel frustrated.


    ¡°I saw you use it before, but it really is strange.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Even I think so, and I¡¯m the one using it.¡±


    Milina muttered as she stared at my hands intently.


    While it was my own ability, the sight of nts growing rapidly out of the ground was something that I never got used to.


    ¡°You really are amazing, master!¡±


    Said Milina with shining eyes as I finished using the Gift, and handed the day¡¯s herbs to Ms. Lyra.


    It was a little embarrassing.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Nick has arrived.¡±


    ¡°I see. I¡¯ll go right now.¡±


    Ms. Gelda hade to tell me that Nick was here.


    I met him in the waiting room and handed him the herbs that Ms. Lyra had put into a bag, and then my work for the day was over.


    ¡­While I usually had to rely on my ability, my job often felt like it was almost too easy¡­?


    I used to have to sweat a lot with my previous job, so it felt questionable to have it so easy now.


    Well, I wanted to live a slow, rxed life. So maybe this was fine after all.

 Chapter 143

    Chapter 143


    Nichs Returned to the Mansion


    ¡°I¡¯ve returned.¡±


    ¡°Nichs.¡±


    Just as I was going through the entrance hall in order to return to the garden to train, the front door opened and Nichs entered.


    After that, Sebastian was called, and they went to the drawing room in order to hear the report.


    I was told that I could attend.


    ¡°So, Nichs. What did His Grace say?¡±


    ¡°Lord Ekenhart¡­¡±


    Apparently, Nichs had been able to meet Mr. Ekenhart at the halfway point between this mansion and the main residence.


    This was due to the fact that Mr. Ekenhart had been taking his time and traveling at a leisurely pace.


    It turned out that my herbs had also been useful, and Nichs thanked me.


    I was d to hear it.


    ¡°I see¡­ Very good. Well, you must be tired, so you can go and rest.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    After finishing his report, Nichs left the drawing room.


    As it would have been a tough ride, he would be quite exhausted.


    ¡°Now, I must ry this information to Lady ire.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    And so Sebastian left in order to speak to her.


    I stayed behind with Leo and Ms. Lyra.


    As for Milina and Ms. Gelda, they were in the garden watching Tilura and Sherry.


    ¡°Watch and wait, huh¡­¡±


    I thought back on what I had just heard.


    Before leaving to see Mr. Ekenhart, Nichs had done some searching in Ractos as well, and had a grasp on the malicious store.


    I suppose he had also spoken with Sebastian as well.


    He even knew that the count was involved, that they had been buying all the herbs and medicine in the town, and that they had started selling shortly after the spread of the disease.


    After telling everything to Mr. Ekenhart, the reply had been to wait and see.


    ¡°Even someone like Mr. Ekenhart isn¡¯t able to take action immediately¡­¡±


    As the store was in his territory, he could easily have it shut down. Only, it could lead to otherplications with the noble houseter on.


    And so he would rather act once they had irrefutable evidence.


    That¡¯s why Sebastian has been so busy these days.


    Also, Mr. Ekenhart himself was going to look into this matter with the count.


    While it was unlikely to be resolved soon, I still wanted to do something about this store that was hurting the people.


    ¡°But I suppose there is no point in me thinking about it.¡±


    I drank the rest of the tea that Ms. Lyra had poured, and then I went out into the garden to switch gears.


    ¡°Why are you running too, Milina?¡±


    ¡°Ha¡­ha¡­ Because I¡¯m quite confident in my athletic ability¡­¡±


    When I arrived at the garden, I saw that Milina was running with Tilura and Sherry.


    Sherry always ran with her, but I didn¡¯t see why Milina needed to run as well.


    After running, Milia smiled happily as she caught her breath.


    While she was tired, she was clearly having fun. So I suppose it was alright.


    ¡°Anyway, I¡¯ll be training here until lunch. Is that fine?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Then we can study after that!¡±


    But first, I had to train.


    Moving my body would help me forget all those unpleasant thoughts.


    As there was currently no good way to deal with the store, I had been feeling a sense of anger.


    After that, I continued to train until Ms. Lyra came to call us.


    As studying would take up a lot of my time, I had trained harder than usual. Milina seemed a little worried, but it was fine, as I had the herbs.


    ¡­I just had to be careful that I didn¡¯t get sleepy while we studied.


    ¡°I¡¯ll study hard!¡±


    After lunch, we went to the drawing room like yesterday in order to study.


    As I had been readingtest night, I was quite ahead already.


    Thanks to this, I was able to answer Milina¡¯s questions smoothly.


    ¡­So it was worth the reduced hours of sleep.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, it¡¯s time for dinner.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Milina, that¡¯s enough for today.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    I nodded to Ms. Gelda, who hade to tell us that dinner was ready, and we finished studying for the day.


    We were going through the book at a much faster pace than I expected. I wasn¡¯t sure if it was because I had read ahead, or because it was just easy to understand.


    But I went over everything in my head as I headed to the dining hall.


    As Milina was now here as a servant, she would eat with them.


    They had a separate ce to eat their meals.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, I just talked with Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    During dinner, Ms. ire talked about what she had heard concerning her father.


    She had an angry expression, which suggested she too felt frustrated that they were not able to do anything about the store.


    We had to wait for Mr. Ekenhart to provoke the count into action, or for Sebastian to find concrete evidence¡­


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau. Kyau.¡±


    Seeing that we were in a dark mood, Leo and Sherry tried to cheer us up.


    Yes¡­ There was no point in brooding over it like this.


    Thanks to their efforts, we were able to get through dinner amidst a peaceful atmosphere.


    ¡°Hahaha. That tickles, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau.¡±


    It had been a while since Ist saw Leo and Sherry ying with Tilura like this. I mused as I sipped my tea.


    Perhaps Tilura had also sensed the dark atmosphere and was trying to lighten the mood.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°No, I should be the one to apologize. Thankfully, we have Leo, Sherry and Tilura to help us.¡±


    I said to Ms. ire with a chuckle while watching Leo and the others.


    Children were often sensitive to the moods of grownups¡­ I had to be more careful.


    ¡­Well, Leo wasn¡¯t a child¡­


    Ms. ire smiled cheerfully after that and watched the others y.


    Yes, the sight of them ying was somehow very calming.


    ¡°Well, good night.¡±


    ¡°Good night, Ms. ire.¡±


    After tea time, we said good night to Ms. ire, and then Tilura and I went to the garden.


    We did our daily sword swings, and then retired.


    I then read what remained of the book on medicine, and then went to bed.


    Tomorrow, I would have to ask Sebastian if he didn¡¯t have any other books.

 Chapter 144

    Chapter 144


    A Viger Visited the Mansion


    After that, the next few days passed by uneventfully.


    In the mornings after breakfast, I would train with Leo and use Weed cultivation.


    And then I would hand them to Nick, and continue training.


    In the afternoon, I would study with Milina.


    When I asked Sebastian, he gave me some medium-level books, and so we used those now.


    ¡­Compared to the first one, it was a lot harder, but we somehow managed to go through them and discuss what we learned.


    After dinner, I practiced my swings, studied ahead, and then went to sleep¡­ This was repeated over and over.


    As for Milina, she learned to be a servant in her free time.


    ¡°Lady ire, you have a guest.¡±


    Dayster, after we had finished eating lunch, a visitor came to the mansion.


    Ms. Lyra came to the dining hall and announced it to Ms. ire.


    ¡°To see me? But there were no ns for such a visit¡­¡±


    Ms. ire looked puzzled by this, but followed Ms. Lyra out of the dining hall¡­ Well, that¡¯s what I thought they would do, but then Ms. Lyra turned to me.


    ¡°I think it must be rted to you as well, Mr. Takumi. Will youe with us?¡±


    ¡°Me? Very well.¡±


    In what way could this guest be rted to me¡­?


    But when I thought about it, the only thing that came to mind was the herbs. It was something that all the servants of the house knew about¡­


    While it was strange, I got up from my chair and followed Ms. Lyra.


    Leo, Sherry, and Tilura decided to stay behind.


    It was a good thing, as Leo usually startled people she was meeting for the first time.


    ¡°Forgive me for disturbing you at this time.¡±


    ¡°Who are you?¡±


    ¡°My name is Hannes. I¡¯m the chief of Range vige. This is my granddaughter, Rosalie.¡±


    ¡°I am Rosalie.¡±


    ¡°Range vige¡­¡±


    Upon entering the drawing room with Ms. ire, an old man and a young girl got up from their chairs and bowed.


    They introduced themselves and then Ms. ire sat down on the other side of the table.


    ¡­Where should I sit¡­? Next to Ms. ire?


    While uncertain, I sat down anyway¡­ And no one said anything, so it was probably fine.


    ¡°I am ire. ire Liebert. And I am currently managing this estate.¡±


    ¡°Lady ire¡­ Ah¡­we have heard stories. I came here today so that I may ask for your help.¡±


    ¡°I will listen to what you have to say.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    After being encouraged to talk by Ms. ire, the old man¡­Mr. Hannes, began to exin.


    ¡°Currently, an illness is spreading through Range vige.¡±


    ¡°An illness?¡±


    I couldn¡¯t help but mutter.


    Hannes nced towards me, but continued.


    ¡°Yes. At first it was just one of the young ones. But then it started to spread day after day¡­¡±


    And now, the majority of the vige has fallen ill¡­ That¡¯s what he said.


    ¡°But not you two, Mr. Hannes?¡±


    ¡°Both my granddaughter and I were ill at one point. But after testing various medicines, we realized that Ramogi was the most effective.¡±


    ¡°So we drank Ramogi and were healed.¡±


    Rosalie added.


    She looked to be about ten years old. Maybe a little older than Tilura, and looked very lively.


    Though, she also seemed quite nervous, as she was in front of Lady ire.


    ¡°You drank the Ramogi¡­ So it must be the same illness that we saw at the Ractos orphanage.¡±


    ¡°I see. But, why have youe here?¡±


    ¡°The Ramogi that we used was thest in the vige. And so we went to Ractos in order to buy more¡­¡±


    ¡°But there was hardly any left to buy¡­¡±


    Because of the malicious store, there was not a lot of good Ramogi in stock in the town.


    Other stores were restocking it now, but there was still not enough to meet demand.


    And while I was sending some to Mr. Kalis, it wasn¡¯t a lot.


    ¡°But we continued to search the town¡­but every store was low¡­ But then one kind person suggested a certain store to me.¡±


    ¡°But when we went there¡­they gave us some strange medicine.¡±


    ¡°Strange medicine¡­? Could it be¡­?¡±


    ¡°Yes. It must be that store that Sebastian is looking into.¡±


    So after walking around Ractos, they reached that store¡­


    ¡°As the leader of my vige, I have some knowledge of medicine. And so I could tell that there was something wrong with what they were selling.¡±


    ¡°My grandfather is amazing.¡±


    Rosalie said boastfully.


    While she was nervous, she couldn¡¯t help but be happy about her grandfather being able to tell that the medicine was bad.


    ¡°Yes, it¡¯s a good thing you didn¡¯t buy it.¡±


    Ms. ire said with a smile.


    ¡°But finding out that ourst hope was selling fake medicine¡­we were at aplete loss.¡±


    The medicine was of bad quality, so it couldn¡¯t be helped that people would call it fake.


    ¡°And yet, I was desperate. And so I continued to search Ractos¡­when I heard rumors of a certain store. And when I followed them, I arrived at a store run by a Mr. Kalis.¡±


    ¡°And they were selling the herbs and medicine that were out of stock.¡±


    ¡°However¡­it was still not enough to heal everyone in the vige.¡±


    That was obvious. I was the one supplying that store with herbs. And an entire vige¡­ Well, even if it wasn¡¯t everyone, it was still a lot of people, and I couldn¡¯t make that much.


    And I was already sending herbs to Mr. Kalis so that they could reach the people of Ractos.


    ¡°And so we asked Mr. Kalis.¡±


    ¡°He said that the store was owned by the duke. And he told us that if we came here, you might be able to help us.¡±


    ¡°I see. So it was by Mr. Kalis¡¯s rmendation that you visited.¡±


    Mr. Kalis knew how the herbs were being made.


    And so while he didn¡¯t tell them how¡­he must have thought that their problem could be solved if they came here.


    Perhaps Ms. Lyra had also heard of the matter in advance.


    And so she wanted me to be here.


    ¡°Please. Will you help us¡­!¡±


    ¡°Please!¡±


    Mr. Hannes and Rosalie stood up and bowed to Ms. ire.


    Ms. ire saw this and stopped to think.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Could I have a word with you?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Hannes, Rosalie. Please wait one moment.¡±


    And so while they waited, Ms. ire and I talked to each other in hushed voices.

 Chapter 145

    Chapter 145


    I Thought of a Way to Send Ramogi To The Vige


    ¡°What should be done¡­ I know that you can make the herbs, but¡­¡±


    ¡°The problem is the number that I am able to make¡­¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t want you to push yourself too hard. ¡­But¡­¡±


    Ms. ire wanted to help Hannes and Rosalie.


    Of course, I did as well.


    I didn¡¯t know how far away this Range vige was, but they hade all of the way here.


    ¡°You could send fewer herbs to Mr. Kalis?¡±


    ¡°But then there won¡¯t be enough to go around for the people of Ractos.¡±


    I wanted to avoid that.


    As the malicious store was still there, I didn¡¯t want to decrease the number of herbs.


    ¡°In that case¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Mr. Hannes.¡±


    ¡°Yes?¡±


    ¡°How long would it take to travel to your vige, if one were to go by horse?¡±


    ¡°¡­You would have to pass through the town of Ractos¡­ So, that would be three days.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Thank you.¡±


    After hearing this, I started to think again.


    As Mr. Hannes didn¡¯t know who I was, he was looking at me oddly. But I couldn¡¯t be bothered by that right now.


    ¡°Ms. ire, three days on horse. How long would that be on Leo¡­?¡±


    ¡°I believe¡­it would be¡­around one day¡­?¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Then I might have an idea.¡±


    And so I told Ms. ire what I hade up with.


    Simply put, I just had to avoid using Weed Cultivation too much in one day.


    If I could not prepare enough at once, I just needed to do it over several days.


    Thankfully, I had a reliablepanion called Leo.


    ¡°I understand. I think that might work, Mr. Takumi. And since you would not be pushing yourself too hard, Sebastian won¡¯t object to it.¡±


    ¡°I hope that is the case.¡±


    Now that I think about it, Sebastian isn¡¯t here.


    Since he thought of things from different angles, I wasn¡¯t actually confident that he would agree¡­


    ¡°Hannes. We have decided to help you.¡±


    ¡°You will!?¡±


    Ms. ire told him our conclusion.


    Mr. Hannes and Rosalie looked overjoyed.


    ¡°This is Mr. Takumi¡­our physician. He will deal with the matter.¡±


    ¡°You¡­¡±


    ¡°Uh, I¡¯m Takumi. Sorry for thete introduction. But I will prepare enough herbs for your vige, Mr. Hannes.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Thank you.¡±


    Mr. Hannes cried tears of gratitude as he bowed his head to Ms. ire and me.


    He must have been incredibly worried about his people¡­ And after all the searching he had done in the town.


    ¡°Mr. Hannes. Can you go ahead and return to your vige?¡±


    ¡°I can but¡­what about the medicine¡­?¡±


    ¡°It will be prepared. Though, it won¡¯t be a lot.¡±


    ¡°So it won¡¯t be enough for everyone in the vige¡­¡±


    Mr. Hannes¡¯ face suddenly darkened.


    Well, of course, he would think that.


    ¡°No, there will be enough¡­for everyone who is ill.¡±


    ¡°But¡­¡±


    ¡°However, we will need some time.¡±


    ¡°Time¡­?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I want you to return first by horse. And during the few days it takes you to return, I will do what I can to secure the necessary amount of medicine.¡±


    ¡°But then¡­it won¡¯t arrive at the vige until muchter¡­¡±


    Mr. Hannes was thinking that I or someone else would be delivering the medicine to the vigeter.


    So even though the medicine would reach them eventually, they would not get it as soon as he would like.


    While it may make sense to have those who were the most ill take the medicine first, the chief may also want to avoid looking like he was favoring anyone when they all wanted it.


    ¡°No, I believe¡­that around the time that you arrive at the vige, I will also be there, and with enough medicine for all.¡±


    ¡°¡­How is that possible? You will be leaving several dayster, and yet you can catch up¡­¡±


    It would be impossible, if I was on horseback like Mr. Hannes.


    If I traveled without resting, I might be able to close the gap a little¡­ Though, I didn¡¯t even know how to ride a horse.


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s just say I have a method of travel that is faster than any horse.¡±


    ¡°¡­You do?¡±


    ¡°Faster than a horse?¡±


    Mr. Hannes and Rosalie looked like they didn¡¯t believe me.


    I wasn¡¯t sure if there was anything faster than Leo in this world. Maybe there was. But it was not something that someone from a small vige would be able to imagine.


    ¡°Uhh, wait one moment.¡±


    ¡°¡­Ah.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll go and call Leo.¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course.¡±


    I said to Ms. ire, and then I left the room and went to the dining hall.


    ¡°If you are looking for Leo, she is out in the garden with Lady Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    When I went to the dining hall, there was only a maid who was cleaning and putting things away.


    Apparently, they had be bored of waiting for me.


    ¡°Leo. Come over here!¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    I went out into the garden and called Leo, who was carrying Sherry and running with Tilura.


    I felt bad to disturb their training, but I called Leo and we returned to the drawing room.


    ¡­I should take Sherry down first.


    ¡°I¡¯m back.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°AHHH!¡±


    ¡°It-it¡¯s a fen¡­fenrir¡­?¡±


    And so Leo and I entered the drawing room again.


    Leo barked once and then Mr. Hannes and Rosalie turned to see her, and their faces grew tense.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. This is Leo. She won¡¯t attack humans.¡±


    ¡°¡­Are you¡­certain of that¡­?¡±


    ¡°Yes. While Leo is a Silver Fenrir, she listens to what I say and is very mild-mannered. Right, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°¡­Silver Fenrir¡­¡±


    After hearing this, Mr. Hannes seemed to calm down a little. But he was still clearly afraid.


    It was as if telling him that she was a Silver Fenrir reignited his anxiety¡­ Well, this was to be expected, I suppose.

 Chapter 146

    Chapter 146


    Children took to Leo very quickly


    ¡°Wuff-wuff?¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Ah, wait a minute. ¡­Uh, Rosalie¡­right?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I am Rosalie!¡±


    After hearing Leo, I turned and addressed Rosalie.


    She looked nervous, seeing as how I was the man who had brought a Silver Fenrir into their presence.


    ¡°There¡¯s no need to be so nervous. Leo likes children. Why don¡¯t you y with her?¡±


    ¡°¡­But won¡¯t it try to eat me?¡±


    ¡°Leo wouldn¡¯t eat people. Don¡¯t worry¡­ See?¡±


    ¡°¡­It¡¯s so soft.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    While Roalie had been afraid of being eaten at first, I assured her that it was fine, and then took her hand.


    I had her touch Leo¡¯s fur. Once she felt how soft it was, her expression rxed.


    Leo also barked happily.


    ¡°Leo likes to y with children, and would never hurt anyone.¡±


    ¡°¡­But, Silver Fenrirs are not supposed to be so gentle¡­¡±


    Mr. Hannese stared in disbelief. He was watching Rosalie pet Leo.


    If you knew anything about Silver Fenrirs, you would find it difficult to believe such a sight. But Leo was quiet and gentle.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Aha! Hahah. That¡¯s amazing.¡±


    Leo barked, and then Rosalie got on top of her back as they yed.


    Children sure adapted quickly.


    ¡°Well, as you can see¡­ It¡¯s possible to ride on Leo. And that¡¯s how I will catch up with you.¡±


    ¡°¡­It can carry people¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. Leo is faster than any horse, and so the journey will only take one day at the most.¡±


    I didn¡¯t know how long it was exactly, but given Leo¡¯s speed, it was a good estimate.


    Though, I had yet to make Leo run at full speed. So perhaps she was even faster.


    ¡­But then again, I might fall off. So I would have to limit her speed a little.


    ¡°I see¡­ In that case, I can understand. You have a Silver Fenrir who obeys you¡­ That makes you trustworthy, I think.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m d that you believe me.¡±


    ¡°Well, that settles things. Now¡­Lyra.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Mr. Hannes decided to trust us.


    As he knew about Silver Fenrirs, seeing Leo¡¯s calm behavior increased his trust in me.


    I did feel a little sad that I was unable to earn his trust on my own merits, but I suppose that couldeter.


    I should be happy that I have such a reliable buddy.


    Ms. ire called Ms. Lyra, who then approached Mr. Hannes.


    ¡°You must be tired from your travels. Please stay here today and rest.¡±


    ¡°¡­I am grateful for the offer¡­but I must return to my vige as soon as possible.¡±


    ¡°I understand how you feel, but you should rest today. Besides, it will take time to prepare the medicine.¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well.¡±


    Ms. Lyra was able to persuade him, and Mr. Hannes agreed to stay for the night.


    He was quite elderly, and had traveled far¡­ We didn¡¯t want him to overextend himself.


    Ms. Lyra looked at me and nodded.


    ¡­I see¡­ So that¡¯s why.


    ¡°Well, I will go and prepare the medicine. Though, it will take some time¡­¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Thank you!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Ah, Leo. You can stay here and y with Rosalie.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I told them that I would prepare the medicine, and then I left the room.


    Leo was about to follow me, but I had her stay and y with Rosalie.


    It seemed like Rosalie would enjoy thepany, and it would help take her mind off the vige, and whether it would be saved or not.


    And perhaps Mr. Hannes would get used to having Leo close by.


    ¡°That was a good move on Ms. Lyra¡¯s part.¡±


    She had signaled to me with a nod.


    As I would be using Weed Cultivation to make the Ramogi, it would not take that long.


    However, it was used as a convenient excuse to make Mr. Hannes rest.


    ¡°Well, I¡¯ll do as she said and take my time.¡±


    I muttered as I went to the back garden.


    There, Tilura was still running with Milina and Sherry.


    ¡°There you are, Mr. Takumi. Will you train with me?¡±


    ¡°Sorry, but there¡¯s something I have to do, so I won¡¯t be able to train.¡±


    I had to make the Ramogi for Range vige.


    However, I didn¡¯t want to decrease the amount that I sent to Ractos either.


    In that case, I had to train less, so that I wouldn¡¯t have to make any herbs for recovery.


    I doubted that I would be pushing myself close to the limit, but it was best to be safe.


    ¡°I understand. I hope it goes well!¡±


    ¡°Thank you. You too, Tilura. Also¡­don¡¯t forget to study, all right?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­yes.¡±


    Tilura¡¯s face darkened when she heard that, and then she returned to her training.


    ¡°Master. You¡¯re not going to train today¡­? What happened?¡±


    ¡°Ah. It turns out that I have to prepare more Ramogi than usual.¡±


    I then told her about our visitor, Mr. Hannes.


    ¡°If that is the case, I will assist you. I now have a grasp on handling medicine, after all.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    So saying, with Tilura training in the corner of my eye, I started to use Weed Cultivation.


    I left the gathering to Milina.


    While she still wasn¡¯t used to doing this, she would get the hang of it eventually.


    I had been the same at first¡­but after trying it many times, I became ustomed to it.


    ¡°I¡¯m amazed every time I see your ability, master.¡±


    ¡°Well, there are limits to it.¡±


    We talked as we worked to make the Ramogi medicine.


    After it was gathered, I ced my hands over them to turn them into a dry state. And then Milina separated them and wrapped them up.


    After repeating this for some time, we had a lot of medicine ready.


    It was more than what I had made at the orphanage.


    ¡°¡­I suppose this is enough for now.¡±


    ¡°That was a lot of work!¡±


    Milina said, but I wasn¡¯t tired at all.


    But then again, the Gift wasn¡¯t rted to using physical strength.


    While I didn¡¯t feel like I was going to faint, and thought I could keep going, it wasn¡¯t good to test your luck.


    I will make more tomorrow. And I should have a decent amount by the time that Mr. Hannes leaves.

 Chapter 147

    Chapter 147


    The Girls Happily yed with Leo


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, Lady ire told me about what happened.¡±


    ¡°Ah, Sebastian.¡±


    Just as I had finished creating the Ramogi, Sebastian, came out into the garden after talking to Ms. ire.


    ¡°I do hope that you are not overusing the Gift.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I still feel fine¡­ But I¡¯ll be extra careful. Milina, that¡¯s all for today.¡±


    ¡°I understand.¡±


    I answered Sebastian as I handed thest of the Ramogi to Milina.


    She wrapped it up in cloth and the job was done.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. I finished my training!¡±


    ¡°Good work, Tilura. Here¡¯s your herbs. Don¡¯t forget to eat them to help with recovery.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Thank you!¡±


    ¡°Master, when did you make those¡­¡±


    I handed Tilura the herbs for muscle fatigue now that she had finished training.


    As Milina had been watching me grow the Ramogi, she looked quite surprised. However, it was easy for me to use my free hand and make a different kind of herb at the same time.


    Well, I suppose it was easy because I had done this work so many times.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Leo?¡±


    As I stood up and started to stretch my limbs, Leo returned.


    Wasn¡¯t she supposed to be with Mr. Hannes and Rosalie?


    Ah, Rosalie was still on her back¡­ I guess they were out here to y.


    ¡°Good Leo!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    Tilura and Sherry saw Leo approach, and then they ran towards her happily.


    Knowing Tilura, she was likely to be friends with Rosalie very quickly.


    And Rosalie didn¡¯t look like she was particrly shy either.


    And so Milina and I watched as Tilura hugged Leo, or rode on her with Sherry as she ran around.


    As expected, Tilura and Rosalie became friends immediately.


    I¡¯m sure it helped that they had a ymate inmon, with Leo being there.


    ¡°¡­Milina. You can y with them too if you want?¡±


    ¡°No, I don¡¯t¡­¡±


    She looked a little restless as she watched them, and so I suggested that she should join them, but she refused.


    However, I could tell by her words and expressions that she actually wanted to.


    Now that I think about it, Milina hadn¡¯t yed with Leo at the orphanage, because she was talking with us.


    And while she had opportunities to be with Leo sinceing here, she was mostly busy with her studies.


    ¡°Well, I think Leo and the others would be happy to have another person to y with.¡±


    ¡°Bu-but¡­¡±


    I pushed the back of the hesitant Milina towards Leo.


    ¡°Leo. Do you have a minute?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°What¡¯s the matter?¡±


    ¡°Kyau?¡±


    I called Leo while pushing Milina.


    Then the others asked what had happened.


    ¡°Could you let Milina join in?¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Of course, she can. Let¡¯s y together, Milina!¡±


    ¡°Ms¡­Milina? It will be fun if we all y.¡±


    ¡°Kyau-kyau!¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes¡­¡±


    When I asked them, Leo barked happily, and then the others all agreed to wee her.


    Upon seeing this reaction, Milina finally nodded and ran towards Leo and the others.


    ¡°Are you sure, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Well, she seemed busy with studying and her duties as a servant. So I think it would be good for her to y with the others once in a while.¡±


    I answered to Sebastian while handing him the wrapped up Ramogi.


    ¡°This is for Range vige. I intend to make some more tomorrow, but this is all I can make for today.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    Sebastian took it and went back into the mansion. I then sat down and watched the others y as I rested.


    It was soon dinner time, and as it was also getting dark, y time with Leo ended.


    It must have been very fun, as Milina looked disappointed.


    I would be sure to allow her to y again sometime soon.


    ¡°Can we really¡­join you?¡±


    Mr. Hannes asked when he came to the dining hall and saw the kind of food that was put on the table.


    ¡°It is fine. Even though this is the house of a duke, we do not strictly follow such formalities at all times. You should enjoy your time here until tomorrow.¡±


    ¡°¡­Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Thank you!¡±


    But even after hearing Ms. ire¡¯s assurance, Mr. Hannes still looked nervous.


    I doubted he had ever eaten with a noblewoman in such a mansion before.


    And I could understand how he felt.


    As for Rosalie, her nervousness had vanished after ying with Leo, and so she thanked Ms. ire cheerfully and began to eat the food.


    Ms. ire smiled as she watched.


    ¡°It¡¯s delicious!¡±


    ¡°Rosalie¡­¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. It¡¯s a good thing to express your delight when eating good food. Isn¡¯t that right, Helena?¡±


    ¡°Yes. As a cook, such words are more encouraging than anything.¡±


    Mr. Hannes scolded Rosalie for speaking loudly after eating.


    But Ms. ire assured him that it was fine.


    Besides, Ms. Helena seemed delighted to see someone eating her food with such relish.


    Children were so honest with expressing their emotions, and so it was nice to see it.


    ¡°Now, I hope you will rest easy here today?¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you for preparing a room for us.¡±


    ¡°Good night, Lady ire.¡±


    After we had finished eating, Mr. Hannes and Rosalie were led out of the dining hall by one of the maids, and taken to the room that had been prepared for them so that they could rest.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Do you have a minute?¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    After Mr. Hannes was gone, I stood up in order to practice my sword swings, but then Sebastian stopped me.


    ¡°It¡¯s about the matter of you going to Range vige. I suppose it will be just you and Leo who are going.¡±


    ¡°¡­That¡¯s true.¡±


    I answered while thinking about it.


    While Ms. ire and the others had herbs, it would not do for them to go to a vige where a disease had spread.


    Besides, Sebastian and the others were busy dealing with that store.


    He was gathering information and monitoring it, so it would be best if he didn¡¯t leave the mansion.

 Chapter 148

    Chapter 148


    I Decided to Learn Magic from Sebastian


    ¡°I was thinking, Mr. Takumi, that I should teach you to use magic, just in case.¡±


    ¡°Magic¡­¡±


    Now that I thought about it, Sebastian had exined magic to me when I first came to this mansion.


    Though, he hadn¡¯t been able to finish, as Tilura interrupted him.


    When looking into my Gift in Ractos, it was revealed that I had an aptitude for magic as well, so I should be able to use it if I wanted to.


    ¡°Currently, you are training to use the sword, with His Grace as your tutor. However, there will be times when a sword alone is not enough to deal with a situation.¡±


    As I had not been training for that long yet, I could hardly be considered a full-fledged swordsman.


    While I had been able to deal with Nick, that was not enough to make me feel confident at all.


    What if I were to meet someone who could easily outss my meager sword skills¡­ I could rely on Leo, but it was good to have options.


    ¡°Indeed¡­ As Leo is always with me, I doubt such a thing will happen any time soon¡­ But you never know what could happen. Perhaps it is necessary.¡±


    ¡°Yes. After all, you might encounter monsters on the way. Of course, I can only teach you simple magic¡­ But I think it would be good if you learned a few spells before your departure.


    ¡°Very well. It¡¯s to protect myself, after all. Thank you.¡±


    I had seen a few different spells up until now.


    None of them seemed like they could help me fight monsters, but they would still be useful.


    So, what kind of magic would Sebastian teach me¡­


    And so it was with a feeling of excitement that I returned to the garden where Tilura was.


    ¡°I wasn¡¯t able to concentrate much today.¡±


    After doing my swings with Tilura, I returned to my room with a feeling of regret.


    My excitement for learning magic had distracted me.


    Tilura had no such problem with concentration¡­ I had to do better.


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I have to concentrate when the time calls for it.¡±


    I agreed as Leo looked at me admonishingly.


    But from tomorrow, there will be magic and training, growing herbs and studying medicine¡­ That was a lot to do¡­


    ¡ª¡ª


    The next day, Mr. Hannes and his granddaughter ate breakfast and departed for their vige.


    ¡°Thank you for your hospitality, Lady ire.¡±


    ¡°Thank you!¡±


    I stepped outside with Ms. ire in order to see them off.


    Ms. ire smiled at their words and nodded.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Good Leo. We¡¯ll be waiting for you in the vige!¡±


    Leo went up to Rosalie in order to say goodbye.


    Rosalie smiled and petted Leo.


    They were good friends now. That was nice to see.


    ¡°Keep them safe, Phillip.¡±


    ¡°Yes, mydy.¡±


    Phillip nodded at Ms. ire and got on his horse.


    While Mr. Hannes and Rosalie hade here by themselves, Phillip would escort them back.


    This was to protect them and ensure that they made it back to the vige.


    ¡°Well, I¡¯ll see you there, Mr. Hannes.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I¡¯ll be waiting for you.¡±


    I said to him as he and Rosalie got onto their horses. And then they trotted off into the distance.


    Still, Mr. Hannes rode well for a man of his age.


    ¡­I suppose I should also learn how to ride a horse?


    Well, there was so much to do now, so that could wait.


    Besides, I can just ride Leo.


    ¡°Well, I¡¯m going to go train and make some herbs.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Not at all.¡±


    And then I went to the garden with Leo.


    There, I joined up with Tilura and Sherry, who were waiting, and we trained together.


    After that, I had Milina help me as I grew more Ramogi and other herbs.


    ¡°Phew¡­ That¡¯s enough for today.¡±


    ¡°Good work, master.¡±


    Thanks to Milina¡¯s help, I was able to prepare quite a lot of Ramogi.


    Mr. Hannes had told me how much they needed, and this still wasn¡¯t enough. But at this rate, I would be able to prepare eighty percent by the time I had to leave.


    And then the rest could be grown when we arrived or during breaks on the way.


    Though, it was sometimes hard to have to keep reminding myself to be careful and not push myself too much.


    ¡°This portion is to take to Ractos tomorrow. Also, as I¡¯ll be away from the mansion for a while, there is a little extra for that as well.¡±


    ¡°Aye, I see.¡±


    It was even harder, since I had to consider the amount to send to Ractos as well.


    I wouldn¡¯t be able to make any for them while I was away, so I had to make extra now.


    That was why I barely had enough to take to Range vige.


    ¡°Master, what about this part¡­?¡±


    ¡°Ah, that¡­¡±


    After giving the herbs to Nick, we ate lunch and then I started studying with Milina.


    While we usually studied until evening, as I now had to take magic lessons with Sebastian, it was cut short to just a few hours.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. It¡¯s time.¡±


    ¡°I understand. Milina, sorry that we have to cut it short today.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. I still have things to learn as a servant of this house. So I¡¯ll concentrate on that.¡±


    As Ms. Lyra hade to tell me that it was time, we finished studying.


    I felt quite bad for Milina about this, and apologized.


    However, as she was also learning to be a servant, there was a lot that she had to learn, and so she was fine prioritizing that for now.


    I was grateful for this as I went out to the garden where Sebastian waited.


    ¡°Now, let us begin, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    I arrived in the garden and Sebastian¡¯s magic lesson began.


    As it could be dangerous to use magic indoors, we decided to do it in the garden.


    Thankfully, Tilura wasn¡¯t out here today.


    Ms. ire had taken her away to study.


    ¡°Now, magic is¡­ Well, do you remember what I exined to you previously¡­?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I do.¡±


    Something about requiring magic energy and using chants to convert it¡­I think.


    By vocalizing it, you decide the attribute, like fire or water. And then you decided how to activate it.


    He had been in the middle of talking about using magic without chanting, but then Tilura had interrupted us.

 Chapter 149

    Chapter 149


    The Importance of Not Losing


    ¡°If you remember, then I can leave out the details. ¡­While I will be teaching you magic, Mr. Takumi, it may not necessarily be something you can use in actualbat.¡±


    ¡°I can¡¯t use it duringbat?¡±


    Yesterday, Sebastian had said that I should learn magic for situations where a sword would not be enough.


    But if it was more likely that it wouldn¡¯t be useful duringbat, then was there really a reason that I should learn it?


    ¡°The magic that you can use duringbat is magic without chanting. However, it will take a lot of training for you to be able to do it. First, you must learn to use simple magic and get used to chanting. Then you will be able to do it silently.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    Indeed, what he had said before¡­was that you would not have time to chant long spells during a fight. And so it wouldn¡¯t be practical in battle.


    And if it really took as much training as Sebastian said, then I would not be able to use it right away.


    It was just like sword training, and it would take some time¡­I suppose.


    ¡°However, please rest assured. Of the kinds of magic that require chanting, I have selected one that could be of use in battle.¡±


    ¡°There is such a magic spell?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s one method. And it depends entirely on how you use it.¡±


    I guess it was like my Gift then.


    Something that seems useless at first can be very useful if you know what to do with it.


    There had been a time when I didn¡¯t think weeds had any use at all.


    ¡°Now, the first is a spell to create light. I¡¯ve shown it to you before.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ In the fenrir forest.¡±


    It had been dark and difficult to see things, and so he had used this magic to create light.


    But what good would that do duringbat?


    ¡°Yes. Normally, it would be used to illuminate dark areas so you can see.¡±


    ¡°And how would that serve me? Well, aside from when I¡¯m in a dark ce¡­¡±


    ¡°I know why you would think that, Mr. Takumi. It does not seem like it would be useful inbat. But you just have to think differently.¡±


    ¡°Such as¡­?¡±


    ¡°When you are fighting someone, Mr. Takumi. Do you feel like there is no option but to win?¡±


    ¡°Well¡­yes. If I lost¡­then I might die.¡±


    If I was fighting against a monster, then they would be definitely trying to take my life.


    To be precise, they would try to eat me.


    I had to fight and win in order to survive.


    Now, if it was a human, perhaps they might not kill me. But I think that I would take damage in some way or another.


    ¡°That is true. There are times when you must win no matter what¡­ But the truth is, you really just need to avoid losing.¡±


    ¡°Not losing? How is that different from winning?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ For instance, what if you are attacked by a monster in a wide open space. And Leo is not with you.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    I imagined the scenario that Sebastian spoke of.


    ¡°And all your acquired sword skills will not be effective on this monster. What would you do?¡±


    ¡°¡­I would try to figure out why my sword is ineffective, and how I can change that.¡±


    ¡°Yes. That is not wrong. But if you cannot find a way to make your sword effective, then defeat is guaranteed.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true.¡±


    In this situation, I would have nothing in my future but a quick death.


    A situation where I had to lose.. I didn¡¯t want to think about it. And there was only so much that I could do.


    And my sword skills were still not great.


    ¡°If you do not want to lose in that situation¡­then you must run.¡±


    ¡°Run¡­¡±


    ¡°If you can run, then you might be able to get help. And you may survive.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ I should run then.¡±


    I had assumed that I had to win once I got into a fight.


    Obviously, I wouldn¡¯t die if I won. Not losing meant winning.


    I suppose I was too hard-headed, as I couldn¡¯t get past that mentality.


    ¡°Of course, this enemy will then chase after you.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    As the enemy hade to attack me, they wouldn¡¯t let me escape so easily.


    Especially if I showed them my back. And it was possible that they would be faster than me as well.


    ¡°In such situations, you can use this magic. ¡­Light Elemental Shine.¡±


    And then a sphere of light appeared on Sebastian¡¯s hand.


    ¡°In the forest, it was a substitute for a torch, and so I used it on swords¡­. But normally, you would create spheres like this. Though, there is no effect other than the light.¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed.¡±


    I closed my eyes for a second because the sphere was so bright. But as Sebastian told me to touch it, I put my hand over the sphere.


    However, when I tried to touch it, my hand went through as if nothing was there.


    There was no warmth either. It was just light.


    ¡°You can use it as a sphere like this or put it into weapons. Regardless, your aim is to blind the enemy with the light.¡±


    ¡°And then I can run away?¡±


    ¡°Exactly. Though, it depends on the enemy¡­ Most of them would be cautious and think you will do something. And if you take the opportunity to run, you might be able to gain some distance. Besides¡­¡±


    ¡°What?¡±


    ¡°Regardless if they are monsters or humans¡­they determine things by sight, don¡¯t they?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Though, some may be able to just detect a presence¡­ Normally, you had to see it.


    And it didn¡¯t matter if you were human or monster.


    ¡°Now, what was your reaction when I made this sphere, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°¡­I thought it was very bright.¡±


    ¡°Exactly. So you will be able to blind someone momentarily. Of course, it is not as effective during the day, but if this were in a dark ce at night¡­¡±


    ¡°It might be enough to stop someone in their tracks¡­¡±


    After all, a light had suddenly appeared right in front of them¡­ They would not be able to see.


    It would be a good way of taking someone by surprise then.

 Chapter 150

    Chapter 150


    I Was Able to Use Beginner Magic


    ¡°And with that alone, you can make an opening to escape. And depending on how you escape, you may be able to survive.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. I hadn¡¯t thought about that before.¡±


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s because you started training with the sword. You only think about using the sword to defeat your enemy. Everyone is like that in the beginning. And so I think it was a good opportunity.¡±


    Like Sebastian said, if you are wielding a sword but only thinking of running, you will not be able to hit anything.


    And so you had to go at it with the intention of pushing and overwhelming the enemy.


    No one would be scared of someone who was hesitant and trying to retreat.


    ¡°Now, since you understand how important running away can be, try and use some magic. It¡¯s simple, so you¡¯ll be able to do it quickly. First, chant like I do¡­ Light Elemental Shine.¡±


    ¡°Very well. ¡­Light Elemental Shine.¡±


    This was a magic lesson, not a lesson about running away.


    Now that I could finally use some magic, I felt very excited as I repeated the words.


    ¡°It doesn¡¯t work¡­¡±


    However, no light appeared from my hand.


    And yet, a light that was different from the first one was now hovering over Sebastian¡¯s hand¡­


    ¡°Of course, not. All you did was repeat the words, Mr. Takumi. You need them to carry the magic energy and convert it. And then activate.¡±


    ¡°Magic energy¡­¡±


    While we knew that I had magic energy, I had no idea how to tap into it.


    After all, I had lived my whole life without even knowing that magic existed.


    ¡°Magic energy is something that humans have¡­but those who have never used magic do not know how to handle that energy.¡±


    ¡°Indeed.¡±


    ¡°First, it is important for you to learn how to use this magic energy. Light magic is easy and does not use much energy, so it¡¯s perfect for practicing.¡±


    As all you did was make a light, the spell that Sebastian was teaching me was supposed to be easy.


    I guess it was like beginner magic.


    ¡°Indeed¡­ First, try closing your eyes. Now, concentrate on your breathing¡­¡±


    ¡°Very well¡­¡±


    I did as Sebastian said and closed my eyes and breathed.


    ¡°And in that state, move your consciousness over to your body. And then, you should feel parts of you growing warmer. Near your head and heart¡­¡±


    ¡°Temperature¡­yes¡­here and there. I feel a faint warmth.¡±


    ¡°Those are parts of the magic energy within you. As the energy circtes through your body, being able to feel it is the first step.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    I did as Sebastian said and concentrated on my body¡­and then I could feel my head and heart grow warm. And then my hands, feet and shoulders as well.


    I had never felt anything like this in my old world.


    It was only a faint warmth, but it was calming as well.


    Perhaps it was because it was my own magic energy?


    ¡°Do not forget the feeling of that magic energy. And then, as if squeezing it out, try and move that warmth to where the magic is activated. ¡­Though, this works differently from person to person.¡±


    ¡°¡­I¡¯ll try.¡±


    Uhh, as I was going to do light magic, I should send it to the palm of my right hand.


    I would then send the energy that I felt the most clearly¡­ Ah, something was moving.


    The faint warmth began to slowly move towards my right hand¡­ It was like blood coursing through my veins.


    Well, I didn¡¯t actually feel blood moving, but it was easier to visualize it like that.


    ¡°I think that the magic energy¡­is gathered in my hand.¡±


    ¡°You are a fast learner¡­ It means you have the right qualities. Now, try to think of unleashing that energy while chanting.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ Light Elemental Shine.¡±


    I followed Sebastian and chanted.


    And then, from my hand that was warmed by the magic energy, just as I thought that it grew warmer, a sphere of light appeared.


    ¡°Ohh¡­ I did it¡­!¡±


    ¡°Wonderful. That was faster than I expected. Now you can use magic, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    The sphere of light on my hand was shining brightly. But I was so excited that I didn¡¯t even care.


    Perhaps it was because Sebastian was a good teacher.


    Right now, the fact that I was using magic made me so happy that I wanted to take Sebastian¡¯s hands and celebrate.


    ¡­Though, I would do no such thing.


    ¡°It¡¯s simple magic, as we don¡¯t have much time¡­ But by learning a basic spell, it will be easier to learn various other kinds of magic.¡±


    ¡°Various others¡­¡±


    What other kinds of magic would I be able to use¡­?


    Maybe fire magic, like what Leo did to light the bonfire?


    Or water magic? It wasn¡¯t suited for drinking, but you could use it to wash dishes.


    What magic could I use? What magic did I want to use? There was no end to it once my mind started going.


    ¡°So I¡¯ll be able to use different kinds of magic.¡±


    ¡°Of course. You have a lot of magic energy, after all. And while it may take some time, I¡¯m sure you will be able to use many different spells.¡±


    Indeed, when I was checked in Ractos, I was told something about having a lot of magic energy.


    In that case, perhaps I could use magic that would serve me duringbat¡­?


    ¡­Of course, I had to train to use magic without chanting, so it would take some time.


    ¡°With magic, there are some that you really have to understand the spells, and some that use a lot of energy. And so you must study them and be sure of how much energy to use, or it will not do.¡±


    ¡°Still, I¡¯m very happy that I¡¯m able to use magic now¡­¡±


    With magic that required a lot of energy, I would have to gather that much energy in my hand in order to activate it. And that would take practice, I suppose.


    As for studying in order to understand spells, that was obvious.


    It was only thanks to Sebastian¡¯s exnation and demonstration that I was able to learn the light magic so quickly.


    I suppose it was also because it was beginner magic.

 Chapter 151

    Chapter 151


    We Talked About Ramogi Sales


    ¡°You¡¯ll be heading to Range vige the day after tomorrow, yes? Then you should practice so that you can activate it quickly before you leave.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I¡¯m still not used to the sensation of magic energy, so it takes a while.¡±


    It would be fine when I had plenty of time, but at this speed, I would not be able to activate it if I was trying to run away.


    And so I asked Sebastian for advice and continued to activate the magic until dinner time.


    As I was so happy about being able to use magic, I didn¡¯t feel tired at all.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, dinner is ready. Pleasee to the dining hall. And you too, Lady Tilura¡­¡±


    ¡°I understand.¡±


    ¡°Okay!¡±


    After practicing magic for quite a while, Ms. Lyra came to call us to eat.


    Tilura had been watching me from close by, and she answered cheerfully while epting a towel from Ms. Lyra.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°What is it, Sebastian?¡±


    Leo, Sherry and Tilura headed towards the dining hall, and I was about to follow after them when Sebastian stopped me.


    What else was there?


    ¡°It¡¯s not rted to magic, but the selling of herbs in Ractos.¡±


    ¡°Did something happen?¡±


    ¡°Currently, Mr. Kalis says that sales are going smoothly. They have been received quite well. So people who have the money won¡¯t have much trouble acquiring medicine.¡±


    ¡°Have the money¡­you say?¡±


    There was something in those words that made me pause and think.


    The difference in wealth, which was something that also existed in Japan.


    Obviously, this meant that the rich could easily buy medicine when they became ill¡­but the poor were already struggling just to live. So they may not be able to afford it even if it¡¯s in stock.


    ¡°There are poor people in Ractos as well. I¡¯m sure Nick was one of them¡­ In any case, I think it¡¯s very likely that they would not be able to buy the medicine even if they wanted to.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°And in the worst case scenario, they might be moved to buy the ineffective medicine at that other store.¡±


    ¡°Because it is much cheaper?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Not everyone can tell whether they are being sold something good. Imagine, a medicine that you somehow managed to buy with what little money you have¡­and it has no effect, and you remain ill.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s horrible¡­¡±


    They could afford it, but it had no effect.


    And those who were ill would not be able to work, and so they would be desperate for medicine.


    That would force them to go to that store.


    Such was the environment that was being made.


    ¡°Currently, it has not gone that far yet. However, we should act before it happens.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ You¡¯re right. Because once it happens, it will be difficult to put a stop to it.¡±


    They would start falling into debt that they could not get out of¡­ That happened a lot in Japan.


    ¡°About your medicine that is sold in Mr. Kalis¡¯s store¡­ I think we should lower the price of just the Ramogi¡­ So even a child can buy it.¡±


    ¡°I think that¡¯s a good idea. ¡­But, how would that affect the market?¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed¡­ We will have to give some exnation to the other merchants¡­ I think some confusion will still be unavoidable.¡±


    There were some businesses that were only profitable because they sold Ramogi at the proper price.


    And if thendlord¡¯s store started selling them at cheap prices, small stores may not be able to stay in business.


    While Sebastian had made the decision, he also seemed conflicted, judging by the expression on his face.


    ¡°But it¡¯s just the Ramogi¡­ Also, only until the disease stops spreading¡­ This way, the effect won¡¯t be too big.¡±


    ¡°Well, it will still have some effect. But as long as it¡¯s for a short period, I think it would be good for the people.¡±


    ¡°And we¡¯ll also have to offer an exnation to customers who have been buying it up until now.¡±


    Well, if there was a price cut the day after you bought it, then you might feel like you were cheated.


    ¡°As you are making the herbs, Mr. Takumi, I thought we better get your permission first¡­¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    Now that I thought about it, the price of the herbs being sold had been in the contract.


    If they wanted to greatly increase or reduce the price, then they would need to consult me first.


    ¡°I don¡¯t mind. Since there is a good reason for it. I do want the poor to be able to buy the herbs as well.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. I¡¯ll have Mr. Kalis lower the prices tomorrow then. ¡­Also, there is one other reason for this.¡±


    ¡°Another reason?¡±


    It seemed a little cowardly for him to bring this up after I gave my permission, but perhaps I shouldn¡¯t care, as I wasn¡¯t losing anything from it.


    But what was Sebastian talking about?


    ¡°It¡¯s about that other store. Once even the poor are able to buy Ramogi, then their sales will drop.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sure it will.¡±


    It was only because the disease was spreading that the malicious store was having any sess.


    ¡°If we sell the Ramogi at lower prices, and stop the spread of the disease, then fewer people will buy from them. ¡­And then, I suspect they will be forced into action.¡±


    ¡°So¡­you want to smoke them out?¡±


    Well, even though they weremitting a crime, it was good that we were going against them with proper methods.


    It might sound aggressive, but if we could push that store into self-destruction, so much the better.


    Sebastian was not someone you wanted as an enemy¡­ The thought urred to me. Thankfully, I had no intention of doing that.


    Besides, I felt veryforted knowing that he was on our side.


    And now, I would do what I could to cooperate.


    Surely there was something I could do to fight against this store.

 Chapter 152

    Chapter 152


    We Decided to Sell at a Discount


    ¡°In that case, Mr. Sebastian. I don¡¯t mind not being paid for the Ramogi. ¡­Well, just think of it as me paying rent for living here.¡±


    ¡°But¡­I don¡¯t think that¡¯s necessary¡­ You being here has been a great benefit to the house. I doubt they would deny you your payment¡­¡±


    ¡°I receive more than enough from the other herbs.¡±


    By selling the Ramogi at a lower price, Mr. Kalis¡¯s store would not be making as much of a profit.


    I didn¡¯t think he would object to it, but I¡¯m sure he would feel better if the profits increased¡­ And I didn¡¯t mind, as this would ultimately affect that other store.


    So while I would be getting paid less, it would benefit me in other ways.


    Besides, I was receiving quite enough already. My savings were just increasing.


    It¡¯s not like I had too much of it, but the thing was, I had nothing to spend it on as of now.


    ¡°But¡­ That really won¡¯t do. It goes against the contract¡­ And as the butler of the Liebert house, my pride will not allow it.¡±


    ¡°Your¡­pride?¡±


    I suppose he viewed the matter in a different way then.


    Sebastian stubbornly refused this idea that I would not be paid for the Ramogi.


    What should I do¡­?


    ¡°In that case, just¡­lower the payment. That way, it could not be said that I was working for free.¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed¡­ I suppose it would mean you were being rewarded, Mr. Takumi. However¡­¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. This only for a short period, after all. It is not a big deal.¡±


    I stopped Sebastian before he could continue and settled the matter myself.


    Otherwise, we might be here arguing all day.


    ¡°¡­Thank you, Mr. Takumi. And all because I consulted you about it¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, that was in the contract. You are just doing your job. While I¡¯m happy to be paid, I don¡¯t need much right now.¡±


    I said, and the conversation was finished.


    In the first ce, the contract would not have allowed them to lower the prices without telling me.


    So it¡¯s not Sebastian¡¯s fault that I insisted on doing the work without payment or for less.


    And so I patted him on the shoulder as he bowed his head, and then we headed to the dining hall.


    As we had been talking for a while, Tilura must be tired of waiting¡­ Leo and Sherry as well.


    ¡°You¡¯rete, Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Sorry, sorry. I had something to discuss with Sebastian.¡±


    When I entered the dining hall, Tilura and the others protested just as I was expecting.


    ¡°Is something wrong, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°No, not exactly. Sebastian will exin it to youter.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes, I will tell you everything, Lady ire.¡±


    ¡°I see. Very well.¡±


    Ms. ire was curious about what we were talking about, but right now, we had to eat.


    Besides, I had a feeling that if we got started, then Ms. ire would be the next one to argue with me about payment.


    And I was hungry, and the children could wait no longer.


    Well, Leo wasn¡¯t a child¡­


    ¡°Let¡¯s eat then.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    Said Ms. ire, and we all began to eat.


    Tilura, Leo and Sherry fell on their food hungrily and ate rapidly.


    Ms. ire was about to scold them, but gave up and ate her own food. I too ate the food that Ms. Helena had prepared.


    Tilura was starting to resemble her father when it came to eating habits. But that was too rude to say out loud¡­


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. I heard that Sebastian is teaching you magic now. How is it going?¡±


    ¡°It was a little difficult at first¡­ But I was able to do some beginner magic.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s because Mr. Takumi has the right qualities to be good with magic.¡±


    ¡°Is that so?¡±


    It was while we were drinking tea.


    Ms. ire asked me about how my magic training was going.


    While no magic had been activated the first time I chanted, I was able to do it once I learned of magic energy.


    Sebastian seemed to think I had potential. I wonder if it¡¯s true?


    ¡°I think you have a good ability to detect magic energy. Normally, people cannot do it so quickly after hearing an exnation. Because a lot of it relies on feeling. In fact, when Lady ire first began¡­¡±


    ¡°Why, Sebastian!¡±


    ¡°¡­That was some years ago¡­ When Lady ire was little. She did not understand what I was saying, and believed that she didn¡¯t have magic energy¡­¡±


    ¡°And?¡±


    Detecting magic was rted to potential¡­ I¡¯d keep that in mind.


    But the conversation had now turned to Ms. ire¡¯s past, which Sebastian rted with amusement, in spite of Ms. ire¡¯s protests.


    ¡­He was clearly in the mood to make fun of her.


    But I was quite interested, and urged him to continue.


    ¡°She then went crying to His Grace. ¡­It was very difficult to console her when she was like that. And yet the very idea of someone not having magic energy is ridiculous.¡±


    ¡°¡­But I didn¡¯t know such things back then¡­¡±


    ¡°You must have been a very cute child.¡±


    Indeed, he had said that all humans needed magic energy in order to live.


    But Ms. ire didn¡¯t know this, and had cried off to her father and caused a lot of trouble.


    Ms. ire looked quite embarrassed by this story, but we allughed and the time continued to pass amidst a rxed atmosphere.


    While Ms. ire did not appreciate having her past exposed like this, I was d to have learned a little more about her.

 Chapter 153

    Chapter 153


    I yed Around With Leo


    ¡°It¡¯s hard to imagine Ms. ire like that.¡±


    I had finished my sword swings and took a bath before returning to my room.


    I then sat down on my bed in order to rest, and I thought back on the discussion in the dining hall.


    Sebastian was knowledgeable and could exin nearly anything to you. But Ms. ire also seemed very wise, and so hearing about her childhood was a little surprising.


    ¡°Oh, but there are those stories about arranged marriage¡­¡±


    The founder of the house had an arranged marriage¡­which led to Ms. ire wanting to have one as well. I suppose in the past, she was more impulsive and relied less on knowledge.


    Thinking of it like that, I realized that Tilura was quite simr. They really were sisters.


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Oh?¡±


    As I sat on the bed, Leo approached me while sniffing loudly.


    ¡°What is it, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°He-hey!¡±


    Leo brought her face close to mine and started licking.


    And while I was nearly overwhelmed, I petted her back just as enthusiastically.


    ¡°What is it? Do you want to y?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I moved my face away and asked Leo, and she nodded eagerly.


    ¡°Now that I think about it, we haven¡¯t been able to y recently.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    Leo barked in agreement.


    These past few days I had been training with Tilura, studying with Milina, and then I had to make Ramogi for Range vige. So there wasn¡¯t much time to spend with Leo.


    While Leo yed a lot with Tilura and Sherry, and even trained with us by dodging our swords, it was never just the two of us ying.


    And I suppose Leo missed that.


    So though it was a littlete¡­I decided to y with Leo a little.


    ¡°All right, Leo. We¡¯ll y today!¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    As I saw Leo wag her tail happily, I knew that I would not be getting much sleep.


    Well, I would have to go to Range vige the day after tomorrow, so it had to be today.


    Besides, Leo was going to be carrying me, and it was only natural to keep your buddypany.


    ¡°There, there¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    First, I used both hands to scratch her behind the ears.


    Previously, I only had to use my fingers, but she was a lot bigger now.


    Leo reacted by barking happily.


    Being scratched behind the ears was like getting a massage for her.


    ¡°And next¡­here!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    My hands brushed through the thick fur of her legs and moved as if to pull the skin upwards.


    I guess this was like having your shoulders massaged.


    This seemed to be especially pleasurable as she barked and began to wag her tail.


    As she spent so much time on her feet and would run around or stand still, they were probably tired.


    ¡°Haha. Do you like that?¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    And so I continued to pull and massage and pet her for a while.


    I suppose it wasn¡¯t really ying. But it was difficult to y with Leo like I used to.


    Previously, I was able to pick her up and raise her into the air or let her nibble gently on my fingers. But we couldn¡¯t do that now.


    Not only was she too big, but I just knew those fangs would easily tear off my entire arm¡­


    ¡°Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    After petting and massaging her for a while, I stood in front of her and raised my hand.


    Leo realized what I was doing and she got up on all fours and looked at me.


    ¡°Sit!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Lie down!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Sit again! Now do the gimme pose!¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Wuff!¡±


    I moved my hands like a conductor and gave Leo the orders.


    Leo barked in reply and obeyed. She sat,y low, and then sat up and raised both of her front paws.


    Seeing her move her front paws like this, it reminded me that in spite of her size, Leo hadn¡¯t changed much at all.


    However, it was hard to look up at her like this¡­ I was worried that her head would hit the ceiling¡­ Thankfully, the ceilings in this mansion were higher than most.


    ¡°Good girl, Leo. Alright,y down again.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Good, good. Well done. You remembered.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I smiled and patted her on the head.


    Usually, I would have given her a sausage as a treat, but I didn¡¯t have any now. Besides, Ms. Helena always prepared them for Leo.


    So I just praised her instead.


    ¡°Next¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Leo was having so much fun that we continued like thiste into the night.


    And so I had a few hours less sleep than usual. But I was fine, since Leo had enjoyed it.


    She must have been happy to spend time together, as when we slept, shey half of her body on the bed so that I could use her as a pillow.


    And so I watched her tail, which was still wagging, as I fell asleep.


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¨C


    ¡°Good morning.¡±


    ¡°¡­Morning, Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    The next morning, Tilura took Sherry and visited our room.


    She came to tell us that breakfast was ready, which she hadn¡¯t done recently.


    I still felt a little tired as I dragged myself out of bed and greeted her.


    But Leo was perfectly fine, as ifck of sleep was not a concept she was aware of.


    ¡°Are you tired, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Haha, I¡¯m fine. I just yed with Leost night. So I went to sleep a littlete.¡±


    ¡°So that¡¯s why Leo is in such a good mood!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    Apparently, Tilura could tell if Leo was in a good mood or not.


    But it was true that Leo had continued to wag her tail and was now greeting Sherry happily.


    Sherry also looked happy to y with Leo.


    ¡°Well, I¡¯ll get ready and go down to the dining hall. You go on ahead.¡±


    ¡°Very well. Let¡¯s go, Sherry!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Are youing too, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Haha. Can you take Leo with you then?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I will! Let¡¯s go, Leo!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyau-kyau!¡±


    I said while getting out of bed and washing up.


    But just as Tilura and Sherry were about to leave, I noticed that Leo wanted to go with them.


    That was unusual. Leo would usually go with me instead of Tilura.


    But perhaps it was because I had spent so much time with herst night.


    I chuckled as I saw them leave, and then moved my sluggish body and got ready for the day.

 Chapter 154

    Chapter 154


    I Grew Ramogi and Practiced Magic


    ¡°Are you tired, Mr. Takumi? I hope you are not overextending yourself¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, I am fine. I yed with Leotest night and so I didn¡¯t get much sleep.¡±


    Ms. ire looked at me worriedly as we were eating breakfast.


    Tilura had said the same thing. While I didn¡¯t mean for it to show on my face, I suppose it was still obvious.


    ¡­I would have to eat some recovery herbster.


    ¡°You will be heading for Range vige tomorrow, won¡¯t you?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I have to finish preparing the herbs today, then I¡¯ll set out with Leo tomorrow.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    After breakfast, she asked when I was leaving.


    She also apologized about the matter regarding the discount of the Ramogi and my payment.


    The discount was one thing, but I had insisted on theck of payment myself, so she didn¡¯t need to worry about that.


    ¡°¡­All right. I¡¯m going to do a little extra today.¡±


    ¡°You really shouldn¡¯t¡­¡±


    I muttered while heading to a corner of the garden. I had eaten the recovery herbs and no longer felt sleepy, and had finished my morning training.


    But Ms. Lyra heard me and seemed worried.


    Milina also followed after me and had an expression of concern¡­ She must have heard that I had once fainted from overuse of the Gift.


    ¡°I¡¯m fine. Recently, I¡¯ve gotten a better grasp of how much I am able to do it.¡±


    ¡°¡­But¡­ You still need to be careful.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Thank you for worrying about me.¡±


    I thanked Ms. Lyra and reached the usual spot where I used Weed Cultivation.


    It had be a herb exclusive area now¡­ Well, as I had permission, I would dly take advantage of it.


    After making herbs for this long, I had a much better idea of how much I could use the Gift.


    That being said, it didn¡¯t mean I knew exactly what my limit was before I fainted.


    Regardless, as the Ramogi was being discounted, I would make more of it than usual.


    ¡°All right, Milina. Let¡¯s do this.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    And so I used Weed Cultivation to grow the herbs and had Milina do the rest.


    From picking the herbs to wrapping them up after they were dried¡­she had be ustomed to the work, and was able to do it quite quickly now.


    We took a short break in between and then continued to make herbs.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­I don¡¯t know if you should¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm. But I want to make a little more¡­ But we can rest a while. Thank you for your help, Milina.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ve done nothingpared to you, master¡­¡±


    As I focused on creating herbs, I was then stopped by a worried Ms. Lyra.


    Of course, I still had not reached the numbers that I wanted, and so I intended on continuing after resting again.


    I also had to persuade Milina, and then we drank some tea that Ms. Lyra had prepared.


    ¡°That¡¯s right, I also have to practice some magic.¡±


    ¡°You can use magic too, master!?¡±


    ¡°Well, I only just started learning, so I¡¯m still a beginner.¡±


    ¡°You have a Gift and Leo¡­and sword and magic¡­ You have so many talents!¡±


    But I had only rescued and raised Leo, and I had no idea why I was given the Gift.


    As for sword and magic, I had just started learning them, so it wasn¡¯t anything impressive at all.


    ¡°Phew¡­ Thank you for the tea. It was delicious as always.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m d that you enjoyed it.¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re amazing, Ms. Lyra¡­ I¡¯ll do my best so that I can brew tea like this.¡±


    Not only Ms. Lyra, but all of the tea brewed by the servants here tasted very good.


    I didn¡¯t know if it was their technique or the quality of the leaves, but drinking it really helped me to rx.


    Sometimes, I felt that it was even more effective than the herbs, which was a strange feeling.


    I would be d if Milina was able to brew tea like this.


    ¡°While you are still a novice, we will be very thorough in teaching you. Don¡¯t worry about that, Milina.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I¡¯ll do my best.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s easy once you know what to do. Also, it¡¯s about feeling.¡±


    ¡°Feeling?¡±


    Ms. Lyra then started to lecture her on how to brew tea.


    Something about thinking about who will drink it, etcetera.


    I ignored most of it while I watched Tilura train, and Leo run around the garden while carrying Sherry.


    ¡°Hmm. I think I will practice my magic first.¡±


    Now that Ms. Lyra¡¯s lecture was finished, I ended my break and got back to my feet.


    ¡°What about the herbs?¡±


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s supposed to be dangerous to use it too much at once. So, I guess you¡¯ll have some free time¡­¡±


    ¡°But I¡¯m sure watching you use magic will be quite entertaining.¡±


    I talked with Milina as I went over what Sebastian had taught me yesterday.


    I directed my consciousness towards the magic energy, and searched for the warmth.


    And then I moved the energy so that it gathered in my palm.


    ¡°Light Elemental Shine.¡±


    And then just like yesterday, a bright light appeared in my hand.


    ¡°Yes, I can do it just fine.¡±


    ¡°That is so bright. What brilliant magic.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. Yes, but this is all that I can do now.¡±


    After that, I repeated the process of detecting, chanting and activating several times.


    What I noticed while doing it, was that I could activate it with very little magic energy. I suppose it was because it was such a simple spell.


    And so I continued to practice until Ms. Gelda called us for lunch.


    In fact, any ¡®Shine¡¯ magic could be activated with little energy.


    And by not having to move much energy, I would be able to activate it swiftly.


    Magic that required a lot of energy was difficult, but Shine didn¡¯t even take much concentration.


    And while it might still leave me open momentarily if used during battle, I could still take the enemy by surprise once I got used to it.


    It was simple magic that could be very effective. That¡¯s why Sebastian had taught it to me.


    As I headed towards the dining hall, I thought about the magic that I was practicing.


    Apparently, Milina had rarely seen magic, and she never looked bored as she had watched me activating it.


    And in spite of knowing that it was beginner magic, I couldn¡¯t help but feel pleased at how impressed she was.

 Chapter 155

    Chapter 155


    I Leisurely Drank Tea with Ms. Lyra


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. What will you do after lunch?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll focus on growing herbs again. I still don¡¯t have as much as I want.¡±


    ¡°¡­Please be careful.¡±


    Ms. ire sounded worried as we ate lunch.


    ¡°I¡¯m pretty sure that I¡¯m fine. I mean, it¡¯s notpletely clear to me, but¡­ I used Weed Cultivation early in the morning, and then switched to magic training. So I haven¡¯t been doing it for long stretches.¡±


    It wasn¡¯t quite known what power the Gift actually used, but if it recovered naturally over time, then those breaks should have helped a little.


    With tea breaks and magic training, as well as lunch, it should be safe for me to start using it again.


    ¡­Unless it turned out that I actually had to sleep in order for it to recover. My theory could bepletely off.


    Well, I still doubted that I was near the limit. It was probably fine¡­ At least, that was what I hoped.


    ¡°As for that, it is something that will have to be studied further.¡±


    Sebastian was standing by as we ate lunch. I hadn¡¯t seen him here for a while.


    He was usually so busy with regards to that store. But I suppose he had more time now¡­ Though, that probably meant there was little progress.


    Regardless, that was his reaction when I told him what I was thinking.


    Basically, he had no reason to doubt me, but he had no reason to agree either.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry about me. I won¡¯t be fainting anymore.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ I do not need to see something like that again. And so you must continue to be careful.¡±


    After eating, I chuckled and assured her that I was fine, and then I went out into the garden.


    Milina was busy with her servant training now¡­ I hope she learned how to brew tea well, just as she wanted.


    ¡°I¡¯ll have to gather the herbs myself now.¡±


    ¡°Oh, I can help you.¡±


    ¡°Are you sure, Ms. Lyra?¡±


    When I reached the garden, I realized that since Milina wasn¡¯t there, I would have to gather and wrap up the herbs myself.


    However, Ms. Lyra then followed after me and offered to help.


    I did feel bad, since she was also keeping an eye on Tilura and would prepare tea for us¡­


    ¡°You really don¡¯t need to hesitate to ask us for help, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°¡­But I can¡¯t help but feel bad about it.¡±


    However, Ms. Lyra clearly didn¡¯t agree.


    I suppose it was that I wasn¡¯t used to living with butlers and maids surrounding me. And so I preferred to do things on my own.


    But if she insisted, maybe I would rely on them a little more in the future.


    I suppose she would feel better to be of service, as long as it wasn¡¯t anything ridiculous.


    ¡°In that case, I¡¯ll dly ept your help.¡±


    And so I left the gathering and separating of the different types of herbs to Ms. Lyra, and I used Weed Cultivation.


    As Tilura had to study after lunch, she was not here.


    But I could see Sherry and Leo sleeping under the sun.


    And so the garden was quiet, with only the sounds of Ms. Lyra and I moving around.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­ Surely this is enough?¡±


    ¡°¡­I want a little more¡­ For Ractos¡­ And more Ramogi for Range vige as well¡­¡±


    As the sun was starting to set, Ms. Lyra became concerned again.


    In fact, I had actually made more than I had initially nned.


    As I would be gone for a few days, I wanted to make extra herbs to send to Ractos¡­


    ¡°But¡­you look tired. I think you better rest at the very least.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry to worry you¡­ Very well, I¡¯ll rest.¡±


    I could not argue with Ms. Lyra as she peered into my face, and so I decided to rest.


    However, she seemed pleased as she started to pour the tea.


    But as she had been helping since lunch¡­she was probably tired as well¡­ I then noticed that my back hurt a little.


    While using the Gift didn¡¯t make me tired, crouching with my hands on the ground while growing herbs, as well as picking them, was quite like working in the fields.


    ¡°Here. I hope it helps you to rx a little.¡±


    ¡°Mmm¡­ Thank you. You rest too, Ms. Lyra.¡±


    ¡°No, I don¡¯t¡­¡±


    ¡°I was able to do a lot more than I expected, thanks to your help. And you must be tired as well? Here, don¡¯t hesitate.¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well¡­ Phew¡­¡±


    I stretched my sore limbs and then thanked Ms. Lyra for the tea as I sat down.


    As she had been helping me the whole time, I knew that she was tired as well.


    And so I had to get up once and steer Ms. Lyra over to the chair so she would sit down.


    She did so reluctantly, but then let out a pleased sigh as she tasted the tea that she had poured.


    So she really was tired¡­ I felt bad all over again for allowing her to help me.


    ¡°Now that I think about it¡­this is the first time we¡¯ve sat together at a table, isn¡¯t it?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I am a maid of this house, after all¡­ It is not proper for me to sit with Lady ire and the others.¡±


    I suppose that was the typical way to think if you were a servant.


    I wasn¡¯t used to such things, and so I was always worried about Ms. Lyra and the others when they stood in the same ce for so long.


    That being said, it might be ufortable for them to be forced to sit at the table as well¡­


    ¡°Well, from now on, I hope that you¡¯ll drink tea with me like this, when you have time.¡±


    ¡°¡­I suppose that as a maid, I should refuse¡­ But if you truly mean it, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    Ms. ire and the others weren¡¯t around, and it was only a short rest.


    Besides, I was a guest here, and not a nobleman.


    I was amoner, and so I was sure that Ms. Lyra would get used to it quickly.


    And so after that, the two of us enjoyed our tea and talked as we rested.

 Chapter 156

    Chapter 156


    We Gathered Together On the Night Before Departure


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Dinner is ready. Pleasee to the dining hall.¡±


    ¡°I see. Thank you.¡±


    I answered Ms. Gelda, who hade to call me, and I stopped my herb growing.


    As I had been able to make about ny percent of the Ramogi for Range vige, this probably was enough for today.


    I thanked Ms. Lyra for helping me, and then headed to the dining hall and ate dinner.


    ¡°So both Mr. Takumi and Leo will be gone from tomorrow on¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. Well, it¡¯s just for several days.¡±


    After dinner, while we were training our swings, Tilura muttered this sadly.


    ¡°I will miss you two. ¡­Because I¡¯ve been spending time with both of you so much recently.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true.¡±


    It was just an estimate, but I believed that it would take me a full day to reach Range vige on Leo¡¯s back.


    So that was two days for a round trip. And I would likely spend a day there as I give them the Ramogi. So the whole thing would be close to three days.


    But it would be best to assume that it could be four or five¡­ Besides, I didn¡¯t want to make Leo run for a whole day nonstop.


    ¡°Still, Tilura. Just because Leo and I won¡¯t be here, it doesn¡¯t mean that you can skip your training and studies, all right?¡±


    ¡°I wouldn¡¯t do that! You¡¯ll be so surprised once youe back!¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s the spirit. You should be good enough that I¡¯ll be the one taking tips from you.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    Well, she was not likely to improve that much in just a few days, but she did grow very fast. So perhaps she would be able to do things when I returned that she couldn¡¯t do now.


    There was a saying about how boys change after not seeing them for three days¡­


    ¡­Of course, Tilura was a girl¡­ But at that age, girls sometimes grew even faster, so I shouldn¡¯t underestimate her.


    ¡°¡­Can I sleep with Leo in your room tonight?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ I don¡¯t know¡­ If your sister gives her permission?¡±


    ¡°Okay! I¡¯ll go and ask her!¡±


    It seemed like she was really going to miss us. After we finished training, Tilura asked if she could sleep with Leo tonight.


    But it seemed likely that the daughter of a duke should not be sleeping in a man¡¯s room¡­ It was definitely not up to me.


    At least Ms. ire would be able to persuade Tilura of this. That was my hope, anyway.


    And so Tilura ran off immediately to her sister¡¯s room. Leo looked at her with a puzzled expression.


    ¡°Well¡­this wasn¡¯t what I was expecting to happen¡­?¡±


    ¡°Did you say something, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°No, nevermind¡­¡±


    I had gone to take a bath and then returned to my room, thinking that I was about to get a good night¡¯s sleep. But then I saw that Ms. ire, Tilura, Ms. Lyra and even Milina were there.


    They were all dressed in their nightgowns, instead of their regr clothes. I suddenly did not know where to look.


    I suppose those werefortable to wear¡­but I wasn¡¯t used to seeing such things¡­


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Leo, it¡¯s not my fault, all right¡­?¡±


    ¡°What did Leo say?¡±


    ¡°¡­No, it¡¯s nothing¡­ Hehe.¡±


    Milina seemed to hear Leo say something with a sigh. But I justughed it off.


    ¡°Ah, Mr. Takumi. This is from Sebastian. What does it say?¡±


    ¡°¡­Uh¡­¡±


    I took the Sebastian¡¯s letter from Ms. ire and read it.


    As Ms. ire hadn¡¯t read it, she didn¡¯t know what it said.


    Uh¡­ ¡®The most beautifuldies of the mansion. Please enjoy theirpany. PS¡­ You really enjoy being surrounded by women, don¡¯t you?¡­


    What is that old man saying¡­!


    ¡°Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°¡­No, nevermind¡­ It¡¯s just about the herbs¡­ Haha¡­¡±


    I said as Ms. ire looked at me with a puzzled expression. Then I crumpled up the paper and threw it away.


    Sebastian¡­ I won¡¯t deny that they were pretty, but¡­ I wished that he didn¡¯t think that I was some kind of womanizer¡­


    In fact, he probably knew¡­and was justughing at how awkward I was feeling right now¡­


    Still, even the master who he served as a butler was here¡­


    It might be his idea of a joke, but¡­ It really wasn¡¯t funny¡­


    ¡°Well, since you will be leaving this mansion tomorrow, Mr. Takumi¡­ I think they are just going to miss you two.¡±


    ¡°Ms. Lyra¡­ That being said¡­¡±


    As I wondered what to do, Ms. Lyra noticed and approached me.


    I understood that they might miss us, but¡­ These women had invaded a man¡¯s room¡­ And did they mean to stay¡­?


    ¡°Of course, I feel the same¡­ Think of it as a farewell party.¡±


    ¡°Well, uh, if that¡¯s what you want¡­¡±


    In any case, I just decided to ept that they had gathered here to see me off before my departure¡­ I guess.


    ¡°So, where are you all going to sleep?¡±


    ¡°I will sleep here.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m going to sleep with Leo!¡±


    ¡°¡­While it might be rude, I could sleep here¡­¡±


    ¡°Master, I want to sleep with Leo too¡­¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    While I was fine with them sleeping in the room, the problem was where they would sleep.


    And when I asked them¡­Tilura and Milina wanted to sleep with Leo. They were already being enveloped by Leo¡¯s long fur.


    I was d that they liked Leo so much, and it was sure to be warm even during the night¡­and Sherry was there too¡­ Hmm, that was fine¡­ Leo didn¡¯t seem to mind¡­but¡­

 Chapter 157

    Chapter 157


    We Slept Together


    ¡°¡­Why are you two going to sleep on the bed?¡±


    ¡°¡­Well, we can¡¯t all sleep with Good Leo¡­that won¡¯t be veryfortable for her¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­I can sleep in the corner¡­¡±


    The problem is Ms. ire and Ms. Lyra.


    The two said they wanted to sleep in the bed that I slept in.


    It was a big room, and so the bed was also quiterge. It would be easy enough for three people to sleep on it without being that close to each other¡­


    However, in terms of my mental well-being, I did not think it a good idea to share a bed with two women.


    Both of them were speaking hesitantly, but also didn¡¯t look like they were going to back down¡­


    ¡°You¡¯re going to sleep with Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Yes. It seems like there is nowhere else that I can sleep, after all.¡±


    Tilura asked innocently as she held onto Leo. And Ms. ire answered as if it was nothing notable.


    Ms. ire¡­ Should a noblewoman really be sharing a bed with a man?


    ¡°Don¡¯t you agree, Lyra?¡±


    ¡°¡­Oh, I will sleep in the corner.¡±


    ¡°So neither of you are going to back down¡­¡±


    While Ms. Lyra was fine with sleeping near the corner, she still intended on sleeping in the bed.


    ¡°¡­Ha¡­ Then you two can sleep in the bed. I¡¯ll find some random ce to sleep. Sherry,e here.¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    I called over Sherry and carried her to a corner of the room.


    I should be warm enough if I slept with Sherry.


    And it would not do to make the women sleep on the floor, so they can use the bed then.


    ¡°But that goes against our purpose!¡±


    ¡°If Mr. Takumi is going to sleep on the floor, then I will sleep on the floor too!¡±


    The two were quite astonished when I sat down on the floor.


    ¡°Huh? No, I just don¡¯t think grown men and women should be sleeping in the same bed¡­¡±


    ¡°But this is a special asion!¡±


    ¡°Really, Mr. Takumi, you must sleep in your bed!¡±


    So saying, the two grabbed my arms as I carried Sherry, and escorted me back to the bed.


    Uhh¡­ Why was I being forced to sleep in the same bed as them¡­?


    ¡°Mr. Takumi can be in the center, I will be on the right side and Lyra can be on the left. Agreed?¡±


    ¡°Yes, it sounds correct.¡±


    ¡°Uh, what about my opinion¡­?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Ms. ire and Ms. Lyra settled the sleeping arrangements without me.


    While Leo was sighing at me, I was too distracted to reply.


    Indeed, it wasn¡¯t that Ipletely hated the idea of being surrounded by two beautiful women.


    As for whether it would help get a good night¡¯s sleep¡­that was an entirely different matter¡­


    ¡°Are youfortable, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°She seems fine, Lady Tilura.¡±


    Tilura and Milina were already falling asleep on either side of Leo.


    Seeing them use that fluffy fur as a pillow¡­I was sure that they would have no trouble sleeping well tonight.


    ¡­It would not be the same for me, I thought despondently.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, I¡¯m sure Leo will take good care of them.¡±


    ¡°As for you, Mr. Takumi, I¡¯ll make sure that you sleepfortably as well.¡±


    As Ms. ire said, I could leave those two to Leo¡­ But I was more concerned about myself right now¡­ I had to travel to Range vige tomorrow, and so I wanted to be able to sleep¡­ What to do¡­


    Also, while Ms. Lyra was supposed to take care of me, surely she was going too far?


    ¡°Uhh, you two should calm down¡­ And uh, I need a minute to prepare¡­¡±


    ¡°Prepare what?¡±


    ¡°Prepare before going to sleep?¡±


    They looked at me strangely as I moved away.


    I went to the desk in the corner of my room and picked up a small bag with herbs inside.


    ¡°All right, there are still some sleeping herbs left¡­I just need to¡­glug.¡±


    I chewed and swallowed it quietly so that no one noticed.


    It had served me well in the forest while we were exploring. With this sleep aiding herb, I should be able to fall into a deep sleep, even in a crowded bed.


    Tomorrow was an important day, so I couldn¡¯t afford to stay upte.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°What is the matter?¡±


    ¡°Haha. It¡¯s nothing. Don¡¯t worry about it.¡±


    The two were curious about what I was doing.


    But I didn¡¯t feel like telling them that I had taken sleeping herbs to calm my nerves, so I justughed it off.


    I was already starting to feel the effects and became drowsy, and so I fell into bed.


    Of course, Ms. ire and Ms. Lyra were true to their word, and camped on both sides of the bed.


    Now that I thought about it, hadn¡¯t Ms. Lyra said she would sleep in the corner¡­?


    ¡­Seeing them so close on either side, my heart started to beat a little faster¡­ But I managed to calm myself again.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. I hope that you have sweet dreams. Hehehe.¡±


    ¡°Good night, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    As lying on either side was not going to help things, Iy on my back and kept my hands close to my body as I closed my eyes.


    They whispered on either side of me. I thought that I was in danger of bing excited again, but the herbs did their work, and I drifted off to sleep.


    ¡­Still, would I really feel rested and refreshed in the morning¡­?


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª-


    ¡°Mr. Takumi seems to have enjoyed himself.¡±


    ¡°Indeed? But weren¡¯t they arguing over where to sleep¡­¡±


    ¡°It was a fun sleepover!¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    I could hear voices¡­


    It sounded like Milina and Tilura? And Leo¡­ Was she hungry?


    Also, there was a man¡¯s voice.


    ¡­Now that I think about it, some of the women had pushed their way into my roomst night¡­ But not any men¡­


    ¡°Hmm¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, are you awake?¡±


    ¡°Good morning, master.¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Once my mind was clear, I opened my eyes and muttered.


    In reaction, the man peered into my face and talked to me.


    It was¡­Sebastian?


    Sebastian¡¯s face appeared in my vision¡­ So that¡¯s who was talking with the others.

 Chapter 158

    Chapter 158


    Sebastian Was Very Amused


    ¡°Good morning. Tilura, Milina and¡­Leo.¡±


    For some reason, I couldn¡¯t move my body, but I greeted Sebastian and the others anyway.


    And because I couldn¡¯t move, I couldn¡¯t see the others. But given how cheerful they sounded, they must have had a good night¡¯s sleep.


    ¡­Still, why won¡¯t my body move¡­?


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­ It seems like you enjoyed that even more than I anticipated.¡±


    ¡°Sebastian¡­ I don¡¯t know what you¡¯re talking about¡­¡±


    He was starting to talk nonsense, and I was about to object, but stopped.


    I suddenly noticed the pleasant scent¡­


    It certainly wasn¡¯ting from me¡­so I turned my head to the right and left.


    ¡°¡­Ms. ire!? And Ms. Lyra!?¡±


    ¡°Mmm¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Haa¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes¡­you must have had quite a night¡­¡±


    I saw that Ms. ire was to my right, and Ms. Lyra to my left.


    Both of them were clutching onto me tightly.


    ¡­So that¡¯s why I couldn¡¯t move¡­ And that also exined the smell¡­ Wait, there were more important matters to consider!


    Like the fact that their soft bodies were pressed against me in the most dangerous ways!


    ¡°Sebastian! It¡¯s not what you¡¯re thinking!¡±


    ¡°Oh, it¡¯s not?¡±


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s true that we shared a bed¡­ But we didn¡¯t sleep so tightly together. And I assure you, nothing happened!¡±


    ¡°¡­Nothing¡­ What are you talking about?¡±


    ¡°Uh, well¡­¡±


    As I tried to make my excuses to Sebastian, I realized something.


    ¡­Sebastian was grinning. He was clearly highly amused by the whole situation.


    ¡°¡­Sebastian¡­ You¡¯re mocking me, aren¡¯t you?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know what you are talking about¡­ I ampletely ignorant.¡±


    Sebastian said. He continued to grin mischievously.


    He was clearly enjoying this¡­ What a vulgar butler!


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°¡­Haa¡­ What happened?¡±


    As Sebastian and I talked, Ms. ire and Ms. Lyra woke up.


    They both sounded very sleepy. I had never heard them talk like that before.


    Especially Ms. Lyra. Her words were quite slurred.


    ¡°¡­Now!¡±


    ¡°Oh, what swift movement. I see that your training hasn¡¯t been for nothing.¡±


    Now that the two were awake, I took the opportunity to release myself from their grasp.


    Then I moved swiftly and escaped to the corner of the bed.


    Sebastian sounded impressed¡­but I knew he was still joking.


    I suppose he didn¡¯t even care that his own master, Ms. ire, was here with us¡­ That seemed rather questionable for a butler.


    ¡°¡­It¡¯s morning? Good morning, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°¡­Good morning¡­ Huh? That¡¯s not where you were when going to sleep.¡±


    ¡°¡­Good morning.¡±


    The two sat up in the bed.


    Ms. Lyra immediately noticed that I was in a different ce, but I ignored her.


    ¡°I suppose he moves around a lot in his sleep?¡±


    ¡°It appears to be the case. I¡¯m just d that he didn¡¯t fall off of the bed.¡±


    ¡°Hohoho.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes, that¡¯s what happened.¡±


    I had moved in order to escape them¡­ But they didn¡¯t realize this, and assumed I had moved in my sleep.


    And after hearing Sebastianugh, I didn¡¯t even feel like responding¡­


    ¡°Well, I must prepare for the day. I¡¯ll see in the dining hall.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I¡¯ll go as soon as I¡¯m ready.¡±


    As the sunlight shone into the room, Ms. ire looked a little bashful as she left the room.


    Ms. Lyra followed after her, and so only Milina and Tilura remained.


    After toying with me to his heart¡¯s content, Sebastian made some excuse and left¡­ He didn¡¯t have toe in the first ce if he was so busy¡­ But perhaps this was the only way he could take his mind off of work.


    ¡­Though, he could find a better hobby.


    ¡°¡­Don¡¯t you have to get ready too, Milina?¡±


    ¡°I do, but¡­ It¡¯s hard to move away once you are here¡­¡±


    ¡°Leo is especially soft. So I understand how you feel!¡±


    From the moment before going to sleep until now, Milina and Tilura had not let go of Leo.


    Holding Leo was like being enveloped in the softest nket¡­


    It was no wonder that they couldn¡¯t get away from it even after waking up.


    ¡°Now, to prepare for the day¡­ I¡¯m going to Range vige¡­I have to get ready for that.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    After some time passed, Milina and Tilura parted from Leo with regretful expressions and left the room.


    As I would be gone for a few days, I needed to bring some extra clothing.


    I wouldn¡¯t want to wear the same clothes the whole time¡­


    Leo yawned in the corner as I packed everything that I would need.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°You didn¡¯t sleep well?¡±


    Leo continued to yawn, even after I was finished.


    Perhaps she hadn¡¯t slept well because Milina and Tilura were clutching to her the whole time.


    As for me, the herbs ensured that I slept just fine, so I felt refreshed¡­ Maybe I should have given some to Leo as well.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wuff!¡±


    ¡°¡­What?¡±


    You couldn¡¯t sleep well because you were wondering what was going to happen on the bed¡­?


    Apparently, Leo had been more concerned with how I was being sandwiched between Ms. ire and Ms. Lyra.


    So it wasn¡¯t because of Milina and Tilura after all. But why was Leo so concerned about that¡­?

 Chapter 159

    Chapter 159


    I Departed for Range Vige


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff¡­ Wuff.¡±


    ¡°I should hurry up and settle down?¡±


    Leo was telling me to tie the knot already¡­as if that would happen¡­


    I didn¡¯t even have that rtionship with anyone?


    ¡°With Ms. ire or Ms. Lyra. What a rude thought.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I replied, and Leo shook her head and sighed with exasperation.


    ¡­Ms. ire was high-born and the daughter of a duke, while Ms. Lyra was a servant that worked in this mansion.


    And I wouldn¡¯t presume to be worthy of either of them¡­


    ¡°¡­So I won¡¯t be able to eat Ms. Helena¡¯s cooking for a while¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, I prepared some food for you to take on your travels.¡±


    I had hurried to the dining hall in order to escape Leo¡¯s interrogation. There, I ate breakfast with everyone¡­ Well, except Milina.


    After eating, we drank tea, and I thought regretfully about how I wouldn¡¯t be able to eat Ms. Helena¡¯s delicious cooking while I was away.


    While Sebastian had packed some food for me, I knew that it wouldn¡¯t be on the same level.


    It was with such thoughts that I grabbed my belongings from my room, along with the food, and went to the entrance hall.


    ¡°Please be safe, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Come back soon, Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°Please help those poor people, master.¡±


    ¡°Kyau, kyau!¡±


    Several of the servants, Ms. ire, Tilura, Milina, and Sherry came to see me off.


    I listened to their final words as I strapped everything onto Leo¡¯s back.


    Surprisingly, arge cloth had been prepared, and everything was put inside and tied up, making it easier to strap to Leo.


    It was strange¡­the pattern reminded me of Japanese style cloth¡­


    And so I looked a little like an old-style Japanese thief as I climbed onto Leo.


    ¡­It was a little awkward, since I had to ce my arms around it, but the clothes inside acted as a cushion, so it wouldn¡¯t be too ufortable.


    ¡°Well, let us depart, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ Huh? You¡¯reing too, Mr. Sebastian?¡±


    Sebastian had climbed onto Leo and sat behind me.


    I hadn¡¯t heard anything about him going to Range vige. Besides, wasn¡¯t there still work to do regarding that store¡­?


    ¡°No, just to Ractos. Since I need to go today, I thought I would hitch a ride.¡±


    ¡°Ah, of course. Leo, it will be a little heavier than usual¡­ Is that all right?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Good Leo told me yesterday that she could handle a little extra weight.¡±


    Apparently, Sebastian had already asked Leo about it.


    Leo nodded reassuringly.


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s go then.¡±


    I turned around and waved to the others who stood by the door.


    ¡°Have a safe journey!¡±


    The servants said with a bow. And then we were off.


    ¡­I thought I had heard the voices of Ms. ire and the others as well¡­


    Milina was a servant in training, but it seemed off for Ms. ire to be in sync with them.


    It was with such thoughts that we left the mansion.


    As we were on Leo, it was much faster than riding a carriage.


    ¡°Good Leo is so fast. At this rate, we¡¯ll reach Ractos in half the amount of time.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. She usually adjusts her speed to match the horses. Besides, she¡¯s also careful so that the rider doesn¡¯t fall off. Leo would be even faster if she was alone.¡±


    Sebastian was very impressed by Leo¡¯s speed while riding.


    But if Leo was running her fastest, she could probably reach Ractos in a matter of minutes¡­ I would have no hope of staying on if she ran that fast now.


    ¡°By the way, Sebastian¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, what is it?¡±


    ¡°What are you going to do in Ractos?¡±


    It was unusual for Sebastian to leave the mansion alone.


    In fact, I don¡¯t think he had done it once since my arrival.


    So surely there must be a good reason for him to leave and visit the town now.


    ¡°It concerns that store. I want to see it in person¡­ There is information one can¡¯t acquire if they just stay in the house.¡±


    ¡°There is¡­?¡±


    ¡°Yes. If I stay in the mansion, all the information thates in is just hearsay. And it¡¯s important to actually go and see and hear things for yourself. Besides, it¡¯s best to get information while it¡¯s still fresh.¡±


    ¡°Fresh¡­¡±


    Yes, there definitely is a difference when ites to information you got on your own. Seeing is better than hearing, after all¡­ Well, sometimes¡­


    In any casemunication technology was not advanced at all in this world. So it could take a while for you to acquire thetest information.


    Perhaps gaining information on sight was more important than I thought.


    Well, even information on the inte wasn¡¯t always correct. And so it was best to find out for yourself when possible.


    ¡°Also, I have to go to Kalis¡¯s store.¡±


    ¡°Why is that?¡±


    ¡°To tell him to lower the prices. Kalis is a good merchant, but¡­I do not think he will agree to lowering the price of something that is already selling so well.¡±


    ¡°I can understand why.¡±


    As the illness was still spreading in Ractos, the Ramogi would continue to fly off shelves without any price adjustments.


    However, in order to ensure that the poor had ess to it, we had decided to lower the prices for a limited time.


    But for a merchant, it was just decreasing your profits, and so he was not likely to take it well.


    ¡°A mere letter may not be enough to satisfy him. Though, he would hardly refuse, especially since it is to help the poor.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    ¡°He also understands how His Grace likes to conduct things. The people of thisnd should be able to live asfortably as possible¡­ That is the principle of his businesses.¡±

 Chapter 160

    Chapter 160


    We Told Mr. Kalis About the Ramogi Price Cut


    As the store was under the duke¡¯s direct control, it was true that they had to understand which direction it was going in.


    If Mr. Kalis did care about the poor, like Sebastian suggested¡­then he should be satisfied by the exnation.


    But as it was important, it was probably best to talk to him in person, instead of notifying him of it through a letter.


    There were things that couldn¡¯t be conveyed unless you were face to face.


    ¡°Now, I must get off here¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, I¡¯ll go with you then. After all, I am quite involved in the matter.¡±


    After arriving in Ractos, Sebastian was about to get off near the za in order to visit the store, but I stopped him.


    ¡°¡­But, surely you do not have enough time?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sure Leo can make up for it.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I didn¡¯t want to leave everything to Sebastian either.


    He already handled most matters rted to sales, so I should do what I could.


    I would just have to hold on tight and have Leo run a little faster to Range vige, and then we could make up for any lost time.


    Sebastian saw that Leo was nodding, and so he agreed to allow us to apany him.


    ¡°Ah, Mr. Takumi. Thank you for visiting. And you, Sebastian¡­ So, what brings you here today?¡±


    ¡°Kalis. We have an important matter to discuss today.¡±


    We took Leo and went to Mr. Kalis¡¯s store.


    As it was still early, they hadn¡¯t opened yet, and so it was just Mr. Kalis and the employees who were inside.


    ¡­Except for Nick¡­ I suppose he cameter.


    ¡°Discuss¡­? What could it be?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s about the sales of the Ramogi. We want to lower the prices a little.¡±


    ¡°The Ramogi prices? But they¡¯ve been selling very well, along with the other herbs. I really don¡¯t think it¡¯s necessary¡­¡±


    Mr. Kalis immediately looked at Sebastian disapprovingly.


    Indeed, it sounded like a very pointless move.


    It was bad business to lower prices of popr products without a special reason¡­


    Besides, there was only so much Ramogi that could be sold a day, and so they were always low on stock. So a price cut was even more strange.


    ¡°This town¡­ No, it¡¯s to deal with the illness that is spreading through all of the duke¡¯snds. And also to keep that other store in check.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    And so Sebastian began to exin the meaning and effect he hoped it would have.


    As always, Sebastian¡¯s expression brightened, and he became very animated as he talked.


    Even his eyes seemed to shine like the sun¡­


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Indeed. Considering how the duke has always run things, it would seem like an effective move. However¡­has Mr. Takumi agreed to this?¡±


    ¡°Yes. As Sebastian says, it is my hope that more poor people are able to buy the Ramogi.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi even agreed to lower his payment in order to make this happen.¡±


    ¡°Indeed! Most physicians would ask for more¡­ I see. If that is what the duke and Mr. Takumi wants, then I have no objection. ¡­But our customers won¡¯t be too happy when the prices return to normalter on¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, that is true¡­¡±


    Mr. Kalis was thinking about what would happen after the prices went back up again.


    If prices were raised after they had been lowered once, then customers tended to not buy them as much.


    So it could be quite difficult to recover from that¡­ Especially if it is a great discount.


    ¡°I don¡¯t think there is much reason to worry about the effect it can have on the market. After all, there isn¡¯t much out there to begin with.¡±


    ¡°Because the other store bought them all?¡±


    ¡°Yes. And other herbs as well. And so cutting down the prices won¡¯t affect other stores much. ¡­As for when the timees to raise the prices again, I will handle that.¡±


    ¡°Sorry for the trouble.¡±


    ¡°No, not at all. I had not even thought about selling to the poor before. However, a merchant won¡¯tst long if he thinks only of making a profit. If we can contribute to the duke and to the people, then this is nothing.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    Mr. Kalis said that he would handle the customers after raising the prices again.


    Besides, the Ramogi was something that the average person normally bought, so it was unlikely that they would stop buying itpletely.


    In any case, we could just leave it to Mr. Kalis.


    ¡°So, while that matter is settled, there is still¡­¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re wondering how the other store will respond¡­?¡±


    ¡°Yes. It is well known that this is His Grace¡¯s store. And so they may be prompted to react in some way.¡±


    ¡°They may try to interfere, or try to buy all of the stock.¡±


    Yes. Such things had to be considered as well.


    They apparently had enough money to buy all the herbs around town, so they might try ande to this store after the discount.


    Besides, while we didn¡¯t have to worry about Nick now, there might be others whoe to the store and try to obstruct the business.


    I had no idea what we could really expect from these people, or how far they would go¡­ But it would be a good thing to consider various possibilities and put countermeasures in ce.


    And so I waited to hear what Sebastian would suggest.

 Chapter 161

    Chapter 161


    We Departed From Ractos


    ¡°As for any obstruction, I¡¯ll have some of the mansion guards posted here. That should be enough to deal with them.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. It would be a great relief to have people who are as finely trained as them. Besides, they are Duke Ekenhart¡¯s own men, so my trust in them is immense.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was a master swordsman, so anyone he trained should be able to beat any ruffians with ease.


    I had only spent time with a few of them, like Phillip, Nichs, and Johanna, but they all seemed terribly reliable¡­ Though, I hadn¡¯t actually seen them fight. It was just the way they carried themselves.


    ¡°As for how to prevent them from buying¡­ What can be done?¡±


    That was unusual. Sebastian asked Mr. Kalis for a suggestion.


    While Sebastian was reliable for his great wealth of knowledge, it seemed that he didn¡¯t know that much when it came to trade.


    ¡°¡­Indeed¡­ What about setting a limit to how much you can buy? From what I understand, you do not need much to treat the illness. In that case, we can exin this to customers and limit everyone to only buying one.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­that would prevent them from buying in bulk. However, what about people who are buying for their whole family?¡±


    ¡°In such cases, they will have to exin and offer some evidence that they speak the truth.¡±


    Suggested Mr. Kalis, and they quickly decided on various countermeasures.


    One person could buy up to two, and if they needed more than that for their family, one of the clerks would confirm that they were telling the truth.


    It was also brought up that the malicious store could send several people to this store, but this in itself would offer information about them.


    Besides, we didn¡¯t want to add too much to Mr. Kalis¡¯s workload.


    And if they happened to use more violent and threatening methods¡­the mansion guards would handle it.


    ¡°Well, here are the herbs for you to sell while I am away.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you. I¡¯ll have Nick focus on working here in the meantime.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. I¡¯ll let you know as soon as I return.¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    Now that they had decided on everything, I took out the herbs from my bag and handed them to Mr. Kalis.


    Now Nick would not have toe to the mansion for a few days.


    I hoped he would work hard in Mr. Kalis¡¯s store and learn how to treat customers properly.


    Now that our business there was over, Sebastian and I left the store.


    As I had to leave through the east of the town in order to go to Range vige, I headed towards the east gate.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, here is a map that will help you.¡±


    ¡°¡­Thank you.¡±


    While Sebastian had given me directions on how to reach it, he also handed me a map, just in case.


    Perhaps I was lucky. He had just happened to see one that was being sold in town, and had bought it for me.


    ¡°It really is close to a straight line, just as you said.¡±


    ¡°Yes. There is one ce where the main road branches off, but it is notplex at all.¡±


    I spread out the map in order to look at it. The map was filled with details on the area surrounding the town of Ractos.


    Range vige was basically a straight line from it to the east.


    As Sebastian said, there was a branching path to the north. But as long as we didn¡¯t go there, it was unlikely that we could get lost.


    ¡°Now, please be careful, Mr. Takumi. And we will be waiting for your quick return.¡±


    ¡°You should be careful as well, while you continue the investigation.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I know.¡±


    When we were near the east gate, Sebastian said that he was going to investigate the store, and so we would part ways there.


    With a deep bow, he left. I hoped he would be as careful as possible.


    There was still much that we didn¡¯t know about the store. And if they found out that someone from the duke¡¯s house was sniffing around, they might try and do something.


    ¡°Also, Mr. Takumi. Don¡¯t forget what I told you when teaching you to use magic. If anything were to happen to you, Lady ire¡­and Lyra would mourn.¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I don¡¯t intend on allowing that to happen, but¡­ Well, I¡¯ll think of every option and run when it¡¯s the right time.¡±


    Sebastian¡¯sst warning¡­ If I encounter an enemy that I can¡¯t defeat, then I should run away.


    Your life was the most important thing.


    As for the thing he said after that, with a knowing grin, I would ignore it.


    ¡°All right, let¡¯s go, Leo!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    As soon as we were out of the gates, I climbed onto Leo¡¯s back and she started to run.


    ¡°As we were dyed a little, please run a little faster!¡±


    ¡°Wou! Wou!¡±


    While we hadn¡¯t even lost a full hour, I still wanted to deliver the Ramogi to the vige as soon as possible.


    And so I asked Leo to run at a slightly faster speed than usual.


    My baggage acted as a cushion, and I held on tight so that I wouldn¡¯t fall.


    Leo replied enthusiastically, and then began to run at what felt like double speed.


    ¡­Uh, maybe it was too fast?


    I was surprised that I was able to hang on¡­ But perhaps it was because my training had toughened me up.


    ¡°¡­Leo. Run a little farther away from the main road!¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re startling people we pass by!¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    As I held on tightly, I shouted for Leo to move away from the road.


    As she was moving at such a great speed, I had to shout loudly in order to be heard. Well¡­Leo actually had good ears, so maybe I didn¡¯t need to.


    At first, Leo seemed like she was puzzled by the request, but she then understood and so moved away a little.


    For nearly an hour after departing Ractos, Leo had surprised travelers moving in both directions by the incredible speed at which she ran.


    But who wouldn¡¯t be surprised by the sight of a giant Silver Fenrir running down the road?


    I had even seen panicking horses, and people throwing away belongings and running. That was how scary Leo looked to them.


    They did not know Leo, but only saw a Silver Fenrir, the embodiment of horror.


    Well, some may not have even realized she was a Silver Fenrir. But they still saw a huge monster¡­

 Chapter 162

    Chapter 162


    We Encountered A Monster On The Way


    ¡°Thank you, Leo. Now we won¡¯t scare as many people on the road!¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    As Leo had a very friendly personality, scaring people would not have been her intention.


    And while people were often scared of her, I doubted she enjoyed being seen as an object of fear, and I didn¡¯t want that either.


    ¡­Besides, just look at how cute she is¡­


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? What is it, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wouu!¡±


    After that, we continued to run parallel, but at a short distance, with the road. But then Leo suddenly started to slow down and bark as if to tell me something.


    ¡°Hmm. I suppose it¡¯s fine then.¡±


    Away from the main road, where there were trees that Leo could hide behind, we stopped.


    ¡°So, what¡¯s the matter?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff! Wuff.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ That time already¡­ I wanted to go a little farther¡­but it cannot be helped.¡±


    Behind the trees, I got off of Leo¡¯s back and listened to what she had to say.


    Apparently, due to running so much, Leo was hungry.


    I looked up and saw that the sun was high in the sky¡­ As for my watch¡­it said that it was midday.


    So it was no surprise that she was hungry then.


    ¡°All right. Let¡¯s eat here.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    After deciding this, Leo started to wag her tail happily.


    She must have been very hungry then¡­ From the mansion to Ractos. From Ractos to here. She had been running a lot.


    I petted Leo appreciatively and then unstrapped the baggage from her back.


    ¡°Uhh¡­food¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    I untied the cloth and looked at the food supplies that Sebastian had prepared.


    Leo peered from behind me as well.


    She was curious and hopeful over what we would eat for lunch¡­ But considering it was stuff like portable rations, she really shouldn¡¯t get her hopes up so high¡­


    Those things usually don¡¯t taste very good.


    ¡°Oh, here it is. ¡­Hmm. I¡¯ll have to thank Sebastian when we return.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    I took out a few different bundles and unwrapped them.


    There was bread, and quite a lot of sausages.


    Also, leather sks that contained water and soup¡­


    With all of this, we could have something like a proper meal.


    So it wasn¡¯t portable rations¡­ Well, there was some dried meat. So there might also be portable rations, in case the journey was longer than expected.


    ¡°Leo. Help me gather some wood.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    And so Leo and I gathered the fallen branches around the trees.


    The bread was one thing, but we wanted to cook the sausages¡­ But as we didn¡¯t have a pot, we wouldn¡¯t be able to heat up the soup¡­


    ¡°That should do. All right, Leo. If you would be so kind.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! ¡­Wooo¡­. Grau!¡±


    After gathering enough branches, I stacked them together to make a bonfire.


    As it was just to heat some food, we didn¡¯t need that many branches.


    I asked Leo to light the fire, and then I used some branches to skewer the sausages and ce them nearby.


    I watched Leo, who waited happily as she watched the sausages cook.


    ¡°All right, they look good now. Here, you can eat these.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I gave her permission, and then Leo quickly picked up one of the sausages and ate it.


    I also started to eat some bread.


    There was meat and vegetables inside of the bread, and it was every bit as tasty as the food we ate in the mansion.


    ¡°Maybe Ms. Helena cooked this. I¡¯ll have to thank her when we get back.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    I muttered as I ate. Leo nodded in agreement as she devoured her sausages.


    Her tail wagged busily, suggesting that they tasted very good.


    About an hour passed, and when we were finished with our soup, bread and sausages, I packed our things so we could continue our journey.


    ¡­Though, Leo looked like she was still hungry¡­ But since we were still traveling, I didn¡¯t think it would be good for her to eat until she was full¡­


    She will just have to wait until we returned to the mansion, and I could ask Ms. Helena to prepare something special for Leo. It was with such thoughts that I put out the fire.


    Once I was certain that the fire was properly extinguished, I climbed back onto Leo and set out once again.


    ¡°Ah, turn left here¡­we need to move away from the main road.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    After going a little farther, we left the main road, like the map suggested, and headed towards the road to Range vige.


    Unlike in Japan, the main roads were not connected to small viges.


    The roads weren¡¯t even paved in this world.


    ¡°It¡¯s quite close to the forest, huh¡­¡±


    After going west from the main road for a while, we then headed towards the east.


    Further on, there was a forest. And while it wasn¡¯t to the same degree as the fenrir forest, it looked very dense.


    As the map showed detailed terrain, I knew that there was a forest nearby, but I didn¡¯t realize it was this close.


    If Range vige was this close, then perhaps they worked in forestry.


    ¡°Wuff!?¡±


    ¡°What is it, Leo?¡±


    I was clutching onto Leo and just starting to get used to the speed enough so that I could take in my surroundings, when Leo suddenly slowed down again.


    What happened?


    ¡°Woooo¡­¡±


    Leo stopped and began to growl.


    This reaction¡­ I had seen it in the fenrir forest¡­ When we encountered the orc¡­


    ¡°Wooo¡­wou. Wou! Grau! Grau!¡±


    ¡°I see, I see.¡±


    Leo was telling me that there was danger. Apparently, there were a few trolls up ahead.


    ¡°Wooo.¡±


    Leo continued to growl guardedly as she slowly advanced in the direction that the trolls were.


    ¡°Leo, I know I¡¯m always asking this, but can I leave this to you?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I asked Leo to deal with the trolls, and Leo nodded assuringly.


    She then continued a little farther until I was able to see the trolls as well.


    ¡°There they are¡­just like the ones we saw before.¡±


    Giants that were over three meters tall and wielded clubs.


    But as Leo had already defeated them by the time we arrived, this was the first time I was seeing them standing.


    While they weren¡¯t the ones who had been tormenting Sherry, I still felt a sense of hostility towards them.


    ¡°Sorry to rely on you every time, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Leo barked as if to say that I shouldn¡¯t worry about it, and then she stopped so that I could get off of her back.


    She wouldn¡¯t be able to fight at her best if I was still riding her.


    I also unstrapped the baggage from her back. Then I waited.


    While the trolls were up ahead, they had not noticed our presence yet.

 Chapter 163

    Chapter 163


    We Defeated the Monsters and Cleaned Up


    ¡°Thank you, Leo!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Leo barked energetically, and then she immediately started running towards the trolls.


    They still hadn¡¯t noticed us¡­ From here, I could see that there were¡­seven.


    And Leo charged right into their center. And with a speed that my eyes could barely follow, she shed with her front paws, and tore through them with her sharp fangs. In the blink of an eye, four of them turned into clumps of flesh.


    ¡°Gyu-gyu?¡±


    ¡°Gyuowaaa!¡±


    ¡°Gyuuuu!¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    The remaining trolls finally understood what was happening, and they frantically began to swing their clubs. However, their movement was considerably slower than Leo.


    Humans would have screamed in terror when facing the attacks of the trolls, but Leo just dodged them with ease.


    ¡°Gyuwaaa!¡±


    ¡°Gyu!¡±


    ¡°Gyuwa!¡±


    She avoided their clubs and thenshed out with her ws once again.


    The trolls werepletely at her mercy, and could do nothing as she shredded through them.


    ¡­Leo seemed faster now than she was against the orc¡­ Back then, I could at least follow her.


    So this was what she was like when she went all out¡­ This was why people feared Silver Fenrirs.


    Well, Leo wouldn¡¯t attack people.


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Good work, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    I patted Leo on the head and thanked her after she returned.


    Leo wagged her tail happily and looked quite smug¡­ She was proud at having been able to defeat them so quickly.


    It was barely even a minute.


    ¡°Still, you made quite a mess.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    I muttered as I looked at the remains of the decapitated trolls.


    Because we can¡¯t eat them¡­ Leo seemed to say.


    She had only split the orcs in two, because they were edible¡­


    But she was much more thorough with the trolls, as they could not be eaten.


    ¡°¡­Defeating them is good, but¡­what now?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    I thought as I looked at the clumps of troll flesh.


    Not only that, but there was blood all over the ce.


    I would have probably felt ill, if I had any less resistance to seeing such things.


    While I didn¡¯t like horror movies, I was still fine¡­perhaps I had gotten used to it after seeing the orcs being defeated.


    Well, it wasn¡¯t that it had no effect and that I waspletely unmoved¡­.


    It was still quite disgusting¡­


    ¡°We can¡¯t just leave them here to rot¡­perhaps we should burn them?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    My turn again? Leo seemed to say as she opened her mouth.


    The trolls were big. And so even if they were cut into smaller pieces¡­there was still a lot.


    And since we were close to the forest, I was scared about the fire spreading.


    ¡°¡­No, that¡¯s too dangerous¡­ An amateur shouldn¡¯t start burning corpses in a ce like this.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Leo looked quite disappointed, as she had wanted to use magic.


    Still, what should we do with the trolls then¡­


    If I left them to rot here, it could result in further spreading of diseases.


    And the troll meat might attract other monsters as well.


    While we were a short distance from the road, it would not be good to attract monsters to this area.


    ¡°¡­I guess we could bury them?¡±


    ¡°¡­Wuff¡­¡±


    Leo sighed as if she thought it was too much trouble. But I couldn¡¯t think of anything else.


    And carrying it to some other ce in order to dispose of it was not very realistic¡­ And so burying it would be the simplest way.


    Besides, maybe they would be a good fertilizer.


    ¡°Ah, but¡­I don¡¯t have a shovel¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff-wuff.¡±


    As I poked the ground with my foot, I felt that it was rather hard.


    I would not be able to dig through it without a shovel or any tools.


    As I was wondering what to do, Leo started to bark as if she had an idea.


    ¡°What is it, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wou-wou.¡±


    ¡°Hmm. You can really do it?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Leo moved her feet around busily and told me what she had thought of.


    Uhh, dig a hole with magic?


    I didn¡¯t know if it was possible, but Leo nodded confidently.


    ¡°In that case, I¡¯ll leave it to you. ¡­Sorry to make you do everything.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    First she defeated the trolls, and now I was asking her to get rid of the bodies.


    ¡­If only there was something that I could do as well.


    But Leo barked and told me to not worry about it. And then she walked over to the corpses.


    ¡°Wooo¡­grau!¡±


    ¡°Woah.¡±


    Once she was close to the trolls, Leo turned the other way and then seemed to charge up her energy before barking loudly.


    In the next instant, a bang! And the ground in that direction fell away.


    ¡°Explosion¡­magic?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I gazed dumbly as the dust from the explosion slowly settled. Leo then returned to me with the satisfied look of someone who had done their work well.


    ¡°I didn¡¯t know you could do such a thing¡­ Amazing, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    I marveled over Leo¡¯s magic as I petted her.


    She wagged her tail happily.


    After a moment, I went over to the hole and looked inside.


    ¡°That¡¯s quite big.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I did my best! Leo seemed to say.


    It was big enough for several people to fit inside, with plenty of room left.


    That should be enough to bury the troll chunks.


    ¡­Thankfully, they were in a state that would make them easy to push inside.


    ¡°Phew. That was surprisingly hard¡­ And now I¡¯m quite filthy too.¡±


    After some time, I sighed after throwing all of the troll pieces into the hole.


    As not a lot of time had passed since Leo shredded them, the pieces were still dripping with blood, which got all over my hands.


    Besides, while they were cut up, they were from a giant body, so they were still quite heavy.


    I had felt like this is one thing I should do myself instead of relying on Leo¡­but I probably should have asked for help.


    ¡°All right, I¡¯m finally clean. Now¡­once again, Leo¡­can you do it?¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    I had used water from a sk to wash the blood off of my hands, and then I asked Leo to fill the hole up once again.


    As it was big, it would take too long for me to do it myself.

 Chapter 164

    Chapter 164


    We Met Up With Mr. Hannes and the Others


    ¡°Grau! Grau! Wuff!¡±


    Leo used smaller explosions this time to lift the dirt around the hole.


    It seemed like she was going to do this several times to spread the dirt, so that it would fill the hole again.


    That did not seem very efficient¡­ Still, after doing this a few times, the hole was half filled.


    ¡°Well, that should be enough. Good job, Leo. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    If she kept doing this, she would just create a lot of smaller holes all over the ce.


    And so I would just ignore the crater that was still very visible. As long as the troll pieces weren¡¯t visible, it was fine.


    I petted Leo to show how thankful I was. And once she had settled down, I strapped the baggage onto her back again.


    ¡°That took a lot of time¡­ Uh, could you run just a little faster, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wou. Woou?¡±


    After climbing onto Leo and looking at my watch, I asked if she could possibly run a little faster.


    Leo nodded in agreement, but she looked worried about me falling off.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. I¡¯ll be holding on tight. I want to reach Range vige today.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    We had lost time doing various things, and at this rate, we might not reach Range vige until tomorrow.


    But I wanted to reach Range vige today, and give them the Ramogi¡­ Besides, we didn¡¯t really pack well for camping outdoors¡­ We would not be able to pitch tents like we did during the exploration of the fenrir forest. So I would not be able to sleepfortably.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff¡­ Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Woah!¡±


    But just as Leo signaled with a bark, she began to dash, and I felt as if my body was floating upwards.


    We were moving so fast that the scenery around me was a blur.


    This was worse than I expected¡­ However, I should be fine, as long as I hold on tight.


    Though, I would have probably fallen off already if it weren¡¯t for my sword training¡­


    ¡°Hmm?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    After running like this for some time, and when my arms were starting to hurt, I saw that two horses were trotting up ahead.


    As we got closer, they noticed us as well, and so Leo slowed down.


    ¡°Is that¡­Mr. Hannes? There are two on one horse, and then an armored soldier on the other¡­ Ah, it¡¯s Phillip.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff?¡±


    While we were still too far away to see them clearly, I could tell from the back that it was the trio who had left the mansion.


    Rosalie could not ride, so she was with her grandfather.


    Since Phillip, who was dressed in soldier¡¯s armor, was riding alone, there were two horses in all.


    ¡°Well¡­could you approach them slowly, so that you don¡¯t startle the horses?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I said to Leo, who had been looking at me questioningly.


    If Leo ran at her fastest, we would catch up with them in an instant, but might frighten the horses.


    And so Leo barked in reply and slowed down a little.


    Still, she was much faster than the horses, and so it didn¡¯t take long to catch up with Mr. Hannes.


    ¡°Mr. Hannes! Rosalie! Phillip!¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Mr. Takumi!¡±


    When they were close enough, I shouted out to them.


    While keeping his hands on the reins, Philip turned to look in our direction.


    ¡°Leo, can you walk right next to them?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    After noticing us, Phillip said something to Haines, and they all stopped.


    Leo walked over slowly and then stopped next to them.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. You really are fast. I thought we wouldn¡¯t see you until we reached the vige.¡±


    ¡°Leo ran really fast. So we were able to catch up much sooner.¡±


    ¡°Silver Fenrirs are such astonishing monsters¡­ We left a few days earlier, and yet here you are¡­¡±


    ¡°Leo is amazing!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    And then Phillip got off of his horse and came towards me.


    And so I too got down from Leo in order to talk to him.


    Mr. Hannes and Rosalie also got off their horse. They still wore expressions of shock about my arrival.


    As for Leo, she looked very smug after being praised by Rosalie.


    ¡°While we did take a detour¡­it is still a surprise.¡±


    ¡°You took a detour?¡±


    While Sebastian was not here, Phillip was still standing straight and talking politely, as he did at the mansion.


    I suppose it was because Mr. Hannes was here.


    But more importantly, he said that they had not gone straight to the vige.


    So it was no wonder we caught up with them so soon.


    ¡°On the way, we saw several trollsing out of the forest. It would be difficult for me to deal with them by myself, and so we had to avoid them by going around. Thankfully, the trolls did not notice us.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­so that¡¯s what happened.¡±


    Perhaps those were the same trolls that Leo had defeated.


    While Phillip could fight, the same could not be said about Mr. Hannes and Rosalie.


    Besides, if there were seven trolls, then it would have been very dangerous for Phillip to face them alone¡­so it made sense for them to go around.


    ¡°Did you see the trolls, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Ah, we actually did see them, but¡­Leo took them down with ease.¡±


    ¡°After seeing her do it in the forest, I am no longer surprised at what Silver Fenrirs are capable of¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°The strength of a Silver Fenrir has been known for a long time¡­ It really is amazing.¡±


    Yes, Leo had cut down the trolls so easily¡­


    They were three meter giants that wielded great clubs. I would not have been able to defeat one of them if I was alone.


    Leo barked as if to say it was nothing. But Mr. Hannes looked very impressed.


    ¡°¡­Well, we should not stay here and talk, as we have a vige to go to. Let¡¯s go.¡±


    ¡°Indeed.¡±


    ¡°Thank you for helping our vige.¡±


    If we kept talking here, our arrival at the vige would be dyed.


    But as I climbed back onto Leo, and the others returned to their horses, I noticed that someone was looking at me¡­

 Chapter 165

    Chapter 165


    We Arrived at Range Vige


    ¡°Hmm? What is it, Rosalie?¡±


    ¡°¡­I was wondering if I could ride on Leo¡­¡±


    ¡°Rosalie, This is no time to be asking such things.¡±


    She had been staring at me as I sat on Leo¡¯s back, and so I asked her what was the matter. Apparently, she wanted to ride Leo as well.


    While she had ridden Leo back at the mansion, I suppose she wanted to know what it was like to ride on Leo when she was running outside with great speed.


    ¡°Hahaha. It¡¯s fine, Mr. Hannes. Don¡¯t you agree, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Are you certain?¡±


    ¡°Leo likes to carry other people. So you really don¡¯t have to worry about it. Isn¡¯t that right?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°If you say so. Thank you.¡±


    As Mr. Hannes admonished Rosalie, I assured him that it was perfectly fine if she wanted to ride on Leo.


    Leo wagged her tail happily andy low so that it would be easier to climb onto her.


    She was just as excited as Rosalie.


    Mr. Hannes bowed his head gratefully.


    ¡°There, Rosalie. You can ride on Leo now.¡±


    ¡°Wow! Thank you!¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    I stretched out my hand to Rosalie and pulled her up onto Leo¡¯s back.


    She was so excited and had the biggest smile on her face.


    It really was nice to see childrenugh.


    ¡°Now, let¡¯s go to the vige. It is not too far now. We should be able to arrive before the sun setspletely. Good Leo, I will lead you there, so can you follow after me?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Said Phillip, once he saw that Rosalie was sitting securely behind me.


    Leo nodded, and then the horses dashed off towards the vige.


    I was d that we would arrive at the vige before it waspletely dark.


    If it became dark, we would not be able to see, and might end up getting lost¡­ Unless, Leo could see well in the dark¡­?


    Cats were able to see during the night, but dogs¡­well, she was more of a wolf¡­? I wasn¡¯t quite sure, and would have to ask someone about thatter.


    ¡°So this is Range vige¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. This is where I was born! It¡¯s a ce filled with friendly people!¡±


    After traveling for another two hours to the east, just as the sun was starting to set, and the sky darkened, we arrived at the vige.


    Rosalie was clearly very fond of her birthce, and was happy to be back.


    ¡°It is very quiet.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ As it¡¯s not yet night, normally, there should be some people out and about¡­¡±


    Mr. Hannes and Phillip dismounted and tied their horses before entering the vige to see what was happening.


    I helped Rosalie get down, and then unstrapped the baggage from Leo¡¯s back as I looked at the vige.


    There were rows of wooden houses. But I could hear no voices, and all was quiet. It almost felt like the ce had been abandoned.


    Well, I could see what looked like candle light through cracks in some of the windows, so there were clearly still people living there.


    ¡°¡­Ever since the illness started to spread, a once lively vige has be quieter and quieter. It was like this right before I left, even during the day¡­¡±


    ¡°Everyone is ill. Even the children I used to y with¡­¡±


    ¡°The illness has really taken over, huh.¡±


    ¡°There was nothing we could do. We did not know how tobat it. Many could not even move enough to leave their houses¡­¡±


    Chief Hannes and Rosalie looked at their vige with grim expressions.


    Phillip was thinking about how the illness was affecting the vige.


    If this really was just like a cold, like in Japan, it would have healed naturally.


    However, even though some of the symptoms were simr, it was likely different. An illness that did not heal just because you rested a little.


    Of course, I had not seen enough of it in order toe to any conclusions, but I had yet to hear of anyone recovering from it naturally.


    Though, Ramogi seemed to heal it very quickly¡­


    ¡°Ah, chief! The chief has returned!¡±


    ¡°Oh, it¡¯s you, Rai.¡±


    As we walked through the entrance to the vige, someone noticed us.


    The door of the nearest house opened, and a little boy poked out his head to look. He was about the same age as Rosalie.


    The chief called him Rai, and approached the house.


    ¡°Rai. How are your parents?¡±


    ¡°¡­Nothing has changed since you left, chief. They just cough painfully¡­and their fever hasn¡¯t gone down either¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    From what I could hear, this child¡¯s parents were sick.


    Even now, they were likely suffering from a fever and cough within the house.


    The boy had a grieving expression and was clearly troubled over this.


    ¡°But¡­since you are back, chief, you must have bought the medicine? So my mother and father will get well again?¡±


    The chief had left the vige in order to buy medicine for the spreading illness.


    As the boy knew this, he knew that the chief¡¯s return meant that he should be carrying the medicine.


    ¡°Aye, that¡¯s right. Rai, this Mr. Takumi, a pharmacist. He was sent here by the duke¡¯s own daughter.¡±


    ¡°Nice to meet you, Rai.¡±


    ¡°Nice to meet you! Does that mean you can heal my mother and father?¡±


    ¡°Of course. I¡¯m sure they¡¯ll get well soon, so don¡¯t worry.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Ahhh!¡±


    After being introduced to me, the boy¡¯s eyes lit up.


    It was like he was seeing hope for his parents. Though, it did make me feel a little awkward.


    But that was when Leo, who liked children, came over and barked.


    Upon seeing Leo, Rai¡¯s face contorted with fear and he let out a little scream.


    ¡­Leo was so big, that she would scare most people¡­ Even Rosalie had been scared at first¡­


    ¡°Rai, this is Leo. Don¡¯t worry, she won¡¯t attack you.¡±


    ¡°Good Leo is a Silver Fenrir¡­ A monster who has helped us a lot.¡±


    ¡°Leo is so cute! Don¡¯t be scared, Rai!¡±


    ¡°¡­Are you¡­sure?¡±


    I told Rai that he didn¡¯t need to be afraid, and then Mr. Hannes and Rosalie also joined in.


    He didn¡¯t look like he fully believed us, but as he was a boy, he seemed to be interested in Leo, who looked like a great wolf.


    Boys often liked wolves¡­ Well, some of them, anyway.

 Chapter 166

    Chapter 166


    I Used the Ramogi on the Sick People


    ¡°Sorry, Leo. But I need you to stay here with Phillip. Is that all right, Phillip?¡±


    ¡°Yes, it¡¯s fine.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­¡±


    We wouldn¡¯t make much progress here if Leo just scared everyone away.


    And so I had her stay with Phillip for now.


    But as he saw Leo moving away, Rai looked like he wanted to say something¡­ Perhaps it really wouldn¡¯t take long for him to get over his fear of Leo.


    ¡°Mr. Hannes. I would like to start by giving some of the Ramogi to this boy¡¯s parents.¡±


    ¡°Very well. May wee in, Rai? Your parents will have to drink the medicine.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I understand. Thank you, Mr. Pharmacist!¡±


    ¡°Aye, they will be healed in no time.¡±


    I couldn¡¯t let any doubt show on my face in front of a hopeful child.


    And so I answered with a firm nod as his eyes shone.


    ¡°Yes, this is indeed the same illness that I saw before. So the Ramogi should be very effective.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­that is a relief.¡±


    ¡°So my mother and father will get better?¡±


    ¡°Yes, right away.¡±


    After entering the house, we were led to a bedroom where a man and woman were sleeping.


    Rai¡¯s parents showed the same symptoms as the children at the orphanage.


    A fever and cough¡­ Very much like a cold¡­ And yet also different. That was what it seemed like to me.


    I nodded in order to assure Rai, and then I took the Ramogi out of the bag that I was carrying.


    ¡°Now, make them drink this.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Rai, do you have any water?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll go and get some!¡±


    He soon returned with a wooden bowl of water, and so the parents were able to drink the Ramogi.


    While it had been dried and powdered, the parents had been feverish for so long, and so they were barely conscious. And since they were also coughing, it was a little difficult to get them to drink it. Thankfully, I had watched the children at the orphanage drink it before.


    And so we made them sit up in their beds and open their mouths as the water and Ramogi was poured down their throats.


    They looked like they were going to start coughing again, but managed to hold it back and drink everything.


    If they coughed, the powder would fly out of their mouths.


    ¡°Ahh¡­I feel better¡­¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s amazing! It was so quick!¡±


    Minutes after they had drunk the Ramogi, their fevers began to subside as we watched them.


    It had been the same with the children. But I still couldn¡¯t help but be a little awed at how quickly the medicine took effect.


    In Japan, even if it was amon cold, you still needed to rest for a while after taking medicine.


    But I suppose this Ramogi was just more effective¡­ Just like how Loe could easily heal wounds in a way that would be impossible in Japan¡­ The effects of medicine just seemed to be different here.


    ¡°Thank you. I don¡¯t know how we can ever repay you.¡±


    ¡°Both me and my husband can hardly believe that we were in such pain a moment ago¡­ Thank you so much, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°You don¡¯t need to thank me. The person you really should be thanking is Mr. Hannes and Rosalie, who traveled so far in order to get help.¡±


    ¡°But I didn¡¯t do¡­¡±


    ¡°Thank you, chief. And you, Rosalie.¡±


    After the Ramogi took effect, and the two recovered, they were filled with gratitude towards me.


    While it was true that I had been the one to prepare it, Mr. Hannes had done most of the work.


    Had he note to the mansion for help, neither I or Ms. ire would have known that the people in this vige were ill.


    Though, Mr. Hannes was very modest, and Rosalie looked embarrassed.


    ¡°Now, Mr. Hannes, here is the Ramogi that I was able to prepare beforeing here. Please distribute it to those in the vige who are sick.¡±


    ¡°You acquired this much in such a short amount of time¡­ I do think that this should be enough for everyone. Thank you. Thank you so much!¡±


    I had taken the rest of the wrapped up Ramogi and handed it to Mr. Hannes.


    As I hadn¡¯t actually nned to meet up with him on the way, I had given some to Mr. Hannes to take back with him.


    I had pushed myself a little back at the mansion in order to do that.


    Ms. Lyra and the others had be quite worried, but it was worth it if the people of this vige could be saved.


    ¡°Please let me know if it isn¡¯t enough. And I can prepare some more right away.¡±


    ¡°You can prepare more¡­ But how?¡±


    ¡°Well, uh, I have a way¡­¡±


    We hadn¡¯t told Mr. Hannes about my Weed Cultivation Gift.


    It was better if only a few people knew about it. That was the opinion of the Liebert family, and I agreed with them.


    But now Mr. Hannes was questioning how I was able to prepare so much in such a short amount of time, and so I had to get him off the trail.


    ¡°More importantly, you should ensure that everyone in the vige is healed. They are still suffering even now.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true. Very well. I don¡¯t know how we can thank you, Mr. Takumi¡­ But for now, I will give the Ramogi to the people of the vige.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll help you!¡±


    ¡°Yes, we¡¯ll help distribute them as well!¡±


    ¡°So will I!¡±


    I forcefully changed the subject and reminded him that there were others who were still sick.


    In fact, they may be weakening as we speak, and so it was best to do things quickly.


    Once Mr. Hannes stood up to go, Rosalie, and Rai¡¯s parents also offered to help.


    Rai saw this and also wanted to help.


    As people in their vige were suffering, they wanted to do something about it as soon as possible.


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Sorry to make you wait, Leo. But you were scaring Rai.¡±


    ¡°Wuff, wuff.¡±


    ¡°Thank you for watching her, Phillip.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. Leo is always very quiet. We just waited leisurely.¡±


    I left Mr. Hannes and the others, and left Rai¡¯s house and returned to where Phillip and Leo were waiting.


    It wasn¡¯t just that Rai was scared, but Leo wouldn¡¯t have fitted in their house, so it was good that she waited here.


    I apologized to Leo as I petted her.


    And while I thanked Philip, he insisted that Leo was well-behaved, and he didn¡¯t have to do anything at all.

 Chapter 167

    Chapter 167


    The Ramogi was Distributed Throughout the Vige


    ¡°So, what happened to the sick parents?¡±


    ¡°The Ramogi medicine took effect as soon as they drank it. They are now feeling better, and went with Mr. Hannes in order to help distribute the medicine throughout the vige.¡±


    ¡°Your medicine really is impressive, Mr. Takumi. Bed-ridden one moment, and walking around the next.¡±


    ¡°Apparently, his parents hadn¡¯t been sick for all that long. So I suppose they still had some energy left in them.¡±


    When we had treated the children at the orphanage, there were some who could immediately go out and y with Leo and Tilura in the garden. But there were others who had to stay in bed and continue to sleep.


    ording to Ms. Anna, those were the children who had been sick for longer, while the children who went outside had only been sick for a short while.


    Besides, they were children, and each was different¡­ But the Ramogi wasn¡¯t going to recover any energy that was lost, even if you were no longer sick, and so you would need time to reset. Well, that was true of any illness, really.


    ¡°I hope that the vige can return to its previous, lively state now.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. I¡¯m just happy that my medicine was able to help this vige. There is something very sad about a vige that is quiet, where no one walks outside.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Mr. Hannes and the others were making the vigers drink the medicine now.


    And I could hear voicesing from various houses as I talked with Phillip.


    Leo nodded as if agreeing with us.


    ¡°Thank you so much. Our vige is saved because of you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    After we had waited by the entrance for some time, Mr. Hannes returned and invited us to his house.


    Apparently, there had been enough Ramogi to go around.


    ¡­I had made a little extra in order to kill the time, but there was no need for it now.


    Well, I could just take it back with me and give it to Mr. Kalis, so it wouldn¡¯t be wasted.


    In any case, as Leo could not fit in Mr. Hannes¡¯ house, she waited outside and yed with Rosalie.


    While Rai had been scared at first, seeing how Rosalie and Leo yed seemed to have helped him see that it was alright.


    Right now, Leo was probably carrying some of the recovered children and ying.


    I had asked Phillip to watch over them.


    Mr. Hannes had exined to the vigers about Leo as he went around with the medicine, and so though they were a little scared, they all expected to see a great Silver Wolf when leaving their houses. And so most of them seemed to wee Leo.


    I was just d that Leo wasn¡¯t feared.


    ¡°¡­While it is not much¡­here is the payment for the Ramogi.¡±


    As I sat at a table in his house, Mr. Hannes took out a leather bag and handed it to me.


    It was payment for the Ramogi that was given to the vigers.


    ¡°As so many were sick for so long¡­we were not able to prepare as much¡­¡±


    ¡°I didn¡¯t bring the Ramogi so that I could get paid. Please use this money for the vige.¡±


    In my previous world, I had worked for money alone. And I didn¡¯t want to do that here.


    In fact, in the end, it felt like I was just working in order to work. A rather senseless situation¡­


    I had a ce to live, with the mansion, and was being paid more than I needed by Sebastian¡­or rather, the duke.


    And so I did not mind if I wasn¡¯t paid for the Ramogi.


    Besides, this was a vige filled with people who had not been able to work. There were surely better ways to use the money for them.


    ¡°However¡­ We owe a great debt to the duke¡­ And you came all of the way here¡­ We cannot let you leave empty-handed¡­¡±


    Mr. Hannes seemed like he felt really bad about not being able to pay me.


    I wished he wouldn¡¯t think about it so much.


    ¡°¡­I see¡­ Well, I wouldn¡¯t refuse a delicious meal. Also, since it is quitete, I would also like a ce to sleep. I¡¯m not really fond of sleeping outside.¡±


    ¡°If that is what you want, we very much intended on providing it, in addition to the payment¡­¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. That is all I need. I don¡¯t want to be the person who just helps people for money. Also¡­as you might have guessed, Leo eats a lot. So preparing food for us may not be as simple as it sounds.¡±


    ¡°Well, it is clear that you are not a greedy person¡­that is quite wonderful. I am impressed. In that case, the vige will work together in order to prepare a satisfying meal for you!¡±


    The sun had already set, and it waspletely dark outside.


    As Leo had not eaten since lunch time, she would be quite hungry now.


    And I was just d that we didn¡¯t have to sleep outside tonight.


    Seeing the cheerful faces of the vigers was enough of a reward for me¡­ I thought this, but did not say it out loud.


    ¡­It sounded embarrassing, like I was showing off.


    ¡°Heeey! All of you! We must prepare a feast! Today, we will show our gratitude to Mr. Takumi and Leo!¡±


    ¡°Aye!¡±


    With much emotion, Mr. Hannes had stood up from his seat and gone outside.


    And then he shouted so that all of the vigers could hear him.


    A feast¡­ They really didn¡¯t have to do that much¡­ I just wanted a hearty meal for the both of us¡­ Ah, and Phillip, of course.


    I could hear shouts of agreement throughout the vige, and things became quite morous.


    ¡­It sounded like they were going to prepare for a festival.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, pleasee this way. And you too¡­Leo.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Nearly an hourter, tables and chairs were set out in the center of the vige, and I had been led to my seat.


    Leo was next to me, and sat politely.


    Mr. Hannes and the others then set down numerous tes onto our table.


    In front of Leo was a great quantity of sausages and milk, which I had asked them to prepare.


    ¡­ Leo was one thing, but I wasn¡¯t sure that I would be able to eat so much.

 Chapter 168

    Chapter 168


    I Drank Some Delicious Wine


    ¡°Please try this as well. We are very proud of the wine we make here.¡±


    ¡°¡­Ah¡­I see¡­ Is that red wine?¡±


    Mr. Hannes had brought over a barrel of wine.


    It was filled with a red liquid, and the scent of alcohol and grapes filled the air.


    This was my first time seeing any alcoholic drink in this world. And apparently, wine was the mostmon kind here.


    ¡°This wine was made in this vige. It is regarded as quite a speciality in the duke¡¯s territory.¡±


    ¡°A speciality¡­¡±


    Now that I thought about it, I had heard that their business involved the sales of all kinds of goods outside of herbs, but I didn¡¯t know what exactly.


    The barrel that Mr. Hannes brought was nearly as big as a person, and it was quite full.


    While they probably had other produce, I suppose this wine helped support the vige.


    Perhaps that was also part of the reason that Sebastian and Ms. ire wanted to help them. Ms. ire had gone as far as consulting me on what could be done.


    This ce was actually quite important.


    ¡­Or maybe I was just overthinking it. And it was simply the duke¡¯s way of doing things. Helping those in need.


    ¡°There is a forest near the vige. We cut down the oaks there and make these barrels.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    When I was running through the forest with Leo, I had thought that Range vige must work in forestry, and I guess I wasn¡¯t too far off¡­


    As there was good quality wood nearby, they cut the trees down and made barrels. And with those barrels, they stored the wine that became a source of ie.


    ¡°But what about the fruits you use to make the wine? I didn¡¯t see any vineyards on my way here¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, the grapes. Theye in from a different ce that is a short distance away.¡±


    So this world had the same fruit with the same name.


    I had said ¡®fruit¡¯ just in case they were called something else, but was d that it was the same.


    Well, I didn¡¯t know if it was exactly the same¡­ After all, Loe and Ramogi looked simr to nts from my previous world, but had slightly different names. So perhaps this one had the same name but looked different.


    ¡°So they are not close by. In that case, it must have been difficult when everyone was sick, and could not go there?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ And since it costs money to acquire the grapes, we have to produce wine or the vige will not be able to survive. However, grapes cannot grow on our soil¡­ But thanks to you, Mr. Takumi, we¡¯ll be able to produce wine again.¡±


    Was it the weather or the soil? I didn¡¯t know what the answer was, but grapes could not be grown here¡­ In that case, they would have no choice but to buy them from elsewhere.


    It seemed like a rather costly thing to do, but if they had no other way to support themselves, then they would have to rely on that.


    Besides, there was a vast forest nearby, so they wouldn¡¯t have to worry about running out of trees.


    Perhaps it was because they lived close to the forest and were good with processing wood, that they started earning a living this way¡­ But I didn¡¯t know anything about running a business on this scale, so I had no idea.


    ¡­They probably made barrels for other purposes as well¡­like for carrying things on carriages.


    ¡°Now, that is quite enough talk. Tonight, you must enjoy the feast, Mr. Takumi. Please drink up.¡±


    ¡°You really didn¡¯t have to do this much¡­ But I thank you.¡±


    As I was going to return to the mansion tomorrow, all I wanted was a meal and a ce to sleep¡­but seeing how all the vigers around me now were healthy and celebrating, I could hardly refuse.


    And so I gratefully epted the food and wine.


    Even though I wasn¡¯t much of a drinker¡­


    ¡°Mmm¡­glug¡­ That¡¯s delicious! Is this really wine!?¡±


    ¡°So it was to your liking?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I haven¡¯t drunk much wine before¡­ But it¡¯s certainly the best that I¡¯ve ever had!¡±


    As they did not have wine sses, I was drinking out of a wooden cup. But as soon as it went in my mouth, the sweetness spread over my tongue.


    It was quite the shock. But then again, I¡¯ve only ever had the cheap wine they sold at convenience stores.


    Though it was very sweet, there was a mild sourness as well. There was a beautiful scent, and the aftertaste was refreshing¡­


    I didn¡¯t know how to describe the vor of wine, but couldn¡¯t help but think of different random words in my head.


    It was not only the best wine, but the best alcoholic drink I had ever had.


    ¡°I¡¯m d to hear that you like it. We have a lot more, so please drink to your heart¡¯s content.¡±


    ¡°Thank you!¡±


    I couldn¡¯t help shouting with gratitude. That was how much of an impact the wine had on me.


    And I had only drank it because he rmended it¡­


    But this wine seemed to have low alcohol content, and so I didn¡¯t get as drunk as I thought I would while I ate.


    Next to me, Leo was eagerly eating her sausages.


    ¡°The food is really delicious¡­ It goes well with the wine.¡±


    ¡°Well, since we are known for our wine, we try to make sure that it matches the food.¡±


    I didn¡¯t know if they made the wine to match the food, or the food to match the wine first, but it was the most satisfyingbination.


    ¡°Pharmacist¡­ Thank you so much for helping us.¡±


    As I ate and enjoyed my wine, the vigers would take turns thanking me.


    Leo had no interest in wine, and so after she had her fill of sausages, she drank her milk with a blissful expression.


    Sipping delicious wine while looking at the smiles of the healed vigers¡­ It was quite the luxury.


    ¡°Hey, Mr. Takumi! Are you enjoying yourself?¡±


    ¡°¡­Phillip?¡±


    It was then that Phillip happily called out to me from another table, and then tottered towards me drunkenly.

 Chapter 169

    Chapter 169


    For some reason, I did not get drunk


    ¡°This wine iss soo goood¡­! I might have¡­drunk a little too much¡­ Mr. Takumi, you should drink more!¡±


    ¡°It definitely looks like you¡¯ve drunk too much. And I don¡¯t think it was just a little¡­¡±


    While he could still talk just fine, his movements were wobbly and unstable


    Besides, he usually talked in a very formal manner, but that was no longer the case.


    ¡°Ahaha! I thought being a guard was such a boring job¡­never did I think that something like this would be part of it¡­! Ahh! I have not had wine like this in a loooong timee¡­¡±


    ¡°How much have you had¡­? Don¡¯t you think you should rest a little?¡±


    I was not good at dealing with drunkards.


    I had actually drunk quite a lot of wine already. Either Phillip had drunk considerably more than me, or he was weaker to alcohol¡­


    ¡°I¡¯m fiiine! This wine is known for being strong, so I have to drink it while I can¡­ Besides, it¡¯s too expensive for me to buy¡­¡±


    ¡°The wine is strong¡­?¡±


    I was starting to feel a little worried about Phillip. Also, I was confused by what he said about the wine being strong.


    That suggested it had high alcohol content¡­ As for it being expensive, it made sense, given how delicious it was.


    But if it is strong, you should get drunk from just drinking a little.


    It didn¡¯t matter how resistant you were, it was easier to get drunk the higher the percentage was.


    I didn¡¯t know if Phillip was strong to it or not, but it was strange that I didn¡¯t feel drunk in spite of drinking so much¡­ After all, I usually felt tipsy after having a single beer..


    ¡°Ahahaha! Please enjoy yourself, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    Phillip said with augh as he walked away on shaky feet. And then I looked at the other vigers who were gathered.


    ¡­At least there were other people here, so I didn¡¯t have to worry about Phillip¡­ I just hoped he didn¡¯t do anything strange¡­


    The vigers were all eating and drinking happily around the tables. And at least half of them looked quite red in the face.


    Since they were healed, the redness could not be because they were sick.


    Of course, Leo and the children were not drinking, but most of the adults were.


    ¡°¡­Those who aren¡¯t drunk haven¡¯t been drinking much in the first ce¡­¡±


    I could see that the people who weren¡¯t red had left their cups of wine on the table, and were focusing on eating their food.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, what is the matter?¡±


    ¡°Uh, nothing¡­¡±


    Mr. Hannes was wondering why I was looking at the vigers so intently.


    ¡°I was just thinking about this wine¡­ Is it easy to get drunk with it?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ I have a rather high tolerance myself, so I cannot say¡­ But the vigers here seem to think it is very strong. And since it is so delicious, it is easy to drink too much.¡±


    As expected, the wine made in this vige was strong.


    I didn¡¯t know if that was necessarily considered a good thing¡­but considering its price, it was probably better if you didn¡¯t need to drink too much to feel the effects¡­?


    ¡°Oh, Mr. Takumi. You¡¯ve emptied the barrel already? Should I bring another one?¡±


    ¡°¡­No, I¡¯m fine. I would like some water, please.¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    I was sure that when Mr. Hannes first brought the barrel to this table, that it had been filled.


    Obviously, I had not drunk all of it by myself, but I had definitely gotten a little carried away because it was so good.


    And yet, I felt perfectly fine.


    ¡­Why was that¡­?


    ¡°It¡¯s strange¡­ I was never this strong with alcohol before¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    As I muttered to myself, Leo, who looked a little tired after eating so much, tilted her head with a puzzled expression.


    Next to her, a few children hade to y, and they were currently petting her long, fluffy fur.


    Leo wagged her tail to keep them amused¡­ That was very clever of her¡­


    ¡°Leo. I don¡¯t feel drunk for some reason¡­ Do you know why?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­Wuff?¡±


    I couldn¡¯t help but ask her. Of course, she did not know the reason.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, I¡¯ve brought you some water.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    Leo only tilted her head, and so I turned away and drank the water that Mr. Hannes had brought.


    ¡­Perhaps my body had changed aftering to this world¡­? But aside from this one thing, I had not really felt any other differences¡­ Except being able to use the Gift, that is¡­


    Still, for me, being drunk had usually been an¡­unpleasant sensation, and so I didn¡¯t actually mind it¡­


    If I¡¯m not going to get drunk, perhaps I can continue to drink more wine¡­? I thought of such things, but held back and just drank water as the feast continued until midnight.


    ¡­As Leo could not enter the house, she slept in the stables with the horses that Philip and Mr. Hannes rode on¡­ I should hurry up and sleep as well¡­ Even if I don¡¯t have a hangover, I will still be tired from ack of sleep¡­


    ¡°Now that I think about it, where did that drunkard, Phillip go off to?¡±


    After the feast, I had gone to bedroom that Mr. Hannes had prepared for me in his house. And that was when I remembered Phillip.


    He did not seem stable on his feet, and I was worried that he might get lost somewhere.


    What if he woke up in someone else¡¯s house¡­ I hoped that would not happen¡­


    ¡°What if he woke up with some woman he doesn¡¯t even know¡­ The maids back at the mansion will hate him when they find out.¡±


    I thought to myself as I looked out the window. The sky was starting to turn a little pale as Iy down to sleep.


    I would have to get up soon, but I would sleep while I could¡­

 Chapter 170

    Chapter 170


    I Almost Forgot Leo¡¯s Breakfast


    ¡°Good morning. Breakfast has been prepared.¡±


    ¡°Good morning. Thank you.¡±


    The next day, after waking up a littlete, I quickly washed up and left the room I had slept in.


    As the chief, Mr. Hannes¡¯s house was a littlerger than anyone else¡¯s, and so he had a spare room.


    He did have a married son¡­Rosalie¡¯s parents, but they lived somewhere else, and so it was currently just Mr. Hannes and his wife who lived here.


    Rosalie had left the vige with Mr. Hannes because she wanted to help her sick parents.


    ¡°This is delicious.¡±


    ¡°I am sure it is quite poorpared to what you eat at the duke¡¯s mansion¡­¡±


    ¡°No, not at all. It is just as good as the food over there.¡±


    I was in the dining room and eating the breakfast that his wife had prepared.


    While the food didn¡¯t look as fancy as what we were served at the mansion, the taste itself was excellent.


    I especially enjoyed the hot vegetable soup. It wasforting to have after staying up sote the previous night.


    ¡°Good morning. You¡¯re up early.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Hannes. Good morning. I actually just woke up, since I went to bed quitete¡­¡±


    As I was eating my breakfast, Mr. Hannes came out from a different room.


    The sky was starting to get bright when I went to bed, so I only slept for a few hours. That being said, it was already midday, so it was in no way an early rise.


    ¡­But then again, Mr. Hannes and the vigers stayed up just aste, so I suppose I was earlypared to them.


    ¡°Thank you¡­the food was delicious.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. I just wish we could have served something better¡­¡±


    After I finished eating, I thanked his wife once again.


    While she was very modest, it really had been a good meal, and I was satisfied.


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Leo?¡±


    I heard Leo barking outside, and so I went out of the house. Leo was sitting there and wagging her tail.


    ¡°Good morning, Leo. Did you sleep well?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    I petted Leo as part of our morning greeting.


    Leo nodded and continued to wag her tail¡­ I guess she did sleep well with the horses.


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Hmm? What is it?¡±


    As I petted her, Leo moved her nose close to me and sniffed.


    And then she started to bark usingly.


    What was it now¡­?


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff. ¡­Kuuuun.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­I see. You want breakfast¡­ Sorry¡­¡±


    Apparently, she had smelled the food, and was protesting the fact that I had eaten without her.


    As Leo had slept in the stable, she would not have eaten breakfast yet.


    It wasn¡¯t as if she could eat hay¡­


    ¡°Sorry, Mr. Hannes. Do you have anything that I could give to Leo for breakfast?¡±


    ¡°Oh, I didn¡¯t realize¡­ I¡¯m very sorry, good Leo. I will prepare something at once¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    From the door, I called to Mr. Hannes.


    After hearing about the food, Mr. Hannes came out¡­and apologized to Leo with a bow.


    Leo nodded as if to say¡­I¡¯ll leave it to you then.


    ¡°Hey, Leo. He¡¯s being very kind to provide food. So you shouldn¡¯t act too self-important. You need to say thank you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Wuff. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Good Leo¡­ You do not need to bow to me!¡±


    After admonishing her for getting carried away, Leo looked apologetic and bowed to Mr. Hannes, and then barked to say ¡®thank you.¡¯


    Mr. Hannes was very rmed by this reaction, but I didn¡¯t want Leo to make a habit out of not thanking people.


    ¡°I¡¯m afraid that it¡¯s yesterday¡¯s leftovers¡­but here.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Now, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°She really does listen to what you say, Mr. Takumi. I didn¡¯t really believe my husband¡¯s words until now¡­¡±


    ¡°Leo is very smart. She doesn¡¯t attack people, and likes to y with children.¡±


    Mr. Hannes¡¯s wife had brought out some leftover sausages that she heated up.


    As it wasn¡¯t as much as yesterday, some bread had been added.


    Leo barked gratefully and then began to eat ravenously. Mr. Hannes and his wife watched with interest.


    She admitted that she did not believe her husband when he told her about an obedient Silver Fenrir, but she believed it now.


    Hardly anyone was afraid when they saw Leo here. It really was a nice vige.


    ¡°Chief! Pleasee over here!¡±


    ¡°Hmm? What is it?¡±


    ¡°Uh, it¡¯s the person who apanied the pharmacist yesterday¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­You mean Phillip?¡±


    ¡°Ah, pharmacist¡­perfect. Can youe with us?¡±


    ¡°Ha¡­¡±


    As I was watching Leo eat her sausages, one of the men from the vige came running while calling out to Mr. Hannes.


    And it was while they talked that I realized he was talking about Phillip.


    Apparently, something had happened to him.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, but could you watch Leo? She can y with the children if theye by.¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course. I¡¯m sure that Rosalie will wake up soon. And she will keep Leopany.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Leo, wait here for a while.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Guff.¡±


    And so I left Leo at the house, and went with the viger to see Phillip.


    Leo was still eating, and so merely nodded her head in acknowledgement.


    That wasn¡¯t very polite¡­ But I suppose it was fine¡­


    Still, what had happened to Phillip¡­?


    ¡­He seemed quite drunk yesterday. Had he caused some kind of trouble?

 Chapter 171

    Chapter 171


    Phillip Was a Sleeping Drunk


    ¡°Right this way, pharmacist.¡±


    ¡°What is this?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s where we store the wine that¡¯s made in the vige.¡±


    I had been led to a stone building that was situated near the south rim of the vige.


    There, unlike the rest of the houses, which were made of wood, was a stone storage house for wine.


    ¡­Now that I thought about it¡­I had once heard that storing wine in stone buildings helped with the scent, and gave it depth and raised the alcohol content¡­ Well, something like that.


    So perhaps this stone building was part of the reason that the wine I drankst night was so good.


    ¡°¡­Hmm¡­ After you.¡±


    ¡°Very well. ¡­Uh, Phillip?¡±


    The viger opened the heavy door and told me to go inside, and so I did.


    The smell of good wine filled the air. And it was so strong that I could feel the alcohol.


    ¡­Some people might even get drunk just by being here.


    And that¡¯s when I saw him. Phllip was holding what looked like a ss sphere as hey on the ground.


    ¡°¡­Is he asleep?¡±


    ¡°It looks like it.¡±


    ¡°Now that I am finally well again, I was looking forward to getting back to work¡­and then I found him here like this¡­ But I didn¡¯t know what to do¡­and so I called for the chief.¡±


    ¡°I see. I should be apologizing to you then. This ce must be very important¡­¡±


    ¡°No, not at all. It was a wonderful feast. And it is not as if he has done anything terrible.¡±


    It seemed like Phillip was just sleeping on the ground, and I could hear his regr breathing.


    The viger hade here, hoping to get back to work, but found him like this. And not knowing what to do, had gone to call Mr. Hannes.


    Well, he was from the duke¡¯s house, so perhaps that was why he hesitated.


    Still, Phillip¡­ I¡¯m surprised he didn¡¯t catch a cold, sleeping out here¡­


    As it was a ce to store wine, it was much chillier than it was outside.


    And he was sleeping on the ground, which would be especially cool.


    In any case, this was an important ce for the vige, and so as forgiving as Mr. Hannes and the others might be, it was not good that he entered without permission.


    ¡°¡­Phillip, wake up! You cannot sleep here!¡±


    ¡°¡­Mmm¡­aahh¡­¡±


    As he sleptfortably with reddened cheeks, I approached him and pped his cheeks.


    Phillip quickly opened his eyes and let out azy murmur as he slowly sat up.


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi¡­? Where am I¡­?¡±


    ¡°This is where they store the wine. They won¡¯t be able to work if you sleep here. Now, get up.¡±


    ¡°¡­Store¡­ahh¡­so that¡¯s why it is so cold¡­cough! Cough!¡±


    He finally understood what had happened, and then tried to get up to his feet. That¡¯s when he erupted into a fit of coughing.


    ¡­So he really had caught a cold then?


    ¡°Phillip?¡±


    ¡°Ahhh¡­ My head hurts¡­ And I feel so heavy¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Are you¡­feeling ill?¡±


    I peered into Phillip¡¯s face, which was quite red, as he stood up shakily.


    He seemed a little more stable than he wasst night, but he was sluggish and swayed.


    Could it be that his face was red due to being sick, and not because of the alcohol¡­?


    ¡°This is not good. We should take him to the house at once!¡±


    ¡°Very well.¡±


    ¡°I will help you!¡±


    Mr. Hannes had been watching, but he now stood next to Phillip and supported him. He also suggested that we carry him to the house.


    The viger helped us, and like that, we carried Phillip away.


    As Phillip seemed like his legs were weak, he could not stand well, and so we had to support him until we reached the house.


    ¡°By the looks of it, this is the same illness that overtook the vige¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°Cough! Cough!¡±


    We took him to the room I had slept in, andid him down on the bed.


    Mr. Hannes ced a hand on Phillip¡¯s forehead and after some inspection, said that he believed it was the same illness.


    Indeed, he seemed to have a fever, and his face was red. He was also coughing, just like the children at the orphanage and Rai¡¯s parents.


    ¡­It was because he had to sleep in such a ce¡­


    ¡°Hah¡­ It cannot be helped. Can I ask you to prepare some water?¡±


    ¡°Of course. But, what are you going to do?¡±


    I sighed and asked Mr. Hannes for some water.


    Mr. Hannes looked very puzzled, as he had no idea what I needed it for.


    ¡°Well, if it¡¯s the same illness, then Ramogi should heal him. So he needs to drink it.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes, but we used up all of the Ramogi yesterday. There is none left¡­¡±


    ¡°I had a little more prepared while you were busy. Just in case it wasn¡¯t enough.¡±


    ¡°But¡­how did you do that¡­?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s not important. We need to treat Phillip first. If we do not act quickly, then someone else might get sick next.¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well. I will bring it right away.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. ¡­Now¡­¡±


    If it was anything like the cold that I knew, you would build up antibodies after getting sick once, and so you would be less likely to catch it¡­ But I wasn¡¯t really sure if things worked like that here, so it was better to treat him as soon as possible.


    After Mr. Hannes left the room, I looked through my things and took out the Ramogi that I had prepared.


    As it was just the nt, I ced it on my hand and activated the Gift.


    It was then dried and turned to powder.


    ¡°¡­It gets easier every time¡­ Hmm?¡±


    Just as I was musing over my Gift, Phillip began to move on the bed. And then the ss ball in his hand fell to the floor.


    He had been holding that ever since we found him sleeping in the wine storage house¡­

 Chapter 172

    Chapter 172


    I Asked About the Strange ss Sphere


    ¡°I¡¯ll put it here for now.¡±


    ¡°Here is the water.¡±


    I picked up the ss sphere from the floor and put it down on the table next to the bed.


    It was then that Mr. Hannes came with a wooden bowl of water.


    ¡°Cough! Cough! Cough!¡±


    ¡°Drink it carefully and don¡¯t spit any of it out.¡±


    ¡°¡­Cough! ¡­Ah¡­ Glug.¡±


    As Phillip coughed violently, Mr. Hannes helped him sit up, and I made him drink the water with Ramogi.


    Phillip somehow managed to drink all of it.


    Now, he should recover soon.


    ¡°Oh? What is that¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, it was what Phillip was holding. I put it over there so it wouldn¡¯t roll away.¡±


    Now that Phillip had finished drinking, it was just a matter of waiting for it to take effect. That was when Mr. Hannes noticed the sphere on the table.


    ¡°So he brought it all of the way here.¡±


    ¡°But what is it?¡±


    He had been clutching it preciously, even when sleeping.


    It wasn¡¯t as perfectly round as the sphere I had seen with Ms. Isab in Ractos, but it was still round enough to roll if there was nothing in its path.


    ¡°That was brought a short while ago by a merchant. He said that it would help improve the taste of the wine if we put it in the storage house.¡±


    ¡°Improve the taste¡­¡±


    Would such a thing really work¡­?


    I had never heard of anything like that in Japan¡­ But perhaps this thing was magical and had special effects.


    ¡­Though, I didn¡¯t feel anything from it¡­


    After I had started to practice magic with Sebastian, I was able to detect magic energy. Though, only a little.


    And there was something about the ss sphere that felt wrong.


    ¡°I think it was¡­a little over one month ago¡­ It wasn¡¯t the same merchant who we buy grapes from, but a different merchant. And he left this here after the visit.¡±


    ¡°One month¡­¡±


    There was something about it all that made me wonder¡­


    ¡°What else did he do in the vige, aside from giving you that sphere?¡±


    As it bothered me, I asked Mr. Hannes for more details.


    ¡°Apparently, the merchant who usually visited us could note. And he brought the grapes instead.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­and he just left the sphere as well.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    So a different merchant from the usual one came and left that sphere along with the grapes for the wine¡­


    ¡°Now that I think about it, where are these grapes grown?¡±


    When I was at the mansion, wine had not been served even once.


    I didn¡¯t know if Ms. ire or Mr. Ekenhart drank, but it seemed odd that something like wine was not served at all in a noble¡¯s house.


    ¡°Quite far away from here¡­ In thends of the count. We buy them from him and make the wine. Apparently, they do not have enough trees to make the necessary barrels.¡±


    So unlike thesends, the count did not have vast forests.


    Still¡­the count, huh¡­?


    ¡°Is this Count Barsler?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Count Barsler. As he likes wine, in exchange for selling us grapes, we send him our best wine.¡±


    I didn¡¯t know much about nobles in this world, but that name was familiar to me, because I had heard it recently.


    Count Barsler¡­ I did not expect to hear that name here¡­


    Over a month ago¡­wine and grapes¡­the ss sphere¡­that store¡­the same disease that was spreading in Ractos¡­


    While I was no detective, it seemed obvious to me that there was a connection.


    ¡°Do you send any wine to Ractos?¡±


    ¡°Well, it is the closest andrgest town. So, of course, we send it to them. However, we cannot send too much, as much of it goes to the count¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­¡±


    So they did send some to Ractos, but not a lot¡­ In that case, it wasn¡¯t too odd that none was served back at the mansion.


    While it wouldn¡¯t be impossible to acquire, perhaps they didn¡¯t care to go through the trouble.


    They did live much morefortably than most people, but they didn¡¯t seem to care too much about certain luxuries.


    ¡°I¡¯m quite interested in this wine now. After all, it was very delicious. And since this sphere must be returned, perhaps I could take a look at the storage house?¡±


    ¡°Of course, Mr. Takumi. And I am happy that you have taken an interest in our humble vige.¡±


    The whole vige worked together to earn a meager living, so they were happy to have their work praised.


    And while it may seem a little deceitful, I would take advantage of that and inspect the wine¡­


    I didn¡¯t know why, but I felt I might learn something that would connect it to that store.


    ¡°¡­As for Phillip¡­he seems fine now.¡±


    ¡°He is no longer coughing, and is resting peacefully.¡±


    I picked up the ss sphere from the table as I looked at Phillip.


    The Ramogi had been effective, and he was no longer coughing painfully, and his face was not red.


    It would be best to just let him sleep for now.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, but if he wakes up while I¡¯m not here, could you give him the same soup that I had this morning?¡±


    ¡°Yes, very well. We will be preparing lunch soon, so we can have something ready.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    Before heading to the storage house with the sphere and Mr. Hannes, I asked his wife for some soup.


    That soup was hot and would warm him right up. It was the best thing for someone who had drunk so much and was recently ill.


    After all, the Ramogi had no effect on a hangover.


    Well, I wasn¡¯t actually sure that he had one in the first ce.

 Chapter 173

    Chapter 173


    Leo Detected a Strange Presence


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Leo. Have you been ying with the children?¡±


    ¡°¡­Wuff¡­ Woouuu.¡±


    When I stepped out of the house, I saw that a few children had gathered around Leo and were ying.


    Leo noticed me and separated from the children once and walked over.


    However, she suddenly stopped and tilted her head to the side. Then she began to growl suspiciously.


    ¡°What is it, Leo? Did something happen?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff¡­ Wouuu¡­¡±


    Leo continued to stand still and growl towards me.


    What the hell was happening? But she just shook her head and growled again.


    ¡­Maybe it wasn¡¯t me, but what I was holding¡­?


    ¡°This?¡±


    ¡°Wouu! Grau! Grau!¡±


    When I held out the ss sphere in front of me, Leo began to growl even louder.


    Mr. Hannes froze after hearing this.


    Even the children, who had been staring curiously in our direction, were frightened by this sudden change in Leo.


    ¡°¡­I¡¯m sorry, Mr. Hannes. But could you hold this for now?¡±


    ¡°Ye-yes. ¡­Is everything alright?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sure it is. Barking like this doesn¡¯t mean that Leo is going to attack anyone.¡±


    As Mr. Hannes looked at Leo with mounting terror, I handed him the ss sphere. Then I smiled and told him not to worry.


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Now that I was no longer holding the ss sphere, Leo¡¯s expression turned to that of relief.


    So she really had sensed something from that ss sphere.


    ¡°Now, now. You shouldn¡¯t bark so loudly, or you might scare the other people.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    I said to her gently as I petted her to help calm her down.


    Now that Leo understood that the children had been scared, she lowered her head and groaned apologetically.


    ¡°Still, what happened? It¡¯s not like any monster suddenly appeared. Did you sense something in that ss sphere?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff¡­wou.¡±


    I asked, and then Leo nodded once and then began to bark her exnation.


    Hmm¡­ So you do sense something wrong in the ss sphere¡­


    ¡°What does it feel like? Is it simr to the presence of a monster?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wou-wou-wou.¡±


    Leo shook her at this suggestion.


    Uhh¡­ It is like the thing you felt faintly when we first came to this vige¡­?


    But what could that be?


    ¡°Only in this vige?


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wuff-wuff. Wuff-wuff-wuff.¡±


    Hmm¡­ But you don¡¯t feel it in the vige anymore¡­


    But you felt something simr in the town of Ractos¡­ Uh, at the orphanage?


    So she felt the same disagreeable presence at the orphanage¡­ As for what this vige and the orphanage have inmon¡­


    ¡°Could it be¡­the illness¡­?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Leo barked affirmatively.


    So the thing the two ces had inmon was the illness.


    They also both had children, but that couldn¡¯t be the reason that Leo was disturbed.


    After all, Leo liked children, and would not have negative feelings about being around them.


    ¡°In other words, you sense a simr sickly feeling from that ss sphere?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    Leo nodded again.


    ording to Leo, not only was the feeling she had simr¡­but it was stronger in the ss sphere.


    ¡°What does this mean¡­ The same presence from the sphere¡­but stronger¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­What is the matter?¡±


    As I pondered over it, Mr. Hannes asked me what had happened.


    I had such a serious expression, that he had be worried¡­ He probably thought that there was something wrong with Leo.


    ¡°Ah, I¡¯m sorry. No, Leo really is fine now.¡±


    ¡°¡­Is that so? But you looked very concerned about something¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, but it¡¯s not about Leo. Right, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I forced a smile while talking in order to reassure him.


    Leo also nodded so that he would not be afraid.


    However, Leo continued to stare at the ss sphere in his hand¡­ As she sensed something bad from it, she could not ignore it.


    ¡°¡­Everything¡­really is fine then?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Mr. Hannes asked again.


    I suppose it was because he hadn¡¯t really gotten used to Leo yet.


    And unlike the children, he had his position as the vige chief, so he would be more cautious than most.


    And so Leo and I answered again firmly, and he finally sighed with relief.


    ¡°So, if Leo is fine, then what is troubling you now?¡±


    While he was relieved, he was still curious about the other thing.


    ¡°About that¡­ Mr. Hannes, I think that sphere might be dangerous.¡±


    ¡°This thing? But this is supposed to make the wine more delicious¡­¡±


    Mr. Hannes seemed like he still trusted the merchant who had brought it.


    Well, this was the person who sold them grapes. If they didn¡¯t trust each other, then they could not trade.


    ¡°The reason that Leo was acting oddly earlier is because of that sphere. She says that it has a simr presence to the illness that had overtaken this vige¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°This sphere? Surely not¡­¡±


    I exined to Mr. Hannes what Leo had said.


    And then Leo nodded in agreement.


    But as for Mr. Hannes, he looked at the sphere with disbelief.


    ¡°Let me ask you this¡­ The sphere was brought by the merchant a little over a month ago. Now, when did the disease start to spread?¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed, that was when he came¡­ As for when people started to get sick¡­about one month ago. At first it was just one person, who worked in the storage house. And then it spreaded from there¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±

 Chapter 174

    Chapter 174


    I Spected About How the Illness was rted to the ss Sphere


    That store in Ractos was also started about a month ago.


    I didn¡¯t know the precise date, but it was the same time as when this sphere was delivered to this vige.


    From there, they would have prepared by buying all the medicine stock from the other stores, so they would be ready to sell once the illness began to spread.


    That way, they could easily make a profit.


    There was no concept of prevention here. Obviously, there were no masks¡­ If it was contagious like a cold, then it would not take long for it to spread.


    As Range vige was a short distance away, it had taken them longer to go and buy the medicine.


    ¡­My guess was that the neighboring count had nned this. And if this ss sphere was what caused it, then it would connect all of the dots.


    ¡°The ss sphere is the cause¡­in that case¡­but wait¡­ Can a single sphere really do that¡­? In the first ce, it had spread in Ractos much too quickly for it to have started here¡­ Mr. Hannes had only just recently left the vige¡­¡±


    I ignored the others as I was deep in thought.


    I could not understand how the sphere worked, and how the illness spread.


    But then again, this was a world of magic, and so perhaps there was no hope of me understanding it¡­


    ¡°In any case, it shouldn¡¯t have spread that far if it started in Range vige¡­¡±


    The people here had been suffering from the illness.


    So no one could have gone out and made the journey.


    And so how could it have spread to Ractos¡­?


    ¡°Mr. Hannes. Ever since that sphere was ced here, has anyone gone to Ractos? Aside from you and Rosalie, of course.¡±


    I asked Mr. Hannes, who had been staring at me suspiciously while I muttered to myself.


    ¡°To Ractos? Ractos is the town that is closest to us, and so that is where most of our wine goes. And so someone delivers it at least once every five days.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    Could it be that the person was sick, and that was how it spread¡­?


    Hmmm¡­ But could someone who was just there to drop off some wine really be the cause of it spreading through the whole town¡­?


    Wait¡­ But why was the sphere ced in the storage house in the first ce?


    If it was the sphere that made people sick, why not put it somewhere where more people were likely to gather?


    And if you wanted it to spread in Ractos, then you should put it near the za.


    ¡°Hmm¡­I don¡¯t know¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­What is it?¡±


    ¡°No, it¡¯s just the cause of the illness¡­I feel like I should know, but I don¡¯t¡­¡±


    ¡°The cause of the illness?¡±


    ¡°Yes. The ss sphere and the store that you almost bought medicine from¡­ The spread of the illness in Ractos and Range vige¡­ It all happened at the same time. And so it must be connected¡­¡±


    ¡°Surely it cannot¡­¡±


    I tried to think of an exnation¡­ If I could, it would mean that we might be able to do something about the store.


    Evidence. Well, maybe that was asking for too much. But I wanted something.


    Especially since I saw the suffering of the children at the orphanage, as well as Rai¡¯s parents.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­ I¡¯m sorry to have caused you trouble¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, Phillip. How do you feel?¡±


    ¡°Not terrible, thanks to the Ramogi¡­ Well, I have a slight headache¡­¡±


    ¡°A hangover. It¡¯s because you drank so much wine yesterday.¡±


    As I was talking to Mr. Hannes and thinking, Phillip came out of the house.


    He looked a little pale, because of his hangover, but was otherwise fine.


    ¡°Still¡­Mr. Phillip¡­what is that in your hand?¡±


    ¡°Ah, hair of dog, you know? Drinking a little helps cure a hangover.¡±


    Phillip was carrying a cup that was filled with wine.


    Indeed, I had heard about people drinking alcohol in order to alleviate the symptoms of a hangover¡­ But I think it was just that the alcohol numbed your senses so that your head didn¡¯t hurt as much. That was all¡­


    ¡°Ah, Mr. Hannes. Thank you. Your wife¡¯s soup was excellent. But so is this wine.¡±


    ¡°Well, it is something we are proud of. And so I am d to see that you enjoy it.¡±


    Not only did Phillip drink the soup, but he was also starting to drink wine¡­


    Well, it really was delicious¡­


    In fact, Mr. Hannes was so pleased by thisplement, that he hadpletely forgotten about the previous conversation.


    ¡°Wou! Gau!¡±


    ¡°What is it?!¡±


    ¡°Ahhh!¡±


    Phillip had beenughing and was about to take a sip.


    Just then, Leo started to bark at him.


    It was so sudden that Phillip and Mr. Hannes were shocked.


    ¡°What is it, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wou. Wou-wou.¡±


    I petted Leo in order to calm her down, and then I asked her why she had barked.


    She was usually so quiet, and would not bark without reason.


    Phillip had frozen with the cup in his hand. Leo¡¯s eyes remained fixed on it as she exined it to me.


    Uhh¡­ You can faintly sense something in the wine that is like the ss sphere¡­ The smell of disease¡­


    From the wine?


    ¡°The wine¡­ Leo. Are you sure?¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    I asked, and then Leo nodded.


    ¡°¡­Phillip. I don¡¯t think that you should drink that wine.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Leo says that she senses something bad from it¡­¡±


    ¡°Wh-what?¡±


    Mr. Hannes finally shook himself out of the shock of hearing Leo barking.


    ¡­Leo was just trying to help, and she isn¡¯t actually scary at all, Mr. Hannes.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry to trouble you, but could you have several wine barrels brought out from the storage house? There is something I need to confirm.¡±


    ¡°Confirm?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I think your vige¡¯s wine might be very dangerous. I need to be sure.¡±

 Chapter 175

    Chapter 175


    The Wine Was The Cause


    ¡°Our wine is dangerous¡­ I don¡¯t know what you mean, but if that¡¯s what you wish, Mr. Takumi. Very well. I will call the others and have some barrels brought out.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. I¡¯m sorry for the trouble.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, what¡¯s going on? What is wrong with the wine?¡±


    Mr. Hannes was very proud of the wine that his vige produced. And so it could not be pleasant to hear this.


    Still, because it was me who was asking, he agreed, which I was grateful for.


    Phillip was still holding the cup in one hand as he looked at me with a puzzled expression.


    ¡°Phillip. I¡¯m sure you know all about that malicious store in Ractos.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Sebastian has told me a lot¡­ What about it?¡±


    ¡°I believe that they are somehow rted to the illness. And I think I might know how they did it.¡±


    ¡°You do!?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s thanks to Leo. I doubt that humans would have realized on their own.¡±


    Was it just a feeling or perhaps also a smell¡­ But Leo had reacted to the ss sphere as well as the wine.


    And thanks to that, I had been able to connect the dots in my head.


    Now I just needed to wait for Mr. Hannes to bring the wine, and I could be sure.


    It was all thanks to Leo.


    As I waited for Mr. Hannes, I exined to Phillip about the sphere and illness, which also helped me organize my thoughts.


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting.¡±


    While I talked to Phillip and praised Leo, Mr. Hannes came with several other vigers.


    They brought five barrels. Each was being rolled by two or three people.


    As they were high enough to reach a person¡¯s chest, they must weigh hundreds of kilograms if full.


    As carrying them would be difficult, it was best to just roll them.


    ¡°Thank you, Mr. Hannes.¡±


    ¡°So, Mr. Takumi. We brought the barrels. What will you do now?¡±


    ¡°Uhh, I will have Leo smell them.¡±


    ¡°Smell¡­ And what will that tell you?¡±


    ¡°Leo is sensitive to bad smells and presences. So she will know if something is wrong.¡±


    I said, and then Leo walked up to the barrels.


    ¡°Very well. Fetch something to pour the wine¡­¡±


    ¡°Wait a minute. I¡¯ll have Leo smell it like this first. Go on, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Mr. Hannes was going to pour the wine into a cup first, but I stopped him.


    I wasn¡¯t actually sure if the wooden barrels would interfere, but I wanted to know.


    And if she couldn¡¯t do it, then I would have them pour it into a cup.


    ¡°Wou¡­wuff. Wuff. Wuff¡­wuff-wuff.¡±


    Leo obeyed and slowly pushed her nose towards the barrels and started to sniff them.


    The other vigers stepped back and watched so that they wouldn¡¯t get in her way.


    ¡°Grau!!¡±


    After sniffing the first two, Leo approached the third and then barked once.


    It looked like I was right.


    ¡°Leo. What about the other barrels?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Wou. Grau!¡±


    The fourth was fine, but she barked again with the fifth.


    So the third and fifth barrels were suspicious.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wou-grau-grau!¡±


    ¡°Hmm.¡±


    ¡°What did Leo say?¡±


    After sniffing all of them, Leo told me what she had sensed.


    Phillip, who was watching, was very curious about what she had said.


    ¡°Uhh, the third and fifth barrels have the same smell and feel as the sphere and the wine that Phillip is holding. In other words¡­¡±


    ¡°It feels just like the sickness that is spreading in the town¡­?¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s it. Mr. Hannes. Is there something different about those two barrels?¡±


    I told them what Leo had sensed after smelling them.


    My guess had been correct, and the barrels of wine had the smell of disease.


    Well, only two of them¡­ But why¡­?


    ¡°The third and fifth are much younger than the others. The other three were stored near the back and have rested for many years. Much like the ones we served during the feast.¡±


    So the wine I had drunkst night was from the back of the storage house.


    That was why Leo hadn¡¯t reacted to it.


    ¡°Younger wine¡­ And where are those barrels kept?¡±


    ¡°Near the entrance. We keep the older ones near the back. Both the taste and smell change with age¡­ We send both to Ractos as separate products.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ And that sphere was kept near the entrance?¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s right.¡±


    After hearing this, I waspletely convinced of it.


    Mr. Hannes was still holding the ss sphere as he answered.


    ¡°Thank you, Leo. It¡¯s because of you that it all makes sense now.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°But, what does it mean?¡±


    ¡°Won¡¯t you exin it to us, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    As I thanked Leo and petted her, Mr. Hannes and Phillip begged me to exin it to them.


    While many thoughts had gone through my head, I had to exin it to them or they wouldn¡¯t understand.


    ¡°Uhh, well. Some of this is spection, but¡­ I will start with the cause of the illness.¡±


    I moved away from Leo and faced Mr. Hannes and Phillip as I talked.


    ¡°As you well know, Phillip, there is a store in Ractos that is selling diluted medicine and herbs.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°The store that I nearly bought from.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. That store opened in Ractos a little over a month ago.¡±


    ¡°A little over a month¡­¡±


    That was when Mr. Hannes realized that the store had opened at nearly the same time as the merchant had brought him the ss sphere.

 Chapter 176

    Chapter 176


    I Summarized the Spread of the Disease and the Store in Question


    ¡°During the same time that the store opened, an illness began to spread through the town of Ractos. And if I¡¯m not wrong, it was the same time as it spread in this vige as well.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s right.¡±


    To be precise, the store opened close to two month ago, and the illness started to spread about a little over a month ago.


    So they had guessed at the timing and started to buy all the medicine.


    ¡°This malicious store used the spread of the disease, and bought all the stock from other stores so that they could be the only ce that sold them. Not only that, but all of their medicine was increased through diluting it.¡±


    ¡°That is what we know based on Sebastian¡¯s findings, isn¡¯t it?¡±


    ¡°Yes. But how they knew of the right timing¡­ After all, if it didn¡¯t spread, then not many people would buy from them, and they would not have made much of a profit.¡±


    ¡°So even if they had control of the market¡­it would not mean much.¡±


    There was no point if the demand did not increase.


    After all, they paid the same prices as customers for the medicine, not the cost price.


    ¡°And now we must talk about the ss sphere that Mr. Hannes is holding now.¡±


    ¡°This¡­?¡±


    Mr. Hannes¡¯s eyes went down the sphere.


    Phillip and the vigers also looked at it.


    ¡°I don¡¯t understand how it actually works, but¡­ That sphere seems to be transmitting the disease. It is an object meant to spread it.¡±


    ¡°What!¡±


    Upon hearing this, Mr. Hannes gasped and dropped the ss sphere.


    It fell to the ground and rolled towards the wine barrels before stopping.


    ¡°I think it¡¯s fine to touch it. Perhaps it is only effective for things like wine. I don¡¯t think it has a direct effect on people. Otherwise, Leo wouldn¡¯t have let me touch it.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I said to reassure Mr. Hannes, and Leo nodded in agreement.


    And then Mr. Hannes sighed with relief.


    While there was no evidence yet, I did believe that it didn¡¯t work like that¡­ Otherwise, the merchant who brought it would have also be sick.


    That¡¯s why it took some time for the illness to spread through the vige.


    ¡°As for the wine that Leo smelled something bad in¡­ I think they were affected by the sphere, and that¡¯s how the illness spread. You be sick after drinking it¡­¡±


    ¡°So¡­it¡¯s the wine that we made that¡­¡±


    Mr. Hannes was shocked when he heard this.


    The other vigers were the same. They had worked so hard, and were proud of their vige¡¯s wine. And now they had been told that it had yed a role in spreading a disease.


    ¡°Obviously, the merchant who brought the sphere would be working with the people from the store.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s why they knew when it would start spreading¡­¡±


    The wine was always sent to Ractos.


    If they knew it would spread like that, then they could take a risk, and buy all of the medicine in the town.


    There was no doubt in my mind that the grape merchant and the people from the store were working together.


    We already knew that the store was connected to the count, and the merchant with the sphere hade from the count¡¯s territories.


    ¡­But just how much this count was personally involved¡­I did not know¡­


    ¡°So it was our wine¡­ What have we done¡­¡±


    ¡°You are not to me, Mr. Hannes. It was all because of the merchant who tricked you into cing the ss sphere there.¡±


    Mr. Hannes was terribly distressed when he understood that their wine had spread the disease.


    But it wasn¡¯t the making of the wine that was wrong, but the person who tampered with it.


    So there was no need for him to feel that way¡­ But I suppose he could not help it.


    ¡°Phillip. Please put that sphere away safely, so that it does not touch anything else.¡±


    ¡°Very well. But, what are you going to do? Won¡¯t it be better to just destroy it?¡±


    ¡°It will probably be used as evidence. So we cannot destroy it now. Well, it will be something that Sebastian can decide¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, he will be delighted to hear of this.¡±


    ¡°Also, take this with you. Just in case.¡±


    ¡°Ramogi. Very well.¡±


    ¡°You must drink it if you feel the smallest sign of the illness.¡±


    ¡°I understand.¡±


    ¡°Also, don¡¯t drink any of the wine without permission.¡±


    ¡°Ahst night, I was so drunk already, and someone I befriended rmended it to me¡­ But I don¡¯t feel like drinking any more after hearing what you said, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    Considering how drunk Phillip had beenst night, it would not be strange for him to sneak into the wine storage house for a quick taste test.


    And abination of the cold floor and drinking the wine near the entrance had caused him to be sick in the morning.


    Even if one of the vigers had told him to do it, it was not good to drink so much. I would also have to be careful¡­ Though, I hadn¡¯t gotten drunk at all¡­


    ¡°Still, most of it was thanks to Leo, for being able to tell the difference¡­ And Phillip helped as well.¡±


    ¡°I did? Of course, I agree with you about Leo, but¡­I didn¡¯t do¡­¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s thanks to the fact that you fell drunkenly asleep in the storage house, that we found the ss sphere. That¡¯s a big contribution, isn¡¯t it? Though, you must be careful about your drinking.¡±


    ¡°Ahahaha¡­yes, I will.¡±


    Phillip wrapped the ss sphere in a cloth as we talked.


    In fact, had Phillip not found the ss sphere, we might not have figured out the cause of the disease.


    It was then that the depressed-looking Mr. Hannes approached us.


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi¡­ What are we to do now? I never would have thought that our wine would cause such a thing¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Hannes. ¡­Hmm. Yes¡­¡±


    Even if I didn¡¯t me them, it would be difficult for them to not me themselves.


    And so merely offering encouraging words was not enough.


    I would have to think of some way to prevent them from being too hard on themselves.

 Chapter 177

    Chapter 177


    I Asked Leo to Sniff Out the Barrels


    ¡°In that case, please bring the barrels out from the storage. We must find out which of the wines is safe to drink.¡±


    ¡°Ye-yes, you¡¯re right. Very well. I will have all the vigers work together to bring them out.¡±


    ¡°You don¡¯t need to rush too much. Since we have the sphere, you can take your time.¡±


    I said, but the words had little effect on Mr. Hannes and the others.


    Regardless, it was best to have them act now, and so they would have less time to think negative thoughts.


    But it was as if they didn¡¯t hear me¡­and the vigers rushed towards the storage house. Still, Mr. Hannes would be kept busy for now.


    ¡°Leo. Sorry to ask you again¡­but you¡¯re going to have to sniff out the barrels again.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    The smell and presence was very disagreeable to Leo, and so I felt bad for her.


    I didn¡¯t think she cared much about wine, but she had been upset enough to start barking because of the smell.


    Still, she nodded firmly as if to say that I should leave it to her¡­ I really was grateful for that.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, the ss sphere is secure now. ¡­What should I do? Should I report this to Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ I¡¯m not sure¡­¡±


    I would like to inform him as soon as possible.


    He might know what this ss sphere is, and what we should do with it.


    However, even though we knew the cause, there was still a lot that I wanted to do here in this vige¡­


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, sorry to keep you waiting. The rest of the barrels will arrive soon.¡±


    ¡°Good. Please inspect each one with Leo. If she barks or growls, that means the wine is dangerous. Otherwise, they are safe, and can be returned to the storage house.¡±


    ¡°I understand.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m counting on you, Leo. I want you to bark or growl when you find a bad barrel, so that Mr. Hannes and the others will know. You don¡¯t need to do anything to the barrels that are fine.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    As I was wondering what to do with the ss sphere, Mr. Hannes and the other vigers returned with the barrels.


    And I could see other vigers following them from behind¡­ There were so many barrels, I would have to make it up to Leoter.


    And so I left them to deal with the barrels. I had to think about our next move.


    I continued to talk to Phillip as Leo and Mr. Hannes got to work.


    ¡°Once they are finished, we can ride on Leo and return to the mansion.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ve thought of that, but I don¡¯t think that I can return so soon.¡±


    ¡°Why is that?¡±


    ¡°Everyone in this vige drinks that wine. And that¡¯s how it spread¡­ I think it¡¯s likely that people will get sick again¡­¡±


    ¡°Well¡­that is possible¡­¡±


    There were probably people who were already sick, and just hadn¡¯t shown any symptoms yet. It could end up spreading all over again.


    And so I thought that I should make more Ramogi and watch them for a short while.


    If it was simr to a cold, then maybe they would have built up a resistance to it, but I wasn¡¯t sure.


    Besides, there would be some people who hadn¡¯t gotten sick yet, but would soon enough.


    As this was where it all started, I thought it was necessary to see it to the end.


    ¡°Because if they need Ramogi, I will be able to make it quickly.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true. There will be no need to fear the illness if you are here, Mr. Takumi. ¡­However, then word won¡¯t reach Sebastian until muchter¡­¡±


    ¡°And so I have an idea, Phillip.¡±


    ¡°What?¡±


    If I couldn¡¯t go, someone else could go instead.


    But it couldn¡¯t be anyone from here. They were busy with the wine and disease.


    Besides, they weren¡¯t used to riding on Leo. But Phillip was, and he could be trusted.


    ¡°Phillip. What if¡­you were to ride on Leo and return to the mansion instead?¡±


    ¡°¡­On Leo¡­ But, I am a guard. I can¡¯t just leave you here, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    Phillip had actuallye as an escort for Mr. Hannes, but once we arrived at the vige, he became my guard.


    And so for Phillip, it did not seem right for both Leo and him to not be close by my side.


    ¡°I¡¯ll be fine. This is a peaceful vige. I am in no danger of being attacked. Besides, it is for asions like this that I learned to use a sword. And some magic as well.¡±


    Though, the magic was just to buy a little time.


    However, it was better than nothing. Sebastian had told me of the importance of running away. Even if something did happen¡­it didn¡¯t mean that I had to fight.


    But this was a peaceful vige, and so anything like that was very unlikely.


    ¡°Well¡­ It¡¯s true that you will probably be safe here, but¡­¡±


    ¡°So you agree? The people have weed me here, and they have been good to us. I will be fine.¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well. I will go to the mansion and send Leo back to you as soon as I arrive. But please don¡¯t push yourself too hard while you¡¯re here.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    I had managed to convince Phillip.


    Though, he didn¡¯t need to remind me to be careful¡­ I intended to only make what Ramogi that was necessary and at a leisurely pace.


    Now, I just had to wait for Leo to finish sniffing the barrels, and ask her to run back to the mansion.


    ¡­Really, I seemed to rely on her for everything.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Oh, Leo. Are you done? Thank you!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    A few hourster, Leo was finished with the barrels, and she returned to me with a wagging tail as if to make a report.


    I petted the proud Leo on the head, and then fed her some sausages that Mr. Hannes¡¯s wife had prepared.


    As she had worked hard, I had to reward her generously.


    ¡°Thank you. Mr. Takumi and Leo.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Hannes. How many barrels were left?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ About half of them¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±

 Chapter 178

    Chapter 178


    I Watched As Leo and Phillip Returned to the Mansion


    After Leo was finished, they discovered that only half of the wine could be drunk safely.


    Perhaps they should be d that it wasn¡¯t everything, but for such a small vige, this was a great loss.


    Once I return to the mansion, I would like to discuss with the others if there is anything that can be done.


    I couldn¡¯t help but think this as I saw the tired faces of Mr. Hannes in the vigers, who had been pushing the barrels.


    ¡°In any case, make sure that no one goes close to the dangerous barrels. They should be separated so that they are not touched.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I¡¯ll see to it.¡±


    ¡°Leo. I¡¯m sure that you¡¯re tired after all that¡­but could you do one more thing?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff?¡±


    I told them to iste the dangerous barrels, so that no one would drink them by ident.


    Also, I told Leo what I had discussed with Phillip.


    Leo said something about not being that tired, and then she tilted her head curiously¡­ It was almost as if she was eagerly expecting me to make a request¡­ Even her tail was wagging¡­ Did she like it when I asked her to do something?


    ¡°As soon as possible, I want you to carry Phillip and take him back to the mansion.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. ¡­Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Me? I¡¯m going to stay here for a little longer.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll be fine. I said the same thing to Phillip. This is a safe vige where there is no danger of being attacked by anyone. ¡­But if you¡¯re so worried,e back as soon as you can.¡±


    ¡°¡­Wou!¡±


    Leo quickly agreed to going, but was questioning my decision to stay.


    As she seemed worried, I insisted that it was safe. I then joked that she should return as quickly as possible, and she nodded with enthusiasm.


    ¡°¡­Of course, don¡¯t be in such a rush that you shake Phillip off of your back, okay?¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­wuff.¡±


    Leo was so concerned about me that she nearly forgot about Phillip.


    If she ran as fast as she could, no human would be able to stay on¡­


    So it was a good thing that I reminded her.


    ¡­Phillip would likely be injured if he fell.


    ¡°So, Mr. Hannes. I will be staying here for a little longer, if that is all right?¡±


    ¡°If it is you, Mr. Takumi, you may stay for as long as you want. From the illness to discovering the trouble with the sphere¡­you have saved this town. And so you are always wee.¡±


    As I waited for Phillip to prepare his return journey, I told Mr. Hannes my reasons and asked if I could stay.


    I had sort of made up my mind before I even asked him, so it was a good thing he didn¡¯t refuse¡­


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting. Are you ready, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    And then Leoy low so that Phillip could climb onto her back.


    As this was his first time riding her, he seemed a little scared. However, he would likely be fine, as he was used to riding on horses.


    ¡°Phillip. Take this.¡±


    ¡°¡­Ramogi?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Since my return to the mansion will be dyed, it will affect the stock in Ractos. This is just enough for a few days, but it will have to do for now. Also, since you were exposed to the ss sphere, if you see any symptoms¡­¡±


    ¡°Drink the Ramogi¡­ Yes, I understand.¡±


    ¡°Good.¡±


    While Leo was sniffing the barrels, I had used my time to make some extra Ramogi.


    The vigers were all concentrating on the wine, and the children were watching Leo. So I was able to work privately in Mr. Hannes¡¯s house.


    Medicine was important in order to stop the further spreading of the disease.


    While they would run out of the other herbs and medicine, right now, I decided to focus on Ramogi.


    ¡°I¡¯m counting on you, Leo. Always be aware that your rider is secure.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°¡­Thank you, good Leo.¡±


    ¡°Phillip, just tell Leo if she is going too fast. Leo, listen to what he says, all right?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°I understand. I¡¯ll be careful and hold on tight so we can get there as soon as possible.¡±


    Leo nodded reassuringly as she stood up.


    Phillip was more fit than I was, and he was a rider, so perhaps Leo could run faster than she did with me.


    That would mean reaching the mansion a lot earlier¡­ It would be best to give Sebastian and the others the information about the ss sphere and the illness as soon as possible.


    ¡°We¡¯ll go then. Please be careful as well, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I said to Phillip, and then Leo barked once before dashing off.


    ¡°¡­That might be a little too fast¡­ Leo?¡±


    She practically disappeared right in front of us.


    I didn¡¯t know if she was overexcited or just wanted to return quickly¡­ I would have to pray for Phillip¡¯s safety¡­ Well, Leo was surely smart enough to think about him¡­


    ¡°Now, Mr. Hannes.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Please take this, just in case.¡±


    ¡°¡­Ramogi? But everyone is already¡­¡±


    ¡°While you separated the wine barrels, perhaps some people have already drunk it. And there may be people who are already ill but haven¡¯t shown symptoms yet. ¡­I just think you should be careful.¡±


    ¡°Very well. You saved this vige and are a pharmacist who serves the duke. I will not question you.¡±


    That was how Mr. Hannes saw me. The duke¡¯s pharmacist.


    Well, I suppose it wasn¡¯tpletely inurate¡­


    Regardless, I wasn¡¯t going to give him any more details.


    And so I handed Mr. Hannes the Ramogi.


    It wasn¡¯t much, but I could make more if needed.

 Chapter 179

    Chapter 179


    I Thought About the Wine that was to be Destroyed


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right. Mr. Hannes. Is there any ce outside that no one will see you? Also, I would like some clean cloth¡­¡±


    ¡°A ce that is secluded? ¡­Well, you could go behind my house. As it is at the edge of the vige, no one will go there. ¡­But, what are you going to do?¡±


    ¡°Well, since I¡¯m not returning to the duke¡¯s house, I thought I should work a little. I cannot just sit here idly¡­¡±


    ¡°But we really wouldn¡¯t mind if you took things easy¡­ But I see that you are a passionate person. In that case, please feel free to use the space behind my house. I too will make sure that I don¡¯t bother you there. And I¡¯ll bring you the cloth at once.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry to trouble you.¡±


    After mentioning that it was the work rted to the duke, Mr. Hannes assumed it was something that he should not see.


    And since I wanted to keep Weed Cultivation secret, it was good that it was a ce where nobody would go.


    Even though I was here to ensure that everything was well with the town, I did not feel like resting and doing nothing.


    In that case, I might as well make some herbs and medicine to send to Ractoster on.


    Of course, since I had my sword with me, I also meant to continue my training¡­ It was best to do these things when you had time.


    Mr. Hannes was about to leave in order to get the cloth when my stomach suddenly sounded loudly.


    Now that I think about it, I haven¡¯t eaten lunch yet¡­


    ¡°I¡¯ll have something prepared for you first.¡±


    ¡°Thank you¡­¡±


    This happened back at the mansion as well. It was rather embarrassing¡­


    But at least it wasn¡¯t in front of Ms. ire.


    ¡°Please eat. I made this with the other vigers.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    After some time had passed, I was back in the center of the vige, where the feast had been held the previous night. And I started to eat lunch


    ording to Mr. Hannes, unless there was something that kept him away, he would eat his lunch here and watch the vige.


    Lunch¡­ Well, it was actually a littlete now, but I thought that it would be quite nice to eat and watch the people while the sun was still high in the sky.


    It must be something he did because he was the vige chief.


    And now, it seemed to me that the vige had brightened up considerably, now that they were all healed.


    ¡°By the way, Mr. Hannes. Half of the wine can no longer be used¡­ How will that affect the vige¡¯s ie?¡±


    Perhaps it wasn¡¯t something that concerned me. But as I observed the vige, I started to think about how much they must rely on their wine production.


    It was a small vige, and so if half of their wine could no longer be sold, then it must be a great loss?


    ¡°Indeed¡­ If I am being honest, it will be quite severe. And while it won¡¯t be easy for everyone, we will have to live in moderation for some time¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    So it really was a heavy blow for them.


    I didn¡¯t know how the seasons worked in this world, but for a vige of this size, you would have to save up in order to survive during the winter.


    ¡°Hmm¡­¡±


    I ate the food that was made by the vigers as I considered this.


    Losing half of the wine meant they would be in a dangerous position for some time¡­


    And while I was no expert, I doubted that they could make up for the lost wine in just a few months.


    Perhaps it was something that would take years.


    Also, the wine was so delicious. It almost felt like a waste to throw it all away just because it had the scent of disease¡­


    I suppose that was the Japanese side of me talking.


    ¡°The market price for wine¡­no, that might be too expensive¡­perhaps the wholesale price¡­¡±


    ¡°What is it, Mr. Takumi? Is the food not to your liking¡­?¡±


    ¡°No, the food is delicious and quite satisfying. I was just thinking about the wine that is to be disposed of¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh?¡±


    I had been muttering to myself while I ate, and Mr. Hannes had interpreted my scowl as a sign that I was not enjoying the food.


    But it really was every bit as delicious as what we had yesterday, and there was no need to worry.


    Even if it wasn¡¯t anything fancy, there was somethingforting about it. I was just amon person, like them, after all.


    ¡­Indeed, in spite of their uing troubles, they were still serving me such good food. And so I wanted to do what I could.


    ¡°Mr. Hannes. I want to ask you about something¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, what is it?¡±


    ¡°The wine that you can¡¯t use¡­ Could you sell it to me at the wholesale price?¡±


    ¡°What!? You wish to buy that wine!? However¡­ You said that it cannot be drunk, as it will likely make people sick¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, that is true. It cannot be drunk¡­ However, I think I might be able to do something about that.¡±


    For instance, maybe you could kill the pathogenic bacteria by boiling it¡­and then it could be used for something.


    Of course, I didn¡¯t know if there even were pathogenic bacteria in this world. Or if it was fine to boil wine.


    In the first ce, boiling it would get rid of the alcohol content.


    Well, I didn¡¯t know what could be done, it was merely an idea.


    ¡°I¡¯ll have to consult with others before deciding how to use it. I just think that it might be used for something. Of course, I don¡¯t mean to use it to spread the disease even farther. Don¡¯t worry.¡±


    ¡°I trust you, Mr. Takumi. However¡­I cannot sell something that is likely to be thrown away¡­¡±


    Sebastian had so much knowledge, and might be able to think of something.


    And if he couldn¡¯t, perhaps Ms. Helena would know something.


    ¡­And if I still couldn¡¯t find a way, I would have to throw it out.


    I was currently being paid to grow herbs.


    And since I had nothing to spend the money on, surely spending it on something like this¡­ After all, it was for the vige, and so I didn¡¯t see it as a waste.


    Just in case, I had actually brought some money with me at Sebastian¡¯s suggestion.


    ¡­Though, I never thought that I would end up using it.

 Chapter 180

    Chapter 180


    I Purchased the Wine


    ¡°Are you certain¡­?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I am. The wine in this vige is very delicious. Just think of it as my way of thanking you for introducing it to me.¡±


    Mr. Hannes was hesitant, but I could see that he also wanted to agree to it.


    Obviously, the vige would suffer if they had to dispose of all of it, and so if someone wanted to buy it from them, it would be a great help.


    He had to think about the good of his people, which meant that he could not be too reluctant.


    ¡°¡­Thank you. I would be d to sell you the wine. However, I think the price should be lowered even more¡­¡±


    ¡°No, it¡¯s fine. I don¡¯t want to buy it at a discount. It¡¯s not like I¡¯m entering the wine business with this¡­¡±


    ¡°But you¡¯ve already done so much for our vige¡­ I don¡¯t know how we can repay you¡­ But now, we will have enough money to buy grapes from the merchant who is visiting tomorrow.¡±


    Mr. Hannes agreed, and so it was decided that I would buy the wine.


    He was so grateful towards me, that he seemed like he was about to burst into tears. However, what he said immediately after caught my attention.


    ¡°¡­Tommorow? The merchant ising?¡±


    ¡°Yes, ording to the schedule. He visits once every few months to sell us grapes. But without your help, Mr. Takumi, we would not have been able to buy much.¡±


    So if things went ording to schedule, the merchant woulde to the vige to sell them grapes.


    The merchant from the count¡¯s territory¡­


    ¡°Will it be the merchant who gave you the ss sphere?¡±


    ¡°If it is the usual merchant, it will be a different person.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    Had it been the same merchant, we could capture him¡­ I had thought. But apparently, it wasn¡¯t the same person.


    Perhaps that merchant would never return. After all, he had already aplished his goal.


    And the other merchant probably had nothing to do with the matter of the ss sphere¡­ Well, I should still have a talk with him anyway.


    ¡°Would you mind if I spoke with this merchant tomorrow?¡±


    ¡°It is possible, but¡­ Is there something you are worried about?¡±


    ¡°No, but I do have some questions, like how involved he is with the merchant who brought the sphere.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ As this persones regrly, I do hope he had nothing to do with it¡­¡±


    For Mr. Hannes, this person was someone they did business with regrly.


    And so they were well acquainted. He would not want to think that the person had wanted to hurt the vige.


    I didn¡¯t know what the truth was, but surely he could tell me something about the merchant who brought the sphere.


    After all, that merchant had visited as a recement.


    ¡°Alright, I¡¯ll start making the herbs then.¡±


    After thete lunch, I went to the back of Mr. Hannes¡¯s house and got to work.


    Mr. Hannes had gone off to check the barrels and calcte the price.


    He also gave me cloth to wrap up the herbs, so I was fully prepared.


    ¡°¡­That¡¯s good¡­but now that I think about it, I have to do it all by myself now¡­.¡±


    Obviously, as I wasn¡¯t in the mansion, there was no one to help me.


    I had to pick all of the herbs and wrap them up after dividing them.


    It was simple enough if I was only making Ramogi, but if there was a wide variety of herbs, it could take quite some time.


    ¡­Well, it¡¯s not like Icked that at all, so I would do it at a leisurely pace.


    ¡°¡­Still, while I thought that I was used to working quietly alone¡­it does feel a little sad.¡±


    Back at the mansion, Ms. ire, Ms. Lyra, Tilura and Milina were often there as well.


    Sebastian as well¡­ I then realized that I was rarely alone sinceing to this world.


    It wasn¡¯t just the people here, but Leo was always there.


    And since I took Leo¡¯s presence for granted, her absence was felt even stronger. Like something important was missing.


    And so I was reminded to be grateful to have people close by as I continued on with my work.


    ¡­I told myself that this wasn¡¯t to distract me or escape reality.


    ¡°There you are, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°¡­Ha¡­phew¡­Mr. Hannes?¡±


    After making some herbs, I started to jog around the vige to keep my body from getting sluggish. That was when Mr. Hannes called out to me.


    I caught my breath and then answered.


    ¡°What are you doing here?¡±


    ¡°¡­Ha¡­hah¡­ Oh, I was just running for a bit of exercise.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    We were currently on the side of the vige that was opposite of Mr. Hannes¡¯s house.


    Close to where the barrels of bad wine were being kept.


    I hadn¡¯t been thinking of which direction I was headed in, and had just ended up here by ident.


    Perhaps Mr. Hannes had been looking for me¡­ I felt a little bad about it.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, I have finished making the calctions for the barrels.¡±


    ¡°How much will it cost me?¡±


    ¡°¡­So you haven¡¯t changed your mind?¡±


    Mr. Hannes seemed like he still didn¡¯t quite believe me.


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. I just want to help so you can continue to make your delicious wine.¡±


    ¡°Very well. Thank you so much. As for the price¡­¡±


    And so Mr. Hannes told me the wholesale price of the wine.


    As there were a lot of barrels, I expected the price to be quite high. But it was less than I thought.


    But then again, it was also possible that Mr. Hannes had added a discount and not said anything¡­


    Regardless, I was just relieved that I had brought enough money with me.


    To think that I was carrying enough money to buy half of a vige¡¯s wine¡­ It was hard to imagine, and so different to how things used to be for me.


    It was because the duke¡¯s family paid me well, unlike thepany I used to work at.


    And I was also grateful for Weed Cultivation, which allowed me to easily prepare herbs that had such high value.

 Chapter 181

    Chapter 181


    I Hadn¡¯t Thought About How To Transport The Wine


    In order to pay Mr. Hannes for the wine, I stopped my training and returned to the room where my things were kept.


    Then I took out the gold and silver and handed it to Mr. Hannes.


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    ¡°Really, you don¡¯t have to do so much for this vige¡­but thank you.¡±


    Said Mr. Hannes and his wife gratefully.


    ¡°Still, how will you carry all of that wine with you?¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­¡±


    I had been thinking so much about buying the barrels of wine, but had not considered how I would carry them¡­


    Each barrel weighed a few hundred kilograms, and so it was not something I could carry alone.


    Not only that, but there were over twenty of them¡­ Leo wouldn¡¯t be able to carry them either¡­so I wasn¡¯t sure what to do¡­


    ¡°I hadn¡¯t thought about that¡­ But yes, they will need to be carried¡­¡±


    ¡°You saw through the sphere and the illness, but are still forgetful of other things¡­¡±


    Mr. Hannes looked stunned at myck of foresight.


    Well, it wasn¡¯t like I had done any detective work. It was all because of Leo¡­ It had nothing to do with my own intelligence.


    In any case¡­I had to think of a way to carry them back. If only I had told Phillip to ask Sebastian if there was a way¡­


    However, I had made the decision after they left, so it could not be helped.


    ¡°What should I do¡­¡±


    This was not a problem where Weed Cultivation would help me.


    While I did have herbs that raised one¡¯s physical ability, that would still not allow you to carry a barrel that was hundreds of kilos¡­


    ¡°We do have some wagons in this vige¡­ But it won¡¯t be enough to carry all of them at once¡­¡±


    Mr. Hannes said, after thinking it over.


    As they delivered the wine barrels to Ractos, of course, they would have wagons.


    However, they did not have enough to deliver them all at once.


    And so it would likely be two or three¡­maybe four or five barrels at a time.


    ¡°The merchant is arriving tomorrow, yes? The one from the count¡¯s territories¡­how will the wine be delivered to them?¡±


    The count¡¯s territory was even farther than Ractos.


    Not only that, but since they did not make the journey often, they would have to carry a lot each time.


    In that case, I wanted to know how they did it.


    ¡°The merchantes to sell us grapes. And so they have several wagons, much like a caravan. The grapes are unloaded here, and they take the wine barrels instead.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    Well, that was the natural way to do things.


    I didn¡¯t know why I expected some other special method.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, but I¡¯ll think of a way to carry them before I leave this vige. Even if it means taking them a little at a time.¡±


    ¡°I understand. It is no problem for us at all.¡±


    Mr. Hannes was not against the idea of carrying them one by one. However, I wanted to remove them from the vige as soon as possible.


    It wasn¡¯t like they were being careless, but I still worried that someone might drink it by ident.


    The wine I had bought made people sick.


    And so if someone drank and became ill, then I would feel somewhat responsible.


    And that was not why I had bought the wine.


    ¡°Well, I¡¯m going to train a little and then go to sleep.¡±


    ¡°Yes, good night.¡±


    After dinner, I said good night to Mr. Hannes, who was going to bed, and then I went out into the back garden.


    While I needed to think of a way to carry the barrels, I also couldn¡¯t forget my training.


    Because you never know what might happen.


    ¡°Phew¡­ Too bad there isn¡¯t a bathtub here¡­¡±


    I returned to my room and wiped myself with a towel and some hot water.


    The chief¡¯s house might have been bigger than the others, but unlike a nobleman¡¯s house, it did not have a bathing room.


    Well, perhaps that was just considered normal in this world.


    After wiping myself, I settled down quietly in my bed in order to sleep.


    ¡°¡­Now that I think about it, I¡¯ve never slept alone since rescuing Leo.¡±


    She had been so weak on that first day, and so I ended up staying up the whole night and watching her. It was all a nostalgic memory now.


    And ever since then, Leo had always slept close to my bed at night.


    She was still a maltese back then. So she would sometimes crawl under my nket. Or I would wake up and see her resting on my stomach.


    If she did that now, I would be crushed¡­


    And ever sinceing to this world, we were always together.


    We were in the same room at the mansion, and whether we visited a vige or a forest, we stuck together.


    And even during those nights where she couldn¡¯t fit inside the tent, there was still Sebastian and the others.


    And so this was the first time in a few years where I really slept alone.


    ¡°Of course, I¡¯m too old to say that I feel lonely¡­ But still¡­¡±


    I thought to myself while going over those memories with Leo.


    While I had sometimes been a burden to Leo, and sometimes I had to take care of her, they were all good memories to me. And I felt myself smiling as I drifted off to sleep.


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¨C


    The next day, I woke up as the sun started to rise.


    I got ready for the day and then left the room. Mr. Hannes and his wife were already awake and just about to eat breakfast.


    ¡°Good morning.¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Mr. Takumi. Breakfast is ready.¡±


    We greeted each other and then I sat down at the table to eat.


    They were both elderly, and it seemed that much like many other elderly people, they slept early and woke up early.


    Of course, it would be rude to say such things, and so I kept it to myself.


    After I finished breakfast, I did some light jogging before going to the back of Mr. Hannes¡¯s house in order to make herbs with Weed Cultivation.


    ording to Mr. Hannes, the merchant would arrive shortly after lunch, and so I had time until then.

 Chapter 182

    Chapter 182


    A Different Merchant Arrived


    ¡°¡­He would usually have arrived by now¡­ I wonder if something happened¡­?¡±


    I was in the living room, and some time had already passed since we ate lunch.


    Usually the merchant who sold the grapes would have arrived in the vige already, but he had yet to be seen.


    ¡°Was he everte in the past?¡±


    ¡°There were times when he was dyed a little¡­but not this long¡­¡±


    In fact, the sun would probably start to set soon.


    Even if he was going to be behind schedule a little, it seemed toote.


    Perhaps something had happened on the road¡­?


    ¡°Chief! The merchant is here!¡±


    ¡°Ah, I see. So it looks like it was nothing after all.¡±


    As we sat there worrying, Rai started shouting from outside.


    Apparently, the merchant had arrived safely.


    ¡­But what was the reason for the dy?


    ¡°But chief it doesn¡¯t seem to be the usual merchant. Though, he still came with the grapes¡­¡±


    ¡°What do you mean, Rai?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. But father went out to meet him at the vige entrance.¡±


    ¡°So it¡¯s someone who you have never seen before?¡±


    ¡°No, I¡¯ve seen him just once before. But it¡¯s not the usual man.¡±


    Rai and his parents lived in the house that was the closest to the entrance.


    And so they often managed who came in and left.


    In any case, he had noted that it wasn¡¯t the merchant who usually visited.


    ¡­But it was someone he had seen before¡­


    ¡°Mr. Hannes. Could it be¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes, it may be the merchant who brought the ss sphere. As I am quite sure that Rai would have seen him that time¡­¡±


    Mr. Hannes moved closer to me and we whispered to each other secretively.


    ording to Rai, this merchant had been here just once before¡­ Children often have good memory¡­ And so it was our suspicion that this was the merchant who brought the sphere.


    However¡­ Why had he returned¡­? Had he brought a new sphere? Or did he want to confirm that the disease had been spread¡­?


    In any case, there was no point in staying here and thinking.


    We had to go and find out.


    ¡°Mr. Hannes. While I said that I wanted to meet the merchant¡­ Things have changed, and so I will conceal myself instead. After all, if it is who we think it is, he might get suspicious.¡±


    ¡°I understand. Then I will go out and deal with him.¡±


    ¡°Please pretend that you are ignorant about the sphere and the illness.¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well.¡±


    After discussing it with Mr. Hannes, we left the house.


    I wanted to sneak close enough to them in order to hear their conversation while still being out of sight.


    Otherwise, he might be tight-lipped.


    And so I separated from Mr. Hannes along the way and went around the houses of the vige so that I could head to the entrance from a different direction.


    ¡°From this position, I should be able to hear them¡­¡±


    In the shadows of Rai¡¯s house, I hid and looked at the entrance.


    Thankfully, the sun was starting to set, and the area had be dim. It was unlikely that I would be caught.


    ¡­It wasn¡¯t quite a stealth mission, but it reminded me of some games I used to y.


    Only I was an amateur, and so it wasn¡¯t perfect.


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right¡­ I can use that.¡±


    I took some herbs that I had made out of my bag.


    In the Fenrir Forest, I had the others eat it. A herb that made your senses sharper.


    With this, it would be easier to listen to their conversations, even if they were far away.


    ¡°¡­Hmm¡­ It really does taste bad¡­ But my hearing has improved.¡±


    The effect could be felt immediately.


    Things that I couldn¡¯t hear before, like distant footsteps and horses. Even the sounds of a creaking carriage.


    I should be able to hear Mr. Hannes and the others as well then.


    ¡°¡­What does¡­? But I definitely¡­but¡­¡±


    I heard a man muttering near the entrance.


    While he had only muttered it quietly, due to my sharpened senses, I was able to catch some of it.


    This must be the merchant¡¯s voice. He sounded baffled by something.


    While the area was bing dark, thanks to the herbs, I could see just fine.


    And though the vige entrance was too far to make out clearly, there were a few people standing there.


    ¡°That must be Rai¡¯s parents¡­and the man who is a short distance away is the one who muttered.¡±


    The man and women who stood in the vige would be Rai¡¯s parents.


    And the man outside seemed to be exining to them why he was dyed.


    But there was another man standing a few steps away from him. He was probably the one I had heard.


    He wasn¡¯t talking with the others, and looked like he was just observing the vige. But I could not see his expression or get an idea of what he was thinking.


    And further behind him, where the horses were kept, I could see a few wagons.


    A covered wagon..?


    It wasn¡¯t like the carriages that I rode with Ms. ire, but a wagon that was covered by arge tarp.


    It was likely filled with the grapes that were to be sold.


    ¡°Still, something feels wrong¡­¡±


    If only Leo was here with me. She had much sharper senses, and could probably tell me something¡­ But she was not here.


    I had asked her to go to Sebastian, which was also very important.


    ¡°¡­Sorry to keep you waiting.¡±


    As I thought of such things, Mr. Hannes slowly walked towards them.


    While I had been running, Mr. Hannes had moved slowly in order to give me time to get into position.


    Mr. Hannes then nced briefly in my direction. Uh, please don¡¯t do that. They might see me.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry. We took longer than expected¡­ You see, one of the wagon wheels got stuck in the mud¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, how very unfortunate¡­¡±


    Now that Mr. Hannes had arrived, the man who stood at a distance now joined the others.


    He then told Mr. Hannes what the other man had been exining to Rai¡¯s parents.


    Apparently, they werete because their wagon got stuck in the mud.


    And since the load was so heavy, it had been difficult to free it again.


    Well, if what the man said was true, then it would exin why they werete.

 Chapter 183

    Chapter 183


    I Felt That Something Was Wrong


    ¡°Still¡­something feels strange¡­ While there are several wagons, I don¡¯t sense the presence of many people¡­¡±


    Obviously, the wagons were drawn by horses, so there should be drivers.


    And yet, there weren¡¯t enough people to drive all of them¡­ Unless they were inside of the wagons?


    ¡°So, how are the grapes? Have they grown well?¡±


    ¡°Hmm, ah, yes. They are quite fine.¡±


    ¡°But, this is the second time that the usual merchant hasn¡¯te. Did something happen?¡±


    ¡°In-indeed. He was busy with a different matter, and so I had toe this time as well.¡±


    The person who Mr. Hannes was speaking to was likely the merchant we were talking about¡­


    ording to him, the other merchant was merely too busy.


    And he had been paid to take his ce and deliver the grapes.


    While I was watching them from far away, there was something vague about the way he answered the questions.


    He kept pausing¡­ Perhaps it was just the way that he talked, but it seemed like there was something else on his mind.


    ¡°Well then, we will buy the grapes, as we always do¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, uh¡­ Yes¡­ Well, you all seem to be in good health?¡±


    ¡°Yes, we are. I suppose it was because of that charm that you gave us. Our wine has also been very good. The vige has never been more lively.¡±


    ¡°¡­Oh, indeed¡­ And you put the charm in the ce that I told you to?¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course.¡±


    As soon as Mr. Hannes started to talk about buying the grapes, the merchant showed concern towards his health.


    Apparently, he had told Mr. Hannes that it was a charm, and must be ced in the storage house.


    Mr. Hannes assured the man that he obeyed this exactly, and then he nced in my direction.


    He might as well have winked.


    ¡°¡­And the wine. Are the vigers drinking it as well?¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course. We have to ensure that it tastes good. Besides, we are all very proud of the wine that we made¡­ There will be nopromises.¡±


    ¡°I-I see¡­ How odd¡­it was definitely a real magic tool¡­¡±


    Mr. Hannes told the man that they were all drinking it.


    And then the man began to mutter, so that Mr. Hannes couldn¡¯t hear him. But I was able to catch it.


    Just as I thought, it was a magical tool¡­


    And he had known and deliberately put it here.


    He wanted to use the wine to spread a disease.


    ¡°In that case¡­he is acting strangely because he doesn¡¯t understand why the vigers aren¡¯t sick.


    After all, not only were Rai¡¯s parents and Mr. Hannes just fine, but the vige looked the same as usual.


    That¡¯s why he spoke so falteringly.


    ¡°Is something the matter?¡±


    ¡°N-no. Not at all. In any case, as for the grapes that I brought¡­¡±


    In spite of his confusion, he returned to the subject of selling the grapes.


    And so they began to talk about prices and quantity.


    ¡°¡­Yes, something is strange.¡±


    When I heard about the amount of grapes¡­and looked at the number of wagons, I couldn¡¯t help but feel¡­


    ¡°What is it¡­ This feeling¡­?¡±


    I muttered so that no one could hear me. Then, in order to get a better look, I moved out of my hiding ce.


    As it was much darker now, I could remain hidden as long as I didn¡¯t move too close.


    ¡°¡­Hmm. This¡­grapes¡­? No, it can¡¯t be¡­ Could it be the people that came with the merchant?¡±


    I moved ten steps closer while staying in the shadows of the fence that surrounded the vige.


    Thankfully, Rai¡¯s parents were standing between us, so the merchant wouldn¡¯t be able to see me.


    At this distance, I didn¡¯t even need to use herbs to hear them.


    ¡°Now, I should be able to tell¡­ Hmm¡­¡±


    While listening to their conversation, I turned my senses towards the wagons.


    I already knew that the merchant had intentionally ced the ss sphere here to make people sick.


    Now I had to figure out why I felt something was wrong.


    And as I focused my attention on the wagons, I started to get an idea.


    ¡°¡­It¡¯s not people¡­.and definitely not grapes¡­ Could it be!¡±


    As I searched for their presence, a thought hit me, and I couldn¡¯t help but raise my voice a little.


    While a few heads turned to me, they could not see anything, much to my relief.


    Well, Mr. Hannes did give me a knowing nce.


    In any case, back to the wagons.


    I had sensed such presences before.


    In the fenrir forest¡­ The creatures that Leo had defeated in a sh¡­


    ¡°Monsters¡­orcs¡­ Why are there orcs in the merchant¡¯s wagon¡­?¡±


    I had heard from Ms. ire that orcs were monsters that killed humans without prejudice.


    In fact, all the orcs we had encountered in the forest had attacked as soon as they saw us.


    However, the orcs in the wagons seemed to be calm. They showed no signs of aggression.


    Were they bound up¡­?


    ¡°Still, carrying orcs in wagons¡­ Surely they aren¡¯t going to be sold¡­?¡±


    I had heard from Ms. ire and Sebastian that some people sold monsters.


    Perhaps there was a ce where such things were done¡­ But this merchant hade to sell grapes.


    So why did he have wagons full of orcs¡­?


    But it did seem like he had grapes as well. Two wooden crates had been brought out, and I could smell the sweet fruits.


    However, considering the amount of orcs¡­it was unlikely that there was the same amount of grapes that Mr. Hannes had just said he would buy¡­


    ¡°So this is why¡­¡±


    The merchant who Mr. Hannes was speaking to.


    He did not have the same number of grapes as he imed.


    There would have been enough, if the wagons were carrying only grapes, but there were orcs there instead¡­

 Chapter 184

    Chapter 184


    I Realized What Was Wrong


    ¡°Well then, here is the money.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Take it.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    They had finished talking, and Mr. Hannes gave the money to the merchant.


    The merchant then passed it to the other man for inspection.


    ¡°¡­Yes, that¡¯s the right amount.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ So the payment is received then.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Now, if you would unload the grapes..¡±


    ¡°Of course, we¡¯ll do it immediately.¡±


    As I was closer, I could see the merchant clearly now.


    The merchant was very stout.


    Butpared to the merchants I had seen in Ractos, including Mr. Kalis, his clothes looked quite expensive¡­ They did not seem like the kind of clothes that a merchant would wear during a long trip¡­ Perhaps there was a reason that I just wasn¡¯t aware of.


    Now that negotiations were finished, the man was smiling happily¡­ However, there was something fake about his expression.


    As if he was plotting something¡­


    It was also possible that this herb not only sharpened your senses, but made you see things you wouldn¡¯t normally see¡­like subtle changes in an expression.


    ¡°Hey, take it out. All of it. I don¡¯t know why, but that thing had no effect¡­ So just release all of them.¡±


    ¡°Are you sure? I thought we were going to release them to the wildter¡­?¡±


    ¡°We have no choice. Or do you want to deal with things yourself?¡±


    ¡°No¡­ Very well¡­¡±


    The merchant gave orders to the other man.


    Even though he was talking quietly so that Mr. Hannes wouldn¡¯t notice, I could hear everything.


    However¡­what was he referring to¡­?


    The wagons were filled with what I assumed was orcs.


    That was when I realized the danger we were in.


    ¡°The merchant with the ss sphere¡­orcs¡­ Could it be?¡±


    I prayed that I was wrong as I started to move away from the fence.


    Just as the man jogged over the wagons.


    ¡°Who are you!?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Hannes. Please run away!¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi!?¡±


    The merchant raised his voice, but I ignored him and rushed to the wagons.


    Mr. Hannes was stunned by my actions¡­but this was no time to exin things in detail.


    ¡°This ce is dangerous! Just run away!¡±


    I shouted, and then moved towards the man near the wagons, who was shocked at the sudden intrusion.


    Then I unsheathed my sword and thrust it at him.


    ¡°Stop right there!¡±


    ¡°Damn it!¡±


    But I wasn¡¯t used to pointing a weapon at people, and hesitated a moment.


    The man pulled out a knife and blocked my sword.


    ¡°Tsk!¡±


    ¡°Amatateur¡­ Do you want to die?¡±


    He had been able to block my attack so easily, which made him assume that I was an amateur.


    ¡°Oh, what is this now¡­? A bandit has been hiding in the vige? What is the meaning of this, chief?¡±


    ¡°¡­Uh, well¡­¡±


    The merchant called me a bandit and began to make usations towards Mr. Hannes.


    ¡°What are you doing? Ignore that bandit and do as I say.¡±


    ¡°Aye!¡±


    The merchant moved in between us and shouted at the man.


    And so the man immediately headed to the wagons.


    ¡°Stop!¡±


    ¡°Oh? Do not point your sword at me. It¡¯s dangerous¡­ I see you haven¡¯t been a bandit for long¡­¡±


    When I tried to chase after the man, the merchant stepped in front of me and smiled.


    While I had some experience with monsters and have been training hard, I had never been in a serious fight with a human, where I meant to hurt them.


    ¡­And being raised in a peaceful country caused me to hesitate¡­


    ¡°Well, it doesn¡¯t matter who or what you are. Because there will be no one here once we are finished¡­¡±


    ¡°Stop!¡±


    ¡°Hehehe. Now¡­it is your turn.¡±


    ¡°GYUOOOO!!¡±


    I shouted for him to stop, but there was no way that they would listen to me now.


    The man continued to the wagons and unlocked the chains from the outside.


    At the same time, the cry of orcs rang from inside and I could hear the nging of metal.


    ¡­He had released the chains that held them all at once.


    ¡°Now, it¡¯s not safe for us either¡­so we will take our leave.¡±


    The merchant said with a chuckle. And then he climbed onto his horse and took off.


    The other man then followed after him on a different horse.


    ¡°Damn it!¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi!¡±


    Mr. Hannes shouted, but I ignored him.


    I should chase after the merchants¡­but now, dozens of orcs hade out of the wagons, and they were ring at me.


    ¡°Tsk! I have no choice then¡­ Elemental Shine!¡±


    ¡°Gyuooo!?¡±


    I immediately used the light magic that Sebastian had taught to me.


    Unlike Leo, I was not able to fight so many orcs at once.


    And so I decided to blind them temporarily and escape.


    Thankfully, the sun had setpletely, and so the light was so bright that it blinded the orcs¡­ I was very grateful to Sebastian and his teachings then.


    ¡°Mr. Hannes. Run!¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. The orcs!¡±


    As the orcs stood there, stunned, I dashed over to where Mr. Hannes stood near the entrance.


    ¡°Apparently, the wagons had orcs in them instead of grapes. They will attack if we don¡¯t escape!¡±


    ¡°¡­I see. Then I will call the other vigers! Hey!¡±


    ¡°Yes, chief!¡±


    Mr. Hannes nodded at my words and then shouted to Rai¡¯s parents. Then those two bounded off into the vige.


    It was good that they acted immediately.


    ¡°And what will you do, Mr. Takumi!?¡±


    ¡°I will¡­try to buy some time so everyone can escape¡­ Mr. Hannes, take the others and run!¡±


    There were dozens of orcs¡­ I didn¡¯t know the exact number¡­or if I could even buy enough time.


    However, by running in a different direction and luring them away¡­I might be able to help the others¡­ That¡¯s what I thought.


    If only Leo was here with me¡­ She would have been able to defeat the orcs in seconds¡­

 Chapter 185

    Chapter 185


    I Fought for the First Time


    ¡°You don¡¯t mean!? Mr. Takumi, you must run away with us!¡±


    ¡°The orcs will chase after any humans they see. Someone must lure them away from the others!¡±


    But the vige was filled with elderly people like Mr. Hannes.


    And there were many children. They would not be able to run away with much speed.


    If we all traveled together, the orcs would catch up immediately.


    Someone had to be bait¡­


    ¡°GYUOOOO!¡±


    ¡°Damn it. They¡¯re here!¡±


    One of the orcs was running towards us from the wagons.


    It seemed that some had been behind the wagon, and were not affected much by the light.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°Hurry, Mr. Hannes! I¡¯ll take care of this one!¡±


    ¡°Gyuooo!¡±


    The orc shouted as it charged towards me with its spear!


    I dodged it and then swung my sword and cut off the arm that was stretched out!


    Compared to Mr. Ekenhart or Leo¡¯s movements, I was very slow, but somehow managed to dodge him.


    Perhaps it was due to the herbs that sharpened my senses.


    And while this was my first real fight against a monster, unlike with the merchant, I was able to attack without any hesitation.


    ¡°Gyua!¡±


    After having its arm cleaved off, the orc red at me with bloodshot eyes.


    From behind, I could hear Mr. Hannes running away, as well as the sounds of a bell ringing in the vige.


    It was probably a bell that warned the others of danger.


    They used to ring simr bells in Japan whenever there was a fire.


    ¡°Guooo!!¡±


    The orc in front of me began to attack with his spear once again!


    He was slower, now that he only had one arm, and his movements seemed more random.


    And so it was even easier to dodge him this time.


    ¡°Damn it. So this will be my first fight!¡±


    I shouted as my sword came down over the head of the orc, right after he swung down.


    Blood sprayed from the orc¡¯s head, but as I wasn¡¯t used to it, it was not enough to cleave the head in two.


    The orc stumbled around, but was not dead.


    ¡°I can¡¯t spend so much time on just one orc¡­Damn it!¡±


    And so I swung my sword again while it was still off bnce.


    I had meant to sh at its neck, but the orc moved, and I ended up cutting the stomach instead.


    ¡­This was bad. The other orcs were moving now, and could surround me in no time¡­


    Damn it.


    If I was surrounded by that many orcs, I would surely die.


    ¡°Stay down!¡±


    ¡°Gyu! Gyuooo!¡±


    This time I just swung at it randomly. And then again and again!


    It was bleeding so much that it must be close to death¡­ That¡¯s what I thought as I cut and cut.


    After swinging many times, the orc finally fell to the ground and stopped moving.


    ¡°Ha¡­ha¡­ Finally¡­¡±


    I was out of breath from swinging so many times.


    In the meantime, I could see that the other orcs were no longer affected by the light, and were ready to attack me.


    Damn it. I was supposed to lead them away from the vige in order to buy time. But that wouldn¡¯t be possible now¡­


    ¡°I¡¯ll use the light one more time then¡­ Light Elemental¡­¡±


    ¡°Gyuoooo!¡±


    But just as I was about to use the light magic towards the orcs, a de shot out of nowhere and pierced one of them.


    The orc fell down with the de in its chest. And the other orcs looked around uprehendingly.


    ¡°What the¡­?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi!¡±


    As I looked at the orc, a voice rang from behind.


    When I turned to look, it was Mr. Hannes.


    And behind him, there were other vigers as well.


    ¡°Mr. Hannes. Why are you here?¡±


    ¡°We owe you a debt for saving this vige Mr. Takumi. And so we will not leave you here and run away.¡±


    ¡°Exactly, Mr. Pharmacist!¡±


    ¡°We will fight too!¡±


    ¡°We can¡¯t abandon you!¡±


    They all shouted together.


    And in their hands, were short swords, knives, axes and even hoes.


    They had been gathering weapons while I fought the orc.


    It had not been that long, but they hade together to help me.


    ¡°But there are so many orcs.¡±


    ¡°That doesn¡¯t matter. We may be humble vigers, but we¡¯ve fought monsters before in order to protect this ce.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Besides¡­didn¡¯t you see that throw just now? Well, I wasn¡¯t actually aiming at that one, but¡­¡±


    ¡°We can fight mere orcs!¡±


    Mr. Hannes and the vigers fully intended to fight as well.


    We had encountered a troll on the way here¡­so I suppose there really were orcs and other monsters in the forest.


    And since they cut down the trees to make the wine barrels, it made sense that they would sometimes have to fight monsters.


    That wasforting, but¡­


    Even as they talked, more and more vigers gathered.


    And all of them were wielding a weapon of some kind.


    ¡°But people might be hurt¡­¡±


    ¡°As the person who saved us, your death would be a bigger loss to this vige.¡±


    ¡°Yes! We don¡¯t care about some injuries. But we cannot allow you to be hurt or killed by the monsters.¡±


    ¡°It would be a great disservice to the duke who sent you¡­and of course, to you as well!¡±


    ¡°Everyone¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, now is not the time to talk.¡±


    They all wanted to fight against the orcs.


    I was grateful to hear their words of gratitude towards me¡­ But even as I thought this, the orcs had regained their wits and swung their spears as they moved towards us.


    And so I made up my mind.


    ¡°Very well. I understand. Let¡¯s fight them together! But please, don¡¯t be too bold and reckless!¡±


    ¡°Aye!¡±


    I shouted at them after making up my mind.


    Battle wounds could be treated with Loe. But nothing could be done if they died.


    ¡­Surely there was no herb that brought people back to life¡­


    In any case, it was not good to think about people dying right now¡­ While we were up against dozens of orcs, I prayed that we would make it through without any casualties.

 Chapter 186

    Chapter 186


    I Cooperated with the Vigers and Fought the Orcs


    ¡°Gyuooo!¡±


    ¡°We can fight too!¡±


    ¡°Fight in pairs or groups of three! Don¡¯t try to fight an orc on your own!¡±


    While still a little bewildered, the orcs began to charge at us.


    Some of them had started to attack the horses that were tied to the wagons, but more than half wereing towards us.


    ¡­I felt bad for the horses, but it did give us a better chance.


    ¡°In general, orcs just charge straight ahead! Dodge their spears and then attack them!¡±


    It had been that way earlier, but they did little else but charge at their target.


    And so as long as you stay calm, it should not be too difficult to dodge them.


    The vigers were going to attack in small groups. And as long as they could avoid the spears, even those who weren¡¯t used to fighting should be able to deal with the orcs.


    ¡°Gyua!¡±


    ¡°Good, now! Go!¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ve cut down many trees with this axe! Take this!¡±


    ¡°These orcs are nothingpared to the monsters in the forest!¡±


    Near the entrance, the orcs that reached us first attacked. But the vigers dodged their spears and then surrounded them. Then they began to attack with a variety of weapons.


    ¡­Perhaps they fought like this whenever they encountered monsters in the forest. They appeared to have good teamwork.


    ¡°I can¡¯t fall behind then! Hah!¡±


    An orc charged at me in a straight line. I moved away from the thrusted spear and cut its arms, just like before.


    There was little to fear once they lost their spear arm.


    However, my swings must have been too weak, as the arm didn¡¯te offpletely¡­


    ¡°Haa¡­ha¡­¡±


    Still, one after another, we managed to take down the oing orcs.


    It was because they weren¡¯t too fast, and the herbs had sharpened my senses. However, I was starting to pant loudly as well.


    Clearly, I needed more training andbat experience.


    Besides, I had never actually swung my sword this much while hitting against something.


    And unlike when swinging through the air, I had to keep moving my body, which was very tiring.


    ¡°I can¡­still go¡­¡±


    All around me, the vigers continued to kill the orcs. But there were still more than half of them left.


    And the vigers were tiring, just like me.


    ¡°¡­Some recovery herbs¡­no, there is no time for that¡­!¡±


    If we all ate the herbs, then we could continue to fight without being affected by fatigue. But there was no time.


    The orcs that had instinctively attacked the horses were now turning towards us and moving.


    While we had the numerical advantage, they had momentum, and we were starting to be pushed back.


    Even as I thought of this, a single orc charged at me.


    I cut it down and muttered.


    ¡°If only I had a herb that raised my physical abilities¡­¡±


    While it wouldn¡¯t be a dramatic transformation, it would still make things a lot easier.


    And not just for me, but for the vigers as well¡­


    But there was no point in wishing for that now. And perhaps I was relying on Weed Cultivation too much¡­


    Right now, I had to figure out a different way of getting through this situation.


    ¡°Hahh¡­ha¡­ And¡­stay down!¡±


    I cut the orc¡¯s legs and knocked it to the ground.


    As it tried to get back up, I thrust my sword into his chest.


    ¡­While this was my first battle¡­I wasn¡¯t doing too bad.


    Perhaps I was getting used to it. Even if there was something in the far back of my mind that was repelled by it all.


    But right now, I had to ignore it.


    ¡°Gyuoooo!¡±


    ¡°Gah!¡±


    ¡°Hey! Damn it!¡±


    ¡°Bastards!¡±


    Nearby, one of the vigers slipped on some orc blood, and I saw that an orc had taken the opportunity to pierce him.


    But then the other vigers surrounded the orc with their weapons.


    The viger who was injured could still get back to his feet, so he couldn¡¯t have been hurt badly. Still, it seemed like he had been cut on the arm, and could no longer hold a sword.


    So, they were starting to get injured¡­


    ¡°Watch out!¡±


    While I could see it clearly, the orc was in a position where the vigers couldn¡¯t see it. And it was raising its spear.


    I shouted at them, but they were too distracted by the wounded man!


    ¡°Damn it! There¡¯s no time!¡±


    I spat, and then I dashed forward and stretched out my arm so that the sword moved between the orc and the vigers.


    ng! The sound echoed as sword and spear met.


    The vigers finally realized what was happening and they turned their weapons towards the orc.


    ¡°Pharmacist! You!¡±


    ¡°Hah!¡±


    ¡°Gyuua!¡±


    Two of the vigers swung their swords while the orc¡¯s spear was still raised.


    And after being cut a few times, the orc crumbled to the ground.


    ¡°Are you alright, pharmacist?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m fine. What about him?¡±


    ¡°Fine, thanks to you¡­ But I can¡¯t hold my sword¡­¡±


    ¡°You don¡¯t have to. Just fall back immediately if you can¡¯t fight! As long as it¡¯s only a wound, I will be able to treat itter!¡±


    ¡°¡­Pharmacist¡­very well. I don¡¯t want to get in your way¡­ I¡¯m sorry¡­¡±


    Upon hearing my order, the wounded viger retreated.


    It would be much harder to fight if we had to protect him at the same time.


    And as long as he was alive, I could use some Loe on himter.


    ¡°Gyuuoo!¡±


    ¡°Damn!¡±


    The vigers moved on to the other orcs.


    And then a different orc thrust its spear at me, but I managed to dodge it.


    However, even though there was an opening, I could no longer attack¡­


    ¡°My sword¡­!¡±


    After blocking the spear to protect the vigers, my de had been broken in half.


    It had been given to me by Sebastian not too long ago. Though, I had used it a lot for training¡­perhaps I should have anticipated this.


    Besides, it had been hitting the bones of the orcs that I attacked.


    Well, it could also mean that I wasn¡¯t using it properly¡­

 Chapter 187

    Chapter 187


    I Was Injured


    ¡°Gya! Gya!¡±


    ¡°Tsk!¡±


    Upon seeing that there would be no counterattack, the orc continued its assault with the spear.


    I somehow managed to dodge it, but I didn¡¯t know how long I wouldst like this¡­


    I wanted to pick up the sword that was dropped by the injured viger, but the orc wouldn¡¯t let me.


    And the others were too busy dealing with the enemy in front of them¡­ What should I do¡­


    ¡°Gyua!¡±


    ¡°Damn it!¡±


    The orc seemed to get frustrated that it couldn¡¯t hit me, and it began to charge at me as if to ram me with its own body.


    While I could dodge a spear, I wouldn¡¯t be able to dodge the orc¡¯s body.


    And so he crashed into me. And for a moment, I couldn¡¯t breathe¡­


    Then its arm shot out to grab me!


    ¡°I won¡¯t¡­let you!¡±


    Before it could get a good grip, I put my hand on its chest and pushed myself away.


    The arms grasped the air instead. Once again, I found myself wishing that I had herbs that enhanced my physical strength.


    If I did, I might be able to fend the orc off with my fists¡­


    ¡°¡­Hmm?¡±


    As I was thinking that, I noticed something strange.


    The orc wasn¡¯t moving anymore.


    ¡°What?¡±


    Not understanding why, I looked closely at the orc¡¯s face. There was no light in the eyes, and it was clearly dead.


    ¡°What happened¡­? Hmm?¡±


    While the orc¡¯s sudden death was surprising enough, I also felt that there was something wrong with my hand.


    When it had been touching the orc, I could feel the skin and fat under my fingers. But then there was something else¡­.


    ¡°¡­Could it be!¡±


    Where my hand had been, a familiar leaf had sprouted, and a nt was growing little by little.


    ¡°¡­Weed Cultivation¡­¡±


    It was a phenomenon I had seen many times.


    Only, it was usually when I ced my hand on hard earth, and activated Weed Cultivation. And then a nt would grow at an impossible rate.


    But that had now happened on the body of an orc.


    ¡°No¡­ Was it because I was thinking about a herb that would strengthen my body¡­?¡±


    It was when I was thinking that, that I touched the orc.


    This had happened a number of times in the past. Where I would be vaguely thinking about something and identally activate it.


    But¡­could Weed Cultivation really work when you weren¡¯t touching the ground¡­?


    ¡°¡­That¡¯s very¡­gah!¡±


    ¡°Gya-gya-gya!¡±


    As I was distracted by Weed Cultivation, I didn¡¯t notice the orc that was approaching from behind.


    And so the orc was able to hit me in the head with its spear!


    Thanks to one of the vigers, the tip of the spear, where the spearhead was, had been broken off, and so I wasn¡¯t pierced. However, it came down heavily on my head¡­ The impact was strong, as if I had been hit by a club.


    I was unconscious for a second, but managed toe back and re at theughing orc.


    ¡°Damn¡­ Mr. Ekenhart told me that I must never stop moving during a fight¡­!¡±


    The battle had not ended.


    More than half of the orcs were left, and fighting the vigers.


    I never knew when I was going to be attacked next, and yet I had made the mistake of stopping.


    But it was toote now to remember whatever lessons Mr. Ekenhart taught me during sword training.


    ¡°Gyua!¡±


    ¡°¡­Damn it¡­¡±


    The orc had an expression that looked like a triumphant grin. And then it raised its spear high into the air.


    After being hit on the head, my body did not move as I wanted it to, and it seemed as if I could do nothing but stare¡­


    But if I got hit like that again¡­and this time, it would be much harder¡­it would be the end of me.


    I shouted for help, but no one noticed, as they were busy fighting. And so the spear came swinging down over me.


    I had told the vigers that they must not die, and yet I was in the most danger¡­ I just hoped that I would be the only one¡­


    ¡­Leo. I¡¯m so sorry¡­


    As I closed my eyes, my thoughts were only of Leo, who I would have to leave behind¡­


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°Gya!?¡±


    But as my mind was filled with remorse towards Leo, a familiar voice rang in my ears¡­ Leo¡¯s bark. And a scream.


    Was I going crazy?


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wuff?¡±


    ¡°¡­What?¡±


    I had been ready to meet my fate, but the blow never came. Instead of a spear, something was licking my face¡­ And I had felt it many times before.


    ¡°¡­Leo? Is that really you!?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I opened my eyes, and there was Leo¡¯s familiar face.


    But why was Leo¡­ Didn¡¯t they return to the mansion¡­?


    ¡°Gyuoooooo!!¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Wou. Wuff. ¡­Grau!¡±


    ¡°Ah, Leo!¡±


    As Leo peered into my face, I noticed that another orc was charging at us. Leo just let out a sigh and nodded. Then she pounced on the orc with all of the speed of the wind.


    In a sh, her ws shredded the orc to pieces, and it fell to the ground before it could even let out a cry.


    And then Leo ran off towards the other orcs that were fighting the vigers.


    ¡­If Leo was here, there was nothing to worry about.


    ¡°¡­Phew¡­so¡­I¡¯m alive then¡­?¡±


    My head still hurt from the previous blow, but I gritted my teeth and took in a deep breath.


    At least it didn¡¯t hurt as much as before.


    I let out a sigh and looked at my surroundings. All of the orcs were already dead, and the vigers were stunned.


    They were stunned by Leo¡¯s strength.


    ¡°Good¡­it seems like no one was killed.¡±


    From what I could see, the orcs had not been able to kill anyone.


    Of course, there were some who were injured, but at least they were alive.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°Mr. Hannes! What a relief to see you!¡±


    ¡°And you as well! But Leo¡­¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know why she is here, but I¡¯m thankful for it.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ I don¡¯t know how we can thank you, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±

 Chapter 188

    Chapter 188


    Sebastian Came As Well


    Now that Leo had defeated all of the orcs that were around the vige entrance, Mr. Hannes rushed towards me.


    I was relieved to see that he was unharmed.


    In the meantime, Leo continued to attack the remaining orcs.


    Leo really was strong.


    ¡°Hahaha. I wasn¡¯t much use, outside of buying a little time. I¡¯m just d that Leo is here. If you¡¯re going to thank anyone, thank her.¡±


    ¡°Of course, we are very grateful towards Leo. But we are grateful to you as well, Mr. Takumi. We had enough time to prepare, because you stayed here and fought¡­ Besides, I was moved at how desperate you were on our behalf.¡±


    ¡°Now you¡¯re exaggerating. I only fought the orcs that were already right in front of me.¡±


    ¡°No, that¡¯s not true. You bought us plenty of time. Without that¡­they would have swarmed into the vige and caught us off guard.¡±


    ¡°¡­Well, if it was a help to you, then I am d.¡±


    While I thought he was saying too much, if my training had allowed me to be of use, then that was good.


    I could not im to have defeated many orcs, but I had been able to slow them down with my light magic.


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Oh, Leo. So it¡¯s done?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, good Leo.¡±


    As I spoke with Mr. Hannes, Leo returned after defeating thest orc.


    Very good, Leo.


    ¡°Thank you, Leo. Thank you so much.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    I thanked Leo while petting her thoroughly.


    While there was still a sharp pain in my head, it wasn¡¯t too bad now, and I could move just fine.


    Leo wagged her tail happily and looked very pleased to be petted.


    ¡°Still, why are you here, Leo? Didn¡¯t you go back with Phillip?¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff-wuff-wuff¡­ Wuff! Wuff. Grau. Wou-wuff-wuff-wuff. Grau. Wuff.¡±


    I supposed that Leo was answering my question, but it was so long that I didn¡¯t understand her.


    Perhaps the pain in my head was making it difficult for me to concentrate.


    Usually, I have no trouble understanding her¡­


    ¡°Sorry, Leo. I¡¯m not sure what you are saying¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Leo looked crestfallen when she heard this.


    I really was sorry. It was just the pain.


    ¡°I will exin it to you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    While I was apologizing to Leo, a voice rang from behind me.


    It was a familiar voice, but¡­surely he would not be here¡­?


    ¡°¡­Sebastian!? Why are you here!?¡±


    ¡°Hohoho. Good Leo carried me. She really is a fast runner.¡±


    I held my head and turned around. And there was the old man with the gentle smile and sharp eyes¡­Sebastian.


    ¡°I didn¡¯t expect to see Leo here, but now even you¡­?¡±


    ¡°We can talk about thatter. First, we should deal with this mess.¡±


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Hannes. We must treat the wounded. Also¡­can you deal with the dead monsters?¡±


    ¡°Yes! Of course! I¡¯ll call the people who know how to do it!¡±


    If I couldn¡¯t understand Leo, I could just ask Sebastian.


    However, Sebastian said that it was more important to deal with the current situation.


    ¡­Which was obvious, as there were people who were wounded¡­ So the exnation could wait.


    And so Mr. Hannes went off towards the other vigers.


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right, Sebastian!¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    I was going to leave things to him, when I suddenly remembered something.


    The merchants. They had escaped as soon as they unleashed the orcs.


    I didn¡¯t know how much time had passed, but we should be able to chase after them and take them prisoner.


    ¡°There are people who brought those orcs here. I believe¡­they went towards Ractos on horseback¡­¡±


    The vige entrance was on the west side¡­which was in the direction of Ractos, and they had been moving in a straight line.


    ¡­Though, it was possible they would make a turnter on¡­


    ¡°Hmm¡­I saw two people on horseback on the way here¡­ Could it be them?¡±


    ¡°If there were two horse riders, then I think it is likely them.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ We prioritized getting here as soon as possible¡­ But I do remember being suspicious.¡±


    ¡°Those two were the people that brought the ss sphere that Phillip had. And the ones who unleashed the orcs on us!¡±


    So, Sebastian had seen them on the way here while riding on Leo.


    In that case, it was likely that they really hadn¡¯t changed course, and were heading towards Ractos.


    ¡°I see¡­ Very well. We will chase after them at once. Johanna!¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    After he understood this much, Sebastian made the decision immediately and called Johanna.


    I hadn¡¯t realized it until now, but she was helping the wounded vigers a short distance away.


    And Phillip was there as well.


    ¡°We will borrow horses from Mr. Hannes¡­the chief, and head to Ractos. As they are on horseback, we must go quickly.¡±


    ¡°Yes, understood!¡±


    ¡°Ah, wait a minute!¡±


    ¡°What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    I stopped Sebastian and Johanna as they were about to leave.


    There was a better way than to follow the merchants on horses.


    ¡°We¡¯ll have Leo chase after them. She is much faster.¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed¡­but are you sure? ¡­Shouldn¡¯t she stay with you¡­¡±


    ¡°I will go too. Is that all right, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±

 Chapter 189

    Chapter 189


    In Spite of Injury, I Chased After the Merchants


    If we chased them with Leo, then we should be able to catch up with the horses in no time.


    Sebastian wanted Leo to stay with me. And so that just meant that I had to go with Leo.


    Besides, I was still angry towards the merchants for unleashing the orcs on us.


    ¡°Very well. In that case¡­Johanna and I will go with you.¡±


    ¡°Certainly!¡±


    So Sebastian and Johann woulde too.


    Well, even with Leo, it would be better to have others there if we were going to capture them.


    This was a little different from killing some orcs.


    ¡°All right. Leo. While you¡¯ll have to run again, can you take us?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Kuuun. Kuun.¡±


    ¡°What¡­what is it?¡±


    When I asked Leo to carry us, she rubbed her face against me and licked the side of my head.


    Usually, she would have agreed right away¡­ What was the matter?


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi¡­!¡±


    ¡°Huh? What is it, Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°Your head!¡±


    ¡°Head¡­? Ah¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    As I tried to think of what Leo was doing, Sebastian raised his voice in surprise.


    He was looking at the side of my head¡­ And when I touched it, I felt that it was wet.


    I then looked at my hand, and it was red with blood.


    Apparently, my head had started to bleed after being bludgeoned by the orc.


    So that¡¯s why it had continued to throb with pain¡­ Leo was worried, and started to lick the blood off¡­


    ¡°I suppose I¡¯m a little injured¡­ Uh, does anyone have a cloth¡­¡±


    ¡°Please use this.¡±


    ¡°¡­Are you sure? It is such a pretty handkerchief.¡±


    ¡°Nevermind that! Your injury is more important!¡±


    As I asked for something to wipe away the dripping blood, Johanna offered me a clean handkerchief.


    While I felt bad about ruining it, I epted it gratefully.


    ¡°All right. Now, let¡¯s go and catch those merchants.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­ Are you sure? A head injury can lead to something much worse¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, while there is some pain¡­I should be fine. And if necessary, I¡¯ll make some Loe and heal it.¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well But if I determine that it¡¯s too dangerous, you must stop and heal yourself at once.¡±


    Both Leo and Sebastian were looking at me with concern.


    And so I smiled and told them that I was fine.


    Besides, I thought that catching the merchants was more important now.


    If we didn¡¯t hurry, we might lose them for good.


    I had always been like this, back during my other job. Where I would prioritize other things than take care of myself.


    ¡°Sorry, Leo. Can you take us?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I asked Leo again.


    Leo replied with resignation and theny low so that I could climb onto her.


    ¡°Good. Now, let¡¯s chase after them. In the direction of Ractos town, yes?¡±


    ¡°Yes. That¡¯s where they were headed when we passed them by.¡±


    ¡°You heard him, Leo. Try to run as fast as possible without shaking us off.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    After Sebastian, Johanna and I were on top of Leo, she ran from the Range vige entrance and towards Ractos.


    We had asked Phillip to stay behind and help the wounded vigers.


    ¡°Tsk¡­it hurts more when you¡¯re shaking¡­¡±


    ¡°Should we stop?¡±


    ¡°No, I¡¯m still fine.¡±


    Leo was running a little slower than she had when we first went to Range vige. Still, I couldn¡¯t help but grimace from the pain as I held onto her.


    Sebastian looked at me from behind with concern.


    But while it was worse than when I was standing still, it wasn¡¯t unbearable.


    Of course, I wouldn¡¯t want it to continue much longer, so I would treat it with Loe as soon as I had time.


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m fine, Leo.¡±


    Leo also barked as if worried.


    She was doing her best to slow down. I¡¯m sorry for making you worry, Leo.


    ¡°Ah, there they are!¡±


    ¡°Two horses¡­ Yes, it must be them.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Leo, approach those horses.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    After bearing the pain in my head for a little longer, we found the merchants near the area where I had met up with Phillip and Mr. Hannes.


    They were clearly riding towards Ractos.


    While it was darker now that the sun had gone down, the effects of the herbs had not died yet, and I could see well enough to confirm that they were the same merchants.


    Though, they would have been blurry shadows for Sebastian and Johanna.


    ¡­Now that I thought about it, Leo could also see well in the dark.


    ¡°Leo. Go and surprise those horses!¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    Once we were close enough, I gave Leo the order.


    While I felt bad for the horses, it would be the easiest way to stop them.


    ¡­Well, perhaps there were other ways. But I was in no mood to rack my brain for them.


    ¡°Hah-hah-hah¡­Grau!¡±


    ¡°What!?¡±


    ¡°Huh!?¡±


    By the time they could hear Leo¡¯s heavy breathing as she stuck out her tongue, she was already right next to them and barking.


    The horses were so startled that they stopped and began to move around wildly.


    The merchants could not control them, and they fell to the ground.


    ¡­I hope they were not injured¡­ Such thoughts did not ur to me at all.


    Even someone like me could feel no concern over the wellbeing of someone who had unleashed orcs on a vige.


    ¡°Ha¡­thanks, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    ¡°Johanna!¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    After passing the horses, Leo stopped suddenly.


    Severe pain shot through my head, but I ignored it and thanked Leo.


    Then Sebastian and Johanna immediately jumped off and dashed towards the fallen merchants.

 Chapter 190

    Chapter 190


    We Captured the Merchants


    ¡°You are now our prisoners.¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t resist us!¡±


    ¡°Tsk¡­ Who are you people!¡±


    ¡°Ahhh¡­damn it! What do you want!¡±


    Sebastian shouted intimidatingly as he ran to the merchants.


    I thought I heard some anger in his voice¡­ He usually spoke so calmly¡­


    The merchants, who were clearly in pain from falling off of their horses, shouted back as well.


    However, it seemed like they could not get back to their feet.


    ¡°Who are we¡­? We serve the duke¡­ Does that clear things up for you?¡±


    ¡°Tsk. Let me go¡­ The duke!?¡±


    ¡°Stop moving! Or Leo will¡­¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°Ahh!¡±


    ¡°What is that monster!?¡±


    As Sebastian tied up the merchant, he told him that we worked for the duke. The merchant then became visibly flustered.


    Johanna was trying to tie the other one, but when he continued to struggle, she threatened to set Leo on him.


    Leo understood what she was doing, and so she also unleashed an overpowering howl.


    As it was dark, they had not seen her clearly at first, but they were now shaking with fear.


    ¡­I was d that they had calmed down, but it was quite rude to call Leo a monster.


    ¡°But Leo is so cute.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I petted Leo consolingly, and she rubbed her face against me.


    While everything wasn¡¯t finished yet, she was probably relieved that this part was nearly over.


    Or perhaps she was still worried about my injury.


    ¡°Now, there is nothing that you can say to defend your actions. You will be taken away¡­ Resistance is futile¡­ Do you understand¡­?¡±


    ¡°Damn you¡­¡±


    Sebastian spoke in a quiet, low voice in their ears after they were tied up.


    He did not forget to nce at Leo suggestively.


    This had the desired effect on the two who saw Leo as a monster. They hadpletely lost the will to struggle.


    ¡°There, there¡­calm down. We¡¯re sorry for startling you. Don¡¯t worry.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wuff.¡±


    As for Johanna, she was talking to the horses in order to calm them down.


    Leo joined in, and rubbed her face into them.


    I was just surprised that they didn¡¯t run away¡­ Well, perhaps they were too scared to run.


    ¡°Now, Mr. Takumi. We have caught the two culprits.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Should we put them on Leo?¡±


    ¡°No¡­ The very thought of such people riding on Leo fills me with unease. Thankfully, we still have the horses. And so Johanna and I will take them with us on horseback.¡±


    ¡°Very well. ¡­And I agree with you. Besides, they called Leo a monster.¡±


    Sebastian decided to carry the prisoners on the horses.


    I did not like the idea of letting them ride my adorable Leo. They had insulted her, set the orcs on Range vige, and ced the ss sphere there, after all.


    ¡°However¡­shouldn¡¯t you do something about that injury first?¡±


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right.¡±


    While my head still hurt, it had been especially bad when Leo stopped suddenly. So the pain felt mild once that had subsided.


    Compared to that, this was almost nothing¡­ I was almost impressed with myself for bearing it for so long.


    ¡°Now, I¡¯ll make some Loe with Weed Cultivation¡­¡±


    ¡°Please wait.¡±


    Just as I was about to activate Weed Cultivation, Sebastian stopped me.


    While I wondered about this, Sebastian approached the merchants and took out a long strip of cloth.


    ¡­Where had he been carrying that?


    ¡°You will be wearing these. ¡­So you can taste the fear of not being able to see.¡±


    And then Sebastian blindfolded them.


    It was during times like these that there was something about Sebastian that sent a chill down your spine¡­ It had been that way with Nick as well.


    ¡°It is fine now. ¡­I didn¡¯t think you should be showing them it.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true. Thank you.¡±


    Sebastian was making sure that the merchants could not see me use Weed Cultivation.


    Indeed, it might be bad if they found out about my Gift.


    They weren¡¯t the kind of people who would keep their mouths shut.


    ¡°¡­All right then.¡±


    ¡°Well, it looks like being injured has no effect on your Gift.¡±


    ¡°¡­Now that you mention it¡­yes. Injuries and the state of your body seem to be unrted to it.¡±


    I ced my hand on the ground and picked up the Loe that grew.


    It was something I had done many times at the mansion,


    But as he watched, Sebastian noticed something.


    So Weed Cultivation really was unrted to injury¡­ But the pain in my head would probably affect my concentration, which would make using magic difficult.


    ¡°Uhh¡­the injury is¡­hmm¡­ This is awkward.¡±


    ¡°I will do it.¡±


    ¡°Ah, thank you. I can¡¯t see where it is exactly.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    I cut open the Loe leaf, exposing the insides. But when I tried to apply it to my head, I had some difficulty.


    As I couldn¡¯t see it myself, I had to rely on touch, but even that was hard, as the pain had spread throughout my whole head.


    Johanna offered to help. She then took the Loe so she could apply it.


    ¡­The horses¡­were being watched by Leo¡­ They were rubbing their heads together yfully.


    ¡°Sebastian, could you create a light?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. ¡­Light Elemental Shine.¡±


    ¡°I can see much better now¡­so here it is¡­my, that is quite bad¡­ I¡¯m surprised you made it this far.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­it¡¯s really that bad?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­ So you were pushing yourself after all¡­¡±


    Johanna asked Sebastian to create a light, and so he activated the magic.


    Just like before, he made his sword glow, which allowed Johanna to inspect my injury.


    Compared to making a sphere of light in your hand, it was not as bright, which made it easier on the eyes.


    But more importantly, my injury¡­ Johanna was quite surprised when she saw it.


    ¡­Well, it did hurt pretty bad¡­


    Sebastian was now admonishing me for downying it¡­ However, I hoped he would understand that it was necessary so that we could capture the merchants.

 Chapter 191

    Chapter 191


    I Used Loe to Treat My Injury


    ¡°It is a terrible injury. I don¡¯t know how you are still conscious¡­¡±


    ¡°That bad¡­ouch¡­ Ah, now the pain is fading away.¡±


    Apparently, the injury was a lot worse than I had realized.


    After being bludgeoned by the broken spear, the skin had torn away¡­ Once I was aware of how bad it was, the pain seemed to get worse. But then Johanna applied the Loe and it immediately started to subside.


    At least¡­my skull hadn¡¯t cracked open¡­ Then I would have definitely been dead¡­ The thought filled my mind for a few seconds.


    ¡°It¡¯s done. You are now healed, and without a scar. How do you feel?¡±


    ¡°Not bad. The pain is all gone. ¡­Loe really is effective¡­ Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Oh, I didn¡¯t do anything.¡±


    Johanna stepped away then.


    Thanks to the Loe, there was no more pain. And I didn¡¯t feel any other side effects.


    No effects from blood loss either¡­ I was stunned by how quick the Loe was¡­


    Though, it did exin to me why it was so expensive.


    Well, I had made a simr herb to help Sherry before, but that was probably special.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. In the future, you must be more careful.¡±


    ¡°Exactly. ¡­There was no reason for you toe out here with such an injury¡­¡±


    ¡°Hahaha¡­ Well, I wasn¡¯t really aware of it myself. It just seemed like a little pain¡­but nothing I couldn¡¯t bear. Besides, you wouldn¡¯t have been able to recognize them, right?¡±


    ¡°Perhaps, but¡­¡±


    Well, they would have to be satisfied with that for now.


    Though, there wouldn¡¯t be many people traveling here at this hour. So they would have probably been able to catch them without me.


    But I suppose I wanted to see the merchants captured with my own eyes. That was how angry I had been over what they did.


    ¡­Though, it also made me feel a little pathetic for not being able to catch them with my own power¡­


    ¡°Well, that¡¯s fine. We should return to Range vige. There is a lot that must be done, isn¡¯t there?¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well. But please don¡¯t do something like this again.¡±


    ¡°All right.¡±


    While Sebastian nodded, it was clear that he would not stop warning me about it.


    I did feel bad about causing them to worry¡­ And I was d that there were people who felt such concern over me.


    Johanna was nodding as well. I felt a little happy.


    ¡°Wuff¡­kuuuun¡­kuun.¡±


    ¡°Haha. And I¡¯m sorry for making you worry as well, Leo. There, there¡­¡±


    Now that the horses were calm, Leo saw that my wound had been treated, and she rubbed her nose against me.


    She had been so worried, and so I petted her and thanked her for the help.


    ¡°Now, let¡¯s take these men back.¡±


    ¡°To Range vige first?¡±


    ¡°Yes. It will be too difficult to go to Ractos at this hour. It would be better to keep them in the vige for now.¡±


    ¡°Very well¡­ Ah, I will follow after youter, so please go on ahead. Leo and I will catch up in no time.¡±


    ¡°¡­What are you going to do?¡±


    Sebastian and Johanna tied the merchants together and ced them on one of the horses.


    I saw them whisper threats into their ears, so that they wouldn¡¯t move, and then they would nce at Leo.


    They were strapped to the horses so that they wouldn¡¯t fall off, and then the other horse was attached as well.


    As I watched them, I told Sebastian that they should go ahead of me.


    And then Sebastian looked at me suspiciously.


    Well, perhaps I had not shown myself to have the best judgment recently, and he thought I was going to do something reckless again¡­ Of course, I had no intention of doing any such thing.


    ¡°Some of the vigers were wounded as well. And so I¡¯m going to make some Loe here before returning. ¡­After all, I don¡¯t want them to know about Weed Cultivation.¡±


    ¡°I see. Very well. Just be carefull¡­¡±


    ¡°We¡¯ll go on ahead then, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes, see youter.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    And so they took the merchants and left.


    As the horses were connected, they moved much slower than usual.


    And so I would have no trouble catching up with them after making the Loe.


    I would have to be very secretive if I used Weed Cultivation in the vige, so it was easier to do it here, where I didn¡¯t have to worry about being watched.


    I suppose I could have gone to Mr. Hannes¡¯s house, but that was in the far corner of the vige, and it would be best if I could treat the wounded as soon as I arrived.


    ¡°¡­All right¡­ I think this should be enough?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    I counted the Loe that I had made.


    Leo was nodding¡­ Perhaps she had counted the number of people who were wounded and would require the Loe.


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s catch up with Sebastian and Johanna. Thank you, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    After putting the Loe in my breast pocket, I climbed onto leo.


    It had not taken much time, so they would not have gone too far yet.


    ¡­Though, the thorns of the Loe leaves were¡­prickly¡­ But it could not be helped, as they were fresh.


    ¡°We¡¯ve returned. How is the situation, Phillip?¡±


    We reunited with Sebastian and the others and returned to Range vige.


    There were still some orc corpses around the entrance, but it seemed that things were going smoothly. The smell of blood was a lot more mild than before.


    We dismounted and then Sebastian started to talk to Phillip, who was giving orders to the vigers near the entrance.

 Chapter 192

    Chapter 192


    Some People Were Badly Wounded


    ¡°Ah, Mr. Sebastian and Mr. Takumi. Wee back. ¡­As for the situation in the vige¡­it is not very good¡­¡±


    ¡°What¡¯s the problem?¡±


    Phillip noticed us, but when asked about the vige, his expression turned dark.


    Indeed, I had seen that there were some who were wounded¡­but was it really that bad?


    Perhaps I had been too relieved after hearing that there were no deaths.


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s almost miraculous that no one died, in spite of it being a monster attack on this scale¡­ But a few of the wounded are¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, we were quite lucky there. ¡­It is all because of Mr. Takumi¡¯s efforts and good Leo¡¯s aid.¡±


    ¡°Yes. That¡¯s true. However, some of the men are badly wounded. Though, they will likely live¡­¡±


    It wasn¡¯t so much due to my own efforts, but the efforts of the vigers who worked together.


    I didn¡¯t know much about monsters, but even I could see that we had been very fortunate toe out of this without any deaths.


    In the end, it was mostly because of Leo¡­ Had she arrived anyter, I and some others might not have made it.


    In any case, ording to Phillip, there were problems with some of the wounded¡­


    ¡°Some cannot move their arms after being cut¡­ While others¡­¡±


    So ording to Phillip, some of them had been wounded to a point where they could no longer move their limbs.


    That could have grave consequences. It was no wonder they didn¡¯t feel like celebrating.


    After all, some of these men may no longer be able to work.


    ¡°I see. But you need not worry about them.¡±


    ¡°There is something that you can do then?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi has prepared some herbs.¡±


    ¡°I see. Then you can help them¡­!¡±


    Sebastian brought up the herbs, and Phillip sighed with relief.


    He had be quite friendly with the vigers after drinking with them, and so he seemed to be especially concerned about their state.


    Obviously, I had also been treated very well here, and could not abandon them.


    ¡°Please gather all of the wounded into one ce. That way, I will be able to treat their wounds quickly.¡±


    ¡°I understand. Right away!¡±


    Ah, please call Mr. Hannes as well. We need to think of a ce to hold these two.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    Phillip replied as he ran off.


    The two merchants had given up some time ago, and just sat still and quite limp.


    Or perhaps it was just that they were tied up so tightly now that they couldn¡¯t move an inch.


    ¡­It hadn¡¯t been like this when they were first put on the horses¡­ I nced over to Johanna, who had a satisfied expression. I suppose she had made adjustments to the ropes after that¡­


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting. The wounded are now being gathered at the center of the vige.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Chief¡­Mr. Hannes. As for these two, we mean to escort them to Ractos tomorrow, but do you have a ce where we can keep them tonight?¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed¡­ There is a building on the outskirts of the vige that is not being used. However, it cannot be locked, so they might escape¡­¡±


    ¡°You don¡¯t need to worry about that. Johanna.¡±


    ¡°Yes! Phillip and I will keep watch. Besides, it would be very difficult for them to escape in their current state.¡±


    ¡°That is true¡­ Very well then.¡±


    Mr. Hannes had returned to the vige entrance after being called by Phillip.


    And then Sebastian asked him about a ce to hold the prisoners.


    And while it was not the most ideal ce¡­it was decided that it would be fine as long as Johanna and Phillip kept watch.


    Besides, they had been tied so tightly by Johanna that they resembled bagworms now.


    ¡­But how would they use the bathroom? ¡­Well, that was not my concern.


    ¡°Well then, Johanna. Take these two and follow Mr. Hannes. Mr. Takumi and I will go to where the wounded are kept.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Very well. Come this way. Ah, you¡¯ll find the wounded in the same spot where we held the feast.¡±


    And so Mr. Hannes and Johanna left while carrying the two merchants.


    Mr. Hannes had more reason than most to hate them, but I felt that he was holding back. At least they had been caught. He would keep control of himself while these visitors from the duke were present.


    ¡­Though, I really wouldn¡¯t have minded if he cursed them aloud¡­ Well, perhaps he was just not the type of person.


    ¡°Ah, let me know if they start to struggle. I¡¯ll send Leo to deal with it.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°I understand.¡±


    ¡°Eeee!¡±


    ¡°Eeee!¡±


    I said to Mr. Hannes as they were leaving.


    Leo nodded, and Mr. Hannes nodded back.


    And upon hearing Leo¡¯s voice, the merchants tensed up with a whimper.


    ¡­That should keep them from attempting to escape.


    ¡°Now, let¡¯s go and see the wounded.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    After seeing Mr. Hannes and the others leave, Sebastian and I took Leo and went to the vige square.


    We had to help those who were in pain as soon as possible.


    ¡°Right here, Mr. Sebastian and Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Leo!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    We arrived at the vige square and met up with Phillip.


    Just then, Rosalie saw Leo and ran to her.


    Obviously, she had not participated in the fight, but was now helping to treat the wounded¡­ I could see that her hands were covered in blood.


    ¡°Leo¡­so many are¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    She was not her usual cheerful self.


    Leo rubbed her face against Rosalie and tried tofort her.


    ¡°Rosalie. It will be fine. I will heal them.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°You will? Mr. Takumi. Leo.¡±


    ¡°I mean it. So cheer up, Rosalie.¡±

 Chapter 193

    Chapter 193


    I Treated the Vigers


    I talked to the unhappy Rosalie as well.


    It was hard to see a child so young be left like that.


    But after hearing me and seeing Leo nod, Rosalie recovered a little.


    Now, I had to treat the wounded so that the children wouldn¡¯t be so worried.


    ¡°Ah, pharmacist¡­ Thanks to you, the vige was saved. However¡­¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. Leave this to me.¡±


    The first one was the man who had fought near me and injured his arm so that he couldn¡¯t hold a sword.


    His right arm was covered in bandages, but they were soaked red with blood.


    ¡°Here, with this¡­¡±


    ¡°The pain¡­it¡¯s fading away¡­¡±


    After Sebastian unraveled the bandages, I pressed the Loe against the bleeding arm.


    The effect was instantaneous, and the wound closed uppletely.


    And after a few seconds, there wasn¡¯t even a scar left. The only proof that there ever was a wound was the blood.


    ¡°I¡­can move my arm! Pharmacist¡­how can I repay you¡­¡±


    ¡°You don¡¯t need to. Now, you will be able to continue to work in the vige.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    He had probably been in despair over the prospect of not being able to use that arm anymore.


    His eyes filled with tears, and he nodded with gratitude¡­ Yes, he would be fine now.


    ¡°Onto the next¡­¡±


    ¡°This way, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Are you all right, Phillip?¡±


    Phillip immediately brought the next wounded person.


    He was carrying the man on his back¡­ When I looked closely, both of the man¡¯s legs were bandaged.


    ¡°Yes, I¡¯m fine. Mr. Takumi, this man can¡¯t move his legs. But while the injury is bad, he has no feeling in them¡­¡±


    ¡°I see. Sebastian, if you will.¡±


    ¡°Of course.¡±


    Phillipid the man down on the ground.


    I felt bad about having him lie on the dirt, but I needed to get a good look at the injury.


    Sebastian then unwrapped the bandages, and I pressed the Loe onto the wound.


    ¡­Perhaps the nerves in his legs were cut¡­


    I had no medical knowledge but I had heard of such things happening.


    It was so bad that he couldn¡¯t feel it¡­


    ¡°¡­Ah¡­I can feel pain¡­ah¡­but now it¡¯s gone¡­¡±


    Blood was still flowing as I pressed the Loe into him. After a short while, he could feel his legs again, which meant feeling pain.


    But after grimacing for a second, his expression turned to surprise.


    ¡°All right. That should do it.¡±


    ¡°I can feel my legs again¡­is such a thing¡­ Thank you so much, pharmacist! And you too, Phillip!¡±


    ¡°No, I¡¯m just d that you¡¯re better.¡±


    ¡°What a relief!¡±


    Now that he could feel his legs again, and there wasn¡¯t even a scar, the man jumped to his feet and cheered.


    He seemed to be pretty close with Phillip. Perhaps he was one of the vigers Phillip had gotten drunk with after hitting it off.


    Which meant he was one of the people who suggested Phillip drink that wine¡­ Well, I suppose it was a good thing, as we discovered the ss sphere because of it.


    ¡°Next is¡­¡±


    And so with Sebastian and Phillip, and the help of those who were healed, we went around and treated the wounded with Loe.


    Upon seeing the vigers recover, Rosalie hugged Leo with tears of joy streaming down her face.


    She must have been incredibly worried. What a gentle child.


    Leo enveloped Rosalie in her fur, as if to soothe her.


    ¡°Phew¡­ There was enough Loe after all.¡±


    Loe could not be used more than once.


    Sebastian did say that they were still somewhat potent, but they were covered in blood and grime¡­


    And I didn¡¯t want to take any risks of spreading diseases now.


    I thought it would be safer to just use one Loe per person.


    We treated nine people in all.


    There were others with mild injuries, and there was no need to use Loe on them.


    Unless they were in danger of losing limbs or being paralyzed, they should be fine.


    In the end, considering how many orcs we had been up against, the damage had not been great.


    ¡­Though, it didn¡¯t make me hate the merchants any less.


    No part of me felt merciful, like I had once with Nick¡­


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, thank you so much.¡±


    ¡°I would like to thank you as well, as a representative of the duke.¡±


    ¡°No, but¡­¡±


    ¡°If you weren¡¯t here, Mr. Takumi, this vige would have been destroyed by the orcs. And there would not have been a single survivor.¡±


    ¡°On behalf of my master, Lord Ekenhart¡­ Thank you for saving Range vige, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    After all the work was done, we had gathered in the living room of Mr. Hannes¡¯s house.


    Just as I was about to drink the tea that his wife poured for us, Mr. Hannes and Sebastian bowed their heads and thanked me.


    ¡­As for the tea, it was not quite as good as the tea Ms. Lyra made at the mansion.


    Such rude thoughts shed in my mind, but it was only to escape reality.


    ¡­Because it was a little awkward to be thanked by people like this¡­


    ¡°So, Sebastian. Why did youe back with Leo?¡±


    Once all the ufortable business of gratitude was over, and things rxed again, I asked Sebastian why he was here.


    While both he and Leo had helped in arresting the merchants and dealing with matters in the vige, I was still curious.


    After all, he was supposed to be busy with matters rted to the store. And so I couldn¡¯t help but wonder.

 Chapter 194

    Chapter 194


    Sebastian Told Me Why He Had Come


    ¡°Last night, Leo and Phillip arrived at the mansion.¡±


    In Mr. Hannes¡¯s house, Sebastian began to exin the reason that he was here.


    ¡°At first, Lady ire and I were surprised that Leo would return without you. But then Phillip told us what had happened.¡±


    ¡°And the ss sphere?¡±


    ¡°He passed it on to us. ¡­And I dropped it off with Isabelle on my way here¡­¡±


    ¡°Ms. Isabelle?¡±


    She was an elderly woman in Ractos who had a store that sold magic tools.


    That was where I had my magic energy and Gift looked into.


    ¡°Because we sensed magic energy in the ss sphere. I thought that it was necessary to study it after hearing your theories from Philip. ¡­And that is not something we can do at the mansion.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    As she had a store that sold magic goods, she would be very knowledgeable about them.


    And I suppose it wasforting knowing that it was in the hands of an expert now.


    ¡°But are you sure she will be alright? I hope she won¡¯t be ill¡­¡±


    ¡°I have thought of that as well. And so it was ced in a box that seals any magic effects that it might have.¡±


    ¡°I didn¡¯t know that such things existed.¡±


    ¡°Yes. As long as it is inside, it should have no effect and be of no danger to anyone. Besides, even if she did take it out, she would do so with the proper safety measures.¡±


    Sebastian clearly had a lot of trust in Ms. Isabelle.


    When I had visited, the two had talked as if they were good friends. Perhaps they had known each other for a long time.


    Regardless, it seemed that she would be capable of learning what the ss sphere was without spreading the disease everywhere.


    ¡°But we¡¯re getting side-tracked¡­ After hearing everything from Phillip, I epted the sphere and listened to your theories.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°And I quite agreed with them¡­ And since both Leo and Phillip were tired, I had them rest.¡±


    Leo had done her best, running all of the way back to the mansion. And Phillip would have been tired from just riding on her.


    It would be exhausting just trying to stay on while Leo was running that fast.


    ¡°The next day, we were to send Leo and Phillip back to this vige, but¡­¡±


    ¡°What happened?¡±


    Sebastian hesitated for a moment.


    Did something happen before they left?


    ¡°Something seemed toe over Leo suddenly. She was restless in a way that I have never seen her before.¡±


    ¡°Leo?¡±


    ¡°Yes. She is usually so calm and quiet when around you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°¡­So Leo was acting strangely¡­¡±


    Yes, the Leo I knew had always been calm sinceing to this world. She never seemed restless like that.


    ¡­Unless it was rted to food¡­


    ¡°We were not sure what to do about it. We knew that she always listens to you, Mr. Takumi¡­ but there was no guarantee that she would listen to anyone else¡­¡±


    ¡°I think she would have. She would listen to you and Ms. ire, at least.¡±


    Leo had seen a lot of this world too.


    And when it came to those who were friendly towards us, like Ms. ire and those in the mansion, she should be cooperative.


    ¡­Especially with Tilura, as they were always ying together.


    ¡°Yes, it turned out that way in the end. But surely you can understand how we might have felt anxious about having such an agitated Silver Fenrir in front of us.¡±


    Silver Wolves weren¡¯t supposed to obey anyone. And so it was no wonder they might worry.


    And they knew a lot about Silver Fenrirs.


    ¡°But that is when Lady Tilura came.¡±


    ¡°She did?¡±


    ¡°Yes. And she was able to pet Leo and calm her down.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    I had just been thinking about it. Tilura was the closest to Leo in that mansion.


    Even if Ms. ire, Ms. Lyra or Ms. Gelda had ridden on Leo, they didn¡¯t hug or y with her all the time.


    ¡°It was also Lady Tilura who asked Leo what was wrong. As we could only get a vague impression of what Leo was trying to tell us.¡±


    ¡°I suppose Tilura has spent enough time with Leo that she can now understand her a little.¡±


    I could understand Leo quite clearly.


    However, it wasn¡¯t the same for the other residents in the mansion.


    That¡¯s why I couldn¡¯t just send Leo alone, and she had to go with Phillip.


    Though, if Tilura could understand her, then maybe I could have sent Leo by herself after all¡­ Well, I could only say that in hindsight.


    ¡°Thanks to Lady Tilura, we were able to hear what Leo was trying to say. And that¡¯s when we learned that this vige was in danger.¡±


    ¡°Leo detected that this vige was in danger?¡±


    ¡°That is the case. How¡­ I do not know¡­ Is it because she is a Silver Fenrir¡­? Or because you two share a strong bond¡­¡±


    ording to Sebastian, Leo somehow knew that something bad was going to happen here.


    As this was before they left the mansion, it would have been around midday¡­which was before the merchants arrived in the vige. Before even Mr. Hannes and I knew that there was an approaching danger.


    Sebastian could not exin it, and neither could I. But I couldn¡¯t help but hope that it was because of our strong bond.


    Though, it could just be an innate ability of Silver Fenrirs¡­


    While far away, she might have sensed the approach of many monsters¡­ That seemed the most likely exnation.

 Chapter 195

    Chapter 195


    It Was Ms. ire Who Sent Sebastian


    ¡°Apparently, Leo had detected the presence of monsters. First, we decided to send Johanna back as well. Because it would be best to have someone who could fight.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true.¡±


    ¡°We wanted to send Nichs as well, but¡­ Lady ire was against it.¡±


    ¡°She was?¡±


    Johanna and Nichs were guards at the mansion, just like Phillip.


    Of course, if they were going to fight monsters, it seemed like the right choice¡­ So why did Ms. ire stop it¡­?


    ¡°ording to Lady ire, he wouldn¡¯t be assisting much, if Leo was already there. And it would be better for me to go in order to help settle things and gain information¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Hmm¡­ It¡¯s true that once Leo is fighting without holding back, the orcs won¡¯t stand a chance.¡±


    In fact, once Leo arrived, she had dealt with everything on her own.


    She wasn¡¯t there to cooperate with us. She did as she pleased and defeated them all.


    Considering this, I could understand why Sebastian had been sent instead.


    He had more authority and could give directions.


    ¡°Besides, it would be best if I could talk to you directly.¡±


    ¡°Yes, but aren¡¯t you also busy with other matters? What about that store¡­¡±


    ¡°Lady ire is more than capable of handling them for now. After all, she was the one who was adamant about meing here.¡±


    Sebastian said with a smile.


    Perhaps he wanted Ms. ire to do some of his work as part of her education.


    As the daughter of a duke, there was much that she needed to learn¡­ Of course, she was already a very capable person.


    ¡°And that exins my presence here.¡±


    ¡°I see. ¡­Ah, but howe I only saw Leo at first? The rest of you didn¡¯t seem to arrive tillter¡­?¡±


    It was when I was about to be killed. Leo jumped in and defeated the orc for me.


    While I hadn¡¯ gotten a good look, I very much doubted that Sebastian was on her back at the time. He would not have been able to hold on.


    ¡°Yes, we got off of Leo before entering the vige.¡±


    ¡°But¡­why? Wouldn¡¯t it have been faster to go together?¡±


    ¡°Because¡­Leo started to act even more restless than before.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­¡±


    ¡°It seemed likely that something had happened in the vige, and so we got off so that Leo could go on ahead. That way, she would reach you faster.¡±


    Leo didn¡¯t run her fastest when carrying people.


    Otherwise, people might get flung off.


    And so they had gotten off so that Leo would be able to run her fastest.


    ¡°And judging by what happened here, that was the right decision. I think Leo sensed that you were in immediate danger.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see. Yes, it¡¯s because of that that I was only injured. ¡­Had she been anyter¡­ I don¡¯t really want to think about it¡­¡±


    If Leo hadn¡¯t arrived right when she did, the orc¡¯s attack would have hit me right in the head. There was no doubt about that.


    And what then¡­ A chill went down my spine.


    Thanks to Sebastian¡¯s decision, and Leo¡¯s senses, she had been able to reach me in time.


    ¡°After that, we followed Leo to the vige, as you know. ¡­Lady ire was also right, and Leo had no trouble dealing with the orcs on her own¡­¡±


    ¡°I see. That exins everything.¡±


    ¡°Leo really is amazing¡­ She knew you were in danger and was able to help¡­ If only I could be so useful as a butler¡­¡±


    And this wasn¡¯t the first time that Leo had surprised me with her ability to sense danger¡­


    In fact, she was always helping me.


    Not just her, but Mr. Ekenhart, Ms. ire, Tilura and Sebastian helped me as well.


    ¡°I think you are doing enough to fulfill your role as a butler, Sebastian. ¡­If anything, you are doing more than that for everyone, including me.¡±


    Sebastian had also helped me a lot.


    That was why Mr. Ekenhart and everyone at the mansion put so much trust in him.


    ¡°I do hope that you are right.¡±


    ¡°You really have no need to worry about that.¡±


    I wasn¡¯t sure why I was now in the position of encouraging him¡­ Ah, we were talking about how wonderful Leo was for following and saving her master¡­ Except Leo wasn¡¯t a servant, but a friend. So she wasn¡¯t evenparable to someone like Sebastian.


    Not that I wasn¡¯t grateful for everything.


    In any case, I should change the subject¡­ Was there something that I needed to ask him?


    ¡­Ah, that¡¯s right.


    ¡°There is something else I want to ask you, Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°So you forcefully changed the subject. Does that mean you think that I am not worthy of being a butler¡­?¡±


    ¡°No, but let¡¯s drop that for now.¡±


    As it was obvious that I wanted to discuss something else, Sebastian made a show of looking disappointed.


    But when he looked away, I could see the corner of his mouth curl into a grin.


    ¡°¡­I suppose I have no choice then. What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°No choice¡­ Well, nevermind. It¡¯s about the Gift¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Is it really so urgent¡­?¡±


    And then Sebastian nced over to Mr. Hannes.


    ¡°Ah¡­that¡¯s right¡­¡±


    Mr. Hannes just thought that I was an ordinary pharmacist.


    As I had not told him about the Gift, I couldn¡¯t talk about it here¡­

 Chapter 196

    Chapter 196


    I Asked About Weed Cultivation


    ¡°¡­We can discuss it in detailter.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    And so it was decided that we should discuss Weed Cultivation at another time.


    After that, we stopped Mr. Hannes, who seemed to want to hold a feast, and then we had ate dinner and got ready to sleep


    Leo had yed with the children and eaten some sausages that were prepared, and so she went off to the horse stables with a satisfied expression.


    Thanks for everything today, Leo.


    You really saved us.


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I had only thanked her in my heart, but Leo barked once in reply as she left.


    It really did feel like we had a connection. That made me happy.


    ¡°Excuse me. Oh, are you going to bed already?¡±


    ¡°Sebastian?¡±


    Just as I had returned to my room andy on the bed, Sebastian entered.


    As for Sebastian, he would stay in another empty room in Mr. Hannes¡¯s house.


    Since there was only one room left, Sebastian, Phillip, and Johanna would share it. Though, not all at once, as Phillip and Johanna took turns keeping watch on the merchants.


    It seemed that they didn¡¯t really mind having men and women in the same room.


    ¡°What do you want at this hour?¡±


    ¡°I just remembered what we were talking about earlier. About Weed Cultivation.¡±


    ¡°Ah, I see.¡±


    Sebastian was here to talk about Weed Cultivation, as we were unable to discuss it in front of Mr. Hannes.


    I could tell by his expression that he was clearly very interested. He could not wait to hear what I had to say.


    Sebastian seemed to really enjoy the acquiring of new knowledge.


    ¡°So, what is it that you wanted to ask me? I do not know a lot about the Gift¡­but I will tell you what I do know.¡±


    ¡°Well, you know a lot more than anyone else¡­ Uh, I have a question with regards to Weed Cultivation¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, what is it?¡±


    ¡°As the name implies, it¡¯s a Gift that makes weeds grow. You put your hand on the ground¡­and the nt will grow from that spot.¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed.¡±


    Up until now, I had always ced my hand on the ground in the back garden when using Weed Cultivation.


    Weeds¡­well, nts. So I had thought that it made sense that they should grow from the ground.


    And yet something very unexpected had happened while fighting the orcs.


    I was so desperate, and so I didn¡¯t remember everything clearly. But I did my best to exin what had happened to Sebastian.


    ¡°On the orc¡¯s body¡­near the chest. I ced my hand on it, and then Weed Cultivation was activated.¡±


    ¡°The orc¡­ And then what happened?¡±


    ¡°As always, the weed I was thinking about¡­the herb, it began to grow. And this is that herb.¡±


    ¡°It looks the same as the herbs you¡¯ve made before.¡±


    I showed Sebastian the herbs that I had grown on the orc.


    As it looked the same as any other herb, I believe the effect would also be the same.


    However¡­I wasn¡¯t sure I would want to eat something that came out of an orc¡¯s body.


    ¡°¡­And what happened to that orc?¡±


    ¡°After Weed Cultivation was activated, it seemed like he died just as the nt started to grow. Though, I¡¯m not sure about the precise moment¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, you were in the middle of a battle, so it cannot be helped. However¡­yes¡­¡±


    ¡°Can you tell me anything?¡±


    Sebastian started to think about what he had heard.


    Perhaps he had an idea?


    ¡°I am not sure, but¡­ Weeds and nts absorb nutrients from the ground.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    To be precise, it was dirt, light, water and carbon dioxide, etcetera. But there was no point in saying that now.


    Besides, he was right that it was from the dirt.


    ¡°Perhaps by using Weed Cultivation towards the orc, it¡­absorbed the nutrients¡­or energy¡­¡±


    ¡°From the orc¡­ However, what about the garden that I always use Weed Cultivation in¡­?¡±


    Up until now, I¡¯ve made many herbs in the back garden with Weed Cultivation.


    If it was necessary to absorb nutrients, and the equivalent energy was enough to kill an orc in an instant, then surely the soil in the garden would be barren by now.


    However, there had been no signs of that. Besides, other nts and flowers that I hadn¡¯t made were still growing there.


    ¡°I do not know how to exin that¡­ Is it different with soil¡­or¡­hmm¡­maybe¡­¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    ¡°When you used Weed Cultivation on the orc, the sun had already set?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Perhaps that was the reason then.¡±


    ¡°It was because it was night?¡±


    But I had used Weed Cultivation in the garden after the sun went down before.


    So I doubted there was a connection there¡­


    ¡°Because we know from research that nts require sunlight.¡±


    ¡°¡­Hmm.¡±


    That¡¯s what I was thinking about earlier.


    It didn¡¯t have to be sunlight though. It could be a fluorescent light and that would be enough for photosynthesis.


    In any case, that was necessary for nts to grow.


    ¡°Perhaps the orc hadn¡¯t been under the light for long enough. While the soil in the garden is under the light all day.¡±


    ¡°The light¡­¡±


    ¡°Orcs generally live in the forest¡­and so they do not get much sun. And considering that they were brought here by carriage, they would not have had much opportunity to be bathed in sunlight.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    But could something like exposure to sunlight really be rted to it?


    If the sunlight isn¡¯t directly hitting the nts, then surely it has nothing to do with photosynthesis.


    ¡°The soil always absorbs light and stores its power. On the other hand, orcs do not get enough sun, and store little power. And so once the nt sucked in the nutrients after the sun had set, it lost all of its power¡­ That is my guess.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    My own knowledge of nts made me disagree with Sebastian. However, this was a world of magic, and it likely had its own rules.


    So perhaps in this world, nts didn¡¯t get light directly from the sun, but sucked in the sun¡¯s power that was stored in the ground, and that was how they grew¡­

 Chapter 197

    Chapter 197


    We Discussed the Transportation of the Wine


    ¡°Well, it is mostly spection. It could be different. We can find out more after returning to the mansion and studying the soil.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. I wouldn¡¯t want to be ruining the soil without knowing it. And so I will be careful.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sure it will be fine. We haven¡¯t noticed any change yet, and the soil gets plenty of sun.¡±


    ¡°I see. Well, I will still be careful.¡±


    We just needed to see if there is any change to it or not.


    And if there is any change to the surrounding soil or nts¡­I would just have to work somece else.


    ¡°I guess, I just want to know why it was activated on an orc¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Up until now, it was thought that it would only work on the ground.¡±


    The problem wasn¡¯t so much that the orc had died, but why Weed Activation could be activated with an orc¡¯s body in the first ce.


    As I was making nts, I thought that it was only obvious that it would require soil.


    ¡­But it activated with living creatures and took their life¡­ That made the ability a lot more powerful.


    However, if I didn¡¯t fully understand what had happened, I wouldn¡¯t be able to touch other people without worrying about it¡­


    ¡°Why it activated¡­I really do not know¡­¡±


    ¡°Even you, Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°It is not as if I have a lot of knowledge about the Gift. ¡­Yes¡­perhaps we should ask Isabelle in Ractos.¡±


    ¡°Ms. Isabelle?¡±


    Ms. Isabelle sold magic tools. But did she also know a lot about the Gift?


    ¡°Well, she has a wide breadth of knowledge. And she is the one who first looked into your Gift, so she might be able to tell you something. Besides, we have to see her about the ss sphere anyway.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­the ss sphere.¡±


    We could just ask about Weed Cultivation while we are there.


    As we will pass Ractos on the way back to the mansion, we will be able to stop by.


    And so I agreed to Sebastian¡¯s suggestion and the conversation ended.


    ¡°Well, good night then.¡±


    ¡°Yes, good night.¡±


    Sebastian left the room, and Iy down in order to go to sleep.


    Today¡­had been very eventful.


    But there were promising developments with matters concerning the illness and Weed Cultivation, and so I was d that I hade here.


    And even if it weren¡¯t the case, I had helped save the people from the orcs. That was the biggest thing.


    ¡­Of course, I wouldn¡¯t have been able to do much on my own. And while I felt a little regret about that, I felt thankful towards Leo and Sebastian as I drifted off to sleep.


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    The next day, I spoke with Sebastian while eating breakfast.


    I had forgotten about it yesterday, due to the matter of the orcs and merchants, but there was also the transportation of the wine.


    ¡°I didn¡¯t expect you to do such a thing, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°I just thought it would be a waste¡­it was an impulse buy, I suppose. I thought that I might be able to use it.¡±


    Sebastian was at a loss for words after I exined to him that I had purchased the barrels of wine.


    Well, I suppose it was a pretty bold move¡­but I just wanted to help them.


    By the way, I had asked Mr. Hannes to prepare some sausages for Leo¡¯s breakfast.


    While it was her favorite, it wouldn¡¯t do for her to eat only that all of the time, and so there was also a vegetable soup.


    ¡°I see¡­ Transporting the wine barrels¡­that will be a little difficult¡­¡±


    ¡°Too difficult?¡±


    ¡°No¡­you could always send people and wagons. However¡­it will have to be after we go to Ractos.¡±


    ording to Sebastian, it was not likely that I¡¯d be able to move the wine barrels anytime soon.


    It was no wonder¡­they were too heavy for people to carry, and it wouldn¡¯t be realistic to roll them all of the way back.


    ¡°I suppose it will take time to prepare the wagons and personnel?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­several days at the least¡­¡±


    ¡°It might go bad¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed.¡±


    The wine I had bought was currently kept in a ce separate from the storage house.


    It was a wooden building that no one lived in, which meant they were out of the sun. However, it wasn¡¯t nearly as cool as a cer, which was not good for long-term storage.


    Perhaps if they were in sealed ss bottles¡­but they were in barrels.


    And there was too much to change containers¡­ What should we do¡­


    ¡°Even if you could remove the cause of the sickness from it¡­the taste will likely suffer¡­¡±


    ¡°And transporting it will also take several days¡­¡±


    Ractos was about three days from here on horseback¡­ And so a wagon would probably be four or five days.


    Furthermore, given how heavy the wine barrels were, it would probably take over five days to reach the mansion.


    So that was nine to ten days at best.


    ¡°Well, there is no guarantee that it will be drinkable again in the first ce. So I suppose it¡¯s too early to be worrying about the taste.¡±


    ¡°But it¡¯s wine.¡±


    ¡°Yes, but my main purpose was to prevent Range vige from suffering a great financial loss. And I was able to do that.¡±


    ¡°I see. Well, there is no problem then. Let¡¯s hire a wagon to go to Ractos.¡±


    Sebastian said with a grin, and then he left the house.


    I suppose he had an idea. But why did he look so entertained just now¡­?


    ¡°¡­Phillip?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­ Please help¡­¡±


    ¡°What happened?¡±


    After finishing breakfast, I thanked Mr. Hannes¡¯s wife and went outside to chase after Sebastian. That¡¯s when I saw a tied up Phillip lying next to Leo.

 Chapter 198

    Chapter 198


    Phillip Was Punished


    ¡°I thought that we should send Phillip to the town of Ractos.¡±


    ¡°That seems like a good idea. But why is he tied up?¡±


    ¡°So that Leo can carry him. You were attacked by monsters, Mr. Takumi, while Leo was away¡­ Well, the vige was attacked¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    But how was that rted to tying up Phillip?


    ¡°After such an event, it will be difficult to convince Leo to part with you again.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Leo nodded at this exnation from Sebastian.


    I was grateful that Leo felt that way.


    ¡°And so this is a way of shortening the time that Leo is away from you as much as possible. This way, Leo can run to Ractos quickly, and return the same day.¡±


    ¡°¡­I¡­see¡­¡±


    Or did I¡­?


    It was true that if Leo didn¡¯t have to worry about the rider, she could probably run to Ractos and back in half a day.


    Now, if Phillip was tied up like this¡­did that mean¡­?


    ¡°¡­You tied him so that he won¡¯t fall off of Leo?¡±


    ¡°Exactly. If Phillip is tied onto Leo, then he will not fall off no matter how fast she runs.¡±


    ¡°Well, that¡¯s true¡­but¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    Phillip was looking at me with a pleading expression¡­ But I didn¡¯t think I would be able to stop Sebastian, who seemed to find this amusing¡­


    ¡°Phillip, ept your fate. After all¡­I heard about how you¡¯ve been behaving sinceing to this vige.¡±


    ¡°¡­What! Was it you, Mr. Takumi!?¡±


    ¡°No, I heard from Mr. Hannes and the other vigers.¡±


    Apparently, Sebastian had heard from the others about how Phillip wasted no time in getting drunk off of the wine.


    As I did not want Phillip to get into any trouble, I had kept my mouth shut about that.


    ¡°As the guard of His Grace¡¯s house, you came to this vige and drank wine¡­ This is your punishment. But at least you won¡¯t die.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°¡­Tsk!¡±


    So this task was also a punishment for Phillip.


    As Sebastian announced the sentence cheerfully, Leo also nodded.


    Well, he wouldn¡¯t die as long as he stayed on Leo.


    And Leo understood that as well.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Leo¡­you too¡­¡±


    Perhaps Leo wanted him to repent as well¡­ She was now on Sebastian¡¯s side¡­


    Sorry, Phillip.


    My hands are tied on this one.


    ¡°Now, Johanna.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Sorry, Phillip.¡±


    ¡°Please don¡¯t!¡±


    As Phillip struggled, Johanna, who had left the merchants to be guarded by the vigers, came and put Phillip onto Leo¡¯s back.


    Though he was struggling, he was helpless while she expertly tied him to Leo.


    ¡°Oh, I can¡¯t forget this¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Sebastian took out a small barrel and strapped it to Leo, as well.


    ¡°What is that?¡±


    ¡°It contains the wine. I want Isabelle to look into it while she studies the ss sphere.¡±


    ¡°Ah, I see.¡±


    As Ms. Isabelle was studying the ss sphere now, it would make sense to have her study the actual wine that was infected as well.


    Perhaps she would be able to find a way to reverse the effect.


    ¡°Now, Phillip. Your job is to hire some wagons and deliver that to Isabelle.¡±


    ¡°¡­I understand¡­¡±


    ¡°Also, Good Leo. Please return as soon as you put Phillip down.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Knowing that there was no way out of it, Phillip agreed with a somber expression.


    Leo just nodded cheerfully.


    ¡­Also, it seemed like Sebastian was able tomunicate with Leo just fine¡­?


    ¡°Now, are you fine with everything, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°¡­Uh, yes. Sorry, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Ahhhhhh¡­¡±


    Sebastian confirmed it with me onest time.


    But it was toote to stop things now¡­ And Leo was ready to go.


    When Sebastian gave the signal, Leo barked once and then ran off like the wind.


    Phillip¡¯s voice faded away as Leo disappeared into the distance.


    That speed was a little¡­ He would definitely fall off if he was just holding on¡­ So it was a good thing that he was tied.


    ¡°Ah.¡±


    ¡°What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    I realized it after I could no longer see Leo.


    ¡°Who is going to untie Phillip once they reach Ractos?¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­¡±


    When I asked the question, both Sebastian and Johanna murmured at the same time.


    So neither of them had been thinking about it.


    ¡°I¡¯m sure that your Leo will think of something?¡±


    ¡°¡­But it might be difficult¡­?¡±


    While she was a Silver Fenrir, surely she could not untie someone from her own back.


    It wasn¡¯t like her paws would be able to reach him¡­


    ¡°Hmm¡­ I suppose we¡¯ll just have to hope that someone over there will realize and do it.¡±


    ¡°Indeed?¡±


    ¡°Well, the guards are acquainted with Leo and Phillip. It will be fine.¡±


    While Sebastian thought that being able to punish Phillip and send him to Ractos was killing two birds with one stone, he had not considered the need to untie the ropes.


    It was unusual for Sebastian to be so forgetful, but things had moved at such a quick pace, so perhaps he didn¡¯t have time to consider everything.


    And I was in no ce to judge, since I was the one who bought wine without thinking of a way to transport it.


    ¡°And next¡­we must escort the merchants.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°When will we leave?¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed¡­We need to take them to the town as soon as possible for questioning¡­ After breakfast, then. Johanna¡­have the horses ready by then.¡±


    ¡°Certainly!¡±


    ¡°After breakfast, got it. Will it be fine without Leo?¡±


    ¡°They have been threatened so much that they have lost all will to resist. Besides, I will cast pursuing magic on them, so even if they were able to escape, we can just chase after them.¡±

 Chapter 199

    Chapter 199


    The Merchants Were Escorted Away


    It was decided that they¡¯d take the merchants to Ractos after lunch.


    Leo would return during the evening or night at thetest. If that¡¯s the case, then I would be fine even on my own¡­ I doubted we¡¯d be attacked by monsters again.


    Sebastian intended to cast the same tracking magic on the merchants that he cast on Nick.


    And so we would be able to capture them easily even if they managed to escape.


    Also, since I still had some time, I would make some herbs with Weed Cultivation.


    ¡°All right. I¡¯m going to the back of Mr. Hannes¡¯s house so I can make some herbs.¡±


    ¡°Is there something you need?¡±


    ¡°Well, I¡¯ve been away from the mansion for quite a long time. And so I thought I¡¯d make some herbs for Ractos.¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed. Phillip brought some with him, along with the ss sphere¡­but if you stay in this vige for a few more days, then they will likely run out.¡±


    ¡°Yes. And so I¡¯ll make as much as I can.¡±


    ¡°Very well. But don¡¯t tire yourself.¡±


    After telling Sebastian what I would do, we parted ways.


    And so I headed to the house that was quite familiar to me now, so I could focus on growing herbs.


    ¡°Sebastian, here are the herbs. Please send my regards to Mr. Kalis.¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course. ¡­This seems like a lot¡­ How do you feel?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m fine. But I¡¯ll avoid using Weed Cultivation for the rest of the day.¡±


    I had worked for a few hours, and had made so much that I wondered if I had gone a little too far.


    After eating lunch, I watched as Sebastian and Johanna took the merchants and set off for Ractos.


    Sebastian had been surprised when I handed him the herbs at the vige entrance, but I promised him that I wouldn¡¯t make anymore that day.


    Thest thing I wanted to do was faint while I was staying in this vige¡­ Of course, I didn¡¯t want to faint anywhere.


    ¡°Well, just be careful.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°And¡­ Ah, that¡¯s right. When we arrive in Ractos, the merchants will be questioned¡­and so I¡¯ll have to stay there for a while.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Well, I¡¯ll leave for Ractos as soon as Phillip arrives with the wagons.¡±


    ¡°Yes. We will meet in Ractos.¡±


    If everything went smoothly, Phillip would return in four to five days.


    And since Sebastian would be carrying the merchants, the horses would not be able to run very fast.


    And so once Phillip returns and I ride on Leo after loading all of the barrels onto the wagons, then I should arrive in Ractos just as all the questioning was finished.


    Close enough, anyway.


    And once I met up with Sebastian, we could go and see Isabelle.


    ¡°See you soon, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes, please be careful.¡±


    ¡°Goodbye.¡±


    ¡°You too, Johanna.¡±


    Unlike when we brought the merchants to the vige, they had put the merchants into the back of a wagon with Johanna to monitor them, while Sebastian was in the driver¡¯s seat.


    It was one of the wagons that the merchants had brought, and the only one that hadn¡¯t been damaged.


    The others were either destroyed by the orcs or trampled over by the horses.


    But I suppose it was lucky that even one of them was usable, considering their cargo.


    Once the wagon was out of sight, I went back into the vige.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, when is Leoing back?¡±


    ¡°Rosalie. Hmm. I think it will be a little longer.¡±


    When I was back near Mr. Hannes¡¯s house, Rosalie approached me.


    It seemed like she was waiting for Leo¡¯s return.


    They had be good friends, and I was happy to see it.


    ¡°I want to y with Leo again!¡±


    ¡°Leo is so amazing!¡±


    A few other children had gathered around Rosalie. I suppose they were all waiting for Leo.


    They were the same children that Leo had yed with.


    ¡°Leo is running her fastest right now. She¡¯ll be back soon. I hope you will all y with her when she arrives?¡±


    ¡°Of course! Won¡¯t we?¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    I said to the children, and Rosalie replied cheerfully.


    The other children were also looking forward to it, and they smiled and nodded.


    ¡°It¡¯s good to see the children so energetic. ¡­It¡¯s been a while since they were like this. I am so grateful towards Leo.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Hannes.¡±


    As I watched the children, Mr. Hannes appeared to my side.


    He smiled at the sight of his granddaughter.


    ¡°Well, there was the disease that had spread¡­ But the atmosphere is so much brighter now.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°But even before the disease, we were all so busy with making the wine. And the children had little to do.¡±


    ¡°You couldn¡¯t y with them?¡±


    ¡°I am not proud of it¡­ But everyone who could work had to cut down trees and make barrels. And the wine¡­ The vige was very different once we started making the wine.¡±


    I understood why the vige would seem like a dark ce when everyone was sick.


    I had seen it in person.


    But what about before that?


    ording to Mr. Hannes, the adults were so busy with work, and the children were often neglected.


    Right now, perhaps due to there being less wine, and having to rest after the battle with the orcs, there were adults resting all over the vige. And they watched the running children with gentle expressions.


    Some of them were even ying with them.


    It didn¡¯t look like a vige where the adults were too busy to spend time with the children.


    ¡°Even if the vige was doing well¡­I feel it wasn¡¯t the happiest ce for our young. The only sounds you heard were of people working, not theughter of children.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    I thought back to thepany I used to work at. If asked whether or not it was sessful, I would say that it was.


    However, all one would hear was the angry shouts of my boss, and people shifting me to the new people.


    We didn¡¯t even have time to have friendly chats with coworkers.


    And while things were likely not that bad here, they still had to put their work before anything else.


    ¡­It was in order to live, and so I couldn¡¯t me them.

 Chapter 200

    Chapter 200


    I Spent My Time Rxing in Range Vige


    ¡°A ce where the children are happy¡­ That is probably really important. No matter how much work there is, the vige will not survive if the next generation doesn¡¯t bear the load.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Even if things are good now, it will mean nothing if the children all leave.¡±


    They may make more money, but the time wille when they will have to let the next generation take over.


    And if the children are gone, then it will all be over.


    And so it was important to ensure that the children did not leave.


    Of course, they couldn¡¯t spend all their time with the children as well, so the bnce was difficult to achieve.


    ¡°After this incident with the illness, I am unsure of our future when ites to making wine. However, thanks to you, Mr. Takumi, the vige is not in as much of a desperate situation as we would have been. Perhaps this will be a good opportunity to reconsider things.¡±


    We knew for a fact that the wine had spread the illness.


    Even if this knowledge wasn¡¯t made public, rumors would spread eventually.


    And so no matter how delicious the wine was, fewer people would want to buy from this vige.


    And so their ie would be reduced greatly.


    ¡°Will you be fine?¡±


    ¡°Well, we did not even buy any grapes this time. So we have some money left from that. In the meantime, we¡¯ll have to think about what must be done for this vige.¡±


    They could use the money for the grapes and find a different way of supporting themselves.


    I didn¡¯t know if they would stop making winepletely, but as long as their ie was guaranteed to decrease, it would make little sense to have everyone in the vige focus on that.


    As the orcs had been brought in by the merchants, there would be a lot of anxiety about where they would get grapes from now. Could they even buy them from another territory?


    In fact, now that the connection between that store and the merchants was revealed, and the Count¡¯s misdeeds uncovered, it would greatly affect his rtionship with the duke¡­


    ¡°Thankfully, our wood can still be sold in the town. If we aren¡¯t using the barrels for wine, we can sell them to other towns and viges.¡±


    They could probably make a decent amount by just selling the wood materials.


    That would help them survive until they found a long-term solution.


    ¡°Before the wine stops selling?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I need to think of the vige and move quickly¡­ Well, think quickly. It is important.¡±


    ¡°That is true¡­¡±


    As Mr. Hannes was the chief of the vige, he needed to be ahead of the others when thinking about things.


    However, I couldn¡¯t help but feel a little sad about that delicious wine being gone forever.


    Even though it had spread the disease, the real reason was the ss sphere that the merchant had brought.


    But people didn¡¯t care about such details when spreading rumors¡­ Once rumors about the wine being the cause started to spread, it would just be a matter of time before its reputation was ruined.


    ¡°Well, perhaps these are just the ramblings of an old man.¡±


    Still, I was worried.


    Was it my personality or¡­ I suppose it was due to my past experiences.


    I knew what it was like to be so consumed by work, and I felt like the situation in the vige was simr to the situation that I was in.


    Things were different now, and while I didn¡¯t have all the answers, I couldn¡¯t help but think about it.


    ¡­The wine was good¡­ That was another reason.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°Ah, it¡¯s Leo!¡±


    As I was talking with Mr. Hannes, and thinking about the future of the vige, more time had passed than I thought.


    I heard Leo¡¯s voice from far away, and the children began to shout excitedly.


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Wee back, Leo. That¡¯s a good girl.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    She had run past me at an incredible speed, but then realized it and came back frantically.


    Then she dug her ws into the ground noisily in order to stop right in front of me, and I proceeded to pet her.


    ¡°Leo!¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    After seeing that Leo was back, the children all gathered around her.


    No matter where Leo went, she was always popr with the children.


    To them, Leo wasn¡¯t a frightening monster. It was like they could tell that she was gentle¡­


    Or maybe they just saw her as a ymate.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, Mr. Hannes. I think Leo is really thirsty. Do you have any water or milk?¡±


    ¡°Of course. I¡¯ll prepare some milk right away.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Leo! Let¡¯s y!¡±


    She had run nonstop to the town of Ractos and back. Assuming that she was thirsty, I asked Mr. Hannes to bring her something to drink.


    Leo wagged her tail happily when she heard that it would be milk.


    She had worked so hard, and deserved a treat at the very least.


    The kids yed with her tail as one after another, they gathered around her.


    ¡°Here you go, good Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff-wuff. Glug-glug¡­¡±


    ¡°She drinks so fast¡­¡±


    She must have been very thirsty. Leo practically dunked her face into the bucket of milk and drank.


    After drinking it all, I wiped the milk on her face with a towel.


    I thought she should be clean if she was going to y with the children.


    ¡°As I was saying before, it really is nice to see the children ying.¡±


    ¡°Yes. And Leo really enjoys it.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Ahahahah!¡±


    We sat at a table in the vige square and watched Leo as she yed with them.


    Tea was brought out, and I was able to rx as the time passed leisurely.


    Like this, I spent the next few days in the vige quietly.


    There was nothing really to do. I did feel a little bad, but Mr. Hannes insisted that I could stay for as long as I¡¯d like, since I had saved them.


    Still, I had no intention of epting their hospitality for too long.


    And while I did spend timezily watching Leo y, I also didn¡¯t forget to run and train, so that my body wouldn¡¯t grow weak.


    Also, I made some herbs behind Mr. Hannes¡¯s house, so I could give them to Mr. Kalister.


    I had given some to Sebastian, but he would need more soon.


    However, even as I rxed during the days, there was always something on my mind.


    It was about the vige¡¯s wine.


    I didn¡¯t know what Mr. Hannes and the others would do, but it would be a waste to abandon the wine business entirely. Also, what work could the adults do¡­that would still afford them enough time to spend with the children¡­?


    While it seemed like there was nothing I could do, it still bothered me.

 Chapter 201

    Chapter 201


    I Left Range Vige


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting.¡±


    ¡°Thank you for your hard work, Phillip.¡±


    I had spent a rxing six days in the vige, which made it nine days in total?


    It was then that Phillip arrived from Ractos, along with several horse-drawn wagons.


    ¡°By the way¡­how did you manage to detach yourself from Leo?¡±


    ¡°¡­Leo just tore the ropes with her mouth¡­ And so I was able to get off¡­ Or rather¡­fall off¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    As Phillip would have been unable to untie the ropes himself, Leo had torn the ropes that were around her body.


    So Sebastian had been wrong about the guards doing it, but it hardly mattered now.


    Phillip winced as he seemed to remember the pain of falling to the ground.


    ¡­Perhaps I should tell Leo to be careful¡­but she had made such a difficult journey, and I didn¡¯t want to admonish her either¡­


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, we have finished loading the barrels of wine.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    Phillip and I also helped, and we were able to load all of the barrels that I had purchased.


    And they were also strapped on securely so that they wouldn¡¯t fall outter.


    Once we had confirmed that they were all on, the job was finished.


    ¡°Should we leave immediately?¡±


    ¡°¡­I would like to rest a little¡­¡±


    I looked at the tired-looking Phillip and asked if we should leave at once.


    Aftering to this vige, Phillip had to ride Leo back to the mansion, and then return to the vige and help with the orcs, and then monitor the merchants, and then he was tied to Leo as she ran to Ractos. And if that wasn¡¯t enough, he had to bring several wagons back to the vige¡­ It was a rather harsh schedule when I thought about it¡­ So it was no wonder that he felt tired.


    It was also more than enough to forgive the whole matter of drunkenness and falling asleep in the wine storage house.


    ¡°Well, you and the others, as well as the horses should rest.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    Mr. Hannes suggested that they all rest in the vige.


    Aside from Phillip, there were drivers from Ractos as well, and they were also tired.


    ¡°Very well, then you can leave as soon as you are rested, Phillip. I will go on ahead to Ractos.¡±


    ¡°You are going to meet up with Mr. Sebastian, yes? He told me when we met on the road.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    So Sebastian and Phillip had crossed paths between Ractos and the vige. Well, it was no surprise if they were on the same road.


    ¡°Leo. Let¡¯s go.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Just like when we hade, I had all of my belongings wrapped up in arge cloth and strapped it to Leo¡¯s back.


    And then I climbed onto Leo so we could depart for Ractos.


    As I had stayed in the vige for quite a while, I did feel a little sad to be leaving it.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, it is not much, but please take this.¡±


    ¡°¡­What is it?¡±


    ¡°Some of our most aged wine that we keep in the back. Since you seemed to enjoy our wine so much.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Is that all right, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    When I was on top of Leo, Mr. Hannes hade and brought me a small barrel of wine.


    This wine was not affected by the disease.


    It was delicious, and I had been wanting to drink it again, so I was quite grateful.


    Perhaps I could drink it with Ms. ire when I returned¡­ If she drinks, that is.


    ¡­And Tilura and Milina were too young.


    I strapped the barrel behind my other belongings, so that I would be holding onto it while riding.


    While this was an unexpected increase in baggage, Leo seemed to be fine.


    ¡°Fairwell, Mr. Hannes. Thank you for everything.¡±


    ¡°No, not all. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Come again, Leo!¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    I then said my goodbyes.


    While it was sad, we could alwayse here again.


    As we were about to leave, the children also came out and shouted at Leo.


    Upon hearing this, Leo barked in reply and then began to run from the vige.


    ¡°Well, you¡¯ll have toe back then and y with the children.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    As I talked to her, Leo ran at an even slower pace than when we hade.


    Leo had enjoyed ying just as much as them.


    While ymates like Tilura, Sherry and Milina were waiting for her back at the mansion, it was not really the same thing.


    ¡­Besides, Sherry was more like a baby that she took care of.


    ¡°Leo. Just keep going straighter here!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    After we had been on the road for some time¡­


    Normally, you would have changed direction at the crossroad, and Leo was about to make a turn, but I told her to continue going straight.


    Leo barked in reply, and instead of slowing down, continued to run ahead.


    I didn¡¯t want her to run on the main road and startle passersby.


    ¡­Though, it might be a little toote for such concerns, since she had already run down that road before, with Phillip tied to her back¡­


    Well, the fewer horrified people, the better.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ What is it, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Kuuunn¡­¡±


    After she had been running for a while, Leo suddenly slowed down and tried to tell me something.


    What was it¡­


    Leo then stoppedpletely, and so I got off and asked her what was wrong. She then barked pleadingly.


    Uh¡­you¡¯re hungry¡­?


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right¡­ You haven¡¯t eaten since this morning.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Leo nodded.


    Now that I thought about it, Phillip had arrived in the vige just before midday.


    And then we had loaded the wine and left without any time to rest.


    As the sun was starting to set, it was no wonder that she was hungry.


    ¡­In fact, I was pretty hungry as well¡­


    ¡°I never thought of such things at my old job. All right, Leo. Let¡¯s eat!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    We weren¡¯t even allowed to take breaks at work, so there was no time to eat lunch.


    But it is important to rest¡­ And while I knew that it was bad to skip meals, I always prioritized getting some sleep over eating.


    And so it wasn¡¯t until I came to this world that I started eating three proper meals again¡­ It was good that I could live a more healthy life now.


    ¡­Perhaps that was why I never felt sick.

 Chapter 202

    Chapter 202


    We Arrived at Ractos


    ¡°Leo, if you¡¯d be so kind.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wou¡­grau!¡±


    I had gathered some fallen tree branches, and then had Leo ignite them so we could have a good bonfire.


    Unlike when we had first left the mansion, we did not have a lot of food with us. However, they did give us some bread and soup.


    I was grateful to Mr. Hannes¡¯s wife for that.


    ¡°It¡¯s not¡­much¡­ There¡¯s some sausages. I¡¯ll sandwich them with bread. Here.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    As I didn¡¯t have enough sausages for Leo to be full, I added some bread.


    Still, Leo ate it happily.


    In the meantime, I would heat up the soup.


    ¡°Ah¡­this soup really is delicious. There is somethingforting about it. And it warms you right up.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Do you want to try some? Here.¡±


    ¡°Guff-guff¡­ Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Isn¡¯t it good?¡±


    As I drank the heated up vegetable soup, Leo looked at me with interest.


    And so I gave her some, and then Leo sighed after tasting it¡­ She really was expressive¡­


    I had prepared some milk for her¡­ But perhaps she would prefer it if it was hot.


    Since she had just had hot soup, some hot milk would be perfect. And so I gave her some of that as well.


    ¡°All right, we should get going then. If we don¡¯t hurry, we¡¯ll bete in meeting up with Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Leo was satisfied after having her bread, sausages, soup and milk, and she stood up leisurely after I climbed onto her back.


    I had already extinguished the fire and packed everything.


    While we hadn¡¯t spent much time eating, it really was no time to be rxing here.


    ¡°Sorry to make you run right after eating, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    As if to suggest that running right after eating didn¡¯t affect her, Leo dashed out at a great speed.


    Perhaps she was able to run faster now because she was no longer battling the feeling of hunger.


    Though, she was surely heavier now¡­ She really was full of energy.


    ¡°¡­We¡¯ll have to go down the main road here. Over there, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    While she had been going straight after leaving Range vige, we couldn¡¯t continue like that forever.


    Otherwise, we would end up in the northern mountains.


    As we wanted to reach the town, we had to follow the road to the eastern gate.


    Though, I did feel sorry for the people that would be shocked by Leo.


    ¡°We¡¯re almost there.¡±


    Leo returned to the main road and dashed towards Ractos.


    As it was gettingte, there weren¡¯t that many people around, but I still saw some shocked expressions as we passed people by.


    Some even bowed with reverence¡­ Did people actually worship Silver Fenrirs?


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Good Leo.¡±


    ¡°Good evening.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    We reached the gates and greeted the guards.


    As it was the same person who we met thest time, we recognized each other.


    ¡°I was greatly surprised when Leo came with a man strapped to her back¡­ But I see that you have apanied her this time.¡±


    ¡°Haha¡­ Yes, that was special.¡±


    So, the guard had seen Leo and Phillip enter the town.


    It must have been a very surprising sight indeed.


    ¡°Uhh, I¡¯m supposed to meet Sebastian here, but¡­¡±


    ¡°In that case, pleasee this way. We¡¯ve already finished interrogating the merchants.¡±


    ¡°I understand. Sorry, Leo. Can you wait here?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    The guard had pointed to the guard house to the side of the gate.


    As Leo would not fit inside, I had to ask her to wait for me.


    ¡°If Leo is here, she will be the best guard there can be.¡±


    ¡°Haha, that¡¯s true. But I hope she doesn¡¯t scare away people who are trying to enter Ractos¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ I¡¯ll let the others know, just in case.¡±


    Yes, when Leo sat by the gate, she did look like the most reliable guard.


    Besides, she seemed to have some kind of detection ability.


    However, she might end up scaring people as well.


    Thinking this, the guard had gone to tell the other guards about it, so they could exin it to any peopleing into Ractos.


    Everything should be fine now¡­ I think.


    ¡°Excuse me. I¡¯ve brought Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. You must be tired. I did not expect you so soon.¡±


    I had been led to a room in the guard house.


    A table and chair had been prepared. It was like a small waiting room¡­ A cup of tea was on the table, and Sebastian appeared to be resting.


    ¡°Leo did her best. So, what happened to the merchants? I heard that the questioning was finished.¡±


    ¡°Well, they have seen Leo. So it was easy to make them talk by just reminding them of her. I will fill you in once we return to the mansion. I have to make a report to Lady ire anyway.¡±


    As the merchants had been threatened with Leo before, it was a simple thing to threaten them again, since they were still scared.


    Thanks to this, the interrogation had gone smoothly. I suppose some good coulde out of people being frightened by Leo¡­


    No, I still felt sorry for her when it happened¡­ After all, she was the most adorable girl.


    Regardless, Sebastian said that we would talk about itter.


    Indeed, it would be better to discuss it when Ms. ire was present.


    Besides, if we started talking about it now, our return trip would be dyed.


    ¡°Very well.¡±


    ¡°Now, let us pay Isabelle a visit. Is Leo outside now?¡±


    ¡°Yes. She couldn¡¯t exactly fit in this building.¡±


    Sebastian stood up and we said our farewells to the guards and went outside.


    After reuniting with Leo, we went into the town.


    We walked down the streets for some time, and then eventually arrived at Ms. Isabelle¡¯s shop.


    ¡°It really is¡­a unique looking ce¡­¡±


    ¡°That is Isabelle¡¯s taste. She says you must stick out if you are going to sell magic tools¡­¡±


    Just like before, there was a hexagram sign in the front, and a ck door. The building itself was painted a gray color. It definitely stuck out whenpared to the other buildings in the area.


    I didn¡¯t know how this appearance was rted to magic tools, but if that¡¯s what she says¡­it must be true.


    ¡­Or maybe she just likes that it looks mysterious?

 Chapter 203

    Chapter 203


    We Talked To Ms. Isabelle


    ¡°Excuse me.¡±


    ¡°Wee¡­ Ah, it¡¯s just you. What do you want?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s about the ss sphere I asked you to inspect the other day. Did you learn anything from it?¡±


    ¡°Ah, that thing. Yes, it was rather impressive, it was. Something the average magic user would not be able to make.¡±


    I had Leo wait outside as we entered. And the same old woman we sawst time¡­Ms. Isabelle, was sitting there.


    Sebastian then asked her about the ss sphere. It seemed like she had already finished inspecting it.


    She sounded quite impressed with it.


    ¡°What can you tell us?¡±


    ¡°Now, wait a minute. I¡¯ll put on some tea first. ¡­I think this will be a long talk. So sit down.¡±


    ¡°Very well.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Ms. Isabelle stopped Sebastian, who wanted to hear about it as soon as possible, and she got up to get some tea.


    I did catch her ncing at me as she left. It seemed that she realized that the ss sphere wasn¡¯t the only reason we were here.


    Aside from Sebastian, elderly men and women in this world seemed to be very wise and perceptive¡­or maybe it was just me.


    ¡°Now, about the ss sphere.¡±


    Ms. Isabelle began to talk after she had poured the tea and sat down again.


    ¡°While it is impressive, as I¡¯ve mentioned¡­it is also dangerous. If used by someone ignorant, it could lead to a great disaster.¡±


    ¡°Indeed?¡±


    After studying it, Ms. Isabelle had determined that it was very dangerous.


    Someone who was ignorant¡­ Well, the merchants had not been ignorant, and look what happened¡­ So she was definitely right about it being dangerous.


    ¡°Once the ss sphere is ced somewhere, it begins to gather magic energy. The magic energy that is found in nature. There is no ce that does not have this energy. Understand?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Sebastian was nodding at her exnation.


    I had heard that there was magic energy within humans, but I didn¡¯t know about it being in nature.


    But since Sebastian was following just fine, I didn¡¯t want to interrupt her, and so I kept silent.


    ¡­Besides, Sebastian would dly exin it to meter.


    ¡°It gathers magic energy and then amplifies the source of the illness within the sphere. After all, the source of the illness can be found in the air as well. And by using the magic energy as a medium, it can make the amplified illness¡­envelop nearby food or drinks.¡±


    ¡°Not humans directly?¡±


    ¡°Not directly, no. This is only spection, but I think that the magic energy within people interferes with it. But once you eat or drink something that has been affected by the energy and illness from the sphere¡­¡±


    ¡°Then the person would be sick¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. But it is worse, because those who be sick can then spread it to other people. Because the source of the illness continues to increase.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ So that¡¯s why.¡±


    While I still didn¡¯t know all the details of how it worked, what she was saying was in line with what I had expected.


    The ss sphere was used to infect the wine.


    And people who drank the wine became sick¡­ And then it would spread from person to person¡­explosively fast.


    Thankfully, no one had be sick in Range vige after that. However, as there was a lot of traffic in and out of Ractos, it would likely continue to spread for some time.


    Thinking this, I was d that I told them of simple preventive measures like washing hands and mouths.


    ¡°The frightening thing is that there is no way to check if food or drink has been infected. It could happen without you knowing, and so you eat it and spread the disease¡­ You cannot stop it.¡±


    ¡°Even magic detection won¡¯t work?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s not the kind of energy that human senses can detect. You would have to use a magic tool for that. ¡­And will you really check all the food and drink with a magic tool?¡±


    ¡°¡­That would be difficult.¡±


    So, once it was mixed with food or drink, there was no way for a person to detect it.


    I myself had not been able to sense anything from the wine.


    And it was not very realistic to use magic tools to check everything, when so many people were eating and drinking.


    Such magic tools would be expensive, and there was likely not even enough to go around.


    ¡­It made it all the more impressive that Leo was able to tell the wine apart.


    ¡°You were right to ce it in a sealed box when bringing it to me. While it wouldn¡¯t affect anyone directly, if there was any food nearby, it could have led to quite a disaster.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. We do not want it to spread any further. Mr. Takumi made the right decision.¡±


    ¡°I did?¡±


    ¡°Yes. You were the one who saw that there was something wrong with the sphere¡­ When bringing it to me, Phillip said that you warned him to keep it away from other things as much as possible.¡±


    ¡°Well, yes¡­¡±


    I had thought it was suspicious, but it was Leo who confirmed it¡­


    And since I knew about pathogenic organisms, it seemed best to keep it isted¡­ But people didn¡¯t know about such things in this world.


    ¡°So we know what the sphere does. I will leave the disposing of it to you¡­ Please make sure that it isn¡¯t misused.¡±


    ¡°Very well. While it may be an impressive magic tool, its use could lead to grave consequences.¡±


    Sebastian decided to let Ms. Isabelle deal with the ss sphere.


    As she was a specialist, she would not use it to do anything wrong.


    He clearly had a lot of trust in her.


    ¡°Also¡­I believe Phillip also brought some wine¡­?¡±


    ¡°Ah, that. I thought it was a gift at first, and almost drank it.¡±


    Sebastian had sent a small barrel with Phillip.


    And inside was some of the infected wine that Leo had sniffed out. Had she identally drank it, then Ms. Isabelle would have be sick as well¡­


    While she would have been healed with some Ramogi, it would not have been too pleasant for her.

 Chapter 204

    Chapter 204


    We Also Asked About Weed Cultivation


    ¡°Well, I¡¯m d that you didn¡¯t drink it then.¡±


    ¡°Quite so. After checking it with the magic tool, I was able to confirm that it was influenced by the ss sphere.¡±


    ¡°So it was¡­ Is there any way to make the wine drinkable again?¡±


    Whether or not the infected wine could be changed¡­ Or rather, whether or not the wine I purchased was of any use at all.


    ¡°Well, it could be drinkable, yes. Once you remove the disease from it.¡±


    ¡°How can we do that?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s simple. Just boil it once so that the magic energy is diffused. And then the magic energy that is responsible for the disease will disappear.¡±


    ¡°And it won¡¯t affect its surroundings?¡±


    ¡°It will not. As you know, magic energy has no power once it disperses. And it is the same even if that energy has a disease.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    So it can be drunk if you kill the bacteria by boiling it¡­


    I didn¡¯t know much about magic energy, but if you thought of it as pathogenic bacteria, then the idea of boiling it to kill the bacteria made sense.


    ¡­However, that also means burning off the alcohol¡­


    ¡°It wouldn¡¯t really be wine¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, it wouldn¡¯t. But it tastes good, and can be treated like grape juice.¡±


    ¡°You drank it?¡±


    ¡°I had a taste, yes. After I was sure that the magic energy in it was gone.¡±


    So, Ms. Isabelle had drunk some of it.


    Grape juice, huh¡­? While it was a pity that it wouldn¡¯t be wine anymore, it could still be enjoyed.


    That was at least better than throwing it away. And Tilura might be happy to hear it.


    ¡­Of course, boiling all of it would also be a hassle.


    ¡°We can have Helena deal with it at the mansion. After making it very clear that it must not be drunk before, and managed strictly¡­ Especially from people like Phillip.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes¡­¡±


    I nodded at Sebastian¡¯s words, but I was sure that we didn¡¯t need to worry about Phillip anymore.


    He was very repentant after being tied to Leo. Besides, he knew what the wine had caused in the vige. There was no way he would want to drink it again if it would make him sick¡­ I think.


    ¡°Now, is there anything else you want to ask me? Especially you¡­uh, Mr. Takumi, is it?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Mr. Takumi, I think you better tell Isabelle.¡±


    ¡°Very well.¡±


    Ms. Isabelle had looked at me and seemed to know there was something on my mind. It was true that I wanted to talk to her about Weed Cultivation.


    After being encouraged by Sebastian, I told her in detail about how Weed Cultivation had activated while I was battling an orc.


    As for Ms. Isabelle, she listened to my exnation without a hint of surprise on her face.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ I see. I understand what you are asking. However¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­?¡±


    ¡°Did I not tell you before? This Gift¡­ The effect of Weed Cultivation.¡±


    ¡°You¡­did?¡±


    Uhh¡­ Back then, what Ms. Isabelle said was¡­


    ¡°About being able to make any kind of nt, anywhere, as long as it wasn¡¯t rted to farming.¡±


    As I tried to remember, Ms. Isabelle repeated the words for me.


    Yes, she had said something to that effect.


    And then I remembered.


    ¡­Anything and anywhere¡­


    ¡°Anywhere¡­do you mean¡­it doesn¡¯t have to be on the ground?¡±


    ¡°Exactly. Your Weed Cultivation can be activated wherever you are. And so you can use an orc as a medium. Though, I don¡¯t know what will ultimately happen to living creatures if you do that.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see¡­¡±


    ¡°While it is a convenient ability¡­it is¡­¡±


    Apparently, both Sebastian and I had misunderstood Ms. Isabelle¡¯s words.


    Anywhere¡­it wasn¡¯t restricted to the ground, but quite literally anywhere¡­or anything¡­


    While Sebastian looked quite surprised as he listened, he also came to the same conclusion as I did.


    If it could be activated on an orc¡­then it could on a human as well¡­


    ¡°Are you saying that¡­it will activate on humans too?¡±


    ¡°Indeed, it will. Anything, whether alive or dead¡­¡±


    ¡°That¡­might have its uses, but¡­¡±


    ¡°A most dangerous ability¡­¡±


    This meant that it could activate on any human that I touched.


    And considering the effect it had on the orc¡­I did not want to think about what might happen to a human.


    I looked down at my hands with a feeling of fear.


    ¡°But don¡¯t worry, it won¡¯t be activated that readily.¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    As I looked at my hands fearfully, Ms. Isabelle spoke in a gentle voice.


    ¡°Humans have magic energy. Monsters do as well, but¡­it¡¯s especially weak in orcs. But the magic energy will resist.¡±


    ¡°Resist¡­?¡±


    ¡°Can magic energy really resist the Gift?¡±


    ¡°Notpletely. The Gift is too strong. However, if a person had a lot of magic energy, they should be fine. Think about it. When you activated it with the orc, were you willing it to work harder than usual?¡±


    Upon hearing Ms. Isabelle¡¯s words, I thought back on when it happened.


    When activating it, it was true that I was wishing that I had medicinal herbs.


    While I was almost always thinking about them in some way or another, regret made me think of them more than usual.


    ¡°Yes, I think I was. I was wishing that I had some¡­¡±


    ¡°That is why. The strength of the wish became the strength of the Gift. I don¡¯t know too much about it, but wishing and the Gift respond to each other.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°And so Weed Cultivation shouldn¡¯t activate unless you are wishing for it tremendously. After all, it hasn¡¯t been activated when touching people before, has it?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­that¡¯s true.¡±


    Both Sebastian and I sighed with relief upon hearing this.


    In other words, unless I am touching someone and strongly wishing for Weed Cultivation to be activated, there would be no danger.


    It still meant that I had to be careful when touching people, but I didn¡¯t have to worry much when it came to daily interactions, which was a relief.

 Chapter 205

    Chapter 205


    We Returned to the Mansion


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s not just magic energy, but the power of will is rted too¡­ Or so I¡¯ve heard. But the research on that is insufficient.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ In any case, it won¡¯t activate on living creatures unless you strongly wish for it. ¡­That¡¯s good¡­¡±


    ¡°And you need not fear it as a dangerous ability.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s a good thing you were able to hear all of this. If all we knew was that it could be activated on living creatures, then you might have been isted as a person with a dangerous ability.¡±


    Sebastian brought up the chilling possibility as I sat there with relief. But he was right. Without the whole truth, I would be judged to be a dangerous person. Someone who no one could ever touch. Someone who was separated from everyone else.


    ¡­If this was back on earth and in Japan, I might have be the subject of research.


    ¡°Thank you, Ms. Isabelle. I am now much wiser about my own ability.¡±


    ¡°Bah, it was nothing. I enjoy finding out how rare Gifts are used. And finding out about magic tools as well.¡±


    ¡°Well, thank you for everything.¡±


    ¡°Please bring me more magic artifacts if you find any. ¡­You can alsoe just to have a cup of tea as well.¡±


    We thanked Ms. Isabelle and left the store.


    ¡­Judging by thest words that she muttered, she was probably a little lonely, tending to the store all by herself.


    Perhaps it was rude of me to assume, but I somehow doubted such a store had many customers¡­


    So it may be a good idea toe and visit her the next time we were in Ractos, if we had some spare time.


    ¡°That was more fruitful than expected.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. I¡¯m d that we relied on Ms. Isabelle.¡±


    While we had ended up talking for a long time, it was all very much worth listening to.


    The ss sphere, dealing with the wine, my Weed Cultivation ability¡­ There were things that I hadn¡¯t known about, and was able to learn in detail.


    ¡°The sun will be setting soon. We should return to the mansion. I¡¯m sure that Lady ire is impatient for our return.¡±


    ¡°Does Ms. ire know that we are returning today?¡±


    ¡°I sent a message to the mansion after we arrived in Ractos.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    Sebastian was a very capable butler indeed.


    And so we decided that we should not keep Ms. ire and the others waiting for much longer.


    ¡°Now, Good Leo. May I?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    After leaving through the east gate, Leo lowered her posture so I could climb onto her back.


    Then Sebastian asked for her permission, and then climbed on as well.


    From here, Leo should be able to take us back in less than an hour.


    ¡­It had been a long time, but we could finally return.


    While the duke¡¯s house might not be my official home, it was the ce I was most familiar with.


    And though Range vige had been a rxing ce, I couldn¡¯t help but want to rx in a ce that I knew better.


    ¡°Thank you, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    As I thought of such things, we arrived at the mansion, and I thanked Leo for carrying us.


    Really, Leo had run so much for ustely, and I was very grateful.


    ¡°Wee back, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Wee back.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Leo! You¡¯re back!¡±


    ¡°Kyau-kyau!¡±


    I stepped through the front door with Sebastian.


    The servants were waiting for our return inside. As were Ms. ire, Tilura, and Sherry, who greeted us.


    So the servants came out even when it was just me¡­


    ¡°I¡¯ve returned, Ms. ire, Tilura, and Shery.¡±


    I greeted them all.


    Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda then stepped forward and took some of my belongings.


    ¡­I didn¡¯t let them take all of it, as my pride wouldn¡¯t allow it.


    Well, I also just felt modest.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Was everything alright? I heard that there was a monster attack¡­¡±


    ¡°You fought monsters!? Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°Well, it was all fine in the end.¡±


    ¡°¡­By the time that we arrived, he was badly hurt¡­ So I don¡¯t know if I would agree with everything being fine¡­¡±


    Ms. ire and Tilura must have heard it from Sebastian. They knew about my battle with the monsters.


    As Leo had detected that something was wrong, they must have been quite worried about what had happened.


    Though, Tilura seemed more interested in the fact that I had been in a real battle.


    Ah, Ms Johanna was here as well.. As she had gone to Ractos with Sebastian when escorting the merchants, she was probably the one who returned to the mansion first with the message.


    ¡°Badly hurt¡­¡±?


    ¡°It was so bad that it was astonishing that he didn¡¯t copse on the spot.¡±


    ¡°¡­Good heavens¡­ Then what happened?¡±


    ¡°I was fine. Thanks to some Loe.¡±


    ¡°Loe¡­ Thanks to Weed Cultivation then.¡±


    As I hadn¡¯t looked in a mirror, I didn¡¯t know how deep the cut actually was, but there was a lot of blood, and it wasing from my head.


    It would have likely been very bad if I didn¡¯t have any Loe.


    And it was just the excitement of battle that dulled the pain at the time.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, Mr. Takumi. What was the battle like?!¡±


    But Tilura was more interested in hearing about fighting monsters than listening to talk about a head wound.


    ¡°Tilura, that¡¯s not important now. We¡¯re talking about Mr. Takumi¡¯s wounds!¡±


    ¡°But¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha. The injury is nothing now, Ms. ire. Tilura, I¡¯ll talk to you about itter.¡±


    ¡°Okay!¡±


    ¡°Well, I¡¯ll let you put away your belongings and get settled first. Helena. How is dinner?¡±


    ¡°It can be prepared immediately.¡±


    Ms. ire admonished Tilura for being so inquisitive.


    But while I was thankful that she was worried, I really was fine.


    I would tell her as much as I couldter on¡­ It seemed like a good idea to teach her what a real fight was like.


    As Sebastian said, we had only just returned, and so I wanted to put away my things¡­ And perhaps enjoy a cup of tea.


    Ms. Helena assured us that dinner could be prepared immediately, and so we decided to all gather at the dining hall.

 Chapter 206

    Chapter 206


    We All Exchanged Information


    ¡°Master, Leo. Wee back.¡±


    ¡°Milina.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    As I was walking towards my room to drop off my things, I bumped into Milina.


    It felt like it had been a while since I was called master¡­ Though, it wasn¡¯t actually that long¡­


    ¡°I continued to study medicine while you were away!¡±


    ¡°I see. Good for you. Will you tell me how much progress you made?¡±


    She seemed so happy as she reported to me about her studies. She was kind of like a younger sister now.


    And she walked down the hall with me and told me everything until we reached my room.


    Considering how long I was away, she might have more knowledge about medicine than I do now.


    As the person who was called master, I had to do my best.


    ¡°Well, I¡¯m sure Mr. Takumi is very tired now, so we should eat dinner first.¡±


    ¡°Let¡¯s eat.¡±


    I went to the dining hall after dropping my belongings in my room.


    The food was already served on the table, and we started to eat immediately.


    While the food in Range vige was good, Ms. Helena had put a lot of effort into her cooking, and it was especially delicious.


    ¡°Sebastian. How did it go?¡±


    ¡°Yes. We acquired a lot of information, and conclusive evidence.¡±


    ¡°Oh? That is good to hear.¡±


    While we ate, Ms. ire started to converse with Sebastian.


    She likely wanted to know about the store and the illness.


    ¡°Now that I think about it, you were doing all of the work while Sebastian was away, weren¡¯t you, Ms. ire?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Though there were things that only Sebastian could do, I somehow managed to do the rest.¡±


    To me, there was something in her expression that suggested that she was quite exhausted.


    I suppose taking on Sebastian¡¯s work really was a great burden.


    ¡­Perhaps I should give her some recovery herbster?


    ¡°While you are still eating¡­ I shall make my report regarding the ss sphere that Mr. Takumi discovered.¡±


    ¡°Yes, please do. I know about the sphere, but it seems like you¡¯ve learned more about it.¡±


    While we were having dinner, since everyone was gathered together, Sebastian took the opportunity to make his report.


    Well, it seemed like it was best to do such things quickly, so it was probably a good decision.


    Though, Tilura, Sherry and Leo looked very uninterested, and continued to focus on gobbling up their food.


    ¡°Well then. About the ss sphere¡¯s effect. I went with Mr. Takumi to see Isabelle¡­¡±


    And so Sebastian started with the ss sphere.


    It was everything Ms. Isabelle had said, and I remembered it well.


    ¡°I see¡­ So it was as dangerous as we imagined.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. It is very fortunate that Mr. Takumi found it. The thought of someone using it in such a terrible way¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, it was really Leo who found it.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    To be precise, Phillip had found it first, but it was Leo who saw that it was connected to the illness.


    If Leo hadn¡¯t been there, it might have gone back to the wine storage house, and the disease would have continued to spread.


    While Leo was busy eating, she looked up and tilted her head upon hearing her name.


    ¡°Leo is so amazing. She was able to detect weak magic energy that humans cannot.¡±


    ¡°Perhaps it¡¯s rted to her sharp sense of smell as well.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Leo used to be a dog¡­ She was a wolf now, but her sense of smell would still be quite superior to humans.


    I believe¡­dogs were something like a hundred million times more sensitive to smell than humans¡­ Or was that only with smells that they liked?


    Apparently, it changed depending on the smell. Regardless, they were still much better than humans.


    Perhaps her sense of smell was enhanced even further after bing a Silver Fenrir. And she might also be sensitive to monsters.


    ¡°Next, I will tell you about the merchants that we captured. It was mostly thanks to Mr. Takumi and Leo¡¯s cooperation that we were able to catch and question them.¡±


    ¡°The merchants who left the sphere¡­¡±


    Sebastian then moved onto the interrogation.


    This was the part that I didn¡¯t know about, and so I was extra attentive.


    Though, I continued to eat the delicious food as well.


    ¡°The merchants brought monsters to Range vige.¡±


    ¡°Familiars?¡±


    ¡°No. They were just captured and imprisoned monsters. They were hidden under the tarps of the wagons so no one could see them. They were chained inside.¡±


    Then the merchants had removed the chains and released the orcs.


    Such chains wouldn¡¯t have been necessary if they were familiars. They would have been as obedient as Sherry.


    ¡°And then the monsters were unleashed on the vige. They were all orcs, so it was no wonder that they weren¡¯t familiars.¡±


    I didn¡¯t know if being orcs was a reason for them not to be familiars, but I didn¡¯t say anything.


    ¡°But thanks to the efforts of the vigers, Mr. Takumi, and Leo, the orcs were swiftly defeated.¡±


    ¡°That was very brave of you, Mr. Takumi and Leo!¡±


    ¡°Though, some were wounded¡­ It was not the best possible victory. Besides, Leo did most of the work in the end.¡±


    ¡°But it is because of you held them back until Leo¡¯s arrival, Mr. Takumi. Otherwise, I am quite sure that there would have been deaths.¡±


    As Sebastian talked about how Leo and I fought, Tilura¡¯s eyes shone with excitement.


    But it was all due to the cooperation of the vigers. I could only buy a little time. It would have been for nothing if Leo hadn¡¯t arrived. ¡­And people were still hurt.


    However, Sebastian said that it was good enough that no one had died.


    Yes, perhaps we were quite lucky.


    ¡°And what happened to the wounded?¡±


    ¡°Some were bandaged up and that was enough. Those with heavier wounds were treated with Loe by Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°I see. That is good to hear.¡±


    Ms. ire was concerned when she heard about the wounded, but looked relieved when assured that they were all fine.


    ¡°As for why the merchants brought the orcs¡­ They wished to annihte Range vige.¡±


    ¡°¡­Good heavens!¡±


    Well, it seemed obvious enough. Why else would they have brought so many orcs? The merchants really did want to kill everyst resident of the vige.


    As Sebastian spoke of it, both Ms. ire and I became very serious.

 Chapter 207

    Chapter 207


    We Listened to the Results of the Interrogation


    ¡°Their main purpose was to spread the disease and recover the sphere. As it is a rare artifact, they did not want to lose it after using it once. However, they did not expect to find Range vige in such a state.¡±


    ¡°Indeed?¡±


    ¡°When they arrived, no one was sick. As it was the vige where the disease first started to spread from, it is only natural to assume that the people there would be sick and weak.¡±


    In fact, it had been the case at first. It was just their timing that was off.


    But had the vigers still been sick when they came with the orcs, then they would not have been able to fight back¡­ Everything would have gone ording to their n, and we would have all been killed.


    ¡°Thanks to Mr. Takumi, the disease had stopped spreading¡­ But the merchants still wanted to retrieve the sphere, and so they released the orcs.¡±


    ¡°Judging by what Isabelle told you, it must be very expensive. And I¡¯m sure there are many ways one could use it for ill.¡±


    I didn¡¯t know how much it was worth exactly, but it was definitely a rare treasure.


    They would have wanted to retrieve it at any cost.


    ¡°Now, as for why they ced it in Range vige in the first ce¡­¡±


    This was the most important part.


    I believed that they were connected to the store, and by spreading the illness, they wanted to sell medicine and raise their profits.


    ¡°The merchants¡¯ purpose was to spread the illness through Range vige and recover the valuable magic tool.¡±


    ¡°And what was the reason?¡±


    ¡°The reason¡­they say that it was on Count Barsler¡¯s order.¡±


    Count Barsler¡­ The nobleman who ruled the neighboringnds.


    So it was by his order after all.


    ¡°But we don¡¯t know what the Count was thinking when making the order¡­¡±


    ¡°Even the merchants don¡¯t know?¡±


    ¡°They were just following orders. I even used Leo to threaten them, but they would not change their story. ¡­I believe that they¡¯re telling the truth.¡±


    It seemed like a typical thing for a viin to do. They were just disposable pawns who knew nothing¡­


    However, it also seemed ratherzy to send such clueless people to retrieve something as valuable as the ss sphere.


    ¡°Why would the count do such a thing¡­¡±


    ¡°I cannot say¡­ However, we already know that he does not feel kindly towards His Grace. ¡­He has made that quite in now.¡±


    As Ms. ire narrowed her eyes and muttered, Sebastian answered her.


    Sebastian was right. It was quite evident now that he saw the duke as a great enemy.


    It wasn¡¯t just the spreading of a disease, but an attempt to crush an entire vige¡­ This was no mere game.


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi. Please calm yourself. I can see it on your face, you know?¡±


    ¡°Drink this, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°¡­Sorry. ¡­Haa¡­ Thank you. It¡¯s good¡­ Yes, I am better now.¡±


    ¡°I understand how you feel, Mr. Takumi. It¡¯s not just the hostility towards this house, but he is also attacking innocent civilians in the process.¡±


    The good people of Range vige, the residents of Ractos, and the children from the orphanage.


    Many people had been involved and hurt by them. And then they had sent monsters to Range vige.


    When I thought about such things, a rage towards Count Barsler rose up in me and began to show on my face.


    But after Sebastian¡¯s remark, I calmed myself with some tea that Ms. Lyra handed to me.


    After that, I felt much more calm.


    As Ms. ire was also furrowing her brows and agreeing with me, she clearly felt something simr.


    We were all angry with this count.


    Sebastian was always calm on the surface, I¡¯m sure he also felt angry.


    ¡­After all, he had used Leo to threaten them.


    ¡°While we don¡¯t know what the count is plotting, this is a clear act of hostility towards His Grace. And so I¡¯m sure that he will react severely.¡±


    ¡°Yes, father will not ignore it when people are suffering.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was a rather wild man, but he also seemed to bepassionate.


    And so he would surely use his authority as a duke to do something.


    ¡°Also, regarding that store. I think that things will be wrapping us soon.¡±


    ¡°Are those merchants rted to the store?¡±


    ¡°Not directly, no. They did not know anything regarding the herbs being sold in Ractos. The count must have given the order to someone else.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    When I found the ss sphere, I had assumed that the merchants were connected to the store, but apparently, they were not.


    But I was aplete amateur, so it was no surprise.


    ¡°As for the store, they must have been receiving the information from the count.¡±


    ¡°Yes. About the disease and theing need for certain herbs, I suppose.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. And after receiving such information and orders, they were able to act ahead in Ractos. Also¡­¡±


    ¡°There¡¯s more?¡±


    ¡°He must be sending them gold as well. After all, they were able to buy most of the stock in the whole town.¡±


    That was also true.


    It was only because they were backed by a nobleman that they were able to do it¡­ After all, most herbs were not cheap.


    Also, they would have needed money in order to hire workers.


    Considering all of this, it was at such a scale that it couldn¡¯t be a personal project¡­ Unless that person was very rich.

 Chapter 208

    Chapter 208


    They Would Deal With The Store A Little Later


    ¡°So the count offered the funds, and then received a portion of the profits¡­ If things went ording to n, the business would be a sess. So he would not lose anything.¡±


    ¡°Why would the count do such a thing¡­¡±


    ¡°I am not sure. Is it to hurt His Grace, or merely increase his fortune¡­ Well, I doubt it is that alone¡­¡±


    As for his intention, you would have to ask him to find out.


    What purpose could he have for doing something in such a roundabout way, and hurt innocents in the process¡­


    ¡°If all he wanted to do was make a profit, he could do that on his ownnds¡­ There would be less risk of it being known outside. And there would be less taxes as well.¡±


    As Sebastian said, if he wanted to ensure that no one found out about it, doing it on his ownnd would make more sense.


    Sebastian and the others would not have found out, and he would not have made an enemy of a duke.


    But then again, he would be making his own people suffer, and there would be a lot of other problems that would arise.


    However, he went out of his way to do it on the duke¡¯snds. It had to be a purposeful act of hostility¡­ Though, that was assuming that he was even acting with any rationality.


    ¡°In any case, we know so much more now. Shouldn¡¯t we have that store closed immediately?¡±


    ¡°Well, I think we should wait a little.¡±


    ¡°¡­But why?¡±


    If the store was gone, then people wouldn¡¯t be fooled into buying their herbs.


    I wanted to lessen the number of people who suffered, but Sebastian was against it for some reason.


    ¡°Thanks to you, Mr. Takumi, good herbs are being sold in Ractos again. Also, I made sure that certain rumors of that store are spread.¡±


    ¡°Rumors?¡±


    ¡°Yes, it¡¯s quite simple. That store sells herbs of terrible quality, and one must not buy them even if they are cheap. Instead, Mr. Kalis¡¯s store¡­is run by the duke, and sells effective herbs at low prices¡­¡±


    ¡°And is the rumor working?¡±


    ¡°I checked while you had gone to Range vige. It seems to be adequately effective¡­ People do love to talk. Besides, a lot of people were helped by the herbs you made, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    Through spreading rumors about the malicious store, Sebastian was able to guide customers over to Mr. Kalis¡¯s store instead.


    ¡°It really is thanks to you. Because you lowered the price of the Ramogi.¡±


    ¡°Really?¡±


    ¡°Yes. As it was lowered as much as possible, people were willing to try it at that price. People who couldn¡¯t afford it before can now buy it, and so the spread of the disease has subsided. And the rumor continues to spread.¡±


    So now that there was enough Ramogi to go around, the illness was no longer spreading at a rapid pace.


    If we continued like this for a little longer, it would naturally subside altogether.


    And it was the people who bought it at Mr. Kalis¡¯s store that were helping to spread the rumor.


    Word of mouth really has a powerful effect in any age.


    ¡°However, why can¡¯t you deal with the other store now?¡±


    Even if their reputation was ruined and no one bought from them anymore, that was no reason to leave them be.


    ¡°To let them squirm¡­ Well, not exactly¡­ But I think they can be pushed a little closer to the brink.¡±


    ¡°What do you mean?¡±


    ¡°There is no doubt that their herbs are no longer selling now. So they must be very frantic. And so it¡¯s the perfect time to use that wine you purchased that was selected by Leo.¡±


    ¡°The wine?¡±


    Sebastian started to look highly amused.


    I felt a chill run down my back as he talked¡­ Even Ms. ire looked a little put off.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡¯s wine¡­ It will arrive in a few days. We will take some of it to the store.¡±


    ¡°And then¡­?¡±


    ¡°We will say that it is a gift, and make them drink it. ¡­But if they should hesitate or refuse¡­¡±


    ¡°You¡¯ll tell them that you know that it was used to spread the disease¡­?¡±


    ¡°Exactly. Of course, they may use some other excuse to avoid drinking it. But we¡¯ll just insist that it was from the duke himself.¡±


    If we went to the store empty-handed, they might feign ignorance.


    We did have evidence, such as the diluted herbs and medicine, but they might still find some way to avoid taking responsibility.


    I suppose Sebastian wanted to make them as desperate as possible, and then use the wine to finish them off¡­


    If he said that it was from the duke¡­they would find it difficult to refuse.


    It would be like refusing a drink from the boss of a clientpany¡­ Well, maybe not exactly.


    Still, it was rather ruthless of Sebastian, and the atmosphere in the room changed noticeably. However, he continued to look amused.


    ¡­Yes, he was clearly very angry inside as well.


    ¡°Aside from that, I must also make a report to His Grace.¡±


    ¡°To Mr. Ekenhart?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Lady ire and I have been given the authority to act on his behalf. But we are still merely representatives.¡±


    Yes, it was true.


    While they could act in his ce on many matters, it didn¡¯t mean they could make decisions about everything.


    Especially since this was rted to another nobleman. It would be necessary for Mr. Ekenhart to deal with it himself.


    ¡°When Leo returned to the mansion¡­I sent word to him about the ss sphere. However, now that we know so much more, I must write to him again.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Father must decide what is to be done.¡±


    ¡°I doubt His Grace will have any objections on the matter.¡±


    ¡°He will not forgive those who hurt his people.¡±


    Yes, Mr. Ekenhart would likely deal with them with a firm hand.


    Like Sebastian said, what would likely happen is that he would send the message and acquire permission. And then we would act¡­


    As the main house was quite far from the mansion, he may not want toe here directly.

 Chapter 209

    Chapter 209


    I Talked About The Time I Fought The Monsters


    ¡°Very well. I will write the report and send a messenger to deliver it to His Grace.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    Sebastian bowed and then left the room.


    After that, the reports¡­or meeting, ended, and things returned to the usual rxed atmosphere.


    And so I was able to drink the tea that Ms. Lyra poured and rxed as the time went by.


    It was during times like this that I could really appreciate that I was back in the mansion.


    The ce was really starting to feel like my home.


    ¡°By the way, Tilura. I hope you have been diligent with your training?¡±


    ¡°Of course. I continued to train in your absence, without rest!¡±


    As I drank my tea, I remembered to ask Tilura about her training.


    It was something that she greatly enjoyed doing, and so I doubted she would be skipping it. And it turned out that I was right.


    I had trained as well while I was gone. However, I had not been able to concentrate much, and so I was a little worried about being left behind.


    ¡°But more importantly I want to hear about you, Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°Me?¡±


    ¡°Yes. How was the battle with the monsters?¡±


    Ever since we had returned to the mansion, Tilura had shown a great interest in the battle.


    And since dinner was finished and we were all rxing here, it was the perfect time to talk about such things. And so I decided to tell Tilura about what had happened in Range vige.


    ¡°Uh, the monsters were orcs. Dozens of them. Though, I don¡¯t remember the exact number¡­¡±


    ¡°And you defeated them all by yourself?¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. Of course, not. Just like you, I have only started my sword training recently.¡±


    ¡°Is that so? Then what happened to the orcs?¡±


    Even though I could handle a sword well enough, it would be impossible for me to take on so many orcs alone.


    All I could do was buy some time.


    Well, if it was one on one, and I kept my guard up, I could defeat one orc. That showed my own growth, and I was quite happy about that.


    Tilura¡¯s eyes shone as she listened with great interest as I told her about the battle.


    Leo was curled up into a ball, and Sherryy on top of her.


    Ms. ire was just like Tilura, and seemed to be very curious and amused with what I was saying¡­ As they were sisters, they could be very simr sometimes.


    Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda stood and waited without changing their expression, but it also seemed like they were listening.


    ¡­Was this story about fighting monsters really that interesting?


    ¡°That¡¯s right, Tilura. What Mr. Ekenhart said was true after all.¡±


    ¡°Father? What do you mean?¡±


    When learning to fight with a sword from Mr. Ekenhart, he had taught me a few points to be careful of.


    As Tilura had heard them as well, she tried to remember what they were.


    ¡°About not stopping your movement duringbat¡­¡±


    ¡°Duringbat¡­ What happened?¡±


    Of course, in a one on one battle, if the opponent doesn¡¯t move, then you might stop and observe them, but when you were being attacked by multiple orcs¡­ When it was a battlefield with both allies and enemies, to stand still would be suicidal.


    When I had activated Weed Cultivation, I stopped to think about why it had happened.


    And that¡¯s when an orc targeted me from behind¡­ Thankfully, the spearhead was broken, but I was still badly injured.


    ¡°I was lucky to survive¡­ But stopping in that situation could have easily meant my death.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Oh¡­¡±


    As I talked about it, Tilura nodded seriously, as if to carve the words into her mind.


    Ms. ire also sighed with relief at my luck.


    ¡­Perhaps I shouldn¡¯t have told her about it.


    ¡°Well, it didn¡¯t just end there. After all, the orc was still going to attack me, and I couldn¡¯t ask for help, as the other vigers had their hands full.¡±


    ¡°¡­And so what happened?¡±


    ¡°¡­How exciting.¡±


    As I continued to talk, Tilura listened intently, but Ms. ire¡­seemed to be thinking out loud, which was a little awkward.


    Well, I suppose she was also listening intently in a way.


    ¡°Due to my injury, my body would not move how I wanted it to. I thought I was done for when I saw the orc raise its arms over me.¡±


    After all, I couldn¡¯t move and the orc was targeting me.


    Others were there, but none could help me.


    If I couldn¡¯t dodge it, I would have to be struck by the orc once again. And I wasn¡¯t confident that I¡¯d be able to stay conscious.


    ¡°And so I closed my eyes and braced myself¡­¡±


    ¡°Then what?¡±


    ¡°What hapened?¡±


    ¡°¡­Leo came to help me.¡±


    Tilura and Ms. ire were leaning forward as they listened.


    I almost chuckled at how simr they looked. But I held it back and continued.


    ¡°Leo did!¡±


    ¡°¡­Oh.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    When I said that Leo came, Tilura broke into a big smile and Ms. ire sighed. Leo looked up and turned to me questioningly.


    ¡°I am so d that you came when you did, Leo. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    I petted Leo, whoy next to me, and thanked her once again.


    After that, I told them about how Leo helped with capturing the merchants, and how we healed the wounded with the Loe.


    By the time that I was finished, it was quitete, and since Tilura was getting sleepy, we decided to retire for the night.


    I was quite sleepy myself, and so I decided to sleep without swing practice today.


    ¡°I can skip one day¡­ Besides, things have been so tense recently.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I was sure to at least take a bath and warm up before going to bed.


    As always, Leoy half of her body on the bed so that I could rest against her like a pillow¡­


    If anything, Leo was the one who should be coddled after working so hard.


    That being said, I was grateful for her kindness, and drifted off to sleep while enveloped in her fur.


    It really was the best way to sleep.

 Chapter 210

    Chapter 210


    I Consulted Them About Using the Wine


    The next day, I woke up feeling refreshed, thanks to Leo. And so I washed up and went down to have breakfast with the others.


    After that, Leo and I trained with Tilura, and then I studied with Milina.


    Apparently, she had made quite a lot of progress, and there were some points where she was the one who was teaching me.


    I was happy to see her work so hard, but it also reminded me that I had to do my best as well.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Can you spare a moment?¡±


    ¡°Sebastian?¡±


    After lunch, I had meant to go out to the garden to make some herbs to send to Ractos, but Sebastian stopped me.


    ¡°It¡¯s about the wine¡­ Phillip reached the vige on the same day that we met in Ractos, yes?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Phillip arrived, and I confirmed that all of the wine barrels were loaded before leaving.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ In that case, it should arrive here in four to five days¡­¡±


    Apparently, Sebastian wanted to know when the wine barrels would arrive at the mansion.


    ¡°If what Isabelle says is true, we cannot drink the wine unless it is boiled first¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ I wish there was some other way.¡±


    You could kill the source of the illness by heating it.


    But that meant burning out the alcohol, so it would be nothing more than a kind of juice.


    That was fine. And while Tilura might be happy to hear it, those who preferred wine would be disappointed.


    ¡°Herbs¡­ Do you think you might be able to do something by using Ramogi?¡±


    ¡°The Ramogi?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Ramogi is able to heal the disease that is spread through the wine. So perhaps it can change the wine without the need of heating it as well¡­¡±


    Since it works against the disease, perhaps it could remove whatever it was that was in the drink.


    ¡­While I understood why he might think this¡­it seemed unlikely.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know¡­ I won¡¯t say that it¡¯s impossible, but I would not be hopeful about that¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Well, I was thinking of decoctions and medicinal liquors¡­¡±


    Decoctions¡­ I think it was when medicine is boiled with water so you can drink it¡­ I studied it with Milina.


    As for medicinal liquor¡­ I did know a little about that as well.


    They sold them in little red boxes in pharmacies in Japan¡­


    I see¡­ The idea of mixing medicine with alcohol was not too strange then.


    ¡­Though, I didn¡¯t know how it was made¡­


    ¡°Perhaps medicinal liquor might work. It existed in the ce that I came from. But I don¡¯t know how tobine the two¡­¡±


    ¡°Of course¡­ In that case, it might be best to consult Helena about it.¡±


    ¡°Ms. Helena?¡±


    ¡°She is the head cook of this mansion. And she should have some knowledge when ites to wine.¡±


    After all¡­wine was heavily rted to cooking.


    Yes, it was obvious that we should ask her about it.


    Sebastian did now know enough to give me an answer, so I had to talk to someone else.


    Besides, as soon as the wine arrived, Ms. Helena would be involved with its fate.


    ¡°Very well. I will discuss it with her. Should I do that now?¡±


    ¡°As it is right after lunch, it should be a good time. However, don¡¯t you have to make the herbs?¡±


    ¡°Well, that won¡¯t take long. So I can do itter when I have time.¡±


    ¡°I see. Very well then. Come with me.¡±


    As I had Weed Cultivation, it did not take long to make weeds.


    If someone¡­like Ms. Lyra or Milina helped me, then it would be over quickly. And so I could do itter.


    Sebastian then guided me to the kitchen where Ms. Helena was likely to be.


    ¡­Now that I think about it, while I had been here for a while now, I had yet to see the kitchens.


    I wonder what it will be like¡­?


    ¡°Excuse me.¡±


    ¡°Sebastian? And Mr. Takumi. Did something happen?¡±


    We moved through the mansion and arrived at the kitchen. Inside, Ms. Helena and a few other cooks were in the middle of eating their meal.


    Aside from the ovens and stoves, there were metal counters, knives, wooden cutting boards, shelves filled with tableware, and a ce to wash things. It was a very substantial kitchen.


    The cooks sat around a small table in the corner and ate.


    ¡°Is this a bad time?¡±


    ¡°¡­Mmm¡­gulp¡­ Not at all. I have just finished. So, what brought you all of the way down here?¡±


    As she was nearly finished, Ms. Helena hurriedly ate thest few bites on her te and swallowed before answering Sebastian.


    The other cooks also began to eat hurriedly.


    As it wasn¡¯t an emergency, there really was no need¡­


    ¡°We wanted to ask you about something. It¡¯s not rted to food, but drink¡­¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s unusual of you, Sebastian. Is there something you want us to improve?¡±


    ¡°No, that is not it. Lady ire is very satisfied with your work here.¡±


    ¡°I also enjoy your cooking very much, and have noints.¡±


    As it was unusual for Sebastian the butler to confide in her, Ms. Helena wondered if there wereints about the food.


    As she worked for nobles, she would have to always listen and make improvements based on such feedback, which must be a lot of work.


    ¡­Perhaps it was like having to listen to customersin at a restaurant.


    But Sebastian and I then assured her that this was not the reason we were here¡­ And that her food was as good as we could hope.

 Chapter 211

    Chapter 211


    I Asked About Using Heat To Turn It Into a Different Liquor


    ¡°Thank you. Well, what do you want to ask me about then?¡±


    ¡°In a few days¡­about five days, I think, arge quantity of wine barrels will be delivered to this mansion.¡±


    ¡°Wine¡­ And why is that?¡±


    ¡°You know how Range vige is famous for its wine?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Now that she knew that we weren¡¯t there tounch someints, Ms. Helena looked quite relieved as she listened to what we had to say.


    Range vige¡¯s wine was quite famous, which was no surprise to anyone who tasted it.


    And since she was a cook, Ms. Helena knew this as well.


    ¡°But a great deal of their wine is no longer drinkable.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ I hope everything is alright with them?¡±


    ¡°As for the vige, things are fine¡­ The reason for it was removed. So any future wine will be unaffected.¡±


    Ms. Helena was concerned about the vige, but Sebastian assured her that there was no problem now.


    The ss sphere was no longer there, so there was nothing to affect the wine.


    Besides, I doubt Mr. Hannes would allow anything like that to happen again.


    He was also busy thinking about the vige¡¯s future.


    If there was anything that I could do to help, I would dly do it.


    ¡°Regardless, all of the wine that will arrive will be undrinkable.¡±


    ¡°Undrinkable wine¡­ Why would you bring that here?¡±


    ¡°As for that¡­¡±


    ¡°I will exin. ¡­While this wine is undrinkable¡­I thought it would be a waste to throw all of it out¡­ And so I bought it from them.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    As I was the one who bought it, I thought that I best exin my reasons.


    Sebastian agreed, as he stopped talking and turned to me.


    While I said that I thought it would be a waste, my real motive had been to lessen the losses for the vige.


    ¡°I¡¯m sure you know just how good their wine is, Ms. Helena.¡±


    ¡°Yes. There is something about that wonderful taste that sets it apart from other wines. Though, Lady ire does not drink very much, and so we do not buy it¡­¡±


    Ms. Helena knew that wine from Range vige was especially delicious.


    Perhaps she had looked into it to use for her cooking.


    ¡°While Sebastian said that it is undrinkable¡­it can be drunk safely again by adding heat.¡±


    ¡°Heat¡­ You are going to boil it?¡±


    ¡°Yes. That way, you can remove what is making it undrinkable.¡±


    ¡°¡­But, if you boil it¡­¡±


    ¡°Of course, it will no longer be alcoholic.¡±


    Ms. Helena scowled at this.


    ¡°Well, I suppose it will be a good enough juice¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ Yes. Lady Tilura will be able to drink it.¡±


    ¡°Yes. But I was wondering if there might be another way¡­¡±


    ¡°Another way to¡­drink the undrinkable wine¡­?¡±


    Ms. Helena also agreed that Tilura would appreciate some grape juice.


    When the wine was that good, it would still be delicious after boiling it.


    Still, Ms. Helena folded her arms and tried to think of a different solution.


    The other cooks, who had been listening, also looked like they were deep in thought.


    ¡°So, adding heat removes the illness? ¡­Is there no other way to remove it?¡±


    ¡°Well, the circumstances are rather special. But normally, that would be the only way.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see¡­ It will be quite difficult then¡­¡±


    Even though Ms. Helena was a brilliant cook, she could not easily think of an alternative method to doing it.


    ¡°¡­I might have an idea?¡±


    As we pondered on this, one of the cooks suddenly spoke up.


    ¡°Really? What idea?¡±


    ¡°Well¡­ I don¡¯t know if it will actually work¡­ But I¡¯ve heard that there are ways of adding heat to wine and turning it into a different kind of alcoholic drink.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­?¡±


    After Sebastian¡¯s encouragement, the cook spoke, but with little confidence.


    Adding heat to create a new drink¡­ That did sound familiar¡­


    ¡°I have heard about that as well. ¡­It was a drink that they made in a far away ce. Uhh, I think that they distill it to separate theponents and then cool it off to make it liquid again¡­¡±


    Ms. Helena had heard of it as well, and spoke as if remembering the method.


    ¡°Hmm? I¡¯ve heard¡­¡±


    ¡°What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°No, it¡¯s just that this method sounds familiar¡­¡±


    While I tried to remember where I had heard about it before, Sebastian asked me what I was talking about.


    I answered, while searching through my memories.


    ¡°¡­Uh¡­heat¡­distill¡­liquid¡­ Ah!¡±


    ¡°Did you remember something?¡±


    As I thought of different things, it finally came to me, and I shouted loudly.


    Now, they were all looking at me with hopeful expressions.


    ¡°Ummm, yes, the method of distition. Boiling and evaporating. Something about separating things with different boiling points¡­ I don¡¯t know the details¡­¡±


    I remember conducting experiments as a child.


    Uh¡­we distilled wine to make another drink¡­


    ¡°It was¡­brandy.¡±


    ¡°Brandy¡­¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s what it is?¡±


    ¡°Yes. At least, that was what it was called where I am from. It might have a different name here¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­I¡¯ve never heard of it¡­¡±


    Perhaps it wasn¡¯t called brandy in this world.


    ording to Ms. Helena and the others, they did distill wine, so they would at least have something simr to brandy.

 Chapter 213

    Chapter 213


    Leo Enjoyed Being Able To y


    ¡°Ramogi that isn¡¯t powdered¡­ Petals with beneficial effects, dried and not dried. Also¡­¡±


    Sebastian went on listing various herbs and states to Ms. Helena.


    As for me, I did not think that adding Ramogi powder to the wine was likely to work. But Sebastian seemed convinced.


    And by testing it with Ramogi in different states, as well as other herbs, we could see how the wine would be affected, and whether or not it was viable to make some medicinal liquor.


    Regardless of the disease, he thought we could make some kind of health drink.


    Indeed, I had considered it myself. Ramogi isn¡¯t for health, so we should also try and test it with other herbs¡­


    ¡°Well, I suppose there is no harm in testing it¡­ We can make a little bit and see what happens.¡±


    ¡°Very well.¡±


    We already knew what effect Ramogi had on the illness, but that was not the case with other herbs.


    For all we knew, some herbs might just make the illness even worse.


    And so Sebastian wanted to test it in small batches first.


    After making this request to Ms. Helena and the cooks, Sebastian and I left the kitchen.


    ¡°And now we just have to wait for Phillip to return with the wine barrels.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I do hope that the herbs are effective¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, as Ms. Helena said, we will have to test it and see.¡±


    I suppose everyone felt a sort of anxiety when thinking about making something new.


    ¡°I am sorry that this took up more of your time than expected.¡±


    ¡°No. I do think it was a good idea, so please don¡¯t worry about it.¡±


    So saying, I separated from Sebastian and went out into the back garden.


    ¡°Ah, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Master!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau.¡±


    In the garden, Tilura, Milina, and Sherry were riding on Leo and ying.


    They saw and called out to me, and then Leo came running¡­


    While still carrying her passengers.


    ¡°All of you. I see that you were nice enough to y with Leo while I was gone.¡±


    ¡°Oh, but it was Leo who was nice enough to y with us, master.¡±


    ¡°Leo was gone for so long!¡±


    ¡°Kyau-kyau!¡±


    ¡°I see. You must be happy, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    They all looked like they were having fun while riding on Leo.


    As we had stayed in Range vige for quite a long time, Tilura and the others were very happy to be able to y with Leo.


    While she had returned to the mansion once to deliver the ss sphere, Leo had sensed that something was wrong and so returned to Range vige immediately. So there would have been no time to y.


    And now that she was able to y with them, Leo nodded happily and wagged her tail.


    ¡°Will you y with us too, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°No. I have to make some herbs. But you should all y to your heart¡¯s content.¡±


    ¡°Do you need my help, master?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m fine. There¡¯s no rush, so I¡¯ll do it at a leisurely pace.¡±


    I turned down Tilura¡¯s invitation, and moved to a corner of the garden in order to make the herbs.


    On the way, Milina offered to help me, but she seemed like she was having so much fun ying with Leo and Tilura.


    As I didn¡¯t want to interrupt them, I refused and told her to continue ying.


    While Sebastian said that it had taken up more time than usual, it had actually been less time than I expected.


    I would have more than enough time to use Weed Cultivation, and I had no ns for doing anything afterwards.


    ¡°Hmm. That should be enough for now.¡±


    Unlike when in Range vige, I could make all kinds of herbs, which I would then send to Mr. Kalis¡¯s store.


    While I made extra Ramogi, I had not been making much of the other herbs, and so he would probably run out of stock soon.


    In what was now a field of herbs, I listened to the others ying while I started picking.


    And while I was working, I tried to think of which herbs might be good tobine with the wine.


    ¡°After all, I can¡¯t just leave everything to Sebastian. And I should think of which herbs out of the ones that I can make would be promising.¡±


    We were already going to use Ramogi, so leaving that aside¡­ I wanted something that would be healthy.


    And it should taste good as well.


    But since it was alcoholic, it shouldn¡¯t be drunk too much either. Also, it would have to be a herb that wouldn¡¯t lose its effect when mixed.


    I¡¯d want something that through a synergistic effect, improved blood flow or cleaned your organs, perhaps.


    ¡°Oh, I have to be careful that I don¡¯t identally make something strange.¡±


    If I think about herbs and touch the ground, even without intending to, I might identally activate Weed Cultivation.


    Up until now, it had mostly worked out fine for me. But I didn¡¯t want to test with herbs that I wasn¡¯t already sure about.


    First, we had to find herbs that we knew could bebined with the wine.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ The thing is, medicine has not advanced very much in this world¡­¡±


    Perhaps there were types of herbs that only I could think of.


    I didn¡¯t know if I would actually be able to make them, but it was not a bad idea to think about it while using knowledge from my old world.


    And so I continued to listen to the others y happily as I made herbs and thought about the wine.


    ¡­And was very careful to not identally activate Weed Cultivation.


    A few dayster, just before midday. As we could not act in regards to the store yet, there was not much to do.


    I trained with Tilura and studied with Milina. And then I made herbs and thought of medicinal wine and Range vige.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. You have a visitor.¡±


    ¡°I do?¡±


    ¡°Yes, it¡¯s Mr. Nick. He is waiting in the guest room.¡±


    ¡°Ah, I see. I¡¯ll go at once.¡±


    Just as I was thinking that it would be lunch time soon, Ms. Lyra came to tell me that Nick was here.


    After returning to the mansion, a different person had been delivering the herbs to Mr. Kalis¡¯s store for a few days.


    This was to tell him that I had returned, and see how things were in the town.


    But that ended yesterday, and from today, Nick woulde to pick them up as usual.

 Chapter 212

    Chapter 212


    We Decided To Try And Make Medicinal Liquor


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Is that something that can be done here?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know¡­ It¡¯s not something that I have a lot of knowledge about¡­ Besides, there is so much wine¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed. I think it would be rather difficult. If my memory serves, it requires a great facility of some sort¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ In that case, I suppose there is no choice but to use the first method.¡±


    Sebastian asked if it could be done here, but as I did not know enough about the process, I could not say.


    When experimenting, we had done it in sks¡­which could be prepared easily enough. But as for the other tools for distilling, I wasn¡¯t so sure.


    Ms. Helena agreed that it would be difficult to do here¡­ Especially since there was so much wine.


    And we couldn¡¯t just store all of it here for long periods of time¡­as they would take up a lot of space.


    ¡°The first method¡­?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Mr. Takumi and I decided that we would have to use that method if there is no other way. Though, we were hoping that you could think of something, since you¡¯re such a good cook.¡±


    ¡°I see. And what is that method?¡±


    ¡°Mixing it with medicinal herbs. The herbs can heal someone who bes ill after drinking the wine. In that case, perhaps mixing it directly into the wine can purify it¡­¡±


    While I wasn¡¯t as expectant as Sebastian, I did have some hope that Ms. Helena would know something.


    And well¡­the idea of brandy hade up.


    ¡­But it did not seem like it would be something that we could do¡­


    ¡°Herbs¡­medicinal liquor¡­¡±


    ¡°Exactly. ¡­While it will affect the taste a little¡­ It seems like it would still be a better option to boiling it down. And if it turns out well, we might be able to sell it.¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re thinking about selling it as well?¡±


    ¡°We might as well¡­ Of course, I have no idea if it will be good enough for that. However, it would help Range vige. ¡­In case their wine stops selling.¡±


    Boiling all of the wine would be a lot of work.


    And since it was wine, most people would want to enjoy it as such¡­ Especially people like Phillip.


    And so if we could make it drinkable again with herbs, then that would be preferable.


    Besides, if it worked, then perhaps it would also be effective as a kind of medicine in itself.


    When asked if he meant to sell it like my herbs, Sebastian said that he was merely thinking of a future where the wine would no longer sell.


    Indeed, if this could be a wine that improved your health in some way, it might be able to undo the harm to their reputation, and be a popr product.


    ¡°Indeed¡­ You mean¡­the removal of the reason that it is undrinkable, or nullifying the effect? I don¡¯t know¡­it would have to be tested¡­¡±


    Ms. Helena thought hard on this method as she answered.


    Yes, as it wasn¡¯t like the disease was something that you could see, it was difficult to get a clear answer.


    ¡°Yes, in that case, why don¡¯t we try and make some then?¡±


    ¡°While I agree that we should test it, how will you know that the problem has been removed?¡±


    ¡°We will have to get Leo¡¯s cooperation.¡±


    ¡°Indeed.¡±


    Yes, it would be a good idea to test and see if it would be drinkable.


    And if that didn¡¯t work, we would have to boil it.


    If this happened, I would have to think about some other way to help Range vige.


    In any case, once we made this new wine, we would have to have Leo inspect it.


    Perhaps Ms. Isabelle could also do it with some magic tools, but considering the distance, it would be faster to have Leo do it.


    ¡°Leo?¡±


    Ms. Helena was puzzled when she heard this, as she did not know that Leo was able to tell the wine apart.


    ¡°The reason it cannot be drunk¡­to be blunt, it is the source of the disease¡­and it is not something that humans can detect. Apparently, there is some magic energy in it, but it¡¯s too weak for our senses.¡±


    ¡°Source of the disease¡­ Yes, no one would drink that.¡±


    ording to Ms. Isabelle, there was too little energy to detect.


    Ms. Helena and the cooks looked rmed when they heard about the wine being the reason that the disease had spread. But they then nodded understandingly.


    ¡°As for this source of the disease, Leo can sense it very clearly. Isn¡¯t that right, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Yes. It was thanks to Leo that we discovered that the wine was the issue in the first ce.¡±


    ¡°This is something we have confirmed with Isabelle¡­uh, a professional when ites to magic artifacts.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ In that case, we just have to let Leo inspect the finished product?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Leo will be able to tell right away if the wine is drinkable or not.¡±


    I didn¡¯t like to have to make Leo work so much like this, but I suppose we could make it up to her with a mountain of sausages.


    I would ask Leo to do itter, saying that it was a request from Ms. Helena.


    ¡°I understand. As for the herbs that will be mixed into the wine¡­¡±


    ¡°Here they are.¡±


    Ms. Helena had agreed, and the other cooks nodded.


    Upon seeing this, Sabastian took out some powdered Ramogi from his pocket and handed it to her.


    ¡°Powdered Ramogi? Well, we will know soon enough if it works.¡±


    ¡°Aside from that, there is something else I wish to try.¡±


    ¡°Something else? What is it?¡±

 Chapter 214

    Chapter 214


    I Gave Nick His Sry


    ¡°Oh, I better prepare that as well.¡±


    While on my way to the drawing room, I remembered that I had something to give to Nick, and so I returned to my room.


    Once I was sure that I had it right, I took it and went to the drawing room.


    ¡°Brother! Long time no see!¡±


    ¡°Hello, Nick.¡±


    As I hadn¡¯t seen Nick since going to Range vige, it had indeed been awhile.


    His hair seemed to have grown a little¡­so he wasn¡¯tpletely bald.


    ¡­It sort of made him look like those highschool students who y baseball¡­ Well, maybe not that young.


    ¡°Here, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Here you go, Nick.¡±


    ¡°Aye!¡±


    Ms. Gelda had been waiting with the bag of herbs. I took it from her and passed it to Nick.


    ¡°Also¡­here.¡±


    ¡°¡­Money¡­? What am I to do with it?¡±


    I gave Nick the gold, silver and bronze coins that I had brought from my room.


    However, Nick didn¡¯t understand why I was giving it to him.


    ¡°Well, you¡¯ve been working very hard. This is your sry. ¡­Though, I deducted the advance I gave youst time.¡±


    ¡°¡­Sry¡­ But¡­it¡¯s so much!¡±


    It was nearly a month since Nick started working for me, so I thought I better pay him properly now.


    While he seemed to be working seriously, I needed to show him that he would be paid, or he might run away.


    ¡­Well, I didn¡¯t want to create a situation like my oldpany. Overworked and underpaid¡­


    As for the amount, I had decided it after discussing it with Sebastian.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know if it is that much, but let¡¯s just say that I expect you to continue to work hard.¡±


    ¡°If I am being paid this much¡­ Brother, thank you! I¡¯ll stay forever!¡±


    ¡°No, I¡¯d rather you didn¡¯t go that far¡­¡±


    A few gold, silver and bronze coins.


    ording to Sebastian, it was a little higher than the average sry in Ractos.


    Leaving that for now¡­


    ¡°I¡¯ve also deducted the taxes already, so you can use this amount freely. As long as it isn¡¯t anything disreputable.¡±


    ¡°Even the taxes¡­and there is so much left¡­ I know. I will save up what I don¡¯t use for living expenses! Mr. Kalis has taught me the importance of saving money.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    It seemed like Mr. Kalis was teaching Nick to save his money.


    Regardless of how much he was getting paid, you never know what might happen.


    So it would not hurt to save up.


    While I had said that I had deducted the taxes, I had actually paid it separately.


    It was when paying my own taxes that I realized that I had to calcte it separately and¡­


    It wasn¡¯t that I did them together because I waszy or anything. Yes.


    In fact, Sebastian said that I didn¡¯t have to pay taxes, but since they were letting me stay at the mansion, and as long as I was living in this world, I wanted to pay it.


    Besides, I was making more than I thought by selling herbs¡­ And my savings continued to increase, even after buying the wine barrels. It was almost a little frightening, since I had been nothing but a humblemoner before.


    Speaking of this world¡­well, the duke¡¯snds, you were supposed to pay a fixed percentage from your sry as taxes.


    There were no other kinds of taxes, like consumption taxes or fixed property taxes, and so you only needed to pay ie taxes to be recognized as a citizen¡­ That made things a lot easier to understand.


    Though, there was a toll you had to pay when entering thends of other nobles, which was about two or three silver¡­


    And it was only one way, so you could go back for free.


    With ie taxes, you could choose to calcte it yourself, or have it deducted from your sry. I suppose if you didn¡¯t trust your employer, you might want to do it yourself.


    Not only that, but no matter how much you earn, the tax rate is the same¡­ It was impressive that they were able to run things like this. I suppose it was proof of how good Mr. Ekenhard was with his business.


    Perhaps other nobles had much higher tax rates.


    ¡°Now, please deliver this to Mr. Kalis¡¯s store.¡±


    ¡°Aye. I will do that. Leave it to me! Later!¡±


    Nick had been moved close to tears after epting his sry, and he was in good spirits as picked up the bag and headed back to Ractos.


    After seeing him go, it was time for lunch.


    I enjoyed Ms. Helena¡¯s cooking, which was as good as always, and once I was full, one of the butlers entered the dining hall.


    ¡°Excuse me¡­ Mr. Sebastian¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ What is it? ¡­I see. I will go right away.¡±


    The butler had whispered something into Sebstian¡¯s ear and then left the room.


    ¡°Excuse me, something has called for my attention. ¡­I¡¯m terribly sorry, but I think you should stay here for a while longer.¡±


    ¡°¡­What is it, Sebastian?¡±


    Sebastian addressed the room in this way, but Ms. ire was curious as to what had happened.


    ¡°A messenger has arrived from His Grace. ¡­But considering the distance from the main house, it is too soon¡­¡±


    ¡°Father? I see.¡±


    Apparently, there would be a message from Mr. Ekenhart.


    If I remember correctly, it was about a week on horseback.


    So a round trip would take two weeks¡­ While Mr. Ekenhart had been contacted about the ss sphere, it had not been that long ago, even if it was before Sebastian arrived in Range vige. So it was too soon.


    What could this mean?


    ¡°Why would Mr. Ekenhart contact you so early¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ I do not know. Father is very impulsive¡­ Something must have happened.¡±


    I asked Ms. ire, but she also did not seem to know.


    Leo would be able to make the trip in much less time, but he certainly did not have aparable method of transportation¡­ How could such distance be covered in so little time¡­


    Impulsive¡­ Yes, he certainly appeared to be that way. But I doubt he could have thought of some revolutionary way to travel.

 Chapter 215

    Chapter 215


    Milina Did Her Best To Brew Some Tea


    ¡°Everyone, please drink.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Lyra and Gelda.¡±


    ¡°And for you, Leo and Sherry.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. And you too, Milina.¡±


    ¡°No, I¡¯m still learning¡­ I just hope that I did it sessfully.¡±


    While we waited for Sebastian to return, Ms. Lyra poured tea for everyone.


    Ms. Gelda prepared milk for Leo and Sherry. They both thanked her with a polite bark.


    However, the tea that I was served was made by Milina, and she looked a little nervous.


    Though she had been taught by Ms. Lyra, she was worried that this first cup of tea she made would not taste good.


    ¡°¡­Mmm. It¡¯s delicious, Milina.¡±


    ¡°It is!? ¡­What a relief.¡±


    I took a sip of the tea that Milina had made.


    It was in no way inferior to Ms. Lyra¡¯s offerings, and the clear smell and sweetness were just right.


    I let her know this right away, in order that she could rx, and she was visibly relieved.


    It must have taken some practice to get to this point¡­


    ¡°Milina did very well. She was very insistent that she would be able pour you tea that you would enjoy, Mr. Takumi. And so she practiced while you were in Range vige.¡±


    ¡°Is that so? Thank you, Milina. It¡¯s very good.¡±


    ¡°Oh it¡¯s nothing¡­ It just seems that you always like to rx with a cup of tea¡­¡±


    So she really had been practicing while I was in Range vige.


    I thanked Milina again, but she was very modest.


    Indeed, while in this mansion, my favorite way of rxing was to sit back and rest with a cup of Ms. Lyra¡¯s tea.


    Milina must have observed this and wondered if there was anything that she could do.


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting.¡±


    ¡°Sebastian. What did my father say?¡±


    As I drank the tea and waited, Sebastian returned before ten minutes had passed.


    Ms. ire knew that this involved her father, and she was rather anxious to learn what he had to say.


    Tilura was also looking at Sebastian with an expression of concern.


    ¡°I can hardly believe it, but¡­ His Grace will arrive at this house tomorrow.¡±


    ¡°Father?!¡±


    ¡°What happened!?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    In a quiet voice, Sebastian informed the people in the room of Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s arrival.


    Upon hearing this, Ms. ire and Tilura raised their voices in rm, and even Leo stopped drinking her milk and turned towards us.


    ¡­Well, she was probably just reacting to Tilura¡¯s voice.


    ¡°Sebastian. When you say tomorrow¡­you mean that Mr. Ekenhart is already on his way here?¡±


    ¡°Yes, that would be the case. It seems that my previous report¡­the one before you went to Range vige¡­he left as soon as it arrived.¡±


    ording to Sebastian¡¯s exnation, Mr. Ekenharts would have left his house at about the time that I returned.


    So what happened to the report that confirmed details of the ss sphere?


    ¡°Why is Mr. Ekenharting directly?¡±


    ¡°So he can finally deal with the store and the count. Apparently, it was the details about the suspicious sphere that made him decide on it. This was before speaking to Isabelle, and so we didn¡¯t have much information yet¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­¡±


    Thanks to Leo, we knew that there was something wrong with the sphere, and that it was the reason for the illness, but it wasn¡¯t appraised by Ms. Isabelle yet.


    We had many suspicions, but nothing had been confirmed. But Mr. Ekenhart was still going toe back and deal with the store.


    ¡°ording to the messenger, it¡¯s because Mr. Takumi and Leo discovered it¡­ This shows how much His Grace trusts you two.¡±


    ¡°Leo and me¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    We had only spent a few days with Mr. Ekenhart.


    While he had taught me to use a sword, I had no idea that I had earned enough trust to make a duke act.


    Though, it could be¡­that the trust was in the Silver Fenrir¡­


    ¡°His Grace received the other report regarding Isabelle¡¯s appraisal on his way here. And so he sent a messenger, which is the one who arrived today.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°So father will be here tomorrow.¡±


    Previously, when Mr. Ekenhart visited, he had also received word of Ms. ire¡¯s safety while he was on his way.


    So something simr had happened this time as well.


    But unlike that time, Mr. Ekenhart was not arriving on the same day, and so the servants at least had some time to prepare.


    ¡­Thinking this, I nced towards Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda. They seemed quite nervous, when they usually seemed so calm and at ease.


    Well, Ms. Gelda didn¡¯t always look so calm, but it was rare to see Ms. Lyra like this.. I suppose preparing would be hard work regardless.


    ¡°If His Grace ising¡­then you will have to tell him all about Range vige, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I understand.¡±


    Interrogation¡­ No, it wouldn¡¯t be that. But, of course, I would have to give him a detailed ount of it.


    Besides, I had personally witnessed much that had happened in Range vige.


    ¡°And now, we must prepare to receive His Grace.¡±


    So saying, Sebastian and the other servants all left the dining hall.


    As Milina went with them, she was probably going to help.


    After seeing them leave, everyone let out a sigh and took a sip of tea.

 Chapter 216

    Chapter 216


    Mr. Ekenhart Was Going To Visit


    ¡°¡­Ha¡­ Father is always so impulsive.¡±


    ¡°It would have been nice to know a little earlier.¡±


    ¡°Well, it is not a great emergency¡­ But I suppose as the duke, he wanted to deal with the store as soon as possible?¡±


    Ms. ire and Tilura sighed with exasperation.


    Mr. Ekenhart looked like he had a strong sense of justice, and so perhaps he could no longer wait, and hade to directly deal with the malicious store that harmed his people.


    And considering the ss sphere that had spread the disease, and the wine¡­it was probably the right thing to do.


    Especially since they were connected to a count.


    ¡­Of course, that was little constion to the people who had to prepare for his arrival.


    ¡°¡­I will have to tell father when he arrives¡­¡±


    Ms. ire was muttering to herself with a look of resolve.


    Though, Mr. Ekenhart was likely tough and brush it aside¡­


    Or maybe because she was his daughter, he would listen.


    In any case, if Mr. Ekenhart wasing tomorrow, we needed to be ready.


    However, there wasn¡¯t actually anything for me to do. I suppose since he was the person who taught me to use a sword, I should continue to train.


    ¡°All right, I¡¯m going to do some sword training.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll go too!¡±


    ¡°Yes, but please don¡¯t tire yourself too much.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Perhaps Tilura was thinking the same thing, as she stood up enthusiastically.


    I nodded at Ms. ire¡¯s words and then we went out to the back garden.


    ¡°I want to surprise my father when he sees me!¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. Even an amateur like me can see how much you have improved, so I¡¯m sure you¡¯ll have no trouble doing that.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau.¡±


    The reason that Tilura was so excited was because she wanted to surprise Mr. Ekenhart.


    It was a rather childish motive, but that aside, I thought she had improved enough to do just that.


    As Iughed and replied, Leo and Sherry agreed with me.


    ¡°But I still can¡¯tnd a blow on Leo¡­¡±


    ¡°Well¡­ Leo is¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart had talked about it thest time he was here. How we would be a full-fledged fighter if we could hit Leo¡­


    However, neither Tilura or I had ever been able tond a single blow.


    She dodged as if she were ying with us.


    ¡­Which made me think¡­ If someone was able tond a blow on Leo when she was as serious as she was against actual monsters, then that person wouldn¡¯t just be full-fledged, but a master swordsman¡­


    ¡°Well, if Mr. Ekenhart has anyints, we¡¯ll ask him to demonstrate it first.¡±


    ¡°Demonstrate?¡±


    ¡°To see if Mr. Ekenhart can hit Leo¡­ And if he can, how he does it¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s a good idea!¡±


    I felt bad towards Mr. Ekenhart, but¡­neither I or Tilura could imagine him hitting Leo with his sword.


    Though, that had as much to do with me still being a beginner, as it did with Leo being too fast.


    But Mr. Ekenhart was a master, so if we could see how he approached it, perhaps it would be easier to visualize.


    Leo was nodding as if to say that facing off against Mr. Ekenhart was of no concern to her, and Tilura looked amused.


    After that, I focused more than usual on my training.


    The servants were very busy with preparing the house for their master, and since Milina was helping them, there was no studying of medicine today.


    I had already given the herbs for Ractos to Nick today, and since I made extra, there would be enough for tomorrow as well.


    So I really had nothing to do now but train with Tilura.


    ¡°Phew. So, Mr. Ekenhart ising tomorrow¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    In fact, I was so focused that Ms. Lyra had toe to stop me. But when it was over, and after dinner and my nightly sword swinging, I retired to my room to rest and think about tomorrow.


    Due to my diligent training, I had been able to deal with Nick and was able to move well enough during the orc attack.


    I would have to thank Mr. Ekenhart for teaching me¡­ Without him, I would could have been killed.


    But even as I felt that I had be stronger, I also knew that I would never reach his level.


    I knew that already, but the more I trained, the more obvious it became.


    ¡°I hope he won¡¯t be angry¡­¡±


    I had been injured because I froze during the fight with the orcs.


    And Mr. Ekenhart had taught me that I must never stop moving during a battle.


    Well, I did know that he would mostly be pleased that I was safe now, but I was still curious as to how he would react as a swordsman.


    ¡°Well, there¡¯s no point in thinking about that now. We¡¯ll find out tomorrow. Right, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.


    I petted Leo, who sat next to me, in order to stop thinking about it.


    ¡°Hmm, Leo¡­ You¡¯re quite dirty¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Wuff. Wuffu?¡±


    I realized it while petting her and looking more closely.


    Her fur was usually so pretty and glistened in a silvery color. But it looked dull now, and my hands got tangled and stuck in them easily.


    Leo barked a little hesitantly in reply. As if to say, ¡®Surely this isn¡¯t that bad?¡¯


    ¡°¡­It¡¯s because you¡¯ve been running around¡­ It¡¯s no wonder you¡¯re dirty. All right, it¡¯s time to take a bath so you can be clean!¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Wuff-wuff!¡±


    She had gone to Range vige, fought monsters¡­and slept outside. And so it could not be helped.


    I thought of this as I dered that she would need to take a bath. But Leo then moved away from me with incredible speed and shook her head violently.


    ¡­That was a stronger reaction than usual¡­


    ¡°Leo. Do you hate baths that much?¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    Leo nodded affirmatively and barked.


    Hmm. I suppose it was about time that I asked her about this.


    After all, I was lucky enough to be able to have something simr to a conversation with her. Perhaps if I learned why she hated baths, there would be something I could do to improve things. And then she might not hate them so much anymore.

 Chapter 217

    Chapter 217


    I Asked Leo Why She Hated Baths


    ¡°Why do you hate baths? You like to swim in rivers, don¡¯t you? Is it the hot water? Or are you scared of getting soap in your eyes?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­wuff-wuff. Wuff. Wuff-wou.¡±


    When I asked Leo what the reason was, she began to bark repeatedly, as if bing very talkative. And like this, she exined it to me.


    Uhh¡­ You don¡¯t like the hot water, which is unnatural. And you don¡¯t like other people putting hot water on you, as it gets in your face. And you don¡¯t like how it erases your smell¡­ I see¡­


    ¡°While it can¡¯t be helped that it gets in your eyes, it¡¯s still my fault. Sorry. But is hot water really that bad?¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    It¡¯s not natural water? Well, it is heated, so I suppose it¡¯s different from the water that flows in nature¡­but what about hot springs?


    That water is heated without human interference¡­


    Well, at least this way, there was something that I could do.


    ¡°All right¡­ I¡¯ll only use cool water then. As for preventing it from getting in your eyes¡­ I¡¯ll have arge bucket prepared¡­ And then you can wash your face by yourself?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Wuff-wuff.¡±


    She said that she might be able to bear it this way¡­


    It would be unrealistic to think everything would be solved immediately, but at least I didn¡¯t have to force her to do something she hated.


    ¡°Wuff¡­wuff¡­wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Your smell will change? ¡­That¡¯s one thing you¡¯ll just have to get used to.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    I had to use soap and wash her thoroughly, otherwise I wouldn¡¯t be able to remove all the dirt¡­


    I didn¡¯t know if the soap in this world was good for Leo¡¯s fur, but it was surely better than leaving any grime that water couldn¡¯t wash away.


    ¡­Dogs generally do not like the smell of soap¡­ And since Leo had a sharp sense of smell, she would feel the difference much more strongly than me. But this was one thing that could not be helped.


    Leo epted this, but she still sighed as we left the room and headed to the bathing area.


    ¡°All right, Leo. I¡¯m going to wash you with water!¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    As per her request, I washed her with cool water instead of hot water.


    The water flowed down Leo¡¯s fur, washing away the light dirt on the surface.


    ¡°¡­Yes, you really are quite filthy¡­¡±


    It was more obvious when looking at the water that flowed down.


    There was dust and sand in it, and it became quite dark.


    ¡­Some of it might have even been blood from monsters that she killed.


    ¡°I¡¯ll finish this quickly¡­¡±


    Normally, it would be fine, as we used hot water.


    But since it was cold, I couldn¡¯t stay like this long, since I was naked.


    While the bathing area was kept warmer than other rooms, the water I was pouring on Leo would ssh onto me as well.


    At least, the mansion wasn¡¯t in a ce with a colder climate.


    Had it been cold enough for it to be snowing, then I wouldn¡¯t have been able to wash Leo with water.


    ¡°Now that I think about it, I wonder if they have seasons in this world?¡±


    Some time has now passed since I came to this world.


    And it had yet to be cold or very hot. It was afortable climate. But if there were seasons, I suppose the next was either summer or winter¡­


    It is currently a lot like spring in Japan. So maybe it will be summer? But this was another world.


    Maybe winter could be after spring.


    ¡°Well, I don¡¯t have to worry about that right now. I¡¯ll ask Ms. ire or Sebastian about itter. All right, Leo. You can wash your face now!¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    While I was thinking, I managed to cover Leo¡¯s entire body with soap.


    As Leo¡¯s face was now covered in bubbles, she kept her mouth and eyes closed and would not make a sound¡­ I understood that she didn¡¯t want to get it in her mouth or eyes¡­but was she even breathing?


    She then lifted her head and dunk it in therge bucket that Ms. Lyra had prepared.


    Apparently, it was usually used to wash small children who couldn¡¯t use the bathtub yet.


    But right now, it would be very useful for washing Leo¡¯s face.


    ¡­Besides, there were no children who were that young in this mansion right now.


    ¡°And then change the water¡­ There. Once more, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    After most of the soap was washed away, I changed the water and had Leo rinse her face once again.


    As Leo was able to wash up at her own pace and avoid getting water in her eyes, she was a lot more cheerful than she usually was when bathing.


    Well, most times, she looked like she was walking through thends of the dead¡­ So inparison, she was doing very well.


    ¡­It was a good thing that I had asked for Leo¡¯s opinion.


    I would not have been able to do such things back in Japan.


    ¡°Now, I just have to rinse off your body¡­and we¡¯re done.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    After washing Leo¡¯s body carefully, I used a brush to make sure all of the dirt came out, and it was finished.


    Leo, who was in a good mood, suddenly began to shake all of the water from her fur.


    ¡°Hey, Leo¡­ I told you to not do that when I¡¯m close by¡­ And it¡¯s cold water¡­ Achoo!¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    As Leo was so big, I would have to be pretty far away in order to avoid having the water rain over me.


    Well, it usually happens anyway. But this time it was like having a lot of water poured over your head.


    I was so cold that I sneezed, and then Leo rubbed against me apologetically.


    ¡­Perhaps she was trying to help warm me up, but she was still wet and cold to touch¡­


    ¡°I better warm up then¡­ Leo, you¡¯re done, so you can get out now.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Wuff.¡±


    If I didn¡¯t warm myself up with hot water soon, I might catch a cold.


    I was the one who went around and healed people with my herbs, and so I would be embarrassing to get sick.


    Mr. Ekenhart would be arriving tomorrow, so I wanted to be in the best condition health-wise.


    And so I picked up a bucket for the hot water and went over to the bathtub.


    Leo walked obediently out of the bathing room.


    She was able to dexterously use her paw to push open the door when leaving.


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Oh, it¡¯s just you, good Leo? Mr. Takumi is still inside?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    I could hear Ms. Lyra and Leo in the changing room.


    Ms. Lyra would wait outside with a towel in order to dry Leo after her bath.


    As I heard Leo bark in reply, I poured the hot water over my body and cleaned myself before soaking in the tub.

 Chapter 218

    Chapter 218


    Mr. Ekenhart Arrived With A Stranger


    ¡°¡­Phew¡­ It¡¯s so rxing¡­¡±


    Having the cold water ssh over me had lowered my body temperature, and so the feeling of being warmed up again by the hot water was quite pleasurable.


    Now I wouldn¡¯t have to worry about catching a cold.


    It was with such thoughts that I got out of the bathtub.


    ¡°Your fur really does look nicer now, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    Thoroughly warmed up, I returned to my room and petted Leo. Not only had she been dried, but her coat had been brushed as well.


    Unlike when she was dirty, my hands didn¡¯t get tangled, and her fur was smooth to the touch.


    The silvery color gleamed beautifully. She was just as you would expect a Silver Fenrir to look.


    ¡°You look so much cooler with clean fur.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Leo looked proud when I said that she looked cool.


    It might not be the bestpliment to give a girl, but Leo seemed to like it, so it was fine.


    Tonight, I had been able to find out why Leo didn¡¯t like baths, and was able to make some changes, so it was a productive night overall.


    Bathing with Leo would be a lot easier from now on. It was with this sense of satisfaction that I got into bed before I could cool off again. And then I fell asleep.


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¨C


    ¡°His Grace, Duke Ekenhart Liebert has arrived!¡±


    The next day, after we had finished eating lunch, Mr. Ekenhart arrived at the mansion.


    The servants, Ms. ire, Tilura, Sherry, Leo and I all gathered at the entrance and stood in line.


    I stood with Ms. ire and the others, and not with the servants.


    Last time, it was because I was a stranger¡­


    Nichs made the announcement and then opened the doors.


    I could tell that all of the servants were nervous, now that their master was about to enter.


    I had been too nervous to notice such thingsst time. But I suppose servants were usually more nervous when their master returned.


    But thanks to their hard work yesterday, the entrance hall, as well as the rest of the mansion, was incredibly clean from corner to corner.


    In fact, the sunlight from the windows reflected on the floor to a near blinding degree.


    ¡°Wee home, Duke Ekenhart!¡±


    ¡°Mmm.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart stepped in through the doors.


    At the same time, the servants greeted him in unison.


    ¡­It seemed to be a tradition here.


    Mr. Ekenhart watched the servants bow and he nodded once.


    At the same time, a few armored soldiers, who seemed to be his guards, entered.


    And then a woman who I had never seen before entered after him.


    Who was she? She looked to be the same age as Ms. ire.


    ¡°Wee back, father.¡±


    ¡°ire. It¡¯s been awhile¡­well, not really. I hope you¡¯re well, Tilura?¡±


    ¡°I am, father!¡±


    ¡°Nothing has changed with us since you left.¡±


    Ms. ire took a step forward and greeted her father.


    Mr. Ekenhart greeted his daughters with a smile.


    As a parent, he was happy to see that they were doing well.


    And then he turned his attention to me.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, I heard about your exploits. Sebastian was very happy.¡±


    ¡°No, I haven¡¯t done much at all. Most of it was Leo¡¯s doing.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha, you are too modest. Of course, we have much to thank Leo for, but I doubt we would have been able to solve this case without you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhartughed and pped me on the shoulder.


    That was a habit he had not stopped¡­ And though it hurt, it was a sign of affection, which meant I couldn¡¯t move away¡­


    ¡°So this is Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Aye, it is.¡±


    ¡°Father. Is this¡­¡±


    The woman had been watching me be hit by Mr. Ekenhart with a curious expression.


    Now that I had a closer look, I saw that she was astonishingly beautiful, with delicate features and a slender build.


    Her long¡­was it called ash blonde? hair had curls that reached her waist.


    I had never seen someone with this hairstyle in real life¡­ No one looked like that in Japan. It was the kind of hair you only saw in fiction.


    ¡°Yes, I will have to introduce you. While you¡¯ve met her, ire, Tilura has not.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    What was going on? Ms. ire suddenly seemed disinterested.


    I hope it wasn¡¯t because I was looking at the stranger¡­


    I suppose it was because these two had a history?


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Ah, good Leo. And you look well, Sherry!¡±


    As if to say hello as well, Leo and Sherry moved in front of Mr. Ekenhart.


    Mr. Ekenhart chuckled and then petted them.


    Apparently, the treatment he underwent before leaving the mansion had worked, and he was used to being around Leo now.


    While there was still some awkwardness, there was no longer any fear.


    ¡°Ahhh!¡±


    ¡°Wuff? ¡­Sniff-sniff¡­ Wou!¡±


    ¡°¡­Aggga¡­¡±


    Due to Leo moving closer, the woman raised her voice in fear. Upon noticing this, Leo moved her face even closer in order to smell her.


    This happened pretty much every time that Leo met someone new. But in spite of her noble appearance, she let out a very strange kind of sound, which was not the mostdylike.


    ¡°Leo. Don¡¯t do that. It will scare her.¡±


    ¡°Wou? Wuff-wuff.¡±


    I said, and then Leo returned to me.


    The woman took in several deep breaths and tried to regain her calm.


    ¡°Haa¡­haa¡­ What¡­ What is that thing!?¡±


    Once she was calm again, she began to mutter. Though, thest few words were more of a scream¡­


    ¡°Well, calm down. I told you about her. This is Leo. Don¡¯t worry, she will not harm anyone.¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry? When something of that size is approaching you¡­ How can I possibly be calm¡­¡±


    She continued to breathe heavily as she put a hand to her chest and answered Mr. Ekenhart.


    If only she understood how cute and harmless Leo was¡­

 Chapter 219

    Chapter 219


    It Was The Count¡¯s Daughter


    ¡°Master, will the drawing room suffice?¡±


    ¡°Sebastian. Indeed, there is much to discuss. Let us go there.¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    Sebastian suggested that we go to the drawing room in order to talk.


    At the same time, all of the servants in the entrance hall dispersed.


    And the guards also went off to rest.


    However¡­Ms. ire looked annoyed, and the visitor was still frightened of Leo¡­ Who was she?


    Tilura also did not know who this was, and she looked at her with a curious expression, which was a littleforting to me.


    ¡°Now, where should I begin¡­¡±


    In the drawing room, I, Leo, Ms. ire, Tilura, Mr. Ekenhart, and the woman sat down at the table. Sebastian and Ms. Lyra waited by the door.


    The woman was still scared of Leo, and sat as far away as she could.


    Instead, Tilura sat next to Leo, and enjoyed stroking her fur, which was now very clean and fluffy.


    ¡­It was a good thing she had bathed yesterday.


    ¡°¡­You should start with introductions. Mr. Takumi and Tilura have not met her before.¡±


    ¡°Yes, indeed.¡±


    Ms. ire continued to talk in an icy voice.


    She knew this woman, but she had not even spoken her name once yet.


    And there was something severe in her tone¡­ Like she had very strong feelings towards her.


    However, the woman was too scared of Leo to notice Ms. ire¡¯s attitude.


    ¡°Well, introduce yourself, Anneliese.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes. I am Anneliese Barsler. But you can just call me Anne.¡±


    ¡°¡­Barsler¡­¡±


    After Mr. Ekenhart urged her, the woman introduced herself.


    Her bow was just as pretty as Ms. ire¡¯s, and she spoke in a refined,dylike manner.


    However, her name¡­ To be precise, the family name, Barsler, was familiar.


    ¡°Could you be Count Barsler¡¯s¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. His daughter.¡±


    ¡°Count Barsler, Halbrecht Barsler, is my father.¡±


    Count Barsler¡­ The person behind the malicious store. The person who ced the ss sphere in Range vige and sent the monsters.


    Enemies¡­ Well, I didn¡¯t quite know the rtionship between the two sides, but they clearly did not think well of each other.


    So why was his daughter with Mr. Ekenhart¡­?


    ¡°I understand your confusion. But there is a reason for this. And so Anneliese will be staying with us for a while.¡±


    ¡°You cannot be serious, father?!¡±


    Obviously, anyone who knows of Count Barsler¡¯s deeds would find it odd that his daughter was here¡­


    But now Mr. Ekenhart was saying that Anneliese¡­Anne, was going to stay here.


    Ms. ire reacted sharply.


    ¡°Well, we¡¯ll talk about thatter. It involves the incident. Speaking of which, in the reports¡­there was something about a ss sphere?¡±


    ¡°Yes, Your Grace. Mr. Takumi can exin¡­¡±


    ¡°Will you tell me, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°If you wish.¡±


    And so we set aside talk of Ms. Anne for now, as I told him about Range vige.


    Apparently, it was rted to what was happening, but I didn¡¯t know how¡­ Ms. ire had entered a sulky silence¡­ She must really hate Ms. Anne.


    ¡°Mmm. You exined it very well. And it fits with everything else that I¡¯ve heard.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart nodded after hearing my story.


    Back at my old job, I often had to exin things in an orderly way.


    I still remember carefully reading documents and practicing so that I could exin things during meetings without getting stuck¡­


    Because if I failed with presentations, my boss would be furious with me. Especially if it wasn¡¯t my project, but theirs¡­ Damn it, things really were¡­ Well, it didn¡¯t matter now.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. You spoke of being injured earlier¡­ Is everything fine now?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I had some Loe, which I used to treat the wound.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ That¡¯s good to hear. ¡­Loe really is a valuable herb.¡±


    During my exnation to Mr. Ekenhart, I left out the stuff about Weed Cultivation.


    This was because of the presence of an outsider, Ms. Anne.


    I had nced towards Sebastian when trying to decide on this, and he had shaken his head.


    Mr. Ekenhart seemed to understand, and he did not bring up Weed Cultivation either.


    ¡°Still, to set orcs on the vige¡­ Damned Barsler¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was particrly angry about the monsters.


    While it was not thergest vige on hisnd, it was natural for him to react like this.


    ¡°I had not thought of something like this happening.¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed¡­ Anneliese¡­while you are cunning, you wouldn¡¯t have been able to¡­think of this.¡±


    ¡°Of course, not. Father must have wanted the magic tool very badly. It is because of this kind of foolishness that he hasn¡¯t risen up in the world.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. Anne were talking. And it kind of sounded like Ms. Anne had thought of using the ss sphere¡­?


    Not only that, but she was quite harsh on her father, Count Barsler.


    ¡°Your Grace, do you mean¡­Lady Anneliese¡­¡±


    ¡°Aye, Sebastian. Exactly. This incident¡­this n against our house¡­was thought of by Anneliese.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that is correct.¡±


    Sebastian was thinking the same thing as me, and he questioned Mr. Ekenhart about it.


    Mr. Ekenhart replied casually.


    Ms. Anne also nodded with an indifferent expression.


    Not just me, but Ms. ire, Ms. Lyra, and Sebastian looked at them, dumb-founded.


    Why had Mr. Ekenhart brought the person who could be called the ring leader to this house¡­

 Chapter 220

    Chapter 220


    Ms. ire Was Furious On Our Behalf


    ¡°Well, it was all put into action by Count Barsler. Anneliese was definitely not involved.¡±


    ¡°Of course. I have merely offered my wisdom to him. As for what he decides to do with it, that is solely up to him.¡±


    ¡°¡­Father! Anne!¡±


    The moment Ms. Anne said this with a smile, Ms. ire stood up and shouted.


    This atmosphere¡­ It reminded me of when she berated Sebastian and the others¡­ Ms. ire was clearly having no more of this.


    I myself had seen people suffer in person, and did not like the way that Ms. Anne was speaking.


    ¡°How can you talk so casually!? People have suffered from this illness! You may im that she is meless, but no one will be satisfied by such an answer! Anne! I see that you do not even feel a morsel of guilt!¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­mmmm¡­¡±


    ¡°While I did think of ways for him to make a profit with the magic tool, it was father who actually did it.¡±


    I had never seen Ms. ire look so angry as she shouted.


    She was definity more passionate than she was with Sebastian.


    Mr. Ekenhart looked overwhelmed by this, but Ms. Anne continued to look calm and unbothered.


    ¡­Perhaps women were strong against the rage of other women¡­ Or Ms. Anne was just special.


    In any case, I agreed with Ms. ire.


    I had seen the sick children at the Ractos orphanage and suffering residents of Range vige.


    They had coughed in pain while others watched with dread. So it was no wonder that Ms. ire was angry.


    Even Sebastian and Ms. Lyra were scowling a little.


    ¡°It is true that Count Barsler was the one who acted! However, you had the power to stop him! In the first ce, the disease never would have spread had you not suggested it! Surely you understand that!?¡±


    ¡°¡­Well¡­perhaps¡­¡±


    ¡°Go and look at the people who are suffering! I will not hear you say that they are not like us! There would be no nobles withoutmon folk! They do not exist because of you! It is thanks to them that we have this position! And yet your n has hurt them¡­ You cannot be forgiven for that!¡±


    ¡°Mmm¡­mmm¡­¡±


    While Ms. Anne was indifferent at first, Ms. ire¡¯s words started to overwhelm her.


    Ms. ire was right that nobles only existed because of themon folk¡­


    Without them, you could shout as much as you want that you¡¯re a noble, but there would be no one to hear you.


    Mr. Ekenhart also seemed to agree with Ms. ire, as he was nodding his head.


    ¡­However, did he forget that he was one of the causes for her anger?


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Don¡¯t worry. She¡¯s not angry at you, Leo.¡±


    As Ms. ire shouted angrily, Leo curled her tail and pushed her face towards me.


    When she was still a maltese, she hated angry shouts and loud voices¡­ Most small dogs were like that. I suppose she was remembering those times then.


    And so I petted Leo to calm her down.


    But now that I think about it, Silver Fenrirs were the most powerful of all monsters¡­ And yet Ms. ire was able to intimidate one¡­ Well, Leo was likely just an exception.


    ¡°But¡­I really haven¡¯t done¡­¡±


    ¡°So you still don¡¯t understand! Regardless of what your purpose was, I am saying that merely suggesting a n that hurts people is a crime!¡±


    ¡°¡­But you see, things weren¡¯t going very well financially and¡­¡±


    ¡°You think that gives you an excuse to hurt people!? You are not fit to be a noble!¡±


    ¡°But we haven¡¯t hurt our own people!¡±


    ¡°Oh, so it¡¯s perfectly fine to hurt the duke¡¯s people!? What monstrous logic! People are people. It should not matter on which lord¡¯snds they live on! And yet you¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Well¡­but¡­you see¡­¡±


    Anne continued to be overwhelmed, but seemed to be trying to shift the me by thinking of excuses.


    However, this just made Ms. ire even more angry, and she continued her remonstrations.


    ¡­Perhaps it would end if Ms. Anne was remorseful and apologized.


    Thanks to Ms. ire¡¯s fiery rage, everyone else who was watching gulped.


    While it was wrong for her to make such suggestions, it was indeed Count Barsler who acted on them.


    And while Ms. Anne was not guiltless, it may not be possible to have her punished.


    Though, I still thought it was necessary for her to admit that she had done wrong.


    ¡°You still don¡¯t see it¡­ In that case¡­ Good Leo!¡±


    ¡°Wuff?!¡±


    Suddenly, Ms. ire changed tactics.


    Leo had been so calm a moment ago as I petted her, but she now barked in rm.


    ¡°Please go closer to Anne so that you two can y thoroughly!¡±


    ¡°What! Ms. ire! You!¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­. Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Sorry, Leo¡­ There is nothing that I can do.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!? ¡­Wouu¡­¡±


    Leo looked at me as if asking for help, but I doubted there was anything that I could do to stop Ms. ire at this point.


    As I apologized and looked away, Leo barked like an abandoned puppy.


    Sorry, Leo¡­ I am powerless now¡­ You don¡¯t have to forgive me¡­ I cannot do anything, and will not be able to save you¡­


    ¡°Now, good Leo!¡±


    ¡°Hey, wait one moment! Ms. ire!¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Leo herself did not have any negative feelings towards Ms. Anne, but she seemed to feel that Ms. ire was angry at her, and she was not enthusiastic about it.


    However, Ms. ire was not about to back down.


    Ms. Anne screamed and looked like she was ready to run away, but Ms. ire went around and pushed her back so that she moved towards Leo.


    It cannot be helped then¡­ Leo seemed to sigh as she stood up and lumbered towards Ms. Anne.


    ¡°Now, good Leo!¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Hey! Don¡¯t lick my face¡­stop¡­!¡±


    ¡°Do you still refuse to see the error of your ways?¡±


    After Ms. ire demanded it, Leo hesitantly started to Lick Ms. Anne¡¯s face.


    As Ms. Anne was terrified of Leo, this had a great effect, and she became very rigid.


    ¡°¡­Well, as you can see, ire and Anneliese have always gotten along very well¡­¡±


    ¡°Father. Have your eyes rotted in their sockets!?¡±


    ¡°¡­Very badly, I meant to say.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart had just started to talk again after seeing that all of Ms. ire¡¯s anger was now directed towards Ms. Anne.


    However, upon hearing his words, Ms. ire shouted angrily, and he revised his statement.


    Mr. Ekenhart. You really have no authority in spite of being a father and the lord of the house¡­

 Chapter 221

    Chapter 221


    Mr. Ekenhart Exined The Reason That He Brought Her


    ¡°Well, I¡¯ll leave Anneliese to you, ire¡­¡±


    As Ms. ire red angrily, a cold sweat dripped from Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s forehead as he returned to the main subject.


    ¡°Your Grace, you were speaking of keeping Anneliese here¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah. As you can see, her feelings of guilt are¡­ Well, she knows nothing of the world. And so I had no choice but to bring her here to be educated.¡±


    ¡°Educated¡­you say? That is very¡­ But what has Count Barsler said about this?¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. He is in no position to be saying anything. Because I told the royal family about what he did.¡±


    ¡°The royal family¡­¡±


    The people who control the nobles¡­the people who stood at the top of this country.


    I didn¡¯t know anything about them, but I had heard that it was their responsibility to keep the nobles in line.


    ¡°A malicious store that sells herbs¡­ Through an investigation, we know that the Barsler family are involved. Well, I¡¯m sure there is a lot more that wille to light soon enough. And the royal family will know it all.¡±


    ¡°I see. So people must be monitoring them now?¡±


    ¡°Aye. There is evidence of some things but not others¡­ And so people have been sent to keep an eye on Barsler¡¯s mansion.¡±


    When a noble hasmitted a crime or is suspected ofmitting one, the royal family will send people to acquire evidence through monitoring and investigating.


    Because of this, Count Barsler was being monitored, which would make it difficult toin of others or act behind the scenes.


    ¡°Once everything is exposed, we will finally be punished. But I was asked to take care of Anneliese in the meantime.¡±


    ¡°Asked by who? It wasn¡¯t Count Barsler, was it?¡±


    ¡°Of course, not. The request came from someone connected to the royal family, but¡­ Her ignorance of the world is a real issue¡­she understands Barsler¡¯s crimes¡­but does not know why using her mind to make suggestions is so reprehensible¡­just as ire said.¡±


    ¡°Ha¡­¡±


    Apparently, Mr. Ekenhart was asked to take care of Anne by someone rted to the royal family.


    Well, it wasn¡¯t hard to see why someone would be troubled by thisdy, who was acting so innocent, just because she only made suggestions and didn¡¯t actually act them out.


    Perhaps she led a sheltered life¡­and was unable to think of others.


    ¡°And well, ire has one of the finest reputations of any young noblewoman, and has done me much credit as the one who raised her. So it was only natural for their eyes to turn to me. A reeducation from none other than a duke might be just the thing! After all¡­Anneliese is Count Barsler¡¯s heir.¡±


    So Ms. ire had a good reputation in the king¡¯s court.


    Indeed, in spite of her high position, she had no prejudices against themon folk, and was loved by the people of Ractos.


    It had been the same at the orphanage. She never acted like she was better than others.


    ¡­Though, she only wore clothes that were tailor-made, and her way of thinking was often that of a wealthy young woman¡­


    ¡°So the count¡¯s heir is to be educated in this house?¡±


    ¡°Exactly.¡±


    ¡°However, wouldn¡¯t the nobles object to this? It will look like you are trying to take over the count¡¯s house¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, I¡¯m sure there will be plenty of gossip. However, the royal family will show their support.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ It is a matter settled by the royal family and Your Grace. I can do nothing but aid you as your butler.¡±


    ¡°I thank you for that, Sebastian.¡±


    And so Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian¡¯s conversation about Ms. Anne ended.


    Between the other noble houses, it was possible that less thanplimentary rumors would be spread. But since this was something involving the royal family¡­it surely meant that she would be properly educated in order to take on the role as heir.


    Well, if Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian were satisfied with the arrangement, there was nothing for me to say.


    Besides, I¡¯m sure that Ms. ire would go about it with that fiery will of hers¡­


    I nced over and saw that she was still using Leo as a weapon against Ms. Anne¡­ But I decided it was best to leave them be. I did not want to identally attract her rage.


    Also, I had learned another thing. In this country, nobles had a hereditary system, but there were no rules about it being through a male line.


    But then again, the founder of this very house had been a woman, so it wasn¡¯t actually a surprise.


    I suppose¡­it was gender equality?


    ¡°Now, I will leave Anneliese to ire and¡­ We should move on to this sted store.¡±


    It all seemed a little disorganized to me, but I didn¡¯t feel like contradicting Mr. Ekenhart.


    And while Ms. ire and Ms. Anne were still being quite loud, Mr. Ekenhart ignored them and continued with a serious expression.


    Aside from Tilura, who looked a little jealous at all the attention that Ms. Anne was receiving from Leo, everyone else became quite serious as well.


    Sebastian and Ms. Lyra even straightened their backs.


    ¡°Well, now that Anne is here, and Count Barsler is being watched closely, and cannot move¡­ Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Your Grace?¡±


    ¡°Aside from what is happening outside¡­are you certain of what is happening inside of the store as well?¡±


    ¡°Yes. We have gathered a lot of information, everything, from the reason the disease was spread, to the timing of the store opening, it all connects.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ A ss sphere¡­ Hmm?¡±


    After finding the ss sphere in Range vige, we had all the necessary pieces to act. But Mr. Ekenhart had now acted, and would take care of everything now.


    After confirming this with Sebastian, Mr. Ekenhart showed interest in the ss sphere once again.


    He had already heard about it from Ms. Anne, who thought of how to use it, and from Sebastian¡¯s report. But he still had other questions.


    ¡°The ss sphere is a magic tool. I had Isabelle, who runs a magic tool store in Ractos, look into it. And ording to her¡­¡±


    And so Sebastian exined to to Mr. Ekenhart about the ss sphere, Range vige, and the merchants, as well as the orc attack, and everything else that had happened.

 Chapter 222

    Chapter 222


    I Was Thanked For Helping Range Vige


    ¡°¡­I see¡­ So that¡¯s what happened¡­ Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°While Sebastian has already thanked you on my behalf¡­ I must thank you again.¡±


    After the exnation was finished, Mr. Ekenhart, who had been listening, closed his eyes and thought for some time. And then he called me over and stood up.


    ¡°Range vige¡­a vige within mynds, was threatened by monsters. But thanks to you, the damages were minimal. You have my gratitude.¡±


    Said Mr. Ekenhart with a deep bow of the head.


    And then Sebastian and Ms. Lyra bowed as well.


    ¡°Uh, um¡­ It was really nothing. Well, I was protecting myself as well¡­ And as I said before, it was mostly Leo¡¯s doing.¡±


    ¡°Still. Without your help, Mr. Takumi, it might have been toote by the time that Leo arrived.¡±


    ¡°That¡­might be true¡­ But then I have you to thank for teaching me to use a sword, Mr. Ekenhart. And Sebastian also taught me magic.¡±


    Sebastian had already thanked me after the battle with the orcs.


    I thought that the matter was finished then, and so it was a little awkward to be thanked again now.


    Though, it was true that had I not bought more time, Leo¡¯s arrival would have been toote.


    But it was still thanks to Mr. Ekenhart teaching me to use a sword, and the magic I was taught by Sebastian. That¡¯s why I was able to dy the orcs.


    If anything, I should be the one who was grateful.


    ¡°Magic? ¡­Is that so, Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I told him that instead of focusing only on winning with a sword, he should also consider using magic to survive.¡±


    ¡°I see. I suppose that is something that I should have taught him. It¡¯s not just about defeating opponents, but about survival.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart hadn¡¯t been told that I was taught magic.


    And so he asked Sebastian, and now understood the reason.


    Still, it wasn¡¯t as if Mr. Ekenhart had enough time to teach me other things. So it could not be helped.


    He was the lord of this house, and had only stayed for a short while, as he was busy. It was good enough that he taught me to use a sword.


    ¡°Your Grace, what should we do with the imprisoned merchants?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Well, they will have to be punished for what they did. But I think I will leave it to Ractos.¡±


    ¡°Of course. I will let them know that it must be severe.¡±


    While they hadn¡¯t attacked the vigers themselves, they had released the monsters.


    I didn¡¯t know anything about thews of this country, but that was clearly a crime.


    Perhaps¡­they might be executed.


    ¡°Well, I shall ride there tomorrow then. I need to get rid of those who would harm my people.¡±


    ¡°About that, Your Grace. I do have one suggestion.¡±


    ¡°A suggestion?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I told you about the wine that Leo was able to sniff out¡­ The thing is, Mr. Takumi purchased it.¡±


    ¡°That wine¡­ But why? It is something that makes people sick¡­ Surely it should be disposed of?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    Sebastian then urged me to tell Mr. Ekenhart about why I had bought the wine.


    It was a waste. I thought it could be drunk somehow¡­ Perhaps by using herbs, it could be changed into a medicinal wine. I told him everything I was thinking.


    ¡°I see. I understand it now. And what is your suggestion, Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°To take some of that wine¡­to the store.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see¡­ You are thinking of something very mischievous, aren¡¯t you, Sebastian¡­¡±


    ¡°They worked much evil on yournds¡­ I am not so saintly as to forgive them.¡±


    It was easy enough to guess what Sebastian meant to do.


    Mr. Ekenhart looked at Sebastian and chuckled¡­ And due to his physical appearance, he looked just like a viin.


    And Sebastian just grinned back.


    ¡­I had seen something like this before¡­ Ah, that¡¯s what it was. It reminded me of some evil magistrate from a period drama.


    ¡­And while these two men weren¡¯t actual viins, their expressions were so simr.


    ¡°Excuse me. Phillip has returned.¡±


    Just then, there was a knock on the door and a butler entered.


    It was then announced that Phillip had returned.


    ¡°Hmm. This is good timing, Your Grace.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. Mr. Takumi, let¡¯s go and meet Phillip.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    I then had to follow Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian as they went to meet Phillip.


    Ms. ire, Ms. Anne and Leo were still causing a scene on the other side of the room, and Tilura stayed in her seat. Sherry and Ms. Lyra also stayed as the three of us went out to the entrance hall.


    ¡­While I couldn¡¯t argue with them, it felt awkward to follow people who had such sinister grins.


    ¡°Phillip. Wee back.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Sebastian. I am¡­ Your Grace!?¡±


    ¡°Mmm. At ease, Phillip.¡±


    ¡°Hello. Phillip.¡±


    In the entrance hall, the servants had split up into teams and were rolling the wine barrels.


    They were moving them to a storage room.


    After being called, Phillip turned and answered Sebastian, and then noticed Mr. Ekenhart.


    Now that I thought about it, he didn¡¯t know that his master would be home¡­so it would have been a great surprise.


    I greeted him as well, but he didn¡¯t seem to hear me.


    ¡°Phillip. I want you to leave one of the barrels here. Also¡­ Helena.¡±


    ¡°Certainly!¡±


    ¡°What is it, Your Grace?¡±


    Mr. Ekenhar gave the order to Phillip to leave some of the wine, and then he called over Ms. Helena.

 Chapter 223

    Chapter 223


    The Wine Was Boiled And We Drank It


    ¡°As for this wine that Phillip brought back¡­ It cannot be drunk like this, yes?¡±


    ¡°Yes. That is what Mr. Sebastian said.¡±


    ¡°I believe¡­that it will be drinkable if you boil it¡­ So do it with this barrel. Mr. Takumi, I will buy this barrel from you.¡±


    ¡°Certainly. I will prepare it right away.¡±


    ¡°Huh? I don¡¯t mind, but¡­ You can just have it if you want?¡±


    He must have decided to have Ms. Helena take one of the barrels and boil it so it could be drunk.


    As there were many, it would not be a bad idea to set one aside so we could all drink it.


    ¡°Well, I still have my pride. So just allow me to buy it from you for now. Also, Ms. Helena. Save a few bottles of it before boiling.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Your Grace!¡±


    Or perhaps it was better for everyone to drink something that was bought by Mr. Ekenhart, and not someone who wasn¡¯t a noble¡­such as myself?


    I wasn¡¯t sure, but I decided to go with it.


    As Ms. Helena turned to leave, he also told her to set some of the wine aside.


    It was probably so they could take it to the store.


    You could get dozens of bottles from a single barrel, so a few bottles was nothing.


    ¡°Your Grace, here it is.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ It smells good enough¡­ But it cannot be drunk like this¡­ Phillip. Take this barrel to Ms. Helena.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Your Grace!¡±


    After the barrel was rolled over by a few men, Mr. Ekenhart smelled it.


    The fragrance was a mixture of the barrel¡¯s wood and the wine, and it was indeed quite pleasant as it wafted around us.


    ¡­Did Mr. Ekenhart know a lot about wine?


    He did look like someone who drinks a lot. And I suppose most nobles would be educated on wine.


    ¡°Now, let us return to the drawing room and wait until Helena is finished.¡±


    And so I left the entrance hall with Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian, and we went to the drawing room.


    By now, Ms. ire¡¯s anger had subsided, and she was quietly drinking tea. Leo and Sherry were ying with Tilura.


    ¡­Leo seemed to enjoy it a lot morepared to when she was forced to y with Ms. Anne.


    Though, she also red at me when I returned¡­but I pretended not to see it.


    As for Ms. Anne¡­she looked very tired¡­ Even her rolls were a mess, and she looked quite different now.


    Well, she had been forced to y with the embodiment of her fears, so it was no wonder.


    ¡°Excuse me. Master, the wine has been processed.¡±


    ¡°Mmm.¡±


    As we rxed silently in the drawing room for some time, Ms. Helena entered with the wine¡­which was now more like a juice.


    As it had been boiled, I thought that it would be hot, but it had been cooled until it was cold.


    ¡­I suppose it was done with magic?


    ¡°Now, Mr. Takumi and Leo. Is this¡­drinkable?¡±


    ¡°I can¡¯t say¡­ Leo has to check¡­ Go on, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Sniff¡­sniff¡­ Wuff!¡±


    Everyone sat down at the table, and cups of the juice were ced down in front of them.


    There was no smell of alcohol, and I could detect nothing but grapes.


    After Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s question, I had Leo smell it to confirm.


    After tilting her head to the side, she nodded firmly. So it should be fine then.


    ¡°She says it is fine.¡±


    ¡°I see. Then let¡¯s drink. This is my first time drinking wine from Range vige. ¡­Though, I would have preferred to drink actual wine¡­¡±


    Apparently, Mr. Ekenhart had never drunk Range vige wine before.


    Mr. Hannes did say that they sent the wine to Ractos and the count¡¯snds.


    I felt a little bad for only buying undrinkable wine, but it would have to do for now.


    ¡°Mmm¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Glug.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart, Ms. ire, Tilura, and Ms. Anne all started to drink from their cups.


    And after taking one sip, their eyes widened in surprise.


    I took a sip as well¡­ Hmm, due to the way it was stored, as well as the boiling, I was a little worried about the taste. But it was just as sweet and delicious as the wine I drank in Range vige.


    Perhaps, while the alcohol was burned out, it became more concentrated¡­ Though, I didn¡¯t know much about such things.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau.¡±


    ¡°Oh, what is it? Does Leo and Sherry want some too?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau.¡±


    As I drank the juice with some surprise, I heard Leo and Sherry¡¯s pleading voices.


    Both of them wanted to drink it as well.


    But Leo had shown no interest in the wine back at Range vige¡­ Was it because there was no alcohol now?


    ¡°Sorry, but is there any for Leo and Sherry?¡±


    ¡°There is plenty. I will bring some now.¡±


    When I asked Ms. Helena, she said that she could prepare some for them right away.


    They wagged their tails and faced the direction that Ms. Helena stood, so they must really be looking forward to it.


    ¡°Now this is a surprise. I didn¡¯t expect it to be this good¡­¡±


    ¡°It really is. Father, I am quite ashamed that I didn¡¯t know about it before.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s delicious! I want to drink more!¡±


    ¡°It is wonderful¡­the very idea of using this to spread a disease¡­ How abhorrent¡­¡±


    ¡°But it was you!¡±


    ¡°¡­Oh. Yes, it was.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart and the others were all surprised by how much they enjoyed it.


    And they drained their cups in no time.


    Ms. Helena took the cups and left in order to bring more, as well some for Leo and Sherry.


    Ms. Anne was also surprised. But it seemed like she was the forgetful sort, and Ms. ire had to give her a reminder.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, this was a good idea. It would have been a great waste¡­to dispose of all of that wine.¡±


    ¡°Yes. It was because I drank it there and knew how good it was. I couldn¡¯t let them just throw it away. However¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm? What is it? Is there a problem?¡±


    ¡°No. But regarding this whole incident¡­I talked to Mr. Hannes, the chief of Range vige¡­¡±

 Chapter 224

    Chapter 224


    Leo Wanted Some Grape Juice As Well


    And so I told Mr. Ekenhart about what happened before I returned from Range vige. To be precise, what I talked to Mr. Hannes about while waiting for Phillip to arrive with the wagons.


    It was a vige that relied on its wine. But while it was doing well, the children were often neglected.


    We were worried that once bad rumors of the wine started to spread, that people would stop buying it.


    Furthermore, now that the rtionship between the count and the duke could not be worse, they might not be able to buy grapes. Besides, they could hardly trust any merchants from that side now¡­


    ¡°I see¡­ Yes, there will be some effect from it.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ There will be no way to stop the rumors. And once they spread, they will keep spreading. Besides, I think it will also be impossible to retrieve all of the wine that has already been sold.¡±


    ¡°Well, those with good intuition will realize that it¡¯s the wine anyway¡­¡±


    Aside from the rumors, it would also be difficult to retrieve the wine that was already out there.


    Even if they were able to track down each bottle, most of it would have already been drunk or perhaps given to someone else.


    In fact¡­I doubted they could even be tracked in the first ce.


    ¡°It will be sad to lose this vor¡­ Sebastian. Is there anything that can be done about Range vige¡¯s wine?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ I cannot say¡­ But it sounds like the vige chief has given up on producing wine. I think it will be necessary to discuss the matter seriously.¡±


    ¡°Mm. Yes.¡±


    ¡°I will not allow something this good to disappear! I promise you now, my house will continue to send a good supply of grapes to the vige!¡±


    ¡°¡­Anneliese¡­ You aren¡¯t even in charge yet. You have no authority. Besides, it¡¯s not for you to decide. It¡¯s up to the grape merchants and Range vige.¡±


    ¡°Hmph¡­ Who would do such a¡­. Who would think of using something so wonderful to spread a disease¡­¡±


    ¡°You! It was you!¡±


    Neither Mr. Ekenhart or Sebastian could think of anything to do for Range vige now.


    But they would talk to Mr. Hannes in the near future and decide¡­ I would try to go with them. Though, I didn¡¯t know if there was anything that I could do.


    Still, what was wrong with Ms. Anne¡­? Or was she doing this on purpose¡­?


    But Ms. ire was forced to remind her repeatedly.


    ¡­They were starting to look like aedy duo.


    ¡°I have brought more for you all. And here you go, Leo¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°More!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    As I thought of such nonsensical things, Ms. Helena returned to the drawing room with more juice.


    Leo, Tilura and Sherry were overjoyed as they rushed towards Ms. Helena.


    And after waiting for their turn, they each acquired their drinks.


    Ms. Lyra then came to the table and poured it into each of our cups.


    ¡°Leo. Calm down. You¡¯ll make a mess if you drink it like that.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-guff-gubb-gubb¡­ Wuff? Wou! Guff-guff-gubb.¡±


    ¡°Kyab-kyab¡­kyau¡­¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s delicious!¡±


    ¡°Tilura, drink it slowly.¡±


    ¡°Okay.¡±


    After telling her to be careful, Leo pulled her head out of the bucket and looked at me with a puzzled expression. But then she quickly started drinking again.


    It was delicious, so it was understandable, but¡­ She definitely wasn¡¯t listening to me.


    Though, Sherry was now drinking slowly¡­


    Leo was supposed to be the one educating her, but had worse manners¡­ Well, it might also be due to Sherry¡¯s small size.


    Tilura was also drinking greedibly, but calmed down after Ms. ire warned her.


    That was fine, but I hoped everyone wasn¡¯t drinking too much?


    After that, we talked about our ns for the next day, and then dispersed.


    I went out into the back garden in order to train with Tilura.


    Ms. ire was now excited about Ms. Anne¡¯s education, and dragged her away by the cor.


    Sebastian must have had other reports to make to his master, as the two went off to his study.


    ¡°Ah, I see you two are training.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Ekenhart.¡±


    ¡°Father!¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Kyau.¡±


    After training for some time, Mr. Ekenhart came out into the garden.


    Apparently, he had finished talking with Sebastian.


    ¡°While I¡¯ve been away for a while, I see that you¡¯ve continued with your training.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ And you¡¯ve been in a real battle. So, how was it?¡±


    ¡°Uhh¡­ I was so nervous and had to be careful so that my arms didn¡¯t shake. But¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes?¡±


    ¡°Previously, you told me that I must never stop moving during a fight. But I wasn¡¯t able to follow that.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart then started questioning me about the battle with the orcs in Range vige.


    And so I told him honestly of my failure.


    ¡°Hmm. I see. And why did you stop?¡±


    He had told me never to stop many times.


    And so he looked at me sharply when I told him about it.


    ¡­It was a little scary.


    ¡°I don¡¯t want to make excuses¡­but it was Weed Cultivation.¡±


    ¡°Weed Cultivation? You used Weed Cultivation duringbat?¡±


    ¡°I wasn¡¯t trying to use it. But I started thinking¡­if only there was a convenient herb for such times¡­¡±


    ¡°And then you froze?¡±


    ¡°No. I activated Weed Cultivation on the orc.¡±


    ¡°You did? And what happened?¡±


    I felt like I was being interrogated, but I told Mr. Ekenhard about what had happened.


    What I hadn¡¯t been able to say before, because of Ms. Anne¡¯s presence.


    Tilura, who had been training with me, looked at us seriously and listened.


    And so I told him everything, including what Ms. Isabelle had told me.

 Chapter 225

    Chapter 225


    I Trained With Mr. Ekenhart


    ¡°I see. Weed Cultivation¡­ The Gift really is a strange ability.¡±


    ¡°Yes. But it won¡¯t activate on humans easily, so there shouldn¡¯t be any risk of it happening when I touch someone.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m relieved to hear that information. However, as for whether or not it will with monsters¡­that is another issue.¡±


    ¡°Yes. If what Ms. Isabelle says is true, it also depends on the magic energy. So I am really not sure.¡±


    Perhaps it will only activate on monsters with a certain degree of magic energy. Regardless, I was not likely to be able to find out for a long time.


    It would be much too dangerous to go out and seek a monster just so I could put my bare hands on it¡­


    ¡°I see. If it was something you can do easily and count on, it might help you duringbat¡­ But though it is a Gift, I suppose it can¡¯t do everything.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    I shouldn¡¯t expect it to solve all my problems.


    Besides, while it was supposed to be rted to nts, it could not make any farm produce.


    Instead of being able to do everything, it was something that made certain things more convenient.


    And I felt that if I relied on it too much, things might head in a bad direction.


    ¡°Well, you should train then. While it¡¯s too bad you froze duringbat, you need to teach your body so that it doesn¡¯t happen again.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    Said Mr. Ekenhart, and the tense training began.


    Even if I¡¯m thinking about something else, my body would be able to move naturally and dodge attacks¡­ That would certainly be ideal¡­but difficult. And I would have to train all the harder.


    After Tilura and I answered enthusiastically, Leo and Sherry answered as well.


    I knew that Leo was worried due to seeing my injury¡­but Sherry probably had no idea what we were talking about.


    Now that Mr. Ekenhart had joined us, things became much more severe then when it was just me and Tilura.


    Especially since I had now experienced a real battle, there were a lot of mock fights.


    Unlike my training with Leo, Mr. Ekenhart would also attack with a wooden sword.


    While it was soft wood, if his precise blowsnded, I would still get bruised.


    ¡°Hmmm. I can see that the way you fight is now different from Tilura, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Is it really?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know what is different¡­¡±


    After our training was done, I used Loe to heal all of the bruises while talking to Mr. Ekenhart.


    ¡­Should you really be using Loe so casually¡­? Mr. Ekenhart seemed to ask, but I ignored him.


    Of course, I was very thankful to Weed Cultivation.


    If I didn¡¯t heal the bruises and scratches, Ms. ire and the others might worry about me.


    ¡°Tilura. When you fight, what do you target first?¡±


    ¡°The vitals! If you cut them, then you can defeat your opponent quickly!¡±


    ¡°What about you, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°I¡­would target the vitals if I could¡­but perhaps the arms or legs. It will be easier to fight once they are slowed down.¡±


    ¡°There. That is the difference between you two.¡±


    Tilura said that she would target the vitals in a battle.


    But I had a different opinion¡­ Was it really just because I had fought in a battle?


    ¡°If there is a difference in skill between you, then aiming for the vitals first is not a bad idea. Once you reach a certain level¡­it will be about how fast you can take someone down. However, if the skill level is the same, then I doubt either side will be able tond such a blow easily.¡±


    ¡°¡­Really?¡±


    ¡°Mmm. Trade blows and wait for an opening¡­that is what will usually happen. But not always. So Mr. Takumi is smart. Target the legs and arms and slow their movements. If your arm is cut, then you will not be able to hold a sword. If your leg is cut, you will not move as well. Once they are weakened, the rest is easy.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Tilura and I nodded at Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s exnation.


    When I had fought the orcs, I first targeted the arms that held the spear.


    It was because with my skill level and sword length, I would not be able to reach its vitals very easily. And I suppose I had been right to think this.


    I had thought and searched for the right way to fight, and I suppose that was what set me apart from Tilura now.


    ¡°Your Grace, Lady Tilura, Mr. Takumi. Dinner is ready.¡±


    ¡°Ah, good. That¡¯s enough training and lecturing.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Thank you!¡±


    Ms. Gelda came to call us, and so the training in the garden ended.


    Thanking the person who instructed you was something they did in kendo. And I suppose it was the same anywhere, once your rtionship became that of master and apprentice.


    ¡°Tomorrow¡­we¡¯re going to the store¡­¡±


    After dinner, I took a bath and retired to my room.


    As the training was more severe than usual, Mr. Ekenhart told me to rest without doing my swings.


    Perhaps he was worried because of our work tomorrow.


    By the way, during dinner, Ms. Anne sat at the same table, but was the farthest away from Leo, because she was scared. I nearly burst intoughter.


    Mr. Ekenhart ate his meat in the same ill-mannered way as before.


    And Ms. ire had to admonish him again.


    ¡°Well, I don¡¯t want to stay up toote. Good night, Leo!¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    We were finally going to confront them. I didn¡¯t want to be tired.


    ¡­Though, I¡¯m sure it wouldn¡¯t turn into a fight.


    As it was rted to the herbs, Mr. Ekenhart said that I would apany them.


    And I had always meant to go.


    And so I moved my hand away from Leo, who I was petting, and rolled into my bed.


    Leo rolled into a ball next to the bed, and I said goodnight before drifting off into a dream.


    I would be very d to see that store gone, and to have only good quality herbs sold throughout Ractos.

 Chapter 226

    Chapter 226


    I Prepared To Visit The Store


    ¡°Good morning, Mr. Takumi. I trust you slept well?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I¡¯ve already eaten and am ready¡­ I am fully prepared.¡±


    The next morning, Tilura came to y with Leo, though she pretended that she had juste to wake me. And then we went to the dining hall.


    After eating breakfast there, I returned to my room and prepared to leave.


    That being said, it wasn¡¯t going to be a long journey, like when I went to Range vige, and so I was finished very quickly.


    I left the room and greeted Mr. Ekenhart, who had arrived at the entrance hall first.


    By the way, since we were going to Ractos, Sebastian had told Nick that he didn¡¯t need toe today.


    It would save time to just give the herbs to them directly.


    ¡°Anne¡­ You areing too?¡±


    ¡°Why wouldn¡¯t I? It concerns my family, after all.¡±


    Ms. ire and Ms. Anne were talking as they came down the stairs.


    Ms. ire did not seem pleased about this. But I was starting to believe what Mr. Ekenhart had first said, that they were more friendly than they appeared to be.


    ¡­Perhaps they were friends of the same age¡­ And Ms. ire just wouldn¡¯t admit it.


    ¡°Your Grace, we are ready to depart.¡±


    ¡°And the wine?¡±


    ¡°We have loaded a few bottles of it.¡±


    ¡°I see. Good.¡±


    Sebastian came to tell us that everything was ready, and now everyone who was going was present in the hall.


    It was me, Leo, Mr. Ekenhart, Ms. ire, Ms. Anne, Sebastian, with Phillip and Johanna apanying us as guards. And then there were Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s three private guards as well.


    So that was eleven including Leo¡­ It was quite a crowd.


    ¡°Be safe!¡±


    ¡°Kyau.¡±


    ¡°See youter, Tilura and Sherry.¡±


    ¡°Please be safe. We await your return!¡±


    I called out to Tilura and Sherry before leaving, and then we all stepped outside.


    As always, the servants formed a line and raised their voices in unison. I was used to it now.


    Though, I did see Milina with them¡­ I suppose she had been practicing?


    Perhaps I could join them one day¡­


    ¡°Your Grace, here is your carriage. You too, Lady ire.¡±


    ¡°Mmm.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    As there were many people this time, instead of the carriages for two to three people, we would go in something much more luxurious.


    ¡­It was practically a small room on wheels¡­ I had never seen a carriage with doors like that.


    But then again, maybe this wasn¡¯t anything fancy for a duke¡­


    ¡°What about you, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°I¡­will ride on Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Anne. I can see that you are just dying to ride on Leo as well?¡±


    ¡°Do not joke about such things. I will take a seat in the carriage.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. I think you should ride on Leo after you are more ustomed to being around her. All right, Leo. Let¡¯s go.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I called Leo, who had been ying with the horses, and then I climbed onto her back.


    I suppose that Ms. ire was just joking about Ms. Anne riding on Leo.


    The others all entered the fancy noble carriage, and Sebastian climbed onto the driver¡¯s seat.


    The guards all mounted their horses as well. And we were ready to go.


    ¡°We will depart now, Your Grace!¡±


    Phillip said, as his horse moved to the lead.


    And the other horses and carriage began to move.


    Unlike other lightheart excursions to the town, there was a nervousness in the air. I suppose it was because of the duke.


    ¡°Leo, don¡¯t get too excited.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    As Leo was faster than the horses, she would often run around them and go back and forth yfully.


    While Phillip and Johanna were used to this behavior, Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s guards were not.


    And so it would be best if she didn¡¯t do anything that was unnecessary.


    ¡­Besides, I had seen them flinch a little when Leo got close.


    ¡°Why won¡¯t that thing calm down? It is most indecent.¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t mind Good Leo, Anne.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. Leo is a Silver Fenrir. She is like the symbol of our great house. It is proper for her to be free and live as she chooses.¡±


    When Leo moved close to the carriage, I heard the conversation happening inside.


    Well, the window happened to be open, and I saw that Ms. Anne red at us. So I knew she would say something that wasn¡¯t kind.


    I suppose she now felt safe since she was in the carriage.


    ¡°¡­A Silver Fenrir¡­? Is that true? Well, it does have silvery fur¡­¡±


    Oh? Apparently, Ms. Anne hadn¡¯t known that Leo was a Silver Fenrir.


    Now that I thought about it, no one had exined to her about Leo or me¡­ I just assumed that she knew, because she was a noble. But maybe it was only this house.


    ¡°Yes, it is true. There is no doubt that Good Leo is a Silver Fenrir. She can destroy monsters with ease. I have seen it with my own eyes.¡±


    ¡°I wish I had been so fortunate¡­ But Anneliese, Leo is definitely a Silver Fenrir. And since she obeys Mr. Takumi, he is our honored guest.¡±


    ¡°¡­But surely¡­no human couldmand a Silver Fenrir¡­¡±


    While Ms. Anne knew about Silver Fenrirs, she had not connected them to Leo.


    Well, if they were supposed to be ferocious monsters that yielded to no one, then the quiet Leo might not have fit her image of them.


    Though¡­Leo is just my buddy, not a servant.


    ¡°So¡­this Mr¡­Takumi, did you say? He is not somemoner?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi is special. And kind. And bright¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­You seem to have a high opinion of him, ire¡­ Well, you are not wrong. He has improved much with the sword as well. And yes, he is not stupid. I think he is talented.¡±


    ¡°That is a lot of praise from the both of you¡­¡±


    Oh, now they were talking about me.


    While Mr. ire and Mr. Ekenhart were both rather generous in their estimation of me, I felt like I was still a far way off from deserving it¡­


    Perhaps they felt it was necessary for them to do so, to prevent Ms. Anne from feeling too much disdain towards me¡­?

 Chapter 227

    Chapter 227


    We All Arrived In Ractos


    ¡°Oh, Mr. Takumi? You were listening to us?¡±


    ¡°Hahah. Well, Leo moved close and the window was open¡­so I heard.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°Ahhhh!¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, Leo seems to be in very high spirits today?¡±


    ¡°Leo likes being able to carry people and run. And so she always gets very excited when going to town.¡±


    ¡°I see. In that case, it was a good thing that she came along.¡±


    As Leo ran parallel to the carriage, Ms. ire noticed that I overheard them.


    It was a little awkward, but the others did not seem to mind.


    Though, Ms. Anne did shriek a little when Leo barked¡­ But that was fine.


    Mr. Ekenhard observed that Leo was in a good mood, and so I exined to him that Leo liked to run.


    As she was sorge, she could not move so freely when inside of the mansion. And that was bound to be stressful.


    She had always liked to run, even in our previous world¡­so it was no surprise.


    ¡°Your Grace, we have been waiting for you.¡±


    ¡°Mmm.¡±


    The carriage stopped in front of the entrance to Ractos town, and everyone stepped out.


    Usually, we would get out in the za with the fountain, but since Mr. Ekenhart was with us, we might attract a lot more attention.


    Indeed, with such a fancy carriage that was different from any other, people would take notice.


    ¡°We were informed by Mr. Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°I see. So you know what business brings me here?¡±


    ¡°Yes! Though, it is a great shame that you have been forced toe here in person. We apologize for not being able to deal with it.¡±


    ¡°That is fine. As it is rted to the count, it would be difficult for the people here to act.¡±


    Ten guards were standing in a line at the entrance in order to greet Mr. ekenhart.


    Apparently, Sebastian had contacted them in advance.


    They seemed to deeply regret that Mr. Ekenhart had toe all the way here in person.


    But as Mr. Ekenhart said, it was an important matter¡­


    And since it involved the selling of medicine, it was not something the guards could handle alone.


    ¡°Then we shall apany you¡­¡±


    ¡°That won¡¯t be necessary. Besides, we are drawing enough attention as it is. I want to get a glimpse of what the town is usually like. So my guards will be enough. And¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Leo will be with us.¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course!¡±


    While the guards meant to apany us at first, Mr. Ekenhart refused their help.


    Leo tilted her head after Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s gaze turned to her.


    He meant that with Leo here, we didn¡¯t need any other guards.


    They agreed and stood back.


    ¡°Now, what should we do¡­ Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°Yes. We should go to Mr. Kalis¡¯s store first. And from there, Mr. Takumi and I alone will go to the other store¡­¡±


    ¡°Me?¡±


    ¡°Yes. So we can take the wine to them¡­¡±


    Sebastian then exined to everyone what would happen now.


    Apparently, it was just me and Sebastian who would go first.


    ¡°Wouldn¡¯t things move faster if Mr. Ekenhart is there?¡±


    ¡°That is true, however¡­¡±


    ¡°It will end too soon. And where is the fun in that? They have caused much mischief on mynds¡­ And so it¡¯s only right that we have a little fun, is that not the case?¡±


    ¡°¡­Father¡­ This is a very bad habit of yours.¡±


    ¡°How terrifying¡­ My father was a fool for ever working against you.¡±


    ¡°And yet you were the one who showed him the way, Anne¡­¡±


    Apparently, Mr. Ekenhart was amused by the idea that the store could be toyed with.


    Both he and Sebastian were grinning mischievously.


    ¡­Ms. ire and Ms. Anne looked a little concerned, and I couldn¡¯t help but feel the same.


    ¡°Now, let us go to Mr. Kalis¡¯s store. And there, I will exin the details to Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Very well.¡±


    ¡°I haven¡¯t been to the store in a long time. But Mr. Takumi¡¯s herbs are already being sold, yes? How are things going?¡±


    ¡°Better than I had expected. Of course, part of it is due to the quality, but it also helped that the other store¡¯s offerings were so poor.¡±


    ¡°I see. So the timing was good. ¡­Though, it is a shame that so many people suffered from the illness¡­¡±


    ¡°But thanks to Mr. Takumi¡¯s herbs¡­things were not as bad as they could be. At least, there have been no reports of people dying from it. Besides, Mr. Kalis¡¯s store is doing something special.¡±


    ¡°Special? What is it?¡±


    As we walked away from the guards and towards Mr. Kalis¡¯s store, the conversation turned to the herbs that were being sold.


    But as there were so many people, and Leo was with us, many heads turned¡­


    Children were especially excited when they saw Leo.


    After all, Leo had yed with them before in front of the store.


    Some of them tried to rush towards her, but their parents noticed Ms. ire and held the children back.


    While Mr. Ekenhard rarely visited, Ms. ire was well known to the people of the town.


    ¡°He lowered the prices of the Ramogi.¡±


    ¡°He did? But did Mr. Takumi agree to that?¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course. He insisted that he be paid less¡­¡±


    ¡°True. It was Sebastian¡¯s idea, and I epted. That way, it will be more essible and curb the spread of the disease.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ So it was for the people. I thank you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°No, not at all. I just wanted the poor to be able to buy it¡­so fewer people would suffer.¡±


    Seeing the children suffering at the orphanage was also a big part of it.


    After all, they had been fooled into using what little money they had on ineffective medicine.


    Of course, the money didn¡¯t really matter¡­ I just didn¡¯t want to see children suffer.


    As Mr. Ekenhart bowed his head, I answered with a smile, and we continued on to Mr. Kalis¡¯s store.

 Chapter 228

    Chapter 228


    We Made Arrangements At Mr. Kalis¡¯s Store


    ¡°Well, well. Your Grace. You do us great honor with your presence.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. And things seem to be going well here.¡±


    ¡°Yes. It is all thanks to Mr. Takumi¡¯s herbs. Have you heard about the Ramogi discounts?¡±


    ¡°Sebastian and Mr. Takumi have informed me.¡±


    ¡°I see. Thanks to that, the store is filled with customers every day, which keeps our staff very busy¡­ But we can hardlyin about that.¡±


    When we arrived at Mr. Kalis¡¯s store, there was a line of customers waiting to get in.


    It had definitely not been like this thest time we were here. Was this because of the Ramogi discount?


    One of the clerks saw us, and went inside to call Mr. Kalis, who then came out to greet us.


    ¡°We cannot talk out here. Pleasee inside. Though, it is not a veryrge store.¡±


    ¡°Mmm.¡±


    And so we followed Mr. Kalis into the store.


    ¡­Except for Leo. She waited outside.


    As some of the customers brought their children, Leo could y with them.


    And since the clerks had learned from thest time we were here, they were able to smoothly create a line for Leo as well.


    ¡°This way.¡±


    Unlikest time we were here, Mr. Kalis guided us to the second floor of the building.


    As there were too many customers on the first floor, he probably thought that we wouldn¡¯t be able to rx.


    Well, there wasn¡¯t enough space to put out chairs.


    The second floor looked like an office, and so everyone except the guards and Sebastian sat down at the table.


    ¡°Now, Mr. Takumi and I will go and pay the rival store a little visit.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m counting on you.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Mr. Takumi. Once we arrive there¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    Sebastian then told me about how things would y out once we were there.


    And all I could do was nod in agreement.


    It seemed like Sebastian could handle everything himself, but he said that he wanted me there, so that I could pretend to be a merchant who could appraise the medicine.


    Sebastian was already known as the duke¡¯s butler, and Ms. ire and Phillip were also known as well. Besides, they didn¡¯t look at all like merchants.


    And Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s guards had to stay with him, just in case something happened.


    ¡­Though, Leo would stay here. But I suppose it was their job, and could not be helped.


    ¡°Ah, it¡¯s you! What brings you here today? Of course, I did hear that I didn¡¯t need to go¡­¡±


    ¡°Hey, Nick.¡±


    After Sebastian¡¯s exnation was finished, and we were about to leave¡­ Nick came up to the second floor.


    Apparently, he had been dealing with customers, and had nowe up to rest.


    ¡°Ah, so this is Nick¡­I¡¯ve heard of him from Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°¡­Who is that old man?¡±


    ¡°Hey, stop that. This man is¡­¡±


    ¡°Hahaha! So that is your reaction upon seeing me¡­ Well, it cannot be helped if you do not know. It has been a while, but I am amused!¡±


    ¡°Now he¡¯sughing¡­¡±


    So Mr. Ekenhart had heard about it from Sebastian.


    Well, he seemed to report everything to him¡­and this store was owned by the duke.


    And now Nick was being quite rude.


    But when I frantically tried to correct him, Mr. Ekenhart began tough loudly.


    In fact, he was pping the table¡­ Was it really that funny?


    ¡°Father is used to people paying him the utmost respect¡­and so such unusual reactions are amusing to him.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, hello Lady ire!¡±


    ¡°Hello, Nick. ¡­This is my father, you know?¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­your father¡­ Wouldn¡¯t that mean¡­¡±


    ¡°The duke.¡±


    Ms. ire looked at herughing father with a hint of annoyance.


    And then Nick went to greet her. As he visited the mansion often, he knew Ms. ire well enough.


    Ms. ire then introduced her father, and as Nick looked confused, I answered him bluntly.


    ¡­It was my duty, as the one paying him.


    ¡°¡­The d-d-d-d-d-d-d-du-duu¡­¡±


    ¡°Doo-doo?¡±


    ¡°Hi-his Grace the Du-duke!?¡±


    ¡°Hahaha! Indeed, that is I. Ekenhart Liebert.¡±


    ¡°Fo-forgive me! I did not know, and have been very rude! Please don¡¯t chop off my head! Anything but my head!¡±


    After sputtering like some bird, Nick was finally able to spit it out.


    That was how nervous he was.


    But Mr. Ekenhart still seemed to be enjoying the situation.


    ¡°I won¡¯t cut off your head. You have hired quite the clown, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­¡±


    ¡°I think I will have him entertain us while you two visit the other store.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha¡­! If-if-if you insist!¡±


    ¡°¡­Well, good luck, Nick¡­¡±


    Apparently, Mr. Ekenhart had taken a liking to Nick.


    Sebastian and I then left Mr. Kalis¡¯s store, but Nick was left on the second floor.


    He looked a little like an abandoned puppy, pleading for help¡­ But I pushed all thoughts of it from my head.


    Well, it was good that Mr. Ekenhart was enjoying himself. As long as he didn¡¯t go too far, I suppose.


    It was with such thoughts that I headed to the rival store.


    Leo looked like she wanted toe with me, but as she would draw too much attention, I had her stay with the children who wanted to y with her.


    Well, it was a safe enough town. But just as a precaution, Phillip and Johanna followed us from a distance.


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right. Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    We talked while walking to the store.


    ¡°Take this, just in case¡­¡±


    ¡°This is¡­ The body strengthening herb? And the sense enhancing one¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. I thought it might be useful.¡±


    While walking, I took out the herbs from my bag and handed them to Sebastian.


    We had used the same herbs in the forest before. The one that enhanced your senses, and the body strengthening one, which I had made by ident.


    I had made them yesterday, along with the herbs for Mr. Kalis.

 Chapter 229

    Chapter 229


    We Entered The Rival Store


    ¡°However, is it necessary¡­?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. It¡¯s a precaution. I don¡¯t want to have any regrets, like I did in Range vige.¡±


    Especially with the body strengthening herb.


    During the orcs attack, had I had such herbs, I might have been able to defeat more of them, and fewer people would have been injured.


    Perhaps I wouldn¡¯t have been injured at all¡­


    While I couldn¡¯t change what happened, I could prepare so it wouldn¡¯t happen again¡­


    ¡°Very well. Though¡­I shall not be of much use if it does turn into a fight¡­¡±


    ¡°Even still. Being able to move a little better might help you until Phillip and Johanna arrive.¡±


    Sebastian did not know how to fight, and so I would have to do my best¡­ I thought this as I checked the sword on my belt.


    My sword had been shattered during the battle with the orcs. When Sebastian heard of this, he prepared a new one for me once I had returned to the mansion.


    It was of a better quality than the previous one, which wasforting.


    While Phillip and Johanna were following us, they could not enter the store.


    We had thought of having them pretend to be customers, but that would only give rise to suspicion. They looked too much like soldiers.


    Still, they would wait outside. And if anything happened, they would charge in to help us.


    Otherwise, we might be caught and used as hostages.


    ¡°But why sense strengthening?¡±


    ¡°If I use that herb, I will be able to detect small changes in facial expression. It is the same with any suspicious movement within the store.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    I was being extra cautious.


    From what I had heard from Nick, the other store had a bouncer or guard type person. So things could get rough.


    There was a saying about how caution does no harm. It¡¯s not like this was a great hassle, and it could help keep us safe.


    ¡°Mm¡­it tastes terrible as always.¡±


    ¡°Well, that can¡¯t be helped. Don¡¯t you know¡­the best medicine is always bitter?¡±


    ¡°Oh? Is that a saying from your world, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    We ate the bitter herbs and talked while heading to the store.


    ¡°There it is.¡±


    ¡°That¡­¡±


    We arrived at the store and looked at it from a short distance away.


    In terms of appearance, it was not much different from other stores. It blended in with the rest of the town¡­ Unlike Ms. Isabelle¡¯s store.


    But unlike Mr. Kalis¡¯s store, it looked very empty.


    The rumors that Sebastian had spread must be the cause of this great decrease in customers¡­ And there was also the discounts.


    ¡°There is no one outside of the store.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. They are not calling out to customers¡­ It is quite eerie.¡±


    The storefront was empty and quiet.


    As this was a store I had been wanting to deal with for some time, there was a nervous and eerie feeling in the air.


    ¡°Just leave all of the talking to me. You act as we nned, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°¡­I am supposed to agree with you, right? I understand.¡±


    After that, the two of us walked to the store.


    Not only was it quiet outside, but it seemed very quiet inside as well.


    The only thing that I could hear was¡­footsteps¡­but no talking.


    As my senses were enhanced, the quietness nearly hurt my ears.


    ¡°Well then¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    Sebastian put his hand on the door and nodded at me.


    I nodded back, and then he pushed the door open.


    ¡°Excuse me. Is there anyone here?¡±


    We stepped inside, and then Sebastian spoke in a gentle voice, which was different from the low voice he had a moment ago.


    Here, he was a pleasant old man and a customer.


    ¡°What is it, old man? Herbs? Medicine?¡±


    The low voice came from the back, behind a counter. And then arge man appeared.


    Perhaps he was the clerk. But he looked very intimidating¡­


    ¡°Both. I would like to have a look at your products. ¡­Uh, who is in charge here?¡±


    ¡°¡­Is that so! Forgive my rudeness. I will call the master right away.¡±


    Upon hearing Sebastian, the man immediately started to smile.


    Since customers were so rare now, they were probably desperate to please him.


    I suppose he didn¡¯t think we were customers at first.


    ¡­Though, that sounded very strange to me, since we had entered the store.


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting. I am in charge here. You can call me Wood.¡±


    ¡°Hello. I am Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Sebastian. ¡­Have I heard that name¡­¡±


    The man in charge had a great grin on his face and a stout frame.


    His skin shone, and his clothes were extravagantly decorated.


    ¡­He reminded me of those people who had be rich overnight.


    By the way, thest part was muttered under his breath, but thanks to the herbs, I was able to hear him.


    As Sebastian often visited the town, perhaps he had heard the name before.


    ¡°The herbs and medicine here have such a high reputation, that I simply had toe and see for myself, as I am thinking of making a great purchase.¡±


    ¡°Indeed! Indeed! We carry only the best herbs and medicine you have ever seen! Every customer leaves us with great satisfaction!¡±


    Mr. Wood¡¯s smile broadened at Sebastian¡¯s words.


    Good reputation¡­ Sebastian was clearly lying, but the man seemed quite oblivious to this.


    ¡°May I have a seat?¡±


    ¡°Yes! Yes! Please make yourselffortable!¡±


    The walls of the store were lined with shelves of herbs and medicines. But the center was empty.


    There was a counter in the back. And to the left corner, there was a table and chair so people could sit down and talk.


    ¡­That was likely where they lied to their customers and made them buy their awful herbs.

 Chapter 230

    Chapter 230


    We Talked With The Man In Charge


    ¡°Excuse me.¡±


    ¡°¡­Excuse me.¡±


    I sat down on one of the chairs after Sebastian.


    ¡°So¡­ What are you looking for in particr?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ I hear that a disease has been spreading in this town. Can you show me something that would be effective for that? I do not live here, but I want to have some, just in case. Buying things in advance is one of the basics of business.¡±


    ¡°Of course, of course¡­ I see you have a good eye! In fact, we detected the spread of the disease earlier than anyone, and have prepared some medicine!¡±


    The mad sauntered away to the counter on the right.


    And then he came back with a bottle of light purple liquid, which he ced on the table.


    ¡­Thanks to my enhanced senses, I had seen the man¡¯s face twitch at the mention of a spreading disease.


    ¡°This medicine was made with herbs. One sip of it and you will be healed¡­ Quite wonderful!¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­ I see. May I?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Yes, it seems to be of good quality.¡±


    While he listened to the man¡¯s exnation, Sebastian pushed the suspicious looking bottle towards me.


    I picked it up and pretended to inspect it while singing its praises.


    ¡°Yes, it is! It is! In this store, you will find only the best medicine!¡±


    I did not miss the smirk on his face when I said that the medicine was good.


    ¡°Now, let¡¯s see something else¡­¡±


    Sebastian urged, and a few other herbs and medicines were brought out.


    All of them looked quite strange in color, and it was obvious that they had been diluted.


    As for the herbs, most looked wilted.


    ¡­The man insisted that this state made them more effective, but I knew that it wasn¡¯t the case.


    As for how I knew, it was because I had made the same thing for Mr. Kalis¡¯s store.


    Through Weed Cultivation, I transformed them into the best state. And they did not look like they were on the verge of dying.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ What do you think?¡±


    ¡°Yes. They are all of astonishingly good quality.¡±


    When Sebastian asked me this, I eximed that the herbs and medicine were all excellent.


    I was not a very good liar¡­ I felt nervous, and knew I wasn¡¯t being very convincing.


    ¡­And even though I smiled¡­ I probably looked very tense.


    ¡°I see¡­ Well, Mr. Wood. What would you say to a contract with His Grace, Duke Liebert?¡±


    ¡°The d-du-duke!?¡±


    The man was startled when he heard this.


    Well, it hade so suddenly.


    ¡°Yes. In fact, I am a servant of that house. And I heard that you are well-connected to a certain count¡­ And since you have such an undeniable reputation, His Grace thought it would be a gesture of goodwill to the count.¡±


    ¡°I-I see. Of course. Yes, the count will be very happy to hear it! ¡­I thought that I heard of you¡­ So you must be the butler¡­ Yes, what an opportunity this is.¡±


    Thest part was muttered quietly, but I still heard it.


    While he had been cautious at first, the idea of being able to sell great quantities of medicine to the duke had eased his mine.


    ¡°Well, we must make a contract at once then! Which medicine will you buy?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Wood, please calm down. These things should not be rushed.¡±


    ¡°Ye-yes, of course. Hahaha! I forgot myself for a moment. Do forgive me.¡±


    ¡°Hohoho. It is not a bad thing for a merchant to be very aggressive.¡±


    Due to this sudden opportunity presenting itself¡­the man became rather flustered and hurriedly tried to move things along.


    But Sebastian stopped him. Also¡­I was not sure that I agreed with him that merchants should be so aggressive..


    Well, nevermind that.


    I saw that Sebastian¡¯s eyes looked sharper. Was it time¡­?


    ¡°Mr. Wood. Before we get to the details of the contract, I have something from His Grace.¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­you do? And what is it?¡±


    ¡°Here it is.¡±


    ¡°Wh-what is that!?¡±


    Sebastian took out the two bottles and ced them on the table.


    It was the bottled wine that had been prepared at the mansion.


    ¡°My master was incredibly pleased when he heard of the splendid quality of your products, and how you have contributed to the unfortunate townspeople. And so he wanted to make a gift to you¡­of wine made on his ownnds.¡±


    It seemed rather odd for a duke to send a mere store some wine¡­but the man was just staring at the bottle. It seemed like he hadn¡¯t even been listening to Sebastian.


    ¡­Well, at least things were going ording to n.


    ¡°Excuse me, but could you provide the wine sses? We will make a toast to celebrate the contract. My master wanted me to make you drink it immediately, to see if it is to your liking.¡±


    ¡°Bu-bu-but¡­ Is that wine¡­¡±


    ¡°What about it? This wine was selected by the duke himself. The taste and quality is among the best¡­¡±


    ¡°I-I see¡­ Very well. Hey! Bring some sses!¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    Sebastian began to push, as if this was the pivotal moment. He emphasized that this was the duke¡¯s wish.


    Which had a lot of sway¡­ For who could deny Mr. Ekenhart. While he still hesitated, the man called the clerk in the back and had him bring wine sses.


    ¡°Sebastian, things are going well.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. He hasn¡¯t noticed how strange this is¡­ Though, he clearly knows about the wine.¡±


    As the sses were being prepared, Sebastian and I whispered to each other.


    Thanks to the sense enhancements, we could talk even though our voices were barely audible.


    Apparently, Sebastian had been making doubtful excuses on purpose.


    But the man didn¡¯t notice. And because he knew about the wine, he didn¡¯t realize how strange this turn of events was.


    Why would wine be prepared for strangers who were not favored? And why should the duke insist on it being drunk right away?

 Chapter 231

    Chapter 231


    We Made The Man Drink The Wine


    ¡°However, these sense enhancing herbs are quite useful. You can tell what a person is thinking just by looking at their facial expressions.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Normally, you wouldn¡¯t be able to catch such subtle differences.¡±


    The man that Sebastian was talking to tended to smile a lot, perhaps to hide any other emotion. However, as Sebastian said, he would asionally react to certain words in strange ways.


    And we could also hear him muttering. It really was a good thing that we ate the herbs.


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting. Here are the wine sses¡­¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Now, will you be so kind as to drink with us?¡±


    ¡°Ye-yes¡­¡±


    Sebastian took one ss and filled it with wine from one of the bottles.


    I then filled Sebastian and my cups from the other bottle.


    ¡°Let us make a toast then. To good medicine, and this great encounter¡­ Is that fine?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Cheers.¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­cheers.¡±


    We raised our sses into the air.


    The man was sweating and staring at the wine in his cup. But Sebastian and I ignored him and drank our cups in one go.


    ¡°Ahhh. The duke certainly knows how to choose the best wine.¡±


    ¡°Yes. He is very knowledgeable about wine, and is very particr when ites to smell, taste and color.¡±


    The wine that the two of us had drunk¡­ We had drunk it at the mansion as well. It was sweet and fragrant. Good enough that I was once again d that they didn¡¯t throw it away.


    And while Sebastian and I smiled and talked, the man continued to stare at his cup and would not drink.


    ¡°Oh, is there a problem?¡±


    ¡°N-no¡­uh¡­¡±


    ¡°Perhaps you are not fond of wine?¡±


    ¡°In-indeed¡­ In fact, I am not much of a drinker at all¡­uh¡­¡±


    ¡°I see. How very rude of me. To give wine to someone who does not drink¡­¡±


    While Sebastian understood the reason, he continued to talk to the man.


    Sebastian was scary because he could talk like this without his face changing even a little.


    ¡­I would not want to make an enemy of such a person.


    ¡°Uh, yes¡­I¡¯m sorry.¡±


    The man was trying to get away by saying that he didn¡¯t drink.


    His expression seemed to rx a little, once he came up with that excuse, but Sebastian would not let him go so easily.


    After he had chuckled happily, he suddenly looked troubled.


    ¡°¡­Only, His Grace went out of his way to select this one¡­ But if you hate it so much, it cannot be helped. I will make a full report of it to His Grace. ¡­It is unfortunate, as he so wished to have more people drink this wine¡­¡±


    ¡°We-we-well¡­ Um, I¡­ Can you not just tell him that I drank it¡­?¡±


    ¡°That would mean lying to him. And I cannot lie or deceive my master. I shall tell him what I saw and felt, exactly as it urred.¡±


    ¡°Bu-but¡­ What will the count say about this¡­!¡±


    The man was looking at the wine frantically. The pressure Sebastian was applying was making it so that he could not think properly.


    If the duke should know that he didn¡¯t drink the wine¡­ He might be so offended that there will be no contract after all¡­ And what would the count do¡­? Such were the thoughts that must be on his mind.


    I had an idea, as he would mutter to himself.


    ¡°However¡­¡±


    ¡°Ye-yes?¡±


    Sebastian smirked.


    The man was being toyed with on the palm of Sebastian¡¯s hand now.


    ¡­Sebastian. Do you realize how much you look like a viin now?


    ¡°Perhaps you could drink just one little sip? You really just have to lick it. And then I can truthfully tell my master, that Mr. Wood has indeed tasted the wine.¡±


    ¡°One¡­sip¡­? Very well¡­ I can do that¡­¡±


    Without noticing Sebastian¡¯s expression, the man was led into drinking the wine.


    I didn¡¯t know how much of it you needed to drink to get sick, but the man had clearly decided that one sip was fine.


    And so he tilted the ss and hesitantly brought it to his lips.


    ¡°¡­Mmm¡­glug¡­ There. I drank it¡­ Hah¡­¡±


    It was not much, but he had indeed drunk some of the wine.


    He let out a sigh as if he had just finished a great task.


    ¡°Yes, I have observed it. Now my report shall be a lot more positive.¡±


    ¡°Is-is that so? I¡¯m d to hear it. ¡­Cough-cough!¡±


    The man began to cough as Sebastian smiled back.


    There is a saying about how sickness and health start with the mind¡­ Perhaps as someone who knew, he thought it was already starting to have an effect¡­?


    Or perhaps he was trying to get it out of him.


    His body might be rejecting it, as he knew it was infected.


    ¡°So, you have drunk the wine.


    ¡°Ye-yes. Now we can continue with this contract¡­¡±


    ¡°No, that will not be necessary.¡±


    ¡°What?¡±


    While the man was now eager to move things alone, there was no way that Sebastian would ever create such a contract.


    The man looked stunned when Sebastian revealed this.


    Now the fun was about to start¡­ For Sebastian and Mr. Ekenhart, that is.


    ¡°Mr. Wood¡­ You know about the wine, don¡¯t you? That this is no ordinary wine.¡±


    ¡°Wh-what are you talking about?¡±


    ¡°This wine¡­ Due to certain reasons, we had to investigate it¡­ And it was determined to be wine that must not be drunk. The reason is simple. Because this wine is the cause of the spreading disease in Ractos.¡±


    Sebastian suddenly started to exin about the wine.


    But now that the man knew that someone else had made the connection, he immediately became very pale.

 Chapter 232

    Chapter 232


    We Interrogated The Man


    ¡°Those who drink the wine be ill, and that spreads to the next person¡­that¡¯s what happened here¡­ But it is very odd.¡±


    ¡°¡­Wh-what is odd?¡±


    ¡°Well, this store started selling the herbs at just the same time as the disease started to spread. Perhap it is only a coincidence¡­ But it¡¯s a little too convenient, don¡¯t you agree?¡±


    ¡°I-I would¡­we only started to sell the herbs in order to help those who suffered. That was the only thing on our minds¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ In that case, it must be a coincidence then. However¡­¡±


    ¡°The-there is more?¡±


    Sebastian exined little by little.


    As for the man, his eyes continued to shift back and forth as he searched for excuses to make.


    ¡­At this point, I didn¡¯t even need the sense enhancing herbs to know what he was thinking¡­


    As for Sebastian, it was very evident that he was enjoying himself now. His expression was glowing.


    After all, exining and pressuring people he disliked were his two favorite things.


    ¡°There is a vige that is close to Ractos. In fact, this wine was made in that vige. A few days ago, that vige was being investigated by someone sent from the duke. And during that time, the vige was attacked by monsters.¡±


    And that person was me.


    While he said it was someone from the duke, I suppose it wasn¡¯t wrong. Since I lived there and was on good terms with everyone.


    ¡°Mo-monsters¡­you say? How very unfortunate¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, very. Thankfully, due to the efforts of the person investigating, things ended without anything too serious happening. However, this monster attack was orchestrated by someone.¡±


    ¡°Someone?¡±


    ¡°Yes. And that person¡­¡±


    Sebastian then told him about the merchants.


    How they had pretended to be carrying wine, and brought monsters instead.


    These merchants used a magic device to infect the wine, as a way of spreading the disease.


    ¡°And these merchants told us¡­that they were acting on the count¡¯s order¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­¡±


    The man became speechless once the count was mentioned.


    ¡°And this store is connected to the count, yes? I¡¯ve heard your reputation. About how you bought all the herbs and medicine. You diluted and weakened them before selling them again¡­¡±


    ¡°Bu-but¡­we wouldn¡¯t¡­¡±


    ¡°You cannot escape now. Your reaction to the wine was enough. Mr. Wood, you knew that the wine was the source of the disease¡­ That¡¯s why you hesitated to drink it, yes?¡±


    ¡°¡­No. Uh¡­ I just don¡¯t care for the taste of wine¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh?¡±


    The man began to make the same excuses as before.


    And to this, Sebastian raised his voice andughed happily.


    ¡°But I heard¡­a few days ago, you became terribly drunk in a certain tavern.¡±


    ¡°Th-that was¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, I¡¯ve heard all about it. You and several friends made quite a scene as you drank until morning¡­ And yet you imed to dislike the taste¡­?¡±


    Even I had not known this.


    If it was a few days ago, it would be before Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s arrival, but after I had returned to the mansion.


    Perhaps Sebastian had been letting him run around freely up until now in order to catch him in such an act.


    So noting here as soon as I returned was all part of Sebastian¡¯s n¡­ Just so he could push this man as far as he could¡­


    ¡°You actually can drink wine, but you hesitated¡­ Surely this could only be because you knew what it was?¡±


    ¡°¡­Tsk¡­¡±


    The man was no longer able to make any excuses.


    Had he drunk the wine with a straight face when he could, he wouldn¡¯t be in such an ufortable position now¡­


    Well, in any case, with Mr. Ekenhart backing us, there was no way that we would fail.


    ¡°¡­Indeed, I knew that the wine was spreading the disease. But do you think that¡¯s enough to catch me? I didn¡¯t do anything to the wine.¡±


    ¡°That is true. You did not do anything to the wine.¡±


    ¡°Exactly. You cannot me me, just because I happened to know about the wine!¡±


    He was suddenly getting quite angry¡­ His face was red and he started to shout.


    Perhaps this was his true nature being revealed. He no longer talked with polite words.


    But he was right. He couldn¡¯t be arrested just because he knew what the wine was.


    It was possible that he had just happened to hear about it from the count.


    ¡°However, you still sold medicine of poor quality on the duke¡¯snds. That is a great crime, you know?¡±


    ¡°But you do not have proof of that! All of the medicine and herbs I sell here are very effective! Surely it is not strange to want to monopolize the market in case there is such an illness!¡±


    ¡°Indeed. If you knew that a disease would spread, making a business of it would lead to great profits. However, we know that your medicine and herbs have almost no effect.¡±


    ¡°What are you saying? How would you know that!¡±


    The man was now desperate to prove that he was innocent. But he seemed to be too frantic to be able to think straight.


    As for the effect of the medicine¡­that could be confirmed easily with a pharmacist¡­


    ¡°¡­Earlier, you showed me this, saying it was the medicine that would heal the illness spreading in Ractos, yes?¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes, that¡¯s right.¡±


    Sebastian was pointing at the bottle of light purple liquid that the man had brought.


    ¡°Unfortunately, you cannot heal the illness with this medicine.¡±


    ¡°Ho-how do you know!?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s simple. Mr. Takumi. Can you take out the Ramogi?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    I went into my bag and took out some Ramogi powder that was wrapped in paper.


    I then put it on the table and unwrapped it.


    ¡°Tha-that is¡­¡±


    ¡°As someone who deals with herbs and medicine, I don¡¯t have to tell you, do I?¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°These are Ramogi petals. Dried and powdered.¡±


    To be precise, I had used the Gift to transform them into this state. But normally, that is how you would do it.

 Chapter 233

    Chapter 233


    Sebastian Got Carried Away


    ¡°The illness is healed by just drinking this. ¡­Unlike this medicine over here. And I tested it¡­ If you dissolve a little Ramogi in water and leave it¡­it bes like this, yes?¡±


    He said, pointing to the bottle with the light purple liquid.


    ¡­So it turns into that color. I didn¡¯t know that.


    Would it have been a darker purple if it contained an effective amount of Ramogi?


    But then again, I didn¡¯t understand how dissolving it in water and leaving it was supposed to work.


    ¡°And yet you still insist that you were selling proper medicine? You bought all the herbs and medicine from other stores, and then watered them down until they were too weak to have an effect. And you think that selling such medicine is not a crime¡­?¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    As Sebastian continued to use him, the man had no words for a reply.


    He just looked down and listened to Sebastian.


    ¡°Not only that, but while this time the medicine was made of Ramogi¡­to others, you sold medicine that waspletely unrted¡­ Yes, it¡¯s all been investigated. ¡­Though, thanks to the herbs that we provided, you¡¯ve had very few customers here recently¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­You¡­¡±


    ¡°Once the Ramogi was discounted so that anyone could buy it, well, our store was filled with customers day after day¡­¡±


    Sebastian was getting carried away now¡­ He continued to talk without even looking at the man.


    ¡­This was strange. He had taken the sense enhancing herbs, but didn¡¯t even notice the difference that hade over the man.


    ¡°In the first ce, the very idea of trying to monopolize¡­¡±


    ¡°So it¡¯s all your faaullt!!¡±


    ¡°!?¡±


    ¡°Hey! Seize that man! It¡¯s his fault that the business has been failing!¡±


    ¡°Aye!¡±


    The man began to shout towards the back of the store.


    Sebastian didn¡¯t realize what was happening until the man reached this point.


    In answer to him, three soldiers appeared with weapons¡­ Were they going to capture or threaten us¡­? Maybe they would kill us¡­


    Well, it wouldn¡¯t matter, since Mr. Ekenhart already knew everything. They were just adding to their crimes.


    ¡­Damn it. Self-destructive criminals were the worst¡­!


    ¡°You¡¯ll pay for this!¡±


    ¡°¡­Too slow!¡±


    One of the men unsheathed a short sword and moved towards me.


    He then shouted as he raised the sword and swung it towards me. But thanks to the sense enhancing herbs, I could read his moves.


    Not only that, but I had taken the body strengthening herbs as well. And since this man was slower than even the orcs, I had nothing to fear.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m fine!¡±


    Sebastian swiftly moved back as he shouted to me.


    I answered him, and then as the man¡¯s sword missed me and mmed into the ground, I hit his hand with the t of my de.


    ¡°Gah!¡±


    Not being able to stand the pain, he let go of the sword.


    Unlike Sebastian, I knew what Mr. Wood was up to. And so I had stood up in order to be ready for what was going toe.


    Had Sebastian¡¯s reaction been any slower, he would have likely been targeted first, and maybe even injured.


    ¡­He had said that he couldn¡¯t fight, but was able to hide behind me very quickly¡­


    ¡°Shit! You bastard!¡±


    ¡°Kill them!¡±


    The man who dropped his sword moved to pick it up again, just as the other two jumped over the counter and walked towards us.


    That being said, this was a small store. They could not surround uspletely¡­ Now was our chance¡­


    ¡°Sebastian. Call Phillip and Johanna!¡±


    ¡°¡­Certainly! I¡¯ll be back immediately!¡±


    As Sebastian was behind me, he could easily get out of the store.


    Thanks to the body strengthening herbs, he was able to move in a way that was unbelievable for an old man.


    As if to protect him, I faced the men who attacked. First, the one on the right¡­ I blocked his sword, and then used my right foot to kick him towards the men on the left!


    ¡°Grr!¡±


    ¡°Shit!¡±


    ¡°Get out of my way!¡±


    ¡°What are you doing! They are getting away!¡±


    I actually had no intention of running anywhere.


    Thinking this, I held my sword in front of me as the men got back to their feet.


    ¡­It was a good thing that this store isn¡¯t big¡­ The men were being careful so that they didn¡¯t damage anything, and so their swings were simple.


    Even if they were short swords, if swung horizontally, they could hit the shelves and products nearby.


    Once I knew that all of their attacks were vertical, from above or below, it was easier to deal with them, though they outnumbered me.


    Otherwise, even with the herbs and their slower movement, I would have been in danger.


    ¡°You bastard!¡±


    ¡°Hey, move!¡±


    ¡°No, you move!¡±


    When threerge men tried to fight within a confined space, things were bound to get messy.


    They bumped into each other and even started to argue.


    Thanks to my experience with the orcs, and the right conditions, it was a rather easy fight.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, are you alright!?¡±


    ¡°Phillip! Johanna!¡±


    Two of the men practically had their cheeks pressed together as they swung at me. And just as I blocked them, I heard the voicesing from behind me.


    Phillip and Johanna had burst through the door.


    ¡­And things were settled quickly after that.


    As there was so little space, Phillip and Johanna faced the men without unsheathing their swords.


    And while the men swung desperately, their arms were easily grabbed, and they were thrown to the floor.


    One of the men was caught by Phillip, and he was thrown over his back and into the next man.


    After being bashed together, their swords were taken away and they were swiftly tied up.


    The third man took a punch to the throat from Johanna¡­ She was wearing a metal hand protector, so it must have hurt.


    He could not even scream as he fell to the ground¡­ It looked like even breathing was painful.


    ¡°¡­N-nooo!¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s too bad that the charges have doubled¡­ There is no need to justify your actions now.¡±

 Chapter 234

    Chapter 234


    Mr. Ekenhart Appeared


    After tying up all three men, Wood looked on in despair. Sebastian then entered the room and dered boldly.


    Though¡­I couldn¡¯t help but feel that this wouldn¡¯t have happened had he dealt with things more calmly¡­


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, can I ask you to go and call the duke and leave this to us?¡±


    ¡°Very we-¡±


    ¡°That won¡¯t be necessary!¡±


    I was just about to answer that I would go to Mr. Kalis¡¯s store, where Mr. Ekenhart was waiting, when the familiar voice rang, and arge man stepped into the building.


    ¡°Mr. Ekenhart!¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, the time that we agreed on has already passed, you know?¡±


    ¡°Ah, now that you mention it¡­¡±


    When we had discussed the n at Mr. Kalis¡¯s store, we agree that once two hours had passed after we left, Mr. Ekenhart would charge into this store.


    This was because there was a risk that we would be captured.


    Well, while they did attack us, thanks to the body strengthening herbs, I was able to buy some time.


    Though, I would not have been able to capture them like Phillip and Johanna.


    Still, I hadn¡¯t realized that so much time had passed already.


    Perhaps we had spent too much time looking at the herbs and medicine.


    ¡°Your Grace, allow me to introduce to you Mr. Wood. He is the one responsible for this ce.¡±


    ¡°I see. So you are Wood¡­ I suppose you have an idea of what is going to happen now?¡±


    ¡°¡­Wh-what! Who are you! I¡­I¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh? You take orders from Barsler, but do not recognize my face¡­ Well, Barsler has never been good at ying games, so it cannot be helped.¡±


    ¡°Father only thinks about profit.¡±


    ¡°What! Lady Anneliese!? Why are you here!?¡±


    After Sebastian introduced him, Mr. Ekenhart took a step forward and nodded.


    Apparently, Mr. Wood didn¡¯t recognize Mr. Ekenhart, but he was clearly intimidated by therge man who had suddenly appeared.


    Well, it was no surprise¡­ I would be scared as well, if such arge man suddenly appeared in front of me with his guards.


    Not only that, but Ms. ire and Ms. Anne had arrived as well.


    As she was Count Barsler¡¯s daughter, Wood knew her.


    ¡­However, Ms. Anne really did not seem to think much of her own father¡­ In spite of the fact that some of the mey with her as well.


    ¡°I haven¡¯t seen you in some time, Wood. And since you do not seem to be aware, let me tell you¡­ This is His Grace, Duke Ekenhart.¡±


    ¡°The d-duke!? Are you sure about that, Lady Anneliese!?¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course, I am. Isn¡¯t that right, Duke Ekenhart?¡±


    ¡°Mmm. I am indeed Ekenhart Liebert.¡±


    ¡°¡­I don¡¯t know why you¡¯re acting so confident, Anne¡­¡±


    Ms. ire, maybe that¡¯s not too important right now?


    Not that I disagreed entirely, when I saw Ms. Anne talk proudly while standing next to Mr. Ekenhart¡­


    ¡°¡­B-but¡­¡±


    Now that he finally understood what was happening, Wood¡¯s shoulders slumped.


    If the duke himself was here, there was no hope for him now.


    There were no more excuses to make.


    ¡°Wood, was it? I know all about what you¡¯ve been up to. How you bought all the stock of medicine in Ractos and resold weaker versions for profit. You tried to use the fact that people were suffering¡­ Shameful acts for a merchant. ¡­Do you know what will happen next?¡±


    ¡°¡­Bu-but¡­Count Barsler will surely¡­¡±


    Even if he couldn¡¯t talk his way out of this one, he still thought that the count would protect him.


    ¡°Unfortunately, Count Barsler is being monitored by the royal family now. I suppose he has been a little too busytely¡­¡±


    ¡°My father has all but lost his power as a noble.¡±


    ¡°Bu-but¡­¡±


    Wood fell to his knees.


    Then he fell forward and put his hands on the ground.


    Still¡­ Ms. Anne talked about her father as if he was a stranger.


    They really must not like each other.


    ¡°You can expect a harsh punishment. ¡­Take him away!¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart called his personal guards.


    There were three, and two of them made Wood and the tied up men get to their feet.


    Phillip also helped them.


    ¡°Mr. Ekenhart, it seems like there are others in the back¡­?¡±


    ¡°I doubt they are customers. So they must be rted to this store. Take them away as well.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    One of the guards who had been searching the back of the store consulted with Mr. Ekenhart.


    And he was told to bring everyone rted to the store with them.


    After some time, about ten of Ractos¡¯s guards arrived. Perhaps Phillip or the other guards had sent word. And together, they rounded up the people and escorted them out of the store.


    ¡°Fine work, Mr. Takumi and Sebastian.¡±


    Once the store had been emptied out, it was just me, Sebastian and Ms. Johanna left.


    And there was Mr. Ekenhart, one guard, Ms. ire and Ms. Anne.


    Mr. Ekenhart, Ms. ire, Ms. Anne and I were sitting at the table.


    For some reason, we had decided to stay here and talk.


    Well, I suppose it was too much trouble to move?


    Apparently, Leo was waiting outside.


    ¡°I really didn¡¯t do much. It was Sebastian that talked and moved things along.¡±


    ¡°I could not forgive them for hurting the people. I only did what was my duty as your servant.¡±


    ¡°You are both too modest. But that is fine. Mr. Takumi, I am sorry about this incident.¡±


    ¡°Huh? Why are you apologizing?¡±


    ¡°Well¡­ Sebastian, you tell him.¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well.¡±


    I didn¡¯t understand why Mr. Ekenhart was suddenly apologizing.


    He hadn¡¯t done anything that disturbed me, as far as I remember?


    But Mr. Ekenhart looked apologetic as he urged Sebastian to exin.


    On the other hand, Ms. ire looked rather angry. I wonder why¡­?

 Chapter 235

    Chapter 235


    Getting Carried Away Was Part Of the n


    ¡°Well then, on His Grace¡¯s behalf¡­ The truth is, Mr. Takumi. I knew that the man would be enraged and attack us.¡±


    ¡°¡­What?¡±


    For a second, I didn¡¯t quite understand what Sebastian meant.


    He knew that Wood would be violent¡­


    I had just assumed that Sebastian was too absorbed that he didn¡¯t realize that he was going too far.


    ¡°When you headed to Range vige, I told you that I would be investigating in this town, did I not?¡±


    ¡°Yes. And we came here¡­¡±


    ¡°From that day, I started to look into Mr. Wood and those rted to him. Obviously, I couldn¡¯t investigate everything, but there were several reports about Wood¡¯s personality. About his short temper¡­in particr.¡±


    ¡°Ah.¡±


    When heading to Range vige, I had stopped at this vige with Sebastian and Leo.


    And he had indeed told me that he was going to look into this store¡­ Apparently, he had gotten quite a grasp on Wood¡¯s personality in doing so.


    ¡°Did you not think it strange? That I was saying much more than I needed to him¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­I did think you were going a little far¡­¡±


    But I had just assumed that Sebastian was enjoying it so much that he could not stop himself.


    Considering how capable Sebastian was, he could have gotten the job done quickly, and had Phillip and the guards arrest him without causing such a scene.


    That would have been more typical of Sebastian¡­


    ¡°But I wanted him to be angry and attack us.¡±


    ¡°Why? Surely you could have arrested him regardless?¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was standing by, and Barsler was confined to his home. Wood could have been taken on the spot.


    ¡°You wish to know why I had him attack us¡­¡±


    ¡°I will tell you that.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart suddenly interrupted Sebastian.


    Ah, Sebastian looked quite disappointed¡­ He loved to exin things.


    ¡°Due to Sebastian¡¯s information gathering, we were able to learn about Wood and those around him. And that included those soldier-like men that were here.¡±


    ¡°Is that so?¡±


    ¡°Aye. They would pretend to be soldiers and sometimes threaten the customers¡­though, they were mostly here for security¡­ In any case, they were really just thugs from this town, or Barsler¡¯snds.¡±


    ¡°Thugs¡­¡±


    Indeed, the way they talked and handled their swords had been very unrefined.


    But in appearance, they looked simr to Phillip and Johanna, and wore metal armor. So I had assumed that they must be Count Barsler¡¯s soldiers.


    That at least exined why I had been able to deal with them so easily.


    It also helped that I had taken performance enhancing herbs, and that we were fighting in a narrow space where they didn¡¯t want to damage anything.


    ¡°And so we knew that these thugs would not be able to fight with any skill. They just looked intimidating, that¡¯s all. And so I told Sebastian to make them attack.¡±


    ¡°¡­But why?¡±


    It did not seem necessary for our purpose.


    Without the fight, things would have been cleaned up so much sooner and simpler.


    ¡°¡­I¡¯m sorry, Mr. Takumi. I wanted to test you. To be precise, I saw it as part of your training¡­ After seeing how far you havee in your training yesterday, I was sure that you would not lose.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ Is that why the training was so hard yesterday¡­?¡±


    ¡°Of course. So I could determine if you would be fine here.¡±


    So he wanted me to fight the unskilled thugs so that I could gain some experience¡­ It was just part of my training then?


    ¡°You fought monsters¡­orcs in order to save Range vige, yes?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°And that was the result of my training and Sebastian¡¯s teaching. However, humans and monsters are different.¡±


    ¡°Different¡­¡±


    ¡°In general, monsters do not think much. They just attack. Though, there are exceptions. However, humans think and then act. And they often attack inrge groups. And so I wanted you to have experience with fighting multiple humans.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see. But it would have been nice if you told me¡­¡±


    ¡°That would have defeated the purpose. Humans always look for an opening so they can attack you when your guard is down. Sometimes monsters do that too¡­ But I wanted to see if you could stop humans that attacked you suddenly.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see¡­¡±


    I was in the palm of Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s hand then?


    Had I known in advance, I might have be too defensive. And he wanted to see if I could react to a sudden burst of violence.


    Hmm. As humans and monsters were different, I had to gain experience¡­ I understood that, but I still wasn¡¯t satisfied.


    ¡°In the future, Mr. Takumi, if you are ever targeted by those who mean no good, you will be able to defend yourself. That is what I wanted!¡±


    ¡°But father, it is much too soon! Mr. Takumi has not been training for very long! And yet, you put him in such danger¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Well, that is true¡­ But he has shown much growth. Especially with that orc battle¡­ And I think those recovery herbs he takes must also help¡­¡±


    Ms. ire had been listening quietly with a look of displeasure up until now, but her anger towards her father suddenly exploded.


    Mr. Ekenhart was already at a disadvantage, especially after the matter with Ms. Anne the other day, but he still tried to make excuses.


    But he was right about the herbs. Every time I felt that my muscles were sore, I would take the herbs and recover immediately.


    Thanks to that, I was able to train a lot.


    And grow that much faster¡­ Well, perhaps. I didn¡¯t actually feel like I had grown that much.

 Chapter 236

    Chapter 236


    Ms. ire¡¯s Anger Was Directed At Mr. Ekenhart


    ¡°But still! What if there was a mistake, and Mr. Takumi was badly injured!? If fighting humans and monsters is so different, then you could have just taught him yourself! Or even Phillip or Johanna or any of the house guards! And¡­you made him do¡­this!¡±


    ¡°Yes, that is all true¡­ However, I want him to face an actual, relentless enemy¡­¡±


    ¡°But you could have allowed him to continue his training carefully and watch just a little longer! It didn¡¯t have to be now! Father! And you too, Sebastian! I only just heard about it at Mr. Kalis¡¯s store, you know? If you had any idea how worried I was¡­!¡±


    As Ms. ire raged on, Mr. Ekenhart seemed to shrink smaller and smaller.


    And now her anger was spreading to Sebastian as well.


    But since he was an aplice, it wasn¡¯t really a surprise.


    While I hadn¡¯t been satisfied, I did feel a little better now that Ms. ire had be angry for me.


    All I could do was gulp as I watched the duke being berated by his daughter.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°Forgive me, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°Ahahaha. It¡¯s fine now. Ms. ire said everything that I had wanted to say.¡±


    ¡°¡­I¡¯ve been so angry recently¡­¡±


    One hourter, Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian were apologizing to me again.


    If anyone saw us, they would be wondering who I was to have a duke apologize to me like this.


    ¡­I suppose even if he was the duke¡­he was still weak when it came to his daughter¡­ And since Sebastian saw her grow up, maybe he also saw her as something like a daughter as well.


    I had seen it yesterday with Ms. Anne¡­ It was true that Ms. ire seemed to be angry a lottely.


    But none of it was because of her own selfishness. That was very much like her.


    This wasn¡¯t like the time she went to the forest.


    But after shouting so much, I was a little worried about Ms. ire¡¯s throat¡­ Perhaps I should try making a herb for that?


    Something good for the throat¡­ Like quince¡­ Oh, wait. That¡¯s a fruit, and so I can¡¯t make it¡­


    ¡°Well, we should be leaving now. We cannot stay here forever.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    ¡°¡­I still have much more to say to you when we return, father.¡±


    ¡°¡­Oh, uh¡­¡±


    ¡°This was a very entertaining disy.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was sweating from his forehead as we left the store.


    The rest would be left to the guards.


    Well, I suppose Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian would give orderster, as to what will happen to this ce.


    ¡­Perhaps it would go to some other merchant. Or maybe it will be turned into a civilian residence?


    Still, Ms. Anne, this was not some kind of entertaining show. It was about punishing and arresting criminals¡­


    I suppose it was because she had this personality that Mr. Ekenhart had to take her under his wing.


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Leo. Were you waiting here quietly?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. ¡­Wuu¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Is-is Good Leo mad at me too¡­?¡±


    ¡°Of course, she is. And it¡¯s your fault for putting Mr. Takumi in danger, father!¡±


    When we stepped outside, Leo ran to me immediately.


    Apparently, just like Ms. ire, she had heard about how Wood was provoked into attacking. And she was now growling at Mr. Ekenhart.


    So she had been worried about me¡­ Thanks, Leo.


    ¡°¡­Good Leo. I am very sorry. This will not happen again¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff¡­ Wuff!¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart fearfully stood in front of Leo and bowed.


    Really? Oh, well. I shall forgive you! Leo seemed to say with a nod.


    Leo was acting a little self-important, but given that Mr. Ekenhart was in the wrong, I didn¡¯t say anything.


    While Mr. Ekenhart had be much more used to Leo recently, he was still notpletely over this fear of Silver Fenrirs, and he was shaking quite a lot.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry to make you worry, Leo. But thank you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Hey, stop that! You can do it when we return to the mansion!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff¡­ Hah-hah¡­.¡±


    I thanked Leo and patted her on the head. Then she wagged her tail joyfully and started to lick my face.


    I told her to wait until we returned, and pulled away from Leo. But Leo continued to pant excitedly.


    Or was it just that it was very hot?


    She had made that face often in our previous world. But I had never seen it here.


    ¡­Were Silver Fenrirs like dogs? Did they use their tongues to adjust their body temperature?


    ¡°She really does like him¡­¡±


    ¡°Leo and Mr. Takumi had such a delightful rtionship¡­ It almost makes one jealous.¡±


    ¡°Ms. ire?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s nothing. Now, let us hurry home. I¡¯m sure that Tilura is getting quite impatient.¡±


    ¡°Haha. That¡¯s right.¡±


    Ms. ire said something rather curious when talking to Ms. Anne, but when I asked about it, she brushed it aside¡­


    In any case, Tilura was indeed likely to be waiting for use with excitement. I chuckled at the thought as we headed home.


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right. Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    On the way back, Mr. Ekenhart suddenly called to me as if remembering something.


    I turned to him a little cautiously. And Leo looked at him as well. He flinched but continued.


    ¡°¡­! Uh, it¡¯s about the wine¡­ How did he react?¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ Yes¡­ He was quite flustered and sweated an awful lot.¡±


    ¡°I see, I see. Hahaha! While they were the ones responsible for it, they would never have thought they would be drinking it themselves!¡±

 Chapter 237

    Chapter 237


    There Wine Had Been Tampered With


    Mr. Ekenhartughed happily, as if he was imagining the scene with Wood.


    While he was not the person who attacked Range vige, or the one who used the wine to spread the disease, he still knew about it. He had followed Barsler¡¯s orders for his own profit.


    And so the idea of him panicking was a very pleasing picture for Mr. Ekenhart.


    ¡°But Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes?¡±


    As I watched Mr. Ekenhartugh, Ms. ire suddenly called me with a worried expression.


    ¡°ording to the n, you were to drink the wine as well. Was everything fine?¡±


    ¡°Ah, there is no need to worry about that.¡±


    Ms. ire was concerned that I had identally drunk the infected wine.


    ¡°The wine that Sebastian and I drank was the one that had been boiled already, so we should be fine.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ That is good.¡±


    Ms. ire looked relieved.


    It seemed like she was worried that we might have identally drunk the wine that was supposed to be given to Wood.


    But even if that did happen, I could just make some Ramogi and drink it. Still, it showed how kind she was.


    ¡°However, I am quite surprised. That you would think of doing that right before¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha. Well, it would look more natural, wouldn¡¯t it? We had to drink if we wanted him to as well¡­¡±


    It had no taste of alcohol, and was just a sweet and delicious drink. I had drained the cup.


    Of course, the stuff we gavet to Wood was the wine from Range vige that hadn¡¯t been processed yet.


    That¡¯s why Sebastian had taken out two bottles. He checked which is which when pouring them into the sses.


    ¡°Are you used to doing such things, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°No, not at all. But I did experience something simr, I suppose. When you want someone to do something, you will be more convincing if you try it yourself.¡±


    In sales, when introducing a product, it¡¯s easier if you tell them of the merits you experienced yourself.


    ¡­Of course, there were people who didn¡¯t need to do such things to get contracts.


    ¡°Wood only drank a few drops of it¡­ But his reaction was enough. He didn¡¯t even want to drink the wine at first, in spite of being a known drinker¡­ Anyone would think it was odd.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. I don¡¯t really care about such things¡­ But most nobles would be offended if a gift of theirs was rejected.¡±


    I didn¡¯t know much about the rules and manners of nobles, but it was like that whenever I went drinking with mypany.


    If my boss or clients told me to drink, it was difficult to refuse, even if I didn¡¯t want to drink it.


    There were probably plenty of people who wouldn¡¯t even be offended¡­but it was hard to tell. And the pressure always weighed down during such moments.


    ¡°What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Nothing¡­I was just reminded of something¡­ But it¡¯s not important.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    I had been scowling, as the bitter memories of running to the bathroom, only toe back and see my cup full again¡­returned.


    Ms. ire looked worried, but I smiled and assured her that I was fine.


    ¡­Such things would not happen now¡­ I was living here happily, and need not think about the past like this.


    ¡°So, what will happen to Wood now? Since he drank the wine?¡±


    ¡°As it wasn¡¯t much, he probably will not be ill. And even if he does¡­¡±


    ¡°He deserves it.¡±


    ¡°Yes. ¡­And we can always give him Ramogi.¡±


    Wood really had just licked it.


    It was hard to imagine that he could get sick from just that, but even if he did, he could be healed easily.


    The only thing to worry about is that he could infect the nearby guards¡­ If that happened, Sebastian and I would have to apologize to them and give them some Ramogi.


    We talked about such things and headed to the west gate.


    ¡°Your Grace, thank you for everything.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. Well, I doubt it was something that you could have handled.¡±


    Once we had returned to the town¡¯s entrance, we saw that the guards were standing in a line to greet Mr. Ekenhart.


    A representative then stepped forward and bowed to him.


    It was because the duke and their lord hade out all of this way to deal with the problem.


    ¡°Now¡­to the carriage¡­¡±


    ¡°Father, over here.¡±


    ¡°¡­Oh?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    As Mr. Ekenhart was about to get into the carriage, Ms. ire pulled him away and pointed to Leo.


    Upon seeing this, Leo began to bark enthusiastically.


    ¡­Was this supposed to be like a punishment for Mr. Ekenhart?


    ¡°No¡­surely Mr. Takumi will ride her? And so I must¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi will ride with us in the carriage. You will ride on Leo. Won¡¯t you?¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well.¡±


    He was weak when it came to his daughter.


    Ms. ire¡¯s anger had not subsided yet, and so she escorted Mr. Ekenhart over to Leo.


    ¡°Good Leo. Will you be so kind?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Leo nodded reassuringly.


    She was looking forward to this¡­


    ¡°¡­Leo. Hold back a little, okay?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I was too scared to ask Ms. ire, and so I told Leo to go easy on him. But her answer was not very promising.


    Perhaps it was because Leo was still angry at Mr. Ekenhart as well¡­


    I was happy that she was angry that he put me in danger in the name of training¡­but now I was starting to feel bad for him.


    ¡­Yes, when we returned to the mansion, I would ask Ms. Helena to give him some of that delicious grape juice.

 Chapter 238

    Chapter 238


    Ms. Anne Made An Unexpected Request


    As my sympathy towards Mr. Ekenhart grew, and the idea of giving him some juice entered my head¡­I remembered something else.


    Now that I thought about it, boiling wine wouldn¡¯t turn it into juice. That was strange.


    I didn¡¯t know much about it, and just called it that because it was easier¡­ I suppose it was because it was already a very sweet wine, so it tasted simr to juice.


    Perhaps the grapes in this world were special, or Ms. Helena had added something to make it easier to drink after boiling it.


    In any case, I would just assume that there was something different about Range vige wine. Yes¡­


    After all, there was Ramogi and Loe. Things that looked familiar but worked in very different ways.


    ¡°Ahhhhhh!¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Good Leo seems very excited.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    As I thought about such things on the way back to the mansion¡­Leo ran wildly down the road. Mr. Ekenhart looked like he could barely stay on.


    She would run ahead of the carriage and then rush back repeatedly.


    Mr. Ekenhart was holding on desperately and letting out something like a scream.


    Ms. ire was watching all of this from the carriage window, and smiled pleasantly at Leo.


    Even the screams of a dear father could not shake her¡­ That was a little sad.


    ¡­But it was another reminder that I must not get on her bad side.


    She was scary, though in a different way from Sebastian.


    ¡°Still, that Silver Fenrir really does like to obey orders, doesn¡¯t it?¡±


    ¡°Good Leo is very gentle.¡±


    From within the carriage, Ms. Anne was looking at Leo with great curiosity as she muttered.


    ¡­Well, Leo was a very smart little Maltese¡­ She had always been smart and listened to what I said.


    ¡°And he is the human that the Silver Fenrir obeys.¡±


    ¡°Yes. And you know all about it, don¡¯t you Anne? How my family is especially attached to Silver Fenrirs.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I know about that. They even appear in the history books. All nobles in this country know about them. ¡­You are Mr. Takumi, aren¡¯t you?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Ms. Anne was talking about Silver Fenrirs. She now stopped looking out of the window and turned to me.


    Now that I thought about it, this was probably the first time we talked directly¡­ Yesterday, Ms. ire had been so furious, that she set Leo on Ms. Anne right away. So there was no time to talk.


    Besides, it seemed like Ms. Anne just thought I was a servant.


    Well, I wasn¡¯t a nobleman. So I was still no one of any consequence to a count¡¯s heir. I would have all the significance of a pebble on the side of the road¡­ Or maybe that was going too far?


    ¡°So, you are that Silver Fenrir¡¯s master?¡±


    ¡°¡­Master¡­we are more like partners. I don¡¯t think of myself as her superior. I think we are equal.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Equal with a Silver Fenrir¡­ Interesting¡­¡±


    ¡°Anne?¡±


    After hearing my answer, Ms. Anne looked down as if she was deep in thought.


    She started to mutter something, but the effect of the herbs had already worn off, and so I couldn¡¯t hear her.


    By the way, the carriage was very spacious, and so even with the three of us inside, no one touched anyone else, and it was veryfortable.


    There were two seats, and Ms. ire sat with Ms. Anne, while I sat on the opposite side.


    On both sides, there were doors between the seats, which you could go out from, and there were four small windows as well.


    This provided a good view of the outside. You could even open the windows to let in some fresh air.


    ¡°Yes¡­ With a Silver Fenrir tagging along, it may be a good idea. As for the face¡­ Well, a passing grade at best?¡±


    ¡°¡­What is it, Anne? Are you thinking of something strange again¡­¡±


    Ms. Anne continued to look down and mutter quietly under her breath.


    Upon seeing this, Ms. ire questioned her suspiciously, but got no reaction.


    It had been Ms. Anne who came up with the whole n used by her father¡­ And so I had a bad feeling about this.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Are you¡­ I suppose you are not already married, are you?¡±


    ¡°Huh? Oh, no¡­¡±


    ¡°What are you asking, Anne?¡±


    Ms. Anne suddenly wanted to know my marital status.


    I had never even been close to getting married¡­ In fact, I often wasn¡¯t sure how to act around women¡­


    But I had Leo, which saved me from feeling lonely¡­ It¡¯s true!


    Now that I thought about it, Leo had told me to stop beating around the bush¡­


    ¡°Then you simply must be adopted into the family as my husband. And then we could really make something out of House Barsler!¡±


    ¡°What?¡±


    ¡°Aaaaanne!? What are you saying!?¡±


    ¡°And why should you be so startled, Ms. ire? Surely it¡¯s only normal for a woman to want to find a good husband?¡±


    Anne had suddenly made a proposal of marriage.


    And this was only the first time I had ever spoken to her. What had happened?


    But as it was my first proposal, I was also inexperienced with rejecting them.


    Ms. ire was clearly outraged and confused as well.


    ¡°He has some worth, because of that Silver Fenrir hemands. And I¡¯m sure that will be very beneficial for my family!¡±


    ¡°You-you think¡­Mr. Takumi¡­marrying into Barsler¡­the thought¡­¡±


    ¡°No, I wouldn¡¯t¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, it is a little surprising¡­ But you wouldn¡¯t even think about refusing, would you? After all, it¡¯s not every day that Count Barsler¡¯s heir makes such offers.¡±


    ¡°Uhh¡­¡±


    This Ms. Anne was very straightforward¡­


    Indeed, she was was pretty and supposedly not the most stupid.


    But whenpared to Ms. ire¡­ who may have her defects, when ites to the bust, but¡­even with that considered, she was overflowing with appeal¡­


    Even I would not have thought like that.


    Yes, pretty was pretty¡­ But there was also an unfortunate air about her¡­ And did it matter if she was so beautiful that if she were to walk through the town, that other men would turn to look at her?


    But this was the first time we spoke¡­ Such things should not be decided so suddenly¡­


    ¡­Oh, the confusion was clearly getting to me.

 Chapter 239

    Chapter 239


    We Returned To The Mansion In The Carriage


    ¡°¡­Do I have to decide now?¡±


    ¡°Hmm, indeed¡­ I do understand that this is rather sudden for you. Very well, tomorrow. As long as you can give me an answer by tomorrow.¡±


    ¡°Tomorrow!? You are surely in a great rush, Anne!¡±


    ¡°What do you mean, Ms. ire? These matters are more about feeling and one should rely on their intuition. But perhaps you have experienced one too many proposals and attempts at arranged marriage, that it has dimmed your senses?¡±


    ¡°You only saw the advantage in it once you learned of the Silver Fenrir¡¯s attachment. I don¡¯t think you have any right to talk about feelings!¡±


    ¡°And why is that? A man who orders a Silver Fenrir¡­ Such a man would be incredibly appealing to someone in my position¡­ Can you really not see it?¡±


    ¡°Well¡­ That is true, but¡­ Mr. Takumi wouldn¡¯t do¡­¡±


    ¡°Go-Good Leo! Arrghhh!¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    Ms. ire was in a terribly bad mood again.


    Well, I suppose my appeal really did start and end there¡­ Though, I also had Weed Cultivation¡­ But I suppose that didn¡¯t really add to my appeal as a man.


    And so I confusedly watched Ms. ire and Anne argue as I thought of the right way to refuse her.


    ¡­Was this how Ms. ire felt every time her father tried to matchmake her?


    Regardless, the carriage continued to move along. Outside, I could asionally hear Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s screams.


    ¡°Wee back!¡±


    ¡°¡­Hmm.¡±


    ¡°Finally¡­ Hah¡­ The journey was very tiring.¡±


    ¡°What a good wee. I suppose that¡¯s what should be expected from a duke¡¯s house.¡±


    It did not take long to return to the mansion.


    We got out of the carriage, and with Mr. Ekenhart in the lead, we faced the servants who came out to greet us.


    Mr. Ekenhart looked very exhausted after being carried around by Leo¡­ But he had held up.


    As for Ms. ire, she had been arguing with Ms. Anne the whole time, and was tired as well.


    Surely Ms. Anne must be the same, I thought as I turned to look at her. But she seemed rather cheerful as the servants greeted her.


    ¡­Perhaps she was tougher than she looked.


    ¡°Your Grace, will you have dinner immediately?¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed. I am quite tired¡­ I shall eat and rest right after.¡±


    ¡°Certainly. It will be prepared right away.¡±


    Ms. Helena stepped forward and addressed Mr. Ekenhart.


    Of course, the reason that he was so tired, was because of Ms. ire and Leo.


    As for Leo, running around seemed to have relieved her of stress, and she looked quite pleased as she wagged her tail.


    ¡°Wee back, father, sister, Mr. Takumi and Leo!¡±


    ¡°Kyau-kyau! Kyau!¡±


    ¡°We¡¯re back, Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff-wuff!¡±


    Tilura had realized that we had returned, and she came running out to greet us with a big smile, and with Sherry in her arms.


    Considering the direction she hade from, I suppose she had been training in the back garden? She sure was passionate.


    She greeted everyone except for Ms. Anne, who she did not know very well.


    Ms. Anne looked a little annoyed at being ignored¡­


    ¡°¡­You all seem a little tired.¡±


    ¡°Kyau-kyau.¡±


    ¡°Haha. You can tell, Tilura?¡±


    ¡°Yes, children can be very perceptive.¡±


    After looking at us, Tilura could tell immediately that we were tired.


    But then again, it was incredibly obvious with Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire.


    Though, I had also gone through a lot today. So perhaps it was showing on my face as well.


    I had fought at that store. And then there was that whole ordeal with Ms. Anne on the way home.


    ¡­So it was the same reason as Ms. ire.


    ¡°Hah¡­ I can rx now¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    After we returned, we enjoyed the meal that Ms. Helena prepared for us, and told Tilura about what had happened in town.


    And since everyone was tired, we retired to our rooms right after.


    Considering the state they were in, I was a little worried about Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire¡­


    As I was tired as well, I warmed my body in the bathtub, and then went to my room to pet Leo and rx.


    ¡°Still¡­do you think Ms. Anne is serious?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Leo tilted her head to the side.


    now that I thought about it, Leo was outside giving Mr. Ekenhart the ride of his life, so she didn¡¯t know about what had happened.


    ¡°Uh¡­Leo. This may surprise you, but¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff-wuff¡­ Wuff?¡±


    I exined the situation to Leo, and she raised her voice in rm.


    So even Leo was surprised after all¡­


    ¡°Wuff-wuff¡­ Wuff!¡±


    This is a fine opportunity? Get it over with?


    ¡°No, Leo. I don¡¯t even know her¡­ I¡¯m trying to think of a way to refuse her.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Hate¡­ I don¡¯t know her well enough to say. But it¡¯s all so sudden, so I asked for some time to think. Though, it¡¯s only until tomorrow.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    I talked with Leo as I thought of the best way to refuse her.


    I didn¡¯t know her enough to feel a strong dislike, but that didn¡¯t seem like a convincing argument.


    I petted Leo¡¯s fluffy fur and thought hard about it for a while¡­ But I had no good ideas!


    I suppose I should just tell her that I had no intention of getting married. But if she asked the reason¡­


    ¡°Hmm? Yes, who is it?¡±


    ¡°It is I, ire. Mr. Takumi, can you spare a moment?¡±


    ¡°Ah, yes. Of course.¡±


    As I wondered what to do, I heard a knock at the door.


    And when I called to it, Ms. ire answered.


    What could she want at this hour¡­ Most people were asleep at this time.

 Chapter 240

    Chapter 240


    Ms. ire Visited My Room


    ¡°¡­Excuse me.¡±


    ¡°Come in.¡±


    Ms. ire slowly opened the door and entered.


    She seemed to be a little nervous?


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. I¡¯m sorry to disturb you at this hour¡­¡±


    ¡°No, it¡¯s fine. I don¡¯t have anything I need to be doing.¡±


    ¡°Hehehe. I see that Leo is rxing.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Ms. ire apologized for thete visit, but smiled when she saw Leo.


    What was this¡­? While I talked to her all of the time, I was starting to feel nervous.


    I suppose it was because it was night time, and it was just the two of us here¡­aside from Leo.


    ¡°May I sit next to you?¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course.¡±


    I scooted to the side on the bed, and then Ms. ire sat down next to me.


    Leo¡¯s head was right between us, and so we both petted her.


    ¡­Had she juste out of the bath? I thought I could smell the scent of soap in the air¡­


    ¡°Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Ye-yes!¡±


    ¡°Hehe. You really don¡¯t have to be so nervous, you know? This is your room, after all.¡±


    ¡°Yes, well. Indeed¡­¡±


    I took in a deep breath and tried to settle my nerves.


    But then I smelled that scent again¡­and my nerves started to act up. I had to stop thinking about that.


    Ms. ire had looked nervous when she first entered, but perhaps it was due to seeing that I was nervous as well, or because she saw Leo, but she seemed fine now.


    ¡°So, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, what is it?¡±


    She turned to look straight at me.


    I didn¡¯t know why she was here, but perhaps¡­ Her beautiful face seemed toe closer to me and¡­


    ¡°I am really sorry about what my father did today!¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    In spite of the thoughts that drifted through my mind, Ms. ire suddenly lowered her head and apologized.


    Ah, that¡¯s right. That again¡­


    So she had juste here to talk about her father and Sebastian, and how they wanted me to fight as part of my training¡­


    Well, I should have expected that.


    ¡°Uh, well, no harm was done, and I have forgotten it already. Besides, there is no reason for you to apologize, is there?¡±


    ¡°Still, even if it doesn¡¯t bother you, it bothers me. He is my father, after all¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm, I see. Very well, I ept your apology.¡±


    ¡°¡­Thank you.¡±


    I suppose as nobles, she took such things very seriously. That was very much like Ms. ire.


    Even if she hadn¡¯t done anything, she wanted to apologize on his behalf.


    And so I looked at her straight on and nodded.


    Besides, Ms. ire had been very angry with both of them, and that pretty much drained me of any anger as well.


    ¡°Thank you, for scolding them for me.¡±


    ¡°No, I¡­ Well, they were very clearly in the wrong¡­¡±


    ¡°Still, I was happy. I don¡¯t think anyone has been angry on my behalf before.¡±


    ¡°¡­Is that so?¡±


    I had been scolded a lot at work. And there were times when things were so unfair that I wanted to be angry.


    But there was no one around who would defend me. Because they only cared about saving their own skin.


    Now that Leo was much bigger, I was sure that she would get angry for me¡­ But then again, that could lead to quite a disaster.


    Upon hearing my words, Ms. ire looked a little embarrassed.


    ¡°Besides, you saved me the trouble of having to give Mr. Ekenhart a piece of my mind, which would have been very improper, given his position.¡±


    ¡°His position¡­? Oh, but you are a favorite of his, and like a friend. I do not think his position is of much consequence?¡±


    ¡°Still. He is a duke and lord of this house. I could never do what you did. Especially in town, where other people might be watching¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed¡­ I suppose you are right.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was a duke, and I had no position in society. I was just amoner who was their guest.


    I would have looked like a great fool if I got angry. Well, we would have both looked like fools.


    Besides, there were guards around, and there were people watching from outside.


    With this whole business with the count, we did not need rumors spreading about the duke as well.


    ¡°So you were right to do it, because no one else could.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I wasn¡¯t really thinking straight, but¡­ I am d that you feel that way. ¡­Though I am a little embarrassed.¡±


    I suppose for Ms. ire, being so angry like that in public was embarrassing.


    A nobledy would not be seen doing that very often.


    Not that it made her any less of ady in my eyes.


    ¡°Haha. Well, it did remind me to never get on your bad side, Ms. ire.¡±


    ¡°Oh, Mr. Takumi¡­ As if I would ever have reason to be angry with you?¡±


    I don¡¯t know about that¡­?


    It was true that Ms. ire had never been angry with me, but you never knew what the future would hold¡­


    In any case, it was best to be careful.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Oh, Leo. Thank you as well. You were mad at Mr. Ekenhart, right?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Good Leo really likes you, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I was angry too! Leo seemed to say as she rubbed her face against me.


    Ms. ire looked impressed as she petted Leo.


    Leo nodded in agreement¡­ I felt a little bashful.

 Chapter 241

    Chapter 241


    I Asked Her About Refusing The Offer


    ¡°Also, Mr. Takumi. There is one other thing I want to ask you¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, what is it?¡±


    As we both petted Leo and rxed, Ms. ire said that there was something else.


    She looked rather serious¡­ Perhaps this was the real reason she hade here?


    ¡°Anne¡­ Anneliese¡¯s proposal. What will you do?¡±


    ¡°Ah, that¡­¡±


    ¡°I suppose it would be strange for me to hear the answer first. But¡­I cannot help but think about it¡­¡±


    Ms. ire was very curious to know about my response.


    Indeed, it would change things greatly, so I understood why she cared.


    If I decided to marry into her family, then I would not be able to stay in this house and would have to move to Count Barsler¡¯snds.


    ¡­And then, what would happen to the contract that I made with the duke to sell the herbs¡­?


    Well, there was no point in thinking about that, as I already knew what I was going to do.


    ¡°There¡¯s nothing to worry about. I will reject it, obviously. It is really just a matter of how to tell her. That is what I¡¯ve been thinking about.¡±


    ¡°Is that so? ¡­Reject¡­ I see. What a relief.¡±


    Ms. ire stood with surprise when she heard me.


    I couldn¡¯t hear thest few words, but she seemed pleased.


    Well, I¡¯m sure she was also concerned about our contract.


    ¡°Yes. I just want to be able to do it in a way that will not offend her¡­ You see, I¡¯ve never experienced something like this before¡­ Was it like this for you, when you had to turn down your many suitors?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. ¡­Well, it was not all that difficult. After all, I am the daughter of a duke. And some of them were evenmoners¡­ But either way, they could not be too forceful.¡±


    ¡°I see. I suppose it only getsplicated when you are amoner who is rejecting a noble¡­¡±


    As Ms. ire adjusted her position on the bed, I asked her about the suitors that Mr. Ekenhart had brought to her.


    Even among nobles, the duke was of the highest rank.


    The only people above him were the royal family.


    Considering this, Ms. ire always had the upper hand.


    So it was no wonder that she found it easy to reject them.


    ¡°¡­Of course, since there were so many, I sometimes had my doubts. After all, it would be quite rude to deal with all of them in the exact same way¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    Yes, it must have been difficult to deal with so many of them.


    Even if she had the superior position, one would get tired of thinking of new ways to reject the suitors that arrived with every new day.


    ¡°So, if amoner receives a proposal from a noble¡­ What should they do?¡±


    ¡°¡­Well, when that happens, people almost never refuse. After all, it is very rare for amoner to marry into a noble family. Most people would never get such a chance.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ That¡¯s why Ms. Anne was so confident¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, yes. That is part of it. But I think you¡¯ll find that she is just confident in general¡­¡±


    So she was always like that¡­ I suppose I wasn¡¯t used to such people, since I was always around Ms. ire.


    Well¡­ She had stubbornly gone off to the forest alone. Though, that was against the wishes of Sebastian and the servants¡­ She even apologized about it after. There was no point in thinking about that now.


    In any case,moners usually don¡¯t turn down such offers¡­


    It was true that it was a rare opportunity to be a noble, and so I could understand why most would ept.


    Besides, there was the promise offort and luxury¡­ That would be appealing to most people.


    Still¡­if rejecting them was so rare, then it put me in even more of an awkward position¡­


    Not that it would make me change my mind or anything.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ How to tell her¡­¡±


    ¡°It can be difficult¡­ I know how it is.¡±


    And so the two of us sat there and pondered on it.


    During such times, it was nice to have Leo here. We both touched her soft fur, which was veryforting.


    ¡°I think I have an idea, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°You do?¡±


    ¡°Yes. You are currently contracted by my family to sell herbs. In other words, your ties to the duke are quite strong.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. ¡­And I¡¯ve been living here for some time now.¡±


    Ms. ire had thought of something.


    It was true that my ties to this house were strong now.


    And it wasn¡¯t even just Ms. ire, Tilura and Mr. Ekenhart. I had even be close with the servants that worked here.


    ¡°If you marry into her house, you will no longer be able to do business with us as before. After all, it would mean doing business with their house, not you as an individual.¡±


    ¡°¡­Is that right?¡±


    ¡°Yes. While noble houses may do business together, it is almost unheard of for individual nobles to make contracts.¡±


    Indeed. Nobles would enter different businesses as a way of improving their lifestyle, when taxes were not enough.


    And if they seed, they can lower taxes, so doing so was highly rmended¡­


    Well, everything would be fine if you didn¡¯t break thew like the count, or fail in other ways.


    And if your business did fail, you have to then raise taxes to make up for it.


    While business might expand to other territories, it was generally kept on your ownnds.


    And while it happened sometimes, contracts between individual nobles were rare, apparently.


    If you went through another noble, that noble would also be making a profit¡­which meant more expenses, perhaps.


    And so maybe it was best to do business with residents of othernds directly.


    Even in Japan there were ways to sell directly to customers, which meant less expenses and cheaper prices.


    ¡­But there were also disadvantages to that as well.

 Chapter 243

    Chapter 243


    Sebastian Exined How It Happened


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, Mr. Takumi. I suppose that is all we will be able to discuss today. But I did enjoy it.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ Yes, I enjoyed it too.¡±


    Ms. ire said without turning to look at me. She kept her face directed at Mr. Ekenhart and the others.


    As her ears were red, she must be quite embarrassed to have been spied on.


    ¡­Or¡­she was just really mad.


    ¡°Father! As the master of this house¡­!¡±


    ¡°Wa-wait, ire! Yes, I was wrong! I apologize! Ahhh!¡±


    ¡°Your Grace¡­ Be safe¡­¡±


    ¡°ire, you¡¯re scary¡­¡±


    She shouted at Mr. Ekenhart and grabbed him by the cor.


    Even though he was very tall, her slender arm pulled him down. I was so stunned that I couldn¡¯t speak.


    Was Ms. ire a lot stronger than she looked?


    Sebastian just closed his eyes, and Tilura looked scared.


    ¡°Haa¡­¡±


    I had felt nervous ever since Ms. ire entered the room. And now I was exasperated at the situation. And so I let out a heavy sigh.


    ¡°Are you tired, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Tilura¡­ No, that¡¯s not it.¡±


    Ms. ire had gone off somewhere with her father, and now Tilura was back to normal.


    She was looking into my face with a worried expression. But I wasn¡¯t sighing because I was tired.


    ¡­Well, perhaps I was tired mentally.


    ¡°Still, why did he do such a thing¡­?¡±


    ¡°It is likely because I reported to him about you and Lady Anneliese.¡±


    ¡°You did?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I told him that she offered you her hand in marriage.¡±


    ¡°¡­And how did you know about that?¡±


    Apparently, Sebastian knew about what had happened in the carriage.


    Even though it was just us three inside.


    I doubted that Ms. ire would tell him¡­ Perhaps it was Ms. Anne then?


    ¡°I was driving the carriage, remember? And you were all talking so loudly.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    It was true. The window had been open so we could watch Leo and Mr. Ekenhart. And Ms. Anne had certainly been talking very loudly. So it was not too odd that Sebastian had heard.


    I should have realized that sooner.


    ¡°After I told His Grace, he became very anxious about Lady ire.¡±


    ¡°And so he wanted to see how she was doing?¡±


    ¡°Yes. But when he went to visit her room, he saw her leaving as if in secret.¡±


    ¡°¡­And yet she didn¡¯t see him?¡±


    ¡°No¡­ He was hiding when she came out of her room¡­ Perhaps he was still thinking about what had happened at the store¡­¡±


    So he was worried that she would get angry again¡­and hid himself.


    After all, Ms. ire had said that she would continue to lecture him after they returned to the mansion.


    Though, I couldn¡¯t help but think that it would be difficult for someone of Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s size to conceal himself¡­ But Sebastian knew every inch of the mansion, and was probably able to help him.


    Still, why did they decide to spy on us¡­


    ¡°After that, we saw Lady ire go to your room while looking very anxious. I suppose His Grace was hoping something would happen.¡±


    ¡°Hahh¡­ Hoping¡­ Why would anything happen?¡±


    But then again, Sebastian had seen and heard it all, so I would not sound very persuasive.


    In fact, Sebastian was grinning right now¡­ It was a very viinous face.


    ¡°Well, I will not question you about what was said or done. ¡­That is more interesting, anyway.¡±


    ¡°¡­Are you thinking out loud?¡±


    ¡°Oh, excuse me. ¡­While we watched Lady ire, we bumped into Lady Tilura¡­¡±


    ¡°Father said we could see something amusing, and so I went!¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    Even though he had muttered something by ident, Sebastian was as calm as ever.


    And apparently, they had met Tilura before reaching my door.


    Perhaps she wasn¡¯t able to sleep and was looking for someone to y with. Or she needed to go to the bathroom¡­


    But to bring his own child along¡­ Mr. Ekenhart¡­


    ¡°It was a good thing that the door was still open. Lady ire must have been so nervous that she forgot to close it.¡±


    Well, it wasn¡¯t a good thing for me or Ms. ire.


    If they had tried to open it after it was closed, then Leo might have noticed them sooner.


    In any case, Mr. Ekenhart was curious about Ms. ire, and so he had taken Sebastian and Tilura and peeked through my door¡­


    Even if he was a duke, he was a parent. So I could understand why he was curious about his daughter¡¯s actions¡­ But still¡­


    ¡°Well, I have bothered you for long enough.¡±


    ¡°Good night, Mr. Takumi and Leo!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°Good night, Tilura. ¡­Sebastian. You are just as guilty for not stopping him, you know?¡±


    ¡°Hohoho. What are you babbling about?¡±


    ¡°You can feign ignorance¡­but it will make no difference when I tell Ms. ire tomorrow. ¡±


    ¡°¡­I am very sorry.¡±


    Leo and I answered Tilura and bade her good night. I then reminded Sebastian of his role in all of this.


    He chuckled innocently at first, but bowed once I brought up Ms. ire¡¯s name.


    ¡­He really was afraid of her¡­ Well, I understood why, after seeing her with Mr. Ekenhart¡­


    Well, I suppose she could only act like that because they were family¡­

 Chapter 244

    Chapter 244


    I Turned Down Ms. Anne


    ¡°Hah¡­ It¡¯s like the moment after a storm.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Now that Sebastian and Tilura had left, and it was just me and Leo in the room, I let out a sigh.


    Leo was sighing as well¡­ Yes, who wouldn¡¯t be exasperated by that?


    ¡°Still¡­ Ms. ire¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wuff?¡±


    ¡°No, I can¡¯t do that. She is a noblewoman. I couldn¡¯t¡­¡±


    As I was thinking about how Ms. ire had been acting before the door opened, Leo suddenly called to me.


    But I didn¡¯t want to think about what she was saying¡­ It was surprising that Leo would think of such a thing in the first ce¡­ Was it because she was a Silver Fenrir?


    In any case, I had been quite nervous with Ms. ire.


    Ever since we had first met, I always found her to be attractive.


    And it was all the more evident when I was so close that I could touch her.


    Ms. ire did have a rather wild side, but was also a properdy. She never acted self-important. In fact, she seemed to dislike such people.


    And so even if I didn¡¯t know anything about manners, she taught me patiently and said I shouldn¡¯t worry about it too much.


    Even though I was probably making a lot of mistakes without knowing it¡­


    Regardless, up until a moment ago, we had been so close¡­


    ¡°¡­I don¡¯t think I¡¯ll be able to sleep if I keep thinking about it.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Alright, time for bed, Leo. It¡¯s already quitete.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    I said to Leo, and then petted her a little after she curled up next to the bed. And then I went into my own bed.


    After all, I wouldn¡¯t be able to sleep if I kept thinking about it¡­ And I had things to do tomorrow, so I had to hurry up and sleep.


    ¡­But before I fall asleep, I have to think about how I¡¯m going to tell Ms. Anne¡­ That¡¯s what I thought, but then my mind kept drifting to Ms. ire, and so I just closed my eyes.


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª


    The next day, I washed up, dressed and went down to the dining hall with Leo.


    A lot had happened yesterday, and I wasn¡¯t able to sleep as early as I would have liked. Thankfully, Leo woke me up in the morning.


    When we arrived, Tilura was rubbing her tired eyes and petting Sherry.


    As for Sherry, she was curled up on a chair next to Tilura and sleeping.


    Well, they had stayed up prettyte as well.


    ¡°Good morning, Ms. ire, Tilura, Ms. Anne.¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Go¡­ood¡­yawn¡­morning¡­¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    We greeted each other and then I sat down.


    Tilura was so sleepy that she wasn¡¯t able to talk properly.


    But Ms. Anne seemed fine. Her hair was perfectly set with vertical rolls, and she was sitting straight.


    Though, she was sitting as far away from Sherry as possible.


    ¡°¡­Is Mr. Ekenhart still sleeping?¡±


    ¡°Yes. The same as always.¡±


    I did not see him in the dining hall.


    It had been this way before. And since Ms. ire would have been scolding himte into the night, he would find it even harder to get up.


    And while Ms. ire didn¡¯t seem to be tired at a nce, I could see that she had dark rings under her eyes.


    ¡­For how long had she been angry at Mr. Ekenhart?


    ¡°Now, let¡¯s eat.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau.¡±


    The food that Ms. Helena made was served, and we all started eating.


    The smell seemed to help wake up Tilura and Sherry.


    Especially Sherry. The moment that the food was brought in, she raised her head and her eyes widened.


    She really was sensitive to smell.


    ¡°It is rather good.¡±


    ¡°Helena¡­our head cook, is quite brilliant.¡±


    Ms. Anne said as she ate her breakfast.


    Now that I thought about it, Ms. Helena had the day off yesterday, so this was Ms. Anne¡¯s first time experiencing her cooking.


    And as Ms. ire said, Ms. Helena¡¯s food was very delicious.


    They were proud of their cook.


    As Ms. Anne ate with pleased expression, I nced towards Ms. ire and nodded.


    Once breakfast was finished, I would have to give her my answer.


    ¡°Hah¡­ I am satisfied. Ms. ire, it must be quite a luxury to eat this every day.¡±


    ¡°I wouldn¡¯t say that. It¡¯s just that she is very good. The actual ingredients are nothing special. ¡­Unless you are saying that having such a cook is a luxury.¡±


    After breakfast, we drank some tea that was made by Ms. Lyra and Milina. And as I listened to the others talk, I thought about what to say.


    While I had decided what to do after talking with Ms. ire, I still wasn¡¯t sure how to say it.


    Well, maybe it was better to not overthink it.


    ¡°Uhh¡­¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s right, Mr. Takumi. Have youe to a decision?¡±


    Just as I was about to talk to Ms. Anne, she suddenly turned and asked the question first.


    I was a little stunned¡­but pushed myself to continue.


    ¡°¡­About that. The answer is no.¡±


    ¡°¡­What? What do you just say? It sounded like you were rejecting¡­a most generous offer that I did not have to make.¡±


    ¡°Exactly. I refuse.¡±


    Apparently, Ms. Anne found this difficult to believe. And so I made it very clear to her.


    Though, I was a little nervous, and my hands were clenched tightly under the table, and I was sweating a little.


    As for Ms. ire, she was positively delighted by this blunt rejection, and she was beaming with joy.


    ¡°¡­Surely¡­ You are not going to throw away this chance to be a noble? Do you really mean to refuse me?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Ms. Anne was still in disbelief.


    For the vast majority ofmon folk in this world, being a noble was a very appealing prospect.


    However, it was not that appealing to me.

 Chapter 245

    Chapter 245


    Ms. Anne Was In Quite A Shock


    ¡°¡­And will you tell me the reason?¡±


    ¡°Yes. First, I am currently in a contract with House Liebert, for the selling of herbs. If I were to be a noble¡­¡±


    As Ms. Anne¡¯s face was frozen with surprise, I exined to her what I had talked about with Ms. ire. That I wanted to honor the contract and had no intention of bing a noble.


    Sebastian was nodding as he stood behind Ms. ire. So I suppose I was not saying anything wrong.


    ¡°¡­But¡­ That is hardly a reason to refuse¡­ Besides¡­I have never been rejected in my life¡­¡±


    Ms. Anne¡¯s level of disbelief only rose after my exnation.


    Indeed, because she was beautiful, a marriage with her might be appealing to some.


    Especially since she was her father¡¯s heir.


    Ms. ire had talked about it yesterday as well. There were few opportunities to be a noble in this country, and so turning it down would be unthinkable.


    However, it meant nothing to me, and I was not like those other people.


    Well¡­not that stupid thoughts of ying with Ms. Anne¡¯s rolls did not enter my mind¡­


    ¡°But¡­ Surely you wouldn¡¯t¡­ But you can be a noble¡­!¡±


    ¡°Well, how unfortunate for you, Anne. But I must tell you now, any more attempts to seduce Mr. Takumi with promises of titles will only make things more embarrassing for you.¡±


    ¡°¡­This can¡¯t be happening¡­¡±


    While Ms. Anne was still stunned, Ms. ire was overjoyed.


    Was it because I had rejected Ms. Anne with such clear words?


    ¡°Hahaha! Our Mr. Takumi is not the kind of man to be swayed by such promises! I knew it all along!¡±


    Suddenly, the doors of the dining hall burst open, and Mr. Ekenhart entered whileughing boisterously.


    Apparently, he had been listening to the conversation.


    ¡­As Ms. Lyra was standing by the door but turning her head away, she had probably noticed him, and opened the door a little.


    ¡°¡­Father¡­you were eavesdropping again¡­? After everything I said¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, not at all. ¡­I was just about to enter the dining hall when I noticed that Mr. Takumi was in the middle of an important conversation¡­ And so I thought it best to not disturb him.¡±


    Ms. ire was looking at her father with narrowed eyes.


    Well, after what happenedst night¡­it could not be helped.


    Mr. Ekenhart looked a little ufortable as he made his excuses.


    ¡°Hah¡­ Well, nevermind then. It would have indeed been wrong to interrupt Mr. Takaumi¡¯s very determined and final decision.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes¡­of course!¡±


    Ms. ire sighed with resignation and her father smiled and nodded.


    ¡°However, you must not do such a thing again.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I know.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart replied as he went to sit at the table.


    Ms. Lyra ced a cup in front of him and poured some tea.


    ¡­Her movements really were smooth and practiced.


    ¡°So, Anne. What a shame for you.¡±


    ¡°Your Grace¡­ Why would Mr. Takumi refuse to be a noble?¡±


    ¡°It is quite simple. Because he is currently under my protection¡­ And who would trade that for your house?¡±


    ¡°¡­Because a count is lower than a duke¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart. That makes it sound like I just sided with the house with more authority¡­!


    ¡°Well, uh¡­ Mr. Ekenhart¡­ I must say that the ranks of the houses was not something I considered¡­¡±


    ¡°Is that so?¡±


    ¡°Of course. Mr. Takumi is not the kind of person who decides matters based on power.¡±


    ¡°Hmmm¡­ I suppose you are right. Well, there you have it Anne. ¡­You must abandon this cause of yours.¡±


    ¡°Not moved by authority¡­what kind of man¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was satisfied once Ms. ire and I had corrected me.


    Since I was born and raised in Japan, I didn¡¯t want to choose a marriage partner just based on the level of power.


    Though, I suppose it depends on the person.


    In any case, Ms. Anne was surprised that I would not change my mind, even when she reminded me of her influence.


    I didn¡¯t know what her life had been like up until now, but she had probably been surrounded by people who obeyed her.


    Thankfully, I was with a house that did not like to show off. But perhaps between most nobles, and the upper ss, greed and power were things that were more visible.


    ¡­After all, there were simr things happening even in Japan.


    ¡°Hah¡­ I think Ms. Anne hasn¡¯t quite recovered from the shock.¡±


    After breakfast, as I went out into the garden and made herbs, I thought about what had happened earlier.


    Ms. Anne had just stood there and repeatedly muttered to herself, ¡®But¡­I¡¯m a noble¡­¡¯


    It showed how much she believed that I wouldn¡¯t reject her.


    Due to her rank as a count¡¯s daughter, she had likely very few experiences where she didn¡¯t get her way.


    ¡°Well, she is supposed to be here for an education¡­after all.¡±


    She had been ced in Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s care, and Ms. ire would see that she was disciplined¡­ Though, it was bound to take a long time.


    Ms. ire never refused to do anything because of her rank. And she had even treated the orphan children with warm friendliness.


    She never brought up her family name in order to get people to listen.


    Previously, she had told me in the forest that she disliked those who used their authority to forcefully bend others to their will.


    The exact opposite of¡­ Well, I won¡¯t go that far. But it was a different approach than someone like Ms. Anne, who relied a lot on her family name.


    ¡°This whole business of educating her is going to be very difficult¡­ And I want no part of it.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. She has lived in the way that she wanted. And so it will be difficult to change so suddenly.¡±


    ¡°¡­Mr. Ekenhart?¡±

 Chapter 246

    Chapter 246


    I Talked With Mr. Ekenhart


    ¡°Ah, Mr. Takumi. Are you making herbs then?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Because Nickes to pick them up in the morning.¡±


    As I was making herbs and muttering to myself, Mr. Ekenhart walked over to me.


    Apparently, he had heard what I said¡­ Thankfully, it was nothing strange.


    ¡°Where is Ms. Anne?¡±


    ¡°She is in the room that was prepared for her. Your rejection was most effective, it seems.¡±


    ¡°¡­Will she be alright?¡±


    ¡°Well, if she does not pull herself together soon¡­¡±


    Ms. Anne would not leave her room now.


    I suppose it was because part of her worldview had crumbled, and she was still in a state of shock.


    But as the person put in charge of her, Mr. Ekenhart seemed to have known something like this would happen.


    After all, he and the count were so different¡­in direction. And so he could make some predictions.


    ¡°Do you think I made the right decision?¡±


    ¡°What? Do you want to be a noble now?¡±


    ¡°No, that¡¯s not what I meant, but¡­¡±


    ¡°Then there is nothing to worry about. It is not as if nobles can force people to marry them.¡±


    ¡°I know that this house doesn¡¯t use their authority like that, but¡­¡±


    ¡°What? Is that what ire told you? Indeed, we do not believe in doing that. ¡­Though, there are exceptions, of course.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I¡¯m sure.¡±


    Even if he prefered to not use his authority¡­he was still ultimately a duke.


    Besides, it didn¡¯t change the fact that other people would treat him and Ms. ire differently, and do what they could to prevent them from getting angry.


    ¡°I knew about the differences between Barsler and I. Annelieis will be confused and have to get ustomed to this new life.¡±


    ¡°Are you really that different?¡±


    ¡°We do¡­think quite differently. But all humans do. He likes to use his position whenever he can over his people.¡±


    People think differently¡­yes, that was obvious.


    And unlike Mr. Ekenhart, Count Barsler had done as he pleased up until now.


    From the malicious store to the attack on Range vige¡­ While it was on someone else¡¯snds, he really did seemonfolk as disposable pawns.


    Unlike Ms. ire¡­who felt that the people must be treated with respect.


    ¡°Aye, that¡¯s right. While we¡¯ve been talking about Anneliese, I came to discuss a different matter.¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart changed the subject as if suddenly remembering something.


    It was the main reason he hade here. But what could he have to say to me?


    ¡°Am sorry¡­for telling Sebastian to incite Wood into reacting violently at the shop.¡±


    ¡°Huh? Oh¡­¡±


    So Mr. Ekenhart hade to apologize about what happened yesterday.


    I felt a little awkward as he bowed his head.


    ¡°I realized it after ire said it. While it was training, I shouldn¡¯t have put you in danger. Apparently, my expectations for your growth were too great¡­¡±


    ¡°Expectations?¡±


    Was there a reason that he would have such high expectations?


    Weed Cultivation was one thing, but there was so much that I didn¡¯t know and was not used to¡­


    Even now, I could not hit Leo or Mr. Ekenhart with my sword.


    ¡°When you protected Range vige¡­both with the herbs and with your sword. I thought that surely you would be able to manage it¡­ Such were my expectations. ¡­Though, they werepletely unwarranted.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes. I do have my limits. But I¡¯ll do what I have to¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed.¡±


    It¡¯s not as if I had done everything at Range vige.


    A lot of it was Leo.


    As for the herbs, that was because of Weed Cultivation¡­ While it was my power, it was just something I was able to do out of nowhere.


    And my skill with the sword¡­ Though the herbs did allow me to train longer than normal, I didn¡¯t feel as if I had grown all that much.


    That being said, it did help me at Wood¡¯s store, and during the orc attack.


    ¡°I forced you to do something beyond your ability¡­ And for that I apologize. From now on, I will try to avoid cing you in harm¡¯s way.¡±


    ¡°I understand. But if I can be of service in any way, I will help.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. ¡­Now, where is that Leo?¡±


    ¡°Leo? Is something the matter?¡±


    After apologizing, Mr. Ekenhart promised that nothing of that nature would happen again.


    And when a duke bowed his head and made a promise, I had a feeling that it would be kept.


    Well, as he had said before, his word didn¡¯t really have anything to do with his rank.


    In any case, Mr. Ekenhart seemed to be curious about Leo now.


    What had Leo done? No, it did not appear to be something like that¡­


    ¡°I¡­uh. Good Leo carried me back to the mansion yesterday and¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s right.¡±


    ¡°And ever since¡­ I feel as if she is ring at me¡­ And so I suppose I should apologize to her as well. One does not like having a Silver Fenrir re at them like that¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Are you calling Leo¡­scary?¡±


    ¡°¡­Exactly. Our family has always revered them. And so I would rather this tense situation continue no further¡­¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    He had been like that when first meeting Leo, and he still felt that way a little.


    After all, it wasn¡¯t just Ms. ire who scolded him, but Leo as well.


    ¡­But then again, it wasn¡¯t like Leo to re at people. So it was possible that Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s fear was causing him to imagine things.


    Regardless, as the head of his house, which was tightly rted to Silver Fenrirs, he wanted to avoid being red at, or feeling like he was being red at.

 Chapter 247

    Chapter 247


    I Rmended That He y With Leo and Tilura


    ¡°Very well. Should I call Leo now?¡±


    ¡°Mmm¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart nodded, and so I decided to call Leo over.


    When I hade out to the garden to work, Leo hade out as well in order to y with Tilura. They were currently running around.


    I felt bad disturbing her now, but it could not be helped.


    ¡°Hey! Leo!¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Come over here for a minute!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    I called Leo, who was running, and she immediately stopped and turned towards me.


    She then came running over, while carrying Tilura on her back.


    Mr. Ekenhart looked like he was about to make a retreat.


    ¡°Sorry to disturb your y time. Uhh¡­ Mr. Ekenhart?¡±


    ¡°Mmm¡­ Yes¡­ Tilura? Could you y with Sherry over there for a moment?¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes. Sherry!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°¡­Now it¡¯s just the three of us.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    I suppose Mr. Ekenhart did not want his daughter to see him like this.


    And so he told Sherry to go and y somewhere else. Tilura obeyed him and went away with Sherry.


    Leo watched this with her head tilted to the side. And then she turned to me as if for an exnation.


    It¡¯s not me that wants to talk to you, it¡¯s Mr. Ekenhart.


    ¡°Well¡­Good Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Leo looked at Mr. Ekenhart, who was talking awkwardly.


    It did not look like she was ring at him, or even thinking about what happened the other day. But I suppose it just appeared that way to Mr. Ekenhart.


    ¡°I want to apologize about what happened yesterday¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff?¡±


    ¡°She is asking, ¡®what happened yesterday?¡¯¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart could not understand Leo, so I interpreted for him.


    ¡°I um¡­ I am sorry for putting Mr. Takumi in danger. I promise to never do something like that again, so will you please forgive me?¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff-wuff, wou!¡±


    ¡°What did Leo say?¡±


    ¡°Uhh, really? She said, if it happens again, I won¡¯t forgive you!¡±


    ¡°Yes! It is a promise. I will not put Mr. Takumi in danger again like yesterday!¡±


    ¡°Wou-wou. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. She says if that¡¯s the case, you are forgiven.¡±


    ¡°Truly!? Thank you very much!¡±


    As Mr. Ekenhart apologized to Leo, I told him what Leo¡¯s answer was.


    Now that he was forgiven, Mr. Ekenhart thanked her with a relieved expression.


    ¡­He really did seem happy.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff? Wuff, wuff-wou.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Ah, that¡¯s true. That might be better.¡±


    ¡°¡­What is she saying?¡±


    I nodded at Leo¡¯s suggestion.


    Mr. Ekenhart looked like he dreaded what he was about to hear.


    And then Leo and I turned to him and exined what we meant to do.


    ¡°Well, Leo is saying¡­ That you will know that you¡¯re forgiven by riding on her. As this is a good opportunity to get used to her, why don¡¯t you y with Leo and Tilura? She will not be running at the same speed as she did yesterday.¡±


    ¡°¡­I don¡¯t mind ying with Tilura but¡­ With Good Leo? The first time I rode her, it was normal andfortable but¡­ Yesterday¡­¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. Leo understands that perfectly. She will not run like that again. Especially since Tilura will be with you.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    As Tilura would be ying with them, Leo wouldn¡¯t do anything reckless.


    Besides, Mr. Ekenhart had apologized and promised to never do it again, and Leo had genuinely forgiven him.


    And since Mr. Ekenhart hadn¡¯tpletely ovee his fear, ying with Leo was probably the best way for him to get used to her.


    And since Tilura got to y with her father, it was two birds with one stone.


    ¡°Now, go ahead.¡±


    ¡°Yes, father!¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­hmm¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    I pushed Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s back and encouraged him to get on top of Leo.


    While he was still unsure, he gave up any resistance after both Tilura and I pushed him.


    And so he got onto Leo¡¯s back with Tilura.


    Sherry was on top of Leo¡¯s head¡­which was her favorite spot.


    ¡°Now, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Woah!¡±


    Leo nodded at me and then stood up. And then she ran off to the area where she and Tilura had been ying earlier.


    When she started to run, Mr. Ekenhart looked surprised and clutched her tightly.


    This wasn¡¯t his first or second time, he should be used to it by now¡­ But I suppose this would do the trick.


    ¡°Ahhh! Yes, like this, Leo!¡±


    ¡°Wa-wait, isn¡¯t this a little too fast?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyau! Kyau!¡±


    ¡°¡­They appear to be having fun.¡±


    I muttered as I watched her run from a distance.


    Well, it was just Tilura and Sherry who looked like they were having fun. Mr. Ekenhart still seemed ufortable.


    ¡­Oh, and Leo was enjoying it as well.


    ¡°Now, I can¡¯t just pay attention to them. ¡­I have to think about the medicinal wine as well.¡±


    As I had finished making the necessary herbs, I decided to use my free time to think of something that could be used with the wine.


    The quality of the wine would depend on this part.


    Though, the boiled stuff tasted quite good already.


    But as this could lead to a new business for Range vige, I had to think about it carefully.


    ¡°Medicinal wine¡­ We had something like in my old world, but¡­ I don¡¯t know how it was made¡­¡±


    I had drunk it a few times in Japan.


    But I didn¡¯t like alcohol that much, so it wasn¡¯t often.


    And since I never checked to see what was inside, I didn¡¯t know how it was made.


    Well, it was obviously Chinese medicine and stuff that is good for you.


    ¡°Hmm. What should I do¡­ I don¡¯t know much about Chinese medicine either¡­¡±

 Chapter 248

    Chapter 248


    I Thought About The Medicinal Wine


    As Japan was overflowing with things, there were a lot of products that imed to be good for you.


    However, I had little interest in such things. I was too busy with work.


    There were times when I tried some, in order to help recover from fatigue, but I never felt that they were very effective.


    ¡­But I was probably working so much that it wouldn¡¯t have even mattered much if it was effective or not.


    After all, there was no point if you didn¡¯t take time to rest¡­


    Regardless, the recovery herbs I took aftering to this world were different, because I could sense the difference immediately.


    But they were made with the special ability that is Weed Cultivation¡­ Though I still needed to rest.


    ¡­Now that I thought about it, the herbs were a lot like magic.


    ¡°Hmm. Fatigue recovery¡­ I think that¡¯s what the medicinal wine was supposed to do?¡±


    I muttered, even though there was no one to hear me.


    I didn¡¯t know if it could be mixed with wine and be effective while not sacrificing the vor, but it was worth trying.


    ¡°I should start with Ramogi. Right now, it¡¯s important to remove the disease from it first.¡±


    Even if we seeded in making wine that had a healing effect, it would mean nothing if it was still the source of the disease.


    As I thought about herbs, I made extra Ramogi for Ms. Helena to use.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Fatigue recovery, nutritional supplement, sleepiness¡­no, maybe not that one. Sleep was not something I should avoid. If anything, maybe making something would make you sleepy¡­like a sleeping pill? No, it could be too potent and dangerous.¡±


    I thought, while I picked the Ramogi that I made.


    ¡°¡­Wait a minute? If it doesn¡¯t have to be limited to just one¡­¡±


    I processed the picked Ramogi and separated it from the stock that would be given to Nick.


    ¡­It was a good thing that no one was close by. I would look very suspicious as I muttered to myself like this.


    ¡°A nourishing tonic¡­or something to improve blood cirction¡­ No, that shouldn¡¯t bebined with alcohol.¡±


    Perhaps it would be fine if you only drank a little. But in this world¡­people didn¡¯t practice moderation when it came to such things.


    Well, maybe they would listen if I told them. That would be a hassle.


    For the people selling it, anyway.


    ¡°People who want to get drunk quickly might like it, but¡­ I don¡¯t want to do anything dangerous. In the first ce, alcohol already improves your blood cirction¡­¡±


    Maybe I would make medicinal wine for blood cirction that is drunk in small amounts one day, but not now.


    First, I had to think of something that can be shipped in great quantities, for Range vige.


    ¡°I suppose the ones I want are fatigue recovery, nutritional supplements and a restorative¡­ With those three, you will be less likely to get sick.¡±


    And if you didn¡¯t get sick, then you wouldn¡¯t need Ramogi or simr herbs.


    Though, you couldn¡¯t prevent people from getting sickpletely, so there would still be demand.


    ¡°For fatigue recovery, I could use the herbs I already have. The problem is the other two¡­ When ites to nutrition, there are so many substances¡­ How should I make them¡­¡±


    Take in the nutrition and then something with a restorative effect.


    And then you can make sure that the necessary nutrients are distributed through the entire body.


    As I didn¡¯t have much knowledge about it, I didn¡¯t know how urate this was. But it shouldn¡¯t be too wrong.


    But there were so many kinds of nutrients, and there were some that you couldn¡¯t take too much of¡­ So it was difficult.


    ¡°In general, people get nutrition from their meals¡­ Protein and vitamins¡­ Also, a little iron as well. But not too much. Just as a supplement¡­¡±


    Kind of like those dietary supplement products.


    They were merely things to take along with your regr meals to make up for anyck of nutrition.


    And the restorative drink would ensure that everything was properly absorbed¡­I suppose.


    If only I had a nutritionist certificate, I would be able to do a lot more.


    But I didn¡¯t have one, and have never studied stuff like that.


    And I doubted there was any way to analyze the nutritional value in this world.


    ¡°All right, so the restorative and nutritional supplement herbs¡­¡±


    Once I had gathered my thoughts together, I put my hands on the ground and activated Weed Cultivation.


    After a few seconds, a nt started to grow.


    I picked this nt and ced it in my palm. Then I activated Weed Cultivation again.


    Now some of it was dried and turned to powder, while some was left alone. Now the processing is finished.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ While this must be the restorative one¡­the other¡­¡±


    The restorative herb looked a little like ashitaba.


    While processing it, a yellow fluid hade out of the leaves and enveloped everything before drying.


    Because it looked like a familiar nt, I had an idea of its effect¡­but what was it called in this world¡­?


    Just like aloe was simr to Loe, this was also probably a more powerful version of it¡­ I would have to ask Sebastian about it, or check one of the books.


    In any case, onto the next one.


    I had made several other herbs, but I didn¡¯t know what effect they had.


    As I had been thinking about a nutritional supplement, it should be a herb that was rich with nutrients¡­ But since there were five, I didn¡¯t know which one to use¡­


    ¡­I guess I would have to ask Sebastian about this as well¡­?


    ¡°In any case, that¡¯s enough for now. I¡¯ll take the Ramogi to Ms. Helena. And then she can test it.¡±


    I picked up the herbs and made my way back to the mansion.


    ¡°Leo. I¡¯m going to the kitchens now. You can stay here and y.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°See youter, Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°Hey, wa-wait a minute!¡±


    I called to Leo and told the others I was going to the kitchen.


    Mr. Ekenhart looked like he was asking for help¡­ but he also seemed to be enjoying himself a little, so I left him be.

 Chapter 249

    Chapter 249


    Ms. Helena Looked Busy


    ¡°Ah, Ms. Lyra.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. I thought you were in the back garden?¡±


    ¡°I finished my work and came back inside. Uhh, here¡­ Please give this to Nick when he arrives.¡±


    ¡°Certainly. Are you going somewhere now?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m going to see Ms. Helena in the kitchens so I can talk to her about the wine. ¡­She is there, isn¡¯t she?¡±


    ¡°Yes, Ms. Helena should be in the kitchens and preparing lunch. Very well, I shall pass this to Nick for you.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    As I had met Ms. Lyra on the way to the kitchens, I asked her to give Nick the herbs in my ce.


    I also asked her about Ms. Helena, and she confirmed that she would be in the kitchen now.


    Preparing lunch¡­ She was always working so hard, and I was grateful for that.


    ¡°Excuse me. ¡­Uh, are you busy now?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi? What do you want?¡±


    ¡°Where is Ms. Helena?¡±


    ¡°You want to see her? I¡¯ll call her now.¡±


    ¡°Sorry to disturb you at such a time. But thank you.¡±


    When I arrived at the kitchen, there were a lot of cooks running around in white uniforms.


    I suppose they really were busy making lunch.


    I felt bad foring at such a time.


    A young man noticed me, and so I asked him about Ms. Helena, and then went to call her.


    That was fine¡­ But if she was too busy, then I could justeter.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi? What is the matter?¡±


    ¡°Uhh, I brought you some Ramogi to soak in the wine¡­ But I suppose you are busy now?¡±


    ¡°Ah, yes. There is a lot to do when preparing lunch. That being said, we are all used to this work. Alright, I¡¯ll take the Ramogi. Then I can put it to the test after we are finished with lunch.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Ah, please call me and Leo when it is done. Otherwise, we won¡¯t be able to tell if it will still make you sick.¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    odring to Ms. Isabelle, there were magic tools that allowed you to detect it as well, but we did not have such a device here.


    And so we had no choice but to have Leo do it.


    ¡°Also, there are some herbs that will improve the wine¡­¡±


    ¡°Ms. Helena, please help me!¡±


    ¡°Very well! Mr. Takumi, I¡¯m sorry. But the cooks¡­¡±


    ¡°No, I¡¯m the one who is sorry for bothering you. I wille again when there is time.¡±


    ¡°Thank you¡­¡±


    Ms. Helena was called by the other cooks and had to leave.


    She was very apologetic, but I told her I would be back and then left the kitchen.


    They were making food for everyone, so it was best to not get in their way.


    ¡°Oh, Mr. Takumi? Did you have business in the kitchen?¡±


    ¡°Sebastian. I was giving Ms. Helena the herbs to be added to the wine.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    ¡°And some other herbs for medicinal wine as well, but¡­ She was quite busy, and so I¡¯m going to go backter.¡±


    ¡°Yes, the kitchens are like a battlefield during this time of the day, so it cannot be helped. Still, medicinal wine?¡±


    As soon as I left the kitchen, I bumped into Sebastian.


    Was he on his way to the kitchen?


    ¡°Yes. While making herbs in the garden, I decided to make some others as a test. And because they were new herbs, I wanted Ms. Helena¡¯s opinion on them¡­¡±


    ¡°I see. Hmm¡­ And what kind of herbs were they?¡±


    ¡°Uhh¡­to put it simply, they are herbs that were made for the purpose of being a supplement for the things your body needs. So you be tougher to illness¡­ That¡¯s what I was thinking¡­¡±


    ¡°But?¡±


    ¡°Uh, Sebastian. Aren¡¯t you busy? I thought you were going to the kitchen¡­?¡±


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right. It is just that this is so interesting¡­ Well, I will talk to youter, Mr. Takumi¡­ Maybe I will join you when you talk with Helena.¡±


    ¡°Very well. I will call you when I go to see her.¡±


    ¡°Very good.¡±


    Sebastian was so interested in the new herbs that he forgot the reason that he hade down here.


    As it might be rted to the food, it would be no good to stand around here and talk.


    When he remembered, I promised to call himter and we separated.


    ¡°Now, I have some free time¡­ What to do¡­ I suppose I should go back to the garden and see how Mr. Ekenhart is doing?¡±


    I still had some time before lunch.


    And since there wasn¡¯t much for me to do today, I had plenty of time to spare.


    As for my training, I nned to do that before dinner¡­ And as for Milina¡¯s studies, she was busy learning to be a servant today, so there would be no lessons.


    So even if I would talk with Ms. Helena and Sebastian between lunch and training, I had nothing to do right now.


    ¡°And I already gave the herbs to Ms. Lyra¡­ So I guess I¡¯ll just go to the garden.¡±


    Maybe I should have just handed them to Nick myself¡­ I thought of such things as I walked down the hallway towards the back garden.


    ¡°Thank you, missy. I guess my old brother is busy.¡±


    ¡°I told you to stop calling me that¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Huh?¡±


    As I walked down the hallway, I heard a man and woman talking.


    Went I turned to look, I saw that Nick was holding the back of herbs and talking to Ms. Lyra.


    ¡°Ms. Lyra. Nick.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi? Are you finished already?¡±


    ¡°Brother! I thought you were busy?¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. Well, they were pretty busy in the kitchen. And so I finished up early and came out.¡±


    I went up to Nick and Ms. Lyra, who were talking in the entrance hall.


    Both of them were not expecting to see me.


    Nick looked rather happy for some reason¡­ it wasn¡¯t because he was able to meet me¡­right?

 Chapter 250

    Chapter 250


    Nick Was Happy To See Me


    ¡°I see. I have already given the herbs over to Mr. Nick.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I have them right here! Still, I thought I wasn¡¯t going to see you today, so I must be pretty lucky¡­¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re that happy to see me¡­?¡±


    So he really was smiling so much because he was able to meet me.


    ¡­I couldn¡¯t say it made me feel good. But I suppose it was better than being hated.


    ¡°Of course! After all, I respect you more than anyone! I wish I could see you every day!¡±


    ¡°¡­Respect¡­¡±


    ¡°He seems very fond of you, Mr Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Ms. Lyra¡­ I have no idea why¡­¡±


    Nick just smiled and went on about how much he respected me.


    I hadn¡¯t done anything for him to see me in such a way¡­


    But Ms. Lyra seemed amused by it all.


    ¡°You helped me when I was about to be punished! And then you hired and paid me generously¡­ So why wouldn¡¯t I respect you!¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Well, as long as you are working hard?¡±


    ¡°Of course, I am! Mr. Kalis is in the middle of teaching me. I won¡¯t do anything that will dishonor you, don¡¯t worry!¡±


    I had just hired him to see if he could be reformed¡­ And if he caused any trouble, I would have Sebastian capture him again.


    As for his wages, it was just what I thought he was owed after working. So it wasn¡¯t anything to be so grateful for.


    The herbs brought in a lot more than I was expecting, and so I wasn¡¯t hurting financially. And so it was true that I gave him a little extra¡­hoping that it would encourage him.


    ¡°I¡¯m sure a lot of people would work harder if they knew about you! Of course, some people will never want to work honestly. I suppose I better not talk about it¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, I¡¯m not thinking about hiring anyone else right now, Nick. That being said, is it really that great?¡±


    ¡°Of course, brother. The pay is good. Better than other ces. And that¡¯s very appealing for someone as uneducated as me!¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, this isn¡¯t something restricted to Ractos, but¡­there are a lot of people who use wanderers or even ordinary residents for work, but do not pay them adequately. The duke does what he can to punish such offenses¡­but it is difficult¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    Such things happen everywhere in every age.


    Employers use their workers to their convenience, but pay them little so that they can maximize the profits of theirpany or store¡­


    I wasn¡¯t saying that all people were like that, but it¡¯s true that many people thought that way.


    Otherwise, I never would have ended up working at such a ckpany.


    ¡­Though, I¡¯m sure that managers also had their own problems¡­


    In Japan, I suppose that Nick would be considered delinquent.


    Someone who lived outside of society.


    Such people were more likely to have to work for lower wages, which would make things difficult. It was a bad environment.


    Well, I wouldn¡¯t say that they were meless for that situation, but¡­it was a difficult issue.


    It was probably because of this, that Nick was so happy to be able to receive enough money to live and even save up, in spite of having nothing to rmend him.


    ¡°Well, I¡¯m off then. I¡¯ll take these right to Mr. Kalis!¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m counting on you, Nick.¡±


    ¡°Aye!¡±


    ¡°Be careful¡­¡±


    I stood in the entrance hall as Nick left with the herbs.


    ¡°¡­Are you thinking about something?¡±


    After seeing Nick leave, I stood there for a moment, deep in thought. And then Ms. Lyra spoke to me.


    I hadn¡¯t meant to look so serious¡­but it was obvious to her that I was thinking about something.


    ¡­I suppose I should be more careful so that it didn¡¯t show on my face?


    Though, I¡¯m sure that no amount of effort would save me from Sebastian.


    ¡°Uh¡­ I was just thinking about the difficulty of hiring people. Also, I didn¡¯t realize such things happened in Ractos¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, there is a lot of trade happening in Ractos. So many peoplee and go, and so there are a lot of wanderers. As for the people who hire them¡­ I do not know. After all, I am a person who is merely hired.¡±


    ¡°I suppose such things are moremon in densely popted ces. Still¡­I¡¯m sure from the perspective of the duke, I am also a hired person.¡±


    ¡°Well, I hope you are careful Mr. Takumi. If you do decide to hire someone else.¡±


    ¡°¡­Careful about what?¡±


    After talking with Ms. Lyra, I understood that even under the duke¡¯s management and Sebastian¡¯s watchful eye, such things happened in Ractos town.


    And I was thinking thinking about how I was also like a contracted worker, Ms. Lyra suddenly warned me.


    I knew that there were things you had to be careful about¡­ But what was she thinking about specifically?


    ¡°I do not know a lot about such matters, but¡­since Mr. Nick seems to be working seriously, your decision was not wrong in the end. However, there are plenty of people who do not work and just try to take money from you. Some even steal and at worst¡­kill their employers.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    ¡°And so you must be careful to not hire such people. I¡¯m sorry, perhaps I am being presumptuous¡­¡±


    ¡°No, I will keep your words in mind, Ms. Lyra. Thank you. If it ever happens that I have to hire someone else, I will be careful. Of course, I doubt that will happen anytime soon.¡±


    I didn¡¯t think there were many people like that in Japan, but perhaps it was different here.


    After all, while there were guards, there weren¡¯t actual police officers.


    But if I ever did hire someone, I would discuss it with Sebastian first¡­ It was with such thoughts that I decided to keep her advice etched in my mind.

 Chapter 251

    Chapter 251


    Mr. Ekenhart Looked Exhausted


    The only one who I might hire in the near future was Milina¡­ As she was interested in learning about medicine, she could help me in various ways.


    That being said, would I really be hiring anyone in the future¡­?


    If I was just going to stay here making herbs, and have the duke¡¯s men sell them, then there would be no need.


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi. There you are.¡±


    ¡°¡­Ms. Gelda. Is something the matter?¡±


    ¡°Preparations for lunch areplete.¡±


    ¡°I see. I will go there right away.¡±


    As various thoughts went through my mind, Ms. Gelda appeared and told me that lunch was ready. And so I headed to the dining hall with Ms. Lyra.


    ¡­Now that I thought about it, what had happened to Mr. Ekenhart?


    As she was ying with Tilura and Sherry as well, I was sure that Leo wasn¡¯t doing anything reckless.


    I just hoped that he could get used to Leo even a little.


    ¡°Excuse me. I brought Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°¡­Mmm.¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°Oh, Leo. So you were already here?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    When I entered the dining hall, Mr. Ekenhart, Ms. ire, Tilura, and Sherry were already there.


    As Sebastian was there as well, he must have finished his business in the kitchen.


    I suppose I had been talking with Ms. Lyra and Nick longer than I realized.


    Leo rushed towards me as soon as I entered the room. Since she was wagging her tail enthusiastically, I petted her thoroughly.


    It was nice that she was happy, but her tail was causing a great wind that threatened to push up Ms. Lyra¡¯s skirt. Be careful, okay?


    ¡°Well, let us eat then¡­ Phew.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    I made Leo calm down as we went to the table together. And then on Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s signal, we began to eat.


    ¡­Still, Mr. Ekenhart really did look tired.


    Also, Ms. Anne wasn¡¯t here. Was she still sulking in her room then?


    ¡°Father. You look very tired?¡±


    ¡°Mmm¡­ Yes.¡±


    ¡°What happened? ¡­I don¡¯t think anything happened that would make you so tired¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, that is true. With the whole matter with the store settled, there is nothing to trouble me¡­ But Leo¡­¡±


    ¡°Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Ms. ire had seen that her father was not eating at his usual speed, and she looked concerned.


    Mr. Ekenhart nced over to Leo as he replied.


    It seemed like he had expended a lot of energy in ying with Leo and Tilura.


    Leo heard her name, and she looked up and tilted her head, while a sausage was still in her mouth.


    It¡¯s really nothing Leo. Keep eating¡­


    ¡°Mr. Takumi made me¡­¡±


    ¡°Made you? You make it sound very bad¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°I was going to y with Tilura and Leo¡­¡±


    ¡°So that¡¯s why you are tired¡­ Well, you rarely y with Tilura. So isn¡¯t it a good thing?¡±


    ¡°Well¡­yes. It is, but¡­ Yes, I do feel less afraid now¡­¡±


    ¡°Did you have a good time, Tilura?¡±


    ¡°Yes! It was fun being with father!¡±


    Tilura answered her sister in a cheerful voice.


    Upon seeing this, Mr. Ekenhart was not able to say anything.


    A father couldn¡¯tin about being tired when his daughter said she had so much fun.


    Ms. ire had clearly asked her that question deliberately.


    That being said, Mr. Ekenhart had lost his fear. So it was all good in the end, I suppose.


    ¡°By the way, I see that Ms. Anne hasn¡¯te down¡­ Is she alright?¡±


    Now that the conversation had ended, I decided to ask about Ms. Anne out of curiosity.


    ¡°Lady Anneliese is staying in her room. She said that she does not want to eat. That¡¯s how effective your rejection was, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°She overestimated her power as a noble and was shocked as a result. Really, the very idea of using power to get a husband¡­¡±


    ¡°Hahaha¡­ Indeed¡­¡±


    Like Sebastian had exined, Ms. Anne would note out of her room.


    It was clear that Ms. ire resented her, and she was muttering angrily to herself¡­


    But I didn¡¯t want to get involved, so I focused on my food.


    ¡°Ah, Ms. Lyra. Do you know where Ms. Anne¡¯s room is?¡±


    ¡°Lady Anneliese¡¯s room? Uh¡­¡±


    After lunch, I decided to check up on Ms. Anne. And so I asked Ms. Lyra where her room was.


    Perhaps it would be odd for me to see her after rejecting her¡­ But I couldn¡¯t help but worry about her¡­


    ¡°I see. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. I could take you there?¡±


    ¡°No, that will be fine. I doubt I will get lost.¡±


    I asked Ms. Lyra for directions and then thanked her.


    She must have recalled how I had asked her to guide me when I first came to this mansion, and offered to take me there, but I refused.


    It wasn¡¯t too far from my own room, so I shouldn¡¯t have trouble getting there.


    Besides, I wasn¡¯t going to visit her right away.


    I needed to talk to Ms. Helena first¡­


    ¡°Sebastian. Do you have a minute?¡±


    ¡°Yes. What is it?¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart and the others were now gone from the dining hall.


    Each had things to do, like work or studying, and so they had all left right after taking their tea.


    Ms. ire and Mr. Ekenhart seemed like they had much to discuss about the property.


    Tilura took Sherry with her to study.


    ¡­I doubted she could concentrate with Sherry around, but¡­ Well, I¡¯m sure it would be fine.


    Now that I knew where Ms. Anne¡¯s room was, I called to Sebastian as he was clearing the dishes.

 Chapter 252

    Chapter 252


    I Gave Ms. Helena The New Herbs


    ¡°Uhh, I¡¯m going to go and see Ms. Helena now¡­¡±


    ¡°To talk about the new herbs? Very well. Lyra, Gelda. I will leave the rest to you.¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    I felt bad that they had more work to do now¡­but I had promised Sebastian that I would call him when I went to talk to Ms. Helena, so it could not be helped.


    If we took too long to go and see her, she would then be busy preparing for dinner. And so I wanted to go as soon as possible.


    ¡­Besides, there were probably dishes to be washed as well.


    ¡°So, where are the new herbs?¡±


    ¡°¡­Uh, here they are.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­¡±


    ¡°One is for restoration, and the others are more of a supplement.¡±


    ¡°Restoration¡­ What effect is that exactly?¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. I will exin it to when we see Ms. Helena.¡±


    As Sebastian was very interested, I showed him the herbs with a brief exnation.


    He seemed like he had a lot of questions, but I didn¡¯t want to have to exin about the herbs twice.


    It was better to talk to them both at the same time.


    ¡°Excuse me. Is Helena here?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Sebastian. You want to see Ms. Helena? Please wait one moment.¡±


    We entered the kitchen and addressed the nearest cook and had them call Ms. Helena.


    As they had finished making lunch, they were all rxing now and seemed to have plenty of time.


    ¡°Mr. Sebastian. Was there a problem with the food? I did make adjustments to the seasoning, just as you requested¡­¡±


    ¡°No, that is not why I am here. I wanted to see what Mr. Takumi has made for the wine¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Uh, these are the herbs¡­¡±


    I took out the herbs and showed them to Ms. Helena.


    Apparently, the reason that Mr. Sebastian hade down earlier had to do with seasoning.


    As the food was as delicious as always, I hadn¡¯t noticed. But I suppose Ms. Helena confided in Sebastian when it came to the menu.


    Or maybe it was because Mr. Ekenhart was here¡­ He was the master, after all.


    ¡°A restorative¡­? In what way?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ There are certain nutrients that are necessary for the human body. And sometimes, even when taking those nutrients, your body might not absorb them, depending on the state it is in.¡±


    ¡°Nutrients¡­ It is something I think about when cooking, yes.¡±


    ¡°What isn¡¯t absorbedes out of the body as waste. But this will change it so that it is absorbed. It will also strengthen parts that are weakened, making it harder for you to get sick.¡±


    ¡°Oh. That sounds quite amazing¡­¡±


    ¡°How interesting¡­ I suppose such thinking ismon in your world, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    Sebastian and Ms. Helena looked impressed as they listened to my exnation.


    I didn¡¯t actually know the details of how it all worked. It was just based on the little knowledge I remembered.


    And I was pretty sure that I wasn¡¯t wrong¡­ Well, basically, it worked to make your body stronger.


    There was no doubt about that.


    As I talked to them like this, the other cooks in the kitchen started to gather around us as well.


    They were also listening with interest. I suppose it was because they were cooks.


    It was nice to see how passionate they were.


    ¡°By mixing this into the wine, it will help the drinker stay healthy. I think. ¡­As for the taste, we¡¯ll have to try it to find out.¡±


    ¡°This is that medicinal wine you were talking about before?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ And what does this herb taste like?¡±


    ¡°Well, I only just made it a short while ago. I haven¡¯t tasted it yet.¡±


    I had just wanted to talk to Ms. Helena about it first, and hadn¡¯t been thinking about a taste test.


    ¡°In that case¡­may I try it?¡±


    ¡°Yes. It can be made very quickly. I will try it too then¡­¡±


    ¡°So will I.¡±


    ¡°Then I¡¯ll split it¡­¡±


    I split up the yellow nt and gave some to Sebastian and Ms. Helena.


    As I had brought several of them, I shared it with the other cooks as well.


    They all seemed very curious about this new herb.


    Since this was just to test the taste and not the effect, it only needed to be a little.


    ¡°Hmmm¡­ This is¡­¡±


    ¡°Mmm¡­I see¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­.Hmm!¡±


    ¡°¡­.Mmm!¡±


    The moment that I put it in my mouth a very distinct odor spread through my mouth¡­ It was like kerosene?


    Aside from the horrible smell, there was a strong bitterness as well.


    When I bit into it, there was also a mild sweetness there. But it was quickly erased by the stench and bitterness. I would hardly consider this to be edible¡­


    Still, it would be a waste to spit it out, and so I mped my mouth shut and swallowed it.


    When I looked at the others, they were doing the same.


    Only Ms. Helena seemed to chew slowly as if to taste it carefully. She was nodding to herself. ¡­Did she not think it was horrible?


    ¡°This¡­is rather too strong¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ I¡¯m sorry. Can I have some water¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Here.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Glug¡­glug¡­¡±


    I got some water from one of the cooks and rinsed the lingering stench out of my mouth with it.


    Aside from Ms. Helena, everyone else was also drinking water.


    ¡­I would have to do something about the smell if I wanted to use it in the wine¡­


    ¡°Hmm¡­ This is a herb known as Artaba. This yellow fluid around the leaves¡­ It is the cause of the smell and bitterness.¡±


    ¡°Artaba¡­ So it¡¯s amon nt here?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Well, it does not grow in the duke¡¯snds¡­ But I¡¯ve eaten it before as part of my training as a cook.¡±


    So the herb that looked like ashitaba was called Artaba in this world.


    As it had been enveloped in that yellow liquid when I made it with Weed Cultivation, I assumed it was important¡­


    If what Ms. Helena said was true, then it meant Weed Cultivation was an ability that created nts in their most effective state¡­but not the most edible state.


    In fact, all of the nts I had made up until now had tasted¡­rather bad. So it was no surprise.

 Chapter 253

    Chapter 253


    Artaba Was Affected By Magic Energy


    ¡°Indeed, Artaba is good for you¡­ At least, that¡¯s what they say. And so it should be effective if you put it in wine.¡±


    ¡°However¡­this taste¡­it will ruin the wine.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ We will have to do something about the smell and the bitterness first.¡±


    The smell and bitterness that spread through the mouth the instant after biting it¡­ It was so strong that there was no way that it wouldn¡¯t ruin the taste of the wine.


    ¡°But as you said, Mr. Takumi, it should be quite potent as a restorative.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Maybe not as much as the recovery herbs, but it will definitely work. After all, we only took a little bit, and I can already feel it¡­ This is quite wonderful.¡±


    Ms. Helena, Sebastian and even the other cooks all felt the effects of the herb.


    Though, I was pretty sure that something like a restorative should not be felt so strongly this soon¡­ However, even as I was thinking this, I thought that I felt something as well.


    Was it the cebo effect¡­? But then again, everything in this world seemed to be more effective than simr herbs from my world.


    As Sebastian said, it wasn¡¯t as sudden and strong as the recovery herb, but it was still a good result.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Do you have any more of it?¡±


    ¡°After sharing it with everyone¡­there is just one left. As this was just for a test, I didn¡¯t make that much¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Can I have that one then? I want to try and remove the taste and smell.¡±


    ¡°Very well.¡±


    ¡°So you are testing¡­to see if it will still have an effect after being processed?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    I handed over the remaining Artaba to Ms. Helena.


    She had talked about the yellow juices before. And she wanted to see if the restorative effect would still be there after it was removed.


    If it was the yellow liquid that was potent, then removing it would make the leaves worthless.


    And so Sebastian and I silently watched Ms. Helena work.


    ¡°¡­There we go.¡±


    ¡°Yes, the yellowness is gone. It is just a leaf now.¡±


    ¡°It all depends on this next part¡­¡±


    After washing the leaf with water, she had soaked it in hot water and then pared it down with a knife until it was quite a bit smaller.


    The yellowness was gonepletely, and what remained looks like a brown, dead leaf.


    It did not look like it would be effective to me¡­


    ¡°As there is only one, it cannot be shared with everyone.¡±


    ¡°Yes. So I will eat it with Mr. Takumi and you, Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°No, I do not need any more. You and Sebastian should do it¡­ That way, you will be able to eat more and it will be easier to see if it has an effect.¡±


    ¡°Very well. Here you go, Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    Besides, I wasn¡¯t confident in my ability to analyze or even feel the effect.


    In that case, it would be better to let Ms. Helena and Sebastian do it, as they were far more knowledgeable.


    And so they split the leaf and hesitantly put it in their mouths.


    ¡­It was probably because they were dreading that horrible taste.


    And this portion wasrger than the first¡­


    ¡°Hmm¡­ It is¡­¡±


    ¡°How is it?¡±


    ¡°The smell and bitterness is gone. Yes, the yellow part was the cause after all.¡±


    ¡°No, there is some bitterness left¡­ But it is probably from the leaf itself.¡±


    ¡°But it is mild. Unless you are incredibly sensitive to it, it should be fine to mix in the wine.¡±


    Apparently, she had seeded in removing the smell and bitterness from the wine.


    So that was one problem solved.


    But now¡­there was the effect.


    ¡°Can you feel anything?¡±


    ¡°It is weaker than before, but I do feel a change.¡±


    ¡°It must be the magic energy. The magic energy that courses through your whole body is reacting to the restorative effect.¡±


    ¡°Magic energy¡­¡±


    ¡°Magic energy is something that all humans require. In other words, it is like a nutrient.¡±


    Now that I thought of it, when I had eaten the herb, I did feel as if my magic energy was reacting to it.


    If magic energy and nutrients were simr, then perhaps it was going to ces in the body where it was deficient, and energizing it¡­


    ¡°Hmm¡­¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    Sebastian closed his eyes as if troubled over something.


    Well, he was probably just concentrating. But why?


    ¡°¡­Yes, the magic energy seems to be more active than usual. An increase¡­no, maybe not that far¡­¡±


    ¡°It is?¡±


    ¡°Yes. It is moving as if to give energy to the body. ¡­I tried checking the magic energy throughout my body, and can see that it is having an effect.¡±


    ¡°Magic energy¡­ When eating and absorbing nutrients, magic energy often bes active. I see, this is a good herb.¡±


    After eating the herb in both states, he was able to clearly feel the effect and how it worked.


    In other words, even after the smell and bitterness was removed, the herb was just as potent.


    ¡°So, if you put it in the wine¡­you will be able to make something quite healthy.¡±


    ¡°Yes. The yellow part merely enhanced the effects, but the actual restorative effect is in the leaf. Now, we just need to test to see if it will remain potent when added to wine¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed. We will have to test it with a few batches.¡±


    ¡°Very well. I will make more of them today.¡±


    Now that there was no problem with the taste or effect, we just needed to test it.


    See it if it still worked with wine. And if it did, we would then have a restorative wine.


    And so I decided to make more when I had some free time.

 Chapter 254

    Chapter 254


    I Thought About How To Handle The Herbs


    ¡°A restorative¡­that is quite interesting.¡±


    ¡°Yes. If you think of it as something that activates magic energy¡­ It could have a lot of different uses.¡±


    ¡°But it wasn¡¯t originally for magic energy¡­¡±


    I hadn¡¯t even been thinking about magic energy when making it.


    I was only thinking about having the necessary nutrients distributed through the whole body.


    Well, as long as it was good for you, then it was fine.


    ¡°So, now that we tested the restorative herb, what about the others?¡±


    ¡°Yes. This one has the nutrients that your body needs¡­ Or at least, that¡¯s why I made it. After all, the restorative herb will not be effective if there are no nutrients to begin with.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ So you can take in the nutrients with this herb, and the other herbs ensure it is properly distributed¡­?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    And so I showed the other herbs to Sebastian and Ms. Helena.


    Both of them inspected the herbs with great interest.


    ¡°Still, multiple herbs¡­ Will these be put in a separate wine?¡±


    ¡°No, I was hoping to put all of the herbs in the same wine. One wine with nutrients and a restorative effect to make your body healthy.¡±


    ¡°All at once¡­ It would be a wonderful wine indeed. However¡­¡±


    ¡°To add these on top of the other one¡­¡±


    ¡°Surely they will bring even more problems with taste and effect¡­¡±


    I showed them three other new herbs.


    If Weed Cultivation is to be believed, one was for protein, another for vitamins, and thest for iron.


    But there was no way to analyze such things in this world, so I could not confirm if this was true.


    And it would be difficult to actually feel the effects, unlike the restorative.


    However, that wasn¡¯t Ms. Helena and Sebastian¡¯s main concern right now.


    They were thinking about the effect on the wine¡¯s taste and smell after mixing it with so many herbs¡­


    The vitamin nt had a sour citrus smell. It seemed like it would definitely alter the taste of the wine.


    And one of the best things about the wine was its sweetness¡­ Though, perhaps some people would prefer a more sour taste.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Could you notbine all of these into one?¡±


    ¡°What do you mean?¡±


    ¡°Mix them so that it is a single medecine.¡±


    Now that I thought about it, the book that I had borrowed from Sebastian had contained something about that.


    By mixing them, you could enhance the potency or create a medicine with multiple effects.


    But it also said that you had to be careful when preparing it, or you might make something that was useless if not poisonous¡­


    When turning it into liquid and mixing them, you could even cause an explosion, as they contained magic energy.


    Well, since we would just bebining herbs with each other, it would probably be fine.


    ¡°However¡­I do not know how¡­¡±


    ¡°Is it not written in the book you borrowed?¡±


    ¡°It is. But I doubt I will be able to do it¡­¡±


    ¡°As it will be your first time, it does not need to be perfect. You just need to practice.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes, that¡¯s true.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. While I make all kinds of dishes and serve them to everyone¡­ It took me a lot of practice to get to this point, you know?¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true¡­¡±


    While I was nervous about it, Sebastian was right. I realized that I just need to practice until I can do it well.


    Ms. Helena always cooked delicious meals, but it was easy to imagine that this was the result of a lot of work and effort.


    Thankfully, the herbs I had prepared this time were nutritious, but not particrly special. And so I doubted there would be much risk inbining them.


    Well¡­it would also still be difficult to determine whether I had seeded or failed.


    ¡°Now, why don¡¯t you try doing it with Ms. Milina?¡±


    ¡°With Milina?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Since she is currently studying medicine with you. Surely she can be of assistance?¡±


    ¡°I suppose so. Yes. I will ask her then. If she agrees, we can start testing it.¡±


    ¡°Good. Thank you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°But¡­ how will I know if it worked?¡±


    ¡°I think that we should buy a magic device from Isabelle¡¯s store.¡±


    As Ms. Isabelle sold magic tools, perhaps she had something that could determine if it was mixed correctly?


    ¡°That restorative¡­ Through it, we learned that nutrients are rted to magic energy. And there are many different kinds of magic tools, so there may be one that allows you to detect the nutrients which are affected by magic energy¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Yes, it is possible.¡±


    ¡°I will ask Isabelle. And if she has such a thing, we can buy it. Otherwise, we¡¯ll have to think of something else. But first, you must prepare it.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I understand.¡±


    If it is affected by magic energy, then it may be possible to detect it with magic tools. That was what Sebastian believed.


    Even if they didn¡¯t know much about nutrients, this world had plenty of things rted to magic energy.


    But as Sebastian said, I had tobine them first.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. I think we better taste them before you do anything¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right. The taste is important.¡±


    ¡°Hohoho. Indeed. After all, the taste might change afterbining them.¡±


    Ms. Helena¡¯s words reminded me of how important that was.


    In terms of nutrition, I doubted it would be much use like this¡­but Sebastian and Ms. Helena didn¡¯t know that.


    Besides, I was also curious about how it tasted.


    ¡­Though, I was pretty sure that it wouldn¡¯t taste good.

 Chapter 255

    Chapter 255


    We Tasted The Herbs


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s try it then.¡±


    ¡°As they are divided this time as well, the effect will not be strong¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, I didn¡¯t make many of them.¡±


    And so we separated the three types of herbs and the people in the kitchen tasted them.


    It wasn¡¯t just Ms. Helena and Sebastian, but the other cooks as well, as they were listening with great interest.


    The effect wasn¡¯t that important right now anyway, and it was only important to see if it tasted fine.


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s eat it then.¡±


    Said Sebastian, and everyone put the herbs in their mouths.


    First, it was the protein herb¡­ What was this¡­ There was a slight bitterness there, but also a sweetness¡­ It was abination of different vors, with nothing being stronger than the other.


    A strange taste, that was neither bad nor good.


    Next was the iron herb.


    Unlike the first one, this one had a clear taste.


    The taste of blood.


    But that made sense, since it contained iron


    Last was the vitamin herb.


    It had a citrus-like smell, so I put it in my mouth without hesitation.


    ¡°This-this is very¡­sour¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Like a fruit? No, something else¡­¡±


    ¡°I can¡¯t stop salivating¡­¡±


    To put it simply, it was like abination of a lemon and a pickled plum¡­


    There was no sweetness there at all. It was just sour.


    Ms. Helena seemed to detect something else in it, but I could not. Perhaps it had a lot of citric acid.


    I had once heard that citric acid was unrted to vitamins¡­ But since I made it with Weed Cultivation, it should be rich in all kinds of vitamins¡­right?


    I had expected it to be sour due to the smell, but¡­ I did not think it would also have the sourness of a pickled plum as well¡­


    But both lemons and plums were fruits¡­ Though, it was when you pickled plums in salt and let them out to dry that they became so sour. Well, that didn¡¯t matter right now.


    ¡°This is very strong. It¡¯s as if various types of sourness are shing inside of my mouth.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. It is not even one kind of sourness¡­ How very interesting.¡±


    Sebastian frowned and drank some water in order to wash away the taste.


    But Ms. Helena and the cooks were all tasting it slowly and with deep interest.


    They really were studious.


    Perhaps it was because they didn¡¯t have pickled plums here, and they didn¡¯t recognize the sourness.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Thank you for letting me taste something so unusual.¡±


    ¡°Uh, yes.¡±


    While it was just a sour leaf to me, it was interesting and educational for Ms. Helena and the other cooks.


    I didn¡¯t like food that was only sour, but if they could use it to make something delicious, then that would be very wee.


    ¡­But what kind of dish would that be?


    I couldn¡¯t think of anything right now.


    ¡°However, putting this in wine¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed. The sourness is so strong that it will ruin the taste of the wine.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Mr. Takumi. You must make adjustments then whenbining them¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha. I will do my best.¡±


    After all, I had never done it before.


    I didn¡¯t know what it would taste like, but as Ms. Helena said, I would have to think about how I can make the sourness more mild.


    Otherwise, it would ruin the taste of the wine.


    They didn¡¯t seem to have medicinal wine in this world. And so it wouldn¡¯t sell¡­even if people believed that the best medicine was bitter.


    ¡°Well, I will be going now. I will talk to Milina and study about how to mix the herbs. ¡­And I will bring you more of the restorative herbs tonight.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. You can leave the processing of them to us. Ah, that¡¯s right. About the wine that will use Ramogi. I mean to start soaking them soon. So you will be able to check it tomorrow.¡±


    ¡°I see. Then I will bring Leo so she can check it.¡±


    ¡°I have to discuss matters concerning dinner with Ms. Helena, and I will stay here.¡±


    ¡°Well, excuse me then.¡±


    And so I separated from Sebastian and left the kitchen alone.


    I now had more work to do, as I had to study with Milina and learn how tobine the medicine, but it was for the wine, so I would do my best.


    ¡°Ah, now that I think about it, I was going to go and visit Ms. Anne.¡±


    I remembered this just as I was walking through the mansion after leaving the kitchen.


    If she was still locked up in her room, then I had to go and check up on her¡­ Though, I doubted she would stay there forever¡­


    ¡°Ah, excuse me.¡±


    ¡°Yes, what is it?¡±


    As I was walking through the hallway, a maid wasing from the other direction, and so I called to her.


    It wasn¡¯t Ms. Gelda or Ms. Lyra.


    There were over ten maids, and so I couldn¡¯t remember all of their names¡­ Perhaps I should ask someer, and confirm them?


    ¡°Uh, is Ms. Anne still in her room?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I checked just now. Lady Anneliese seemed like she did not want toe out¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Thank you.¡±


    So Ms. Anne was still in her room.


    I thanked the maid and moved away.


    Then I recalled the location of the room that Ms. Lyra had told me, and I headed in that direction.


    ¡°Uh, it¡¯s close to my own room¡­ Here.¡±


    As the mansion was veryrge, and it was far from the kitchens, it took me a while to reach. But I was now in front of Ms. Anne¡¯s room.


    I stood in front of the door and raised my hand to knock. But then I hesitated.


    Now that I thought about it, this was the first time I had visited a woman¡¯s room¡­ I felt a little nervous.


    I wondered if I wouldn¡¯t look rude or strange¡­ But I had alreadye this far, and it would be a waste to turn back now.


    ¡°Fine¡­¡±


    I made up my mind and knocked on the door.


    Knock. Knock.


    The sound echoed down the hall and in the room.


    ¡°Yes, who is it?¡±


    ¡°¡­Takumi. Are you alright, Ms. Anne?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi!?¡±


    I was relieved to hear her sounding reasonably cheerful.


    That being said, she also seemed very surprised, and the sounds from inside suggested she was scampering around frantically.


    ¡­Perhaps I should not havee after all?

 Chapter 256

    Chapter 256


    Visiting Ms. Anne


    ¡°¡­Coe in.¡±


    ¡°Excuse me.¡±


    As I thought of such things, Ms. Anne seemed to have finished preparing to greet me.


    And so I opened the door and stepped into the room.


    ¡­I nearly tripped over myself due to being nervous, but I took a deep breath and pretended to be calm.


    ¡°Are you alright, Ms. Anne?¡±


    ¡°I did not expect to hear such wordsing from the person who rejected me.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. That¡¯s true.¡±


    While the positioning of the furniture was a little different, Anne¡¯s room was simr to my own room in size.


    And since they were in the same part of the mansion, they were probably rooms that were prepared for guests.


    Perhaps the guards that Mr. Ekenhart brought were also staying in simr rooms.


    But that wasn¡¯t important right now.


    Ms. Anne was sitting on her bed and looking at me with a suspicious expression.


    ¡°You seem quite well now? I was a little worried when I heard you had shut yourself up here.¡±


    ¡°There is nothing wrong with my body, I can assure you. I was just contemting on what transpired.¡±


    ¡°All this time, for a rejection?¡±


    ¡°Of course. Everyone I know would have jumped at the opportunity¡­ And I understood the way that they thought. But I have never met someone like you.¡±


    ¡°Well, I am not really like most people.¡±


    It was no surprise, since I had been born and raised in a different world.


    This whole system with nobles¡­ It was a mystery to me in many ways.


    In any case, while Ms. Anne might have been troubled over it, there was clearly no need to worry about her¡­


    That being said, she hadn¡¯t put much thought into her appearances, and her hair rolls drooping sadly and nearly touched the floor.


    ¡­I suppose it was because her hair was originally straight?


    ¡°And now you are seeing me like this¡­ Nothing good has happened to me sinceing to this mansion¡­¡±


    ¡°Hahaha! That¡¯s because you didn¡¯t prepare yourself ande out of the room.¡±


    ¡°You are one to talk. Since you are the reason I couldn¡¯te out¡­¡±


    ¡°Me? Hahaha! I thought it was because you were too scared of Leo.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s not it! Even though it may be a Silver Fenrir¡­ It is ridiculous to assume that I would cower in fear of a monster!¡±


    ¡°Is that so¡­ Well, perhaps I should call Leo right now? I think she would love to have someone to y with.¡±


    ¡°Th-that won¡¯t be necessary!¡±


    Ms. Anne said frantically.


    I had already known that I was the reason. That being said, it wasn¡¯t something I should apologize for¡­


    That being said, if Ms. Anne was going to insist that she wasn¡¯t afraid of Leo, then calling her might be a good idea¡­ It would be best for her to get used to being around Leo.


    Mr. Ekenhart had been afraid at first¡­ It made me all the more impressed that Ms. ire and Ms. Lyra had been fine from the beginning¡­ Of course, Ms. ire had been attacked by orcs when we helped her.


    ¡°Well, you can y with Leoter¡­ But I don¡¯t think that staying in your room all day will solve anything.¡±


    ¡°¡­And why is that? It has always been my way to be alone and think. Everything I suggested to my father came from me thinking alone.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ So that¡¯s why you thought of such things¡­ It makes sense.¡±


    ¡°What? What do you mean?¡±


    ¡°Nothing¡­ Even if you are smart¡­it¡¯s probably because you were alone and shut up that you thought of such things¡­¡±


    Using magic tools to infect wine and spread diseases.


    At the same time, buy all of the herbs in advance so you have a monopoly on the market. Raise profits by diluting the product¡­ If she thought of all of this by herself, then she probably wasn¡¯t stupid.


    But being alone all of the time meant you weren¡¯t connected to other people.


    You would stop thinking about how people will be affected, and only care about profit.


    Besides, in this world, they did not have tools to talk with people who were outside, or ways to gather information like you could with the inte.


    Even if she had servants to take care of her, she was still ultimately alone.


    Obviously, it wouldn¡¯t be the case with everyone, but that is what I felt when I looked at Ms. Anne.


    ¡°You are saying it is wrong to stay in your room? But don¡¯t you know that it is a good way to avoid taking in unnecessary information and helps you focus?¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true, but¡­ I think you should interact with more people as well. Or you will juste up with terrible ideas again. Only this time, it will be you that Mr. Ekenharts crushes, not your father.¡±


    ¡°¡­Interact with people¡­ That does not seem very important to me.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I suppose it wouldn¡¯t¡­¡±


    While I sounded self-righteous now, it also sounded a little familiar to me.


    I never made suggestions like Ms. Anne did, but there had been a time when I only thought about work and had few connections with other people. That¡¯s how feel now, aftering to this world and interacting with Ms. ire and the others.


    Through having connections with friends, lovers, parents, siblings, you are able to care about other people¡­ That¡¯s what I thought.


    But if you are always alone and never involved with others, and just think about yourself, then instead of caring about others, you mighte up with ideas to hurt people.


    When I thought back on what Ms. Anne had said before, while she did have contact with her father, she tended to talk about him as if they weren¡¯t rted¡­


    I don¡¯t know if I would go as far as to say she didn¡¯t consider him to be her father, but she clearly looked down on him.


    ¡°As long as you are reliable and have authority, people will obey you.¡±


    ¡°Hmm. Perhaps that is one way to look at it, but if you stay like that¡­ I guess you¡¯ll just have to get used to being rejected then?¡±

 Chapter 257

    Chapter 257


    I Said Something Rather Arrogant


    ¡°¡­But why¡­ Why don¡¯t you grovel at the feet of nobles!? It¡¯s because you¡¯re under the protection of a superior duke, isn¡¯t it!¡±


    ¡°¡­No. It doesn¡¯t matter that you¡¯re father is a count or below Mr. Ekenhart¡­ I would have refused even if your positions were reversed.¡±


    ¡°¡­Why¡­ But why¡­!?¡±


    Depending on how you looked at it, Ms. Anne¡¯s way of thinking was probably not wrong.


    If those in authority knew how to lead and were reliable, then people would follow the nobles.


    But as for me¡­I didn¡¯t want to go in that direction.


    Perhaps it was wishful thinking.


    But then again, I had been watching people like Ms. ire and Mr. Ekenhart, who did things differently.


    But Ms. Anne still did not understand.


    As she had shaken her head so much, her rolls were in disarray.


    ¡­Her hair was rather amusing to look at, so I wished that she would maintain them¡­ But nevermind that.


    ¡°It¡¯s important to ask people about things that you don¡¯t understand, you know?¡±


    There was a saying about how asking makes one appear foolish, but not asking actually makes you foolish.


    I didn¡¯t know if there was a simr saying in this world, but Anne was a proud noble who was used to thinking by herself, so she didn¡¯t seem to understand.


    ¡°Ask people¡­ But I asked you, and you gave me nothing.¡±


    ¡°Not just me. All kinds of other people. And you¡¯re not guaranteed to get a real answer¡­ But it may give you some kind of hint.¡±


    Especially people like Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian. They were likely to do that.


    And Ms. ire should be able to give advice, as a noblewoman.


    ¡°A noble, going around and talking to people¡­¡±


    ¡°Is that so hard? You know, when Ms. ire doesn¡¯t know something, she asks Sebastian as well as others.¡±


    ¡°Ms. ire is entric. Even when in a ce where other nobles are gathered, she alone is¡­¡±


    ¡°Really?


    entric¡­ I had not thought of her that way before.


    Well, she had gone to the forest without any guards that one time¡­ That was definitely odd for a noblewoman.


    ¡°Yes. ¡­But regardless, we nobles are born with power. What is the point if we do not use it?¡±


    ¡°Just because you¡¯re a noble, it doesn¡¯t mean that you need to exert your power¡­ I would rmend that instead of thinking by yourself, you talk to other people and listen to their opinions.¡±


    ¡°And I will get my answer?¡±


    ¡°Perhaps.¡±


    ¡°¡­You are so very irresponsible. It was you who brought it up.¡±


    In the end, it was Ms. Anne who had to find the answer.


    How should I know what she would learn by talking to others?


    ¡°Well, if there is one thing that I can say¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes?¡±


    ¡°People will follow you, even if you don¡¯t exert your power. And you would know that if you watched Ms. ire. If you continue to rely on your authority, then I will hardly be thest person who would refuse you.¡±


    ¡°¡­Ms. ire¡­¡±


    ¡°Or anyone in this mansion. Talk and make connections that are unrted to your position¡­ And think of ways to make people follow you.¡±


    With that said, I started to head for the door.


    I probably sounded rather arrogant, that was all that I could think of after talking to Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. Anne.


    I could not lead her to a perfect answer, but I hoped that she was able to find it herself.


    Also, I hoped she would stop thinking of ways to hurt people for profit.


    ¡­In fact, if she did do such a thing, Mr. Ekenhart and the country would crush her entire house until there was nothing left¡­ It was inevitable.


    ¡­But as someone who had now bed involved with her in a way, I hoped that she would change for the best.


    I had onlye to check up on her, but it ended up being more like a lecture¡­


    ¡°Very well. ¡­I shall consider your words carefully and act as I see fit.¡±


    ¡°Good. I may have sounded arrogant, and I can¡¯t say that I¡¯ve been good at doing it myself. But I wish you the best.¡±


    ¡°What is this now¡­¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. And I¡¯m d to see that you¡¯re better.¡±


    I said jokingly at the end.


    As Ms. Anne had been smiling the moment before I left the room, I believed that she would think about it.


    It would be nice to see her again, with her hair carefully rolled like drills that went down to her waist¡­ Such were my thoughts as I left Ms. Anne¡¯s room.


    ¡°Uhh, next is Milina¡­¡±


    It was almost time for my training with Mr. Ekenhart, but I had to talk to Milina first.


    I needed to tell her about the medicine.


    ¡°Oh, there you are.¡±


    Milina was in the drawing room and being instructed by Ms. Lyra.


    I had even searched the dining hall, but they were here¡­


    ¡°Milina?¡±


    ¡°Are you listening, Milina? When someone is leaving oring to the mansion, you have to greet them so that your voice is synced with everyone else.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    She was so focused on this lesson that she didn¡¯t notice me.


    And since she had her back to the door, she didn¡¯t see mee into the room¡­


    ¡°Now, we¡¯ll start with what to do when Lady ire is leaving.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Umm?¡±


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Master?¡±


    They were in the middle of practicing their greetings.


    So the servants really did have to practice in order to say it together¡­


    After calling to them from behind, the two finally noticed me.


    ¡­Maybe I shouldn¡¯t have disturbed them?


    ¡°Uhh, do you have a minute¡­?¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course. What is it?¡±


    ¡°What is it, master?¡±


    ¡°Well, there is just something that I need to tell Milina.¡±


    ¡°Me?¡±


    Milina looked puzzled at this.


    I now felt a little bad about adding more work to her schedule when she was busy with her servant duties¡­

 Chapter 258

    Chapter 258


    I Asked Milina To Help With The Medicine


    ¡°I made some new herbs.¡±


    ¡°New herbs!? That¡¯s amazing, master!¡±


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s not me, but the Gift that is impressive. Anyway¡­I have to concoct a herbal medicine.¡±


    ¡°Concoct? But I heard that it was dangerous for amateurs to do it¡­¡±


    Milina¡¯s eyes sparkled when she heard about the new herbs, but her face darkened when she heard about what would be done next.


    While she seemed interested, the books had said that it was not something that you should do light-heartedly, when you did not have enough knowledge.


    And she was recalling that.


    In any case, Ms. Lyra¡¯s eyes were shining as she stood next to Milina.


    Was it really that impressive to make new herbs?


    ¡°I don¡¯t think it will be dangerous. What we are going to concoct won¡¯t even turn into poison if we fail.¡±


    ¡°Is that so?¡±


    ¡°Well, perhaps it could be dangerous if you overdosed¡­ But these aren¡¯t the kind of herbs that will do your body harm just because you mixed them wrong.¡±


    These were just herbs that contained nutrients.


    As we would be careful to not take too much, or makerge quantities, it should be fine.


    That is, if Weed Cultivation worked in the way that I assumed it did.


    ¡°I see. In that case, you can finally concoct something!¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s right. And so I want you to help me.¡±


    ¡°Are you¡­sure?¡±


    ¡°Because you¡¯re very passionate about your studies. In fact, there are probably things that you can teach me¡­¡±


    ¡°Surely not¡­¡±


    As she did not expect me to ask her, Milina hesitated a little.


    However, I knew that even while I was in Range vige, she had been studying with the book that we borrowed from Sebastian.


    And now she had passed the part that I had been going over with her, so she knew things that I didn¡¯t.


    ¡­It made me a bit of a failure as a teacher, but I would do my best.


    After all, I didn¡¯t have much time with everything that had been happening¡­ I guess that is just an excuse.


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. This shouldn¡¯t be anythingplicated, so you can do it too.¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well. If you want me to do it, then I will do my best!¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. You can rx. We will just follow the book, and it won¡¯t matter if we fail.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ So, when will we begin?¡±


    ¡°Uhhh¡­ Tomorrow, or the day after that? Well, I¡¯ll tell you when I decide.¡±


    ¡°I understand! I will read the book and study in the meantime.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    Now that Milina was feeling positive about it, she was enthusiastic to study.


    I suppose I would have to study again as well, so I don¡¯t fall further behind.


    I didn¡¯t want to have to rely on her for everything.


    ¡°Well, you can go back to your servant training now.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°I will instruct her very thoroughly.¡±


    Now that I had done what I came to do, I left the drawing room.


    As I was leaving, I heard Milina¡¯s loud voice saying, ¡®Have a good day!¡¯ so she was probably practicing again.


    ¡­Now that I thought about it, I had wanted to join them before.


    I could not do it today, as I had training with Mr. Ekenhart¡­but next time I had some free time, I would try to participate.


    There was no actual need for me to do it, but I was just a little curious.


    The job of servants is no game to amuse yourself with¡­ I would have to be careful so that no one said that to me¡­


    ¡°Ah, there you are, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°You¡¯rete, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry. I was talking with Ms. Helena¡­¡±


    When I went out to the back garden, Mr. Ekenhart, Tilura, Leo and Sherry were all waiting.


    As Mr. Ekenhart did not seem scared anymore, ying with Leo and Tilura in the morning seemed to have worked.


    Though, Mr. Ekenhart did look a little tired¡­


    ¡°Helena? What happened?¡±


    ¡°It was about the wine¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ I suppose it¡¯s a long story.¡±


    ¡°Yes, it is.¡±


    ¡°Then I¡¯ll ask Sebastian about itter. But right now, let¡¯s train.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    While Mr. Ekenhart seemed to be interested when he heard about the wine, he decided that he would ask Sebastian about it some other time.


    Because it was time for training.


    ¡°Hmmm. I see that your movements are changing again.¡±


    ¡°Really?¡±


    ¡°Not a very big change. So perhaps you do not notice it yourself.¡±


    ¡°What about me, father?¡±


    ¡°Tilura¡­your sword is as honest as ever¡­ Too honest¡­ But you have plenty of time. Right now, you should focus on raising your skill.¡±


    ¡°I understand!¡±


    After the basic training, I fought lightly with Mr. Ekenhart.


    And then he made observations about my movement.


    I really didn¡¯t feel like I had changed at all.


    It was obvious from Tilura¡¯s personality that she was honest.


    For better or worse, that showed in her sword¡­ But I wasn¡¯t really at a ce to bementing on others.


    Now that I think about it, we had started learning at the same time, so it was kind of strange that I was the one that was changing¡­


    ¡­I wouldn¡¯t think too much about that.


    ¡°It must be due to the experience of fighting in that store. You avoidrge movements and are more aware of your surroundings.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ That might be true.¡±


    ¡°Between narrow indoor areas and being in an open garden like this ce, it¡¯s only natural that you will fight differently.¡±


    I was within a store when the men attacked me, and so my movements were severely limited.


    There were too many shelves and objects in the way¡­ Though, that also helped me.


    And Mr. Ekenhart thought that it had affected my fighting style.


    The way to fight in open spaces and the way to fight in narrow spaces, huh¡­


    ¡°Since we are in an open space, you could say that you picked up a bad habit.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°I won¡¯t say that it¡¯s good to move your body so boldly, but if you can¡¯t focus too much on small movements either. In the end, even when you have the freedom to swing your sword, your actions will be limited.¡±


    If you care about your surroundings too much, you will not be able to attack your opponent from different angles, and your attacks will be predictable¡­ That¡¯s probably what he means.


    And if you just repeat the same attacks, then the other person will be able to read you and deal with them.


    I¡¯m sure that once you¡¯re a master like Mr. Ekenhart, you would still be able to attack in a way that would overwhelm your opponent, but I couldn¡¯t do that yet.


    But leaving that side, he had taught me that being able to use diverse attacks so that the enemy could not predict your moves was the most basic thing¡­

 Chapter 259

    Chapter 259


    I Trained To Fix My Bad Habits


    ¡°While the experience of real fighting is not a waste, it¡¯s not good that you¡¯ve developed this habit¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°No, good Leo¡­ I could not have predicted that this would happen!¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Leo, Mr. Ekenhart didn¡¯t expect this to happen. Well, I think it¡¯s just that I¡¯m overthinking it.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Leo barked as if to say that it was Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s fault, because he was the one who made me fight.


    Mr. Ekenhart was weak when it came to being med, and he cowered a little towards Leo.


    While Mr. Ekenhart was the one who set it up, there was no way he could have known that it would result in this.


    You never knew how a person would grow.


    After exining this, Leo finally nodded with satisfaction.


    ¡­It was all in the past now, and so we shouldn¡¯t put any more me on him, Leo.


    ¡°¡­There is still some time before dinner. So I¡¯m going to go extra hard so we can beat that habit out of you.¡±


    ¡°Please do!¡±


    ¡°Me too!¡±


    ¡°¡­But you don¡¯t have any bad habits, Tilura.¡±


    After that, I went through Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s grueling training until it was dinner time.


    Until I could barely stand¡­ No, I wouldn¡¯t go that far, but it was still pretty close to it.


    How many times did Mr. Ekenhard whack me with his wooden sword¡­


    Tilura and I took some recovery herbs so that we could walk properly after we finished.


    ¡°The habit hasn¡¯t left youpletely¡­ There is still room for improvement.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s thanks to you, Mr. Ekenhart. I am grateful.¡±


    ¡°Bah. I just don¡¯t want you to be too restrained.¡±


    While it was little by little, I was improving somewhat. So I suppose I will get a passing grade for now?


    Had the bad habits been any worse, then it might have taken even more severe training to correct it. So it was a good thing that it was pointed out early.


    Even though the training had been harsh.


    It was quite impressive that Tilura had been able to keep up with it.


    She really was motivated.


    Was it her youth¡­ Well, I was still young too¡­


    ¡°Ah, I see that Anneliese has finally left her room.¡±


    ¡°I could not stay there forever.¡±


    After our training was finished, we all went to the dining hall for dinner. Ms. Anneliese and Ms. ire were already sitting at the table.


    Apparently, she finally felt likeing out of her room.


    I was d¡­because I didn¡¯t want to have been the cause of ady locking herself up in her room¡­


    ¡°Father. It seems that she was persuaded by Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi? You talked to Anne?¡±


    ¡°Uh, yes. Before I started training¡­¡±


    ¡°He visited me in my room.¡±


    So, Ms. Anne had wasted no time in telling Ms. ire that I had visited her room.


    Ms. ire¡¯s seemed to be ring¡­or maybe it was just me.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. What did you say? I did not expect Anneliese to leave her room so willingly¡­ Or did you threaten her with Leo?¡±


    ¡°¡­I wouldn¡¯t do such a thing. I just advised her to talk to others, instead of thinking about everything by herself.¡±


    ¡°I see, I see. Indeed, that is actually something that I should be doing¡­ But it looks like you beat me to it, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi is too kind. He will even try tofort people that he has rejected¡­ That is all there is to it. Indeed, indeed¡­¡±


    ¡°What is it, ire? You seem a little angry?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Kyau?¡±


    ¡°¡­It¡¯s nothing.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was quite happy that I had talked to Anneliese and made here out of her room.


    But since he was the one who had been put in charge of her re-education, perhaps I didn¡¯t need to do anything in the first ce¡­


    In any case, Ms. ire was not too pleased by the fact that I had paid Ms. Anne a private visit¡­


    She had been muttering quietly to herself, and Mr. Ekenhart, Leo and Sherry looked puzzled. But Ms. ire just shook her head and said that it was nothing.


    Well, if that¡¯s what she says, then it must be the case¡­


    Hmm¡­ It was hard to understand women¡­


    ¡°That¡¯s right, Mr. Takumi. You said something about discussing wine with Helena?¡±


    ¡°Yes. There was much to discuss. Sebastian was with us as well.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Would you like to exin it to me, Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°Certainly¡­¡±


    As we ate dinner, Sebastian exined to him what we had discussed with Ms. Helena.


    Mr. Ekenhart clearly understood how much Sebastian enjoyed exining things to people.


    And so everyone listened to Sebastian¡¯s enthusiastic ramblings.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ So the wine and Ramogi will bebined tomorrow¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. First, Leo will inspect it, and if it is fine, then we will be able to taste it.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ As that grape juice was rather good, I look forward to drinking it as a wine.¡±


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right. Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Sorry, but could you sniff the wine that Ms. Helena makes tomorrow? We want to know if it is still infected or not.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°What, Mr. Takumi. You didn¡¯t tell Leo about it yet?¡±


    ¡°Hahaha¡­ I was a little preupied, I suppose¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian¡¯s conversation reminded me of it, and so I asked Leo on the spot.


    Mr. Ekenhart seemed to find it amusing that I hadn¡¯t asked her earlier, but I had been busy talking with Ms. Anne, and then Milina after that.


    But Leo answered with a nod, so there was nothing to worry about.


    ¡°Still¡­ She can tell what has been affected by that sphere¡­ I thought it would be impossible without the right tools¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. Leo¡¯s nose is special.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Silver Fenrirs¡­are impressive¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Eee!¡±


    ¡°Anne, are you still scared of good Leo? Don¡¯t worry, she won¡¯t attack anyone without reason.¡±


    ¡°Still, I cannot help it!¡±

 Chapter 260

    Chapter 260


    Ms. Anne Was Not In Favor of Drastic Treatment


    ¡°Hahaha! Perhaps Anneliese should undergo the same drastic treatment in order to be familiar with Leo?¡±


    ¡°Drastic treatment?¡±


    Ms. Anne had been looking at Leo, and was deeply impressed by her ability to sniff out the wine.


    Leo nodded proudly at this, and then she tilted her head at Ms. Anne and barked once.


    Upon hearing this, Mr. Anne raised her voice in rm. She even tried to move her chair away from Leo.


    But like Ms. ire said, Leo would never hurt anyone. But she was still afraid¡­ Couldn¡¯t she see how cute Leo was¡­


    Mr. Ekenhart then rmended she undergo the same treatment that he had. And Ms. Anne seemed interested in knowing what it was.


    However¡­I wasn¡¯t sure about that¡­ It had worked with Ms. Gelda, but Ms. Anne seemed even more frightened of Leo¡­


    ¡°Yes, this drastic treatment. You will ride on Leo as she runs. This way, you will see just how safe Leo really is.¡±


    ¡°Ride¡­on Leo?¡±


    ¡°Yes, Anne. By doing this, you will be able to see for yourself that Leo would not harm any humans.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Ms. ire added to Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s exnation.


    But Ms. Anne seemed a little put off now¡­ It was no wonder.


    Leo was the object of her fear. The idea of riding on Leo as she ran would only increase that fear.


    Still, it was through this treatment that Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. Gelda had quickly gotten used to her¡­


    And Leo really enjoyed carrying people. Even now, she was nodding and wagging her tail.


    ¡°Well, perhaps it is not necessary. Surely interactions with Leo will be enough¡­eventually?¡±


    ¡°That is true, but¡­ Don¡¯t you feel bad for her, Mr. Takumi? To have someone be so afraid of her¡­¡±


    ¡°That is true¡­ But it¡¯s up to Ms. Anne¡­¡±


    ¡°I-I-I-I¡­that¡¯s¡­ I think I will pass on this one¡­¡±


    ¡°Really? But it is the fastest way to do it¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, you seemed to really enjoy yourself, father. I can still hear your screams.¡±


    ¡°You are talking about the return trip from Ractos. That was different¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Indeed, I agreed with Ms. ire that it would not be nice to have Leo be feared like this¡­ She wouldn¡¯t like it.


    I wanted everyone to know that Leo was adorable, and not some terrible monster¡­ However, Ms. Anne had no intention of undergoing the drastic treatment.


    ¡°It is not good to force things. Yes, Leo will be extra careful from now on so that she doesn¡¯t scare Ms. Anne. Won¡¯t you, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ If you insist, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°How unfortunate.¡±


    ¡°¡­I don¡¯t know if it will be sessful¡­ But I will do my best so I don¡¯t have to resort to such treatments¡­¡±


    ¡°Hahaha! Well, just take your time with Leo. It should not be difficult on your part. And you will soon understand that Leo is really cute.¡±


    ¡°Cute¡­ This wolf¡­ A Silver Fenrir¡­? You really are a strange man, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    I didn¡¯t think it was a good idea to force things.


    With Ms. Gelda, while she was scared, she was still interested in Leo. And it hadn¡¯t beenplete fear like it was with Ms. Anne.


    And so I decided against using the drastic treatment this time.


    Though, Ms. ire and Mr. Ekenhart looked rather disappointed¡­


    ¡°It¡¯s odd then that you are fine with Sherry.¡±


    ¡°Perhaps it¡¯s because Sherry is still small?¡±


    ¡°¡­What is this adorable creature? When did you decide to keep it?¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    Ms. ire picked up the puzzled Sherry and brought her closer to Ms. Anne.


    It seemed that Ms. Anne did not know about Sherry, and so she patted her on the head adoringly.


    ¡°This one¡­Sherry. She is my familiar and a fenrir.¡±


    ¡°A fen¡­rir¡­ Are you cer¡­tain?¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Mmm.¡±


    And so Ms. ire told her that Sherry was a fenrir.


    Upon hearing this, Ms. Anne froze and looked at Sherry in disbelief.


    Sweat was dripping from her temples. Was she alright?


    After Ms. Anne managed to stutter the words, Sherry, Leo and Mr. Ekenhart nodded as if to answer her.


    ¡°But fenrirs are ferocious monsters! Perhaps they are not as bad as Silver Fenrirs, but they are still feared! Why would you have that as a familiar¡­!¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s thanks to good Leo. She is the one who found Sherry when she was wounded in the forest. And she seemed to take to me on the way back to the mansion¡­and then became my familiar.¡±


    ¡°It should not be that easy to make a fenrir your familiar¡­ I do not believe it¡­¡±


    ¡°Kyau?¡±


    Saving Sherry was probably a big part of it, but it was also because Leo was there.


    If something happened, there was someone much more powerful nearby¡­ Perhaps she had no choice but to submit.


    Well, as for Sherry, now that Ms. Anne had screamed and moved away, she was looking at her hand as if to say, ¡®You¡¯re not going to pet me anymore?¡¯ She really did act like a dog.


    In the end, it probably had less to do with being a fenrir or Leo, and more to do with Sherry being a pup.


    ¡°Not only a Silver Fenrir, but a fenrir as well¡­ How foolish father was to go against this house¡­¡±


    ¡°But you were the one who suggested it¡­!¡±


    Ms. Anne had been muttering to herself during tea, and Ms. ire had to interject.


    I watched them with amusement for some time as I rxed. And then we all dispersed.


    As Ms. ire would keep an eye on Ms. Anne now, she should be fine.


    Sherry was also with them, and seemed to have taken a liking to Ms. Anne after being petted.


    ¡°What are you going to do now, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m going to make the herbs to give to Ms. Helena, and then practice my swings.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll swing too!¡±


    ¡°I see. It¡¯s important to be consistent. I know, I¡¯ll join you two. I don¡¯t want to get rusty.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart saw me stand up, and so he asked me what I was going to do.


    My ns were to do my daily swings and make some restorative herbs.


    Tilura would practice her swings too.


    And apparently, Mr. Ekenhart and Leo wanted to join us.

 Chapter 261

    Chapter 261


    My Nightly Swings Were Updated


    ¡°Well, Ms. ire. I¡¯ll leave the rest to you.¡±


    ¡°I will make sure that Anne does not do anything strange.¡±


    ¡°Haha. Well, I doubt anything will happen.¡±


    And so we left Ms. Anne to Ms. ire¡¯s care and we went out into the back garden.


    I would be a little nervous if Mr. Ekenhart was going to watch us. But it was also a good thing if he could correct me if I was doing something wrong, so I was grateful.


    Judging by what I had seen during training, he definitely was not rusty. I suppose he was just using it as an excuse to join us.


    ¡°Oh, could I make the herbs first?¡±


    ¡°Mmm. Yes, you should deal with those chores before starting. Then you will be able to focus.¡±


    ¡°I want to watch as you use Weed Cultivation, Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    In the garden, I decided to make the restorative herbs for Ms. Helena first.


    I didn¡¯t think of it as a chore, like Mr. Ekenhart, but it would help me concentrate if I didn¡¯t have to worry about itter.


    Tilura held onto Leo, who was sitting down, and the two of them watched me.


    ¡­Well, she was probably more interested in touching Leo¡¯s soft fur than watching Weed Cultivation.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ It really is a strange sight. Herbs grow from the ground as if it is nothing.¡±


    ¡°Well, it feels strange, even though I¡¯m the one using it.¡±


    While I had gotten used to Weed Cultivation, the sight of seeing nts grow from the ground where I ced my hand was still quite odd.


    Because I still didn¡¯t know much about its power and how it worked¡­ Though, it would probably still be strange even if I did know¡­


    ¡°Now, I¡¯m going to go and deliver these to Ms. Helena.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. Then Tilura and I will start training.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    And so I took the herbs and left the back garden.


    Leo wanted toe with me, but would she be allowed in the kitchen?


    ¡°Excuse me. Is Ms. Helena here?¡±


    ¡°Yes, yes, Mr. Takumi. I¡¯m over here.¡±


    ¡°Ah, Ms. Helena. I brought the herbs like you asked.¡±


    ¡°And so soon, Mr. Takumi. I didn¡¯t expect you to¡­¡±


    ¡°You seemed to be busy, so I thought I better bring them as soon as possible¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Oh, is good Leo with you?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    As I was trying to see if Ms. Helena was in the kitchen, she noticed me first.


    Thankfully, it seemed like she didn¡¯t have her hands full this time.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry for bringing Leo to a ce with food¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, it¡¯s alright. Leo is a Silver Fenrir. No one in the mansion will treat her as a nuisance.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff, wuff.¡±


    ¡°Leo, you already ate dinner. Just because you smell food, it doesn¡¯t mean you¡¯re going to get a treat, alright?¡±


    ¡°Kuun¡­¡±


    ¡°Ahaha. I suppose dinner was not enough then. Would you like an extra serving of sausages?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°No, I don¡¯t want it to be a habit¡­ Sorry, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuffu¡­¡±


    Even though it was a kitchen, Leo was apparently special enough to be allowed inside. But the kitchen was filled with smells.


    I didn¡¯t want Leo to work up an appetite every time she smelled food¡­ And so I would avoid bringing her here in the future.


    While Leo¡¯s tail drooped in disappointment, I would try to have plenty of food prepared for her for tomorrow¡¯s breakfast.


    ¡­I guess I spoiled her as well.


    ¡°In any case, Ms. Helena. Here are the restorative herbs.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I see. I will have them processed and ready to mix with the wine by tomorrow.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Leo, let¡¯s go.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I said goodbye to Ms. Helena and the other cooks in the kitchen, and then left with Leo.


    Depending on how the Ramogi wine turned out tomorrow, she would try using the restorative herbs. That seemed to be the n.


    Ms. Helena was very enthusiastic, but we hadn¡¯t even started with mixing the medicine yet¡­ I would have to do my best with Milina.


    ¡°I¡¯m back.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Ha¡­hah¡­ Leo¡­Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°Oh, you¡¯re back.¡±


    ¡°¡­You seem very tired, Tilura. What happened?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    When I returned to the garden, Tilura greeted us with a smile. But she was visibly out of breath as well.


    She was used to doing the sword swings now, so while it might cause her to sweat, surely she should not be this tired?


    Even Leo was looking at her with a puzzled expression.


    ¡°Isn¡¯t it obvious? As she has be ustomed to her swings, I made her do something different.¡±


    ¡°Different? But it¡¯s sote¡­¡±


    ¡°This training is something you do alone, so it¡¯s quite simr to your regr swings. In fact, it will look mostly the same to an onlooker.¡±


    ¡°It looks the same? What kind of training is it?¡±


    So, Mr. Ekenhart had taught Tilura something new.


    As I trained with her, I was very curious.


    ¡°The swings are part of the training that builds your muscles. This new training does the same, but for your mind as well.¡±


    ¡°My mind? How do you do it?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s very simple. You just do your regr sword swings, only this time you pretend like you¡¯re swinging at an opponent.¡±


    ¡°So¡­it¡¯s like a kind of mental training?¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s right. You imagine how they will move and dodge etcetera, and swing so that you can hit them.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    So it was like shadow boxing.


    You would imagine their movements and try to defeat them¡­ That did seem more tiring than normal swings.


    Tilura must have be tired because she was desperately swinging.


    ¡°By swinging more than usual, both you and Tilura have learned to swing like it is second nature. And by thinking of enemies, you will learn how to fight them as well.¡±


    ¡°I see. Then I suppose I¡¯ll do it too¡­¡±


    ¡°Mmmm. You should do it. It¡¯s something that I should also do more often.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m going to keep doing it too!¡±


    Satisfied with Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s exnation, I started the mental training at once.


    Uhh, imaginary enemy¡­ Since there was plenty of space in the garden, I suppose I¡¯ll think about the orcs that attacked us in Range vige.

 Chapter 262

    Chapter 262


    I Managed To Do The Mental Exercise


    ¡°Fu! Ha!¡±


    ¡°Hmph! Hya!¡±


    ¡°Hah! Hah!¡±


    In the garden, three people fought against imaginary enemies.


    While an onlooker might think we were just practicing our swings, we were each fighting against something.


    However, Mr. Ekenhart¡­ His movements were so big¡­and fast.


    It was clear that when he fought against me or Tilura, he was holding back quite a lot.


    And so as Leo sat nearby and watched us, we continued this mental training.


    ¡°Hah¡­phew¡­hah¡­ This is a lot more tiring than my daily swings¡­ And I thought the swings were tiring¡­¡±


    ¡°Sometimes you move your entire body. So it can be more tiring than just swinging.¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­hah¡­¡±


    After training for about an hour, we finally stopped.


    I was just as tired as Tilura had been when I returned from the kitchen, and I had to catch my breath while talking to Mr. Ekenhart.


    As for Tilura, she too was out of breath.


    But Mr. Ekenhart seemed perfectly fine¡­ Was this the difference brought by experience and energy¡­?


    ¡°While you did well enough, Mr. Takumi, you still have a ways to go, Tilura. I don¡¯t think you were properly imagining an enemy?¡±


    ¡°¡­Ha¡­Ha¡­ It is hard.¡±


    ¡°Phew¡­ Hah¡­ So, I was fine?¡±


    ¡°Mmm. You were far from perfect, but it seemed like you were able to really imagine your enemy. It was almost as if I could see them myself.¡±


    ¡°You could¡­¡±


    ¡°When I look at your movements, I can start to see the movements of your enemy as well. It is proof that you are doing it properly.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    Apparently, when you were as skilled as someone like Mr. Ekenhart, you could see such things.


    He had been watching us, even as he trained himself¡­ I had no idea how long it would take me to be able to do that.


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Hmm? What is it, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Could you see it too, Leo? The shadows of my enemies¡­?¡±


    ¡°What¡­ Well, she is a Silver Fenrir¡­¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s amazing, Leo!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Well, I¡¯m going to ask you some questions then. What kind of enemy was I imagining?¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Orcs¡­ That¡¯s right.¡±


    ¡°¡­So you were imagining orcs, Mr. Takumi. Even I didn¡¯t know that¡­¡±


    As Leo had been barking loudly, I asked what was the matter, and she said that she could see the enemies as well.


    Mr. Ekenhart and Tilura believed it, because she was a Silver Fenrir, but I was not persuaded so easily.


    While I had seen disys of Leo¡¯s strength, I still didn¡¯t think she had changed all that much since she was a Maltese.


    No, I suppose she had changed a lot in terms of size¡­


    In any case, when I asked Leo about what kind of enemy she had imagined, she was able to clearly answer that it was an orc.


    Even Mr Ekenhart hadn¡¯t been able to see that much.


    ¡­What if Leo was even more of a master than Mr. Ekenhart?


    Perhaps it was no surprise, because she was a Silver Fenrir. But I didn¡¯t really think of such things.


    ¡°So you were imagining an orc¡­ And you fought orcs at Range vige. Were you remembering that time?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I fought against a number of orcs. And so I recalled the way they moved.¡±


    ¡°I see. That¡¯s why¡­ That is the difference between you and Tilura.¡±


    ¡°It is?¡±


    ¡°Mmm. Tilura hasn¡¯t left this mansion very often. She only goes to town on asion. However, she has never fought humans or monsters.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart began to exin the differences between Tilura and I.


    Indeed, she had never been in a real battle.


    While we had started training at the same time, she was still a child, so of course, she would not have that experience.


    ¡°Obviously, she has been in practice battles against you, Leo and I¡­ But those are not serious battles.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true.¡±


    While Tilura and I rarely faced off, we did do it asionally.


    But neither of us were serious about it.


    After all, we had been told that at our skill level, we ran the risk of getting injured if we fought too earnestly.


    Leo never attacked us, and Mr. Ekenhart always held back.


    In other words, she had never been in anything like a real fight.


    ¡°On the other hand, you have fought orcs in Range vige, Mr. Takumi. And then you fought those men at the store. You know what it¡¯s like to be in danger.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s right.¡±


    Especially in Range vige against the orcs.


    While Leo had saved me in the nick of time, it was clear that I would have died without her help.


    In fact, I had epted my fate in some way.


    ¡°Obviously, fighting under such circumstances is drastically different. And so it is harder for Tilura to imagine an enemy.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, it was hard¡­ But I did my best to imagine you, father!¡±


    ¡°But you imagine me while I am holding back during practice, don¡¯t you? That is not the same thing as imagining someone who is trying to kill you. Well, I am not saying that you are doing it wrong either. Hahaha!¡±


    While Tilura insisted that she was doing her best, Mr. Ekenhartughed and patted her on the head.


    It may not be enough, but she wasn¡¯t bad either. She just needed to continue training¡­ I think.


    ¡°It cannot be helped now, since you haven¡¯t experienced a real fight. And that is fine. After all, there is plenty that you can gain from just swinging.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ I understand. I will do my best.¡±


    ¡°Good, good.¡±


    Tilura was satisfied after hearing this.


    While it made her sad, she would probably train hard after today, and slowly raise her skill level.


    As she was a child, she had more potential to grow than I did¡­ And she was also Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s daughter.


    I would have to train hard so I didn¡¯t fall behind¡­

 Chapter 263

    Chapter 263


    I Gave Them Sleeping Herbs


    ¡°That¡¯s enough then. Don¡¯t forget to wash up before going to bed.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Thank you!¡±


    ¡°Thank you. And good night!¡±


    I thanked Mr. Ekenhart after training.


    But before returning to the mansion, I suddenly remembered something.


    ¡°Ah, Mr. Ekenhart. Tilura. Please wait one moment.¡±


    ¡°What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°What¡¯s the matter?¡±


    ¡°Tilura, since you trained so hard today¡­ And for you too, Mr. Ekenhart.¡±


    They turned around after I called out to them. And then I gave them some recovery herbs for their muscles, as well as some herbs for fatigue.


    ¡°Oh, the one that rids your body of tiredness. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°Now I won¡¯t be tired tomorrow!¡±


    ¡°¡­Are you that exhausted, Mr. Ekenhart?¡±


    During the training before dinner, as well as the mental exercise, he had not looked out of breath at all.


    I hadn¡¯t realized that he was tired¡­


    ¡°Well, a little. Especially after the matter with ire¡­ And riding on Leo today¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. You¡¯re tired after just riding on Leo?¡±


    ¡°Grr¡­ You may say that. But Tilura and Sherry kept making her run faster¡­while I was still on¡­¡±


    During the day, I had suggested that Mr. Ekenhart y with Leo and Tilura.


    Apparently, things had gotten a little out of hand, and that was why he was so tired¡­


    Well, I¡¯m sure being scared of Leo made things worse.


    And then there was the whole matter with Ms. ire, that meant he didn¡¯t get much sleep.


    ¡°In that case¡­you should take this too.¡±


    ¡°¡­What is that?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s a herb that will help you sleep better. Not only that, but you should feel very refreshed when you wake up tomorrow.¡±


    ¡°Oh, that sounds good!¡±


    I hadn¡¯t given anyone these herbs since the time we went to the forest.


    There wasn¡¯t anyone here who had trouble sleeping, and normal sleep was enough to rid yourself of tiredness.


    Still, ifbined with other herbs, he should be able to wake up the next morning feelings extra refreshed.


    ¡­But as it was probably simr to sleeping pills, it would be best to not use them too often.


    ¡°Now, I will return to my room.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Mr. Takumi. Good night.¡±


    ¡°Good night!¡±


    I gave him just one of the sleeping herbs and then returned to my room.


    As I also felt more tired than usual, I ate the recovery herb.


    While I could make them whenever I wanted, and it was greatly convenient, I didn¡¯t want to rely on them entirely, so I just took the bare minimum.


    I would use them when I could, but that was all¡­ That was how I thought recently.


    That being said, I would continue to research Weed Cultivation and help people with the herbs.


    With medicine, you have to follow instructions and use them properly¡­


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°You must be tired too, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    After returning to my room, Leo suddenly became yful.


    I suppose she had been with Mr. Ekenhart and Tilura for most of the day, and so she wanted me to pay her some attention.


    ¡°That being said, we have to bathe first¡­ I sweated quite a lot.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Haha. Fine then. I¡¯ll go alone.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    As soon as she heard the word ¡®bathe,¡¯ Leo moved away and became quiet.


    While things had gotten a little better, she still disliked bathing.


    I would have to bathe her again eventually, but she wasn¡¯t too dirty right now, and so I would go alone.


    ¡°I¡¯m back, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    After washing off the sweat and warming myself, I returned to my room.


    Then I petted Leo and sat on the bed.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff¡­ Hah-hah-hah!¡±


    ¡°Hey, hey. Calm down. I¡¯m not going anywhere.¡±


    Leo started licking my face as if she wanted attention.


    Iughed and petted her thoroughly on the head.


    Once I had petted her enough, I got into bed in order to sleep.


    A lot has happened today, and I will do my best tomorrow.


    There was the medicine I had to concoct with Milina, and the wine.


    ¡ª


    The next day, Tilura and Sherry visited in order to wake us up. And I talked with her while washing up.


    I am now used to shaving my beard¡­ Which is to say, I could do it without cutting myself¡­much.


    Though, I was still on my guard.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, Leo. Let¡¯s go and eat breakfast!¡±


    ¡°Haha. You sure are energetic, Tilura. Alright, let¡¯s go, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°And you too, Sherry. I haven¡¯t forgotten about you.¡±


    After seeing that we were ready, Tilura moved excitedly towards the dining hall.


    Don¡¯t forget about me! Sherry seemed to say as she rode on top of Leo¡¯s head. And so I petted her as we walked.


    Now that I thought about it, what happened yesterday, after Ms. Anne realized that Sherry was a fenrir?


    Was she fine with Sherry?


    Well, since Ms. ire stayed with her, I doubt there had been any problems.


    ¡°Good morning everyone.¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Good morning.¡±


    ¡°Ah, Mr. Takumi. Morning.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    When I entered the dining hall, Ms. ire and Ms. Anne were already waiting at the table.


    I greeted all of them and realized that something was different.


    ¡­Mr. Ekenhart?


    He was usually not present during breakfast, but he was now sitting at the table without a hint of drowsiness.


    I had never seen him like this at breakfast before.


    Leo must have thought the same thing, as she was looking at him with her head tilted in a puzzled expression.

 Chapter 266

    Chapter 266


    We Concocted the Medicine


    ¡°This requires a lot of strength¡­¡±


    ¡°It does. You have to crush the herbs quite thoroughly.¡±


    It seemed that Milina was struggling a little with the work of grinding the herbs into powder.


    Aside from one of the herbs, the others were leaves, and so we had to crush them ourselves¡­which was more tiring than expected.


    But while Milina had thin arms, I had been swinging a sword for some time now, and so it wasn¡¯t too hard.


    I suppose it was just something that she would have to get used to.


    ¡°Ah, it¡¯s starting to turn into a paste.


    ¡°Hmm. ording to the book, it says in this state, to continue mixing them until dry¡­ Is this the state it¡¯s supposed to be in?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know¡­¡±


    As the moisture remained from the leaves, it would not turnpletely into powder. Currently, both Milina and I had bowls of paste.


    While the herbs themselves were mixed, the book said we had to keep mixing it until it turned into powder.


    ¡­That would take quite a long time¡­


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°What is it, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Taste it? But the book says it has to be dried¡­¡±


    Leo hade to the drawing room with me, and she was standing behind me and looking into the bowl.


    She could have stayed outside and yed with Tilura, but Leo seemed to be interested in medicine.


    And so she had been watching us all this time.


    As for what Leo wanted me to do¡­ Well, she could tell a lot by just smelling something, so perhaps I should try it.


    ¡°All right, Milina. Why don¡¯t we try tasting it?¡±


    ¡°Are you certain? What if we failed and¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, even if it tastes horrible, I don¡¯t think it will make us sick. It¡¯s not that kind of herb.¡±


    They were just nts filled with nutrients, so even if the taste was bad, it shouldn¡¯t have a negative effect.


    Though¡­I suppose it was possible to take too much¡­ But we were just going to taste a little this time.


    ¡°Just a taste¡­hmm¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Hmm.¡±


    I touched the edge of the paste gently with my finger and then licked it.


    After seeing this, Milina also hesitantly dipped her finger in to taste it.


    ¡°¡­!¡±


    ¡°Ma-master!¡±


    While we hadbined three different kinds of herbs, the taste of the medicine was overpoweringly sour.


    We both scowled and looked at each other in disbelief.


    It was like those dried sour plums¡­ My mouth kept filling with saliva after that.


    ¡­While I had eaten such plums before, it must be quite shocking for someone like Milina¡­


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°¡­No, Leo. This is no good at all. It is much too sour to eat.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Good Leo¡­ It is so sour¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Here.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°¡­Glug-glug¡­ Thank you. Hah¡­¡±


    ¡°Not at all.¡±


    Ms. Lyra saw us and quickly poured us some tea.


    I thanked her, and then we both rinsed our mouths with it.


    Leo looked quite disappointed by all of this¡­as if it was a great failure.


    Of course, she would not have been able to guess that it would taste like this¡­


    ¡°Master¡­ Did we make a mistake?¡±


    ¡°No, I wouldn¡¯t say that¡­ However, in this state, it is¡­¡±


    It was much worse than when I has tasted it with Ms. Helena and Sebastian.


    I didn¡¯t know why it came out like this. Perhaps mixing them together made the sourness even stronger.


    It was definitely strange¡­


    ¡°In any case, we should continue until it¡¯s dry, just as the book says.¡±


    ¡°Very well. I doubt the taste will change, but¡­let¡¯s try it.¡±


    While the taste might be a failure, we didn¡¯t know about the effect yet.


    But as we could hardly mix it with the wine in this state, we would follow the book and continue until it was dried powder.


    I agreed with Milina that the taste was not likely to change, but¡­since this was our first time doing it, I wanted to finish the job.


    ¡°Master, my arms are getting tired¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, concocting medicine is tiring work¡­¡±


    After grinding it in the pestle and mortar for some time¡­even I grew tired.


    And if I was tired, Milina would be exhausted.


    Still, it wasmendable that she did not give up.


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Leo?¡±


    ¡°Good Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°The book? Uh¡­ Ah.¡±


    ¡°What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    Leo was looking into the open book and trying to tell us something.


    And so I obeyed her and looked at the book¡­ ¡®As the process of drying is time consuming, having multiple people create wind will help save time.¡¯


    ¡°Milina¡­it says it¡¯s faster with some wind¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Is that so?¡±


    It reminded me how people used a fan when making sushi rice. Indeed, it probably would make it dry faster.


    Milina looked puzzled though¡­ Well, she did have such knowledge, I suppose.


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Leo? Oh, wind¡­¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s amazing, Leo!¡±


    ¡°¡­The magic of a Silver Fenrir. I didn¡¯t know that she could do such a thing.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Leo, who had been looking at us, suddenly barked once, and then a wind was created as it blew towards us.


    ¡­I didn¡¯t know Leo could do that.


    Milina and Ms. Lyra were also surprised by this magic, and Leo seemed quite proud.


    ¡°It is a nice wind.¡±


    ¡°Yes. But we have to keep working. Thank you, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    While feeling the wind that Leo had created, we continued the work of mixing the paste.


    And after what still felt like a long time¡­the paste finally turned into something like powder.


    So, it had worked quite well after all.


    Now, it would be ready very soon?

 Chapter 267

    Chapter 267


    We Finished Concocting


    ¡°¡­Is it ready?¡±


    ¡°Hmm. Yes. I think it is? Leo, I think it¡¯s ready.¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    It seemed like quite a lot of time had passed since we started, and the paste had finally turned into powder.


    But if Leo hadn¡¯t created the wind, it would have likely taken much longer.


    ¡°It¡¯s very ck¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    We looked at the powdered medicine inside of the bowls.


    I didn¡¯t know if it was because the colors had mixed, or it was the effect, but¡­the powder had be ck.


    Milina and I looked at each other and then took a pinch of the powder and tasted it.


    ¡°Milina¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s not sour anymore!¡±


    ¡°Yes! It has almost no taste at all!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Unlike the paste, the medicine in my mouth had almost no sourness.


    Where had it gone¡­ I couldn¡¯t help but wonder. But perhaps that was how concocting worked.


    There was magic energy in it, and perhaps the properties changed while it dried¡­ I would just assume that was the case for now.


    While Milina and I looked surprised, Leo barked happily.


    ¡°Ms. Lyra, please try some. You too, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Yes, very well.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    And so I made Ms. Lyra and Leo taste some of it as well.


    ¡°While there is a faint sourness, I doubt it will affect the wine much.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true. What a relief¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. I was worried about what would happen if it remained the same.¡±


    ¡°Now we just need to see the effect¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff-wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Leo. You can tell?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Now that we had Ms. Lyra¡¯s approval regarding the taste, we just needed to confirm the effect.


    If the effect had been preserved, then this would be a sess. If not, then we would have to try out different methods.


    Seeding on both taste and potency was hard.


    As I thought of such things, Leo started barking at me.


    Uh¡­ You don¡¯t know what effect they have, but the herbs haven¡¯t lost it¡­?


    ¡°You can really tell that, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, what is Leo saying?¡±


    ¡°Leo says that¡­the effect of the herbs hasn¡¯t been lost at all. Do Silver Fenrirs know such things?¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s amazing, Leo!¡±


    ¡°Well, it would not be odd for Silver Fenrirs to be able to tell.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ She was able to differentiate the wine, after all.¡±


    Leo looked quite smug about it, but I was still surprised¡­


    Well, if the restorative herbs were affected by magic energy, then maybe the nutritious herbs were also affected.


    And as a Silver Fenrir, Leo might be more sensitive to such things.


    ¡°So, I guess this is a sess then?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Leo nodded to me.


    ¡°So the method wasn¡¯t wrong after all!¡±


    ¡°It looks like it. That¡¯s good. That we were able to seed with a basic concoction.¡±


    Milina was very happy to hear Leo¡¯s answer.


    Because if this had been a failure, we would then have to test out other methods.


    There were other ways of doing it, and most of them were quite advanced for beginners like us.


    So I doubted that we would be able to test all of them¡­ So this was quite a relief.


    Though, it was still tiring and took a lot of time¡­


    ¡°So you seeded. Then perhaps you should leave the rest of the herbs to Milina?¡±


    ¡°Just her?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I think you probably want to go and deliver thepleted medicine to Ms. Helena¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­ Well, that¡¯s true.¡±


    ¡°I have to do it all by myself¡­¡±


    Ms. Lyra saw that we had seeded with the medicine.


    And she suggested that I let Milina process the rest of the herbs.


    ¡°¡­Well, there isn¡¯t that much left. Do you think you can do it, Milina?¡±


    ¡°¡­I will manage¡­ Yes, I will do my best!¡±


    ¡°I will help by creating a wind.¡±


    While Milina hesitated at first, she nodded in agreement.


    Judging by how much remained, she would only need to do it twice. And if Ms. Lyra was helping her, she would surely be fine.


    ¡°But Ms. Lyra¡­are you going to use magic?¡±


    ¡°No, I don¡¯t need magic to help with a little wind.¡±


    ¡°Oh. Yes, I see.¡±


    I suppose she could just use a sheet of paper or something to do that.


    While it would take time, if the wind did not need to be strong, then anyone could do it.


    ¡°In that case, please excuse me. I will deliver this to Ms. Helena.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Thank you for the help, Milina.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I picked up the bowl and stood up.


    Milina had dumped her medicine into it, and had now started on a new batch.


    And so I left them in the drawing room and headed to the kitchen.


    ¡°Excuse me¡­ Ms. Helena, are you busy right now?¡±


    ¡°Ah, Mr. Takumi. I¡¯m very sorry. We are almost finished with lunch!¡±


    ¡°Oh, well you don¡¯t have to stop.. I just came to tell her that I finished concocting the medicine. Please give this to her.¡±


    ¡°Certainly!¡±


    ¡°I won¡¯t bother you any longer. Leo, let¡¯s go.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    When we entered the kitchen, the cooks were rushing around busily, as they were preparing lunch.


    It seemed like once again, I had disturbed them at a busy hour.


    And so I talked to the cook who noticed me, and left the bowl for Ms. Helena before leaving.


    If I stayed, then I would only get in their way.


    ¡°Now, we finished what we had to do¡­ What now?¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff-wuff?¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s right. We should go to the dining hall and wait. Lunch will be ready soon, so they won¡¯t have to call us¡­¡±


    Sword training was after lunch, and so I had nothing to do right now. And so Leo suggested that we go to the dining hall first.


    She was probably hungry, now that she had smelled the food from the kitchen.


    While the food wouldn¡¯t be prepared any faster if we went to the dining hall, I understood why she was impatient.


    Besides, they wouldn¡¯t have to send someone to call us¡­ And so I took Leo, who wagged her tail happily, and went towards the dining hall.

 Chapter 264

    Chapter 264


    Mr. Ekenhart Woke Up Early


    ¡°I thought you dislike waking up early, Mr. Ekenhart? Are you alright?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s because of the herbs you gave to me yesterday, Mr. Takumi. The ones to help me sleep? Thanks to them, I felt very refreshed this morning!¡±


    ¡°That father would wake up in the morning when it isn¡¯t even a special asion¡­it must be the end of the world.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. I have never seen His Grace awake at this hour before.¡±


    ¡°You two¡­ I have gotten up early from time to time.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. Well, I suppose it was a very rare thing.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°You too, Leo¡­¡±


    When I asked him why, he said it was thanks to the herbs I had given himst night.


    He had slept well, and been rid of any fatigue. That was why he was able to get up early.


    People tend to be tired all the time once they get older, which makes it harder to get up¡­ Though, I should be too young to feel that yet.


    ¡­But I was definitely different during my student days.


    Regardless, Ms. Anne and Ms. ire were surprised to see him at the breakfast table.


    And even Leo was nodding in agreement¡­much to Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s dismay.


    At the very least, I had never known Mr. Ekenhart to eat breakfast, so it was indeed rare.


    But then again, I had not known him for very long.


    ¡°Hah¡­ So that is how you all see me¡­ In any case, let¡¯s eat then.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s because of the way you usually act, father.¡±


    Recently, Ms. ire seemed rather severe when it came to her father.


    She hadn¡¯t been like this when I first met Mr. Ekenhart.


    Perhaps once the matter of the arranged marriages was settled, she was able to talk to her father without restraint.


    ¡°Now, let¡¯s eat.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°¡­Uh, yes.¡±


    With all of the food now on the table, Mr. Ekenhart told us to eat.


    Ms. Anne looked a little confused when everyone said this, but she followed the others and began to eat.


    I suppose it wasn¡¯t really a custom here¡­ I didn¡¯t know how things were like at her home. Perhaps she usually ate alone.


    Or she never talked with her father¡­?


    Well, I shouldn¡¯t be making guesses of such things¡­ I might bepletely wrong, and it was also rude.


    ¡°The food here is always so delicious.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s thanks to Helena. ¡­Father, please don¡¯t eat so hurriedly.¡±


    ¡°Mmm¡­gg¡­ But don¡¯t you know that good food tastes best when you eat it quickly?¡±


    ¡°Yes, you¡¯ve said that many times¡­ Ha¡­ Very well¡­¡±


    ¡°Hahaha¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff¡­ Wuf-wuff-wuff!¡±


    Ms. ire replied to Ms. Anne, who muttered her praises. And then her attention moved to Mr. Ekenhart.


    While he stopped for a moment at how put off Ms. ire looked as she sighed, he soon went back to eating hungrily.


    Perhaps he was right. It was best to eat good food without worrying about how you looked.


    ¡­Leo was doing the same thing.


    ¡°Mmm! ¡­Leaving that aside, what are your ns for today, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Me? I¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart had already finished eating. That was fast¡­


    He was now asking me about my ns, but I had a feeling he was just trying to distract Ms. ire.


    In fact, both Ms. ire and Ms. Anne were looking towards me as if they were also interested.


    ¡­Ms. Anne too? Well, I suppose it was fine.


    ¡°After breakfast, I will make the herbs for Ms. Kalis¡¯s store, as I always do. I do not want them to run out of stock.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s true. Though, I doubt they are in any danger of that¡­ But I suppose a steady supply of Ramogi is important.¡±


    Said Mr. Ekenhart with a nod.


    We had removed the cause of the disease, and dealt with the malicious store.


    As long as there was enough Ramogi to go around, then the disease would stop spreading.


    Though sadly¡­it wasn¡¯t something that would happen immediately.


    ¡°Also¡­ Milina and I have to study to concoct some medicine. And after lunch, Leo and I will go and see the wine that Ms. Helena made.¡±


    ¡°Hmm, I see. Good, good. So that means the wine will be drinkable by dinner time?¡±


    ¡°If everything goes well¡­¡±


    ¡°Father, are you really that impatient to drink the wine?¡±


    ¡°Yes. After tasting the juice¡­ Why wouldn¡¯t I be looking forward to it?¡±


    ¡°That may be the case, but¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, it was very delicious. And so I am also looking forward to drinking it as wine! But why was it turned into juice in the first ce?¡±


    ¡°It was your fault! Your fault! It was dangerous and made people sick!¡±


    Ms. Anne¡­


    Did she already forget that it was her idea?


    Well¡­perhaps she didn¡¯t know what wine or how it was done.


    ¡­Or she really was that forgetful.


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    As I smiled and watched Ms. ire berated her, Mr. Ekenhart suddenly raised his voice as if he had remembered something.


    ¡°No¡­about the wine in Range vige¡­ It was being sent to the count¡¯snds as well. Mostly to Barsler himself¡­ But I was wondering why he hasn¡¯t be sick?¡±


    ¡°Ah, I see. Yes, one would wonder about such things.¡±


    ¡°Do you know something, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Well, yes.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was right to question it.


    The infected wine was being sent to Count Barsler as well¡­ That was what Mr. Hannes had said.


    While I hadn¡¯t talked about it with Mr. Ekenhart, he was the duke, and must be aware of export from his towns and viges.


    However, then why was the count not sick¡­ I thought back on my conversation with Mr. Hannes as we waited for Phillip to bring the wagons to Range vige.

 Chapter 265

    Chapter 265


    Why The Count Wasn¡¯t Sick


    ¡°Uhh¡­Mr. Hannes¡­the chief of Range vige, said that the count was specific about the wine that was sent.¡±


    ¡°Really? In what way?¡±


    ¡°He wanted the aged wine that was in the back of the storage house¡­ And Mr. Hannes was instructed to ce the magic tool¡­the ss sphere, near the entrance.¡±


    ¡°Hmm, I see. So while it spread near the entrance, it didn¡¯t reach the back. So that wine is all safe?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Leo checked them. All of the wine that was drinkable was the aged wine in the back.¡±


    ¡°So Barsler was able to drink the safe wine¡­¡±


    ¡°Father was always drinking wine. I didn¡¯t realize he had acquired it like that¡­¡±


    ¡°You didn¡¯t know, Ms. Anne?¡±


    ¡°While I have made some suggestions, it was his decision when it came to what he would use as a medium. I would never be that specific.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see¡­¡±


    It was Barsler who acted, and Anne who advised.


    But in the end, she did not know how he would do things.


    Even if she was the heir, she was not that knowledgeable about what things were being made in viges in other territories.


    ¡°During my conversation with Mr. Hannes, we agreed that he secured wine for himself safely by specifying where the sphere was to be set.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. And then he had the vige attacked. He was surely going to take the sphere and the wine at the same time. Besides, I¡¯m sure he has tools to find out if the wine is infected as well.¡±


    Considering the number of wagons that had brought the orcs, Mr. Ekenhart was probably correct.


    Because I had temporarily blinded them, and because the orcs had thrashed around wildly, most of the wagons were too damaged to use.


    However, if that had not happened¡­then they would be able to use them to carry the wine back.


    ¡°Well, since my father went through all that trouble for the wine¡­ I am looking forward to drinking it!¡±


    ¡°¡­Do you really think you¡¯re going to be drinking it?¡±


    ¡°What? What do you mean, Ms. ire?¡±


    ¡°Isn¡¯t it obvious? It became dangerous because of your suggestion. It would hardly be proper for you to¡­¡±


    ¡°This is an outrage! Ms. ire!¡±


    ¡°Well, calm down, ire. Mr. Takumi purchased the wine. And he is also going through the trouble of making it drinkable. So it is his decision.¡±


    ¡°Father¡­ That may be, but¡­ Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°Uhh¡­¡±


    Ms. ire did not want Ms. Anne to drink the wine.


    Indeed, as Mr. Ekenhart said, I had bought it, and made the Ramogi. So I suppose it was my decision to make.


    As for me, since they were storing the wine, and Ms. Helena was the one processing it, I didn¡¯t mind if they did what they wanted with it.


    There was so much. Whether it was juice or wine, they should just drink as they please.


    That¡¯s what I thought¡­ But I suppose that would not settle the matter¡­


    ¡°Well, since Ms. Anne is a guest here¡­ I don¡¯t see why she shouldn¡¯t?¡±


    ¡°Hmph¡­¡±


    ¡°Perhaps if she tastes and sees how delicious it is, she will not think of doing such a thing in the future.¡±


    ¡°If you insist¡­Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. You sure are weak to Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Father! That is not necessary!¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Mr. Takumi. Now I will be able to drink the wine.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s nothing¡­¡±


    Delicious things should be enjoyed.


    And that should not be disturbed by strange ideas¡­ I just hoped that she would understand that¡­


    Well, the rest was us to Ms. ire and Mr. Ekenhart, so I would not say anything else.


    And the time passed as I ate breakfast and watched Mr. Ekenhart tease Ms. ire, while Ms. Anne looked excited.


    As Tilura, Leo and Sherry had no interest in the wine, they were looking at Ms. Anne as if to ask, ¡®Why is she so excited?¡¯


    I would ask Ms. Helena to make more juice for them¡­


    ¡°Milina.¡±


    ¡°Ah, master!¡±


    ¡°Are you busy now?¡±


    ¡°No. Since you talked about concocting the medicine yesterday, I¡¯ve been waiting for you!¡±


    After eating breakfast, I finished making the herbs to give to Nick, and then I went to the drawing room to search for Milina.


    There, Milina was waiting while looking over the book and all of the notes she took up until now.


    She really was passionate about her studies¡­ I had to try and match her.


    ¡°Now, about concocting. It is right here¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. This is what it says¡­¡±


    While making the herbs to give to Nick, I had also made more of the three types of herbs that I showed to Ms. Helena and Sebastian yesterday.


    I then used Weed Cultivation to change them into their most effective state, so that they were ready to be mixed together.


    And so Milina and I read the book and went over the instructions.


    ¡°Uhh, turn them into powder and mix¡­ Ms. Lyra, do you have a pestle and mortar?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I¡¯ll bring one right away.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    While it depended on the medicine you were trying to make, you generally mixed them while crushing the herbs in a mortar.


    As you couldn¡¯t do that with liquids, there were other processes that included heating and cooling. But this was the general one that we would test first.


    It seemed doable, even though I wasn¡¯t sure about the taste.


    ¡°Here it is.¡±


    Ms. Lyra returned with the pestle and mortar, and so I put the three herbs inside and began to grind them together.


    There were two sets, and so both Milina and I tried different ones.


    And so for some time, the sounds of grinding herbs echoed through the drawing room.

 Chapter 268

    Chapter 268


    Ms. Anne Was Very Surprised


    ¡°¡­Ms. ire, Ms. Anne?¡±


    ¡°Oh, Mr. Takumi. So you are already finished?¡±


    ¡°Yes. As it was a sess, I left the rest to Milina.¡±


    ¡°I see. I¡¯m d that it worked well.¡±


    ¡°There, there, there¡­¡±


    ¡°Kyau, kyau!¡±


    ¡°Here? You want me to pet you here?¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    When I entered the dining hall, Ms. ire and Ms. Anne were sitting there together.


    As I answered Ms. ire and looked towards Ms. Anne, I saw that she was petting Sherry happily¡­ So, she was at least used to dealing with fenrirs.


    Though, Sherry seemed to be¡­more interested in Ms. Anne¡¯s hair rolls than she was interested in being petted¡­


    She moved her front paws as if punching like a cat¡­ Yes, it looked like a cat ying with some kind of toy.


    But fenrirs weren¡¯t supposed to be like cats¡­


    ¡°I see you¡¯ve be quite friendly.¡±


    ¡°Yes. She absolutely insisted on ying with her while Tilura was studying.¡±


    ¡°I had no idea that fenrirs were such adorable creatures! This is quite the discovery!¡±


    ¡°¡­I think that this fenrir might be a special one¡­ But more importantly, why are you here, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Well, I went to the kitchen to give Ms. Helena the herbs, but they seemed very busy¡­and I thought since lunch would be ready soon¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Hehehe. I see that good Leo is also impatient to eat.¡±


    I watched Ms. Anne and Sherry y with a smile, and then I took my seat.


    Ms. ire was a little curious as to why I was here so early, and so I answered her, as did Leo.


    ¡°You seem to get along quite well with Ms. Anne after all?¡±


    ¡°¡­No, no we do not get along.¡±


    ¡°Really? But you¡¯re together now¡­¡±


    ¡°That is because she stalks me relentlessly. And as Sherry¡¯s guardian, I could hardly leave her alone with¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, I see.¡±


    ¡°In any case, I will eventually tell you about what happened between us.¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well.¡±


    They had appeared to be on good terms for a moment, but it seemed like it was merely a result of the advice that I had given to Ms. Anne.


    I had suggested that she talk with Ms. ire¡­which was probably something that Ms. ire did not appreciate at all.


    However, it did seem like there was a reason that the two did not get along¡­


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Hmm? You want to join them?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Well, go slowly, so you don¡¯t startle her, okay?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Hehehe. I see that good Leo does not like to be seen as scary.¡±


    Leo had watched Sherry being petted by Ms. Anne, and wanted to be petted as well.


    I didn¡¯t think that she was jealous of Sherry, because Ms. Anne wasn¡¯t afraid of her, but she was still bothered at being avoided all of the time.


    And so I told her to move slowly. Leo nodded and walked quietly over to Ms. Anne.


    But Ms. Anne was too preupied with Sherry to notice Leo¡¯s approach. Perhaps she had not even noticed that we entered the room¡­


    And so Ms. ire and I smiled and watched as Leo stealthily walked up behind Ms. Anne.


    ¡°Kyau?¡±


    ¡°WUFF!¡±


    ¡°AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAHHH!¡±


    ¡°Pfftt!¡±


    ¡°Hahaha! Ms. ire, you shouldn¡¯tugh at her.¡±


    ¡°But you areughing too, Mr. Takumi. Hehehehe!¡±


    Sherry saw Leo approaching, and so she barked and tilted her head to the side.


    Just then, Leo barked behind Ms. Anne, who then let out a great shriek and jumped up from her seat.


    Upon seeing Ms. Anne fall to the ground andnd on her buttocks, Ms. ire could not hold it back any longer. She burst intoughter, and so did I.


    In the end, while Leo had moved carefully, it was the bark that stpoiled it¡­ Perhaps I shouldn¡¯t have said anything to begin with?


    ¡°Wh-wh-wh-wh-why is it behind me!! Is it going to attack!?¡±


    ¡°Calm down, Anne. Good Leo would never attack a human.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    Ms. Anne shuddered as she sat on the floor and looked up at Leo.


    While Ms. ire tried to calm her down, she was not very sessful.


    Now that Ms. Anne was not looking at her, Sherry jumped away from the chair andnded on top of Leo¡¯s head.


    It was her favorite spot, and she seemed quite happy.


    Leo didn¡¯t mind if Sherry was there, and she just barked quietly to her.


    ¡°It should not appear behind me so suddenly like that¡­¡±


    ¡°I think Leo just wants to y with you, Anne. Because you only y with Sherry¡­¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s easy for you to say¡­¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. Are you really so frightened by Leo, Ms. Anne?¡±


    ¡°By living here¡­I do see and understand that it doesn¡¯t really attack people¡­ But you still cannot expect me to act normal when around such a huge Silver Fenrir.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Now that Ms. Anne had finally regained her calm, she got up from the floor and sat in a chair that was far away from Leo.


    It¡¯s because I¡¯m too big? Leo seemed to ask with a bark, which only served to make Ms. Anne jump.


    Well, she was a wolf that was big enough to carry multiple people. And so the fear would not be easy to shake off for some.


    ¡°Oh, ire, Anne, and Mr. Takumi, you are here.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Ekenhart.¡±


    ¡°Father.¡±


    ¡°Your Grace¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau.¡±


    ¡°Haha. You looked very tired, Anne. Was it Leo again?¡±


    As I was watching Ms. Anne, Mr. Ekenhart opened the doors of the dining hall and entered. Behind him were Sebastian and the maids, who brought in the food. So lunch was ready now.


    Mr. Ekenhart sat at the table andughed at the sight of Ms. Anne.


    Unlike a moment earlier, she was calm and collected again, but her hair was in disarray, so Mr. Ekenhart could guess as to what had happened.


    ¡­Just by her hair¡­ That was rather impressive¡­

 Chapter 269

    Chapter 269


    The Illness Was Nearly Stamped Out


    ¡°Leo,e over here. It¡¯s lunch time.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°And you sit over here, Sherry.¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Lunch time!¡±


    As I watched the maids serve the food out on the table, I called Leo to take her seat.


    Sherry was on Leo¡¯s head, but Ms. ire picked her and carried her to her usual spot.


    Tilura had also finished her studies, and she arrived in the dining hall just as everything was ready.


    Ms. Anne remained in her seat, far away from Leo, because she was still wary after being scared.


    But she would asionally nce over to Sherry.


    ¡°Now, let¡¯s eat.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    After the food was served, Mr. Ekenhart gave the order, and we started to eat.


    As always, Ms. ire watched her father¡¯s questionable table manners and sighed to herself.


    But Tilura took no notice of it and focused on her own food.


    Ms. Anne smiled at how daintily Sherry was eating, but then she would nce at Leo and stiffen.


    ¡­Well, Leo was eating with just as much speed as Mr. Ekenhart¡­ Perhaps Ms. Anne was imagining what would happen if she was bitten like that.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, I have a message from Helena. She says that the wine mixed with Ramogi is ready, and so you should go and see it with Leo when you have time.¡±


    ¡°I understand. I will go after this then.¡±


    ¡°Oh, so Leo is finally going to check the wine. I¡¯m counting on you, good Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Really, can you trust a Silver Fenrir to check for diseases?¡±


    While we drank tea after lunch, Sebastian came and delivered a message from Ms. Helena.


    And so I would get that over with before it was time for my sword training.


    Since we were still testing it, there would not be a lot. And even if it took a long time, I could just leave Leo with Ms. Helena and go to the garden alone.


    However, Ms. Anne seemed skeptical about Leo¡¯s ability.


    She did not have much trust in Leo at all¡­


    Perhaps it was due to the connection with the duke¡¯s family, but the people in this house seemed to believe anything rted to Leo without question.


    But I suppose Ms. Anne¡¯s reaction would be moremon for the average person.


    ¡°Hmm? You doubt it, Anne?¡±


    ¡°As far as I am aware, the only way to find out is to use a magic tool. And so¡­Silver Fenrir or not, it should not be possible.¡±


    ¡°So, I suppose you won¡¯t be drinking the wine then?¡±


    ¡°I did not say that!¡±


    ¡°Hahaha! Well, I do understand that it is difficult to believe. However, if Leo¡¯s ability was false, then the disease would have spread much wider in Ractos by now. And she would not have been able to find the ss sphere¡­which spread it in the first ce.¡±


    ¡°That¡­is true, but¡­¡±


    Ms. Anne was right to have doubts.


    I probably would have been the same if it wasn¡¯t Leo.


    In any case, Mr. Ekenhartughed and reassured her.


    ¡°Sebastian, how are things in Ractos?¡±


    ¡°Yes, Your Grace. Thanks to Mr. Takumi¡¯s herbs, it is nearly stamped out. Fewer citizens fall ill every day. And since we know the cause of the disease, and have gathered most of the wine, fewer people are at risk.¡±


    ¡°Well, while that alone may not be proof of Leo¡¯s ability¡­it is clear that things would have been much worse without Leo and Mr. Takumi. It is possible that the town would not be able to function as before.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart asked Sebastian to exin about the situation in Ractos.


    Thanks to my focus on making Ramogi, fewer people suffered from the illness now.


    I didn¡¯t know that they had started to gather the wine as well. And even if it wasn¡¯t all of it, if it was infected, then it was a necessary move.


    ¡°Fewer people areing to Mr. Kalis¡¯s store to buy Ramogi. And so it shouldn¡¯t be long before we can return to selling them at normal prices.¡±


    ¡°Hmm. Yes, because the reduced prices were done through reducing Mr. Takumi¡¯s pay. But tell Kalis to be careful, so as to not cause any confusion.¡±


    ¡°Yes, certainly.¡±


    ¡°Anne, I know you have doubts, but I believe it because it is thanks to Leo and Mr. Takumi that the disease is on its way to being stamped out.¡±


    ¡°I believe it too.¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Me too!¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    So, they would be selling the Ramogi at the regr price soon.


    As for the pay, I didn¡¯t mind, since I was the one that told them to reduce it.


    In any case, since the malicious store was no more, there would be plenty of herbs to go around. And I hoped Mr. Kalis would be able to handle things well when it was time to change the price again.


    On top of that, I was happy to know that Mr. Ekenhart and the others had such trust in us.


    And so Leo and I held back a feeling of embarrassment as we bowed and thanked them.


    ¡°Very well. If you are all going to insist on it, then I will believe it. But you must provide me with Ramogi immediately if I do get sick!¡±


    ¡°Anne¡­ It sounds like you still don¡¯t really believe it?¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. It¡¯s fine. In any case, Leo will decide if the experiment is a sess, and then we can all drink it. And yes, it will be easily cured with Ramogi if necessary.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha, indeed. Do your best Leo, so that no one gets sick.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Kyau?¡±


    ¡°No, Sherry¡­ You cannot do what good Leo does¡­¡±


    ¡°Kyau¡­¡±


    While she did not sound convincing, Ms. Anne insisted that she was satisfied.


    And if something happened, I could easily make some Ramogi, so there was no problem. But Leo wouldn¡¯t let that happen anyway.


    Sherry had been listening with a puzzled expression, and then she barked as if to say that she would also do her best. But Mr. Ekenhart refuted it immediately.


    I suppose Sherry thought she could just copy Leo¡­ She looked rather disappointed by the realization¡­


    Ah, now Ms. Anne was petting her consolingly¡­ She really was fond of Sherry.

 Chapter 270

    Chapter 270


    We Tasted the Trial Wine


    After tea time was over, I left the dining hall with Leo, where Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian were talking.


    I suppose they were talking about his duties as the duke.


    Sherry was being consoled by Ms. ire, Tilura, and Ms. Anne.


    Well, I could leave the rest to them then¡­ I¡¯m sure it wouldn¡¯t take much to cheer her up again, and I would see her ying outside while Tilura trained.


    ¡°Excuse me, is Ms. Helena here¡­?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Ah, Mr. Takumi. You¡¯re just in time¡­ The trial wine is ready now.¡±


    As Leo and I went to the kitchen to see Ms. Helena, we saw that fiverge barrels had been lined up.


    While mixing it with the Ramogi, they had poured the wine into smaller barrels.


    ¡°Thank you. Uh, so how did you do it?¡±


    ¡°Yes, we took the Ramogi that you provided, and starting from the right barrel¡­which has a quarter of the regr dose, then a third, a half, and then two thirds.¡±


    ¡°So they all have varying amounts.¡±


    ¡°That is so.¡±


    So I suppose this was a test to see how much Ramogi was the right amount to put inside of the wine.


    That seemed very typical of a cook.


    ¡°So, Leo¡­ If you will.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I said to Leo, so she could start checking the wine.


    Leo nodded in reply and then she slowly moved her nose to the barrels and began to sniff.


    Ms. Helena and the other cooks then watched her with bated breath.


    ¡°Wuff¡­? Wuff!¡±


    ¡°The one on the far right is no good¡­she says. What about the others?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°So the others are fine¡­ Thank you, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Leo had singled out the barrel on the far right¡­which had a quarter of the Ramogi content.


    It had not removed all of the disease, but the rest of the wine was fine.


    ¡°Ms. Helena, the barrel on the far right is no good, but the others can be drunk.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ So the amount of Ramogi really does matter. Thank you, good Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I told Ms. Helena what Leo had told me.


    Ms. Helena seemed to think about it for a moment, and then she thanked Leo with a bow.


    It was a good thing that I had asked Ms. Helena after all.


    I would not have thought of conducting such tests¡­and would have just dumped random amounts of Ramogi inside¡­


    ¡°Well¡­just to be safe, we¡¯ll say that it needs half the amount to be drinkable. One of these barrels for half the amount¡­ Two barrels for one dose of Ramogi. That should make things easy to understand.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. I think that is fine. Also¡­I would like to know if the taste has changed or not.¡±


    ¡°Yes. The taste might be altered depending on the amount of Ramogi inside. So, let¡¯s taste some of the drinkable wine then. However¡­¡±


    ¡°Is there a problem?¡±


    Now that we knew some of it was drinkable, the only thing left to do was to taste it.


    However, Ms. Helena seemed to hesitate as she thought of something.


    What could it be?


    ¡°Well, to be honest¡­ We don¡¯t really know what this wine is supposed to taste like. We have never drunk it before¡­ Of course, we have tasted other wines, but¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, I see¡­ So it would be difficult to know if it tastes right or not.¡±


    ¡°Well, I suppose¡­we will just have topare it to other wines while tasting it then. And you, Mr. Takumi, canpare it to the wine of Range vige.¡±


    ¡°While I have tasted it before, I don¡¯t have the most refined pte¡­ But I will do my best.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you. Now¡­¡±


    I was the only one there who had tasted Range Vige¡¯s wine before.


    Well, because I had brought a lot back with us, I could try drinking it. But I didn¡¯t want to drink infected wine just to check its taste.


    And since I had really only drunk it once, I was not too confident¡­


    Maybe it would be better to call Phillip?


    ¡­But he might drink too much, and not be able to do his job. And then Sebastian would be furious. So I would leave that as a final resort.


    ¡°Here you go, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes. ¡­They are all different colors.¡±


    ¡°Yes. It must be because of the Ramogi¡­ The more you put in, the darker it gets.¡±


    The cooks had poured the barrels of wine into sses.


    And as Ms. Helena said, they differed in color depending on how much Ramogi was inside.


    The wine with half the amount was almost pink.


    The wine with two-thirds was a reddish purple.


    And the one with the full amount was a dark purple.


    Sebastian had said that Ramogi soaked in water bes purple, so it made sense.


    I didn¡¯t know much about wine, but the first one looked simr to a ros¨¦.


    In the ss, it was a very pretty pink color, and would probably be popr with women.


    ¡°Now, I¡¯ll have a sip¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. Me too¡­¡±


    And so we tasted the wine in order, from the right side.


    I hadn¡¯t gotten drunk at all when drinking it at Range vige, but how would it be this time?


    As I had ns for sword training with Mr. Ekenhart after this, I tried just lick it a little instead of drinking a full sip.


    Upon seeing me taste the wine, Ms. Helena and the other cooks started to drink it as well.


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°I do not know how itpares to the original, but there are definitely differences depending on the amount of Ramogi¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. But which do you think tastes the best, Ms. Helena?¡±


    ¡°For me, it¡¯s the one with the least amount of Ramogi¡­with only half.¡±

 Chapter 271

    Chapter 271


    The Ramogi Wine was Completed


    ¡°I see¡­while I can¡¯t say that I¡¯m absolutely sure¡­it does taste the closest to the Range vige wine. The others are¡­¡±


    ¡°I see. In that case, half the amount of Ramogi¡­must be best. It seems that putting in any more than that will make it too bitter.¡±


    The one with the prettiest color, with about half the Ramogi, was still a little bitter, but barely noticeable.


    Unlike the juice, you could still taste the alcohol, and it tasted the closest to what I drank in Range vige.


    If anything, the slight bitterness enhanced the sweetness and made it taste more fruity.


    ¡­Well, the bitterness was also so subtle that you might not even notice it if you weren¡¯t focused on finding it.


    The other cooks in the kitchen all nodded at Ms. Helena¡¯s opinion.


    Indeed, the bitterness was stronger when there was more Ramogi inside.


    The wine with a whole Ramogi inside had almost no detectable sweetness, and was just bitter.


    Ultimately, the one with just half was the best.


    Both the taste and color.


    ¡°Well then, after dinner today, I will serve some of this Ramogi wine to everyone. As for the rest of the wine you bought, Mr. Takumi, I will add half a Ramogi for every barrel of this size.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    As for the bitter wine, the cooks said that they would drink it.


    I suppose that they did not like to waste food if they didn¡¯t have to.


    The wine that didn¡¯t have enough Ramogi could have some added in and then it would be drinkable tomorrow.


    Like this, I was now assured that the wine I had brought to the mansion did not have to be boiled after all.


    ¡­It was a relief that it wasn¡¯t a waste¡­


    ¡°Ah, but could you make some of it juice for Tilura?¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course.¡±


    It was much too early to let Tilura drink wine.


    Even if it meant more work for Ms. Helena.


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Hmm. You want to drink some too, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Ms. Helena, is that alright?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I will serve the juice to Lady Tilura, Leo and Sherry.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    I had thought that we only needed some for Tilura, but then Leo said she wanted to drink it too.


    Apparently, she liked the juice when drinking it before.


    And if Leo wanted it, Sherry would want to as well. And so Ms. Helena agreed.


    I was relieved that all the wine wouldn¡¯t go to waste, as it would be drunk as both wine and juice. And with such thoughts, I left the kitchen with Leo, who appeared to be in a good mood.


    ¡­Tomorrow, I would make a lot more Ramogi and give it to Ms. Helena.


    ¡°Ah, there you are, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s time to train!¡±


    ¡°Hahaha, Tilura. You¡¯re very enthusiastic, I see?¡±


    ¡°Yes! It¡¯s so fun to be able to train!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyau?¡±


    After leaving the kitchen, I arrived at the back garden with Leo. And Mr. Ekenhart and Tilura were there waiting for me.


    Tilura was carrying Sherry in her arms¡­ Which suggested that she had torn her away from Ms. Anne¡­ But then I noticed that Ms. Anne and Ms. ire were in the corner of the garden. And they were staring in our direction¡­ Was it because of Sherry?


    Tilura really enjoyed training. I suppose children just liked to stay active.


    Leo barked in agreement, but Sherry looked puzzled as if she didn¡¯t understand why one would find it enjoyable.


    Though, she seemed to enjoy it while ying¡­ Was she really a fenrir?


    ¡°How was the wine, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Ah, they were able to make something that is drinkable. It will be served tonight.¡±


    ¡°I see. Something to look forward to then! Now, we must focus on your training!¡±


    As I mused about Sherry¡¯s failings as a fenrir, Mr. Ekenhart asked me about the wine.


    He was very interested about whether the delicious wine would be drinkable.


    And so he smiled happily when he heard the good news, and seemed to be energized.


    He really did look like Tilura when he was happy¡­ Well, Tilura was considerably less intimidating overall.


    ¡°Now, let¡¯s begin.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart held up his wooden sword and announced the beginning of the session.


    While it made sense for Tilura and I to answer him, I¡¯m not sure why Leo and Sherry were acting like participants?


    Especially Sherry, who never had anything to do with our training¡­


    ¡°Alright, that¡¯s enough for today. It¡¯s nearly time for dinner.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you!¡±


    ¡°Thank you, father!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Usually we would continue to train until someone came to tell us that dinner was ready. But today, Mr. Ekenhart checked the time and ended our training himself.


    ¡­Was it because he was impatient to taste the wine¡­? He did look like a heavy drinker¡­


    Still, we thanked him and put away our swords.


    As Leo had trained with us today, she also barked with gratitude.


    As for Sherry, she had run off towards Ms. ire as soon as the training started.


    Ultimately, she prefered being carried and coddled to moving around.


    It wasn¡¯t very fenrir-like of her.


    They were supposed to be ferocious monsters¡­


    ¡°Still, Leo really is amazing. Even I can¡¯t beat her.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart sounded very impressed.


    He had been scared of her yesterday, but that seemed to be a thing of the past now¡­which was nice to see.


    In any case, as an example, Leo and Mr. Ekenhart had fought a mock battle today.


    But it was just the typical training that me and Tilura did, where Leo dodged his attacks.


    While Mr. Ekenhart was able to swing his sword much faster than us, he still had troublending a blow.


    Out of a few dozen swings, he only hit her a few times.


    And just as I had heard, Leo could make her fur hard, and it was Mr. Ekenhart who hurt his hand after striking her with his wooden sword.


    I had never seen that before¡­ It made me believe that there was no human who could beat Leo.


    Silver Fenrirs really were amazing.

 Chapter 272

    Chapter 272


    Leo¡¯s Dirty Feet Soiled The Mansion


    ¡°Father, we should go back inside soon.¡±


    ¡°Mmm, yes.¡±


    ¡°Leo, let¡¯s go.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    As Mr. Ekenhart talked about the mock battle against Leo, Ms. ire suggested that we go inside the mansion.


    And so we did just that, along with Ms. Anne, who was now carrying Sherry and seemed to be in a good mood.


    ¡°¡­Hmm?¡±


    As we entered the mansion mansion, I noticed something while watching Leo walk next to Mr. Ekenhart.


    There were spots of dirt on the floor in the hallway¡­and they were shaped like Leo¡¯s feet¡­


    ¡°Leo, wait a minute.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Is something wrong?¡±


    I said to Leo, and the others all turned to me questioningly.


    ¡°Uh¡­Leo¡¯s footprints¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, indeed¡­ Leo¡¯s paws are sorge. Evenrger than my hand.¡±


    ¡°Uh, Mr. Ekenhart. That¡¯s not the problem¡­¡±


    Unlike in Japan, people walked with their shoes on in the mansion.


    Obviously, there was no custom of taking your shoes off at the entrance hall¡­ Though, there was a doormat for you to wipe the dirt off of your shoes. It was made of metal and had rounded spikes on it.


    Though, even if you stood on them barefooted, it wouldn¡¯t hurt much more than those health sandals.


    And so I and the others would always use it to clean our shoes before going into the mansion, but¡­


    ¡°Leo¡­ Could it be that you never brushed the dirt off of your paws up until now?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­Kyuun¡­¡±


    When I asked Leo this, she looked at me and suddenly whimpered sweetly.


    ¡°Ms. Gelda¡­ Do you always have to clean up every time Leoes into the house?¡±


    ¡°¡­Well..¡±


    ¡°Kuuun¡­kyuuun¡­¡±


    ¡°No, it is fine! It is our job, after all!¡±


    ¡°¡­That sure sounded like an admission¡­ Leo.¡±


    ¡°Kyuuu? Kuuun¡­¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s not going to work, okay?¡±


    When I asked Ms. Gelda, who was with us, Leo tried to make sweet faces at her so she would say that it was fine.


    Though, it was easy enough to see the situation judging by her reaction¡­


    ¡°Leo¡­ There is something here to take the dirt off, isn¡¯t there? You need to use it to clean your paws first, or you will create more work for the others. Understand?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Kuun¡­ Wuff-wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Uh, your feet hurt when you step on it¡­ Yes, maybe it would hurt if you stepped on it with your toe beans¡­¡±


    While it was rounded enough for humans to step on it with bare feet, perhaps it was too painful for Leo.


    I heard that paws were quite sensitive, so perhaps it could not be helped¡­ Hmm, but I still couldn¡¯t cause trouble in a house where we were guests.


    Back in Japan, I always had a rag near the entrance so that I could wipe her feet aftering back from a walk. And after a while, Leo had learned to wipe her feet by herself.


    And aftering to this mansion, I had told Leo about the doormat, and since she seemed to have understood, I was relieved and hadn¡¯t noticed¡­


    ¡°In any case, Ms. Gelda. Would it be possible for you to bring me a wet rag?¡±


    ¡°Yes, right away!¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m terribly sorry, Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha! I was wondering what you were going on about, and it was just a little dirt! And what¡¯s this about Silver Fenrirs having weak paws? Well, Mr. Takumi, do not be troubled over it!¡±


    ¡°Yes, Mr. Takumi. We want good Leo to live here freely, so you really do not need to be so concerned?¡±


    I asked Ms. Gelda to bring me a wet rag.


    And after she went to fetch one, I apologized to Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire.


    Thankfully, neither of them were bothered by it¡­ However, I didn¡¯t want to take advantage of them and leave things like this either.


    It would be best to avoid dirtying the floor altogether.


    Ms. Lyra and the others were very good to us, and I did not want to make more work for them.


    In the meantime, Ms. Anne was petting Sherry and took no notice of us. But Tilura was a little puzzled as if she didn¡¯t see what the issue was.


    ¡°Uhh, once Ms. Gelda brings me the rag, I will wipe Leo¡¯s paws. So please don¡¯t wait for me and go to the dining hall.¡±


    ¡°Very well.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ But it¡¯s really nothing, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll be waiting for you Leo!¡±


    ¡°Kyuunn¡­ Kuun-kuun.¡±


    I sent the others off to the dining hall and then waited for Ms. Gelda.


    But Leo, don¡¯t whimper at the others as if you don¡¯t want them to leave you behind!


    ¡°Leo¡­ I understand that your paws are sensitive, but I wish you had told me sooner. You don¡¯t want to inconvenience the others, do you?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Wuff-wuff. Kuun.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? You thought that I was too preupied? And that I might not listen if you said it hurt¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Leo looked quite crestfallen as she exined the reason to me.


    Indeed, I had been very busy with sword training, studying medicine and other things¡­ But Leo was special to me.


    ¡°You¡¯re very silly. If you had told me, I would have done something to help you. We¡¯ve been buddies for a long time now, and you¡¯ve helped me a lot, Leo. This is really nothing. I would have been able to do something about it.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­kuuun.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­hey, Leo. Wait. Stop moving¡­¡±


    If you move, then you¡¯ll make even more footprints on the floor.


    Leo must have been very happy about what I said, as she pushed her face towards me and started to lick my face.


    I took her face with both of my hands and tried to stop her from moving so much.


    ¡°Alright, Leo. But from now on, you tell me if something is wrong, okay? And I will see what I can do. ¡­Though, there is not a whole lot that I can do that you can¡¯t do better.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    I said this carefully while looking straight into Leo¡¯s face.


    Leo wagged her tail happily. But now I was worried that it would hit the wall and make a hole in it¡­


    Thankfully, the hallways were quite wide here, so it was probably fine.


    It was a good thing that this mansion was so huge¡­


    ¡°Haa¡­hahh¡­ Sorry to keep you waiting!¡±


    ¡°Ms. Gelda. Thank you. ¡­You really didn¡¯t have to rush like that¡­¡±


    ¡°No, it is for you and Leo!¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    I thanked Ms. Gelda, who had run towards us with the rag¡­ But she really didn¡¯t need to rush back like that¡­


    Leo also looked at Ms. Gelda apologetically¡­ It seemed like she was saying, ¡®I¡¯m sorry to trouble you¡¯¡­

 Chapter 273

    Chapter 273


    We Drank The Pretty Colored Wine


    After using the rag that Ms. Gelda brought to wipe all the dirt and dust from Leo¡¯s paws, we headed to the dining hall.


    As Ms. Gelda could not go while holding the dirty rag, she went off on her separate way.


    ¡°Leo. From now on, you have to wipe your feet beforeing inside, alright? If I am with you, I¡¯ll ask someone to bring a rag.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I said to Leo as we walked down the hallway.


    Now they wouldn¡¯t have to spend extra time cleaning the floors.


    Well, it still wasn¡¯t perfect¡­but I suppose they could forgive this much.


    ¡°Ah, Mr. Takumi. There you are.¡±


    ¡°Huh? Ah, Ms. Lyra.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Just when we were about to reach the dining hall, I heard a voicee from behind me.


    When I turned around, I saw that Ms. Lyra was there.


    ¡°It¡¯s about the medicine that you ordered Milina to concoct.¡±


    ¡°How is it?¡±


    ¡°We separated it into two and mixed it. And it turned into something that is just like the first batch. Milina is taking it to Helena right now.¡±


    ¡°I see. Thank you. It must have been tiring for you too.¡±


    ¡°No, I was just fanning them¡­ I hope you will thank Milinater.¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course.¡±


    So Milina had been able to finish the job that I asked her to do.


    Obviously, I would thank her when I saw her again.


    And so we walked down the hallway with Ms. Lyra until we reached the dining hall.


    ¡°Now, let¡¯s eat.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    After sitting down at the table, at Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s cue, we began to eat.


    Perhaps it was because of Mr. Ekenhart, but there was a lot of meat today as well.


    Leo and Sherry would be happy about that. And while I enjoyed it as well, perhaps it was a bit much for Ms. ire and Ms. Anne.


    Or so I thought, but the two seemed like they took no notice of this as they ate.


    As Tilura exercised a lot like I did, she had a great appetite.


    Move a lot and eat a lot¡­she was very healthy.


    ¡°Mmm¡­ So, Mr. Takumi. Would you like to exin this?¡±


    ¡°Ah, of course. I would be d to.¡±


    While chewing on his meat, Mr. Ekenhart pointed to the sses of wine that had been served.


    They contained the same pink wine that I had tasted earlier during the day.


    ¡­It really did look quite pretty.


    Sebastian¡¯s eyes shed at the word, ¡®exin,¡¯ but then he realized that he wasn¡¯t the one called upon, and he looked disappointed.


    But it could not be helped this time.


    ¡°Uhh, it¡¯s wine that contains Ramogi. And as you can see, the color has changed quite a lot. ording to Leo, you need to mix a certain amount in order to remove the diseasepletely.¡±


    ¡°And¡­how much is that exactly?¡±


    ¡°Half of what you would use to treat one person. Any less, and the wine will still be infected. Isn¡¯t that right, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Once I started to exin, Ms. ire and Ms. Anne stopped eating and listened intently.


    Both of them were looking at the wine with deep interest.


    As for Tilura, Leo and Sherry, some juice had been prepared for them, and so they were busy drinking that.


    ¡°Hmm. I see. Yes, the color does seem quite differentpared to normal wine.¡±


    ¡°Yes, it¡¯s because of the Ramogi. Sebastian. You told me that if you put Ramogi in water, the color will change?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. It will dissolve and usually turn purple. Though, it is not known if it is due to a substance in the Ramogi, or some other change in the water¡­ Well, it now seems to me that the reason is in the Ramogi.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was curious about the color, and so I brought Sebastian into the conversation, much to his delight.


    ¡­He really had been waiting for this moment.


    Mr. Ekenhart and the others stared at their sses as they listened.


    ¡°It really is pretty¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. Ordinary wine is pretty, but this has a nice clearness to it.¡±


    ¡°I think that women would like it. Yes, it is very nice in its own way. But what about the taste?¡±


    ¡°To be honest¡­well, I can¡¯t really say. I feel as if it is slightly different from the original.¡±


    ¡°Is that so?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I drank it myself when in Range vige, and¡­ But I really do not know a lot about wine. I think it might be sweeter. But there is also a bitterness as well¡­¡±


    ¡°Bitterness¡­ I see. Well, let us try drinking it then.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°It almost feels like a waste to drink something so pretty¡­¡±


    It had a vibrant and clear pink color in the ss.


    Ms. ire and Ms. Anne sighed with admiration as they looked at it.


    Just as Mr. Ekenhart said, it seemed like the women were fond of the color.


    But now they wanted to check the taste¡­ Or maybe it just Mr. Ekenhart, who loved his liquor.


    Ms. ire hesitated a little, but then she took a sip after seeing the others drink it.


    ¡°¡­It¡¯s sweet! I¡¯ve never drunk something like this before!¡±


    ¡°Indeed! It is so delicious! The beautiful color and fruity taste. But it also has the depth you expect from wine!¡±


    ¡°Hmm. It is quite good. And I can taste the bitterness that Mr. Takumi talked about¡­but it enhances the sweetness.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Perhaps some people would not care for it, but¡­ I find it even better than what I drank in Range vige.¡±


    ¡°I see. Well, this has been quite a sess then.¡±


    After drinking the wine, everyone was surprised by how delicious it was.


    Mr. Ekenhart detected the bitterness as well, but overall, he was greatly satisfied with it.


    Ms. ire and Ms. Anne enjoyed the sweet fruitiness and did not say anything about the bitterness.


    As Tilura, Leo and Sherry were drinking juice, they didn¡¯t say anything, but seemed to be enjoying their drinks nheless.

 Chapter 274

    Chapter 274


    They Would Make Ros¨¦ Wine In Range Vige


    ¡°Sebastian, what do you think?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I tasted some before it was served and¡­ I think it can be used.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    So Sebastian had already tasted it.


    In that case, maybe I could have left the exining to him after all?


    Well, it was already done, so that¡¯s fine.


    ¡°Mixing Ramogi into wine¡­ It¡¯s a new idea. And while the color has changed, it is a nice color. And there are no issues with the taste. ¡­Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes?¡±


    ¡°If you agree to it Mr. Takumi, how about producing this in Range vige?¡±


    ¡°In Range vige?¡±


    After getting the confirmation from Sebastian, Mr. Ekenhart nodded and then made this suggestion to me.


    Make this in Range vige, huh¡­


    ¡°As for me, I would have no objections to that¡­ But what about the grapes?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. They were buying them from Count Barsler, were they not?¡±


    ¡°Yes. A different merchant from the usual one arrived and gave them the ss sphere..¡±


    ¡°As for the grapes, there is no issue there. We have many vineyards on ournds. There are plenty of other merchants that will be happy to sell to them.¡±


    ¡°Hmmm¡­ Well, the original merchant will have to be investigated¡­ But it seems like the acquiring of the grapes will not be a problem. And it is for a good cause. The making of delicious wine. And so I will handle it myself.¡±


    The original merchant was clearly working for Count Barsler.


    Perhaps he was even actively involved in the plot. So it would not be wise to continue to buy from him without knowing more.


    Besides, I very much doubted that Mr. Hannes or the others would want to buy from him anyway.


    However, as I was thinking about this, Ms. Anne then assured us.


    Since there were plenty of other people selling grapes, we could always rely on them.


    I didn¡¯t know if they would be of the same quality, but since they were harvested in the same territory, they couldn¡¯t be that different. So it would probably be fine.


    ¡°I think Range vige would be very grateful to know that you are going to handle things.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. After all, it is very far away. And so there is nothing that a small vige could do on its own¡­ At worst, they would not be able to acquire any grapes and would have to stop making wine altogether. And so I will look into the matter so that they will be able to buy grapes as soon as possible. Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Yes, certainly.¡±


    If Mr. Ekenhart was going to act, then that would be a bigfort.


    The duke¡¯s house really was powerful.


    After being called by Mr. Ekenhart, Sebastian nodded and left the dining hall.


    He would do some research and find information to help make the decisions.


    ¡°Now, Range vige won¡¯t have to lose its industry.¡±


    ¡°You could say that losing this wine would be a major loss.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. Also, we¡¯ll have to think about how to sell it¡­ People will not understand what it is if it is sold the normal way.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­¡±


    ¡°How is it usually sold?¡±


    As someone who had be heavily involved with Range vige, I would be very happy if they didn¡¯t lose their source of ie.


    Even Ms. ire agreed that it would be a great loss, as she had be fond of its taste.


    It was rare for me toe across a wine that I enjoyed this much, and so I also thought that it would be a waste to not be able to drink it anymore.


    ¡­And I¡¯m sure Phillip would agree, if he was here.


    ¡°Usually it is sold in barrels. Great barrels, if they are in taverns or ces where they are consumed inrge quantities. Otherwise¡­they are sold in small barrels.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Would it be too difficult to sell them in bottles?¡±


    ¡°Well¡­indeed. It would definitely be more expensive, but¡­perhaps it will make it look more luxurious as well.¡±


    ¡°And people will also be able to see the color.¡±


    ¡°I think more people will want to buy it when they see the color.¡±


    ¡°It really is pretty.¡±


    When I asked Mr. Ekenhart about how it was sold, he said that it was usually sold in barrels.


    Because it was more expensive to make bottles.


    And since the vige was hardly wealthy, they could not afford to spend money on that.


    But since Ms. ire and Ms. Anne were so enamored by the color, it was probably true that showing it off in ss would allow us to sell it at a higher price as well.


    ¡°It will surely be very popr among women.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Not only the taste of the ros¨¦ wine, but the color is so appealing.¡±


    ¡°¡­Ros¨¦ wine?¡±


    ¡°Yes. This color wine¡­that is neither red or white is called that¡­ Is that not the case here?¡±


    ¡°Hmm. All wine is just called wine. We don¡¯t change the name based on the color.¡±


    Well, I didn¡¯t actually know by what definition something was considered ros¨¦ wine. But since the color was simr, I just decided to call it that.


    ¡°Then this is ros¨¦ wine¡­ Perhaps we could sell it as apletely new kind of wine.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ Something different from anything else¡­ The taste may not be all that different, but it is sweet with a mild bitterness¡­and it has a pretty color. There is enough to separate it from the others. That does not sound bad.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Bottle them¡­ And if sold while emphasizing the appearance, it should do very well.¡±


    ¡°Since it¡¯s not just the color, but the taste is also good¡­ It will surely be a popr product.¡±


    And so it was decided that it would be called ros¨¦ wine, and would be bottled and sold as something unusual.


    ¡­It was rather odd to have Ms. Anne there, giving her opinions on how the duke would conduct his business, but I decided to not mention it.


    Obviously, it was a rather awkward situation, but I suppose we were both currently guests here¡­ And I was giving my opinion as well.


    It was a good thing to hear the opinions of as many people as possible, and I suppose it showed how open-minded the duke was.

 Chapter 275

    Chapter 275


    I Would Take Leo For Walks In Ractos


    ¡°Well then, as soon as everything is settled, we can start production in Range vige. Is that alright, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I¡¯ve been quite worried about the future of Range vige, so if things can go in a good direction for them, then I will have no objections.¡±


    ¡°I had been discussing it with Sebastian, and if rumors of the disease spread, then the wine will stop selling¡­ Of course, we will do what we can to prevent that, and will not say what the reason was.¡±


    ¡°Well you can never tell where rumors wille from or whether they will spread or not.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. But if we release a new wine, and people¡¯s attention moves there, we may be able to stop the rumors. At the very least, they shouldn¡¯t spread too much.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true. Mr. Ekenhart, will you be selling it at Mr. Kalis¡¯s store?¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was worried about rumors spreading about how Range vige¡¯s wine was the cause of the disease.


    But both he and Sebastian agreed that they could deal with that by selling the new wine, which would attract a lot of attention.


    ¡°Of course, it will be sold at Kalis¡¯s store as well. But¡­we will have to sell it at other stores as well, if we want its reputation to grow. Besides, it would be nice to sell it in other towns eventually. This wine should be drunk everywhere.¡±


    ¡°I agree with that.¡±


    If they only sold it at Mr. Kalis¡¯s store, then word would spread too slowly.


    Even if the store was owned by the duke, there was only so much that a single store could do.


    And so they would have to sell it at as many stores as possible, in order for its reputation to grow as Mr. Ekenhart said.


    ¡°Well, we will have to discuss it with Sebastianter.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°And one other thing, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    ¡°It can beter, when you have time. But can you take Leo to the town of Ractos?¡±


    ¡°Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was asking me to take Leo to Ractos.


    I couldn¡¯t understand why. Leo had been drinking her grape juice with satisfaction, but she now looked up with a puzzled expression.


    Maybe she was surprised at being called so suddenly.


    ¡°Well, you will have plenty of asion to visit it from now, won¡¯t you Mr. Takumi? And while the town guards are used to seeing her¡­ The residents¡­ There are plenty who have not seen Leo yet. And so I want them to get used to her presence, so as to not cause confusion. Understand?¡±


    ¡°I see. Yes. But I don¡¯t think that I can go every day¡­¡±


    I didn¡¯t know how often would be enough. But I couldn¡¯t visit it every day.


    I had to make the herbs and also had my sword training.


    ¡°Aye. It does not have to be every day. Just once every four or five days should do. It could be less if you are especially busy.¡±


    ¡°Very well. I will try to go to Ractos with that regrity then. So I think I¡¯ll start by going once tomorrow.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    If it was just once every four to five days, then it would not be much of a hassle.


    After I answered Mr. Ekenhart, Leo barked happily and nodded.


    Leo would be able to run around outside, so it would be good exercise.


    ¡°Thank you. And I¡¯m sure you will have business in Ractos some days, which can be included as one of your visits.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Maybe I¡¯ll use the opportunity to sightsee a little.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    I had gone to Ractos a number of times, but never had the chance to look around and explore at my leisure.


    Even though I had been there more times, it was Range vige where I was able to rx and really enjoy and learn about the ce.


    Of course, they were different in scale, and my purpose was different. So perhaps they shouldn¡¯t bepared¡­


    ¡°If you have any questions about Ractos, you should ask Sebastian. Like if there is anything in particr you are looking for.¡±


    ¡°Very well. While I¡¯ve been there a number of times, I don¡¯t know the ce well at all¡­ So I will ask Sebastian if I need anything.¡±


    The only ces I knew of were¡­Mr. Kalis¡¯s store, the orphanage¡­and Ms. Isabelle¡¯s store.


    I had also been to a general goods store, but it was only once, and we were following Sebastian, so I didn¡¯t really remember the way there.


    In any case, it might be nice to visit Ms. Isabelle and talk and drink tea.


    There was a lot that I wanted to ask her about magic items, and I¡¯m sure she would be happy to have someone to talk to.


    ¡°Hmmm. That¡¯s all for now¡­ Still, it is eerily quiet¡­¡±


    ¡°It is¡­¡±


    After eating dinner, we always drank tea together.


    But on this day, there was no tea, as we were drinking wine.


    At Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s words, I turned my head and looked in the direction of Ms. ire and the others.


    Tilura must have had no interest in what we were talking about, as she was nearly drifting off to sleep.


    Sherry was in her arms, and was already sleeping.


    As for Ms. ire and Ms. Anne, they were more focused on their drinks.


    ¡°Lyra. Pour me another ss.¡±


    ¡°But Lady ire¡­¡±


    ¡°Just bring it over now. And some for Anne as well.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes, certainly.¡±


    ¡°Ms. ire, I don¡¯t think I can drink anymore¡­¡±


    ¡°What are you talking about, Anne? Surely you have just gotten started?¡±


    ¡°¡­Ah¡­ire seems to be a little drunk¡­¡±


    ¡°It does seem like it¡­¡±


    Said Mr. Ekenhart and I. And I felt a little sweat drip down the side of my face.


    Ms. ire was tipping her wine ss into her mouth. At a nce, she seemed normal enough, but there was definitely something different about her.


    As her face hadn¡¯t be flushed or pale, we hadn¡¯t noticed it earlier.


    Ms. ire now had a firm grip on Ms. Anne¡¯s arm, and she could not escape.


    ¡°Hmm? What is it, father and Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Uh, well¡­ Perhaps you¡¯ve drunk enough now?¡±


    ¡°What are you babbling about? In this house¡­this amount is nothing!¡±


    ¡°Re-really?¡±


    I feel like I had seen something like this recently¡­?


    Ah, it was Phillip in Range vige.


    As this was Range vige¡¯s wine, the alcohol content was pretty high.


    And because it was sweet and easy to drink, she might have drank too much.


    As Ms. Lyra poured her another ss, Mr. Ekenhart and I regretted not noticing it sooner.

 Chapter 276

    Chapter 276


    aMs. ire Was Dangerously Drunk


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­ I think it would be best if we removed ourselves quickly?¡±


    ¡°¡­I agree.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart said quietly so that Ms. ire would not hear us.


    Both Leo and I agreed with him strongly.


    I didn¡¯t know what she would do now that she was drunk, but I had various memories of sitting with people who were drinking.


    In these cases, people who were usually quiet would be unexpectedly drunk. Their antics would involve those around them, it could have grave consequences that carried on to the following day¡­


    Mr. Ekenhart, Leo and I looked at one another and nodded. Then we slowly got up from our seats.


    ¡°Now, drink more of it, Anne! We¡¯ve only gotten started here!¡±


    ¡°Hey, Ms. ire? I am not very strong when ites to wine¡­¡±


    While they were talking, Mr. Ekenhart moved stealthily and grabbed Tilura.


    Tilura had been dozing off, and so she looked surprised. But there was no time to exin.


    She looked up, along with Sherry, and so I put a finger to my mouth and signaled for her to be quiet.


    I didn¡¯t know if she understood it, but she didn¡¯t make a sound after that.


    And then we somehow managed to make it to the door.


    ¡°¡­Sorry, Lyra. Gelda. You two handle the rest.¡±


    ¡°¡­Certainly. We will watch over her from a distance.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Then he gently opened the door. As we went through, Mr. Ekenhart whispered to Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda, and apologized.


    ¡°Huh? I see it¡¯s only us here now, Anne. Hmm. You must drink more!¡±


    ¡°Now wait a minute, Ms. ire! Oh, the others have fled and abandoned me here!¡±


    ¡°What are you babbling about? I told you to drink!¡±


    ¡°Ah, but, oh¡­ Ahhh!!¡±


    ¡°Sorry¡­Anneliese¡­¡±


    ¡°We were not cautious enough, and now she has been sacrificed¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    We heard the screams right before the door shut behind us. And the three of us muttered with regret.


    ¡°Ha¡­ Well, we made it out.¡±


    ¡°At Ms. Anne¡¯s expense, I suppose.¡±


    ¡°She was most noble to sacrifice herself¡­ Thank you, Anneliese.¡±


    ¡°Oh, is something the matter?¡±


    We were now safely away from the dining hall, and were sighing in relief in the hallway.


    As we thanked Ms. Anne for her selflessness, Sebastian walked up to us with a puzzled expression.


    ¡°Oh, Sebastian. I would advise you to not go near the dining hall right now. ire has be very drunk when I wasn¡¯t looking¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Well, I shall not go near it until tomorrow then.¡±


    ¡°Judging by your reaction¡­ You¡¯ve experienced this before?¡±


    ¡°Well, yes¡­¡±


    ¡°When Lady ire is under the effects of wine, she will listen to no one. I had thought one ss would be safe, but¡­¡±


    ¡°She seems to have drunk many cups while Mr. Takumi and I were talking. I suppose it was because it was so delicious.¡±


    ¡°It appears so¡­¡±


    So Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian knew what she was like when she drank too much.


    Perhaps that was why they had never served wine in this mansion before¡­ Or was I overthinking it now?


    ¡°Sometimes, Lady ire¡¯s curiosity gets the better of her¡­ But since she is such a properdy on most days, she constantly has to restrain herself¡­¡±


    ¡°But then it seems toe out when she drinks.¡±


    ¡°So the drinking relieves stress¡­ That does seem a little dangerous¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ That¡¯s why we¡¯ve been careful up until now¡­¡±


    ¡°It is my fault for not being there. This has not happened for so long that I let my guard down.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ We will just have to be more careful next time.¡±


    ¡°In any case, we can do nothing but pray for Ms. Anne¡¯s safety and wait until things settle¡­¡±


    ¡°It was a good thing that I was able to extract Tilura in time¡­¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°??¡±


    We must have looked rather odd there, standing in the hallway and holding our heads.


    And our sighs could be heard echoing down the hall.


    As for Tilura, who was being carried by her father, and Sherry, who was being carried by Tilura; they did not understand the situation and looked puzzled.


    ¡­Exining it¡­would affect Ms. ire¡¯s authority as the older sister, and so I wouldn¡¯t say anything.


    ¡°Hah¡­ I had no idea that Ms. ire would be like that when she drinks¡­¡±


    After that, I separated from Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian, took a bath, and returned to my room.


    Since I had drunk to¡­I skipped my daily sword swinging.


    Besides, Tilura had also been too tired to do it.


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Ah, I passed the dining hall on my way back, and it seemed like they were still drinking.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    While I was sitting on the bed, Leo asked, ¡®Is that still going on?¡¯


    Leo let out a sigh when she heard my answer, and she rolled up into a ball. I thought back to the times when I had to drink with co-workers.


    I never had enjoyed drinking then, but I was sometimes forced to join by my superiors.


    And I had seen people like Ms. ire, who would get drunk and start pestering other people.


    While it wasn¡¯t something that I experienced that many times¡­I knew that it could be very troublesome.


    And so I agreed with Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s quick decision to make a run for it.


    From now on, if I drank with Ms. ire, then I would have to be careful that she didn¡¯t drink too much.


    Knock-knock.


    ¡°Hmm? Who could it be? Come in!¡±


    As I was petting Leo and thinking about what had happened, there was a knock on the door.


    Was it Ms. ire, visiting like she had before? I wondered for a moment. But she should still be in the dining hall and drinking.


    Then who could it be? I wondered as I called out to them.


    Leo also looked to the door curiously.

 Chapter 277

    Chapter 277


    I Was Asked To Do Something In Secret


    ¡°It¡¯s me. Mr. Takumi, do you have a minute?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Ekenhart? Yes, of course.¡±


    ¡°Excuse me.¡±


    It was Mr. Ekenhart who was on the other side of the door.


    We had been together not long ago. What business could he have now?


    ¡°Sorry to disturb you. Were you about to sleep?¡±


    ¡°No. I was just rxing.¡±


    I would have gone to sleep soon enough if not disturbed. But I wasn¡¯t really tired, and so I didn¡¯t mind.


    ¡°So, is something the matter?¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ Indeed. It¡¯s about my request that you go to Ractos¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart seemed a little ufortable, as if he was thinking about something.


    Was there a problem concerning me going to Ractos?


    ¡°Yes, I was going to go tomorrow. Did something happen?¡±


    While there wasn¡¯t any rush, I had still thought that I would go tomorrow after making the herbs.


    It wouldn¡¯t take long if I rode on Leo, so I could reach Ractos before Nick left and hand the herbs to Mr. Kalis directly.


    ¡°Uhh, indeed¡­ I¡­was wondering if I could go with you.¡±


    ¡°You, Mr. Ekenhart?¡±


    ¡°Mmm.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t mind, but¡­ Does Sebastian know that you will be going?¡±


    ¡°I wish to keep it a secret from him. And you will be riding on good Leo, yes? So I will not have to use the carriage.¡±


    He did not want to tell Sebastian¡­ So I suppose he wanted to secretly go to Ractos without telling anyone?


    ¡°Are you sure? You will not even have guards with you¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, I do know that I would need them under normal circumstances. However, Leo will be there, and I can fight as well. And you¡¯re not too bad these days.¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­ Yes, it¡¯s true that we should be fine if Leo is with us¡­¡±


    We would not really require guards if we were with Leo.


    But then again, she could not go inside of buildings, so it wasn¡¯tpletely safe.


    Mr. Ekenhart was a master swordsman though, so perhaps there was nothing to worry about¡­


    ¡°I want to see the town by myself, without guards following me¡­ But Sebastian and the others wouldn¡¯t like it, and would try to stop me.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was friendly and easy to talk to. But he was still the head of this house.


    And due to his position, he could not be put in harm¡¯s way¡­ Even I knew how important he was.


    After all, he might have enemies who would try to target him.


    ¡°Please, take me with you!¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­ But if they find out, it¡¯s you who is going to get in trouble.¡±


    ¡°Hmm, I know that.¡±


    ¡°Very well. Then we will go to Ractos tomorrow together.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Mr. Takumi!¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart bowed his head pleadingly.


    While I couldn¡¯t help but think that Ms. ire and Sebastian would be quite angry if they found out¡­he would not give up.


    And so I nodded and agreed. Mr. Ekenhart looked quite happy¡­ Did he really want to visit the town without his guards so much¡­?


    Well, since I was going there anyway, it wasn¡¯t any trouble for me.


    ¡°So¡­ Tomorrow, I will leave the house without my guards. We can meet up on the way there.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes, I see.¡±


    I didn¡¯t know if he could leave the mansion without being noticed, but he obviously knew this ce very well. So perhaps he could.


    Besides, when I had first met Ms. ire, she had also done something simr¡­ Maybe the guards here weren¡¯t very watchful?


    No, I suppose it was because they knew the guards so well that they could find openings.


    ¡°I¡¯ll see you tomorrow then.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    And then Mr. Ekenhart left.


    Leo barked cheerfully.


    As she liked carrying people, she was probably happy that there were two passengers now.


    ¡°Hah¡­ So I guess we¡¯re going with him tomorrow¡­ Well, I¡¯m used to it, so it will probably be fine.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Well, he is an important person. I sometimes get nervous. ¡­Anyway, we should get some sleep now.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    When it was just me and Leo in the room, we talked a little before getting into bed.


    Before falling asleep, I briefly worried about Ms. ire and Ms. Anne, who must still be drinking, but as there was nothing I could do, I closed my eyes and fell asleep.


    ¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª¡ª-


    The next day, I washed up and followed Tilura, who came to greet us, and went down to the dining hall.


    ¡°Good morning.¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°¡­Where is Ms. ire and the others?¡±


    When I entered the dining hall, I saw that Sebastian and Ms. Gelda was there, but there was no one else.


    ¡­It looked like Mr. Ekenhart was sleepingte again.


    But it was unusual for Ms. ire to not be present.


    ¡°Lady ire is still asleep. It is because of the wine she drank yesterday. I believe that she will note down until midday¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    ¡°And Lady Anneliese said that she is not feeling well, and so she is resting in her room. And since Lyra had to stay up sote, she is also resting now.¡±


    ¡°It sounds like quite the disaster for Ms. Anne¡­ And I hope Ms. Lyra rests well.¡±


    After Mr. Ekenhart and I had escaped from the dining hall, we had left Ms. Anne as a sacrifice and Ms. Lyra had to stand and watch.


    Apaprently, Ms. ire was in a deep sleep, and Ms. Anne¡­was suffering from a hangover.


    Sleep well, Ms. Lyra¡­ I¡¯m very sorry.


    ¡°Now, breakfast will be served.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    And so today it was just me, Leo, Tilura and Sherry, which made for a rather lonely breakfast.


    But then again, perhaps it was good once in a while.


    ¡°Sherry got mad at me¡­¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. It¡¯s because you keep bothering her while she is eating.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, Sherry.¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    During breakfast, Tilura kept touching Sherry while she was eating.


    And once her hand just happened to go near Sherry¡¯s mouth, and she thought that Tilura was trying to take her food.


    Leo was also nodding as if to take Sherry¡¯s side.


    But even after Tilura apologized, Sherry was still upset. And after barking once, she turned her nose away indignantly.

 Chapter 278

    Chapter 278


    Sherry Was In A Bad Mood


    ¡°She hates me now¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, don¡¯t worry. I¡¯m sure she will be back to normal after some time has passed. I think¡­¡±


    I didn¡¯t know much about fenrirs, but unless they were used to it, animals did not like it when you touched them while they are eating.


    In fact, I had once done the same thing as Tilura, and touched Leo while she was eating and was almost bitten.


    She was used to it now, and would allow me to pet her. Besides, we couldmunicate now, so there was no worry about her biting me.


    In any case, it hadn¡¯t been that long since Sherry started to live with humans, so she wasn¡¯t fully limated yet.


    A wild animal¡­ Well, she was a monster, so it could not be helped that she was cautious.


    ¡°I will apologize to Sherry againter¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. I think that would be best.¡±


    ¡°By the way, what are you going to do today, Mr. Takumi? You were saying something about going to town yesterday¡­¡±


    So Tilura had been listening to my conversation with Mr. Ekenhart.


    She had looked so sleepy¡­but I had underestimated her.


    I suppose children were like that. They listened to what adults were saying more than you¡¯d think. And so I couldn¡¯t let my guard down.


    ¡°Yes, Leo and I are going to go to Ractos. ¡­Though, not immediately, as I have to make the herbs first.¡±


    ¡°I understand. I have to study until lunch time¡­ And then I will apologize to Sherry and we can y together. Also, since I didn¡¯t do my swings yesterday, I will do them while you are away!¡±


    ¡°Haha. Do your best then.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    So Tilura intended to do her swings after studying.


    She was a hard worker, and I couldn¡¯t allow myself to fall behind.


    Though, I was not likely to be able to train today, so I¡¯ll have to make up for it some other time.


    As for Sherry, she turned to Tilura at the mention of ¡®ying.¡¯


    ¡°Ah, master! Good morning!¡±


    ¡°Milina. Morning.¡±


    After I had my morning tea, I was on my way to the garden in order to make some herbs, when I bumped into Milina.


    She greeted me cheerfully and I smiled back.


    ¡­Though, she was rubbing her right arm a little¡­ Were her muscles sore?


    ¡°Milina. I heard about it from Ms. Lyra. Thank you for concocting the medicine.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I did my best! ¡­Though, my arms hurt a little.¡±


    ¡°Well, you had to mix it for quite a long time¡­¡±


    So it was sore muscles after all.


    Milina chuckled awkwardly as she talked about her arm, and I chuckled back.


    ¡°Ah, I have a message from Ms. Helena. She says that she is going to add the medicine into the Ramogi wine. And you will be able to drink it tomorrow.¡±


    ¡°I see. Thank you.¡±


    Ms. Helena sure worked fast.


    Well, I suppose everyone in this mansion worked fast?


    In any case, tomorrow, I will be able to taste this healthy wine.


    And since only the Ramogi wine was safe to drink, she was going to mix it into that one.


    Milina had helped with the medicine this time, so perhaps she should taste it with us.


    ¡°Alright, that should be enough.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Ah, Ms. Gelda. Can you give this Ramogi to Ms. Helena? It¡¯s for the wine.¡±


    ¡°Yes, certainly.¡±


    After leaving Milina, I had gone to the garden and immediately started to make herbs.


    I made more than usual so that I would have some to give to Ms. Helena as well.


    As for the other herbs, they apparently still had some left.


    Now that the malicious store was gone, there was no monopolizing of them, I suppose.


    It was necessary to make more Ramogi for the wine, and in order to send herbs to other ces as well, I would have to start making more than Ractos¡¯s share.


    Because ording to the contract with the duke, they would sell it in other towns.


    Of course, there was a limit to how much I should make, so I don¡¯t faint again. And so I wasn¡¯t sure if I would be able to make enough to go around¡­


    Perhaps I could make some herbs, and then they could be grown in some herb farm? Well, it was something to discuss with Sebastian and Mr. Ekenhartter on.


    ¡°Alright, Leo. We should go now.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I returned to my room once and prepared to leave the mansion. Then I called Leo.


    She seemed to really be happy about the idea of running outside, as she wagged her tail and barked happily.


    I had the herbs to give to Mr. Kalis, and I was sure that I hadn¡¯t forgotten anything.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, are you going out now?¡±


    ¡°Sebastian. Yes, I¡¯m going to go to Ractos.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    After leaving my room, I met Sebastian while I was headed to the entrance hall.


    Leo was wagging her tail and telling me to hurry up¡­ We¡¯ll be out in a minute, but calm down.


    ¡°I¡¯ve heard from His Grace. While some of the residents there might be surprised by Leo, I hope that things will be peaceful.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Sebastian said with a bow, and Leo nodded understandingly.


    ¡°Leo was quite popr with the children. But adults¡­tend to be scared.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I¡¯m sure they will just keep their distance¡­ But some might react in a more extreme way. But we have notified the guards, and so they know that there is no danger¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, if there is a problem, I will just ride on Leo and leave.¡±


    ¡°I see. Though, I don¡¯t think there would be a problem if you dealt with any who are foolish enough to attack Leo¡­ But I suppose the damage might be too great if Leo went wild in the town.¡±


    ¡°I will be careful.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Leo could easily defeat monsters, and even a master swordsman like Mr. Ekenhart could not beat her.


    Even if a group of humans attacked Leo at once, they would not stand a chance.


    However, if Leo went all out, she might destroy whole buildings¡­ So I understood why Sebastian was concerned.


    Most people would probably just be scared and run away or stare from afar¡­ But if not, then I would just take Leo and leave.


    Besides, no one would be fast enough to chase after us.


    ¡°Will you take some guards with you? If it is only one or two, they could ride on Leo with you.¡±


    ¡°No, I¡¯m fine. I¡¯m just going to sightsee a little, and so I don¡¯t want to take anyone¡¯s time.¡±


    ¡°It is no trouble, but¡­ Very well.¡±


    If I took a guard with us, it would be that much more work for someone.


    And I doubted anything would happen in the town, so there was no need for a guard. Especially when Leo was with me.


    But considering that I was going to meet up with Mr. Ekenhart, maybe it wasn¡¯t too bad of an idea¡­ Only, he really wanted to keep it a secret. So this was probably the right decision.

 Chapter 279

    Chapter 279


    I Met Up With Mr. Ekenhart


    ¡°By the way, where is Mr. Ekenhart? Is he still sleeping?¡±


    ¡°No. But as he has no work in particr today, he is rxing in his room.¡±


    ¡°Ah, I see.¡±


    ¡°Should I tell him that you want to see him?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­no. I don¡¯t want to bother him if he is resting. I¡¯m sure that he is very tired now.¡±


    ¡°Of course.


    My heart skipped a beat when he asked that.


    I didn¡¯t know what Mr. Ekenhart was doing right now, but he might be in the middle of slipping out, or perhaps he had already left.


    If Sebastian went to his room now, the n would be exposed¡­ And I didn¡¯t want that, since I had already agreed to help him.


    ¡­Though, for Sebastian and the people of the mansion, it was probably better if he was stopped¡­


    ¡°Well, I will be going now.¡±


    ¡°Yes, please be careful.¡±


    ¡°Have a good day!¡±


    I talked with Sebastian as I went to the entrance hall. Then I opened the door and stepped outside.


    Aside from Sebastian, several of the servants saw me off as well.


    While it wasn¡¯t as many as when Mr. Ekenhart or Ms. ire left¡­it really wasn¡¯t necessary. Ah, well.


    ¡°Let¡¯s go, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. Do you like to run that much?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    As soon as she was outside, Leoy down so that I could get on her back.


    I climbed on and Leo barked happily.


    The garden was rather small for someone of Leo¡¯s size, so I suppose she really enjoyed being outside like this.


    Perhaps it would be good to visit Ractos, as if I was taking her on a walk.


    ¡°Leo, stop!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°¡­Ah, Mr. Takumi. What a coincidence.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­coincidence? But we talked about this yesterday?¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. Well, it sounds better when you say it like that. That we just happened to meet on the road to Ractos.¡±


    ¡°Is that right?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    A few minutes of running after leaving the mansion.


    Along the road, I had seen Mr. Ekenhart, and so I told Leo to stop.


    He then walked out from the shadow of a tree and came towards us. But he pretended like this was a chance encounter.


    ¡­I wasn¡¯t sure why, but if that¡¯s what he wanted to do, then it was fine.


    Though Leo was also tilting her head as if puzzled.


    ¡°Sorry, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°No, I really don¡¯t mind¡­ Besides, I don¡¯t know much about the town, so I actually feel better being with someone.¡±


    ¡°Well, it will likely be troublesome if someone sees me and¡­ No, that¡¯s not what I meant to say¡­¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart got on behind me, and then Leo started running again. That¡¯s when he apologized to me for some reason.


    I thought it was abouting and about being secretive with the others, but it was not the case.


    ¡°You have to ride on Leo with someone like me¡­ I¡¯m sure you would prefer to ride with ire? ¡­Or is Lyra?¡±


    ¡°What! What are you talking about!¡±


    ¡°Well, if you had to ride on Leo with someone who was holding onto you from behind, surely you would prefer ady? Or is that not the case?¡±


    ¡°¡­Well¡­yes, I would prefer ady, but¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, and so that¡¯s why I¡¯m apologizing¡­¡±


    ¡°There is no need to apologize¡­¡±


    So Mr. Ekenhart was apologizing about having to grab onto me while riding on Leo.


    He was right that having a man grab onto me didn¡¯t exactly make me happy.


    But I don¡¯t know why that had to lead to bringing up his daughter¡¯s name, or one of his servants.


    Well¡­they were both rather voluptuous¡­and so the idea of having them hold me from behind¡­ No, no. I should not be thinking of such things.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ You¡¯re thinking about it now, aren¡¯t you?¡±


    ¡°¡­It¡¯s because you say such strange things, Mr. Ekenhart.¡±


    I had shaken my head to get rid of such thoughts, which only betrayed me to him.


    But who wouldn¡¯t think of it after hearing that?


    ¡°Hahaha! Well, you are a man, after all. ¡­I suppose there is some hope for ire then¡­¡±


    ¡°What did you say?¡±


    ¡°No, nothing. By the way, Mr. Takumi. I¡¯ve seen that ire wears a certain hair ornament often now¡­ Did you give that to her?¡±


    ¡°Ah, yes. I bought it as a present when I first went to Ractos. I also got something for Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Tilura¡­ Ah, that ne. It had a wolf on it¡­ She must have been very happy.¡±


    ¡°Yes, she was.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart had muttered something, but quickly changed the subject to Ms. ire¡¯s hair ornament.


    After all, she wore it nearly every day.


    I suppose as her father, he was curious about the ornament that he had never seen before?


    ¡°¡­You can¡¯t court two people at once, you know?¡±


    ¡°Bah! I-I wasn¡¯t doing that! It was just a present to show my gratitude, because I was treated so well as a guest!¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­really?¡±


    What is he going on about now?


    Why would someone as inexperienced as me suddenly do that?


    Besides, Tilura was much too young!


    As for Ms. ire¡­as Mr. Ekenhart saw when he spied on us before, we had gotten rather close. She was beautiful and had a good personality¡­ Who knows what would have happened if we hadn¡¯t been interrupted¡­ No, don¡¯t think about that!


    I had to make sure Mr. Ekenhart stopped saying such strange things!

 Chapter 280

    Chapter 280


    I Ended The Conversation


    ¡°Really, you shouldn¡¯t say such things about your own daughter. Besides¡­ I thought most fathers do not like to think of their daughters with someone¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, it is true. However, my daughters¡­well, in regards to ire, I have been expecting it for some time. After all, there was all that talk of suitors.¡±


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right. You were the one who kept bringing them up to her¡­¡±


    ¡°But she was the one who wanted to first. Regardless, because of that, I¡¯ve be used to the idea of her getting married.¡±


    I suppose it was true, since he did care about her a lot, but was still ready to see her get married.


    ¡°And so as long as she epts the person, I have nothing to say. Besides, since I¡¯ve grown fond of you already, it seemed perfect enough.¡±


    ¡°Uh, I¡¯m d to hear you say that, but¡­ I¡¯m not quite sure what she thinks.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Well, when one observes her, it seems rather obvious?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­¡±


    ¡°And don¡¯t worry, it is no matter to me that you are not a nobleman! And this had nothing to do with Leo either!¡±


    ¡°You don¡¯t need to try to set yourself apart from Ms. Anne so much¡­ In any case, this conversation just feels awkward, so we should leave it at that!¡±


    Why did I have to get talked to in such a way by the father of a woman I was interested in¡­


    Well, in many cases, a father was the biggest obstacle, so at least I didn¡¯t have to worry about that¡­ But it still felt strange.


    In any case, we hadn¡¯t even reached the town yet, and I did not want to continue this conversation any farther.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ However, there is Anneliese now¡­ One must acquire the promising bit of property before it is toote¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Leo. Run faster!¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff¡­ Grau!¡±


    As I sensed that Mr. Ekenhart would not drop it, I told Leo to quicken her pace.


    We were at the halfway point now, and I just wanted to reach Ractos as quickly as possible.


    Leo had been listening, and she sighed with exasperation. Then she barked and began to run faster.


    ¡­Now that I thought about it, Leo had also wanted me to settle down with someone soon¡­ And so did Sebastian. Really, why was everyone here always thinking about that?


    ¡°He-hey, wait! Mr. Takumi! It¡¯s too fast! tsk!¡±


    ¡°¡­Fine. Leo, run just a little slower.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­ I don¡¯t know how you do it, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    As soon as Leo quickened her pace, Mr. Ekenhart started to shout from behind me.


    Apparently, this was too fast for him.


    But he quieted down after Leo slowed down a little.


    ¡°I thought you were used to riding Leo¡­?¡±


    ¡°Well, I am used to being around Leo¡­ But at that speed¡­ She was faster than any horse!¡±


    ¡°Is that so?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    I had little experience with riding horses, so I could notpare¡­ But she had been running quite fast.


    Well, perhaps I was fine because I was used to riding on bullet trains¡­


    Leo didn¡¯t reach those speeds. Though, I wasn¡¯t exposed to the wind when in a train, but I could tell by the speed that our surroundings seemed to move.


    Also, we had rushed to Range vige at a great speed as well, which helped me get used to it.


    ¡°While it is wonderful that Leo can move so quickly¡­ Most people would not be able to bear that speed¡­ I can barely see my surroundings.¡±


    ¡°Really? I rather enjoy seeing everything shoot by.¡±


    ¡°You might be the only one, Mr. Takumi. We are too used to the speed of horses. And so it is no good.¡±


    I suppose so.


    If you weren¡¯t used to it, then going over 100 kilometer per hour would be surprising and disorienting.


    And the wind was so strong that it could be difficult to breathe¡­ The only reason that I was fine was because I was right behind Leo¡¯s head, which blocked some of the win.


    ¡­I thought that Mr. Ekenhart would be fine if he was behind me¡­ But it was not the case.


    ¡°Alright, You can stop now, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    After Leo had run for some time, I had her stop near the entrance of Ractos town.


    ¡°Hah¡­ I knew she was faster than a horse, but not this fast¡­ That was even faster than before, you know? Faster than a horse during a forced march¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart got down from Leo and stood on shaky feet.


    ¡°Thank you, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°¡­Perhaps we can go slower on the way back.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    I petted Leo while thanking her near the town¡¯s entrance.


    Mr. Ekenhart also petted her gratefully, but also made a suggestion¡­ But Leo just looked at him uprehendingly.


    She would definitely continue to run fast.


    In any case, as Mr. Ekenhart was able to pet Leo normally now, it showed how much he was used to her.


    It was a good thing I had made him y with Tilura and Leo.


    ¡°¡­Your Grace?¡±


    When we reached the gates, the guards who were standing there noticed us.


    ¡°At ease. I am not here on any particr business today. Think of it as an inspection. And so you should go about your duties as normal.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Your Grace!¡±


    ¡°Good day.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    The guard was about to go and call his superior, but Mr. Ekenhart stopped him.


    I greeted them as we walked by, and Leo barked once.


    Perhaps due to Mr. Ekenhart, the guards stood still and watched us leave.


    ¡­Or was it because of Leo?


    As I hade here several times, I thought they were used to seeing her by now¡­ But maybe not?

 Chapter 281

    Chapter 281


    We Went To Mr. Kalis¡¯s Store


    ¡°Now, where should we go first, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°To Mr. Kalis¡¯s store. I have to deliver the herbs.¡±


    ¡°Ah, very well.¡±


    We entered the town, and then Mr. Ekenhart asked where we should go first.


    I answered that we should see Mr. Kalis.


    Otherwise, Nick might go to the mansion before we arrived.


    ¡°Ah, brother! ¡­And¡­the duke!?¡±


    ¡°Nick.¡±


    ¡°Oh, that one who was herest time.¡±


    We arrived at Mr. Kalis¡¯s store, and right before entering, Nick came out to greet us.


    He noticed me immediately, but was shocked to see Mr. Ekenhart behind me.


    Now that I thought about it, he had been herest time, when we were talking about how we would go to the malicious store.


    ¡°Brother¡­and Your Grace¡­ What are you doing here?¡±


    ¡°I thought that I¡¯de and explore the town a little. And Mr. Ekenhart came with me.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. You do not need to be so serious. So why did youe out, Nick?¡±


    ¡°Ah, I was going to head to the mansion¡­¡±


    ¡°Then we¡¯re just in time. Here are today¡¯s herbs.¡±


    ¡°Brother! Thank you!¡±


    So the timing was perfect, as Nick was about to head towards the mansion now. It was good that we didn¡¯t miss him.


    ¡°Is Mr. Kalis here?¡±


    ¡°Ye¡­yes! I will call him right now!¡±


    When Mr. Ekenhart asked about Mr. Kalis, Nick went back into the store to call him.


    ¡°Your Grace! I¡¯m terribly sorry to make you wait out here!¡±


    ¡°Hmm. Well, think nothing of it.¡±


    ¡°I will rebuke Nick when I see him again.¡±


    Mr. Kalis looked rather frantic as he burst from the door and apologized to Mr. Ekenhart.


    He felt that Nick making Mr. Ekenhart wait outside of the store was incredibly rude.


    But Mr. Ekenhart didn¡¯t seem to mind. Perhaps I should have said something?


    It was obvious that Nick wasn¡¯t used to this sort of thing.


    ¡°So, what has brought you here today¡­? Ah, I¡¯m terribly sorry. Pleasee inside¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, I¡¯m not here on any particr business. I just came here with Mr. Takumi, who wants to look around the town. So we do not need to go inside.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ But, you have no guards with you?¡±


    ¡°Well, I didn¡¯t tell Sebastian that I wasing today. And I expect you to keep this to yourself as well, Kalis. As for guards, Leo is enough to protect us.¡±


    ¡°Indeed, you would not need guards around if Leo is with you. Very well. I will not tell anyone about this. And I will say the same to Nick.¡±


    ¡°Good.¡±


    As Mr. Kalis and Mr. Ekenhart talked, it was decided that this would be kept a secret from Sebastian.


    ¡­Which seemed rather futile. Surely Sebastian would find out in no time at all?


    ¡°Yes, yes, Mr. Takumi. I wanted to ask you about Leo¡­¡±


    ¡°What about Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    And then Mr. Kalis turned to me.


    ¡°Well, uh¡­do you remember how Leo yed with some children in front of the store?¡±


    ¡°Ah, yes. It was the first day that the herbs went on sale.¡±


    ¡°I didn¡¯t know about that.¡±


    ¡°Yes. ¡­And ever since then, some of the children have been asking if Leo would ever return.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    Mr. Kalis was speaking very hesitantly. But ording to him, some of the children that had yed with Leo wanted to know when Leo would be back.


    When I looked at Leo, she wagged her tail and barked happily.


    It seemed that she was fine with it.


    ¡°In that case, we should gather the children here next time so that they can y with Leo. She does enjoy ying with children.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Then I will be able to share the good news with the children. If you could just tell me in advance before the next time that you visit.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I will do that.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    After all, children might not gather around if we came all of a sudden.


    But if they knew beforehand, then Mr. Kalis could call them for us.


    Leo seemed to be looking forward to it, and she barked happily.


    At first, they had just gathered around her, and Leo didn¡¯t know what to do. But once I taught them and had them form a line, they were able to y just fine and without any issue.


    ¡°Well, we should be going then.¡±


    ¡°Yes.


    ¡°Ah, please wait one moment. If you are going around the town, then please take this¡­¡±


    ¡°What is it¡­?¡±


    Now that we were finished talking, Mr. Ekenhart started to leave, but Mr. Kalis stopped us.


    He then took out something like a cloth and handed it to Mr. Ekenhart.


    ¡°Some people in the town might recognise you. And so it would be best to cover your face so you don¡¯t cause amotion.¡±


    ¡°Oh, I see. Very well.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart wrapped the cloth around his head so that it covered his mouth and most of his face.


    Indeed, I understood the logic of a disguise, but¡­


    But¡­


    Mr. Ekenhart was still dressed like a nobleman.


    And he was very tall.


    And his eyes were sharp¡­ And with these coverings, he looked rather intimidating¡­


    Even if people didn¡¯t recognize him as the duke, he looked like a very suspicious person.


    Maybe the guards would take him in for questioning¡­?


    Well, this wasn¡¯t Japan, so it was probably fine.


    In any case, I decided that I wouldn¡¯t worry about that now.


    ¡°Now, let¡¯s go, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­yes. Good bye, Mr. Kalis. We¡¯ll visit you again soon.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Please be safe.¡±


    And then the suspicious-looking Mr. Ekenhart walked away cheerfully.


    Mr. Kalis bowed his head, and I told him that we would be back. And then Leo and I walked away as well.

 Chapter 282

    Chapter 282


    We Ate At The Food Stalls


    ¡°Hmm¡­ggg¡­gulp¡­ Delicious! It is nice to eat such things asionally.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ Here, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    After leaving Mr. Kalis¡¯s store, I walked down the main street with Mr. Ekenhart.


    About half of the people that passed by were surprised when they saw Leo. Some would even run away. But the others did not seem to mind.


    Though, somee looked at Leo reverently¡­ Maybe they were the people who had touched Leo when we first came to Ractos?


    As we had been here several times before, I was happy to see that some people were used to her now.


    Because Leo would not attack anyone, and was not someone who should be feared.


    As we walked down the street, Mr. Ekenhart became interested in the meat that was being cooked in the food stalls.


    Well, it was really Leo who was the most interested.


    The meat was grilled on the spot and handed to you. It appeared to be beef with a special sauce, and was incredibly delicious.


    I bought three so that we could each have some¡­ I blew on Leo¡¯s to cool it off and then removed them from the skewer before she ate it.


    I didn¡¯t know if it was still the case, but dogs had sensitive tongues like cats, and the skewer could be dangerous¡­ Though, Leo was probably smart enough to eat it properly.


    ¡°While it is good to have your own cook, such casual dining has its charms¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart mused as he looked at the line of stalls.


    ¡°Have you eaten in such ces before?¡±


    ¡°Well¡­ A very long time ago. When ire was about this high¡­no, maybe smaller.¡±


    ¡°When she was a child then.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart smiled as he seemed to be reminiscing about the past.


    As the head of his house now, he had to travel with escorts. But I suppose this was before that time.


    I had wondered if Ms. ire only had escorts because she was ady, but it seemed that it was normal for Mr. Ekenhart as well.


    ¡°By the way, Mr. Takumi. How do you feel about Anneliese?¡±


    ¡°Are you trying to talk about rtionships again?¡±


    ¡°No, indeed not! Uh, mister¡­ I¡¯ll take three of those!¡±


    ¡°Certainly!¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart suddenly started to talk about Ms. Anne.


    And considering what had been on his mind while on the road, I was a little exasperated. But he insisted that this was different.


    But then he stopped at a food stall and ordered more food.


    ¡°Oh, this looks good too¡­ So, Mr. Takumi. About Anneliese¡­ What do you think? In terms of personality and her mind?¡±


    ¡°Is that chicken..? Yes, it does look good. Ms. Anne is¡­ We were able to talk once and¡­ Does my opinion really matter?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I¡¯d like to hear it¡­ Hmm¡­ This is delicious!¡±


    ¡°Thank you!¡±


    Apparently, Mr. Ekenhart wanted to hear my opinion on Ms. Anne.


    After epting the chicken, Mr. Ekenhart paid and then ate it immediately before turning back to me.


    The old man at the stall looked pleased to have his food praised so loudly as he handed me the other two.


    As for what I thought about Ms. Anne¡­ It¡¯s not like we knew each other that well¡­ But I told Mr. Ekenhart my impression after talking to her in her room.


    ¡°Well¡­ I don¡¯t know if it is normal for nobles to do that, but she seems to have spent too much time by herself. ¡­Hmm. Yes, it is quite delicious. Here, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    I answered as I ate the chicken.


    It was vored with salt and was also delicious.


    As Leo was looking at me and wagging her tail, I gave her some as well.


    ¡°Alone, eh? I wouldn¡¯t say it is normal as a noble¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, what I mean is¡­she thinks a lot about being in the privileged ss. That¡¯s why she was able to make that marriage proposal out of nowhere.¡±


    ¡°I see. Indeed, sometimes daughters of nobles will marry into other families. As noblewomen can inherit, it is not toomon¡­ But, it depends on their parents, I suppose. If the marriage is advantageous, they will likely marry into the other family, regardless if they get along or not.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I suppose it wouldn¡¯t happen a lot¡­ I understand that.¡±


    It had been like that in Japan.


    Well, not when I was there¡­but a long time ago.


    ¡°Because she thinks like that, and is too used to being by herself, she gets these crazy ideas all of a sudden¡­ Is what I thought. She does not value any interactions with other people¡­ And does not think about what is inside of others¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmmm¡­ Yes, I get the same impression from her. Well, it is all the fault of her father, Barsler¡­¡±


    ¡°You think so?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Count Barsler¡­.decades before I became the duke¡­he failed in one of his businesses. Well, it is not a rare thing to happen among nobles. And as long as he didn¡¯t live extravagantly, he could live well enough off the taxes he collected. In the first ce, a lot of people who are born nobles do not understand business. They think that they can sell anything because of who they are¡­ And they usually have ridiculous prices.¡±


    ¡°Well¡­it is no surprise that he failed then.¡±


    In general it, was a bnce between supply and demand of the products.


    If there was no demand, then it would not sell. And if you wanted to sell it at a high price, then you had to restrict the supply and increase the demand.


    But if you ignored all of that and simply sold it at a high price, then it would not sell.


    You had to sell things at the appropriate price and not fixate on high profits, or your business would not seed.


    Because consumers could be very severe.


    ¡°And he became frantic to make up for those failures, but only repeated those mistakes¡­¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s a bad environment.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Eventually, he started using the tax money for these failing businesses as well. That¡¯s how desperate he was. I think that is why he liked Anneliese¡¯s suggestion, regardless of the harm it would cause others.¡±

 Chapter 283

    Chapter 283


    I Asked About the Situation With The Count


    ¡°So he is a scoundrel that resorted to crime after drowning in debt?¡±


    ¡°Hahaha! You are not wrong! Well, they had been losing money for generations, and Barsler was trying to put an end to that. And so he left Anneliese to herself and focused on his businesses¡­ Without realizing the effect it had on her.¡±


    ¡°I see. So that¡¯s why she is so used to being alone.¡±


    ¡°It appears to be the case. Well, since they own the neighboring territory, I¡¯ve known House Barsler for a long time¡­ But during thest ten years, I¡¯ve only met him once a year at most. It is likely that ire was the only person to see Anneliese back then. Otherwise, she only met servants.¡±


    ¡°Were there never any gatherings where there were other nobles?¡±


    ¡°There were. But Barsler never took Anneliese to such events. I suppose he was too preupied with making connections and helping his business. But to put it bluntly, he might have had more sess if he used his daughter¡­¡±


    Had he taken his daughter to such parties, and she were to meet with other rich heirs¡­ That was what he was suggesting.


    If she were to marry into another family, or have someone marry into theirs¡­then the count might be able to get some aid that would help his business.


    ¡°Well, I¡¯m sure he had been thinking about it in some way. After all, Anneliese had said something about how she would use herself to bring back glory to her house. But I don¡¯t know why they didn¡¯t consider doing that first, instead of that other n.¡±


    ¡°So that¡¯s why she proposed to me, since I had Leo, and it would help her house.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Mmm. It is not just our family¡­but the entire country sees Silver Fenrirs as special. And so just having Leo there would help them greatly.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    While listening to us talk, Leo heard her name and looked at me questioningly as I petted her.


    So, it was because of that situation, that she had suddenly said such things in the carriage.


    In order to revive the house¡­


    Still, I had no intention of allowing someone to use Leo. And I did not want to be a nobleman either.


    ¡°Well, due to those reasons, Anneliese rarely left her father¡¯s house, and was mostly just surrounded by her own servants. But this wasn¡¯t because he ordered her to. She herself did not want to go outside, so it¡¯s her own fault as well. And as you said, Mr. Takumi, she got too used to being alone with her own thoughts.¡±


    ¡°Only servants around her¡­ I don¡¯t know much about nobles, but I suppose there are not many who can detect what their servants are feeling and act on it. And so they only see them as servants, and do not think about others¡­¡±


    When looking at Ms. ire, Tilura, and Mr Ekenhart, one might assume that most nobles were like them, but it was likely not the case.


    I¡¯m sure there were other nobles like Mr. Ekenhart, but the ss system made you think that you were special.


    In fact, there were people like that in Japan as well.


    Like certain bosses at certainpanies¡­


    ¡°And that was why¡­she coulde up with such ns as she did. Without realizing the kind of suffering it would cause. And Barsler listened to her, and acted on her advice while thinking only of his own profit.¡±


    ¡°Well¡­I¡¯m still not sure I can be sympathetic.¡±


    ¡°Oh, you don¡¯t have to be sympathetic towards Barsler. He has what it takes to make such a decision. He knew what he was doing was wrong. As for Anneliese¡­ I will not say that she is guiltless, even if she only thought of things¡­¡±


    ¡°I suppose it was because of her environment¡­¡±


    ¡°Mmm. In any normal family, he would have corrected her after making such suggestions. And so that is why I asked the royal family to entrust me with educating her.¡±


    ¡°¡­Hmm?¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    Huh?


    Did he just say that he asked the royal family?


    ¡°Well¡­uh, previously, didn¡¯t you say that they asked you to take in Ms. Anne?¡±


    ¡°Mmm¡­well, in fact, I was the one to ask them. I just thought it would be a pity for her to be punished along with her father. Of course, if she does not change her ways, then she will meet the same fate as him¡­ Their entire house will be crushed into nothing. ¡­Well, I suppose that as a father of a daughter that is the same age, I took pity on her¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ So you think by putting her in the right environment, she will be a decent person?¡±


    ¡°Exactly. However, it all depends on Anneliese. Ah, do not tell ire or Sebastian about this, you understand? It will make matters moreplicated¡­¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. Because Ms. ire will get mad at you again?¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    To Mr. Ekenhart and I, the two looked like they got along very well, even if Ms. ire often acted harshly.


    But if Ms. ire found out that Mr. Ekenhart himself had wanted to take Ms. Anne in, she might get angry.


    But why did Ms. ire treat Ms. Anne so harshly¡­?


    I admit, it was amusing to watch them like that, but¡­ One would think you would be a little more pleasant to a friend that was your own age.

 Chapter 284

    Chapter 284


    A Happy Food Stall Discovery


    ¡°But that¡¯s enough talk, Mr. Takumi. We should focus on eating right now. See, there are more food stalls over there!¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    As the conversation was a little heavy, Mr. Ekenhart wanted to change the subject. And then he cheerfully walked towards the next stall.


    In the end, it all depended on Ms. Anne herself. So there was no point in us talking about it.


    Though¡­it did make me think about how I would interact with her.


    But for now, I will try to enjoy my time in the town of Ractos.


    Besides, Leo had not eaten enough yet, and she was wagging her tail as she looked at the meat.


    ¡°Oh, this one is good. Ractos really does have all kinds of food. Here, try this one, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes, yes. ¡­Hmm, yes it is quite good. Here, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart went around to different stalls until his hands were full with food, and then he began to bite into it.


    I suppose since Ms. ire wasn¡¯t around today, he could enjoy his food without worrying about manners.


    And so I followed his advice and bought some food and ate it, while also giving some to Leo.


    Indeed, they were all delicious, but¡­ I was getting bored of it, since it was all meat¡­


    But it seemed like that was all that Leo and Mr. Ekenhart liked.


    ¡°It would be nice if they had something less heavy¡­ Something that isn¡¯t meat.¡±


    ¡°Hmm. Yes, I suppose one might get bored of it¡­ Not that I would.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    And so we moved away from the meat stalls and looked around for something else.


    Mr. Ekenhart did not mind only eating meat, and Leo barked in agreement. But I wanted something different.


    Though, I suppose I didn¡¯t really have to worry about nutritional bnce, since we would have a proper meal when we returned to the mansion anyway.


    So it was more of a matter of variety.


    ¡°Oh, what about that one¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Yes, that one seems a little different. Should we go and see it?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Let¡¯s go.¡±


    After looking around, most of the other stalls were also just cooking meat. But then I saw one that was a little different.


    And so I walked over to it with Mr. Ekenhart and Leo, and realized that there was something familiar about the smell.


    ¡°Wee!¡±


    ¡°Is this¡­pasta? Though, it is quite dark¡­but, it does smell good¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Yakisoba? But why in a ce like this¡­¡±


    I could smell the scent of burning sauce.


    It reminded me of festivals and the food they sold at the beach.


    But isn¡¯t it¡­a Japanese dish?


    Well, I suppose it could be made anywhere. So maybe it wasn¡¯t all that strange¡­


    ¡°Mister. What are you making? I have never seen it before¡­¡±


    ¡°Aye! This is called yakisoba. It¡¯s just fried noodles and vegetables with a special sauce! As there is not much meat, I wouldn¡¯t rmend it if you¡¯re craving meat, but it¡¯s still very delicious!¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Yakisoba¡­ I have never heard that name before¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Well, that was no surprise.


    But it was familiar to me.


    It was something that anyone in Japan would recognize.


    Leo seemed to remember it as well, as she was wagging her tail and drooling as she looked up at the yakisoba.


    ¡°Mister, I¡¯ll take three.¡±


    ¡°Aye,ing right up!¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re going to eat it, Mr. Takumi? It looks burnt¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course. It¡¯s actually really good!¡±


    ¡°It is? And you have eaten it before?¡±


    ¡°Yes. It was verymon in the ce that I¡¯m from.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    And so I bought three from the old man and paid him.


    I had already told Mr. Ekenhart that I hade from another world.


    After learning that I had eaten this there, he went from being hesitant to being interested in it.


    As Leo knew about it already, she barked happily as she waited.


    I know that you¡¯re happy, but don¡¯t bark so loudly, okay? You¡¯re going to scare the old man.


    ¡°Here you go!¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Here, Mr. Ekenhart. Leo. Be careful, since it¡¯s quite hot.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Let us taste it then.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    The yakisoba was put in containers made ofyered paper. I epted them and then passed them to Mr. Ekenhart and Leo.


    Then we were given small wooden forks.


    Chopsticks would have been nice¡­but I would notin.


    Besides, I doubted Mr. Ekenhart would be able to use them.


    ¡°Let¡¯s eat it then. ¡­Zuru-zuru-zuru! Yes, it¡¯s good!¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­ I don¡¯t mean to sound like my daughter, but perhaps you should stop slurping like that when you eat?¡±


    ¡°Ahaha. Yes, I suppose you¡¯re right.¡±


    ¡°¡­Well, maybe it¡¯s not too bad. And since ire isn¡¯t around¡­ Zuru-zuru-zur! Hmm!¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s good, isn¡¯t it?¡±


    ¡°Yes! It¡¯s tasty!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    I used the fork to eat the noodles along with the meat and vegetables.


    As it wasn¡¯t soup, there was no need to slurp it, but I got carried away, since it had been a while since Ist ate it.


    As the noodles were pasta, the texture was a little different, but it was still good.


    Even the sauce was a little distinct, while also being recognizable.


    In any case, I did not expect to see it here, and I was more than satisfied.


    Mr. Ekenhart then copied the way I ate it, and his eyes widened with delight.


    Leo allowed hers to cool off a little and then gobbled it up quickly. So she must have liked it as well.


    Though, it would have been nice to have some seaweed kes with it¡­


    ¡°Ah, that was very tasty. I suppose it was because the sauce was so dark? And the vegetables and meat gave it a good bnce.¡±


    ¡°You can adjust it to your liking.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Maybe I will ask Helena to make some¡­ Of course, we will have to eat it differently in front of ire.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true. It¡¯s not good manners here¡­ Alright, Leo. I wiped most of it off.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Once she was finished eating, I wiped the sauce from around Leo¡¯s mouth, and talked with Mr. Ekenhart.


    I was d that Mr. Ekenhart also enjoyed it so much.


    And while I had wiped Leo with a wet cloth¡­there was still some sauce left on her¡­ I suppose she would have to take a bath when we returned.

 Chapter 285

    Chapter 285


    Various Familiar Food


    ¡°But Mr. Ekenhart, if you do want Ms. Helena to be able to make it, then she will have to recreate that sauce.¡±


    ¡°Hmm. Really?¡±


    ¡°Yes. It¡¯s the defining part¡­ It¡¯s all because of the sauce that it tastes like that.¡±


    ¡°Then perhaps I better ask that man how to make it¡­¡±


    ¡°Surely he will not want to give up such a secret so easily¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ One might use their authority in such cases, but I do not want to do that.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    If Mr. Ekenhart was serious, then he could use his position as a duke and make them tell him how to make the sauce.


    However, like Ms. ire had said before, their family preferred to avoid using their authority in such ways.


    There was no need to find out by force.


    ¡°Still, I underestimated these people¡­ Now, let us look around and see if we can find anything else.¡±


    ¡°Yes. There may be other great things to discover.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    While it wasn¡¯t exactly the same, I had found something simr to Japanese food. So who knows what else we might find?


    It seemed like he had forgotten his reason foring here, and was only interested in eating now¡­ But I suppose it was fine.


    Both Leo and I were enjoying it anyway.


    And more than that, I doubted I could even stop Mr. Ekenhart once he started to have fun like this.


    ¡°Phew¡­ We walked quite a lot.¡±


    ¡°Indeed.¡±


    ¡°However, I learned a great deal about what this town has to offer.¡±


    ¡°Yes. It really is a busy ce, and there are many shops.¡±


    After eating the yakisoba, we walked around the streets with Mr. Ekenhart as he looked around the town.


    We were quite full now, and so we stopped by a cafe that was not too crowded and that was away from the main street.


    As it was an open cafe, we were able to sit outside near Leo.


    Apparently, it was run by the parents of one of the children who had yed with Leo, and so they were very d to see us.


    Thanks to this, they also understood that Leo wasn¡¯t dangerous.


    ¡°Wuff-guff-guff¡­¡±


    ¡°Leo. Calm down when you drink, okay?¡±


    ¡°Guff-guff¡­¡±


    I wasn¡¯t sure if she heard me or was ignoring me¡­ But she was now eagerly drinking milk from a bucket that had been prepared for her.


    I was grateful that they had been so kind to prepare it while Mr. Ekenhart and I enjoyed our tea and rxed.


    It had been the case when eating as well, but the cloth that was supposed to be covering Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s face was mostly just around his forehead and chin, so I wasn¡¯t sure it was very effective.


    Well, it did cover his unkempt beard, and since what was visible was actually quite handsome, it would probably be fine.


    After all, the most striking thing about his appearance had always been his beard.


    ¡°There really were a lot of interesting things¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    As we drank our tea, I thought about thest thing that I had eaten.


    There were grilled dumplings and salted fish.


    Mr. Ekenhart had been muttering about wanting wine with his fish¡­


    There were also some thick noodles that reminded me of udon, especially since it was in a broth made from kelp.


    Ah, and there was also fried chicken.


    I was rather pleased to discover that there was a lot of famr food in this ce.


    Well, sort of familiar¡­but not a total match.


    But since they were things I thought that I would never eat again¡­ I was more than satisfied.


    Now, if only I could find some rice somewhere¡­


    As I had been raised on it, I couldn¡¯t help but look for it.


    While I didn¡¯t find any this time, I would look for it the next time I visited.


    My Weed Cultivation was not able to make any farm produce, so I wouldn¡¯t be able to make rice¡­


    ¡°Thank you, Takumi. It¡¯s because of you that I was able to get a good look at the town.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. I had fun as well, so it was nothing. Even though it was mostly just eating.¡±


    ¡°Now that you mention it¡­¡±


    Aside from visiting Mr. Kalis¡¯s store, we had spent most of the time at different food stalls.


    Well, since there was the most traffic on the main street, it was the best ce to have people see Leo¡­ That was a good enough reason.


    But perhaps we should have looked around more?


    Well, that could be done on another day.


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes?¡±


    As I watched Leo and sipped my tea, Mr. Ekenhart turned to me again.


    What now¡­ I wondered.


    ¡°I intend to go to Range vige soon. There is the matter of the wine, after all. Besides, I would like to assure the vigers that they are not to me, andmend them for the way they dealt with the monsters.¡±


    ¡°I see. I think it would be a very good thing if they were able to make wine there again.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. I will have to talk to the chief about the wine, and about the acquisition of grapes as well.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ But, uh, perhaps don¡¯t make it too much about work?¡±


    ¡°Huh? What do you mean?¡±


    ¡°Well, the thing is¡­¡±


    I recalled what I had discussed with Mr. Haines before leaving Range vige, and I ryed it to Mr. Ekenhart.


    About how they were too preupied with making wine, that they were not able to spend time with the children.


    ¡°Hmm¡­indeed¡­ Children out the treasures of the kingdom. It is not good to neglect them. Very well. I promise that I will not make them work to the point that it will affect the children.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    While I may have made the request to Mr. Ekenhart on the children¡¯s behalf, it was probably rted to my past as well.


    Though it is important to make money, the situation where you are only working and have no time for anything else¡­it is not good for humans.


    I didn¡¯t want the vigers to experience the same thing, where they be exhausted both mentally and physically.


    Well, I doubted Mr. Ekenhart would have allowed that, and neither would the vigers.

 Chapter 286

    Chapter 286


    We Talked About Weed Cultivation


    ¡°The thing is, Mr. Takumi. I want you to apany me to Range vige.¡±


    ¡°You do?¡±


    I knew that due to the wine, I would have to make Ramogi, but¡­ I had assumed that someone could be sent to deliver it, just like with Mr. Kalis¡¯s store.


    However¡­ I suppose for Mr. Hannes and the others, it would be best if it was someone that they knew.


    Besides, there was the wine that used the medicine that Milina had worked hard to make. If it was a sess, then I might have to ask them to make that as well.


    ¡­Of course, that was after Mr. Ekenhart drank it and gave his permission.


    ¡°Well, I am acquainted with the people of the vige, so it might be best for me to go there. The chief and the others might be worried if I don¡¯t.¡±


    ¡°Aye, that was part of the reason I¡¯m asking¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, that wasn¡¯t the main reason then?¡±


    I had assumed that Mr. Ekenhart was worried, since they had been so recently fooled by a merchant. But I suppose it was not the case.


    ¡°I was thinking that I wanted you to focus on using Weed Cultivation in Range vige¡­¡±


    ¡°Weed Cultivation?¡±


    ¡°Mmm. There are limits to your ability, yes? ire said that you will faint if you use it too much.¡±


    ¡°¡­That¡¯s true. Well, it¡¯s still spection, but that¡¯s what we think.¡±


    ¡°And so if you agree to it, I thought it would be good to make a herb garden in Range vige. That way, we will be able to have enough herbs for the territory without relying on your ability too much. And it can be used for the wine¡­¡±


    ¡°A herb garden¡­ Yes, if we had something like that, we could have a lot of herbs, even if I weren¡¯t making them every day¡­¡±


    There was a limit to how many herbs I could make with Weed Cultivation.


    And while I hadn¡¯t fainted since that time with Sherry, I had avoided overworking myself and making a lot of herbs.


    Because if Sebastian¡¯s theory was true, then working too much would cause me to faint.


    And I didn¡¯t want Ms. ire and Leo to worry about me.


    ¡°Indeed? Well, unlike your ability¡­it will not be incredibly fast. But being able to make great quantities has its advantages. The only question is¡­whether your herbs can be nted¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ Are there any other ces where herbs are being raised?¡±


    ¡°No. ¡­Well, perhaps it is done somewhere. But not in this country. It is only herbs that are grown in nature that are picked. And so they are not distributed evenly.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ But if you want to test this, wouldn¡¯t the mansion be a better location?¡±


    ¡°I did consider that as well. As ire and the servants are there, it would be easier to manage. But the space¡­¡±


    ¡°Ahh¡­yes. Especially since Leo runs around a lot.¡±


    While some could be grown in the back garden, Leo liked to run around, and it wasn¡¯t thatrge to begin with.


    I could ask Leo to be careful and not step on the flowers, but that could lead to stress.


    Besides, Silver Fenrirs were special to the duke¡¯s house, so they might not want to restrict her freedom like that.


    ¡°Aside from the matter of Leo, even if it does go well, there will not be much room for expansion.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true. If it does go well¡­ It will be inconvenient to move or to expand at the mansion.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. But it must be tested before we can say anything. And if it is done over there, you can hire people to tend to it.¡±


    ¡°Hire people?¡±


    ¡°Aye. If all goes well, that is¡­ After all, you cannot manage arge garden all by yourself. But in Range vige you could hire people and have them live there.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    I would have to hire people to manage it.


    This was exactly the kind of thing I had talked about with Ms. Lyra.


    Hiring people¡­ I had never had to interview someone before. Will it be alright?


    Well, first, I had to test different herbs and see if they would take root.


    And who knew if that would seed¡­


    It would take a few days to find out, so I¡¯ll have to think of something to do in the meantime.


    ¡°Well, that being said, since we won¡¯t be going right away, you¡¯ll have time to experiment a little at the mansion.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes. Once I get back, I¡¯ll use what free time that I have to see if I can raise nts that I made with Weed Cultivation.¡±


    ¡°Aye, that is good. I will discuss the matter with Sebastian as soon as I get back, so that things can be arranged.¡±


    ¡°Well, I think you¡¯ll have to endure a lecture first.¡±


    ¡°Oh, do you think so?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    I agreed that I would experiment a little at the mansion.


    Aside from that, I did think that when Mr. Ekenhart returned to the mansion, he would be scolded.


    Even Sebastian would be mad, as he would have probably noticed very quickly¡­


    ¡°I did leave a note in my room¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ At least they won¡¯t be worried or assemble a search party¡­¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­ He will be mad that I left without saying anything or taking a guard.¡±


    ¡°Yes. And Ms. ire won¡¯t be happy either.¡±


    ¡°ire¡­ I¡¯ll manage. I can change the subject if I talk about what happened yesterday.¡±


    Apparently, Mr. Ekenhart wasn¡¯t worried about Ms. ire.


    Though¡­I suppose with her, it was possible to change the subject. But there would be no getting away if she teamed up with Sebastian.


    ¡­I would have to be prepared as well.


    Even though he asked us, Leo and I were still the ones who brought him here.


    If you enjoy this series, please consider donating or joining the Patreon, where there are daily updates. I could really use the support right now. Thank /tigertrantions

 Chapter 287

    Chapter 287


    We Continued To Sightsee In Ractos


    ¡°Speaking of Ms. ire, is she alright? She drank quite a lot of wine yesterday¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, she will be fine. While she is quick to get drunk, she always acts like nothing happened the next day.¡±


    ¡°She doesn¡¯t get hangovers?¡±


    ¡°Not that I have seen. However¡­she does remember everything she did while drunk. But she is a deep sleeper, and will usually sleep for most of the next day. And then when she wakes up¡­¡±


    ¡°She thinks about what she does and regrets¡­?¡±


    ¡°Yes. And so she will try not to drink so much next time¡­ But I suppose yesterday was special. The wine was so delicious and easy to drink. And it was the first time she had it, so she ended up drinking a little too much.¡±


    So Ms. ire didn¡¯t get hangovers, and also remembered everything. Much to her own dismay.


    Perhaps getting a hangover and forgetting was the better between the two.


    Well, sometimes it could be very bad, with the headaches and feeling sick.


    As for me, I tended to get hangovers even if I didn¡¯t drink all that much, so I rted to Ms. Anne¡­


    Well, I had often been forced to drink with coworkers. And then the next day I would have to work from early in the morning.


    ¡­So perhaps it was a good thing that I no longer felt drunk or got hangovers in this world.


    Though, it did feel good to get a little drunk, so that was a minus.


    ¡°¡­I see. Do you think she¡¯ll be alright? I wanted to have another taste test tomorrow¡­¡±


    I had told Milina about it in the morning. Tomorrow, we would taste the wine that Ms. Helena made, that contained the medicine.


    If Ms. ire was wallowing in regret, maybe she wouldn¡¯t want to drink it?


    ¡°Hmm, that¡¯s true. There is still more that is being made. Sebastian told me about it. However¡­ire might not drink it this time¡­ It depends on just how much she regrets yesterday¡­ Especially since you saw her.¡±


    ¡°Me? What about you and Ms. Anne?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know about Anneliese, but I¡¯ve seen her like that many times. So it should be fine. However, she prides herself as being ady, so when ites to being seen by people who are not family or servants¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ I see. Well, if she does not want to drink it, then perhaps we could prepare some juice for her instead.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that might be good.¡±


    Ms. ire was hard on herself¡­and quite hard on her younger sister as well¡­


    So she might be regretting that she had allowed herself to be seen in such a way.


    And if she avoided drinking¡­that would be too bad, as I had wanted her to drink it.


    But we would just have to give her something else.


    ¡°Now, what will we do next?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ As Leo is with us, we cannot go inside any of the stores¡­ And there is no one who can watch Leo for us.¡±


    Leo was much too big to go inside any buildings.


    It would be fine if there was a ce that was asrge as the mansion, but there weren¡¯t any here.


    And I didn¡¯t want to ask Mr. Ekenhart to wait outside and watch her.


    Next time, I would have to consider bringing someone else with me, so that I could go into the stores.


    ¡°Well, we do not need to enter any shops then. We can just go around and see the town.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s fine. Don¡¯t you agree, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    After leaving the cafe, we decided to walk around and see the town.


    We had eaten enough at the stalls for lunch. Maybe a little too much even. So we didn¡¯t need to worry about that.


    But I thought it would be a good idea to get an idea of where everything was in the town while we were here.


    ¡°By the way, Mr. Ekenhart.¡±


    ¡°Hmm. What is it?¡±


    ¡°What is on the northern side of this town?¡±


    ¡°Ah, the north¡­¡±


    I asked Mr. Ekenhart about this just as we reached the east side.


    On the west side was Mr. Kalis¡¯s store, as well as the gate we always went through.


    As for the east side, that¡¯s where the malicious store used to be, as well as the gate I went through when going to Range vige.


    Also, the orphanage was slightly south of the east gate.


    But I had yet to venture towards the north side of this town.


    In this town, there was arge street that went through the center, and it connected the east and west gates.


    Most people traveled through this town when traveling in those directions.


    And from there, they branched off to the south and north¡­ But what was there to the north?


    But when I asked Mr. Ekenhart about it, his expression became serious.


    Was there a problem?


    ¡°It is not something I like to say out loud¡­ But do you know about slums, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Slums¡­ A ce where the poor sses live, and there is a high crime rate?¡±


    ¡°Something of that sort. Well, we do what we can to deal with crime. So it is not actually very high. It¡¯s just a little less safe than other ces.¡±


    Slums, huh¡­ I had heard stories. There were definitely ces like that outside of Japan.


    Though, I heard that there were ces that were simr enough in Japan as well. Some ces could be quite dangerous.


    But it was not something that I knew a lot about, and so it was hard to imagine it.


    ¡°And this slum is on the north side?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ We are trying to reduce such ces on thesends. There are none around the towns near our main house. But here¡­far away, where there are so many people¡­ It is much more difficult.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    As it was far away from where he lived, he could not act quickly, and things had not progressed enough.


    Unlike Japan, you could not travel quickly over long distances in this world.


    Besides, since there was so much traffic in and out of the town, it was hard to keep track of who was in it¡­ If so much happened out of sigh, then it was harder to do something about it.


    And perhaps this work was a little too dangerous for someone like Ms. ire.

 Chapter 288

    Chapter 288


    Leo Led Us To The North Side


    ¡°And so while going a little to the north side might be fine¡­ I would not advise you to go too deep, even if you are with Leo.¡±


    ¡°I see. Very well. I will be careful to not go anywhere that is dangerous.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. That is good. You do not want to get into any unnecessary trouble.¡±


    Better safe than sorry, I suppose.


    And so I would avoid going close to ces that I already knew weren¡¯t safe.


    ¡°But still¡­Mr Takumi. Uh¡­it seems like Leo is leading the way?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ I wonder what¡¯s the matter?¡±


    ¡°¡­You do realize that she is going to the north side that we were just talking about?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Leo, what is it? Is there something over there that you¡¯re interested in?¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff!¡±


    ¡°So there is¡­¡±


    ¡°What is Leo saying?¡±


    ¡°Apparently, there is a presence that interests her. ¡­What should we do?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Normally, I would not like to go in there without some guards¡­ But since it¡¯s Leo¡­I do not want to get in her way.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart seemed troubled as he watched Leo walking.


    Indeed, ever since we got close to the east gate, Leo had moved to the front and started walking as if she knew where she was going.


    And while Mr. Ekenhart followed after her, we soon realized that she was headed to the north.


    ording to Leo, there was something up ahead that she wanted to see¡­


    And for now, Mr. Ekenhart didn¡¯t want to bother Leo.


    I suppose it was because he and his family had so much respect for Silver Fenrirs.


    But Leo didn¡¯t care about such things, so it should be fine¡­


    However, Leo had never acted like this before¡­ I didn¡¯t know what she was thinking, but it might be best to let her do what she wanted for now.


    ¡°I am also curious about it. So I will go¡­ You should stay here, Mr. Ekenhart.¡±


    ¡°No, I will go with you. After all, I can fight if something happens. Besides, the slums here are not as bad as some other ces. It should be fine¡­ Mostly likely¡­¡±


    ¡°Very well. Then let¡¯s stay prepared as we go.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    And so we followed after Leo while staying on our guard.


    Both of us had our hands on our sword hilts as we looked at our surroundings.


    I didn¡¯t like the idea of unsheathing my sword on the streets, but we might not have a choice.


    As for Leo, she too was looking around and sniffing, like she was searching for something.


    There must really be something that interested her.


    But what could it be?


    If it turned out to be something like the smell of a delicious sausage¡­ I would have to lecture Leo once we returned to the mansion¡­


    ¡°Still, what do you think good Leo wants in a ce like this¡­?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know¡­ It seems like she is searching for something, but¡­¡±


    We had gone quite far to the north now, but Leo was still sniffing and walking around.


    This ce was different from the great street, and had a dreary atmosphere.


    Most of the houses were in disrepair, and the shops looked quite empty.


    And not just of customers, but of products as well¡­


    Regardless of how Mr. Ekenhart and I felt, Leo continued her journey up north.


    What could she possibly find here¡­


    ¡°Have you noticed, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Yes. When it¡¯s this obvious¡­¡±


    Now that we were deep in the north side, I could see people on the roads and in the spaces between houses.


    They all wore dirty clothes and nkets, and they stared at Mr. Ekenhart, me and Leo.


    Most looked surprised or scared¡­ I suppose it was just because of Leo.


    ¡°Wearing clean clothes really makes you stick out here.¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed.¡±


    Our clothes had been washed thoroughly at the mansion.


    And so it was no wonder that we would draw attention here.


    But even still, it seemed to be Leo¡¯s beautiful, silver coat that they could not take their eyes off of¡­


    ¡°Wuff¡­? Wuff-wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°What is it, Leo? Did you find it?¡±


    ¡°¡­I don¡¯t think we should stay for too long. What is it, good Leo?¡±


    There was nothing we could do about the stares, and so we just continued to walk past the dreary houses.


    Suddenly, Leo stopped in her tracks and turned around as if she was trying to say something to me.


    Upon hearing her bark, some of the spectators shuddered with fear, but I ignored them for now.


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s over there?¡±


    ¡°Hmm?¡±


    Leo pointed with her nose and from paw to a gap between two houses.


    And so Mr. Ekenhart and I moved towards it to see what was there.


    ¡°¡­!¡±


    ¡°¡­!!¡±


    ¡°It sounds like a fight¡­ Is someone being attacked?¡±


    ¡°It does sound like that¡­ But if it was dangerous, Leo would have jumped in herself.¡±


    I could hear someone¡¯s voice from the gap.


    And it did sound like people were fighting.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Huh? A child? We should help it?¡±


    ¡°Is that true, good Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ording to Leo, a child was being attacked up ahead.


    And she wanted us to save it.


    Indeed, if that was the case, we should go¡­ But it was odd that Leo hadn¡¯t gone herself.


    She liked children, so I would have thought she would have rushed towards it. That¡¯s when I noticed it.


    The gap was too narrow for Leo to go through¡­


    It was barely wide enough for a single human to fit.


    So if Leo tried to go through, she would just get stuck.


    That was why she was urging us to go instead¡­

 Chapter 289

    Chapter 289


    A Girl Was Being Bullied


    ¡°Very well. ¡­Mr. Ekenhart.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. While I didn¡¯t want to get involved in any fights here¡­ If that¡¯s what good Leo wants, then we must go.¡±


    ¡°Yes. ¡­I will go first, so you can follow after me. ¡­Leo, you go around from the other side. It¡¯s happening on the street on the other side, right?¡±


    ¡°Very well. But be careful, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    After lightly nning a course of action, Mr. Ekenhart and Leo agreed, and so I went into the gap.


    Mr. Ekenhart unsheathed his sword and followed me cautiously.


    As for Leo, after nodding to me, she ran off in order to go around the building.


    So, what was happening up ahead then¡­


    ¡°Hey, get out of here! Hey!¡±


    ¡°You man-eater! This is no ce for the likes of you!¡±


    ¡°Get out! Get out!¡±


    ¡°¡­! ¡­!¡±


    Once I came out on the other side, I saw that it was a square of emptynd. Perhaps there had once been a building there.


    And I could hear the voices clearly now¡­ It wasn¡¯t so much a fight, as one side shouting angrily.


    And in the center of the ground, a single child was kneeling, while three other children¡­perhaps they were about the age of junior highschool students¡­were kicking and punching.


    As for the child in the center, it was trying its best not to make any noise.


    ¡°Hey, what are you kids doing!¡±


    ¡°Huh? Be quiet, old man.¡±


    ¡°Shut up and go away.¡±


    ¡°We¡¯re defeating the evil man eating beast.¡±


    ¡°Man eating beast¡­?¡±


    I couldn¡¯t help but shout as I stepped forward.


    But regardless of what their reasoning was, there was no excuse to surround a child and hurt them like this.


    As for the children who were doing it, they immediately turned to me angrily.


    ¡­It did not feel good to be called an old man¡­but that was not important right now.


    I wondered why they called the child a man eater. After all, the child just seemed like a little girl.


    Though, I could not see her face¡­ But she was probably younger than Tilura.


    ¡°I don¡¯t care what your reason is. You should not be bullying such a small child like this!¡±


    ¡°What are you talking about, old man?¡±


    ¡°This thing eats people! And so we have to defeat it while we can!¡±


    ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter if it is small! It is a monster!¡±


    ¡°Even if that was true, it is not your job. If it really does eat people, then you should leave it to the town guards.¡±


    But to me, the child looked like an ordinary human.


    Perhaps there were monsters who looked like humans¡­ But I didn¡¯t know enough about monsters.


    As for humanoid monsters¡­ Orcs did walk on two legs, but their faces were closer to pigs. And this child did not look like them.


    Regardless, even if this child was a monster, they did not need to deal with it. They should just ask the guards.


    Even if this was the slums, surely they would do something about a monster that had entered.


    ¡°Hmph! You¡¯re just trying to steal our prey, aren¡¯t you, old man?¡±


    ¡°No, I¡¯m not.¡±


    ¡°Just shut up and go away! And leave this monster to us!¡±


    ¡°If you don¡¯t listen, you¡¯ll be next, old man!¡±


    ¡°¡­Mr. Ekenhart¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Mr. Takumi, while it is not a very mature thing to do against children¡­you may have to use force. Though, I would prefer to avoid it¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, it could stir up the others¡­¡±


    ¡°Mmm. We do not want to have to fight them.¡±


    ¡°But we can¡¯t just leave her¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed. I agree with that. Very well. But you must go easy on them.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes. It¡¯s not like I¡¯m going to kill them.¡±


    Even as we were talking, some of the people who had been staring at us before had gathered to watch.


    As we were outsiders, we would probably be seen as enemies¡­


    I could use the narrow gaps between the houses. So that even if it was difficult to move, I would not have to fight with multiple people at once.


    Mr. Ekenhart was here too, so it was unlikely that we¡¯d lose. And if people made enough noise, then maybe the guards would notice ande to our aid.


    Though, I felt bad for putting Mr. Ekenhart in this situation¡­


    Sebastian and Ms. ire would be furious when they heard about what happened.


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°Wh-what!?¡±


    ¡°Ah!¡±


    ¡°It-it¡¯s a monster! A wolf monster!¡±


    Just as Mr. Ekenhart and I had decided on our course of action, Leo came running from the opposite side.


    That was quick, Leo.


    The children saw Leo and were afraid. And the people who had been watching began to run away.


    ¡°GRRRRR¡­ Grau!¡±


    ¡°Ahhh! Help me!¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s a monster!¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s going to attack!¡±


    ¡°¡­They ran away.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Thanks to Leo, we were able to avoid an unnecessary battle.¡±


    ¡°It looks like it.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Good, good. Well done, Leo!¡±


    Leo had growled and then roared at the children. And then after shaking her body, the children ran away.


    Now, it was only me, Mr. Ekenhart, Leo, and the crouching girl that remained.


    As I was relieved that everyone had run away, Leo looked at me with a smug expression, so I praised her and tousled her fur.


    I was relieved that I hadn¡¯t gotten Mr. Ekenhart involved in a fight after all.


    ¡°Now, what should we do about this child¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­If we leave her here, the other children mighte back¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart sheathed his sword and muttered as he looked at the girl.


    She continued to crouch as she trembled with fear.


    Perhaps she was even more scared than before, after hearing Leo¡¯s bark.

 Chapter 290

    Chapter 290


    Leo Was Shocked That The Girl Was Scared Of Her


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°¡­Eeee!¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff-wuff. Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    Just as I was wondering what to do, Leo slowly approached the girl and looked into her face and barked.


    The girl raised her head, and the moment that she saw Leo, she immediately hid again and started to tremble with fear.


    ¡­Well, that big face was in front of her suddenly, so it was no wonder.


    Leo looked like she was trying to tell her that she didn¡¯t need to be afraid, but it was no use.


    ¡°It-it¡¯s going to eat me!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!? Wuff-wuff! Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­ Leo, you¡¯re just scaring her even more. You should move away for now.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Leo was shocked by the words of the girl, who misunderstood and believed that she was about to be eaten.


    I won¡¯t eat you. She seemed to say as she pressed her nose against the girl, and tried patting her with her paws, but it had no effect.


    And while I felt bad for Leo, I asked her to move away from the girl.


    Ah, Leo walked over to the corner sulkily¡­ Her back was turned to me, and she seemed so crestfallen.


    Upon seeing this, Mr. Ekenhart went to console her.


    Thank you, Mr. Ekenhart.


    I then squatted down next to the girl and talked to her gently.


    She was shaking like a leaf. If anything, it seemed like Leo had frightened her much more than the children did earlier¡­


    In any case, I needed to make her calm down and tell her that there was no need to be afraid now.


    From the corner of my eye, I saw Mr. Ekenhart patting Leo¡¯s back.


    ¡°No one will insult you or hurt you now. Don¡¯t worry, don¡¯t worry¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    I gently repeated the words to her.


    In times like this, it would have been nice to have experience withforting frightened children.


    Well, this was not a usual situation. And anyway, it was best if there weren¡¯t any frightened children to begin with.


    Regardless, after repeatedly reassuring her, she finally spoke in a quiet voice.


    Almost there¡­


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. Nothing scary will happen¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Really?¡±


    ¡°¡­Really. Because there is nothing here that you have to be afraid of.¡±


    She stopped shaking and seemed to have believed my words. And so she removed her hands from her head and slowly looked up.


    Her face¡­ Well, the part of her head that she had been holding down was a surprise, but I ignored it and smiled gently and told her that it was fine.


    I hoped that the surprise hadn¡¯t shown on my face¡­and that I was smiling normally¡­ While I was worried, she was looking straight at my face.


    And so I was careful to not let anything show.


    ¡°See? None of those children are here now. So it¡¯s fine.¡±


    ¡°¡­What about that big wolf?¡±


    ¡°Uh, well¡­¡±


    She was talking about Leo.


    I could still see the fear in her eyes as she looked around as if searching for this wolf.


    Was it okay to show her now¡­? As for Leo she was still being consoled by Mr. Ekenhart, but was looking in our direction.


    She made sure that her back was still turned to us, but¡­ She must have been very shocked that a child thought that she was going to eat them.


    It would be one thing if it was an adult, but Leo had always been popr with children¡­


    ¡°Is the wolf¡­gone now?¡±


    ¡°No, uh¡­ That wolf won¡¯t eat you or hurt you or anything.¡±


    ¡°¡­But it¡¯s so big¡­¡±


    ¡°Even if it¡¯s big, it wont. She may be big and have scary eyes, but she is actually very gentle.¡±


    ¡°¡­Really?¡±


    As I squatted next to her, I met her eyes and exined in hopes of making her feel safe.


    Though, I think Leo heard the part about her having scary eyes, as she had flinched¡­ I¡¯ll have to apologize to herter.


    ¡­Still, wolves were pretty scary when seen up close¡­


    Not that I thought Leo was scary in the least¡­ But this was no time to be thinking about that.


    ¡°Yes. She really is a kind wolf. She will not eat or attack anyone. Otherwise, they wouldn¡¯t have let her in the town, would they? The guards would have captured her.¡±


    ¡°¡­They would? I don¡¯t know¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, I suppose. But if you trust me, then try looking behind you. Don¡¯t worry. There is nothing to be afraid of, remember?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­okay¡­¡±


    I didn¡¯t know if she would still be scared after seeing a sad-looking Leo, but we couldn¡¯t do anything until she got over it.


    We could not leave without her seeing Leo, and it would be dangerous to send Leo away.


    Perhaps she wouldn¡¯t trust someone she had just met, but thanks to my repeated reassurances, she seemed to believe in me.


    And so she nodded and hesitantly turned around.


    ¡°¡­Uh¡­ Good wolf?¡±


    ¡°Kyunnn¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­! See? It¡¯s fine. This is a gentle wolf that would never attack you.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I think so. ¡­I¡¯m sorry, good wolf.¡±


    ¡°Kyuun. Kyuun.¡±


    While the girl tensed momentarily after seeing how big Leo was, she was brave enough to speak to her.


    In answer, Leo let out a pitiful moan.


    It was like she was desperate to not be scary¡­


    But as I was thinking about such things, I turned to look at the girl¡­ And there was something on her backside that should not have been on a human.


    Still, I coughed so that my surprise would not show, and then I called to her gently.


    She then apologized to Leo for being scared.


    Leo told her that it was fine, and then she turned to her slowly and pushed her nose close to the girl.


    Leo still sounded rather pitiful¡­ Besides, she looked rather amusing, as she had remained in a sitting pose while turning just her head to look around.

 Chapter 291

    Chapter 291


    We Talked About What To Do With The Girl


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, good wolf¡­for saying that you were going to eat me.¡±


    ¡°Kuun¡­¡±


    ¡°Ahh!¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Kuun. Kuun¡­¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. She was just surprised.


    She had stretched out her small hand anxiously and then touched Leo¡¯s face.


    Once she realized it was alright, Leo moved in closer and then licked the girl¡¯s face, which caused her to shout in rm.


    Leo in turn was surprised by this, and seemed to apologize. But the girlughed and petted Leo again.


    They would surely be fine now.


    Still, on closer inspection, the girl¡¯s face was quite dirty¡­


    Perhaps it had happened when she was being bullied, but there were also bruises on her face¡­ Maybe that was why Leo had licked her.


    Well, Leo just did it as a sign of affection. So she probably wasn¡¯t even thinking about that.


    ¡°¡­Mr. Ekenhart. Is this girl a¡­¡±


    ¡°Mmm¡­a beastkin¡­ It is rare to see one in this country¡­ I suppose that is why they were hunting her¡­¡±


    ¡°A beastkin?¡±


    Now that I was relieved that she was no longer afraid of Leo, I approached Mr. Ekenhart and talked with a hushed voice.


    This girl had things that a human should not. She had beast ears on top of her head and a tail.


    The ears¡­were more like a fox than a dog.


    The triangr ears that pointed up and the tail that was fluffy like Leo¡­


    But leaving that aside, Mr. Ekenhart was talking about how she was a beastkin.


    A beastkin¡­ Aside from the monsters, here was another reminder that this was a very different world from the one that I hade from.


    ¡°Mmm. There is a country of beastkin, after all. But this country is filled with humans, and so you rarely see anyone else. Especially during these past few years¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ I had no idea that such people existed.¡±


    ¡°So you¡¯ve never seen them, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°No. In my world, such people only existed within fiction.¡±


    I talked to Mr. Ekenhart while watching the baestkin girl y with Leo, who she had been scared of just a moment ago.


    While the ears on her head were brown, they looked almost ck now, and so did her tail.


    The rest of her skin had cuts and were filthy, as were her clothes. A girl this young should not be in such a state. Even seeing her there with Leo, the overall picture was quite sad.


    ¡°Mr. Ekenhart, this girl must be washed up and her injuries treated¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Or something like this might happen again. Still¡­where can we take her¡­ Perhaps there is an inn nearby? At least she can wash up?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ But then again¡­¡±


    ¡°Is there a problem?¡±


    ¡°No¡­ But I suppose it would look odd, wouldn¡¯t it? If people saw you carrying an injured beastkin girl to an inn.¡±


    ¡°You think so?¡±


    Perhaps it was just me then.


    But if this was in Japan, then people would probably call the authorities.


    Because we were clearly not her parents.


    And all eyes would be on us, since we were with Leo.


    However, Mr. Ekenhart didn¡¯t seem to share this concern, and looked rather puzzled.


    But then again, if Mr. Ekenhart wasn¡¯t remotely concerned with what people thought, then he would have shaved off his beard.


    I can only imagine what Ms. ire would say if she was here.


    ¡°Perhaps someone you know¡­ What about Mr. Kalis?¡±


    ¡°Yes, we could go there¡­ Though, since it is just a store, she will not be able to wash up.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    While that was the first ce I thought of, like Mr. Ekenhart said, it was just a ce that sold herbs¡­


    So I suppose that meant Ms. Isabelle¡¯s store would be the same.


    And then I had an idea.


    ¡°¡­What about the orphanage?¡±


    ¡°The orphanage. Yes, that is just the ce to take such a child. And the children there are so well behaved, so we wouldn¡¯t have to worry.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    That was where Milina used to live.


    If we exined the situation¡­then Ms. Anna should take care of her.


    ¡°¡­Hmm?¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    ¡°No, Leo¡­¡±


    After we decided to go to the orphanage, I turned to Leo and the girl, but realized that something was wrong.


    While the beastkin girl was still smiling as if having forgotten everything that happened before, Leo was shaking as if holding something in¡­ But what?


    ¡°Wu¡­ff¡­¡±


    ¡°What is it, good wolf?¡±


    ¡°Wa-choo!!¡±


    ¡°Ahhhh!¡±


    It was just when the girl had noticed that Leo was acting strangely, and had opened her mouth.


    Leo then shook her whole body and sneezed on her.


    And so a great deal of saliva and snot ended up hitting her.


    She let out a surprised shout and then looked stunned.


    It was even dripping on the ground¡­ I guess a sneeze was quite powerful when you were that big¡­ I would have to be careful when around Leo¡¯s nose from now on.

 Chapter 292

    Chapter 292


    We Took The Girl To The Orphanage


    ¡°Th-that was a shock¡­¡±


    ¡°Wu-wuff! Kuun¡­ Kuun¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ Now she¡¯ll really need to take a bath.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ I suppose one should not pet Lep on the nose too much¡­¡±


    Leo looked at the girl apologetically and then started to lick her face.


    ¡­That seemed a little questionable¡­but I suppose that was Leo¡¯s way of showing that she was sorry.


    Mr. Ekenhart and I chuckled and approached them.


    ¡°By the way, what is your name?¡±


    ¡°Uhh¡­ Liza!¡±


    ¡°Liza. And how old are you?¡±


    ¡°Hmm. Seven¡­I think.¡±


    ¡°You think? You¡¯re not sure about your own age?¡±


    While we were headed to the orphanage, I talked to Liza as she rode on top of Leo¡¯s back.


    She had been so frightened at first, but now she was used to Leo. She even had her arms around Leo¡¯s neck as she held on.


    Apparently, this was partly due to how sorry Leo looked after sneezing.


    ¡­After that, Liza hadughed and hugged Leo.


    Perhaps she did not care as much about things because she was part beast herself¡­ But that sounded like a slightly prejudiced way of thinking, so I pushed it out of my mind.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know where or when I was born¡­ I only remember my grandfather¡­ And he said he found me when I was still a baby¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Found¡­ So it¡¯s been about seven years since then. ¡­It is amon enough story in the slums. That is why there is an orphanage¡­ Hmmm¡­¡±


    Upon hearing our conversation, Mr. Ekenhart nodded and seemed to be deep in thought.


    I suppose as the lord of thesends, this problem was very serious for him.


    ¡°¡­And what happened to your grandfather?¡±


    ¡°¡­He died not long ago¡­¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry for asking. It¡¯s probably not a good memory?¡±


    ¡°No. It¡¯s fine. He was very kind¡­ So I do not want to forget.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see. You¡¯re very strong.¡±


    However, Liza¡¯s eyes were still filled with tears.


    She must have really liked this grandfather who had raised her.


    But even if it was painful, she did not want to forget as she moved forward. It was impressive.


    ¡°But, why were those children hurting you?¡±


    ¡°It started happening after my grandfather died¡­ Because¡­I am a beastkin¡­¡±


    ¡°I suppose he was the one who protected you from them¡­ This wouldn¡¯t have happened if we noticed it sooner¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­They really bullied you just because you are a beastkin?¡±


    So the old man was protecting her¡­ But why would anyone want to hurt such a young child¡­


    Just because she was a beastkin. I could not understand it.


    If anything, you would think people would be taken in by how cute she was.


    She had a tail and ears, after all.


    ¡°Well, I will exin it to youter. Right now, we have to get her washed up.¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well.¡±


    Said Mr. Ekenhart, who still had a stern expression. And so we hurried on to the orphanage.


    Liza did not seem to care about being dirty, but we could not just leave her like this.


    ¡­Especially after Leo had sneezed on her.


    Though, strangely enough, it had washed away some of the dirt and grime¡­


    ¡°¡­Still, I¡¯m surprised that you didn¡¯t cry at all.¡±


    ¡°¡­It hurt and I wanted to cry¡­ But I already cried so much after my grandfather died. So I thought that for him, I have to be strong.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see¡­ That¡¯s verymendable.¡±


    Even now, though her eyes were moist, she would not shed any tears.


    She must be trying very hard to not cry.


    But to put a child through such a thing¡­ I became angry at the people who bullied her again. But I didn¡¯t let it show.


    I would praise her and pat her on the headter.


    ¡°It¡¯s nice to see you again. Is Ms. Anna here?¡±


    ¡°Oh? Mr. Takumi!? It has been so long! Yes, I will call her right away!¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    After arriving at the orphanage, I talked to the woman who was cleaning.


    She was the same person who had been cleaningst time¡­ Was she always out here like this?


    I suppose it was her job.


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting. What brings you here today, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s good to see you, Ms. Anna. Well¡­ There is someone who needs to borrow your bath¡­¡±


    ¡°Our bath? Oh, that child!?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Would that be alright?¡±


    After being called by the woman who was cleaning, Ms. Anna came out to greet us.


    I then told her why we were here and showed her Liza, who was clutching onto Leo.


    Upon seeing her, Ms. Anna understood perfectly.


    However, Liza looked a little confused to be in a strange ce.


    Still, she was not scared, which showed that she at least knew that these people were not hostile.


    ¡°Where did this child¡­ And she is a beastkin¡­ Well, I understand. I will have some hot water prepared at once.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. Go and prepare the bath.¡±


    ¡°Yes, right away!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff?¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Ah, that¡¯s right. Ms. Anne. How are the children?¡±


    ¡°Oh, yes. Just fine. They are ying in the garden right now.¡±


    ¡°Leo wants to y with them¡­ Will that be alright?¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course! I¡¯m sure they will be overjoyed!¡±


    Ms. Anne knew what Liza was at once, and though she looked a little troubled, she quickly said that a bath would be prepared.


    She then gave orders to the woman who was sweeping, and she ran into the orphanage.


    After seeing this, Leo seemed to be wondering where the children were, and so I asked Ms. Anna if Leo could y with them.


    Since she had yed with themst time, it seemed that they would be happy to see her again.

 Chapter 293

    Chapter 293


    I Told Ms. Anna About What Happened


    ¡°Pleasee this way then.¡±


    ¡°¡­Huh?¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. These are nice people, so you can go with them. They¡¯re going to give you a bath.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes. Okay.¡±


    As the bath was ready, Ms. Anna came to take Liza to it. But Liza seemed a little confused.


    This was a ce unknown to her, and so she had been surprised.


    But I smiled and assured her that it was fine, and so she nodded and followed Ms. Anna.


    I was d to see that she trusted me now.


    ¡°She¡¯s taken to you, eh?¡±


    ¡°Do you think so? Well, I¡¯ve been trying to be careful so that I don¡¯t scare her¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°Haha! Haha!¡±


    I talked with Mr. Ekenhart as we watched Leo y with the children in the back garden.


    Since Liza had been so frightened when we first met her, I had been extra careful when around her. But I didn¡¯t know how well it was going.


    However, she had talked about different things on the way here, and judging by her facial expression, she had lowered her guard quite a bit now.


    Though, it was more because of Leo than me¡­ And Leo¡¯s sneeze.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­uh, Liza, was it? I took her to the bathing area, and she is now being washed up.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. I really am sorry foring here out of the blue¡­¡±


    ¡°Not at all. You have been good to us, Mr. Takumi. Besides, the children had wanted to meet Leo again. You are always wee here.¡±


    After leaving Liza with others, Ms. Anna came to see us.


    I apologized once again and thanked her.


    Ms. Anna¡¯s eyes seemed to shine as she watched the children y with Leo. And I could tell how much Leo enjoyed it.


    This was like a paradise for her¡­ Because no one was afraid of her.


    ¡°Uhh¡­ And who is your friend?¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Me?¡±


    ¡°¡­You¡¯re hiding your face.¡±


    ¡°Oh, of course. ¡­It¡¯s been a while, Headmistress Anna.¡±


    ¡°¡­Your Grace?¡±


    ¡°Mmm.¡±


    ¡°Forgive my rudeness! I did not recognize you!¡±


    ¡°I do not mind. Please be calm and raise your face.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    Ms. Anna had been curious about the stranger who lurked next to me.


    And so Mr. Ekenhart removed the cloth from around his face and revealed himself to her.


    Now that his intimidating features were on full disy, Ms. Anna looked confused for a moment before realization hit her.


    She then prostrated herself on the ground.


    But Mr. Ekenhart told her to raise her face and made her stand.


    ¡°So¡­uh¡­and the child?¡±


    Ms. Anna asked me, but she kept ncing over to Mr. Ekehart.


    He just chuckled and allowed me to exin it.


    ¡°Well, it really just happened a moment ago¡­ Leo led us to the north side of Ractos.¡±


    ¡°The north side¡­ Why would she do that?¡±


    Ms. Anna seemed to know about how things were on the north side.


    It was no wonder¡­ As she ran an orphanage, she would know where orphans usually came from.


    ¡°Yes. We didn¡¯t mean to go there¡­ But Leo seemed to be looking for something. And then we found a child who was being bullied.¡±


    ¡°Bullied¡­ Ah, because she is a beastkin.¡±


    ¡°Yes, it seemed to be the case. And so we had to help her¡­ And then we thought about bringing her here to have her cleaned up.¡±


    ¡°I see. So that is why. But this beastkin child¡­¡±


    Ms. Anna now understood why we hade here.


    However, she still looked troubled.


    I suppose it had to do with her being a beastkin?


    ¡°Is there a problem? I¡¯m sorry, I really don¡¯t know much about such things¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Indeed¡­ We must tell Mr. Takumi about the matter of beastkin. Can you do it, headmistress?¡±


    ¡°Very well.¡±


    I tilted my head and asked Ms. Anna and Mr. Ekenhart.


    Mr. Ekenhart nodded and left it to Ms. Anna, who then exined to me about the beastkin.


    Leo was ying with the children, and Liza wouldn¡¯t be back for some time, so I had to learn while I could.


    Still, I wonder if Sebastian took a liking to exining because Mr. Ekenhart would always make him do it for him?


    I wondered, but since it was not important right now, I pushed it out of my head.


    ¡°It was¡­.when I was still a child, so nearly thirty years ago¡­ There was a war between this country and the country of the beastkin.¡±


    ¡°¡­To be precise, it was thirty-two years ago.¡±


    Ms. Anna seemed to recall the time as she talked.


    Thirty-two years¡­ Mr. Ekenhart would have also been a child back then.


    ¡°And while thesends were not turned into a battlefield, things were most terrible in the ces that were.¡±


    ¡°But it¡¯s a neighboring country. Were rtions really that bad?¡±


    ¡°Well¡­ I do not know much about diplomacy¡­¡±


    ¡°We were on rather friendly terms once. But there was an incident and things changed. By the way, the beastkin country is to the north of this one. And mynds are towards the south of this country. That¡¯s why we were not affected much by the war.¡±


    War, huh¡­ Where people from different countries kill each other¡­


    There were various reasons, such as countries wanting power andnd.


    As the duke, Mr. Ekenhart might know more about it, however, he seemed like he didn¡¯t want to talk about it. Perhaps he could not.


    And since I did not want to pry and cause any trouble, I decided to leave it alone.

 Chapter 294

    Chapter 294


    I Asked About Why The Beastkin Were Discriminated Against


    ¡°The war between the countries involved many soldiers and civilians, causing death to spread everywhere¡­ And once both countries were ravaged by war, a certain rumor started to be whispered here.¡±


    ¡°A rumor?¡±


    ¡°Yes. That the beastkin were monsters andpletely different creatures from humans¡­ That they are evil creatures who attack humans.¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°I do not know where the rumor started. Perhaps it was done to unite the country against the beastkin.¡±


    They didn¡¯t know who had spread the rumor, but it seeded in making people think that the beastkin was dangerous.


    By doing this, the people would be united as they went about the war effort.


    Though, it was also possible that it was just something said by someone without thinking, and it happened to spread from there.


    ¡°Though, now that the war is over, the rumor has mostly died down¡­ Even if there are still people who believe it.¡±


    ¡°That they are dangerous? But Liza doesn¡¯t look like she is capable of such a thing.¡±


    ¡°Yes, you are right. They are simply our neighbors¡­ They are not monsters. However, there are some ways in which they are more physically capable than humans. But that is all.¡±


    ¡°Though, that also encourages the rumors¡­¡±


    ¡°Encourages? Because they are physically more capable?¡±


    Here, Mr. Ekenhart added to Ms. Anna¡¯s exnation with a serious expression.


    But I didn¡¯t know why having high physical ability affected the rumors¡­


    ¡°Well, I think it is a kind of jealousy, perhaps. They are born with a little more strength¡­ In fact, there were times when during the war, three human soldiers had to take on a single beastkin.¡±


    ¡°¡­So they are simply stronger than humans.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. Most of them, anyway. And so perhaps it is people who are jealous that spread such rumors.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    Humans could be very jealous of each other, so it would be no surprise.


    ¡°After the war, diplomatic rtions improved between our countries. And so it is possible to travel there and back. However, people still talk¡­ And so in some ces in this country, people discriminate against the beastkin. Especially near the north, where most of the fighting took ce.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ I suppose it cannot be helped.¡±


    While I felt strongly against it, from the perspective of the people involved in the war, perhaps they could not help but feel angry towards the beastkin.


    ¡°Well, things are rtively peaceful in other territories¡­ Still, do you think beastkin woulde to such a ce for no reason?¡±


    ¡°No. It is not a ce you would visit for pleasure¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed. And so you do not see them that often in this country.¡±


    ¡°But since they are seen less, more people are starting to believe the old rumor¡­ It is a bad environment.¡±


    ¡°In other words, that was why Liza was being attacked in the slums¡­?¡±


    ¡°Because they believed what they heard. Most people here are better educated, and know the truth¡­ But in the slums¡­¡±


    It was filled with ruffians.


    In other words, many did not learn or have opportunities to be educated.


    And so they believed in old rumors, not doubting that beastkin were monsters.


    Now that I thought about it, the boys who had been surrounding her had called her a monster.


    ¡°I see¡­ That is a difficult problem.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Children are especially quick to believe such things¡­ While the children here are taught that the beastkin are just like us¡­ Outside¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ I will have to discuss this matter with Sebastian as well. I myself have rarely seen any here, and did not think about it much¡­ But there seems to be beastkin in this town now. If we look, we might find others who live here for some reason or another.¡±


    The three of us thought hard on the matter.


    Thankfully, I could hear the cheerful sounds of Leo and the children ying in the garden.


    This kind of talk could get very heavy¡­ And I did not like to stay like that for too long.


    ¡°Indeed¡­ I suppose the old man who rescued her must have known what beastkin are like.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. I think it is people who were born many years before the war that know the truth. In spite of everything, they understand that they aren¡¯t monsters.¡±


    We didn¡¯t know how old this man was¡­ But since he was called ¡®grandfather,¡¯ he must be older than Mr. Ekenhart.


    As they had good rtions before the war, there would have been plenty of beastkin who came here, and so people from that time would not have believed the rumor.


    Liza was lucky to have been found by such a person.


    ¡­Though, she wasn¡¯t lucky to have been in such a situation to begin with.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. What do you intend to do with her now?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ I have not thought about that. We were just thinking about getting her away from those children who were hurting her¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, it was pretty bad¡­¡±


    ¡°It was?¡±


    ¡°Aye. We should probably tell Ms. Anna about it.¡±


    ¡°Yes, indeed.¡±


    While I hadn¡¯t thought about what to do with her. For now, we would tell Ms. Anna about how we had found her.


    ¡°It¡­is no wonder you wanted to save her then¡­ To such a small child¡­¡±


    ¡°Descrimination can sometimes take hold of a person easily¡­ So that they do not need much reason¡­¡±


    ¡°That is true. That person is bad¡­ Once they think that, it is enough.¡±


    Ms. Anna thought about Liza with a serious expression.


    Was it like mass psychology¡­?


    When someone was different from the others, that difference was considered bad, and if someone said this out loud, then others would believe it.


    And no one would do anything different, because then they might be a target.


    Obviously, it wasn¡¯t always like that¡­ But it was something I had observed plenty of times back in my old world¡­

 Chapter 295

    Chapter 295


    I Asked The Orphanage To Take Care Of Liza


    ¡°Headmistress, and what about the children here?¡±


    ¡°Oh, there is nothing like that here. After all, we watch over them closely. And besides, most of the children here have unfortunate backgrounds¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ In that case, I suppose it is best to leave Liza here?¡±


    If the adults watched over them carefully, then it was unlikely that she would be bullied.


    And as Ms. Anna said, this was an orphanage, and all of the children were here due to some circumstance.


    Those who know pain are kinder¡­ I had heard something like that before¡­ Of course, it was still better to not know pain at all.


    In any case, I agreed with Mr. Ekenhart that Liza should be kept in the orphanage.


    Unless the slums changed, then Liza would meet the same fate there. And it was difficult to see what was happening in such a ce.


    At least in the orphanage, she would notck forpany, and Ms. Anna and the others would take care of her.


    ¡°Ms. Anna. Perhaps I am being presumptuous to ask this of you¡­ But could you take care of Liza?¡±


    Thinking that this was the safest solution, I bowed my head as I made the request.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi! Please raise your head! You are the one who helped us when the children were suffering from the illness. If you have a request, then I will do what I can to help you!¡±


    ¡°In that case¡­¡±


    ¡°However¡­ I am sorry. We cannot take Liza¡­¡±


    Ms. Anna looked frantic when she saw that I had bowed my head.


    And then she said that she would do what she could to help. So I thought she would agree to it¡­but she did not.


    ¡°Why is that, headmistress?¡±


    ¡°I am sorry¡­ But we have so many children here already¡­ There are not enough rooms and beds¡­ And so we will not be able to take her in¡­¡±


    Ms. Anna answered Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s question apologetically.


    Indeed, when treating the illness with the Ramogi, I had seen how many children were in each room.


    Sometimes, there were two sleeping in a single bed¡­


    Perhaps they could get more beds.


    But the rooms were also quite full¡­


    ¡°But didn¡¯t Milina leave?¡±


    ¡°As she is an adult, she was separate from the children. Those who do not leave sleep in a different ce¡­ Sometimes, that means sleeping in the hallways¡­¡±


    ¡°Mmm¡­ So there are that many¡­ We will have to do something about that¡­¡±


    So Milina had slept in a different ce from the children beforeing to the mansion.


    ording to Ms. Anna, the children took up all the rooms and beds. And the people who worked here who were adults would sleep in the hallways when there wasn¡¯t enough space.


    Upon hearing this, Mr. Ekenhart was deep in thought.


    As the lord of thesends, the management of the orphanage was his responsibility.


    Not enough rooms. Even if the ce was to be rebuilt, it could not be done immediately¡­


    Besides, it might not always be like this. And it was possible that after arger building was constructed, then the number of orphans would decrease.


    I wished that I could help, but there was nothing that I could do¡­ And I didn¡¯t know if they would listen. But if I could think of something helpful, I would make a suggestion.


    ¡°Still, what should we do¡­ It would be a shame to have to return her to the slums after she has washed up¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. As long as they don¡¯t look kindly on beastkin, it will just happen again¡­¡±


    ¡°Mmm¡­¡±


    ¡°Now that I think about it, why did Leo go over to where Liza was?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. It did seem like she was searching for Liza from far away. Perhaps there was a reason for that?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Leo. Do you have a minute?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    I suddenly remembered that Leo had guided us to Liza.


    Even before we entered the slums, she seemed to be anxious about something.


    And so I called Leo, who came over while having ten children stuck to her.


    ¡­They really did like Leo¡­


    ¡°Leo. Were you searching for Liza from that far away?¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff-wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°What did she say?¡±


    ¡°Uh, she says she smelled something that was like her own kind. And while it wasn¡¯t her kind after all, she sensed that it needed help¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Because she was a beastkin¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°Oh? Is that so?¡±


    ording to Leo, while they were not monsters, beastkin were important for beast-type monsters.


    And so she felt a kinship towards them, and thought that she had to help¡­


    I then ryed this information to Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. Anna.


    ¡°Important to good Leo¡­ I have heard that many beastkin have beast monsters as familiars. Perhaps that is rted¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Do you mean, like silver fenrirs?¡±


    ¡°No, Mr. Takumi. Even beastkin do not have silver fenrirs as familiars. Well¡­maybe they would have fenrirs thought.¡±


    So, even beastkin couldn¡¯t have silver fenrirs.


    But they could have fenrirs. So beastkin might find it easier to have beast familiarspared to humans.


    ¡­Though, there was a fenrir living leasurely in the mansion, who was a human¡¯s familiar¡­


    Regardless, this connection might be why Leo could sense that someone was asking for help¡­

 Chapter 296

    Chapter 296


    Leo Was Quite Adamant


    ¡°Still¡­ If good Leo felt it was important¡­ Then that is even more reason to do something about Liza.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Uh, Leo. We were just discussing what we should do with Leo. Apparently, they won¡¯t take her at the orphanage, because they don¡¯t have enough rooms¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff!? Wuff-wuff! Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Huh? Is that right? But¡­ I don¡¯t think¡­¡±


    ¡°What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Uh, Leo says¡­ That she always meant to take care of Liza¡­and that she will bring her back to the mansion¡­ But we need your permission, and Ms. ire¡¯s¡­¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t mind.¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    While Leo may have intended to do that¡­we were just guests there. So I didn¡¯t want to trouble them by bringing in some kid as well¡­ However, Mr. Ekenhart agreed with a nod.


    ¡°I am saying that you can take her back to the mansion.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­are you certain?¡±


    ¡°Mmm. After all, it is what Leo wants. And so we must support her in any way we can. Besides¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart gave his permission without a second thought.


    But was it really alright?


    I doubt that Mr. Ekenhart, Ms. ire or the people of the mansion would mistreat her, but¡­ They were already taking care of us. Besides, Ms. Anne had also recently moved in¡­


    As I wondered about this, Mr. Ekenhart moved closer and whispered to me.


    ¡°Surely you understand, that you cannot just return her to where we found her?¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course, but¡­¡±


    ¡°Leo will have to go and help her every time that she is in trouble¡­ Now that is something that could cause chaos.¡±


    ¡°True¡­¡±


    Apparently, helping beastkin was very important for Leo.


    If Leo did go to help her every time she was in danger, then maybe people would stop picking on her¡­ However, it was true that Leo suddenly appearing there could cause confusion.


    Besides, there was no guarantee that we would even be around, and Leo wouldn¡¯t be able to stop it¡­ I didn¡¯t want to think about how Leo would react if something happened to Liza¡­


    She might go berserk and destroy the whole town.


    No, Leo wouldn¡¯t do something like that¡­ Though, maybe that was what Mr. Ekenhart feared.


    ¡°Our house honors Silver Fenrirs. And so I will support good Leo¡¯s opinion!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart then stepped away from me and made this deration.


    Leo nodded approvingly.


    So, that was decided then¡­ Though, would Ms. ire be upset that the decision was made without her?


    ¡°I¡¯m back.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Liza¡­you¡¯re clean now.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Thank you!¡±


    While I was still thinking about whether or not this would be alright, Liza returned from her bath along with one of the workers.


    She was wearing new clothes and all of the dirt from before was gone.


    Though, they did not have any clothes for beastkin, and so her tail came out from her back.


    ¡­I guess it was too much to expect them to have pants with a hole for the tail.


    Right now, she adjusted her pants so the tail came out from her waist.


    I had been worried about her being in an unfamiliar ce at first, but it seemed like she was used to it now.


    She looked just like the other children, and was smiling and cheerful.


    Yes, after seeing her like this, I definitely agreed that it was better to take her back to the mansion.


    And so all of my doubts were pushed away¡­ It was the power of a child¡¯s smile.


    Speaking of Liza, her ears and tail were brown, just like a fox.


    As if to express her cheerfulness, her ears pointed in the shape of triangles.


    Her tail was fluffy, just like Leo¡¯s.


    As she looked at me or at Leo ying with the children, her tail would wag and her ears would twitch, which was rather cute.


    ¡°Mmm. You look much better now that you are clean.¡±


    ¡°¡­There is a scary old man over there¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­Liza?¡±


    ¡°Wh¡­what did you¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart saw that Liza was clean and nodded.


    However, Liza muttered something after seeing him.


    She seemed to be scared, and hid behind me while grabbing onto my leg.


    Leo pushed her nose towards Liza as if to reassure her¡­ But the problem was Mr. Ekenhart.


    I didn¡¯t know if it was because she called him old or scary, but Mr. Ekenhart was taken aback.


    One would think he had been struck by lightning.


    It reminded me of Leo, when she had been taken for a people eater.


    Hmm? One of the children who was attached to Leo was now walking towards us¡­


    ¡°¡­Will you y with us?¡±


    ¡°¡­I can?¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Uhh¡­¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. Go on and y with them.¡±


    ¡°¡­Okay.¡±


    The girl who had moved away from Leo was not pulling Liza¡¯s sleeve as she invited her to y.


    She seemed to be the same age as Liza, or maybe a little younger.


    Perhaps the kids here thought that Liza was another orphan.


    But Liza had looked up at me as if uncertain.


    I suppose she didn¡¯t have much experience with ying with other children, and so she didn¡¯t know what to do.


    And so I smiled and pushed her back with some reassuring words.


    She smiled and nodded, and then went over to where Leo and the other children were.


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll deal with the matter. So you can go and y.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Leo had turned to me questioningly, and so I nodded and told her that she could go.


    Upon seeing this, Leo nodded and then went off with Liza and the children.

 Chapter 297

    Chapter 297


    Dejected Mr. Ekenhart


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyah!¡±


    As Liza seemed hesitant to go to the other children, Leo pulled her by the sleeve.


    It was like a cat and a kitten¡­ Only Leo was a dog¡­a wolf, and Liza was a fox.


    Well, I could let Leo take care of her now.


    ¡­As for the other problem¡­


    ¡°Mr. Ekenhart¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­ But Liza was fine earlier. Why is she suddenly¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, your face was covered¡­ Even Ms. Anna didn¡¯t know who you were¡­ So she probably thought you were a stranger?¡±


    ¡°¡­Hmm¡­ Still, one does not like to scare children¡­ Tilura never reacted like that¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s probably because you were there ever since she was born.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was sitting in a corner and leaning against the wall.


    And I wasn¡¯t the only one who was amused. Ms. Anna and the other workers were also chuckling.


    The duke was¡­ No one knew how they should react.


    ¡°Tsk¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, well. Cheer up. After all, you were one of the people who helped her, so I¡¯m sure it will be fine.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s easy for you to say, Mr. Takumi¡­ Still, what can I do so that she won¡¯t be scared¡­¡±


    I approached Mr. Ekenhart and patted him on the shoulder consolingly.


    For a second, I wondered if I should be acting so familiar around him¡­ But at this point, he seemed more like some friendly old man who was just your neighbor.


    Besides, he didn¡¯t seem to mind.


    ¡°Well, you do have a rather intimidating face¡­ So I don¡¯t think it should be surprising¡­¡±


    ¡°Do you think so? Grrr¡­ I thought that growing my beard out would make children like me¡­¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    Both Ms. Anna and I looked at each other.


    That¡¯s why he grew out his beard?


    I had always thought that beards had the opposite effect¡­


    Maybe if it was in an interesting shape¡­ But Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s was rough and wild looking¡­ It did not give the best impression.


    While I had not known her for very long, it was clear that Ms. Anna and I were thinking the same thing¡­ Which of us would tell him what we were thinking?


    ¡°Since you¡¯re the one who runs this ce and has known Mr. Ekenhart for a long time¡­¡±


    ¡°No, no. I could not say such a thing to His Grace¡­ You must do it, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, I don¡¯t think Mr. Ekenhart would be offended if you do it, Ms. Anna¡­¡±


    ¡°But surely it would be better for a man to tell him? Now, don¡¯t be shy¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Ekenhart is troubled over how children react to him. And since you know so much about children, your advice would be valued more¡­¡±


    ¡°Not at all¡­¡±


    ¡°Definitely so¡­¡±


    Such was the argument we had with our eyes.


    ¡­Well, I suppose it was all just my imagination.


    However, she was chuckling as if we really were saying such things.


    ¡°So¡­Mr. Takumi. What shout I do? It seems that Liza and Tilura like you well enough. So you must have some advice?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart had suddenly raised his head and asked for my opinion.


    ¡­Tsk. So it was going to me after all.


    Ms. Anna looked at me triumphantly and with a smirk, said, ¡®Yes, Mr. Takumi. Do tell¡­¡¯


    Hah¡­ I had no choice then. Well, Mr. Ekenhart would not easily take offense, I suppose¡­


    ¡°I think that¡­ No, there is no guarantee that it will work, but¡­ Perhaps that beard¡­¡±


    ¡°The beard? It is quite impressive, isn¡¯t it?¡±


    ¡°Yes, it is. ¡­But I think you could tidy it up a little¡­ To be honest, I think it¡¯s your beard that makes you frightening to some children¡­¡±


    ¡°Wh-what!? You are ming the beard!? That is¡­ridiculous¡­¡±


    While it was difficult to say, I ended up blurting it out.


    However, Mr. Ekenhart did not take it well. He was clearly in great shock as he fell back down on the ground.


    ¡°My beard¡­¡±


    ¡°In the first ce, Mr. Ekenhart. Why do you leave it like that?¡±


    ¡°¡­A long time ago, I used to shave it¡­ But shortly after Tilura was born, she looked at me and started crying¡­ I was aware that I looked intimidating, but¡­ It was quite a shock¡­ However, shortly after, I went on a long journey. And I did not have time to shave before returning.¡±


    ¡°And Tilura saw you like that?¡±


    ¡°Yes. And though she used to look at me and cry, this time, she stretched out her hand towards me andughed¡­ Ever since then, I had this idea that I should leave my beard as it is¡­ Of course, I do trim it during social events¡­¡±


    ¡°So that¡¯s the reason¡­¡±


    He had been sad that he made Tilura cry, but when he grew out his beard, it made her happy¡­


    It reminded me of the story about Ms. ire getting married. Mr. Ekenhart seemed to often misunderstand his daughters and be affected by them.


    Perhaps Tilura was merely curious about this unusual beard, and it had nothing to do with whether he looked scary or not.


    In any case, perhaps she had never been scared of him, and it was just bad timing when she cried¡­ Perhaps it was because she was used to being around women, and would have cried even if it was someone else.

 Chapter 298

    Chapter 298


    He Decided to Shave His Beard


    There was no way that Tilura remembered this story about crying because of her father¡¯s face when she was a baby¡­so I could not confirm anything. But I felt as if he had rushed to conclusions.


    Perhaps Sebastian could have told him¡­ But then again, Sebastian was the kind of person to find it amusing.


    Besides, maybe he would have thought that it wasn¡¯t his ce to say anything.


    In any case, this was all just spection¡­ But I had a feeling that I wasn¡¯t too far off.


    ¡°¡­Uhh¡­ While it¡¯s not like that with everyone, some children are afraid of beards.¡±


    ¡°But none of the other children in this orphanage were?¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°Well¡­¡±


    I nced over to Ms. Anne, and she closed her eyes with an ufortable expression.


    Hmm¡­ I guess there was something that she couldn¡¯t say.


    ¡°Well, I think the children here are generally more used to being around adults. Perhaps Liza is not¡­ Besides, she was bullied in the slums. And you know, many of the people there were not cleanly shaved.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see¡­ Well, I suppose you are right¡­¡±


    I went there for the first time today, and there was no one who had a cleanly shaved face.


    Perhaps Liza had been bullied by all kinds of people after her grandfather died. Perhaps one of those people had a beard.


    And so that was why she was scared of Mr. Ekenhart.


    Ms. Anna looked at me gratefully for covering for her.


    ¡°It may be as you say, Mr. Takumi¡­ Very well. I shall shave my beard after we return to the mansion!¡±


    ¡°Hahaha! I think that¡¯s a good idea¡­¡±


    Because Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s beard made him look like a bandit.


    He was sure to look much more handsome if he shaved.


    ¡°Besides, Tilura is much older now. So she will not cry regardless of how I look.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. If anything, I think she¡¯ll be proud at how dashing her father looks.¡±


    ¡°Do you think so? Hehehe. One hopes¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart chuckled as he imagined her reaction.


    All fathers wanted to be loved by their daughters, and Mr. Ekenhart was no exception.


    ¡°Now¡­I suppose we should take Liza and leave soon.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Though they seem to be enjoying ying with the others¡­ It cannot be helped.¡±


    ¡°¡­I¡¯m really sorry.¡±


    ¡°Do not mention it. There are too many orphans for this ce as it is. We will have to do something about that soon.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you, Your Grace.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart got to his feet and muttered as he watched Leo y with the children.


    I did feel a little bad about taking her away when they were having so much fun¡­ But as long as Leo and I were there, she shouldn¡¯t be too sad.


    As Mr. Ekenhart promised to do something about the orphanage, and Ms. Anna bowed, I called to Leo.


    ¡°Hey, Leo. Liza. We¡¯re leaving now!¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyaa! Ahaha!¡±


    When I called Leo, she turned to me questioningly at first. Then understanding what I said, she started to pull Liza by the sleeve towards us.


    Liza was surprised but then started tough.


    It was nice seeing her so happy and carefree.


    ¡­Though, the sight of a giant wolf biting the sleeve of a little girl was a little unsettling¡­


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Good. Thank you, Leo. Did you have fun out there?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Leo let go of Liza next to me and then she rubbed her head against me.


    And so I used my whole body to press against Leo¡¯s cheek and patted her on the head.


    Leo nodded happily.


    ¡°Now, Liza. We have to say goodbye to the children here for now. Don¡¯t worry, you cane back and y with themter.¡±


    ¡°¡­Okay. I understand. ¡­Thank you, everyone¡­it was fun¡­¡±


    ¡°Come again!¡±


    I turned to face Liza and told her to say goodbye to the children.


    She nodded a little sadly and thanked the children for ying with her.


    I suppose she hadn¡¯t been able to y like this before, so it was no wonder that she was sad.


    ¡°We wille back. Besides, there is a girl like you where we are going. I¡¯m sure you¡¯ll be good friends.¡±


    ¡°¡­Really? So I don¡¯t have to return to that ce?¡±


    ¡°Yes. We won¡¯t return you to a ce where you will be bullied. Don¡¯t worry, you¡¯re going to a ce with a lot of nice people. No one will hurt you.¡±


    ¡°¡­Okay¡­ Uuu¡­¡±


    ¡°There, there¡­¡±


    It seemed that Liza had been worried that she would be sent back to where we found her.


    And once she understood that it was not the case, she began to cry.


    While she did not make any loud sounds, the tears she had been holding back began to flow.


    And so I hugged her and gently patted her on the head in order tofort her.


    ¡°Now, let¡¯s go, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Are you ready, Liza?¡±


    ¡°¡­Sniff¡­Yes!¡±


    After awhile, Mr. Ekenhart called out to me. He had already wrapped up his face in the cloth again. And so I let go of Liza and got up to my feet.


    He had probably done that because we had to walk out in the town again, and in order to not frighten Liza.


    And so I extended my hand to Liza and asked if she was ready. She sniffed, wiped her eyes and then took my hand with a smile.


    I would have to be careful so that she did not have a reason to cry like that again.

 Chapter 299

    Chapter 299


    We Were Stopped By The Guards


    ¡°Well, thank you for everything.¡±


    ¡°You are always wee here, Your Grace. And you too, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Go on, Liza.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ Thank¡­you.¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re wee. I hope you will visit again?¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes!¡±


    At the entrance to the orphanage, we said goodbye to Ms. Anna and then left.


    After prompting her, Liza was able to say thank you as well.


    While it was a little awkward¡­it was probably normal at that age.


    If anything, it was impressive given that she was in the slums. Her grandmother must have taken good care of her.


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff-wuff?¡±


    ¡°Hmm? That¡¯s right. Liza, do you want to ride on Leo?¡±


    ¡°¡­No, I¡¯m fine¡­ I will walk like this¡­ I like holding hands¡­¡±


    ¡°Very well then. But you can ride on Leo when you get tired, okay?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Hehe. She¡¯s really taken to you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    As we headed towards the western gate, Leo looked at Liza questioningly.


    Apparently, she was wondering if Liza wanted to ride on her, but she preferred to walk for now.


    Leo looked a little disappointed¡­but it was fine, since we would ride on her anyway, once we left town.


    Mr. Ekenhart looked at us and smiled.


    ¡­Well, maybe I just assumed that he was. His face was still mostly covered.


    ¡°Excuse me, do you have a minute?¡±


    ¡°Yes?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Hmm?¡±


    ¡°¡­?¡±


    We were just about toe out to the main street, when a few guards appeared from the side, and one of them called out to us.


    I wonder what it could be?


    Most of the guards here seemed to know about Leo¡­


    ¡°There was a report about a monster appearing in the town.¡±


    ¡°A monster?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    The guards were looking towards Leo.


    Well, Leo was a Silver Fenrir. So she was technically a monster¡­


    And while many people knew that Leo was not the kind that would attack people, it was still possible that others had seen Leo and alerted them.


    ¡°Arge wolf with silver hair¡­ A Silver Fenrir. The Great Leo? So you must be Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Huh? Ah, yes. I am¡­¡±


    After getting a good look at Leo, the guard seemed to understand what was going on.


    Mr. Ekenhart must have sent word to the guards.


    And so they were satisfied now that they saw me and Leo together.


    ¡°Sorry to disturb you! We rushed to investigate after the report. But it was just you, after all¡­¡±


    ¡°No¡­ I suppose someone saw her and was scared.¡±


    ¡°I am relieved now that I know you are from the duke¡¯s house. However¡­who are they?¡±


    The man quickly bowed and apologized to us.


    But it was fine, and I wasn¡¯t mad anyway.


    However, the guards then turned to Mr. Ekenhart and Liza.


    After having so many people looking at her, Liza became afraid and hid behind me while still clutching to my hand.


    ¡°ording to the report¡­there was a strange man with a monster. And he took a young girl from the slums¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ So you thought that the girl was taken by the monster.¡±


    ¡°Mmm¡­ First she is scared of me, and now I am treated as a suspect¡­¡±


    ¡°Who is that man?¡±


    If they knew where she came from, then it must have been someone from the slums.


    Perhaps it was the people who had been bullying Liza.


    After all, they had been screaming about a monster as they ran away.


    As for Mr. Ekenhart, he would look like that, given his head was wrapped in a cloth¡­ But that didn¡¯t stop him from being offended.


    It was either show his face and scare Liza, or hide it and be treated like a suspicious person¡­


    He had sharp eyes and was very tall on top of that, so it wasn¡¯t really surprising.


    No one else around town looked like he did.


    ¡°Hah¡­ Very well. I shall talk to them.¡±


    ¡°Hehe. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Where are you going¡­?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m going to talk to those people.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart sighed and walked towards the guards.


    Liza saw this and questioned him hesitantly.


    She was fine with him as long as she couldn¡¯t see his face.


    After all, that was what she saw when we helped her.


    ¡°There. Now you know who I am.¡±


    ¡°You-your Grace!? My-my apologies!¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart unwrapped the cloth and showed his face to the guards.


    They were surprised and quickly fell to their knees and apologized.


    ¡°Mmm. Well, I didn¡¯t bring any guards with me today. And with my face covered, you had no way to know that it was me.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Your Grace!¡±


    ¡°However¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart then lowered his voice as he spoke to them.


    As his voice was quiet, I could not hear him well¡­ But it seemed like he was telling them about what had happened.


    As many people had seen us go to the orphanage, it was necessary to exin.


    It was impossible to not stick out when Leo was with you.


    ¡°Hmm?¡±


    ¡°Is¡­something wrong?¡±


    ¡°No, it¡¯s nothing. Nevermind.¡±


    Liza saw me reacting to the few words that were audible, and she looked at me questioningly. So I reassured her that it was nothing.


    Mr. Ekenhart was probably telling the guards what to do about it now.


    Not just about what happened to Liza, but he was likely thinking about what to do with the slums in general.

 Chapter 300

    Chapter 300


    We Departed From Ractos


    As I watched Mr. Ekenhart and the guards talk, I noticed that Leo was nodding her head behind me for some reason¡­


    Could it be that while I could barely hear them, Leo was able to hear the conversation just fine?


    And it seemed like she was agreeing with Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s exnation¡­


    Did she really understand? Or was she just pretending to?


    ¡°¡­Sorry to keep you waiting. Now, let¡¯s go back to the mansion.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Under¡­stood.¡±


    At the end, Mr. Ekenhart told the guards to prepare a horse for him at the western gate, and then he returned to us.


    After he covered his face, that is.


    ¡­While Liza stuttered when she talked, she was trying her best to be polite.


    And so after we saw the guards go on their way, we also headed to the western gate.


    ¡°The horse has been prepared, Your Grace!¡±


    ¡°Hmm. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°¡­Why do you need a horse? You could just ride on Leo¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Once we arrived at the west gate, a guard brought the horse to Mr. Ekenhart.


    It seemed a little unnecessary¡­ Leo could carry two to three adults just fine.


    And so Leo and I looked at Mr. Ekenhart questioningly.


    ¡°But you and Liza are going to ride on Leo, are you not? And it might be bothersome for me to hold onto you while you have to make sure that Liza does not fall off.¡±


    ¡°Ah, I suppose that is true.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°?¡±


    Now that he mentioned it, it did make sense.


    This would be Liza¡¯s first time riding on Leo while she is running, and it might be difficult to keep my bnce if Mr. Ekenhart was there as well.


    However, Leo seemed disappointed, as if she was saying that it would be perfectly fine. Liza had a puzzled expression.


    ¡°Now, let¡¯s go to the mansion.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°¡­Understood.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart got onto his horse, and I picked up Liza and got onto Leo¡¯s back.


    Then Leo started to run and follow the horse that was up ahead, but¡­ There was less rocking than usual?


    ¡°Thanks, Leo. For being considerate.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°¡­Woah!¡±


    Leo was trying to run without shaking too much, so that Liza wouldn¡¯t lose her bnce.


    I thanked her, and Leo barked as she came up to the side of the horse.


    I didn¡¯t know she could do that¡­ And even when running so carefully, she was able to keep up with the horse. It was very impressive.


    Perhaps Liza had never experienced such speed before, as she let out an amazed gasp and watched the scenery flow around her.


    While we weren¡¯t even going that fast, it was something new for her.


    ¡°Haha. Is it fun, Liza?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­! I¡¯ve never¡­rode on anything so fast!¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    As Leo rode next to Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s horse, Liza became excited.


    Even if she wasn¡¯t living in the slums, she was not really the age to be riding horses.


    Mr. Ekenhart turned to look at us and then smiled¡­or so it looked.


    As his face was still covered, maybe it just seemed that way¡­


    Grrrrr¡­


    ¡°Hmm?¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­¡±


    While riding on Leo, I heard a faint, familiar sound.


    As I wondered about it, Liza looked down as if embarrassed.


    She had been so excited just a moment ago. Could it be that¡­


    ¡°Liza. Are you hungry?¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    She answered in a quiet voice.


    So that sound was her stomach after all.


    Considering that we were on a running Leo, it must have been pretty loud for me to be able to hear it.


    I suppose she hadn¡¯t eaten since we found her, and so it was no surprise that she was hungry.


    And while she was now used to being around us, she was still quite reserved, so she didn¡¯t want to say anything.


    When I looked into the distance, I saw that the sun was starting to set, and it was getting dark¡­ It was already evening then.


    Now that I thought about it, I was quite hungry as well.


    ¡°Once we arrive at the ce I am staying at, I will have something prepared for you. Can you wait a little longer?¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes! ¡­But I am thirsty¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm. I see¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Hmm, Leo? Mr. Ekenhart!¡±


    I thought that once we arrived at the mansion, I could ask Ms. Helena or Sebastian to have something prepared.


    And while Liza nodded in agreement, she was now saying that she was thirsty.


    Well, waiting a little longer to eat was one thing, but being dehydrated was rough.


    As I wondered what to do, Leo barked one and then slowed down.


    I asked her what was wrong while also shouting out to Mr. Ekenhart.


    As she had stopped so suddenly, there was quite a distance between us.


    ¡°¡­What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Uh, Leo just stopped and¡­ Also, Liza says that she is thirsty¡­¡±


    ¡°Woooouuu. Grau!¡±


    ¡°Oh!?¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart came rushing back to us on his horse.


    I exined the situation to him as I took Liza down from Leo¡¯s back. Then Leo growled and barked.


    In the next instant, a sphere of water appeared in front of Leo and then dropped down to the ground.


    ¡°Leo¡­are you saying that Liza should drink that water?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    Leo nodded in reply.


    Since Liza said that she was thirsty, Leo wanted to give her some water.


    ¡°But I heard that water made with magic wasn¡¯t pure, and it¡¯s possible that there are substances in it that you should not drink¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff! Wuff. Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°Huh? This water is fine? Hmm, I don¡¯t know about that¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­I have never seen a Silver Fenrir use magic before¡­ Mr. Takumi. Is Leo saying that the water is drinkable?¡±


    ¡°Uh, yes. She says that it¡¯s fine to drink it. But I was told that you shouldn¡¯t drink water that was gathered with magic¡­¡±

 Chapter 301

    Chapter 301


    Leo Used Magic


    Previously, when entering the Fenrir Forest, Sebastian had told me that even if you use magic to make water, you are just gathering the moisture from the air, so it was possible that there could be something toxic inside.


    This could not be helped in situations where you were dying of thirst, but otherwise, it would be best to avoid drinking it.


    However, Leo was insisting that this water was fine.


    After hearing this, Mr. Ekenhart looked surprised and began to think.


    Now that I thought about it, he had not seen Leo use magic before.


    As there was no need to use it back at the mansion.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Perhaps she uses an advanced type of magic¡­ Or a magic that only Silver Fenrirs can use¡­¡±


    ¡°Advanced magic?¡±


    ¡°?¡±


    As Mr. Ekenhart muttered, I asked him to exin.


    Liza was also looking at him questioningly.


    ¡°I suppose Sebastian has not told you about it¡­ There is a type of magic that allows you to remove impurities from the water. A magic that allows you to make drinking water. But as it is very advanced and uses much energy, I have rarely seen anyone do it¡­¡±


    ¡°I didn¡¯t know that such a thing existed. But it would be very convenient.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. You would neverck for drinking water¡­ But as the energy depletion is so strong, the average person cannot activate it. It¡¯s really not even worth trying for most people.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Is that what you used, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Sebastian probably hadn¡¯t told me yet, since I was still a beginner when it came to magic.


    Besides, there was no point in learning something if I couldn¡¯t even do it.


    Regardless, that exined everything. And when I asked Leo she tilted her head and then started to bark.


    Uh, I don¡¯t know about that magic, but it can be drunk¡­


    ¡°However, I would believe it if that is what she says. Can she do it many times?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!


    ¡°Hmm¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, I¡¯ll drink it first then.¡±


    ¡°Are you sure about this, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Leo has never lied to me. And even if it¡¯s bad, I won¡¯t get sick right away. Alright, do it one more time, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wooou! Grau!¡±


    Ever since we came to this world, and Leo and I were able tomunicate, Leo had never lied to me.


    But then again, she was always soid back, and generally did not enter any conversations.


    In any case, we had been buddies for a long time, and I trusted her.


    Besides, even if there was something bad in the water, it wouldn¡¯t mean that we¡¯d get immediately sick.


    And so I made a cup with my hands and asked Leo to do it again.


    Like this, I would be able to collect enough water to drink.


    Perhaps I should have brought a wooden bowl with us.


    Leo barked, and then howled louder. And like that, water began to gather above my hands.


    After a while, the sphere of water was about the size of my head. It then began to fall, filling my hands before going past them.


    ¡°¡­Glug, glug.¡±


    ¡°How is it?¡±


    ¡°¡­It seems fine. There is no strange smell or taste. I think that it¡¯s normal water.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Then I suppose it¡¯s fine if she drinks it.¡±


    ¡°¡­I want to drink the¡­water¡­¡±


    ¡°Alright, Liza. Put out your hands in front of Leo¡­¡±


    When I drank it, there was nothing strange. It was just normal water.


    Well, I¡¯m sure there were toxic substances that I couldn¡¯t taste¡­but it was probably fine.


    Leo was nodding as if this conclusion was obvious.


    And Liza had looked at me with jealousy while I was drinking.


    And so I took her to Leo¡¯s face and made her put her hands out.


    But since her hands were small, and would not hold much water, I put out my hands as well.


    And then Mr. Ekenhart got down from his horse and extended his hands.


    ¡­I suppose he was also hungry¡­ Or he was just interested in Leo¡¯s magic.


    ¡°Glug¡­glug¡­ It¡¯s good!¡±


    ¡°Here, you can have more if it¡¯s not enough.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­glug-glug. Yes, it¡¯s normal water. It seems fine.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Liza must have been very thirsty, as she quickly started drinking the water in her hands.


    But since it didn¡¯t seem to be enough, I gave her some of mine.


    Mr. Ekenhart also drank and nodded with satisfaction.


    Leo looked quite smug at this.


    ¡°¡­I haven¡¯t drunk water¡­this good¡­in a long time¡­¡±


    ¡°Good? It is just normal water¡­¡±


    ¡°It is.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­we couldn¡¯t drink¡­clear water where I lived¡­ We drank rain water off the ground¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    While it was normal water to Mr. Ekenhart and me, it was apparently quite special for Liza.


    I suppose she was not in a very good environment for drinking water whenever she wanted to.


    And even when they could get water, it was dirty, and only enough to wet their throats.


    Perhaps she had never even drunk water that was clear enough that she could see her hands through it.


    And she was still so young¡­ Both Mr. Ekenhart and I frowned as it dawned on us.


    Leo let out a sigh.


    Perhaps Leo alone knew about what kind of life she had lived up until now.


    It might have been one of the reasons that Leo really wanted to help her.

 Chapter 302

    Chapter 302


    I Had A Conversation With Liza


    ¡°I¡¯m a nobleman¡­withnd. And so I can¡¯t only think of one person, but¡­this child must be saved. Even if it wasn¡¯t Leo¡¯s wish, that is the right thing to do.¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed. Just how she was treated and lived up until now¡­ It pains me just to think about it¡­¡±


    It was just sympathy.


    Even if you saved one person, there were plenty of others who were also suffering¡­ That being said, one had to start with the person that was in front of them.


    Mr. Ekenhart owned thesends and was the duke.


    And so some might not look well on him if he showed preferential treatment.


    But that wasn¡¯t enough reason to do nothing.


    He was too kind for that.


    And even if it was hypocritical, I could not abandon her either. And so I supported Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s decision.


    ¡°Well, we can think about all thatter¡­¡±


    ¡°Dying the decision?¡±


    ¡°You might say so. We have to deal with the pressing matter first. Or we will not be able to move on.¡±


    ¡°¡­That¡¯s true.¡±


    ¡°?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart let out a deep sigh.


    I nodded in agreement.


    I couldn¡¯t say anything to him.


    While I knew that I could live in this world now, I hadn¡¯t thought much about what the future held¡­ Aside from living leisurely with Leo.


    As for Ms. ire and Ms. Lyra¡­ No, nevermind that.


    We had to think about the present.


    Liza was looking at us with a puzzled expression.


    As she was younger than Tilura, she did not quite understand what we were talking about.


    She had probably never even studied¡­ But then again, did people even study in this world if they weren¡¯t nobles?


    I wondered about this as I picked up Liza and got back onto Leo¡¯s back. Mr. Ekenhart also returned to his horse.


    ¡­Aside from the strange cloth around his head, he looked good when astride his horse.


    ¡°Thank¡­you.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? What is it?¡±


    While riding on Leo, Liza suddenly thanked me.


    I wonder why?


    ¡°The¡­uh¡­for the delicious water¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, that. It was nothing. Besides, you should thank Leo. It was Leo who made the water.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­that¡¯s¡­right.¡±


    I didn¡¯t think that it was necessary to thank me for some water, but I suppose it meant more for her.


    When we returned, I would thank Leo for it as well.


    Allso, I would ask Ms. Helena to serve some of that grape juice.


    It was sure to be even more of a surprise than some clean water.


    Thinking about Liza¡¯s smile made me feel a little better. And so I decided to talk to her more.


    ¡°Uh¡­Liza? You know that you don¡¯t have to try and talk so politely?¡±


    ¡°Huh? ¡­But grandfather said that I should do that with old people¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, there is no need to with me. You can just talk the way you like. After all, wouldn¡¯t it be tiring?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­I under¡­stand¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Or?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ Yes. Uh¡­okay!¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s good.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    It had urred to me that she was forcing herself to talk in a polite manner.


    Maybe that was why she hesitated and sometimes stuttered?


    I wanted her to rx, and so I told her to talk in whatever way was easiest.


    While she wasn¡¯t used to doing it, she would get used to it soon.


    And so I smiled and patted her on the head.


    Leo also barked happily¡­ It was clear that she was also worried about her.


    Maybe it was like how she was with Sherry. She saw herself as an older sister.


    In that case¡­ I would try and act like an older brother.


    ¡­I was not going to be the grandfather, in any case.


    ¡°Mr. Ekenhart, are you forgetting something?¡±


    ¡°Hmm? What?¡±


    Some time had now passed.


    And we arrived at the mansion just before the sun had setpletely.


    On the way back, there had been some trouble¡­or something surprising, but¡­


    Right now, after dismounting Leo, I was standing in front of the entrance.


    Liza was amazed. Clearly she had not expected to be taken to such arge mansion.


    And so she was looking around with curiosity.


    But just before Mr. Ekenhart went through the door, I called out to him.


    I suppose he had forgotten?


    ¡°Uh¡­ I know that you wanted to cover your beard for Liza¡­but are you really going to go in looking like that?¡±


    ¡°And what would be the problem with that?¡±


    ¡°I wouldn¡¯t say that it¡¯s a problem, but¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart had also snuck out of the mansion in order to go to Ractos.


    He had not told anyone about this¡­ Well, he had left a note, but he didn¡¯t say anything to Sebastian or Ms. ire.


    Now that I thought about it, it was impressive that the guards recognized him like this¡­


    I suppose they knew him well enough to tell by his build and overall air.


    ¡°You left without saying anything, didn¡¯t you? Perhaps going in from the front door¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Ah, that is true. I forgot about that¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, I¡¯m sure Sebastian already knows what is going on¡­¡±


    ¡°You think so, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s just how Sebastian is¡­ It would be strange if he didn¡¯t notice. And he¡¯s probably told Ms. ire¡­¡±


    ¡°Tsk!¡±


    If it was only Sebastian, then that wasn¡¯t too bad¡­ But there could be real trouble if Ms. ire knew.


    Mr. Ekenhart frowned when he heard this.


    But now that we were already here¡­there was nothing to be done. Hell, it was possible that they could hear this conversation from the other side of the door¡­


    There would be no point in sneaking through a back door if they already knew¡­

 Chapter 303

    Chapter 303


    The Suspicious Person Was Ignored


    ¡°¡­What is it?¡±


    ¡°Hmm, it¡¯s nothing. He just forgot something and remembered it right now.¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Liza had looked puzzled at how distressed Mr. Ekenhart had be.


    Though, Leo was just sighing in exasperation¡­


    ¡°¡­It cannot be helped. We cannot just stand around here. ¡­I¡¯ve made my decision! We¡¯re going in!¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°¡­Okay.¡±


    I wasn¡¯t sure what had been going through his mind, but Mr. Ekenhart seemed determined now.


    I suppose he had prepared himself to face Ms. ire and be warned by Sebastian¡­


    Regardless, he now faced the door as if it was a great challenge he was up against.


    ¡­Though, I couldn¡¯t see his exact expression, due to the cloth.


    ¡°Wee back, Mr. Takumi and Leo!¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m back.¡±


    We were greeted by some servants who must have been standing ready on the other side.


    Liza was a little startled by this wee, and could not say anything.


    ¡°Ah, stop right there, Leo. Sorry, but is there a wet towel that I can use?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Yes, here it is¡­¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Did you forget already, Leo? You have to wipe your feet first.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!? Wuff¡­¡±


    I asked a nearby servant and epted the towel.


    Thankfully, they had one prepared.


    And so I wiped all of the dirt off of Leo¡¯s paws.


    Leo had been surprised as if it hadpletely slipped her mind. And so she lowered her head apologetically.


    As we had been to all sorts of ces today, she was quite dirty¡­and so I had to wipe her paws thoroughly.


    Hmm. Liza was watching us with deep interest. Did she want to wipe Leo too?


    ¡°Wee back, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Ah, Ms. ire. We¡¯re back.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°¡­ire.¡±


    ¡°?¡±


    As I considered letting her do the work, Ms. ire stepped out from behind the servants.


    And so I stood up and greeted her.


    Leo did as well.


    And then Mr. Ekenhart muttered her name. What happened to all of that resolve?


    Liza just looked puzzled.


    ¡°And who is this girl?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­it¡¯s a long story, but¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Uhh, ire?¡±


    ¡°Is that so. The ears and tail¡­ Is she a beastkin?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Apparently. How do you feel about them?¡±


    ¡°They are our neighbors. I suppose you¡¯ve learned about them then.¡±


    ¡°¡­Uh, ire?¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes. We visited the orphanage and I was told various things.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    Ms. ire nced at Liza while we talked.


    Of course, I had merely gone to town and came back with a beastkin child, so she was curious.


    And judging by what she said, Ms. ire seemed to know the situation regarding them.


    She also didn¡¯t seem to have any prejudices, and looked at Liza with a warm expression.


    There were no traces of her strange drunkenness from yesterday, and she spoke in her usual way.


    As for Mr. Ekenhart, he continued to try and talk to ire in a quiet voice, but she refused to react to him.


    ¡­Perhaps she was angry¡­


    ¡°And the orphanage did not ept her?¡±


    ¡°Well¡­they didn¡¯t have enough room right now¡­and Leo insisted that we bring her here¡­¡±


    ¡°Good Leo did?¡±


    ¡°Hey, hey.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wou. Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Very well. If that is what Leo wants¡­then we will support her decision!¡±


    ¡°¡­You can understand what Leo is saying?¡±


    ¡°Somewhat¡­ Not aspletely as you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    Ms. ire said with a chuckle.


    I suppose it was because she had spent so much time with Leo? Or did it have to do with her connection with Sherry, who was her familiar?


    In any case, just like Mr. Ekenhart, Ms. ire also epted Leo¡¯s wishes.


    So that was half of the problem solved.


    ¡­Now it was just a matter of what Sebastian would say.


    She was a simr age to Tilura, so they could be friends. And surely the servants would also grow fond of her.


    But as the butler, Sebastian might be a little harsher with his decision¡­


    Well, I wasn¡¯t actually that worried about it.


    ¡°Who is that prettydy?¡±


    ¡°Hahaha! Liza, this is Ms. ire. She is the master of this house.¡±


    ¡°Oh, I see.¡±


    ¡°Hehehe¡­¡±


    ¡°Will someone notice me! Heey!¡±


    Liza tilted her head and asked about Ms. ire.


    Ms. ire was quite pleased. Both by thepliment and by how cute Liza looked when her ears and tail moved.


    ¡­Actually, Mr. Ekenhart was probably supposed to be the master of the house¡­ But he surely did not look like he was at the moment¡­


    ¡°Now, this is no ce to talk¡­ Let us go to the drawing room.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. So much has happened, and I¡¯m sure that Liza is tired.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Hey, hey¡­ Notice me!¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­ I already have. Now, who is this suspicious person?¡±


    ¡°Suspicious person. How rude¡­¡±


    Ms. ire then guided us to the drawing room, as it would be no good to stand here and talk. It was also then that she finally sighed and acknowledged Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s presence.


    If only he would take that cloth off of his face and stop moving around so much¡­


    It was no wonder that some people didn¡¯t show him much respect.

 Chapter 304

    Chapter 304


    We Talked In The Drawing Room


    ¡°If you act strangely while dressed like that, then you can hardly expect a different oue, father.¡±


    ¡°¡­Hmm. Well, there are reasons for this. In any case, we¡¯ll talk in the drawing room.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was relieved after she finally acknowledged him.


    Well, he was probably more relieved that Ms. ire wasn¡¯t that angry and didn¡¯t start lecturing him¡­


    Though, maybe his relief was a little premature?


    ¡°¡­Father. There are other pressing matters right now, but we will continue this conversationter.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes, of course.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°?¡±


    Ms. ire muttered quietly to Mr. Ekenhart while we walked, much to his dismay.


    So she knew everything after all, and was just pretending to be calm.


    Liza was watching them with a puzzled expression.


    I couldn¡¯t help but feel a little bad for Mr. Ekenhart¡­


    ¡°I see¡­ So that¡¯s what happened.¡±


    ¡°Yes. If Leo hadn¡¯t noticed it, Liza would be¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed, that is true¡­ However, why is there beastkin in Ractos¡­¡±


    ¡°ire, that is not something we can know right now. We don¡¯t know who brought her there. Perhaps they entered while hiding their identity. While I will have the matter looked into¡­we may never find out¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­That¡¯s true.¡±


    After we arrived in the drawing room, we exined to her how we had found Liza.


    At some point, Sebastian and Ms. Lyra hade to listen as well.


    ¡­Sebastian was smiling whenever he nced at Mr. Ekenhart. Clearly he had some words for him as well.


    ¡°Excuse me.¡±


    As Sebastian fought to suppress his delight, Ms. Helena entered the room.


    Ms. Gelda was also with her.


    ¡°Helena. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Here is the grape juice you asked for.¡±


    Ms. Lyra then helped Ms. Helena and Ms. Gelda ce the cups on the table.


    They also left a pitcher in case anyone wanted more.


    This was because on the way to the drawing room, I had asked them to bring some grape juice.


    I told them that it could be during dinner, since it would take some time to boil and cool it, but it seems like they had some that was already made.


    Perhaps it was because Tilura, Leo and Sherry drank it often?


    After seeing that everyone had a cup, Ms. Helena left the room.


    ¡°¡­What is this?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s like grape juice. And it tastes even better than water. Why don¡¯t you try it?¡±


    ¡°Okay¡­thank you.¡±


    ¡°Let¡¯s drink it too.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    And so we all picked up our sses and drank.


    I suppose the magic water Leo had made was not enough, as it seemed like we were all thirsty.


    Even Leo was drinking it from a bucket that had been prepared for her.


    She didn¡¯t even drink milk this quickly¡­


    But then again, Leo hadn¡¯t drunk any water on our way back.


    ¡°Mm!¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s delicious!¡±


    ¡°Isn¡¯t it?¡±


    Those who had already had it before were not surprised by its taste, but after taking a sip, Liza¡¯s eyes widened and she turned towards me.


    Her expression was a mixture of surprise and delight, which was heart-warming to see.


    Even her tail was wagging happily.


    Her reaction reminded me of Leo¡­ Perhaps all creatures with tails did that.


    In the corner of my vision, I could see Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda looking at Liza¡¯s tail with amusement.


    ¡°Mm¡­glug-glug¡­ It¡¯s delicious, papa!¡±


    ¡°It is, isn¡¯t it. There¡¯s plenty more, so drink up.¡±


    ¡°Papa!?¡±


    ¡°Papa!?¡±


    ¡°Papa!?¡±


    ¡°Papa!?¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    Liza had a big smile on her face as she drank the grape juice.


    However, in spite of this pleasant atmosphere, everyone in the room suddenly gasped in surprise.


    Well, Ms. ire, Sebastian, Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda.


    Mr. Ekenhart just chuckled.


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi¡­papa¡­ What is the meaning of this? Is she really¡­yours, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°No, no. She is definitely not mine!¡±


    ¡°¡­Are you sure about that?¡±


    ¡°I am! Mr. Ekenhart knows! As I exined earlier, Leo found her in Ractos!¡±


    ¡°¡­Is that true, father?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­it is. Mr. Takumi is not lying.¡±


    After the initial surprise, Ms. ire looked a little crestfallen as she interrogated me.


    There was something a little scary about her now¡­


    In any case, I tried to dispel any strange ideas she got into her head.


    Even Mr. Ekenhart agreed that I was telling the truth¡­ Though, he was sweating for some reason.


    Yes, Ms. ire had an intensity now that I had not seen before¡­


    ¡°¡­Then why are you her papa¡­? I don¡¯t understand¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, uh¡­on our way here, she suddenly started calling me that¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm? But you are papa?¡±


    ¡°¡­Liza¡­ You¡¯re not really helping me in this situation¡­¡±


    I was starting to feel a little frantic in front of Ms. ire.


    Was this how Mr. Ekenhart felt when he was the target of his daughter¡¯s wrath?


    Even though they were initially shocked as well, now Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda were more intimidated by Ms. ire. Only Sebastian seemed to be enjoying this.


    Well, I suppose I could not rely on Mr. Ekenhart after all¡­ He was not even looking at me now.


    I felt a cold sweat drip down my back. And like that, I continued to exin myself until Ms. ire was satisfied.

 Chapter 305

    Chapter 305


    I Was Called Papa


    After drinking Leo¡¯s magic water and continuing on our journey back, Liza started calling me ¡®papa¡¯ after I told her that she didn¡¯t need to be so formal.


    ¡°Thank you for helping me, papa!¡±


    ¡°You don¡¯t need to thank¡­ What?¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Grandfather said¡­that parents are supposed to be kind and protect children. And that¡¯s what you did¡­¡±


    ¡°I-I see¡­¡±


    ¡°HAHAHAHA! She has grown quite fond of you, Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s not aughing matter, Mr. Ekenhart. I¡¯m not a parent¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was listening as he rode next to us, and he now burst intoughter¡­


    While I had been around children a lot, I¡¯ve never had any of my own, so I wasn¡¯t sure how to react.


    Liza must have felt my hesitation, and she looked at me with worry.


    ¡°Are you not¡­papa? I don¡¯t know much about parents¡­¡±


    Hmm¡­ Yes. Well¡­¡±


    When she looked at me like that, it was hard to tell her to stop calling me that.


    ¡°Also¡­I don¡¯t know your name¡­that other old man said it a few times¡­but I keep forgetting¡­¡±


    ¡°I-I see¡­ Hmm. Indeed. ¡­Well, my name is Takumi. So you can just call me Takumi.¡±


    ¡°¡­Takumi¡­ Hmm¡­ But it¡¯s easier to say papa!¡±


    ¡°Th-that might be, but¡­ I¡¯m not your papa. And so I don¡¯t think¡­¡±


    ¡°I can¡¯t? But I want¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, uh¡­¡±


    ¡°Hahaha! Now you can¡¯t refuse. You¡¯ll just have to ept the name, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°¡­Mr. Ekenhart¡­ This is your fault too¡­¡±


    It wasn¡¯t that I hated being called that.


    After all, it showed howfortable she was around me now.


    However, it was awkward to be called papa when I didn¡¯t have any children.


    Besides, Mr. Ekenhart had helped her too. And he had daughters already. Surely he would be better for that role¡­


    Perhaps it was because of the beard situation?


    But I wasn¡¯t even married. And I was too young¡­ Well, maybe not that young, but¡­


    While I was happy that she felt that way, still¡­


    ¡°¡­I can¡¯t?¡±


    ¡°¡­!¡±


    I red at Mr. Ekenhart who continued tough.


    And then Liza looked up at me with that worried expression and drooping tail and ears.


    I could not tell her that she absolutely couldn¡¯t.


    Who could, when they saw such an expression on her face¡­ Well, there were probably plenty of people who could, but I couldn¡¯t.


    ¡°Fi-fine. You can call me papa¡­¡±


    ¡°Yay! Thank you, papa!¡±


    ¡°Hahaha!¡±


    I pushed away any feelings of confusion for herfort, and allowed it with a nod.


    Liza smiled happily and wagged her tail and twitched her ears.


    I suppose that was how beastkin expressed their happiness.


    Regardless, after seeing that, I felt that I had made the right decision.


    Mr. Ekenhart was justughing, which made me less sympathetic about what Ms. ire and Sebastian would say to himter. Really.


    ¡°Hah¡­so I¡¯m a parent now¡­even though I¡¯m not married¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    I muttered as Liza talked excitedly and Mr. Ekenhartugh. Leo sighed and continued to run.


    ¡°So, that¡¯s how it was¡­ Liza forced me¡­you could say¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­very well. I¡¯m relieved to know that. Yes, very relieved.¡±


    ¡°Y-yes. Of course.¡±


    Ms. ire sighed with relief after hearing all of this, and she then returned to her more gentle self. I would have to be careful in the future so that I don¡¯t anger her.


    ¡°So if Mr. Takumi is the papa¡­then that means¡­¡±


    ¡°ire, perhaps now is not the time?¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes, excuse me.¡±


    Ms. ire seemed like she was thinking about something, but Mr. Ekenhart warned her, and so she shook her head.


    What had she been thinking about?


    ¡°As I said before, if Leo wants us to protect this child, then the house will not oppose her will. Silver Fenrirs are revered in this family¡­they are special. Besides, at this point, she is like a part of the family.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    With a look of serious determination, Ms. ire made this deration to everyone in the room, and then everyone nodded in agreement.


    As for Leo, she bowed her head to Ms. ire and barked as if to express her gratitude over this decision.


    While Liza understood that we were talking about her, she seemed rather confused as well.


    But one could not expect her to understand things about Mr. Ekenhart being the duke or about Silver Fenrirs being special.


    She could learn about all of that little by little.

 Chapter 306

    Chapter 306


    Ms. ire Was Concerned About Yesterday


    ¡°¡­What you really want to say, is that it¡¯s because Mr. Takumi is requesting it¡­not Leo¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Father?¡±


    ¡°Mm¡­nevermind. In any case, it is official now. Liza will be a guest in this house. Liza, you may move around freely while you are here, understand?¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes¡­I understand¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart had muttered this observation, and had received a cold look from Ms. ire in return.


    He grimaced and then turned his attention to Liza.


    I hadn¡¯t really heard what he was saying, but he should know better than to poke the bear by now¡­


    As for Liza, she also seemed a little confused, but nodded her head as if she understood.


    Every time she tilted her head or looked puzzled, her ears and tail would move. When she did this, I saw that Ms. ire, Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda all averted their eyes.


    Perhaps they were restraining an urge to touch the tail.


    I had a feeling that they would be doting on Liza pretty soon. I just hoped that Tilura wouldn¡¯t get jealous.


    ¡°Now that I think about it¡­ Why is Ms. ire making the deration? I thought that Mr. Ekenhart is the master here¡­¡±


    ¡°Heh. To ask that so bluntly. You are a strange one, Mr. Takumi. It¡¯s quite simple. Because I have left all matters concerning this house to ire.¡±


    ¡°I am the one responsible for this mansion. And that is not going to change easily, just because father has decided to pay us a little visit.¡±


    ¡°¡­While the servants here all work for the duke, they do so under Lady ire. And so it is ultimately her decision.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    ¡°I have already made the decision, and do not wish to confuse the servants.¡±


    Is that right?


    Since he was the head of the family, I had assumed that he was the main authority in this mansion as well.


    I suppose he technically was, just that Ms. ire was the one responsible for making decisions.


    So it was a good thing that I had introduced Ms. ire to Liza in the way that I had.


    Mr. Ekenhart just did not look very impressive right now¡­that had been my main reason.


    In any case, I was not surprised that Sebastian had forced his way into the conversation. He must have seen the opportunity to exin something.


    After all, when I nced towards him, he was smiling with satisfaction.


    ¡­Perhaps he would go easy on Mr. Ekenhart now.


    ¡°How are Tilura and Ms. Anne?¡±


    After we had sat there and enjoyed our drinks for some time, I suddenly remembered something.


    Well, it¡¯s not that I had forgotten.


    But usually, if Tilura knew that Leo was here, she and Sherry woulde to meet her.


    As for Ms. Anne¡­ I had been thinking about what Mr. Ekenhart told me in Ractos.


    Perhaps I felt a little sympathy towards her.


    ¡°Tilura and Sherry should be in the back garden now. She will be training until dinner time. As for Anne¡­she is still in her room. She hasn¡¯t recovered fromst night¡¯s drinking yet.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    Tilura sure worked hard.


    She diligently trains even when Leo and I are not there¡­ I suppose that was how much she liked to move her body.


    As for Ms. Anne¡­ Well, I hope she gets well soon¡­


    I could not really say anything about that, as it would be awkward since Ms. ire was here.


    ¡°Um¡­Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, what is it?¡±


    ¡°I am very sorry¡­that you had to see that yesterday. I shall be more careful in the future.¡±


    ¡°Hahahaha! I¡¯m sure you have reason to want to drink and rx once in a while. You really do not have to worry about me.¡±


    ¡°Still, I apologize. And thank you.¡±


    Ms. ire looked a little embarrassed as she bowed her head and apologized.


    I suppose it wasn¡¯t her mostdy-like moment.


    But somehow, I felt that such things were necessary for her.


    You would get tired if you remained so tense all of the time.


    ¡°Well, I suppose we can introduce Liza to Tilura during dinner.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Tilura should be happy, since they are simr in age. And Anne¡­will probably be happy, since she is already fond of Sherry.¡±


    ¡°Hahah. Maybe.¡±


    Tilura was not easily scared, and was a very curious child. So she shouldn¡¯t have any trouble bing friends with Liza.


    I hoped that they would be able to y together.


    And since Ms. Anne liked Sherry, it seemed likely that she would take to Liza as well.


    Because of the ears and tail¡­ Even Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda was staring at them¡­


    ¡­Though, Sherry was always more interested in Ms. Anne¡¯s hair rolls.


    ¡°Everyone, dinner is prepared. It will be served in the dining hall now.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you. ¡­Uh, can you add another person?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Helena saw that we have a guest earlier, and has seen to it.¡±


    ¡°Good. Well, let¡¯s go to the dining hall then.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Ms. ire.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. This child¡­Liza. Is now our guest.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Did you hear that, Liza? They have prepared something for you to eat.¡±

 Chapter 307

    Chapter 307


    I Had A Feeling That Liza Would Be Popr In The Mansion


    ¡°¡­Thank¡­you¡­?¡±


    ¡°No, don¡¯t mention it. I hope you enjoy being here.¡±


    A servant had entered and announced that dinner was ready.


    Apparently, Ms. Helena had prepared food for Liza as well.


    I would have to thank her about thatter. Especially since she had also brought the grape juice.


    I told Liza to thank Ms. ire as well. And though she seemed so overwhelmed by everything that was happening, she managed to do it.


    And then she bowed her head and looked up while shaking her tail.


    I could see that Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda were clenching their fists as if trying to hold them back.


    Even Ms. ire was holding one hand with the other.


    ¡­It was like they were trying to not pet someone¡¯s dog.


    Thinking this, I turned to see that Mr. Ekenhart was chuckling, and Sebastian was smiling.


    Yes, Liza should fit in here just fine.


    ¡°So, your name is Liza!?¡±


    ¡°Yes. This is Liza. While she may be a beastkin, you must treat her like anyone else, understand?¡±


    ¡°I understand! Nice to meet you. I¡¯m Tilura!¡±


    ¡°Tilura¡­ Older sister?¡±


    ¡°Older sister¡­ I¡¯ve never been called that before!¡±


    After going to the dining hall and waiting for the food to be served, Tilura returned from her training. And so I introduced Liza to her.


    As expected, Tilura¡¯s eyes were filled with curiosity, and she seemed quite happy as she stared at Liza¡¯s ears and tail.


    Not only that, but she seemed strangely pleased to be seen as an older sister.


    As she was the youngest child, she had never been called that before.


    ¡°Be nice to her, alright?¡±


    ¡°Yes! I will! We¡¯ll be friends!¡±


    ¡°¡­Friends¡­sister Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    Tilura had the biggest smile.


    I had not been that worried about it, but it was still a relief.


    It was Liza¡¯s adorable ears and tail that made everyone ept her quickly.


    Well¡­there was still Ms. Anne¡­


    Before arriving at the dining hall, Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian had gone off somewhere. But they returned shortly after.


    And when he did, he had shaved his beard andbed his hair.


    Upon seeing this, Ms. ire was both rmed and suspicious. But she calmed down after he exined that it was so that Liza wouldn¡¯t be scared of him.


    ¡­.Still, Mr. Ekenhart sure did look a lot more attractive after shaving and fixing his hair¡­ Itplimented the lines and angles of his face. It almost made me wish that I looked older as well.


    ¡°Excuse me.¡±


    Just as I started to think about Ms. Anne, she entered the dining hall.


    It seemed that she was still hung over, as her face looked a little ill.


    I¡¯m sure that it had improved since the morning¡­but I guess she really had drunk too muchst night.


    After all, that wine was supposed to be quite strong.


    ¡°¡­Oh? Who is this? Is it a beastkin?¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s right. She was being bullied, and then Mr. Takumi and Leo rescued her.¡±


    Ms. Anne had been sluggishly making her way to the table when she suddenly noticed the neer.


    As Liza was still small, only her head was immediately visible when she sat at the table.


    So it could not be helped.


    As for the seating arrangement, Mr. Ekenhart sat at the head of the table.


    And I sat on his right, Liza was next to me, and then Leo after her.


    This was because Liza wanted to sit between us.


    On the other side was Ms. ire, Tilura, Sherry, and Ms. Anne.


    Aside from Liza, we always sat like this.


    ¡°Beastkin¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Papa¡­¡±


    ¡°What is it, Liza?¡±


    She must have not seen many beastkin, as she stared hard at Liza, which seemed to frighten her.


    Was it because Ms. Anne was scary? Or she just didn¡¯t like being stared at?


    ¡°That person¡­is scary¡­¡±


    ¡°WHAT!?¡±


    ¡°Now, now. Don¡¯t worry about her. She¡¯s not scary.¡±


    ¡°Anne¡­ What have you done now?¡±


    ¡°What are you talking about? I was only looking¡­ I have not done anything!¡±


    But Liza continued to clutch onto me and insist that Ms. Anne was horrifying.


    She was even shaking¡­ Was just being looked at by Ms. Anne so bad?


    What was it about Ms. Anne that caused such a reaction?


    ¡°What is it? Why do you think she is scary?¡±


    I asked her slowly.


    It would probably make things worse to scold and tell children to bear it during such times.


    I didn¡¯t want to do that.


    Leo also looked at us with concern.


    ¡°Her hair is¡­spiky¡­¡±


    ¡°Hair¡­?¡±


    ¡°Are you talking about my wonderful hair?¡±


    Liza¡¯s quiet voice rang in the air as she looked Ms. Anne¡¯s golden hair, which were shaped like vertical rolls.


    While they looked a little droopy today, I suppose they did tapper into sharp edges.


    But it was still hair, and wouldn¡¯t pierce anything. They looked soft enough¡­


    I suppose the very ends could look like the tip of a rapier or other weapon¡­even if they were a golden color.

 Chapter 308

    Chapter 308


    Ms. Anne Was In Shambles


    ¡°Hehehe¡­hahaha! Anneliese¡¯s hair is going to poke people! What an amusing thought!¡±


    ¡°Hehehe¡­yes, it is, father. Ahahaha!¡±


    ¡°Does your hair pierce people¡­Ms. Anne? It does look very sharp!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Wha¡­what are you saying¡­!¡±


    After a moment of silence, Mr. Ekenhart had burst intoughter.


    Ms. ire was alsoughing¡­eventually, even I could not hold back theughter.


    Tilura looked like she didn¡¯t understand what was so funny¡­which made things even funnier.


    Leo even looked like she was amused, and Sebastian turned his head away to cover his face.


    As for Ms. Anne¡­she was shaking angrily.


    ¡°So in other words, you think that my hair would stab people¡­ That is ridiculous! Ms. ire, Your Grace! You should notugh so much!¡±


    ¡°You may say that, Anneliese, but¡­hehehe¡­¡±


    ¡°Hehehe. Yes, Anne. It¡¯s your fault for having such dangerous-looking hair. Hehehe.¡±


    ¡°Tsk! Hey, you little beast! Do you realize what you¡¯ve done!¡±


    ¡°So-sorry¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­!?¡±


    ¡°Hey, Anne? You should not shout at children¡­ Anne?¡±


    After having her pride and joy ridiculed, Ms. Anne had be red with fury.


    ¡­And she seemed to have forgotten about her hangover.


    In any case, she then took it out on Liza, who started it all.


    Liza became very stiff and apologized to her.


    However, she did not understand what she did wrong, and tilted her head to the side¡­ And her tail and ears as well.


    From her perspective, she had merely been honest, which caused others tough. And so she had no idea what she was supposed to do.


    Perhaps she had only apologized as a form of self-defense, since she used to live in the slums¡­


    However, upon seeing Liza like this, Ms. Anne froze as if she had been struck by lightning.


    This reaction¡­ I had seen it earlier today as well.


    ¡°Tho-tho-those¡­¡±


    ¡°Those?¡±


    ¡°Those ears and tail! What is wrong with them!?¡±


    ¡°Uh, she is a beastkin¡­ So it would be strange if she didn¡¯t have them?¡±


    ¡°Th-th-that¡¯s right. Beastkin¡­beastkin¡­uhh¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm?¡±


    ¡°¡­Papa¡­¡±


    Ms. Anne was suddenly acting strangely.


    We had already told her that Liza was a beastkin, and it was obvious just by looking at her.


    Why was she acting surprised all of a sudden?


    ¡°Beast¡­kin¡­¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m Liza.¡±


    ¡°So you are Liza. Uhh¡­ May I¡­touch your ears and tail?¡±


    ¡°¡­NO!¡±


    ¡°!!¡±


    ¡°Ms. Anne¡­ No one would want to be touched by you after you red at them with bloodshot eyes.¡±


    After hearing Liza¡¯s name, Ms. Anne had stretched out her hand across from the table.


    Her eyes made her look like a mad woman.


    At this rate, she was bound to climb over the table and knock things over.


    This only made Liza even more scared, and she rejected Ms. Anne strongly.


    Once again, Ms. Anne suffered a terrible shock.


    First Leo and then Mr. Ekenhart¡­ Liza was shocking a lot of people.


    ¡°Anne, just calm down. She is just a child. Of course, she is scared.¡±


    ¡°Ms. Anne is scary.¡±


    ¡°¡­What! Fine. Very well. I have behaved a little wildly¡­ Excuse me.¡±


    After hearing that from Ms. ire and Tilura, Ms. Anne returned to herself and became calm.


    However, she was still looking at Liza and her hands were twitching.


    ¡°Liza. Don¡¯t worry about her. Just sit in your seat, alright?¡±


    ¡°¡­Okay.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. Leo will protect you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    I said to her gently and made her sit down.


    Leo also nodded reassuringly, which helped.


    ¡­I would have like to say that I would protect her as well, but I was not confident that I would have been able to defeat Ms. Anne when her eyes looked like that.


    It wasn¡¯t about sword training. She just had an intimidating power¡­I suppose.


    Perhaps it was because she was a noble. No, that was ridiculous.


    ¡°Hehehehe¡­ Thank you for that¡­¡±


    ¡°Father.¡±


    ¡°Hmph! Fine. Let¡¯s settle down. Since we are all here, we should eat.¡±


    In spite of the scene, the servants had quietly finished serving the food.


    ¡°Yes, let¡¯s eat.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°¡­Let¡¯s¡­eat?¡±


    At Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s signal, everyone started to eat.


    Liza had been looking at me strangely as I put my hands together, but she copied me.


    While we ate, we then exined to Tilura and Ms. Anne about how Liza came to be with us.


    ¡°I see. Indeed, I hear a lot about how the beastkin are treated badly. It is the same in my father¡¯snds. While no battles were fought there, the older generation still feel negatively towards them.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. They know about the war. And many people believe the rumors or exaggerate and spread them. And with no one to tell them otherwise, it is treated as the truth.¡±


    ¡°Well, father. Perhaps you should try and ensure that your people are properly educated?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ That is true, but.. Many people cannot afford to be educated¡­ It is not a simple matter¡­¡±


    We were finished exining about Liza, and now, Mr. Ekenhart, Ms. ire, and Ms. Anne, the nobles¡­the administrators, were talking as if in a meeting.

 Chapter 309

    Chapter 309


    Ms. Anne Did Not Give Up Easily


    As the dining hall seemed to turn into a meeting room, I listened to the others talk while eating my food.


    Mr. Ekenhart was the duke, and Ms. ire had a lot of responsibilities, so it was understandable.


    ¡­But I was surprised to hear Ms. Anne also talk so earnestly¡­ Well, I already knew that she was prone to making suggestions about such things¡­ But recently, she and Ms. ire talked like some kind ofedic duo, that I had forgotten about what she really was like¡­


    ¡°Papa¡­it¡¯s delicious!¡±


    ¡°Indeed. It really is.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Liza smiled as she ate the food that had been served.


    Me and Leo watched and smiled.


    Though, there was one thing that I wanted her to be careful with¡­ Of course, I couldn¡¯t me her considering what she had been through¡­


    ¡°Liza. You should hold the fork like this.¡±


    ¡°¡­But that¡¯s hard.¡±


    Liza didn¡¯t know how to hold a fork properly, and held it as if making a fist.


    And it was difficult to eat some dishes like that.


    And so she would start picking up things with her hands.


    I didn¡¯t know if that had anything to do with being beastkin or her upbringing¡­ And it might be difficult to teach her here.


    One of the maids was now busy wiping the table and her mouth. I felt bad for her.


    However, the maid seemed to be smiling at Liza¡­ Maybe she just liked taking care of children? Or she was just interested in Liza¡¯s ears and tail¡­


    She had all but forgotten the ordeal with Ms. Anne, and so her ears and tell were moving happily again.


    Ms. Gelda, who was waiting near the door, was looking at the other maid a little jealously.


    Yes, Liza would probably be spoiled by the people here¡­


    ¡°Still¡­papa¡­is it¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm? What?¡±


    As I was trying to teach Liza and listen to the conversation around us at the same time, Ms. Anne suddenly turned to me.


    She too seemed to feel strangely about the fact that I was called papa¡­


    ¡°If Mr. Takumi is called papa¡­then I can be called mama¡­¡±


    ¡°Anne!?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­¡±


    ¡°?¡±


    While she seemed to be thinking aloud, it was rather shocking.


    Ms. ire raised her voice in astonishment, though Mr. Ekenhart was calm.


    Liza looked puzzled.


    ¡°Uhh, Ms. Anne? I don¡¯t think that would be¡­¡±


    After all, Liza was scared of her.


    Even though she didn¡¯t look scared now, she still avoided looking in Ms. Anne¡¯s direction¡­


    ¡°No, Mr. Takumi. While you may have rejected me¡­you are still not promised to anyone! So if I were to be named this child¡¯s mother¡­ Well, it would be as if we were married¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­So you still haven¡¯t given up¡­¡±


    ¡°Of course, not! You have a Silver Fenrir! That would be very useful for my family!¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°¡­Tsk¡­ I shall not give up!¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­ So that¡¯s what you were thinking about, Anne.¡±


    I had turned her down quite directly¡­ But it didn¡¯t seem to matter to her.


    If I was called papa and she was called mama, then we would look like a family, and eventually¡­ That seemed to be what she was thinking.


    Leo looked at Ms. Anne when she heard mention of Silver Fenrir, which caused Ms. Anne to recoil. But then she moved forward as if to show her resolve.


    Ms. ire sighed with exasperation.


    ¡°What do you think, Liza?¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was just amused by the whole scene, and then asked Liza what she thought about it.


    Since he hadughed at her reaction before, he was expecting Liza to say something humorous again.


    Speaking of Mr. Ekenhart, Liza now had no problem looking at his face.


    And so that was one of the reasons that he looked so satisfied.


    ¡°Hmm?¡±


    ¡°Uh, thatdy wants you to call her ¡®mama.¡¯¡±


    ¡°¡­No¡­that¡¯s wrong. I already¡­have a mama!¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­?¡±


    ¡°¡­But¡­what about my ns¡­¡±


    ¡°Your n was terrible to begin with, Anne. So, who is this mama? Could it be¡­me?¡±


    ¡°Well, it can¡¯t be me, because I¡¯m her older sister!¡±


    Liza looked a little puzzled by Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s question.


    And then she looked at Ms. Anne and shook her head.


    Not only that, but she insisted that she already had a mama.


    I didn¡¯t know how she came to such decisions, but who could it be?


    ¡­Even I was interested.


    Ms. ire was looking at Liza with great expectation.


    As for Ms. Anne¡­ I¡¯m not sure why she was blurting out her ns in front of me in the first ce¡­


    I thought she wasn¡¯t that stupid¡­but maybe I was wrong¡­


    ¡°Liza, who is your mama? You don¡¯t have to worry about these people. Just say what you think.¡±


    Said Mr. Ekenhart with a big grin.


    And Ms. ire nodded in agreement.

 Chapter 310

    Chapter 310


    The Beastkin¡¯s Mother Was Not Human


    ¡°Uhh¡­ Mama!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!?¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­so that¡¯s who it is¡­ Ahahaha!¡±


    ¡°¡­I can¡¯t believe that it¡¯s good Leo¡­ I am defeated¡­but it cannot be helped.¡±


    ¡°Tsk! Yes, one cannotpete against a Silver Fenrir¡­¡±


    ¡°That makes sense. Leo is so nice!¡±


    ¡°Leo¡­¡±


    After thinking about it for a moment, Liza got off of her chair and grabbed onto Leo, who was eating her food.


    As she was not one to ever enter our conversations, Leo was quite startled by this.


    Mr. Ekenhart just burst intoughter, and Ms. ire and Ms. Anne seemed disappointed.


    But Tilura was nodding understandingly.


    Well, Leo was big, female and protective over Liza on top of being very kind.


    And perhaps being beastkin meant that she didn¡¯t see Leo as being so different.


    Leo saw Sherry as a younger sister, and was also good with children, so it might be appropriate.


    But then again, I think Leo is younger than Liza¡­


    Liza was probably around seven years old, and I rescued Leo about five years ago.


    And she was close to being a newborn, so she must be younger than Liza.


    Well, I suppose in dog years, or Silver Fenrir years, she was an adult¡­


    ¡°Do you like Leo?¡±


    ¡°Yes! She is kind and warm!¡±


    ¡°I see. Well, I guess Leo is your mama then.¡±


    ¡°Wuff? ¡­Wuff.¡±


    It was true that Leo was kind, and she was definitely warm when you were enveloped by that fur.


    Liza likely didn¡¯t have anyone she could cling onto like that before, and she had the biggest smile now.


    But Leo didn¡¯t seem too convinced. However, after seeing Liza¡¯s smile, she barked as if to say it could not be helped then.


    ¡°So Mr. Takumi is the papa and Leo is the mama. What an amusing result.¡±


    ¡°Father¡­ I do not find it very amusing.¡±


    ¡°¡­How can I break this apart¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Kyau? Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau.¡±


    ¡°Ahahaha!¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart and the others were talking about something.


    Aside from that, Sherry, who had been eating quietly up until now, suddenly got down from her seat and approached Leo.


    I suppose she wanted to see what was happening.


    After barking questioningly, Leo seemed to exin the situation to her.


    Sherry looked happy, and then licked Liza¡¯s face as if weing her to the family.


    Liza looked surprised at first, but then started tough.


    They would have no trouble bing friends.


    The servants in the dining hall were also watching them and smiling.


    ¡°Excuse me. Mr. Takumi, the medicinal wine is ready.¡±


    After some time had passed, we finished eating, and then Ms. Helena entered the room.


    The medicinal wine¡­ Yes, we were supposed to taste it today.


    ¡°Thank you. Mr. Ekenhart?¡±


    ¡°Mmm. Yes, let us all taste it here then. ¡­Of course, ire might want to be careful¡­¡±


    ¡°I know, father. I will not repeat what happened yesterday.¡±


    ¡°¡­I would certainly hope so¡­¡±


    When I turned to Mr. Ekenhart, he decided that we should all drink it here.


    Ms. ire looked a little embarrassed, and so Ms. Anne took the opportunity to re at her usingly.


    Ms. ire was usually the one using Anne, so this was a rare asion where the tables were turned.


    Well, she had drunk so much yesterday¡­


    ¡°Then I shall serve it right away.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Sebastian and Ms. Lyra then helped her serve the wine in front of everyone.


    A small amount was poured in each ss. It was a dark color that was almost brown. It was not clear like the previous wine.


    I suppose mixing in the medicine would change it this much.


    ¡°It is a lot less than yesterday. And it is not clear¡­¡±


    ¡°As we did not have a lot of medicine, we could only serve a little right now.¡±


    ¡°Yes, it depends on how hard Milina and I can work.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. And it also lost its rity when mixing in the medicine. The color was also changed, which is one of the medicine¡¯s effects, I believe.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ And what about the taste?¡±


    ¡°As Mr. Takumi was absent, we cooks tasted a small amount of it. ¡­And while the taste is a little distinct, it should not be a problem.¡±


    So they had tasted the wine while I was gone.


    I felt a little bad, as it was probably my responsibility.


    That being said, since they had made the other wine first and tasted it, I trusted their judgment.


    And now I was curious to try it for myself.


    I also wanted to know if it was effective.


    Of course, when it came to Tilura, Liza, Leo and Sherry, they were given some grape juice as usual.


    Liza had drunk it before, and knew it was delicious. So she smiled broadly when she saw the ss ced in front of her.


    ¡°Now, let us drink.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Very well.¡±


    ¡°Indeed.¡±


    At Mr. Ekenhart¡¯smand, everyone picked up their ss and tipped it into their mouths.


    ¡­The smell¡­was very faint¡­ Less so than the previous wine.


    Surely there was no need to brace myself then. And so I took a sip of it.


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    ¡°I understand what you are saying, Helena. It does taste a little odd.¡±


    ¡°I do not care for this one at all. The wine we had yesterday was much more delicious.¡±


    ¡°¡­It isn¡¯t bad at first¡­but the after taste¡­¡±


    Everyone put the sses back on the table.


    I understood what they all meant and nodded in agreement.


    Ms. Anne liked it the least, and she was scowling.


    I didn¡¯t think it was quite that bad, but it was hard to not notice the taste whenpared to the other wine.

 Chapter 311

    Chapter 311


    We Drank the Trial Medicinal Wine


    The aftertaste of the wine was bad¡­ It was abination of bitterness and overly strong sweetness¡­


    Was this because of the medicine?


    But the medicine that we had concocted was not supposed to taste like this¡­ I suppose you really couldn¡¯t tell what the oue would be until you tasted it.


    After taking one sip, the aftertaste stayed in your mouth for quite a long time.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ I suppose it is not undrinkable. Butpared to yesterday¡­ What do you think, Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ As everyone has already said, it is quite bitter. One would not say that it is good.¡±


    ¡°Yes. But then again, this wine is not necessarily made to taste good. What about the effects?¡±


    ¡°As for that, it will take some time before you can feel it¡­¡±


    It seemed that all of the servants here had tasted it as well.


    Now that I looked, Ms. Lyra was holding a ss of wine.


    I guess it was necessary for everyone to taste and feel the effects.


    Unlike the previous one, this wine was supposed to have health benefits.


    While there was nothing wrong with having wine that tasted good, the effect was far more important.


    And so we did as Ms. Helena said and waited quietly.


    ¡°¡­Hmm?¡±


    ¡°What is it, father?¡±


    After waiting for some time, Mr. Ekenhart tilted his head and muttered.


    Ms. ire noticed this and looked at him curiously.


    ¡°Well¡­I feel as if my body has grown a little warmer. But I barely drank anything, and I am not drunk¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed, now that you mention it¡­¡±


    ¡°My face is also starting to feel hot¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. I do feel a warmth in my body.¡±


    Now that he had said it, others started to think they felt it as well.


    It was such a small change that you wouldn¡¯t notice it until someone told you.


    As there was alcohol in it, it made sense that your temperature would rise. However¡­


    We also hadn¡¯t drunk that much.


    In the first ce, I didn¡¯t seem to get drunk, no matter how much wine I drank. And so my body temperature hadn¡¯t risen at all in Range vige.


    And yet, I could feel something. Was it¡­


    ¡°Is this the effects of the medicine¡­?¡±


    ¡°Yes. That is correct. Through mixing it with the medicine, the magic energy in your body will be vitalized, and it will improve your physical condition.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ So it is simr to the medicinal herbs we had before?¡±


    ¡°Yes, Sebastian. That is right.¡±


    Ms. Helena nodded as she answered Mr. Ekenhart.


    Sebastian asked her a question as well, and she nodded.


    Indeed, before concocting it, the idea had been to make something that revitalized your magic energy and distributed nutrition to your entire body in order to improve your health.


    I suppose that was what made our bodies warmer.


    ¡°So that means you can keep the effects of the medicinal herbs, and they are not weakened at all by mixing them into the wine?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I do believe so.¡±


    Ms. Helena answered my question.


    ¡°There are not many things that affect magic energy¡­ This is the first time this has been done with wine. As for how effective it truly is, we will have to keep testing¡­ However¡­¡±


    ¡°This is certainly something very good. Something that does not affect your magic energy in a negative way. At the very least, what I can not feel in my body is not a rejection.¡±


    ¡°Yes. However, affecting your magic energy too much¡­can have troublesome effects as well. We still have to be careful at this point.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­yes. What do you think, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Me? Well¡­ I do not know much about magic energy¡­ Of course, one should not drink too much of these things that are rted to health. Or anything, really¡­¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true¡­ Then we will have to set a limit, so that no one drinks too much.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I think that at most, one ss a day would be best.¡±


    Even in Japan, there were limits for how much of a health drink you should drink in one day.


    Well, it wasn¡¯t so much as a limit, but a suggestion, that drinking more than one a day might actually have negative effects instead.


    After all, I really did not know much about magic energy. And so I could not make such irresponsible ims.


    It would be best to only drink a little for now, and see what happens.


    ¡°At least we won¡¯t have to worry about ire drinking too much and acting like a fool.¡±


    ¡°Father! I told you, that will not be happening again! I will be very careful!¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart teased her, and Ms. ire retaliated frantically.


    ¡°Hahaha. Well, nevermind that. Mr. Takumi, in order to make it clear how effective it is¡­could you continue to make more of this¡­medicinal wine?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Milina and I will work together to continue to make the medicine for the wine.¡±


    We would need a decent amount in order to test it. I expected as much.


    Well, it was true that it was a lot of work, and so we wouldn¡¯t be able to make that much, but¡­


    Milina and I should still be able to manage it.


    ¡°That was a rather fruitful dinner.¡±


    After the tasting was finished, we drank some tea and rxed.


    Mr. Ekenhart seemed to feel that a lot had been aplished.


    As for Liza, she had joined Tilura in hugging and petting Leo.


    After a good meal and some delicious juice, she was in a pleasant mood.


    Ms. ire and Ms. Anne seemed to be discussing something, but it was too quiet for me to hear. There was something a little suspicious about their air, and my instincts told me to not get involved.

 Chapter 312

    Chapter 312


    I Prayed For Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s Safety


    ¡°I think it¡¯s time for some training before bed?¡±


    ¡°Mmm, that¡¯s true. It¡¯s time to move¡­¡±


    ¡°Father?¡±


    ¡°Your Grace?


    ¡°Hmm?¡±


    After resting for some time, I was just about to go and do my nightly swing practice¡­well, these days it was more of a mental exercise. Mr. Ekenhart got up as well in order to go to the back garden.


    However, just then, Ms. ire, who had been talking a moment ago, and Sebastian, moved in front of him and grabbed his arms.


    ¡°Father, there is still something very important left to discuss¡­¡±


    ¡°You must answer some questions regarding your departure today¡­¡±


    ¡°Uh, ah¡­ Well, wait a minute¡­ Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Ekenhart¡­good luck¡­¡±


    ¡°?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Kyau?¡±


    And like that, Ms. ire and Sebastian dragged him away.


    And though he asked me for help, all I could do was stare at him and offer a prayer¡­


    Besides, I was more impressed with how well Sebastian and Ms. ire worked together¡­


    Liza, Tilura and Sherry looked a little confused. Only Leo understood as she let out a sigh.


    ¡°What will you do, Ms. Anne?¡±


    ¡°I shall go and rest. I still am notpletely well¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    Even after eating dinner and resting, Ms. Anne had not recoveredpletely.


    I had thought that she was back to her normal self after the incident with Liza, but I suppose it was just temporary.


    But she also drank the medicinal wine¡­ So perhaps she will be better tomorrow. I imagined that as I watched her leave the dining hall.


    As for Liza, it seemed like she still disliked Ms. Anne, as she avoided looking at her.


    ¡°Now, Tilura. Let¡¯s train as usual.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Where are you going, papa?¡±


    Just as Tilura and I were about to go to the garden, Liza looked at me with a worried expression.


    She was still not used to this ce, and was worried about being left behind.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I won¡¯t leave you here. Leo, you know what to do.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Mama? Kya!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    I told her to not worry and we stood up together.


    And then Leo barked once and picked her up by the cor.


    Sherry then jumped onto Leo¡¯s head, as it was her designated seat.


    ¡°Is this what you always do here, papa?¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s right. Training is important if you want to be stronger.¡±


    I answered as I held up my sword.


    On the way, I put her on Leo¡¯s back, as being held by the cor was not likely to befortable.


    Even now, she was watching us with a curious expression.


    ¡°Anyway, it¡¯s a little dangerous, so don¡¯te too close.¡±


    ¡°Okay.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    And so I asked Leo to move away so that there was no risk of them being hit by the swords, and then we started our training.


    Well, even if I lost control of my sword, Leo would be fast enough to dodge it¡­ After all, I have never been able to hit Leo.


    Though, now that I thought about it, Liza had really gotten used to me and Leo now.


    It hadn¡¯t even been a full day yet.


    It was important to create an environment where kids could just be themselves.


    And so for some time after that, Tilura and I swung our swords and trained.


    We swung while imagining an enemy, just like Mr. Ekenhart had said.


    As I was focusing by myself, I didn¡¯t know if I was really doing it correctly, but I tried to recall what it was like to fight the orcs as I did it.


    asionally, I would nce over to Liza as I caught my breath, and saw that her eyes were sparkling.


    ¡°¡­Phew¡­ Hah¡­ I think that¡¯s enough for today.¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­hah¡­hah¡­¡±


    I panted while sheathing my sword and announcing that we were finished.


    And so Tilura did the same as she caught her breath.


    Now that we were done, Leo moved towards us.


    Since we had trained for quite a long time, I wonder if Liza was bored?


    ¡°That was amazing! I didn¡¯t know you could move so fast!¡±


    ¡°Haha. Really? But Mr. Ekenhart¡­the other old man, is a lot faster.¡±


    ¡°¡­I don¡¯t think we will ever be able to catch up to him¡­¡±


    ¡°Tilura¡­ We¡¯ll just have to do our best.¡±


    Liza did not look bored at all, and had nothing but praise as her eyes shone.


    I almost got carried away, but then I remembered how much better our master, Mr. Ekenhart was.


    He would not be pleased if he saw us getting arrogant.


    And I agreed, that I still didn¡¯t feel like I could ever catch up.


    Tilura also muttered with disappointment at the thought.


    I suppose it meant more to her, as his child. However, she would have plenty of time to grow.


    She learned faster than me. I could see her surpassing her father one day.


    ¡­Both Ms. ire and Tilura had a certain strength¡­that I doubted that I could match.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, Lady Tilura. Here¡­¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    Ms. Lyra had suddenly appeared and offered us towels.


    I used the towel to wipe off the sweat, and talked to Tilura and Liza as we returned to the mansion.


    Tilura and Liza were already talking about how they would y with Leo and Sherry tomorrow.


    Children really did be friends quickly¡­ I suppose it was because they didn¡¯t think about it too much, like adults.


    We then separated from Tilura and Sherry and headed to my room.


    Liza seemed like she was still excited, due to being in a new ce.


    ¡°Ah, now that I think about it¡­ Your room¡­¡±


    ¡°Room?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    I realized it once we reached my room.


    I had forgotten to ask them about that.


    And it was already quitete¡­ I suppose she could just sleep here for tonight.

 Chapter 313

    Chapter 313


    There was an intruder


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. We are currently still preparing a room for Liza.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see. I guess you¡¯ll have to sleep here tonight, Liza.¡±


    ¡°With papa? Oh, okay!¡±


    ¡°Hehe. Well, excuse me.¡±


    ¡°Uh, yes. Thank you.¡±


    Ms. Lyra had walked with us to my room, and told me that the room was still being prepared.


    Upon hearing this, I suggested that she could sleep in my room, and she smiled and wagged her tail.


    Ms. Lyra chuckled at this and left.


    ¡­I hadn¡¯t even realized that Ms. Lyra was with us¡­ Were maids good at erasing their presence?


    I suppose she wanted to tell me about the room, but had been so busy with Ms. ire and Ms. Anne.


    ¡°Ah, but I need to wash Leo first¡­ Ms. Lyra¡­is probably tired, and I¡¯d rather let her rest¡­ If only there was someone else¡­¡±


    ¡°Where are you going?¡±


    ¡°¡­Wuff.¡±


    I had remembered that the area around Leo¡¯s mouth was dirty from all of the food she had eaten while walking around in Ractos.


    I needed help when it came to bathing Leo.


    Someone needed to dry her off after I washed her.


    Thinking this, I got up from the bed and was about to leave the room, when Liza called to me.


    Leo looked a little depressed at the idea of taking a bath, but she didn¡¯t make such a big deal about it like she used to.


    Was it because things had improved with how I washed her? Or maybe it was because Liza was here.


    Perhaps Leo wanted to set a good example¡­ She had been like that with Sherry.


    ¡°Well, I¡¯m going to wash Leo, but I can¡¯t do it alone. So I was thinking about calling someone. Don¡¯t worry, I¡¯ll be back.¡±


    ¡°¡­I¡¯ll go with you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Liza looked worried about me leaving.


    I tried to reassure her and leave the room, but Leo started to tug at my sleeve.


    ¡­I suppose I couldn¡¯t me her for being worried about being left alone in a strange ce.


    ¡°Fine, let¡¯s go.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    Liza went from looking worried to smiling as she held my hand.


    She really had an expressive face.


    ¡°Alright, Leo. You can wash yourself now, okay?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    After taking Leo to the bath and washing her, I filled arge basin with water and let her do the rest.


    Leo preferred water that wasn¡¯t heated, but it seemed really cold.


    She dunked her head into the water and was practically ying as she washed up.


    As I had already washed the dirtiest parts of her body, I could leave her like that for now.


    Thinking this, I moved away from her and began to wash myself.


    I had asked Ms. Gelda to dry off Leo once she was finished.


    This was because we had met her after leaving my room.


    Ms. Gelda had finished dealing with Ms. Anne.


    I had also told her to take care of Liza while I was washing Leo.


    I felt a little bad, as she might be tired, but Ms. Gelda looked like she was more than happy to do it.


    Though she was mostly looking at the ears and tail¡­ Perhaps Liza was letting her touch them right now


    As I mused about such things, the door burst open and someone flew in.


    ¡°Papa, I want to bathe too!¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Liza!?¡±


    Liza shouted as she rushed towards me.


    Apparently, she had wanted to bathe with Leo and me, and had managed to escape from Ms. Gelda.


    ¡°I¡¯m so sorry, Mr. Takumi! She just started running all of a sudden!¡±


    The door was wide open, and Ms. Gelda stood there while averting her eyes.


    Well, it wasn¡¯t her fault, kids could be like that.


    ¡°Uhh¡­Liza¡­ Look here, you can¡¯t bathe with us, because I¡¯m a man. Understand?¡±


    ¡°But you¡¯re my papa?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ I¡¯m not sure how to exin this¡­¡±


    It was clear that she did not understand.


    I had thought that being around Leo so much made me better at dealing with kids, but apparently not¡­ Hmm..


    ¡°Uhh, Ms. Gelda?¡±


    ¡°Well, if she is your daughter¡­it would not be strange¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­You think so¡­?¡±


    ¡°Yes. And I won¡¯t tell anyone!¡±


    ¡°You don¡¯t sound very convinced!¡±


    ¡°Papa?¡±


    Ms. Gelda then closed the door and left.


    Well¡­that did not sound very promising¡­


    As I wondered what to do, Liza looked up in that worried way that she tended to do. And I could not refuse her.


    I had actually meant to ask Ms. Gelda or one of the other maids to bathe her¡­but I suppose it could not be helped.


    This was just a father bathing his daughter.


    I said as if there was someone else there to hear me.


    ¡°Still¡­ There are quite a lot of cuts. Do they hurt?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m fine.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    As I washed Liza¡¯s back, I was reminded of how many cuts she had.


    Well, most of them were scrapes that would likely heal quickly¡­ It gave me the impression that for a long time, she was getting hurt faster than they could heal.


    Most of them were on her hands and feet, as at least her clothes protected most of her body.


    I was still worried that the soap would sting, but she said that it was fine.

 Chapter 314

    Chapter 314


    Liza Went To Sleep


    Leo always looked a size or two smaller when she was wet. And she now looked at me and sighed with exasperation.


    You better finish soon and dry off Leo. Or you¡¯ll catch a cold.


    Well, I didn¡¯t know if Silver Fenrirs could actually catch a cold.


    ¡°I have never felt hot water like this! It¡¯s amazing!¡±


    ¡°Hahah, yes, they have hot water here.¡±


    Once we had finished washing up, we soaked in the hot water together.


    Up until now, she was drinking mud water, so a hot bath was a new experience for her.


    She was surprised and delighted, which was nice to see.


    ¡°Waachoo!¡±


    ¡°See, Leo. It¡¯s quite cold, isn¡¯t it? Do you want to get in?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­ Well, have Ms. Gelda dry you off then. You don¡¯t want to catch a cold.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I had suggested that Leo soak in the hot water as well, but she refused.


    Did she hate hot water so much?¡±


    Regardless, Leo nodded and walked away.


    ¡°It is getting hot¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed. I suppose we should go too¡­ Well, how about after fifty seconds?¡±


    ¡°Okay¡­ 1¡­2¡­¡±


    As she was young, she did not care to stay in the hot water for too long.


    But as she counted, she stopped after reaching ten, and I had to remind her what came next.


    She stumbled again when reaching twenty, and it ended up taking some time until she reached fifty.


    ¡°Ms. Gelda. Can you take Liza now?¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°What about you, papa?¡±


    ¡°I think I¡¯ll stay a little longer. You go on ahead with Leo.¡±


    ¡°Uh, okay. I¡¯ll go to mama.¡±


    I called Ms. Gelda and had her take care of Liza.


    While I had helped wash her back, Liza was able to to wash her head, hands and tail by herself, so she shouldn¡¯t need any help.


    Ms. Gelda had been waiting outside, as if expecting to be called, and I could hear Leo as well, as she must have been waiting with her.


    And so I continued to soak in the hot water after Liza left.


    I did not want to let my body cool off.


    ¡°I feel so warm!¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. Because you were in the bath. It warms you up.¡±


    ¡°Wuff, wuff.¡±


    After returning to the room, Liza still seemed excited.


    I watched her and smiled.


    Leo also nodded with approval¡­ Though, Leo hadn¡¯t even warmed up at all.


    She had just stood there soaked in cold water.


    Well, at least she hadn¡¯t caught a cold, and seemed to be satisfied.


    ¡°Hah¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Are you sleepy?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    After running around excitedly for some time, Liza started to yawn loudly.


    Well, it had been a very eventful day.


    She had been surrounded by so many new faces, and there was not much time to rest¡­ And so the fatigue had probably hit her all at once now.


    Sometimes, children suddenly be tired as if their battery just died.


    ¡°I¡¯m¡­fine¡­I will stay¡­awake¡­because¡­it¡¯s fun¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Did you have a fun day?¡±


    ¡°Ye¡­ss¡­¡±


    Her eyes were already half closed and she seemed like she was about to fall asleep.


    Considering all of the awful things that had happened, I was just d that she had a good time today.


    ¡°Well, there should be plenty of fun things tomorrow as well. Well, you should go to sleep then, before it gets cold.¡±


    ¡°Oka¡­y¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I then put her on the bed and put the nket over her.


    ¡°Zzzz¡­.zzz¡­¡±


    ¡°That was fast. But she seemsfortable.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Ah, you¡¯re sleeping next to the bed too, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff, wuff.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Well, that way, she won¡¯t fall off the side. Thanks, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuf-wuff.¡±


    Leo answered that it was the obvious thing to do, and then she closed her eyes.


    Liza was sleeping on what was the foot of the bed.


    I didn¡¯t want to move her, because she was so tired.


    And there was plenty of space, as the bed was quiterge.


    And so Leo had taken position there, just in case Liza moved in her sleep and fell off.


    Though, she seemed to be sleeping peacefully now, so I doubted that would happen¡­but you never knew.


    And so I thanked Leo and climbed into the back part of the bed.


    It really had been an eventful day. I thought back on everything that had happened in Ractos and in the mansion as I drifted off to sleep.


    ¡ª


    ¡°Hmm¡­mmm¡­¡±


    Slowly, consciousness returned as I opened my eyes.


    It was bright outside of the window, and so I knew that it was morning.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ I had a good sleep.¡±


    I sat up in the bed and yawned.


    I wonder if Tilura woulde to see Leo¡­ It was just as I thought of this that I remembered something.


    ¡°Huh¡­Where¡¯s Liza¡­?¡±


    That beastkin girl that we rescued¡­she was supposed to have been sleeping on the bed.


    However, when I looked, there was no one there.


    Though, the nkets and sheets were in disarray, so it was obvious that someone had been there.

 Chapter 315

    Chapter 315


    Liza was sleeping in the mostfortable ce


    ¡°¡­Maybe she went to the bathroom? But then, I doubt she would go off when she is still not familiar with this ce¡­¡±


    Yesterday, I had told where the bathroom was, just in case.


    That was one thing no one could help her do, after all.


    In any case, I had to find her.


    But when did she leave¡­and why¡­


    Thankfully, there was no one in the mansion who hated beastkin, so she wasn¡¯t in any real danger¡­Still, I was worried.


    ¡°Hey, Leo. Wake up. Liza has gone¡­¡±


    Leo was rolled up into a ball and stuck to the side of the bed. And so I tried to wake her up so we could search for her.


    And then I noticed it.


    In the center of Leo¡¯srge, rolled up body, there was some brown hair sticking out.


    ¡°¡­Could it be¡­?¡±


    ¡°¡­Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Leo. You¡¯re awake? In that case¡­¡±


    As I slowly approached, Leo opened her eyes and barked quietly.


    She was awake, but not rmed about Liza¡¯s absence¡­ She was quiet, and then there was hair.


    I felt relieved now that I knew what had happened. Still, I looked closer just to make sure.


    ¡°Hah¡­there you are¡­¡±


    ¡°Mmm¡­zzz¡­¡±


    Liza had wrapped herself up in Leo¡¯s fur and was sleeping with a big smile on her face.


    I didn¡¯t know when she had moved, but Leo must have noticed.


    And so she was keeping still and did not bark loudly.


    Her expression was so happy that it made me feel happy as well.


    I suppose this was a feeling that parents experienced?


    That old man who had taken care of Liza in the slums¡­ I had never met him, but perhaps this is what he felt as well.


    ¡°Good morning, Leo and Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Tilura¡­ Shhh.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    There was suddenly a knock on the door and Tilura entered.


    She was as energetic as ever.


    I raised a finger to my mouth to signal for her to lower her voice, and then I gestured over to Leo.


    Upon seeing this, Tilura tilted her head as if puzzled, but then she saw Liza sleeping on Leo.


    ¡°¡­She looks cute when she sleeps.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Though they were simr in age, Tilura was still supposed to be the older sister.


    And so she looked at Liza with a tender expression.


    ¡°Zzz¡­zzz¡­mmm¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, she¡¯s going to wake up.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Perhaps we were too loud?¡±


    Either she detected our gaze or presence, as she frowned once and then her eyes opened.


    ¡°¡­Faaahh¡­mmm¡­ Grandfather?¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Liza.¡±


    ¡°Good morning, little Liza.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    After yawning, she rubbed at her eyes and muttered about her grandfather before realizing where she was.


    ¡°¡­Uhh¡­ Oh, papa!¡±


    ¡°Woah! Haha. Good morning.¡±


    ¡°Good morning! And sister Tilura is here too! Good morning!¡±


    ¡°Yes, I¡¯m here!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    A few secondster, she looked at us and blinked her eyes.


    And then her mind cleared and she started to recognize things.


    Then she sat up and hugged me.


    After hugging her back, I put her down on the floor and we all said good morning.


    She was especially happy to see Tilura again.


    ¡°¡­So what happened yesterday wasn¡¯t a dream! Papa and mama and sister Tilura are all here!¡±


    ¡°Yes, it¡¯s not a dream. You won¡¯t be alone again, arlight?¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    As she had been talking about her grandfather at first, perhaps she had been dreaming about him.


    While it was unfortunate that he was dead, she now had me, Leo, Tilura and the people who lived in this mansion.


    And so I told her that she would no longer be alone, and she nodded with a smile.


    ¡°Now, I have to get ready. ¡­Uh, Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Can you take Liza and have one of the maids help her wash up?¡±


    ¡°Okay. Let¡¯s go, Liza.¡±


    ¡°¡­But¡­¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. I¡¯m not going anywhere. ¡­Leo, will you go with them?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Wuff? Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Liza looka little worried to leave me and Leo, and hesitated to take Tilura¡¯s hand.


    And so I asked Leo to go with them.


    Leo looked puzzled at first but then nodded understandingly.


    ¡°Alright, we¡¯ll go now, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°See youter, papa!¡±


    ¡°Yes, go along now.¡±


    And so Tilura and Liza left the room while holding hands.


    I watched them leave, and then I was alone in the room.


    ¡°¡­Papa, huh¡­¡±


    I thought about it as I washed up.


    As I had never had children, I was never called that before.


    However, it did not feel bad. If anything, the fact that someone so honest and lively would think of me that way put a smile on my face.


    ¡°¡­Though, I¡¯ll have to wipe that smile off before going to the dining hall.¡±


    I muttered as I looked at myself in the mirror and started to shave.


    ¡­I did not want to look like Mr. Ekenhart and end up scaring Liza.

 Chapter 316

    Chapter 316


    Mr. Ekenhart Was Awkward Around Ms. ire


    ¡°Good morning, Ms. ire and Ms. Anne. Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Good morning.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Good morning.¡±


    After washing up, I went to the dining hall along with Liza and Tilura.


    Ms. ire and Ms. Anne were already waiting there, and so we greeted them.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°And good morning to you as well, Leo. And you Liza.¡±


    ¡°Good¡­morning.¡±


    ¡°It looks like she¡¯s still not used to being around people besides Mr. Takumi and Leo.¡±


    ¡°Yes. And Mr. Ekenhart, who was with us in town.¡±


    As Leo had barked to greet them, Ms. ire greeted her back.


    However, Ms. Anne averted her gaze. It seemed that she was still a little scared.


    And Liza was partially hidden behind me as she greeted Ms. ire.


    I suppose it was still a little overwhelming to be here.


    Only, she was fine around Tilura, as they were a simr age.


    As always, Mr. Ekenhart slept in and skipped breakfast.


    Liza ate a lot of the food that Ms. Helena prepared, and looked very happy.


    At one point, Leo even tried to make Liza eat some of her sausages.


    It was a surprise that she would share something that she liked so much¡­ Perhaps it was because she knew that Liza had rarely eaten anything good, and was quite underweight.


    Everyone else watched this with a smile, and I was the only one who was surprised.


    In the past, whenever I gave Leo sausages, she would always devour them quickly as if she was scared that someone would take them away.


    So this showed how concerned she was about Liza.


    Did she really see her like a daughter? Even if Liza was older¡­


    ¡°Morning! What fine weather!¡±


    ¡°Father. Everyone had already eaten breakfast. It¡¯s a bitte for you to bementing on the morning.¡±


    ¡°Uh, yes. Perhaps you¡¯re right.¡±


    As we rxed and drank the tea that Ms. Lyra poured for us, the doors burst open and in walked Mr. Ekenhart.


    For someone who was bad at getting up in the morning, he sure had a lot of energy.


    Perhaps the lecture he received from Ms. ire and Sebastian was not that long.


    However, Ms. ire seemed like she was still a little upset.


    ¡°Here you are, Your Grace.¡±


    ¡°Mmm.¡±


    In spite looking a little awkward around Ms. ire, he sat down at the table as Sebastian put a cup of tea in front of him.


    He took a sip and then scanned the room.


    ¡°Now, Mr. Takumi. About the matter we were discussing yesterday. I have already ryed it to ire and Sebastian. When shall we begin?¡±


    ¡°Yesterday¡­ Ah, that¡¯s right. Indeed. ¡­It could be today?¡±


    ¡°Good. Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Yes. We can be ready at any time.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart turned to me first and brought up what we had discussed yesterday.


    At first, I didn¡¯t know what he was talking about, but then I remembered.


    I hadn¡¯t thought about it much due to everything that happened with Liza. That was close.


    The reason that Mr. Ekenhart didn¡¯t say anything specific, was probably because Liza and Ms. Anne were here.


    Neither of them knew about my Gift, Weed Cultivation.


    Though, I think I had talked about making herbs in front of Ms. Anne before¡­but since I was concocting medicine, it would be easy to make excuses¡­I think.


    ¡°Papa. What are you going to do?¡±


    ¡°Hmm. We have a little n. And so we must prepare and do some research.¡±


    ¡°Oh, I see.¡±


    Liza seemed interested in what I was going to do.


    But since Ms. Anne was here, I could not tell her the details, and so I just exined it vaguely.


    As Ms. ire already knew, she was nodding, but Ms. Anne looked puzzled.


    ¡°Ah, Milina.¡±


    ¡°Good morning, master. Uh, is that the child? Ms. Lyra told me about her.¡±


    ¡°Morning. Yes, this is Liza. Say hello, Liza.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­it¡¯s¡­nice to¡­meet you. I¡¯m¡­Liza.¡±


    ¡°Hello. I¡¯m Milina. It¡¯s nice to meet you too. I am Mr. Takumi¡¯s apprentice!¡±


    After finishing my tea, I left the dining hall and then bumped into Milina in the hallway.


    Tilura and Sherry had gone off to study, while Ms. ire and Ms. Anne were talking in the drawing room.


    While Milina was adult and older than Tilura, she was raised at the orphanage, and so she was much more approachable.


    ¡°Is something the matter, master?¡±


    ¡°Uh, indeed. It¡¯s about the medicine. We¡¯ll need more of it. For a while, we¡¯ll need to drink the wine that isbined with it in order to confirm its effects.¡±


    ¡°I see. Ve-very well! Leave it to me!¡±


    ¡°Uh, yes. That¡¯s what I wanted to do¡­ If you are sure?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s a simple job, so I¡¯ll be fine. Even if¡­my arm hurts!¡±


    ¡°I-I see. You can stop if it¡¯s too much, alright?¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    The medicine used for the medicinal wine had to be mixed until it dried.


    As all you did was move your hands, it was technically a simple task¡­ But it was still tiring.


    In any case, I asked Milina to do it, and then I went to the back garden in order to make the herbs.


    Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian had gone ahead, and so they should be waiting for me.


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting, Mr. Ekenhart, Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Mmm.¡±


    ¡°There you are, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    I arrived at the garden with Leo and Liza.


    Just as I expected, the two were waiting for me.

 Chapter 317

    Chapter 317


    I Showed Weed Cultivation to Liza


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, will you start with making the herbs?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I have to make herbs to sell in town, as well as herbs that will be mixed in the wine.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, why don¡¯t you leave some without gathering them, so you can observe them over time?¡±


    ¡°In order to increase the amount of herbs that I regrly make?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Such as Ramogi. Or any herbs that you will mix with the wine, as you will need a lot of them. And so if possible, it would be best to grow them normally, so as to take some of the burden off of you.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true. Very well. So with the herbs I will make now¡­I will leave five to ten of each.¡±


    ¡°I think that would be best. Would this ce be suitable?¡±


    First, I told Mr. Ekenhart that was going to make herbs for the town and for medicine, and then Mr. Sebastian, who had been listening, made a suggestion.


    I had not really been thinking about which herbs I wanted to grow normally, but if I followed Sebastian, then I would be able to see how some of the herbs would grow.


    I really should have put some thought into this yesterday¡­ But there was the whole matter with Liza.


    And so I hadpletely forgotten.


    In any case, I looked at the spot that Sebastian had suggested.


    It was in the corner, slightly away from the ce where I usually grew herbs.


    At least it would not get in the way of Leo¡¯s running or Tilura¡¯s ying.


    Normally, it didn¡¯t matter much where I grew them, as they would be gathered immediately. But this time, we would be leaving them there.


    ¡°Well, it does get a lot of sun, so I think it should do just fine. Though, perhaps we should also test it in the shade as well?¡±


    ¡°In the shade? In that case, what about this spot?¡±


    Not all herbs grew in the same kind of environment.


    Some of them might prefer more shade and humidity, for instance.


    And so it was necessary to test them in various conditions.


    Because many nts use photosynthesis, it was easy to assume that they prefer the sunlight. So that was why Sebastian was a little puzzled.


    Other than that, we should also adjust the amount of water.


    ¡°What are you going to do, papa?¡±


    As I was talking with Sebastian, Liza questioned me as she tilted her head.


    She did not know about the Gift, so it was no wonder. But she was still curious about what I was doing.


    ¡°Uhhh, Mr. Ekenhart? Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°Hmm. I do not mind, if you think that it¡¯s alright, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°As Liza is a beastkin, I don¡¯t think there is much worry about word spreading.¡±


    ¡°Very well. Then I will tell her.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I had looked at Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian questioningly, and they nodded and agreed that it was fine to tell her.


    I suppose Sebastian meant that no one was likely to believe Liza, because she was a beastkin¡­


    But it wasn¡¯t due to his own prejudices, but merely a fact that he felt obligated to say.


    ¡°Uhh, Liza. It so happens that I have an odd ability.¡±


    ¡°You do? What kind of ability?¡±


    I met Liza¡¯s eyes and after giving off a serious air, I started to exin it.


    I told her that she must not tell anyone outside of this mansion about it, and then I taught her about my Gift, Weed Cultivation.


    Of course¡­I did not go any farther, and tell her that I was from a different world.


    That would just start confusing her.


    ¡°Gift¡­? Weed Cultivation? I don¡¯t understand.¡±


    ¡°Hmm, of course. Well, I¡¯ll show it to you then. So watch closely, okay?¡±


    ¡°Yes, okay!¡±


    Liza had never heard about Gifts, and so she was not able to understand it.


    Apparently, there was no one else with it currently within the country, so only a small number of people were aware of it.


    Perhaps even Ms. Anne did not know?


    I wondered about such things as I moved away from Liza and to the spot that Sebastian had chosen.


    ¡°This is exciting¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha. Don¡¯t get your hopes up too high. It¡¯s nothing shy.¡±


    But Liza watched with great expectation.


    Leo and Mr. Ekenhart were amused and smiled at this.


    ¡°Now, I¡¯ll start with something familiar, Ramogi¡­¡±


    As I had made Ramogi more than anything, I didn¡¯t have to think about it much when making it.


    I still had to visualize it to a degree, but it was an easy job.


    And so I put my hand on the ground, imagined the Ramogi, and activated Weed Cultivation.


    Within a second, several Ramogi nts started to grow from the ground.


    ¡°¡­! Amazing! Amazing! But how!?¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. This ability is Weed Cultivation. It¡¯s my Gift.¡±


    ¡°Ohhh! That¡¯s amazing!¡±


    Upon seeing some nts grow out of the ground after I had just ced my hand down, Liza¡¯s eyes shone in delight.


    While it was great that she was excited, we still had to be careful.


    ¡°Like I said before, you can¡¯t talk to others about this ability. So don¡¯t tell anyone, alright?¡±


    ¡°Yes! I won¡¯t tell anyone about your secret!¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Liza nodded happily.


    I just hoped that she would be able to¡­


    But she was a child, and it could just spill out identally. So Leo and I will have to watch her.


    But then again, Ms. Anne was the only outsider in the mansion now.


    And so as Liza wagged her tail and twitched her ears, I made more herbs than usual.


    This time, aside from sending some to town or giving them to Milina, I also had to leave some to study.


    Though, perhaps I had made a little too much, because Liza was so entertained by watching¡­


    But since I hadn¡¯t fainted, it was probably fine.


    But I would have to be careful.

 Chapter 318

    Chapter 318


    I Made A Simple Herb Garden


    ¡°Hmm, that¡¯s more than I expected¡­ Are you alright, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I¡¯m still fine.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s good that you wish to work hard, but you must be careful and not do anything reckless.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    I had made herbs in both the ce that got lots of sunlight and the ce with shade. As Liza and I gazed at them with satisfaction, Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian voiced their concern.


    Even Leo was looking at me with worry.


    I knew that I wasn¡¯t even close to fainting, but I should avoid making them worried.


    ¡°Now, I¡¯ll have to gather half of these.¡±


    ¡°Yes. ¡­Your Grace.¡±


    ¡°Mmm, I know.¡±


    ¡°¡­You¡¯re going to do it too, Mr. Ekenhart?¡±


    Part of the job was gathering them and using Weed Cultivation to alter their state.


    But just as I stretched out to pick some, Sebastian said something to Mr. Ekenhart, who then rolled up his sleeves as he approached me.


    I had meant to do this alone, and would never have dreamed that Mr. Ekenhart would help me.


    ¡°¡­Because of yesterday. I decided to help you, as the servants have enough on their hands.¡±


    ¡°Uh, I see.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. That¡¯s why I didn¡¯t sleep tootest night.¡±


    I didn¡¯t know whose idea it was, but I suppose Mr. Ekenhart had avoided being lectured too long by promising to help me.


    That would exin why Ms. ire seemed like she still had something to say to him.


    ¡°I¡¯ll help too, papa!¡±


    ¡°You too, Liza? Well, it is easy work.¡±


    After seeing Mr. Ekenhart help, Liza volunteered as well.


    As I had made quite a lot today, I was grateful.


    There was nothing about it that was dangerous, we were just picking herbs. And so I decided to have Liza help us.


    ¡°Uhh, you pull them out like this¡­¡±


    ¡°Okay!¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s wrong, Your Grace. No, here, like this¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Hmm. This is rather difficult. If you¡¯re so good at it Sebastian, maybe you should help¡­¡±


    ¡°This is your job, Your Grace. I will instruct you so that you do not make mistakes and cause trouble.¡±


    ¡°Tsk¡­¡±


    I paired with Liza and Sebastian paired with Mr. Ekenhart as we taught the other and picked the herbs.


    As he wasn¡¯t used to such work, Mr. Ekenhart received strict instructions from Sebastian.


    On the other hand, Liza was quite skilled, and she was able to move quickly and with precision.


    I suppose it just suited her more¡­or was it due to age?


    ¡°Now, please leave the rest to me.¡±


    ¡°Mmm.¡±


    ¡°What are you going to do?¡±


    The herbs we had all gathered were separated by type andid out on a table.


    I then used Weed Cultivation to transform their state.


    This was one part of the process that no one could help me with.


    Liza watched me work with wide eyes.


    To her, this was all new and exciting.


    ¡°And that¡¯s it for the Ramogi. Next is¡­¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s amazing! How did you do it, papa?¡±


    ¡°This is also an ability of Weed Cultivation.¡±


    ¡°Ohhh!¡±


    Liza was very impressed after seeing the Ramogi dry up and turn into powder in an instant.


    She was surprised a lottely.


    And since she was so happy, I was d that I had shown it to her.


    After that, Sebastian instructed Mr. Ekenhart on how to wrap them up in cloth.


    This was also part of helping me.


    Not that I thought about it, who prepared the table and cloth? It must have been Sebastian. In the end, he also helped us.


    ¡°Alright, that¡¯s finished now¡­¡±


    ¡°Finished!¡±


    ¡°Good work, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Ahh¡­that was very delicate work.¡±


    After I finished transforming all of the herbs, I handed them over to Mr. Ekenhart.


    Liza was raising her hands happily and repeating after me¡­ It was pretty cute.


    I turned to Mr. Ekenhart, and though he had Sebastian¡¯s help, he seemed to be struggling a little.


    I really didn¡¯t think it was that delicate¡­ Milina and Ms. Lyra had been able to do it with no trouble.


    Perhaps Mr. Ekenhart wasn¡¯t good with his hands?


    But he was such a skilled swordsman¡­ Though, I did understand that it waspletely different.


    If anything, it was probably more to do with his personality, and how he didn¡¯t care much for the details.


    ¡°So, uh¡­ I will give these to Milina now. And the rest can go to Mr. Kalis¡¯s store.¡±


    ¡°Yes, certainly.¡±


    ¡°Mmm, thank you.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Mr. Ekenhart.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll go too!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I took the herbs that would be turned into medicine, and then left the table in order to give them to Milina.


    It would be fine to leave the rest to Sebastian.


    As the store had plenty of stock, it seemed that Nick would not be visiting today.


    And so Liza and Leo followed me as I headed over to where Milina was.


    As for the herbs we hadn¡¯t gathered, they could be left as they were, so we could see what would happen to them.


    ¡°Ah, Milina and Ms. Gelda.¡±


    ¡°Master!¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Is something the matter?¡±


    As we walked through the mansion, I saw Ms. Gelda and Milina making their way towards the drawing room.


    When there were no guests there, they sometimes used that room to teach the new servants. And so I had thought to look there, and I was right.


    Milina and Ms. Gelda were also holding a pestle and mortar.

 Chapter 319

    Chapter 319


    Liza Was Interested In Concocting Medicine


    ¡°I brought over the herbs that I made. ¡­Is Ms. Gelda going to help today?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Because it would take too long for me to do it alone.¡±


    ¡°So you brought the herbs for us. I will be helping Milina today.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Ms. Gelda.¡±


    As you had to mix it until it was dry with a pestle and mortar, both of your hands would be full.


    And so you would not be able to make any wind.


    That was why Milina asked Ms. Gelda for help, since she appeared to have some free time.


    ¡°¡­What is that¡­for?¡±


    Liza asked as she saw the pestle and mortar that Ms. Gelda was holding.


    I suppose she had never seen one before in the slums.


    There were a lot of things here that were new to her, and she was always curious.


    ¡°This is a tool used to grind and mix all kinds of things. Do you want to watch?¡±


    ¡°I can?¡±


    ¡°Of course. Milina, I¡¯ll help you as well. It was originally my job, after all.¡±


    ¡°Very well. Though, I was quite happy that you trusted me to do it.¡±


    ¡°Yay!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    In order to show Liza, I decided to help them as well.


    Even though it was something that I was supposed to do, it was easier to leave it to others.


    Of course, I couldn¡¯t do it alone either, so it was good to have help.


    Liza was excited to be able to see how it was done, and Leo seemed enthusiastic as well.


    I suppose she wanted to impress her.


    Leo was helpful, because she could use wind magic.


    ¡°In that case, I will bring another pestle and mortar for you to use, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    And so Mr. Gelda went to fetch one as we all moved to the drawing room.


    ¡°Now, let¡¯s do this then.¡±


    ¡°Yes, master. I will do these over here, and you can do those.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s fine with me.¡±


    Ms. Gelda had ced the pestle and mortar on the table, and so I lined up the herbs next to it.


    I sat on the right side of the table, Milina sat on the left, and Leo was in the center.


    Leo took that position because it would be her job to create the wind.


    Liza sat in a chair next to me and watched.


    ¡°Alright, it¡¯s time, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wou. Wouuu¡­grau.¡±


    ¡°Woah! Mama is making some nice wind!¡±


    ¡°Yes, Liza. Leo is using wind magic to help this dry faster.¡±


    ¡°Mama is amazing!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I put the herbs into the mortar and started grinding them.


    Milina did the same, and after it turned into a kind of gel, I asked Leo to create some wind.


    Liza felt the wind as well, and she closed her eyes as if enjoying the gentle breeze.


    If this was after we had eaten, I¡¯d be afraid that she¡¯d fall asleep.


    Leo barked smugly after hearing Liza¡¯s words.


    She was happy to have been able to show off.


    ¡°You¡¯re a lot better than me at this, Milina.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s because I had to do it a few times yesterday.¡±


    While Milina was doing the same thing as me, the way she moved her hands was a lot faster.


    Well, I suppose you would get used to it after doing it that many times.


    Even I was trying to rx my shoulders so I wasn¡¯t any more tense than I needed to be¡­ But I was still slow.


    Still, I couldn¡¯t leave everything to her. And so I decided to focus on my work so I wouldn¡¯t fall too far behind.


    ¡°Phew¡­ That¡¯s the first batch done.¡±


    ¡°Yes. ¡­We will have to do it a few more times though.¡±


    After a while, the contents were dried and turned into powder.


    As Milina and I were a little tired after mixing it, we rested while Ms. Gelda gathered the medicine together.


    Milina rested her arms and muttered while looking at the herbs on the table.


    I had gotten carried away and made so many herbs because Liza was watching, and now it meant we would have to mix them many times.


    It might be easier if we could do it all at once, but the mortar was not big enough. Besides, the book had said to avoid making a lot at once.


    And this was not the kind of thing where I wanted to risk failure.


    In any case, it would just take longer to dry if there was a lot, so it wouldn¡¯t save that much time.


    ¡°Papa, I want to do it too!¡±


    ¡°Hmm, are you sure? This is quite tiring, you know.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll do it!¡±


    ¡°I see. Well, it¡¯s simple enough. But tell me if you get tired, okay?¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    Liza nodded cheerfully.


    After watching me do it, she must have wanted to give it a try as well.


    She was interested in everything new. And so it was best to let her try it as long as it wasn¡¯t too difficult.


    As long as the amount of herbs was correct, then it wasn¡¯t anything difficult to do.


    While it was tiring for me and Milina, we could still do it until it was finished without resting.


    Liza would probably get too tired halfway through, but that was fine.


    ¡°Alright, put in these herbs¡­and then pick up this stick and crush them like this.¡±


    ¡°Uhh¡­like this?¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s it.¡±


    I put the herbs in the mortar and held it in ce.


    Liza then used her small hands to hold the pestle and then crushed them with all of her might.


    She was too young to be able to hold the mortar by herself while crushing it.


    Still, she was using a lot of strength.


    Milina had also started on her second batch, but it seemed like Liza was going at a simr speed to her.

 Chapter 320

    Chapter 320


    Liza Seemed to Be Having Fun


    ¡°Mmm¡­! You need a lot of strength.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s true. And so you get tired after just doing it once. Don¡¯t hesitate to tell me when you¡¯re tired, okay?¡±


    ¡°Okay! Mmm¡­¡±


    ¡°I think it¡¯s time. Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wouu¡­grau.¡±


    Liza stood on the chair and used all of her might as she worked.


    And since it was the right time, I asked Leo to start creating the wind.


    Just like before, this breeze reached Liza and Milina and helped to dry the medicine.


    Obviously, it wouldn¡¯t dry right away, but Liza did her best¡­which was a lot more than I was expecting.


    ¡°Liza, are you sure that you¡¯re not tired?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m fine!¡±


    After watching her for a while, I felt that she surely must be tired by now, but she denied it cheerfully.


    Indeed, she did not look tired¡­ Though, she was sweating a little.


    But when I had done it for the first time, I definitely looked more tired than she did now.


    Perhaps she had a lot of energy?


    Was it because she was a beastkin?


    When we had talked about them at the orphanage, they did say that their physical abilities were superior to humans.


    So that would exin why Liza didn¡¯t seem to get tiredpared to Milina and me.


    But even then, surely she should be a little tired¡­she was still a child, after all.


    ¡°Master, I think that it¡¯s¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, yes. It should be ready now. Thank you, Liza. It¡¯s finished.¡±


    ¡°Yay! I was able to do it!¡±


    ¡°Yes, that was very impressive, Liza.¡±


    ¡°Did you hear that, mama?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff-wuff!¡±


    As I was thinking about it, Milina called to me, and so I looked inside of the mortar.


    There, I saw that the medicine had turned into powder and was ready.


    So Liza had been able to finish the job.


    Upon being praised, she jumped off of the chair happily and ran towards Leo and hugged her.


    Leo then licked her face as if to tell her that she had done well.


    She really did not look tired at all¡­


    ¡°Master, I¡¯m not very confident anymore¡­ Especially since it¡¯s supposed to be easy to do.¡±


    ¡°Uh, yes. Me too. But I suppose Liza has a lot of energy¡­yes, let¡¯s just say that.¡±


    As Milina was a little disappointed with herself, I agreed.


    It felt a little awkward to have some small child have more strength than you¡­ But perhaps that was just how it was with beastkin.


    Ms. Gelda ignored us as she collected the medicine from the mortars and smiled as Leo and Liza yed.


    ¡­Though, it did seem like she was mostly looking at Liza¡¯s tail.


    ¡°She sure has a lot of energy¡­¡±


    I muttered to myself as I walked down the hallter.


    I had told myself that I would not lose the next round, but then Ms. Lyra came to the drawing room and said that Ms. ire had called for me.


    And so I left Leo and Liza in the drawing room.


    Besides, she seemed like she wanted to help some more.


    Liza did look a little worried as left, but Leo would be with her, and she was now used to being around Milina and Ms. Gelda.


    Also¡­it seemed like she really liked making the medicine¡­or maybe it was just moving her body.


    ¡­Perhaps it was like how Leo had to take walks. It was necessary to be active?


    In any case, Ms. Lyra had now taken the job of holding the mortar on the table.


    She looked happy to be able to take care of Liza.


    ¡°Come in.¡±


    ¡°Excuse me.¡±


    As I thought of such things, I arrived at the room.


    I hade here before. It was the room where the butlers worked.


    I suppose it was like an office of sorts.


    I knocked on the door and was given permission to enter.


    While I knew that I had been called by Ms. ire, why was it in this room?¡±


    When I entered, I saw that Ms. ire was sitting at the desk in the back, and Sebastian was standing next to her.


    I thought that was Sebastian¡¯s desk¡­ But I suppose she could sit in it when she was here.


    There were other desks in the room, but no one else was present.


    Right now, it was just us three.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, I¡¯m sorry to call you here like this.¡±


    ¡°No, not at all. ¡­Uh, since there is no one else here, is it something secretive?¡±


    ¡°Not in particr. It¡¯s only a coincidence that everyone else has gone. As long as I am here, there must be a few others watching the master.¡±


    ¡°Because he slipped out yesterday¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. I and the other butlers would like to avoid having something like that happen again.¡±


    ¡°So you called me¡­in order to warn me about that?¡±


    Even though Mr. Ekenhart had been lectured, and helped me with the herbs, they were still keeping an eye on him.


    Well, he was the kind of person to just leave on a whim¡­


    That being said, he had gone with me and Leo, so it wasn¡¯t as if didn¡¯t have a n.


    I suppose he wanted a little more freedom, but due to his position, he had to be protected.


    In any case, it would look like I had been his aplice.


    And it wasn¡¯t exactly wrong, either, as we had met up halfway there and gone to town together.


    And I agreed to everything that he had asked me.


    And so I was ready to be lectured by Ms. ire and Sebastian as well.


    Had the time finallye, when Ms. ire would be angry at me¡­?

 Chapter 321

    Chapter 321


    Ms. ire Wanted to See Me


    ¡°No, that is not it. ¡­In the first ce, I am quite sure that he left you little choice when making the request.¡±


    ¡°After all, it would be hard to imagine that you would want to take the master out, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°I know my father. He probably thought it would be amusing to go with you. And since good Leo would be there, it would be safe enough.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha¡­ Uh, you are exactly right¡­¡±


    They sure knew Mr. Ekenhart well.


    I didn¡¯t know if it was because they were that good, or he was that simple¡­ Perhaps it was both.


    But I brushed away such rude thoughts and got to the subject at hand.


    ¡°In that case, why did you call me here?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s about the tests you¡¯ve started in the garden¡­and the herb gardens for Range vige.¡±


    ¡°Ah, that.¡±


    ¡°Yes. As of now, it is just something that you spoke to His Grace about. But if we are to make it official, then we should discuss it properly.¡±


    Indeed, it had just been a light conversation we had in the town.


    There were no contracts signed or anything. So it would be a good thing to make it official.


    Otherwise, there could be problemster.


    ¡°As the tests have only just begun, we do not know if it will go well. However, for now we will talk about what to do if it is a sess.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Well, I had only started a few hours ago.


    So there was no saying what might happen.


    But if it went well, we could start growing them in Range vige.


    ¡°About Weed Cultivation, I thought about preparing some farnds¡­but I doubt that much space will be required.


    ¡°Yes. It is not like vegetables that are used every day¡­ It would not be a good thing to grow too much of it.¡±


    While it might sound like a good thing to grow as much as possible, I suppose it would cause confusion in the market.


    We still didn¡¯t know what would grow, but if it happened to be expensive herbs, then making too much would drive the prices down. We had talked about that before, in regards to the Loe.


    Besides, arge field would also be harder to manage.


    ¡°While it will be possible to expand itter, for now, we will likely prepare a small area between the vige and the forest. As it is not near the vige entrance, hardly anyone will pass by it.¡±


    ¡°I understand.¡±


    If it was between the vige and the forest, it must be close to Mr. Hannes¡¯s house.


    There had been a fence there, so it was unlikely that anyone would go to the forest from that direction.


    Besides, the vige itself was away from the main road, so there would be little traffic.


    While it would be necessary to tell some vigers about Weed Cultivation, we would not have to worry about the word spreading too far.


    ¡°And the herbs that are grown there will be sent to Ractos, and from there, to other towns and viges. But none of this has been decided yet. It is just the current n.¡±


    ¡°How much herbs do you think we should make?¡±


    While we had already established that it was no good to make too much, making too little would also be a problem.


    Obviously, it would not be enough if I alone was making all of them with Weed Cultivation, but I had no idea how much was needed if they wanted to send it to different parts of this territory.


    ¡°Indeed¡­ For now, I think three¡­no, four times what you are making now.¡±


    ¡°By now, you mean the amount that I send to Mr. Kalis¡¯s store?¡±


    ¡°Yes. You should make a few days¡¯ worth and send them to Ractos. However, we still need to do some research on the amount of herbs that are sold in the territory, so nothing is decided yet.¡±


    Right now, I made extra Ramogi, and so if I excluded them I was making more than a hundred.


    If that was all, then I could probably make it in a few days, but it would be pretty busy.


    While the number might go up or down a little, it was not too bad.


    You definitely wouldn¡¯t need arge field, and managing it would be easy.


    ¡°At first, I thought of preparing a space that was simr to the garden here.¡±


    ¡°Really?¡±


    ¡°Yes. However, if sales are good, then we might not be able to keep up with demand. And so I secured a slightlyrger area near the vige.¡±


    Ms. ire exined the initial n with a serious expression.


    Each herb was rather small, and it was not a great amount, so it was true that we would be able to do that in the back garden.


    However, if people learned that it was a stable way to acquire them, then they might want to buy a lot, and they would be sold out.


    And considering the incident with that other store, we wanted to avoid a situation where we ran out.


    ¡°If it is grown in the garden, then there probably won¡¯t be a need to make any official contracts.¡±


    ¡°But it would be necessary if we usednd near the vige. That cannot be helped.¡±


    If it was just in the garden, all I needed was Ms. ire¡¯s permission.


    It was their own backyard, so they wouldn¡¯t want to go through all the trouble of making a contract.


    ¡°Who has thend rights for the area around Range vige? In the ce that I used to live, nearly all of thend was owned by someone.¡±


    In times like these,nd rights could be an issue.


    From what I had heard, there were times when it was unknown who owned thend, because management had been sloppy, or it was leased out to someone else.


    It seemed to happen a lot in the countryside.


    In any case, because there could be such problems, it would be best to find out aboutnd rights in advance.

 Chapter 322

    Chapter 322


    I Asked About Land Management


    ¡°Thend rights¡­in your old world, Mr. Takumi, individuals ownednd?¡±


    ¡°Huh? Uhh¡­yes. You could buynd and be the owner and use it quite freely. You could lend it to others or live on it yourself. Well, you have to pay taxes as well, so it¡¯s not all positive.¡±


    I gave Ms. ire and Sebastian a simple exnation of what it was like in Japan.


    Obviously, there wereplicated contracts and procedures, but I had never ownednd, and that was not important to us now.


    While it sounded good to say that you were andowner, it was not enough to make a profit.


    But how were things here?


    ¡°I see. That is quite strange.¡±


    ¡°Indeed.¡±


    ¡°¡­So it is different here?¡±


    After hearing what I had said, Ms. ire and Sebastian looked at each other with wonder.


    Judging by their expression, things were done quite differently here.


    It was a different world with different rules.


    ¡°In this country, the king owns all of thend. That is thew.¡±


    ¡°Hmm.¡±


    ¡°However¡­it would be nearly impossible for the king to manage all of thatnd by himself.¡±


    ¡°Indeed.¡±


    Even if that king was some kind of genius, it was too much to do alone.


    Though, I¡¯m sure they hired people to help with such work, but it was still a lot to manage.


    ¡°And so thend is given to the nobles to manage. In short, those who have been givennd by the king are the nobility. So every noble in this country hasnd.¡±


    ¡°So the nobles be thendlords and manage it.¡±


    ¡°Yes. And the lords in turn lend thend to the people. And so farms, viges and towns are built. At that point, thend is owned by thendlord.¡±


    ¡°So, Mr. Ekenhart owns all of thisnd?¡±


    ¡°Yes. And the people that borrow it pay taxes. Usually, the vige chief or town governor takes care of that. They collect taxes from the residents and send it to those above them. That is how it works.¡±


    ¡°Hmm. So when Nick or I pay taxes¡­¡±


    ¡°It is deducted from your payment. As for Nick, the taxes are taken from what you pay him. As this mansion is in Ractos¡¯s jurisdiction, it all goes to the town governor.¡±


    I now had a general idea of how taxes worked in this country.


    In general, nobles earned an ie through taxes, and those who borrowed theirnd developed viges and towns.


    Previously, I had heard thatndlords could freely decide to raise their taxes.


    However, if the taxes were too high, then fewer people would want to live on yournd, which meant fewer people paying.


    Taxes for other living expenses in the town would rise as well, and it would be harder for the town to develop.


    Also, since it was also possible that people would try to raise taxes too much to fill their own pockets, they were required to make reports of their tax revenue. Sebastian told me all of this.


    It was a little simr to how things were in Japan a long time ago.


    It seemed like a system that would be filled with corruption, but I didn¡¯t want to think about that now.


    If it happened to go well in this world, then I had noints.


    At least, for now.


    ¡°To get back to the subject, we think it would be best for you to borrow somend, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Me?¡±


    From what I had heard, it seems like it would be difficult to have me managend and pay taxes, or rent for it.


    It was just a small space, and no one was going to live on it. So I wouldn¡¯t be able to collect taxes.


    ¡°Of course, we understand that there is still a lot that you don¡¯t know about this country. And so a butler of this house will be managing it for you. You will be educated enough so that you can just leave the difficult matters to him.¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­ I see.¡±


    A butler, eh?


    All of the butlers here were like Sebastian. They seemed very capable, and I wouldn¡¯t have to worry.


    If anything, I would feel fine if I just left everything to them.


    Only, it felt weird to have a butler working for me.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. The Liebert house has much lower taxes than thends of other nobles. Of course, considering how much you are paid for the herbs, you will have more than enough after paying taxes.¡±


    ¡°Yes, but that¡¯s not the problem¡­¡±


    Ms. ire smiled and exined after seeing that I looked hesitant.


    Only, she misunderstood the reason for it.


    ¡°I¡­uh¡­ I don¡¯t know about having a butler. I¡¯m not really used to that sort of thing.¡±


    ¡°Hehehe. So that¡¯s what it is.¡±


    ¡°Hoho. While it may be strange for me to say it, you will be fine, Mr. Takumi. I can guarantee that.¡±


    Hmm, if that¡¯s what Sebastian thought, I suppose I could trust him?


    He at least knew what he was talking about.


    In Japan, no matter how much I worked, I was always at the bottom.


    Regardless, in spite of some ws in his personality, Sebastian was excellent at his job.


    And so it must be fine, if he says so.


    I had wanted to take things easy, but now there was all this talk of managing herb fields and butlers¡­ And then there was Liza.


    I would have a lot to think about.


    ¡­Well, the herb field would be in Range vige, so I could rx there¡­ Time seemed to pass more slowly there.

 Chapter 323

    Chapter 323


    A Request from the Mansion Residents


    ¡°So, is everything alright concerning the contract?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    After that, Ms. ire and Sebastian talked about what would happen if we seeded with growing the herbs.


    As it would require the use ofnd, they told me that there would need to be a more detailed contract.


    Of course, I did not need to sign anything right away, but they thought to tell me in advance, so I wouldn¡¯t be confused about itter.


    ¡°If you have any questions or requests about it, we would be happy to help you.¡±


    ¡°I see. Thank you.¡±


    As the contract would mean having a butler, they told me to think about it carefully.


    After all, even if I couldn¡¯t think of any questions now, they mighte to meter, so I would confide in them when the time came.


    As for the butler, it would be like any other employment contract.


    Obviously, they didn¡¯t have the same kind of strict employment rules that they had in Japan, and it was rather vague.


    But when I thought back on how I had worked in Japan, I promised that even if things went well and I had to hire people, I would not create that kind of cruel environment.


    I didn¡¯t know if they had the same concept of ckpanies here, but thest thing I wanted was for people to be pushed to the brink, mentally and physically.


    And so I had to do my best as well.


    ¡°In that case, the official contract will be signed once your test is finished.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that is fine. Also¡­¡±


    ¡°Is there something else?¡±


    ¡°No, it¡¯s not rted to the contract. I was just wondering, shouldn¡¯t Mr. Ekenhart be with us?¡±


    He was thendlord here.


    And he was the head of the family.


    Should we really be deciding such things without him?


    Though, I suppose that Ms. ire was representing him.


    ¡°In regards to that, everything is fine. After all, nothing had been officially settled yet. But even if it was, I already have my father¡¯s permission.¡±


    Ms. ire answered.


    Sebastian nodded next to her. So I suppose it really was fine.


    ¡°I think father is leaving the matter to me, as part of my education. Since this is you, Mr. Takumi, the talks and negotiations should be quite simple¡­¡±


    As the daughter of the duke, she had to learn how to do such things.


    If it was me, she did not need to be nervous, and I was hardly going to make things difficult for her.


    While Sebastian had been doing most of the exining¡­it was still important.


    When I was working at thepany, I also had to follow my superior around and watch and listen.


    While it wasn¡¯t exactly the same as this, I could see how it was Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s attempt to give her some experience.


    In any case, if he was fine with this, then there was no problem.


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right. There is one other thing we have to ask you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? What is it?¡±


    It was just as I was thinking about leaving the room, that Ms. ire called to me.


    What could it be?


    ¡°Well, that request is¡­ Lady ire, perhaps you don¡¯t have to talk about that now.¡±


    ¡°But it¡¯s from the people of this house! I think it¡¯s important to keep the servants satisfied.¡±


    ¡°Indeed, but¡­ I don¡¯t know what Mr. Takumi will say.¡±


    ¡°Then we will have to ask him.¡±


    ¡°Uhh, what are you talking about?¡±


    Sebastian tried to stop Ms. ire from saying whatever she was about to say.


    But Ms. ire seemed intent on saying it.


    Apparently, Sebastian was doubtful if I would agree. But I couldn¡¯t say anything until I knew what it was.


    Was it a difficult request?


    It had to do with the servants¡­ Had I done something wrong?


    Or had Leo made a mess somewhere and I didn¡¯t notice?


    Hmm¡­


    ¡°It is a request from the servants, and me as well. It concerns Liza¡­¡±


    ¡°Liza? Is there a problem with her?¡±


    Was it because she was a beastkin?


    But then again, Ms. ire had given her permission for her to stay here.


    And I doubted she or the other servants had prejudiced views¡­


    But maybe there were some among them who didn¡¯t like beastkin?


    ¡°Oh, you needn¡¯t look so worried, Mr. Takumi. We are all very happy that she is here.¡±


    ¡°Lady ire and His Grace have epted her. So no one in this mansion will disagree with them.¡±


    ¡°Ah, I see.¡±


    It must have shown on my face, as they quickly reassured me.


    I was relieved to hear it. So what was the request then?


    I let out a sigh and realized that I had been quite tense.


    It was no wonder they saw through me.


    ¡°Well¡­ Some of them would like to touch Liza¡¯s tail or ears¡­¡±


    ¡°What?¡±


    Ms. ire said it a little awkwardly.


    They want to touch Liza¡¯s tail or ears?


    Now that sounded absurd.


    ¡°Well, you know how Leo and Sherry¡¯s tails and ears move with their emotions? Some of the servants who saw it want to try to touch it now.¡±


    ¡°I-I see¡­¡±


    Indeed, I had observed it myself.


    Ms. ire, Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda were always staring at them.


    I had a feeling that Liza was starting to be quite popr within the house.


    Well, that was a good thing.

 Chapter 324

    Chapter 324


    The Beastkin Had An Iron Rule


    ¡°Why not Leo or Sherry?¡±


    ¡°While Leo and Sherry do notin¡­it is not clear how they feel. Besides, I think they assume that the fur would be quite different.¡±


    ¡°Ah, I suppose that is true.¡±


    At this point, most of them would have been able to pet Leo and Sherry.


    However, beastkin were quite different, and so they probably wanted to feel their fur. Humans really were such annoying creatures¡­ Well, maybe I was thinking about it too much.


    ¡°Yes. Liza is a beastkin, but she is not much different from a human as well. And unlike Leo, she may not like it. Besides, beastkin have a rule¡­¡±


    ¡°A rule?¡±


    What was that? It sounded quite ominous.


    ¡°As for that, it is something that you should be aware of, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Sebastian¡­ Please exin it to him.¡±


    ¡°Yes, certainly.¡±


    The beastkin rule. They made it sound like it was very important.


    And as long as I was going to take care of Liza, I should know about such things.


    Just as Ms. ire was about to exin, she saw a sh in Sebstian¡¯s eyes, and so she sighed and gave the honor to him.


    It really was his reason to live.


    Still, he put on a serious face, though, his eyes were still smiling.


    ¡°The rules of the beastkin. This is something known to any who had reached a certain level of education.¡±


    ¡°A certain level?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Nobles and those close to them.¡±


    In other words, if Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire knew, then so did Sebastian and the servants.


    ¡°It is not some great secret, and so I¡¯m sure there are some townsfolk who know¡­ But not many. This rule of the beastkin has the same effect as thews in their country, and any who break it here will be punished.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°That being said, it is generally not about doing things to others, but about governing your own actions. For instance, just because someone gives you food, it doesn¡¯t mean you should follow them.¡±


    So it was like a form of discipline?


    The beastkin country would be full of children like Liza, who would wag their tails when given a treat.


    Though, it seemed rather rude to think of such things¡­


    ¡°There are not that many rules, but I will exin them to youter. Right now, we are talking about Liza. And as long as she lives here normally, none of the rules are likely to be broken. So you need not worry.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    I was able to rx after hearing that.


    ¡°Ears and tails are very important to the beastkin, and so they do not care to have others touch them casually. Only those who are close to them are able to¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed. So you are not sure if the servants would be included in that?¡±


    ¡°Yes. It is likely that only family and rtives are considered to be close enough¡­¡±


    ¡°That makes sense¡­ But it is rather vague. Still, it would be easy enough to just ask her who she feels close to.¡±


    Well, it was strangely vague for something that was supposed to be a rule. Apparently, it had the same effect as thew, so I was expecting something more strict.


    Perhaps all of the rules in the beastkin country were vague like this.


    Which seemed quite appropriate, for beastkin.


    They looked like they would be more easy-goingpared to humans.


    ¡°And so we wanted to ask you, since you are the closest to Liza right now¡­¡±


    ¡°Well¡­she does call me papa.¡±


    ¡°Yes. And so there is no doubt that you are close.¡±


    I chuckled at Ms. ire¡¯s words.


    Because of this rule, they wanted me to find out who she considered to be familiar enough to touch her ears and tail.


    ¡°As it is possible that it would be breaking the rules, we have told the servants to avoid it. And so they wanted you to ask her. If it is not possible, then they will give up.¡±


    ¡°I see. If Liza doesn¡¯t like it, then it would be best for them to not do that. But¡­¡±


    ¡°Is there something wrong?¡±


    ¡°Well, she was raised in the slums of Ractos¡­ So I don¡¯t know if she would know anything about these rules.¡±


    ¡°Ah, that is true¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm, indeed. It is not as if the beastkin know it from the moment they are born¡­ It is not instinct¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. I don¡¯t know much about the grandfather who raised her, but it seems like he was a human. Who knows if he was aware of the rules, and told her?¡±


    Since he was living in the slums, he must have been human.


    If he was a beastkin as well, then he would have been persecuted too.


    But since he was able to stop it, he had to be human.


    I wished that I could have talked to him.

 Chapter 325

    Chapter 325


    Liza Was Given Dessert


    ¡°In that case, could you ask her about that as well, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I don¡¯t know how much I will be able to ask, but I will try.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. We do not want to do anything that would upset her, of course¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. It¡¯s possible that she will be sad when talking about her past. I will be careful.¡±


    Still, how should I go about it?


    I suppose I should ask her about life in the slums, even if they were unpleasant memories.


    And about her grandfather as well¡­ Though, I would have to see how she reacts first.


    At least now that she was used to being around Leo and me, she seemed rather cheerful.


    Perhaps the reason that she looked worried every time we were separated, is because she has already experienced losing her grandfather.


    She was still young, and was not used to having to say goodbye to people.


    ¡°Excuse me. Lady ire, lunch is now ready.¡±


    As I was thinking about Liza, there was a knock on the door and one of the maids entered.


    She hade to tell us that lunch was ready.


    ¡°Ah, I see. Well, Mr. Takumi. That is enough talk. Let us go to the dining hall.¡±


    ¡°Yes. ¡­Ah, I will call Liza from the drawing room first.¡±


    ¡°I see. Very well.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, someone else went to the drawing room to inform them, so they should have gone to the dining hall already.¡±


    ¡°Ah, is that right? Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Not at all.¡±


    I was about to go and tell Liza that it was lunch time, but was told that another maid had already done that.


    Since Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda were in the drawing room, they would be able to take Liza to the dining hall.


    Besides, Leo was there as well.


    Leo would not stay still if she knew that it was time to eat.


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s go then.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    And so the three of us headed to the dining hall.


    Now that I thought about it, I had ended up leaving all the work to Milina¡­


    ¡°Papa!¡±


    ¡°Oh, Liza. I hope you were behaving?¡±


    When I entered the room, Liza saw me immediately and threw her arms around me.


    She had been helping Milina with the medicine and yet, she didn¡¯t seem very tired at all.


    Did she even get tired?


    ¡°Yes. I was making medicine with mama!¡±


    ¡°I see, I see. ¡­Ms. Lyra. How is the medicine?¡±


    ¡°Liza and Milina were able to use all of the herbs, and I then delivered the medicine to Helena.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    While hugging Liza, I whispered over to Ms. Lyra, who was standing near the door.


    So, all the medicine had been finished and was sent to Ms. Helena¡­ There had been quite a lot of herbs, so Milina must have worked really hard.


    Liza as well.


    ¡°Hehe. She really is fond of you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Thankfully.¡±


    Ms. ire chuckled as she saw us.


    And then I put Liza down in her chair, and I sat down as well.


    Ms. ire sat on the other side of the table.


    It was the usual arrangement.


    Mr. Ekenhart, Tilura, and Ms. Anne were already seated.


    Leo was also sitting, and her tail was wagging impatiently for the food to arrive.


    Now that everyone was present, the servants began to ce the food on the table.


    Shortly after, everyone¡¯s tes were served.


    Aside from Leo¡¯srge te of sausages, everyone had the same thing.


    Today, we were eating the york pudding that Ms. Helena made when I first came to this mansion.


    It was on the menu asionally, but Ms. Helena had probably made it today because of Liza.


    There would probably be dessert as well.


    ¡°Helena clearly worked hard today. Let¡¯s eat.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart looked at the food and announced that we should eat.


    Ms. ire, Ms. Anne and Tilura started eating immediately, and Leo and Sherry followed.


    I put my hands together, and while Liza¡¯s eyes shone at this unfamiliar food, she put her hands together as well.


    And then she picked up her fork awkwardly and took a bite.


    Her eyes widened and her expression was of surprise and delight.


    That was to be expected, given how good Ms. Helena was.


    ¡°It¡¯s delicious!¡±


    Liza said with a big smile. The others all chuckled as they ate their food.


    Leo and Sherry were only focused on eating their food quickly.


    Were they really that hungry?


    No, they were always like this.


    ¡°I never ate this before¡­¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s sweet, isn¡¯t it?¡±


    ¡°Sweet¡­sweet! Yes, it¡¯s sweet!¡±


    After lunch, dessert was served immediately.


    When eating it, Liza was surprised once again.


    Apparently, she had never eaten something sweet before.


    I suppose there was no sweet food to be had in the slums.


    ¡°Never had sweet food? Well, it can be rather expensive¡­ It is a luxury.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Sweet foods generally cost more than other kinds of food.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. While you can eat some in towns and viges, the slums are a different matter.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire talked as they watched Liza.


    As for Ms. Anne¡­she stared at Liza¡¯s ears every time she reacted to eating something.


    Was she amused by it? Well, I would leave her to it then.


    Leo and Sherry had eaten to their fill and looked quite satisfied. They were now huddled together into a ball with Tilura¡­ Well, it was like Leo was surrounding them.


    Considering this morning, Liza liked being wrapped in Leo¡¯s fur as well, but she was too preupied with eating something sweet for the first time.

 Chapter 326

    Chapter 326


    I Decided to Train With Magic Instead of Swords


    Still, sweet foods are a luxury, huh¡­


    There had been a time when sugar was considered to be a luxury in Japan.


    Perhaps if I made sugar cane and beets, the price of sugar would go down?


    But then I remembered that I couldn¡¯t make any farm produce with Weed Cultivation.


    So I couldn¡¯t make rice either¡­ Anything to do with improving the food situation was beyond me.


    Well, I had noints with the food, so this was not a pressing issue.


    ¡°Now then¡­ Let¡¯s go, Mr. Takumi and Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Please wait one moment, father.¡±


    ¡°Huh? What is it, ire?¡±


    After we had finished eating dessert, and drinking our tea, Mr. Ekenhart had got up to his feet and suggested we start our training. But then Ms. ire stopped him.


    As for Ms. Anne, she had gone to her room and muttered something about creating a n to make Liza like her.


    I felt a little bad for her¡­ But I also hoped she wouldn¡¯t think of anything strange.


    ¡°While sword training is good, perhaps Mr. Takumi wants to use magic as well?¡±


    ¡°Oh, is that so?¡±


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s true. I would like to use magic. Not to fight, though¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm. I see. In that case, we shall teach you magic today. It will be good for Tilura as well.¡±


    Ms. ire said this because I had talked about wanting to use magic before.


    I had seen it for the first time aftering to this world, and so if it was possible, I wanted to use it.


    Sebastian had taught me the very basics, and so I was able to use magic where you create a light.


    Upon hearing this suggestion, Mr. Ekenhart immediately agreed to it.


    ¡°About that, I think I should be teaching Mr. Takumi. You or Sebastian can teach Tilura. After all, Takumi has already learned the basics.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ So it¡¯s just Tilura that I¡¯ll have to teach from the beginning. Very well.¡±


    ¡°Magic?¡±


    ¡°Mmm. Magic will allow you to do so much more. Though, it will be difficult to integrate it into yourbat style at first¡­ But you will learn eventually.¡±


    ¡°I prefer sword training, but¡­alright.¡±


    Apparently, they had never taught magic to Tilura before, and so it was decided that Mr. Ekenhart would teach her.


    Since there was a difference in our knowledge, it was best to teach us separately.


    On the other hand, Tilura seemed to prefer moving her body and swinging a sword.


    That was like her.


    ¡°So, it¡¯s decided. I will teach Takumi and father will teach Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Mm.¡±


    ¡°Very well.¡±


    I wondered if Ms. ire had remembered her promise to me in the forest, where she said that she would teach me magic?


    I had thought that she forgot about it, since Sebastian had taught me some before going to Range vige.


    It hadn¡¯t been anything serious, and we just talked while exploring the forest. So it wouldn¡¯t have been a surprise if she forgot about it.


    Still, I was a little happy that she remembered.


    ¡°Magic¡­?¡±


    We went out into the garden, and after moving away from Mr. Ekenhart and Tilura, the lesson was about to begin¡­ However, that was when Liza looked at me with a puzzled expression.


    Apparently, she had not been listening to our conversation.


    And so now that she finally heard about what we were going to do, she was confused.


    ¡°Liza. I am going to teach Mr. Takumi about magic. Have you ever seen magic, Liza?¡±


    ¡°Grandfather¡­used it. So I¡¯ve¡­seen it¡­¡±


    ¡°I see. You know Liza, you don¡¯t have to talk so politely when talking to the people here.¡±


    ¡°But¡­grandfather said that I should¡­when talking to elders¡­¡±


    When Ms. ire had answered her question, Liza replied in awkward but polie words.


    Ms. ire looked at her gently and tried to get her to rx.


    Indeed, the people in this mansion were not the kind who would be angry if you spoke more casually.


    If anything, they might not appreciate someone who was too modest. Especially Mr. Ekenhart.


    But Liza did not look very convinced. And so she turned to me questioningly.


    Well, if Ms. ire was going to insist like this, then there was no need for Liza to be modest.


    However, it did make me wonder what kind of man her grandfather was, considering they lived in the slums.


    ¡°Liza. Don¡¯t worry about it. No one will be angry with you. Just talk to everyone like you talk to me.¡±


    ¡°¡­Um. Okay. Uhh¡­ Sister¡­ire?¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s fine, Liza.¡±


    I told her gently to reassure her, saying that she could talk to others like she talked to me.


    Liza thought about it for a moment and then nodded. She then turned to Ms. ire and hesitantly called her sister and then smiled.


    Ms. ire offered her hand and they shook with augh.


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Oh, you too, good Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Mama¡¯s here too!¡±


    As the twoughed, Leo seemed to want to join in, and she ced her paw on top of theirs.


    I guess that was her way of shaking hands.


    Leo nodded and then Liza grabbed Leo¡¯s paw happily.


    Well, because her hands were so small, she was just grabbing Leo¡¯s fur.

 Chapter 327

    Chapter 327


    I Learned of a New Way to Use Magic


    ¡°Now, I will give you a simple exnation of magic.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Could I use magic too?¡±


    ¡°Well¡­ That is not something that I can determine. It would be irresponsible of me to say that you could¡­¡±


    ¡°I thought magic was something that anyone can use?¡±


    Liza had looked happy at the possibility that she could use magic, but Ms. ire answered her with a serious expression.


    Previously, when it had been exined to me, I was told that everyone had magic energy, and so could use magic.


    In that case, shouldn¡¯t Liza be able to use magic?¡±


    ¡°Yes, every human can. But beastkin¡­ They have less magic energy than humans, and so I¡¯ve heard that most do not like to use it.¡±


    ¡°They don¡¯t¡­like to.¡±


    ¡°Yes. It¡¯s true that there are beastkin who use magic, but whether or not all of them can¡­ I do not know. Though, I¡¯m quite sure they all have some magic energy.¡±


    So it was a difference between beastkin and humans, huh?


    While Liza had some magic energy, there was no guarantee that she could use it.


    I wonder if it was because beastkin found it more difficult to activate?


    ¡°Perhaps we should have her checked by Ms. Isabelle, next time we go to Ractos?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. She will be able to find out how much magic energy Liza has. In any case, I will exin things to her first.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    ¡°Now, listen to me, Liza. Magic is when you use the magic energy in your body to¡­¡±


    And so Ms. ire stood in front of us and exined to us about magic.


    In that case, it might have been better to have her learn with Tilura¡­ But when I turned to look, I saw that they had taken out their swords.


    Apparently, the curious and active Tilura, and Mr. Ekenhart, who always tried to do new things, were not the types to study magic seriously and quietly.


    Well, Sebastian was with them, so they probably wouldn¡¯t stray too far from the subject.


    As this was Liza¡¯s first time learning, there was a lot she didn¡¯t know. But she tried hard to memorize and do what she was told.


    That was how interested she was in magic.


    ¡°It¡¯s hard¡­¡±


    Apparently, it was difficult for Liza to detect her magic energy.


    Indeed, Sebastian had said that it was quite difficult when you do it for the first time.


    And so he had been surprised when I did it so quickly.


    Liza was scowling as she concentrated. But it was not going well.


    ¡°Now¡­ Mr. Takumi, are you ready?¡±


    ¡°Yes, any time.¡±


    Ms. ire now turned to face me with a serious expression.


    As she had finished exining things to Liza, it was now time to teach me.


    After all, this was the main goal here.


    Liza could start her lessons in earnest after we visited Ms. Isabelle.


    ¡°First, I want you to use the light magic that Sebastian taught you.¡±


    ¡°Very well. ¡­Light Elemental Shine.¡±


    I had not used magic ever since I returned from Range vige, but I remembered the feeling. And so I concentrated the energy to my hand and changed in order to activate it.


    And just like that, the familiar sphere of light appeared on top of my palm.


    ¡°Papa, your magic is amazing!¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. Well, it¡¯s very simple magic.¡±


    Liza was very pleased when she saw the floating ball of light.


    As the exnation on magic had ended, she could have gone to y with Leo¡­ But apparently, she wanted to watch, as she stood next to Ms. ire.


    As for Leo, she was watching Tilura with a puzzled expression, and Sherry was sitting on her head.


    ¡­What was Tilura and Mr. Ekenhart doing?


    ¡°So you have no trouble activating it. Now, try and cast magic onto this.¡±


    ¡°Onto that¡­¡±


    Ms. ire handed me a small knife.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, I¡¯m sure you remember how Sebastian used magic to make your sword glow in the forest.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    If I remember correctly, it had been very dark, so he made our swords light up so that we could navigate our way through the darkness.


    Sebastian had done it as if it was easy, so I should probably be able to do it as well.


    Thinking this, I started to concentrate like I did before.


    ¡°¡­Light Elemental Shine¡­ Huh?¡±


    ¡°It doesn¡¯t glow?¡±


    While I had activated the magic in the same way, the knife did not glow at all.


    Liza also looked at it with a tilt of her head.


    Why didn¡¯t it work¡­? As I wondered this and inspected the knife in my hand, I noticed that light was leaking from between my fingers.


    So the magic had activated.


    But why wasn¡¯t the knife glowing?


    ¡°Hehe. You are confused. I made the same mistake the first time as well.¡±


    ¡°But why¡­?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, you gathered the magic energy and activated it in the same way, didn¡¯t you?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    You activated magic by gathering the energy and chanting.


    It was the basics of using magic.


    ¡°Just doing that will not imbue the knife with magic. While you understand that magic energy is in your body, that knife is not part of you. You need to transfer the magic energy over to the knife, or it will not shine.¡±


    ¡°Transfer¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. You have to transfer the energy to a ce that is not your body. Of course, as you have to do it by force, it requires extra energy. Concentrate on forcing the energy out and into the knife.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    If it was an object like a knife, then you had to send the magic energy to it.


    I suppose that made sense.


    Now that I understood this, I gathered more energy to my hand and then imagined that I was forcing it towards the knife.


    I think it worked? And so I began to chant¡­

 Chapter 328

    Chapter 328


    I Was Taught Magic of Each Attribute


    ¡°¡­Light Elemental Shine.¡±


    ¡°The knife glowed!¡±


    ¡°¡­It¡¯s a sess¡­ I can¡¯t believe you seeded after failing just once. I suppose I should have expected this from you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    When I activated the magic, the de of the knife certainly emitted light this time around.


    Liza, who was watching, raised her hands with delight, and Ms. ire seemed a little surprised.


    ¡°It worked?¡±


    ¡°Yes. But I¡¯m surprised that you were able to do it after a simple exnation¡­¡±


    ¡°I see. That¡¯s good.¡±


    Maybe it was because she exined it in a way that was easy to understand?


    ¡°I kept failing, and was not able to do it for some time.¡±


    ¡°You, Ms. ire?


    ¡°Yes. I found it difficult to concentrate on this idea of sending the magic energy. I suppose you just have a talent for it, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°No, not at all. Surely it has nothing to do with your talent. You just made it easy for me to understand what to do.¡±


    ¡°Hehe. No, but even Sebastian agrees that you are sharp when ites to magic energy.¡±


    ¡°Is that so?¡±


    But now that I thought about it, he had said something like that, when he was teaching me before.


    I didn¡¯t know if any of that was true, but it felt good to have Ms. ire think highly of me.


    ¡°Now, Mr. Takumi, I will teach you some new magic.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I¡¯m ready.¡±


    Ms. ire had beenughing, but she turned serious as she faced me.


    And so I straightened my back as well.


    For some reason, Liza also looked serious, even though she wasn¡¯t the one who was going to do it.


    In any case, new magic¡­huh? Light magic could be used to temporarily blind people. And I was able to use it inbat because it didn¡¯t take too long to activate. Would Ms. ire teach me something simr to that?


    ¡°I will teach you water, wind and fire magic. ¡­As they are the only ones that I can use.¡±


    ¡°Really?¡±


    ¡°Yes. After all, I am usually the one who is being protected. And so it would be more wise for me to spend my time learning about governing ournds rather than magic orbat.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    Ms. ire had Phillip and those other guards.


    So it made sense for her to study as the daughter of a duke, rather than magic.


    However, because she was strong-willing and curious, I did find it a little surprising.


    But in this world, magic wasn¡¯t anything unusual, so people generally weren¡¯t as excited about it as me, I suppose.


    Even Tilura was much more interested in sword training than magic.


    ¡°We¡¯ll start with fire magic. I¡¯m sure you¡¯ve seen this before, Mr. Takumi. ¡­Fire Elemental Candle.¡±


    And then Ms. ire raised her index finger, and a small me appeared on the tip.


    Indeed, this was the magic that Sebastian had shown me as a demonstration.


    It could be used like a lighter for when you wanted to make a fire.


    That made it sound mundane, but this was still real magic, and so I felt some excitement.


    ¡°Next is¡­ Water Elemental Wash.¡±


    Ms. ire erased the fire and made water appear in the palm of her hand.


    We had used this magic during the forest exploration to wash dishes.


    Unlike the water that Leo made for Liza, this was done through gathering the moisture in the air, and so it was not fit for drinking.


    Well, it was probably fine if it was only the moisture in the air, but it probably took it from the ground as well¡­ You just didn¡¯t know what might be mixed in it.


    ¡°Lastly¡­ Wind Elemental Air.¡±


    Next she used wind magic.


    Ms. ire directed her hand towards me and I felt a weak wind blowing from it.


    This might be useful when making medicine, but Leo¡¯s would still be more effective.


    Perhaps it had to do with how much magic energy you used?


    If not, I¡¯m not sure it would be very practical for me.


    ¡°And so those are the basic attributes of magic. Just like light magic, they do not use much energy and chanting is easy. I¡¯m sure you will have no trouble with them, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Do you think so? Well, I¡¯ll try it then.¡±


    And so I focused on gathering magic energy.


    What was important when using magic was focusing on the magic energy, and the chant that converted it.


    I decided to start with fire magic.


    ¡°¡­Fire Elemental Candle.¡±


    ¡°There¡¯s fire!¡±


    I moved the index finger of my right hand like Ms. ire did, and chanted.


    And then a small me appeared with a burst.


    It looked a little bigger than Ms. ire¡¯s one?


    Thanks to seeing Ms. ire do it right in front of me, I was able to copy her and everything went smoothly.


    I suppose that was important as well.


    If I had never seen it before, but had to use it, then it might have been more difficult to make it activate.


    To my side, I saw Liza was very happy. And so I moved on to the next one.


    ¡°Next is¡­ Water Elemental Wash.¡±


    ¡°Water came out! Can I drink it?¡±


    ¡°You¡­better not drink this. Are you thirsty?¡±


    ¡°No, I¡¯m fine.¡±


    ¡°I see. Well, tell me if you are, okay?¡±


    ¡°Okay!¡±


    Just like Ms. ire, I was able to make water that burst out as if from a faucet.


    As it poured out, Liza tried to catch some with her hands, but I stopped her.


    This wasn¡¯t like Leo¡¯s water, after all.


    While I doubted it was poisonous, it was better to not drink it.


    I didn¡¯t want her to get sick.

 Chapter 329

    Chapter 329


    I Learned Even More New Magic


    I nced over to Ms. Lyra in order to ask her to bring water when Liza was thirsty.


    She must have been listening to the conversation, as she nodded.


    Now I didn¡¯t have to worry about her. And so I started to prepare the wind magic.


    ¡°¡­Wind Elemental Air.¡±


    ¡°The wind feels nice.¡±


    ¡°Yes, it does, Liza.¡±


    As I raised the palm of my hand, the wind magic activated.


    I was able to do it without any problem as well.


    Liza and Ms. ire smiled pleasantly as the breeze hit them.


    Well, the sun was now high in the sky, so it was quite warm.


    ¡°They all activated.¡±


    ¡°Yes, very good, Mr. Takumi. You were able to do it after just watching me do it once.¡±


    ¡°Haha. Well, they were quite simple and easy to learn¡­¡±


    I chuckled, but was quite relieved that it wasn¡¯t difficult magic to learn.


    But on the other hand, I did want to learn something that was a little more shy¡­


    After all, I had seen such things inic books and animation.


    That being said, I was still a beginner, and so it was important to get the basics down and move slowly from there.


    If I got ahead of myself and tried to learn more powerful magic, I probably wouldn¡¯t be able to use it.


    Besides, there was likely no need or opportunity for it.


    ¡°I suppose you wanted more of a challenge?¡±


    ¡°No, not at all.¡±


    Ms. ire must have seen it in my expression then.


    Had I looked so unsatisfied?


    ¡°In that case, you should try something that is a little more difficult.¡±


    ¡°More difficult¡­ I thought that this was all of the magic that you knew?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I only know this magic. However, it is possible tobine them.¡±


    ¡°You canbine magic?¡±


    Ms. ire knew four different types of magic.


    And it seemed like she was able tobine them?


    It definitely sounded more difficult, and so I would have to focus.


    ¡°Hehe. Don¡¯t worry. It is still part of the basics. I doubt you shall have much trouble, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    Ms. ire chuckled as she saw that I had grown a little tense.


    She really did read me like a book¡­


    ¡°Now then¡­ Let¡¯s trybining water and fire.¡±


    ¡°Water and fire?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Bybining them, you can create mist.¡±


    Mist¡­ I suppose it was done by using heat to evaporate the water?


    So it was like steam.


    ¡°I will start. ¡­Water, fire, Elemental Mix Mist!¡±


    Ms. ire looked a little more serious this time as she raised her hand above her head and chanted.


    Elemental Mix¡­ Well, the chants were getting longer now.


    Sebastian had said something about more effective magic having longer chants.


    ¡°Smoke ising out of your hand!¡±


    ¡°No, that¡¯s steam¡­or mist.¡±


    ¡°Hehe. Exactly.¡±


    The mist came out of her hands and spread out.


    As she was not using much magic energy, it did not spread too far, and the wind soon swept it away into nothing.


    To put it simply, the water and fire magic activated simultaneously, and the water evaporated from the heat.


    Perhaps the steam that came out of the palm was immediately cooled by the air and turned into mist?


    No, since it was magic, it could be a very different phenomenon.


    It was midday and the temperature was warm, I didn¡¯t know if it would turn to mist¡­


    ¡°Phew¡­ I managed to do it without failing.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s difficult for you, Ms. ire?¡±


    ¡°Of course, it is. Magic is not one of the things that I am good at. Still, I did not want to fail in front of you, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    Ms. ire sighed with relief.


    She had seemed a little embarrassed as she admitted that she was nervous.


    Still, her smile was very beautiful, and I felt my heart skip a beat. But this was during a magic lesson¡­ No time to be thinking about such things.


    And she really didn¡¯t need to be nervous in front of someone like me¡­


    ¡°Uh, so thebining of magic. First, you must separate the magic energy in two ces before bringing them to the ce of activation.¡±


    ¡°Two ces?¡±


    ¡°Yes. While you would normally gather the energy into one ce, this time, you have to separate it and convert and activate the energy at the same time.¡±


    Yes, that seemed much harder all of a sudden.


    Two¡­eh?


    Hmm. So I should gather the energy into my pal¡­and then separate them into two?


    I tried to imagine that I was rolling a ball of energy with my hand.


    And then I cut the ball in half so that they were separated.


    I raised my hands like Ms. ire did and concentrated on making two small spheres of magic energy.


    I had gotten quite used to doing this¡­ I thought as I concentrated. In my right hand, the fire, and the water would be in my left.


    ¡°¡­Water, Fire, Elemental Mix Mist!¡±


    ¡°Huh!?¡±


    And then I chanted the same words that Ms. ire did.


    I converted the energy and activated it


    Since my eyes were closed in concentration, I didn¡¯t see anything. But Ms. ire sounded surprised.


    Was it because I had done it so suddenly?


    After the magic had activated, and I felt the energy leave my palms, I opened my eyes.


    Had I seeded or failed¡­?


    I followed Ms. ire¡¯s surprised gaze, which was directed towards my raised hands.

 Chapter 330

    Chapter 330


    I Seeded with Combined Magic


    ¡°Oh, mist ising out.¡±


    When I looked up at my raised hands, I saw that a cloud of mist was spreading out from them.


    And while the wind quickly pushed it away, as long as I concentrated, the mist continued to appear.


    ¡°It¡¯s all foggy! That¡¯s amazing, papa!¡±


    ¡°Haha. It is?¡±


    Liza threw her hands in the air happily.


    Iughed, which affected my concentration, and the mist stoppeding out.


    That was a little disappointing, but now that I know how to do it, it should be easy next time.


    I had grasped the feeling of moving your magic energy.


    ¡°¡­I didn¡¯t think you would do it right in the middle of the exnation. And you seeded as well.¡±


    ¡°Huh? You were still exining it?¡±


    ire muttered as she looked at the area above my head.


    Apparently, she had meant to exin it in further detail.


    But I had gone ahead and used the magic sessfully.


    That¡¯s why she was surprised, I guess?


    ¡°Yes. I was going to teach you how to concentrate and maintain it¡­ But I suppose such things are not necessary for you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°I wouldn¡¯t say that¡­ But I guess you were very good at exining it to me up until now. Besides, you demonstrated it, so it wasn¡¯t difficult to understand.¡±


    ¡°¡­Is that so? Well, it was worth the effort for me then.¡±


    ¡°Yes. And so don¡¯t worry, it wasn¡¯t like I didn¡¯t need you or anything.¡±


    ¡°¡­Need me¡­¡±


    Hmm? Ms. ire was suddenly deep in thought.


    Had I said something wrong?


    ¡°Sister, what¡¯s the matter?¡±


    ¡°Oh! Uh, nothing, little Liza.¡±


    ¡°Really? You seem strange?¡±


    ¡°Oh, I am quite fine! I was just a little stunned because of Mr. Takumi. He was amazing, wasn¡¯t he?¡±


    ¡°Yes! He used all kinds of magic! Both of you were amazing!¡±


    ¡°Oh, me too? Hehe¡­¡±


    Liza had looked at Ms. ire with a worried and puzzled expression.


    And so Ms. ire smiled and assured her that she was fine.


    It wasn¡¯t just me, but Liza was also very impressed by Ms. ire¡¯s demonstration.


    Ms. ireughed as she saw Liza wag her tail excitedly.


    Yes, yes. Ms. ire was the best when she smiled.


    ¡°Ms. ire. Are there any other magicbinations?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­yes. Like I said earlier, it is possible tobine powerful magic. However, the chants be terribly long.¡±


    In order to distract Ms. ire from Liza¡¯s wagging tail, I asked her about magicbinations.


    And so she exined it to me cheerfully.


    Powerful magic, eh? While that sounded very appealing, I doubted I would be able to do it for a while.


    Besides, not only did they use more energy, but the chants became longer as well.


    Sebastian had told me that there were chants that took a whole day toplete. And even if they weren¡¯t that long, they might take at least a few minutes.


    That was definitely not something that I could use duringbat.


    ¡°Furthermore, you can alsobine more than three types of magic.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s not just two?¡±


    ¡°Yes. However¡­¡±


    ¡°What?¡±


    ¡°It bes significantly more difficult. Combining two can be hard enough, but when you go up to three and four and¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­of course.¡±


    While I had managed to seed earlier¡­I was not confident in my ability tobine three.


    ¡°Also, it¡¯s not just the magic energy you have to think about, but the effect as well. Sometimes, it is practically like developing entirely new magic on your own.¡±


    ¡°New magic¡­ Yes, I don¡¯t think that I can do that.¡±


    Combining different things to make something new¡­it was simr to a science experiment, perhaps.


    ¡°In fact, for a long time,bining three types was thought to be the limit. And only a small number of people have been able to do four or more.¡±


    ¡°Is that so?¡±


    ¡°Well, it is written in texts or are otherwise just rumors. But that is what they say. Of course, the person who did more than four also had a Gift, so perhaps it was because of that.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ If you have a Gift, then it might not be purely magic, and so no one else can do it.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s right.¡±


    So there was someone who had seeded inbining more than four types of magic.


    But it was likely that it was the Gift¡¯s power¡­


    While I also had a Gift, it was probably different from Weed Cultivation, and something rted to magic.


    ¡­I felt a little jealous.


    But then again, my ability has been quite useful as well. And one shouldn¡¯tin about what they didn¡¯t have.

 Chapter 331

    Chapter 331


    There Was A Change in the Herb Garden


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Oh, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Mama!¡±


    ¡°Good Leo?¡±


    As I was listening to Ms. ire¡¯s exnation onbining magic, Leo, who had been sitting and waiting at a distance, suddenly approached us and barked as if to ask if we were done.


    Was she bored?


    ¡°There, there¡­ Are we done for the day then, Ms. ire?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Let¡¯s end it here then. I suppose good Leo had gotten tired of waiting. Besides, you already seeded inbining magic, so there is not much that I can teach you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    I listened to Ms. ire while petting Leo. She chuckled and said I had learned everything.


    So that was the end of this magic lesson.


    As for Liza, she was petting Leo while looking jealously at Sherry, who rode on top of Leo¡¯s head.


    Did she want to ride on Leo¡¯s head too? I¡¯m sure that Leo wouldn¡¯t mind¡­if she could fit on top.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Huh? What is it, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Is there something wrong?¡±


    Leo suddenly started pawing at my clothes as if she were trying to get my attention.


    It seemed like she wanted to tell me something. What could it be?


    Even Ms. ire looked puzzled.


    ¡°Wuff, wuff!¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­that¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm?¡±


    Leo had then pointed her nose at the herb garden I had made this morning.


    I had left them there to see how they would grow.


    And so Ms. ire and I looked towards the garden.


    Liza looked like she was confused.


    As she had not been watching when we picked them, she did not understand.


    However, as Leo, Ms. ire and I had seen it and knew when they stopped growing, we noticed that something was strange.


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Hmm. What does this mean?¡±


    ¡°In any case, I shall go and call Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Ah, sorry. Thank you.¡±


    Leo was looking at me and tilting her head questioningly.


    Well, it was not as if I could answer her.


    Ms. ire was also curious about it now, and she had rushed off to fetch Sebastian.


    In that direction, I saw that Mr. Ekenhart was holding his sword and Tilura was putting her hands on the de¡­ What were they doing¡­?


    I wasn¡¯t sure that Ms. ire should take Sebastian from them now.


    In any case, the ce where I had used Weed Cultivation to grow the herbs.


    There was a spot that was in the sunlight and a spot in the shade. They contained the same types of herbs as well.


    Even now, that had not changed.


    After all, only five or six hours had passed. And yet, what happened to them was¡­


    ¡°I am back, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Lady ire asked me toe¡­ What is it?¡±


    ¡°Sebastian¡­ And Mr. Ekenhart too?¡±


    ¡°Mmm. I heard that something had happened with your herbs, so I came to look.¡±


    ¡°I had fun training with father!¡±


    While Ms. ire had just gone to call Sebastian, Mr. Ekenhart and Tilura hade as well.


    Uh, I was d that they had fun¡­


    In any case, about the herbs¡­


    As they were more far away, they had not noticed the change that came over the herbs.


    ¡°Uhh¡­ Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian¡­ Look over there.¡±


    ¡°This¡­ What happened?¡±


    ¡°What is¡­¡±


    And so I took them over to where the herbs were growing.


    Both of them looked stunned.


    As for Tilura, she and Liza were now riding on Leo¡¯s back.


    They were not that interested in herbs, it seemed.


    But Leo was interested because it was rted to my ability, and so her head was always pointed towards the herbs.


    As for the herb garden, the herbs had be muchrgerpared to how they were in the morning, and around them, there were numerous new sprouts growing.


    Had the grown herbs spread their seeds everywhere? No, surely it could not have happened that fast.


    Did it happen through separation of the roots? But that couldn¡¯t happen by itself.


    Such things did not happen in nature¡­ In the first ce, the sprouts were too small, and barely sticking out of the soil.


    ¡°Uhh, Sebastian¡­ What is the meaning of this?¡±


    When in doubt, ask Sebastian!


    Well, I didn¡¯t think that Sebastian knew everything, but with his vast breadth of knowledge, surely he could set up a hypothesis¡­I hope.


    ¡°Hmm¡­indeed¡­ Could it be, because they are herbs made with Weed Cultivation?¡±


    ¡°Weed Cultivation¡­¡±


    ¡°In the first ce, I have never heard of herbs increasing at such a rapid rate. And so Weed Cultivation is the only exnation. Herbs that are made with it must have special properties.¡±


    ¡°So what you¡¯re saying, Sebastian. Is that these herbs are not normal?¡±


    ¡°Well¡­they are not fully grown yet. So we don¡¯t know how different they are from other herbs.¡±


    So even Sebastian did not know.


    We would have to gather and study them before anything could be said.


    However, it seemed clear that the reason for the sudden growth and multiplying was Weed Cultivation.


    nts did not grow like this in a matter of hours, so that was the only exnation.

 Chapter 332

    Chapter 332


    It Was Decided That I Would Hire People


    ¡°In that case, Sebastian, ire. We will have a lot to think about¡­concerning Mr. Takumi¡¯s Weed Cultivation.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Considering how much they have multiplied¡­ We might be able to gather much more than we initially thought.¡±


    ¡°Indeed, father. There may be enough for not just thesends, but to export as well.¡±


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s not get carried away. It might not happen like this every time. Perhaps there are special conditions.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    As he watched the herb garden, Mr. Ekenhart started to talk to Sebastian and Ms. ire about how they would have to rethink their ns for Range vige.


    Even I had assumed that they would grow like normal herbs, and I didn¡¯t think that we would be able to prepare them in such great quantities.


    Ms. ire even thought that if this continued, we would have enough to sell in other territories as well.


    ¡°About the herb garden we want you to make¡­ It might be muchrger than nned.¡±


    ¡°Uh, yes, that might be true¡­ But I couldn¡¯t manage such a thing¡­¡±


    ¡°We will deal with that. Well, we intended to put a butler under you, but I think we¡¯ll also have to have some other personnel to work for you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Mr. Takumi can hardly be expected to gather all of these herbs by himself. Aside from getting someone to help manage the ce, there is a lot we have to think about.¡±


    Sebastian then told me that the fields would be created on a muchrger scale.


    That meant I would have to look after the herbs, gather them and ship them to town¡­


    Obviously, that was not something that I could do alone.


    As I hesitated over it, Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire made a different suggestion.


    I had already heard about a butler, but hiring other people¡­ Well, it would definitely help¡­ Only, I didn¡¯t know if I would be able to manage those people¡­


    ¡°Do you really think I¡¯ll be able to do it?¡±


    ¡°Ah, I wouldn¡¯t worry about that, Mr. Takumi. I know you well enough now to see that you are capable.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. I believe that you can do it, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­¡±


    ¡°Though, I am worried that some people might try to take advantage of Mr. Takumi¡¯s kindness.¡±


    While I felt anxious, the others nodded and tried to assure me that I would be fine.


    Even Ms. Lyra was nodding.


    I was d that they trusted me, but I had never been in such a position before¡­


    But then Mr. Sebastian continued, which added to my anxiety.


    Now that I thought about it, Ms. Lyra had said something simr as well.


    It wouldn¡¯t be too bad if they just cked off, but if they went after my money or targeted me, that could be a problem.


    ¡­And so I felt even more worried about hiring people.


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Indeed. But with good Leo there, any suspicious people near Mr. Takumi will be exposed quickly enough. Hehe.¡±


    ¡°¡­Is that right, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff!¡±


    Leo must have sensed my worries, as she stepped forward and barked.


    Ms. ire nodded and agreed that it would be fine if Leo was with me¡­


    And when I asked her, Leo nodded confidently.


    Well, Leo was sensitive to such things, so she may be able to sniff out anyone who was suspicious. Just like she had done with the wine.


    ¡°Regardless, it is not something you need to be so concerned about, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Why is that?¡±


    ¡°When starting, the duke¡¯s men will investigate anyone who is to be hired.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that is a good idea. After all, it involves this house, so we must ensure that everyone who is hired is also trustworthy.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    So they would vouch for anyone who was hired.


    Then I guess I had nothing to worry about?


    Not that I still wasn¡¯t worried about my own managing abilities.


    ¡°In any case, this matter will need to be discussed in greater detail with ire and Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Yes. At this rate, we will require a lot morend. ¡­And we must find a ce for Mr. Takumi to live.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m going to live in the fields?¡±


    ¡°Not the fields¡­ But we intend to have a house nearby so that you can manage things easily. After all, you cannot do that from here.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    For a moment I thought that I was going to be driven out of the mansion, but it was not the case.


    Indeed, since the herb field would be close to Range vige, I wouldn¡¯t be able to manage it from this mansion.


    But even if I rode on Leo, a round trip would take longer than a day.


    That would not be very efficient.


    And while it would best if I could leave the management to someone else, that would not happen for some time.


    ¡­In the first ce, I would be worried about leaving it entirely in someone else¡¯s hands.


    ¡°I will have to speak with the chief of Range vige, and have a great plot ofnd prepared.¡±


    ¡°Uh, I hope it will not be too big¡­ Something modest would be preferable¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha. Well, that can be discussedter. And once we have decided on most of the details, we will speak with you again, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    As it was rted tond, they would need to consider the matter beforehand.


    There was no point in me joining the conversation so early, as there was nothing that I could say. And so I would leave it to them.


    And with Ms. ire and Sebastian there, they would ensure that it wasn¡¯t anything too bad.


    my only concern was that Mr. Ekenhart would propose something ridiculous¡­


    ¡°Now then, we will continue to observe these herbs for some time. Do you have any other thoughts, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ As far as I can see, the sunlight hasn¡¯t had much effect on them. But I would like to know about the speed at which they grow. Also, the differences in the amount of water given¡­¡±


    ¡°Certainly. I will tell the others, and we can adjust the water and see how it affects them.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±

 Chapter 333

    Chapter 333


    I Talked With Ms. Lyra


    As Sebastian had asked me, I made suggestions about what conditions to observe the herbs in and what changes could be made.


    There were also other things, like fertilizer and soil to consider¡­ But for now, we should focus on water.


    I will test other things next time.


    If we did them all at once, it would be difficult to keep track of everything.


    Apparently, Sebastian meant to have the servants take turns watching the herbs.


    As he called Ms. Lyra and gave her orders, I saw that he looked a little frustrated over not knowing what had happened exactly, since no one had been watching the nts between morning and midday.


    Well, I didn¡¯t think he needed to feel bad over it.


    No one had expected them to change so much in just a few hours.


    ¡°Ahaha! So fast!¡±


    ¡°Leo is amazing!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°They seem to be having fun.¡±


    After we had all looked at the herb garden, Mr. Ekenhart, Ms. ire and Sebastian all went inside in order to talk.


    When they were gone, Leo looked like she wanted to y, and Tilura and Liza were already on her back.


    And so I had Leo run around in the garden, while Ms. Lyra and I watched from a distance.


    Just likest time, Ms. Lyra brought out some chairs so that we could sit down and drink tea together.


    It was a lot more enjoyable to drink withpany.


    However, Tilura¡¯s magic lesson had been interrupted¡­ I suppose Mr. Ekenhart felt that there were more important matters to discuss¡­


    From what I had seen, Mr. Ekenhart and Tilura looked more like they were ying, so I wasn¡¯t sure if she even learned any magic.


    Well, she hadn¡¯t seemed that interested in magic to begin with.


    I suppose being able to train with a sword in order to protect herself was her first priority.


    ¡°Still, Mr. Takumi. What we talked about before has be a reality quite quickly.¡±


    ¡°Before¡­ah, about hiring someone?¡±


    ¡°Yes. It was rather presumptuous of me to say that¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha. No, I was grateful. It allowed me to think about it more seriously.¡±


    Had Ms. Lyra not given me some advice when it came to hiring people, I might not have thought about it much.


    In fact, I had not thought about it nearly enough when hiring Nick.


    Of course, given the results, I did not regret the decision.


    ¡°But your ability really is wonderful, Mr. Takumi. Not only the effects of the herbs, but how they are able to multiply so quickly.¡±


    ¡°Well, even I didn¡¯t know that this would happen. I just thought that I could make them with my ability¡­¡±


    ¡°That is how amazing the Gift is, I suppose. As someone who does not have it, I can only imagine what it is like.¡±


    ¡°I was like that too. Because I didn¡¯t have it beforeing here. Everything has been such a surprise.¡±


    While drinking tea, Ms. Lyra muttered about the herbs in the corner of her vision.


    Indeed, I had not expected them to multiply like this¡­


    The fact that this could happen in just a few hours had to be rted to Weed Cultivation.


    If I had the same ability in Japan, how could I have used it?


    ¡­No, I didn¡¯t want to think about that. All I could imagine was that I would be made to work and create nts until I passed out.


    It was the effect of having had to work in such a harsh environment for so long¡­


    ¡°What¡¯s the matter? You look a little pale, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Uh, it¡¯s nothing. I¡¯m fine.¡±


    It must have showed on my face, as Ms. Lyra looked at me with concern.


    Right now, I was supposed to be having fun and drinking tea.


    I felt bad by suddenly ruining the mood with such intrusive thoughts.


    We should enjoy this time of rxation.


    ¡°Ah, by the way. What is Milina doing now?¡±


    ¡°Milina? I believe that she is training with Gelda.¡±


    ¡°With Gelda?¡±


    ¡°Yes. After all, Gelda hasn¡¯t been in this mansion for very long either. Though, I wouldn¡¯t say that she is new¡­ But she still has a lot to learn.¡±


    ¡°I see. In that case, I better not disturb them.¡±


    I had considered calling her in order to help with the medicine¡­but I decided against it.


    Though, it would have been nice to be able to show her the herbs.


    ¡°No, if it is important, I¡¯m sure she will not mind. Besides, Milina¡¯s main purpose is to learn about medicine.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true¡­ In that case, could you bring her here? I would like to show her the herbs.¡±


    ¡°The herbs¡­yes. That is something that she should know about. Very well, I shall call her.


    ¡°Actually, you can just tell me where she is, and I will go myself.¡±


    ¡°Oh, no. I could hardly allow you to trouble yourself. I will go, and you must wait here.¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well. Uh, but if she seems busy, she doesn¡¯t have toe.¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    Ms. Lyra stood up and bowed once before returning to the mansion.


    I suppose that as a maid, she didn¡¯t want me to go, but I wished that she wouldn¡¯t be so strict about it¡­


    And so now I had to sit and drink my tea alone.


    Well, I had been the one to bring it up.


    If I had gone, then it would be Ms. Lyra who was left alone.


    It could not be helped. And so I just watched Tilura and Liza, who looked like they were having fun.

 Chapter 334

    Chapter 334


    I Showed Milina The Herb Garden


    ¡°Master, I came¡­. But what are you doing?¡±


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Ms. Lyra. ¡­Uh, Leo and Tilura wanted me to y with them. And Liza was here too, and I couldn¡¯t resist¡­oomph!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Ahahaha!¡±


    ¡°So fast!¡±


    By the time that Ms. Lyra had returned with Milina, I was ying with Leo and Tilura.


    It was the first game we yed when I came here, where I would throw a tree branch and Leo would go and fetch it.


    Only this time, I didn¡¯t throw multiple branches in different directions, but just threw it straight.


    Liza was riding on her too, so I didn¡¯t want Leo to run too fast.


    ¡­Though, I was sure that Leo would be careful.


    Milina looked a little puzzled over this, so I answered her while throwing the branch.


    You really are used to doing this now, Leo.


    She quickly dashed forward and caught the branch in her mouth while it was still high up in the air.


    But she was also careful to not throw them off, much to Liza and Tilura¡¯s delight.


    It seemed that Liza was just as active as Tilura and loved being outdoors.


    ¡°Hah¡­ Well, as long as they are all having fun, it is a good thing. But why did you call me? Was it to y with them as well? Ah! Or do you haveints about the medicine I made!?¡±


    ¡°No, no. It¡¯s nothing like that, so calm down. Uhh¡­just wait one moment. Leo. Milina is here, so I¡¯m out for now. You can continue to y with Liza and Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Understood!¡±


    ¡°¡­Papa. Where are you going?¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Liza. I¡¯ll be close by. You can continue to y with Leo.¡±


    ¡°Oh, okay!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    Leo returned and I epted the stick that she was holding. And so I told her I had to go.


    Leo and Tilura nodded understandingly, but Liza looked anxious whenever she sensed that I was leaving.


    And so I reassured her, and then she replied energetically and grabbed on to Leo.


    Yes, she really had be attached to Leo¡­ Also, I think she liked the feel of her fur.


    For some reason, Sherry nodded her head and barked at the same time. Hey, I wasn¡¯t talking to you, okay?


    Well, at least she seemed to be enjoying herself.


    And so as Leo started running in the garden again, I turned to face Milina.


    I needed to show her the herb garden.


    Still¡­ Milina had initially thought I had a problem with the medicine¡­ Did I look like I was so strict?


    In any case, after sighing with relief about it, she then nced over to where the others were ying. She looked slightly jealous.


    Well, if there was still time after showing her the herbs, perhaps I should let her y with them¡­ It would be nice if she could be friendly with Liza.


    ¡°Now, Milina.¡±


    ¡°Yes, master!¡±


    ¡°There is something that I want to show you.¡±


    ¡°Show me? What is it?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Well, it¡¯s over here.¡±


    ¡°Ah, yes.¡±


    And so I told Milina to follow me as I walked over to the spot where the herbs were nted.


    As for Ms. Lyra, she continued to watch over Leo and the others.


    Once we arrived at the herb garden, I saw that there were two butlers there, who had likely been given orders by Sebastian.


    There was a table there, and they were writing what were probably records of the growth on sheets of paper.


    I greeted them and stopped in front of the nts.


    ¡°Huh? Master, this¡­ This is not normal grass, is it? Are they herbs?¡±


    ¡°Yes. They are herbs made with Weed Cultivation. We were testing to see if they would take root, and if we could breed them¡­ But we only started this morning¡­¡±


    ¡°This morning¡­ But they have increased so much!¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s just it¡­¡±


    As expected, Milina was very surprised when she saw the field of herbs.


    Also, in spite of the fact that it had barely been an hour since I was looking at them with Mr. Ekenhart and the others¡­they had grown visibly again.


    ¡°Excuse me, did you notice any change with them?¡±


    ¡°Yes. They have grown between the time that we started watching them and now. I have never seen nts grow at such a speed¡­ Quite astonishing.¡±


    ¡°I see. Thank you.¡±


    When I asked one of the butlers who was taking notes, he confirmed that they had continued to grow.


    While I was now sure that it was because of Weed Cultivation, the speed was still surprising.


    ¡°Master, they are still growing?¡±


    ¡°Yes. And in such a short time.¡±


    Before, they were still like small sprouts, so it was difficult to even tell what kind of herbs they were.


    But now, the leaves were all in clear shape and the type of herb was obvious enough.


    ¡°So they grew this much since this morning¡­ And it¡¯s all because of your ability?¡±


    ¡°I think so. There is no other real exnation.¡±


    ¡°Weed Cultivation really is amazing! I can hardly believe it!¡±


    ¡°Well, that is true. Trying different things and making new discoveries¡­I am constantly surprised.¡±


    Milina looked at me with admiration.


    As this ability was something given to me without my knowledge, I didn¡¯t think of myself as amazing, but I suppose she saw me and the Gift as something inseparable.


    In any case, there was much to discuss.


    Unlike when she was at the orphanage, Milina now had something that she wanted to be.


    And so as we watched the herbs, we talked about what to do from now on.

 Chapter 335

    Chapter 335


    Milina Was Very Excited


    ¡°Milina. This is still at the nning stage, and nothing has been decided yet, but¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, what is it?¡±


    ¡°The n is to grow and produce more herbs in Range vige. And so we¡¯re testing it here first. To see if they will take root properly and multiply.¡±


    ¡°I see. I do think that your herbs will help other people. It is a good n.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. And so if everything goes well, then I will have to go to Range vige.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true. After all, you are the one who has the ability. And it will not be easy for you to juste back and forth.¡±


    ¡°Yes, exactly.¡±


    And so I talked to Milina about what we were nning.


    We hadn¡¯t even made any contracts yet, but she knew about my ability and helped with concocting medicine and we shared our knowledge. So I wanted her to know.


    Besides, if I had to hire a lot of people, I might have to rely on someone like Milina, who I trusted¡­


    ¡°And so when I go to Range vige¡­well, I¡¯ll need to get Ms. ire¡¯s permission, but I was wondering if you would want toe with me.¡±


    ¡°Me!? ¡­Oh, well, it is true that it will be difficult for you to do everything by yourself¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s right.¡±


    When I started thinking about hiring people, the first person that came to mind was Milina.


    She was currently studying herbs and medicine, and also helped me with picking herbs.


    And I knew her well enough to trust her. While she had originallye from the orphanage in order to work as a servant, I had also taken her under my wing, in a way.


    She was only training to be a servant while she stayed in the mansion, and her actual goal was to learn about medicine. So there should be no problem with her apanying me.


    Still, I needed permission from the others first.


    ¡°¡­I understand. And I have decided to go with you, master. If you are going to start something new in a different ce, then it is my duty to go with you as your apprentice!¡±


    ¡°Well, actually¡­ You really don¡¯t have to be that serious about it. It would be perfectly fine if you stayed here and continued to work as a servant, if that¡¯s what you want¡­¡±


    ¡°NO! You have done so much for me, and I practically forced you to be my instructor. I would not think of leaving in order to work!¡±


    ¡°Uh, I see¡­¡±


    Had she forced me?


    In fact, I didn¡¯t really see her like an apprentice¡­even though she insisted on calling me master.


    It seemed toe from the fact that she respected me because of my ability.


    I wondered if I should tell her, but it would take too long to exin. So I could do that some other time.


    We would have plenty of time to talk in Range vige.


    ¡°Well¡­ Though it¡¯s still being nned, I guess that part is settled? Can I count on you?¡±


    ¡°Yes, you can!¡±


    ¡°Good.¡±


    Milina was enthusiastic and learned quickly.


    She knew quite a lot about medicine now, and was good at picking medicinal herbs.


    And she was also able to concote simple medicine. She would be a great help.


    ¡°Well then, in order to help you, I shall learn all I can as a servant!¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ What?¡±


    Milina dered this as she made a fist.


    Why a servant? I thought she was going to learn about herbs and medicine.


    ¡°Yes! When we go to Range vige, there will not be lots of servants like there are here! And so I shall do what I can!¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­is that so¡­¡±


    It was true that there would be no maids in Range vige.


    Though, I was apparently going to hire a butler.


    But for some reason, Milina was excited about filling in¡­ Though, I wished that she would direct that energy to her studies.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Don¡¯t worry about Milina. I shall make sure that she can work like a proper maid by the time you have to go to Range vige!¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Ms. Lyra!¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ I see¡­ But we still have to make more medicine, so don¡¯t spend too much time on that.¡±


    ¡°Of course. I will make sure that Milina does everything that she needs to first.¡±


    Ms. Lyra had been listening to the conversation, and dered her whole-hearted support.


    Milina was supposed to be here in order to learn about medicine¡­ Was this really fine?


    Well, if that¡¯s what she wanted to do so much, I would not stop her.


    I just hoped she wouldn¡¯t get too carried away in that direction.


    After I left Milina with Ms. Lyra, I returned to ying with Leo and Tilura until it was dinner time, and Ms. Gelda called us to go to the dining hall.


    Of course, I did not forget to wipe the dirt off of Leo¡¯s paws.


    As she had seen me do it before, Ms. Gelda had brought me a wet rag.


    I epted it gratefully and thanked her before cleaning Leo.


    Liza wanted to help as well, and so I had her wipe one of the paws, which turned out to be rather difficult for her.


    Apparently, she was not doing it hard enough, and it only tickled Leo, causing her to lift her paw away.


    Liza thought that Leo didn¡¯t like it, and so she apologized immediately. And so Leo pressed her face against her as if to exin, which was amusing.


    Leo is just ticklish, and wasn¡¯t upset. You can try again next time, Liza.


    When we entered the dining hall, Mr. Ekenhart, Ms. ire, Ms. Anne and Sebastian were already waiting there.


    I wondered if they had finished talking then?

 Chapter 336

    Chapter 336


    Liza did not recognize Mr. Ekenhart


    ¡°Hmm? No, we haven¡¯t finished. It¡¯s not as if we could decide on everything at once.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true. Selecting the people to hire, the size of thend¡­ A lot of it will have to be discussed with the chief of Range vige as well.¡±


    After sitting down at the table, I asked how their talks were going, and it turned out that they hadn¡¯t finished.


    It was no wonder.


    This wasn¡¯t something that could be decided in just a few hours.


    ¡°The chief¡­Mr. Hannes?¡±


    ¡°Yes. We have to talk about the wine and about thend that you will be using. And so I have sent a messenger.¡±


    ¡°Things can¡¯t move ahead until we talk¡­and so we sent a messenger on our fastest horse. We should receive a reply within a few days.¡±


    Apparently, they had sent a letter to Mr. Hannes that exined the situation.


    I wonder, would they want to make the wine?


    Mr. Hannes had seemed like he regret ignoring the children and being so focused on making wine.


    And considering where they would get the grapes from, they might not be enthusiastic about the idea.


    But then again, they might find it difficult to refuse, since it was Mr. Ekenhart who was suggesting it.


    While Mr. Ekenhart didn¡¯t use his position like that, it didn¡¯t mean that others found it easy to turn him down.


    Of course, both Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire understood this.


    When I do go to Range vigeter, I would have to exin everything to him, and perhaps even apologize.


    Also, once I start working near the vige, I will not be able to hide my Gift from himpletely.


    ¡°Hey, papa?¡±


    ¡°Hmm? What is it?¡±


    As we talked about Mr. Hannes and Range vige, Liza, who had been eating her food quietly, began to tug at my sleeve.


    Was there something that she was interested in?


    ¡°That person¡­ Who is he?¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    ¡°Hmm?¡±


    Liza was pointing at Mr. Ekenhart.


    But he was the person who had been with her, ever since we found her in Ractos¡­


    ¡°Uh, Liza? He was with me when I helped you?¡±


    ¡°Huh? But he isn¡¯t wrapped up? Though, he does smell simr¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ While she isn¡¯t scared of me because of my beard anymore, she doesn¡¯t even recognize my face either¡­¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­hehe¡­ Father, is that why you shaved it? You never cared about growing it out before. And so I was wondering why.¡±


    ¡°I haven¡¯t seen father like this in a long time.¡±


    ¡°Hehe¡­hehehe¡­¡±


    Apparently, Liza just saw Mr. Ekenhart as the man who had the cloth wrapped around his face.


    She had been scared when she saw his beard at the orphanage, and now that he was shaved, she thought he was a different person.


    Well, since he had been disguising himself so people wouldn¡¯t know who he was, I suppose it was a sess.


    Also, apparently Liza could differentiate people by smell¡­ I suppose it was something that beastkin could do.


    Even if her nose looked the same as humans, her sense of smell might be more highly developed.


    In any case, as everyone looked at Mr. Ekenhart andughed, Ms Anne alone seemed a little strange.


    She wasughing like some kind of viin¡­


    ¡°Liza. We were together the whole time?¡±


    ¡°Hehehe¡­¡±


    ¡°Liza, he is the old man that was with us the whole time. We traveled to this house together. Though, he just looks like that now¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, how rude. In fact, even at this age, I am quite popr with thedies, you know?¡±


    ¡°Father, I do hope you have no intention of bringing home a new mother?¡±


    ¡°N-no.¡±


    Indeed, Mr. Ekenhart was quite a handsome middle-aged gentleman.


    Though he had sharp eyes, through shaving his beard, he no longer looked like an intimidating bandit, and seemed like a proper nobleman.


    ording to Mr. Ekenhart, he did well with thedies, but Ms. ire did not want to hear about that.


    I had assumed he was joking at first, but¡­ Now I wondered if he had caused some trouble in the past?


    ¡°Hmm. His eyes do look simr to that man¡­and the smell. Oh, I see.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s right.¡±


    ¡°Yes, it is. Also, Liza, you should avoid smelling people like that. It might be considered rude.¡±


    ¡°Really?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Because some people might be self-conscious about the way they smell.¡±


    ¡°Okay. I¡¯ll be careful!¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Kyau?¡±


    Liza had gotten off of her chair and moved closer to Mr. Ekenhart so that she could see and smell him better.


    Mr. Ekenhart didn¡¯t look like he minded, but I had to warn her against doing this suddenly with other people.


    After all, he had let his hair and beard grow out so long before, so he didn¡¯t care about such things.


    As I watched Liza nod, much to my relief, I noticed that Ms. Anne and Ms. ire were fidgeting in the corner of my vision.


    I wondered what they were doing, and then realized that it was probably what Liza had said¡­


    They were now anxious about their own smell¡­


    But they had never smelled bad as far as I was aware, so there wasn¡¯t anything to worry about¡­ But it would be rude to say that as well, so I didn¡¯t.


    Leo and Sherry were watching Ms. ire and Ms. Anne with puzzled expressions.


    Well, they weren¡¯t exactly women¡­or the same species.


    Still, it made me realize that I hoped Liza would see follow Ms. ire¡¯s example instead of Leo¡¯s¡­

 Chapter 338

    Chapter 338


    We would drink the medicinal wine in doses


    ¡°Mmm¡­the taste can hardly be said to be good, but I do feel as if strength is welling up in my body.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s so delicious! Thank you!¡±


    After dinner was finished, and we had our desert, we drank the same medicinal wine that we had yesterday.


    Of course, Tilura, Liza, Leo and Sherry drank juice instead.


    Mr. Ekenhart drained half of his cup and scowled as he started to feel its effects.


    Liza smiled broadly and told Ms. Helena how happy she was.


    Ms. Helena smiled back nodded, even though her gaze was mostly on the wagging tail.


    Still, Mr. Ekenhart¡­ I¡¯m pretty sure you can¡¯t feel the effects so strongly this soon.


    Was this like the cebo effect?


    Well, it did make your body feel quite warm¡­but that was probably because of the alcohol.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, as we were given quite a lot of medicine today, we will not run out for a few days.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ In that case, could you make it so that we can drink it during the morning and afternoon as well?¡±


    ¡°You want to taste it multiple times during the day, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Yes. If it has turned into what I think it has, then it should be more effective that way. I think that it would be best to have it three times a day, either before or after meals. Of course, they will be in small doses.¡±


    ¡°Hmm. I see. Yes, it will be easier to feel the effects if we drink more¡­ Though, I think we must be careful to not drink too much as well.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Even though the overall amount will be increased, you will be drinking less at once. And given the time between, you will not be drunk.¡±


    The medicinal wine that I knew about was sold in stores.


    And you were usually supposed to drink small amounts three times a day.


    Obviously, you wouldn¡¯t do that if you had to drive. But there were no cars in this world, so it didn¡¯t actually matter.


    If you drink half a ss of wine three times a day, you may just get drunk. And we wouldn¡¯t that, when there were people like Ms. ire here.


    But with plenty of time in between and reduced amounts, the alcohol would be broken down, and no one would get drunk.


    Though, I suppose you would have to be careful, if you meant to drink other kinds of wine that day as well.


    ¡°In that case, about half of what you drank today¡­a quarter of a ss? Will that do?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I think that should be fine. Maybe even a little less. Uh, how long will the medicinest then?¡±


    ¡°About two to three days.¡±


    ¡°You are going to reduce it that much? I would like to drink a little more¡­in spite of the taste.¡±


    ¡°This is not to be enjoyed, it¡¯s for your health. But it¡¯s also possible to drink too much. We will continue to make adjustments to it tomorrow then.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ I see¡­¡±


    While I was talking to Ms. Helena about the quantity and concoction of the medicine, Mr. Ekenhart felt that it was not enough.


    But with things like these, drinking more didn¡¯t mean that you would be more healthy.


    ¡­Well, perhaps it might affect your magic energy¡­but it could still be dangerous.


    If you thought it wasn¡¯t enough, then it would be better to drink a different wine.


    While looking unsatisfied, Mr. Ekenhart nodded in agreement, while Ms. ire looked relieved.


    She was probably thinking of the possibility of getting drunk again and embarrassing herself. But that could just be avoided with some restraint.


    ¡°Are you going to mix the medicine again like we did today? I want to help too! It was fun!¡±


    ¡°Really? In that case, you may.¡±


    ¡°Yay!¡±


    When she heard us talking about the medicine, Liza raised her hand and volunteered to help.


    While it was something Milina and I were supposed to do, if she enjoyed doing it, then I had no reason to object.


    It was actually tiring work, but beastkin seemed to have more strength, unlike humans.


    ¡°Ms. Helena. While you might have to make more¡­I want to make it so that other people can taste test it as well.¡±


    ¡°It is easy enough to make, as we just have to mix it with the wine¡­ But, who are you going to give it to?¡±


    ¡°Uh, anyone who wants to try it¡­ Like Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Me?¡±


    ¡°Yes. You have a lot of knowledge, and should be able to give good advice.¡±


    ¡°Very well. If that is what you say, Mr. Takumi. I shall use what knowledge I have to assist you.¡±


    ¡°Haha. It¡¯s really nothing serious.¡±


    If Liza worked hard, then we would have more medicine to use.


    Obviously, I would also help, along with Milina.


    And then we would have more medicinal wine, so that more people could taste it.


    It was best to have more people who could help with analyzing it.


    Besides, Sebastian had a wealth of knowledge, and would be good at exining anything he felt after drinking it.


    After all, he just enjoyed exining things¡­


    ¡°Sebastian. You seem more enthusiastic now, then when I ask you to do something.¡±


    ¡°I suppose it¡¯s a matter of personal virtue. Father?¡±


    ¡°You are saying I have no virtue?¡±


    ¡°You do¡­ But then again, you went out to town without any guards or telling anyone. So perhaps that is why you are treated differently? Besides, Mr. Takumi knows how to amuse Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ When you put it like that¡­¡±


    Upon seeing Sebastian¡¯s exaggerated enthusiasm, Mr. Ekenhart seemed taken aback.


    While Mr. Ekenhart had his virtues, I agreed that Ms. ire had a point.


    Though, I was also to me when it came to his little excursion in town.

 Chapter 339

    Chapter 339


    Mr. Ekenhart Wanted To Drink


    After having Ms. ire remind him of how he had gone to town, Mr. Ekenhart looked like he wanted to argue, but seemed to think it over.


    As for what Ms. ire said about how I knew how to amuse Sebastian, was that just about making him exin things?


    Yes, he became more lively and was good at it. But my intentions were never about making him happy.


    Regardless, once everything was settled, we all went our separate ways.


    ¡°Well, that¡¯s enough for now.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    And so I left the dining hall and went off to do my daily sword training.


    Today, Mr. Ekenhart was not taken away by Ms. ire, and so he was able to join us.


    And so we all swung our swords while imagining that an enemy was in front of us.


    After continuing this for some time, Mr. Ekenhart caught his breath and signaled for us to stop.


    His movements were as impressive as ever.


    He was fast and precise. He knew how his enemy would move.


    And while I was getting used to this exercise as well, it would still be a long time before I could move like him.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. I have a request, if you don¡¯t mind.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? What is it? I hope you don¡¯t want to go to town again¡­¡±


    ¡°No, nothing like that. It¡¯s too soon, if you know what I mean. She would not talk to me for days if I did that again. No, what I wanted to ask¡­do you remember when you gave me the herbs to help with sleep?¡±


    ¡°Ah, yes. Do you want some tonight?¡±


    Previously, I had given Mr. Ekenhart some herbs that would help him sleep and take away any tiredness.


    He had gotten up the next morning feeling refreshed and in an excellent mood. And hade down to breakfast much earlier than usual.


    ¡°Mmm. It is not that I am so tired¡­ But I have a reason to get up early tomorrow.¡±


    ¡°An important matter? What might that be?¡±


    Was it rted to me making herbs in Range vige¡­?


    But if that was the case, I thought that it had to be discussed with Mr. Hannes first, and was not something that could be decided right away.


    ¡°Of course, there is an important matter. It¡¯s the medicinal wine you made.¡±


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right.¡±


    To be precise, Milina had helped me make the medicine, and Ms. Helena had mixed it with the wine.


    Though, it would not have been possible without my herbs, so I suppose what he said wasn¡¯tpletely wrong either.


    ¡°With the other wine¡­like we saw with ire, there is the possibility of drinking too much. And I shouldn¡¯t drink much right now anyway. So I thought that I¡¯d have the medicinal wine instead.¡±


    After the incident with the ros¨¦ wine, Ms. ire was trying to abstain from drinking, or so Sebastian had told me.


    I suppose she was afraid of doing the same thing again.


    I didn¡¯t think she needed to go that far, but it was best to drink with moderation.


    Well, perhaps I was just a little disappointed, as it was the first wine that I really thought was delicious¡­ But even if it wasn¡¯t served during meals, I suppose I could still drink someter?


    Even if I left the managing to others, I still owned the wine.


    ¡­But then again, now with Liza here, hiding and drinking wine would set a bad example. So I would not do that.


    ¡°I see. ¡­While it is not particrly delicious¡­it is true that it is something that should be drunk regrly. Very well¡­ Here you go.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Besides, I have started to think that the aftertaste is not that bad¡­¡±


    I picked up my bag and took the sleeping herbs out and gave them to him.


    Still¡­he was starting to like that taste?


    It was very distinct, and I doubted that I would ever acquire a taste for it¡­ But I suppose it depended on the person.


    Some people really liked the bitterness of beer. And some people liked things that tasted strange, once they got used to it.


    ¡°But, you shouldn¡¯t rely on these herbs too much, you know?¡±


    ¡°Is that so? Do they have some ill effects as well?¡±


    ¡°Not that I know of¡­ But I just think that it¡¯s best to be able to wake up by yourself.¡±


    ¡°¡­I will do my best.¡±


    ¡°Haha. I hope that you seed.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart chuckled and then went back into the mansion.


    Even if they were just herbs, they could cause problems if you took them too much.


    I wasn¡¯t confident in my ability to exin about side effects and addiction, but it wasn¡¯t necessary now.


    I would just hope that Mr. Ekenhart would be able to put in the effort.


    By the way, even though it was getting dark now, I saw that there were two butlers inspecting the herb garden.


    They were different from the ones who were there during the day.


    And so I thanked them before returning to the mansion.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. We have prepared a room for Liza. What will you do?¡±


    ¡°Thank you? But, uh, what do you mean?¡±


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s just that based on what I¡¯ve seen, I thought that Ms. Liza might not want to be separated from you¡­¡±


    After leaving Mr. Ekenhart and Tilura, I had returned to my room and was thinking about taking a bath, when Ms. Lyra came and told me about Liza¡¯s room.


    As it was a big mansion, they could easily prepare a room. However, Ms. Lyra had some doubts concerning it.

 Chapter 340

    Chapter 340


    We decided to not have separate rooms


    Liza would be anxious when Leo or I were not around. I suppose she thought that she was going to be left behind.


    Apparently, she had been abandoned in the slums shortly after being born, so even if she didn¡¯t remember the situation, it still stayed with her.


    Especially since the grandfather who had taken care of her had also died.


    I wanted to assure her that she would not be left alone, and that there was nothing to worry about¡­ But it might take some time.


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Liza?¡±


    ¡°What is it, papa?¡±


    Liza was sitting Leo¡¯s back and seemed quite happy as I called to her.


    In such situations, it was best to just ask the person.


    Apparently, she had not been listening to my conversation with Ms. Lyra, and so she smiled and looked at me questioningly.


    ¡°Well¡­ They had prepared a room just for you. What do you think?¡±


    ¡°For me? But what about you and mama?¡±


    ¡°This room is just for you. Leo and I will be sleeping in the other room.¡±


    ¡°¡­Just¡­me?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Upon hearing my exnation, Liza realized that it was a room for one person.


    She quickly looked at the floor and her expression darkened.


    Her ears and tail sagged and it was clear that she did not like the idea.


    As if tofort her, Leo tried to move her face towards Liza, but she could not reach her on her back.


    ¡°I see¡­ You won¡¯t really be alone, but¡­ Do you still not like it?¡±


    I moved towards her in Leo¡¯s ce and asked her.


    While I already knew the answer, it was best to still ask.


    ¡°¡­Yes. I want to be with mama and papa¡­¡±


    ¡°I see. Well then, you can sleep with us.¡±


    ¡°Really!?¡±


    ¡°Aye, really. We don¡¯t want you to feel sad.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Yay!¡±


    I didn¡¯t want to force her to be alone, if she didn¡¯t want to.


    As soon as I said this, Liza¡¯s face broke into a smile and she started wagging her tail again.


    I nodded, and Leo barked with approval.


    Did she hate the idea so much then¡­? I guess she just didn¡¯t want to be separated from us.


    ¡°¡­Well, that¡¯s how it is. I¡¯m sorry you had to go through the trouble.¡±


    ¡°No, not at all. I expected this to happen anyway. So, Ms. Liza will stay with you for now.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    Ms. Lyra had been watching our exchange with a smile. And so she shook her head when I apologized and agreed with the decision.


    ¡°Uh¡­that being said, when ites to baths¡­¡±


    ¡°That is right. Hehe. I heard from Gelda.¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed.¡±


    Yesterday, when I was washing Leo, Liza barged in.


    Considering how she was about the room, Liza might not want to bathe alone either.


    Ms. Lyraughed when I mentioned this. Apparently, Ms. Gelda had told her about it.


    I had not wanted her to tell people, but I suppose she talked to Ms. Lyra about everything.


    Besides, Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda helped me take care of Leo often.


    ¡°As for that, I could take care of Ms. Liza for you?¡±


    ¡°You, Ms. Lyra¡­ Indeed. Liza, Ms. Lyra is offering to bathe you instead of me and Leo. Is that alright?¡±


    Ms. Lyra had looked quite enthusiastic when making the suggestion too.


    Well, she did like to offer her help whenever she could.


    ¡°Not with you, papa?¡±


    ¡°Well, you are girl, Liza. So it is best for you to go with Ms. Lyra. Don¡¯t worry, you won¡¯t be alone.¡±


    ¡°¡­Oh, okay. Uhh¡­¡±


    ¡°Ms. Liza. You can call me Lyra.¡±


    I stressed the fact that she would not be alone and asked if she was alright with going with Ms. Lyra.


    That¡¯s what she was most worried about. Being alone.


    And so unlike with the room, she nodded in agreement.


    Then she turned to Ms. Lyra and seemed to be thinking about something.


    Ms. Lyra immediately introduced herself and bowed.


    Now that I thought about, Liza had never directly asked about Ms. Lyra¡¯s name.


    ¡°Ms. Lyra? Uh¡­thank you.¡±


    ¡°You can talk to me like you do with everyone else. Now, Ms. Liza, I will do my best to help you.¡±


    Ms. Lyra bowed, and then Liza got down from Leo.


    If anything, it was probably Liza who should bow her head and ask for help, but I guess Ms. Lyra saw things differently.


    She was one of those people that seemed restless when she wasn¡¯t busy around the house¡­


    Previously, a short while after we hade to the mansion, I had told her that we no longer needed someone to guide us around the house. And she had looked terribly disappointed.

 Chapter 341

    Chapter 341


    Ms. Lyra Gave Liza A Bath


    ¡°Alright, Liza. Leo and I will go ahead to our room, okay?¡±


    ¡°¡­But, could you stay with me until we get there, papa?¡±


    ¡°Hmm. Very well. Since it¡¯s your first time.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Hehe. I suppose she does not want to part from you two.¡±


    I had been about to take Leo back to the room, when Liza tugged at my sleeve and I stopped.


    Apparently, she was anxious about us leaving so soon.


    And so we decided to apany them to the bathing area.


    Ms. Lyra watched this and chuckled.


    ¡°Papa. I took a bath!¡±


    ¡°Yes, wee back. Thank you, Ms. Lyra.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. She was very well behaved, and so it was not difficult at all.¡±


    After leaving Liza and Ms. Lyra at the entrance of the bathing room, Leo and I had returned to the room to rest. And then a whileter, the doors burst open and Liza returned.


    She ran straight to Leo, throwing her arms around her and burying herself in the fur.


    I was sure to thank Ms. Lyra for bringing her back.


    ording to Ms. Lyra, Liza did not act rowdy and was very quiet.


    Perhaps she had taken a bath as well, as her hair looked a little damp as ran her fingers through it and smiled.


    The straight, long ck hair was different from Ms. ire, but reminded me of home for a brief moment.


    ¡°What is it, papa?¡±


    ¡°Nothing. Nothing at all.¡±


    ¡°Really?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Upon seeing me pause, Liza asked me what was wrong, but I assured her that it was nothing.


    I was not about to say such a thing to Ms. Lyra right now.


    ¡­Though, Leo seemed like she understood.


    ¡°Well! I suppose it¡¯s my turn now. Liza, you stay here with Leo.¡±


    ¡°Uh, okay.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    And so I got off of the bed and headed to the door.


    Liza and Leo nodded in reply.


    I suppose it would be fine if Leo didn¡¯t bathe today.


    ¡°Will you be needing any help, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Huh!? ¡­Uh, no. I can go alone!¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed? Very well.¡±


    When I was about to leave, Ms. Lyra called out to me.


    And I couldn¡¯t help but think about it for just a second.


    Of course, I could not do that¡­ I was a man, after all.


    Besides, I would feel very ufortable.


    A bathing room was a ce where you could rx. Thest thing I wanted was to feel nervous there.


    Ms. Lyra nodded with a slightly disappointed look.


    Had she wanted to help so much? Well, I pushed it out of my mind and rushed to the bathing room.


    Leo let out an audible sigh as I left, but I ignored her.


    Hmph¡­ Leo, next time I might just ask Ms. Lyra to wash you.


    Yes, very thoroughly, including your face¡­ Damn it.


    ¡°Phew¡­ That was refreshing¡­ Oh.¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    After washing up and soaking in the tub for some time, I returned to my room.


    But I stopped talking as I entered the room.


    Without moving, Leo turned her eyes towards me and murmured¡­as if to tell me to be quiet.


    ¡°Zzzz¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, she¡¯s sleeping?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    When returning to the room, Liza had thrown her arms around Leo and buried her face in the fur. Apparently, she had then fallen asleep like that.


    Her hair and tail had looked damp earlier, but it was dry now. And since Leo was quite warm, there was likely little chance that she would catch a cold.


    Leo and I whispered to each other as we watched her.


    While Leo often had sharp eyes, she looked incredibly gentle when looking at Liza.


    ¡°Still, I don¡¯t know if she should sleep like this¡­ But then again, I feel bad about waking her up.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    While she lookedfortable there, it would be better for her to sleep on the bed.


    Even if there were no health problems, if this became a habit, then she might not be able to sleep without Leo.


    But Leo looked puzzled as I mused over this.


    ¡°Well, she might start seeing you as a pillow. It¡¯s better to sleep properly on a bed.¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    When I exined this, Leo agreed a little begrudgingly.


    It was fine once in a while¡­ Every now and then, Leo would also sleep with half of her body on the bed, and I would use her as a pillow.


    However, she was still getting used to the mansion and her surroundings, so it was different.


    What to do¡­ Well, it was fine for just this day. Maybe I will talk to her about it tomorrow.


    ¡°¡­Mmm¡­papa?¡±


    Just as I had made the decision to leave her there, Liza opened her eyes slightly.


    Apparently, she must have sensed that Leo and I were looking at her.


    Perhaps beastkin were more sensitive to such things, just like Leo was.


    She had also woken up this morning when Tilura and I were looking at her.


    Even if she wasfortable with Leo, she was still not familiar with this ce. So perhaps she was more cautious than even she realized.

 Chapter 337

    Chapter 337


    It was best to not get involved in delicate conversations


    ¡°Well, the food is here. Let¡¯s eat.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    As we were talking, the food was served, and so Mr. Ekenhart said that we should eat.


    Ms. ire and Ms. Anne seemed to eat at a slower pace than usual. Perhaps they were still thinking about the smell.


    It was as if they were being extra careful to not get any of the sauce on their clothes¡­


    Well, it would not be nice to hear Liza say that you smelled strange.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ ire. I was just wondering¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, what is it, father?¡±


    Halfway in the meal, Mr. Ekenhart seemed like he suddenly remembered something as he addressed his daughter.


    Ms. ire stopped eating and turned to him questioningly.


    ¡°It might just be me, but I feel as if you have been eating less¡­ For some time¡­¡±


    As Ms. ire was eating slowly, it may look as if she had little appetite. But ording to Mr. Ekenhart, she had been eating less for a while.


    But she still ate more than Tilura. Though, when Leo and Mr. Ekenhart were nearby, it looked like a small amount inparison.


    As far as I could see, she seemed to be eating a simr amount as me.


    And I had what was probably an average appetite for a grown man¡­ Not that I reallypared myself to others.


    In any case, it seemed to me that she was eating enough.


    But perhaps she used to eat much more. I could not say for sure that Mr. Ekenhart was wrong.


    ¡°Father, what are you talking about? My portions have been the same as always?¡±


    ¡°Re-really? But no¡­surely you used to eat much more¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes, sister used to eat more. I think she started to eat less¡­shortly after Mr. Takumi and Leo arrived?¡±


    ¡°Tilura!¡±


    ¡°Ah, so it is true. Hmm¡­ When Mr. Takumi arrived. Indeed¡­¡±


    While Ms. ire tried to insist that her father had made a mistake, Tilura¡¯s testimony exposed her, and the truth was uncovered.


    As Ms. ire began to panic, Mr. Ekenhart nodded with satisfaction.


    But why would her portions be rted to our arrival to the mansion?


    ¡°So it¡¯s my fault? Have I¡­uh, done something wrong?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, that is not it at all. You really do not need to worry.¡±


    ¡°Uh, are you sure¡­?¡±


    Perhaps it was something they didn¡¯t want me to know about then¡­


    Well, it would be quite rude to pry into the dietary habits of a noblewoman. So I would leave it at that.


    It did not seem terribly important. And as they say, curiosity killed the cat.


    ¡°So you¡¯ve been getting fat, Ms. ire.¡±


    ¡°Anne! What are you talking about!? That is not true at all! ¡­Well, Helena¡¯s food is so good that I sometimes eat more than I should¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmph¡­ Well, I suppose it just went to your chest.¡±


    After having the good sense to stay silent, I had thought that the conversation had ended. But then Ms. Anne intruded.


    And while Ms. ire was quick to correct her, she also admitted to asional overeating. Well, that was something I could rte to, since it was Ms. Helena¡¯s cooking.


    And to top it off, they often served very sweet desserts. I would have likely put on some weight myself, if I didn¡¯t exercise right after.


    ¡°Anne! Where are you looking!¡±


    ¡°Well, not noticing would be rather difficult. ¡­Damn it.¡±


    ¡°You¡­ You never seemed to care before?¡±


    ¡°Indeed so¡­ Only recently, I¡¯ve realized that there is one thing I can¡¯t use to attract a gentleman.¡±


    ¡°Anne¡­ Surely you do not actually think like that?¡±


    ¡°You can say that, from your lofty position. You do not understand me.¡±


    ¡°Well¡­that ispletely true.¡±


    Ms. Anne was looking at Ms. ire jealously.


    Indeed, Ms. Anne was altogether much more slender.


    In my old world, she could have been a fashion model, perhaps.


    So¡­Ms. ire was the type where her weight went to her¡­oh, I should not think any farther than that. It would be rude.


    Besides, Ms. Lyra was even more¡­ No, that¡¯s enough.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Well, I suppose everyone has their own way of thinking¡­¡±


    While Tilura, Mr. Ekenhart and I werepletely ignored, Ms. ire and Ms. Anne continued their heated conversation.


    Though, it was not the most appropriate dinner conversation¡­


    And then Mr. Ekenhart muttered something as if to bring it to a close, which was best for everyone.


    Regardless, Ms. ire was probably eating a little less now, because she felt that eating too much was ill-mannered.


    As for me, I didn¡¯t think about my weight very much. And thanks to all of my training, I wouldn¡¯t have to start thinking about it any time soon.


    But I suppose it was more of a sensitive topic for her.


    Perhaps I could make some herbs that would help you lose weight¡­ But then I remembered that I did not want to get involved in the subject.


    And a herb that would fulfill Ms. Anne¡¯s wish would be even more dangerous. Yes, out of the question.


    Leo and Sherry were looking at Ms. ire with puzzled expressions. As if they could notprehend why someone would be modest when it came to food.


    They didn¡¯t understand, but because they never cared about gaining weight like some humans do.

 Chapter 342

    Chapter 342


    Liza Woke Up


    ¡°Sorry, did we wake you?¡±


    ¡°¡­Mmm¡­no. Sorry for sleeping first. I was going to wait for you toe back¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha, it¡¯s fine. After all, you¡¯re still not used to everything. It¡¯s no wonder that you¡¯re tired. Besides, you even helped with the medicine.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I did my best. Papa¡­did it turn out well?¡±


    ¡°Of course. You were a great help.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Lisa must have seen us when her eyes were half open.


    And so she rubbed her eyes and sat up, even though she still looked sleepy.


    While I didn¡¯t want her to stay up if she was tired, it was nice to have someone waiting for you.


    Was this what it was like to be a father¡­?


    Apparently, aside from her interest in the medicine, Liza had also wanted to make herself useful.


    Leo nodded with a gentle expression.


    ¡°Well, you must still be tired. Why not go to sleep in the bed?¡±


    ¡°¡­No. I want to talk to papa and mama a little longer.¡±


    ¡°You aren¡¯t sleepy?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m fine after sleeping a little.¡±


    ¡°I see. Well, why don¡¯t you get on the bed then? That way, you can sleep any time while you talk.¡±


    ¡°Okay.¡±


    She nodded and then moved away from Leo to sit on the bed.


    It really did seem like she didn¡¯t want to sleep yet.


    Perhaps she saw being asleep as being away from me and Leo.


    I wonder if it was rted to losing her grandfather¡­


    She might also have bad dreams¡­ Or maybe I am overthinking it.


    I suppose that unless Leo and I appeared in her dreams, it would be like we were separated.


    That was a childish way of thinking.


    ¡°So, what do you want to talk about?¡±


    ¡°Anything is fine. I just want to talk with you and mama.¡±


    ¡°Really? In that case¡­¡±


    If talking with us was that fun, then I would humor her, even if it meant less sleep.


    Of course, I¡¯m sure Leo wouldn¡¯t let it go for too long.


    Regardless, this was a good opportunity to discuss certain things.


    Like what Ms. ire had asked me about.


    ¡°Uhh¡­ Do you know about the beastkin rules, Liza?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ I don¡¯t!¡±


    Apparently, she did not know about the beastkin rules that Sebastian and Ms. ire had talked about.


    She had been abandoned in the slums shortly after being born, so I guess there was no one to teach her.


    Even if the grandfather who raised her wasn¡¯t prejudiced, he probably didn¡¯t know enough about them.


    ¡°I see. To put it simply, there are rules that beastkin are supposed to follow. And they get mad if you break them. Though, this isn¡¯t the beastkin country, so I suppose it doesn¡¯t matter.¡±


    ¡°I see. What makes them angry?¡±


    ¡°Well¡­ Like following people that you don¡¯t know well.¡±


    ¡°Grandfather told me that. Strangers will try to hurt me. So I should stay away.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s right. You never know what people are like, so it can be dangerous.¡±


    Though, now that I thought about it, Mr. Ekenhart had appeared suddenly and helped her. And then we took her to the orphanage.


    In a way, she had gone with us, in spite of us being strangers.


    ¡°Uh¡­ I guess you sort of did that when you followed us¡­ Perhaps it was too sudden.¡±


    ¡°I was surprised that anyone who isn¡¯t grandfather would help me¡­ But I know that you and mama are kind!¡±


    ¡°I see. Well, good then.¡±


    While Liza had been scared of Leo at first, that was because of her appearance. And it was right after she was attacked, so it could not be helped.


    Still, Liza seemed to have sharp senses or some kind of beastkin ability. And she felt that Leo and I were good people.


    Regardless, what was the point of these rules anyway?


    It seemed like she was perfectly capable of observing her surroundings and making decisions¡­


    Well, maybe Liza was just special, and other beastkin were different.


    Perhaps being raised in the slums had made her more cautious of her surroundings.


    In any case, there wasn¡¯t much I could say, as I didn¡¯t know the beastkin very well.


    ¡°Also¡­ How do you feel about people touching your ears or tail?¡±


    ¡°Hmm. If it¡¯s you and mama. But I don¡¯t like it when there are lots of people doing it¡­ Some people pull really hard.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°I see. Now, calm down Leo. I¡¯m sure you understand what that¡¯s like.¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    I suppose it reminded her of the times she was bullied.


    After all¡­the ears and tail was what stuck out the most, and outed you as a beastkin.


    Upon hearing Liza say this, Leo had stood up as if angry, and so I had to tell her to calm down.


    It looked like she was ready to charge into the slums in order to find the culprit¡­ That would cause chaos in the city.


    I was upset too, but not as much as Leo.


    I suppose I had expected as much.


    Leo did not look satisfied, but sat back down anyway.


    ¡°There, there. So I suppose you don¡¯t care to have your ears or tail touched?¡±


    I asked while I stretched out a hand to Leo and petted her gently.


    If that was the case, I would have to tell Ms. ire. And everyone would be more careful when interacting with her.

 Chapter 343

    Chapter 343


    How to pet the ears and tail


    ¡°No, not always. Uhh¡­ How do you say it¡­ It tickles¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that. Mama is right. It¡¯s sensitive.¡±


    ¡°I see. So it hurts when people tug on it or it can also tickle¡­?¡±


    Liza was muttering something as she tried to find the words.


    As if to help her, Leo barked a few times, and Liza nodded in agreement.


    Perhaps it was like paws?


    And then I realized it.


    Liza had been able to understand Leo without me interpreting for her.


    ¡°Liza. Are you¡­able to understand Leo?¡±


    ¡°Uh, yes. I can. The same as you, papa.¡±


    ¡°Well, that¡¯s true, but¡­ Hmm¡­¡±


    I suppose this was another feature of being a beastkin.


    As I had spent so much time with Leo, I could understand her gestures and tone.


    As for Ms. ire and the others, it seemed like they were getting better at understanding her as well. But it still wasn¡¯t clear.


    But Liza seemed like she understood Leo¡¯s words clearly.


    Was it that her ears were special? Or was there some other reason. I did not know.


    ¡°That¡¯s why you chose Leo¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. Mama talks to me, and she is kind and funny!¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff¡­¡±


    After being saved, Liza had been scared at first, but became close with Leo soon after.


    I thought that she recovered quickly because she was young¡­ But apparently, it had more to do with being able to talk to each other.


    Still, Leo being funny¡­ What had Leo said to her then? I hadn¡¯t heard, as I was busy talking with Mr. Ekenhart.


    However, Leo seemed a little offended at being called funny.


    Perhaps she was just desperate, because Liza was afraid of her¡­ Even I had been amused seeing her like that.


    In any case, I would tell the others about this tomorrow.


    I didn¡¯t know how much they knew about beastkin, but I doubted that they knew about this.


    ¡°In any case¡­ How do you feel about other people touching your ears or tail?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ I don¡¯t mind, because the people here won¡¯t be rough¡­ Yes, I don¡¯t mind!¡±


    ¡°Well, you really don¡¯t have too¡­¡±


    It was clear that she was observant of her surroundings.


    I didn¡¯t know if it was because she was raised in the slums or because she was a beastkin, but she understood that the people here meant her no harm.


    That being said, I didn¡¯t want Liza to do anything unless she wanted to.


    ¡°Let¡¯s see¡­ How about if I touch your ears, and you can tell me if it tickles?¡±


    ¡°Okay, that¡¯s fine. Uh¡­go ahead.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Well then¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    In order to figure out how to do it in a way that would not annoy her, I decided to test it.


    Liza nodded and lowered her head with a smile.


    And so I stretched out my towards her ear, and then Leo barked.


    ¡°Leo. Are you telling me how to do it?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Apparently, Leo was going to teach me how to do it properly.


    Well, Leo had simr ears and tail, so it made sense.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wou.¡±


    ¡°Uhh. Gently and then like a pat on the head¡­¡±


    And so I followed Leo and used my right hand to gently pat her on the head with my palm.


    Obviously, this meant touching the ears, as they protruded from her head.


    ¡°Ah. It¡¯s slightly different from Leo¡¯s fur.¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°Haha. Yes, I¡¯ll pat you on the headter, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff!? Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Huh!?¡±


    ¡°Ahaha! That tickles, papa!¡±


    ¡°Oh, sorry, sorry.¡±


    Liza¡¯s ears were brown and fluffy.


    Leo looked slightly jealous all of a sudden, and so I had to reassure her.


    I chuckled at this, but it interfered with my concentration, and Leo barked in order to warn me.


    While Liza wasughing, it had apparently tickled, and she puffed out her cheeks in annoyance.


    I apologized, realizing that I had patted the part inside the ears.


    Human ears were also quite sensitive, so I understood the feeling. And perhaps beastkin were even more sensitive.


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°I know, I¡¯ll be careful. Now, for the base of the ears¡­¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­¡±


    After Leo barked at me again, she told me to pat near the base of the ears as if it was a massage.


    And when I did, Liza let out a sigh.


    Hmm. As her ears were always moving, perhaps they became sore, just like shoulders.


    Hmm¡­ I had thought that Liza was like a fox, judging the look of her ears or tail¡­but maybe she was more like a cat?


    Well, I had no idea about such things.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Alright. Now for the tail.¡±


    As she was used to having her ears touched, I then reached for the tail.


    Liza¡¯s tail was big and fluffy, just like a fox¡¯s.


    In fact¡­it was probably big enough for Sherry to hide in.

 Chapter 344

    Chapter 344


    Petting the tail


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Hmm. Gently pet along the fur or like you are brushing it.¡±


    ¡°Ahaha! That tickles!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Like this? Okay.¡±


    And so I slowly brushed my hand outwards along the tail.


    However, it might have been too light, as Liza startedughing.


    Now that I think about it, when brushing Leo¡¯s fur, she seemed to prefer it if you did it a little strongly.


    But then again, it would hurt if you tugged too hard as well¡­ However, my experience with Leo helped me understand.


    I was careful to not go too down low as I petted and brushed the tail.


    While there were no bones inside, it could still be stiff, like a person¡¯s shoulders.


    I suppose it was because it moved so much with her emotions.


    Maybe I could as Ms. Lyra or something to give her tail massagester.


    ¡°Hmm¡­zzz¡­¡±


    In the meantime, Liza seemed to have fallen asleep.


    Well, she had been sleeping just a moment ago, and it was gettingte¡­so it was no surprise.


    Perhaps she was just pretending that she wasn¡¯t that tired, because of Leo and me.


    ¡°Well, she looksfortable, at least. I guess we should go to sleep too.¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    I whispered to Leo as I put a nket over Liza.


    Just like yesterday, Leo curled up at the corner of the bed, so that Liza would not fall off.


    I too went into the other side of the bed and fell asleep.


    I wonder if Liza would have moved to where Leo is again tomorrow? I wondered as my consciousness faded.


    ¡ª


    ¡°¡­Grandfather¡­zzz¡­


    ¡°There, there. Don¡¯t worry. You¡¯re not alone.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    The following morning, I woke to feel that there was something heavy on my arm. Apparently, it was Liza, who had grabbed onto my right arm while I was sleeping.


    That was fine in itself, but while she was supposed to be asleep, it looked like tears wereing out of her eyes.


    I was surprised at first, but then I realized that she was having a dream about her grandfather.


    Perhaps she was dreaming about their separation¡­the moment that he had died.


    I raised my head and saw that Leo was looking at me. And then I turned my eyes back to Liza.


    And then I gently wiped away the tears with my left hand and patted her on the head in order tofort her.


    Leo also barked in a worried voice.


    During the day, Leo and I were around, and she had yed with Tilura and Sherry, and seemed happy¡­ But I suppose she pretended to be braver than she was.


    After all, she had been abandoned in the slums, and then lost her grandfather, and then was picked on.


    I would have to assure her that from now on, she would not be lonely, and that there would be plenty of fun things in her life.


    ¡°Mmm¡­Huh? Papa?¡±


    ¡°Did you wake up?¡±¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ Hahhh¡­¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. Well, you slept a littlete, so you¡¯re probably tired. Why don¡¯t you sleep a little longer?¡±


    ¡°No, no. I¡¯ll get up. I¡¯ll be with you and maama today!¡±


    ¡°I see. Well, let¡¯s get up then.¡±


    After deciding to do my best to ensure that she would not feel sad, Liza woke up.


    She rubbed at her eyes, and yawned loudly.


    It seemed like she was still sleepy, but wanted to get up anyway.


    And so she let go of my arm and jumped down from the bed.


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Aha! I¡¯m fine, mama!


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Leo immediately moved her face towards her and licked Liza¡¯s face.


    Liza replied cheerfully and Leo looked relieved.


    I suppose Leo was worried, but also wanted to wipe away the tears as well.


    ¡­Hmm. Liza should probably wash her face before breakfast.


    Even if there were no tears, her face would now be sticky.


    Not that Leo was particrly dirty, but it would be good for her to learn to wash her face in the morning as a habit.


    Back in Japan, Leo had sometimes woke me up in the morning by licking my face¡­


    Though, it wasn¡¯t because of any concern she had for me. She just wanted me to feed her.

 Chapter 345

    Chapter 345


    Changes in the Herb Field


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Ahaha. You¡¯re licking too much, mama.¡±


    ¡°Yes, not too much, Leo. ¡­Liza, you¡¯re going to have to wash your face thoroughlyter.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Leo¡­ Are you awake?¡±


    ¡°Tilura? Yes, you cane in.¡±


    ¡°Okay! Good morning!¡±


    Leo must have been very happy that Liza was fine, as she continued to lick her face.


    While Liza wasughing, she would have to wash it offter¡­


    As I was watching them, I heard Tilura¡¯s voiceing from outside.


    I suppose she didn¡¯t knock, because she could hear Lizaughing, and knew that we were already awake.


    And so I invited Tilrua into the room.


    She was always so energetic in the morning, which I suppose was normal for someone her age.


    Even Liza, who had looked sleepy a moment ago, was wide awake and cheerful now.


    ¡°Good morning, Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Sister Tilura! Good morning!¡±


    ¡°Liza! ¡­Your face!¡±


    ¡°Ahaha. Because Leo licked her. Tilura, can you help Liza wash up?¡±


    ¡°Very well. Let¡¯s go, Liza!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Youe too, mama.¡±


    Tilura entered the room immediately and noticed that Liza¡¯s face was wet.


    And so I watched the three leave, and started my own preparations for the morning.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi! Are you awake!?¡±


    ¡°Ah! Ye-yes¡­ Ouch¡­¡±


    While I was shaving, I suddenly heard a frantic voiceing from behind the door.


    It was not a very familiar voice, and while I answered, I realized that I had cut myself while shaving.


    Blood was dripping¡­ Well, that was a failure.


    ¡°Excuse me. ¡­I am really sorry to disturb you in the morning.¡±


    ¡°¡­But what is it? It sounds urgent?¡±


    It was one of the butlers I had seen in the mansion a few times.


    Usually, it was Sebastian who came to talk to me. I wonder what it could be?


    ¡°Y-yes. It is true. Mr. Takumi, it¡¯s about the herbs in the garden¡­ They have died.¡±


    ¡°What? Died¡­?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I know this might sound like an excuse¡­but it was very dark during the night, and we could not see well. And when we went to look in the morning, they had wilted.¡±


    Apparently, it was one of the butlers who had been watching the herbs.


    Obviously, they could not see well during the night, and had no idea that they had wilted.


    As light was needed for photosynthesis, I thought it might affect them, and so I had told them to avoid using magic light.


    I wanted to see what would happen under natural circumstances.


    In any case, the butler was now apologizing about my herbs dying.


    While it wasn¡¯t the oue I had expected, it wasn¡¯t a problem in itself.


    We were still conducting research, and I could easily make more with Weed Cultivation.


    Still, the fact that they grew so quickly, multiplied and now died¡­ It must all be rted to Weed Cultivation somehow.


    ¡°Uhh, please calm down. As they were made under special circumstances, it is not strange for them to die. It¡¯s not your fault, so don¡¯t worry.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­I¡¯m very sorry.¡±


    ¡°So, did all of them wilt?¡±


    ¡°No. Only the ones that grew big yesterday. The sprouts remained and continue to grow.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    First, I tried to calm down the apologizing butler and make him tell me the situation with the herbs.


    ording to him, it was only the first herbs that died. And the new ones were fine.


    Did the new sprouts take all of the nutrients?


    No, if that was the case, then the others should have died off too.


    What could this mean¡­?


    ¡°In any case, I will go and have a look.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°¡­What happened?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°What is it, papa?¡±


    Just as I was about to leave the room with the butler, Liza and the others returned.


    I had been in such a rush that I was going to leave without saying anything.


    ¡­I had even forgotten about the pain of cutting my jaw.


    In any case, I told the others about what had happened, and we all headed to the garden.


    Leo alone seemed to be quite hungry, and so she was a little disappointed¡­ Don¡¯t worry, I just have to take a short look, and then you can go eat.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Sebastian. So you were already here.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I was just informed a moment ago, and came right away.¡±


    When we went out into the garden, I saw that Sebastian was waiting for us.


    As there had been another butler as well, he must have gone to call Sebastian.

 Chapter 346

    Chapter 346


    The Herbs Made With Weed Cultivation


    ¡°Indeed¡­they have died.¡±


    ¡°I regret that we couldn¡¯t manage them better, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°No, you don¡¯t have to apologize, Sebastian. These were not made by any ordinary method, after all. It¡¯s to be expected.¡±


    As we looked at the herbs, I saw that the ones that had grownrge were nowpletely brown. They were wilted and lying limply on the ground.


    But around them, the new sprouts were still growing. In fact, they seemed like they were ready to be picked.


    Upon seeing this, Sebastian and the butlers apologized once again.


    However, I didn¡¯t feel that they were to me.


    ¡°Well, I can easily make more. So please don¡¯t worry about it.¡±


    ¡°Of course. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°In any case, as for the reason¡­ I wonder what happened?¡±


    ¡°¡­ording to the butlers who were observing them, nothing. Even if it was quite dark, surely they would have noticed if there was a dramatic change.¡±


    ¡°Indeed.¡±


    Only the color must have changed as they wilted, so they would not have been able to see it.


    If there was another reason, like a wild animal, then they would have noticed it.


    So that was not the case¡­ Besides, the guards would have noticed if there was a wild animal or monster so close to the mansion.


    ¡°Then what reason could there be¡­¡±


    ¡°I do not know¡­ Still, it is curious that the new sprouts continued to be healthy. Only the first ones you made died¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ Surely if the new ones took all of the nutrients, then some of the other herbs would have died as well. But only the ones that I made myself were affected.¡±


    ¡°It seems that way. So it has to do with Weed Cultivation then?¡±


    ¡°I cannot say for sure, but there seems to be no other exnation.¡±


    I talked with Sebastian as we looked at the herbs.


    Leo, Tilura, and Liza did not seem very interested, and they began to y a short distance away.


    Well, that was fine.


    ¡°Maybe¡­it could be that¡­¡±


    ¡°Have you thought of something?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m not certain. But I have a theory¡­ As they grew so quickly with Weed Cultivation, your herbs lived out their lives¡­¡±


    ¡°Grew so quickly¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. After all, everything has a lifespan. Your herbs grow quickly, so that they can be harvested immediately. But if they are not picked, they might continue to grow until they die¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, that does seem likely enough.¡±


    With nts, they might die after their flowers have bloomed or after bearing fruit.


    Some trees live for hundreds of years, but still, they would get old and sick and die eventually.


    So even if the speed of growth had slowed down a little, if they continued to age through the night¡­then it would make sense that they would be dead in the morning.


    They were already fully grown yesterday, and were in the perfect condition to be picked.


    That being said, it was still possible that there were other problems. Like the soil or environment. So I couldn¡¯t be sure yet.


    Though, since both the herbs that had been watered and the herbs that hadn¡¯t were the same now, Sebastian was probably on the right track.


    ¡°And what about the new herbs then¡­?¡±


    ¡°There is no mistake that they grew quickly, so they might also die quickly. However, since they didn¡¯t grow quite as fast as your herbs, they mightst a little longer as well.¡±


    ¡°I see. In that case, we should continue to watch these.¡±


    ¡°Even if they will wilt?¡±


    ¡°Yes. After all, this is just a test to see if it¡¯s possible to grow them normally. By seeing this process, I should be able to learn something that will help with raising herbs.¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed. As it is the first time, it would be best to observe the whole cycle.¡±


    ¡°Exactly. And so the next time you call me, calm down a little, alright?¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course.¡±


    I wanted to know how long these new herbs wouldst.


    Besides, they might also multiply again.


    After talking about it with Sebastian, it was decided that we would leave them like this for now.


    I also didn¡¯t forget to add a few words to the butler who had called me.


    ¡­The pain in my jaw reminded me that I had cut myself.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­ I heard that the herbs have wilted?¡±


    ¡°Yes, they have. Uh¡­¡±


    I had left the herbs to the butlers and returned to the mansion with Sebastian.


    And as we were on our way to the dining hall, we bumped into Ms. ire.


    Apparently, she had heard the news, and was on her way to the garden.


    And so I told about what had happened as we headed to the dining hall together.


    Ms. ire was quite relieved to see that I was not distressed over the matter.


    Perhaps it was because I had made them, and they had gone to waste.


    While that was unfortunate, it didn¡¯t really matter.


    I could easily make some more, and I was prepared for an oue like this anyway.


    I wished the butlers wouldn¡¯t apologize so much, and that everyone would worry about it less.

 Chapter 347

    Chapter 347


    Mr. Ekenhart was left alone


    ¡°ire¡­ So you were with Mr. Takumi. Did you all wake upte?¡±


    ¡°¡­Father?¡±


    ¡°The master¡­is already up?¡±


    ¡°Ah, good morning, Mr. Ekenhart.¡±


    When we entered the dining hall, Mr. Ekenhart was sitting there by himself and looking rather lonely.


    However, he looked rather smug upon seeing us¡­ I suppose he thought that we had all woken upte this morning.


    Mr. Ekenhart was likely down here this early, because he had been able to sleep well after eating the herbs. But Ms. ire and Sebastian did not know about it, so they were surprised.


    Though, I didn¡¯t think they needed to be that surprised¡­ But I suppose it was because of how he was for so long.


    ¡°So, what happened?¡±


    ¡°Your Grace, I didn¡¯t inform you because I thought you were still sleeping. The truth is¡­¡±


    And so I left the exining to Sebastian, and we all took our usual seats at the table.


    ¡°Hmm. So it was just the herbs that Mr. Takumi made¡­ And not that you were all sleeping.¡±


    Once he knew this, Mr. Ekenhart could no longer look very smug.


    Besides, even if I would, I didn¡¯t know why he would think that Ms. ire would sleepte.


    That was one thing they didn¡¯t share, in spite of being family.


    ¡°By the way, what happened to Ms. Anne?¡±


    ¡°Apparently, Lady Anneliese was uptest night, and so she is still sleeping.¡±


    As I wondered about Ms. Anne, one of the maids told me.


    It was one of the maids that had been assigned to her, so that was why she knew about it.


    ¡°Upte¡­¡±


    ¡°Anne¡­ I hope she wasn¡¯t thinking about anything strange¡­¡±


    Both Ms. ire and I had been wondering about the same thing.


    As she had a history of thinking about terrible things, the idea of her staying upte filled us with some unease.


    Well, she was not with the count anymore, and there was no one here for her tomand. So I doubted she could do any harm to anyone¡­


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, can you please take a look at this?¡±


    ¡°This?¡±


    After eating breakfast, I tasted some of the medicinal wine and waited. And then Sebastian handed me some documents.


    ¡°This is a list of personnel you can hire when you go to Range vige. While they will be inspected by the duke and Lady ire, I thought you should have a look through them as well.¡±


    ¡°I doubt I can be of much use¡­.¡±


    ¡°Still. If there is anyone who you are interested in, they will be given priority. Well, this is just some suggestions, so you must let me know if there is someone else you want to hire. Of course, we are also still searching.¡±


    In other words, even if they would strictly inspect anyone who is hired, they still wanted me to look through the list.


    After all, I was the one who was going to hire them.


    ¡°Very well. I shall give it a look then.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    ¡°And do not worry if there is no one who interests you. We n to continue searching, after all.¡±


    I took the list from Sebastian and promised to look through it.


    Mr. Ekenhart said that I could just look through it casually, but I felt differently about it.


    As the person who would be their employer, it was rather important.


    ¡°Hmm¡­hmm¡­ Sebastian. What¡¯s this about being tight lipped or being prone to spread rumors?¡±


    I looked through the list while drinking tea.


    While I nned to look through it more thoroughly in my room, I wanted to scan through it first.


    The list contained names, gender, age, and job history. This was not enough information to get a good grasp on them, but it did give me an idea.


    However, there were also short descriptions there, so I asked Sebastian about them.


    ¡°They are notes concerning their ability to keep secrets. Whether or not they are likely to leak information¡­ Such things are considered important for nobles who are hiring. And you have the Gift, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Indeed.¡±


    Nobles likely had plenty of secrets that they didn¡¯t want to be leaked.


    Even smallpanies in Japan had them, so it was no surprise, given that nobles might own several territories.


    In some cases, this might be considered more important than their actual ability.


    While my Weed Cultivation wasn¡¯t aplete secret, it was still better for it to be unknown to the outside.


    After all, it was possible that I could be targeted¡­ I was learning to use a sword and magic for self defense, but it would be better to not be targeted at all.


    I nodded at Sebastian¡¯s exnation as I sipped my tea and continued to look at the rest.


    As for Liza, she was with Tilura and Sherry as theyy against Leo¡¯s stomach.


    If I left them like that, they would probably fall asleep again¡­ Well, it was fine.


    More importantly, Ms. ire was staring at me and seemed a little nervous¡­ Had something happened?

 Chapter 348

    Chapter 348


    Some of the people who I could hire were the servants


    ¡°Um, Ms. ire. Is something wrong?¡±


    ¡°N-no¡­not at all.¡±


    ¡°Are you sure?¡±


    ¡°Heh¡­hehe¡­¡±


    As she was staring at me so much, I asked Ms. ire if there was a reason.


    She looked surprised for a second but then turned away.


    Upon seeing this, Mr. Ekenhart looked like he was trying to hold back hisughter¡­


    Well, right now, I wanted to focus on this list.


    ¡°¡­Sebastian. I recognize a few of these names.¡±


    When scanning the pages, I noticed that I knew some of the people who were listed.


    But they already had work here¡­ What did this mean?


    And so I asked Sebastian, who seemed to be waiting.


    As for the names I recognized, they were Milina, Ms. Lyra, Ms. Gelda, and Mr. Nichs.


    ¡°More than half of the list is made up of people who work here, Mr. Takumi. We are also searching through surrounding areas, including Ractos. But that list will take a little longer to be ready.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I understand that¡­ But why are there people from this mansion?¡±


    ording to Sebastian, it was more than half of the list. So even if I didn¡¯t know their names, a lot of the people already worked here.


    Well, I had talked to Milina about this already, so it wasn¡¯t strange for her to be listed¡­


    But it seemed off for me to hire the other servants as well?


    ¡°Obviously¡­you would not be hiring all of them. That would not do at all. However, when asking them, many answered that they would be d to help you.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ And you are fine with that? It could not have been easy to hire them in the first ce.¡±


    ¡°We do not mind. It will not be too difficult to find recements. And peoplee from the orphanage as well.¡±


    So, even if I were to hire some of their servants from the list, they would be able to rece them easily enough.


    ¡°Besides, while we currently have guests, like you and Lady Anne, as well as the master¡­once you leave for Range vige, and Lady Anne and the master leaves, we will not need as many servants here.¡±


    ¡°We wanted to use this opportunity to hire people from the orphanage, or who are looking for work. It would be difficult to do this if you didn¡¯t take some off of our hands¡­¡±


    ¡°Is that right? Very well. So, I can take my pick from here?¡±


    ¡°Everyone on that list has volunteered or given their consent when asked¡­ They are willing to work for you.¡±


    ording to Sebastian, even if they had a good number of servants now, I would not be here forever.


    On top of that, Mr. Ekenhart would eventually return to the main house, and he would likely take Ms. Anne with him, as she was his ward now.


    There would then be too many servants in the mansion.


    Furthermore, Ms. ire said that they wanted to take in new people.


    The orphanage was currently full, so they probably wanted to get rid of anyone who was old enough to work.


    That was probably the reason there were so many servants shere in the first ce.


    I checked with Sebastian one more time, and he assured me that everyone on the list would be happy to work for me.


    Well, it did make me feel better.


    I did not feel too confident as an employer, but¡­ This was still less stressful than hiring people I didn¡¯t know at all.


    Besides, since they had been working for the duke, that meant they could be trusted.


    Especially people that I knew personally, like Ms. Lyra, Ms. Gelda, and Nichs.


    I still didn¡¯t know how many people I had to hire, but now that they were talking about the orphanage, I suppose that might be an option as well.


    It wasn¡¯t like I could only hire from the mansion, and it would be nice if I could help them as well.


    After all, that was how Milina hade to be here.


    ¡°In that case, I will give it a closer look once I return to my room.¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re not going to look at the whole thing now?¡±


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s about people. I want to read through it very carefully. And I will be able to concentrate better in my room.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Well, that¡¯s too bad, isn¡¯t? ire.¡±


    ¡°¡­Father, what are you on about? I didn¡¯t¡­ If Mr. Takumi wants to read it in his room, then that is what he should do.¡±


    ¡°I see, I see¡­ Hehe. As if you are not itching to tell him¡­¡±


    ¡°Father!¡±


    ¡°Oh, I will say no more. Now, Mr. Takumi. Just let me know when you¡¯ve made your decision.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­yes.¡±


    I put the list down on the table and decided to look through itter.


    While I could read it now, Ms. ire¡¯s staring at me and Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s chuckling was distracting.


    Besides, I could just ask Sebastianter if I had any questions.


    But when I said I would read itter, Mr. Ekenhart started teasing Ms. ire for some reason.


    She looked a little frantic, and he was highly amused.


    Ms. ire was quite angry over this, causing Mr. Ekenhart to retreat and turn towards me instead.


    I wasn¡¯t sure what they were talking about, and I doubted they would tell me. So I pushed it out of my mind for now.


    ¡­Besides, I didn¡¯t want Ms. ire¡¯s anger to be directed towards me next.

 Chapter 349

    Chapter 349


    I told them that Liza could talk with Leo


    ¡°Papa. Are you finished talking?¡±


    ¡°Aye, I¡¯m finished. You were good to wait there quietly.¡±


    ¡°Ehehe¡­¡±


    She must have sensed that we were finished talking, as Liza got up and moved away from Leo and walked towards me.


    And while I doubted she understood anything, she did not look bored and had waited quietly. And so I patted her head and praised her.


    Thanks to Leo¡¯s advice, Liza didn¡¯t mind being patted andughed happily.


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi. So you are able to do that now?¡±


    ¡°Well, Liza did not know about any beastkin rules. And so as long as people aren¡¯t rudely yanking on her tail, it should be fine. Right?¡±


    ¡°Yes. As long as it¡¯s gentle!¡±


    ¡°Though, you have to do it right¡­¡±


    Upon seeing me pat Liza on the head, Ms. ire asked me about the request she made yesterday.


    I suppose she wanted to pat Liza on the head as well¡­


    In any case, she and the maids seemed to brighten up when I told them it would be fine.


    Ms. ire let out a sigh of relief.


    And so I exined to them what Leo had told me.


    And I also asked if one of the maids could asionally massage her tail when it gets sore.


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right. There is something else¡­¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    I remembered that there was something else concerning Liza that I wanted to tell them.


    ¡°About Liza. Apparently, she canmunicate with Leo. She can understand what she is saying very clearly.¡±


    ¡°Little Liza¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Is it because she is a beastkin?¡°


    ¡°That seems to be the case. I have heard that some beastkin can talk with beast-type monsters.¡±


    Ms. ire looked quite surprised, but Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian were nodding as if it made sense to them.


    ¡°So¡­it¡¯s just some, and not all of them?¡±


    ¡°Well, I do not know the details about that. There are hardly any beastkin in these territories. And so I cannot confirm anything. However, I heard that through talking with monsters, they are able to make them their familiars.¡±


    ¡°I suppose since they can talk to them, it¡¯s much easier to make them familiars than it is for humans. Of course, only if they are beast-types. Of course, it is just a rumor, and one of the reasons that some people fear beastkin.¡±


    As there was not much information, nothing could be confirmed yet. But at least we knew that Liza was not unique in her ability to talk with beasts.


    Being able to talk with monsters also meant that it was easier to coexist.


    However, this made some humans think that beastkin were like monsters, which added to their fear.


    It was not surprising that such negative rumors would be spread during war time, but it was sad that Liza was still being persecuted because of it.


    ¡°Sherry,e over here.¡±


    ¡°Kyau? Kyau!¡±


    ¡°And you too, Liza.¡±


    ¡°What is it, sister ire?¡±


    After hearing what Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian had said, Ms. ire then called Sherry over.


    Sherry looked quite sleepy, but she immediately reacted and raised her head when she heard Ms. ire¡¯s voice. And after looking puzzled for a moment, she tottered over to Ms. ire.


    And then after picking Sherry up and cing her on herp, she gestured for Liza toe over as well.


    Liza¡¯s tail wagged slowly as she walked towards Ms. ire.


    She seemed happy, which showed that she was quite fond of her now.


    ¡°Liza. Can you understand what Sherry is saying?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I can.¡±


    ¡°I see. In that case¡­ Sherry?¡±


    ¡°Kyau?¡±


    ¡°What did Sherry say just now?¡±


    ¡°She is asking for food.¡±


    ¡°Kyau.¡±


    Apparently, Ms. ire wanted to test to see if Liza could understand Sherry.


    It seemed obvious enough to me, what Sherry wanted. Still, Ms. ire asked Liza to tell her what Sherry had said.


    Liza answered confidently, and Sherry nodded.


    Hmm¡­ I had thought that Sherry was asking about why Ms. ire had called her¡­ I suppose I was wrong then.


    I still have a ways to go¡­


    Besides, didn¡¯t Sherry just eat?


    ¡°I see. Now, Sherry. Tell me how you feel about me, Mr. Taumi and Liza.¡±


    ¡°Kyau¡­ Kyau! Kyu¡­kyau!¡±


    Ms. ire nodded at Liza before turning to Sherry and asking the next question.


    Upon hearing the words, Sherry barked once at Ms. ire, and then she was about to turn to me, but paused once as she looked at Leo.


    Then she barked a little weakly and then louder after looking at Liza.


    So, what had she said this time¡­? It sounded like she had called Ms. ire her master.


    But I didn¡¯t quite catch what she said about Liza and me.

 Chapter 350

    Chapter 350


    Ms. ire Could Talk With Sherry


    ¡°Liza. Did you understand what Sherry said just now?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I did. Uhh¡­ She called you master. And papa is someone she has to obey. And I¡¯m¡­her junior?¡±


    ¡°Yes. So you do understand. Good for you.¡±


    ¡°Hehe¡­¡±


    When Ms. ire asked her again, Liza was able to answer her perfectly.


    As for saying that she had to obey me¡­ I suppose it was because of Leo. She had nced at Leo once, and Leo had nodded.


    And Liza was her junior¡­ Was this because of the order that they arrived?


    Or was it because she saw Liza as being the same as her, because she was beastkin¡­ In any case, Liza was actually older than Sherry.


    Ms. ire must have understood Sherry as well, as she nodded with satisfaction at this and patted Liza on the head.


    She did it just as I had told her. I suppose it was because she was used to petting Sherry.


    Maybe Ms. ire was more interested in that, then whether or not Liza could talk with Leo and Sherry?


    It seemed she was more pleased by that part, anyway.


    ¡°Well, you finally got to pet her ears, ire. And we have confirmed that she can talk to Sherry and Leo.¡±


    ¡°F-father¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed. But it will be quite convenient to have other people who understand what Sherry is saying.¡±


    ¡°Now that I think about it, I didn¡¯t know that you could understand her too, Ms. ire¡­?¡±


    ¡°We-well, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart teased his daughter when he saw how pleased she looked.


    And while Ms. ire moved her hand away in denial, it was not very convincing.


    Well, Ms. ire was always full of curiosity, so it was no surprise.


    In any case, Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastion were quite satisfied, now that we knew that Liza could talk with beast type monsters. But Ms. ire¡­


    In general, Sherry was seen with Tilura and Leo a lot, so I hadn¡¯t even noticed this about her and Ms. ire.


    After all, I could only vaguely understand¡­


    And so when I asked, Ms. ire blushed a little and then started to exin.


    Apparently, after she had named Sherry, and made her a familiar, they started to be able to understand each other.


    When bringing her back from the forest, she had only been able to guess based on gestures, so it clearly happened after that.


    Sebastian then exined, rather eagerly, that depending on their bond, a master and familiar could know each other¡¯s will.


    So this suggested that Ms. ire might have a strong affinity with fenrirs.


    However, it would not be like that with all monsters. So it was ratherplicated.


    In any case, if Sherry wanted to say something now, we wouldn¡¯t have to go through Leo or Ms. ire. Liza was now a third option.


    Though, since Liza was with me a lot, it would probably just be better to ask Leo.


    ¡°I wish I had such a cute familiar like Sherry¡­¡±


    Tilura muttered a little sulkily as she hugged Leo.


    Previously, when Mr. Ekenhart was teaching us to fight, she had also said that she wanted a familiar. Perhaps she had hoped that this would happen soon¡­


    ¡°Tilura. You want a familiar? What kind?¡±


    ¡°Ummm¡­ A cute one!¡±


    ¡°I see, I see. Well, you will have to be much stronger for that to happen.¡±


    ¡°I know! That¡¯s why I¡¯ve been training!¡±


    ¡°Mmm. Good. Familiars don¡¯t obey those who are weak. Sherry is an exception, because of Leo¡­ However, you should be stronger and find a familiar that is worthy of you.¡±


    ¡°Okay!¡±


    Upon being asked by her father, Tilura had immediately replied that she wanted a cute familiar.


    Well, when looking at Sherry and Leo, I could understand why she wanted a cute familiar. But were there such monsters out there?


    If she got another fenrir, it would be cute¡­but if it was a different monster. All I had seen were trolls and orcs. And they were like pigs that walked on two legs.


    And while I¡¯m sure that some people might think differently, I doubted that Tilura would find them cute.


    Besides, they also had to be quite intelligent, so it would be difficult.


    In any case, after hearing Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s words, Tilura was nowpletely focused on her sword training.


    She no longer seemed sulky at all, so you could say that Mr. Ekenhart had seeded in distracting her.


    Well, Tilura was not too different from her father and sister¡­ It would be a terrible thing if her curiosity got the better of her, and she went off to the forest alone in order to find a familiar.


    As both Ms. ire and Sebastian looked relieved, I noticed that Mr. Ekenhart seemed to be thinking about something. And then a mischievous smile appeared on his face.


    What was he thinking about?


    While it was clear that he doted on his daughter, and would not put her in harm¡¯s way, this was still the person who had made me fight in the store as part of my training¡­ So it was possible that he might do something simr to her.


    ¡­Well, I just hoped he wouldn¡¯t do anything that would make Ms. ire furious at him again.

 Chapter 352

    Chapter 352


    Milina and Nick met for the first time


    ¡°Ah, brother! Hello!¡±


    ¡°Hello, Nick. And there you are, Milina.¡±


    ¡°Yes, master. I thought it was almost time to concoct the medicine, and so I made preparations.¡±


    As we walked through the mansion, Ms. Gelda notified me that Nick had arrived.


    He was waiting in the drawing room, and so I went there in order to give him the herbs for Mr. Kalis. And that¡¯s when I saw that Milina was with him as well.


    Apparently, she had been expecting me and prepared the pestle and mortar.


    ¡°¡­Who is that?¡±


    ¡°Ah, you haven¡¯t met him yet, Liza. Uh, this is Nick. He delivers my herbs to Ractos.¡±


    ¡°Nice to meet you. I¡¯m Nick!¡±


    ¡°¡­I am Liza. Nice¡­to meet you.¡±


    Liza had looked quite happy to see Milina in the drawing room, but she then froze up upon seeing Nick.


    Considering everything that had happened, it was no surprise that she was wary around strangers.


    While Nick wasn¡¯t as bad as he used to be, he still looked a little intimidating¡­ Even when he smiled.


    I was going to introduce Nick, but was a little troubled.


    It would take too long to exin how he got here¡­and so I just said that he was the guy who delivered the herbs.


    ¡°Master¡­ While I might not be the best person to say this, I had no idea that you would bring in such a person¡­¡±


    ¡°Uh, Milina? He isn¡¯t another apprentice of mine, okay?¡±


    ¡°Aye. I¡¯m more of a devoted brother to him!¡±


    ¡°Devoted¡­ I don¡¯t know if I would agree with that¡­¡±


    I wish they would not say such strange things in front of Liza.


    ¡°Brother¡­apprentice¡­ Well, I suppose that puts me above you then!¡±


    ¡°Uh, I don¡¯t think it¡¯s a contest¡­¡±


    ¡°So you¡¯re his apprentice¡­ Which would make you like an older sister!¡±


    Apparently, Milina felt that she was above a younger brother. Nick agreed. But I didn¡¯t see how any of this was important.


    Besides, I had hired Nick first¡­ And he was also older than her.


    In fact, Nick was probably older than me¡­ Though I had never asked about his age.


    ¡°Nick, I thought that was Ms. Lyra?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi and Mr. Nick, please don¡¯t call me that.¡±


    ¡°Oh, Ms. Lyra!? Since when were you¡­¡±


    ¡°I came just now. Gelda told me that you arrived, so I have brought Mr. Takumi¡¯s herbs. Here they are.¡±


    Previously, when Nick was here, I had seen him talking with Ms. Lyra. And he had called her ¡®older sister.¡¯


    I had no idea why he called her that. Regardless, while we were talking, Ms. Lyra suddenly appeared from behind.


    I hadn¡¯t sensed her presence at all¡­


    But in spite of my surprise, she answered calmly and handed me the bag of herbs.


    ¡°Th-thank you.¡±


    ¡°Sister Lyra!¡±


    ¡°Hehe. And how are you, Lady Liza?¡±


    I calmed myself and epted the bag of herbs and thanked her.


    Nick and Milina were also surprised¡­


    Only Leo and Liza looked normal. In fact, Liza seemed to be relieved to see another familiar face, as she then rushed towards her.


    I suppose since she had given her a bath yesterday, Liza was now quite fond of her.


    Ms. Lyra hugged her gently and patted her on the ears.


    ¡°Uh, in any case¡­ Nick. Here are the herbs for you to take to Mr. Kalis. ¡­Though, I heard that you have plenty in stock?¡±


    ¡°Aye, we do. While sales are still good for the herbs, it¡¯s true that we have plenty left. Really, I wish more people would buy your herbs instead of that other stuff!¡±


    ¡°No, no. It¡¯s important that his other products sell as well. Besides, if there are still herbs in stock, that means there are fewer people who need them. We should be happy that not as many people are sick or injured.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true, master!¡±


    As Liza and Ms. Lyra looked like they were having fun, I handed the herbs to Nick.


    I also asked him about how much stock he had left, and it turned out that they still had quite a lot.


    And while that may not sound good for business, it was not a bad thing for the residents of the town.


    Besides, it wasn¡¯t just herbs that they sold. And Mr. Kalis would not be able to continue his business if he only sold herbs¡­


    It wasn¡¯t a herb store.


    Milina was very happy when I said this.


    ¡­Indeed, she felt strongly about helping people, and that¡¯s why she wanted to learn about medicine.


    Though, it felt awkward to have both Milina and Nick treat me with such respect.


    Considering how life had been beforeing here, I just could not get used to it¡­

 Chapter 353

    Chapter 353


    I Used Magic for Concocting


    ¡°Hah¡­ While I feel a little tired, I suppose we should start.¡±


    ¡°Yes! After hearing about how you think, I feel much more passionate now!¡±


    ¡°Uh, it was not exactly a rousing speech¡­¡±


    ¡°Medicine! Medicine!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    After talking to Nick and handing him the herbs, it was time to start concocting the medicine.


    As Mr. Kalis had plenty of stock, I would likely not see Nick for a few days now.


    I confirmed that with him before he left.


    And then we started putting the herbs into the bowls.


    Liza and Leo were excited and humming with anticipation.


    Was it really so fun to do?


    I had heard Liza¡¯s reason¡­but I suppose that Leo also liked to use magic.


    Judging by her reaction when I had asked her before about the different kinds of magic she could use, it seemed quite likely.


    ¡°You¡¯re not going to use magic, papa?¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Indeed¡­ Maybe if I can use some of the magic I learned yesterday.¡±


    ¡°Yay! We can see your magic then!¡±


    ¡°You are going to use magic, master?¡±


    ¡°Maybe. I suppose that it would be good for practice.¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff-wuff!¡±


    Just as we were about to start crushing the herbs, Liza looked at me with a puzzled expression.


    Leo was getting ready to use her wind magic in order to help us, and it seemed like Liza was wondering why I wasn¡¯t doing it as well.


    Yesterday, Ms. ire had taught me some magic to create a wind.


    And since Liza had been watching us, she knew that I could use magic that would help with making the medicine.


    And so I told Milina that I would use magic, and then I moved next to Leo and was about to do it, when Leo said something.


    She said that since she was going to do it, my magic was not needed here.


    As if I was trying to steal her job or take this opportunity for her to look good in front of Liza¡­


    ¡°Leo. Why don¡¯t you do the wind in Liza¡¯s direction then? And I will help Milina. It¡¯s so I can practice, so don¡¯t mind me. Besides, wouldn¡¯t it be easier to do it in one direction than over a wide area?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Wuff-wuff. Wuff.¡±


    Uh, doing it over a wide area is actually no trouble whatsoever. However, if you must practice¡­


    Leo sighed as she moved towards Liza. And so I decided to use my magic to help Milina.


    ¡°So mama is going to help me. Thank you!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Thank you, master.¡±


    ¡°Well, I¡¯m not used to doing it, so I might not be able to adjust it much¡­ But just tell me if it is too strong.¡±


    ¡°Of course.¡±


    While Leo was nodding confidently, I was a little anxious.


    After all, I had only just learned how to do it.


    And while I shouldn¡¯t have a problem with activating it, I didn¡¯t know if it would go well.


    In any case, Milina was looking at me with expectation, and so I had to do my best.


    Besides, I was also trying to improve with magic for my own sake, so this practice was important.


    ¡°Wooo¡­wou.¡±


    ¡°Aha! That¡¯s too strong, mama!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-fuf. Wou.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s perfect, mama!¡±


    Leo activated her magic first and created a wind.


    However, she might have been a little too enthusiastic, as the wind was very strong.


    Liza had let go of the pestle and covered her ears as she protested. And so Leo quickly made the wind weaker.


    So she was able to adjust the strength even after activating it¡­ That was impressive.


    Well, I had never tried adjusting magic after activating it, so I wasn¡¯t sure if I could do it.


    But for now, I decided to focus on making it weak so that I could help Milina.


    Uh, extend my hand over the mortal and gather the magic energy like yesterday¡­


    ¡°Wind Elemental Air.¡±


    ¡°Wow¡­ That¡¯s great, master!¡±


    ¡°Haha. It does seem to be the perfect strength.¡±


    After focusing on it, I activated the magic.


    A gentle breeze then blew from my hand and towards Milina.


    She seemed very amazed but continued to move her hands.


    Good, now things should go smoothly.


    ¡°Hah¡­hah¡­ Are you almost finished?¡±


    ¡°A little¡­more¡­ Please keep it going, master.¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­hah¡­tsk.¡±


    After using the magic for some time after, I found myself panting as I sent air towards Milina.


    She was looking at me with a worried expression as she ground the herbs, but I wasn¡¯t able to answer.


    While activating the magic was simple enough, I didn¡¯t realize how difficult it was to maintain it.


    We were just about to finish the second batch, but it would probably be best to take a break before doing the rest¡­


    So this was what it was like to use magic for an extended period of time¡­


    While it didn¡¯t feel like my body was running low on magic energy, I was starting to feel out of breath, and I was sweating like I did during sword training.


    Even if it wasn¡¯t magic that used a lot of energy, perhaps maintaining it was simr to exercising.


    I see¡­this was the effect magic energy had on the body then¡­


    In this world, magic energy and the body seem to be closely rted¡­ Even Sebastian had said something about how the herbs affected magic energy.


    Now that I felt this, there were things that I didn¡¯t think about before that I understood a little now.


    So¡­it was a good experience, I guess?

 Chapter 354

    Chapter 354


    Continuous magic was difficult


    ¡°I did it!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    On the other side of the table, after getting help from Leo, Liza had finished her second batch of medicine, and threw her hands up with joy.


    Unlike Milina, she was able to mix it with the pestle without resting, and was still full of energy afterwards.


    Leo was the same. She had been using magic for just as long as me, but showed no signs of being tired.


    I suppose that was the difference between humans and Silver Fenrirs¡­ Or maybe it was just me?


    ¡°Master¡­please¡­continue for a little longer!¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­got it¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Good. That should do it. It¡¯s ready!¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­ Finally¡­¡±


    Milina looked quite tired after continuously mixing the medicine, and I wasn¡¯t much different.


    If anything, I probably looked like I was more exhausted than her.


    Finally, Milina mixed it firmly for thest time, and dered that it was finished.


    At the same time, I stopped the magic and put my hands on the table and let out a sigh.


    While my muscles didn¡¯t feel sore in the same way that I did after training, I was still out of breath and sweating. It was simr to how I feel after running.


    Also, it had been mentally draining.


    So even if I was satisfied at having been able to activate it, it would definitely take some practice to be able to hold it for a long time¡­


    ¡°Phew. Thank you, master.¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­ You did well, Milina.¡±


    ¡°Good work, papa. ¡­You¡¯re sweating a lot!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Haha. Yes, I am. It was my first time using magic for this long. I didn¡¯t realize that it would be so tiring.¡±


    As I rested and caught my breath, Liza approached me and was surprised to see how tired I was.


    Leo looked exasperated, as if to say that this was why I should have just left it to her.


    Well, you should have told me if you knew it was going to be like this¡­


    But I suppose Leo wouldn¡¯t have thought to warn me, since it was so easy for her.


    ¡°¡­Should I have not told you to do it, papa?¡±


    ¡°Not at all. I learned something new about magic today, thanks to you.¡±


    ¡°Really?¡±


    ¡°Yes, really.¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­okay.¡±


    Liza looked a little worried when she saw me, but I assured her that I was fine, and thanked her.


    There was no need at all for her to feel bad about it.


    And so I smiled and nodded at her, and she finally looked relieved.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. I¡¯ve prepared some tea, so please rest for a while.¡±


    ¡°Ah, Ms. Lyra. Thank you. Liza, Milina. Let¡¯s take a break then.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    After we were finished with the medicine, Ms. Lyra brought some tea for us.


    This was perfect, since I had sweated and was now thirsty.


    And so I thanked Ms. Lyra and told the others to rest.


    They nodded and we all sat at the table.


    While Milina was obviously tired, Liza and Leo were still full of energy¡­ Was this because they were young¡­?


    But I wasn¡¯t that old yet¡­


    I thought of such things as I took my seat, and then Ms. Lyra brought me a towel.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, you are sweating. ¡­Excuse me.¡±


    ¡°Huh? Oh¡­uh¡­¡±


    I had thought that she was just going to hand it to me, but instead, she started wiping my face with it.


    As it was so sudden, I could not avoid it, and the soft towel covered my face.


    Milina and Leo were looking at me with amusement, though Liza seemed more puzzled than anything.


    ¡°¡­Sorry, Mr. Takumi. But you were just so sweaty¡­¡±


    ¡°No¡­ Uh, thank you.¡±


    After wiping my face to my neck thoroughly, Ms. Lyra stepped away as if remembering herself, and suddenly looked embarrassed.


    While it was a little embarrassing, it had felt nice, and so I thank her.


    ¡°Little Liza! I thought about it all night! How about this!?¡±


    ¡°!¡±


    Suddenly, the doors burst loudly open, and Ms. Anne shouted as she stormed in.


    Everyone froze in surprise as she entered.


    Except for Leo¡­who must have sensed her presence. But Liza¡¯s tail was standing up straight and her ears were held down as if she were afraid. Leo red at Ms. Anne when she saw this.


    Liza¡­she must have been both surprised and scared¡­


    I would have to be careful about making loud sounds.


    ¡°Hah¡­¡±


    ¡°Ms. Anne¡­ And Ms. ire?¡±


    As Ms. Anne stood there, with her arms spread out and a triumphant smile on her face, Ms. ire appeared behind her. She sighed and held her head as if she had a headache.


    It was understandable, as barging into rooms and shouting was not very well-mannered of Ms. Anne.


    ¡°What do you think? Now little Liza will not be afraid of me!¡±


    She said proudly.


    And so I looked at Ms. Anne closely to see what had changed.


    There were two things.


    Ms. Anne¡¯s hair¡­ The tips of her hair rolls, that is to say, the tips of her drills, looked very strange now.


    Ms. Anne¡­ I don¡¯t know about this¡­

 Chapter 355

    Chapter 355


    Ms. Anne Was in a Strange State


    ¡°Uh¡­ Ms. Anne?¡±


    ¡°What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±¡±


    ¡°What is that?¡±


    ¡°This? Surely Liza will not be scared if it is like this? Now I will be able to touch her ears and tail!¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­¡±


    Milina and Ms. Lyra were horrified as they looked at the transformed Ms. Anne.


    However, it seemed that she did not understand their reaction, as she continued to look very proud as she answered my question.


    I now realized why she had shut herself in her room for so long. I suppose she really wanted to touch Liza¡¯s ears.


    But as Ms. Anne stood there, as if nothing at all was wrong, Ms. ire touched her temples and sighed.


    I understood her perfectly.


    ¡°Now, Liza! You do not have to worry about being stabbed anymore! There is no need to be afraid!¡±


    Ms. Anne said as she began to walk towards Liza.


    As for Ms. Anne¡¯s hair rolls, they were no longer sharp at the tips, as they had been tied into bows.


    While it must have taken some skill to do that, I wondered why she didn¡¯t just change her hairstylepletely.


    ¡­Hmm. And I had thought that Ms. Anne wasn¡¯t this stupid.


    Had I been wrong?


    What if she was actually¡­ No, it would be rude to think about it.


    She is just someone who thinks differently from most¡­ Yes, that is what it was.


    But it helped exin why the people investigating the count had trouble knowing what to do with her, and had left her in Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s care.


    ¡°Wow, amazing¡­!¡±


    ¡°It is, isn¡¯t it?¡±


    ¡°Can I touch it!?¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course. But you will have to let me touch your ears too.¡±


    ¡°Oh, okay!¡±


    ¡°Uh, are you sure, Liza?¡±


    ¡°Hmm. As long as she doesn¡¯t do it so it hurts¡­then it¡¯s fine!¡±


    Surprisingly, Liza seemed to like the new hairstyle, and all fear was gone and reced with awe.


    Children really were amused by the strangest things¡­


    Even Leo, who had been ring at her at first, looked surprised now at Liza¡¯s reaction.


    ¡°Uhh¡­ In that case, Ms. Anne. When touching Liza¡¯s ears¡­¡±


    If Liza didn¡¯t mind, then there was no need to stop her.


    In spite of the odd direction, she had changed the shape of her rolls for Liza¡¯s sake. And so I suppose¡­I should respect her effort?


    ¡°Gently, gently. If you yank them too hard, they will unravel.¡±


    ¡°Okay¡­gently¡­¡±


    ¡°Now, this one.¡±


    Ms. Anna and Liza were facing each other as they sat in their chairs.


    I stood behind Liza, while Ms. ire, Ms. Lyra and Milina watched us from a distance.


    For some reason, everyone seemed quite nervous¡­


    Only Leo was lying down and rxed, clearly feeling that there was no reason for rm.


    So, Ms. Anne¡¯s hair would unravel if you pulled them too hard¡­


    And while Liza gently touched Ms. Anne¡¯s hair rolls, Ms. Anne stretched out her hand towards Liza¡¯s ears.


    ¡°Ahahaha! So soft.¡±


    ¡°Isn¡¯t it? I have the best hair, after all. Your ears aren¡¯t bad either.¡±


    I could hear the others sighing with relief at this. Why had they been so nervous¡­? It¡¯s not like these two had been fighting before. But I suppose it was difficult to know what would happen when it came to Ms. Anne.


    I had known that she was troubled about being feared, but I didn¡¯t expect it toe to this.


    And so it was no wonder that they felt a little anxious as they watched. But I wasn¡¯t sure why Milina was there with them, as she had onlye to the mansion recently.


    ¡°Hah. I am quite satisfied now. Liza, I hope you will allow me to pat you on the head in the future?¡±


    ¡°Yes, okay. And can I touch your hair?¡±


    ¡°Of course. It would not be very fair for me to keep this all to myself. I hope you understand what a great honor it is to be able to touch such wonderful hair?¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°¡­It seems like Liza has be quite used to Anne.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. But I think that she¡¯s always had a friendly personality. She is just cautious around people she is meeting for the first time, due to some bad experiences.¡±


    And so for a while, Ms. Anne and Liza touched each other¡¯s hair and ears andughed.


    There was no sign of the awkwardness from yesterday, they had broken the ice and seemed quite close now.


    Well, Ms. Anne wasn¡¯t a bad person, when she wasn¡¯t thinking about terrible things¡­ So, I suppose it was fine?

 Chapter 356

    Chapter 356


    Today¡¯s Training Was Different


    After Ms. Anne and Liza had finally befortable with each other, Milina and I worked together to finish thest of the medicine.


    Liza also helped, and Ms. Anne would watch and cheer her on.


    Though, as Leo was also close by, she still kept her distance¡­


    As for Ms. ire, she was relieved to see that Liza was doing well, and so she went back to speak with Mr. Ekenhart.


    I suppose she had also wanted to monitor Ms. Anne, who had not been seen for a while.


    Even though she thought of doing strange things, at least she was not hurting anyone. We were all relieved.


    After the medicine waspleted, we all rested again and drank some tea. And then it was announced that lunch was ready, and so we moved to the dining hall.


    I asked Ms. Lyra and Milina to take the medicine to the kitchens for Ms. Helena.


    And yet by the time that we arrived in the dining hall, Ms. Lyra was already waiting there¡­ Were there secret passages that I wasn¡¯t aware of?


    ¡°The food was delicious again.¡±


    ¡°Yes. We must be grateful of Ms. Helena. Liza really enjoys the meals.¡±


    After everyone had gathered, and we finished eating lunch, we drank some tea and rested with Mr. Ekenhart.


    Liza had eaten everything with a big smile, and then the dessert was served, and she would feed some to Leo and eat some herself.


    Sweet food was still new to her, and just like Ms. ire, Tilura and Ms. Anne, she liked it very much.


    Ms. Anne still had her hair tied in bows, and she watched Liza eat with great interest.


    Sebastian had been quite surprised when he saw Ms. Anne¡¯s hair, but Mr. Ekenhart barely even noticed the difference.


    After all, he didn¡¯t care much about his own hair or beard.


    Or maybe he was too busy thinking about other things.


    ¡°Now, it is time for Mr. Takumi and Tilura¡¯s training. Today, it will not be magic, but swords.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. As for magic, Ms. ire was able to teach me some of the basics yesterday. So I would like to go back to swords today.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. About that. There is something I have been thinking about for some time, after seeing the way that you move¡­ I wanted to do it yesterday, before we decided to focus on magic.¡±


    ¡°Really? What is it?¡±


    While I was still continuing my mental training, Mr. Ekenhart would not be here forever, and I wanted to train with him directly while I could.


    Mr. Ekenhart nodded at my enthusiasm and exined that he had an idea.


    I hoped it wasn¡¯t something like before, where I would be thrown into actualbat¡­


    ¡°Yes¡­ I will tell you the details once we are outside.¡±


    ¡°Father. I hope you are not thinking about anything strange?¡±


    ¡°Indeed, I am thinking of nothing of that sort! At least for now. ¡­There is one thing that I will have to discuss with Sebastianter.¡±


    Ms. ire was just as suspicious as I was of her father.


    But Mr. Ekenhart averted his eyes and denied it. However, while Ms. ire didn¡¯t hear the next thing he muttered under his breath, I did hear it.


    Regardless, Ms. ire did not look very convinced.


    Something he had to discuss with Sebastian¡­


    I didn¡¯t know what he was talking about, but it couldn¡¯t be too bad if it went through Sebastian¡­ At least, I hoped so.


    After all, Sebastian would sometimes do things for the fun of it¡­ And he had also been involved the time I was made to fight in the store.


    Well, I was getting anxious now.


    However, was Tilura involved as well?


    But Tilura was still young, and surely they wouldn¡¯t put her in any danger. Besides, she was his daughter, so he couldn¡¯t be reckless.


    I told myself this, even if I was still a little nervous about it.


    ¡°Well, in any case¡­ It concerns your training, Mr. Takumi. ¡­Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Bring that thing I mentioned¡­and the spare. Also, call Nichs.¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    ¡°Nichs?¡±


    As Mr. Ekenharted sweated under Ms. ire¡¯s ring eyes, he called out to Sebastian.


    Sebastian bowed at his request and then left the room. What was that?


    And to call Nichs¡­ The guards had never been involved with our training before.


    They were surely busy with their own duties, and had no time to be teaching an amateur like me.


    ¡°Well, he has a little to do with this too, one could say. He will be fine as an example.¡±


    ¡°Example¡­ What are you going to do?¡±


    ¡°You will find out when we go out into the garden. It is nothing strange, like ire is thinking. Just think of it as a way of exploring your potential, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°I see. Very well.¡±


    I didn¡¯t know how Nichs was rted to this, but if it would help me be stronger, then I would go along with it.


    After all, I did feel that I had improved after being in an actual battle, and perhaps it would help with my mental training as well.


    Of course, I wasn¡¯t too focused on bing strong. But I had to fight orcs in Range vige once¡­ And so I wanted to train so that at the very least, people would not have to worry about me.


    Hi. Thanks for reading. Just wanted to let you know that future chapters will be posted on Tiger Trantions again after this chapter, so please don¡¯t be rmed.

 Chapter 357

    Chapter 357


    A Familiar Weapon


    ¡°Your Grace, sorry to keep you waiting.¡±


    ¡°Mm.¡±


    After tea time was finished, Mr. Ekenhart, Tilura and I went out into the back garden in order to train.


    Leo came as well, while Liza and Sherry rode on her back.


    Furthermore, there was Ms. ire, who probably wanted to monitor her father, and Ms. Anne who seemed to be merely interested.


    A table was prepared for those who just wanted to watch us.


    A few minutester, Sebastian also arrived with three of the guards, that included Nichs.


    Aside from Nichs, the others were the guards that had apanied Mr. Ekenhart when he came to visit.


    ¡­They were all wielding weapons that I thought looked familiar, but I was not sure.


    Nichs had two on his belt, and the others had one, which they held with two hands.


    Somehow, it seemed like they were holding expensive treasures, as they were very careful.


    ¡°Thank you. Now, give one to me, and one to Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ Here.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. ¡­Mr. Ekenhart, what is this?¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart took one and then instructed them to give one to me.


    In this world¡­I had seen quite a few western-looking swords, but this one was quite different.


    Though, it was something I had seen in images and videos plenty of times beforeing here.


    Because it was a weapon from Japan.


    Usually, they were seen as works of art, and even in their sheaths, they were narrower than the sword I normally used.


    Its length was¡­about seventy or eighty centimeters, and the entire thing was about a meter.


    So it was overall small and lighter than the short sword I had now.


    ¡°You look a little surprised? This is called a katana. Though there are other names depending on the length and shape. Interesting, isn¡¯t it?¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­yes, it is.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart thought that I was surprised because I was seeing it for the first time, but it wasn¡¯t the case.


    I was surprised because it was familiar to me.


    Well, at this point, I was much more familiar with my short sword, but it was still something I knew well.


    Everyone in Japan would have seen it once.


    ¡°Though, there are not many of these made. But perhaps these would suit you better.¡±


    ¡°Do you think so?¡±


    ¡°Yes. While you have not seen you fight much, I have seen you during the mental exercises. When you are attacked by an enemy, you don¡¯t just block it with your sword, but you try to dodge it with your whole body.¡±


    ¡°Uhh¡­I suppose. I think I hesitate to block it, because I am worried that the sword might break.¡±


    During the mental exercises, when I imagine that an enemy is attacking¡­especially if it is an orc, then I generally try to dodge it.


    The reason was that I knew that orcs were stronger, and I also didn¡¯t want to damage my weapon¡­


    In fact, this had actually happened to me while fighting an orc.


    After that experience, I only blocked attacks when I had to, and would otherwise try to dodge it.


    And Mr. Ekenhart had noticed this while watching me.


    ¡°Well, when swords hit each other, there are always going to be cases when one of them breaks¡­ That¡¯s how swords work. Ideally, you would break your opponent¡¯s sword and deal a lethal blow.¡±


    ¡°As for that¡­it seems like it would require a lot of strength.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. It is not something that can be solved in a day.¡±


    Breaking an opponent¡¯s sword¡­ Just how much strength would that take? The sword would also have to be heavy and durable.


    A few days or even months of training would not be enough to gain that much arm strength.


    And that was even when I had herbs.


    ¡°The sword that you have been using up until now was made for a brute force style. And so it is very durable and heavy. But this sword¡­this katana, was made differently. It is very thin, light and sharp. Instead of blocking attacks, you can focus on dodging and cutting the enemy.¡±


    I understood what Mr. Ekenhart was saying.


    As swords were supposed to be durable, they used a lot of metal and were quite thick.


    That made them heavier and slower to use.


    You would still be able to block a little with the katana, but it was more brittle and would break easily. I had seen it happen many times on tv.


    Though, it shouldn¡¯t be possible for someone to grab and snap it in their hands.


    The difference was that a normal sword would get chipped if you hit a rock, but a katana would shatter.


    That being said, it was still metal, so it wouldn¡¯t be too weak.


    You just had to be a little more careful, which did match my style.


    ¡°That being said, you will not be able to make good use of it immediately either. Aside from dodging, the swinging is also different.¡±


    So saying, Mr. Ekenhart unsheathed the katana that he was holding. I understood why they were seen as works of art. It was definitely a beautiful de.

 Chapter 358

    Chapter 358


    Katana Demonstration


    ¡°In any case, you should watch it being used first. And after testing both swords, you can decide which one you wish to train with. Nichs.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    So saying, Mr. Ekenhart called Nichs.


    Nichs then came forward and unsheathed the swords on his hip.


    One was about the same length as mine, and the other was shorter.


    He was a dual wielder¡­


    Apparently, he was going to face Nichs in order for me to see the differences in fighting style between the two types of swords.


    While I had seen such swords being used in period dramas, this was the first time seeing them in person.


    ¡°Now then¡­ Remember that this is just a test.¡±


    ¡°I know. I¡¯ll be careful so that he is not terribly injured.¡±


    ¡°I will fight as if this was practice, Your Grace.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart and Nichs then faced each other and raised their weapons.


    Sebastian then stood between them, and they took a few steps back.


    Mr. Ekenhart held his katana straight in front of him.


    It was the same way that he held his usual sword.


    As for Nichs, the de in his right hand was held above his head, while the other shorter one was held in front of his stomach.


    I suppose he was going to swing down with his right hand, and then sh with his left after the first attack was dodged or blocked?


    Unless something unexpected happened, anyway.


    But this was a demonstration, so they probably wouldn¡¯t do anything too surprising.


    ¡°Now¡­begin!¡±


    Sebastian shouted after moving away, and then Nichs charged towards Mr. Ekenhart.


    Mr. Ekenhart just held his sword and watched him calmly.


    ¡°!¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­mmph!¡±


    ¡°Ggg!¡±


    ¡°Stop!¡±


    ¡°¡­.¡±


    It ended in an instant.


    Just as I had expected, Nichs had swung down with his right hand. Mr. Ekenhart then swiftly moved back and dodged the attack.


    Nichs seemed to have expected him to move to the side or block it, and so he had to take a step forward in order to sh with his other de.


    As the de in his left hand was shorter, the time it took for him to close the gap would be the deciding factor.


    Just as Nichs has started to move forward, Mr. Ekenhard started to swing upwards as he moved forward.


    Now the gap had been bridged again, Mr. Ekenhart swung down over Nichs, just as he tried to sh at him.


    The de hit hard into Nichs¡¯s left shoulder, but it was the blunt side of the de. Still, it was enough to stop him.


    Nichs could not move due to the pain, and he fell to his knees as Sebastian stopped the fight.


    Tilura and I were too surprised to say anything.


    ¡°Are you alright, Nichs?¡±


    ¡°Yes. While there is pain, my bones are not broken.¡±


    ¡°I see. Well, Sebastian would have been very angry if I wounded you.¡±


    Then Mr. Ekenhart offered a hand to Nichs.


    Nichs epted it as he got back to his feet. His face was a grimace because of the pain, but he confirmed that he could move his arm just fine.


    It had all happened so fast, that I couldn¡¯t see it clearly. But I suppose Mr. Ekenhart had turned the de at thest moment.


    Otherwise, Nichs would have been gravely wounded¡­


    ¡°You still have a long way to go, Nichs. While your strategy was good, you didn¡¯t think about what to do if I dodged it.¡±


    ¡°¡­But no one else can move with that speed, Your Grace. Of course, there is still room for me to improve¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, Leo is actually much faster.¡±


    ¡°We should not bepared to a Silver Fenrir¡­this is about battles against humans¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    As he helped him up, Mr. Ekenhart told Nichs what he had done wrong.


    But as Nichs said, there was likely no one else who could move at that speed.


    It was not as if Nichs¡¯s movement had been slow. I had barely been able to follow him myself.


    Even if he wasn¡¯t good at gathering herbs, he knew how to wield a weapon.


    Leo seemed to have heard her namee up in their conversation, as she was now looking at them questioningly.


    It was just an example Leo, you don¡¯t actually have to do anything, okay?


    I nced over to Liza and the others as well. Ms. ire was her usual self, but Ms. Anne had a surprised expression.


    I suppose it was because Ms. ire had seen them fight before.


    Liza was petting Leo¡¯s neck, and did not seem very interested in the new swords.


    ¡°Well, there it is. That is how you use these des, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Um¡­I¡¯m sure that was a wonderful example, but¡­ I don¡¯t really understand.¡±


    ¡°Neither do I!¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart then turned to me and Tilura as if he had just given us a thorough lesson. But to be honest, I didn¡¯t really learn anything.


    I could not move at the same speed as them.


    Not only was it over so suddenly, but it was clearly a battle between very skilled people. As beginners, it was not reasonable for us to understand everything after just that¡­

 Chapter 359

    Chapter 359


    Katana Training


    ¡°Hmm, you think so? But I was moving rather slowly¡­¡±


    ¡°Your Grace, I think you must teach them the basics of the katana first. Perhaps they do not even understand the difference.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was puzzled at our reaction.


    And so Sebastian exined it to him, while Tilura and I nodded in agreement.


    ¡°I see¡­ Very well. In that case, we¡¯ll start with the grip. Unlike with swords¡­¡±


    He finally decided to teach us the basics, so we could actually feel the difference for ourselves.


    Of course, the gripping and swinging was not all that different. However, whereas a short sword was usually used to push while cutting, a katana was pulled while cutting.


    That was why the de was curved.


    Also, what we were being taught was not the same swordsmanship taught in Japan, but the kind that was developed in this world, and so it actually suited me quite well.


    I didn¡¯t know if it was because of where I¡¯m from, or that the katanas in this world just happened to be a good fit for me, but by the time the sun was starting to set, even Mr. Ekenhart was impressed with how I was able to swing it.


    Though, I was still not able to move in the way that they had during the test battle.


    I suppose it was because I had the groundwork, after training so much with the other sword.


    If I hadn¡¯t trained at all, it would have taken a lot longer.


    As for Tilura, while she tried using it a little, she did not take to it at all. And returned to her usual sword immediately after.


    Mr. Ekenhart seemed a little shocked that Tilura had no intention of learning to use a sword that he had mastered.


    Apparently, Mr. Ekenhart was actually better with the katana, and that was what he used in more serious fights.


    ¡°Still, I am surprised that these exist in this world.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? So you knew about them, Mr. Takumi? Well, you did seem a little surprised earlier.¡±


    After the training was finished, I sheathed the katana again and wiped the sweat on my face with a towel.


    Not just this mansion, but Ractos and Range vige were all built in a western style.


    And the culture was also simr as well, so I didn¡¯t think there would be a katana here.


    All of the swords I had seen in Ractos were also western.


    ¡°Yes. In the world that I came from¡­it was moremon. Though, by the time I was born, they had fallen out of use¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ So they do not even use such a wonderful de¡­¡±


    Well, we had guns now.


    And while I wouldn¡¯t say that des were never used as weapons, most of the time it was just knives.


    In the first ce, there werews that meant you couldn¡¯t have guns and swords without special permission.


    ¡°I was just surprised because I hadn¡¯t seen a sword like that sinceing to this world.¡±


    ¡°I see. Hmm¡­ In that case¡­ Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Lady ire and Lady Anne have gone back into the house. I will tell Lady Tilura. As for Leo and Liza¡­¡±


    ¡°You can let Mr. Takumi handle that. Mr. Takumi, could you tell Liza and Leo to go back into the house?¡±


    ¡°Uh, of course¡­¡±


    I didn¡¯t know what was going to happen, but Mr. Ekenhart had called Sebastian as if he had an idea.


    And so I did as he said and had Leo and Liza return to the house where they would wait in the dining hall until it was dinner time.


    Liza looked a little worried, but Leo pulled her away by the sleeve¡­ Liza seemed to find it amusing to be held up by the sleeve, and she started tough.


    And then Tilura returned to the house with Sebastian.


    As for the butlers who were watching the herbs, they also moved some distance away so that they could not hear anything.


    What was so important about what we were going to discuss?


    Surely nothing concerning the swords was that important¡­


    ¡°Regarding these des, not a lot is known about them. If you are the head of a noble family, then some knowledge is passed down to you. But I cannot tell you about it.¡±


    Well, it certainly did sound important.


    Even the heads of noble houses did not know much, and could not share what little they had.


    ¡°So, it is kept a secret then?¡±


    ¡°Yes, that is right. I feel bad for saying this after showing them to you, but it concerns the royal family and the kingdom.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ So I suppose they are made in this country then?¡±


    ¡°Well, that much is obvious. The swords are made in the capital and nearby areas. The cksmiths that make them then sell them to the royal family and nobles.¡±


    Hmm. I had wondered if they were made in some eastern country and then they were imported, but they were actually made in this kingdom.


    In that case, either someone with the skill came here, or they developed it on their own.


    Thetter seemed unlikely, but perhaps there was some reason for it.


    In any case, if he could not talk about it, then there was no point in asking.


    After all, knowing too much could put a target on my back, or put Mr. Ekenhart in an awkward position.

 Chapter 360

    Chapter 360


    I Talked With Mr. Ekenhart


    ¡°Does Ms. ire and the others know about it? It seemed like Sebastian did.¡±


    ¡°ire knows about the swords, though not in detail. But neither does Nichs, and he uses one. It is the same with Sebastian. Also, they know not to talk about it with others.¡±


    I suppose only the head of the house was allowed to know more about them then.


    Sebastian was the butler who was closest to Mr. Ekenhart, but even he did not know much more than Ms. ire.


    ¡°But why does Nichs have one if it is something that is supposed to be secret?¡±


    I could understand why Mr. Ekenhart had one, but it seemed odd that one the guards should as well.


    ¡°Because I gave it to him. Their existence is not what is secret. Besides¡­it is not a very good one, and so it is allowed. As long as you are working for a noble.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    Now that I think about it, the sword that Nichs had been holding was a little different from Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s.


    Though¡­I could not really exin what it was.


    There was a difference in the way that the de reflected the light, and the hilt and sheath were less decorated.


    I suppose as a noble, Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s one was decorated that way.


    In any case, this meant that Nichs¡¯s two swords were slightly inferior in quality.


    Though, he talked and acted like a warrior, so it suited him.


    ¡°But wouldn¡¯t that mean that I couldn¡¯t use one? I am no soldier¡­¡±


    ¡°Mmm¡­ It¡¯s just that I thought it would be a better fit for you¡­ And I think there is someone in the royal family who would agree.¡±


    ¡°And who is that?¡±


    ¡°I cannot tell you just yet¡­ Regardless, I think you should at least continue to train with it. Though, obviously, you cannot take it out with you to town, where others might see it.¡±


    ¡°Ah, I understand. I will continue to use my other sword when leaving the mansion then.¡±


    I wasn¡¯t a soldier, and was only learning to use a sword for self defense purposes, and that was not enough of a connection to the duke to be permitted to wield a katana.


    Mr. Ekenhart seemed a little awkward, but said something about how he thought someone in the royal family would approve.


    Who was he talking about?


    Regardless, I promised that I would not use it when leaving the mansion.


    I did not want to do anything to negatively affect his position.


    After all, I was very indebted to him.


    Besides, I was satisfied with my old sword. And so even if this new one felt nice in my hands, it didn¡¯t mean I had to change it right away.


    ¡°Thank you. I will see to it that you are given permission eventually. And I can also talk to them about you¡­ And maybe I can tell you more as well. I hope you don¡¯t mind?¡±


    ¡°If you trust them, then it should be fine.¡±


    ¡°Yes, there is no need to worry about that. I think they will take a liking to you for different reasons when it was me. And there shouldn¡¯t be any problem with getting permission for the sword.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was confident that this person would take a liking to me after he exined everything.


    I didn¡¯t know what this person was like, but I decided to just leave it all to Mr. Ekenhart.


    Knowing him, there was a part of me that felt a little anxious¡­but he was still the master of the house.


    ¡°I will leave it to you, Mr. Ekenhart. But can you tell me something about this person?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Well, they might be a little strange, but not malicious. I cannot really tell you much. But they are one of the reasons that I started to trust you.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart sounded awkward when he talked.


    Also, I wondered what he meant when saying they were one of the reasons that he trusted me?


    But I suppose he couldn¡¯t talk about it¡­ Perhaps it had something to do with the Gift?


    In any case, he would tell me about it eventually, so I didn¡¯t need to know about it for now.


    After all, they say that curiosity killed the cat, so it was best to not pry.


    That was enough about the swords. But I did have one other question before we returned to the house.


    ¡°I understand. By the way¡­we are in the middle of growing the herbs over there¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, they seem to have grown even more. We should as the people who have been watching them.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    And so we moved our attention to the herbs as we walked over to the garden.


    As it was starting to get dark, we could not see it as clearly as earlier, but you could still see that the herbs had grown.


    It wasn¡¯t as dramatic a change as yesterday, but it was still abnormal.


    ¡°How are Mr. Takumi¡¯s herbs?¡±


    ¡°Your Grace. We have been watching them closely, and they continue to grow at an rming rate.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart started talking to the butlers who were watching the herbs.


    As the butler said, the herbs had already grown enough to be picked.


    ¡°Hmm. In that case¡­ What about the new herbs that were made?¡±


    ¡°They are over there. The new herbs have grown even faster. As you can see, they have not only grownrger, but have multiplied.¡±


    ¡°It sure looks that way.¡±


    A short distance away, there was another patch ofnd where I had made some new herbs with Weed Cultivation.


    Just like yesterday, they had multiplied to nearly double the amount.


    Hmm¡­?

 Chapter 361

    Chapter 361


    We Inspected The Herb Garden


    ¡°Mr. Ekenhart. The new herbs are the same as yesterday.¡±


    ¡°It seems that way. In other words, the ones made directly by Mr. Takumi grow quickly and multiply. While we will have to continue to observe the ones that increased yesterday, the newly grown ones seem to grow at a slower pace and multiply less¡­¡±


    ¡°I suppose the speed and amount change depending on whether they were made with Weed Cultivation directly.¡±


    The ones I made directly would die after a day.


    While the others would increase about 1.5 times which was still pretty good. So the herbs that I made could continue to multiply then.


    Though, I didn¡¯t know if the cycle would continue forever¡­


    In any case, to put it simply, if I grew 10 Ramogi, they would double to 20 in a day, and then would be 30 by the second day.


    So we could make quite a lot in a short time.


    And if we got the timing right with picking them, then we might get as much as 50 in three days.


    And of course, I could continue to use Weed Cultivation in the meantime.


    ¡°Well, you could say that the initial goal had been met then.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I suppose we will still have to see if the quality is the same, though.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. That cer.¡±


    There was actually one other thing that I wondered about.


    It was if I could also use Weed Cultivation to change their state.


    But I thought that it was quite likely.


    ording to Isabelle, part of the ability of Weed Cultivation was being able to grow nts anywhere at any time.


    While there were limitations with the nts, if I could do it anywhere, then I should be able to change the state of a nt, even if I didn¡¯t make it with Weed Cultivation.


    But I would have to test itter.


    As we wanted to check the quality, we should continue to see what would happen if we continue to grow them.


    ¡°Well, let us return to the house then.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Ah, sorry. If you see that they start wilting, just leave them like that. I want to see what will happen.¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    ¡°And don¡¯t worry too much about it.¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course.¡±


    As the butlers might panic again if the herbs died, I assured them that it was perfectly fine.


    Now we could find out if the same thing would happen to the new herbs.


    It was important that the butlers didn¡¯t see any oue as a failure.


    I didn¡¯t want them to be anxious in the morning and feel like they have to apologize.


    And so we left the herbs to them, and I returned to the house with Mr. Ekenhart, and we went to the dining hall.


    As we were quitete, Leo and Liza were probably getting hungry and impatient.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Mr. Takumi, I still can¡¯t say that I feel the effect strongly¡­but I feel slightly better.¡±


    ¡°You do?¡±


    After dinner, we all drank the medicinal wine together.


    Of course, Leo, Sherry, Liza and Tilura drank grape juice instead.


    Liza had taken a liking to it, and was just as excited as she was for dessert.


    I smiled and nodded at her while answering Mr. Ekenhart.


    ¡°Yes, Mr. Takumi. I do feel better when waking up in the morning. Though¡­perhaps I am just imagining it.¡±


    ¡°As for me, I am quite sure that my hair has be smoother. It is probably what allowed me to restyle it in a way that is not frightening.¡±


    So Ms. ire felt better when getting up in the morning¡­I suppose that meant the medicinal wine had helped her sleep better.


    That was a simr effect to the herbs I made before. And while it could just be a coincidence, the wine was probably more healthy regardless.


    As for Ms. Anne¡­she was suggesting the wine had a good effect on her hair¡­ But I don¡¯t think that should be the case¡­


    Well, perhaps your hair was connected to your health¡­but I wished she wouldn¡¯t me my wine for her new hairstyle¡­


    ¡°Well, I think it is a bit early to be feeling any effects¡­ But I am d to hear that you are all well.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Due to my age, I have felt my strength weakening for some time, but I also feel a little better after I started drinking it.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha¡­ Indeed¡­¡±


    Sebastian, who had been standing by, also started to insist that the wine was having a positive effect on him.


    ¡­I did not feel it was worth believing though.


    Sebastian had been present during the process of making it, and had tasted the herbs. That might have affected his perception.


    Also, he was starting to talk like those infomercial people¡­


    The ones who try to trick old people into buying supplements that will cure them¡­


    Obviously, it wasn¡¯t the same thing, but it was such an uncanny resemnce that I had to chuckle.

 Chapter 362

    Chapter 362


    We Thought Of Ways To Sell The Medicinal Wine


    ¡°We still have to see the effects first, but we¡¯re thinking about producing it in Range vige as well.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Well, I doubt people would buy it immediately¡­¡±


    ¡°Really? I think it could sell immediately, once people know it¡¯s effective?¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was thinking about making the medicinal wine in Range vige as well.


    But unlike the other wine, the color and taste were not particrly great.


    ¡°Well, I think it won¡¯t sell quickly, because the effects are not felt quickly.¡±


    ¡°I see. It would be easier to sell if the customer could tell it was effective immediately. In that case, we will have to think about how we sell it.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. We can¡¯t just put it on store shelves¡­ We need to get people to drink it. People who can feel the effects and spread the word.¡±


    ¡°Yes. And then more people will buy it.¡±


    Since I had been thinking about infomercials, perhaps we should do something simr.


    Have people test it and advertise.


    However, this was no guarantee that it would sell well.


    ¡°However, there is still the possibility that people won¡¯t buy it.¡±


    ¡°Why do you say that?¡±


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s a drink that makes you healthy. So it is not the most obvious change. Besides, people would find it hard to believe if you told them that someone drank wine and became healthy¡­¡±


    Especially if the person who drank it was already healthy to begin with.


    It would at least be more convincing if someone who was not well, though not quite sick either, drank it.


    However, if there was someone like that, then it would be much better to not rely on medicinal wine, and take the herbs or some other medicine instead.


    Besides, we still didn¡¯t know to what degree it improved your health.


    It was possible that the effects would be very subtle.


    ¡°Hmm. It is difficult then. We will have to discuss the matter carefully. But we will have an answer for it by the time we start making it in Range vige.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Well¡­we could always just sell a small amount for a low price.¡±


    ¡°Hmm. In other words, do not make too much¡­ That could make it seem more valuable.¡±


    ¡°Exactly. Though, we will have to think about how much¡­ But if the quantity is low, then people might think it is more effective.¡±


    Humans were weak to things that were in limited quantities¡­ Or at least, that had been the case in Japan. So it could prove to be true here.


    Of course, I did not want to deceive anyone, so we would only do it after we knew that it was effective.


    ¡°First, instead of focusing on profits, we should focus on gaining the trust of customers. Once everyone believes in the product, then we can produce more and know that it will sell.¡±


    ¡°Care more about future profits than present ones. Not many people think like that. But I am d that you do. Yes, once we are sure of what we have, we shall do as you suggest. Not just for me, but it could benefit future generations of this house as well.¡±


    This was no surprise, as the duke was one of the most sessful of the nobles when it came to business.


    Ms. ire listened to the conversation with a serious, thoughtful expression. As for Ms. Anne, she looked like she didn¡¯t understand what we were talking about.


    It was the same with Liza and Tilura.


    Well, none of this woulde to anything if the medicinal wine wasn¡¯t effective.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, you swing the katana like this. You are not pushing like with a sword, but pulling.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    After dinner and tea, I went out into the garden with Tilura and Mr. Ekenhart, and it was time for our training.


    Mr. Ekenhart was now teaching me how to swing.


    Even if I couldn¡¯t take the katana outside, there may be an asion to use it. That¡¯s what he said, anyway.


    ¡­I sincerely hoped that was not the case.


    Liza, Leo and Sherry stood by the side and watched us.


    It was probably terribly boring to watch, but Liza looked amused.


    Or was she just entertained by seeing how I was struggling?


    As the de was curved, I did know that it was best to pull for cutting. But its weight was so different that it was hard to adjust¡­


    ¡°Phew¡­ Hah¡­¡±


    ¡°Good. That should be enough for today.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, father!¡±


    As the training was quite different from usual, my muscles were quite sore.


    And so I immediately ate some recovery herbs as I caught my breath.


    As I had only used an ordinary sword up until now, I realize that changing weapons really took a toll on your body.


    That being said, they were still simr weapons. So this was probably quite mild, all things considered.


    I was amazed at people who could use weapons that werepletely different. Like a sword and spear¡­

 Chapter 363

    Chapter 363


    I Checked The Employer List


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. I would like some of those herbs today as well¡­¡±


    Said Mr. Ekenhart, after I had caught my breath.


    Did he mean the herbs that help you sleep?


    Otherwise, it would have seemed like a dangerous request. And so I chuckled and started to take them out of my bag.


    ¡°Still, you shouldn¡¯t rely on them too much.¡±


    ¡°I understand that¡­ But I just have trouble getting up in the morning. And this way, ire will stopining about it.¡±


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s true that she will probably prefer it if you came down for breakfast in the morning¡­¡±


    I warned Mr. Ekenhart a little as I gave him the sleeping herbs.


    Apparently, one of his reasons for wanting them was so that he could wake up for breakfast and avoid Ms. ire being cross with him.


    He was weak when it came to his daughter, so I was sympathetic.


    ¡°Once I get the feel for waking up early, I will try to do it without relying on the herbs.¡±


    ¡°¡­I¡¯m not sure it¡¯s a matter of getting a feel¡­¡±


    It was true that it would take some effort, but he was making it sound like it was part of his sword training.


    Of course, there had been many times when I was so tired and found it hard to get up, so I understood him.


    In any case, I hoped that things would work out for him, and we separated


    ¡°I¡¯ll leave her to you then, Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    ¡°Go on Liza. It¡¯s for your bath.¡±


    ¡°¡­Oh, okay.¡±


    We returned to our room, and then I told Liza to go with Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda, who had been waiting by the door.


    While Liza hesitated for a moment, it was not as if she disliked the two maids or taking a bath. And so she went off with them willingly.


    She just still felt a little anxious about leaving me and Leo. But I was sure that she would be perfectly fine soon enough.


    ¡°In the meantime¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m talking about the documents that Sebastian left with me. I need to look through that list.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    And so I sat down at my desk in order to read through the list.


    Leo had looked at me questioningly, and so I exined it to her as I picked up the pile of papers.


    For some reason, she barked enthusiastically and began to look over my shoulder as if it was her job as well.


    ¡­Uh, Leo? Can you even understand this? Also, this is kind of ufortable.


    ¡°Leo, wait a second. ¡­All right. That¡¯s better.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    As I was hunched over while Leo looked over my shoulder, I straightened my back first and then moved the chair so it was in front of Leo.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Most of them are people who work here. ¡­Obviously, I can¡¯t hire all of them, but I would like some of them¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    If they worked in this house, then they would be used to me and Leo.


    I wouldn¡¯t have to exin anything about Weed Cultivation, which would make things easier.


    Even Leo was barking in agreement.


    ¡°And over here, we have people who live in Ractos¡­I see. ¡­Now that I think about it, how are we supposed to handle the Weed Cultivation matter?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    I was now looking at the section with names that I did not recognize.


    These were people who lived in Ractos or surrounding viges, and their ages and experience varied.


    There were men and women. Some were currently working other jobs and some were quite elderly.


    And as I looked through them, I wondered how much I was expected to exin.


    Leo seemed to be wondering about this as well.


    While I¡¯m sure they had been carefully selected, so there wouldn¡¯t be anyone suspicious. I wasn¡¯t sure if we were allowed to tell them everything¡­


    It seemed like it would be best if word about meing from another world did not spread. Of course, most people probably wouldn¡¯t even believe it.


    Though, being associated with the duke would probably make it more credible.


    In any case, I had already been told to not talk about my Gift too much. So I was not sure if I should tell them.


    Though, since we would be making fields of herbs, they might have to know part of it¡­


    ¡°I¡¯ll have to talk about it with Sebastian tomorrow. Sorry, Leo. ¡­Uh¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    After that, I took out a nk sheet in order to make some notes.


    I also wrote down whatever questions that I would want to ask about the information provided.


    After all, there were so many people, so I had to write it all down or I would forget.


    ¡­At my old job, I had been rebuked by my superiors so many times¡­ Because they would not take notes and then they would me it all on their subordinates when they forgot something.


    ¡°I don¡¯t want to be like them¡­ There. Now, let¡¯s continue, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    After finishing writing everything down, we continued to look at the list.


    I was starting to feel nervous again about hiring multiple people, but Leo¡¯s presence helped me calm down a little.


    Perhaps that was why she was looking at the list with me? Well, it was probably just her curiosity.


    In any case, thanks, Leo¡­


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Uh, this¡­ Could it be?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    I discovered it just as I started to read the final page.


    Each page had about three people on it, and contained various information on them, just like a resume.


    And on the bottom of thest page, I saw a name that was quite familiar to me.


    I thought it was a mistake at first, and so I rubbed my eyes. Even Leo tilted her head as if puzzled.

 Chapter 364

    Chapter 364


    I Taught Liza to Knock


    ¡°¡­No, it¡¯s not a mistake¡­ What is she thinking? Is her name even allowed to be here?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t think it¡¯s as simple as it being a good opportunity¡­ Well, I will have to ask Sebastain. No, maybe I should ask her directly?¡±


    The name that was written there was ire Liebert.


    She was the daughter of the duke. So it did not make sense for me to be her employer.


    I didn¡¯t know what led to her name being added, but I would have plenty of questions to ask tomorrow.


    Leo barked behind me. It seemed like she thought it was a good idea.


    ¡°Haah¡­ But why¡­ Could it be¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    This morning, Ms. ire had looked fairly strange when she saw me ept the list.


    Perhaps she was expecting me toment on this.


    In any case, Mr. Ekenhart had in turn been watching Ms. ire with amusement. So it¡¯s possible that they all knew.


    ¡°I will have to ask all of them then.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m back!¡±


    ¡°Lady Liza. You have to knock when entering a room.¡±


    After I had finished writing all my notes, the door burst open and Liza stormed into the room.


    She had returned from her bath, so her hair was damp and steam was rising from her head.


    Ms. Lyra followed after her.


    It was good that she was full of energy, but it¡¯s true that one should knock before entering someone¡¯s room.


    Though, it did show how much trust she had in us.


    ¡°Indeed, Liza. It is important to knock when entering a room.¡±


    ¡°It is?¡±


    ¡°Aye, it is. You wouldn¡¯t want to give someone a shock, would you?¡±


    ¡°¡­Oh, okay. I¡¯ll knock next time then!¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s a good girl.¡±


    ¡°Hehe.¡±


    It was best to tell them of such things when they were young.


    Liza nodded understandingly and promised to knock next time.


    I patted her on the ears and sheughed happily. She really did remind me of a cat sometimes¡­


    Well, she knew nothing about knocking or manners in general, so it was no wonder.


    I wasn¡¯t even one to care about manners that much, but I had to teach her the bare minimum I suppose.


    ¡­Besides, it might be a good time for me to learn as well.


    ¡°Thank you, Ms. Lyra.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. She was very well behaved once again.¡±


    ¡°I see. Good for you, Liza.¡±


    ¡°Ehehe. Sister Lyra and Sister Gelda are very nice, so I like them!¡±


    ¡°Hohoho. Thank you, Lady Liza.¡±


    She really had be fond of Ms. Gelda and Ms. Lyra then.


    And Ms. Lyra seemed very pleased to hear it.


    Now that I thought about it, Ms. Lyra had alsoe from the orphanage¡­ She had even known Milina.


    That was probably why she was so good with taking care of younger children.


    And it was not hard to see why children would like her.


    ¡°Well, good night, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you. Good night.¡±


    ¡°Good night, Sister Lyra!¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Hehe.¡±


    Ms. Lyra bowed and then left the room.


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s my turn to go and take a bath then.¡±


    ¡°See youter!¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I got up from my chair and stretched before picking up a change of clothes.


    I had been sitting for some time, so my limbs felt a bit stiff.


    And so I left Liza with Leo and headed for the bathing room.


    ¡­I guess Leo was not going to apany me if I didn¡¯t make her.


    But I was just d that she didn¡¯t hate it as much as before.


    After my bath, I returned to the room and picked up Liza, who had fallen asleep next to Leo, and ced her on the bed without waking her. And then I went to sleep.


    I just hoped she would not have sad dreams this time.


    ¡ª


    ¡°Hehe¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Hmmm?¡±


    I woke up to the sounds of someone chuckling nearby.


    My eyes opened and I looked to the side and saw that Liza wasughing as she slept.


    So she had a pleasant dream after all.


    ¡°¡­Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Leo was already awake, and she had her head resting on the side of the bed.


    She opened her mouth wide and let out a yawn.


    I suppose she woke up early in order to look at Liza?


    ¡°Mmm¡­hmm?¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Liza.¡±


    ¡°¡­Good¡­morning¡­papa¡­mama¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    When I sat up, Liza opened her eyes.


    There were no traces of tears as she rubbed her eyes this time. She then got up and greeted us.


    Leo wagged her tail and barked in reply.


    Relieved that she was smiling, I then got out of bed in order to prepare for the day.

 Chapter 365

    Chapter 365


    Telling Ms. Anne About ¡®Weed Cultivation¡¯


    ¡°Good morning, Mr. Takumi, Leo and Liza.¡±


    ¡°Morning, Tilura. You look well today.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Good morning sister Tilura!¡±


    ¡°Yes, I feel great! You seem well too, Liza!¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    Just as I was starting to prepare for the day, Tilura came to the room.


    She was cheerful as always, and Liza was happy to see her.


    They really seemed to get along.


    ¡°Good morning.¡±


    Tilura helped Liza get ready, and then we went down to the dining hall.


    Ms. ire, Mr. Ekenhart, and Ms. Anne were already waiting at their seat.


    Ms. Anne had the same ribbon hair-style as yesterday¡­ She really did not want Liza to be scared of her, I suppose.


    The food was promptly served and we all ate.


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right. I was able to look through the list yesterday.¡±


    ¡°Oh, is that right? Any opinions on it?¡±


    ¡°Yes, was there anyone that you were interested in?¡±


    ¡°!¡±


    ¡°Hmm?¡±


    I decided to bring up the list, as I had some questions to ask.


    Mr. Ekenhart immediately looked amused, but Sebastian¡¯s expression did not change as they turned to me.


    Ms. ire¡¯s hands stopped as she was eating, and I saw her flinch¡­ She was definitely concerned about my reaction then.


    Ms. Anne seemed puzzled by this, while Tilura, Liza, Leo and Sherry were only focused on their food and had no interest in our conversation.


    ¡°Indeed¡­ I do think that I will hire a few people. But can I ask a few questions first?¡±


    ¡°Yes, please do.¡±


    ¡°Well¡­¡±


    I took out my notes and started to question Sebastian.


    asionally, Mr. Ekenhart would add something, and my questions would be answered.


    As for Ms. ire, she did not take another bite of her food and seemed to be waiting anxiously¡­


    I did not want to prolong this state she was in, but there was one other thing I had to ask first.


    ¡°Also¡­ Yes¡­ I was wondering about that other thing, concerning me.¡±


    ¡°You, Mr. Takumi¡­ I suppose you are referring to the method in which the herbs are created.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I understand that we do not want it to be known far and wide. But to keep itpletely secret¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Your Grace?¡±


    ¡°Hmm. Well, it¡¯s a good opportunity.¡±


    As my ability was very useful, it had been decided to limit the number of people who knew about it.


    But it didn¡¯t seem right to not tell people that I would be working with. Besides, it might lead to ack of trust.


    Well, I was sure that Sebastian and the others didn¡¯t expect that level of secrecy to begin with.


    That was why the list contained information about whether a person was tight lipped or liked to spread rumors.


    After I asked this question, Sebastian turned to Mr. Ekenhart.


    Mr. Ekenhart then chuckled and turned to Ms. Anne.


    Ms. Anne¡­?


    ¡°She is with us now. You cannot hide it forever. Besides, it will be easier in the future if she knows.¡±


    ¡°That is true. Are you fine with that, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Telling her? If that is your decision, Mr. Ekenhart, then I think it is fine. As long as she is in your charge, then she cannot do anything troublesome.¡±


    ¡°Yes, exactly.¡±


    Apparently, he wanted me to tell Ms. Anne about my ability.


    I had not told her about it up until now. I had always kept things vague.


    That being said, I might have let it slip, and she could have made some guesses based on things that the others had said.


    Only Sebastian would have avoided that.


    I suppose it depended on how interested Ms. Anne was whenever we talked about my herbs.


    Well, she could not do anything while the duke was monitoring her. And even if she tried, we could easily put a stop to it. So I didn¡¯t mind telling her.


    Though, I still felt a little anxious due to how unpredictable she could be¡­


    ¡°Anne, do you have a moment?¡±


    ¡°What is it, Your Grace?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s about Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    After coughing, Mr. Ekenhart turned to Ms. Anne.


    She was quite surprised, as her attention had been fixed on Liza and Sherry, but she quicklyposed herself and answered him with a serious expression.


    Clearly, she detected that this was important.


    Ms. ire seemed a little annoyed that the conversation was still not about her, but she made a show of beingposed as well.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, you say? What could it be¡­ Oh, has he finally agreed to marry me?¡±


    Ms. Anne, you still haven¡¯t given up¡­


    ¡°That is not it at all. It is about Mr. Takumi¡¯s special ability.¡±


    ¡°Oh, that. He has a great deal of knowledge about weeds or something? Oh, and he can be friends with Silver Fenrirs¡­ Yes, that is quite special.¡±


    ¡°¡­Uh, no, that¡¯s not it.¡±


    Apparently, Ms. Anne hadn¡¯t noticed my Gift at all.


    Well, I suppose it meant I had been good at hiding it then. Or she was just stupid.


    Perhaps she had been too busy with being scared of Leo, fawning over Sherry, and trying to get Liza to like her. So she wasn¡¯t paying that much attention to me¡­

 Chapter 366

    Chapter 366


    I asked questions about the people I¡¯d be hiring


    ¡°I see¡­ So that¡¯s what it is.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. Currently, this is only being disclosed to be people rted to this house. And so you must not tell anyone else without Mr. Takumi¡¯s permission.¡±


    ¡°I understand. Indeed, what I heard just now is not something that I can talk about lightly.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s right.¡±


    While Ms. Anne would asionally ask strange questions, we somehow managed to finish exining to her about my Gift.


    She was quite surprised at first, but then she recalled everything she had seen and heard up until now, which seemed to satisfy her.


    ¡°Now, it will be much easier to talk about Weed Cultivation in this house. So, Mr. Takumi. You had some questions?¡±


    ¡°Yes. About whether I should tell the workers about my ability.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t think it is necessary for you to tell them everything that you can do with your Gift. But perhaps if it is just that you can make some nts grow¡­¡±


    ¡°You mean, I shouldn¡¯t tell them that it is a Gift?¡±


    ¡°Well, it would make matters moreplicated¡­ Besides, some people don¡¯t even know about Gifts.¡±


    Now that we had told Ms. Anne, there was no one in the mansion who did not know about it, so as long as there were no guests, then we didn¡¯t have to be careful about what we said.


    Still, having to hide it from people I hired would be troublesome.


    ¡°If people do not know what a Gift is in the first ce, it would be much simpler to exin it by saying you simply had a strange ability.¡±


    ¡°I suppose that would be simpler¡­ But would they believe it?¡±


    ¡°Well, you have the backing of this house. So they will have to believe it. Besides, we wouldn¡¯t hire anyone who would be that suspicious to begin with.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. In the information on the list, it should say whether or not the person has knowledge about medicine and herbs.¡±


    ¡°Ah, yes. It was written there. Most of the people did not have knowledge at all¡­¡±


    But what did that have to do with whether or not I told them?


    As we were going to be growing herbs and might have to make medicine as well, it seemed like it would be preferable for them to have some knowledge about it.


    ¡°If they are too knowledgeable about herbs, or are pharmacists, then they might start rebelling against you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Rebel?¡±


    ¡°Yes. You have an ability to grow herbs and then change them into a potent state.¡±


    Normally, you would have to wait for the herbs to grow. And then you picked them and let them dry. It was a long process.


    But I had the useful ability of being able to do it all quickly.


    I had assumed that it was a useless ability at first, due to the name. Which was rather embarrassing to me now.


    ¡°You will understand, as you are studying as well, but a physician cannot learn everything in a single day. And yet someone who has little knowledge like you is able to grow herbs, and process them without trouble. How do you think they will feel, considering all of the hard work and effort they have gone through?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ I suppose it wouldn¡¯t be surprising if they felt resentful.¡±


    They might wonder what it was they had been spending so much time on.


    If you were at school or work, and you worked hard to see results, only to see someone do better than you in spite of not putting any effort into it, then you would feel some jealousy.


    Though, when I was in school, I was too busy thinking about my part-time job or Leo. And once I started working full time, there was so much to do that I didn¡¯t even have time to think.


    ¡°And so we decided to hire people with less knowledge. Besides, the actual work will involve the management of the herbs. So it is not necessary for them to know so much. The exception is the concoction of the medicine¡­ But for now, it will only be simple ones, so it should not be impossible for them to do it.¡±


    ¡°I see. If all they are doing is managing, gathering and storing, then they don¡¯t need extensive knowledge.¡±


    Even the concocting was just mixing and drying. It took more physical strength than brains.


    If there was one thing they had to learn, it was how to pick the herbs. But that was quite easy.


    In the future, we might want to grow herbs and nts that require more knowledge. But I myself had a lot to learn before that happened.


    ¡°Also¡­ We are searching for someone who knows about farming, and can inspect the condition of fields.¡±


    ¡°The condition?¡±


    ¡°Yes. While your herbs grow and increase at an rming speed¡­ We want to know what effect it has on thend. Currently, we are also keeping an eye on the soil, and there have been reports of small changes.¡±


    ¡°What kind of changes?¡±


    ¡°Well, I am not quite sure. I had someone a little more knowledgeable inspect it, and so I will tell you once I know more.¡±

 Chapter 367

    Chapter 367


    I Asked About Ms. ire


    Indeed¡­ There was the matter of the soil as well¡­ I had not been thinking about that.


    I was only thinking about how they would grow, and the speed.


    It was quite obvious now that I thought about it. The nutrients within the soil were not infinite.


    Otherwise, there would be no need to use fertilizer.


    Thend had to be cultivated, and through adding nutrients that nts needed, the crops would be able to grow¡­ Such things had to be considered.


    There were also pests. It would be important to have someone who was knowledgeable about growing nts.


    I didn¡¯t want a situation where I grew too many herbs, and ended up making all of thend around Range vige unfertile.


    I would not know what to say to Mr. Hannes if that happened.


    And so I was grateful towards Sebastian and the others when it came to such matters.


    Though, without the help of the duke¡¯s house, this whole n would not have even been put into action.


    In any case, I was quite satisfied now. And so it was time for the final question.


    Ms. ire also looked like she was tired of waiting.


    ¡°Uhh, this is thest one but¡­ Why is Ms. ire on the list?¡±


    ¡°!¡±


    I asked and Ms. ire straightened her posture with a look of total alertness.


    ¡°About that¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, it is no wonder that you would question it.¡±


    Sebastian turned to Ms. ire, and Mr. Ekenhart nodded with an amused expression.


    Ms. rie now looked a little apologetic.


    ¡°Lady ire, so this is what you have been nning?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ Well, I had no choice really. If Mr. Takumi is in Range vige, he will be away from me. So if I go as an employee¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­I¡¯m not in any position to be hiring a highborndy¡­ Am I?¡±


    Ms. ire seemed even more ufortable now that Ms. Anne was staring at her.


    Indeed, if I went to Range vige, we would be quite far apart, which would mean we wouldn¡¯t be able to see each other.


    Uh¡­I suppose it would be a little sad.


    But regardless, I still thought that I wouldn¡¯t be able to hire someone who was the duke¡¯s daughter.


    Or any noble for that matter.


    But as I wasn¡¯t sure, I turned to Mr. Ekenhart.


    Though, he was the kind of person who would allow anything if it was amusing¡­


    And both he and Sebastian seemed like they wanted me and Ms. ire to¡­


    ¡°Well, it would normally be out of the question. Impossible¡­ I don¡¯t know. It could go either way.¡±


    ¡°¡­It could?¡±


    ¡°Mmm. ire is my daughter and part of the Leibert family. But she isn¡¯t the master yet. So to be precise, she is not a noble. Because the title is only given to the head of the house¡­of course, many people think of the whole family as being nobles. So even if it is incorrect, other people see anyone directly rted as nobles.¡±


    ¡°I will one day inherit my fathers title and be a countess. But until then, I am technically amoner. Lady ire is the same.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart exined that it was unusual but not impossible.


    ording to his exnation, which Ms. Anne added to, only the head of the house was a noble. But as most people saw the entire family as nobles, others general treated Ms. ire and Ms. Anne that way.


    Well, I suppose it was because they weren¡¯t going to be rude towards someone who was the future head of their house.


    Besides, if you did something to hurt their family, then the head of the house would probably retaliate in some way.


    And so with all of that considered, it was probably easier for most people to just look at the whole family as being nobles.


    This mindset had be somon, that people forgot that it wasn¡¯t technically the case, I suppose.


    Regardless of the facts, it still seemed too much to call themmoners.


    ¡°So that is why others see ire as a noble. In terms of thew, there should not be a problem. Even though it would still¡­look strange.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    When we had gone to Ractos, Ms. ire had been treated as a noble.


    Because of this, it would normally be unthinkable to hire her.


    Though, that had also been the time when we encountered Nick. And it had urred to me that for someone who antagonized a noble, they were rather lenient with him.


    I had not been in this world for very long, and knew little about their society. And I had not really questioned it¡­


    The way that people think and thews were different depending on where you were.


    And so I had just epted it.


    But after hearing this exnation, I realized that it was probably because Ms. ire was technically amoner, so he didn¡¯t receive a more severe punishment.


    ¡­Though, Mr. Ekenhart might have been angry enough to insure a harsh punishment. He was not at the mansion and didn¡¯t know.


    Well, perhaps just by being part of the duke¡¯s family, it was still treated a little differently.


    In other words, they had just been arrested as brutes who were attackingmoners.


    Though, aside from Nick, they also had other charges against them, and so they were probably being judged harshly now.


    When I thought about it like that, Sebastian had also been bluffing a little when he threatened him at Mr. Kalis¡¯s store.


    If he ran away or damaged the herbs, then he would be¡­ Well, it would surely not be the case.

 Chapter 368

    Chapter 368


    I Suggested Joint Management


    ¡°Hiring her is not the problem. It is what people will think. It is possible that it could hurt the reputation of this house.


    ¡°¡­Because she was hired by amoner?¡±


    ¡°That is one reason. While the people of Range vige and the other people you hire will know¡­ We could make up an excuse for others.¡±


    ¡°An excuse?¡±


    ¡°Mmm. Like say that she is just visiting. Besides, since it is this house that will be selling the products, you could say that she is monitoring.¡±


    ¡°So you will hide the fact that she is hired.¡±


    ¡°Yes. While we have a responsibility to report to the royal family with the truth, it doesn¡¯t have to be the case with others.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ording to Mr. Ekenhart, since we would be working in Range vige, there would not be many witnesses to see her and know the truth.


    Rumors might still spread, but Sebastian could do something about that.


    I was relieved to know that if I did hire her, it would not cause any trouble for their house.


    Well, maybe there would still be some.


    But in any case, I thought that Ms. ire should do what she wants, if there is no problem.


    ¡°That being said¡­she would have to return to the mansion every few days. I have left this house and the surroundingnds to ire¡¯s care. And she cannot do everything in Range vige.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart seemed quite positive about the idea now.


    I see¡­ Since she had duties in the mansion, she could not stay in Range vige the whole time.


    Besides, it would probably affect the servants if she was absent for so long.


    I thought about such things and looked at Ms. ire. She seemed a little ufortable.


    She had looked relieved a moment ago when Mr. Ekenhart said it was technically fine, and then she looked excited again to see what my decision would be.


    I felt bad for making her wait so long and go through those different emotions.


    But judging by how Mr. Ekenhart looked amused, it was possible that he was drawing it out on purpose.


    Sebastian was usually the one to exin everything, but he was taking the reins now¡­ But maybe it was because we were talking about nobles.


    Sebastian looked a little disappointed by this, but I ignored him.


    ¡°Besides, I would rather have her hired by someone I trust, than aplete stranger. If there is any problem, I will deal with it myself.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart continued.


    ¡°Very well. If there is no problem, and everyone is satisfied with it, then that¡¯s what we will do.¡±


    ¡°Really!?¡±


    I decided to end Ms. ire¡¯s suffering before Mr. Ekenhart could continue talking.


    She suddenly sprang up at these words and smiled happily in my direction.


    ¡°However¡­¡±


    ¡°What? Is there something else?¡±


    ¡°Do you have conditions, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know if I¡¯d call it conditions, but¡­ I want this business of growing the herb fields to be a coboration with Ms. ire. I suppose¡­it just seems a little absurd for me to hire her.¡±


    ¡°Coboration?¡±


    ¡°Oh?¡±


    Perhaps I was being stubborn, but I just could imagine it happening that way.


    It was also because I felt like I was greatly indebted to her.


    And I already felt anxious enough about having to hire other people.


    ¡°I¡¯m still not used to the idea of hiring people. So I was hoping you could give me some advice so that we could be partners instead.¡±


    ¡°Hmm. I see. That is an interesting idea.¡±


    ¡°¡­Your Grace. That would solve a multitude of problems.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. If they were partners, she would actually be in Range vige as a monitor. And no one will say anything if she isn¡¯t being employed.¡±


    ¡°Partners¡­ Mr. Takumi and me as partners¡­ It does seem a little early¡­but not a bad idea¡­¡±


    I honestly told them how I felt.


    Ms. ire ordered servants and was well educated, so I expected her to be able to help me when it came to dealing with my employees.


    There was so much that I didn¡¯t know yet. But with her¡­it should be much easier.


    In fact, I would probably end up relying on her for most things.


    Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian looked at each other, and after talking, smiled.


    I see. So it would help with their reputation if she wasn¡¯t working under me.


    That showed that there would have been problems after all¡­ Even if Mr. Ekenhart said it was fine and that he would deal with everything.


    As for Ms. ire, for some reason, she was blushing and muttering to herself.


    It seemed like she was surprised by this suggestion, but I couldn¡¯t hear what she was saying.


    It made me think I had identally said something strange again.

 Chapter 369

    Chapter 369


    I Decided To Go Shopping


    ¡°In that case, I shall also go as a partner! Surely having someone like me there will make the venture even more of a sess!¡±


    While Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian discussed it, Ms. Anne suddenly got to her feet and made this deration.


    ¡­What the hell was she talking about?


    And what had been going on in her mind¡­


    ¡°No, Anneliese. You are not the head of your house yet, and cannot make such decisions. Count Barsler¡­your father, is still on shaky ground. Who knows what will happen to him? I cannot let you act in such a situation.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart suddenly became very serious as he calmly told her that it waspletely impossible.


    Of course, it was¡­ This wasn¡¯t hernd, and she wasn¡¯t even lord of her own house yet.


    Besides, Count Barsler and Ms. Anne¡¯s fate was not even decided. Even I knew that this was ridiculous.


    This was still her reeducation period. She had more important things to be thinking about.


    ¡°Yes, that should do it.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Now that Ms. Anne¡¯s ridiculous proposition was promptly dismissed, there was a need to talk about the matter with Ms. ire in more detail.


    Also, we would have to go to Ractos, and so I went to my room in order to prepare.


    Since I had already given some herbs to Nick yesterday, there was no need to use Weed Cultivation today.


    The reason I was going to Ractos was Liza.


    Though she had spent a few days in the mansion, she did not have enough clothes.


    It was no wonder, as we had found her in the slums.


    When I asked her about it, she said she had no belongings in the ce where she had lived. The ce did not even have a roof.


    Up until now, she had worn some of Tilura¡¯s old clothes. But there was a problem.


    Because Tilura was human while Liza was beastkin.


    Even if the size was simr, Liza had a tail.


    And so we wanted to buy some clothes in Ractos that she could wear in spite of having a tail.


    It wasn¡¯t just clothes, but there were other things she needed as well.


    Just as I had to go shipping aftering to this mansion.


    Thankfully, I was being paid for my herbs, so I had plenty of money.


    This time I would be able to buy things without having to borrow money.


    ¡­It would look pretty terrible for a father to borrow money to buy something for his daughter.


    ¡°Papa. Let¡¯s go!¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Yes, yes. But calm down a little, okay?¡±


    Liza was riding on Leo and telling me to hurry up as they waited near the door.


    Even Leo was impatient with me.


    She was just as excited, because going to town meant that she would be able to run.


    ¡°That should do it. Alright, let¡¯s go.¡±


    ¡°Go!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I made sure that I had money and any necessities.


    And then we left the room and headed for the entrance hall.


    Aside from me, Liza and Leo, Ms. ire and Ms. Lyra would also be going to Ractos.


    After all, I needed someone to help with choosing clothes for Liza.


    Also, someone had to stay with Leo as she waited outside.


    Ms. ire and Ms. Lyra were also prepared and waiting for us at the entrance hall.


    As Ms. ire was going, we would also need guards¡­ Sebastian would not have allowed it otherwise.


    Nichs had an ordinary sword like Johanna, instead of a katana.


    Obviously, he could not take it with him to town.


    As for the one Mr. Ekenhart had given to me, I kept it safely in my room.


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting, Ms. ire.¡±


    ¡°Now at all, we just arrived.¡±


    And then we quickly went outside.


    As always, the servants saw us off.


    Liza seemed a little surprised by them, but then she realized what they were doing and so she waved back at them.


    Some of the servants smiled and waved back. It was clear that they were fond of her.


    ¡°Surely Mr. Ekenhart of Ms. Anne won¡¯t follow us secretly.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Well, Sebastian will keep an eye on my father. As for Anne¡­ She does not really like to go outside.¡±


    ¡°Haha. Well, if Sebastian is watching him, we have no reason to fear.¡±


    When I had decided to go to Ractos with Liza, Mr. Ekenhart had been the first one who wanted to apany us.


    I suppose he had really enjoyed ourst trip.


    However, Ms. ire and Sebastian put a stop to such ambitions, and ensured that he would not be able to slip away this time.

 Chapter 370

    Chapter 370


    We Went to Ractos with Liza


    I felt a little bad for Mr. Ekenhart, as he left looking quite disappointed about not being able to go to Ractos.


    Ms. ire would be going instead.


    I still remember seeing her raise her fist in triumph at this.


    I suppose she was happy, as she had not been able to go to town in a while?


    As for Ms. Anne, she stayed in her room, iming that there was an emergency situation regarding her hair rolls.


    Ms. ire said she did not like to go outside very much, so it was no wonder she spent so much time on her hair.


    And Tilura had her studies, so she also had to stay home with Sherry.


    Sherry wasn¡¯t interested in the town to begin with, and seemed to think she could spend her time ying with Tilura. Well, she would soon be disappointed, I think.


    ¡°Now then, Mr. Takumi. Let us go.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Yay. I ride on mama as she runs!¡±


    Ms. ire and Lyra would ride in a carriage driven by Johanna. I nodded at them and then called out to Leo.


    Leo nodded and Liza raised her hands in the air with excitement.


    ¡°Liza, it¡¯s dangerous. You have to hold onto Leo¡¯s fur, alright?¡±


    ¡°Okay!¡±


    Liza lowered her hands and grabbed onto Leo¡¯s fur, just as she started to run.


    Nichs then followed the carriage on his horse.


    ¡°It¡¯s around here, isn¡¯t it? Where mama made that delicious water.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. It was around here.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    As Liza had be thirsty on the way, Leo had used magic to make some clean water for her.


    There were only nts and trees on the side of the road, nothing distinctive. So it showed that Liza had a really good memory.


    I suppose it was because she usually drank muddy water. So the event had left a big impression on her.


    ¡°Mama, if I get thirsty again, will you make that water?¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°No, no. You don¡¯t have to do it now. Just when she is thirsty.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff!¡±


    Leo has started to slow down, thinking Liza wanted it now. And so I told her to continue running.


    Leo looked a little disappointed as she nodded, and then she picked up the pace.


    I suppose she really wanted to use magic and show it to Liza¡­


    ¡°That water sure was delicious¡­¡±


    ¡°That much? But you have that grape juice and tea at the mansion?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I¡¯m happy that there are so many delicious things there! But that water was still the best!¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff-wuff!¡±


    As it was the first clean water she had drunk, she was not able to forget it.


    Especially since it had been after her grandfather died, and she was being attacked.


    So it was understandable that other delicious things were not as special for her.


    Leo was happy that the water she made was appreciated so much, and she barked cheerfully.


    ¡°Wee, Lady ire and Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s been awhile. But we are happy to be back.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Halton.¡±


    ¡°Wow, there are so many clothes!¡±


    The first ce we went to after reaching Ractos was Mr. Halton¡¯s clothes shop.


    It was also the first store that Ms. ire had taken me. And they had tailored the clothes I wore when first meeting Mr. Ekenhart.


    When we went inside, we were greeted by Mr. Halton, who had not changed at all.


    As we talked to him, Liza scanned the items in the store with wide eyes.


    I suppose she was interested in clothes then?


    As for Leo, Ms. Lyra and Johanna were staying with her outside.


    ¡°Oh, a beastkin¡­¡±


    ¡°Did you say something?¡±


    ¡°No, nothing. Be they beastkin or human, anyone who wears clothes is wee here.¡±


    Mr. Halton said with a smile as he looked at Liza.


    I had been a little tense at first, due to what I had heard at the orphanage.


    Mr. Halton was quite old, but while he had likely heard the various rumors about beastkin, it seemed that he was not prejudiced against them.


    I suppose it could have to do with Ms. ire¡¯s presence as well. And he was educated enough to not believe such rumors.


    Besides, we were customers as well.


    ¡°Today, we want you to make some clothes for this child.¡±


    ¡°Ms. ire. We don¡¯t have to have them made if there is already something that fits¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. I doubt there will be any clothes that fit her just right? She is a beastkin with a tail, after all.¡±


    ¡°That is true. And we do not sell clothes that fit beastkin children here. Either the clothes will have to be altered or made from scratch.¡±


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right.¡±


    Well, there was no point in selling clothes that hardly anyone would buy. It wasn¡¯t good for business.


    ¡°In that case, we will take her measurements.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    ¡°It cannot be helped, I suppose. But if the alterations can be done quickly, I would like to buy some clothes today before leaving.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ As long as we know what to alter, we could have it ready in a few hours.¡±


    ¡°Then that¡¯s what we¡¯ll do.¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±

 Chapter 371

    Chapter 371


    Liza Was Hesitant


    It was hard to imagine that they could make clothes from scratch in a day.


    But I at least wanted clothes that she could wear tomorrow before we left.


    After thinking about it for a moment, Mr. Halton nodded and said that it could be ready in a few hours.


    He then called to one of the workers in the back of the store, and a woman appeared.


    She was carrying a measuring tape which she used to take Liza¡¯s measurements.


    In the meantime, Mr. Halton called over a different woman, who then started to discuss something with Ms. ire.


    Apparently, they were talking about undergarments.


    It was for such things like this that I was d that Ms. ire had apanied us.


    But then I started to hear things like, ¡®You¡¯ve grown so much!¡¯ Uh, were they talking about Ms. ire now?


    ¡°And the total cost will be¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, here it is¡­¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    After everything was finished, it was time to pay.


    It all ended up being a little more expensive than when I had bought clothes, but she was a beastkin, so it had to be a special order.


    I then took out my money and paid Mr. Halton.


    ¡°Mama!¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Ms. Lyra, Johanna. Thank you for watching over Leo.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. Good Leo waited very quietly here.¡±


    ¡°And we were able to pet her.¡±


    As soon as we exited the store, Liza ran to Leo and threw her arms around her.


    I suppose she felt some kind of sense of freedom seeing Leo, after being surrounded by strangers.


    I walked over to them as well, and thanked Ms. Lyra and Johanna.


    While Ms. Lyra was used to being around Leo, Johanna did not have much opportunity to be with her, and so she seemed quite pleased.


    Her usually cool expression was now a big smile.


    I suppose that in spite of the air she gave off, she liked cute things.


    ¡°Next is the general goods store.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Mr. Haines¡¯s store.¡±


    And so we left the clothes store in order to head to our next destination.


    ¡­Previously, we had been intercepted by Nick and some other ruffians.


    It was only a few months ago, but felt like the distant past now.


    ¡°Wee. It¡¯s been too long, Lady ire. And you too, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Hello, Haines.¡±


    ¡°Hello, Mr. Haines.¡±


    ¡°¡­Hello.¡±


    We went into the gigantic building and greeted Mr. Haines.


    Liza greeted him as well, though she stayed behind me.


    Apparently, she still felt hesitant when meeting new people.


    This time, Ms. Lyra and Johanna came with us into the store.


    Nichs stayed outside with Leo.


    It had been decided that the other two women shoulde, because we would be buying things for a girl.


    It was best to have as many opinions as possible¡­ Even though it might make the trip longer.


    ¡°And what brings you here today?¡±


    ¡°We are here to buy some things for this child here.¡±


    ¡°Oh, a beastkin. In that case¡­¡±


    Mr. Haines looked at Liza with some surprise, but then started to rmend various items.


    And so we went around the store and looked for things that Liza might need.


    As it was such arge store with so many things lining its shelves, Liza couldn¡¯t stop looking around her as we walked.


    She would asionally stop, but when I asked her if there was something she liked, she would just shake her head.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. What about this? Isn¡¯t it perfect?¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s a nice bag. Liza, what do you think?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ I¡¯m fine¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    I picked up a bag that Ms. ire suggested and brought it to Liza.


    It was a shoulder bag, and too small for an adult like me or Ms. ire. But it seemed like the perfect size for Liza.


    There was even a flower decoration on the sp.


    However, Liza took one look at it and shook her head.


    Even though she was staring at the flower part as if she liked it¡­


    ¡°Liza, you don¡¯t have to be modest about it. If you want something, we will buy it for you.¡±


    Unlike thest time I was here, I had money now.


    More than I could even use.


    Perhaps I was just showing off now that I was called papa, but I intended to buy whatever she wanted.


    Of course, unless she wanted everything in the store¡­


    ¡°I¡¯m¡­not¡­¡±


    She shook her head again.


    But she was still looking at the bag.


    It was obvious that she actually wanted it.


    Well, I would like it if someone that young was good at lying.


    ¡°Liza. You¡¯re just being modest, aren¡¯t you? It¡¯s fine, I have more money than you think, alright? You really don¡¯t need to worry about that.¡±


    ¡°But¡­ You paid for the other stuff as well, papa. Grandfather told me that money is important and that it shouldn¡¯t be wasted¡­¡±


    After asking her about it, Liza began to hesitantly tell me the reason.


    Apparently, it was because of what her grandfather had taught her.


    Indeed, he was not wrong. Money was important and not to be wasted.


    However, there was something more important for me.

 Chapter 372

    Chapter 372


    I Bought Liza What She Wanted


    ¡°Your grandfather was right, and it¡¯s good to be wise with money. However, this is not a waste. I just want to see you happy. And it would make me happy to know that you weren¡¯t hesitating on my ount.¡±


    ¡°You would be happy, papa¡­?¡±


    ¡°Yes. If it¡¯s something that you want and will make you smile, then I will be happy as well.¡±


    ¡°¡­Are you, sure?¡±


    ¡°Aye.¡±


    ¡°You won¡¯t regret itter on?¡±


    ¡°Of course, not. Do I look like someone who would have second thoughts about such things?¡±


    ¡°No, you don¡¯t.¡±


    ¡°Then don¡¯t worry about it. See, Liza? What about this bag?¡±


    Ms. ire had been watching us with a smile. She then took the bag and showed it to Liza.


    ¡°Mmm¡­the flowers are pretty.¡±


    ¡°Do you want it?¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    ¡°Very well. Then we¡¯ll buy this!¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    While she still seemed hesitant, she finally admitted to wanting it.


    As soon as Liza nodded, I decided to buy it as I handed it over to Mr. Haines.


    Mr. Haines had also been watching us with a smile¡­ It was a little embarrassing, not that I thought about it.


    ¡°Good, Liza.¡±


    ¡°Hehe¡­yes!¡±


    I patted Liza on the head to hide my embarrassment.


    Lizaughed happily, which was really cute.


    Her tail wagged happily as if to expression her emotion, which quickly caught Mr. ire and the other¡¯s attention.


    ¡°Now, what other things do you want?¡±


    ¡°Uhh¡­¡±


    Now that Liza understood that she didn¡¯t have to hesitate, we went around the store and bought a few other items.


    Ms. ire and the others would also sometimes give their advice.


    As expected, their varying opinions meant that we stayed in the store for quite a long time, but I didn¡¯t mind because Liza seemed happy.


    Even if I felt bad for Leo and Nichs.


    We bought so much stuff that Liza could not carry it all by herself.


    Still, Liza hung the bag from her shoulder and stuffed it with some of her new things.


    One of the things she had wanted the most was a water bottle.


    She said that this was so she could fill it with Leo¡¯s magic water.


    That was how much she liked it.


    ¡°Still, was that really a good idea?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ She will have to be very careful with it¡­ But I suppose it¡¯s fine because she¡¯s a beastkin?¡±


    Liza was practically exploding with happiness, and her tail and ears were moving.


    As we watching her, Ms. ire and I talked about one of the things she had wanted.


    Right before I paid for everything, Liza had stopped in front of the weapons corner.


    And then her eyes seemed to sparkle as she saw a thick knife.


    It wasn¡¯t like the small one I had bought for shaving, and was nearly fifteen centimeters.


    Not only that, but the de was curved and had a rather ominous look to it.


    ording to Mr. Haines, it was originally made as a hunting knife, but was not a weapon called a kukri.


    As far as I was aware, it wasn¡¯t a European weapon, so it was surprising to see it here.


    Regardless, Liza wanted it with the same excitement that she showed for the water bottle.


    I now wondered if I had been so wise to tell her that she should not hesitate, and that I would buy her anything.


    ¡°What does being a beastkin have to do with it?¡±


    ¡°It is said that beastkin were originally hunters. So perhaps it is like an instinct for her¡­¡±


    Her beast blood was calling¡­ I did not like to think about it, but I suppose that could be a reason that she found a hunting knife so appealing.


    In any case, it would definitely be necessary for her to be careful, and not take it out for no reason.


    ¡°We still have a little time left.¡±


    After paying for everything, we thanked Mr. Haines and went back out in order to reunite with Leo and Nichs.


    Liza immediately started to show Leo her new bag.


    I checked my pocket watch. Indeed, there was still some time before we had to go and pick up the clothes from Mr. Halton¡¯s store.


    Perhaps we could go to the orphanage so Liza could y?


    ¡°Papa! Mama says she is hungry!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°Ah, now that I think about it, she hasn¡¯t had lunch yet. And she waited so patiently, so we¡¯ll have to feed her something special.¡±

 Chapter 373

    Chapter 373


    Street Stall Lunch


    ¡°In that case, let¡¯s buy some food and eat it.¡±


    At Ms. Lyra¡¯s suggestion, we decided to leave the store and head to the main street where we could buy some food.


    Leo remembered how we had bought all kinds of food when with Mr. Ekenhart, and so her tail wagged happily as we walked.


    Liza rode on Leo¡¯s back, and her eyes moved from one stall to the next.


    ¡°Oh, over there. That one over there tastes very good.¡±


    ¡°Is that so?¡±


    ¡°Yes. We found it thest time we were here with Mr. Ekenhart, and it was really good.¡±


    I guided Ms. ire and Johanna over to the stall that we had gone to before.


    They sold a kind of fried pasta¡­that was like yakisoba.


    I could see them frying a great amount of noodles on arge pan.


    ¡°I see they are cooking it. And there are a lot of vegetables.¡±


    ¡°It is very¡­brown.¡±


    ¡°It is not the most colorful dish, but it does taste good.¡±


    Ms. ire was surprised to see the noodles being fried with so many types of vegetables, while Johanna was more surprised by the color.


    While it was not some kind of luxurious dish, even Mr. Ekenhart had enjoyed it.


    Besides, there was something very nostalgic about it for me.


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting.¡±


    Ms. Lyra and Nichs had gone ahead and bought it for us.


    There was enough for everyone.


    ¡°Here, Liza. Now get down from Leo while you eat. Or you might identally drop some on Leo¡¯s nice fur. ¡­Leo. You should let yours cool down a little first.¡±


    ¡°Wow! It smells so nice!¡±


    ¡°¡­Wuff.¡±


    I epted the noodles from Ms. Lyra and handed them to Liza and Leo.


    I told Liza toe down from Leo and stand on the ground¡­ It would be a lot of trouble if I had to wash Leo¡¯s furter.


    And since the noodles were hot enough for steam to be rising from them, I told Leo to wait for them to cool off first.


    But Leo was impatient, and though she nodded, she did not sound pleased.


    ¡°Indeed, it is a very appetizing smell.¡±


    ¡°While it looks strange, it is quite fragrant.¡±


    Apparently, Ms. ire and Johanna were feeling more positive about it now that they had smelled it.


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s eat then.¡±


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi. Are you going to eat while standing up?¡±


    When I held my fork and was about to eat, Ms. ire looked at me with a baffled expression.


    ¡°Uh, yes. That¡¯s what you usually do when you buy food from street stalls¡­¡±


    ¡°I-I see. Well, this is a new experience for me¡­ I am sorry.¡±


    I didn¡¯t think there was any need to apologize. But I suppose the idea of eating food right after buying it on the streets was unusual for her.


    It probably seemed very ill-mannered.


    ¡°Mr. Ekenhart didn¡¯t seem to mind doing it?¡±


    ¡°Well, father doesn¡¯t mind doing such things¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, that is true¡­¡±


    ¡°Lady ire. Perhaps we should move somewhere else?¡±


    As we wondered what to do, Ms. Lyra made a suggestion as she returned with a lot of meat skewers she had bought.


    When had she bought all of that¡­


    But I had eaten them before, and knew that they were delicious. So it was not a wrong decision on her part.


    ¡°Well¡­ While I would rather go somewhere else¡­ The food might get cold.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. And it will not be half so delicious.¡±


    Clearly, Ms. ire greatly preferred to eat at a table.


    But the longer we stayed here indecisively, the colder the food would be.


    ¡°¡­Very well. We will eat here!¡±


    ¡°Are you sure?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Since Mr. Takumi rmended this, we should eat it while it is the most delicious. It would be such a pity if it were to get cold.¡±


    Mr. ire said, finally making up her mind.


    ¡°Thankfully, it seems like we haven¡¯t attracted much attention. So there should not be a problem if we eat quickly.¡±


    While there were some people looking in our direction, as Ms. ire said, it wasn¡¯t like everyone was staring at us.


    Besides, it was just Leo who they were looking at.


    Unlike the first time we were here, where Sebastian was in the lead, and Leo was in the back at a short distance, Leo would attract more attention than us, even if we were close by.


    ¡°Indeed. Let¡¯s eat it up now.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Then I¡¯ll eat too¡­¡±


    Ms. ire wanted to take advantage of this moment, when eyes were on Leo, and she began to eat.


    Ms. Lyra, Johanna and Nichs also started to eat. Leo¡¯s food had cooled off enough as well, and she was able to eat.


    Liza had been watching us, but upon seeing us eat, she took a bite of the food as well.

 Chapter 374

    Chapter 374


    Ms. ire Enjoyed The Fried Noodles


    ¡°Mr. Takumi! It is so delicious!¡±


    ¡°Haha. Indeed.¡±


    ¡°While the appearance and smell are odd, it tastes much better than I expected!¡±


    After taking a few bites of it, Ms. ire¡¯s eyes widened with surprise.


    Even if it wasn¡¯t quite perfect in my eyes, it was a new experience for her.


    Ms. Lyra also seemed to be pleasantly surprised by it. And so I was d that I had made the rmendation.


    Liza was eating hers greedily. Leo had eaten it before, and so it was no surprise to her.


    Ah, Leo¡­ That¡¯s right. I had forgotten about what happened when Leo ate it.


    The area around her mouth was already filthy. I would have to give her a bath once we returned to the mansion.


    ¡°Hah¡­ That was good. While Helena¡¯s food is excellent, it is nice to taste what the town had to offer on asion.¡±


    ¡°Hehe. I don¡¯t know if Ms. Helena will be happy to hear that.¡±


    Having her food praised was one of the things that she lived for. And so she might feel a little bit upset at Ms. ire¡¯s betrayal.


    Well, perhaps it would motivate her to make something even more delicious¡­


    ¡°But still, that was not enough.¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed.¡±


    The portions had not been veryrge, and so even after eating them, we were not quite full.


    ¡°Well, didn¡¯t Ms. Lyra buy some meat skewers? Where is she?¡±


    ¡°Yes, what is it?¡±


    ¡°Um¡­¡±


    I suddenly remembered how Ms. Lyra had bought a lot of the barbecued meat, and so I turned and saw that she was leaning in front of Leo and taking the meat off of the skewers so they would be easier to eat.


    I had thought that it was odd that she had bought so much, when no one had asked for them. But I suppose it was to give to Leo¡­


    Liza was also next to Ms. Lyra. And judging by how she was chewing, she had probably received some as well.


    Well, I suppose it was a good thing. Both Leo and Liza would be all the more fond of Ms. Lyra now.


    Besides, Leo had been waiting so patiently while we were shopping, so she should be able to eat to her heart¡¯s content.


    ¡°And there are plenty of other things to eat.¡±


    ¡°Oh, do you have any suggestions?¡±


    ¡°If you don¡¯t mind them being the same things I ate with your father, yes.¡±


    And so I waited for Leo to finish eating, and then we continued to walk down the street so I could show Ms. ire the other stalls.


    ¡°Lady ire, Mr. Takumi. Over here.¡±


    As the fried noodles were not enough to satisfy her, we continued to search for the next delicious meal. But this time, we wanted to find a ce where we could sit down and rx.


    Ms. Lyra then guided us away from the main street and to the same cafe that I had visited with Mr. Ekenhart.


    As Ms. Lyra was from the orphanage, she knew the town quite well. And this cafe was known to have few customers, as it was rather hidden away.


    It would be a little awkward to bring Mr. Ekenhart or Ms. ire to a busy ce. Even more so when Leo and Liza were with us.


    ¡°Sorry to keep you all waiting.¡±


    Just as we moved away from the main street, I had asked Nichs and Johanna to buy some food from a few stalls that I rmended.


    I had already talked to Ms. Lyra abouting to this cafe, and this way, we wouldn¡¯t have to worry about the food getting too cold.


    ¡°This¡­ I have never seen it before. What is it?¡±


    ¡°Uh, well¡­¡±


    What Nichs and Johanna had brought was some grilled dumplings and soup noodles.


    Of course, they were made of different ingredients than I was used to. But the noodles were in a kelp broth and tasted delicious.


    I exined this all to Ms. ire, but was also surprised to learn that Nichs and Johanna had been running.


    It was soup¡­ But they carried it without spilling anything. Was it a special skill they had?


    ¡°Hah¡­ They were both very delicious. Thank you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t thank me. Thank the people who made it.¡±


    I talked with Ms. ire as we leisurely drank tea.


    Leo was lying down on the ground and yawning, while Liza sat on her back.


    She was probably quite satisfied after all of the food that Ms. Lyra had prepared for her. But maybe she had eaten a little too much?


    ¡°Indeed. Still, it was all food I have never eaten before. But you knew about them, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Well, yes. I saw them when I came with Mr. Ekenhart. So I knew that they tasted good. Besides¡­some of them were like food back from home. Not exactly the same, of course.¡±


    Ms. ire started to ask me about the food, and so I told her about them. Obviously, I had to be careful when talking about other worlds when we were outside.


    Still, I told her what I could. How they were different or what was usually used, etcetera.

 Chapter 375

    Chapter 375


    Liza¡¯s Clothes Were Ready


    ¡°I see. So it¡¯s a little different then. But could the same thing be made, if you searched for the ingredients?¡±


    Apparently, Ms. ire was interested in the food from my world.


    She was always curious about things that she didn¡¯t know about.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know if you could replicate it perfectly¡­ Besides, a lot of it depends on the person who makes it. But perhaps you could make something very close.¡±


    ¡°I see. I would like to eat such food one day.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    It was very nostalgic for me.


    Even if I had only been in this world for a few months, I did miss some of the food. It was what I was raised on, after all.


    Once the business with the herbs was settled, and I had more time, I could try and search for things¡­


    It might be fun to consult Ms. Helena about it.


    ¡°Lady ire, Mr. Takumi. The clothes should be ready soon.¡±


    As we were talking, Ms. Lyra pointed to a clock.


    ¡°Well then. Let us return to Mr. Halton¡¯s store.¡±


    ¡°Yes. It was fun to be able to rx and talk here. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. Thank you.¡±


    We stood up from our seats and thanked each other.


    Ms. ire smiled, and she looked so bright under the light of the sun, which had started to set.


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting. The clothes are ready.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    We entered Mr. Halton¡¯s store and picked up the few items of clothing that had been modified for her.


    Now she wouldn¡¯t have to worry about clothes for some time.


    ¡°Well, why don¡¯t you try them on, Liza?¡±


    ¡°I can?¡±


    ¡°Aye, of course. They are your clothes, after all. Ms. Lyra, could you?¡±


    ¡°Yes, certainly. Mr. Halton. Where is the changing room?¡±


    ¡°I will take you to it.¡±


    Ms. Lyra took the clothes, and with Liza, followed Mr. Halton to the changing room.


    ¡°How do I look, papa?¡±


    ¡°Oh, it suits you well, Liza.¡±


    ¡°You look adorable, little Liza.¡±


    ¡°Eheheh¡­¡±


    With Ms. Lyra¡¯s help, Liza was able to change quickly. And when she returned, she swirled around as if to show off her new clothes.


    She really seemed to like them.


    Both Ms. ire and I agreed that she looked good.


    The clothes were made of a soft fabric and looked quitefortable.


    As for her tail, there was a hole in the back of her skirt, where her tail coulde out of.


    ¡°¡­Oh, I¡¯m going to go and show mama! Let¡¯s go, sister Lyra!¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. I¡¯m sure Leo will be happy. Sorry, Ms. Lyra.¡±


    ¡°No, not at all. Let¡¯s go then¡­¡±


    Liza must have been very excited, as she soon headed out the door with Ms. Lyra.


    I suppose it was because she had never had clothes bought for her before.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. We have also prepared this. What do you think?¡±


    ¡°A hat?¡±


    ¡°Yes. While I certainly have no such feelings, some people would look at beastkin with suspicion. And so there may be times when it is best to hide it¡­¡±


    Mr. Halton had produced a knitted hat.


    Only there were two bump-like protrusions on the top, that would cover her ears.


    And the sides had elongated ps with buttons, so that it could be strapped around your head.


    So he had made this hat to cover Liza¡¯s ears.


    While he was being vague, considering what had happened in the slums, it would not be a surprise if there were people with ill will towards her.


    Thankfully, Mr. Halton or Mr. Haines had not been like that. But there had definitely been some odd looks as we went around town.


    Though, in most cases, Leo would notice it first, and move so that Liza did not notice anything.


    ¡°So you went out of your way to make it. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. It is because you are a valued customer.


    Mr. Halton said with a bow.


    He did not want Liza to encounter any trouble. He was a kind man.


    ¡°Some of the clothes have also been altered so that she can cover her tail if necessary. We will do the same with the newly tailored clothes as well.¡±


    ¡°Thank you so much for your consideration.¡±


    He had even thought about hiding the tail, which would be much more difficult.


    Liza¡¯s tail drew attention because it moved with her emotions.


    And when hiding her ears, she would have to hide her tail as well.


    I thanked Mr. Halton and paid extra for the hat.


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°What! Is that Leo¡¯s voice? ¡­!¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Something is happening outside¡­ Oh!¡±


    Just as I was about to leave the store with Ms. ire, we heard Leo barking loudly.


    Leo was usually so calm. What had happened?


    It had to be something important for Leo to bark.


    And so I left Ms. ire and rushed outside.

 Chapter 376

    Chapter 376


    Leo Was Angry


    ¡°Leo¡­!¡±


    ¡°Grrr¡­!¡±


    The moment I stepped out of the store, I felt the tension in the air and stopped.


    Leo usually sat while she waited, but she was now standing and barking towards the road.


    It looked like she was about to pounce on something¡­


    ¡°Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°Tsk!¡±


    ¡°¡­! Leo!¡±


    ¡°Grrrrrr¡­!¡±


    Ms. ire and Nichs also came out of the store, but stopped in their tracks.


    I tried shouting Leo¡¯s name, but she did not turn. It was as if she could not even see me.


    ¡°Good Leo. Please calm down!¡±


    ¡°Leo!¡±


    ¡°Grrr¡­!¡±


    Ms. Lyra and Johanna were standing next to Leo.


    But Leo didn¡¯t seem to hear them either.


    ¡­What on earth¡­?


    And where was Liza!?


    I moved to the side and saw that Liza was near Leo¡¯s face.


    However, she stayed still as she squatted on the ground¡­


    And she was holding her head¡­ Is that!


    ¡°Liza!?¡±


    ¡°Papa!¡±


    While she was holding her head protectively, I saw something like blood between her fingers.


    No, it was blood.


    I shouted, and then Liza raised her head to look at me.


    And I saw that a thin stream of blood was flowing down the right side of her face.


    Had she been hurt!?


    Was that why Leo was so angry?


    ¡°Papa! Mama is angry!¡±


    ¡°Leo, calm down! Liza, it¡¯s alright now!¡±


    ¡°Grrrrr¡­!¡±


    However, Leo would still not listen to me.


    Damn it. What had happened! Liza was hurt and Leo was angry¡­


    But as I wondered what to do¡­


    Leo lowered her posture and I could see that she was about to jump.


    In order to calm her down, I started to move towards her.


    However, there was some kind of magic pressure emanating from Leo, and I found it difficult to move.


    I just needed to make her hear me¡­


    ¡°Grrr¡­ Gah¡­!?¡±


    ¡°Noooo!¡±


    ¡°Liza!?¡±


    While I tried to move forward, Leo was just about to jump. That was when Liza moved in front of Leo while shouting.


    While it would have been easy for Leo to push her away, she held herself back in spite of her rage.


    She looked at Liza questioningly, and seemed to calm down a little.


    ¡°Hey, Leo! What are you doing!¡±


    ¡°Grau!? ¡­Wou¡­wou¡­¡±


    I moved between Liza and Leo and grabbed the sides of Leo¡¯s face.


    Leo finally noticed me and her voice changed to one of sadness.


    It was then that I could hear the voices of those around us.


    ¡°We probably shouldn¡¯t stay here¡­¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    ¡°Mama. Are you alright?¡±


    While Leo hadn¡¯t attacked anyone, she had be quite mad.


    I could see that some spectators had gathered around us, and they had expressions of fear.


    Even though some of them would not know that she was a Silver Fenrir, now that they had seen Leo like this, it was no wonder that they were afraid.


    And now that they were talking, even more people began to gather around¡­


    I had thought that the people of Ractos were getting used to Leo. But this might change things for the worse.


    As I wondered what to do, Liza reached out towards Leo¡¯s front paw.


    Liza was hurt¡­she should be treated at once.


    But I could not use Weed Cultivation here¡­ In that case!


    ¡°Ms. ire, Ms. Lyra! Please ride on Leo! You too, Liza!¡±


    ¡°Ye-Yes.¡±


    ¡°Very well.¡±


    ¡°Kya!¡±


    ¡°Leo, you have to run. Move away from this ce!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    After seeing that everyone was on, I shouted to Leo.


    Leo seemed like she expected me to be mad at her, and so she was confused at first, but then nodded. Yes, she could hear me just fine now.


    ¡°Nichs, Johanna, I¡¯m sorry!¡±


    ¡°Yes, leave this pce to us.¡±


    ¡°Please protect Lady ire!¡±


    ¡°I will!¡±


    And with that, Leo started to run. And I ran right next to her.


    The people who had been surrounding us quickly moved out of the way. Well, perhaps it would be more urate to say that they ran away out of fear.


    While we moved away from the crowd, I thought I saw a familiar face, but this was no time to be thinking of such things.


    And so I pushed it out of my mind and focused on running.

 Chapter 377

    Chapter 377


    I Scolded Leo


    ¡°Ms. Lyra, please guide us to some ce that isn¡¯t crowded!¡±


    ¡°Certainly!¡±


    Mr. Lyra knew the town much better than me, and so she was bound to know of a good ce.


    And so for awhile, we continued to run farther away from the main streets and Mr. Halton¡¯s store.


    As Leo was adjusting her speed for me, I was somehow able to keep up.


    ¡°Turn to the right here¡­just a little farther!¡±


    Thanks to Ms. Lyra¡¯s guidance, we were headed to a secluded spot.


    The passersby looked at Leo with astonishment, but it could not be helped.


    ¡°Turn this corner and¡­here it is. Hardly anyone passes through here.¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­ Phew¡­¡±


    ¡°Are you alright, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Yes, somehow¡­ Hah¡­¡±


    It was a small clearing, but big enough for Leo to rest.


    Now that I thought about it, we had also just passed Ms. Isabelle¡¯s store¡­ That was why the streets looked familiar.


    ¡°Hah¡­ Ms. ire, Ms. Lyra. Could you help Liza get down. Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    ¡°¡­Papa?¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Liza. I¡¯ll have that injury treated.¡±


    I told Leo to lie low so that the others could get off. She seemed to look a little crestfallen, as she assumed that I was angry at her.


    Once Liza was on the ground, I checked her head.


    She had been holding her hand against the cut, but it had not stopped the bleeding.


    Perhaps she was too weak to hold it firmly.


    While it was not a deep cut, and there wasn¡¯t that much blood, it still looked bad.


    I told her not to worry, and then I looked around.


    ¡°Good, there is no one here¡­¡±


    Still, I made sure to hide behind Leo as I put a hand on the ground and activated Weed Cultivation.


    Perhaps it was affected by my frantess, but the Loe seemed to grow faster than usual.


    I then picked it and changed it into a usable state.


    ¡°Liza,e over here¡­¡±


    ¡°What is that?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m going to heal that cut. Then it won¡¯t hurt anymore.¡±


    I called Liza over and gently ced the Loe on her forehead.


    ¡°!¡±


    ¡°Just wait a moment, okay? Then it should feel better¡­¡±


    Liza grimaced at first, but I told her that the pain would pass.


    Leo and the others watched with worried expressions.


    But I had seen the effects of Loe before, and was sure that she would bepletely fine.


    ¡°¡­Huh¡­? It doesn¡¯t hurt?¡±


    ¡°Yes. You¡¯re all fine now. And there is not even a trace left.¡±


    Liza¡¯s eyes widened with surprise when the pain faded away.


    While the blood remained, there were no scabs and scars left on Liza¡¯s face, much to my relief.


    ¡°Hah¡­ She is fine now.¡±


    ¡°It doesn¡¯t hurt anymore¡­ That was amazing, papa!¡±


    ¡°Haha. Really?¡±


    ¡°Little Liza, I am so d.¡±


    ¡°What a relief.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    Ms. ire and Ms. Lyra were also happy to see that she was healed.


    Ms. Lyra then started to wipe all of the blood off of Liza¡¯s face.


    ¡°Now¡­ Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wu-wuff!? ¡­Wou.¡±


    And so I left Liza to Ms. ire and Lyra¡¯s care, and turned my attention to Leo.


    Leo looked a little nervous, like she was dreading what was toe.


    ¡°¡­Wuff. Kuuun¡­¡±


    She barked apologetically and theny on her back.


    That was Leo¡¯s surrendering pose.


    Before she was a Silver Fenrir, she would do this when I had caught her in some mischief.


    ¡°Leo¡­ Surely you understand that you cannot do such things in a town full of people. Do you know how many you frightened? And they were starting to understand that you aren¡¯t just a scary monster¡­¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    I talked to Leo as shey on her back.


    Even though Leo would not harm anyone intentionally, had Liza not moved in front of her and stopped her, Leo would have likely jumped out and knocked over a lot of people.


    And those people might have been injured.


    If that happened, Leo may not be able to enter this town anymore.


    While Ms. ire and the others would defend Leo, the townspeople would not like it.


    ¡°Don¡¯t you see what it could mean? If you are no longer able to visit this town, then you won¡¯t be able to eat any of the delicious food anymore¡­¡±


    ¡°Wait, papa! Mama did nothing wrong. She was angry for me!¡±


    ¡°Liza?¡±


    As I started to lecture to Leo, Liza suddenly threw her arms around Leo protectively.


    Hey, Leo¡­ We¡¯re not finished here. Don¡¯t make that facial expression just because you like having your belly rubbed¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 378

    Chapter 378


    I Asked Why Leo Was Angry


    ¡°Mama was angry¡­because I got hurt!¡±


    ¡°¡­Now that you mention it, how did you get hurt?¡±


    Once Leo¡¯s anger had subsided, my mind had been full of the need to treat Liza¡¯s injury.


    But after that was done, I had to think about the people in the town, and talking to Leo¡­ And so I had forgotten about asking the reason.


    I supposed it showed how much I had lost my cool as well.


    ¡°Lyra, what happened?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ It was when Lady Liza was showing her new clothes to good Leo¡­¡±


    Ms. Lyra had been with Liza, so she would know what had happened.


    ¡°She was very happy as she showed off the new clothes. And good Leo was also quite happy.¡±


    I couldn¡¯t help but smile as I imagined the scene.


    ¡°Aside from me, Nichs and Johanna were also there and watching. But then good Leo seemed to discover something, as she turned her head.¡±


    ¡°Is that right, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Leo was still having her belly rubbed, but she nodded.


    ¡°Right after that, I heard the voice of a young man who was shouting. And then a rock came flying.¡±


    ¡°Shouting and then a rock¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. It sounded like ¡®You monster!¡¯ It was going towards Liza. But it was so sudden that Johanna and I could not react in time. And then one of the rocks hit¡­ Oh, I am so sorry. It was our fault for not watching her more closely¡­¡±


    So someone had called Liza a monster and threw a rock at her¡­ I had seen someone familiar when running. Could it be¡­


    As I thought about it, Ms. Lyra bowed her head and apologized.


    ¡°No, there is no need for that, Ms. Lyra. The only person to me is the person who threw the rock.¡±


    ¡°Still, we should have anticipated such a thing. Not just for Lady Liza, but also to protect you and Lady ire¡­¡±


    Ms. Lyra bit her lip and looked quite troubled.


    Well, while I didn¡¯t expect such things from her, the other two were guards, so they probably should be cautious of such incidents.


    ¡°Raise your head, Lyra. There is no point in moping about what has passed now. You can think about what you should have done once we returned to the mansion.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Lady ire.¡±


    Ms. ire talked to Lyra in a firm voice.


    While I didn¡¯t me her at all¡­I suppose it was different because they were servants to nobles.


    Perhaps I would have to talk to Ms. ireter. I didn¡¯t want Ms. Lyra to be punished over it¡­


    ¡°In any case, what about this person who threw the rock?¡±


    ¡°I do not know. The voice was not familiar, and he was hidden in the crowd. And that is when good Leo¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, that is when Leo became angry.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!?¡±


    As Leo had seen it happen, she was angry and about to pounce on the culprit.


    I nodded with satisfaction at this exnation, but Leo looked at me with rm. I suppose she thought I was going to scold her again.


    ¡°Yes. It was very¡­ I could feel a kind of pressure, and could not move¡­¡±


    Ms. Lyra looked towards Leo as she recalled the moment.


    I had felt it as soon as I left the store.


    What was that¡­ Something from Leo had weighed down on me¡­ It was a strange feeling.


    But I wasn¡¯t scared, because it was Leo.


    Of course, it was different with everyone else.


    In any case, thanks to that, no one around us had been able to move.


    Also, Leo¡¯s fur had been shining a little¡­ Perhaps it was also reflecting the sunlight. But it seemed prettier than usual.


    ¡°Leo. What was that?¡±


    ¡°Wu-wuff? Wuff-wuff¡­ Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Uhh¡­¡±


    ording to Leo, she did not understand it herself. But she was angry and her whole body had been tense.


    Perhaps when Silver Fenrirs be tense like that, it results in some kind of phenomenon¡­


    It must be rted to magic energy.


    Well, if Leo didn¡¯t understand it, then it would be very difficult to exin.


    But I would just assume that it was something that Silver Fenrirs could do.


    I then rted this to Ms. Lyra and Ms. ire.


    Because they were not able to understand Leo.

 Chapter 379

    Chapter 379


    The Culprit Was Someone From The Slums


    ¡°I see¡­ Good Leo¡­ Um, Silver Fenrirs. I now understand why humans are no match for them.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Even well-trained guards like Nichs and Johanna were unable to move.¡±


    It was the same with me¡­ I could barely move at all.


    Every step felt incredibly heavy as I tried to make my way towards Leo.


    The only reason that I made it in time was that Leo was charging up her energy¡­


    So in a way, it was a good thing that Leo was so angry.


    If she had decided to act while holding back a little, like she did with the orcs, then she would have moved immediately.


    ¡°So, Leo. Did you recognize the person who threw the rock? You saw him before he threw it, right?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ It¡¯s what I thought then¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­


    Leo nodded and answered when I asked about the culprit.


    Liza could understand Leo as well, and she looked at me, but kept silent.


    ¡°What did good Leo say?¡±


    ¡°Uhh¡­¡±


    I then exined it to Ms. ire and Ms. Lyra.


    That it was one of the people who had attacked Liza in the slums.


    Ms. Lyra had said that it was the voice of a young man, and considering that he called Liza a monster, it had to be the person I had seen in the crowd.


    I suppose one of them just happened to be near Mr. Halton¡¯s store¡­


    Previously, they had fled when they saw Leo, but this time, he had stayed and thrown a rock. He had guts at least. Though I didn¡¯t like to praise him.


    Had I been there, I might have be just as angry as Leo.


    I was still angry right now, but knew that I had to stay calm.


    ¡°I see. Someone from the slums¡­¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s what Leo thinks. And I saw him myself, so it must be true. Still, Leo. Couldn¡¯t you have stood in front of Liza or taken her and run away?¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­ Wuff-wuff. Wuff.¡±


    Hmm You aren¡¯t used to hostile humans, so it¡¯s difficult to know what to do?


    ¡­Well, that was true. She never had to worry about enemies when we were in Japan.


    She was a friendly dog, and most of the people in this world were also nice to her¡­ I suppose it was mainly because of the duke.


    Monsters were one thing, but I suppose she didn¡¯t know how to react when facing humans.


    Besides, the hostility was towards Liza this time.


    ¡°Sorry for scolding you, Leo. I didn¡¯t realize it was because you were protecting Liza. And Liza, thank you for stopping Leo. That was very good of you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Ehehe¡­¡±


    Now that I knew the reason, I apologized to Leo and patted her on the stomach.


    Leo sighed with relief and barkedfortably.


    ¡°Still, little Liza. Aren¡¯t you angry at the person who did that? Of course, it was good that you stopped Leo¡­¡±


    Ms. ire asked.


    It wasn¡¯t that she thought Liza should be angry and fight back. She was just curious. After all, Ms. ire had not seen her in the slums.


    She had done nothing wrong, but was insulted and then had a rock thrown at her. Surely that would make you angry! Damn it!


    ¡­Oh, now I was getting worked up again.


    Leo seemed to notice this, and she suddenly shuddered.


    I¡¯m not mad at you, okay?


    Anyway, I¡¯ll take in a deep breath and calm myself.


    ¡°Yes. I¡¯m not angry. There will be no end to it if I am angry at every person¡­¡±


    Said Liza in a sad voice. I suppose she was remembering her life in the slums.


    Anger brought on more anger and could make this worse¡­ Well, it depended on different things, but I suppose things would often go in a worse direction.


    ¡°I¡¯ve been hurt many times because I¡¯m a beastkin¡­ But it just got worse when I became angry. And so I have to bear it¡­ And then they get too tired.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    Liza seemed like she was trying to hold back tears. Ms. ire looked like she was at a loss for words.


    Ms. Lyra was shocked, and Leo was looking at Liza with a concerned expression.


    So, bearing it was the best way to make it stop for her.


    It made me wish we had done a little more to punish those people when we found her¡­


    No, as Liza said, that would just make them more angry.


    Even if Leo was with me, and I was training, I could not be too confident.


    Besides, if people started to hold a grudge against us, Liza might be hurt as well.


    It was best to try and avoid incidents like these¡­

 Chapter 380

    Chapter 380


    We Comforted Liza


    ¡°Getting angry was no use. So was crying or apologizing. They just found it funny¡­ And so I didn¡¯t cry. I didn¡¯t want my grandfather to worry about me¡­ So I tried not to¡­¡±


    ¡°Liza¡­¡±


    When she still had her grandfather, Liza was mostly protected.


    However, once he passed away, there was no one to defend her, and she stuck out for being a beastkin.


    I didn¡¯t know when he had died, but regardless, the time she had suffered must have felt very long indeed.


    Even now, she held back her tears with gritted teeth and forced a smile.


    Ms. ire, Ms. Lyra and Leo also seemed like they were at a loss for words.


    Just what had been done to her¡­ I could imagine, thinking back on the time we had rescued her.


    Regardless, she had been covered in mud and scratches.


    ¡°¡­Little Liza!¡±


    ¡°Kya! ¡­Sister ire?¡±


    Ms. ire seemed to be full of emotion as she imagined Liza¡¯s past, and so she suddenly threw her arms around her.


    Liza looked surprised at first, but didn¡¯t seem to mind.


    ¡°You were very strong. But we won¡¯t let anyone hurt you from now on! You can be proud and tell your grandfather that you really did do your best!¡±


    ¡°Sister¡­ire. I did? Do you think he would be proud of me?¡±


    ¡°Of course! And if anyone says otherwise, I will be very angry with them! Now, there is no need for you to bear anything. From now on, you should onlyugh!¡±


    ¡°Heh¡­ Really? I did well then. While it hurt, I did do my best. Waahh¡­!¡±


    ¡°Yes, yes. It¡¯s okay to cry now. Since you did so well. Cry as much as you want, and then you canughter.


    ¡°Sniff¡­yes. I would ratherugh¡­ I want to have fun¡­ Waaaahhh!¡±


    Ms. ire embraced Liza and patted her on the head gently.


    Everything that Liza had been holding back until now was unleashed, and tears were flowing from her eyes.


    While I could only imagine what she had experienced up until now. There was no reason for a child to have to bear such things. I knew that clearly.


    And so I would have to think of ways to ensure that her life would be fun and full of smiles from now on.


    ¡°Sniff¡­¡±


    ¡°Have you calmed down?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ I¡¯m sorry.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. You should cry when you want to, andugh when you want to. You don¡¯t have to hold back your emotions any more.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes. Thank you, sister ire.¡±


    Liza had been crying loudly for some time.


    And Ms. ire didn¡¯t mind that her clothes were getting wet, and she continued to hold Liza.


    Ms. Lyra and I also asionally patted her on the headfortingly, until she finally calmed down.


    Leo was still on her back in the surrendering pose¡­


    I suppose she could not move, because Liza was clutching onto her fur with one hand.


    ¡°Papa, I¡¯m sorry. The new clothes you bought¡­got dirty¡­¡±


    ¡°You don¡¯t have to worry about that. If you can¡¯t wear them anymore, then we will just buy new ones! Besides, we¡¯ll have to do that anyway, since you will continue to grow.¡±


    After she stopped crying, Liza let go of Ms. ire and turned to me to apologize about the clothes.


    There was some blood on them, and since they had dried, they would probably stain.


    However, it¡¯s not like it was her fault.


    While it might be difficult to remove the stains, if it was too bad, we could buy more¡­ Thankfully, I had plenty of money.


    If anything, if she did get muddy after ying with Tilura, then I would justugh and maybe join them.


    And then we would both apologize to the person who had to wash them.


    ¡°Yes¡­ Thank you, papa and mama and sister ire and Lyra.¡±


    ¡°Hehe. Mr. Takumi, you will have to buy her lots of pretty clothes now.¡±


    ¡°And I will help you choose them.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    While it wasn¡¯t everything that I wished to say, Liza nodded understandingly and smiled as she thanked everyone.


    Ms. ire and Ms. Lyra smiled back at her.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyaha! Mama!¡±


    ¡°Hehe. I think good Leo is trying to reassure her as well.¡±


    ¡°Yes, indeed.¡±


    Liza finally let go of her fur, and so Leo turned over onto her stomach.


    And then she pressed her face against Liza and licked her cheek.


    While it was nice that everyone was smiling amidst this peaceful atmosphere¡­


    I was reminded of what a mess Leo made when she licked someone¡¯s face¡­

 Chapter 381

    Chapter 381


    We Decided To Visit Ms. Isabelle¡¯s Store


    ¡°¡­Leo. Aren¡¯t you licking a little too much?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Leo finally stopped and then tilted her head in puzzlement.


    Well, it was toote regardless.


    ¡°Ah, I knew it.¡±


    ¡°Liza, your face is all sticky now.¡±


    ¡°Because Leo was licking her. Hah¡­¡±


    ¡°?¡±


    And it didn¡¯t help that we had ate lunch, so not much time had passed since Leo ate.


    Though, Liza didn¡¯t seem to care, and even seemed happy.


    ¡°Well, we can¡¯t keep walking around town now.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. If only there was some ce where she could wash up¡­¡±


    Because Leo was so big, it had even gotten on her fur and ears.


    As we wondered what to do, I remembered the route we had taken whileing here.


    ¡°Ah, perhaps she could was up at Ms. Isabelle¡¯s store?¡±


    ¡°Isabelle? Yes, she would wee us. And we won¡¯t have to worry about other people seeing us.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Since it is close by, we should go and ask her.¡±


    We just needed some water to wash her face and ears.


    She would get clean enough with a slight rinse off and toweling.


    And she can take a more thorough bath back at the mansion.


    Ms. Isabelle was a very intelligent person, so she should have any prejudices against Liza.


    ¡°Leo, don¡¯t do that too much, alright?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyaha! Mama!¡±


    ¡°Hehe. They seem to be having fun.¡±


    ¡°Yes. It¡¯s good to see that she isn¡¯t too bothered by what happened earlier.¡±


    We were then just about to head towards Ms. Isabelle¡¯s store, but then we remembered that we had left Nichs and Johanna behind. And so Ms. Lyra went to go and check up on them.


    While we were waiting, Ms. ire and I watched as Liza and Leo yed.


    Now that Leo knew that Liza was going to wash upter, she did not hesitate to lick her face¡­ And so I had to tell her to hold back a little, or it would get on her clothes as well.


    Still, it was an odd feeling, sitting here with Ms. ire and watching Liza and Leo.


    It was kind of like we were a family. It was our day off, and we took our child and dog on a nice walk¡­


    Obviously, Liza was not my real daughter, and Leo was now a Silver Fenrir. We weren¡¯t even close to a real family.


    And as someone who had nothing special, outside of my Gift, I probably shouldn¡¯t even consider the possibility of being with Ms. ire. Still, the thought still went through my head.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°What!?¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Is there a problem?¡±


    ¡°N-no. Not at all¡­¡±


    ¡°You sound weird, papa¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    As I had been thinking of such things when Ms. ire called to me, I couldn¡¯t help but be rmed.


    Calm down¡­ You were just imagining things, and there was a specific reason for why you were here like this.


    Even Liza and Leo wereughing at me. And so I had to calm down.


    ¡°You were very impressive, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    Ms. ire suddenly said to me with a smile.


    That didn¡¯t help me calm down at all.


    ¡°Earlier¡­ Even when Leo was angry, I couldn¡¯t do anything. In the end, it was only because you and Liza were able to act that¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ It cannot be helped. It was really hard to move back then. But Leo and I are buddies, so that¡¯s probably what was different.¡±


    ¡°That¡­may be¡­ But you were also quick to act after that. And I¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, because people were starting to gather around. I didn¡¯t want them to be afraid of Leo, and so I could only think of getting away. Though, it probably looks quite cowardly. Running away.¡±


    Ms. ire was impressed by my actions.


    And while I was ttered, I also trained every day. So it was not really a surprise.


    Besides, I felt responsible for Leo as her owner and buddy.. I didn¡¯t want her to hurt any innocent people.


    Perhaps there was something else we could have done, other than running away. But I was not able to think of anything at that moment.


    Running was easier than staying and trying to exin or find the cause¡­ It did look pretty bad.


    Though, I was also thinking about treating Liza¡¯s injury.


    ¡°No, I don¡¯t think so at all. You were able to give Lyra and me directions and you took Liza and Leo and fled. No one else would have been able to act in the same way.¡±


    ¡°Well¡­ Perhaps¡­¡±


    But it was still mostly because I was dealing with Leo.


    Also¡­I had experienced the orc attack in Range vige as well¡­


    Though, Leo would get mad if she knew I hadpared her to orcs.

 Chapter 382

    Chapter 382


    The Confusion Had Died Down


    While Ms. ire was looking at me with admiration, I felt that I had not done much to deserve it.


    Still, it was true that a person¡¯s true personality came out during emergencies¡­


    Now that I thought about it, she wasn¡¯t the first person to look up to me in this way.


    There was also Tilura.


    When we first met, she had been so impressed that I was able to interact with Leo as equals.


    As they were sisters, they were alike in a lot of ways.


    Regardless, I was both happy and a little embarrassed by Ms. ire¡¯s words. And like that, we waited for Ms. Lyra to return.


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting.¡±


    After some time had passed, Ms. Lyra returned with Nichs and Johanna.


    And I couldn¡¯t help but be relieved to see them again.


    Even though Leo seemed like she had enjoyed how awkward I looked while talking with Ms. ire.


    ¡°How were things over there?¡±


    ¡°Yes. After you left, the scene was quite chaotic for some time. Even the town guards rushed the ce, but we exined everything to them and the civilians as well.¡±


    So the guards hade¡­ Well, I suppose it wasn¡¯t a surprise, given how many people had gathered.


    Perhaps someone had called them, saying that there was a monster going wild.


    ¡°And did you also tell them about how Liza was attacked with a rock?¡±


    ¡°Yes. As we had witnessed it as well, we exined it to them. How someone on our side was injured, and that good Leo became angry.¡±


    ¡°The guards said that they will search for the person who threw the rock. After questioning the witnesses, they were satisfied that it was not Leo¡¯s fault.¡±


    Well, I suppose I would leave it to the guards then.


    I didn¡¯t want to get involved if I didn¡¯t have to. At worst, it could turn everyone in the slums against us.


    Still, I was surprised that it had been so easy to convince the guards, given how Leo had such an effect on everyone there¡­


    ¡°Did they really believe you so quickly?¡±


    ¡°Not all of them¡­ But most of them did. I think it was because some of them had met Leo before¡­ And they had seen how you are with her in town.¡±


    ¡°They saw us?¡±


    ¡°Yes. When you were with His Grace. I think seeing you two together before helped. Because people were watching you.¡±


    ¡°As Nichs says, there were a lot of people who had interacted with Leo before, and helped persuade the guards that Leo wouldn¡¯t attack people without any reason.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Well, that is a relief to hear. However, there were people who had yed with Leo there¡­?¡±


    I had visited this town several times with Leo, and people had seen how friendly she was.


    As for the people who had yed with Leo¡­ I suppose it was that time in front of Mr. Kalis¡¯s store?


    But weren¡¯t all of those people children¡­?


    ¡°Uhh¡­ One person was talking about how wonderful good Leo is¡­like she worshipped her. She seemed to know Lady ire as well?¡±


    ¡°Could it be Emerelda?¡±


    ¡°Ah, Ms. Emerelda¡­¡±


    The name was a little nostalgic.


    We had met her when Leo and I first visited Ractos.


    She had petted Leo and waspletely infatuated by the soft fur.


    It was not difficult to imagine how she had started to adore Leo and spread the good news¡­


    As she had helped Nichs and Johanna in exining to the guards and the others, I would have to thank her if I ever met her again.


    Well, she would be satisfied if she could just pet Leo¡­


    I was relieved that the problem hadn¡¯t been blown out of proportion, and so I listened to the rest of their report as we started to make our way to Ms. Isabelle¡¯s store.


    We had to go soon, or it would be quitete by the time we returned to the mansion.


    ¡°Huh? This ce¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm? You know it, Liza? Well, it certainly sticks out. So it¡¯s not too surprising.¡±


    After leaving the za and just when Ms. Isabelle¡¯s store came into view, Liza raised her voice while riding on Leo.


    As she lived in the slums, perhaps she had seen Ms. Isabelle¡¯s store before.


    She still had the same strange hexagram sign and ck door. The store looked so differentpared to the buildings around it, which made it difficult to forget.


    ¡°Do I know it? I¡¯ve been inside several times! It¡¯s where the nice grandmother lives!¡±


    ¡°You know Isabelle?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I visited with my grandfather. I like her, because she was always nice to me!¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    So the old man who had adopted Liza had been friends with Ms. Isabelle.


    I wondered what business he had here. I suppose I could just ask her.


    ¡°Well, you¡¯ll have to stay here, Leo. Sorry, but will you be able to wait quietly?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°We will do what we can to avoid a scene like earlier.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    As always, we had Leo wait outside.


    Due to what had happened in front of Mr. Halton¡¯s store, I was a little concerned, but Leo barked and nodded as if to say that I had nothing to worry about.


    Nichs also reassured me with a serious expression.


    Besides, surely the same thing wouldn¡¯t happen twice in a row. Besides, Liza would be inside of the building this time.


    Johanna would also wait outside and was currently looking at the surrounding area.


    There were fewer people here anyway, and I doubted there would be anything like a crowd this time.

 Chapter 383

    Chapter 383


    I Asked About The Old Man Who Rescued Liza


    ¡°Excuse me¡­¡±


    ¡°Grandmother!¡±


    ¡°What¡¯s all that racket¡­ Oh, Mr. Takumi? And Liza? That¡¯s an odd pairing. ¡­And Lady ire!?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s been a while, Isabelle. I think thest time we were here was when you checked Mr. Takumi¡¯s magic energy?¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s right. I¡¯m d to see that you are doing well. So, what can I do for you today?¡±


    As I hade once with Sebastian, this was my third time here¡­


    Liza was happy to see Ms. Isabelle, and she immediately called out to her.


    Ms. Isabelle heard us entering, and came out from behind a curtain in the back.


    She then moved to the counter before noticing me and Liza. And she looked quite surprised to see us.


    I suppose it was because we hadn¡¯t told her in advance that we wereing.


    ¡°I¡¯m very sorry¡­ But we were wondering if Liza could wash her face here?¡±


    ¡°Liza? Oh, my. She is quite dirty, isn¡¯t she¡­¡±


    Ms. Isabelle looked at Liza over the counter. I then exined to her what had happened.


    ¡°I see¡­ I have heard about your Silver Fenrir. And being licked by such a huge animal¡­ Well, it is no surprise. Of course, you may. There is a washing area in the back that you can use freely.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Liza?¡±


    ¡°Thank you, grandmother!¡±


    ¡°Then I will go and help her.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    After hearing my exnation, Ms. Isabelle nodded understandingly and agreed to let Liza wash up.


    As Leo could not enter her store, Ms. Isabelle had not seen Leo yet¡­ But she heard the rumors and talked with Sebastian.


    I then thanked her, and sent Liza to the washing area.


    Ms. Lyra would apany her as well.


    It was nice to have her around during times like these.


    While they were gone, I continued to talk with Ms. Isabelle.


    ¡°Still, Liza is now with you two. What happened?¡±


    ¡°Before we talk about that, it seems like you know Liza quite well? And Liza said that she visited this ce a few times before.¡±


    ¡°Yes. The old man who helped her¡­ Reyndorf was an old friend of mine. And so he would often visit me with Liza.¡±


    So the old man¡¯s name was Reyndorf¡­


    Now that I thought about it, I had never asked Liza what his name was.


    After that, Ms. Isabelle talked to me about him as we waited.


    Apparently, this Mr. Reyndorf was a traveler without a home. And he would visit this town of Ractos quite often.


    He would stop by this store to buy magic tools and things that would be useful on his travels. And that was how he had met Ms. Isabelle.


    As it was decades ago, it was probably before Ms. ire was born.


    They would talk about magic and traveling¡­ And before she knew it, he was a regr at her store.


    When talking about him, Ms. Isabelle had a far away look on her face.


    But as he traveled a lot, he could only visit her once every few months¡­ Sometimes she would not see him for years at a time. But whenever he happened to be in Ractos, he would always pay her a visit.


    However¡­ He stopped traveling altogether a few years ago, when he found Liza.


    That must have been around seven years ago¡­ It would be too difficult to travel while caring for a beastkin baby, and it would not be good for the child. And so he decided to stay in Ractos.


    That being said, as he had been traveling for years, Mr. Reyndorf had no savings. And so he had no choice but to settle down in the slums.


    While Ms. Isabelle had been against him living in such a dangerous ce, he had learned how to deal with such people on his travels, and so no problems had urred.


    And now that he was no longer traveling, he would slowly try and save up money so that he could eventually buy a house for Liza to live in.


    ¡°Reyndorf was very fond of Liza. He no longer had that sharp expression that he did when he was a traveler. I think she brought peace to his heart. But why is Liza now with you and Lady ire?¡±


    ¡°About that¡­¡±


    And so I told her about the situation when I had found Liza. And how Liza had talked of her grandfather¡¯s death.


    ¡°I see¡­ So he is gone¡­ Well, at this age, it is not unusual for your friends to pass away.¡±


    Ms. Isabelle said as she looked up at the ceiling.


    I could not tell what she was thinking, but it looked like she was offering a prayer to her old friend.


    ¡°¡­Haah. So he died before achieving his dream¡­ I suppose in a way, it was good that she was taken in by you and Lady ire. Perhaps it was through his guidance. Hisst wish¡­¡±


    ¡°Perhaps¡­¡±


    Leo had been acting like she was searching for something as she moved through the slums. And then she found Liza.


    Both Mr. Ekenhart and I knew nothing¡­


    I had thought that it was because of some connection between beastkin and beast type monsters, but perhaps there was more to it.


    But there were so many people in Ractos, and it wasn¡¯t like her senses were sharpened with herbs. Finding Liza should have been even harder than finding Sherry.


    When I thought about it like that, it did seem like Mr. Reyndorf had entrusted Liza into my care. Which was quite sobering.

 Chapter 384

    Chapter 384


    We Decided to Check Her Magic Energy


    ¡°Reyndorf could defend himself, and the people of the slums knew that. And so none of them ever attacked Liza. But if he is gone¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ When we found her, she was surrounded by several people and being bullied¡­¡±


    I then told Ms. Isabelle about how things were when we found her, as well as what had just happened earlier.


    While Ms. Isabelle scowled when she heard this, she also seemed to think that it was not that surprising, considering that Liza was a beastkin¡­


    After all, people who have not been properly educated were more likely to believe rumors and have prejudices against beastkin.


    Still, Ms. Isabelle had kind eyes when she talked about Liza. It was clear that she was quite fond of her.


    ¡°Papa. I¡¯m all clean now! Thank you, grandmother!¡±


    ¡°Haha. I¡¯m d to see it.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    As I was talking with Ms. Isabelle, Liza returned from the back very cheerfully.


    Ms. Lyra had helped her wash and dry off.


    As for Ms. Isabelle, she just nced at Liza and replied coolly.


    Perhaps she was bashful.


    Considering Ms. Isabelle¡¯s age, Liza really was like a granddaughter to her¡­ As I thought about this, I saw the corner of her mouth lift up.


    So she was happy after all.


    ¡°Ehehe. Grandmother¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh? What is it? You didn¡¯t act like such a pampered child before.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Papa and mama¡­And sister ire told me. That I don¡¯t need to bear anything.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    Liza had gone around the counter and thrown her arms around Ms. Isabelle.


    Ms. Isabelle seemed a little surprised by this, but upon hearing Liza¡¯s words, she smiled kindly.


    It seemed like she understood what we had told Liza¡­ That children shouldn¡¯t hold back, and receive affection where it was given.


    As Liza wagged her tail, Ms. Isabelle gently patted her on the head.


    It was quite clear that she was used to it, and had been like this with Liza while Mr. Reyndorf was still alive.


    They really did look like a grandmother and granddaughter.


    ¡°Yes, it is not a bad thing at all. But what do you mean, ¡®papa and mama¡¯? Don¡¯t tell me that Lady ire¡­¡±


    ¡°No, it is not I¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha. She is talking about Leo. Liza wanted to call her that, so I let her.¡±


    ¡°Ah, this Silver Fenrir. Well, Liza has sure found herself under the protection of a formidable guardian.¡±


    While Ms. Isabelle was surprised that it was Leo who was Liza¡¯s ¡®mama,¡¯ she also understood what kind of monster a Silver Fenrir was. And so she was happy to see that Liza was well protected.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Why don¡¯t you use this opportunity to have Lady Liza¡¯s magic energy checked?¡±


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right. That is a good idea.¡±


    ¡°Check her magic energy?¡±


    As I was talking with Liza and Ms. Isabelle, Mr. Lyra suddenly made a suggestion.


    Now that I thought about it, previously, when Ms. ire was teaching me magic, we had talked about Liza¡¯s magic energy.


    And so I had been considering having her checked by Ms. Isabelle.


    Well, it was the perfect time. And I knew that it would not take long.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry to have to ask you to do another thing. But could you?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t mind. It¡¯s easy to prepare. Just wait here for one moment.¡±


    ¡°Aye, thank you. Would you mind if we put on some tea?¡±


    ¡°No, help yourself. But make some for me as well.¡±


    ¡°Yes, certainly.¡±


    Ms. Isabelle immediately nodded and agreed to check Liza¡¯s magic energy.


    But as she let go of Liza and made to leave, Ms. Lyra called out to her.


    As we were resting, and had not drank anything since lunch, she wanted to put on some tea.


    And after getting her permission, Ms. Lyra headed to the back of the shop.


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting. Now, I shall check your magic energy.¡±


    ¡°Did you never check it when she visited you before?¡±


    ¡°Reyndorf never asked me to do it. I think he was going to do it when Liza was a little older?¡±


    ¡°I suppose that makes sense.¡±


    Back then, Liza would have been a lot younger.


    She was still young now, and perhaps not the best age to start thinking about using magic.


    But then again, if it was the level of magic that I was using, then it was simple stuff that woulde in handy in day to day life.


    Even Tilura seemed to have been taught magic for the first time recently, so perhaps they didn¡¯t usually teach it to young children.


    But I think it wasn¡¯t that you couldn¡¯t use magic at a young age, just that if you used it wrong, it could be dangerous.


    Like if they misused fire magic in a house made of wood.


    As for Ms. Lyra, after serving us all tea, she went outside to see Leo and the others.


    Since she was carrying her bag, she was probably going to give Leo some milk.

 Chapter 385

    Chapter 385


    She Could Use A Different Kind Of Magic


    ¡°Liza. There is no need to think about anything. Just try cing your hand here.¡±


    ¡°Like this?¡±


    Ms. Isabelle told Liza to ce her hand on top of the crystal ball.


    It was the same one she used when checking my Gift.


    ¡°Wow¡­it¡¯s pretty¡­¡±


    As Liza ced her hand on it, it began to blink red, and then a yellow light shone out from it.


    It was a different color when I did it¡­ Did it change depending on if you had the Gift or not?


    Liza was quite impressed when she saw the crystal ball change color.


    Indeed, it was quite pretty seeing the light emanating from the ball.


    When I had done it, I was too busy thinking about the Gift, that I hadn¡¯t taken any notice of it.


    ¡°Hmm. I see.¡±


    ¡°How is it, grandmother?¡±


    ¡°Ms. Isabelle?¡±


    ¡°Do not rush me. Hmm. Indeed¡­¡±


    Ms. Isabelle stared into the crystal ball and nodded to herself. And so Liza and I couldn¡¯t help but ask her about what she saw.


    Liza had said that she wanted to use magic, and I was quite curious about her magic energy as well.


    After thinking for a brief moment, Ms. Isabelle then raised her face towards us.


    ¡°Yes, you have magic energy, Liza.¡±


    ¡°Yay!¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s too early to celebrate. Though, I understand how you feel.¡±


    ¡°But what else is there to know?¡±


    Could it be that Liza had the Gift as well?


    But it was supposed to be incredibly rare. Only one person in a million might have it.


    ¡­But what else could there be?


    ¡°She has just as much magic energy as most people. Even more than Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Is that so?¡±


    ¡°Aye. That¡¯s why it was blinking so much. That means you have a lot of magic energy.¡±


    Now that I thought about it, it had been blinking more than it did when I touched it.


    Of course, I didn¡¯t remember it all too clearly.


    ¡°And the yellow light after that. It might be a small problem.¡±


    ¡°The yellow light?¡±


    ¡°It was so pretty!¡±


    The light had been green when I did it.


    What did it mean if it was yellow?


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡¯s was green, because of his Gift¡­ This color shows the output of magic energy.¡±


    ¡°Output¡­?¡±


    ¡°Even if you have a lot of magic energy, if the output is small, then you can not use powerful magic. It is the same the other way around as well. All of this affects the way you use magic¡­ But Liza is a little special.¡±


    ¡°Special, you say?¡±


    ¡°Liza is special!¡±


    What did that mean¡­


    Liza herself seemed quite happy to be called that¡­ Obviously, beastkin and humans were different. But aside from that, it was a good thing that she could be happy about any differences. At least, it wouldn¡¯t be something that she troubles over in the future.


    ¡°It¡¯s probably because she is beastkin. Though, I can¡¯t say for sure. As this is the first time I¡¯ve checked someone who isn¡¯t human.¡±


    ¡°¡­So, what did you find out?¡±


    ¡°There is no problem in terms of the amount or output of magic energy¡­ If anything, it is all quite food. However, I don¡¯t know if she will be able to use the same magic as normal people. You can take your hand off now, Liza.¡±


    ¡°Is that so?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Does that mean I can¡¯t use magic?¡±


    The difference between humans and beastkin were not just in appearance, but with the use of magic as well.


    Ms. ire furrowed her eyebrows and seemed to be thinking about it.


    Liza removed her hand from the ball, but seemed to think that Ms. Isabelle was suggesting that she could not use magic, and so she looked a little disappointed.


    ¡°I¡¯m not saying that you cannot use magic at all. However, you may not be able to use basic magic that humans often use¡­ But I suppose there is magic that beastkin are good with. For instance, something like body strengthening magic?¡±


    ¡°Body strengthening magic¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­because beastkin had superior physical ability¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. It¡¯s something that alwayses up when discussing beastkin. They used to live in hunting tribes, and so they would strengthen their bodies to make fighting easier.¡±


    As they used to hunt a lot, that meant they were quite active.


    Unlike humans, who used tools¡­they probably hunted their prey by relying on their own strength.


    And so they may have evolved to use magic to enhance their abilities.


    While Liza was seven, she was able to do work that Milina or I found tiring, and she had done it multiple times without breaking a sweat.


    There was no doubt that she had a lot of strength and stamina.


    Ms. Isabelle suggested that they were specialized to use magic that enhanced their strengths even further. And it made sense.


    ¡°Well, it is merely my theory. Though, I think it is probably true. So it¡¯s not that Liza can¡¯t use magic, but that she is limited to what kind of magic she can use. She just needs to find it.¡±


    ¡°Find magic that I can use¡­ Okay! But I don¡¯t know how¡­¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sure that Lady ire or Sebastian can help you there. Especially that old butler. He will probably do some research.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ Haha. That¡¯s true.¡±


    Indeed, Sebastian was usually very interested in these sorts of subjects.


    He would probably take the initiative, and then exin it to uster.

 Chapter 386

    Chapter 386


    She Was Happy About The Hat


    ¡°That¡¯s right, Liza. Why don¡¯t you try putting this on?¡±


    ¡°Hmm?¡±


    After talking about the possibility of Liza using magic one day, we were about to leave Ms. Isabelle¡¯s store when I remembered something.


    It was the hat that Mr. Halton had made, so that Liza would allow her to cover her ears.


    I hadpletely forgotten about it, due to the whole incident with Leo getting angry.


    With this, she wouldn¡¯t be recognized as a beatkin as quickly, and would attract less attention.


    ¡°See¡­ How is it?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ My ears are a little itchy. But it¡¯s cute!¡±


    ¡°Haha. I see. We¡¯ll have to thank Mr. Halton.¡±


    ¡°It looks good on you, little Liza.¡±


    ¡°Yes, it is quite cute.¡±


    I had put the hat on Liza¡¯s head and buttoned the strap under her chin.


    It seemed like the parts that covered her ears pressed them down a little, causing her to scowl a little. But she looked at her reflection in the crystal ball and smiled.


    As she hadn¡¯t changed her clothes yet, you could still see her tail. But once she changed, she would probably look like an ordinary girl.


    Ms. ire and Ms. Isabelle were also smiling andplimenting her.


    ¡°Ehehehe¡­¡±


    Liza chuckled, a little bashful, but it was clear that she liked it. So it was a good thing we had bought it.


    ¡°Well, Ms. Isabelle. We will see you next time.¡±


    ¡°Goodbye, Isabelle.¡±


    ¡°Aye. Bring Liza with you, when you can stay longer.¡±


    ¡°Haha. Of course.¡±


    ¡°See you again, grandmother!¡±


    ¡°Aye, see you again.¡±


    And then we left the store.


    She was fond of Liza like she was a granddaughter, and so I was d that we hade here.


    Even with the previous incident, it was nice to see that there were people who did not have prejudices against her.


    Also, I was d that we had been able to hear more about Liza¡¯s grandfather.


    This grandfather¡­ Reyndorf. Even though there was still a lot I didn¡¯t know, I knew that he cared for her a great deal.


    Liza hadn¡¯t been able to tell me enough to get a good picture of him.


    I just knew that he wasn¡¯t a bad person.


    ¡°Mama! Look at this!¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    After going outside, Liza immediately rushed up to Leo and showed off her new hat.


    She had probably done the same with her clothes after leaving Mr. Halton¡¯s store.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Yes, it¡¯s cute, isn¡¯t? Papa bought it for me. Because it allows me to cover my ears.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wou?¡±


    ¡°Well, Mr. Halton is the one who prepared it.¡±


    Leo nodded and agreed with Liza as she told her about the new hat.


    Leo then barked to me as if saying, ¡®well, that was quite perceptive of you.¡¯


    It sounded like she was saying that I usually was not so perceptive¡­


    Though, perhaps she was right about that¡­


    ¡°Hehe¡­ Hehe¡­¡±


    Liza seemed very pleased as she rode on top of Leo, and we made our way to the west gate of Ractos.


    The sun was starting to set, and it was getting dark, so we had to return to the mansion.


    ¡°Like this, you really cannot tell that she is a beastkin.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. And Liza¡¯s tail is covered when she rides on Leo.¡±


    I smiled and talked with Ms. ire as we watched Liza.


    Leo had such pretty and long fur, so Liza¡¯s tail got buried in it and was concealed.


    Besides, Leo was so big that I had to look up to see her face, so unless Liza raised her tail, it should be fine.


    She just looked like an ordinary girl.


    ¡°Aside from the whole incident where she had a rock thrown at her face, it was a good thing you brought her.¡±


    ¡°Yes. We were able to talk about various things¡­and we found out that she is friends with Ms. Isabelle. I feel like I have grown closer to her.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Even at the mansion, she always seems a little reserved.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t think she is used to having a lot of people be kind to her. She was even quite reserved with me, after all.¡±


    I was able to see that at Mr. Halton and Mr. Haines¡¯s stores.


    It seemed like she had only really lowered her guard around Ms. Isabelle.


    I did think that she was warming up to the people in the mansion, but the events in this town had probably helped.


    When I thought about it like that, the whole incident and being hugged by Ms. ire could be seen as a positive thing.


    ¡­Though, I still couldn¡¯t forgive the person who had hurt Liza.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. What will you do when the person who hurt Liza is arrested?¡±


    ¡°What do you mean?¡±


    ¡°Well, while I do think that such things happen because people don¡¯t know about beastkin¡­ I want to know how you would act, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    Obviously, I couldn¡¯t forgive someone who had thrown a rock at Liza and hurt her.


    Even if I hadn¡¯t witnessed the moment myself, just imagining it filled me with rage.


    That being said, I didn¡¯t think that merely dealing out a harsh punishment would solve everything.


    The culprit was probably one of the people I had seen in the slums with Mr. Ekenhart.


    The primary reason that people acted like that was because they had no knowledge about beastkin.


    Living in the slums probably meant that their lives were probably miserable as well. And so she was an easy target.


    In any case, I felt like it might be wrong to just punish people who are ignorant.


    Well, not harshly punished. But they should still be punished to some degree.


    I suppose it was also because the culprit was quite young¡­


    I didn¡¯t know his exact age, but he seemed like junior highschool age¡­ Definitely a teenager.


    You could say he was still a child.


    Someone that age would still not have left the orphanage yet if they lived there.

 Chapter 387

    Chapter 387


    Liza Had a Strange Idea


    ¡°Indeed¡­ The first thing to do is to catch them and make them repent. After that, they must apologize to Liza and be properly educated about beastkin. And they will do volunteer work and have their progress monitored¡­ I suppose.¡±


    ¡°That is all?¡±


    ¡°It might be ratherx, but I feel it may be more effective¡­¡±


    Well, I was sure that plenty of people would say that I was being naive¡­


    However, if none of that worked, and he continued to be prejudiced against beastkin, then he could just be punished in some other way.


    But it seemed fine to be merciful on the condition that he repent and try to reform.


    Obviously, this didn¡¯t apply to murder or other more serious crimes.


    Speaking of which, I had no sympathy or desire to show mercy to the merchants who had set the orcs on Range vige.


    As for them, I was sure that Sebastian and Mr. Ekenhart had ensured that they were punished severely.


    And though she hadn¡¯t done anything directly, and was not involved in the plot, I still felt that Ms. Anne owed the people of Range vige an apology.


    That was something I would have to discuss with Mr. Ekenhart, but those people had suffered from the damage to their wine, as well as the illness.


    Even if Ms. Anne was not charged with any crime, she had been part of the reason it happened, and that needed to be resolved.


    ¡°Very well. Once the culprit is arrested, I will consider what you have said just now.¡±


    ¡°Though, maybe I am being too soft¡­¡±


    Perhaps I had no right to be acting so magnanimously like this¡­ I thought with an awkward chuckle.


    But then again, Ms. ire would probably not do everything as I said, but just use it as a starting point.


    ¡°Mama! Faster!¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Hey, Liza. We don¡¯t want to leave the carriage behind, so we can¡¯t go any faster, okay? Leo. Make sure that you don¡¯t lose sight of the carriage.¡±


    After leaving Ractos, we started on our way back to the mansion. It was then that Liza got excited and started to tell Leo to run faster.


    Leo was ready to run faster if it would make Liza happy, so I had to warn her to maintain her current speed.


    Ms. ire and the others would worry if we moved too far from them.


    Well, maybe they were more likely to sulk about it¡­


    Regardless, I understood why they wanted to return quickly.


    It was getting quite dark, and Tilura was probably waiting for us.


    Now that I thought about it, Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian had something they wanted to discuss with me¡­ I wonder what it could be¡­?


    I also had to check up on the herbs and then there was my sword training.


    ¡°But it¡¯s funner when you go fast!¡±


    ¡°While going fast is easy for Leo, it¡¯s a lot harder for the horses who have to pull a carriage.¡±


    ¡°Then why doesn¡¯t mama pull the carriage?¡±


    ¡°Uh, I don¡¯t know about that¡­¡±


    Liza turned to look at the horses and then had the idea that Leo should pull it.


    Indeed, you wouldn¡¯t have to worry about falling off of her back, and it would still be faster than a carriage¡­ But I wasn¡¯t sure how Leo would feel about it.


    A dog-drawn carriage¡­ Or wolf-drawn?


    Well, there were sleds that were pulled by dogs¡­in countries with a lot of snow.


    In any case, Liza clearly had no reserve with Leo, since she treated her like a horse in spite of calling her mother.


    Well, she is a beastkin, and children are more carefree about such things, I suppose.


    ¡­Even though she wouldn¡¯t be able to run as fast, we would still be able to travel inrger numbers, so perhaps it was worth considering?


    But then again, Leo seemed to like carrying people on her back.


    As I thought of such things, we arrived at the mansion.


    ¡°Wee back, everyone.¡±


    The servants greeted us at the door, just as they always did.


    Liza still looked a little startled whenever they did this. But she would get used to it eventually¡­


    ¡°Well, see you at dinner time, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I¡¯ll drop off everything in my room then.¡±


    We separated from Ms. ire and Ms. Lyra at the entrance hall and returned once to my room.


    As for Leo¡¯s feet, Liza enjoyed wiping them.


    Leo was used to it now, and it didn¡¯t seem to tickle as much as before.


    ¡°Liza. I¡¯ll put your clothes here, okay?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Thank you, papa! I¡¯ll put this in too!¡±


    I put Liza¡¯s newly bought clothes into a drawer that was in the room.


    While some of my clothes were inside, there was still plenty of room left.


    Eventually, it may be filled with Liza¡¯s clothes¡­ But first, I had to think about the herb fields in Range vige.


    ¡°Now, let¡¯s go to the dining hall. I¡¯m sure you¡¯re hungry now?¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    We put the clothes away, and headed towards the dining hall.


    While we had ate lunch, Liza and Leo were quite hungry, and looking forward to dinner.


    ¡°Mr. Ekenhart, we have returned.¡±


    ¡°Mmm, Mr. Takumi. Wee back¡­ What an ordeal, eh?¡±


    ¡°Ah, so you heard about what happened?¡±


    ¡°Aye. Nichs sent a message ahead. And so I¡¯ve heard about the incident.¡±


    ¡°I was just exining the rest to him now.¡±


    We entered the dining hall and I greeted Mr. Ekenhart before taking my usual seat.


    Tilura and Ms. Anne were already seated, and Sebastian and Ms. ire had told them about what happened.


    I didn¡¯t know that Nichs had sent a message¡­


    Well, the town was quite close, and since it was rted to Ms. ire, it made sense for him to report it.

 Chapter 388

    Chapter 388


    Real Battle Training


    ¡°In any case, Mr. Takumi and the others are here. We can talk about the rest while we eat.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Let¡¯s eat.¡±


    Delicious looking food had already been served on the table.


    And since we were all here now, Mr. Ekenhart suggested that we start eating.


    Tilura and Liza were talking about what had happened in the town.


    I suppose it was about the fun things.


    Because Liza looked happy. I felt grateful to Tilura.


    ¡°I see¡­ So that is what happened. And this person that you saw?¡±


    ¡°The guards are currently searching for him. As they know he is from the slums, it should not take too long for him to be caught.¡±


    The guards had told us about this before we left the town.


    Based on our information, and that of witnesses, they would attempt to find the culprit.


    ¡°And you believe you know who it is?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I think it is one of the people who had been bullying Liza when we found her.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ So they really do not like the beastkin. Well, I did know that¡­¡±


    ¡°Father. I think it will be necessary to do something, regarding that.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. I will not ignore the problem. But it is a difficult problem, as it is not as if everyone there is bad.¡±


    There were surely other orphans like Liza. Perhaps the person who had thrown the rock was also one.


    Perhaps there were people who could not find work, and had no proper way to live¡­


    But as Ms. ire and Mr. Ekenhart talked, I noticed that Ms. Anne looked rather furious as she ate.


    She was probably angry that Liza had been hurt by a thrown rock.


    While it was good that she had be so fond of Liza, she was likely to ssh sauce all over her hair and clothes if she wasn¡¯t careful.


    ¡°Oh, that¡¯s right. Mr. Takumi. And Tilura.¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    ¡°What, father?¡±


    After finishing his conversation with Ms. ire, Mr. Ekenhart suddenly appeared to be in a good mood as he turned to us.


    Seeing Mr. Ekenhart like this¡­always made me feel a little anxious.


    Tilura stopped talking with Liza and turned to face her father.


    ¡°Sebastian has finally given his permission. While it will be a few dayster, I am taking you two away from the mansion.¡±


    ¡°Sebastian¡¯s permission¡­ But where are we going?¡±


    ¡°Will we go to Ractos?¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart happily told us that he was taking us somewhere.


    But if he needed Sebastian¡¯s permission, it must be a pretty big deal¡­


    Ms. ire seemed to know the answer, as she was holding her forehead and sighing.


    ¡°No, not the town. The Fenrir Forest.¡±


    ¡°Fenrir¡­ Are you going to search for the Silver Fenrir again?¡±


    We had been there previously when we rescued Sherry. However, we had not been able to actually find any Silver Fenrirs.


    Obviously, Sherry was proof that there were still fenrirs there, so perhaps he wanted to search through the forest again?


    ¡°No, we are not there to search for anything. It is for your training.¡±


    ¡°Training¡­¡±


    ¡°Mmm. While you continue to train with your swords, I think it best that you experience some realbat. Well, you already have, Mr. Takumi. But it will still be good for your training.¡±


    ¡°And it has to be done in the forest?¡±


    ¡°Aye. Because there are orcs there. Our purpose will be to hunt them down. I had been wanting to do this for some time, and Sebastian finally agreed to it today.¡±


    ¡°¡­Hah¡­ But there is a requirement. They must have guards with them, and good Leo as well.¡±


    ¡°Exactly. As you can see, he is not very enthusiastic about it. But you are all but guaranteed to be safe with Leo there. So, will youe with me?¡±


    So it wasn¡¯t to search through the forest, but to fight orcs.


    Indeed, we had encountered orcs quite often during our exploration. And so it was a good way to gain some realbat experience.


    And Leo could help if we ever ended up in trouble¡­


    Sebastian was sighing with an unusually tired expression. Mr. Ekenhart must have worn him while trying to persuade him.


    Perhaps the reason he had smiled before, when Tilura was talking about wanting a familiar, was because he had thought of this n.


    ¡°Still, why so suddenly? Surely they can continue to train like this for a little longer?¡±


    ¡°I did consider that. However, I will not be here forever, where I can oversee their training. I need to return to the main house soon.¡±


    ¡°That is true¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was a duke.


    He would have a lot of work to do, and could not do all of it in this mansion.


    ¡°And so, while it won¡¯t necessarily be thest training session, I want to do what I can while there is still time. They will make more progress in one real fight, than many days of slow training.¡±


    ¡°Indeed.¡±


    I could understand his reasoning there.


    Because I had felt it myself after experiencing it.


    ¡°When Mr. Takumi goes to Range vige, Leo will obviously go with him. And so I want to advance with Tilura¡¯s training while Leo is still here.¡±


    ¡°Me?¡±


    ¡°Mmm. While Mr. Takumi has already experienced a real battle, you have not yet. And I rather you not do that where I cannot see you¡­ And preferably where Leo and the guards are close by¡­¡±

 Chapter 389

    Chapter 389


    The Way Liza Referred To Herself


    Mr. Ekenhart wanted Tilura to get some training.


    Even though he included me as well. But it could just be a way to have Leoe with them.


    Perhaps he was worried that once Leo and I were gone, the defenses at the mansion would be weakened.


    Well, the guards would surely do their best, and I doubt we were in any danger. Mr. Ekenhart just worried too much¡­


    As a father who was teaching his daughter how to fight, he wanted to make sure that she reached a certain level.


    Also, Tilura would have to train by herself once I was gone.


    The guards might be able to help with her training, but they also had their own duties¡­


    It was difficult to tell if you were improving if you had to train alone.


    ¡°What do you think, Tilura? While this won¡¯t get you a familiar¡­ You will be able to fight some real monsters. You might even get hurt. But we don¡¯t have to go if you don¡¯t want to¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­I will go! And I will show you that I can fight well like Mr. Takumi! Besides, I will have to fight against monsters in order to acquire a familiar!¡±


    ¡°I see. Very well. Then, Mr. Takumi¡­ Will you ask Leo for me?¡±


    ¡°Haha¡­¡±


    Fighting against orcs was a dangerous thing.


    But after thinking about it for a moment, Tilura made her decision and nodded.


    Mr. Ekenhart looked quite happy. He then turned to me a little awkwardly and asked about Leo.


    Leo had not been listening at all, and was only interested in eating the food on her te¡­


    ¡°Hey, Leo. Do you have a minute?¡±


    ¡°Guff-guff-guff¡­Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Your mouth is dirty again¡­ In any case, Leo. We¡¯re going back to that forest where we found Sherry and¡­will youe too? This time, it won¡¯t be about exploration, so you will be more of a guard.¡±


    When I called to Leo, she raised her head from her te and looked at me with a puzzled expression.


    I felt bad for disturbing her meal but also noticed she had made a mess again¡­ And she had be dirty after lunch as well. I would have to bathe herter¡­


    I thought of such things as I asked her to apany us.


    ¡°Wou? Wou. Wuff!¡±


    ¡°The forest again? Very well, leave it to me! That¡¯s what she said, papa!¡±


    ¡°Haha. I do understand her, Liza. Thank you, Leo. Well, that¡¯s what she said, Mr. Ekenhart.¡±


    ¡°Mm. Thank you. Now we will be able to go to the forest.¡±


    Orcs were no threat to someone like Leo.


    It had been the case thest time we were there, and even when the orcs had attacked Range vige, Leo had defeated them all in no time.


    Mr. Ekenhart nodded with relief. And the matter was settled.


    ¡°Isn¡¯t this hat nice? Papa bought it for me! Liza really likes it!¡±


    ¡°Ohh. Yes, that is quite nice!¡±


    Once we were done talking about the forest training, we rested and drank some tea. Liza and Tilura were talking cheerfully.


    As they were close in age, they got along well.


    Liza was still wearing her hat and showing it proudly to Tilura.


    She must really like it¡­ I had told her that she could take it off after we were out of Ractos, but she wanted to keep it on.


    ¡°But Liza, why do you refer to yourself like that now? You didn¡¯t do that yesterday?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I thought it was weird to say Liza, Liza¡­ People make fun of me¡­ But then papa and ms. ire said that I should do what I want!¡±


    ¡°Oh. Well, that¡¯s true!¡±


    Tilura had noticed that Liza was talking differently.


    Now that I think about it¡­she did seem to have changed it at some point today.


    I hadn¡¯t even noticed it¡­ I suppose Tilura was just sharper when it came to such things.


    Perhaps I needed to pay more attention when it came to.


    ¡°Hehe. Yes, that¡¯s when Liza stopped being so reserved.¡±


    ¡°You noticed, Ms. ire?¡±


    ¡°Yes. After she cried so much in the za.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ I didn¡¯t notice.¡±


    ¡°Well, women are more observant when ites to such things. So you shouldn¡¯t worry about it too much.¡±


    ¡°Is that so?¡±


    I wasn¡¯t sure about such things.


    Besides, Ms. Anne was biting her handkerchief and looked upset.


    It was kind of scary.


    ¡°Even Tilura noticed¡­but I didn¡¯t¡­ Damn it¡­¡±


    ¡°Uh, it looks like Ms. Anne didn¡¯t notice?¡±


    ¡°Perhaps Anne is not much of a woman then.¡±


    Uh, that seemed a little harsh, Ms. ire?


    But in spite of such insults, the rest of the tea time went by in a friendly atmosphere as Tilura and Liza talked¡­ Well, except for Ms. Anne.

 Chapter 390

    Chapter 390


    I Talked To Sebastian About The Herbs


    After tea time was finished, and everyone dispersed, Mr. Ekenhart, Tilura, and I went to the garden in order to train¡­ Or rather, I was about to, but was intercepted by Sebastian.


    What could it be?


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. There is something I wish to tell you regarding the herbs.¡±


    ¡°About the herbs? Did something happen to them?¡±


    He looked a little serious, so perhaps something had happened.


    Mr. Ekenhart seemed to have heard already, as he continued to walk to the garden with Tilura.


    And so I had Leo and Liza follow them.


    Liza would be bored if she listened to us anyway.


    But if it was about the garden, wouldn¡¯t it be better to go out and take a look?


    ¡°Well, it is quite dark now, so it would not be easy to see. Regardless, I wanted to talk to you about it first.¡±


    ¡°I see. Very well.¡±


    We had decided to not use any magic light near them, so it might be difficult to see them well at this hour.


    ¡°In any case, the newly increased herbs have withered. It happened shortly after midday.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    I expected something like this to happen.


    While they grew more slowlypared to the herbs made directly by me, they were still fastpared to ordinary herbs.


    Considering all of that¡­it seemed about time that they withered away.


    ¡°The new herbs¡­we will call them the second herbs. The speed varied¡­but they started to wither at around midday, and then it only took an hour after that.¡±


    ¡°So then¡­what happened to the third herbs?¡±


    ¡°The third herbs have now grown to a point where they can be picked. As for the fourth herbs, they have just started to sprout.¡±


    ¡°There are fourth ones now¡­¡±


    As it seemed that the effects of Weed Cultivation were weakening, I thought that it would end after the third herbs.


    ¡°The fourth herbs are growing particrly quickly since sprouting. I think they may be close to ordinary herbs. Of course, they will still need to be observed¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed. If the effect lessens, then we should get unaffected herbs soon. Uh, how about the numbers?¡±


    ¡°Yes. And so it is important to keep an eye on them. As for how many¡­there are slightly less than the third herbs.¡±


    So it¡¯s just a little less¡­ Since they seemed to be decreasing by half every time, I thought it would be the case again. But I was wrong.


    I suppose that showed that it really wasn¡¯t being affected by Weed Cultivation.


    ¡°Now, it is from here that things be serious¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    So, that wasn¡¯t what he had actually wanted to tell me.


    But what could it be?


    ¡°It is about the soil being used in the herb gardens¡­ Apparently, it is definitely being depleted of nutrients.


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°The nts that grow nearby are being affected as well. They are starting to wilt.¡±


    ¡°Because the soil has grown poor.¡±


    Obviously, nts needed more than water and sunlight to grow. They received nutrients from the ground as well.


    I didn¡¯t know how much they were absorbing, but I had made a few herbs on an orc once, and it had died. So considering that, they must require quite a lot of nutrients in order to grow at such a speed.


    If anything, it was a surprise that we didn¡¯t notice the change in the garden¡¯s soil sooner.


    Well, I didn¡¯t always grow them in the same spot, and the herbs were small. And I also didn¡¯t make that much at once.


    Also, they required water, which would have also been absorbed from the orcs body. So the circumstances were different in various ways.


    These were all things that I intended to research little by little.


    Obviously, I would not be performing experiments on living creatures.


    ¡°Fortunately, the herbs do not increase without limit, so I doubt we have to worry about it getting any worse. But we will have to be careful when making fields in the future.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I will not be able to do it over and over in the same location.¡±


    ¡°Exactly. Because they increase in such a short amount of time¡­ You should decide on different locations and alternate between them.¡±


    Have one garden where you grow the first herbs, and when they increase, move onto the next garden. That way, you could avoid impoverishing the soil.


    As for the size and number of these plots ofnd, I would have to decide on thatter. However, adding fertilizer might be another way to maintain the state of the soil.


    After all, the state of the soil was very important when making a garden.


    Regardless, thanks to Weed Cultivation I could quickly be able to tell if the soil or climate was right for it.


    ¡°And so you may have to hire more people than initially expected. People to manage the fields and tend to the soil¡­ Otherwise, there will be a lot of work for you, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed. There does seem to be a lot more to do than I thought. And I¡¯m not very confident¡­¡±


    Apparently, I would have to hire even more people now¡­

 Chapter 391

    Chapter 391


    I would be able to take the katana with me to the forest


    ¡°You will also have to hire a butler. But Lady ire should help you with that, so you do not need to worry.¡±


    ¡°But weren¡¯t we talking about managing it together?¡±


    ¡°That has not been decided yet, but we are moving things in that direction. It is something that I will discuss with Lady ire soon, as His Grace has already agreed to it.¡±


    When this had first started, I thought it was something I could do leisurely by myself¡­but things just kept expanding¡­


    However, they were going to hire a butler for me. And it was most likely that Ms. ire would do it with me. So surely we should be able to manage¡­


    I suppose Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian had been talking about it today.


    But since Ms. ire had gone to the town with us, they were not able to tell her about it yet.


    ¡°And so, we will have to create a longer list of selected people to hire.¡±


    ¡°Very well. While I still don¡¯t know how many people I will hire, I will do my best in choosing them.¡±


    ¡°Very good.¡±


    So the first list I had received was just a temporary one.


    The scale of the operation was increasing in size, and I felt overwhelmed. But I wanted to do what I could for everyone¡¯s sake.


    Of course, that also included choosing carefully from the list.


    I didn¡¯t think that they would put anyone bad on the list, but there was always a possibility that someone could have gotten in there by mistake.


    There was much to think about, and so I troubled over it while watching Sebastian leave in order to talk to Ms. ire. And then I went to the garden to continue my training.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. You can take the katana with you to the forest. Of course, your usual sword as well.¡±


    Once my mental sword training and swinging was finished, and I was wiping myself with a towel, Mr. Ekenhart suddenly said that to me.


    ¡°The katana? Are you sure?¡±


    ¡°As long as it is in the forest. I would like you to abstain from using it in popted areas, such as towns, but there is no one in the forest.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true.¡±


    ¡°Only people from the mansion will be going to the forest this time. And they are not the kind of people to talk about it to outsiders. So there is nothing to worry about.¡±


    ¡°Very well. I will bring both of my swords then.¡±


    Indeed, if we were in the forest, then we would not be seen by any strangers.


    While it was not quite a ce that no one ever went near¡­ It was still generally empty of people.


    Especially the ce where we had campedst time. No normal person would go there.


    I had defeated orcs with a sword, but not a katana.


    And since they were used a little differently, I was slightly worried¡­ But unlike the time in Range vige, there were other people to help me.


    So even if things didn¡¯t go well, there was no chance of me dying.


    While it still won¡¯t be a casual excursion¡­at least it wouldn¡¯t be such a burden.


    ¡°When looking at you swinging earlier, it seemed that you have be quitefortable with it.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I think that it happened faster than it did with the sword.¡±


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s also because you already had some training. But perhaps you just happen to have the aptitude for it, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Aptitude¡­¡±


    I didn¡¯t know much about that, but it did somehow feel morefortable in my hands.


    ¡°By the way, when will we be going to the forest?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Probably in four to five days. But we only decided that we would go, but haven¡¯t chosen an exact date yet.¡±


    ¡°Four to five days¡­ So not immediately.¡±


    ¡°Well, there is no need to rush. As you are going to fight, you must prepare.¡±


    Thest time we had gone to the forest, it was just two days after making the decision. So this was quite a bit longer.


    But then again, it was because Ms. ire had been quite insistent.


    If I had four to five days¡­then I could observe the herb gardens, as well as make some herbs for Mr. Kalis¡¯s store.


    I wouldn¡¯t want Ractos to run out of herbs while I was away from the mansion.


    ¡°Also, we should receive an answer from Range vige soon.¡±


    ¡°Do you mean, about the growing of herb gardens?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I sent word to the Range vige chief about it. But have yet to receive a reply.¡±


    So he would receive an answer from Mr. Haines soon¡­ As it was a message directly from the duke, Mr. Haines would not ignore it or wait for too long.


    Besides, thend was the duke¡¯s property to begin with, so it was not like they could even refuse him if he made the decision.


    Well, the duke wouldn¡¯t do such a thing. That was why the people loved him.


    But Mr. Haines¡­ Would he really be fine with growing herb fields around the vige?


    He had been very friendly when I was in the vige. So had the other vigers.


    Considering the matter with the wine, I did not think it would be disadvantageous for the vige, but I was still a little concerned.


    I did not want to do anything in the vige that was not wee¡­

 Chapter 392

    Chapter 392


    I practiced signals with Leo


    ¡°With such things included, Tilura must train so that there will be no problems when she encounters some orcs. While her skill is improving, actually facing them will be a different matter.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. I think that my hands started to shake the first time that I fought against them. It is very different from ordinary training.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart talked as he watched Tilura y with Leo, Sherry, and Liza.


    I had been quite scared when Range vige was attacked by orcs, and I had to steel myself and fight.


    If I ran away or died, then the vigers would be in danger¡­ I had to think about that as I fought.


    Had it only been me there, I would have likely just used light magic and run away.


    And so Mr. Ekenhart wanted to train Tilura so that she wouldn¡¯t be caught up by her nerves.


    Even if she couldn¡¯t defeat an orc, Leo and the guards would protect her. However, as her father, he wanted to decrease the danger as much as possible.


    After that, Tilura and Liza helped to wipe Leo¡¯s feet, and then we returned to the mansion.


    I could see how close the two had be. Tilura seemed to enjoy ying the part of an older sister.


    ¡°Now, Leo. We will be going to the forest¡­ However, you do understand that things will be different this time? We are going to fight. But you cannot defeat all of the enemies.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I returned to my room, and then asked Mr. Lyra to bathe Liza. In the meantime, I sat down to talk with Leo.


    This time, we were going to the forest so Tilura and I could fight some orcs.


    It was mainly for Tilura, but since I was going to leave the mansion and go to Range vige, I had to gain as much experience as possible in order to protect the fields and vige.


    Up until now, Leo would always defeat any monster, but I could not rely on that every time.


    And so while it was usually a time we rxed in the room, I faced Leo with a very serious expression.


    I was facing Leo next to the bed, and Leo was sitting in the middle of the room.


    Leo then barked reassuringly and nodded.


    ¡­She said that she understood that she would not be there to fight.


    ¡°Alright then¡­ Stay!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Leoy low on the ground.


    This would be the signal for her to stay put and not jump out, even though she had discovered a monster.


    It was a little different from telling to wait with food in front of her.


    But she could always do this, so it wasn¡¯t really a problem.


    ¡°Next is¡­ Run!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Leo then stood up and turned her back to me.


    This was for emergencies, when she would have to take someone and run away.


    If that happened, she would carry someone with her mouth, or put them on her back before running away. But as we were in my room, she just turned her back to me instead.


    Though, I doubted we would have to run with the guards, Mr. Ekenhart, and Leo there, but it was just a precaution.


    As for these signals, I had already decided on them previously, and taught them to Leo.


    And by going over them again in the room, I was making sure that she would react properly.


    They were simple words, so Leo shouldn¡¯t have trouble with them, but I just wanted to practice once.


    ¡°Alright. Now sit down again and¡­ Go!¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    Leo turned to me and sat down. Then I gave a different order.


    This was when she could attack monsters outside of the times Tilura or I was fighting them.


    Depending on the situation, it might be the one I used the most¡­


    After that, I tested several other signals and confirmed that she understood them properly.


    Giving orders and seeing Leo swiftly react to them made me feel like some veteran dog trainer.


    Of course, it was mostly that Leo was smart, and had nothing to do with any ability on my part.


    Yes, it was a wonderful thing that we could understand each other.


    ¡°Now,stly¡­ Intimidate!¡±


    ¡°Grrrrrrrrrr¡­ Wou-grau!!¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m back¡­ Ahhh!!¡±


    ¡°Ah, Liza¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff!?¡±


    That was the signal for Leo to growl and bark in order to scare away any monsters or beasts.


    And so Leo had bared her fangs and barked and growled at me¡­ Even if I knew it was just pretend, it was a little scary.


    But immediately after, the doors opened and Liza entered.


    And she seemed to be quite stunned to see Leo barking like this.


    She let out a short scream, her ears folded, and her tail went between her legs as she began to shiver.


    After barking, Leo also noticed her and seemed surprised.


    ¡°I¡¯m s-sorry, Liza. I didn¡¯t mean for you to be frightened¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Mama¡­ Is she angry¡­?¡±


    ¡°No, no. She was just practicing for when we go to the forest. That¡¯s how she will scare away any monsters and beasts. It wasn¡¯t because she was mad at you, alright?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    I approached Liza, who was shaking near the door, and apologized.


    Leo also pressed her face towards her and barked apologetically.


    Liza had assumed that Leo was angry at something, and was looking at us for an exnation.


    I felt bad for scaring her.


    And so I told her what we were doing, and that Leo was not angry.


    Leo nodded in agreement.


    ¡°¡­Really?¡±


    ¡°Of course. Neither Leo or I are angry.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s good. I thought that papa and mama were fighting¡­¡±


    Liza said with a sigh of relief.


    So she wasn¡¯t scared that Leo was angry at her. She thought Leo was fighting with me.


    Because we were her parents?


    For a child, seeing their parents fight would cause anxiety or fear.


    I would have to be careful.


    That being said, Leo and I were just buddies, not an actual couple.

 Chapter 393

    Chapter 393


    Someone was invading the kitchens


    ¡°But Liza? I told you before, you should knock before entering a room.¡±


    ¡°Ehehe¡­ I forgot.¡±


    ¡°Be careful next time, okay? If you had knocked, then Leo and I would have noticed, and you would not have been surprised.¡±


    ¡°Okay.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Well, children were like that.


    If they remembered everything you told them to do, then raising children wouldn¡¯t be so difficult.


    What do you even know about that? Some people might say that to me. I suppose I was just remembering what it was like to be a child.


    While there were some things I learned quickly, there were other things that took time.


    Especially since so many things had just happened in Ractos, so it could not be helped that she forgot some things.


    As Liza answered honestly, Leo answered in a simr way as well.


    ¡°Alright, now Leo and I will go and take a bath¡­ So perhaps I should call Ms. Lyra?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!?¡±


    ¡°No, it¡¯s fine. I can stay here by myself.¡±


    ¡°I see. Well, we¡¯ll try and make it quick, so just wait for a short while. Now, let¡¯s go, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    It was now our turn to take a bath.


    And so I called to Liza after preparing to go, but it seemed like she was now fine with being alone.


    I think she was finally no longer afraid of being abandoned.


    As for Leo, she was quite startled by the sudden idea of having to take a bath, and did not look happy as she followed me out of the room.


    Outside, Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda were waiting, and so I asked them to dry Leo after I had washed her.


    They had also heard Leo growling when Liza opened the door, and were quite shocked.


    Well, Ms. Lyra wasn¡¯t really. She liked to take care of people, and was eager to help with Leo. But I felt a little bad for Ms. Gelda.


    Leo also rubbed her face against Ms. Gelda apologetically, which helped calm her.


    ¡°Ms. Lyra, Ms. Gelda. I¡¯m sending Leo out now!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    After washing her body, Leo tried to y with therge bucket of water, and so I had to stop her and send her out to the changing room. Then I called to Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda.


    I left Leo to be toweled down by them, and returned to the bath so that I could rx.


    ¡°Still, Leo¡­ She finally stopped hating taking a bath so much, but now she wanted to y with the water¡­¡±


    I let out a sigh as I soaked up in the wide bathtub.


    Well, she mostly just wanted to ssh her front paws in it.


    But when you were as big as Leo, even that created great sshes of water, and it felt cold as it hit me.


    Besides, I wanted her to return to the room quickly so Liza wouldn¡¯t be lonely. I would try and allow her to y in the water some other time.


    She used to hate baths, and I never took her to any rivers, so she didn¡¯t really y in the water.


    But since she had swam in rivers sinceing here, I could see that she didn¡¯t hate water as long as it wasn¡¯t hot.


    I wasn¡¯t sure why she didn¡¯t like hot water¡­


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. I¡¯m sorry to disturb you as you¡¯re about to sleep.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Ms. Helena? And Sebastian?¡±


    After finishing up my bath, I was walking down the hallway back to my room, when Ms. Helena suddenly called me.


    Sebastian was right behind her, and had a troubled expression.


    ¡°What is it? And at this hour?¡±


    While I didn¡¯t know about Sebastian, Ms. Helena had to prepare breakfast, which meant she woke up earlier than any of the servants.


    It was almost midnight, and so it would be difficult to get up in the morning¡­


    I thought about such things as I questioned them.


    ¡°Well¡­it is a little awkward to say¡­¡±


    ¡°I will exin it for you then.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­alright.¡±


    As Ms. Helena was hesitating to tell me, Sebastian took a step forward and volunteered.


    It was obviously something he just wanted to do for his own sake, but I kept such thoughts to myself.


    ¡°Apparently, during thest few days¡­ Someone has been stealing the food that is stored in the kitchen.¡±


    ¡°Stealing food?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Someone is entering the kitchens at night while everyone sleeps, and is eating the food.¡±


    I suppose the fact that they were eating the food there suggested it wasn¡¯t someone from the outside then?


    ¡°Has anything else gone missing? Do we know of any monsters getting in?¡±


    ¡°Nothing has disappeared aside from the food. Besides, if there were monsters, then someone in the mansion would have been attacked already. Also, the guards protect the mansion day and night, so I doubt something could have entered without them noticing.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ So it is someone from within.¡±


    ¡°That is the most likely. Since they seem to be eating the food right in the kitchen.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­¡±


    If someone wasing from the outside, surely they would take what they want and leave.


    Unless it was some bandit who was starving and didn¡¯t care about leaving evidence.


    Besides, entering a duke¡¯s household was a very dangerous thing.


    If you were going to take such a risk, surely you would take something more valuable than food.


    Not only that, but Sebastian said that it happened during these past few days.


    In other words, it happened multiple times. An outside invader seemed even less likely.

 Chapter 394

    Chapter 394


    Liza was under suspicion


    ¡°While I said that it was during these past few days¡­ It is a little awkward to say, but¡­¡±


    Sebastian paused after saying that much.


    He liked to exin things so much, so what could cause him to stop¡­


    ¡°Well¡­it started to happen right after Lady Liza arrived in the mansion. And has continued every day since.¡±


    ¡°You are suggesting that it was Liza?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. It is not the doing of the servants, and there is no reason for Lady ire or the others to do it. They only need to ask if they are hungry.¡±


    ¡°¡­That¡¯s true.¡±


    As the servants were in the mansion even during the night, food could be prepared if it was needed.


    There was no reason to enter the kitchen without telling anyone.


    Sebastian managed the servants and was certain that they were not the ones eating the food.


    If that was the case, then it would be easy to be suspicious of Liza.


    And ording to Sebastian, it had started with her arrival.


    Besides, Liza wasn¡¯tpletelyfortable here yet, so she likely wouldn¡¯t be asking the servants for food if she was hungry.


    I think the reason that Ms. Helena looked so ufortable was because she didn¡¯t want to tell me this.


    ¡°Still, Leo or I would have noticed it. After all, she sleeps in the same room.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. I am merely stating that due to the circumstances, it seems suspicious. But no one actually believes it. After all, you would have noticed it.¡±


    On one hand, I had not noticed when Liza left the bed to sleep with Leo. So it wasn¡¯t a convincing argument. But Leo was a different matter.


    It had been like this in the forest as well. Even when asleep, she was sensitive to movement around her, and noticed the arrival of the orcs before anyone else.


    So even if Leo was more rxed because it was safe in the mansion, she would surely notice it if someone in the same room as her had left.


    Sebastian and Ms. Helena understood this as well, and so they were not convinced that Liza was the culprit.


    ¡°¡­Still, there is one thing that is puzzling.¡±


    ¡°What is that?¡±


    Ms. Helena said suddenly with a troubled expression.


    What could it be? Did it connect to Liza?


    ¡°As food was being stolen, the other cooks and servants and I were watching the kitchens carefully. To see if someone woulde in. We even asked Philip and the guards to cooperate.¡±


    ¡°And in spite of such strict security, the food continued to be stolen?¡±


    ¡°Yes. No matter what we did, we could not find anyone. And before we knew it, the food was gone¡­¡±


    Ms. Helena, the maids and butlers were not professionals, and so it might not be too hard to escape their notice.


    However, it should be much harder to invade the house without the guards noticing.


    And yet whatever this was, it had seeded in getting into the kitchens and eating without being caught. What could that mean¡­


    ¡°¡­What if it is an invisible monster?¡±


    ¡°Monsters that are normally invisible do exist, but¡­ I have never heard of them being near this ce.¡±


    So they did exist¡­


    Well, they apparently didn¡¯t live in this area. Also, it would still be strange for them to go through all of this trouble for some food.


    Besides, no one had been attacked.


    ¡°Are there any other clues as to who it could be?¡±


    ¡°Well¡­we did find some fur at the scene of the food crime.¡±


    ¡°Fur?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Not human hair. It looks like fur from some animal¡­¡±


    ¡°And that¡¯s what made Liza a prime suspect?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. When it was discovered, it had been trampled on so it turned ck. But it must be from some beast or monster.¡±


    So if it wasn¡¯t a monster, then the only thing left was a beast.


    Which meant Leo, Sherry or Liza.


    But Leo was so big that it would be impossible for her to go anywhere without anyone noticing.


    Sherry should be with Ms. ire during the night, and since they couldmunicate, she could ask when she wanted food.


    So that left Liza.


    While Liza had hair like a human, she had ears and a tail like a beast.


    Hmm¡­ The circumstantial evidence does point to Liza¡­


    But as I said earlier, there was no way that Leo wouldn¡¯t notice. And Leo would not have allowed it.


    Because I had scolded her about eating things without permission in the past¡­


    ¡°Well, I do see how it would seem like it could only be Liza¡­ Aside from the part where she could enter the kitchens without being noticed.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I do not know if she has such skills, but she is one suspect. Of course, I don¡¯t think that she would do such a thing, especially with good Leo there. She also does not like to stray too far from you, Mr. Takumi. And so we came to consult you about it.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±

 Chapter 395

    Chapter 395


    I decided to watch the kitchen


    I could understand why some might be suspicious of Liza.


    However, as Sebastian said, Leo would not miss something like that. And it was doubtful that Liza could sneak into the kitchen without being noticed.


    As for Liza not wanting to be away from Leo or me, it was less severe than before. But even that had only just started today.


    Regardless, even though they had not decided that she was the culprit, they had still wanted to talk to me about it.


    Perhaps I had noticed something strange about her¡­


    ¡°And has food been eaten today as well?¡±


    ¡°No, not yet. It always happens once everyone has gone to sleep¡­ Around two or three at night.¡±


    Well, that was quitete.


    To think that something like that was happening while we were asleep¡­


    ¡°Hmm¡­ In that case, I shall join the watch tonight. And I will have Leo with me. That should help us find out who the culprit is.¡±


    ¡°We had wanted you to watch Liza, but¡­ Indeed. I suppose it will help if Leo is there¡­¡±


    Apparently, Sebastian had wanted me to stay in order to prove that Liza was innocent.


    However, if Leo joined me in the watch, then her sharp senses could help in catching the person who was eating the food.


    It seemed like he only cared about Leo, but I can be useful too you know?


    Well, maybe not as useful as Leo or the guards¡­


    ¡°Very well. We will ask you to do it, Mr. Takumi. Though, it troubles me that we have to¡­¡±


    ¡°Please don¡¯t worry about it. Besides, Ms. Helena always provides us with such delicious food. So consider it a sign of my gratitude. I cannot allow this person to continue to steal food. And I also want to show that Liza is innocent.¡±


    Even if circumstances pointed to Liza, I couldn¡¯t believe that she would do such a thing.


    Sebastian and Ms. Helena agreed with me as well.


    After we had returned from Ractos, Ms. ire had told them about what Liza had gone through, and the story had spread amongst the servants, who were very sympathetic.


    Perhaps some of them felt that it was because she was in such a desperate situation, that she would want food and¡­


    In any case, I had decided to watch the kitchen tonight.


    And so I returned to my room once to go and fetch Leo.


    Since this would mean that Liza would be alone in the room, I decided to ask Ms. Lyra to stay with her.


    This was because she was mostfortable with Ms. Lyra out of the servants, and to prove that Liza had not left the room.


    ¡°I¡¯ming in. ¡­Leo, Liza¡­ What are you doing?¡±


    ¡°Ah, papa!¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    In order to set a good example, I knocked on the door before entering, and saw something strange¡­


    Leo was sitting in front of Liza and raising her paw in front of her. Liza was sitting on a chair facing her and had her hand on Leo¡¯s paw.


    ¡­Leo wasn¡¯t offering her paw, but Liza was?


    After seeing me enter, Liza got off from the chair and ran to me.


    ¡°Papa, look. Look! Mama taught me this!¡±


    ¡°Hmm?¡±


    ¡°¡­See, mama?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. ¡­Wuff¡­wuff-wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Paw. Seconds.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­¡±


    Liza happily pulled me by the hand towards the chair. And then she sat down like before.


    And then she made Leo hold out her paw again.


    As Leo barked, she ced her right hand on Leo¡¯s left paw. And then Leo lowered her left paw and raised her right one. And Liza ced her left hand on top of it.


    It was the typical gesture dogs did for ¡®paw¡¯ and when they wanted more food.


    Uhh¡­ So a giant dog-like wolf was teaching a girl to ask for food?


    ¡°Leo, are you sure you want to teach her that?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wou.¡±


    ¡°Mama says that you taught her how to do it!¡±


    I did remember teaching her that, after she had rescued her and she recovered a little. And I guess Leo still remembered it as well.


    That did make me happy, but I didn¡¯t know if it was something that Liza needed to learn.


    As Liza looked up to her as her mother, Leo probably meant it as part of her education.


    It was the first thing I had taught to Leo, so perhaps she was happy about it.


    However, it would probably be better for her to teach it to Sherry instead of Liza.


    Sherry was practically a dog, after all¡­ She liked to sleep and rx a lot. She didn¡¯t really act like a fenrir.


    ¡°Little Liza, your hand¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°This really makes you¡­want to praise her¡­¡±


    ¡°Ms. Lyra¡­¡±


    Before I knew it, Ms. Lyra had stepped forward and put out her hand in front of Liza.


    Indeed, Liza did look cute as she eagerly obeyed.


    However, Liza was a beastkin, not a pet¡­ Even though she seemed to be amused, and her tail was wagging.


    In any case, I let Ms. Lyra praise Liza as I got back to my purpose for being here.


    ¡°Leo. Sorry, but could youe with me?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°What is it, papa?¡±


    I changed the subject and exined to Leo and Liza that we would be watching the kitchen.


    As I expected, Liza seemed like she didn¡¯t really understand, which reassured me that she was not the culprit.


    As for Leo, she seemed angry that someone was eating food without permission.


    ¡°Wuff! Graaauuu!¡±


    She had been scolded when she did it, and so it was not fair if someone else was getting away with the same thing¡­ That is what she was saying.


    So she still remembered when I had been upset at her for snitching¡­

 Chapter 396

    Chapter 396


    We all hid in the kitchen


    ¡°Well, I leave the rest to you, Ms. Lyra.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Lady Liza. Let¡¯s wait here for them to return.¡±


    ¡°Okay. I will stay here with sister Lyra!¡±


    And so I left Ms. Lyra with Liza, and then took Leo with me as I left the room.


    Liza nodded willingly. It did not look like she was worried much at all.


    I suppose it was because Ms. Lyra was staying with her. But I think she was also less worried about being left alone in general.


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Okay, okay. We¡¯re going, so just wait a little. Rushing won¡¯t help us find the culprit any sooner, you know?¡±


    Leo was angry at this scoundrel who was eating food, and wanted to go to the kitchen as soon as possible.


    And so together, we made our way to the kitchen where Ms. Helena and the others were waiting.


    As we still had time, rushing just meant that we would have to wait longer.


    Perhaps I should have grown some herbs that would help us stay awake?


    I thought about this, but quickly dismissed the idea.


    It wasn¡¯t so much a matter of whether I could do it or not, but if I made something without enough knowledge about it, I might identally make something very strange.


    I didn¡¯t want to create something with hidden side effects, or something that was addictive or dangerous.


    I had to learn more about herbs and medicine, and could only make things that I knew were safe.


    I thought of such things as we walked and noted that while Leo¡¯s tail usually wagged happily, it was currently standing upright as if angry.


    ¡°¡­Is it almost time?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­¡±


    As soon as we arrived in the kitchen, I had Leo try to sniff out the area, but there were too many scents due to the food, and she could not determine anything.


    After that, the lights were turned off and we hid and waited for something to appear.


    As for the people on watch, it was Phillip, Ms. Helena, Sebastian, and a few other cooks and guards.


    Aside from the pantry, there were several cooking stoves and ovens. So it was not too difficult to hide¡­if you were a human.


    But Leo was sorge, so for now, she was crouching between two stoves.


    It seemed really cramped.


    Even if something did appear, Leo would likely not be able to move immediately. But I told her that I would handle it with magic.


    Regardless, in spite of how ufortable it was, Leo was determined to catch the culprit.


    She could not abide the idea of someone stealing food and not being scolded.


    Had I really been that angry when she did it?


    Well, I think it was because I had read about it in a book. You needed to be firm so that they wouldn¡¯t make a habit of it.


    Back then, we could notmunicate as well¡­ I¡¯m sorry, Leo.


    Clink.


    ¡°!¡±


    As I was thinking of the past and feeling bad for Leo, I suddenly heard a faint sound in the dark and quiet kitchen.


    I wasn¡¯t the only person who heard it, and the others immediately looked a little nervous.


    I could see Leo¡¯s ears twitching.


    She was trying to find out what it was that hade.


    Seconds felt like minutes as we waited, and I tried my best to not make a sound in the dark kitchen.


    While we wanted to stop the theft of food, it wouldn¡¯t solve anything if we merely scared it away without finding out what it was.


    And so we had to capture it.


    ¡°¡­¡±


    I kept still and tried to erase my presence as I stared at the kitchen.


    Now that my eyes had adjusted, I could see decently well.


    This was because some moonlight wasing in through the window.


    Also, beforeing here, we had all eaten some herbs to enhance our senses.


    I could even hear the breathing of the others, which I normally would not have been able to hear.


    It was probably the same with the faint sound from earlier.


    Click¡­click¡­


    From the kitchen entrance, I heard the sounds of something hard touching the floor.


    Something had likely entered the kitchen and was searching for food.


    The sounds were very quiet, and it was clear that the intruder was carefully trying to avoid being caught.


    Click¡­click¡­


    The sounds slowly moved towards the pantry.


    And as it got closer, I could hear its breathing.


    This¡­did not sound like a human?


    Thanks to the herbs, I could hear the breathing of the others, and this sounded different.


    I suppose it reminded me of Leo?


    But then again, I was no expert, so I could be wrong.


    In any case, the sounds of its footsteps were getting close.


    The tension in the room grew as it approached.


    And then¡­


    I saw that Leo¡¯s nose was twitching.


    Was she catching its scent?


    Perhaps it was familiar to Leo.


    Click¡­click¡­


    As my attention was on Leo, the footsteps suddenly stopped.


    It was as if it had noticed something.


    Did it realize that we were here?


    In that case, it might run away¡­


    I turned to look at Sebastian, wondering what to do.


    There would be no point in this if it ran away without anyone having seen it.


    In that case, perhaps we should all move at once and try to capture it.


    It wasn¡¯t close enough for me to reach it, but it shouldn¡¯t be that far away either¡­ What should we do¡­

 Chapter 397

    Chapter 397


    We captured the food thief


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    As I looked at Sebastian and the others and wondered what to do, I heard Leo sighing.


    Leo, the intruder will hear if you do that¡­


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Enough? What do you mean?¡±


    Leo turned to me and barked.


    It seemed like she was saying that it was enough, but we hadn¡¯t caught anyone yet, let alone seen anything.


    What did this mean¡­ I asked Leo quietly.


    Just then, I heard the rhythmic sounds of something running from the direction that the intruder had been.


    It must have heard my voice. Or Leo¡¯s.


    Not wanting to let it get away, I started to get up to my feet.


    The others began to move as well.


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°Kya!¡±


    Just then, Leo¡¯s angry bark echoed through the kitchen.


    And then there was a scared squeak.


    Huh? That voice¡­


    ¡°Wuff. Wou!¡±


    ¡°Kyuu¡­¡±


    Leo slipped out from her cramped hiding ce and barked as she moved towards the ce where I had heard the sound.


    She wasn¡¯t going to bite into it, but catch it.


    By that time, everyone else had stood up and was looking at Leo.


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°So it was you who was stealing the food¡­¡±


    ¡°Kyuu¡­kyuu-kyuu¡­¡±


    Leo let out a sigh and picked it up with her mouth and turned to face us.


    It must have been scared by Leo¡¯s barking, as it was now shaking.


    It knew that it could not beat Leo, and did not try to resist.


    Of course, it was Sherry.


    Leo was holding her by the back of the neck, like a parent cat, as her limbs hung and shook.


    Sherry was squeaking as if asking for help, but I could not exactly defend her in this situation.


    After all, she had taken food without permission.


    ¡°Hah¡­ Sebastian, please turn on the light. The effects of the herbs should wear off soon.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Very well.¡±


    After a moment, a dim light illuminated the kitchen.


    Even though the effects of the herbs were weakening, I had gotten used to the darkness, and so my eyes hurt a little.


    In any case, there were more pressing matters.


    ¡°Sherry¡­ Why were you stealing food?¡±


    ¡°Kyau¡­kyuu-kyuu.¡±


    I asked while looking at the dangling Sherry.


    Apparently, she was barking and trying to exin, but I could not understand what she was saying.


    I thought about asking Leo to interpret, but she wouldn¡¯t be able to talk with her mouth full¡­ Besides, it would be a hassle for me to then rte it to Sebastian and the others.


    Though, Sherry seemed resigned, so it was probably fine to let go of her.


    ¡°Sorry, Sebastian. Could you go and call Liza, who is waiting with Ms. Lyra? Unless she is already sleeping.¡±


    ¡°Very well. I will go and check to see if she is awake.¡±


    Liza would be able to clearly understand what Sherry is saying.


    Ms. ire would as well, but she might be asleep¡­and I didn¡¯t want to call for her at this hour.


    If Liza was asleep, then I would just make Leo calm down and would interpret what she said.


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting. I have brought Lady Liza.¡±


    ¡°Papa. Mama. What happened¡­?¡±


    ¡°Sorry, Liza. I know you must be tired, but I want to ask you to do something.¡±


    She had probably been waiting for us to return, as she was rubbing at her eyes.


    Ms. Lyra was also right behind her.


    It would probably be best to let them sleep in tomorrow¡­ I thought such things as I asked her to interpret for Sherry.


    ¡°Yes, okay. I can do that.¡±


    ¡°So, why have you been doing such things, Sherry?¡±


    ¡°Kyau¡­kyuu-kyu.¡±


    ¡°Umm¡­¡±


    And so the interrogation began with Liza¡¯s aid.


    Since we knew there was no danger now, Phillip and the guards had been dismissed.


    Ms. Lyra had also been sent to bed, and Sebastian told her that she could sleep for longer than usual.


    After that, the interrogation was over in a few minutes.


    The reason was simple. She was hungry.


    While she had notcked food sinceing to this mansion, she was still young and growing¡­ So perhaps three meals a day was not enough.


    And so recently, she had taken to leaving the room after Ms. ire slept, and followed the scent of food to the kitchen.


    It was just a coincidence that it started after Liza¡¯s arrival.


    She was clearly scared, and would probably be crying if she was human, so I doubted it was a lie.


    In any case, Leo. Maybe you got a little too angry?

 Chapter 398

    Chapter 398


    Sherry had be fat from eating too much


    ¡°I¡¯m sure Lady ire would have prepared some food if she knew¡­ Why didn¡¯t she ask her¡­?¡±


    ¡°Kyu¡­kyu¡­¡±


    ¡°I see. Uh, papa¡­¡±


    Sebastian was right.


    Ms. ire doted on Sherry, and would surely ask the servants to bring her some food.


    Liza nodded and interpreted Sherry¡¯s excuse.


    ording to her, as they were familiar and master, she is not supposed to ask for things.


    Leo had taught her about the rtionship. Familiars were supposed to protect their masters and not ask for too much orin¡­


    Leo¡­ It¡¯s good that you want to educate Sherry, but¡­ Maybe you were a little too thorough?


    Besides, it wasn¡¯t like Leo was my familiar¡­


    Perhaps Leo was ying the part of a wise old crone, or was teaching her younger sister how to adapt to the human world.


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Wuff-wuff?¡±


    ¡°Even still, aren¡¯t you eating too much? That is what Leo is saying.¡±


    ¡°Kyu¡­kyu¡­¡±


    ¡°She says that she was hungry¡­¡±


    As Sherry was a fenrir, neither I nor Sebastian knew how much they normally ate.


    But when looking at her now, I did think that she might be eating too much.


    As a growing cub, I could understand her having a great appetite, but¡­


    Leo had calmed down by now, and had ced Sherry down on the floor.


    She was about as big as a medium sized down, and a littlerger than when we first found her.


    She looked quite round and soft.


    I had not really noticed it before, but it did seem like she was eating more than she needed to grow.


    Besides, now that I thought about it, I had hardly ever seen Sherry exercise.


    She usually just rode on Leo¡¯s head or back, or was carried by Tilura.


    Ms. ire also carried her often¡­ And if she was eating more than three meals on top of that, it was no surprise that she would get fat.


    ¡°Well, Sherry. I think you may need to lose a little weight now¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wou¡­ Wou!¡±


    ¡°What is it, Leo?¡±


    Perhaps fenrirs were different, but if Sherry was a dog, then I would be worried about her health.


    She would be more sluggish and easy to tire. And she might get sick in the future¡­


    Leo had always liked to go on walks, and would obey me so that she didn¡¯t overeat, so I hadn¡¯t had to think about such things before. But I had read about it in books.


    Obviously, Leo ate a lot more after turning into a Silver Fenrir, because she wasrger. But she still exercised a lot, and was not overweight.


    As I thought of such things, Leo started to bark as if she had thought of an idea.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wou! Grau-grau!¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ I don¡¯t know about that.¡±


    ¡°What did good Leo say?¡±


    ¡°Well¡­¡±


    Leo moved her front paws and barked while exining.


    I wasn¡¯t quite sure about her idea, but Liza and I then exined it to Sebastian.


    Leo was suggesting that Sherry could train with Tilura and me.


    Obviously, she could not wield a sword, but she could still run around in the garden.


    That in itself was fine, but Leo was also suggesting that Sherrye with us to the forest and fight against the orcs.


    Ms. ire would have to give her permission first, and I didn¡¯t know if Mr. Ekenhart would agree¡­ Well, maybe he would.


    In any case, she wanted Sherry to exercise and regain her wild side as a fenrir.


    ¡°As a fenrir¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. Leo is concerned about what will happen to Sherry if she justys around all day.¡±


    Well, even if she was a familiar, it wasn¡¯t like Ms. ire was going to make her fight.


    And she was still quite small, so it was only natural for to be picked up and carried often.


    She only ran around when she wanted to y.


    Sherry showed no signs of wanting to fight like a wild fenrir, and was veryzy. And so Leo had been thinking for a while to do something about that.


    She said that this would be a good opportunity for Sherry to get some much needed training, but I wondered if she wasn¡¯t still upset about her stealing food.


    But I suppose it worked as a punishment as well.


    ¡°Indeed¡­I have never seen Sherry move around with any agility.¡±


    ¡°Do fenrirs normally move around much faster than humans?¡±


    ¡°Yes. They confuse enemies with their speed, while attacking with their ws and fangs. And since they can use magic as well, they are very dangerous monsters.¡±


    ¡°¡­You would never think they were dangerous if you looked at Sherry¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed¡­¡±

 Chapter 399

    Chapter 399


    Ms. ire Apologized


    Now that she had been captured and surrounded, Sherry rolled over onto her back to show that she had surrendered.


    It was good that she recognized the situation, but it was strange, considering she was supposed to be a dangerous monster.


    I suppose it was mainly because Leo was here.


    Her belly looked very round and soft¡­


    As Sebastian and I looked at her, we knew one thing for sure. We were in no danger around this fenrir.


    ¡°Hahh¡­¡±


    ¡°Are you sleepy, Liza?¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    ¡°I see. It is quitete¡­ Thank you for helping with Sherry and Leo.¡±


    ¡°No. I was d to help you and mama¡­hahhh¡­¡±


    As I was thinking about Sherry, I heard Liza yawning next to me.


    She must have been trying to stay awake. Her eyes were half closed and she yawned again while answering me.


    I felt bad for keeping her awake.


    ¡°We can continue this tomorrow. I will have to discuss it with Lady ire and the master.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Well, I will return to my room then.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you for your cooperation, Mr. Takumi. I will also do my best with the cooking tomorrow.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. That¡¯s fine. I hope you also get plenty of sleep, Ms. Helena. Now Liza. Let¡¯s go. Leo too.¡±


    ¡°Okay¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    And so we all dispersed.


    Liza seemed like she was falling asleep as we walked back to the room, and so I put her on Leo¡¯s back. She then wrapped her arms around Leo¡¯s neck. And by the time we reached the room, she was already asleep.


    Leo¡¯s fur was veryfortable, and she was tired, so it could not be helped.


    I wanted to put her on the bed, but she looked sofortable with Leo and I thought it would be best to not disturb her.


    Leo alsoy down carefully so as not to wake her.


    ¡°Thank you for staying up with me, Leo. We were able to find the culprit because of you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I thanked Leo in a whisper, and then got into my own bed.


    Still, Sherry, huh?


    I suppose Ms. ire would have to scold her tomorrow¡­ With such thoughts, I closed my eyes and fell asleep..


    It waste, and though I hadn¡¯t realized it myself, I was also quite tired¡­


    ¡ª


    The next morning, when I opened my eyes, I looked at the clock and saw that it was shortly before midday.


    I suppose that due to what happened yesterday, they had let us sleep inte. And so I washed up and changed.


    When I looked outside of the room, I saw that Ms. Gelda was waiting there, and so I asked her to help Liza get ready.


    When going down for breakfast¡­or rather, lunch, Liza put on her hat before leaving the room.


    ¡°Liza, there is no need to cover your ears when you are in the mansion, so you don¡¯t need to wear that hat.¡±


    ¡°I know. But I want to wear it.¡±


    ¡°Really? Well, if that¡¯s what you want¡­¡±


    The first time she put on the hat, she had some difficulty as it squished her ears. But now, she seemed to be quite fond of it.


    If she liked it this much, then I felt good about buying it.


    And like that, we headed to the dining hall.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry that we are sote¡­¡±


    ¡°Not at all. I heard aboutst night. I¡¯m sorry that you were troubled, Mr. Takumi, Leo and Liza. Now Sherry, say you¡¯re sorry.¡±


    ¡°Kyau¡­¡±


    When I went to the dining hall, Ms. ire was holding Sherry and waiting for us.


    Tilura, Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. Anne were not present, so they were probably in their rooms.


    Sherry looked quite dejected, so Ms. ire had probably scolded her about what had happened.


    Even her ears were drooping sadly.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau. Kyu¡­¡±


    Leo nodded and told Sherry, ¡®Don¡¯t do it anymore, okay?¡¯


    Sherry shuddered once and then barked with a nod.


    While Leo was just trying to scold her for stealing the food, it probably looked more threatening because she was a Silver Fenrir.


    Regardless, I very much doubted Sherry would continue after being told by both Leo and Ms. ire.


    ¡°Sherry is so cute, so I couldn¡¯t help but spoil her¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha. Well, that¡¯s how it is. You have never had a pet before, I suppose?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Unless you count horses.¡±


    ¡°Then it cannot be helped. You two will have plenty to learn together.¡±


    I said. But I was not really in a position to talk as if I knew a lot about that.


    There was still a lot that I didn¡¯t know, and I was constantly learning more.


    And though having a familiar wasn¡¯t exactly the same as having a pet, both came with different mistakes when you had no experience.


    It was verymon for owners of cats and dogs to feed them whatever they want, because they are cute.


    I had also given Leo a lot of food at first¡­ But then a veterinarian warned me, and so I was more careful.


    Just because they are cute, you shouldn¡¯t spoil them all of the time.


    If they be too fat, then they might get sick. And so it was the owner¡¯s responsibility to be strict with some things.

 Chapter 400

    Chapter 400


    Leo started a diet n for Sherry


    ¡°Besides, it is probably easier in some ways when they are a familiar.¡±


    ¡°Really?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Because no matter what happens, you can speak to each other.¡±


    ¡°Ah, that is true. It is very convenient to be able to understand each other. But I think that after I brought Sherry back with me¡­I left too much of the work to others. Sherry, from now on, I will be more strict with you, understand?¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Kyu¡­¡±


    Normal dogs and humans could notmunicate clearly.


    While you may be able to understand each other¡¯s emotions somewhat, once you are close, it is not quite the same thing as being able to talk to each other.


    Ms. ire was usually the one who other people took care of, so I suppose there were a lot of things she didn¡¯t know when it came to handling Sherry.


    But through this incident, she seemed to have learned the importance of talking to Sherry and deciding things.


    I had also failed in different ways after rescuing Leo.


    We could not understand each other like we could now. And even if she seemed smarter than most dogs, I still struggled.


    ¡°That being said, Mr. Takumi. I heard from Sebastian that you wish for Sherry to go to the forest as well?¡±


    ¡°Ah, yes. I suppose it is to help Sherry lose some weight¡­. Leo wants to toughen her up.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°¡­Are you sure it will be alright?¡±


    While Ms. ire trusted Leo, she was still a little worried about Sherry.


    After all, when we first found her, she had been wounded and surrounded by trolls¡­


    Sherry was still young, and so even if she was a fenrir, she wasn¡¯t sure if she would be able to fight.


    ¡­Especially since she had never fought before.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff! Wuff¡­wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Uh, Leo is saying that trolls are weak, and no enemy to fenrirs. As long as you do not let your guard down.¡±


    ¡°Is that right, Sherry?¡±


    ¡°Kyau? Kyau-kyau!¡±


    ¡°What did she say?¡±


    ¡°She said that she had been separated from the pack, and was not wary of her surroundings. And so she walked through the forest alone, due to curiosity¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°It definitely sounds like she let her guard down¡­ Well, Leo. Sherry is still young. So it cannot be helped.¡±


    Normally, you would think that you would be more cautious if you were separated from the others¡­ But Sherry had aid back personality, and perhaps she did not know how to react in that situation.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Are you sure?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Very well. Since we have a few days until we go to the forest, she will be able to do some training. I think it will help a little¡­¡±


    ¡°Training¡­ Very well. If that is what good Leo says, then I will allow it.¡±


    ¡°Ki-kyau¡­¡±


    Sherry did not seem to like this idea at all, and was clutching to Ms. ire¡¯s arm, but Ms. ire had made up her mind, and so she put Sherry on top of Leo¡¯s head.


    A look of despair came over Sherry¡¯s face. She was probably thinking about the harsh training she was bound to face¡­ However, it was necessary for her.


    ¡°Now, let¡¯s begin.¡±


    ¡°Grau! Grau-grau!¡±


    ¡°Kyau¡­¡±


    ¡°Ahaha!¡±


    After I finished talking with Ms. ire, we ate lunch with everyone, and then I quickly finished my work of growing herbs.


    I gave some herbs to Milina to be made into medicine, and then I went to inspect the herb gardens.


    Like Sebastian had said yesterday, the surrounding nts had wilted, and the soil looked quite dried. After seeing this, I went to a different spot to grow some herbs.


    It was best to experiment as much as I can now.


    Once all of that work was done, I started my training with Mr. Ekenhart.


    As Sherry would also be training today, Leo and Liza were in the garden as well.


    I had thought that Liza would want to help with the medicine, but she was apparently interested in Sherry¡¯s training.


    It was a good thing that she was curious about different things.


    In fact, Liza was currently running in front of Leo, as if to encourage Sherry.


    ¡­Sherry was running as if out of breath, but Liza looked energetic.


    Well, Sherry was mostly like that because of ack of exercise. But Leo was also running at a simr speed to me and Mr. Ekenhart.


    While Leo had been running in the lead at first, as Sherry would stop running, Leo was now running behind her.


    As a fenrir, it was probably a scary thing to be chased by a Silver Fenrir¡­


    ¡°First¡­we should start by running like we usually do¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart said, once we had finished preparation.


    ¡°¡­I will run behind Leo. Mr. Takumi and Tilura can¡­¡±


    ¡°I will run in the front. Since Liza is as well.¡±


    ¡°I want to run with Liza and Sherry too!¡±


    ¡°Uh, yes. fine. Now then¡­¡±

 Chapter 433

    Chapter 433


    Phillip came to watch our training


    ¡°His Grace and Sebastian said that I shoulde and check up on you two. Especially, you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°¡­Me?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi?¡±


    So Phillip hade to see us after being asked by Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian¡­ I wonder why?


    ¡°His Grace wondered that something might have changed with the way you think afterst night¡¯s events.¡±


    ¡°The way I think?¡±


    ¡°What happenedst night?¡±


    ¡°And from what I saw at a distance¡­you did seem a little different.¡±


    ¡°Really?¡±


    I had spoken to Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian after returning to the mansion. And perhaps they had sensed a changee over me.


    Perhaps it was my regret over how things went with Deam¡­


    There were definitely times when I thought I was acting normal, but others found me easy to read.


    ¡­They had even known I meant to go to the slums.


    ¡°I have watched you train with the master asionally, and at Range vige as well. And you seem more determined now.¡±


    I didn¡¯t know that much about Phillip, but he was the leader of the guard at this mansion.


    I had not noticed him observing me before, but I suppose there were things he was able to see from it.


    As for Tilura, she knew nothing aboutst night, and Phillip did not enlighten her. And so she puffed out her cheeks in annoyance.


    Right now, they wanted her to focus on her studies and sword training. It was too early for her to be concerned with other issues.


    Perhaps Tilura also understood that we were hiding things, and couldn¡¯t help but be sulky about it.


    She probably wanted to be treated like a grown up.


    I had been like that at her age.


    ¡°Mr Takumi¡­ Do you know what is important when fighting?¡±


    ¡°The most important thing?¡±


    Phillip usually talked in a more casual, amused way, but his eyes were very serious now.


    As for the question¡­ Sebastian had told me that it wasn¡¯t just about defeating your opponent, and that it was sometimes important to run away.


    Survival was more important than anything.


    ¡°That I survive. And protect who I want to protect¡­ I think?¡±


    ¡°Hmm. I see. Then let me ask you this¡­ Say, a de is rushing towards someone you wish to protect. And it is unlikely that you will make it in time to stop it¡­ What will you do? Obviously, no one will conveniently appear to help. You have no hidden powers, and you cannot block the attack.¡±


    For instance, if Deam¡¯s sword was swinging towards Ms. ire or Liza¡­


    I had fought him recently, so I used him in this scenario.


    What would I do¡­


    Deam¡¯s sword had been heavy.


    He had put all of his weight behind it, after all. And there was no way that I could block it from the side.


    And Leo would not be able to help me.


    I had to do something on my own.


    ¡°¡­I suppose I would knock the person I wanted to protect out of the way, and get hit in their ce¡­¡±


    ¡°I see. That would indeed be an effective way to protect someone. However, you will then be wounded or even die. And then the enemy will be free to attack their original target. And you won¡¯t be able to do anything about it.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true¡­¡±


    As I had not done anything about the enemy, the oue would be the same in the end.


    So, what could I do¡­


    ¡°Perhaps you could ignore the enemy¡¯s sword, and just swing at the enemy with all of your might instead. But it¡¯s possible that you won¡¯t be able to do it before the person you want to protect is cut down.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ That would not be a good move.¡±


    ¡°But you could avoid the death of everyone. Sacrificing one person will lead to protecting yourself.¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    I understood what he was saying.


    If sacrificing one person could save myself and others, then it may be necessary.


    However¡­if I was ever in that situation¡­I felt that I would still want to protect that person.


    That was just my personality.


    ¡°I know it was a mischievous question¡­ But the point is that the situation will change with every fight. There will be times when you must protect someone. Times when you have to defeat an enemy. Times when you have to abandon friends and survive.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s true.¡±


    It really was a mischievous question, given there wasn¡¯t even a right answer. Because it changed based on the situation.


    There was no real answer.

 Chapter 434

    Chapter 434


    I asked about the guards training


    ¡°Indeed, indeed. It seems that you believed in the one answer, and have been training based on it. I suppose you have decided on who your enemy will be¡­and defeating it is your goal. But I don¡¯t think you were thinking about survival, or about protecting anyone?¡±


    ¡°¡­I see¡­ You might be right.¡±


    It was true that I had probably started training with the intention of being able to defeat others.


    Perhaps my fight with Deam had made my mind go in that direction without really realizing it.


    And so I was grateful to Phillip for pointing it out.


    Mr. Ekenhart had likely seen it as well.


    He was really sharp when it came to things rted tobat¡­ Not so much other things¡­ But Sebastian and the others made up for it.


    ¡°The strength to defeat an opponent. The strength to protect others. They seem like the same thing, but they are not. When defeat means death, then escape is also an option. And so avoiding danger and enhancing your ability to escape could make you strong.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Though, I don¡¯t know about only training to run away.¡±


    ¡°It is just an example. There are many ways of being strong. You could even hit enemies with magic from a distance where they cannot retaliate.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that would be one way¡­ Does such magic exist?¡±


    ¡°Well, I don¡¯t know anyone who can do that.¡±


    ¡°¡­Now that I think about it, Sebastian had said something¡­¡±


    ¡°What did he say?¡±


    ¡°About how Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s guards train differently. Compared to me and Tilura. He said that I should ask you about that.¡±


    ¡°Ah, I see¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Phillip suddenly looks disheartened!¡±


    Phillip had been talking quite normally up until now, but his expression suddenly darkened.


    Even Tilura noticed this, and raised her voice in surprise.


    ¡­Was the training so bad that he didn¡¯t want to remember it?


    ¡°That was¡­ Well, His Grace is very strange¡­¡±


    ¡°He is?¡±


    ¡°Yes. As a duke, he is usually quite busy with his daily duties¡­ And yet, he would follow us closely during the early part of our training.¡±


    ¡°When he had free time?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. It beats me how he was able to do it¡­ In any case, he teaches us very thoroughly at first.¡±


    I could imagine it, since it had been like that when he first started teaching me and Tilura.


    But I suppose it was possible, since he could spend his time more flexibly in this mansion.


    Besides, Tilura was his daughter.


    And since Leo was with me, she was also able to help with the training, and then Mr. Ekenhart returned to the main house.


    Phillip had likely been trained in that house¡­


    The duke had many responsibilities, on top of running businesses¡­ I didn¡¯t want to think about how busy he was.


    Though, I had heard that his businesses were doing well.


    ¡°At first, the training was simr to what you are doing. A lot of running and strengthening our bodies¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, the basics then.¡±


    If you did not have the strength to move while carrying heavy swords and spears, then you would not be able to fight.


    ¡°We had to run distances that it would take a horse several hours to cross, but not take twice as long. Or train while carrying boulders¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    Tilura and I were stunned.


    A few hours by horse¡­ If that was two hours, then you would have to run that distance in less than four hours.


    That could be dozens of kilometers¡­you would have to run at top speed the whole time. It would be worse than a marathon.


    And then the muscle training with rocks¡­ I could see how weight training was effective, but carrying a boulder that was over ten kilograms¡­


    Tilura and I realized how easy we had it.


    ¡°By the way, when you were finished with all of that, there was even more training waiting for you. And once we were used to the basic training, we got to the real guard training.¡±


    ¡°¡­And what was that like?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t like to think back on it.¡±


    If that was what the basic training was like, what did they do after that?


    Phillip¡¯s reluctance to talk about it just made me even more curious.


    But he had a far away look in his eyes now.


    ¡­Perhaps it was better to not make him remember?

 Chapter 435

    Chapter 435


    The training was quite severe


    ¡°¡­Ughhhh¡­¡±


    ¡°Phillip!?¡±


    ¡°Is he crying!?¡±


    He must have remembered something, as Phillip¡¯s eyes welled up with tears, and then he covered his face with his hands.


    So it really was something that I shouldn¡¯t ask about.


    ¡°¡­Ohh¡­. Excuse me. I forgot myself there¡­¡±


    ¡°Not at all¡­¡±


    ¡°I have never seen him look so weak! He is usually so silly!¡±


    Phillip wiped away the tears and apologized to us.


    I wasn¡¯t sure what to say after that.


    But Tilura did not hesitate to speak her mind¡­ Well, it wasn¡¯t far from the truth.


    He had been like that in Range vige.


    ¡°Well, in any case. We were talking about the training¡­¡±


    ¡°Uh, yes.¡±


    While he looked a little hurt by Tilura¡¯sment, it seemed that he would continue to talk about his training.


    ¡°First, we were taken to the forest near the house.¡±


    ¡°To the forest?¡±


    What did their training as guards have to do with the forest?


    Now that I thought about it, Tilura and I were also going to the forest. Perhaps Mr. Ekenhart just liked to go there.


    ¡°The forest was filled with traps that he prepared.¡±


    ¡°What kind?¡±


    ¡°Pitfalls, and flying arrows. Of course, none of the traps would kill you immediately, but¡­you would still get injured. We had to make our way through the forest while carrying a wooden statue.¡±


    ¡°A wooden statue?¡±


    ¡°Because we couldn¡¯t use real people in our training. So we protected a wooden statue instead. But since it didn¡¯t move, we had to carry them.¡±


    I guess they could practice guarding and carrying supplies at the same time then.


    ¡°Navigating your way through the forest while avoiding traps is quite draining mentally. Also, if someone else was caught in a trap, then we had to help them. Unless you could not¡­¡±


    ¡°What happened to those you couldn¡¯t help?¡±


    ¡°They get left behind. And so they must stay there for the whole night. And someone would help them the following morning¡­ Even though there were no monsters in that forest, you still had to stay there for the whole night. When it happened to me, I thought I was going to die.¡±


    ¡°Well¡­you have my condolences¡­¡±


    I did not want to think about what that would be like.


    It could rain while you were inside of a pit. And in a dense forest, you would not be able to see the sky.


    It was no wonder that he felt like he would die there.


    ¡°Our main priority was to escort our target out of the forest safely. So even while the others were dropping like flies, you had to continue to carry your target.


    ¡°Hmm¡­¡±


    ¡°And once you reach your destination outside of the forest, the training is over. And thenes the evaluation.¡±


    ¡°Evaluation?¡±


    ¡°Yes. To see if the target is alive¡­ If there is any obvious damage to it, then you have to do it all over again. And with only a short rest inbetween. That is why we were so desperate to get it right the first time.¡±


    Well, it certainly sounded tiring both physically and psychologically.


    As I was just listening to his ount, I could only imagine how severe it was. But it definitely did not make me want to experience it.


    It sounded like something you might do in the military.


    ¡°Well, that was just one of the ways we trained. Some of the other ones were worse.¡±


    ¡°Father¡­was doing such things¡­¡±


    While I felt a little afraid, Tilura sounded more like she was impressed.


    That was a strange thing to be proud of your father for¡­


    ¡°And once we went through that training, we started to train with swords and other weapons.¡±


    ¡°So it was after¡­¡±


    I suppose he wanted to toughen them up and build their bodies first. It was quite differentpared to the way he trained Tilura and me.


    ¡°As for the weapons, we test with various ones to see what suits us the most. And then we train with that weapon. That training is also quite hard¡­ Would you like to hear about it?¡±


    ¡°No, I don¡¯t think so.¡±


    ¡°¡­!¡±


    Tilura and I were training with weapons, so it was close enough. Besides, even if I was somewhat interested, I felt bad for making him talk about his training.


    Tilura must have felt the same way, as she also shook her head.

 Chapter 436

    Chapter 436


    We had a visitor


    ¡°I see, that is good. ¡­Well, like that, we learned that there is a lot more to protecting a target, than merely bing stronger.¡±


    After seeing that we did not want to hear more, Phillip sighed in relief and his expression brightened.


    Well, now that I had talked to Phillip about it, perhaps I would talk to Nichs next time.


    If he didn¡¯t mind, that is.


    ¡°But as you and Lady Tilura are not training to be guards, you only have to continue and do as the master has instructed.¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed. Clearly our goals are very different, and that is reflected in our training. I understand that now.¡±


    ¡°So do I!¡±


    Tilura and I nodded at Phillip.


    Mr. Ekenhart thought a lot about such things, and would have nned something that suited us specifically.


    And so it would not be good for me to get carried away by these feelings of inadequacy, and start trying to do other things.


    Deam had made me a little frantic, that was all.


    I had felt that I had to be stronger in order to protect Liza.


    But I never thought like that just a few months ago. And so I really didn¡¯t know what to do now.


    So perhaps Mr. Ekenhart had detected the change, and asked Phillip toe and talk with me.


    ¡­Or I might just be giving him too much credit. But it was clear that there was more to him than met the eye.


    ¡°During my training, I sometimes wondered why I chose to do this¡­ Surely there was an easier path¡­ But now I am Lady ire¡¯s guard. Being able to protect someone who is so pretty has rid me of any regret.¡±


    ¡°¡­Is that so? Hmm. I don¡¯t understand.¡±


    ¡°Haha. Well, it¡¯s something that men should rte to, isn¡¯t that right, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Huh? Uh¡­perhaps.¡±


    I did understand what he was saying, but it was awkward to talk about it in front of Tilura.


    We finished talking with Phillip, as well as the training that Mr. Ekenhart made us do, and then we rested.


    Now that he had spoken to us, Phillip returned to his work at the mansion.


    ¡°By the way, Sebastian, father, and ire seemed very busy?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    Tilura asked as we were wiping our sweat with towels and quenching our thirst with water.


    Usually, one of those three would havee out to the garden to watch us.


    Well, Mr. Ekenhart would participate.


    And so Tilura was puzzled by their absence.


    ¡°Sebastian seemed especially busy¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Did you call me?¡±


    ¡°Sebastian!?¡±


    He should have been the most busy out of the three, and yet when I muttered his name, he suddenly appeared behind me with his usual smile.


    ¡°Hohoho. Did I surprise you?¡±


    ¡°¡­I suppose you did that on purpose?¡±


    ¡°Whatever do you mean?¡±


    Sebastian did not look sorry at all. In fact, he looked very amused.


    That was one way that Sebastian and Mr. Ekenhart was simr.


    ¡°Well, enough of such games¡­ Mr. Takumi, a guest came to see you.¡±


    ¡°To see me? ¡­Is it rted to yesterday?¡±


    ¡°No, it is not. Well, to be precise, Mr. Hannes came to see His Grace and Lady ire. But it concerns you as well.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Should I go to the drawing room?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Very well. I will go at once.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. I will go and call the master¡­¡±


    And then Sebastian hurried back into the house.


    So he called me first¡­


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. It looks like Leo and the others are finished as well?¡±


    ¡°Ah, it does look like it¡­¡±


    As I mused over Sebastian¡¯s timing, Tilura told me about Leo and the others.


    Tilura was not surprised about Sebastian¡¯s sudden appearance¡­ I suppose she was used to it after living with him for years.

 Chapter 437

    Chapter 437


    I talked with Mr. Haines


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyuu¡­ Heheh!¡±


    ¡°It was so fun running around, papa!¡±


    After running for so long, Leo and the others came rushing towards us.


    It was no surprise to me now that Leo didn¡¯t look tired at all, but¡­ Liza wasn¡¯t even panting and was still energetic.


    I suppose it was because she was a beastkin?


    On the other hand, Sherry let out a weak bark and was panting with her tongue sticking out.


    And she seemed quite unstable on her legs. Was she alright?


    ¡°I¡¯m d you had fun, Liza. ¡­What about you, Sherry?¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wou-wou!¡±


    ¡°Kyu¡­¡±


    Leo was saying something about Sherry being weak, while Sherry barked in protest.


    Well, if Liza was fine, then it was a little sad that Sherry the fenrir was so exhausted.


    ¡°¡­Well, you can rest here, Sherry. As for Tilura¡­¡±


    ¡°I will watch over Sherry!¡±


    ¡°Very well then. Liza, you should stay with them as well. Maybe you can continue to y when Sherry regains her energy. A guest has arrived, and I have to go talk with them.¡±


    ¡°Okay, papa!¡±


    ¡°Kyau¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    I didn¡¯t know what had brought Mr. Haines here, but we were bound to discuss the herb fields.


    Liza would just be bored if I took her, so it would be better for her to stay with Tilura and Sherry.


    Leo then tilted her head and barked as if to ask me what she should do.


    ¡°Leo, youe with me. Mr. Haines is here. So you can meet him.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wou-wou?¡±


    ¡°Rosalie¡­ I don¡¯t know. I didn¡¯t ask about her. Well, let¡¯s go and see.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    Leo barked loudly when she heard that Mr. Haines was here, but then she immediately asked about Rosalie.


    Rosalie was very fond of Leo, and they had yed together a lot in Range vige, and so Leo remembered her.


    While Sebastian had not mentioned her, it was possible that she had apanied him.


    In any case, as the others drank water and rested, Leo and I returned to the mansion.


    ¡°Excuse me. ¡­Mr. Haines. It¡¯s nice to see you again.¡±


    ¡°Ah, Mr. Takumi. And Leo. It is good to see you! Everyone is doing very well in the vige, thanks to you.¡±


    ¡°Hello Mr. Takumi and Leo!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    I entered the drawing room and greeted Mr. Haines, who was sitting inside.


    And Rosalie was sitting right next to him. So he had brought her along after all.


    After I greeted them, they immediately got up to their feet and bowed deeply.


    They were grateful for what I had done for them, healing the sick with Ramogi, and stopping the orc attack.


    ¡­I didn¡¯t feel that it was necessary, but I suppose they were being extra formal, because we were in the duke¡¯s house.


    Leo also barked to greet them, and wagged her tail when she saw Rosalie.


    ¡°And what about the wine?¡±


    ¡°We have not produced any more since then. After all, the merchant set the orcs on us¡­ I don¡¯t know where we will get grapes¡­ Besides, there are the children.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°Good Leo! You are as fluffy as ever!¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    As we waited for Mr. Ekenhart, I sat across from them and asked about how things were in the vige.


    Leo and Rosalie started ying¡­ Well, she was grabbing onto Leo and feeling her fur.


    ¡­It was a good thing I had bathed Leo.


    But I was more interested in the wine in Range vige.


    The merchants had made orcs attack the vige, and were also the ones who spread the sickness.


    Even if a different merchant was sent, they did not trust anyone who came from the count¡¯snds.


    Also, they did not want to return to being as busy as they had been before.


    ¡°However¡­I think that you will be asked to start producing the wine again.¡±


    ¡°Is that so?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Though, I cannot tell you the details¡­¡±


    ¡°Is this rted¡­to usingnds near the vige?¡±


    ¡°It is. Is that why you are here today?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I received a letter directly from the duke. We were to prepare a field¡­ He even told us the exact location¡­ And while it is an honor to serve the duke, I still wondered why¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s n was to add herbs to the wine and sell it as a medicinal wine.


    Well, he also liked the taste of the wine.


    In any case, we had to have wine for that, and fields had to be prepared.


    But Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s letter didn¡¯t exin any of that.


    But judging by the time it was sent, not much of the details would have even been decided.


    And since the duke had written the letter himself, Mr. Haines probably thought it would be more polite toe here in person, instead of writing back.

 Chapter 438

    Chapter 438


    Mr. Hannes met Ms. Anne


    ¡°I am quite old¡­ And so my son and his wife told me to take Rosalie with me, just in case something happened. They coulde with me, as they were busy in the vige¡­¡±


    So that¡¯s why Rosalie was here.


    Indeed, Mr. Haines did look quite old, so it was no wonder that they would worry for him.


    Sebastian was probably the same age¡­but he was definitely an extreme case.


    I shouldn¡¯tpare him to other people.


    As for Rosalie¡¯s parents, I had met them thest time I was in Range vige.


    They both seemed to be very kind and gentle people.


    ¡°If you are worried about getting grapes for the wine, I think it will be fine. Though, you may find it difficult to believe¡­¡±


    ¡°Not at all! You saved our vige. And so we have no reason to doubt what you say.¡±


    Well, I wasn¡¯t sure if they should trust herpletely, but Ms. Anne had given her word, so it should be fine.


    ¡°Thank you. As for the fields¡­¡±


    ¡°I will talk to you about that!¡±


    ¡°¡­Mr. Ekenhart?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Wa!¡±


    ¡°!?¡±


    Just as I was about to exin, the doors burst open, and Mr. Ekenhart entered the room.


    ¡­Had he been listening from outside?


    Ms. ire was ring at him from behind, and Leo had an admonishing expression, so it must be the case.


    Also, Ms. Anne was also standing behind them. I wonder why¡­?


    Mr. Hannes and Ms. Anne was not acquainted.


    But she looked quite nervous¡­and also silly, due to her hair.


    ¡°Mr. Haines. His Grace, Duke Ekenhart. And you already know his daughter, Ms. ire?¡±


    ¡°Mm.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s nice to see you again, Mr. Haines.¡±


    ¡°The d-duke!? Ex-excuse me! I am Haines, the chief of Range vige! Rosalie, over here¡­!¡±


    ¡°It is fine. Best not disturb her if she is ying with Leo.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­as you say¡­¡±


    I stood up and introduced Mr. Ekenhart to him, since Sebastian was not here.


    Apparently, Mr. Haines had not seen Mr. Ekenhart before, and he was surprised and apologized while introducing himself.


    ¡°Well, while there are a lot of things to discuss, such as the fields and wine¡­ First of all¡­ Anneliese.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart moved towards Mr. Haines, but then turned and called for Ms. Anne.


    Ms. Anne answered and then stepped forward with a nervous expression.


    But her hair rolls and ribbons ruined the effect. Even Rosalie was staring at them now.


    ¡°Who is this?¡±


    ¡°She is Anneliese Barsler. Count Barsler¡¯s only child.¡±


    ¡°Then that means¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. She is rted to the man who had your vige attacked.¡±


    Upon hearing this, Mr. Haines looked so shocked that his eyes were about to fly out of his face.


    Well, Mr. Haines knew first hand about the orcs and the sphere, so it was no surprise.


    They had even been selling the wine to him.


    Mr. Ekenhart nodded, and admitted that it had indeed been Count Barsler who did all of that.


    ¡°And so why is such a person here?¡±


    ¡°Well, there are various reasons. But she was left in my care. Do not worry, her house will not be able to work such evils again. Isn¡¯t that right, Anne?¡±


    ¡°Yes, though it was my father¡¯s doing, as the heir to the house, I give you my word. Also¡­¡±


    ¡°Are you sure?¡±


    ¡°Of course. After all, I shoulder my own share of the me. Even ire said that I cannot be so arrogant because of my position.¡±


    For Mr. Haines, she may be someone to hate.


    After all, she was the daughter of Count Barsler.


    And even though I had healed everyone in the vige with my herbs¡­he would still hold a grudge.

 Chapter 439

    Chapter 439


    The angry chaos caused by Ms. Anne


    Even as he listened to Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s exnation, Mr. Haines was ring at Ms. Anne.


    While she was not the head of the house yet, she had given her word, so perhaps Mr. Haines could rest easy¡­ No, likely not¡­ Even her hair suggested that she was not normal.


    But for a moment, when I saw Ms. Anne answer with downcast eyes, I thought she had grown since the first time I saw her.


    ¡°¡­Now, Anneliese.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    And then she took a step towards Mr. Haines, while Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire moved away.


    What was she going to do?


    Mr. Haines looked both angry and cautious. I could not me him.


    ¡°¡­I am sorry!¡±


    ¡°!?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    As she stood there, Ms. Anne closed her eyes.


    And then after a few seconds, she suddenly threw herself to the ground, prostrating herself, and shouted that she was sorry.


    Of course, her hair rollsy limply on the floor as well.


    Mr. Haines and the others were terribly surprised. Even Leo looked up in rm.


    Rosalie did not understand what was happening, and watched with a confused expression.


    ¡°Even though it was my father, I still bear some of the responsibility! And what he did can not be forgiven! While I might have made a suggestion, and though I was half asleep when I said it, he carried it out all on his own¡­ No, I will not make excuses. I will not try and take the easy way out! Even if I just muttered such suggestions to him in order to make him leave me alone¡­ It does not change the fact that I put the idea into his head! But I never thought that he would actually do it¡­ Still, I will represent my house and apologize! I am sorry! With all of my body and soul, I apologize! I was very wrong! So, uh¡­ Well¡­I¡­ Umm. What happens now?¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    She kept shouting for so long that I was more impressed with the fact that she did not run out of breath.


    But by the end of it, she seemed a little confused herself.


    And so she had to ask Mr. Haines what to do¡­ Clearly, she was not used to apologizing to people.


    ¡°Hah¡­ Anne. Don¡¯t ask something like that at the end.¡±


    ¡°But I¡¯ve never done this before! How should I know what to do!?¡±


    Ms. ire sighed as she admonished Ms. Anne.


    Perhaps it had been Ms. ire who persuaded her to do this.


    And while Ms. Anne shouted like she was angry at Ms. ire, it was clear that she was frantic.


    Someone in her position would not have to make apologies very often.


    Not only that, but she would not have known that Mr. Haines would be visiting today¡­ Even I hadn¡¯t known.


    Someone like Sebastian might have known¡­ Regardless, it would have been sudden for Ms. Anne, and she would not have had time to prepare.


    It had been bold of her to start by falling to the ground like that¡­but I think she was just causing more confusion now.


    ¡°¡­Well, so there it is¡­ Anneliese has repented for what was done. While I won¡¯t tell you to forgive her, surely you can give her a chance?¡±


    ¡°Huh? Oh, uh, yes¡­¡±


    While Ms. Anne was still on the floor, Mr. Ekenhart spoke to Mr. Haines.


    Mr. Haines looked like he was lost for words, and did not know what to do.


    It had all been so sudden, after all¡­


    Though, I wondered if this wasn¡¯t intentional on Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s part.


    Mr. Haines had been ring at Ms. Anne at first, but all of the anger was gone from his face now.


    He could avoid having an angry, explosive confrontation, and bring Mr. Haines over to his side¡­ That would be quite a strategy. Or maybe I was just overthinking it¡­

 Chapter 440

    Chapter 440


    Mr. Ekenhart also apologized to Mr. Haines


    ¡°You can stand back now, Anneliese.¡±


    ¡°Really? But I haven¡¯t done anything yet¡­¡±


    ¡°Anne, it¡¯s enough. Besides, I think your presence here is just confusing Mr. Haines.¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well.¡±


    Ms. Anne seemed like she hadn¡¯t had enough yet, but she somberly got to her feet and exited the drawing room with one of the maids.


    I suppose she was still confused as well.


    She had bowed on the floor but felt like she hadn¡¯t done anything.


    It showed how desperate she had been.


    ¡°Ah, thank you.¡±


    Sebastian then entered the room, and a different maid poured everyone some tea.


    We were sitting at the table now, with Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire facing Mr. Haines.


    Sebastian stood next to Mr. Ekenhart, while Leo and Rosalie yed a short distance away.


    Now that things had calmed down, Mr. Haines tried to call Rosalie over to sit with him, but Mr. Ekenhart stopped him.


    He saw that Leo was having fun, and thought that it was wrong to disturb her.


    I didn¡¯t know what he was thinking, but it wasn¡¯t like Leo would get mad over such a thing. But I suppose it was also in his best interest to treat Leo with reverence, because she was a Silver Fenrir¡­


    I suppose Leo being special gave him more authority¡­


    When Leo and I had gone to the vige before, the people had not really been afraid of her. But I suppose it was necessary to asionally make her look important.


    ¡°In regards to Anneliese, I am taking full responsibility over her. Do you have any objections?¡±


    ¡°No. If Your Grace is keeping his eye on her, I could not ask for more.¡±


    So Mr. Haines was satisfied.


    That was how much he trusted Mr. Ekenhart.


    ¡°However, it is true that I failed to realize what the count was doing, which caused great harm to Range vige. And so as the lord who governs thesends, I apologize.¡±


    ¡°No, no, not at all! There is no need for¡­please raise your head!¡±


    ¡°Mmm. Thank you.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart had clearly never dreamed of something like this happening, and he was terribly shocked by it.


    Someone who would not hesitate to bow to others¡­ I suppose it was because she was raised by such a father, that Ms. ire was not arrogant about being from a noble house.


    ¡°Now, about the wine¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, Your Grace. We people of Range Vige have been thinking about quitting wine production altogether.¡±


    Mr. Haines said with a shake of his head.


    ¡°Hmm. And is this because you can no longer trust the people that you used to buy from?¡±


    ¡°That is one reason. But not the main one¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, the children then?¡±


    Mr. Haines nodded and then turned to look at Rosalie, who was ying with Leo.


    He had gentle eyes and seemed happy to see her like this.


    ¡°Yes. Up until now, the vige was so busy that the children were often neglected. And while I thought it was necessary for our survival¡­ I am not sure it was the only way. After all, if we fail in the raising of the children, then what future will the vige have in the end?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ If your children all leave, then the vige¡¯s fate will be sealed. It is a difficult problem¡­but one that cannot be ignored.¡±


    Even when in front of the duke, Mr. Haines was able to say his opinion clearly and show how much he understood the situation in the vige. He really was a good chief.


    Mr. Ekenhart listened to this and nodded with a conflicted expression.


    There was a saying about how children grew even without parents¡­ But when it came to the vige¡¯s survival, they would have to do better than that.


    Children with few good memories were unlikely to care about the vige once they were adults.


    It was amon thing in Japan. The young would leave viges and go to the city.


    ¡°By the way, chief. How were the vige children with good Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart suddenly changed the subject.


    Leo heard her name and barked with a puzzled expression.


    It¡¯s nothing. You can keep ying with Rosalie.

 Chapter 441

    Chapter 441


    We started to exin to Mr. Haines


    ¡°Huh? Well, most of the children seemed to enjoy ying with Leo. The parents were all happy to see it as well.¡±


    ¡°So it wasn¡¯t just the children, but the adults also epted Leo?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Leo and Mr. Takumi saved the vige. Of course, we owe a lot to you as well, Your Grace. But they saw through the wine and fought the orcs. No one would reject them.¡±


    Answered Mr. Haines.


    Indeed, I had seen Leo ying with the children as their parents watched.


    ¡°I see¡­ In that case, it is quite simple. I have a request to make. Aside from making the wine again, we want Mr. Takumi to grow his herbs in Range vige. Of course, that means Mr. Takumi and Leo will go to Range vige for some time. Well, they will live there.¡±


    ¡°Herbs¡­ Is that why you need the fields?¡±


    ¡°Mmm. And Mr. Takumi will be apanied by some hired workers, who he will manage. But since Leo will not be involved with that, she can y with the children in the vige.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ And you are fine with this, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°I do not mind. Leo would be happy to be able to y with the children every day. Besides, I won¡¯t be able to y with her when I am working in the fields.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s proposition was very simple.


    In other words, when the adults were too busy to mind the children, Leo would babysit for them.


    The children could y happily and not feel lonely.


    The adults could focus on the wine, and I could make herbs.


    I understood Mr. Haines¡¯s concern, but I nodded with a smile.


    ¡°Of course, I also intend to send a few people to work in Range vige. I am sure there will be times when you do not have enough people. Thankfully, there are those in Ractos who are looking for work.¡±


    He meant people aside from the ones that I was hiring.


    ording to Nick, Ractos was overflowing with people, and many had trouble finding work.


    That resulted in many living in the slums¡­ So perhaps Mr. Ekenhart wanted to do something about that.


    As long as they were paid properly, it would have a good influence on the areas surrounding the town and vige.


    ¡°We would be d to have peoplee to the vige¡­ But are you certain?¡±


    ¡°Well, it will not be a great many people, so it will be fine. And we shall be careful when selecting them. I suppose you are worried if they will fit in, or if they might cause some problems?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ After all, we¡¯ve just been through quite a lot. And so people are cautious right now. Of course, we do trust Leo and Mr. Takumi. But others¡­¡±


    I could understand why Mr. Haines didn¡¯t quite trust outsiders.


    They had been fooled into helping the spread of the disease, and that had nearly resulted in the vige¡¯s ruin.


    ¡°As for that, you can rest assured. I will not tell you to trust everyone immediately, but¡­ My house will be fully responsible. Besides¡­I doubt there will be any trouble with Mr. Takumi and Leo there. And even if something does happen, it should be easy enough to deal with.¡±


    ¡°That is true¡­¡±


    Perhaps Mr. Ekehnart had a little too much trust in my ability¡­ But I would try my best.


    Leo would be able to sniff out anyone who tried anything strange.


    Besides, I suppose Ms. ire would be sent as well.


    It wasn¡¯t actually decided yet, but if she was going to run the business with me, should would probably visit us during the day.


    Of course, we would also have some guards and butlers. So it would be easier to deal with anything that could happen.


    ¡°So what do you say? It will allow you to make wine without worrying about the children.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that is true. But¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Is there still a problem?¡±


    ¡°No, uh¡­ Range vige has a number of empty houses. So we would wee new people¡­ But.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Me?¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart had expected Mr. Haines to agree, but he continued to look conflicted. It was as if he did not know how to exin it.


    Did it have something to do with me?


    I tilted my head and asked him.

 Chapter 442

    Chapter 442


    I hadn¡¯t thought about where I would live


    ¡°Mr. Takumi should be fine¡­ But good Leo¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Hmm. You mean the house is too small.¡±


    After looking at me, Mr. Haines nced over to Leo, who was ying with Rosalie.


    Leo noticed this and turned to us questioningly.


    ¡°Indeed, it would be one thing if it was just Mr. Takumi, but you would need a veryrge house for Leo to live in.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ That is true¡­¡±


    ¡°What, Mr. Takumi? You didn¡¯t think about it?¡±


    ¡°Ahahaha¡­ Yes¡­¡±


    ¡°So Mr. Takumi can be quite airheaded as well¡­¡±


    Hmm, I did not want to be called that by Mr. Ekenhart¡­


    Mr. Haines watched me as Iughed and scratched my head¡­ As did Ms. ire.


    But it was true. I had not even been thinking about how much space Leo would need.


    I never had to think about it here, because the mansion was so big. But in Ractos, Leo always had to stay outside when we entered stores.


    Living in the mansion made me forget that sometimes, and I thought of as how she used to be.


    A small Maltese¡­


    ¡°Well, you do not have to worry about that. Because the n is to build a house near the fields. We are ready to start construction, and are only waiting for the chief¡¯s permission.¡±


    So Mr. Ekenhart had already thought of it, and had been preparing in advance.


    But¡­


    ¡°Um, how much is that going to cost?¡±


    As I was getting paid by the duke for the herbs, I hadn¡¯t worried about money for some time¡­ But this sounded very expensive¡­ The former sryman in me felt like fainting.


    Who knew what kind of crazy house the duke would try and build.


    For instance¡­ What if it was simr to this one? I didn¡¯t know if I wanted to own such a ce.


    ¡°You do not have to worry about that either. Since ire will also be staying there, I will pay for everything. And yes, it will be a big mansion.¡±


    ¡°What?¡±


    ¡°Father, I am quite sure that I told you that a small, cozy house would be perfectly fine?¡±


    ¡°¡­Lady ire is what¡­?¡±


    My eyes widened at Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s words. Ms. ire looked annoyed, while Mr. Ekenhart was confused.


    ¡°No, no, no. We really do not need a mansion! Just something that Leo will befortable in! Besides, I do not like the idea of you paying for everything!¡±


    ¡°I thought you might say that, Mr. Takumi. But there is ire. Do you think my daughter will be satisfied living in some shack?¡±


    ¡°Father, do notpare me to those other rich daughters. I would be very satisfied in a normal house.¡±


    I frantically protested, while ignoring the shocked Mr. Haines.


    If Mr. Ekenhart paid for everything, then I wouldn¡¯t feel like I owned the house, and would not befortable.


    And while Mr. Ekenhart tried to act like it was for Ms. ire¡¯s sake, she also voiced her displeasure.


    ¡°But ire. You are quite hopeless without servants to do everything around the house for you.¡±


    ¡°Well¡­I will just have to learn then!¡±


    ¡°What do you think, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Huh? Why are you asking me? Uh¡­ That could take a long time¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi!?¡±


    ¡°Ms. ire had been surrounded by servants since she was born.


    Of course, she did not know the first thing about the household duties that servants performed.


    Still, she insisted that she could learn them.


    I had to admit that this would be difficult in the time we had, and Ms. ire looked at me as if this was a great betrayal.


    ¡°I, uh¡­ Well, not that long¡­ I think.¡±


    ¡°Then¡­ Why?¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was just protective, so she could easily dismiss his opinions, but Ms. ire seemed rather crushed why I seemed to agree with him.


    Perhaps she was taking it too personally. I felt bad for her, but we had to be realistic.


    ¡°Ms. ire, how are you going to learn?¡±


    ¡°Well¡­the maids will teach me.¡±


    ¡°When?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ We could start today?¡±


    ¡°That won¡¯t work.¡±


    ¡°Indeed.¡±


    ¡°I agree.¡±


    ¡°You too, Sebastian? Why do you say that?¡±


    After I questioned Ms. ire, Mr. Ekenhart offered his conclusion. Sebastian and I nodded in agreement.


    ¡°Ms. ire¡­ Ever sincest night, well, today, you have been incredibly busy. And I am sure there is still much that you have to do?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Besides, we are going to the forest soon. I will not be in this house for long, and Tilura has her studies. Do you really think you have time to learn some household chores? While you have more than a few days, it is not as long as a few years!¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s¡­¡±


    Ms. ire had no answer for that.


    Indeed, Mr. Ekenhart would be leaving soon.


    I suppose he would return to the main house after we go to the forest. And there was still the matter of the slums. Ms. ire would have a lot of work to do.


    Even I could see that.

 Chapter 443

    Chapter 443


    There was no time for Ms. ire to learn household chores


    Even if Ms. ire was going to Range vige with me, as Sebastian had said, she would have to return to the mansion quite regrly.


    And so we had to consider what would be efficient¡­ Clearly there was no time for Ms. ire to be learning such things.


    I¡¯m sure she would have some free time during the day, but I doubted it would be enough time, considering she hadn¡¯t done anything like that before.


    Besides, she would need to get some rest as well¡­


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, Ms. ire. It is not that there is something wrong with you. It is simply a matter of time.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes, I understand that. But¡­ I did hope to cook him a meal¡­¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    ¡°Oh, nevermind¡­¡±


    ¡°ire, you can think of such thingster. I¡¯m sure you¡¯ll have plenty of time in the future.¡±


    ¡°Very well, father.¡±


    I apologized and told Ms. ire that it was not her fault.


    Perhaps we had sounded a bit harsh, but she seemed satisfied and nodded understandingly.


    She muttered something else under her breath, but I could not hear her.


    But Mr. Ekenhart seemed to know¡­ What was it?


    ¡°Umm?¡±


    ¡°Oh, excuse me. In any case, I intend to prepare a ce for you and Leo to live.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­¡±


    We had been talking about how I didn¡¯t want a house that was too big, and the cost, but it seemed like the conversation ended with Ms. ire.


    Was this his way of negotiating?


    Regardless, I suppose I would have to discuss the details of it with Sebastianter.


    If Sebastian was there, then I think everything would be dealt with in a sensible manner.


    ¡­Unless he decided to take Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s sidepletely.


    ¡°So, I understand a ce will be prepared for Mr. Takumi and Leo. However¡­what is this about Lady ire?¡±


    Apparently, Mr. Haines was still puzzled about that part.


    After all, it had not been properly exined to him.


    ¡°While it is Mr. Takumi who will be making the herb fields in Range vige¡­ It is his wish that ire be involved with management. After all, they will be running the business together.¡±


    ¡°Indeed?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I want to make my own contribution to this house and the surroundingnds, including your vige.¡±


    She had looked a little upset a moment ago, but Ms. ire had now regained her calm.


    It was impressive that she could switch back so quickly.


    ¡°So, does that mean the business will be controlled by the duke?¡±


    ¡°No, that will be Mr. Takumi. We are in more of a supporting role. ire will handle all external matters, while Mr. Takumi takes care of the fields.¡±


    ¡°What do you mean¡­external?¡±


    ¡°We will need to find stores in other viges and towns that will sell the herbs. Normally, there are not that many herbs, so we can just sell them in our own stores. But Mr. Takumi¡¯s herbs are special. You will see that for yourself soon enough, chief.¡±


    To put it simply, I would manage the herb fields and the people involved in working in them.


    Ms. ire would be in contact with stores across thends and try to sell the herbs to them. Like a sales department?


    As someone without connections, or much knowledge of the surrounding area, I would be very grateful for her help.


    It wouldn¡¯t matter how good my herbs were if there was no one to buy them.


    ¡°Yes. Mr. Takumi¡¯s herbs cured the sick in the vige within a blink of an eye. I would not doubt their quality. However¡­ Can he really make that much?¡±


    Mr. Haines was right to wonder about this.


    Herbs weren¡¯t usually grown inrge fields, and it seemed doubtful that we could make enough to send across the duke¡¯snds.


    Herbs were mainly something that were gathered in forests and mountains by people who made medicine.


    Besides, they were not consumed in great quantities like grain, and the fact that there was so much variety made them unfit for growing on arge scale.


    And each herb having different conditions for growing them would also make things difficult.


    I suppose that if different herbs were all grown in different locations, they would be able to have a lot of types inrge quantities. But the fact that this hadn¡¯t been done up until now suggested that it was probably quite difficult to do by human hands.


    Even though thend that was reserved near the vige was quiterge, it did not seem like it would be enough to send herbs to so many towns. And it would also take a considerable amount of time to grow. That was why he was concerned.

 Chapter 444

    Chapter 444


    I told Mr. Haines about Weed Cultivation


    ¡°Indeed, it is hard to imagine someone growing herbs in great quantities. Growing them at all is almost unheard of in this country. Most people gather what is found in nature. ¡­Mr. Takumi? Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°It will be fine. As Mr. Haines is the chief, it is necessary for him to know.¡±


    ¡°I agree. There should not be a problem.¡±


    ¡°Mmm.¡±


    ¡°?¡±


    Mr. Haines was looking at us with a puzzled expression.


    As for what we were going to tell him¡­ It was about my Gift, ¡®Weed Cultivation.¡¯


    Since I was going to be growing the herbs in Range vige, it would be deceitful to not tell the chief. Besides, it would be difficult to determine whether or not it would work.


    As for the people I was going to hire, since they would be watching me use Weed Cultivation at some point, I already intended to tell them.


    The method of making herbs was strange and unusual, not telling them would lead to distrust.


    Well, I had already discussed the matter with Mr. Ekenhart before, so there was no need for him to ask us again.


    I suppose it was part of a performance¡­ To show how important this information was.


    ¡°The truth is, Mr. Takumi has a special ability.¡±


    ¡°He does?¡±


    ¡°Mmm. I¡¯m sure you have heard of it. It¡¯s called a Gift.¡±


    ¡°Gift¡­ An ability that is granted from god¡­ Yes, I have heard of it. Though I have never seen anyone with it. I thought it was more of a rumor. But it is real?¡±


    ¡°That is right. Mr. Takumai has the Gift ability. And it allows him to make herbs. So he is not limited by environment or type. And he can make a lot of them.¡±


    ¡°A gift to make herbs¡­ Is that true? No, now that I think about it, he produced a lot of Ramogi in just one day. And he said to tell him if it was not enough¡­¡±


    ¡°Is that right?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I did say that. Since most of the vigers were ill¡­ I knew how many people there were, but I wondered if it might not be as effective on some, and there might not be enough¡­¡±


    I had brought extra Ramogi to the vige, but I was still anxious.


    After all, more people might have be sick while Mr. Haines was away from the vige.


    Besides, since there were some who coughed a lot, it was possible that they wouldn¡¯t be able to swallow the powdered Ramogi.


    But in the end, it had all been fine.


    ¡°I see. While it will be difficult to believe immediately¡­ Mr. Takumi is able to make herbs no matter where he is. That was why this whole business with the disease came to an end so quickly. I don¡¯t want to think about what would have happened without his help.¡±


    To be precise, it was weeds, not herbs.


    I could make nts that weren¡¯t the result of selective breeding or anything like that.


    I still didn¡¯t know what my actual limit was in terms of making them, but I could faint if I used my ability too much, so I did not want to rely on it.


    That¡¯s why we were making a field.


    ¡°I see. You really do have the Gift¡­ Since the duke and Mr. Takumi say it, it must be true. Besides, you did save the vige.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°So you will believe. Well, even if you didn¡¯t, we could just have Mr. Takumi demonstrate it for you.¡±


    Mr. Haines really did trust us a lot.


    Even though we were talking about something that he didn¡¯t think was real, he was able to believe it immediately.


    I was grateful for that.


    And I would do my best to live up to his expectations¡­ I was starting to feel more ambitious towards the herb fields.


    As for the demonstration, I had done it for Mr. Ekenhart before. He already believed me, because of Ms. ire and Sebastian, but I thought it would be simpler if I just showed him Weed Cultivation.


    Especially since there was the matter of the contract.


    ¡°In that case, may I see it?¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Ah, that should be fine. While we do not want too many people to know about it, seeing it now won¡¯t be a problem. Isn¡¯t that right, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. I think it would be easier to understand it that way. Though, why are you the one saying it, Mr. Ekenhart?¡±


    ¡°Hahah! Well, because that¡¯s our rtionship, isn¡¯t it?¡±


    Is it?


    Well, I did owe him a lot. So it wasn¡¯t like I would be angry if he gave his permission in my ce.


    This wasn¡¯t some kind of special ability that no one could ever see.


    We just needed to be a little careful, so that the wrong people didn¡¯t learn of it.

 Chapter 445

    Chapter 445


    Sebastian exined it excitedly


    ¡°Well, the demonstration cer. For now, we should talk about the herb fields. Mr. Haines, I assume you have already decided to give your permission?¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes. We would dly wee Mr. Takumi and Leo to the vige. And we have no reason to object. Especially with the duke¡¯s involvement. I think it would help breathe new life into the vige.¡±


    ¡°It is good to hear that. Now then¡­¡±


    Sebastian seemed to have be a little impatient, as the conversation kept changing, moving from Mr. Ekenhart, Ms. ire and me. And so he quickly summarized everything and asked for Mr. Haines¡¯s permission.


    After that, he exined to Mr. Haines about how we were currently studying different ways of growing the herbs.


    He looked like he wanted to talk about that for a while.


    He had only been holding back, as there were things Mr. Ekenhart and I had to discuss with Mr. Haines first. But he could wait no longer.


    Well, I had said most of the important stuff, and since Mr. Haines had agreed, it was not bad timing.


    Though, I did think that Mr. Haines had already decided to give his permission, and hade here in order to hear more details.


    ¡°So¡­here it is. The wine and medicinal wine that will be made in Range vige and sold across thends.¡±


    ¡°This wine¡­ But it looks different from our wine? And this¡­¡±


    Once he finished talking about the herb fields, the conversation moved to the wine.


    Sebastian had asked one of the maids to bring enough for everyone to taste.


    As it was made by mixing wine with herbs, we wanted Range vige to make more wine¡­


    Perhaps we should have talked about this point in the very beginning, but we got side-tracked.


    Mostly because I hadn¡¯t thought about my house. And then there was Ms. ire¡­


    ¡°This is what we call ros¨¦ wine. While the color and scent is the same as the original wine¡­isn¡¯t the color pretty?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ It tastes and smells the same as our wine.¡±


    Mr. Haines took a sip and confirmed with a nod that it was the same wine.


    As he was the chief of the vige, he knew a lot about their wine.


    ¡°While the wine from Range vige is delicious, it is too simr to other kinds of wine to get any notice. And so we have this wine. Even though it is practically the same, we can sell it in clear bottles, which will make it stick out visually. We expect it to be especially popr with women.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ I suppose you are right. While we sent much of our wine to Ractos, it was not exactly flying off of shelves. Some ces did favor out wine¡­until the illness spread¡­¡±


    Sebastian sounded like he was doing his best impression of a salesman as he talked about the wine.


    Mr. Haines nodded and seemed convinced.


    I was surprised that the wine hadn¡¯t done too well in Ractos¡­ It was so good. Or maybe it was because I hadn¡¯t tasted the other wines yet.


    Also, it seemed that rumors had spread about the connection between the wine and illness.


    Even though the whole business was done, many people would have suspected the connection.


    And so many of the stores stopped buying from them.


    Well, there was nothing you could do to stop rumors. Especially since it was true.


    ¡°I see¡­ So, about this wine. It is beautiful! And tastes just as good as the old wine from Range vige! And with the duke¡¯s house backing it, the quality is assured!¡±


    Sebastian said excitedly.


    ¡°¡­And so in order to spread this through Ractos and other towns and viges, we need you to make more wine.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ I understand now. With this beautiful color, and the duke¡¯s endorsement, we won¡¯t have to worry about the rumors anymore. However¡­ How did you make this?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s the¡­Ramogi!¡±


    After pausing for a brief moment, Sebastian exined that we had mixed Ramogi in the wine.


    When soaking Ramogi in water, the medicinal substances cause the color to change.


    We used this to create the pink color in the wine¡­ Well, it was really just a coincidence.


    Mr. Haines was very surprised to hear that adding the Ramogi to the contaminated wine had made it harmless.


    Apparently, he thought that the wine he had just drunk was something we had acquired from Ractos, that happened to be safe.


    And so when he learned that we had used the wine that I brought back, and made it so that it would cause you to be ill, he looked at me with great respect.


    He would probably start worshiping me if Mr. Ekenhart was not there.


    I would not have liked that at all. So I was d that the others were here.


    After that, we finished exining about the wine. I told him to not expect it to sell well immediately. But people will slowly feel the effects, and word will spread.


    The taste and smell was not the selling point, but that it was healthy. Mr. Haines was surprised by that.


    Apparently, it was an unusual way to sell products.


    I suppose it was easier to sell something just because it tasted good¡­

 Chapter 446

    Chapter 446


    I introduced Liza to Rosalie


    After we finished discussing the herbs, Gift, and wine, we all moved to the dining room.


    We had talked for so long that it was now dinner time.


    And just like before, Mr. Haines would be dining with us as a guest. But since Mr. Ekenhart was also here, he seemed very nervous.


    ¡°Uh¡­ I am Liza!¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m Rosalie. It¡¯s nice to meet you! ¡­Cute tail and ears. I want them too!¡±


    ¡°Haha! Rosalie, you can¡¯t just grow them because you want to.¡±


    Upon meeting Liza in the dining room, Rosalie dered that she wanted the beastkin ears and tail as well.


    I did not expect that reaction¡­ But I was relieved that she was not prejudiced against them.


    Rosalie looked a little disappointed when she learned she could not grow them, but she smiled once Liza allowed her to touch her ears and tail.


    Liza was very kind.


    ¡°It¡¯s so soft!¡±


    ¡°Haha. It tickles¡­¡±


    ¡°Ahaha! Liza has a very fluffy tail.¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff!¡±


    ¡°I can touch your tail too, Leo? Yay!¡±


    Leo seemed just a little jealous, and wagged her tail in Rosalie¡¯s direction.


    Her tail was also very soft¡­but it seemed unnecessary to feel a sense of rivalry?


    Well, Rosalie seemed happy to y with Leo¡¯s tail as well, so it was fine.


    Everyone else who was there watched this scene with amusement.


    Except for Mr. Haines, who seemed a little flustered¡­ He was probably worried about doing anything rude in front of the duke.


    Of course, Mr. Ekenhart was not strict about such things.


    Also, Ms. Anne was looking at Rosalie with a jealous expression.


    She was still sorry about what happened to Range vige, and so she wouldn¡¯t do anything, but¡­ If she wanted to pet Leo so much, she should just say it.


    Well, she was still a little afraid of Leo as well.


    ¡­It was taking longer than I would have thought¡­


    ¡°Mr. Haines. What do you think about beastkin?¡±


    I turned my attention away from Liza, Rosalie and Leo, as they yed, and questioned Mr. Haines.


    As he was a guest, I thought I should help him rx.


    But I also wanted to know his thoughts about beastkin.


    I had already introduced Liza to him, saying that we had rescued her in Ractos.


    It was clear that he knew that beastkin were sometimes persecuted.


    I wanted to talk to him about it, because I would be taking Liza with me to Range vige.


    ¡°Aye, Mr. Takumi. I am sorry for Rosalie¡¯s rudeness. Not just to Leo, but to the duke as well¡­¡±


    ¡°No, not at all. Liza looks happy to have made a new friend. Besides, Mr. Ekenhart does not mind when ites to such things.¡±


    ¡°Are you sure about that, Mr. Takumi? Well, it is true that I don¡¯t really care.¡±


    ¡°Indeed, father. Mr. Haines, please don¡¯t be so nervous, and enjoy yourself.¡±


    Mr. Haines was more concerned with Rosalie than the beastkin.


    While I could see that they were having fun, Mr. Haines was still worried that she would cause offense.


    As for Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire, if they were the kind of people who care so much about manners and small details, then I probably wouldn¡¯t be sitting here with them.


    I tried to do the bare minimum, but it was likely not much.


    As I did not know much about how things were done here, I was grateful that they went easy on me.


    Besides, they allowed Leo and Sherry to eat at the table¡­ Which was significant, even if they held fenrirs in high regard¡­


    ¡°In any case, Mr. Haines. What about the beastkin?¡±


    ¡°I do not know a lot¡­ Only about what happened a long time ago. And the rumors. But I was not directly involved in any fighting. But I do believe that the rumors were baseless lies.¡±


    As I thought, he did not have any prejudices against the beastkin.


    Judging by his age, I did think he would know something about the war. But he did not trust the rumors themselves.


    Perhaps people who didn¡¯t fight were less likely to believe in them.


    It would exin how most people in Ractos merely looked at Liza with curiosity. Because thesends were far from where the fighting took ce.


    It reminded me how bad Deam was to use those rumors for his own gain.


    ¡­Thankfully, he had been caught before too much harm was done.


    Otherwise, there may have been more people who believed him.


    And it would be harder to undo the damage¡­

 Chapter 447

    Chapter 447


    It seemed that Range vige did not discriminate against beastkin


    ¡°In that case, it should be fine to take Liza to Range vige.¡±


    ¡°As long as Mr. Takumi and Leo are there, there should not be a problem. While the children of the vige might do something rude¡­like Rosalie¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm. Well, things do happen between children. That is not strange. As long as they do not hate beastkin, it should be fine.¡±


    ¡°I do not think that the children would be prejudiced¡­ Of course, they have never seen a beastkin before¡­ But they know better than to believe such senseless rumors.¡±


    ¡°I am relieved to hear that.¡±


    Liza was still a child.


    Due to her past experiences, there was something a little mature¡­as if she was resigned to her fate.


    And while I wanted her to live peacefully in Range vige, it was also natural for children to disagree or fight sometimes. It could not be helped.


    And if any were prejudiced, I could talk to them.


    I wanted Liza to experience being a normal child.


    Besides, it seemed like her unusual ears and tail were well-received by girls.


    ¡°Well, let us eat then.¡±


    Once the food was served, we started to eat.


    Today, the seating was slightly different from usual.


    Mr. Ekenhart sat the head, and Ms. ire and Ms. Anne sat on his left. While Mr. Haines and I sat on his right.


    A short distance away, Sherry, Leo, Tilura, Liza, and Rosalie sat together. Mr. Ekenhart thought the children would enjoy being put together.


    Leo was being watchful so that Sherry did not eat too much¡­ She was quite strict.


    While Tilura, Rosalie and Liza were not the same age, they were close enough, and seemed to be having fun together.


    For once, Ms. ire did not bother to warn Tilura about her manners.


    ¡°By the way, Mr. Ekenhart¡­¡±


    ¡°Mmmt is it, Mr. mmmakumi?¡±


    ¡°Father. Don¡¯t speak with food in your mouth¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was smiling and looking at Tilura when I spoke to him.


    But my timing must have been bad, as he had a mouthful of meat, and I could not understand what he was saying¡­


    Ms. ire scolded him for this, and I had to wait for him to chew it up and swallow.


    ¡°No, I was just thinking about where we will live. I would not feelfortable in a house that is too big¡­ And also, there is the cost.¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re still worried about that? I told you already. We will profit from it as well. So building one mansion is nothing. And ire will stay there. And if there are servants, then a house of this size is necessary.¡±


    ¡°No¡­I think that is much too big¡­¡±


    This house belonged to a duke. It was incredibly vast.


    I had never explored it from corner to corner, but there were three floors, and it was very wide.


    It would take you several minutes to cross from one side to the other.


    Besides, there was also the garden and walls that surrounded the area.


    Surely that was much too big to build in Range vige¡­


    I understood that it couldn¡¯t be small, because Leo was with me. But I still wanted something simple and cozy.


    ¡°I would not be able to rx in such a ce¡­¡±


    ¡°Is that so? Hmm¡­ But you seem pretty rxed here.¡±


    While that was true, I still felt like I was imposing on their hospitality.


    Well, it was true in some ways, so I didn¡¯t mind, as long as I was here.


    But I was going to be independent now, managing my own fields.


    ¡°The servants are very kind to me here. And so I amfortable. Ms. ire and the others are also very friendly.¡±


    ¡°Because it is also in our best interest to have you and Leo here. You are like family now. ¡­Sometimes, I feel a little out of ce, when it is just my daughters here.¡±


    ¡°Father?¡±


    ¡°Oh. Nothing, ire.¡±


    Perhaps Mr. Ekenhart had wanted a son as well.


    In any case, I felt happy that he saw me like family now.


    After that, we continued to eat and talk about what should be done with the house in Range vige.


    I was mainly trying to get Mr. Ekenhart to stop his ns for building arge house.


    Even though it was rted to his vige, Mr. Haines refrained from saying anything.


    He was d of being directly connected to the duke, and so as far as the vige was concerned, the size of the house was not important.


    ¡­I had hoped that he would support me, and say that arge mansion was not fitting for the vige¡­ Well, he did not seem like the type to say such a thing.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 448

    Chapter 448


    I talked to Mr. Haines about the forest


    ¡°Well, then, that settles the matter of Mr. Takumi, Lady ire, and Leo¡¯s house. As for the cost¡­are you sure?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I would not like it if someone else paid for me¡­¡±


    ¡°Very well¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi is so modest¡­ He should just leave it to me.¡±


    In the end, it seemed like nothing would be decided, and so Sebastian had toe to help me.


    I was still a little worried about howrge the house would end up being, but I would leave it to Sebastian.


    Mr. Ekenhart was very insistent about paying, since Ms. ire and some servants would be staying there¡­ And so Ipromised, and agreed to pay half of it.


    As the project had not even been started, we didn¡¯t know how much it would cost in the end, but I heard the estimate, and was relieved that it was something I would be able to pay.


    Though, it was high enough to surprise Mr. Haines¡­ But I had a lot of money left from making the herbs.


    And I hadn¡¯t used money recently, outside of buying some things for Liza. And there was no reason to think I wouldck money in the future.


    Even when considering that I would be paying employees as well.


    ¡°It¡¯s not modesty. I just don¡¯t think that I should rely on the duke¡¯s house for everything.¡±


    ¡°Is that so? I don¡¯t mind doing it. So I still think you should just leave it to me.¡±


    ¡°Father, some people do not appreciate you adding so much pressure on them. I think you need to practice some restraint.¡±


    ¡°Well, I suppose. Very well. Then we will do it as Mr. Takumi requested.¡±


    It seemed that in this world, people didn¡¯t really refuse offers often. And so Mr. Ekenhart was quite puzzled by my reaction.


    As Ms. ire said, some people would take it as him having high expectations for them¡­and that pressure would weigh heavily on their shoulders.


    Though, I tried to not think about it too deeply¡­or not at all¡­ Regardless, it reminded me how much he was from the upper ss.


    Would Ms. ire be like this one day, when she seeds him?


    ¡°By the way, Mr. Takumi. The journey to the forest will be on the day after tomorrow. Is that alright?¡±


    ¡°The day after tomorrow? Yes, that is fine. Did you hear that, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wou-wou?¡±


    ¡°Kyuu¡­¡±


    Once we were finished talking about the house, Sebastian told me of their ns for going to the forest.


    The day after tomorrow¡­I supposed that meant that Mr. Haines would leave tomorrow, and so would have just enough time to prepare.


    Leo nodded to me in reply and then turned to Sherry.


    I think she was saying, ¡®time to fight for real.¡¯


    Sherry nodded and looked quite crestfallen¡­ Would she be alright?


    Leo wanted her to go on a diet and regain her instincts, but¡­ Well, I¡¯m sure that she wouldn¡¯t put Sherry in any danger.


    Besides, I would be there, as well as Mr. Ekenhart and the guards.


    ¡°Do you mean the fenrir forest?¡±


    ¡°You know of it, Mr. Haines?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Though, I have never been to it¡­ But it is not so far away, so I have heard stories.¡±


    While Sebastian and I were talking about the forest, Mr. Haines suddenly raised his voice.


    Yes, it was called the fenrir forest.


    Most people did not travel too deep into it. And so though it was well known, it made sense that Mr. Haines had never been there.


    ¡°¡­Is it not dangerous?¡±


    ¡°Ah, yes. It is dangerous for the average person. While fenris are rarely sighted, it was still where we found Sherry. Also, there are orcs, trolls and other monsters.¡±


    Mr. Haines was right to be concerned.


    Orcs could hurt you if you let your guard down, but trolls were worse.


    And so even if you had guards with you, it was still a dangerous ce to step foot in.


    Mr. Ekenhart nodded at Mr. Haines, and then he exined that he knew how dangerous the forest could be, which is to say, he did not think it was that dangerous at all.


    Leo would ensure that no fenrirs bothered us.


    Leo would also make quick work of any orcs or trolls that might show up.


    Fenrirs were submissive towards Silver Fenrirs. It was their instinct.


    And Leo had assured me that even if they did attack, they were merely smallfry.


    I had already seen her defeat trolls easily in the forest, and then again on the road to Range vige.


    It was the kind of sight that would make children cry¡­


    ¡°I see¡­ With good Leo¡­¡±


    ¡°Mmm. With Leo, the forest will be perfectly safe. Of course, we won¡¯t rely on her alone. I have my own guards, and we will be careful¡­ After all, the goal is for Tilura to¡­¡±


    Was it really important to say that much¡­? I wondered, but I suppose he wanted to boast about his daughter as well.


    The people on hisnds would probably feel safer if they knew that their lord had people who could hunt orcs.


    Not that much time had passed since Range vige was attacked by orcs, and so hearing all of this helped put his mind at ease.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 449

    Chapter 449


    I suggested that I make Loe


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Mama is so amazing!¡±


    ¡°Leo is so impressive! I cannot fall too far behind. I will work hard with my sword training!¡±


    ¡°Kyau¡­¡±


    Leo barked proudly, saying that it was indeed safe to go to the forest.


    Mr. Ekenhart and ms. ire watched with a smile.


    Liza, Rosalie and Tilura were also very impressed with her.


    However, Sherry was clearly not enthusiastic about going to the forest¡­


    Also, Ms. Anne looked a little scared¡­ Even when sitting at a distance, she was scared of Leo.


    Regardless, the peaceful dinner ended, and we rxed with some tea.


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right. Mr. Ekenhart. And Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°What is the matter?¡±


    After tea, I went out into the garden in order to train before going to bed.


    But as there was something on my mind, I decided to ask them first.


    In the meantime, Leo stayed with Tilura and Liza.


    Sherry was apparently tired from running during the day, and so Ms. ire took her to bed.


    ¡°I was just thinking¡­ What about growing Loe inrge quantities.¡±


    ¡°Loe? But that will cause chaos in the market. Sebastian said that you already knew this.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I told Mr. Takumi this before. And those who are negatively affected might target him if they lose money.¡±


    ¡°Uh, yes. I am not saying I want to flood the market with it. However, it is such an effective herb, so it would be convenient if it was more widely avable¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm. It is true that there are many people who could be helped¡­ But what are you thinking about?¡±


    Loe was a rare and expensive herb.


    I had once heard that it had the same price tag as a house.


    And I had used Loe myself when fighting the orcs, and treating the vigers.


    After seeing the effects, I understood why someone would pay that.


    It could heal a fatal wound in seconds.


    Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian were concerned that making them readily avable would cause the market to crash and prices to plunge.


    And that would result in sellers of Loe holding a grudge against me.


    But I wasn¡¯t thinking about selling it, but using it effectively.


    With a herb that useful, even if we didn¡¯t mass produce it, there was no way we could not do something with it¡­


    ¡­Especially since I or the people around me could get hurt.


    ¡°Well¡­I could give some to the guards who protect this house, as well as the town guards¡­ I think it could help during an emergency. Especially since some of them might face monsters and criminals.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see. It¡¯s true that guards and soldiers are often wounded. And sometimes, they are hurt so badly that they can no longer be soldiers. Or they might even die.¡±


    It had been like that in Range vige as well, but if you fought against monsters and criminals, then there was a risk of being injured.


    Unlike in Japan, anyone could get a weapon here, so you could not let your guard down.


    Nick had only had a knife, so I had not been too worried. But Deam was different.


    He had wielded a longsword, and its weight had nearly knocked me down.


    Had that been directed at the guards, then it wouldn¡¯t have been strange for someone to be injured.


    In that case, I thought they should be able to use Loe for treatment.


    It would help to decrease instances where they were permanently maimed and had to retire.


    ¡°However¡­there are dozens of guards here. And over a hundred in Ractos¡­ I do not think there will be enough to¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, I¡¯m not saying that there has to be enough for everyone. I just think there should be some in stock in case of emergencies.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ I suppose that would be possible¡­¡±


    ¡°And so¡­while I will have to discuss the matter with others and decide on the amount, they can be stored in the necessary locations and be used whenever there is someone who is badly wounded¡­ That is my idea.¡±


    ¡°It will still be arge amount¡­ I am not sure it is realistic.¡±


    ¡°Hmm. If it is only reserved for those who are badly injured, it might work. It is expensive because it is rare. There are times when it is not even sold inrge cities. If it is only that much, we should be able to cover the cost.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. ¡­I thought that Mr. Takumi was thinking about selling Loe to all the soldiers on yournd. Hohoho¡­¡±


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 450

    Chapter 450


    It was decided that I would grow more Loe


    ¡°Oh, I wouldn¡¯t do that¡­ I¡¯m just making them with Weed Cultivation, so there is no need to charge anything.¡±


    Loe was so rare and expensive here, that a store having even one was considered a big deal.


    Because of this, it was possible that you could not acquire it when it was needed. Besides, it would be too expensive for individual soldiers.


    And it seemed wrong for people to have to risk their lives and put themselves in danger, just to buy herbs to treat their injuries¡­


    I suppose it would be like insurance.


    By having some Loe in stock, they might be able to help certain soldiers who are badly injured¡­


    Mr. Ekenhart was talking about paying for them, but I didn¡¯t have any intention of selling them at a high price or anything.


    The duke had been very kind to me, so I was happy for an opportunity to repay him, while also helping other people.


    ¡°No, Mr. Takumi. You cannot expect me to receive them for free? Besides, we already have a contract in ce. And so I will pay the wholesale price at least.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. And it will probably still be cheaper than other ces.¡±


    ¡°Really? But I wanted it to be a show of my gratitude to you and the soldiers¡­¡±


    ¡°No, no, no. The fact that you can produce them at all is enough. Besides, if we¡¯re talking about shows of gratitude, it is I who should be doing something for you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes, it is as His Grace says. You dealt with Deam and Range vige, and lowered the price of Ramogi to cure the disease¡­on top of finding the source of it. It is we who should be thanking you.¡±


    Is that so?


    But they were allowing me to live in this mansion, and the people of Range vige had given us delicious wine and treated me well.


    They had also epted Leo¡­


    I had known nothing whening to this world. Without Ms. ire and the duke¡¯s help, I could not imagine what would have happened to us.


    We might have just died in the wilderness¡­ At least, we would not be living asfortably as we were now.


    ¡­Especially because, up until now, I had lived without relying on others as much as possible.


    Still, while we had only seen here for a few months, we had aplished quite a lot.


    I suppose I didn¡¯t think about it much, as it was mainly due to this sudden ability I acquired.


    No, more than Weed Cultivation, it was Leo¡¯s involvement.


    ¡°However, there are also the herb fields¡­ I just don¡¯t know what I would do with more money¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, I don¡¯t see how that is a problem. In any case, I understand your suggestion now, Mr. Takumi. We will now be able to get reasonably priced Loe, and the soldiers will be a little safer. And you get to make more money. It is all positive then.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart didn¡¯t seem to think that having too much money could be a problem. But for starters¡­where would I put it?


    There were no banks, so I couldn¡¯t make a deposit and withdraw it when I wanted¡­ That meant I had to keep it all by myself.


    I had never had so much money before, and if I converted it to Japanese yen¡­ No, I didn¡¯t want to think about that¡­ It would be a scary numberpared to what I made as a sryman.


    Mr. Ekenhart was a duke, who governednds and owned businesses. And so he was used to managing his money. But I just felt anxious.


    At least I had Leo with me, and everyone in the mansion could be trusted¡­ Still, I was getting to the point where I would have to think about where I kept my savings.


    Well, I would have to spend a lot to build the house¡­ But it would be something I had to think about soon.


    ¡°What¡¯s the matter, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°No, it is nothing. So, the Loe will be sold at the wholesale price. But as for how much will be needed¡­¡±


    ¡°You will have to wait for that. I will figure out which locations should store it, and then calcte how much will be needed. Still, are you quite sure? You could sell them for a little higher¡­¡±


    ¡°Very well, I will wait. But as for the price, I am fine with it. I already feel like it¡¯s too much.¡±


    ¡°You are so modest, Mr. Takumi. Most greedy merchants would have tried to sell for as high as possible.¡±


    As I was deep in thought about the money, Mr. Ekenhart brought the conversation back to the Loe.


    I had no intention of being modest, like Mr. Ekenhart said, but¡­ I suppose I looked that way to some people from this world.


    I just had this perception that things should be discounted when buying them in bulk¡­ And so I actually wanted to lower the price even further.


    In the first ce, I hadn¡¯t made the suggestion so that I could make a profit.


    The biggest reason was for the people and soldiers¡­


    I suppose it was not a mentality that was suited for a merchant.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 451

    Chapter 451


    I was asked about the fight with the orcs


    ¡°Well then, I was thinking about watching you train¡­ If you could start now.¡±


    ¡°Sorry. I know you¡¯re already busy with the slums, and I¡¯ve gone and increased your workload.¡±


    ¡°Hoho. It is fine. Besides, work that helps to improve thend is quite pleasant to do.¡±


    ¡°Mm. Indeed.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian hade out to the back garden in order to watch me train. However, I felt bad for taking up their time.


    But when I apologized, they smiled and said that they enjoyed it.


    As for me, I never really enjoyed having to work. It was something that I had to do.


    Well, part of it was because of the overwhelming workload. I didn¡¯t even have time to feel any kind of emotion over it.


    Of course, I suppose there was a sense of achievement when things went well. But I would then just feel tired at the thought of the next job.


    That being said, working at apany was different from being the lord of thesends. And so I felt just a little jealous of Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian, who enjoyed their jobs.


    ¡­Well, perhaps I would start enjoying myself, once I started to grow those herb fields?


    After talking for a short while, Sebastian returned to the mansion.


    And then I trained with Mr. Ekenhart and Tilura, just like we always did.


    As we would be going to the forest soon, Tilura was also more motivated than usual.


    Though, due to this excitement, she once lost grip of her sword, and it came flying towards me and stabbed into the ground. That was a little scary¡­


    Of course, Mr. Ekenhart admonished her, and she quickly apologized.


    When the sword came flying, Leo had moved her tail in front of me protectively¡­ I was thankful for that.


    And so while praising Leo, I had Tilura pet her tail in order to help her rx.


    This seemed to work for the most part.


    ¡­Though, she seemed to grow tense again when she picked up her sword. But I guess Mr. Ekenhart would keep an eye on her now.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. There is something I wanted to ask you.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? What is it, Tilura?¡±


    After training for a little longer, I stopped to catch my breath. And then Tilura approached me.


    Apparently, she wanted to ask me something.


    ¡°How was it? Fighting against orcs?¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­fighting against orcs¡­¡±


    ¡°Tilura. Why don¡¯t you ask me?¡±


    We would be going to the forest to fight orcs, and help measure our ability.


    ¡°Have you ever seen an orc, Tilura?¡±


    ¡°Several times. But the guards would always defeat them.¡±


    ¡°Hmm. I see¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­What about me¡­?¡±


    So it wasn¡¯t like she had never seen any orcs.


    Well, they weremon monsters, and lived outside of the fenrir forest as well.


    They had even attacked Range vige¡­ And Tilura did leave the mansion sometimes.


    And so she would have had opportunities to see orcs.


    Perhaps it was during her travels to the main house.


    In that case, she might have seen some battles from a distance. But if that was the case, she should probably ask the guards who were with her at the time.


    Well, I was the one who she always trained with, and had fought orcs quite recently.


    So maybe it was easier to ask me.


    As for Mr. Ekenhart, he seemed quite sad about his daughter not relying on him very much¡­


    He knew a lot more about fighting than me¡­ But I suppose it could be that he was too strong, and so she didn¡¯t think that his advice would be very helpful.


    Besides, since he always had guards apanying him, it was possible that he hadn¡¯t fought any orcs for some time.


    ¡°Well, if you¡¯ve seen them, then you know that they are about the same size as humans, and walk on two legs.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s right.¡±


    ¡°But though I have fought them, I don¡¯t know much about how they live¡­ In spite of looking heavy, they are very fast. And strong.¡±


    ¡°They are fast?¡±


    ¡°Well, they seemed fast. I don¡¯t know if they are that agile¡­ They are good at charging in one direction, at least.¡±


    ¡°¡­Hmmm.¡±


    I recalled the orcs I had seen in the forest, as well as the ones I fought in Range vige, and told Tilura about them.


    While they were bipedal, they liked to charge a lot. Perhaps it was due to their simrities with pigs and boars.


    But I had never seen them make sharp turns or move in an agile way.


    And since I was used to seeing the way that Leo and Mr. Ekenhart moved, they did not seem like much of a threat to me¡­


    While I was exining this, Mr. Ekenhart nodded, showing that I was not saying anything that was wrong.


    It was his way of trying to enter the conversation.


    ¡°And so even if things get dangerous, I don¡¯t think you should turn your back on them and run away. Though, perhaps if you are in the forest, they won¡¯t be able to charge straight.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Orcs cannot make sharp turns suddenly. They have to stop after charging if they want to turn. That being said, if you do get hit, the force is enough to knock you off of your feet.¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­I see¡­¡±


    Tilura sighed as she listened to us.


    Mr. Ekenhart had finally joined in, and added to my exnation.


    Regardless, I was thankful, because it was a subject that Icked knowledge in.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 452

    Chapter 452


    Anti-Orc Training


    ¡°They are also very strong¡­ Though, I was less experienced at that time. And so my sword broke¡­and I got wounded¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, I heard about that! Orcs must be very strong if they could hurt you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Well, you should not lower your guard, that is for sure. They are not friendly monsters. Unless you can run away, then it is kill or be killed¡­¡±


    ¡°Additionally, Tilura. You should never lower your guard around any monster. You should always go all out and treat them as if they are strong. Though, if there are a lot of them, you might have to save your energy.¡±


    They were attacking in order to kill you.


    I wasn¡¯t really sure why they were hostile. Perhaps humans were food for them.


    The trolls had attacked Sherry, so it might be normal for monsters to fight each other. But humans were often defenseless, and had to be more careful.


    Like Mr. Ekenhart said, there would be times when you had to save your strength.


    However, it was probably too early for Tilura to be thinking about that.


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Yes, I know they aren¡¯t dangerous for you, Leo.¡±


    Leo, who had been watching from a distance, walked up to me and barked once.


    She was saying that orcs were smallfry and we should leave them to her. But that wouldn¡¯t help Tilura at all.


    The whole purpose for this trip was to have Tilura fight orcs and show the results of her training. So there would be no point if Leo did everything.


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Mama says that Sherry can help too!¡±


    ¡°Sherry is¡­ I suppose Leo means for it to be part of her diet¡­ But you shouldn¡¯t bother Tilura okay? You can help her only if she is in danger.¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Leo! I will do my best, so please watch! I think I should be able to defeat the orcs without your help!¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    While Leo looked a little disappointed, she barked in support of Tilura.


    Perhaps Leo had wanted to show off in front of her¡­


    ¡°When I fought them, the orc was like¡­¡±


    ¡°Like this?¡±


    ¡°No, Tilura. You will be knocked down by their strength if you do that. You are still small, so don¡¯t try to win with strength!¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    ¡°You can do it, sister Tilura!¡±


    At the end, we did some anti-orc training.


    I recalled when the orc hade towards me, and helped Tilura to imagine it. And then Mr. Ekenhart judged the way that she moved.


    I hoped that Tilura would not get injured when she really did fight in the forest.


    Leo would move to help her immediately¡­ But I would still bring some Loe with me, just in case.


    Once we continued our training, Leo and Liza moved a short distance away, and then cheered us on from there.


    ¡°Rosalie?¡±


    ¡°Yes! I was just visiting!¡±


    After training, I separated from Tilura and Mr. Ekenhart, and left Liza and Leo in my room so that I could go and take a bath.


    And when I returned, I saw that Rosalie and Liza were ying with Leo.


    ¡°Thank you for ying with Liza.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. I should be thanking them, if anything¡­¡±


    Rosalie said modestly. She seemed a little nervous.


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right. Have you taken a bath yet?¡±


    ¡°Huh? Oh, not yet! I¡¯m sorry!¡±


    It took several days to reach this mansion from Range vige.


    And so was covered in dirt and dust and would likely want to take a bath.


    ¡°You don¡¯t have to apologize. Perhaps you could go with Liza? Ms. Lyra is waiting for her now, and I¡¯m sure she wouldn¡¯t mind if you joined her.¡±


    ¡°Oh, uh¡­ Of course! Yes. Excuse me!¡±


    ¡°Uh, Rosalie!? Papa, mama, I¡¯ll go then!¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Take your time!¡±


    Rosalie had turned a little red as she dashed out of the room. Had I said something wrong?


    Well, I suppose telling a girl that she should take a bath might sound a little insulting¡­


    Regardless, I¡¯m sure that Ms. Lyra would treat her well, and I hoped that she would soon be back to her normal self.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 453

    Chapter 453


    I woke up to afortable sensation


    ¡­When I woke up, I felt something soft covering my face and upper body. It was like I was being enveloped.


    ¡°Hmmm¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Considering what had happened yesterday, I thought it might be Liza. Though, I heard Leo¡¯s voice as well. Regardless, my vision was blocked.


    ¡°Liza¡­ Is that your tail again?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    Only Leo barked, and I did not hear Liza¡­


    And so I raised my hand to touch it. Ah, this¡­


    ¡°¡­Is this your tail, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    The thing finally moved off of my face, and I could see.


    And so I sat up and looked around the room and saw that Leo was sticking her tail in my direction.


    Liza was still sleeping, but was near the corner of the bed and looked like she was about to fall off.


    ¡°So it was you, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Wuff.¡±


    Leo turned around. And once she saw that I had woken up, she bent down and moved her face near Liza.


    She was trying to push Liza away from the edge, but it was not going well.


    ¡°Did you wake me up because she was about to fall off?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    I said quietly, so as to not wake Liza up, and Leo nodded.


    So she had noticed that Liza was going to fall, and did her best to prevent it. However, since she could not move her well, she used her tail to try and wake me up.


    If she barked or moved onto the bed, she would wake Liza up, and so she had no choice but to use her tail¡­


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s morning anyway. So you might as well have just woken her.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, Leo, Liza. Are you up?¡±


    ¡°See?¡±


    I looked out of the window. I had an idea of the time, judging by the position of the sun.


    And so I knew that Tilura would be visiting us soon.


    Just as Leo tilted her head to the side, Tilura¡¯s voice rang from outside.


    As we slept at the usual time, no one had stopped her ining to tell us that breakfast was ready.


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, I suppose you were only thinking about her sleeping well, and so you forgot about the time. Tilura, you cane in.¡±


    ¡°Excuse me.¡±


    Leo looked a little discouraged when she realized that it was fine to wake up Liza.


    Well, since she always slept next to the bed, in case she fell off, it was understandable that she would be concerned.


    ¡°Good morning¡­ Is Liza still sleeping?¡±


    ¡°Yes, good morning. She is sleeping more soundly than usual¡­ And she¡¯s about to fall off.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Hmm?¡±


    Liza looked so happy that I hesitated to wake her up now.


    It was no wonder that Leo had not wanted to wake her up either.


    But as I thought this, her ears started to twitch.


    Apparently, she had heard the sounds around her, and she slowly opened her eyes.


    ¡°Morning, Liza. Did you sleep well?¡±


    ¡°¡­Mmm¡­ Papa?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Liza.¡±


    She was notpletely awake yet, and looked around with dazed eyes as she sat up.


    Her ears were moving busily, as if to take stock of the situation.


    She then rubbed her eyes and looked at me.


    At the same time, Leo and Tilura greeted her.


    ¡°Ah, papa, mama. Good morning! And sister Tilura!¡±


    ¡°Oh! Haha. You are energetic this morning.¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    ¡°Such energy when she just woke up!¡±


    Her head finally seemed to clear, and after recognizing us, Liza jumped off of the bed and onto me.


    I caught her, while being impressed that she could move like that after just getting up.


    It was a good thing that I trained every day¡­ Or I probably would have dropped her¡­


    I chuckled with relief. Though, Tilura was a little surprised.


    I suppose Liza could do such things because she was a beastkin.


    Or maybe she was just active.


    ¡°Alright. Now that you¡¯re up, you should go and wash your face. Can you take her, Tilura?¡±


    ¡°Okay!¡±


    ¡°Yes, I¡¯ll go! Rosalie is also waiting outside, so we¡¯ll go together!¡±


    ¡°Oh, she is?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­good morning.¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Rosalie.¡±


    I put Liza on the ground and told her to get ready for the day with Tilura.


    Apparently, Rosalie had alsoe as well. When I said her name, she stuck head out from behind the door and greeted us.


    Last night, when she returned with Liza, she had apologized, but I told her that I could have worded it differently and apologized as well.


    She had then gone back to Mr. Haines, but I suppose she was still a little embarrassed about it.

 Chapter 454

    Chapter 454


    Liza and Rosalie helped me


    ¡°Good morning, Rosalie!¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Liza!¡±


    ¡°Alright, Mr. Takumi. I will go with Liza now!¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you!¡±


    Rosalie answered as Liza greeted her cheerfully. The three of them really did seem to enjoy being around each other. I was happy to see it.


    I watched them leave while talking excitedly, and then I started to get ready as well.


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Are you still tired, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Haha. So you got up early. Maybe you should sleep a little?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Well, just take it easy then.¡±


    While I was getting ready, Leo yawned sleepily.


    She was scratching her ears with her hind leg, and seemed drowsy.


    Apparently, she had woken up early when noticing that Liza was about to fall.


    I thought that if that was the case, she should sleep more, but Leo did not want to miss breakfast.


    Well, eating was important too.


    Aside from seeing Mr. Haines off, I had no ns today¡­ And so Leo could just take a nap.


    Besides, she may be a little sleep deprived after recent incidents, like Sherry stealing in the kitchen, and our midnight excursion to capture Deam.


    Back in Japan, she slept a lot while I was out working. But here, she mostly matched my sleeping schedule. So it would be good for her to take naps once in a while.


    We were going to the forest tomorrow, and I would have to prepare. But she would have plenty of time until then.


    ¡°Phew. That should do it.¡±


    ¡°Did I do a good job?¡±


    ¡°Aye, very good, Liza!¡±


    After eating breakfast with everyone, I made herbs with Weed Cultivation and worked in the fields until midday.


    Since we were going to the forest, I made more than usual, and Liza helped me.


    Mr. Haines and Rozalie were astonished to see the herbs grow out of the dirt from nothing.


    That was how everyone reacted when seeing the Gift for the first time.


    ¡°Ehehe¡­ Mama, I was able to do it!¡±


    ¡°Wou. Wou.¡±


    I patted Liza on the head and praised her, and then she proudly showed the herbs she picked to Leo.


    Leo also replied happily.


    ¡­Yes, we were both really soft towards her.


    As for why we had gathered the herbs from the field, it was because they did not look like they would multiply any further, and we did not want them to affect the surrounding grass and flowers.


    I did leave some that hadn¡¯t grown fully yet, but we would have to see what would happen to them.


    When I inspected the soil, I saw that it had dried from having so much nutrients absorbed so quickly, and it looked like sand.


    It was just a small area, but it was like a desert, and the grass around it had died.


    This could be quite dangerous if not used carefully¡­


    In any case, this was the change that Sebastian had been talking about.


    I had seen what happens when using it on an orc, after all.


    I suppose I didn¡¯t notice it earlier, as I had always grown them while more spread out, or in smaller numbers.


    As the dried area was not too big, adding some new soil and fertilizer would probably return it to normal¡­ But I would have to avoid nting the herbs in one area from now on.


    Thest thing I wanted was to dry up all thend around Range vige.


    That was why Sebastian suggested nting the herbs across arge field, and have more people help with managing it.


    ¡°So it is quite tiring. Even if it looks easy¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. It is simple, but if you keep doing it¡­¡±


    ¡°Mama. You can blow the wind a little harder!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°¡­As always, Liza shows no signs of being tired.¡±


    After growing and gathering the herbs, we were joined by Milina and helped with concocting the medicine.


    Once she saw Liza helping with it, Rosalie said she wanted to try it as well.


    As it was simple work, I thought it might be good for her to experience it, and so I had Milina teach her while I used magic wind.


    I had gotten the hang of it now, and it was easier to maintain the wind magic.


    Of course, it was still a little tiring.


    ¡°Well, Liza does have a shocking amount of energy¡­¡±


    ¡°Hoho. So this is the medicine that you mixed in the wine that we drank yesterday.¡±


    ¡°Yes. The idea was to drink this with wine¡­to improve your health. While the taste is a little different, it¡¯s better than drinking this by itself.¡±


    Mr. Haines smiled as he saw Rosalie doing her best to help. And then he muttered while looking at the finished medicine.


    In this powdered form, it did not look very good.


    And while it would be effective if drunk like this, the wine made it more drinkable.


    While it wasn¡¯t that we absolutely had to mix it in wine, the idea was to make Range vige¡¯s wine a popr product, and so we would only sell it like this for now.


    Besides, we wanted to do something about the association with the illness¡­

 Chapter 455

    Chapter 455


    It was time to see Mr. Haines off


    ¡°Indeed the taste is like that. But after drinking it during dinner, I felt a little better than usual this morning.¡±


    ¡°Haha. Well, as for whether the effect is felt immediately, it seems to depend on the person¡­¡±


    Apparently, Mr. Haines could feel the effects after just drinking it a few times.


    However, I really didn¡¯t think this was the kind of drink that is effective that quickly¡­ It was more of a supplement, anyway.


    It could be the cebo effect. Or maybe Mr. Haines was just malnourished.


    ¡°Papa. Can I start the next one?¡±


    ¡°Hmm. Ah, yes. Let¡¯s move on to the next one then. Rosalie, perhaps you should switch ces with Milina now?¡±


    ¡°¡­I¡¯m sorry. I said I would help, but ended up being pretty useless¡­¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s fine. It is tiring work. Liza just doesn¡¯t get tired, so she is fine. You still helped, even if you took turns with Milina. Isn¡¯t that right, Milina?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I can only do so much by myself¡­ So let¡¯s do it together!¡±


    ¡°Okay!¡±


    As Liza wanted to continue making the medicine, we moved on to the next batch.


    ¡°We have finished preparing the horses.


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°You even took care of our horses. Thank you so much.¡±


    ¡°Thank you!¡±


    After we were finished with the medicine, we all ate lunch together, and then it was time for Mr. Haines and Rosalie to leave.


    If they left the mansion at this time, they would be able to arrive at Ractos before it waste. And after staying there for one night, they could return to the vige.


    Johanna hade and told Sebastian that the horses were prepared.


    As they were taken care of at the mansion, they were not tired, and were ready for the journey ahead.


    Mr. Haines and Rosalie then thanked Sebastian, and bowed deeply to Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire, who hade to see him off.


    ¡°Well, you are a guest. So it is only normal. ¡­I¡¯m sure you will have a lot to do when you return, such as exining and persuading others. But do your best.¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course. Please leave the vigers to me. ¡­Once they know that Mr. Takumi and Leo areing, not one of them will object to the n¡­ If anything, they will hardly be able to wait, and will start preparing to wee them. It will be harder to make them calm down.¡±


    ¡°Haha. Well, that is good to hear!¡±


    ¡°Here is some of the ros¨¦ wine and medicinal wine.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    As Mr. Haines was talking to Mr. Ekenhart, I wondered if our arrival really would cause such excitement.


    Indeed, I know that we saved the vige, but¡­ Well, as long as they didn¡¯t think we would be a nuisance, it was fine.


    I suppose it was also because Leo was so popr with the children.


    Mr. Haines and Mr. Ekenhartughed while they talked.


    And then Sebastian stepped forward and gave him some wrapped up bottles.


    It would be easier to exin everything to the vigers if he could show them the actual wine.


    The bottles contained about five hundred milliliters, and there were five of each type.


    It was a lot to carry, but they had the horses and¡­


    ¡°I have finished preparing as well.¡±


    Said Nichs. He was dressed in the same equipment he wore when going to town.


    He was to apany them as a guard on the return journey back to Range vige.


    Mr. Haines had insisted that this was not necessary. As they would be mainly sticking to the main road, it should not be dangerous. But Mr. Ekenhart said that it was best to be sure.


    Besides, they needed someone to carry the wine and other belongings.


    Even if the horses would be carrying them on the road, it was too heavy for Mr. Haines or Rosalie to carry them once they entered the town.


    One wondered why they didn¡¯t take less then¡­ But I suppose it was an excuse for Mr. Ekenhart to send a guard with them.


    After all, Mr. Haines was the chief, and it would be very bad if something were to happen to him.


    ¡°Good bye, Rosalie.¡±


    ¡°Yes. When youe to the vige, I will introduce you to all of my friends!¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll look forward to it!¡±


    ¡°And everyone is looking forward to ying you again, Leo!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    The children were saying their farewells too.


    As the mansion was filled with adults, I was happy that Liza would be able to y with a lot of friends in the vige.


    Leo was also looking forward to it, and wagging her tail happily.


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right. The hat that you¡¯re wearing¡­could I buy one too?¡±


    ¡°Hmm. I don¡¯t know. Papa?¡±


    ¡°Huh? What is it?¡±


    ¡°Rosalie wants a hat like this too. Could she buy one? I can¡¯t give her this one, because you bought it for me¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­¡±


    ¡°In that case, I will speak to the tailor.¡±


    Yesterday, Rosalie had said she wanted ears and a tail like Liza.


    And then she had seen Liza¡¯s hat, which she liked so much and wore most of the time, and started to want one too.


    Mr. Halton had made it just for Liza, and so I didn¡¯t know if you could buy it. That was when Sebastian opened his mouth.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 456

    Chapter 456


    It was nap time


    Sebastian said that he would send a message to Mr. Halton, so that he could prepare a hat for Rosalie.


    Mr. Haines was incredibly grateful for everything that was done for them.


    Apparently, they would visit the tailor before leaving Ractos.


    It should be fine, as Nichs knew where it was, and Rosalie would get the same kind of hat as Liza.


    ¡­I¡¯m sure it would be popr with the children in the vige as well.


    Maybe I should talk to Mr. Halton about it. After all, it could be a popr product¡­


    No, I wasn¡¯t a tailor, and so I would leave it to other people.


    While I was a customer there, it would be strange for aplete amateaur to try and give them business advice.


    I suppose it was a habit from my days as a sryman.


    Back then, I had made a lot of suggestions like that¡­ And in most cases, they were rather desperate, and my boss would just mock me in the end.


    ¡°Well, we should be off then¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. Please be careful.¡±


    ¡°Please be safe on your return journey!!¡±


    ¡°!?¡±


    Mr. Haines and Rosalie had said their farewells and were about to exit the door.


    And then the servants bid them farewell in unison.


    And just like Liza had, Rosalie flinched in surprise, which was rather amusing¡­


    ¡°She really is sleepingfortably¡­¡±


    ¡°Hehe. Tilura as well. They look happy.¡±


    After Mr. Haines had left, I wanted to train as always, but Mr. Ekenhart had ordered that there be no training.


    He did not want us to be tired when going to the forest tomorrow, and so we were to rest today.


    Indeed, it was not like we would find orcs as soon as we arrived. And so we would have to walk through the forest for some time.


    And even if Leo, Mr. Ekenhart and I would be fine, Tilura was not used to being in the forest, and mightck the energy.


    If it came to it, I could also use my fatigue recovery herbs, but I didn¡¯t want to rely on them too much, and so I would just obey Mr. Ekenhart.


    He said that relying on herbs too much would affect my growth. I then asked him about how he relied on sleeping herbs, but he changed the subject.


    Well, as this was mainly for Tilura, I would not pry too much into it.


    I had nothing to do now, but then I remembered that Leo had looked sleepy this morning.


    While it was nice to sleep in my room, since we had nice weather, I suggested that she could nap outside under the sun.


    And then, not only did Leo agree, but Tilura, Sherry and even Ms. ire joined in.


    Leo had gone out and yawned loudly under the sun before rolling up on the ground. And then Liza and Tiluray against her while wrapping themselves in her fur.


    Even Ms. Anne, who usually stayed in her room, hade out to sleep with the others¡­


    ¡­I wonder if the sun would affect her hair¡­ Well, that wasn¡¯t my problem.


    Sherry had also rolled up on top of Leo¡¯s back, and seemed veryfortable as she slept.


    Leo had given her a break from her usual exercise.


    I suppose she was also preparing for tomorrow¡­ Well, it was probably mostly because of Leo¡¯s nap.


    In the meantime, Ms. ire and I sat down at a table with some shade, and drank tea while we watched them.


    ¡°Now that I think of it, are you not so busy today?¡±


    ¡°Well, a lot of work has beenpleted. Besides, I do like to take it easy sometimes as well.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Indeed.¡±


    Ms. ire had been busy with work rted to the slums.


    It was partially my fault, but I tried not to think about it.


    Besides, even if I apologized about it, she would just tell me to not worry.


    Ms. ire had also been busy with other matters concerning the herb fields and joint management, so it was a good thing that she could rx now.


    ¡­On the other hand, Sebastian seemed to be keeping Mr. Ekenhart very busy.


    ¡°While I cannot use a sword¡­ Tilura seems to have improved greatly under father¡¯s instruction¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. She enjoys it a lot, and is very passionate about it. And though I started at the same time as her, I feel like I am only one step ahead because I have a little realbat experience¡­ It is actually hard to stay ahead of her.¡±


    ¡°Hehe¡­ So Tilura may surpass you. Part of me would like to see that¡­and the other would not¡­ I am conflicted.¡±


    Ms. ire talked as she watched her sister sleep.


    While she was smiling, I felt there was a little sadness in her eyes as well.


    Perhaps it was because her little sister could do something that she could not, and that would create a distance between them that would grow over time.


    Ms. ire would often strictly demand Tilura study, which sometimes got a very negative reaction from Tilura.


    However, it was still true that the sisters trusted each other and got along well.


    I suppose she was both happy and a little sad to see Tilura¡¯s growth. It was a feeling somewhat familiar to me as well.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 457

    Chapter 457


    I talked with Ms. ire


    ¡°Maybe Mr. Ekenhart feels like that. He is watching your growth as well. And while it might not be something felt a lot at our age¡­I have felt something simr.¡±


    ¡°Father¡­ If that were the case, he would not have been so eager for me to get married. Even if I was the reason for that¡­ Still, have you, Mr. Takumi? I thought you didn¡¯t have any siblings?¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was nearly twice as old as me, and had a lot of life experience, including the raising of his daughters.


    And so he probably would have felt a mixture of happiness and sadness as well.


    ¡°Previously, I told you about when I found Leo.¡±


    ¡°Yes. You found a young leo on a rainy day¡­¡±


    ¡°And since she was not well for some time, I stayed indoors and watched her¡­ And when she was better, I was able to take her outside. And Leo was very popr with children.¡±


    ¡°Hehe. I cannot imagine how good Leo was back then, but it¡¯s no surprise that children liked her. It was the same at the orphanage and Mr. Kalis¡¯s store. And here.¡±


    While Ms. ire hadn¡¯t seen it, Leo was also very popr in Range vige.


    Perhaps children were able to see the kindness within, even if she was a Silver Fenrir and powerful monster.


    Of course¡­it was not like that with every child.


    ¡°While it may be hard to imagine her being small, she still liked to run around and jump and y.¡±


    ¡°Well¡­I can imagine her running. But jumping around¡­ I would like to see that.¡±


    ¡°Haha, indeed. It would be very difficult for her to do that at this size¡­ Well, she would y with children like that, but¡­¡±


    I thought back on those fond memories as I talked to Ms. ire.


    This was when Leo used to y with the children in the neighborhood.


    I was still a student at the time, and even though I had a part time job, I still had some free time.


    And so I would take her out on regr walks so she could y.


    But then a few years passed, and I got a full time job, which kept me busy¡­


    And one day, when I took time in my busy schedule to take Leo outside.


    We met a boy, who had been one of the children that Leo yed with.


    He was in elementary school when we first met, but he was a junior highschool student, and had grown quite a lot.


    Still, Leo and he recognized each other, and were quite happy at first.


    But then he was called by another boy from somewhere else, and he was distracted, and ended up running in that direction.


    Leo had watched him leave and looked a little lonely. But now that I think back on it, she might have been a little happy as well.


    Or maybe it was just me.


    Boys at that age were very impressionable, and would want to y with friends or have other interests. And so he would care more about that than some dog he used to y with.


    And though he was just some kid that Leo yed with, and I didn¡¯t even know his name, it was still a little like seeing your younger brother grow up, and I felt sad as well.


    It made me feel sentimental about how children always grew, and would not always stay in the same ce.


    Perhaps that was a little different from what Ms. ire was feeling. But growth was something that made you both happy and sad.


    ¡°I see. I know I should be happy about it. But one cannot help but feel lonely.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. However, that is just you. I don¡¯t think the person growing should feel anything but happiness. You wouldn¡¯t want Tilura to worry about you, right?¡±


    ¡°Of course not. She is my younger sister, and should never have to worry about me.¡±


    ¡°Haha. Your pride as the elder child.¡±


    I didn¡¯t know, because I didn¡¯t have siblings¡­ But I heard that older siblings tended to feel that way, no matter how close they were.


    When I was a student, one of my friendsined about how his younger brother got good grades, and their parents wouldpare them.


    He did not want his brother to beat him, and so that motivated him to study harder.


    ¡°Of course, I will do my best to stay ahead of Tilura. Well¡­except when ites to skill with a sword.¡±


    ¡°Haha. Yes. I suppose you should just do whatever it is that you excel at.¡±


    ¡°I agree with that. However¡­what do you think I excel at?¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    As Ms. ire did not train with a sword, it was one area where she had already lost to her sister.


    While it may be important for her to stay ahead, as the older sister, they were humans who had different ways of thinking. And so I had told her to do what she did best.


    However¡­she then asked me a question that I found difficult to answer¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 458

    Chapter 458


    I thought about Ms. ire


    ¡°Something that suits you¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    Ms. ire stared at me as she waited for an answer.


    And so I thought about her.


    Perhaps she felt a little anxious, as her hand seemed to quiver a little as she held her teacup.


    ¡­Apparently, this was a very serious question for her.


    She did not seem like someone who wasn¡¯t confident in herself¡­ But in any case, I could tell that this was not the time to make a joke or say something strange.


    ¡°Well¡­umm¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    I had first met Ms. ire in the fenrir forest.


    She had gone there in order to find herbs to cure Tilura¡¯s illness.


    It was a bold thing for ady to do, when she could not even fight. She could have waited, or brought guards with her. But I suppose she felt like she had to do something when her sister was ill.


    While it was sweet, it was also reckless.


    This impulsiveness might be a result of being influenced by her father.


    She was also very curious about things, and was not scared of Leo when we first met.


    The second time we went to the forest was because Ms. ire wanted to fight other fenrirs or Silver Fenrir.


    Aside from that, we also went to Ractos together, and she had hugged Liza gently etcetera.


    There was also that time we were together in my room¡­ Well, Leo was also there, and it had been a little awkward.


    After thinking about all of that, I started to not know what to say to her¡­


    Hmm¡­


    ¡°¡­Uh, you don¡¯t have to think about it so seriously. I¡­was just wondering, that¡¯s all. I didn¡¯t think you would have so much trouble with it.¡±


    Ms. ire seemed a little frantic when she saw that I was thinking hard.


    But her look suggested that she indeed really wanted to hear an answer.


    So, how should I reply¡­


    ¡°Well, you know¡­ No, I¡¯m sorry. I cannot think of a clear answer.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    ¡°However¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes?¡±


    I did not know Ms. ire long enough to say anything for sure.


    While I had grown to know her more than most people, there was still a lot that I didn¡¯t know.


    There was probably a lot that she didn¡¯t show me¡­


    However, I did have my own idea of her, that I could tell her about.


    ¡°You are a kind person. Most people would not have gone to search for herbs in the forest, even if it was for their sister. You help to look after Liza, and it¡¯s partially because of you that she feels safe here.¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    As I talked while looking straight into her face, Ms. ire seemed to turn a little red.


    Was she getting embarrassed?


    ¡°That being said, going to the forest alone is dangerous. So I hope you won¡¯t do that again¡­¡±


    ¡°That was¡­!¡±


    Ms. ire turned her face away when I brought that up.


    While her going had led to us meeting her¡­I still wanted her to avoid any danger.


    I suppose it was simr to how she worried about me.


    ¡°And though you are sometimes harsh with others, it is usually because you care about them. You are always thinking about others. In general, I think you are a kind, intelligent and wonderful person.¡±


    ¡°¡­It¡¯s because¡­as a duke¡¯s daughter¡­as ady¡­¡±


    ¡°Even if that is the case, it is still a good thing. Besides, perhaps I should not makeparisons, but Ms, Anne is also a noble and¡­¡±


    ¡°Anne is¡­ Her mind is not quite right. Just look at her hair¡­ And she says her suggestions to Count Barsler were so he wouldn¡¯t disturb her sleep¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha. Yes, that is true.¡±


    I was surprised by that as well.


    Regardless, she had acted very grand and like a noble at first. But she was more quiet recently.


    Maybe she had affected by Ms. ire and the others. However, she was definitely easier to talk to now.


    And she did unexpected and amusing things.


    ¡°Back to the topic at hand¡­ I think that you are a truedy. Though, there are times when you really let loose. Like when you went to search for fenrirs.¡±


    ¡°¡­I am sorry about that.¡±


    ¡°No, not at all. I knew that you were interested in Silver Fenrirs. Having some restraint is good, but¡­ I also think it is good to push the way you think to the forefront as well. After all, you do not want to let others crush you.¡±


    When I brought up the time she suggested we go to the forest, Ms. ire became very apologetic.


    Of course, I didn¡¯t mind going at all.


    Though, I was surprised that she pushed back against the objections of Sebastian and the servants.

 Chapter 459

    Chapter 459


    I seeded in surprising Sebastian


    ¡°In any case, I suppose that I think of you as someone who is both kind and strict, and can surprise people by your ability to act¡­?¡±


    ¡°Being kind is good¡­ But what about surprising people?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t see the problem with that. At least, I find it quite amusing. So I think you should stay as you are.¡±


    ¡°As I am¡­¡±


    While Ms. ire wasn¡¯t sure about it, I did not see that trait as a negative thing.


    If anything, I wished that she would surprise me more often. Was it rude to think that way?


    Besides, I suppose it was less amusing for her servants and Sebastian.


    No, Sebastian might enjoy it as well.


    ¡°Sorry that my thoughts are quite scattered. I wish I had a better answer for you¡­¡±


    ¡°No, I am just d that you took the time to think about it. Thank you.¡±


    She said with a smile, and blushed slightly.


    I didn¡¯t really know how to react during such times.


    And so I would say things that were unnecessary.


    ¡°Uh, well. You could just do reckless things asionally, and amuse others.¡±


    ¡°¡­You want me to be reckless in order to entertain you?¡±


    Ms. ire said with a look of annoyance.


    And while that expression was also amusing¡­ I really had said too much.


    But there was no taking it back now.


    ¡°I sometimes think that you care too much about how things should be, that you do not show yourself as much as you could. I think you should be more selfish, and do whatever you want, I guess?¡±


    ¡°¡­And that would amuse you?¡±


    ¡°Well, yes. As long as you aren¡¯t hurting others¡­ But I know you wouldn¡¯t do that. I just enjoy seeing you more lively.¡±


    It sounded strange when she worded it like that, but I had a feeling that it was what she was interested in.


    ¡°It reminds me of how you told little Liza to not hold back and be so modest. I see¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha. I¡¯m sorry for sounding like I¡¯m lecturing you.¡±


    ¡°No, it¡¯s fine. I was the one who asked you.¡±


    It might have been rude of me to say so much, but Ms. ire was smiling.


    Apparently, she was not upset.


    ¡°I shall¡­think about it then.¡±


    ¡°But maybe don¡¯t think about it too much?¡±


    ¡°Since it was you who said it¡­ Oh, very well. I shall not take it too seriously or be in a rush.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­¡±


    It was then that I heard a voiceing from some distance away.


    Ms. ire seemed to hear it as well, as she turned her head in the direction that it hade from.


    Liza had been sleeping against Leo, but her ears were now perked up and twitching.


    ¡°It looks like it is time for them to wake up?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. As they have slept well, I bet they will have plenty of energy now.¡±


    ¡°Hehe. That should be fun.¡±


    ¡°Haha, yes.¡±


    Liza rubbed her eyes as she woke up.


    And then Leo, Sherry, and Tilura began to move as well.


    Only Ms. Anne was still in a deep sleep while drooling


    I averted my eyes and Ms. ire and I smiled. Now that we had finished our tea, we made our way towards Leo and the others.


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting, Mr. Ekenhart.¡±


    ¡°Mm¡­ I was not waiting long. What is it? You said you had something to show me before dinner.¡±


    After the others woke up, Ms. ire and I yed with them for a short while.


    And then I remembered something, and asked one of the maids to go and call for Mr. Ekenhart.


    As it would be dinner soon, I received a message to meet Mr. Ekenhart in the dining hall. And so I left the others in the garden and went to go meet him.


    Mr. Ekenhart was already waiting there, and Sebastian stood next to him.


    Due to Liza¡¯s influence, he kept his beard shaved recently.


    And sitting there in the back of the room with Sebastian gave him a great sense of authority.


    He was the duke, and not just some friendly old man.


    ¡°Yesterday, we talked about making Loe¡­¡±


    ¡°You wanted to have it prepared for soldiers in different locations.¡±


    ¡°Yes. And so I made some, so we could start by having some stocked up in this mansion.¡±


    ¡°Already? That was quick.¡±


    ¡°I know that Sebastian was supposed to decide, but¡­ Since we are going to the forest tomorrow, I thought there should be some stored here, just in case. As Liza and Rosalie helped, it was not much trouble.¡±


    And so I took out the Loe and showed it to them.


    Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian had not expected me to prepare it so quickly, and so they were quite surprised.


    ¡­As for me, there was something satisfying in being able to surprise Sebastian.

 Chapter 460

    Chapter 460


    I made too much Loe


    ¡°Well, since I made it without permission, you might not want it yet¡­ I can always just keep it.¡±


    ¡°¡­As it is a rare herb, we would dly ept it regardless. I see, because we are going to the forest.¡±


    ¡°Yes. But with Leo and the guards, and Mr. Ekenhart¡­ There is little chance of being injured. I suppose I am being paranoid?¡±


    ¡°No, we are grateful. I am still worried that something could happen to Tilura. And so I can rx now. Though, if the guards were injured from orcs, then it would mean that their training has been insufficient.¡±


    ¡°Your Grace¡­I don¡¯t think¡­¡±


    As Loe was rare, I doubted they would not take it, and I was right.


    But putting that aside, Mr. Ekenhart was also worried about Tilura.


    Even though it had been his idea, he still felt a little anxious.


    It was probably simr to what I had been discussing with Ms. ire. He wanted her to grow quickly, but also didn¡¯t want her to do anything dangerous.


    Still¡­Mr. Ekenhart sure was strict when it came to the guards.


    And so Sebastian looked at him admonishingly.


    I had heard that orcs could be dangerous for even guards, if they let their guard down¡­ Of course, it was different for Mr. Ekenhart.


    He was skilled enough to hit Leo. And during the mock battle, I had barely been able to see his movements.


    Sometimes, I wondered if he was even human¡­ Well, he had to be, since he had two daughters.


    ¡°Hmm, what is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°¡­No, it¡¯s nothing. In any case, I made all of this, just in case any one of us is injured.¡±


    ¡°¡­Surely that is too much?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­that much Loe is worth a fortune.¡±


    The two looked surprised when they saw me ce the Loe on the table.


    Oh? It¡¯s too much?


    Uh, aside from me, Leo, Tilura and Mr. Ekenhart, there would be a few servants and guards as well¡­ So it would be at least ten people.


    As I had to make other herbs as well, I had to be careful that I didn¡¯t use the Gift too much¡­ And so I had just made two for each person.


    I didn¡¯t know the exact numbers, so I had made a little extra. There were thirty ced on the table.


    ¡°I thought that it might not be enough¡­¡±


    ¡°Going to the forest will not result in that many injuries. A ce that would require that much Loe would be too dangerous to go to in the first ce.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Well, indeed.¡±


    With Leo there, orcs and trolls would not be that dangerous.


    While a horde of them would be dangerous, that seemed unlikely, considering my experiences in the forest.


    We knew that there would be other fenrirs, because we found Sherry, but Leo would deal with them¡­


    It wasn¡¯t decided yet how many days we would be staying there, but I could always make more if it was needed, so I understood what Mr. Ekenhart was saying.


    ¡°Well, we can take some of it with us to the forest¡­and use the rest elsewhere. Since Mr. Takumi is fine with the wholesale price, we can count as part of the stock that will be sent to the soldiers.¡±


    ¡°Huh? Oh, since this was made for the forest journey, and I might use it¡­ I don¡¯t need to get paid.¡±


    ¡°That won¡¯t do, Mr. Takumi. You have a contract with the duke. To be honest, even at the wholesale price, buying this much Loe will be difficult¡­but it must be done.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. While Mr. Takumi is modest, because he is being allowed to live in this house, we cannot take advantage of it, as long as there is a contract.¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­ I¡¯m sorry for getting carried away and making so many¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart wanted to give the extra Loe to the guards, like we had discussed yesterday.


    That was a good thing, but since I had just gone ahead and made it, I hesitated to ept payment.


    Sebastian was nodding in agreement with Mr. Ekenhart. It looked like I would have little choice.


    Perhaps I should be happy to get paid, but since they had been so good to me, and this was an unexpected expense for them, I felt sorry¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 461

    Chapter 461


    Confirming our ns for the forest


    ¡°Bah, it is nothing to worry about. Not only can we buy Loe at a price lower than at the market, but we may save some soldiers as well. Of course, you must tell us in advance next time, understand?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. We are still thinking about how much to store at each location, and when to send them. And so when we are ready, I will tell you the number we need and the date they will be delivered.¡±


    ¡°I understand¡­¡±


    I really did feel bad about it.


    Even if he was the duke, it wasn¡¯t like he had infinite money.


    And while they would eventually sell some of the Loe and make a profit, that wouldn¡¯t be for awhile.


    It was like an investment¡­ And as the lord of thesends, things had to go ording to a schedule. I didn¡¯t want them to owe a debt or end up losing money.


    I would have to think more before making herbs¡­ Especially because of the contract. I suppose being able to make them easily had made me get carried away.


    ¡°Well then, we will discuss the matter of the Loeter, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. So that matter is settled. ¡­But since we still have some time left, I will tell you about tomorrow.¡±


    ¡°Indeed.¡±


    ¡°Tomorrow¡­do you mean ns for the forest?¡±


    ¡°Mmm.¡±


    After we finished talking about the Loe, Mr. Ekenhart looked around the room and checked the time.


    We still had to wait a little longer before dinner.


    ¡°As for who will be going, it is you, me, Leo and Tilura.


    ¡°Yes. As for the butlers, I shall go, along with one other. And there will also be two maids.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. And the guards¡­ I believe it will be the same three who went with ire and Mr. Takumist time?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Phillip, Nichs and Johanna apanied us.¡±


    First, we confirmed the personnel who would be going.


    Sebastian and one other butler would being as well.


    I suppose there were more because of Mr. Ekenhart.


    I didn¡¯t know which maids woulde, butst time it was just Ms. Lyra, while there would be two this time.


    I suppose that would make things easier, as Ms. Lyra had to cook all by herself, which seemed like a lot of work.


    ¡°I see, those three. In that case, since there are more people this time, there should be four?¡±


    ¡°No, since most of the people cannot fight, there should be five. Even Leo there, and it being the second time, we should take every precaution.¡±


    ¡°I see. Well, I will leave it to you then.¡±


    As Phillip, Nichs and Johanna had experience in the forest, they were automatic additions. And though our purpose was different this time, they knew the terrain, so I was d to have them with us.


    ¡°And just likest time, we will head to the forest, and then make our way to the river, where we will set up camp. And we will search for orcs on the following day.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. Well, we might encounter orcs on the way, but that should be fine for the first day. Even if fighting them is our purpose, there is no need to rush.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Even if we see orcs on the way there, we will let Leo or the guards deal with them.¡±


    It would take time to travel, and energy as well.


    As we were going to camp near the river, there would be a decent amount of walking¡­


    And Tilura was not used to fighting in a forest, where trees could get in the way¡­ It was the same with me.


    ¡°Unlike the previous time, there is no need for exploration. We only need to search for orcs. And lure them towards us.¡±


    ¡°That is fine. There is no need to go too deep into the forest. We can just lure them into an open area. While you should also experience fighting them among the trees¡­ Well, it depends on Tilura. We will see how she does.¡±


    ¡°Um¡­ What about me?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sure you could do either one, Mr. Takumi. After all, you fought people in a cramped building before. Even if they were likely weaker than orcs. But the decision is yours, just like Tilura. But I think you will be fine.¡±


    ¡°Fighting in a building is surely very different from fighting in a forest¡­ But I will do my best.¡±


    I understood why they would provoke and lure the orcs towards us.


    As it would be her first battle, and in unfamiliar terrain, they would want Tilura to fight in an open space. But since they didn¡¯t say anything about me, I asked Mr. Ekenhart, and he said he was not worried about me.


    Indeed, I had once fought three men with weapons inside of a small store. And so you could say I was experienced in fighting in small spaces and with obstacles in the way.


    But it wasn¡¯t exactly the same, I didn¡¯t think it was enough. Still, I would trust Mr. Ekenhart, since he said I should be fine.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 462

    Chapter 462


    I was asked about Liza


    ¡°Your Grace, what about situations where we encounter monsters that are stronger than orcs, such as trolls?¡±


    ¡°Now that I think about it, you did see trolls before, didn¡¯t you? But good Leo or the guards should be able to handle it. There is no need to take any risks.¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    Last time, we had seen trolls surround Sherry and attack her.


    And while Leo could deal with fenrirs and trolls, it was possible that there were other monsters as well.


    If that happened, then we would just let Leo or the guards deal with them.


    While we were here so that Tilura and I could get some experience, it was best if we did not put ourselves in danger either.


    I sighed with relief, but made sure that Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian did not see me do it.


    While I had fought orcs in Range vige, when it came to other monsters¡­


    Trolls were big. Their arms were as thick as my body.


    If I were to be hit by them, I would break bones and get knocked into the air¡­ I did not like the idea of fighting them.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi looks relieved.¡±


    ¡°He does? ¡­ Well, we are not going to the forest to face danger. So there is no reason to fight trolls and other monsters if not necessary.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Thank you.¡±


    Apparently, Sebastian had seen that I was relieved.


    There really was no hiding things from him.


    ¡°Now, Mr. Takumi. Can you call over Leo? And Liza.¡±


    ¡°Leo and Liza?¡±


    ¡°Mmm. As Leo wants to train Sherry as well, we should know how she intends to do it. As for Liza¡­are you going to leave her here?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I did want to leave Liza here where it is safe¡­ Is that a problem?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t mind if she stays. However¡­she might not want to. Perhaps she will want to follow you and Leo to the forest. Well, I¡¯m sure you could persuade her to stay¡­ But if she dide, I¡¯m sure Leo would keep her safe. So I do not mind either way.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ It¡¯s true that she might want toe. She got quite lonely when we went to the slums.¡±


    If we went to the forest, we would be gone for a few days.


    And while she would be safe in the mansion, she would surely miss us.


    Well, like Mr. Ekenhart said. If Liza wanted toe with us, I suppose it would be fine, as long as she stayed close to Leo the whole time.


    ¡­Though, I did feel a little bad that Leo was so much more reliable in terms of protecting her. I need to improve more, so that I can protect my daughter by myself.


    ¡°So that¡¯s how it is. She has finally found a ce where she feels safe. And it is with you and Leo, not this mansion. Though, she might pretend that she is fine.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ She had a habit of not saying how she really feels. And I don¡¯t want her to do anything she doesn¡¯t want to.¡±


    She had done a lot of that in the slums already.


    Recently, she had finally started to enjoy being herself more, and so I didn¡¯t want her to go back. But if she thought that she might get in the way, she might just say that she would prefer to stay at the mansion.


    And so I would have to be careful when talking to her.


    ¡°As she is close in age to Tilura, I could not help but worry.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. I will call Leo and Liza then.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. Good.¡±


    And so I left the dining hall and went back to the garden.


    On the way, I thought about what Liza¡¯s answer would be. And concluded that she would want toe.


    Ms. ire and the others would be in the mansion, so there should be no problem with her staying. But Tilura was her only ymate, and she would be gone.


    In any case, I would tell her of the dangers in the forest, and let her decide¡­


    Perhaps I was being too soft. But it wouldn¡¯t be allowed if Leo was not with us.


    Though, it¡¯s not like we would be going to the forest regrly.


    ¡°¡­I see that everyone hase.¡±


    ¡°Sorry. Since they were all together¡­¡±


    I called the others in the garden, and we all returned to the dining hall and sat down.


    Ms. ire was curious when she heard that her father wanted to talk about something, and Tilura followed Leo and Liza¡­ And then so did Sherry and Ms. Anne.

 Chapter 463

    Chapter 463


    Sherry was traumatized by the trolls


    ¡°I don¡¯t mind. Besides, it¡¯s almost time for dinner.¡±


    ¡°So, father. You have something to discuss with Leo?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi did not tell you?¡±


    ¡°Ah, I thought I would let them hear it from you¡­Mr. Ekenhart.¡±


    ¡°I see. Very well¡­¡±


    He then turned to Leo and started to exin.


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Wuff-wou. Grau-grau. Wou!¡±


    ¡°What did good Leo say?¡±


    ¡°She says that she¡¯ll have Sherry fight off random orcs. And some other monsters as well, depending on the situation.¡±


    My interpretation was not as precise as Liza, but I think I got it mostly right. Even Leo was nodding.


    I could have just asked Liza to do it for me, but I wanted to improve, as Liza might not be with me all of the time.


    ¡°Hmm, I see. In that case, Sherry will apany us with the same purpose as you and Tilura? To gain experience?¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff-wuff? Wou!¡±


    ¡°Yes, but she also wants to know if we will be fighting any other monsters. She thinks trolls would be good.¡±


    ¡°Kyu!?¡±


    Apparently, Leo was also considering making Sherry fight other monsters as well.


    Aside from dieting, she also wanted to toughen her up as a fenrir, and so she was rather strict.


    ¡­At least, I hoped it had nothing to do with being angry about stealing food.


    Regardless, upon hearing the word ¡®troll,¡¯ Sherry lifted her head and yelped.


    ¡°¡­What is it, Sherry?¡±


    ¡°Kyau¡­kyau¡­¡±


    ¡°I see. Sherry does not want to fight against trolls. What do you think, good Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Grau-grau!¡±


    ¡°Kyuu¡­¡±


    Sherry was sitting on Ms. ire¡¯sp as she exined the reason.


    As she was Ms. ire¡¯s familiar, they were able to understand each other.


    Perhaps being attacked by them previously had resulted in some trauma.


    After all, several of them had surrounded her, and she had been close to death.


    However, Leo sighed and then barked as if to scold Sherry.


    Uh¡­she was saying that a fenrir should not be afraid of mere trolls.


    I then ryed this to the others.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ It is true that fenrirs are supposed to be stronger.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. While trolls are big and strong, they are not as dangerous whenpared to fenrirs. They can move swiftly and cut down trees with their ws. And they can use magic. While trolls rely on strength alone¡­ Their movements are slow, and so fenrirs can dodge them. Of course, I have never actually witnessed it¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, it is rare to see monsters fighting each other. But it is our understanding that while trolls are above orcs, they are much lower than fenrirs.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyu¡­¡±


    I had never fought one myself, but Leo had defeated one on our way to Range vige.


    And while I watched from a distance, it did seem slow¡­ Though, I didn¡¯t know if I could dodge them for certain.


    Even if they were slow, they were so strong that I might not survive being hit, which made them a great threat towards me¡­ Unlike Leo and Mr. Ekenhart.


    ¡­Sherry did not look amused.


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Hmm. What is it?¡±


    As I wondered what to do, Leo looked at me and tilted her head.


    Apparently, she wanted to ask me something.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sure that will be prepared. Sebastian, Leo is wondering about everyone¡¯s food.¡±


    ¡°Food? Just like before, the butlers and maids will prepare it once we reach the forest.¡±


    ¡°I see. Thank you. Did you hear that, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Leo sure cared a lot about food¡­ Or so I thought, but it was apparently not that.


    After hearing those words, Leo stopped to think.


    I hadn¡¯t seen Leo like this since I made her smell something bad¡­


    ¡°¡­Wuff! Wuff-wuff. Wuff! Wuff-wuff?¡±


    ¡°Kyau!?¡±


    ¡°Ah, I see¡­¡±


    Leo seemed to think of something as she started barking.


    Umm¡­Sherry will defeat orcs for food, and she will leave the cooking to us?


    And so I told Sebastian what she had said.


    As this was Leo¡¯s n for putting Sherry on a diet, no one wanted to intervene.


    Because Ms. ire and I had no idea how to strengthen a fenrir.


    And so we just left it to /tigertransations


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 464

    Chapter 464


    I asked Sherry why she was alone when she was attacked


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Acquiring food on location. Are you sure about that?¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wou-wuff!¡±


    ¡°She says that it will be fine. Leo says that Sherry stole from the kitchen because she never hunted for her own food.¡±


    ¡°Kyuu¡­¡±


    Sherry was only a few months old, so she was still a fenrir cub.


    I didn¡¯t know when they started hunting, but it was likely she had not experienced it yet.


    While we didn¡¯t see any others when we found her, she probably had parents that hunted food for her before.


    ¡­Now that I thought about it, what happened with the other fenrirs?


    Were they looking for Sherry in the forest? Or was this just an epted part of living in the wild?


    While it had happened a while ago, I was now curious as to how Sherry had found herself in that situation.


    I suppose I should ask her? It would be easy for Ms. ire or Liza to talk to Sherry.


    ¡°While it is not exactly the subject we are on¡­¡±


    ¡°What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Well, uh¡­ We did not see any other fenrirs when we encountered Sherry in the forest.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. While she was being attacked by trolls, there were no other monsters in the area.¡±


    ¡°Right? I was wondering why Sherry was alone in the first ce¡­ I heard that fenrirs moved in packs¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. As Sherry¡¯s master, I have asked about it before.¡±


    ¡°You did, Ms. ire?¡±


    If fenrirs moved in packs, surely they would not abandon a young fenrir.


    Regardless, it seemed that Ms. ire had wondered about the same thing, and had questioned Sherry about it. I felt dumb for not even thinking about it before.


    I suppose it was because I was so busy with other things in this unfamiliar world.


    ¡°Yes. It was around the time that you went to Range vige, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°I see. And what did Sherry say?¡±


    ¡°Sherry was born in the forest. Well, I suppose that is to be expected, as fenrirs rarelye from other ces.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°And while their pack usually stayed deep into the forest, Sherry suddenly felt a strange presence one day. Isn¡¯t that right, Sherry?¡±


    ¡°Kyau! Kyau-kyau!¡±


    Ms. ire started to tell me what Sherry had told her.


    And Sherry barked in agreement.


    She was a lot more cheerful now. Perhaps she had forgotten the trials Leo had set for her.


    ¡°I see. So it was more of a scent¡­ A vague feeling. Regardless, she became curious, and separated from her pack.¡±


    ¡°A strange smell¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. At first, she was able to move through the forest without encountering any monsters, but¡­ She started to get hungry, and then realized that she was in a strange ce, and there was a different strange smell. I suppose her curiosity had distracted her, so she lowered her guard.¡±


    ¡°But what kind of smell was it?¡±


    ¡°Apparently, it was the trolls. And by the time she realized this, they were already too close, and surrounded her so that she could not run away¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ So that is why. And then she was attacked¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Kyau¡­¡±


    When Ms. ire was finished, Sherry barked and nodded. And then looked sad as she seemed to remember the trolls.


    In any case, I understood why she was separated from her pack now. But what was that unfamiliar presence?


    Perhaps it was something that fenrirs could sense, but I was a little curious.


    ¡°Did Sherry say what the presence or scent was?¡±


    ¡°I did ask her about that. But after being injured, she did not really remember¡­ But I think that it must have been Leo.¡±


    ¡°Kyuu¡­¡±


    Sherry seemed a little embarrassed that she did not remember it well, but she was still young¡­ And so it could not be helped.


    Still, it was quite careless of her.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 465

    Chapter 465


    Delicious food was important to Sherry


    ¡°So she doesn¡¯t remember that. What do you think, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff? ¡­Wuff-wuff. Wou?¡±


    I turned to Leo to see if Ms. ire¡¯s guess was correct.


    After tilting her head, Leo barked as if she was not confident.


    ¡°Maybe? That is what she said. And she says that since Sherry is still young, she might be curious about presences that a grown fenrir would know to run away from.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Leo did say before, that fenrirs instinctively submitted to Silver Fenrirs, I believe?¡±


    ¡°Wou. Wou-wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°She says that they might be able to detect Silver Fenrirs from a distance. Though, adult fenrirs would run away so that they do not encounter them. But I guess Sherry was too curious.¡±


    As Sherry was a fenrir, she would also have a sharp sense of smell, and might have been able to detect Leo from far away.


    Unless Sherry was just special¡­ But it was hard to think that, considering how she has acted sinceing to the mansion.


    ¡°Indeed. Sherry? If you sense something strange, you have to tell someone, okay? You don¡¯t want to get attacked by trolls again.¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    When Ms. ire talked to Sherry, it just looked like ady and her dog.


    Even if the dog was actually a fenrir¡­


    While Sherry was nodding to Ms. ire, Leo was sighing as if to say, ¡®you should be able to beat a mere troll¡­¡¯


    ¡°So we know why Sherry was on her own now. However, does she not have to return to her pack? Even if she is ire¡¯s familiar. While familiars cannot attack their masters, they are not servants either.¡±


    ¡°Yes, father, I understand that. Sherry? While it would make me sad, do you wish to return to the forest? If you do, you can return to the forest as a normal fenrir, and not a familiar.¡±


    ¡°Kyu?¡±


    I had never actually heard about familiars not being able to attack masters before. But it made sense, or you would not be able to do it with any dangerous monsters.


    An intelligent monster might be able to trick humans¡­and pretend to be a familiar.


    Ms. ire looked at Sherry with a serious expression as she asked her.


    Sherry tilted her head, and while I didn¡¯t understand what she was saying, she did look quite sad.


    ¡°It¡¯s not that I don¡¯t want you here, or think you are in the way. I would like for you to stay here. But if you want to go, I would not want to stop you.¡±


    ¡°Kyuu¡­ Kyau-kyau!¡±


    ¡°Hehe. If you say so. Very well. Father, Sherry says that she wants to stay here with me. The reason¡­is that she gets to eat delicious food here¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha. Food, eh? In that case, you will have to continue to provide her with good food, so she will not want to leave. Of course, you cannot feed her too much either, or it might upset Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    After barking, Sherry licked Ms. ire¡¯s nose and cheek.


    It was her way of showing affection.


    Ms. ire rxed with a smile and told us that Sherry wanted to stay.


    I could see that she was relieved about Sherry¡¯s decision.


    Even if it was more because of the food.


    ¡°So if you are staying with ire, that means you will continue to be trained by Leo.¡±


    ¡°Kyuu¡­¡±


    Sherry did not sound happy when Mr. Ekenhart reminded her about that.


    I suppose she had forgotten.


    ¡°So, good Leo. Sherry will fight orcs and other monsters in the forest. As for food¡­ It will be secured on location, as you said. Of course, you can leave the cooking to us.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°¡­Kyuu¡­¡±


    ¡°So, as for the next thing¡­¡±


    Now that the business with Sherry was finished, the next was Liza.


    And so along with Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian, I told her about the dangers of the forest.


    ¡°What do you want to do, Liza?¡±


    ¡°So you and mama will be away for some time? ¡­Okay.¡±


    ¡°Liza. You don¡¯t have to stay if you don¡¯t want to. Leo will be there, and you won¡¯t be in the way.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    After finishing the exnation, I looked straight at Liza and asked her the question.


    She thought about it for a moment, and while looking at the floor, said that she was fine.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 466

    Chapter 466


    More people would be going to the forest


    ¡°Wait a minute, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Ms. ire?¡±


    As I looked at Liza and waited for her answer, Ms. ire suddenly interrupted me.


    ¡°Well, uh¡­ If little Liza stayed at the mansion, then she would be alone.¡±


    ¡°But¡­well. As long as you and Ms. Lyra are here¡­¡±


    ¡°I am going to the forest with Sherry.¡±


    ¡°ire!?¡±


    ¡°Lady ire!?¡±


    Apparently, Ms. ire was going to the forest as well.


    Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian were surprised by this sudden deration.


    Indeed, she had not been mentioned earlier when discussing who would go. And so no one expected this.


    ¡°Why are you so surprised, father? And you too, Sebastian. I¡¯ve been to the forest before, and am quite experienced. So I should be quite useful to have around. Besides, did you really think that I would let Tilura go without my supervision?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­indeed. But it is dangerous.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Lady ire. There is no reason for you to put yourself in danger, when you can stay here¡­¡±


    ¡°I understand that. but isn¡¯t it the same with all of you? And while I don¡¯t think we should rely on her too much, there is also Leo. Isn¡¯t that right?¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wou!¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was weak when it came to Ms. ire.


    Sebastian tried to persuade her to stay as well, but Ms. ire did not back down and then addressed Leo.


    Leo was puzzled at first, but then nodded reassuringly.


    ¡°Even good Leo¡­ Still, ire¡­¡±


    ¡°Father, Sherry is going, isn¡¯t she? Then it is only natural for me to see the growth of my familiar. That is how our bond will grow stronger.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­mmm¡­¡±


    ¡°Kyau, kyau!¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart tried to argue, but Ms. ire kept going in.


    And when he finally fell silent, Sherry barked happily.


    ¡°Besides, Mr. Takumi told me¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi? He told you to go to the forest?¡±


    ¡°He would not tell me to go to a dangerous forest. No, he told me to act more freely. And so that is what I will do.¡±


    ¡°¡­It is true that you are often too harsh on yourself, ire¡­ But perhaps now is not the time¡­ So it¡¯s your fault, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ Ahaha¡­¡±


    I did not expect her to bring up our conversation from the afternoon.


    Mr. Ekenhart was now ring at me, and I could only chuckle in reply.


    Sebastian was also sighing and shaking his head.


    ¡°¡­If ire is going to the forest, then Anneliese must go as well.¡±


    ¡°What!?¡±


    Ms. Anne had been drinking her tea quietly, but her eyes bulged at the sudden mention of her name.


    ¡°If I, Sebastian, Tilura, Mr. Takumi, Leo and even ire go to the forest¡­then there will be no one left here to monitor Anneliese. And while I doubt she will do any mischief, I was still given charge of her. And so it would be bad if no one was watching her.¡±


    ¡°That¡­couldn¡¯t you just say you kept an eye on her? It¡¯s not as if anyone rted to the royal family is here¡­¡±


    ¡°While I enjoy jokes, I do not like to lie. And I will not send in a false report. In other words, it is decided. Anne will go to the forest.¡±


    ¡°¡­But¡­myfortable room¡­ Ms. ire, you will rue the day!¡±


    ¡°You should spend more time outside the house anyway.¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    While Sebastian would probably be able to do something about it, Mr. Ekenhart did not like to deceive people.


    As for Ms. Anne, she was terribly disappointed to have her ns crumble, as she had been looking forward to staying in the mansion.


    ¡°So, it is decided then¡­ As for Liza, what will you do? Of course, you can stay if you want.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ There are monsters in the forest, aren¡¯t there, papa?¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s right. I went there before, and there were orcs.¡±


    ¡°Orcs¡­?¡±


    While I could have decided for Liza, I wanted to respect her decision.


    Mr. Ekenhart said that he didn¡¯t mind if she stayed here.


    After thinking about it for a moment, Liza started to ask me about the forest.


    When I told her about the orcs, she tilted her head and thought about it.


    Perhaps Liza had never actually seen wild monsters before¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 467

    Chapter 467


    Liza decided what she would do


    ¡°Well, orcs are like this¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh. I see.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I told Liza about the orcs and that they were dangerous monsters that attacked humans.


    While Sebastian looked like he wanted to exin it, I¡¯m sure he would have plenty of other opportunitiester.


    Liza nodded understandingly, and then Leo barked and told her that orcs were just food.


    Leo¡­only you thought like that, because you are so strong.


    I had fought them myself, and felt that they were dangerous. And so I definitely did not see them as food from the beginning.


    They were not livestock, and should not be underestimated.


    ¡°Could it be that¡­¡±


    ¡°Liza. Have you eaten orc meat before?¡±


    ¡°Yes, maybe¡­ Sometimes my grandfather would bring back some special meat. It might be the same meat, if mama says they are food.¡±


    ¡°¡­While orcs do not live near the town, they might stray close to it sometimes. And they aremon enough in the forest. So perhaps there are people who actively hunt them.¡±


    Her grandfather was Mr. Reyndorf.


    I didn¡¯t know if he was doing it to sell, but apparently, he sometimes hunted orcs and brought back meat.


    But since it was already cut up, she didn¡¯t know for sure that it was orc meat.


    ording to Ms. Isabelle, Mr. Reyndorf was a wanderer, and so it would be no surprise if he encountered orcs on his travels.


    ¡°I only ever saw him bring the meat back, so I want to see where it came from! I¡¯ll go to the forest as well!¡±


    Liza was curious to know where the meat hade from.


    And that feeling was stronger than any fear. Well, as long as we were careful, she should not be in any danger.


    ¡°I see¡­ Very well. Mr. Ekenhart, is that alright?¡±


    ¡°Mm. With ire and now Anneliese apanying us, that is a lot more people than I expected¡­ But it is fine. We do not mean to go deep into the forest anyway.¡±


    ¡°¡­Should we bring more servants as well?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ We will need that much more help. Sebastian, you select a few who can afford to go with us.¡±


    ¡°Certainly¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Will we also need more Loe?¡±


    I wondered, now that there were more people going.


    And that meant we might need more Loe as well.


    It wasn¡¯t just monsters. In the forest, there was the possibility of getting injured in other ways as well.


    That¡¯s what I thought, and so I asked Mr. Ekenhart about it.


    ¡°No, Mr. Takumi. We already have more than enough of it. So you do not have to make any more, understand?¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Yes, I understand.¡±


    Apparently, he thought that we had enough.


    ¡­Perhaps I was being too paranoid about injuries?


    Well, I could always grow some while I am there.


    ¡°Father, what are your ns once we are in the forest?¡±


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right. I talked about it with Mr. Takumi, but I suppose I have to tell the rest of you now, since you are also going.¡±


    It had been discussed only between Mr. Ekenhart, Sebastian and me.


    But now that Ms. ire and Ms. Anne wasing, we had to talk to them about it as well.


    Some time had passed though, and dinner was ready, so we would talk about it while we ate.


    Ms. ire listened to us seriously, but Ms. Anne looked quite depressed, and not even Ms. Helena¡¯s cooking was able to cure her.


    ¡­She should listen though, for her own good¡­ Well, maybe she was listening, regardless of how she looked.


    But Sebastian took no notice of her and exined our ns most cheerfully.


    It more than made up for not being able to tell Liza about the orcs.

 Chapter 468

    Chapter 468


    The anticipation made it difficult to sleep


    After discussions around dinner ended, and we had our tea, I went out to the garden in order to train lightly with Tilura and Mr. Ekenhart.


    It was just a little swing practice, so that we wouldn¡¯t get too tired, since we had a long trip tomorrow.


    Ms. ire, Liza, and Ms. Anne returned to their rooms in order to prepare.


    I had asked Ms. Lyra to take care of Liza and Leo, and so she would make sure that they had packed.


    ¡°Ah, papa. You¡¯re back!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Are you prepared for tomorrow then?¡±


    ¡°Yes, Ms. Lyra helped me! She moves so quickly!¡±


    I took a bath and then returned to my room. And I saw that Liza was ying with Leo by lifting herrge paws into the air.


    When I entered the room, she greeted me cheerfully.


    It sure was nice to have people who were happy to see you¡­


    I then saw that her bag was in the corner, and so I asked if she was ready. Ms. Lyra had seen to it after all.


    Well, it wasn¡¯t like she had much to pack anyway. So it wouldn¡¯t have taken long.


    And Sebastian and the others would prepare most of the other things that we needed.


    I listened to Liza talk happily about Ms. Lyra as I sat next to her on the bed. And then I noticed something.


    There was something familiar on top of Liza¡¯s bag.


    ¡°Liza. That knife¡­ Are you going to take it with you?¡±


    ¡°Yes! It¡¯s important because you bought it for me. Besides, it¡¯s dangerous in the forest, isn¡¯t it? And so I have to bring it!¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    It was the knife that I had bought for Liza when we went shopping in Ractos.


    Not only was it bigger than a fruit knife, it was bigger than a survival knife. And while it was in a sheath, it looked like it was waiting to be used as it sat there.


    Hmm¡­ Well, I suppose it was more practical than a short sword, which she was not used to handling.


    However, it was hard to imagine a child so young wielding it as well.


    ¡°While it is dangerous, you cannot use that knife unless it is necessary, alright?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I know!¡±


    I wasn¡¯t sure if she really did know. But she smiled and nodded.


    Would it be alright?


    I just hoped she didn¡¯t identally hurt herself with it.


    ¡°Leo. I¡¯ll be counting on you. Keep an eye on her.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Liza. While you may keep the knife, you must also never leave Leo¡¯s side.¡±


    ¡°Yes! I¡¯ll stick with mama!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    As long as they were together, she should be fine for the most part.


    Of course, I would also keep an eye on her when I could.


    ¡°Hey, hey. Papa. Could you tell me more about the forest? You¡¯ve been there before, right?¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Well, I suppose you should know more then. Though, I can only tell you what I know.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    And so I decided to tell her about my prior experiences.


    She listened happily and would asionally ask questions that I would answer.


    Leo watched us and wagged her tail gently. Clearly, she was in a good mood.


    And whenever I said something that was wrong, she would bark at me, to let me know.


    ¡­If you are going to be so strict about it, you should have told her yourself, Leo¡­


    ¡°Hmm, Liza. It¡¯s quitete now. You should go to sleep, or you will be tired tomorrow.¡±


    ¡°But I want to talk a little more!¡±


    I had suddenly nced at my watch, and saw that she would usually be asleep at this hour.


    After all, it was already midnight.


    We had talked for quite a long time¡­ And so I showed her my watch and told her to go to sleep.


    But Liza wanted to talk some more.


    Perhaps the anticipation for tomorrow made it difficult to sleep.


    It reminded me of school field trips, where I would be so excited that I couldn¡¯t fall asleep¡­


    But in the end, I would end up sleeping in and nearly bete. And then I would be tired for the whole day.


    ¡°No. You might not be able to get up on time if you don¡¯t sleep now. And if you¡¯rete, it will inconvenience the others.¡±


    ¡°Oh. Okay¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Ah, good night. Leo.¡±


    ¡°¡­Good night, mama.¡±


    While Liza looked disappointed, I made her lie down in the bed.


    Leo then curled up next to her and barked quietly.


    And I put the nket over her andy down as well.


    Unlike her, it would not be a fun excursion. As I was going there to fight monsters.


    While she would ride on Leo as we traveled, I didn¡¯t want others to worry about her, if she was tired.


    So it was important for her to sleep while she could.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 469

    Chapter 469


    We were woken up early in the morning


    ¡°Hmm¡­mmm¡­¡±


    While Liza had closed her eyes, she was still excited, and would not fall asleep immediately.


    However, after muttering for a bit, she finally became quiet.


    And then I could tell by her breathing that she was asleep.


    Before closing my own eyes, I nced at the clock on the desk.


    Nearly an hour had passed. In spite of everything I said, I was also in danger of being tired tomorrow. And so I better hurry up and sleep as well.


    ¡ª


    ¡°Papa! Wake up!¡±


    ¡°Mmm¡­¡±


    I felt my body being shaken and heard Liza¡¯s voice.


    Was it morning already?


    ¡°Hah¡­ Morning, Liza.¡±


    ¡°Good morning, papa!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    When I sat up, I saw that Liza was next to me, and Leo was looking at me beside the bed.


    They looked rather pleased as I greeted them. And then I turned to the window.


    ¡°¡­It seems a bit early?¡±


    ¡°But it¡¯s already bright, so it¡¯s morning!¡±


    ¡°I guess that¡¯s true, but¡­¡±


    While light wasing in through the windows, the sun was still pretty low in the sky.


    It wasn¡¯t even seven o¡¯clock yet¡­ So there was still some time before breakfast.


    ¡°Besides, we¡¯re going to the forest today! And so I thought we would be able to go earlier if I got up quickly¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ While it¡¯s good to get up early¡­it won¡¯t change our schedule.¡±


    ¡°It won¡¯t?¡±


    ¡°Aye. Everyone has to prepare, after all.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Liza was really looking forward to going to the forest.


    While there were monsters, and it was dangerous¡­I suppose it was still like ying for her.


    Regardless, there were now over ten people going, and they all had to get ready.


    Liza looked quite disappointed that all of her efforts had been for nothing.


    Leo brushed her nose against her and barked consolingly.


    Hmm¡­ Not only did she have trouble sleeping, but she got up early¡­ I had done that before, so I understood how she felt.


    ¡°Well, it cannot be helped. For now, you should just wash up and get ready. Can you do that?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Tilura usually helps me, but I know the way now.¡±


    ¡°Alright, go and wash your face then. I¡¯m sure you¡¯ll see a servant on the way who can help you.¡±


    ¡°Okay! Mama, let¡¯s go.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Liza was full of energy in spite of not sleeping much. And she nodded obediently and went with Leo to wash up.


    I then stifled a yawn and stretched before moving to the mirror. That was when I noticed something.


    ¡°So that¡¯s what I look like when Iugh¡­¡±


    My reflection looked sleepy, but the corners of my mouth were raised in a smile.


    I was just happy to see that Liza was so excited.


    But it was weird tough while alone in a room¡­ And so I quickly prepared for the day.


    ¡°Papa, what are you going to do?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    After Liza and Leo returned, we went out into the garden as we waited for breakfast time.


    Liza and Leo looked a little puzzled as they followed me. And so I answered with a smile.


    ¡°I just thought it would be nice to get some sun. And you like the fresh air, don¡¯t you?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I do!¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    They had been sunbathing yesterday, and Liza always looked happier when they were outside.


    While we had to be careful not to get tired, there should be no problem with getting a little sun.


    I greeted the butlers who were tending to the herb field, and then we looked for a good ce to rest.


    As the sun was still low, the coolness of the morning remained. And it was the time when the sun was just starting to warm up the air.


    I rarely went out at this time, so it was quite refreshing.


    I suppose I would leave for work quite early back in Japan. But there were many trees around the mansion, and so the air was especially pleasant.


    ¡°Haaa¡­¡±


    ¡°?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Breathing the air here will help you to rx, and you will feel more energetic.¡±


    ¡°My grandfather used to do that! I¡¯ll do it too then! Haaa¡­¡±


    I started to take in deep breaths once I found a good spot, and then Leo and Liza looked at me strangely.


    She then said that she was reminded of her grandfather. Was I acting like an old man then? Well, I would try not to think about it.


    And then Liza started to copy me and take in deep breaths as well.


    For some reason, Leo was doing it as well¡­ Maybe Silver Fenrirs also felt better when doing it?


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 470

    Chapter 470


    Tilura woke upte


    ¡°While it¡¯s nice during the day and night, the morning air is pleasant as well, isn¡¯t it?¡±


    ¡°Yes. ¡­Now that I think about it, grandfather used to say¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm?¡±


    ¡°That you need the morning light to live. And so he always got up early and slept early in the night! He said that he would take in a lot of light and gain the strength to face the day!¡±


    ¡°I see. So that¡¯s what Mr. Reyndorf said.¡±


    Liza always looked very happy when she talked about Mr. Reyndorf.


    And the fur of her brown tail and ears seemed to shine golden in the sunlight.


    ¡°Alright, today¡­ We are going to the forest. And I¡¯ll do my best there!¡±


    ¡°Me too!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    We shouted as the sun slowly rose into the sky.


    It felt nice to raise your voice like this in the morning.


    Liza and Leo copied me, and then we allughed.


    Like this, we spent the time rxing until breakfast.


    While I had onlye out on a whim, so that Liza would have something to do after getting up early¡­she seemed to end up enjoying it a lot.


    Even the butlers and maids had smiled as they watched herughing.


    We had even exercised a little, but not to a degree that would make us tired.


    It was mostly like the morning exercises I used to hear on the radio.


    Leo couldn¡¯t copy it, so she had to just watch, but Liza seemed to enjoy moving around.


    She really was energetic¡­ I suppose it was because she was a beastkin.


    ¡°By the way, Mr. Takumi. I heard Liza¡¯s voice outside earlier. Was she doing something?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. I heard Mr. Takumi and Leo outside as well. And that woke me right up¡­¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ Yes. I¡¯m sorry about that¡­¡±


    After spending time with Leo and Liza in the garden, I went to the dining room, when Ms. ire and Mr. Ekenhart looked rather puzzled.


    Ms. Anne was ring at me, as if to say that I had disturbed her sleep.


    I suppose shouting out loud had been a bad idea¡­ Even though the sun was up, it was not good to disturb others while they were in bed.


    I would have to be more careful..


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting!¡±


    ¡°You¡¯rete, Tilura. Are you sure you won¡¯t eat breakfast?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m not hungry, so I¡¯ll be fine!¡±


    After we finished breakfast, we enjoyed some tea and rested. And then we finished our preparations and gathered in the entrance hall.


    It was then that Tilura finally appeared.


    Apparently, Tilura had been so nervous about going to the forest that she could not sleep.


    Not only did she not get up for breakfast, but she would not wake up even when the maids went to call her.


    I was a little concerned about her not eating breakfast, but I suppose it was better than not getting enough sleep.


    Besides, Sebastian was talking to Ms. Helena about packing some food for her to eat on the way, so it would probably be fine.


    ¡°Alright. Everyone is here now. It is time to depart.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart said after seeing that everyone was gathered, and all preparations were finished.


    There was me, Liza, Leo, Sherry, Mr. Ekenhart, Ms. ire, Tilura and Ms. Anne.


    As for the servants, there were three butlers including Sebastian, and three maids including Ms. Lyra.


    As for guards, Phillip, Nichs, and Johanna were among the eight.


    There were more than I expected, but this time, they needed two of them to take the horses back to the mansion.


    Unlike the previous time, there were many more horses, and so it was better to take them back then to keep them there.


    ¡°Well, please take care of the herbs while I¡¯m gone. And Milina, you¡¯ll have to deal with Nick.¡±


    ¡°Yes, certainly. Leave it to us.¡±


    ¡°Yes, master! I will also watch the fields, so do not worry about them!¡±


    I left the herbs fields to Ms. Gelda and the servants, and also handed Milina some herbs I had made in advance, so that she could pass them to Nick.


    After all, Mr. Kalis might run out of them.


    I had also said that they could take some from the fields if it was not enough.


    Of course, they would have to process them before they could be sold, but Milina knew how to do it, so it should be fine¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 471

    Chapter 471


    We departed for the Fenrir Forest


    ¡°Farewell, everyone! We will be waiting for your safe return!¡±


    As the servants saw us off, I left the mansion with Mr. Ekenhart and the others.


    While I was used to it, Ms. Anne was still surprised every time the servants raised their voices in unison like that.


    ¡­Now that I thought about it, she pretty much never left the mansion. So that was why she rarely heard it.


    Outside of the mansion, there was a fancy carriage, a simple one, and several horses.


    Liza and I sat on Leo¡¯s back, while Mr. Ekenhart, Tilura, Ms. ire and Ms. Anne got into the carriage.


    And then the servants got into the in carriage, while the guards climbed onto their horses.


    ¡°Now let us depart!¡±


    Said Sebastian, who drove the front carriage, and the party began to move forward.


    Leo waited for a moment and then followed after then.


    She liked to let them go ahead, and then show them how she could catch up in an instant.


    As for Sherry, Liza was holding her, so that she could watch Leo run.


    This was Leo¡¯s idea. She wanted Sherry to learn how to act like a fenrir when outside.


    In fact, Leo actually wanted Sherry to run to the forest, but since it was too far, she had topromise.


    Leo¡¯s main purpose was to strengthen Sherry. But she would not be able to fight the orcs if she was tired.


    ¡°Everyone is dressed differently from usual!¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Well, it¡¯s not easy going to the forest. You could have left your hat behind too, Liza. After all, it might get dirty.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ I don¡¯t want it to get dirty, but I like to wear it outside. Because you bought it for me!¡±


    While we were riding, Liza noted how everyone was dressed differently from usual.


    I was also wearing clothes that would be easy to move in while navigating through the forest.


    No such clothes had been prepared for Liza, because she wasn¡¯t there to fight.


    Still, she was wearing her favorite hat.


    She had been wearing it inside of the mansion at first, but as it felt quite strange, she only wore it when going out into the garden now.


    Well, she could always have it washedter. And we could have it repaired or just buy a new one if something happened to it.


    As I thought of such things, I recalled how the others were dressed.


    All of them, including the nonbatants, were wearing clothes made of leather, perhaps as a precaution.


    It must be for ease of movement and defense¡­ Even Ms. Anne was wearing it.


    And those with longer hair had it tied in the back so it wouldn¡¯t get in the way.


    While some of the guards carried spears, in general, it seemed like they intended to fight with swords.


    As the trees would get in the way, it would be much easier to handle a shorter sword.


    Simrly, for the sake of movement, the guards were wearing leather armor, whereas they usually wore armor made of metal.


    Though, it was much thicker than what the servants wore, and covered their whole body.


    Ms. ire was wearing the same thing she worest time.


    The only one that was surprising was Tilura.


    As there was no armor for someone of her height, it had been made by special order.


    And then there was Ms. Anne¡­


    She had been so proud of the rolls in her hair, and had added ribbons so that Liza would like her. But her hair was straight now.


    It was a little strange, seeing her like this.


    Her hair had already been long when rolled. But now that it was straight, it would probably read her feet. And so she had to wrap it around her head several times before tying it into a ponytail that reached her shoulders.


    ¡°Papa! Mama is so fast!¡±


    ¡°Aye, she is.¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    Liza¡¯s joyousughter brought me back from my thoughts.


    Sherry also seemed to enjoy feeling the wind against her. And Leo was barking proudly as she ran.


    Before I knew it, she had not only caught up with the carriages, but had passed them. And so she circled around and started to run back towards the group.


    ¡­The fact that Leo could run like this and not get tired was amazing.


    The trip to Range vige was much longer, and she had been running faster as well. So for Leo, this was just like a little warm up.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 472

    Chapter 472


    Tilura¡¯s nerves were calmed


    ¡°Phew¡­¡±


    ¡°Are you tired?¡±


    ¡°No, I¡¯m fine!¡±


    We stopped on the way to the forest, so that the horses could rest. Tilura was leaning against a tree.


    I had asked her, as she looked like she was out of breath¡­ But she replied loudly, as if to assure me that she was fine.


    ¡­She must be quite nervous.


    ¡°Your nerves will only make you more tired. So you should try to rx. See, like Liza.¡±


    ¡°¡­She seems like she¡¯s having so much fun, even though it will be her first time in the forest.¡±


    ¡°Well, that¡¯s true.¡±


    Tilura was tense¡­probably because she was thinking about how she would have to fight against some orcs.


    She must have been nervous in the carriage as well.


    And even though she said that she was fine, she would be quite tired by the time we reached the forest if she stayed like this.


    We would also have to walk through the forest for some time before setting up camp.


    Tilura and I watched Liza, as she seemed to be having fun with Leo and Sherry¡­ If anything, Liza had the opposite problem, and was perhaps a little too rxed.


    I had told her that there were monsters in the forest, and so it was dangerous. But she showed no signs of being on her guard or worrying.


    Ms. ire was patting her on the head now, and she was smiling.


    ¡°In any case, today, we¡¯re going to enter the forest and make for the river. There, we will camp for the night, and then we will search for orcs on the following day. So it¡¯s too early to be nervous.¡±


    ¡°But¡­ We might encounter orcs on the way.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true. It actually happenedst time¡­ But even if it did, the guards and Leo will deal with them.¡±


    Tilura would not be fighting any orcs today.


    And so I tried to tell her that she didn¡¯t need to be so nervous yet. But I suppose it could not be helped, as it was her first time.


    ¡°We will be going soon!¡±


    ¡°Yes, I understand!¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    As I thought about what to do, Sebastian called to us, saying that we would continue our journey to the forest.


    Hmm¡­


    ¡°Excuse me, Mr. Ekenhart. It¡¯s about Tilura¡­¡±


    ¡°What about her? Well, I can see that she is quite nervous.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I think that at this rate, she will be very tired by the time we arrive. Do you think I could let her ride on Leo?¡±


    ¡°On Leo? Indeed, that might help her to rx a little.¡±


    I called out to Mr. Ekenhart, right as he was about to return to his carriage.


    Apparently, even he could tell that Tilura was nervous.


    Well, he was her father, so he was observant.


    In any case, I suggested that she might like to ride on Leo.


    He readily agreed, and so I called Tilura.


    ¡°What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Tilura. Do you want to ride on Leo to the forest? I¡¯m sure it will be more fun than going by carriage.¡±


    ¡°¡­Are you sure?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. I¡¯m sure Leo will wee it. Right, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    Tilura had looked puzzled at first, but her face brightened with expectation when I made the suggestion.


    So she wanted to ride on Leo after all¡­ Now that I thought about it, she had only ever ridden on Leo in the back garden.


    Leo barked as if to say it was a brilliant idea, and so it was decided.


    I just hoped that it would be effective in calming her nerves a little¡­


    I now had to exin it to Liza.


    ¡°Liza. Sorry, but could you ride in the carriage with Ms. ire and the others? It will be too crowded for all of us to ride on Leo.¡±


    ¡°Oh, okay! I¡¯ve never ridden in a carriage before!¡±


    ¡°I see. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Liza!¡±


    Both Tilura and Liza were still small.


    And so I had to ride with them so that they did not get flung off of Leo.


    At least in the garden, Leo did not run too fast.


    And while it was possible that Tilura would be fine, I did not want to take any chances.


    However, I could not support both of them at the same time, and so I had Liza ride in the carriage.


    Liza nodded in agreement, and then ran off to the carriage where Ms. ire was waiting.


    As it was her first time, she seemed rather excited about it.


    ¡°Wow! It¡¯s so fast!¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    Tilura shouted excitedly as soon as Leo took off.


    Leo could tell that she was happy, and she barked back cheerfully.


    While she could not see Tilura¡¯s expression, she could probably tell by her voice that she had rxed a little.


    ¡°He-hey, Leo. Slow down a little. You¡¯re leaving the others far behind!¡±


    ¡°Wou? Wuff!¡±


    ¡°I didn¡¯t know that Leo was this fast!!¡±


    Perhaps it was for Tilura¡¯s benefit, but Leo got carried away and started to run too fast, so that there was quite a distance between us and the others.


    While we could just go to the forest first, the others might worry about us.


    Especially Mr. Ekenhart, who was anxious about Tilura¡­ It probably had to do with his own experience with riding on Leo at such a great speed¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 473

    Chapter 473


    We arrived at the forest


    ¡°¡­Thank you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? What is it?¡±


    ¡°You let me ride on Leo because I was too nervous, right?¡±


    ¡°Hmm. Well, while you¡¯ve ridden on Leo in the garden, you never rode on her while she was running outside. And so I just thought you might enjoy it.¡±


    ¡°Hehe. I see. Well, thank you for letting me ride on Leo.¡±


    ¡°Was it fun?¡±


    ¡°Yes, very fun!¡±


    Apparently, Tilura had caught on to my intentions.


    Still, it would look bad if I admitted it now, and so I pretended to be ignorant.


    But judging by the way that sheughed, she was probably not fooled. Regardless, she thanked me again.


    And with a smile, she said that she had a lot of fun.


    She looked a lot like Ms. ire when sheughed¡­they were sisters, after all.


    Was it rude of me to think that it was good she didn¡¯tugh like her father?


    Now that we had arrived at the edge of the forest, we decided to eat lunch before entering it. And so we had to gather some branches to make a fire.


    The horses and carriages were left to the butler and guards who would stay, and I and the other guards gathered the branches.


    Mr. Ekenhart helped us as well, and seemed to be enjoying himself.


    Once we had enough, it was time to make the fire.


    But when one of the butlers was about to do it with fire magic, Leo stopped him.


    Just likest time, she wanted to do it herself. She did not have many opportunities to use magic, after all¡­ Aside from wind magic..


    Well, perhaps it would be good for relieving stress. And so I let Leo do it.


    The others watched her with great interest.


    They had not seen Leo use fire magic before.


    Though, Mr. Ekenhart had seen Leo create magic water, when she made it for Liza.


    He really was curious¡­ I suppose that¡¯s where Ms. ire got it from.


    ¡°That¡¯s amazing, Leo!¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­ Good Leo, can you also make it more powerful?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°She can even use magic¡­ How astonishing¡­¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Leo. Please look forward to lunch.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyau? Kyu¡­?¡±


    ¡°Wou-wou!¡±


    Tilura was delighted when she saw the fire, and Mr. Ekenhart asked a question.


    Even Ms. Anne looked on with surprise from a distance. And Ms. Lyra thanked Leo.


    Sherry was also surprised, but Leo was telling her that she could do it too if she tried.


    ¡°Everyone seems to be having fun.¡±


    Ms. ire muttered as she watched the others.


    As for Liza, she was currently with Sebastian, as she wanted to thank the horses for pulling her.


    ¡°I watched Leo use magicst time as well¡­ And was very impressed.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°You two get along so well. I suppose it is because you were together beforeing to this ce¡­ But normally, she would be considered a terrifying monster, you know?¡±


    It was hard for me to imagine it.


    Well, Leo was very big and reliable. And I would never be able to match her.


    But she was also someone who yed with children and devoured sausages.


    ¡­And had originally been a maltese dog.


    ¡°¡­Not only are you two equal, but it even seems like Leo obeys you. That makes you look very great indeed, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Me? Oh, not at all!¡±


    I was just a sryman a short while ago. I was nothingpared to a duke.


    Really, I was no different than the average resident of Ractos town.


    The only thing that set me apart was Leo and the Gift.


    ¡°In that case, should I bring Tilura and father over here, so we can kneel in front of you?¡±


    ¡°Please don¡¯t do that. I wouldn¡¯t know what to do¡­¡±


    Ms. ire asked with a childish, mischievous look.


    ¡°Hehe, of course. And while I would have loved to see the troubled look on your face, I don¡¯t want you to hate me.¡±


    ¡°¡­I would never hate you, Ms. ire¡­¡±


    ¡°Really? Do you mean it¡­?¡±


    Apparently, she did not believe me, and so she leaned forward and peered into my face as she asked the question.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 474

    Chapter 474


    We made our way to the river


    ¡°It¡¯s true. Besides, you wouldn¡¯t really do anything that would trouble someone.¡±


    What was this¡­ Ever since we talked about going to the forest, Ms. ire seemed to act differently¡­


    Perhaps it had to do with the conversation we had in the garden before.


    She had been quite strict with herself before. And so my words may have made her feel less constrained?


    She wasn¡¯t one to make fun of me like that before. But she also looked quite cute doing it.


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah! Mr. Ekenhart?¡±


    ¡°Lunch is ready. Sorry to disturb you two while you were having fun.¡±


    ¡°It is thanks to Lyra. Now, let us go, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Uh, yes.¡±


    Appparently, Mr. Ekenhart had been watching us¡­ I wonder how much he had heard?


    Well, it was nothing bad, but it was still embarrassing.


    Not only that, but Mr. Ekenhart was grinning while telling us that lunch was ready.


    And though he apologized, he did not look sorry at all. Which was like Mr. Ekenhart.


    I wondered if Ms. ire would look at him reproachfully¡­but she did not seem to notice as she pulled me by the hand towards the bonfire.


    I guess she didn¡¯t care? But when I nced at her face, she seemed to be blushing a little.


    Before we started eating, Liza asked me why I was smiling. But since I didn¡¯t really know the reason myself, I made up a random excuse.


    ¡­I suppose it was because I had talked to Ms. ire and seen an unusual side to her?


    Leo looked at me and sighed, but continued to eat the sausages that Ms. Lyra had cooked for her.


    ¡°Now, please take care of the rest.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll go then.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Leave it to u.¡±


    We cleaned up after eating and prepared to go into the forest.


    The fire was left as is, for the guards who would remain here.


    Once everyone was ready, Sebastian and Mr. Ekenhart talked to the people who would stay.


    There were two guards, one butler and one maid.


    After letting the horse rest for a while, they would then return to the mansion.


    As there were many horses and multiple carriages, they needed four people to stay.


    The guards replied, and the butler and maid bowed deeply as we entered the forest¡­.


    ¡°Are you alright, Tilura?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I¡¯m still fine!¡±


    As we walked through the forest, Mr. Ekenhart called to Tilura, who was next to him.


    He was concerned because this was her first time in the forest.


    We were headed to the same camp site that we went tost time. And as they were experienced, Phillip and Nichs took the lead.


    The two were using their swords to cut down any branches or tall grass that were in our way.


    This made it easier for everyone else to walk.


    Sebastian and one other butler walked behind them, and they were also using short swords to cut down vines and nts.


    And then Mr. Ekenhart and Tilura followed them, and then Ms. ire, Ms. Anne, Johanna and Lyra.


    Next was Leo, who carried Liza. I walked next to them, while the maids and guards took the rear.


    Sherry was walking between Ms. ire and Leo.


    As we were in the forest now, she was to exercise, and not ride on Leo the whole time.


    ¡°¡­This is a nostalgic smell!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Liza was smelling the scent of the trees.


    Beastkin had better hearing than humans. Perhaps it was also true with their sense of smell.


    I understood that Leo and Sherry had sharp senses¡­but Liza¡¯s nose looked like a normal human nose.


    Also, she said it smelled nostalgic¡­ Surely that also had to be rted to being a beastkin.


    Apparently, they used to hunt a lot. It might be instinct then. I would not be surprised.


    As for Leo, she was wagging her tail and seemed to be in a good mood, just likest time.


    I didn¡¯t know if it was because this was the fenrir forest, or she would be like this in any forest. But it was a good thing.


    ¡­Sherry did not seem too happy¡­ But I suppose it was because she would have to train with Leoter.


    ¡°¡­When the trees are this close together, it gets dark¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed. But ording to Sebastian, it gets even darker, deeper into the forest.¡±


    ¡°Then I won¡¯t be able to see anything¡­¡±


    ¡°In such cases, you use magic. Well, or a torch. But if you have magic, you can have light for as long as you have mana.¡±


    Up ahead, I could hear Mr. Ekenhart and Tilura talking.


    Apparently, Tilura was amazed by how dark it was.


    But like Mr. Ekenhart said, it was quite brightpared to other parts of the forest. Like where we found Sherry.


    After all, I could see my feet.


    Still, while Ms. ire had gotten tired quite quickly in the forest, Tilura was still fine.


    I¡¯m sure that part of it was excitement, but it must also have to do with her daily training.


    I also didn¡¯t feel as tiredpared tost time.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 475

    Chapter 475


    Things went smoothly this time


    ¡°Anne. Walk more normally. ¡­Ah, don¡¯t grab my arm like that!¡±


    ¡°Ms. ire, I cannot go on¡­¡±


    While Tilura and Mr. Ekenhart seemed like a family on a hiking trip, Ms. ire and Ms. Anne were bickering.


    The reason was that Ms. Anne was exhausted already.


    Ms. ire had gotten the hang of itst time, so she did not seem particrly tired. But Ms. Anne was not used to being in the forest, and would constantly trip over the roots of trees.


    Besides, she stayed in the mansion most of the time and hardly exercised, so it was no surprise that shecked energy.


    That being said, she would likely refuse if I suggested that she ride on top of Leo.


    She was still afraid¡­


    The only reason she did not stop and rest now was because Leo was walking behind her.


    ¡°Now, we are almost there, Anne. Keep walking! And stop grabbing me!¡±


    ¡°Ohhh¡­ I can¡¯t¡­¡±


    ¡°Lady Anneliese, you will be able to rest soon. Do not give up.¡±


    After walking a little further, we could hear the sounds of the running river.


    Though, since there were a lot of people and a lot of sounds, you had to strain your ears to hear it.


    At this point, Ms. Anne was practically leaning on Ms. ire¡¯s back, while Ms. Lyra pushed her encouragingly from behind.


    Johanna did not join them, as she was on guard duty. But she still chuckled at the sight.


    Well, at least she hadn¡¯t stopped¡­


    ¡°Nothing had appeared¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Last time, you encountered orcs on the way, didn¡¯t you?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Though, good Leo walked in the lead, and defeated them swiftly before anyone else could.¡±


    ¡°While I heard that there are many orcs in the forest, I suppose one doesn¡¯t encounter them that quickly¡­ And we have Mr. Takumi¡¯s herbs this time, and cannot sense anything. So they must not be around.¡±


    I heard Tilura and Mr. Ekenhart talking up ahead.


    They were asking Sebastian about the orcs.


    Mr. Ekenhart sounded a little disappointed. But I thought we should be happy that there would not be any unnned encounters.


    In fact, several of us had eaten sense enhancing herbs before entering the forest.


    They were herbs that made it easier to detect the presence of others.


    Aside from me, they were eaten by Mr. Ekenhart, five of the guards, and Sebastian.


    Leo didn¡¯t need to eat them.


    But thanks to the herbs, I could sense movement quite far away. But it seemed to be just the trees moving in the wind.


    I did not sense any monsters, like orcs or trolls.


    ¡°So there are no orcs¡­ How disappointing¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, we will start searching for them tomorrow. I¡¯m sure it will not be hard. Still, I don¡¯t know why it¡¯s something you would look forward to¡­¡±


    While Tilura was merely puzzled that we didn¡¯t see any, Liza seemed disappointed.


    Leo also sighed in agreement.


    While Liza was merely curious, Leo saw them as food, so the sentiment wasn¡¯t exactly the same¡­


    I suppose she wanted to eat orc meat again. Ms. Lyra had cooked it for her previously.


    From what I understood, Ms. Helena sometimes cooked with orc meat as well.


    Of course, food tastes differently depending on who made it and where¡­ Perhaps Leo just have a preference for Ms. Lyra¡¯s more simple style of cooking.


    That would not really be surprising. Ms. Helena¡¯s food was more luxurious¡­which was not something Leo was used to.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff?¡±


    ¡°No, I don¡¯t think that you should go out and look for them. Don¡¯t worry, we brought food with us. And we will find orcs tomorrow, without a doubt.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Leo must have really wanted to eat some, as she suggested that she could go out and hunt some orcs.


    But I didn¡¯t think that we should split up yet. And it would be best for all of us to continue on to the river.


    Leo barked as if disappointed.


    I suppose being in the forest reminded her of the taste¡­which was like pork.


    ¡°Hehe. Good Leo must be hungry then.¡±


    ¡°Haha. It looks like it. She really enjoyed the orc meatst time, when Ms. Lyra cooked it.¡±


    The maid walking behind meughed after observing our conversation.


    And so I exined it to her.


    ¡°So that¡¯s why. Please don¡¯t worry, good Leo. You will have plenty of delicious food for dinner. ¡­Well, Ms. Lyra will see to it¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Ms. Lyra¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, I can only help. Like with the washing and cutting¡­ But I am not very good with the rest¡­ I don¡¯t know why, but there are strict rules that I can only assist with the cooking.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s that /tigertransations


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 476

    Chapter 476


    We arrived at the riverside campsite


    How bad could the food be when she is cooking it by herself¡­?


    Did she just put anything in it, or mistake salt for sugar? Something like that?


    Or maybe she just liked to make everything too spicy¡­


    It honestly intrigued me, but I suppose it would be better to avoid tasting it.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know why it happens¡­ But in any case, I will do my best to help Ms. Lyra.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­that is probably for the best.¡±


    The maid looked like she herself was puzzled, which was very odd.


    Regardless, they would be cooking for a lot of people now, and they had to make something that everyone could eat.


    While Mr. Ekenhart might find it amusing, Leo and Sebastian would probably be angry.


    ¡°I can see the river!¡±


    Phillip, who was in the lead, alerted the rest of us.


    While I had been concentrating on talking, I could indeed hear the sounds of running water.


    And when I looked up ahead, I saw that the trees cleared out up ahead, and the area seemed to be filled with sunlight.


    By the river, where the grass was shorter, we all put down our baggage.


    It was all ced in one area, where one of the butlers could keep an eye on them.


    ¡°Hmm. This is a good spot. The sounds of the water areforting.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Leo seems to be having fun.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart took in the scene around us while listening to the flowing river.


    The air tasted delicious, and the running water was calming. It was a great ce to rx.


    In Japan, this would be the perfect way to get away from the busy city and enjoy nature¡­ Like a popr campsite.


    Unfortunately, there were orcs here, so it wasn¡¯t safe.


    I answered Mr. Ekenhart while turned to the river and narrowing my eyes.


    Leo had already jumped into the water, and was swimming around happily. Sherry looked like she was drowning though.


    Sherry¡­ Do you need help?


    I was about to rush towards her, but then Leo noticed and pulled her out of the water.


    While she was panting, she seemed to be fine now.


    So, Sherry couldn¡¯t swim.


    ¡°Oh, Liza seems to want to go in the river?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. ¡­Is she able to swim?¡±


    Liza had chased after Leo and gone to the edge of the river.


    She was dipping her toes in and then pulling out as if she wasn¡¯t sure about what to do.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know¡­ Wait? Didn¡¯t she say, Mr. Takumi, that she had never seen clean water before?¡±


    ¡°Now that you mention it, she did say something like that¡­¡±


    Yes¡­she said that while we were making our way back to the mansion.


    Liza had generally drunk mud and rain water. And so she was surprised by the clean water that Leo created with magic.


    I was sure that Mr. Reyndorf gave her decently clean water, but after he died, she became a target, and that was the only way to quench her thirst.


    It was amazing that she did not be sick.


    In any case, as someone who had not seen such clear water before, seeing a river like this must be quite the shock.


    The only reason she was probably trying to enter it, was because of curiosity, and the fact that Leo seemed to be having a lot of fun swimming in it.


    ¡°While she should be fine with good Leo there¡­it is a little dangerous¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. I should go then.¡±


    ¡°Mmm.¡±


    And so I left Mr. Ekenhart and headed towards Liza.


    ¡°Your Grace, we are going to start pitching the tents now. You remember that the condition foring here, was that everyone helps, regardless of rank?¡±


    ¡°¡­That¡¯s true¡­ And with Mr. Takumi gone¡­¡±


    I thought I heard Sebastian call to Mr. Ekenhart after I left, but I paid them no mind and continued on my way to where Liza was.


    Mr. Ekenhart, please do your best¡­


    ¡°Liza. Are you alright?¡±


    ¡°Papa! Yes, I¡¯m fine¡­ But I¡¯ve never seen so much water before¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed. It¡¯s a lot more water than in the baths in the mansion¡­and less hot.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    Liza smiled when she heard me, but quickly turned back to the river, and her expression darkened.


    So, seeing this much water really did fill her with both surprise and fear.


    Well, it was probably a good thing. Or else she might have just jumped into the river without hesitation.


    She would certainly not be able to swim¡­ And while Leo would save her if she started to drown, it would be best if she was not put in any such danger.


    After all, it might end up being a traumatic experience.


    I would not want her to hate baths like Leo did.


    ¡°Well,rge bodies of water can be dangerous. After all, you cannot breathe underwater.¡±


    ¡°Hm¡­ I guess¡­¡±


    And so I did my best to exin to her the dangers of water.


    Of course, I didn¡¯t go too far, as I didn¡¯t want her to be scared either.


    It was during times like these that I would be happy for Sebastian¡¯s help¡­ Unfortunately, he was busy with the tents.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 477

    Chapter 477


    Liza was carried by Leo


    ¡°¡­Water is amazing, huh?¡±


    ¡°Yes. And when there is a lot of it, it can be dangerous. So you have to be careful. Let me see¡­ Hey, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wou!?¡±


    ¡°¡­Kyu¡­kyu¡­¡±


    As I wanted Leo to help Liza, I turned and called to her while she was swimming.


    Leo immediately turned and barked in reply.


    Only, she had been holding Sherry in her mouth, and so she dropped her into the water. And then she started drowning again¡­


    And while Leo picked Sherry up, she was whimpering sadly as she hung there.


    I doubted she wanted to go into the river again¡­


    ¡°Can youe over here? You don¡¯t have to reply, or you might drop Sherry!¡±


    Leo nodded and stood up out of the water and rang back towards us.


    ¡°Kyau¡­kyau¡­¡±


    ¡°Good, good.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Sherry was released on drynd, and she sat there weakly and caught her breath.


    Liza was worried, and petted her wet fur gently in order to calm her down.


    After putting Sherry down in a safe ce, Leo turned to me questioningly with a tilt of her head.


    ¡°It¡¯s about Liza. She wants to go in the river, but is scared, because this is her first time seeing one. So, can you look after her, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff-wuff. Wou?¡±


    ¡°You¡¯ll be with me mama? Then I won¡¯t be scared!¡±


    When I asked her, Leo nodded immediately and moved her face close to Liza.


    Liza looked up and smiled. All of the anxiety about going into the river had vanished from her face now.


    Yes, having someone with you would be quite a relief.


    While I could have gone with her, I did not want to get wet right now.


    Besides, I had to help with preparations at the campsite, as well as other duties.


    I could not just y with Liza and Leo and leave everything to the others.


    ¡°Alright, I¡¯ll leave her to you, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    ¡°What!?¡±


    And so I left them, and started to walk towards Sebastian and the others.


    Leo nodded and barked towards Liza.


    And then Liza let out a gasp, and so I turned around to see¡­that she was hanging, while Leo held her up by the cor.


    ¡­So that¡¯s how she would protect Liza.


    I wasn¡¯t so sure, and paused for a moment.


    However, Liza seemed like she was having fun, so it shouldn¡¯t be a problem.


    Leo wouldn¡¯t do anything dangerous, and I could hear Lizaughing.


    She had only looked startled at first, because Leo had picked her up so suddenly.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, are you sure that you don¡¯t need to be with them?¡±


    ¡°Ms. ire. Yes, they should be fine with Leo. Though, I was surprised that Sherry cannot swim. But I¡¯m not worried, at least,pared to Ms. Anne¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, I carry Sherry when using the bathtub¡­ So she has not had the chance to learn. As for Anne¡­she is much too tired.¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­hah¡­ You may say that¡­Ms. ire¡­ But it¡¯s¡­hah¡­not my fault¡­¡±


    While I was talking to Ms. ire, I heard someone panting. It was Ms. Anne, who was sitting limply behind her.


    She was sitting on arge rock and leaning forward. She did not even have the strength to raise her head.


    As she could hear our conversation, she did her best to protest while trying to catch her breath.


    Ms. ire had been tired the previous time we came here. But it wasn¡¯t to this degree.


    Ms. Anne¡­clearly needed to exercise more often¡­ As she was practically a shut-in, she did not leave the house or walk around much.


    If we were in the town, she could take breaks, and it would be easier to walk on roads. But I suppose the forest was quite rough for her.


    There were no paved roads in the forest, and she had probably stumbled over rocks numerous times.


    ¡°Sebastian. Is there anything I can do to help?¡±


    I left Ms. Anne and Ms. ire, and called out to Sebastian.


    While Ms. ire had wanted to help as well, she was told to look after Ms. Anne, who might faint at any moment.


    Well, maybe that was an exaggeration, but it did seem best to keep an eye on her.


    Sebastian gave some orders to Nichs and then turned towards me.


    ¡°Ah, Mr. Takumi. What about Leo and the others?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Leo is taking care of them. And so I thought I would help here, if you need? I can¡¯t just let you and the others do everything¡­¡±


    If there was something that I could do to help, then I wanted to do it. That was just my personality, and it helped me calm down.


    ¡°You said thatst time, and volunteered to keep watch. Hmm¡­ Indeed¡­ In that case, could you gather some tree branches to make a fire? As we need more than usual, it is taking some time.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I understand. ¡­.What are they doing over there?¡±


    ¡°Ah, there was a rock that was in the way, and so they are moving it. I was actually going to ask Phillip to help, but His Grace insisted on doing it. Well, at least he has some help.¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­I see¡­¡±


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 478

    Chapter 478


    I decided to keep watch, like thest time


    Sebastian had asked me to gather some tree branches, but before heading out, I turned to another spot that I had been wondering about.


    Near Johanna, who was pitching a tent, I saw that Mr. Ekenhart was trying to pick up arge rock¡­while his face looked very red.


    It seemed like it would be better if he just rolled it. It wasn¡¯t buried in the ground, and was rather rounded.


    Phillip was nearby, and Nichs had been ordered by Sebastian to ce some long, round branches on the grounds. So they were probably just waiting for Mr. Ekenhart to give up.


    I just hoped that he wouldn¡¯t hurt his back¡­


    ¡°Now, since we are finished with that delicious meal, it is time to talk about who will keep watch¡­¡±


    After eating Ms. Lyra¡¯s cooking, we sat around the fire and discussed who would stay up tonight.


    There was one fire for Mr. Ekenhart and us, and another fire for the servants and guards.


    As there were so many people this time, one bonfire was not enough.


    Thankfully, we had gathered a lot of branches.


    ¡°Since there are many people this time, His Grace, Lady ire, and Lady Anne can rest without worry.¡±


    ¡°Mmm.¡±


    There were five guards, and four servants including Sebastian, so they could cover those duties without any problem.


    Mr. Ekenhart nodded, and this time, Ms. ire did not say that she wanted to join.


    And while she was not terribly tired like the previous time, she probably knew that Sebastian would stop her if she volunteered.


    Of course, Ms. Anne wouldn¡¯t offer to help in the first ce.


    She had been able to rest after we arrived at the river, but she was clearly still tired.


    And so she would probably sleep well in the tent, even if it wasn¡¯t her bedroom.


    I had considered giving her some herbs to help her sleep and recover, but it was probably best to not rely on such things.


    I would give some to her tomorrow, if she was still tired after sleeping.


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi, will you help with watch duty?¡±


    ¡°Uh, are you sure? I thought you would say that there were enough people¡­¡±


    Sebastian had asked me the question as I was looking around.


    ¡°Well, it is you, Mr. Takumi. I was sure that you would feel ufortable if we did all of the work. Am I wrong?¡±


    ¡°¡­No, you aren¡¯t.¡±


    Sebastian said that with a smile.


    Indeed, I had felt that way when preparing the tents earlier. I didn¡¯t like to let others do everything for me.


    And Sebastian knew it as well.


    If they were going to allow me to help, then I would do my best.


    Besides, it meant the others would have a little more time to rest.


    ¡°Yes, we will ept your help then. Of course, you will be doing it with Leo. Is that alright?¡±


    ¡°Are you fine with that, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°I want to be with papa and mama too!¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Can you really stay up? Wouldn¡¯t you rather get some sleep?¡±


    The condition was that Leo watched with me, just likest time.


    Though I had improved in my fighting ability, while being trained by Mr. Ekenhart, my detecting ability was still the same.


    And so it would be safer if Leo was with me.


    When I asked Leo, who was sitting next to me while wrapped around Liza, she raised her head and barked, saying that I should leave it to her.


    However, Liza then said that she wanted to join us as well.


    While I was happy at the thought¡­could she really stay up?


    She had stayed uptest night, and woken up early this morning.


    And there was no reason for her stay up and keep watch here


    ¡°I¡¯ll do my best! To be with papa and mama!¡±


    ¡°You can be with us without staying up tonight¡­ Well, fine. But I¡¯ll carry you back to the tent when you fall asleep, alright?¡±


    ¡°Okay!¡±


    ¡°Hehe. She sure is fond of Mr. Takumi and Leo.¡±


    ¡°Well, she is that age when you want to be with your parents.¡±


    Ms. ire had been watching us, and spoke with augh.


    ¡°Well, we will have Mr. Takumi and Leo take the first watch then. That way, they will not have to stay up veryte.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    After hearing our conversation, Sebastian decided that we should take the first watch.


    And so Liza wouldn¡¯t lose much sleep at all.


    After that, no one had any objections, and the order of the others was decided smoothly.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 479

    Chapter 479


    I gazed at the fire with Leo and Liza


    Leo and I would take the first watch, and then it would be Nichs and Sebastian.


    After them, it was Phillip and another guard. Andstly, Johanna, and another guard.


    Each team would watch the fire for about two to three hours, and then they could sleep.


    And in the event that there really was a monster nearby, we would ask Leo to deal with them.


    I had asked her to do it. Not just because of her detecting ability, but also because there was no doubt that she would be able to deal with them.


    Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian agreed to it as well.


    The two other guards who hade with us, seemed rather disappointed, as that was why they hade. But Phillip, Nichs, and Johannaughed andforted them.


    After all, they had seen what had happenedst time, when Leo had quickly gotten up, defeated the orcs, and went back to sleep as if nothing had happened¡­


    Still, I felt a little bad for the guards.


    ¡°The bonfire is strange. The shape keeps changing, doesn¡¯t it?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Fire does not have a fixed shape.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wuff?¡±


    ¡°No, that¡¯s fine¡­¡±


    By the time that everyone started to retire to their tents, Leo, Liza and I sat near the fire and started our watch.


    As we were on watch duty, Liza had attached her knife to her belt. And she was now staring at the mes.


    While we talked about fire, Leo raised her head and offered to do some fire magic.


    Did she really like to use magic so much¡­?


    In any case, it might disturb those who are trying to sleep, so I told her not to.


    We were on watch duty so they could rest. It would not do to make a scene.


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right. Liza. How was the forest?¡±


    ¡°It was my first time seeing so many trees! And the smells were so different, and¡­there were noisesing from far away. Like rustling! Also, birds? The sounds of wings!¡±


    ¡°I think the rustling was probably the wind against the trees and nts. As for birds¡­ I never saw any in the forest. But I suppose they must be somewhere.¡±


    She had talked about the smell as soon as we entered the forest.


    I hadn¡¯t heard anything about bird monsters in the forest, and we had spent quite a long time searching the forest thest time, and hadn¡¯t encountered anything like that.


    Besides, if they were monsters, they would have likely attacked us or other monsters.


    In any case, as Liza had never been in a forest before, everything was interesting and new to her here.


    And since there wasn¡¯t much danger in it, I was d that I brought her instead of making her wait.


    Had she remained in the mansion, then she would not have been able to experience all of this nature and beautiful scenery.


    She was able to see a river for the first time, and enter it with Leo¡¯s help.


    ¡°By the way, Liza. How was the river?¡±


    ¡°Yes, Mama held me securely, so it was fine! Though, I couldn¡¯t swim like her¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha. Well, you can practice little by little.¡±


    She really had been hanging the whole time, as Leo held her. And since it was her first time, that was enough. Otherwise, she might drown, like Sherry.


    Sherry had looked quite sad about not being able to swim, and Ms. ire had tofort her when she returned.


    In any case, apparently, Liza had also tried to swim, but it had been no use.


    It was probably rted to the fact that she was still hanging from Leo¡¯s mouth, but I decided to not say anything.


    Besides, Leo¡­well, swam like a dog. I wasn¡¯t sure if Liza should swim like that as well.


    There were other ways, like the crawl and butterfly¡­ Well, I suppose she just didn¡¯t know.


    Next time, I could teach her¡­ Though, I was not a good swimmer either.


    ¡°Haaaahh¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha. Are you sleepy? You don¡¯t have to stay awake, you know?¡±


    After talking around the fire for some time, Liza yawned as if she was tired.


    And Leo yawned as well.


    While Leo should be fine, it was probably about time that Liza started to fall asleep.


    ¡°¡­No¡­I want to stay awake. I can¡¯t sleep when you and mama are still up. ¡­I want to be with you¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Well, you can sleep whenever you want, okay?¡±


    Liza rubbed her eyes and shook her head, insisting that she was fine.


    I could tell from her voice that she was tired, but I respected her decision.


    I actually wanted her to sleep, but¡­ I also felt happy that she wanted to stay with us for as long as possible.


    Besides, I could just take her to the tent as soon as she falls asleep¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 480

    Chapter 480


    Ms. ire and Mr. Ekenhart came


    I looked at the fire and then looked at the nearby tent. It would be easy enough to carry Liza there.


    Speaking of the tents, there were more of thempared tost time.


    Last time, there were only two, one for men and one for women. But this time there were two for men and two for women.


    Me, Liza, Mr. Ekenhart and Phillip would use one tent, while the two guards, Nichs, Sebastian, and the other butler would use the second one.


    And then Ms. ire, Tilura, Johanna and Sherry would use one tent, while Ms. Lyra and the other maid slept in the other one.


    Liza insisted on sleeping near me or Leo. But Leo was too big to fit in the tent, and Liza could not sleep outside.


    ¡°¡­Mmm¡­¡±


    We were about halfway through the watch now, and Liza seemed like she was at her limits. her eyes were practically closed as she started to doze off.


    I looked down at my watch and saw that it was nearly 1 o¡¯clock. If anything, it was impressive that she had stayed up this long.


    ¡­I suppose it was time to take her to the tent?


    ¡°Liza looks tired? Should I take her back?¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Mr. Ekenhart?¡±


    ¡°And me, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Ms. ire. What happened? Did you have trouble sleeping?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­?¡±


    I had thought that both of them went to sleep¡­and had not noticed them approaching¡­ I suppose it was because I was focused on Liza.


    While I knew that Mr. Ekenhart could be stealthy, could Ms. ire sneak up on people as well?


    After all, she had once snuck out of the mansion without alerting the guards, so that she could go to the forest alone. So perhaps she could do such things a little¡­


    Leo must have noticed them though, as her ears were twitching.


    I should be more careful of my surroundings¡­


    ¡°Sister ire¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh? What a spoiled child.¡±


    While Liza was still sleepy, she waddled up to Ms. ire and hugged her.


    Even though she was tired, her instincts had made her go to someone who would treat her affectionately.


    I suppose it was because of that incident in Ractos. It seemed to have left quite an impression on her.


    Ms. ire hugged her back and then sat down next to Leo.


    And then Liza sat on herp, while still clutching onto her.


    While Ms. ire had sat down, it wasn¡¯t on the ground. She was sitting on one of the logs that had been ced around the fire.


    ¡°Haha. It looks like ire took Liza from you.¡±


    ¡°Well, she is very tired. Ms. ire, just tell me if she is too heavy. And then I will take her to the tent.¡±


    ¡°Yes, but I¡¯m fine. Liza is very light. ¡­Well, not as light as Sherry.¡±


    ¡°Well, she is a lot bigger than Sherry.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhartughed as he sat down to my left, where Liza had been a moment ago.


    Liza had gone right back to sleep it seemed. Clearly she felt rxed and at peace when holding onto Ms. ire and feeling her warmth.


    ¡°She got up early this morning, didn¡¯t she? I heard that you were all in the garden.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. She wasn¡¯t able to sleep, because she was so excited about going to the forest¡­ And so she would be tired.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart must have heard it from one of the butlers.


    As he was now asking about us being in the garden early in the morning.


    ¡°I see. Tilura was like that too¡­ But Liza might be more carefree. I wonder if it has anything to do with being a beastkin.¡±


    ¡°Father, unlike Tilura, Liza is not here to fight orcs. And with Leo and Mr. Takumi nearby, she has no reason to fear any monsters. I doubt it has anything to do with being a beastkin.¡±


    ¡°Mm? Hmm¡­indeed. While I told her about the monsters and orcs, she is not actually here to fight them like Tilura. She is with people who can protect her, and feel safe¡­¡±


    ¡°It is like she is in the forest to y.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Even though it is supposed to be a dangerous ce, normally¡­ But with so many people and good Leo, it does not feel that way.¡±


    While thinking about Tilura, Mr. Ekenhart started to muse about whether Liza¡¯s carefree nature was because she was beastkin.


    But ire rejected the idea immediately.


    I didn¡¯t know if she was that carefree, but she was definitely positive.


    And while she was not here to fight, she was curious about the forest and enjoying her time in it.


    Had she been nervous or had a negative personality, then she would likely not be able to enjoy herself, even if it was safe.

 Chapter 481

    Chapter 481


    I talked about Liza¡¯s situation


    ¡°Besides¡­ One of the reasons is that it¡¯s always safe when Leo is nearby¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, I think it has more to do with you, Mr. Takumi? Liza is always smiling when she is with you.¡±


    ¡°Really? Hmm. Well, perhaps.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°You think so too, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Hehe. There is no doubt of it.¡±


    ¡°Hmm What do you mean?¡±


    I looked at Liza and smiled.


    Now that I thought about it, aside from the first time I had met her, Liza did smile most of the time that we were together.


    If she was thatfortable with me and had so much fun, then I was happy that she called me papa¡­ Leo also barked in agreement.


    As Leo, I, and Ms. ire smiled and talked, Mr. Ekenhart looked puzzled.


    I see¡­ While I had exined the situation, Mr. Ekenhart didn¡¯t know what Liza had said after having the rock thrown at her in Ractos.


    I had felt quite sad listening to her directly talk about bearing what happened to her in the slums¡­


    ¡°You witnessed already, Mr. Ekenhart, but you know how Liza was being attacked in the slums?¡±


    ¡°Hmm, indeed. I went with you to help her. ¡­Well, in the end, it was good Leo that did everything¡­¡±


    ¡°But for Liza, it was a daily urrence. She didn¡¯t know how to leave, and was just trying to survive there after her grandfather died. But no one in the slums was kind to her¡­ Even the children attacked Liza¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed. Even if you want to raise your own position by dominating others, it will be meaningless if you do not grow¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Well, part of the reason was that Deam told them to, and they did it to survive. But in any case, Liza was all alone after her grandfather died. And it was then that she learned to just bear it.¡±


    ¡°She did not resist?¡±


    ¡°Perhaps she did at first. But it just made things worse.¡±


    I was d that Liza was asleep while I exined it to Mr. Ekenhart.


    After all, I did not want her to remember what had happened in the slums.


    I did not want her to feel sad or lonely again.


    Well, I know that was impossible, but she shouldugh and have fun as much as possible.


    ¡°That is¡­I can imagine that. If you are weaker, then resisting will just make them more angry.¡±


    ¡°Yes. And so she never had a ce where she felt safe. She had no house in the slums, and even if she was hungry or thirsty, she had to manage by herself. But also, she had to remain hidden.¡±


    It was not like every single person in the slums were hostile to her.


    Apparently, Deam mainly gave the order to children.


    There were a lot of people in the slums, and it did not seem like there were many ces to hide. As for abandoned buildings, they were used as hideouts by Deam.


    Had the adults been following Deam¡¯s orders at all, then Liza would have not even survived there.


    It didn¡¯t matter if she was a beastkin, Liza was too young to be able to endure that much.


    Well¡­they probably also knew that the guards might get involved if they went too far. So that¡¯s why they avoided using weapons.


    Still, just the thought of it filled me with anger.


    ¡°Grrr¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Leo. It¡¯s in the past. Calm down, okay? We just need to make sure that she is happy now, okay? Besides, Deam was already arrested.¡±


    Next to me, Leo, who had been listening to me, started to bare her teeth and growl.


    I understand how you feel, but maybe hold it back a little?


    Ms. ire was one thing, but Mr. Ekenhart looked disturbed¡­


    ¡°Uuuu¡­wou¡­¡±


    ¡°No, no. You should have hurt them more? You don¡¯t need to think like that. It was enough.¡±


    If she had done more, then it was possible that he might die.


    I had already cut his stomach with my sword, and Leo had pressed his down on the ground so that he could not move¡­ Surely that had been painful enough.


    I thought I had heard his bones creek.


    There was no reason to show mercy to such people, but it wasn¡¯t our job to punish him either.


    I thought that we should leave it to the guards and the relevant institutions.


    Thankfully, we were friends with Mr. Ekenhart, who I trusted and relied on.


    ¡­Though, there were times when I worried if he was alright, but he was surrounded by capable people, including Sebastian.


    ¡°I see¡­ So Liza was never in a ce where she felt safe. So that¡¯s why she seems so rxed when she is with you and Leo.¡±


    ¡°I think it might be the case. And so that¡¯s why Liza doesn¡¯t really care if she is in a forest with monsters. She has been in dangerous ces before¡­and with Leo and me here. I think she finally feels safe for the first time after her grandfather died.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Hmm¡­ Indeed¡­¡±


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 482

    Chapter 482


    I kept my promise with the boys


    Mr. Ekenhart nodded at my exnation.


    He had already known some of the details regarding Liza¡¯s situation, but he now knew as much Ms. ire and me.


    It was possible that there was more, and Liza just hadn¡¯t told me yes, but there was plenty of time for her to tell us.


    Besides, I didn¡¯t want her to recall things that she didn¡¯t want to.


    ¡°Ah, by the way¡­Mr. Ekenhart. And Ms. ire, I have a request¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm, what?¡±


    ¡°Me too?¡±


    While talking about Liza, I suddenly remembered something.


    it was something I should have talked about earlier¡­I felt bad towards the boys. I had made a promise, after all.


    ¡°When capturing Deam, there were other boys like Mark. They were being threatened by Deam and some other men. I believe the boys were arrested as well, but¡­ If you could lighten their punishment¡­after all, they did cooperate with capturing Deam.¡±


    It wasn¡¯t as if they were innocent, but they were also still children.


    They were just obeying Deam, and so I didn¡¯t think they should receive the same punishment as him.


    And so I had promised to speak on their behalf.


    ¡°Ah, that. I heard about it in the reports. While they were helping Deam, they didn¡¯t necessarily have a choice in some regards. And so we did mean to give them a lighter punishment.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. It is possible that they will grow from here, and live proper lives. Of course, if they cause problems in the future, they will be dealt with more severely. But there is no need to be so hard right now.¡±


    ¡°I see. Thank you.¡±


    I was relieved, now that I had kept my promise. And then Mr. Ekenhart grinned mischievously.


    ¡°Well¡­ If they have the courage, perhaps I can also take them away for some training. It would also work as a punishment of sorts¡­¡±


    ¡°Father. I don¡¯t think you should be making such young boys participate in your training¡­¡±


    ¡°What? But Mark, the one who threw the stone at Liza, is going to join. Surely he would prefer it if his friends were there?¡±


    ¡°¡­Phillip told me about it. It is very painful, isn¡¯t it?¡±


    ¡°What? Phillip told you, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Yes. And¡­it seemed like something that he did not want to remember¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm. I suppose I didn¡¯t make him strong enough then. I would have thought he would be proud of it.¡±


    ¡°Father, why would anyone be proud of training that was just painful?¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart really did have a wicked side to him.


    That training that had traumatized Phillip. He was considering it not just for Mark, but the other boys as well.


    Hmm¡­ Perhaps I had sent them into an even worse punishment. I¡¯m sorry.


    ¡°In any case, if they really are sorry, why not send them to the orphanage?¡±


    ¡°That is one way. ording to the report, they do not have parents. However¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. The orphanage is full¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, that is right¡­¡±


    If they were in the orphanage, they would be properly educated. However, when we went there with Liza, they told us that it was full.


    Though, they probably wouldn¡¯t reject everyone, and would try to amodate people, even if they barely fit¡­epting several boys from the slums would be difficult.


    Hmm¡­I see¡­in that case¡­


    ¡°Do you have an idea, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    Ms. ire asked, as I had fallen silent for some time.


    Was my face so easy to read?


    ¡°Uh, well¡­ I do have one idea¡­ But I don¡¯t know how realistic it is. In any case, I will tell you once I have gathered my thoughts.¡±


    ¡°Not now?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry¡­ In any case, I will think about it after returning to the mansion. I promise to consult you then. Besides, I will have to ask Sebastian¡­¡±


    I was thinking about the boys and going to Range vige.


    And while Ms. ire looked a little sulky that I didn¡¯t tell her, I promised that we would discuss itter.


    ¡°Mmm¡­not me then?¡±


    ¡°Well, it could be you as well, Mr. Ekenhart. But aren¡¯t you going to return to your main house?¡±


    ¡°Yes, that is right. ¡­I will likely not be around when you finally gather your thoughts, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart also looked a little sulky to be left out.


    They really were father and daughter¡­ I suppose Tilura would have acted the same way.


    Only, Mr. Ekenhart did not look as cute as Ms. ire.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 483

    Chapter 483


    Theints were heard


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi wants to confide in me¡­ What is it?¡±


    Ms. ire was tilting her head with a puzzled expression, but looked a little happy as well.


    ¡°That¡¯s enough talk about me. Why are you here, Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire? Were you not able to sleep in the tent?¡±


    ¡°Hmm? I have no reason in particr. I just wanted to talk to you, Mr. Takumi. It wasn¡¯t that I was feeling lonely in the tent¡­¡±


    ¡°But Phillip is there as well¡­ Though, he is probably sleeping.¡±


    ¡°It is like that with me. Tilura and the others fell asleep, but I felt like talking¡­ Hehe. It is like thest time that we went to the forest.¡±


    So, neither of them had any business with me, and just came out because they wanted to talk.


    While Ms. ire was one thing, Mr. Ekenhart was with Phillip in the tent, and yet felt lonely¡­ I didn¡¯t know how to feel about that.


    As for sitting in front of the fire at midnight with Ms. ire¡­ It was like thest time we came to the forest.


    Only this time, Mr. Ekenhart and Liza were here as well.


    ¡°Haha, indeed. Though, at that time, you wanted to apologize after Sebastian scolded you.¡±


    ¡°Oh, Mr. Takumi. Please forget about that¡­¡±


    ¡°What? Such a thing happened? It is not an unusual thing for Sebastian to scold ire¡­ But she then apologized to Mr. Takumi?¡±


    Amidst the calm atmosphere, I suddenly brought up the past, much to Ms. ire¡¯s embarrassment.


    Mr. Ekenhart was immediately interested.


    As I had no choice, I then began to exin the whole story to him in detail.


    ¡°Hmm, I see. Indeed, it is not good for those of our house to wield authority in such a way. So Sebastian was right to be angry.¡±


    ¡°Though, I did not actually feel like I was being forced to do anything. ¡­If anything, it is you, Mr. Ekenhart, who always acts more forcefully.¡±


    ¡°¡­Really?¡±


    ¡°Even if father doesn¡¯t use his authority as a duke, he can be very forceful¡­¡±


    ¡°It seems like you are ming me now¡­ Well, it is true that Sebastian oftenins, but¡­¡±


    So even Sebastian would tell him¡­ Well, he did get in trouble when he went with me to Ractos without a guard.


    Besides, when deciding toe to the forest, Sebastian had apparently a lot to say to him.


    He had only agreed to it on several conditions. That Leo would apany us, was one of them.


    ¡°Sebastian could¡­be more agreeable when ites to things that I have nned.¡±


    ¡°That is because you act so impulsively without thinking about the effects, father. ¡­Though I am told that as well¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha. Sebastian is surely thinking about what¡¯s best for you two. I think¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­? Wou.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was nowining about Sebastian.


    As for Ms. ire, while she hadints about her father as well, she also began toin about Sebastian.


    Mr. ire¡¯s grievances were about how he didn¡¯t stop her father, back when he was still bringing in marriage proposals.


    That seemed like a long time ago.


    I chuckled but tried to defend him. And then Leo raised her head and looked towards the tent. But then she lowered her head again and rested it on her front paws.


    Had she detected something¡­? And then I looked in the same direction.


    ¡­I see.


    Well, I¡¯m sure it would be fine.


    ¡°I think that Sebastian should be kinder to me. He is too rigid in the way that he thinks.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. While he is smart, he could be more flexible.¡±


    ¡°¡­Oh, is that so? I am rigid and not flexible. ¡­Even though I do my best so that Your Grace and Lady ire can livefortably in peace¡­¡±


    ¡°!?¡±


    ¡°!?¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    As Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire¡¯s conversation heated up, I closed my eyes calmly.


    I suppose I was resigned¡­


    While I sat silently, Leo, who was to my right side, seemed indifferent as well.


    Though Liza waspletely asleep, and the two were talking louder and louder¡­she did not wake up. I suppose that was howfortable she was with Ms. ire.


    I wonder if it was morefortable than sleeping with Leo?


    But just as Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire were in agreement, a strangely cool voice rang from behind us.


    And while it was cool and calm, there was power in it as well. And even I felt a chill go down my spine.


    Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire stopped talking at once, and let out a soundless gasp.


    Well, they hadn¡¯t noticed, so¡­it was no surprise.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 484

    Chapter 484


    I decided to leave them and go to sleep


    ¡°Sebastian!?¡±


    ¡°Sebastian!?¡±


    ¡°It iste. You must be quiet, or you will wake up the others. Unless you do not mind disturbing their sleep, even though it will affect their performance tomorrow.¡±


    Sebastian¡¯s voice was very thorny indeed.


    I quickly opened my eyes and looked towards them, they were shaking their head vigorously at Sebastian.


    ¡°Well, it is my duty to serve Your Grace and Lady ire. And so it is not my ce toin. However, to think that you despise me so much¡­¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t despise you. It is true.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Sebastian. I am grateful for your services to my father.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. You worked for me even before I was the master of the house. I appreciate your work, Sebastian.¡±


    While Sebastian did not look that angry, Ms. ire and Mr. Ekenhart were frantic that they had been overheard, and so they tried to exin.


    I suppose¡­Sebastian was ying with them now.


    ¡°By the way, Mr. Takumi. It is not time for you to switch ces. You could get some sleep, for tomorrow¡­¡±


    ¡°Huh? Ah, yes. Of course. Yes, I suppose it is that time¡­¡±


    I looked down at my watch and saw that it was indeed time.


    As we had been talking, the time passed by quickly.


    ¡°Well then. I shall return to the tent with Liza. ¡­Ms. ire. Sorry¡­¡±


    ¡°Ye-yes.¡±


    ¡°Zzz¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°No, it should be fine. I will carry her. Thanks, Leo.¡±


    When I picked up Liza, I saw that she was fast asleep, and would not wake up easily.


    It was probably abination of being tired, and feeling safe with Ms. ire.


    While Leo had offered to carry her, she was not heavy, so I decided to do it myself.


    ¡°So Mr. Takumi is returning to his tent. I suppose I should go as well. I am starting to get sleepy.¡±


    ¡°Yes, father. We will leave it to Sebastian and the others and go to sleep for tomorrow.¡±


    In such times, Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire seemed to think alike.


    ¡°I knew that both of you would not want to stay up during the night with me. I shall sit here then, and repent for all the times that I was too intrusive¡­¡±


    ¡°No, uh. It is not like that, understand?¡±


    ¡°Ye-yes, Sebastian. It is not that I dislike you. In fact, I will stay and watch with you for now.¡±


    ¡°Yes, indeed. Mr. Takumi. We will be here a little longer, so you go back to the tent.¡±


    ¡°Haha¡­very well.¡±


    From where I was standing, I could see the corner of Sebastian¡¯s face rise into a smile¡­ He surely had got them.


    But the other two did not notice.


    ¡°¡­Well, good night.¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    ¡°Yes, good night, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    I pretended that I did not see Sebastian¡¯s expression, and then headed back to the tent while carrying Liza.


    ¡°¡­Nichs?¡±


    ¡°You must be tired, Mr. Takumi. ¡­I suppose Mr. Sebastian¡­will take a little longer.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I think so¡­¡±


    When I approached the tent, I saw that Nichs was standing nearby.


    As he was paired with Sebastian, he was probably waiting.


    Apparently, he saw the situation at the bonfire, as he was chuckling.


    Well, it was a quiet night, aside from the shaking of leaves and sounds of the water¡­ So it was no wonder that he was able to hear their conversation.


    Regardless, I replied with augh and then entered the tent.


    Of course, Leo could not go inside of the tent, and so a nket had beenid out on the ground for her to sleep on.


    I put Liza in her sleeping back, and then I slid into my own and closed my eyes.


    As I was a little sleep-deprived, I should be able to sleep quickly.


    I doubted it would be the same for Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire, as they seemed to be still talking with Sebastian quietly.


    If they are too tired, I could give them herbs tomorrow¡­


    I wonder how many hours of sleep they will get¡­? It was with such thoughts that I fell into a deep sleep.


    ¨D¨D¨D¨D¨D¨D¨D¨D¨D


    ¡°Kya! Sherry! You¡¯re sshing too much!¡±


    ¡°Kyau! Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°¡­Hmm?¡±


    I awoke to the sounds of voices outside of the tent.


    For a second, I was confused that I wasn¡¯t in my usual room, but then I remembered that we were sleeping in the forest, and I got out of my sleeping bag.


    When I looked to the side, I saw that Liza¡¯s sleeping bag was empty. So she had already gotten up.


    After all, I had heard her voice just now¡­

 Chapter 485

    Chapter 485


    Liza saw me getting ready


    ¡°¡­I wonder when Mr. Ekenhart went to sleep? His snoring is quite loud.¡±


    On the other side of the tent, Mr. Ekenhart was sleeping loudly.


    He was unlikely to get up for some time.


    In any case, I left him and stepped out of the tent.


    Apparently, it was just me and him. As Phillip¡¯s sleeping bag was empty.


    ¡°Ah, papa! You¡¯re up?¡±


    ¡°Aye, I am. Morning, Liza.¡±


    ¡°Yes, good morning!¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Ms. Lyra.¡±


    Liza called out from the river as soon as she saw me.


    And so I walked over to her, and then greeted the others.


    Sherry was ying in the shallow part of the river, and Liza was with her.


    As you did not need to swim, Sherry would be fine.


    As for Leo, she was in the deep part of the river, and swimming like a dog¡­ She really did like to swim. Perhaps it was for exercise.


    And then there was Ms. Lyra, who stood smiling by the river, and seemed to be watching over the others.


    I greeted her as well, and then started to prepare for the morning.


    ¡°¡­Huh. So that¡¯s what you do, papa.¡±


    ¡°Oh, you haven¡¯t seen this before? Well, there are some things a man does in the morning.¡±


    I washed my face in the river and started to shave.


    As I was used to it now, I was able to shave cleanly without cutting my face¡­ At least, I think I did¡­ I didn¡¯t have a mirror, so I could only check my reflection in the river.


    Liza was looking at me curiously, which was a little embarrassing, but I made sure that it did not show on my face.


    Because she always went away with Tilura or Ms. Lyra, she had never seen me getting ready before.


    ¡°Now, since we have finished eating, it¡¯s time to finally go and search for some orcs¡­. Hahh¡­¡±


    ¡°Your Grace!¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­sorry. I didn¡¯t get much sleep. In any case, today, we shall search for and hunt the orcs.¡±


    After I was finishing getting ready, Liza, Leo and Sherry came out of the river, and we helped Ms. Lyra with breakfast.


    As there were a lot of people, I thought that it would be hard. But since there was another maid, it finished quickly.


    Well, I was just washing and cutting vegetables as ordered.


    Ms. Lyra did the actual cooking.


    Speaking of breakfast, this was to be thest one where Sherry would eat the same thing as the rest of us.


    After lunch, she had to hunt orcs for food¡­ ording to Leo.


    By the time we were all finished eating, Mr. Ekenhart got up and came out of his tent.


    While he must have slept quitete, he always had trouble getting up in the morning.


    And so he skipped breakfast, and we all got ready and gathered together.


    Mr. Ekenhart then addressed everyone as if giving a speech. However, he failed to stifle a yawn when getting to the important part.


    ¡­How long had he stayed up after I left?


    I had been in such a deep sleep that I did not notice when he returned to the tent.


    When I nced to the side, I saw that Ms. ire also looked sleepy and was holding back a yawn.


    ¡°¡­¡±


    Ms. ire noticed that I was looking at her, and then she turned away and blushed.


    She really did not like being seen with her guard down¡­ But that was also cute.


    ¡­Could I be blushing a little as well¡­?


    As for Ms. Anne, who stood next to her, she was more tired than sleepy.


    I guess one night of sleep was not enough to rid her of the tiredness of trekking through the forest.


    After all, she did not exercise daily, and was not used to this.


    Thinking of it like that, Ms. ire certainly had a lot of energy, for being a simr noble woman¡­ But it was no surprise, given that she was Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s daughter.


    Tilura was standing in front of Mr. Ekenhart and listening to him with a serious expression.


    And while I could not see her face, she was probably a little nervous and tense now that things were really getting started.


    ¡°First, we will have Leo detect their locations. Is that alright, Leo and Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Yes, we¡¯re ready.¡±


    I had made Leo eat some sense enhancing herbs in advance, so she should be able to sense presences in an even wider range than usual.


    Like this, she could know where to go in order to find the orcs.


    ¡°Mmm. Once we know where the orcs are, we will have Phillip and the others head in that direction. And if there happens to be other monsters there as well, try and stay away.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°And if you do find any orcs, provoke them so that they will follow you. And if you can, make sure that they are few in number. While I intend for them to take turns fighting, in general I want to create a situation where it is one against one.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    Phillip and the guards would go into the forest and find the orcs that Leo sensed, and lure them to us.


    And if there were too many, they were to kill some and lower their number.


    As for who would go, it was Phillip, Nichs and one other guard.


    The other guards and Johanna would stay and protect us.


    Leo would also stay as a protector, so it was more than enough. But when a lot of people enter the forest, it was possible that they could attract the attention of other monsters, so it was decided that only three people should go in.


    Besides, the guards had been properly trained, so it was unlikely that they would suffer any grievous injuries¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 486

    Chapter 486


    Leo searched for the orcs


    ¡°Next, there are the people who will fight the orcs that are lured out¡­ First, Takumi will fight them. Is that alright?¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s fine.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart said that I should be the first one.


    As I had battled against orcs before, I could show Tilura how to do it.


    I opened my hands that I had been clenching without thinking about it, and took in a deep breath.


    It would be fine¡­ I fought them before in Range vige. It would be easy as long as I stayed calm.


    Last time, it had been so sudden. But this time time, I would be fully prepared, so in terms of conditions, I had the advantage.


    As this was part of our training, we were to not eat any strengthening herbs. But I knew that I had be stronger since thest time¡­!


    ¡°And then next is Tilura. Are you ready?¡±


    ¡°Yes! I will do my best!¡±


    As I talked to myself and tried to remain calm, Tilura was brought up next.


    After all, the whole point of this trip was so that she could experience a real battle against orcs.


    ¡°Mmm. Watch Mr. Takumi closely, and learn from him, alright?¡±


    ¡°I understand!¡±


    Tilura answered in a voice that showed that she too was nervous.


    Don¡¯t worry. If I could defeat them, then so can you, since you are always training so seriously, Tilura.


    ¡°And then¡­there is Sherry. Is that alright, good Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyu¡­¡±


    Lastly, there was Sherry, who was to learn how to hunt orcs.


    Unlike Tilura and me, Sherry was not eager¡­ But since she was a fenrir, she would surely be fine.


    ¡­I think?


    ¡°Now, I hope that all of you stay on your guard. These are monsters. Even with Leo around, you never know what will happen. So be careful so that you are not injured. That is all.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    Now that everything was decided, we all took our positions.


    Mr. Ekenhart, Tilura, Sherry and I waited with Leo a few meters outside of the forest.


    Liza, Ms. ire, and Ms. Anne were behind us with the butlers and maids by the river.


    Just in case, the nonbatant kept their distance.


    As the river was at their back, there would be little risk of them being attacked.


    Out of the remaining guards, Johanna was with Ms. ire, while the other one was next to Mr. Ekenhart.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. When you¡¯re ready.¡±


    ¡°Very well. Leo. Can you tell us where the monsters are?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. ¡­Wou-wou. Grau-wuff.¡±


    ording to Leo, there were two orcs close by.


    I then told Phillip and the others, so that they could head in that direction.


    It was hard to describe it, as there were no markers in the forest, but since they had eaten sense enhancing herbs, they would be able to detect the monsters when they were close.


    ¡°We will go then.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. Be careful.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    And so they went into the forest while holding their swords out and ready.


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi. It is quite boring to just wait¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Ekenhart. They have only just gone in. While I understand that it is boring, you should be more patient¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, father! You should be prepared so you can face anything!¡±


    ¡°Tilura, you are too tense. You won¡¯t be able to fight properly like that, you know? Well, it¡¯s your first time, so it cannot be helped. In general, no one fights at their best the first time.¡±


    ¡°Is that so?¡±


    ¡°Mmm. Well, the first time, yes. But it¡¯s a good thing that Tilura is facing orcs, which are rtively easier opponentspared to humans. Because when you are this nervous on your first time, you are likely to only be able to show half of your ability.¡±


    ¡°I see. Well, I suppose it is natural for people to be scared at such times.¡±


    It was the same with sports. Being nervous meant you would not be able to y at your best.


    I didn¡¯t have any experience like that, but I heard that when ying in a different location or environment, you would often make mistakes that you wouldn¡¯t usually make.


    On the other hand, there were some people who did their best under pressure. But they were in the minority.


    And while I didn¡¯t want to think about fighting with other humans, it might be something I had to consider in this world.


    In preparation for such a time, experiencing battles against monsters would then affect the way one acts when ites to war.


    While monsters and humans were different, it was better than not experiencing anything.


    When thinking about it like that, I had fought both, which was a decent amount of experience¡­even if it didn¡¯t feel like it.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 487

    Chapter 487


    I was given permission to use the katana


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. I heard that during your first real fight, you faced numerous orcs, while buying time and saving the vigers. That is more than even a rookie soldier could do.¡±


    ¡°Indeed? I was quite desperate back then¡­ I just didn¡¯t want the orcs to reach the others¡­¡±


    ¡°Thinking that was one thing, but being able to actually do it is difficult.¡±


    ¡°Well, Leo did help me in the end.¡±


    ¡°But without your effort, the vige might have been overrun before Leo arrived. At the very least, people would have died. So it is impressive that you were able to buy so much time.¡±


    ¡°Well, there were some who were wounded¡­ But even I felt that I did good, since no one died.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. You should be proud of yourself.¡±


    I had not known that Leo woulde, and so I was only focused on the orcs.


    At first, I only meant to buy time so that the viger could escape. But then Mr. Hannes and the others tried to fight as well.


    Because of that, we were able to fight without anyone dying¡­though some were injured.


    And there were some surprises, like when I activated Weed Cultivation on the orcs. But it all ended well.


    ¡­I was proud of myself, and grateful towards Leo.


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right, Mr. Takumi. You may not use herbs this time, understand?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I know. This is to test my ability, so I wouldn¡¯t do such a thing.¡±


    ¡°Good. Of course, it is a different matter if you get injured.¡±


    It would be like doping, and was forbidden.


    ¡°Ah, that is right. You can use the katana.¡±


    ¡°Really? But would that be a good example for Tilura?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t mind. As for Tilura, she is just watching you fight orcs. It doesn¡¯t matter what kind of weapon you will be using.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    When I looked towards Tilura, I saw that she was incredibly nervous.


    Indeed, I doubted she would be able to pay attention to what weapon I was using, or any other small details¡­.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Got it.¡±


    ¡°So they came¡­¡±


    After about twenty minutes since Phillip went into the forest, Leo started to bark.


    ording to her, they were returning with some orcs.


    When I listened carefully, I could hear Phillip and the other guard shaking the trees.


    I petted Leo in order to thank her, and then I nodded to Mr. Ekenhart and took a few steps forward.


    Within a few minutes, I heard the rustling of leaves, and Phillip and the guard stepped out of the forest.


    And then behind them, was a bipedal pig¡­ The orc came running.


    While luring it here had been the n, it was red with rage as well.


    How had it been provoked?


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. There were two orcs, but we killed one of them. You can handle this one. We threw some stones at it, and so it is very angry. But it should be no trouble for you!¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry. Phillip said it would be better this way and would not listen¡­¡±


    ¡°Good luck!¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know if I like it¡­ But, very well then!¡±


    I looked at the orc that was running towards us.


    ¡°First of all, I have to stop its charge¡­ I cannot block it with the katana¡­ I know.¡±


    ¡°Gyuo!! Gyuo!! Gyuoooooo!!¡±


    ¡°¡­Why is it so excited?¡±


    The orc was as red as an apple, and was ignoring me and running in a straight line towards Phillip.


    I had to stop it, as it might charge towards Ms. ire and the others.


    The first thing to do was to stop its movement. And so I moved my hand towards the overexcited orc.


    ¡­I didn¡¯t know if it would be enough to stop it, but I had used this to buy time in Range vige, and so it should at least be enough to slow it down.


    Orcs were not that fast, unless they were charging¡­ And so it would be reckless to intercept it with a katana¡­ It would probably break.


    In any case, in order to stop its momentum as much as possible, I gathered magic energy in my hand¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 488

    Chapter 488


    I faced the orc with magic and de


    ¡°Light elemental shine!¡±


    ¡°Gyuooo?!¡±


    ¡°Good, just what I wanted¡­not really. But it killed its momentum!¡±


    It was just magic that created light.


    The first spell I ever learned and used in Range vige. I unleashed it in order to blind the orc.


    The light itself was only for a brief moment, but it was enough to stagger it.


    And yet, as the orc was so angry, it did not stop its charge¡­ Even though it was slower. But that was enough for me.


    ¡°Guoo!!¡±


    ¡°Ha!¡±


    Its eyes were now open, and it was ring at me.


    Still, it had finally stopped targeting Phillip and the others.


    Even though it was still excited¡­


    I thought of such things and confirmed that I was calm. Then I held the katana at a low position and kicked off the ground towards the orc.


    Experience really did make a big difference¡­ Even with the orc in front of me, I was able to calmly think of the most effective action.


    Besides, this wasn¡¯t a dangerous situation likest time, so there was less pressure.


    ¡°Hya!¡±


    ¡°Gyuo!? Gyuaaa!!¡±


    Without losing momentum, I moved to the side so that I would pass by the orc.


    And in the same instant, I swung the de from my waist.


    I was aiming at the orc¡¯s legs.


    No matter how angry it was, it would not be able to move without legs.


    The de hit the orc¡¯s right leg, just as I had hoped, and it cut it off smoothly.


    There was less resistance than with my normal sword¡­which showed how sharp it was.


    As the orc¡¯s legs were short, I had to angle the sword lower than expected, and I lost my bnce a little afterwards. That was the one mistake I felt that I made.


    After losing its right leg, the orc let out a scream as it stumbled and rolled across the rocks before stopping.


    ¡°Gyu¡­gyuooo!¡±


    ¡°Ah, before it stands up!¡±


    ¡°Giii! ¡­¡±


    ¡°Phew¡­¡±


    The orc had shouted and began to pick itself up off of the ground.


    I wasn¡¯t sure if it would be able to stand with one leg, but I would not lower my guard with such a monster.


    I quickly turned around and thrust the sword deep into the orc¡¯s head.


    After a short scream, the orc became silent and then stopped movingpletely.


    Regardless, I had done the basics of stopping its movement and then dealing the finishing blow¡­but it had not been perfect. And so I sighed as I wiped off the blood and returned it to my sheath.


    I didn¡¯t know if it was a good example, but I had done my job.


    ¡°Well done! You slowed the orc with magic and then attacked before finishing it off¡­ Your training has clearly had an effect.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Ekenhart. Yes, it is due to my experience and training.¡±


    ¡°And your ability, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Leo.¡±


    As soon as I sheathed my de, Mr. Ekenhart called to me in a loud voice.


    And so I walked towards him and thanked him.


    Leo also wagged her tail joyously.


    ¡°Uh, Tilura? Are you alright?¡±


    ¡°¡­Ah, yes! I¡¯m fine!¡±


    I petted Leo and then looked at Tilura. She seemed quite stunned as she stared at the dead orc.


    But when I called to her, she said that she was fine¡­ But was she really?


    ¡°Well, it is her first time, so it might have been a shock. It was a good thing you fought first, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­¡±


    Even if she had seen orc meat, she had not seen a living orc before.


    And she was still young, so it could not be helped.


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi. Were you hurt?¡±


    ¡°Ms. ire. I¡¯m fine. I was calm the whole time, and so I was not injured.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ That¡¯s a relief. ¡­Still this is the first time I saw you fight. It was splendid!¡±


    ¡°Really? Of course, it¡¯s nothingpared to Mr. Ekenhart or Phillip¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, Phillip and I are more experienced. We have trained for longer. But it is still impressive how fast you have learned.¡±


    As we were talking to Tilura, Ms. ire, who had been watching from theke, came towards us.


    Apparently, she had been worried about me.


    I smiled and assured her that I was fine, and she sighed in relief. And then she praised me, which made me feel a little embarrassed.


    I wasn¡¯t used to being praised, especially not for fighting.


    Well, no one would be in Japan.


    This wasn¡¯t sports, as you could actually die.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 489

    Chapter 489


    It was Tilura¡¯s Turn


    We chuckled and then I looked towards the river to see how Liza was doing. She and Ms. Lyra were happy that I had defeated the orc.


    She showed no signs of being overwhelmed.


    Well, they were quite far away, so it wouldn¡¯t have had as much impact.


    As for Phillip and the other guard, they were still catching their breath.


    ¡°Wuff? Wou-wou!¡±


    ¡°Hmm, Leo¡­ What is it?¡±


    ¡°Wou-wou-wou!¡±


    ¡°Kyu!¡±


    Leo suddenly started barking, and then so did Sherry.


    Did you see that? It was so easy! A fenrir would have no trouble! Leo seemed to say.


    Sherry was at Ms. ire¡¯s feet, and replied cheerfully.


    She hadn¡¯t been enthusiastic about it before, but perhaps she changed her mind after seeing me fight?


    ¡°It looks like Sherry wants to fight now. ¡­But I hope that she doesn¡¯t do anything dangerous.¡±


    ¡°Well, Leo is watching, so it should be fine. Besides, she is a fenrir. So surely she is stronger than an orc?¡±


    ¡°Yes, ire. While it is true that Sherry is still small, and does not look strong at all¡­ You should believe in her. As she is your familiar.¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed. Well, do your best, Sherry.¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    Sherry looked up and barked happily.


    While she had been like a house dog, she seemed reliable now.


    ¡°So, Tilura is next. Can you do it?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I¡¯m fine!¡±


    ¡°Tilura. You don¡¯t have to if you don¡¯t want to, you know?¡±


    ¡°Sister, I will do my best. So you better watch!¡±


    ¡°Yes, very well.¡±


    While Tilura replied energetically, it was clear to all that she was terribly nervous.


    I was a little concerned, but Leo was here, just in case. And the guards and I could also intervene.


    ¡­And Mr. Ekenhart would also help her.


    Tilura also seemed to want to prove herself in front of Ms. ire.


    And Ms. ire was looking at her seriously, as if to take in the sight of her sister¡¯s growth.


    Mr. Ekenhart nodded as he watched, and his eyes welled up with tears. Was this really the right time to cry?


    ¡°¡­Mm! So, good Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart coughed when he noticed that I was looking at him, and then he turned to Leo so that she would detect the orcs.


    Leo then turned her nose towards the forest and began to search for them.


    Shortly after, Leo discovered three orcs, and I ryed the information to Phillip and the guard, who then went out to lure the orcs to us.


    ¡°Tilura. Be prepared so that you can face them at any moment.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    Tilura then unsheathed her sword.


    Obviously, it was not a katana, but a specially made short sword.


    Mr. Ekenhart had ordered it in Ractos, and given it to his daughter before we entered the forest.


    It was a in short sword, and smaller than the one I had.


    As Tilura was still short, even an ordinary short sword was too big for her.


    Even the one she had now might be too long, but Tilura would grow quickly anyway.


    And though it wouldn¡¯t have much reach, the important thing was that it was easy for her to handle.


    Tilura swung her sword in the air a few times and confirmed that it was easy to use.


    ¡°Tilura, you saw how the orcs charge, didn¡¯t you? Even if it is moving towards you, it will be fine as long as you remain calm. While you cannot use magic like Mr. Takumi did, you can still avoid them. And cutting them as they pass is an effective method.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart must have been worried that Tilura was nervous, as he started to give her some advice.


    In my case, I was able to use light magic to stun the orc, but Tilura had not been taught that yet.


    There had been a brief lesson about magic before, but it was mostly just ying¡­ Still, she had been told some basic things at least.


    In any case, as it was now, she had fewer options for dealing with an orc¡¯s charge.


    And Tilura did not have the strength to directly block an orc¡¯s attacks.


    She would just get knocked off of her feet.


    And so she would have to dodge. I suppose that meant she would use my own way of dodging as an example¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 490

    Chapter 490


    Leo defeated the orc quickly


    As Tilura¡¯s sword was small, it would not be able to cut off an orc¡¯s leg easily like mine. However, it could still injure an orc and slow it down.


    Well, we didn¡¯t even know if the orc really woulde charging¡­


    While the previous orc that had been lured here had been furious, since they knew that Tilura was facing the next one, they might try to avoid that¡­


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, about the orc¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes?¡±


    As I was watching Mr. Ekenhart speak with Tilura, one of the maids called out to me.


    Apparently, it was about the orc I had just defeated.


    ¡°We will take it away now and drain it of blood. Is that alright?¡±


    ¡°Ah, yes. Thank you.¡±


    I suppose they were going to prepare it so we could eat it today.


    We would probably have to go into the forest and recover the other orc they killedter.


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    As the butler and guards started to take the orc away, Leo suddenly barked right next to me. At the same time, I heard the sounds of rustlinging from the forest.


    Had Phillip returned with a new orc?


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry! There was another orc nearby, and it was difficult to attract one without the other noticing, and so there are two of them!¡±


    The guard said quickly as he emerged from the forest.


    Two huh¡­ Yes, two orcs were a little severe for your first time¡­


    As I was thinking this, Leo moved over to where Tilura was waiting.


    ¡°Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Leave it to me. Leo was saying that to her.


    In the meantime, Nichs and Phillip also came out of the forest.


    As each had only been able to kill one orc, they had serious expressions, but they were then relieved to see that Leo was standing next to Tilura.


    Well, orcs were nothing in front of Leo¡­ She had defeated three in no time when we were here previously.


    ¡°Gyuooo!!¡±


    ¡°Gyuo! Gyuo!¡±


    And then the two orcs followed them out of the forest.


    Unlike the orc that I fought, they were not red in the face.


    This time, they had not been provoked to the same degree.


    ¡°¡­Alright, Leo. Go!¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°Gyuo!?¡±


    ¡°Gyua!!¡±


    I gave the signal once Phillip and the others were out of the way.


    It was the one that we had practiced in my room before.


    Leo reacted swiftly and jumped on one of the orcs.


    Her ws shed the one on the right side, and after cutting it in half, she dashed in the direction of the forest.


    The other orc was so stunned that it froze as the severed orc let out a short scream.


    While Leo probably meant for Tilura to finish off the remaining one, why did she run to the forest¡­?¡±


    ¡°Gyuu!? Gyuo!?¡±


    ¡°¡­Ah, I see.¡±


    By running behind it, she was blocking the orc¡¯s escape route.


    After seeing the other orc killed so quickly, and having seen Leo, the orc seemed to consider running away.


    But Leo was blocking one direction, and in the other was Tilura with a sword, and other humans¡­


    I could see it hesitate.


    ¡°Tilura, this is your chance. Do not let it go to waste.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes!¡±


    ¡°Gyu!? Gyuaaa!!¡±


    Tilura nodded and had immediately raised her sword and rushed towards the orc.


    The orcs seemed surprised to see the single small human attack, but then it quickly made her its target.


    And while they moved towards each other, there was not enough distance for the orc to get into a full speed charge.


    It was probably aware of this as well, as it then raised its right arm, likely in order to hit Tilura with it.


    While she wielded a sword, she was so small that the orc underestimated her.


    But Tilura ducked underneath the right arm, and slid towards its feet.


    ¡°Guo!?¡±


    ¡°Good!¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­¡±


    I couldn¡¯t help but mutter. Mr. Ekenhart also sounded impressed.


    Tilura had used her height to go low, where the orc couldn¡¯t reach, and avoid its arm.


    And as the orc was surprised, she stretched out her body and cut into its stomach!


    It did not look that deep, but it was a strong enough attack to deal damage.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 491

    Chapter 491


    Tilura fought for the first time


    ¡°Gyuo!? Gyuuaaa!!¡±


    ¡°I won¡¯t let you! Hyah!¡±


    The orc was angry after being cut, and so it raised its left arm defiantly. But upon seeing this, Tilura swiftly swung down with her sword, cutting off the orc¡¯s arm at the elbow.


    It was the easiest attack for Tilura, and since the orc had stopped, it was probably not too hard to cut through the arm.


    ¡°Gyuaa! Gyuo, gyuo!¡±


    ¡°I will end it now!¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­¡±


    ¡°Gyu!? Gyuu¡­gyu¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah!? Oh¡­oommph¡­hmmp!¡±


    After losing its arm, the orc was surprised by the pain, and then seemed confused.


    Realizing that victory was hers, Tilura held her de in a backhand grip, and stabbed the orc in the stomach.


    And while the orc pped its arms around, it lost the rest of its strength before it could hit Tilura. The light left its eyes as it crumbled to the ground.


    As the sword was too deep, Tilura could not pull it out in time, and so she followed it to the ground.


    It was no wonder, as she did not let go of the sword.


    She had tried to hold her ground, but the orc was too heavy, and her face fell on the orc¡¯s stomach.


    She probably hit her nose¡­ Well, I¡¯m sure she was fine, as the orc looked soft.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wou!¡±


    ¡°Ah, good Leo¡­ I did it, didn¡¯t I¡­?¡±


    ¡°Wou-wou!¡±


    Now that it was clear that the orc was defeated, Leo came running back to Tilura.


    She then barked happily while running in a circle.


    Tilura raised her head and pulled the sword out from the orc. Even she seemed almost puzzled by what she had done.


    I suppose it was because she had been so nervous.


    ¡°I did it! I defeated the orc!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    She then got down from the orc and shouted excitedly with Leo.


    It was a little dangerous that she didn¡¯t sheath her sword again, but I suppose it was fine since Leo was with her¡­


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. What did you think about thest part?¡±


    Asked Mr. Ekenhart.


    Apparently, he had felt the same way as me.


    ¡°¡­Indeed. Yes. While the orc had died, if the wound was not as deep, or the orc was stronger, it could have hit or grabbed her with its right hand.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. She was good up until that point, but¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, it was her first fight, so she probably panicked a little. And wanted to end it quickly¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°But she is happy now. So even if you have to warn her¡­perhaps it could be der¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes. I will let her enjoy her victory for now. I can talk to herter.¡±


    Yes, while Tillura had tried to end the orc quickly by stabbing its stomach, she was so close to it that it could have unleashed a final attack.


    If you want to finish it off, you should make sure that it can¡¯t be countered. She had been told this many times during her training, but must have forgotten.


    Mr. Ekenhart looked conflicted, while he wanted to be strict, as a father, he also wanted to celebrate with his daughter.


    Once he decided to put it off, his expression rxed, and he smiled while watching Leo and Tilura.


    As for Ms. ire, she was also watching Tilura with a smile.


    ¡°Father, sister, Mr. Takumi. I did it!¡±


    ¡°Yes, yes. You did. Well done, Tilura!¡±


    ¡°Yes, that was impressive.¡±


    ¡°You fought well, Tilura.¡±


    After celebrating with Leo, Tilura then rushed towards us and made her report.


    We all smiled and praised her.


    Well, as I was a fellow student under Mr. Ekenhart, I was in no position to say anything, but I was still happy for her.


    ¡°Tilura, did you get hurt at all? It looked like you dodged the attack, but¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, I¡¯m fine, sister! I didn¡¯t get hit at all!¡±


    ¡°You dodged it perfectly, Tilura. Neither I nor Mr. Takumi could have done it like that. You made good use of your size. Well, you won¡¯t be able to do it eventually, but¡­¡±


    Ms. ire wiped the blood from Tilura¡¯s face and sighed with relief.


    She really had been worried about her sister after all.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 492

    Chapter 492


    Sherry¡¯s Turn was Last


    Mr. Ekenhart didn¡¯t say anything about the finishing blow, and just praised the way she had dodged the first attack.


    He was so happy, which showed how important Tilura was to him.


    ¡°Wou-wou!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    As I watched them celebrating, Leo, who had been dragging away the dead orc, now returned and barked at Sherry as if to say she was next.


    And after seeing me, Tilura and Leo do it, Sherry was quite confident now, and was eager to do it.


    As for the orc that Leo had cleaved into two, the butler and maid had also taken it to the river to drain it of blood.


    While there were many of us, at least we wouldn¡¯t have to worry about food for some time.


    ¡°¡­Well then. Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! ¡­Wuff. Wou-wou, grau-wuff!¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Phillip. She says that near the area where you found the orc that Tilura fought, there is one lone orc that is separated from the others.¡±


    ¡°Understood. If it is close to the same spot, we should be able to find it quickly. Perhaps it went looking for the others and then got lost. While orcs sometimes live in packs, they are not good when ites to acting as a group.¡±


    After being asked by Mr. Ekenhart, Leo nodded and sniffed the air as if searching for the presence of orcs.


    Sherry was standing next to Leo. Her usual, rxed attitude was gone, and she was ring angrily at the forest.


    While she was about as big as a medium¨Csized dog, she was a fenrir, and certainly looked the part now.


    Whenpared to Leo, they looked a little like parent and child. Though, the color of their fur was different.


    Once Leo found the orc, she reported to me, and I ryed the information to Phillip.


    As it was in a simr ce as the previous one, I did not need to point them in the right direction.


    As for orcs not liking to move in groups¡­that was understandable.


    While it wasn¡¯t like theycked intelligencepletely, they moved mostly by instinct. And so they would attack humans or other animals as soon as they saw them.


    Back in Range vige, they had even attacked the horses. And there were no signs of them moving with any sense of unity.


    Thanks to this, I was able to buy time by shocking them with light magic, but¡­things might have beenpletely different had they been more organized.


    ¡°Sherry, do your best. But don¡¯t do anything reckless, okay?¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    After Phillip went into the forest again, Ms. ire called to Sherry, who was waiting next to Leo.


    I could tell by her expression that she was worried about her familiar.


    I didn¡¯t know if she was as close with Sherry as I was with Leo, but they were still like family now.


    ¡°Sherry. I was able to do it, so you should be fine!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    And then Tilura talked to Sherry after that.


    I wasn¡¯t really sure if it was a good argument, given that Tilura had trained diligently, while Sherry was alwayszy¡­ But I suppose it was fine.


    She was a fenrir¡­ And Sherry was nodding cheerfully.


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°She seems really confident but, will she really be fine, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wou!¡±


    ¡°I see. If you say so.¡±


    Leo had been scratching her ears and yawning.


    Perhaps you should be a little more concerned¡­ I thought. But Leo stated inly that there was no way that a fenrir would lose.


    After all, as a species, their strength was too different to begin with. A fenrir would be bored when facing an orc.


    Well, while I didn¡¯t know if Sherry would be able to move like most fenrirs, I suppose she still would not lose.


    But though I trusted Leo, it was also hard to imagine that she was so strong that there was no way that she could lose.


    But Mr. Ekenhart and the others were here too, so it would probably be fine¡­


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    After talking with Leo and waiting for some time, Sherry, who had been ring at the forest, seemed to notice something, as she suddenly barked.


    Upon hearing this, everyone except Leo looked a little nervous as they turned to the forest.


    And then a momentter, Phillip and the other guard came slowly out of the forest.


    So they weren¡¯t running this time¡­


    ¡°As Leo said, there was a lone orc. And so we lured it out here. This one is not so angry, and so it is walking more slowly.¡±


    If it wasn¡¯t excited, and not close enough to charge into the enemy, then they moved slowly¡­so it had that much intelligence. Well, that might be instinct as well.


    If that was the case, then I wish they had lured it out slowly for me as well¡­ But then again, there had been two, so they killed one first. So not angering it would have been difficult.


    I suppose the reason why orcs had some of the lowest intelligence out of monsters, was because once they got angry, they would just attack anything without thinking¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 493

    Chapter 493


    Leo gave Sherry some advice


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    ¡°Kyau.¡±


    As Phillip and the guard came out of the forest, they were followed by a single orc.


    Upon seeing this, Leo barked once, and then Sherry nodded and moved forward.


    It was hard to imagine that this was the same Sherry that was always resting on Leo¡¯s head, or being carried by Ms. ire.


    Even if she was young, she really was just a fenrir.


    ¡°Gyuo!?¡±


    The orc was surprised toe out of the forest and see so many people.


    The fact that it did not turn around immediately and run at the sight of Leo, was proof of its low intelligence.


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°Gyuo!¡±


    Sherry moved forward a few steps and then barked at the orc.


    I didn¡¯t even know that she could make such sounds¡­ Just then, the orc turned to Sherry and went into abat stance.


    Apparently, it had recognized her as an enemy.


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°Grrrrr¡­ Gyau!¡±


    From behind, Leo told her to go, and then Sherry pounced on the orc.


    And she was shockingly fast.


    And while she wasn¡¯t as fast as Leo, who I could barely follow with my eyes, it was clear that she was still quite a threat.


    As for the orc that was now in itsbat stance, it looked simr to the previous orcs, but its eyes were locked on Sherry.


    Would Sherry be like Tilura, and nimbly move under the orc¡¯s arms? As we all watched with bated breath, it happened¡­


    ¡°Gyua!¡±


    ¡°Kyaaan¡­!¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    While Sherry had pounced on the orc with plenty of speed, she had not been running first.


    And so she was unable to change her trajectory. While the orc had been watching her movement carefully, and so it was able to smack her with its right arm.


    We were all speechless.


    Except for Leo, who sighed with exasperation.


    ¡°Kyau¡­kyu¡­¡±


    Sherrynded several meters away. And though her fur was covered in dirt, she was still clear-headed and barked as she got back up.


    With her paws nted firmly on the ground, she rose up¡­and then turned to us for some reason.


    Her expression¡­had none of the bravery of before. She was looking at us with pleading eyes as if she wanted help.


    ¡°Uh¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Should we help her?¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart did not know what to do.


    While Ms. ire looked like she was trying to hold back the urge to rush towards Sherry.


    Probably, she knew that it would only be more dangerous, she the orc was still there.


    However, not everyone here was so calm.¡±


    ¡°Sherry! I will help you! Just wait¡­ Huh?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff¡­wuff¡­¡±


    Tilura had rushed out in order to help Sherry.


    It was too fast for me, Mr. Ekenhart or Ms. ire to react. However, when she ran past Leo, Leo grabbed her by the cor and raised her into the air.


    It was like how she had carried Liza yesterday¡­ In any case, it was a good thing that she stopped her.


    ¡°Leo, but Sherry! She is in danger!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Ah, thank you, good Leo. Tilura, while I understand that you want to help, you should not charge like that without thinking.¡±


    ¡°But, Sherry¡­!¡±


    Leo barked for her to calm down, and then handed her over to Mr. Ekenhart.


    But even then, Tilura still wanted to go and help Sherry.


    She was very kind.


    ¡°Leo, is she really fine?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wuff!¡±


    I asked Leo while Tilura was caught by Mr. Ekenhart.


    Leo nodded to me reassuringly, and then she slowly walked over to Leo.


    And as she moved, she red at the orc, to make sure that it stayed away.


    Even though it did not run away, it finally felt some fear now that Leo was focused on it.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­ Is Sherry really alright?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. But¡­Leo seems to think she is. So let¡¯s trust her.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    Ms. ire must have been quite worried, as her right hand squeezed my left hand.


    My heart beat a little faster, as it was so sudden, but I squeezed back in order to help calm her.


    ¡°Thank you¡­Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Not at all¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­?¡±


    I heard Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s voice, and so I looked back towards Leo and Sherry.


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Kyuu¡­¡±


    For a moment, Sherry looked relieved to see Leo arrive, but then Leo barked at her.


    She was likely angry.


    Sherry looked disappointed, and barked back weakly.


    ¡°Wou-wou. Grau? Wou-grau-grau!¡±


    ¡°Kyau? Kyu! Kyu!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff?¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    They had moved their heads close together and seemed to be talking. But as they were far away, I could not hear them.


    While Leo seemed to be scolding Sherry¡­it seemed like she was telling her to not think of slicing it open? That there were other ways to do it?


    Sherry seemed to think about this for a moment, and then suddenly became cheerful again.


    It was quite the change from before.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 494

    Chapter 494


    Sherry¡¯s fight ended


    After they barked at each other a few times, Sherry nodded confidently.


    When Leo saw this, she bent forward and picked up Sherry by the neck with her mouth and then¡­


    ¡°Ah¡­¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°Kyaaaauuu¡­!¡±


    She threw Sherry at the orc!


    ¡°Gyuo!? Gyu!¡±


    While the orc looked surprised at first, it quickly raised its right arm again in order to attack.


    It seemed like the same thing would be repeated¡­what would she do?


    ¡°Grrrr! Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Gyuo!?¡±


    Sherry let out a growl as she flew through the air, and then she shrunk her body as if to store energy.


    And when she was almost within reach of the orc, she barked loudly.


    In the next moment, something like cold, blue air came out of Sherry¡¯s mouth.


    It hit the orc¡¯s right arm, and immediately froze nearly half of it.


    Was that¡­Sherry¡¯s magic?


    Now that I thought about it, Sebastian had once said that fenrirs could use fire and ice magic.


    ¡°Gyu! Gyu!¡±


    ¡°Kyau! Kyau! Kyauuu!!¡±


    ¡°Gyuuuu!! ¡­Gyu¡­¡±


    While the orc was stunned by the magic, it desperately tried to move its right arm, but it was frozen solid to the elbow, and would not move.


    In the meantime, Sherrynded on the ground and continued to unleash her magic.


    Simr rays of cold air hit the orc. Its left arm, both legs, stomach, neck¡­ In the end, even its face was frozen, and it stopped movingpletely¡­


    Freezing it with magic¡­ Was it simr to what Leo had done to those trolls while rescuing Sherry¡­?


    ¡°Kyu? Kyu! Hah! Hah! Hah!¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    After unleashing the chain of attacks, Sherry looked at the orc and tilted her head.


    And when she saw that it was no longer moving, she jumped up and then turned towards us while wagging her tail excitedly.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­ Did Sherry do that¡­?¡±


    ¡°Yes. She defeated the orc. ¡­Please go to her. You too, Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    Ms. ire had been blinking with disbelief.


    Still, she nodded, and along with Tilura, rushed towards where Sherry was waiting.


    ¡°Magic, eh? ¡­What do you think, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°What do I think¡­it¡¯s amazing. I can¡¯t use magic like that yet¡­¡±


    ¡°Though, the magic itself is not that strong. Well, it is still impressive¡­especially to do it over and over again¡­¡±


    ¡°She kept doing it until it waspletely frozen. ¡­I think it was more than ten times.¡±


    ¡°Yes, indeed. ¡­She is a fenrir, after all. Even the young ones are capable. It would be much more difficult for a human to do the same thing.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart had been watching his daughters go to Sherry, but then he suddenly turned to me with a serious expression.


    Of course, I was only a beginner with magic, so there wasn¡¯t much I could say about it.


    Mr. Ekenhart was mostly impressed that Sherry could use magic multiple times in a row.


    I had not really thought about it before, but when humans used magic, they had to chant. So most would not be able to cast a spell ten times in an instant.


    You would have to learn to use magic without chanting.


    Though, gathering the magic energy was also hard¡­ I really had no idea how much work it would take to do the same thing that Sherry just did.


    But since Leo was a Silver Fenrir, maybe she could do even more amazing magic in rapid session?


    ¡­She probably could¡­ She was not surprised at what Sherry did. She just nodded as if it was obvious.


    But I didn¡¯t want Leo to demonstrate, and so I did not mention anything.


    Though, it might be a good idea to prepare a ceter, so that Leo could use magic and unleash her stress.


    Though, it was likely that it would exceed my imagination and surprise me¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 495

    Chapter 495


    The orc was separated


    ¡°As she is a fenrir, I had high expectations for her growth. But she is already strong enough at this point. ¡­It is like ire already has a powerful guard.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Well, I¡¯m not sure the other guards will be happy to hear that¡­¡±


    ¡°If that happens, then I will just put them through training again. And they will be confident.¡±


    If Sherry was with Ms. ire, then she would be able to protect her like a guard. This was something that Mr. Ekenhart was quite pleased with.


    Though, the self-esteem of Phillip and the others might take a hit¡­ Well, there would always be a need for human guards, so it would be fine.


    In any case, once I make the herb fields in Range vige, Ms. ire would probably have to travel back and forth regrly, so it was good that she had someone who could protect her.


    Though, Ms. ire didn¡¯t see Sherry as a guard, but more like part of the family.


    It was not too different from Leo and me.


    ¡°Sherry, you did very well! Good girl!¡±


    ¡°Both Sherry and I did our best! We defeated the orcs!¡±


    ¡°Kyau! Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    I smiled while listening to their conversation, and then I walked over to the frozen orc.


    ¡°It¡¯s frozen solid¡­ Can this be melted?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Well, you¡¯re going to eat it, aren¡¯t you, Sherry? Surely you can¡¯t eat it unless you defrost it first.¡±


    ¡°Kyau!?¡±


    I knocked on the orc to confirm that it was frozen solid. Leo then looked at me and tilted her head to the side.


    While you could probably melt it with fire¡­that would take time. And it will be lunch time soon¡­


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau!? Kyau. Kyau!¡±


    Leo was barking admonishingly, and Sherry replied frantically.


    Apparently, she had told Sherry that since it would take time to melt, Sherry would not be able to eat.


    Well, Sherry had done her job in defeating the orc.


    And we had plenty of other orcs that the rest of us killed, so we could just trade one of them.


    ¡°¡­Kyuu!!¡±


    ¡°Oh?¡±


    As I was about to make this suggestion, Sherry suddenly moved.


    She turned to face the orc, and then pounced on it with angry eyes.


    While it wasn¡¯t as fast as when she was fighting, it was still quite strong.


    ¡°Ahh¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    There was a loud smash, and then the frozen orc tipped backwards.


    And while its legs were frozen, it was not fixed to the ground, and so it toppled over easily.


    And with a great noise, the orc¡¯s body was smashed into multiple pieces.


    ¡°Oh¡­¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Woah, it is separated¡­¡±


    ¡°So it was a good thing that it was frozen¡­?¡±


    Sherry stood up on thergest piece, its stomach, and barked proudly.


    Upon seeing this, everyone looked a little put off.


    Even if it was frozen, it had been alive a moment ago.


    And so all kinds of things were visible.


    Well, at least it wasn¡¯t bleeding.


    ¡­And I was d that Liza was far away¡­ It wasn¡¯t the kind of thing that she should watch.


    ¡°Everyone, lunch is ready! This time, it is the orc that Lady Tilura hunted!¡±


    ¡°Oh, I¡¯m looking forward to it.¡±


    While the orc that I had defeated was drained of blood and processed, it was fit for eating. But since this was Tilura¡¯s first hunt, we decided to eat that one first.


    This was so that she could really feel and enjoy her victory.


    After we all helped to cut it up, Ms. Lyra did the cooking.


    While I felt bad about always relying on her, Ms. Lyra was the only one who was a good cook here.


    Sebastian and the butlers could not cook, and the guards could only make simple meals. And Mr. Ekenhart, me, and Ms. ire could not cook either.


    Perhaps we should have brought some cooks¡­ But they had chosen people who were free to go to the forest, so it could not be helped.


    Even Ms. Johanna could not cook, as she had focused solely on her training.


    Most people would have done the same in her position, so it was fine¡­


    ¡°If I tried to cook, I would burn everything!¡± She stated tly.


    She sounded so confident that I ended upughing, even though it was rude.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 496

    Chapter 496


    We discussed our mistakes after lunch


    After hearing about Ms. Johanna¡¯s skills with cooking, Ms. Lyra agreed to teach her before they went to sleep.


    Along with the other maid that was forbidden from using the seasoning.


    I wanted to join them, but apparently they were going to do it in their tent.


    ¡­I suppose I could just learn from Ms. Helena directly?


    ¡°This is delicious! Is it really the orc that I killed? Thinking about it makes it even more delicious!¡±


    ¡°Sister Tilura¡¯s orc tastes good!¡±


    As I thought about the food, Tilura and Liza quickly epted their tes and started eating.


    Apparently, food really did taste better when you hunted it yourself.


    I had no experience hunting, but I had gone fishing once. And I still remembered that it tasted amazing.


    And you didn¡¯t get to experience such things often. And I was thankful for my uncle, who took me there.


    ¡°Thank you, Ms. Lyra. It was very delicious.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. Besides, you should be thanking Lady Tilura. Everyone was more impressed that they were eating something that she had caught.¡±


    After lunch, I thanked her while we cleaned up.


    As I did not cook, I was sure to show my gratitude.


    Tilura and Liza became sleepy after eating, and they were not leaning against Leo.


    Ms. Anne and Sherry were with them as well.


    Speaking of Sherry, since the frozen orc had been buried in the ground, Leo decided to give one of the other orcs to her.


    The idea that she could only eat what she caught was just to make her focus on fighting, and was not a strict rule.


    ¡°Haha. Everyone is very fond of Tilura. But I hope they also enjoy the orc that I killed as well.¡±


    ¡°Hehe. It will be fine, Mr. Takumi. We all know that you worked hard.¡±


    And like that, we finished cleaning up.


    The other maids and butlers helped as well.


    Even Mr. Ekenhart helped to wash the tes, iming that he was good at it. I didn¡¯t know if that was a good thing for a duke.


    As for Sebastian and the guards, they were not nearby, as they had gone to the forest to collect the orcs.


    Of course, we had Leo check the forest in advance, so there was no danger of encountering any monsters.


    Ms. ire was petting Sherry and Tilura as if to praise them while they leaned against Leo.


    ¡°Now, since we have finished eating, it¡¯s time to talk about how you all did.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    This was after a short rest.


    Tilura and I sat across from Mr. Ekenhart. And Sherry was also sitting on a log.


    Even though she had been sleepy after eating, Tilura was wide awake again and listened to her father intently.


    As for Leo, she was carrying Liza on her back and swimming in theke.


    She made sure that Liza was carried above the water, and they appeared to be having fun.


    Ms. Anne was looking at the unprocessed orcs grimly.


    Apparently, she had never seen them being drained of blood before, and was a little shocked.


    Ms. ire seemed exasperated by her reaction.


    ¡°First, Mr. Takumi. The way you dealt with it was good. However, you should also think about what would happen if you didn¡¯t stagger them with magic. It would be fine during the night, but the effect is weakened during the day.¡±


    ¡°Yes. If the light did not work, then the charge would have been fast. So I would have likely tried to weaken it with my sword first.¡±


    ¡°Hmm. Still there is only so much you could do, when you¡¯re passing by it. And you cannot block it head on with your de. Besides, the orc might change directions. And some monsters use weapons. It¡¯s important to look at your opponent carefully and predict what they will do.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    During the day, blinding someone with magic was less effective.


    Still, it worked this time, because the light was focused, simr to a shlight, and I had aimed at the orc¡¯s eyes.


    As for cutting it while it passed, it was fine because the katana was very sharp. But otherwise, it might have been in danger of breaking.


    And so it was a strategy that wouldn¡¯t work in every scenario.


    As for weapons, I had seen trolls with clubs, which they would surely attack and also guard with.


    In any case, as Mr. Ekenhart said, I would have to look at my opponent carefully, and think of ways to win, or at least, not lose.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 497

    Chapter 497


    Tilura was told her mistakes


    ¡°Next is Tilura. First, it was impressive how you avoided the orc¡¯s arm swing. As I said before, you may not be able to do it once you grow taller. But Imend your flexibility of thought.¡±


    ¡°Yes! I managed to dodge it!¡±


    Had I tried to do it, I wouldn¡¯t have been able to duck low enough, and would have hit the orc¡¯s arm. Or I would have gone too low and fallen to the ground.


    That would mean I could not attack afterwards, and the orcs would be able to hit me.


    ¡°¡­However, thest part. There is a problem with that.¡±


    He had avoided saying this earlier, as Tilura was celebrating. But since we were now talking about how to improve, Mr. Ekenhart was going to tell her.


    ¡°¡­I thought it was fine, because it had stopped¡­ Was that wrong?¡±


    ¡°As the orc had stopped due to pain and surprise, it was fine to continue attacking. However, if you are going to deal the finishing blow, you should do it when you are certain. Like Mr. Takumi, who stabbed it in the back while it was on the ground.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­¡±


    Tilura seemed like she didn¡¯t quite understand what he was saying.


    As Mr. Ekenhart and I had been watching from far away, we understood the situation. The orc had been making ast attempt to attack, while the sword was stuck into it.


    But since Tilura was close to it, and the sword was deep into the orc, she might not have seen its raised arm.


    ¡°Tilura, you might not have seen it, but¡­ The orc was moving its left arm as if it was about to do something. Had it had just a few more seconds of life¡­you might have been hit. And even if it would likely be a weak attack, it is best to avoid any such injuries.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    Tilrura now realized her mistake and nodded.


    As fighting was serious, he had to be strict regarding the small things too. But I thought it was impressive that Tilura was able to do so much at this age.


    None of the children I knew would have been able to fight with a sword like she did.


    Well, this was a world of monsters¡­ So it was different.


    ¡°Also, there are things to consider about what happened after as well.¡±


    ¡°After¡­? Uh, do you mean how I tumbled down with the orc?¡±


    ¡°Mmm. Well, since you were facing just one enemy, I don¡¯t really mind. But that would have left you open if there were other enemies.¡±


    ¡°But¡­ As I had pushed the de in so deep, I couldn¡¯t pull it out again¡­¡±


    ¡°If you cannot pull out the sword, why didn¡¯t you just let go of it?¡±


    ¡°But¡­then the weapon¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, you wouldn¡¯t be able to fight without it. But it is just a tool. It is not important if you are in danger. You need to think about yourself first. There may even be times when you will have to throw your weapon at an enemy and run. Well, that is an extreme case.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    I nodded in agreement at this.


    It was simr to what Sebastian had told me when teaching me magic.


    You had to prioritize protecting your own life, think of the right actions, and act on them.


    Throwing your weapon and running was kind of like using magic to stun an enemy so you could escape.


    Even though Tilura had trained, she was still a child.


    And so she could not match the power of a monster or adult.


    Perhaps knowing that she could not fight well without a weapon, she was more hesitant to let it go.


    Still, Mr. Ekenhart wanted her to think about protecting herself, and not just winning.


    While Tilura had been happy about defeating the orc, there were more reflection points than she was expecting, and she nodded despondently.


    ¡°¡­Still, while there were some mistakes, you did good for your first time¡­ Very well. Some people get so nervous that they cannot do anything. Well done, Tilura.¡±


    Indeed. While Tilura had been nervous for most of the day, after talking to her and letting her y with Leo¡­she was fine. But then she got nervous again.


    But in spite of that, she was able to move fine as soon as the battle began.


    Perhaps she was good when it counted¡­ It might mean that she had the qualities of a good leader. Or was I overthinking it?


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 498

    Chapter 498


    Sherry wanted advice as well


    After praising Tilura, Mr. Ekenhart got up and walked over to her and patted her on the head.


    ¡°¡­Ehehe. Father praised me.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m happy for you, Tilura. ¡­You could have done it a little less awkwardly?¡±


    ¡°¡­It cannot be helped. I am not very good at praising my daughters.¡±


    Even though there were reflection points, Tilura was happy to be praised by her father, andughed cheerfully.


    Well, it was true that Mr. Ekenhart usually lived far away, in a different house, so perhaps he did not have much opportunity to act like this with them¡­


    ¡°Now, I think we covered everything¡­¡±


    ¡°Kyau! Kyau!¡±


    ¡°So you really want to join, Sherry?¡±


    ¡°Kyu!¡±


    After letting go of Tilura, Mr. Ekenhart was about to bring the meeting to a close. But then Sherry started barking.


    As Liza and Ms. ire were not present, I didn¡¯t know what she was saying, but she was likely objecting to the fact that she had been left out.


    Mr. Ekenhart must have thought so too, as he asked her, and Sherry nodded.


    She had been sitting next to us the whole time¡­so it was not really surprising. Still, what advice could she be given?


    Sherry had only fought the orc because Leo made her do it. But I suppose her fenrir instincts had kicked in, and she was now more enthusiastic about fighting.


    But it was just a few days ago that she was always with Ms. ire or ying with Leo.


    Perhapsing to the forest had awakened some of her wild instincts¡­ Though, I wasn¡¯t sure what humans like me and Mr. Ekenhart could tell her.


    ¡°Hmm¡­indeed¡­though, monster battles are¡­not quite the same as fighting with a weapon.¡±


    ¡°Kyau?¡±


    You don¡¯t know? Sherry seemed to ask, as Mr. Ekenhart thought with a serious expression. But it could not be helped.


    While Mr. Ekenhart was a master swordsman, and was used to fighting against monsters, when it came to how a monster should fight¡­ and fenrir¡­he would not know.


    He might have some knowledge, but I doubted it would be much use to Sherry.


    And while I didn¡¯t want to disturb her while she was ying, it was best to ask Leo.


    ¡°¡­I will go and call Leo. She will now. And she was already giving some advice earlier. Besides, we need Liza or Ms. ire to understand what Sherry is saying.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Thank you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    I made the suggestion to Mr. Ekenhart, and then walked over to the river.


    Leo was near the center and sshing around, doing the doggy paddle. But she made sure that Liza did not get drenched.


    ¡°Hey, Leo! Come over here!¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff! Wou!¡±


    ¡°Papa! Kya! Ahahaha! That was amazing, mama!¡±


    After I shouted towards her, Leo looked towards me. Then her legs touched the bottom of the river, and she jumped!


    While still riding on Leo¡¯s back, Lizaughed happily. It was like she was on an amusement park ride.


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Sorry to disturb you while you¡¯re having fun. But I need to ask you some things regarding Sherry. Will youe?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll go too! I want to talk with Sherry.¡±


    ¡°Of course. In fact, it will help if you are there.¡±


    Leo hadnded perfectly right next to me, and then turned her head to the side questioningly.


    I apologized and then asked her toe with me, which she agreed to.


    Liza also wanted toe, which meant that I wouldn¡¯t have to call Ms. ire.


    But first¡­


    ¡°Uhh¡­ Ah, there you are. ¡­I¡¯m sorry, where are the towels¡­?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. For Leo, yes? I will do it, so you can take Liza.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    Perhaps Leo would dry quickly in front of the fire, but I didn¡¯t want to take her there soaking wet.


    And so I asked a maid for a towel, and she offered to dry Leo for me.


    In the meantime, I dried Liza¡¯s tail, which had gotten wet.


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Kyaha!¡±


    Even while she was being dried, Leo shook her body to shake off the water.


    And as always, it went flying everywhere.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 499

    Chapter 499


    Liza interpreted


    ¡°The tail really absorbs a lot of water¡­¡±


    ¡°It was heavy. Thanks, papa!¡±


    While it could not be driedpletely with just a towel, I was able to get most of the water out. The fire would do the rest.


    Later, I might have to brush her along with Leo, so their fur returned to their normal state.


    ¡­Well, they would just go back into the river again. So that would have to be after we returned to the mansion.


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Liza and I helped the maid dry off Leo, and then we returned to the bonfire where the others waited.


    Sherry was now sitting on Tilura¡¯sp and yawningzily.


    But when she saw Leo approaching, she jumped down and sat upright next to her.


    ¡°Sister Tilura. Is the meeting finished?¡±


    ¡°It is for me. But there is still Sherry left. And so we were waiting for you and Leo.¡±


    ¡°I see!¡±


    Liza went and sat on Tilura¡¯sp.


    She had been curious about what we were talking about.


    While Liza was smaller than Tilura, they were not that different in age, and so it seemed awkward¡­


    But they were both smiling and seemed to be having fun at least.


    ¡°Now, we will discuss the earlier battle, as Sherry requested.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°So, where should we start¡­ Yes, how about when Sherry first charged into the orc?¡±


    ¡°Kyau! Kyau! Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Sorry Liza. Can you tell us what Sherry is saying?¡±


    ¡°Uh, she said that since everyone went towards the orc, she did the same!¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­I see¡­¡±


    So, Sherry hadn¡¯t done it to gain any advantage. She just copied Tilura and me¡­


    While she had decent speed and momentum, I had thought that she would sh with her ws or bite, like Leo¡­ But she hadn¡¯t been thinking about that.


    Hmm¡­


    ¡°Look here, Sherry. You do not have a weapon, do you? Well, you can bite people, I suppose¡­ But you need to think more before jumping out like that. Understand?¡±


    ¡°Wou! Wou! Grau! Wuff! Grau-grau!¡±


    ¡°Hmm, that¡¯s right! Whether you use ws or fangs, there were other ways, like jumping when you are closer, or jumping higher! That¡¯s what she said.¡±


    ¡°Kyau¡­¡±


    ¡°She said¡­yes.¡±


    In spite of being far away from the orc, Sherry¡¯s first move had been to jump towards it.


    It would have been fine if she could move like Leo, who was so fast that the orc couldn¡¯t even move. However, the orc had its eyes fixed on Sherry, and was able to swing its arm.


    As Mr. Ekenhart said, she should think more before acting. And Leo¡¯s advice about jumping when you are closer, or biting, also seemed like it would be more effective.


    Well, like Tilura, this was Sherry¡¯s first battle. So perhaps it could not be helped that she would rely on instincts and be reckless¡­


    ¡°As for your movements, I¡¯m sure Leo will have plenty to teach youter. Isn¡¯t that right?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyau¡­¡±


    As the way that fenrirs moved was too different from humans, Mr. Ekenhart did not have any advice for her.


    But Leo would teach her instead.


    Upon hearing this, Sherry recalled how she had been made to run endlessly through the garden, and she did not sound enthusiastic.


    Would she also practice jumping, shing and biting? I kind of wanted to see that.


    ¡°So¡­and then you were hit by the orc¡¯s arm and knocked away¡­ And so I suppose I should ask you. Are you alright, Sherry?¡±


    ¡°Kyuu?¡±


    ¡°Well, it seemed to hit you quite hard. And you fell on the ground¡­¡±


    ¡°Kyau¡­kyu! Kyu!¡±


    ¡°She is saying that she¡¯s fine.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart was concerned about whether Sherry was injured when being struck by the orc.


    Now that I thought about it, she had been hit quite hard. We had forgotten, because the shock of Sherry using magic in rapid session was so strong.


    Still, if she were a human, she would have probably been hurt by that.


    However, Sherry tilted her head as if puzzled.


    And after having it exined to her, she barked and then ran around us as if to show that she was perfectly fine.


    While Liza interpreted for her, it was quite clear just by watching.


    There was no trace of any injury, and she was the usual, energetic Sherry.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 500

    Chapter 500


    The reason that Sherry was not injured


    ¡°Hmm¡­I guess it¡¯s because she is a fenrir. To not be injured after being hit so hard¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff-wou!¡±


    ¡°Uhhh, she says that fenrirs are able to protect themselves by enveloping their bodies in magic energy. That¡¯s why she wasn¡¯t injured.¡±


    ¡°¡­That is¡­so she is like Leo then¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wou-wuff-wou-wuff. Wou-wou-grau-wuff.¡±


    ¡°While true, it¡¯s not as strong as a Silver Fenrir, she says. That¡¯s why Sherry was hurt by the trolls.¡±


    ¡°So she can guard herself against orcs, but not trolls. Well, they can easily destroy a human¡¯s body¡­¡±


    Now that I thought about it, I had heard that Leo could not be injured when being hit by a sword, because of the magic energy within her fur.


    And so when training, we never had to worry about hitting Leo. Even Mr. Ekenhart seemed to be doing it quite seriously during the mock battles.


    So I suppose Sherry had something simr.


    As for the trolls, I had seen one on the way to Range vige, and the way it attacked with its club and thick arms¡­like Mr. Ekenhart said, they would be able to destroy a human with ease.


    Sherry¡¯s leg had been broken when we first found her. That showed how powerful the attack was.


    And yet such an attack was still nothing for Leo. It was no wonder Silver Fenrirs were considered to be the strongest monsters.


    ¡°Ho¡­both Leo and Sherry are amazing!¡±


    ¡°Kyu, kyuu?¡±


    ¡°Sister Tilura¡­ Sherry is saying that she isn¡¯t as amazing as mama¡­I mean, Leo.¡±


    As Tilura muttered in awe, Sherry turned to her and barked.


    And then Liza interpreted it for her.


    ¡°As Leo is a Silver Fenrir, it is obvious that she is amazing, but I think fenrirs are impressive as well! If I was hit by that same attack¡­I wouldn¡¯t be able to stand again¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed. While I don¡¯t like to think about it, you would definitely have been injured if hit by that attack.¡±


    ¡°Yes, yes. And so Sherry is amazing too!¡±


    ¡°Kyau¡­kyu!¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Kyau¡­¡±


    As it was just a simple attack, it probably wouldn¡¯t have killed Tilura.


    But she would have still been hurt. And perhaps if she was unlucky, it would have been a grave injury.


    It was her first fight, and she was not used to pain, so she might not have been able to move. So it was impressive that Sherry was unhurt, and able to continue the fight soon after.


    Perhaps it was because she had already been hurt once, and was used to the pain. And it was possible that fenrirs did not feel much pain to begin with.


    In any case, Mr. Ekenhart nodded at Tilura¡¯s reaction.


    ¡­As a father, he did not want to imagine Tilura getting hurt.


    ¡°Well, in any case, it was a good thing that Sherry was a fenrir. So that is why Leo kept saying that a fenrir would never be defeated by an orc.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wuff-wou-wou. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°She is saying that it¡¯s one thing if the fenrir can¡¯t move, and there is a group of orcs attacking it¡­but if there is only one orc, then it¡¯s no problem!¡±


    ¡°¡­But such a situation would be very rare. In general, it would be best to think that an orc cannot beat a fenrir. And Leo knew this, so she made Sherry fight the orc.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Uhh¡­she is saying that she still didn¡¯t expect Sherry to jump out without thinking¡­¡±


    ¡°Kyuu¡­¡±


    Well, Sherry was still young, and had been separated from her parents before she could learn to hunt.


    So even if she had the will to fight, she did not know how.


    ¡­But it seemed like Leo felt that you should know by instinct.


    Leo had originally been a small Maltese, so she shouldn¡¯t have known how to fight either. But as soon as she turned into a Silver Fenrir, she was able to fight orcs with ease.


    That had been quite a surprise¡­ Perhaps bing a Silver Fenrir had affected her instincts.


    In any case, I sat next to Leo and petted her, so that she wouldn¡¯t be too harsh on Sherry.


    ¡°As for fighting, she can learn from you and from experience. So don¡¯t be too hard on her, okay? Also, she did well with the magic.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­wuff.¡±


    I said while petting Leo.


    As someone who had only started learning magic recently, I had been very impressed with Sherry¡¯s magic.


    Mr. Ekenhart had also been surprised by how she used it in rapid session, and it was very effective against the orc.


    Leo barked as if to say that it could not be helped.


    Would she be easier on Sherry now?


    Sherry was sitting next to us, and looked like she was relieved.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 501

    Chapter 501


    Fenrirs were even more dangerous than expected


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s right. I was aware, as it is widely known that they use magic, but¡­ I didn¡¯t know they could use it in quick session. Good Leo, can all fenrirs do it like that?¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wou¡­ Wuff-wuff. Wuff. Wuff-wuff?¡±


    ¡°Hmm. She is saying that since Sherry could do it, the other fenrirs can likely do it too!¡±


    ¡°So Leo doesn¡¯t know for sure¡­¡±


    ¡°Have you ever seen another fenrir do something like that¡­?¡±


    So there were things that even Leo did not know¡­ Well, it was no surprise.


    Just because she was a Silver Fenrir, it didn¡¯t mean she would know everything.


    ¡°Well, Sherry is the first fenrir that I¡¯ve met. After all, they are not often sighted by people. There is not much information. But we do know how they fight.¡±


    ¡°Is that so? ¡­Then this forest must be quite special.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Normally, they live deep in vast forests. And few would go to such ces in order to encounter powerful monsters. It would be fine perhaps if there was just one, but to face a whole pack. You would be dead in an instant. I have heard that asionally, fools who want to test their strength go into the forest, and never return.¡±


    ¡°So fenrirs themselves are well-known and feared¡­¡±


    I had assumed that Mr. Ekenhart would have some experience with fighting fenrirs, but that was apparently not the case.


    Well, he was the duke and an important person, so there was no reason to be reckless and put himself in danger.


    Besides, they were deep in the forest. So even if you were foolish enough to go, there was no guarantee that you would actually find them.


    Thinking about it like that, it was quite astonishing that Ms. ire had wanted toe here in order to search for Silver Fenris.


    Well, Leo was with us. But I still remember how frantic Sebastian and the maids had been.


    ¡°While we don¡¯t know if all of them can do it¡­we do know that Sherry can use magic like that. But it¡¯s too early to assume Sherry is special. We must be even more on our guard against fenrirs than before.¡±


    ¡°What are you going to do?¡±


    Clearly Mr. Ekenhart was thinking about something¡­ Did he have a n when it came to dealing with them?


    ¡°Oh, it¡¯s quite simple. The people must know more about how much of a threat the fenrir can be. And then forbid them from entering ces where fenris are known to live. Currently, there have been no reports of fenrirs attacking humans. That doesn¡¯t include people who entered their forest on their own. Well, once I return to the mansion¡­no, the main house. I will deal with the matter.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­yes.¡±


    He should make sure that people knew that they were dangerous, in order to avoid any casualties.


    I was d that he didn¡¯t think of anything extreme, like removing the danger by getting rid of the fenrirs¡­


    ¡°¡­Also¡­ Regarding that¡­.good Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Can you also use magic like that? Surely a Silver Fenrir¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart asked Leo hesitantly.


    Indeed, a Silver Fenrir was a stronger version of a fenrir.


    I was sure that she could¡­ My buddy was incredibly strong.


    ¡°Wou! Wuff?¡±


    ¡°No, I don¡¯t think you should do that, Leo. I think it will cause trouble¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°What did she say? ¡­Though, if you stopped it, I can only imagine¡­¡±


    ¡°You tell him, Liza.¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course! She is asking if she should use it?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ While I would like to see it, there is no need right now. Sorry, good Leo. Maybe next time¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Leo had stood up enthusiastically, and I had to call and pet her to make her stop.


    As Liza seemed to like interpreting, I asked her to do it. I had seen in Leo¡¯s eyes that she wanted to use strong magic.


    And so she did not look very happy as she sat back down.


    ¡­One day, I would let her do it in a ce where I didn¡¯t have to worry about the surrounding area¡­ Though, she would probably still have to hold back.


    Mr. Ekenhart seemed to have sensed it as well, and he apologized and asked Leo to not use it now.


    And while Leo sighed, she understood and agreed.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 502

    Chapter 502


    Liza was interested as well


    ¡°Hey, hey, sister Tilura. I don¡¯t know much about magic, but, how was it like to fight?¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Well¡­¡±


    While Mr. Ekenhart and I were relieved that Leo would not be using her magic, Liza looked up at Tilura and questioned her with shining eyes.


    Liza had been watching us from a distance. So perhaps she was interested in fighting¡­?


    ¡°I ran as fast as I could, and swung with all of my might¡­ And when it was dangerous, I moved out of the way¡­ Uh, I was quite nervous, and it¡¯s difficult to exin¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, I see¡­!¡±


    ¡°Well, it was your first time, so it cannot be helped. As long as you remember your mistakes so that you can do better next time.¡±


    Tilura had a serious expression as she tried to exin it to Liza.


    But she was having trouble describing it.


    Perhaps Tilura was more of an instinctive person than a theoretical person.


    Well, she was still young, and it would have been quite the unusual talent if she was able to calmly ry the details of her first battle step by step.


    Still, I could see that Liza was enjoying listening to Tilura talk.


    Was she not scared when Tilura was knocked away, or when the orc charged at such a great speed¡­?


    ¡°You didn¡¯t feel scared at all, Liza?¡±


    ¡°No, because you and mama were here. Besides¡­I don¡¯t know¡­there wasn¡¯t much¡­hostile¡­it wasn¡¯t scary¡­¡±


    ¡°Scary¡­because they weren¡¯t hostile?¡±


    ¡°Yes! That¡¯s why I wasn¡¯t scared!¡±


    ¡°Hmm. Well, I suppose it was quite different from the hostility in the slums. And the orcs don¡¯t feel threatening in the same way¡­¡±


    However, the orcs were definitely trying to kill us.


    I suppose it was a different, less personal emotion, but the two could mix.


    Well, at least with the orcs, it was mostly instinct. They weren¡¯t trying to make us suffer, and there was no hatred.


    ¡­Well, they were still angry after being provoked by Phillip.


    In any case, she did not sense the same kind of dark emotions from them.


    Personally, I thought the pure intent to kill was quite scary, but Liza thought differently.


    Of course, part of it was also because Leo and I were here.


    ¡°I want to fight too! So I can be useful to you and mama!¡±


    ¡°What!?¡±


    ¡°What!?¡±


    ¡°What!?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!?¡±


    ¡°¡­Kyau.¡±


    Perhaps it was curiosity, but now Liza was saying that she wanted to fight the orcs as well.


    It was possible that Liza was stronger than them¡­ The thought had crossed my mind before, however, it was too dangerous to put to the test.


    Aside from me, Mr. Ekenhart and Tilura were also surprised. Even Leo was shocked.


    Only Sherry seemed confused¡­


    ¡°Uh¡­ Liza? You really don¡¯t need to go around fighting orcs in order to help me and Leo, you know?¡±


    ¡°Really? But Sherry was told to get her own food¡­ And I want to get food for you and mama! Besides, my grandfather used to say¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, we have plenty of orc meat, so you don¡¯t need to¡­ Uh, what is it that he used to say?¡±


    With Sherry, it was to awaken her instincts, and for her diet¡­


    It was all things that Leo had decided on.


    Liza was different. I wanted her to spend her timeughing in safety, so there was no need to think about such things¡­


    ¡°He said, ¡®They that do not work, shall not eat.¡¯ But I was still young, and he said that I don¡¯t need to, but¡­ But working is like hunting orcs, isn¡¯t it? I thought that was how you acquire food. Until you saved me, I didn¡¯t work, and so I couldn¡¯t eat much.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­well¡­¡±


    ¡°Woud¡­wuff? ¡­Wou.¡±


    Liza¡¯s expression kept changing as she talking about Mr. Reyndorf. And not just me and Leo, but the others also did not know how to react.


    Leo sounded like she regretted what she said to Sherry.


    Because now Liza seemed to misunderstand what it meant to work¡­


    And the reason was that Leo had decided that Sherry should get her own food, and hunt orcs for lunch.


    Well, as she had frozen that orc, she ended up eating a different one in the end¡­


    In any case, it was because of Sherry¡¯s efforts that Liza now felt that she should do the same.


    As she had not done that in the slums, she felt it was the reason that she went hungry.


    Also, I had heard that the beastkin were originally hunters¡­ So perhaps that was part of it. Or was I overthinking it?


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 503

    Chapter 503


    We decided on a test of skill


    ¡°I just saw the orcs being defeated, so it should be fine! Uhh¡­and because I have this too! ¡­Probably.¡±


    Liza had watched us fighting from far away, and based on that, she thought she was fine.


    Also, there was the knife I had bought for her in Ractos¡­


    It looked big in her hands as she raised it andughed.


    However, in spite of this will, I did not want to put her in any danger.


    ¡­But how could I persuade her of this?


    She was so enthusiastic, and so I didn¡¯t want to say no without a good reason¡­


    ¡°¡­While you should probably refuse¡­it¡¯s also true that Liza was able to run with Leo and Sherry without looking very tired¡­ Even a well-trained human would not have been able to do that¡­ However¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Mr. Ekenhart?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    As I was trying to figure out a way of keeping Liza out of harm¡¯s way, Mr. Ekenhart suddenly started muttering.


    It seemed like he wasn¡¯t sure what to do either¡­but I had a bad feeling about it.


    He was Ms. ire and Tilura¡¯s father, and was the reason that the two were brimming with curiosity¡­


    While I wouldn¡¯t call him reckless, he was always trying to test things that he found interesting¡­


    And so he might want to see Liza take on an orc¡­


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s about Liza. Perhaps allowing her to¡­fight orcs would be good as an experience?¡±


    ¡°¡­Perhaps. It was for Tilura. However, that was after she went through a lot of training, so she knew how to handle a weapon¡­¡±


    ¡°I understand that. And so, why not test it?¡±


    ¡°Test it?¡±


    ¡°Yes. And then we can decide if she should fight against orcs. If we think she is not ready, then we will forbid her from doing it. However, if she is¡­¡±


    ¡°Then you will let her fight them?¡±


    ¡°Exactly.¡±


    Apparently, Mr. Ekenhart was thinking about letting Liza fight the orcs.


    To gain experience¡­ Indeed, it would not be a bad thing to experience fighting monsters.


    As this was a world that was filled with monsters, you never knew what might happen.


    Just like when Range vige was attacked by orcs.


    However, I didn¡¯t think that it had to be now.


    Perhaps when Liza had grown a little more¡­ At least when she was as old as Tilura. But preferably older.


    That way, she would be able to train.


    Leo seemed like she also wanted to say something, but held it back as I petted her.


    ¡°Uhh¡­ So, if I do something, I can fight an orc? ¡­I don¡¯t know what it is, but I¡¯ll do my best! I¡¯ll show you, mama and papa!¡±


    ¡°Liza, are you sure?¡±


    ¡°Yes, sister Tilura. You and Sherry did it. And I¡¯ve seen mama and papa fight, so now it¡¯s my turn!¡±


    ¡°Liza¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°It seems like she is eager. While I am mostly against it, I don¡¯t want to discourage her either¡­ Well, don¡¯t worry. Testing may sound simple, but I mean to be harsh when making the decision. After all, I do not want her to get hurt. ¡­Though, I also have high expectations.¡±


    While Liza did not seem to fully understand what Mr. Ekenhart was saying, she was still eager to do it.


    I didn¡¯t know what he was going to make her do, but he said she would be safe, and harsh when judging¡­ And I suppose he could use that to make her give up on fighting the orcs.


    However, it also sounded like he hoped to see her fight¡­


    ¡°So, father? What is the meaning of this?¡±


    ¡°Uh, ire¡­well. Liza¡­?¡±


    We had left the bonfire in order to put Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s n into action.


    But then Ms. ire noticed that the meeting had ended, and she, along with Ms. Anne and the guards walked towards us.


    She had been smiling at first, but then she saw that Liza was holding her knife with a serious expression, and immediately assumed that her father had thought of something reckless again.


    Leo, Tilura, Sherry and I were standing behind Liza and watching nervously.


    As Mr. Ekenhart tried to exin to Ms. ire, I turned my eyes towards Liza, who had taken the knife out of its sheath¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 504

    Chapter 504


    Liza was highly motivated


    ¡°Hmph! Hmph!¡±


    Liza was swinging her knife around enthusiastically.


    This was the first time I actually saw her using it, and it didn¡¯t seem like she was in any danger of hurting herself.


    Perhaps Mr. Reyndorf had taught her a little, or she learned it while living in the slums.


    Still, as Liza had short arms, she did not look too capable either.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m fine, mama! I¡¯m going to do my best!


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Kyu?¡±


    As I was thinking about it, Leo pushed her nose towards Liza and barked with concern.


    But Liza justughed confidently and replied.


    She hadn¡¯t lookedpletely sure earlier, but it seemed like holding the knife had helped her.


    As for Sherry¡­she did not seem to understand why people were worried.


    After all, she was both younger and smaller than Liza.


    Not only that, but while Sherry had quickly be exhausted while running in the garden, Liza had always been fine.


    ¡°Father! Why don¡¯t you stop her!? To allow someone so young to fight!¡±


    ¡°Ca-calm down, ire¡­ I have thought this through, understand? Not only can I hold back, but I can make her give up without her getting injured¡­¡±


    I could hear Ms. ire¡¯s angry voice¡­ This was probably going to take awhile.


    Ms. ire saw Liza as being like a little sister now, and so she was mad at her father.


    But while he seemed overwhelmed, he tried to exin.


    Still, I also felt worried about the idea of letting Liza fight with a knife¡­


    Regardless, I was able to listen to their conversation from where I stood. As was Leo, as she had good ears.


    And this is what Mr. Ekenhart said.


    First, in order to determine whether or not she had enough skill, she would have to fight Mr. Ekehnhart.


    Of course, he was only going to dodge her attacks and defend himself.


    Like this, he could see how Liza moved and make a decision.


    And since Liza had not been trained to use a weapon, there was no way that she would be able to do anything. His expectation was that she would just swing in the air and never hit him.


    And so Liza would realize that she was not ready yet, and we would decide that it was too early for her to be fighting orcs.


    We were all already very worried, and so we would be very strict when judging her.


    This way, we could prevent her from fighting without hurting Liza¡¯s feelings.


    ¡­Well, Liza was likely to be sad if she realized she couldn¡¯t do it, but¡­ As Mr. Ekenhart said, it was better for her future to do it this way, then reject herpletely from the beginning.


    ¡°Lady ire, perhaps that is enough¡­¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­very well. I understand your intention now, father. But if Liza is hurt even a little¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes?¡±


    ¡°Neither I nor Tilura will speak to you for some time!¡±


    ¡°Tsk. That hurts¡­ I was never going to allow it in the first ce, but I will be extra careful now. I promise.¡±


    ¡°Yes, do that. ¡­Well, I won¡¯t even have to do anything, because I¡¯m sure that good Leo will scold you first¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°¡­I will definitely not hurt her! Yes!¡±


    Sebastian finally went in and stopped Ms. ier.


    But before stepping away, Ms. ire spoke to him in a low, threatening voice.


    It did not seem like much of a threat, but I suppose it was a big deal for him as their father.


    I would probably take it badly if Liza refused to speak to me for a few days¡­ Of course, she wouldn¡¯t do that.


    As Tilura was also nodding, Mr. Ekenhart promised to be extra careful.


    Ms. ire really was merciless when it came to her father¡­well, Ms. Anne as well¡­ But she was nice to almost everyone else.


    Leo was also ring at Mr. Ekenhart.


    At this point, I was starting to feel sorry for him.


    After all, it was Liza who had insisted on it.


    ¡­That being said, if Liza did get hurt, even I wouldn¡¯t be able to stop Leo.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 505

    Chapter 505


    Liza surprised everyone


    ¡°So then, I will give the signal to start¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you, Phillip.¡±


    After Sebastian took Ms. ire away to where Ms. Anne and the others were, Phillip took a step forward, and then moved in between Mr. Ekenhart and Liza, who were facing each other.


    ¡°Liza. You must think of my father as an enemy, and do your best!¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Fight the duke with everything you have!¡±


    ¡°Yes, I¡¯ll do my best!¡±


    Ms. ire and Ms. Anne shouted their support.


    That was fine¡­ But I felt a little bad for Mr. Ekenhart¡­


    Even Ms. Anne was rooting against him¡­ Perhaps she was holding a grudge?


    No, it was probably just that she was fond of Liza, and agreeing with Ms. ire without much thought.


    ¡°Now, Liza. Be careful¡­that you don¡¯t hurt yourself.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°Do your best, Liza!¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    I also moved away, but said a few words first.


    As I didn¡¯t want to encourage her to be reckless, I just told her to be careful.


    But Leo barked as if to say, ¡®get him!¡¯ In spite of sounding worried a moment ago, now that it was happening, she wanted Liza to go all out.


    In any case, we went over to where the others were waiting.


    Now we just had to wait for Phillip¡¯s signal.


    Liza was wielding her knife, and while Mr. Ekenhart had his sword, it seemed like he had no intention of swinging it, as it was pointed towards the ground.


    After all, he was just going to dodge and asionally block. There would be no counter attacks.


    It would have been better if he had a wooden sword¡­but no one had brought one, as we didn¡¯t n to do this.


    ¡°Are you both ready?¡±


    ¡°Mmm.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart nodded calmly, while Liza held her knife in a backhand grip, close to her face, and shouted.


    Hmm¡­backhand grip?


    She hadn¡¯t been holding it like that before. Had Mr. Reyndorf taught her¡­?


    ¡°Then¡­begin!¡±


    Well, I would have to ask herter. Right now, I would watch and pray that she did not get hurt.


    ¡°Hah!¡±


    ¡°Huh!?¡±


    After the signal, Liza seemed to crouch for a second, before jumping out as if bouncing.


    And like that, she moved towards Mr. Ekenhart in a straight line, at a speed I did not expect to see. Everyone else¡¯s expressions turned to that of shock.


    ¡­Except for Leo and Sherry.


    In any case, Liza was rushing towards Mr. Ekenhart at a speed that was faster than when Sherry charged at the orc.


    And as she got closer, she raised the knife into the air.


    ¡°Hyah!¡±


    ¡°Hmm! Tsk!¡±


    And without losing any momentum, she swung down as if to aim for Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s chest.


    While she was short, if she raised her arm, she would just be able to reach his heart.


    Mr. Ekenhart was stunned at her speed, but quickly regained his calm and jumped back.


    ¡°Hmm. I missed¡­¡±


    Liza muttered with disappointment.


    I was d that she hadn¡¯t hit him¡­


    But no one had expected Liza to move like that, and target his heart with such precision.


    Had it been me, I would have been too shocked to dodge it¡­


    ¡°To suddenly attack my vitals like that¡­ How frightening. And that speed¡­ I can also sense a faint magic energy¡­ I cannot let my guard down.¡±


    ¡°Magic energy¡­? I don¡¯t know. But grandfather always told me to use all of my power! And so did mama.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Reyndorf¡­ What did he tell her¡­ No, it is a good thing, but¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart muttered as he looked at Liza.


    While I had never met him, I don¡¯t know if this was the kind of thing that she needed to go all out in¡­


    But perhaps he himself did not think she would apply it when it came to battle¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 506

    Chapter 506


    The four of us talked


    ¡°I heard the beastkin are more athletic than humans¡­ Besides¡­¡±


    ¡°You sensed it too, Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°Yes, Your Grace. I believe she was using magic energy.¡±


    ¡°Magic energy? Yes I did sense something a little strange when Liza was running¡­¡±


    It wasn¡¯t any visual change, or anything clear that I had seen. And so I wasn¡¯t sure. But was she really using magic energy?


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­had not used magic for very long. So it¡¯s no surprise that he cannot tell.¡±


    ¡°You can tell when someone is using magic energy?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ When one uses magic, their senses are strengthened. And that helps you to detect when someone else is using it.¡±


    ¡°Indeed, my own senses are not very developed.¡±


    ¡°Yes. But still, even sensing a little strangeness is impressive. It is not something that develops in such a short time, usually.¡±


    ¡°I think it usually takes about a year?¡±


    ¡°Yes, for people who are close by. But veterans are able to detect it from much farther away. Though, you would have to be using magic every day, on top of having the right constitution¡­¡±


    When using magic, you have to be able to detect the magic energy inside of your body.


    Now that I thought about it, when Sebastian had first started to teach me, he said that it took some people a long time before they could clearly detect the magic energy within their body.


    Regardless, if it was going to take a year¡­I probably should train more with it.


    Even if I couldn¡¯t detect it at a long distance, it would surely be useful if I could tell when someone was using magic nearby.


    That being said, I had no intention of makingbat my upation, so I didn¡¯t know how useful it would be.


    ¡°Leaving Mr. Takumi aside¡­ So, she really was using magic?¡±


    ¡°If you sensed magic energy, it is likely¡­ But she doesn¡¯t know any magic, does she? When Ms. ire taught me about magic before, she clearly did not understand very well. Though, Ms. Isabelle did say she had the potential.¡±


    While Mr. Ekenhart was not sure, I doubted that Liza could use magic.


    She barely even knew what magic was.


    She had never chanted any spells. And even if they detected magic energy, was that the same thing as using magic¡­?


    ¡°Well, it could be a special magic that the beastkin use.¡±


    ¡°Really?¡±


    What kind of magic was that¡­ Ah, Ms. Isabelle had said something about how the beastkin used different magic.


    I had been thinking about asking Sebastian about it, but the subject had nevere up, and I forgot about it after the issues with Deam¡­


    ¡°The magic that beastkin use is slightly different from humans. Well, some of it is simr¡­ But the way that they use it is different.¡±


    ¡°How so¡­?¡±


    ¡°The biggest thing is that they do not need to chant. I exined this to Mr. Takumi before, but humans need to chant and decide on the effect. However, it is not necessary for beastkin. But since they still use magic energy, it can be detected.¡±


    ¡°No chanting¡­ So Liza could be using magic without knowing it?¡±


    ¡°That is quite likely. But I do not know enough to say for sure¡­ But that gave them quite an advantage during the war, I hear. After all, very few humans can use magic without chanting.¡±


    It was a great advantage, to be able to unleash magic like that.


    Instead of lengthy chanting, you could activate magic immediately.


    But in order for humans to do it, you had to do a lot of training, and it was not something anyone could do.


    So if both sides had the same number of magicians, and they attacked each other, it would make sense that the beastkins would win.


    ¡°However, there are not many beastkin who can use magic. And the humans had more soldiers in general, so we were not defeated¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, we are not talking about the war, but Liza. So, that really was magic then? And she was using without realizing it¡­¡±


    ¡°We cannot be sure¡­ But perhaps it is an ability they can acquire subconsciously. Either through watching others or maybe when they reach a certain age. In any case, considering the movement of magic energy, her using magic is the only exnation.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes. While I have not watched her for as long as Mr. Takumi, I¡¯ve never seen her move like that before. Magic could be the only reason she is able to move like that without experience.¡±


    As for why Liza could use magic, it was probably rted to her being beastkin, but it wasn¡¯t clear.


    Regardless, the conclusion was that she had used magic when charging towards Mr. Ekenhart.


    Liza could use magic¡­ Well, that was not a bad thing¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 507

    Chapter 507


    It was difficult magic for humans


    ¡°Um¡­ In the first ce, is it really possible to use magic to make your movements faster?¡±


    Up until now, all the magic I had learned about had to do with wind and fire.


    Perhaps if you enveloped your body in wind¡­ But there had been no indication that Liza had done that.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. There is magic that can strengthen your body. Sometimes, there are soldiers and guards who can do it. ¡­It is like a trump card.¡±


    ¡°A trump card? So it is possible then¡­¡±


    Phillip answered that it could be done.


    But it was rare, and quite difficult to do.


    ¡°Because there is a price to pay¡­it has an effect on you afterwards.¡±


    ¡°In order to draw out this power, you will feel pain and fatigueter. ording to what I heard¡­it is much worse than any kind of sore muscle. You might even have trouble lifting a single finger.¡±


    ¡°Though, the effect is very impressive. It is said that it more than doubles your strength¡­ But it also depends on the user¡¯s magic. Also, you can only cast it on yourself, and not on anyone else.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Yes, that would be like a trump card. While you cannot use it casually, in desperate situations¡­¡±


    Exactly.¡±


    I didn¡¯t know how bad the pain was, once the effect stopped, but if it was anything like Sebastian described, I would not want to use it.


    Well, unless my life was in danger while being attacked by a monster.


    Though, I would have to run to a safe ce or kill the monster first.


    But wait¡­what about Liza?


    ¡°¡­Liza seems to be just fine over there.¡±


    ¡°That is what¡¯s strange. When humans use magic like that, they always feel pain and fatigue afterwards¡­¡±


    However, when I turned to look at Liza, she did not seem to be suffering from any problems at all.


    If anything, she seemed very energetic as she sshed her hands in the water andughed.


    She was clearly used to the river now.


    ¡°It might be something unique to the beastkin. As I said before, the beastkin are more athleticpared to humans¡­ And perhaps that is not only because of their bodies, but because they can use such magic.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Well, that is probably why people spread rumors about them being monsters. Everyone knows they are stronger than the average human. And during the war, people saw their terrifying speed and strength.¡±


    ¡°Yes. If there were beastkin who could strengthen their bodies without the pain, then they would have been used to fight. Perhaps the beastkin are better suited to strengthening magic, then magic involving fire and water.¡±


    ¡°Hmm. Then the idea that most beastkin not being able to use magic might be outdated.¡±


    So unlike with humans, there was no risk to using it.


    ¡°It¡¯s kind of like the body strengthening herbs that I made. Though, the effect is not as strong.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. But even if the effect is weaker, it¡¯s great that there is no pain. Depending on how you use it, your herbs can be more useful than human magic.¡±


    While it was probably an exaggeration, it was indeed less risky.


    But it really did not strengthen you that much.


    I suppose you could carry ten or twenty extra kilos, and run a little faster.


    Still, it was better than nothing, and other people could use it as well.


    ¡­Perhaps, like the time I had healed Sherry¡¯s injury, and made a herb that was more effective than Loe, I could also make an even better body strengthening herb.


    But then again, I fainted after that. And it was possible it would have some effect on me. So I was better off avoiding that.


    But wait¡­if the beastkin could use body strengthening magic¡­then what about beast monsters¡­ Since Sherry could already use magic?


    Or even Leo?


    ¡°Do you think it would be possible for Sherry and Leo to use body strengthening magic without pain as well?¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    All of them thought about it with serious expressions.


    ¡°What if¡­Leo were to use body strengthening magic like Liza¡­?¡±


    ¡°Leo does not even use her full strength already. And it¡¯s still hard to follow her¡­¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know about Sherry, but it would not be strange if good Leo could use it¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­¡±


    Everyone seemed to then imagine what Leo would be like if she were to increase her strength, and they all became silent.


    Silver Fenrirs were already said to be the strongest monsters. And so we did not even want to think about it, and quickly tried to turn our minds away¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 508

    Chapter 508


    The results of the test


    ¡°Washun!¡±


    ¡°Hya! Mama¡­!¡±


    ¡°¡­Why am I the most wet¡­?¡±


    ¡°Because you were standing in front of Leo?¡±


    While we were thinking quietly, I heard loud voicesing from the direction of the river.


    Apparently, Leo had no idea we were talking about her¡­but must have been cold, as she sneezed and then dunked her face into the water.


    As Liza and Ms. Anne were close by, they ended up getting water sshed all over them.


    ¡°So, about Liza fighting the orc..¡±


    Some timeter, we all gathered together in order to discuss the matter.


    Mr. Ekenhart sat on one side of the bonfire, and Liza sat on the other side so that she was facing him. And then Leo and I sat on either side of her.


    Ms. ire, Sebastian and Ms. Anne were together a short distance away, and had expressions of concern.


    ¡°After discussing the matter, we decided that there is no problem, if you are able to move as you did earlier. However, only when I, Leo, Mr. Takumi, or other guards are around.¡±


    ¡°Yay! Now I can be useful to papa!¡±


    ¡°¡­I¡¯m happy for you, Liza.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    While most people were against the idea of Liza fighting, after seeing her in action against Mr. Ekenhart, it was difficult to say no.


    Besides¡­there was the special beastkin magic. At that point, it would seem wrong to say that she was not ready.


    As Liza raised her hands with joy, I was d that she was not disappointed. However, I was still worried as well.


    Of course, it was in order to deal with such concerns, that Leo and the rest of us being close by was the condition.


    That being said, we were not likely to be encountering any orcs unless we were in the forest. So she would not have any opportunity to fight orcs without us anyway.


    As for Leo, she seemed quite relieved now, as she pressed her face towards Liza.


    ¡°So, we¡¯re going to fight now?¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed. I had thought about having Mr. Takumi, Tilura and Sherry fight again, but I suppose we should see Liza for now. Is that alright, Liza? Unless you are tired.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I¡¯m fine!¡±


    The n had been for us to fight again after discussing how we could improve. But Liza¡¯s test had taken up a lot of time. And so today, they would just lure out one more orc so that Liza could fight.


    Because if we all took turns fighting now, it would be dark by the time it was thest person¡¯s turn.


    Besides, it would be difficult for Phillip and the guards, who had to enter the forest¡­ We could always do it tomorrow, as there was no need to rush.


    Apparently, Liza was not tired after fighting or using magic, and so she nodded at Mr. Ekenhart.


    I didn¡¯t know how much magic energy she had used, but she definitely looked fine. And if it was necessary, Leo and I would jump in and help her.


    ¡°Now that that is settled¡­ Liza, why didn¡¯t you use that ability when you were in the slums? No one would have been able to hurt you if you did.¡±


    Indeed, the boys in the slums would not have been able to bully her like that.


    I didn¡¯t know about Deam. It would probably still be dangerous if she were attacked by a group of adults.


    Still, she would not be defenseless.


    But previously, Liza had said that things would be worse if she resisted.


    ¡°¡­Hmm. I think I might have been able to do something. But grandfather said I shouldn¡¯t use it¡­ Shouldn¡¯t show people. But I thought it would be fine here, because everyone is nice. And papa and mama are here¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­I see.¡±


    ¡°So Mr. Reyndorf knew.¡±


    ¡°It seems that way. Well, he adopted a beastkin baby, so he should have known something. In any case, Liza was just obeying his advice then.¡±


    If Liza fought back seriously, then they might have left her alone. But it was also possible that Deam would have attacked her more seriously.


    Besides, they did not know much about magic there. So it might have made them believe even more that Liza was a monster.


    After all, it seemed hard to believe that someone so small could win against a group of boys who were several years older.


    Thinking of it like that, perhaps Mr. Reyndorf had been right to tell Liza to not use it.


    Though, considering how she suffered afterwards, he might have¡­well, there was no point in thinking that now.


    He was just trying to raise a gentle child who did not use their power without need.


    In any case, Liza wasughing now. So it was fine¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 509

    Chapter 509


    Liza didn¡¯t seem to be bothered


    ¡°Alright, Leo. You have to eat the herbs again¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wou¡­¡±


    ¡°It tastes bad, doesn¡¯t it? Sorry.¡±


    ¡°¡­Wuff.¡±


    After the somewhat somber discussion, we returned to our positions.


    As I thought the effect would have worn off, I had Leo eat the herbs that would strengthen her ability to detect presences.


    However, it clearly tasted bad, as Leo scowled.


    And so I petted her and apologized.


    ¡°We¡¯re ready, Mr. Ekenhart. How is Liza?¡±


    ¡°She says she is fine. She is not nervous, like Tilura was. I suppose it¡¯s because she does not see the orcs as a thread¡­ After all, she saw you and Tilura fight them. Either they appear weak to her, or she understands her own strength, and knows that she can win¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Well, I¡¯m sure she also feels safe with me and Leo here¡­¡±


    ¡°Regardless, as long as she fights as well as she did a moment ago, she will be fine. However, I do wonder about her weapon.¡±


    ¡°She really can¡¯t wield a sword?¡±


    ¡°Mmm. The sword I and the guards use are out of the question. But even Tilura¡¯s special sword is too big. She will be off bnce with anything aside from her knife. Even though she seems to bnce with her tail¡­ It would be dangerous to give her something that will hold her back. So she might as well use the knife.¡±


    The biggest concern about Liza fighting the orcs was her weapon.


    Her reach was already short, so it would have been better to have a longer weapon, but that was difficult in the present.


    While I was feeding Leo the herbs, Mr. Ekenhart had tried to make her hold other weapons, but it was no use.


    When standing up, Liza reached the stomach of an orc, and had much shorter arms.


    And while that was usually a disadvantage in battle, it could not be helped right now.


    Furthermore, Liza tended to hold her knife in a backhand, which made the knife even shorter¡­


    So I just hoped that her speed would make up for it, and she would kill the orc without being injured¡­


    ¡°Papa. I¡¯m going to do my best, so watch me!¡±


    ¡°Aye, of course. And I will help if things get dangerous.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Yes. But I¡¯ll be fine!¡±


    Liza said with a nod, and raised her fist.


    ¡°¡­It should be soon.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. I can hear sounds from afar.¡±


    Just like before, Phillip and the other guard had gone out to lure the orc towards us.


    And since it was Liza fighting, they would be careful to only bring one this time.


    Well, even if there were more, Leo would deal with them immediately. But I was d, as I wanted Liza to be able to focus on just one.


    As I turned my attention to the forest, I heard the sounds of rustling.


    It should only be a minute or more now.


    Because they were being careful, the orc would likely not be too excited either.


    ¡°Ha-ha-hmm¡­¡±


    In the meantime, Liza was moving around and stretching in preparation.


    Her eyes were still directed towards the forest, so I could not see her expression. But she still seemed calm.


    ¡°Liza. I was nervous¡­but she isn¡¯t. That¡¯s amazing.¡±


    Tilura muttered as she stood with Ms. ire and Ms. Anne.


    Indeed, she had been quite nervous¡­ Well, once the battle actually started, she had been fine. So that was also impressive.


    As for Ms. ire, she was watching from a closer distance this time, as she was worried about Liza. And Ms. Anne was with her.

 Chapter 510

    Chapter 510


    Liza¡¯s battle with the orc


    ¡°Here ites!¡±


    ¡°It appears that way¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Liza¡­¡±


    There was the rustling of leaves, and then Phillip and the other guard came out of the forest.


    Tilura was the first to react to it.


    She had been like this before her own fight as well, but she also saw Liza like a little sister, and so she was nervous for her.


    Mr. Ekenhart nodded at Tilura, and looked towards Liza¡­hoping that she would not get hurt¡­


    Leo also barked quietly as she watched.


    Ms. ire and Ms. Anne held their hands together as if they were praying.


    ¡°Lady Liza, are you alright?!¡±


    ¡°Yes, I¡¯m fine!¡±


    ¡°Well, I¡¯ll leave it to you then!¡±


    ¡°Gyuo?¡±


    Phillip and the guard made sure that Liza was ready, and then they rushed past her.


    And then a single orc slowly emerged from the forest, and looked at Liza with a puzzled expression.


    I suppose it was surprised that its target had turned into a small girl¡­ And it seemed like Phillip had seeded in bringing it without angering it too much.


    ¡­I wished that my orc was like this one.


    ¡°¡­Liza!¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°Yes, papa, mama. Just watch me!¡±


    ¡°Gyu!?¡±


    Liza replied without looking back at us, and then she charged towards the orc.


    The knife was held tightly in a backhand grip.


    The orc seemed to be confused about what was happening. But it quickly changed its stance, as if it was going to attack. And it then raised its right arm, just like the other orc had done with Tilura.


    ¡°I¡¯ll take it down like papa and mama did!¡±


    ¡°Gyuo!?¡±


    The orc let out a strange cry once again.


    After all, Liza was shouting while running at an unbelievable speed.


    There had been dozens of meters between them at first, but before the orc could fully regain its calm, Liza was already in striking distance.


    She might even be faster than Sherry¡­ Though, Sherry was a little overweight.


    ¡°So fast!?¡±


    ¡°Hyah!¡±


    ¡°GiiI!¡±


    As Mr. Ekenhart eximed in rm, Liza shouted and thrust her knife into the orc¡¯s right shoulder.


    The orc screamed. Now it was unable to raise its arm to strike.


    ¡°Gyuuuooo!!¡±


    ¡°Hmm! Mmm! You won¡¯t hit me!¡±


    The orc desperately tried to hit Liza by swinging its other arm. But Liza pulled out the knife with both hands and quickly jumped away.


    I suppose it took time to pull it out, because it went in quite deeply.


    While I was scared for a moment, the orc¡¯s arm didn¡¯t even scratch her, so it was fine.


    ¡°Gyu! Gyu! Gyuuaaaa!!¡±


    As the wound became wider after the knife was pulled out, blood began to pour from the shoulder.


    The orc screamed from the pain, and its face became red with rage.


    While she dealt some damage, was it worth making it angry?


    ¡°Hah!¡±


    ¡°Gyuu!!¡±


    ¡°Now you can¡¯t do anything dangerous!¡±


    Liza jumped and shed at the orc with her knife.


    It cut deep into the orc¡¯s left shoulder.


    As the de was short, it was not able to cut it off, but it was deep enough to hit the nerves, and the arm went limp.


    So Liza had been thinking about how to chip away at the orc¡¯sbat ability, and not just about angering it.


    But without arms¡­


    ¡°Fuu! Fuuu! Gyuuu!¡±


    It would use its legs.


    I didn¡¯t know if it was actually thinking that, but the orc suddenly lowered its head and charged towards Liza.


    And while Liza had moved away after hitting it, the orc¡¯s charge was still powerful.


    Even if it wasn¡¯t running its fastest, she would likely still be injured if it hit her.


    ¡°I already saw this during the other fights!¡±


    ¡°Gyuo!?¡±


    ¡°You! ¡­Again!¡±


    ¡°Gyo! Gyuo!!¡±


    Liza had been expecting it¡­and so she jumped to the right and dodged the orc.


    Orcs were not able to change direction quickly, and so they were easy to dodge.


    That is, if you maintained enough distance from them.


    But Liza was only a few meters away, so it would have normally been difficult. Only, Liza happened to have anticipated it.


    Of course, she was also naturally fast. I didn¡¯t know if she was fighting this well because she was beastkin, or it was her talent.


    She would be stronger than me with some proper training¡­


    As I thought of such things, Lizanded on the ground, and then jumped towards the orc who had passed her¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 511

    Chapter 511


    I refused Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s suggestion


    After closing in on the left side of the orc, Liza used her momentum to sh at the orc¡¯s leg, cutting deep into its flesh.


    Due to suddenly not being able to move its leg, the orc fell and then slid on the ground.


    It was kind of like a rey of when I fought it. Only, she did not cut the leg off.


    And yet, without a moment¡¯s dy, Liza took her knife¡­and stabbed it into the orc¡¯s neck as ity on the ground.


    ¡°Gyu!? Gyuu¡­¡±


    ¡°There! Uhh¡­ It¡¯s not moving?¡±


    After stabbing it deep in, the orc let out a cry and iled its right leg. But then a momentter, it stopped moving.


    Upon confirming this, Liza pulled out her knife and then tapped the orc¡¯s back to see that it was really dead.


    ¡°Liza!¡±


    ¡°Woah, sister ire!?¡±


    As soon as the orc was silent, Ms. ire could hold herself back no longer.


    She rushed forward towards Liza.


    Liza seemed surprised to suddenly see Ms. ire run towards her.


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    ¡°That was amazing, Liza!¡±


    ¡°Mama, Tilura. Ehehe¡­ I Did my best!¡±


    ¡°Yes, yes. You did, Liza¡­¡±


    Liza smiled as Ms. ire patted her gently on the head.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes?¡±


    ¡°Do you think Liza was holding back during the test?¡±


    ¡°¡­Well, I¡¯m sure she wouldn¡¯t fight an orc in the same way as a human¡­ She was probably going all out just now.¡±


    As I watched the others celebrate, Mr. Ekenhart started to talk to me.


    Indeed, it was possible that she was holding back without even realizing it¡­


    ¡°Or it could be the clothes? Her movements seemed sharp this time.¡±


    ¡°It appears that way. You wouldn¡¯t be able to move as much in a skirt¡­ But I don¡¯t think it¡¯s that alone.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes. She came at me in a straight line¡­ But with the orc, she was definitely trying to weaken it. That¡¯s why she targeted the shoulder. And she knew that she couldn¡¯t cut it off with a knife.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Well, she also stabbed so deep that it took time to pull the knife out¡­ But in general, she was definitely trying to weaken it.¡±


    I thought that people who weren¡¯t used to fighting would always try and aim for the heart.


    Even when fighting Mr. Ekenhart, she had tried to stab him in the chest.


    However, against the orc, she went for the shoulders instead¡­ And then after the charge, she attacked the legs.


    ¡°Is it beastkin¡­instincts?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know¡­ Liza did watch us fighting, so she probably learned from that.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Focusing on weakening them first and create a favorable opening¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. I tend to target the limbs first. And she probably copied Tilura¡¯s fighting style, so that it would not be able to fight back.¡±


    Even if she was at a distance, Liza had been watching me, Liza¡­and Shery.


    But even then, it was hard to believe that someone her age could fight like that without any training.


    So perhaps being a beastkin and being able to use special magic was rted to it¡­


    ¡°Indeed. She decided on how to fight based on information she saw. Mr. Takumi, would you allow me to train Liza? I think with some training, she can be a real beast of a fighter.¡±


    ¡°¡­No, thank you. I want Liza to live a peaceful life¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmph¡­ It would have been very entertaining¡­¡±


    Obviously, I had to refuse such a suggestion.


    It was because I wanted her tough and live in peace. And not because I didn¡¯t like the idea of her surpassing me or anything.


    Mr. Ekenhart grumbled with disappointment.


    He had a habit of wanting to train people that he found to be promising¡­


    ¡°Papa! I did it!¡±


    ¡°Yes, I saw. You did well! I¡¯m so happy to see how skilled you were.¡±


    ¡°Ehehe.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Hehe¡­ She really is fond of you and Leo. Even when she is with me and Tilura, as soon as she saw you, she got onto Leo and happily made her report.¡±


    ¡°Ahaha¡­¡±


    As I was talking to Mr. Ekenhart, Liza came towards me while riding on Leo¡¯s back.


    Leo stopped suddenly, and Liza jumped off andnded on the ground with a smile.


    And so I patted her on the head and praised her.


    Leo was also happy that it had gone smoothly, and barked in a proud voice.


    And then Ms. ire and Tilura joined us.


    Ms. ire chuckled, but looked just a little jealous as well.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 512

    Chapter 512


    We held a meeting to decide tomorrow¡¯s schedule


    ¡°Amazing! Delicious!¡±


    ¡°Haha, really? Is it because you defeated the orc?¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    We ate Liza¡¯s orc for dinner.


    Everyone sat around the fire, and Ms. Lyra cooked the meat.


    Of course, Liza, I and the others helped as well.


    While dinner was being made, Mr. Ekenhart alone went into the river. And with the water up to his waist, he started swinging his swords in the air.


    He was holding a katana and regr sword together, for weight¡­ I had heard him muttering something about not falling behind a kid¡­ So perhaps seeing Liza and Tilura had inspired him.


    However, he was the duke. Was it really necessary for him to be any stronger¡­


    He could already protect himself just fine¡­ Well, I suppose it was good to want to improve.


    In any case, I watched him as we finished preparing the food, and then it was time to eat.


    Liza was very happy to eat the orc that she had killed.


    Tilura had been like that as well. I suppose it was different when you did it yourself.


    Was it simr to how vegetables tasted better when you grew and harvested them yourself?


    Well, it probably had more to do with being released from the pressure, and also being hungry after moving.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Do you have a moment?¡±


    ¡°Yes? What is it?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    After I finished eating, I rxed in front of the fire with Liza and Leo. That was when Mr. Ekenhart approached me.


    He seemed a little serious.


    ¡°It¡¯s about our ns for tomorrow¡­¡±


    And so I left Liza with Leo, and we moved away in order to start a little meeting.


    There were two fires, and around this one, aside from Mr. Ekenhart and me, were Sebastian, Ms. ire, and Phillip.


    Sebastian always joined in such discussions, and Phillip was a guard.


    Ms. ire had been with a tired-looking Ms. Anne a moment ago. But I suppose she was here to stop her father from nning anything strange.


    ¡°Now, everyone is here.¡±


    ¡°I could have called Mr. Takumi. You did not have to go, Your Grace.¡±


    ¡°Well, I was closer. And you were looking for Phillip. In any case, that is not important.¡±


    It was true that Sebastian was usually the one to call everyone during such times.


    However, Mr. Ekenhart didn¡¯t really care about it.


    ¡°In any case, tomorrow. Today, Mr. Takumi and Tilura showed fine skill in dealing with orcs. Sherry and Liza as well.¡±


    ¡°I did not expect little Liza to be that strong¡­¡±


    ¡°I felt the same. The n had been to show that shecked power so that she wouldn¡¯t have to fight the orc¡­¡±


    ¡°But she would never have been in danger in the first ce if you just refused her, father¡­¡±


    ¡°That is true¡­ But I didn¡¯t want to do that, because she seemed so enthusiastic about it.¡±


    Apparently, Ms. ire was still angry about testing Liza in the first ce. And while I agreed that Mr. Ekenhart tended to cause trouble, I didn¡¯t think he was to me in this instance.


    After all, I had also not wanted to hurt Liza¡¯s feelings, and so I had said nothing¡­


    But Ms. ire saw Liza like a little sister, so she was very worried.


    ¡°Ms. ire, I was not able to stop it either. There was no other way. Besides, the result was that we learned she could fight quite well¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­If that¡¯s what you say, Mr. Takumi¡­I will ept it¡­¡±


    I intervened partly because if this went any further, she would start ming me as well.


    In any case, she was satisfied and backed down.


    Mr. Ekenhart sighed in relief, and then his face became serious again.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi has experienced battles a number of times. So, perhaps you would like to try fighting multiple enemies at once now?¡±


    ¡°Multiple enemies?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Two or more orcs. And when you get used to it, you can team up with Phillip, and experience two against two battles.¡±


    ¡°I am ready at any time.¡±


    ¡°Two¡­I see¡­ Yes, I did something simr in Range vige, so I think I should be able to manage.¡±


    ¡°In that case, Mr. Takumi will fight two orcs tomorrow. And if things go well, you can team up with Phillip or someone elseter. This will be training for when you have to cooperate with others while fighting. While you could go with the other guards¡­Phillip would be best, as he has his own subordinates.¡±


    As I had some experience with battle, I was to face multiple orcs tomorrow.


    I had already fought more than two in Range vige.


    At that time, I had been desperate to buy some time. And tried to keep it one on one as much as possible.


    And since the vigers had also helped me, I was neverpletely surrounded by orcs. But it was still a simr situation.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 513

    Chapter 513


    Liza had potential


    Aside from fighting two orcs, Mr. Ekenhart was also thinking about making me fight as a pair.


    With someone else¡­ I had never done that before, so I didn¡¯t know how it would go.


    Well, at least it would be with Phillip. I was relieved, as I knew that he was capable.


    At the very least, it should be better than fighting on my own¡­ I just needed to make sure that I wasn¡¯t getting in his way.


    ¡°Next is Tilura and Sherry¡­ Tilura needs more time to get used to fighting alone. She was a little nervous today, and made some mistakes. If possible, it would be best if she had some tricks in order to buy time when against multiple enemies, but¡­ Right now, I want to focus on more surer things.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. There may be situations where there are no guards around. So it would be best for her to have something that would allow her to get away¡­ But there is no rush.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Due to our position, we cannot be sure that someone wouldn¡¯t target Tilura or me. Perhaps I should be able to do something as well, regardless, I do want Tilura to be able to defend herself.¡±


    ¡°ire¡­ Well, it can¡¯t be helped.¡±


    ¡°¡­Father, you do not need to remember it.¡±


    ¡°Ye-yes.¡±


    ¡°¡­?¡±


    Tilura needed more experience fighting one against one.


    Still, Ms. ire seemed to be quietly applying pressure to Mr. Ekenhart.


    Was there something I didn¡¯t know¡­?


    It seemed like there was a suggestion that she was not suited to fighting.


    Perhaps she was just not very athletic?


    ¡°¡­Nevermind ire. Tilura can go slowly and take her time. She has just started, after all.¡±


    ¡°Yes, there is no rush.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. She is still growing. And eventually, she will need a new sword, which will match Mr. Takumi¡¯s.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I¡¯m looking forward to it.¡±


    Perhaps she might even wield a greatsword¡­ A sword that even adults would have trouble holding¡­ The idea of Tilura swinging such a de¡­ I wasn¡¯t sure if I wanted to see it or not¡­


    In any case, they did not need to teach her everything at once, and they could take their time.


    ¡°So¡­as for Sherry. That is up to Leo, so it¡¯s fine. Besides, with magic, she should be able to face multiple orcs without any issue.¡±


    ¡°If what Leo says is true, then there is almost no chance that Sherry will be injured by orcs¡­ And I feel like it was confirmed during today¡¯s battle.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. I am not worried about Sherry. The real problem is¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Liza.¡±


    Liza, who had been thest one to fight today.


    I could feel everyone turn to me, but I didn¡¯t know what to do.


    ¡°She certainly knows how to handle a weapon¡­ It was impressive, since she had no real training. Well, I suppose her grandfather might have taught her something¡­¡±


    ¡°He probably taught her how to hold a knife. After all, they were living in the slums. But I don¡¯t know if he taught her to hunt orcs¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed. As Mr. Takumi says, it¡¯s unlikely that she was taught that extensively¡­ So I suppose it is a natural talent?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sure that is the case. Even ignoring that she is a beastkin, to do that much at her age¡­ If all beastkin were as capable, then they would have done much better in the war.¡±


    As long as you lived in the slums, you would surely need some survival skills¡­ Well, it was just my imagination.


    However, since they moved around a lot, it would surely be necessary to have some knowledge like that.


    Besides, Ms. Isabelle had said that Mr. Reyndorf used to be a wanderer. So he would have quite a lot of knowledge about such things.


    But since she was still a child, he probably didn¡¯t teach her that much, as it was unlikely that she would have to fight.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 514

    Chapter 514


    We decided to gather information on beastkin


    ¡°Mmm. While I wasn¡¯t there, I never heard anything about humans having an overwhelming disadvantage. Even if humans were weaker as individuals, we were more numerous, so that¡¯s why we were winning.¡±


    ¡°In other words, you think Liza has a special talent?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Well, it¡¯s just spection. We need to know more about these beastkin¡­¡±


    ¡°The beastkin¡­hmm¡­¡±


    ¡°Sebastian, do you know something?¡±


    Sebastian put a hand to his chin and thought.


    It seemed like he did know something, and now we were all looking at him.


    ¡°No¡­ When ites to information on the beastkin, the royals and the nobles on the north side would be the most knowledgeable. After all, the south did not fight. That is why the Liebert house has little information¡­ Though, I am sure there are books about the beastkin in the main house¡­¡±


    ¡°The main house. Yes, unlike this mansion, there is likely to be such books in that library¡­¡±


    ¡°However, won¡¯t it be very difficult to search for those books?¡±


    ¡°¡­Are there really that many?¡±


    ¡°Mmm¡­ The library alone is about half the size of the mansion you live in, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°That¡­is definitely a lot of books¡­¡±


    ¡°The result of years of collecting. It is a wonderful storehouse of knowledge¡­ But that time she got buried, I thought it was toote¡­¡±


    ¡°Back then, even more than now¡­ ire was very impulsive¡­¡±


    Unlike Japan, where there was all kinds ofmunication technology, here, you either had to speak direction or write it down.


    In any case, they said there may be books at the main house that are rted to the beastkin.


    I had a hard time imagining how difficult it would be. But it was like a building half the size of the mansion, and it was filled with books.


    Like arge library¡­


    If it was supposed to be difficult to search for books, that meant they weren¡¯t organized. It must be quite chaotic.


    But a book worm would love a ce like that.


    Still, Ms. ire used to y there as a child¡­


    Perhaps she had knocked down the shelves and was buried in books. Though Mr. Ekenhart was sighing, I thought it was adorable¡­ Though, perhaps it was actually dangerous.


    Especially if it wasn¡¯t just books, but shelves fell on her as well.


    ¡°Well, when ites to books, I know who to ask. After all, the reason he works in that house is to read books¡­really¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha. That is true. The one person who likely remembers where each book is. Mmm. I will go and ask once I return. Also, I will send messengers to the royals and other nobles, and gather information.¡±


    ¡°¡­Why is Sebastian sighing?¡±


    ¡°Ah, that is¡­ The person in question is Sebastian¡¯s son. While Sebastian serves the Liebert house loyally, his son does not feel the same way. While he did be a butler, he reads books whenever he has free time, and is not very serious about his job.¡±


    ¡°¡­If he worked more seriously, he could have been a house steward¡­hah¡­ Whose fault is it¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­I see¡­¡±


    So they had the perfect person who could search for the books.


    And while Sebastian looked serious, Mr. Ekenhart was amused.


    Apparently, it was because this person was Sebastian¡¯s son.


    As Sebastian was old enough to have grandchildren, I wasn¡¯t too surprised¡­ And the person was also a butler.


    As stewards were at the top when it came to servants, it must mean that he was very capable.


    But he was influenced by someone and liked books, which he spent all of his time reading¡­ But wouldn¡¯t that be Sebastian¡¯s influence¡­?


    I thought of Sebastian as the exnation man. He read numerous books to acquire knowledge, which he then shared with others¡­


    His son must have seen him reading and be interested in books as well. That seemed the most natural.


    Still, I couldn¡¯t tell the sighing Sebastian that it was his own fault. But I saw the Mr. Ekenhart, Ms. ire and Phillip were looking at each other and chuckling.


    So they clearly came to the same conclusion¡­


    Perhaps while Sebastian was sharp when it came to many things, he was dense when it came to matters concerning his son¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 515

    Chapter 515


    I was asked to protect any beastkin that were discovered


    ¡°Then I will send word to the main house once we return. And we will prepare to gather information on the outside as well.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. And it¡¯s not just Liza. Perhaps there are other beastkin on thesends. They just haven¡¯t been seen¡­ It is not as if we are aware of everyone who lives in every town and vige¡­¡±


    ¡°And many would be in hiding.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. And it would be best if we knew something about them first. So, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes?¡±


    Perhaps, like Liza, there were beastking who lived on Mr. Ekenhart¡¯snds for some reason or another.


    While we probably won¡¯t be searching for them actively, it would be good to decide what to do if that did happen. And we needed information for that.


    As I nodded in agreement, Mr. Ekenhart suddenly turned to me.


    I had a bad feeling about it¡­


    ¡°While I doubt there are any more beastkin in Ractos¡­ If you do find some in the area? Will you protect them? It seems like good Leo might feel a special connection to them. Besides there is Liza. She will probably feel safer if some of her kind were close by.¡±


    Well, while I wanted to believe that cases like Liza were rare, it was possible that there were others who were being mistreated, and so I wanted to help them.


    Besides, it would be better for Liza as well, to not just be surrounded by humans.


    ¡°Ah, yes. I could do that¡­ But, I cannot do a lot¡­¡±


    ¡°If there is something you cannot do, Mr. Takumi, then no one else here can do it either. Besides, if it is too much, you can always ask ire. She will be d to help you.¡±


    ¡°¡­Is that so?¡±


    ¡°Father! You do not need to word it like that! Hmph! ¡­Mr. Takumi, if I can offer you any assistance, then do tell me. I will do my best!¡±


    ¡°¡­Uh, yes. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Hohoho¡­¡±


    ¡°How young¡­¡±


    Aside from protecting someone temporarily¡­I could make herbs and use them.


    But I had a feeling Mr. Ekenhart was talking about something different.


    In any case, it would not be good to rely on Ms. ire too much, so I would probably end up trying to deal with everything myself¡­


    However, would I really be troubling her?


    Like Mr. Ekenhart said she might actually be happy to help¡­ And so I asked her.


    She blushed a little and scolded her father. Then she coughed, and with a smile, confirmed it.


    She really was kind.


    I was quite taken by her smile, but shook my head and thanked her.


    Thest thing I wanted to do was get caught staring like an idiot.


    It¡¯s not like I wanted to show off, but I didn¡¯t want to look ridiculous in front of her either.


    ¡­Why did I think that with her?


    It was then that I noticed that Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian were grinning at us, and so I stopped thinking about it.


    ¡°¡­Oh, we got distracted there. So, about Liza¡­what will you do?¡±


    ¡°Well, to be honest, I do not want her to fight, if possible. Even if we know that she is capable. After all, she is too young to be facing monsters¡­¡±


    ¡°I understand how you feel, Mr. Takumi. I agree. However, she herself knows her capabilities now¡­ How will you tell her?¡±


    ¡°But Liza is not the kind of person who would force her will, father. As long as she is told honestly, that we are here for Mr. Takumi, Tilura and Sherry¡¯s training, I think she will understand. Besides, there can only be so many orcs in this area¡­ And we don¡¯t need that much more for food.¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    So, the others agreed with me, that it was best if Liza did not fight if it wasn¡¯t necessary.


    Judging by the fight, she was surely not in any real danger when up against an orc. But the idea of someone so young fighting monsters¡­


    Even with Tilura, it was a little concerning¡­


    Still, Ms. ire stated her opinion as if it was a simple matter.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 516

    Chapter 516


    I thought of a way to persuade Liza to not fight


    ¡°¡­Yes, I didn¡¯t exin that to Liza yet.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Though, I¡¯m sure she already heard¡­ But perhaps she doesn¡¯t understand.¡±


    ¡°After all, Anne was there as well, and she didn¡¯t understand anything. So it would not be a surprise if Liza doesn¡¯t either.¡±


    ¡°Anneliese should pay attention to her surroundings more. But we can¡¯t have the same expectations for Liza. She is just a child, after all.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Liza seemed like she didn¡¯t know why Tilura and I were fighting orcs. Though, she did understand why Sherry was.¡±


    ¡°That being said, Sherry is doing it for food¡­ In other words¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, Sherry really doesn¡¯t understand why Mr. Takumi and Tilura are fighting.¡±


    I had told Liza about the orcs in the forest.


    And that we had to fight them, but it was dangerous.


    But I didn¡¯t tell her about how Tilura and I were doing it for training, or Sherry for dieting¡­


    Perhaps she thought we were ying¡­or even for work.


    In any case, it was likely because she didn¡¯t understand that she wanted to show how she could fight or hunt like Sherry.


    After seeing us do it, she wanted to do it too, thinking that she could beat an orc. It was really just curiosity on her part.


    ¡°In that case, how about exining it to her to make her give up. And then¡­¡±


    ¡°Do you have an idea?¡±


    ¡°It seems to me that a lot of it is childish curiosity¡­ And so have her ride on Leo. And when there are too many orcs, Leo will take them down. While Liza will have a front row seat.¡±


    ¡°Hmm, I see. That would satisfy her curiosity. And it should be fun for her.¡±


    ¡°And good Leo would not put Liza in any dangerous. ¡­If anything, I want to experience that.¡±


    ¡°In that case, why doesn¡¯t Lady ire ride on Leo as well? Liza is very fond of her¡­and it will be perfectly safe.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Liza would definitely agree to that. Well, I¡¯ll have to ask Leo first¡­¡±


    ¡°Mmm¡­ That is good. So you will handle it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Then I will watch over Liza so that she does not fall off. Being able to see Leo fight while riding on her, it will be a rare experience. ¡­I wonder if I¡¯ll be able to sleep tonight?¡±


    So I¡¯d exin everything to Liza, and as long as she agreed to not fight, she would be able to ride on Leo.


    She always seemed to enjoy that, and it should be fun watching Leo fight.


    And Ms. ire would make sure that she didn¡¯t get too excited and fall off or anything. This seemed like the best solution.


    As for whether Leo would agree, she also liked to carry people, and since fighting orcs was easy for her, she would surely be fine with it.


    But if she didn¡¯t think it was a good idea, I would have to think about some other way. Well, it would probably be fine. I will ask Ms. Lyra to prepare her some sausages as a reward¡­.


    Also, Ms. ire seemed really happy at the idea of riding on Leo?


    She usually was quite reserved, but she did have a side that was even more curious than Tilura¡­


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, will you reconsider entrusting Liza into my care? I think she could be a wonderful guard if her talents were honed.¡±


    ¡°¡­As I said, no.¡±


    ¡°Father, you may want to take Liza down into the world of ughter, but we won¡¯t let you!¡±


    ¡°The idea of little Liza being put through that training¡­¡±


    ¡°Your Grace, you have a bad habit that you should fix, you know?¡±


    Now that everything was settled, we were about to disperse, when Mr. Ekenhart suddenly brought up training Liza once again.


    Maybe that was why I had a bad feeling earlier¡­


    Still, I turned him down, and Ms. ire and the others all took my side.


    Ms. ire was especially against it.


    I suppose it was because she was very fond of Liza.


    Phillip was getting teary-eyed at the mere thought of Liza going through the same training that he survived.


    Mr. Ekenhart had an expression of regret, as if he thought he had chosen the wrong timing. And so with slumped shoulders, he walked away and grumbled.


    It had spilled out, due to Liza¡¯s potential, but it was a bad time. But he could not help it, I suppose¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 517

    Chapter 517


    Sebastian was awake


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, Leo. Do you have a minute?¡±


    ¡°Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    In the middle of the night, when everyone was asleep. Leo and I were on watch duty, when Sebastian suddenly called to us.


    He was next, so perhaps he had gotten up early?


    Leo had noticed him approaching first, and so she just barked quietly.


    It seemed like people always came when we were watching¡­it was Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. irest time.


    While Liza had wanted to stay up as well, she was also tired, and by the time my meeting was finished, she was already asleep.


    Right now, Ms. Lyra and Ms. ire were taking care of her, and so she was in their tent.


    This would be the first time she slept away from me and Leo¡­


    Which was probably for the best, as Mr. Ekenhart snores very loudly.


    ¡°I think this is the first time just us two were able to rx and talk like this? Well, Leo is here too.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Well, there was that time you taught me magic.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s right. Hohoho. It was just a simple lesson, but you have used it so well¡­ I am d I taught you.¡±


    ¡°Well, I don¡¯t know about well¡­ But it was because of that magic that I survived in Range vige.¡±


    It was beginner light magic.


    Normally, it was used to illuminate dark ces.


    Had I not been taught it¡­or I hadn¡¯t been told how I could use it to buy time¡­then I would not have been able to survive before Leo arrived.


    I would have likely died or been badly injured.


    It was possible that when Leo arrived, that most of the vige would be gone. And so I was very grateful towards Sebastian.


    ¡°¡­I did not imagine that it would be useful so quickly. In any case, I¡¯m d that the words of an old man were able to help you.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Hoho. So even Leo is thanking me. It is an honor. By the way, there is something I want to speak to you about, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    Sebastian seemed very happy to be thanked by Leo. But then his expression turned serious.


    Apparently, this was why he had gotten up early.


    ¡°There is something I want to thank you about as well. Because of you, not only Lady ire, but Lady Tilura and my master are enjoying themselves.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ Well, I think they¡¯re just doing as they please¡­¡±


    ¡°As they should. Unlike some others, they do not put much importance in their status. Of course, we servants, and the people of the town, always act formally.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Even if they do not care, others will not forget that they are nobles.¡±


    What Sebastiana was talking about happened a lot in Japan as well.


    In general, there may not be a strong sense of status, but it had once existed¡­


    And there was even a word to describe a ss with special privileges


    Those who had wealth, or power in the country. Even if they did not wield their power publicly, there was a sense that you could not go against them.


    While on a smaller scale, your boss at work, for instance¡­ You felt like you couldn¡¯t share your actual opinion around them.


    But this was a world with royals and nobles, and so it was even more stronger here.


    ¡°Yes, exactly. But you and Leo are from a different world. Thanks to that, you treat people differently.¡±


    ¡°Well¡­that¡¯s true¡­ Though, it¡¯s just that I don¡¯t know anything about manners here.¡±


    ¡°No, not at all. I think your manners are more than adequate. But you still act differently. Not in a bad way. It is merely because you were raised in a different country and civilization.¡±


    ¡°Ineed.¡±


    There were invisible differences in status in Japan.


    However, ording to thew, we were supposed to be equal.


    And so even if there were hierarchies with smallermunities, we still had the same rights. There was no doubt about that.


    I suppose that was what set me apart from people here, who were used to being around nobles.


    Well, I still knew a little about them, and so I had felt a little flustered when I first learned about Ms. ire¡­


    Even now, I sometimes worried that I was being rude¡­ But they always seemed like they didn¡¯t mind, so I tried to not think about it.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 518

    Chapter 518


    I was thanked while on watch duty


    ¡°His Grace is especially pleased. While you are quite different in age¡­you have been like a friend to him. Even if he is your instructor, he lowers his guards around you. Though, that also brings out some of his bad habits¡­¡±


    ¡°Ahaha¡­ Well, as long as he doesn¡¯t force me to do anything, then I am fine¡­ But now that I think about it, he did seem a little different when I first met him.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. He has be fond of you and rxed a little.¡±


    If I was a friend¡­then that made me happy.


    I never had that many friends, after all¡­ Of course, I wasn¡¯t lonely, because I had leo. But I suppose I looked like a lonely person from the outside.


    In any case, while much older than me, Mr. Ekenhard was easy to be around, and I was at ease when talking to him.


    We even went on secret outings together to Ractos.


    Men were simple, and could get along over such things.


    However, I had been incredibly nervous during our first meeting. And I did think he was different then.


    ¡°There was the matter of the wine, Range Vige, and the disease¡­ But I think it was around the time he slipped out of the mansion that he really seemed to enjoy being with you.¡±


    ¡°Ahaha¡­¡±


    Apparently, Sebastian was thinking the same thing.


    ¡­Though, it wasn¡¯t like I had invited him.


    ¡°I did not expect you to return with a beastkin child, though¡­ Regardless, that clearly had a big effect. Or perhaps he no longer cared about looking intimidating, after you saw Lady ire scolding him. Hohoho¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, that might be it as well.¡±


    I chuckled along with Sebastian.


    When was the first time that Ms. ire scolded Mr. Ekenhart¡­


    There was that time when he made me fight those men in the store as part of my training.


    The time we went to Ractos, and also that time he was eavesdropping when Mr. ire and I were talking in my room.


    So there were many times¡­ You would almost think that he enjoyed getting her angry.


    ¡°He has always enjoyed going to town¡­ And now he has someone to go with, Mr. Takumi. He cannot travel out too far, and everyone recognizes him. So it was difficult for him to spend time with someone like a friend.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    Now that I think about it, he did say that when he was young, he would go to the town to eat and see different things.


    That was probably the town that was close to his main house, not Ractos. And so his influence would be even stronger over there.


    ¡­Surprisingly, Mr. Ekenhart might have been more lonely than I was¡­ No, he had been married, and had two children, so that clearly wasn¡¯t true.


    ¡°¡­But, I had Leo. So I was fine.¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wou!¡±


    ¡°What did you say, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Oh, uh, nothing. Nevermind.¡±


    Damn it, I had thought out loud, after thinking about how I didn¡¯t have any friends.


    Leo seemed confused at first, but nodded reassuringly.


    Aside from Leo, I also had some coworkers¡­I talked with them during break¡­ Though, I guess I still wouldn¡¯t call them friends¡­


    No, I can¡¯t think about such strange things right now¡­ Sebastian will look at me as if there was something wrong with me.


    ¡°Hah¡­ Well, as long as you are fine. In any case, we servants are very d that there is someone who the master, Lady ire, and Lady Tilura, can feel at such ease with. Both you and Leo.¡±


    ¡°Haha. Well, while that was not our intention¡­I am d to hear it.¡±


    Ms. ire and the others really were liked by the servants.


    They treated them well, and never became angry without reason. They were wise and kind.


    Also, the duke had hired many servants from the orphanage as well¡­ So he was like an ideal superior in some ways.


    It was no wonder the servants liked them¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 519

    Chapter 519


    It was obvious that I was nervous


    ¡°By the way, Mr. Takumi. It seems that you too are also not as nervous as you used to be.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ I suppose, since I¡¯ve now been here for some time¡­¡±


    The conversation suddenly moved from Ms. ire and the others, to me.


    It had now been months since I started to live in the mansion¡­ So I was already used to being here.


    Of course, there was still a lot that I didn¡¯t know.


    ¡°Hohoho. If we were able to aid you in bing ustomed to this ce, then I would be d.¡±


    ¡°If anything, everyone has done nothing but help¡­ It is thanks to the people of the house that I am able to live sofortably.¡±


    ¡°¡­But you struggled quite a lot at Range vige, didn¡¯t you? Hoho!¡±


    ¡°Haha, yes. That¡¯s true.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Leo was saying that it was noughing matter, and sighed.


    Indeed, it could have been a great tragedy, and it was because of Leo that everything turned out fine.


    And so I patted Leo on the head to show my gratitude.


    ¡°At first, you were very nervous, when you helped Lady ire and brought her to the mansion.¡±


    ¡°You could tell? Well, I had never gone inside such arge mansion before. Besides, there were so many things happening that I didn¡¯t understand, and so I felt confused. ¡­And Leo was suddenly so big¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°But big or small, Leo is still Leo. And she helps me a lot.¡±


    Well, there were a lot ofrge buildings in Japan as well.


    However, it was different with the vast premises, and people living inside.


    I had seen photos of simr houses, and I suppose you might be able to find such houses in Japan if you looked hard enough.


    As I was talking with Sebastian, Leo looked up at me as if to ask, ¡®was that bad?¡¯ and so I patted on her and thanked her.


    While I had been shocked at first, everything from her gestures to the way she barked seemed the same, and so I got used to it quickly.


    ¡°I do not know how good Leo was when she was small¡­ But yes, I could sense your anxiety at the time.¡±


    ¡°Was it so strong?¡±


    While I could remember some of how I was when talking to Sebastian and the others, I had quickly been preupied with Weed Cultivation, magic, and other things. So it seemed like such a long time ago now.


    ¡°Well, it made sense as I talked with you. But I and the servants noticed it.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    So even if I pretended to look calm, it was obvious to Sebastian and the others.


    I looked down, suddenly feeling a little embarrassed, and then Leo barked as if tough.


    ¡­That¡¯s right. Unlike me, Leo had always beenpletely confident.


    Well, carefree?


    She knew she was a Silver Fenrir, and that no one could harm her. So perhaps there was no need for her to feel nervous.


    ¡°We servants observe many guests, after all. And so we can see things. Did Lady ire ever talk about how she has an eye for such things?¡±


    ¡°Uhh¡­I think she did. It was right after I came to the mansion. But you weren¡¯t with us.¡±


    ¡°I see. Lady ire inspects everyone whoes to work at the mansion, unless they are from the main house. As I said before, many of theme from the orphanage, so once they are adults, it has to be decided whether or not they will be hired. Of course, only a small few are chosen.¡±


    ¡°Indeed, there was some talk about Milina¡­wasn¡¯t there?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Lady ire was fine with her, but she herself did not consent. Of course, the duke will not react badly if you reject the offer toe and work for him. You are free to choose how you wish to live.¡±


    Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda was from the orphanage.


    Since Ms. ire had immediately decided that Leo and I were not dangerous, and was friendly towards us, perhaps she really did have a talent for seeing a person¡¯s true nature.


    In the end, Milina was hired by me, and studied medicine. Though, she was also learning a lot from Ms. Lyra as well¡­ All of the people that Ms. ire approved of ended up being hard workers.


    ¡­Now that I thought about it, Ms. ire had also seen Nick quite a lot. And she had not objected to my hiring of him.


    He just had some bad luck, and was more serious than he looked¡­ She might have seen that.


    Though, I doubted that she sensed it during the first encounter.


    ¡°Aside from Lady ire¡¯s ability to see inside of people, we servants also strive to see through the surface that covers people. This is so that we can detect what it is that they want.¡±


    ¡°Well, I suppose you would not want to do anything rude towards guests, or your employer¡­¡±


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 520

    Chapter 520


    I asked about Sebastian¡¯s past


    ¡°Thankfully, the duke and his family do not care much when ites to small mistakes of the servants. Of course, there are times when they are strict as well¡­¡±


    Well, that was obvious.


    But instead of just berating someone angrily, understanding why it happened and having an environment where you were guided would be best to help neers grow¡­ I envied that.


    I suppose Ms. ire¡¯s personality was having a good effect.


    ¡°His Grace also has a great ability to see what is below the surface. It is like abination of talent and experience thates with age. His father was much the same.¡±


    ¡°I suppose it runs in the family then¡­¡±


    Aside from Ms. ire, there was Mr. Ekenhart. He was a businessman and a master swordsman.


    Tilura was¡­still young. But she was bright and cheerful, and able to get along with others. And she had also shown her ability while fighting against orcs.


    ¡­Yes. The duke¡¯s family really were powerful.


    ¡°Indeed. It is because of that, that I feel rewarded for dedicating my life to them.¡±


    ¡°Speaking of which, why did you start working as their butler? Were you also from the orphanage?¡±


    ¡°Close, but not quite. I was living alone. ¡­If you could call it living¡­¡±


    ¡°What do you mean?¡±


    I had asked it out of mere curiosity, but Sebastian¡¯s expression seemed very conflicted.


    It was unusual for him to look like that¡­


    ¡°As far back as I can remember, I was an orphan. Well, that ismon enough. However, I was in the slums. I don¡¯t know why. I was just there, one day.¡±


    ¡°¡­So you were in a simr situation to Liza?¡±


    ¡°Well¡­Liza had someone called Mr. Reyndorf, but the slum that I was in was quite different from the current Ractos. But I am human, and was not persecuted. That is one thing¡­¡±


    Sebastian started to talk slowly while remembering the past.


    Perhaps it was stuff that he didn¡¯t really wish to remember. Sebastian usually looked very excited when he was exining something. But now, his eyes were downcast and there seemed to be a shadow over his face as he spoke hesitantly.


    An orphan in the slums¡­huh.


    I could tell by his sighing that it had been a brutal environment.


    While it was pointless topare, Liza at least had someone who took care of her for some time.


    While Sebastian had no one like that, he was also not persecuted.


    ¡°Well, and so I lived in such a ce. I and the other children in the slums were desperate just to eat. I even stole food from stores.¡±


    ¡°Children cannot work, after all¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. With no hope for the future, we just lived through our hunger every day. Some of the others started stealing money as well. But I couldn¡¯t go that far¡­ I only took what I needed to survive. But I suppose that just sounds like I¡¯m making excuses.¡±


    ¡°¡­Looking at you now, I doubt you would have done anything worse.¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    Children in the slums had no way of making money.


    There were probably people who donated food as charity, and perhaps you could scavenge for leftover food as well.


    But none of that was guaranteed.


    And one had to do things to survive.


    Judging by Sebastian¡¯s face, he probably regretted some of the things that he did.


    Well, perhaps it was because of that experience, that he decided to live in an upright manner afterwards.


    ¡°Thank you. That makes me feel better¡­ In any case, I had a sense of justice after that¡­ Which might sound strange. And I swore that I wouldn¡¯t do anything that I didn¡¯t agree with.¡±


    ¡°Aside from stealing food?¡±


    ¡°Yes. In the slums, there were people who used violence to get what they wanted. And so I told myself that I would not get involved with such people.¡±


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 521

    Chapter 521


    Sebastian had a difficult past


    How hard it must have been.


    If he had used violence, then perhaps he would have more to eat. More money and clothes¡­


    But even if that was what others were doing, he swore that he wouldn¡¯t. That was impressive.


    With Liza, the boys were just doing what Deam told them to do, because others were¡­ That was themon way of thinking.


    ¡°That being said, there were something like unspoken rules in the slums. You cannot kill, or steal from people who are poorer than you¡­¡±


    I suppose they didn¡¯t steal from the poor, because they were poor themselves.


    Also, it just wasn¡¯t very efficient to steal from people who had so little.


    As for killing¡­ In my imagination, the slums were so dangerous that you never knew when your life might end.


    ¡°If you killed others, it might be easier to take things. But then the guards will arrest you, and a harsh punishment is what you¡¯ll have to look forward to. And while the other crimes are bad, there is no undoing it once you kill someone.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­¡±


    ¡°Obviously, thieves were arrested as well¡­ But some of the stores in the slums turned a blind eye, as they thought a little theft could not be helped. When I think about it now, they probably did it for the sake of the children. As they might resort to worse crimes. However, one day¡­ Something happened that changed matters in the slums.¡±


    ¡°Could it be¡­?¡±


    ¡°Well, I was not directly involved, but¡­ It was a great incident that resulted in people being driven out of the slums. I¡¯m sure you have already guessed it. Someone from the slums killed a resident of the town.¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°The culprit was a child. As I said before, it was someone I had shared food with in the past. And while the child had not done it on purpose, such excuses do not matter.¡±


    ¡°What was the reason then?¡±


    Sebastian continued to look at the ground as he talked.


    Leo, who sat next to me, also seemed curious as well.


    ¡°The person who was killed had a very bad opinion of the slums. Well, it was dangerous, and supposedly prevented the development of the town. And so one day, he waited at one of the stores with a weapon, as he knew that children would go there to steal. Of course, the child resisted. And he was not used to wielding the weapon. And in the ensuing struggle the short sword ended up stabbing him¡­ Well, that is what I heard, anyway.¡±


    ¡°There is that danger, if you don¡¯t know how to use it.¡±


    Swords were quite difficult to handle.


    If you don¡¯t have a tight grip, it could slip out of your hands. And you had to be careful of the trajectory of the de if you wanted to cut through anything.


    Hitting a tree might be easy, but a desperate child trying to escape was another. So this ident was no surprise.


    ¡°What was especially bad was that the man was the owner of several stores. And so after that, there was a movement to expel everyone who lived in the slums. Many people were already anxious or dissatisfied to begin with, so it was just a matter of time. Also, they search for the person who killed him.¡±


    ¡°They didn¡¯t think of just punishing the child?¡±


    ¡°If they did that, it might have ended there¡­but so many people raised their voices, and it would not quiet down. And so they started to drive the children out of the slums. Soldiers came and escorted the children out. Not just the children, but everyone¡­¡±


    ¡°So they wanted them all out of the town.¡±


    ¡°Yes. And to make matters worse, the duke¡­His Grace¡¯s father, that is, just happened to be nearby. And he tookmand.¡±


    So he finally made an appearance.


    I didn¡¯t know anything about him, but it sounded like the townspeople wanted the slums emptied, and there was no peaceful solution.


    ¡°And he led the soldiers and arrested all of the residents in the slums. It was likely an attempt to end the matter swiftly. Otherwise, the people of the slums might rally and resist.¡±


    They say that a cornered rat will bite a cat.


    If it came to such a sh, then the casualties could be severe.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 522

    Chapter 522


    I understood the reason that he was loyal to the duke


    ¡°Of course, I was also caught like everyone else. And I was taken to a different ce from the town. There, everyone¡¯s crimes were examined. Each person had different crimes, and I don¡¯t know what happened to the others. However, I¡¯ve heard that most of them didn¡¯t end up in a bad situation¡­¡±


    ¡°That means they forgave their crimes¡­?¡±


    ¡°No, I think they made them pay for their crimes. It was harsh, but they were guaranteed food and shelter while working there, I suppose.¡±


    Forcedbor? While not entirely urate, it had a simr ring to it.


    Well, even so, if you had food as long as you worked, and you didn¡¯t have the anxiety of not knowing what tomorrow would bring¡­it might be better than the slums.


    Being whipped, injured, or getting sick from working too hard¡­such things probably didn¡¯t happen.


    ¡°And that was when I first met the previous duke. He was interested in the fact that I had onlymitted minor offenses among the many people in the slums, and so he talked to me.¡±


    Sebastian apparently only did things like stealing enough food to survive that day, no matter how the situation was.


    ¡°And then I was taken to an orphanage in another city. There, I learned and started to think of atoning for my sins¡­ And was told toe to the duke¡¯s house when I grew up. As we parted, he also said, ¡®You may be able to get to work there. I¡¯m looking forward to seeing you grow up.¡¯¡¯¡±


    ¡°That sounds like something Mr. Ekenhart would say.¡±


    ¡°Hohoho, indeed. The tendency to want to train someone might be one of the traits that he inherited from my former master, I suppose.¡±


    Finally, Sebastian¡¯s expression turned into a smile.


    Sebastian seemed to be calm now, unlike before, indicating that he still respected the former master.


    ¡°In the end, if my former master hadn¡¯t been involved, I would have been punished just like the others in the slums. And so I was saved by him. From there, I learned various things at the orphanage and devoted myself to repaying the debt someday. And after a few years had passed, I believed in those words and actually visited the duke¡¯s house.¡±


    If the former duke had forgotten what happened a few years ago, that would make him seem even more like Mr. Ekenhart¡­but it would be rude to say that.


    ¡°After seeing my grown-up and talking to me, my previous master remembered¡­ At that time, I couldn¡¯t help but cry, as embarrassing as it was.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha, that is understandable.¡±


    ¡°In any case, that is how I was employed by the duke¡¯s family and why I decided to dedicate my life to them as a butler. Thanks to that, I have a family and even a son, and I am blessed with wonderful masters such as His Grace, Lady ire and Lady Tilura. ¡­Well, my son is a bit of a problem, though.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha! But if that¡¯s the case, I understand why you are loyal to them.¡±


    It seemed that not only his life, but also his future, was saved¡­ I could understand why he would want to devote himself so much, considering they lifted him out of his dire situation.


    ¡°Hohoho. Well, that is enough about me. Oh, is it already thiste? I must take my shift then.¡±


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right.¡±


    Sebastian chuckled and checked his pocket watch to confirm that the time for his shift had already arrived.


    We had talked for quite awhile¡­


    ¡°We tend to talk a little too much when we get older¡­¡±


    ¡°No, no, I was d to learn so much. And now I know more about you, Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m terribly embarrassed. Hohoho.¡±


    Sebastian chuckled as he realized that he had been talking for quite some time.


    Even though much time had passed, it was fun, and I felt like I got to know Sebastian better.


    I wonder if Sebastian also felt closer as well?


    ¡°Well then, I¡¯ll leave the rest to you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Certainly. Please have a good rest.¡±


    I said goodbye to Sebastian and stretched my stiff body as I headed towards the tent. Unfortunately, Leo would have to sleep outside of the tent, but I¡¯m sure she didn¡¯t mind.


    Once we returned to the mansion, I would make sure to wash off all the dirt in the bath¡­hehehe.


    ¡°ZZzzz¡­ Gugazzz¡­ Go!? Guzzzz¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­I wonder if I¡¯ll be able to sleep through this.¡±


    ¡°His Grace is a boisterous person, after all.¡±


    ¡°Nics.¡±


    ¡°Good work on your watch, Mr. Takumi. How is Mr. Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°He got up a little earlier.¡±


    ¡°Is that so? Then I¡¯ll¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    Nic noticed meing in and spoke to me. I wondered if he was able to sleep through the snoring without any problems¡­


    I told him that Sebastian was already on watch duty and saw Nics off as he left the tent.


    ¡°Gugoo¡­ Gazzz¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­¡±


    I got into my sleeping bag and closed my eyes. But the snoring bothered me and I couldn¡¯t fall asleep. Yesterday, Sebastian caught Mr. Ekenhart, and so I was able to sleep in the tent without any problems.


    It would probably be fine once I fell asleep, but getting to that point was the problem¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 523

    Chapter 523


    We prepared to fight the orcs again


    ¡°It can¡¯t be helped. I didn¡¯t want to use it too frequently, but¡­¡±


    ¡°Gazz¡­go¡­gugaa!?¡±


    While listening to Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s snoring, which sounded as if something was stuck in his throat, I rummaged through my luggage and took out some herbs.


    Of course, they were sleeping herbs.


    Not only did they have the effect of healing fatigue by inducing a deep sleep, but they also helped you fall asleep more quickly. If I ate these herbs, I should be able to sleep soundly even if his snoring continued.


    I felt like relying too much on herbs wasn¡¯t good, but there was no other way now.


    We¡¯d be fighting the orcs again tomorrow, so I couldn¡¯t afford to be tired tomorrow.


    ¡°Hmm¡­gulp.¡±


    I drank the herbs with some water and dove back into my sleeping bag.


    The snoring continued as usual, but as the drowsiness increased, it bothered me less and less.


    I surrendered to the drowsiness and quietly set off on a journey to the world of dreams¡­


    ¡ª


    The next morning, I left the tent, leaving Mr. Ekenhart, who was still sleeping, and met up with Liza, who had juste out of ire¡¯s tent. Leo also joined us as we headed to the river for morning preparations.


    Due to being on watch duty, my sleep time was short, but thanks to the sleep herb, I woke up feeling refreshed and didn¡¯t feel any tiredness from the day before.


    By the way, Liza still seemed to enjoy watching me shave my beard, but I couldn¡¯t help but feel a little doubtful that it was enjoyable for a little girl to watch an adult man shave his beard.


    Well, if Liza was amused by it, then it was fine.


    ¡°Good morning, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Ms. ire. And Ms. Anne.¡±


    ¡°Good morning¡­¡±


    By the time I finished getting ready and left the river, Ms. ire and Ms. Anne, who seemed to have been getting ready inside the tent, came out. I greeted the two of them, but when I looked at Ms. Anne, she didn¡¯t seem to be feeling very well, and had a gloomy expression.


    ¡­I wonder if she couldn¡¯t sleep well in the tent?


    ¡°Anne, pull yourself together. It¡¯s because you were upte petting Liza, just because she¡¯s cute.¡±


    ¡°Even when she¡¯s sleeping, her ears and tail twitch cutely, so I could not help myself¡­¡±


    ¡°Hahaha, so that is why you couldn¡¯t sleep.¡±


    ¡°Liza is cute?¡±


    I thought that Ms. Anne couldn¡¯t sleep well because of the unfamiliar tent, but apparently it was because she was upte watching Liza¡­ At least she cared about Liza enough to not wake her up.


    Liza was cute when she¡¯s awake, but I could understand the feeling that she was also cute when sleeping.


    As Ms. Anne slumped over, I smiled at her, and Liza tilted her head with a puzzled expression.


    ¡°Now then, let us begin just as we did yesterday¡­ Today, let¡¯s start with Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Yes, understood!¡±


    After breakfast, it was time to experience battle against the orcs, just like yesterday.


    Liza had already been briefed during breakfast and understood what was to be done.


    She seemed a bit disappointed that she couldn¡¯t fight the orcs this time, which might suggest that she found joy in the act of fighting?


    ¡°Sister Tilura, do your best!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Yes! Liza, Leo, I¡¯ll do my best!¡±


    Liza sat on Leo¡¯s back and cheered.


    Ms. ire stood behind them, gently supporting her, so that Liza would not fall.


    Tilura was slightly nervous, probably because she wanted to show Liza how capable she was. But she didn¡¯t seem as tense as she was during first battle with the orcs yesterday, and it seemed she would be fine.


    ¡°After Tilura, it¡¯s Sherry¡¯s turn. Can you do it?¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Go, Sherry!¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    It seemed like today, I was going to be thest one to fight, with Sherry following after Tilura. Well, based on what we decided yesterday, I¡¯ll probably have to fight two orcs, so it¡¯s no wonder I¡¯mst. Sherry responded to Mr. Ekenhart with a bark, determined not to make the same mistakes as yesterday.


    ¡°Now good Leo, we¡¯re counting on you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­sniff sniff¡­¡±


    ¡°Mama, you can do it!¡±


    I had already given Leo the medicinal herbs beforehand.


    When asked by Mr. Ekenhart, Leo nodded and sniffed around the forest for any signs of the orcs.


    Leo really did want to show Liza how capable she could be. And it was heartwarming to see Liza cheering on everyone so innocently.


    I might also feel more motivated if I were cheered on during my fight with the orcs. However, I had to be careful to not get too caught up in it as well.


    ¡°Hmm, it seems like Tilura and Sherry have be ustomed to it, even though it¡¯s only their second time. Perhaps it¡¯s because they¡¯ve been carefully observing the orcs and are able to remain calm¡­¡±


    After Leo searched for the orcs, Phillip and the others would lure it in, and then Tilura and Sherry defeated it.


    They had learned from their mistakes yesterday, and were able to finish it without ever being in danger.


    Tilura used her height to her advantage, and targeted their legs. She also might have learned from Liza¡¯s fighting style, as she stabbed the orc in the shoulder to prevent it from moving its arms. And once it was defenseless, she thrust her sword into its chest.


    Even if she was getting used to it, it was quite a merciless way to fight for one so young.


    This satisfied Mr. Ekenhart greatly.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 524

    Chapter 524


    Leo was excited


    Unlike yesterday, Sherry used magic right from the beginning of the battle.


    And just like yesterday, she continuously used ice magic and easily froze the orc, and ended the battle.


    It was a safe victory, but perhaps it was to be expected, given the difference between monster types.


    However, after the battle, Leo muttered that she had to teach Sherry other ways to fight besides magic, which was a concern¡­


    It seemed that she wanted her to defeat the orcs not only with magic, but also with ws and fangs like a fenrir¡­


    ¡°Well then, it¡¯s Mr. Takumi¡¯s turn¡­ Can you do it? If you want, it¡¯s okay to use herbs this time¡­¡±


    ¡°I should be fine. If there¡¯s a situation where no one can help, I¡¯ll eat the herbs without hesitation¡­ But everyone is here this time.¡±


    ¡°Very well. If you feel in danger, call for help right away. Leo is here, and we¡¯re here too. Besides, since you were able to defeat one orc without any problems, it should be fine.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I understood.¡±


    I was capable of defeating one orc without difficulty, but this time there would be two.


    Although it seemed unlikely that the orcs would coordinate their attacks, based on their behavior when they attacked Range vige, the fact that they were attacking together still made them a threat.


    Even if there was only one orc, I had no intention of letting my guard down. However, this time, I decided to be even more alert and wait with extra determination.


    ¡°Good Leo, I¡¯m counting on you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    We had Leo find the location of the orcs. It was a familiar routine for Philip and the others.


    Perhaps we were lucky this time, as Leo immediately found two orcs that were nearby.


    Apparently, there were also another two not far off from them, but I hoped Philip would only lure in the one pair.


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Here theye.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    As I was slightly ahead of everyone else, I drew my sword in response to the sounds and voicesing from the direction of the forest.


    This time, I decided to use a sword instead of a katana. With two opponents, there might be a need to parry the attacks of the orcs¡­ That was the expectation, at least. And while a katana was superior in terms of sharpness, it was not as suitable for blocking attacks.


    For the time being, I had the katana hanging from my waist with the sword sheath, but I wouldn¡¯t be able to switch weapons duringbat.


    As soon as I picked up my sword, I heard the voice of Mr. Ekenhart from behind me. He must have noticed the soundsing from the forest as well.


    With a small growl, Leo came to my side and stared at the forest¡­ I wondered what was going on, but the reason soon became clear.


    ¡°Sorry, Mr. Takum. All of the orcs have gathered!¡±


    Philip, who hade out of the forest a little earlier, apologized while shouting at me.


    Behind him were the other guards, as well as the orcs who pursued them.


    So they couldn¡¯t reduce their numbers¡­


    ¡°The distance between the orcs was too close. They noticed us when we tried to lure them here and now there are four of them!¡±


    ¡°Understood! Please step back! ¡­Leo, I¡¯m counting on you!¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, please deal with them!¡±


    ¡°Mama, let¡¯s go!¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Grrrr¡­Grau!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    Leo must have sensed that four orcs wereing, as she was standing next to me.


    Liza, who was riding on her back, was cheering happily when she realized Leo was going to fight.


    In the next instant, Leo, who usually did not go at full speed, rushed out faster than the eye could follow.


    I heard a short scream from Ms. ire, and immediately after, Leo was standing in front of the orcs.


    ¡­Uh, wasn¡¯t that too fast?


    Perhaps it was because she had just seen Liza and Sherry fight¡­ After all, Liza had been especially fast.


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Gyu!?¡±


    ¡°Wah¡­¡±


    ¡°We¡¯re here already¡­¡±


    And just like that, the two orcs, who had been split in two, fell to ground with a thump.


    She must have shed them with her ws¡­ But I hadn¡¯t been able to see how.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°Gyu-giii¡­¡±


    ¡°Giii¡­¡±


    While Leo barked happily, the other two orcs were shaking.


    ¡°¡­Uh, Leo¡­ Thanks.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Mama really is amazing! I want to be able to fight that quickly¡­¡±


    ¡°While we managed to stay on, I had no idea what was happening¡­¡±


    As Leo came up to me with a proud expression, I petted her on the cheek.


    Liza was happy about what Leo did, but I didn¡¯t know if I wanted her to copy it.


    I hoped that she wouldn¡¯t be too interested in such things, or Mr. Ekenhart might be encouraged¡­


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I know¡­¡±


    ¡°You can do it, papa!¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Of course.¡±


    I stopped petting Leo and nodded at Mr. Ekenhart. Then I gripped my sword and faced the orcs.


    Though, I felt a little sad. Even when I looked at the orcs with hostility, they were just shaking while looking towards Leo.


    Hmm. I guess I could take one down from the side¡­ But then that wouldn¡¯t be fighting two at the same time¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 525

    Chapter 525


    I fought against two orcs


    ¡°Light Elemental Shine!¡±


    ¡°Gyuo!?¡±


    Holding a sword in one hand and gesturing towards the orcs with the other, I used light magic. Even though it was a bright time of day, the sudden intense light startled the orcs, who had been afraid of Leo, and they finally noticed me.


    During this time, Leo seems to have taken Liza and moved further away, and so I finally had the full attention of the orcs. The orcs became excited and began to attack me.


    They were often known for their recklessness, andbined with theirck of intelligence, they could only think of targeting the most visible enemy. The fear they had shown just a moment ago disappeared immediately, and they werepletely intent on attacking me.


    I had used magic to get their attention, but now I had no trump card to surprise the orcs with¡­ Doing the same thing again would have little effect.


    ¡°Very well then. I¡¯m going!¡±


    Although I had been taught other magic that could be used, I decided to face the two orcs without any tricks.


    Besides, it wasn¡¯t necessary to use tricks to fight advantageously, since the others were watching over me.


    Holding my sword in the middle position, I ran towards the orcs who were positioned a short distance away.


    At the very least, if I didn¡¯t go towards the two orcs myself, then they both might charge at the same time, which would be dangerous and difficult to avoid.


    ¡°Gyuo!?¡±


    ¡°Hmph!¡±


    First, I targeted the left orc who was closer, and ran towards it.


    The orc was surprised by the sudden approach and its reaction was slow as it lifted its arm.


    I made use of the opening to get close and swing my sword downwards.


    ¡°Gyuaaa!¡±


    The sword lightly shed the right arm of the orc.


    As the orc let out a cry of pain, I swung back up in order to weaken it even further¡­


    ¡°Gyuu!¡±


    ¡°Ah! Damn it!¡±


    The moment I lifted my sword, the other orc charged in from the side and swung down its left arm.


    I couldn¡¯t help but shout in rm as I twisted my body and met the orc¡¯s arm with my sword.


    ¡°Gyuu!¡±


    ¡°Mmm¡­they¡¯re so strong, if nothing else!¡±


    It was so sudden that I ended up catching the orc¡¯s arm with the t of my sword.


    If it were the sharp side, I could have cut it off with the momentum. But the important thing was to avoid being hit.


    The orc then tried to push me down by applying more weight into its left arm.


    While I was supporting my sword with both arms, the orc was using one arm¡­even if I had the advantage of pushing down, I could not match its strength.


    Had I not trained, I would have likely been pushed back easily¡­


    ¡°Gyua!¡±


    ¡°I knew you would do that!¡±


    ¡°Gyu!¡±


    While I was blocking one orc¡¯s attack, the other orc was free.


    Its eyes were bloodshot with rage from having its arm cut, and it raised its hands and tried to grab me.


    And so I moved away from the other orc and lowered my sword.


    The suddenck of resistance allowed the orc to swing down, but I was no longer there.


    It seemed surprised at first, but I ignored it as I kicked off the dirt and escaped from the spot.


    It would be difficult to beat the power of two orcs at such close range.


    I lowered my stand and dove below the arms of the orcs, and then continued forward until I was several meters away from them.


    At least for now, I was safe¡­


    If there was only one, I could just cut it, and then continue to weaken it, but¡­ When there were two, I would not have as many openings.


    ¡­I would just have to do it slowly¡­ Or find a way to take one out with a single blow¡­


    ¡°¡­I guess this isn¡¯t the time to do anything risky. I¡¯ll go with weakening them.¡±


    This was like training, where I learned how to take on multiple opponents.


    I had plenty of time, which I would use.


    Besides, I doubted that I could take one orc out with a single blow anyway.


    Perhaps if I was able to stab it in the head or heart. But then again, it would take time to pull it out again. And I would be vulnerable to the other orc.


    ¡°¡­Hmm?¡±


    ¡°Gyuuooo!¡±


    ¡°Gyuuo!¡±


    ¡°Woah! Phew¡­¡±


    As I was thinking, the two orcs swung their arms at me at the same time.


    I dodged the attacks by a hair¡¯s breadth, but¡­I really shouldn¡¯t get too absorbed in my thoughts in the middle of a fight..


    Still, I went through my memories and fixed on a certain idea.


    ¡°Alright, I decided what to do. Now I just need to¡­¡±


    I looked at the orcs that were raising their arms in my direction.


    As there was some danger in my n, I could not do it if the orcs were too close to me.


    ¡°Gyuoo!¡±


    ¡°Gyuo!¡±


    ¡°Tsk¡­woah!¡±


    I parried the orc on the right with my sword, and then dodged the orc on my left.


    While I was managing to stop the attacks, things could not remain like this¡­


    As the orcs were not coordinated, even if one of them attacked, and I dodged it, there wasn¡¯t always an opening.


    It was no wonder that Philip and the guards had trouble with decreasing their numbers.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 526

    Chapter 526


    My prediction was too optimistic


    ¡°The saving grace is that they are slow on their feet¡­ But I should probably weaken them more.


    Even though I had a n, it was too dangerous to put it into action now.


    If I could slow both of them down a little more, or separate them, it would be best.


    ¡°Hyah!! Tsk!¡±


    ¡°Gyua!?¡±


    ¡°Gyuo!¡±


    For now, I targeted the orc on my left side, and swung my sword at its leg.


    As it was moving, my aim was not precise, but I seeded in shing its thigh.


    In the meantime, the other orc swung down with its arm.


    Without losing momentum, I rushed forward past the orc I had cut, and then caught my bnce with a hand on the ground.


    Had my movement been dyed even a little, the orc¡¯s arm would have hit me. The thought made a chill run down my spine.


    Thankfully, the other orc was staggered, and did not attack. Though, the wound was not deep at all¡­


    ¡°I¡¯ll have to take my time and fight¡­¡±


    I red at the approaching orc and prepared to do what I had nned.


    Now that our positions had changed, I could see Ms. ire and the others, who seemed to be worried about me.


    ¡­It¡¯s fine. I can defeat some orcs. I muttered.


    ¡°Hah¡­hah¡­ They¡¯ve slowed down a lot. ¡­But so have I.¡±


    ¡°Gyuu-gyuu-gyuu!¡±


    ¡°Gyuuaa!¡±


    After some time¡­which was really just a few minutes, I was able to cut the orcs a few more times while dodging their attacks. One of the orcs was bleeding from both legs now, and it was not able to charge due to the pain.


    As for the other one, I had also cut one of its legs a little, but not enough to stop it from charging.


    Also, they were both incredibly excited and angry.


    Perhaps I had provoked them too much, but there was no way to defeat them at the same time.


    As I caught my breath, I wondered if it wasn¡¯t time yet.


    ¡°Gyuaaa!!¡±


    ¡°Gyuuuaaa!¡±


    ¡°Here ites!¡±


    The less wounded orc now charged towards me.


    The other one came as well, but it was much slower.


    As this was my chance, I moved back in order to lure in the charging orc, and waited for it to arrive.


    Yes¡­that¡¯s it¡­separate¡­


    ¡°Gyaaaa! Gyuaa!?¡±


    ¡°!¡±


    Once it was about two meters away, I rushed to the side of the charging orc.


    As it was running so fast, it was unable to change direction as it went past me.


    It was surprised by my sudden disappearance, but I ignored it and raised my sword while running towards the other orc.


    ¡°Gyuuooo!¡±


    ¡°¡­Hah!¡±


    ¡°Gyu!?¡±


    It raised its voice in rm and tried to swing at me with its arms. But before it could, I plunged my de deep into its chest.


    ¡°Gyuaa! Gyuuaa!¡±


    ¡°Woah!¡±


    But I was not able to take it down in one hit. And it continued to swing its arms in an attempt to hit me.


    I suppose it was moving by instinct, but they had incredible strength, and a direct hit would do a lot of damage.


    I had meant to target the heart, but it seemed like I had missed¡­ In the first ce, I didn¡¯t even know if their hearts were in the same position as humans.


    As I thought of such things, I let go of the sword and moved out of the orc¡¯s reach.


    ¡°Gyuaaa!!¡±


    ¡°Gah!¡±


    I moved back and then turned around, only to find the other orc facing me.


    However, it was moving faster than expected, and was raising its arms as it charged.


    By the time I had registered the danger, its arm was alreadying down on my left side!


    As I could not dodge it, I raised my left arm, thinking it would be preferable to a direct hit.


    I heard the bones creak¡­ Even if they didn¡¯t break, there would likely be a crack¡­and it hurt so much.


    My vision shook.


    But if I didn¡¯t do something now, the orcs would be free to crush me to death!


    ¡°Damn it!!¡±


    I gritted my teeth and bore the pain. And then my hand went to the katana at my belt and unsheathed it.


    ¡°Gyuooo!¡±


    ¡°Gah¡­hah¡­hah¡­¡±


    ¡°Grau!?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi!?¡±


    ¡°Papa!¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    The katana went deep into the orc¡¯s stomach, and blood poured as it screamed, and ran past my left side.


    This idea of using my sword to weaken it and then switching to the katana¡­it came from my experience fighting against Deam.


    In order to do this, I had focused on one orc, trying to slow its movement before separating them¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 527

    Chapter 527


    My injuries healed quickly


    What was surprising, was that the desperate orc had quickly changed directions ande towards me.


    And so I ended up unsheathing the katana and cutting its stomach, just as I had done against Deam¡­


    I could hear Leo, Ms. ire and Liza shouting from a distance, but I ignored them.


    My left arm hurt a lot.


    ¡°Hah¡­hah¡­damn! Hyah!¡±


    ¡°Gyua! Gyuaaa!¡±


    Without being able to catch my breath, I turned towards the orc and swung repeatedly.


    I wished that I could swing faster than the eye could see, and slice the orc into pieces¡­but I had no skill to do that.


    Besides, the pain in my arm was slowing me down.


    However, the de was still sharp. Thanks to that, I was able to make deep cuts into its arms and legs. And when the orc finally fell to the ground, I plunged the sword into its chest.


    ¡°Hah¡­hah¡­ It¡¯s finally finished¡­?¡±


    I grimaced from the pain and raised my head. The orc was on its back, and not moving at all.


    ¡­So I managed to defeat both of them.


    ¡°Wou! Wou-wou!¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°Papa!¡±


    Just as I sighed with relief, Leo and the others came running to me.


    That was how worried they were¡­


    Mr. Ekenhart was walking slowly, but he was frowning with a creased forehead¡­ Perhaps he was angry, because I put myself in danger.


    ¡°Haha, I managed to do it¡­ Thanks, Leo. For believing in me.¡±


    ¡°Wou-wou! Kuun!¡±


    ¡°Are you alright, Mr. Takumi!?¡±


    ¡°Papa. Does that hurt¡­?¡±


    To show that I was fine, Iughed and thanked Leo, who had arrived first.


    It would have been possible for her to jump to the rescue and defeat the orc in a sh.


    And so I thanked her for not doing that, in spite of being worried.


    It was probably because I told her to stay back, unless it was particrly bad.


    ¡°I¡¯m¡­well, notpletely fine¡­ But I am alive¡­ Ouch¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­ I¡¯m so relieved.¡±


    ¡°Kuun¡­¡±


    ¡°It looks painful, papa¡­¡±


    While I tried to smile at Ms. ire, I was clearly winching.


    And I could not move my arm, due to the pain.


    ¡°Ahh¡­ Leo, sorry¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Papa?¡±


    I bore the pain and moved my back towards Leo, and then leaned against her fur.


    Leo understood, and quicklyy down so that she could support me.


    Ms. ire and Liza became worried as they saw this.


    ¡°¡­Good. Like this¡­ Ah, sorry, Ms. ire. Can you help me?¡±


    ¡°Weed Cultivation¡­ Ah, of course!¡±


    I leaned against Leo as I sat on the ground. And then I used my uninjured right hand to use Weed Cultivation.


    Once it was grown, I picked it, and changed it so that it could be used immediately.


    However, as it would be difficult to apply it with one arm, I asked Ms. ire for help.


    ¡°Ah¡­! Gah¡­ Hah¡­ It¡¯s much better now. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­I¡¯m so d¡­¡±


    ¡°You were rather reckless¡­ Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Ah, Mr. Ekenhart. ¡­Yes, the orcs were faster than I expected.¡±


    When Ms. ire applied the Loe, it hurt so much that I gasped. Perhap there was more than a fracture.


    But I felt the effects after just a few seconds, and the pain faded away. Loe really was amazing.


    Once the pain was gone, I thanked Ms. ire, and she sighed with relief.


    And then Mr. Ekenhart arrived.


    Even I agreed that I had been reckless.


    As I had only been thinking about winning, I didn¡¯t realize how reckless it was at the time¡­ Was it adrenaline? But as he was watching from a distance, Mr. Ekenhart could tell.


    ¡°You had the right idea. But you should have weakened the orc a little more. Did you panic?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ I think I was thinking too much about killing it quickly.¡±


    ¡°There are times when you have a good idea, and get too caught up in executing it. Well, you have much to think about now. Still, I did like how you used the katana at the end. I was not expecting that.¡±


    ¡°Well¡­it was a coincidence. I was able to cut it while unsheathing the sword, but it was that close.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. Think of what you can do in the moment, and use it to find a way to win. ¡­While I had some harsh words, you still fought quite well.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart really did see through everything¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 528

    Chapter 528


    Liza was worried about me


    As Mr. Ekenhart said, I was focusing too much on one orc, and failed to weaken the other.


    I had thought that I was keeping calm, but I suppose I was also in a rush to enact the n that I had thought of.


    ¡°Oh, father. Mr. Takumi was hurt. Even though he healed himself with Loe, the fight only just ended. You can talk about thatter! You should let him rest a little longer¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­that is true. Hmm. Sorry, Mr. Takumi. I could not help myself. In any case, it was an impressive fight. Rest well now.¡±


    ¡°Ahaha. Thank you.¡±


    It was true that I was still tired, in spite of the Loe.


    After all, it did not recover your strength.


    ¡°¡­Still, Mr. Takumi. Is it just me, or does ire seem too protective over you?¡±


    ¡°Why are you asking me that?¡±


    ¡°Oh, father. Just stop that!¡±


    While I felt a little bad for Mr. Ekenhart, he clearly enjoyed teasing his daughter as well.


    ¡°¡­Papa, does it hurt?¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Ah, I¡¯m fine now. I healed it with herbs.¡±


    ¡°Really¡­?¡±


    Liza had got down from Leo¡¯s back, and she touched my left arm as she asked me.


    Her eyes were a little teary.


    ¡­Perhaps I had caused her to worry too much.


    And so to show that I was fine, I used my left arm to pet Leo.


    ¡°That¡¯s good. Those orcs hurt you¡­ I want to fight them some more now!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!?¡±


    ¡°No-no-no-no-no. Wait a minute, Liza!¡±


    She looked relieved for a second, but then her eyes lit up again with renewed hostility towards the orcs.


    While I was d that she was angry¡­ We had gone through so much trouble to stop her from fighting.


    Besides, it was my own fault that I got injured.


    ¡°Listen, Liza. I got hurt because I made a mistake. Normally, that wouldn¡¯t have happened. But I took a risk. And I suffered the consequences. Besides, this is all for training, so there is no reason for you to fight as well.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s right, Liza. Mr. Takumi will surely not be injured next time. Your papa is very strong. So do not focus your anger on the orcs. Understand? I¡¯m sure he will show how capable he is next time!¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Really?¡±


    We were rather frantic, in trying to persuade Liza.


    Her anger subsided, and she calmed down, but still seemed puzzled.


    While it was good that she could be persuaded, it showed how much trust she had in Ms. ire as well¡­


    Well, I wasn¡¯t nning on getting hurt next time anyway, but¡­


    There was now even more pressure to avoid the same mistakes.


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Hmm? What is it, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Mama?¡±


    After we managed to persuade Liza that there was no need for her to go out killing orcs, we all sat around the fire and at lunch.


    As the orcs hunted today had not been prepared yet, we ate the orc that Leo defeated yesterday.


    In fact, we were hunting so many that we would not be able to eat it all.


    It was a nice problem to have¡­and at least it tasted good.


    And so we discussed whether we could bring some back with us to either sell in town or eat at the mansion.


    This would be possible, because we could use magic to freeze the meat.


    While they couldn¡¯t freeze it as quickly as Sherry¡­Ms. Lyra and the maids were quite good at such things.


    That was one of the reasons they hade.


    Also, the orc meat couldst for a few days anyway, which was convenient.


    It was then that Leo suddenly raised her face from her te of sausages, and turned towards the river.


    Liza, Ms. ire and I were next to her, and asked what was wrong¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 529

    Chapter 529


    Something was approaching


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Wou?¡±


    ¡°She is saying that there is a presence and smell that is both familiar and unfamiliar¡­¡±


    ¡°Familiar and unfamiliar¡­¡±


    Perhaps it was because the herbs were still having an effect¡­ But she could even smell it.


    We had just eaten lunch, and so the area around us smelled like it. And yet Leo could detect something that was far away¡­


    Either the thing had a really strong smell, or Leo¡¯s ability to differentiate between scents was that powerful.


    ¡°Is iting closer?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Leo nodded.


    It was in the forest, anding from the opposite side of the road. So it was unlikely to be human.


    A monster then¡­ While it was possible, Leo would surely recognize the presence of an orc or troll immediately.


    So¡­what could it be then¡­?


    ¡°Ms. ire?¡±


    ¡°Yes. ¡­Father! Everyone. Good Leo says that a monster is approaching from the other side of the river!¡±


    ¡°A monster?¡±


    ¡°I see. Phillip. And the rest of you.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    After being called by Sebastian, the guards were immediately put down their food, stood up and unsheathed their swords. And then they turned to face the river.


    They sure acted quickly.


    ¡°Leo¡­ Do you know what kind of monster it is?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Wou-wou.¡±


    ¡°She says it is familiar, but she¡¯s not sure¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    Perhaps it was a monster she had never encountered before then.


    But then what felt familiar about it¡­


    ¡°But is there any danger?¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wou.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    That was probably not a good question to ask Leo.


    She did not seem to understand the concept of danger to begin with.


    After all, she could move faster than the eye could see, and sh open orcs and use magic. It was doubtful there were any monsters that could pose a threat to her.


    ¡°Kyau¡­? Kyau-kyau!¡±


    ¡°What is it, Sherry?¡±


    I put Liza on top of Leo¡¯s back, just in case.


    Leo stood as if she was waiting for the thing toe. And as I prepared to give the go sign if necessary, Sherry suddenly started to bark.


    And I could not understand her.


    ¡°Sherry, is that true?¡±


    ¡°Kyau! Kyu! Kyu!¡±


    ¡°¡­What is she saying?¡±


    After talking to Ms. ire, Sherry then barked as if she wanted to be heard far away.


    It sounded a little happy. And so I asked Liza to tell me what it meant.


    ¡°Sherry says it is her mama and papa. They areing closer. And so Sherry called to them.¡±


    ¡°Sherry¡¯s parents¡­? Then that means¡­¡±


    ¡°Fenrirs!?¡±


    ¡°Oh!¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. Anne gasped in surprise.


    ¡°Ms. Anne, I think you should step back. It might be dangerous.¡±


    ¡°Mmm, that¡¯s true. Anneliese, go back.¡±


    ¡°No! If they are anything like Sherry, then they must be quite adorable things. I want to see them up close!¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­hmm¡­¡±


    While Mr. Ekenhart could fight, Ms. Anne had no power to speak of.


    She had no fighting experience and never even held a weapon.


    But even when the master of the house told her to stand back¡­she refused.


    Now that I thought about it, Ms. Anne¡­ She was so excited about the fenrirs, that she was standing very close to Leo¡­


    Usually, she was too scared toe that close.


    ¡°Ah, Sherry!¡±


    ¡°Kyau! Kyau-kyau! Kyu-kyu?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    As I was thinking about Ms. Anne, Sherry suddenly jumped out of Ms. ire¡¯s arms and ran in front of Leo.


    It seemed like she was confirming something with her.


    Liza then interpreted, and said that since it was her mama and papa, we did not need to be on our guard.


    At the same time, she was asking Leo if she could meet them.


    Leo nodded in agreement, and told her to go and meet with them.


    While Leo could be harsh with her sometimes, this was one of the times where she was gentle.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 530

    Chapter 530


    Fenrirs appeared from the forest


    ¡°Still, are you sure, Leo? I know you said that fenrirs aren¡¯t a danger to you, but¡­¡±


    ¡°Wou. Wuff-wuff. Wou-wou.¡±


    ¡°Even if they doe, you¡¯ll deal with them easily¡­right. Well, I¡¯m sure you can¡­ But go easy on them, alright?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    If there were Sherry¡¯s parents, that meant there were at least two of them.


    And though Sherry was considered to be a child, she was still able to defeat orcs and use magic as if it was nothing.


    Considering all of that, how strong was a fully grown fenrir¡­ While I was a little worried, Leo insisted that it was not a problem.


    We had discussed them before, and she said that their instincts would make them submit.


    ¡°Kyau! Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Fine. Mr. Takumi. Good Leo says it is safe, yes?¡±


    ¡°Yes. And even if they attack, she will protect us.¡±


    ¡°Very well. Father. Everyone. Let us step back then. Sherry wants to greet her parents.¡±


    ¡°¡­Fine. If that is what good Leo says, it must be true. Phillip!¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    After getting permission from Leo, Sherry then went to Ms. ire.


    Ms. ire nodded and confirmed what Leo had said.


    Mr. Ekenhart trusted Leo on the matter as well, and so he had everyone step back.


    Though, Ms. Anne had to be dragged away.


    After all, there was a danger that she would try to jump onto the fenrirs or something else that was strange.


    Well, fenrirs were dangerous, so perhaps she wouldn¡¯t do that. But Ms. Anne was hard to predict¡­


    Now that the guards had made the others retreat, it was just me, Leo, Liza and Sherry who remained. And also Ms. ire, as Sherry was her familiar.


    I had wanted Liza to go back as well, but then I realized that she was probably safest on Leo¡¯s back.


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau.¡±


    ¡°They will be here soon.¡±


    ¡°It looks like it.¡±


    Leo and Sherry barked towards the river, and Ms. ire and I nodded to each other.


    Liza seemed to be excited about what would happen next. As her senses were not as strong as Leo and Sherry, she seemed a little puzzled.


    The guards behind us had unsheathed their swords, just in case.


    After that, we continued to gaze at the trees for a few minutes.


    While Leo and Sherry could sense the presences approaching, Ms. ire and I could not.


    And so we just had to trust Leo.


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    The two barked once again, and then the trees shook. And we could hear the rustling of leaves.


    They must be big, and moving quickly then¡­


    Just as I thought this, the trees shook loudly, and shadows jumped out from the forest.


    The fenrirs¡­?


    ¡°Kyau-kyau!¡±


    Sherry barked happily as the two shadowsnded on the other side of the river.


    They stood there calmly and looked at us.


    ¡°So that is a grown fenrir¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­¡±


    Ms. ire and I gasped as we saw them.


    Even at a distance, we could see that they were bigger than a human.


    Though, they were much smaller than Leo. Perhaps a little smaller than a horse.


    And they had white fur that shone in the light.


    Their bodies seemed a little rounderpared to Leo, but it was probably because of their fur¡­


    However, their faces were just as sharp and fierce as wolves.


    The fluffy white fur¡­ I suppose you could say they looked likerge, arctic wolves.


    ¡°Aoooooo!!¡±


    ¡°Kyauan!!¡±


    ¡°Aoooooo!!¡±


    One of the fenrirs lifted its head to the sky and howled.


    And then Sherry and Leo did the same.


    Was this their way ofmunicating?


    However, I could not understand what it meant.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wou-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau. Kyau-kyau.¡±


    ¡°Uhh¡­¡±


    When they were done, they turned to us and barked.


    Uh, apparently Sherry¡¯s parents were telling us to go somewhere?


    And Leo wanted them toe here, if there was something?


    It was true that Silver Fenrirs were superior, but that seemed a little self-important.


    Well, they probably could not refuse¡­ In human society, it would be like if the king called for you.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 531

    Chapter 531


    Fenrirs could not swim


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°Grau-grau! Grrrr¡­!¡±


    ¡°They drowned!?¡±


    ¡°Can fenrirs not swim?¡±


    ¡°¡­Well, Sherry was not able to¡­ are they alright?¡±


    After looking at each other, the fenrirs jumped into the river.


    It was deep enough that humans would have to swim.


    Someone asrge as Leo would be able to keep their head above water while standing, but fenrirs were smaller¡­ And so they were currently sshing around as if they were drowning.


    Uh¡­should we try to help them?


    ¡°¡­Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Though, given their size, it would be quite difficult to help them.


    If I jumped into the water, I would probably just end up drowning myself.


    And so I asked Leo, but she said it would be fine, and we should just watch.


    ¡°Kyau! Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Gabububu¡­gabu¡­!¡±


    ¡°Gaaabb!? Gabu-gabu!¡±


    Sherry watched her struggling parents and barked as if to cheer them on.


    The fenrirs must have heard her, as they seemed to calm down after that.


    And then, with bits of their back and head out of the water, they started to move slowly towards us.


    Still, it seemed like they could not hold their breath for long, and constantly moved their heads up and down¡­it was somewhere between the doggy paddle and drowning.


    Hmm¡­ Well, though they were struggling, they were not in danger, at least¡­


    We had all been quite nervous about the fenrirs at first, but that was long in the past now¡­


    Even Ms. ire looked a little surprised.


    After some time, the fenrirs finally reached the other side, and spat out the water they had swallowed, and shook off the water from their fur.


    While we were far enough that we did not get drenched, the water still flew quite far.


    Still¡­it wasn¡¯t as bad as when Leo did it.


    ¡°Kyau! Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Grau. Grau?¡±


    ¡°Gau! Gau! Gau-gau!¡±


    ¡°Kyu¡­¡±


    ¡°Gau-gau¡­¡±


    Sherry rushed towards the two fenrirs and barked.


    While I could only see from behind, it was clear that she was happy to be reunited with them.


    Then the fenrir with an especially imposing face, began to lick Sherry and press its face towards her.


    They were also happy and seemed quite relieved.


    However, the other fenrir looked at Sherry sharply and barked as if to scold her.


    I suppose that one was angry that Sherry had gone off on her own again.


    As Sherry barked apologetically, the other fenrir barked as if to say it was in the past.


    Probably, the one licking Sherry was the father, and the angry one was the mother.


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Kyain!¡±


    ¡°Kyaun!¡±


    ¡°Kyu?¡±


    As I watched the reunion, which somehow didn¡¯t feel entirely harmonious, Leo suddenly let out a howl.


    It seemed like she wanted them to greet her. But I understood why they would be more concerned with Sherry.


    The two fenrirs looked surprised, and let out a yelp.


    Sherry looked at them with a puzzled expression.


    ¡°Kyaun-kyaun!¡±


    ¡°Kyain-kyain!¡±


    ¡°Kyu¡­¡±


    The two fenrirs then rushed towards Leo, and while totally ignoring us, turned over and showed their bellies.


    It was that submissive pose that dogs did?


    Leo used to do it when I got mad at her¡­


    But these were wild fenrirs, and I suppose it was natural for them, as they knew that they could not beat Leo.


    ¡°Wou. ¡­Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Huh? Me?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°¡­Fine.¡±


    ¡°You¡¯ll be okay, papa!¡±


    ¡°Well, I¡¯ll try then.¡±


    Apparently, she wanted me to rub their bellies¡­ Would it really be fine?


    They showed no signs of going against Leo, so they probably wouldn¡¯t attack¡­


    And so I started to walk towards them.


    Liza was cheering for me. But I felt a little conflicted, since she was still telling me to go to some fenrirs¡­


    Still, I wanted to look brave in front of her, so I had to do my best.


    Sherry stood still as she watched, and Ms. ire seemed to be holding her breath.


    Behind her, Ms. Anne was watching with a jealous expression. But I ignored her.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 532

    Chapter 532


    I petted the parent fenrirs


    ¡°Uh¡­like this?¡±


    ¡°Gauu¡­¡±


    ¡°Gau-gau!¡±


    ¡°It seems like they like it¡­¡±


    I went between the two fenris and used both hands to rub their bellies.


    As they were so big, I could not rub their whole bodies at once, but I had plenty of experience with Leo, and knew which spots felt good.


    Of course, fenrir might be different from dogs, but the two barked pleasantly, so I seemed to have seeded.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°You too, sister ire.¡±


    ¡°Me¡­? Well, if Mr. Takumi is fine¡­ very well.¡±


    Apparently, Leo wanted Ms. ire to do it as well.


    And so she made up her mind and approached us.


    However, the two fenrirs suddenly jumped back up to their feet.


    ¡°Grrrr¡­¡±


    ¡°Gauuu¡­.¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    It was something that Leo sometimes did in the bath, where she would use her momentum while jumping up in order to spin in the air andnd on her feet.


    And then they started to growl at Ms. ire.


    So I was fine, but not her¡­?


    Perhaps it was because I smelled like Leo.


    ¡°Kyau! Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Gau?¡±


    ¡°Gauuu? Gau-gau.¡±


    ¡°¡­Sherry?¡±


    When I turned around, I saw that Phillip and the guards had rushed towards Ms. ire.


    I suppose they were concerned, not that the fenrirs looked hostile.


    But just then, Sherry moved between them and Ms. ire and barked.


    The two fenrirs looked puzzled as they barked at her.


    ¡°Kyau! Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Gau¡­¡±


    ¡°Guff¡­¡±


    Sherry exined to them, and then they finally calmed down.


    However, that wasn¡¯t the end of the matter.


    ¡°Grrr¡­¡±


    ¡°Kyain!¡±


    ¡°Kyaun!¡±


    ¡°Leo?¡±


    Leo moved next to Ms. ire and growled at the fenrirs.


    It seemed like she was upset, because she was the one who had sent Ms. ier.


    Upon seeing this, the fenrirs went into a submissive pose again.


    ¡°Wuff? Wou-woud! Grau!¡±


    ¡°Gau¡­¡±


    ¡°Gau¡­¡±


    ¡°Kyau-kyau.¡±


    And then Leo barked as if to lecture them.


    The fenris were shaking, and their tails went between their legs.


    Sherry barked and nodded understandingly.


    ¡°Uh¡­Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wou-wou.¡±


    ¡°She said that it¡¯s fine now!¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    As I felt bad for them, I started to pet the fenrirs again.


    And then Ms. ire approached us.


    ¡°Ms. ire, like this¡­ Pet them gently with your palm.¡±


    ¡°Very well. I will try.¡±


    ¡°This is not fair at all! I want to¡­ Let go of me!¡±


    ¡°No, Anneliese. This is no time to startle the fenrirs.¡±


    Ms. ire seemed to enjoy the soft feel of the fenrirs as she petted them.


    While I could hear Ms. Anne causing a scene in the back, I pretended not to hear.


    Hopefully, Mr. Ekenhart will keep her back.


    ¡°Gau?¡±


    ¡°Grr¡­¡±


    ¡°Gau¡­¡±


    ¡°Kyau.¡±


    While Ms. ire and I petted the fenrirs, Leo started to bark at them.


    I could feel them trembling, which showed how scared of Leo they were.


    The fenrirs barked weakly and nodded.


    For some time after that, Leo and the fenrirs talked as Ms. ire and I continued to pet them. And Leo made them promise to not attack any humans or disobey me.


    I didn¡¯t know why thest part was important¡­ I was not their owner.


    In any case, as the fenrirs were being calm not, Mr. Ekenhart and the others were able to pet them as well.


    Leo, Liza and Sherry were keeping watch, and the fenrirs seemed to enjoy it. So there was no problem.


    Though, Sherry got a little carried away, and jumped on her father¡¯s stomach, which seemed painful.


    I suppose even if orc attacks were nothing, it was different if it was another fenrir¡­


    And so with a feeling of relief, I moved away and talked with Sebastian and Ms. ire.


    The others were all gathered around the fenrirs.


    Ms. Anne and the maids seemed to be especially fond of them.


    Even Johanna was there as well.


    Though, Phillip and the other guards still looked cautious¡­


    As for Mr. Ekenhart, he was talking to Ms. Anne, but seemed to be in a good mood.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 533

    Chapter 533


    The reason that the fenrirs came


    ¡°Well, it seemed like they were talking to good Leo earlier. But what did they say?¡±


    ¡°It was about why they hade here.¡±


    While Leo was talking to the fenrirs, Liza interpreted, and so I understood.


    I had a general idea of what Leo was saying. And Ms. ire could understand Sherry.


    However, only Liza could understand the two fenrirs.


    They were very intelligent, and could convey some things with gestures, but there was a limit to that.


    ¡°Why they came here¡­ Surely it was to get Sherry?¡±


    ¡°That was one reason. But you know how Sherry used magic to fight the orc? That¡¯s how they sensed her presence, and came to see how she was doing¡­¡±


    ¡°And what else?¡±


    ¡°Simrly, they sensed Leo¡¯s presence once we entered the forest. And so the fenrirs had moved deeper into the forest.¡±


    Leo¡¯s senses were sharper than the fenrirs.


    However, Leo wasrger and had a stronger presence¡­which was easier to detect.


    And so while Leo could not sense fenrirs that were far away, they were able to sense Leo.


    ¡°While Leo said that they would submit due to their instincts, they still tend to hide until they actually encounter each other. And so¡­they probably tried to avoid being seen, thest time we were here.¡±


    ¡°So that was why we could not find them. Though, we didn¡¯t even find any traces, so perhaps we were in the wrong area.


    ¡°Indeed.¡±


    As there was no guarantee that a Silver Fenrir would be friendly, it made sense that they would want to avoid it, instead of being in a situation where they had to submit.


    They could not resist once they did meet, but if they had to fight, then they would be in great danger.


    As for where they were located, we had found Sherry on the other side of the river. And this time, that¡¯s where the two fenris hade from as well. So they must live deep into the forest on that side.


    So it was no wonder that we did not find them.


    It was mostly luck that we had found Sherry, who had wandered off because she was curious.


    ¡°The fenrirs intended on hiding until Leo left. But then they recognized Sherry¡¯s magic. Of course, it was still dangerous, and so the pack decided to remain hidden, but¡­¡±


    ¡°Sherry¡¯s parents had different ideas, I suppose.¡±


    ¡°Yes. A long time had passed since she disappeared¡­and here she was in the forest again. And so they could not help but approach this ce, where Sherry was.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Yes, a parent would not be able to ignore a daughter who had gone missing.¡±


    ¡°Like Silver Fenrirs, they see family as being very important.¡±


    As I talked about the fenrirs, Sebastian nodded with satisfaction.


    Regardless, there was no doubt that the fenrirs cared about family.


    But as a pack, their survival instincts were strong, and they cared about the safety of the whole pack. So it was understandable that they were against going for Sherry.


    Perhaps even if they are monsters, if they have a certain amount of intelligence, they will care about family.


    I didn¡¯t know if orcs had the concept of family. They got made if they saw fellow orcs in front of them, but they never tried to protect each other either.


    And trolls¡­I hadn¡¯t met enough of them to say¡­


    ¡°Hmm¡­ So Sherry¡¯s parents came to get her¡­ What will you do?¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    Sebastian asked Ms. ire.


    Ms. ire closed her eyes and thought about it.


    They cared about her, and came even if it meant facing Leo. And so I doubted Sherry would be sad to go with them.


    If anything, she might be happier with her parents¡­ Well, I thought like that as a human.


    ¡°¡­I will respect Sherry¡¯s wishes. If she wants to go back, she should go and live with her family. ¡­Even though I will be a little sad.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    After thinking about it, Ms. ire said that she would respect Sherry¡¯s wishes.


    Aside from Ms. ire, all the people in the mansion were quite fond of Sherry, so it would be a sad parting¡­


    But she had finally reunited with her parents. And it would also be sad to part with them once again¡­ And so it would be a difficult decision either way.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 534

    Chapter 534


    Sherry made her decision


    ¡°¡­Previously, Sherry said she would stay at the mansion¡­well, with you, Ms. ire¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. And I was happy, of course¡­ But she might change her mind now that her parents are here. After all, Sherry is still young¡­¡±


    Judging by how sad Ms. ire¡¯s expression was, she probably thought that Sherry was going to choose to leave.


    ¡°Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Could you ask Sherry and the fenrirs, what they intend to do?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyuu?¡±


    After talking to Ms. ire, I went over to where Leo was.


    Regardless of what Sherry choses, I wanted Leo to act in between them.


    As for ms. ire, she went to the excited Sherry.


    Though, Sherry must have sensed that there was something different about Ms. ire, as she tilted her head with a puzzled expression.


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Gau!¡±


    ¡°Gau-grau!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    Leo barked once, and the fenrirs and Sherry got up and sat down. Sherry was looking up at Leo, but the other two had their heads bowed.


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Ms. ire?¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes, very well.¡±


    Ms. ire had an air of determination now.


    ¡°Sherry, there is no need to give me an answer immediately, but¡­ No, I should not say it in such a roundabout way¡­¡±


    ¡°Kyau?¡±


    Ms. ire shook head, and Sherry looked at her questioningly.


    ¡°Fenrirs are monsters that live in the forest. So perhaps you would want to live with your parents. But we are humans that live outside of the forest. We can be together right now, but we will have to leave eventually¡­¡±


    ¡°Kyau¡­¡±


    Sherry seemed to detect what Ms. ire was going to say, and she barked weakly.


    Liza, who was riding on Leo, and the rest of us humans watched them silently.


    Even Ms. Anne was keeping quiet, though she seemed like she wanted to say something.


    ¡°Sherry? If you want to stay with me, then you are wee. But if you want to return with your parents, then I will respect that, and release you from the familiar contract.¡±


    ¡°Kyuu¡­kyuu¡­?¡±


    ¡°You cannot choose both. We have to return to the mansion eventually. Just like how the fenrirs will return home. And so you must choose who you will go with.¡±


    ¡°Kyuu¡­¡±


    Well, the forest would always be here, so even if Sherry chose to go with Ms. ire, she could alwayse back to visit them. If Leo was there, then the fenrirs would detect her presence quickly, and then coulde.


    However, that was not the same as being together all of the time.


    Perhaps this was too difficult a decision for someone as young as Sherry¡­?


    Still, it would not be much better for Ms. ire or Leo to decide for her.


    Besides, it was not Ms. ire¡¯s style to ignore Sherry¡¯s will, and force her own. And so I wanted to support her.


    Previously, she had said that it was wrong to use her authority as a noble, and regretted forcing me to go to the forest.


    ¡°¡­You can decideter. We will be in the forest for a few more days, after all. However, you must decide before we leave¡­¡±


    ¡°Kyuu? Kyuu¡­¡±


    Sherry seemed to think about this for a moment, and then barked.


    I guess she really could not decide immediately¡­ I just hoped she would be able to decide by the time we leave¡­


    As I thought this, Sherry raised her head and started to run.


    ¡°Kyu!¡±


    ¡°Ahhh! ¡­Sherry¡±?¡±


    ¡°Kyau, kyu!¡±


    Sherry had bounced up from a sitting position and then pounced onto Ms. ire.


    It was so sudden that Ms. ire raised her voice in surprise, but managed to catch Sherry.


    And as Ms. ire wrapped her arms around her, Sherry barked and buried her face into Ms. ire¡¯s chest.


    ¡°¡­Are you¡­sure about this¡­Sherry?¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    Sherry barked loudly.


    ¡°¡­Ms. ire?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­ Sherry says that she wants to be with me¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ That¡¯s good.


    ¡°Yes¡­yes¡­¡±


    While I couldn¡¯t understand Sherry, I had an idea of what she was saying.


    Ms. ire¡¯s shoulders had shaken, and then she turned in order to reply to me.


    And while she was smiling happily, there were also tears in her eyes.


    Clearly, she was very moved by Sherry¡¯s decision.


    I smiled back, and Ms. ire nodded over and over again¡­

 Chapter 535

    Chapter 535


    The fenrirs treated me as a boss


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­oh¡­hehe¡­Sherry¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Sherry stretched and licked the tears off of Ms. ire¡¯s cheek.


    It was like she wasforting her and saying that there was no need to cry.


    Leo also nodded approvingly.


    ¡°Ms. ire¡­I¡¯m so happy!!¡±


    ¡°Woah, Ms. Anne!?¡±


    ¡°Anne!?¡±


    Ms. Anne had somehow freed herself from Mr. Ekenhart, and had approached us while screaming and crying.


    Tears were flowing like a fountain, even if she was happy about Ms. ire and Sherry.


    Well, I could understand her¡­


    While it had nothing to do with her, she was more moved than Ms. ire. Perhaps she was a surprisinglypassionate person.


    ¡°Now Anne¡­calm down. You¡¯re ruining the moment.¡±


    ¡°¡­Kyau.¡±


    ¡°Uhhhh¡­okay¡­¡±


    Even Sherry was sighing with exasperation.


    And so Ms. Anne moved back to where Ms. Lyra and the others waited. But the damage had already been done¡­


    It was no wonder Ms. ire was muttering with annoyance.


    ¡°¡­Hmm! Well, fenrirs. Sherry has decided to stay with me as a familiar¡­ Will you allow it?¡±


    After coughing, Ms. ire wiped her face and turned towards the two fenrirs.


    ¡°Grau¡­grau-gau!¡±


    ¡°Gau!¡±


    ¡°Uhh¡­?¡±


    ¡°No problem! That¡¯s what they said.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Liza. ¡­What a relief¡­¡±


    ¡°Can they really decide so easily? Well, not that it¡¯s a bad thing.¡±


    After seemingly thinking for just a few seconds, the father barked loudly and nodded.


    And then a momentter, the mother barked and nodded as well.


    It was clear what the answer was, but Ms. ire had still looked towards Liza for confirmation.


    ¡°Grau-gau! Gau! Gau.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff? Wuff!¡±


    After that Leo and the fenrirs began to talk about something.


    ording to Liza, it was only natural for Sherry to be a familiar to the person who saved her.


    ¡°But it wasn¡¯t me. It was Mr. Takumi who saved Sherry when she was dying¡­¡±


    Ms. ire muttered. But I hadn¡¯t decided to bring Sherry back to the mansion.


    What would have happened if we left her¡­ She would have been well enough, but she was still young and didn¡¯t know how to fight. So it was possible that she would be attacked by monsters again.


    Perhaps her parents or other fenrirs would have saved her first¡­but it was impossible to know.


    Regardless, Ms. ire¡¯s decision to bring her back had likely saved her.


    Aside from that, it was apparently an honor for a fenrir to be around a Silver Fenrir. And so they were proud of Sherry.


    They had onlye to take Sherry, if Leo happened to refuse her.


    ¡°That¡¯s fine¡­but why are you asking me?¡±


    ¡°Grau¡­gau. gau.¡±


    ¡°Gufff¡­¡±


    In the end, the fenrirs showed their bellies to me again. Apparently it was to show they were not hostile, and also their way of asking us to take care of Sherry.


    In any case, they seemed to like it when I petted them.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°So it was because you told them, Leo¡­¡±


    Leo barked in my direction.


    Apparently, she had told the fenrirs that I was the leader.


    But it wasn¡¯t as if I had any say in the matter¡­


    Dogs and wolves tended to have a packing order. And Leo had put me on the top.


    It was Mr. Ekenhart who had the most authority and ability. Or even Leo. But I decided not to think too hard about it.


    ¡°It is quite a sight. Seeing humans and fenrirs together like this. Though, I am included¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, you were petting them a moment ago.¡±


    After that, we returned to our lunch, which had been interrupted by the appearance of the fenrirs.


    Well, we were almost finished anyway¡­ Only, Sherry said she wanted to treat her parents to some delicious food.


    And the parents seemed to be hungry, and so Leo approved that they should join us.


    Currently, I and Mr. Ekenhart, who had finished eating, were cooking some of the orc meat for the fenrirs to eat. Ms. Lyra and the guards were also helping.


    And like that, we watched the strange sight of Sherry and the fenrirs happily eating the food.


    Ms. ire and Ms. Anne were with them, and seemed to be having fun.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World

 Chapter 536

    Chapter 536


    We talked about making the forest a little safer<hr>


    ¡°It was only yesterday that we thought of fenrirs as being dangerous for humans. And now we have a friendly rtionship.¡±


    ¡°Well, it all thanks to Leo. And Sherry as well.¡±


    ¡°As for Sherry, it was mainly because of Mr. Takumi and ire¡¯s actions. However, seeing such ferocious beasts acting so gently¡­ Others will not believe it when I tell them about how I petted a fenrir¡­¡±


    While Sherry being here was important, it was probably mostly thanks to Leo that the fenrirs did not attack us.


    Also, they probably enjoyed being petted and fed now¡­ Which was kind of strange because they were wild animals.


    ¡°¡­While I always thought of this forest as being dangerous, it hardly seems like it now.¡±


    ¡°Well, I can defeat orcs now. And the parent fenrirs can beat trolls¡­ And then there is Leo.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Hmm¡­if the fenrirs are protecting this forest, then the safety of the area around Ractos is somewhat secure¡­¡±


    ¡°What are you thinking about?¡±


    ¡°Well, humans should not enter the forest light-heartedly, and harass the fenrirs, but¡­ As long as there are fenrirs, the monsters will not multiply too much, and it will be less dangerous. Besides, if they can promise to not attack humans¡­¡±


    I suppose Mr. Ekenhart was thinking about using the fenrirs to keep the area safe?


    As there were many orcs in this forest, and even trolls the deeper in you went, it was not a safe ce for humans.


    Not only that, but it was even named after the fenrirs.


    Because of this, people did not go close to it. Well, except some brave fools¡­


    Ms. ire had been one of them.


    There could even be Silver Fenrirs like Leo if you went deep enough. But for now, we only know for certain that fenrirs lived there.


    If a human went in without thinking, they wouldn¡¯t stand a chance. However, if the fenrirs promised not to attack them, it was possible that it would be safer.


    Well, there were still other monsters.


    ¡°Are there any known cases of humans being attacked by monsters?¡±


    ¡°Not that I am aware of. ording to those adult fenrirs, they live deep in the forest, so they rarely encounter any humans.¡±


    ¡°In that case, what is the point of making them promise?¡±


    ¡°Well, while rare, people still go in. So it is only in hopes that such a person can survive¡­ Though, there is little to be done if they get attacked by orcs. But as people who know there are fenrirs here, it would give some peace of mind.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Then perhaps you could ask them to decrease the number of orcs and other monsters a little. See, they seem to have quite an appetite, after all¡­¡±


    ¡°That is¡­that would be best¡­ Do you think they will agree?¡±


    ¡°You can just make a request, and not force it¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. I can ask them, but be ready for a rejection.¡±


    I suppose he would not publicly announce that there were fenrirs here¡­ But he still wanted to avoid having people attacked.


    The parent fenrirs were quietly eating now. But that was because Leo was here.


    And the rest of us were all rted to Leo or Sherry. But it would be a different matter if it was someplete stranger.


    Ms. ire had once told me that this was the forest where the first head of their house encountered a Silver Fenrir. And so it was like a sacred ce.


    But still, some people entered it as a shortcut or out of curiosity.


    ¡°Fenrirs¡­uh, Leo. Do you have a minute?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart and I were about to call the fenrirs, but then we called Leo instead.


    We could not talk to the fenrirs without Liza. So it would be faster to go through Leo.


    ¡°¡­In other words, decreasing the number of orcs will make the forest a little safer.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Wuff-wuff?


    ¡°The fenrirs probably stay within a small area? That¡¯s what she said!¡±


    Liza was riding on Leo¡¯s back and interpreted for Mr. Ekenhart.


    Yes, yes. Very good.<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    The reason that the fenrirs came ¡°Well, it seemed like they were talking to good Leo earlier. But what did they say?¡± ¡°It was about why they hade here.¡± While Leo was talking to the fenrirs, Liza interpreted, and so I understood. I had a general idea of what¡­January 4, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Liza was scared of the fenrirs ¡°You always like to pet or hold Sherry, but you haven¡¯t really approached the adult fenrirs.¡± ¡°...Papa noticed then.¡± Recently, Liza had be less reserved, and more like an ordinary, yful child. And so I was wondering if there was a reason that she¡­January 9, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    The reason that Sherry was not injured ¡°Hmm¡­I guess it¡¯s because she is a fenrir. To not be injured after being hit so hard¡­¡± ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff-wou!¡± ¡°Uhhh, she says that fenrirs are able to protect themselves by enveloping their bodies in magic energy. That¡¯s why she wasn¡¯t injured.¡± ¡°...That is¡­so¡­November 29, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 537

    Chapter 537


    We asked the fenrirs<hr>


    ¡°It doesn¡¯t have to be over a vast area, good Leo. Just bringing their number down a little will be enough.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Wuff!¡±


    ¡°She said ¡®very well!¡¯¡±


    We were only in a small corner of the forest.


    Obviously, it would be impossible for the fenrirs to keep track of everything.


    Well, I did wonder if the number of orcs here decreased, then perhaps others woulde from elsewhere.


    ¡°Wuff. Grau, grau! Wou?¡±


    ¡°Grau¡­gau!¡±


    ¡°Gau-gau!¡±


    After listening to me and Mr. Ekenhart, Leo walked slowly towards the fenris, who were still eating. And then she began to exin it to them.


    The father fenrir looked a little sad to have his meal interrupted, but he nodded in agreement. And the mother did as well.


    It seemed like they were saying, ¡®leave it to us!¡¯


    But I wondered if the rest of their pack would agree to it.


    And then they continued to talk after that.


    ¡°Wuff! Wou-wouf. Wou-wuff.¡±


    As I was a little worried, I decided to ask Leo. But she nodded and exined to me that it was fine.


    Apparently, the parents had the highest rank within the pack. Also, they had been troubled recently, with monsters entering their territories.


    In order to maintain a natural bnce, they would not hunt more than necessary, but since decreasing their number a little would be easy, the rest of the pack should agree to it.


    Besides, they could not say no if Leo asked them¡­


    ¡°Well, if they do not mind, then it should be fine.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart said a little awkwardly after hearing Liza interpret for them.


    As for the matter of attacking humans, they also agreed that they would avoid it as much as possible.


    In fact, this was the first time they had even seen humans. And that was why they spent a lot of time sniffing us, so that they would remember the scent.


    ¡°In any case, the negotiations are settled then.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Well, if they ever do attack humans, it will only be for self defense¡­¡±


    ¡°Of course. They must survive as well. And protect their families. It would be dangerous if all you did was run away.¡±


    That was true¡­ Well, Sherry showed how difficult it was to be injured. But humans might use magic and other weapons.


    If someone was foolish enough to not just enter the forest, but to go and attack the fenrirs, then it could not be helped if the fenrirs put up a fight.


    But that was unlikely. Most people would just run away.


    And so this rare encounter must be fate¡­ Well, for Sherry and Leo.


    As we were able to have a friendly rtionship with the fenrirs, I did not want them to get hurt or attack others.


    After that, I continued to talk with Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian while the others went back to eating. And when the fenrirs were full, theyy on the ground with satisfaction.


    The others started to pet them, and the fenrirs purred happily. Even if they wererge, they acted a lot like pet dogs now¡­


    I suppose it was because they were fluffy, and obedient around Leo. But the fact that they looked so cute made me really want them to live in peace.


    ¡°By the way, Liza?¡±


    ¡°What, papa?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    I thought the fenrirs would return to their pack after eating, but they stayed and continued to be petted. And so I turned to Liza, who was riding on Leo¡¯s back.


    Leo also looked at me questioningly, but it had nothing to do with her.


    Still, since she wanted attention, I slowly petted Leo as I asked Liza the question¡­<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Fenrirs could not swim ¡°Grau!¡± ¡°Grau-grau! Grrrr¡­!¡± ¡°They drowned!?¡± ¡°Can fenrirs not swim?¡± ¡°...Well, Sherry was not able to¡­ are they alright?¡± After looking at each other, the fenrirs jumped into the river. It was deep enough that humans would have to swim. Someone asrge as Leo would be¡­January 2, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    The fenrirs treated me as a boss ¡°Kyau!¡± ¡°Ah¡­oh¡­hehe¡­Sherry¡­¡± ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡± Sherry stretched and licked the tears off of Ms. ire¡¯s cheek. It was like she wasforting her and saying that there was no need to cry. Leo also nodded approvingly. ¡°Ms. ire¡­I¡¯m so happy!!¡± ¡°Woah, Ms. Anne!?¡± ¡°Anne!?¡± Ms.¡­January 6, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I petted the parent fenrirs ¡°Uh¡­like this?¡± ¡°Gauu¡­¡± ¡°Gau-gau!¡± ¡°It seems like they like it¡­¡± I went between the two fenris and used both hands to rub their bellies. As they were so big, I could not rub their whole bodies at once, but I had plenty of experience with¡­January 3, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 538

    Chapter 538


    Liza was scared of the fenrirs<hr>


    ¡°You always like to pet or hold Sherry, but you haven¡¯t really approached the adult fenrirs.¡±


    ¡°¡­Papa noticed then.¡±


    Recently, Liza had be less reserved, and more like an ordinary, yful child. And so I was wondering if there was a reason that she was staying away from the fenrirs.


    ¡°So you are. But why? Everyone else is petting them¡­¡±


    ¡°Because¡­they are scary¡­¡±


    ¡°Scary?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    When they were on their stomachs with their tongues sticking out¡­ They just looked like a dog though?


    Leo was also surprised by this.


    But now that I thought about it, Liza had also been scared of Ms. Anne at first.


    She had said that she was scared of her sharp-looking hair.


    ¡°They are so big¡­and while I can manage Sherry¡­not them¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, they are big, but¡­ What do you mean, manage?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Wuff, wuff-wuff. Grau.¡±


    ¡°Ah, I see¡­¡±


    Apparently, she was talking about having to fight them.


    Sherry¡­ Well, after seeing her fight the orc, it was true that Liza was faster. So as long as she didn¡¯t get hit by magic, she would be fine.


    Though, Sherry could also cover her fur in magic energy, which prevented her from getting hurt when being thrown by the orcs. But perhaps Liza hadn¡¯t thought of that.


    In any case, that was why she was afraid of the fenrirs.


    But Leo was even stronger¡­ I suppose she was an exception¡­ She had also been scared of Leo at first.


    Leo had been quite sad about it at the time.


    Hmm¡­perhaps it was a feeling that had to do with being a beastkin.


    It seemed that there was also a connection with beast-type monsters, and if one had a mindset simr to thew of the jungle, it wouldn¡¯t be strange to want to avoid getting close to powerful monsters¡­


    ¡°Well, I understand how you feel. Right¡­Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°?¡±


    Leo and I looked at each other and nodded.


    She quickly lowered her body, so she must have understood my intention¡­ Good Leo.


    But Liza seemed puzzled by this.


    And so I stretched out my hands and picked up Liza off of Leo¡¯s back.


    ¡°¡­Papa, are you..?¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Leo is here. You have nothing to be afraid of. But it will be sad for the fenrirs, if you are scared of them, right?¡±


    ¡°Uhh, it will?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    I didn¡¯t know how the fenrirs actually thought, but I tried to appeal to Liza¡¯s good nature.


    They were Sherry¡¯s parents, after all, and we may meet them from time to time. Besides, it would not hurt to be friends with fenrirs.


    ¡­Also, I remembered a little girl who used to y with Leo, when she was small.


    She had really enjoyed being with Leo.


    Besides, I wanted Liza to have fun with the fenrirs, rather than being afraid of them.


    While she seemed to have her doubts, Liza did seem to feel sorry for them. And so after thinking about it for a moment, she stopped moving and tilted her head.


    ¡°Sherry, sorry to bother you.¡±


    ¡°Kyau? Kyau-kyau!¡±


    ¡°Gau?¡±


    ¡°Grau?¡±


    Sherry had been running happily around her parents, but I had her stop, and then ced Liza on the ground next to them.


    Sherry immediately barked and showed that she was happy that Liza hade to her parents.


    She probably saw Liza as a friend, and was happy to see her introduced.


    ¡°Uhh¡­ Papa¡­?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. I¡¯m here. And so is Leo.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    As the fenrirs looked at us curiously, I held Liza¡¯s hand towards them.


    First, the father.


    As they seemed to dote on Sherry, they would probably react gently towards children¡­


    That was what I thought.


    But Liza was looking down, and her body was shaking.


    I told her not to worry, and that it was not dangerous. And like that, she hesitantly touched the fenrirs¡¯s stomach.<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    I seeded in removing Liza¡¯s fear ¡°Soft¡­¡± ¡°Right? See, they like it if you pet them like this.¡± ¡°Hmm¡­ Like this?¡± ¡°Grau¡­¡± ¡°They like it. See?¡± The fenrir¡¯s fur was soft and fluffy, and Liza petted him gently. ¡°...It¡¯s fine?¡± ¡°Aye. They won¡¯t hurt you. Now, over here.¡± ¡°...Okay.¡± ¡°Kyafu¡­¡±¡­January 10, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I petted the parent fenrirs ¡°Uh¡­like this?¡± ¡°Gauu¡­¡± ¡°Gau-gau!¡± ¡°It seems like they like it¡­¡± I went between the two fenris and used both hands to rub their bellies. As they were so big, I could not rub their whole bodies at once, but I had plenty of experience with¡­January 3, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    The fenrirs treated me as a boss ¡°Kyau!¡± ¡°Ah¡­oh¡­hehe¡­Sherry¡­¡± ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡± Sherry stretched and licked the tears off of Ms. ire¡¯s cheek. It was like she wasforting her and saying that there was no need to cry. Leo also nodded approvingly. ¡°Ms. ire¡­I¡¯m so happy!!¡± ¡°Woah, Ms. Anne!?¡± ¡°Anne!?¡± Ms.¡­January 6, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 539

    Chapter 539


    I seeded in removing Liza¡¯s fear<hr>


    ¡°Soft¡­¡±


    ¡°Right? See, they like it if you pet them like this.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Like this?¡±


    ¡°Grau¡­¡±


    ¡°They like it. See?¡±


    The fenrir¡¯s fur was soft and fluffy, and Liza petted him gently.


    ¡°¡­It¡¯s fine?¡±


    ¡°Aye. They won¡¯t hurt you. Now, over here.¡±


    ¡°¡­Okay.¡±


    ¡°Kyafu¡­¡±


    I then moved Liza¡¯s hand over to the mother fenrir.


    She was less afraid now as she stretched her arm out.


    The mother fenrir was calm, and immediately barked with approval.


    ¡°See? It¡¯s alright.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­it is¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Mana, it was fine!¡±


    The fear waspletely gone from Liza¡¯s face now, and she smiled with relief and nodded.


    Children really were quick to adapt.


    ¡­Well, everyone here was like that.


    I suppose it was because they were used to being with Leo and Sherry.


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°Gau-grau!¡±


    ¡°Nya!¡±


    After we finished petting the fenrirs, Leo barked at them.


    Upon hearing that, they jumped up and sat in an upright position.


    They had lined up at Leo¡¯smand, it seemed.


    ¡°Wou-wou, grau!¡±


    ¡°Grau!? Gau-gau¡­sniff-sniff¡­¡±


    ¡°Graff!? Guff-guff¡­sniff-sniff¡­¡±


    ¡°?¡±


    Leo then pulled Liza¡¯s sleeve towards the fenrirs.


    Watching it from the side, it kind of looked like Leo was sharing her prey with them. But that was not the case.


    And while Liza was no longer scared, she seemed like she didn¡¯t quite understand what was going on.


    As for the fenrirs, they looked surprised for a moment, but then they nodded and began to sniff Liza¡¯s face.


    Was it so that they could remember her scent?


    And so I asked Leo, and she said that now that they didn¡¯t see Liza as an enemy, they should remember her appearance and scent.


    So I was right.


    As for why the fenrirs were surprised, it was because Leo said that Liza was her daughter.


    Well, given that they looked nothing alike, their reaction could not be helped.


    In any case, I knew that Leo saw Liza that way now.


    Yes, even if they looked different, they really were like a mother and daughter¡­


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­the n during this time had actually been to make you team up with Phillip and fight some orcs¡­¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s right¡­ I was just thinking about that. But¡­apparently, the fenrirs want Leo to see them fighting¡­ Well, I suppose it will be good for Sherry to watch.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes, and it would be a rare sight to see. Though, we already saw Leo fight. And she is much stronger. ¡°


    ¡°Haha¡­that is true.¡±


    As a show of loyalty towards Leo, and to thank us for the food, the fenrirs had then said that they would hunt the orcs.


    That was very kind of them. And since they were intelligent, perhaps that was how they thought when it came to food.


    There were old stories like that, about returning debts.


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°Gau!¡±


    Leo barked, informing us that orcs were approaching from the forest.


    And then the two fenrirs crouched low and prepared to pounce.


    As for the orcs, they were being lured in by Phillips and the guards again.


    The fenrirs were going to go into the forest to hunt them, but Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. Anne said it would be better this way, as we would be able to see them.


    That was true¡­


    Still, they had sent all of the guards out this time, and so there would likely be more orcs than usual.


    This was because the fenrirs were confident no matter how many orcs came. But it worried me that there were no guards protected Ms. ire and the others, just in came¡­


    It seemed like everyone was so eager to see the orcs fight, and had lowered their guard perhaps too much?


    While I thought of such things, Mr. Ekenhart and I were here, so it should be fine, even if the orcs tried to attack someone else.


    And Leo¡¯s senses were enhanced, so she would surely notice¡­<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Liza was scared of the fenrirs ¡°You always like to pet or hold Sherry, but you haven¡¯t really approached the adult fenrirs.¡± ¡°...Papa noticed then.¡± Recently, Liza had be less reserved, and more like an ordinary, yful child. And so I was wondering if there was a reason that she¡­January 9, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We asked the fenrirs ¡°It doesn¡¯t have to be over a vast area, good Leo. Just bringing their number down a little will be enough.¡± ¡°Wuff¡­ Wuff!¡± ¡°She said ¡®very well!¡¯¡± We were only in a small corner of the forest. Obviously, it would be impossible for the fenrirs to¡­January 8, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    The fenrirs treated me as a boss ¡°Kyau!¡± ¡°Ah¡­oh¡­hehe¡­Sherry¡­¡± ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡± Sherry stretched and licked the tears off of Ms. ire¡¯s cheek. It was like she wasforting her and saying that there was no need to cry. Leo also nodded approvingly. ¡°Ms. ire¡­I¡¯m so happy!!¡± ¡°Woah, Ms. Anne!?¡± ¡°Anne!?¡± Ms.¡­January 6, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 540

    Chapter 540


    We watched the fenrirs fight<hr>


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°Gaau!¡±


    The fenrirs barked eagerly towards the forest.


    At the same time, Phillip and the guards ran out of the forest and towards us.


    Behind them, I heard the sound of the approaching orcs. Uh¡­how many were there?


    ¡°Isn¡¯t that too many?¡±


    ¡°¡­I think so, but¡­ I suppose the fenrirs are fine?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    ¡°So many¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Ten furious orcs stomped out of the forest behind Phillip and the guards.


    It was no wonder the guards were running so desperately¡­


    ¡°Well, with so many orcs, I wonder how the fenrirs will fight.¡±


    ¡°Yes. But considering how it was with Sherry, it will probably be easy enough.¡±


    And so I stood with Mr. Ekenhart and watched.


    Leo also seemed calm, and Liza¡¯s eyes shone with expectation¡­it was the same with Tilura.


    As for Sherry, she was on Leo¡¯s head while watching carefully, as if she did not want to miss a single second of her parents battling bravely.


    Ms. ire looked a little worried, while Ms. Anne was excited.


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°Gaaau!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    The two fenrirs barked at Sherry, as if to tell her to watch.


    Sherry barked back, and then they jumped towards the orcs.


    ¡°Gyuo!?¡±


    ¡°Guffu!¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    By the time the orcs realized the fenrirs were going to attack them, it was toote, and the father fenrir had already bitten into one orc¡¯s neck.


    Furthermore, he picked up the orc¡¯s body with his jaws, and threw him towards the mother fenrir.


    Then the mother jumped up and shed the orc with her ws.


    And without losing momentum, shended on a different orc.


    After that, the battle was simple and one-sided.


    No matter how much the orcs swung their arms or charged, they could not even touch the fenrirs. Instead, they got pierced by fangs and shed by ws.


    After just a few minutes, all of the orcs were dead.


    ¡°Awwoooo!¡±


    ¡°Woooo!¡±


    ¡°Kyaaaun!¡±


    As the remains of the orcs rolled on the ground, the blood-soaked fenrirs howled towards the sky.


    As if to reply, Sherry howled as well.


    Was it a victory howl? Or to announce the end of the hunt?


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­what should I do¡­¡±


    ¡°What is it, Mr. Ekenhart?¡±


    ¡°I could barely see the fenrir¡¯s movements¡­ Only that they used their fangs and ws to overwhelm the orcs.¡±


    ¡°You too, Mr. Ekenhart¡­I couldn¡¯t see them either.¡±


    ¡°I knew that they were dangerous monsters but¡­not to this degree¡­ And they didn¡¯t even use magic. It is quite a surprise.¡±


    Apparently, the way they fought had surprised Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s expectations.


    When viewing them from far away, their movements had been a blur, and they were definitely faster than Liza and Sherry.


    And it wasn¡¯t just me and Mr. Ekenhart who were astonished. Sebastian and the guard and servants were also surprised by the battle.


    Ms. ire sighed with relief that they were safe. While Liza, Tilura and Ms. Anne were overjoyed.


    ¡­Perhaps Ms. Anne was at a simr maturity level as Liza and Tilura¡­


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°Gau!¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    In any case, the fenrirs then returned towards us.


    And they were both carrying the in orcs in their mouths.


    I suppose they were delivering their best caught pretty to Leo.


    Once they sat in front of Leo with their offerings, Leo nodded and barked.


    ¡°Kyau!


    ¡°Grau-gau!¡±


    ¡°Gaauu-grau!¡±


    Sherry jumped off of Leo¡¯s head and to her parents. She hung on their bodies and pushed her face towards them to express her joy.


    The parents also seemed to be happy as they greeted Sherry.


    They really did look like a happy family¡­ Even if they were surrounded by dead orcs¡­<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    I seeded in removing Liza¡¯s fear ¡°Soft¡­¡± ¡°Right? See, they like it if you pet them like this.¡± ¡°Hmm¡­ Like this?¡± ¡°Grau¡­¡± ¡°They like it. See?¡± The fenrir¡¯s fur was soft and fluffy, and Liza petted him gently. ¡°...It¡¯s fine?¡± ¡°Aye. They won¡¯t hurt you. Now, over here.¡± ¡°...Okay.¡± ¡°Kyafu¡­¡±¡­January 10, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Sherry¡¯s Turn was Last Mr. Ekenhart didn¡¯t say anything about the finishing blow, and just praised the way she had dodged the first attack. He was so happy, which showed how important Tilura was to him. ¡°Wou-wou!¡± ¡°Kyau!¡± As I watched them celebrating, Leo, who had been dragging away the¡­November 21, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We talked about making the forest a little safer ¡°It was only yesterday that we thought of fenrirs as being dangerous for humans. And now we have a friendly rtionship.¡± ¡°Well, it all thanks to Leo. And Sherry as well.¡± ¡°As for Sherry, it was mainly because of Mr. Takumi¡­January 7, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 541

    Chapter 541


    Preparing the food was a lot of work<hr>


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff!¡±


    ¡°You sure seem to enjoy, it Leo.¡±


    ¡°Grau.¡±


    ¡°Graauuu!¡±


    After that, we spent some time cleaning up the mess.


    Usually there was just one orc to deal with them, but this time there were ten¡­ So it could not be helped.


    Liza and I helped as well.


    That being said, the only thing I could do was help to drain the blood..


    As for butchering the meat, that was done by Leo and the fenrirs as well as Liza.


    Apparently, beastkin were calm when seeing blood.


    Well, Leo and the fenrirs did most of the cutting with their ws, and then Liza cut them into smaller pieces.


    And by the time we were finished, the sun had already set, and it was time to prepare for dinner.


    The fenrirs were going to eat with us, and so we all surrounded the bonfire.


    Because of the increased number of members, we had to make arger fire than usual¡­


    Leo was eating hungrily, and seemed to be enjoying the food.


    And since the orcs had fought and used up energy, they were also eating the cooked meat hungrily.


    ¡°Still¡­I had expected them to use magic when fighting. But they didn¡¯t use it at all.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. This was my first time seeing them fight, but I didn¡¯t know that they would be this strong.¡±


    ¡°Because Sherry used magic. I thought all fenrirs would as well.¡±


    While we were eating, Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian started to mutter about the fight they had witnessed earlier.


    ¡°But then again, if they used magic on top of wielding such strength, then human opponents would not be able to do anything¡­¡±


    ¡°Not in small numbers¡­you would need an army. Surround them from far away and attack until they are weak¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed. I agree with Sebastian. It¡¯s a good thing that encounters with them are rare. Well, thanks to Leo, the fenrirs in this forest will probably not cause any trouble.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I don¡¯t know how many there are in this forest, but it would take a lot of personnel just to deal with these two. Ever since it was confirmed that there are fenrirs here, I¡¯ve been wondering if the day woulde¡­ But I¡¯m relieved that such a thing will not happen.¡±


    ¡°¡­Fighting fenrirs would not only take a lot of people, but a lot of money as well.¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian were both greatly relieved that we had a friendly rtionship with the fenrirs.


    It was no wonder. It would probably take ten to twenty humans to deal with Sherry¡¯s parents.


    And if it was all of the fenrirs in the forest, it might be like a war.


    Even if Mr. Ekenhart was rich, he would not likely be able to afford such a thing.


    ¡°¡­Really, I am grateful that good Leo is with us.¡±


    ¡°Yes, indeed¡­ She previously talked about how fenrirs would instinctively submit to her, but I did not quite believe it at the time. But it has been proven now. That alone made this journey worth it.¡±


    ¡°Yes. It is a good thing to know.¡±


    Yes. Even for me, Leo was the biggest reason that I could feel safe aftering to this world.


    ¡­I would have to y with her a lot once we returned to the mansion.


    Recently, I¡¯ve been so preupied with Liza, that I might have been a little neglectful towards Leo.


    That being said, Leo still seemed to be having fun, and I doubted she cared.


    I suppose I could just spend time with both of them.


    ¡°¡­Is it really necessary to watch the area now?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    After dinner, we cleaned up and talked a little, and then it was time for watch duty.


    Apparently, the fenrirs were going to sleep with us tonight, and so a nket wasid out, just like Leo, and they would sleep there.


    Leo had given permission, and so they would stay near the edge of the forest.


    In terms of position, there was the river, the bonfire, and tents, and then the parent fenrirs. And the forest¡­ But thanks to the fenrirs, it did not seem to be necessary to have people watching by the fire.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Liza was scared of the fenrirs ¡°You always like to pet or hold Sherry, but you haven¡¯t really approached the adult fenrirs.¡± ¡°...Papa noticed then.¡± Recently, Liza had be less reserved, and more like an ordinary, yful child. And so I was wondering if there was a reason that she¡­January 9, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I seeded in removing Liza¡¯s fear ¡°Soft¡­¡± ¡°Right? See, they like it if you pet them like this.¡± ¡°Hmm¡­ Like this?¡± ¡°Grau¡­¡± ¡°They like it. See?¡± The fenrir¡¯s fur was soft and fluffy, and Liza petted him gently. ¡°...It¡¯s fine?¡± ¡°Aye. They won¡¯t hurt you. Now, over here.¡± ¡°...Okay.¡± ¡°Kyafu¡­¡±¡­January 10, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We asked the fenrirs ¡°It doesn¡¯t have to be over a vast area, good Leo. Just bringing their number down a little will be enough.¡± ¡°Wuff¡­ Wuff!¡± ¡°She said ¡®very well!¡¯¡± We were only in a small corner of the forest. Obviously, it would be impossible for the fenrirs to¡­January 8, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 542

    Chapter 542


    I talked with Ms. Anne<hr>


    As for where the fenrirs slept, Leo had decided it. But Sebastian felt that it was still important for there to be human watchers as well, and so nothing changed there.


    Well, the fenrirs could only bark, and could notmunicate with us in detail. But then again, I found it hard to imagine there was anything threatening enough that they couldn¡¯t deal with it themselves.


    Currently, Liza and Ms. Anne were with the fenrirs, and enjoying being enveloped in their fur.


    ¡­Though, I want her to sleep properly in the tent, so I hope she doesn¡¯t fall asleep like that.


    ¡°By the way, is Sherry with them too?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    While they were together now, they would be separated once we returned to the mansion.


    And since Sherry was still young, it was not a bad thing for her to be spoiled by them as much as possible.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Hmm?¡±


    As I petted Leo and looked leisurely at the fire, I heard a voice from behind me.


    Leo had already noticed, but didn¡¯t care, as there were no strangers here.


    ¡­Still, it seemed like every time I was on watch duty, someone woulde to talk to me.


    ¡°Ms. Anne?¡±


    Tonight, my guest was the count¡¯s daughter.


    I thought she had been with the fenrirs and Liza. I wonder what happened?


    She then sat on the other side of the fire, and as far from Leo as possible.


    Her hair was blonde like Ms. ire, but a little more yellow, and it was pretty while reflecting the light of the fire.


    She would sometimes do bizarre things, like bowing on the ground to Mr. Hannes, or make terrible suggestions to her father, or change her hair so as not to scare Liza. But if you ignore that, she was not attractive.


    ¡°I was hoping for a minute of your time.¡±


    ¡°That is fine¡­ Did you have trouble sleeping?¡±


    ¡°I am not used to sleeping outside in a tent. ¡­Though, up until now, I was so exhausted from walking that I managed to sleep.¡±


    Well, that was no surprise¡­ Ady like her would not usually sleep in a tent in a sleeping bag¡­


    Though, I wonder what she did when traveling between towns?


    ¡°So you¡¯re going to stay out here until you are tired?¡±


    ¡°Yes, if you don¡¯t mind. It is morefortable out here. Hah¡­ I do like a good bonfire¡­¡±


    Ms. Anne said as she stared into the mes.


    Indeed, looking into the fire was calming¡­ But on the other hand, I was afraid that Ms. Anne would start saying something strange.


    What if a new desire awakens within her. The desire to burn everything in sight¡­


    ¡°Now that I think of it, you were petting the fenrirs just fine. So why are you still afraid of Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Of course, I am. Fenrirs are not so strong that humans could never ovee them. ¡­Even if they are still very powerful, as we saw today¡­ However, a Silver Fenrir¡­ They are the strongest monsters of all. Why wouldn¡¯t I be scared?¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    ¡°There, there, Leo. Well, you¡¯re the only one here who is scared, Ms. Anne.¡±


    ¡°¡­I was not trying to hurt her feelings.¡±


    Though Ms. Anne continued to keep her distance from Leo, she had made such a big fuss when seeing the fenrirs, and was petting them blissfully afterwards.


    Even if Leo was bigger, the fenrirs were also quiterge.


    And while she may be right about them not being an undefeatable creature, I doubted there were many humans who could beat a fenrir one on one.


    You would probably have to search the world, and would still only find a few special people who could do it.


    Normally, it would take many humans to surround and weaken them first. Attack them with magic¡­ But perhaps Ms. Anne didn¡¯t really understand such things.


    Well, I suppose since such strategies wouldn¡¯t work with Leo, she found her more scary¡­


    As Leo was feeling quite hurt after Ms. Anne¡¯s exnation, I had to pet her and offer words of encouragement.


    Ms. Anne turned her nose away and muttered to herself.


    Ms. Anne was not used to talking with people, and so she was not very sensitive to the feelings of others¡­ I didn¡¯t think she was evil or anything¡­ Probably.


    In any case, it would probably be good for her to take some lessons from Ms. ire.


    Mr. Ekenhart¡­ No, she should not be learning from him¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    The fenrirs treated me as a boss ¡°Kyau!¡± ¡°Ah¡­oh¡­hehe¡­Sherry¡­¡± ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡± Sherry stretched and licked the tears off of Ms. ire¡¯s cheek. It was like she wasforting her and saying that there was no need to cry. Leo also nodded approvingly. ¡°Ms. ire¡­I¡¯m so happy!!¡± ¡°Woah, Ms. Anne!?¡± ¡°Anne!?¡± Ms.¡­January 6, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We watched the fenrirs fight ¡°Grau!¡± ¡°Gaau!¡± The fenrirs barked eagerly towards the forest. At the same time, Phillip and the guards ran out of the forest and towards us. Behind them, I heard the sound of the approaching orcs. Uh¡­how many were there? ¡°Isn¡¯t that too many?¡± ¡°...I think¡­January 11, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I petted the parent fenrirs ¡°Uh¡­like this?¡± ¡°Gauu¡­¡± ¡°Gau-gau!¡± ¡°It seems like they like it¡­¡± I went between the two fenris and used both hands to rub their bellies. As they were so big, I could not rub their whole bodies at once, but I had plenty of experience with¡­January 3, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 543

    Chapter 543


    Ms. Anne had not given up<hr>


    ¡°Still, I just followed after the duke and came to the house. I did not think that so much would happen after that¡­ To think that I would step foot into a forest with monsters.¡±


    ¡°Is that so? ¡­Well, I suppose it is unusual for someone in your position.¡±


    ¡°And I was surprised to meet you as well. A human who canmand a Silver Fenrir. And Ms. ire having a fenrir cub¡­and your Gift¡­ And now we are with the fenrir parents! I can hardly keep up with the events.¡±


    ¡°Uh, perhaps you don¡¯t need to?¡±


    When I thought about it, a lot of those events really were things that were unusual in this world.


    ¡°Also, I should remind you that Leo is my partner, not a servant. Hey¡­Leo, stop that¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Well, that is surprising in a different way¡­¡±


    Leo was happy to hear me say that to Ms. Anne, and she wagged her tail and started to lick my face repeatedly.


    While I appreciated the gesture, her tail looked like it was going to hit the mes¡­ And I couldn¡¯t talk to Ms. Anne like that, so I wanted her to calm down.


    And so made Leo close her mouth and patted her on the face.


    Ah, now that I thought about it, what was Liza doing?


    ¡°Is Liza still with the fenrirs?¡±


    ¡°Little Liza fell asleep while sandwiched between the fenrirs, and so the maid took her back to the tent.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    So she had fallen asleep with them after all.


    While she had been sitting on Leo¡¯s back a lot of the time, it had been a day of excitement, and she also worked hard to interpret for the fenrirs.


    I suppose it was Ms. Lyra who took her back to the tent.


    ¡°In any case, Mr. Takumi. Have you reconsidered my proposal?¡±


    ¡°Huh? Uh¡­what are you talking about?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°You have forgotten then!? About bing my husband!¡±


    ¡°Oh.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    I had refused her quite inly already¡­ But she was still going on about it?


    Regardless, Ms. Anne seemed to be slightly offended, and so she raised her voice.


    ¡­While I probably shouldn¡¯t have forgotten about such a thing, it was night time, so she really should be more quiet.


    I wouldn¡¯t want anyone to wake up.


    Thankfully, there were no signs of anyone getting up from the tents.


    ¡°Ms. Anne, it would not do to wake up the others¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­But it was entirely your fault, Mr. Takumi. Really¡­¡±


    She pouted and turned her nose away.


    Still, at least she was whispering now, so she had understood the danger.


    Even if she was acting childish.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry that I forgot¡­ But I already gave you my answer.¡±


    ¡°Indeed, I won¡¯t deny that I got carried away when I first said it. However, since then, I¡¯ve had plenty of time to think about it. And I havee to the conclusion that it is the best thing to do for my family.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­¡±


    ¡°Having a Silver Fenrir like Leo in our property. And you with your Gift. Yes, it would be in our best interests for sure!¡±


    She was starting to get excited again, even if her voice was hushed.


    Ms. Anne was attractive in her own way, but surely there were others who were more suited to her.


    Besides, she only seemed to care about the status of her house. Did she not want to marry someone that she actually liked?


    Well, there were a lot of things that happened in this world that were rted to their ss system, that I did not really agree with.


    But in any case, I had my reasons for not wanting to leave the duke¡¯snds.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, but I cannot. It¡¯s not because I hate you¡­ But I have my work in Range vige ahead of me. And Liza¡­¡±


    ¡°You what!? But with such an ability and Leo, you could aspire to so much more than that!¡±


    ¡°Perhaps, but I really am not thinking of doing anything great at the moment. I¡¯d much rather live a rxing life¡­ Isn¡¯t that right, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Just like before, Ms. Anne seemed like she could not believe that she was being rejected.


    Still, I was sure to be clear about it.


    After all, if I sounded unsure or vague, then she would continue to bring it up¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    The reason that Sherry was not injured ¡°Hmm¡­I guess it¡¯s because she is a fenrir. To not be injured after being hit so hard¡­¡± ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff-wou!¡± ¡°Uhhh, she says that fenrirs are able to protect themselves by enveloping their bodies in magic energy. That¡¯s why she wasn¡¯t injured.¡± ¡°...That is¡­so¡­November 29, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Fenrirs could not swim ¡°Grau!¡± ¡°Grau-grau! Grrrr¡­!¡± ¡°They drowned!?¡± ¡°Can fenrirs not swim?¡± ¡°...Well, Sherry was not able to¡­ are they alright?¡± After looking at each other, the fenrirs jumped into the river. It was deep enough that humans would have to swim. Someone asrge as Leo would be¡­January 2, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Fenrirs were even more dangerous than expected ¡°Yes, that¡¯s right. I was aware, as it is widely known that they use magic, but¡­ I didn¡¯t know they could use it in quick session. Good Leo, can all fenrirs do it like that?¡± ¡°Wuff? Wou¡­ Wuff-wuff. Wuff. Wuff-wuff?¡± ¡°Hmm. She is¡­November 30, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 544

    Chapter 544


    The difference between the duke and the count<hr>


    Ms. Anne thought I could do more with my ability¡­ But Weed Cultivation was just something given to me out of nowhere. And Leo was with me because she liked me.


    I didn¡¯t want to use that to aplish something great. And I didn¡¯t care about the Ms. Anne¡¯s house at all.


    As she had been at the mansion for a while now, I did want things to go well for her. It wasn¡¯t like I wanted her to go down the path of total ruin¡­ But that all depended on her.


    While we seemed like the same age, as she was now, she left everything to others, and didn¡¯t really think of achieving anything on her own.


    If was capable of actually talking about doing things for her house, then she would have looked more appealing, perhaps.


    The herb fields in Range vige weren¡¯t about doing anything grand, but a way for me to pay back to the duke. I just wanted to do something that was useful.


    I also thought that I would be able to rx there.


    There were few people, and I would be able to forget about my past life and job.


    I thought of such things and petted Leo, who then barked happily.


    Leo seemed to want to stay with me. And here, I would be able to give her all of the attention that I wasn¡¯t able to before.


    ¡°Ms. Anne¡­ You have stayed in the mansion for some time now. Have you really not had a change of heart?¡±


    ¡°¡­It isn¡¯t that I haven¡¯t changed at all. I like little Liza and Sherry¡­ I see how proud the servants are to be working there. Though, I was surprised by their friendliness.¡±


    I had thought the same thing.


    My idea of the rtionship between nobles and their servants had been quite different. Like they had to obey no matter what and could never go against their masters.


    However, I had seen Sebastian and the others correct Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire plenty of times.


    In any case, the servants would rarely overstep their bounds, and Ms. ire would not ask them to do anything they couldn¡¯t do.


    They were like one big family in some ways.


    ¡°I had heard previously that they do not care as much when ites to position¡­ But I didn¡¯t realize it was to that degree.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. But it¡¯s precisely because of that, that they are able to consider the welfare of their people and govern in a manner that ensures everyone can live with peace of mind. It alles down to trust, you know. And because of that trust, I believe the duke¡¯s ventures are thriving. Merely looking down from above would make it challenging to earn people¡¯s trust, wouldn¡¯t you agree?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ I have to agree, after seeing the people and the town. The count, my father¡­takes the loyalty of his people for granted. And so he assumed that any business ventures would turn in a profit¡­ In spite of his many failures.¡±


    It was true that such businesses were founded on trust.


    Well, I had little experience, so I was no authority, but¡­as a consumer then, I would not buy anything expensive from a ce that I didn¡¯t trust.


    Of course, it wasn¡¯t just that. And there were times when you couldn¡¯t rely on emotions. I understood that.


    As the count didn¡¯t think about such things¡­he probably thought that as long as he was selling a product, people would buy it regardless of price and quality.


    He was someone who didn¡¯t learn from mistakes. Perhaps he didn¡¯t notice, or pretended to not notice.


    Back at thepany I used to work at, even if a customerined about something, there were people who would not listen to them.


    ¡­And since just people had a lot of influence, it was no wonder that it became a ckpany¡­


    I suppose the count was like that too?


    Well, that was different, and not rted.


    ¡°I think what is important for you, Ms. Anne, is not to bring someone over who can raise your house, but to start changing it. And to do that, you need to change yourself. Change the way you govern so that you can earn the trust of the people again. ¡­Well, that is just my opinion.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see¡­ Change myself and the house¡­¡±


    ¡°It doesn¡¯t need to happen all at once¡­ Everyone will be shocked if you change so suddenly. But little by little. By treating others better, they will start to trust you more.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Something was approaching ¡°Wuff¡­ Wou?¡± ¡°She is saying that there is a presence and smell that is both familiar and unfamiliar¡­¡± ¡°Familiar and unfamiliar¡­¡± Perhaps it was because the herbs were still having an effect¡­ But she could even smell it. We had just eaten lunch, and so the area¡­December 29, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Mr. Hannes met Ms. Anne ¡°I am quite old¡­ And so my son and his wife told me to take Rosalie with me, just in case something happened. They coulde with me, as they were busy in the vige¡­¡± So that¡¯s why Rosalie was here. Indeed, Mr. Haines did¡­October 3, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I talked with Ms. Anne As for where the fenrirs slept, Leo had decided it. But Sebastian felt that it was still important for there to be human watchers as well, and so nothing changed there. Well, the fenrirs could only bark, and could notmunicate with us in detail.¡­January 13, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 545

    Chapter 545


    People were eavesdropping<hr>


    ¡°Treating others well¡­I had never thought about such things before. I am a noble, a superior human. It was only natural that I should be treated as special, and there was no need to be concerned about others¡­¡±


    ¡°Well¡­you cannot be treated well if there is no one around. As Ms. ire once said¡­the nobles only exist because of the people¡­I think? You aren¡¯t special just because you are a noble. Unless the people around you respect you. And you help to make their lives easier.¡±


    Not that I knew much about such things¡­ After all, I didn¡¯t really think about nobles until I came to this world.


    Still, that was the answer that I hade up with after seeing Ms. ire and Mr. Ekenhart.


    ¡­Perhaps I was wrong. Regardless, I would talk to Mr. Ekenhart about itter.


    ¡°I know my word wouldn¡¯t mean much¡­but perhaps it can be food for thought?¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    Ms. Anne had a serious expression as she fell silent.


    While I had said a lot, in the end, it was up to her. And I just wanted her to use my advice as reference.


    Perhaps it sounded cold-hearted, but I was not particrly interested in trying to lead Ms. Anne.


    If it so happened that she repeated her crimes, then not only would Mr. Ekenhart and Leo retaliate, but she would make an enemy out of all of us.


    But she was clearly affected by her time in the mansion, and showed that she was thinking about what I said just now. So I was not too worried.


    ¡­Was that too optimistic?


    ¡°¡­I shall think about it then. And if I have more questions, would it be alright if I talked to you?¡±


    ¡°If you want to listen to me. But it might not be very useful.¡±


    ¡°No, your words are much more effective that Ms. ire¡¯s. For the first time, a man haspletely stirred up my mind.¡±


    ¡°Uh, is that a good thing?¡±


    ¡°Hehehe. You will find out soon enough.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    There was no reason to make up her mind right now.


    And after thinking about it for some time, Ms. Anne got up to her feet.


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right. If you eat this, it will help you sleep better.¡±


    ¡°What is that?¡±


    ¡°I herb for sleeping. I can guarantee its effectiveness. And you can just eat it as it is.¡±


    ¡°¡­It is ck. And looks quite odd. Well, I will try it then¡­¡±


    While Ms. Anne was about to return to her ten, I took some herbs out from my bag and gave them to her.


    Either she trusted me, or the Gifts, because after inspecting it for a moment, she decided to eat it.


    Once she was finished, she nodded and muttered as she returned to her tent.


    It seemed like she was still deep in thought. And I hoped it wouldn¡¯t keep her up.


    But it was likely that even if she tried to stay up and think, she would soon fall asleep anyway.


    ¡°Thank you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°You saved me some trouble once again¡­¡±


    ¡°There are a lot of people up tonight. There really wasn¡¯t any need for guards after all, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff-wuff.¡±


    A few minutes after Ms. Anne left, Ms. ire and Mr. Ekenhart approached me.


    I was supposed to be on watch duty so that others could rest. And yet¡­


    Leo had reacted, and so I knew that someone was close by. And since Leo did not do anything, I knew that there was no problem, and had pretended that I didn¡¯t notice.


    ¡°Well, don¡¯t say that. It just so happened that we saw Anneliese walking towards you. So I wondered what she was going to say.¡±


    ¡°¡­After all, she has a criminal record, like the time she tried to force you into marriage. So we could not be too careful.¡±


    ¡°Of course¡­¡±


    While Mr. Ekenhart had a guilty expression, Ms. Anne held her hands clenched together and looked determined.


    While there had been marriage proposals, it was not as forceful as Ms. ire was suggesting¡­


    Well, perhaps it looked that way for her.


    Besides, it was true that she was trying to use her position as a count¡¯s daughter.


    ¡°Still, what you said about treating others, the people well, and gaining trust¡­ Those were good words. I too hope to never forget about the importance of having the people¡¯s trust.¡±


    Said Mr. Ekenhart as he sat next to me.


    I had just thought about it on a whim, so it was embarrassing to have him repeat it.


    Ms. ire sat on the opposite side and petted Leo while nodding.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    I Asked About Ms. ire Indeed¡­ There was the matter of the soil as well¡­ I had not been thinking about that. I was only thinking about how they would grow, and the speed. It was quite obvious now that I thought about it. The nutrients within the soil were¡­August 4, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Mr. Ekenhart also apologized to Mr. Haines ¡°You can stand back now, Anneliese.¡± ¡°Really? But I haven¡¯t done anything yet¡­¡± ¡°Anne, it¡¯s enough. Besides, I think your presence here is just confusing Mr. Haines.¡± ¡°...Very well.¡± Ms. Anne seemed like she hadn¡¯t had enough yet, but she somberly got to¡­October 5, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I Suggested Joint Management ¡°Hiring her is not the problem. It is what people will think. It is possible that it could hurt the reputation of this house. ¡°...Because she was hired by amoner?¡± ¡°That is one reason. While the people of Range vige and the other people you¡­August 5, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 546

    Chapter 546


    I left Ms. Anne to Mr. Ekenhart<hr>


    ¡°I am quite sure that the people already trust you enough.¡±


    ¡°Well, if you say so, Mr. Takumi. Your opinion is worth trusting. Isn¡¯t that right, ire?¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t bring me into it. But well, Mr. Takumi does have a different way of viewing things. And so it is nice to hear of his opinions.¡±


    The only ces I knew of outside of the mansion were Ractos and Range vige.


    And while I did want to see more of this world, it could wait until after I had seeded with the herbs fields.


    As far as I was aware, the duke was trusted by his people.


    There were exceptions like Deam. But someone like Mr. Hannes would not havee all of the way to the mansion if he didn¡¯t trust the duke.


    I didn¡¯t know what the count was like, but if a noble was oppressive and untrustworthy, then vigers would not be likely to visit them.


    Because they probably wouldn¡¯t even be let through the gates.


    But at Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s mansion, they were given food and even a room to stay in.


    ¡°Of course, it really should be me who talks to Anneliese like that¡­ So, I¡¯m sorry you had to be troubled.¡±


    ¡°No. I don¡¯t even know if it was the right thing to say¡­ That being said, I do think it might be more effective when I say it.¡±


    ¡°Why is that? Is it because she wants to marry you?¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s not what he means, father. But anything you say is the words of a duke and fellow noble. Mr. Takumi is not a noble, and so his words would mean more to her. Isn¡¯t that right?¡±


    ¡°Haha, yes. As Ms. ire says.¡±


    ¡°You two really do get along. Well¡­that is a good thing. Still, indeed. What I say, I say as a duke. And she might see me as a rival, and will not ept everything without doubt¡­¡±


    I didn¡¯t know if she saw Mr. Ekenhart that way. But the duke was currently doing very well, while the count¡­not so much.


    ¡°Hmmm¡­in that case¡­ Perhaps it will not be the best idea to take Anneliese back to the main house? If she listens to Mr. Takumi, perhaps she should just stay¡­¡±


    ¡°That ispletely uneptable, father!!¡±


    As Mr. Ekenhart started to entertain the idea of not taking Anneliese to the main house, Ms. ire suddenly reacted very strongly, and objected.


    ¡°Why? While she was entrusted into my care, if someone else can do a better job of leading her down the right path, then it should be fine.¡±


    ¡°Perhaps¡­ But, NO! It is much too dangerous¡­ Yes, the royal family gave you the responsibility. And so it is out of the question to push that onto someone else.¡±


    ¡°Well¡­I suppose¡­¡±


    ¡°Besides¡­I think Ms. Anne¡­would listen to you as well?¡±


    I added in order to support Ms. ire.


    After all, I did not want to be forced into the role of bing her teacher.


    That was likely not something the royal family expected to happen. And I would not be able to do a good job.


    It wasn¡¯t like I hated Ms. Anne. And I wished her well. But I was much more interested in seeding with this herb business.


    Perhaps it would be rude to call it troublesome¡­but I would be very busy¡­ And considering how I wanted to live leisurely with Leo and Liza, it was best to object to such ideas quickly.


    ¡­Little by little, my personality was changing so that I could say no to others¡­ Well, it might also be that I knew Mr. Ekenhart well enough now, and had seen the way that Ms. ire dealt with him. So he was more like a friendly older man, I suppose.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    I hadn¡¯t thought about where I would live ¡°Mr. Takumi should be fine¡­ But good Leo¡­¡± ¡°Wuff?¡± ¡°Hmm. You mean the house is too small.¡± After looking at me, Mr. Haines nced over to Leo, who was ying with Rosalie. Leo noticed this and turned to us questioningly. ¡°Indeed, it¡­October 7, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We started to exin to Mr. Haines ¡°Huh? Well, most of the children seemed to enjoy ying with Leo. The parents were all happy to see it as well.¡± ¡°So it wasn¡¯t just the children, but the adults also epted Leo?¡± ¡°Yes. Leo and Mr. Takumi saved the vige. Of¡­October 6, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    It was decided that I would grow more Loe ¡°Oh, I wouldn¡¯t do that¡­ I¡¯m just making them with Weed Cultivation, so there is no need to charge anything.¡± Loe was so rare and expensive here, that a store having even one was considered a big deal. Because of this,¡­October 17, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 547

    Chapter 547


    A family conversation<hr>


    ¡°Mr. Takumi thinks so too.. Still, do you really think it will be alright?¡±


    ¡°In the previous conversation, Ms. Anne would have be strongly aware of the duke¡¯s family. And so unlike before, she would see you as someone to follow, instead of resisting. I think she will listen and figure out how to make the most of your advice¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm, I see.¡±


    She wasn¡¯t terribly stupid, probably.


    It had been her that made suggestions to Count Barsler, after all.


    She was just thinking in the wrong direction.


    And so I thought that she would realize that instead of just seeing the duke as a rival, she might want to follow his example.


    Well, I had practically told her to do that.


    ¡°Well, I suppose it is best to keep her with me after all ¡­Still, it will be difficult¡­¡±


    ¡°But you already raised Ms. ire and Tilura. And while Tilura is still childish, Ms. ire has been brought up to be the ideal sort of woman.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡¯s ideal woman¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Really? Well, ire may as well have been raised by the servants in the main house. After my wife died¡­ Well, I tried to do my duty as a father¡­but I am not sure if I seeded. Though, perhaps I shouldn¡¯t say such things in front of ire. After all, she escaped the main house in order to avoid the talk of marriage¡­¡±


    Ms. ire looked like she blushed for a moment, but it was probably just the firelight.


    Still, it seemed like Mr. Ekhenhart had not been very involved when it came to her education.


    ¡­Now that I thought about it, that did make sense.


    Would it be rude to think that if she were to learn from Mr. Ekenhart, she would have inherited his unconventional and rougher qualities. The kind of person who just did what was amusing?


    After all, Ms. ire did not decide things in the spur of the moment, but was more thoughtful¡­


    ¡°¡­Hmm! Well, father was busy with his duties as a duke. Besides, I knew how troubled and in pain you were after mother¡¯s death. And so I also did my best so as to not give you any trouble. Even though I was sometimes a handful for the servants¡­¡±


    ¡°In that case, perhaps Ms. ire really did have those qualities¡­¡±


    I immediately thought of Sebastian and Ms. Lyra.


    There was also Ms. Gelda¡­but she was clumsy, so I won¡¯t think about her right now.


    Regardless, as long as there were good servants like Sebastian and Ms. Lyra, then it made sense that Ms. ire would have been raised so well, even without Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s help.


    ording to what I heard from Sebastianst night, the servants were very fond of Ms. ire.


    So it was her original traits, as well as the education from the servants, and her feelings towards her father regarding her mother¡¯s death¡­


    All of that had led her to the right direction, and resulted in the present Ms. ire.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry for troubling you. I did want to spend more time with you and Tilura, but¡­I was often unsure about what to do. Still, I am happy to see that you turned out so well.¡±


    ¡°Father. So you agree with Mr. Takumi then¡­¡±


    ¡°Well¡­yes¡­¡±


    ¡°Huh? Oh¡­yes.¡±


    While I didn¡¯t know the details, I suppose things had been awkward with his daughters after his wife died.


    And then there was the matter of arranged marriages. And they had drifted apart.


    But in spite of suchplications, Ms. ire had turned out alright. And so it was all good in the end.


    The way Mr. Ekenhart felt apologetic towards Ms. ire, kind of reminded me about how I felt towards Leo, for not being able to spend much time with her.


    After that, Mr. Ekenhart looked at his daughter and muttered what was on his mind.


    In contrast, Ms. ire¡¯s expression bes troubled or somewhat sullen.


    Mr. Ekenhart seemed like he wanted me to agree with him, and so I nodded.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    I left Ms. Anne to Mr. Ekenhart ¡°I am quite sure that the people already trust you enough.¡± ¡°Well, if you say so, Mr. Takumi. Your opinion is worth trusting. Isn¡¯t that right, ire?¡± ¡°Don¡¯t bring me into it. But well, Mr. Takumi does have a different way of viewing¡­January 17, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I asked about Sebastian¡¯s past ¡°Thankfully, the duke and his family do not care much when ites to small mistakes of the servants. Of course, there are times when they are strict as well¡­¡± Well, that was obvious. But instead of just berating someone angrily, understanding why it happened¡­December 18, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I asked about the man called Deam I waited for a moment and observed Mark, who seemed to have different things going on in his head. He finally understood that his actions had been against the duke¡¯s house. Well, he would have likely not done such a reckless thing if¡­September 1, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 548

    Chapter 548


    Leo discovered something<hr>


    Ms. ire often seemed like she was holding something back.


    Perhaps she felt that it was necessary, as the duke¡¯s daughter. But from mine and Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s point of view, it looked a little suffocating.


    But it was because of that, that the current Ms. ire was like this. So it wasplicated.


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Hmm? What is it, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    As we were talking, Leo suddenly raised her head and barked quietly as if noticing something.


    But when I asked her about it, she just looked up at the sky and barked.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Is there something strange?¡±


    ¡°¡­Like a monster approaching?¡±


    ¡°However, the fenrirs are in front of the forest¡­ And it would be odd if they didn¡¯t notice first.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Look at the sky?¡±


    ¡°The sky?¡±


    And so I looked up at the sky, as did the others.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Is there something flying?¡±


    ¡°A bird?¡±


    ¡°What else could it be if not a bird¡­¡±


    We saw a single bird flying in the sky while the moon shone down.


    It seemed to be flying very elegantly.


    Since going into the forest, I had seen some birds¡­but none flying up that high.


    It was too dark to see it clearly, but it seemed quiterge, and was flying in a circle as if enjoying itself.


    It must be nice to be able to fly¡­


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Leo barked again, and then the bird disappeared into the distance.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Good Leo was interested in the passing bird?¡±


    ¡°It seems like it.¡±


    ¡°Birds¡­ Perhaps Leo wants to eat chicken next?¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff-wuff!¡±


    When I asked Leo this, she reacted strongly.


    Apparently, she wanted to eat a different kind of meat sometimes¡­ After all, she only ate sausages and orc meat recently¡­


    I would have to ask Ms. Helena about it when we returned to the mansion.


    After all, Leo had worked hard¡­ Whether it was talking to the fenrirs or finding the orcs¡­ And so she must be rewarded.


    ¡°If you want other kinds of meat, it will have to wait. Is that fine?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Ah, hey¡­Leo¡­¡±


    ¡°Hehe. Leo really does like Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Well, she likes food¡­ But being liked by a Silver Fenrir to this degree must also be a talent.¡±


    Leo was so happy that she had started to lick my face.


    It was fine to express your happiness, but I didn¡¯t want to be licked so excitedly¡­ Leo wouldn¡¯t eat me, but it was scary to have such arge mouth close to your face.


    And her fangs were so visible¡­


    Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire watched this and smiled.


    If only they would help me instead¡­


    ¡°So then. I better go to sleep before Sebastian wakes up. Otherwise he will catch me again and deprive me of sleep.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Mr. Takumi, Leo. Good night.¡±


    ¡°Yes, good night.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire then went back to their tents.


    He did not want to be caught by Sebastian likest night, and have his sleep time shortened.


    Though, that was because Sebastian had heard himining¡­ Regardless, I gave them some herbs that would help them to sleep.


    Mr. Ekenhart was especially happy. I suppose he really liked the effects.


    ¡­It was not good to rely on them too much. But he had trouble getting up in the morning, and also snored loudly¡­ The herbs wouldn¡¯t actually help with the snoring, but I did want him to sleep well and feel refreshed.


    Now that they were gone, Leo and I sat and looked at the fire until our shift ended.


    And while I asked Leo about the bird again, she gave me a vague reply, saying that it was nothing to worry about.


    It was unusual for her, but I suppose she only noted it because it was sote into the night.


    When our shift was over, I returned to the tents and ate some herbs before getting into my sleeping bag.


    I was relying on them too¡­ Well, I feel calmer now. But Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s snoring was still loud¡­


    ¡°Still, didn¡¯t birds have bad eyesight? And they did not fly during the night?¡±


    I wondered as I closed my eyes.


    I didn¡¯t know much about them, and there were likely exceptions. But I still thought it was strange as I slowly fell asleep.


    ¡­This was a world of magic, so perhaps some birds could use it to help with their eyesight while flying¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    The herbs were surprisingly effective ¡°...!¡± The moment that the herb touched the fenrir, it unleashed a faint light, and the wounds began to close as if time was being rewound. And once the light faded away, so did the herb that was in my hand. Even the fenrir¡¯s broken¡­March 30, 2022


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Sherry was traumatized by the trolls ¡°I don¡¯t mind. Besides, it¡¯s almost time for dinner.¡± ¡°So, father. You have something to discuss with Leo?¡± ¡°Mr. Takumi did not tell you?¡± ¡°Ah, I thought I would let them hear it from you¡­Mr. Ekenhart.¡± ¡°I see. Very well¡­¡± He then turned to¡­October 25, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Fenrirs appeared from the forest ¡°Still, are you sure, Leo? I know you said that fenrirs aren¡¯t a danger to you, but¡­¡± ¡°Wou. Wuff-wuff. Wou-wou.¡± ¡°Even if they doe, you¡¯ll deal with them easily¡­right. Well, I¡¯m sure you can¡­ But go easy on them, alright?¡± ¡°Wuff.¡± If there were¡­December 30, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 549

    Chapter 549


    I paired up with Phillip<hr>


    The next day, I and the others woke up feeling refreshed, thanks to the herbs, and we quickly finished preparing for the morning.


    Breakfast was just as busy as dinner wasst night.


    This was because the fenrirs ate so much.


    Once that was done, I thought the fenrirs were going to leave¡­ But apparently, they meant to stay with us a little longer.


    While it could have been to spend time with Sherry or Leo, I had a feeling it had a lot to do with the food¡­


    In any case, it was time for Tilura and I to train again.


    Thanks to seeing her parents fight yesterday, Sherry was even more enthusiastic than usual.


    ¡°What is Liza doing?¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff-wuff.¡±


    As we waited, I saw that Liza was talking to the parents fenrirs a short distance away.


    She seemed to be telling them something quite passionately, and her tail was wagging¡­ What was it?


    Leo did not seem to know.


    Well, she seemed to be having fun, so I guess there was no problem.


    ¡°Here theye¡­ Mr. Takumi, Phillip.¡±


    As there were two orcs nearby, it was decided that Phillip and I would form a pair.


    Nichs and the other guards were luring in the orcs.


    Ms. ire and those who could not fight, were waiting close to Leo and the fenrirs, so they should be fine.


    Phillip and I nodded at Mr. Ekenhart and took a few steps forward.


    This time, I was not allowed to use the katana.


    As I was cooperating with Phillip, I had to use the same kind of sword.


    Indeed, it would be easier to synchronize with him, if we moved in a simr way.


    This time, it wasn¡¯t just about defeating the orcs, but about getting ustomed to cooperating with someone else.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. You attack the orc first. And I will follow after you.¡±


    ¡°Very well.¡±


    As Phillip had more experience, it would be best to allow him to match my movements.


    ¡°Now then, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. I will go¡­¡±


    I saw the two orcs appear from the trees, and then I nodded at Phillip and rushed forward.


    As always, the orcs charged wildly, and seemed to be surprised when they saw me.


    That being said, Nichs and the others must have provoked them quite a lot¡­ They were red in the face and very excited¡­


    ¡°Hmm. Considering Phillip¡¯s experience, that was not bad.¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­phew¡­yes. Unlike yesterday, I was never in danger.¡±


    ¡°You moved like someone who had been training for more than just a few months. Of course, I already knew that from seeing you yesterday.¡±


    We talked to Mr. Ekenhart while looking down at the two orcs, who were no longer moving.


    Next to me, Phillip wiped away the sweat from his face and calmly gave his opinion.


    He was hardly even out of breath, unlike me¡­ While I was happy for thepliment, I still had a long way to go.


    Unlike yesterday, the fight had ended quite quickly.


    Neither of us had been injured, so the results were not bad.


    It had been easy enough.


    I had wounded it a little as it passed me by. And while the orc tried to change direction, Phillip hade from behind and swung at its ankle.


    In general, I would hurt the orc a little, provoke it, and make it charge.


    And as it passed, Phillip would attack its legs, and then move away. And then we would repeat it again.


    It could not be helped, since the purpose was for my training, but I was practically being used as bait.


    That being said, Phillip was also wounding it and slowing the orc down, so it would be easier for me to dodge the attacks.


    ¡°They still try to charge when their ankles are cut¡­resulting in them falling over. That was well done, Phillip.¡±


    ¡°The orc charges are quite a threat. It is not difficult to dodge them in wide areas, but if they do hit you, you will get thrown into the air. This can be especially dangerous if there are two, as they may be hit as soon as theynd on the ground. And so it was necessary to stop it¡­¡±


    ¡°Mmm, indeed. And after weakening them, the legs be easier to target.¡±


    ¡°It slid a little after falling forward¡­ It must have really wanted to hit me.¡±


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Liza was scared of the fenrirs ¡°You always like to pet or hold Sherry, but you haven¡¯t really approached the adult fenrirs.¡± ¡°...Papa noticed then.¡± Recently, Liza had be less reserved, and more like an ordinary, yful child. And so I was wondering if there was a reason that she¡­January 9, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    The fenrirs treated me as a boss ¡°Kyau!¡± ¡°Ah¡­oh¡­hehe¡­Sherry¡­¡± ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡± Sherry stretched and licked the tears off of Ms. ire¡¯s cheek. It was like she wasforting her and saying that there was no need to cry. Leo also nodded approvingly. ¡°Ms. ire¡­I¡¯m so happy!!¡± ¡°Woah, Ms. Anne!?¡± ¡°Anne!?¡± Ms.¡­January 6, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Fenrirs appeared from the forest ¡°Still, are you sure, Leo? I know you said that fenrirs aren¡¯t a danger to you, but¡­¡± ¡°Wou. Wuff-wuff. Wou-wou.¡± ¡°Even if they doe, you¡¯ll deal with them easily¡­right. Well, I¡¯m sure you can¡­ But go easy on them, alright?¡± ¡°Wuff.¡± If there were¡­December 30, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 550

    Chapter 550


    Liza gave names to the fenrir parents<hr>


    ¡°While one mistake could have led to an injury, you two still did very well. ¡­Perhaps next time we should switch your roles?¡±


    ¡°I think it would be a little difficult for me to do what Phillip did¡­¡±


    ¡°I suppose so. Sometimes I get a little carried away and want to move things along¡­¡±


    Phillip¡¯s movements might have looked simple at a nce¡­they were much more difficult.


    He had tactfully timed his actions, anticipating the orc¡¯s pause and attempted redirection towards him. He targeted the orc¡¯s weak spots, like its legs, and quickly inflicted injuries before disengaging.


    All the while not hurting the orc too much¡­


    Had I been in his ce, I would have likely cut the orc too deeply, so that its attention turned to mepletely¡­ Though, I suppose learning how to deal with that was also part of the training.


    In any case, I still did not have enough skills with regards to finding the right timing, and injuring two orcs at the same time and then escaping.


    It was better to train first, then learn to do that during realbat.


    I didn¡¯t want to fail and cause trouble for Phillip or get injured and cause Ms. ire to worry.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Ohh¡­thank you. Don¡¯t worry, I won¡¯t be reckless.¡±


    Apparently, I had also caused Leo to worry about me.


    She pressed her nose into me and barked as if she was happy that I was able to defeat the orc without being injured.


    Yes, I could not rely on Leo all of the time¡­and had to be careful.


    I thanked Leo and patted her face consolingly.


    ¡°Papa, mama!¡±


    ¡°Oh?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Just as we started to talk about how it would be Tilura or Sherry¡¯s turn next, Leo suddenly came running towards us.


    The parent fenrirs were behind her. But they were looking away as if a little embarrassed. I wonder why?


    ¡°Look!¡±


    ¡°Hmm. Ah¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Liza stopped in front of us and then turned towards the fenrirs.


    Apparently, she was going to do something¡­


    Mr. Ekenhart, Phillip, Tilura and Ms. ire also looked at Liza.


    ¡°Fen!¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°Riruru!¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°Together, you are Fenrir!¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    Liza had raised her right hand and shouted Fen, and then the father fenrir raised its right paw.


    The Lize raised her left hand and shouted Riruru, and the mother barked and raised her front paw.


    The two fenrirs then faced each other and put their paws together, and then howled loudly at the sky.


    Sherry ran around them and barked happily.


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°Uhh¡­?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Everyone was speechless.


    I had seen Liza talking to the fenrirs. So this was what she had been teaching them¡­


    Well, I suppose it was impressive in a way.


    Though, even Leo was tilting her head as if she didn¡¯t understand what it was.


    ¡°Grau¡­¡±


    ¡°Grau¡­¡±


    After seeing this awkward reaction, the fenrirs looked embarrassed.


    ¡°Papa, mama. Wasn¡¯t that cute!¡±


    ¡°Huh? Uh, yes. It was!¡±


    ¡°Wu-wuf¡­ Wuff-wuff!¡±


    Liza was clearly happy as she turned to look at us.


    With such an expression, I could not tell her the truth¡­


    Leo also looked a little frantic as she barked and nodded.


    ¡°That was amazing, Liza! You trained them to do that? It was so cute!¡±


    ¡°Right? Tilura!¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Wuff.¡±


    Behind us, Tilura seemed to be just as excited as Liza.


    The front paws of the fenrirs were shaking now¡­ Liza, perhaps you should let them stop now?


    Still, it was impressive that she taught them to do it in such a short amount of time.


    Perhaps beastkin had a natural talent for teaching monsters¡­ Well, it probably had more to do with them being submissive towards Leo.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Leo defeated the orc quickly As Tilura¡¯s sword was small, it would not be able to cut off an orc¡¯s leg easily like mine. However, it could still injure an orc and slow it down. Well, we didn¡¯t even know if the orc really woulde charging¡­ While the previous¡­November 18, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Liza¡¯s battle with the orc ¡°Here ites!¡± ¡°It appears that way¡­¡± ¡°...¡± ¡°Wuff¡­¡± ¡°Liza¡­¡± There was the rustling of leaves, and then Phillip and the other guard came out of the forest. Tilura was the first to react to it. She had been like this before her own fight¡­December 8, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I paired up with Phillip The next day, I and the others woke up feeling refreshed, thanks to the herbs, and we quickly finished preparing for the morning. Breakfast was just as busy as dinner wasst night. This was because the fenrirs ate so much. Once that was done,¡­January 20, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 551

    Chapter 551


    Ms. ire decided to praise Liza<hr>


    ¡°This¡­well, the fenrirs are obeying. But is it really cute?¡±


    ¡°Father! Liza worked hard, and so you should not say such things!¡±


    ¡°Ah, uh. Yes¡­ Hmm¡­ It is indeed cute, Liza.¡±


    ¡°Yes, it is. Very cute. Amazing, Liza!¡±


    ¡°Yay! Everyone likes it!¡±


    Liza was happy to be praised by people other than just me and Leo, and her tail and ears moved busily.


    It was proof of how pleased she was.


    ¡°¡­Well then. Since more orcs havee¡­ Go, Fen and Riruru!¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°Gaauu!¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Liza suddenly lowered her hand and red at the forest. And then she gave the order to the fenrirs.


    Orcs?


    I was confused for a moment, but then then the parents fenrirs immediately started to rush towards the forest.


    Indeed, a single orc had emerged from the forest and was moving towards us.


    ¡°Leo. Did you notice?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­wuff¡­¡±


    Leo shook her head and denied it.


    She also lowered her head apologetically. But it could not be helped, as she was distracted by the parent fenrirs.


    ¡°No, it¡¯s fine. No one would realize it when seeing that¡­¡±


    While I consoled Leo, the parent fenrirs rushed towards the orcs. And for some reason, Liza, Sherry and Tilura were following after them.


    ¡°Still, Liza really does have sharp senses¡­¡±


    ¡°Because she is beastkin?¡±


    ¡°I didn¡¯t notice either. Perhaps she heard some kind of sound.¡±


    Indeed, Liza¡¯s ears had been moving, so perhaps that was because she had heard the footsteps of the orc.


    I had just thought it was because she was happy¡­


    Regardless, none of us were worried that Liza and Tilura were running towards orcs now, because the parent fenrirs were with them.


    The fenrirs had looked relieved, now that they didn¡¯t have to do the pose anymore¡­


    ¡°Well done, Fen and Riruru! Good, good!¡±


    ¡°Gruff¡­¡±


    ¡°Kuff¡­¡±


    There was only one orc, and it was swiftly hunted down by the fenrirs. And so the guards were currently cleaning up.


    Upon returning, the two fenrirs showed their bellies to Leo, and then Liza rubbed and praised them.


    Not only was she not afraid of them, but they seemed to be quite close with them now. Perhaps a little too close¡­ But well, I would just think of it as the innocence of children.


    ¡°So, you gave them names, Liza?¡±


    ¡°Yes! Fen and Riruru! Isn¡¯t that cute!¡±


    She answered with a smile.


    I guess everything was judged by how cute it was¡­ Well, she was a young girl.


    ¡°Fen is fine, but Riruru¡­ Are you sure about that?¡±


    ¡°Father, you shouldn¡¯t care about such details!¡±


    ¡°Hmm, really¡­?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Look, she is having so much fun¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­I suppose so. Yes, I should not say too much then.¡±


    Ms. ire stopped Mr. Ekenhart from saying anything.


    While I had wondered about that too, I suppose it was fine, since Liza was happy.


    Besides, I was also terrible when it came to giving names, so I could not criticize others.


    I had given a girl the name of Leo, after all¡­ Now that she was a Silver Fenrir, the name seemed to suit her, and Leo liked it. So it was fine.


    ¡­But if I even had to give someone a name again, I would be a little more thoughtful about it.


    After that, Tilura and Sherry also defeated some orcs, and the day¡¯s training was finished.


    There wasn¡¯t much to say about them.


    Tilura had learned from her mistakes yesterday, and finished off the orc without ever being in danger.


    She understood well how to slow down an opponent¡¯s movements.


    As for Sherry¡­she might have wanted to copy her parents. And so she shed them, and did not use magic. However, Sherry was still small, and her ws did not reach the orcs. In the end, Leo had scolded her, and so she used magic.


    She also dodged the attacks adeptly this time. Though, Ms. ire was still worried as she watched.


    Even if you knew that she would not be hurt, the possibility that Sherry could be thrown into the air likest time had made her anxious¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    I seeded in removing Liza¡¯s fear ¡°Soft¡­¡± ¡°Right? See, they like it if you pet them like this.¡± ¡°Hmm¡­ Like this?¡± ¡°Grau¡­¡± ¡°They like it. See?¡± The fenrir¡¯s fur was soft and fluffy, and Liza petted him gently. ¡°...It¡¯s fine?¡± ¡°Aye. They won¡¯t hurt you. Now, over here.¡± ¡°...Okay.¡± ¡°Kyafu¡­¡±¡­January 10, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Liza gave names to the fenrir parents ¡°While one mistake could have led to an injury, you two still did very well. ¡­Perhaps next time we should switch your roles?¡± ¡°I think it would be a little difficult for me to do what Phillip did¡­¡± ¡°I suppose so. Sometimes I¡­January 21, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We watched the fenrirs fight ¡°Grau!¡± ¡°Gaau!¡± The fenrirs barked eagerly towards the forest. At the same time, Phillip and the guards ran out of the forest and towards us. Behind them, I heard the sound of the approaching orcs. Uh¡­how many were there? ¡°Isn¡¯t that too many?¡± ¡°...I think¡­January 11, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 552

    Chapter 552


    A bird flew in the sky<hr>


    ¡°In any case, it¡¯s all finished now. So it¡¯s time to prepare dinner¡­ Hmm? What is it, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­wuff?¡±


    After the orcs had been cleaned up, and the only thing left to do was eat dinner, I noticed that Leo was looking up at the sky.


    But when I asked her about it, Leo wasn¡¯t quite sure either.


    ¡°What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    As I wondered about it, Mr. Ekenhart and the others also looked at me questioningly.


    ¡°Uh¡­it¡¯s Leo. Leo, is there something up there?¡±


    ¡°Leo?¡±


    ¡°¡­Didn¡¯t something simr happenst night?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wou!¡±


    I then looked up at the sky as well, and so did the others.


    Like Ms. ire said, this had happenedst night.


    And then Leo barked, ¡®Yes, it¡¯s the same!¡¯


    But it was a birdst time, wasn¡¯t it¡­?


    ¡°Hmm? Bird¡­? Is it the same one?¡±


    ¡°It indeed does look like a bird.¡±


    ¡°It was darkst night, and so I couldn¡¯t see it clearly. But it does look the same.¡±


    ¡°A bird!¡±


    ¡°Yes, it¡¯s a bird.¡±


    The sun had mostly set by now, and close to it, a bird was flying in the sky.


    Indeed, it did look like the same bird from yesterday.


    Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire seemed to agree.


    Liza and Tilura were just happy to see it.


    ¡°Though, it does seem a littlerge, doesn¡¯t it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Is that so? Well, I haven¡¯t seen many birds here¡­¡±


    ¡°I suppose that is true¡­¡±


    ¡°Father, it looks big to me as well. Though, it is too far away to be sure¡­ It is unusual to see birds flying so high up.¡±


    ¡°Hmm. I agree. But I never heard of anyrge birds living in this forest¡­ But then again, there are fenrirs, so perhaps we just didn¡¯t know about them.¡±


    The fact that Mr. Ekenhart had even asked me, showed how much I had started to fit into this world.


    And even though there was still a lot that I didn¡¯t know, it made me happy.


    Well, perhaps it was a rare bird?


    But why was it flying up there now¡­


    If it was the same bird, that was flying in the same ce¡­


    And it was alone, so it wasn¡¯t migrating¡­ Besides, it was flying above our heads, like it was trying to stick around.


    ¡°Perhaps it is a monster.¡±


    ¡°A monster?¡±


    ¡°Yes. There are monsters that look like giant birds. Though, they have never been sighted here¡­ But they live in the mountains north of Ractos.¡±


    ¡°That would exin its size¡­ Though, it still seems rather big? Bigger than any of the monster birds that I have seen¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed, even in the mountains, they are not thatrge. ¡­Well, now that I think about it¡­¡±


    ¡°What? Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°Well¡­while it has never been confirmed¡­there were stories about how there used to be a giant bird monster in the mountains. And the other monsters would obey it.¡±


    ¡°Arge monster that controlled the others?


    ¡°Yes. Of course, it would be very difficult to get close to such a monster. But perhaps¡­¡±


    ¡°Sebastian. You think that the bird from that mountain has nowe out here?¡±


    ¡°It is certainly possible. After all, there are no other ces whererge bird monsters appear. Even though it¡¯s a monster, I doubt it hase all of the way here from a ce that is so far away.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    Indeed, outside of the forest, thends near Rtos and the mansion were mostly t. So it was doubtful that there were bird monsters there.


    There were no trees to rest in or hide¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Leo discovered something Ms. ire often seemed like she was holding something back. Perhaps she felt that it was necessary, as the duke¡¯s daughter. But from mine and Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s point of view, it looked a little suffocating. But it was because of that, that the current Ms. ire was¡­January 19, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Sherry was traumatized by the trolls ¡°I don¡¯t mind. Besides, it¡¯s almost time for dinner.¡± ¡°So, father. You have something to discuss with Leo?¡± ¡°Mr. Takumi did not tell you?¡± ¡°Ah, I thought I would let them hear it from you¡­Mr. Ekenhart.¡± ¡°I see. Very well¡­¡± He then turned to¡­October 25, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    The herbs were surprisingly effective ¡°...!¡± The moment that the herb touched the fenrir, it unleashed a faint light, and the wounds began to close as if time was being rewound. And once the light faded away, so did the herb that was in my hand. Even the fenrir¡¯s broken¡­March 30, 2022


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 553

    Chapter 553


    (Note: This is actually 2 chapters. I¡¯mbining them here as I seemed to have misnumbered them, and only noticed hundreds of chapterster¡­ Regardless, enjoy!)


    Leo wanted to use magic<hr>


    ¡°But Sebastian, even if you haven¡¯t seen it, the other monsters were obeying it, yes? Then why is the monster in the sky alone?¡±


    ¡°I was wondering about that as well. However, since there are no other ces with monster birds, I thought¡­ Well, it is just a theory.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­it has been flying up there for some time. And yet we have seen nothing else.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Leo, what should we do?¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff-wuff. Grau!¡±


    I asked Leo, since she had been looking up at the sky the whole time.


    ¡°You¡­can do that?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°I see.. But, that could just provoke it, right?¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff-wuff. Grau.¡±


    ¡°Hmm. Well, from what I can see of the parent fenrirs, you are probably right. But¡­¡±


    What Leo was saying was simple.


    If we were curious, we could just knock it out of the air and talk to it. Ask why it was flying over this area.


    If it was a troll or orc, then I would just leave it to Leo. However, this was a flying monster.


    No matter how strong Leo was, I had my doubts if she could reach it.


    But Leo said it could be knocked out easily with magic.


    Magic, huh¡­ Sherry had used magic that could easily freeze orcs. And Leo was a Silver Fenrir, so perhaps she could do it.


    That being said, it had not done anything yet. So maybe it was safer to do nothing. But Leo said it was not a dangerous monster, so it didn¡¯t matter.


    Hmm¡­ It would definitely be a quick solution¡­ What should we do?


    As I could not decide myself, I told the others about what Leo had said.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Indeed, they would not be a threat if Leo is here. I doubt anything is more dangerous than Leo¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. And with it flying up there, who knows when it might attack? But if it is intelligent enough to order around other monsters, then it might be smart enough to stay away from Leo¡­ But we cannot be sure.¡±


    ¡°I agree. While we don¡¯t know the full extent of it, we know that Leo is strong. And so we should just leave it to her.¡±


    Everyone else seemed rather enthusiastic about it.


    As for Tilura and Liza, they were looking on with hopeful expressions. They wanted to see Leo¡¯s magic.


    ¡­But Sherry and the two fenrirs had moved away. Their tails went between their legs, and they pressed into each other and shook. How scared of Leo were they?


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Hah. Well, everyone wants you to do it, Leo. ¡­And you seem like you really want to use magic?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Leo¡¯s eyes seemed so happy, which told me that she wanted to do it.


    She always wanted to use magic whenever there was an opportunity. And right now, she was wagging her tail.


    ¡°Fine. However, don¡¯t do anything that can hurt the rest of us, okay? Also, it is likely intelligent, so don¡¯t use anything too powerful.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    The powerful fenrirs were scared, and so I had a feeling that if Leo went all out, she would affect the people around her as well.


    And so while I have my permission, I told Leo to not go too far.


    After all, if the monster was intelligent, then perhaps we could talk to it.


    ¡°Uhh, I think we should move away, just in case. You too, Liza.¡±


    ¡°Okay!¡±


    ¡°Oomph! There, there¡­ You too, Mr. Ekenhart.¡±


    ¡°Mmm, very well.¡±


    ¡°While I have seen Silver Fenrir magic before, this will be the first time I see serious attack magic.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I wonder what it will be?¡±


    ¡°Kyu¡­kyuu¡­¡±


    ¡°Grau¡­¡±


    ¡°Gau¡­¡±


    While Leo would likely be considerate of us, I still thought that it would be best to move away.


    And so I called Liza, and caught her after she jumped off of Leo¡¯s back.


    The others were clearly very excited to see Leo¡¯s magic¡­ Especially Sebastian and Ms. ire.


    In any case, we moved away a few meters, close to where the fenrirs were waiting.


    Sherry and her parents were still shaking.


    ¡­The humans and beastkin were excited, but not the fenrirs.


    I suppose they knew something instinctively. Perhaps it was a fear towards Silver Fenrirs¡­<hr>


    Leo¡¯s powerful magic hit it<hr>


    ¡°Alright, everyone is out of the way. You can do it now, Leo!¡±


    ¡°Wou! Wouuuu¡­grau!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Woah!


    ¡°How bright!¡±


    Once everyone had moved away, I gave Leo the signal.


    She barked in reply, then growled as if charging up her power. And then her fur seemed to shine for a few seconds, and then with a great sound, a beam of light shot up towards the sky.


    It was so bright that it blinded us for a second.


    Was it like a more powerful version of the light magic that I used¡­?


    Perhaps she meant the sh of light to blind the monster, so it would fall out of the sky.


    However, I was wrong.


    The light seemed to have shot out from between Leo¡¯s eyes.


    And it went towards the monster in a straight line. There was a loud crackle and a sh.


    ¡°Is that¡­lightning magic¡­?¡±


    ¡°How powerful¡­ To unleash something so bright and so fast¡­ I doubt a human could use such magic.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. It was surprising when it was unleashed, but the speed and that sound and sh. It is proof of how powerful it is.¡±


    ¡°Silver Fenrirs¡­ No, good Leo¡¯s magic¡­how amazing. It is definitely something worth witnessing.¡±


    ¡°Mama, that was amazing!¡±


    ¡°Quite, brilliant, good Leo!¡±


    ¡°Kuuunn¡­¡±


    While everyone was impressed by Leo, and overjoyed, the fenrirs whimpered as if scared.


    ¡°Uh¡­it is going to fall, isn¡¯t it¡­?¡±


    ¡°It seems like it¡­¡±


    After being hit by Leo¡¯s lightning, the bird monster stopped in the air for a second, and then started to dive towards the ground, head first.


    ¡°Uh, Leo? Wouldn¡¯t it be dangerous if it fell down like that?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wou!¡±


    ¡°Grau!? Gau-wou!¡±


    ¡°Gauuu!¡±


    ¡°Kyuu¡­¡±


    I asked Leo from a distance, and then Leo nodded and then started barking at the parent fenrirs.


    The father fenrir¡­Fen, looked surprised for a moment.


    ¡®Uh, us!?¡¯ He seemed to say. But then they quickly got up and rushed to the spot where the monster was sure tond.


    While Riruru went too, Sherry stayed on the spot and whimpered.


    So, she was leaving the monster to the fenrirs. But what were they going to do?


    I wondered, but all we humans could do was watch.


    Arge monster was plummeting from a great height. It would be dangerous if we tried to do something.


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°Gaau!¡±


    ¡°Oh?¡±


    I wasn¡¯t sure if it was unconscious, or if Leo¡¯s magic was so strong that it could not move, as it was perfectly still while falling.


    As for where it wouldnd¡­it seemed to be right on the tents that we slept in, as that was where the fenrirs were running.


    When they were close to the tents, the fenrirs jumped high into the air.


    And like that, they crashed into the bird monster that was falling¡­


    The fenrirs were knocked back from the impact andnded on the ground.


    As for the monster¡­


    ¡°Uhh¡­ Isn¡¯t that just worse than free fall?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    It bounced away after being rammed by the fenrirs from the side. And then it was thrown towards the ground with great force.


    Still, it was not a straight downwards fall, so it slid over the ground and stopped close to the forest without making a sound.


    As for Leo¡­she had been concerned about the tent. But perhaps she had expected the fenrirs to save the tent in a more gentle way.


    Still, I could not me them either.


    ¡°¡­Wuff. Wuff-wuff?¡±


    ¡°Uh, yes. Indeed. Let¡¯s go.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Can I go too?¡±


    ¡°It should be fine, since Leo is here. I will go too, since I am interested.¡±


    ¡°Me too!¡±


    As Leo asked if we should go see the monster, I nodded and agreed that we should.


    And then Mr. Ekenhart, Sebastian, and the others came as well.


    Eventually, it was everyone nearby¡­ but the fenrirs were here, as were Phillip and Nichs, so we should be safe.


    As for Ms. Anne, she had been so shocked by Leo¡¯s magic that she was covering her eyes.


    I suppose it was too bright for her, as she had looked at it directly¡­ In any case, I would leave her in Ms. Lyra¡¯s care.


    Speaking of Ms. Lyra, she was currentlyforting Sherry, who was scared and away from her parents.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Sherry was traumatized by the trolls ¡°I don¡¯t mind. Besides, it¡¯s almost time for dinner.¡± ¡°So, father. You have something to discuss with Leo?¡± ¡°Mr. Takumi did not tell you?¡± ¡°Ah, I thought I would let them hear it from you¡­Mr. Ekenhart.¡± ¡°I see. Very well¡­¡± He then turned to¡­October 25, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Leo discovered something Ms. ire often seemed like she was holding something back. Perhaps she felt that it was necessary, as the duke¡¯s daughter. But from mine and Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s point of view, it looked a little suffocating. But it was because of that, that the current Ms. ire was¡­January 19, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Liza gave names to the fenrir parents ¡°While one mistake could have led to an injury, you two still did very well. ¡­Perhaps next time we should switch your roles?¡± ¡°I think it would be a little difficult for me to do what Phillip did¡­¡± ¡°I suppose so. Sometimes I¡­January 21, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 554

    Chapter 554


    Leo silenced the bird monster<hr>


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Is it alive?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°It looks a little burned. So that is Leo¡¯s magic¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed. It is so big¡­¡±


    With Leo, we all went to see the fallen monster.


    It was bigger than I had imagined when seeing it from below. Now only was itrger than a human, but it was also bigger than the fenrirs.


    Still, it was smaller than Leo, unless you counted its wingspan.


    It was currently lying limply on the ground. It was covered in feathers like a normal bird, but was slightly burnt and smoke was rising from it.


    But in spite of that¡­I could see feathers that shone like copper.


    I could not tell from below, but it seemed to have a pretty, reddish ck color.


    ¡­But Leo¡¯s had ckened most of it.


    ¡°Leo. I think you might have done too much?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    I asked Leo, after seeing that it did not move at all. Leo was tilting her head to the side as if puzzled.


    Apparently, Leo really had tried to hold back so that it didn¡¯t die.


    Well, even if she held back for the attack, the actual fall would have done a lot of damage¡­


    If it was a human¡­or most living creatures, you would likely die from the impact of such a fall.


    ¡°Wuff¡­grau!¡±


    ¡°Kii¡­ki!?¡±


    ¡°Oh, it moved. So it was just unconscious then¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, we should move back, just in case¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed.¡±


    Leo had barked at the monster.


    It was likely to confirm that it was still alive. But it did look like she was going to attack.


    In any case, it worked, as the monster suddenly raised its head.


    It seemed surprised and confused as it moved its head and looked around.


    ¡°Uh¡­what should we do?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°I should talk to it? But I wouldn¡¯t be able to understand what it is saying.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°So Leo is going to trante¡­fine. I¡¯ll try then. Uhh¡­are you okay?¡±


    ¡°Kii? Kiii!¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°GIIIIII!!!¡±


    After making sure that Mr. Ekenhart and the others had moved back, Leo and I moved close to the monster.


    The monster then looked at me with sharp eyes¡­ And after I asked the question, the monster raised its voice at me angrily as if I was the culprit.


    While its body did not move, it turned its beak towards me.


    But Leo quickly barked at it, which frightened the monster.


    Oh, so it knows that it is no match for Leo then¡­ It was intelligent.


    In that case, we might be able to talk to it¡­ I hoped that we could.


    ¡°Uhh, you should calm down¡­ I¡¯m sorry that we attack you¡­ But we wanted to know why you were flying over our heads?¡±


    ¡°Kiii¡­kii-kii¡­¡±


    While I didn¡¯t know what it was saying, it seemed to understand me.


    And so Leo interpreted for me, and we continued the conversation.


    While we were talking, the bird moved its wings, flinging off the soot that was the result of Leo¡¯s magic.


    And while it wasn¡¯t the same as taking a bath, it looked a lot better.


    Perhaps it had used some kind of magic as well¡­ I wondered.


    It had very sharp eyes, as if it was a hunter looking at its prey. But since Leo was here, I knew that it would not do anything.


    The tip of its beak was bent. It made me think that once it grabbed onto something, it would never let go¡­


    At such close range, it looked like a falcon¡­no, an eagle, perhaps.


    A golden eagle¡­ In any case, it was muchrger.


    Even if you ignored the fact that it was a monster, it had the kind of impact of something that would be the king of all birds.


    Though, it would asionally shake at the sight of Leo. And it seemed to be still suffering from the effects of the magic attack. And so it did not seem that threatening at the same time¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    A bird flew in the sky ¡°In any case, it¡¯s all finished now. So it¡¯s time to prepare dinner¡­ Hmm? What is it, Leo?¡± ¡°Wuff¡­wuff?¡± After the orcs had been cleaned up, and the only thing left to do was eat dinner, I noticed that Leo was looking up at¡­January 23, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Leo discovered something Ms. ire often seemed like she was holding something back. Perhaps she felt that it was necessary, as the duke¡¯s daughter. But from mine and Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s point of view, it looked a little suffocating. But it was because of that, that the current Ms. ire was¡­January 19, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Something was approaching ¡°Wuff¡­ Wou?¡± ¡°She is saying that there is a presence and smell that is both familiar and unfamiliar¡­¡± ¡°Familiar and unfamiliar¡­¡± Perhaps it was because the herbs were still having an effect¡­ But she could even smell it. We had just eaten lunch, and so the area¡­December 29, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 555

    Chapter 555


    Sebastian remembered something<hr>


    ¡°So, what is the monster saying?¡±


    ¡°After Leo frightened it, it does not seem hostile anymore. Is it safe?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­¡±


    Leo had finished talking with the bird monster, and so we moved away.


    I wanted to talk with the others for now.


    We were dozens of meters away, so as long as we didn¡¯t raise our voice, it would not hear us.


    As for the monster, it was currently being watched by Leo and the fenrirs¡­ I felt a little bad for it.


    Apparently, the monster had said something about how it could easily beat two fenrirs. But as long as Leo was there, it would do no such thing.


    It was intelligent enough to know that Leo was a Silver Fenrir.


    And so for now, I told the others that we were safe as long as Leo was with us.


    ¡°So, Silver Fenrirs really are on a different level. A monster of that size¡­ It must be incredibly strong.¡±


    ¡°Yes. And yet it is no match for good Leo¡­ That gives you a good idea of how powerful Silver Fenrirs are. Still¡­there is something about that monster that is¡­¡±


    ¡°Sebastian. Have you seen it before?¡±


    He had said that it might be the monster in the northern mountains¡­ Had he seen it before?


    Perhaps it had flown near to Ractos?


    ¡°No¡­I have not seen it in person. However, I think I might have seen an illustration of such a creature¡­¡±


    ¡°From a book, eh? Perhaps there was something written about this monster then.¡±


    Was there a book of monsters?


    ¡°In any case, we¡¯ll leave Sebastian to remember whatever it is he forgot. Now, about what Mr. Takumi heard¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. Um¡­the monster sensed Leo¡¯s presence¡­and came to look.¡±


    ¡°Hmm. Just like Sherry¡¯s parents, then.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. As that monster can fly, it can sense things from very far away. Though, not as urately as Leo or the fenrirs¡­ It just knows the general direction.¡±


    Leo and the fenrirs could detect the precise locations of orcs within the forest.


    Leo could also tell the distance and how many there were.


    However, the bird only had a vague idea that there was something like a Silver Fenrir in the distance. It did not know how many or the exact location.


    ¡°I suppose it found us because we were in a clearing. if we were in the forest, it likely would not have been able to find us.¡±


    Apparently, while flying up there, it had been surprised to see not just a Silver Fenrir, but fenrirs and even humans together. The shock had nearly made it fall from the sky.


    The others all nodded, but Liza alone looked puzzled. She didn¡¯t know much about Silver Fenrirs, and just thought of Leo as a gentle mother.


    ¡°So, it was looking at us curiously. Since we were all together.¡±


    ¡°And it is the same monster that was flying up there yesterday?¡±


    ¡°It appears so. After watching us for some time, it was debating whether it should make contact. ¡­And then Leo used magic, forcing contact between us¡­¡±


    Even if we did not do anything, it was possible that the monster would have approached us on its own then.


    However, if that did happen, it might be afraid of Leo or attack the fenrirs. So perhaps it was not a bad thing that it was hit directly by magic, and knocked out of the sky¡­


    Well, I was not quite sure¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    We talked about making the forest a little safer ¡°It was only yesterday that we thought of fenrirs as being dangerous for humans. And now we have a friendly rtionship.¡± ¡°Well, it all thanks to Leo. And Sherry as well.¡± ¡°As for Sherry, it was mainly because of Mr. Takumi¡­January 7, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    The Monsters Were Fighting ¡°...Huh¡­? ¡°What!?¡± ¡°Is this true, Mr. Takumi!?¡± ¡°However, we cannot sense anything¡­¡± ¡°Leo¡¯s senses were very sharp to begin with. And then she ate the herbs.¡± ¡°So that means¡­¡± ¡°Her senses have sharpened even more. And so I think that she is able to detect far¡­March 26, 2022


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    (Note: This is actually 2 chapters. I''mbining them here as I seemed to have misnumbered them, and only noticed hundreds of chapterster... Regardless, enjoy!) Leo wanted to use magic ¡°But Sebastian, even if you haven¡¯t seen it, the other monsters were obeying it, yes? Then why is the¡­January 24, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 556

    Chapter 556


    The bird monster wanted a friendly rtionship<hr>


    ¡°So if it is so scared of Silver Fenrirs, then surely it would not have attacked? It just wanted to make contact, I suppose?¡±


    ¡°It seems that way¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Is that why you were so surprised earlier?¡±


    One of the reasons the monster was thinking about making contact was because there were humans here.


    However, it seemed to think that if it did contact us, then maybe humans would not threaten its territoriester on.


    It had left the other monsters toe here, and be someone¡¯s familiar.


    By making that contract, it would ensure the safety of itsnd.


    As for what Ms. ire asked¡­while I was surprised by what I had heard, I was satisfied to hear that it was not looking to fight.


    The problem was what came after that.


    The monster said who it wanted to make the contract with.


    And that person was¡­


    ¡°Uh, well, it is possible that Leo just interpreted it wrongly¡­¡±


    ¡°What are you saying?¡±


    ¡°Well¡­ the monster wanted to make a contract with one of the people here. Apparently, it was after inspecting us from the sky¡­ Because it would be able to protect that person¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Well, even if it is no Leo, it¡¯s still a strong monster. Most humans would not be able to beat it. And so it would be a good protector. At least more than Sherry. ¡­Though, something thatrge would not be able to stay with you all of the time¡­¡±


    ¡°Kyau!? Kyua-kyau!!¡±


    ¡°There, there¡­¡±


    ¡°Kyuu¡­¡±


    Sherry was protested furiously at Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s insult. And so Ms. Lyra had to pet her in order to make her calm down.


    ¡°Well, it can fly and survive Leo¡¯s magic attacks. You could hardly ask for more in a guard.¡±


    ¡°And so who is this person?¡±


    ¡°Uhh¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart asked. And everyone turned towards me with great interest.


    Ms. Anne looked especially eager, as if she thought she was the person. What an unfortunate misunderstanding. She was already muttering something about what she would feed it¡­


    And so I turned away from them and looked at the person it had chosen.


    ¡°¡­Huh? Me!?¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s right. It wants to be your familiar, Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Oh, Tilura¡­¡±


    ¡°Um¡­is that alright?¡±


    ¡°It should be fine if you make the contract properly. Like Sherry, it will not be able to harm you. Isn¡¯t that right?¡±


    ¡°Mm. yes.¡±


    ¡°Me¡­ Uh, are you sure?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Leo says that it wants to be your familiar. Well, unless Leo heard wrong. I suppose I should ask her again¡­¡±


    ¡°Mama didn¡¯t hear it wrong! The birdie did want sister Tilura. Uhh¡­the small girl with red hair¡­¡±


    I suppose it had seen Tilura with Leo and the fenrirs¡­


    Mr. Ekenhart seemed impressed by it as he rubbed at his beard.


    Everyone else was surprised.


    As for Liza, she seemed to have been listening to Leo as well. And while that was how Leo interpreted the bird¡¯s answer, Leo might have been wrong¡­


    ¡°Well, yes. But perhaps it is some misunderstanding of Leo¡¯s?¡±


    I wondered, but Liza shook her head.


    Hmm? Was she not listening to Leo after all?


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Sebastian remembered something ¡°So, what is the monster saying?¡± ¡°After Leo frightened it, it does not seem hostile anymore. Is it safe?¡± ¡°Indeed¡­¡± Leo had finished talking with the bird monster, and so we moved away. I wanted to talk with the others for now. We were dozens of meters¡­January 26, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Leo silenced the bird monster ¡°Hmm¡­ Is it alive?¡± ¡°Wuff.¡± ¡°It looks a little burned. So that is Leo¡¯s magic¡­¡± ¡°Indeed. It is so big¡­¡± With Leo, we all went to see the fallen monster. It was bigger than I had imagined when seeing it from below. Now only was¡­January 25, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I talked to Mark, who had thrown the rock ¡°You hurt a girl by throwing that rock. Not only that¡­but Leo, the Silver Fenrir that we were with, became angry because of that. Things could have turned very bad if no one came in to stop it.¡± ¡°I don¡¯t care¡­September 1, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 557

    Chapter 557


    Liza was able to understand the bird monster<hr>


    ¡°The birdie said the same thing that mama said to you. Mama didn¡¯t hear it wrong!¡±


    ¡°Is-is that so? Liza, you can understand what that monster was saying?¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    Liza nodded energetically.


    I had heard before that beastkin were special for beast type monsters¡­ But I thought that was only for monsters that walked on four legs, like Leo and fenrirs.


    Hmm¡­ Well, perhaps these birds were in the same category.


    ¡°Uh, well¡­ So, the monster really does want to make a contract with Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Is that so¡­hmm¡­¡±


    Even if it did, it was Tilura¡¯s choice, and she should not feel forced to do it.


    I didn¡¯t really know much about monsters and familiars. Was it unusual for a monster to want to be one? Well, Sherry had been like that.


    Well, Leo had been there at the time. And it was also because Ms. ire had saved her.


    Though, Leo was also here now¡­ Perhaps it was the power of a Silver Fenrir then¡­ I would have to praise herter, and give her some sausages.


    ¡°I think it is a good thing, Tilura. While you are training, you are still just a child. So I would worry less if you had a strong monster who could protect you. Don¡¯t you agree, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Me? Well¡­ Tilura did say that she wanted a familiar, after she saw Sherry. So I don¡¯t think it is a bad idea. It will definitely be safer. If Tilura likes the monster, that is?¡±


    ¡°I think so too. I have Sherry, and Mr. Takumi has Leo. But more than a guard¡­I hope that it can be a good friend to Tilura.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart approved of the idea.


    The reason was that Tilura was still young. And even if she could defeat an orc, she was still an easier target, and it could be dangerous.


    Especially since she was the daughter of a duke.


    For some reason, he asked for my opinion as well, and so I agreed with him. Though, I also expressed that it should only happen if it and Tilura could get along.


    There was no point in having a familiar if you did not like each other.


    Ms. ire agreed as well. She thought a familiar should be a friend more than a guard.


    While Tilura could y with other children if she went to the orphanage, the only one close to her age in the mansion was Liza. So she only yed with her or Leo and Sherry.


    So considering that, having a new friend would be a good thing.


    Of course, if they were a good fit, that is.


    ¡°Hmm, indeed. While it¡¯s easy to focus on the advantages, there are other things to consider as well.¡±


    ¡°¡­Hmm, it is difficult. But she really does want a familiar.¡±


    ¡°In that case, perhaps she should talk to it first? With Liza and Leo there, she will be able tomunicate with it.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I will do that!¡±


    ¡°That is good. It is important tomunicate. And then if Tilura does not want to, we can politely ask it to go away.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­why did you choose me?¡±


    I had taken Tilura and returned to Leo.


    The bird-like monster, which had been huddled in fear, fluttered its wings excitedly with delight by Tilura¡¯s arrival.


    Leo and Liza interpreted¡­well, mainly it was Liza.


    She was riding on Leo¡¯s back and looked happy. I wasn¡¯t sure if it was because we were relying on her, or if it was a game for her¡­it was probably thetter.


    ¡°KiiI! Kii-kii!¡±


    Tilura had seemed like she did not know what to say. And so she started with that question.


    Therge monster was intimidating, but she was brave, just like her father and sister.


    Mr. Ekenhart and the others were watching nervously from the back¡­ If he was so worried, he should join us.


    It¡¯s not like he would be in the way or anything.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    The bird monster wanted a friendly rtionship ¡°So if it is so scared of Silver Fenrirs, then surely it would not have attacked? It just wanted to make contact, I suppose?¡± ¡°It seems that way¡­¡± ¡°Mr. Takumi. Is that why you were so surprised earlier?¡± One of the reasons the¡­January 27, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    A bird flew in the sky ¡°In any case, it¡¯s all finished now. So it¡¯s time to prepare dinner¡­ Hmm? What is it, Leo?¡± ¡°Wuff¡­wuff?¡± After the orcs had been cleaned up, and the only thing left to do was eat dinner, I noticed that Leo was looking up at¡­January 23, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I practiced signals with Leo ¡°With such things included, Tilura must train so that there will be no problems when she encounters some orcs. While her skill is improving, actually facing them will be a different matter.¡± ¡°Indeed. I think that my hands started to shake the first time that¡­August 28, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 558

    Chapter 558


    Tilura spoke to the monster<hr>


    ¡°Uhh, want friendship with human. So chose to be a familiar! That¡¯s what it said.¡±


    ¡°Huh, I didn¡¯t get that from Leo¡¯s interpretation, but it has an interesting way of talking.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Suppose it was because it was a bird.


    Leo sounded a little discouraged that she had not been able to convey everything, but it was not her fault.


    ¡°Hmm. But why did you choose me?¡±


    After hearing Liza¡¯s interpretation, Tilura asked again why it had chosen her.


    ¡°Kiii¡­kii-kii.¡±


    ¡°This birdie also wants to carry people and fly. It says that it wants to take someone up to a high ce where you can see the view together.¡±


    ¡°I see. Hmm¡­¡±


    Earlier, it had been saying something about its homnd being threatened¡­


    Well, I suppose it did not have many opportunities to carry someone.


    ¡°But if you just want to carry someone, then it does not have to be me.¡±


    ¡°Kiii¡­kii¡­kii-kii.¡±


    ¡°It says that it can¡¯t carry heavy people. Bnce is important when flying.¡±


    When you have your feet on the ground, you would be able to maintain your bnce. But in the air, things were more unstable.


    There were strong winds as well.


    Out of the people here, Tilura and Liza were definitely the lightest.


    Though, that was merely because they were still young right now.


    ¡°But then it could just be Liza?¡±


    ¡°Me? Sister Tilura?¡±


    ¡°Kii? Kii-kii! Kiii!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Liza seemed a little puzzled, and then the monster started to say something frantically.


    And then Leo barked and nodded.


    ¡°Liza. What did it say?¡±


    ¡°Ummm. It saw that mama and I are always together. And so it couldn¡¯t possibly ask¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    Indeed, Liza was always riding on Leo¡¯s back. Even when Leo was ughtering orcs.


    This was mostly done so that Liza would not try to fight, and to keep her safe.


    The monster observed this from above, and since it was scared of Leo, it wouldn¡¯t try to separate them.


    If only it understood how cute Leo was.


    ¡°Ummm. Well, so it just chose me because of my weight then?¡±


    ¡°Kii-kii. Kii!¡±


    ¡°Hmm. It says it feels something. It is vague, but it feels it.¡±


    ¡°Feeling¡­ Well, that is often quite important.¡±


    It probably wasn¡¯t instinct, but it seemed to think that it would go well. In any case, she had heard its reasons, so now it was just up to Tilura to make a decision.


    I did think it was rather odd that a monster wanted to carry someone and fly around, seeing various sights from above. But it was not a bad thing.


    ¡­Huh? Leo liked to carry people as well¡­ And the fenrirs enjoyed being petted.


    The father fenrir was quick to wag his tail when I said something¡­ Perhaps humans and monsters were able to be friends quite easily.


    Of course, ones that had a certain level of intelligence, that is¡­ Though, with orcs and trolls, they attacked humans as soon as they saw them. So intelligence was not everything.


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right, Tilura.¡±


    ¡°What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Leo is here, so it will be perfectly safe¡­ Why don¡¯t you go and try touching its wings? And if you like it, perhaps it will help with your decision?¡±


    ¡°That is a good idea!¡±


    ¡°They look very soft! Of course, I¡¯m sure it¡¯s not as soft as mama!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kii?¡±


    The idea suddenly came to me¡­ The monster had such shiny wings, which were made of pretty, bronze feathers.


    And while they looked soft, one would not know until they tried touching them. Perhaps Tilura would take a liking to them, and that could be one reason to consider making the monster her familiar¡­ Well, maybe that was a little shortsighted.


    Still, Tilura liked touching Leo and Liza¡¯s ears.


    Tilura nodded at my suggestion, and then approached the monster.


    While riding on Leo¡¯s back, Liza talked about how soft the feathers looked, and then she rubbed her cheek against Leo¡¯s fur andughed.


    Leo was quite pleased by this.


    As for the monster, it seemed a little puzzled at first, but it was not on its guard, and it was clear that it would not harm Tilura.


    Well, it wouldn¡¯t attack the person it had chosen¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Liza was able to understand the bird monster ¡°The birdie said the same thing that mama said to you. Mama didn¡¯t hear it wrong!¡± ¡°Is-is that so? Liza, you can understand what that monster was saying?¡± ¡°Yes!¡± Liza nodded energetically. I had heard before that beastkin were special for beast¡­January 28, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    The bird monster wanted a friendly rtionship ¡°So if it is so scared of Silver Fenrirs, then surely it would not have attacked? It just wanted to make contact, I suppose?¡± ¡°It seems that way¡­¡± ¡°Mr. Takumi. Is that why you were so surprised earlier?¡± One of the reasons the¡­January 27, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Liza interpreted ¡°The tail really absorbs a lot of water¡­¡± ¡°It was heavy. Thanks, papa!¡± While it could not be driedpletely with just a towel, I was able to get most of the water out. The fire would do the rest. Later, I might have to brush her along¡­November 28, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 559

    Chapter 559


    Tilura was tired and went to sleep<hr>


    ¡°Ah, it¡¯s so soft and fluffy!¡±


    ¡°Kii!¡±


    Tilura was quite bold.


    And so she grabbed onto the bird, much like she did with Leo.


    I suppose she didn¡¯t think it would hurt her. She was quite simr to Mr. Ekenhart when ites to these kinds of things.


    Liza was also very curious, but her times in the slums had made her cowardly as well.


    She was fine once she got used to someone, but she was often scared at first.


    It had been like that with the fenrirs, and me and Leo as well.


    ¡°Kii? Kii! Kii!¡±


    ¡°Oh, you¡¯re being enveloped!¡±


    The monster was a little surprised by how bold Tilura was, but after seeing that she was happy, it wrapped its wings around her.


    It was so big, that Tilura waspletely buried inside, but her voice was happy, and it was clear that she was fine.


    ¡°Haaah¡­ It feels so nice¡­I¡¯m getting sleepy¡­zz¡­zzz¡­¡±


    ¡°Kii?¡±


    ¡°Tilura?¡±


    We heard a yawn and then in the next moment, she seemed to have fallen asleep.


    The bird gently poked her and then tilted its head to the side.


    I tried calling to her as well, but she did not answer.


    ¡°She must have been really tired.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. She would not be used to camping out in the forest, and then there was the battle with the orcs¡­ And then she became so excited when the fenrirs arrived.¡±


    As we could not just leave her like that, we took her away from the monster, and the maid carried Tilura back to the tent so that she could rest.


    The question about making it a familiar had not been answered yet. But since it was no danger to us, it stayed in the camp while we prepared dinner.


    Of course, Leo stayed close and kept an eye on it.


    Still, it was no wonder that Tilura was tired after doing so many things that were unfamiliar to her. Besides, this time, we were trying to avoid relying on herbs for recovery. And she had also been quite nervous.


    She did not get that much sleep yesterday.


    Currently, Mr. Ekenhart and I were talking while watching the monster.


    ¡°When Tilura wakes up, we¡¯ll have her decide, and then we can return tomorrow¡­¡±


    ¡°Are you sure? I have only fought a few times so far.¡±


    ¡°There is no need to rush. I have confirmed that you can fight well enough now. It is the same with Tilura. Besides, it is not like fighting is going to be your main upation, is it?¡±


    ¡°That is true.¡±


    ¡°If that were the case, I would be a lot more thorough with teaching you¡­ But I cannot do that, since I already asked you to work on the herb fields.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Very well. Uh, I shall continue my training after I return to the mansion. And I¡¯m sure Tilura will do the same.¡±


    ¡°Yes, good. Do not forget. I must return to the main house soon. I do think that this experience has helped Tilura reach the next level. ¡­Well, if she does ept the familiar, then no one will be able to beat her. Except for Leo.¡±


    ¡°Haha, indeed¡­ That would be a relief. If she likes it¡­ I think she must have, since she fell asleep so quickly.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    As I looked at the bird, with its sharp beak and long talons, I started to think that it was just as strong as Leo.


    It could even use magic. I didn¡¯t know how strong it truly was, but it was at least stronger than any human here¡­ So it would make a very capable guard for Tilura.


    Even if it was not as strong as Leo, it was something that was the strongest in its own habitat.


    This was a world of magic, so I could not be sure, but it was probably an incredibly rare species.


    ¡°I just remembered! Your Grace! Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ It is unusual to hear you shouting like that, Sebastian¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ In fact, I have never seen him do that before.¡±


    ¡°Oh, pardon me. Ehem! I should stay more calm¡­ Regardless, it hase back to me, Your Grace.¡±


    ¡°What did you remember?¡±


    Sebastian had suddenly rushed towards us while shouting at the top of his lungs.


    He looked so frantic, that both Mr. Ekenhart and I were rmed. As were the people who were preparing dinner.


    Indeed, seeing Sebastianckingposure was quite¡­


    But what was it that he remembered?


    ¡°That monter. It rules the other monsters¡­ But most importantly, that color!¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ While not as pretty as Leo, it is still beautiful. A copper color, I suppose?¡±


    ¡°Yes. It does not shine as bright as Leo¡¯s silver fur, but it is still very pretty.¡±


    The monster had a dark reddish color.


    It wasn¡¯t very shiny right now, as the sun had mostly set, but the firelight reflected on it quite beautifully.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Tilura spoke to the monster ¡°Uhh, want friendship with human. So chose to be a familiar! That¡¯s what it said.¡± ¡°Huh, I didn¡¯t get that from Leo¡¯s interpretation, but it has an interesting way of talking.¡± ¡°Wuff¡­¡± Suppose it was because it was a bird. Leo sounded a little discouraged¡­January 29, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Liza was able to understand the bird monster ¡°The birdie said the same thing that mama said to you. Mama didn¡¯t hear it wrong!¡± ¡°Is-is that so? Liza, you can understand what that monster was saying?¡± ¡°Yes!¡± Liza nodded energetically. I had heard before that beastkin were special for beast¡­January 28, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Leo silenced the bird monster ¡°Hmm¡­ Is it alive?¡± ¡°Wuff.¡± ¡°It looks a little burned. So that is Leo¡¯s magic¡­¡± ¡°Indeed. It is so big¡­¡± With Leo, we all went to see the fallen monster. It was bigger than I had imagined when seeing it from below. Now only was¡­January 25, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 560

    Chapter 560


    The monster bird¡¯s identity<hr>


    ¡°A monster with copper colored feathers¡­ And so big, though not as big as Leo¡­ I believe that it is a Copper Eagle.¡±


    ¡°A copper eagle? That does sound familiar.¡±


    ¡°Of course, it does. Just as the book says, though it took me a while to remember¡­due to my old age. In any case, it is one of the most powerful monsters. It is said that they once destroyed whole countries.¡±


    ¡°What!? I see¡­ Well, are you sure it is the same monster? Why would such a monster be here¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, while they may be strong enough to do such a thing, they are not very aggressive by nature. Even if other monsters submit to them, they do not harm those who do not attack them. Of course, their monster subordinates might attack others on their own¡­¡±


    ¡°Not aggressive¡­ Well, I suppose that makes sense, since it wants to bind the contract with Tilura, in order to protect its home.¡±


    ¡°But, can it really destroy a country? Leo seemed to have whacked it out of the air so easily¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, good Leo is especially powerful. After all, if a Silver Fenrir wished it, they could put the entire world in danger.¡±


    ¡°¡­Are you serious?¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    Uh, is Leo really that strong?


    Leo, who liked ying with children and wagged her tail when she saw sausages?


    Could it be¡­when I talked about Deam previously, they weren¡¯t really making fun of me, but were genuinely worried about what Leo would do?


    Hmm¡­I could only imagine scenes of Leo enjoying being petted and licking my face. I didn¡¯t have a good enough imagination to visualize her destroying everything¡­


    While I looked puzzled, it did not look like they were joking.


    ¡­In any case, that was not important right now. We had to focus on this Copper Eagle.


    ¡°It is likely the monster that has been seen in the mountains north of Ractos. It spoke of a home, so it must live in a single ce.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. And I suppose it would be too far away to sense Leo¡¯s presence. Even though they can fly and see a great distance away.¡±


    ¡°Yes. It is a good thing that Leo was with us. There had even been a debate about sending soldiers to the mountains, in order to protect Ractos. It is possible that they might have ended up attacking, without knowing what it was they would face¡­¡±


    ¡°A monster with such destructive power. How reckless that would have been. In any case, they did not know¡­ Still, including Leo, it is odd that there are so many powerful monsters here¡­even the fenrirs.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ Well, Leo came with me.¡±


    ¡°That is true¡­ Well, perhaps the Copper Eagle sensed us and was thinking about avoiding us.¡±


    ¡°Like the fenrirs, it is intelligent. So it would not be surprising. In any case, we should be grateful that it did not attack us¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi, I am sorry, but¡­¡±


    ¡°What?¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart looked at me awkwardly.


    I had a bad feeling about this.


    ¡°Can you go and confirm it with the Copper Eagle?¡±


    ¡°Me?¡±


    Well, I had talked to it earlier¡­ But now that I knew what it was capable of, I felt a little nervous.


    I suppose Mr. Ekenhart felt the same.


    ¡°But you have Leo. It seems quite peaceful right now¡­ And so you should be able to talk to it.¡±


    ¡°That is true, but¡­¡±


    ¡°We would not have had to worry about anything if Lady Tilura just made the contract¡­¡±


    Indeed, it should be fine if Leo is there. And the Copper Eagle appeared to be in a good mood. So I suppose I could talk to it. But still¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Leo silenced the bird monster ¡°Hmm¡­ Is it alive?¡± ¡°Wuff.¡± ¡°It looks a little burned. So that is Leo¡¯s magic¡­¡± ¡°Indeed. It is so big¡­¡± With Leo, we all went to see the fallen monster. It was bigger than I had imagined when seeing it from below. Now only was¡­January 25, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    A bird flew in the sky ¡°In any case, it¡¯s all finished now. So it¡¯s time to prepare dinner¡­ Hmm? What is it, Leo?¡± ¡°Wuff¡­wuff?¡± After the orcs had been cleaned up, and the only thing left to do was eat dinner, I noticed that Leo was looking up at¡­January 23, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Tilura was tired and went to sleep ¡°Ah, it¡¯s so soft and fluffy!¡± ¡°Kii!¡± Tilura was quite bold. And so she grabbed onto the bird, much like she did with Leo. I suppose she didn¡¯t think it would hurt her. She was quite simr to Mr. Ekenhart when ites¡­January 30, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 561

    Chapter 561


    I talked to the Copper Eagle<hr>


    Sebastian talked about the contract with a bitter expression.


    Like Sherry, once they be a familiar, they can no longer hurt the person who bes their master. So it would have certainly made things safer.


    But Tilura was tired and had gone to sleep.


    Hah Very well. I will ask Leo and well talk to it together. Also, Liza help as well.


    I will call her at once.


    Thank you, Mr. Takumi. Ill tell them to give you extra orc meat for dinner.


    I think Ive had enough of that. Weve been eating it every day now. Well, Im sure it will be fine. I should get it over with


    Yes, good.


    And so I headed toward the Copper Eagle in order to talk with it.


    Umm, so you really are a Copper Eagle. And you sensed that humans were going to do something, and so you wanted to contact Leo?


    Kii!


    It said yes!


    Wuff-wuff.


    With Liza and Leos help, I ryed what had been discussed with Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian.


    ording to it, it really was a Copper Eagle. And it had sensed something morouslike something was headed towards the mountain where it is living.


    It was only a vague sense, and it did not know what the humans were thinking.


    And then recently, he felt Leos presence, and so it was forced into action.


    I dont think it had thought that the Silver Fenrir would be in league with humans. But it considered the risk of Leoing to the mountains and attacking them, and so it wanted to see for itself.


    And then it saw how Leo was with humans, and felt that its home was in danger.


    While it could deal with humans on their own, it would be a different matter if Leo was with them. And then it got the idea of cooperating with the humans, and looked for an opportunity to make contact. It had also always wanted to carry someone on its back.


    The monsters that obeyed it were subordinates, and so it did not want to carry them. Besides, most of the monsters could fly anyway. So it was best to carry a human.


    That being said, it could not be any human. But a human near a Silver Fenrir


    Uhh, so you really dont have any intention of fighting or hurting humans?


    Kii.


    But, earlier, you seemed quite aggressive towards me?


    Kii!? Kii-kiikii


    It says that it was surprised to suddenly see a human in front of it!


    Wuff. Wou-grau!


    Kii!


    When I asked about what happened earlier, it suddenly became quite frantic as it exined.


    Liza then interpreted Well, I suppose after being knocked out of the sky and suddenly seeing a human in front of youit was no surprise that it was cautious.


    Leo sighed and then barked a little angrily.


    Dont do it again! She seemed to say, and then the Copper Eagle raised its right wing and cried with a nod.


    It was probably its way of saying, I understand!


    I now had serious doubts about that country destroying nonsense. But even then, it was likely still much stronger than me. So I wasnt going to put it to the test.


    Well, everything seems fine then. So it really just is up to Tilura Well, she seemed pretty happy before sleeping. And so her answer seems quite obvious.


    It had a lot to do with Leos presence, but it really did seem friendly. There seemed to be no need for hesitation.


    Well, if you angered it by ident, it might retaliate strongly, but if it couldmunicate with people, then it shouldnt be too bad.


    Additionally, I told it that Sebastian and the people of Ractos did not know that it was the boss of the monsters in the mountains. And that people likely ran away at the sight of it. However, it looked like it had no idea what I was talking about.


    Apparently, it was not aware of its own supposed strength or reputation.


    It only used its power when it had to make a show of strength


    Even if subjugation of the other monsters was not through force. And they all lived rather peacefully.


    I suppose it was because the other monsters knew that it could not win. But perhaps they also hadid back and peaceful personalities.


    Sherry was like that as well. So maybe a lot of them just preferred not to fight?


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    The monster birds identity A monster with copper colored feathers And so big, though not as big as Leo I believe that it is a Copper Eagle. A copper eagle? That does sound familiar. Of course, it does. Just as the book says, though it took me a while toJanuary 31, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Leo silenced the bird monster Hmm Is it alive? Wuff. It looks a little burned. So that is Leos magic Indeed. It is so big With Leo, we all went to see the fallen monster. It was bigger than I had imagined when seeing it from below. Now only wasJanuary 25, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Tilura was tired and went to sleep Ah, its so soft and fluffy! Kii! Tilura was quite bold. And so she grabbed onto the bird, much like she did with Leo. I suppose she didnt think it would hurt her. She was quite simr to Mr. Ekenhart when itesJanuary 30, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 562

    Chapter 562


    We had been eating more than expected<hr>


    They sure eat a lot


    Indeed


    After speaking to the Copper Eagle, and rting the information to Mr. Ekenhart and the others, we sat down to eat the food that had been prepared.


    Mr. ire and I were a short distance away as we watched themparticrly the monsters as they ate.


    It wasnt just Leo, and the fenrirs, but the Copper Eagle was there as well. It was quite a sight. But what was more surprising was the speed at which they ate.


    Only Sherry was eating slowly, bit by bit, and with good manners She really was Ms. ires familiar.


    Mr. Takumi, I do think it would be best to leave this forest tomorrow.


    That seems to be the n But is there a problem?


    While we have plenty of meat, thanks to the huntingwe are running out of other ingredients.


    Mr. Ekenhart had approached me, along with Ms. Lyra.


    Aside from the sleeping Tilura, everyone had been informed that we would leave tomorrow.


    And it wasnt just due to being tired now.


    Leo and the fenrirs ate a lotand the Copper Eagle was with us tonight.


    We still have a little vegetables left, they will likely run out by tomorrow. As for the rest


    Yes, I understand. Then we should leave as discussed.


    Mmm. We will leave in the morning then. That way, we should be able to reach the mansion before the sun setspletely. Sebastian!


    Yes, Your Grace!


    Certainly!


    While it was certainly possible to live on just orc meat, we had note here to live like that.


    There was no reason to stay that long anyway.


    Sebastian and the other butler bowed.


    I wondered why at first, but it was apparently because they were going to leave the forest ahead of the others.


    Apparently, the carriage and horses had already been sent and were waiting outside the forest. And so they would prepare to greet us.


    Even if we left the forest, we could not continue on if they were not prepared. And that would make it more difficult to reach the mansion before sun down.


    Hah What a good smell


    Oh, Tilura?


    So you got up. And due to the smell of food. Just like a certain someone


    Sister Tilura is awake!


    Woah! Liza. Its dangerous to jump on people so suddenly!


    I had heard a sleepy voiceing from the tent. And when I turned to look, I saw that Tilura was walking towards us.


    In regards to food, Mr. Ekenhart was quite like that, wasnt he?


    Though, I decided to keep that to myself.


    Anyway, you should eat, Tilura. And then you can decide on the matter of the monster.


    Yes, father. But I have already decided!


    Here, Lady Tilura.


    Thank you, Lyra.


    Are you going to eat now, Sister Tilura?


    Yes. Did you already eat?


    Yes, it was good!


    Thats nice.


    And so Tilura sat down by the fire and epted her te of food.


    Apparently, she already knew what her answer would be, but she had to eat first.


    She ate hungrily, simr to how Mr. Ekenhart ate They really were father and daughter.


    Though, Ms. ire seemed like she wanted to correct her.


    But she thought better of it, since it would not be nice to scold Tilura while she was talking so pleasantly with Liza.


    So, Tilura.


    Yes!


    After dinner was finished, Mr. Ekenhart talked to Tilura in a serious voice.


    What will you do in regards to the familiar contract with the monster?


    I would like to make it my familiar! It was just as soft and wonderful as Leo!


    I dont think that its a good reason Well, I suppose I should have expected it


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    I talked to the Copper Eagle Sebastian talked about the contract with a bitter expression. Like Sherry, once they be a familiar, they can no longer hurt the person who bes their master. So it would have certainly made things safer. But Tilura was tired and had gone to sleep.February 1, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    The monster birds identity A monster with copper colored feathers And so big, though not as big as Leo I believe that it is a Copper Eagle. A copper eagle? That does sound familiar. Of course, it does. Just as the book says, though it took me a while toJanuary 31, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Street Stall Lunch In that case, lets buy some food and eat it. At Ms. Lyras suggestion, we decided to leave the store and head to the main street where we could buy some food. Leo remembered how we had bought all kinds of food when with Mr. Ekenhart, andAugust 10, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 563

    Chapter 563


    Tilura thought of a name<hr>


    Yes, father. Tilura. A familiar is not just some servant. You cannot force it to do things, you know?


    Yes, of course! Just like Sherry, we will be good friends!


    Wuff?


    UhTilura. Leo thinks you forgot her.


    Tiluras reason was simple. She thought the Copper Eagle felt nice.


    Mr. Ekenhart seemed a little conflicted about this. But I suppose we should have expected this given her age.


    It would have been rather shocking if she said that her reason was for the glory of her house or for the profit of the kingdom


    Besides, she did not know what it was capable of.


    While Leo is also a friend, she is mostly someone I respect highly!


    Respect So thats what you think, Tilura?


    Yes! I wish to defeat monsters as well as Leo some day!


    Wuff-wuff!


    UhI dont know if that is Well. I suppose it is a good thing to respect a Silver Fenrir, considering your family?


    While they were always ying together, Tilura now saw Leo as someone she looked up to.


    Perhaps it was because they trained together, and she had seen Leo fight against Mr. Ekenhart?


    And then there was the fight against the orcs.


    Upon learning that she was not hated, Leo nodded with satisfaction.


    I felt the same as Mr. Ekenhart. It was surely impossible for a human to gain the kind of power that Leo had Though, I suppose it was fine to have her as a goal.


    Well then, Lady Tilura. That monster The Copper Eagle. You should give it a name. And if it epts it, the contract will beplete.


    I understand! Uh A name?


    Yes. Lady ire did the same with Sherry. Originally, it was done by force, after defeating it in battle. Back then, most monsters refused the very idea.


    I see. Well a name, a name What about just calling it Copper Eagle?


    That is its species. And not a name. Besides, it is just something we humans started using without consulting them Speaking of Copper Eagles, they are very powerful when flying in the air, and are great at using magic. And with theirrge bodies, they swoop down suddenly from the sky and attack their targets before they know what hit them.


    Is that so. Hmmwhat name should I choose?


    He had been standing to the side and waiting for the opportunity. And so once the moment came, he stepped in and began to exin everything.


    Speaking of names, Liza had named Fen and Riruru But she clearly had no intention of making them her familiars. And neither did they wish to be hers.


    Tilura. Do you not have any good ideas?


    Hmm Unlike Leo and Sherry, it is a flying monster so Hmm


    Tilura seemed like she was having trouble thinking of a name.


    Apparently, she was not like Liza, who did not think much at all Well, not that those names were horrible. Yes.


    Hmm I know!


    I see So, let us go to the Copper Eagle then.


    Yes!


    Kii.


    Tilura had spent some time holding the sides of her head and thinking.


    And just as I was thinking about offering her words of advice, she said that she was able toe up with a name.


    Mr. Ekenhart nodded, and then with Leo behind us, he gestured for her to go to the Copper Eagle.


    Tilura nodded eagerly and made her way towards it. The Copper Eagle also cried excitedly, as if the moment it had been waiting for had finallye.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Ms. ire Woke Me Up While Tilura was looking up at me with an expression of admiration, I really wasnt anyone special. I just rescued a puppy on the side of the road. And then when we came to this world, she had turned into something that was called aDecember 14, 2021


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    There was something new added to the breakfast menu She had eaten what I thought was a medicinal nt, and now she felt stronger Was it something that raised your physical ability? Your stamina? Well, I guess that was the same thing What ifIafter making the Loe, had continued toFebruary 11, 2022


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Anti-Orc Training They are also very strong Though, I was less experienced at that time. And so my sword brokeand I got wounded Yes, I heard about that! Orcs must be very strong if they could hurt you, Mr. Takumi. Well, you should not lower your guard, that is forOctober 19, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 564

    Chapter 564


    The Copper Eagles Name<hr>


    Uhh, Copper Eagle Your name is Rahle!


    Kii! Kii!


    Tilura looked up at therge monster and announced the name in a clear voice.


    The Copper EagleRahle, epted it, and it cried loudly as its body began to glow.


    Thiswas the light that appeared when a monster became a familiar.


    The same thing had happened with Sherry.


    Kii! Kii!


    Thank you, Rahle!


    Kii!


    After the light disappeared, Rahle raised its voice happily and moved its beak close to Tilura.


    Tilura petted and smiled.


    By the way, Tilura. Why did you choose that name? Apparently, Ms. ire chose Sherry because it meant someone who was beloved What does your name mean?


    WellI thought hard about it. And I wanted a cute namelike the one that my older sister chose But


    But?


    It is a secret


    After the contract wasplete, and we were getting ready to go to bed, I decided to ask Tilura about the name.


    However, Tilura seemed embarrassed, and said that it was a secret.


    Hmm. Why would it be embarrassing?


    Mr. Takumi. Mr. Takumi


    Hmm Ms. ire?


    As I wondered about it, Ms. ire called and gestured for me toe.


    She seemed like she wanted to say something And so I went.


    About the name that Tilura chose


    When I went over to her, she whispered quietly so that Tilura could not hear.


    ording to her, the name Rahle had the meaning of sing a luby.


    I see.


    I suppose it was because she fell asleep in its feathers earlier?


    So that was why she was embarrassed.


    I suppose the feathers were sofortable, that it was like falling asleep while listening to a luby


    However, Tilura wanted it to be a secret, and I would not taint her honor by prying any further.


    Though, judging by the looks that the servants and guards were giving her, they probably all knew anyway.


    After that, everyone retired to their tents in order to rest.


    After finishing my watch with Liza and Leo, I went to my tent as well.


    Just likest time, Liza fell asleep during the watch.


    And just as always, Mr. Ekenhart was snoring loudly. It was thest nightbut this was one thing that I would not miss.


    In any case, there had been no signs of anyone approaching. And no monsters.


    So the watch ended uneventfully.


    Well, Tilura now had a familiar.


    And it was a bird, instead of a beast that walked on four legs Would it fit in the mansion?


    Well, the ceilings were very high, but it would still feel cramped.


    I suppose they could think about thatter, when we returned


    As I thought of such things, I chewed on some sleeping herbs and crawled into my sleeping bag.


    Even though I knew that I shouldnt rely on them too much, I could not help it when Mr. Ekenhart snored like this.


    Besides, we were leaving tomorrow We would travel while carrying our luggage, so I had to get some rest


    I thought of such things as I closed my eyes and fell asleep.


    Kii!!


    Woah!?


    What is it?


    Gugo! Gugigigi! Guga!


    I awoke to the sound of Rahles high-pitched voice.


    What is it!?


    I left the others and stepped outside of the tent.


    Ms. Lyra, the other servants and guards were all looking towards the forest.


    Ah, Mr. Takumi. Good morning. Um


    Is there something over there? Hmm?


    What is it!?


    When I looked towards the forest, I saw Leo, Fen, Riruru. They were all sitting behind Rahle.


    Rahle had spread out its wings and was moving towards the forest?


    In the meantime, Ms. ire and Tilura also came out of the tent.


    Ms. Anne was rubbing her eyes tiredly.


    They must have been awakened from the sound as well.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    I talked to the Copper Eagle Sebastian talked about the contract with a bitter expression. Like Sherry, once they be a familiar, they can no longer hurt the person who bes their master. So it would have certainly made things safer. But Tilura was tired and had gone to sleep.February 1, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Tilura thought of a name Yes, father. Tilura. A familiar is not just some servant. You cannot force it to do things, you know? Yes, of course! Just like Sherry, we will be good friends! Wuff? UhTilura. Leo thinks you forgot her. Tiluras reason was simple. She thought the CopperFebruary 3, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Tilura spoke to the monster Uhh, want friendship with human. So chose to be a familiar! Thats what it said. Huh, I didnt get that from Leos interpretation, but it has an interesting way of talking. Wuff Suppose it was because it was a bird. Leo sounded a little discouragedJanuary 29, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 565

    Chapter 565


    Rahle had done well<hr>


    Leo?


    Wuff? Wuff-wuff!


    Good morning. There, there. What happened?


    I was standing where the servants had gathered, and so I could not see what was happening, as Leo and the fenrirs were blocking my view.


    Rahle was also spreading out his wings, so I could not see the forestpletely. And so I called out to Leo.


    She then turned around and wagged her tail as she approached me.


    Wuff. Wuff-wuff. Wuff-wou-wou


    Hmm. I see. So thats what this is.


    ording to Leo, four trolls hade out of the forest earlier.


    And then they were easily defeated. Well, I suppose it would be easy for Leo. Especially since the fenrirs and Rahle were here now.


    Only, Rahle had wanted to fight them alone And that is what happened.


    So the high-pitched cry I had heard earlier was when Rahle defeated the trolls


    In any case, as Rahle had made quick work of them, Leo said there was nothing to be concerned about.


    Kyau


    Wuff!


    After some time, I finished preparing for the morning, and then we had to deal with the troll remains.


    By then, Liza and Mr. Ekenhart were up as well, and the situation was exined to them.


    As I moved towards the trolls, Sherry, who was being carried by Ms. ire, let out a scared whimper.


    Leo then barked as if to say that she should not be scared by such a thing.


    However, Sherry was probably traumatized after being attacked by them.


    Rahle must have used magic, as the trolls were burned ck. And yet Sherry was still scared of them And so Ms. ire petted her gently.


    As for Fen and Riruru, they were not scared at all.


    Wuff-wuff!


    Huh? Good Leo? What is it?


    Wuff!


    Kyuu


    Leo had approached Phillip and started barking.


    She then picked up Sherry out from Ms. ires arms and moved her close to the troll carcasses.


    While Sherry was still scared, its not like she was in any danger.


    I suppose Leo was trying to help her ovee her fear.


    Kii? Kii-kii-kii!


    Kyau


    Wou-wou! Grau!


    Kyaua Kyuu?


    Grau!


    Rahle was standing near them, and seemed to be amused at how scared Sherry was.


    Kyuunkyuu? Kyau


    Wou!


    Kyau-kyau!


    Oh?


    Sherry seems to be getting better?


    After being urged on by Leo, Sherry slowly made her way towards the trolls.


    And while she was shaking, she saw that they were not moving. And then she moved her nose close to them and sniffed.


    As they smelled bad, she seemed to scowl, but as they did nothing, she tilted her head to the side.


    Leo barked again, and then Sherry finally understood that they were harmless, and she seemed to return to her usual cheerful self.


    Kyau! Kyau!


    Wuffgrau!


    Ahshe got carried away and angered Leo


    Hehe Still, I am d that she has ovee her fear.


    Yes.


    After the realization, Sherry had climbed up onto the trolls and started jumping on their bodies.


    Leo was scolding her, but Ms. ire was happy to see that Sherry was cheerful again.


    Well, I had a feeling she would be scared again if she saw a moving troll. But at least her trauma seemed to have weakened for now.


    Even though her methods were a little harsh, I should praise Leo for this.


    Kii. Kii.


    See, its fluffy, isnt it?


    Woah, it is!


    Wuff


    Well, childrens interests change easily, so it cannot be helped. But Liza likes you, so its fine.


    Wuff!


    After the business with the trolls and Sherry was finished, and we had eaten breakfast, Tilura had taken Lizas hand, and was making her touch Rahle.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    I had an idea of what Leo was trying to say Had she lost under the pressure of Sebastian and the maids? While I may have just looked like a bystander, after hearing Ms. ire talk about the Fenrir Forest, I was now quite interested in that forest we hadFebruary 5, 2022


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    The herbs were surprisingly effective ...! The moment that the herb touched the fenrir, it unleashed a faint light, and the wounds began to close as if time was being rewound. And once the light faded away, so did the herb that was in my hand. Even the fenrirs brokenMarch 30, 2022


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    The reason that Sherry was not injured HmmI guess its because she is a fenrir. To not be injured after being hit so hard Wuff. Wuff-wuff-wou! Uhhh, she says that fenrirs are able to protect themselves by enveloping their bodies in magic energy. Thats why she wasnt injured. ...That issoNovember 29, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 566

    Chapter 566


    It was time to say goodbye to Fen and Riruru<hr>


    Much like with the fenrirs, Liza was hesitant at first. But after Tilura dragged her towards Rahle and made her touch the feathers, she seemed very impressed by them.


    However, this made Leo a little jealous, and so I petted her in the meantime.


    Dont worry, Liza is very fond of you She calls you mama, after all.


    Besides, Tilura had even said that Rahle was not as soft as Leo.


    Though, it seemed silly topare the softness of a bird with that of a dog.


    In any case, Leo seemed to be satisfied by this and let out a sigh.


    I would try to pay her more attention once we returned to the mansion Perhaps we could join Liza, Tilura, Sherry and Rahle when they are ying.


    Though, I wasnt sure if there was enough space in the garden. Well, we could always go outside.


    As long as Leo and Rahle were there, we would be safe.


    Mr. Takumi. Can we empty the tents now?


    Ah, yes. Sorry. I will just grab my things then


    Of course. Thank you.


    As I was watching Rahle and Liza, one of the maids asked me about the tent.


    They were starting to pack everything, and so I would need to help as well.


    I decided to let Liza and Tilura y for now, while I went off to help the servants.


    The guards were taking down the tents, and Mr. Ekenhart was pulling out the stakes from the ground by force.


    Well, it is about time now


    Yes. While the ce now feels so familiar, it is time to leave.


    Indeed. So, Liza?


    Yes. Goodbye, Fen and Riruru! We wille again, so dont forget the signal, okay?


    Grau! Gau


    Grau! Gaa


    Once all the preparations were finished, and we were ready to leave the forest, it was time to say goodbye to the fenrirs.


    We could not take them back with us to the mansion. And they lived on the other side of the river.


    Even though she had been scared of them at first, Liza was not quite sad at having to leave them.


    Still, the fenrirs barked back, as if to promise that we would meet again However, they did seem to sigh at the thought of being forced to do those poses again.


    They had been quite embarrassed about that, after all


    Sherry. Are you sure?


    Kyau!


    I see. Uh, Fen and Riruru? I shall take full responsibility in caring for Sherry. So please do not worry. And we wille again and visit you.


    Grau!


    Gaaau!


    And then Ms. ire and Sherry said their farewells. But just as the fenrirs were about to leave, Ms. ire suddenly remembered something, and so she asked them in an apologetic voice.


    Um, there was something that I was wondering Perhaps you do not even know the answer. Butare there other Silver Fenrirs here aside from Leo?


    Grau?


    Gau. Gau-gau!


    Kyau! Kyan!


    I see. I understand. Thank you.


    Now that I thought about it, Ms. ire had been searching for other Silver Fenrirs.


    Thest time we came, we had just found Sherry, and did not learn anything else.


    Back then, she said that she would give up on the searchand so I thought she did not think about it anymore. But I was wrong.


    Well, I suppose it was no wonder. It had been a childhood obsession, after all.


    And since the fenrirs lived deep in the forest, perhaps she thought that they might know something.


    Iter heard from Ms. ire that she really had stopped thinking about itpletely. And it was only when saying goodbye to the fenrirs that she suddenly became curious again and asked them.


    However, the reply had been, we dont know.


    The forest was vast, and they did not know everything.


    However, they would have been able to sense its presence. So at the very least, there were no fenrirs within this area.


    And so while the mystery was still not solved, Ms. ire had a satisfied expression.


    I didnt know what she was thinking now. Was it because she would stop chasing after them, or because she thought there was still hope Still it seemed to me that she petted Leo with extra gentleness after that


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    The Copper Eagles Name Uhh, Copper Eagle Your name is Rahle! Kii! Kii! Tilura looked up at therge monster and announced the name in a clear voice. The Copper EagleRahle, epted it, and it cried loudly as its body began to glow. Thiswas the light that appeared when aFebruary 4, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Rahle had done well ...Leo? Wuff? Wuff-wuff! Good morning. There, there. What happened? I was standing where the servants had gathered, and so I could not see what was happening, as Leo and the fenrirs were blocking my view. Rahle was also spreading out his wings, so I could notFebruary 5, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Tilura spoke to the monster Uhh, want friendship with human. So chose to be a familiar! Thats what it said. Huh, I didnt get that from Leos interpretation, but it has an interesting way of talking. Wuff Suppose it was because it was a bird. Leo sounded a little discouragedJanuary 29, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 567

    Chapter 567


    The fenrirs could use powerful magic<hr>


    Ga-gau?


    Gau


    After Ms. ire had asked her question, Fen and Riruru were about to go back to the other side of the river. But as they dipped their paws in the water, they seemed to hesitate.


    Now that I think about it, they had almost drowned


    Indeed. What should we do?


    Wuff


    Leo?


    I suppose they thought about how they would look like they were drowning while crossing And they were not enthusiastic about it.


    That being said, it wasnt like we could carry them either


    As Ms. ire and I wondered what to do, Leo let out a sigh and walked forward while Liza was on her back.


    Wou! Gau-gau!


    Kyaun!? Gau-gau!


    Kyan? Gau


    Uhhit seems like she is telling them to use magic.


    Magic? Is there magic that can make them swim better or fly?


    While Ms. ire and I were puzzled, the answer came soon enough.


    Uuu Gau!!


    Grrr Grau!


    Fen and Riruru growled as they charged the power in their bodies. And they barked loudly!


    I was starting to be able to detect magic energy


    Woah. Thats amazing


    That is I suppose they can use powerful magic


    So fenrirs can use ice magic Sherry did use it before. But this is what the adults can do.


    How interesting


    Fen and Riruru had activated the magic together.


    From their paws, the ground started to freeze, and it continued through the river.


    And like that, the water froze until it reached the other side, creating a bridge.


    But the current had not stopped, so it likely just freezed part of the surface.


    Ms. ire and I gasped in admiration.


    As did Sebastian and Mr. Ekenhart, who were watching from behind.


    Even Liza and Tilura were raising their hands with joy.


    Gau


    Gau-gau


    Fen and Riruru were also happy at their sess in freezing the water.


    And then the two started to cross the icy bridge.


    While it was impressive, would it really


    Gau!? Gaugau


    Kyaun!


    As it was made of ice, they couldnt help but slip on it.


    Had they ran, they would have likely fallen into the river immediately.


    But unlike Fen, Riruru seemed to enjoy it. And she was sliding on the ice as if wearing skates.


    Of course, she went much faster than Fen, who was walking slowly.


    I suppose she was just better at adapting.


    Kyau Gau? Gau


    Though she was about the size of a horse, Riruru slid across and soon reached the other side. She looked a little disappointed that it was over. Then she turned around and seemed tough as she watched Fen.


    Upon seeing this, Fen must have felt provoked, as he started to run.


    Ahthats not a good idea!


    Gau! Ga!? Kyan!


    I knew it


    Wuff


    He slid off Well, he looked like he was drowningst time too. So Im sure he is fine


    I had called out, but it was toote.


    The moment he started to dash on the ice, his paws slipped and he lost his bnce beautifully.


    And though he frantically iled around, it only made things worse. And without being able to find his bnce, he slid over the edge and into the water.


    At the same time, Leo sighed and Ms. ireughed.


    Even Sherry looked exasperated


    But there was nothing that we could do but watch. And after some time, he finally reached the other side of the river.


    And though he was panting loudly, he had been doing something like an ordinary doggy paddle near the end. So perhaps with a little more practice, he would be able to swim normally.


    Maybe next time wee here, I could ask Leo to give them and Sherry some swimming lessons


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    I petted the parent fenrirs Uhlike this? Gauu Gau-gau! It seems like they like it I went between the two fenris and used both hands to rub their bellies. As they were so big, I could not rub their whole bodies at once, but I had plenty of experience withJanuary 3, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Fenrirs could not swim Grau! Grau-grau! Grrrr! They drowned!? Can fenrirs not swim? ...Well, Sherry was not able to are they alright? After looking at each other, the fenrirs jumped into the river. It was deep enough that humans would have to swim. Someone asrge as Leo would beJanuary 2, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    The fenrirs treated me as a boss Kyau! AhohheheSherry Wuff-wuff. Sherry stretched and licked the tears off of Ms. ires cheek. It was like she wasforting her and saying that there was no need to cry. Leo also nodded approvingly. Ms. ireIm so happy!! Woah, Ms. Anne!? Anne!? Ms.January 6, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 568

    Chapter 568


    We started on our journey out of the forest<hr>


    After that, Fen and Riruru turned towards us and along with Leo and Sherry, howled.


    I suppose it was the way that fenrirs said farewell.


    And when they were finished, they bowed once to Leo, and then rushed into the forest


    It is quite sad.


    Indeed


    Kyau!


    Well, at least I had Sherry with me.


    Wuff.


    Yes. And I have Leo.


    And me, papa!


    After they left, Ms. ire muttered sadly while looking at the forest.


    While it had only been for a few days, they had fitted right in, thanks to Leo and Sherry.


    Everyone had enjoyed petting the fenrirs, and they liked being petted.


    Well, we should be going soon.


    Certainly.


    Yes, lets go.


    So we have to walk through the forest again


    It was now our turn to leave.


    After Mr. Ekenharts words, we picked up our things and started to make our way to the forest.


    Only Ms. Anne looked quite crestfallen at the prospect of having to walk


    Kii!


    Well meet you againter!


    See you again!


    Kii!


    Tilura and Liza shouted and waved their hands as they looked up at Rahle, who flew high in the sky.


    As Rahle was arge bird, it did not make sense for it to walk through the forest. And so it would fly over it instead.


    There had been the option of it carrying Tilura and flying, but sinceing to the forest was part of her training, it was best for her to leave it on her own feet.


    I suppose walking like this would help to toughen her up.


    Additionally, Phillip and the butler who went on ahead, had been told to tell the others about Rahle.


    As Rahle would surely arrive ahead of us, they would be terribly shocked if they did not know that it was a friend.


    Hmm. Hmm


    Wuff, wuff, wuff!


    Liza and Leo seemed to be in a good mood.


    We had formed the same formation as when we came.


    On the way, Liza and Leo seemed to be humming as they wagged their tails happily.


    Leo was always in a good mood in the forest. But was it the same with Liza?


    It was so fun! Letse again, papa!


    Haha. I see. Im d that you enjoyed it. Yes, if there is another opportunity.


    Wuff!


    Of course, you wille too, Leo.


    Mama too!


    Even though Tilura and I hade to train and fight, I was d to know that Liza had enjoyed her time here.


    While she had also fought Mr. Ekenhart and orcs, it had still been like an excursion for her.


    Perhaps it was because of the meeting with the fenrirs and Rahle.


    As they wanted toe again, perhaps I could take Leo and Liza here for a pic.


    Well, going for a pic to a ce with monsters was quite strange


    Of course, Ms. ire and Sherry would have toe too.


    And then we could call Fen and Riruru.


    Perhaps servants to help us prepare as well It would probably end up bing another big trip. But that would still be fun.


    It was more enjoyable when there were a lot of people.


    Hahhah This is so tiring


    I thought you would be used to it by now


    Hahhahh Well, after getting through the forest, I just stayed by the river the whole time


    Thats true But surely its not as bad as when we came?


    Of coursehahhah Do you think that I dont grow? It is easier than a few days ago


    Welldont push yourself too hard.


    You say that so calmly Hahhah Im the only one who is tired Hah How annoying


    While we were having fun, Ms. ire and Anne were talking behind me.


    As always, Ms. Anne was tired and seemed to have no energy, while Ms. ire sounded exasperated.


    That being said, she was not leaning on Ms. ire like before, nor was she so out of breath that she could not speak. So I suppose it was an improvement.


    After traveling to the river and experiencing sleeping outdoors, she must have gotten used to it.


    Well, humans did not get stronger in just a few days. And she hated exercising, so it was no wonder that she was tired.


    Ms. ire had been to this forest beforeso it was quite different for her.


    She was also Mr. Ekenharts daughter. So even if she did not train, it made sense that she would be fine.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    We talked about making the forest a little safer It was only yesterday that we thought of fenrirs as being dangerous for humans. And now we have a friendly rtionship. Well, it all thanks to Leo. And Sherry as well. As for Sherry, it was mainly because of Mr. TakumiJanuary 7, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    The reason that the fenrirs came Well, it seemed like they were talking to good Leo earlier. But what did they say? It was about why they hade here. While Leo was talking to the fenrirs, Liza interpreted, and so I understood. I had a general idea of whatJanuary 4, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Delicious food was important to Sherry So she doesnt remember that. What do you think, Leo? Wuff? Wuff-wuff. Wou? I turned to Leo to see if Ms. ires guess was correct. After tilting her head, Leo barked as if she was not confident. Maybe? That is what she said. AndOctober 27, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 569

    Chapter 569


    We arrived at the outside of the forest<hr>


    Sebastian. I did not expect to meet fenrirs, so that was a stroke of good luck.


    They were friendly, thanks to good Leo. And I was happy to be able to see them up close. Besides, it seems like we can build a cooperative rtionship with them.


    Mmm. We will have to send word, and make sure people from Ractos and other viges stay away from the forest.


    Indeed. It would not be good to provoke them. Though, Im sure they do not feel hostility towards humans, after this, but That is only if humans do not do anything. But ignorant humans might attack if they are scared.


    Indeed. We do not want anyone to be injuredor to ruin the friendship with the fenrirs.


    Certainly. I shall handle the matter once we return to the mansion.


    Yes, good. I must return to the main house. So I will leave it to you.


    Yes. And there is Lady ire And most importantly, there is Mr. Takumi and Leo. So I doubt anything will happen.


    Yes. With Leo here, you might say that it will be the safest ce in the country?


    And there will be the Copperno, Rahle as well. Even a whole army would not be able to defeat them


    In front of us, Nichs was leading Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian as they walked.


    Unlike Ms. ire and Ms. Anne, they were talking about the meeting with the fenrirs, and future ns.


    Though, their talk about Leo and Rahle was surely an exaggeration Well, maybe not.


    I could not tell how strong they truly were, but there was definitely something about them that made me feel that humans could not win.


    Well, regardless of how strong she is, Leo is just my cute buddy


    Wuff? Wuff-wuff


    I petted Leo as we walked, as if to say that nothing had or would change between us.


    She had looked at me once questioningly, but then wagged her tail and seemed to be in a good mood after I petted her.


    And like that, we reached the edge of the forest without encountering any monsters.


    Outside of the forest Phillip and the butler were waiting there, and the horses and carriages were ready.


    Furthermore, they had made a bonfire, and several of the servants from the mansion were cooking.


    I suppose they had wanted us to be able to have lunch as soon as we arrived.


    Rahle!


    Kii!


    Rahle was standing just outside of the forest, and Tilura rushed forward as soon as she noticed it.


    The servants had been told about it in advance, and so they did not look rmed, but smiled while Tilura jumped on Rhale.


    Perhaps it was because they had lived with Leo for a few months now, but the servants adapted to monsters very quickly


    Wee back, Your Grace. We have prepared some food so that you can eat first


    Mmm.


    After seeing Tilura running, the servants realized that we had arrived, and so they approached us.


    One of the butlers then bowed to Mr. Ekenhart and informed him about lunch.


    We had walked a long time, and so everyone was hungry, so we ate at once.


    Ms. Anne and Sherry usually ate very politely, but they were ravenous now.


    I understood Sherry, since she had to walk through the forest with her short legs, but Ms. Anne Her long hair was getting in her soup as she ate, and she did not even notice.


    Now that I think about it, she had been so tired on the first day, that she barely ate at all. Sopared to then, you could say that this was growth.


    Though, I noticed that Ms. ire was looking at her and sighing


    Now that we have satiated our appetite, it is time to return What should we do?


    WellRahle wanted to carry Tilura and fly.


    Butwhat if it is dangerous? I saw Rahle flying andif Tilura were to fall from such a height


    Indeed. Though, surely it wont happen


    After thete lunch, the only thing left to do was to return to the mansion.


    At that point, Rahle started to say something about carrying Tilura ording to Tilura and Lizas interpretation.


    Tilura was curious enough to want to do it, and it was one of the reasons that Rahle had be her familiar.


    I thought there was no reason to say nobut Mr. Ekenhart was worried that she might fall off.


    Well, this would be Rahles first time carrying a person. And considering the height It would be easy to imagine what would happen if Tilura fell off.


    Hmm What to do.


    Ah, I know


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    We talked about making the forest a little safer It was only yesterday that we thought of fenrirs as being dangerous for humans. And now we have a friendly rtionship. Well, it all thanks to Leo. And Sherry as well. As for Sherry, it was mainly because of Mr. TakumiJanuary 7, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Preparing the food was a lot of work Wuff. Wuff! You sure seem to enjoy, it Leo. Grau. Graauuu! After that, we spent some time cleaning up the mess. Usually there was just one orc to deal with them, but this time there were ten So it could not beJanuary 12, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Sebastian remembered something So, what is the monster saying? After Leo frightened it, it does not seem hostile anymore. Is it safe? Indeed Leo had finished talking with the bird monster, and so we moved away. I wanted to talk with the others for now. We were dozens of metersJanuary 26, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 570

    Chapter 570


    I asked Leo for insurance just in case<hr>


    While we rely on her so much, we could ask Leo? Leo could keep up with Rhaleand might be able to catch her if she falls.


    Indeed. Even if it is highly unlikely, it would be best to have some kind of safety measure.


    Yes. Of course, I dont actually know if it is possible. But I will ask Leo


    Yes, good. Protect Tilura.


    I did feel like I asked Leo every time there was trouble now But I made the suggestion to Mr. Ekenhart anyway.


    He had a conflicted expression, as if he was sending her off to war.


    Well, she was just going to ride on Rhale, so it really wasnt a big deal.


    Of course, I did want to ensure that Tilura was safe in case something did happen


    Leo. Do you have a minute?


    Wuff?


    What is it, papa?


    While Tilura was ying with Rahle, I approached Leo in order to talk to her.


    Liza had taken out her water bottle and asked Leo to fill it with magic water, which she drank.


    Now that I think about it, she really did like that water It really wasnt any different from river water, but I suppose it was special for her.


    If Tilura does ride on Rahle, it will be dangerous if she falls, right? And so I want you to run under them, so that you can catch her.


    Wuff? Wuff-wuff. Wuff?


    Leo tilted her head to the side as if to say that such a thing would not happen in the first ce.


    Well, it is like insurance. Because Mr. Ekenhart is feeling a little anxious about it.


    What isinsurance?


    Its when you prepare for something in advanceI guess


    WuffWuffWou!


    So you can do it. What will you do?


    When I nced over to Mr. Ekenhart, Leo understood immediately. She sighed and nodded in agreement.


    Wuff! Wuff-wuff. Wou!


    HmmI see. That seems crazy, but I suppose you can do it. After all, I already saw you knock down Rahle with magic


    Wuff!


    Leo imed that she could use wind magic to break Tiluras fall, so that she could slowly descend onto Leos back.


    It seemed a little rough, but I suppose it really was the only way to do it.


    It wasnt like we could put a giant cushion underneath her.


    She had used wind magic when concocting the medicine, and we already knew how powerful her magic could be.


    Just in case, I had also had her use a weaker version of that magic on me as an experiment.


    I wasnt falling, but just standing there, so I was not raised off of the ground or anything. But I could see its effect if it was stronger.


    Besides, Leo was so soft, and perfect for anding At least, more so than a bed.


    Still, will it really be alright? A child falling on your backwill have quite the impact


    Wuff. Wuff-wuff!


    Itspletely fine! Easier than being hit by a monster! Thats what she said.


    I seeindeed.


    After all, Sherry and Leo were protected by magic energy, and could not be hurt easily


    And so I exined everything to Mr. Ekenhart.


    He was more relievedpared to before, but still a little worried.


    That being said, he was not going to object when Leo insisted that it would be fine.


    Regardless, in order to stop Mr. Ekenhart from worrying too much, I also asked Rahle to not fly too fast or too high.


    As it would be the first time, Rhale also promised to be careful.


    Rahle had said that it would be hard to maintain bnce with a heavier person. So it wasnt as if Rahle was unaware of the dangers.


    Well, Im ready! I cant believe Ill be able to fly in the sky. This is like a dream!


    Kii!


    After we all got into the carriage, we watched as Tilura climbed onto Rahles back.


    Rhale spread out its wings and cried in reply, and then it beat its wings and rose up into the air.


    Yes, it did look like fun.


    I had ridden on a ne, but riding a bird monster would be quite different


    Once Tilura was used to it, and it was fine, I would like to give it a try as well.


    Though, perhaps I would be too heavy


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Tilura thought of a name Yes, father. Tilura. A familiar is not just some servant. You cannot force it to do things, you know? Yes, of course! Just like Sherry, we will be good friends! Wuff? UhTilura. Leo thinks you forgot her. Tiluras reason was simple. She thought the CopperFebruary 3, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Ms. ire Woke Me Up While Tilura was looking up at me with an expression of admiration, I really wasnt anyone special. I just rescued a puppy on the side of the road. And then when we came to this world, she had turned into something that was called aDecember 14, 2021


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Liza was able to understand the bird monster The birdie said the same thing that mama said to you. Mama didnt hear it wrong! Is-is that so? Liza, you can understand what that monster was saying? Yes! Liza nodded energetically. I had heard before that beastkin were special for beastJanuary 28, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 571

    Chapter 571


    Rahle did something dangerous<hr>


    Alright, Leo. Lets go too!


    Wuff!


    Chase after them!


    We should go too.


    Indeed. Will Tilura be alright?


    I understand that youre worried, but good Leo will look after her. So she will be fine


    She looks like she is having fun, but it is scary. I would never want to fly in the sky.


    Rahle was flying much lower than previously, and carried Tilura in the direction of the mansion, just as we had ordered.


    Leo then ran after them.


    Mr. Ekenhart was still nervous about it, and while Ms. ire was trying to reassure him, she also sounded worried Well, something like this had never happened before, so it was no surprise.


    Ms. Ann was also more afraid than curious.


    Kii! Kii!


    They do seem to be enjoying it


    As I rode Leo and followed them, I could hear the excited voices from above.


    Well, it was too far to actually hear Tilura, but Rahle seemed to be enjoying it. So things were likely going well.


    Ill move a little more. Thats what it said!


    What?


    Just when I was starting to rx, Liza exined Rahles cry, and I had a bad feeling.


    Was it going to start doing aerial acrobatics?


    Kii! Kii-kii!


    I dont like this Leo, can you run so that you are right under them?


    Wuff!


    I didnt know if Rahle was getting carried away, or Tilura hadmanded it, but I could see that they were now going up and down.


    Of course, the speed also increased when going down, and as Rahles angle would change, Tilura would be less bnced while riding.


    Sensing the danger, I called to Leo, and told her to run right beneath Rahle.


    The carriages were already far behind us now, but I did not want Mr. Ekenhart to worry.


    Leo nodded her head and barked once before raising her speed.


    Woah! Mama is so fast!


    Wuff-wuff!


    As Leo had never run this fast with her before, Liza was overjoyed However, I was just focused on what was happening in the sky.


    The speedwas simr to when we had to rush to Range vige before.


    I was just barely able to maintain my bnce.


    While it was different in the sky, it was impressive that Rahle could fly at such a speed.


    Kii-kii!


    What now?


    Rahles high-pitched voice echoed around us.


    I didnt know what it meant to do, but anything more than this would surely be dangerous for Tilura


    However, our voices would not reach them from here As I thought this, Rahles body suddenly started to tilt.


    Ah! Hey, Rahle!


    Kiii!


    In the sky, Rahle had suddenly rotated several times.


    It was like those military air shows I had seen once. Such maneuvers required immense skill.


    But I had never seen a bird do such a thing while flying.


    Wasnt bnce really important when flying in the sky?


    Also, it was a bird, not a ne. So Tilura was not safe in the cockpit.


    When Rahle had its back towards us, I saw Tilura for a moment, but could not see her expression. However, it seemed like she was holding on desperately.


    Kii?


    Whats the matter? Thats what it said. I think it was talking to sister Tilura


    I wonder if Tilura is scared now?


    Wuff. Grrr!


    Did Tilura now regret riding on Rahle?


    The sudden up and down movements were one thing, but barrel rolls


    And it wasnt like Tilura had any experience riding nes.


    Even for someone as curious as her, this would be


    Leo started growling while she ran She would definitely scold Rahleter.


    While she couldnt use magic to strike Rahle down now, she would show little mercy once we reached the mansion.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    The Copper Eagles Name Uhh, Copper Eagle Your name is Rahle! Kii! Kii! Tilura looked up at therge monster and announced the name in a clear voice. The Copper EagleRahle, epted it, and it cried loudly as its body began to glow. Thiswas the light that appeared when aFebruary 4, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I asked Leo for insurance just in case While we rely on her so much, we could ask Leo? Leo could keep up with Rhaleand might be able to catch her if she falls. ...Indeed. Even if it is highly unlikely, it would be best to have some kind ofFebruary 10, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We arrived at the outside of the forest Sebastian. I did not expect to meet fenrirs, so that was a stroke of good luck. They were friendly, thanks to good Leo. And I was happy to be able to see them up close. Besides, it seems like we can buildFebruary 9, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 572

    Chapter 572


    Iforted Tilura<hr>


    Well, it looks like they will arrive safely.


    Were back!


    Wuff!


    After watching Tilura and Rahle for some time, therge building finally came into view.


    Somehow, Tilura had managed to stay on this whole time.


    Perhaps Rahle had sensed her fear, as there were no more aerial acrobatics after that.


    As I sighed with relief, Liza raised her hands in the air, happy to be back home.


    Leo barked in reply.


    She was used to the mansion now, and recognized it as a ce to return to.


    Ah, dont perry. Tilura is with it. And that monster will not attack any humans.


    Mr. Takumi. Leo. Lady Liza! Ah, I understand!


    Mr. Takumi!


    Kii?


    Wuff-wuff.


    Ahhh Yes, yes. So you were scared


    Are you alright, sister Tilura?


    When we arrived at the gates, I saw that Rahle hadnded on the ground. But Tilura was still clutching on to Rahle back as if frozen.


    The guards were startled and pointed their spears at Rahle, and so I had to tell them that there was no danger.


    Once she saw us, Tilura jumped down and ran to us and threw her arms around Leo.


    Upon seeing this, Rahles head tilted to the side as if puzzled.


    Leo pushed her nose towards Tilura consolingly, and I patted her on the head.


    She was half crying, and Liza was looking at her worriedly.


    Yes, she was a kind kid who could worry about others


    Are you alright, Tilura?


    OhI was scaredsniff


    Of course. There, there.


    Wuff. Wuff-wuf?


    Yes. Well take care of her. You go and talk to Rahle. Tilura, can you let go of Leo for now?


    Yes Sniff


    Wou!


    After Tilura let go, Leo seemed to move so quickly that I could barely see her. Then she gestured with her paw towards Rahle.


    Kii?


    What is it? Rahle seemed to say as if puzzled. And they moved a short distance away.


    Grau-gau! Gau! Wou!


    Ki-kii


    I could hear Leo scolding Rahle.


    I suppose they had moved so that Tilura wouldnt have to watch


    But Leo, we can still hear you, you know?


    Regardless, I had to focus on Tilura for now.


    There, thereyou must have been very scared But its fine now. Leo is talking to Rahle, and that will not happen again.


    Yesuuu.aahhhhh!


    There, there


    Sister Tilura Dont worry!


    She must have been holding it all in, because after talking to her gently, she then hugged me and burst into tears.


    As for Liza, she hugged Tilura from behind and joined inforting her.


    Liza, listen


    Hmm? What is it, papa?


    Well


    Heheokay! Sister Tilura!


    I suddenly had an idea, and so I called Liza and whispered it to her.


    She nodded, and then turned around so that her tail pointed towards Tilura.


    Liza? Ahahathank you!


    Uh Sorry, Liza.


    No, its fine. Ms. Lyra will wash itter! Haha! More gently, sister Tilura!


    Tilura was now hugging Lizas big fluffy tail.


    She had been hugging Leo, and so I thought it would be moreforting than hugging me.


    I apologized to Liza, as her tail was getting from the tears, but she didnt mind.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Rahle did something dangerous Alright, Leo. Lets go too! Wuff! Chase after them! We should go too. Indeed. Will Tilura be alright? I understand that youre worried, but good Leo will look after her. So she will be fine ...She looks like she is having fun, but it is scary.February 11, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We arrived at the outside of the forest Sebastian. I did not expect to meet fenrirs, so that was a stroke of good luck. They were friendly, thanks to good Leo. And I was happy to be able to see them up close. Besides, it seems like we can buildFebruary 9, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I asked Leo for insurance just in case While we rely on her so much, we could ask Leo? Leo could keep up with Rhaleand might be able to catch her if she falls. ...Indeed. Even if it is highly unlikely, it would be best to have some kind ofFebruary 10, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 573

    Chapter 573


    Rahle was sorry<hr>


    Tilura, are you alright!?


    Sister! Yes, Im fine!


    Shortly after, the carriage carrying the others arrived as well.


    Ms. ire immediately jumped out and rushed to Tilura.


    As for Mr. Ekenharthe was looking this way, but perhaps he didnt want to show his distress, as he did not run like Ms. ire.


    Tilura looked a little embarrassed, but she greeted her sister with a smile.


    She had cried into Lizas tail for a while, but she was back to her calm self now.


    Though, it was still obvious that she had been crying.


    I suppose she did not like to cry in front of her older sister.


    Regardless, Ms. ire could see through her smile, and she hugged her, just like Liza had done.


    Wuff


    Kii


    Oh, they are finished as well.


    After the scolding, Leo and Rahle returned.


    Rahle now understood that Tilura had been scared, and it looked rather crestfallen.


    Rahle?


    Wuff.


    Kii.., kii-kii.


    Tilura moved away from Ms. ire and faced Rahle, who after being urged on by Leo, approached Tilura and bowed its head repeatedly.


    I suppose it was Rahles way of apologizing.


    Wou-wou.


    You wont do that again and scare Tilura, will you?


    Kii Kii?


    If you promiseIll forgive you


    Kii!


    I stood next to Leo and asked Rahle to make the promise.


    Rahle nodded and then looked to Tilura as if wanting a confirmation.


    Tilura had been too scared to get mad. However, after thinking about it for a moment, she asked Rahle to promise.


    And then Rahle raised its right wing into the air.


    Understood! I think that is what the gesture meant.


    Yes, very well. Its a promise then. Thoughthe going up and down was a little fun.


    Kii?


    Hey, Tilura. Even if we were far away, I could see you rising and falling. And it made me scared! Father nearly got out of the carriage You must not do that again, you hear?


    Fine. Heheh


    Kii.


    In spite of the promise, Tilura stuck her tongue out mischievously and whispered to Rahle.


    She really was a child.


    We would have to keep an eye on them, or she will start to do dangerous things with Rahle again Well, she had been scared, so I doubt they will be spinning or anything, but


    Still, didnt you say that bnce was important when flying? Why would you do something so dangerous?


    I asked Rahle as we passed through the gate and made our way towards the door.


    Kii. Kii-kii.


    Mr. Takumi. It was my fault too


    You, Tilura?


    Tilura exined in a quiet voice.


    She talked quietly because she did not want Mr. Ekenhart or Ms. ire to hear.


    ording to what I heard, while it had been Rahles idea to move up and down, Tilura had enjoyed it and got excited. And so she asked Rahle to do something else that was fun.


    Of course, she had not expected Rahle to rotate, and she had to grab on desperately.


    As for maintaining bnce, apparently, Tilura had been lighter than Rahle expected, and so keeping its bnce was easy. Thats why Rahle had gotten carried away.


    I suppose they were quite simr after all.


    Kii?


    Ah, Mr. Ekenhart What should we do?


    Mmm


    While I suppose it can fitsurely you dont think


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Iforted Tilura Well, it looks like they will arrive safely. Were back! Wuff! After watching Tilura and Rahle for some time, therge building finally came into view. Somehow, Tilura had managed to stay on this whole time. Perhaps Rahle had sensed her fear, as there were no moreFebruary 12, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    The Copper Eagles Name Uhh, Copper Eagle Your name is Rahle! Kii! Kii! Tilura looked up at therge monster and announced the name in a clear voice. The Copper EagleRahle, epted it, and it cried loudly as its body began to glow. Thiswas the light that appeared when aFebruary 4, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Rahle did something dangerous Alright, Leo. Lets go too! Wuff! Chase after them! We should go too. Indeed. Will Tilura be alright? I understand that youre worried, but good Leo will look after her. So she will be fine ...She looks like she is having fun, but it is scary.February 11, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 574

    Chapter 574


    Birds were not a good fit for the rooms<hr>


    We arrived in front of the door. And then we stopped and considered the problem.


    Well, it was mostly Rahle, who looked at the entrance with a puzzled expression.


    As long as Rahle didnt spread out its wings, then it was not that wide.


    And this was arge mansion so that even Leo could fit infortably.


    But Rahle was about four meters tall.


    It could fit through if it lowered its head, and the ceiling was very high once inside.


    Thoughit would not be able to move around very freely.


    Things might be knocked down every time it spreads out its wings And its head might hit the chandeliers.


    Even if it could fit through, it would not be veryfortable inside


    Indeed. Hmm, what to do. But it is Tiluras familiar, so we cant just tell it to stay outside either.


    Yes Especially when Leo and Sherry are kept indoors.


    Kii? Kii-kii. Kii!


    Hmm? What did it say?


    It said that its fine outdoors. If anything, that is preferable and fun.


    Hmm. I see But


    Kii-kii!


    Both Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire seemed to be against the idea of Rahle being kept outside.


    I suppose they did not think it was very hospitable.


    Still, Rahle began to squawk, and Tilura interpreted. Apparently, Rahle actually preferred to be outside.


    Indeed, it would be hard to have to stay indoors and not be able to move your wings.


    When people had pet birds that they kept indoors, they sometimes even clipped their wings I heard that it was to prevent idents.


    And even with a mansion of this size, there would be problems if Rahle spread out its wings.


    Though, in this case, it was the mansion that would break, before Rahle got injured


    In any case, if Rahle preferred to be outside, then perhaps that was the best.


    I think that for Rahle, it is more important to be outside. After all, would it not be stressful if humans had to stay in small spaces where they could not stretch their limbs?


    Yes. That is how I feel when I am in the carriage for too long.


    Indeed. While I can move somewhat, it feels very stuffy and cramped.


    Uh, yes. Exactly.


    Yes These people were used to living in arge house withrge rooms


    Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire started to think back on the long trip. But I had been thinking about something even smaller.


    Like being in a capsule hotel, where you could not even sit up.


    I had stayed at such ces when I missed thest train It had been very ufortable.


    Of course, I went back on the first train the next day in order to take care of Leo.


    And then I had to return to work right after that. It felt like I barely got any rest.


    Compared to that, riding in arge, fancy carriage that was extravagantly decorated was


    I dont want Rahle to feel trapped. So outside will do just fine! Is that alright, Rahle?


    Kii!


    Rahle prefers to be outside. As Mr. Takumi saidit would be like shoving someone into the back of a carriage!


    Uhwe would not do something like that Uh, have you experienced that before?


    Once Before meeting Mr. Takumi. I once hid in the back of a carriage while going to Ractos. It is no ce for a person, and I regretted it


    I see


    Tilurathat is


    I wont do it again! Its cramped and it shakes and hurts


    Apparently, Tilura had some experience when it came to being in cramped spaces, and she understood what I was trying to convey more than the others.


    Well, not only was it cramped, but it would move a lot, and there were no cushions I probably would not be able tost a whole hour like that.


    That was an even worse environment than a capsule hotel.


    I suppose it was her childish curiosity that led her to doing that However, she clearly felt intense regret over it.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Rahle was sorry Tilura, are you alright!? Sister! Yes, Im fine! Shortly after, the carriage carrying the others arrived as well. Ms. ire immediately jumped out and rushed to Tilura. As for Mr. Ekenharthe was looking this way, but perhaps he didnt want to show his distress, as he didFebruary 13, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    The Copper Eagles Name Uhh, Copper Eagle Your name is Rahle! Kii! Kii! Tilura looked up at therge monster and announced the name in a clear voice. The Copper EagleRahle, epted it, and it cried loudly as its body began to glow. Thiswas the light that appeared when aFebruary 4, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Iforted Tilura Well, it looks like they will arrive safely. Were back! Wuff! After watching Tilura and Rahle for some time, therge building finally came into view. Somehow, Tilura had managed to stay on this whole time. Perhaps Rahle had sensed her fear, as there were no moreFebruary 12, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 575

    Chapter 575


    Spreading Reputation<hr>


    Rahle, you really dont mind being outside?


    Kii!


    Rahle doesnt mind.


    I see In that case, it is settled. The garden should be big enough, butI hope you will not go too far. Because people who dont know might be rmed.


    Kii!


    Even if they dont know what a Copper Eagle is, they will recognize a monster. So it would be best for it to stay here quietly.


    Kii!


    Mr. Ekenhart asked Rahle for a confirmation.


    Rahle spread its wings and nodded.


    Well, it really was monstrous in size Anyone would recognize it as a monster if they saw it up close.


    As the people trusted the duke, I doubted that any strange rumors would spread. Especially since Sebastian was going to exin matters. But even then, some people might be shocked at it.


    That being said, the people of the mansion had to be told first.


    Well, they could see that Leo and Mr. Ekenhart were calm, so it should be fine. But some of the guards were carrying weapons.


    Wee back, Your Grace! Lady ire, Lady Tilura. And Mr. Takumi and Leo!


    When we entered the house, we were greeted by the servants as usual.


    Mmm, Im back.


    Your Grace. Sorry to disturb you so after your return


    Did something happen?


    One of the butlers stepped forward and addressed Mr. Ekenhart.


    Apparently, something had happened and he was going to make a report.


    It is from the main house. They are wondering when you will return.


    Mmm I really have stayed here for too long. Very well, I shall return tomorrow. Send the message to the house.


    Certainly.


    Mr. Takumi, Lady Liza, Lyra. Wee back. And you too, good Leo.


    Ms. Gelda.


    Wuff-wuff.


    Gelda. How have things been here?


    Nothing has changed Is what I would like to say, but Mr. Nick has said that Ractos is running out of herbs.


    Herbs? I thought I left a lot with them


    I had thought about how much had sold in Ractos up until now, and made what I assumed would be enough.


    Surely this didnt mean that some disease was spreading again


    You are right, Mr. Takumi. It should have been enough Apparently, it has be quite popr within Ractos.


    Mr. Takumis?


    Yes. And Mr. Kaliss store. When the disease was spreading, it was the only store that had enough stock. And the prices were affordable. And so the reputation spread, and more customers started toe.


    I understand that But is it really so much that they would run out of herbs? Alsowhat did they think about me?


    Apparently, the soldiers have spread stories about how you captured Deam. They say that you have worked to make the slums a safer ce. AlsoI think that Mr. Nick has done his share of spreading the word about you.


    AhI see. Nick


    I understood why Mr. Kaliss store was bing sessful, but I didnt realize people were talking about me


    Well, after capturing Deam, we had met Nick and talked, so he knew about what we had done.


    And that had helped with the poprity of the store.


    Well, it was a store that sold my herbs. So this was all good news to me.


    As Mr. Kaliss store sells other products as well, those are also doing well. People who go to buy herbsend up buying other things on the way. Or vice versa.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Rahle was sorry Tilura, are you alright!? Sister! Yes, Im fine! Shortly after, the carriage carrying the others arrived as well. Ms. ire immediately jumped out and rushed to Tilura. As for Mr. Ekenharthe was looking this way, but perhaps he didnt want to show his distress, as he didFebruary 13, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Birds were not a good fit for the rooms We arrived in front of the door. And then we stopped and considered the problem. Well, it was mostly Rahle, who looked at the entrance with a puzzled expression. As long as Rahle didnt spread out its wings, then it wasFebruary 14, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    The Copper Eagles Name Uhh, Copper Eagle Your name is Rahle! Kii! Kii! Tilura looked up at therge monster and announced the name in a clear voice. The Copper EagleRahle, epted it, and it cried loudly as its body began to glow. Thiswas the light that appeared when aFebruary 4, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 576

    Chapter 576


    We had Ms. Lyra rest first<hr>


    Well, Im d that things are well.


    Yes. Mr. Nick sounded very happy as he talked about it. Though, he was disappointed that you were gone, so he could not get more herbs


    Haha. Well, that cannot be helped. Uhh, do you know how much they need? I can make more now.


    Ah, no! You have only just returned from the forest. You must rest first. Besides, I am sure he will note back until tomorrow.


    Thats true. I guess I was so happy that I got a little ahead of myself.


    Hehe Well, Mr. Takumi, Leo and Liza did a lot in the forest. So you should rest easy today.


    Wuff. Wuff-wuff?


    Mama says you should rest too.


    Yes, both Liza and Leo did work hard. Very well, I shall rest today then.


    When I suggested that I could make more herbs, Ms. Gelda stopped me frantically. Leos work in the forest was obvious, but Liza had also done quite a lot.


    Not only did she fight that orc, but she also acted as an interpreter for the fenrirs and Rahle.


    Well, I shall take your luggage then


    Ah, Ms. Lyra. You were with us in the forest too. So you should rest. I will carry them by myself.


    Really? But all I did was prepare the food


    But that must have been very tiring. Especially after the fenrirs and Rahle joined in. Regardless, carrying my own bags is nothing. So please rest. You made such delicious food for us, after all.


    Wuff-wuff. Wuff. Wuff.


    Mama says thank you for the delicious food! I thought it was good too! Thank you, sister Lyra!


    Oh, very well. If you insist


    After all of that was said, Ms. Lyra finally gave up on trying to haul our bags away. And she smiled and went off.


    However, she kept ncing back a little sadly. Perhaps she wanted to help. But I was sure that she was also tired.


    It was best for her to rest now.


    She did not need to be concerned about us.


    Then I will do it instead of Lyra. I was here all of the time, and am not tired.


    Yes, thank you. But please be careful.


    Of course!


    Wuff


    Ms. Gelda then insisted that she would help. Though, she just carried Lizas belongings.


    My own bags and the sword were quite heavy And since Ms. Gelda was enthusiastic about it, I was worried that she might do something clumsy.


    Like she might trip and fall while carrying my sword.


    However, Ms. Gelda was aware of her characteristic, so I coughed and then headed to my room with the luggage.


    To no ones surpriseshe slipped a few times and nearly fell, but Leo supported her with her nose.


    Still, I wondered how she managed to slip so much on dry carpets


    Hah Were finally back. I didnt think I was that tired while in the forest, but I guess I was wrong.


    Wuff-wuff.


    MamaIm sleepy


    Wuff.


    Ms. Gelda left after dropping the things off in the room, and I sighed.


    Thanks to the herbs, I didnt feel that much fatigue. But I was tired mentally.


    And so I quickly changed my clothes and sat on the bed with a sense of relief.


    Leo was the same, andy down to rest in the center of the room.


    As for Liza, she grabbed onto Leo and was already starting to drift off to sleep.


    While she had a lot of fun in the forest, she was a child, and so would be even more tired than me.


    A lot had happened Still, I was happy that Liza recognized this as a ce toe back to.


    It was proof that she was used to being here, and had epted the current situation and liked it.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Leo started a diet n for Sherry Besides, it is probably easier in some ways when they are a familiar. Really? Yes. Because no matter what happens, you can speak to each other. Ah, that is true. It is very convenient to be able to understand each other. But IAugust 30, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Something was approaching Wuff Wou? She is saying that there is a presence and smell that is both familiar and unfamiliar Familiar and unfamiliar Perhaps it was because the herbs were still having an effect But she could even smell it. We had just eaten lunch, and so the areaDecember 29, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We were woken up early in the morning Hmmmmm While Liza had closed her eyes, she was still excited, and would not fall asleep immediately. However, after muttering for a bit, she finally became quiet. And then I could tell by her breathing that she was asleep. Before closing myOctober 30, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 577

    Chapter 577


    Dinner portions were insufficient<hr>


    Mr. Takumi, sorry to disturb your rest. Dinner is ready, so pleasee down to the dining hall. But if you are too tired, we could bring it up to your room?


    Ah, no. I was just rxing a little. I will head down there immediately. Liza, you can sleep after you eat, alright?


    Yes Im hungry, so Ill eat!


    Wuff!


    As I was rxing in my room, there was a knock on the door and Ms. Gelda entered.


    And while she offered to bring food to my room, I preferred to eat with everyone else.


    Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire would be there, and I wanted to know what had happened with Rahle.


    Though, Ms. Anne would probably note down.


    As for Leo, she got up as soon as she heard dinner being mentioned.


    She was even wagging her tail.


    In any case, we had better eat while Liza was awake. And so we followed Ms. Gelda to the dining hall.


    Hmmm What happened?


    There was so much more food when we ate in the forest. Because there was so much orc meat.


    Kyau


    It does look like there is less than usual?


    Wuff?


    When we arrived at the dining hall, I saw that everyone but Ms. Anne was present. And then the food was served.


    However, Mr. Ekenhart and the others looked at the food suspiciously.


    Sherry even sounded sad.


    It seemed rather inpared to what we usually ate.


    No, it was clear that it took a lot of effort to make. However, after eating orc meat in the forest, it didck impact.


    Even if the appearance and taste was probably good, the portions also looked small.


    Perhaps we had gotten too used to the orc meat


    The meat dish looked like it could be eaten with just a single bite.


    Mmmand I was looking forward to eating Helenas cooking after we returned


    Father, it looks delicious.


    The presentation is great, there is no doubt. And look at this breadwell, its also small.


    The bread was about the size of my palm.


    And though it was small, it was in the shape of a dog or wolf. Perhaps it had been modeled after Leo.


    It was so well made that I almost hesitated to eat it.


    When we were in the forest, the cooking had gotten a lot simpler after the fenrirs joined us. And so Mr. Ekenhart had been looking forward to eating something specially prepared upon our return.


    Ms. Lyras cooking was good, but it was human nature to want to eat something that was more borate.


    Though, the ideal would be to be able to eat a lot of food that was also delicious and well made.


    Im sorry. After His Grace went to the forest, Ms. Helena started experimenting with the food.


    Oh, is that right? Well, while it is nice to look at, what of the portions? Well, I suppose I should notin, but


    Ms. Gelda realized what was happening and stepped forward to offer an exnation.


    She said that she started doing it because of a promise with Mr. Takumi


    Me?


    Yes. Apparently, you and Ms. Helena had a discussion about food


    Ahyes. That is true, we did talk.


    I thinkit was right before we went to the forest?


    Ms. Helena had been rather sad that I had recognized a dish that she thought she had invented.


    I suppose this was the result


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Sebastian Exined Magic To Me After dinner, Ms. ire and I drank tea in the guest room with a rxed atmosphere. As Sebastian and the two maids were servants, they did not sit down but waited behind us. It must be tiring to have to stand for so long. AndDecember 10, 2021


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Leo finished her sausages Once we were finished talking, Ms. ire and Mr. Ekenhart left the dining hall. They decided to sleep early, as they had a busy day tomorrow. But before leaving, they asked for some herbs to help them sleep, and so I had a maid bring meSeptember 25, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We All Ate Breakfast Together This sd is very delicious. Hehe. Im d that you enjoy it. The soup is good too, Mr. Takumi! Wuff, wuff Guff, guff! It was a green vegetable sd. Because it was morning, the sd dressing was mild, and went well with bread as well.December 18, 2021


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 578

    Chapter 578


    It was a serious problem for the women<hr>


    Ms. Helenas first thought was to make food that was delightful to look at. In fact, the servants also agreed that such elevated presentation would make the food feel even more delicious.


    Indeed. The taste can be affected by that as well. Perhaps it is necessary for food to look nice.


    Sometimes food looked delicious and sometimes it didnt.


    And while the pleasant surprise of food tasting good in spite of looking bad was nice, it was important for meals to be enjoyable.


    Still, what about the amount? It seems to be only half of what is usually served?


    As for thatumSherrywell, it was an idea from the servants, particrly the women.


    And how is Sherry rted to that?


    Kyu?


    Sherry looked up with confusion.


    Yes. One of the reasons that Sherry went to the forest was to lose weight.


    That is true. Leo also wanted to toughen her up.


    Kyau.


    Sherry had not been very active, and was also stealing from the kitchens, causing her to put on some weight. And so Leo had put her on a diet n.


    Part of that was being chased around in the garden by Leo, and she generally did not ride on Leo when in the forest.


    And there was also the battle with the orcs She was to learn how to fight as a fenrir.


    In any case, while it was hardly over, it did seem to be effective. And Sherrys face had grown sharper and more like that of a wolf.


    It was just a small change. Sherry was still young, after all, and could not bepared to Fen and Riruru.


    Ms. Helena med herself for Sherry, and started to think of meals that would help her. And since I was there, I made a suggestion.


    You did?


    Sherry had gained wait to slothfulness and stealing food. It was not Ms. Helenas fault at all.


    Still, as the person in charge of all of the food in the mansion, I suppose it was a big problem for her


    Reducing the amount of food To put it simply, eating too much good food will make you fat. And so some adjustments should be made. Ms. Helenas dishes are now more delicious than ever, and so there would be a risk


    YesI can see the reasoning. Now that I think about it, I too have a tendency to eat too much


    Ahis that so? But surely it is not necessary for me, Mr. Takumi or Leo?


    Wou!


    All of Ms. Helenas cooking was delicious and thought out, including the deserts.


    Though, I suppose that was a bad thing for some people.


    Ms. ire recalled that she would sometimes eat too much, and so she nodded her head with satisfaction at Ms. Geldas exnation.


    However, Mr. Ekenhart expected to be satisfied with both taste and quantity, and could not keep his mouth shut during this rather delicate topic.


    And while Leo was a girl, she was not going to win against the temptations of food either, and so she barked to show that she stood by Mr. Ekenhart.


    I might have joined them myself, only Ms. ire shot me a dangerous look, and so I just chuckled awkwardly instead.


    Excuse me. The extra food is ready, and so I have brought it!


    Oh! So you did prepare something! Good!


    Wuff! Wuff!


    Haha Mama, your tail hit me!


    Wou


    Just then, Ms. Helena entered the dining hall with a food cart.


    On it was arge te with meat in some kind of sauce Was it orc meat? And there was vegetable soup and a mountain of sausages.


    Mr. Ekenhart sighed with relief, while Leo wagged her tail happily.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Delicious food was important to Sherry So she doesnt remember that. What do you think, Leo? Wuff? Wuff-wuff. Wou? I turned to Leo to see if Ms. ires guess was correct. After tilting her head, Leo barked as if she was not confident. Maybe? That is what she said. AndOctober 27, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Sherry had be fat from eating too much Im sure Lady ire would have prepared some food if she knew Why didnt she ask her? Kyukyu I see. Uh, papa Sebastian was right. Ms. ire doted on Sherry, and would surely ask the servants to bring her some food. LizaAugust 30, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    The fenrirs treated me as a boss Kyau! AhohheheSherry Wuff-wuff. Sherry stretched and licked the tears off of Ms. ires cheek. It was like she wasforting her and saying that there was no need to cry. Leo also nodded approvingly. Ms. ireIm so happy!! Woah, Ms. Anne!? Anne!? Ms.January 6, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 579

    Chapter 579


    Ms. Gelda had jumped to conclusions<hr>


    In the end, we ate what was initially served, as well as the new food that Ms. Helena brought, and it was a satisfying dinner.


    Only, Ms. ire looked at her father, who ate ravenously, with a slightly angry expression.


    As for Sherry, since she had done so well in the forest, Leo gave her special permission to eat as much as she wanted.


    The roasted meat was orc meat after all. We had brought back quite a lot of it from the forest.


    It was quite different when cooked by Ms. Helena, and very delicious.


    There would have been chaos if Anne was here Thankfully, she was too tired and went to sleep.


    Previously, Ms. ire and Ms. Anne had argued about weight.


    And so I didnt want to think about what it would have been like if she were here now.


    Im sorry. Since it was so sudden, I could not prepare more at first And so I made the rest in a hurry. I hope it was enough


    Yes, it was enough. And you seemed to have improved again? Well, I was surprised at first


    We did not know that you would return today, Your Grace No, that is just an excuse. Please forgive me.


    Now that I think about it, we did not send word to the house


    Is that true, father?


    Mmm. We only decided to return yesterday, after all. Though, I suppose we still could have sent a messenger


    It was decided after Tilura had slept while clutching onto Rahle. The sun was already down by then And it would have been dangerous to send someone to travel through the forest while it is dark.


    Well, it seemed like they could have asked the butlers who were waiting outside of the forest But I suppose they had forgotten, due to that business with Rahle.


    I did not say anything, as Ms. ire seemed cross enough with Mr. Ekenhart already.


    Besides, both I and Ms. ire, as well as Sebastian had not remembered either.


    As for Ms. Gelda, she was not red in the face and looked like she was going to cry. I suppose it was because her exnation about diets proved to be false.


    She bowed her head and apologized, but Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire were not angry with her.


    They just chuckled and told her to be careful in the future.


    Hah While Ms. Gelda had gotten carried away, a little, it was a great, satisfying dinner.


    Wuff.


    Zzzz


    Oh, Liza fell asleep. Well, she was already tired before dinner. So it cannot be helped


    Wou


    And so we decided to rest early tonight.


    As everyone was tired from the journey.


    It wasnt just Mr. Ekenhart, Ms. ire and Tilura. The servants would also be tired, and so it was best for them to rest.


    By the time I returned to my room, Liza was already sleeping on Leos back.


    Thank you, Leo. Oomph


    Wuff-wuff. Wou?


    I had Leo lie low so that I could pick up Liza.


    I was careful so as not to wake her. Leo barked with concern, but it was fine because she was light and small.


    I then put her on the bed and Leo seemed to rx.


    Ah, she was supposed to take a bath Well, I suppose I could ask Ms. Lyra tomorrow You too, Leo.


    Wuff!?


    Leo seemed rmed at this, but after walking around in the forest so much, there were patches of fur that were dirty.


    Her silvery fur was still beautiful, but she looked so much better after being thoroughly washed


    As she had swam in theke several times, she wasnt too dirty. But she would definitely need to be brushed to get some of that dirt and tangles out


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Liza decided what she would do Well, orcs are like this Oh. I see. Wuff! I told Liza about the orcs and that they were dangerous monsters that attacked humans. While Sebastian looked like he wanted to exin it, Im sure he would have plenty of other opportunitiester. LizaOctober 29, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Dinner portions were insufficient Mr. Takumi, sorry to disturb your rest. Dinner is ready, so pleasee down to the dining hall. But if you are too tired, we could bring it up to your room? Ah, no. I was just rxing a little. I will head down there immediately.February 17, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Things went smoothly this time Anne. Walk more normally. Ah, dont grab my arm like that! Ms. ire, I cannot go on While Tilura and Mr. Ekenhart seemed like a family on a hiking trip, Ms. ire and Ms. Anne were bickering. The reason was that Ms. Anne was exhaustedNovember 5, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 580

    Chapter 580


    Even Leo was tired<hr>


    Wuff


    Haha. Well, Liza would like it better if you had clean fur. So you should keep that in mind.


    Still, Leo didnt hate baths as much as before. We had talked about it, and I was careful to avoid doing things that she didnt like. So there was less resistance.


    Back when she was small, I had a hard time just picking her up in order to wash her


    I thought of such things as I left Leo and thefortably sleeping Liza, and went off to take a bath.


    Im back Leoyou look


    Wufuu


    Zzzmmm


    I finished my bath and returned to the room quietly so that I wouldnt wake up the others.


    I could hear that Leo and Liza were fast asleep.


    Liza was wrapped up in her nket and seemed happy. So that was finebut Leo got my attention.


    Usually, she was curled up or slept with head on her front legs, but now she was lying on her side with her limbs spread out.


    Well, I suppose she was usually on her guard a little, and this was how she was whenpletely rxed.


    Even if she was a powerful fenrir, being so active in the forest must have been tiring.


    Fen and Riruru would be fine, as they were used to it. But Leo used to be a small house dog.


    And so there were things she wasnt used to in regards to being a silver fenrir.


    So it was no wonder that she was tired.


    Thanks, Leo. Your presence alone is reassuring, and youre a big help. Once youre rested, we can y together again.


    I whispered quietly and petted Leo. And then I went to my own bed in order to sleep.


    Good night, Liza and Leo.


    I muttered and then drifted off to the world of dreams


    Are you awake, Mr. Takumi?


    Its okay, Tilura. You cane in.


    Yes, excuse me Is Liza still sleeping? Ah, good morning Leo and Mr. Takumi.


    Wuff.


    Good morning, Tilura. I think that she was really tired Well, she was probably having so much fun that she forgot she was tired. What about you, Tilura?


    I had woken up a little early, and was preparing for the day with Leo when I heard a knock and Tiluras voiceing from the other side of the door.


    She then entered quietly, and after seeing that Liza was asleep, greeted me and Leo.


    Liza must have been very tired, as she was still sleeping soundly. And so I asked Tilura how she was feeling.


    I had taken some herbs before going to bed, but Tilura had not.


    I am fine. Yesterday, I went to bed right after eating.


    Kids sure have a lot of energy. Still, you came here early. Did you want to see Leo and Liza?


    Wuff?


    I did want to see thembut alsoits about Rahle.


    What about Rahle?


    Will youe with me to go and see? Sebastian said that Rahle is somewhere in the garden. So I thought I would go and see But I would feel better if you and Leo were with me


    Apparently, Tilura was curious about how Rahle was doing.


    I see. Very well, we will go together then. Ah, Liza is


    I can stay here.


    Oh, Ms. Lyra?


    Good morning, Mr. Takumi and Leo. Thank you for your concern yesterday. I am not much better.


    Good morning. I am d to hear that youre better.


    Wou.


    While I wanted to go with Tilura, I also felt bad about leaving Liza alone.


    She would probably be fine, as she was now used to this house. But she might feel a little lonely.


    But as I was thinking about it, Ms. Lyra entered through the door that was still open.


    As I did not know she was there, it was a little surprising


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    I woke upfortably In any case, thank you. For looking after her. Im sorry that you had to stay upte yet again. Wuff. Not at all. This is my job. Besides, I do enjoy taking care of children. I thanked Ms. Lyra, and apologized for the trouble. LeoSeptember 26, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I decided to watch the kitchen I could understand why some might be suspicious of Liza. However, as Sebastian said, Leo would not miss something like that. And it was doubtful that Liza could sneak into the kitchen without being noticed. As for Liza not wanting to be away fromAugust 29, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    The Culprit Was Someone From The Slums I see Good Leo Um, Silver Fenrirs. I now understand why humans are no match for them. Indeed. Even well-trained guards like Nichs and Johanna were unable to move. It was the same with me I could barely move at all. Every stepAugust 17, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 581

    Chapter 581


    Rahle liked being on the roof<hr>


    Ms. Lyra smiled and greeted me.


    While it must have been tough, staying in the forest and cooking, I was d to see that she wasnt tired anymore.


    Please leave her to me. If she wakes up, I will help her get ready and take her to you.


    Thank you. Ahthats right.


    What is it?


    NoIts about Ms. Gelda


    I then exined to her what had happened during dinner.


    I see So that happened while I was resting Very well. I will deal with her as well. Something like that will not happen again.


    Ah, thats not what I meant. Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire were not angry either


    Lady Tilura is like that as well. It is difficult to be strict. And so I will just tease her while she looks embarrassed.


    But that might make her cry


    Its fine. I will do it slowly.


    Ahaha. I see. Slowly.


    And so I left Liza with Ms. Lyra, and then took Tilura and Leo and went to where Rahle was.


    Kii!


    Rahle! Were you able to rest yesterday?


    Kii! Kii!


    Hahaha. You seem well.


    Wuff, wuff.


    We had gone out to the back garden.


    Rahle saw us immediately and descended from up above.


    Apparently, it had been on the roof.


    Once Rahle was in front of her, Tilura, who had been hesitant at first, jumped forward cheerfully and hugged Rahle.


    Rahle gently wrapped her in its wings and squawked.


    Leo and I really did not need toe


    Rahle, were you alright being outside? Was it cold?


    Kii? Kii-kii!


    Wuff. Wuff-wuff.


    Hmm. I guess it really does like being outside.


    Tilura was a little worried about Rahle, and she touched its feathers while talking.


    After tilting its head once, Rahle told her that there was no problem.


    ording to Leo, it had been morefortable than the mountains.


    Well, the mansion was on tnd, and it would not be as cold as the mountains Well, I didnt actually know what those mountains were like.


    You seemed to be above the mansion. Were you flying?


    Kii. Kii-kii.


    Hmm. I see!


    Tilura seemed to enjoy talking to Rahle.


    I doubted she would hesitate to meet with Rahle in the future.


    Regardless, we then learned that Rahle liked to rest on top of the mansion.


    It was the tallest building in the area, and higher than any tree. Besides, unlike the tree branches, it would not break.


    While that was fine, was it alright for a monster of that size to stay up there?


    When I asked, apparently Rahle had a way to reduce its own weight.


    Ms. ire would be so jealous of that ability I suppose it was magic?


    In any case, there was nothing to get in Rahles way on the roof. It wasfortable and offered a good view.


    There wererger buildings in my old world, but the mansion was thergest building I had seen here I doubted there was a taller one.


    And so as Leo and I watched Tilura and Rahle talk happily, Ms. Lyra brought Liza out into the garden.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Dinner portions were insufficient Mr. Takumi, sorry to disturb your rest. Dinner is ready, so pleasee down to the dining hall. But if you are too tired, we could bring it up to your room? Ah, no. I was just rxing a little. I will head down there immediately.February 17, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    A bird flew in the sky In any case, its all finished now. So its time to prepare dinner Hmm? What is it, Leo? Wuffwuff? After the orcs had been cleaned up, and the only thing left to do was eat dinner, I noticed that Leo was looking up atJanuary 23, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Rahle had done well ...Leo? Wuff? Wuff-wuff! Good morning. There, there. What happened? I was standing where the servants had gathered, and so I could not see what was happening, as Leo and the fenrirs were blocking my view. Rahle was also spreading out his wings, so I could notFebruary 5, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 582

    Chapter 582


    I would not see the main house for some time<hr>


    Papa! Mama!


    Oh, Liza. So youre awake. Ms. Lyra. Thank you.


    Wou!


    Not at all. Liza searched for you two as soon as she woke up But I suppose she also got used to sleeping separately in the forest, and so she was able to prepare for the day right after.


    Good morning, Liza!


    Kii!


    Good morning, papa and mama! Ah, sister Tilura and Rahle are here too! Good morning!


    As soon as she saw me and Leo, Liza rushed towards us cheerfully.


    After having slept a long time, it seemed that she was no longer tired.


    Ah, Mr. Takumi. Its almost time You too, Lady Tilura.


    Breakfast, of course. Very well. Tilura, since breakfast is ready, lets go to the dining hall!


    Yes! See youter, Rahle!


    Kii!


    Bye!


    Wuff!


    As breakfast was ready, I called out to Tilura, who was stuck to Rahle.


    She quickly rushed towards us, but then waved at Rahle as if she intended toe back as soon as she was finished.


    Rahle also beat its wings and called in reply.


    As Rahle flew back up to the roof, Liza waved her hand and Leo lifted her front paw.


    As we made our way to the dining hall, I saw a butler and a cook as they carried food out into the garden.


    They had prepared breakfast for Rahle as well.


    Currently, they did not know what Rahles favorite foods were. Later, they would ask Tilura or Liza to find out. But for now, Sebastian had ordered them to cook some of the orc meat from the forest.


    Good morning, Ms. ire. AndMr. Ekenhart.


    Good morning.


    Good morning, sister. And father! Youre awake!


    Mr. Takumi, Tilura. And Leo and Liza. Stillis it that strange that I am awake?


    Wuff!


    I had not given him any sleeping herbsst night, and since we had just returned from the forest, I assumed that he would be tired.


    Even Tilura was surprised


    Nouhwellyes.


    Hahaha! Well, I suppose it is. I wasnt sure I would be able to get up this early either. In factit was really because of Sebastians nagging


    Your Grace. I understand that you might be tired after the journey, but they need you back at the house.


    While I didnt say it directly, Mr. Ekenhart seemed to have expected it, and so heughed it off.


    He was not the kind of person to care about such things.


    In any case, it seemed that the reason was not his own will, but that Sebastian had woken him up.


    Exactly. A lot of time has passed since I came here. And so it is time to return to the main house. There is much to prepare, and so I got up early this morning.


    I see. I got so used to having you herebut there is another house


    Yes, this is just a vi.


    There were times when Ipletely forgot about that fact.


    The main house I wonder what kind of ce it is It must be bigger than this house, with even more servants and soldiers But it was hard for someone like me to imagine it.


    Mr. Takumi. Are you interested in it? Hmm?


    WellI am curious about it


    Father, it will not do. Mr. Takumi is living here now. He cannot go over there. Or Ractos will not have any herbs. And there is the matter of the herb fields!


    Mmm That is true


    Mr. Ekenhart had asked the question as if he was thinking of something interesting.


    It seemed like he wished to take me there once, but Ms. ire put a stop to that.


    He probably wanted to see my expression of shock at the sight of the huge house.


    In any case, Ms. ire was right. I was the main provider of herbs for Ractos now, and I could not leave this ce for very long.


    The main house would be even farther than Range vige. So it would take days even if I rode on Leo.


    And considering the time I would spend there, it could be ten days for a round trip Since I had the herb fields to deal with, it was a little too early to go


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Iforted Tilura Well, it looks like they will arrive safely. Were back! Wuff! After watching Tilura and Rahle for some time, therge building finally came into view. Somehow, Tilura had managed to stay on this whole time. Perhaps Rahle had sensed her fear, as there were no moreFebruary 12, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Rahle liked being on the roof Ms. Lyra smiled and greeted me. While it must have been tough, staying in the forest and cooking, I was d to see that she wasnt tired anymore. Please leave her to me. If she wakes up, I will help her get ready andFebruary 21, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Rahle was sorry Tilura, are you alright!? Sister! Yes, Im fine! Shortly after, the carriage carrying the others arrived as well. Ms. ire immediately jumped out and rushed to Tilura. As for Mr. Ekenharthe was looking this way, but perhaps he didnt want to show his distress, as he didFebruary 13, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 583

    Chapter 583


    I decided to make more herbs<hr>


    The breakfast looks normal.


    Indeed. Last nights dinner really was just because of our sudden return.


    Unlike yesterdays dinner, there was a lot of food served for breakfast.


    And so both Mr. Ekenhart and Leo were satisfied.


    Still, it was impressive that both of them could eat so much this early in the morning Though I wondered that, I also ate quite a lot.


    Breakfast is what gives you strength for the day But the real reason was that Ms. Helenas food was that delicious.


    Once we were about half-way through breakfast, Ms. Anne got up and joined us.


    Unlike the others, she seemed to still be tired. And though she had started to curl her hair again, they were not like they were before.


    It was like you could tell how much energy she had by their current state.


    Its because you didnt eat before going to bed, Anne. Even if youre tired, you must eat a proper meal.


    You say that, but


    Indeed, you needed some nutrition. Sleep alone would not be enough


    There had been times when I was so tired after work, that I would sleep without eating, and still be exhausted the next morning


    Now, Mr. Takumi. About today It seems like Ractos is running out of herbs.


    Yes, Ms. Gelda told me about it yesterday. And so I will start with that today.


    Well, I suppose I will watch Mr. Takumi as he makes the herbs then


    No, Your Grace. As I said earlier, you are needed at the main house as soon as possible.


    Thats right, father. I also have a lot of work to do. You can watch Mr. Takumi some other time.


    After we finished eating and rxed with some tea, Sebastian asked me about today.


    Apparently, Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire wanted to watch me use Weed Cultivation, but both had a lot of work to do.


    I was not sure why anyone would want to watch that


    And I will go and see Rahle!


    Tilura Well, yes. Normally I would tell you to study, but I suppose it is fine for today. After all, Rahle is not used to being here yet.


    Yes!


    And I shall sleep


    Anneliese, that will not do at all. You are leaving with me today. So you must prepare!


    Oh Very well.


    Tilura was able to escape her studies by using Rahle as an excuse.


    Of course, there were a lot of things to confirm with Rahle, and so it made sense to prioritize that.


    As Ms. Anne was not recovered, she wanted to return to her room and rest, but Mr. Ekenhart put an end to that hope.


    Well, it was a long journey, so she would need to prepare for it.


    Leo and Liza had nothing to do, so they could go out into the garden with me


    But they would likely get bored, so maybe they should y with Rahle and Tilura.


    Though, Leo would probably want to continue with Sherrys training.


    Mr. Takumi. After you are finished with your work, there is something I would like to discuss with you about the herb fields.


    Is that so?


    Yes. Since there were not enough herbs, they started picking the ones in the test field. Also, there are other matters that must be decided.


    Well, I did tell them that they could use those herbs if they ran out. But very well. I will make more for the field as well. And yet, I am sure there is much to decide on


    Indeed. Such as the hiring of workers.


    I understand. Lets talk after I finish then.


    Yes, thank you.


    Things like the location of the field and the house had already been decided. But as for the workers to hire, the herbs and how they would be managed There are a lot of things that are still up in the air.


    Rahle, thats amazing!


    Kii!


    Wougrau!


    Ah, mama! Woah, amazing!


    Haha, I see youre all having fun.


    I muttered as I went out into the garden to see Rahle ying with Tilura, and Leo and Liza.


    Rahle dove down from the sky and then went back up right before hitting the ground. It was what birds often did when catching prey on the ground or in the water.


    Upon seeing this, Leo must have felt something.probably due to Tilura praising Rahle And so while carrying Liza, she jumped high into the air.


    Liza cheered. And while it was impressive how careful Leo was so that she didnt fall off I didnt know why an eagle and wolf had topete in the first ce.


    They were just so different But regardless, Tilura and Liza seemed to be having fun. So it was fine, as long as they did nothing dangerous.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Tilura woke upte While its nice during the day and night, the morning air is pleasant as well, isnt it? Yes. Now that I think about it, grandfather used to say Hmm? That you need the morning light to live. And so he always got up early and sleptOctober 31, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I Thanked the Head Cook for Making Dinner I talked with Ms. ire and Tilura amidst a harmonious atmosphere, when the doors to the dining hall opened and the food was carried in on a wagon. Tonights dinner was a saut meat with sauce, a sd with a much thickerJanuary 13, 2022


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I would not see the main house for some time Papa! Mama! Oh, Liza. So youre awake. Ms. Lyra. Thank you. Wou! Not at all. Liza searched for you two as soon as she woke up But I suppose she also got used to sleeping separately in the forest, andFebruary 22, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 584

    Chapter 584


    Ms. Lyra helped as well<hr>


    In any case, I better make the herbs


    I left the children to their y, and focused on making herbs.


    First, I had to make some for Ractos.


    UhI guess they will want Ramogi the most. Also


    Before going out into the garden, Sebastian had given me a list of herbs to make.


    And Ramogi was at the top of the list.


    Well, it could be made into medicine, which you could store. And so there were probably people who wanted to have some in stock, in case they got sick again.


    I had heard when he gave me the list, that the price for Ramogi had already returned to normal now.


    In any case, I followed the list and started to use Weed Cultivation.


    I guess that should do it?


    It wasnt necessarily more than I would usually make in a day, but I had made as much that was required.


    Still, it was more than what I usually sent to Ractos. Apparently, this was because more people had started to buy it from nearby towns and viges.


    It was not a bad thing that it sold well.


    I could have made more, but I didnt because I nned to work again tomorrow anyway.


    Besides, I was also going to make some herbs for the test field as well.


    I wanted to make herbs in Range vige as soon as possible, so that there would be enough to go around to everyone who needed them.


    Now, since I made quite a lot, it will take some time to pick all of them


    I shall help you, Mr. Takumi.


    Master, sorry that I could not greet you yesterday. I am d that you have returned safely! Allow me to help!


    Hmm? Ms. Lyra and Milina And Ms. Gelda?


    Yes. We havee to help you.


    You do not have to do it all yourself. You only need to ask me, you know?


    Mr. Takumi. Sorry about yesterday Please allow me to help.


    As there were a lot of herbshaving to pick all of them and change their state would be time consuming.


    But when I looked to the side, I saw the others ying happily, and so I did not want to bother them. But just as I was thinking about doing it myself, I heard Ms. Lyras voice as she came out of the mansion.


    Milina and Ms. Gelda were right behing her.


    Unlike when I was in Japan, there were actually people who would help me here I didnt need to work alone. I was quite grateful for that.


    Master, I picked them!


    Here, Mr. Takumi.


    Yes, thank you. Alright, Ms. Lyra?


    Yes, I received them.


    I took the herbs and made them into medicine.


    And then Ms. Lyra separated them by type and wrapped them up in paper so they could be sold in the store.


    Ms. Lyra had even brought out a table so that it would be easier to work.


    Kyaukyau


    Oh? What is it, Sherry?


    Kyuu Hahahah!


    Ah, I see. Im not really sure what you said, but I think youre tired?


    Kyau


    As I continued to change the herbs that were picked, Sherry walked up towards my feet.


    And when I called to her, she looked up and sat down while panting with her tongue out.


    I didnt understand what Sherry was saying, but her behavior was simr to Leo when she was a maltese, so I had an idea.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    I told Mr. Haines about Weed Cultivation Indeed, it is hard to imagine someone growing herbs in great quantities. Growing them at all is almost unheard of in this country. Most people gather what is found in nature. Mr. Takumi? Sebastian? It will be fine. As Mr. Haines is theOctober 10, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I Searched For Herbs You will!? Thank you so much. If you are with me, Mr. Takumi, then I wont be scared even if were attacked by orcs again! Hahaha. Well, I didnt do anything! But I think it must be because of your power that Leo is with you.November 25, 2021


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Sebastian exined it excitedly Well, the demonstration cer. For now, we should talk about the herb fields. Mr. Haines, I assume you have already decided to give your permission? ...Yes. We would dly wee Mr. Takumi and Leo to the vige. And we have no reason to object.October 12, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 585

    Chapter 585


    Sherry was tired from running<hr>


    As Sherry had been jogging around the garden, it was not surprising that she was tired.


    Unlike the time before we went to the forest, Leo was not chasing her. So she ran at a slower pace, but for a longer time.


    Leo might get mad if she sees you.


    Kyu


    Ah, so thats why you came to me


    Leo was currently jumping up as if to try and catch Rahle. And so she had not noticed that Sherry was here yet.


    If she really wanted to, she could probably catch Rahle, but she was holding back because they were just ying, and Liza and Tilura were on her back


    Well, as long as Sherry was me, Leo would probably not be too harsh.


    In spite of her age, Sherry could be quite calcting.


    Perhaps she was actually quite smart for a fenrir.


    Here you go, Sherry.


    Kyau!


    Sherry, dont drink so quickly Oh, she isnt listening. Thank you, Ms. Lyra.


    Not at all. And Mr. Takumi, perhaps you should rest soon?


    Hmm, I suppose


    Master, is it time to rest?


    Yes, well rest then.


    Certainly. I will bring the tea then.


    As I was talking with Sherry, Ms. Lyra came and gave her a bowl of water.


    Apparently, she had seen how tired Sherry was.


    I thanked Ms. Lyra, and she then suggested that I should rest as well.


    I was not that tired, but Milina and Ms. Gelda leapt up at the mention of taking a break.


    Milina had to squat in order to pick the herbs, so she was probably more tired than me.


    They really could have rested without worrying about me It reminded me of my time in Japan, where it was difficult to rest until your superiors rested.


    Well, my direct superior had rested most of the time, while forcing all of the work on subordinates


    Wuff? Wou!


    Kyau!? Kyu


    Oh? Haha Leo, surely its fine if she rests a little. She ran quite a lot, didnt she?


    Wuff Wuff. Wuff!


    Kyau!


    As I drank the tea that Ms. Lyra poured, Leo approached us.


    And after looking at Sherry with a puzzled expression, she barked angrily.


    Since I felt a little bad for her, I told Leo to let her rest. And then Leo barked at Sherry.


    Fine. But youll run after you rest! She seemed to say.


    Well, it was an effective way of toughening Sherry up.


    Here you go, Lady Tilura. And Liza.


    Thank you, Lyra!


    Thank you, sister Lyra. Hehe. Same as papa!


    And for you, good Leo


    Wuff!


    Thank you, Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda.


    As I was watching Leo and Sherry, Ms. Lyra quickly poured some tea for Tilura and Liza.


    And then Ms. Gelda brought a bucket of milk for Leo, and also some water for Rahle.


    Papa. Did you make that?


    Mmm, thats right. But Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda and Milina helped me.


    Master, I may have helped a little, but you still made them.


    That is true, but it would have taken me a lot longer if I was alone. There is so much, and still some left


    Papa, sister Lyra, sister Gelda and sister Milina are all amazing!


    Liza must have been thirsty after ying, as she drank her tea quickly. And then she looked at the wrapped up medicine on the table.


    She then praised everyone who had made it.


    Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda watched with smilesLeo as well.


    Wait, Leo already finished all of that milk? I suppose she was very thirsty, but still


    Liza had helped us before, but I suppose she was surprised that it was finished so quickly.


    In any case, amidst this peaceful atmosphere, we rested for some time.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Rahle had done well ...Leo? Wuff? Wuff-wuff! Good morning. There, there. What happened? I was standing where the servants had gathered, and so I could not see what was happening, as Leo and the fenrirs were blocking my view. Rahle was also spreading out his wings, so I could notFebruary 5, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We started on our journey out of the forest After that, Fen and Riruru turned towards us and along with Leo and Sherry, howled. I suppose it was the way that fenrirs said farewell. And when they were finished, they bowed once to Leo, and then rushed into the forestFebruary 8, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    It was time to say goodbye to Fen and Riruru Much like with the fenrirs, Liza was hesitant at first. But after Tilura dragged her towards Rahle and made her touch the feathers, she seemed very impressed by them. However, this made Leo a little jealous, and so I pettedFebruary 6, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 586

    Chapter 586


    The Gift really was an ability I didnt understand<hr>


    Papa. Why are you able to make herbs so easily? Uhhgrandpa said that nts only grow when you wait a long time.


    nts and animals are like that But as I told you before, it is because of the Gift.


    I see


    I suppose she had forgotten about how I exined it before.


    Back then, she was still getting used to living here.


    Still, it really is a strange ability. After all, you can make nts grow from nothing. Well, its impressive that you can use such a power, master.


    Theres nothing impressive about me at all


    It was just an ability I was given out of nowhere. It did not even feel like mine.


    But it really was a strange power, as it ignored thews of nature.


    Though, it wasnt like I could make any type of nt. And I also fainted when I used too much power.


    That being said, there were a few nts I made myself. And since I was able to make herbs that I thought of, if I wanted to, there was so much more that I could do with this ability.


    Besides, like Ms. Isabelle saidI could even grow them on people.


    Of course, that method was dangerous. And I never wanted to do it again.


    Besides, no one would want to eat nts that grew from a living creatures body.


    Hey, Leo. Do you know anything about Weed Cultivation?


    Wuff Wuff? Wuff.


    You dont. Well, thats fine. Its what I expected.


    I asked her just in case. As Leo had be much more intelligent after she turned into a Silver Fenrir.


    However, Leo shook her head.


    She seemed apologetic, but I assured her that it was not a bad thing.


    If Sebastian were here, he might be able to exin something Well, I had already talked to him about it, and he did not know the details.


    There were not many people who had a Gift, and so not much was known.


    My ability was to grow nts, and it was unknown what my limits were. Perhaps it wasnt as effective as other Gifts Well, it was useful to me now. And because of it, my life was quite stable in this world.


    And so even if there was a lot that I didnt know about it, I would not fear it.


    Like this, I thought about such questions as I rested for around half an hour.


    Ah, Sebastian. You are here.


    After our break, Leo and the others returned to their y, and so Milina and I finished turning the herbs into medicine.


    I also made some extra herbs for research purposes.


    While doing so, I checked the fields, and it was just as Sebastian said before. Due to the sudden growth, nutrients were absorbed from the soil, and the ground looked like a desert. And so I nted the herbs in a different location.


    The barren ground would probably have to have soil and fertilizer mixed into it before it could be used again I didnt know much about such things, so I would have to speak to a farmer.


    I did not want the same thing to happen in Range vige, so there was much to consider.


    In any case, once I was finished, I left the rest to Milina and went over to where Sebastian was.


    I returned to the mansion and asked the servants where Sebastian was.


    Mr. Takumi. Are you finished already?


    Yes. I have made all of the ordered herbs. And I grew some extra herbs for the research.


    You must be tired then. Did you take a break?


    I rested with Ms. Lyra and the others. I am fine.


    Hoho. I suppose you are getting quite close to her then. You do get busy, Mr. Takumi


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    I asked questions about the people Id be hiring I see So thats what it is. Mmm. Currently, this is only being disclosed to be people rted to this house. And so you must not tell anyone else without Mr. Takumis permission. I understand. Indeed, what I heard just nowAugust 3, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I Gave Them the Presents Wow! Its Leo! Thank you, Mr. Takumi! Tilura shouted as she epted the present. She was smiling as she looked at the wolf on it Good, so she did like it. AndMs. ire. Here. While I felt quite nervous towards her, I handed her theJanuary 18, 2022


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I told Mr. Haines about Weed Cultivation Indeed, it is hard to imagine someone growing herbs in great quantities. Growing them at all is almost unheard of in this country. Most people gather what is found in nature. Mr. Takumi? Sebastian? It will be fine. As Mr. Haines is theOctober 10, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 587

    Chapter 587


    We talked about the management of the herb fields<hr>


    Hoho. Well, you might as well have fun while you are young. When His Grace was young, he


    Its not like that Anyway, dont you have something to tell me?


    Ah, that is right.


    Hah Sebastian could be annoying when he wasnt talking about work.


    Well then. I wish to talk to you about the herb field in Range vige. But first


    Hmm? What is it?


    Well, it involves Lady ire. Excuse me, but could you go and call her?


    Certainly.


    Sebastian was about to start talking, but then he paused.


    Apparently, he needed to talk to Ms. ire as well, and so he asked a butler who was in the room to go and call her.


    Ms. ire, too?


    Yes. Of course, I could tell you first But you are partners, are you not?


    Ah, thats right. Indeed, it would be best for you to tell her as well.


    It had been me who had brought it up.


    Before that, Ms. ire had slipped her name into the list of possible employees.


    Apparently, they did not mind if it was like that on paper. However, it would sound better if it were joint management For both me and their house.


    And so I sat down on a chair and waited for Ms. ire to arrive.


    While it only took about ten seconds, it was rather painful, as I had to avoid any conversations that would give Sebastian an opportunity to make fun of me


    Well then. Let us speak about the management of the herb fields.


    Yes.


    The three of us sat around the table as if for a meeting.


    Ms. ire and I nodded at Sebastian.


    First of all The house that Mr. Takumi will live in.


    But I thought we already decided on that matter?


    The house that Leo and I would live in.


    I did not want it to be too big. But it had to berge enough for Leo to move freely in as well.


    Mr. Ekenhart had wanted to build a great mansion, and I had to stop him.


    No, it is very important. After all, Lady ire will be staying there as well. And then there are the servants.


    Besidesyour employees might have to live there as well. Mr. Haines did say there were some empty houses in the vige. But I do not think it will be enough for everyone


    Now that you mention itI suppose that is true I see. I have to think about where the employees will live as well.


    Yes. For instance, if you start something in Ractos, and you hire people, there is no need to think about their housing. But with Range vige, they will have to move from somewhere else.


    We could not build new houses for all of them, and there were only so many empty houses in Range vige.


    And so it might be necessaryeven if just temporarily, to have them live with us, simr to the servants.


    Mr. Takumi and I, and Leo and Liza. Sherry can be in the same room as me. And then there just needs to be space for the servants and employees.


    Yes. And as I said before, Mr. Takumi should have a butler. He cannot do everything by himself. And a butler would be able to take care of the house and finances. Of course, it would have to be someone who is trustworthy.


    Thats true I have limits to how much I can do. And I cannot rely on Ms. ire for everything


    But I would not mind if you relied on me like that


    Lady ire, do not say such things. Even with your help, it will be too much work for two people.


    Wellyou are right.


    Before I came to this world, I had not been the kind of person to rely on others. If I was still like that, I would have tried to do everything myself until I copsed and failed.


    Well, it was also because there was no one who I could rely on if I wanted to. Regardless, I did not want to be like that now.


    Of course, I would still do what I could.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    There was no time for Ms. ire to learn household chores Even if Ms. ire was going to Range vige with me, as Sebastian had said, she would have to return to the mansion quite regrly. And so we had to consider what would be efficient Clearly there was noOctober 8, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Sebastian was Awake Hahaha. Yes, this is how I usually talk, Mr. Takumi. However, Mr. Sebastian always rebukes me, saying I should be more careful when serving a duke. I see And so youre letting it go now that Sebastian isnt here Yes, yes. Something like that. Phillip said withMarch 14, 2022


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    The herbs were surprisingly effective ...! The moment that the herb touched the fenrir, it unleashed a faint light, and the wounds began to close as if time was being rewound. And once the light faded away, so did the herb that was in my hand. Even the fenrirs brokenMarch 30, 2022


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 588

    Chapter 588


    Building materials were important<hr>


    I think you should have three to four butlers. By giving them different roles, it will be more efficient and easier to manage.


    I had been thinking of just one or two, but. If Sebastian said that more were necessary, then I suppose he was right.


    There had to be someone to manage the house, the fields, finances and employees Even with me and Ms. ire, that was a lot of work.


    I did not want to use people like at a ckpany


    Thankfully, I was not worried about whether or not we would make enough profits.


    Mr. Takumi. What is it? You are nodding strangely


    Ah, uh I was just thinking about my past Haha


    Ms. ire was looking at me with a puzzled expression, and so Iughed it off.


    Aside from the butlersthere will need to be a few servants as well. And His Grace also said to send a number of guards. We will have to ask Range vige about how many houses they can spare But for now, there should be at least ten employees hired I think that at the very least, the house should berge enough to amodate forty to fifty people.


    That many?


    I understood that we needed servants, especially to help Ms. ire.


    And the guards, to keep her and also the vige safe.


    Butit felt like the numbers were getting toorge.


    I suppose they wanted it to berger, in case of emergencies. But wasnt this going too far?


    It will just end up being a great mansion after all then.


    I think that it will be thirty people at the very least. And both I and His Grace are certain that this business will go well.


    I think so too.


    Indeed. And if it goes well, then you will have the optionof expanding. Of course, Mr. Takumi and Lady ire will have to decide when the timees. But if you do expand, then that means hiring more people. So things will go more smoothly if you have arge house. After all, it will take time to build more.


    I supposeyou are right.


    So, we will make itrge enough to amodate everyone Now, there is the matter of the materials.


    Materials?


    Yes. If it is made of stone, like this house, then it will be a very durable house. However, it will also take a lot more time.


    Made of stone A lot of the mansion was made of marble, so you would need a great amount for arge house.


    The stone would need to be transported, and it would also be very expensive.


    On the other hand, if we use wood, which is used in most ordinary houses, it will shorten the building time and the cost. Thankfully, Ractos and the surrounding area has no shortage of wood. Of course, it will not be as durable. Though, wooden houses can be reinforced


    Well, I think it should be more than enough.


    I had seen a lot of wooden houses in Ractos.


    It would take less time and since there were a lot of trees here, it would be cheaper.


    But then again


    Leo might break it.


    While I am sure good Leo is holding back here, we do not know to what degree


    Yes. Especially since Liza will be there with her.


    Ah, yes. Liza and Leo do y together a lot.


    Once we were in Range vige, they would probably y outside most of the time. But there was no guarantee that Leo wouldnt break something.


    Well, it showed how abnormal this house was, since Leo, who wasrger than a horse, could move around so freely in it


    Part of that was because it was made durable with stone.


    You could not expect the same thing from wood materials.


    While I am not saying that Lady Liza and good Leo will be going on wild and destructive rampages in the houseI do think that there could be idents, even if they are careful.


    Indeed. Especially if it gets older one day.


    Liza was a good child who obeyed what she was told.


    However, they could still break something by ident, even if they didnt mean to.


    Besides, even if it was durable at first, it would grow old eventually. Perhaps Leo would identally step through the floor.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    We talked about the management of the herb fields Hoho. Well, you might as well have fun while you are young. When His Grace was young, he Its not like that Anyway, dont you have something to tell me? Ah, that is right. Hah Sebastian could be annoying when heFebruary 28, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I would be able to take the katana with me to the forest You will also have to hire a butler. But Lady ire should help you with that, so you do not need to worry. But werent we talking about managing it together? That has not been decided yet,August 27, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We arrived at the forest ...Thank you, Mr. Takumi. Hmm? What is it? You let me ride on Leo because I was too nervous, right? Hmm. Well, while youve ridden on Leo in the garden, you never rode on her while she was running outside. And so I just thoughtNovember 3, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 589

    Chapter 589


    We would use both of the materials<hr>


    And so I have a suggestion. Why not use both stone and wood materials?


    Both?


    Yes. First, have the rooms that you and Leo and Lady ire will live in made of stone. And the other rooms can be made of wood. While it will take longer than if it was made entirely of wood, it will be shorter than doing everything with stone.


    I see


    So keep the parts that Leo would be in made of stone for durability.


    The rooms of servants, etcetera, could be built with stone.


    While I dont mind it myself, what if some of the other people haveints about being given rooms made of wood?


    I doubt that will be a problem. Most people already live in wooden houses anyway. Besides, surely they will notin to someone who owns a Silver Fenrir, or Lady ire.


    It soundslike wielding ones authority. Still, even if they lived in Range vige, the houses would be made of wood. So it should be fine.


    That was true. And in this world, there were nobles and a ss system, so most people should understand it.


    Indeed Well, if there will be no problems with it, then that is how we should build the house. After all, it will be a great lot of trouble if Leo breaks something.


    Certainly. I have already made some arrangements, so that things will go smoothly, regardless of your decision. Securing of the materials, that is. The wood should be gathered quickly, and the stone wont take too long either.


    Is that so? Thank you.


    You could always rely on Sebastian.


    I suppose it was an ability that was necessary for butlers. Being able to predict things and move ahead


    I would never be able to do that. Thankfully, I had no intention of bing a butler.


    In any case, that matter was decided, and so the materials would be sent to Range vige.


    Would they draw the ns based on how many people were going to live in it? I wondered, but apparently, it was not the case.


    Instead of creating precise ns, you would just give a generalyout for how you wanted the rooms as they built.


    There was too muchnd to run out of space, and so the idea was that if the house was too small, you could just expand itter.


    Well then, Mr. Takumi. There is your role, and Lady ires.


    Our roles?


    I am sure that you will both be supporting each other, but you will not be doing the same thing all of the time. For instance, Mr. Takumi might focus on creating herbs and medicine. While Lady ire will be in charge of shipping them to other viges and towns where they will be sold Of course, Lady ire will not be going directly, but managing it


    Now that he mentioned it, it would be much more efficient if we both had our own roles.


    Yes It will probably be easier for me to talk to the people in these territories. Besides, If Mr. Takumi goes out and negotiates, he will have to take Leo


    That will surely intimidate people. Well, there may be times when that will be necessary. But it will have a negative impact on Mr. Takumis reputation.


    Ah Haha. Thats true. Leo is so big, after all.


    Ms. ire nodded and agreed.


    I did not want to be separated from Leo if possible.


    It was one thing if it was like that time in Range vige, where I had no choice but to send Leo away, but I didnt want to do it without good reason.


    Now that I thought about it, it was the same with Liza A beastkin child riding on a Silver Fenrir That would not improve most situations


    Leo was just that big.


    And Silver Fenrirs were known for being the strongest monsters.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Building materials were important I think you should have three to four butlers. By giving them different roles, it will be more efficient and easier to manage. I had been thinking of just one or two, but. If Sebastian said that more were necessary, then I suppose he was right.February 29, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We Arrived in the town of Ractos Mr. Takumi, why do you look so serious? No...I was just thinking about what these Gifts are. What they are Mr. Takumi, while it is said that Gifts are something that give various abilities, there are not many people who have them. AndDecember 31, 2021


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    The Reason that Tilura was Holding onto Leo in the Morning Leo. Are you saying that I should ride on you? Wou! Leo nodded to me. Upon seeing this, Ms. ire turned to Leo. Good Leo, Im terribly sorry, but could you not wait at the mansion for our returnDecember 27, 2021


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 590

    Chapter 590


    Ms. ire and I would have separate roles<hr>


    Mr. Takumi should be the one responsible for managing the herb fields, as well as growing them. Of course, you will have to look over the field and the employees that are hired


    Yes, that is fine.


    Basically, I would be working behind the scenes.


    Well, even if Leo wasnt with me, it would be difficult to suddenly be expected to be able to negotiate with people.


    I had some experience with that kind of work in my previous world, but things were different here, and there was so much that I didnt know.


    But Ms. ire was the famous daughter of a duke, and knew much more about the industry.


    So Sebastians suggestion made sense.


    It was a good thing that I had insisted the Ms. ire would be a manager with me instead of an employee.


    As for the people to be hired, some will have to apany Lady ire. So we will have to hire people who we can help with the transportation. While Mr. Takumi, you will choose the people who will help you in the fields.


    Yes So my role is to deliver the herbs and medicine to other towns and viges. Aside from stores that our family owns, we will have to find other ces that will buy from us.


    Indeed. Perhaps we should consult Mr. Kalis about that.


    Mr. Kalis was currently in charge of one of their stores.


    We didnt have to worry about those ces, but other stores would require some negotiating. And much would have to be discussed in terms of regr deliveries etcetera.


    Yes, I shall go to Ractos soon and speak with him.


    Would therebe anyone that I could consult?


    While Ms. ire could always consult Mr. Kalis and ask for advice on the selling of the herbs, what about me?


    It would be nice if there was someone for me to rely on


    Mr. Takumi Well, it will have to be me and the butlers for now. After all, what you are trying to do is without precedent. And so I doubt there are many people who could give you good advice.


    I suppose


    Hmm I really would have liked to have been able to rely on someone.


    It wasnt that Sebastian was useless or anything. If anything, I relied on him quite a lot.


    However, I wanted to talk to someone who specialized in that field.


    Well, apparently, Weed Cultivation was a rare ability. So it could not be helped.


    As for unprecedented, I suppose he was talking about using the Gift for mass productionbut it sounded like an exaggeration.


    Uhh, but since I am growing the herbs inrge fields, surely there is someone I can talk to in regards to farming?


    Yes, while I do have some knowledge on such things, I am no expert. However, there are people with such experience within that list that I gave you before. Of course, we will continue to be hiring other people. Perhaps you will find someone there


    I see. So my consultant has to be hired then.


    While Im sure you wouldnt do such a thing, you cannot be too demanding, just because you are an employer.


    Yes, I understand that very well.


    Superiors who asked too much from their subordinates I experienced too much of that already.


    I was a little anxious about hiring people, but at least I knew how not to be a terrible boss.


    In a way, that previous experience shoulde in handy.


    Well, it wasnt exactly the same kind of situation, so I couldnt be too sure. However, I would be careful so that Im not the type of person they would hate.


    Mr. Takumi will surely be fine. After all, both Milina and Nick are very fond of him.


    Indeed. I can see by the way he treats the servants as well. He will not force any impossible tasks onto them.


    HahaI will do my best.


    Milina seemed to take to me just because I said something obvious. As for Nick, he likes me because I was the only one to give him a job.


    As for the servants, I was not really used to dealing with them. In spite of being the kind of person that found it difficult to say no to others, I didnt like to ask other people for help.


    Mr. Ekenhart, arent you busy?


    No, it is fine. While I do have some work, I feel sluggish if I dont move around like this Hah!


    Ah


    See? You better move too, or you wont get stronger, Mr. Takumi.


    Yes.


    I will work hard too! So Rahle wont be disappointed!


    After speaking with Sebastian and Ms. ire, and eating lunch, it was time for sword training


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    We talked about the management of the herb fields Hoho. Well, you might as well have fun while you are young. When His Grace was young, he Its not like that Anyway, dont you have something to tell me? Ah, that is right. Hah Sebastian could be annoying when heFebruary 28, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    There was no time for Ms. ire to learn household chores Even if Ms. ire was going to Range vige with me, as Sebastian had said, she would have to return to the mansion quite regrly. And so we had to consider what would be efficient Clearly there was noOctober 8, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Building materials were important I think you should have three to four butlers. By giving them different roles, it will be more efficient and easier to manage. I had been thinking of just one or two, but. If Sebastian said that more were necessary, then I suppose he was right.February 29, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 591

    Chapter 591


    Mr. Ekenhart wanted to move his body<hr>


    Tilura brought her sword and started to train with me, but For some reason, Mr. Ekenhart was with us.


    Apparently, he could not rx unless he was active, and his body would start to get slow.


    It sounded more like an excuse.


    After all, that would not happen in just one or two days.


    In any case, I decided to focus on my own training.


    Now that she had Rahle, Tilura was even more determined than usual. Even though she had aplished her goal of acquiring a familiar.


    Well, I suppose it was a good thing that she became stronger.


    Hmm. Mr. Takumi. Tilura.


    Yes?


    What is it?


    After swinging his sword for a short while, he seemed to be satisfied. And so Mr. Ekenhart watched us for some time before calling to us.


    And so we stopped and turned towards him.


    I will not be able to instruct you directly once I leave. And so you should have Phillip teach you.


    Phillip?


    Mmm. He is the head guard of this mansion. Nichs is more skilled with the sword, but He can use many different weapons. And since he is more flexible, he will be a good teacher for you two. Though, I expect that you will both train diligently regardless.


    So Phillip was able to use all kinds of weapons I had seen him with a spear before. But I didnt realize that he was that versatile.


    Judging by what I had seen of Nichs, he was indeed very skilled with the sword.


    But I suppose that Phillip was able to see things from different perspectives, and was a better fit to teach others.


    After all, when we had fought as a pair, he was able to match me and fight in a flexible manner.


    I suppose that showed how harsh Mr. Ekenharts training had been.


    Well, I do feel a little anxious about leaving Tilrua in his care He can be rather thoughtless. However, I suppose Mr. Takumi can keep things from getting too extreme.


    Haha, yes. Besides, Im sure he wouldnt go that far.


    Well, I will be counting on you then, Mr. Takumi.


    Uh Very well.


    Though, now that I thought about it, I had the whole matter of the herb fields.


    And so I would probably now be training with Tilura for a very long time.


    Well, Mr. Ekenhart surely knew that.


    In any case, it is time to really begin the days training. Leo is


    She is making Sherry run again.


    And Rahle is flying!


    Mr. Ekenhart changed the subject and started to look for Leo so that we could train.


    But Leo was currently running in a circle in the garden again. She was behind Sherry and chasing after her I felt a little bad for Sherry.


    As for Rahle, it was several meters above Leo, and flying up in the air, looking very rxed and content.


    Rahle was a bird, and would like flying


    Well, it would be difficult to run on the ground with Leo and Sherry, when you had a body like that


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    It was Tiluras Turn We chuckled and then I looked towards the river to see how Liza was doing. She and Ms. Lyra were happy that I had defeated the orc. She showed no signs of being overwhelmed. Well, they were quite far away, so it wouldnt have had asNovember 17, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I was asked about the fight with the orcs Well then, I was thinking about watching you train If you could start now. Sorry. I know youre already busy with the slums, and Ive gone and increased your workload. Hoho. It is fine. Besides, work that helps to improve theOctober 18, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Katana Training Hmm, you think so? But I was moving rather slowly Your Grace, I think you must teach them the basics of the katana first. Perhaps they do not even understand the difference. Mr. Ekenhart was puzzled at our reaction. And so Sebastian exined it to him, while TiluraJuly 26, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 592

    Chapter 592


    We talked over dinner<hr>


    In order to let Sherry rest, I called Leo over to where we were, and we started training.


    It was the same as before, where we tried to hit Leo with our swords.


    After the orc fights, Tilura and I were feeling more confident, but we still could not hit Leo at all.


    I expected it, but she was so fast that it seemed impossible.


    The fact that Leo was holding back just made it even worse I would do it one day!


    Even though I thought this, Tilura and I petted Leo when we were done.


    Damn itshe really enjoyed that


    As for Mr. Ekenhart, he was pulled away by Sebastian and the butlers.


    I suppose he really did not have time for this.


    Now, it can be while you eat dinner, but please listen to me.


    After training, I sat down to dinner along with Leo, Sherry and Tilura, who had a great appetite. It was then that Mr. Ekenhart wiped his mouth and addressed all of us.


    I will be leaving this house the day after tomorrow. In the meantime, I will send word to Ractos and the surrounding viges.


    Do you mean about the fenrirs?


    Mmm. It was very important that we were able to talk to the fenrirs in the forest. And while I will not defend anyone who ignores our advice and goes to the forest in order to challenge the fenrirs, it should be enough to tell the people that they are not hostile. Ideally, they would not purposely seek out any fenrirs, and run if they do encounter them.


    It was one of the things we had asked Fen and Riruru.


    To not attack humans to let them run away.


    The fenrirs never meant to attack humans who minded their own business anyway, and so they readily agreed..


    Perhaps it was also because Leo was there.


    Obviously, we told them they did not need to show mercy to reckless humans that attacked them.


    Our intention wasnt that the fenrirs should not defend themselves.


    There is Sherry as well. And so I would very much like to avoid any persecution of the fenrirs by selfish humans.


    Kyau.


    Mmm. Well, if they went against arge pack of fenrirs, then the damage to the humans would be great. That is something to avoid as well.


    Well, if the humans try to go to the forest to exterminate the fenrirs, I will take Leo and persuade them against it.


    I think you mean threaten However, when the timees, I will likely have to rely on you two.


    Wuff? Wou!


    Ms. ire must have been thinking the same thing as me, as she started to gently pet Sherry, who was eating.


    And while Mr. Ekenhart seemed to flinch a little at the idea of using Leo in such a way, he also nodded in agreement.


    Well, we will send out the notices and then wait and see. But aside from that When returning to the mansion, I think that I will stop by at Range vige.


    You will?


    Yes. There are things that I cannot know unless I see it in person. Besides, if my ire is going to stay there, then I should make an official visit.


    Your Grace, is that really proper?


    Well, who knows about that? I dont really care about what other nobles might do. But I govern thesends, and considering what is to be done there, I would like to speak to the chief and have a look for myself. Also, there is Anneliese.


    Me Ahoh, of course<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    The reason that Sherry was not injured HmmI guess its because she is a fenrir. To not be injured after being hit so hard Wuff. Wuff-wuff-wou! Uhhh, she says that fenrirs are able to protect themselves by enveloping their bodies in magic energy. Thats why she wasnt injured. ...That issoNovember 29, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Tilura thought of a name Yes, father. Tilura. A familiar is not just some servant. You cannot force it to do things, you know? Yes, of course! Just like Sherry, we will be good friends! Wuff? UhTilura. Leo thinks you forgot her. Tiluras reason was simple. She thought the CopperFebruary 3, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Liza was able to understand the bird monster The birdie said the same thing that mama said to you. Mama didnt hear it wrong! Is-is that so? Liza, you can understand what that monster was saying? Yes! Liza nodded energetically. I had heard before that beastkin were special for beastJanuary 28, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 593

    Chapter 593


    Mr. Ekenhart would stop by at Range Vige<hr>


    When you say Ms. Anne It is because her father was the one who set the orcs on them


    Yes, Mr. Takumi. While an apology was made to the chief, there are people in the vige who were actually injured. Thanks to you and Leo, no one was killed. But it was bad enough that things could have easily be that serious. And so even if it was Barsler who did it, it would still be for the best if she apologized in person. It could affect her future, after all. It does not matter that she is a noble


    Lady Anneliese seems to not think that a duke and his guest would usually go out to such a vige. Indeed, normally they woulde here. And the chief has already done that before. So there is no problem. If anything, going to them now will help strengthen the trust they have in the duke. Some other nobles might feel differently, but that is how this house is.


    Indeed. It is important to think about the people. I think it is a good thing. Even though I dont know much So it may not be very convincing.


    In this country, a duke was the second most powerful after the royal family.


    And so it was not necessary for someone like him to visit a small vige.


    I knew that, but being reminded of it now made me like him even more.


    I suppose it was because I used to be someone who worked near the bottom


    The people liked him because he didnt rely on his authority, and thought about their needs as well.


    It was the kind of thing that Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire could do, but perhaps not Ms. Anne.


    Not at all. I think you are quite right, Mr. Takumi. It is important to hear the opinions of people like you, who are not nobles. One does not want to be a dictator.


    Of course, there are some lords who have actual charisma, and can lead their people


    Did you say something, ire?


    May I say something?


    It does not sound very good. But if you must.


    Ms. ire was staring or ring at Mr. Ekenhart now.


    I had a feeling, judging by the flow of conversation, what she might want to say Still, Mr. Ekenhart told her to continue.


    I suppose words were more damaging when they came from his own daughter.


    Father, you are simply not charismatic enough. The people will not follow you if you remain silent. You need to slowly build up trust, so they will follow you. Well, you do have the strength to bring them by force, but


    Ahahathat is true


    Hmmeven if I know it, it still stings to hear it from you. In any case, I would not use force with the people. And so I have no choice but to go slowly. I will do my best to make thend safe and fulfill my role as the lord.


    Well, with charismatic leaders, it can often give rise to conflict. It is because you are the way that you are, that we servants trust you and this house.


    You are suddenly veryplimentary. Why is that?


    Ms. ire said just what I expected her to.


    But Mr. Ekenhart already knew it himself, and so it didnt do too much damage.


    Well, no father wanted to hear from his daughter that he had no charisma to speak of. It was quite depressing.


    That was when Sebastian came in with some encouraging words, which the other servants nodded to.


    Ms. Anne was watching all of this with a slightly bewildered expression.


    Indeed, the members of this family certainly seemed to be closer to the servants andmon folkpared to other nobles.


    They were friendly, and so I liked them.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Mr. Ekenhart also apologized to Mr. Haines You can stand back now, Anneliese. Really? But I havent done anything yet Anne, its enough. Besides, I think your presence here is just confusing Mr. Haines. ...Very well. Ms. Anne seemed like she hadnt had enough yet, but she somberly got toOctober 5, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Mr. Hannes met Ms. Anne I am quite old And so my son and his wife told me to take Rosalie with me, just in case something happened. They coulde with me, as they were busy in the vige So thats why Rosalie was here. Indeed, Mr. Haines didOctober 3, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    There was no time for Ms. ire to learn household chores Even if Ms. ire was going to Range vige with me, as Sebastian had said, she would have to return to the mansion quite regrly. And so we had to consider what would be efficient Clearly there was noOctober 8, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 594

    Chapter 594


    We would all visit Range vige<hr>


    Well, we have gotten side-tracked. I was talking about going to Range vige.


    You look embarrassed.


    Ive never seen father embarrassed before


    Nevermind that! Range vige!


    What about Range vige?


    It is not like there is anything in particr I have to do. But I want ire and Mr. Takumi toe with me. Just the vige, you do not have toe to the main house.


    Me and Ms. ire?


    Well, aside from the matter of the herb fields, I thought it would be best to see it at least once. While ire will probably be going back and forth a lot, she will stay there for quite some time. What do you say?


    IndeedI have never been to Range vige. So I would like to see it.


    As someone who has been there, it is a quiet and rxing vige. Though, I suppose it was partially due to not being busy making wine. Very well, I will go as well.


    Aside from the issue of Ms. Anne, we intended to start a business in Range vige, so it was best to go once and talk about it.


    If Ms. ire and Mr. Ekenhart were going, then I had to go as well.


    Even if Mr. Haines had already agreed to it, I wanted to see the vige again, and Leo would want to y with the children.


    Besides, it would be nice to introduce Liza to everyone.


    Wuff-wuff!


    Yes, of course, you will go too, Leo.


    Wuff!


    Where are you going, papa and mama?


    You know Rosalie, who visited before? Were going to the ce where she lives. Besides, we will live there eventually. And you wille with us.


    I see! I cant wait to meet Rosalie again!


    Mmm, it would be good for Liza and Leo to go as well. Well, it is decided then.


    Leo must have remembered ying with the children, as she started to wag her tail excitedly.


    It was unusual for Leo to join in a conversation while she was eating Or so I thought. But when I looked, her te was already empty.


    In fact, everyone aside from me and Ms. ire had finished eating as well.


    Even Ms. Anne


    Father, I will go too!


    You too, Tilura? Hmm Well, I have no objections to it


    Tilura, you did not study at all while in the forest, did you? What about that? I know that you grew in the forest, and even acquired a familiar. But you cannot ignore the rest either, you know?


    Yes, Ill be fine! I know that I have to study hard for Rahle as well. And so I will study!


    Really? Well, I suppose it is fine then.


    Ms. ire, you seem a lot less strict about studying than before?


    Well, because I saw her in the forest. And thought that perhaps being outside was good for her. Her meeting with Rahle also has had a great effect.


    Indeed She has grown


    Tilura had raised her hand and said that she wanted to go with us.


    She was even more curious than Ms. ire, so I had expected it.


    Perhaps Ms. ire had been like this before her mother died.


    HmmI guess it is fine then. I will allow Tilura to go to Range vige then. My journey back would have been boring, but now my two daughters will being back with me half of the way.


    Is that why you wanted them to go?


    What are you talking about?


    Apparently, Mr. Ekenhart had also expected Tilura to say that she wanted to go.


    So he was probably just pretending to consider it.


    He then looked away awkwardly as if to avoid my gaze, but it just made it more obvious.


    Sebastian had been watching, and he just let out a sigh and shook his head


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    It seemed that Range vige did not discriminate against beastkin In that case, it should be fine to take Liza to Range vige. As long as Mr. Takumi and Leo are there, there should not be a problem. While the children of the vige might do something rudelike Rosalie Hmm.October 14, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We would use both of the materials And so I have a suggestion. Why not use both stone and wood materials? Both? Yes. First, have the rooms that you and Leo and Lady ire will live in made of stone. And the other rooms can be made of wood. WhileMarch 1, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I Suggested Joint Management Hiring her is not the problem. It is what people will think. It is possible that it could hurt the reputation of this house. ...Because she was hired by amoner? That is one reason. While the people of Range vige and the other people youAugust 5, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 595

    Chapter 595


    Tilura wanted to ride on Rahle again<hr>


    Ah, if were going to Range vige, how long will it take?


    Hmm? Ah, thats right If ire and Tilura are going, then a few servants will have to go too. And well travel by carriage again.


    Then it will take a little longer than by horse. Four or five days at least. Unless we are in a rush.


    After the decision was made, we finished eating our dinner and rxed with some tea.


    I then got curious about how long it would take, and so I asked.


    Four days by carriage


    In that case, Leo, Liza and I will leave a few days after.


    You arenting with us?


    I want to let Leo run her fastestwell, quite fast, sometimes. Usually she has to hold back.


    Wuff!


    Yes, yes, I see that you are happy. But dont lick me right after you have drunk your milk.


    Wou?


    With papa and mama!


    Leo liked to carry people and run.


    And while she couldnt run too fast with Liza, I wanted her to be able to run more than usual.


    It would surely help to relieve stress.


    I see. Good Leo can run faster than a horse. Last time, you also went after the chief, didnt you?


    Yes. Even if we dont go too fast, we should arrive in the vige in one day. Also, I want to make some extra stock of herbs in the meantime.


    Hmm, I see. But then, wont your arrival be at night?


    Yes It was like thatst time. Even if we leave in the morning, it will be after sundown when we arrive.


    I see Then we should meet just outside of the vige. And then we can camp outside, and then go together to the vige when the sunes up.


    Is that necessary?


    Mr. Takumi, since the duke is going, the vige will want to wee him properly. While we will send a messenger ahead tomorrow, it will be inconvenient for the vige for them to arrive during the night. We should give them time to prepare. I am sure there will be a feast, after all.


    Of course There are preparations. Very well. We can meet up in front of the vige then. We can decide on the exact location tomorrow.


    Mm. Thank you.


    I could have also just gone ahead But as we were supposed to go together, I suppose it was fine.


    It wasnt like we were in a hurry.


    Mr. Takumium


    What is it, Tilura?


    Uhh Do you think I could go while riding on Rahle? If Leo is there, then it should be fine, if something happens


    Uh, hmm Well, that is true, but


    Wuff!


    So Tilura wanted to ride on Rahle.


    I suppose she asked me instead of her father or sister, because this n relied on Leo.


    Ms. ire seemed a little surprised by this suggestion, and Mr. Ekenhart was sad that she didnt ask him.


    Are you sure? Well, you flew from the forest, so it is probably fine, but


    Wuff-wuff!


    Very well. Since Leo says that it will be fine, you can go. Wellif Mr. Ekenhart agrees, that is.


    Thank you, Mr. Takumi and Leo! Father, what do you say!?


    I was hoping to travel with you for a few days Are you sure? Flying is one thing, but you will have to match Leos speed as well Even though Rahle is faster than a horse.


    As for that, it will be fine. There is nothing to slow you down in the sky. so I think Rahle should be able to move at the same speed. Maybe even faster?


    WUFF!? WOU-WOU!


    Leo says she wont lose if she runs her fastest Well, perhaps?


    Wou


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Tiluras nerves were calmed Phew Are you tired? No, Im fine! We stopped on the way to the forest, so that the horses could rest. Tilura was leaning against a tree. I had asked her, as she looked like she was out of breath But she replied loudly, as ifNovember 2, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Birds were not a good fit for the rooms We arrived in front of the door. And then we stopped and considered the problem. Well, it was mostly Rahle, who looked at the entrance with a puzzled expression. As long as Rahle didnt spread out its wings, then it wasFebruary 14, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Rahle was sorry Tilura, are you alright!? Sister! Yes, Im fine! Shortly after, the carriage carrying the others arrived as well. Ms. ire immediately jumped out and rushed to Tilura. As for Mr. Ekenharthe was looking this way, but perhaps he didnt want to show his distress, as he didFebruary 13, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 596

    Chapter 596


    Sebastian exined happily<hr>


    Leo was not at all happy at the notion that Rahle might be faster than her. But flying and running on the ground were just too different.


    As for the effect of wind while flyingI would have to ask Rahle. But with running, the terrain affected you a great deal.


    In the air, there was no one in the way. No obstacles like trees or buildings.


    Roads and slopes meant nothing, so as long as it wasnt raining or there werent strong winds, then flying would be advantageous.


    From what I had seen, Rahle was holding back when flying from the forest, and so it shouldnt have any trouble keeping up with Leo.


    Even if Leo was faster if she was at full speed, there was no chance Rahle was slower then when Leo ran with passengers.


    Still, I would be worried if you were riding for such a long time


    If Mr. Takumi says its fine, it probably is, but Yes, that is a concern. Even riding a horse for that long would be tiring. And you might fall off


    Really, Tilura Sebastian?


    Yes


    The biggest concern was that Tilura would be tired.


    Even if she was fine while grabbing onto Rahle, if her grip became loose, then she might fall off.


    Ms. ire then sighed and called for Sebastian.


    Did she have an idea then?


    Lady ire had predicted that Lady Tilura would want to ride on Rahle again.


    Yes, I knew that she would. But I did not think that it would be this soon.


    Thank you, sister!


    I dont understand how you feel. Even I wish I could ride on Leo more often.


    Ms. ire said with a gentle smile.


    In any case, I suppose I should think of our next opportunity to allow Ms. ire to ride on Leo.


    Perhaps we could ride Leo when we unite, and finish our journey to Range vige.


    While it has only just started, it will bepleted in a few days. It should be enough time, if you leave a few days after His Grace.


    What is it that you are talking about?


    Sebastians eyes shed as if he had been waiting for someone to ask the question.


    What indeed. It is A saddle!


    A saddle? Like the ones used with horses?


    Yes, unless you know of other uses for them. Riding can be a burden for both the horse and the human. But the saddle helps to alleviate it. A saddle will help to prevent Lady Tilura from getting too tired while riding, and will also support her so that she does not fall off.


    While I had not ridden a horse sinceing to this world, I had seen plenty of other people ride them.


    That being saidI was not very knowledgeable about saddles.


    And so Sebastian saw his opportunity to tell me about them.


    Ms. ire and Mr. Ekenhart looked a little annoyed by his exnation. However, I was grateful, and listened carefully.


    Besides, its not like they would have been able to stop him.


    As this would help Tilura ride on Rahle, she was listening with shining eyes.


    This seemed to light a fire within Sebastian, and he started to speak even more passionately as he continued.


    With a saddle, you will be able to attach stirrups. So you will have a ce to rest your feet and gain greater stability and peace of mind. Lady Tilura will have nothing to fear while flying, and Rahle will not have to be anxious about her. And since Lady Tilura will be securely fixed to the saddle, there will be no chance of her falling off, even if Rahle did those wild moves again!


    Oh That is amazing, Sebastian!


    Is it not? Is it not?


    I see With a saddle and stirrups, Tilura will be quite secure while in the air.


    It would prevent her from getting too tired, and make it easier for Rahle to move.


    After all, it would be difficult to fly while Tilura was scared or moving unpredictably.


    Mr. Ekenhart and I nodded understandingly.


    Tilura was overjoyed.


    As for Lizashe looked puzzled but thoughtful.


    But Sebastian was satisfied by Tiluras reaction. He smiled with a nod, and then continued


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Rahle did something dangerous Alright, Leo. Lets go too! Wuff! Chase after them! We should go too. Indeed. Will Tilura be alright? I understand that youre worried, but good Leo will look after her. So she will be fine ...She looks like she is having fun, but it is scary.February 11, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Rahle liked being on the roof Ms. Lyra smiled and greeted me. While it must have been tough, staying in the forest and cooking, I was d to see that she wasnt tired anymore. Please leave her to me. If she wakes up, I will help her get ready andFebruary 21, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Rahle was sorry Tilura, are you alright!? Sister! Yes, Im fine! Shortly after, the carriage carrying the others arrived as well. Ms. ire immediately jumped out and rushed to Tilura. As for Mr. Ekenharthe was looking this way, but perhaps he didnt want to show his distress, as he didFebruary 13, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 597

    Chapter 597


    We would ask Rahle to wear the saddle<hr>


    And furthermore! Putting a backrest on the saddle will increase the stability. There will be no worry of Lady Tilura falling off.


    Oh!


    However There is one thing that Im worried about


    What is it?


    Will Rahle ept this saddle


    Ah


    It used to live in the mountains before bing Tiluras familiar, and had no contact with humans. Perhaps it will not like the idea of having something attached to it.


    A wild animal No, a wild monster. And so Rahle would not be used to such things.


    And even if it wasnt, wellit was like how dogs often did not like it when humans tried to put clothes on them.


    Some of them got used to it, but Leo never did


    Since we couldmunicate better now, Leo might agree if I asked her. But when she was still a maltese, I had worried that she would be cold during the winter, and tried to get her to wear something, but she ran away at full speed.


    Wuff?


    No, its nothing There is no need to put something on you right now.


    Leo had noticed that I was looking at her, and so she tilted her head questioningly.


    Mornings and nights were not very cold here, and she had even been fine with sleeping out in the forest.


    Besides, it would be very difficult to make clothes for someone of her size. And she wasfortable enough without a saddle, thanks to all of her soft fur.


    Rahle wont like it?


    You will have to ask Rahle.


    Can you do that, Tilura?


    Okay! I will do thatter!


    She could always take Leo with her when asking. However, that would be threatening, so it was better to avoid such methods.


    Additionally, aside from the saddle for Lady Tilura, I mean to order a second saddle that can be attached behind it.


    Behind?


    We will also have to ask Rahle about it, but By having this other saddle, Rahle will be able to carry two passengers. Besides, that person can also make sure that Tilura is secure. And so it should be someone who is used to riding a horse. While Rahle is much different from a horse, that person will be well experienced with saddles.


    But Sebastian, we were not even sure if Rahle could carry Tilura How will it be able to fly with a second person


    One of the reasons Rahle had chosen her was because she looked light


    Even if the second person was light as well, the overall weight would be simr to an adult.


    Yes. And so we will have to ask Rahle about it first. But I think it will be fine.


    You do?


    I suppose it was fine to go ahead and make it, but why was Sebastian confident that it would be fine?


    Rahle had never carried someone while flying before. And so it wanted to test it with someone light like Tilura. However, with the saddle, it will be easier to maintain bnce. Of course, if it doesnt work, that is fine as well


    It will surely be fine. Rahle said it was easier than expected!


    Really?


    Yes. And so while flying Though, Rahle called it swimming in the air Rahle wanted to try different tricks


    Ah, thats right


    As it was easier than expected, Rahle got carried away and started rotating or moving up and down.


    And so if the saddle ispleted, then going to Range vige should not be a problem. Well, at worst, she might have to ride with Leo, or stop somewhere to rest.


    Wuff!


    If Rahle was fine with it, it would open so many possibilities with flying.


    Well, since she was not used to it, Tilura may still get tired on the way.


    And so if that happened, she coulde down and rest or travel with us.


    Leo nodded as if to say that she could be relied on.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Sebastian exined happily Leo was not at all happy at the notion that Rahle might be faster than her. But flying and running on the ground were just too different. As for the effect of wind while flyingI would have to ask Rahle. But with running, the terrain affected youMarch 8, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Iforted Tilura Well, it looks like they will arrive safely. Were back! Wuff! After watching Tilura and Rahle for some time, therge building finally came into view. Somehow, Tilura had managed to stay on this whole time. Perhaps Rahle had sensed her fear, as there were no moreFebruary 12, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Rahle did something dangerous Alright, Leo. Lets go too! Wuff! Chase after them! We should go too. Indeed. Will Tilura be alright? I understand that youre worried, but good Leo will look after her. So she will be fine ...She looks like she is having fun, but it is scary.February 11, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 598

    Chapter 598


    I talked about giving Leo a bath<hr>


    Tilura, while asking Rahle is fine, you also have to get used to it too, you know?


    Yes!


    Merely preparing a saddle was not enough, and so it was decided that Tilura would train a little before the journey.


    Of course, that just meant she would ride Rahle for short amounts of time.


    Alright, that is settled then. And so from tomorrow, we will prepare to go to Range vige. Mr. Takumi, Tilura. Dont forget to train before going to bed.


    Father, you just want to move, dont you?


    Thats not true.


    We had finished talking, and so everyone was ready to leave.


    Ms. Anne had been quiet the whole time, and appeared to be deep in thought. I suppose she was thinking about what she would say in Range vige.


    In any casetraining


    Im sorry, Mr. Ekenhart. Could I return to training tomorrow?


    Hmm? Well, I suppose it is fine for one night. But why?


    Well, I wanted to give Leo a bath. She is quite dirty after going to the forest. And I want to clean her before we leave.


    Wuff!?


    Hmm Leo has beautiful, silver fur But now that you mention it, it does look a little dull


    Since Leo would be seen by the vigers, I wanted her to look good.


    Well, she would get a little dirty on the journey, but it was better than nothing.


    Leo, there is no point in being surprised now. I already told you about it.


    As she mostly yed in the river, it is not too bad. But there is still some sand and dust in her fur.


    Indeed. It is best for good Leo to have a beautiful coat. Very well, you do not have to do your training tonight.


    Thank you.


    Besides, Im sure it is a very difficult job. If anything, it might be more tiring than training.


    While I was used to it, it did take some strength when bathing Leo.


    Mr. Ekenhart looked a little interested, but not enough to join us.


    However, someone elses hand was then raised.


    I would like to help wash Leo!


    Tilura!?


    Now that I thought about it, she had wanted to bathe with Leo before.


    If Tilura is there, then Ill wash mama too!


    Liza Hmm. I dont know


    Mr. Takumi, we could help wash Leo then.


    Ms. Lyra?


    You refused my help before, since Leo was not used to being here. But I think it should be fine now


    I suppose


    Wuff


    Kyau?


    Grau! Wou


    While Leo was still disappointed in the whole thing, she did not resist it as much. So it would probably be fine.


    However, that was also because I was careful after talking to Leo about why she didnt like baths.


    As for Sherry, she could not understand what the problem was for Leo. I suppose Ms. ire was much better at washing her?


    Ah, thats right.


    Uhh, well, I think it would be best if I showed you how to do it first.


    Together?


    Wellif you insist, Mr. Takumi.


    No, no! I dont mean it like that. Um We would be wearing clothes that can get wet. And then I can show you how to wash Leo. I didnt mean it the other way!


    I exined frantically.


    It had almost sounded like I was using Leo as an excuse to take a bath with Ms. Lyra.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Rahle did something dangerous Alright, Leo. Lets go too! Wuff! Chase after them! We should go too. Indeed. Will Tilura be alright? I understand that youre worried, but good Leo will look after her. So she will be fine ...She looks like she is having fun, but it is scary.February 11, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We would ask Rahle to wear the saddle And furthermore! Putting a backrest on the saddle will increase the stability. There will be no worry of Lady Tilura falling off. Oh! However There is one thing that Im worried about What is it? Will Rahle ept this saddle Ah ItMarch 9, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Iforted Tilura Well, it looks like they will arrive safely. Were back! Wuff! After watching Tilura and Rahle for some time, therge building finally came into view. Somehow, Tilura had managed to stay on this whole time. Perhaps Rahle had sensed her fear, as there were no moreFebruary 12, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 599

    Chapter 599


    The dining hall fell into a great confusion<hr>


    I-I see.


    Yes! I would never suggest anything else


    Mr. Takumi?


    Ahits nothing!


    Ms. ire had asked me with an embarrassed expression, and so I nodded frantically. But then I looked towards Ms. Lyra and my voice trailed off.


    It was not because I imagined anything.


    Regardless, the whole misunderstanding was my own fault.


    Hoho. You sure are young.


    I am reminded of my own youth That was so long ago.


    Sebastian and Mr. Ekenhart. This is not funny. You should be helping me!


    No, there is nothing for me to say


    You reap what you sow, Mr. Takumi. I remember panicking when I was in a simr position. I was caught courting multiple women and


    I dont want to bepared to you, Mr. Ekenhart


    Mr. Takumi, that is rather rude, dont you think? I have feelings too.


    I had seen Sebastian and Mr. Ekenhartughing at my expense and with no intention of helping me out of the current situation.


    And I was so flustered that I said something that was probably rude, but this was no time to be thinking of such things.


    Besides, he was asking for it.


    Ummwellits really nothing


    Mr. Takumi Do-do not worry about it! I understand. And I am prepared to do what I can to help!


    Did you really understand!


    So Mr. Takumi was actually


    What, Ms. ire!?


    OhI could hardly say the rest


    You do misunderstand then! Or perhaps you No, no, its not that at all


    Hohoho


    Ahahaha!


    Alright, thats enough! Really, Ms. ire youLyra, was it? What is wrong with you? Causing such a ruckus


    Ms. Anne?


    While the chaos was getting worse, there was a loud bang that echoed through the dining hall.


    It was the sound of Ms. Annes hand mming onto the table.


    Everyones eyes turned to her, and all was quiet. And while Ms. Anne then raised her voice angrily, she was like a savior to me.


    Making such a fuss over that. Are you not ashamed? You should learn topose yourself.


    You say that, Anne, as if you didnt have thoughts yourself?


    Of course, I did. And yet I did not make as much noise as all of you.


    Wellthat is true, but


    In any case, it is a natural thing. There is no need for such rm!


    I suppose, but it does not sound convincinging from you.


    And she red in the face.


    Sh-shut up!


    Oh, she does not sound or look like a properdy now


    Grr!


    Ms. Anne was scolding everyone angrily.


    However, Ms. ire soon regained her calm and fired back, causing Ms. Anne to grind her teeth.


    She could be quite aggressive when she wanted to Well, when around Ms. Anne, she seemed a lot more like other women her age.


    And in spite of all the times they were angry at each other, they also had a rtionship simr to friends


    In any case, it really is not a big deal! Just go and take a bath if that is what you want. I will return to my own room!


    Uh, Ms. Anne Thank you.


    Ms. Anne spat as she left the dining hall, clearly overwhelmed by Ms. ire.


    And so I called out to her and thanked her with a bow of my head.


    Regardless of intent, she had helped to calm things down. It would have probably been worse if it was just me


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    I made too much Loe Well, since I made it without permission, you might not want it yet I can always just keep it. ...As it is a rare herb, we would dly ept it regardless. I see, because we are going to the forest. Yes. But with Leo andOctober 23, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Ms. ire and the others would be very busy And so I agreed with Mr. Ekenhart that I did not want her to be put in danger. Though, from her perspective, it probably looked like I was doing something dangerous. And it probably caused her to worry. I would haveSeptember 24, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I left Ms. Anne to Mr. Ekenhart I am quite sure that the people already trust you enough. Well, if you say so, Mr. Takumi. Your opinion is worth trusting. Isnt that right, ire? Dont bring me into it. But well, Mr. Takumi does have a different way of viewingJanuary 17, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 600

    Chapter 600


    Ms. Anne was good at dropping bombs<hr>


    There is no need to thank me. But perhaps we could bathe together next time? I could help wash your back. Well, good night then


    What!?


    Huh!?


    Anneliese can be bold when she wants. Though, it often leads to trouble.


    Ms. Anne turned for a moment and uttered those troubling words before leaving the dining hall.


    In any case, I ignored the reaction of the others. I had to teach Ms. Lyra how to bathe Leo


    Why is everyone making such a fuss?


    I dont know, sister Tilura. Do you, mama?


    Wuffwuff


    Yes, those two didnt need to know.


    Leo was looking at me with an exasperated expression.


    While Leo would not like it, I would teach Lyra and the others and wash her until she was clean.


    And then Ill brush her coat Leo liked that


    Sorry to keep you waiting, Mr. Takumi.


    After the chaos in the dining hall, I pushed Ms. Annes words out of my mind, and Ms. ires suspicious stares, and went off to teach the others.


    Ms. Lyra had been wearing her usual maid uniform. But as she did not want it to get wet, she changed into something else.


    It was the ordinary kind of clothes that you would see people wearing in the town of Ractos.


    But since I had never seen her wear it before, it seemed quite surprising.


    I am here, Mr. Takumi.


    Ms. ire. As Ms. Lyra is finished preparing, let us go inside. Leo is waiting toonot very happily.


    Lady Liza and Lady Tilura are also excited.


    Hehe. Yes. Im looking forward to it.


    Even if Leo hates it?


    Oh, I dont mean it like that! I just want to help wash good Leo.


    I see.


    For some reason, Ms. ire wanted to learn as well, and so she was here.


    She was also wearing ordinary clothes, but they could not hide her overall air of nobility.


    It reminded me of a richdy who disguises herself as amoner in order to go out into town.


    In any case, Leo was currently awaiting her fate in the washing area.


    Ms Lyra had helped Liza and Tilura to change into clothes that could get wet as well.


    I could hear their excited voices even before we entered.


    Leo Are you really going to start like that?


    I see


    Mamas stomach is so soft!


    Fen and Riruru were soft, but so is Leo!


    When I stepped inside, I saw that Leo was lying on her back.


    However, she kept her mouth and eyes closed and I could only hear her breathing through her nose.


    It was clear that she was resigned to her fate.


    However, Tilura and Liza were petting her obliviously, even though it was clear that Leo was in no state to enjoy it.


    Well, I suppose I should hurry up and get this over with then


    First You pour hot water all over her body to get her wet. This takes off a lot of the dirt.


    Thatis quite hard


    Lady ire, allow me


    I can do it. I want to wash Leo.


    Yes


    Here goes!


    Mama, its some hot water!


    As an example, I scooped up some hot water and poured it onto Leo.


    The others then took turns doing the same with the bucket.


    However, Ms. Lyra seemed ufortable with seeing Ms. ire work.


    I suppose it was because she was a servant?


    Though, Tilura and Liza seemed to be having fun, sshing water onto Leo.


    Leo had been closing her eyes, and so she flinched every time the water came from a different direction.


    Still, she did not go wild or try to get away. Good girl.


    So you did this all by yourself before. I didnt realize it was so much work


    Haha Yes, she is big. But I always thought of it as good exercise.


    It is very different from bathing Sherry.


    I talked with Ms. Lyra and Ms. ire as we continued to dump hot water on Leo.


    Leo wasrger than a horse, so it was simr to manualbor.


    It had been easier when she was small, and I washed her with a shower head Still, I wanted her to be clean, and so it was worth it


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    I woke upfortably In any case, thank you. For looking after her. Im sorry that you had to stay upte yet again. Wuff. Not at all. This is my job. Besides, I do enjoy taking care of children. I thanked Ms. Lyra, and apologized for the trouble. LeoSeptember 26, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I talked about giving Leo a bath Tilura, while asking Rahle is fine, you also have to get used to it too, you know? Yes! Merely preparing a saddle was not enough, and so it was decided that Tilura would train a little before the journey. Of course, that justMarch 10, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I Taught Liza to Knock ...No, its not a mistake What is she thinking? Is her name even allowed to be here? Wuff-wuff. I dont think its as simple as it being a good opportunity Well, I will have to ask Sebastain. No, maybe I should ask her directly? TheAugust 1, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 601

    Chapter 601


    We all washed Leo<hr>


    Ahaha! Mama got smaller!


    Its true! How interesting!


    Sherry is like that as well. I suppose its because they are covered in so much soft hair?


    The fur gets stuck to her when wet. But the difference is so much stronger because of how fluffy she usually is.


    Liza and Tilura seemed to think this was hrious, while Ms. ire and Ms. Lyra were amazed.


    I suppose they didnt have much experience with washing animals like this.


    Alright, that should be enough. Now that she ispletely wet You make bubbles with the soap


    Yes.


    Human hands really are so small


    My hands are smaller, sister ire.


    Yes, Liza. But you will grow big one day.


    After pouring hot water all over Leo, and getting out most of the dirt, it was time to wash her with soap.


    I used water from a bucket to make bubbles with my hands.


    However, Liza was getting bubbles everywhere as she showed her hands to Ms. ire.


    I suppose not making a mess was too difficult for her.


    But when I looked, Tiluras clothes also had bubbles all over them.


    Once its all foamy, we will use it to wash Leo. Like thiswash it thoroughly A little stronger than that. Ah, Liza. Dont pull it like that.


    Okay!


    Wellits going to take a lot of work to get her whole bodyoomph.


    Indeed. After doing her stomach and legs, there is still her back


    It really is hard when shes this big


    While rubbing the soap into Leos fur, I exined to the others.


    Leo didnt like it when you pulled, and so I told them to be gentle.


    It was strange. Even when Leos fur was wet, it was so soft. And yet, when it came to battle, it could block Mr. Ekenharts sword


    In any case, as Leo was so big, it would take a long time to wash her, even with multiple people doing it.


    Mama is big again!


    She is covered in bubbles.


    Perhaps it was too much?


    But surely it is necessary when washing fur?


    Its fine. She was quite dirty, so its best to be thorough.


    At this point Leo was covered in so much foam that she looked like a ball.


    Liza and Tilura were delighted to see Leo look so fluffy once again.


    Ms. ire had her doubts, but I assured her that it was fine, since Leo had so much long fur.


    Now, lets dump water all over her again. Ah, gently, of course. Leo doesnt like it when the soap gets in her eyes.


    Yes.


    I understand.


    Okay!


    SPLASH!


    Heres more!


    SPLASH!


    !?


    Leo had finally started to rx while having her bubble massage, but that came to an end as she was assaulted by hot water from all directions.


    And while she was rmed, she was probably getting used to it, and managed to stay still, even though she was breathing strangely through her nose.


    Tilura and Liza really seemed to enjoy dumping water on her.


    A little too much, and I had to remind them to be gentle.


    Alright, Leo. Now can you turn the other way? Slowly?


    We needed to wash Leos back now, and so I had Leo get up.


    Leo seemed a little sulky as she got to her feet.


    If she jumped up like she usually did, she would get water over everyone.


    I didnt mind too much, but Ms. ire and Ms. Lyra were here as well.


    Though, Liza and Tilura would probably enjoy it.


    Now, pour hot water on her againand repeat the process.


    Of course.


    Yes.


    Here ites, mama!


    I had Leo lie down and we repeated what we had just done.


    Leo ced her head on her front paws and closed her eyes tightly.


    It was hard doing her stomach, but this is worse Phew.


    Indeed. She has less fur on her stomach The hair on her back is longer and more dense.


    Mmmphphew. Yes, it is quite tiring.


    You dont have to try so hard, you know?


    No. While its a lot, I am still enjoying it. So its fine.


    While Ms. ire and Ms. Lyra struggled, they did their best to wash Leos back.


    Well, there was no need to wash her legs this time, so it was a little simpler, at least.


    As for Tilura and Liza, they were just ying now. But it was fine.


    I was d that they were having a good time.


    Even if it was a little strange, since they were helping to wash the strongest of all monsters


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Ms. Anne was good at dropping bombs There is no need to thank me. But perhaps we could bathe together next time? I could help wash your back. Well, good night then What!? Huh!? ...Anneliese can be bold when she wants. Though, it often leads to trouble. Ms. Anne turnedMarch 12, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Leo finished her sausages Once we were finished talking, Ms. ire and Mr. Ekenhart left the dining hall. They decided to sleep early, as they had a busy day tomorrow. But before leaving, they asked for some herbs to help them sleep, and so I had a maid bring meSeptember 25, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We Went to Ractos with Liza I felt a little bad for Mr. Ekenhart, as he left looking quite disappointed about not being able to go to Ractos. Ms. ire would be going instead. I still remember seeing her raise her fist in triumph at this. I suppose she wasAugust 7, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 602

    Chapter 602


    Having water sshed on me was fate<hr>


    Nowthest part is her face.


    Yes.


    Face


    Unlike before, I spoke in a serious voice.


    Because you had to be extra careful when it came to the face area.


    If the soap got in her eyes or nose, it could cause pain or difort for Leo.


    A little bit could not be helped, but I wanted to avoid it as much as possible.


    As for the face Leo?


    Wuff!


    Ah, so thats how you use that big bucket.


    I called Leo and gestured towards the bucket that was filled with water.


    Leo finally opened her mouth and barked like she usually did. And then she moved to the bucket and put her face in it.


    Now, we will use soap like with the rest of her body But be careful that it doesnt go into her eyes or nose. Do it slowly.


    Yes, I understand.


    Certainly. Excuse me, good Leo.


    Also, while it is fine now, you should avoid using cold water during winter. It would be best to heat the water first.


    Leo closed her eyes and mouth tightly again and let out a resigned sigh. And then the two hesitantly began to wash her.


    For this part, Tilura and Liza just watched.


    The climate around the mansion was quite warm, so it was fine now. But it would be much colder during the winter And I didnt want them to wash Leo with cold water.


    Hmm? Well, I didnt actually know if there was a winter season here.


    Now that I thought about it, I hadnt asked about the climate And considering that Ill be growing fields, I should ask about it


    While its easier than the stomach and back, you also have to be more attentive


    Indeed. I wouldnt want soap in my eyes or nose either. And Leo would be especially sensitive.


    Well, Leo can bear a little difort. Right, Leo?


    It doesnt seem like she agrees.


    Haha. Just a coincidence.


    After that, while Leo made weird noises through her nostril, we finished washing her face.


    Alright, thats it, Leo.


    And then Leo dunked her head into the bucket again and washed her face.


    Good Leo really does not like hot water


    Yes. She is perfectly fine when swimming in river water


    Sherry isnt like that. She seems to enjoy her baths.


    Wuff!?


    Gah!


    Leo had pulled her face out of the water and turned towards us in surprise.


    Obviously, since she was wet, a great amount of water rained down on me.


    I was close by, so it couldnt be helped, but I wished she was a little more careful It caught me right in the faceeven though I knew I would get wet.


    As Ms. ire was behind me, I acted as a shield to protect her.


    Leo. Thats what happens when you raise your face so suddenly. A little is fine, but I was practically drenched from that


    Wuff


    Leo looked at me apologetically.


    Well, she was being careful in her own way, and refrained from shaking her body.


    Mr. Takumi. Are you alright?


    Yes, Im fine. Though, a little cold


    We do not want you to get sick! Now,e over here and get warm.


    Uh, butIm still wearing clothes


    Nevermind that!


    I chuckled and reassured Ms. ire that I was fine, but Ms. Lyra reacted strongly.


    I supposed it was because I said it was cold. But it wasnt bad enough to get sick or anything


    However, Ms. Lyra pulled me over to the bathtub and urged me to get inside.


    It was awkward to go in while still clothed, but she pushed me in anyway.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    We all washed Leo Ahaha! Mama got smaller! Its true! How interesting! Sherry is like that as well. I suppose it''s because they are covered in so much soft hair? The fur gets stuck to her when wet. But the difference is so much stronger because of how fluffy sheMarch 13, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I Bathed with a Sulky Leo Wou Give up, Leo. From now on, you will have to bathe regrly in order to stay clean. Wouuu Leo looked at the floor sadly as she followed after me. She had been ying so excitedly in the river. So why did she hateJanuary 30, 2022


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Ms. Anne was good at dropping bombs There is no need to thank me. But perhaps we could bathe together next time? I could help wash your back. Well, good night then What!? Huh!? ...Anneliese can be bold when she wants. Though, it often leads to trouble. Ms. Anne turnedMarch 12, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 603

    Chapter 603


    Leos bath ended<hr>


    Ah, if its tangled, then dont do it by force


    Dont worry, Im used to it.


    Haha, thats right. Im sure that your beautiful hair is maintained very well.


    Mr. Takumi likes my hair Yes!


    Hmm?


    No, its nothing.


    As she had been in the forest and even fought orcs, Leos fur was tangled in different ces, making it hard to brush.


    And so I was going to warn the others, but saw that Ms. ire was already going slowly, as if she was used to brushing tangled hair.


    Well, Ms. ires hair was quite long, so it probably got tangled often.


    Good Leo. Do you feel itchy anywhere?


    Wuff-wuff!


    I see. So you are fine.


    Mamas tail is so big!


    Liza, do you like big tails?


    Yes. They are so impressive.


    Indeed. And Leos is especially nice.


    Liza and Tilura had been put in charge of Leos tail.


    And while brushing it, Liza sounded a little jealous.


    Her tail was already quite big, rtive to the rest of her But apparently, she wanted a tail like Leos.


    I had heard that tails were important for beastkin, so perhaps that was why.


    Now, unfortunately Leo, were going to have to dump hot water on you again.


    WUFFF!?


    You really should be used to it by now.


    Wuff


    Leo was surprised that we were going to do it again.


    However, even before we came to this world, I had always washed Leo the same way.


    So she should have knownunless she somehow forgot.


    You are going to pour hot water on her again?


    Yes. After removing the dust with the brushes, I pour water over her onest time. And then I dry her off with a towel and brush her onest time, and then its perfect.


    Alrightthat should do it. She is clean. Leo, your bath is finished!


    Wou Wuff!


    Even if you do not do it every day, that was a lot of work. Mr. Takumi, from now on, you should leave it to us.


    Mama looks so nice!


    Leo looks better when her fur is shining.


    When I announced that the bath was over, Leo sighed as if she had been waiting a long time. But then she was cheerful again.


    I petted her gently and praised her.


    Up until now, Ms. Lyra had been in charge of drying Leo with a towel. And that was hard enough. But now she was saying that she would wash her as well.


    And while it would mean less work for me, I would feel bad leaving it all to her. And so I wouldter suggest that we could take turns.


    Now then Woah!


    Wuff?


    Ahh!


    Kya!


    Nya!


    Waah!


    I suppose Leo had been holding back the urge to shake, and finally felt like she was free.


    And so before I could move away, Leo shook her body as hard as she could.


    We had just poured the hot water on her, and so she was still soaking wet as the water flew.


    Of course, it rained down on all of us.


    And everyone raised their voices in rm.


    She must have really wanted to shake off the water, as she did it without restraint, so it was like a storm all around us.


    Well, I was already wetbut still


    Dont look so surprised, Leo. I told you before that you need to move away before doing that.


    Wouwou


    Hah Well, it took a lot longer than usual, because I had to teach the others. So perhaps it could not be helped. In any case, Ms. ire and Ms. Lyra. Are you alright?


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    We Went to Ractos with Liza I felt a little bad for Mr. Ekenhart, as he left looking quite disappointed about not being able to go to Ractos. Ms. ire would be going instead. I still remember seeing her raise her fist in triumph at this. I suppose she wasAugust 7, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Ms. Gelda had jumped to conclusions In the end, we ate what was initially served, as well as the new food that Ms. Helena brought, and it was a satisfying dinner. Only, Ms. ire looked at her father, who ate ravenously, with a slightly angry expression. As for Sherry, sinceFebruary 19, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Iforted Tilura Well, it looks like they will arrive safely. Were back! Wuff! After watching Tilura and Rahle for some time, therge building finally came into view. Somehow, Tilura had managed to stay on this whole time. Perhaps Rahle had sensed her fear, as there were no moreFebruary 12, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 604

    Chapter 604


    Everyone was wet<hr>


    Right after shaking, Leo looked at us with a puzzled expression, and then looked startled when she realized. And then she bowed her head apologetically.


    It had taken longer than usual, and she had done it without thinking. Still, I wish she had moved away a little


    I then turned to Ms. ire and Ms. Lyra, who were soaking wet.


    Liza and Tilura were already wet, and seemed to find it amusing.


    That was a surprise Sherry does it sometimes. And so I am used to it. But its quite different when you are that big


    I-I am fine. While it was quite sudden, I didnt expect toe out of thispletely dry anyway.


    Mama is amazing!


    Well, she doesnt like it when her fur is wet and sticks to her Ah!


    What is it, Mr. Takumi?


    Uhhplease dont look at me like that Uhand dont get too close. For your own good as well.


    UmIthink you should stay away!


    Why? Did I say something rude?


    Mr. Takumi? Oh! Lady ire!


    What is it, Lyra?


    Your clothes are


    Oh!? UhIm terribly sorry! You too, Lyra!


    What!


    After hearing Ms. Lyras word, Ms. ire finally understood the situation, and moved away while apologizing with a look of embarrassment.


    No, I shouldLeo should be the one to apologize.


    In-in any case, you two should go first


    Ye-yes! Of course.


    Excuse me!


    Huh? What happened to sister ire and sister Lyra?


    I think they were cold?


    Wuff


    Liza and Tilura were puzzled as to why Ms. ire and Ms. Lyra had left in such a hurry


    Leo would have usually sighed with exasperation when I was in awkward situations with women, but this time, she groaned apologetically.


    Liza and Tilura. Its not good to stay wet for too long, so you should go with them and dry off as well.


    Uh, okay! Lets go, sister Tilura!


    Yes, I understand!


    Hah


    Wuff?


    Well, well wait here for a bit


    Wou


    I leaned against Leo and rested until my heart calmed down


    Wellwhen youre wet, your clothes stick to you


    Up until Leo had shaken, they had been careful to avoid getting too wet.


    After that, I left Leo to Ms. ire and the others, who had changed, and since I felt a little chilled, I went back into the hot water.


    By the time that I waspletely warm, I was back to normal.


    When I got out, I saw that Leo had been dried, and she was sitting there quietly. The others were gone.


    When I asked Leo, she said that since it waste, Ms. ire had taken Tilura to her room, while Ms. Lyra had gone to put Liza to bed.


    I suppose they were still embarrassed


    And so I changed into the clothes that had been left for me, and realized that my face was growing hot again. It would be best to wait a little before returning to my room.


    While Ms. ire was fine, Ms. Lyra might still be in my room


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    I was able to borrow a cape I see. You may enter. But what brings you here at such ate hour? Uh, I have some business that I forgot about After arriving in Ractos, I banged on the door and called for the guard. There was a small windowSeptember 5, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We all washed Leo Ahaha! Mama got smaller! Its true! How interesting! Sherry is like that as well. I suppose it''s because they are covered in so much soft hair? The fur gets stuck to her when wet. But the difference is so much stronger because of how fluffy sheMarch 13, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I received a big wee It stopped raining? Wuff? Just when we had almost arrived at the mansion, the rain started to die down, and then stoppedpletely. I looked up at the sky while taking off my coat. I felt a little lighter then. But I was still wet.September 21, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 605

    Chapter 605


    I went out into the back garden<hr>


    LeoI know you just bathed, but lets go outside.


    Wuff.


    I thought that it would be good to cool off, and so I headed out into the garden with Leo.


    Leo seemed to have realized the reason, and so she followed me quietly.


    Hmm, since its the middle of the night, its quite cool andfortable


    The gentle wind felt nice against my body, which was warmed from the hot water.


    Ah, nevermind me


    Some of the servants hade out to check on the herbs. And they were about to bring out some tea when they saw me, but I told them that I was fine.


    Kiii!


    Oh, Rahle?


    Wou.


    As I was enjoying the cool breeze, I heard a familiar cry from the night sky above.


    Leo was sitting next to me, and she barked in agreement.


    Kii Kii?


    Good evening, Rahle. Sorry, but Tilura is already sleeping.


    Kii.


    Rahlended next to us and cried as if a greeting. Then it turned its head around like it was searching for someone.


    As Leo and I were here, it probably thought that Tilura would be with us.


    I apologized to Rahle, and it raised its right wing as if understanding.


    Leo and the fenrirs were like that as well. I suppose the monsters here were good with gestures.


    Ah, by the way Can I ask you something, Rahle?


    Kii?


    Since Rahle was here, I decided to ask something that I had been wondering about.


    Thankfully, Leo was also here to act as a trantor.


    I dont know much about birds, but I thought you would have trouble seeing at night?


    Kii Kii? Kii-kii.


    Wuff. Wuff-wuff. Wou.


    Huh? Is that so


    Upon hearing the question, Rahle tilted its head as if puzzled.


    ording to Leos trantion, birds here were able to see just as well as humans during the night.


    I see


    Well, maybe it was just something that I misunderstood. After all, owls could see well during the night.


    Kii. Kii-kii.


    Wou. Wuff-wuff.


    Hmm? Is that so?


    Kii. Kii!


    Wou!


    Uh, different from edible birds Well, yes, Rahle isnt like other birds


    Rahle continued to cry in order to tell me something.


    ording to Leo, it was the birds you could eat that couldnt see well at night So I guess she was talking about chickens?


    Thank you, Rahle. I learned something useful.


    Kii!


    Wou.


    You really cant say no to Leo, huh. Like she is your leader?


    Kii-kii!


    Wou-wou.


    Because Leo will turn you into roasted chicken? Well, I suppose she could do that


    When I thanked Rahle, it raised its wing as if to say that it was nothing.


    And then Leo nodded.


    Unlike Tilura, it probably treated me like this because of Leos influence. It was almost like it was trained.


    But perhaps it was not surprising, since Leo had knocked it out of the sky with magic.


    She had changed so much from that small and cowardly maltese.


    Though, she was still weak to the shouting of humans.


    Do you eat birds too, Rahle? I know that youre a monster, but


    Kii? Kii-kii.


    Wuff. Wou.


    I seethey are just food.


    Apparently, Rahle liked all kinds of meat. And even if it was a bird of a simr shape, it was still food.


    Well, I suppose Rahle was at the top when it came to bird monsters, so it didnt matter.


    Mr. Takumi. There you are.


    Ms. Gelda?


    Wuff?


    I continued to talk to Rahle a little longer after that, and then I made my way back to my room. And while in the hallway, Ms. Gelda called to me.


    It seemed like she had been searching for me. Has something happened?


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Rahle liked being on the roof Ms. Lyra smiled and greeted me. While it must have been tough, staying in the forest and cooking, I was d to see that she wasnt tired anymore. Please leave her to me. If she wakes up, I will help her get ready andFebruary 21, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Rahle did something dangerous Alright, Leo. Lets go too! Wuff! Chase after them! We should go too. Indeed. Will Tilura be alright? I understand that youre worried, but good Leo will look after her. So she will be fine ...She looks like she is having fun, but it is scary.February 11, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Rahle had done well ...Leo? Wuff? Wuff-wuff! Good morning. There, there. What happened? I was standing where the servants had gathered, and so I could not see what was happening, as Leo and the fenrirs were blocking my view. Rahle was also spreading out his wings, so I could notFebruary 5, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 606

    Chapter 606


    Mr. Ekenhart had called me<hr>


    The master wants to see you. He said that he wanted to talk to you while the others were away


    Mr. Ekenhart? Do you know what he wants to talk about?


    No, I do not. I was merely told to call you, unless you were sleeping. But you were not in your room when I checked


    If she didnt have to wake me up, then it wasnt anything serious.


    Perhaps he was just bored and wanted someone to talk to.


    Ms. ire would have rebuked him and told him to go to sleep.


    I see. So its not urgent then. I had be a little overheated after my bath, and so I was cooling off in the garden. Sorry to have caused you trouble.


    No, its nothing. Well, he is waiting in the dining hall.


    Yes


    Wuff.


    Oh, youreing too, Leo? You could go ahead and sleep with Liza if you want.


    Wuff-wuff. Wou.


    Uh, its just Mr. Ekenhart. Ill be fine alone. But you cane if you want.


    Wuff.


    And so Leo and I followed Ms. Gelda to the dining hall.


    Excuse me. I have brought Mr. Takumi.


    Mr. Ekenhart, you called?


    Ah, Mr. Takumi. You came. Im d that you werent asleep.


    Im sorry about my master, Mr. Takumi.


    No, its fine. Still, wine?


    Mr. Ekenhart was sitting in his usual chair with a ss. Sebastian was waiting behind him.


    Mr. Ekenhart was d to see me, but Sebastian looked at me apologetically.


    Well, I wasnt really sleepy, so it was fine. I did feel a little bad for Ms. Lyra


    I was also curious about Mr. Ekenharts drink.


    It was pink, so it must be that mixed wine Perhaps it was to help him sleep?


    It is so delicious that I had to have some.


    Wuff!


    Ohh Leo seems to be rather tense around me tonight?


    Ah, Leo. Calm down. Its just unusual for you to call me out like this.


    Hmm. I see. Well, Leo is rather sharp.


    Huh?


    In any case, sit down so that we can talk.


    Yes.


    Will you drink?


    Ill have some wine too then.


    Of course.


    Did Mr. Ekenhart have something serious that he wanted to discuss?


    I thought as I took a seat. And then Leo sat down between us.


    And though she was sitting, she was looking towards Mr. Ekenhart so that she could move at a moments notice.


    That being said, if there was anything here that would make Leo cautious, then surely there was no way I could deal with it?


    In any case, since Sebastian had asked, I decided to have some wine as well.


    From previous experience I knew that I did not get drunk, so there would be no problem.


    Besides, it would be easier for Sebastian than preparing some tea.


    Please drink


    Thank you.


    Ms. Gelda ced a ss in front of me and Sebastian poured the wine.


    I thanked them and then Ms. Gelda left the room.


    Hmm, it really is delicious


    Hahhyes.


    Mr. Ekenhart said as he drained his ss in one gulp.


    Well, that was like him.


    Sebastian then poured him another ss. I suppose he cared more about the atmosphere than warning him about drinking too much.


    I suppose Sebastian knew what Mr. Ekenhart wanted to say.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Theints were heard ...Mr. Takumi wants to confide in me What is it? Ms. ire was tilting her head with a puzzled expression, but looked a little happy as well. Thats enough talk about me. Why are you here, Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire? Were you not able toNovember 12, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Leo discovered something Ms. ire often seemed like she was holding something back. Perhaps she felt that it was necessary, as the dukes daughter. But from mine and Mr. Ekenharts point of view, it looked a little suffocating. But it was because of that, that the current Ms. ire wasJanuary 19, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I decided to keep watch, like thest time Sebastian had asked me to gather some tree branches, but before heading out, I turned to another spot that I had been wondering about. Near Johanna, who was pitching a tent, I saw that Mr. Ekenhart was trying to pick upNovember 8, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 607

    Chapter 607


    He questioned me as a father<hr>


    Now, Mr. Takumi


    Yes.


    He looked as the wine was poured into his ss He seemed very thoughtful.


    As the air had grown a little serious, I nodded cautiously.


    What was he going to say?


    ire


    Yes?


    What do you mean to doin regards to your rtionship with ire?


    Huh?


    Wuff?


    I was quite surprised by this.


    This was all about Ms. ire then?


    Even Leo was surprised.


    Umm Your Grace?


    Mm I got ahead of myself. I am sorry.


    No


    Wuff


    Sebastian had coughed, and Mr. Ekenhart apologized.


    He had practically shouted it. Perhaps he was a little drunk then.


    Phew And so, Mr. Takumi.


    Yes.


    Mr. Ekenhart emptied his ss again in order to calm down.


    Perhaps he should pace himself a little?


    But Sebastian refilled his cup calmly, so perhaps he was fine.


    So, I wanted to ask you about ireand if you have any ns.


    Uh, well My ns are to go to Range vige with her, and work on the fields


    That is fine. I have my permission. Your idea was good Instead of hiring her, managing it together. However, thats not what I meant


    Well, I thought of it on a whim What did you mean then?


    It is just thatwith ire. You seem to havee rather close.


    Ah Well


    Apparently, Mr. Ekenhart was concerned with how close we had be.


    Of course, I care about her opinion, and so just hearing from you alone does not mean much. Still, if both of you choose the same thing, then I will allow it.


    His Grace wished to see his grandchildren.


    Grandchildren!?


    Sebastian! I did not say that!


    Indeed? But it seem like you were pushing Mr. Takumi to


    No, I did not push anyone


    Grandchildren But we werent even dating


    Uhh In other words, you want to know if I like Ms. ire?


    Mmm That is what Ive been saying.


    No, you were using vague expressions Well, I suppose the meaning was mostly the same.


    It is obvious, even when viewed from a distance, that you do have feelings for ire. And she knows that as well. But I am not sure how deep it is


    Obvious. So even people aside from Mr. Ekenhart knew?


    Both Sebastian and Leo were nodding, so I suppose it was in to see.


    After all, I hadwell, Leo had rescued her. And then she let us live in this mansion and took care of us.


    I learned so much from her and Sebastian. And she treated me equally in spite of her position, which gave me a good impression.


    There was no reason for me to not like her.


    However


    Im sorry. As for how I feel. I cannot answer it.


    What? In other words, you know how she feels, and yet you want to just continue to toy with her?


    Your Graceuse this


    No, no, no! Not at all. And Sebastian, dont give him that sword right now! Where did it evene from!?


    The moment that I refused to answer, Mr. Ekenhard red at me angrily.


    It was very scary!


    Not only was I no match for him in skill, but I had never seen him look so intense before, and so I denied it frantically.


    Besides, Sebastian was handing him a sword. That was not funny!


    Aside from Mr. Ekenhart, everyone in the mansion adored Ms. ire, so I really had to tread carefully here


    No. But just in case, it might have to be used.


    Might have to No, that wont happen!


    Really?


    Yes!


    But you cannot answer the question about ire Does that not mean that you are toying with her?


    Sebastian put the sword awaysomewhere.


    And so I ignored him. Still, why was Mr. Ekenhart jumping to that conclusion


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Mr. Ekenhart had called me The master wants to see you. He said that he wanted to talk to you while the others were away Mr. Ekenhart? Do you know what he wants to talk about? No, I do not. I was merely told to call you, unless you wereMarch 19, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I decided to leave them and go to sleep Sebastian!? Sebastian!? It iste. You must be quiet, or you will wake up the others. Unless you do not mind disturbing their sleep, even though it will affect their performance tomorrow. Sebastians voice was very thorny indeed. I quickly openedNovember 13, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    More people would be going to the forest Wait a minute, Mr. Takumi? Ms. ire? As I looked at Liza and waited for her answer, Ms. ire suddenly interrupted me. Well, uh If little Liza stayed at the mansion, then she would be alone. Butwell. As long as you andOctober 28, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 608

    Chapter 608


    I Answered Mr. Ekenhart Seriously<hr>


    While nothing clear had been said, it was true that I often felt that Ms. ire was fond of me. There was that one time when things had been particrly intimate.


    And then Mr. Ekenhart had ruined it.


    I cannotanswer it now.


    Why is that? I can sense that Leo is tense, so it would be nice if you could just hurry up and tell me


    Grr


    I repeated that I could not answer, and then Mr. Ekenhart red at me.


    And Leo stood up and red back at him.


    Mr. Ekenhart was overwhelmed and seemed to shrink back.


    I suppose it was because he brought out the sword


    Its fine Leo, you dont need to intimidate him.


    Mr. Ekenhart loved his daughter, and would not attack me out of nowhere.


    In any case, it seemed like he would not let me go unless I gave him an answer. And it would affect how he treated me tomorrow. So it was best to say something.


    Um Well, the truth is that I dont know.


    You dont know?


    Yes. I have never been close with someone like her before So I dont know my own feelings Well, I am indebted to Ms. ire, you, and the people of this house. And while I like her as a person, I dont know if those feelings are romantic yet


    So youck experience I see. But even if its just light-heartedly, why not reciprocate a little?


    No Wouldnt that be toying with her?


    Well, you might be serious if you try?


    His Grace failed many times in such a way when he was younger. Until he finally married histe wife


    In spite of what he said earlier, Mr. Ekenhart was now suggesting that I didnt have to be serious.


    Surely that would just lead to a situation where he cut me down.


    It was true that I could change eventually


    But after hearing how many time Mr. Ekenhart had failed, I did not think it was a good idea.


    Also, while I am allowed to live here and make money selling herbs, I am still being protected by you.


    Well, that is true. Though, with Leo, it is also like we are being protected.


    Wuff!


    Leo, this is no time for boasting.


    Wou


    In any case I suppose I want to be independent and try different things for myself first. And as I do that, I think things will be more clear to me. Perhaps I just want to buy time


    Hmm I see


    Hohoho


    In spite of Leo and Weed Cultivation, I was still under their protection.


    We had a contract and were selling herbs, they were doing a lot of the work for me, and helped me with so much.


    Perhaps I sounded too formal or traditional, but I wanted to live independently first.


    There was so much about this world that I didnt know yet, and I wanted to learn and be stable.


    Mr. Ekenhart became thoughtful, and Sebastianughed.


    But they both seemed strangely relieved.


    So, you are at least thinking about ire seriously?


    Ms. iremyself, Leo, Weed Cultivationand this world.


    Mr. Ekenhart asked again and stared at me.


    In spite of the fact that he had drunk a lot of wine, he was still intimidating. It reminded me that he was the head of a great house.


    Still, I held my ground and answered.


    He was the kind of person that watched closely to see if someone was lying.


    I had seen him do it with Tilura before, and it certainly made me nervous to be his target.


    Your Grace


    What do you think, Sebastian?


    He is not lying. I have watched Mr. Takumi closely, and he is not the kind of person to lie about such things.


    Indeed. Exactly. Sorry, Mr. Takumi. I ended up testing you.


    No She is your daughter, so it is only natural for you to want to assess potential partners Phew


    Wuff


    Sebastian and I had talked quite a lot since I came to this world.


    And so it felt good to be trusted by someone who was trusted by both Ms. ire and Mr. Ekenhart.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    He questioned me as a father Now, Mr. Takumi Yes. He looked as the wine was poured into his ss He seemed very thoughtful. As the air had grown a little serious, I nodded cautiously. What was he going to say? ... ... ire Yes? What do you mean toMarch 20, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Mr. Ekenhart had called me The master wants to see you. He said that he wanted to talk to you while the others were away Mr. Ekenhart? Do you know what he wants to talk about? No, I do not. I was merely told to call you, unless you wereMarch 19, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    More people would be going to the forest Wait a minute, Mr. Takumi? Ms. ire? As I looked at Liza and waited for her answer, Ms. ire suddenly interrupted me. Well, uh If little Liza stayed at the mansion, then she would be alone. Butwell. As long as you andOctober 28, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 609

    Chapter 609


    Ms. Anne was the reason<hr>


    Mr. Ekenhart trusted me now, and he apologized for the test.


    Well, I understood how he felt, and it didnt bother me that much.


    And so I smiled and let out a sigh of relief, as did Leo.


    He really had been intimidatingand I grew nervous.


    In any case, I would be careful to not do anything to lose that trust


    Glugphew I suppose I got a little frantic due to what happened earlier.


    Indeed. Even if it was a fun situation, their opinions are the most important. Sometimes it is best to leave it to the young.


    As a father, I wanted to question Mr. Takumi. Though, there was no need to worry


    Um, what do you mean? Frantic?


    Mr. Ekenhart drank his wine and let out a sigh.


    Apparently, he had also been nervous, and was able to rx now.


    I suppose he was talking about the bath, but why should he get frantic?


    It was what Anneliese said.


    Ms. Anne? Oh, abouting in with me?


    Mmm. Well, while I doubted you would ept the offer. One is never sure


    Well, I suppose it was ttering


    Hoho. You are young, so its understandable.


    Ms. Anne had said something shocking. But while she was very beautiful, she also had some very unfortunate qualities.


    Regardless, it would have been very unfaithful of me to be thinking of Ms. ire, while also epting invitations from Ms. Anne.


    That would be like epting her marriage proposal.


    Your Grace, you used to be the kind of person who would be fooled like that.


    Sebastian. Dont talk about that! Besides, I was just being polite. A gentleman cant be rude and reject ady!


    Hoho The servants were so worried back then They thought your indiscretion would ruin you.


    I dont remember doing anything to cause worry


    We wondered if they wouldnt stab you And so we made sure to keep a guard or soldier around at all times.


    So thats why Ah


    Mr. Ekenharts relief did notst for long, as Sebastian started to bring up the past.


    While he did look intimidating now, it was not too surprising Even now, he was quite handsome when he shaved.


    And given his position, all kinds ofdies would have been interested.


    Nevermind me. Regardless, I am d to know that Mr. Takumi is thinking about it seriously. Of course, I hope that they end up together in the end.


    Together Arent you getting ahead of yourself?


    Well, a rtionship between you two cant stay the same forever.


    I suppose


    The thought of my little ire getting married


    No, no. You really are moving too fast!


    I still didnt understand my own feelings, and I wasnt sure about Ms. ires either.


    We could not decide anything now.


    Why do you want her to get married? She is the oldest daughteryour oldest child. Isnt she your heir? I heard that women can be the head of the family If she were to marry into someone elses family Unless there are other brothers and sisters


    Lady ire and Lady Tilura are His Graces only children. Unless he has hidden illegitimate children


    Even I would not do that. As you said, Mr. Takumi, gender does not matter. The first head and founder of this house was a woman. As for the marriage arrangements, that would depend on you and ire. Obviously, it will be no good if both my daughters left


    I see So even if Ms. ire left, Tilura will be your heir


    That is likely. But it could also be any child between you and ire. Some may not like it, but they will have our blood, so it doesnt matter.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    We had a visitor I see, that is good. Well, like that, we learned that there is a lot more to protecting a target, than merely bing stronger. After seeing that we did not want to hear more, Phillip sighed in relief and his expression brightened. Well, now that IOctober 1, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I Answered Mr. Ekenhart Seriously While nothing clear had been said, it was true that I often felt that Ms. ire was fond of me. There was that one time when things had been particrly intimate. And then Mr. Ekenhart had ruined it. I cannotanswer it now. Why is that?March 21, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    A misunderstanding ...Well, I used to know Deam when we were younger. He never trusted anyone, and only thought of using others Though, I never imagined that he would be a boss of the slums. I see So you were friends? No. I never did like the way that heSeptember 19, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 610

    Chapter 610


    I was the Dukes favorite<hr>


    A child with Ms. ire The mere thought was embarrassing and much too soon. Well, at least I didnt have to worry too much about Tilura Well, who knew what would happen?


    With Barsler, it has already been decided. Because he only has one daughter. It is best to decide quickly.


    As Ms. Anne was an only child, there was no way that she would marry into another family.


    Unlike Mr. Ekenhart, they cared a lot about their status, and so they would only be thinking about finding someone to take her name.


    And we must avoid having you go over there


    Uh, what do you mean?


    Wellum


    You are hesitating. Is there some problem? Well, Im sure that house will be struggling for a while.


    Thats not what I mean Hmm


    Mr. Takumi. His Grace does not want you to leave. Hohoho


    Sebastian!


    Not want me to I didnt realize you were that attached?


    I dont mean it like that!


    It did feel a little awkward to hear such words from an old man.


    To have you and Leo go with Anneliese Of course, we would not want that. After all, there is the legend of the Silver Fenrir and our founder.


    Ah It would look like the count stole your emblem?


    Something like that


    There was a legend that their founder was able to treat with Silver Fenrirs on equal footing.


    And with the help of a Silver Fenrir, the founder had achieved many things and was able to rise to the rank of Duchess.


    So they felt a sense of duty


    It was even on the family emblem, and so people would likely spread rumors about why a Silver Fenrir would leave them and go to the count.


    However, there was something a little odd in the way that Mr. Ekenhart spoke.


    Usually, he sounded very confident, but there was none of that now.


    And his eyes were shifting But it did not look like he was lying either.


    So


    Hmm?


    What do you mean?


    Its very obvious, Your Grace.


    Tsk! I suppose I drank too much!


    NoI dont think its the wine


    My master has never been good at lying. That is one of the reasons that the people like him But it sometimes makes my job difficult


    To me, it seemed like a good thing, but I suppose it could be troublesome when dealing with other nobles and people of the upper ss.


    Even in business, while not outright lying, such things may be important


    In any case, it was one of the reasons that people followed him, so it was not a bad thing.


    Hah Well, then There are not many people who I can talk to honestly. Of course, the thing about Leo is also true. Butif you were to leavewe would have fewer opportunities to talkmm


    Isnt it just as I said, Mr. Takumi?


    Haha, I can see that.


    Huh? What are you two talking about?


    No, it is nothing. Dont worry about it.


    Mmm


    Equal. While I had never forgotten that I was talking to a lord duke, apparently, Mr. Ekenhart saw it differently.


    Well, even if I was trying to talk politely, I was probably quite rude, considering it was with a nobleman After all, I didnt know anything about manners and how to deal with people of the upper ss


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    We would use both of the materials And so I have a suggestion. Why not use both stone and wood materials? Both? Yes. First, have the rooms that you and Leo and Lady ire will live in made of stone. And the other rooms can be made of wood. WhileMarch 1, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Sebastian had a difficult past How hard it must have been. If he had used violence, then perhaps he would have more to eat. More money and clothes But even if that was what others were doing, he swore that he wouldnt. That was impressive. With Liza, the boys wereDecember 19, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Ms. Anne was the reason Mr. Ekenhart trusted me now, and he apologized for the test. Well, I understood how he felt, and it didnt bother me that much. And so I smiled and let out a sigh of relief, as did Leo. He really had been intimidatingand I grewMarch 22, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 611

    Chapter 611


    Liza woke me up<hr>


    Apparently, it was a good thing that I treated him differentlypared to other people, and Mr. Ekenhart thought of me as a friend.


    When it came to sword training, we were master and apprentice. But with everything else, considering Leo and the Gift, we were close to equal standing.


    What is it, Mr. Takumi?


    Ah, nothing at all. In any case, I have no intentions of going with Ms. Anne, so please dont worry about that. Ill be much too preupied with my work in Range vige.


    Mmm. Well, I am relieved then. Hahaha!


    Your Grace, perhaps you have had enough wine now?


    What are you talking about, Sebastian? This is a friend, who may be a son inw eventually. Of course I will drink!


    I suppose so.


    No, no. A son Nothing has been decided yet!


    Hahaha!


    Hohoho!


    Wuff


    While I was happy to be called a friend, this talk about being a son inw was much too soon. I had already told him that.


    I suppose it was mostly a joke, and he was just teasing me. After all, both he and Sebastian burst intoughter.


    They were really amused Well, that was fine.


    As for Leo, she let out a sigh and closed her eyes.


    Sorry, Leo. All of this talk is probably very boring for you


    Papa and mama!


    Gah!


    Wou?


    The impact caused me to wake up.


    When I opened my eyes, Lizas head was on my stomach, and she was clutching onto Leo.


    She had woken up and charged into us


    Liza. Charging and grabbing like that Well, its probably fine for Leo, but dont do that to me.


    Okay!


    Wuff?


    You dont mind, right, Leo?


    Wou.


    I said as I gritted my teeth at the pain.


    While I didnt mind being hugged, it was quite different toe suddenly while I was asleep.


    Liza was short, so her head rammed into my stomach, and I couldnt breath for a moment.


    As a beastkin, Liza was also stronger than humans However, Leo had soft fur, so she would be fine.


    Good morning, Mr. Takumi.


    Ah, good morning, Ms. Lyra.


    Yes. Uh, sorry aboutst night


    Not at all. You two seemed veryfortable. Besides, it was nice to sleep while leaning against Leo.


    I sat up and got to my feet. And then I heard someone greeting me from the other side of the room.


    When I turned, I saw Ms. Lyra. She had an apologetic expression as she bowed her head.


    Last night, even while being teased, I stayed and talked in the dining hall until it was quitete.


    Eventually, Mr. Ekenhart fell asleep on the table, and so I left him to Sebastian while Leo and I returned to my room.


    Sebastian hadughed about how Mr. Ekenhart did not let go of his wine ss, even while sleeping.


    In any case, when Leo and I reached our room, we saw that Liza was sleepingfortably on the bed.


    And she was clutching onto Ms. Lyra.


    Apparently, she could not make Liza let go, and ended up falling asleep as well.


    After all, I had been away for quite a long time.


    I also felt bad about waking them up, and so I just used Leo as a nket and pillow.


    Thanks to the bath, Leos fur was very fluffy, and enveloped my body. And Leos warmth kept me from getting cold during the night.


    While beds were nice, sleeping like this wasnt bad either.


    Leo also seemed to be happy about it.


    But Ms. Lyra apologized for taking over the bed. While I didnt mind, I suppose she felt bad as a maid.


    Wuff.


    Yay, mama!


    Hey, its morning. Dont fall asleep again.


    Okay. Mama is so fluffy!


    Wuff-wuff.


    Liza seemed a little jealous that I had slept on Leo.


    And so Leo gestured for her toe, and so Liza jumped on her happily.


    And while I warned her, she seemed to be ying, so it was unlikely that she would go to sleep.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Rahle liked being on the roof Ms. Lyra smiled and greeted me. While it must have been tough, staying in the forest and cooking, I was d to see that she wasnt tired anymore. Please leave her to me. If she wakes up, I will help her get ready andFebruary 21, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    The dining hall fell into a great confusion ...I-I see. Yes! I would never suggest anything else Mr. Takumi? Ahits nothing! Ms. ire had asked me with an embarrassed expression, and so I nodded frantically. But then I looked towards Ms. Lyra and my voice trailed off. It was notMarch 11, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Ms. ire and the others would be very busy And so I agreed with Mr. Ekenhart that I did not want her to be put in danger. Though, from her perspective, it probably looked like I was doing something dangerous. And it probably caused her to worry. I would haveSeptember 24, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 612

    Chapter 612


    Breakfast was not in the dining hall<hr>


    Im very sorry. Ah


    No, I dont mind Is something the matter?


    Uh, no Its nothing. I prepared the necessary things for the morning. Well then


    Yes, thank you.


    Sister Lyra, was she in pain? Was it because she slept with me?


    UhNo. Its not your fault, Liza. She wasnt in pain or anything. Its fine.


    Really?


    Aye. She should be fine by the time we are ready to go downstairs.


    When our eyes met, she suddenly became embarrassed. I suppose she remembered what happened in the bathing room.


    Regardless, I assured Liza that she was fine, and would be back to normal soon.


    Mr. Takumi, are you awake?


    I am. You cane in.


    Yes, excuse me!


    Momentster, there was a knock on the door, and I heard Tiluras voice.


    She sounded as cheerful as always.


    Good morning.


    Morning, Tilura.


    Good morning, sister Tilura!


    Wuff!


    But I thought Tilura would go to Rahle today. I wonder what happened?


    We had gone with her yesterday, and she seemed to have be very used to being around Rahle


    Arent you going to meet Rahle today?


    Oh, I already did! In fact, I came to call you because were not eating breakfast in the dining hall this morning!


    Were not? Then where will we be eating?


    Hehe. Thats a surprise! Liza, lets go and wash up!


    Yes! Ill be going, papa and mama!


    Go along then.


    Wuff!


    Mr. Ekenhart would be leaving tomorrow. So I wasnt sure what reason they had to eat anywhere else today.


    Well, I would find out soon enough, so I just had to get ready


    I see Its the back garden then


    Yes. Like this, I can eat with Rahle!


    After I was prepared, Tilura took me to the garden behind the mansion.


    Normally, we would train with swords here Leo would run around.


    A table that wasrge enough for ten people had been set out, and chairs prepared.


    Ms. ire and Mr. Ekenhart were already sitting, and the food had been served.


    Good morning, Mr. Takumi.


    Good morning. You too, Mr. Ekenhart.


    Mmm.


    Are you feeling alright?


    Tilura woke me up Well, that is fine. But that wine yesterday I drank too much.


    Really, father While Im not looking


    We got to talking quite a lotst night. I probably should have said something as well.


    Aha hangover.


    After greeting Ms. ire, I took a seat at the table.


    While it was the same seating as always, Rahle was next to Tilura this time.


    As for Mr. Ekenhart, he looked a little pale.


    Apparently, it was because of all the wine he hadst night.


    Back when I had first started drinking, I had suffered hangovers as well It had been very bad.


    And it was not a good enough reason to rest from work, so I just had to take medicine and go.


    Ms. ire sighed and red at her father. Wellit wasnt something that could be said in front of her


    Well, leaving that aside Eating outside sometimes is rather nice. Even though we did plenty of that in the forest.


    Indeed. It is quite refreshing. Though, this back garden is a little in


    It had to amodate Leo and Rahle If we leave the garden, then we will be much farther away from the mansion


    It was kind of like having a pic.


    Unlike in the forest, we were not surrounded by tall trees, so it was very open.


    But as Ms. ire said, there were no other nts or flowers, so there was not much to look at.


    If there were such things, they would get in the way. Leo and Rahle would probably end up stepping all over them.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Iforted Tilura Well, it looks like they will arrive safely. Were back! Wuff! After watching Tilura and Rahle for some time, therge building finally came into view. Somehow, Tilura had managed to stay on this whole time. Perhaps Rahle had sensed her fear, as there were no moreFebruary 12, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Everyone was wet Right after shaking, Leo looked at us with a puzzled expression, and then looked startled when she realized. And then she bowed her head apologetically. It had taken longer than usual, and she had done it without thinking. Still, I wish she had moved away a littleMarch 17, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Ms. ire decided to praise Liza Thiswell, the fenrirs are obeying. But is it really cute? Father! Liza worked hard, and so you should not say such things! Ah, uh. Yes Hmm It is indeed cute, Liza. Yes, it is. Very cute. Amazing, Liza! Yay! Everyone likes it! Liza wasJanuary 22, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 613

    Chapter 613


    There were some familiar monsters<hr>


    Tilura was very excited this morning. Its a good thing that she is having fun, butshe spent time bathing Leo yesterday, so perhaps she wanted to spend more time with Rahle.


    Sister, thats a secret!


    Oh, it is?


    Apparently, after greeting Rahle, Tilura had the idea of eating breakfast outside.


    I suppose she was excited about being able to be together I thought about it with a smile.


    However, Mr. Ekenhart seemed less cheerful about it, as he had a hangover. And Tilura had crashed into him when waking him up.


    Well, as long as she is happy, I dont mind eating outside But


    Are you talking about that?


    That


    Ms. ire and Mr. Ekenhart followed my gaze.


    Why is Fen and Riruru here? I thought we separated from them in the forest


    Mm Sebastian, you exin it.


    Certainly. Uh, it was early in the morning. I received an emergency report from the soldiers who were on guard duty. They said that two fenrirs were sitting in front of the gate.


    In front of the gate?


    Fen and Riruru were currently lying on their backs and getting rubs from the servants.


    They did not seem like monsters or wild animals at all


    Yes. Right in front of the gate. And so I rushed to go and see They were sitting, just Leo is sitting right now.


    Wuff?


    Leo was sitting next to me politely and waiting for the meal to begin.


    She tilted her head when all eyes turned to her, but some drool nearly fell from her mouth.


    Some delicious food was ced on the table in front of her, so it could not be helped.


    Im very sorry, Leo. Let us eat and continue.


    Indeed.


    Leo cannot wait any longer. So lets start.


    Yes.


    Kii!


    Kyau!


    Wou!


    After Sebastians suggestion, we all started to eat.


    It was one thing for humans, but Leo, Rahle and Sherry were also tired of waiting, and so they immediately started eating.


    I had heard yesterday that Rahle enjoyed meat, and so it pecked at the cooked meat and ate it.


    Now, lets continue The two fenrirs were sitting in front of the gate. Thankfully, I had told the people here about what happened in the forest. And so no one panicked and attacked them. However, they were definitely surprised, and there was a little confusion.


    Indeed


    If someone did attack them, and they fought back, who knows what would have happened


    Buff!


    Leo, thats bad manners. Focus on eating.


    Guff!


    Fen and Riruru had promised that they would not attack unprovoked. And so they were sitting there quietly.


    Still, the guards should be praised for not attacking them.


    But then again, they were used to seeing Leo. That probably yed a big part.


    While eating, Leo barked with food in her mouth as if to say, I will punish them if that happens!


    Regardless, I was d that that did not happen, as I warned her.


    Well, aside from thatthey were also carrying orcs in their mouths.


    Orcs?


    Yes. Apparently


    Fen and Riruru hade with their prey, as if they were hunting dogs.


    And upon seeing Sebastian, they put the orcs on the ground as if an offering. At the same time, their bellies were growling.


    If they were hungry, why didnt they just eat the orcs Thought Sebastian, but even when asked this, the two fenrirs did not eat it.


    Shortly after, Ms. ire and Sherry woke up.


    And so they were informed, and Sherry was able to interpret for them. The fenrirs wanted to eat cooked orc meat.


    They could not forget how delicious Ms. Lyras cooked meat was, and so they hade here in order to eat it again.


    As for how they found the mansion, they followed our scent while sending Leo and Rahles presence.


    Well, they were fenrirs, so I wasnt surprised that it was easy for them.


    Still, it felt like we had fed some stray dogs, and they would not follow us forever


    But since they hade all of this way, it was suggested that they could eat with us. Especially since Tilura already wanted to eat outside with Rahle.


    The servants then greeted them, as a way of getting used to them. And the two fenrirsy on their backs in order to get the belly rubs that they had also acquired a taste for in the forest


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Rahle was sorry Tilura, are you alright!? Sister! Yes, Im fine! Shortly after, the carriage carrying the others arrived as well. Ms. ire immediately jumped out and rushed to Tilura. As for Mr. Ekenharthe was looking this way, but perhaps he didnt want to show his distress, as he didFebruary 13, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Breakfast was not in the dining hall Im very sorry. Ah No, I dont mind Is something the matter? Uh, no Its nothing. I prepared the necessary things for the morning. Well then Yes, thank you. Sister Lyra, was she in pain? Was it because she slept with me? UhNo.March 25, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Rahle did something dangerous Alright, Leo. Lets go too! Wuff! Chase after them! We should go too. Indeed. Will Tilura be alright? I understand that youre worried, but good Leo will look after her. So she will be fine ...She looks like she is having fun, but it is scary.February 11, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 614

    Chapter 614


    Ms. Anne regretted her earlier words<hr>


    Ah, by the way. Where is Ms. Anne?


    I asked as I watched the two fenrirs being petted.


    Mr. Ekenhart hated getting up in the morning, but was still here. So it was odd that Ms. Anne was not


    She is in her room. Hahif she was going to regret it, she should not have said such a thing


    What do you mean? Did something happen?


    I am talking about what she said yesterday before leaving the dining hall.


    Ah.


    About bathing together.


    Apparently, she had gotten carried away, andter regretted it.


    She had turned red right after saying it. So perhaps her regret had only increased since then.


    She should not have said it then But I suppose it could not be helped.


    I often said things that I would regretter.


    So there was no need to be frantic after all.


    It looks like it.


    She didnt really mean it


    I did get augh from seeing Anne roll around on her bed. Would you like to take a look, Mr. Takumi?


    No, even if you say it was amusing Well, it does sound No, I am fine.


    Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian realized that there was no need to rush things after seeing Ms. Annes state.


    As for Ms. ires invitation, I turned it down.


    It was one thing for two women, but she would likely not appreciate being seen by me It might just make things even worse.


    Regardless, Ms. ire clearly saw her as a target for mockery right now.


    In that way, she was a lot like her father.


    Wou!


    Grau!


    Gau!


    Kyau!


    After breakfast, we drank tea and rxed.


    Leo and the others were ying a short distance away from the table as I watched.


    Leo would bark an order, and Fen and Riruru would obey and move.


    For some reason, Sherry was moving with them, while Lizaughed while riding on Leos back.


    After Fen and Riruru were petted and calmed down, Ms. Helena cooked their orc meat, and they were able to eat to their satisfaction.


    As there was plenty of meat left, it would be used for lunch and dinner as well.


    It was like this in the forest toobut its so strange that things can be so peaceful in spite of there being so many powerful monsters around us.


    Indeed. It is all because of Leo and Mr. Takumi, Im sure.


    I didnt do anything Its all Leo.


    And Leo is with you. In any case, I would not have believed it possible a short while ago


    Mr. Ekenhart muttered as he watched Leo and the others.


    Ms. ire agreed, and said that it was thanks to me. But I had barely done anything.


    In any case, humans and monsterswhile we werent exactly enemies, they were powerful and dangerous next to humans. So it was nice to see everyone ying so peacefully now.


    Oh, Rahle looks so good!


    Kii!


    Aside from Leo and the others, Tilura was enjoying her time with Rahle.


    Currently, Rahle was spreading itsrge wings, much to Tiluras delight.


    They werent the pretty wings of a peacock, but they certainly had a strong impact and looked cool.


    It was no wonder Tilura was so happy.


    The servants also smiled as they watched the scene in the garden.


    Unlike the first time they had seen Leo, they were not scared. It must be because they were used to it now.


    After all, Leo wasrger and stronger than any other monster.


    Mr. Takumi. Sorry to trouble you while you are resting, but Ms. Helena wishes to discuss something with you


    Ms. Helena?


    Yes. It is rted to cooking


    Hahvery well.


    As I watched, Ms. Lyra came to tell me that Ms. Helena wanted to discuss something.


    Ms. Helena, what is it?


    Im terribly sorry for calling you But I could talk about it in front of Lady ire and the others.


    After being told by Ms. Lyra, I had gotten up and walked back into the mansion.


    I had assumed that she would be in the kitchen, but Ms. Helena was waiting in the hallway, where a small table and chair had been prepared.


    It was nice that we could sit down and talk, but were they allowed to do this in the hallway?


    I asked Sebastian, and he made sure that no one would pass through here for now. I want to talk without being disturbed. After all, we cannot use the drawing room. And I felt bad about calling you to the kitchen.


    The kitchen would have been fine In any case, what is this about?


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    The dining hall fell into a great confusion ...I-I see. Yes! I would never suggest anything else Mr. Takumi? Ahits nothing! Ms. ire had asked me with an embarrassed expression, and so I nodded frantically. But then I looked towards Ms. Lyra and my voice trailed off. It was notMarch 11, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Birds were not a good fit for the rooms We arrived in front of the door. And then we stopped and considered the problem. Well, it was mostly Rahle, who looked at the entrance with a puzzled expression. As long as Rahle didnt spread out its wings, then it wasFebruary 14, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I talked with Ms. Anne As for where the fenrirs slept, Leo had decided it. But Sebastian felt that it was still important for there to be human watchers as well, and so nothing changed there. Well, the fenrirs could only bark, and could notmunicate with us in detail.January 13, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 615

    Chapter 615


    Ms. Helena had something to discuss with me<hr>


    Umafter returning from the forest, Im sure you hear about it from Ms. Gelda. About getting fat from eating too much, and how to deal with it.


    Ah. She did say something about that. How your food was so delicious that it was easy to eat too much. At least Mr. Ekenhart, Tilura and I exercise a lot with our trainingbut for the others


    Yes. Its not like Lady ire said anything to me directly, but Im a little worried. After all, it has happened to some of the servants already. And so I wanted to speak to you about it. Simply decreasing the portions is not enough Of course, I do want people to be able to eat as much good food as they want


    I see


    In other words, she wanted to talk to me about diet.


    For those who did not exercise, eating too much food that was high in calories could cause them to gain weight.


    I talked to you before about creating new dishes, didnt I? While this is a little different, I wanted your advice


    I do remember. As for thinking of dishes that will help you lose weightthat would be new. However


    Is it too difficult?


    That was often a subject of discussion in Japan.


    Some things were effective, while others were not.


    I didnt know a lot about it myself I never ate that much to begin with, and I couldnt cut down, as I barely had enough energy to keep up with all of the work I had to do.


    And you dont want to change the portions?


    Yes I know that is one way, but I would like to avoid it. If I make something good, I want people to eat plenty of it. It would be a different matter if Icked skill and the food tasted bad


    I see


    As a cook, she wanted people to enjoy her food and eat as much as they liked.


    While I had never worked as a cook, I understood the feeling.


    It was hard work and a lot of thought went into it. So having people enjoy it would be one of the greatest feelings for a cook.


    In that case Perhaps you should think about the ingredients.


    The ingredients?


    Yes. That could change things Perhaps there are ingredients that will help you lose weight.


    I dont know about that Well, I have mostly just thought about how things taste.


    Indeed


    This wasnt a world where you could easily find out the nutritional value of food.


    Im sure they had some concept of what was good for you, but dieting was a different matter.


    Considering many people came from the slums, or Sebastians past, it was likely that they didnt care, as long as something was edible.


    In any case, food that was effective for dieting


    Well, I had no idea if the food we had in Japan even existed here.


    Besides, I didnt have much knowledge of such things anyway. But as long as Ms. Helena was relying on me, I wanted to cooperate with her.


    Hmm They have potatoes in this world. So maybe something like konjac?


    Though, that had little taste by itself. Other than that Ah, I know


    Are there any soybeans?


    Soybeans were nutritious and good for dieting.


    It could be used for all kinds of dishes, and you could make tofu and bean sprouts.


    Soybeans? What are they like? I have never heard of them


    Hmm Well, they are about this big and


    Apparently, Ms. Helena had never seen them before.


    I wondered if they didnt exist, but then I remembered that things had different names here.


    And so I tried to exin it to Ms. Helena.


    Oh, sooy.


    Sooy?


    Well, it is a simr nt to what you are describing. It is often used for emergency food. Though, some viges eat them as a snack after cooking them. I believe they can be poisonous if not cooked?


    Ah, roasted soybeans. Yes, you can add different kinds of seasoning.


    I remembered that my grandmother used to make it.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Dinner portions were insufficient Mr. Takumi, sorry to disturb your rest. Dinner is ready, so pleasee down to the dining hall. But if you are too tired, we could bring it up to your room? Ah, no. I was just rxing a little. I will head down there immediately.February 17, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Sherry had be fat from eating too much Im sure Lady ire would have prepared some food if she knew Why didnt she ask her? Kyukyu I see. Uh, papa Sebastian was right. Ms. ire doted on Sherry, and would surely ask the servants to bring her some food. LizaAugust 30, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Street Stall Lunch In that case, lets buy some food and eat it. At Ms. Lyras suggestion, we decided to leave the store and head to the main street where we could buy some food. Leo remembered how we had bought all kinds of food when with Mr. Ekenhart, andAugust 10, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 616

    Chapter 616


    I suggested she use soybeans<hr>


    Seasoning?


    Well, you can eat it in, but surely it would taste better with something added?


    Hmm. I see. I am sure that you are right. I have only eaten them in up until now


    Yes, they wont taste that great if you only fry them.


    Well some people might prefer it, but I thought it would be better with some seasoning.


    Since you suggested it, Mr. Takumi, it must be good. I believe that it was discovered by someone very important long ago, and raised as crops


    Perhaps that person had also been from Japan, and had knowledge from his past life?


    I didnt know if there were actually such people.


    Regardless, there was a reason that I thought of it.


    It was the noodles I ate in Ractos.


    I could have sworn I tasted soy sauce in it.


    It was very faint, but if it was indeed soy sauce, then there must be soybeans here.


    Still, are you certain that it would be good for dieting?


    Hmm. I am not that knowledgeable about it But it is supposed to be nutritious and rich in fiber.


    Fiber? What is that?


    Umsomething required for expelling excess substances from the body? Uhh


    I was not really sure how to exin it.


    Regardless, I told her that it helped with the expelling process, and it was good for you as long as you did not eat too much of it.


    In other words, its good for your body, and is filling so that you arent likely to eat too much?


    Something like that. Of course, eating too much of anything is bad for you. So you should take it and make a healthy dish with it


    Healthy? I dont know Well, I suppose it is a good ingredient to start with. I shall look for others to use as well. Thank you for your advice.


    Not at all. I could only offer vague knowledge


    No! I hadnt thought much about ingredients like that, and so it was worth talking to you about it. Otherwise, I would have continued to only care about how things tasted.


    Ah, I know. Perhaps Tampopo tea would also be good?


    Tampopo? What is that?


    Its a nt. And you can make tea from the rootsthat is all. It is very good for you.


    It had just popped in my head, but perhaps I should have suggested coffee instead.


    The tea that they served here looked and tasted like ck tea. It was very delicious, but I thought it might be nice to have something different once in a while.


    Well, with coffee, factors such as bean selection, blending, and roasting methods can lead to changes in vor and potency. And so thought Tampopo tea might be easier to convey.


    nt rootsand you are sure there is no poison in it?


    Tampopos are not poisonous. Alsosince its not raised as crops, I might be able to make it.


    You can?


    With Weed Cultivation. If it is categorized as a weed and not something grown by people, I should be able to do it.


    Your ability. It may be something that is undiscovered here. And yet you can make it out of nothing


    I have to try it first Im sure that there are many useful nts outside of medicinal herbs.


    I was quite sure that they were not poisonous, and you can even eat the leaves.


    Though, you had to cook them properly, or they would not taste good.


    As soy was a crop, I could not grow it with Weed Cultivation, but Tampopos should be different.


    It was possible that it already existed here under a different name, but that wouldnt be a problem.


    This would be my first time using my ability for something other than herbsbut it seemed like a good idea. After all, it wasnt called Herb Cultivation.


    Weed was a rather vague category, but I was sure that there would be plenty of other useful nts.


    And I should search for new directions to use my Gift


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    It was a serious problem for the women Ms. Helenas first thought was to make food that was delightful to look at. In fact, the servants also agreed that such elevated presentation would make the food feel even more delicious. Indeed. The taste can be affected by that as well.February 18, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Dinner portions were insufficient Mr. Takumi, sorry to disturb your rest. Dinner is ready, so pleasee down to the dining hall. But if you are too tired, we could bring it up to your room? Ah, no. I was just rxing a little. I will head down there immediately.February 17, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Sebastian exined it excitedly Well, the demonstration cer. For now, we should talk about the herb fields. Mr. Haines, I assume you have already decided to give your permission? ...Yes. We would dly wee Mr. Takumi and Leo to the vige. And we have no reason to object.October 12, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 617

    Chapter 617


    We would make meals<hr>


    Very well, I shall think of dishes that will use the sooy.


    And I will try to make Tampopos.


    As I was not a cook, I could not give her much advice on how to cook them, so the rest was up to her.


    Ah, there is also one other thing


    I decided to tell her about konjac as well.


    Here, it was just called jac. As I knew they had potatoes, it was not surprising that they had it here. But I was still not sure how or why the names were both simr and different in this world.


    Mr. Takumi, what did Helena want to see you about?


    Oh, it was about cooking.


    When I returned to the back garden, Leo and the others were still ying, while Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire drank their tea leisurely.


    Tilura had also joined in with Liza and Leo.


    She had been ying with Rahle before, but currently, Fen and Riruru were standing on their hind legs while cing their paws on Rahle. Perhaps Liza had taught them a new pose. She was pping her hands with delight.


    Now that I think about it, I dont believe I asked you. Do you cook, Mr. Takumi?


    Well, its notlike I cant at all. Though, I would be very badpared to Ms. Helena. However, I do have some knowledge, and so she wanted to confide in me.


    Hmm, I see. ire is not like that.


    Father, there is no need to say such things. StillMr. Takumis cooking. I think I would like to eat that.


    As I had lived alone for a long time, I was able to cook.


    Though, most of it was simple, like just frying stuff in a pan.


    I did not have Ms. Helenas experience or sensitivity when it came to vor.


    Then perhaps I can make something? Thoughthere is no guarantee that it will taste good


    Oh, you heard me Well, if it is not too much trouble


    Haha, trouble. If anything, I feel that you have to eat it.


    Oh, Mr. TakumI? That should be amusing. Since I am leaving tomorrow, it would be nice to be able to eat it today


    Today? WellI guess.


    Good!


    I had suggested it half jokingly.


    My cooking was no match for Ms. Helenas, let alone Ms. Lyras. But if they wanted to eat it, I suppose that I could try.


    After all, I wanted to repay them for feeding me all of this time. Though, whether my cooking would suffice was a different matter.


    But Mr. Ekenhart was interested as well, and so I agreed to it.


    I had no other ns for the day Aside from making the Tampopos.


    Milina was handling the medicine now, and I had made herbs for Ractos yesterday.


    I wanted to make a little more, but I could do that when making the Tampopos before midday.


    Mr. Takumis cooking I wonder what it will be? It could be something that we dont have here. I am looking forward to it.


    Uh, I wouldnt expect too much Im not very good. You might be disappointed? Besides, the ingredients might not exist here.


    However, I was going to make something simple, and not anything that required rare ingredients. So it would probably be fine.


    Wuff-wuff!


    Mama!


    Oh, what is it, Leo?


    Wuff-wou!


    I see Yes, you liked it, didnt you, Leo?


    Leo likes it? Something other than sausages?


    Well, probably not that much But there was one thing I used to make that she really liked.


    But as I was so busy, I could not make it often.


    Aside from sausages, for some reason, Leo liked to eat what I cooked over dog food.


    Even if it was rather expensive dog food.


    That being said, we could notmunicate then like we could now. But whenever I started to cook, Leo would wag her tail and bring her bowl.


    At first I didnt give her any, as it contained things that dogs couldnt eat. Though, I eventually only used seasoning and ingredients that dogs could eat.


    Yesit had been a long time. And so I suppose I would make that.


    Im sure that Ms. ire and the others would like it too, and it was easy.


    As long as I didnt overcook it. But it should be fine if it I made it with Ms. Helenda. Besides, I knew that the ingredients definitely existed in this world


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    There were some familiar monsters Tilura was very excited this morning. Its a good thing that she is having fun, butshe spent time bathing Leo yesterday, so perhaps she wanted to spend more time with Rahle. Sister, thats a secret! Oh, it is? Apparently, after greeting Rahle, Tilura had theMarch 26, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I Thanked the Head Cook for Making Dinner I talked with Ms. ire and Tilura amidst a harmonious atmosphere, when the doors to the dining hall opened and the food was carried in on a wagon. Tonights dinner was a saut meat with sauce, a sd with a much thickerJanuary 13, 2022


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Things went smoothly this time Anne. Walk more normally. Ah, dont grab my arm like that! Ms. ire, I cannot go on While Tilura and Mr. Ekenhart seemed like a family on a hiking trip, Ms. ire and Ms. Anne were bickering. The reason was that Ms. Anne was exhaustedNovember 5, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 618

    Chapter 618


    I decided to make Leo happy<hr>


    Alright, Leo. Its been awhile, but I guess I can make that thing you liked?


    Wuff!? Wuff-wuff! Wou!


    Oh, mama is so happy! What are you going to make, papa?


    Just a simple dish.


    I see! Im looking forward to it!


    Something that would make Leo this happy I wonder what it is?


    I dont know, but Im looking forward to it.


    While I didnt say what it was, Leo seemed to understand, and her tail wagged happily as she barked.


    Now I felt like I should have made it sooner.


    Well, I will tell the others in the kitchen then. Is it okay if I make it for lunch?


    Yes, thank you.


    Sebastian had been listening, and offered to tell Ms. Helena and the other cooks. He seemed in a good mood as he left, so I suppose he had high expectations as well.


    I was starting to feel the pressure, but there was little chance that I would fail.


    Now, I better hurry up and make the herbs so that I can go to the kitchen.


    Wuff, wuff!


    Leo, there is still some time left, so calm down.


    Kyunn


    Since Fen and Riruru are still here, why dont you run around the garden? They say that exercise is a good appetizer.


    Wuff! Grau!


    Leo barked with approval at the suggestion, and then ran off towards the fenrirs.


    Ah, Liza went to Well, I guess they could y together.


    Shortly after, I saw Leo chasing after Fen, Riruru and Sherry. I suppose it was a form of training.


    Perhaps in order to escape this, Rahle had flown back up to the roof Those were some good instincts.


    By now, they had removed the tables and chairs that had been used for breakfast.


    Mr. Ekenhart returned to the mansion in order to prepare for his journey, while Ms. ire also prepared to go to Range vige.


    Also, she said that she had to go to check up on Ms. Anne In other words, make fun of her.


    Tilura had been told to go and study.


    So, Mr. Takumi. What will you be making today?


    Sebastian. When did you get here?


    Just as I was about to start with making the herbs, Sebastians voice rang from behind me.


    Perhaps Ms. Helena had told him about how I was going to try to grow the Tampopos.


    Sebastian was always curious about new things.


    I suppose he liked it, because it would allow him to talk about it in the future.


    Hohoho. It sounded very interesting. And so I wanted to watch.


    Well, I dont mind. Its not like there is anything to hide


    So Ms. Helena had told him after all.


    And so I squatted down and ced my hand on the soil.


    Well, I dont know what it is called here, but Im going to make something called a Tampopo.


    Tampopo?


    Yes. It was a verymon nt where I came from. You would just see them along the roads.


    I see. Then perhaps they do not exist here.


    Hmm. It was too early to say.


    After all, aloe and yomogi existed here with different names.


    Regardless, it would be faster to just show Sebastian, rather than exin it.


    As he had a lot of knowledge, he might have seen it in a book.


    Still, I didnt even know if I could make it.


    In any case, I will give it a try.


    Yes. I have high expectations.


    I might still fail Well


    As Sebastian smiled, I closed my eyes in order to concentrate.


    I then envisioned a regr Tampopo.


    On the side of a road It sprouts from between the cracks and blooms into a pretty flower.


    Hmm It seems to have worked.


    Oh?


    I felt something move from between my fingers.


    And the nts started to grow rapidly. The familiar leaves spread out and the flower bloomed.


    The numerous yellow petals and circr shape It was indeed a Tampopo.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Rahle had done well ...Leo? Wuff? Wuff-wuff! Good morning. There, there. What happened? I was standing where the servants had gathered, and so I could not see what was happening, as Leo and the fenrirs were blocking my view. Rahle was also spreading out his wings, so I could notFebruary 5, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Leo discovered something Ms. ire often seemed like she was holding something back. Perhaps she felt that it was necessary, as the dukes daughter. But from mine and Mr. Ekenharts point of view, it looked a little suffocating. But it was because of that, that the current Ms. ire wasJanuary 19, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Liza was scared of the fenrirs You always like to pet or hold Sherry, but you havent really approached the adult fenrirs. ...Papa noticed then. Recently, Liza had be less reserved, and more like an ordinary, yful child. And so I was wondering if there was a reason that sheJanuary 9, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 619

    Chapter 619


    The name of the nt<hr>


    This is it.


    Oh, it is quite pretty. HmmI think


    Have you seen it before?


    I have tried to study nts ever since you arrived. It looks like a dandeleeon. They are not really seen in this country. But there was a garden of them in a far, far away country. It was said to be very beautiful.


    You got that from a book?


    Yes. I have not seen them myself.


    Well, it did sound like the English name, but a little different?


    Regardless, it was not categorized as a crop after all That was a relief.


    So, what are you going to do with them?


    These dandeleeons. As you call them. I suppose Ms. Helena didnt tell you? Uhh I am going to use their roots to make tea.


    I exined as I pulled it out from the ground and showed him.


    Tea? Do you dislike the tea we serve that much then?


    No, its delicious, and I am grateful. However, this tea Uh, it contains something not found in other teas.


    Oh?


    While I did enjoy their tea, I was starting to really miss drinking coffee.


    Well, this wasnt exactly the same thing, but acquiring coffee would be a lot of work. So this seemed like a good ce to start.


    Besides, coffee beans would probably be considered a crop, so I wouldnt be able to make them the same way.


    As for the tasteit might not be to everyones liking But it is simr to something I used to drink. And I wanted to drink it again


    Basically, while it wasnt the same, if they didnt have coffee here, then I was willing to use this as a substitute.


    I did not know enough about caffeine to exin it to them so that they would understand. And so I just said that it was something that I wanted to drink.


    A drink that you like It must be quite good then.


    Uh, some would say so. But not everyone. But its good for youand might help you lose weight.


    Oh! That is wonderful.


    However, I wouldnt drink too much of it at once. Well, I suppose the same could be said about tea as well.


    Why? Is there poison in it?


    No. Wellyou might have to use the bathroom more often.


    Ah, I see.


    While it looked and tasted like coffee, it was not as bitter.


    I used to drink a lot of coffee for work, and started to like the taste. It was almost like an addiction. So I would have been perfectly happy if it was bitter.


    Regardless, with coffee and tea, if you drink too much, the caffeine might make you need to use the bathroom.


    I suppose that had some health or dietary benefits.


    I dont know a lot, but I think this tea should be more healthy than the one we usually drink.


    And just like the medicinal wine, it is good to drink such things.


    While there was still much I was unsure about, it was best to try and stay healthy.


    It would make it harder to get sick, and you would heal quicker if injured.


    And being healthy led to being more energetic and looking more youthful.


    Like Sebastian Well, now that I think about it, he didnt seem to be concerned with his health, in spite of looking young and having energy.


    Perhaps people in this world dont have to worry too much about eating healthy food?


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    I suggested she use soybeans Seasoning? Well, you can eat it in, but surely it would taste better with something added? ...Hmm. I see. I am sure that you are right. I have only eaten them in up until now Yes, they wont taste that great if you only fryMarch 30, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Sherry was tired from running As Sherry had been jogging around the garden, it was not surprising that she was tired. Unlike the time before we went to the forest, Leo was not chasing her. So she ran at a slower pace, but for a longer time. ...Leo might getFebruary 26, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We Decided to go to the Fenrir Forest Wuff-wuff-wou. Wou! Wuff-wuff. Uh, now it wasFenrirs know to submit. Its in their instincts. And even if they attack by some mistake, Ill defeat them all, so its okay Something like that? It probably wasnt what she was saying word for word,February 9, 2022


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 620

    Chapter 620


    Nick Was Happy<hr>


    And how do you turn it into tea?


    Uhjust wait one moment. There. That should do it. It can be brewed like any other tea now.


    That really is a useful ability Hmm. And it smells very nice.


    Dandeleeon tea has a distinct smell.


    With Weed Cultivation, I could dry it in an instant and turn it into powder.


    Indeed, it was so useful that I sometimes relied on it too much.


    Weed Cultivation had the ability to turn nts into their best state.


    I suppose it turned out like this because I had been thinking about tea.


    Apparently, it could also be used for medicine, but you used the whole nt, and not just the roots.


    Now, could you please deliver this to the kitchen? I made a promise with Ms. Helena.


    Certainly. And what will you do, Mr. Takumi?


    I will continue to grow herbs. Some for Ractos, and also more for testing. I havent made more since returning from the forest.


    Indeed. Very well then.


    I wrapped up the powder in some paper and handed it to Sebastian.


    Ms. Helena would make it into tea.


    After Sebastian left, I started work on the herbs.


    Though, my back hurt a little from all of the squatting


    If only there was some herb for that?


    Well, the ones for fatigue and sore muscles were probably enough.


    Oh, brother! Its been a while!


    Nick Well, it hasnt been that long.


    What are you saying! You went to the dangerous forest for days And I didnt see you the whole time! I was looking forward to this!


    Uh Right. Anyway Here are the herbs for Ractos. Give them to Mr. Kalis.


    Aye! I will deliver them safely no matter what!


    I mean, if you find yourself in danger, you can just drop them


    Nonsense! You made these precious herbs. And so I will not fail you!


    I see Well, thanks.


    It was hard to imagine that this was the person who had once scattered my herbs all over the ground.


    Your herbs are very popr in Ractos, and they fly off of shelves. Mr. Kalis is very grateful towards you.


    I should be thankful to him instead But are they really that popr?


    Yes! After that Deam bastard was arrested, the crime rate dropped. And so people know to not go against you or Leo.


    That seems excessive and more than just gratitude


    Those who havemitted crime are now shaking with fear, thinking that you will eventuallye to bring them justice.


    It was starting to sound like how Fen and Riruru could not go against Leo.


    Though, they hadnt done anything badbut still.


    I didnt really want to be viewed like that. I wasnt a duke like Mr. Ekenhart.


    I had no real authority.


    All I wanted was just to live quietly and rx.


    With Leo and Lizaughing


    Still, I was using this special ability at the same time that such thoughts went through my head.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    I suggested she use soybeans Seasoning? Well, you can eat it in, but surely it would taste better with something added? ...Hmm. I see. I am sure that you are right. I have only eaten them in up until now Yes, they wont taste that great if you only fryMarch 30, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I found out that I had the Gift of Weed Cultivation My name is Isabelle. Im a stingy old woman who runs this magic item shop. Its nice to meet you. Im Takumi. Takumieh? Alright, then put your hand on this crystal ball. All right. I moved over to Ms.January 9, 2022


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I made something useful for exploration with Weed Cultivation Everyone seemed to be a little surprised by my sudden outburst, but this was no time to be concerned with such things. If anything, I wanted to apologize that I had forgotten about such a useful Gift. Why had I forgottenMarch 21, 2022


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 621

    Chapter 621


    I started cooking in the kitchen<hr>


    In any case, please go and deliver the herbs.


    Yes, I will take them to Mr. Kalis!


    I had no idea why Milina and Nick thought so highly of me.


    Still, I did not want to keep Mr. Kalis waiting too long, and I had also promised to make lunch, and so I quickly sent Nick on his way.


    Excuse me then, brother. And Ms. Lyra!


    Be careful.


    Mr. Takumi, we were waiting for you.


    Uhh?


    Everyone is lined up?


    When I entered the kitchen, Ms. Helena and the other cooks were standing in a line and waiting.


    On my way there, Ms. Gelda had brought Liza. She wanted to help me with the cooking.


    As for Leo and the others, they were still running in the garden and working up an appetite Would they be alright? Especially Sherry.


    I hope they wouldnt get too tired to the point that they couldnt eat.


    Everyone is looking forward to your cooking, Mr. Takumi. Would it be alright if we watched, so that we can learn how it is done? Of course, we would also be d to help if you need it!


    No, Liza is going to help papa!


    Ah, I see. While its nothing special, I dont mind. And Liza, its best to have a lot of help when making something delicious. You want it to be delicious, dont you?


    Hmmokay!


    Apparently, they had all been waiting because they wanted to watch.


    Even though I didnt intend on making anything thatplicated I couldnt even if I wanted to.


    In any case, since it had never been served here before, it was probably something they had not seen.


    Uhhdo you have any minced meat?


    Yes, of course. We always have it, as its used when making sausages.


    The meat was the most important part.


    I would have preferred beef, but it didnt really matter what kind of meat it was.


    And so they brought out orcwhich tasted like pork.


    Now, you put it into a bowl and Do you have salt?


    Yes, here it is.


    Another cook brought me a jar of salt.


    Ms. Helena and the others were gathered around me and ready to bring anything that I needed.


    You put the salt in and knead it until it all sticks together. If it doesnt, you should add more salt.


    Thats all?


    For now. If it is not sticky enough, it might fall apartter, which would affect the texture. So you have to be careful.


    Yes. I see


    I washed my hands and mixed the minced meat with the salt while exining.


    I didnt actually know all of the details, and had little confidence in what I was saying


    Still, I would just pretend that it was all true.


    The cooks replied enthusiastically and seemed to be taking notes.


    Perhaps they would save the recipe so they could make itter. Even if it was really simple


    I suppose Ms. Helena and the others could improve it and make it even more delicious.


    Hmm, it doesnt really stick together well. Ms. Helena, this is orc meat, isnt it?


    Most of it is orc meat, but there is some other kind of meat in as well. Should it have been only orc meat?


    No, its fine if its mixed Ah, I see.


    Hmm. If it is mixed meat, the ingredient to add in order to help bind it together is


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Nick Was Happy And how do you turn it into tea? Uhjust wait one moment. There. That should do it. It can be brewed like any other tea now. That really is a useful ability Hmm. And it smells very nice. Dandeleeon tea has a distinct smell. With Weed Cultivation,April 3, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Nick was sorry about his past deeds It does seem like the day you rescued the girl, matches with the day that I started to see them more often. Perhaps it was because Deam gave out an order Do you know him? I should be asking you that. Wellsort of.September 18, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Spreading Reputation Rahle, you really dont mind being outside? Kii! Rahle doesnt mind. I see In that case, it is settled. The garden should be big enough, butI hope you will not go too far. Because people who dont know might be rmed. Kii! Even if they dont know whatFebruary 15, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 622

    Chapter 622


    Liza helped me<hr>


    Im sorry, but do you have any eggs?


    Yes. Here.


    Thank you. So they are exactly the same


    Mr. Takumi?


    Ah, nevermind. You crack the egg like this


    It was possible that they were called something else, but the cooks understood at once. Well, they might have been a little on therge side. But that could be true for any type of egg.


    I cracked it with one hand into the bond saw that it was the same on the inside as well.


    Mix itthere. Its starting to stick together now.


    Papa, can I help?


    Just wait a minute. You can help after this part, okay?


    Okay. How exciting


    Liza nodded as her tail wagged enthusiastically.


    Alright, its done. Ms. Helena.


    Yes, what is it?


    Can you make the same thing As much of it as possible? Since there are a lot of peopleincluding Leo and the fenrirs.


    And Rahle!


    Thats right. Rahle too.


    Certainly. We will do it.


    Yes!


    I had only made enough for two to three people, so it was not enough to feed the people of the mansion.


    Especially since Mr. Ekenhart and Leo ate so much. It was best to make a lot, just in case.


    Besides, Leo and the fenrirs were exercising now, so they would likely be hungrier than usual


    Ms. Helena agreed, and she called the other cooks, and they started the work of making more.


    Now, you can help with this part, Liza.


    Yay! I get to help papa!


    Why did she want to help so much?


    Still, she was clearly having fun, which was nice to see.


    I would have patted her on the head, only the ground meat would get on her hair.


    As for mixing the meat, it was best to do it in cold conditions, and so we used cold water to keep our hands cool


    And so I had Liza put her hands in the water as well, and shape the meat with a low temperature.


    Liza. Make them so that they are the size of your palm. Like this And move them back and forth between your hands.


    Uh Like this?


    Hmm. Maybe a little smaller?


    Okay! It feels funny!


    With making such things, part of the charm was seeing the difference in size and shape depending on who made it.


    If you wanted them all to be exactly the same, you would have to ask a professional.


    As Liza moved them back and forth in her hands and shaped them, she noted the strange feel of the meat.


    Well, she didnt cook, and wouldnt usually handle minced meat.


    Make sure that its properly t Otherwise, it might not cook though.


    Yes. Uhits fine!


    It looks alright. Andstlythis is the secret to making it taste good!


    Oh! It has a dent in it!


    Hehe. I thought of it myself. Interesting, isnt it?


    Amazing!


    Indeed, indeed.


    As Liza praised me so much, I got a little carried away.


    She was young and didnt know anything about cooking, and so everything was so new to her.


    Of course, nothing I was doing was actually difficult.


    Though, I was now in danger of bing more interested in cooking.


    Alright, now Ill pass the technique on to you.


    Pass on!


    Just use your finger to press it like this. And then


    There!


    Now you are able to do it too. See. Do you want to try it again?


    Yes! Take it in your hands, move back and forth, and when t, press it in!


    Oh, youre very good at it.


    After doing it once, Liza had memorized the process. She absorbed things very quickly.


    In the meantime, Ms. Helena and the others continued to make more of the shapes as well.


    Lizas was smaller than the others, but it was cute.


    After that, the only thing left to do was cook them.


    At this point, it should be pretty obvious what I was making.


    It would usually contain onions, but Leo used to be a dog, so I decided to not use them.


    A Silver Fenrir might be fine, as they were different. But I wanted to be safe.


    Besides, it was possible they didnt even have them here


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Iforted Tilura Well, it looks like they will arrive safely. Were back! Wuff! After watching Tilura and Rahle for some time, therge building finally came into view. Somehow, Tilura had managed to stay on this whole time. Perhaps Rahle had sensed her fear, as there were no moreFebruary 12, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian made fun of me Mr. Takumi. Are you thinking of something strange? N-nonothing really I hope you will continue to not be thinking about destroying Ractos? Yes, I will not think of such a thing. I am very fond of Ractos. After seeing me deep inSeptember 2, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We all washed Leo Ahaha! Mama got smaller! Its true! How interesting! Sherry is like that as well. I suppose it''s because they are covered in so much soft hair? The fur gets stuck to her when wet. But the difference is so much stronger because of how fluffy sheMarch 13, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 623

    Chapter 623


    The dish was finished<hr>


    Now, its time to cook it.


    Cook it!


    Ms. Helena and the others smiled at how excited Liza was, and they stopped their work.


    I suppose they wanted to watch and learn how to cook it.


    As for the meat, they had prepared over twenty kilos. It was a lot.


    After all, Leo, the fenrirs and Rahle were going to eat it. As were the servants.


    We hadnt meant to feed the whole mansion at first, but then Liza and I made the suggestion.


    Since we were going through the trouble, we might as well have everyone eat it.


    Even though it was a very simple dish


    Now, I will turn on the heat.


    Yes.


    Fire elemental candle.


    Ms. Helena put the firewood under the stove and lit it.


    Now that I thought about it, Sebastian had done the same spell when he first showed me magic.


    A me that was simr to that of a lighter transferred to the wood and then spread out.


    While it was easy to tell that it was burningit would be difficult to adjust.


    Uhh, please watch over it so that it doesnt burn. As I have never cooked here before Uhh, but it shouldnt burn as long as you flip it over.


    Certainly.


    Ill watch too!


    While Liza wanted to helpshe had no idea what she was doing, and so I would not expect too much from her.


    Oh? Do I smell something delicious?


    Sebastian.


    While being careful that they didnt burn, the meat patties were cooked and piled up into a mountain. That was when Sebastian popped into the kitchen.


    He had gone somewhere else after delivering the dandioleeons, but came back to see how we were doing.


    Are you finished now?


    Actually, no


    But they already look like they are cooked


    Indeed. However, cooking them was not thest step.


    As for the sauce, we were just going to use sauce that Ms. Helena used for other dishes, so that was fine.


    But the other thing was


    Ms. Helena. Do you have the bread?


    Yes, it was prepared. As was the cheese and vegetables.


    Thank you.


    Oh, bread and cheeseand vegetables?


    The bread had been cut so that they were about the same size as the meat, and the cheese was melted.


    As for the vegetables I wanted pickles, so we just had to use something that looked like lettuce.


    Now Will you help me, Liza?


    Yes!


    And so I put the bread on the te and ced the meat on top.


    Then I added Ms. Helenas sauce and the meat, and Liza added the cheese with a spoon.


    This much?


    I think it would be better if it was a little more.


    Okay!


    And then you do thisand its finished!


    Finished!


    Oh. So it is eaten with bread?


    Yes. This way, it is easy to eat.


    When I went to Range vige, Ms. Helena had made sandwiches for me.


    That had brought back memories of something that I used to eat often.


    Bread, meat, sauce, vegetables and cheese. A hamburger!


    Hmm. Meat sandwiched with bread We have something simr. But this is minced meat?


    Yes. We mixed it with eggs and salt. There are many other ways to make it You can really do it however you like.


    It was liked by many people and famous everywhere.


    But as for how you made it and the ingredients, there were numerous variations.


    It could be quite deep. Mine didnt have onions, because I wanted Leo to eat them But I was sure that Ms. Helena would do her own spin on it.


    Most people also add pepper, but I didnt.


    It was bad enough that there was salt in, which would not be good for Leo. Even if it was kept to a minimum.


    At least the sauce could be adjustedter. So it was quite convenient.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Dinner portions were insufficient Mr. Takumi, sorry to disturb your rest. Dinner is ready, so pleasee down to the dining hall. But if you are too tired, we could bring it up to your room? Ah, no. I was just rxing a little. I will head down there immediately.February 17, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We would make meals Very well, I shall think of dishes that will use the sooy. And I will try to make Tampopos. As I was not a cook, I could not give her much advice on how to cook them, so the rest was up to her. Ah, thereMarch 31, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I started cooking in the kitchen In any case, please go and deliver the herbs. Yes, I will take them to Mr. Kalis! I had no idea why Milina and Nick thought so highly of me. Still, I did not want to keep Mr. Kalis waiting too long, and IApril 4, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 624

    Chapter 624


    I carried the hamburgers<hr>


    Oh, we usually use minced meat for sausages. But you can make this as well.


    I had thought about using it for other dishesbut not like this. I had never seen it mixed with eggs and salt before.


    It is difficult to get it to stick together when its not all the same meat. But it will be delicious if youbine other things in it as well. If you wish to try it, of course.


    Since you were so kind as to show us, we will definitely use it!


    Haha. It is very simple, after all.


    I was just an amateur, so there was no doubt that the actual cooks would be able to make something much better once they tried.


    And what is this thing called?


    Its a hamburger.


    Hamburger! Hamburger!


    A lot of single guys ate them. The king of fast food Well, maybe I was exaggerating.


    Oh, they taste better while hot. So we should eat them quickly.


    In that case, I shall tell the others to go to the garden. The fenrirs are there, after all.


    Let us go at once then!


    Alright, Liza. Want to help carry them?


    Yes!


    Mr. Takumi, allow us


    Its fine. All of you helped me, so this is the least that I can do. Besides, were not finished until everyone has eaten it.


    There was melted cheese in it, and while the hot patties might keep them warm for a while, it was still best to eat them quickly.


    Sebastian then left to call Mr. Ekenhart and the others. While Ms. Helena and the cooks continued to put the meat patties in the buns.


    Ah, Ms. Helena. As I said before, for Leo and the fenrirs


    Yes. Sauce and cheese, but no bread. They will be prepared and ced on a separate te.


    Thank you.


    Mama is going to eat it differently?


    Hmm. Leo would have difficulty eating it with bread, wouldnt she? And so were just going to give her the meat.


    I see!


    Now, lets carry them together.


    Okay!


    The hamburger tes were put on a cart, and I pushed it out of the kitchen. And like that, we headed to the garden.


    Aside from Leo, I hoped that Ms. ire and Mr. Ekenhart and the others would be happy.


    Oh, you kept us waiting, Mr. Takumi!


    Wuff! Wuff!


    When I went out into the garden, the same table and chairs had been set out again. And Mr. Ekenhart and Leo were waiting impatiently.


    I understood Leo, but Mr. Ekenhart too


    Haha, sorry to keep you waiting.


    So, the food Is that it? It looks like bread with something inside


    Yes. Its called a hamburger. It has ground meat and other things inside.


    Wuff-wuff!


    I know, Leo. I prepared some for you as well.


    Wou!


    Mama is happy!


    Mr. Ekenhart was immediately interested in the food that we brought.


    Well, it was new And it was always exciting to imagine what unfamiliar food would taste like.


    Leo was also looking at me excitedly as she sat down. And her tail was wagging.


    In the meantime, I ced the tes on the table.


    Fen and Riruru. Eat up, alright?


    Grau!


    Gauu!


    Wou!


    Kuun


    Hey, dont do that, Leo. There is plenty for everyone.


    A short distance away from the table, I put the tes down on the ground.


    These were for Fen and Riruru.


    They were too big for the table, and Leo wouldnt allow it.


    Well, as wolves lived in packs, I suppose the pecking order was quite important to them.


    Sherry and Rahle were familiars, so they were special enough to eat at the table without objection.


    Fen and Riruru were happy to be able to eat, and they wagged their tails happily. Clearly, they did not care about eating on the ground.


    I suppose it was because they didnt usually eat anywhere near a table


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    The dish was finished Now, its time to cook it. Cook it! Ms. Helena and the others smiled at how excited Liza was, and they stopped their work. I suppose they wanted to watch and learn how to cook it. As for the meat, they had prepared over twenty kilos.April 6, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I started cooking in the kitchen In any case, please go and deliver the herbs. Yes, I will take them to Mr. Kalis! I had no idea why Milina and Nick thought so highly of me. Still, I did not want to keep Mr. Kalis waiting too long, and IApril 4, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Liza helped me Im sorry, but do you have any eggs? Yes. Here. Thank you. So they are exactly the same Mr. Takumi? Ah, nevermind. You crack the egg like this It was possible that they were called something else, but the cooks understood at once. Well, they might haveApril 5, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 625

    Chapter 625


    Ms. Anne was feeling a little better<hr>


    I made this one. Isnt it amazing!


    Wuff!


    Hehe. I see you did your best, Liza.


    Thats amazing!


    While preparing, Ms. ire, Tilura, and Ms. Anne came out into the garden and sat down by the table.


    Liza was boasting about the smaller hamburgers that she had made.


    And while Ms. ire and Tilua were praising her, Ms. Anne remained quiet.


    Ms. Anne?


    Huh! Wh-what is it, Mr. Takumi? Do you have something to say to me?


    No, not really


    Normally, she would have been watching the fenrirs ormenting on the food. And so I thought it was odd.


    Ms. Anne flinched when I addressed her, and then she blushed.


    Hmm I suppose she was still embarrassed about what she said the other day.


    Her hair was also in disarray.


    Perhaps it happened when she was rolling around on her bed.


    Her hair was a good indicator of how she was feeling.


    Still, she had managed toe out of her room, so I would not say anything.


    Has everyone been served? Now, Mr. Takumi


    Wuff.


    Mr. Ekenhart was clearly impatient to eat.


    Still, since I had been the main cook, he wanted me to exin what they would be eating.


    That being said, a long exnation would result in the food getting cold, and the cheese would be hard.


    Yes. Uhh, these are called hamburgers. Bread with grilled meat patties inside. The meat is the same kind used in sausages. But enough about that. Please eat it before it gets cold. We can talk about itter.


    Hmm, thats true. Lets eat then.


    Thank you, Mr. Takumi.


    Wuff-wuff!


    Thank you, papa!


    And thank you for helping, Liza.


    I then picked up my burger and took a bite.


    Hmmits not the same But its not bad either.


    As the ingredients were different, you could not expect the taste to be the same.


    Still, it was pretty close and made me feel nostalgic.


    Aside from the orc meat, the other meat that was mixed in was of good quality, and so the vor was quite luxurious.


    It wasnt because of my cooking, but the ingredients that Ms. Helena had chosen.


    Ingredients used for nobles chosen by a professional cook.


    Its delicious, papa!


    Because you worked so hard, Liza.


    Liza had taken a big bite at the same time as me, and weughed.


    Leo was eating hungrily and seemed to be enjoying it as well.


    I was d that she didnt say it tasted bad


    I did wonder if I had made them a little too big, but enjoyed it regardless. However, I then noticed that the others had frozen and were staring at me.


    Uh Is something the matter?


    No, but Its that eating like that is


    Said Ms. ire, and Ms. Anne nodded.


    As they were noblewomen, they didnt often eat with their hands. Most of the bread was in bite sizes, and if they wererge, they would cut them with a knife.


    Tilura was looking at her sister as if she wasnt sure if she should copy the way that we were eating.


    Hmragh? Tafefiaa?


    Father Please swallow your food before you talk


    Mmmgg! What? You arent going to eat it?


    NoI will eat it, but


    In spite of Ms. ires warning, Mr. Ekenhart did not seem to care much.


    I was d to see him eating it so enthusiastically.


    Though, perhaps he should slow down a little. Its not like the food was going anywhere


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Telling Ms. Anne About Weed Cultivation Good morning, Mr. Takumi, Leo and Liza. Morning, Tilura. You look well today. Wuff-wuff. Good morning sister Tilura! Yes, I feel great! You seem well too, Liza! Yes! Just as I was starting to prepare for the day, Tilura came to the room. SheAugust 2, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Liza was carried by Leo ...Water is amazing, huh? Yes. And when there is a lot of it, it can be dangerous. So you have to be careful. Let me see Hey, Leo? Wuff? Wou!? ...Kyukyu As I wanted Leo to help Liza, I turned and called to her whileNovember 7, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I Decided To Go Shopping In that case, I shall also go as a partner! Surely having someone like me there will make the venture even more of a sess! While Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian discussed it, Ms. Anne suddenly got to her feet and made this deration. What theAugust 6, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 626

    Chapter 626


    The new tea was ready<hr>


    Well, perhaps I should have made something that was easier to eat Something that you used a knife and a fork


    They could still use a knife to cut the hamburgers, but it would be a little difficult, as the bread was quite thick.


    The cheese was helping to keep things together, but it would fall apart if cut open.


    Hmmah, I know.


    Excuse me, Ms. Helena.


    Yes, what is it?


    Well


    Certainly


    Ms. Helena must have wanted to see their reaction, as she was standing close by. And so I asked her to bring me something.


    Thank you. Uhlike this Yes, Ms. ire. Now you can cut it with a fork and knife without it crumbling.


    Here, Lady ire.


    Thank you, Mr. Takumi and Helena.


    Ms. Helena had brought some wooden skewers.


    I then used it to pierce the center of the hamburger.


    Ms. re, Ms. Anne and Tilura all did the same and then started to cut it.


    Once they had bite sizes, they used their forks to carry it to their mouths.


    Their eyes widened and they looked at me.


    Its delicious, Mr. Takumi and Liza!


    It is quite different from sausages. And very soft.


    Im d to hear it. It tastes different because of the eggs.


    Ms. Anne seemed to like it, as she remained quiet and focused on eating.


    Ms. ire and Tilura were quite happy, and I couldnt help but smile.


    In spite of appearances, it is quite satisfying and delicious.


    Thank you. Along with the bread, you can eat everything all at once.


    Cheeseand this meat. They go very well together. I think Ive acquired a taste for it.


    I made it too!


    You did well, little Liza.


    After eating, everyone looked satisfied.


    The meat and bread had been quiterge, the meal ended up being more filling than expected.


    Even I only managed to eat two.


    Still, I wish we had some fries as well. Maybe next time.


    Your Grace, everyone. Here is the dandelion tea.


    Hmm? Ive never heard of that.


    Its a new tea made by Mr. Takumi.


    Oh, Mr. Takumi? It is quite fragrant. And different from our usual tea.


    How did you make it, Mr. Takumi?


    After seeing that we were resting, Sebastian and the servants brought out the tea.


    As I had turned it into powder and given it to him, he had wasted no time in making it.


    The liquid inside of the cups was ck, but a little more clear than typical coffee.


    As Mr. Ekenhart said, it was very fragrant, and Ms. ire and Ms. Anne were quite interested and surprised.


    Uhh, here, you call it dandileeon, I believe. Anway, it is a type of weed. And so I thought that I might be able to make it, and it worked.


    With Weed Cultivation?


    Yes. And then I dried it and turned it into powder.


    Dandileeon. Ive heard of that.


    I have not.


    It is grown in some garden in a far away country. As Mr. Takumi made it, it must grow naturally.


    There were limits to what I could make with Weed Cultivation.


    It was supposed to be just weeds, so I couldnt make any farm produce or nts that were bred by humans.


    If it is made with Weed Cultivation, does it have any effects like the herbs?


    Hmm. I wouldnt say that it does nothing, but its still quite different from the medicinal herbs. But there is something usually in tea that it does not contain.


    Oh? And what is that?


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    I refused Mr. Ekenharts suggestion After closing in on the left side of the orc, Liza used her momentum to sh at the orcs leg, cutting deep into its flesh. Due to suddenly not being able to move its leg, the orc fell and then slid on the ground. ItDecember 9, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Ms. Anne was feeling a little better I made this one. Isnt it amazing! Wuff! Hehe. I see you did your best, Liza. Thats amazing! While preparing, Ms. ire, Tilura, and Ms. Anne came out into the garden and sat down by the table. Liza was boasting about the smallerApril 8, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    The dish was finished Now, its time to cook it. Cook it! Ms. Helena and the others smiled at how excited Liza was, and they stopped their work. I suppose they wanted to watch and learn how to cook it. As for the meat, they had prepared over twenty kilos.April 6, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 627

    Chapter 627


    I exined to them about the tea<hr>


    I will tell you about it, so you can listen as you drink


    I didnt want it to get cold, and so I told them to drink the tea as I exined.


    They wouldnt know about caffeine, so I decided to start by telling them about danileeons.


    It was sometimes used in medicine, but was not exactly like the other herbs I made.


    Definitely not like Ramogi or Loe.


    Well, perhaps it could be more effective if mixed with other things. But right now, it was not medicine.


    After making this clear to them, I gave a simple exnation about caffeine.


    It could be good for you, but could also have negative effects if used wrongly.


    I had heard that you should refrain from drinking it when pregnant, for instance.


    Hmm. It is a little bitterbut nothingpared to the medicinal wine. And the smell is nice.


    It is not that bitter to me. II think its delicious.


    Ihate it. I suppose I could force myself to drink itbut I dont want to. Sorry, Mr. Takumi


    No, I knew it would be decisive. Especially since you are not used to drinking.


    Ughits bitter


    Wou!


    Thank you, mama


    Mr. Ekenhart liked it, but the others did not


    I had tried it as well, and the bitterness was more wild than I was expecting. It even seemed a little sweet.


    It was certainly easier to drink than ck coffee. But I suppose it was too strong for them.


    Some had been prepared for Liza as well, but after drinking it, she stuck out her tongue. She did not like the bitterness.


    And so Leo gave her some milk.


    That was fine, but she then stuck her face into the bowl and drank it like Leo did


    Hahapapa, that tickles.


    You got some on your face.


    I wiped Lizas face and then returned to exining.


    If they were interested, they could add milk and sugar, and it might be easier to drink.


    However, sugar was quite expensive, so they might not be able to drink it very often.


    I then told them about the possible benefits, and their reaction suddenly changed.


    Mr. Takumiplease make more of this tea!


    Indeed! This will be very popr with women! You should make more!


    Ms. ireMs. Anne


    While she didnt say anything, Ms. Gelda also looked a little restless and was looking at me with expectant eyes.


    Perhaps they were expecting too much. It would really not make that much of a difference


    Uhh, like any tea, it has to be drunk in moderation. Otherwise, something bad will happen.


    What do you mean?


    Uhyoull have to stay near the bathroom. If you know what I mean.


    !?


    I hesitated to speak about such things in front ofdies, but Sebastian had given me an encouraging look, and so I said it.


    In any other situation he would have taken the initiative


    Mr. Ekenhart did sound impressed, but it immediately made thedies less enthusiastic about the whole thing.


    Well, no one wanted to spend so much time in the bathroom.


    That being said, it can be applied to any tea. You should not drink too much. Just one cup a day is fine It was never meant to be very effective anyway.


    I see. Hah It is not so simple after all


    But it might have a little effect? Besides, Mr. Takumi made it, so I will try to drink a little when I can.


    You dont have to if you dont want to. But as I said before, mixing it with something else will make it taste better.


    And so it was decided that they would drink a little when they wanted.


    A cup or two a day. Otherwise, they would drink other kinds of tea.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    The name of the nt This is it. Oh, it is quite pretty. HmmI think Have you seen it before? I have tried to study nts ever since you arrived. It looks like a dandeleeon. They are not really seen in this country. But there was a garden of themApril 2, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We Thought Of Ways To Sell The Medicinal Wine We still have to see the effects first, but were thinking about producing it in Range vige as well. Indeed. Well, I doubt people would buy it immediately Really? I think it could sell immediately, once people know its effective? Mr.July 29, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Sherry was tired from running As Sherry had been jogging around the garden, it was not surprising that she was tired. Unlike the time before we went to the forest, Leo was not chasing her. So she ran at a slower pace, but for a longer time. ...Leo might getFebruary 26, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 628

    Chapter 628


    I would leave the cooking to Ms. Helena<hr>


    Aside from how it would be drunk every day, it was also decided that I would use Weed Cultivation to make more.


    If drunk every day, we would run out very quickly, but the others were looking at me with expectant eyes.


    It wasnt much of a hassle, and so I didnt mind.


    I suppose I would have to continue to grow it in Range vige.


    As for selling it, that wasnt being considered yet. However, it would have to be delivered to Mr. Ekenharts house, and the servants over there might want some as well


    After lunch, the fenrirs returned to the forest.


    The two had been excited when they heard about the hamburgers, and so I had a feeling that they would be back soon.


    In any case, as long as Leo and the people of the mansion were fine with it, then I didnt mind Though, it seemed odd to have fenrirs visiting a nobles mansion so often.


    But Leo and Rahle were hereso perhaps not.


    Once the fenrirs were gone, we had out final training with Mr. Ekenhart, who would be departing tomorrow.


    We didnt do anything special, but since we gained a lot of experience in the forest, the training felt more serious than before.


    The basics and training that led to creating a stronger bodywe continued that. But there was more direct exchanging of blows between Tilura and I.


    That being said, we were using wooden swords.


    The taste of the meat will change depending on what you put inside. This time, it was eggs, but if it was just orc meat, you probably wouldnt need it to make it stick I think you make something where you can really taste the vor of the meat.


    I see. So there is a lot of freedom, and it will test your skills


    I dont think you have to think about it so seriously. Also, there are different ways to cook it But I will leave that to you. I never put that much thought into it.


    As Mr. Ekenhart would be leaving tomorrow, the training ended early, and I spent the rest of my time talking with Ms. Helena.


    We talked about the hamburgers I had made for lunch.


    But as I was not a professional cook, I could only make simple dishes, and did not know much about how to make variations on it.


    Ah, thats right. After it was cooked, you poured some sauce onto it


    Yes. It was sauce that I had made before.


    While Im sure it was made out of all kinds of things, perhaps you could alter it so that it would fit a little better.


    Hmmso the sauce will also change the taste.


    The texture is affected by what you mix in, but the sauce and other things you eat with it will also make a big change.


    But I would leave all of that to Ms. Helena.


    Even in Japan, I would mostly just buy sauce that was already made, so I didnt know how to make it.


    I was so busy with work, and could not spend time on such things. Also, I was living alone, and didnt care too much about cooking, even if I was happy that Leo liked it.


    You could also change the bread as well. And the things you put in between.


    Things that would go well with the meat?


    Yes Sometimes, things that you wouldnt expect end up being good. Of course, its fine to keep things simple as well.


    But I dont want to be cutting corners.


    Well, I dont see it that way. As long as the meat and sauce are good, its fine if its simple.


    That is true Well, thank you, Mr. Takumi. I shall see what I can do, and try to make something even more delicious.


    I will look forward to it.


    Yes! And I will also think of ways to use the sooy.


    Youll be quite busy then. Sorry for that.


    Not at all! I am d to be busy. To be honest, I was feeling rather stifled, and so this will be good stimtion.


    Im d to hear it.


    Even though I didnt know much, Ms. Helena appreciated it.


    As for the sooy, there was some stored in the mansion, but not enough to be testing new things. And so we would have to buy more.


    Still, I had high hopes for Ms. Helenas work It wouldnt hurt to have more delicious things to eat.


    Father, Mr. Takumi, I got permission from Rahle!


    Huh? Permission?


    After speaking with Ms. Helena, we gathered in the dining hall in order to eat dinner.


    While we had breakfast and lunch in the garden, dinner was inside of the mansion.


    It was a little too dark outside now.


    Though, eating by candlelight did sound nice


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Mr. Ekenhart had called me The master wants to see you. He said that he wanted to talk to you while the others were away Mr. Ekenhart? Do you know what he wants to talk about? No, I do not. I was merely told to call you, unless you wereMarch 19, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Tilura wanted to ride on Rahle again Ah, if were going to Range vige, how long will it take? Hmm? Ah, thats right If ire and Tilura are going, then a few servants will have to go too. And well travel by carriage again. ...Then it will take a littleMarch 7, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    He questioned me as a father Now, Mr. Takumi Yes. He looked as the wine was poured into his ss He seemed very thoughtful. As the air had grown a little serious, I nodded cautiously. What was he going to say? ... ... ire Yes? What do you mean toMarch 20, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 629

    Chapter 629


    Sebastian became involved<hr>


    As we waited for dinner to be served, Tilura reported that she got permission from Rahle.


    Now that I thought about it, they seemed to be talking after training.


    Leo and Liza had been running with Sherry.


    But what did she need Rahles permission for?


    For the saddle, Mr. Takumi.


    Ah, that. So its fine?


    Yes! ording to Rahle, its fine as long as it doesnt move and isnt too big and heavy.


    Being too big would make it difficult to move, and too heavy would affect its bnce.


    Yes, father!


    But it was going to have a back rest, and would be ratherrge Well, I suppose we would find out when it was made.


    In that case, we will have to hurry up and prepare it. Alsothere is the matter of who will ride on it.


    With Tilura?


    Yes. It cannot be someone who is too heavy. Perhaps one of the women guards.


    Hmm Like Johanna.


    Ms. Johanna was thin and looked quite light, and would be able to protect Tilura.


    But then again, it seemed unnecessary to have a guard when Rahle was with her.


    Is a guard really necessary?


    Perhaps not, in terms ofbat. But Rahle is a monster, and Lady Tilura should have another human with her.


    I understand. Tilura alone might have trouble exining to others about Rahle.


    Rahle was arge bird monster.


    People would be surprised, and since we havent gone anywhere else yet, it would be necessary to tell others about Rahle.


    Perhaps Sebastian had already sent word ahead. But for anyone else that saw them on the road, it would be best to have someone with Tilura.


    Otherwise, they might think that she was being attacked by a monster.


    Though, it did seem unlikely, given how happy Tilura looked when they were together.


    I would like to have Johanna guard ire. Though, she will also have servants with her. And when Tilura goes to Range vige, she will have not just Rahle, but Leo and Mr. Takumi nearby as well.


    Yes.


    Wuff!


    So, who will go with Lady Tilura?


    Isnt it obvious? Someone lightand capable of persuading people


    You dont mean?


    Mr. Ekenhart smiled.


    I suppose he found the idea very amusing. I now felt a little bad for Sebastian.


    Even I knew that it could not be stopped now.


    Still, there were other women soldiers in the mansion. Why not leave it to them? Well, it wasnt my decision.


    As for Ms. ire, she just sighed and shook her head.


    What do you think, Sebastian? A little trip high in the sky? Even if you must ride on a monster, it is a very rare experience, you know?


    Yes, but No, I would rather not


    Besides, it would add to your wealth of knowledge. And then you can exin to others what it was like.


    Exinknowledge.


    Indeed, putting it that way, it was not a bad idea.


    Though, Im not sure how often it would be necessary for Sebastian to exin it, or recount his experience of flying


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Iforted Tilura Well, it looks like they will arrive safely. Were back! Wuff! After watching Tilura and Rahle for some time, therge building finally came into view. Somehow, Tilura had managed to stay on this whole time. Perhaps Rahle had sensed her fear, as there were no moreFebruary 12, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Rahle was sorry Tilura, are you alright!? Sister! Yes, Im fine! Shortly after, the carriage carrying the others arrived as well. Ms. ire immediately jumped out and rushed to Tilura. As for Mr. Ekenharthe was looking this way, but perhaps he didnt want to show his distress, as he didFebruary 13, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We would ask Rahle to wear the saddle And furthermore! Putting a backrest on the saddle will increase the stability. There will be no worry of Lady Tilura falling off. Oh! However There is one thing that Im worried about What is it? Will Rahle ept this saddle Ah ItMarch 9, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 630

    Chapter 630


    I spent some time with Leo<hr>


    Rahle became Tiluras familiar. And so with Tilura there, nothing will happen. Besides, you will learn something that books cant teach you


    Rahle would not do anything reckless, since Leo would be watching.


    I understand what you are saying, Your Grace And I do not expect to learn everything through books.


    Oh?


    Very well, if I am permitted to, then I shall ride on Rahle.


    I see, so you will. Wonderful. Hahaha!


    Father, you sound very evil.


    How rude. I am just happy that Sebastian got this opportunity.


    Hahreally


    Ahaha


    Sebastian was soon persuaded, and agreed to ride on Rahle.


    Well, he could hardly refuse once his master was set on the idea.


    In any case, it would happen after the saddle was ready. And so we ate our dinner.


    While we were eating, Ms. Gelda patted Sebastian consolingly on the shoulder.


    As someone who often made mistakes and became distressed over them, she probably felt a little sympathetic.


    It would be one thing if it was just around the mansion, but Range vige was quite far away. And since this was a world without ins, it was quite daunting


    Leo, well be going to Range vige soon, so Ill be relying on you.


    Wou!


    Well rely on you, mama!


    Wou!


    After dinner, we drank wine or tea, and then everyone returned to their rooms.


    As Mr. Ekenhart would be leaving tomorrow, there was no night training, as we did not want to be tired.


    And so we would rest.


    After getting warm in the bath, I sat down on my bed and talked to Leo.


    It would be a much longer journey than the one to the forest or Ractos.


    And we also had to watch Rahle.


    Thest time we made that journey, Leo had not seemed tired at all. So it would probably be fine.


    Leo nodded reassuringly, and then Liza copied me.


    Recently, Liza seemed to copy me a lot.


    And while it showed how close we were, it also reminded me that I had to set a good example as well.


    Mr. Takumi. I came to give Lady Liza a bath.


    Ah, yes. Thank you. Run along then, Liza.


    Yes! Thank you, sister Lyra!


    I gestured for Liza to go, and she walked over to Ms. Lyra and bowed with her hands behind her back.


    She looked like a penguin. Who taught her that?


    I thought with a smile as I watched them leave.


    I didnt do that, so she must have copied someone else?


    Perhaps I should teach her how to thank people when she returns But after considering it, I rejected the idea.


    Ms. ire or Tilura would be better.


    Wuff. Wuff.


    Hmm? What is it, Leo?


    Leo suddenly barked to get my attention.


    She put her paw on my thigh, so she probably wanted me to y with her.


    Wuff-wuff.


    She wagged her tail and looked at me expectantly.


    Now that I thought about it, due being with Liza a lot, I had not been able to pay Leo as much attention.


    Well, we had some time until Liza returned, so perhaps I could y with her now.


    Alright, Leo. Were you lonely?


    Wuff! Wuff-wuff.


    Really? You can be honest.


    Leo had shaken her head as if to reject the notion.


    However, her tail wagged a little faster, so she was clearly happy to be receiving attention.


    It was amusing how easy to read she was.


    Liza, Leo and Sherry showed their emotion through their tails, which was cute.


    Ms. Anne would be easier to understand if she had a tail too No, she has her hair rolls.


    Alright, Leo. Since you worked so hard, and watched Rahle and the fenrirs. Im going to spoil you today!


    Wuff!? Wuff. Wou-wou


    Haha. You can say that, but I see your tail wagging. Of course, you can calm down a little. Your tail is going to knock me over


    Wou


    It was wagging so quickly that it was a blur But it showed how happy she was.


    Realizing that it was moving too fast, Leo lowered her nose and slowed down her tail a little.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    We would ask Rahle to wear the saddle And furthermore! Putting a backrest on the saddle will increase the stability. There will be no worry of Lady Tilura falling off. Oh! However There is one thing that Im worried about What is it? Will Rahle ept this saddle Ah ItMarch 9, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Sebastian exined happily Leo was not at all happy at the notion that Rahle might be faster than her. But flying and running on the ground were just too different. As for the effect of wind while flyingI would have to ask Rahle. But with running, the terrain affected youMarch 8, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Sebastian became involved As we waited for dinner to be served, Tilura reported that she got permission from Rahle. Now that I thought about it, they seemed to be talking after training. Leo and Liza had been running with Sherry. But what did she need Rahles permission for? For theApril 12, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 631

    Chapter 631


    Leo learned a new trick<hr>


    There, there. You did good, Leo.


    Wuff. Wuff!


    I hugged Leo and scratched and petted her.


    Leo seemed very happy to be praised.


    Her fur really was nice and soft I understood why Liza and Tilura were always holding onto Leo.


    I would sometimes pull the skin around her mouth as if I was ying.


    I used to be able to pick you up And even after all of my training, I still cant do it again.


    Wuff?


    No, Im not going to try. Do you want to squish me?


    Back in the day, I was able to put Leo on myp or lift her in the air.


    But now, it was me who would ride on Leos back.


    As I thought back on such times and muttered, Leo put her paws up invitingly.


    Obviously, any such attempt would not end well for me.


    You are both bigger and heavier


    Wou!


    I didnt say you were fat. Still, maybe you want to lose weight as well?


    Wou!? Wou-wou!


    Well, thats true. You do like to eat.


    When I suggested that she could go on a diet, Leo looked surprised and then shook her head.


    She did not look overweight, so it was probably fine.


    Besides, dieting wasnt just about food restrictions Though, I suppose Leo just assumed that it was.


    You just had to exercise more, like Sherry.


    Ah, thats right. Its been a while since I gave you a massage.


    Wuff!


    I had done it before, but dogs would get sore muscles as well.


    And so I would massage her feet or pull at her skin, which she seemed to enjoy.


    As I went about this slowly, Leo let out a rxed sigh.


    What about here?


    Wuff-wuff.


    It tickles, eh? Then what abouthere!


    Wuff!


    After her feet, I moved on to her ears.


    Her ears sagged down when she was small. But now they pointed up, and moved busily when she was trying to detect orcs.


    Apparently, it tickled when I massaged the base of the ears.


    Next Bang!


    Wuff-wuff.


    I didnt even teach you that, but you can do it.


    I tried pointing at Leo as if holding a gun, and pretending like I had fired a shot.


    And then Leo fell over onto the ground


    Sometimes, Leo would rotate her body while in the air.


    But this time, she fell purposefully onto her back, as if in a pose of submission.


    She didnt quite pretend that she was dead, but it was still impressive. I would have to show Ms. ire and the otherster.


    There, there. Feels nice, huh?


    Wuff!


    I then rubbed her belly, like I had done to the fenrirs.


    There were some dogs that didnt like showing their stomach or getting petted, but Leo actively encouraged it.


    Though, she did y the part of a proud and noble mother in front of Liza. So it was times like these that she could really rx.


    Excuse me. Lady Liza is finished with her Oh?


    Papa! Mama! Im back! Oh!


    Huh?


    Wuff?


    Apparently, time had passed faster than expected, and Ms. Lyra and Liza came into the room.


    Liza saw Leo lying on her back and she shouted while rushing forward.


    Clearly, she found this to be very fun


    Though, Leo was startled to be seen in such a vulnerable position.


    Mama likes to be petted like Fen and Riruru too? Okay


    Wuff


    Well, it wont make you look more intimidating. But I guess thats fine?


    Wou


    Leo looked at me as if she did not know what to do.


    I suppose she wanted to look more dignified around Sherry and Liza, but it was toote. Give up, Leo.


    Mr. Takumi?


    Ah, Im sorry. Thank you for taking care of Liza.


    Oh, it was nothing at all.


    Would you like to pet Leo too?


    Do you mean it? Well, I have petted good Leo before.


    Its fine. Right, Leo?


    Wou Wuff!


    When I was thanking Ms. Lyra, I noticed that she was looking at Leo with interest. And so I made a suggestion.


    While she was hesitant, I asked Leo for confirmation. And Leo sighed and then barked as if to say,e on then!


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    The reason that Sherry was not injured HmmI guess its because she is a fenrir. To not be injured after being hit so hard Wuff. Wuff-wuff-wou! Uhhh, she says that fenrirs are able to protect themselves by enveloping their bodies in magic energy. Thats why she wasnt injured. ...That issoNovember 29, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Sherry was traumatized by the trolls I dont mind. Besides, its almost time for dinner. So, father. You have something to discuss with Leo? Mr. Takumi did not tell you? Ah, I thought I would let them hear it from youMr. Ekenhart. I see. Very well He then turned toOctober 25, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Leo silenced the bird monster Hmm Is it alive? Wuff. It looks a little burned. So that is Leos magic Indeed. It is so big With Leo, we all went to see the fallen monster. It was bigger than I had imagined when seeing it from below. Now only wasJanuary 25, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 632

    Chapter 632


    Mr. Ekenharts Departure<hr>


    And so while in the submissive pose, Leo was petted by not just Liza, but Ms. Lyra as well.


    Obviously, she no longer looked like an intimidating Silver Fenrir.


    But I suppose it was a worthy trade off for Leo.


    Well, I would join them and pet Leo too.


    And so we petted her until she was satisfied.


    Liza and Leo slept soundly.


    Leo slept in the same position as when she had been petted.


    I wondered if her stomach wasnt cold, but it was probably fine, since she had so much fur Still, I put a nket over her anyway.


    Well, Mr. Ekenhart would be leaving tomorrow And I had to go to bed, so that I could see them off


    Well, we will be going now.


    Yes, father. Mr. Takumi. Please look after Tilura.


    Leave it to me. Though, I wont have to do anything, since Leo and Rahle are here.


    Hehe


    After eating breakfast that morning, it was time for Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire to head off to Range vige. Ms. Anne as well.


    Mr. Ekenhart would return to his main house after that, so we would not see him for a long time.


    The servants had also lined up in order to see him off.


    Sebastian, Im counting on you to keep things in order.


    Certainly, Your Grace.


    Mr. Ekenhart said mischievously.


    And then the servants said their usual farewell, and then Mr. Ekenhart, Ms. ire, and Ms. Anne left.


    Its so quiet now


    Indeed. Without father and ire Though, I am used to it.


    You are?


    Yes. After all, they often left me alone when I was younger


    Ah, thats right


    After that, I spent the time growing herbs until lunch.


    We ate in the garden with Rahle again. As I mused to myself, Tilura looked a little sad.


    Ms. ire was not the loudest person, but Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. Anne had strong personalities, and so their absence was more noticeable.


    Especially Mr. Ekenhart, who always caused a scene when eating.


    Though, Tilura was also used to being left alone in the mansion.


    She visited the orphanage in Ractos sometimes, but not very often.


    Are you lonely, sister Tilura?


    No, because you are here, Liza! And Rahle!


    Kii!


    Ahaha. Then you wouldnt be lonely.


    Wuff.


    And you too, Leo!


    Wou-wou.


    Liza had been alone after her grandfather died, so she was sensitive to such things.


    For a while aftering here, she did not want to leave me or Leo.


    Stillonce we left to Range vige, there would be fewer servants here, and Leo, Liza and Ms. ire would be gone as well I would have to think about what to do when the time came.


    But at least she would have Rahle.


    Since Ms. ire and Mr. Ekenhart were gone, tea time was finished quickly, and Tilura and I started training.


    As Sherry was with Ms. ire, Liza didnt have anyone to y with. However, she now amused herself with swinging around her knife.


    Hmm I did not really like to see her wielding weapons.


    But since she was having so much fun, I didnt stop her.


    Wuff-wuff.


    Leo?


    Hmm? What is it, Leo?


    Mama!


    Was she sad that no one was paying attention to her?


    But Ms. Gelda was with her, and Leo was usually quiet during our training


    Tilura had also stopped and was looking at Leo questioningly.


    Liza then hugged Leobut she was still holding the knife, which looked dangerous. But I suppose it was fine with Leo.


    Though, I would still have to warn her about itter.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    We asked the fenrirs It doesnt have to be over a vast area, good Leo. Just bringing their number down a little will be enough. Wuff Wuff! She said very well! We were only in a small corner of the forest. Obviously, it would be impossible for the fenrirs toJanuary 8, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I seeded in removing Lizas fear Soft Right? See, they like it if you pet them like this. Hmm Like this? Grau They like it. See? The fenrirs fur was soft and fluffy, and Liza petted him gently. ...Its fine? Aye. They wont hurt you. Now, over here. ...Okay. KyafuJanuary 10, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I petted the parent fenrirs Uhlike this? Gauu Gau-gau! It seems like they like it I went between the two fenris and used both hands to rub their bellies. As they were so big, I could not rub their whole bodies at once, but I had plenty of experience withJanuary 3, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 634

    Chapter 634


    Rahle had returned home<hr>


    Now that I thought about it, Sherry would also get tired first when running with Liza. So in terms of energy, she definitely had Tilura and I beat.


    While Leo might have regained her pride, I had lost mine


    Well, maybe I didnt have much to begin with.


    Mr. Takumi


    Tilura. It cannot be helped. In any case, lets continue to do our best.


    Yes.


    Kii!


    Rahle!


    Huh?


    With renewed determination, I returned to my training. It was then that Rahle descended from the sky.


    Apparently, Rahle had been flying while we trained.


    Kii. Kii-kii. Kii!


    I see.


    Tilura ran towards Rahle happily.


    It greeted her with its soft wings, enveloping her. They seemed to be talking It sounded like Rahle was making a report.


    Mr. Takumi. Rahle returned home once!


    Is that so?


    Kii!


    Wuff-wuff.


    Rahles home was in the mountains, north of Ractos.


    As Mr. Ekenhart had just left a few hours agoI dont know if they passed Ractos yet. But Rahle could fly, and was able to make a round trip.


    Being able to fly really was useful.


    But I had Leo, so there was no need to fly


    Why did it go back? Its not like Rahle has bags to pack


    Rahle was a monster, and didnt need clothes or furniture like humans.


    Kii, kii. Kii!


    Oh, I see. Uhh, Rahle needed to tell the other monsters aboutbing my familiar. And also, to tell them that they must not hurt humans.


    Ah, of course.


    Wuff-wuff.


    Kii!


    As I nodded, Leo barked in agreement, and Rahle raised its wings and bowed.


    Perhaps Leo had given the order, and I just hadnt known about it.


    Kiikii?


    Rahle says that there are some monsters that wont obeyand is wondering what should be done about it.


    Kii. Kii-kii.


    Especially monsters like orcs. They do not listen.


    Ah. Well, we will have to discuss that with Sebastian and the others When Mr. Ekenhart returns And Ms. ire as well.


    Yes!


    Kii!


    Wuff.


    Monsters with low intelligence, such as orcs and trolls, would not be very cooperative.


    We could notmunicate with them like with Rahle and the fenrirs, so it could not be helped.


    With the others, we would probably have to separate the monsters into categories of those who would obey and those who would not, so that people could be warned.


    And there would be monsters you could fight, and monsters that you couldnt.


    After training was finished, Rahle joined us for dinner.


    It was Tiluras wish to eat dinner out in the garden.


    But they used magicmps, and so it wasnt the atmospheric candlelight dinner that I was expecting.


    Well, it was still nice to gaze at the night sky Though, we had done a lot of that in the forest.


    As for the magic light, it was very simple magic that even I could use.


    We were not in the forest now, and there was no need to save your magic energy, in case of an emergency.


    Besides, it was safer than bonfires and torchesand brighter as well.


    Though, I was a little surprised to see not just Sebastian, but the maids using it as well.


    Lady Tilura, Mr. Takumi. About the saddle for Rahle


    Is it ready?


    As we were eating the dinner that Ms. Helena had made, Sebastian suddenly approached.


    Since this concerned Rahle, Tilura was very interested.


    I suppose she could not wait to have something that would make flying less scary and safer.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Rahle was sorry Tilura, are you alright!? Sister! Yes, Im fine! Shortly after, the carriage carrying the others arrived as well. Ms. ire immediately jumped out and rushed to Tilura. As for Mr. Ekenharthe was looking this way, but perhaps he didnt want to show his distress, as he didFebruary 13, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I went out into the back garden LeoI know you just bathed, but lets go outside. Wuff. I thought that it would be good to cool off, and so I headed out into the garden with Leo. Leo seemed to have realized the reason, and so she followed me quietly.March 18, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Rahle liked being on the roof Ms. Lyra smiled and greeted me. While it must have been tough, staying in the forest and cooking, I was d to see that she wasnt tired anymore. Please leave her to me. If she wakes up, I will help her get ready andFebruary 21, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 635

    Chapter 635


    Rahles saddle waspleted<hr>


    No, not yet. However, it should be ready by tomorrow. And then it can be tested.


    Tomorrow then! As soon as its ready!


    Kii!


    Hoho. Indeed. Lady Tilura cannot wait, and so we will hurry.


    So it will be tomorrow then.


    In order to catch up with Mr. Ekenhart and the others, we would have to leave the day after tomorrow, or the day after that. So there was still time.


    Tilura and Rahle looked very happy.


    I suppose Tilura wanted to share the joy of flying with someone else then.


    When I look at Lady Tilura, I find it harder to refuse


    Im sorry, Sebastian.


    Oh, you heard me? Well, it is my job to do what the master orders.


    While he pretended to be surprised, I felt like he had purposely muttered it so that someone could hear.


    Well, my master has less to look forward to once he returns. He is close with his daughters, and now with you, Mr. Takumi. Besides, he has so much work waiting for him at the house. So I might as well allow him to have his fun now.


    Hahanow I feel bad for him too


    I could not help but chuckle with Sebastian as I imagined the mountains of documents on his desk.


    Ah, but Mark, was it? I think he is also being sent to the house?


    Now that you mention it, yes. I think he is already there.


    Well, perhaps he wont be so bored then.


    Indeed. Well, it is toote to stop this flight n anyway. Unless Rahle refuses to carry me.


    Haha


    Mark was the one who had thrown the rock at Liza.


    Mr. Ekenhart was going to turn him into a soldier.


    Judging by what I had heard from Phillip, Mr. Ekenhart enjoyed training his men.


    The following day, Sebastian came out into the garden with the new saddle, as soon as we finished our training.


    He was now attaching it to Rahle.


    They had modified a horse saddle and added a back rest for extra stability.


    There were also stirrups for your feet.


    These would also help Tilura when climbing onto Rahle.


    Furthermore, there were two wooden handles on each side, which she would be able to hold onto.


    I could see how much they had considered Tiluras safety and stability when making it. Though, the design was a little rough.


    Well, it was like a prototype. If it worked well, they would likely make another one.


    Kii. Kii


    Just wait a moment, Rahle


    While they were strapping on the saddle, Rahle looked very ufortable.


    Tilura petted it, but I suppose standing like that and leaning forward was not a natural position for a bird.


    Leo. How would you like to wear something like that?


    Wuff!? Wou-wou.


    You dont need to be so negative But you always did hate wearing things.


    Wou!


    Leo had frantically shaken her head with a look of distaste.


    One time, when she was smaller, I had tried to put clothes on Leo.


    It was during the winter, and I was not in the house all of the time. And I thought she might be cold, since I was stingy with my electricity But she did not like the dog clothes I had bought.


    Well, she was very proud of her fur, and was not used to wearing clothes.


    And her fur was even thicker now, so she would be strong against the cold. However, her dislike for clothes had not changed at all.


    In the end, since it was too dangerous to leave the heater on, I just warmed the room with the air conditioner.


    Still, I thought that Leo would have looked so cute with the clothes


    We are finished.


    Thank you. Now, Lady Tilura?


    Yes, I will test it!


    Oh, they are finished. Lets go, Leo.


    Wuff.


    The butler had finished strapping on the saddle.


    When it came to flying, it was best that Leo watched too.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    We would ask Rahle to wear the saddle And furthermore! Putting a backrest on the saddle will increase the stability. There will be no worry of Lady Tilura falling off. Oh! However There is one thing that Im worried about What is it? Will Rahle ept this saddle Ah ItMarch 9, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Sebastian became involved As we waited for dinner to be served, Tilura reported that she got permission from Rahle. Now that I thought about it, they seemed to be talking after training. Leo and Liza had been running with Sherry. But what did she need Rahles permission for? For theApril 12, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    The Copper Eagles Name Uhh, Copper Eagle Your name is Rahle! Kii! Kii! Tilura looked up at therge monster and announced the name in a clear voice. The Copper EagleRahle, epted it, and it cried loudly as its body began to glow. Thiswas the light that appeared when aFebruary 4, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 636

    Chapter 636


    Sebastian rode on Rahle<hr>


    Is itfortable?


    Its amazing! Not as soft as Rahles feathers, but flying wont be scary anymore!


    That is good to hear


    So, you are next, Sebastian.


    Mr. Takumi Yes, very well then.


    The saddle was made so that two people could ride on it.


    Though, the back seat was removable, so if Tilura were to ride by herself, then she could take it off so that it wouldnt get in the way.


    As for Sebastian, he did not look eager, but made up his mind and put his foot in the stirrup.


    It is higher than a horse.


    Are you alright, Sebastian?


    I can manage. I dont want Lady Tilura to worry about me.


    Kii, kii


    Ah, Rahle. Im sorry. You can get up now.


    Forgive me, but I just need a little more


    What is it, Sebastian? Ah


    Like thisand this. Am I strapped in properly?


    Yes! Now, Rahle. You can get up now!


    Kii!


    I want to ride on Rahle too


    Haha. Maybe next time you can ask Tilura take you with her.


    Wuff?


    Ah, of course, I like riding on you too, mama!


    Wou.


    Liza had been looking at Tilura a little jealously.


    This seemed to make Leo sad.


    Rahle, everything okay?


    Kii! Kii!


    Yes, do your best!


    I am ready.


    Rahle stood up again. The two on its back seemed fine, but Rahle had not flown yet.


    Tilura and Sebastian were leaning back, but thanks to the backrest and handles, they were perfectly stable.


    Rahle then spread out its wings and prepared to take off.


    Sebastian closed his eyes and gritted his teeth


    Surely it would be fine. Even if it was difficult to fly while carrying two people, I doubted they would crash. And even if they did, Leo would help them.


    Kii!!


    Woah!


    Rahle then beat its wings and rose up into the air.


    It looks fine.


    Wuff.


    I cant see them anymore!


    While looking up, we saw Rahle fly higher. So, it could fly just fine even when carrying Sebastian.


    Perhaps Rahle wanted to test it further, as it then flew outside of the mansion grounds.


    That was fine, but now we would have to wait for them to return


    Kii! Kii!


    Were back!


    Wee back.


    Wou!


    Sister Tilura!


    After about half an hour, they returned from the sky.


    As I had nothing else to do, I went around and looked at the herb fields and made some extra herbs to hand over to Milinater.


    While Rahle and Tilura sounded like they had a lot of fun, Sebastian still looked tense.


    Was he alright?


    Kii!


    Rahle, thank you. Now I know its fine if Sebastian rides on too!


    Kii!


    Though, it looks like someone is not fine Uh, Sebastian?


    Phewhah I-I am fine. However, I did not realize that flying was so horrifying


    Rahle leaned forward so that Tilura and Sebastian could climb down.


    Thanks to her training, Tilura was able to jump off andnd lightly on her feet. And then she smiled and hugged Rahle.


    On the other hand, Sebastian looked rather pale.


    As he was moving awkwardly, I went over in order to help him


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Rahle had returned home Now that I thought about it, Sherry would also get tired first when running with Liza. So in terms of energy, she definitely had Tilura and I beat. While Leo might have regained her pride, I had lost mine Well, maybe I didnt have much toApril 17, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Rahles saddle waspleted No, not yet. However, it should be ready by tomorrow. And then it can be tested. Tomorrow then! As soon as its ready! Kii! Hoho. Indeed. Lady Tilura cannot wait, and so we will hurry. So it will be tomorrow then. In order to catch upApril 18, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Sebastian exined happily Leo was not at all happy at the notion that Rahle might be faster than her. But flying and running on the ground were just too different. As for the effect of wind while flyingI would have to ask Rahle. But with running, the terrain affected youMarch 8, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 637

    Chapter 637


    Getting used to flying<hr>


    Judging by how tired Sebastian looked, he had not enjoyed it at all.


    Well, it was like a roller coaster. It was no wonder he was scared.


    Tilura did not seem to be too scared with this kind of thing. But perhaps it was due to her childish curiosity.


    Kii. Kii.


    Hmm. I see. Is that so.


    What did it say?


    Wuff.


    Umm. Rahle flew a lot slower than usual.


    Ah, because Sebastian was on as well.


    Perhaps it was because it was heavier than usual, with Sebastian in the saddle.


    He was on the thin side, but was still a grown man.


    If you focused on maintaining bnce, then you would not be able to fly with much speed.


    Kii! Kii-kii Kii!


    I understand! Sebastian, let us go then!


    Huh? Lady Tilurawhat do you mean?


    Rahle says it can fly faster if it gets more used to it. And so we must fly again!


    What!?


    I had rarely seen Sebastian look so rmed.


    That was how much fear he was feeling.


    Hurry! Hurry! Lets go!


    Kii. Kii.


    Wa-wait one moment. Lady Tilura. We should take a break


    No! It will get dark if we wait too long. And then we will not be able to see! And there is such a fantastic view!


    Tilura had so much fun flying with Rahle that she took no notice of Sebastians troubles.


    Thanks to Ms. ires attention towards her education, she was often very mature. However, it was times like these that you remembered she was like any other child.


    Weside from the part about having a giant monster bird.


    Though, if Rahle could fly faster after a little more practice, then they might as well do it today.


    If they flew at the same speed as they did earlier, then they would not be able to catch up with Mr. Ekenhart and the others.


    And so they should practice at least one or two more times.


    Besides, Sebastian needed to get used to it as well.


    I think you should do it, Sebastian. But take this


    Indeedvery well. Is this a recovery herb?


    Yes. It wont help with your fear, but youll be less tired.


    Thank you. I will take it then


    Perhaps it was not a good idea to give him such things, as people sometimes vomit when they are scared But I thought it was better than nothing.


    Sebastian let out a weak sigh and then climbed back into the saddle behind Tilura.


    Do you think theyll be back soon?


    Wuff. Wuff-wuff.


    She says they are already close by!


    Poor Sebastian


    Master, I finished with the medicine!


    As we had nothing to do, I asked Ms. Gelda to bring out a table into the garden, and I drank tea with Liza and rested.


    We would likely eat dinner out here with Rahle anyway, so we might as well prepare.


    And just as the sky started to darken, I looked up at the sky and searched for Rahle.


    ording to Leo, they were close by now.


    Ms. Gelda poured me another cup of the dandelion tea as Milina told me that she was finished with the medicine.


    Liza had tried the tea yesterday, and did not like it. So she and Leo were drinking milk instead.


    Kii!


    Ah, there they are, master!


    It looks like it


    I heard Rahles cry, and saw a vague shadow approaching from the distance.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Sebastian rode on Rahle Is itfortable? Its amazing! Not as soft as Rahles feathers, but flying wont be scary anymore! That is good to hear So, you are next, Sebastian. ...Mr. Takumi Yes, very well then. The saddle was made so that two people could ride on it. Though,April 19, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Rahle had returned home Now that I thought about it, Sherry would also get tired first when running with Liza. So in terms of energy, she definitely had Tilura and I beat. While Leo might have regained her pride, I had lost mine Well, maybe I didnt have much toApril 17, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Rahle was sorry Tilura, are you alright!? Sister! Yes, Im fine! Shortly after, the carriage carrying the others arrived as well. Ms. ire immediately jumped out and rushed to Tilura. As for Mr. Ekenharthe was looking this way, but perhaps he didnt want to show his distress, as he didFebruary 13, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 638

    Chapter 638


    Sebastian was exhausted<hr>


    While it was notpletely dark, the sun was mostly set now, so it was difficult to tell for sure that it was Rahle.


    Perhaps Leo could tell, as she had sharper senses.


    In any case, we waited for them to get closer.


    Kii! Kii!


    Yes, it was so fun, Rahle!


    Rahle stood in the garden and cried happily, before leaning forward so that Tilura could jump off.


    As for Sebastianhe looked tired.


    Are you alright, Sebastian?


    Do I look like I am alright? Phewugh.


    No, not reallyahthanks, Leo.


    Wou.


    I helped Sebastian climb down from the saddle.


    However, he had no strength in him, and his foot slipped in the stirrups. That was when Leo came in and supported him with her nose.


    It would have been about a meter fall, and he could have been hurt.


    Thank you. Hah I feel like myself again. I am sorry, Mr. Takumi and Leo.


    No, it was a long flight. So it cannot be helped.


    Sebastian looked quite pale as he thanked us.


    There was none of that usual calmness from him. I thought that he was on the verge of copsing.


    As for Tilura, she enjoyed her flight a lot and couldnt be any happier.


    Still, the flight tomorrow will be much longer Will you be alright?


    I thinkthat I will ask for breaks in between. It should be fine with Rahle and Leos speed.


    Indeed Aside from lunch, we can take a few other breaks.


    Thank you.


    Well, I was not sure how much time we could take for rest I suppose we would have to see as we travel.


    We had actually meant to go one dayter, but then it was decided that we would stop at Ractos on the way.


    It would have been fine if it was just a short stop, but considering our business in Ractos, it would not be possible to then unite with Mr. Ekenhart in the same day.


    In that case, it would be best to go early and meet up with Mr. Ekenhart while he was still traveling.


    The reason that we wanted to meet up with them on the same day, was while they had everything they needed to set up camp, we who were riding on Leo and Rahle could not carry much with us.


    I didnt want to sleep outside without a sleeping bag


    And so Sebastian suggested that we leave tomorrow and travel with them the rest of the way.


    Now that I thought about it, it was probably part of Sebastians n to get more time to rest.


    Ah, by the way. Was the herb useful?


    It was. I probably would not be standing here without it. It is rather shamefulbut I was shaking so much that it was even painful. I am getting too old


    Ah, yes. Haha


    I guess he is not used to using those muscles and joints.


    Still, I was d that the herbs had been useful.


    Sister Tilura. How was the sky?


    It was so fun! You could see so far away! And when the sun is settling the sky is so pretty!


    Wow, I want to see


    As Sebastian did not look well, I suggested that he drink some tea and rest.


    In the meantime, Liza and Tilura were talking.


    There were no really tall buildings around here, so the view must be very different for her.


    Well, I was d that she could experience something so rare.


    Liza looked a little jealous.


    Well, in order to make her happy


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Sebastian rode on Rahle Is itfortable? Its amazing! Not as soft as Rahles feathers, but flying wont be scary anymore! That is good to hear So, you are next, Sebastian. ...Mr. Takumi Yes, very well then. The saddle was made so that two people could ride on it. Though,April 19, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Rahle had returned home Now that I thought about it, Sherry would also get tired first when running with Liza. So in terms of energy, she definitely had Tilura and I beat. While Leo might have regained her pride, I had lost mine Well, maybe I didnt have much toApril 17, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Getting used to flying Judging by how tired Sebastian looked, he had not enjoyed it at all. Well, it was like a roller coaster. It was no wonder he was scared. Tilura did not seem to be too scared with this kind of thing. But perhaps it was due toApril 20, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 639

    Chapter 639


    We finished preparations<hr>


    I know, Liza. After we return from Range vige, why dont you have a ride on Rahle as well?


    I can!?


    You can, Liza. Right, Rahle?


    Kii!


    Rahle and Tilura nodded happily.


    Tilura saw Liza as a younger sister, and Rahle liked carrying people. So everyone was happy.


    Besides, by the time we returned, Rahle would be used to carrying people, so I would not have to worry about Lizas safety.


    Not that I saw Sebastian as a test subject.


    Yay! Its a promise then, sister Tilura and Rahle!


    Yes, a promise!


    Kii!


    Wou


    There, there. No one said they hate riding on you or think Rahle is better. Cheer up, Leo. She is just curious to do something different. And she will be riding on you to Range vige.


    Wou? Wuff!


    I petted Leo consolingly and she nodded with satisfaction.


    Shortly after, the food was served on the table, and so we all sat down to eat.


    As Ms. Lyra was traveling with Ms. ire, it was Ms. Gelda and Milina who prepared the tea and worked hard.


    It was nice to see Milina being able to do all of that now


    Alright, all prepared. How about you, Liza?


    Yes. Sister Gelda helped me!


    Wuff.


    After dinner, I did my regr swinging practice, took a bath, and then packed for our journey to Range vige.


    As I would not be able to train for some time, I was extra thorough with my swinging.


    So, youre going to bring that as well?


    Of course! After all, you gave it to me, papa!


    You really seem to like it. Butif there is something else that you want. Just tell me, okay?


    Hmm I dont know.


    I see


    In the corner of the room, on top of Lizas packed belongings, was her hat.


    It was used to cover her ears. But Liza had taken a liking to it and always wore it now when she left the house.


    She had kept it on in the forest as well, and it was starting to look a little worse for wear.


    It had really been made as a temporary measure, so it would not be that durable. Besides, I dont think they knew that Liza would be wearing it in the forest and fighting monsters.


    No one would think that someone like Liza could fight.


    As we nned to stop by Mr. Haltons store in Ractos tomorrow, I might ask him to do some repairs on it.


    I asked Liza if she wanted anything else, but apparently, she didnt know.


    Well, she had lived in the slums for a long time, so she knew little about what was even out there in the world.


    I didnt know much about it myself Perhaps it would be good to visit the town more often and look around.


    It would also be a good idea to help the people get used to seeing Leo.


    Alright. But if you see something that you want tomorrow, tell me, alright?


    Yes! I cant wait!


    Wuff?


    Leo Youll want food, right?


    Wou!


    Well, well get some on the way then.


    Wou!


    Yay!


    While I couldnt get her everything and anything, I still wanted to get her something.


    I had some money So as long as it wasnt too expensive


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Rahle was sorry Tilura, are you alright!? Sister! Yes, Im fine! Shortly after, the carriage carrying the others arrived as well. Ms. ire immediately jumped out and rushed to Tilura. As for Mr. Ekenharthe was looking this way, but perhaps he didnt want to show his distress, as he didFebruary 13, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Iforted Tilura Well, it looks like they will arrive safely. Were back! Wuff! After watching Tilura and Rahle for some time, therge building finally came into view. Somehow, Tilura had managed to stay on this whole time. Perhaps Rahle had sensed her fear, as there were no moreFebruary 12, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Sebastian rode on Rahle Is itfortable? Its amazing! Not as soft as Rahles feathers, but flying wont be scary anymore! That is good to hear So, you are next, Sebastian. ...Mr. Takumi Yes, very well then. The saddle was made so that two people could ride on it. Though,April 19, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 640

    Chapter 640


    Leo was looking forward to the food<hr>


    I was pretty sure Leo would want food, and she nodded energetically as if it was obvious.


    Its not as if she would suddenly acquire a taste for clothing.


    If we were going to Ractos, we would pass the main street. And so I promised her that we could buy food on the way.


    Well then. Well be leaving early tomorrow, so we should go to sleep.


    Yes!


    Wuff-wuff.


    The n was to eat breakfast earlier than usual, and depart. So we also had to sleep early.


    Aside from going to Ractos, we would be traveling for most of the day, so it would not be good to be tired.


    In answer, Liza got onto the bed and Leo curled up next to it.


    Liza, stop moving your tail so much, or I cant put the nket over you.


    Okay! Zzzz


    Haha. So now youre tired. Sleep well then.


    Mmzz


    Wuzz


    Leo fell asleep too. Though, her tail is still wagging.


    That showed that she was really looking forward to tomorrow. Thankfully, Leo did not need a nket to stay warm.


    Master, please be careful!


    Yes. Though, I really think that you should visit the vige too


    I have to stay this time. But I will be learning all that I can from Ms. Gelda!


    Leave it to me!


    Yesof course.


    The next morning, we ate breakfast and then took our belongings to the entrance hall.


    Milina was going to move to Range vige in order to help with the herbs. So it would have been best for her toe too. However, there was work to do here, including making more medicine and managing the herbs to be sent to Ractos, as well as the gardens.


    In any case, her goal now was to learn everything she could about keeping a house in order.


    I just hoped that she would be less clumsy.


    That being saidI hadnt brought Milina here to work as a maid But I suppose if she wanted to do that as well, it was fine.


    Sorry to keep you waiting!


    Sister Tilura!


    Tilura. Are you ready to go?


    Yes, at any time!


    Wuff!


    Hoho. Well, we should be going then.


    Sebastianwhen did you get here?


    Tilura walked cheerfully down the stairs with her sword and bag.


    Unlike the time we went to the forest, she seemed to have gotten plenty of sleep.


    She was fully prepared, and looked like she couldnt wait to ride on Rahle.


    That was when Sebastian suddenly appeared.


    He hadnt been here a moment ago


    And while he was not pale like yesterday, and he had a smilehis eyes told a different story.


    Deep inside, he was clearly not happy about having to fly.


    Alright, well be counting on you, Leo.


    Thank you, mama.


    Wou!


    Likest time, everything was wrapped up and tied around Leos neck so that she could carry it.


    I had my sword on my belt, while Liz had her knife.


    Tilura and Sebastian had also put their belongings in the cloth for Leo.


    Because they could not weigh down Rahle any more than they already did


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    I decided to watch the kitchen I could understand why some might be suspicious of Liza. However, as Sebastian said, Leo would not miss something like that. And it was doubtful that Liza could sneak into the kitchen without being noticed. As for Liza not wanting to be away fromAugust 29, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I would not see the main house for some time Papa! Mama! Oh, Liza. So youre awake. Ms. Lyra. Thank you. Wou! Not at all. Liza searched for you two as soon as she woke up But I suppose she also got used to sleeping separately in the forest, andFebruary 22, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    The anticipation made it difficult to sleep After discussions around dinner ended, and we had our tea, I went out to the garden in order to train lightly with Tilura and Mr. Ekenhart. It was just a little swing practice, so that we wouldnt get too tired, since we hadOctober 29, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 641

    Chapter 641


    We entered Ractos town<hr>


    As Mr. Ekenhart took all the necessary belongings in the carriage, we didnt have to carry much.


    Leo probably could have carried more if it was necessary, but there was no need for that.


    It was interesting that Leo hated clothes or saddles but was fine with having the cloth wrapped around her head


    I suppose it was simr to a cor for her.


    She had liked being on a leash, because it meant going out on a walk.


    And of course, going on a walk meant being able to y outside with children.


    Lady Tilura, Mr. Takumi, Leo. Please be careful! We hope for your safe return soon!


    The servants watched as we left the house.


    Kii!


    Rahle! Well be counting on you today.


    Kii! Kii!


    When we went outside, Rahle was waiting for us.


    Tilura rushed towards Rahle and petted it.


    Rahle seemed incredibly happy to be able to fly long distances.


    The weather is nice. It seemed like it rainedst nightbut its fine now. Alright! Lets go, Leo!


    Lets go, mama!


    Wou!


    Phew. I am ready. Let us go then!


    There was not a cloud in the sky and the air was refreshing.


    As the one running, perhaps being a little cloudy would be preferable for Leo, but at least the ground was dry after rainingst night.


    Leo would be able to run as fast as she wanted.


    Leo theny down so that we could climb onto her back.


    While Leo was enthusiastic about the trip, Sebastian let out a sigh and followed Tilura towards Rahle.


    Wellgood luck.


    I felt bad for him, but wished him the best.


    Kii!


    Wou!


    After Tilura and Sebastian were on its back, Rahle took off into the air. And then Leo rushed through the gates as if to chase after them.


    Both Leo and Rahle were really enjoying this


    We soon arrived in Ractos, and stopped near the western gate before entering.


    Nichs.


    Mr. Takumi. I have been waiting.


    Kii.


    He had left the mansion ahead of us. And he now went to speak to the other guards.


    Shortly after, Rahle slowly descended from the sky.


    Ni-nichs. All of you I hope youre not too tired.


    You too, Sebastian


    Nichs had to help Sebastian as he got down from Rahle.


    It was only about twenty minutes to Ractos, and if he was already in that state, I was a little worried about what would happen during the rest of the journey.


    I will have to give him some recovery herbs.


    Hahphewand the townsfolk?


    I exined everything to them.


    Very well. Now, Mr. Takumi.


    Yes, we can meet up in Mr. Haltons shop.


    After taking a few deep breaths, Sebastian asked Nichs about the situation. He had been sent ahead in order to tell the guards about Rahle.


    Otherwise, they might be shocked to see a giant birde down from the sky.


    Regardless, Rahle would be waiting by the gate, while Nichs woulde with us into the town.


    We needed someone to watch Leo, after all.


    Well, I will go to the east gate then


    Ah, Sebastian. Take this


    Oh, thank you. This should help me get through it.


    See youter, Mr. Takumi, Liza and Leo!


    Kii!


    See youter!


    Wou!


    I gave Sebastian a few herbs before he climbed back onto Rahle.


    I didnt know how effective they werebut hoped they would help him until we caught up with Mr. Ekenhart and the others.


    They waved their hands as Rahle went up into the air. And then the rest of us went into the town.


    Our first destination was Mr. Kaliss store.


    Hello, Nick.


    Brother! I was waiting for you!


    With Leo, Liza, and Nichs, we moved through the city and arrived at Mr. Kaliss store.


    I saw that Nick was cleaning in the front, and so I called out to him.


    He seemed to be working seriously.


    Here are todays herbs. As we will be gone for a while, I put some extra in there.


    Aye, of course!


    I handed him the bag of herbs that Leo was carrying.


    If they sold too much and ran out, they could always go to the mansion as well.


    But this shouldst for long enough. I think.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Rahle liked being on the roof Ms. Lyra smiled and greeted me. While it must have been tough, staying in the forest and cooking, I was d to see that she wasnt tired anymore. Please leave her to me. If she wakes up, I will help her get ready andFebruary 21, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Rahle was sorry Tilura, are you alright!? Sister! Yes, Im fine! Shortly after, the carriage carrying the others arrived as well. Ms. ire immediately jumped out and rushed to Tilura. As for Mr. Ekenharthe was looking this way, but perhaps he didnt want to show his distress, as he didFebruary 13, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Rahle had returned home Now that I thought about it, Sherry would also get tired first when running with Liza. So in terms of energy, she definitely had Tilura and I beat. While Leo might have regained her pride, I had lost mine Well, maybe I didnt have much toApril 17, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 642

    Chapter 642


    I asked Mr. Kalis about Nick<hr>


    Ah, Mr. Takumi. Thank you foring.


    Hello, Mr. Kalis.


    As I was talking casually with Nick, our arrival was noticed by Mr. Kalis, and he came out to greet us.


    ?


    Ah, its Lizas first time. This is Mr. Kalis. Hes the person who sells the herbs that I make.


    So this must be Liza? I have heard about you from Mr. Sebastian. Its nice to meet you. I am Kalis. I deliver Mr. Takumis herbs to the people of this town.


    Hmm?


    Liza. Arent you going to introduce yourself?


    Ah! UhIm Liza. Nice to meet you!


    As she had done well, I patted Liza on the head.


    Ah, thats right. Can I speak to you for a moment, Mr. Kalis?


    Yes, what is it?


    I gestured to him and then we moved away from Nick.


    Its about Nick. Is he working hard like he should?


    Yes. You can hardly believe what kind of person he used to be. That is how well he works now. I suppose having a stable life really affected him It is all because of you, Mr. Takumi.


    NoI wasnt really thinking much when


    I had been prepared to apologize to Mr. Kalis for Nicks behavior, so this was a little surprising.


    In any case, if he was working seriously, then that was a good thing.


    I had talked to him when I arrested Deam, and he had been sorry about his past deeds. He even apologized to everyone he had troubled. You really couldnt judge someone by their appearance.


    By the way, I heard about it, Mr. Takumi. How you captured that man that everyone thought was untouchable.


    Ah, yes. It was mostly because of Leo.


    The guards and people who were therethey have spread the word. And so you and Leo are quite popr now. It has even affected this store.


    I see


    Oh? Is that a bad thing?


    No, not exactly But something like this has never happened before. And since I havent visited Ractos since, it doesnt feel real yet.


    Haha. Then it will be a good idea for you to go around the town. While it wont be everyonemost should be very weing to you two.


    I hope sohaha


    I had heard from Ms. Gelda that people were happy about Deams arrest.


    However, I had not seen any of the reactions in person.


    Regardless, we would have to do our best to not disappoint the people.


    Is it good, Leo and Liza?


    Yes, its delicious! Thanks, papa!


    Guff-guffwou!


    After speaking with Mr. Kalis, we went back into the town. Our next stop was Ms. Isabelles store, and so we headed out to the main street. But since Leo would not stop staring at the street stalls, I had no choice but to buy some meat skewers.


    I also gave some to Liza.


    They both wagged their tails happily, which was nicebut I hoped they would still be hungryter, when we had lunch.


    Ms. Helena had gone out of her way to prepare it, so I didnt want it to go to waste.


    We also drew a lot of attention, and the owner of the stall even said that we didnt have to pay. However, I still insisted on it.


    I suppose it showed how grateful they felt towards us.


    Fifty copperswas about five thousand yen. It wasnt cheap to feed Leo. However, I had plenty of money, so it was fine.


    Are you there, Ms. Isabelle?


    Oh? If it isnt Mr. Takumi.


    Grandmother!


    Oh, oh. And Liza too. Wee!


    I left Leo outside with Nichs, as she could not fit in, and entered the strange building with Liza.


    Ms. Isabelle was sitting down and polishing one of her products when she noticed us.


    Her reaction was so different between me and Liza. But then again, Liza was very fond of her, and saw her like a grandmother.


    Ms. Isabelle definitely was the age where it wouldnt be unusual if she had grandchildren


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    I started cooking in the kitchen In any case, please go and deliver the herbs. Yes, I will take them to Mr. Kalis! I had no idea why Milina and Nick thought so highly of me. Still, I did not want to keep Mr. Kalis waiting too long, and IApril 4, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Spreading Reputation Rahle, you really dont mind being outside? Kii! Rahle doesnt mind. I see In that case, it is settled. The garden should be big enough, butI hope you will not go too far. Because people who dont know might be rmed. Kii! Even if they dont know whatFebruary 15, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Tilura woke upte While its nice during the day and night, the morning air is pleasant as well, isnt it? Yes. Now that I think about it, grandfather used to say Hmm? That you need the morning light to live. And so he always got up early and sleptOctober 31, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 643

    Chapter 643


    Leo was popr in the town<hr>


    So, what did you do today? I can see that Liza is quite happy. Are you here on some business?


    No, we are on our way to Range vige, and so we cannot stay for long. But I thought we could stop by for a visit.


    I see. Range vige again


    Grandmother, grandmother.


    What is it?


    As Ms. Isabelle was all alone in the store, I had worried that she might be lonely.


    When I first came here, I remember that she looked sad when we finished and had to leave.


    It was probably difficult for customers to enter, due to the appearancewell, perhaps it was rude to think that.


    Though, Mr. Reyndorf used toe. And Sebastian also visited. So maybe there were other people as well.


    By the way, I heard about it, Mr. Takumi.


    What?


    About Deam. He was one of the things that Reyndorf was worried about before he died. And so I am d that it is settled.


    Ahso you know. But what did he have to do with Mr. Reyndorf?


    Well, everyone is talking about it. This town was not that dangerous, I suppose. But it is a little safer now. As for Reyndorfyes, he talked about it when he visited this store. He was worried about how things were in the slums, because he had Liza.


    I see


    I suppose the news really had spread through the whole town then.


    Though, she might be more sensitive to such information than most.


    Hey, grandmother


    Oh, what is it, Liza?


    She really seems to be fond of you.


    They had known each other before I met her.


    As we talked, Liza would pull on Ms. Isabelles sleeve to try and get her attention.


    She wanted to talk about all the fun things that had happened.


    Well, we wille again.


    Goodbye, grandmother.


    Aye. Next time, maybe you could buy something. Liza, you can visit anytime without worrying, alright?


    Yes!


    HahaIll think about it


    After talking with Ms. Isabelle for some time, we got up to leave.


    Thest time I was here, it was to find out about the Gift. But since we just talked this time, it was simr to window shopping.


    As she sold magic tools, it was probably a good thing to buy something next time.


    I wonder what kind of things she has? I would have to ask her.


    We then left the store and reunited with Leo and the guards.


    Next up was Mr. Haltons store.


    We had probably stayed here for too long, so we would have to hurry.


    I didnt want to keep Tilura and Sebastian waiting.


    They arent here yet


    Excuse me Can I touch her?


    Ah, yes. Dont worry. But be gentle.


    Wuff!


    I was now waiting in front of Mr. Haltons store with Leo and Tilura.


    In the meantime, some of the townspeople woulde and ask to pet Leo.


    At first, I thought they were just going to watch us from a distance, but then a little girl came with her mother, and eventually more gathered around.


    Well, Leo liked children. And as long as they werent pulling her fur or being rough, she was happy. And so I let them take turns petting her.


    Now that I thought about it, something simr happened the first time we were here


    In any case, I was happy that Leo was epted in Ractos.


    She had been furious when Liza had a stone thrown at her, but the people had seen how she stayed controlled without going wild.


    Sorry to keep you waiting, Mr. Takumi.


    Ah, Sebastian. Tilura. Did something happen?


    No. Nothing happened. But getting into the town took a little longer than expected.


    After about a dozen people had petted Leo, the others finally arrived.


    I thought that we were the ones who were going to bete, and so I wondered if something had happened But Sebastian averted his gaze.


    So something did happen then!


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    We would all visit Range vige Well, we have gotten side-tracked. I was talking about going to Range vige. You look embarrassed. Ive never seen father embarrassed before Nevermind that! Range vige! What about Range vige? It is not like there is anything in particr I have to do. ButMarch 6, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We started to exin to Mr. Haines Huh? Well, most of the children seemed to enjoy ying with Leo. The parents were all happy to see it as well. So it wasnt just the children, but the adults also epted Leo? Yes. Leo and Mr. Takumi saved the vige. OfOctober 6, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We finished preparations I know, Liza. After we return from Range vige, why dont you have a ride on Rahle as well? I can!? You can, Liza. Right, Rahle? Kii! Rahle and Tilura nodded happily. Tilura saw Liza as a younger sister, and Rahle liked carrying people. So everyone wasApril 23, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 644

    Chapter 644


    I bought hats with ears as a gift<hr>


    Sebastian couldnt move right away after getting off of Rahle. Hes fragile!


    Lady TiluraIm sorry.


    Ah Well, it cannot be helpedhaha


    Wuff.


    Tilura was quick to expose her butler when I asked.


    As they were just going around to the east gate, it should not have taken too long. But I suppose Sebastian felt a little sick.


    I doubted Rahle had gotten carried awaybut perhaps there was a little aerial acrobatics.


    As for Sebastian, he seemed to have recovered after walking through the town.


    I had also given him herbs, but they wouldnt solve everything Maybe I could make something to prevent him from getting sick.


    Wee! Ah, Mr. Takumi and Lady Tilura!


    Mr. Halton. Its been a while.


    We then entered Mr. Haltons store.


    Nichs and the guards watched over Leo, who was still being petted by the people.


    Liza. I see you are wearing that hat. Im d you like it.


    Yes, its very cute!


    Its nice to see a customer enjoy our products. So, what can I do for you today?


    Uh, do you have another hat like this one?


    Yes, we do. We made more since thest time you were here.


    Rosalie, the daughter of the Range vige chief, had liked the hat a lot.


    As she had likely bought one on the way back, perhaps its reputation was spreading in the vige.


    I want to take some to Range vige as gifts.


    Ah, for the children. I see. I will prepare them right away then.


    Also Would it be possible to repair Lizas hat, as it is getting a little worn out?


    Of course, right away.


    Thank you. See, Liza?


    Thank you!


    I wanted the children over there to be friends with Liza. And so it might help her earn some points with them.


    Well, I also wanted to give them the hats so as to not draw attention to their differences. It might make them less likely to discriminate against her But perhaps it wasnt that simple.


    Still, she might be able to befriend them more quickly.


    Wow! It looks so nice! Thank you.


    Not at all. We are just happy that you like it so much.


    Lizas hat was fixed in just a few minutes.


    As it wasnt washed, there was still dirt on it. However, it still looked much better than before.


    Here, Tilura.


    I can have one too?


    Yes. You seemed to have wanted one too. And since you worked so hard in the forest, I got it as a reward.


    So you could tell, Mr. Takumi. Though, I wasnt the only one who worked hard in the forestbut thank you!


    Now were matching, sister Tilura!


    Yes, we are!


    Mr. Halton had given me a bag that was filled with the hats, and so I took one out and gave it to Tilura.


    She thanked me and put the hat on. Both Tilura and Liza were happy that they had matching hats now. It was good that they were having fun.


    Papa, you put one on too!


    Huh?


    You too, Sebastian.


    What?


    At first, I didnt understand


    They wanted me and Sebastian to wear hats with ears on as well?


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Sebastian rode on Rahle Is itfortable? Its amazing! Not as soft as Rahles feathers, but flying wont be scary anymore! That is good to hear So, you are next, Sebastian. ...Mr. Takumi Yes, very well then. The saddle was made so that two people could ride on it. Though,April 19, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Sebastian became involved As we waited for dinner to be served, Tilura reported that she got permission from Rahle. Now that I thought about it, they seemed to be talking after training. Leo and Liza had been running with Sherry. But what did she need Rahles permission for? For theApril 12, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Sebastian exined happily Leo was not at all happy at the notion that Rahle might be faster than her. But flying and running on the ground were just too different. As for the effect of wind while flyingI would have to ask Rahle. But with running, the terrain affected youMarch 8, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 645

    Chapter 645


    Sebastian and I wore matching hats<hr>


    Uhh It was one thing for cute children to wear such hats, but adults Sebastian was handsome, but he wouldnt look good in it eitherhmm


    Still, who know? Uh


    Hurry up, papa!


    Here, Sebastian.


    Uhh


    As I hesitated, Mr. Halton quickly brought out some extra hats.


    It seemed like he and the other clerks were trying to hold back theirughter.


    Please stop that!


    However, Sebastian and I could not turn Liza and Tilura down.


    Umm..


    What should we do?


    We took the hats and looked at each other.


    Hurry!


    We can all be matching!


    How exciting


    Liza and Tilura urged us on.


    I suppose we have no choice then


    Hahvery well. If Lady Tilura and Liza insist


    Since everyone was looking at us so expectantly, we made up our minds and put the hats on our heads.


    Heh


    Papa is matching now!


    Sebastianyou lookhahahaha!


    Youre one to talk, Mr. Takumi. I should notugh, buthehehehe


    I was just d that there was no mirror nearby, so I did not have to see what I looked like and could focus on Sebastian And it was impossible to notugh.


    And so Sebastian and I were justughing at each other.


    Why did this happen? I was just trying to do something nice for the children of the vige


    Wuff? Wuff-wuff!


    Mama, sister Tilura and papa have the same hats now too!


    Wuff!


    Liza and Leo are so happy


    Hah I will make my master wear one too then!


    When we left the store, Leo greeted us while wagging her tail.


    I could see that Nichs and the other guards were trying now tough


    Hah We have finally left the town


    We were drawing a lot of attention, regardless of Leo


    Sebastiana muttered as we made our way out from the east gate, towards the ce where Rahle was waiting.


    Indeed, when we had left the store, and then stopped at Mr. Heines store, we noticed that a lot of people were staring at us.


    How did this happen


    As for the store, we bought things for Liza and Tilura, so they could maintain their knife and sword.


    Mr. Ekenhart said that by doing this, you would be attached to your weapon and treat them well, so it was important.


    Well, that was only normal.


    But they were still just tools, so I didnt think you should get too attached to them either.


    Weapons were used for fighting. If you cared too much about them, it would limit you But I suppose that was still too advanced for me and Tilura.


    I suppose we would learn if we continued to train?


    They didnt sell anything for my katanathey were notmon enough.


    I had wanted to stop by at the orphanage and talked to Ms. Anna as well, but we had already spent too much time there, so it would have to wait.


    Now, Sebastiangood luck.


    Yes


    Lets go, Rahle!


    Kii!


    Lets go too, mama!


    Wuff.


    Sebastian and Tilura climbed onto Rahle and then took off into the sky.


    Liza and I also got onto Leo, and we departed for Range vige.


    We would take the same route asst time, going straight down the main road, before making a turn towards the forest.


    It would be easier that way, since Leo would remember it.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    I bought hats with ears as a gift Sebastian couldnt move right away after getting off of Rahle. Hes fragile! ...Lady TiluraIm sorry. Ah Well, it cannot be helpedhaha Wuff. Tilura was quick to expose her butler when I asked. As they were just going around to the east gate,April 28, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Getting used to flying Judging by how tired Sebastian looked, he had not enjoyed it at all. Well, it was like a roller coaster. It was no wonder he was scared. Tilura did not seem to be too scared with this kind of thing. But perhaps it was due toApril 20, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Sebastian became involved As we waited for dinner to be served, Tilura reported that she got permission from Rahle. Now that I thought about it, they seemed to be talking after training. Leo and Liza had been running with Sherry. But what did she need Rahles permission for? For theApril 12, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 646

    Chapter 646


    We stopped to eat lunch<hr>


    While we were taking the same route asst time, there would still be people on the road, and so I had Leo run a short distance away from it, so that she would not scare anyone.


    The people of Ractos were somewhat used to Leo now, but others might be scared of her.


    Especially since she was running faster than any horse.


    Leo. For now, just keep running until midday!


    Wou!


    So fast!


    Leo ran ahead of Rahle, as if leading the way.


    Rahle was not going as fast as usual, since it was carrying Sebastian. But it was still faster than a horse.


    I think its about time now? Leo, please tell Rahle.


    Wuff. Aooooo!!


    Wow. So loud!


    Haha.


    After running for a while along the road, we changed direction slightly, towards Range vige, where it was just a beaten dirt path where few people traveled.


    As the sun was quite high in the sky, I checked my watch to see if it was time.


    And then I told Leo to send word to Rahle.


    Liza and I would not have been able to reach them if we shouted, but Leos roar was a different matter.


    Kii!


    What is it, Leo?


    Wou-wou!


    Everyone should be getting hungry, so lets eat!


    Very well. Rahle, lets go back down!


    Kii!


    Rahle started to descend, and so Leo slowed down as well.


    Tilura then shouted at us from Rahles back, and so I told her that we should eat lunch. Rahle then beat its wings andnded slowly on the ground.


    I thought that Leo would stop slowly as well, however


    Wuff!


    Gah! Leo, dont stop so suddenly. Liza and I arent strapped in, you know?


    Woah!


    Wou?


    Leo had suddenly dug her ws in the dirt and stopped.


    Her size and weight caused chunks of the ground to be carved out We would have to fill them in again, or it would be dangerous when carriages or horses passed through.


    Leo.


    Wuff.


    Hahphew.


    Are you alright?


    YesI suppose. Your herbs were of great help, Mr. Takumi.


    Im d that they were effective. Uhh, well prepare lunch, so please rest.


    YesIm sorry. I really should be the one to do it


    No, its easy. Dont worry about it.


    Ill help too!


    Oh, thank you, Liza.


    I then took out the food that Ms. Helena had prepared.


    There was soup and sandwiches.


    As there was no need to heat them up, we did not have to make a fire or use pots and pans.


    The sandwiches had hamburgers inside.


    She was already testing out different variations after I taught her how to make them.


    While Rahle and Leo raised their voices in expectation, Liza and I quickly prepared the food.


    We also put out a sheet on the ground, so that we could sit on it.


    As for water, Leo was able to make it with magic, so all we needed was cups.


    Here, Leo.


    Wuff Wou!


    Thank you, mama!


    Sebastian, Tilura, its ready.


    Thank you.


    Can you eat?


    Yes, I feel better after resting.


    I took out the cups and asked Leo to fill them with water.


    Though, Leo made something like a waterfall, so we basically had to catch what we could with the cups.


    As for Sebastian, he was starting to look better.


    Surely it would be best for him to eat and gain strength for the rest of the journey.


    Though, it was possible he would feel sick and not be able to keep it down


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Sebastian exined happily Leo was not at all happy at the notion that Rahle might be faster than her. But flying and running on the ground were just too different. As for the effect of wind while flyingI would have to ask Rahle. But with running, the terrain affected youMarch 8, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Tilura wanted to ride on Rahle again Ah, if were going to Range vige, how long will it take? Hmm? Ah, thats right If ire and Tilura are going, then a few servants will have to go too. And well travel by carriage again. ...Then it will take a littleMarch 7, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Rahle did something dangerous Alright, Leo. Lets go too! Wuff! Chase after them! We should go too. Indeed. Will Tilura be alright? I understand that youre worried, but good Leo will look after her. So she will be fine ...She looks like she is having fun, but it is scary.February 11, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 647

    Chapter 647


    We took breaks while traveling<hr>


    Leo had her sausages and Rahle was given some cooked meat. The rest of us sat down on the sheet and began to eat.


    As the food was made by Ms. Helena, it was quite delicious.


    Now, once we are finished eating lunch, we must catch up with the master and the others


    Indeed. How are you feeling?


    A little roughbut it cannot be helped. I shall manage


    While meant to stop and rest, there would still be many hours of traveling.


    What to do Ah, I know.


    Since Rahle was staying close by anyway, perhaps Liza and Sebastian could switch ces?


    If it is really hard for youwhat about having Liza ride in the back instead?


    Oh, that is an idea! No, I suppose not. The saddle was made for someonerger


    So Liza would not be secure in it.


    Yes. While she could still sit on it, and would likely be safe if she held on, she would not be secure. Also, the stirrups


    Lizas tail might also get in the way when sitting on it


    I cannot put her in danger, just because I am not used to flying. Yes, I shall manage just fine until we meet up with the others.


    Very well. But if you really cant handle it, then please tell me. I will think of something.


    Yes, thank you.


    And so I respected his wishes and let him ride on Rahle.


    Well then, Ill have Leo bark and tell you when we rest again.


    Lets go, Rahle!


    Kii!


    Do your best, mama!


    Wuff!


    While we were cleaning up after lunch, I tested to see if I could make a herb to prevent airsickness. However, when I put my hand on the ground and tried to make it grow with Weed Cultivation, it did not work.


    As I didnt want Sebastian to have false hope, I did it where he could not seewhich was the right decision.


    Perhaps the reason that I couldnt do it, was that I didnt imagine it right.


    In any case, it was possible that there was already a nt like that in this world, that was being grown somewhere.


    Alright Leo, its about time to roar again.


    Wou. Awwoooooooo!!


    This continued several times as we made our way to Range vige.


    Leo would bark to stop Rahle, and we would rest for five to ten minutes.


    We still wanted to catch up with Mr. Ekenhart today, and so Sebastian barely had time to catch his breath. I was worried about him.


    Still, as we continued on, I started to see something in the distance.


    Is thatsmoke?


    Theres something up ahead, papa.


    Grau!


    Kii! Kii!


    There are humans over there who made a fire!


    Thank you, Tilura and Rahle. It must be Mr. Ekenhart then. We finally caught up with them Sebastian, were almost there!


    Phewhahye-yes.


    I encouraged Sebastian, and then we rushed to reunite with the others.


    Its just a little farther, Leo.


    Wuff! Wou


    She said shes hungry. Im hungry too


    After eating so much Well, there will be food when we reach them. They brought more food than us.


    Wou!


    Eventually, I could see the carriage and horses.


    The sun was already starting to set, and it was getting dark. And Leo and Liza said they were hungry.


    They had eaten snacks in Ractos, and lots of food for lunch Leo had at least run a lot, but Liza sure ate a lot


    Well, it was good, since she was still growing.


    In any case, since it was still quite bright, it must mean that they stopped early and set up camp.


    They would take it easy, since Ms. ire was there. But then again, I did think that Mr. Ekenhart would want to keep traveling for as long as possible


    Well, the horses needed to rest as well. So that might be why they stopped early<hr>


    I picked up a new series. Please check it out if youre interested:<blockquote data-secret="5z5TStcJc5">


    Kamigami  1</blockquote>


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    We stopped to eat lunch While we were taking the same route asst time, there would still be people on the road, and so I had Leo run a short distance away from it, so that she would not scare anyone. The people of Ractos were somewhat usedApril 30, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We finished preparations I know, Liza. After we return from Range vige, why dont you have a ride on Rahle as well? I can!? You can, Liza. Right, Rahle? Kii! Rahle and Tilura nodded happily. Tilura saw Liza as a younger sister, and Rahle liked carrying people. So everyone wasApril 23, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Iforted Tilura Well, it looks like they will arrive safely. Were back! Wuff! After watching Tilura and Rahle for some time, therge building finally came into view. Somehow, Tilura had managed to stay on this whole time. Perhaps Rahle had sensed her fear, as there were no moreFebruary 12, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 648

    Chapter 648


    Sebastian wasnt the only one who got sick<hr>


    Mr. Takumi and Leo! And Lady Liza Werent you supposed to join us tomorrow?


    We had business in Ractos, and so we came a day early.


    I see.


    As we approached the campsite where they were preparing the tents, Ms. Johanna noticed us.


    I could smell something gooding from behind her, so they were likely cooking dinner.


    Leo was sniffing the air hungrily


    Mr. Takumi!


    Ah, Ms. ire.


    Sister!


    Wuff.


    As I was talking with Ms. Johanna, I heard a voice calling me by the fire.


    And then a momentter, Ms. ire rushed towards us.


    Liza also rushed towards her.


    Rahle thennded gently on the ground.


    Oh. Liza. You seem well. Mr. Takumi, you are early. Has something happened at the house?


    Ehehe.


    No, not really


    Ms. ire caught Liza and patted her on the head.


    And so I told her the same thing that I had told Johanna.


    I see. Well, we knew that you would being anyway, so that makes things easier.


    Yes. While we could make a fire, it would be troublesome if it rained.


    We didnt have a tent with us, after all.


    There was a forest nearby, which would keep most of the rain off of us. But we would not feel very safe.


    Sister!


    Tilura. I hope you had a pleasant flight.


    Yes! It was much better than the first time!


    That is good to hear By the way


    Hmm?


    Why hasnt Sebastiane down yet?


    Ah.


    Im sorryif someone could help me


    Sebastian was looking very pale as he sat in the saddle and asked us for help.


    He looked like an abandoned puppy, but I did not mention it for his sake.


    Oomph Are you alright?


    Ill manageuhhh


    Sebastian, over here.


    Thank you, Johanna


    Wellyoure not the only one


    Uuuu!


    Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. Anne?


    After I helped him down, Sebastian immediately covered his mouth with his hand.


    He probably felt very nauseous.


    As we had not rested very long, he must have been holding it in


    And so Ms. Johanna slowly took him over to the forest.


    When I turned to look, I saw that there were already two other people there, who did not look very well either.


    A tall manand a woman with unique hair


    Hah Those two started to feel sick inside of the carriage. Ms. Anne is not used to going out. And father never liked them either.


    I see


    Ms. ire said with a sigh.


    Carriages did shake a lot


    The roads were often gravel, and the wheels were not rubber tires.


    There was also no suspension like with cars.


    Still, Mr. Ekenhart usually rode on a horse. I suppose it was different


    Is it always like this?


    No, they were fine up until yesterday. Well, notpletely fine Its because of the rainst night. It slowed our progress, and so we had to hurry today. But the state of the road was not the best


    Ah, of course


    Well, perhaps I really should seriously think about making medicine to stop people from feeling sick.


    Even if one herb couldnt do it, perhaps abination of them could


    Ah, so is that why you are setting up camp early?


    Yes. Thanks to going faster, we did not fall behind schedule. But father is now in that state


    So that was why Well, it could not be helped. At least he did not vomit inside of the carriage.


    Father are you It stinks!


    Ti-Tilura That hurts my feelings Gahh


    Are you alright?


    Im fine Dont worry about me


    While I was talking with Ms. ire, Tilura and Liza seemed to be worried about the others as they approached them.


    However, their casual remarks just made things worse


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Liza Was Hesitant It was hard to imagine that they could make clothes from scratch in a day. But I at least wanted clothes that she could wear tomorrow before we left. After thinking about it for a moment, Mr. Halton nodded and said that it could be ready inAugust 8, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We Went to Ractos with Liza I felt a little bad for Mr. Ekenhart, as he left looking quite disappointed about not being able to go to Ractos. Ms. ire would be going instead. I still remember seeing her raise her fist in triumph at this. I suppose she wasAugust 7, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Ms. ire Enjoyed The Fried Noodles Mr. Takumi! It is so delicious! Haha. Indeed. While the appearance and smell are odd, it tastes much better than I expected! After taking a few bites of it, Ms. ires eyes widened with surprise. Even if it wasnt quite perfect in my eyes,August 11, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 649

    Chapter 649


    We yed a trick on Mr. Ekenhart<hr>


    It looks like they wont recover for some time


    Hahindeed


    As for Leo and Rahle, they were not interested in such things, and quickly went over to the fire where Ms. Lyra and the others were preparing the food.


    After some time had passed, Mr. Ekenhart and the others finally felt better, and we all sat down to eat.


    Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. Anne were especially hungry.


    So, we are all gathered together now


    Im d to be able to see little Liza again.


    Father, Anneyoure acting like nothing happened


    Tsk I really did not expect that to happen. I should not have been mocking Sebastian so much.


    Ugh. No one will marry me now


    After we finished eating, Mr. Ekenhart started to talk in aposed and serious voice.


    Ms. Anne followed him.


    However, Ms. ire was merciless, and immediately brought up what they were trying to forget It was like she was waiting for the opportunity.


    I have also embarrassed myself Mr.Takumi, Sebastian?


    Yes?


    What is it, Your Grace?


    Why are you wearing those hats?


    Ah


    Just as I was pitying him, Mr. Ekenhart suddenly reminded me of my own shame.


    Now that I thought about it, we had not taken them off after leaving Ractos!


    Sebastian and I looked at each with realization.


    It had all been Liza and Tiluras idea, but as they were surprisinglyfortable, I forgot that I was even wearing it.


    If only Ms. ire or Johanna had said something!


    It was no wonder they would not look me in the eye


    I think its cute. It suits you.


    Ms. ire said. She was probably lying, as she said it while looking away.


    Those hatsyes, I think I will take some inspiration from them!


    I had heard something about how the Barsler family also owned a clothing store


    Well, it was possible that they could be popr


    The-there is a reason for this


    Oh? Lets hear it then.


    Uhwell. Liza


    What, papa? Hmmokay! Sister Tilura!


    Liza? Yes, yesokay!


    Hmm?


    As I tried to make excuses, Mr. Ekenhart smiled, and it was clear that he was going to make fun of us.


    However, I quickly had an idea, which I whispered to Liza. She nodded and then told Tilura.


    I then took something out of my bag and handed it to her.


    As for Sebastian, he understood what was going to happen, and silently took a step back.


    Alright, now!


    Yes! Brace yourself, father!


    You too, sister ire!


    Huh!?


    Me?


    What is this?


    On my signal, Tilura ran towards Mr. Ekenhart, while Liza ran to Ms. ire. And like that, they both had the hats put on their heads.


    As for Ms. Annewell, there were not enough.


    Matching!


    We are all the same!


    Hmm? Hmm


    Father is not so surprised But I feel embarrassed.


    What aboutme


    Now, now, Ms. Anne. Here.


    Thank you.


    So you wanted one too, Anne


    Ms. Anne looked happy as she put the hat on her head.


    Do I look pretty?


    You are so epting. Thats a surprise


    Hehe. This is nothing. A noble cannot be phased so easily.


    That has nothing to do with it, father. UhMr. Takumi?


    Yes? Ahyes, you look good.


    I-I see


    What about me?!


    You-you also look good, Ms. Anne.


    Of course, I do. Now I am matching with little Liza!


    Matching!


    While Mr. Ekenhart did not look good at allhe seemed strangely confident


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Mr. Ekenharts Departure And so while in the submissive pose, Leo was petted by not just Liza, but Ms. Lyra as well. Obviously, she no longer looked like an intimidating Silver Fenrir. But I suppose it was a worthy trade off for Leo. Well, I would join them and petApril 15, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Mr. Hannes met Ms. Anne I am quite old And so my son and his wife told me to take Rosalie with me, just in case something happened. They coulde with me, as they were busy in the vige So thats why Rosalie was here. Indeed, Mr. Haines didOctober 3, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    People were eavesdropping Treating others wellI had never thought about such things before. I am a noble, a superior human. It was only natural that I should be treated as special, and there was no need to be concerned about others Wellyou cannot be treated well if there is noJanuary 16, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 650

    Chapter 650


    The whole group wore the ear hats<hr>


    As Mr. Ekenhart liked to do things that were amusing, he was probably just enjoying it.


    If he looked just a little red, it was likely due to the fire, and not because he was just pretending to be unphased.


    Regardless, I was just happy that everyone was having fun.


    Hahthe master can be so mischievous sometimes


    Ahahawell, it was our fault for forgetting to take them off.


    Indeedthat was bad. Im sorry forining so much, Mr. Takumi.


    Not at all. After you had to ride on Rahle, you shouldin a little.


    Later, Sebastian and I were talking a short distance away from the others.


    While the atmosphere was still awkward because of the hatswe could rte to each other now.


    We had both felt embarrassed, after all.


    Thank you. Still, the vigers will surely be surprised.


    Indeed


    Do you still have more of the hats?


    Yes, I do. Mr. Halton made a lot of them. Of course, it will not be enough for everyone in the vige.


    That cannot be helped. Besides, you cannot make them all wear hats No one should go through what we did.


    Haha


    After that, Mr. Ekenhart suggested that I give the hates to anyone else who wanted them. And so I gave some to the servants.


    Most were womenI suppose they were interested after seeing Liza wear hers inside of the mansion.


    Also, Ms. ire and Ms. Anne were wearing them.


    Even Ms. Johanna, who was usually so serious, was wearing one.


    The men wore them too, but tended to getughed at. Especially by Phillip.


    As for Leo, she seemed to be rather happy that everyone was wearing hats that made it look like they had ears simr to hers and Liza.


    However, Mr. Ekenhart then made another problematic suggestion. He wanted us all to go to Range vige while wearing the hats.


    He said it was because they would be nervous about a noble visiting their vige, and this would help them to rx.


    I suppose he was right, that they wouldnt feel too nervous after seeing us, but


    Sebastian let out a sigh, and I could do nothing but chuckle.


    The next morning, after eating breakfast, we departed for Range vige.


    I got into the carriage with Ms. ire, while Mr. Ekenhart rode on Leo with Liza.


    Furthermore, Sebastian got into the drivers seat, and Ms. Anne rode on Rahle.


    Mr. Ekenhart did not want to get sick in the carriage again, while Ms. Anne was interested in flying.


    Ms. Anne was light, but not too small that she could not be strapped in, so it should be fine.


    Sebastian sat in his seat and seemed to be overjoyed that he would not be flying today.


    Father has rode on Leo before, but are you sure Anne will be alright?


    From what I saw, it should shake less than a horse or carriage I think she should be fine.


    It was just a matter of getting used to the sensation of flying.


    Rahle got in trouble from Leo before, so it wont do anything reckless. Leo will be watching More importantly, Ms. ire


    What is it, Mr. Takumi?


    Why do you keep looking away from me today?


    I-Im not doing that!


    In the carriage, it was me, Ms. ire and Johanna.


    They were sitting together, while I was on the opposite side. But for some reason, even as we talked, Ms. ire would not meet my gaze.


    Well, to be honest, I already knew the reason.


    She looked embarrassed after I said that the hat looked good on her. And now that it was daytime and I could see her better, she probably felt even more embarrassed.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    I bought hats with ears as a gift Sebastian couldnt move right away after getting off of Rahle. Hes fragile! ...Lady TiluraIm sorry. Ah Well, it cannot be helpedhaha Wuff. Tilura was quick to expose her butler when I asked. As they were just going around to the east gate,April 28, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We yed a trick on Mr. Ekenhart It looks like they wont recover for some time Hahindeed As for Leo and Rahle, they were not interested in such things, and quickly went over to the fire where Ms. Lyra and the others were preparing the food. After some time hadMay 3, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Sebastian and I wore matching hats Uhh It was one thing for cute children to wear such hats, but adults Sebastian was handsome, but he wouldnt look good in it eitherhmm Still, who know? Uh Hurry up, papa! Here, Sebastian. Uhh As I hesitated, Mr. Halton quickly brought out someApril 29, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 651

    Chapter 651


    Ms. Johanna said something unexpected<hr>


    That hat. It suits you, so you can be more confident, you know?


    Confident If you say so, Mr. Takumi. But I dont feel What about you, Mr. Takumi?


    I got used to it. It was more embarrassing wearing in town around strangers.


    WellI can see how that would happen. I suppose I would get used to it too if a lot of people saw me?


    That is no good, Lady ire. It will be no good at all!


    Johanna?


    I have watched you for a long time, Lady ire Even when you were young, you would sneak out with a sword and pretend to be your father


    Jo-Johanna! Calm down.


    I cannot calm down! I still remember how you fell down and hurt your hand While we worried, you said you wanted to be strong like your father. I remember it like it was yesterday!


    Uh, Johanna. Thats enough


    No! Your cuteness is much more than that! Even when you ran and fell. You bore the pain and pretended to be strong. And when you understood that you were not suited to fighting, you cried angrily. I have seen it all! I know how you are in every state. And there are some things that should not be shown to others!


    Ms. Johanna started ranting and praising Ms. ire in a confused way out of nowhere.


    Just because Ms. ire might walk through the town in a strange hat? Not that she looked bad in it.


    Also, I didnt know that happened when she was a child But I suppose it made sense, looking at Mr. Ekenhart and Tilura.


    Noyou are saying too much, Johanna. Besides, when did I give up?


    Huh? You havent?


    Of course, not.


    Even when you fell off a horse andnded on your face?


    Yes.


    And when you lost every race to the other children, including the ones that spent all of their time reading books? And you cried all night?


    Oh, I was probably sick


    And when they threw mud balls at your face?


    You werent even there, Johanna. Oh, father must have told you


    Yes, he sounded very amused. I had just started training then, so that I could be your guard.


    All these stories about Ms. ire were very interesting


    Still, she had be tired quickly when first entering the forest. But she was dragging Ms. Anne the second time. But it seemed like she was not very athletic.


    She probably did have the strength, which she inherited from her father.


    She just did not know how to use it well.


    More importantly, why are you so upset, Johanna?


    Becausemore people might target you


    Target me?


    Ruffians! Once they see you, most men would be bewitched in an instant!


    Apparently, she was worried about strange men approaching Ms. ire.


    She was starting to sound like Mr. Ekenhart.


    Hah So thats what youve been babbling about? Dont worry, that will not happen. As if they would ever approach someone from a dukes house. They should be much too afraid.


    Welleven if they did, I will protect you, as your guard


    Ms. ire seemed like she wasnt fully aware of how pretty she was.


    I thought she would be a little confident, even if it wasnt as much as Ms. Anne


    Though, it was also hard to imagine a Ms. ire who boasted about her beauty. It would be like a different person.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Sebastian wasnt the only one who got sick Mr. Takumi and Leo! And Lady Liza Werent you supposed to join us tomorrow? We had business in Ractos, and so we came a day early. I see. As we approached the campsite where they were preparing the tents, Ms. Johanna noticedMay 2, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Sebastian became involved As we waited for dinner to be served, Tilura reported that she got permission from Rahle. Now that I thought about it, they seemed to be talking after training. Leo and Liza had been running with Sherry. But what did she need Rahles permission for? For theApril 12, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Ms. ire Enjoyed The Fried Noodles Mr. Takumi! It is so delicious! Haha. Indeed. While the appearance and smell are odd, it tastes much better than I expected! After taking a few bites of it, Ms. ires eyes widened with surprise. Even if it wasnt quite perfect in my eyes,August 11, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 652

    Chapter 652


    It was officially recognised by the others<hr>


    Well, if you were to look very pretty around Mr. Takumi, then it might improve your rtionship. That would be very encouraging for all of us who guard and watch over you!


    What!?


    Huh!?


    Ms. Johanna had suddenly looked at me before saying something very absurd.


    Ms. ire was also stunned.


    I just hoped that Sebastian was not listening in.


    Wha


    What is it, Lady ire?


    You say such ridiculous things! Why are you talking about Mr. Takumi all of a sudden!?


    The master is quite fond of him. And since he has Leo, he is strong enough to


    Thats true! But Mr. Takumi and I do not have that kind of rtionship yet!


    Yet?


    Nevermind that! In any case, whether or not I want to wear this hatit has nothing to do with Mr. Takumi!


    Butyou seemed to carest night?


    No, I dont!


    In any case, Mr. Takumi. Please look after Lady ire.


    Huh? Uh Haha


    A few days ago, I had had a talk with Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian. I suppose it was on a lot of peoples minds these days.


    Regardless, I could do nothing but smile awkwardly.


    Uh, but isnt it Mr. Ekenharts wish, that we all continue to wear the hats when we reach the vige?


    Yes, indeed. I thought it was a good idea.


    But then That means everyone in the vige will see her?


    Oh!


    Ms. Johanna finally realized it, and seemed quite troubled.


    As for Ms. ire, she was still ring at her.


    Though, I noticed that her cheeks were a little flushed as well.


    The conversation had gone back in a strange direction. But I was in no position to say anything to Ms. rie.


    Not yet


    Grau!!


    Leo!?


    What?


    Kyau?


    The carriage has stopped


    Did something happen?


    Lady ire. Mr. Takumi. Please be careful.


    After stopping once for a lunch break, we continued on our way towards Range vige for some time. And just as the sun was starting to set, I heard Leo barking outside of the carriage.


    It was not her usual barking. She sounded like this when she detected danger. And so we all looked outside in rm.


    But I could not see anything, and eventually, the carriage slowed down and stopped.


    We had not nned to stop here, so something must have happened after all.


    Ms. Johannas hand went to her sword as she jumped out of the carriage.


    Johanna! Its monsters! They are noting towards us yet, but stay on your guard!


    Understood, Phillip!


    Let us go and see as well.


    Yes. Ah, I will get down first. You can best, Ms. ire


    Thank you, Mr. Takumi.


    Monstershuh? Apparently, they were noting towards us, but I still wanted to be sure.


    While I was still not good enough, I had trained a lot.


    Sebastian, what happened?


    Lady ire, Mr. Takumi


    Sebastian had also gotten down from the drivers seat.


    Johanna and Phillip had unsheathed their swords and were scanning the area. But the other guards and carriage were up ahead, and acting as a defensive wall.


    After all, this was the carriage that Mr. Ekenhart was supposed to ride in. And so protecting Ms. ire would be their top priority


    But for some reason, I could not see Leo anywhere. Perhaps she had gone ahead with Mr. Ekenhart and Liza?


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    The new tea was ready Well, perhaps I should have made something that was easier to eat Something that you used a knife and a fork They could still use a knife to cut the hamburgers, but it would be a little difficult, as the bread was quite thick. TheApril 9, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Ms. ire was very worried The sausages were prepared, like you requested. Will you go and take a bath now, Mr. Takumi? Wuff! Wuff! Yes. I would like to take a bath and warm myself. Can I leave Leo to you? Certainly. Mr. Takumi, here. Yes, thank you. Leo startedSeptember 22, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I hadnt thought about where I would live Mr. Takumi should be fine But good Leo Wuff? Hmm. You mean the house is too small. After looking at me, Mr. Haines nced over to Leo, who was ying with Rosalie. Leo noticed this and turned to us questioningly. Indeed, itOctober 7, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 653

    Chapter 653


    There were Trolls on the road<hr>


    As Phillip said, there are monsters. Trolls up ahead. But its quite unusual for them to be lurking around here


    Trolls? What about the others?


    Yes, they have gone ahead in order to get rid of the danger. HoweverIm sure they will have nothing to do, as Leo and His Grace went first.


    Fatherhah


    It wont be dangerous if Leo is there. Besides, Rahle is also flyinghuh? I dont see Rahle anywhere


    Kyau! Kyau-kyau!


    I am not worried about father. Im sure he is excited about it ording to Sherry, Rahle is with them now.


    Haha, that is true. And thank you, Sherry.


    Kyau!


    But Liza is with them


    Ms. ire was worried about the children getting mixed up in all of the fighting. But considering what happened in the forest, Liza was probably excited to be there.


    Tilura as well. Though, I did feel a little bad about Ms. Anne.


    She was the only one who could not fight Oh, well.


    Leo, Liza. Are you alright?


    Wuff!


    Ah, papa! Yes, we are fine! Mama and Rahle defeated them in no time.


    Mr. Takumi. I had a feeling this would happen, but there was nothing for me to do.


    Well, youre the one who is supposed to be protected, Mr. Ekenhart. So maybe it is a good thing?


    I know that. But when ites to fighting, I get restless. Besides, there was no real danger


    Well, I think Ms. ire will let you know how she feelster


    Hmm


    Leo had returned while carrying Liza, and so I called out to them.


    Even though I knew they were fine, I always asked out of habit.


    Regardless, they both looked to be in a good mood. Unlike Mr. Ekenhart.


    Uhhh, we got down from mama, and then she began to run at a great speed. And then Rahle came from the sky. And they beat the trolls in no time! It was amazing!


    I see. Im d that you were able to watch them.


    Yes!


    You did well, Leo.


    Wuff-wuff.


    In any case, I left Mr. Ekenhart with Ms. ire, and listened to Lizas report.


    Leo likely used her ws and fangs as usual, but ording to Liza, Rahle was able to cut the trolls by using its wings like des.


    I had no idea it could do that I thought that it would use magic, or attack with its beak.


    And I was surprised that it could attack like that while still carrying Tilura and Ms. Anne on its back.


    Perhaps it was still excited after the battle, as Rahle was flying in a circle above us.


    I was a little worried about Ms. Anne I hoped that she didnt get sick up there.


    Wuff-wou?


    Yes. There was a trollst time as well. Though, Sebastian said that its unusual for them to be here


    Mr. Takumi. Is that true?


    Ah, Sebastian. I was just wondering


    As I was nodding to Leo and thinking, Sebastian had overheard me and showed interest.


    He wasnt eavesdropping, was he?


    Mr. Takumi, Leo. You saw a troll here before?


    Yes. I cant say the exact location, but it was close by. And Leo defeated it.


    Wuff!


    I see Unlike the fenrir forest, this one is connected to Rahles mountain Perhaps something happened over there? No, but surely that wouldnt cause trolls toe down Besides, that was quite a while ago. And there were no other reports of trolls between Range vige and Ractos


    Sebastian started muttering to himself.


    Well, I didnt know what the reason was, but perhaps Rahle would know?


    Rahle was the lord of the northern mountain, apparently


    Uncategorized<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Rahle had done well ...Leo? Wuff? Wuff-wuff! Good morning. There, there. What happened? I was standing where the servants had gathered, and so I could not see what was happening, as Leo and the fenrirs were blocking my view. Rahle was also spreading out his wings, so I could notFebruary 5, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Sherry was tired from running As Sherry had been jogging around the garden, it was not surprising that she was tired. Unlike the time before we went to the forest, Leo was not chasing her. So she ran at a slower pace, but for a longer time. ...Leo might getFebruary 26, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Something was approaching Wuff Wou? She is saying that there is a presence and smell that is both familiar and unfamiliar Familiar and unfamiliar Perhaps it was because the herbs were still having an effect But she could even smell it. We had just eaten lunch, and so the areaDecember 29, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 654

    Chapter 654


    I asked Rahle why there were trolls here<hr>


    If its rted to Rahles mountain, then we should probably ask about it. Leo, could you call Rahle?


    Wuff. Awoooo!!


    Kii!


    What is it?


    We were having such a good time flyingwhat happened?


    I had been worried about Ms. Anne, but she was fine, and clearly enjoyed flying.


    She was quite different from Sebastian.


    Even though she didnt like the swaying of a carriage.


    UhhRahle, there is something that I want to ask you.


    Wou?


    Kii!


    In any case, I think you shoulde down, Tilura and Ms. Anne. It will be easier to talk that way Apparently, Rahles mountain is connected to that forest, and


    And so I asked about the mountain, forest and trolls.


    Hmm, I seeso thats why.


    Silver Fenrirs have such an effect by just existing.


    Wouwou-wou!


    I know. You didnt do anything wrong. There, there.


    There, there, mama!


    ording to Rahle, it was probably because a Silver Fenrir was approaching.


    As Rahle was not there, it did not know the exact situation. But it suggested that the other monsters must have sensed Leos approach and gone wild.


    And then the trolls may have been chased out of the forest.


    Leo had also passed through here when without me in the past. But as she had been running quickly, things might have settled before trolls or other monsters were driven out.


    Well, when it was Phillip or Sebastian, she had apparently run from the mansion without resting.


    When it was with me, we would rest or go at the same speed as the horses, so there was plenty of time for the trolls toe out of the forest.


    It might be necessary to search the forest once. This road is connected to Ractos, so it will be a problem if monsterse out regrly. And while trolls could be dealt with by a group of soldiers, there are other monsters as well. We do not want innocent civilians to be attacked.


    Indeed. Besides, these roads will be used more often, once we start transporting the herbs.


    Yes. We might ask for Rahles help when the timees. We will discuss the matter after we return to the mansion.


    As Leo, Rahle and the guards were with us, it was not really a problem that the trolls appeared.


    However, it would be different if it was just a merchant caravan.


    Things would be a lot more easier if there were also fenrirs in this forest who we couldmunicate with


    So then, Mr. Takumi, Lady ire. We shall be camping out here tonight.


    Yes. ThenLeo, Liza and I will go and collect branches to use for the fire.


    And Iwill talk with Anne. She is still excited after her flight, and will surely seek to bother other people.


    After we had dealt with the trolls, we continued on our journey until the sun set. And so we prepared the camp site.


    Apparently, Ms. Anne had enjoyed riding on Rahle so much, and was trying to talk to everyone about how wonderful it had been


    I didnt know if it was because Rahle was flying slower than usual, or she just liked flying.


    As for Mr. Ekenhart, he had already gotten off of Leo and was headed towards Rahle.


    He probably wanted to talk to Tilura about what it was like to fly.


    In any case, we had to gather some branches.


    As the forest was close, it would not be difficultunless they were wet from the rain


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Rahle had returned home Now that I thought about it, Sherry would also get tired first when running with Liza. So in terms of energy, she definitely had Tilura and I beat. While Leo might have regained her pride, I had lost mine Well, maybe I didnt have much toApril 17, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Rahle liked being on the roof Ms. Lyra smiled and greeted me. While it must have been tough, staying in the forest and cooking, I was d to see that she wasnt tired anymore. Please leave her to me. If she wakes up, I will help her get ready andFebruary 21, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Sebastian rode on Rahle Is itfortable? Its amazing! Not as soft as Rahles feathers, but flying wont be scary anymore! That is good to hear So, you are next, Sebastian. ...Mr. Takumi Yes, very well then. The saddle was made so that two people could ride on it. Though,April 19, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 655

    Chapter 655


    There was a creature that seemed familiar in Range Vige<hr>


    Well then, ording to our n, we will arrive at the vige tomorrow after lunch?


    Yes. While there were some interruptions, we are not behind schedule. And so we can rest and eat before continuing on to the vige.


    Very well.


    After dinner, Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian talked about the ns for tomorrow.


    So we would arrive in Range vige after midday.


    I wondered if everyone was well.


    I hoped that the children would y with Leo again, and get along with Liza.


    As for the branches used for the fire, a lot of them were wet fromst nights rain. However, I was able to dry them out with Weed Cultivation.


    It was so convenient that I ended up having Liza and Leo gather more and more branches to dry, and so we had too much. However, since they could be used tomorrow, it would not be a waste.


    Mama, is it good?


    Wuff!


    Do you like it, Rahle?


    Kii!


    In the meantime, Liza and Tilura were feeding Leo and Rahle sausages and other meat.


    They were perfectly capable of eating alone But the reason was the Sherry had been looking at Ms. ires food hungrily. And so Ms. ire started to feed her, and then Liza and Tilura copied that.


    Once everything was decided, we all retired to our tents to rest.


    But even with Leo and Rahle around, we had someone keep watch, because of the appearance of the trolls.


    Like in the forest, my watch was with Leo and Liza Though, Liza did not stay up for long.


    And unlike previous times, I did not end up talking with anyone, and it was a peaceful night


    Are we really going to go like this, father?


    Of course. It would be much more fun, wouldnt it?


    Hah Very well.


    It looks very cute, so Im sure they will be kind about it?


    The following day, we departed for Range vige. And after resting to eat lunch, we were now at the final step before arriving.


    Ms. ire was still ufortable about wearing the hats, but Mr. Ekenhart was clearly looking forward to it.


    As for Ms. Anne, she showed none of the excitement that she had yesterday after riding on Rahle.


    She was very nervous, and looked at Ms. ire almost pleadingly.


    After all, she was here in order to apologize to the vigers.


    While Mr. Hanes had forgiven her, mostly because of Mr. Ekenhart, she did not know how the other vigers felt about it.


    Besides, Ms. ire and Mr. Ekenhart had made suggestionssaying that they would be angry and throw stones or try to hit her


    Of course, they intended to help her in any way they could. But in the end, this was something she had to do herself.


    While she was not the person to give the ordershe had still been the one to make the suggestion.


    On the other hand, the vigers were quite gentle in general. So it would take a lot for them to view her so severely.


    After seeing Ms. Anne throw herself to the ground and beg for forgiveness, they may feel less angry


    Kyan! Kyan!


    Hey, be quiet!


    Your Grace, Lady ire, Mr. Takumi. And Leo Wee to our vige.


    Mmm However


    Dog?


    Wuff. Wuff-wuff!


    Hey, Leo. I understand how you feel, but stay calm.


    Papa. That one looks like Sherry!


    It doesbut its not the same animal, alright?


    We arrived in Range vige and came out of the carriage.


    As Mr. Ekenhart had sent word ahead, Mr. Hannes and the viges came out to greet us.


    Well, that was fine The problem was that there were dogs with them, who were barking at us.


    Leo was happy and wagged her tail with excitement.


    Liza looked at them as if puzzled. But they were dogs, and quite different from fenrirs.


    While they were smaller than Sherryperhaps it was all the same for Leo.


    And so instead of surprising them with our hats, we ended up being the ones who were surprised.


    No, the vigers were clearly looking at our hats, so they were surprised as well.


    In any case, it would look like Ms. Annes apology would have to wait a moment


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    We finished preparations I know, Liza. After we return from Range vige, why dont you have a ride on Rahle as well? I can!? You can, Liza. Right, Rahle? Kii! Rahle and Tilura nodded happily. Tilura saw Liza as a younger sister, and Rahle liked carrying people. So everyone wasApril 23, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Tilura wanted to ride on Rahle again Ah, if were going to Range vige, how long will it take? Hmm? Ah, thats right If ire and Tilura are going, then a few servants will have to go too. And well travel by carriage again. ...Then it will take a littleMarch 7, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Mr. Ekenharts Departure And so while in the submissive pose, Leo was petted by not just Liza, but Ms. Lyra as well. Obviously, she no longer looked like an intimidating Silver Fenrir. But I suppose it was a worthy trade off for Leo. Well, I would join them and petApril 15, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 656

    Chapter 656


    The dogs jumped towards Leo<hr>


    Kyan-kyan!


    Wuff!


    Wou? Wuff-wuff.


    You sure are popr, Leo. No one is scared of you anymore.


    The people of the vige had a few dogs with them. Some were interested in Leo while others were more cautious. But once Leo moved towards them and licked their faces, they warmed up to her.


    Or maybe they just surrendered.


    Kyau?


    You can go y if you want?


    Kyau!


    So Sherry wants to y too. You should go too, Liza.


    Yes. See youter, papa!


    Sherry looked restless as Ms. ire was carrying her, and it was clear that she wanted to join Leo and the dogs.


    And so Ms. ire agreed and put Sherry on the ground. She wagged her tail and went running to the others.


    As Liza wanted to join them, I suggested that she should, and so she went running off while wagging her tail.


    Wouwuff?


    Kyan!


    Huh?


    I noticed that while they were ying, there was one dog that seemed hostile, and would charge into and try to bite Leo.


    But due to the difference in size, and Leos silver fur, it was clear that it did not hurt at all


    The dog was probably still a puppy. It was small enough to pick up with one hand, and it had white fur.


    It made me a little nostalgic Oh, maybe it would hurt itself if it charged into Leo.


    Hey,e over here!


    ? Ruff!


    There, there


    Wuff?


    Grrr


    Now, now. You have no way of beating Leo, so why not y nice?


    Ruff!


    Wou


    Dont be so sad Leoit will get used to you eventually.


    I went over to the dogs and pped while calling the one who attacked Leo.


    It looked at me, and after tilting its head once, wagged its tail and ran to me.


    It was rather friendly to other people, it seemed


    Once I thought that it was calm, I held close to Leo, but then it bared its teeth and started to growl again.


    This made Leo rather sad, and I had tofort her.


    Leo, this dogits a maltese, isnt it?


    Wuff.


    ?


    Leo nodded in agreement.


    While it was still youngthe short fur and dark eyes and nose


    Also, the folded ears were very cute, and it had a short muzzle.


    Leo had been like this when I first found her Even though she was silver now, and much bigger and stronger.


    Mr. Takumi, do you have a moment? Im sorry to bother you, but we have to speak with the chief


    Ah, I understand. Alright, dont get in any fights, Leo.


    Wou! Wou-wuff.


    Yes, its true that this little one started it. But just be nice, alright?


    Wou


    Wuff!


    As I was reminiscing, Sebastian came to call me.


    Thats right, I had to talk with Mr. Harnes now.


    Huh? What is Ms. ire going to do?


    While I was walking towards the chiefs house with Mr. Ekenhart, Mr. Harnes and Sebastian, I saw Ms. ire walking past us.


    As she was going to manage the business with me, I thought she would apany us.


    Iwill be here. I have to keep an eye on Sherryand Anne.


    I see


    Im really, really sorry!


    In a ce where all of the other vigers were gathered, I heard Ms. Anne shouting loudly.


    I could tell that they were stunned by her intensity. Well, I would just leave her to Ms. ire then.


    First of all, thank you foring to our humble vige, Your Grace.


    Yes. Well, no need to be so formal. We already talked about it at the mansion.


    Thank you.


    We were in thergest building in the vige. Mr. Harness house.


    Aside from Sebastian, we were all sitting down. And then Mr. Harnes stood up and bowed to Mr. Ekenhart.


    One day, I would have to be able to do such formal things as this Though, it would be awkward around someone like Mr. Ekenhart.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Leo started a diet n for Sherry Besides, it is probably easier in some ways when they are a familiar. Really? Yes. Because no matter what happens, you can speak to each other. Ah, that is true. It is very convenient to be able to understand each other. But IAugust 30, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Rahle had done well ...Leo? Wuff? Wuff-wuff! Good morning. There, there. What happened? I was standing where the servants had gathered, and so I could not see what was happening, as Leo and the fenrirs were blocking my view. Rahle was also spreading out his wings, so I could notFebruary 5, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Fenrirs appeared from the forest Still, are you sure, Leo? I know you said that fenrirs arent a danger to you, but Wou. Wuff-wuff. Wou-wou. Even if they doe, youll deal with them easilyright. Well, Im sure you can But go easy on them, alright? Wuff. If there wereDecember 30, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 657

    Chapter 657


    We talked with Mr. Harnes<hr>


    So, what happened with those dogs? I do not remember them being here thest time


    Yes. They were not.


    First, Mr. Ekenhart asked the thing he had been wondering about.


    After Mr. Takumi and Leo saved our vige, we had to think of other ways to stay safe. Of course, we will fight if monsters attack, but it would be nice to know beforehand.


    Hmm. Indeed. You would have time to run away or prepare to fight.


    Yes. From what Mr. Takumi told me, Leo is able to detect monsters that are still far away.


    Indeed.


    And so remembering this, we decided to search for something that could do the same.


    Which were dogs?


    No We were thinking of wolves, first.


    Wolves Yes, they do have a sharper sense of smellpared to humans. However, isnt that a little dangerous?


    Yeswe asionally see wolves in the forest to the northbut they are fast, and we are unable to catch them.


    I have never seen any wolves myself, but they were likely simr to the fenrirs.


    Though, they must be much weaker, if the vigers were trying to catch them.


    In the first ce, if you want wolves to help you, you must make a contract. And so we decided to start with dogs, and train some of the vigers to be stronger. And thenter, we might be able to catch a wolf


    I see. Once the dogs grow, they will be quite fast. And so raising them will make it easier to understand wolves, which will make it easier to catch them in the future.


    Yes. The vige must be able to protect itself without the duke or Mr. Takumis help. Of course, we are grateful for what you did. It was the news about Mr. Takumi and Lady ire that made us decide on it.


    What did it have to do with us moving?


    After all, we would be bringing guards for Ms. ire. And then there was Leo and Sherry.


    Surely it would be safe enough?


    While it happened so suddenly, you helped us. With both the disease and the monsters. And so now we want to help you Of course, we are also trying to continue with production of the wine. Though, we do not have grapes yet, so we are just making preparations.


    Hmm. I see. Butwell What do you think, Mr. Takumi?


    Why are you asking me?


    While I am the lord of thesends, you are the one who is going to live here. I would ask ire, but since she is not hereI want to know your opinion.


    Hahvery well.


    I was the one who would be making the herb fields. And the one living here. So I would have to talk with Mr. Harnes a lot.


    Uh First of all, Im grateful for your consideration. It shows how much you and the people here have epted us.


    Yes.


    However, I really dont think it is necessary for you and the vigers to worry about our protection. Because we have Leo and the guards. They will be able to deal with any monsters that might attack. Besides, I have been learning to use a sword from Mr. Ekenhartso I should be able to fight much better than before against orcs.


    Indeed. It is not as if the guards are only for ire. They must protect Mr. Takumi, Leo, the herbs and wine. This very vige too.


    Really?


    Yes. Isnt that right, Mr. Takumi?


    Youre asking me again? UhI suppose.


    I did not want the vigers to be forced to do something they couldnt. They were not trained to fight in the first ce.


    I liked this vige because the people had fun and yed with Leo


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    A bird flew in the sky In any case, its all finished now. So its time to prepare dinner Hmm? What is it, Leo? Wuffwuff? After the orcs had been cleaned up, and the only thing left to do was eat dinner, I noticed that Leo was looking up atJanuary 23, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Sebastian remembered something So, what is the monster saying? After Leo frightened it, it does not seem hostile anymore. Is it safe? Indeed Leo had finished talking with the bird monster, and so we moved away. I wanted to talk with the others for now. We were dozens of metersJanuary 26, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Tilura was tired and went to sleep Ah, its so soft and fluffy! Kii! Tilura was quite bold. And so she grabbed onto the bird, much like she did with Leo. I suppose she didnt think it would hurt her. She was quite simr to Mr. Ekenhart when itesJanuary 30, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 658

    Chapter 658


    I told them to not worry too much<hr>


    The n is to have enough herbs for all of the dukesnds. Of course, not every type of herb, but We will still be growing a lot in this vige. And by making a new kind of wine, this viges importance will grow. After all, it isnt just me, but the vigers will also help in the operation.


    Yes We will all work together to make the wine.


    While we wont know if it will be popr until we sell itit might be something where there is great demand. In any case, if that happens, you will have to make a lot of it. I dont think you will have much time to go chasing wolves so that you can train them.


    Additionally, Mr. Takumi has already signed a contract with me regarding the herbs. And so it is only natural for me to provide soldiers It will be the same with the wine. By putting it under our management, we will see more profits. That will then allow us to make thesends safe. Fixing the roads and increasing the number of soldiers who can deal with monsters. Maintaining viges and townsetcetera


    There are other things too, but that is the gist of it.


    In the end, the herbs and wine will keep them very busy, so it is best that they not be distracted by other things


    Though, thest time I was here, Mr. Harnes had told me about how people were leaving the vige, and how they had little time to spend with the children, due to making the wine.


    But Mr. Ekenhart meant to hire more people for the winemaking as well, so perhaps they would not be too busy. Though, the new people would have to be taught how to make the wine, so it would still be busy for quite some time.


    I wanted to avoid a situation like before where they were constantly working. And so did Mr. Ekenhart.


    Though, taking care of dogs was a lot of work too But at least they could y with the children.


    However, when ites to making wolves your familiar, that was a different matter. It would be one thing if they just trained them during their free time, like a hobby. But that probably wouldnt be enough.


    Regardless, maybe Mr. Ekenhart saw their desire to be able to defend themselves as mistrustor maybe he wondered if they would revolt against him. No, I was probably overthinking it.


    And after the previous monster attack, it was understandable that they would be cautious.


    Indeedso you thought of that much already Im sorry that we were so presumptuous


    No, Im happy for your consideration. You can discuss the matter with Mr. Takumi, and decide on the viges direction.


    Me?


    Even if it is just about what be done now, there is plenty of value in speaking with Mr. Takumi. Isnt that right, chief?


    Yes He is able to make us see things in a different light. I shall try to ask for his opinion in the future, when making decisions for the people.


    Im sure that I will make mistakes as well, so please tell me when I do.


    Certainly.


    The vigers tend to agree with each other, which makes things peacefulexcept when they go in the wrong direction But it is the duty of a leader to put them on the right path. If ire and Mr. Takumi are here, that should not happen. So things will be easy for me!


    I hope you dont expect too much from me Im just the person who makes the herbs Also, do you only care about taking it easy?


    Dont worry, Mr. Takumi. I shall make sure that His Grace works properly once he returns to the mansion.


    What!?


    After all, there is a lot of work piled up. He will not be able to rx for quite some time.


    Tsk


    Mr. Ekenhart was very disappointed at Sebastians words.


    Well, he was the duke Even if he had authority and wealth, that also came with a lot of responsibilities.


    HmmI see


    Yes. And so for now


    The talk of dogs and wolves was finished, and so we moved to discussing ns for the herb fields.


    The first thing to prepare was thend. As had been decided before, it would be to the north of the vige. All of the way up to the forest. That would be very big.


    Of course, we would not cover all of it at once. But it gave us plenty of room to expand as needed.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Sebastian exined it excitedly Well, the demonstration cer. For now, we should talk about the herb fields. Mr. Haines, I assume you have already decided to give your permission? ...Yes. We would dly wee Mr. Takumi and Leo to the vige. And we have no reason to object.October 12, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We started to exin to Mr. Haines Huh? Well, most of the children seemed to enjoy ying with Leo. The parents were all happy to see it as well. So it wasnt just the children, but the adults also epted Leo? Yes. Leo and Mr. Takumi saved the vige. OfOctober 6, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    There was no time for Ms. ire to learn household chores Even if Ms. ire was going to Range vige with me, as Sebastian had said, she would have to return to the mansion quite regrly. And so we had to consider what would be efficient Clearly there was noOctober 8, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 659

    Chapter 659


    Someone was advising the vigers<hr>


    As for thend where the house would be build for me and Ms. ire, it would be to the north of the chiefs house, and next to the farnd.


    Because it would be more convenient if we lived close to the fields.


    However


    Isnt that too muchnd?


    Really? It seems quite normal to me If anything, it could be bigger.


    Indeed. It will be smallpared to the mansion.


    Perhaps we should make some adjustments?


    It was no use trying to persuade Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian.


    Of course, we were just looking at a map, but the space that we would be using would take up half of Range vige.


    Surely that was too big.


    Even for someone of Leos size, it was excessive.


    But the good Leo will be able to run around.


    Yes, butit still does not need to be that big. Besides, I think Leo would rather y in the vige with the children.


    And so we agreed to discuss the matterter, and I requested that it be smaller.


    If they kept it like that, I did not want to think about how expensive the house would be to build and maintain.


    Thats right, chief. There is something I wanted to ask you.


    What is it?


    Just when we were about to finish, Mr. Ekenhart suddenly wanted to say something to Mr. Harnes.


    About the wolves or dogs. Could you have been receiving advice from someone outside of the vige?


    Ohwhy do you ask?


    Because you were talking about familiars. While it is not rareI think it was odd for you to speak of that. Most people in your position would only see monsters as threats. Thoughsome would use orcs as food.


    I had heard about familiars from Ms. ire, as soon as I came to this world.


    While I didnt really see Leo as a familiar, Ms. ire and Tilura had monsters that obeyed them, and so I was used to the idea of them.


    However, I had never seen any others in Ractos. So they were clearly notmon.


    If you werent trained, then even orcs were dangerous monsters. And so the idea of fighting and making them obey youwas kind of odd.


    You are right. After Mr. Takumi left this vige, we all talked about it. And around that time, a traveler stopped by.


    Oh?


    Just as Mr. Ekenhart suspected, there had been someone who gave them that idea.


    This person was quick to see that we were troubled, and agreed to give us some advice. It wasnt an order or anything. Just that there were ways to acquire familiars. It was merely a possibility. If anything, it was suggested that this was dangerous, and we should not do it.


    Indeeed. It is a dangerous thing to attempt. Though, it was fine with ire and Tilura.


    I think that was due to Leos presence.


    As I said before, that was why we got dogs first Well, the traveler was the one who brought us the dogs. The first time we talked, it was after I left the dukes house.


    That is not much time at all


    I was surprised as well. But the traveler supposedly had some special method of transportation


    After what happenedst time, werent you suspicious?


    At first, I was However


    Mr. Harnes suddenly hesitated. And the rest of us looked at him with puzzled expressions.


    I am not sureif I should say this


    We will not repeat it. Go on. As the duke, I can take responsibility for any trouble that might be caused.


    I understand.


    It was strange for him to worry this much. Was there some big problem?


    Surely he wasnt being threatened He would not trust a person like that.


    Still, after hearing Mr. Ekenharts words, he made up his mind and nodded.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    We would use both of the materials And so I have a suggestion. Why not use both stone and wood materials? Both? Yes. First, have the rooms that you and Leo and Lady ire will live in made of stone. And the other rooms can be made of wood. WhileMarch 1, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Mr. Ekenhart also apologized to Mr. Haines You can stand back now, Anneliese. Really? But I havent done anything yet Anne, its enough. Besides, I think your presence here is just confusing Mr. Haines. ...Very well. Ms. Anne seemed like she hadnt had enough yet, but she somberly got toOctober 5, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    The dogs jumped towards Leo Kyan-kyan! Wuff! Wou? Wuff-wuff. You sure are popr, Leo. No one is scared of you anymore. The people of the vige had a few dogs with them. Some were interested in Leo while others were more cautious. But once Leo moved towards them and lickedMay 10, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 660

    Chapter 660


    The traveler was an important person<hr>


    We were showna crest.


    Crest? In other words, this person was a noble?


    It is something that proves you are a noble. Amoner would not have it. Howeversurely the vigers wouldnt even know what it is?


    Wellit was a crest that everyone in this country would recognize.


    Could it be


    Do you mean it was the royal family crest!?


    Yes. I wondered what would bring them to a vige like this But it was without a doubt the royal crest.


    I see And they were traveling However, could it be possible that they are an imposter That would be a grave crime. Perhaps they borrowed it No, that wouldnt happen either


    I did not know much about crests either, but Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian were very surprised.


    With crests, it was to prove that you were part of that family. So you would not allow anyone else to hold it.


    There were exceptions, like when I went to capture Deam. But that special. In general, it did not happen. Especially not for a traveler.


    Are you sure that you havent made a mistake?


    I thought so too But it had the Silver Fenrir. After seeing Leo, I would not mistake it


    Yes, both our house and the royal house have the Silver Fenrir on our crest


    I had never seen the royal crest, but I had seen the dukes a number of times.


    It showed a Silver Fenrir baring its fangs and ws. It symbolized victory over their enemies.


    And what about this person?


    Well


    Mr. Harnes became hesitant once again.


    If they were a traveler, they may have left the vige already.


    Currently they are living in a house on the edge of the vige.


    Why is that? While I didnt expect to find someone from the royal family here, is there a problem with us meeting?


    Nothere is not. They said they would like to meet you, as it has been so long


    So it really is someone from the royal family then


    If it was on the edge of the vige, could it be that house where the merchant was ced after we captured him?


    It seemed very rude to put a member of the royal family in such a ce But I suppose it was fine if they cleaned it first.


    But why were they there if they didnt have a problem with meeting Mr. Ekenhart? It sounded like there was some other reason.


    UmI am sorry. Apparently, they had heard that this vige was visited by a Silver Fenrir That is why they came.


    For Leo? Well, it was not like it was some secret. I suppose word had spread.


    Indeed. Leo attracts a lot of attention We walk together in Ractos, so its no wonder that other people know.


    Thank you. I did not wish to cause trouble for Mr. Takumi and Leo, who saved this vige And so I had told the other vigers to not talk about Leo as much as possible.


    Hmm So, this person heard of Leo and came all of the way here?


    Yes. Silver Fenrirs are the strongest monsters. And since they are rareit is possible that this one is plotting somethingand if that is the case, it must be defeated


    Defeat Leo?


    Yes. That is what they said.


    If they are from the royal family, then they would be human. Surely a human could not defeat a Silver Fenrir


    I think so too, Sebastian. Howeverif they are from the royal family and say they will beat a Silver Fenrirand they travel I must be that person


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    I Learned About the Duke and Silver Fenrir Connection The royal family uses the Silver Fenrir on their crest, as they symbolize a country that cannot be defeated. On the other hand, the Liebert crest shows the fangs and ws, which symbolizes how we will defeat any foe. Alsothis isJanuary 17, 2022


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I was able to borrow a cape I see. You may enter. But what brings you here at such ate hour? Uh, I have some business that I forgot about After arriving in Ractos, I banged on the door and called for the guard. There was a small windowSeptember 5, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    August 7, 2020


    In "The Cave King will live a Paradise Life -Bing the strongest with the mining skill?-"

 Chapter 661

    Chapter 661


    Someone tried to attack Leo<hr>


    While Leo had be huge as soon as we came to this world, I still could not believe that she was the strongest creature here.


    To me, she was always my buddyeven if her appearance changed a little.


    In any case, after seeing her fight monsters, and after we spent time in this world, I started to understand that there really wasnt anything that could stand against her.


    She had even knocked Rahle out of the air so easily.


    Stillto try to defeat Leoor any Silver Fenrir. That sounded very foolisheven if this person was from the royal family.


    You know this person, Mr. Ekenhart?


    Well, he was the duke, so it would not be surprising.


    Mmm. Well, yes. I was thinking that you two would meet eventuallybut not like this It is the person that we spoke of before, regarding that weapon.


    He meant the katana.


    I suppose he didnt say it directly, because Mr. Harnes was here.


    Apparently, it was because of this person that he readily believed that I came from another world.


    So they were from the royal family


    But chief. The person seems to have been cooperative?


    We vigers came together and made a request. As we did not want to cause trouble for Mr. Takumi or Leo


    I seewell. I can see how that would work


    This personthey see Silver Fenrir as enemies?


    No, not exactly But it isplicated. Though, it should be fine, as Leo would not lose anyway.


    Booom!


    What was that sound and shaking!?


    What!?


    Itsing from outside. Your Grace, stay here. I shall go look


    No, Sebastian. Its fine. I can already guess what happened. HahIm sorry, Mr. Takumi. Will youe with me now?


    Uh, yes.


    I had thought it was an earthquake at first, but it sounded like something heavy had dropped.


    And so as Mr. Ekenhart sighed, we stepped out of Mr. Harness house.


    Woaaah!! I found you, Silver Fenrir!


    Wuff?


    The first thing that I saw was a man running towards Leo as she yed with the dogs. The man was holding a katana above his head.


    The guards were stunned after the noise, and were not prepared to stop him.


    Leo!


    Its fine, Mr. Takumi.


    Mr. Ekenhart?


    See. Leo does not care.


    Ah


    When I looked at her


    Wou Wou?


    You! You! You cowardly Silver Fenrir!


    Wou


    While the man was swinging madlyhe was never able to reach Leo.


    This was because Leo was pressing his face with her front paw and keeping him at bay.


    It looked like an adult handling a wild child.


    Hah Normally, he would not make such a fool of himself Only, he is terrible with using a sword. If it was magiche is one of the best in the world


    I see


    Mr. Ekenhart let out another sigh.


    But if he was such a great magician, why was he using a sword? Why not fight Leo with magic?


    I didnt mention it before, but he is not trying to kill a Silver Fenrir. However, he thinks it is his duty to defeat the strongest monster. He already knows that they are superior with magic, and so he is trying with a sword


    Hah


    Had he lost with magic in the past then?


    I was a little relieved to know that he wasnt trying to kill Leo, butgetting Leo to admit defeat did not seem that hard to me.


    I would just dangle some sausages in front of her. Of course, I would feel bad, and would not do such a thing just so that I could say that I beat her.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    The bird monster wanted a friendly rtionship So if it is so scared of Silver Fenrirs, then surely it would not have attacked? It just wanted to make contact, I suppose? It seems that way Mr. Takumi. Is that why you were so surprised earlier? One of the reasons theJanuary 27, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    The traveler was an important person We were showna crest. Crest? In other words, this person was a noble? It is something that proves you are a noble. Amoner would not have it. Howeversurely the vigers wouldnt even know what it is? Wellit was a crest that everyone inMay 14, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Sebastian remembered something So, what is the monster saying? After Leo frightened it, it does not seem hostile anymore. Is it safe? Indeed Leo had finished talking with the bird monster, and so we moved away. I wanted to talk with the others for now. We were dozens of metersJanuary 26, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 662

    Chapter 662


    A woman came and intervened<hr>


    ¡°You! Damn it!¡±


    ¡°In any case, I must stop this. Your Excellency, have you not done enough?¡±


    ¡°Hmm. I know that voice. Tsk¡­ But I finally found a Silver Fenrir. I will not give up!¡±


    ¡°But you were already defeated from the beginning.¡±


    ¡°What are you talking about! I have not lost¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm?¡±


    ¡°Wou?¡±


    ¡°Please stop this at once!¡±


    It was unusual to see Mr. Ekenhart speak to a superior with a tone of respect.


    Regardless, the man did not stop iling his arms.


    It was then that a woman seemed to appear out of nowhere, and she hit the man on the head.


    It looked quite painful¡­ Also, she had a lot of courage, approaching a man who was swinging a sword so wildly.


    ¡°Excuse me, Lord Liebert. It has been a long time.¡±


    ¡°Yes. But I see that you have not changed at all¡­ Is he alright?¡±


    ¡°One needs to be this strict, or he will not listen. Don¡¯t worry. He actually likes it.¡±


    ¡°I-I see¡­¡±


    ¡°Gah¡­ Even if I¡¯m alright, it still hurts, you know? Even though the other part is true¡­¡±


    ¡°You did not even listen to Lord Liebert¡¯s voice. It is your fault.¡±


    ¡°Yes, but¡­ Oh, nevermind¡­¡±


    He was fine with it¡­?


    After being hit on the head and falling to the ground, he got back up to his feet as if nothing had happened.


    ¡°Ah, sorry. I sensed the presence of a Silver Fenrir and got carried away.¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­ You are lucky that it was good Leo, Your Excellency. Any other Silver Fenrir would have attacked you¡­and you would have been in great danger.¡±


    ¡°It is in the past. Besides, I¡¯ve already lived long enough. It would not be the worst way to die.¡±


    ¡°Do not say such things, Your Excellency. You are an important figure in this country. You cannot die so easily.¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­ Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Uh, I don¡¯t understand what is happening either, Leo.¡±


    Leo looked at me as if she did not know what to do. But I wasn¡¯t sure either.


    Still¡­Mr. Ekenhart was usually the one to make Sebastian and Ms. ire sigh with exasperation. But now it was his turn.


    Speaking of Ms. ire and the others, they also seemed to be at a loss, and were just staring quietly.


    ¡°Hmm? Could it be that you are this Silver Fenrir¡¯s owner?¡±


    ¡°Uh, well¡­ I guess?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    The man suddenly turned around to face me. He had realized that Leo and I were talking.


    I didn¡¯t really like to think of myself as her owner now. But I just nodded anyway.


    Though, Leo barked as if to say, ¡®That is right!¡¯


    ¡°I see, I see. Uh, I am sorry about earlier. I was excited¡­ Ahh, it is not because I hate Silver Fenrirs or anything. Do not worry. My name is Euto. And you?¡±


    ¡°Ah, Takumi¡­ And this is Leo.¡±


    ¡°Takumi. Good. And Leo¡­a good name. It is very dashing and masculine, I suppose? Perfect!¡±


    ¡°Wou!!¡±


    He had a very casual and cheerful way of speaking. It did not give the impression of someone from the royal family, or a great noble like Mr. Ekenhart.


    Well, I suppose Mr. Ekenhart was purposely acting like that, so he would be intimidating.


    As for this¡­Euto? He began to pet Leo while praising her name.


    His hostility towards her waspletely gone¡­


    ¡°Uh, sorry. But please don¡¯t call Leo such things. She is a girl¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh? A girl? Ah¡­yes¡­a very nice name!¡±


    It was possible that Leo did not mind, but I decided to correct him anyway.


    After all, it was my fault for giving her that name.


    Still¡­ He was the first person who seemed to be surprised that Leo had that name while being a girl.


    He was definitely strange¡­ And his dark hair and eyes were certainly familiar¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    I was the Duke¡¯s favorite A child with Ms. ire¡­ The mere thought was embarrassing and much too soon. Well, at least I didn¡¯t have to worry too much about Tilura¡­ Well, who knew what would happen? ¡°With Barsler, it has already been decided. Because he only has one daughter.¡­March 23, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I started cooking in the kitchen ¡°In any case, please go and deliver the herbs.¡± ¡°Yes, I will take them to Mr. Kalis!¡± I had no idea why Milina and Nick thought so highly of me. Still, I did not want to keep Mr. Kalis waiting too long, and I¡­April 4, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I told them about the misunderstanding ¡°Hohoho. Liza will be very happy when she hears about it.¡± ¡°Um¡­don¡¯t do that. It¡¯s embarrassing.¡± ¡°Hmm, but embarrassing Mr. Takumi is also good. Don¡¯t you agree, ire?¡± ¡°Indeed¡­ Oh! Um! No¡­ That would be rude to him, father.¡± ¡°You should just admit it¡­September 23, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 663

    Chapter 663


    I talked with the stranger<hr>


    ¡°Your Excellency¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, I know. Indeed¡­ Hart. Is there any ce where we can talk without being bothered?¡±


    ¡°Yes. As I said before, the chief¡¯s house would be appropriate. Is that alright, chief?¡±


    ¡°Ah, yes! Certainly! Please use it for as long as you want!¡±


    ¡°It won¡¯t be very long, ahaha. For now, Hart and Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Yes, it should not be too many people.¡±


    ¡°Very well. Can I leave it to you¡­Hart?¡±


    ¡°Yes, certainly.¡±¡°¡­Uhh?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Apparently, I was going to join the other three in some conversation. But I didn¡¯t really understand what was going on.


    In fact, I was more distracted by the fact that he was calling Mr. Ekenhart ¡®Hart¡¯¡­


    ¡°So, where should we begin?¡±


    ¡°With confirming¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed.¡±


    After getting Mr. Harnes¡¯s permission, we returned to the house so that the four of us could talk.


    Apparently, the woman was called Ms. Lugretta, and she was standing behind Lord Euto¡­kind of like how Sebastian stood.


    She had a greatsword on her back, and long hair that went to her waist.


    She was taller than Ms. ire¡­simr to me. And since she was fully covered in armor, she must be a guard like Phillip.


    However, the armor waspletely ck, and she had a mysterious air about her¡­ She had even red at me. It was quite intense.


    As for the man, he was dressed more casually in leather. Aside from the sword at his waist, he looked like an ordinary traveler.


    He was probably a few years older than me.


    ¡°Now, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°You really don¡¯t have to be so nervous, alright? We are not going to eat you¡­ Well, maybe you are the one who should say that, since you have a Silver Fenrir. In any case, just call me Mr. Euto. So¡­you havee from a different world, have you?¡±


    ¡°Huh¡­? How did you know?¡±


    ¡°I did not say anything.¡±


    If it wasn¡¯t from Mr. Ekenhart, how?


    It was just a fantastical idea¡­ Even if I had the Gift, you wouldn¡¯t know I was from a different world¡­


    Even at the mansion, only a few servants knew. I had not even told Liza.


    I did mean to tell her eventually, though she would find it difficult to understand. I did not want to confuse her while she was still getting used to her new environment.


    ¡°No one told me. I just thought about it after looking at you. Because I am also from another world¡­¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    ¡°Well, I suppose you would be surprised¡­ There are not many of us. Only Hart and a few others know about me.¡±


    ¡°¡­This is why I believed you immediately, Mr. Takumi. Because I already knew someone like you.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, there are others like us. But only a few important people know about it. So do not go around talking about it, alright?¡±


    ¡°To be precise, it is those who rank above a marquis who know. Someone like Lord Liebert would be told. Though, it is only told to the head of the house, and not their children or servants.¡±


    ¡°Well, in Mr. Takumi¡¯s case, he has not been forbidden. So if he thinks he can trust someone, then that is fine.¡±


    ¡°¡­Though, he may be targeted.¡±


    ¡°That is why we have a special power, isn¡¯t it now?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. A power that can be very useful, if used correctly.¡±


    I could hardly understand or keep up with what they were talking about.


    I was surprised that there were other people like me.


    However, that did make me feel¡­kind of happy.


    ¡°Hmm? Why are you smiling, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°No, it¡¯s just¡­it¡¯s nice that there are also other people from other worlds¡­¡±


    ¡°Huh, interesting. Some people I knew were upset to find out that they weren¡¯t as special as they thought¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, I heard that there were even people who tried to kill you.¡±


    ¡°Ah, there was someone like that. But since I was in this world longer, I was able to run away.¡±


    ¡°That is quite surprising to hear¡­¡±


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    The traveler was an important person ¡°We were shown¡­a crest.¡± ¡°Crest? In other words, this person was a noble?¡± ¡°It is something that proves you are a noble. Amoner would not have it. However¡­surely the vigers wouldn¡¯t even know what it is?¡± ¡°Well¡­it was a crest that everyone in¡­May 14, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I decided to leave them and go to sleep ¡°Sebastian!?¡± ¡°Sebastian!?¡± ¡°It iste. You must be quiet, or you will wake up the others. Unless you do not mind disturbing their sleep, even though it will affect their performance tomorrow.¡± Sebastian¡¯s voice was very thorny indeed. I quickly opened¡­November 13, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We talked with Mr. Harnes ¡°So, what happened with those dogs? I do not remember them being here thest time¡­¡± ¡°Yes. They were not.¡± First, Mr. Ekenhart asked the thing he had been wondering about. ¡°After Mr. Takumi and Leo saved our vige, we had to think of other¡­May 11, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 664

    Chapter 664


    Mr. Euto was a friendly person<hr>


    ¡°Well, since we are from the same ce, let¡¯s be friends, Takumi. You don¡¯t have to speak formally with me.¡±


    ¡°Oh, do you mean you¡¯re from Japan?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Not all of the others are. And so people like you are rare.¡±


    ¡°You should do what you like, Mr. Takumi. Besides, since you have Leo, you are even higher in rank in some ways.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­in that case¡­ I will?¡±


    ¡°Great! Now, I¡¯m sure you have it too, Takumi. Can you tell me about it?¡±


    ¡°About what¡­?¡±


    ¡°The Gift. It is not an ability that just anyone has. But you do have it, don¡¯t you?¡±¡°Uh¡­¡±


    Yes, I had a Gift called Weed Cultivation.


    However, unlike Leo, that was something that I was supposed to keep a secret. And I rarely used it in front of other people.


    I suppose it was possible that Mr. Harnes had told him¡­ But he did not seem like the kind of person that would do that.


    ¡°Oh, are you suspicious of me now?¡±


    ¡°No¡­ But, uh¡­how did you know that I had it?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ There is one condition in order to gain it. And you happen to fit it. As do I.¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    When I had firste to this world, Sebastian had said that no one else in the country had it.


    ¡°Judging by your reaction, you don¡¯t know what the condition is. But I suppose it is to be expected, if you haven¡¯t met anyone else like that.¡±


    ¡°So¡­what is the condition? I had heard that no one else in this country had the Gift¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, that¡¯s because it is kept a secret. Only a small few know about it.¡±


    So Mr. Ekenhart would have known¡­but not Sebastian.


    ¡°In any case, it is quite simple. You have to havee from another world. If you are such a person, then you will have the Gift.¡±


    ¡°Another world¡­ But I¡¯ve heard of people awakening to their ability shortly after being born?¡±


    ¡°Because they were the descendants of someone who came from another world. They inherited the ability. However, it is not a sure thing.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    In other words, everyone in this world who has it either came from another world, or was the child of someone who did. That would exin why it was so rare.


    ¡°So, what is your ability, Takumi? I have to know if it is dangerous or not. Perhaps it will have a negative effect on this country¡­on this world. But then again, you have a Silver Fenrir. That might actually be more important¡­¡±


    He said with augh.


    Mr. Ekenhart wasughing as well. Though, Ms. Lugretta was looking at me sharply. She probably really did want to know if it was a dangerous ability or not.


    ¡°Uh, it is called Weed Cultivation. An ability¡­that allows you to make nts¡­¡±


    ¡°Weed Cultivation¡­ Hmm¡­ What do you think?¡±


    ¡°It does not sound very dangerous to me. I doubt there is a problem?¡±


    ¡°¡­It depends on how it is used. But if that is what you think, Lugretta, then we¡¯ll leave it at that. Besides, he does not seem like a dangerous person.¡±


    I suppose he was thinking about poisonous nts¡­ The thought had urred to me as well. Even if I had no intention of ever doing something like that.


    While I was relieved, Mr. Ekenhart was also sighing¡­


    Perhaps he thought there was a danger that the ns to make herbal fields would be stopped. He might even have been required to take responsibility, if they thought that I was a problem.


    ¡°Well, it would not be fair for me to ask and then not tell you mine. My Gift is Magic Control. A Gift where I can use any kind of magic. The effects can be used infinitely¡­ I suppose it is the same with yours?¡±


    ¡°Effects¡­? Uh, like changing the nts into a different state?¡±


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    I made too much Loe ¡°Well, since I made it without permission, you might not want it yet¡­ I can always just keep it.¡± ¡°...As it is a rare herb, we would dly ept it regardless. I see, because we are going to the forest.¡± ¡°Yes. But with Leo and¡­October 23, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We talked with Mr. Harnes ¡°So, what happened with those dogs? I do not remember them being here thest time¡­¡± ¡°Yes. They were not.¡± First, Mr. Ekenhart asked the thing he had been wondering about. ¡°After Mr. Takumi and Leo saved our vige, we had to think of other¡­May 11, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We Arrived in the town of Ractos ¡°Mr. Takumi, why do you look so serious?¡± ¡°No...I was just thinking about what these Gifts are.¡± ¡°What they are¡­¡± ¡°Mr. Takumi, while it is said that Gifts are something that give various abilities, there are not many people who have them. And¡­December 31, 2021


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 665

    Chapter 665


    I could not understand what Mr. Euto was talking about<hr>


    ¡°Maltese turned into a Silver Fenrir¡­ I don¡¯t know if I shouldugh or be surprised¡­¡±


    ¡°I was surprised¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, you were living together when it happened¡­ Hmm? I see. Is that how it is?¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    ¡°Takumi, this is a theory I have¡­ About why we have Gifts if wee from a different world.¡±


    Apparently, he had gotten an idea after thinking about how Leo had changed. But how was that rted to the Gift?


    ¡°There is no guarantee that it is true. However, as people from another world, it is necessary for us to be able to live in this world. Not just with magic, but withnguage. Have you ever thought it was strange that you were able to understand words and letters?¡±


    ¡°I have thought about it. But I never came to any conclusion. It¡¯s not like anyone could tell me the answer.¡±¡°Indeed. My idea is that when wee here, our bodies are remade.¡±


    ¡°Remade?¡±


    ¡°In other words, we are made as a human from this world. I don¡¯t know how. And I think that this world is in a different dimension.¡±


    In this world, even if there were slight differences in the way that things sounded, I could understand things urately. It was the same with writing.


    Not only that, but if I tried to write in Japanese, it woulde out as writing from this world¡­


    Though, I didn¡¯t know what that had to do with dimensions.


    I wasn¡¯t really good at thinking about such things.


    ¡°In any case, if our old world is a high dimension, and this is a low dimension, there would be excess energy when transitioning. And that energy is forced into our bodies and transforms into the Gift¡­¡±


    ¡°Uh, huh¡­¡±


    And then we have the Maltese. As it traveled in the same way, the result of being reformed was turning into a Silver Fenrir. What do you think?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, there is one other thing I wanted to ask you. What time were you in Japan?¡±


    ¡°Time? I suppose it was night¡­because we went to sleep and woke up here.¡±


    ¡°Eh? Oh, you misunderstood. Uh¡­what year?¡±


    ¡°Ah, two thousand¡­¡±


    And so I told him the year and month.


    I didn¡¯t remember the exact day, as I had been so busy with work.


    ¡°I see. So it was about two years after me.¡±


    ¡°Two years¡­ You seem like you¡¯ve been here a lot longer.¡±


    It felt like he had forgotten a lot in just two years.


    But then again, I had not been here that long, so I didn¡¯t know what it was like.


    ¡°Aye. Because even if I came two years before you in Japan, more time has passed in this world.¡±


    ¡°What?¡±


    ¡°Uhh¡­ To put it simply, time moves differently in this world and the other world. For instance, there was someone who came just a few days after I did¡­but there was a ten year difference in this world. On the other hand, there was someone who traveled monthster, and it had not even been twenty years here.¡±


    ¡°A few days can be ten years¡­but months not be twenty. Yes, I don¡¯t understand thews¡­¡±


    ¡°It is not as if peoplee here on some regr schedule. And so we don¡¯t really know how it works. The cause or reason. A difference in time and dimension¡­it¡¯s not something that can be proven. All that we can know for certain is that time does not move at the same speed as it does over there.¡±


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    The Gift really was an ability I didn¡¯t understand ¡°Papa. Why are you able to make herbs so easily? Uhh¡­grandpa said that nts only grow when you wait a long time.¡± ¡°nts and animals are like that¡­ But as I told you before, it is because of the Gift.¡± ¡°I¡­February 27, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I talked with the stranger ¡°Your Excellency¡­¡± ¡°Yes, I know. Indeed¡­ Hart. Is there any ce where we can talk without being bothered?¡± ¡°Yes. As I said before, the chief¡¯s house would be appropriate. Is that alright, chief?¡± ¡°Ah, yes! Certainly! Please use it for as long as you want!¡±¡­May 17, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I told Mr. Haines about Weed Cultivation ¡°Indeed, it is hard to imagine someone growing herbs in great quantities. Growing them at all is almost unheard of in this country. Most people gather what is found in nature. ¡­Mr. Takumi? Sebastian?¡± ¡°It will be fine. As Mr. Haines is the¡­October 10, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 666

    Chapter 666


    Long life was an understatement<hr>


    A few days on earth could be a decade here¡­


    So even if we came two years apart, I wonder how long Mr. Euto had spent here.


    Wait? Since there was no discernible logic to it, perhaps it could be the other way around, and he hadn¡¯t been here that long at all?


    He did look older than me, but not by a lot.


    If we were close in age, perhaps he had only been here for a few years¡­


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right. There is one thing that I know.¡±


    ¡°What is that?¡±


    ¡°Whening to this world, time continues to pass in the other world in one direction. So anyone whoes here has to havee after I did.¡±¡°But¡­ Does that mean you¡¯ve been here for over ten years?¡±


    ¡°More like a thousand years.¡±


    ¡°Huh? This is not something to joke about¡­¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s not a joke. I had a very difficult time when I first came here¡­ After all, I had to make this country.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s true, Mr. Takumi. He is the father of this country. You will see his name in history books.¡±


    Humans could not live for a thousand years.


    Iughed, thinking that it had to be a joke, but Mr. Ekenhart shook his head.


    He said that it was all true. What!?


    Ms. Lugretta was also nodding behind him. What did this mean¡­


    ¡°Well, a lot happened. That is all that you need to know. Also, the reason that I lived so long is simple. It was because of the Gift.¡±


    ¡°Gift? The Gift gives you a long life?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s not that simple. Also, it is more that you do not age. I wish that being immortal was added to it. But I suppose that was too much. I can still die¡­¡±


    ¡°But Your Excellency is vital to this country.¡±


    ¡°¡­As you can see, they will not allow me to die. Not that I want to do that at this moment.¡±


    Not aging seemed impressive enough for me.


    He said that it wasn¡¯t just about having the Gift. But I wondered if something simr was happening to me¡­


    ¡°Ah, don¡¯t worry. You are not like me. If everyone who had the Gift did not age, then there would be a lot more of us still alive.¡±


    ¡°Oh, I see¡­¡±


    Don¡¯t worry¡­ But that was something that everyone with authority wanted on earth. It was often in stories.


    There would be a lot of people who are desperate for it.


    As for me¡­ I did not know for sure¡­


    ¡°As I said before, my Gift is Magic Control. So I can use any type of magic¡­including magic that stops aging.¡±


    ¡°Oh, so that¡¯s why you said it was because of the Gift.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Well, after using it, I lost consciousness for a few days. It is not magic that any human is supposed to use¡­ Perhaps it is different for Silver Fenrirs. Also, I cannot use it on others. If you want to stop aging, you have to use that magic. I don¡¯t know why such magic even exists¡­¡±


    He shrugged his shoulders with exasperation. But he was still the one who had tested it.


    I ignored what he said about Silver Fenrirs. I doubted that Leo would want to do that. And there was no point in thinking about it now.


    Regardless, I decided to ask Euto to tell me more about himself.


    If he was the one who founded this country, then I wanted to know why he chose a Silver Fenrir for the crest. Things like that.


    ¡°Ah, I made a bet with a Silver Fenrir. And I lost, so I had to make the crest like that.¡±


    ¡°A Silver Fenrir? So you were able to speak to one¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, I didn¡¯t talk to it directly. Around that time, everyone supported me, and so I built this country. I wasn¡¯t thinking about bing a king or anything. But I just wanted a ce for the people to live.¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­¡±


    This was supposed to be a casual conversation, but it was on such arge scale.


    The situation at the time, and how the ce had originally been filled with monsters¡­ It was quite a story.


    It did not look like he was lying, but I wasn¡¯t sure if I should believe all of it¡­ It was difficult to imagine, as the present was so different.


    ¡°That¡¯s right. When I first saw the Silver Fenrir, there was someone else with me¡­ Hart¡¯s ancestry. The first lord of his house.¡±


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Sebastian remembered something ¡°So, what is the monster saying?¡± ¡°After Leo frightened it, it does not seem hostile anymore. Is it safe?¡± ¡°Indeed¡­¡± Leo had finished talking with the bird monster, and so we moved away. I wanted to talk with the others for now. We were dozens of meters¡­January 26, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Sebastian became involved As we waited for dinner to be served, Tilura reported that she got permission from Rahle. Now that I thought about it, they seemed to be talking after training. Leo and Liza had been running with Sherry. But what did she need Rahle¡¯s permission for? ¡°For the¡­April 12, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    More people would be going to the forest ¡°Wait a minute, Mr. Takumi?¡± ¡°Ms. ire?¡± As I looked at Liza and waited for her answer, Ms. ire suddenly interrupted me. ¡°Well, uh¡­ If little Liza stayed at the mansion, then she would be alone.¡± ¡°But¡­well. As long as you and¡­October 28, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 667

    Chapter 667


    We talked about the duke¡¯s ancestor<hr>


    ¡°I have heard stories from you and also my father.¡±


    ¡°Yes, yes. It was quite a surprise when we first met. After all, she was friends with a Silver Fenrir. Just like Takumi and his Leo. They were like friends.¡±


    Ms. ire had told me about her as well.


    How she had been on equal standing with a Silver Fernir. And after her achievements on the battlefield, she was given her title.


    ¡°What was her name again¡­ Ah, yes. It was Josephine. A very beautiful and kind woman¡­ Kind of like someone I saw earlier. Is she your daughter?¡±


    ¡°Yes. That was ire.¡±


    ¡°I see. The blood is strong in your family, I suppose. Of course, it was so long ago that perhaps I am remembering wrong¡­¡±


    ¡°So her name was Josephine. But why was she able to be like that with a Silver Fenrir? Not only were they stronger than humans, but you said that no one would ever go near one.¡±¡°She said it was because of her Gift. Well, she didn¡¯t actually know what a Gift was until we met.¡±


    ¡°¡­You mean that she¡­?¡±


    ¡°Yes. She was from another world. Some ce in Europe, I think.¡±


    France or Italy? That seemed likely, judging by the name.


    ¡°My ancestor is from the same world as Mr. Takumi¡­ I did not know that.¡±


    ¡°Huh? Didn¡¯t I tell you, Hart? Ah, well¡­I never thought that such things mattered. Still, to have her descendants meet someone else from the same world¡­ It is like fate.¡±


    ¡°No, I did not know of her origins¡­or that she had the Gift.¡±


    ¡°Well, she did not like to talk about herself that much. I think she only talked about the Gift with people she was very close to.¡±


    ¡°Well, it was so long ago that the stories likely changed little by little. Rumors get twisted as they are passed on from person to person.¡±


    ¡°¡­Exactly. She is full of surprises. There is so much that I don¡¯t know about her.¡±


    ¡°Well, when we first met, there was so much going on that we could not sit down and talk about her. It is only now that I have seen Leo and your ire that I have remembered¡­ Back when this country was still you¡­ Around five hundred years ago.¡±


    ¡°Five hundred years¡­¡±


    Things really were on a different scale¡­ It was no wonder he did not remember everything.


    ¡°And so this¡­Ms. Josephine? What was her Gift?¡±


    ¡°Uh, I believe that it was Understanding Language.¡¯¡¯


    ¡°Is that¡­a Gift that allows you to speak with others?¡±


    ¡°Correct. You can talk to anyone, regardless of race, as long as they are intelligent. Even monsters. But not orcs.¡±


    ¡°So that was how she was able to talk with Silver Fenrirs?¡±


    ¡°Yes. There was a supporting effect that made the other person more attentive. So she was able tomunicate and be friends like that. Though, she said it was less effective with those that became too excited. It¡¯s not something you would use during a battle¡­ Though, it could be useful for negotiating.¡±


    Attentive¡­ That could be useful for work. I remember there being times when other people were so busy that they did not listen to me. Or they would assume that their mistake was my fault. And so they would ignore my exnations and be angry.


    Well, that was in the old world. So it was toote to be jealous about that.


    ¡°By the time I met her, she was already living in the forest with fenrirs and the Silver Fenrir. So I suppose she must have gotten a lot of use out of it?¡±


    ¡°In the forest? If she was living there with the Silver Fenrirs¡­ Could it be that¡­¡±


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    The First Forest was the Duke¡¯s Forest ¡°...The founder of this house. Do you mean the one who befriended the Silver Fenrir?¡± ¡°Yes. And it¡¯s said that the founder first met the Silver Fenrir in that forest. And the legend says their rtionship was that of friends of equal standing.¡±¡­February 3, 2022


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I Learned About the Duke and Silver Fenrir Connection ¡°The royal family uses the Silver Fenrir on their crest, as they symbolize a country that cannot be defeated. On the other hand, the Liebert crest shows the fangs and ws, which symbolizes how we will defeat any foe. Also¡­this is¡­January 17, 2022


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I Talked About Coming From Another World ¡°There was something that really surprised me when I woke up in the forest.¡± ¡°...What was it?¡± ¡°Uh...that Leo had suddenly grown very big.¡± ¡°What? But she is a Silver Fenrir. Surely it¡¯s only natural that she would be so big?¡± ¡°I don¡¯t¡­December 3, 2021


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 668

    Chapter 668


    It was a simr situation<hr>


    ¡°Yes, the fenrir forest, which is west of this vige. When she first came to this world, it was in that forest. And when she woke up, she was surrounded in fenrirs. And without knowing it, she was using the Gift to befriend them. And then even a Silver Fenrir came out, and she befriended it as well. That¡¯s what she said. As she was a nice person, it is no surprise they became friends easily.¡±


    ¡°So that is how¡­ The story that was passed on was a little different. It said that she was saved by the Silver Fenrirs, when the fenrirs attacked her.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. That is what Ms. ire told me.¡±


    Well, since this was someone who had heard the story from her directly, it was clear that he should be believed.


    Even if it was a long time ago, and his memory was fading.


    ¡°Still¡­the situation is very simr to when I came¡­¡±


    ¡°It is? Now that I think about it, you have not told me how you came yet, Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Well, it was¡­¡±And so I told him and Ms. Lugretta how it had happened.


    And while Ms. Lugretta and Mr. Ekenhart did not understand as much when I was talking about my oldpany, they did not interrupt to ask any questions.


    ¡°Hmm. Yes, it is simr. Even if you were with a Silver Fenrir from the beginning. And in a forest too. And then you ended up helping Ms. Josephine¡¯s ancestor¡­ It almost sounds like someone had nned for that to happen. Well, that¡¯s not possible. But I suppose it is like fate?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I did not think it would be this simr¡­ But thanks to that, I was able to meet you and Ms. Lugretta. Of course, Mr. Ekenhart and the others as well. I have nothing but gratitude.¡±


    ¡°In an way, it is like Mr. Takumi is the seconding of Josephine¡­ He is even helping this house with his Gift.¡±


    ¡°I think that¡¯s going a little too far¡­¡±


    ¡°In any case, we have some deep connections. Yes, that is important.¡±


    The coincidences were odd, but it could only be described as fate.


    ¡°Yes, yes. And so Ms. Josephine¡­¡±


    When she first came to this world, the country that Mr. Euto had created was not nearly as peaceful as it was noe.


    There was tension near the border at all times, and fights would erupt. And since Euto was so powerful, he was busy moving from ce to ce and trying to keep order.


    And then he found Ms. Josephine and took her away from the forest, where she finally met other humans¡­


    Once she was among people again, she was greatly moved by the threat of the enemy, and so she took a stand.


    Yes, ever since the country was founded, they had never invaded anyone else. All of the wars were due to being attacked by other countries. I suppose it was because Euto did not want to go to war if he didn¡¯t have to.


    As for Josephine, even though she was usually kind and gentle, she could not bear to see her friends die in battle. And so she insisted that she fight on the frontlines¡­ I could see where Mr. Ekenhart and ire inherited their personalities from.


    In the end, several factors led to a situation where their defeat seemed unavoidable. But then, the Silver Fenrir that she had befriended in the forest appeared, and defeated the enemy.


    Euto had alsoe in order to support her. And then they had made a bet over who could defeat more of the enemies. And since the Silver Fenrir won, it then became the symbol of the country, appearing on banners and crests.


    ¡°It was amazing¡­ I thought that there was nothing that could defeat a Silver Fenrir that was fighting at full power.¡±


    ¡°It was that strong¡±?¡±


    ¡°Yes. While I was using magic to face a thousand soldiers, it was blowing away ten thousand. As you can imagine, it was not long before the enemy retreated¡­¡±


    As someone who had never experienced a way, I could not really imagine what it might have been like. But the enemy must have felt overwhelming fear and despair at that moment.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    The First Forest was the Duke¡¯s Forest ¡°...The founder of this house. Do you mean the one who befriended the Silver Fenrir?¡± ¡°Yes. And it¡¯s said that the founder first met the Silver Fenrir in that forest. And the legend says their rtionship was that of friends of equal standing.¡±¡­February 3, 2022


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We talked about making the forest a little safer ¡°It was only yesterday that we thought of fenrirs as being dangerous for humans. And now we have a friendly rtionship.¡± ¡°Well, it all thanks to Leo. And Sherry as well.¡± ¡°As for Sherry, it was mainly because of Mr. Takumi¡­January 7, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Sebastian remembered something ¡°So, what is the monster saying?¡± ¡°After Leo frightened it, it does not seem hostile anymore. Is it safe?¡± ¡°Indeed¡­¡± Leo had finished talking with the bird monster, and so we moved away. I wanted to talk with the others for now. We were dozens of meters¡­January 26, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 669

    Chapter 669


    Euto apologized<hr>


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry for attacking you!¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    After we finished talking, we went outside again to see that Leo was waiting for us. And then Euto went down to the ground and bowed.


    He had been attacking her just a moment ago, and so Leo looked rather confused.


    ¡°I guess he¡¯s apologizing to you?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Wou-wou?¡±


    ¡°She¡¯s asking you if it wasn¡¯t just a game¡­¡±


    ¡°Tsk. I was going all out¡­¡±


    ¡°You are just no good, Your Excellency.¡±


    ¡°To good Leo, it would seem like you were ying.¡±


    But it wasn¡¯t just Leo. The others were also surprised and confused about what happened. And so I had to do something.


    ¡°Leo. So you don¡¯t mind?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°She said it is fine. You can¡­stand up now. Mr. Euto?¡±


    ¡°It actually hurts me a little, that she does not care at all¡­ Still, at least this country won¡¯t be unstable because I challenged someone to a fight¡­¡±


    Before we finished talking earlier, Ms. Lugretta and Mr. Ekenhart had also suggested that he apologize, as Leo might be angry. I knew that she wouldn¡¯t be, but it didn¡¯t stop him from apologizing frantically.


    After all, they all thought that an angry Silver Fenrir could destroy a whole county.


    ¡°Well, you should be a little more thoughtful when dealing with Silver Fenrirs from now on.¡±


    ¡°Or not challenge them at all.¡±


    ¡°Saying such things is no use with him.¡±


    ¡°Hehe. You understand me well, Lugretta.¡±


    Ms. Lugretta was just telling him to be more careful, and not that he should stoppletely.


    ¡°By the way, the rest of you have some nerve as well. Those hats¡­ I didn¡¯t say anything about them before, as it seemed like something I shouldn¡¯t mention¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­¡±


    I had forgotten all about that.


    It was made at Mr. Halton¡¯s store, so it was veryfortable.


    ¡°Uh, well¡­there is a reason for this. Because we wanted to amuse the children¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm. Well, I am like that as well.¡±


    ¡°We don¡¯t want to bepared to you¡­ But nevermind¡­¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­¡±


    ¡°Ms. Lugretta?¡±


    ¡°No, it¡¯s nothing. Don¡¯t mind me.¡±


    ¡°Uh, yes¡­¡±


    Liza and Tilura must have passed out the other hats, as the vige children were now wearing them.


    As Liza was smiling with the other children, it seemed like they were getting along¡­ I was d that I had bought them.


    ¡°Still, you sure changed a lot in a short while, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wou!¡±


    ¡°As long as you are having fun. And I see that you have calmed down.¡±


    ¡°Kyan!¡±


    After the business of the hats, I started to pet Leo and saw that something was different. But she barked and wagged her tail happily.


    As for what was different, there were dogs not just around her feet, but her back as well, making her look more colorful.


    The dogs here were mostly brown or ck, but some were also gray or a dark blue. And so it looked like Leo had spots in her white fur, which was quite fun.


    Not only that, but on top of her head was the maltese that had been acting quite vicious earlier. Everytime Leo moved her head, it had to regain its bnce again. It seemed quite amused by this.


    And it barked in agreement when I addressed it.


    I was d that it and Leo had made peace while we were away.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    A woman came and intervened ¡°You! Damn it!¡± ¡°In any case, I must stop this. Your Excellency, have you not done enough?¡± ¡°Hmm. I know that voice. Tsk¡­ But I finally found a Silver Fenrir. I will not give up!¡± ¡°But you were already defeated from the beginning.¡± ¡°What are¡­May 16, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    The reason that Sherry was not injured ¡°Hmm¡­I guess it¡¯s because she is a fenrir. To not be injured after being hit so hard¡­¡± ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff-wou!¡± ¡°Uhhh, she says that fenrirs are able to protect themselves by enveloping their bodies in magic energy. That¡¯s why she wasn¡¯t injured.¡± ¡°...That is¡­so¡­November 29, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I had an idea of what Leo was trying to say Had she lost under the pressure of Sebastian and the maids? While I may have just looked like a bystander, after hearing Ms. ire talk about the Fenrir Forest, I was now quite interested in that forest we had¡­February 5, 2022


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 141

    I Studied Medicine with Milina


    ¡°All right, that¡¯s enough training for now.¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re finished already, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    As promised, I focused on training for one hour, and was able to do quite a lot.


    It was less than usual, but I still had my sword swinging to do at night.


    Besides, I will start training with Leo again tomorrow¡­ We didn¡¯t do it today because we had gone to Ractos.


    ¡°I have to study now. What about you, Tilura?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll continue with my training!¡±


    Tilura had looked puzzled as to why I was finishing early. But when I suggested she could join us, she returned to her training because she did not want to study.


    I chuckled at this and left the garden and entered the dining hall¡­ Oh, I better wipe off this sweat first.


    Leo was following me, but Sherry stayed with Tilura.


    Perhaps she knew that it would be boring if she tagged along?


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting, Milina.¡±


    ¡°There you are, master.¡±


    Milina and Ms. Lyra were chatting in the dining hall.


    They were both raised in the orphanage, and seemed to get along very well.


    ¡°So, studying medicine¡­ Where should we start?¡±


    ¡°Master. You haven¡¯t thought about that yet?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    When it came to actually studying it, I didn¡¯t know what to do first.


    Learn the different types of herbs? Look up ways to mix and prepare medicine? Study about the symptoms of diseases and what medicine is most effective?


    What should we do¡­


    Just then, Milina and Leo looked at me with exasperated expressions.


    My authority as a master¡­!


    Well, I never had any to begin with.


    ¡°If only Sebastian were here¡­ I think he would have a lot to teach.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, I have something for you.¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    Ms. Lyra offered me a single volume.


    I looked at the cover, and it read, ¡®Medicine for Beginners. Basic Knowledge. ¡®


    ¡°Is this from¡­Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°Yes. He said that I should give it to you if you looked troubled.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Thank you.¡±


    So Sebastian had predicted that we would not know where to start with our studies.


    It was impressive, but also a little intimidating that he was so perceptive.


    Still, I was thankful that he had gone through the trouble in spite of being so busy. And so I would use this book to study the basics with Milina.


    ¡°Milina. Today, we will study with this book.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Milina only just arrived today. So please keep it brief.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m fine. I want to study as much as possible!¡±


    Milina answered Ms. Lyra energetically, but it was true that she had only just arrived here today.


    And while she had friends here, she had left everyone at the orphanage.


    She still needed to unpack her things, and she must be a little tired after traveling. So like Ms. Lyra said, we would keep it short for now.


    ¡°As for where we can study¡­ Ms. Lyra, could we use the drawing room?¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s fine.¡±


    ¡°All right, let¡¯s go to the drawing room, Milina.¡±


    ¡°Yes, master!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    As we were allowed to use the drawing room, we decided to study there.


    While we could have used my room, there was only one desk and chair.


    For some reason, Leo¡¯s reply was just as enthusiastic as Milina¡¯s as we headed towards the drawing room.


    ¡­Could it be that Leo wanted to acquire knowledge of medicine as well?


    ¡°Please use these.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Thank you!¡±


    Ms. Lyra prepared some paper for taking notes, as well as quill pens. We would use those to study.


    And so we both sat down at the table and opened the book that Sebastian had given to us.


    Leo loomed over me from behind so that she could look at the book too.


    So you really do want to study¡­


    ¡°Hmm¡­hmm¡­ I see.¡±


    ¡°Mmm¡­ It¡¯s soplicated¡­¡±


    We read the book and then wrote down the important points onto the sheets of paper.


    Apparently, Milina was finding it a little difficult to understand.


    ¡°¡­Master¡­ Excuse me. But what does this mean?¡±


    ¡°Uhh¡­it means¡­¡±


    asionally, she would ask me questions about the contents, and I would exin it to her as we read the book.


    Leo was nodding in the back¡­ Did she really understand?


    ¡°Hmm¡­ This makes me want to conduct some tests with the herbs¡­¡±


    ¡°Are you going to use your ability, master?¡±


    ¡°Well, there is a lot that I would like to do¡­ But¡­see here¡­¡±


    When I considered using Weed Cultivation to test something I had read in the book, Milina showed deep interest.


    She wanted to see my ability¡­ However, I had to disappoint her by pointing to a section in the book.


    ¡°Uhh¡­ It is dangerous for beginners to mix medicine out of curiosity. One must restrain the desire to demonstrate and acquire knowledge first.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s what it says.¡±


    ¡°¡­Too bad. I wanted to see you use the Gift.¡±


    I had been thinking aboutbining the herbs¡­ By doing this, you could make medicine with different kinds of effects.


    However, the book warned against doing such things.


    And I had to agree¡­ I might identally make something toxic or with no effect at all.


    ¡°You want to see it that bad?¡±


    ¡°Yes. It¡¯s not every day that you get to see such miracles!¡±


    Milina answered with sparkling eyes.


    Was it really something to be so excited over¡­? Well, I suppose it was simr to a miracle¡­


    ¡°Then I can show it to you tomorrow.¡±


    ¡°Really!? But, the book said¡­¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m not going to be concocting anything. I¡¯m just going to grow some herbs, since I have to do that anyway. That requires Weed Cultivation, so you cane and watch.¡±


    ¡°Is that so! Thank you!¡±


    I made herbs nearly every day in order to send them to Mr. Kalis.


    As I was only growing them, there was no danger.


    So that was something that I could show Milina.

 Chapter 242

    A Voyeur Appears


    ¡°How about you say¡­that you cannot ept, because of the contract?¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ I will use the contract as an excuse. That way, I can turn her down without offending her.¡±


    ¡°Yes. It would be very different if you said it was because of her appearance or character. ¡­Though I do think she would be deserving of such excuses.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. Well, insulting people as much as possible when refusing them is not something I enjoy¡­ But that¡¯s just me.¡±


    ¡°It is good that you are kind, but¡­ You really should improve your ability to refuse people.¡±


    Oh, she was warning me.


    Yes¡­ It had been that way before, when we went to the Fenrir forest. I found it hard to say no when people asked me fervently.


    I suppose I didn¡¯t like to disappoint others¡­ But from Ms. ire¡¯s point of view, she probably did not like to see a friend be used by other people.


    Though, I didn¡¯t know why she should be this concerned.


    ¡°Thank you. I think I should be fine now.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m d that I could be of help¡­ But, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Yes, what is it?¡±


    ¡°Anne¡¯s proposal might be an advantage to you in the end. After all, you could be a noble¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s true.¡±


    There was still a lot that I didn¡¯t know about the aristocracy in this world¡­


    However, they clearly had special privileges and could live in luxury.


    Though, I¡¯m sure they had their own duties as well.


    But it would still be better than the way I had lived in Japan.


    However¡­


    ¡°I am quite satisfied with my current situation.¡±


    ¡°You are?¡±


    ¡°Yes. You have all been very good to me. And Leo gets to y with everyone. And through making the herbs, I am able to help this house and the people in the town.¡±


    ¡°You don¡¯t have to worry about helping us¡­ Still, I see.¡±


    ¡°And nothing is more fun than being able to talk andugh with you, Sebastian, Tilura and Milina. Also¡­ I enjoy my sword and magic training, which should be very useful if I ever have to fight again.¡±


    ¡°Is that so¡­ So you want to stay with us.¡±


    There was no doubt that bing a noble had its appeals.


    However, as I just said, I very much enjoyed my current situation in life.


    It was a far cry from my old job and days of unending exhaustion.


    Leo was with me, and everyone was nice.


    Besides, I couldn¡¯t really imagine being a nobleman with lots of servants and having to deal with people who lived on mynd¡­ That was probably the biggest reason¡­


    ¡°In any case, I will probably have to leave this mansion eventually¡­ So I want to enjoy my time here while I can.¡±


    ¡°¡­But¡­you really can stay here for as long as you like¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Ms. ire?¡±


    Perhaps I had said a little too much, and was feeling a little embarrassed. But that¡¯s how much I wanted her to know that I enjoyed being here.


    And as we talked, Ms. ire moved closer and closer. Eventually, she was leaning against me with her head on my shoulder.


    ¡­When she was this close, it was difficult to not think about her scent again¡­


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­I¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Ms. ire¡­¡±


    ¡°In this mansion, forever¡­ Ever since you helped me in the forest, I¡­¡±


    While her head was still on my shoulder, she turned to look up at me.


    We were so close that the smallest movement could¡­


    My heart started to beat faster and louder.


    While I doubted she could hear it, I almost worried that she would.


    My hands and legs felt numb, and I could not move or look away.


    I had not felt anything like this when Ms. Anne made her proposal¡­


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi.


    ¡°¡­Wuff!¡±


    ¡°!¡±


    ¡°!? Leo?¡±


    Just as Ms. ire had closed her eyes and leaned into me, Leo suddenly barked.


    ¡­That was close¡­ A few more seconds and¡­ Huh? What was happening?


    ¡°Wuff¡­wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Leo. What is it?¡±


    ¡°¡­Good Leo?¡±


    Leo had suddenly stood up and started to bark. Then she sighed and went over to the door.


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°Woah!¡±


    ¡°Kyaaaa!¡±


    ¡°What!¡±


    Leo used her front paw to pull the door open.


    ¡­Leo. So you can open doors now¡­ But there was no time to think about that, as a flood of people poured into the room.


    ¡°Mr. Ekenhart¡­?¡±


    ¡°Father¡­ Sebastian and Tilura?¡±


    Yes, the flood of people were made up of Mr. Ekenhart, Sebastian and Tilura.


    Tilura was ttened on the floor under the weight of the others, and seemed to be in pain.


    But Sherry was on top of them all, and seemed to be having fun¡­ Though, this really wasn¡¯t a game¡­


    ¡°I can¡¯t breathe¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, sorry.¡±


    ¡°Forgive me.¡±


    As Tilura raised her voice painfully, the others swiftly got back to their feet.


    ¡°¡­Father¡­surely¡­surely you were not spying on us?¡±


    ¡°¡­Hahaha¡­ No¡­ Well¡­Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°It is not noble of you to me me, Your Grace.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Tilura?¡±


    ¡°Ye-yes! Father said that ire went to visit Mr. Takumi¡¯s room with an unusual look of resolve, and that this must mean something!¡±


    ¡°Kyau-kyau!¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ I see¡­¡±


    ¡°Ti-Tilura! That¡¯s not what you were supposed to say!¡±


    Mr. ire stood up slowly and then approached Mr. Ekenhart.


    As he could not think of any excuses, he pushed Sebastian forward. But soon after, Tilura exined everything in a clear voice.


    Sherry nodded in agreement.


    Leo sighed with exasperation by the door¡­ I knew exactly how she felt.

 Chapter 351

    I Made More Herbs


    After telling everyone that Liza was able tomunicate with Leo and Sherry, and Tilura had be distracted with her sword training, Mr. Ekenhart, Sebastian and Ms. ire left the dining hall.


    They probably had a lot to discuss regarding Range vige.


    However, when Ms. ire was about to leave, she turned to Tilura and said, ¡®While your sword training is important, so are your studies. Don¡¯t forget that.¡¯ And so Tilura¡¯s enthusiasm weakened, and she was eventually pulled away by one of the maids.


    I felt bad for her, but it was true.


    Sherry had also ran after Ms. ire¡­ I suppose she did not want to be with Tilura while she studied.


    Leo¡¯s eyes seemed sharp as she watched Sherry go.


    What was she thinking?


    When it came to Sherry and Liza, she seemed to take an educational interest in them¡­


    In any case, now that everyone was gone, I went to my room in order to leave the list there, and then I went to the back garden with Leo.


    ¡°Papa. Are you going to do magic again? ¡­Here, mama?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s right. Because we don¡¯t have enough of them. If I don¡¯t make a certain amount every time, then I will have to do it every day. ¡­Leo, you look awfullyfortable?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I went to a spot near the temporary herb garden and prepared to use Weed Cultivation.


    Liza was riding on Leo¡¯s back, and using her hands to scratch Leo¡¯s neck as they watched us.


    Apparently, Leo was telling Liza where to scratch.


    ¡°Uhh¡­ Ah, sorry. It¡¯s fine. Please don¡¯t mind us¡­¡±


    I said to the butler who was observing the herbs, and I moved a short distance away.


    That being said, I was also going to leave some of the herbs I made today, so that they could be observed, and so I didn¡¯t want it to be too far. Or it would be more work for the person who had to watch them.


    And so I started making the new herbs about three meters away.


    Yesterday, I had made a little too much, so I would be careful to not do that today¡­


    ¡°It really is strange. They just grow out of the ground so suddenly.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. I was very surprised when I first saw it. There isn¡¯t even a seed, and yet it grows.¡±


    As Liza petted Leo and watched, her eyes grew wide and her ears twitched.


    I was used to seeing it now, but it was probably quite a sight for most people.


    nts growing without seeds¡­ I would not have believed it myself, back when I was in Japan.


    ¡°Now, I better pick some of them.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll help!¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    I had made enough to send to Ractos and also some for medicine.


    Since there was some from yesterday, I would have quite a lot to hand over to Nick, but I was sure that Mr. Kalis would manage it just fine.


    Besides, it was better to have some extra in stock.


    When I moved towards the herbs in order to pick them, Liza jumped off of Leo and volunteered to help.


    While Leo had lowered herself to make it easier, it was still impressive to see her jump like that. But I suppose Liza was just naturally athletic because she was a beastkin.


    Leo also sounded a little disappointed now that the scratching was over.


    Don¡¯t worry, I will scratch youter as well.


    ¡°Well then. Can you pick them like you did yesterday? Ah, not all of them. Only half of them.¡±


    ¡°Oh, okay!¡±


    I had taught Liza and Mr. Ekenhart how to pick the herbs yesterday.


    And so I told her to leave half of them, and then we started picking.


    In spite of just learning yesterday, she could already do it perfectly. She sure was a fast learner¡­ I thought as we worked.


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s go back to the mansion now.¡±


    ¡°Are you going to make more medicine? I can¡¯t wait!¡±


    ¡°You really enjoy it, huh?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Because it requires a lot of strength!¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    I swiftly used Weed Cultivation to dry the herbs, and then we returned to the mansion.


    Apparently, Liza was looking forward to making the medicine again.


    Leo was nodding understandingly at her reason for it¡­ I suppose Liza really enjoyed exercising.


    Leo would also feel stressed if she couldn¡¯t go out on walks and move around. So she probably rted to how Liza felt.


    Perhaps she could not move around much in the slums, as people would pick on her. And she might also be holding back here as well.


    Perhaps we could find a way to let her exercise during our sword training with Mr. Ekenhart¡­ It was probably too early for her to learn how to fight, but she could still run around I suppose.


    I thought of such things as we entered the house, and searched for Milina, so that I could give her the herbs that would be turned into medicine.

 Chapter 401

    The culprit who threw the stone was caught


    Mr. Ekenhart seemed to be hesitant. I suppose that he did not like the idea of being chased by Leo¡­


    Even though he was used to her now, it was a different matter when Leo was barking and chasing after him.


    But Tilura, Sherry, and Liza were there. And since I wasn¡¯t scared by a barking Leo¡­I would run in the front then.


    And so we all took our positions and started running as part of our training.


    ¡­I had thought that I wouldn¡¯t be scared, but Leo was so big, that it was a little intimidating when she barked¡­


    Especially when she was behind you.


    It was no wonder that Mr. Ekenhart was hesitant.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, do you have a moment?¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­ Yes. What is it?¡±


    After we had finished our running, I trained with Mr. Ekenhart and Tilura. And while I was catching my breath, Sebastian came to the garden and approached me.


    Was it almost dinner time¡­? No, it was too early.


    ¡°We have visitors from Ractos.¡±


    ¡°From Ractos? Is it Nick?¡±


    ¡°No¡­ It is guards, and the person who was arrested. The incident with Lady Liza¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ They caught him already?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Your Grace, please don¡¯t go just yet.¡±


    Sebastian had lowered his voice a little and told me that it was rted to Liza.


    It had only happened yesterday, but they had already caught the culprit¡­ That was fast.


    Well, there were a lot of witnesses, and they knew he was from the slums.


    In any case, Sebastian then had to stop Mr. Ekenhart, who was about to run off.


    ¡°Well¡­ You are talking about the person who threw the stone, aren¡¯t you. Then I must go.¡±


    ¡°It would be for Mr. Takumi to go first and settle things.¡±


    ¡°¡­Hmm. Very well. She is your daughter, after all.¡±


    Well, I had decided to take care of her, and she called me papa. So I could not deny it¡­


    Though, it felt strange, since I wasn¡¯t even married.


    In any case, I then followed Sebatian to the ce where the guards were waiting.


    Leo, Sherry, Liza, and Tilura stayed in the garden.


    I didn¡¯t know how things would y out, but this was the person who had thrown the rock at Liza¡­ And so I felt ufortable about talking to the person directly.


    Regardless, it must be done.


    Tilura could watch Liza¡­and Leo and Sherry.


    ¡­Sherry had run so much that she couldn¡¯t move anymore¡­ I had not expected her to run this much.


    Was she alright¡­? Well, Ms. Lyra was looking after them, so it should be fine.


    ¡°Outside?¡±


    ¡°Yes. The guards would be one thing, but they have the culprit with them as well. They are not guests, and so they were not let inside¡­¡±


    ¡°I see. Very well.¡±


    Apparently, the guards and the arrested person were outside.


    Well, I suppose they didn¡¯t want to let a criminal inside of the duke¡¯s house.


    It wasn¡¯t due to any ideas of ss, but just because of how they viewed crime.


    And so I stepped out of the front door and went outside.


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting.¡±


    ¡°Aye! We have brought the person that we were searching for!¡±


    ¡°Hmm. This is the person?¡±


    ¡°Aye. Step forward.¡±


    ¡°Hey! Let go of me!¡±


    After stepping out of the door, Sebastian led us to the front gate.


    There were two armored men standing there, as well as a short young man who had his hands tied¡­no, he was a boy.


    When Sebastian called out to them, the guards bowed and pushed the boy forward.


    Behind them, the two guards were watching him closely in case he did anything suspicious.


    The boy red at us while standing between the two soldiers.


    Well, he hadn¡¯t changed much since thest time I saw him.


    He had unevenly trimmed hair, and his clothes and face were dirty.


    He seemed to be around fifteen¡­?


    And there was still a youthfulness in his face. But I wasn¡¯tpletely sure about his age. He seemed like he could be in highschool.


    However, his hands were tied, and he was shaking a little. So he likely knew that he was going to be punished.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I understand. Uh¡­ So, what is your name?¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°Apparently, his name is Mark.¡±


    ¡°¡­Thank you.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart urged me, and so I took a step forward and spoke to the boy.


    I wasn¡¯t really sure what to say, and so I asked what his name was.


    However, he just red at me and did not reply.


    But when I turned to the guard questioningly, he answered for him.


    ¡°Uh, Mark. Do you understand why you are here?¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°Answer his question!¡±


    ¡°¡­Because I threw the rock¡­ Obviously.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that is right. You threw a rock at an innocent girl.¡±


    He required a little prodding from the guards before he answered me.


    ¡­I really wasn¡¯t used to this kind of thing.


    Still, I continued to question him.

 Chapter 402

    I talked to Mark, who had thrown the rock


    ¡°You hurt a girl by throwing that rock. Not only that¡­but Leo, the Silver Fenrir that we were with, became angry because of that. Things could have turned very bad if no one came in to stop it.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t care about that. I just saw a monster that needed to be driven out.¡±


    ¡°A monster¡­ Indeed, Silver Fenrirs are monsters, but¡­¡±


    Mark was probably talking about Liza.


    ¡°No! The monster is that child who was there! The ears and tail¡­ Beastkin are monsters! They have to be driven out of town!¡±


    Good, he took the bait.


    I wasn¡¯t trying to provoke him, but this was the best way to make him talk honestly. It would allow me to draw out more information.


    ¡°Hmm. Monsters. But she hasn¡¯t hurt anyone. Don¡¯t you understand how it is wrong to attack someone like that?¡±


    ¡°You are allowed to throw stones at monsters! They have to be defeated before they start hurting people!¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ So you have a sense of justice? But why do you see someone as a monster just because of their tail and ears?¡±


    Besides, there were familiars in this world. So it didn¡¯t make sense to think of all monsters as bad.


    While Leo was not my familiar, she never harmed anyone. And Sherry lived leisurely as a familiar.


    Maybe a little too leisurely, but unlike orcs of trolls, she did not attack people without reason.


    I didn¡¯t know much about other monsters, but it seemed wrong to see all of them as dangerous.


    Besides, the other residents of the town didn¡¯t see them as dangerous, so it should be safe¡­


    ¡°All monsters are evil! That¡¯s what I heard!¡±


    ¡°¡­From who?¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart, Sebastian and the guards seemed like they didn¡¯t know who he was talking about, as they were shaking their heads.


    ¡°Um¡­ Who is saying that? Is this person saying that monsters are enemies to humans?¡±


    ¡°¡­I can¡¯t tell you. If I do, I won¡¯t be able to stay in the town. But I was told that beastkin are monsters and should not be allowed to live¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­¡±


    So he is not allowed to say¡­ Perhaps there was some hidden figure behind all of this.


    I immediately thought of a boss for a criminal organization.


    As for not being able to stay in town, it seemed less about being punished and driven out¡­but about being erased¡­


    Well, it would not be surprising for such a person or organization to exist in the slums.


    ¡°So you really cannot tell me? Um¡­ Even just a small hint¡­¡±


    ¡°If I go against that person, then I won¡¯t have a ce in the slums, let alone the town. And so I cannot say. Besides, they fed us and gave us a ce to live. And so they must be right!¡±


    ¡°¡­Hmm¡­¡±


    So this person was taking care of children who had nowhere to go?


    I didn¡¯t know what motive this person had, but it was probably a way of acquiring convenient pawns¡­


    Well, that was just a possibility. But perhaps they were good.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, do you mind if I try?¡±


    ¡°Sebastian? ¡­Yes.¡±


    While I tried to learn more about this person, Mark was very stubborn. And so while I wondered what to do, Sebastian suddenly approached me.


    Perhaps he had thought of something?


    And so I stepped to the side.


    ¡°Mark, is it? Could it be that you are talking about someone who is called Deam?¡±


    ¡°!¡±


    The moment that the name was spoken, Mark¡¯s facial expression changed.


    He was a mixture of frantess and fear, and was shaking visibly.


    ¡°Hmm, it looks like I was right¡­¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t say anything! If it became known that information leaked from me¡­¡±


    ¡°Hoho. It is fine. I have no reason to spread the information. Besides¡­ This is the duke¡¯s house. And so this Deam cannot do anything here.¡±


    ¡°¡­The du-duke¡¯s house¡­?¡±


    ¡°Oh, you did not know?¡±


    Mark looked scared as Sebastian grinned confidently.


    Nick had reacted that way as well. That expression was scary.


    Was Sebastianughing to reassure him, or to show him the reality of the situation¡­


    Well, even if someone had some influence in the slums, it waspletely different here.


    Especially with Leo here. This Deam could not do anything in this mansion.


    Mark¡¯s face went pale at the mention of the duke.


    Apparently, he did not know what this ce was¡­ The guards had just brought him here without telling him anything.


    Well, if he did know, he probably would not have thrown a rock at Liza to begin with.

 Chapter 403

    I asked about the man called Deam


    I waited for a moment and observed Mark, who seemed to have different things going on in his head.


    He finally understood that his actions had been against the duke¡¯s house.


    Well, he would have likely not done such a reckless thing if he knew.


    Unless he hated the duke as well, but it did not seem to be the case.


    While Liza was not from the duke¡¯s family, I was a guest at the house, and Ms. ire had been with us when it happened¡­ So it would be seen as an attack on the duke.


    Still, why didn¡¯t the guards exin this to him on the way here?


    ¡°Now, while some of this may be hard to believe, do you understand what has happened?¡±


    ¡°¡­Ye-yes¡­¡±


    Said Sebastian.


    He shook and answered in a fading voice.


    Unlike a moment before, he was no longer ring at us.


    Now that he knew who he was dealing with, he realized that resisting would just put him in a more dangerous situation.


    ¡°So, I hope you will be more cooperative now¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­I understand.¡±


    And so Mark was questioned about this person called Deam.


    While he had been hesitant at first, he seemed to feel that things would get worse for him if he kept his silence, and so he agreed to talk.


    Sebastian and the guards also exined about Deam as well.


    Apparently, he was exactly the kind of person who I had been thinking about.


    He was a criminal boss who operated in different slums, including the one in Ractos.


    However, due to Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s governance, they had not gained much power here yet.


    While Deam¡¯s subordinates could be found in every town, they were still not that big in number.


    They were not so big an organization that they would catch the eye of the country or nobles, and were just a gathering of criminals.


    They did not draw much attention yet, as they were not known to kill people, but it did happen sometimes.


    But the problem here was that they were teaching youngsters like Mark that beastkin were dangerous monsters.


    Apparently, he had not felt like that when Liza was first rescued by her grandfather.


    However, once her grandfather started to show a strong dislike for what Deam was doing, he was targeted as an enemy.


    In order to unify the residents of the slums, create amon enemy¡­ That was what Sebastian had predicted.


    While he was still alive, Liza¡¯s grandfather was able to protect her. As someone who had traveled the world he knew how to defend himself.


    Apparently, this Deam person did not fight much himself, and mainly just gave out orders.


    While Liza¡¯s grandfather used magic tools to fight.


    But as soon as he died of an illness, Deam had given them the order to target Liza.


    By choosing a weak target, he meant to make his position within the slums very clear.


    And then he had lied to Mark and the other children, and made them his subordinates.


    Deam had taught them that Liza was a beastkin and monster.


    Monsters had to be driven out of the slums.


    And so hurting Liza was a good thing.


    However, if they started killing, then the guards would take action, and it would attract too much attention.


    It seemed strange for a criminal organization to hesitate over killing one girl¡­but thanks to that, Liza was safe.


    Though, they would likely just choose a different target if Liza was not there.


    So it wasn¡¯t that Deam didn¡¯t want Liza dead, but that it would hurt their position with the guards.


    I suppose that was the result of Mr. Ekenhart properly governing hisnds.


    After listening to Mark and Sebastian, I had a general idea of the situation.


    ¡°So, Mark. You threw the rock because you were ordered to by Deam¡­ Is that right?¡±


    ¡°¡­Ye-yes. I didn¡¯t¡­know that she was rted to the duke¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, that much is obvious. However, it is wrong to throw rocks at people, regardless of their connection to the duke.¡±


    ¡°But¡­Deam said that beastkin are monsters¡­¡±


    ¡°Beastkin are not monsters. They are not very different from us. Have you ever left Ractos?¡±


    ¡°¡­I have not. I was born and raised here.¡±


    ¡°In that case, you might not know that there is a beastkin country to the north. Do you think that monsters could build their own country?¡±


    ¡°¡­No.¡±


    ¡°Right? While we were at war with them a long time ago¡­ That is in the past. And they are our neighbors now. And so I will say it again. Beastkin are not monsters. They are equal to humans and are our neighbors.¡±

 Chapter 404

    Mr. Ekenhart decided how to deal with Mark


    I nodded while listening to Sebastian speak with Mark.


    While I had never seen it, the beastkin had built the country that they live in.


    The orcs and trolls that I knew would not be capable of doing such a thing. And while beastkin looked a little different, they were mostly very simr to humans.


    ¡°Now, since we know what the situation is¡­ What should we do with him?¡±


    Sebastian said as he turned to Mr. Ekenhart.


    Even if this Deam had been giving orders, it didn¡¯t change the fact that Mark had thrown the rock.


    Besides, that had resulted in Leo getting angry and creating a scene.


    In some ways, I was more sympathetic than I was with Nick, but unlike that time, Liza had actually been hurt, and the people of Ractos had seen what Leo was like when she was angry.


    With Nick, he was now working at Mr. Kalis¡¯s store after apologizing to the people he had troubled.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Do you have any suggestions?¡±


    ¡°You want me to decide?¡±


    ¡°No, but your opinion will be taken into ount. It would be best for me to decide here.¡±


    ¡°I see. Very well¡­ In that case, I would make him understand about beastkin and apologize to Liza. And swear that he will never do anything like that again¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­¡±


    Unlike the time with Nick, they could not let me handle it entirely.


    Well, back then, it had mostly been my own herbs that were damaged.


    Mr. Ekenhart listened to me and closed his eyes, deep in thought.


    And then after some time, he opened his eyes again.


    ¡°I will keep Mark here for now. You can tell the people in Ractos that he was punished severely.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°You, Mr. Ekenhart?¡±


    The two guards nodded.


    ¡°Yes. I will assign someone to escort him back to the main house. And there, he will be dealt with severely.¡±


    ¡°Understood!¡±


    ¡°To the main house¡­? And severely¡­¡±


    ¡°Hehehe. He will wish he had just been punched a few times¡­¡±


    ¡°Ahh!¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­¡±


    The corner of Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s mouth raised as heughed evilly, causing Mark to let out a short scream.


    Sebastian was sighing as he shook his head¡­like he had given up.


    ¡°Well, I will exin it to youter, Mr. Takumi. Now, take him away!¡±


    ¡°Aye! Excuse me!¡±


    At Mr. Ekenhart¡¯smand, the guards picked up Mark and dragged him away.


    He must have had an idea of what was going to happen to him, as Mark shuddered anxiously as they headed out of the gates.


    ¡°So, what are you going to do? I wasn¡¯t able to have him apologize to Liza¡­¡±


    ¡°And I apologize for that, Mr. Takumi. However, I think it is too early for that. Even if you did make him apologize now, it would only be due to the pressure of this house and Deam.¡±


    ¡°Well¡­that is true.¡±


    He had obeyed Deam for all of this time, and so even if we exined that he was wrong about beastkin, he would likely not believe uspletely.


    He might apologize if the duke gave the order, but it would not be sincere.


    And he might still believe the lies that Deam had told him.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. This is the master¡¯s bad habit.¡±


    ¡°Bad habit?¡±


    ¡°Yes. It had been hiding recently, due to you and Lady Tilura, but¡­¡±


    ¡°Do not say that, Sebastian. Surely it is a good thing, ultimately?¡±


    ¡°¡­Well, perhaps.¡±


    ¡°What do you mean to do?¡±


    As I talked with Mr. Ekenhart, Sebastian approached with an exasperated expression.


    What did he mean¡­bad habit?


    Well, judging by what I had seen of Mr. Ekenhart up until now, it was not too strange that he had some bad habits¡­


    ¡°I mean to train him back at the main house. Of course, knowledge is also important, so he will have to study. Especially about the beastkin.¡±


    ¡°Training¡­ Like how Tilura and I have been training?¡±


    ¡°That¡­is when I¡¯m holding back.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. His Grace finds great pleasure in training people. He is very special.¡±


    ¡°You are very unjust, Sebastian. It is because of me that all of the guards here are sopetent.¡±


    ¡°¡­It¡¯s true that they are all serious workers. Whenever His Grace finds someone with potential, he attempts to train them thoroughly.¡±


    Apparently, Mr. Ekenhart was going to train Mark.


    Indeed, he had been living in the slums, and showed quite a fighting spirit even after being arrested.


    I didn¡¯t know if that meant he had potential, but given what he had experienced up until now, he could probably survive in harsh environments.


    ¡°But how is that a punishment?¡±


    ¡°Well, that is just something to say on the surface. It would look bad if they were not punished harshly. Some people in Ractos might even think that he was executed.¡±


    ¡°And after he caused such a scene, there will not be any opposition.¡±


    ¡°Hmm. Hehe¡­ Though, Mark himself may eventually wish that he was executed¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart said with a smile.


    How strict did he intend to be¡­


    Mr. Ekenhart was already training me and Tilura¡­ Would it really be that different?

 Chapter 405

    The training would be very severe


    ¡°How will it be differentpared to Tilura and my training?¡±


    ¡°The main purpose of your training is self-defense. And it is not a punishment. In order to make someone a guard who can protect others, their training must be more severe.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    ¡°If you are interested, Mr. Takumi¡­ You should ask Philip or Nichs.¡±


    It was true that protecting someone else was a different matter, and probably required very different training.


    Well, not that I would know.


    Just then, Sebastian suggested that I speak with Phillip or Nichs about it.


    I suppose it was possible that they had been trained by Mr. Ekenhart¡­


    Indeed, they were capable guards, and Nichs could use a katana, which was a rare sword.


    ¡°Yes, though they may not want to talk about it¡­¡±


    ¡°How bad was it¡­Mr. Ekenhart¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha. They were on the brink of death, that is all.¡±


    The brink of death¡­ Surely that is going too far?


    It was a good thing that Tilura and I were only training to defend ourselves¡­


    ¡°Well, we can leave Mark to His Grace¡¯s care. He already decided it, so there is no point in trying to stop him now.¡±


    ¡°You understand me well, Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Because it¡¯s happened plenty of times already¡­ Regardless, the real problem is Deam.¡±


    ¡°Mmm.¡±


    The sun had mostly set, and it was getting dark now. But Sebastian and Mr. Ekenhart continued to talk.


    I suppose they did not want to go to the dining hall, where the others could hear.


    I also didn¡¯t want Liza to hear more about it.


    ¡°Can¡¯t you just have him arrested, Mr. Ekenhart?¡±


    ¡°Yes, if I made a move, it would be easy enough. But¡­¡±


    ¡°The effects it would have¡­¡±


    ¡°Mmm. While not a lot, he does have some influence in the slums. And so it would be best to not make too bold a move.¡±


    ¡°At worst, his arrest could cause uprisings, not only here, but in other towns.¡±


    Apparently, it would be quite difficult to capture this person.


    ¡°But there is no doubt that they are up to no good. Even when ignoring the incident with Liza. I had wanted to chip away at his power slowly, but¡­¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s why the day after Liza was brought back, the guards of Ractos were contacted and made to investigate.¡±


    ¡°¡­Sebastian, that was supposed to be a secret.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart said as he looked away, somewhat embarrassed.


    Was this rted to how he had been speaking to the guards before we left?


    ¡°Hoho. It is not as if you were doing something wrong. Besides, surely it is best that Mr. Takumi knows? Otherwise, he and Leo might decide to take things into their own hands and¡­¡±


    ¡°No, I wouldn¡¯t do that¡­ I think.¡±


    ¡°Well, Mr. Takumi is very fond of her. And so is everyone in the mansion. But Leo were to act, she might destroy the whole town. She almost did it recently.¡±


    Indeed, even if I was angry that this Deam had given the order for people to throw rocks at Liza¡­ I wouldn¡¯t then use Leo to destroy the town.


    ¡°Well, in any case¡­ Deam. Even if we wanted to do something, we do not know where he is currently.¡±


    ¡°Really? I thought he was in the Ractos slums.¡±


    ¡°That is true. However, he changes location every day. As people from the slums are among his subordinates, he is able to move while remaining hidden from the guards. Though, if I put all of my people on it at once, they might¡­¡±


    ¡°But then it will be obvious that you are involved. And that information will spread to the other towns¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmmm¡­¡±


    In other words, he needed to do it in a way that didn¡¯t expose his involvement¡­


    Leo and I lived in the mansion, and were seen in town with the duke¡¯s people.


    However, I wasn¡¯t an employee¡­even though there was a contract. I just gave them herbs.


    As the herbs were made with Weed Cultivation, not many people knew about them.


    So even if people knew that I worked with the duke¡¯s store, they shouldn¡¯t know that I was deeply involved with the house.


    Especially not people who lived in the slums.


    Well, there were some stores we had visited multiple times. But I doubted that they would be leaking information.


    If they did, then Ms. ire or Mr. Ekenhart may not visit them as customers anymore.


    And being connected to the store was a much bigger advantage than being connected to the slums.


    Besides, none of the people we had bought from looked like they would be involved in criminal activity¡­

 Chapter 406

    Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian made fun of me


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Are you thinking of something strange?¡±


    ¡°N-no¡­nothing really¡­¡±


    ¡°I hope you will continue to not be thinking about destroying Ractos?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I will not think of such a thing. I am very fond of Ractos.¡±


    After seeing me deep in thought, Mr. Ekenhart suddenly looked frantic.


    However, Ractos was the first town I went to in this world.


    And in general, the people did not fear or try to avoid Leo.


    They were definitely curious, but it could not be helped, as Leo was so big.


    While there had been incidents, like with the herbs and illness, the people were overall very friendly.


    I felt that this was due to the duke not being oppressive in governing his people.


    In any case, I would not destroy a town that I liked.


    And I wouldn¡¯t let Leo do it, even if she could.


    ¡°Considering the possibility of good Leo destroying Ractos, it would be much easier to catch Deam and settle this matter.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Since they should be few in number, as long as we prepare carefully, it should not be difficult to suppress him. Though, there may be civilian casualties¡­¡±


    ¡°But that is still better than the whole town.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Hey, hey. I already said that we won¡¯t be doing that. You shouldn¡¯t think about such morbid things.¡±


    If such a thing did happen, it would have a serious impact on the duke¡¯s house, and put me and Leo in danger as well.


    We would be worse viins than Deam ever was.


    Dangerous enemies of the kingdom.


    ¡°Well, who knows? People retaliate in surprising ways when their own are targeted. And if Mr. Takumi bes angry, good Leo will as well. And then no one will be able to stop them.¡±


    ¡°For instance, if Lady ire or Tilura were threatened by someone. The duke would easily move an army if necessary.¡±


    ¡°Well, if that happened, I would also do what I can to fight against the enemy, but¡­ Something like that won¡¯t happen, will it? So it will be fine.¡±


    ¡°¡­One would hope.¡±


    It was with such thoughts that we returned to the mansion.


    This was because Ms. Gelda hade to tell us that dinner was ready.


    ¡°Well then¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you. Liza, go and get cleaned, okay?¡±


    ¡°Yes, okay!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    After dinner, I lightly exined everything to Ms. ire and the others, and then I trained and returned to my room.


    I didn¡¯t want to talk about it in detail where Liza could hear, and so I was quite vague. But she had likely spoken to Sebastian about itter.


    I then watched as Ms. Lyra took Liza away to be bathed.


    While Mr. Ekenhart and I had been talking with Mark, Liza had spent her time rolling in the mud with Leo, Tilura and Sherry. And so she waspletely filthy.


    Apparently, they wanted Sherry to practice rolling.


    And Leo was monitoring them.


    As Sherry was a fenrir, I didn¡¯t know if such training was necessary. But it seemed like she was having fun.


    Now that Liza was no longer holding back, she was able to y in the mud with Tilura. That made me happy.


    Besides, she could easily wash it off. Though, it meant more work for the maids.


    They had wiped off most of it before dinner, but it wasn¡¯t everything. Besides, they were sweating as well, and so I told Liza that she must go and take a bath.


    Well, not that she was gone, it was time to talk to Leo about Mark.


    She had been ncing at me asionally during dinner, as if she had questions¡­which was unusual. Leo was usually so engrossed in her food.


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Yes, yes. I will tell you. Uh¡­¡±


    Leo had turned to me and barked as if to urge me on.


    And so I started to exin to her about Mark and Deam.


    Do I have to tell Leo everything¡­ I did wonder. But she was my buddy who I hade to this world with.


    And so it was best to share as much information as possible.


    Besides, if I wanted to do the thing I had thought of during dinner, then I would require Leo¡¯s cooperation.


    ¡°And so the viin of the whole thing¡­the person who gave the order, is this person called Deam. Well, he probably didn¡¯t tell him to throw the rock directly. I will not say that Mark is innocent, but¡­ Well, we will just have to leave that Mr. Ekenhart.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. ¡­Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Haha. Good one, Leo. So you knew what I was thinking about?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    After listening to the exnation, Leo nodded and then tilted her head as if to say, ¡®But that¡¯s not all, is it?¡¯


    As we had known each other for such a long time, she knew what I was thinking.


    That was very perceptive. Though, I hoped that she didn¡¯t actually know everything that was going on in my mind.

 Chapter 407

    I decided to cooperate with Leo and act


    ¡°As for this Deam person, even Mr. Ekenhart cannot solve the problem immediately. Though he is looking into it. So it may just be a matter of time.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Still, we cannot take Liza to town easily until he is caught, right? And I want her to be able to have fun there without worrying about being pelted with rocks. She should be able to y with the children at the orphanage, and buy things that she wants, and eat at the food stalls.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°But if Deam is still there, then she might be targeted again. ¡­Not to mention, it is not as if the people will change immediately. It will take some time. And so¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff? ¡­Wou!¡±


    And so we talked about making things safer for Liza.


    Once Leo heard about Deam, she became quite enthusiastic.


    ¡°Even if we can¡¯t do it immediately¡­I want to do something. Will you help me, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wuff! Wou?¡±


    ¡°Haha. I see. Thank you.¡±


    Leo barked and agreed to help.


    If anything, it sounded like she meant to act, whether I did anything or not.


    But if I just left it to Leo, she might attack Ractos¡­ So it was best that she helped me.


    The old me¡­.before I came to this world, might not have done anything.


    It was through experiencing different things and meeting people here, that I had started to change.


    ¡°I¡¯m back, papa!¡±


    ¡°Wee back, Liza. Did you get clean?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Sister Lyra helped me!¡±


    ¡°I see. That¡¯s good. Thank you, Ms. Lyra. By the way¡­there was one thing that I wanted to ask you.¡±


    ¡°Yes, what is it? ¡­Though, I think I might know what it is.¡±


    ¡°You do?¡±


    ¡°You seemed to be thinking about something during dinner. And judging by what you spoke of earlier¡­¡±


    ¡°I suppose I am easy to read. In any case, could you take care of Liza tonight?¡±


    ¡°Papa? What happened?¡±


    Apparently, Ms. Lyra knew what I was thinking about.


    Leo knew as well. Was I really that easy to read?


    Well, Leo and I had known each other for a long time. And as a servant, Ms. Lyra was very observant of others¡­I think.


    Regardless, Liza then turned to me anxiously.


    ¡°It¡¯s nothing, Liza. There is just something that I need to do now. I¡¯ll be back soon.¡±


    ¡°¡­Really?¡±


    ¡°Yes, really. I would never lead you here and go somewhere else, alright?¡±


    ¡°Okay¡­ I believe you.¡±


    Liza seemed to have sensed something by looking at me.


    But when I looked her in the eye and exined it, she nodded and said that she trusted me.


    ¡°Very well. If Lady Liza is fine with it, I shall take care of her in your absence.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry to ask you, after you had to stay uptest night as well¡­¡±


    ¡°No, I was given extra time to rest. Well, Lady Liza. I hope you don¡¯t mind staying with me again?¡±


    ¡°I like Sister Lyra, because she is nice!¡±


    Liza was quite fond of Ms. Lyra at this point.


    And so she looked quite happy as she nodded in agreement.


    She liked Ms. ire and Ms. Anne as well¡­but she spent much more time with Ms. Lyra.


    ¡°Thank you, Lady Liza. Well, Mr. Takumi, I¡¯m sure you have preparations to make, so I think we should move to a different room.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    As Ms. Lyra left the room with Liza, Leo and I thanked her and bowed.


    ¡°Now¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Since it was just Leo and me left, I started to prepare.


    Leo also got up as if she were going to do something. But unlike me, she had nothing to carry.


    I suppose she was just too anxious to wait quietly.


    And so I ignored Leo as she paced back and forth, and I finished with my preparations.


    ¡°¡­I should take this, just in case.¡±


    While packing, I picked up the katana that Mr. Ekenhart had given to me.


    I doubted I would be in any danger with Leo there¡­ But I thought back on Range vige and the orcs, and decided to take it with me anyway.


    I would use it if my usual sword happened to break.


    It was night time and dark, so hardly anyone would see it¡­ Though, I might have to apologize to Mr. Ekenhartter.


    ¡°Alright, Leo¡­ Are you ready?¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    Once I was finished, I called out to Leo, and we left the room.


    Now, we will deal with the root of the problem of Liza¡¯s troubles¡­!¡±

 Chapter 408

    Sebastian Knew


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, good Leo. Where are you headed at thiste hour¡­?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Leo and I moved through the mansion and reached the entrance hall. But then we were stopped by a familiar voice.


    Leo turned to see who it was.


    I too turned to look, and saw that in the brightly lit center of the hall, stood a solitary Sebastian.


    ¡°Is something the matter, Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°That is what I should be asking you, Mr. Takumi. ¡­Well, I cannot say that I have no idea what you mean to do.¡±


    ¡°¡­Ms. Lyra said something like that to me before. Am I really easy to read?¡±


    ¡°Hohoho. It is part of our job, being observant of our masters and guests. Though, you are definitely in the easy category.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Apparently, even Sebastian had an idea of what I meant to do.


    I suppose it showed on my face?


    Even Leo was barking as if she wasughing. And I felt a little annoyed.


    ¡°Ever since you spoke to Mark, it seemed like there was something inside that you were trying your hardest to hold back. ¡­It was all I could do to change the subject.


    ¡°Ah, so you knew from then¡­¡±


    Sebastian was probably talking about when they started joking about how we would destroy Ractos.


    After hearing about Deam from Mark and Sebastian, and how he had targeted a young beastkin, so many negative emotions had welled up within me.


    Part of it was because I had rescued and now guarded Liza, but I also could not forgive someone who would hurt an innocent child.


    I had been trying to y it cool¡­but it seems like the others knew about it.


    As Sebastian said, the servants were very observant of us, and Mr. Ekenhart had a lot of experience¡­


    Though, I hoped that at least Ms. ire and Ms. Anne hadn¡¯t noticed.


    ¡°Please do not do anything reckless.¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re not going to stop me?¡±


    ¡°I doubt it would do any good. If anything, I feel bad that we have not been able to act first¡­¡±


    Currently, Liza was the only one here who had been harmed, and due to how difficult it would be to arrest with force, it could not be helped.


    Such a thing would affect a lot of people, and could cause damage. And the duke¡¯s house could not go out in full force for Liza alone.


    ¡°While I won¡¯t stop you, how do you intend to enter Ractos, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Uh, well¡­ I¡¯ve been there several times, and the guards recognize me. So I don¡¯t see how that will be a problem?¡±


    ¡°If you go now, everyone will be asleep by the time you arrive. The gates will be closed.¡±


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s true¡­¡±


    Unlike Japan, there were monsters in this world.


    I didn¡¯t know if they became active during the night, but it was no surprise that the gates would be closed when no one was going in or out.


    ¡°Surely you aren¡¯t thinking of using Leo to jump over the walls?¡±


    ¡°No, I wasn¡¯t thinking about that¡­ But could you do that, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wou!¡±


    ¡°¡­I see.¡±


    After denying it, I turned to ask Leo, who thought about it for a moment and then barked, ¡®I can do it!¡¯


    The wall surrounding Ractos wasn¡¯t quite ten meters tall, but was still very high.


    And Leo could jump over it¡­I would like to see that one day.


    ¡°Hohoho. If you did such a thing, the guards would arrest you as an intruder. Though, I¡¯m sure that good Leo could outrun or¡­trample over them¡­ But I think that would affect your goal?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­exactly.¡±


    Sebastian said with a smile, and I nodded.


    Indeed, jumping over the walls would probably result in arrest.


    ¡°So¡­ Just show this to the guard who is on watch duty. If you knock on the gate, then a small window should open up. Just show them this and they will open the door.¡±


    So saying, Sebastian walked up to me and handed me an object that was about the size of his palm.


    ¡°Is this¡­a crest?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I believe that Lady ire showed it to you before¡­ It is the same thing. This will prove that you are sent from the the duke¡¯s house.¡±


    ¡°¡­Because you don¡¯t want people to know?¡±


    ¡°Yes. While such things will surely be revealedter, right now, it would be best to not make the connection between you and the duke too clear.¡±


    ¡°I understand¡­ And I will be carefull.¡±

 Chapter 409

    Everyone knew


    Sebastian had handed me metal crest that depicted a Silver Fenrir, much like the one that Ms. ire had shown me before.


    It would show that the duke vouched for the person who held it.


    Sebastian also had a warning, which made sense.


    And so I would not go around shing it to everyone in the town.


    ¡°Also, this¡­¡±


    ¡°What is that?¡±


    Sebastian then handed me a folded piece of paper.


    ¡°It contains a few locations where Deam has been sighted. So you may want to start with those areas. However¡­he is constantly on the move. There is no guarantee you will find him there.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ I will need to move quickly then.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Perhaps he moves between locations every day. So it would be best to check them all at once. Though, this information could be out of date¡­¡±


    ¡°Thanks. I¡¯m sure it will help. And it is better than nothing.¡±


    ¡°Hoho. Well¡­I will leave it to you to find out how urate it is.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I had originally been thinking about searching over several days, but this alone should save me some time.


    At worst, I would just have to rely on Leo¡¯s sense of smell¡­ But Leo didn¡¯t know Deam¡¯s scent.


    ¡­I really should n better.


    Being spontaneous could be a good thing, but I needed to be a little more thoughtful¡­


    ¡°Also¡­ His Grace has given you his permission to use the katana.¡±


    Said Sebastian as he nced at my belt.


    So even Mr. Ekenhart knew what I was going to do.


    ¡­I really wasn¡¯t suited to any covert actions or secrets.


    ¡°I understand. Well, I don¡¯t think I will actually have to use it.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. I hope that you will be careful. And I pray that you will not destroy Ractos.¡±


    ¡°Haha. I told you that I won¡¯t do that. Well, then¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, we await your safe return. Lady ire will be quite impatient as well.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ I see. I will be very careful then.¡±


    I touched the sword at my belt and then nodded to Sebastian.


    When he mentioned Ms. ire, he had nced behind him to the corner of the hall.


    And when I turned to look, I saw a familiar figure hiding behind a pir.


    She probably thought that I couldn¡¯t see her, but about half of her face was visible¡­ She was not very good at hiding.


    I thought with a smile, and then answered Sebastian in an extra loud voice before exiting from the door.


    ¡­Perhaps she avoided meeting me, because she wouldn¡¯t be able to hold back the urge to try and stop me from going¡­


    She worried more than the others, after all.


    She was the kind of person who was more concerned with others in danger, then in being in danger herself.


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Just as I was leaving, I remembered something and stopped.


    ¡°Sebastian. Could you prepare some sausages for when we get back? I think that Leo will be hungry.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!? Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°Certainly. I will prepare as much as we can¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha. Well, not too much. I don¡¯t want her to overeat either¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Leo wagged her tail happily as she listened to us.


    While that was nice, her tail would m into my side, and it hurt a little. So I wanted her to calm down.


    Well, since Leo would be working hard tonight, it was only right to reward her this much.


    With that in mind, and taking note of the person nodding behind the pir, I smiled and left.


    Sebastian bowed deeply as he saw me off.


    Okay Leo, you can stop wagging your tail so much¡­


    ¡°Alright, Leo. You can run a little faster now. We want to be quick, so the others won¡¯t worry. Besides, there is the sausages¡­¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    Leo answered enthusiastically.


    Was it because of the sausages, or the people waiting¡­ I hoped that the sausages weren¡¯t her only motivation.


    In any case, after leaving the mansion, I immediately climbed onto Leo¡¯s back and we headed towards Ractos.


    I put away the crest and the map so that I wouldn¡¯t drop them.


    Leo was running at a speed that was slightly slower than when we had rushed to Range vige.


    However, I still had to hold on, or it would be dangerous.


    She would not run this fast when carrying Tilura or Liza.


    ¡°So everyone knew after all. Well, perhaps Sebastian went around and told them¡­¡±


    ¡°Hah-hah¡­wuff?¡±


    I muttered to myself, and then Leo reacted.


    I was surprised she could hear me through all of the win. I suppose Leo¡¯s ears were special.


    And as I talked to Leo, I felt grateful towards the people of the mansion for not trying to stop me.

 Chapter 410

    It Started Raining


    While riding on Leo, I thought about what had happened.


    The gate would usually have been closed, but it was open.


    In general, regardless of the time of day, the gates were kept closed unless they were expecting a visitor.


    It was one of the duke¡¯s houses, after all.


    Not only that, but there were usually two or three guards posted there, but I had not seen anyone.


    Perhaps Sebastian had told them, or they already knew¡­ They left the gate open and moved elsewhere.


    I felt gratitude for the extent they went to.


    What we were going to do now could be dangerous.


    Aside from that, there was also the risk of people finding out about the duke¡¯s involvement.


    And yet they had sent me out.


    Well, we were far away from the town, so perhaps there was no need to be so cautious¡­


    What I wanted to do, was hurry up and find Deam, capture him, and make sure that no one realizes that the duke is moving behind the scenes.


    That was what I hoped, anyway.


    ¡°Hahahahah¡­wuff¡­ Wuff-wuff?¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Ah, that¡¯s right. It is kind of difficult to see¡­ Wait one moment.¡±


    I suddenly heard Leo barking.


    Apparently, she was concerned about how dark it was.


    You only needed to move in a straight line to reach Ractos, so we didn¡¯t need to worry about crashing into anything. But I suppose it was still dangerous to not be able to see up ahead.


    Perhaps Leo didn¡¯t like that she was running but couldn¡¯t see the scenery¡­


    And so I unsheathed the sword on my belt.


    Then I raised it into the air and focused.


    ¡°Light Elemental Shine.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Leo barked as if she too were chanting, and then the magic was activated.


    The magic energy entered the sword and caused the de to glow.


    ¡­Ms. ire had taught it to me, and it was already proving to be useful.


    ¡°While it does not shine too far, it is better than nothing.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    It was blinding if looked at directly, and more than bright enough when it was so dark that you could barely even see the moon.


    And like that, we continued our journey to Ractos.


    Now that we had light, Leo seemed to be in a much better mood.


    ¡°I can¡¯t see the moon¡­ That can happen sometimes.¡±


    The moon in this world was not like the one in my old world. It was more of a bluish, silvery color¡­ Some might say it was just blue.


    And as I looked up at the sky, I felt a drop of water fall on my face.


    ¡­Water?


    ¡°Is it¡­rain?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    And the drops of water continued to fall and increase in number.


    I had not been rained on since I came to this world.


    Perhaps it was due to the climate, but it did not rain much around the mansion.


    And even if it did rain, it was usually during the night.


    ¡°¡­Seems to be getting stronger? Leo. Are you alright?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wou!¡±


    ¡°As long as it¡¯s not hot water? ¡­Well, as long as you are enjoying it¡­¡±


    It was raining hard enough that she would be drenched soon.


    Since she was running faster than a horse, I worried that the rain would get into her eyes¡­ Apparently that was not a problem.


    ¡­But I could barely keep my eyes open.


    As for the sword, it continued to shine even in the rain.


    Had I been holding a torch instead, it would have been extinguished immediately.


    It was one of those moments where I was thankful that I could use magic.


    ¡°We¡¯ll have to take a bath and warm up when we get back¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff!?¡±


    ¡°Leo. You¡¯re soaking wet. And there is a lot of dust in the air, so you¡¯ll have to be cleaned.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    I hadn¡¯t brought a raincoat or umbre.


    They probably wouldn¡¯t be much use when moving at this speed anyway.


    Now that the rain was getting stronger, we were both drenched.


    And Leo was covered in fur, which was all matted down now. She actually looked smaller than usual.


    There was a lot to do, and I did not want to catch a cold or get sick. And so I told Leo that we would take a bathter, and she did not look pleased.


    Even if she didn¡¯t hate it as much as she did before, she had not been cured entirely.


    Leo wasn¡¯t as excited to be running in the rain after that, but I was able to persuade her as we continued on our way.


    And I wondered. Was this rain a warning about the danger of what we were doing? Or was it a blessing, that would conceal our presence¡­

 Chapter 411

    I was able to borrow a cape


    ¡°I see. You may enter. ¡­But what brings you here at such ate hour?¡±


    ¡°Uh, I have some business that I forgot about¡­¡±


    After arriving in Ractos, I banged on the door and called for the guard.


    There was a small window to the side, where you could see the guard¡¯s head. I then showed him the crest.


    As it was dark and raining, I had to raise the sword so that the magic light would make the crest visible.


    The guard was one of the ones who had seen us before, and so he recognized me and Leo.


    Still, he checked the crest in order to confirm it.


    And then the gate was opened enough for Leo to pass through.


    ¡°You seem to be quite wet. Do you not have anything to cover yourself?¡±


    ¡°No, I didn¡¯t bring anything.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Please wait one moment.¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    For a moment I thought he had be suspicious, but that was not the case.


    The guard I was talking to rushed off to the guard house.


    ¡­Well, I was carrying the duke¡¯s crest, so there was no reason to be suspicious¡­ I wasn¡¯t a criminal or anything.


    Still, all we could do was wait for him to return.


    ¡°Please use this. ¡­Unfortunately, we do not have anything for your Leo¡­¡±


    ¡°No, thank you. It will be a great help.¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    The guard returned and handed me a coat that covered my entire body.


    It was a little toote, as I was already drenched, but it should at least keep me a little warm. And so I was thankful.


    Leo was muchrger than humans, so there was none for her. It could not be helped.


    Though, she sounded very disappointed. Did you want one so bad, Leo?


    And so I put the coat on and thanked the guard before leaving.


    While it did not cover my head, it covered everything under my neck.


    With this, and the darkness of the night, it will be difficult for people to see me.


    In other words, it was perfect for hiding.


    And since Leo was wet, she looked smaller than usual.


    It wasn¡¯t enough to hide the fact that she was a Silver Fenrir, but it was definitely a big difference.


    Once I sheathed my sword, and it was dark again, you could not even see that her fur was silver¡­ In fact, it almost looked ck.


    Leo seemed to understand this as well, and so she did not shake her body to fling off the water.


    ¡­Besides, she would just get wet again from the rain.


    ¡°And now¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    As I headed towards the slums, I took out the paper that Sebastian had given to me.


    Since I did not want it to get wet, I stood under the roof of a closed shop.


    I also dried my hands before spreading out the paper.


    Leo looked over my shoulder with a curious expression.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Since I¡¯ve been here before, perhaps that is where we should start¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    There was a detailed map depicted on it, and there were three marks on it that showed where Deam had been sighted.


    And the other paper showed you how to get to those ces.


    It included instructions on what paths to take in order toe in contact with people or ces that were connected to him.


    You could see how much Sebastian liked to exin things.


    The first ce I decided to check out was close to a ce I had been before.


    It was near the ce where we had rescued Liza when she was being bullied.


    ¡°It¡¯s possible that this Deam was watching when Liza was being attacked¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    A clearing in between buildings.


    That is where we had found Liza¡­ And the ce we were now headed was on the other side of it.


    Perhaps I was overthinking it, but it was possible that Deam or someone close to him was watching from the neighboring building.


    ¡­If that was true, then he would have seen Mr. Ekenhart¡­ But perhaps the disguise would have been enough to hide his identity.


    Regardless, I felt angry again when I thought about the idea of him spectating.


    Leo also barked angrily as she stood next to me.


    ¡­No, no. We had to stay calm.


    This was someone who had influence in the slums.


    If we got too emotional, then something unexpected might happen.


    And that was especially dangerous with Leo here.


    ¡°¡­Hah¡­hahh¡­ Alright, let¡¯s go, Leo!


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    I took in a deep breath to calm myself and continued our journey.


    First, we went to the main street that we always passed.


    As it was quitete, the usually busy street was quite empty and quiet.


    Still, there were fires burning at equal intervals on the streets, so there was a little light.


    As there were nompposts, these lights were quiteforting to have, and made it easier to travel.

 Chapter 412

    I searched the building in the slums


    While relying on the light of the fires, I went down the street and continued on east for some time. And then I made a turn to the north side of the town.


    It wasn¡¯t the same route that I went with Mr. Ekenhart, but ording to the map, this way was faster.


    I did not want to waste any time.


    As we were no longer on the main street, there were no fires lit, and it was quite dark.


    Some light leaked out of the houses, but as most people were sleeping now, it was very quiet.


    ¡°I guess we are close enough¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Now that we were just a few minutes away from the slums, I stopped.


    ¡°Leo, eat this. I¡¯ll eat some too.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I took out two different kinds of herbs.


    One was to strengthen your body, and the other was to enhance your senses.


    I only gave the senses enhancing herbs to Leo, and then I swallowed the others.


    ¡­Eating two at the same time¡­ It definitely tasted strange.


    I had not given the other one to Leo, because I didn¡¯t want her to do too much.


    We were in a town, after all.


    It could cause some trouble if Leo moved around too much. Besides, if she became stronger, it might be difficult for her to control her own strength.


    We were going to be dealing with humans¡­ And they were not as strong as trolls¡­ And so it was best for Leo to hold back.


    Once we had eaten the herbs, we made our way into the slums.


    If we ate it here, even if the searching took us some time, the effect shouldst long enough to finish.


    ¡°It really is useful to be able to sharpen your senses. I can now see quite well, even if there is hardly any light.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Well, that cannot be helped. Just ignore the sounds of people snoring.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Even though it was still raining, I could now see my surroundings quite well.


    As there was even less light than when we explored the forest, it was still quite dark. But I could at least see several meters ahead.


    My sense of hearing was also improved, which meant I could hear the sounds of people breathing inside the house.


    Leo was saying that it was too loud, but it could not be helped. We had to ignore it and move on.


    Still¡­these herbs would be useful for spies.


    Just by listening, you can tell what was happening inside of the houses.


    If people were having secret conversations, then you could eavesdrop¡­


    I would have to be careful so that it is not used in the wrong way.


    ¡°Here it is¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Thanks to the herbs, we were able to arrive at the building that was our first destination, without any trouble.


    It was an old two-story building, and the clearing where we met Liza was on the other side.


    ¡­I didn¡¯t expect to be back here.


    Leo and I looked up at the building.


    ¡°Leo. Is there anyone inside¡­?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I asked Leo, just in case.


    While I was able to sense a lot right now, Leo¡¯s senses were already sharp, and so she could detect a lot more than me.


    Leo shook her head and I looked at the building again.


    ¡°I guess there isn¡¯t then¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    I could not hear anything, and sensed no presence.


    And since Leo agreed, there was no mistake.


    Well, it was the first location, so I didn¡¯t think we would be that lucky. Still, I did feel a little disappointed.


    ¡°¡­Okay!¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Sorry, Leo. Wait here one moment. Hide in the shadows so that you don¡¯t stick out. I¡¯m going to check inside.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Wuff-wuff?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. There is no one inside, and I can run away easily if something happens.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    After thinking about it for a moment, I decided to go inside and search for a clue.


    If Deam had been here at any time, then perhaps something had been left behind.


    And if there was something that belonged to him, then Leo would be able to track his scent.


    ¡­Though, it might be difficult due to the rain. But she did eat the herbs¡­


    Regardless, I promised Leo that I would be safe, and then I headed to the door.


    ¡°I¡¯m going in then.¡±


    I checked to see that it wasn¡¯t locked, and then I opened the door.


    I was wary of traps, but none were triggered as I slid inside.


    ¡°It¡¯s very dusty¡­¡±


    It was clear that no one had been inside for quite some time.


    I felt the urge to cough and had to cover my mouth with my hand.


    Perhaps it was due to my enhanced senses¡­ Well, it could not be helped.


    The windows had been covered with boards, and so no light entered the building as I walked through it.


    Still, dust covered everything, and there were no traces of anyone having been there recently. It waspletely abandoned.


    I moved while dragging my feet, so as not to leave clear footprints, and then made my way to the second floor.


    While the first floor had two rooms, the second floor only had one room.


    ¡°So you can see the clearing from here.¡±


    There was one window that wasn¡¯t boarded up, and the ss was broken.


    And when I approached it, I saw the clearing where Liza had been attacked.


    The dust seemed thinner near the window, and there were traces of someone having been there.


    So just as I had expected, someone might have been watching us¡­

 Chapter 413

    We Were Not Able To Catch Deam


    ¡°This is not a ce to stay long term, but a ce to monitor?¡±


    There had been no traces of anyone here in the hallway. It was just around the window where the dust had been disturbed.


    Some of the rain was evening in through the window.


    It was not the kind of ce to sleep.


    ¡°Is there any other clue¡­?¡±


    If Deam had left something here¡­ I thought as I searched. But everything there was covered in dust. Even if they belonged to him, I doubted there was any scent.


    Especially since none were clothes or utensils.


    ¡°So there is nothing¡­ Well, I better go then.¡±


    I decided that there was nothing useful, and so I left.


    Deam must be very careful, and so I didn¡¯t expect to find him quickly¡­


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting, Leo. But I didn¡¯t find anything¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Yes. No point in being disappointed. Let¡¯s keep going.¡±


    I exited the building and told Leo that I didn¡¯t find anything.


    Then I checked the map again.


    I decided to go to the closest location to us.


    Thanks to the herb strengthening herbs, I could read the map even without a light.


    ¡°So, I guess it will be this building¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    The second building was a ten minute walk from where we were currently.


    On the outside, it looked simr to other buildings. It looked very abandoned and empty.


    I asked Leo as well, and she did not sense anyone.


    This one is a miss as well¡­?


    In any case, I had Leo hide herself again just in case, and I went inside.


    As expected, the door wasn¡¯t locked and opened smoothly.


    But I kept one hand on my sword as I turned the door knob.


    I doubted that there were traps in any of these buildings, but I had to be careful, because I didn¡¯t know what this Deam was capable of.


    Well, if there was a trap, I probably wouldn¡¯t be able to do anything about it¡­


    There was nothing in the building that caught my interest.


    In fact, there was even more dust than in the first ce.


    I doubted anyone had been here for over a month.


    Here, all of the windows were boarded up and there was no ce that allowed you to look outside.


    So even if Deam had been here before, it must have been a long time ago.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m back, Leo. There was nothing here either.¡±


    After I finished in the building, I came out and reported to Leo.


    I didn¡¯t expect quick results, but it was a little discouraging, nheless.


    Such investigations took a lot of time, and you couldn¡¯t be bothered by such things. But I wasn¡¯t used to it.


    In any case, I would switch gears and go to thest ce that Sebastian told me.


    ¡­Hopefully, there will be something there¡­ Or Deam himself.


    The final destination was quite far from the other ces.


    When I looked at the map, I saw that it was near the northeast corner of Ractos.


    And so we walked for some time until we reached it.


    We walked quite quickly.


    I didn¡¯t want to seem frantic, but this was my first time, and so I wanted to find something.


    Part of it was also that I would be seen by some of the residents here.


    As it was the slums, even though it was raining, I saw a few people on the streets.


    It was theplete opposite of the main street.


    The people that I passed seemed like they didn¡¯t care about getting wet, though they looked at Leo and me with suspicion.


    While I didn¡¯t want to be seen, I did not know how to move while staying concealed, so it could not be helped.


    In any case, I took in a deep breath and looked up at the building.


    ¡°¡­This one too¡­¡±


    The building looked just like the other ones.


    With my enhanced hearing, I tried listening to what was happening inside. But there was nothing to suggest there was anyone there.


    Leo felt the same, and let out a small sigh.


    ¡°Well, I still have to search through it¡­ Sorry, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I said to Leo, and then I had her hide like before.


    All of the alleys were quite narrow, but there was usually a spot where she could fit in perfectly.


    They were too small for her to walk though, but were fine if she just needed to hide for a while.


    Once I saw that she was hidden, I entered the building.


    ¡­I hope there is something this time¡­


    ¡°This ce has less dust?¡±


    There was hardly any furniture in the building, and there were no signs of someone having lived there.


    However, there was also less dust.


    What dust I could see was all in the corner¡­so clearly the ce wasn¡¯t cleaned carefully.


    And so I felt a little more hopeful as I searched the inside of the building.


    Even if there was less dust, I still dragged my feet as I walked.


    This was because my wet feet could create footprints.


    While I was being careful, I was an amateur, so perhaps it was pointless effort. Regardless, I wouldn¡¯t think about that now.

 Chapter 414

    I found something that could be a clue


    ¡°¡­There is nothing here¡­ I¡¯ll go upstairs then.¡±


    The first floor had nothing, just like the others.


    Even if there was less dust, there were no signs of someone having lived here.


    If only there were traces of dining, like utensils¡­


    I thought as I walked over the creaking floor and made my way to the second floor.


    ¡°There are no windows¡­ I guess there¡¯s nothing after¡­ Hmm?¡±


    I scanned the second floor and saw that the windows were all boarded up so you could not see outside.


    And just as I was about to give up, a dusty shelf caught my eye.


    There was dust around the shelf, and there were no traces of it having been used. But then the floor to the left of it looked strange.


    And when I looked closer, I saw that it looked like it had been wiped.


    ¡°Was someone here¡­? But it doesn¡¯t look like someone has sat orid down here¡­ Hmm?¡±


    I rubbed my eyes and looked at the floor more closely, and realized that there was a gap between the shelf and the wall behind it.


    It was just a few centimeters, but it was strange that there should be such a gap.


    Maybe there was something to it¡­ And so I put my fingers inside, and I felt something soft.


    Hoping that it was a clue, I pulled it out with my fingers.


    ¡°This¡­is it a nket¡­?¡±


    It was a crudely cut piece of cloth.


    And when I spread it open, I saw that it was big enough for one person.


    It would be easy enough to reach from the position on the floor where there was no dust.


    Perhaps someone had been using the cloth to sit or rest on.


    In any case, if this was being slept on¡­ And if it was Deam, then perhaps his scent was still on it.


    Apparently, he was constantly changing locations, so perhaps he hid bedding like this so that they could be used.


    ¡°¡­Sniff¡­ Hmm. I really can¡¯t tell.¡±


    Even though I had taken the sense enhancing herbs, I was still a human.


    And so it would not be possible for me to track him like this.


    All I smelled was sweat and dust¡­ But it was clear that someone had been using it.


    And if it was Deam¡­ But then again, it was still raining.


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Leo. Sorry to keep you waiting. Here¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Leo saw me leave the building, and she came out of her hiding ce and approached me.


    And so I gestured for her toe to the door.


    I wanted Leo to smell the cloth, but I didn¡¯t want it to get wet.


    ¡°Leo. This might be able to help us. Could you smell it? I know it¡¯s not very pleasant.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff¡­ Sniff-sniff¡­ Wuffu.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I know¡­¡±


    Leo immediately barked with disgust.


    So Leo didn¡¯t like the smell either.


    I chuckled and then asked her,


    ¡°It might be difficult in this rain¡­but could you try and follow this scent?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­sniff-sniff. Achoo! Gr¡­ Sniff-sniff¡­ Wuff!¡±


    Leo nodded reluctantly and then smelled the cloth again.


    Then she started to sniff the air and then nodded again.


    ¡°Can you smell something!?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    Apparently, Leo would be able to track the person who had used this nket. That was very impressive.


    ¡°Alright, take me there¡­ Uh, do you still need this?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    And so we stepped out into the rain and started to walk through the slums again.


    As Leo said she didn¡¯t need the cloth anymore, I threw it back into the building before leaving.


    I wondered if the smell wouldn¡¯t wash away in the rain¡­


    However, perhaps Leo¡¯s sense of smell was just that sharp¡­ Or it was the herbs.


    Or maybe Deam was actually close by?


    That would exin why she could smell him even though it was raining.


    Of course, it was possible that it wasn¡¯t even Deam¡­


    In any case, Silver Fenrirs sure were impressive.


    Even a trained dog would not be able to do this, I think?


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Hmm?¡±


    After following Leo for some time, she suddenly stopped and then barked as if to urge me ahead.


    I stopped as well and looked at the road in front of us. However, I could not see anything unusual.


    Though, I did sense the presence of people in the building ahead.


    The sounds¡­ It was too far, and I could not hear, because of the rain.


    ¡°You can smell the same scent where the people are gathered?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Leo nodded.


    So it wasn¡¯t inside of the building¡­ However, why would they be outside when it was raining like this¡­


    Still, I trusted Leo and slowly walked in the direction that Leo indicated.


    Towards the other side of the building, I went around and moved carefully so that they wouldn¡¯t notice.

 Chapter 415

    The men were gathered in the clearing


    We moved through the buildings, as the gaps were wide enough to pass through, and stopped just beforeing out into the clearing.


    Up ahead, there was an open space where several buildings had once been.


    It was bigger than the ce where we had found Liza, but there were a few wooden pirs left, which suggested it hadn¡¯t been that long since the buildings were town down.


    And in the far back, towards the outer wall of Ractos, several men had gathered.


    What were they doing at the edge of town?


    All of them were standing while facing the wall¡­ And it didn¡¯t look like they were resting.


    ¡°Leo. Behind me¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    I whispered so that Leo could hear me, and had her move back a little.


    I then crouched in the shadows between the buildings and tried to avoid being seen.


    It was still raining, and since it was night, I should be hidden.


    ¡°Surely you all understand?¡±


    The man who stood in the center raised his voice.


    It was like he was talking to the wall, which was strange.


    ¡°Hmm¡­is that¡­¡±


    When I squinted, I saw a few people between the men standing in front of the wall.


    They were facing me, and not the wall. It was like they were sandwiched between the wall and the men.


    Were they surrounded?


    And as I looked, I saw that the people being surrounded looked familiar.


    Well, two of them did, anyway.


    But even with enhanced senses, I could not see them clearly¡­ But I thought they looked like the boys who had been bullying Liza.


    Though, I could be wrong¡­ But they were a simr height to Mark.


    Still, why were they surrounded now¡­?


    I scanned the surrounding area while perking up my ears for more information.


    ¡°It¡¯s your fault that it escaped! Eh? Not only that but Mark was also captured¡­ It¡¯s your fault. You should have stayed here quietly!¡±


    ¡°¡­I¡¯m sorry.¡±


    There were five men surrounding the boys.


    And they were threatening them while holding knives.


    I couldn¡¯t see clearly, but there seemed to be about four boys¡­


    As they knew Mark, they must be rted to him.


    ¡°Ah!? Being sorry is not going to solve the problem! Mark was arrested. And he might have talked about me!¡±


    ¡°¡­Mark wouldn¡¯t betray us¡­I think.¡±


    ¡°You don¡¯t know! Do you know who he antagonized, eh!?¡±


    ¡°¡­I don¡¯t know.¡±


    ¡°The duke. Damn it. And that beast was rescued by them¡­ Do you realize what this mean!! When threatened with execution, he will definitely talk!¡±


    ¡°¡­The¡­duke¡­¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s toote for regrets!¡±


    ¡°Gah!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!?¡±


    ¡°Wait, Leo!¡±


    The leader of the group continued to shout at the boy.


    Judging by what he was saying, he was either Deam or someone closely rted to him.


    He knew about Liza and the duke¡¯s house.


    Once the boys heard about the duke, they began to shake in fear.


    Upon seeing this, the man started to kick one of the boys.


    His foot mmed into the boy¡¯s stomach, causing him to cry out. Leo almost jumped out then, but I stopped her.


    It was a good thing that it was raining¡­otherwise, they might have noticed us.


    ¡°¡­Kuun.¡±


    ¡°While I feel bad for him, wait a little longer¡­ I want to find out what is happening. ¡­Of course, I will go out if he tries to use that knife.¡±


    ¡°¡­Wuff.¡±


    Leo barked as if to ask me why I didn¡¯t help them, but I gritted my teeth and told her to be patient.


    To be honest, I was sure now that they were the ones who had attacked Liza. And I did feel a little conflicted about that.


    However, I also felt bad for them now that they were surrounded by these men.


    Leo was the same. I suppose it was because she liked children.


    But if we were going to jump out, I wanted for it to be after we had assessed the situation a little more.


    I was almost sure that this leader was Deam, but I wanted to be a certain.


    If I was wrong, and Deam was somewhere else¡­that could be very bad.


    Leo nodded reluctantly, and I turned my focus back to the men.


    The men surrounding the boys were all muscr.


    And the leader was bigger than the others.


    They had shaved heads and were barechested in spite of the rain. And there seemed to be something written on their backs. Well, I couldn¡¯t see it clearly, but there were ck lines.


    ¡°What if they find out where I live¡­ Eh!? I¡¯ll kill you!¡±


    ¡°Bu-but¡­we only did what you said, Mr. Deam¡­¡±


    ¡°Aye, I said it. However, I didn¡¯t tell you to throw rocks in a crowd! Did I!¡±


    ¡°Mr. Deam only said to torment the beastkin child!¡±


    ¡°He said to chase after her and not let her escape. But he also said that we should avoid being seen¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes! And yet, what happened? Not only did you let it escape, but you antagonized the duke as well! You bloody fools! And right after we were rid of that annoying old man, Reyndolf! Now that the duke has been alerted, things will be difficult again!¡±

 Chapter 416

    I ran in with Leo


    So it was just as Mark had said. Deam was the one who had ordered them to torment Liza.


    The men continued to talk, not knowing that Leo and I were listening to them.


    Hearing them filled me with anger¡­ But it was too soon¡­ I had to wait a little longer¡­


    While most of the men were focused on the boys, one of them seemed to be watching his surroundings.


    They were in the slums.


    And so even if it was nighttime, there were more people moving around activelypared to other parts of town.


    On top of that, since they were shouting, it was possible that people were watching them from their houses.


    And while such people might not bepletely unrted, they probably weren¡¯t on Deam¡¯s side.


    Perhaps these men wanted the residents here to watch, and so they could rule them through fear.


    It wasn¡¯t unusual for people to stand above others through power in such ces.


    In any case, if I was going to confront these men, I wanted to do it at a moment when their guard was down.


    Well, Leo could probably do it easily, but I wanted to be safe¡­


    Of course, if they used their knives or tried to actually kill the boys, then I would jump out and intervene.


    ¡°Indeed¡­ We¡¯ll start with you¡­ We¡¯ll make a show of killing you. This is the slums. No one will miss you anwaay. Of course, I¡¯ll kill you all in the end.¡±


    ¡°Ahh!¡±


    ¡°Mr. Deam. Are you sure about this?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. They are useless to me now. It was good to use children to attack other children. But there is no point now. In that case¡­there is only one things to do.¡±


    The leader said as he shed his knife.


    The other man had called him Deam, so there was no mistaking it now.


    As for the boys, they were now huddled together and shaking.


    ¡°Hey!¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    Deam shouted at the man who was watching the area, who then picked up a sword that was hidden between two buildings, and then he handed it to Deam.


    It was a lot bigger than the sword that I usually used.


    I suppose it was called a longsword.


    Deam then faced the boys and raised the sword into the air¡­


    This was bad!


    ¡°Go!¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    The boys were defenseless, and so there was no way that that they would survive if they were hit by such a weapon.


    As all of them were now focused on the boys, I quickly called out to Leo.


    She had also been prepared to jump out at any time, and so Leo answered me and rushed towards the men.


    It was a good thing that we had practiced with orders for when we go to the forest.


    ¡°Gah!¡±


    ¡°Wh-what¡­gah!¡±


    ¡°Ahhh! Argh!¡±


    First, Leo swiped at Deam, who had raised his sword.


    Deam was easily knocked off of his feet, and went flying into one of the buildings.


    And without losing momentum, Leo turned and attacked the other men who had their backs turned.


    ¡­I couldn¡¯t fall behind either.


    And so I unsheathed my sword and ran towards the men¡­ But by then, everything was finished.


    The men were thrown into the air before they even got to see Leo. And just like that, they were thrown against the wall and were unconscious.


    Uh, so I don¡¯t need to do anything¡­?


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Ah, yes. You did well, Leo.¡±


    After defeating the men, Leo turned to me with a proud expression.


    Since they were humans, she did not use her fangs or ws, so that she didn¡¯t kill them. And so I petted her wet head and praised her.


    Ah, but they were injured¡­maybe her ws got caught on them.


    And their bones could be broken from the impact as well. Not that I felt bad for them.


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°Uh, are you alright?¡±


    As for the boys, they were stunned by our sudden appearance, and their mouths hung open silently.


    Well, it was no wonder. They thought that Deam was going to kill them. And then we suddenly appeared.


    ¡­Well, I hadn¡¯t done anything.


    If it was going to be so easy, then I shouldn¡¯t have even worried about the man who was guarding¡­


    ¡°Are you hurt? Ah, he kicked you¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    Even when I tried talking to them, they could only nod like they were broken dolls.


    They must be in quite a shock¡­and would be for some time.


    In any case, they didn¡¯t seem to be badly injured, so it was fine.


    Though, their clothes were torn and they had scratched as if they had been dragged.


    ¡°Grrr¡­¡±


    ¡°Leo? Hmm?¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ What the¡­¡±


    As I was looking at the children, Leo suddenly started growling in a different direction.


    And when I turend to look, I saw that Deam was holding his head and trying to get back to his feet.


    I suppose he was tougher than the others.


    ¡°Damn it¡­ Who the¡­!?¡±


    ¡°Grrr¡­¡±


    ¡°Wait, Leo. I will handle this.¡±


    ¡°¡­Wuff.¡±


    He shook his head and muttered as he stood up.


    And while still holding his sword, he turned to look at us. His eyes widened when he saw Leo.


    Leo growled and was about to jump out, but I told her to wait.


    I couldn¡¯t let her do everything¡­ Or there would be no point in me being here.


    That being said, it did feel like I was stealing the glory from Leo by taking down Deam after he was weakened¡­


    But I wouldn¡¯t think about that right now.


    ¡°¡­Who are you? And that¡­monster? Did you set it on me?¡±


    ¡°¡­Aye, that¡¯s right. I havee here to put an end to your crimes here.¡±


    Deam looked at us with suspicion.


    And while he was unstable on his feet at first, he regained his bnce soon enough.


    He had mostly recovered from the damage then.


    Maybe I should have let Leo deal with him after all¡­

 Chapter 417

    I fought with Deam


    ¡°Catch me¡­? Who¡­are you?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t need to introduce myself to you.¡±


    I said, feeling like a hero who hade in to save the day.


    I had always wanted to do this.


    ¡°Tsk¡­ Do you know what will happen if you defy me?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I do. You¡¯re some scoundrel called Deam, aren¡¯t you? Smallfry that can only bully beastkin.¡±


    I knew that I was getting carried away a little as I observed Deam.


    He had a longsword and was ready to attack.


    Now that I had told Leo that I would deal with him, it would look pretty bad if I let my guard down and lost.


    ¡°Smallfry!? You won¡¯t get away with this¡­ You will regret your words!¡±


    ¡°Well, all you¡¯ve been doing is surrounding boys and bullying a beastkin girl¡­ That¡¯s what smallfry does, no? You won¡¯t be making anyone feel regret, I think.¡±


    ¡°You bastard! I¡¯ll kill you!¡±


    As I purposely provoked Deam, the blood rushed to his head, and he came dashing towards me.


    Previously, Mr. Ekenhart had told me¡­that one must never lose their cool during a fight.


    And while there was a part of me that was angry for Liza, I did manage to remain calm.


    Otherwise, Leo would have likely jumped out ahead of me.


    He had also told me that it was good to try to anger an enemy in order to make them lose their calm.


    Once they were angry, they would always move in a straightforward way, and it would be easier to deal with them¡­ However, I might have made a mistake.


    Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s strategy was effective when used by someone who was skilled, but I was still¡­


    Deam was very muscr, and clearly stronger than me. And he moved towards me at a speed that was faster than expected.


    In my heart, I grumbled towards myself for getting carried away, and then I raised my sword and faced him.


    ¡°Hmm. I guess you were all talk then?¡±


    ¡°I could say¡­the same about you!¡±


    ¡°Tsk!¡±


    As he rushed towards me, Deam raised his sword with both hands and mmed down with all of his might.


    I held my sword horizontally with both hands and somehow managed to block it.


    Deam continued to press down, but I managed to push upwards and sweep the sword to the side.


    Deam frowned as he was pushed back. And then he stumbled a few steps back.


    ¡­Apparently, he really had been hurt after being hit by Leo, and his legs were still weak.


    Perhaps even his arms were weakenedpared to how they usually were.


    ¡°You blocked my sword¡­ In spite of your strange appearance, you are not half bad¡­ And now I will kill you!¡±


    He spat as he raised his sword again.


    ¡­Why was he so angry¡­ Well, because I had provoked him¡­


    He likely just had a short temper.


    Also, he was the one who was bare chested with lines on his body while out in the rain. He should not be able to criticize my appearance.


    I was just wearing a coat.


    ¡°Die!¡±


    ¡°Not today!¡±


    Once again, I blocked his de with my sword.


    But he did not have the same momentum from running, and so his attack was weaker.


    However, my hands had also grown a little numb from the impact of the first attack.


    And though I tried to hold my sword up, Deam pushed with his body weight.


    And so I shouted and pushed back, not wanting to lose.


    But even with both hands, I could not push him all the way back like before.


    ¡°Gah¡­.aaaa!¡±


    ¡°Tsk¡­¡±


    Deam shouted and pushed harder.


    If this continued, my arms would give in and I would be cut!


    I could heal mild wounds with some Loe, and Leo could handle the rest.


    However¡­I wanted to do something about this person who had targeted Liza!


    What should I do¡­


    My feet were nted too firmly into the ground to move them or try to kick.


    In any case¡­perhaps I should just ask Leo for help?


    No, Leo had already done enough.


    I didn¡¯t want to ask for help after saying I would do it¡­


    What to do then¡­


    Just then, I noticed something on the right side of my waist. That¡¯s right!


    ¡°Gah¡­Gaaahhh!¡±


    ¡°Oh? Just a little more and you will be cut!¡±


    I used all of my power to stop Deam.


    He seemed to detect that I was nearing my limits.


    I just needed a brief opening!


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°!?¡±


    Just when I thought that, Leo barked.


    Deam must have thought he was going to be attacked, as he looked towards Leo for a moment.


    Now!


    ¡°Gaaah!! Hah!¡±


    ¡°What¡­ Ah!¡±


    I let go with my left hand and shouted while continuing to block his sword with my right hand.


    Thanks to the momentary distraction, I was able to hold him back for a few seconds.


    And then I reached down to my belt with my left hand.


    I gripped the thing and unsheathed it swiftly!


    It was the katana.


    And then I shed horizontally with it.


    As the de was curved, it was good for shing, and not cutting down.


    And so that was how I used it against Deam.

 Chapter 418

    Leo was the deciding factor


    It wasn¡¯t like I could easily cut him in half. All I did was sh his stomach a little.


    The pain and impact then caused Deam to take a few steps back.


    That was when it happened.


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Gah¡­¡±


    Leo moved behind me, barked, and then swiped at Deam¡¯s head with her front paws.


    Deam was not able to stand against her weight, and he was pushed to the ground and crushed.


    ¡­And though he was still conscious, he could not move.


    He had also let go of his sword.


    ¡°¡­Leo¡­thank you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    As Leo¡¯s paws were enough to cover his face, shoulders and chest, all Deam could do was move his legs wildly.


    I could see the wound on his stomach as well¡­ And while it was bleeding, it was not very deep.


    If Leo had not intervened, he probably would have attacked me again¡­ Both of my hands were numb, so that would have been dangerous.


    I suppose I could have cut him deeper, and it would still just be self defense. But I was d that I hadn¡¯t had to kill anyone.


    It wasn¡¯t that I was clinging onto my old values. But if I could deal with things without killing, then that was preferable.


    Besides, I am sure that Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian would want to question him.


    It was a good thing that I had brought my katana with me¡­.


    The reason that I was able to unsheath it with my left hand, was because I had hung it on my right side.


    I wasn¡¯t used to dual-wielding, but since I had brought it with me, I had put it on my right side so it wouldn¡¯t get in the way.


    Thanks to that, I was able to unsheath it. If I had let go with my right hand instead, I would not have been able to do it.


    It wasn¡¯t like I had been expecting this to happen¡­so you really never knew how something woulde in handy.


    ¡°Leo. Hold him there for a little longer.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Grr¡­¡±


    I told Leo to hold Deam down as I sheath my weapons.


    While Deam was writhing around in pain, Leo wasn¡¯t pressing down with her full weight, so there was no chance of him dying.


    Though, it would still be painful.


    ¡°Phew¡­ I¡¯ll have to train more¡­¡±


    I sighed with relief.


    While the fight had ended quickly, I had grown hot, and so the rain feltfortable on my body.


    ¡°Now¡­ Uh, I don¡¯t know your names, but will you help me?¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    After I had calmed down, I turned to the boys.


    They were clearly confused, and seemed to not understand what I was saying.


    Leo had attacked suddenly, and then a battle had been fought in front of them. Perhaps they didn¡¯t realize that they were saved.


    It could not be helped.


    ¡°Uh, you aren¡¯t hurt are you? I suppose he did kick you, but you can still move? In any case, help me catch these men. I cannot do it all on my own.¡±


    ¡°Um¡­but¡­¡±


    Aside from Deam, there were four other men.


    While Leo could handle Deam, I didn¡¯t know when the other men might wake up.


    And so I wanted to capture them while they were still unconscious.


    The boys finally regained some of their calm, and understood what I was saying. However, they still hesitated.


    Well, this was Deam. So I suppose they would not be able to act so quickly.


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°!¡±


    ¡°Oh?¡±


    Leo barked while still holding Deam down, and then the boys straightened their backs and started to move.


    Were they scared of Leo?


    But she had saved them¡­ I couldn¡¯t help but think that, but they had seen her make quick work of the men, so it was no surprise.


    Regardless, I was happy that they were cooperative now.


    ¡°Here¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, thank you.¡±


    One of the boys brought me some old rope.


    It was just what I needed to tie them up.


    I thanked him and then they helped me tie up the unconscious men.


    As they were limp on the ground, we struggled a little when moving them, so it was a good thing that I was not alone.


    Once all four men were bound, we rolled them over to the spot where the boys had been standing earlier.


    They were directly under the rain, but I didn¡¯t care, since they were Deam¡¯s men.


    At worst, they might just catch a cold.


    ¡°¡­What will happen to us¡­?¡±


    ¡°You don¡¯t have to be so scared. I¡¯m no one important. Hmm¡­as for you¡­¡±


    Once the work was done, the boys lined up in front of me and looked quite timid.


    But one of them¡­who was indeed in the group that had attacked Liza, questioned me.


    Well, he was looking at Leo.


    Indeed, what should we do with them¡­ I had not considered that.

 Chapter 419

    I talked with the boys


    What to do with them now¡­


    I had onlye here to capture Deam¡­ I had not expected to find these boys as they were about to be killed.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Well, I suppose you should go to the guards, along with these men¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Are we going to be arrested?¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s what happens when youmit a crime.¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    The boys suddenly shuddered.


    While they didn¡¯t want to be arrested, they knew that they could not outrun me or Leo.


    Besides, who knew how they would be treated by the others in the slums¡­


    After all, there were surely people watching us now.


    Mr. Ekenhart intended to act and make some changes here, but it would take some time.


    And so the boys might be in danger in the meantime.


    Though these boys may not have been in the same position as Liza, from what she told me, life in the slums was desperate, and so they would have been forced to do things they didn¡¯t want to.


    Steal, because they could not buy food¡­ Such things were easy to imagine.


    Obviously, thew had to be obeyed regardless, but¡­ I could not me them too much, as they were still children.


    What to do¡­


    ¡°In any case, I highly doubt you will be punished like these men will. Though, it depends on what you have done up until now.¡±


    ¡°Gah! Grr¡­!¡±


    Deam must not have liked what I was saying, as he was growling angrily under Leo¡¯s paw. But since I could not understand him, I just ignored it.


    As for the boys, aside from bullying Liza, they had probably done things like stealing and picking pockets.


    So it wasn¡¯t like they would be executed or tortured.


    I would try and talk to the guards and Mr. Ekenhart on their behalf. But in the end, it wasn¡¯t my decision.


    Oh, but¡­


    ¡°Um, you¡­ And you.¡±


    ¡°Me?¡±


    ¡°Ah!¡±


    I pointed to two of the boys, and they looked at me with surprise.


    The other shuddered in fear.


    ¡­Did I really look so scary?


    ¡°You two¡­ You tormented the beastkin girl, yes?¡±


    ¡°You know? But that was¡­¡±


    ¡°Aye. I know that Deam told you to do it. And why he did. However¡­I am currently her protector. And would like for you to apologize to her.¡±


    ¡°Apologize¡­ But that is a monster¡­¡±


    ¡°Deam was lying to you. Beastkin are really not much different from humans. They even have their own country.¡±


    ¡°¡­We don¡¯t know about that. We¡¯ve never even left this town.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ I see.¡±


    I didn¡¯t know if an apology would be anyfort to Liza, but it would help to prove to her that she would not be hurt like that again.


    However, the boys still saw beastkin as monsters.


    I didn¡¯t know if it was just Deam who taught them that, or someone else. But I exined to them that it was wrong.


    As they had no experience outside of this town, they believed Deam easily. I suppose that Liza¡¯s tail and ears also helped persuade them that she was different.


    It showed how important it was to have a proper education.


    ¡°In any case, you must apologize to the beastkin girl. And turn yourselves in to the guards¡­ I¡¯m sure it will not be too bad, as long as you repent.¡±


    ¡°¡­Fine.¡±


    First, they had to be taught that what Deam said about beastkin being monsters that must be driven out of town was wrong.


    The guards could talk to them, but¡­ Perhaps Sebastian would be more persuasive.


    The boys still looked doubtful, but nodded in agreement.


    ¡°Alright, now let¡¯s tie up Deam.¡±


    ¡°Gah! Grr! Gah!¡±


    Lastly, I took the leftover rope and headed towards Deam.


    The boys hesitated, as he had been their boss up until a moment ago. However, since he tried to kill them, they did not seem too sorry to help.


    I didn¡¯t know how he had treated them in the past, but he was clearly not someone of great virtue.


    As Deam was pressed down by Leo, I started by tying up his legs.


    Now he would not be able to run away.


    ¡°You can take your foot off his shoulder now.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Deam began to swing his arms wildly the moment that Leo removed her paw. But it wasn¡¯t enough to be free of Leo¡¯s other paw, which was holding his face down.


    And as he could not breathe well, he became quiet soon enough.

 Chapter 420

    Deam said we were ying at being a family


    ¡°Tie his hands and¡­ It would be better if we could tie his hands behind his back¡­but this will have to do.¡±


    I put Deam¡¯s hands in front of his wounded stomach, and bound them.


    While I was tying him, I checked the wounds and confirmed that it wasn¡¯t too deep.


    He was bleeding, but he wouldn¡¯t die, even if it was left alone.


    Though I was sure that the guards would take care of him, since they would want to question him extensively.


    Now that his arms and legs were tied, Deam could not move at all.


    Understanding this, he finally became quiet¡­ Or maybe it was just because Leo was pressing down on his face¡­


    ¡°Just in case¡­¡±


    In such cases, if you let your guard down, then the prisoner could escape from their bindings and run away¡­


    As this was someone who lived in the underworld, he might know how to deal with ropes.


    I could not do such a thing. I didn¡¯t know how. So I had to be careful.


    ¡°Is there any extra rope?¡±


    ¡°There is more over there. They used it to carry things.¡±


    ¡°Can you bring me some?¡±


    ¡°Okay.¡±


    At this point, the boys obediently did whatever I told them to.


    I suppose it was because they saw the state that Deam was in.


    In any case, they brought me some extra rope, which I used to tie Deam up even more.


    Twice. Thrice. So that it wasn¡¯t just his ankles, but his knees and thighs as well.


    And then the biceps of his arms. Then the boys helped me wrap the rope around his body several times.


    Like this, Deam waspletely rolled up in rope.


    He looked like a caterpir. There was no worry about him getting away now.


    ¡°Good. You can let go of him now.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Tsk! Hah! Hah!¡±


    Deam could finally breathe freely now, and so he took a deep breath.


    ¡­Had it really been that bad?


    Leo¡¯s palms were so soft¡­ But they were big.


    ¡°Now, we just have to turn them in¡­ But how should we carry them¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    It would be easy enough if it was just Deam, but there were five men.


    And even if the boys helped, it would take several trips.


    As I wondered what to do, Leo turned her back to me as if to say, ¡®Should I carry them?¡¯


    That might work¡­but I couldn¡¯t help but hesitate at the idea.


    I kind of thought of riding Leo as an honor¡­reserved for good people.


    ¡°Hah¡­hah¡­ Who are you, you bastard!? Do you have any idea what you have done? I have men in other towns. Other slums. They will kill you.¡±


    ¡°Aye, I know. You do not need to tell me.¡±


    ¡°What¡­!?¡±


    Once Deam caught his breath, he started to shout at me.


    While he was threatening me¡­it was nothing that I didn¡¯t already know.


    Though, he did look like some insignificant thug¡­ And he was constantly moving around like he was scared¡­ Even Mr. Ekenhart had called him a smallfry.


    In any case, with Deam gone, things should be much more easier for Mr. Ekenhart and the people here.


    Of course, there will also be some chaos for a while as well.


    Up until now, nothing had been done because arresting Deam might make matters worse, and cause more conflict.


    ¡°You¡­ I heard you talking about the beastkin child. What are you to it!¡±


    ¡°Her father!¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    When asked that question¡­there was no other answer.


    Perhaps I was getting carried away, but it should be fine, as long as I wasn¡¯t saying any names.


    Leo even barked next to me.


    As if she was saying, ¡®And I¡¯m her mama!¡±


    ¡°What¡­? But it was abandoned. It had no one after Reyndorf died! Besides, you¡¯re just a human!¡±


    Deam shouted back.


    Indeed, we were not connected by blood. We were not even the same race.


    But that didn¡¯t change the fact that Liza called me and Leo her papa and mama.


    ¡°Yes, I am a human. What about it? Humans can raise a beastkin. And there is no reason that humans should persecute them.¡±


    ¡°Tsk. You may y at being a family¡­but they are beneath humans. Perhaps you just enjoy feeling superior? You think that you are so magnanimous for saving it¡­¡±


    ¡°ying? Superior?¡±


    Indeed, there might be people who enjoy feeling superior by helping those who are weak¡­ But I didn¡¯t think of myself like that.


    Though, aside from not being connected by blood, Leo was her mama.


    So it was not too surprising that some would say we were ying¡­

 Chapter 421

    I shouted what I thought


    ¡°I don¡¯t feel superior at all. And I won¡¯t allow myself to. Besides¡­¡±


    I red at Deam and paused.


    He flinched a little, but maybe it was because of Leo, who was next to me.


    ¡­I didn¡¯t re at people often, and it probably had little impact.


    Regardless, I took in a deep breath and spoke to him sharply.


    ¡°It does not matter if we¡¯re not a real family! Yes, we are not the same race! But we are still her parents! It doesn¡¯t matter if there is no blood connection! You can call it what you want. She has epted us as substitutes for her parents, and we treat her like a daughter. As long as you believe and care about each other, then it is enough! Appearances and opinions of others don¡¯t matter! Hahh¡­hah¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    I was a little out of breath after shouting. Leo pushed her cheek against mine and barked.


    I think she was telling me to calm down.


    But she was also happy that I had included her.


    I really was grateful for Leo.


    Though, I wished she wouldn¡¯t wag her tail so strongly.


    I think it was hitting the boys, and it probably hurt.


    ¡°¡­¡±


    Deam was a little stunned, and became quiet.


    Perhaps he now understood that nothing he said mattered?


    Well, there was no way that someone who had tormented Liza could change my opinion. But I was d that he was quiet now.


    As for the boys¡­they looked pale¡­ But perhaps they thought that my anger would turn towards them now, for what they had done to Lizza.


    But I wouldn¡¯t do anything, as long as they were sorry¡­


    ¡°Over here. I heard the shouting from over here!¡±


    ¡°¡­Hmm?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    From far away, I could hear voices and footsteps.


    It wasn¡¯t one person¡­there were several.


    Thanks to the sense enhancing herbs, I could hear them through the rain.


    Of course, the boys and Deam could not hear them. And so it was only Leo and me who turned to look in their direction.


    ¡°Are they your friends¡­?¡±


    ¡°Eh?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    I wondered if they were rted to Deam, but he just red at me and did not answer.


    He did not seem like he thought he would be rescued any time soon¡­


    Unless he was just a good actor, but I doubted it.


    Just then, Leo said something interesting.


    She said that she could hear the sounds of scraping metal as well.


    Since they seemed to be running towards us¡­perhaps it was the sound of armor.


    In that case¡­


    ¡°The guards?¡±


    ¡°!¡±


    At the mention of guards, the boys and Deam all shuddered.


    ¡°Wuff¡­? Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°I see. But why here¡­?¡±


    ording to Leo, she sensed that one of them was the guard who we had met at the gate.


    But we hadn¡¯t told him where we were going, so it seemed odd that he was here.


    Perhaps someone who had witnessed what had happened then went to call the guards.


    While Leo was wet and looked a lot smaller, she still had the body of a giant wolf.


    And so when they saw Leo attacking the men, they might have thought that she was a monster who had invaded the town.


    ¡°¡­Well¡­I guess we won¡¯t have to carry them now?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    As they were already captured, we just needed to hand them over here, and then our job would be finished.


    And so we waited for them to arrive.


    ¡°Hey, what are you doing here!¡±


    ¡°They really are guards. Uhh¡­ I saw these men attacking these children, and so I came to help.¡±


    The familiar guard came running towards us.


    I could see him clearly thanks to the herbs, but even with a magic torch, he could not see us well.


    And so I quickly exined to them what had happened.


    ¡°These men¡­? Ah, the ones tied up over there¡­ And who are you? You look suspicious.¡±


    ¡°Wait, wait. I¡¯m not like that at all.¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    Apparently, the guards didn¡¯t trust me.


    And now the boys were looking at me silently, as if to deny my im.


    Well, maybe I did look suspicious.


    ¡°I see that you have a big monster with you¡­ Come over here!¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ Fine¡­ Let¡¯s go.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    And so we headed to the corner of the clearing.


    I suppose we would be questioned¡­


    ¡­but I had met this guard many times already. Was it so dark that he still didn¡¯t recognize us?


    And so I walked over to the guard, who then turned his back and told us to follow him into a narrow alley that Leo could barely fit in. And then he turned to face us.

 Chapter 422

    The guard interrogated me


    ¡°Excuse me, Mr. Takumi. I was told to not call you by name right there. And so I had to talk to you here.¡±


    ¡°Ah, so you knew¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course. We have met several times already. And your Leo¡­ She looks a little different, but I recognize her.¡±


    So the guard did recognize us after all, even though Leo was soaking wet.


    Apparently, they had been instructed to not say our names in front of Deam¡­


    We did not want him to know that the duke was involved in this.


    Even though I had said that I had rescued Liza, it wasn¡¯t widely known that she was at the duke¡¯s house¡­I think.


    ¡°After you arrived in town, we received orders from Mr. Sebastian. And we were told to aid you in capturing Deam, while not saying your names in front of anyone who lives in the slums.¡±


    ¡°So it was Sebastian after all¡­¡±


    He did enjoy tormenting those who deserved it.


    I suppose he had sent out a messenger after we left the mansion.


    ¡°Thank you for capturing Deam and his men.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. I just searched for someone who I had a grudge against.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    The guard bowed to us. The other guards stood in the back, blocking the view from Deam and the others.


    ¡°In any case, can I leave the rest to you then?¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course. That was our reason foring here.¡±


    It would make things a lot easier if the guards took over from here.


    We did not want to stay much longer. I wanted to return and take a bath.


    We had done enough already.


    Besides, I had already said what I wanted to Deam.


    Oh, but there was one other thing¡­


    ¡°Aside from the men, there are some boys¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, I can see that. The ones who were being attacked¡­?¡±


    ¡°Yes. They were the ones who had attacked a beastkin girl, after Deam ordered them to. But a lot happened after that, and it seems like they were being punished.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ I know about the boy who was arrested for throwing the rock. I believe he is being sent to the duke¡¯s house.¡±


    I had to talk to the guards about the boys now.


    They had probably done bad things up until now. But I didn¡¯t think they should be punished to the same degree as Deam and the others.


    Though, they couldn¡¯t get off with just a p on the wrist either.


    In any case, I exined what I could about them.


    ¡°Unlike Deam, they were not active inmitting crimes¡­¡±


    ¡°I understand. They will have to be questioned before anything is decided. But I¡¯m sure the punishment will not be too severe. Especially since they are not even adults yet.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    And so the guard promised to be merciful if it was possible.


    At least there was no worry about them being executed now.


    Of course, it probably wasn¡¯t something they did to people so young in the first ce.


    There was an orphanage in the town, and it received generous donations for its management. So they seemed to care about how children were raised to a certain degree.


    And so I left the rest to the guards, and Leo and I went on our way.


    As for the apology¡­ I could take the boys to the mansion, or bring Liza to Ractos¡­


    I had not decided yet¡­


    Well, it was something I could discuss with Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastianter.

 Chapter 423

    We met Nick on the way back


    ¡°It¡¯s been a very long night¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I had not expected to solve everything in one day, so I was quite happy that things had gone so well. And so it was with a sense of ease that Leo and I walked through the rain and made our way to the gate.


    Leo barked in agreement and nodded.


    Though, it had mostly gone well thanks to Sebastian¡¯s map.


    Without that, I wouldn¡¯t have been able to search the buildings, and would have just wandered aimlessly through the slums.


    Well, since Deam just happened to be surrounding the boys outside, it was possible that I would have still found them.


    And since I had been careful when talking to Deam, he likely did not know that the duke was involved this time.


    I would just be a strange man with a monster who had attacked and turned him in¡­


    I hoped that this meant the people of the slums who were loyal to him would not retaliate against the duke in some way¡­


    ¡°Huh, is that you? Brother?¡±


    ¡°That voice¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    As we walked down the street, I suddenly heard a familiar voice calling from behind.


    I had not sensed anyone approaching, so the effects of the herbs had probably worn off.


    After all, it had been several hours since we ate it.


    Besides, we had also lowered our guard, now that we hadpleted our mission.


    ¡°It is you, brother. What are you doing here at a time like this¡­?¡±


    ¡°Ah, Nick. Uh¡­nothing. In fact, what are you doing here at this hour?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    When I turned around, it was Nick. Just as I had anticipated.


    While his face was familiar, his overcoat was not.


    He seemed happy to see us, but it was too dark to see clearly.


    But given his appearance¡­he probably looked suspicious when walking outte at night.


    ¡°I always patrol the area around Mr. Kalis¡¯s store. Apparently, something has happened in the slums recently.¡±


    ¡°People might end up suspecting you, Nick¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Apparently, he had volunteered to help keep the peace.


    While that wasmendable, he still had an intimidating appearance¡­ But I decided to not mention that.


    Though, I did wonder if the guards hadn¡¯t taken him in for questioning.


    ¡°Ever since you hired me, I¡¯ve been trying to make up for the things that I did. It might be toote for that, but I want to help this town¡­ And maybe that will help with your reputation as well?¡±


    ¡°¡­I don¡¯t care about my reputation¡­ But if that¡¯s what you want to do, then that¡¯s fine. Still, don¡¯t the guards already patrol this area?¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s just it¡­ Those rascals in the slums have been acting oddly recently. And so have the others.¡±


    ¡°The rascals?¡±


    Was he talking about those children I had just met?


    Well, there could be others¡­


    ¡°Sometimes, they steal food from the stores around here. I suppose they have to, in order to eat. And so the shops try to be merciful about it, you know?¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    So the boys had been stealing after all.


    But it was for their own survival, so I could not use or punish them self-righteously. Well, I didn¡¯t have the authority to begin with.


    Besides, it sounded like the stores were allowing it to a degree, as they understood the circumstances.


    Though, they probably did call the guards and had them arrested in cases whererge quantities or money was stolen¡­ But Nick said that such things were rare.


    ¡°It started¡­a few days ago. I started seeing them a lot more often.¡±


    ¡°Well, you live in the same town. Is that so strange?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    The slums were on the north side of Ractos.


    And it wasn¡¯t like each district was walled off.


    Leo nodded in agreement.


    ¡°No, but¡­ It was not like that before¡­ Well, maybe it¡¯s just me. In any case, I decided to patrol the area.¡±


    ¡°I see. Thest few days¡­ I suppose that would be right after we rescued Liza then?¡±


    ¡°Liza. Do you mean that beastkin girl? Maybe¡­¡±


    Nick tilted his head, and so I told him what had happened that day.


    ¡°You took the duke to the slums¡­ How very brave of you! Merely wearing fine clothes there will get you surrounded.¡±


    ¡°Well, we were left alone.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°¡­I suppose it was because of good Leo. Arge monster will scare others away¡­¡±


    If I remembered correctly, I had gone into the slums with my regr clothes.


    I didn¡¯t know how good they were considered to be, but since they were made by a tailor, they must be quite decent.


    And they were always washed at the mansion and kept clean.


    Mr. Ekenhart had hidden his face, but was also wearing fine clothes.


    Nick was quite stunned that we had gone to the slums like that, but then he remembered that Leo was with us.


    Besides, Mr. Ekenhart and I had also been armed, and were ready to defend ourselves.


    Thinking of it like that, it had been incredibly reckless for Nick and his friends to attack us that time we first met¡­

 Chapter 424

    Nick was sorry about his past deeds


    ¡°It does seem like the day you rescued the girl, matches with the day that I started to see them more often. Perhaps it was because Deam gave out an order¡­¡±


    ¡°Do you know him?¡±


    ¡°I should be asking you that.¡±


    ¡°Well¡­sort of. Haha.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I didn¡¯t if the two things were directly rted, but it was possible that they were searching for Liza. It did seem that he wanted to use hatred against the beastkin as a way of controlling the people.


    Regardless, I was a little surprised to hear Nick talk about Deam.


    ¡°Well, I understand why you don¡¯t want to talk about it. He seems like the kind of person to silence others so that they don¡¯t expose him.¡±


    Apparently, Nick seemed to have misunderstood me a little.


    Also, it was clear that he knew him.


    ¡°So you know a lot about Deam?¡±


    ¡°Aye. I am from the slums, after all¡­ And though I tried to leave and get a job¡­ No one would hire me¡­ There were some ces that gave me work for just a day or two¡­but nothing like what you did, brother. I suppose it had to do with my origins, and the way I talked.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    Apparently, Nick had originally lived in the slums.


    Now that I thought about it, I didn¡¯t know much about Nick.


    He called me brother, and seemed to be happy to see me. Also, he was a hard worker now.


    As for the way that he talked, as Mr. Kalis said, it had improvedpared to before.


    Regardless, as he was from the slums, no one would give him a proper job.


    Though it seemed he would sometimes get hired for a day¡­that would not be enough to make a living.


    ¡°And so in the end¡­I needed money, and just started threatening people in stores. But that didn¡¯t go well¡­ And as I wondered what to do, I was approached by some people from a different town. You know the rest, brother. Hehe.¡±


    Nick said with augh.


    He had been approached by some thugs that wanted to use him, and they had attacked us when I was with Ms. ire and the others¡­


    He had been dragged down the path of viiny, and then ended up bumping into the duke¡¯s daughter right after. Luck was certainly not on his side¡­


    In the end, I had helped him, and he was now sorry about what he did¡­ So perhaps it had turned out alright for him after all.


    ¡°Now that you mention it, have you gone to apologize to the stores that you attacked?¡±


    ¡°Aye! Mr. Kalis and I went around and talked to them. Mr. Kalis is close with the duke, so they were all quick to forgive me. Well, because I felt bad about what I did back then, and wanted to do something to help, I decided to patrol the area so that the people from the slums wouldn¡¯t work any mischief.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ So you¡¯ve been working hard then.¡±


    Patrolling the area was Nick¡¯s way of doing some volunteer work.


    ¡°I am able to live properly, thanks to the money you pay me. Besides, I now make sure to buy from the stores I stole from, as a way of making up for it.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Uh, and you really have enough money? If you don¡¯t¡­¡±


    ¡°No, no, I¡¯m fine. You pay me more than I would make at any of these other stores! I could not ask for more!¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­¡±


    Apparently, he was contributing to the sales of the other stores as a way of apologizing.


    As for his pay, I had discussed it with Sebastian, and decided to give him a little extra, which seemed to be a lot for Nick.


    Especially since he had never been paid properly before¡­


    Now that I thought about it, perhaps it wasn¡¯t a good idea to ask a duke¡¯s butler about average sries¡­


    He probably got paid a lot¡­ I should have talked to Mr. Kalis instead.


    Well, it wasn¡¯t like I had financial troubles, and if Nick was working hard, then it was fine.


    Money wasn¡¯t everything, but you should be paid well for your work.


    ¡­I knew from experience that working overtime for minimum wages, with no hope of a raise no matter how hard you worked¡­was bound to make you lose motivation.


    And since I would have to hire personnel to help with the medicinal herb fields, this was something that I would have to continue to keep in mind.

 Chapter 425

    A misunderstanding


    ¡°¡­Well, I used to know Deam when we were younger. He never trusted anyone, and only thought of using others¡­ Though, I never imagined that he would be a boss of the slums.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ So you were friends?¡±


    ¡°No. I never did like the way that he did things, so we did not get along. We even fought sometimes. ¡­And I always lost¡­ Haha!¡±


    Indeed, Nick had attacked me with a knife, whichpared to Deam and his longsword¡­ It was not surprising who was stronger.


    And I had beaten Nick so easily¡­ And then Sebastian and Leo threatened him.


    ¡°Well¡­what do you think will happen if Deam is arrested?¡±


    ¡°Deam. Arrested? That suspicious coward¡­ It is difficult to imagine, since he sleeps in different buildings or changes towns when things get heated¡­ But if it did happen, they might start looking for a traitor, or find out if information has been leaked.¡±


    ¡°Really? Will they try to get revenge? Will they attack the prison and try to rescue him?¡±


    ¡°Well, he does not trust others. So he will not be caught¡­ But that also means his men do not trust him. At least, that was how it was when I was in the slums. Likely, someone else will just take his ce.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    Deam had threatened me after I tied him up. Saying that there were others.


    But if what Nick said was true, his men did not trust him either. And so they would likely not bother to rescue him.


    He might just be bluffing¡­


    ¡°So¡­if¡­ The duke was to arrest him, the others would¡­¡±


    ¡°The duke? Then the others would just run away. There may be a lot of them, but they are no match for real soldiers. There is no point in rebelling. Perhaps Deam could persuade them to¡­but he wouldn¡¯t have the courage.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Well, it looked like Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian had been quite wrong about that.


    If they had arrested Deam, then the others would have just run away.


    There would be no insurrections¡­


    I suppose making arrests would cause others to run away, which would be troublesome. But there was no worry of innocents getting hurt.


    So there was no point of me¡­


    Well, it wasn¡¯t a total waste, but I suddenly felt quite tired.


    And the weight of the raincoat suddenly felt much heavier.


    Leo also let out a sigh.


    I would probablyin to Mr. Ekenhart when I got back.


    ¡°What is it, brother? Did Deam do something?¡±


    ¡°Well, sort of. And I captured him a short while ago¡­¡±


    ¡°What!? Deam? You found¡­ Oh, because of Leo¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, it was with Leo¡¯s help. In any case, I moved secretly, because I was told that there might be uprisings in the other slums. I wanted it to seem like I did it alone.¡±


    ¡°¡­So that¡¯s why you are out here?¡±


    ¡°Well, yes.¡±


    ¡°While I¡¯m surprised that Deam is caught, I suppose it makes sense, if it was done by you two. ¡­Well, things should be rather frantic here for some time.¡±


    ¡°It seems that way. I guess they will suspect a traitor.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. And then they will start fighting each other in order to take his ce. I will have to continue patrolling.. Maybe I should ask Mr. Kalis if someone could help me.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I will discuss it with Sebastian as well. Though, I¡¯m sure things will settle down once the duke and the guards make a move.¡±


    ¡°These people only work in the shadows, so they will hide if the dukees out. No one wants to antagonize him.¡±


    ¡°Indeed.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Once I was finished talking to Nick, I headed to the western gate.


    While my feet felt heavier than before, I continued to tell myself that this hadn¡¯t been a waste.


    Before leaving, Nick had said, ¡®If there is anything else you want to know about the slums, just ask me! I will tell you what I know!¡¯ Which made me wish I had just talked to him before searching for Deam.


    I should know more about the person who I had hired.


    All I had cared about was that he was doing his job¡­


    If I had spoken with Nick first, I would not have taken on Deam with just Leo¡­


    It was with such thoughts that I greeted the guards at the gate, and then climbed up on Leo and headed back to the mansion.


    ¡­Of course, I also thought about how I would protest to Mr. Ekenhart about how he had been wrong¡­

 Chapter 426

    I received a big wee


    ¡°It stopped raining¡­?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Just when we had almost arrived at the mansion, the rain started to die down, and then stoppedpletely.


    I looked up at the sky while taking off my coat. I felt a little lighter then.


    But I was still wet.


    ¡°Hah¡­ That was tiring. I want to take a bath¡­and go straight to bed. I wonder if Liza is asleep?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff. Wou!¡±


    ¡°Haha. I know. We¡¯ll get you some sausages as well.¡±


    I raised my sword for light and gazed at the cloud while talking to Leo.


    Leo did not forget what I had said about sausages.


    Well, they were her favorite food.


    I just wanted to soak in a hot bath. I could leave Leo to someone else¡­ There would likely still be servants who were awake.


    Even with a raincoat, my body became very cold.


    While I wasn¡¯t freezing, I still had to warm up so I wouldn¡¯t get sick¡­


    ¡°Uh¡­I¡¯m back¡­?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    I arrived at the gate and greeted the three guards.


    Nichs was with them, and they just bowed silently before opening the gate.


    While I thought it was strange that they didn¡¯t reply, I passed the guards and went through the gate.


    ¡°Ah, Leo. You should shake some of the water off first.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Ah, hey! Ah¡­!¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Leo! You just covered me in water¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°No, you don¡¯t need to lick it off¡­¡±


    I was already wet anyway¡­but it was like having another bucket of water poured over me.


    Huh? You were standing so close? Leo seemed to say as she looked at me. But when I protested, she apologized with a lick.


    I did not want to get wet like that either.


    Only when we were ying.


    I tried to wring out some of the water from my clothes, and then I moved to the door.


    That way, I wouldn¡¯t make a mess in the mansion.


    And once I was inside, I could change clothes and take a bath.


    It was with such thoughts that I opened the door and stepped inside.


    The entrance hall was usually dimly lit in the middle of the night, but it was fully bright now. And so it took a while for my eyes to adjust.


    I rubbed my eyes and scanned the room. There was a whole line of servants waiting there.


    ¡­This was like when they greeted Mr. Ekenhart.


    ¡°Wee back, Mr. Takumi and Leo! Thank you for your work!¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    The servants all bowed and greeted us with words of gratitude.


    Did Sebastian make them do this?


    ¡­Or it could be Mr. Ekenhart.


    Next to me, Leo was tilting her head with a puzzled expression.


    ¡°¡­Umm¡­¡±


    ¡°Hohoho. You seem very surprised?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    As I wondered how to respond, Sebastian stepped forward with an amused smile.


    I knew that he would look like that.


    ¡°Well, of course, I¡¯m surprised¡­ All of the servants are out here in the middle of the night. I thought everyone would be asleep¡­¡±


    ¡°You and Leo did something very dangerous for Liza¡¯s sake, when the duke could not act. And so we are very grateful¡­¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ I see¡­¡±


    Indeed, part of the reason was that the duke couldn¡¯t act¡­


    If he could not catch Deam, then Leo and I would.


    Though, my main motivation was my anger about Liza being targeted. So it felt a little weird to be thanked for it¡­


    Well, I suppose this was just how Sebastian did things. And I should just ept it.


    ¡°Oh, there is no point in standing around like this¡­¡±


    ¡°I will bring a change of clothing.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Wuff¡­¡±


    Sebastian said, and then the soldiers started to move around busily.


    As it was raining, they knew that I would return wet. And so one of the maids brought me a change of clothing.


    Since Leo had been running over mud, a few maids wiped her feet clean.


    Furthermore, aside from the maid who brought me a towel, other servants brought an extrarge towel and wiped Leo carefully with it.


    Leo seemed to really enjoy being carefully wiped like that.

 Chapter 427

    Ms. ire was very worried


    ¡°The sausages were prepared, like you requested. Will you go and take a bath now, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Yes. I would like to take a bath and warm myself. Can I leave Leo to you?¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, here.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    Leo started to drool, once she heard mention of the sausages.


    It was nice that you¡¯re happy, but you should calm down a little, Leo.


    The butlers were finding it hard to wipe her, because her tail was wagging so excitedly.


    Regardless, I would leave her to their care and go take a bath.


    And so I took the towel from the maid and left the entrance hall.


    ¡°Hah¡­ I¡¯m all warmed up now.¡±


    ¡°Chomp-chomp¡­ Wuff!¡±


    After I had taken a bath, a maid told me that Leo was in the dining hall, and so I made my way there.


    When I entered, I saw that an especiallyrge mountain of sausages had been ced in the center of the table, and Leo had shoved her face inside as she ate them.


    She barked when she saw mee in, but quickly moved her attention back to the meal.


    The area around her mouth had be sticky with oil¡­ And even though she had been dried off from the rain¡­she would still have to take a bath tomorrow.


    It was toote to do it tonight¡­


    ¡°Ah, there you are, Mr. Takumi. Good work tonight.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. I¡¯m so d that you¡¯re alright¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Ekenhart. Ms. ire. You¡¯re awake.¡±


    Aside from Leo, Sebastian, and some maids, Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. ire was there and watching over Leo as she ate.


    It seemed that they had waited for me without sleep.


    ¡°I could not sleep when you were out there, Mr. Takumi. And neither could ire.¡±


    ¡°Father, nevermind that! Mr. Takumi, are you hurt?¡±


    ¡°Haha, I¡¯m fine. Leo was with me, after all. ¡­Though, to be honest, it got dangerous at one point, but we managed.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ That is a relief.¡±


    Ms. ire was very relieved to know that I wasn¡¯t hurt.


    While it could not be helped, I did feel bad about making her worry¡­


    ¡°That¡¯s what I¡¯ve been telling you, ire. Mr. Takumi has been training, and he has Leo. There was no need to worry about him facing some people in the slums.¡±


    ¡°Still, I could not help but be worried. After all, he was hurt during the orc attack on Range vige¡­ So it was possible¡­¡±


    ¡°But Mr. Takumi has the Gift. So he could just grow some Loe for his wounds.¡±


    ¡°Father! You do not understand me! Even if it can be treated, it is better to not be hurt at all!¡±


    ¡°Hahaha! Well, I am fine in the end. So enough about that¡­¡±


    While it was nice seeing them argue like this, as it showed that they got along, I really didn¡¯t think there was much point in it continuing.


    Besides, it felt awkward to have people worry about me. And Mr. Ekenhart was just enjoying teasing his daughter.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. While you were taking a bath, we received a message from a Ractos guard.¡±


    Sebastian said, taking a step forward.


    The guards sure moved quickly. Apparently, they had sent a messenger after arresting Deam.


    I had stopped to talk with Nick, and also took a bath, so they had enough time to reach the mansion.


    ¡°I see.¡±


    ¡°It seems that you dered you were family with Leo and Liza, for everyone to hear.¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    ¡°Oh?¡±


    I thought it was going to be a report regarding Deam.


    Besides, the guards hadn¡¯t been close by when I said that.


    They only cameter, after hearing the noise.


    As Sebastian exined all of this with a smile, Mr. Ekenhart listened to him with an expression of deep interest.


    And Ms. ire was¡­


    She was blushing with a smile¡­ But why?


    Deam had mocked me and said that I was just ying at being a family. I had been so angry that I shouted back at him. But having everyone know about it now was a little¡­embarrassing.


    I had meant every word, of course. But some of those lines¡­were definitely embarrassing when I thought back on them¡­


    I would have to be more careful about the things I say.

 Chapter 428

    I told them about the misunderstanding


    ¡°Hohoho. Liza will be very happy when she hears about it.¡±


    ¡°Um¡­don¡¯t do that. It¡¯s embarrassing.¡±


    ¡°Hmm, but embarrassing Mr. Takumi is also good. Don¡¯t you agree, ire?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Oh! Um! No¡­ That would be rude to him, father.¡±


    ¡°You should just admit it already¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart let out a sigh¡­ What were they talking about now?


    ¡°Ah, by the way¡­ Mr. Ekenhart. Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Hmm, what?¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s about Deam¡­ I talked with Nick beforeing back, you see.¡±


    ¡°Oh, that man who you hired?¡±


    ¡°And what did you talk about?¡±


    ¡°Well¡­¡±


    And so I told them what Nick had told me.


    How if the duke got involved, the cowardly Deam would just run away. And that there was no need to worry about an uprising or retaliation of any kind.


    I told them that Nick hade from the slums, and knew Deam.


    Deam was cowardly, trusted no one, and was trusted by no one¡­ A sad person.


    I didn¡¯t know what had happened in his past to make him like that, but I was still not going to be sympathetic, because he had targeted Liza.


    While he didn¡¯t trust people, he used them to gain power¡­


    ¡­I would soon be in a position of power over the people I had to hire. But I would like to build a rtionship of trust with them.


    ¡°Hmm, I see. ¡­Sebastian. It seems like we misjudged the situation?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. This was the man who evaded the guards and ruled the slums of several towns as a boss. We thought him very cunning. Someone who would strike back with force if something happened¡­¡±


    ¡°But ording to what Mr. Takumi heard from Nick, that was not the case.¡±


    ¡°Yes. He sounds like your average thug.¡±


    ¡°We were fooled then¡­ Well, it was merely our own assumptions. I don¡¯t mean to boast, but I have a very high opinion of the investigative abilities of the guards in this town. And since he was able to escape them, I ended up overestimating him.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­¡±


    There was still a lot about this world that I did not know, but I thought that the duke would hold enormous power.


    After all, in terms of nobility, he was the closest to the royal family.


    And he had many soldiers working for him, who kept the peace on hisnds.


    Perhaps Deam being able to evade them was just a coincidence. But it did seem quite impressive¡­


    So that was why Mr. Ekenhart and the others made assumptions about Deam, and thought that he must be plotting something.


    If you are a leader, then you sometimes have to consider the worst oue¡­ That was something I had once heard.


    There were all kinds of people gathered together in the slums. And he had made himself their boss. That would have affected how they saw him as well.


    ¡°Father¡­ In other words, if you and Sebastian had a proper grasp on this Deam, then Mr. Takumi would not have been put in danger¡­ Is that what this means?¡±


    ¡°Well¡­ I suppose¡­¡±


    She red. Perhaps it was revenge for all the teasing he had been doing to her.


    ¡°As for that matter. It was my investigation that wascking. I am sorry.¡±


    While Mr. Ekenhart recoiled, Sebastian honestly admitted that he was at fault, and he apologized with a bow.


    Well, even though he had a mysterious informationwork, he could not know everything. So it could not be helped.


    Still, he somehow knew about what I had shouted¡­ But I decided to not ask about it, as it would only be embarrassing for me.


    ¡°While Sebastian is responsible for gathering information, it is father who makes decisions. He even told me that it was dangerous, and that we should only wait and learn more¡­ But the reality was¡­¡±


    ¡°We-well, it was definitely possible that there would be consequences if you got involved, ire. Besides, you cannot even fight. What good would it do for you to go to the slums?¡±


    Said Mr. Ekenhart, as sweat dripped down his face.


    I understood what he was saying.


    It was still dangerous to go to the slums. And so this was not a matter for Ms. ire to get involved in¡­


    Also, he probably just didn¡¯t want to risk putting his daughter in harm¡¯s way.

 Chapter 429

    Ms. ire and the others would be very busy


    And so I agreed with Mr. Ekenhart that I did not want her to be put in danger.


    Though, from her perspective, it probably looked like I was doing something dangerous. And it probably caused her to worry.


    I would have to be careful.


    ¡°I understand that. It is not as if I can fight, and there would be little that I could do there. But to determine that you cannot act and let Mr. Takumi work on his own¡­¡±


    ¡°And I do feel bad about that. Mr. Takumi, I am sorry for relying on you and making the wrong decision.¡±


    ¡°I also needed to check my information more thoroughly. And I will do my best to avoid such a thing happening again.¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. Well, everyone makes mistakes. I don¡¯t mind. Besides, considering that Liza was targeted, it hardly mattered. Leo and I would have gone out on our own anyway. Isn¡¯t that right, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff-wuff!¡±


    After being berated by his daughter, Mr. Ekenhart stopped making excuses and then turned to me and bowed his head.


    Sebastian also bowed.


    I had only brought up my conversation with Nick to stop Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s teasing of Ms. ire, and had not expected him to apologize like this¡­.


    In any case, I chuckled and insisted that it was nothing to me.


    Even if finding and rescuing Liza was something I had done with Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s help, our motive was not directly rted to him.


    So even if Mr. Ekenhart had decided to send his men out for Deam, right after speaking with Mark, we would have likely still gone out tonight.


    And when I questioned Leo about it, she raised her head from the sausages she was eating and nodded.


    Sorry for disturbing your meal Leo¡­ But you should maybe eat a little slower.


    There had been a mountain of sausages, but most were gone by now¡­


    ¡°Hah¡­ You can be a little more upset about it, you know? Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Ah, I could not do that¡­ As I said before, it doesn¡¯t really matter. We would have gone as soon as we heard about Deam. I want Ractos to be safe for Liza to visit.¡±


    ¡°But you really should be careful, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Uh, well¡­ I shall be careful. Sorry.¡±


    Perhaps Ms. ire was still holding a grudge against her father. But I didn¡¯t intend on discussing the matter any further.


    As long as my goal of making the town safe for Liza was aplished, then that was fine.


    Especially since it seemed like none of the people rted to Deam would try to get revenge.


    Still, Ms. ire had a rather pleading look as she asked me to be careful.


    She really had been worried. And I was weak to such expressions¡­ And so all I could do was nod and promise. Any man would have done the same in my position.


    I could act foolishly sometimes, and so I would try to avoid danger, so she would not worry about me. I told her as much and apologized.


    ¡°In any case, Sebastian and I will deal with the matter before we go off to the forest tomorrow. There may be others aside from Deam who would target Liza. It will be a good opportunity to investigate the slums and town in general.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. We will be quite busy¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart had a serious expression as he talked about what must be done.


    Sebastian nodded in agreement, only, he appeared to be looking forward to it.


    I suppose he enjoyed investigating and finding bad people¡­


    At least he had other hobbies than just exining things.


    ¡°Those are things that I cannot do, so I will leave it to you.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Father, I will help as well. ¡­So you don¡¯t make wrong decisions again.¡±


    ¡°¡­I don¡¯t intend to, but it would be better to have multiple opinions. Very well.¡±


    I didn¡¯t know anything about policy, and was in no position to say or do anything.


    Ms. ire also wanted to get involved. But since Mr. Ekenhart was taking this very seriously, I doubted he would be making any mistakes. But maybe I was overestimating him¡­


    In any case, Mr. Ekenhart weed her help.


    Besides, he probably wanted to train her as much as possible, for the sake of her future¡­

 Chapter 430

    Leo finished her sausages


    Once we were finished talking, Ms. ire and Mr. Ekenhart left the dining hall. They decided to sleep early, as they had a busy day tomorrow.


    But before leaving, they asked for some herbs to help them sleep, and so I had a maid bring me my bag from my room, and I handed the herbs to them.


    Since they had stayed upte because of me, this was the least that I could do.


    ¡­Though, I was starting to run out of them, and so I would have to grow more and restock tomorrow.


    ¡°Chomp¡­chomp¡­ Wuff. Wou?¡±


    ¡°You finished eating then? Everyone has already left, you know?¡±


    Leo had now finished eating all of the sausages on her te, and she let out a sigh of satisfaction.


    She then finally noticed that Ms. ire and the others were gone, and she tilted her head with a puzzled expression.


    Just how absorbed were you in your food, Leo¡­ Even if it was her favorite food, it was hard to imagine that she was detecting every little sound in the slums a short while ago.


    ¡°Well, aren¡¯t you thirsty? You have to drink some water too.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Glug-glug¡­¡±


    Sebastian had left a bowl of water when leaving, and so I put it on the floor for Leo to drink.


    Milk would have been fine as well, but after all the work and eating so much sausages, water would be better for quenching her thirst.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­ About Lady Liza¡­¡±


    ¡°What about her?¡±


    As I watched Leo eagerly drinking the water, one of the maids who had stayed approached me.


    I had left Liza in Ms. Lyra¡¯s care. Had something happened?


    ¡°ording to Lyra, she became lonely shortly after you and Leo left¡­. She is currently resting in your room.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Perhaps it was still too early to separate?¡±


    ¡°While Lyra was with her, she started to miss you and Leo when she became sleepy. I am very sorry that we failed to keep her satisfied.¡±


    ¡°No, not at all. She is still young. Thank you for taking care of her. We could ask for nothing more.¡±


    This maid was older than Ms. Lyra, and might have been the head maid.


    After all, I had seen her close to Ms. ire several times.


    Regardless, I was surprised that Liza was still like that, since she seemed quite fond of Ms. Lyra¡­


    She was starting to act more rxed and less reserved in the mansion.


    I suppose it was when she started to sleep, that she suddenly started to miss us again.


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, you finished drinking. Are you satisfied?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s return to the room then. Apparently, Liza is waiting for us.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    Leo sighed with satisfaction after drinking all of the water.


    And so I told her that we were returning to our room.


    Leo nodded, and we left the dining hall.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Leo. Wee back.¡±


    ¡°Ms. Lyra.¡±


    ¡°Wu¡­wuff¡­¡±


    When we entered the room, Ms. Lyra was sitting on the side of the bed, but she rose to greet us.


    After greeting her, I looked to the back and saw that Liza was sleeping peacefully.


    Leo entered the room after me, and was about to bark loudly, but then saw that Liza was sleeping, and so she greeted Ms. Lyra quietly.


    ¡°I see that Liza is sleeping. I was told that she became lonely.¡±


    ¡°Yes. After you left, we spent some time in the room that was prepared for her, but¡­ She seemed to be anxious shortly after. And she wanted to return to this room¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ I guess it will take more time then.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Leo, don¡¯t wake her up, okay?¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    After returning to the mansion, a maid had taken our things back to the room.


    And so my swords were here, and they were probably washing the wet clothes and coat.


    But now that I thought of it, there actually was a room just for Liza.


    They had been waiting there at first, but then Liza wanted to return to this room to sleep.


    I suppose it was because this was where she had slept after she first came here.


    And she sometimes had bad dreams, and liked to hold onto Leo¡­


    She was still young, after all. So it was not much of a surprise.


    Leo had moved towards the bed, and was peering into Liza¡¯s face, so I had to warn her to not wake her up.


    But Leo understood, and barked quietly.


    I suppose she had be worried after hearing that Liza was lonely without us.

 Chapter 431

    I woke upfortably


    ¡°In any case, thank you. For looking after her. I¡¯m sorry that you had to stay upte yet again.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. This is my job. Besides, I do enjoy taking care of children.¡±


    I thanked Ms. Lyra, and apologized for the trouble.


    Leo also barked quietly and bowed her head.


    After everything I had said to Deam, it seemed like Leo thought of Liza as a daughter even more than before.


    Ms. Lyra smiled and said it was no trouble at all. She had very gentle eyes when looking at Liza. There was something motherly about her as well.


    ¡°I feel like a mother when taking care of her¡­. And it brings back memories of the orphanage. ¡­Oh, I¡¯m sorry. I¡¯m just rambling now¡­¡±


    ¡°No, I think that Liza would be happy that you feel that way.¡±


    She had taken care of smaller children a lot at the orphanage, so Ms. Lyra was used to this kind of thing.


    As I was not Liza, I could not say for sure, but it was clear that she was fond of Ms. Lyra. So I thought that she¡¯d be happy to know how Ms. Lyra felt.


    She was the closest with Ms. Lyra, after me and Leo.


    ¡°Well then¡­ Please excuse me.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Please rest well.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    And then Ms. Lyra left the room.


    ¡°Well¡­I¡¯m tired. So we should go to sleep as well.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°¡­Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Now that Ms. Lyra was gone, I moved over to the bed in order to go to sleep.


    Leo moved next to me, and I could smell the dampness of her fur¡­


    It wasn¡¯t a terrible smell¡­ But it was pretty strong.


    I hadn¡¯t noticed it before. But Leo had not taken a bath since she came out of the rain.


    And while the maids and butlers had wiped her with towels, the smell had remained.


    It was like when we would go out for a walk in the rain, and Leo woulde back wet. The smell of rain and beast.


    Even if I was used to it¡­it was probably too strong for Ms. ire and the others.


    I hadn¡¯t noticed it before, because the dining hall was filled with the smell of sausages.


    As Leo looked at me with a puzzled expression, I made up my mind.


    ¡°Alright, you¡¯re taking a bath first thing in the morning.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!?¡±


    Leo was surprised by those words.


    She could not believe her ears, but was kind enough to keep her voice low, so as not to wake up Liza.


    But even though Leo did not like it, it could not be helped.


    ¡°Liza might¡­say that you smell bad too, you know? You wouldn¡¯t want that, would you?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­wuff¡­¡±


    Leo looked disappointed that all her hard work was being rewarded in such a way. But she nodded in resignation, as she did not want Liza to think that she smelled bad.


    It was toote to bathe Leo tonight.


    And I felt bad for giving her the bad news right before bed, but I had already made the decision as soon as we stepped out into the rain.


    There had been mud as well, and her fur had lost its sheen.


    Leo had such beautiful fur, and it should be kept clean and without stench.


    To console herself, Leo rested her head close to Liza and closed her eyes. And I too got into bed in order to sleep. But before I closed my eyes, I thought that I saw Liza smile as her nose twitched.


    Perhaps she sensed that we had returned, and felt relieved¡­


    ¡ª


    ¡°¡­Hmm?¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Was I dreaming¡­? I felt something fluffy against my face.


    And then I heard two familiar voices.


    Liza and Leo?


    ¡°Hmm¡­?¡±


    ¡°Ah, did you wake up, papa?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    As I wondered who it was, my consciousness returned fully from sleep.


    And then I heard Liza and Leo¡¯s reaction.


    Was it morning?


    And so I opened my eyes, but it was dark.


    Well¡­it seemed more like my vision was blocked?


    ¡°What the¡­?¡±


    I raised my voice and grabbed whatever it was that was blocking my vision.


    It was soft and fluffy, and made me want to go back to sleep.


    ¡°Haha! That tickles¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, Liza?¡±


    ¡°Good morning, papa!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I sat up, and something fell off of my face.


    Next to me, I saw Liza with her back turned to me, and Leo, who had her head resting on the bed.


    ¡°¡­Good morning. Was that your tail?¡±


    ¡°Yes! Mama said you might enjoy it! And it was easier than putting my ears on your face!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Uh, huh¡­ Thanks.¡±


    Apparently, it was Liza¡¯s tail that had been blocking my vision.


    While it was different from Leo¡¯s fur, it was definitely quite fluffy.

 Chapter 432

    I trained a little longer than usual


    While Liza should not have known about what Leo and I were doingst night, she seemed to have sensed that it was for her.


    I suppose that she had a sharpness that came from being a beastkin.


    Or perhaps this was just her being mischievous, because we had left her alone yesterday.


    While I hadn¡¯t suffocated, covering someone¡¯s face while they were sleeping was rather questionable.


    Still, I would not mention it.


    ¡­Was I being too soft?


    ¡°¡­Uhh¡­ Papa!¡±


    ¡°Oh. What is it, Liza?¡±


    ¡°Sister Lyra was with me yesterday, but I was sad that you and mama were gone¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­really? Sorry about that. We¡¯ll try to stay with you as much as possible.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    Suddenly, Liza looked like she was about to cry, and she wrapped her arms around me.


    Apparently, she was sad about our absencest night.


    It was unfortunate that though we acted for her, we ended up making her sad.


    And so I patted her on the head and said that we would be with her as much as possible.


    I was probably being too soft, but I didn¡¯t have much experience with such things.


    Well, there was a father of two daughters in the same house¡­ But Mr. Ekenhart wasn¡¯t a good example to follow¡­I think.


    He was also quite weak when it came to Ms. ire.


    ¡°Good morning.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Mr. Takumi, Leo, Liza.¡±


    And so we got ready for the day and then went down to the dining hall.


    It was already close to lunch time, and so we were not able to eat breakfast with everyone else.


    When we entered, Ms. Gelda and a few maids were there, preparing the food for us.


    I greeted them, and quickly ate thete breakfast.


    Ms. Helena¡¯s food was as delicious as always.


    After that, I gave Leo a bath, and then went out into the garden to use Weed Cultivation in order to restock on some herbs, and check up on the garden.


    Ms. ire and the others were busy dealing with the slums, and they were apparently eating lunch in their rooms.


    And so I joined Tilura and Sherry, who had finished with her studies, and Leo continued her diet training with Sherry.


    As for Tilura and I, we started our usual sword training.


    Fighting against Deam had shown me howcking I still was, and so I trained harder than usual.


    In the meantime, Leo, Sherry and Liza continued to run around like they did yesterday.


    I wondered if Liza wouldn¡¯t get tired¡­ But also was just running around enough for Sherry?


    Perhaps Leo should teach her how to fight as a fenrir.


    Well, I didn¡¯t know about any of that, and would just have to leave it to Leo.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. You seem to be training harder than usual?¡±


    ¡°Really? ¡­I suppose I am.¡±


    While I was resting and drinking water, Tilura questioned me about my training. She didn¡¯t know about what had happenedst night, and so she was puzzled.


    ¡°Well, something happened. And it made me want to get stronger.¡±


    ¡°I see. That is a good thing!¡±


    Even if she didn¡¯t know the reason, Tilura nodded happily.


    But my reason was simple.


    It was merely because I had felt like I was in danger at one point, during my fight with Deam.


    Had he pushed through my defenses, then I could have been injured. And so I wanted to be able to handle a sword better.


    In the end, it was Leo who got him¡­


    If I wanted to protect Liza, then I would have to get stronger.


    That being said, while training was good, I did not want to get too consumed with pursuing power either.


    Besides, even with an expert like Mr. Ekenhart nearby, I had never felt bad, or that I wanted to surpass him.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Lady Tilura. I see you are training.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Phillip?¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    After we finished resting and returned to our sword training, someone called to us.


    It was Phillip, one of the guards.


    As they generally guarded the outside of the house, it was unusual to see him in the back garden.


    Aside from that, I was also a little concerned about Sherry and Leo, who were still being chased around by Leo.


    Liza was smiling, but Sherry looked like she was about to copse.


    Even if it was necessary for her diet, I didn¡¯t want her to be pushed too far¡­

 Chapter 633

    I trained with Leo


    ¡°Wou. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right. We haven¡¯t done that in a while.¡±


    ¡°What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    She wanted to do that thing we had stopped doing recently, due to the training with Mr. Ekenhart.


    Because when he wasn¡¯t here¡­Leo would train with us.


    And so I told Tilura.


    For Leo, that was like light exercise and ying, and she enjoyed it.


    I suppose it would be nice to do it again¡­ We had some experience now, after all.


    She had dodged us easily though. And I still didn¡¯t think we would be able to hit her.


    ¡°Mama and papa are fighting?¡±


    ¡°Haha. No, Liza. And even if we were, I could never win¡­ In any case, it¡¯s training. If we can hit Leo, then we will be a first rate fighter. And so Leo is going to train with us in Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s ce.¡±


    ¡°Oh, I see!


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­ While I was able to defeat some orcs, I don¡¯t think I can beat good Leo.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s the same for me¡­¡±


    We did not stand a chance at all.


    That being said, when having the mock battle with Mr. Ekenhart, he had been able to hit her a few times, so it wasn¡¯t impossible.


    ¡­Though, Leo was also holding back.


    In any case, as we had grown since then, it would be nice to be able to hit Leo, who was sticking her tongue with anticipation as if it was a game.


    ¡°It sounds fun. I will do it too!¡±


    ¡°Huh? Liza?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I want to y with mama!¡±


    ¡°This is training¡­not ying¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°Well, if Leo is fine with it.¡±


    As Liza liked to exercise, training was a game to her.


    But Leo didn¡¯t mind, so I guess it was okay.


    It¡¯s not like the knives or swords would hurt her.


    ¡°Alright, then we will all do it.¡±


    ¡°Yay!¡±


    ¡°I will do my best!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    And so we lined up and faced Leo.


    We had done it one on one with Mr. Ekenhart, but since the difference in ability was too big, we all went at once.


    Well, it was because Leo agreed to it.


    ¡°Now¡­begin!¡±


    After Ms. Gelda gave the signal, the three of us charged towards Leo.


    Once you faced her like this, you were reminded of how intimidating a Silver Fenrir could be.


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Tsk! Damn it!¡±


    ¡°Please hit!¡±


    ¡°Mama is so fast! Hyah!¡±


    I swung my sword down, and Tilura shed to the side.


    Liza used her speed to press in for a follow up after Leo dodged us.


    However, Leo still moved out of the way. I didn¡¯t know how we could hit her.


    But then again¡­it seemed like Liza alone was keeping up with Leo¡¯s speed?


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­hah¡­tsk!¡±


    ¡°Leo¡­hah¡­phew¡­ I cannot hit her after all¡­¡±


    A few minutester, Tilura and I were panting as we rested.


    In the end, none of us were able to scratch her¡­


    She wasn¡¯t just fast, but it seemed like she was predicting our movements, and we never even got close.


    Hah¡­ Well, I had not been confident to begin with. But it was sad that it was still so easy for her.


    ¡°Mama, that was amazing! I couldn¡¯t hit you at all! And I tried my hardest!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Even if she was trying her hardest, Liza did not look tired and was not out of breath at all. And she was also happy that she couldn¡¯t hit Leo.


    Leo was sitting down and looked very proud.


    Maybe it was because she was still self conscious aboutst night?


    Perhaps she had done this to remind us of her abilities.


    ¡°Hah¡­phew. You¡¯re not tired, Liza?¡±


    ¡°No, not at all!¡±


    ¡°Now that I think about it, Liza was always running with Leo and Sherry.¡±


    She had been swinging her knife and moving faster than me and Tilura¡­ Perhaps she was just stronger than us.

 Chapter 670

    Chapter 670


    Lined up in front of royalty<hr>


    ¡°Your Grace, I have gathered everyone from the vige and the mansion together. Except for Leo and the children¡­¡±


    ¡°Well done, Sebastian. Leo and Mr. Takumi are fine. And there is no need to force the children¡­ Though, Tilura should be with ire.¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    As I was petting Leo and the other dogs, the people of the vige had lined up, along with the servants from the mansion.


    Was something about to happen?


    ¡°Your Excellency. Over here.¡±


    ¡°Yes, yes. I really don¡¯t like these kinds of formalities.¡±


    ¡°But it is necessary.¡±¡°Very well. I had gone on this journey in order to get away from this. But I suppose I have no choice right now.¡±


    Mr. Euto really did not seem to like having to do this, but he was pushed forward by Ms. Lugretta.


    When they were ready, Sebastian put a hand to his chest and raised his voice as if to make an announcement.


    ¡°From the royal family, Lord Euto. And Duke Ekenhart!¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    And then the line of people all dropped to their knees.


    Aside from the children, the only people left standing was Mr. Ekenhart and Euto, and me¡­


    ¡°Hehe. Mr. Takumi is surprised.¡±


    ¡°If anything, we should be bowing to good Leo¡­¡±


    They said with a smile. And then Euto turned back to the people and took a step forward.


    He made some speech, as did Mr. Ekenhart, about being grateful for the reception. Things about hoping the vige would be prosperous and the like¡­ It all sounded very standard. I suppose it was tradition.


    Leo and I watched without really understanding¡­ I had never really seen something like it before.


    ¡°Hah, that was a surprise. To meet someone from the royal family in Range vige.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. And then he suddenly attacked Leo.¡±


    After the ceremony had ended, the vige held a weing feast.


    It was simr to thest time I came, where tables were brought out in the vige za, and food was served.


    Mr. Harnes was currently pouring some wine for Mr. Euto and Mr. Ekenhart. I was worried that they were getting too rxed, but at least Sebastian and Ms. Lugretta were keeping an eye on them.


    As for Liz and Tilura, they were with Rosalie and the other children, and seemed to be enjoying their food.


    Leo, Sherry and Rahle too¡­they were with the dogs.


    As for Ms. ire and I, we sipped on a little wine and ate while talking about what had happened earlier.


    Ms. Anne was going around the table and helping to pour wine for the vigers. It was apparently her way of showing how sorry she was. But the vigers seemed a little ufortable by it. Still, it showed that she was making an effort to talk and get involved with more people¡­ So perhaps it was a good thing?


    ¡°Still, what were the three of you talking about? Father said it was nothing serious, but¡­¡±


    Unfortunately, even if it was Ms. ire, I could not really tell her the details about it.


    So I would just have to tell her something that didn¡¯t matter in order to satiate her curiosity.


    ¡°Oh, I just exined to him about Silver Fenrirs and Leo. And how I came to be here¡­ Things like that.¡±


    ¡°I see. While Leo is important for our family, she will also be important for the country. So everything was alright?¡±


    ¡°Yes. He now understands that Leo would never hurt anyone without reason. She is not a threat. Well¡­I think it is obvious, after he bowed to Leo, that there will be no future trouble.¡±


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    The dogs jumped towards Leo ¡°Kyan-kyan!¡± ¡°Wuff!¡± ¡°Wou? Wuff-wuff.¡± ¡°You sure are popr, Leo. No one is scared of you anymore.¡± The people of the vige had a few dogs with them. Some were interested in Leo while others were more cautious. But once Leo moved towards them and licked¡­May 10, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We started to exin to Mr. Haines ¡°Huh? Well, most of the children seemed to enjoy ying with Leo. The parents were all happy to see it as well.¡± ¡°So it wasn¡¯t just the children, but the adults also epted Leo?¡± ¡°Yes. Leo and Mr. Takumi saved the vige. Of¡­October 6, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Someone was advising the vigers As for thend where the house would be build for me and Ms. ire, it would be to the north of the chief¡¯s house, and next to the farnd. Because it would be more convenient if we lived close to the fields. However¡­ ¡°Isn¡¯t¡­May 13, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 671

    Chapter 671


    The wee feast in Range vige<hr>


    Yes. I was very surprised when he attacked Leo, but I was even more surprised when I heard who he was. And then he apologized like that This has been quite a day.


    Haha. But no one was ever in any real danger, so it was rather fun, wasnt it?


    Hmm So you did not care at all that Leo was being assaulted?


    Ms. ire said with an annoyed look.


    Of course, I dont want her to be attacked But Leo can handle such things easily.


    I suppose


    ording to Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. Lugretta, he was so weak without magic, that even amon soldier could beat him.


    And if Mr. Ekenhart could not even touch Leo, then there was no danger of someone like Mr. Euto hurting her.Regardless, the two of you talk like you are friends now. That was also surprising. Even my father does not talk to him so casually


    Wellits because he asked me to. Also, we seem to be simr in age


    I was also able to talk with Mr. Ekenhart on very friendly terms. However, since he was much older, I still saw him more as a nice old man.


    But then againEuto was actually unaging, and over a thousand years old. However, that was hard to imagine or even believe. But he looked the same age as me, and so it was easier to treat him that way.


    As for his rank As he had founded the country, he should also be the king. But apparently he abdicated after the war ended. He could have just kept being king, but he decided to let his children take his ce.


    And so now he just traveled and enjoyed himself. He did show his royal crest in Range vige after hearing the news about a Silver Fenrir. However, normally he would travel just like any other ordinary traveler.


    But I am also close to you in age. You dont talk to me like that When will you start treating me more like a close friend, Mr. Takumi?


    Uhh


    Beforeright after you and Leo saved meyou said that it would take time to get used to it. Why is it taking so long?


    Now that I thought about it, I did say something like that.


    Im sorry, it might take a little longer Uh, Im too used to talking to you like this


    But how long will it take!? I suppose its not been that long, buthow much more will you make me wait!?


    UhMs. ire?


    After father returns to the house? Or when the house ispleted in Range vige? Or when the herb fields are created!? How long!?


    A fire seemed to have been lit inside of Ms. ire, and she began to question me heatedly with her face getting redder and redder.


    Huh? Red face?


    Ah, Ms. ireyouve drunk too much wine


    It had nothing to do with wine! Unless you are saying that we must drink the whole barrel before you can start acting like a normal person with me!


    Nothats not what I In fact, weve both had enough. Lets stop drinking, alright?


    Previously, she had gotten quite drunk with Ms. Anne, and regretted itter on. And though she had refused to drink for some time after thatshe hadpsed.


    After all, this was a weing feast, and so we could hardly refuse. And though we had been careful to only drink a little, something must have triggered her, and she drank more than she should.


    The reason Uh, I suppose that it was me


    Even if she was currently in a drunken state, the fact that she was pressing me so hard now suggested that it really had been bothering her. The way that I still treated her with formal politeness


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    The bird monster wanted a friendly rtionship So if it is so scared of Silver Fenrirs, then surely it would not have attacked? It just wanted to make contact, I suppose? It seems that way Mr. Takumi. Is that why you were so surprised earlier? One of the reasons theJanuary 27, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We watched the fenrirs fight Grau! Gaau! The fenrirs barked eagerly towards the forest. At the same time, Phillip and the guards ran out of the forest and towards us. Behind them, I heard the sound of the approaching orcs. Uhhow many were there? Isnt that too many? ...I thinkJanuary 11, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    The reason that Sherry was not injured HmmI guess its because she is a fenrir. To not be injured after being hit so hard Wuff. Wuff-wuff-wou! Uhhh, she says that fenrirs are able to protect themselves by enveloping their bodies in magic energy. Thats why she wasnt injured. ...That issoNovember 29, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 672

    Chapter 672


    Provoked by bad adults<hr>


    ¡°Hahaha! You better watch out for that Takumi. Just look at what he has done to Hart¡¯s daughter.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Euto?¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true. And yet Mr. Takumi¡­ I wish that they would just settle down so that I don¡¯t have to worry¡­¡±


    ¡°Even if that happens, there is a lot that Mr. Takumi doesn¡¯t not know. And so I¡¯m sure you will not be able to retire so quickly.¡±


    ¡°Tsk¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. Lugretta¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. We¡¯re still talking right now. Just ignore those other people!¡±


    ¡°ire usually isn¡¯t this bold¡­ I suppose it is because of the wine.¡±


    ¡°Yes, yes. While getting so drunk is notmendable, sometimes it is necessary.¡±


    As I was wondering how to handle the situation with Ms. ire, the others suddenly appeared behind us.


    They were all a little red as well, so they had been drinking quite a lot¡­ Perhaps they had seen what Ms. ire was doing and decided toe and make fun of me.


    That being said, I had already spoken to Mr. Ekenhart on the matter. It was supposed to be settled!


    ¡°Now is the time! Talk to me like you would Leo or Liza!¡±


    ¡°Uh, but you are nothing like them¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, Mr. Takumi. I think your fate is sealed.¡±


    ¡°Man up, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    How did this happen¡­ I should never have suggested that Ms. ire drink with me.


    I had no allies here, and Ms. ire looked like she was ready to pounce¡­


    Would Leo help if I asked her? The thought entered my mind, but I did not want to be a coward. And so I sighed.


    It couldn¡¯t be helped. I did not want to be rude to Ms. ire, and I was also sorry for my actions.


    ¡°Uhh¡­Ms¡­no, ire. Yes, ire. Well, that¡¯s a good start, I think. Thank you for always helping me. I look forward to¡­ Well, let¡¯s continue to be friends, alright?¡±


    ¡°Mr-Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°Ohh!¡±


    I held her by the shoulders, mostly to keep her at arm¡¯s length, and said it while looking into her eyes!


    ¡°It sounds¡­a little strange to just call you that, but¡­.¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    I said, just a little worried that she might not like it after all.


    However, she closed her eyes as if waiting for something¡­


    ¡°How bold!¡±


    ¡°While I feel bad for witnessing such a moment, there is a little pride as well.¡±


    ¡°I am just a little jealous¡­¡±


    ¡°Huh? Hey, Ms. ire?¡±


    ¡°Mr¡­Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°Kiss! Kiss!¡±


    Ms. ire¡¯s face was getting closer and closer.


    It was not the ideal situation for that kind of thing, and so I tried to hold her back by the shoulders. However, I was in an awkward position, and she leaned forward and our faces¡­nearly touched, but then the strength seemed to leave her and she copsed.


    Huh?


    ¡°Oh, dear¡­ That was her limit.¡±


    ¡°Too much excitement and drink?¡±


    ¡°It looks like it¡­ Because Mr. Takumi said her name while looking into her eyes.¡±


    As I caught Ms. ire and held her, the other three calmly analyzed the situation.


    ¡°No, no. This is not time to be talking about that. You should be more worried about Ms. ire¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­But why should we be worried when she looks so happy?¡±


    ¡°As her father, I feel a little conflicted¡­but at least it is Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I don¡¯t think there is a problem. While her breathing is slow, she is practically just sleeping.¡±


    The others said as they peered into her face. Indeed, she did look quite happy.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    It was officially recognised by the others ¡°Well, if you were to look very pretty around Mr. Takumi, then it might improve your rtionship. That would be very encouraging for all of us who guard and watch over you!¡± ¡°What!?¡± ¡°Huh!?¡± Ms. Johanna had suddenly looked at me before saying¡­May 6, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We talked with Mr. Harnes ¡°So, what happened with those dogs? I do not remember them being here thest time¡­¡± ¡°Yes. They were not.¡± First, Mr. Ekenhart asked the thing he had been wondering about. ¡°After Mr. Takumi and Leo saved our vige, we had to think of other¡­May 11, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    The new tea was ready Well, perhaps I should have made something that was easier to eat¡­ Something that you used a knife and a fork¡­ They could still use a knife to cut the hamburgers, but it would be a little difficult, as the bread was quite thick. The¡­April 9, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 673

    Chapter 673


    The calm before the lecture<hr>


    ¡°So¡­¡±


    ¡°What¡¯s happening, papa?¡±


    ¡°Huh? Ah, the bad adults needed to be scolded. It won¡¯t be interesting. Why don¡¯t you go and y with Tilura?¡±


    ¡°No, I want to see!¡±


    ¡°Well, I suppose it might help.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    I had left the sleeping Ms. ire to Johanna and Ms. Lyra. And I then made the bad adults sit down.


    Leo sighed with exasperation next to me. I asked her to stay here so that they would not escape.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi? I¡¯m sorry. Perhaps we went too far? I don¡¯t like to be watched by Leo like this.¡±


    ¡°Yes, she has to keep an eye on you. But more importantly, you don¡¯t look that drunk anymore? Were you pretending?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ I am stronger than ire when ites to drink¡­ But I am still drunk. See¡­? I¡¯m unstable¡­¡±


    ¡°Your bad acting isn¡¯t going to help, you know?¡±


    ¡°Takumi? I know we only just met today, but¡­ Surely we can talk about this?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s because we just met that you should have thought a little more before joining Mr. Ekenhart.¡±


    Mr. Euto was simr to Mr. Ekenhart, and did not appear to be all that drunk now. And he was also protesting while looking at Leo.


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°You don¡¯t seem to have much to say now, Ms. Lugretta?¡±


    ¡°While it was all His Excellency and Lord Liebert, I do regret those actions. Yes, I am sorry, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°An indecisive man and an impatient woman¡­ Yes, it was a scenario that made me more excited than usual.


    ¡°Uh¡­¡±


    ¡°Men should be more clear and decent when ites to such things. Especially when the woman has already done so much to try and draw his attention¡­ Oh, I am not thinking about such things now. No, not at all.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see¡­¡±


    Clearly, Ms. Lugretta wasn¡¯t regretting anything about what had been said. And I suddenly felt that it was best to not speak to her about it anymore.


    Mr. Euto also nced towards me, and it seemed like there were things he was also thinking, even if he did not say them.


    That was fine¡­ But it was also rather awkward¡­because she was notpletely wrong¡­


    ¡°In any case! It is not a bad thing to drink. The wine made in Range vige is quite delicious, after all. And so it is easy to drink a little too much.¡±


    ¡°Ye-yes. It happens sometimes.¡±


    ¡°It really is delicious. I have had wine from many different ces, but this one would rank quite high. So it was no surprise that I drank a little too much¡­¡±


    ¡°Still! That gives you no right to meddle with the affairs of a man and woman!¡±


    ¡°¡­Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Yes, I am sorry.¡±


    ¡°Sorry.¡±


    ¡°¡­I am sorry.¡±


    Leo had barked, and the three seemed to have misunderstood her, as they suddenly bowed their heads and apologized.


    Though, Leo was mostly just sighing, as she wanted too wanted me and Ms. ire to settle things already.


    Personally, I wished she wouldn¡¯t say such things. Especially around Liza.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Provoked by bad adults ¡°Hahaha! You better watch out for that Takumi. Just look at what he has done to Hart¡¯s daughter.¡± ¡°Mr. Euto?¡± ¡°That¡¯s true. And yet Mr. Takumi¡­ I wish that they would just settle down so that I don¡¯t have to worry¡­¡± ¡°Even if that happens, there¡­May 27, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I petted the parent fenrirs ¡°Uh¡­like this?¡± ¡°Gauu¡­¡± ¡°Gau-gau!¡± ¡°It seems like they like it¡­¡± I went between the two fenris and used both hands to rub their bellies. As they were so big, I could not rub their whole bodies at once, but I had plenty of experience with¡­January 3, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    We Went to Ractos with Liza I felt a little bad for Mr. Ekenhart, as he left looking quite disappointed about not being able to go to Ractos. Ms. ire would be going instead. I still remember seeing her raise her fist in triumph at this. I suppose she was¡­August 7, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 674

    Chapter 674


    Typical punishment<hr>


    After that, there was two hours of talking, that may or may not have been a lecture. Regardless, I was thirsty.


    ¡°¡­Hehe. Liza, I just thought of something amusing. Want to y?¡±


    ¡°Okay!¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi? I think I have an idea¡­but are you sure?¡±


    ¡°Takumi? Even I think that you are going too far.¡±


    ¡°Losers should ept their punishment. But if you could take it easy on us¡­¡±


    ¡°Hehe¡­ Alright, let¡¯s do it.¡±


    ¡°Okay!¡±


    ¡°Ahhhh!!¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    As the three of them sat there, quite helpless, Liza and I smiled and stood behind them with our arms raised.


    Of course, Liza was in charge of Ms. Lugretta. And like that, the sounds of their screams and Leo¡¯s sighing echoed through the evening sky¡­


    ¡ª


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­ I¡¯m sorry aboutst night! How embarrassing¡­ And I was being so careful¡­¡±


    The next day, Ms. ire apologized as soon as she saw me.


    ¡°You don¡¯t need to care about that, ire.¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­ What did you just say?¡±


    ¡°That it¡¯s nothing?¡±


    ¡°No, after that¡­¡±


    ¡°ire?¡±


    Her face had be quite red as she heard me say her name. Perhaps this was a little too sudden after all?


    ¡°¡­So the day hase when you refer to me in that way¡­¡±


    ¡°Uh, do you want me to go back?¡±


    ¡°No! NO! Not at all! You must stay like this!!¡±


    ¡°Uh, right¡­ Um. Okay.¡±


    In any case, ire was quite happy about it, and she put both hands on her cheeks and started to mutter things to herself.


    If she liked it, then there was no problem¡­ Sebastian would probably make fun of me, but I did not really care.


    ¡°Wuff! Kyan!¡±


    ¡°Oh, it¡¯s the maltese from yesterday¡­¡±


    ¡°Maltese?¡±


    ¡°Oh, uh. The type of dog¡­¡±


    While I was speaking to ire, a small white dog ran up to me while barking. It was the same dog I had seen yesterday.


    As it was jumping up and down and barking, it probably wanted some attention. I felt nostalgic, as Leo used to do the same when she was smaller.


    And so I picked it up with both hands.


    ¡°Still, it has such nice fur¡­ It is short but fluffy.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. I think it¡¯s¡­a summer cut right now. But it will be even more soft when it grows out.¡±


    With Leo, there had once been a time when I was so busy with work, that her fur grew so long that it touched the ground.


    There were some types of dogs who shed their fur before it grew that long, but maltese were not like that¡­ Back then, she would suddenly look very skinny when given a bath. Well, I suppose she is still like that now.


    As for the dog I was holding, it was carefully groomed, and so I could see that it was being taken care of quite well in the vige.


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°Kyan!¡±


    ¡°¡­It¡¯s angry at me.¡±


    ¡°Haha. Perhaps it is suspicious. Small dogs can be like that¡­just like Leo. Though, I doubt it has the courage to pounce on you.¡±


    ire must have wanted to pet it like Sherry, however, it barked at her angrily.


    Now that I thought about it, even Leo had taken some time to get used to me¡­ Though, as she got older, she started to like ying with children and became more sociable.


    ¡°But it seemed to have taken to you very quickly, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°That¡­is true. I wonder why? Perhaps it sensed something?¡±


    Was it because I was with Leo, who had been a maltese too? But it would have no way of knowing that.


    If anything, smelling like another dog would probably make them suspicious or jealous¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Iforted Tilura ¡°Well, it looks like they will arrive safely.¡± ¡°We¡¯re back!¡± ¡°Wuff!¡± After watching Tilura and Rahle for some time, therge building finally came into view. Somehow, Tilura had managed to stay on this whole time. Perhaps Rahle had sensed her fear, as there were no more¡­February 12, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    She Was Happy About The Hat ¡°That¡¯s right, Liza. Why don¡¯t you try putting this on?¡± ¡°Hmm?¡± After talking about the possibility of Liza using magic one day, we were about to leave Ms. Isabelle¡¯s store when I remembered something. It was the hat that Mr. Halton had made, so¡­August 24, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I kept my promise with the boys Mr. Ekenhart nodded at my exnation. He had already known some of the details regarding Liza¡¯s situation, but he now knew as much Ms. ire and me. It was possible that there was more, and Liza just hadn¡¯t told me yes, but there¡­November 11, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 675

    Chapter 675


    Leo was jealous<hr>


    ¡°Hmm. I don¡¯t know the reason¡­ Why did you take to me so quickly?¡±


    ¡°Wou?¡±


    ¡°¡­But unlike Leo or Sherry, you can¡¯t answer me.¡±


    ¡°Hehe. Perhaps it¡¯s because you talk to it like that, that it knows it is safe with you.¡±


    ¡°Is that so?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Sherry is like that as well. And you talk so gently to Leo.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Is that so?¡±


    ¡°Kuun¡­¡±


    I asked again, and it rubbed its head against my chest.


    As I spent a lot of time with Leo when no one was around, I had developed a habit of talking to her.


    ¡°Hmm?¡±


    As I was holding and petting the dog, a shadow was cast over my head¡­


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    ¡°Leo?¡±


    ¡°Ah, good Leo? What is it? Is something wrong?¡±


    ¡°Kyan!¡±


    When I turned around, I saw that Leo was sitting there and looking down at me.


    However, the maltese then barked at Leo, as if to tell her to not bother us. It really did have a lot of courage.


    ¡°Wou¡­wou-wou¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, I see¡­¡±


    ¡°What is it? She is really looking at that dog.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­I think that she is a little jealous that I was ying with it.¡±


    ¡°Jealous¡­ Leo?¡±


    ¡°¡­You wouldn¡¯t know, ire. But Leo used to look just like this dog. And so I would carry her a lot.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Leo barked and nodded in agreement. Unlike humans, she was honest about her feelings, and had no intention of hiding the fact that she was jealous.


    ¡°I see. When you told me that before, I found it very hard to imagine. So she used to be this cute. ¡­Good Leo. It is not like Mr. Takumi hates you now. Don¡¯t worry.¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    Leo did not seem very convinced by this, and she barked sadly and looked at the ground.


    She really did use more human-like gestures now.


    ¡°Ah, ire. That won¡¯t be enough to convince Leo. Hmm¡­ I¡¯m going to put you down now, alright?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°What should I do?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s easy. We just have to show Leo that we care about her as well. Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    Even though Leo could now understand us quite wellpared to before, it would take more to convince her¡­ Beforeing to this world, something simr had happened once with the neighbor¡¯s dog.


    And so I ced the maltese on the ground. It wagged its tail, thinking that I was going to y with it, and so I petted it on the head to make it quiet down.


    Then I looked Leo straight in the eyes and approached her.


    In the wild, looking at someone in the eyes was a sign of hostility, but it was different when you trusted each other.


    If anything, she would purposely look me in the eye and wag her tail happily.


    Of course, that still wasn¡¯t enough to know what the other was thinking¡­


    ¡°See? Squish-squish.¡±


    ¡°¡­Does she like having her cheeks pulled like that? I doubt Sherry would enjoy it.¡±


    ¡°Well, some don¡¯t like it¡­ I guess it depends on the dog?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Oh, are you finally cheering up?¡±


    While looking into Leo¡¯s eyes, I stretched out my hands and grabbed her cheeks and gently pulled on them.


    ire was a little puzzled, but assured her that this was my way of showing affection.


    Now that Leo was bigger, her cheeks were even more squishy and fun to y with. Leo let out a sigh and her tail started to wag, which showed that her mood was improving.


    I then petted her head and her tail wagged faster.


    I would have liked to pick her up in the end, but she was too big now¡­ So petting her was the best I could do.


    After all, we had known each other for a long time, and Leo was my buddy.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Sherry was traumatized by the trolls ¡°I don¡¯t mind. Besides, it¡¯s almost time for dinner.¡± ¡°So, father. You have something to discuss with Leo?¡± ¡°Mr. Takumi did not tell you?¡± ¡°Ah, I thought I would let them hear it from you¡­Mr. Ekenhart.¡± ¡°I see. Very well¡­¡± He then turned to¡­October 25, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Something was approaching ¡°Wuff¡­ Wou?¡± ¡°She is saying that there is a presence and smell that is both familiar and unfamiliar¡­¡± ¡°Familiar and unfamiliar¡­¡± Perhaps it was because the herbs were still having an effect¡­ But she could even smell it. We had just eaten lunch, and so the area¡­December 29, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Rahle had done well ¡°...Leo?¡± ¡°Wuff? Wuff-wuff!¡± ¡°Good morning. There, there. What happened?¡± I was standing where the servants had gathered, and so I could not see what was happening, as Leo and the fenrirs were blocking my view. Rahle was also spreading out his wings, so I could not¡­February 5, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 676

    Chapter 676


    The dogs liked Liza<hr>


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°You can do it because you know a lot about Leo. I would not know what to do if Leo was in a bad mood¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff! Kyan! Kyan!¡±


    ¡°Haha. Well, it¡¯s not just Leo. I think it is the same for many animals.¡±


    Iughed as the small maltese barked for attention as well.


    While it was no good to only y with one, there should be no problem if it is both.


    Once Leo understood that she was not forgotten, she sighed and didn¡¯t do anything else when I petted the small dog.


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyan! Kyan!¡±


    ¡°Wah! Hehehe¡­¡±


    ¡°Liza! Look what is happening, Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°Haha¡­ They really seem to like her. Is it because she is beastkin?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°¡­Pa¡­pa¡­! Ma-ma! Hel¡­!¡±


    As it would be breakfast time soon, I put the maltese on Leo¡¯s head, and ire and I made our way to the vige square. It was then that we encountered Liza, who was covered in dogs.


    Some were ying with her tail, while others stood on top of her or rubbed their face against hers. Well, they were all wagging their tails, so they must be having fun. And I was d to see Liza fitting in.


    Leo also barked in agreement.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Aren¡¯t you going to help her¡­?¡±


    Oh, I suppose I better do something. If they went too far, then Liza might not like dogs anymore.


    Though, I doubted that would happen.


    ¡°Alright, that¡¯s enough. I know that ying is fun, but do it in moderation, okay?¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°¡­Papa, mama. You took so long to help.¡±


    ¡°Haha, I¡¯m sorry. But you seemed to be having fun.¡±


    ¡°It was fun¡­but they were so energetic¡­¡±


    I approached Liza and peeled off the dogs one by one.


    After rescuing Liza, we sat down to have breakfast. Tilura and Rosalie seemed to be a little jealous about Liza. Apparently, all of the dogs they had been ying with had run off towards Liza when they saw her.


    Still, the children were wearing their hats and talking happily as they ate.


    Likest night, tables and chairs had been brought out, and we were all eating together.


    If it was just Mr. Ekenhart, ire and me, then we could have ate in Mr. Harnes¡¯s house. But with Tilura, Liza and the children, it would be too crowded.


    In the first ce, Leo could not go inside¡­ And there was also Rahle, the guards and servants as well.


    ¡°¡­It¡¯s so big.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Leo. It¡¯s only now that you can run around, okay? Once it is turned into a field, you will not be able to do that.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Kii!¡±


    ¡°You go too, Rahle!¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t lose, mama!¡±


    ¡°Oh, Leo is so excited.¡±


    After breakfast, we went to see thend that would be used for the fields and the house.


    As nned, it was on the northside of the vige.


    Aside from the forest in the distance, there really was nothing there. Still, I was exasperated to see that it was even more vast than I was expecting.


    Next to me, Liza, Rosalie, the maltese and Leo looked like they wanted to y. And so I sent them out, as it was a good opportunity to y in a ce that wasrger than the garden at the mansion.


    As Leo ran, Tilura rode on Rahle, and then Sherry chased after them.


    ¡°Huh¡­ So Takumi is going to live here. How do you feel about having a castle?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s not a castle¡­and since there is nothing here right now, I don¡¯t feel anything¡­¡±


    ¡°I suppose that¡¯s how it is. Though, I have actually made a castle. Everyone told me to make it bigger. But it became so big that I don¡¯t know what to do with it. Haha.¡±


    Euto said with augh. However, he really did not look like someone who lived in a big castle¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    The dogs jumped towards Leo ¡°Kyan-kyan!¡± ¡°Wuff!¡± ¡°Wou? Wuff-wuff.¡± ¡°You sure are popr, Leo. No one is scared of you anymore.¡± The people of the vige had a few dogs with them. Some were interested in Leo while others were more cautious. But once Leo moved towards them and licked¡­May 10, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Typical punishment After that, there was two hours of talking, that may or may not have been a lecture. Regardless, I was thirsty. ¡°...Hehe. Liza, I just thought of something amusing. Want to y?¡± ¡°Okay!¡± ¡°Mr. Takumi? I think I have an idea¡­but are you sure?¡± ¡°Takumi? Even I think¡­May 29, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    There was a creature that seemed familiar in Range Vige ¡°Well then, ording to our n, we will arrive at the vige tomorrow after lunch?¡± ¡°Yes. While there were some interruptions, we are not behind schedule. And so we can rest and eat before continuing on to the vige.¡± ¡°Very¡­May 9, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 677

    Chapter 677


    Preparations for the house were underway<hr>


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. I just heard from the chief that they are preparing a water system by connecting it to the river. Once that is finished, construction on the house can begin.¡±


    ¡°I see. I don¡¯t know much about such things, so I¡¯ll have to leave it to you¡­¡±


    As I was gazing at the vastnd and imagining how it would change, Mr. Sebastian approached and told me about what he and the chief had discussed after lunch.


    ¡°Also¡­ As is the country¡¯s policy, towns that are of a certain size always have a proper sewage system. ording to history books, this greatly improved the quality of life for many people, and allowed them to be clean.¡±


    ¡°Yes, it would be very inconvenient to not have that.¡±


    I didn¡¯t know how long it took them to have that here, but I had read that it was once quite bad in Europe.


    There were even terrible gues¡­ Well, I didn¡¯t know if that was the exact reason. Still, having a proper sewage system would certainly help.


    Still, I wonder how they did it? It seemed quiteplicated.


    ¡°Takumi, don¡¯t you remember what we talked about yesterday? There are other people like you here. And they shared their knowledge.¡±


    ¡°Ah, of course.¡±


    As I had looked a little puzzled after hearing Sebastian¡¯s exnation, Euto then cleared things up for me.


    I see¡­so there were other people from my world who came here. Some of them would have specialized knowledge.


    ¡°Well, while they may not have revolutionized things, they could help make certain improvements. There was one person I met aftering here. Someone with a lot of knowledge. Ah¡­it was so helpful.¡±


    ¡°I-I see¡­¡±


    Euto started to think of the past with a far away look.


    As for Sebastian, he took a few steps back. I suppose that as a butler, he did not want to get in the way when a member of the royal family was speaking.


    ¡°Ah, yes, yes. That¡¯s right. This sword was also made by someone who brought over their knowledge and skills. After all, they wanted their knowledge to be passed down. Hart told me that you used one too now. Is that right? Though, you do not have it on you now. Well, it is not something to show around too much. Still, it is very sharp, isn¡¯t it?¡±


    ¡°Well, it is used quite differently from other weapons. I don¡¯t know much about them myself. Still¡­so you are the one who had them made¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, because they are quite special. They are difficult to make¡­ I once tried it myself, and ended up breaking the de. It was such a waste.¡±


    At first, I had thought that those katanas were just made by someone who was a little entric. But since hardly anyone here knew about them, it seemed like the skill needed to make them was not widespread.


    The des were thin and mostly made for cutting¡­


    And in a world with so many different types of monsters, you could not say that it was the best option in every scenario.


    After all, those des were supposed to be used when fighting against other humans. Well, sometimes they might have cut through horses as well. But those were only in very rare cases, I think¡­


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    Someone tried to attack Leo While Leo had be huge as soon as we came to this world, I still could not believe that she was the strongest creature here. To me, she was always my buddy¡­even if her appearance changed a little. In any case, after seeing her fight¡­May 15, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Someone was advising the vigers As for thend where the house would be build for me and Ms. ire, it would be to the north of the chief¡¯s house, and next to the farnd. Because it would be more convenient if we lived close to the fields. However¡­ ¡°Isn¡¯t¡­May 13, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I would not see the main house for some time ¡°Papa! Mama!¡± ¡°Oh, Liza. So you¡¯re awake. Ms. Lyra. Thank you.¡± ¡°Wou!¡± ¡°Not at all. Liza searched for you two as soon as she woke up¡­ But I suppose she also got used to sleeping separately in the forest, and¡­February 22, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 678

    Chapter 678


    We talked about beastkin<hr>


    ¡°Well, these skills from other ces. We will have plenty of time to talk about itter.¡±


    ¡°That would be helpful. I still don¡¯t know much about what exists or doesn¡¯t exist here.¡±


    ¡°Yes. That¡¯s fine, but¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm?¡±


    Mr. Euto suddenly looked to where the others were running.


    ¡°I forgot to ask you about it yesterday¡­ But that is a beastkin, isn¡¯t it?¡±


    ¡°Ah, Liza. Yes. At least, that¡¯s what everyone says. And she has those ears and a tail.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ It is not that strange after seeing Leo. However, it is quite rare for these parts. The beastkin¡¯s kingdom is up north¡­ And the duke¡¯snds are far to the south.¡±¡°We met her in Ractos. She was adopted by someone there. However, that person died, so I am taking care of her now. Leo wanted to protect her, and I couldn¡¯t just leave her in the slums.¡±


    ¡°I see. Yes, I can understand why you did that. It is a harsh life. Even though things are not as bad here as they are in some other territories.¡±


    ¡°Beastkin¡­how nostalgic. I once met one with a great, fluffy tail. It was almost as soft as Leo¡¯s.¡±


    ¡°So you¡¯ve met other beastkin?¡±


    ¡°Well, I have lived for a very long time. There was more trade before the war. And beastkin used to visit often. Besides, there were Silver Fenrirs here, so they would generally be peaceful in these parts. Until the war, that is.¡±


    ¡°Huh. And they had the same ears and tail?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Well, they don¡¯t all look the same. Some ears are folded like that dog over there. And looked more like rabbits.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    Well, humans also had many different shapes and appearances, so it was no surprise.


    Still, why did they end up going to war with a country that they had once had a good rtionship with?


    ¡°About that war. Did they really invade first? Oh, you don¡¯t have to answer if you cannot.¡±


    ¡°No¡­ Not really. I cannot say everything, as it will shame the royal family. But it was our fault. So we can not me them for attacking us. At that time, I was traveling on my own, and only learned of it after it was toote. I rushed back to intervene¡­had to bow to their king and everything. Thankfully, people like Lugretta were then put in charge of me after that, in order to stay in contact.¡±


    Somehow, that was a relief to hear. That the country that Liza belonged to did not mean this country any harm.


    I did not want to have to fight them if it could be avoided.


    ¡°Ah, speaking of Lugretta. There is something I have to tell you.¡±


    ¡°What?¡±


    ¡°Well, not you, actually. Even if it is rted to you. That was why I was headed to Ractos¡­ I thought that Hart would be there. But then I heard about the Silver Fenrir and had to stop by this vige. That turned out to be a good thing.¡±


    ¡°Ms. Lugretta must have been mad¡­¡±


    ¡°Of course. She had a lot to say about this detour. You have no idea how chilling she can look when she is angry.¡±


    ¡°You seem to enjoy it¡­¡±


    If it were me, I would probably be scared and apologize.


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    I talked with the boys What to do with them now¡­ I had onlye here to capture Deam¡­ I had not expected to find these boys as they were about to be killed. ¡°Hmm¡­ Well, I suppose you should go to the guards, along with these men¡­¡± ¡°...Are we¡­September 13, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    It was difficult magic for humans ¡°Um¡­ In the first ce, is it really possible to use magic to make your movements faster?¡± Up until now, all the magic I had learned about had to do with wind and fire. Perhaps if you enveloped your body in wind¡­ But there¡­December 6, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I introduced Liza to Rosalie After we finished discussing the herbs, Gift, and wine, we all moved to the dining room. We had talked for so long that it was now dinner time. And just like before, Mr. Haines would be dining with us as a guest. But since Mr.¡­October 13, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 679

    Chapter 679


    Mr. Euto gathered everyone together<hr>


    ¡°So you have something to tell Mr. Ekenhart?¡±


    ¡°I have to tell him, but also someone else. I think her name was Anneliese Barsler.¡±


    ¡°Ms. Anne?¡±


    So he was headed to Ractos in order to speak to Ms. Anne.


    ¡°You look like you don¡¯t know why. It has to do with medicine and disease.¡±


    ¡°Ah!¡±


    Now that I thought about it, Mr. Ekenhart did say that the royal family was looking into the incident.


    I had thought of it as being taken care of¡­ But since Ms. Anne¡¯s father was behind it all, I suppose that was not the case.¡°Am I not allowed to hear it?¡±


    ¡°It should not be spread around, but I don¡¯t mind if you listen. After all, you were involved. Uh, you over there. Butler.¡±


    ¡°Yes, what is it?¡±


    ¡°I need you to gather some people together¡­to the chief¡¯s house.¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    Mr. Euro then told Sebastian to call Mr. Ekenhart, Ms. ire and Mr. Harnes as well.


    ¡°Sebastian should be able to gather them quickly. ¡­Leo! I have some business to attend to, so you stay here! And don¡¯t do anything dangerous!¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Okay!¡±


    ¡°Kii!¡±


    ¡°Everyone is here now.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    And so we had all gathered together at the chief¡¯s house.


    As they all knew the reason, everyone seemed to be a little nervous.


    Especially Ms. Anne. She was sitting facing Euto, and looked quite tense.


    ¡°Uh, Anneliese Barsler.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    ¡°You acted in a way that could be said to be quite hostile towards the count. Well, we will not bother with the details, since you all know¡­¡±


    ¡°Is it just too troublesome, Your Excellency?¡±


    ¡°¡­Not at all. So! The royal family has looked into the matter. Aside from the known incident, the Barsler hasmitted other crimes against his own people.¡±


    ¡°¡­Even though they were my father¡¯s actions, I ept some of the me.¡±


    ¡°Hmm. Well, normally I should just crush your house and have it reced by a different noble¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    ¡°Your Excellency¡­¡±


    ¡°I know, Hart. Anneliese Barsler.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Since Hart has made a request on your behalf, we have decided to be merciful.¡±


    ¡°Merciful?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Not so much to your father, though. He must take responsibility for what he has done. But you¡­are twenty?¡±


    ¡°I am neen, Your Excellency.¡±


    So she was younger than me¡­ I thought we were the same age. Well, it was only one year¡¯s difference.


    ¡°You are still young. But the condition is that you repent and work vigorously towards helping the people. From what I had heard, you seemed to not even understand that you did something wrong¡­ Though, you seem to have changed since then. Perhaps it was a good thing to leave you in Hart¡¯s care.¡±


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    We yed a trick on Mr. Ekenhart ¡°It looks like they won¡¯t recover for some time¡­¡± ¡°Hah¡­indeed¡­¡± As for Leo and Rahle, they were not interested in such things, and quickly went over to the fire where Ms. Lyra and the others were preparing the food. After some time had¡­May 3, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    People were eavesdropping ¡°Treating others well¡­I had never thought about such things before. I am a noble, a superior human. It was only natural that I should be treated as special, and there was no need to be concerned about others¡­¡± ¡°Well¡­you cannot be treated well if there is no¡­January 16, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    Mr. Hannes met Ms. Anne ¡°I am quite old¡­ And so my son and his wife told me to take Rosalie with me, just in case something happened. They coulde with me, as they were busy in the vige¡­¡± So that¡¯s why Rosalie was here. Indeed, Mr. Haines did¡­October 3, 2023


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 680

    Chapter 680


    Ms. Anne¡¯s treatment was decided<hr>


    ¡°Yes. I think it was because I did not go out much and talk with other people. But by staying with the duke and the others, I have learned of different ways of thinking, and how to talk withmoners. Ms. ire and Mr. Takumi have taught me a lot. I now understand how foolish I was.¡±


    Said Ms. Anne. She had not really¡­had much opportunity to speak with the people of the town. But it seemed she had learned a lot from talking to other people.


    Regardless, it wasn¡¯t for me to say what was right or wrong in this case. But I did feel like she had improved.


    ¡°When I first heard about you, I had my doubts that you could really change¡­ But I hope that things will go in a positive direction. And I think you should continue to stay under Hart¡¯s protection. And depending on how you conduct yourself, you may be able to take your father¡¯s ce, as his rightful heir. However, the rank will be demoted to viscountess. Though, there will always be the chance to rise again, if you manage yournds well. But just the same, if you should torment the people as your father did, you will find yourself in a very dangerous position indeed!¡±


    ¡°Yes, Your Excellency. I am grateful for your mercy. I shall not forget it, and promise to do my best for thends and people.¡±


    ¡°Good. As for your father, the royal family will deal with him. He will have no rights as a noble, and will live the rest of his days as a criminal. As for yournds, they will also be under our management until the day you can inherit them.¡±


    ¡°Certainly¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, that is everything. Thank you for your attendance, Anneliese, Hart, ire and Takumi.¡±¡°¡­Ahhh! Are they gone?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­I really don¡¯t like doing such things. It makes me tired¡­¡±


    ¡°You seemed to be ustomed to it?¡±


    ¡°Not at all. I guess I did it enough times to know how to act. But it still feels awkward to me.¡±


    After the Ms. Anne, ire and Sebastian left the room, Mr. Euro let out a great sigh and started to stretch his tense limbs.


    Ms. Lugretta looked exasperated.


    As for Ms. Anne, she had been looking at the floor the whole time, and I saw that she was crying. While things would not be easy, having such a father, at least ire and Sebastian were supporting her.


    She would surely be fine with their help¡­ Perhaps she was already feeling better and ying with Liza and Sherry now.


    ¡°Your Excellency, I am grateful for yourpassion.¡±


    ¡°Well, perhaps it would have been better to just have the entire house crushed. But it¡¯s so troublesome to put another family in their ce¡­ And I just know they would make me do all of the work¡­¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t think you should decide things based on that¡­ But surely you would have no trouble persuading the royal family? You are the original, after all.¡±


    ¡°Perhaps. But what would be the point in abdicating if I were to return and wield my authority? And so I don¡¯t go out unless it is unavoidable. I only took this message because it was easy, and I happened to be in the area. I prefer to travel freely. It is the best, isn¡¯t it Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ I suppose¡­¡±


    My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World<ul data-sharing-events-added="true"><li>Twitter</li><li>Facebook</li><li></li></ul>LikeLoading...


    I talked with Ms. Anne As for where the fenrirs slept, Leo had decided it. But Sebastian felt that it was still important for there to be human watchers as well, and so nothing changed there. Well, the fenrirs could only bark, and could notmunicate with us in detail.¡­January 13, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    I asked Rahle why there were trolls here ¡°If it¡¯s rted to Rahle¡¯s mountain, then we should probably ask about it. Leo, could you call Rahle?¡± ¡°Wuff. Awoooo!!¡± ¡°...Kii!¡± ¡°What is it?¡± ¡°We were having such a good time flying¡­what happened?¡± I had been worried about Ms. Anne, but she¡­May 8, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"


    There was a creature that seemed familiar in Range Vige ¡°Well then, ording to our n, we will arrive at the vige tomorrow after lunch?¡± ¡°Yes. While there were some interruptions, we are not behind schedule. And so we can rest and eat before continuing on to the vige.¡± ¡°Very¡­May 9, 2024


    In "My Beloved Dog is the Strongest in Another World"

 Chapter 681

    Chapter 681


    Tilura wanted to discuss something<hr>


    ¡°Perhaps we should have just had thends absorbed into Hart¡¯s.¡±


    ¡°Having territories that are toorge will make the other nobles angry. And that could lead to them distrusting the government.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s so troublesome. Well, the royal family mostly leaves the lords to their own devices without interfering, so it should be fine. Ah, that¡¯s right!¡±


    ¡°What is it, Your Excellency?¡±


    He suddenly looked towards me and raised his voice as if he had remembered something. I did not like his look at all¡­


    ¡°Takumi. Are you interested in nobles? You know, if Anneliese turns out to be a failure, and we have to find someone else¡­ Well, you seem like a good enough chap, and you have Leo. No one willin too loudly about it.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Mr. Takumi¡­would be able to deal with any arguments very easily¡­¡±


    ¡°While having him as a neighbor would be good¡­ My true wish is for him to stay here¡­ Hmm¡­¡±¡°Hey, hey. What are you all talking about? I would not make a good lord at all. My only goal is to nt herbs in this vige!¡±


    Having Leo, and the cooperation of ire and the duke in order to grow herbs in Range vige¡­I could not ask for more than that.


    I just wanted to live a slow and rxing life.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Leo will deal with any enemies you will make!¡±


    ¡°No, no! Also, please don¡¯t agree with him, Mr. Ekenhart¡­¡±


    And so I had to persuade them against the idea until Sebastian arrived and told us that it was lunch time.


    Though, since they wereughingter on, I suppose it was partially a joke.


    ¡°Sister, Mr. Takumi. And Leo¡­¡±


    ¡°What is it, Tilura? You don¡¯t seem well?¡±


    ¡°What happened?¡±


    ¡°Wou?¡±


    After lunch, we were rxing outside, when Tilura approached us.


    It was unusual to see her looking like this, and so we were all a little concerned.


    ¡°Um¡­it¡¯s about Rahle. Something is wrong¡­¡±


    ¡°With Rahle?¡±


    ¡°I saw them all ying together a moment ago, and they seemed fine. Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    All of us were puzzled by this, as we had not noticed that there was anything different about Rahle.


    When we went to look at the future farmnds, Rahle had been carrying Tilura and seemed to be having fun.


    But since Rahle was Tilura¡¯s familiar, perhaps there were things that she could sense.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know how to exin it¡­it feels as if Rahle is scared.¡±


    ¡°Scared¡­ But copper eagles are very strong monsters. And with Leo here as well¡­ It is a little strange to be scared.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ And it¡¯s not Leo that Rahle is scared of.¡±


    ¡°Perhaps Rahle did some mischief¡­ No, I doubt that. Maybe Leo would.¡±


    ¡°WOU!? WOU-WOU!!¡±


    ¡°Sorry, sorry. Yes, you wouldn¡¯t do it either. ¡­But you used to chew up things and make a mess.¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    Leo had a lot of free time when she was smaller, and so she would sometimes do that.


    Of course, I scolded her when that happened¡­but not too much, as I knew she probably felt some stress from being left alone.


    In any case, Leo was much smarter now, and understood that you shouldn¡¯t do such things.


    I apologized and petted her.


    ¡°It must be something very serious to scare Rahle¡­ Perhaps there is some danger¡­ Leo? Do you sense anything?¡±


    ¡°Wou? Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°She doesn¡¯t¡­ In that case¡­ Well, Rahle is right over there. It doesn¡¯t really look scared to me.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. If anything, it looks like it is having fun.¡±


    When I looked, I saw that Rahle was ying with Liza and the other children. Ms. ire also agreed that it did not look scared.

 Chapter 682

    Chapter 682


    Rahle was scared of a certain person<hr>


    ¡°But sometimes¡­Rahle shudders and pulls its head in¡­¡±


    Like a pigeon? Maybe it was just cold?


    I didn¡¯t know much about birds, but it seemed like they generally flew away when they were scared.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ But if Leo doesn¡¯t sense anything, there really shouldn¡¯t be anything dangerous here.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Sherry is the same, and seems to be having fun.¡±


    ¡°But I really sense it! I¡¯m not lying!¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Tilura. No one is calling you a liar.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±¡°Fine¡­¡±


    At that age, I suppose she was sensitive to the idea of adults thinking that she was making things up.


    ¡°Well, since Rahle is your familiar, there are things that only you can feel.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Tilura. We do not doubt you. After all, Rahle is still new here, and there is a lot that we do not know yet.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ But why is it like that?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ There is no reason for it to feel threatened.¡±


    ¡°Wou-wou!¡±


    ¡°Well¡­I have no idea.¡±


    ¡°I think that it¡¯s probably because of me!¡±


    ¡°¡­Mr. Euro?¡±


    ¡°Ahaha! I was eavesdropping on you.¡±


    ¡°That is very bad manners, Your Excellency.¡±


    While I was trying to think of a reason for it, Mr. Euto suddenly appeared behind us.


    Ms. Lugretta scolded him for his ill manners, but he paid her no mind.


    ¡°It wasn¡¯t anything secretive¡­ Still, you think that it¡¯s because of you? But I don¡¯t think Rahle even knows who you are.¡±


    ¡°Actually¡­ I had forgotten about it. But we met a long time ago.¡±


    ¡°You did?¡±


    ¡°Yes. But I will tell you about it some other time.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    He said, ncing over to Ms. ire.


    I suppose he did not want to talk about his age around her.


    That suggested that it was not just a few years ago. It could be decades or even hundreds of years ago that they met¡­ If it was that long ago, then it wouldn¡¯t be strange for him to forget about it.


    ¡°But Rahle is a copper eagle. They are incredibly powerful monsters.¡±


    ¡°That is true. It could probably destroy this country if it wanted to. Not that I would allow that to happen.¡±


    ¡°Are you stronger than Rahle then?¡±


    ¡°Yes, yes. Uh, Rahle, is it? I am indeed stronger than that copper eagle.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Sorry, not you, Leo. But let¡¯s y again some other time.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Your Excellency, it is dangerous to boast so loudly around a Silver Fenrir. Please be careful.¡±


    I suppose he would be able to defeat Rahle easily because of his Gift.


    I believe that it was magic control or something¡­ Infinite magic and energy. It made sense that he was stronger.


    As ire and Tilura didn¡¯t know about it, they probably didn¡¯t believe him¡­ Well, maybe Tilura did. She still had a pure heart, but I hoped that she would not grow up to be too naive¡­

 Chapter 683

    Chapter 683


    The reason that Rahle did not want to be enemies with humans<hr>


    ¡°I fought with this Rahle a long time ago. And after my overwhelming victory, I made it promise to avoid attacking humans. Well, I don¡¯t speak bird, so who knows if it even understood? At that time, it was the leader of arge group of monsters in the area.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­I see.¡±


    This was before he made this country. And while things were peaceful now, this used to be monster territory, and was filled with powerful creatures.


    No one was able to do anything, and it was all they could do to defend themselves when a monster asionally came out and invaded theirnd. But Euto had used his Gift to decrease the number of monsters and bring stability.


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Leo shook her head and let out a sigh.


    Even if it was a long time ago, she still thought it was sad that Rahle had lost.


    ¡°Ah, it¡¯s looking this way¡­it seems it really was because of Mr. Euto then.¡±¡°See? I didn¡¯t even beat it that badly. Just enough so it wouldn¡¯t be able to fly for some time. I don¡¯t know why it is that scared.¡±


    ¡°That sounds pretty bad to me.¡±


    ¡°Poor Rahle¡­¡±


    I didn¡¯t know who was in the wrong. Probably both of them.


    I could understand why Tilura looked sad about it.


    ¡°Huh. Hamburgers. I don¡¯t even remember what they tasted like. But I¡¯m pretty sure that they were delicious.¡±


    After we learned about what was agitating Rahle, we went back to inspecting thend. And then Tilura took Euto to speak with Rahle. And it was now time to prepare dinner.


    It was decided that I would cook for the people of the vige¡­


    Of course, since there were so many people, Liza, Ms. Lyra and the other servants, as well as the vigers, helped me.


    Part of it was because I wanted to do something for the vige that was epting me. But Euto had also requested something from his old world.


    Well, I had no idea how to make more traditional Japanese food. And the ingredients would be difficult toe by anyway. And so I just went with hamburgers, which were safe and easy.


    As for Rahle, it had nearly flown off when Euto tried to talk to it. But Leo barked and made it stay on the ground¡­ The poor thing.


    However, once it was established that he was not hostile, they seemed to be able to converse and enjoyed their time together. In the end, Rahle did not look very scared.


    That being said, it would sometimes flinch when Euto spoke to it. So it might still be scared subconsciously.


    To cause Rahle to experience such trauma¡­ It must have been very scary¡­having to fight Mr. Euto during that time.


    ¡°Why don¡¯t you just ask someone to make it? Or make it yourself?¡±


    ¡°I can¡¯t cook¡­ And no one I knew cooked either. Besides, I was much too busy to be thinking about such things.¡±


    ¡°Well, from what I¡¯ve heard, it does seem like you¡¯ve been involved in a lot of difficult troubles¡­¡±


    Like battling monsters and founding new countries or fighting wars.


    And who knew what he was keeping a secret or would tell meter.


    Currently, we were probably the only two people in this country who were originally from Japan¡­ Or any other world. Or with the Gift.


    But wait¡­ When we ate at Ractos that one time¡­

 Chapter 684

    Chapter 684


    Cooking time<hr>


    ¡°They had udon noodles.¡±


    ¡°Udon, huh? Yes, I¡¯ve seen them. They had different kinds of noodles here. But the taste was different, wasn¡¯t it?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Well, I¡¯m not a food enthusiast or anything. But I thought it was quite simr.¡±


    ¡°Oh? Perhaps they have improved since then.¡±


    It had been in a clear soup, And while notpletely the same, it had definitely been close.


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s not like all the food in the other world was better anyway.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true. The ingredients are different, and the food here is also delicious.¡±


    ¡°Yes, yes. Also, just because you make something that is good, does not mean it will be popr¡­ It has to catch people¡¯s attention and look nice as well¡­¡±¡°Papa! I brought it!¡±


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Oh, thank you, Liza. ¡­And thank you, Ms. Lyra.¡±


    They had brought the ingredients such a grounded meat, that I had asked for from Mr. Hannes and the vigers.


    It was the most important ingredient, but we did not bring any with us, and so I had to ask them for it.


    Liza was excited to be able to make them again.


    ¡°Oh, I won¡¯t dy you by talking anymore then. Perhaps I will go and pick on Rahle a little?¡±


    ¡°Haha. Please don¡¯t do that too much. Ms. Lugretta will be angry with you.¡±


    ¡°Ahh. She is always telling me how to act. But that is not a bad thing¡­¡±


    And so I left him to his devices and then started to make the hamburgers with the vigers who hade to help.


    Of course, we made it the same way, without onions, so that Leo would be able to eat them as well.


    While they may not be as good without onions, they should still be delicious enough for the vigers.


    ¡­Now that I thought of it, was it really true that Leo still couldn¡¯t eat the same things as before? Perhaps I should ask her about that.


    ¡°¡­Like this, papa?¡±


    ¡°Oh, you¡¯re even better at it now. Yes, that is right. And then put a dent right here.¡±


    ¡°Yes, you did that before! Uh, like this¡­ Uh, there is a hole in now¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha. You pushed it too hard. Don¡¯t worry, you can just fill it up again.¡±


    ¡°Okay!¡±


    I wasn¡¯t sure if she was actually getting better, but I thought it was important to praise her for trying.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, like this?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Very good, Ms. Lyra. You are clearly used to cooking.¡±


    ¡°No, not at all¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, what about this?¡±


    ¡°Please look over here as well, Mr. Takumi!¡±


    As everyone was used to cooking, they all did it well, as if it was not their first time. And so there was nothing for me to do but watch.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, over here!¡±


    ¡°No, here first! Hey, don¡¯t push me!¡±


    ¡°Ple-please calm down, everyone. I will check all of them!¡±


    For some reason, the vigers all wanted me to check their work.


    While most of them were good, there were some that were misshapen or too small. And so I gave some advice as if I was some professional.

 Chapter 685

    Chapter 685


    Pandemonium while cooking<hr>


    ¡°They finished cooking!¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Please put them over here!¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Here is the cheese and vegetables!¡±


    ¡°Just put them in the bread then!¡±


    ¡°There are not enough vegetables or cheese!¡±


    ¡°Here is more!¡±


    ¡°Take it over there!¡±¡°Ah, are you okay, Liza?¡±


    ¡°It was hot! But I¡¯m fine!¡±


    ¡°Be careful that you don¡¯t get burned!¡±


    The atmosphere while making the patties was pretty rxed.


    However, things changed once we started to cook them¡­and then ce them in the buns with the cheese and vegetables.


    Even though it was simple work, we had to prepare enough for a whole vige, and there were a lot of people helping, which made things busy.


    While it would still be good when cooled, it would taste the best when freshly cooked.


    The guards from the mansion were helping to carry the food. They did not have wagons with them, and so they had to be carried at once, which required a lot of strength.


    Even though Johanna didn¡¯t join with the cooking, she carried trays in each hand and moved like a professional waiter, which was surprising.


    When had she learned to do that?


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, the fire is weakening!¡±


    ¡°Leo¡­ No, tell Sebastian and the butlers to bring more firewood!¡±


    ¡°Understood!¡±


    Unlike a gas stove, it was difficult to control the heat. And so we had to add things that burned, like wood and branches¡­ Still, since there were a lot of people, there were also a lot of helpers.


    The vigers had given us some of their extra firewood and then Leo and Rahle, with the help of Sebastian and the others, had gone outside in order to gather more.


    They made several trips already, but we had still run out again.


    ¡°Please be careful when cutting the vegetables! We¡¯re not in a rush!¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I¡¯m used to doing this.¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t melt the cheese too much. It will be dangerous.¡±


    ¡°Yess!¡±


    There wouldn¡¯t be much of a problem if we could all calmly work, but things had be hectic, and I started to not know what was happening around me. And so even if they were experienced cooks, I thought it was not a bad thing to remind people to be careful.


    While we all wanted to eat delicious food, it was important to stay safe as well.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, we have brought more tree branches. Leo and the others seem like they are getting impatient.¡±


    ¡°Thank you! Please put them over there. As for Leo¡­tell her to wait just a little longer!¡±


    ¡°Certainly!¡±


    It was probably Mr. Ekenhart, Euro and Sherry that were waiting with Leo. But it¡¯s not like we could hurry up.


    When making this much food, if you waited for all of it to be finished, the ones you made first would get cold. And so we served the children and dogs first, and the other vigers.


    Normally, we would have prioritized feeding Mr. Euto or the duke, but since they wanted to eat with me, they would be servedst.


    ¡°Here are more!¡±


    ¡°Thank you! Let¡¯s do it, Liza!¡±


    ¡°Yes, let¡¯s do our best, Rosalie!¡±


    Ms. Lyra, Rosalie, and Liza were in charge of cooking the meat. I had heard Liza make a noise that sounded like a scream earlier. But though I was worried, she was fine.


    ¡°Gyaaa!¡±


    ¡°¡­Your Excellency, it¡¯s your fault for doing something as rude as stealing food.¡±


    ¡°No, you deliberately dropped it on my head, didn¡¯t you? Lugretta!¡±


    ¡°Hardly¡­ I would never do that. Now, why don¡¯t you go back and wait with Lord Liebert.¡±


    ¡°But he¡­is tangled in it too¡­?¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°Father, what are you doing? We already ate it before, so you should just wait patiently¡­¡±


    ¡°That is true. But¡­ The smell was just so good. Sorry, could you help me? I think that I am stuck¡­¡±

 Chapter 686

    Chapter 686


    Ms. Lugretta dealt with them<hr>


    ¡°Ms. Lugretta?¡±


    ¡°Let us leave them here so that they will be sorry. Please, pay them no mind and focus on the cooking.¡±


    ¡°Uh, alright¡­¡±


    I had heard a scream, and so when I went to look, I saw that Mr. Euto and Mr. Ekenhart had fallen into the pile of logs and branches.


    Apparently, they had been snitching food, and so Ms. Lugretta had deposited the wood on top of them. I had no idea how she was able to carry so much.


    ¡°Hah. We¡¯re finally finished. Everyone, thank you for your help!¡±


    ¡°And thank you, Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°We are used to working together to make food for the vige like this. But you must be quite tired, Mr. Takumi?¡±¡°Haha. I guess I am a little tired. But don¡¯t worry, I train a lot, so I will be fine.¡±


    ¡°I see. I wish my husband would train as well.¡±


    Everyone was smiling with looks of aplishment¡­ Yes, and no one was injured. That was good.


    And so I took Liza and Rosalie and we joined the others.


    ¡°Thank you for cooking, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    ¡°We managed to make enough for everyone. ¡­You two look a little tired?¡±


    We went to therge table that had been prepared, and then ire and the others stood up to greet us.


    Except for the two that had caused a scene earlier. They were leaning over the table and looked tired.


    ¡°I made sure to scold them for you. Mr. Takumi and the people of the vige were working hard to prepare this food, and should not have been bothered.¡±


    ¡°Really, father¡­ It was probably your idea, wasn¡¯t it?¡±


    ¡°ire¡­no, it wasn¡¯t me¡­¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t try to deny it, Hart. It is toote for us¡­¡±


    Mr. Euto clearly just wanted to hide his own guilt¡­ Though they behaved rudely, it was really not a big deal.


    ¡°In any case, since the food is ready, let us eat it before it gets cold.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart said, trying to change the subject.


    ire looked at him and sighed.


    ¡°Here you are, Lord Euto.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Let¡¯s eat then.¡±


    ¡°¡­Why does mine look a little misshapen?¡±


    As everyone started to eat their food, Ms. Anne muttered as she looked at her te.


    She seemed much better since Ist saw her. I didn¡¯t know if it was due to her personality, or because of ire¡¯s help. But I was d of it. I suppose it was also because she expected it to happen.


    ¡°Ah, that one was made by Liza. While this is her second time, it was still not perfect¡­¡±


    ¡°I wanted to cheer you up with some food¡­ I¡¯m sorry¡­¡±


    Apparently, Liza had noticed that Ms. Anne had not been herself earlier.


    Usually she would pat Liza on the head or y with Sherry. But she had not done that at all¡­


    And so not only had Liza shaped the patties, but she also cooked them for Ms. Anne. She even put the burger together and served it on the te. She must have really been worried¡­.

 Chapter 687

    Chapter 687


    Everyone enjoyed the food<hr>


    Liza had been looking at Ms. Anne and wondering if she was bullied. Perhaps she was thinking about her time in the slums¡­


    ¡°Liza made it? Oh¡­thank you. How nice of you. ¡­And¡­it is very delicious.¡±


    ¡°Really? Papa, she said it is good!¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s great.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff! Guff-guff.¡±


    ¡°¡­Leo, calm down a little.¡±


    ¡°Leo really does like the food that you make, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Wou! Wou!¡±¡°Hehe¡­Leo always looks happy when she is eating sausages, but she is even happier now.¡±


    ¡°Haha. I hope so.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ire smiled and Leo barked in agreement.


    Now that I think about it, she really did eat it so eagerly¡­ Even though it wasn¡¯t very good manners, I was d that she liked it.


    This was probably how Ms. Helena and the cooks felt when we enjoyed their food.


    ¡°¡­In any case, you¡¯ll have to take a bath when we return.¡±


    ¡°Wou!?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, you are smiling.¡±


    ¡°Phew¡­it really is delicious. Mr. Takumi¡¯s hamburgers. But these do seem a little different.¡±


    ¡°Ah, because of the ingredients.¡±


    ¡°Ingredients? But it looks exactly the same.¡±


    ¡°The meat isn¡¯t exactly the same asst time. And the bread and sauce is also different.¡±


    ¡°Ah, I see.¡±


    At the mansion, most of the meat had been orc.


    On top of that, the bread there was¡­a lot more expensive, as would be expected of such a house.


    The sauce used in the mansion was also simr to demi-ce, while this was closer to ketchup.


    Sauce made by professionals was more refined in vor, while this one had a more homemade feel.


    Still, both were good, and it was clear that everyone was satisfied.


    ¡°I don¡¯t mind, as it is still delicious. Hah¡­ It¡¯s been so long since I ate a burger¡­ I didn¡¯t even remember what they tasted like.¡±


    ¡°Haha, I¡¯m d that it was to your liking then.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Thank you, Takumi.¡±


    As he had been in this world for so long, Mr. Euto would not even remember what most food from his old world even tasted like.


    ¡°But it is one thing for us¡­ But what about the others? Especially the women? These are high in calories, aren¡¯t they? Even with vegetables.¡±


    ¡°Ah, well, I only thought about the taste¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. What are calories? Is there something we should know about in these things you¡¯ve been feeding us?¡±


    After Mr. Euto¡¯s statement, ire and the others suddenly became very concerned about the hamburgers.


    Well, they had mentioned being concerned about their diet before, and yet I had been quite thoughtless when making these¡­ I had only chosen it because it was easy, and delicious and could be made with different variations.


    And so I felt a little nervous when ire looked at me for an exnation. Well, what should I say¡­

 Chapter 688

    Chapter 688


    We would have to think of dieting methods


    ¡°¡­So, you will be fat if you eat these?¡±


    ¡°Well, if you eat a lot of them. Calories are about the energy your body uses. And since most foods have them¡­depending on how much you eat, you may gain a lot of weight.¡±


    Everyone, including Sebastian, listened with great interest as I exined.


    And though she had already finished eating, ire¡¯s hand was already shaking with regret.


    ¡°But I also ate it a few days ago¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, that should be fine.¡±


    ¡°It is so delicious! And it was made by Liza! And yet¡­it¡¯s going to make me gain weight?¡±


    ¡°Uh, Ms. Anne? I just said that if you eat too much of it.¡±¡°But it is more likely, isn¡¯t it? To think that I will have to abstain from something so good¡­¡±


    ¡°Anne, I understand how you feel, as I also enjoyed eating it. But you just have to think of it differently. After all, Mr. Takumi said that it is energy. So you just have to exercise after eating it!¡±


    ¡°Ah, that is true, Ms. ire! If I exercise, then the energy will be used for that!¡±


    ¡°Well¡­that is true¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart seemed to be deep in thought. Apparently, he was finding it hard to imagine ire exercising that much.


    ¡°You don¡¯t seem to be at all interested, Lugretta?¡±


    ¡°I train every day without fail. It is as Lady ire said. You just need to move your body after eating. I already do that, as someone who has to guard His Excellency. And so eating can do me no harm.¡±


    ¡°But I don¡¯t even need a guard. Well, I suppose it is good to have a messenger, though.¡±


    Not only was Ms. Lugretta was not interested in what I was saying, but she continued to eat withplete calm.


    In fact, she even started to eat more of them.


    Indeed, what she spoke of with Mr. Euto was true. And it was best to be prepared¡­in case something did happen.


    Though, it seemed like such things were rare. But she still took her job as a guard very seriously.


    But I also wondered if she was eating a little too much.


    Eating too much would make it difficult to move¡­


    Besides, how did someone so small even eat that much?


    ¡°Ah, Mr. Euto.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? What is it, Takumi?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know much about dieting¡­ What do you think? I wouldn¡¯t want them to get hurt by exercising too much.¡±


    ¡°Hmm. It is good in moderation, but they might go too far. Horse-riding is good exercise¡­hmm.¡±


    I had been working at a ckpany, and thought little about such things in the past.


    And though I had to eat in order to have enough energy to work, I often did not have much time, and just relied on energy drinks and supplements.


    ¡°Indeed. Perhaps the best way is just to change the way you eat? And as ast resort, you could always eat a little less.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t think that is very healthy.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Some people might even be sick. You should definitely avoid restrictions to that degree.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that is true. Still, you remember stuff like that from your past life?¡±


    ¡°Well, some things leave an impression, I suppose. Hmmm¡­ Yes, now that I think of it. There was something I remember that was low in calories.¡±


    ¡°What was it?¡±

 Chapter 689

    Chapter 689


    Diet food<hr>


    ¡°Njnac. It¡¯s made from potatoes and is highly nutritious and tasty.¡±


    ¡°Njac¡­from potatoes. Oh, konjac.¡±


    I had talked about it with Ms. Helena before.


    It was very popr for dieting, as it was rice in fiber.


    Though, we also had the dandelion tea.


    However¡­


    ¡°I can¡¯t think of any dishes that use it. Even if it¡¯s good on its own¡­it will take some thought.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m even more clueless, as I didn¡¯t cook at all. Except for barbecuing meat.¡±¡°Well, I guess I will talk to Ms. Helena about itter.¡±


    ¡°And who is that?¡±


    ¡°Ah, the head cook at the mansion. I always confide in her when ites to cooking.¡±


    ¡°Hmm. Well, then it¡¯s perfect. The mansion is close to Ractos, isn¡¯t it?¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°In that case, you will surely find the konjac in Ractos. They grow it here these days. Though, it was not always the case. And Ractos is a town where all kinds of things are gathered.¡±


    ¡°I did hear that there is a lot of trade happening there.¡±


    ¡°Yes, yes. It¡¯s not especiallyrgepared to the cities to the south, but you can find almost anything thates into the country. After all, nearly everyone, including nobles, have to travel through it in order to reach the royal capital or the north.¡±


    There were monsters to the north, and monsters and forests to the south. So if you wanted to travel safely, then it made sense to go through Ractos.


    That must be why there were so many merchants and travelers on the main street. It was lively, and there were rare things.


    ¡°In that case, I suppose Ms. Helena and I could search for it together when we return.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi! Let us search for it right now!¡±


    ¡°Indeed! It should be acquired at once and turned into a delicious dish!¡±


    ¡°ire, Ms. Anne¡­¡±


    They had been talking heatedly a moment ago. But it seemed like they had been listening to us, and so they quickly returned and insisted that we start the search at once.


    ¡°Anneliese. You do realize that you are going to the main house with me? There is no point in you going off to search for anything.¡±


    ¡°Ahh¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­After seeing father and Anne, I have regained my calm. I¡¯m sorry, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Haha. It¡¯s nothing. I was amused.¡±


    ire realized that she had gotten carried away, and apologized.


    Neither me or Mr. Euto cared about such things, and just smiled awkwardly.


    ¡°Ah, also¡­ Mr. Ekenhart?¡±


    ¡°Wh-what is it, Mr. Takumi? You don¡¯t think that I¡­these calories? Well, I would rather eat what I want, and not care about such things¡­¡±


    ¡°Uh, no. It wasn¡¯t about that¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart had been grabbing and eating the burgers without hesitation. It was clear that he did not care about his weight either. Besides, after hearing about it being energy, he seemed to have decided that he was fine, as long as he remained active.


    ¡°Since you finished your business in Range vige, I was wondering when you will be going home?¡±


    ¡°Hmm, indeed¡­ Sebastian. I think we will take it easy tomorrow, and leave the day after that. What do you say?¡±


    ¡°Yes. There should be no problem with that. The guards and horses will have plenty of time to rest.¡±


    So, there it is, Mr. Takumi. We will leave the vige the day after tomorrow.¡±


    ¡°I understand.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart hade to this vige in order to see thends that would be used for the herb fields. And to see if everything was fine after the orc attack. But the biggest reason was Ms. Anne.


    But she had already apologized to the vigers, and met with Mr. Euto. If only she really would continue to change in the right direction¡­

 Chapter 690

    Chapter 690


    It was suggested that an inn be built in Range vige<hr>


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right, Hart. Don¡¯t you think it would be best to have an inn built in this vige?¡±


    ¡°An inn?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Up until now, there were few travelers, as it is far from the main road. But that won¡¯t be the case any longer, will it? Besides, I had no ce to stay when I came here. Of course, one could always camp outside¡­ But Lugretta is quite picky about such things.¡±


    ¡°You must consider your position, Your Excellency. It would be one thing if you hid your identity, but you revealed yourself immediately. It would be a problem if you then slept outside.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true¡­¡±


    Mr. Euto raised his hands with exasperation.


    When we hade to this vige thest time, it was just me and Phillip, and so we stayed at Mr. Hannes¡¯s house. But since Mr. Euto was royalty, I suppose it couldn¡¯t be the same ce.


    That being said, they didn¡¯t have any other good ce, so he ended up staying in the repaired house that we had used previously.¡°Hmm. An inn¡­ Yes, it may be necessary. If Mr. Takumi makes his herb fields, then it will revitalize the vige. And there is also the wine. Travelers and merchants might visit. A ce for nobles will cost a lot and take time, though¡­ And is probably not necessary. What do you think, chief?¡±


    ¡°I would hope that you did think it was necessary¡­but, it canest, I think.¡±


    Not only would the inn need to berger, but they would have to choose the furnishings. Though, Mr. Ekenhart seemed like he didn¡¯t really care about such things.


    ¡°Umm, an inn¡­? Yes. We currently have houses that no one is using¡­¡±


    As there were more than ten of us, we were also staying in simr houses that had been repaired.


    Normally, the most important people, Mr. Ekenhart and Mr. Euto, would stay in the best house, which was the chief¡¯s. However, they both did not want to stay there¡­ And so ire, Tilura and Ms. Lyra stayed there instead.


    I thought that Leo would sleep with the horses likest time, but the vigers had worked hard to make a ce for her to sleep.


    It was a quickly built shed, but there was straw and nkets on the ground, so she would be quitefortable.


    ¡°However, once the fields are made, no one will be able to stay there.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ As it was rare to receive guests in the vige, they would usually stay at my house, or with Rai¡¯s parents.¡±


    ¡°Rai?¡±


    ¡°The house that is closest to the entrance. It is a little on therge side, so it is perfect.¡±


    Now that I thought about it, that house was a littlerger than the others.


    I had gotten used to living in a mansion, but tried to not think of it as the standard.


    ¡°Still, if there really will be an increase in guests, then there must be increased lodging as well.¡±


    ¡°And so why not build an inn, like His Excellency suggests?¡±


    ¡°Well, the vigers are still working to repair the old houses, so it will have to be after they are finished¡­ But there is sparend. And so it would not be hard to expand the vige to the south or east sides.¡±


    ¡°I see. Then it is settled. Let¡¯s see¡­ Sebastian. Search for skilled builders in Ractos and neighboring towns, and have them help with the inn.¡±


    ¡°Certainly. I was already going to gather such people for the house that Mr. Takumi and Lady ire are to live in.¡±


    ¡°Good.¡±


    ¡°But if it is the vige inn, then surely we should build it! We do not need the duke¡¯s help¡­¡±


    ¡°No, it is fine, chief. It is best to leave such things topetent people. Yes, you should focus on Mr. Takumi¡¯s house. Not that you have to do anything, as we will be building that as well. Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I will be sure to confide in the chief and make sure that everything goes smoothly.¡±


    ¡°Hmm. But¡­ There is no need to be so serious about it. I¡¯m sure Mr. Takumi and ire will do most of the work. Leave the work to the young. That¡¯s what I think.¡±

 Chapter 691

    Chapter 691


    I made suggestions about personnel<hr>


    ¡°However, if you¡¯re going to build an inn, then there will need to be people to run it.¡±


    ¡°Hmm, that¡¯s true¡­ I¡¯m sure there are plenty of people searching for work, so they should not be hard to find. Though, they will need to be trustworthy. After all, any trouble caused with customers could affect the reputation of the whole vige¡­¡±


    Well..I had an idea when it came to personnel.


    The idea came to me a short while ago. And there shouldn¡¯t be any problem with it¡­


    ¡°Excuse me, Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian. There was something I was thinking about, considering this subject.¡±


    ¡°Oh?¡±


    ¡°You have an idea?¡±


    ¡°Well, I heard that many of the servants at the mansion were originally from the orphanage in Ractos.¡±¡°Hmm. Yes, ire sees them directly and determines whether or not they are suited for the post.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Some of them havee from the main house, but recently, we hire from Ractos. And in my experience, the ones from the orphanage have all been hard workers.¡±


    ¡°Yes. And I found out after rescuing Liza, that they are overcrowded at the moment¡­¡±


    ¡°I have heard that as well. And so you think we should consider hiring people here, instead of just for the mansion?¡±


    ¡°Yes, but I don¡¯t think there will be many of them?¡±


    ¡°True¡­ It depends on how many people Mr. Takumi and hireter, but it should be about ten at the most.¡±


    Obviously, they would have to be old enough, and have a degree of knowledge about the work they would do. It would be much too difficult for us to have to teach everything to all of them.


    Still, even if we could hire a few, and make more space at the orphanage, it would still not solve the problem, as they would likely be full again.


    ¡°Um¡­why don¡¯t you just invite some of them here? Not necessarily for the mansion where they would work for me or ire.¡±


    ¡°You mean the new inn?¡±


    ¡°Yes. That way, more people will be able to work. And there will be space in the orphanage¡­for those children¡­¡±


    ¡°Like the ones that the guards rescued during the Deam incident?¡±


    ¡°Yes. There are like many other children there in the slums¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Sebastian. Do you have any idea how many there may be?¡±


    ¡°No¡­ There is too much traffic both in and out of the town. So we could never know the exact numbers. However, this could lead to there being fewer children there, decrease the size of the slums as well.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. While I could use my power to do something by force, it would only be temporary, and the problem would just continue¡­ That would not solve anything. Not in a ce like Ractos. Of course, Mr. Takumi¡¯s suggestion won¡¯t change things immediately either. But it will help make things better, little by little.¡±


    ¡°Yes, while it isn¡¯t aplete solution, it will still move things in a good direction. I am impressed, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. I was just thinking about ways to make space there¡­not trying to solve therger problems of the town.¡±


    While ire and Mr. Ekenhart had thought of it before, it had been difficult, as if it was officially the duke who was acting, then some people might think that it was unfair.


    Well, since I had deep ties to the house, it might still cause some toin. But it would be less troublesome than if ire did it.


    In any world, there were always people who harbored ill feelings, just because the person they were dealing with was a person of authority.

 Chapter 692

    Chapter 692


    My suggestion was epted<hr>


    As for what I had said, it was mainly based on what I had seen and heard at the orphanage, or what other people had told me.


    When we went with Liza, they told me that people usually left when they were of age. However, some ended up staying, like Milina. In her case, it was because she had not found suitable work.


    Part of the reason that I wanted there to be more space in the orphanage was because I had seen children like Mark in the slums.


    If they were able to enter the orphanage and eventually find ces to work, it would decrease the number of them who resorted to crime.


    Of course, we could not just take all of them to Range vige directly. People would worry. But it would be a different story if they were hired after being in the duke¡¯s orphanage.


    They would receive a proper education there, and would hopefully change for the better.


    ¡°Once we return to the mansion, I shall contact them.¡±


    ¡°Good. I will leave that to you. You and Takumi can take care of that.¡±¡°Yes. And I would like to visit the orphanage again. We will work things out.¡±


    I had wanted to stop by beforeing to Range vige, but we didn¡¯t have enough time.


    It would have been nice to talk to Ms. Anna.


    ¡°¡­First, I thought it was only going to involve making herbs. But it is expanding already.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. I think with you advice, Mr. Takumi, things will be more active within these territories¡­ It is not just herbs, but there is also the wine and medicine, after all. Who knows if it will all go well, but there will be so much to do¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, we must do our best. If Ractos and the surrounding area are doing well, it will help with the reputation of thesends. Other towns and viges will be affected as well. And so we must make sure that things go in a good direction.¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart and the others had helped me so much. And there were people in Ractos who had helped me as well.


    Whether or not I could do something for all of them remained to be seen. But if I could help with revitalizing the ce, and make people happy, it would be worth the effort.


    Huh? I had been meaning to just nt some herbs and live leisurely with Leo and Liza, but¡­ Was I going to be terribly busy?


    ¡­No, surely not¡­ Yes.


    ¡°Ractos is a key point, but the duke¡¯snds are also quite influential within the kingdom, and so its development will be celebrated. Yes, yes. I will sit back and enjoy seeing how things unfold.¡±


    ¡°Your Excellency, I told you about the kingdom¡¯s decision. You must return for now.¡±


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right¡­ How troublesome. Are you sure? Why did this happen¡­¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s because of you. You made the decision. I believe in the past, someone pretended to be you and ryed false information.¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­ Back then, there was still a lot of chaos due to the war. And so we had to be more cautious. I suppose I coulde up with other ways to prove that a message is from me¡­ But I¡¯m toozy. Nevermind. Let us go then.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I am sure that the others of the royal family are eagerly waiting for your return. Uh, but Your Excellency, first¡­you must visit the count¡­no, the viscount.¡±


    ¡°Ah, there was that as well. Yes, we must get that over with. Hmm¡­and there are othernds to visit.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. While they may not all be like the former count, we cannot visit all of them¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, we should at least hear stories about them. It might be more useful than actually seeing them? Because people always hide their true nature anyway. I will gather information and then let someone else handle it.¡±


    ¡°¡­It would be faster if you did it, but¡­ Hah¡­¡±


    Ms. Lugretta let out a sigh, but Mr. Euto had already made his decision.


    Looking at Mr. Ekenhart, you might think that nobles cared about their people. But humans were greedy creatures. And so there were probably plenty that only thought about their own profits, and who were happy to torment their people.


    ¡°You remind me of the Vice-shogun.¡±


    ¡°What¡¯s that?¡±


    ¡°Uh, a historical drama. He went around and punished local governors for their misdeeds¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah! I remember that! Indeed. I suppose I could just show my crest to prove who I am¡­ But I will also have to fight¡­¡±


    ¡°Fight, Your Excellency? I don¡¯t think¡­ Unless you use magic.¡±


    ¡°How dare you! When I am doing my best!¡±

 Chapter 693

    Chapter 693


    They asked for seconds<hr>


    ¡°That was you doing your best, Your Excellency? You do not need to force it. You have your strengths. Just like I have this sword.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ But I want to fight with a sword as well¡­¡±


    Mr. Ekenhart had said that Mr. Euto was not talented though, so Ms. Lugretta was probably right to react as she did.


    But even if he couldn¡¯t match a Silver Fenrir, he had the Gift and magic. So he should be satisfied.


    ¡°Hey, Takumi. Don¡¯t you agree? As a man, I want to fight by swinging around a sword!¡±


    ¡°Well, I understand the appeal¡­ And I am training with Mr. Ekenhart. But it¡¯s not because I want to look cool, but for protection.¡±


    ¡°Yes, you should have a way of protecting yourself. Even if you do have Leo.¡±


    ¡°You would have to be quite a fool to attack someone who has Leo¡­ But I suppose such people exist.¡±I would have to be careful to stick close to Leo.


    But even if that was not possible, I would probably be quite safe if I had a guard, like Phillip with me.


    But ire could take Sherry anywhere¡­ Well, until Sherry grew bigger, anyways.


    She would be like Fen and Riruru one day.


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ What is it, Leo?¡±


    As I was talking to Mr. Euto and Ms. Lugretta, Leo suddenly barked to get my attention.


    When I turned around, she was holding arge te and looking at me with expectation¡­and wagging her tail. So she wanted more.


    ¡°I guess you¡¯re still hungry¡­ But that was all we had. It was hard enough feeding everyone¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Wuff! Kuun¡­¡±


    ¡°You can show your stomach, but it doesn¡¯t change anything¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha! I am surprised to see a Silver Fenrir acting like this as well! Of course, knowing the situation, I suppose it makes sense.¡±


    As she used to be a Maltese dog, Mr. Euto nodded with satisfaction, but Ms. Lugretta was surprised.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, should I ask the vigers to make more?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ You could¡­ But I don¡¯t want to spoil her too much.¡±


    ¡°Papa, I will make it!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Kuun¡­?¡±


    ¡°Well, I suppose if Liza wants to do it. But Leo, don¡¯t eat too much, alright?¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    And so I asked Mr. Hannes, and we gathered more people and ingredients.


    As everyone had done it once before, things went quite smoothly.


    However, a problem arose once we started cooking them.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, everyone. At first it was just for Leo, but now we have to make more¡­¡±


    ¡°No, it isn¡¯t your fault, Mr. Takumi. It¡¯s my husband¡¯s fault.¡±


    Once we started to cook the meat¡­people were lured in by the smell, and they asked us for seconds.


    Well, Mr. Ekenhart, Mr. Euto and Phillip had been the first ones to do it.


    I was d that they liked it, but¡­


    It was still hard work, and we had to do it twice in one day¡­ I might have to eat some recovery herbs for fatigueter on¡­

 Chapter 694

    Chapter 694


    We thought of the field cycle<hr>


    The next day, we returned to thend where the herbs would be nted, and then with Mr. Ekenhart, ire, Mr. Hannes and Sebastian, we talked about howrge the fields would be.


    Like yesterday, Leo, Liza, Tilura and Rahle were ying by running or flying around. And Sherry and Ms. Anne were with them as well. She wanted to get some exercise after eating so much the previous day.


    As for Mr. Euto and Ms. Lugretta, they were somewhere in the vige, ying with the dogs.


    ¡°We are still testing back at the mansion¡­but the fields should be on the small side, and separated depending on what role.¡±


    ¡°Yes. A ce for me to use Weed Cultivation to grow them. And then another ce for them to multiply. And another ce with soil with added nutrients, for the next batch.¡±


    ¡°Well, there will be plenty of space left in that case¡­ Also, if the fields are too small, it will take a long time to make a lot of herbs.¡±


    ¡°However, if we make too much, then Mr. Takumi might faint.¡±


    ¡°Also, there won¡¯t be much time in between if it is only three fields. They grow in just a few days, don¡¯t they? But the soil might not be ready¡­¡±¡°In that case, we should have a few extra fields prepared, and they can be used in order.¡±


    We talked like this for some time, and it was decided that we would prepare ten fields.


    Considering the nutrients in the soil, it might not be enough. But we would just have to wait and see¡­ If it turned out to be no good, then we could just make more fields.


    Unlike farmers who grew vegetables, we were making nts that were not veryrge. And so the fields should not have to be too big


    ¡°Also¡­it does not have to be toorge, but¡­ I want a personal field that I can use as well. I still want to experiment with Weed Cultivation, to see what other things I can make. And as Mr. Ekenhart suggested before, I want to have some herbs in stock.¡±


    ¡°Are you sure, Mr. Takumi? You might get overworked again¡­¡±


    ire looked at me with concern.


    I had fainted before, so it was no wonder she was worried¡­


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. I won¡¯t push myself too hard. I¡¯ve done a lot more work back at the mansion. So I should be fine.¡±


    ¡°If you say so¡­ But do be careful.¡±


    ¡°I will. Thank you.¡±


    If it turned out that I was overextending myself, then I would just do it on my days off.


    I wanted to avoid situations like my previous job, where I was overworked. I wanted to take things easy with Liza and Leo.


    Also, I wanted time to go to Ractos and speak with Ms. Isabelle or Mr. Kalis. I wanted to eat the food there¡­with ire, if she had time.


    Though, I kept thatst part to myself, as I knew that Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian would immediately jump at the opportunity to make fun of me.


    ¡°Wou! Wou!¡±


    ¡°Woah! That¡¯s amazing, mama!¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Is something happening with Leo?¡±


    ¡°They were running just a moment ago, but they have stopped now. Rahle and Tilura are with them as well¡­ Anne is carrying Sherry. But they are a short distance away¡­¡±


    ¡°Ms. Anne is¡­still a little scared of Leo. Though, not nearly as scared as she was when they first met¡­¡±


    ¡°She should be thankful that she didn¡¯t have to undergo the same kind of forceful treatment that I did. She would probably cry¡­¡±


    After we had finished talking about the herb fields, we noticed that Leo and the others, who had been running around earlier, had not stopped and gathered together. And they seemed to be very excited about something.

 Chapter 695

    Chapter 695


    Leo was digging a hole<hr>


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s go and see.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Since we already finished talking¡­¡±


    ¡°In that case, I shall move things along, as discussed.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, chief.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I will do my best for the vige, and Mr. Takumi. In hopes that it will be a worthy contribution to the duke and all who live on hisnds.¡±


    ¡°¡­Uh, you don¡¯t need to be that serious about it¡­ But I¡¯m sure there won¡¯t be any trouble. ire will be here as well.¡±


    Perhaps it was no surprise that Mr. Hannes would be so serious about it. But I agreed. Since ire and Sebastian would also be helping, there was no need for him to feel wholly responsible.


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Wou!¡±¡°Woah¡­that¡¯s so deep, mama!¡±


    ¡°Leo is amazing! Can Rahle dig like that?¡±


    ¡°Kii? Kii!¡±


    ¡°Flying is very different from digging.¡±


    ¡°Kyau?¡±


    ¡°Uh, you want to go inside too, Sherry? Go ahead. I¡­am too big to go in.¡±


    ¡°¡­Leo. What are you doing?¡±


    ¡°Wou? Wou! Wou-wou!¡±


    With the others, I walked over to where Leo and the others were talking excitedly.


    Leo then turned to me with a proud expression¡­ Uh¡­she had dug a hole?


    ¡°A hole¡­ Ah, so Liza is inside.¡±


    ¡°Papa! Mama said it¡¯s okay to dig here, because there is a lot of space! Isn¡¯t this amazing? Mama dug this so quickly!¡±


    ¡°Leo dug it without using any magic!¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Well, as long as you are having fun¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff!? Wou-wou!¡±


    ¡°No, I¡¯m not mad. I¡¯m sure it¡¯s fine if you¡¯re doing it in an open ce like this¡­ But you still have to fill it upter.¡±


    There was a hole that was about a meter wide¡­ As for how deep, it went up to her chest, so it was probably around a meter as well.


    Both Liza and Tilura seemed happy about it. But what was the purpose of digging a hole?


    I wondered and asked Leo. But Leo thought that I was upset, and so she shook her head and barked her excuses.


    ¡°Still¡­ Now that I think about it, you haven¡¯t dug at all sinceing here. So you might as well have some fun for now.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    Leo was happy after I gave my permission.


    That being said, she could not dig them too deep. If Leo got carried away, she would probably start digging holes everywhere. And depending on how deep they were, it could get quite dangerous.


    ¡°Did good Leo always like to dig holes?¡±


    ¡°Well, it was a bit of a habit before.¡±


    ¡°I see. Sometimes, Sherry would look like she was trying to dig around her bed. And I wondered why.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Leo did that. I suppose it was when she was restless. Or it¡¯s a way of making your sleeping ce morefortable? Though, she usually failed¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Sherry will often look a little sulky afterwards. So you must be right that they have failed. Hehe¡­¡±


    ireughed at the thought, and I remembered how Leo was when she was small.


    She would often try to dig into cushions¡­ I thought it was due to stress, but she would also do the same thing outside. I did some research, and read that it could be an attempt to make a nest.


    Of course, it depended on the dog.


    In any case, I was just d that she did not use the same magic she had before. The magic she used to dig a hole when we had to bury that troll.


    If she did that here, the hole would have been too big, and everyone would have fallen into it.

 Chapter 696

    Chapter 696


    The children enjoyed digging<hr>


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    ¡°I want to dig too!¡±


    ¡°Liza. Calm down. You wouldn¡¯t want to hurt yourself.¡±


    ¡°Okay, papa!¡±


    ¡°Ah, I want to do it too.¡±


    ¡°Kii? Kii¡­¡±


    ¡°Tilura¡­ Should the duke¡¯s daughter really be doing something like that?¡±


    ¡°Well, Leo is doing it. And it is just for y. Having fun is what is important. Still, be careful, Tilura.¡±¡°Yes, father!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°You too, Sherry? Very well¡­ Just do what Leo is doing then.¡±


    As Leo started diffing another hole, Liza and Tilura started digging with their hands as well.


    Unsurprisingly, Ms. Anne did not join them, but sheughed and watched.


    She had started to act like an older sister around Liza and Tilura recently. I suppose it was due to being at the mansion and being close to ire.


    ¡°Yes, yes. It¡¯s good to have fun. There¡¯s nothing like the sight of innocent children ying. It reminds me of when ire was young. Though, she was also quite the troublemaker. One time, she put balls of mud on my dinner te and tried to make me eat them¡­ Compared to that, this is nothing.¡±


    ¡°Father! Must you bring up old memories like that? And in front of Mr. Yakumi¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, such things are hard to forget. Still, if only you had just wanted to show me them¡­¡±


    ¡°Father!¡±


    I could easily imagine ire serving her father dirt on a te. It was no wonder he didn¡¯t know what to do.


    What if Liza did that to me? Even Leo wouldn¡¯t eat that. So I would have to figure out a way to get out of doing it¡­


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. What are you thinking about?¡±


    ¡°Oh, I was just imagining if Liza did the same to me.¡±


    ¡°As if I would teach Liza to do that! You are making fun of me too, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Haha. Well, your reactions are amusing.¡±


    ¡°Ah, Mr. Takumi. If you want to know what to do when that happens¡­¡±


    ¡°Father!¡±


    ¡°Oh, ire is angry. We better drop the subject then.¡±


    ¡°Leo. Don¡¯t dig too deep, alright?¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    After teasing ire, we watched them ying for some time. Leo would sometimes get carried away, and so I would have to remind her.


    One meter was dangerous enough, but if she were to dig deep enough that a human could not get out¡­ It would be very bad if someone fell in and no one noticed.


    ¡°Still, Mr. Takumi. If Leo continues to dig holes and fill them up again, it will help to soften the soil.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s true. Though, I think that the soil was already quite soft to begin with.¡±


    It had rained not long ago, so the ground was on the soft side. I didn¡¯t know how much of a difference Leo¡¯s efforts would make¡­but it was probably better than nothing. Well, I suppose I could praise her for itter.


    ¡­Even though she was likely not thinking about that.


    ¡ª


    The next day, after eating breakfast, it was time to see Mr. Ekenhart and the others off, as they would be returning to the main house.


    It was Mr. Ekenhart, three guards, and Ms. Anne.


    However, since a carriage was too slow and boring, they would only be traveling on horseback. I hoped that Ms. Anne would survive.


    ¡°Now, Mr. Takumi, ire, Tilura, Leo¡­ Goodbye for now.¡±


    ¡°Yes, be safe.¡±


    ¡°Please be careful, father.¡±


    ¡°Goodbye, father!¡±


    ¡°Yes. Next time¡­ Yes, I shall visit when Mr. Takumi and ire¡¯s house is ready. And then we can celebrate.¡±


    ¡°Father!?¡±

 Chapter 697

    Chapter 697


    We saw them off<hr>


    ¡°I have to start thinking about my grandchildren. Haha! Farewell!¡±


    ¡°Safe travels, Lord Ekenhart!¡±


    Thest thing Mr. Ekenhart did before leaving, was to tease ire¡­


    The mention of grandchildren had made her very red in the face.


    He looked like a viin,ughing as he rode away.


    ¡°Well, we will be going too, Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Euto. Goodbye.¡±


    After Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s departure, it was Mr. Euto.Apparently, he was going to go around and visit the other nobles. It would surely be a long journey.


    There were forests and mountains in the way, and so if you did not go through Ractos, then you would have to go around, so a normal journey back to the capital would take a long time anyway.


    But ording to what I heard yesterday, they would go through mountains and forests in order to arrive sooner. I felt bad for Ms. Lugretta¡­ But with the Gift and magic, it should not be too bad for them.


    ¡°I was d to meet someone from my old home after so long, Takumi.¡±


    ¡°As was I. Though, I never expected that someone from there would be a king here¡­¡±


    As I had plenty ofpany with Leo and the others, I was not lonely. But it made me feel good, just knowing that there were others like me.


    There was a sense offort with having something that I can share past memories with.


    ¡°While I¡¯m sure you¡¯ll be fine¡­be careful. I¡¯ll be waiting for the day we meet again.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll enjoy my journey and return eventually. Of course, I¡¯ll be careful. Ah, by the way¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm?¡±


    As weughed and shook hands, Mr. Euto seemed to suddenly remember something.


    Had he forgotten to tell me something?


    ¡°Since Hart will be here at the same time, I¡¯ll visit once your house ispleted.¡±


    ¡°¡­Uh, are you sure?¡±


    Somehow, I imagined that his journey would take longer than that¡­


    ¡°I¡¯ll manage. I intend to take shortcuts, even if Lugretta doesn¡¯t like it.¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­ I¡¯m used to it now, but I wish Your Excellency would learn to walk on proper roads¡­¡±


    ¡°Ahaha! But it¡¯s so fun!¡±


    ¡°Climbing cliffs is not fun¡­¡±


    Ms. Lugretta must have overheard us, as she now joined the conversation with a sigh.


    It was one thing if you could walk, even when there wasn¡¯t a path. But a cliff¡­I could not do that. His Gift and magic really were amazing.


    ¡°Well, see youter then, Takumi!¡±


    ¡°Farewell, Mr. Takumi, Lady ire. And you people of Range vige¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. You two be careful!¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    Mr. Euto ran energetically, while Ms. Lugretta followed him on horseback.


    ¡°Well, I think things will be a lot quieter now?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. While I will not say they are loud¡­they did like to make a scene. Though, even you would join them in teasing me, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Haha. Well, your reactions were cute, so I couldn¡¯t help it.¡±


    ¡°Cute!? ¡­Oh, you cannot fool me with such words!¡±


    She said as she red at me. I was no good at lying. Though, I also wondered if she wasn¡¯t used to it by now. Regardless, the part about her being cute was true


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff! Kyan!¡±


    ¡°Oh, I thought it was quiet until you showed up.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Papa!¡±


    ¡°Oh! Haha. And now Leo and Liza are here to make things even less quiet.¡±


    ¡°Hehe¡­ Everyone likes you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    I had heard something barking around my feet, and saw that it was the little Maltese dog. It wanted to be picked up.


    As I carried and petted it, Leo sat down next to me, and then Liza came charging, and I nearly dropped the dog.


    But after patting them both on the head, Leo and Liza seemed to be satisfied, and they ran off to the other children¡­ How energetic.


    The Maltese was still rxed in my arms¡­ It really did remind me of the old Leo¡­

 Chapter 698

    Chapter 698


    The Maltese liked ire as well<hr>


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, can I try holding it?¡±


    ¡°You, ire? Hmm, I don¡¯t mind. Uh, like this?¡±


    ¡°No, you can put it on the ground first. That way, it will get used to me.¡±


    ¡°Very well. Down you go¡­¡±


    ¡°Kuun¡­¡±


    It had gotten mad at ire before, when she had tried to touch it. And so she wanted to try picking it up off the ground this time.


    ¡°Uh¡­¡±


    ¡°You should squat down first. So you are as close to its level as possible.¡±¡°Yes¡­down¡­¡±


    Dogs would sometimes be cautious if something approached them from high up.


    And so ire bent down and then reached out so that her hand was nearly touching the ground.


    It did not need to be that low¡­ As long as it was lower than its nose. But I suppose she did not want to take any chances afterst time.


    As for the dog, it did not look scared¡­ Well,st time, it was mostly just mad that ire was interfering.


    ¡°Wuff? Sniff¡­sniff.¡±


    After tilting its head to the side, the dog approached ire and smelled her hand.


    ¡°Ah, Mr. Takumi¡­it let me touch it!¡±


    ¡°Yes. You should be able to hold it now. But don¡¯t pick it up too suddenly. Pet its head first.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ There, there. Very good. Now¡­ Oh, it¡¯s not as heavy as Sherry.¡±


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s a small dog. Smaller than a fenrir pup. This one won¡¯t be very big even as an adult.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Hehe. It is very cute. It looks a little like Leo. And so soft¡­¡±


    After slowly reaching out so that she did not surprise it, ire seeded in picking up the dog.


    She then smiled as she petted it.


    And the Maltese seemed to enjoy being as well¡­


    ¡°Kuunn¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha. I guess you like me now?¡±


    ¡°Licking a person¡¯s face can have several meanings, but it usually is a sign of affection.¡±


    ¡°I see. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Kuun.¡±


    The Maltese now understood that ire was a gentle person. Going slow really was the right way to do it.


    ¡°Kyau?¡±


    ¡°Sherry. Be nice, okay?¡±


    After that, ire took the Maltese to the lunch table, where it met with Sherry.


    Unlike with Leo, the Maltese moved close to Sherry¡¯s face and sniffed¡­ They would have seen each other before, but this was their first proper meeting.


    Sherry wasrger than the Maltese, but closer to an ordinary dogpared to Leo. So it probably just saw Sherry was one of them.


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyau? Kyuu¡­¡±


    ¡°It seems to like Sherry. But Sherry doesn¡¯t know what to do¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha. That was quick.¡±


    After smelling her, the Maltese jumped out of ire¡¯s arms and onto Sherry¡¯s chair. And then it pressed itself against her.


    And while Sherry was a little confused, she did not seem angry. And ire told them to be friends.


    ¡°Oh, what happened to Leo?¡±


    ¡°Ah, she¡¯s digging with Liza and the others again. She really enjoys it.¡±


    After lunch, I spoke with Mr. Hannes. He was curious about Leo¡¯s absence.


    Outside, Leo and Liza were almost always with me.


    Apparently, they had heard the conversation about how it could help to soften the ground, and they were eager to contribute more.


    Still, I had to warn them to not get carried away. They could not dig too deeply, and had to fill in the holes afterwards¡­

 Chapter 699

    Chapter 699


    We talked about management in regards to the medicinal herbs<hr>


    As for the digging I cared most about Leo and Liza having fun, and so I would not stop them.


    Besides, there were few opportunities for them to relieve stress like this. And they would not be able to dig so freely once we started with the nting.


    ¡­But perhaps there would be other ces.


    ¡°Now then, we should discuss the management of harvested herbs, as well as transportation and selling¡­¡±


    Said Sebastian, as we sat down with Mr. Hannes and the others.


    Though, ire and I would mostly just be listening for now.


    Obviously, they would be separated once harvested. But they would need a ce to be stored and turned into medicine.


    Right now, we only had Ramogi, which would be mixed with the wine, but we meant to sell other kinds of herbster. And so a proper ce to make the medicine had to be built.I had imagined something like a small hut, but the others would probably want to prepare arger building¡­ Well, that was fine, since we also needed storage space as well.


    Milina would probably be in charge of concocting¡­


    Nick could be in charge of transportation to Ractos. But we would probably sell them in more ces than just Mr. Kalis¡¯s store.


    As they were talking as if there would be a great quantity of herbs, I was reminded of how much work it would all be.


    That being said, the herbs grew at such an rming speed at the mansion. So in the end, it was really just a matter of using Weed Cultivation.


    ¡°Hmmm¡­ What do you think¡­?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ In any case, we must search for people once we return to the mansion. People who know about thends around Ractos and Range vige would be best. Also, the othernds as well.¡±


    ¡°Yes, certainly. We will recruit from surrounding viges and gather those who are good with geography.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    Transportation was one of the more difficult matters.


    Of course, much of it would involve wagons.


    ire would be quite busy, and could not go every time. And I had to make herbs, and could not leave Range vige for so many days.


    If Nick was in charge of products going to Ractos, then we needed others to make deliveries to the other towns and viges.


    Most people here lived in a small area and rarely traveled. And so it might be difficult to find the right personnel for the job.


    ¡°But there is no need to rush, as the fields have not been nted yet. We haven¡¯t even secured buyers yet. In any case, we will have tomunicate regrly with you, Mr. Hannes, and share information.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Of course. I will also be on the lookout. Though, we rarely see new people here.¡±


    ¡°The important thing now is to widen the market¡­ Ractos is fine, but other viges are not used to having a steady supply of cheap herbs.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. They would either gather the herbs themselves, or go out to buy them.¡±


    ¡°Gathering herbs or leaving to other viges is such a hassle. And so they should sell well if we can supply them with it.¡±


    There were hardly any medicine stores in the smaller viges.


    And since they tended to be so busy, in most cases, they resorted to going out and picking the herbs themselves.


    As for the herbs that had been transformed into an ideal state, most could be saved. And so it would be useful to have them in stock for emergencies.


    It was the same with the medicine. Since theysted a long time¡­ Of course, I suggested that they not be sold for too high a price. Eitherparable to other stores or even cheaper.


    That way, they would not have to travel to other towns and viges, or spend too much money.


    As Mr. Hannes knew what it was like, he was very happy and agreed with this suggestion.


    It meant lower profits, but we would still sell enough so that we weren¡¯t losing money. And so Sebastian gave his approval as well.


    At the same time, he muttered something about hurrying up and calling my butler from the main house, so that he could help to manage these matters¡­

 Chapter 700

    Chapter 700


    We departed for the mansion<hr>


    ¡°Lady ire, Mr. Takumi. Good Leo. Please be careful¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Two days after Mr. Ekenhart and the others left, we said our goodbyes to Mr. Hannes at the gate of the vige, as it was time for us to return.


    The vigers had alsoe out to see us off.


    ¡°Kyun¡­kun.¡±


    ¡°Kyau. Kyu-kyu.¡±The Maltese was pressing its nose against Sherry and looked very sad. Apparently, it could tell that we were leaving. How smart.


    Sherry also barked as if to console it, and they rubbed their faces together.


    It had really taken to Sherry for some reason, and the two had been inseparable for the past two days.


    When Sherry would join Leo and Tilura with the digging, the Maltese had followed and ended up falling into the hole. And so Leo had to rescue it.


    ¡°Sherry. Let¡¯s go.¡±


    ¡°Kyuu¡­ Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Kuuun. Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ire called to Sherry before she stepped into the carriage, and then Sherry and the Maltese said their goodbyes.


    It seemed like Sherry was promising that she would return.


    ¡°Now, let us be off!¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Rahle, make sure to fly close to everyone!¡±


    ¡°Kii!¡±


    And like that, the carriage moved forward. Just as before, Sebastian was in the driver¡¯s seat.


    Liza and I rode on Leo, while Tilura rode on Rahle.


    This time, Tilura was the only passenger. Though, Rahle had carried others several times in the vige, and we confirmed again that it was safe.


    A few dayster, we were somewhere between Ractos and the mansion.


    As we camped outside and slept in tents¡­it was not exactly the mostfortable. But we still got enough rest.


    ¡°Hmm¡­?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°What is it, papa and mama?¡±


    As we got closer to the mansion, I saw a familiar figure near the gates in the distance.


    It was getting dark, and so I could not see clearly, but¡­I was quite sure about it.


    Awoooo!


    The howling came from the gate. It echoed loudly, and the guards and horses suddenly stopped.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Is that¡­?¡±


    ¡°They seem to be weing us? At least, that is what Leo is saying¡­¡±


    ¡°I see. And is it¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. I think it is. Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    It seemed like they knew that Leo was with us, and so they had howled¡­

 Chapter 701

    Chapter 701


    Leo¡¯s roar hit Rahle<hr>


    Leoy down on the ground so that Liza and I could dismount.


    I got off first and extended my arms to catch Liza as she jumped off.


    Awoooo! Graauuuuu!¡±


    ¡°Kii¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, it hit Rahle¡­ Liza, go and check up on them.¡±


    ¡°Okay!¡±


    Leo had raised her head and roared as if to scold the figures by the gate. However, since she had howled towards the sky, it seemed to hit Rahle, who now descended slowly to the ground as if weakened.


    While I was sure that Tilura was fine, I told Liza to go and assure them that Leo wasn¡¯t upset with Rahle.¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Ah, very well. Sebastian, we will go on ahead and talk to them.¡±


    I said, and then I climbed back onto Leo and headed towards the gate.


    ¡°It really is Fen and Riruru¡­ And another one?¡±


    ¡°Wou. Wou-wou.¡±


    ¡°Ah, I see¡­¡±


    Now that we were close, I could see them clearly.


    It was Sherry¡¯s parents. They were probably here for the food¡­ But there was also another fenrir.


    And the three of them were huddled together and showing their stomachs in a submissive pose.


    ¡°Hello, Fen and Riruru. Who is your friend? Ah, you can get up now.¡±


    ¡°Grau¡­¡±


    ¡°Wou! Grau!¡±


    ¡°Kyan!¡±


    I called them as I got off of Leo.


    They barked weakly and seemed to hesitate. Then Leo barked and they sat down.


    All three looked sad and appeared to be apologizing.


    ¡°Grau. Gau. Gaaa.¡±


    ¡°Grrraa. Grr!¡±


    ¡°Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff. Wou.¡±


    As Liza was not with me, I asked Leo to interpret for me.


    Uh¡­ Apparently, it was the leader of their pack. And they had brought him in order to greet us¡­


    ¡°Well, you can handle this, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°I think it will be more effective if you talk to them. Of course, don¡¯t get too angry.¡±


    ¡°Wou! Grau!¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    Leo nodded and barked at them. And then with a turn of her head, she told the three fenrirs to follow her as she went through the gate.


    ¡°¡­Uh, are you alright?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Ta-takumu. Sorry for surprising you¡­¡±


    ¡°We are fine¡­¡±


    After they left, I turned to the guards who had been watching the gate. They must have felt anxious from the sudden appearance of the fenrirs.


    And then there was the howling. Leo¡¯s as well. It was very loud and was quite intimidating.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Is everything alright now?¡±


    ¡°Sebastian. Yes, it was just Fen and Riruru¡­and their leader. They wanted to see Leo.¡±


    ¡°I see. Perhaps they sensed that Leo was approaching. Well, where are they now?¡±

 Chapter 702

    Chapter 702


    ire greeted the fenrirs<hr>


    ¡°Ah, Leo took them away for a little talk. So they will be careful to not surprise people next time¡­¡±


    ¡°I see. Did you hear that, Lady ire?¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you. The leader of the fenrirs¡­ Perhaps I should go and meet with it as well then.¡±


    ¡°While they came to see Leo, I suppose you could talk to them. After all, we did ask them to deal with the number of monsters in the forest.¡±


    ¡°Papa! Rahle is fine!¡±


    ¡°Kii!¡±


    ¡°Liza and Tilura. There you are.¡±


    I was d to hear that Rahle was fine.It had been frightened by Mr. Euto in Range vige, and now this¡­


    Normally, they were considered to be incredibly strong monsters. And so Rahle must be rather unlucky to be around such people. But it was a little amusing.


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Oh, Leo. How was it?¡±


    ¡°Wou-wou.¡±


    ¡°She says that she let them know, and they won¡¯t be howling like that again.¡±


    ¡°Kuunn¡­¡±


    After a while, Leo and the three fenrirs returned from behind the gate.


    The fenris appeared to be sorry, and they bowed their heads. Now I was a little worried that Leo was too harsh on them.


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    When Sherry saw her parents, she jumped out of ire¡¯s arms.


    She was happy to meet them again¡­ Though, it had not even been that long since they werest here. But Sherry was young, so it wasn¡¯t so surprising.


    ¡°Grr.¡±


    ¡°Good Leo, is this the fenrir leader?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ire asked as she took a step forward.


    Leo nodded, and so ire curtsied in front of it.


    ¡°Hello. I am ire Liebert. I am taking care of Fen and Riruru¡¯s child, Sherry.¡±


    ¡°Grrr. Grrr.¡±


    The fenrir bowed and greeted her back.


    ¡°Grrr. Gurr¡­grr?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ It¡¯s thanking you for helping them¡­ And that since you are with a Silver Fenrir, you can be trusted to take care of Sherry.¡±


    The leader fenrir seemed to talk a little more politely than Fen and Riruru, and so Liza struggled a little when interpreting.


    Still, I patted her on the head and praised her.


    ¡°Thank you, Liza. Sherry is very good and obeys what I say. Of course, I am careful to not ask anything unreasonable of her as well. I would not make her do something that she does not want to do.¡±


    ¡°Grr. Guuurrr. Gruu.¡±


    ¡°It thanks you for treating her so well¡­in spite¡­of being a monster.¡±


    ire thanked Liza for interpreting.


    Normally, she could have used Sherry, but she was busy running around her parents, and so she did not want to bother her.


    Still, it was rather amusing to hear this polite conversation between her and a fenrir.

 Chapter 703

    Chapter 703


    Liza wanted to help<hr>


    ¡°Lady ire¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­I see. Very well. Since they came all of the way here, let us prepare some food. I¡¯m sure that Fen and Riruru will be happy too.¡±


    ¡°Guruu!¡±


    ¡°He says thank you!¡±


    ire finished her conversation, and then Sebastian ryed to us what the guards had told him.


    Apparently, the fenrirs had only arrived a short while ago.


    Though, Fen and Riruru had visited a few times while we were in Range vige. And so the guards thought that they were back for food. Only this time, there was a third one.


    While there was no one at the mansion who couldmunicate with them, some of the guards had been with us in the forest, and were used to seeing them. And so it was not too surprising.Also, the fenrirs could understand them, and though they could only nod or shake their head, it was better than nothing, since they could show that they were not hostile.


    Once ire mentioned the food, the fenrirs began to wag their tails excitedly.


    The fenrirs waited in the back garden, and I returned once to my room.


    ¡°Ha¡­ We¡¯re finally back.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°What are we going to do now, papa?¡±


    ¡°We can clean upter, so leave your things on the floor.¡±


    ¡°Okay.¡±


    I said as we changed clothes. I had really gotten used to my life here, and so there was a sense of relief ining back.


    ¡°It really was fun visiting all of those ces.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­it was. It was your first time in Range vige. You had only been to Rtos before. It must have been exciting for you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Yes! And it was my first time in a carriage! It shook more than mama!¡±


    ¡°Well, Leo runs very carefully when she is carrying people. Good girl.¡±


    ¡°Good mama.¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    ¡°Excuse me. Mr. Takumi, wee back. I came to tell you that Mr. Sebastian and Ms. Helena are calling you to the kitchen.¡±


    ¡°Sebastian and Ms. Helena? It must be about food then¡­ Very well. Thank you.¡±


    As I was resting and talking with Leo and Liza in the room, there was a knock on the door and Ms. Gelda entered. Apparently, I was being called to the kitchen.


    ¡°Papa. I want to go too! Cooking is fun!¡±


    ¡°I see. Hm¡­ There may not be anything for you to do?¡±


    ¡°But I want to help¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha. You really do like cooking. Well, even just watching could be educational. Let¡¯s go then.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Leo¡­ I don¡¯t know¡­ Ms. Gelda. Could you take Leo out to the garden so she can be with the fenrirs?¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    Liza really liked cooking. But she also had a lot of fun making medicine. Though, it was probably more like a game for her at this point.


    In any case, I didn¡¯t want to stop her if she liked it.


    Everything was still new to her right now, so she should do whatever caught her interest.

 Chapter 704

    Chapter 704


    Something smooth and jiggly<hr>


    While the fenrirs would likely behave, they should not be left alone if they were guests¡­ And even if there were servants, it would be best if Leo was there too.


    Leo sighed with disappointment, but then nodded and followed Ms. Gelda out of the room.


    Did she want to help too? Or maybe she just wanted to be with us.


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s go then.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    And so I took Liza and we headed towards the kitchen¡­


    ¡°Sebastian. Ms. Helena. What is it?¡±


    ¡°Ah, there you are.¡±¡°Mr. Takumi. And Lady Lzia. Thank you foring.¡±


    The cooks were moving busily in the kitchen, but I found Sebastian and Ms. Helena and called out to them.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­I was wondering if you could take a look at this.¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­is this¡­tofu?¡±


    There was no mistaking it. The square-shaped thing on the ce was smooth and looked very soft.


    Though, it seemed a little on the yellow side. Perhaps it was because it used sooy.


    ¡°It is tofuu. I told you about sooy before, didn¡¯t I?¡±


    ¡°Tofuu.. Uh, yes. It can be used for all kinds of dishes.¡±


    ¡°Well, while you were gone, I was thinking about different things to make, and so I went to Ractos. And I found a merchant that was selling this.¡±


    As Mr. Euto told me before, there were a lot of travelers and merchants that went through Ractos, and so you could find all kinds of things there.


    ¡°And so I bought some. Especially since I thought that you would know about it, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    But I was not a cook, and didn¡¯t actually know much about ingredients.


    ¡°Uhh, was this merchant the only one who sold it?¡±


    ¡°At least in Ractos, yes. Apparently, some of the ingredients are rted to the sea, so they do not make it around here.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    It must be that thing that is important when making tofu.


    I had seen it in some television program. The liquid that remained when extracting salt from seawater. It was called Nigari, and that was what you needed.


    It wasbined with the liquid extracted from soybeans in order to solidify it.


    ¡°Where did the merchant acquire it from? Maybe we could go there and buy more¡­¡±


    ¡°A different country, apparently. So that might be difficult.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Do you know any good recipes for this?¡±


    ¡°Uh, well. It was quitemon where I came from. But¡­¡±


    Hmm. How to eat it¡­ Most people just put some sauce on and ate it like that.


    Besides, what was the point, when it wasn¡¯t something we could make or get a steady supply of?


    If only we had seawater¡­


    Well, there was nothing we could do about that for now. I would just have to think of something else we can make with the sooy.


    But for now, we had to find a way to eat this tofuu. If we could only eat it on rare asions, we should make the most of it.


    I just hope it would not be too long before we could eat it again¡­

 Chapter 705

    Chapter 705


    We talked about dinner<hr>


    ¡°Uhh, how much did you get?¡±


    ¡°I bought everything that I could from the merchant. It should be enough for everyone to eat for dinner.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°Do you have any idea, Mr. Takumi? Though, I know that I should not rely on you so much¡­¡±


    ¡°If I can help you in any way, then I would be d to. Indeed¡­ Have you tasted it yet?¡±


    ¡°Yes. When I bought it. Though, it did not taste particrly good or bad to me. Though, the texture was interesting.¡±


    It was true. it was just hardened soy extract, after all. It would not be that delicious on its own.


    So, what to do¡­ I only knew very simple recipes that I had found online.If we had soy sauce, bonito kes and green onions¡­ It was simple but good. But I doubted they had all of that here.


    ¡°Ms. Helena. I suppose the rest of the dinner dishes will be very vorful?¡±


    ¡°Yes. There will be hamburger steaks in sauce and cheese.¡±


    I looked to the side and saw that the other cooks were making them now.


    ¡°Ah, I want to help!¡±


    ¡°Haha. Sorry, Ms. Helena. But could Liza help too?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I don¡¯t mind. Can one of you stay with her?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I will do it.¡±


    ¡°Liza?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Thank you. I will help you¡­¡±


    ¡°Hoho. So Mr. Takumi must have taught you then.¡±


    And so I left Liza with the cooks and focused on the tofuu again.


    ¡°While there was a simple way of eating it that I liked, we do not have the ingredients¡­ So why not put it in the sd?¡±


    ¡°Sd¡­ Hmm. That might work. Is that why you asked about the other food being tasty?¡±


    She understood at once why I had suggested it.


    ¡°Since the meat will have a very strong taste, it is best to have a sd that is more light and refreshing. Though¡­that means we will have to choose the right dressing.¡±


    ¡°Are the vegetables ready?¡±


    ¡°Yes, we cut up some vegetables and cooked them.¡±


    ¡°Then you should use them to make the sd.¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    While I could make suggestions, it was not me who cooked it in the end. Besides, I was not good and would only get in their way.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. The sd is ready. And here is the dressing.¡±


    ¡°Let me taste it¡­¡±


    While waiting, I watched Liza, who was happily making the hamburgers.


    And then Ms. Helena brough the bowl of sd and the dressing.


    I picked up a spoon and tasted it.


    ¡­It looked like some kind of Italian dressing and had bacon in it. But the taste was different. And it smelled like olive oil?¡±


    ¡°It is lighter than I expected.


    ¡°Yess. As you suggested, I made it lighter than usual. Though, the smell might be a little strong¡­¡±


    Well, even if the olive oil was stronger, it would be fine with the sd. Along with the vinegar, it should make for a fine dressing.


    ¡°It will also be more mild with the tofuu.¡±


    After all, the sooy had its own smell as well.


    Now, we just had to mix it all together.

 Chapter 706

    Chapter 706


    We made the tofuu sd<hr>


    ¡°Now, let¡¯s mix the tofuu into the sd. Uhh, there might not be enough¡­depending on how much is used.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ Well, I will bring all of it out then. Sebastian, can you help me?¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, here it is. I thought that it would be enough for dinner, but¡­¡±


    While they were big, there were not that many.


    They were perhaps twice as big as the ones sold in Japanese supermarkets, and there were twenty of them in all¡­ But considering how much Leo and the fenrirs ate..and also the number of servants, it was not much.


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s see¡­ As long as we spread it out, there should be enough for the servants as well.¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­ I was just going to make it for all of you and the fenrirs.¡±Ah, I suppose I misunderstood then.


    As the head cook, I suppose she would prioritize ire and the others.


    Especially if it was a new ingredient like this.


    However, since they worked hard every day, I wanted the servants to be able to eat it too. Though, they might not even like it.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ This time, since it is more of a sample, we should split it up so that everyone can eat a little. And then maybe we can get more the next time the merchantes to Ractos.¡±


    ¡°Very well. So, how should we do it?¡±


    ¡°Well, we will have to add more vegetables to make up for it. Uh¡­we¡¯ll just put it into this bowl and mix it up.¡±


    ¡°Just mix it up?¡±


    ¡°It feels bad, since they are in such nice shapes¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm, it is so soft.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. At least it makes things easy.¡±


    ¡°Then just add it to the vegetables and put the dressing on.¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­ Yes, this looks quite good. It should be easy to eat.¡±


    ¡°The smell is¡­not as strong as I thought. Yes, it should be fine.¡±


    With Ms. Helena and Sebastian¡¯s help, we used spoons to mash the tofuu and mix it into the sd.


    And then we tasted it.


    Perhaps there was nothing simr here, as Ms. Helena seemed to find the texture unusual.


    Though, it was very familiar to me.


    ¡°Liza!¡±


    ¡°What?¡±


    Once we confirmed that it was good, I called over Liza so that she could help.


    She washed her hands and then happily mixed the tofuu vigorously with a spoon. And while some of it went flying, I decided to not say anything.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. You made something new again?¡±


    ¡°So Sebastian told you¡­ Well, it¡¯s just something simple. Ms. Helena happened to find some interesting ingredients.¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    I had left Liza to enjoy helping in the kitchen, while I went out to the back garden in order to see how Leo and the fenrirs were doing.


    Liza was quite used to being in the mansion now. So that even when Leo and I were not close by, she would be fine.


    Besides, she seemed to be enjoying herself so much.


    I was happy about that.

 Chapter 707

    Chapter 707


    I told ire about the tofuu<hr>


    In the garden, the fenrirs were sitting in front of Leo, and it seemed like she was teaching them something¡­ When I asked Ms. Gelda, she said that Leo was teaching them how to act while at the mansion.


    ire and the others were watching this while sitting at the table, which had been brought out for dinner, and drinking tea.


    Sebastian had already told her about what we were making in the kitchen. He sure liked to talk a lot.


    ¡°It is white¡­and soft.¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed? But not¡­an egg?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s not an egg. Uhh¡­¡±


    And so I told her what I knew and that we had put it in the sd.


    ¡°This tofuu¡­it is very healthy. And so dinner tonight will not be very high in calories. So there is no need to be concerned about that.¡±¡°Oh, that thing you were talking about in Range vige. Energy, yes? And this tofuu is very low in it?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Well, not as low as njak, but lower than meat. Well, it would have been much better if we could make it ourselves.¡±


    ording to what I knew about it, you could make stuff like soy milk or soy curd.


    And the curd could be mixed with the meat and make it much healthier.


    That way, you could eat a lot more of it. Well, perhaps they still shouldn¡¯t eat too much¡­


    ¡°Is it really that amazing?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know if I would go that far. But we could mix it with the hamburgers. And without ruining the taste. That way, it will still be delicious and tasty.¡±


    ¡°Sebastian, I think we better sell this stuff in Ractos¡­!¡±


    ¡°Lady ire. We cannot¡­¡±


    ¡°But why?¡±


    ¡°We don¡¯t have the necessary ingredients. Helena doesn¡¯t even know how to make it. But Mr. Takumi knew. He says you must live near the sea.¡±


    ¡°The sea¡­ The sea? I have never even seen the sea before. But they say it is pretty and filled with salty water. However, there are also many monsters. And they will pull you down with them and drown you. Indeed, perhaps it is these monsters that is making the water salty?¡±


    She seemed to have some weird ideas about the sea¡­ But I suppose it was because she hadn¡¯t seen it yet.


    Also, this was a world of monsters, so it would not be strange if monsters were there¡­


    ¡°Well, leaving all of that aside, the sea water¡­ It is necessary during the process. And so I doubt it could be made in Ractos.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ire was terribly disappointed when she heard this¡­


    ¡°Well, I understand how you feel. I would also like to eat it more often. The curd that you can mix with the meat is not something you can only acquire when making tofuu. It is just one way to get it.¡±


    ¡°Oh? Is that so¡­?¡±


    ¡°Hmm. In other words, Mr. Takumi. You are saying that we can make it on its own, even when not making tofuu?¡±¡±


    ire looked at me, now with a glimmer of hope in her eyes.


    She really did not need to care about her diet this much¡­


    Also, Sebastian was very interested as well. He was always like this when it came to acquiring new knowledge and learning things he didn¡¯t know before.


    Still, I never thought that something like soy curd would attract people¡¯s attention like this¡­

 Chapter 708

    Chapter 708


    The hamburgers had be a favorite<hr>


    ¡°The curd is what you get after boiling and straining the sooy. So it shouldn¡¯t be too hard to make it.¡±


    ¡°I see. Sebastian¡­prepare it at once!¡±


    ¡°Certainly. I will tell Helena to order more of it. I too am interested in seeing how it turns out.¡±


    ¡°Still, why do you want to eat the hamburgers so much? Though, they are easy to make¡­¡±


    ¡°It is important for me. It¡¯s something you taught and made for us, Mr. Takumi. And since it tastes good, I want to eat as much of it as possible.¡±


    ¡°Well, I¡¯m d you really enjoy them.¡±


    ¡°Not just me. But the servants are very happy about it as well!¡±


    ¡°Yes, Helena made some for them, and it was really well received. Some said they would eat it every day.¡±That did not seem like a very good idea¡­


    While you could always eat it with a sd, Ms. Helena was so talented. I wanted to see all of the other things that she could make.


    In the past, I just saw food as sustenance, that allowed me to work more.


    But the food here was so delicious, that I was starting to see it in a new light¡­ I was very thankful to everyone here¡­ And so I wanted to do what I could to repay them.


    ¡°It¡¯s hamburgers again! We ate them in Range vige, and they were very good!¡±


    ¡°I made some too, sister Tilura! And look, I helped with this sd!¡±


    ¡°Oh, you helped too! It must be good then!¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    Even in this world, children really liked hamburgers.


    Tilura was overjoyed when she saw the tesid out on the table, and then Liza boasted about how she had been helping in the kitchen.


    Leo, Fen, Riruru and Sherry were also wagging their tails enthusiastically. Rahle spread out its wings with excitement¡­ Hmm. It was quite a reaction. Yes, it would probably be served more often now.


    However, the leader fenrir just sniffed at it and looked puzzled. It did not know if it actually tasted good.


    Besides, they were wild animals, and since it was the leader, perhaps it also felt cautious¡­ It was very smart.


    ¡°Feri¡¯s tummy is so soft too.¡±


    ¡°It really is, Liza.¡±


    Once everyone had eaten and they were full, it was time to rx.


    ire and I were drinking tea at the table, but Liza and Tilura were petting the fenrirs.


    Apparently, Liza had taken it upon herself to give the fenrir leader a name.


    It was not very imaginative, but I suppose that was fine.


    Still, she seemed to like naming things.


    As for the sd, the humans liked it. But Leo and the fenrirs were less impressed¡­ They wanted more meat.


    Though, Rahle had liked it quite a lot¡­ Since Rahle enjoyed meat, I assumed it would have the same reaction as Leo.


    ¡°Now there are three fenrirs, and they are all being petted. It is quite a strange sight¡­ But it¡¯s good that everything is peaceful.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Even the fenrir leader is lying on his back¡­¡±


    ¡°I suppose Mr. Takumi¡¯s burgers must have been that delicious. It really did look satisfied.¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    ire said as she held Sherry up on herp.


    Leo had barked in agreement. But if fenrirs could be so easily controlled with food, that seemed a little¡­ Well, I still imagined that it was mostly Leo¡¯s presence that made them act like this¡­

 Chapter 709

    Chapter 709


    The fenrirs were persuaded to stay the night<hr>


    ¡°Still, I don¡¯t think they would be satisfied from food alone¡­?¡±


    ¡°Wou-wou. Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Food is more important for wild animals¡­¡±


    Though, they did not really look like wild animals when you saw them rolling the ground and being petted like this.


    Aside from being a littlerger, they did not look much different from the dogs in Range vige. Only, it was possible to talk with these ones.


    ¡°Grr. Guruu¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm? What is it?¡±


    After being petted for some time, Feri got up and barked as he sat next to ire.It seemed like he was trying to say something. It was best to ask Liza.


    ¡°Liza, what did he say?¡±


    ¡°Uhh¡­ That he¡¯s returning to the forest soon¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ But the sun has setpletely, so it will be dark. Are you sure?¡±


    ¡°Grr. Guurrr.¡±


    ¡°Uh, there is no problem. His nose can work in the dark, so it is easy to find his way back.¡±


    ¡°Thanks, Liza. I see¡­ But there are still other monsters in the forest. Surely it will be dangerous?¡±


    ¡°Grr. Guru!¡±


    Even though the fenrir was confident in its ability to return in the dark, ire was still worried. Or perhaps she wanted Sherry to be able to spend more time with her parents.


    Even now, she was riding on Fen¡¯s back and ying with Riruru.


    ¡°Well, what if you stayed here tonight, and returned to the forest when it is bright again? That way, we could serve you more of those hamburgers?¡±


    ¡°Grr!? Gur¡­gururur.¡±


    ¡°Uh, he¡¯s happy about the hamburgers. Also, he has agreed to stay until tomorrow, and says thank you.¡±


    Even I could see that he was happy about the food¡­ His tail was wagging and his expression seemed happy.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Will you be able to make more tomorrow?¡±


    ¡°I already taught Ms. Helena, so I am sure they can do it¡­ But what about you, ire?¡±


    ¡°I¡­might ask Helena to prepare something else.¡±


    ¡°I want to help make them!¡±


    ¡°Yes, you can help them, Liza. Alright, then that¡¯s what we will do tomorrow.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Gurr. Guuur.¡±


    After I had agreed, Feri bowed his head to me as if he was grateful.


    Fen and Riruru were not like that. Perhaps it was only the leader who was very polite?


    ¡°Well then. We must have a room for the fenrirs to rest in. Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I will have it prepared at once¡­¡±


    ¡°Grr? Guur Gruu!¡±


    ¡°Room? We don¡¯t need that¡­we can sleep anywhere. That¡¯s what he said.¡±


    ¡°But you are guests¡­¡±


    ¡°Guuru. Grr. Guuuuru!¡±


    ¡°He said this ce is safe, so they can sleep without worry. But he says that he is thankful for your consideration.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Liza.¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    ¡°Ehe.¡±


    I patted Liza on the head for helping with interpreting. Liza also rubbed against her cheek, causing her tough shyly. Yes, she had done well.

 Chapter 710

    Chapter 710


    I gave Leo a surprise bath<hr>


    And so it was decided that Sebastian would not prepare a room for the fenrirs, and they would all sleep in the garden.


    Apparently, they liked to sleep while feeling the outside wind¡­ I wondered if Leo and Sherry were like that as well.


    ¡°Well, before going to bed¡­ How about a bath, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!?¡±


    I said, after we left the fenrirs in the garden and returned to the room. Leo raised her voice in rm.


    It seemed like she had a n to rx and fall asleep. She had just begun to stretch her limbs and was about to roll onto the ground. It was a little amusing, seeing her freeze up.


    Since we had just returned, I was too tired for my daily training. But I had enough time and energy for Leo¡¯s bath.


    ¡°I will help wash mama too!¡±¡°Yes, Leo might not hate it as much if you are there. Alright, Liza. Go and call one of the maids. It can be Ms. Gelda or anyone who is avable.¡±


    ¡°Yes, okay.¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    Liza nodded and left the room cheerfully. Meanwhile, Leo answered with a sad voice.


    Still, she did not resist as much as she did before. Now that I knew what she didn¡¯t like, the baths had be more bearable for her.


    Also, she did not want to embarrass herself in front of Liza.


    After that, with the help of Ms. Gelda and other servants, we washed and cleaned Leo.


    I did not want to bother Ms. Lyra, since she was likely tired after the journey from Range vige. But she had taught the others how to wash Leo¡­who seemed to actually enjoy it this time.


    While the others dried off Leo, I took a bath as well, and we returned to the room before it got too cold.


    Liza was also tired after all of the excitement of the day, and fell asleep quickly. She seemed very happy as she hugged her tail.


    I was about to say goodnight to Leo before going to sleep, but then noticed that Leo had rolled up with her back towards me as if sulking.


    Well, if she wasn¡¯t feeling different tomorrow, I might have to feed her some hamburgers again¡­


    ¡ª


    The next day, I made some more herbs, while Liza and Milina made medicine, and we also helped Ms. Helena in the kitchen. And then it was lunch time.


    ¡°Gurrr. Guru¡­¡±


    As promised, we served the hamburgers to Feri, who wagged his tail and ate them happily.


    It reminded me when Leo was small, and I would give her her favorite treats.


    Leo and the fenrirs were happy now as well, which made the work worth it.


    ire and I had some orc meat and sd instead.


    Even if we weren¡¯t on a diet, it was boring to eat the same thing every day¡­ Though, clearly the children and fenrirs felt differently.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Would it be alright to schedule a trip for you to Ractos?¡±


    ¡°Uh, yes, that is fine. I have no other ns. But what is happening in Ractos?¡±


    ¡°I thought it would be best to gather the people who wish to work for you, so you can speak with them. There are some new people that are not on the list I gave you before¡­ And you should meet them in person.¡±


    ¡°Ah, that is true. Of course, I trust that you wouldn¡¯t include anyone suspicious¡­but there are things you cannot know until you see someone.¡±


    Just as we finished eating, Sebastian stepped forward in order to discuss my schedule.


    These days, I had little to do outside of training and checking up on the herb garden.


    The document Sebastian had given me before was like a simple resume.


    They were all people who were agreeing to move from their current location in order to work in Range vige. Some were even willing to quit their own jobs¡­

 Chapter 711

    Chapter 711


    We would open an interview venue in Ractos<hr>


    As I could not be too confident with hiring people based on the resumes alone, I was grateful for Sebastian¡¯s suggestion about conducting interviews.


    I had never been in charge of hiring personnel at my old job, so it would be best to be able to speak with the people face to face.


    ¡°Though, I may not be the best judge¡­¡±


    ¡°Do not worry. I and the others will be there to help you.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, I will be with you as well.¡±


    ¡°You, ire?¡±


    ¡°As I said before, Lady ire is a good judge of character. That has been proven.¡±


    Now that I thought about it, he had said that several times.Most of the people who worked in the mansion had been found by her¡­


    Like Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda.


    ¡°Yes, that does make me feel better then. I am not used to these kinds of things. So I would be grateful for your help, Sebastian and ire.¡±


    ¡°Yes, leave it to us.¡±


    ¡°I hope you pay attention, Mr. Takumi. As it is nothing new to me.¡±


    ¡°Haha. I might be quite useless then. But I will do my best.¡±


    I bowed my head and thanked them.


    Perhaps I should start thinking about how I would act and what I would say¡­ It reminded me about how I felt in the past, when applying for a new job. Only, most of my knowledge wouldn¡¯t help me here.


    Besides, I was the one interviewing them, so it was different.


    Perhaps I should just rx a little.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Leo. You already finished eating¡­ But I don¡¯t think you cane with us¡­ What do you think, Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°Leo is¡­that would be difficult. The ce would not be big enough for her to go inside. Besides, her presence would intimidate the people. Even though many of the Ractos residents know of Leo by now.¡±


    ¡°Our purpose this time is to get to know them a little¡­ They will be nervous enough dealing with the duke¡¯s house. And so we cannot add to that. I am sorry, good Leo.¡±


    So unfortunately, Leo had to stay home this time.


    ¡°Indeed. Leo, that is how it is. Sorry, but you¡¯ll have to stay here. Well¡­I suppose you still coulde to Ractos¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. That would not be a problem. She could wait at Kalis¡¯s store.¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    ¡°You will be introduced to the people eventually. Just wait until then.¡±


    ¡°¡­Wou.¡±


    Leo would be quite wee at Mr. Kalis¡¯s store, so she could just wait there. However, Leo seemed quite disappointed by this.


    ¡°That¡¯s right. We could call some children over for Leo to y with. Wouldn¡¯t you like that, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Kalis said that they sometimes ask if Leo is going to return.¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­wuff.¡±


    Leo nodded as if she had no choice¡­but her tail was wagging.


    ¡°So, in five days¡­I will start making preparations. Also, I will give you the additional documents once they are organized, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    And so it was decided that the interviews would be conducted in five days.


    Also, we would stop by at the orphanage, and talk about the possibility of people working at Range vige.


    In any case, I had to be careful that I remained calm, and did not make the interview too tense or add pressure.


    It was with such thoughts that our tea time ended¡­

 Chapter 712

    Chapter 712


    A different way to pull carriages<hr>


    ¡°Are you really fine, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    After eating lunch, we were about to see the fenrirs off¡­but then Liza said that she wanted to test something.


    ¡°I like the carriage, but riding on mama is the best! But can mama pull a carriage?¡±


    This made Leo want to try it, which led to us going out to the front, and a carriage was then attached to Leo.


    One of the butlers attached the leather harness and then Leo barked enthusiastically with a nod.


    ¡°Should we really be doing such a thing to a Silver Fenrir¡­?¡±


    ¡°Well, Leo wants to do it, so it should be fine. It¡¯s not like it will be dangerous.¡±ire did not seem convinced.


    They held Silver Fenrirs in very high regard, so I suppose she would hesitate to treat one like a horse.


    Not only that, but the fenrirs were also attached to other carriages.


    There were threerge carriages that could fit four passengers, and one smaller one for two people.


    ording to Sebastian, they had even more of them aside from these.


    ¡°Preparations areplete.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you. Lady ire?¡±


    ¡°Us, yes. So, Mr. Takumi and Liza are going to ride in Leo¡¯s carriage?¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s right. Otherwise, Leo won¡¯t feel like doing it.¡±


    ¡°I understand. In that case¡­Phillip and Nics can ride in Feri¡¯s. Tilura, Sherry and I in Fen¡¯s. As for Riruru¡­Lyra and Gelda.¡±


    ¡°Certainly.¡±


    ¡°Yes! ¡­To think that I could ride in a fenrir carriage.¡±


    It really was a strange sight¡­


    Though, I suppose it was simr to a dog sled.


    ¡°In any case, I don¡¯t think we should go too far¡­ How about going half way to Ractos and thening back?¡±


    ¡°Yes, Mr. Takumi. I had Johanna go on ahead, so we should see her as long as we stay near the road.¡±


    ¡°I understand. Alright, ire, Liza. Let¡¯s get in then.¡±


    ¡°Yaay! Do your best, mama!¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ire was still a little doubtful¡­and so was I.


    Besides, there would be no driver this time.


    Because the others said that it would feel wrong for a human to hold the reins with Leo¡­ And since Leo wanted the fenrirs to race with the same conditions, none of the carriages would have drivers.


    When giving orders, we could do it by voice.


    Though, the carriage pulled by Riruru and Feri did not have anyone who could talk to them. But the fenrirs would be able to understand, so it would probably be fine¡­


    We would also have Rahle fly above and watch us. And so we would be alerted if something happened.


    ¡°Alright¡­I¡¯ve never sat in this one before¡­but it should be fine.¡±


    ¡°Papa!¡±


    ¡°Oomph. Liza, could you move your tail, I can¡¯t see anything.¡±


    ¡°Okay!¡±


    After I got in, Liza sat down on myp. She was light, so I didn¡¯t mind, but it would be difficult to give Leo orders if I couldn¡¯t see. Though, I suppose Leo would be fine even if I didn¡¯t say anything¡­

 Chapter 713

    Chapter 713


    The fenrir race begins<hr>


    ¡°Well then¡­ What is this atmosphere?¡±


    ¡°Oh, the fenrirs are also excited!¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    ¡°Grrr¡­¡±


    ¡°Gau¡­¡±


    ¡°Grau¡­¡±


    They were all growling as if they were determined to win¡­ Oh, was this a race? Like a dog race?


    ¡°¡­Wou?¡±¡°Ah, fine. Uh, just don¡¯t do anything dangerous, alright? Okay. Now, go!¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°Gurr!¡±


    ¡°Gau!¡±


    ¡°Gaau!¡±


    And like that, they all started to run at once.


    As expected, Leo took the lead immediately.


    But the fenrirs were also following close behind. It was hard to see them as the same fenrirs who had been lying on their backs and being petted just a moment ago.


    ¡°Hey, wait. Leo! And you fenrirs too! Slow down a little!¡±


    ¡°Wou?¡±


    They were running so fast that it was difficult to breathe.


    If this continues, it might get dangerous!


    ire and the others who were inside of the carriage would be fine, but Liza and I were in the driver¡¯s seat. And Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda were also in a simr position.


    It was like being sted from the front by a giant fan.


    ¡°Hah¡­! Hah¡­! Leo, you might be fine, but think of us for a second¡­ It is very ufortable¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff!? Wou¡­¡±


    Finally realizing what was happening, Leo slowed down and barked apologetically.


    As it had be like a race¡­so she had probably gotten carried away.


    Once Leo slowed down, the other fenrirs did as well. That was good¡­ If they had kept running, then I would have to ask Leo to go and stop them.


    ¡°Hah¡­ I couldn¡¯t breathe!¡±


    ¡°See? Even Liza had trouble. I understand that you got excited, but you can¡¯t run too fast.¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­ Wou-wou¡­ Wou.¡±


    Leo apologized, and I was sure that she would not do it again.


    However, she also said something else¡­ About how it was different when we rode on her back.


    ¡°¡­Now that I think about it, I never had trouble breathing while riding Leo. It¡¯s not like we don¡¯t feel the wind, and still have to hold on tightly¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, it¡¯s fine when we¡¯re riding on mama.¡±


    While she was running faster than a horse now, it was still slower than when she ran to Range vige.


    Liza also seemed to think this was odd, and she tilted her head and ears to the side.


    ¡°Leo. Is it that¡­you are doing something while we are riding on your back?¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wou!¡±


    Leo turned her head while still running and barked.


    She sounded quite confident, as if she wanted me to praise her.


    ¡°I see¡­ So, what is different?¡±


    ¡°Wou. Wou-wuff. Wuff-wou!¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ording to Leo, she was making a thin wall in front of her to decrease the amount of wind resistance.


    That was why the wind that hit us from the front was not as strong, and so we had no trouble when riding on her.


    However, since we were riding on the carriage, there was too much distance between us, and so the wall was not as effective.


    Was this magic that all Silver Fenrirs could use? Well, considering how fast Rahle and the fenrirs were, it would not be surprising if they could do it as well.


    Perhaps it was something monsters could do.


    If humans could use it, it would certainly make things more convenient when riding horses.


    ¡°In any case, it is clearly different when riding on a carriage. But as long as you are careful it should be fine. Hmm¡­I think you can go a little faster. Try raising the speed slowly.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Woah! So fast!¡±


    With horses, they had less energy, and the carriage, baggage and passengers affected their speed. But with Leo and the fenrir, there was an entirely different problem.


    Speed really wasn¡¯t everything¡­

 Chapter 714

    Chapter 714


    We turned around and headed towards the goal<hr>


    ¡°Oh, Leo. I can see Johanna up ahead. So turn around when you reach her. But be careful, because you are connected to the carriage.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Oh! How fun!¡±


    Just as it started to be ufortably fast again, I saw Ms. Johanna on a horse up ahead.


    And so I asked Leo to slow down, and make a wide turn around so she could go back in the opposite direction.


    As it was the first time, there was some strong centrifugal force, but not enough to make us fall out.


    Liza seemed to enjoy it, andughed as if she were riding on a roller coaster.


    The fenrirs behind us followed Leo¡¯s lead, and made a turn around Ms. Johanna.¡°Ms. Johanna. Thank you!¡±


    ¡°Not at all! I shall follow you back as well!¡±


    ¡°Alright, Leo. Now run like you did earlier. Let¡¯s go back to the mansion!¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    And like that, Leo ran ahead of the pursuing fenrirs. She maintained a speed so that we were barelyfortable enough and could breathe.


    I just hoped that all of this exercise would relieve them of any stress¡­ Well, it was probably not necessary for the fenrirs that usually lived in the forest.


    ¡°Phew¡­ While it wasn¡¯t bad, it is still tiring when you¡¯re going that fast. Good, good. You did well, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Hah-hah¡­! Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Ahh! That was fun!¡±


    Once we arrived at the mansion, the carriage stopped and I sighed with relief.


    Leo sat down and wagged her tail while looking at us for approval. And so I petted and praised her.


    Liza was jumping around excitedly and wagging her tail as well.


    And then shortly after, the other fenrirs and carriages arrived.


    What was unexpected was that while Leo was not tired at all, the fenrirs were panting loudly.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Leo, Liza. Wee back. It really was much faster than a horse. How did it feel?¡±


    ¡°Yes. It was definitely faster than when pulled by a horse. The time¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­It was not even half as longpared to a horse. Even a horse that isn¡¯t pulling a carriage.¡±


    ¡°I see. Well, while there are some issues¡­having a Leo carriage might not be a bad idea.¡±


    ¡°But you are the only one who could ask a Silver Fenrir to do such a thing. Hoho! ¡­So, what was the problem?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ When you are in the driver¡¯s seat, it is much too fast.¡±


    ¡°Ha¡­ha¡­ Nichs, are you alive?¡±


    ¡°I¡­I managed¡­hah¡­hah¡­¡±


    I talked to Sebastian while petting Leo and watching the fenrirs.


    Apparently, he had been keeping time.


    It really was like we were racing.


    However, while we talked, Philip and Nichs came stumbling back.


    They were panting. But they would have been riding inside of the carriage. So what was wrong?


    ¡°Si-sister¡­ I feel sick¡­!¡±


    ¡°Ti-Tilura¡­hold it in. You don¡¯t want to be like Anne or father¡­ Ugh¡­hah¡­phew¡­¡±


    ¡°Tilura¡­ ire¡­?¡±


    Tilura and ire followed next, and they were covering their mouths with their hands.


    Both looked at the ground like they were trying to hold something back¡­

 Chapter 715

    Chapter 715


    They were affected by the shaking<hr>


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­ I¡¯m d that you are alright¡­¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry! Ugh¡­gah¡­! Excuse me¡­¡±


    ¡°Ms. Lyra¡­and Ms. Gelda have left¡­¡±


    After getting out of the carriage, Ms. Lyra had looked fine at first, but on closer inspection, she looked a little pale.


    And then Ms. Gelda and her ran towards the door while covering their mouths.


    Well, we had seen something simr on the way to Range vige. They must have gotten sick¡­


    Huh? I wonder why I didn¡¯t feel sick at all?


    The first thing I thought of, was that perhaps because I was used to riding trains, this kind of thing didn¡¯t affect me as much.¡°Uh¡­are you alright?¡±


    ¡°I¡­am fine. Well, it was a little bad, but¡­ I¡¯m sorry you had to see that.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. Perhaps you should get some rest?¡±


    ¡°Lady ire, here is some water.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Sebastian¡­¡±


    She drank the water and looked a little better.


    ¡°Are you okay, sister Tilura?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t feel good¡­ It reminded me of when I hid in the carriage¡­ Thank you, Liza.¡±


    ¡°Grandfather told me to do this when someone isn¡¯t feeling well.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Liza was gently patting Tilura on the back. And then Sebastian gave her a cup of water as well.


    Leo also turned towards them and looked worried. Though, she did not move too much, as she was still attached to the harness. I had to remove that soon.


    ¡°Hah¡­ I feel much better¡­¡±


    ¡°Are you sure you won¡¯t rest?¡±


    ¡°No, since this is a rare opportunity, I would like to listen as well.¡±


    While I helped the butlers remove the harnesses from Leo and the fenris, ire drank her water and rested.


    And though she probably should rest more, she at least looked better than before.


    Tilura and Liza were also sitting and resting a short distance away.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. We finished inspecting the carriages.¡±


    ¡°How are they?¡±


    Sebastian had been checking their state after disconnecting the fenrirs.


    Due to their weight, and also being made of wood, it was necessary to make sure that they had not been damaged.


    It was like doing maintenance on a car, but it had to be done more regrly.


    ¡°There were a few parts that will need to be reced.¡±


    ¡°Is that because of the speed it was going?¡±


    ¡°Yes, the speed does cause extra stress on the carriage. I¡¯m sure the people who rode on it were able to feel it firsthand.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Carriages always shake, but not that much. I thought that I was immune to it, unlike father¡­¡±


    ¡°That is what happens when you have it pulled by something that is faster than a horse. Hmm. I suppose it was not a good idea. Even though Liza and I were fine this time, it might be different if we tried again¡­ Especially if it was a longer distance.¡±


    The longer the distance, the more likely it was that the carriage would break. And it would be even worse if we got sick as well.


    ¡°Well, since this was the only time we will do it, there is no point in looking into it further¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm. I was wondering if we could use it for delivering the herbs¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Do mean when transferring the herbs from Range vige to other towns?¡±


    ¡°Yes. It would be convenient to be able to deliver them so quickly, wouldn¡¯t it? And it would mean that ire would not have to spend as much time traveling.¡±


    ¡°Ah, I did not consider that. Indeed¡­shorter delivery time is¡­very appealing.¡±

 Chapter 716

    Chapter 716


    I told ire and the others about cars<hr>


    While talking to ire and Sebastian about saving time, and Leo pulling the carriage, a certain thought popped up in my mind.


    How it would be very convenient to have a means of high speed travel. Even if it wasn¡¯t quite the same as a train or driving down a highway.


    However, in the end, it would rely on a living creature, a monster. So you would need to rest. Besides, it was not something that could be widespread, like horses¡­


    Fenrirs didn¡¯t just live anywhere.


    ¡°A carriage made of metal would be too heavy for the fenrirs to pull. Well, nevermind that then.¡±


    ¡°Well, such suggestions can have an effectter. Now that I think about it, did you old home not rely on carriages and horses, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Ah, yes. I told you about it before. Uh¡­ Of course, I am no expert and could not make anything like that.¡±


    It was a while ago¡­I told them while riding in the carriage with ire and Ms. Lyra.The only thing I knew about cars was that the engines used fuel to move the wheels¡­ I could not exin how it all worked.


    While I had a license, I didn¡¯t own a car and rarely drove. If I had to take the test again, I would probably fail.


    ¡°Um¡­ How fast were these metal vehicles?¡±


    ¡°Uhhh¡­well¡­¡±


    Seconds per kilometer was probably something they wouldn¡¯t understand¡­


    And so I would have topare it to something that they had experienced.


    ¡°The speed that Leo and the others were running at in the beginning. That might be a little faster than normal¡­I think? Though, you could go twice as fast if you wanted.¡±


    Race cars went at such a speed that driving on the freeway felt slow.


    ¡°Faster than that¡­I can not imagine it¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha. Well, the conditions are also quite different. Ah, perhaps Rahle could?¡±


    ¡°Rahle?¡±


    ¡°Though, it is probably too dangerous to test it out¡­ But if Rahle were to dive down directly from the sky¡­it might match that speed.¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­I would not want to experience that¡­¡±


    They said that birds swooped down incredibly swiftly when catching their prey. However, it would be dangerous, even with a saddle. So it was best to not test it.


    Sebastian had ridden on Rahle once, and he was already shivering at the thought.


    ¡°Still, Mr. Takumi. Wouldn¡¯t there be a lot of shaking then? Or perhaps you are used to it now?¡±


    ¡°I wouldn¡¯t say that I¡¯m used to it. I¡¯m sure that I would have be sick if I rode it much longer. However¡­it does not shake as much as a carriage.¡±


    ¡°These metal carriages sound amazing.¡±


    ¡°Hmm. It is probably more to do with the roads. As for these metal¡­uh, they are called cars. They have systems that reduce shaking.¡±


    Suspensions. And the tires were made of rubber as well.


    ¡°What is different about the roads?¡±


    Both ire and Sebastian were very interested in this subject¡­ Even though we had not decided to do anything.


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Well, the roads here are often gravel, aren¡¯t they?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Though, inrge towns and cities like Ractos, they have roads paved with stone¡­ But most of the other streets are gravel.¡±


    ¡°While waved roads would be fine, it is hard to have any stability with gravel.¡±


    ¡°That is true. So it was different where you came from, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    Hmm. How should I exin to them about asphalt¡­


    I doubted they would be able to make it here.

 Chapter 717

    Chapter 717


    We talked about road maintenance<hr>


    ¡°ces with a high poption had roads that were all made of the same material. It was something between stone and gravel, I suppose¡­ And the cars had rubber tires that decreased shaking.¡±


    ¡°Rubber?¡±


    ¡°Hmm. I have heard of it. A material that stretches. They make it in the south. Well, that is what I have heard.¡±


    Natural rubber was made from the sap of rubber trees.


    Perhaps I could use Weed Cultivation to grow it? But if I didn¡¯t know how to turn it into rubber, it would not be that useful to me.


    ¡°Well, we had this material called rubber, and it was attached to the wheels. Here, you use wood, yes? So it would not matter that much¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ So it would be difficult¡­¡±


    Sebastian looked disappointed. He clearly liked that idea of doing something that was new.¡°I do have one idea. Why don¡¯t you use them to make a t road?¡±


    ¡°Ah, bricks. Lady ire?¡±


    ¡°They have roads like that in the royal capital. At least, the roads where carriages pass through. I remember being very surprised when father took me there.¡±


    So they had brick roads in the capital. Perhaps it was Mr. Euto that made them make it.


    ¡°The roads won¡¯t get muddy after it rains, which makes them well suited for carriages. And the horses will also find it easier to run.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Normally we would use cut out stone, but bricks are easier to change shape and ce together without gaps. However, they are not as durable.¡±


    ¡°Yes. They are more likely to crack¡­especially if they are used for a long time.¡±


    Both had good and bad points.


    ¡°Bricks would likely be cheaper¡­but that might not make a difference in the long term.¡±


    ¡°Well, it depends on how much you want to spend on maintenance¡­ Well, considering the amount of travel time that could be saved, perhaps such things should be considered.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Mr. Takumi. This was all very interesting. Sebastian, we will have to talk to father about it. But it does seem like something that would be beneficial for the people.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. There is a lot of traffic around Ractos, so they should be happy about it. It might increase the number of things thate into the town.¡±


    While we had started by talking about the carriage shaking, the conversation had moved to road maintenance.


    Well, even if it didn¡¯t save that much time, I was still d that I was able to talk about it.


    ¡°Yes. Since it could be a very big project, it will have to be considered carefully before anything is done.¡±


    ¡°Well, we were already nning to make a road to connect Range vige and Ractos.¡±


    ¡°Huh? A road to Range vige?¡±


    ¡°Of course. Since we will need to transport your herbs, and Lady ire will be traveling often. It was something that we had already nned to do.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    This whole business of the herb fields was expanding more than I thought.


    Though, I should have expected it, since there had been talk of spreading it all over the territories.


    Regardless, it was not a bad idea to test making a brick road between Range vige and Ractos for now.


    Currently, the road only went halfway, and was gravel. That was why Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. Anne got sick.


    ¡°¡­If there is a road, then maybe there should be a ry station and a stable as well.¡±


    ¡°What do you mean?¡±


    ¡°Well, Mr. Ekenhart said that when traveling long distances, he will sometimes change horses in towns or viges. So we could have a checkpoint¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm. That is an interesting idea.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Sebastian. Could you tell us more, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    As there would be living creatures involved, it would cost even more money. And so I wasn¡¯t actually thinking about it seriously¡­


    Besides, we had already talked for so long that it might be best to discuss it at a different time.

 Chapter 718

    Chapter 718


    We saw the fenrirs off<hr>


    ¡°Well, we can talk about that another time. I think the fenrirs will be wanting to return to the forest soon. Or it will get dark again.¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed. Now that I think about it, we have been talking for some time.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Th-thank you, Lyra.¡±


    ¡°Not at all.¡±


    While we were absorbed in the conversation, we were standing outside of the house.


    Thankfully, ire had fully recovered now, but Leo and Tilura looked bored. Also, the fenrirs were sitting nearby and waiting.


    We could talk after the fenrirs left.


    Also, since I rested yesterday, I wanted to get some sword training done.Ms. Lyra had even brought us some tea, as if she knew we would be thirsty.


    ¡°Well, now that we have quenched our thirst, it is time to say our farewells to the fenrirs. Mr. Takumi¡­let us talkter.¡±


    ¡°I will join you.¡±


    ¡°Uh, yes. Of course.¡±


    They were more interested in it than I expected.


    Well, regardless of what would be decided, it was not bad to make suggestions.


    Though, by the looks of things, I might not have much time to train¡­


    ¡°Grrr. Guru. Gurrr¡­¡±


    ¡°Uh, thank you. For the delicious food and time spent with the Silver Fenrir. The hospitality made us feel that we are weed by the humans. That¡¯s what he said.¡±


    ¡°We are also very happy to have been able to spend time with fenrirs. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Gau?¡±


    ¡°Kyu.¡±


    ¡°Gaauu!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    We were now standing in a line in front of the gate.


    As always, Liza was very good at interpreting for the fenrirs¡­ It was an interesting sight, seeing ire and Feri bowing to each other.


    Tilura was holding Sherry, who was also saying goodbye to her parents.


    Well, they would probably be back for food, soon enough.


    ¡°¡­Grrr. Guru?¡±


    ¡°Sister ire. He¡¯s asking if he cane back for more hamburgers.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Liza. Yes. Come whenever you like. You are very wee here.¡±


    ¡°He really does like them¡­just like Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wou-wou!¡±


    ¡°Ahaha. Thank you.¡±


    Feri was wagging his tail happily.


    Well, there was no harm in himing back. And the people of the mansion were used to being around fenrirs now.


    And Liza would enjoy making them again.


    ¡°So¡­uh¡­what are they doing?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know¡­¡±


    The fenrirs had turned to the forest as if they were going to leave, but then they stopped with serious expression. It was almost like they were waiting for something.


    ¡°Guur?¡±


    ¡°He wants someone to do the signal.¡±


    ¡°Signal? Oh¡­they want to race again.¡±


    ¡°Wou. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Well, I guess they couldn¡¯t run their fastest while pulling the carriage¡­¡±


    ¡°Then I will do it¡­¡±


    ¡°Guur.¡±


    They sure had a lot of energy¡­


    ¡°¡­Go!¡±


    Sebastian stepped forward in front of the row of fenrirs, and after raising his arm, lowered it while shouting the word.


    ¡°Kya!¡±


    ¡°Woah!¡±


    ¡°Ahh!¡±


    There was a sudden gust of wind, and ire, Tilura and Liza raised their voices in surprise.


    And when the wind died down, the fenrirs were already far into the distance¡­


    Was Sebastian alright?


    ¡°¡­Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°I had a feeling this might happen¡­ I should have stood more carefully.¡±


    ¡°Are you alright?¡±


    ¡°While I¡¯m a little dirty, I am fine.¡±


    While I didn¡¯t think the fenrirs had rammed into him, Sebastian had still fallen onto the ground.


    Still, he got up and brushed the dirt off. He did not appear to be injured.


    If I were ever in the same position, I would be sure to spread my feet so that I was firmly nted on the ground¡­

 Chapter 719

    Chapter 719


    We talked about post horses<hr>


    ¡°So, about what you were saying earlier¡­¡±


    After seeing the fenrirs off, I trained with Tilura until it was dinner time.


    As always, Leo made Sherry run. Though, not as much as she used to. I suppose it was because Sherry had lost weight.


    That meant her diet would likely be ending soon. But perhaps there would be some fenrirbat training next.


    Regardless, after we had finished eating, Sebastian approached me.


    ¡°Uh, you mean about having ces where you could change your horses between towns and viges?¡±


    ¡°Yes. As they are living creatures, they would need rest. Unless you are in no rush or part of a caravan. Also, it would cost money to trade, and so you wouldn¡¯t do it if it wasn¡¯t necessary.¡±


    ¡°Well, it does mean selling your horse and buying a new one. While it is better than exhausting the horse, it is not an option for everyone. Mostly, it is for rich people who want to save time while traveling long distances.¡±Even if you had a good horse that would fetch a good price, you would still take a loss. And most merchants and travelers would not want that.


    The first thing I thought of, was just to have a ce where you could trade horses in order to shorten the amount of time spent resting. But it would need a little more nning.


    ¡°Of course, the rider would need to rest as well. So there should be a tavern or inn. That way, they could earn an ie.¡±


    ¡°I see. An inn¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, since there may not be that many people who use it, having an inn might help to cover the costs¡­ But it might be moreplicated than that.¡±


    Even if we built such a ce, if not enough people used it, we would just be losing money.


    I could imagine Mr. Ekenhart using it dly, but he might be the only one¡­


    There was the possibility of it being more of a charity establishment, but it should at least break even then. Or it will notst.


    People would have to work there, after all¡­


    I was starting to be reminded of my old job.


    Sometimes, there would be a new n, but after some consideration, it is rejected because it is not profitable. That happened a lot.


    There were a lot of other reasons that it could happen as well.


    But that didn¡¯t matter right now.


    ¡°Yes, adding an inn. That could work. In fact, something like that was considered in the past.¡±


    ¡°It was?¡±


    ¡°Yes. But the conclusion was that it would be difficult¡­due to expenses.¡±


    ¡°If anything, there are probably more people who would be interested in the inn, than trading a horse.¡±


    ¡°Yes, because it will be a resting ce for travelers. Most would rather sleep under a safe roof, than camp outside.¡±


    Especially someone like me, who was not really used to camping.


    At least I was with ire and the people of the mansion. They had good tents and equipment. Which was at least morefortable than sleeping out in the open.


    Though, the average traveler would not be able to camp out in the same way.


    Many just made a fire and slept around it.


    ¡°Indeed. Traveling at night is dangerous, so it is normal to rest. And being able to rest at an inn would make a big difference.¡±


    ¡°Especially if it is a long journey. Sometimes, people travel for weeks. You would be very tired. Even I get tired, in spite of all the help. ¡­Thank you, Mr. Takumi. For the herbs.¡±


    ¡°Ah, yes. Even with plenty of rest, you can still wake up tired.¡±

 Chapter 720

    Chapter 720


    There were problem with the n<hr>


    ¡°However, even if the issue of expenses is solved, it would still be difficult.¡±


    ¡°What other problems are there?¡±


    ¡°First, there are the horses. It will take time to gather enough horses to ce at each station.¡±


    ¡°That is true.¡±


    ¡°But Sebastian, can¡¯t we just buy some from other nobles?¡±


    ¡°That is possible, but it will not be cheap. Still, it is worth looking into.¡±


    Sebastian then told one of the other butlers to make some calctions regarding the cost of securing the horses, and hiring personnel.


    While nothing had been decided yet, he liked to act quickly.I suppose it was the way that Mr. Ekenhart liked to do things.


    In the end, he was the one who would decide whether a project was worth doing. So we just needed to gather information as much as possible. In preparation for a presentation¡­


    ¡°Aside from that, there is one other problem, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°What is that?¡±


    ¡°Monsters. The viges and towns have guards, and so monsters usually stay away¡­ But if there is a post in a secluded area¡­there will be no way to protect yourself.¡±


    ¡°We could station some of the duke¡¯s soldiers there. But they are limited in number.¡±


    ¡°Though, His Grace would no doubt be overjoyed at the idea of training more of them.¡±


    ¡°Haha¡­ He is already starting with Marco.¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­ I understand the need to train soldiers, but I don¡¯t know why my father has to do it himself.¡±


    ¡°It is a hobby. And so there is nothing to be done about it. Besides, the soldiers that result from it are some of the finest. You cannot stop someone who shows results.¡±


    Increase soldiers¡­ If we suggested it, Mr. Ekenhart probably would be very happy.


    It was a pretty intense hobby to have, but thanks to it, there were a lot of reliable guards here, like Phillip. And so Sebastian would not try to persuade him to stop.


    In any case, there were monsters in this world. And so you had to prepare for them.


    If we were going to hire people to work there, then we had to offer them protection as well.


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°Huh? Leo¡­ I don¡¯t know about that.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. What did Leo say?¡±


    As the three of us considered the problem, Leo suddenly started to bark.


    The fact that she was able to make suggestions like this showed that she was able to follow the conversion.


    ¡°Uh, she is saying that we could leave it to the fenrirs¡­¡±


    ¡°The fenrirs?¡±


    ¡°Well, they are stronger than most monsters. But would they really do that?¡±


    ¡°Wou. Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°Uhh, she says they will do it if she asks.¡±


    ¡°But we are already asking the fenrirs to hunt orcs in the forest and to not hurt humans. Surely we cannot ask them to do more¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed, Lady ire. Good Leo, we are grateful, but we do not want the fenrirs to be pushed too hard. After all, we are trying to build a good rtionship with them.¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff-wuff. Grau!¡±


    ¡°Uh, she says they would be happy to do it if you gave them hamburgers.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff. Wou!¡±


    She was saying that the point of working was to eat good food.


    Hmm¡­ Well, it could be one reason. But I wasn¡¯t sure if it would really persuade them.


    If Leo asked them, it would be an order that they could not refuse.


    But if they didn¡¯t want to, it could cause trouble in the future¡­


    Though, perhaps it was a strange concerning from me, since I had been thinking about using them to pull carriages.

 Chapter 721

    Chapter 721


    We decided to ask the fenrirs at ater date<hr>


    ¡°Well, even with hamburgers, would they really want to leave the forest? We don¡¯t want to force them, you know?¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wou¡­¡±


    ¡°Even Leo does not know.¡±


    If the fenrirs agreed to guard it, then of course we would prepare food for them. But who knew if they would agree to leave the forest.


    ¡°If it is a ce to trade horses, then there will have to be more than one¡­ So there would need to be a lot of fenrirs¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°She says we could gather them from other ces. Well, if there are other fenrirs.¡±


    ¡°Well, even if it was just a few ces, it would mean fewer soldiers. That will be a big help. Perhaps we should ask them next time they visit. Of course, we will ask them without Leo. The duke¡¯s house will not ignore a Silver Fenrir¡¯s opinion, but at the same time, we would not want to use any force. After all, even if they are monsters, we are able tomunicate with them.¡±While Sebastian and I thought it would be difficult, ire seemed to be rather enthusiastic about it.


    Perhaps she was imagining the fenrirs at each location.


    It was definitely an amusing idea. And like Mr. Ekenhart, she tended to want to do things that sounded interesting.


    Besides, I had also once told her that she should act as she wanted. So perhaps she was getting more bold. I was happy to see it.


    Though, it didn¡¯t mean that it could all be done.


    ¡°In any case, as Lady ire says, we will discuss the matter with the fenrirs next time.¡±


    Sebastian could also see that ire was thinking positively about the n.


    He seemed to be pleased. Perhaps, as someone who had watched her for many years, he had also felt that she had a tendency to hold things in.


    ¡°Ah, also¡­ If we really do build such a ce, we should prepare extra horses. Even though it will cost more.¡±


    ¡°Oh? Why is that, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Well, since few people own horses to begin with, few people will want to trade them. After all, horses are expensive, aren¡¯t they?¡±


    ¡°Hmm, yes, now that you mention it. Obviously, nobles own horses, and every town and vige has horses that people share. So not as many own their own personal horse. Though, merchants are a different matter.¡±


    ¡°So that means fewer people using this service.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. In small viges, you can usually borrow the horses for free, but it costs money in towns.¡±


    Horses cost a lot of money to buy, but you also had to pay a lot to keep them afterwards.


    Maintenance fees¡­


    I didn¡¯t know how much it cost to borrow a horse, but this was a world of monsters. Horses could get attacked or stolen. So the fee was likely not very low.


    ¡°It¡¯s expensive to buy a horse, and expensive to keep one. So only merchants who care about fast travel, and rich nobles would use such a service. And so we should prepare more horses in advance.¡±


    ¡°Why? What do you mean?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Are you saying we shouldn¡¯t trade horses, but instead, rent them out? It certainly seems to be what you are suggesting.¡±

 Chapter 722

    Chapter 722


    I was able to speak my mind more<hr>


    I told them what I had been thinking.


    Sebastian was narrowing his eyebrows as if he found the idea very strange.


    But ire¡­had a more flexible mind, and seemed to understand.


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s right. If people do not own horses, then we should just let them borrow horses instead. We will be able to make more money that way. It should at least be enough to break even?¡±


    ¡°Borrowing¡­ Simr to ces where they share horses?¡±


    ¡°Simr, but not exactly the same. Say, if you are heading to Ractos from Range vige. And there are post horses in each vige and town. You can borrow a horse and go to Ractos, while also changing your horse along the way to save time.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    In reality, it won¡¯t be every vige and town. But we didn¡¯t need to talk about that right now.¡°When you arrive in Ractos, you can leave the horse with the ce that is in charge. Now, sometimes the person may take the horse back to Range vige, when it¡¯s time to leave. But that won¡¯t always be the case.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Have extra horses in every location, and then the borrowed horse goes to a different town¡­ And then the ce you borrowed from will get a different horse?¡±


    ¡°Yes. If it all circtes well, that is¡­ It will be necessary for someone to manage and adjust the number of horses.¡±


    Kind of like a car rental service.


    A rental horse service, if you will.


    Only, this time, you didn¡¯t have to return it to the original ce, which made things moreplicated.


    ¡°That being said, since it is something new, it will have to be managed carefully. And it could be expensive¡­ The horses could also be attacked by monsters or stolen.¡±


    ¡°Well, there are certainly some issues with your idea. Still, it is a very interesting one. Hmm¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, there are some issues. But if it was possible, then it would help with the development of thisnd, and increase the interactions between the towns. Isn¡¯t that right, Sebastian?¡±


    While I had thought of it on a whim, the two considered it seriously.


    In my old job, whenever I made a suggestion, it would be shot down violently by my boss. But I knew these people would not do that.


    Besides, the point was to give them advice that they could maybe use for other things.


    ¡°It¡¯s too early to really say anything¡­ But depending on how it is done, it could be profitable. For the duke¡¯s house and all of the people. Mr. Takumi¡­this idea. Would you be against some changes to it?¡±


    ¡°Huh? It was merely a suggestion¡­ You can do whatever you like with it. If there are other better ways, those should be pursued.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. We shall give it some thought. And then I will discuss it with His Grace¡­¡±


    Apparently, Sebastian was looking at it positively.


    This really was different from my old workce¡­


    ¡°Z¡­zzz¡­¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    ¡°This sound¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh?¡±


    After we had finished talking, I heard the sounds of someone sleeping.


    I looked at ire and Sebastian, and then we turned our heads in the direction of the sound. Liza and Tilura were sleeping peacefully while leaning against Leo.


    Leo had been sitting earlier, but she was not curled up as if to protect them from the cold.


    ¡°I suppose we have talked a little too long?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I was too focused, but now that I think about it, we are in the garden¡­ This is no good.¡±


    ¡°The sun has already set. Even with Leo, they might be cold¡­ Thank you, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±

 Chapter 723

    Chapter 723


    Rahle still wanted to y<hr>


    It seemed like we had been talking longer than I realized.


    Tilura and Liza must have been so bored that they fell asleep.


    After that, Ms Lyra gently picked Liza up and carried her to her room. While a different maid carried Tilura.


    As Tilura was holding tightly onto Sherry, it was suggested by ire that they could sleep together tonight.


    Tilura would probably be happy to realize it in the morning. Though, Sherry might be surprised.


    ¡°Kii¡­¡±


    ¡°Rahle?¡±


    ¡°Kii¡­¡±Rahle sounded a little sad as Tilura was carried away.


    But as it was not my familiar, I didn¡¯t know what it was saying¡­


    Though, Leo sometimes acted like that, so I had an idea.


    ¡°Well, she wanted to sleep. You can y with her again in the morning.¡±


    ¡°Kii. Kii.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. You can understand what Rahle is saying?¡±


    ¡°No, I can¡¯t. It just gives off a certain air¡­ Right, Leo?¡±


    ¡°¡­Wou.¡±


    ¡°Leo?¡±


    When Leo was small, she would give me a simr look whenever I would leave for work.


    And since Rahle could not go inside of the house, it must feel like being separated from Tilura.


    But when I asked Leo, she turned her nose away¡­ Clearly she did remember it.


    Well, she was probably embarrassed about it now.


    And so I petted her apologetically.


    I won¡¯t let that happen again, Leo.


    ¡°In any case, Tilura will be well and want to y tomorrow. So you must wait.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Ki-kii!¡±


    After having Leo chime in, Rhale raised one wing and bowed as if to show that it understood.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Please don¡¯t stay up toote¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, I won¡¯t push myself too hard. You too.¡±


    ¡°Indeed, I will only check a few things tonight.¡±


    ¡°Are you sure?¡±


    ¡°Hahaha¡­¡±


    After Liza and Tillura were taken away, I stayed in the garden with Leo in order to train.


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Ah, sorry. I should finish up so that I can go to bed.¡±


    As Leo was rushing me on, I quickly started my sword swings.


    Perhaps she was concerned about Liza¡­or she was simply tired.


    In any case, after finishing the swings, I took Leo to the room, and then I went to take a bath.


    When I returned, Leo stretched outfortably on the floor.


    I chuckled and then got into bed before it became cold.


    Really, even though she isrger, Leo is still Leo¡­


    ¡ª


    The next day, after being woken up by Liza, I worked in the herb garden while the others yed.


    After making enough herbs, I gave them to Milina so that she could make medicine.


    While I hadn¡¯t taken any to Range vige, the servants had started to drink it recently, so we needed more than before. Milina was surprised when she realized how much she had to make, but then assured me that she would do it.


    I wanted to help her, but she insisted that it would be good practice for her to do it alone.


    Though, I would hire others eventually, so there was no need to try so hard¡­


    Also, as we would take herbs to other ces aside from Ractos, I made more of the best-selling herbs, so that we would have plenty in stock.


    It would be toote if I only started after the fields were ready. And so once there was enough, ire was going to see if they could be sold in other neighboring viges.


    Well, with Weed Cultivation, the nts could be made at an incredible speed. So it was best to act as early as possible¡­

 Chapter 724

    Chapter 724


    Rahle took a short trip home<hr>


    ¡°Kii! Kii!¡±


    ¡°Are you sure?¡±


    It was shortly before dinner, and I heard Tilura talking with Rahle. There was a mixture of worry and sadness in her voice.


    The reason for this was that we had encountered monsters on the way to Range vige.


    On the road, trolls hade out of the forest. A lot of monsters had grown restless because Leo was nearby.


    And since Rahle lived in the mountain next to the forest, Rahle decided to go and see how things were doing, and possibly advise the monsters to note out¡­


    Apparently, Rahle been thinking about this idea since yesterday. Perhaps it wanted to be useful in ways other than just flying.


    Normally, it would probably be better for Leo to go, since she was the cause of the restlessness in the forest. But Rahle said that it might cause even more chaos.Tilura had also offered to apany Rahle, but it was apparently too dangerous.


    Even though she could use a sword well enough to defeat ors, Rahle¡¯s movements would be quite limited in the forest, and there was no guarantee that it would be able to protect her.


    ¡°Rahle. Thank you. Be careful, alright? Not only are you Tilura¡¯s familiar, but you are like family to everyone here now. So you should run away if it bes too dangerous.¡±


    ¡°Kii!¡±


    ire said from behind Tilura. She was clearly quite worried as well.


    Upon hearing her words, Sebastian and the other servants nodded in agreement.


    They really were kind.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff! Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kii¡­¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°KiI!¡±


    Leo also raised her voice encouragingly. Well, she said that if it came to it, she would blow away the monsters and the whole forest.


    ¡°Kii!¡±


    ¡°Yes, I will do my best as well, Rahle!¡±


    Sometimes, Rahle was like a guardian for Tilura. Well, given the difference in age and size, it made sense.


    ¡°Kii! Kii!¡±


    ¡°Rahle! I¡¯ll be waiting for your return!¡±


    Rahle beat its wings and rose into the sky. And for a moment, it circled above our heads and cried.


    Tilura waved as she shouted at it.


    And then Rahle flew off towards the mountain in the north.


    I didn¡¯t know how long it would take, but Rahle had left once before. So there shouldn¡¯t be any problem.


    ¡°Will Rahle be alright?¡±


    ¡°Tilura. Rahle just flew away a moment ago. You are worrying too much. Rahle is not so weak as to be defeated by a random monster.¡±


    ire said with exasperation as we ate dinner in the dining hall.


    Recently, they had spent so much time together, so she already missed it.


    ¡°That¡¯s true, but¡­ I still feel lonely.¡±


    ¡°I understand how you feel. But Rahle is doing its best. So you must do the same.¡±


    ¡°I know¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Kyau?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m here too, sister Tilura?¡±


    ¡°Ahaha! With Leo, Sherry and Liza, I cannot be too lonely!¡±


    Tilura said with augh. She would surely be fine¡­ Instead of trying to persuade her with logic it was best for her to be with friends in such times.


    ¡°¡­I am here too¡­ Well, I suppose they are a better time than a noisy older sister.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Friends are often better than family when ites to encouragement. Especially at that age. Still, I¡¯m sure that your presence is important as well.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ You were listening, Mr. Takumi. Sorry you had to see that¡­¡±


    ¡°Not at all. I know you were just trying to encourage Tilura.¡±

 Chapter 725

    Chapter 725


    It was lonely with fewer people around<hr>


    ¡°Well,pared to a short while ago, it is kind of lonely, isn¡¯t it?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Father and Anne were here. And they made so much noise¡­ So the dinner table is a little quiet.¡±


    ¡°Just a little?¡±


    ¡°Oh, Mr. Takumi¡­ I was trying to be nice.¡±


    ¡°Haha¡­¡±


    While I did feel a little lonely, it wasn¡¯t like we wouldn¡¯t be able to meet them again. And so there was no need for me or Ms. ire to think about it too much.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Recently, the servants seem to be very energetic¡­¡±


    ¡°Isn¡¯t that a good thing?¡±¡°Yes, it is, but¡­¡±


    A few days passed after Rahle left. I was making herbs in the garden when Sebastian started to talk to me. It almost sounded like aint.


    Also, I wished he would not sneak up to me like that¡­ But then again, maybe I was the one who should be more aware of his surroundings.


    ¡°The thing is, they are too energetic. And I feel like it is causing more mistakes.¡±


    ¡°Mistake? Oh, like Ms. Gelda?¡±


    ¡°No, no. Not that far¡­¡±


    Sebastian knew all too well how clumsy Ms. Gelda could be.


    Sometimes, she would trip and fall over nothing.


    Yesterday, she had even slipped and fallen while bathing Leo.


    ¡°Small mistakes here and there¡­ It is not a big problem yet, but I am worried that they might make a mistake during an important time. Perhaps I am just being paranoid.¡±


    ¡°Are they not being careful?¡±


    ¡°I wouldn¡¯t say that, but¡­ They are too eager. Like they have too much enthusiasm.¡±


    ¡°Enthusiasm¡­ But why all of a sudden? Also, why are you talking to me about this?¡±


    ¡°Because I happened to see you here. Besides Lyra was not nearby today.¡±


    He didn¡¯t need toe andin to me just because I was here¡­ But maybe he also wanted to see how the herbs were doing.


    As for Lyra and Gelda, they had taken Leo and Liza away to be washed, as the two had been ying in the mud.


    I was going to scold Leo for getting carried away and making things even worse, but she was already sad over having to take a bath two days in a row.


    Even Milina, who had been helping me pick the herbs, had gone to help them bathe.


    ¡°I think the reason is likely the herb fields that will be made in Range vige.¡±


    ¡°Really? What does that have to do with the servants?¡±


    It did not seem like it was rted to them at all¡­


    ¡°On the list of potential employees that I gave you before. Some of the servants were on it. And some of them wish to be hired by you. In other words, they are hoping that you would notice how hard-working they are.¡±


    ¡°Uhh¡­ Surely it¡¯s much better to be working for a duke than someone like me.¡±


    ¡°Most would think so. But the servants live rather restricted lives here. They have days off, but the town is quite far away. While Range vige is not very big, they would have more freedom.¡±


    ¡°I suppose you are right¡­¡±


    ¡°Especially the young servants. They want to go out more. It¡¯s only when you get older that you would rather rest and take things easy on your day off.¡±

 Chapter 726

    Chapter 726


    I listened to Sebastian¡¯sining<hr>


    Apparently, wanting to be hired by me and leave the mansion was causing some problems.


    Ractos was about an hour away by horse, but it would take most of the day if you walked.


    And depending on how busy you were in town, it might be difficult to return on the same day.


    But on the other hand, there were not that many people in Range vige. And it was even more far away from Ractos. It did not seem very convenient to me.


    Still, at least there would be people to talk to who were not the people that you worked with all day.


    Also, perhaps it was more stressful, working in such an important household¡­ Even though this family was not that strict when it came to such things.


    ¡°Also, it would be difficult if they ever wanted a family¡­or their own house.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ I suppose there is little opportunity to meet people like that.¡±In that case, even a small vige meant there could be a chance that you would meet someone.


    And if you decided to marry and have children, it would be easier to do that in the vige.


    ¡°Another reason is Leo and Sherry. Liza as well.¡±


    ¡°Ah, I see. They are quite popr with the servants.¡±


    Sometimes, when they had free time, the servants woulde out in order to pet Leo.


    ¡°They like you too, Mr. Takumi. Some even wish they could help you more, instead of it just being Gelda and Lyra.¡±


    ¡°Me? I can¡¯t imagine why¡­¡±


    ¡°Because you never ask for anything like it is an order. And you have Leo and the Gift. And though you are clearly Lady ire¡¯s favorite, you do not act self-important. I suppose they can see a stable future under you. Hohoho.¡±


    It was good that when it came to work, they had that kind of trust in me.


    Even if the pay was good, if they were made to work endlessly, like I had once done, they might get sick. And the effort would be for nothing.


    There was no point in risking your health, even if it was a job that you enjoyed.


    ¡°I don¡¯t really know if I am popr¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, I think most of them would feel more secure if you and Lady ire were to be together¡­¡±


    ¡°What!? Ah¡­I suppose there might be rumors. Are you sure?¡±


    From their point of view, perhaps watching us was like watching a drama unfold.


    And while she was the daughter of a duke¡­ Perhaps they still thought of such things¡­


    ¡°Servants are still human. Even I have my own expectations.¡±


    Yes, you made that quite clear, along with Mr. Ekenhart! And I also made myself clear. So there is nothing to talk about.


    ¡°Hah¡­ In any case, I understand what is happening now. But what can be done?¡±


    ¡°Nothing.¡±


    ¡°Huh? Then why did you ask me about it?¡±


    ¡°Ah, I just wanted toin. You can ignore me if you like. As you said before, it¡¯s good that they are motivated. I just have to make sure they are managed properly.¡±


    ¡°¡­I was going to give it some serious thought¡­¡±


    ¡°Hoho. It is just idle gossip from an old man.¡±


    ¡­So he was just here to kill some time then.


    I didn¡¯t mind just listening to him. However, he didn¡¯t have to make it seem like he was confiding in me seriously¡­


    Though, I suppose it was just my assumption, because he tended to do that.


    He wasughing with amusement now. Did he have nothing better to do? The interviews wereing up¡­ Perhaps he just liked making fun of young people to take his mind off of his work¡­

 Chapter 727

    Chapter 727


    I Received the list of potential employees<hr>


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, here is the additional list.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. But why are there two?¡±


    After we finished eating dinner, Sebastian approached me and handed me two stacks of paper.


    They were thicker than the list he gave mest time. One of them was almost the size of a book.


    ¡°One is a more detailed version of the previous list. And the other¡­therger one, is a list of the people you will be interviewing. Of course, keep in mind that some people are on both lists. You don¡¯t have to look through the entire thing, but I would appreciate it if you gave it a look before meeting them.¡±


    When I looked through the pages, I saw that it contained some of the servants, like before. But there were also others as well. Also people who couldn¡¯te to the interview.


    There seemed to be a hundred pages in all. And each page was filled with information on the person.


    Though, things like their age and gender was one thing. But why did it have their height and weight as well? That did not seem necessary.Was this normal in this world?


    As I looked through the list and drank tea, Sebastian brought out another stack of papers.


    ¡°This one¡¯s for you, Lady ire.¡±


    ¡°Me?¡±


    ¡°Of course. As you and Mr. Takumi are in charge of different things, you will also be hiring different people. So you must also consider what kind of people to gather together.¡±


    ¡°I see. Thank you, Sebastian. Still¡­surely this is too much?¡±


    Her list was even thicker than mine. I wondered where it had evene from. And then I saw that one of the butlers was rubbing his wrists. I suppose he had been holding it.


    ¡°And yet I have done my best to narrow it down. Still, when a duke decides to hire employees, it attracts a lot of attention.¡±


    ¡°While I have hired from the orphanage, I have never done anything like this before. It is quite refreshing.¡±


    ¡°As you will be negotiating, you should have people to help you. I think you should ask Mr. Kalis for adviceter on.¡±


    ire was the duke¡¯s daughter and had a good reputation, so it was no surprise that people would want to work for her.


    It would probably pay well, and she was so pretty.


    Wait¡­ Speaking of pay¡­


    ¡°¡­Excuse me, Sebastian. I was wondering¡­how much should we be paying these people?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­I was thinking that you would decide that yourself, while discussing it with your butler. Still, I suppose I should exin it to you simply.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I already pay Nick and Milina, so I understand the system. But I am not sure how much would be best¡­¡±


    Nick was working seriously at Mr. Kalis¡¯s store, and even helping customers. And so I was paying him a little extra.


    As for Milina, she was mainly working for ire, but she also helped with the medicine as part of her training. And so I paid her a little as well.


    Once she started her work officially at Range vige, I would pay her a proper sry¡­


    Sebastian said it was not necessary to pay an apprentice too much, since she had a free room and meals.


    Still, when it came to hiring other people, I did not know how much to pay. There would be various jobs, some more demanding than others.


    And I was going to have a butler too.


    I did not want to be stingy, or act like a ckpany.


    ¡­They should not have to feel anxiety about being paid for overtime, or being worked at the expense of their health like I had¡­

 Chapter 728

    Chapter 728


    We talked about the wage market<hr>


    ¡°First, for butlers. They would be paid more thanborers who would work in the fields. As they will manage not just the herbs, but everything.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    That made sense.


    They had to live in the house and view nearly everything their employer did, and had to manage it.


    They were also on standby, nearly twenty-four seven. You confided in them, they dealt with guests, kept your finances in order¡­ There was a lot to do.


    They were simr to a secretary or attendant.


    ¡°We will choose someone for you, so you do not have to think about picking one from the list. Bing a butler takes a lot of time, and so we want you to have someone with experience. Besides, since you have the Gift, there will be a lot of information that should note out. There will be a confidentiality obligation.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Well, thank you.¡±If they were going to hire someone for me, then I would not have to think too hard about it right now.


    It wasn¡¯t like I could train a butler. And I could trust whoever they chose.


    ¡°As for the sry, we can talk about that when the timees.¡±


    ¡°I understand. Uh¡­and what about the people that will work in the fields?¡±


    ¡°It will depend on the position. Those who oversee the fields and the concocting of the medicine will have to be paid more than those under them.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­¡±


    I didn¡¯t really like the idea of ranking them¡­ But if there really was a difference in the amount of work they did, their pay should reflect that.


    ¡°As for the people working under them, one gold a few silvers would be the most usual.¡±


    I had once heard that a month¡¯s worth of food cost six silvers.


    But considering all your other fees and taxes, would it really be enough?


    I was paying Nick two silver and two gold. Once ie taxes were deducted, it was about two gold.


    ¡°And the people above them would have several silvers added to that. On average, of course. It can go up and down depending on their job.¡±


    ¡°I see. Are there any bonuses?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ In other countries, they sometimes pay more to those who have children. And also those who live at the ce of their employment. The servants here are the same.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    While different, it had some simrities to systems in Japan¡­ Perhaps it was the result of someone who came from another world.


    I didn¡¯t know of there being anyone here from Japan other than Mr. Euto, but there might be¡­


    ¡°The child assistance is paid to families who have children.¡±


    ¡°While it was set up to help those who were not able to raise their children¡­the orphanages are still filled. Though, sometimes it is due to parents being killed in idents or monster attacks.¡±


    ¡°Well¡­there is no guarantee that all parents can raise their children. Sometimes due to illness¡­¡±


    ire added to Sebastian¡¯s exnation.


    I had never married and had children, so I didn¡¯t know much about the cost. But it must be quite expensive.


    ¡°In that case, along with the house assistance¡­it can be two gold for normal workers, and three for managers. The house assistance is three silvers, and those with children will get three silvers per child.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Two silvers is the average, so while a little high, it should be fine. But two gold and three silvers might be a little too much?¡±


    As I did not know the cost of most things, it was hard to say. Things would have to be adjusted. Still, if one gold was worth a hundred thousand yen, then that means it was just two to three hundred thousand a month¡­ That seemed a little low.


    Though, the conditions were good with the house assistance¡­even after taxes.


    While I wasn¡¯t trying to lure people in with money, I wanted them to be able to work without worry.


    Furthermore, I also meant to raise the sry depending on how long they worked. Though, judging by Sebastian¡¯s expression, I probably shouldn¡¯t talk about that yet.


    Also, there were other reasons why I wanted to pay more¡­

 Chapter 729

    Chapter 729


    The working conditions in this world were not very good<hr>


    ¡°If I am going to hire people to work in the fields, that means I have to tell them about the Gift, right? And so I think I will keep their sries high, as an incentive to be quiet about it. That should decrease the possibility of people leaking the information¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ That would be effective. Hmm¡­ In that case, you should add the Gift and Leo to the confidentiality obligations, as well as a bonus.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Leo looked puzzled when she was mentioned.


    ¡°Well, I don¡¯t think Leo needs to be included in that. It should just be the Gift.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­just the Gift. They could merely be advised to not spread any rumors about Leo.¡±


    ¡°So, that should do it for now. The rest can be decidedter¡­ Oh, I just remembered something. What about the number of working days and holidays?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Uh, what about making it the same as this house?¡±¡°In general, there are no holidays. However, since we do not want them to be overworked, you can take one day off after working for fifteen days in a row. Though, there are exceptions¡­¡±


    ¡°When ites to farm workers, smaller ces have no days off, whilerger ones have asional days of rest. Of course, since you have the Gift, Mr. Takumi, you can do things differently. Also, some ces give you one day off for every ten days of work.¡±


    ¡°¡­So there is very little time off¡­¡±


    Hmm¡­ With servants, it probably depended on your employer, but I understood how it may be difficult to rest.


    But I still thought they should be given more time off¡­ Now that I thought about it, Ms. Lyra and the others rarely left.


    Hmm¡­ Once every ten days¡­ There would be breaks during work, and as long as there was no overtime, it shouldn¡¯t be too bad.


    At least not as bad as it was for me when I had to get up early in the morning and work until midnight. But even then, it seemed like too much.


    It should be at least one day a week¡­ Or two days a week.


    There had been times when I wished that I had multiple days off so that I could travel with Leo.


    ¡°Uhh¡­ This might sound forceful, but I want to consider a system when you can get two days off after five days of work. That should be the standard.¡±


    ¡°Oh!?¡±


    ¡°That is¡­I can understand, since you have the Gift¡­but you might run out of personnel.¡±


    And so I made the suggestion.


    ire and Sebastian were surprised by this.


    But due to past experiences, I wanted to create a nice work environment.


    People should be able to spend time with their families without having to work so hard, or getting bnce, both physically and mentally.


    ¡°Then we can hire more people. We will be making enough profits anyway, right?¡±


    ¡°That is true¡­thought, not as much as you could make.¡±


    ¡°Well, that¡¯s fine. I already have more money than I can use right now¡­¡±


    Before signing the contract with the duke, I had been told that I might make more profits if I sold the herbs myself. But I was making more than enough now.


    Instead of carrying only about profits, I wanted to repay the debt that I owed them. I just needed enough to livefortably with Leo and Liza.


    And while our house would end up being muchrger than I had first imagined, it was still fine.


    There was no point in making money, if I had to worry about other things¡­

 Chapter 730

    Chapter 730


    The people of the duke¡¯s house did not care too much<hr>


    ¡°I knew that you were not a greedy man, Mr. Takumi¡­


    ¡°Indeed, he is not. How very unusual. But perhaps that is why good Leo decided to follow him.¡±


    ¡°A Silver Fenrir. The strongest monster¡­ If a greedy person had one, the results¡­would be clear.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Uh, why are you so proud, Leo¡­? I didn¡¯t even realize that you were listening.¡±


    Was it because she heard her name?


    ¡°In any case¡­I don¡¯t really know about that. But I just want to live a peaceful life with Leo and Liza.¡±


    ¡°Peaceful. It seems like a waste, but I suppose it is also fitting.¡±¡°Yes. That is how Mr. Takumi is here¡­ Except when he is doing his sword training.¡±


    ¡°Well, the sword training is quite fun for me now. Of course, it¡¯s not as important as the time I spend with Liza and Leo. And the time I spend with you, ire.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Haha. Since I wasn¡¯t able to give you enough attention before.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    While I had bought her toys, that was not enough¡­ Yes, spending more time with her was a good decision.


    Besides, Liza had been alone after Mr. Reyndorf passed away. But she had now stopped looking so lonely. And so I did not want her to go back to that.


    Leo wagged her tail and barked happily, and so I petted her.


    ¡°Hehe. Leo seems so happy. Yes¡­when I look at father, I often think that he should pursue other hobbies instead of working so much.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t agree. I think the master should work harder¡­ But still, he does appear to be more youthful when around Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°That is how fun it must be for him. Even though he is a duke, I don¡¯t think he has many friends¡­ Not many people he can talk with on equal footing.¡±


    ¡°Though he doesn¡¯t care about formalities, other people do. But that is how Mr. Takumi is different.¡±


    ¡°I suppose¡­I am often acting rudely¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°?¡±


    It¡¯s not like they taught me how to talk with nobles at school. Besides, customs were different here anyways.


    However, ire and Mr. Ekenhart said that they didn¡¯t mind. And Mr. Ekenhart was never that polite with how he ate at the dinner table.


    ¡°Well¡­ I will be careful¡­¡±


    ¡°No! It¡¯s fine. Just do as you like, Mr. Takumi. It is more natural that way. Just continue as you have.¡±


    ¡°I-I see¡­ If you insist¡­¡±


    ¡°Lady Anneliese had herints. But this is not her house, and she has no say in the matter.¡±


    Tsk. She must have thought that I was a very rude person¡­


    I couldn¡¯t help but feel a little bad.


    ¡°Sebastian! I thought we all agreed that her being fond of him was not a good thing!¡±


    ¡°Oh, perhaps I shouldn¡¯t have said that. I¡¯m sorry, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°No¡­¡±


    Well, there was no point in thinking about what had passed. I would switch gears and be careful to not say anything rude in the future.


    Though¡­I didn¡¯t know if it was possible.


    However, I did have experience working with clients, and could be polite. I just didn¡¯t know if it would be enough when dealing with nobles¡­

 Chapter 731

    Chapter 731


    I told them about my past<hr>


    ¡°Really, Sebastian¡­ Ah, that¡¯s it. Mr. Takumi. You said something about not being able to be with Leo. How were things back then?¡±


    After seeing that I looked depressed, ire suddenly changed the subject. Or maybe she was just curious about how I used to live.


    ¡°Uhh, well, Leo didn¡¯t used to be this big. I think that I told you that before¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. When we were in Range vige. You said that she was like that dog.¡±


    ¡°To be precise, that Maltese was still not fully grown. So Leo would be a little bigger. In any case, she was still small enough that I could pick her up¡­¡±


    Since I thought it was a good opportunity, I decided to tell everyone in the dining hall about my life when I was in Japan.


    ¡°I see¡­ So it is because of that past experience, that you decided to give your employees holidays?¡±


    ¡°Well, only does it mean that you have little time for yourself, but working so hard has a stronger impact on your body than you realize. Besides, I wouldn¡¯t want to take it easy while others were working¡­¡±After hearing about my past, ire seemed to understand my reasoning.


    The others were nodding as well. Except for Liza and Sherry. I suppose they didn¡¯t really understand yet.


    ¡°In any case, the point is that I want to use a shift system, where they can take turns working. As we are dealing with nts, they cannot be left unattended for two whole days.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ There must be someone there to watch over them.¡±


    ¡°And so in order to do this, we will need to hire a lot of workers.¡±


    Sometimes, it may even be necessary to watch the nts at night. And so I wasn¡¯t thinking about letting everyone rest at once.


    As for the night time, when it came to the herbs we were currently growing and experimenting with in the garden, it was not necessary to watch them. However, it could be different with other nts in the future.


    There were flowers that only bloomed at night. So such nts would have to be picked when the sun goes down.


    Of course, most of the work was still likely to be conducted during the day.


    ¡°Yes. If there are that many days of rest, then you will have to hire that many more workers. Lady ire?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, what an interesting idea. I think that maybe I will do something simr to that as well.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that is good. You would know how to adjust it to fit with this ce.¡±


    ¡°Very well. I shall give it some consideration before I have to hire people.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­ Yes, including the matter of way, let us think on it and decideter. There are still other things we have not figured out yet. And what we discussed here will have to be told to the people at the interview. I think even more people will be interested now.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry for increasing your work.¡±


    ¡°Hohoho, it is fine. It is fun to think of various things and challenge myself. Hmmm¡­perhaps I will leave the small details to the younger butlers as part of their education. And then once we choose a butler for you, he will take on the rest.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you. However¡­why aren¡¯t you doing it if it¡¯s so fun?¡±


    ¡°I have other matters to attend to. Like that horse rental service. An interesting idea, but will need a lot of thought when ites to expenses.¡±


    ¡°Ahaha¡­¡±


    While Sebastian was smiling, there was a serious look in his eye. And so I could see that he was intent on making it happen.


    It was just a whim, but I would be d if it helped make things a little more convenient for the people in the towns and viges.


    Though, it results in more work for the butlers¡­ And it was toote to turn back.


    At least Sebastian and ire were enthusiastic about it¡­

 Chapter 732

    Chapter 732


    Liza had a strange suspicion<hr>


    After dinner, I finished training with Tilura, and then I took a bath to wash off the sweat. Then I returned to my room and sat on the bed while petting Leo.


    ¡°¡­We ended up talking for quite a long time today. I suppose it was quite boring for you two?¡±


    ¡°No. I didn¡¯t understand it much¡­ But it sounded important!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Apparently, Liza had still been listening and was not bored.


    Leo was nodding in agreement¡­but I wasn¡¯t too convinced.


    ¡°Hey, papa?¡±


    ¡°Yes, what is it?¡±¡°Uh¡­¡±


    She suddenly looked like she wanted to ask me about something. Though, it seemed more like curiosity than anything serious.


    ¡°Are¡­you not a human?¡±


    ¡°Huh!? Why do you ask that? I¡­am a human¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, when you were talking earlier¡­ You said that you and mama came from a different ce. That is not here¡­ So I thought that maybe you were not human¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ I suppose I can understand that¡­ Yes, it was a different ce from this one. But that doesn¡¯t mean that I¡¯m not human.¡±


    Sometimes, children think of really surprising things. But I had not expected this¡­


    Though, I had never told Liza that I was from another world¡­


    ¡°Is that so? I thought that maybe you were different from other people¡­like me. But if that was true, people would bully you too.¡±


    ¡°Oh, so you were worried¡­ Thank you. But I¡¯m fine. Everyone has been very nice to me. Besides, if people did try to hurt me¡­¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°Right? Leo¡­your mama, would not allow it.¡±


    ¡°Yes! You will be fine if you¡¯re with mama!¡±


    While Liza did not really understand how I could be from another world, she sensed that I was different. And so she was worried that I might have been persecuted as well.


    Of course, that had never happened. And if it did, I would just use my sword¡­ Though, in order to reassure Liza, I just looked towards Leo.


    ¡°Wou. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, mama. Aha!¡±


    ¡°Hey, Leo. Don¡¯t do that too much, okay?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Leo pushed her nose towards Liza and licked her face as if to reassure her.


    While Liza seemed happy, I didn¡¯t want her to have to wash up, and so I told Leo to be careful.


    ¡°Hmm?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    I was just starting to think about going to sleep, when I heard a quiet knock on the door.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, Leo, Liza¡­are you still awake?¡±


    ¡°Tilura?¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s sister Tilura!¡±


    While Tilura was usually loud and energetic, her voice was very hushed now. Perhaps it was because it waste.


    ¡°Is something the matter? Come in. We¡¯re all still awake.¡±


    ¡°Yes, excuse me.¡±


    Tilura hesitantly opened the door and entered the room.


    Liza rushed forward and hugged her.

 Chapter 733

    Chapter 733


    Tilura was lonely<hr>


    ¡°So, what brings you here at this hour, Tilura?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry¡­ Haha, Liza¡¯s tail tickles.¡±


    ¡°Hehe. You¡¯re so ticklish, sister Tilura.¡±


    Well, it was apparently nothing urgent.


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Ah, sorry, Leo and Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°No, it¡¯s fine. So, what is it?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ You promise that you won¡¯tugh?¡±¡°Well, it depends on what you say.¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­ But I came all this way, so I have to say it¡­¡±


    ¡°Papa, don¡¯t be mean!¡±


    ¡°Haha. I¡¯m not trying to be. Alright, I promise that I won¡¯tugh.¡±


    ¡°And you won¡¯t tell ire?¡±


    ¡°Uhhh¡­ It depends¡­ But as long as it is nothing serious, I will not tell her.¡±


    Of course, if it was anything important then I would have to tell Sebastian or ire about it. But it seemed like this was not the case.


    ¡°Um¡­ Without Rahle, I feel lonely¡­ But I think my sister would scold me if I told her. And that¡¯s why I came to see Leo and Liza¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha. I see¡­ But Rahle always sleeps outside anyway. So I don¡¯t think it¡¯s that big of a difference.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true, but¡­ After Rahle left, I feel sad¡­ It was fine up until yesterday¡­¡±


    Apparently, Tilura missed Rahle and was sad that it had not returned yet.


    When I was young, I once went to live with my uncle for some time. And I remember being sad, thinking that I would not be able to see my parents again. And I cried at night, much to my uncle¡¯s confusion.


    Once you realize that you cannot meet someone whenever you want, you suddenly feel sad.


    Even if Tilura was older than Liza, she was still only ten.


    ¡°I see. Well, it cannot be helped.¡±


    ¡°¡­You aren¡¯t going tough at me?¡±


    ¡°Well, everyone is feeling a little lonely these days. And so I don¡¯t think it is wrong to talk about it.¡±


    When I left Range vige, I had been quite sad about leaving the Maltese dog, who had reminded me so much of the old Leo.


    ¡°Good. I¡¯m d I came then. Because my sister would haveughed¡­¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t think ire would haveughed at you¡­¡±


    Though, perhaps she would have admonished her in some way and told her to be strong.


    ¡°Still, it is a little embarrassing.¡±


    ¡°Well, you are sisters. Sometimes it¡¯s more embarrassing if you are family.¡±


    Perhaps Tilura was at that age where she was feeling rebellious towards her family, and did not want to confide in them.


    Mr. Ekenhart would not be happy about that¡­


    I wondered if Liza would go through the same thing as a beastkin¡­


    ¡°Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Ah, sorry. It¡¯s nothing.¡±


    Tilura must have noticed the worried look on my face.


    I should be more concerned about her. And this was no time to be thinking of such things and feeling depressed¡­

 Chapter 734

    Chapter 734


    Tilura and Liza were enveloped by Leo¡¯s fur<hr>


    ¡°¡­Can I stay until I get tired?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t mind¡­right, Liza and Leo?¡±


    ¡°Yes, we can be together. Hehe.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    Leo and Liza nodded in agreement.


    Judging by her reaction, Liza would probably not enter her rebellious phase for some time. I would probably not be able to handle her when it happened. Thankfully, Ms. Lyra would probably be around to help me.


    ¡°Still, Tilura. I think there is something else you were interested in?¡±


    ¡°Is that so, sister Tilura?¡±¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°¡­How did you know?¡±


    ¡°Haha, it¡¯s just you looked familiar. I¡¯ve seen kids be hesitant like that before.¡±


    When we were still in Japan, and I would take Leo out on walks, there was this one girl who would always want to y with her.


    As there was no one home, she would always look sad when Leo and I had to leave.


    Of course, since I was so busy, this only happened around once a month¡­


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. I won¡¯tugh at you.¡±


    ¡°¡­Uh, I want to sleep with Leo and Liza¡­¡±


    ¡°I see. Leo? Liza?¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Well, they are fine with it.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Mr. Takumi! I¡¯m d that I came!¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s fine. But I hope you told Sebastian and the servants that you are here?¡±


    ¡°Of course.¡±


    Previously, Tilua hade here early in the morning to see Leo.


    And since it was right after she was sick, ir and Sebastian had been worried. Thankfully, that would not happen this time.


    ¡°So soft¡­ I¡¯m already getting sleepy¡­¡±


    I suppose it was the relief of not having to bear the loneliness after all. Tilura suddenly yawned.


    And then Leo moved her body so that she enveloped Liza and Tilura.


    It was probably softer than any bed¡­


    ¡°Ahh, Leo is so warm¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, mama is so fluffy and warm!¡±


    ¡°Thanks, Leo. Well, you two enjoy your sleep. Hopefully, you¡¯ll have good dreams.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    ¡°With mama and sister Tilura¡­sleep¡­¡±


    ¡°Wou?¡±


    ¡°That was fast.¡±


    The two fell asleep in no time.


    It was like turning off a switch. Even Leo seemed a little surprised.


    ¡°Wou. Wuff.¡±


    Leo barked softly and wagged her tail happily so that she would not wake them up.


    And while she mainly looked at Liza, she was looking at Tilura as well.


    ¡°Leo. Don¡¯t get jealous of Rahle, alright?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!? Wou¡­?¡±


    Leo was rmed, as if I had read her mind.


    Well, Tilura had be close with Rahle so quickly.


    ¡°She still likes you too. Don¡¯t forget that, alright? Besides, Rahle has not been a familiar for long. So Tilura is probably more worried and feels like she has to do a lot of things herself.¡±


    ¡°¡­Wou.¡±

 Chapter 735

    Chapter 735


    ire apologized to me<hr>


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. I¡¯m sorry that Tilura troubled youst night.¡±


    The next morning, ire came to visit while I was washing up.


    While Tilura had apparently notified someone, ire still felt that she had caused trouble for us.


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. Liza and Leo were happy to see her.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Leo is in a better mood than usual, because they slept together.¡±


    Liza and Tilura had already gone off to wash their faces. But Leo was with me and wagging her tail happily.


    ¡°Thank you, Mr. Takumi. And you, good Leo. Still, I am a little jealous.¡±¡°Jealous?¡±


    ire had looked down and muttered thatst part.


    Did she want to sleep with Leo too? Well, the fur was certainly very soft.


    ¡°No¡­it¡¯s nothing. Still, perhaps we can sleep together again, like we did before going to Range vige.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ahh¡­maybe?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Before going to Range vige¡­ Ms. Lyra had been there too. Uh¡­I suppose it was fun.


    ¡°We¡¯re back. I feel so refreshed. Ah¡­sister..¡±


    ¡°Papa. Mama. Ah, sister ire. Good morning!¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Liza. Tilura¡­ You really must not cause trouble, you hear?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ I¡¯m sorry.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s really no trouble at all. You don¡¯t have to be sorry.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    As we were talking, Tilura and Liza returned to the room cheerfully. And while ire rebuked her sister, I did what I could, and the conversation ended.


    ¡°Tilura seems fine now. I suppose she tends to act tough, like father. And so I was worried when Rahle left¡­ To be honest, I thought she woulde to me and Sherry.¡±


    As her older sister, she had also noticed the change with Tilura, and had been preparing to wee her.


    Regardless, Tilura showed none of the signs of being sad like yesterday. And I could see that ire was very relieved.


    See, Tilura? It would have beenpletely fine if you went to ire. She would have epted you. But I suppose it was still awkward for her.


    ¡°Well, maybe there are things you don¡¯t like to say to your family. Regardless, I think she will be fine.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Mr. Takumi. I experienced simr things at that age. It can be difficult¡­¡±


    I could only imagine it. Mr. Ekenhart must have had a very difficult time with ire at that age.


    After talking with ire a little longer, we headed to the dining hall for breakfast¡­


    Once we had eaten breakfast, Leo and Liza yed in the garden, while I worked in the fields with Milina and Ms. Lyra¡¯s help.


    As for Tilura, she had been taken away by ire and made to study.


    In the meantime, Sebastian approached me again¡­


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. The servants are restless¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Restless?¡±


    He had snuck up on me in order toin about the servants again.


    Even Ms. Lyra and Milina were shocked and had to stifle a scream. So it wasn¡¯t that I was that oblivious or anything¡­

 Chapter 736

    Chapter 736


    The servants were talking about sries<hr>


    ¡°It seems to be rted to what you said about the way you would treat your employees.¡±


    ¡°Really?¡±


    ¡°The sry and holidays sounded quite appealing.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­yes, I can see that¡­¡±


    I had no idea how the paypared to what they were getting now.


    But they would get two days off every week. And without getting paid less for those days of no work.


    ¡°Ah, I heard about that as well! Master, you are going to hire so many people!¡±


    ¡°I heard the servants talking about it too. Are you really going to do it, Mr. Takumi?¡±¡°Well, I don¡¯t know if I¡¯ll hire that many¡­ But yes, they will be treated properly. Ms. Lyra, I am thinking about hiring you with those same conditions. Well, perhaps there will be adjustments.¡±


    ¡°You are too generous. It makes me a little worried about the kind of people that might approach you.¡±


    ¡°Ms. Lyra, that is why we and the others rted to the duke will help him. We will make sure that Mr. Takumi does not hire anyone suspicious. Lady ire will help as well. I doubt anyone will slip through.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes. I¡¯m sorry for doubting you. It will certainly be fine with Lady ire there. Still, I hope that you will be careful, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    It looked like everyone had a trust in ire¡¯s eye for seeing people.


    ¡°Yes, I understand that. Uh¡­and I will be sure to ask you for help, if I need it.¡±


    ¡°You can count on me!¡±


    ¡°Master, what about me? I am working hard here too, you know?¡±


    ¡°Haha. You have a very different job¡­ I will ask for help when ites to things rted to medicine. If I ever want your opinion, I will ask for it.¡±


    ¡°Good. I shall be waiting!¡±


    ¡°Hoho. They are quite fond of you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    I suppose it was true. As for Milina, she was studying medicine and various other things. So even if it wasn¡¯t the case now, I had a feeling that I would rely on her a lot in the future.


    ¡°Ms. Lyra.¡±


    ¡°Yes, what is it?¡±


    ¡°I suppose I should make it a formal request. Will youe and work for me in Range vige? Not in the fields. You will be doing very simr work as you are doing now.¡±


    ¡°Are you¡­certain?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Your name was on the list that Sebastian gave me. And you have be close with Liza and Leo.¡±


    ¡°Tha-thank you. Yes, I would be honored to go and work for you.¡±


    ¡°Haha. It¡¯s nothing that special. But thank you. I¡¯m sure Liza and Leo may cause you some trouble, but I will be counting on you.¡±


    As she had been taking care of us ever since we arrived at the mansion, I knew her well now.


    Outside of Leo and Liza, she was the one I was around the most.


    And the house in Range vige would be quiterge, so it would be reassuring to have her.


    Also¡­I wanted Ms. Gelda toe¡­ But she could also be quite clumsy.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Are you trying to take our servants right in front of me?¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­sorry.¡±


    ¡°Hoho. But it is best for you to hire the people you want. So I don¡¯t mind.¡±


    Well, she was on the list, so there shouldn¡¯t be a problem with it.


    ¡°Still¡­the staff here will be much younger. Once things really get started in Range vige, it will also be quite busy in this mansion¡­¡±


    ¡°Uhh¡­sorry about that. I will be careful to not take too many of your servants¡­¡±


    ¡°As some will already be going with Lady ire, it would be a problem if you took too many at once. But I doubt you have to worry about it. Just focus on people you can trust.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. I shall look at the list and confide in you first.¡±


    ¡°Good.¡±


    While it would make things much easier if I just poached everyone from this house, I would be careful to not hire only from here¡­

 Chapter 737

    Chapter 737


    We were prepared to go to the interview<hr>


    Sebastian was saying that the staff of the mansion would be younger, because they would have to hire new people to work there once ire and I left.


    Of course, it would be difficult for them if they hired so many young and inexperienced people at once. And so I would have to talk to him about itter, so I would know how many we could safely take.


    But then again, perhaps he would enjoy training the new servants¡­


    ¡°Well, I finished making the herbs. So now they just need to be picked.¡±


    ¡°Leave it to me!¡±


    ¡°I will help!¡±


    And so with Milina and Ms. Lyra¡¯s help, we finished with the herbs.


    I then used Weed Cultivation to dry them out. Some were set aside to be sold, and some were taken by Milina to be turned into medicine.After that, Nick arrived, and so I gave him the herbs to deliver to Ractos. And then I spent some time with Liza and Leo until it was lunch. After that, there was sword training with Tilura.


    Leo was still making Sherry run, but not as much as before.


    Sherry had lost weight and seemed to enjoy running around now¡­ When she had firste here, she almost always rode on Leo.


    I did my swing after dinner, and then had Ms. Lyra gice Liza a bath.


    Tomorrow, there will be the interviews¡­ It was my first time, and so I did not want to look tired. And so I went to bed early¡­


    ¡ª


    The next morning, I had an early breakfast, and then gathered at the entrance hall with Leo and Liza.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Are you ready to go and meet the applicants that have gathered together in Ractos?¡±


    ¡°Now that you ask me¡­I¡¯m not confident¡­ But then again, you selected them in advance. So I¡¯m sure it will be fine.¡±


    I had done quite a lot of research in the past, when it was me who went on job interviews. And so I went into them with an idea of how I should act. But I never thought I would be on the other side.


    ¡°Well, since we are ready, let us depart. I have told Kalis in advance, so I¡¯m sure there will be a lot of children there.¡±


    ¡°Haha. So they can y with Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wou-wou?¡±


    ¡°Yes, Liza will be there too.¡±


    ¡°¡­Will I be alright, papa?¡±


    ¡°You will be fine. Leo and Mr. Kalis will be there. No one will bully you. So just have fun and y.¡±


    ¡°Okay¡­ Yes. Mama will be with me!¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    As Leo and Liza could not go to the interview, we had arranged for them to stay with Mr. Kalis.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I will be with you at Mr. Kalis¡¯s store as well.¡±


    ¡°Huh? I thought you wereing with us, ire?¡±


    ¡°Well, this time, it is just the people that you are hiring, Mr. Takumi. Besides, there are things I must discuss with Kalis.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­I see. Very well then. Isn¡¯t that nice, Liza?¡±


    ¡°Thank you, sister ire!¡±


    ¡°You are wee. Hehe.¡±


    ¡°I will be going too!¡±


    If I was being honest, I was a little disappointed that ire would not be there to help me. But she had her own business to attend to. So it could not be helped.


    In any case, having her with Liza was also reassuring. So I pushed other feelings of anxiety aside.


    Furthermore, Tilura was also going with them. There was even less to worry about¡­on that side¡­

 Chapter 738

    Chapter 738


    We set off for Ractos<hr>


    ¡°Are you saying that you are worried with only my help, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°No, I didn¡¯t say that exactly¡­¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. I will be there too.¡±


    ¡°And so will I!¡±


    ¡°Haha. Well, that is reassuring¡­¡±


    Aside from Sebastian, there was also Ms. Lyra and Milina. So we should be fine.


    Those two were from Ractos, so they might be helpful when it came to speaking to people from there¡­ They may even have friends among them.


    ¡°Mama! I¡¯m thirsty!¡±¡°Wou. ¡­Grau!¡±


    ¡°Haha. You really do like Leo¡¯s water, huh?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Because it¡¯s so delicious!¡±


    Now that I thought about it, she had asked for it during the journey to and from Range vige as well.


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s go then.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ You¡¯re going with us, Tilura?¡±


    ¡°Yes! I want to be with Liza!¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    As Leo low, Tilura and Liza climbed onto her back.


    I suppose she did it because she thought that Liza would be nervous about meeting the other children¡­ Or maybe it was because she didn¡¯t have Rahle right now.


    Regardless, Leo seemed to be happy, as she wagged her tail and barked.


    ire and the others got into the carriage as well. I saw her sit down with Ms. Lyra.


    I could ride with them, but I always felt a little nervous, being in such a cramped space with multiple people. And so I got onto Leo.


    Sebastian had been watching me. And I could see that he was amused, as if he had been wondering which I would choose.


    ¡°Alright. Thank you, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, mama!¡±


    ¡°It really is fun riding on Leo!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°Hello. Has anything interesting happened in the town recently?¡±


    ¡°No. Everything has been peaceful! The slums are quiet, and none of the visitors here have caused any trouble.¡±


    ¡°I see. That is good to hear¡­¡±


    Sebastian talked to the guard in front of the gate after we arrived.


    From what I could hear, it seems that things had improved after Deam¡¯s arrest.


    It was probably just temporary, but I was d that the town had some peace for now.


    After we went through the gate, we parked the carriage and horses and went to the central za.


    As always, the ce really was crowded¡­ Thankfully, the za was huge, so it didn¡¯t feel cramped.


    ¡°Now, Mr. Takumi. I will go to Kalis¡¯s store.¡±


    ¡°Yes. ¡­Leo, take care of Liza, alright?¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Good luck, papa!¡±


    After leaving the horses and carriages, we separated from ire and the others, and made our way to the ce where the interviews would be held.


    ire¡¯s team included Tilura, Liza, Leo, Ms. Johanna and Sherry.


    Wile mine had Sebastian, Ms. Lyra, Phillip and Nichs.


    Now that Ms. Lyra had agreed to work for me, she was here to look at her future coworkers.

 Chapter 739

    Chapter 739


    Clumsy people around town<hr>


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s go then, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    After seeing ire and the others off, I made my way to the venue with Sebastian.


    ¡°¡­You look nervous.


    ¡°Of course I am. I¡¯ve never done anything like this before¡­¡±


    ¡°But given your position, I think you should be a little more confident¡­ But I suppose that is not like you.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi never acts important, no matter who he is dealing with. Even I think that he could give out orders a little more¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha¡­it¡¯s my personality¡­¡±Ms. Lyra was agreeing with Sebastian. That was like here. As she enjoyed taking care of people.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. There it is.¡±


    ¡°I have never been in this area before. It is thatrge building over there?¡±


    ¡°Yes. The people that manage the town work inside of that building.¡±


    So it was like a city office?


    We were close to the orphanage, but it was away from the main road, so I had never been here before.


    But then again, I had never walked carefully through every corner off Ractos, so there were a lot of ces I didn¡¯t know of.


    The building was veryrge, with multiple stories and guards standing in front of the entrance.


    ¡°Excuse me. I am in a hurry¡­ Ah!¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­¡±


    As we made our way to the entrance, a woman rushed out from behind us, passing between Sebastian and I.


    I thought that she must have some kind of emergency. However, before she reached the entrance, she tripped and fell forward.


    It happened so suddenly that all of us, including the guards, were stunned for a moment.


    ¡­It reminded me of something that I had seen before¡­ Oh, it was Ms. Gelda.


    ¡°¡­Are you alright?¡±


    ¡°That was quite a fall. Are you injured?¡±


    ¡°I¡­I¡­I¡¯m fine. Thank you. ¡­Ah! Oh¡­good.¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    With the help of Sebastian and Ms. Lyra, we helped the woman get up to her feet.


    She was holding her nose as if it hurt, but there was no blood.


    I suppose she was lucky?


    ¡°Is something the matter?¡±


    ¡°No-no. Nothing at all. I¡¯m sorry to have troubled you¡­ I am in a hurry. Please excuse me! I won¡¯t make it in time!¡±


    ¡°¡­What a restless person.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­¡±


    As if remembering something, the woman swiftly left us and rushed into the building. I just hoped she would not fall again.


    ¡°Still, Sebastian¡­¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    ¡°Well¡­including that woman¡­I saw a lot of people in town wearing hats with ears.¡±


    ¡°¡­Apparently, it became quite popr after you bought them, Mr. Takumi. Halton is good with such things.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­¡±


    ¡°It seems that it was due to many people seeing us wearing them. At least, that is what I heard.¡±


    ¡°Well, I do remember that we attracted a lot of attention¡­ But it seems much too fast? Especially if they are only being made at a single store?¡±


    After the Deam incident, a lot more people knew about me¡­ And so I knew that I would be recognized. But not to this degree¡­


    Not only was it just people walking down the streets, but even merchants with street stalls were wearing them. There were definitely more than a few hundred out there.


    No matter how hard they worked, I doubt Mr. Halton¡¯s store could have made that much¡­

 Chapter 740

    Chapter 740


    It was like a city office<hr>


    ¡°Halton had a hunch that it would sell, and so he got the help of other tailors and stores. That is what I have heard. Of course, they are not the same quality as yours. But they were also sold at a cheaper price¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, it would be hard to maintain the quality if they had to make them so quickly. Still, Mr. Halton must have a good eye for business.¡±


    ¡°He understands what will sell.¡±


    ¡°I think those hats are very cute.¡±


    Ms. Lyra was quite fond of the hats¡­ Well, they did look cute on some people, I suppose.


    Not so much on me or Sebastian.


    ¡°Regardless, we should go inside, or we will bete.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s true¡­¡±And so we entered the building.


    Now that I thought about it, the woman from earlier had also been in a hurry. Was there something else happening now?


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. This way¡­¡±


    ¡°The representative room¡­?¡±


    The building did seem a little simr to a city office.


    There were different desks where you could register for things or get consultation regarding taxes and other things.


    We then walked down the hallway and climbed up some stairs. Once we reached the fifth floor, Sebastian took me to arge door.


    ¡°This room is usually upied by the person who manages the town.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    Like a governor or chief, I suppose.


    However, I had never met this person¡­even though I had met with the guards many times, and they recognized me.


    ¡°Well then¡­¡±


    Sebastian knocked on the door.


    I heard a man¡¯s voice telling us to enter, and so we opened the door and stepped inside.


    ¡°Excuse me.¡±


    ¡°Wee, Sebastian! So this is Mr. Takumi? I heard that he is the duke¡¯s favorite! Ah, my apologies. I am called Soldon. Sebastian and the people of the town have told me a lot about you! It was unfortunate that I could not meet the duke before he left¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Soldon, please calm down. You are startling him. Regardless, His Grace knows that you are busy. So it cannot be helped. Uh, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Uh, yes. Hello. I am Takumi. It¡¯s nice to meet you¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, how considerate the duke is! He understands, even if I cannot see him. Though, I really should have gone anyway¡­. Ah, excuse me, Mr. Takumi. I do not know how I can thank you for everything you have done for this town¡­¡±


    ¡°As you can see, he talks a lot. Perhaps it is because he works so much that he misses talking with people.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­¡±


    Soldan was a thin man who was all smiles as he spread out his arms and weed us warmly.


    Well, it was meant to be warm, but his talking was a little overwhelming, and I was starting to feel tired¡­ And right when I had to meet other people for the interviews¡­ Still, I had been nervous about meeting someone so important, but it looked like I had no reason to be¡­

 Chapter 741

    Chapter 741


    Mr. Soldan was fine when he was calm<hr>


    ¡°Ms. Lyra?¡±


    ¡°Certainly¡­ Mr. Soldan. Please snap out of it!¡±


    Ms. Lyra stepped forward and pped Mr. Soldan in the face.


    ¡°Oh¡­ Excuse me, Mr. Takumi. And Sebastian and Lyra. It seems like I got carried away¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, considering how much you wanted to meet with Mr. Takumi, it is understandable¡­¡±


    ¡°Huh? You did?¡±


    I had not heard anything about that, Sebastian?


    ¡°This is not a ce you would visit without good reason. So there was little chance of you meeting. And as you can see, Mr. Soldan does not leave his study very often.¡±¡°Ah¡­I see¡­¡±


    There was a drawing room, as well as a table and chairs for guests. But it seemed like they had not gotten much use recently.


    But Mr. Soldan¡¯s desk and the surrounding chairs had stacks of documents on top of them.


    He could not deal with all of that in one day¡­ He must be incredibly busy¡­


    ¡°You are the duke¡¯s favorite, and have done many things in this town. And you even have a Silver Fenrir¡­ I really wanted to meet you, but I was so busy¡­¡±


    ¡°I can see that. But don¡¯t you have someone to help you?¡±


    Surely he had butlers and secretaries to help him.


    ¡°Everything here has already been looked through by others. For the most part, I just need to stamp them¡­ It really hurts my arm¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    I used to work in an office where I had to deal with documents all day. A lot of them required writing¡­ And so the idea of just using a seal did not seem as bad.


    ¡°Mr. Soldan. We did note here today to talk about such things.¡±


    ¡°Oh, excuse me. You want to use the meeting room¡­for interviews, I believe?¡±


    ¡°Yes. In order to actually meet with the people to see if we will hire them.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Soldan, is the ce ready?¡±


    ¡°Notpletely, but things are going smoothly. The people are arriving now. Once everyone is here, the chairs will be brought out.¡±


    ¡°I see. Well, we should be going then. I have things to exin to Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    ¡°Umm¡­ Mr. Takumi? I was wondering if I could be there as well? I am curious to see how you will conduct things¡­¡±


    ¡°Uhh¡­¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t mind. Mr. Soldan will not interfere with anything. However¡­what about your work?¡±


    ¡°Of course, I will be bringing my work with me. I shall be scanning through them while observing the proceedings.¡±


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s go then.¡±


    It was decided that Mr. Soldan would be watching the interviews as well.


    Though, it might make the people a little nervous¡­


    ¡°Lyra. I hope everything is fine in Lady ire¡¯s mansion?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I am helping Mr. Takumi right now, and am enjoying my time there. Also, I will be working for him officially in the near future.¡±


    ¡°Oh, is that so? That must be quite the promotion for you. After all, he has a Silver Fenrir. What an honor it must be to serve him.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I am quite proud about it. And shall do my best for Mr. Takumi to live a long andfortable life.¡±

 Chapter 742

    Chapter 742


    We prepared for the interviews<hr>


    As we left the room, a butler helped with carrying the documents while Mr. Soldan spoke to Ms. Lyra.


    Apparently, the two were acquainted. ording to the conversation, Mr. Soldan visited the orphanage every few months to see how things were going.


    And so he knew quite a few of the children there. Also, ire would alsoe here to interview the people when hiring them for the mansion.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, it is this way. They will enter from that door, so keep an eye on it.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I understand. ¡­That is a nice chair.¡±


    ¡°Well, you are the one hiring them. So it should be a good chair. Though, you cannot see it well due to the desk¡­¡±


    We entered the meeting room and made preparations. Though, I just waited silently, while Sebastiation and the butlers did everything.


    The chair I would be sitting in wasrge and had arm rests.As for the chairs that the other people would be sitting on, they were very simple, foldable chairs made of wood.


    They were all lined up so that the people would be facing me. The idea of being the center of attention made me feel a little nervous.


    This was not the kind of interview I had imagined, where we would meet one person at a time.


    I had some doubts about whether I could handle all of this. Thankfully, Sebastian would be here to help me.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Please use this.¡±


    ¡°Another list?¡±


    ¡°Yes. We have just confirmed the people who have gathered today. So this is a list of everyone.¡±


    As I sat in my seat, feeling a little anxious, Sebastian ced more documents on the desk in front of me.


    ¡°So there are fewer people than on the previous list?¡±


    ¡°Well, that included people from other territories as well. But not all of them coulde today. After all, it can take a long time to travel here.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Hmm¡­¡±


    I looked through the list while talking to Sebastian.


    Not everyone had a horse, and so considering the time it would take, it was no surprise that some people could note today.


    ¡°Well, I cannot remember everything¡­ But what are these numbers?¡±


    ¡°That is why you should be checking the list while interviewing them. As for the numbers, they can be used to call each person. As everyone who is here has been assigned a number.¡±


    Well, if that was the way they did things in this world, then I should follow it.


    And so I looked through the list while talking with Sebastian and continuing with the preparations¡­ However, even though I tried not to think about it, my eyes went to the corner of the room¡­


    ¡°¡­Is Mr. Soldan always like that?¡±


    ¡°I have not been in this position many times, but yes. That being said, when you saw him in his study earlier, Mr. Takumi¡­he was actually on the more mild side.¡±


    ¡°Oh, he was?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Because I talked with him before when making the request. And I told him that we would not have much time to talk. Well, he still talked quite a lot, because it was the first time that he had met you, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±

 Chapter 743

    Chapter 743


    We started the interview<hr>


    Mr. Soldan watched as the butlers prepared the room, and would asionally smile in my direction while his hands moved busily.


    A chair and desk had been set up in the far back, and he was dealing with the documents from earlier.


    His hand was moving so quickly that it was almost a blur¡­ I wondered if he even knew what he was doing.


    Well, I had seen people work insanely fast in offices before. So perhaps Mr. Soldan was just like that.


    He must be capable, to be in his position, after all.


    ¡°Mr. Sebastian. Mr. Takumi. The preparations arepleted.¡±


    ¡°We have confirmed that everyone has arrived.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±¡°Well, let¡¯s begin then¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, please wait.¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    Sebastian looked at me questioningly.


    ¡°Hahh¡­ Alright. Sorry, I¡¯m fine now. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Hoho. You really do not need to be so nervous¡­ Regardless, I will do my best.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Just leave it to me.¡±


    I took in a deep breath to calm my nerves, and then bowed to Sebastian.


    He was amused by my reaction, but it could not be helped, as this was my first time.


    I had never been the center of attention in front of so many people before.


    Regardless, Sebastian then told Ms. Lyra and the butler to go and call the people in. It was finally time¡­!


    A few minutester, a crowd of people entered and they took their seats.


    Upon entering the room, there were a variety of reactions. Some were surprised and others looked nervous.


    I suppose the ones who weren¡¯t nervous were just used to being in such ces?


    And then thest person entered. And while I didn¡¯t raise my voice, I was quite surprised.


    It was the woman who had tripped in front of the building¡­ She also looked surprised when she saw me, but managed to calm herself and sit down.


    ¡°Everyone is inside now.¡±


    ¡°I see. Now¡­ Everyone, this here is Mr. Takumi. He hase here today in order to choose his future employees.¡±


    ¡°Uhh¡­ Thank you. I am Takumi. I am grateful to you all foring here today.¡±


    ¡°Very good. Now, starting from number 1¡­ Tell us why you applied for the job.¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    I thought it was the most obvious question, but the person looked puzzled.


    The others were also tilted their heads and had simr reactions.


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi. Here, it is not very usual to ask questions like that.¡±


    Oh, is that so?


    ¡°Uhh¡­then what should I say?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ I think we should start with describing the actual work. What roles would be expected of them. While they were given a brief description beforehand, they do not know the details.¡±


    ¡°I understand¡­¡±


    I suppose here, they always conducted interviews in groups? I had never done this before, so I whispered to Sebastian for help.


    The people were starting to look restless as they looked around with suspicious expressions. I would have to hurry up.


    ¡°Uhum! Excuse me. Uhh¡­ I suppose you have all heard about where you will be working. I will now give you a more detailed exnation of what you will be doing.¡±


    I coughed once and raised my voice so that the whole room could hear me.


    When I nced over to Sebastian, he nodded approvingly. So I guess I was doing alright for now¡­

 Chapter 744

    Chapter 744


    It was more like a briefing<hr>


    I looked at the people who had gathered and spoke loud enough for all of them to hear.


    ¡°You will be working in a vige that is a little far away from Ractos. It is called Range vige. I¡¯m sure that you have heard of it¡­¡±


    I said and waited for a moment. There were murmurs as they nodded their heads.


    ¡°There we will be growing fields of herbs. And so you will be working in these fields. Though, some will be helping to concote the medicine or manage the others.¡±


    ¡°May I ask you a question?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Number 4. What is it?¡±


    A woman had raised her hand.


    Sebastian gave his permission, and so she stood up.She was middle-aged and had short hair. I got the impression that she must be a housewife.


    ¡°These herbs. Are you certain that you can even grow them? It is possible that the temperature and soil will not be right for them.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ That is a good question. Mr. Takumi?¡±


    Said Sebastian, and I thought about how I would exin it.


    This was not something that I had done before. And besides, herbs were usually something picked in the wilds. So she was right to be doubtful.


    It was tricky, exining this without talking about the Gift.


    ¡°Indeed¡­ I can confirm that the herbs will be able to grow without a problem. As for how, that will be exined to you once you start working. We don¡¯t want the process to be leaked.¡±


    ¡°I understand¡­¡±


    If that wasn¡¯t a good enough answer, then perhaps it was not meant to be in the first ce. Regardless, it was best to tell them now that there were things we had to keep from them at the moment.


    The woman sat back down with a thoughtful expression.


    Sebastian then nodded for me to continue.


    ¡°¡­And so, instead of doing a single thing, you will be split up and assigned different duties. In general, it will be fieldwork, medicine, managing the medicine types and the amount.¡±


    After exining to them about the fields and how the herbs would be sold throughout the duke¡¯snds, I went into depth about the work.


    Some would be tilling the fields and picking herbs, while others separated and prepared them. They would all work together, and some would have multiple responsibilities.


    ¡°I have a question.¡±


    ¡°Yes, number 17.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    Next, a man raised his hand.


    He was thin and looked more suited to office work than field work.


    Of course, you could not judge people by appearances alone.


    ¡°You said that you would build a wide saleswork in the duke¡¯snds. But surely that would be difficult when it¡¯s from just one vige? Even if you could grow herbs, it would need to be done in vast farnds, or it would not be enough.¡±


    Hmmm. Number 17 must have a good grasp on the size of thends and the poption.


    That was promising.


    ¡°As I said before, there is no problem when ites to numbers and types. As the duke¡¯s butler, I have made calctions, and the conclusion was that there would be enough. It is just a matter of whether you trust the duke and Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°The duke¡­¡±


    Sebastian answered for me. And since he brought up Mr. Ekenhart, there was a lot of murmuring among the crowd.


    ¡°You are right to be concerned. Normally, such a thing would be impossible. However, the duke believes that it will be possible through Mr. Takumi¡¯s methods. However, we cannot reveal that to you until you are officially hired.¡±


    ¡°I understand. I am satisfied with that answer for now.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    I probably should have answered it, but since I didn¡¯t know what to say, I was grateful that Sebastian answered for me.


    Besides, he enjoyed doing it so much. He looked more lively.


    Really, he was so reliable in these moments¡­

 Chapter 745

    Chapter 745


    The woman was worried about how she would look in Range vige<hr>


    ¡°Well, now that we are finished¡­¡±


    ¡°May I ask one final question?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­Number 38. Oh, you again?¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you for helping me. I managed to get here on time!¡±


    Number 38¡­ The woman we had helped after she had tripped and fallen in front of the building.


    I didn¡¯t know why, but I had been curious about her¡­


    ¡°I understand that the vige is east of Ractos. Are you certain that there won¡¯t be any trouble with the residents, if employees go to work there?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi and I have been there directly, and spoken with the vigers. There will be no problem. The chief has told us that anyone connect to Mr. Takumi and the duke will be very wee there.¡±Range vige was very small, but since that incident, there was still some skepticism about it.


    Perhaps they were worried that if a bunch of outsiders went over there, something could happen. Small, closed offmunities could sometimes be exclusionary.


    Also, as long as there were people gathered in one area, there was the possibility of some kind of disagreement. And if something too extreme or criminal happened, the people would need to be punished.


    Still, I couldn¡¯t help but feel that things would be fine, as the vigers were very friendly¡­


    ¡°I see. That is a relief. However¡­¡±


    ¡°Is there something else that you wish to ask?¡±


    ¡°What is it? Even if it is difficult, you should take the opportunity to ask questions now. Of course, we cannot answer everything. But we will do our best.¡±


    The woman sighed with relief.


    However, she then looked down and seemed like she was still not sure if she should say it or not.


    ¡°Uh¡­this may be rude. But it is not strange for such small viges. I was also born in a small vige, and not in Ractos. So I know¡­ Even if they are friendly on the outside, they tend to have prejudices against others¡­¡±


    She was especially anxious, as she hade from a different small vige.


    ¡°Please don¡¯t worry about that. The vigers are very happy that Mr. Takumi has chosen to start his herb business there. They are all very cooperative. As we said before, they have already started preparing housing for the people that will live there.¡±


    ¡°Also, they wee me and Leo. They are very easy-going. I don¡¯t think there is anything to worry about.¡±


    ¡°Leo¡­?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡¯s Silver Fenrir. I believe we told you all about that before?¡±


    ¡°Silver Fenrir¡­!¡±


    The woman and some of the others murmured to each other.


    ¡°In that vige, Leo, the Silver Fenrir¡­ys with the children. Do you think that people who would allow such a thing would also be prejudiced?¡±


    ¡°No¡­but I don¡¯t know about this Silver Fenrir¡­I have not seen it yet. But if they would wee a powerful monster, I suppose they must be open-minded and friendly.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. It is not the kind of ce that would be prejudiced against other races either. And they will wee any monster that does not attack humans or cause any problems in the vige.¡±

 Chapter 746

    Chapter 746


    A Silver Fenrir Was Persuasive<hr>


    Clearly, the strongest of all monsters¡­had more of an impact than anything that I or Sebastian could say.


    Furthermore, Sebastian had likely added the other part, because someone might want to bring their monster familiar with them as well.


    ¡°Even monsters¡­I see. If that is how weing they are to everyone, then I do not need to worry. Thank you for your answer.¡±


    The woman bowed her head and then sat back down.


    I noticed that unlike when we first met her, when she fell on her face outside, she seemed a lot more calm.


    I suppose it was because she really was in a rush. And it was not as if she had a frantic or clumsy nature normally.


    ¡°¡­Well, since there are no more questions, that will be the end of the exnation.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you!¡±Sebastian dered, and all of the people thanked us at once.


    It really had not been an interview at all.


    Still, many of them had asked questions, and I had been watching the reactions of the people while making notes. And so it should help when I look through the list again.


    Thinking this, I waited for the people to leave. However, Sebastian then leaned forward and said something else¡­


    ¡°Next, we will talk about work days and holidays.¡±


    ¡°Huh!?¡±


    ¡°¡­What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­I thought you said it was finished¡­ I was just starting to rx.¡±


    ¡°Well, this part is important as well. Especially since your ideas are quite different, it is important to let the people know about it.¡±


    ¡°You¡­are right¡­¡±


    ¡°Though, we need not talk about payment yet¡­¡±


    I was so surprised that I raised my voice, which was quite embarrassing.


    Still, it did make sense to talk about it here.


    As for payment, we still had to decide on the details. And so we could tell that about it once we had decided to hire them.


    ¡°Now, Mr. Takumi, if you would be so kind.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Uhh¡­ Regarding the work days. In general, it will be five days a week. And after two days of rest, you will work another five days.¡±


    Again, there were mutterings among the people.


    Even Mr. Soldan looked surprised as he sat in the back.


    Well, he was busy day after day, so perhaps he had the most reason to be surprised.


    ¡°Excuse me, I have a question.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Number 24. What is it?¡±


    I had been sure that someone would ask a question here. And I was right. As I saw the hand rise up into the air, I looked down at my list to find out who it was, and then I told them to speak.


    It kind of made me feel like a school teacher, choosing who should speak when they raised their hands.


    Though, I suppose it was a little different when you didn¡¯t call their actual names.


    Perhaps it was more like a roll call in the army. Not that I had ever experienced that either¡­

 Chapter 747

    Chapter 747


    There were more questions to be asked<hr>


    ¡°Thank you. Um¡­I¡¯m sure the workers would be very grateful to be able to rest¡­ But I suppose that means the pay will also be less?¡±


    ¡°You are right to worry about that. However, no, we n to offer a generous sry, regardless of the number of days that you work. After all, I think it is important to rest so that you are not too tired while working.¡±


    ¡°I understand. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°May I ask a question?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Number 3.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    Number 3 sat in the front row. I got the impression that he was looking at me a lot, as if to size me up.


    He seemed rather tall and healthy. And the sharp eyes suggested a degree of experience. I suppose he was in his thirties?¡°More days off mean less work for individuals. Does that mean there is not much work to do?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. When ites to work, there are things we are still figuring out. As exined before, we want to send herbs and medicine all over thesends. So it is not as if there will be little work to do. Though, we will not overwork people either. All I can say now is that it will be an appropriate amount of work for a day.¡±


    ¡°However, surely that will not be enough? A proper number of workers working a proper amount of days¡­doing the proper amount of work. Isn¡¯t that the way to manage things smoothly¡­?¡±


    Hmm. It seemed like he had experience with management. Or at least, he had employed people before.


    I took some notes as I thought about what he said.


    ¡°When ites to doing a certain amount of work, it is not always best to increase the burden of each person. Surely you can think of other ways¡­¡±


    ¡°The only way to do that¡­would be to increase the number of employees¡­¡±


    ¡°Exactly. It is not as if we are only going to hire people who are here. We will likely hire from the orphanage as well.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi will also be hiring from the duke¡¯s house. Though, some of them will just be helping to take care of him, now that he will be so busy. Regardless, the duke will be watching the enterprise closely. And will know if there is any wrong doing, such as workers not being paid. The duke takes the trust of his people very seriously, and will be quick to act.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Well, if we have the assurance of people rted to the duke, then we do not need to worry.¡±


    Sebastian added to my exnation.


    The people really did have a lot of trust in the duke¡­


    Also, I guess I really was going to be busy now? I had been thinking about taking it easy in Range vige¡­ Well, perhaps Sebastian was just saying that for now.


    ¡°May I ask a question?¡±


    ¡°What is it, Number 9?¡±


    When Number 3 sat down, a different person raised their hand.


    This time it was a young woman.


    She had semi-long hair and gave off a very neat and tidy impression.


    ¡°Um, how are the men in Range vige?¡±


    ¡°What? Uh¡­what did you say?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m wondering about the men. You aren¡¯t terrible either, but a close associate of the duke is too much for me¡­ So I was wondering if there was anyone good in the vige.¡±


    ¡°¡­Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°I have to admit, I did not anticipate this kind of question¡­¡±

 Chapter 748

    Chapter 748


    Some people had unexpected reasons for wanting to work<hr>


    To put it simply, Number 9 was looking for a man?


    It wasn¡¯t like there were any rules against this. And I suppose such a thing might be good for the vige¡­


    ¡°Uhh¡­I¡¯m sorry. That is not something I considered when looking at the vige. And so I cannot answer your question.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Well, maybe there will be someone good in this crowd. But I had high hopes for the vige¡­ After all, I will be more likely to be epted that way, right?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­perhaps¡­¡±


    I really did not know how to answer her questions. She seemed like a city person who had romantic ideas of living in the countryside.


    Though, it may not end up being the kind of life she wanted. I heard stories of people who ended up regretting it.


    ¡°Hoho. What a delightful youngdy. As long as you do your work properly, you can spend the rest of your time as you wish. But be careful, as such things can sometimes lead to your ruin.¡±¡°I know that. I am not thinking about jumping into anything lightly. I am just saying that I want to work and marry a nice man and have a family. And some people stillugh at me.¡±


    ¡°As long as you are serious, I don¡¯t think it is anything tough about. What about you, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Uh, me¡­? Well¡­I don¡¯t see why anyone wouldin about that. As long as you are not fighting over someone or stealing¡­¡±


    When speaking to Mr. Ekenhart and Sebastian, I had refused to give a definitive answer about ire. And this kind of felt like Sebastian was criticizing me.


    Well, perhaps it was just in my head.


    ¡°I would not do that. I have no interest in other people¡¯s things.¡±


    ¡°Hoho. Then what about this Mr. Takumi. He is serious and kind. And will soon have a thriving business. He will not be free for long.¡±


    ¡°What!?¡±


    Sebastian!?


    ¡°Oh, no¡­ Someone who owns a Silver Fenrir and is backed by the duke¡­is not a good fit for me.¡±


    ¡°Really? How unfortunate¡­¡±


    ¡°Please stop looking disappointed¡­ Uh, if you really are interested in marrying in Range vige, I suggest you get to know the people while you work first. And then you can get a feet for how you would fit in? Though, I¡¯m sure the men will notice you soon enough.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I understand. And thank you for thepliment.¡±


    ¡°Uhh, are there any other questions then¡­?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I have a question.¡±


    ¡°Go ahead, Number 20¡­¡±


    We then answered Number 20¡¯s question, and others after that until there was no one left¡­


    ¡°So, that will be the end of this interview. Everyone, thank you for your time¡­¡±


    Said Sebastian, and everyone got to their feet and bowed.


    ¡°Hya! Oh-oh-oh¡­phew¡­ Ah, excuse me!¡±


    While the butlers and Ms. Lyra led everyone out of the room, Number 38¡­the woman who had tripped and fallen in front of the building, lost her bnce yet again. However, she managed to catch herself, so that she did not fall on her face this time¡­

 Chapter 749

    Chapter 749


    I asked about the woman who I was curious about<hr>


    ¡°Hmm¡­¡±


    ¡°Is there something you are wondering about?¡±


    Number 38¡­ When tripping, I had thought that she hit her leg against the chair at first, but there was no sound, so it was probably not the case. Regardless, I was d that she was not hurt.


    ¡°The woman who tripped in front of the building¡­ I saw her when she was leaving, and she almost tripped again.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. But she seemed veryposed while asking questions, so I do not think she is like Ms. Gelda¡­ But you never know with people.¡±


    ¡°Yes. And I couldn¡¯t help but be curious¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh?¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t look at me like that¡­I don¡¯t mean it in any strange way.¡±¡°Oh, excuse me. Sometimes, people fall in love at first sight. So I thought that maybe¡­¡±


    Why did Sebastian always say such things¡­ Perhaps it was because of what Number 9 said earlier.


    In any case, that was not what I meant at all.


    ¡°No. There isn¡¯t really any reason that I can think of¡­ Excuse me. Do you think it would be possible to call her back?¡±


    ¡°It is possible. Hmm¡­ Ms. Deria. You. Go and call Ms. Deria. She was the one with the hat.¡±


    ¡°Certainly¡­¡±


    Sebastian looked at the list and had someone call her back.


    There was almost something familiar about her. Regardless, I waited for the butler to return with her.


    ¡°Excuse me¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Here is thedy from earlier.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    After some time, the two returned.


    And I had the same strange feeling. Like there was something odd about the way she walked.


    ¡°Umm¡­ Did I do something wrong¡­?¡±


    Apparently, Ms. Deria was worried that she was in trouble. She was holding her hat and looked at us as if frightened.


    ¡°No, it is nothing like that. I was just curious about something¡­ Please don¡¯t be rmed.¡±


    ¡°I-I see¡­ Oh¡­what is it that you were curious about?¡±


    ¡°Well, please sit down for now, and then we can talk.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    I also moved back to my seat.


    I had been observing her carefully, and was starting to understand what it was that seemed strange about her¡­


    ¡°So¡­Ms. Deria. You are not from this town¡­¡±


    ¡°Uh, yes. I am from yu vige. It is near a forest by the main road that is east of Ractos.¡±


    ¡°yu vige¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. It is a vige close to Ractos. The poption is smaller than Range vige, and they make a living through selling crops and wood.¡±


    Hmm. A farming and forestry vige then.


    I nodded at Sebastian and tried to imagine what it was like.


    If it was to the south and close to the forest¡­it must be the edge of the fenrir forest. Perhaps we could reach it if we traveled southeast¡­


    ¡°And that is why you were worried earlier, about the way that people would see you?¡±


    ¡°Many small viges are independent, and do now wee outsiders¡­ Or so I am told. My vige was not like that¡­otherwise, they would not have raised me.¡±


    ¡°So you were not originally from there?¡±


    ¡°Uh, well¡­I am from there. I was found by a lumberjack in the vige. I was raised there. But as for where my parents are from¡­I do not know.¡±


    ¡°Ah, I didn¡¯t mean to pry to that degree. Sebastian, are such thingsmon in this area?¡±


    ¡°It is one of the reasons that the orphanage is full. Ractos is on the road that leads to the royal capital. And there is a lot of trade conducted here. And so many peoplee¡­and sometimes leave their children for various reasons.¡±

 Chapter 750

    Chapter 750


    Ms. Delia¡¯s identity<hr>


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°Of course, such things are against thew. Not only in Ractos, but in this whole country¡­ Still, it does not stop. Sometimes, if the parent can be identified, the child can be returned. Though, they had abandoned their child once already, so I don¡¯t know if it really is the right thing to do¡­¡±


    In ces where people gathered from all over the country, there would be those with ill intent. And as Sebastian said, maybe they could not raise their children due to certain circumstances.


    ¡°Uh, so I know that you were raised in that vige now. I think I understand what was bothering me¡­¡±


    ¡°Bothering you?¡±


    ¡°Ms. Delia¡­could you take off your hat?¡±


    ¡°What!? My ha-hat!? Um¡­I¡¯m sorry¡­ But I like this hat very much¡­ And I would like to keep it on please¡­¡±


    When I asked her to removed the hat, Ms. Delia looked frantic, and held the hat down with her hands as if she would not allow it to be removed.¡°It¡¯s fine. We will not me you or discriminate you in any way, Ms. Delia. I just wanted to confirm something. And also, introduce you to someone. Please.¡±


    ¡°Ahhh! You do not need to bow your head to me! Very well¡­I will take it off¡­¡±


    In order to convince her, I stood up and bowed my head while making the request.


    This seemed to be most unexpected, as she looked frantic for a second, but then made the decision to remove it.


    Ah, I knew it¡­


    ¡°You are a beastkin¡­Ms. Delia.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­I¡¯m sorry for hiding it.¡±


    ¡°That is a surprise. While we noted that all were epted, I did not expect to see a non-human. After all, there are usually only humans in Ractos¡­¡±


    ¡°She must have been adopted and raised like Liza. I suppose after rumors spread, it is to be expected that you would keep the truth hidden. But Ms. Delia, it¡¯s fine. I¡­and the people of the duke¡¯s house, will not treat you differently for being a beastkin.¡±


    ¡°Is-is that so¡­?¡±


    The first thing I saw when Ms. Delia took off her hat, were the pointed ears. Her hair was brown, but the fur on the ears was ck.


    They were smaller than Liza¡¯s fox-like ears, and the fur was shorter¡­ Maybe they were cat ears?


    And on closer inspection, she hadrge eyes, with narrow pupils, unlike those of a human.


    ¡°I talked with ire, the duke¡¯s daughter about it before. And she confirmed with me that there is no one in the duke¡¯s household who holds prejudice against beastkin.¡±


    ¡°I-I see¡­ That is a relief to hear. I really am sorry for deceiving you!¡±


    ¡°Well, you were raised in a small vige. So it¡¯s understandable that you would be cautious aftering out into a big town. Do not worry about it.¡±


    When apologizing, Ms. Delia¡¯s twitching ears folded down as she bowed.


    It really did remind me of Liza¡­


    I wonder, is she ying with the other children now?


    I wanted her to know as well, that many of the people in this town did not harbor any ill will against the bestkin¡­

 Chapter 751

    Chapter 751


    I asked Ms. Delia why she applied<hr>


    ¡°Mr. Takumi helped change people¡¯s perception. Of course, most people didn¡¯t take the rumors very seriously to begin with. Also, there is that hat you are wearing.¡±


    ¡°This? I found it when I came here, and could not help buying it.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Well, Mr. Takumi thought about making that hat for beastkin.¡±


    ¡°Is that true!?¡±


    To be precise, it was for Liza¡­ But I suppose it was true in some way.


    ¡°Well, it seems to have be popr in Ractos. So at this point, you can wear it without attracting much attention.¡±


    ¡°Yes. It has helped me. And it is much morefortable than a normal hat.¡±


    As humans were wearing the hat as well, Ms. Delia did not stick out in spite of being an outsider.¡°Hohoho. Compared to Mr. Takumi and his Silver Fenrir, no one will get stared at much within Ractos.¡±


    ¡°Yes, the Silver Fenrir!¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    Ms. Delia suddenly reacted very strongly.


    Her ears unfolded and twitched.


    ¡°This Silver Fenrir¡­I left my vige in order to see it!¡±


    ¡°Uh, is that¡­so?¡±


    ¡°Yes! For beastkin, Silver Fenrir are special beings! Well, I was raised by humans, so I don¡¯t know much about that¡­but my instincts told me that I must meet with it!¡±


    That strongly? Well, she certainly looked very enthusiastic about seeing Leo.


    Indeed, I had heard something like that before¡­


    ¡°Uhh¡­ Still, you also want to work in Range vige, yes?¡±


    ¡°Of course, I do. I was told that the Silver Fenrir does not attack people, and it will be safe. So as long as I am hired and work hard, then I should be able to meet it eventually!¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Well, there is someone else I want you to meet. So I don¡¯t mind if you meet Leo at the same time.¡±


    ¡°Really!? But¡­who is this other person¡­?¡±


    ¡°Well, I will let that be a surprise.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. You are talking about Liza, aren¡¯t you?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Since she is a beastkin, perhaps they can be friends. I think it might be better for her, than to be around humans only?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ As a human raised among other humans, I do not know what it feels like to be in her position¡­ But I agree that it would be good to have them meet.¡±


    I could just tell her in advance, but since Liza would also be surprised, they would be meeting with the same circumstances.


    In any case, Ms. Delia would be able to meet Leo as well. So it was perfect.


    After all, if she was going to work in Range vige, she will definitely be seeing them anyway. So she might as well meet them now.


    Sebastian looked quite amused by this idea as well.


    He did like to surprise people¡­maybe I was being influenced by him.


    Well, as long as we were not doing anything wrong.


    I had been thinking about visiting the orphanage next, but I suppose we could stop by Mr. Kalis¡¯s store fire.


    Besides, the children would be happier if they could meet Liza and Leo again as well.

 Chapter 752

    Chapter 752


    We talked while the others cleaned up<hr>


    ¡°Haha. That was quite entertaining. I see that you are quite odd, Mr. Takumi. It is no wonder the duke is fond of you.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­¡±


    I was currently talking with Mr. Soldan in the corner of the room.


    The others were cleaning up, but this really just meant putting away the chairs.


    Ms. Delia sat next to me. Her back was straight and she seemed a little nervous, though I didn¡¯t understand why she would me.


    Well, this was her first time meeting a potential employer¡­ So it was like sitting next to the boss of thepany you wanted to join.


    ¡°Still, I have never met a beastkin before. I did not realize how different their ears are. Ah, excuse me. I don¡¯t mean to be rude.¡±


    ¡°Ye-yes¡­¡±Mr. Soldan said conversationally. But he wasn¡¯t even looking at Ms. Delia, as his eyes were still fixed on the papers on his desk.


    Well, perhaps his reaction was normal. I had also been surprised when I first saw Liza. Especially since the rest of her looked quite human. But I wasn¡¯t as surprised as most people, because I was just reminded of Leo and Sherry.


    ¡°You shouldn¡¯t be so nervous. If you get nervous around the likes of me, you won¡¯tst long.¡±


    ¡°Re-really?¡±


    Mr. Soldan continued to say. He was probably talking about ire and Tilura, since they were the duke¡¯s daughters.


    ¡°Ms. Delia, was it? If you want to meet the Silver Fenrir, then you will likely have to meet thedies of the duke¡¯s household as well.¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­? I¡­I¡­ I am not worthy of meeting them¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, Mr. Soldan is right. They are with Leo right now. And so we will go together and meet them.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ Are you sure about this? They might take offense at the sight of me. Especially since I¡¯m a beastkin¡­¡±


    Well, there was no need to worry about that. I was more likely to say something rude than anyone else, and they never cared.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Ms. Delia. ire¡­uh, the duke¡¯s daughter, is not the kind of person to react like that. Besides, she doesn¡¯t believe those kinds of rumors regarding beastkin. She should be quite weing to you¡­ Oh, sorry¡­¡±


    ¡°No-no, it¡¯s fine¡­¡±


    While offering words of encouragement, I identally patted her on the head. Perhaps seeing her so anxious had made me think of how Liza used to be.


    ¡°¡­It reminded me of when people from my vige would sometimes pat me on the head¡­ It was nice¡­¡±


    ¡°Really? Well, I guess it¡¯s because I¡¯m always petting Leo.¡±


    After that, we listened to Mr. Soldan as he talked about how wonderful a person Duke Ekenhart was.


    And when we were ready to leave, I said goodbye to him and left the building with Ms. Delia in order to meet up with the others.

 Chapter 753

    Chapter 753


    The tail was freed<hr>


    ¡°Ms. Delia, you look like you are having trouble walking?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m fine! But¡­you could tell?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    ¡°Hoho. You are so slow. And we have guards to make sure we don¡¯t bump into anyone. And yet you¡¯re still tripping.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry.¡±


    After leaving the building, we made our way to Mr. Kalis¡¯s store. And Ms. Delia had tripped several times on the way.


    Ms. Lyra helped support her each time, but it was still noticeable.


    ¡°Is it harder to bnce while hiding your tail?¡±¡°¡­Yes. It is ufortable and awkward¡­¡±


    I see. They do say that animals use their tail to bnce, so perhaps it was the same with beastkin.


    ¡°But I needed to hide the fact that I am a beastkin.¡±


    ¡°It is quite noticeable. If only Leo was here, she could carry you.¡±


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi. And Mr. Sebastian. Could you please look away?¡±


    ¡°Huh? Oh, sure.¡±


    ¡°Ms. Delia excuse me.¡±


    We had stopped in a secluded area, and then Ms. Lyra told us to look away.


    She then went behind Ms. Lyra and bent down. I suppose she was going to release Ms. Delia¡¯s tail from her trousers.


    ¡°There, all done. That should make it easier to move.¡±


    ¡°Th-thank you. If I do it myself, I would have to take it off once.¡±


    ¡°So your clothes were already made to amodate it?¡±


    Ms. Delia¡¯s ck tail was now wagging behind her.


    ¡°Yes. All of my clothes were made by the old women in the vige. They had seen me trip and get injured when I was younger¡­¡±


    ¡°Huh. So you must know a lot about such clothes then.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    She looked very happy while talking about her vige and the people there.


    It was clear that the vigers were very fond of her.


    Ms. Delia then walked around with light, confident steps as we nodded.


    Her thin tail stretched up into the air and wagged as if happy to be out.


    Though, she looked a little embarrassed when she noticed we were watching her.


    ¡°Still, I expected to get more stares from people. Yes, they do look sometimes¡­but not for long¡­.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Well, they know that you are with the duke¡¯s people, so they would not look at you in an unfavorable way.¡±


    Though, I was reminded of when we first met Nick. There were definitely some reckless people out there¡­ I suppose Leo and I were walking in the back and were harder to see at first.


    Regardless, Ms. Delia was quite sensitive about people looking at her because she was a beastkin.


    But right now, we were walking as arge group with guards, so we could not help but stick out from the crowds¡­

 Chapter 754

    Chapter 754


    I was praised for some reason<hr>


    ¡°Beforeing here, the vigers all said that I must hide my identity as a beastkin. And so I was convinced that something terrible would happen to me.¡±


    ¡°They must have been very worried about you, Ms. Delia. Besides, things were much worse in this town until recently. It only got better thanks to Mr. Takumi and Leo. Of course, there are still problems¡­¡±


    As it was a far away vige, they probably had prejudices towardsrge towns and cities.


    But then again, I had actually witnessed Liza being persecuted, so they weren¡¯t wrong. And it was possible that had Ms. Delia came here without any preparations, she might have gotten into some kind of trouble.


    Regardless, I was d that we had captured Deam.


    ¡°Is that so? Mr. Takumi and the Silver Fenrir¡­uh¡­Le¡­¡±


    ¡°Leo?¡±


    ¡°Yes, Leo. That is amazing. Thank you, Mr. Takumi. I can now walk freely like this!¡±¡°I didn¡¯t do anything¡­¡±


    I felt a little embarrassed about being thanked by Ms. Delia. But then Sebastian began to exin to her about what had happened.


    Well, I suppose that after Deam was gone, crime had gone down¡­ And rumors had spread about Leo in Ractos.


    ¡°I see. so Mr. Takumi and Leo are working with the duke to make this ce safer!¡±


    ¡°Working with¡­I suppose. Though, it is mostly Leo¡¯s doing.¡±


    ¡°Hoho. But it¡¯s because of Mr. Takumi that Leo is able to do so much.¡±


    As we walked towards Mr. Kalis¡¯s store, the conversation continued to be about praising me and Leo.


    Ms. Lyra and the guards were nodding as well.


    It was kind of like being punished. Even though I was sure that they weren¡¯t purposely doing it to make fun of me¡­ Well, except for Sebastian.


    Still, I suppose Ms. Delia was very excited. She had calmed herself down once, but then became very active all over again¡­


    Her restlessness reminded me of Liza¡­ Her overall air. It wasn¡¯t really about her appearance or the fact that she had ears and a tail.


    Perhaps Liza would be simr to her one day?


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Ahhh! I got hit!¡±


    ¡°Ahaha. Leo is strong!¡±


    ¡°Hmm? I guess she is ying with the children, so it¡¯s no surprise how loud it is. But it¡¯s different than I expected?¡±


    ¡°They sound like they are having fun, but there are screams as well.¡±


    ¡°I-I-I can sense the Silver Fenrir¡­¡±


    Once the store was in view, we could hear a lot of noise.


    Sebastian and I looked at each other with puzzled expressions.


    Ms. Delia had been so excited a moment ago, but she was now nervous and shaking with fear.


    Her ears were folded down, and her tail went between her legs. It seemed like it would be very difficult to walk like that.


    Well, Leo was the strongest monster. And she could probably sense Leo¡¯s strength from a distance¡­ After all, even the fenrirs had been quick to roll over and submit to Leo.


    ¡°Wou? Wou!¡±


    ¡°Ah, mama? ¡­Papa is back!¡±


    ¡°Haha. We¡¯re back, Leo and Liza.¡±


    ¡°Ah! They jumped over us!¡±


    ¡°How amazing!¡±


    ¡°Damn it! I haven¡¯t lost yet!¡±


    As we approached Mr. Kalis¡¯s store, Leo suddenly noticed us, and while carrying Liza on her back, jumped out from the ring of people, andnded right in front of us¡­

 Chapter 755

    Chapter 755


    Leo was good with children<hr>


    ¡°So, Leo and Liza. You seem to be having fun. But something seems a little different from usual. What is it?¡±


    ¡°Wou? Wou¡­¡±


    ¡°Uhh, papa. While we were ying, this little boy said that he could win against mama!¡±


    ¡°Leo? Hmm¡­¡±


    When I asked Leo seemed like she wasn¡¯t really sure, and so Liza exined it to me instead.


    Well, there was no way he could beat Leo¡­ But I suppose it was not necessary to say that.


    ¡°Thi-thi-this is¡­the Si-si-silver¡­¡±


    Ms. Delia was behind me and still shaking. She could barely even talk properly. Ms. Lyra and Sebastian tried to calm her.¡°Who is that? Thatdy has ears and a tail too? Is that fake?¡±


    ¡°Wou?¡±


    ¡°No, those are real. She is a beastkin, just like you, Liza.¡±


    ¡°Really!? The same¡­¡±


    Apparently, Liza had never thought about there being others like her before. I suppose she had never seen any beastkin since being saved by Mr. Reyndorf.


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right. Liza, can you go and call ire? I want to talk to her about Ms. Delia. Well, if she is not too busy.¡±


    ¡°Okay.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°You can¡¯t go in the store, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    Liza got down from Leo and rushed into Mr. Kalis¡¯s store.


    Leo also asked me if she should go too, but she was too big to fit inside.


    Perhaps through ying with the children, she was brought back to old times and forgot that she was so big now.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°Ah, Tilura. So you were with Liza. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°No, I was just ying.¡±


    After Liza left, Tilura then came out of the ring of children while waving her hand.


    ¡°Uh, Liza was saying something about how some boy wanted to challenge Leo?¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s right! He was only a little taller than Liza, but was always next to her while ying. And then after seeing Liza hug Leo or climb on top, he became angry!¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ But the voice earlier didn¡¯t sound that angry to me?


    Still, if he got angry because Liza was hugging Leo, perhaps he had be jealous?


    ¡°After challenging Leo several times, he started tough again. I think it was because Leo did something¡­¡±


    ¡°Really?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wou. Wuff¡­ Wuff-wuff.¡±


    It would be understandable if he suddenly realized how foolish it was and startedughing. Leo was not someone that any human could easily beat.


    When I asked Leo, she said that he came at her while swinging a tree branch, and so she would knock him down carefully so that he wouldn¡¯t get injured, or poke and tickle his legs.


    ¡°Well, that¡¯s good that you were careful, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Leo looks so happy.¡±


    Leo had been ying when Mr. Euto attacked her as well. But she was even more careful since she was with a child this time.


    And so I patted her on the head and praised her.

 Chapter 756

    Chapter 756


    Ms. Delia was very confused<hr>


    ¡°Mr. Ta-ta-ta-takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Please calm yourself, Ms. Delia.¡±


    ¡°Bu-but¡­ There is a Silver Fenrir right there¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Hey, this person has ears and a tail too?¡±


    ¡°Ah, she is¡­¡±


    While I tried to make Ms. Delia calm down, it was not working¡­ Even Sebastian and Ms. Lyra were shaking their heads.


    In the meantime, I told Tilura about her and then approached Ms. Delia while raising my right hand.¡°Mr. Ta-takumi¡­what¡­?¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. There is nothing to be afraid of. Right, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Kuun¡­¡±


    I pulled her by the hand towards Leo so that she could smell Ms. Delia.


    However, this seemed to make Ms. Delia even more nervous, and she let out a sound that reminded me of a whimpering puppy. Leo had sounded like that once.


    ¡°Leo. This is Ms. Delia. As you can see, she is a beastkin. We met her during the interview earlier. One of the reasons that she came here was in order to meet you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Ahh. She heard rumors about a Silver Fenrir. And so she came from a different town. I¡¯ll tell you about thatter.¡±


    ¡°Wou. ¡­Sniff¡­ Wou.¡±


    ¡°Ah-ah-ahhh¡­¡±


    After sniffing her, Leo then licked Ms. Delia¡¯s face.


    Ms. Delia looked like she was on the verge of screaming in terror.


    Hmm¡­ We could not talk calmly like this.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. You¡¯re back!¡±


    ¡°Papa! I brought her!¡±


    ¡°Ah, ire. Thank you. Hello, Mr. Kalis.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s been a while. But¡­what is happening here?¡±


    As I was thinking about ways to calm Ms. Delia, the others returned with Liza.


    ¡°This is ire. ire, Mr. Kalis. This is Ms. Delia. As you can see, she is a beastkin¡­but¡­she has been like this after meeting Leo¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, so she is nervous? Still, we must introduce ourselves. Uh, hello? I am ire Liebert.¡±


    ¡°ire¡­Liebert¡­ But¡­that means!!! You¡­the¡­duke¡¯s¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, he is my father.¡±


    ¡°!?¡±


    ¡°¡­I think she is even more shocked now¡­maybe this was a mistake?¡±


    Upon hearing ire¡¯s introduction, Ms. Delia froze and shouted¡­


    ¡°E-e-excuse me! I did not realize that I would be meeting a Silver Fenrir and also the duke¡¯s daughter¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°No, it¡¯s fine. You haven¡¯t said anything rude. Still, a beastkin¡­¡±


    ¡°I-I¡¯m sorry¡­yes. Perhaps humans would rather that someone like me does not¡­¡±


    ¡°Not at all. We do not let such small differences get in the way. Mr. Takumi. Was she one of the applicants?¡±


    ¡°Yes. She really wanted to meet Leo. And though she was hiding it at first, I realized that she was a beastkin. And so I wanted her to meet Liza.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Yes, perhaps that would be good for Liza. I would have probably thought the same thing.¡±


    ¡°Hey, hey¡­sister?¡±


    ¡°Huh? Uh, this child¡­ Is she a beastkin too!?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I am. Papa and mama saved me!¡±


    ¡°Papa and mama¡­?¡±


    Ms. Delia looked at me with a puzzled expression. Well¡­that was the strange part¡­

 Chapter 757

    Chapter 757


    We exined things calmly in Mr. Kalis¡¯s store<hr>


    ¡°Well, that is what she calls us.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°A Sil-silver Fenri and Mr. Takumi¡­ So this child is the ruler of the beastkin!? The queen!¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    Liza looked at her with a puzzled expression.


    Why would she suddenly say that Liza is a queen¡­ I suppose because Silver Fenrirs were the strongest monsters, they were seen as being godlike to some beastkin.


    But this was not a beastkin country. And we were adoptive parents.


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi. Did you not exin it to her?¡±¡°I was going to keep it a surprise¡­ Of course, I didn¡¯t realize that you and Leo would be enough already¡­¡±


    Indeed, had I known this was going to happen, I would have given her a heads up.


    Though, she would have likely still be nervous over meeting Leo.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Well, it looks like you should sit down and discuss things? How about moving to the second floor of my store then? I will serve you some tea and you can rx.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Thank you, Mr. Kalis.¡±


    ¡°Not at all¡­ Thanks to Leo, we have more customers here today. And to be honest, I want to keep you here as long as possible.¡±


    ¡°Haha. You do know how to do business. Leo, Liza. Sorry, but we¡¯re going inside to talk. Can you y here for a little longer?¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Yes! It¡¯s fun! But¡­is thatdy alright?¡±


    ¡°She¡¯s fine. Just a little shocked. Well, Tilura, please watch over them.¡±


    ¡°Leave it to me! Though, I¡¯ll just be ying with them.¡±


    Ms. Lyra then pushed the stunned Ms. Delia into the building. And then I, ire, Mr. Kalis and Sebastian followed them in.


    ¡°Ah, brother!¡±


    ¡°Hey, Nick. I see that you are working hard. Uh, don¡¯t mind us. We¡¯re just going to talk upstairs. You keep helping the customers.¡±


    ¡°Aye!¡±


    After entering the store, we greeted the other employees and then saw Nick.


    He was about to rush towards me, but I told him to focus on his job¡­ It would be rude to ignore the customers.


    In the second floor, we all sat down at the table¡­except for Sebastian, who stood behind ire.


    We waited for the tea to be brought, and then we started to talk.


    ¡°Ah, we can finally rx now¡­ I was quite thirsty after everything.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Let me know if you want more.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Now, Ms. Delia¡­are you calm now?¡±


    ¡°Ye-yes¡­ Sorry for what happened earlier.¡±


    It seemed that being away from Leo had helped to revive her¡­ Also, the delicious tea probably helped as well.


    ¡°Well then¡­ Where should we start? Ah, there isn¡¯t much to say about Leo. She is just a Silver Fenrir. ire is the daughter of the duke. I suppose you want to know about Liza?¡±


    ¡°Ye-yes! Indeed. That beastkin child! The one who thinks you and the Silver Fenrir are her parents¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ She just wanted to call us that. Because we happened to save her. Anyway, about Liza¡­¡±


    And so we drank tea and I slowly told Ms. Delia about how we met Liza¡­

 Chapter 758

    Chapter 758


    I exined about Liza¡¯s situation<hr>


    I told Ms. Delia why Liza called us papa and mama.


    While Mr. Reyndorf had been the first one to meet her, as he was quite elderly, she called him grandpa.


    Or perhaps he told her to call him that.


    In any case, I suppose Liza was looking for some kind of parental figures.


    I also told Ms. Delia about how she was treated in the slums and why we took her back.


    ¡°She experienced such things¡­ But she seemed so cheerful when I saw her earlier¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, I don¡¯t think she forgot all of that. But right now, she is surrounded by kind people, and is able to act like a child should at that age again.¡±


    When we first met her, she had done her best to try and speak politely. It seemed like a defense mechanism, where she wanted to avoid being made a target, or have people dislike her.¡°Especially now. It¡¯s not just me and Leo. But she also has Tilura to y with.¡±


    ¡°And Tilura seems to see Liza like a younger sister.¡±


    ¡°Well¡­I now understand why she would want to call you papa, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°It was quite a surprise when she did that.¡±


    ¡°I suppose she must have felt some kind of familial warmth. Beastkin have strong senses when ites to such things.¡±


    ¡°¡­Is that so?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Though, I don¡¯t know any other beastkin¡­ But as for myself, I can often tell if a person is just being kind on the surface¡­ Or if someone is genuinely concerned¡­ Of course, not everything is alwayspletely right. But I did feel my senses were sharper than most people.¡±


    Well, that did make sense to me.


    They were different from humans in some ways. And watching Liza and Leo, I often felt they were doing things based on senses instead of thinking.


    Though, I suppose Leo was a special case.


    ¡°So perhaps Liza experienced the kindness of Mr. Takumi and Leo, and then sensed something. That you two would love her¡­¡±


    ¡°Well¡­do you really think so?¡±


    ¡°Hehe. You look embarrassed?¡±


    Well, it was a little different when it wasing from ire.


    She wasughing at my reaction. Was I really so easy to read? Well, quite some time has now passed since we met. So perhaps it was no surprise.


    Though, the idea that she was observing me this carefully made me feel even more embarrassed.


    ¡°Mo-more importantly¡­ How was it for you, Ms. Delia? In the vige¡­¡±


    ¡°You don¡¯t have to worry about that. Yes, I was found in the forest. But I do not have a sad past at all. If anything, I had a good childhood.¡±


    I changed the subject in order to hide my embarrassment.


    After I said it, it urred to me that I might identally cause her to remember something that she did not want to.


    However, Ms. Delia did not mind. And she seemed quite happy as she exined. It did look like she only had good memories.


    ¡°I was picked up in the corner of the fenrir forest. However, it seemed to be shortly after I was born, and so I have no memory of that. I just know that the elders of the vige took care of me, and yed with the children. All of the adults worked until sundown. So it was just the old men and women, as well as the children who were around¡­¡±

 Chapter 759

    Chapter 759


    Ms. Delia talked about how she was found<hr>


    ording to Ms. Delia, she had been found by a lumberjack.


    A single fenrir had been lying on the ground beside her. And so the man had been afraid to go close to her at first. But once he saw that the fenrir did no move, he went closer to Ms. Delia.


    On closer inspection, the fenrir wasn¡¯t moving due a serious injury. And so it was not able to attacks Ms. Delia or the man.


    However, once the man picked up the sleeping baby, the dying fenrir suddenly stood up and walked back into the forest.


    But before it disappeared, it turned back once and bowed its head as if apologizing.


    The man was going to follow it, but then Ms. Delia started to cry. After that, he never saw the fenrir again.


    In the first ce, a fenrir had never appeared so close to the vige before. And so the vigers settled on the idea that it was trying to protect the baby.


    And since some people feared the fenrirs, they decided to raise the baby as their own.¡°And so I was raised in the vige. As I had ears and a tail, the fact I was a beastkin could not be hidden. However, they treated me like anyone else.¡±


    ¡°Still, there were people who feared fenrirs and even you?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Well, no one did anything. It was just a few people. Everyone else was very nice. And I am so grateful to them.¡±


    ¡°I now understand the situation when you were found. It is quite interesting¡­ That a fenrir would have wanted to protect you¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, we still do not know for certain¡­ But it seemed like the most likely exnation.¡±


    Upon hearing all of this Sebastian touched his chin and nodded thoughtfully.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Perhaps you might learn something if you talked to the fenrirs about this?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Though, I think that Fen and the others live quite far from that vige¡­it¡¯s still possible that they might know something.¡±


    ¡°And uh¡­who are these fenrirs?¡±


    ¡°They live in the fenrir forest. The leader of that pack is called Feri. And there are two others called Fen and Riruru. As Leo is here, we have talked to them several times, and they are very friendly.¡±


    Well, it was mostly because we feeded them.


    ¡°Oh, friendly with them? How did you¡­ Ah, I suppose it would be easy with a Silver Fenrir. They would understand that she is the greatest of all monsters. I myself was so overwhelmed that I could not speak properly¡­ I hope that she is not angry with me now¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, for me she is just a cute buddy. Also, she is very kind, and would not be mad at you, Ms. Delia.¡±


    ¡°¡­After seeing her with that child¡­Liza. I can see that she is kind, but¡­ Well, she seems to like children.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Well, you should go and pet herter.¡±


    ¡°I-I-I-I¡­couldn¡¯t do that¡­ Being petted by someone like me¡­¡±


    ¡°But she likes being petted. She will be quite happy.¡±


    Earlier, I had pulled her hand towards Leo, and Leo seemed to enjoy it.


    It didn¡¯t really have anything to do with being beastkin or Silver Fenrir.


    ¡°Are you¡­sure?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi knows more about Leo than anyone. I was also very surprised when I first met them.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ It was surprising for me as well. It is one thing when it was the first master, but a human with a Silver Fenrir¡­¡±


    ¡°First master?¡±


    ¡°Yes. The very first lord of this family. There is an old story about that¡­ Lady ire?¡±


    Sebastian said as he turned to ire with a smile.

 Chapter 760

    Chapter 760


    Sebastian talked about the family¡¯s history<hr>


    ¡°There¡¯s no problem. It is not like it would be troublesome for her to know. Most people know it already. And Ms. Delia seems to have a deep connection with fenrirs.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Well then, if you would be so kind as to listen to an old man¡¯s tale¡­¡±


    I had already heard this story. ording to Mr. Euto, this person had alsoe from our world. This woman who had the Gift. I think her name was Josephine.


    Regardless, Sebastian looked very lively as he repeated this old story.


    ¡°Oh¡­ So there is that connection. The duke and Silver Fenrirs¡­¡±


    ¡°As many of the people around here know, they also hold a reverence towards Silver Fenrirs. Even though no one had seen any up until recently¡­ Well, perhaps some had. But if they did, I doubt the Silver Fenrir would have been as friendly as Leo.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I do believe that the only reason that Leo is so friendly, and does not attack humans, is because she is with Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi must be very important¡­¡±¡°No, I¡¯m not really¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, in any case, the point is that you do not have to be so intimidated around Leo.¡±


    ¡°I suppose that is true¡­ But when one is in front of a Silver Fenrir, it¡¯s hard to¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, you will get used to it. I was like that as well. And so were the servants and my father. But now, they all like Leo and are always petting her.¡±


    Uh, from what I remembered, ire had been quick to approach Leo from the beginning¡­ But I suppose she did hesitate in the very beginning when it came to riding on her.


    That being said, we had saved her during the first encounter. So that might have something to do with it. She was being attacked by orcs.


    Without Leo, I would not have made it in time¡­ I was too slow on my feet. Also, I couldn¡¯t even fight with a sword back then. So even if I was there, I would have just died along with her.


    ¡°So, Mr. Takumi. Why did you bring Ms. Delia here? I suppose the main reason was to introduce her to Lady Liza. But something tells me there was another reason.¡±


    ¡°Uh, so you could tell, Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Well, you are very easy to read, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    It¡¯s not like it was a secret. I was just going to ask her, and if Ms. Delia agreed to it¡­


    Still, I didn¡¯t expect Sebastian to be able to guess this.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. What are you nning to do with Ms. Delia?¡±


    ¡°What? Is he going to do something with me? Well, he does have a Silver Fenrir, so I suppose I will have to listen.¡±


    ¡°Please don¡¯t brace yourself like that.¡±


    ire looked puzzled, and Ms. Delia looked strangely determined. It really was not necessary.


    ¡°Uh, but first¡­ Can you read, Ms. Delia?¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­yes. The elders of the vige taught me to read and write.¡±


    I was not quite sure what the average education level was in this world. But it seemed like it wasn¡¯t that unusual for people to not be able to read.


    Apparently, Mr. Euto had put a lot of effort in education, so more people could learn¡­ But in the end, it seemed like most people still learned from family members or through private lessons.


    Of course, that meant that people like Ms. Delia or Liza would often be ignored.


    Apparently, they did teach the children at the orphanage, but there was no one teaching in the slums. And so many of the children grew up like that.


    It was one of the reasons that Nick had found it difficult to find work.


    Though, Mr. Kalis was now teaching him.


    I suppose it would be difficult to work and deal with customers without being able to read a little¡­ Nick talked about how much he owed to Mr. Kalis, and how grateful he was. In reality, Mr. Kalis had probably done more for Nick than me.


    In any case, if Ms. Delia could read and write, that was perfect. Though, it was rather unwise for me to start thinking ahead, without even confirming it first¡­

 Chapter 761

    Chapter 761


    The wee feast in Range vige<hr>


    ¡°Yes. I was very surprised when he attacked Leo, but I was even more surprised when I heard who he was. And then he apologized like that¡­ This has been quite a day.¡±


    ¡°Haha. But no one was ever in any real danger, so it was rather fun, wasn¡¯t it?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ So you did not care at all that Leo was being assaulted?¡±


    Ms. ire said with an annoyed look.


    ¡°Of course, I don¡¯t want her to be attacked¡­ But Leo can handle such things easily.¡±


    ¡°I suppose¡­¡±


    ording to Mr. Ekenhart and Ms. Lugretta, he was so weak without magic, that even amon soldier could beat him.


    And if Mr. Ekenhart could not even touch Leo, then there was no danger of someone like Mr. Euto hurting her.¡°Regardless, the two of you talk like you are friends now. That was also surprising. Even my father does not talk to him so casually¡­¡±


    ¡°Well¡­it¡¯s because he asked me to. Also, we seem to be simr in age¡­¡±


    I was also able to talk with Mr. Ekenhart on very friendly terms. However, since he was much older, I still saw him more as a nice old man.


    But then again¡­Euto was actually unaging, and over a thousand years old. However, that was hard to imagine or even believe. But he looked the same age as me, and so it was easier to treat him that way.


    As for his rank¡­ As he had founded the country, he should also be the king. But apparently he abdicated after the war ended. He could have just kept being king, but he decided to let his children take his ce.


    And so now he just traveled and enjoyed himself. He did show his royal crest in Range vige after hearing the news about a Silver Fenrir. However, normally he would travel just like any other ordinary traveler.


    ¡°But I am also close to you in age. You don¡¯t talk to me like that¡­ When will you start treating me more like a close friend, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Uhh¡­¡±


    ¡°Before¡­right after you and Leo saved me¡­you said that it would take time to get used to it. Why is it taking so long?¡±


    Now that I thought about it, I did say something like that.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, it might take a little longer¡­ Uh, I¡¯m too used to talking to you like this¡­¡±


    ¡°But how long will it take!? I suppose it¡¯s not been that long, but¡­how much more will you make me wait!?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­Ms. ire?¡±


    ¡°After father returns to the house? Or when the house ispleted in Range vige? Or when the herb fields are created!? How long!?¡±


    A fire seemed to have been lit inside of Ms. ire, and she began to question me heatedly with her face getting redder and redder.


    ¡­Huh? Red face?


    ¡°Ah, Ms. ire¡­you¡¯ve drunk too much wine¡­¡±


    ¡°It had nothing to do with wine! Unless you are saying that we must drink the whole barrel before you can start acting like a normal person with me!¡±


    ¡°No¡­that¡¯s not what I¡­ In fact, we¡¯ve both had enough. Let¡¯s stop drinking, alright?¡±


    Previously, she had gotten quite drunk with Ms. Anne, and regretted itter on. And though she had refused to drink for some time after that¡­she hadpsed.


    After all, this was a weing feast, and so we could hardly refuse. And though we had been careful to only drink a little, something must have triggered her, and she drank more than she should.


    The reason¡­ Uh, I suppose that it was me¡­


    Even if she was currently in a drunken state, the fact that she was pressing me so hard now suggested that it really had been bothering her. The way that I still treated her with formal politeness¡­

 Chapter 762

    Chapter 762


    I asked her to extend her stay<hr>


    ¡°In the first ce, everyone is supposed to return home once the interview is over. Though some will likely stay in Ractos, most will leave. And we will notify themter if they are hired.¡±


    ¡°Yes. And so I was going to return to the vige and help them with their work while I waited.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Uh, would it be possible for you to stay for one day longer?¡±


    ¡°If it is just one day¡­ I think I could manage¡­ But why?¡±


    ¡°Because I want you to spend a little time with Liza and Leo. But I also think you should have plenty of time to rest, or you will be tired when you have to travel tomorrow.¡±


    ¡°Oh, then I don¡¯t mind¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Her vige is not that far from Ractos, and there are usually no monsters on the road. Still, after everything that happened today, it would probably be best to take it easy¡­¡±


    While everyone agreed that she should stay for an extra day, Ms. Delia still looked hesitant. Perhaps it was because she didn¡¯t want to use more money.Of course, I did not want to force her if she didn¡¯t want to. However¡­


    ¡°I understand that you want to save on lodging fees. I was in a simr situation as well.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi is too modest¡­¡±


    ¡°You saved Lady ire, so it was nothing¡­¡±


    ¡°We-well¡­never mind that. In any case, since you are going to spend time with Liza, I will pay for your inn. Now, you may hesitate to ept, but since I¡¯m the one making the request, I have to do that much, at least.¡±


    ¡°Not at all! We¡¯re just going to talk a little¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, even putting aside the idea of teaching her. I want Liza to have acquaintances like you. Perhaps trying to solve things with money is a little questionable¡­ But that¡¯s all that I can do for now.¡±


    ¡°Hehe. If Liza knew about this, she would probably be worried about you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Or she would be angry. ¡®You don¡¯t have to think about that!¡¯ So, Ms. Delia. Please don¡¯t say anything about this to her.¡±


    As both were beastkin, I had feeling that there woulde a day when Ms. Delia and Liza would need each other.


    After all, she was bound to have troubles living amongst humans that only someone like her could understand.


    Even if she was fine now, I felt that she would feel better to have a beastkin friend.


    And so considering all that, paying for a room was nothing


    While this mighte off as a little bold, Ms. Delia was so reserved that being insistent to a certain degree was probably for the best. At least, that¡¯s what I thought.


    ¡°Ve-very well. Um¡­ I will not tell Lady Liza that you are so concerned about her.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Also, you can just call her Liza. That way, you won¡¯t feel so distant, and it should help her rx more. In fact, I wish Sebastian and the others would do the same¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, we think of you two as guests. So a degree of formality is important. Besides, it is best that the servants do not feel too rxed. Hoho¡­¡±


    A short while ago, he had been concerned that the servants seemed to be acting a little strange. They were too cheerful, or they wereining about things¡­


    Well, from their point of view, I suppose that talking to us in such a formal way helped to keep them focused, and not get too careless.

 Chapter 763

    Chapter 763


    A boy misunderstood<hr>


    ¡°Hey! What are you!¡±


    ¡°Hmm?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, I¡¯m sorry!¡±


    Suddenly, I heard someone shouting from behind. It was a child.


    When I turned to look, I saw a boy that was slightly taller than Liza. He was ring at me while holding a tree branch.


    And then a woman who appeared to his mother began to apologize.


    ¡°Mother, stay away! You! Move away from her!¡±


    ¡°Her¡­ Liza?¡±¡°Me?¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s right! If you¡¯re trying to kidnap her, I won¡¯t let you!¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m really sorry about my son¡­¡±


    His mother looked horrified and continued to apologize. However, ire and Sebastian wereughing¡­


    ¡°Papa isn¡¯t kidnapping me! He¡¯s nice!¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­papa¡­?¡±


    ¡°Well, that¡¯s how it is. I wouldn¡¯t do that, or anything she didn¡¯t like.¡±


    As I wondered what to do, Liza stepped forward and scolded the boy.


    The boy finally realized what was happening and looked terrified. I was starting to feel sorry for him.


    Well, Liza had a very visible tail now, so I suppose we didn¡¯t look like we were rted.


    ¡°Wuff! Wou!¡±


    ¡°Hey¡­ah¡­ahahaha!¡±


    ¡°Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°I see. Thank you.¡±


    As the boy stood there, red-faced with shame, Leo stepped forward and then used her paw to tickle him.


    Even though she had sharp ws, she was very careful when controlling them. That was a Silver Fenrir for you.


    When I asked Leo, she exined that things were getting awkward, and so she decided to tickle him.


    I was amazed that Leo would even think like that¡­ Still, if she kept tickling him, he might not be able to breathe¡­


    Some timeter, the boy and the other children all dispersed, and we had a simple lunch before leaving Mr. Kalis¡¯s store.


    Ms. Delia had been hesitant to eat with us, but was persuaded by Liza, who insisted that it would be more fun to eat together.


    ¡°The orphanage?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I talked about it before, but we intend to hire from there as well. And so I have to talk about it. Though, I suppose Leo and Liza will also want to y with the children.¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    While walking to the orphanage, I exined my purpose to Ms. Deliaa.


    Before we left, I had suggested that she ride on top of Leo with Liza, but she refused, saying that she was not worthy.


    Regardless, Leo was in a good mood about going to the orphanage.


    ¡°Kyau¡­¡±


    ¡°Sherry? Are you still sulking?¡±


    ¡°Sherry, there are a lot of friends at the orphanage. You¡¯ll be able to have fun ying there!¡±


    ¡°Kyu¡­kyuu¡­¡±


    Sherry sighed while Tilura carried her.


    As for why she was sulky, it had to do with ying with the children. Well, perhaps that was an exaggeration.


    The curiosity of children cannot be measured¡­ Last time when we went to Mr. Kalis¡¯s store, Leo had been outside, and Sherry was inside, so there was no problem. But this time, they were together.


    And so the children had been instantly interested in Sherry. As I had seen them pounce all over Leo before, I could imagine what had happened¡­ Regardless, Sherry had probably gotten more than she bargained for, and so she was not in a very good mood now¡­

 Chapter 764

    Chapter 764


    Ms. Delia took care of things<hr>


    I suppose Sherry was grumpy because they had pulled her fur¡­ Liza said that Sherry even barked angrily once. But then Leo told her to stop.


    Sherry had been able to eat until she was full after that, but even as she was being carried by Tilura, she was still holding a grudge.


    I just hoped she had not been traumatized.


    But she had yed at the orphanage with Leo before, and it wouldn¡¯t be as crowded as the store.


    ¡°Still, I did not expect to see a young fenrir¡­¡±


    Muttered Ms. Delia.


    I had exined it to her while we ate, but she was still astonished.


    I also told her about the parents, but there was nothing about the story that was noteworthy for her. I suppose that was to be expected, since it was far away from the ce where she had been found.Was it a lost fenrir? Or from a different pack? Regardless, it was over twenty years ago, so it hardly mattered now.


    Ms. Delia herself said that instead of caring about her past, she wanted to work to repay the vigers for their kindness.


    I wondered why she didn¡¯t just work in the vige then¡­but it was because she wanted to meet Leo and learn about the outside world as well.


    Speaking of her age, she was found twenty-two years ago¡­ So she was older than me¡­


    ¡°Hey! Wait!¡±


    ¡°Hmm?¡±


    ¡°What is happening?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    While we were walking, there was suddenly some shouting.


    Ms. Delia, Leo, and ire were also curious as they turned their heads.


    We were on the main road, where there was a lot of traffic. However, I had never heard someone shouting like that before.


    Up ahead, I saw the owner of a street stall chasing after another man.


    As for the man, he appeared to be holding something.


    ¡°Thief! Someone! Catch him!¡±


    ¡­A thief? I suppose he must have stolen some product then.


    Regardless, they were both running in our direction.


    ¡°Lady ire and Lady Tilura, please move back.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    The man was pushing people out of the way, but he did not appear to have a knife. Still, Phillip and Nichs moved ahead, as they determined that it could be dangerous.


    Sebastian and Ms. Lyra were behind them, and then ire and Tilura were farther back. While the rest of the guards stood around me and Liza.


    And then Leo took a step forward. I guess she meant to take care of it. However¡­


    ¡°Leave this to me!¡±


    ¡°Huh? Ms. Delia?¡±


    She suddenly shouted to my side. And in the next moment, she was gone.


    Huh? And then I saw that she was rushing towards the two men.


    ¡°Get out of my way!¡±


    ¡°No! You stole something from him! Meow!¡±


    ¡°Gah!¡±


    Ms. Delia shouted as she charged towards him. And then she suddenly stopped and turned around.


    She was now facing us, while holding the man¡¯s arm, and then she used the momentum to throw him to the ground.


    ¡°Ga¡­hhh¡­¡±


    ¡°This is what you deserve. Do you have any idea how much hard work went into making that¡­¡±


    ¡°Ms. Delia. Are you alright?¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°That was such a surprise¡­¡±


    ¡°Kyau-kyau!¡±


    ¡°That was amazing, Ms. Delia!¡±


    The man had been mmed onto his back, and could not move. While the man who had been chasing him stood there with a stunned expression.


    And while Tilura and Liza seemed excited at what they had just witnessed, I might have to tell them to not copy itter¡­

 Chapter 765

    Chapter 765


    Ms. Delia could use beastkin magic<hr>


    ¡°Ah¡­I¡¯m sorry. I just could not allow it¡­ I suppose my body just moved on its own¡­¡±


    ¡°Phillip, go and call the guards. No, Ms. Delia, there is no reason for you to apologize. Still, it did look like you are used to doing this?¡±


    ¡°Sometimes, thieves woulde to steal from the vige fields¡­ And there were times when I had to catch them. Also, orcs woulde out of the forest. Of course, the vigers were also used to it and able to defend themselves. But I was always eager to help, and it naturally became my job¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    Still, judging by the way that she walked and moved, I felt like it wasn¡¯t just because she was used to catching people. Being a beastkin must have something to do with it as well¡­


    ¡°Thank you. Ah, Lady ire¡­so sorry for causing you trouble¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, it is the thief who is wrong, not you. Besides, it is my family¡¯s responsibility to keep this town safe. I should be apologizing¡­¡±


    ¡°No, not at all!¡±As I was thinking about Ms. Delia¡¯s beastly movements, ire and the shop owner were talking.


    He was selling vegetables, and Ms. Lyra handed him the ones that had been stolen.


    ¡°That was amazing!¡±


    ¡°Yes, I want to be able to move like that!¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­it was¡­¡±


    ¡°Hoho. She is quite popr now.¡±


    ¡°¡­Wou.¡±


    ¡°Now, now, Leo. Don¡¯t be so sad because you lost an opportunity to show off. Just be d that he was caught.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Liza and Tilura were excitedly surrounding Ms. Delia and praising her.


    And I had to console Leo in the meantime.


    Later, we handed over the thief to the guards. ire and Sebastian took care of matters, and then we continued on our way to the orphanage.


    ¡°Ms. Delia. Can you use magic?¡±


    ¡°¡­You could tell?¡±


    ¡°Well, kind of¡­¡±


    While walking, I asked her what had been on my mind.


    ¡°I cannot use the kind of magic that the vigers used. However, and I don¡¯t remember when¡­but I started to be able to do things¡­ Like making my body lighter so I can move quicker. I do it without thinking, really.¡±


    ¡°¡­So, it is magic specific to beastkin?¡±


    ¡°They say that it is rare for beastkin to use magic. But when they do, it is usually magic rted to their physical abilities.¡±


    ¡°Is there really magic specific to beastkin?¡±


    ¡°Huh? Uh¡­¡±


    ¡°There is magic used by humans and magic used by beastkin. And they cannot use the magic of the other.¡±


    Apparently, Ms. Delia didn¡¯t know that there was magic that she could only use because she was beastkin.


    And so Sebastian was happy to exin it to her.


    ¡°So that is why I couldn¡¯t use the same magic as the other vigers!¡±


    ¡°Indeed.¡±


    ¡°What a relief¡­ It was not my fault then. I wanted to learn, so that I could help them. But I just couldn¡¯t do it. They told me to not worry about it, but I couldn¡¯t help but me myself¡­¡±

 Chapter 766

    Chapter 766


    We arrived at the orphanage<hr>


    Using magic to help at the orphanage¡­ It was probably like starting fires and other things that were useful in daily life.


    Water was one thing, but fire seemed like a bad match for beastkin¡­ Their tails might catch on fire.


    They say that animals were scared of fire. But then again, Leo and Sherry weren¡¯t like that.


    ¡°With magic, you are using your own unique energy. And so everyone has their strengths and weaknesses. I suppose the differences are just more extreme between humans and beastkin. Though, I have heard there are spells that both can use. But I don¡¯t know what they are¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, I see¡­¡±


    ¡°Sebastian, I think that is enough. Ms. Delia is getting tired. Also, we are almost at the orphanage.¡±


    ¡°Oh, please do excuse me. I forgot myself.¡±


    When Sebastian got carried away, ire was the only one who could stop him¡­¡°We¡¯re back here¡­ When I first met papa, I was cleaned up here.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s right. It¡¯s been some time now.¡±


    Liza recalled that day as the church came into view.


    ¡°Excuse me, is Ms. Anna here?¡±


    ¡°Oh? Ah, Mr. Sebastian and Lady ire! Yes, she is inside!¡±


    ¡°We have something to discuss with her. May wee in?¡±


    ¡°Of course! Please! ¡­Oh, good Leo¡­¡±


    ¡°Leo can stay in the garden and y with the children.¡±


    ¡°Oh, wee, Mr. Takumi. Yes, the children have just finished with their studies.¡±


    ¡°So it¡¯s a good time. Did you hear that, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    We talked to the woman who was sweeping in front of the entrance.


    And so ire, Sebastian, Ms. Lya and I went inside. It didn¡¯t really matter what Ms. Delia did, but she decided toe with us instead of Leo.


    Perhaps she was still nervous.


    ¡°Wee, Lady ire and Mr. Takumi. And who is this?¡±


    ¡°Hello.¡±


    ¡°Thank you for helping Lizast time. This is¡­¡±


    ¡°I am Delia. As you can see¡­ I am a beastkin.¡±


    ¡°It seems like Mr. Takumi¡¯s fate is linked with beastkin.¡±


    ¡°Haha. Perhaps.¡±


    We were guided to a drawing room.


    There was arge table in the center and several wooden chairs.


    Perhaps it was more of a dining room¡­


    Once we all sat down, Ms. Delia introduced herself.


    ¡°So, what brings you here today? Ah, before that¡­how is she?¡±


    ¡°Liza? She should be outside ying with Leo and the children. She is doing very well now.¡±


    ¡°That is good to hear. While I refused to shelter her here, perhaps it was for the best. She would probably not have been as happy here. Even though I still feel bad about it¡­¡±


    ¡°No, if there was no space, then it could not be helped. And now that she¡¯s been with us for some time, I¡¯m also d that it worked out that way.¡±


    ¡°Hearing that eases the burden on my heart a little.¡±


    As I saw her relieved expression, I felt bad for not giving her an update sooner.


    ¡°Hehe. Indeed, she is so fond of Mr. Takumi now that she calls him ¡®papa.¡¯¡±


    ¡°That is a good thing. I suppose it is because he is kind. Children are sensitive towards such things. Especially beastkin.¡±


    Ms. Anna replied to ire with a smile.

 Chapter 767

    Chapter 767


    I talked to Ms. Anna about hiring


    ¡°Uh¡­you seem to know a lot about bestkin, Ms. Anna.¡±


    ¡°No, not at all. It¡¯s just that you hear things when working in this ce for so long. Ah, sorry for getting side-tracked.¡±


    ¡°No, it¡¯s fine. Uh, I know that not that much time has passed since west visited. But are you still full here?¡±


    ¡°Well¡­ A few of the older ones have finally left after finding jobs. But we are still quite full. Of course, there are also more children being sent here. We do our best to amodate them, but¡­¡±


    ¡°Childrene here?¡±


    ¡°Yes. They oftene from the slums. ¡­Ah, thank you, Lyra. Yes, one day, I wish to see them all doing well, like you.¡±


    ¡°Oh, I have a long way to go. But I will work hard for Mr. Takumi and Liza.¡±


    ¡°Thank you¡­ Yes, Ms. Lyra is doing very well with us.¡±Ms. Lyra came and put tea on the table for everyone.


    Ms. Anna looked at her with kind eyes. I suppose she was like a mother¡­


    ¡°Hmm, Lyra? But shouldn¡¯t you say that you are working hard for Lady ire? You are a servant of her house, after all.¡±


    ¡°As for that, it is fine. Lyra is now working for Mr. Takumi. Though¡­they are still living in the mansion.¡±


    ¡°Is that so?¡±


    ¡°Yes. We are going to be starting something new in Range vige soon. And I asked Ms. Lyra toe with us.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    Ms. Anna smiled at the news.


    I was surprised that she wasn¡¯t a little more concerned about me being a reliable employer.


    After all, working for ire would probably be a big priority for most in that position.


    Regardless, it did not mean much at the moment, because we were all still living in the same house.


    ¡°On that note¡­ We were thinking about hiring a few people from here as well.¡±


    ¡°Hiring children?¡±


    ¡°No, not children. I assumed there were people here who are adults but have not been able to leave yet¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. There are a few¡­ Right now, they help keep the ce running. Which is a big help, since there are so many children¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    So it might be rather difficult then.


    ¡°Well, you wouldn¡¯t want them to leave then.¡±


    ¡°I am sorry. But¡­if it was just one or two¡­¡±


    ¡°I suppose that will have to be discussed carefully? Also, how do you feel about having a few children working as well?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­¡±


    Ms. Anna thought with a serious expression.


    ¡°I understand that you would be concerned with the idea. However¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. It is not like the people here are strictly against it.¡±


    ¡°Is that so?¡±


    It seemed like getting some of the older ones out in order to make room for new children would be preferable.


    Sebastian then added his exnation.


    ¡°It is not verymon within the duke¡¯snds. But it is moremon in farming viges. Obviously, it is only light work, and nothing like what adults do.¡±

 Chapter 768

    Chapter 768


    We discussed hiring at the mansion<hr>


    ¡°I understand. Thank you for thinking about this orphanage.¡±


    Ms. Anna said once we were finished.


    ¡°So, will it really be possible to hire one or two of the adults? Or do you still need them here?¡±


    ¡°No, it is fine. Normally, they are supposed to go out and find work by this time.¡±


    ¡°Yes, and we will eventually want to hire people to work at the mansion as well. You should have more space here eventually.¡±


    ¡°That is good.¡±


    ¡°After Mr. Takumi brought Milina in order to study at the mansion, Sebastian, father and I observed her carefully and discussed the matter. As long as they wish toe, and do not feel any pressure, we thought that it might be good to have childrene to train. Also, we were thinking it might be nice to have someone younger, as Tilura will be alone once Mr. Takumi and I leave¡­¡±


    ¡°Ahh, that¡¯s right..¡±If she asked Mr. Ekenhart, Tilura might be able to go to Range vige eventually. But for now, she was to stay at the house.


    ¡°Well, I suppose it is a good thing for them to go out and be independent. Of course, it is sad to see someone leave after caring for them for so many years. But I am d that they can of use to Lady ire and Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Ms. Anna¡­¡±


    Depending on when they arrived, Ms. Anna might be taking care of a child for ten years or more.


    So even if they needed to make space for more younger children, it was understandable that she would be a little sad to see them leave.


    ¡°Well, we will do our best to ensure that they can enjoy their life. Of course, I still wish that we could do more¡­¡±


    ¡°No, you would be doing enough. Besides, when ites to them, there is only so much we can do. And there isn¡¯t always a right answer.¡±


    ¡°What do you mean?¡±


    ¡°Well, they all have their own way of thinking or seeing things. And no matter what you do, you cannot guarantee that they will turn into an upright citizen. We can only do what we feel is the best for them. And in spite of how many years I¡¯ve been here, I am always learning new things from them.¡±


    ¡°Is that so?¡±


    I could tell from the way she talked that she was a kind person. And the children seemed to be very fond of her.


    And she had been here long enough to be a veteran in my eyes. But apparently, she was still learning new things.


    ¡°Of course. You have to change the way that you praise each child. And rebuke them as well. And they have their own reasoning for things, and you cannot always force your way of thinking onto them¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, if only you saw her when she was angry. It was very scary. Though, I rarely got in trouble.¡±


    ¡°Well, Lyra was always very obedient. And she didn¡¯t me others for things. I suppose she was good at appearing to be good?¡±


    ¡°Even now, you see right through me¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha.¡±


    In order to lighten the mood, Ms. Lyra talked about how scary her old mother superior had been. And Ms. Anna retaliated.


    I couldn¡¯t help but chuckle, and ire and Sebastian also smiled as they looked at Ms. Lyra fondly.

 Chapter 769

    Chapter 769


    I was moved by Ms. Anna¡¯s story<hr>


    ¡°In any case, even if we are not connected by blood, I see the children as family. And through spending some time with you, and seeing Leo and Liza, I believe that you are trustworthy.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Oh, there I go again¡­ Getting carried away. Excuse me, Mr. Takumi. Sometimes people of my age tend to ramble.¡±


    ¡°No, I am d to be able to hear what you think. And I will do my best.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ire and Ms. Lyra watched with warm expressions, and everyone there seemed to have been moved. Even Sebastian was nodding with a warm and knowing expression.


    Ms. Delia was crying¡­


    Even though she wasn¡¯t involved, I suppose Ms. Anna¡¯s words had been deeply felt.It was just supposed to be a simple conversation, so how had it turned to this?


    I decided to drink my tea and pretend like I didn¡¯t notice¡­


    ¡°Ah¡­that was a mistake¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, is that so? I enjoyed being able to see a different side of you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°We didn¡¯te to have a good time, ire. Hah¡­¡±


    ¡°Lady ire, men tend to want to hide such things. It¡¯s best to leave it alone.¡±


    ¡°Really?¡±


    ¡°Sebastian, pointing that out just makes it more embarrassing¡­¡±


    Once Ms. Anna left the room, I leaned forward against the table and sighed.


    Apparently, ire had enjoyed seeing me get a little emotional.


    Well, she would have probably kept such thoughts to herself in the past. So I suppose that I should be happy for her.


    And then Sebastian had to make matters worse¡­


    ¡°Sniff..¡±


    ¡°Ah, but there is someone here who is in an even worse condition¡­¡±


    Ms. Delia wasn¡¯t even trying to hide the fact that she was crying as she sat next to me.


    Ms. Lyra was about to offer a handkerchief, but then realized that it was not enough. And so she brought a towel and dried off Ms. Delia¡¯s face with it.


    It would likely take her some time to calm downpletely.


    ¡°Perhaps beastkin feel emotions more strongly. Well, Mr. Takumi was also nervous for most of the day. So that might have had an effect.¡±


    ¡°Ah, that is true. After hearing Ms. Anna, I felt a lot of relief¡­ Though, I wish that I could have done better.¡±


    ¡°But you did well enough, Mr. Takumi. You were able to persuade her.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t think I persuaded her, as she would not likely object to begin with.¡±


    The first interviews and talking with Mr. Soldan.


    And then talking with Ms. Delia. And thening to the orphanage. A lot had happened that kept my mind working full-time.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. She agreed because she determined you could be trusted after talking to you. I think if you were too confident and made grand promises, she might have felt differently. She can be quite strict, after all.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Anna would be able to see past empty boasting.¡±


    ¡°I-I see. Well, I prefer to be honest, and like to act confident in what I¡¯m doing¡­ I suppose it worked out for me this time?¡±


    ¡°It is sometimes best to be confident. But in this instance, being yourself was a good thing, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    I supposed I should be happy¡­that being pitiful had worked better with this mother superior then.


    But then again, I shouldn¡¯t be too happy, or then I would be truly pitiful¡­

 Chapter 770

    Chapter 770


    Leo and the others were ying<hr>


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kya! Ahaha!¡±


    ¡°Leo is amazing!¡±


    ¡°Can Sherry do it too?¡±


    ¡°Kyau¡­kyau!¡±


    ¡°Woah, amazing!¡±


    While feeling tired, I shrugged it off and went out into the garden in order to see what the others were doing.


    Leo was lifting the children up by their sleeves, or jumping over their heads.One kid asked Sherry if she could do the same, and so she dashed through them swiftly.


    While they were different sizes, they were both able to have fun and y with the children.


    ¡°Are you alright, Ms. Delia?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­sorry about earlier.¡±


    Ms. Delia was still clutching the towel, but had regained her calm as we walked.


    ¡°Ah, papa! He¡¯s back!


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Ah. Were you having fun out here?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Leo noticed us, and just like in front of Mr. Kalis¡¯s store, she jumped off of Leo andnded in front of us.


    And then ire and I patted her on the head.


    ¡°Ms. Delia. How are you with children?¡±


    ¡°Uh, umm. I yed with them a lot in the vige. While I don¡¯t like it when they grab my tail, I am used to being around them.¡±


    ¡°Alright¡­ Then¡­do it, Leo!¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    Leo must have understood what I was thinking, as she quickly moved and picked up Ms. Delia by the sleeve.


    ¡°Huh? Ah! What!?¡±


    ¡°Yay! Just like Liza!¡±


    ¡°Hey! What? What are you¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°Very well¡­if it is Leo¡¯s order!¡±


    ¡°Ms. Delia. You don¡¯t need to be so tense. She is just ying!¡±


    Ms. Delia was shocked by how sudden it was, but Liza was overjoyed.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, you always do this when someone is afraid of Leo, yes? Like Father¡­Gelda¡­ Though, you made them ride on her.¡±


    ¡°Haha. Well, I want them to understand how cute Leo actually is. Besides, if Ms. Delia agrees to teach Liza, then she will have to get used to being around Leo. So we might as well get an early start¡­¡±


    Leo also liked people, and so she would actively try to y with them.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Lady ire. Preparations have been made.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Lyra.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    As we watched the children y, Ms. Lyra prepared a table and chairs for us.


    And then Ms. Anna came by. She had been talking with the others about what we had discussed.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. We have decided that we will be able to send two people from the orphanage for now, as supervisors.¡±


    A pair, a man and woman, bowed their heads several feet away.


    ¡°As for the children¡­ That will have to wait. It is all so sudden, and they will need time to get used to the idea.¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course. We are still making preparations in Range vige anyway.¡±


    Now that I thought about it, we hadn¡¯t discussed when we would be hiring and moving¡­ And so we couldn¡¯t take them now, even if they were ready to go.

 Chapter 771

    Chapter 771


    I finished talking with Ms. Anna<hr>


    ¡°In any case, I think it would be best if you told them about Range vige, and ask if any would like to go.¡±


    ¡°Well, there may not be very many¡­¡±


    ¡°Perhaps if you told them that they would be able to be around Leo, Liza and Sherry?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. They seem to have ground quite fond of them. Well, I will do that then.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. And Ms. Lyra and I will be there as well.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I shall help to watch over them.¡±


    ¡°Hehe. I am d to hear that, Lyra.¡±


    Ms. Anna looked towards the two others, and they nodded as well. Even if they would mostly be working with the herbs, since they were from the orphanage, it made sense that they would help to look after the others.¡°Uh.. I wished that good Leo would have held back a little.¡±


    ¡°Haha. But you looked like you had fun?¡±


    ¡°It certainly seemed like that from a distance¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau-kyau.¡±


    ¡°Mama and Sherry are in a good mood!¡±


    After talking with Ms. Anna, we told the children that we would visit again, and then left the orphanage behind us.


    Ms. Delia looked quite tired, as she had been ying not just with the children, but Leo, Liza and Sherry as well.


    But even though she grumbled about it, she was still wagging her tail, which suggested that she had be used to Leo.


    Leo¡¯srge tail, Sherry¡¯s small one, and Liza¡¯s fox-like tail¡­Ms. Delia¡¯s cat-like one¡­ They were all wagging with the same rhythm, as if they had be linked while ying together.


    While Sebastian and the guards pretended not to look, Ms. Lyra and Ms. Johanna¡­even ire, looked like they wanted to touch them.


    ¡°Ah, by the way, Mr. Takumi. Why don¡¯t we look for that ingredient, and see if they sell it in Ractos?¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­do you mean the konjac?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Since I heard they had it in Ractos¡­ Previously, was it tofu? They don¡¯t have that, but this is simr, isn¡¯t it?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s not simr at all¡­but¡­¡±


    ire started talking about something that we had been told by Mr. Euto¡­


    As for the tofu, there was no sea nearby, so we gave up on the idea of trying to make it here. But she still wanted something that could work as a diet menu item, I suppose.


    Well, the taste and texture waspletely different. But it could still be used for various dishes.


    But now that I thought about it, how did they store and carry the tofu that Ms. Helena bought previously? That stuff did notst for very long¡­ It hadn¡¯t been rotten when we ate it, so they must have managed it somehow.


    Inparison, konjac would have lower calories and could also be kept for longer.


    With that considered, it made sense to look for it, since we were already here.


    We had finished up all our business already. And there was time left before we had to return to the mansion.


    ¡°What is it Mr. Takumi and Lady ire?¡±


    ¡°Ah, Ms. Delia. We are thinking about searching for a rare ingredient. Uh, how do you say this¡­ It¡¯s called konjac, and you can eat a lot of it without gaining weight.¡±


    ¡°Yes. It is quite amazing. Though, I¡¯m sure you have no worries there, Ms. Delia.¡±


    For some reason, ire looked a little jealous as she said that.

 Chapter 772

    Chapter 772


    Ms. Delia knew about konjac<hr>


    Ms. Delia certainly was on the slender side, like a model. Which helped to exin her swift movements.


    ¡°Konjac? Rare?¡±


    ¡°Uh, you know about it, Ms. Delica?¡±


    ¡°Huh? Oh, they made it in the vige with the potatoes grown in the fields. I ate them a lot as a child.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°So they were grown in your vige.¡±


    As there was a lot of trade in Ractos, I knew it muste from somewhere¡­but apparently, it was from Ms. Delia¡¯s vige.


    Perhaps there were other viges that grew them as well.¡°Hearing about them makes me hungry.¡±


    ¡°Aren¡¯t you a little bored of them by now?¡±


    ¡°Well, they were very delicious when cooked by the grandmothers. That being said, they can also be eaten without cooking them.¡±


    Normally, if you ate it raw, there was a harshness to it. And so you would boil it first¡­


    But then again, it was probably different in this world.


    ¡°That¡¯s right. I think I know where they would be selling it¡­ Before leaving the vige, they told me where their konjac was sold. And that I should visit it if I get hungry.¡±


    ¡°Huh¡­ So the konjac sold here really is from yu vige. But you sounded like you weren¡¯t sure?¡±


    ¡°Yes, as this is my first timeing here. I heard about where it was, but don¡¯t know it exactly¡­¡±


    In that case, we might have to ask some people who live here in order to learn the exact location.


    ire looked like she wanted to run towards it right away, so we should probably go soon.


    She really did not need to be so enthusiastic about dieting¡­ Still, I was not sensitive to such things, and would not be very persuasive.


    ¡°Ah, I see. In that case, maybe you should ask Ms. Lyra?¡±


    ¡°Me? Yes, I do know quite a lot about this town¡­ As long as it is not inside of the slums, I should be able to guide you.¡±


    ¡°I also know a lot about Ractos¡­ It is necessary, since I am a butler. But Lyra is¡­ Tsk.¡±


    I recalled the time when someone had thrown a rock at Liza, and how Ms. Lyra had helped by guiding us through the town.


    She was raised here, after all.


    Sebastian looked a little annoyed that he couldn¡¯t do it. As if he had not exined enough already today.


    ¡°I¡¯m also from the orphanage and know a lot about this town¡­¡±


    For some reason, Phillip was acting like he had been slighted¡­


    ¡°Phillip, you left the orphanage quite earlypared to Lyra, didn¡¯t you? You were training with the master¡­ And the town has changed since then. Besides, you are on guard duty, so you must remain cautious.¡±


    ¡°Johanna¡­ Well, it¡¯s true that things have changed since then. That being said, I don¡¯t know if we are even necessary with Leo and Ms. Delia here.¡±


    ¡°Still, it is our role.¡±


    It was no surprise that he would have doubts, after seeing what Ms. Delia did recently. And with Leo with us. It was important to have trained humans protecting us as well. Surely.


    ¡°In any case, I think Ms. Delia and Ms. Lyra working together will get us there the quickest.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    ¡°Certainly¡­¡±


    ¡°We can finally eat the konjac then! I¡¯m looking forward to it!¡±


    ¡°Uh, ire¡­it¡¯s not like eating it alone will make you lose wait. So please don¡¯t expect too much¡­¡±


    Leo, Liza, Sherry and Tilura were clearly not interested in any of this.


    Though, Sherry had lost plenty of weight after all the running that Leo made her do. So her dieting would likely end soon.

 Chapter 773

    Chapter 773


    ire rushed to the store<hr>


    ¡°Does it really taste good?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know¡­ Mama?¡±


    ¡°Wou? Wou¡­wuff.¡±


    ¡°You have eaten it, Leo. You know¡­that springy stuff.¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wou¡­¡±


    ¡°Mama says it doesn¡¯t taste good at all!¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s an acquired taste. I don¡¯t hate it¡­¡±


    Well, Leo preferred meat, like sausages. So it was no surprise. I never really went out of my way to eat it either.Also, back then, I needed to eat meals that were high in calories, or I wouldn¡¯t have been able to survive.


    ¡°The ce Ms. Delia talked about¡­is right over there. That stall should be selling it.¡±


    Ms. Lyra guided us through the town after hearing of the ce from Ms. Delia.


    We had thene out into arge street where there were numerous stalls. But the one we were looking for was in a corner, and a little secluded.


    As Ractos had a lot of traffic, there were a lot of merchants who came to sell their products. They were able to set up stalls here by paying the town a small fee.


    And they were people who sold unusual things as well, and this also attracted more people.


    ¡°Uhh¡­ Ah, yes, it is that store. It¡¯s the old man from my vige.¡±


    ¡°Then let us go, Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°Uh, yes¡­¡±


    ¡°Lady ire, please wait!¡±


    ¡°She is so fast¡­¡±


    ¡°Mama, let¡¯s go too!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    After confirming that it was the correct ce, ire grabbed me by the hand and started to run.


    ¡­She really was looking forward to this¡­


    Sebastian called after her, and the others did their best to catch up.


    ¡°Excuse me, this is konjac, isn¡¯t it?¡±


    ¡°Uh, yes. Oh, are you interested in it? This one is special, because I made it. It is quite delicious, you know?¡±


    ¡°Oh, you have it in water. Yes, it¡¯s just as I remembered¡­ Can you eat it like this?¡±


    ¡°You can. I already cooked it once. But you should probably cook it again if you are going to use it in some dish.¡±


    The old store owner was a little taken aback by ire¡¯s enthusiasm, but he was also confident in what he was selling.


    In front of him, there was arge wine barrel filled with water. And inside the water were floating gray blocks.


    ¡°The tofu was more white, but this is more jiggly¡­¡±


    ¡°It is definitely tougher. You actually have to chew it.¡±


    ¡°Mister, you¡¯ve eaten this before?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Kanat, this is Mr. Takumi. And this is Lady ire.¡±


    ¡°Oh? If it isn¡¯t Delia. What are you doing here? Oh, you did say something abouting here¡­ But why aren¡¯t you hiding your ears and tail?¡±


    ¡°Apparently, you don¡¯t need to hide them here. But more importantly, please don¡¯t be rude to these people!¡±


    ¡°Eh?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, Lady ire. He doesn¡¯t know who you are¡­ Even if you rarely leave the vige, you should know¡­¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t mind it at all. We have never met each other before, so it is little wonder that he does not know who I am.¡±

 Chapter 774

    Chapter 774


    ire and Mr. Kanat were apologetic<hr>


    Mr. Kanat did not look surprised by ire¡¯s face or name at all. And he just looked at Ms. Delia with suspicion.


    While she was pretty well known in Ractos, as she visited often, it was more difficult for people who came from far away.


    ¡°Mr. Kanat! Come over here!¡±


    ¡°He-hey! What is it!? I need to sell this for the vige¡­!¡±


    ¡°They¡¯ve gone. I suppose I will have to wait if I want to eat it.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Uh, ire¡­¡±


    ¡°What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°This isn¡¯t going to make you lose weight just because you ate it¡­¡±I decided to use the opportunity to exin things to her.


    From behind, Leo, Liza and the others were running. Sebastian looked a little angry that we had gone ahead.


    ¡°It takes continuous effort¡­¡±


    ¡°Lady ire. What is the point of having guards if you are just going to leave them¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­I got a little carried away. Yes, I see. It is just one thing that can help, but¡­¡±


    ire looked a little embarrassed to be berated by Sebastian, and hear my exnation at the same time. I suppose she realized that she was acting based on emotion.


    ¡°Ah, Leo. That konjac is to be sold, so you can¡¯t just eat it¡­¡±


    I said to Leo, who had put her nose to the barrel and was sniffing it curiously.


    Though, she was just wondering what it was. She did not like it, and would probably not eat it anyway.


    ¡°I¡¯m very sorry for my insolent words and actions!¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry!¡±


    ¡°No, it¡¯s really nothing. It¡¯s my fault foring so suddenly¡­¡±


    Mr. Kanat and Ms. Delia were frantically bowing their heads in front of ire.


    So he finally knew that she was the daughter of a duke.


    But ire really did not mind. If anything, she was more flustered after being scolded by Sebastian.


    ¡°Still, I never expect Delia to be with such a person¡­¡±


    ¡°Actually, it wasn¡¯t really me. Lady ire knew about it and wanted toe and see your stall.¡±


    ¡°Really? I thought we were the only vige that made it around here. It is quite difficult, you know. So¡­there are other ces too¡­ Well, people here still act like it¡¯s unusual, and buy them¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, I heard about it from someone who travels a lot. And thought it must be sold here, since peoplee to Ractos from all over the country.¡±


    After that, Mr. Kanat was shocked to see Leo, and then he cried when he saw Liza¡­ I was just d that he wasn¡¯t as nervous as Ms. Delia.


    As for why he became emotional, he was happy that Ms. Delia had been able to meet another person like her¡­


    ¡°Delia likes to eat it as well. So take as much as you want.¡±


    ¡°But I can only eat so much¡­ You remind me of the grandfathers and grandmothers¡­¡±


    Once everyone was calm again, Mr. Kanat tried to make Ms. Delia take the whole barrel.


    I was suddenly reminded of the elders I used to live around. They would always give me lots of snacks¡­ It was usually more than I could eat. And I would always be too modest to take them¡­

 Chapter 775

    Chapter 775


    ire wanted the konjac<hr>


    ¡°Hmm¡­the texture is interesting¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. It is springy¡­but not tough. There is not much taste though.¡±


    ¡°I like it. I think it is quite delicious.¡±


    ¡°Wuf¡­¡±


    ¡°Kyau¡­¡±


    ¡°Mama and Sherry hate it. But I think it¡¯s good, papa.¡±


    ¡°I see. So Liza and Tilura like it then.¡±


    As Mr. Kanat had ced some on a te, everyone tasted it.Sebastian and ire enjoyed the texture mostly, while Liza and Tilura liked the taste as well.


    Ms. Lyra and Phillip also tried it.


    ¡°Kuun¡­¡±


    ¡°Fine, fine. I¡¯ll give you some sausagester. Just wait, alright?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ Mr. Kanat?¡±


    ¡°Ye-yes. What is it, Lady ire!¡±


    After eating the konjac, ire seemed to havee to a decision, and so she addressed Mr. Kanat.


    He immediately looked tense.


    ¡°For how long can this be stored?¡±


    ¡°Ye-yes¡­ As this has all been cooked once, it will only be good for a few days. If it is before being cooked, it shouldst several weeks, as long as you keep it in freshwater.¡±


    ¡°That is longer than expected. And do you have any of the raw ones with you now?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I brought it, in case the first batch sells out. It is over there¡­¡±


    ¡°So you have five barrels¡­¡±


    Mr. Kanat pointed to the back of his stall.


    Well, that was more than I expected.


    ¡°Mr. Kanat, why did you bring so much¡­ What were you going to do if no one bought it?¡±


    ¡°Well, if that happened, I suppose you could eat it.¡±


    ¡°As I said, I can only eat so much¡­¡±


    So it doesn¡¯t keep as long after being boiled¡­ And including the one in the front, he had two barrels that were boiled.


    But there are also a lot packed in one, so even multiple people would have trouble eating it in a few days.


    Since the uncooked onessted longer, I suppose he could have just taken them back to the vige if they didn¡¯t sell.


    ¡°So, Mr. Kanat. I will buy one of the cooked barrels, and all of the uncooked barrels.¡±


    ¡°Lady ire!?¡±


    ¡°What?¡±


    ire suddenly asked to buy almost all of his konjac.


    ¡°Why are you so surprised, Sebastian? And you too, Mr. Kanat.¡±


    ¡°Lady ire, six barrels¡­ Surely that is too much¡­¡±


    ¡°Is it? It can be kept for a long time. Besides, if everyone at the house at it, then we should be able to finish it before it spoils.¡±


    ¡°Perhaps, but¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Kyau¡­¡±


    True, if everyone ate it every day, then we could likely finish six barrels¡­ But surely this was too much for a first purchase?


    I understood how Sebastian felt.


    Leo and Sherry were imagining a future of having to eat it every day, and both barked in despair.


    ¡°Of course, I will be eating it as well. Mr. Takumi said you have to continue to eat it, after all.¡±


    It had been some time since Ist heard ire say something that would onlye out of the mouth of a rich and pampered daughter¡­ Thest time was at a tailor.


    Regardless, the averagemoner would not be able to buy so much food at once on a whim.


    ¡°Besides, I am quite sure the servants will want to eat it as well. Isn¡¯t that right, Lyra?¡±


    ¡°Yes, Lady ire. Maybe not Sebastian¡­but some of the women¡­ Or at least, a few maids might¡­¡±

 Chapter 776

    Chapter 776


    The decision was made<hr>


    ¡°Bu-but¡­if you bought that much, wouldn¡¯t it be troublesome for Mr. Kanat¡­hah¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. Sell when you can. That is what Mr. Kalis says.¡±


    Sebastian said, not realizing he was contradicting her.


    Buying the entire stock at once could be a good thing or bad thing, depending on how you look at it¡­


    Iter heard from Mr. Kalis that aside from special situations, he prioritized selling to people who buy a lot, and secure his profits.


    ¡°Um¡­I wouldn¡¯t say that¡­ I would be quite happy if all of it was sold¡­¡±


    ¡°What is it, Mr. Kanat?¡±


    ¡°Well, surely it will be difficult to move all of the barrels¡­¡±¡°Ye-yes, Lady ire. How do you propose to carry all of that at once?¡±


    A single barrel would likely weigh dozens of kilos. So you would need a wagon to carry all of them back.


    Surely ire wasn¡¯t going to tell us to carry it back like this.


    ¡°¡­Indeed, it would be difficult to do it all at once.¡±


    ¡°Lady ire. We can fit one barrel in the carriage. So perhaps we can just do that today, and have the rest delivered to the mansionter?¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s a good idea. We will take the cooked barrel first then. Of course, I would not expect Mr. Kanat to deliver it, so I¡¯ll send someone myself. Is that alright, Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°¡­Very well. If you want to do it that much, I will help you.¡±


    ¡°In that case¡­ I know. We can ask Kalis to deliver it.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I will contact him.¡±


    ¡°Ah, then you can ask Nick. Say it was my request, and he will be happy to go.¡±


    ¡°Certainly¡­¡±


    I suggested that they ask Nick as well. Since he was going to go to the mansion anyway, in order to pick up more herbs.


    After that, one of the guards nodded and then went to Mr. Kalis¡¯s store in order to deliver the message.


    ¡°Uh¡­what should I do?¡±


    ¡°Well, it all sold, so you should be happy, I think¡­ Thank you, Lady ire.¡±


    ¡°Ye-yes. Thank you for buying it.¡±


    ¡°We will enjoy the konjac you worked hard to make. And, uh¡­ I hope that we can expect you to sell us more on a regr basis?¡±


    ¡°Well, I think you should make such decisions after eating it for a while.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    Mr. Kanat was confused for a moment, but then followed Ms. Delia¡¯s advice and bowed his head.


    If you wanted it to be widespread in poprity, then selling all of it like this was questionable. But at least he didn¡¯t have to worry about it being unsold now?


    In any case, as for whether they would be buying it regrly, it was best to decide after everyone had eaten it at the mansion.


    It was still possible that it wouldn¡¯t be eaten much.


    Next to me, Sebastian was muttering, ¡®She listens to Mr. Takumi¡­¡¯ He sounded a little depressed.


    Well, it was probably because instead of outright trying to stop her, I just tried to dy a decision.


    ¡°Now, we should be taking our leave. We will be getting in the way if we just stay here.¡±


    ¡°Though there is nothing left to sell¡­¡±


    Some timeter, a few men arrived from Mr. Kalis¡¯s store, and they spoke with Mr. Kanat about making the delivery. And so we decided to take our leave.


    Even if there was nothing to sell, having someone as big as Leo, and many adults in that space was bound to get in people¡¯s way¡­

 Chapter 777

    Chapter 777


    Phillip would carry the barrel<hr>


    ¡°¡­I suppose it¡¯s during these times¡­where I have to carry it.¡±


    I heard Phillip mutter as he carried the barrel.


    I felt bad. And I would have given him a strengthening herb, only I didn¡¯t have any on me. And I could not use Weed Cultivation while other people were around¡­


    ¡°Um, I would like to stay here and help Mr. Kanat. Is that alright?¡±


    ¡°Ms. Delia. Yes, we¡¯re just going to return to the mansion now¡­so you should help him. But please don¡¯t push yourself too hard.¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course. While I did a lot today, this will be nothing.¡±


    ¡°In any case¡­about whether or not you will be able to teach Liza. Have you made a decision?¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­yes. If you are fine with someone like me teaching her¡­ I am not very smart¡­ But I would be happy to do it. Or to work with the herb fields.¡±My main reason for it was so that Liza could learn to read and write, while also having a beastkin friend. So she didn¡¯t need to be that smart.


    ¡°Haha. Well, I¡¯m not much different¡­ It should not be a very demanding job. However, are you interested in doing other work as well?¡±


    ¡°Well, that is why I came here. And to see Leo¡­¡±


    ¡°I see. Well, I shall think of something then¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, but I hope it won¡¯t be too difficult¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course. Don¡¯t worry about that. Haha.¡±


    I did not want her to be overworked if she was also Liza¡¯s teacher. I would just have to wait and see before deciding.


    Ah, and one other thing¡­


    ¡°Here. For your room at the inn. I know it might be a little ufortable to ept it, but I wanted to thank you for ying with Liza and Leo.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­very well.¡±


    Sebastian had told me the average fee earlier. And I had added a silver on top of it.


    ¡°Well, we should go now. Liza and Leo. Say goodbye to Ms. Delia.¡±


    ¡°Okay, let¡¯s y again!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Uh, yes. I look forward to meeting you again.¡±


    While ire and Sebastian were paying Mr. Kanat, we said our farewells. And then we left the store.


    Apparently, Ms. Delia would help Mr. Kanat, and then return to the vige tomorrow.


    They had been able to sell all the products, and since there was a wagon, she decided to go with him.


    ¡°Phillip, thank you.¡±


    ¡°Ahh¡­ I did not expect to have to carry something so heavy today. Well, I guess this is part of my training. The master would be furious if he heard meining about this.¡±


    ¡°Haha. Yes, Mr. Ekenhart would say that you¡¯ve grown soft.¡±


    ¡°But being scolded would be preferable to undergoing that training again¡­¡±


    We made our way through Ractos, and then waited for Sebastian to bring the carriage. And so I talked to Phillip, who was carrying the barrel.


    While he might have expected to carry some things¡­he clearly did not expect something of this size.


    As for the training, I had heard him talk about it before. He was shuddering by just thinking about it.


    I definitely had no interest in experiencing it for myself.


    And so I would be careful to never mention it in front of Mr. Ekenhart, as he was likely to gleefully force me to participate.

 Chapter 778

    Chapter 778


    I talked with ire on the way back<hr>


    ¡°¡­I¡¯m sorry. I wish I could have given you some herbs to make it easier.¡±


    ¡°No, no. You could not do it in front of other people. And we already came this far anyway¡­ Now it¡¯s just a matter of putting it into the carriage.¡±


    Phillip smiled reassuringly, but he did look a little tired.


    ¡°As you had brought Ms. Delia, I didn¡¯t really ask earlier¡­ But how did things go? With the interview.¡±


    ¡°Now that I think about it, I haven¡¯t talked about that yet.¡±


    ire asked me inside of the carriage as we made our way back to the mansion.


    ¡°There were a lot of people. I had to take notes, which I mean to look back atter. However, there were a lot of promising people¡­ Don¡¯t you agree, Milina?¡±


    ¡°Uh, yes. I even knew some of them. But the others all looked like they could work well! I think¡­¡±Thest part was a little unnecessary.


    As it was my first time, and I had not really organized my thoughts yet, I turned to Milina for help¡­which was clearly a bad decision.


    On that note, Milina was currently riding with me and ire. Because we were in therger carriage this time.


    Outside, Leo was running happily with Ms. Lyra, Liza, Tilura and Sherry on her back.


    Milina had apanied us today, mainly to watch how Ms. Lyra worked. As it was now official that I would be hiring Ms. Lyra, I suppose she wanted to use her as a reference.


    In any case, they weren¡¯t actually going to be the same kind of work. But Milina was currently doing work as a maid¡­ Apparently, she had been close with Ms. Gelda while we were in Range vige, but both were constantly making mistakes.


    When we returned to the mansion, I had to offer encouragement, and say that she should take her time, because no one got it perfectly at first.


    Unlike Ms. Lyra, the head maid was rather strict, which was why she was feeling down.


    ¡°I see. As they will be working for you, you must think carefully before choosing them.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ I will do that. Ah, I think I would like to hear your opinion as well. Uh, though it is just my notes¡­¡±


    ¡°Of course. I will do what I can. After all, we are to be running this business together.¡±


    And so I took out the notebook and showed it to ire. And we discussed the people listed while making our way back to the mansion.


    As for me, I wanted to choose people that were open-minded, as well as people who would not find it difficult to work in a field.


    I was not too sure about that woman who was searching for a man¡­


    Regardless, ire looked at the notes and said she seemed promising.


    And then Milina and even Sebastian agreed from the driver¡¯s seat.


    Hmmm¡­ Milina¡¯s opinion was questionable. But I trusted ire. Apparently, she felt that that kind of bold honesty was a good thing. But as someone who was so used to reading the room before talking, I didn¡¯t really understand that.


    ¡°Wee back, everyone!¡±


    We soon arrived at the mansion and were greeted by all of the servants.


    After Phillip carried the barrel into the house, I headed to my room with Leo and Liza in order to leave our things there.


    On the way, I thought about what I had discussed with ire.


    It had been very interesting, as she had many ideas that I didn¡¯t even consider.


    Well, I was reminded how different we were fundamentally, in the way we thought¡­

 Chapter 779

    Chapter 779


    Liza was very happy to have met Ms. Delia<hr>


    Normally, when hiring people, you thought about how much they could contribute to your profits.


    But with ire, she thought about their words and actions. If they could work without causing any trouble. If they would enjoy the work.


    It was like she didn¡¯t just think about herself, but was also concerned if the person would be happy taking such a position.


    I suppose she wanted unity, and for everyone to be able to live in peace.


    As I thought of such things, we arrived at the room.


    ¡°Uh, papa?¡±


    ¡°Huh? What is it?¡±


    ¡°Wou?¡±While putting my things away, Liza suddenly called to me.


    I turned to look and saw her standing happily next to Leo.


    ¡°We met ady just like me today. Though, the shape of her ears and tail were a little different¡­¡±


    ¡°Ms. Delia. She is a beastkin too. So you were happy to see her?¡±


    ¡°Yes! While I have papa and mama¡­ I¡¯m still different¡­ Well, mama has a tail too, but¡­¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    Apparently, Liza could not hide her excitement at meeting Ms. Delia.


    So she must have been feeling something about being different.


    Leo barked and rubbed her face against Liza¡¯s cheek.


    ¡°If we look, we might be able to find more of them too. And if we go to the country to the north, it is humans who are considered unusual.¡±


    ¡°I see! But even if there are a lot of people like me, I want to be with mama and papa.¡±


    ¡°Haha. Of course, we feel the same. Still, it would be nice for you to be able to meet more beastkin one day.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    I didn¡¯t know if it would be possible, but I did like the idea of taking Liza there eventually.


    Even though the kingdoms had once been at war, it seemed like they were on good terms these days. Also, traveling with Leo and Liza sounded like fun.


    Of course, I could not abandon my work with the herbs. So it would have to be after everything with that was settled¡­ Whenever that was.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. May Ie in?¡±


    ¡°Yes, of course.¡±


    ¡°Excuse me.¡±


    There was still some time before dinner, and so I was thinking about what to do next when there was a knock on the door, and then Ms. Gelda entered.


    As they were tired, Ms. Lyra and Milina were probably resting.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Ms. Helena wants you toe to the kitchens immediately¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, I suppose it is about the konjac? Very well. I will go.¡±


    Phillip had taken it to the kitchens as soon as we arrived.


    These days, it seemed like Ms. Helena confided in me whenever a new ingredient arrived¡­ Well, I suppose I did have a little knowledge about it.


    ¡°Papa. Should I help too?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ This time it is not so simple. So you should stay with Leo. I¡¯m sure you are tired?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m not tired at all¡­ But okay! I¡¯ll be with mama!¡±


    Indeed, she did not look tired at all. Beastkin had more energy than humans. As for me, I would probably feel tired when I woke up tomorrow.


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting, Ms. Helena.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Thank you foring. I probably should have gone to you. But¡­as you can see¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha. It is right before dinner, so it could not be helped.¡±

 Chapter 780

    Chapter 780


    She asked me about dishes that used konjac<hr>


    I entered the kitchen and spotted Ms. Helena amongst the busy cooks.


    Ms. Helena apologized about calling me here, but I could see that it was unavoidable.


    Ms. Gelda had also followed me to the kitchen. I suppose she was also curious about what we were going to do.


    ¡°So¡­¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s about the konjac, right?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I heard that Lady ire bought a great quantity of it. Six barrels, in addition to the one brought back today. And so I cannot let it go to waste. So I thought that I would ask for your help. As I do not have any experience with it.¡±


    ¡°I understand. If you don¡¯t know anything about it, it will be difficult to think of different ideas. Well¡­did you taste it yet?¡±


    ¡°I did it with a few of the other cooks. I thought that the texture was rather interesting. The taste was rather in, and I¡¯m not sure it is good on its own.¡±¡°While it¡¯s made from potatoes, it tastes quite different. As for the taste, it really depends on the person. But Tilura and Liza liked it.¡±


    Though, I think they also just enjoyed the texture more than anything.


    Leo and Sherry did not like it at all.


    ¡°I see¡­ So we must cook it in a way that does not ruin the texture. Do you have any ideas, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ I don¡¯t actually know much¡­¡±


    I had not cooked much in my past life. And so I did not have any good ideas.


    I didn¡¯t really have time to cook. Except for the rare asions that I made hamburgers¡­ In general, I would just throw ingredients together and fry them. Never anything that took much preparation.


    ¡°Well¡­boiling them?¡±


    In Japan, it was often boiled with meat and potatoes.


    Since the konjac was already boiled once, it would be quick to absorb the soup. That being said¡­I think you needed soy sauce for that?


    Did they even have that in this world?


    ¡°In any case, there is this dish with meat and potatoes. Just cut up the potatoes and konjac in small pieces and mix them with fried meat. And then you boil them in a kind of soup. Unfortunately, you need soy sauce¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, I see. We have other dishes that are quite simr to that¡­ They are quite easy to make.¡±


    We had been served something like pot-au-feu before, as well as stuffed cabbage. And they had consomme and bouillon.


    Though, from what I heard, regarding bouillon, they had to boil it for a very long time. That meant using a lot of wood for the fire. So it was a very expensive ingredient in this world.


    Obviously, that wouldn¡¯t be much of a problem in this household. But mostmoners had not even tasted it.


    ¡°Well, it might be a little difficult then. Perhaps a different¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh? But we do have soy sauce, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Really?¡±


    I probably looked quite dumbfounded.


    Well, I suppose it wouldn¡¯t be surprising, if they had soybeans¡­ But don¡¯t you also need koji mold to make it? And you get that from rice nts.


    In other words¡­there is probably rice growing somewhere around here?<hr>


    Thanks for reading. We just reached Chapter 1000 on /tigertransations

 Chapter 781

    Chapter 781


    Soy sauce was expensive<hr>


    ¡°Apparently, the old king wanted it¡­ Though, since it cannot be made here, it is imported from other countries. And so the price is not very essible¡­ Still, we buy a small amount for this house.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    Well, the old king in this case must be Mr. Euto.


    After meeting him, I was able to think about all the little ways he had influenced the country.


    ¡°However¡­it might be difficult. Using it.¡±


    ¡°Why? Oh, because there is not enough?¡±


    ¡°Yes. The duke is able to acquire some in spite of the price. But there is still not enough, considering how much of the konjac we have to eat. After all, there is only a small amount avable on the market.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Then we won¡¯t be able to make much even if we did use it.¡±I didn¡¯t know how much they had exactly, but it was probably just enough for one meal.


    ¡°In any case. Here is some of it. Would you like to try it?¡±


    Ms. Helena said as she took out a small bottle.


    It contained the familiar dark liquid. But if that was all they had, there was not much at all.


    It definitely should not be used for some cheap meat and potatoes dish.


    I also wondered if I should even try it.


    ¡°It is fine. After all, I don¡¯t think the others even like it.¡±


    ¡°I see. Very well then¡­¡±


    She then poured a few drops into a small te and I tasted it.


    ¡°Hmm¡­!¡±


    ¡°Are you alright, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­I¡¯m fine. I just felt a little emotional, that is all.¡±


    After tasting it, I had made a fist and then crouched on the floor.


    And so the others were quite startled.


    However, this was not the same as the soy sauce I had before¡­


    Not that it was all the same in Japan. But there was something¡­ It was saltier than I expected. Regardless, I was not surprised that Ms. Helena had trouble finding a use for it.


    Especially since it was expensive, and they only had a small amount.


    ¡°Well, I think we can think about itter. Right now, we should focus on the konjac.¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­ Of course.¡±


    ¡°It adds something new to it, and is good in its own way.¡±


    ¡°Yes. It¡¯s because you cooked it so well, Ms. Helena.¡±


    In the end, it was decided that she would make pot-au-feu and add pieces of the konjac inside and boil it.


    As it was not something with a strong taste, it blended in with the rest easily. And people liked the texture.


    Only Leo and Sherry were more interested in the meat and sausages that they were given.


    ¡°It is not too soft or light.¡±


    ¡°If you eat less things with potatoes or flour, and eat more dishes with the konjak, then it may help with weight loss.¡±


    ¡°I see. Less foods high in calories, and eat this instead. Even if the overall amount is simr, the results are different.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ If you just cut down on the overall amount, you may not get enough of the necessary nutrition. And so I think that it¡¯s best to continue eating a proper amount.¡±

 Chapter 782

    Chapter 782


    We talked about using konjac to rece something<hr>


    ¡°Ah, I do have one idea that could have delicious results¡­ But you wouldn¡¯t be able to make that much of it.¡±


    ¡°What is your idea, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    I had thought of one thing that konjac could rece. Though, it might be difficult for various reasons¡­ Regardless, ire was now curious to know what it was.


    Sebastian was also looking towards me expectantly.


    ¡°So, Mr. Takumi. What is your idea for the konjac?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s really not much of an idea. I just thought that it could be used as a kind of substitute¡­ But then again¡­ Um, is sugar very expensive here?¡±


    ¡°Yes. It is not something that anyone can easily buy. Even if it is just a small amount. It is practically a luxury.¡±


    ¡°Then it will be difficult after all¡­ But perhaps we could do something that is close.¡±As far as I was aware, it would require a lot of sugar in order to make it. In fact, it wasn¡¯t really something that you ate. So unlike meals that were limited to a certain number each day, once you started to make it, you would then have to use a lot of sugar.


    That being said, since it was a substitute, it wasn¡¯t going to be the exact same thing anyway. And so we might be able to get away with less sugar, or even none at all¡­


    Well, we would have to try it first. As I had no idea if it would actually be any good.


    ¡°Something close¡­substitute¡­ What is it, exactly? As your hamburgers were quite good, I¡¯m sure you wouldn¡¯t make anything that was bad¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, those were easy to do. I am not as confident with this one. Also, it is actually a drink. And we have the dandelion tea, so there will be no need to make that¡­¡±


    ¡°A drink? Ah, you did say that dandelion tea was good for dieting. Will it be even more effective if the two are mixed together?¡±


    ¡°No¡­ I don¡¯t know about that¡­ On the other hand, I do think that the taste will be well received by more people.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Not that effective¡­¡±


    ire looked disappointed by that. Sebastian was interested, because it was still something that was new.


    The drink that I was thinking about would be a little high in calories, though¡­ Maybe not that high if we reduce the amount of sugar.


    ¡°And what is this drink called¡­?¡±


    Now that ire had lost some of her enthusiasm, Sebastian was the one who asked me instead.


    ¡°Uh, it is called bubble tea. It¡¯s usually made with a certain potato¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­¡±


    If I¡¯m not wrong, it was made from starch from the cassava potato¡­ As for what it looked like, some might say frog eggs. But I felt that saying that might be offensive to some people.


    I suppose it was possible that the cassava potatoes existed in this world. But I heard that you had to handle them very carefully. Something about poison. And so it was dangerous unless you knew how to properly extract the poison.


    Regardless, when I was in Japan, I had heard stories about people using konjac instead, and adding it to their milk tea.


    Tapioca were made of starch, so they were high in calories¡­ And with milk tea, you added sugar on top of that. At that point, you could even call them a calorie bomb¡­

 Chapter 783

    Chapter 783


    The new drink would be tested tomorrow<hr>


    I thought about creating a new drink.


    However, sugar was expensive, and the konjac was not sweet at all¡­ Even if we turned it into milk tea, it may not be sweet or taste good.


    The tea served in the mansion was always delicious, so it probably wouldn¡¯t be terrible if we mixed milk and the konjac in, but¡­


    In any case, I just wanted to help consume all of the stock that ire had purchased.


    However, the pot-au-feu was already quite good, so perhaps it was not necessary.


    ¡°Well, as the konjac goes inside, you can call it a konjac drink or konjac milk tea¡­¡±


    ¡°So you put milk in as well?¡±


    ¡°Yes. In most cases, anyway.¡±¡°Hmm¡­ Is it very difficult to do?¡±


    ¡°No. You just cut the konjac into small pieces and mix it with the tea. You can add other things if you want. I will ask Ms. Helena about making it tomorrow.¡±


    ¡°So it¡¯s easy. And the sugar?¡±


    ¡°Well, it is usually added. Because it is supposed to be a sweet drink.¡±


    At least, the ones I had drank, that were sold in convenience stores, had a lot of sugar in them.


    ¡°It¡¯s one thing to use a little for deserts or cooking. But it will be difficult to use a lot for drinks¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. And so I can¡¯t guarantee that it will taste good.¡±


    I would just have Ms. Helena make some tomorrow. It was likely that at least somebody would drink it.


    After that, I went out to the garden to practice my swings with Tilura.


    I was actually quite tired, and thought about resting. However, I thought that by making Tilura tired, she would forget about how lonely she was about Rahle, and be able to sleep well.


    Besides, she had yed with the other children today, so she would likely be fine.


    After training, I took a bath and then returned to my room, where Liza talked Ms. Delia and the children. And then I fell asleep¡­


    ¡°Kiii!¡±


    ¡°That sound. It is Rahle!¡±


    The next morning, I made herbs like I always did, and handed them to Nick when he arrived with the barrels of konjac.


    After lunch, I trained with Tilura and Liza. We were trying to hit Leo with our swords, when we suddenly heard a familiar voice.


    Tilura reacted immediately, and dered that it was Rahle as she looked up into the sky.


    Perhaps he was able to tell, since Rahle was her familiar.


    ¡°Kii! Kii!¡±


    ¡°It is Rahle! Wee back!¡±


    ¡°Oh, it is.¡±


    ¡°Rahle!¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    As we all stopped and looked up, therge bird got closer and closer.


    ¡°Huh? Does Rahle¡­have something?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    It looked like Rahle was holding something in its talons.


    ¡°Kii!¡±


    Rahle then slowly descended to the ground and released the thing¡­


    ¡°Pipi? Pii!¡±


    ¡°Pii! Pii!¡±


    ¡°What is it? Rahle¡¯s child?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t think so. No one would treat their child like that¡­¡±


    ¡°Wou?¡±


    ¡°I think it¡¯s scared of you, mama?¡±

 Chapter 784

    Chapter 784


    They were pigeon-like creatures<hr>


    Rahle had brought two of them.


    The two small birds were pping their wings on the ground. And as Liza said, they were shaking with fear as they looked at Leo.


    Tilura was wondering if they were Rahle¡¯s children¡­but I doubted it.


    Besides, their feathers were gray, unlike Rahle. And their beaks were not sharp either.


    They were smaller than Sherry. Small heads with round bodies¡­ They looked like pigeons to me.


    ¡°Oh, Rahle hasnded. We should just ask about them.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Rahle!¡±


    ¡°Kii!¡±Rahle seemed very happy to see Tilura again.


    It immediately spread out its wings and enveloped her.


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    ¡°Leo. You yed with her a lot when Rahle was gone. Besides, it¡¯s not like Tilura doesn¡¯t like you anymore.¡±


    ¡°You have me, mama!¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Tilura and Rahle enjoyed their reunion for some time. And I petted Leo and waited¡­ Though, I felt a little bad for the two pigeons, who were just staying there and quivering.


    ¡°Hmm. It seems like they are the children of a Cockatrice.¡±


    I had asked Ms. Lyra to go and call Sebastian.


    He took one look at them and muttered. So he knew after all.


    ¡°Cockatrices¡­ Will you turn into stone?¡±


    ¡°You know about them, Mr. Takumi? Yes. Once they be adults, they will shoot off the red hairs on their heads. They are sharp like needles, and you will turn to stone if you are pierced by them. They do not have them now. But as they grow older, their feathers will change to white or brown, so you can tell if they are male or female.¡±


    Like chickens?


    But they really did look more like pigeons to me¡­


    ¡°That sounds kind of scary¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, petrification can be reversed with medicine. Also, it is just around the spot where the needle pierced you¡­ About this much.¡±


    Sebastian showed me that it was just a few centimeters.


    ¡°However, it will grow if you are pierced multiple times.¡±


    ¡°So it depends on the situation. In any case, it would be best to avoid being petrified to begin with.¡±


    ¡°Yes. By the way, you can make the medicine out of the herbs that you sent to Ractos. It is quite cheap. That is why people aren¡¯t too scared of the Cockatrice.¡±


    Those herbs were in the book that I had borrowed, and so I knew of their effects. But I didn¡¯t know they could also be used to treat petrification.


    ¡°Did Rahle bring them as food?¡±


    ¡°Uh, I don¡¯t know? We will just have to wait and ask about it.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ But I have heard that grown Cockatrices are delicious. But they are difficult to catch¡­¡±


    ¡°Pii!?¡±


    ¡°Pii!¡±


    While I didn¡¯t think it was the case¡­ I suppose it was possible that Rahle brought them back as a gift.


    ¡°Kii! Kii! Kii!¡±


    ¡°I see. So that¡¯s why!¡±


    ¡°Tilura. What did Rahle say?¡±


    ¡°Umm¡­¡±


    A momentter, Tilura was released from Rahle¡¯s embrace, and was able to talk.


    And so we were able to learn the reason.


    The whole time, Leo was staring at the small birds¡­ And while it was probably in order to monitor them, she did seem to be drooling a little. Perhaps it was because she heard Sebastian saying that they tasted good¡­

 Chapter 785

    Chapter 785


    We asked Rahle the reason<hr>


    Apparently, Rahle had been thinking about my idea regarding the post horses.


    After bing Tilura¡¯s familiar, Rahle had started to carry humans. And it was wondering if other monsters could do the same.


    And so it had wanted to ask the Cockatrices, but they all ran away after sensing the presence of a Silver Fenrir.


    With no choice, Rahle had taken these two small ones that had been left behind.


    That was not a very nice thing to do. And Tilura scolded Rahle.


    She was very sympathetic, as the young Cockatrices looked very scared.


    Regardless, with Leo¡¯s presence and with Rahle here, it seemed like all of the monsters were now avoidinging out of the forest.


    Though, there were some like orcs, who moved based on instincts. But they were hunted down by other monsters or by Rahle. So it was much safer these days.Rahle had been gone for several days, because it was searching for the Cockatrices¡­ It had been harder, because of Leo¡¯s visit to Ractos, which meant the presence was closer. But I kept that part to myself.


    ¡°I see¡­ Cockatrices instead of horses. I haven¡¯t talked to the fenrirs yet, so I don¡¯t know if it is even possible¡­¡±


    ¡°Rahle says it won¡¯t feel as useful if there are too many fenrirs!¡±


    ¡°Kii¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, including Sherry, they will all be fenrirs outside of Rahle.¡±


    Rahle would be the only bird-type monster, and the others would be beasts that walked on four legs. Apparently, Rahle would feel left out.


    ¡°So they are not for food¡­¡±


    Sebastian sounded disappointed. But the cockatrice chicks shuddered.


    So, perhaps they could understand us, just like Rahle and the fenrirs.


    Though, we would still have to ask Liza or Leo to trante what they were saying¡­


    ¡°Still, if people get used to being carried through the sky¡­traveling by horse will feel very slow.¡±


    ¡°If it is realized, yes.¡±


    You could easily go over mountains and forests without anything getting in your way. It didn¡¯t matter if there were paved roads or not.


    Also¡­


    Tilura tried to suggest that Rahle take them back. But Rahle said that the parents had already run away, and were unlikely to return.


    Besides, they may no longer recognize them as their children anymore.


    Were birds really so quick to forget?


    Though, I had heard of simr things happening with birds that lived near humans. Something about not recognizing their chicks after humans have touched them and changed their smell.


    ¡°Anyway, are you sure they would even be able to carry people?¡±


    ¡°Kii? Kii-kii.¡±


    ¡°Rahle doesn¡¯t know.¡±


    ¡°¡­Well, they would berge enough to do it. However, I am not sure if they are strong enough to fly like that.¡±


    ¡°So they have the size, but perhaps not the strength¡­¡±


    Obviously, carrying a rider would require a lot of energy.


    Most monsters would not be able to carry an extra hundred kilos and fly.


    We would not know until we could test it with adult Cockatrices. But the ones in front of us were the size of pigeons.


    ¡°Kii¡­kii!¡±


    ¡°Pi!?¡±


    ¡°Pi-pi-pi!¡±


    ¡°Uhhh¡­ I think I understand what Rahle said, but¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, you can understand it, Mr. Takumi? That¡¯s amazing!¡±


    ¡°No, it¡¯s just this time. Judging by the way things have been going¡­¡±

 Chapter 786

    Chapter 786


    Tilura¡¯s idea was rejected<hr>


    Rahle was quite disappointed upon realizing this whole thing was a waste of time. And after pecking at the grass for a moment, it turned to look at the Cockatrices.


    They still looked scared and bewildered¡­ Though, it was probably more rted to Sebastian talking about eating them.


    ¡°That was really wrong, Rahle! Taking them away from their home. And the very idea of eating them for dinner¡­ The poor things!¡±


    ¡°Pii! Pii!¡±


    ¡°Pii!¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    ¡°Kii¡­¡±


    As if realizing that she was an ally, the Cockartrices ran towards Tilura¡¯s feet.That was fine, but Leo also sounded disappointed. I suppose she was hungry.


    ¡°What should we do¡­¡±


    ¡°Doing what Rahle wants would be the simplest. But I must be getting old. Seeing them stick to Lady Tilura like that makes me feel sympathetic.¡±


    Sympathetic? You wanted to eat them more than anyone here, Sebastian.


    ¡°But it seems like there is no point in returning them now¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. Besides, there are many other monsters in the forest. So they will easily be prey.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­¡±


    ¡°This is all Rahle¡¯s fault!¡±


    ¡°Kii¡­¡±


    When Tilura scolded Rahle, it reminded me of how ire would scold her.


    In any case, perhaps it would be best for Leo to join her, so that the message was clear.


    ¡°I will look after them! Since it was Rahle¡¯s doing, I am responsible as well!¡±


    That was what Tilura dered after they were finished lecturing Rahle.


    At this point, ire had heard about the situation from Sebastian. And so she was here as well.


    ¡°That won¡¯t do, Tilura. You already have Rahle. You can¡¯t take care of all of them.¡±


    ¡°Rahle will help me! Because it is also Rahle¡¯s responsibility¡­¡±


    ¡°I understand how you feel. I felt the same when I heard about how Sherry was stealing from the kitchen.¡±


    ¡°Kyau¡­¡±


    Sherry sounded apologetic as she was carried by ire.


    ¡°But Tilura. You¡¯ve been spending so much time ying with Rahle, Leo and Liza recently. And so you haven¡¯t been able to focus on your studies. Or even your training.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s¡­ Yes¡­ It¡¯s true that I was thinking more about ying with them¡­¡±


    Tilura was about to argue back, but then gave up.


    Studying aside, I did think she had been training properly with Leo and me¡­ But perhaps she was not as focused as usual.


    ¡°Didn¡¯t father tell you the same thing? How you cannot neglect your studies. And you must take your training seriously, no matter how hard.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    ¡°So why do you think you can take up something else? You cannot do things so half-heartedly. Not as the duke¡¯s daughter or my sister!¡±


    ¡°¡­!¡±


    Perhaps that was going too far?


    It reminded me of when we were in the forest, right before finding Sherry. In any case, it was best to not make her angry.


    Tilura looked like she was holding something in. But she eventually looked up and straight into her sister¡¯s face.


    ¡°I won¡¯t do it half-heartedly! My studies, training, Rahle, and the Cockatrices. I will take care of all of it!¡±


    ¡°Kii¡­¡±


    Rahle sounded worried.


    Hmm¡­ It seemed like her studies and training alone were already a lot¡­

 Chapter 787

    Chapter 787


    Witnessing a sister fight<hr>


    Rahle had lived for a long time, and so did require much taking care of. But it would be a different matter for the Cockatrice fledglings.


    Tilura was still young, and would want to y with Leo and Liza¡­ So even with Rahle¡¯s help, it did seem like it would be too much for her.


    That being said, I didn¡¯t think the idea needed to be rejectedpletely.


    In fact, I was closer to being on Tilura¡¯s side¡­


    ¡°You said things like that before, and failed to do them. How can I believe you!¡±


    ¡°But¡­I will do it this time!¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s not enough! You only care about Rahle recently. And Rahle is not around, it¡¯s Leo or Liza or Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°You say that, but you¡¯re always spending time with Mr. Takumi!¡±¡°What!? That¡¯s not true. I have never felt jealous about that!¡±


    ¡°But you¡¯re always watching when we are ying in the garden!¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s¡­only because I¡¯m worried that you will make a fool of yourself¡­ Also, stop changing the subject!¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s rted! You care more about Leo and Mr. Takumi than me! I wanted to y with you too!¡±


    ¡°Then you should have said so! How was I supposed to know!?¡±


    ¡°I couldn¡¯t say it! You are always thinking about other things! You don¡¯t even care about me!¡±


    ¡°Why do you say that! I just want what¡¯s best for¡­¡±


    ¡°Then why don¡¯t you spend more time with me! All you do is tell me to study!¡±


    ¡°Because that is important! It will be useful for you! And it¡¯s your fault for not taking it more seriously!¡±


    It seemed like they had forgotten why, but were continuing to argue with each other.


    Was it best to stop it? Leo and Rahle also looked awkward.


    Liza did not like arguments, and she was holding Leo tightly.


    The Cockatrice chicks looked confused¡­ However, Sebastian and Ms. Lyra looked normal. Actually, they even looked a little happy.


    ¡°Sebastian?¡±


    I looked at him questioningly.


    ¡°Yes, what is it?¡±


    ¡°What is it? But¡­aren¡¯t you going to do something?¡±


    Sebastian did not think it was a problem.


    ¡°Normally, Lady ire and Lady Tilura do not bear their emotions to this degree.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­they usually get along so well.¡±


    ¡°However, even if they are sisters, they do not think the same way. And they see things differently. That is fine. It is better that they can be honest with each other. As long as things don¡¯t go too far, that is.¡±


    Is that so? I suppose they weren¡¯t getting physical, but it seemed a little intense.


    ¡°Back at the orphanage, fights like these happened all of the time. Of course, if it got out of hand, the headmistress would interfere¡­ But if it was something on this level, they would just let it y out.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I fought a lot too¡­¡±


    Ms. Lyra started to talk about her time in the orphanage.


    Well, if you had so many children together, such things were bound to happen.


    ¡°So Ms. Gelda has such experiences. What about you, Ms. Lyra?¡±


    ¡°No, not me.¡±


    ¡°Hoho. I heard it from Ms. Anna. How you would get into fights with the boys and win¡­¡±


    ¡°Se-Sebastian. There¡¯s no need to bring that¡­¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s right! Ms. Lyra would have a gang of girls that she would lead!¡±


    ¡°Gelda¡­ We don¡¯t need to talk about that now¡­¡±


    ¡°Ye¡­yes¡­!¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. We are discussing thedies now. It has nothing to do with me.¡±


    ¡°Of-of course¡­¡±


    Still, I thought about Ms. Lyra standing up against the boys at the orphanage, and could not help but smile.

 Chapter 788

    Chapter 788


    I felt jealous that they had someone they could openly express their feelings to<hr>


    ¡°It¡¯s a good thing to get into such fights while you are still young. As long as no one is injured. Hearing the other person¡¯s honest feelings could help them.¡±


    ¡°At the orphanage, children often became closer the day after they fought.¡±


    ¡°If you two think so¡­ Well, I suppose it does seem like they are unleashing things that they have been keeping in.¡±


    ¡°Exactly.¡±


    After hearing Sebastian and Ms. Lyra, I started to think that it would help the sisters get along better.


    And so I nodded to them and decided to just watch things as they yed out.


    Though, Leo and Rahle were still ufortable.


    It was amusing, since they were both such strong monsters.¡°¡­I¡¯m starting to feel a little jealous of them.¡±


    I muttered.


    I didn¡¯t have any siblings. I did have cousins, but we were never close.


    After all, they had already left home when my uncle took me in.


    Though, they did give me gifts when we met, and they were nice¡­ Perhaps they also were not sure how to act around me.


    ¡°Would you like to fight with me then?¡±


    ¡°What are you talking about¡­ Besides, I don¡¯t think I could win against you, Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Is that so? But you¡¯ve been taught how to fight with a sword.¡±


    ¡°You can¡¯t use a sword¡­ Oh, you¡¯re just making fun of me now.¡±


    ¡°Hohoho. It¡¯s just that watching them has brought back some old memories.¡±


    Apparently, Sebastian was originally from the slums.


    So he knew what it was like to desperately fight for your survival.


    ¡°Hmph! I don¡¯t care what you say!¡±


    ¡°Hey! Wait, Tilura! We¡¯re not finished¡­!¡±


    ¡°Wou!?¡±


    ¡°Kii!?¡±


    As Tilura had stormed off, the argument suddenly came to an end.


    ire tried to stop her, but Tilura ignored her and ran into the mansion.


    ¡°Oh! How could she run off in the middle of the conversation¡­!¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ Well, neither wanted to back down. But I don¡¯t think someone so young can argue for so long.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­Mr. Takumi. Sorry that you had to see that.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. It was a different side of you. Though, it was a little surprising for us at first.¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    Ms. ire finally realized that we had been watching, and so she apologized frantically. Her cheeks were also flushed.


    Leo was sighing with relief that it was all over, and Ms. Lyra was petting her.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­ I am sorry, good Leo. And you too, Rahle. And Liza¡­ You don¡¯t have to look so scared, alright?¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    ¡°¡­It¡¯s over then¡­?¡±


    Liza had been burying her face in Leo¡¯s fur as if to hide. And it was only after ire apologized that she finally raised her head again¡­

 Chapter 789

    Chapter 789


    ire quickly calmed down again<hr>


    ¡°There was no reason to be afraid, Liza. Even if they were being loud. They weren¡¯t arguing because they hated each other.¡±


    As Liza was looking at ire with a frightened expression, she might have recalled some unpleasant memories.


    And so I picked her up off of Leo¡¯s back and patted her on the head.


    ire also apologized and patted her¡­ Well she was patting the ears, so perhaps she was just doing it to calm herself.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­ What Tilura said earlier¡­¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    ¡°That I was trying to get your attention¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, there was something like that. I know. It probably just looked like that, since we always have so many things to discuss. Such as the herb fields, konjac¡­the horses¡­¡±¡°Well¡­we will just say that then.¡±


    ¡°I suppose that I should apologize as well. I thought she would be satisfied, ying with Leo and Liza. I did not realize how much she also wanted to be with you.¡±


    ¡°Really? It did not really look like she wanted to¡­ I just wish she could be more honest¡­¡±


    ¡°But would it really have mattered? Anyway, it¡¯s hard to say what you mean at that age. Perhaps she thought that you were too strict.¡±


    ¡°Perhaps¡­¡±


    ¡°Lady Tilura must have realized. But at that age, even if you understand, it doesn¡¯t mean you agree¡­¡±


    ¡°But even then. I cannot allow her to do everything so half-heartedly¡­ Even though I understand how she feels.¡±


    Now that she had calmed down a little, ire seemed to be able to understand Tilura¡¯s point of view.


    ¡°Instead of just objecting, maybe you could think with her. On ways to prevent things from bing like that. Though, it¡¯s not my ce to say such things.¡±


    Considering ire¡¯s position, it was no wonder that she wanted to raise Tilura in a way that would be worthy of her family.


    That being said, Tilura was a very lively person, and did not react well to being rejectedpletely¡­


    ¡°You and I are also far from being perfect people. We make mistakes and forget important things. So you should go down to her level and find ways to make it work¡­ I think she would have been persuaded by that approach.¡±


    ¡°I suppose¡­ Was I really being too harsh with her? I do like it when she is free and ys with Leo and the others. But I also want her to be a proud member of this family.¡±


    ¡°That is not a bad thing. It shows how much you care about her. But I guess it didn¡¯t really go well this time.¡±


    Even as I talked, I wondered why I thought that I had any right to be saying such things.


    Beforeing to this world, I had failed so many times.


    And in this world as well. While exploring the forest, had I remembered that I could use Weed Cultivation anywhere, I could have expanded the range of the search, and been more useful.


    In Range vige, had I been more thoughtful when acting, fewer people would have been injured during the orc attack¡­ All of that was in hindsight, and perhaps I was the only one with regret. But I still thought about it sometimes.


    Regardless, since Tilura was still young, it was important for us to think with her and lead her in the right direction.


    Though, I was still inexperienced and often didn¡¯t know what the right direction even was¡­

 Chapter 790

    Chapter 790


    I talked like a know-it-all<hr>


    ¡°Think together and persuade her¡­¡±


    ¡°Why she prefers to y with Leo and the others¡­why she hasn¡¯t been as attentive with her training. Why she dislikes studying. I am sure there are reasons for it.¡±


    Tilura was smart, so I doubted that she hated studying because it was too hard. It could just be that she simply preferred to move around.


    ¡°I think I understand now why she listens to you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°She does?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Now that I think about it, you never say no outright or try to force something. I suppose it is easier to talk to you.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Well, I am careful so that others don¡¯t feel pressured¡­¡±


    I suppose it was because I had been rejected all of the time at my old job. There were times when it felt like that was all other people did. And it often felt so unfair.And so when dealing with other people, I tried hard to understand where they wereing from first.


    Besides, when raising Leo, I learned that just scolding her was not going to work.


    I had my own reasons and way of thinking, just as others did. If we talked, then it would reduce the amount of shes or hurt feelings.


    ¡°Thank you, Mr. Takumi. When I see things like that, I can understand why Tilura was upset.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s good. In any case, you are sisters, so it¡¯s good that you can be honest. If you can both reflect, then this was probably a good thing.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. When Tilura was younger, she rarely went against me or argued like that. So I wasn¡¯t used to it.¡±


    ¡°Well, it was mainly Sebastian and Ms. Lyra who convinced that it could be a good thing. Uh, do you want to say something, Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°You already said everything that I wanted to say.¡±


    Oh, so he was going to give her advice as well.


    Uh¡­and he didn¡¯t seem too happy about having lost the opportunity¡­


    ¡°Nevermind Sebastian. In any case, I want to know why Tilura hasn¡¯t been able to focus with her training.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I have noticed that as well. It¡¯s only when she is swinging at Leo, or ying with her, that she seems fully focused¡­¡±


    ¡°Is something bothering her? It doesn¡¯t seem like she hates training or is bored of it.¡±


    ¡°It might be because Rahle was gone. But I have a feeling that it started before that¡­¡±


    ¡°In any case, I will have to talk to her about it.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ As she is not, she might not tell you¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed, it would not be wise for Lady ire to ask her right now.¡±


    ¡°She really wouldn¡¯t tell me?¡±


    ¡°Normally, she would tell you, Lady ire¡­ But she would be quite emotional right now. It has not been long enough since your argument. So she might just get more angry.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ She would not be in a very cooperative mood right now. It will be difficult.¡±


    Ms. Lyra had gone with Tilura, so she would likely have calmed down a little by now. But ire going could just cause her to get angry all over again.


    Perhaps Ms. Lyra could ask her¡­


    Ah, surely Sebastian would be able to extract such information with ease?

 Chapter 791

    Chapter 791


    I was asked to speak to Tilura<hr>


    ¡°Then what about having Mr. Takumi do it? Lady Tilura seems to be fond of him. She relied on Mr. Takumi while Rahle was away.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I think that might work¡­ Mr. Takumi, I am sorry to have to ask you this¡­but could you speak with her?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­¡±


    Before I could nominate Sebastian, he nominated me instead.


    ¡°¡­Why not Sebastian? I think that is more fitting. You know, he has so much more experience¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, I could do it. However, she is not in a good mood right now. And it would not be mine or Lyra¡¯s ce to¡­ Not that she is the kind of person to look down on us.¡±


    ¡°Perhaps I shouldn¡¯t be asking you, since it is my fault¡­but I really do think she will find it easier to talk to you.¡±


    ¡°If you are going to insist that much¡­ I suppose I have no choice.¡±Oh, so you will go? Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s the least I can do, considering how much you do for me. Uh, can I take Leo too?¡±


    ¡°Wou?¡±


    ¡°Of course. Tilura is very fond of Leo. It might help her.


    ¡°Yes. Sorry to get you involved, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Can I go too, papa?¡±


    ¡°Hmmm. No, you better stay here with ire.¡±


    I knew that Leo would help Tilura calm down a little.


    But with Liza, it might be a little too much. The ce would be crowded. Ms. Lyra was also there already.


    ¡°Okay! I¡¯ll stay with sister ire then!¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Liza. And thank you, Mr. Takumi and Leo.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    Just as I was about to go into the mansion with Leo, I suddenly heard Rahle crying.


    ¡°Kiii!¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    The two Cockatrice fledglings at Rahle¡¯s feet¡­ Indeed, they were the reason for the fight to begin with. We had not talked about what to do with them yet.


    ¡°¡­While you are talking with Tilura, I will speak about this matter with Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Very well. They seem really scared because of Leo, and almost being eaten¡­so please be gentle with them.¡±


    ¡°Yes, leave it to us¡±


    ¡°We will not treat them badly. For Lady Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Kii!¡±


    ¡°Pii!¡±


    ¡°Pii!¡±


    And so I left the little birds to ire and Sebastian, and headed into the house.


    ¡°Tilura. Can Ie in?¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­this is your room. So you don¡¯t need to ask¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha. Well, I just thought it would be polite.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    When I entered the horse, one of the maids told me that Tilura and Ms. Lyra had gone to the room that we were using. Regardless, I did not want to rm her by barging in.


    ¡°Sorrying here without permission¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha. It¡¯s fine. This is not my house. I¡¯m just being allowed to stay here for now. Anyway, try this. And you too, Ms. Lyra¡­¡±


    As I had a little idea, I had stopped by the kitchens.


    Since the konjac milk tree had been made as a test, I wanted them to try it¡­

 Chapter 792

    Chapter 792


    I gave them the trial drinks<hr>


    ¡°What is this, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°I would have brought it if you told me¡­ But thank you.¡±


    In order to help pacify her, I had extra milk and sugar put in Tilura¡¯s tea.


    When I told Ms. Helena it was for Tilura, she was happy to bring out the sugar¡­ As for mine and Ms. Lyra¡¯s, there was no sugar inside, which was the original n.


    As for Leo, I promised to give her milk and grape juiceter.


    ¡°It¡¯s the drink that I was talking about yesterday. While this is just a test, I had some sugar put inside. I think it should taste good, so give it a taste. Ah, you should mix it with a spoon.¡±


    ¡°Okay¡­ Ah, it is delicious! And there is something inside that is quite chewy. How interesting.¡±


    Normally, you would drink it with a straw, but since we didn¡¯t have any, I told her to use a spoon instead.Regardless, Tilura seemed to like it, and had no trouble eating it with the spoon.


    As for me¡­ It was not bad. But definitely not what I remembered¡­ It felt like something was missing. I suppose you needed sugar or syrup.


    Ms. Lyra also looked a little conflicted with hers¡­ Like she did not understand why there were chewy chunks inside of her tea.


    Well, I was not the person to invent the drink, so I had no answer for that.


    ¡°¡­So, do you feel better?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry for causing trouble for you and Leo¡­¡±


    ¡°We don¡¯t mind. Sometimes siblings argue like that.¡±


    After seeing that Tilura seemed quite happy, I tried talking to her.


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Leo.¡±


    Tilura sighed and leaned against Leo.


    And then she buried her face into Leo¡¯s fur and thanked her, just like Liza had earlier.


    It almost seemed like she was holding back tears.


    ¡°By the way. ire was wondering about your sword training recently. Is there a reason that you seem distracted?¡±


    ¡°!¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    As soon as I mentioned ire, she froze and clutched onto Leo even tighter. Leo then looked at me usingly.


    ¡°Uh¡­ I just wondered¡­is there something else on your mind? I¡¯m not angry that you fought with ire. I just want to know the reason.¡±


    ¡°¡­She didn¡¯t send you here to lecture me?¡±


    ¡°Not at all. If anything, you are justified in being angry after that. I think she should have listened more¡­¡±


    I tried to make it clear that I was on her side. Which was mostly genuine.


    I didn¡¯t want to make ire the viin here, but I understood Tilura¡¯s perspective¡­ And I had said as much in a roundabout way, so I hoped that ire would understand.


    ¡°¡­I know that I can¡¯t just be saying that I hate studying¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    ¡°I can train fine when I am with you and Leo¡­but I can¡¯t focus when alone¡­¡±


    ¡°And why is that?¡±


    Not wanting to rush her, I waited patiently for her answer.


    Leo also sat without moving while Tilura held onto her. And Ms. Lyra waited quietly a short distance away.


    ¡°¡­I¡¯m lonely.¡±


    ¡°Lonely? But even when you are training alone, the rest of us are still in the garden? And you do not study alone either¡­ Is it because Rahle was gone?¡±


    ¡°I was the most lonely without Rahle¡­but it¡¯s not just that¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    So she was feeling lonely regardless of Rahle being here.


    She did not really travel anywhere, and seemed to be with Leo and Liza a lot. So why was she lonely?


    If that problem could be solved, perhaps she would be able to concentrate better, and ire would not have to get angry with her¡­

 Chapter 793

    Chapter 793


    Tilura talked about why she felt lonely<hr>


    ¡°Do you know why you feel like that?¡±


    ¡°¡­Because you, Leo and Liza¡­are leaving¡­and so is my sister.¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°You are talking about our ns to create herb fields in Range vige¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Well, it is true that we will move away from here.¡±


    As we would be relying on Weed Cultivation a lot, I would have to go, obviously¡­ It would not be realistic to be going back and forth all of the time.As for ire, she wouldn¡¯t even be in Range vige all that much, as she would be looking for other viges and towns to sell the herbs. So that meant she would not be able to be in this mansion for too long.


    We were already starting to build a house in Range vige, which would be like our base.


    And so Tilura might feel as if she was being left behind.


    I did wonder why she didn¡¯t go to the main house with Mr. Ekenhart. But I suppose there were reasons for that.


    ¡°I know that what you and ire are trying to do is important. And everyone isn¡¯t leaving because they hate me¡­ But I can¡¯t help but feel sad when I think about it happening¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, yes¡­ I understand. Especially since you always spend so much time with Leo and Liza¡­ And with even ire leaving¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    Tilura was smart for her age, and so she understood the significance of the work that was to be done.


    And she knew that it was not because we disliked her.


    But she still felt lonely with the idea.


    ¡°¡­That¡¯s why you can¡¯t concentrate on studying and training?¡±


    ¡°Because when I think about how everyone will be gone soon¡­ I want to spend as much time with them as possible¡­ I know that I can¡¯t y all day, but¡­ Rahle was gone up until today. And ire is always so busy. That¡¯s why I always think of ying¡­¡±


    ¡°So you won¡¯t feel too lonely when the timees?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know if I won¡¯t feel lonely. But ying does help me forget a little.¡±


    After thinking of it like that, it was no wonder she became mad when ire rebuked her regarding her studies.


    ¡°I see. It would help distract you. Especially if it is fun.¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    I nodded in agreement.


    Leo looked apologetic, as if she should have sensed it. And so she pushed her nose against Tilura.


    I felt partly to me as well¡­


    I was only thinking about how weed we were by the vigers, and how I would have to hire people.


    It was the same with ire and Sebastian. There were many things to reflect on.


    After all, if we moved to Range vige, that meant Tilura alone would stay here. It should have been obvious to notice.


    Not only that, but without realizing her feelings, we were constantly talking about the future and what we would do over there.


    And were not thinking about how we would miss her¡­ Well, I¡¯m sure if we did realize, we would have felt sad¡­

 Chapter 794

    Chapter 794


    Leo¡¯s sneeze was effective in lightening the mood<hr>


    ¡°Yes¡­ I feel sad about going away as well. Don¡¯t you agree, Leo?¡±


    ¡°¡­Wou¡­¡±


    ¡°Leo¡­¡±


    Leo nodded in agreement and poked Tilura with her nose.


    It was probably her way of apologizing for not knowing. Or maybe it was her way of showing that they were still together now.


    Tilura seemed to understand this, as she gently patted Leo on the nose.


    It kind of reminded me of when Liza and Leo first became close.


    Speaking of which¡­¡°Tilura¡­wait¡­¡±


    ¡°Wa¡­wa¡­wa-chooo!¡±


    ¡°Ahhh! Le-Leo!?¡±


    ¡°It must have felt ticklish¡­ Ms. Lyra. Excuse me¡­¡±


    ¡°No, not at all.¡±


    Just like before, Leo sneezed loudly.


    Though, this time she had done her best to hold it in.


    But as it was in vain, Ms. Lyra had to clean Tilura with a towel.


    Still, I did feel like there was a lighter atmosphere in the room because of it.


    ¡°Wo-wou¡­¡±


    ¡°Ahaha! Don¡¯t worry, Leo. It was because I touched your nose. Still, that was so loud!¡±


    While she wasughing, her eyes were also a little teary. I suppose it was due to the heightened emotions of the past hour.


    ¡°Everything will be fine. I can¡¯t promise that you won¡¯t feel lonely, but we will think about what can be done. Won¡¯t we, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°¡­Mr. Takumi, Leo¡­it¡¯s too tight¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, sorry.¡±


    ¡°Wou-wou.¡±


    I had patted her on the head, and hugged her, along with Leo. Thanks to being distracted, Tilura did not cry after all. It was not necessarily good to hold back your emotions, but I thought she could unleash them onto ireter.


    ¡°By the way, Tilura?¡±


    ¡°What?¡±


    ¡°You have Rahle now. And a special saddle. That means you can easily fly and visit us when you want.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s true.¡±


    ¡°While not as fast as Leo, if you fly, it should not take long to reach Range vige. After all, Leo can reach it in half a day, and she isn¡¯t even running at full speed.¡±


    ¡°Yes! I will be able to visit all of you! So I can just go every day!¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­I don¡¯t know about every day¡­¡±


    After all, I doubted they would let her travel alone. So someone would have to go with her each time. Sebastian¡­no, he couldn¡¯t do that.


    Also, Rahle would be tired. Well, I suppose that problem could be solved with some herbs.


    In any case, I wanted her to consider it as a possible solution.


    It would not be enough though¡­so we would have to think of other things.


    Perhaps we could invite children from the orphanage toe to the mansion? Well, there might be problems with that.


    ¡°In any case¡­it should be possible to meet often, or find other ways to keep you upied.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ Thank you, Mr. Takumi. I hadn¡¯t thought about that. I was just thinking about ying while I could¡­¡±


    ¡°Well¡­at your age, it cannot be helped.¡±


    If anything, it was impressive that she thought to hold it in withoutining.


    Regardless, there was nothing I could do alone. So I would have to talk to ire and Sebastian about it¡­

 Chapter 795

    Chapter 795


    Tilura had calmed down<hr>


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Uh, that¡¯s fine too¡­ But you might get tired. Anyway, we will consider that idea.¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    Leo had suggested that she could run to the mansion at full speed. That way, she could make a round trip in one day.


    Though, she could not carry people while running at top speed. Also, I was worried that it would be too much for her.


    ¡°In any case, do you feel better now?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Thanks to you, I was able to organize my thoughts.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±Tilura nodded energetically. She still seemed a little tense, but I supposed she would be fine.


    ¡°Alright then. Let¡¯s go and see ire, so she can apologize to you.¡±


    ¡°Huh? I¡¯m not the one who is going to apologize?¡±


    ¡°She rejected what you had to say, without understanding. Though¡­I should do the same. I¡¯m sorry, Tilura. I was thinking about other things, and didn¡¯t notice¡­¡±


    While leading Tilura outside of the room, I jokingly made a suggestion. Well¡­it wasn¡¯tpletely a joke. It would help to settle this whole matter.


    ¡°You too!? Um¡­yes. And I¡¯m sorry for not talking about it honestly.¡±


    ¡°Yes, now there are no hard feelings. Not that we were fighting¡­ But it¡¯s easier like that, isn¡¯t it?¡±


    It wasn¡¯t about who was wrong. They were both just getting emotional. And so they should be able to make up if they apologize.


    I did not want them to be like this, as things would be awkward.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, I could apologize even without that!


    ¡°Ahaha. That¡¯s true. Yes, you are able to apologize. But you should remember this. Though it doesn¡¯t always work. But if you realize that you are wrong and apologize, people will forgive you most of the time. Of course, if it¡¯s more serious, then a mere apology won¡¯t be enough. But for just an argument, it should be fine.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Leo looked at me suspiciously, as if she knew I was just quoting someone. But I ignored her.


    While she had looked very ufortable during the argument, it seems like she was listening to me and Sebastian earlier¡­


    As for Ms. Lyra, she just stood there and smiled.


    ¡°Kyau¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha! That tickles!¡±


    ¡°Hehe. Sherry likes to be pettere here. I suppose it is here for Liza?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ire?¡±


    ¡°Oh!¡±


    ¡°Ah, it¡¯s papa and mama!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    When we returned to the garden, I saw that ire was rubbing Sherry¡¯s stomach with one hand, and petting Liza¡¯s tail with the other.


    I almost felt bad, disturbing them now¡­ But I called to her with Tilura. ire quickly returned to herself and turned to look at us while getting up to her feet¡­

 Chapter 796

    Chapter 796


    The sisters made up<hr>


    ¡°¡­Wuff.¡±


    ¡°¡­See, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Mama!¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    Liza rushed to me, while Sherry rushed to Tilura. Well, it was more like a jump. But Tilura managed to catch her.


    Leo was a little sad that no one went to her.


    ¡°Tilura? Well¡­¡±


    ¡°ire¡­umm¡­¡±ire and Tilura were now facing each other and seemed awkward.


    I suppose they were not used to apologizing to each other.


    I was starting to wonder if they needed a little help. But then Sebastian suddenly appeared behind ire.


    ¡°Lady ire was quite sad, thinking that you hated her, Lady Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Se-Sebastian!?¡±


    ¡°Hoho. You were wondering if she would forgive you if you apologized. And if you could y together¡­ But then you said she would probably have more fun with Leo or Rahle¡­ I think you should just say such things without hiding it.¡±


    ¡°¡­I¡­I didn¡¯t say any of that¡­well, I did, but¡­ You can¡¯t just repeat it!¡±


    Sebastian was being quite ruthless.


    While he was probably right¡­it also looked like he was doing it for his own amusement.


    In any case, it was best that they talk, or he would continue to tease them.


    ¡°Well! ire. And Tilura. Come on now.¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes.¡±


    ¡°Fine¡­¡±


    Ignoring Sebsatian, I called to them encouragingly.


    ¡°Tilura¡­ I¡¯m sorry. I should have asked you about what you were thinking. Instead of just saying no.¡±


    ¡°I am sorry too. I didn¡¯t think about you, and just did what I wanted. I should have talked to you about it first¡­ I¡¯m sorry.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­we both did not talk to each other honestly up until now. And so from not on, I will try to listen to you more.¡±


    Well, it looked like things would be fine.


    ¡°Good. So you¡¯ve made up now. How about you shake on it?¡±


    I put their hands together to make them shake.


    ¡°Hey, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi is so forceful. But thank you.¡±


    ¡°Tilura¡­ Yes, thank you. Hehe. When was thest time we held hands, Tilura? We used to do it all of the time when you were smaller¡­¡±


    ¡°You always held my hand because you were afraid that I would run off somewhere!¡±


    ¡°Oh, was I? Well, back then, I was trying to be like mother. Still, I will always be your older sister. And so I will not leave you. At least, not for a long time.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi said that too. And with Leo and Liza¡­and Rahle. They won¡¯t all just leave me!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kii.¡±


    ¡°Pii?¡±


    ¡°Pii?¡±


    The Cockatrice fledglings were still confused about what was happening¡­ Well, they were taken here. And then ire and Tilura started arguing. And now they were fine again. It was no wonder they were confused.

 Chapter 797

    Chapter 797


    We talked about what to do with the Cockatrices<hr>


    ¡°Pii. Pii?¡±


    ¡°Pii. Pii-pii?¡±


    ¡°They are rather cute, now that I look at them carefully¡­¡±


    Apparently, the Cockatrices had decided to take a different approach, and were not appealing to us with their cuteness.


    They looked like pigeons, and tilted their heads to the side and walked around.


    ¡°Hmm. So they eat grains. Not meat or vegetables.


    ¡°Yes, Sebastian. That is what Rahle said.¡±


    ¡°Kii.¡±Tilura had been speaking to Rahle, and she ryed the information to Sebastian.


    Grains¡­


    Well, you could get wheat easily here or any other vige. And it was not expensive.


    So that would not be much of a problem.


    ¡°Kii-kii. Kii!¡±


    ¡°I understand! Uhhh, Rahle says they cannot fly very much, so they will not escape. Also, they don¡¯t have the ability to petrify yet. So they are just like any other birds.¡±


    As she said this, the Cockatrices beat their wings as much as they could. But they could barely fly harder than Tilura¡¯s head.


    That meant they could not go over the wall that surrounded the house.


    ¡°Well, with Leo, Rahle and Sherry around, I don¡¯t think anyone would even think they were dangerous.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. They seem scared. Even the guards here could handle them. The servants as well.¡±


    ¡°Pii!¡±


    ¡°Pii!¡±


    If you took out the petrification ability, they had no way to fight at all. Especially not at this size.


    While I talked to ire and Sebastian about such things, the two birds perched on Tilura¡¯s shoulders, and they rubbed against her.


    They sure were desperate.


    ¡°After seeing them like this, no one could consider eating them¡­¡±


    ¡°And it is toote to take them back¡­¡±


    ¡°Pii!¡±


    ¡°Piii!¡±


    ¡°They said that they don¡¯t want to go back.¡±


    ¡°Well, they would just be food for the other monsters if we took them to the forest now¡­¡±


    Liza was able to understand them, and interpreted for us.


    ¡°Yes. Now that they are here, we cannot abandon them. I suppose it would be best to take care of them here¡­¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Kii! Kikii!¡±


    Said ire, and Leo and Rahle agreed.


    ¡°That being said, does anyone know how to raise them?¡±


    ¡°While we know they eat grains¡­I suppose they can be left alone in the garden?¡±


    ¡°Kii¨Ckii!¡±


    ¡°As long as they do not cause any trouble, I suppose that is fine. And they can be washed if they get dirty¡­¡±


    ¡°Like taking a bath?¡±


    I wondered how they felt about washing. They might hate it like Leo¡­


    ¡°Pii?¡±


    ¡°¡­Pii?¡±


    ¡°Uhhh¡­ They say they prefer sand.¡±


    ¡°Kii! Kii!¡±


    ¡°Pii!¡±


    ¡°¡­Is Rahle telling them to be d they didn¡¯t get eaten?¡±


    ¡°Yes, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    I just had a hunch, based on the situation.


    Still, sand¡­huh¡­

 Chapter 798

    Chapter 798


    Where to find clean sand<hr>


    ¡°Sand¡­ I suppose that won¡¯t be difficult. But where should the sandbox be built?¡±


    ¡°It cannot be in the middle of the garden.¡±


    It was where Leo, Liza and Sherry yed. Also, Tilura and I trained in it as well.


    Also, we were nting herbs as part of my research with Weed Cultivation.


    Hmm¡­? Weed Cultivation?


    ¡°Uh, I was just wondering¡­ The sand just has to be clean, right?¡±


    ¡°Pii-pii.¡±


    ¡°They say it should be dry and smooth.¡±¡°Hmm. Dry and smooth¡­¡±


    That was easy to understand. It did need anything else inside.


    ¡°Do you have an idea?¡±


    ¡°Over there. There was plenty of sand that I didn¡¯t know what to do with.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ What remains after using Weed Cultivation.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I think we should test it out.¡±


    As nts grew at a ridiculous speed, they absorbed all of the nutrients from the soil.


    And this caused something like a small desert to form.


    In any case, we all went to the spot, and I took the Cockatrices down from Tilura¡¯s shoulders.


    While they looked a little scared, they seemed to realize that this was preferable to being handled by Leo or Rahle, and they quieted down.


    ¡°Pi! Pipii!¡±


    ¡°Pipi. Pii!¡±


    ¡°They seem to be having fun.¡±


    ¡°Kii.¡±


    ¡°They like it, papa.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau?¡±


    ¡°Is there something different about this sand, since it was made with Weed Cultivation?¡±


    ¡°It does not look that different. But perhaps it is rted somehow.¡±


    The Cockatrcies immediately started to bathe happily in the sand.


    They rubbed it in their feathers¡­ It seemed like it was mostly about drying off and removing bugs.


    Leo looked like she wanted to y inside as well. But I stopped her. She could y with Tilura and Lizater.


    Sherry was also watching curiously.


    ¡°Pii-pii?¡±


    ¡°Pii?¡±


    ¡°Pii! Pii!¡±


    ¡°Hmm? What is it?¡±


    The Cockatrices seemed to be talking as if they just noticed something.


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s¡­Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Pii-pii.¡±


    They tried to walk towards the field of herbs.


    And so I was about to stop them from going, but then Leo pulled me by the sleeve.


    As if to say that it was fine, and that I should watch.


    When I looked around, the others seemed worried as well. Only Liza, who understood what they were saying, was fine.


    Well, I trusted Leo, and decided to just watch.


    ¡°Pi?¡±


    ¡°Pii-pii.¡±


    ¡°Did it eat something¡­bugs?¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    The Cockatrices moved among the nts and seemed to be pecking at something. And on closed inspection, I saw that it was bugs.


    ¡°Now that I think about it¡­birds do like them¡­ Rahle?¡±


    ¡°Kii!¡±


    ¡°Rahle hates them.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Well, the Cockatrices seem to enjoy them.¡±


    ¡°Pii!¡±


    ¡°Pii-pii!¡±


    I watched them run happily around the field and eat the bugs. They were surprisingly helpful.


    ¡°Hmm¡­it is usual for bugs to appear near nts¡­ But they are good at finding ones that would escape the human eye.¡±


    Apparently, the butlers would asionally help to remove them¡­

 Chapter 799

    Chapter 799


    A role for the Cockatrice fledglings<hr>


    nts made with Weed Cultivation were sometimes picked immediately, but the ones that were left sometimes attracted bugs¡­ But then again, they also tended to wither quickly, which did not leave much time for the bugs to gather.


    ¡°With the other nts around the mansion as well, the servants kept an eye on them for bugs¡­ But perhaps we have an alternative now?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. But there are only two, which is not much¡­ But I suppose they can protect some of the nts. And they are able to do it without damaging anything.¡±


    ¡°Pii. Pii.¡±


    ¡°Piii!¡±


    While watching them patrol the fields, we decided to ask Rahle about the Cockatrices.


    Of course, Tilura and Liza interpreted, as did Leo.


    Apparently, they were considered cleaners among the monsters of the forest. And adult Cockatrices were able to eat veryrge bugs.As they ate bugs in the ground, their beaks also helped to soften the soil, making it easier for trees to grow in the forest.


    And so if Cockatrices were there, the trees grew well. And so some monsters left them alone.


    Though, that did not include monsters that were hungry, or monsters like Rahle.


    Obviously, orcs and trolls attacked them as well.


    Regardless, after hearing all of this, Sebastian wondered if they could not be used for farming. But it would be difficult to catch them. And they were unlikely to listen to what we said.


    And so it was unlikely.


    ¡°So, it¡¯s decided then?¡±


    ¡°Yes. It should be fine if Rahle keeps an eye on them. And they won¡¯t require much attention.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. They will wash themselves if you put water out. Same with the sand. If anything, they can be helpful with the herb fields.¡±


    We would build a small shed for them to sleep in and stay dry when it rains. And during the day, they can patrol the fields and gardens and eat bugs.


    They would not fly away or hurt any humans. Especially with Rahle nearby.


    ¡°That¡¯s great. You can live here without worry now.¡±


    ¡°Pii-pii!¡±


    ¡°Pii!¡±


    ¡°¡­They really seem to like Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I suppose it was because she defended them from the beginning.¡±


    The Cockatrice children were chirping happily again as they sat on Tilura¡¯s shoulders.


    Perhaps bird-type monsters just liked her? Well, Leo and Sherry did as well. And there were dogs in Range vige. Perhaps animals and monsters liked her?


    ¡°Well, if they will watch the nts around the house during the day, there will not be much time to y.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I guess she can just y with them when ying with Leo and the others. ¡­So, there is no need to reject Tilura¡¯s way of thinking.¡±


    ¡°Ahaha. Yes.¡±


    I had told ire and Sebastian what was on Tilura¡¯s mind.


    Sebastian had already guessed at it. But ire was like me, and hadn¡¯t really considered it.


    And so she was rather apologetic now.


    However, she was now watching Tilrua and smiling. And I was sure that the same thing would not happen again¡­

 Chapter 800

    Chapter 800


    The Cockatrices were named<hr>


    ¡°Hmm¡­what to do¡­¡±


    ¡°Hey, papa? Was Liza¡¯s idea bad?¡±


    ¡°No, not exactly¡­ But I think you don¡¯t need to choose every time¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Tsk. Leo sighed¡­ Well, I can¡¯t criticize others when ites to giving out names.¡±


    After the decision was made concerning the Cockatrice fledglings, we ate dinner outside, and then I returned to my room and pondered.


    There was a reason for this.


    Liza and Tilura had suggested that we name the Cockatrices. And then there was the issue of familiars.Naming monsters would result in a contract. And so it could not be done so lightly.


    But then I wondered about Liza naming the fenrirs. Though, it turned out that it was different with beastkin.


    So I thought, what if someone else thought of a name, and Liza was the one to name them? And so Tilura and Sebastian had ideas, but Liza decided first.


    And while it could be taken back, they then asked me to think of a name instead.


    Though, Sebastian already knew that I was no good with names.


    Not that Liza was any better. But since I had no confidence in it, I started to think we should just stick with the first idea¡­ However, it waste, so I would tell ire and Sebastian tomorrow.


    ¡°Alright, we will go with your names then, Liza.¡±


    ¡°Yay! Cokka and Triss!¡±


    ¡°Y-yes. Fine.¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    If Liza was happy, then that was good.


    Leo was nodding as well.


    ¡°We will tell the others about it tomorrow then.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    And so we left the room and went out into the garden.


    I had not done my swings today yet¡­ As Tilura had that fight with ire, she was resting today.


    Apparently, she was going to spend time with ire and Sherry¡­ I hoped it would help with her feelings of loneliness.


    ¡°¡­They seem to be getting along. I almost forgot how Rahle had brought them here.¡±


    ¡°Rahle¡¯s wings look warm.¡±


    ¡°Wou? Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Of course, mama is the warmest.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Let¡¯s talk a little more quietly. Or you will wake them up.¡±


    ¡°Okay.¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    When we reached the garden, Rahle and the Cockatrices were sleeping peacefully near the herb fields.


    Perhaps this was Rahle¡¯s way of repenting¡­


    ¡°Alright, time for bed.¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Wou?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­I¡¯ll sleep with mama!¡±


    I trained quietly so as to not disturb their sleep, and after taking a bath, we returned to the room.


    Liza then hugged Leo and looked very satisfied. Perhaps they were influenced by Rahle.


    Well, Leo was warm, so she wouldn¡¯t even need a nket.


    And like that, we quickly drifted off to sleep¡­


    ¡ª-


    The next day, Liza announced her names for the Cockatices, and Sebastian looked disappointed, just as expected.


    It really wasn¡¯t a serious matter though.


    Besides, Cokka and Triss spread their wings happily when they heard the names¡­ So they seemed to be fond of it.

 Chapter 801

    Chapter 801


    Tilura learned to focus and do her duties<hr>


    After that, the two patrolled the premises and ate the bugs off of the nts¡­ There turned out to be quite a lot, and so there wouldn¡¯t be any need for grains for some time. ording to Rahle, anyway.


    They also stopped being afraid of Leo and Rahle, and were fine approaching anyone who was not Sebastian.


    This could not be helped, since Sebastian had been trying to turn them into food from the beginning¡­ Leo could talk to them, and Rahle was now sleeping with them at night.


    In the meantime, Ms. Helena made the konjac drinks again, and they were served to the others. But they hated it.


    Also, it could be dangerous to drink something like that if you weren¡¯t used to it.


    It could get stuck in your throat, after all.


    In the end, it was decided that it might be made only on rare asions. It was unfortunate that there were no straws.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. It¡¯s time for training! Let¡¯s do our best!¡±¡°Haha, you sure are enthusiastic today, Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Yes. After talking with my sister, I realized that working hard will mean I have more time to y with Leo and Rahle!¡±


    ¡°Because ire will be with you as well?¡±


    ¡°¡­Yes¡­¡±


    After lunch, Tilura finished her studying and wanted to train right away.


    She was in a good mood today, after her talk with ire.


    Focusing on your work makes it end soon, giving you more time for other things.


    Also, to show that she was sorry, ire said that she would try to join Tilura as much as she could, when she was ying.


    Even if she wouldn¡¯t be running around, she could stay close and talk to her.


    As for Liza and Leo, they didn¡¯t have any duties. But they mainly stayed with me and helped. Or they ran around with Rahle.


    Regardless, on the next day, the sleeping area for the Cockatrices wasplete.


    There were three walls and a roof to protect them from the wind. The Cockatrices seemed happy.


    The ground was covered in straw for them to rx as well.


    ¡°Kii.¡±


    ¡°Pii!¡±


    ¡°Pii-pii!¡±


    When it came to actually sleeping, they did not want to move away from Rahle.


    Apparently, they had gotten used to being enveloped by those feathers. And they said they could not sleep any other way.


    However, the shed was notrge enough for Rahle to fit inside.


    ¡°Maybe we should remake it so that Rahle will fit?¡±


    ¡°Well, perhaps this is better than having Rahle sleep on the roof¡­¡±


    ¡°Kii-kii¡­¡±


    Apparently, Rahle preferred to sleep on high ces like trees or roofs. I suppose it was an instinct.


    ¡°In any case, I suppose we will remake it¡­and Rahle will have to get used to sleeping down here.¡±


    ¡°Indeed.¡±


    ¡°I feel bad for Rahle¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. Alright then. How about you sleep with the Cockatrices once every other day, Rahle? That way, they will be able to get used to being on their own.¡±


    ¡°Ki¡­kii¡­¡±


    ¡°Rahle says that it cannot be helped.¡±


    ¡°Pii!¡±


    ¡°Pipii!¡±


    The two fledglings protected.


    Clearly, they already felt quite at home here¡­


    ¡°Grrr¡­grau!¡±


    ¡°Pi!?¡±


    ¡°Pii!¡±


    Leo scolded them. And they gravely became quiet, and pretended to fall asleep.


    ¡­So they obey Leo¡­ Well, she was the strongest monster, after all..

 Chapter 802

    Chapter 802


    I yed with Leo and Liza<hr>


    As for Cokka and Triss, we would see how they did, and hope that they would eventually be able to sleep without Rahle.


    With such thoughts, I returned to my room.


    ¡°¡­You are strict with Sherry and the Cockatrices, but not yourself. Eh, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wou? Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Well, you were here first. And are stronger¡­¡±


    When I returned to the room, Leo wanted some attention, and rubbed against my back with her paws. I was reminded that we had not yed in some time.


    Of course, there was not much space in the room, so I could only pet her.


    ¡°Oh! Mama¡¯s paw! More!¡±¡°Wuff¡­ Wou!¡±


    ¡°You¡¯ve be quite good at handling Leo too¡­¡±


    I taught Liza to do it as well.


    Though, because of the difference in size, Leo would just put her paw on Liza¡¯s head instead.


    ¡°Mama! So soft!¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff¡­ Wou.¡±


    ¡°Haha. It tickles.¡±


    Liza then grabbed Leo¡¯s paw and started to press into it yfully.


    But dogs could be sensitive there, and it seemed like Leo was doing her best to bear it.


    It brought back memories of when I yed with Leo like that.. When she was so small. But she would pull back her paw quickly.


    ¡°While her paws are soft, so is this part.¡±


    ¡°So fluffy. I like this part too!¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    Leo theny down, and we petted her around the belly.


    Leo greatly preferred this, and barked with approval.


    Before going to bed, Leo stood up once and jumped while rotating in the air. I had not seen her do that in a while¡­ While Liza liked it¡­it was a little dangerous¡­


    ¡ª-


    A few days passed. And both Tilura and I continued with our herb growing, studying, training and ying.


    The Cockatrices continued to eat the bugs, and the servants had now be fond of them.


    After all, it was tiring work, and some of them hated bugs¡­


    ¡°Grrrr!¡±


    ¡°Gau!¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    ¡°They are all lined up¡­¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    And then then fenrirs visited the mansion again.


    Of course, they wanted to eat the hamburgers¡­ They really had developed a taste for it.


    After the three of them arrived, they lined up and rolled onto their backs as a greeting. And then Leo barked as if to say, ¡®Good!¡¯


    Sebastian had just gone to the kitchens to inform Ms. Helena. So their wish woulde true.


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right¡­ Feri. Do you have a minute?¡±


    ¡°Grrr?


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Grau!?¡±


    ¡°Gau¡­¡±


    As I called to him, Sherry jumped onto her parents, surprising them.


    ¡°I met a beastkin woman a short while ago¡­ And it seems that she has a connection to fenrirs.¡±


    ¡°Grr?¡± Guuurr¡­¡±


    ¡°Sorry, Leo. What did he say?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    I wanted to ask about Ms. Delia, but could not understand Feri.


    Liza was helping in the kitchen, and Tilura was studying.


    Leo nodded and stepped forward. Feri looked nervous¡­ But it really wasn¡¯t anything serious¡­


    ¡°Uh, so this beastkin was saved by a fenrir. It happened quite a long time ago¡­¡±


    ¡°Grr¡­¡±


    And so I told him about Ms. Delia, and asked if he knew anything about it.


    Sebastian was better at exining such things. And so I almost wished that he was here. But I also did not want to rely on him too much¡­

 Chapter 803

    Chapter 803


    Feri gave information on the fenrirs<hr>


    ¡°Gurr¡­gur¡­gur.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wou-wou. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Hmm. I see¡­¡±


    ording to Leo, it was too long ago for him to know about that.


    Also, the location was far from their own territory.


    Well, I had not really been expecting much. It would be too convenient.


    ¡°Gurr¡­rururu. Gur.¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±¡°Gurr.¡±


    ¡°What did he say?¡±


    ¡°Wou. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    After thinking for a moment, Feri started to say something else.


    Leo interpreted and¡­Feri had said that there was another fenrir pack. And they might have something to do with what happened.


    The forest was veryrge, so there were several fenrir packs that lived separate from each other.


    Also, it seemed that beastkin really were special to fenrirs. And so they did not attack them. So it would not have been strange for them to want to save a baby from monsters¡­


    In other words, the fenrir that was with Ms. Delia must have really been injured while protecting her.


    Perhaps Ms. Delia¡¯s parents had been attacked by monsters when the fenrir found her.


    If a fenrir would go to that extent to help them¡­they must really see beastkin as being special.


    ¡°I finished studying¡­ Oh, the fenrirs are here!¡±


    After I was finished talking, Tilura came out into the garden. It was probably in order to y with Rahle and Leo until lunch time.


    She was surprised and delighted to see the visitors.


    ¡°I was able to help! Ah, sister Tilura!¡±


    ¡°Liza. Fen, Riruru and Feri are here.¡±


    Liza also returned from helping in the kitchen, and the two of them started to y with Fen, Riruru, and Sherry.


    As for Feri, he seemed to be talking with Leo about something¡­ Was she curious about fenrirs too?


    ¡°Oh, Lady Tilura is here now.¡±


    ¡°Sebastian.¡±


    He returned from the kitsch and smiled at the sight of the others ying.


    Cokka and Triss were scared of the fenrirs at first, but seemed fine now.


    ¡­Though, I had noticed Fen licking its lips while staring at them¡­


    ¡°As I had some time, I questioned Feri about something¡­


    ¡°Oh¡­¡±


    And so I told Sebastian about what I heard. And that it was likely that a different fenrir pack was involved.


    ire also arrived, and as we talked, the servants prepared lunch for us.


    tes of hamburgers were ced on the ground for the fenrirs to eat. And they plunged their faces into them and ate ravenously.


    ¡°Liza, you improved a little, I see¡­¡±


    ¡°Ehehe. Right?¡±


    Some of the hamburgers we were eating were made by Liza.


    I suppose she was used to making them now, as they had better shapes. Of course, they were still rather odd-lookingpared to the ones made by Ms. ire.

 Chapter 804

    Chapter 804


    Rahle liked the konjac<hr>


    ¡°The shape is better thanst time.¡±


    ¡°Well done, Liza. I don¡¯t¡­think that I could do it as well¡­¡±


    ire and Tilura were also impressed with Liza¡¯s hamburgers.


    ¡°Hmm? The texture is a little odd¡­ Is this the konjac?¡±


    ¡°So you noticed it. Yes, I asked Sebastian, and he told Ms. Helena to mix it inside.¡±


    ¡°Well, while the texture is a little different, it is still delicious¡­ Yes, I quite like it.¡±


    ¡°Haha. Well, it would be a pain to eat it by itself. So I thought we could test this. Especially since people did not like it as a drink.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I felt like it would get stuck in my throat¡­¡±In fact, it had actually happened with some of the servants.


    Though, the first batch had been fine when Ms. Helea, Ms. Lyra and Tilura drank it¡­. Well, I learned my lesson. We must be more careful about such things in the future.


    In any case, we then tried chopping it into small pieces and mixing it with the ground meat. And it seemed to have turned out quite well.


    It wasn¡¯t perfect, but I suppose it was not terrible for a change.


    Though, it did make the meat more likely to crumble.


    Perhaps it should be cut smaller. But that would be a lot of work for the cooks.


    As for Leo and Sherry, they were eating it without problem.


    ¡°Kii! Kii!¡±


    ¡°Rahle. You want some too?¡±


    We had seen it before, but Rahle tended to like vegetables or konjac over meat.


    Especially if they had seasoning.


    ¡°Ah, Rahle. You have to eat the other parts as well!¡±


    ¡°Kii¡­¡±


    Rahle was using its long beak to take out the pieces of konjac.


    ¡°Kuun¡­¡±


    ¡°You want more too, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Gur¡­¡±


    After seeing Rahle, it was then Leo¡¯s turn to ask for more.


    And then Feri¡­


    Still, there was plenty of food, and so the servants made sure that the monsters were satisfied.


    After lunch, Sebastian told the fenrirs about the idea of post horses.


    Apparently, he had already notified Mr. Ekenhart about it. And he believed they would be receiving his permission soon.


    During the conversion, I had Leo go with Tilura and the others into the mansion. As I did not want her to pressure the fenrirs into agreeing.


    Though, I kept Liza with me as an interpreter.


    Rahle was a short distance away, taking care of the Cockatrices.


    ¡°¡­So that is the idea. We want the fenrirs to protect the horses and people from monsters. Of course, you will have to be away from the forest. And you cannot attack any humans.¡±


    ¡°Gurrr¡­¡±


    Sebastian finished, and Feri growled as he considered it.


    ¡°Gau¡­gau?¡±


    ¡°Gurr. Guru?¡±


    ¡°Uhh, he is asking if they have to hunt for their own food.¡±


    ¡°No. Since you are offering us a service, the food will be prepared for you. After all, it will be cheaper than hiring soldiers.¡±


    ¡°Guur! Gurur!¡±


    ¡°He says if you prepare hamburgers.¡±


    Was that a good thing, considering they were wild monsters? It was strange. But that was how much they liked them now¡­

 Chapter 805

    Chapter 805


    The fenrirs would work for hamburgers<hr>


    ¡°Of course, they will be prepared when possible. But it cannot be every day.¡±


    Besides, they would probably get tired of it if they had it every day.


    ¡°Gurr! Gur!¡±


    ¡°Grau!?¡±


    ¡°Gau! Gau-gau!¡±


    Upon hearing that they would get to eat it regrly, Feri barked something.


    And then Fen and Riruru followed. Even without Liza, I had an idea of what they were saying.


    Feri had volunteered for the position to leave the forest, but to Riruru¡¯s surprise. And Fen was saying that it was not fair.¡°Well, it wouldn¡¯t just be one location¡­ So it is not like Feri will do it alone.¡±


    Though, we would probably start with location as a test.


    ¡°Gurr¡­¡±


    ¡°Gau.¡±


    ¡°Grau¡­¡±


    And so they thought about it again.


    As I watched them, I thought of an idea.


    ¡°Feri. As the leader, you will be managing all of the fenrirs¡­¡±


    ¡°Gur?¡±


    The fenrirs could then help to guard the locations that were close to them.


    They could patrol the areas regrly. However, Feri did not like this idea, as he would not be able to eat the hamburgers.


    As I felt bad for him, I said that it would be prepared if he helped to patrol as well.


    ¡°Also, since this would involve even more work. You could refuse if you want¡­¡±


    ¡°Gurr?¡±


    ¡°Oh? Have you thought of something else, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    As for the post horses, if that was just a test, and used in a small area, perhaps there were other ways as well.


    Sebastian and ire were now very curious about what I was going to say.


    ¡°Gur? Gurr?¡±


    ¡°Fenrirs are about the size of horses. And they can carry people, right? They were able to pull carriages faster than horses, after all¡­ So I think they may be able to carry luggage and passengers, and run instead of horses. Well, not at full speed, or the people might fall off. We will have to make some adjustments, I¡¯m sure.¡±


    ¡°Gurr. Gurur. Gur.¡±


    ¡°He said it¡¯s possible for them to run while carrying humans. And it would be easier than pulling the carriages.¡±


    ¡°Traveling on fenrirs, huh¡­ Indeed, it would be quite swift. And we have already seen it done with Leo. However¡­I doubt anyone would want to do it¡­¡±


    ¡°For humans, fenrirs are ferocious monsters. No one would want to get close to them. So using them like horses will likely be quite difficult.¡±

 Chapter 806

    Chapter 806


    I made a different suggestion<hr>


    Feri¡¯s reaction to my suggestion was not bad. And he said that it would be easier than pulling a carriage.


    However, Sebastian and ire were quite different.


    Well, the people in this mansion and even Ractos might be used to seeing Leo¡­but being with wild fenrirs was quite different.


    ¡°It would only be for some people. Those who aren¡¯t afraid of fenrirs¡­ For instance, the people of this mansion and Range vige.¡±


    ¡°¡­Indeed, people who know Leo may not hesitate.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Since it will start as a small scale test. It should be fine. Also¡­¡±


    ¡°There is something else? Well, if the fenrirs agree to it. I suppose they will be used to such things as they patrol the area as guards.¡±


    ¡°Well, Ractos is a ce that has many visitors. And so many things from different ces gather together.¡±¡°Yes. Other nobles from differentnds visit it as well. Especially from the south. Since you have to pass through Ractos to reach the capital.¡±


    ¡°And do people go to other viges from Ractos?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ I am sure they might stop by. But not the viges that are away from the main road. After all, it is not very safe.¡±


    ¡°However, there are ces like Range vige that make things like wine or konjac. So some merchants might stop by in order to buy them.¡±


    So while you might visit to find special merchandise, it was not too usual to go to such ces.


    ¡°I was thinking. Regrly¡­yes, like every day or two. We could have a carriage that connects Ractos to other viges.¡±


    ¡°Reguarly? What would they carry?¡±


    ¡°People. And the products from the viges.¡±


    ¡°People too?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Like a stagecoach¡­ If you could ride such a thing easily, then I think that more people would want to travel. And it could lead to revitalizing not just Ractos, but also the surrounding viges.¡±


    It would be like a bus or train.


    This way, people who want to go to Ractos, but were previously unable to, would be able to travel. And it would deepen the connections between the viges and town.


    The idea urred to me due to my talk with Mr. Kanat and Ms. Delia.


    In my opinion, the reason that they did not know about the perception of beastkin in Ractos, was because they did not have enough contact with it.


    Furthermore, when I had seen Phillip carrying thoserge barrels of konjac¡­ I had realized how much trouble it must be to transport them all to Ractos from the vige.


    Perhaps there was some other helper from the vige as well. But if it was just Mr. Kanat doing it all alone, then it must have been backbreaking work.


    Well, perhaps he could have thrown out the water first, and then filled it up again after arriving in Ractos¡­


    It would depend on how long the trip would be.

 Chapter 807

    Chapter 807


    Feri was enthusiastic about the idea<hr>


    ¡°By carrying both passengers and cargo regrly, more things will flow into Ractos, and the viges will not be isted. Of course, there will be fees¡­ But it should be cheaper than traveling between viges and towns while alone.¡±


    ¡°Viges and towns¡­ I see.¡±


    ¡°Well, it will only be in the neighboring areas. I think it will help the flow of people and things be smoother.¡±


    The wine in Range vige was good enough for Mr. Euto and Mr. Ekenhart, so it should be distributed far and wide.


    But the more traffic there was, the more information would spread. There would be rumors about the wine, and the vige might be famous.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ I can think of several problems with that. But it is fine for now. More serious consideration cer, when determining whether or not it is possible.¡±


    ¡°Yes. It was just a thought I had. I doubt it could be done exactly like that.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi is certainly filled with ideas. But why bring it up now?¡±¡°Well, it was a matter of timing. Because I thought that the fenrirs could do it¡­¡±


    ¡°Gurr?¡±


    ¡°Carry people again? He is asking.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Liza. Well, carriages. Did you have fun thest time you did it?¡±


    ¡°Gurru!¡±


    Feri nodded.


    I see¡­ So he enjoyed it¡­


    Leo enjoyed carrying people. But perhaps for fenrirs, pulling carriages would be easier.


    Or it was just Feri¡¯s personal preference.


    ¡°Well, we would be grateful if you could do it¡­ Sebastian. I think it would decrease travel time, and make things easier.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ A regr schedule for carriages. The fenrirs would be faster than horses.¡±


    ¡°If it takes one day by horse, it would be nearly half a day for fenrirs.¡±


    ¡°Though, it will be necessary to carry the cargo so that it isn¡¯t damaged¡­ Perhaps we should focus on that first, so they can get used to it.¡±


    As said before, there would be people who did want to travel with fenrirs.


    Though, such people would not trust them to carry their cargo either. However, if the duke was vouching for them, then it might be different.


    ¡°However, such a thing would require many more fenrirs. That will be the biggest problem.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ It will take many of them to connect all of the towns and viges. And consider they will already be helping to guard¡­¡±


    In spite of being the one to suggest it, I did realize now that we would be depending on them too much.


    I didn¡¯t know howrge their pack was, but surely they would not want all of them to leave the forest.


    ¡°It will not go smoothly without at least twenty¡­no, thirty of them. Uh, how many of you are there, Feri?¡±


    ¡°Gurr? Gurur¡­gurr.¡±


    ¡°He said he never counted. But less than a hundred.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s quite a lot¡­ But I suppose many are young like Sherry.¡±


    ¡°Gurr. Gurr.¡±


    ¡°He said half are cubs and they often leave the pack when they grow up.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    If they stayed in the same pack, it might get toorge. Also, they probably wanted new blood once in a while.


    In any case, that meant there could be around forty adults¡­ But some would need to watch the cubs and maintain the pack. Which might leave about twenty.


    ¡°¡­Yes, it was probably too early to be thinking of shared carriages.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. There are too many problems to iron out first. However, it could be considered without fenrirs.¡±


    ¡°You mean with horses?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Otherwise, it is a good idea. It would be a wonderful thing to connect the surrounding viges. Wouldn¡¯t it, Lady ire?¡±


    Sebastian said as he turned to her.

 Chapter 808

    Chapter 808


    There were many advantages to using horses<hr>


    ¡°Inded. Mr. Takumi¡¯s idea would help to connect people and revitalize the viges. Even though it might not seed.¡±


    Well, if you could move safely as if it was a taxi or bus, many people would want to use it. And it would be useful for moving goods.


    ¡°While many people might use it if it was horses¡­ In that case, you will have to think of ways to protect them while traveling.¡±


    Fenrirs could double as guards.


    And without guards, you could be attacked by monsters. It would be expensive to have insurance to cover the goods¡­


    ¡°As for that¡­Mr. Takumi. Across thesends and the whole country, there are patrolling soldiers that deal with monsters. The problem with post horses is that there will not always be soldiers in such ces.¡±


    ¡°So you think we should make sure they ovep?¡±


    ¡°Yes. It might be hard to suddenly increase the number of soldiers, but if they are already patrolling, it would be easy. While we may still have to hire some more men, it will not be too much. And people will rest easy, knowing that the duke¡¯s soldiers are protecting them.¡±¡°As Lady ire says, that way, it will also help with the stability of thisnd. While they are patrolling, they could increase the number of times theye, which will keep people safer. Of course, it would be best to test this with a small number first¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed. And if it doesn¡¯t work well, we can make adjustmentster.¡±


    ¡°Also, there is another advantage to this idea.¡±


    ¡°Something else?¡±


    ¡°Yes. If soldiers and civilians mingle more often, then it will be easier to acquire information. Of course, sometimes it will be rumors and stories with little reliability¡­¡±


    Obviously, there was no inte in this world. So information spread by word of mouth.


    ¡°We also live separate from the people, and so do not hear as much. That was why the disease was able to spread in Ractos, and all the medicine was bought¡­¡±


    ire was still regretting that she was not able to realize what Barsler was doing earlier.


    Of course, they were also moving in secret, so she may not have found out anyway¡­ But had she heard rumors, she might have been able to investigate.


    ¡°In any case, we will have to consult the master about thister.¡±


    ¡°Yes. We cannot decide anything right now. Still¡­it will be a lot of work for Mr. Ekenhart.¡±


    ¡°My father will probably be happy. He likes to do new things. And it was Mr. Takumi¡¯s idea¡­¡±


    In any case, we would have to ask him about it. And there was much to consider regarding how likely it was. So we would leave it for now.


    ¡°Gurr¡­gurr.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ He says he and the other fenrirs will think about it.¡±


    ¡°Oh? Feri. Are you enthusiastic about doing it then?¡±


    ¡°Gururur. Gur.¡±


    Apparently, Feri had been thinking about it, while we were talking about horses.


    It seemed he had a good idea of what would be expected, and as long as it would increase his opportunities to eat hamburgers, he was willing to think of it very positively.


    Of course, he was the leader, and so it was not easy to decide that so many of them would leave the forest. And so he would go back for now¡­


    Also, they may consider cooperating with other packs as well¡­


    They sure were flexible¡­for the sake of hamburgers.


    Feri meant to preach to the others, with the help of Fen and Riruru, about their deliciousness.


    I had no idea if that would work. But if it did, we would have to make a lot of hamburgers¡­

 Chapter 809

    Chapter 809


    The fenrirs had different ways of running<hr>


    As the fenrirs were quiterge, they ate enough for two to three people¡­ We would have to cook more than what we did in Range vige.


    Perhaps I should ask Ms. Helena to buy extra ingredients? But as I was thinking this, Sebastian and ire were already telling one of the maids to send word to the kitchens.


    ¡°Leo¡­ Is this necessary?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff!¡±


    After we finished talking in the back garden, we moved to the front of the house, where the fenrirs were now running at a great speed.


    Apparently, Leo was training them.


    Right now, Tilura and Liza were riding on Feri, while Sebastian rode on Fen, and ire rode on Riruru.


    ¡°Wou. Wuff-wuff.¡±¡°Training to carry people¡­ Well, perhaps it is necessary, if they ept the proposal.¡±


    After Leo had heard everything, she barked and told the fenrirs to move to the front.


    And they were now running as if to prove that they were different from horses.


    They did not seem too different from cars, and I was a little worried about the rider.


    ¡°Well, they seem fine¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    As I watched them go, it certainly looked like they were all having fun. So there should not be a problem.


    Tilura and Liza were holding on tight so they didn¡¯t fall. And Feri was not running as fast as the other two. Possibly, he was being careful due to carrying children.


    As for ire, she was using a saddle, and was perfectly secure.


    However, Sebastian was riding on Fen, who was the most wild. And the butler looked a little pale.


    ¡°Wuff¡­wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Fen will have to be careful about how he runs.¡±


    ordingly Leo, he should train a little more.


    Sebastian was being shaken in every direction¡­ Well, it was his first time.


    If anything, it was impressive how Feri and Fen could run so smoothly.


    ¡°¡­Recently, Sebastian has had more of these kinds of roles. And I am a little relieved¡­¡±


    ¡°Ahaha¡­¡±


    Muttered Phillip, who hade to watch.


    Indeed, it used to be him most of the time¡­


    Though, this time, it was only Sebastian because Phillip happened to not be around.


    ¡°Wuff. Wou-wuff. Wou?¡±


    ¡°Leo says she had fun when carrying you before?¡±


    ¡°You-you must be joking¡­ Not that it was terrible, but¡­¡±


    Phillip had drunk too much wine, and so Sebastian tied him to Leo and sent him to Ractos¡­


    While it was his own fault, I could understand why he wouldn¡¯t want to do it again.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff! Hah-hah!¡±


    ¡°What? Oh, you want to run now too?¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    Leo was sticking her tongue out as excited.


    While this was supposed to be their training, after seeing how much fun they were having, Leo wanted to train as well.


    She liked running for sure, but carrying people was also an important part of it.


    ¡°Phillip¡­ Oh, where did he go? I guess it will have to be me then¡­ Leo, don¡¯t run too fast, okay?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    As she was so excited, I was a little worried that she would run too fast. And so I was going to ask Phillip, but he sensed danger and ran away.


    Well, I had no choice now.


    And so I told Leo to be careful and then climbed onto her back.

 Chapter 810

    Chapter 810


    Leo could not hold back her excitement<hr>


    As I got onto Leo, she wagged her tail excitedly.


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Hey, Leo! That¡¯s too fast!¡±


    As soon as she took off, Leo ran fast enough to catch up with the others, and I was almost thrown right off. But I shouted and Leo frantically slowed down.


    Thankfully, my training had helped. And I had a tight grip on Leo¡¯s fur. It didn¡¯t seem to hurt her. I suppose a human¡¯s strength was still nothing.


    ¡°Wah! Mama and papa have joined us! Don¡¯t lose, Feri!¡±


    ¡°You can do it, Feri!¡±


    ¡°Gu, gurr¡­!¡±¡°Wou?¡±


    ¡°Gur! Gur!¡±


    Feri sounded like he was crying for mercy, knowing he had no chance of outrunning a Silver Fenrir.


    I had gotten used to Leo¡¯s speed now, and was able to keep my bnce. As I sighed in relief, Leo seemed to bark at Feri provokingly.


    ¡°Gurru!¡±


    ¡°Woah! Fast!¡±


    ¡°Oohhh! But Liza, hold on tightly!¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Grau!¡±


    ¡°Hey, Leo! You two. Be careful!¡±


    ¡°Okay, papa!¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    While it wasn¡¯t exactly a race, Feri picked up speed. Liza and Tilura were overjoyed, and held on tighter.


    Still, Leo quickly caught up with them, and then she headed towards Fen an Riruru.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi! The fenrirs are so fast!¡±


    ¡°Indeed! While it¡¯s good they can run faster than horses, it cannot always be this fast!¡±


    ¡°I agree! Ah, please be careful, Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°Tell that to Leo!¡±


    Leo was now running parallel with Riruru.


    I had to shout loudly in order to talk with ire.


    When we finished talking, Leo started to run faster again, and so I had to hold on tightly.


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Grau!? Gau, gau!¡±


    ¡°Kyuu!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Leo barked at Riruru, which startled the fenrir. And then Sherry said something like a greeting.


    After that, Leo left her and elerated towards Fen, who was the fastest.


    ¡°Wou?¡±


    ¡°Leo. It¡¯s a bitte to be worried about me¡­ You want to go to Fen, right? Fine, I¡¯ll hold on. Don¡¯t worry.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°¡­Though, I might have something to say about itter.¡±


    ¡°Wou!? Kuuun¡­ Grau!¡±


    I wasn¡¯t that worried about myself. But it would be dangerous if Feri was provoked into running too fast while carrying Liza and Tilura¡­


    ¡°Well, for now, you can run. Let¡¯s go, Leo!¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    When I looked back, her tail was no longer wagging like before.


    Her ears also seemed to droop a little. Perhaps it was too effective.


    In any case, I patted Leo and gave her the signal. It was something we had practiced before, when going to the forest with Mr. Ekenhart.


    Leo ran faster until she caught up with Fen, who had been quite far away.


    Using the signal really made her enthusiastic again¡­

 Chapter 811

    Chapter 811


    Sebastian was safe somehow<hr>


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Grau!? Gau!¡±


    It did not take long for Leo to catch up with Fen, who had been quite far ahead.


    Leo barked as if to announce it, and Fen barked in surprise.


    From the mansion, we were about one third of the way to Ractos now. And it had only been a few minutes¡­


    ¡°Hey, Mr. Takumi. Leo! I am saved!¡±


    ¡°Uh, we didn¡¯te here to save you¡­¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°But¡­!¡±


    Fen started to run even faster, and then so did Leo.


    I had a feeling that this would happen. And so I held on tight. But Sebastian screeched in surprise.


    ¡°Leo. You can go a little farther, but then tell Fen to stop. I am starting to feel bad for Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    He looked pale. Also, surely Leo and Fen had run enough.


    In the meantime, I tried to make sure I didn¡¯t fall off either.


    As Leo said before, I could tell that she was using magic to decrease some of the wind resistance.


    So it wasn¡¯t like I had trouble breathing.


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Ah, yes. You¡¯re satisfied now, right?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Just when I had gotten used to it, Leo barked at me.


    I nodded and patted her on the back.


    Even if she had not run at full speed, she got to chase after three fenrirs.


    ¡°Wou-wou!¡±


    ¡°Grau? Gau!¡±


    She barked to Fen, and then they both slowed down.


    ¡°Hah¡­ah¡­ It finally stopped.¡±


    ¡°Are you alright, Sebastian? Here, eat this.¡±


    ¡°I am not alright¡­ But I am alive. Ah, thank you¡­¡±


    ¡°It seemed to help you when you rode on Rahle.¡±


    ¡°Wou-wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Grau..gau!¡±


    Sebastian was breathing heavily after climbing down from Fen.


    He gratefully epted the herbs that I offered him, and stuffed them into his mouth.


    Leo seemed to be giving Fen some orders. I suppose it was about how he ran. But Leo was also running very widely.


    ¡°Wou-wou. Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Good Leo appears to be asking me something¡­?¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ She is asking if you can ride Fen again. Otherwise, it will take you a long time to return to the mansion¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ I understand¡­ As long as it does not go too fast¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wou!¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    Apparently, the fatigue healing herbs had been effective, and Sebastian had caught his breath now. However, as soon as he heard the news, his face turned quite pale once again¡­

 Chapter 812

    Chapter 812


    ire enjoyed herself<hr>


    ¡°Wou! Wou!¡±


    ¡°Grau!¡±


    Leo gave the order to Fen, so that he would not run too fast on the return trip.


    ¡°¡­I know understand how useful it will be to have the fenrirs transport things.¡±


    Sebastian muttered, after we had returned to the mansion, and settled in the garden to rest and have tea.


    Even though he had eaten the herbs, it was still mentally exhausting.


    Though, Fen had run a lot less roughly, and Sebastian did not look sick like before¡­


    ¡°Yes. It was fun, and Tilura really enjoyed it¡­ But I suppose it was different for Sebastian. He looked like he was being swung in every direction.¡±¡°Yes. I had to hold on desperately, or I would have been shaken off. I doubt I would have even been able to return, if Mr. Takumi had not given me the herbs¡­ Thank you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Not at all¡­ It was Leo who provoked Fen into running like that¡­ I am just d that you are fine.¡±


    ire, Liza and Tilura had enjoyed the ride, and showed no signs of being tired. So it really must have been Fen that was the problem.


    ¡°Well, it all depends on Feri. Whether or not we can actually do anything with it. It seems like they would be happy to work if they are fed. But the problem is their numbers.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Mr. Takumi. If Feri¡¯s pack is against it, and we cannot get fenrirs from anywhere else, then we must give up on the idea. Though, I do hope that it works out.¡±


    ¡°¡­Are you just saying that because you want to ride them, Lady ire?¡±


    ¡°I won¡¯t deny it. Because it was fun. More exciting than riding on a horse¡­ Though, the view is not as good.¡±


    ¡°Well, they are simr in size to horses, but horses have more height.¡±


    While it was Fen¡¯s fault, Sebastian was a little traumatized, and did not want to ride them anymore.


    ire was the opposite. Was it because of Riruru? Well, ire and Tilura certainly had a lot inmon.


    ¡°They are so energetic¡­¡±


    After having hamburgers for dinner, Feri and the others returned to the forest in order to persuade the others.


    Though the sun had set, they ran off as if having another race.


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Feri, Fen, Riruru. Come again!¡±


    ¡°We will be waiting!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    Liza and Tilura waved excitedly. Leo barked as if to say that it was only normal for them to be able to run again.


    ¡°I didn¡¯t realize they had this much energy¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. They do not require as much rest as a horse. So even if they ran at the same pace as a horse, you would still be able to save some time. Of course, we also should not push them too far.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. Even if the fenrirs are monsters, they are cooperating with us. So they must be treated well.¡±

 Chapter 813

    Chapter 813


    I thought about employees<hr>


    I agreed with what Sebastian said. They would likely be able to run much longer distances than horses¡­ I wondered if they might run all of the way to the forest without even stopping.


    If that was the case, they certainly had a lot of energy. I would have to ask them the next time they visited.


    ¡°Now, while that is all important¡­there are other things I need to do as well¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Papa? The usual?¡±


    After we saw the fenrirs off, I focused on my training in order to make up for the afternoon. Though, I didn¡¯t push myself too hard.


    Tilura was able to focus more than usual. Was it because Rahle was watching? Or because she had fun riding on Feri?


    After that, I returned to my room.For a few days now, I had been seriously inspecting the list of people to hire.


    ¡°Ah, sorry. Could you stay with Leo?¡±


    ¡°Yes, okay. Mama!¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    It wasn¡¯t that I had to decide on anything immediately, but things were moving, and I wanted to do things right.


    Sebastian had reported to me that materials had been sent to Range vige, and they were already starting to build the foundation for the house.


    They had also drawn water from theke, and it seemed that they would be starting on the house soon.


    He talked about using magic tools for the water and sewage systems. However, as he seemed like he was going to start exining them at length, I quickly made my excuses and left.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ It¡¯s hard for me to think like ire¡­¡±


    She was born in a position to stand above others. And so she was educated that way.


    ¡°In any case, this person wants to work¡­and perhaps it is a good thing that she wants to marry. Uh¡­number nine¡­ Ms. Corint.¡±


    She had managed to surprise not just me, but Sebastian as well.


    Also, ire had said that she was promising.


    ¡°Aside from her¡­this person does not seem suitable for manualbor. So they should be on the management side. Uhhh, number three. Mr. Faige. And number seventeen. Mr. Anor.¡±


    Mr. Faige was thin but seemed intelligent.


    He has asked about the work days, and had experience with hiring people.


    As for Mr. Anor, he had been wondering if enough herbs could be grown in just Range vige.


    He seemed to have a good grasp on the viges and towns and their poption. And he could calcte, so he should do well in an office.


    Though, that would also be the role of the butler that is supposed toe and help me¡­ But I suppose this person could be an assistant.


    ¡°Next¡­this person seems to have knowledge about farm work¡­ Hmm¡­ I think I will hire number four as well.¡±


    Ms. Ura was the woman who asked me if the herbs would grow properly.


    Apparently, she had been born and raised on a farm.


    A short while ago, her brother and his wife had inherited their parent¡¯s farm, so she wanted to go and work somewhere else.


    I wanted more people who knew about farming, but she should be helpful for now.


    ¡°And¡­ Oh, I forgot to tell Ms. Gelda¡­¡±


    ¡°What about sister Gelda?¡±


    I had already spoken to Ms. Lyra, and the matter was decided. However, I had forgotten about Ms. Gelda¡­


    ¡°Hmm? Well, I am thinking about taking her with us to Range vige. But I haven¡¯t told her yet.¡±


    ¡°Sister Gelda and sister Lyra. Everyone is together.¡±


    ¡°Wou-wuff!¡±


    ¡°Yes, everyone together¡­¡±

 Chapter 814

    Chapter 814


    We talked about building the new house<hr>


    As I had not asked Ms. Gelda yet, I didn¡¯t know if she would reallye. But Liza was happy about it.


    And so I decided that I would have to find a way to persuade Ms. Gelda toe.


    I did not want Liza to feel sad¡­


    After going through my notes and the list, I had made some progress, and felt it was enough for now.


    I did not want to leave the others alone for too long.


    And after spending some time with them, we went to bed.


    ¡ª


    The next day, after lunch and training was finished, I was called by Sebastian, and went to the room where the butlers were.ire was already there and sitting down, while Sebastian stood behind her.


    As she was behind thergest desk that was in the center, it was probably the one that Sebastian usually used.


    ¡°Please sit down, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    I was told to sit on the chair that faced the desk, and then Sebastian prepared some tea.


    ¡°So, what is it this time? Uh, if it¡¯s about the post horses, we are waiting for the fenrirs answer¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, we are considering the various oues of that. The younger ones are dealing with it, but I keep an eye on them as well. Also, it will be some time before we get a reply from His Grace at the main house.¡±


    ¡°Father will likely agree to it. It will likely be done around Ractos as a test first.¡±


    ¡°The reason that you were called here was to talk about the house you will be living in once you move to Range vige.¡±


    ¡°The house¡­ But we already discussed the building materials.¡±


    ¡°Yes. But that was just the exterior, not the interior.¡±


    ¡°Ah, I see.¡±


    I suppose it was about the rooms and who would live where.


    ¡°When ites to the general appearance on the outside, and the size, we have already decided that. It needs to berge enough for Leo to befortable in. And so the room and hallways will also be big.¡±


    Leo could not even enter some houses. That was howrge she was.


    ¡°Unlike this mansion, since it is being newly made, it will have a proper water system. Though it means the kitchen and bathing room will have to be in a certain ce. Here are the floorns.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­I see¡­¡±


    ¡°They have to be close together.¡±


    ¡°Yes. It is the same with the drawing room and dining hall. It would be difficult to carry the food from different floors.¡±


    Sebastian exined as he approached a shelf and took out a sheepskin scroll.


    He spread it out on the desk, revealing the floor ns for the house.


    I suppose the sheepskin was more durable than paper.


    However, there were a lot of empty spaces, which suggested that not all of the rooms were decided yet. It was just the kitchen, bathing room, drawing room, dining hall and toilets.


    With the toilets, they were on both floors. Apparently, this was possible because they did not use as much water. That was a relief, as it would have been difficult if it was too far away from my room¡­

 Chapter 815

    Chapter 815


    The house would be bigger than expected<hr>


    ¡°The positioning of the kitchen, bathing room and drawing room seem simr to this house?¡±


    I had not seen the floor ns for this house, but after spending a while here, I had a good grasp of where everything was.


    ¡°That is so it will be easier for Lady ire and you when moving. It might be confusing for you all if things are too different.¡±


    ¡°The main house is also like that. Though, it is muchrger, so getting around can be tiring. I hear that some nobles have rearranged everything, for a change of scenery¡­¡±


    ¡°It must be difficult for the servants to learn everything again. Nobles who do such things often end up getting lost in their own houses.¡±


    ¡°How embarrassing¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, so theyout being simr is fine¡­ But isn¡¯t it toorge?¡±


    ¡°Do you think so? But it is much smaller than this house¡­¡±¡°Yes, Sebastian. While there will be more people who are hired, it won¡¯t be as much as this house. So this should be just right.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s true that it¡¯s smaller than this house, but¡­¡±


    There were no actual measurements, but I could get an idea of the size based on the kitchen.


    Also, two floors was one thing, but there was a third, fourth and fifth as well.


    I knew that it would be ratherrge, but not thisrge¡­


    Surely this was too much?


    ¡°Yes, it is not that big. It will not take that much time to build¡­¡±


    ¡°No, it¡¯s not about time¡­¡±


    Hmm¡­ I definitely felt like there was a difference in our ways of thinking. I was amoner and she was a noble.


    Why did we need that many rooms?


    ¡°Couldn¡¯t it be three or two stories instead?¡±


    ¡°¡­It could¡­ But then the building would be considerably smaller.¡±


    ¡°It isn¡¯t a house that is supposed to be impressive or show authority. It can be small. It just needs to befortable enough for Leo.¡±


    Previously, I had spoken of this with Mr. Ekenhart, and thought that the matter had been resolved. And yet here we were again.


    Well, it wasn¡¯t a waste, as back then, the house was to be even bigger. If left alone, they would have built a gigantic building.


    ¡°Hmmm¡­ Aside from your rooms, there will be rooms for the servants¡­¡±


    ¡°Uhh¡­ I do want everyone to be able to livefortably. Surely there are other ces that can be smaller?¡±


    ¡°Not the dining hall or drawing room¡­¡±


    As for my own room, I just needed enough space for a bed and desk.


    Well, there had to be space if Leo and Liza would spend time there. But my current room already seemed quiterge, even with Leo inside of it.


    ¡°But as the master of the house, for Mr. Takumi to have a smaller room¡­¡±


    Though I tried to persuade him, Sebastian then began to exin with a serious expression.


    He usually looked so amused when he did it, so it must be important for him to be acting like this.


    Even ire looked serious. So I decided to listen carefully.


    Name(required)Email(required)WebsiteMessage


    Submit


    ¦¤

 Chapter 816

    Chapter 816


    There was meaning behind the sizes of the rooms<hr>


    Apparently, once I started the business, we would expect to have some important visitors. And given then ire was the daughter of a duke¡­ There was a need for the rooms to be a certain size.


    Furthermore, if there were too few rooms, not only would we not be able to amodate enough guests, but people might look down on us for it. It was the same with making the rooms smaller.


    As for me, I didn¡¯t really care what other people thought of me. But it was clearly a different matter for the duke.


    It was troublesome indeed.


    ¡°The visitors to the vige won¡¯t only be people who want herbs. Once rumors spread, it will only be natural for other nobles to visit as well.¡±


    ¡°Especially after Lord Euto visited. And there is Anne¡­ Even if it is a rare urrence, it would not hurt to be prepared.¡±


    ¡°I understand. In that case¡­ With all of that considered, we will make things smaller within reason, so that there will be no trouble¡­¡±


    ¡°I understand. As you are the one who will live in it, you must be satisfied.¡±¡°Yes.¡±


    And so we talked about how to make things smaller.


    After some debate, I realized just how difficult the whole process was.


    It did make me long for a normal house even more¡­


    Regardless, once that matter was settled, we talked about housing for the employees.


    While the servants would generally live in the same house, it would be different for the other workers.


    We didn¡¯t know how many there would be yet. But for now, we would construct a separate building next to the house for them.


    It would have its own kitchens and bathing space, with rooms of simr sizes.


    As we talked, another butler drew the ns on some paper. It turned out to be like an apartment.


    ¡°Also¡­ This is just a thought, and it doesn¡¯t have to be, but¡­¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    The house would be three stories, with our bedrooms on the second floor. The guest rooms were on the first floor, while the servants were on the first and second. The offices and work rooms would be on the third floor.


    ¡°Right now, I¡¯m wearing my shoes inside of the house.¡±


    ¡°Yes. And what of it?¡±


    ¡°Well¡­ Back where I used to live, we didn¡¯t wear shoes indoors.¡±


    ¡°You were barefoot¡­? But what if the floor is filthy or covered in dangerous objects?¡±


    ¡°There were very few dangerous objects¡­ Well, it¡¯s easier to keep smaller spaces clean.¡±


    After all, I had Leo, and could not leave anything dangerous around her. If I broke a cup or te, I cleaned it up immediately.


    Of course, as it was a different culture, I didn¡¯t expect it to be epted so easily.


    ¡°Well, I was wondering if maybe we could wear slippers instead?¡±


    ¡°Slippers? What is that?¡±


    ¡°Does it rece shoes? To be honest, I do not like the idea of walking around without shoes¡­¡±

 Chapter 817

    Chapter 817


    I talked with Ms. Gelda<hr>


    ¡°As for the room locations, you will have to ask Sebastian about thatter. But I think it should be a simryout as this house.¡±


    ¡°Yes, certainly. However, should I be hearing this before the others?¡±


    ¡°Well, you are the closest and easiest to talk to. And I am relying on you.¡±


    ¡°Ye-yes. Thank you! I will do my best so that you are not disappointed.¡±


    We had not decided on the butlers yet, and so for now, ms. Lyra was the best person to talk to.


    There would be other servants, including the ones to go with ire. I didn¡¯t know who the head maid would be though. I did not want to put too much pressure on Ms. Lyra¡­ But she looked happy at the moment, thankfully.


    ¡°Ah, I¡¯m sorry. You had business with Gelda. I will call her right away then.¡±


    Ms. Lyra bowed and then went over to Leo and the others.¡°Mr. Takumi. You called?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Thank you, Ms. Lyra.¡±


    ¡°Not at all.¡±


    ¡°So, Ms. Gelda. I¡¯ve been thinking about it for some time, but was not able to talk to you about it. For that, I am sorry. It is your decision¡­ But, would you considering with me, Leo and Liza to Range vige? Well, with Ms. Lyra. And since ire will be there, you should not find it too different¡­¡±


    ¡°No, while I will be there, our roles will be different. So it should be fulfilling work, I think.¡±


    Well, that was not wrong.


    Ms. Gelda looked quite surprised by the proposition. And she was covering her mouth with her hand¡­ Though, it didn¡¯t seem like it was in horror¡­


    In fact, she looked quite emotional.


    ¡°M-Ms. Gelda? Why¡­ Do you not want to go? What is it?¡±


    ¡°Wuffu¡­¡±


    I became a little frantic, as I saw tears fall from her eyes.


    Leo had stopped running and was now looking at me with an exasperated expression¡­


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, Mr. Takumi. Gelda is happy.¡±


    ¡°I-is that so?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Gelda, it is rude to cry and not say anything. You are happy, aren¡¯t you?¡±


    ¡°Ah! Yes! Of¡­course!¡±


    Ms. Lyra patted Ms. Gelda gently on the back and smiled encouragingly.


    ¡°I don¡¯t mind¡­ It was just a little surprising¡­ So you do not hate the idea?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ I¡¯m sorry for losing control of myself. I was so sure that you would not ask me¡­¡±


    As we waited for Ms. Gelda to calm down, we sat at the table and Ms. Lyra poured us some tea.


    As it was not moremon to eat outdoors, the table was kept near the entrance for easy use. Especially so that Tilura and I could rest during training.


    ¡°Gelda knew that you had invited me, Mr. Takumi. And so she must have been wondering why you wouldn¡¯t ask her.¡±


    ¡°I always meant to ask both of you¡­ I¡¯m sorry for not doing it sooner.¡±


    ¡°Not at all¡­¡±


    I now realized that I had not been thoughtful enough.


    Nearly everyone in the house knew that Ms. Lyra wasing with me, but Ms. Gelda had not even been asked..


    They both took care of us, and we met them often, so there were plenty of times I could have done it.


    But I had been thinking of other things and just forgot¡­

 Chapter 818

    Chapter 818


    I finished talking to Ms. Gelda<hr>


    ¡°If I¡¯m being honest, I was thinking that I might not be suited for the post. After all, you have seen me fail a number of times¡­¡±


    ¡°Well¡­ I won¡¯t say that you didn¡¯t.¡±


    She sometimes tripped for no reason, and was quite clumsy.


    Thankfully, it had never resulted in anything serious. Just spilling a few drinks on people.


    But she was not as nervous and tense as before. And her failures were not as numerous.


    Apparently, the head maid had been teaching her well. Also, she had helped us quite a lot, so I didn¡¯t feel she was ill-suited at all.


    ¡°But you have seemed quite careful recently. And have made fewer mistakes. So I wish you wouldn¡¯t think that. Even though it¡¯s my fault for beingte¡­¡±


    ¡°No, Mr. Takumi. Actually, yesterday¡­¡±¡°Huh?¡±


    As Ms. Gelda found it awkward, Ms. Lyra exined. Apparently, she was still making mistakes all the time, and I just happened to not see them.


    ¡°We-well¡­ I hope you will try your hardest to improve¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. And I shall watch Gelda closely.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, but please don¡¯t get too nervous about it again. I mean, a little nervousness is fine. But if it goes too far, it will likely lead to more idents.¡±


    ¡°¡­I will do my best.¡±


    There was still time left until we went to Range vige, so it would be best for Ms. Lyra to keep an eye on her¡­ Though I felt bad for giving her more work.


    Ah, and there was one other important thing.


    ¡°So¡­does that mean you agree toe with us, Ms. Gelda?¡±


    Well, judging by the flow of the conversation, it was almost certain. But I wanted her to say it clearly. As a formality, I suppose.


    ¡°You, you really mean it? Surely there is someone else who will be more useful¡­¡±


    I thought she would agree immediately, but it was clear that she was not confident in herself.


    I suppose she was worried that she would end up causing us trouble. That was like her.


    ¡°It will be fine. Even if you fail here and there¡­ You have done well, looking after us. And so Leo and Liza would like for you toe. Isn¡¯t that right, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°I want sister Gelda toe too!¡±


    ¡°Gelda. You should be more confident in yourself. One of the reasons that you fail so much is because you are so unsure. It causes you to be frantic or stiff from nerves. Don¡¯t worry, you have been very useful. Not perfect, of course. But neither am I.¡±


    ¡°Ms. Lyra¡­ Leo and Liza¡­ Yes, I understand! I shall go with you, Mr. Takumi. And do my best!¡±


    After Ms. Lyra deal the final blow¡­of encouragement, Ms. Gelda finally agreed.


    ¡°Well then¡­ I look forward to having you both with us.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    I offered my hand and shook with Ms. Gelda.


    Leo ced her paw on top as well. Liza was so happy that she hugged Ms. Gelda.

 Chapter 819

    Chapter 819


    I was consulted regarding Sherry<hr>


    ¡°Oh, you seem to be having fun, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°ire.¡±


    ¡°Sister!¡±


    ¡°Hehe. You seem rather sweet today, Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Hoho. I see that you have been deciding things little by little¡­?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    ire and Sebastian had note out into the garden. Tilura immediately hugged her sister. They had be a lot closer after fighting.


    Or perhaps she was doing it because ire would be leaving eventually.¡°Mr. Takumi. I wanted to talk to you about Sherry¡­¡±


    I had finished my training, and still had some time before dinner. And so ire and I were resting at the table and drinking tea.


    Tilura had Cokka on her shoulder while Liza had Trice. And they were running around with Sherry.


    ¡°About Sherry? I think Leo knows more about¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Leo was resting next to me, and she now turned her head with a puzzled expression.


    ¡°Of course, Leo as well.¡±


    ¡°¡­Has something happened to her? She looks quite energetic to me. Perhaps she is not listening to you?¡±


    ¡°No, nothing like that. She is always very obedient. It¡¯s just that she sometimes likes to bite things. Oh, she does not bite people. Not hard, anyway. She might just nibble on my hand a little.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ I had not seen her do anything like that¡­¡±


    Even though she looked like a medium sized dog, she was a fenrir. And so she could do a lot of damage if she bit someone seriously.


    But Sherry was smart, so I thought she wouldn¡¯t do such a thing.


    ¡°What does she tend to bite? And what causes her to want to¡­¡±


    ¡°Not so much people¡­or anything that is specific. I suppose hard things made of wood or rock¡­¡±


    ¡°And you have seen this?¡±


    ¡°No, she just looks restless while I am watching. But when we are separated, I sometimes return to see teeth marks. And Sherry says that she bit it¡­¡±


    So she has the urge to bite something, but does not do it when ire or others are around.


    ¡°And did Sherry say what the reason was?¡±


    ¡°I asked her, but she just says that she is restless. And that biting helps her to calm down.¡±


    ¡°Could it be¡­¡±


    ¡°You know?¡±


    ¡°Wou?¡±


    Well, it was just a guess.


    Leo was tilting her head. But surely she should know as well¡­


    If it was what I was thinking about, then Leo had experienced it as well. Of course, back when she was a maltese dog.


    ¡°I cannot be sure, but I think it¡¯s because her canines are regrowing¡­¡±


    ¡°Regrowing?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!?¡±


    ¡°Uhh¡­ Leo. Don¡¯t you remember? That ufortable feeling you had when your teeth were regrowing. You were always trying to bite things.¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­? Wuff-wou!¡±


    ¡°Leo used to be like that¡­¡±


    I said with exasperation, and after thinking about it for a moment, Leo nodded with realization.


    It seemed that while Leo had gained a tremendous amount of knowledge throughing to this world and bing a Silver Fenrir, her old memories might be fading.


    But then again, she was only several months old. So perhaps it was not strange for her to forget¡­

 Chapter 820

    Chapter 820


    We prepared something for her to bite<hr>


    ¡°Speaking from Leo¡¯s experience¡­ A few months after they are born, their teeth regrow. Of course, this was Leo. I don¡¯t know if fenrirs are simr¡­ But it sure sounds like it¡¯s the same thing. ¡­It was a lot of trouble¡­¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    ¡°Hahaha. Don¡¯t worry. I¡¯m not mad. It cannot be helped.¡±


    ¡°Teeth regrowing¡­¡±


    As Leo was a rescue, I didn¡¯t know her actual birthdate. But I had an idea, based on her size and rate of growth.


    And then her teeth started to regrow shortly after that.


    I remember wondering how I could get her to stop biting things¡­ And then I did some research and found out the reason.


    While it was necessary to ensure that she wouldn¡¯t develop a habit, I had been quite relieved to find out it was a natural thing.¡°Well, Sherry is young, so such things will happen. Her old teeth wille out and new ones will grow. Proof that she is getting older.¡±


    ¡°So, I should just leave her alone then?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I don¡¯t think you need to do anything¡­¡±


    Though, Sherry was not a dog. Perhaps there was something that could be done. I could not say anything too confidently.


    If Fen or Riruru were here, we could ask them. But they were not, and it would take time to go to the forest.


    ¡°Wuff. Wou¡­ Wuff-wuff. Wou!¡±


    ¡°Huh. Is that so?¡±


    ¡°What did good Leo say?¡±


    ¡°She said that while it can be very irritating, it should be fine to leave it. The teeth will fall out on their own, and it¡¯s not a big deal if you swallow¡­ What?¡±


    Thest part was a bit surprising, and I hesitated at first. But I ended up telling ire. Basically, it woulde out the other end.


    ¡°Wuff. Wou-wou?¡±


    ¡°Indeed. She should be given something hard to chew, so she doesn¡¯t chew something dangerous. Make something made of cloth?¡±


    ¡°Wou.¡±


    ¡°Cloth¡­ I will prepare it right away.¡±


    If it was wood, she might get splinters¡­and rocks and metal were even more dangerous.


    Normally, a chew toy for dogs would be the best¡­but they did not have such things here.


    Regardless, Ms. Gelda and Ms. Lyra went away in order to fetch some cloth.


    They brought us some towels¡­ I wanted something harder, but just tried folding them up.


    ¡°Hmm. This will probably fall apart easily¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. I have brought Sherry.¡±


    ¡°Kyau?¡±


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    ¡°What are you doing, papa?¡±


    ire came while carrying Sherry, and Tilura and Liza were with her. And so I told ire to put Sherry down on the ground.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff.¡±


    ¡°Kyau? Kyu-kyu.¡±


    ¡°Hmm. Maybe it was too soft¡­¡±


    After being told by Leo, she had pressed the cloth down with her paws and begun to bite it.


    However, the cloth was easily pierced by her fangs. And they soon ripped, in spite of being severalyers.


    Tilura and Liza looked impressed.


    ¡°That¡¯s a fenrir for you. Well, what about this, Sherry?¡±


    ¡°Kyau! Kyuu-kyu!¡±


    This time, I rolled up the towel so that it was like a soft ball. But perhaps it was a little big.


    However, this time it did not rip, and she seemed to enjoy biting it.


    Still¡­


    ¡°Even though these are basically her baby teeth, they sink in so easily¡­it¡¯s already full of holes.¡±


    ¡°Kyuu?¡±


    ¡°No, we wanted to see if you would like it, Sherry. It¡¯s fine.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Mr. Takumi wanted to make sure you had something to chew on.¡±


    ¡°Kyau.¡±


    As Sherry suddenly looked apologetic, ire and I patted her on the head reassuringly.

 Chapter 821

    Chapter 821


    We decided what she should bite<hr>


    Even though she had not been biting it that hard, the cloth ball was quickly covered in holes, making it useless.


    She really was different from a dog.


    ¡°It¡¯s hard, just fighting back the urge, isn¡¯t it, Sherry? Especially when you aren¡¯t distracted by ying with Liza and the others.¡±


    ¡°Kyau¡­¡±


    Sherry was apparently at her limit, and she let out a resigned sigh.


    ¡°I suppose something made of wood would be the best? I¡¯m sure that Sherry would want to bite it harder¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? What is it Leo¡­ Sherry?¡±¡°Kyau¡­¡±


    ¡°She is spitting out the wood¡­¡±


    As I was wondering what to do, Leo pointed me to Sherry, who was biting a tree branch.


    It must have fallen somewhere in the garden. And she was spitting out the pieces, as she knew to not swallow them.


    ire was also surprised by this.


    ¡°¡­Well, it looks like something made of wood will not be a problem then. What if metal and stone are also fine?¡±


    ¡°Kyau. Kyu-kyu.¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    Sherry barked in protestation.


    Leo also seemed to agree.


    Apparently, while wood was fine, she did not like the taste of stone.


    As for metal, she also did not like the feeling of biting into it.


    ¡°In that case, I guess a thick piece of wood should do?¡±


    ¡°Kyau! Kyau.¡±


    ¡°She wants something round. I¡¯m sorry she is so picky, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°Not at all. I¡¯m sure that the cloth was the best in terms of feeling¡­ But you would need a lot of it¡­¡±


    ¡°You do not need to worry about that. We have a lot of clothes that are no longer used or worn by anyone.¡±


    ¡°Well, we should then prepare some wood and cloth, so that when Sherry wants to¡­or feels the urge¡­can bite on them.¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    ¡°Yes. Thank you, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s nothing¡­ I only knew because Leo had experienced the same thing.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    While my knowledge seemed to have been useful, it really would be best to ask Fen and Riruru about it next time.


    Dogs and wolves¡­fenrirs. There would be many differences. And I was now curious to know what the fenrirs did out in the wild.


    Well, ire was the one who would have to spend a lot of time around one of them. So she is the one who should maybe talk to them¡­

 Chapter 822

    Chapter 822


    There were a lot of things that I wanted to know<hr>


    ¡°Uh, is this wood fine?¡±


    ¡°Kyau. Kyau.¡±


    ¡°She says something wider would be better!¡±


    ¡°Wider, huh¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. I will have some wood purchased from Ractos tomorrow.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ And it will have to be cut down so it won¡¯t be too big for Sherry.¡±


    We had picked up a branch in the garden, and washed and trimmed it a little, so that it could be taken into the house.


    However, Sherry seemed to prefer t and wide boards. So something like nks used in building would be better. And so ire decided to buy some in Ractos.Regardless, after that issue was taken care of, we had dinner in the garden, and I trained.


    After I took a bath, I returned to the room and thought for some time.


    About the herb fields, to be precise.


    As I had met ire as soon as I came to this world, and had lived with the duke¡¯s people, there was so much that I did not know.


    Some things I could just ask Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda, but I also thought it would be good to witness it for myself¡­


    ¡°Papa? Are you thinking?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Ah, sorry.¡±


    I had forgotten that I had been patting Leo and Liza. And so I rmenced, while returning to my thoughts. Thoughts of this world¡­


    As for life here, I had seen some of what it was like in Range vige. But as I was like an honored guest, it was not really the same.


    I wanted to see people acting more naturally¡­ Well, I suppose I would have to ask Sebastian about it tomorrow¡­


    ¡ª


    ¡°Hmm. You want to see how normal people live¡­?¡±


    The next day, I talked to Sebastian about it after breakfast.


    Liza and Leo were ying with the Cockatrices¡­ while Tilura was still studying.


    Apparently, she was interested in the Cockatrices who were eating the bugs again, as they were currently walking around the nts in the garden.


    I was a little worried that she might try eating them as well. But Leo would probably stop her.


    ¡°Yes. Of course, I am quite happy here, where I am well taken care of. But it does mean that I know little of how other people live.¡±


    If I was going to start hiring people, I had to be able to build proper rtionships with them¡­ And they will not all be people like Ms. Lyra.


    ¡°Most nobles would think that it is not necessary to be able to understand your employees¡­ But I see that you are more simr to His Grace in that way.¡±


    ¡°Really? Well, he certainly doesn¡¯t care as much about differences in stations¡­¡±


    When I was with ire and Mr. Ekenhart, I sometimes forgot that they were nobles. Well, ire definitely had the air of one, but she would sometimes say things that were rather strange.


    ¡°Nobles are people who stand above others. That is what most believe. But nevermind them. If you wish to know more¡­ Why not visit Ractos and observe?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ That is fine. But it is a big, busy ce. I am more curious about life in the viges.¡±

 Chapter 823

    Chapter 823


    I talked with Sebastian<hr>


    As I nned to live in Range vige, it was better to see what life was like in a vige, rather than a ce like Ractos.


    ¡°Hmm, a vige. What about Range vige then? Since you are starting a business there.¡±


    ¡°Yes, but they all know who I am¡­ And so it will not be the same. Also, I would like to see the other viges.¡±


    Perhaps I was being difficult. But the fact was that I wanted to see something new.


    Range vige made wine, so the other viges probably made something else. And life would be different.


    ¡°Well, I am thinking of a ce that I could go that I am not yet familiar with. I am sorry if this is a lot of trouble for you.¡±


    ¡°No, not at all. Besides, I happen to think it is a good thing that you wish to learn.¡±


    I didn¡¯t want them to think that I didn¡¯t like Ractos or Range vige. And I also didn¡¯t want to create more work for Sebastian.But though he furrowed his brows, he did not seem to mind.


    Indeed, he very much approved the idea of gaining knowledge.


    ¡°Yes¡­ What about Bleiyu vige? Since Ms. Delia is there.¡±


    ¡°Ms. Delia¡¯s vige¡­ Yes, perhaps. But won¡¯t it be the same as Range vige, if I know someone there?¡±


    ¡°You could contact Ms. Delia in advance. Indeed¡­have you decided to hire her already?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Liza seemed happy to see her. And so I mean to hire here, either as a teacher or to work with the herbs. Whichever she wants.¡±


    As I knew Ms. Delia and Mr. Kanat, I thought it would not be that different. But Sebastian had a n.


    ¡°If you are decided, Mr. Takumi, then perhaps you could tell her directly? And say you want to confide in her about which position she will take.¡±


    ¡°Well, that would be a good enough excuse to go¡­ But I think the other vigers will realize our connection to the duke, and treat us differently.¡±


    I just wanted to see normal life in a vige.


    It was nice to be weed warmly¡­but it was not the same.


    ¡°When you contact Ms. Delia, you can tell her. That she should not tell the others who you are. And to tell that man who sold the konjac as well.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ I suppose I could then pretend like a regr traveler.¡±


    ¡°Though, they might get suspicious if they see you talking with Ms. Delia¡­¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true¡­¡±


    ¡°In that case¡­you could say you met by coincidence in Ractos¡­ For instance, when catching that thief.¡±


    ¡°Thief¡­ Ah, the thief that Ms. Delia caught.¡±


    When we were walking through the town, a man had stolen something from a store and tried to run away.


    And then Ms. Delia had jumped out and caught him.


    ¡°Yes. It would not look unnatural if you were the one she happened to help that time. Also, you could say that you ate the konjac, and like it. So you came to see how it was made. That should please the vigers very much.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ As long as Mr. Kanat cooperates, then it should work. Though, it would mean lying¡­¡±


    Ms. Delia had helped the owner of the store, not me.


    As I hesitated a moment, Sebastian looked at me with a sly grin¡­

 Chapter 824

    Chapter 824


    I agreed with the suggestion<hr>


    ¡°No, no. It is not a lie. After all, the thief was going in the direction of you and Lady ire. He might have crashed into you, and you would have been injured. Though, I¡¯m sure Phillip and Leo would have done something. But you never know.¡±


    ¡°¡­I suppose you are right.¡±


    I had been thinking about something else at the time, so maybe I would have crashed into him.


    ¡°So, is that alright then?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Thank you. I am d that I talked to you about it.¡±


    ¡°I merely made a possible suggestion. So, when will you be going? We will need some time to contact them in advance¡­¡±


    I would have to talk to ire about it. As well as Leo and Liza. So it should be a few dayster.


    After all, I had not expected to decide anything so soon, and had not even told them about it.¡°Wuff. Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Mama and papa!¡±


    After lunch, I left Sebastian to exin matters to ire, and I returned to my room where I talked about Bleiyu vige to Leo and Liza.


    Leo intended to carry me there, and was already wagging her tail with excitement.


    Liza was also excited at the idea of going somewhere. Even though she did not really know what the purpose was.


    However, I had some bad news for them¡­


    ¡°Sorry, but I think you will have to stay home this time, Leo¡­¡±


    ¡°Wou!?¡±


    ¡°Mama stays home?¡±


    Leo looked terribly shocked by this revtion. It was amusing to see her like this, but I could notugh.


    ¡°If you go, then I will have to exin to them why there is a Silver Fenrir. It¡¯s not exactly something that can be swept to the side.¡±


    After all, Ms. Delia had been with a fenrir when she was found.


    ¡°Mama isn¡¯t going?¡±


    ¡°No¡­ Maybe she could go halfway¡­ But not into the vige. Also, you must stay with her, Liza.¡±


    ¡°I do?!¡±


    Apparently, she had thought it was just Leo, and now it was her turn to look surprised.


    Liza was clearly a beastkin. Though, I suppose they would not be prejudiced against her, because of Ms. Delia.


    Still, my conclusion was that if I wanted to go without attracting any strange attention, I should go alone.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°Oh, are you sure? Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Hmm. Well¡­perhaps?¡±


    Leo said that she would carry me until I reached the vige.


    I suppose she wanted to be near me as long as possible.


    ¡°Well, I will talk to Sebastian about it. In any case, maybe I can be with you and Liza until we get close. And then you must go back, and I will continue on alone. Is that alright?¡±


    ¡°¡­Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Leo. You really will be able to take Liza back to the house?¡±


    ¡°Wuff? Wuff!¡±


    Suddenly, I was a little worried that Leo would be able to make it back without getting lost.


    However, Leo nodded confidently. I suppose it would be fine.


    I would talk to Sebast about that as well. At worst, we might have one of the guards go with them¡­

 Chapter 825

    Chapter 825


    ire¡¯s suggestion was dismissed<hr>


    ¡°I agree with you, Mr. Takumi. And so I shall apany you as well.¡±


    ¡°¡­So, I suppose Mr. Takumi will not be visiting the vige after all.¡±


    ¡°Hey, Sebastian!?¡±


    After speaking to Leo and Liza, I confided in the others around the dinner table.


    ire made her deration then, and Sebastian rejected it immediately.


    As Sebastian had been shaking his head with exasperation earlier, he must have been expecting her to say something like this.


    It reminded me of how she dered she would go to the forest before.


    ¡°Uh¡­I don¡¯t know about that¡­ I already talked to Leo and Liza¡­¡±¡°Hoho. I was merely joking. Still, Lady ire. You cannot just go with Mr. Takumi on a whim.¡±


    ¡°It is¡­not a whim!¡±


    So it was just a joke¡­ Still, ire had slowed down a little, so perhaps it was effective in a way.


    ¡°For the future, Mr. Takumi wishes to visit as an ordinary person, so he can see how they live. If you were to go¡­then it would ruin the whole thing.¡±


    After all, ire was a very beautiful daughter of a duke. You could immediately tell that she was of noble birth.


    ¡°Besides, if you were to go, then there would have to be many guards as well¡­¡±


    ¡°Exactly. Not that Bleiyu vige is a dangerous ce, but we cannot take any chances. I hope you did not actually think that you could go without any guards?¡±


    ¡°Of course, not. Especially since Leo would not be there.¡±


    Whenever she went to Ractos, Ms. Johanna or some other guard would always apany her.


    And just like Leo, having a guard around would give us away.


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Mama looks sad?¡±


    ¡°Liza. We should have her eat a lot, and then she will be happy.¡±


    ¡°Yes, sister Tilura! Mama, you can have my food!¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wou-wuff!¡±


    Apparently, Leo had been listening, and was reminded that she could not go either. Liza and Tilura were then concerned, and encouraged her to eat more.


    Regardless, I turned my attention back to ire.


    ¡°In that case, how did you think you could go to the vige while keeping your identities hidden?¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    Sebastian pressed. But ire was silent.


    ¡°In the first ce, why would you even need to go? Why do you need to see Bleiyu vige?¡±


    ¡°Because I thought that I should see how they live as well. Yes, I have gone to Range vige and others. Often it was with my father. But I never got a closer look.¡±


    ¡°Hmm. I understand the reason. I suppose you did think about it a little¡­ And you are not lying.¡±


    ¡°Tsk!¡±


    Sebastian really was able to see right through her. ire looked quite annoyed by it.


    Well, knowing ire, if she really had thought about it in advance, she would have said it first¡­


    Though, I¡¯m sure she meant it. She probably did not have much time to see much while traveling with Mr. Ekenhart.

 Chapter 826

    Chapter 826


    I packed for my journey to Bleiyu Vige<hr>


    ¡°Did you think you could go with Mr. Takumi, as if you were vacationing? Hmm¡­ I see¡­ So you were just pretending to have the same thoughts as him¡­¡±


    ¡°N-no! I would never do that¡­!¡±


    ire objected, but her face was turning red, and she did not have half as much force as before.


    The idea that she was thinking of me, did make me a little happy¡­ But it was awkward, when Sebastian put it like that¡­


    ¡°Well then, it should be three days from now. Until then, preparations will be made. You will ride on Leo for the journey there. But since Phillip and Nichs will apany you, it will be at the speed of a horse.¡±


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    In the end, ire could not argue against Sebastian, and agreed to wait for my return.As for Phillip and Nichs, they would guard me in the vige while Leo was away¡­ To be honest, that was also ufortable. But some precautions had to be taken. Though, I would do my best to be careful as well.


    Phillip had been with me in Range vige, and I had gone to the forest a few times with Nichs. That was why they were chosen.


    Since we were familiar, we could pretend to be fellow travelers, so they would not look like guards.


    Ms. Lyra was alsoing, so that she could ride Leo back to the mansion.


    While it would be hard for her, I was d that she would be with Liza.


    As for how I would get around without Leo, I was to ride with Phillip or Nichs.


    This was because I could not ride on my own. It made me seriously think about taking lessons.


    Also, I had to make herbs before the trip. So I would be quite busy¡­


    And though I felt bad for ire, she would just have to be satisfied with the stories I brought back.


    ¡°Papa. Over here?¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s right. Uh, and¡­¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Lady Liza. Over here.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Ms. Lyra.¡±


    ¡°Thank you!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Two days after my trip was decided.


    I was using the time before dinner to pack. But outside of my sword, it was just putting clothes into a bag.


    Leo was helping Liza by using her paws to hold the bag open.


    At first she tried to help her fold her clothes, but it was a little too difficult.


    Instead, Ms. Gelda folded them and handed them to Liza.


    Everything other than clothes would be prepared by the guards.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry for asking you toe with us, Ms. Lyra. Especially after the forest and even Range vige¡­¡±


    ¡°Not at all. Even though it is rather tiring¡­ But it is my job to help you. And that does not change when we are out of the house.¡±


    While not every time, Ms. Lyra did seem to go out with us a lot. And while I was grateful, I was also a little concerned.


    She was not as tough as Phillip. And long travels would be taxing.


    ¡°Though it is just on the way there, I am looking forward to your delicious cooking. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Sister Lyra! Thank you!¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wou!¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s nothing¡­ I want to do it. There is no need to thank me¡­¡±


    She replied, both surprised and a little embarrassed. It was unusual to see her like that.


    Well, perhaps as a servant, she was not used to people expressing their appreciation this much.

 Chapter 827

    Chapter 827


    I heard about Ms. Gelda¡¯s past<hr>


    ¡°But Gelda is a better cook than me¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, is that so?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­yes¡­¡±


    When out camping, Ms. Lyra was often in charge of cooking. And it was good, even though she wasn¡¯t a professional like Ms. Helena.


    ¡°It was actually Gelda who taught me how to cook. She cooked often while we were in the orphanage. As she always said she wanted to be a cook, I was surprised when she came to this mansion as a servant.¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­ I see. Well, I would like to try her food if I ever have the chance. But¡­why did she never be a cook? Uh, I know that it¡¯s not something that can be done easily, but¡­¡±


    When I saw Ms. Helena and the other cooks in the mansion, I could see that they were all very passionate¡­ A lot of it was probably the head cook¡¯s influence.


    But if she could cook better than Ms. Lyra, then even though it was not an easy profession, surely it would not have been impossible for her.¡°Well, because I had one great w¡­¡±


    ¡°w? But you were able to make good food?¡±


    I did not cook much, and so I didn¡¯t know what it involved¡­


    It seemed like she had everything that you would need.


    ¡°Well¡­you use knives to cook. And fire. And when I cook, I always cut or burn myself¡­¡±


    ¡°Gelda was always like this, even when she was teaching me to cook. Thankfully, she was never injured too badly¡­ But even if that is fine at the orphanage, it is different if you want to be a real cook.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ Yes, I can see how getting cut and burned all of the time would be a problem¡­¡±


    As Gelda was looking down sadly, Ms. Lyra exined.


    Was this also part of her being clumsy?


    It could not always be due to ack of attention¡­ Regardless, you were dealing with food. So it was not very sanitary to be injured.


    ¡°¡­And so, well, I¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. If you are going to get hurt, I cannot ask you to make food.¡±


    ¡°I am sorry¡­¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s nothing to be sorry about. But perhaps I can think of something.¡±


    ¡°Huh? You aren¡¯t going to ban me from ever cooking?¡±


    ¡°Haha. I would not say that. ¡­Well, maybe it is because of Ms. Helena¡­¡±


    Ms. Gelda looked like she was full of regret, and had not fully given up the dream of bing a cook.


    ¡°Do you really think I could cook something that can be served to other people¡­?¡±


    ¡°There must be a way. That being said, I cannot think of it immediately¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Hehe. Thank you.¡±


    I had said it rather by impulse, and regretted it a little. I even heard Leo sigh, but I ignored her.


    But thanks to my embarrassment, Ms. Gelda stopped looking so glum and smiled as she thanked me. Ms. Lyra also bowed her head.


    Yes, I would have to give the matter some serious thought.


    I could not think of anything that would make her less clumsy. But perhaps there were ways to keep things sanitary, by healing her cuts immediately. Or training so that she improves¡­


    Now that I thought about it, I had to find a cook for when we went to Range vige as well¡­


    I decided this while looking at Ms. Gelda, who smiled and watched Liza folding her clothes.


    It must be hard to give up on a dream. And that might be one reason that Ms. Geldacked confidence¡­

 Chapter 828

    Chapter 828


    Preparations for the herb fields were going smoothly<hr>


    The next day, I made more herbs than usual. Though, I had been doing that for the past few days.


    I then gave the herbs to Sebastian, to make sure that there was enough.


    ¡°This should cover for the time that I am gone.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ While they have been selling very well at Mr. Kalis¡¯s store, this should still be enough. And if they run out¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. You can use the herbs from the fields.¡±


    ¡°Also, the messenger I sent to Breiyu vige has returned with Ms. Delia¡¯s answer. While she was surprised, she has also agreed to it.¡±


    ¡°I see. In that case, preparations for the journey areplete.¡±


    Sebastian had sent out a messenger the day after our talk. And Ms. Delia had agreed to weing me as someone she had met by coincidence in Ractos.¡°Ah, and the others?¡±


    ¡°I have told them as well. There is your Gift, and this involves the duke¡¯s house. And so they will keep it a secret when signing the contract.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    Aside from Ms. Delia, he had also contacted the people who I had decided to hire.


    I could not leave them hanging without saying anything¡­ It would be very ufortable to wait for an answer.


    While they were told to abstain from talking about the Gift, they also did not even know that it was Weed Cultivation yet.


    I suppose I would tell them once they were all gathered together in Range vige.


    ¡°Also, there is one other thing, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes?¡±


    ¡°It is best that you decide on the butler soon. As you will be overwhelmed with work if you are alone.¡±


    During these past few days, I had spoken with Ms. Lyra for advice, and listening to the progress with the house¡­ But I had also been feeling that it was a lot of work.


    Besides, I wanted to be sure that I could spend time with Liza and Leo.


    ¡°Did you find someone promising?¡±


    ¡°Once the business starts, and things settle down, you will have to think about hiring more. But for now, a few of the butlers from the main house can help you.¡±


    ¡°The main house¡­ The duke¡¯s butlers? Can he spare them?¡±


    ¡°It will not be a problem. They are well trained, and with the best ability. And since you are involved with the duke, they will not object. Besides, His Grace seems to be enthusiastic about it.¡±


    I had never met any of them, but there were other butlers here, outside of Sebastian.


    And it definitely looked like they had been trained well.


    ¡°Currently, they are preparing to make their way to this house. I think they will arrive after you return from Bleiyu vige. And then you can meet them and make your decision.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t like having to choose, but I understand. And the ones who are not chosen will be sent back?¡±


    ¡°No. After all, Lady ire is going to Range vige as well. Along with the butlers here, some will be going with her. But then again¡­if they are not chosen, it might be necessary for them to train again.¡±


    ¡°No, no, no. I don¡¯t think¡­ Not being chosen by me would not mean that theycked any ability!¡±


    ¡°Hoho. I was merely joking.¡±


    If I could not hire all of them, then someone would be left. That was all. And so he should not be harsh on them.


    In the first ce, they were from the main house, so it was surely not necessary. But then again, Mr. Ekenhart might send some new ones too, just for his amusement.


    I could hear him now, ¡®I can¡¯t wait to find out which one Mr. Takumi chooses¡¯¡­

 Chapter 829

    Chapter 829


    I was relieved that ire wasn¡¯t too sad<hr>


    ¡°Ah, by the way. How is ire?¡±


    ¡°Are you worried about Lady ire then?¡±


    ¡°No, well¡­I haven¡¯t talked to her since she was turned down¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, she is fine. She was feeling a little down at first. But she quickly returned to normal. I saw her talking happily with Lady Tilura and Sherry.¡±


    ¡°I see. But then again, she didn¡¯t ask too strongly the other time I went to Range vige with Leo. So I am sure it is fine.¡±


    ¡°It is likely because of all theints she heard when going to the forest, that time she found Sherry. While it is not as dangerous this time, she will still not force her will.¡±


    ¡°Haha, of course.¡±


    Back then, she had wanted to go such that she became angry with Sebastian and the others. But then he lectured herter, when I wasn¡¯t around.And so she would not do the same thing again.


    ¡°Ah, do you think I could talk to Phillip now? I would like to say something to him before we go to Bleiyu vige.¡±


    ¡°At this hour, he will either be on patrol or training¡­ But I will call him. I am sure your business is important.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    I wanted to talk to him about what we would do after arriving in the vige.


    After all, we needed to both act like normal people when we arrived.


    Preferably, we would be friends¡­I think? Since we were not too different in age¡­


    ¡°In the end, I think being friends will look the least strange.¡±


    ¡°However, treating you as just a friend, Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re too stiff, Nichs. A guard should be flexible during such situations.¡±


    ¡°But it is difficult for me¡­¡±


    As we talked, it became apparent that Phillip was in agreement, but Nichs was a little ufortable with the arrangement.


    While it was important, it was not very serious. And so we drank tea and talked leisurely.


    Liza had be friends with Cokka and Trice, and was now ying with them and Sherry and Rahle.


    Leo was next to me and taking in the sun.


    ¡°Well, being friends really does seem to be the best way. We are all men, after all.¡±


    ¡°Yes. And if we are not careful, we could look intimidating. That will put the vigers on their guard.¡±


    ¡°By the way, Nichs. You really should rx more. That is probably why you are still single.¡±


    ¡°¡­You are one to talk, Phillip.¡±


    ¡°Oh? Are you unaware then? You know¡­I can¡¯t keep them off of me whenever I visit Ractos.¡±


    ¡°Uh. I have never seen anything like that¡­¡±


    Suddenly, the conversation had gone in a very different direction.


    While Nichs red at him, Phillip argued that he was quite popr. But I had never seen any proof of this.


    Well, he had well proportioned features which matched his long hair. And perhaps women would like a reliable, soldier type like him.


    You would think so, anyway.


    And yet, there were no hints every time we visited Ractos together¡­

 Chapter 830

    Chapter 830


    I enjoyed some guy talk<hr>


    ¡°What are you saying, Mr. Takumi? When I go to Ractos with you or Lady ire, it is as a guard. Obviously, I would not be distracted by other women?¡±


    ¡°Uh, I suppose¡­¡±


    If he did something like that, he would not be the chief guard.


    However, as Phillip said, if he really had so many women fawning over him, surely there would have been some small sign of it in town.


    Anything from loving looks across the street, to a few exchanged words¡­ But then again, with ire and Sebastian there, perhaps it would not be easy.


    Besides, I would not notice if someone was looking at Phillip like that.


    Leo stuck out so much, that I hardly noticed anything else.


    ¡°Do not be fooled, Mr. Takumi. He has always been like this. Delusional. Ever since he was at the orphanage.¡±¡°Is that true?¡±


    ¡°What are you saying, Nichss! Indeed, I was very young back at the orphanage. But ever since I trained and became a guard, things have been quite different, you know.¡±


    ¡°¡­It¡¯s true that Phillip left first, and so I don¡¯t know much about that¡­ But I still have my suspicions.¡±


    As for me, I thought Phillip had the right qualities, and so I wanted to believe him¡­ But his friend did not look like he was lying.


    ¡°Perhaps I should ask Ms. Johanna, who is also working as a guard here¡­¡±


    ¡°He-hey, Mr. Takumi! Do not do that! While she is very skilled, she is very dedicated to Lady ire. And rarely has a positive thing to say about men!¡±


    ¡°Uh, I have never seen anything like that¡­?¡±


    Johanna was always very polite towards me.


    When I rode with her in the carriage, she talked to me about ire.


    ¡°As for Johanna, I agree with Phillip. She is only polite to you because you are a guest, and because of Leo.¡±


    ¡°Nichs, it is not only that. ¡­It is because the master, as well as Lady ire, hold him in high regard. After all, he did help her.¡±


    Phillip must have seen the opportunity to shift the conversation, and he soon started to ask me questions about ire.


    While Nichs rxed and sipped his tea.


    It could be rather fun to talk to men like this¡­


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    Leo sighed next to me. But I pretended to not hear her.


    She clearly had no interest in this kind of small talk amongst males.


    In the end, nothing was confirmed about Phillip¡¯s ims. However, we might see some proof of it in Bleiyu vige¡­


    ¡°Now, since we will be headed out tomorrow¡­ Are you two ready? Well, I did see you get packed already.¡±


    ¡°Yes! Sister Lyra also helped me!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    After my talk with Phillip and Nichs¡­we had dinner, and I trained outside. Then I returned to my room in order to sleep.


    ¡°Leo. While we¡¯ll be going close to the vige together, you¡¯ll have to look after Liza while I¡¯m away. Alright? And the house and Sherry as well.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    I had not been away from Liza for a full day since her arrival, but I was sure that she would be fine with Leo. If anything, she would do a better job than me.


    As for Sherry, her teeth were growing, so I thought we should be more watchful than usual.


    Her teeth had fallen out in the past two days, and there were plenty of things for her to bite. So she would probably be fine.


    As for the teeth, ire was keeping them to remember Sherry¡¯s growth.


    In Japan, there was a tradition of throwing them up on the roof, but things were obviously different here.

 Chapter 831

    Chapter 831


    Something was strange with Liza<hr>


    I suppose she would also want to keep the teeth, because Sherry was a fenrir.


    Leo was even more special, but fenrir teeth were harder than metal, and were charged with magic energy as well.


    ording to Sebastian, the teeth were evenbined with metal to create strong and sharp swords and magic tools.


    As Sherry was still young, I didn¡¯t know if hers could be used¡­but perhaps they would be valuableter.


    ¡°Ah, Liza. Will you be alright while I am away?¡±


    Right now, she was used to being here, and there didn¡¯t seem to be a problem¡­


    ¡°Yes¡­I¡¯m fine. It will be a little lonely¡­but mama is here. So I will wait¡­and be the first person to greet you when youe back¡­¡±


    ¡°I see. Thank you. Yes, you will be the first one to see me.¡±¡°Wuff-wuff!¡±


    Yes¡­now that I thought about it, when Leo was still small, she would always wait and greet me while I came back.


    ¡°Haha. You too, Leo. Will you two greet me together?¡±


    ¡°Yes, okay. We will wait¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Liza?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    Iughed and petted Leo, but then realized that something seemed strange with Liza.


    Earlier, she had looked like she was having fun while packing. But there was none of that now.


    Leo noticed as well, and she was looking at Liza with a puzzled expression.


    ¡°It-it¡¯s nothing¡­ I¡¯m fine¡­¡±


    Liza raised her head and smiled¡­but it looked like she was forcing it.


    There was no cheer in her voice and she was holding her stomach.


    ¡°¡­Does your stomach hurt?¡±


    ¡°No¡­¡±


    It looked like she was in pain but was trying to bear it.


    Perhaps she had eaten too much¡­ But it was the same amount as always¡­


    What if something in the food had gone bad? But we had all eaten the same thing, and Ms. Helena would not have allowed it.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­ Liza. You don¡¯t have to lie. Just tell us how you feel. And then Leo and I won¡¯t worry.¡±


    ¡°Really? You won¡¯t be mad?¡±


    ¡°Of course! Right, Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­my stomach does hurt. I¡¯m sorry¡­ Please don¡¯t be mad¡­¡±


    ¡°What are you saying! Why would we be mad!¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry¡­¡±


    ¡°Uh, I¡¯m not ming you. You really should feel free to say something if you don¡¯t feel right. Okay?¡±


    In the slums, she had learned that it was better to not say something when she was a target, and felt any pain. She said it resulted in being hit less. So maybe it was rted to that.


    ¡°Uh¡­ Well, I suppose you should rest then. That would feel better, right?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­ Kuuun¡­¡±


    Liza¡¯s past aside¡­I was a little frantic, and not able to think very straight.


    Leo was also a little confused by how sudden it was. And she peered down at Liza and sniffed¡­

 Chapter 832

    Chapter 832


    I had the others look at Liza<hr>


    ¡°So¡­are you sure it¡¯s not because you ate too much?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­I don¡¯t think so. I ate just a short while ago¡­¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true. And it was the same amount as always¡­ Ah, I know! I could make a herb with Weed Cultivation¡­!¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wou-wou!¡±


    I recalled that I had an ability for such times as these. I could make a herb to heal or ease the pain.


    Leo also barked in agreement.


    ¡°Uh¡­ Herb for stomach pain¡­uhh¡­hmm¡­¡±


    However, perhaps because I was so anxious, I had trouble thinking of anything.Besides, I didn¡¯t even know what was causing the pain. So it was possible that a herb would not have any effect.


    I didn¡¯t want to give her something strange¡­ And I was not qualified to be able to tell what was bothering her¡­


    ¡°Mr. Takumi? Excuse me¡­ I heard noises¡­ Is something the matter?¡±


    ¡°Ah, Ms. Lyra! It¡¯s Liza!¡±


    ¡°Wuff! Wuff!¡±


    My shouts and Leo¡¯s barking must have been heard and thought strange. And so Ms. Lyra hade to check up on us.


    ¡°¡­I understand. I shall tell the others then!¡±


    She said as she went to call the others.


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Leo.¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, we¡¯re not the only ones who are worried. The others will be here soon.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ Sorry, mama and papa¡­¡±


    In the meantime, Leo ced her palm gently on Liza¡¯s hand. She really was worried¡­


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Ms. Lyra. Ms Gelda. May I ask you something?¡±


    ¡°Yes, Mr. Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Is Lady Liza alright?¡±


    Shortly after, Ms. Lyra returned with Sebastian and Ms. Gelda.


    ire and Sherry came as well¡­ Tilura was not with them, but I felt a little bad for making theme here thiste.


    Still, it wasforting to have someone reliable as well.


    ¡°What is wrong with her?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ I don¡¯t know. Her stomach suddenly started to hurt.¡±


    Sebastian felt Liza¡¯s head while I stood next to ire.


    As for ire¡¯s question, I really had no idea¡­ It had happened so suddenly.


    ¡°¡­Lady ire, Mr. Takumi. Let us step away for now.¡±


    ¡°Will she be alright, Sebastian?¡±


    ¡°If there is any medicine or herb that would help, please tell me so that I can make it.¡±


    ¡°It is fine. Right now, it just seems like her temperature has risen. It should not be serious. We can leave her with Lyra and Gelda for now. Let us go. I doubt she will need any medicine.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Well, if there was nothing that I could do, then I would just get in the way if I stood around. And so I decided to leave with Sebastian and ire.


    Leo stayed, and still barked with worry¡­


    ¡°So, Sebastian. What is wrong with her? You said you don¡¯t need Mr. Takumi¡¯s herbs.¡±


    ¡°While I have some knowledge, I am not a doctor. But like Sherry, I don¡¯t think it is an actual illness.¡±

 Chapter 833

    Chapter 833


    Liza was growing<hr>


    ¡°While it is only a guess¡­ I asked Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda, and they agree. And so they are checking it now.¡±


    ¡°¡­Ah, do you mean¡­?¡±


    ire understood what he was implying.


    ¡°Sebastian. It is that thing, that means she is growing¡­?¡±


    ¡°We will find out soon enough¡­¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­what?¡±


    What did they mean by that¡­?


    However, judging by the situation and ire¡¯s words, I had an idea.¡°Do you mean, that regr, uh, condition that happens to women?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know if I would put it like that. Not that it is my ce to speak on it. But¡­yes.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­Liza¡­ But even Tilura hasn¡¯t¡­¡±


    Apparently, my guess was right. So it wasn¡¯t just Sherry who was getting older¡­


    While that was a good thing, it was also something that I could not understand, as I was a man. But I had heard about how it affects one mentally.


    Well, there was a lot of pain, after all. Liza had been trying to hide it, as she was afraid that we would not like her.


    Old memoriesbined with anxiety could have put such fears into her head¡­ It was certainly possible.


    Even though it would never happen.


    ¡°Lady ire, Mister Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°Ms. Gelda. How is Liza¡­?¡±


    After some time, the door opened and Ms. Gelda came out.


    ¡°Yes, it is as expected. Ms. Lyra is helping her now.¡±


    ¡°She must be quite startled¡­but she should be fine with Lyra¡¯s help.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I hope you will help too, Ms. Gelda.¡±


    ¡°Of course. Certainly!¡±


    So it was confirmed then.


    Regardless, I was relieved that it was not any serious illness.


    ¡°Well, you must be happy, Mr. Takumi. They do grow up so fast¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Well¡­I suppose. It is good to know. Yes. I am relieved.¡±


    There was a somewhat celebratory mood. But as I was not the person in question, it was hard to know how to react.


    Hmm¡­? Wait a minute¡­


    ¡°¡­I don¡¯t know how old she is exactly, as she was found by Mr. Reyndorf¡­ But it does seem a little soon?¡±


    ¡°Yes, while it is different for each person¡­ It does seem a little early.¡±


    ¡°It might have to do with being a beastkin. Of course, I do not know for sure.¡±


    Well, it was possible that it was not that strange then.


    There was a lot we did not know about beastkin.


    Perhaps we could ask Ms. Delia about it? Well, I could not do it myself. It would have to be ire or Ms. Lyra¡­

 Chapter 834

    Chapter 834


    Things calmed down<hr>


    ¡°I am relieved that it was not a serious illness¡­ I was thinking about what I would do if it was something that could not be healed with herbs¡­¡±


    ¡°But if it is something that you cannot heal with Weed Cultivation, it would have to be an unknown illness.¡±


    ¡°Well, I believe that Mr. Takumi would be the kind of person to find a cure for an unknown illness.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know about that¡­ Surely Weed Cultivation is not that capable.¡±


    When we found Sherry, she was so badly injured that she could die. And while I had been surprised by how effective the herb had been, there were surely limits.


    Though, I have made all kinds of herbs since then¡­ Perhaps I could make something that was original and even more effective? So much that it could heal anything?


    But then again, it might cause me to faint. And Mr. Euto said that using the Gift too much could kill you¡­


    So I really should avoid attempting it if I could¡­¡°Mr. Takumi, you cane in now. Though, I think she should take it easy for some time.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. ire and Sebastian, I¡¯m sorry for calling you at this time.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. We were worried as well.¡±


    After talking with ire and Sebastian in the hallway, Ms. Lyra came out and reassured us.


    And so I thanked the others and returned to the room.


    Liza was resting in the bed, while Leo looked at her worryingly. Ms. Gelda was waiting.


    ¡°Are you alright?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ I feel better now. Sorry, papa and mama.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? There is no need to apologize.¡±


    ¡°Hoho. Just like Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Both Liza and Mr. Takumi apologize too much¡­ I suppose they are alike.¡±


    Unlike before, Liza was able to smile, which showed that she really did feel better.


    ¡°Well, in any case¡­ There is still pain, yes? So you must rest for some time.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s what sister Lyra said. But¡­¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    ¡°You are leaving tomorrow¡­ I want to go too¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­¡±


    She had been looking forward to the trip to Bleiyu vige.


    Even though it was just close to the vige, we would be traveling for around two days¡­ Also, we would be separated for some time after that.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. While she is not ill, she needs rest¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ It is not like you can rest peacefully outside. It would be best to wait and see. After all, her condition might get worse.¡±


    Well, if that happened, I would just cancel the trip entirely¡­


    ¡°Uh, what about dying the trip by a few days? We can contact Ms. Delia and inform her about it.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that would be the best solution.¡±


    ¡°We would all be worried if she got worse and you were not here, Mr. Takumi. And so I agree that you should stay here for now.¡±

 Chapter 835

    Chapter 835


    Worrying too much had the opposite effect<hr>


    ¡°Well, in that case¡­¡±


    ¡°You can¡¯t do that. Papa.¡±


    ¡°¡­Liza?¡±


    I had made up my mind to dy the trip, but just as I was about to say this to Sebastian and the clothes, Liza stopped me.


    I sensed a strong will in her voice, and so I looked at her with surprise.


    ¡°I don¡¯t want to be the reason you can¡¯t do what you want¡­ You helped me a lot, and I¡¯m able to have lots of fun. If I cause more trouble¡­I won¡¯t like myself¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    As she talked, her eyes welled up with tears.While I had been thinking about her¡­ I suppose that could also end up being a burden.


    Now that I think about it, when I caught a cold as a child, my uncle and his wife took time off of work in order to care for me. And I had felt bad.


    As an adult, I realized how much they cared for me, and there was no need to feel bad about it¡­ But in Liza¡¯s case, her past experience probably made her feel even stronger about it.


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Kyafu¡­haha. Thank you, mama.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    As I pondered on those words, Leo pushed her nose towards Liza and licked her face.


    Leo was a lot better at consoling people.


    In any case, it was obvious what I should do.


    ¡°¡­Alright. As you say, Liza. I will go to Bleiyu vige.¡±


    ¡°Yes! I don¡¯t want you to feel bad because of me¡­¡±


    ¡°What are you saying? That would never happen. It¡¯s always the opposite.¡±


    ¡°Really?¡±


    ¡°Yes. But¡­you might be a little lonely for a short while¡­¡±


    ¡°Okay¡­ I will miss you. But it will be worse if you can¡¯t do what you want. So I¡¯ll be fine!¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Thank you. I¡¯ll go ande back as soon as possible!¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    While going to Bleiyu vige was my own personal request. We had now involved other people like Phillips and Ms. Delia. So it would inconvenience a lot of people if we canceled it now.


    And even if it was dyed, we would have to contact them and change the schedule.


    So I thought it would be best to just go. Of course, I would also return a little earlier than nned.


    ¡°In any case, it is decided¡­ I will depart for Bleiyu vige tomorrow.¡±


    ¡°I did not realize how Lady Liza would feel about it. I am sorry.¡±


    ¡°I understand her a little. As the daughter of a duke, any action has wider consequences. So when I was young and got sick, my father and mother would take care of me.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that happens sometimes¡­ But Lady ire, if you know that¡­then why did you go to the forest alone?¡±


    ¡°At that time, I could only think about Tilura¡­ Anyway, we don¡¯t need to talk about that now.¡±


    ¡°But it was because of that, that I was able to meet ire. Ande to the mansion. So I would not me you.¡±


    I could see that Mr. Ekenhart was very protective, and it was little wonder, after losing his wife.


    As for her going to the forest for the Ramogi, Sebastian¡¯s view was understandable, but I could not agree.


    What would have happened had she not gone¡­ Leo and I would have been lost in the forest for several days.


    In any case, back to the subject at hand¡­ There was one other thing to discuss in regards to my trip to Bleiyu vige¡­

 Chapter 836

    Chapter 836


    The traveling would be fine<hr>


    ¡°I will be leaving Leo here. I think Liza will be too lonely if we both leave.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ I¡¯m sure it would be veryforting to her if Leo was with her.¡±


    Well, I would have to persuade Leo to stayter.


    Though, given how worried she looked, I doubted it would take much for her to understand.


    ¡°However, how will you travel, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°¡­Without Leo¡­you will have to go by horse.¡±


    ¡°Perhaps you could ask Tilura if Rahle could carry you¡­¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know about that¡­ Especially with Phillip and Nichs there¡­¡±¡°Hmm¡­ Have you ever ridden on a horse, Mr. Takumi? From what I recall, you have not really had much opportunity sinceing here?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sure I could sit on a horse with a little help¡­ But I don¡¯t know about holding the reins and actually controlling it¡­¡±


    I had never experienced it before, and so suddenly riding one was asking a lot from an amateur.


    ¡°We can use Rahle¡¯s saddle, and attach it to a horse. That way, you can ride behind Phillip or Nichs.¡±


    ¡°That saddle¡­ Yes, that would make things easier.¡±


    ¡°Though, there will be more weight for the horse to carry. So it will not be able to run as fast. It is a good thing you left two days for the journey.¡±


    While it would have probably been possible to go there in one day, I had nned for a two day journey. And so it should be fine.


    I would not be dyed, even without Leo.


    ¡°In that case, everything will work out.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I will have everything prepared before Mr. Takumi¡¯s departure tomorrow morning.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°¡­In that case, it will be difficult to meet halfway. Especially since I have to check up on Liza. Oh, well. I will give up this time.


    ¡°What was that, Lady ire?¡±


    ¡°No, nothing at all¡­¡±


    So ire had not given up going to Bleiyu vige after all¡­ She had not talked about it these past few days. But I suppose it was because she was thinking of a different way to leave the mansion.


    Well, if Leo was here, there was nothing to worry about. And surely she would be safe if she left with Sherry.


    However, I did want her to stay in the house this time. Especially because of Liza. And so I hoped that she would give up.


    Perhaps we could all go out on a trip somewhere next time¡­ If Sebastian allowed it.


    And if we could find a good location.


    If it was a ce that Tilura and Rahle could go, we could all spend more time together, which would be nice¡­


    ¡°Liza. Are you really fine?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­I¡¯m fine. You don¡¯t have to worry about me.¡±


    ¡°But¡­ Well, I¡¯ll do what I can.¡±


    ¡°Wuf..¡±


    After Sebastian promised to take care of everything, and ire returned to her room, I asked Liza again.


    Even though I knew that I was not supposed to worry too much, I could not help it.


    ¡°As this is the first time, there will be a lot that you don¡¯t know. And it is different with everyone. But once you get used to it, it is nothing to worry about.¡±


    ¡°I suppose¡­¡±


    Ms. Lyra said with a smile. But as someone who did not know what it was like, worrying was about all I could do¡­

 Chapter 837

    Chapter 837


    Liza quickly fell asleep<hr>


    After that, Liza smiled and quickly fell asleep.


    Perhaps she had been very tired.


    I smiled, and Leo also sighed with relief.


    ¡°She must have been anxious about a lot of things. But she seems quite calm now. Likely because you were here.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. She is sleeping soundly. Thank you, Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. We were just doing our job. And we are always happy to help.¡±


    ¡°I am d that everything was fine. Now¡­please excuse me.¡±


    As Leo and I would not have been able to do much on our own, I thanked them again, for helping us thiste in the night.Of course, I was also thankful towards Sebastian and ire.


    ¡°We will go now. I am sure that everything will be fine. But just in case¡­ I will wait outside. So please call me if you need anything.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. But¡­surely you will be tired if you wait¡­¡±


    ¡°No, we are supposed to take care of you. So it is nothing.¡±


    ¡°Yes, it will be fine.¡±


    ¡°But still¡­ Hmm¡­¡±


    Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda were about to leave after seeing that Liza had fallen asleep.


    So as to not disturb her, they were going to wait outside. But they wanted to wait, just in case Liza woke up and needed something.


    However, I felt restless about the idea of them being there all night.


    Even if it was expected of them¡­ I was not used to it.


    ¡°¡­Ah, I know. Leo?¡±


    ¡°Wuff?¡±


    ¡°Why don¡¯t you sleep with Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda? That way, they won¡¯t have to be in the hallway, and it will not be cold. Leo is morefortable than any bed.¡±


    ¡°Wou!¡±


    ¡°Oh, we are not worthy of¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, good Leo¡¯s fur is so soft and warm¡­ Oh, no, but we couldn¡¯t¡­¡±


    While it was not an ideal solution, they would be quitefortable if they leaned against Leo and slept.


    It would be better than standing or sitting in a chair.


    When I asked Leo, she nodded happily, but Ms. Gelda and Ms. Lyra were hesitant.


    ¡°Well, just indulge me and Leo, if you will? She would be very happy to¡­ Though, it might be even harder to get up if something does happen¡­¡±


    ¡°No, we will have no problem getting up.¡±


    ¡°Are-are you certain?¡±


    Obviously sleeping in bed would be the best, but they wanted to stay close by. And so they might as well be in the same room.


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Leo would be happy to? As long as you do not mind.¡±


    Leo actually sounded impatient, and she was already lying down and wagging her tail.


    She did like sleeping with people. We had done it often when she was smaller.


    ¡°We do not mind, but¡­ Very well. As long as Leo is fine with it.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    Ms. Lyra finally agreed and bowed to Leo.


    They then sat down and leaned against her, and Leo curled up as if to wrap around them gently.

 Chapter 838

    Chapter 838


    Morning of the departure<hr>


    ¡°Leo is so soft. This is better than a bed of the highest quality.¡±


    ¡°It is true. I understand why Lady Tilura and Liza are always hugging Leo. Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    I heard them whispering happily as I drifted off to sleep.


    With hopes that Liza would be feeling better the next morning.


    ¡ª


    ¡°Papa. Get up, it¡¯s morning!¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Liza¡­?¡±¡°Good morning!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    I woke up to the sensation of being shaken.


    When I opened my eyes, I saw that it was Liza. She seemed well, and Leo barked right behind her. So I was thest to get up then.


    ¡°Good morning you two. And Ms. Lyra and Ms. Gelda.¡±


    ¡°Yes, good morning.¡±


    ¡°Good morning!¡±


    I sat up and greeted the other two who were in the room.


    Usually, I woke up quite early, so this was a little embarrassing.


    ¡°Ooomph. So, how do you feel now?¡±


    ¡°Hmm. Fine¡­ There is a little pain, but I¡¯m fine!¡±


    ¡°I see. Well, take it easy, alright?¡±


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°Lady Liza. I will bring you some breakfast now.¡±


    ¡°No, it¡¯s fine. I want to eat with ire and Tilura and Sherry!¡±


    ¡°Very well. Gelda, go and tell Sebastian.¡±


    ¡°Yes, certainly.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Ms. Gelda and Ms. Lyra.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. It¡¯s best that she be allowed to do what she wants.¡±


    Well, it was not like she couldn¡¯t move. And it would be better if she could be around Sherry and Rahle.


    ¡°Oomph¡­ah¡­¡±


    ¡°Wuff!?¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­ Are you alright?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ I don¡¯t know¡­ I feel weak¡­¡±


    When Liza put her feet on the ground and tried to stand, she swayed a little.


    It seemed like she didn¡¯t know why. Did she feel dizzy?¡±


    ¡°Lady Liza, you must go slow. Mr. Takumi, I will look after her.¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    And then Ms. Lyra took Liza out of the room.


    I suppose she would need to get changed as well. And so I would leave it to Ms. Lyra.


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, you cannot do everything, Leo. But maybe you can carry herter.¡±


    ¡°Wou¡­¡±


    I petted Leo consolingly.


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right. As I discussed with the others yesterday¡­I will be going to Bleiyu vige without you. So you must look after Liza. As she will have to rest for a few days. So make sure that she does not y too much, alright?¡±


    ¡°Wuff. Wuff-wuff. Wou!¡±


    As Leo had good ears, she would have been able to hear us when we were talking¡­ I had seen that her ears twitched at the time.


    And so unsurprisingly, she nodded now and told me to leave everything to her.

 Chapter 839

    Chapter 839


    Everyone saw us off<hr>


    ¡°And if you need anything, just ask Ms. Lyra or Sebastian. Though, I doubt anything will happen so soon.¡±


    ¡°Wuff-wuff.¡±


    I talked to Leo while preparing and checking my things.


    As we had been here for some time now, I doubted that anything would happen to inconvenience her.


    After that, I waited for Ms. Lyra and Liza to return, and then we headed to the garden in order to eat breakfast.


    As Rahle was here, we had all gotten used to eating outside¡­


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Are you ready?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I just have some clothes and my sword. So it was easy¡­ The rest is being prepared for me. I¡¯m grateful for that.¡±¡°Not at all. Though, it will have to be reduced a little, now that Leo is not going. But it should be enough for the trip there. Ms. Delia and Mr. Kanat are prepared to receive you, so you should not have any trouble after arriving.¡±


    ¡°Haha¡­I hope they don¡¯t prepare too much. Or it will look strange.¡±


    After eating breakfast, I grabbed my things. It was time for our departure.


    When I went to the entrance hall, ire and the servants were gathered there to see me off.


    Sebastian made some final inspections to see that everything was packed.


    Without Leo, we would not be able to carry as much food. But it would not be a problem, since it was only for two days.


    ¡°Please be careful, Mr. Takumi. I will pray for your safe return.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Well¡­I have trained a lot with the sword. So I should be fine.¡±


    ¡°You can defeat orcs quite easily. That being said, there is that incident in Range vige. So you must be careful.¡±


    ¡°Also, don¡¯t worry about Liza. We will take good care of her in your absence.¡±


    It was relieving, knowing that ire would also look after her.


    ¡°Alright, Leo. I¡¯m leaving you with Liza now.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°I am here too!¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you, Tilura.¡±


    ¡°Papa, I¡¯ll be good while you are away!¡±


    ¡°Yes. I¡¯lle back as soon as I can.¡±


    ¡°Kuuunnn¡­¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. I won¡¯t get into any trouble this time. So I won¡¯t need your protection.¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    At first, I thought Leo was lonely, but it turned out that she was just worried. After all, I had been injured by orcs once while she was away. So it was understandable.


    Now that I think about it, we hardly ever traveled while separated¡­


    It was just that time when I was in Range vige, and I had Leo deliver something to the mansion


    Still, I was used to being in this world now, and had Phillip and Nichs with me.


    ¡°And Ms. Delia will be there. So nothing will happen to me.¡±


    ¡°Wou. Wuff¡­wuff-wuff!¡±


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s a good idea, mama!¡±


    I petted Leo¡¯s jaw in order to reassure her. And then Leo barked as if she had just thought of something.


    Liza seemed to agree as well. Her idea was that if the fenrirs came while I was gone, she would send them to Bleiyu vige in order to protect me¡­

 Chapter 840

    Chapter 840


    We went to Ractos first<hr>


    ¡°I don¡¯t know about that¡­ It will cause a scene in the vige. I will be fine, Leo. Don¡¯t make them do that, alright?¡±


    ¡°Wuff¡­¡±


    Leo barked with disappointment.


    They were already sensitive about fenrirs, because of Ms. Delia. And so it was not a good idea to send fenrirs over there.


    It was true that I wouldn¡¯t be afraid of orcs or trolls with them around¡­but it would just scare the vigers instead.


    That was no good if my goal was to observe how people in the vige lived normally, without any distractions¡­


    ¡°In any case, I will be careful ande back soon. So you be good, alright? And take care of Liza.¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±¡°Alright then¡­ I am going.¡±


    ¡°Goodbye, Mr. Takumi! We await your safe return!¡±


    ¡°Wuff!¡±


    ¡°Kyau!¡±


    And so I opened the door and went outside.


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting, Phillip.¡±


    ¡°Not at all. After what happenedst night, it is to be expected.¡±


    ¡°Sorry that our ns were changed. In any case¡­before going to Bleiyu vige, we must go to Ractos!¡±


    I climbed onto the saddle, and Phillip held the reins in the front as the horse started to move. And then it trotted slowly away from the house.


    ¡°How does it feel to ride a horse?¡±


    ¡°It kind of hurts¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha! It is very different from Leo.¡±


    ¡°Well, it is not unbearable. So I¡¯ll be fine.¡±


    After we had ridden down the town road for some time, Phillip asked me how I was doing, as it was my first time.


    Your body moved up and down a lot while riding a horse, and sometimes my body would rise off of the saddle ande down hard, which could be painful.


    Furthermore, it was a lot faster than a carriage, so I could feel the wind and pressure¡­ Even with Phillip right in front of me¡­


    But the journey had only just begun. I would have to get used to it quickly if I wanted to survive until the end.


    But by riding on a horse, I now understood how much Leo cared about thefort of her rider while she was running.


    She used magic to reduce the wind resistance, and also ran so there was minimal shaking up and down.


    Though, there was also the fact that Leo had very soft and fluffy fur, which was quite different from a hard horse saddle.


    ¡­Thank you, Leo. I would be very happy if you continue to run in thatfortable manner while carrying me or Liza.


    I thought with gratitude. And like that, I headed towards Ractos while riding on the back of Phillip¡¯s horse.

 Chapter 841

    Chapter 841


    I bought some soul food<hr>


    ¡°Hah¡­what a relief¡­¡±


    ¡°Are you alright?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. We have a long journey ahead of us. You will have to ride on horseback the whole time. Will you be fine?¡±


    ¡°Well¡­ I should survive. I got used to it a little already.¡±


    We had arrived in Ractos, and were walking down the main street in order to buy lunch.


    Nichs and Phillip were worried, but Iughed and reassured them.


    While I did not feel sick from the shaking, the saddle was still difficult to get used to.


    But if it got too bad, I could always take herbs to help with fatigue and muscle soreness.¡°In any case, we should hurry up and eat. It seems like Mr. Takumi knows a good ce.¡±


    ¡°Uh, wouldn¡¯t you two know more about the food here?¡±


    ¡°No, we usually eat at the mansion. So¡­I do not know much about what is good. Besides, things change a lot, due to the amount of traffic here.¡±


    ¡°Ms. Helena¡¯s food is delicious. And her food seems to have be even better after Mr. Takumi¡¯s arrival. So I do not really think about going to Ractos to eat.¡±


    I had heard something about that from Sebastian before. How the servants rarely went to Ractos, even during their days off¡­


    As for me, while it was not that often¡­ I had gone with Mr. Ekenhart, and eaten at various ces. So I knew something. Perhaps more than they did. It was odd, considering that they had lived in this world for so much longer than me.


    ¡°The hamburgers. Those were quite good. And very filling. But because they are simple, you can eat them quickly, which is good for when you are in a rush.¡±


    I had heard that everyone in the mansion had taken a liking to them.


    ¡°Well then¡­ Maybe that thing? I think you will like it if you like hamburgers.¡±


    ¡°Oh, if you think so, then I will have high expectations.¡±


    But if their expectations were too high, I would feel bad if it disappointed them¡­ But it would probably be fine.


    ¡°Ah, there it is. Over there!¡±


    ¡°That¡­ It is bread with something inside? Simr to the hamburgers?¡±


    ¡°Is that¡­pasta?¡±


    ¡°Well, something like that. But this one does not have as much meat inside, so it might be a little disappointing¡­¡±


    The stall I found while walking down the main street¡­ The ce I pointed at was selling pasta sandwiched in bread.


    Phillip and Nichs had not seen it before, and were curious to know what it was.


    I had actually seen it while walking with Ms. Delia the other day, and had marked it.


    Because it looked familiar. And that smell that wafted from the stalls. And on closer inspection, I was right.


    At the time, it had not been the right situation to stop and eat, and so I wanted to try it the next time I came to Ractos.


    Well, that opportunity to eat it had arrived a lot earlier than I expected¡­

 Chapter 842

    Chapter 842


    We ate the pasta bread<hr>


    ¡°Uhh¡­how much will you eat?¡±


    ¡°Well, with that size, I can eat two of them.¡±


    ¡°I suppose that is enough for an adult man.¡±


    ¡°The smell is quite appetizing already. Let¡¯s have them wrapped up, and then we can eat them while we move.¡±


    ¡°At, that is a good idea. You can even eat it while riding¡­ Though, you have to be careful that you don¡¯t drop it.¡±


    While it was hot now, you could still eat it after it cooled down.


    I had eaten the noodles before when I came here with Mr. Ekenhart. And while it was not the same, it was still delicious. As for the bread, it was actually better in this world, so thebination should be good.


    ¡°Three coppers¡­ It is a little expensive. But I suppose it makes sense, since it is unusual..¡±¡°A little luxury then.¡±


    It used a mysterious sauce, and they had to cook everything here, so it made sense.


    ¡°Oh¡­it is quite good.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. There is not much meat inside, but it has a nice smell and is easy to eat.¡±


    After buying the bread, we started to walk again. The two others took a bite and seemed to like it, much to my relief.


    Personally, I wanted some seaweed kes and ginger¡­ But it was still good without it.


    I wanted to p andpliment the cook.


    ¡°Still, those hats with ears really seem to be popr now¡­ Even the men are wearing them¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha. Well, I got used to wearing mine for Liza. But I suppose it is quite odd.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I am starting to be interested in them myself.¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    ¡°What¡­?¡±


    Phillip and I were astonished by Nichs¡¯s deration.


    He had a generally cool and calm appearance. And such a hat would not suit him at all.


    However, in spite of our surprise, he looked like he did not see what the problem was.


    ¡°Well¡­ Everyone has their own taste. Isn¡¯t that right, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Ye-yes¡­¡±


    Phillip and I looked at each other and decided to not pry any further with this subject.


    However, we both seemed to be in agreement that it would be for the best to not take Nichs anywhere near those hats.


    We had our hands full as it was with Mr. Ekenhart.


    ¡°¡­While I am not lowering my guard, it really is different without good Leo around. We do not stick out much at all.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­ Leo is so big. And not human. So she draws a lot of attention.¡±


    The subject then shifted to Leo¡­


    Indeed, when traveling with Leo, practically everyone¡¯s head would turn when we passed by. I was usually not sensitive to such things, but could tell that we were being stared at from nearly every direction.


    Though, we had nowe to Ractos enough times that people rarely looked at her with fear in their eyes, like they did the first time we came here.

 Chapter 843

    Chapter 843


    The guards still stuck out a little<hr>


    ¡°That being said, we still do draw some attention. After all, we are dressed differently from the town guards¡­¡±


    Nichs muttered as he looked around.


    They were both armed and wearing leather armor.


    When walking down the streets, it was rare to see someone carrying a sword.


    ¡°Indeed. The duke¡¯s guards could not be walking around with the same equipment as the town guards.¡±


    ¡°Is that so?¡±


    ¡°The most obvious difference is the quality. They have armor and weapons that are mass produced. And while I am not saying they are of terrible quality, they are still cheap.¡±


    ¡°While those of us who protect the duke or the mansion have custom equipment that fits us. It is very important, as the smallest difference could obstruct our movement.¡±Now that I looked at them, I could see the difference. Also, they were cleaner.


    I suppose they had to look good for nobles as well?


    ¡°Well, they might look at us as travelers that have good equipment¡­¡±


    ¡°I see. Regardless, we do not stick out as much when Leo is around.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Even more so when Lady ire is with us, as well as Sebastian and the maids.¡±


    With fewer people around, it made the job of guarding a lot easier.


    Regardless, we enjoyed the different atmosphere, and talked as we returned to our horses and continued our journey to Bleiyu vige.


    Considering how things are now, we should not have any trouble pretending to be friends once we arrive¡­


    On the way there, I got used to riding quite a bit, and was able to talk to Phillip while on the horse.


    After all, I nearly bit my tongue right after we left the mansion¡­ And had not been able to talk at all.


    ¡°By the way, Phillip.¡±


    ¡°What is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Previously, when you fought the orcs in the fenrir forest¡­ The way you moved. Was that from your training? The way you attacked to slow them down, a little by little.¡±


    ¡°Ah, that. Half is from training. Half is something I figured out on my own, I suppose.¡±


    While riding, watching the scenery could be nice, but there was not a whole lot to see. And so I decided to talk to him.


    I was interested in the way that he fought.


    When we fought in pairs against the orcs, Phillip moved with precision, which was easy to understand. And instead of targeting the orc¡¯s vitals,he hit the legs and ankles.


    Mr. Ekenhart had taught me to end fights quickly, and that it was more effective to target vitals as much as possible. So Phillip¡¯s style had been refreshing.


    Now that I thought about it, fighting while thinking about how to weaken the enemy made sense as well.


    ¡­Though, I suppose it also looked like you were toying with them. So it was not always rmended. But it could be effective when fighting an enemy that was stronger than you.


    Besides, it had been helpful when fighting as a pair.


    ¡°In the end, it is all about experience. As you fight with monsters and continue to train, you will think of different ways to fight. That is all.¡±


    ¡°I see. Yes, if you have used a sword for a long time, you will be able to use it in many different ways.

 Chapter 844

    Chapter 844


    Personal style based on experience<hr>


    Phillip¡¯s style was his answer to all of his experience up until now.


    After thinking about how to win against opponents, and how to fight cooperatively, he decided that weakening orcs was the best way.


    ¡°Of course, that alone won¡¯t mean you will improve with everything¡­ You have to think about how to use that experience. After all, you could not do the same thing against a fenrir.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ It is necessary to change the way you fight depending on the opponent. Fenrirs are very fast, and humans could not keep up if they ran.¡±


    ¡°Well, in most cases, a human could not win against fenrirs if they fought one on one¡­ Still it is important to always think and find the answer for yourself. That is what His Grace taught us.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Mr. Ekenhart did say that. If you fight without thinking, you will not improve much, and your styles will not expand¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, but with you, Mr. Takumi, your potential¡­I think you have the qualities for sess.¡±


    ¡°You do?¡±Phillip said, just as I was thinking about continuing to work hard and train.


    But what did he mean, exactly?


    ¡°You know¡­those fatigue healing herbs? You have those. It raises the efficiency of your training. Even Lady Tilura trains more than some soldiers now. And that will help you gain power.¡±


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s true. We do train quite a lot, now that I think about it. But I just got used to it.¡±


    ¡°Well, being able to continue to train like that is a gift too. Others might wonder if it is necessary. But that kind of repetition is quite effective.¡±


    He was probably just being polite, but even I could boast a little about how much I trained.


    Early on, I would get tired, even when using the herbs. But I have gotten used to it now¡­


    But without the herbs, I would likely not have been able to finish my training every day.


    ¡°Well, if you want to confide in someone about that, you are better off talking to Nichs.¡±


    ¡°Is that so?¡±


    ¡°Yes. To put it simply, a lot of the training that you and Lady Tilura do, was thought of by him.¡±


    ¡°What? Really?¡±


    ¡°If we left it to His Grace, well¡­he does not know restraint¡­ But he understood that. And so he left it to Nichs at first. He likes to think of his own ways to train. Of course, due to the effects of the herbs, your training ended up growing to a ridiculous degree.¡±


    ¡°Ridiculous¡­ It¡¯s true that I wouldn¡¯t be able to do it without the herbs, but¡­ I see¡­¡±


    I had always thought that it was Mr. Ekenhart who chose what we did for our training.


    Well, Mr. Ekenhart had traumatized some of his soldiers in the past¡­so it made sense.


    Though, I assumed he was holding back because of Tilura.


    ¡°But when ites to experience, it is not easy to just go out and fight monsters. So you have no choice but to train. So if you have questions, you should ask Nichs. ¡­Oh, he just gave the signal now. It means it¡¯s time to set up camp.¡±


    ¡°I understand. Thank you. I will try talking with him then. Yes, it has be quite dark now.¡±


    The time had passed quite a bit while we talked. As the sun had fallen, and the sky was dark, Nichs suggested that we stop for the day.


    Perhaps he had found a good spot¡­ There were some trees, but you still had a clear view of the road and surrounding area.


    I thanked Phillip and felt relieved as the horse slowed to a trot.


    While I had been distracted by our conversation, my butt still hurt from all the shaking while the horse was running¡­

 Chapter 845

    Chapter 845


    I helped while learning how to set up camp<hr>


    ¡°I see. The ground is hard aside from this part. And the soft ground here makes it easier to camp.¡±


    We stopped at the ce that Nichs found. The horses were tied to a tree and we prepared our camp site.


    The ground was softer around trees, and it was also easier to find branches to burn.


    We left the horses and the branch gathering to Phillip. Nichs and I pitched the tents.


    That was when I understood how hard it could be if the soil was different. Obviously, it could not be too soft either.


    ¡°Well, now that the tents are pitched, do we make the fire next?¡±


    ¡°Yes. The fire is very important.¡±


    Not just for warmth, but to let others know that we are here.Of course, it could also attract monsters. But as gathering with other travelers was quitemon, it was best to make a fire.


    People probably tend to get lonely when traveling alone¡­


    ¡°So, let¡¯s light it then¡­ Would you do the honors, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Me?¡±


    ¡°Well, it can be anyone.¡±


    Phillip must have realized that I would want to do it, as I had been watching themy down the branches and dead leaves.


    Usually, it was Leo who started the fires, and so I had wanted to try it.


    And so Phillip stood and allowed me to do it. I squatted down and then focused on gathering the magic energy.


    Now that I think about it, I had not been using magic very often¡­ I suppose it was because there was no need for it at the mansion.


    ¡°Fire Elemental Candle¡­¡±


    I made a me on my finger first and brought it to one of the branches.


    After a few seconds, smoke rose and it started to burn. And so I moved my finger away and deactivated the magic¡­ However, the first soon disappeared.


    ¡°Huh¡­?¡±


    ¡°Ah, Mr. Takumi. That method won¡¯t work, you know? The fire is too weak. Well, it might work if the wood was all dried.¡±


    ¡°Is that so? Well, I guess it was quite weak¡­¡±


    Phillip saw that I was struggling and gave me some advice.


    Now that I thought about it, I had once seen somewhere that a mere lighter was often not enough to start a fire like this¡­


    At the very least, I should have kept my finger burning for a little longer.


    ¡°In such cases, one should use Fire Elemental Strong me Burn Up.¡±


    ¡°Oh.¡±


    To demonstrate, Phillip squatted down and changed while holding his hand over the branches.


    In the next instant, mes spread out and enveloped the wood¡­ Indeed, this was strong enough to light it all up at once.


    And while it immediately died down, unlike the first time, the mes spread to the other leaves and branches, and the fire did not disappearpletely.

 Chapter 846

    Chapter 846


    I learned about magic<hr>


    ¡°¡­Like this, you can light it easily.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°Phillip, you always use stronger magic. Was that really necessary?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s best to do it quickly. Well, perhaps I did get a little carried away. As I was doing it as a demonstration.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. I do not think you should copy him. After all, you might end up burning something else.¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­ Well, I don¡¯t think I could do it even if I wanted to¡­¡±


    Sebastian and ire had only taught me the basics, and that was it.


    ¡°I¡¯m sure you know that magic is defined with the chant and then the conversion of energy.¡±¡°Yes. It was exined to me.¡±


    And so Nichs started to talk to me about magic while unpacking our things and preparing for dinner.


    Of course, I helped them as well. We would have some of the leftover pasta bread and hot soup.


    The soup ingredients had been prepared by Ms. Helena in advance, and so we only had to add water and heat it up in a pot.


    ¡°First, you decide the attribute to convert the energy into¡­ Fire, water, etcetera.¡±


    I listened to him and thought about how Sebastian would have looked more happy and excited as he exined.


    As for Phillip, he had no interest in this, and so he adjusted the fire so that it did not disappear.


    ¡°After the conversiones the gesture. But once you know how to move the energy, the gesture can be changed freely. Well, there are limitations. And if you say ¡®strong¡¯ at the end, the fire¡¯s power will increase.¡±


    While there were rules, you had some freedom withbining words¡­ Regardless, that was why more powerful spells tended to be quite long.


    But in battle, one moment of hesitation could be fatal. That was why it was not very effective to use magic like that.


    ¡°But there are times where merelybining words will not activate it. For instance, if the words happen to contradict each other. So if you want altar magic after it was unleashed, then you must add different words.¡±


    ¡°So you have to think about the meaning of the words so that they do not cancel each other out.¡±


    When changing the gesture from one to another as well, it was necessary to add different words¡­


    And the moreplicated it was, the more words you would need, and it would also require more power. And raising the power would also mean using more words¡­


    Furthermore, it also depended on the amount of magic energy that was needed while activating.


    And there was some magic that humans could not even handle.


    Magic was a lot moreplex and difficult than I had realized¡­

 Chapter 847

    Chapter 847


    We talked about portable food<hr>


    The more I knew about the difficulties of magic, the more impressed I was with Mr. Euto¡¯s abilities.


    There was no magic he could use, and the Gift meant he had infinite magic energy.


    My Weed Cultivation certainly felt inferior inparison¡­ But it also seemed like it was more than I could handle, so I was not jealous.


    My ability was very useful. And I had to think of more ways to put it to use.


    ¡°Nichs. You sounded like you were having fun. King of like Mr. Sebastian.¡±


    Phillip said jokingly as we sat around the fire and ate our dinner.


    ¡°Well, it is easy with Mr. Takumi. I do think I understand Mr. Sebastian a little now¡­even though I don¡¯t have nearly as much knowledge as him.¡±


    ¡°Ah, speaking of which¡­ I heard that in most households, they use the candle spell¡­ But it did not work at all when I used it.¡±After all, it was a simple spell that nearly anyone could use.


    At least, that is what Sebastian told me when he first taught me how to use it.


    ¡°Well, people only used it with properly dried out firewood, not branches picked off of the ground. Besides, they generally use a little cloth soaked in oil as well. At least, in less poor houses.¡±


    As the job was always done by Leo or servants whenever we camped out like this¡­ You could say this was a rare opportunity to learn about such things.


    ¡°Still, this soup really is good. And probably healthy, as there are so many things inside.¡±


    ¡°Yes. It is one of the first things I noticed while working at the mansion. Though, we will only be able to eat it on the first day. At least this bread that Mr. Takumi found is good too.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m d that you liked it. I had eaten the pasta before, so thought it might be good.¡±


    The soup was filled with all kinds of vegetables and had been boiled for a long time so that there was almost nothing solid remaining. But it warmed the body and seemed healthy.


    ¡°Before working at the mansion¡­well, while I was training. Most of the food was quite bad¡­¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t make me remember that¡­ But what can you expect from portable food? It¡¯s all about preservation and portability. So it¡¯s rarely delicious.¡±


    Phillip answered with a look of distaste. He must be remembering his harsh training with Mr. Ekenhart.


    When speaking of it to me and Tilura, he had looked like he was on the verge of tears. While I was interested, I did not want to experience it for myself.


    Well, what he said about the food was no surprise.


    They did not have canned food here. So I wonder how they preserved it?


    We had never eaten anything like that when traveling.


    ¡°What is this portable food like?¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ There are different kinds. The mostmon is dried meat. Salted orc meat.¡±


    It sounded like beef jerky. But surely something like that would not be seen as so bad.


    But then again, the beef jerky they sold in stores was covered in various spices.


    So perhaps it would taste quite different.

 Chapter 848

    Chapter 848


    The dried meat here did not sound very good<hr>


    ¡°It is very hard and salty¡­that is all.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that doesn¡¯t sound appetizing¡­¡±


    The hardness could not be helped. But it would need more vor¡­


    With the beef jerky I ate, the more you chewed it, the more you could taste it. So it was quite different.


    ¡°And so we usually turn it into soup. Though, that does not taste great either¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, you boil it to make it softer. But salt alone is so simple.¡±


    ¡°If we have other ingredients, webine them as well. But the results are never that good.¡±


    Apparently, it was almost all they ate if they had to travel long distances where there were no towns or viges nearby.When I hear such things, I am reminded of the post horses. And how if that goes well, they will have less opportunities to eat the dried meat.


    They would be good as checkpoints, but if there were also inns and ces for people to rest, then they would be able to store and sell food as well.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi is thinking about something. Well, I¡¯m sure Mr. Sebastian would be d to hear about it.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Let¡¯s leave him alone then.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­it¡¯s nothing, really. Nothing he would care about. I just got distracted. I better drink the soup before it gets cold.¡±


    I would think about thatter, once I returned to the mansion¡­


    After dinner, we cleaned up and then I practiced my swings with Nichs.


    Our voices and the sounds of the fire echoed. But as it was a muchrger space than the gardens, I found it easier to concentrate.


    Phillip wasn¡¯t with us, as he already went to the tent to sleep.


    Nichs and Philip would take turns. As Leo was not here, I did not have to take a shift.


    ¡°Hah¡­hah¡­ Yes, your swings are a lot sharper, Nichs.¡±


    ¡°Well¡­I¡¯ve been doing it longer. Just stay focused with each swing.¡±


    After doing it for some time, I took a break in order to catch my breath.


    Nichs answered after his final swing. He was hardly out of breath at all¡­ It really was different for him.


    It had been so fast that I could barely see it in this darkness.


    ¡°While I used this sword¡­I also use a katana when I get permission. It is good for swinging.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true. It was really just meant for cutting, after all.¡±


    If you used it in the wrong way, the de would get chipped. That was why the training focused on swinging so much, so you wouldn¡¯t have to block.


    Even though they were both guards, he was quite different from Phillip. His style was more aggressive.


    ¡°By the way, you showed me an example with Mr. Ekenhart, before I started using it. Though, the movements were so fast that I don¡¯t think it was that helpful for me.¡±


    ¡°Well, I am still no match for His Grace. But I constantly strive to improve. And I am sure you will be able to do the same one day, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­I very much doubt I will be able to fight like that¡­¡±

 Chapter 849

    Chapter 849


    I asked Nichs about training<hr>


    Well, there was a part of me that did want to improve to that level. Even though it hardly looked possible.


    I was capable of defeating orcs now. But the way that Nichs and Mr. Ekenhart moved looked like something only special people could do.


    ¡°Not at all. I saw just now that you have already grown tremendously. It shows how much you have trained.¡±


    ¡°As I don¡¯t have a talent for it, I have to train desperately to make up for that¡­¡±


    ¡°Even so. That is not something that just anyone can do. That is a talent in itself.¡±


    Really? In general, I was just following Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s instruction. I had very little opinions of my own on that front.


    I just repeated it diligently¡­ But I suppose they found thatmendable.


    It was something that could only be done with the help of herbs¡­so it was taxing on my body.¡°That amount¡­ Even with your herbs, it would be difficult to continue it.¡±


    ¡°Well, Tilura does the same training?¡±


    ¡°Lady Tilura¡¯s is slightly less harsh. But she also sees you as an example.¡±


    ¡°By the way, Phillip told me that you were the one who decided what we did for training?¡±


    ¡°Oh, you heard that? Yes, I did. His Grace gave me that honor.¡±


    ¡°When I first started learning, it seemed like Mr. Ekenhart was deciding on the spot. So I didn¡¯t realize that it was you¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, that is when it was decided. Don¡¯t you remember that I was talking to him before your training?¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­perhaps¡­¡±


    ¡°Yes. And while he was teaching you, I was sending him signals.¡±


    I had no idea¡­


    Indeed, I remember going out into the garden, feeling quite nervous, and seeing Nichs drinking tea at the table.


    ¡°I see¡­ So that is what Phillip was talking about. Well, I now know how harsh Mr. Ekenhart¡¯s training is. And so I am d that it was you instead.¡±


    ¡°Hmm. Not necessarily. While Phillip and the others always say that they do not want to remember their training, I thought it was quite satisfying. In any case, I don¡¯t think there is as big a difference as you might think. I did wonder if it was too harsh, but then I saw you making the herbs, and decided that it would be fine. And it looks like I was right.¡±


    ¡°Oh¡­is that so¡­¡±


    Apparently, it was not that different from their early training.


    Even though the actual contents would be quite different, as they were training to guard people.


    As for the fact that it was not Mr. Ekenhart who decided¡­


    I probably should not tell Tilura. Especially when you consider the fact that my herbs were part of the reason it was so hard.


    And in the end, Nichs had seen that I was able to do it, and how the herbs made it efficient. He assured me now that as long as I continued, I would be able to move like him.


    Would I really be able to? I could not help but wonder as I continued my swings once again.


    When I was finished, I wiped off the sweat and was about to go to the tent, when Nichs said something to me¡­

 Chapter 850

    Chapter 850


    We packed up and departed<hr>


    ¡°I think that in simple skill with the sword, you are already above Phillip. I¡¯m sure the experience fighting monsters and being in danger had something to do with it. Though, if you both went all out, I think that Phillip would still win.¡±


    ¡°Surely you exaggerate¡­ I am still not able to move like him at all.¡±


    ¡°There is no need to be able to move in the same way. You just need to do what suits you best. Though, Phillip is dexterous and can use other kinds of weapons as well. So, who knows where you will both be in the future¡­¡±


    Though I felt like he was going too far, it did feel like he was acknowledging that I had improved. And so I had to try not to smile too broadly as I entered the tent.


    Phillip had rolled out of his sleeping bag and wasying in the middle with his arms spread out. And so I had to roll him over to the corner so I could get in my own sleeping bag¡­


    The next morning, I woke up quietly, so as not to wake up Nichs, and slipped out of the tent.


    ¡°Good morning, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Good morning, Phillip.¡±He greeted me as he sat in front of the fire.


    ¡°There really is nothing to do when you are on watch duty here. Even though I¡¯m used to that¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s best if nothing happens. Still, it must be boring¡­¡±


    ¡°One does not get used to boredom. Ah, please use this hot water. I thought you would be up soon, and so I prepared it. It should not be too hot.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    I thanked him and quickly washed up¡­ Which was just shaving and washing my face. I did wish I could take a bath, though.


    ¡°Well, I will go and wake up Nichs, and then we can sleep.¡±


    ¡°Haha. He was up until you were able to trade ces. So please be gentle with him.¡±


    ¡°That depends on his willingness to get up. Speaking of which¡­I feel like I woke up in a different spot this morning¡­¡±


    ¡°Are you sure? Well, maybe you rolled over in your sleep?¡±


    ¡°Hmm. I suppose.¡±


    After that, we had breakfast together, and I helped them clean up.


    We ate some of Ms. Helena¡¯s soup that was left over.


    The taste was a little thin, as we had to dilute it with water. But that is what happens when you travel.


    ¡°Well, shall we go then?¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    Like yesterday, I rode behind Phillip on his horse.


    We were scheduled to arrive tomorrow, so that meant we could camp out one more night. But I had gotten a little used to riding, and should be fine.


    Just like with Range vige, the road stopped halfway there.


    We traveled to the east from Ractos and then went down south towards the forest.


    ¡°Hmm¡­.¡±


    ¡°Is something the matter, Phillip?¡±


    We asionally took breaks while traveling to Bleiyu vige. It was then that Phillip murmured while thinking about something.


    ¡°I was just wondering why there are so few monsters.¡±


    ¡°Well, isn¡¯t that a good thing? Besides, this isn¡¯t like the path to Range vige¡­¡±


    ¡°That is true. But there should be some monsters. Either ones that strayed from the forest, or ones that live in the fields.¡±


    Now that I thought about it, the monsters I encountered were always from the forest.


    But it would not be strange if there were monsters hiding in the grass here as well. Even though there were supposed to be soldiers patrolling these parts asionally¡­

 Chapter 851

    Chapter 851


    A guard¡¯s instincts<hr>


    ¡°I don¡¯t really know about the regrity of monster encounters¡­¡±


    ¡°I have never been to Bleiyu vige before, so I cannot say for certain. But I think we should have seen one, at least¡­ Especially since this can barely be called a road.¡±


    The ground had a beaten path, but it did not seem like it was used that regrly.


    There was grass growing, which suggested that it had been some time before a wagon or carriage passed through.


    ¡°As this is our first trip, we are taking the most obvious route. But I don¡¯t think people from Bleiyu vige would usually pass through here.¡±


    ¡°Ah, so that is why¡­¡±


    After leaving Ractos, we had gone down the east road and then turned to the south partway. But if you want to go the fastest way, it would have been better to travel diagonally, southeast.


    That was likely the way that the vigers went.¡°If there is less traffic, then there should be more monsters. As I¡¯m sure the patrolling soldiers do note here often..¡±


    ¡°Could it just be a coincidence that there are no monsters?¡±


    ¡°Of course, it is possible¡­but¡­¡±


    ¡°Is there something that is bothering you?¡±


    ¡°I do not know how to say it¡­ But during our training, we learn about the traces that monsters leave. It¡¯s easier to deal with them if you find them quickly.¡±


    As they were guarding the duke, it made sense that they would be wary of monsters as well. Even if they usually did note in contact with them, the danger would be there when traveling.


    ¡°And thanks to that training, I tend to be able to sense their presence. Well, it is not very clear. And so I cannot be sure.¡±


    ¡°And so your senses are telling you that there is a monster?¡±


    ¡°Something like that. Or perhaps one was here¡­¡±


    ¡°If that is the case, then it must have left because of some reason¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, it would mean that.¡±


    In any case, if we could travel in peace, that was a good thing. So while it was strange, it did make things easier for us¡­


    After that, as we let the horses rest, Nichs and Phillip continued to talk about how odd it was.


    I suppose it was just something that guards felt.


    I didn¡¯t know anything about monster traces¡­


    ¡°The ground is a lot softer around here.¡±


    ¡°That made things easier.¡±


    The sun had started to set, and so we decided to stop and set up camp before it got too dark.


    Unlikest time, there were more nts growing here, so the ground was softer. But even then, it was hard for me to hit the stakes for the tent, as I was not used to it.


    ¡°There are not many trees here, which means less branches¡­ It is a good thing we brought some wood with us.¡±


    ¡°Well, we will reach the vige tomorrow. Perhaps they will share some with us for the return trip.¡±


    ¡°Yes. The food will be poor if we don¡¯t have a fire¡­¡±


    Yesterday, there had been several trees nearby, but this time, there was only one. And not many dead leaves either.


    ¡°Now¡­ How about putting into practice what Nichs said yesterday, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Huh? Me?¡±


    ¡°I think it will do you good. Knowing how to start a fire properly.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ Very well.¡±


    Phillip brought the remaining firewood along with some branches and leaves, and then he told me to light them up.


    I had wanted to test it¡­ But I had not realized it would be so soon¡­

 Chapter 852

    Chapter 852


    I tried using new magic<hr>


    ¡°You¡¯re starting to act like His Grace now, Phillip.¡±


    ¡°He will understand it better if he tries it for himself. It is not that dangerous. And if he fails, then we can do it for him.¡±


    Indeed, I might need to do it one day. And I liked the idea of using new magic. Alright¡­I will do it.


    ¡°Uh¡­ me Burn Up?¡±


    ¡°Yes. You don¡¯t need to add Strong, like Phillip did yesterday. That will be too much.¡±


    ¡°Alright¡­ Put your hand over it and gather the magic energy¡­¡±


    I concentrated the energy in my body so that it went to my hand. And then I directed my right palm over the firewood and leaves. And then I released the energy while imagining the mes.


    ¡°¡­Fire Elemental me Burn Up!¡±I felt the energy be converted as I chanted.


    At the same time, the burning magic blew out from my hand.


    ¡°¡­Huh? It seems quite different from what I saw yesterday?¡±


    ¡°Hmm. Indeed. Perhaps you gathered too much magic. Sometimes, the force of it can change.¡±


    ¡°Still, it is also decided by the chant, so it shouldn¡¯t be too different¡­ Well, at least it is burning, so it is a sess.¡±


    After that Nichs and Phillip showed me how to do it by burning different branches.


    I see. I had gathered energy at full power. That was the reason¡­ You had to restrain yourself and adjust it a little.


    In any case, I had not burned anything else, so it was a sess. Still¡­magic was hard.


    ¡°Oomph! Yes, I did it. I¡¯m quite confident about this one.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Though, you only fried it¡­¡±


    ¡°At least you had good ingredients¡­¡±


    ¡°Stopining. Or I won¡¯t let you eat it, Nichs.¡±


    ¡°¡­I didn¡¯t say anything.¡±


    After that, Phillip used a frying pan to cook over the fire.


    It was mostly just vegetables that we had brought, which had been randomly chopped up. We then chatted lightly and ate dinner.


    The taste was not bad, but it was nothing special if you had eaten Ms. Helena¡¯s food.


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right. Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? What is it, Phillip?¡±


    ¡°We will be arriving at the vige tomorrow¡­ Well, it is only a few hours away now.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s true.¡±


    As we had meant to take two days on this trip without Leo, we would be right on schedule.


    Things had gone smoothly because we did not encounter any monsters. Also, I had gotten used to riding quite quickly.


    ¡°Previously, we decided to act as friends in the vige, so people would not be suspicious¡­ But I think that as we are¡­we do not seem like friends.¡±


    ¡°Phillip, perhaps there are friends who are like this?¡±


    ¡°Nichs, you have few friends, so your opinion is not wanted.¡±


    ¡°Tsk¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    Like Nichs, I had thought that we looked rxed enough and seemed like we were friends¡­


    However, though Phillip¡¯s sharp words were directed at Nichs, I somehow felt the sting as well¡­

 Chapter 853

    Chapter 853


    I decided to talk more casually<hr>


    Perhaps it was because Nichs had a serious manner that was different from the others. And so it was harder for people to approach or befriend him. As for me¡­


    Well, I would not think about the past now. I did not want to trouble my uncle, and so I moved out as soon as possible and worked hard. After that, I had Leo, so there was little time to make friends.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know why Mr. Takumi is getting hit too, but¡­ In any case, it¡¯s not just me. Mr. Takumi is also talking quite politely.¡±


    ¡°Well, I try to be polite to everyone.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s why you have so few friends, Nichs. I think people see it as you putting up walls.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    He seemed quite shocked by this. Well, I suppose it was true.


    In any case, the problem was how the vigers would see us.After all, it wasn¡¯t like we were going to go around and dere to everyone that we were friends. That would look more suspicious.


    ¡°So I think it would be more natural if we didn¡¯t talk so politely when we are inside of the vige.¡±


    ¡°¡­I see. I understand Nichs¡¯s way of thinking¡­but it would look strange.¡±


    I agreed with Phillip, and decided that I would talk more casually from now on.


    ¡°So that¡¯s how it is¡­ Hmm¡­ This is going to take some getting used to¡­¡±


    ¡°It doesn¡¯t have to be all of us. If just one person, like Nichs, is different, then it will be fine. It¡¯s just that it would look strange if all three of us were too polite.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s true. Very well, Nichs¡­you stay as you are. I and Phillip will change instead.¡±


    ¡°Yes, yes. That¡¯s good. I will be careful from now on.


    Of course, as we had been talking like this for a long time, it would probably sound strange. However, we would hopefully get used to it before we arrived in the vige.


    After that, we cleaned up, and I continued to talk casually while training until it was time to sleep.


    ¡°There really aren¡¯t any monsters around here now. Even though there were before.¡±


    ¡°Did you find traces?¡±


    ¡°Look¡­ I was bored, so I looked around a little¡­.¡±


    ¡°Yes, it does look like a monster passed through here.¡±


    The next morning, we talked while getting ready for the morning. Philip started to talk about monsters again.


    He gestured for us toe. And then he pointed to an area where the grass had been bent, and something had been dragged through it.


    The dragging lines curved towards the east direction¡­


    ¡°But it stops right here¡­¡±


    ¡°That is very strange. If it was a monster, the traces shouldn¡¯t just stop¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmmm¡­¡±


    It was clearly not a human or horse. Perhaps someone had dragged something through here. But the lines should be thicker.


    Also, why did it stop close to where we were?


    ¡°Besides, what kind of monster would make lines like this?¡±


    ¡°There are several¡­ Like serpents. They like to hide in the grass and target their prey. They have sharp fangs that are filled with poison, which makes them very dangerous. As for their size¡­around from here to there.¡±


    ¡°Poison, huh¡­¡±


    ording to Nichs, they were about five meters long. Though, the part that concerned me was the poison.


    ¡°Well, that won¡¯t be a problem. Because Mr. Takumi is here. And we can treat any bites with herbs.¡±


    ¡°But I don¡¯t know what herbs are effective for serpent poison¡­¡±


    ¡°Just make the same herb used for the Cockatrice petrification. Mr. Sebastian told you, didn¡¯t he? You just need to drink it.¡±


    ¡°Ah, that one¡­ It should be fine then.¡±

 Chapter 854

    Chapter 854


    We would be fine against poison if we stayed together<hr>


    While Phillips was relying on Weed Cultivation, I could not make what I did not know.


    Well, I could sometimes make things while imagining the effect, but that was not guaranteed.


    However, I was then told by Nichs that I just needed to make the same herb that was used for Cockatrices.


    ¡°However, it should be fine, as there are three of us now. It¡¯s more dangerous when you are alone. Because your body will start to be paralyzed.¡±


    ¡°That is horrifying¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, we should still be cautious. Thankfully, there do not seem to be any right now. Though, I am curious about where it went.¡±


    ¡°Yes. There is no point in worrying about that. Let¡¯s hurry up and eat breakfast so that we can leave.¡±


    Both Phillip and Nichs were sure that it was not close by. But I couldn¡¯t help but wonder if it was hiding somewhere. But I suppose it was too big to hide that easily.As we cooked, Nichs then exined it to me.


    Apparently, the serpents were able to camouge themselves. However, their eyes and mouth stayed the same color.


    And the mouth and eyes were red.


    ¡°This is better than dried meat, but not very tasty¡­¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯tin. ¡­That being said, it is harder when you are used to the food at Ractos or back at the mansion.¡±


    For breakfast, we made something with flour and water. As well as some boiled vegetables with salt and other spices.


    ¡°Nevermind the taste, as long as we are full. Now, we should go. Are you ready, Nichs?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I have packed everything.¡±


    ¡°And I put out the fire.¡±


    ¡°Alright, then get onto the horse and¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­mi¡­sa¡­¡±


    ¡°Hmm?¡±


    Just as we were about to leave, I thought I heard a voice.


    ¡°Did you hear anything just now?¡±


    ¡°It sounded like it was quite far away¡­¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s hard to imagine anyone out here. But I did hear something.¡±


    So the others had heard it as well.


    We all looked at each other and then looked around. But there was no one else in sight¡­


    ¡°Ta¡­mi¡­¡±


    ¡°Why do I feel like it¡¯s calling me¡­?¡±


    ¡°It sounds like a woman¡¯s voice. And it must be calling for Mr. Takumi.¡±


    I was not so tired that I would be hearing things¡­ However, it seemed like Nichs had better ears than me or Phillip.


    He was able to tell that it was a woman. Perhaps he will be able to hear even more if he ate some sense enhancing herbs?


    ¡°Taku¡­ma¡­!¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Takumi. Nichs, over there!¡±


    ¡°There is¡­someone?¡±


    ¡°She is running? And calling Mr. Takumi.¡±


    As I was thinking about the herbs, the voice became even more clear. And then Phillip pointed in the direction of Bleiyu vige.

 Chapter 855

    Chapter 855


    She saw the smoke from the fire<hr>


    ¡°Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°Ah, that voice¡­ Ms. Delia?¡±


    ¡°Ah, the beastkindy. I could not tell from this distance¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, it is a woman. And considering she ising from the vige, it must be her.¡±


    However, she seemed to be running very close to the ground, which seemed odd for a human.


    Wait¡­was she running on all fours?


    ¡°Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°Ah, it really is Ms. Delia. What is she doing out here? Hey!¡±¡°I wonder as well. And that speed¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, beastkin are much faster than humans.¡±


    ¡°Perhaps we could run faster if we ran like her?¡±


    ¡°¡­That¡¯s a bad idea. I doubt you could do it even if you tried.¡±


    Now that I was sure that it was her, I called out and waved my arms. And then Ms. Delia seemed to run even faster.


    At this point, it seemed like the same speed as a horse. I suppose it had something to do with how strong beastkin are.


    ¡°I came to gree¡­hmmph! Woah¡­you!¡±


    Ms. Delia was running so fast that she was not able to stop, and ended up passing us.


    However, she quickly stopped and then used her tail to bnce herself so that she did not fall. And then she turned around and raised her arm.


    ¡°You knew that we would pass through here?¡±


    ¡°No¡­ As I knew you woulde, I was going around the vige. I only realized it was from this direction because of the smoke yesterday.¡±


    ¡°Smoke¡­ But wouldn¡¯t it have been during the night?¡±


    ¡°Yes. It was already dark when we made the fire. I don¡¯t think you would have been able to see the smoke at night¡­¡±


    While we had told her when we were going, we did not tell her what route we would take. And we had not gone by the usual path.


    As for her seeing the smoke at night, perhaps her ears were an exnation? They were cat-like, so maybe she could see well in the dark.


    ¡°Um¡­what are you holding? Or to be more urate, dragging¡­¡±


    There was something unfamiliar in her left hand.


    It was not moving, but it was several meters long. And she had been dragging while running.


    ¡°Ah, this thing? I caught it beforeing here. It¡¯s a serpent!¡±


    Ms. Delia looked rather proud as she thrust out her left hand, and pointed the serpent¡¯s face towards us.


    Well, it looked dead¡­ However, as she had thrust it out suddenly, the tail whipped out and nearly hit me.


    ¡°Serpent¡­ Phillip?¡±


    ¡°Well, while it could be dangerous to hunt it alone, it is not impossible. However, there is no weapon sh on it at all. That is surprising.¡±


    ¡°It is definitely a serpent¡­ Normally, you would kill it with a weapon to avoid being bitten¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, but it is much faster to give its neck a little squeeze?¡±

 Chapter 856

    Chapter 856


    Ms. Delia wanted to be praised<hr>


    ¡°As I knew you would being, I wanted to clear the area of monsters! Though, I¡¯m sure it would not be a problem with Leo. Speaking of Leo¡­ Where is she?¡±


    ¡°Well, due to certain reasons, she is staying home. I actually was going toe with her partway.¡±


    ¡°¡­So that is why we didn¡¯t see any monsters here.¡±


    ¡°The mystery is solved then. It was Ms. Delia¡­ I suppose she is used to dealing with monsters. I would like to train with herter.¡±


    While she said it so casually, it would have been quite dangerous. And yet she still did it voluntarily.


    I was grateful, but worried¡­


    ¡°Even without Leo, you really didn¡¯t need to do all of that.¡±


    ¡°No, it was no trouble at all. I was able to get a nice jog around the vige. Besides, I¡¯m sure the others will be happy when they see this serpent.¡±¡°Is it used for something?¡±


    ¡°The old men like to put it in liquor. Apparently, it adds a nice sting to your tongue. But I don¡¯t like the stuff, and never drink it¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    ¡°Uhh?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. Just do it.¡±


    ¡°We won¡¯t watch, if that¡¯s what you are worrying about.¡±


    Ms. Delia was looking at me with expectant eyes. Clearly she wanted to be praised. It kind of reminded me of Leo.


    ¡°Uh.. Well done. Ms. Delia. Good, good¡­¡±


    With no other choice, I reached out and patted her on the head.


    ¡°Woof. Kuun¡­ Ah, excuse me! I just remembered when you did that to me thest time¡­¡±


    ¡°No¡­as long as you are happy¡­¡±


    Ms. Delia had sounded just like a dog¡­ Though, she had been like a cat when she caught the thief.


    ¡°In any case, let us go to Bleiyu vige!¡±


    ¡°Yes. Uh, do you want to ride with us, Ms. Delia?¡±


    ¡°Not at all. Sometimes, I do ride on horses, to pretend like I am human. But I usually prefer to run. I ran by myself to Ractos before as well. Of course, I walked normally when on the main road.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­well¡­I see¡­¡±


    Regardless, we then packed our things on the horses and continued our journey to Bleiyu vige.


    But Ms. Delia intended to run again. And she crouched low and got ready to run.


    Well, judging from what I had seen earlier, she was capable of running at the same speed as a horse. So perhaps it was better for her.


    Maybe she was like Leo, and enjoyed running around.


    Still, the fact that she could run like that, and also catch a serpent as if it was nothing¡­ It really was amazing.


    Perhaps if she ran without any restrictions, she could run even faster than a horse.


    ¡°By the way, Mr. Takumi. Compared to when west met in Ractos¡­ You seem to be acting a little different with these men¡­?¡±

 Chapter 857

    Chapter 857


    Ms. Delia learned the reason<hr>


    We were at the point where Bleiyu vige woulde into view soon. And so we decided to let the horses rest.


    I decided to take the opportunity to exin to Ms. Delia what was going on with me and the others.


    ¡°We decided to change the way we talk on the way here¡­ Because we want toe off like we¡¯re old friends. After all, wouldn¡¯t it look more natural?¡±


    ¡°I see¡­ The message did say that you wanted to hide your connections with Leo and the duke. It was very surprising¡­¡±


    ¡°That way, the vigers should be able to act more casually around me. After all, I want to see how they normally live.¡±


    ¡°Indeed¡­ They would be very nervous if they knew that you were rted to the duke. Yes, I think it is a good idea.¡±


    I still didn¡¯t know how well I would be able to fit in. But I wanted to stick out as little as possible. Ms. Delia nodded with satisfaction.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know how things are in Ractos, but Bleiyu is a very small vige¡­ So it is rare for anyone important to visit it.¡±¡°Haha. I suppose so. And so I think you should talk to me in a more casual way as well, Ms. Delia. ¡±


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right. So it will not look strange. Though, I must say that I¡¯m a little disappointed that I could not see Leo and Liza again.¡±


    ¡°Since I want you to be her teacher, I feel the same way¡­ But she could note this time. But she is being looked after at the house.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ Well, I suppose it is that time then.¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    ¡°Well, I don¡¯t know any other beastkin, so I cannot be sure¡­ But it was like that with me when I was younger. We grow a little faster than humans. Apparently, it is because we are a hunting tribe.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    I did not even know if humans were the same in this world as they were in my old one. Even though most looked simr.


    In any case, I had heard about the beastkin being hunters. It was survival of the fittest for them.


    Even someone like Ms. Delia was stronger and more athletic than many humans in their prime.


    ¡°But I was raised in a human vige. So there is a lot that I don¡¯t know¡­ But I did seem to grow faster than the other children. So I suppose it was the same for Liza.¡±


    ¡°Well¡­uh¡­yes. I think so.¡±


    ¡°I see. I did wonder about that. Regardless, yes, it was good that you did not bring her with you then.¡±


    Ms. Delia looked satisfied that she had been right.


    Though, I was surprised that she would talk about it so straightforwardly.


    Well, it¡¯s not that I thought she should be embarrassed or anything.


    Besides, she was also a beastkin¡­


    And at the end of the day, the important thing was that she was growing and that she was healthy¡­

 Chapter 858

    Chapter 858


    Even close viges were different<hr>


    ¡°The vige had a little celebration at that time. I suppose you might do something for Liza as well.¡±


    ¡°Oh? You did? Everyone?¡±


    ¡°Yes. The elders were especially happy.¡±


    ¡°I see. But was it because you are rted to fenrirs¡­ And are a beastkin?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t think so. But then again, the vigers will use the smallest excuse to celebrate, because it means they can drink.¡±


    ¡°Uh, uhuh¡­¡±


    I wondered if it was like that in Range vige as well. But I didn¡¯t really feelfortable asking.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi¡­ The horses are rested up now. We should continue on to the vige.¡±¡°Very well¡­ Oh, remember that you can¡¯t talk to me too politely.¡±


    ¡°I will be careful.¡±


    ¡°We are really close now. This is thest stop!¡±


    And so I climbed back onto the horse. As usual, behind Phillip¡­


    ¡°Hmm? That smoke¡­¡±


    ¡°It is white, so at least a house is not burning down¡­.¡±


    As we made our way to Bleiyu vige, I saw a cluster of buildings in the distance.


    We were almost there¡­ As I thought this, I noticed that smoke was rising into the air.


    I turned to Ms. Delia, but she was running on all fours at a great speed. And so I could not talk to her yet.


    ¡°Yes, here we are. I hope you aren¡¯t too tired!¡±


    ¡°Haha. I would be more worried about you, Ms. Delia. I was just riding.¡±


    And so we arrived at the entrance to the vige.


    While Ms. Delia was panting a little, she did not really look that tired. It was impressive.


    The entrance to the vige was very simple. There was just a wooden fence that surrounded the buildings. And one path that extended from the entrance.


    I could see that there was a za near the center.


    That was probably where they had gatherings and feasts, just like in Range vige.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ There might be more buildings here than in Range vige?¡±


    ¡°As it is close to the forest, the fence is also a little higher.¡±


    ¡°Phillip, Nichs¡­ You seem to be noticing a lot¡­¡±


    ¡°It is part of our training. We always observe a new town or vige when we arrive. After all, we might need to escape.¡±


    ¡°You can say we are always thinking aboutbat. It is hammered into you when bing a guard.¡±


    Now that I thought about it, Phillip had said something simr when I first went to Range vige¡­


    ¡°So¡­Ms. Delia. What is that smoke over there?¡±


    I had not seen smoke like that sinceing to this world.


    It felt like there was too much smoke for it to be for cooking.


    ¡°Ah, the old men are smoking some meat. They sometimes do it with orc meat in order to preserve it. It is quite delicious.¡±


    ¡°Smoked meat¡­ Ah, of course.¡±


    ¡°Oh! That is much better than dried meat!¡±


    Phillip reacted quite happily to Ms. Delia¡¯s exnation.

 Chapter 859

    Chapter 859


    I reunited with Mr. Kanat<hr>


    ¡°Phillip likes to have it while drinking. As it is more tasty than normal dried meat, it is quite popr as a portable food.¡±


    ¡°It is still hard though. We don¡¯t have much salt in the vige, so it¡¯s easier to smoke it. But as it is marinated in different ingredients first, there is a little more vor than just being salty.¡±


    ¡°Ah, I see.¡±


    As thesends were not close to the sea, it was difficult for viges like this one to obtain salt.


    Unlike Range vige, which mainly made wine, this vige made all kinds of things.


    Yes, this was what I had wanted to see. It was a good thing that I chose this vige.


    ¡°Oh, someone came out?¡±


    ¡°Hey, Delia!¡±¡°That is Mr. Kanat. I told him everything already, so he understands, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    As we were talking about smoked meat, I saw a mane out of one of the buildings in the back.


    He turned towards us and then called Ms. Delia. Indeed¡­it was a familiar voice.


    ¡°Ah, just wait right here. I will go ahead!¡±


    ¡°Uh, Ms. Delia?¡±


    ¡°I wonder what it is?¡±


    ¡°It sounded like she will be back soon¡­ What should we do with the horses?¡±


    Ms. Delia looked like she suddenly remembered something, and told me to wait as she rushed into the vige.


    In the meantime, I gently petted the horse that had carried me here.


    ¡°Animals do seem to like you, Takumi. It¡¯s rare to see a horse looking this pleased.¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­I don¡¯t think it¡¯s anything special¡­ Uh, I suppose I have practice with petting Leo.


    ¡°Yes, perhaps there is a special method that animals like.¡±


    Phillip said as he looked at me with suspicion.


    Well, even if Silver Fenrirs were special beings, it wasn¡¯t like you needed some kind of ability to pet them¡­


    ¡°Sorry to keep you waiting! Now, Mr. Kanat!¡±


    ¡°Uh, yes. Mr. Takumi¡­ Uh, I will call you simply Takumi from now on. Is that alright?¡±¡±


    ¡°Yes, Mr. Kanat.¡±


    ¡°I told him how to talk to you from now on!¡±


    A short whileter, Ms. Delia returned with Mr. Kanat.


    She looked rather pleased with herself now, and wagging her tail expectantly.


    ¡°Well, Takumi. You better praise her.¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­good¡­good¡­?¡±


    ¡°Wuff.¡±


    ¡°Delia seems to be fond of you. Well, I suppose it¡¯s no surprise, considering who you are with¡­¡±


    Mr. Kanat seemed to be talking about Leo or the duke.


    ¡°Sorry to interrupt this, Delia. But that thing you are holding. Don¡¯t you need to deliver it to someone?¡±


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right! Yes¡­ Mr. Takumi. I will see youter. Mr. Kanat will be your guide. You better do it properly, Mr. Kanat!¡±


    ¡°I know. Now, run along now.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll be back soon!¡±

 Chapter 860

    Chapter 860


    We were taken to the ce where we would be staying<hr>


    After being reminded, Ms. Delia finally remembered that she was holding a serpent in her hands. And she ran off in order to deliver it to the old men of the vige.


    ¡°Hah, how rowdy¡­ I¡¯m sorry, Mr¡­ Takumi.¡±


    ¡°No, not at all. It¡¯s nice to see her like this.¡±


    ¡°She is adored by everyone in the vige. She cheers everyone up.¡±


    ¡°I can imagine that.¡±


    It was not a bad thing to be a little rowdy. It was much louder in the mansion. Especially after Rahle and the Cockatrices arrived.


    ¡°Still, it is quite impressive.¡±


    ¡°What is?¡±¡°That Delia wanted to be patted like that. She tends to not like having her ears touched.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    I was starting to wonder if Nichs was right, and Leo had taught me the right way to pet her¡­


    ¡°Oh, we shouldn¡¯t be standing around and talking here. Yes, you should take the horses to the stables. They will be looked after.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°In any case¡­ Normally, a guest would stay with the chief, but it so happens that there is an empty house right now. So you will stay there. We don¡¯t have an inn, but it is kept clean so that we can receive people at any time.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    And so Mr. Kanat guided us through the vige.


    First, we left the horses at the stables. At first, they said they would take care of them for us, but as we felt bad, it was decided that Nichs would visit them a few times a day and take care of them.


    As for where we would be staying, an important guest would likely stay in the spacious house of the chief. But as we were to be treated like ordinary travelers, we would stay in an empty house instead.


    Aside from that, we would be able to buy ingredients to cook with.


    I was happy that they weren¡¯t putting too much effort into weing us, and would leave us alone most of the time.


    ¡°At first, Delia wanted you to stay with her¡­ But it would look odd, since she lives alone. Even if you might want it that way, Takumi.¡±


    ¡°No, no. Not at all..¡±


    ¡°Well, I suppose you have someone else? In any case, we don¡¯t want any strange rumors to spread. So you will stay in the house.¡±


    ¡°Regarding that¡­ I heard that someone found Ms. Delia when she was a child. I thought that she would be living with them.¡±


    ¡°Ah, the old woodsman. Yes, he did look after her, and they lived together¡­but he died a few years ago. He was old, after all. And he had no wife or children. But everyone helps each other here, and she is able to live alone.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    Somehow, I was reminded of Liza¡¯s situation. Though, unlike Liza, she had the other vigers here. And it seemed like she lived happily and had everything she needed.


    ¡°In any case, please use this house freely. You can sleep upstairs and eat downstairs.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    The house that Mr. Kanat led us to had two floors.


    It was carefully maintained, and there was no dirt anywhere¡­ Or perhaps it had been cleaned by Ms. Delia and Mr. Kanat when they heard of our visit.


    There was a kitchen on the first floor, and a table where we could eat.


    There were five small rooms on the second floor, which had simple single size beds and chairs.

 Chapter 861

    Chapter 861


    Ms. Delia brought us some food<hr>


    ¡°Sorry that it¡¯s not too spacious. This is not a proper inn.¡±


    ¡°No, it¡¯s more than enough.¡±


    ¡°We¡¯re just thankful to have a roof over our heads.¡±


    ¡°It is no problem. We are used to camping outside.¡±


    Even if it was small, it was much better than camping out in the wild. Phillip and Nichs also agreed with me.


    ¡°Also, feel free to use the vige¡¯s firewood. There¡¯s enough for a few days behind the house. You can get water from the well.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    As the vige was close to the forest, there was enough wood for anyone to use freely.And since the water was from a well, you had to fill up a pitcher and use it. I had never done that before, so I was looking forward to it.


    ¡°In any case, while I would like to look around the town¡­ I suppose we should prepare our rooms first?¡±


    ¡°Yes. And some lunch as well.¡±


    ¡°Then I will go get some water.¡±


    ¡°I will tell the others that there are guests here, so please make yourselves at home.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. In that case¡­I will organize my things.¡±


    ¡°Ah, leave the remaining ingredients in the kitchen. There is not much, so we should use it for lunch.¡±


    And so we all went to prepare for our stay.


    Nichs went to get the water. Phillip got the firewood to cook lunch, and I carried our belongings to the rooms.


    ¡°There¡­ Phew. That¡¯s all.¡±


    I ended up with the room between Nichs and Phillip.


    Apparently, this was because they wanted to be able to guard me if anything happened. I highly doubted we would get attacked in this vige. But I obeyed them anyway.


    After putting our belongings in each room, I ced the tent and other things in the remaining room, and then I was finished.


    I had left our water and ingredients in the kitchen, so Phillip should be using it.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi! Oh¡­excuse me!¡±


    ¡°Ah, Ms. Delia. Wee¡­?¡±


    As there were sheets, I made the beds of each room before going back downstairs and sitting at the dining table. As I watched Phillip cook, Ms. Delia returned.


    ¡°Here¡­ Please eat this!¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­is that meat?¡±


    ¡°Yes. When I gave them the serpent, they gave me some smoked meat in return. And I also brought some konjac.¡±


    ¡°Oh, smoked meat! This tastes good if you grill it a little first! Well, this one might be a little different¡­¡±


    Phillip was quite excited when he saw it. The meat was a littlerger than a fist, and bound with string simr to ham.


    ¡°The old men eat it like that as well. When they are drinking, anyway¡­ But it is delicious!¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Ms. Delia.¡±


    ¡°Hmm, it is rather hard. I suppose we should cut it into thin slices. I have high hopes for this one¡­ Hmm, we should have bought some wine in Ractos.¡±


    ¡°Phillip, shouldn¡¯t you thank Ms. Delia first?¡±


    ¡°Oh, that¡¯s right.¡±


    Phillip thanked her and then took the ham back to the kitchen.


    ¡°Oh, should I bring some wine as well?¡±


    ¡°No, not today. Phillip might want to drink¡­but we are tired from traveling. And they might drink too much.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Sebastian said that we shouldn¡¯t let him drink too much. After all, he has a habit of doing that¡­¡±


    Nichs agreed with me.


    Yes, it was not because I did not want to drink wine that had a serpent in it. That had nothing to do with it at all¡­

 Chapter 862

    Chapter 862


    The smoked meat was delicious<hr>


    ¡°More importantly, you should eat with us, Ms. Delia. After all, it would be easier than going home and preparing it now, wouldn¡¯t it?¡±


    ¡°Uh, are you sure?¡±


    ¡°Of course. It is more enjoyable to eat with others. And you brought us some food. So this is our way of thanking you. Though, I am not sure if the other food will be as good as the smoked meat¡­¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Then I ept your invitation¡­¡±


    Ms. Delia lived alone, and since she hade out to greet us, she probably hadn¡¯t prepared any food yet.


    Besides, I knew what it was like to live alone. Sometimes, I could barely even taste the food.


    Things were more fun after Leo arrived¡­ Though, she would also sometimes target my food, and it was hard to resist the urge to give it to her.


    ¡°Ohh¡­ This is even better than the smoked meat I ate before.¡±¡°Yes, it is delicious. However, I don¡¯t know about just tossing slices into fried vegetables like this¡­¡±


    As the food was ready, we all sat down to eat. After one bite, Phillip was praising the smoked meat.


    Nichs was being a little harsh. But I was also expecting to eat at least some of it separately.


    Phillip¡¯s whole style of cooking seemed to be to mix everything and fry them together and hope for the best. I suppose a lot of men were like that.


    ¡°Who cares, as long as it tastes good. Just look at Ms. Delia. She is notining like you.¡±


    ¡°¡­W-h-what?¡±


    ¡°¡­It¡¯s nothing. Please continue to eat.¡±


    Ms. Delia looked at him with a mouth full of food, and Phillip¡¯s ears turned a little red.


    Nichs and I smiled at each other and then focused on eating.


    I suppose he was happy to see Ms. Delia eating like that¡­


    ¡°It really is good. Perhaps wrapping it around the vegetables would also be great.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s a good idea, Takumi. Unlike Nichs, you can really appreciate the taste.¡±


    ¡°I wasn¡¯t saying anything¡­ I just thought it could be improved a little. But I¡¯ll be careful in the future¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­Ah, this taste¡­ Is this made of orc meat?¡±


    ¡°You noticed? Yes, it is usually made with orc meat around these parts.¡±


    There was a wood-like aroma that made it hard to tell. But the taste was a little familiar. And when I asked Ms. Delia, it turned out that I was right.


    Orc meat was like pork¡­it was no wonder I was thinking of ham.


    Even if it tasted different.


    ¡°Is that because there are a lot of orcs around here?¡±


    ¡°Hmm, not really. They do note near the vige, so you only see them deep in the forest.¡±


    ¡°And yet you use the meat a lot. Ah, you must buy it from Ractos then.¡±


    Nichs was curious about the orc meat.


    Orcs were monsters that could be defeated by people with a moderate amount of training.


    ¡°No, we hunt the orcs in the forest. After all, it is much cheaper and faster than going out to buy it.¡±


    ¡°¡­That¡¯s true¡­ So the vigers go hunting?¡±


    ¡°Recently, I have been doing most of the hunting¡­ But the woodcutters also hunt them while they are working.¡±


    ¡°You, Ms. Delia? And the vigers¡­ Isn¡¯t it dangerous?¡±


    It was certainly cheaper to acquire the meat here, but¡­ Hmm¡­

 Chapter 863

    Chapter 863


    The vige was more independent than expected<hr>


    Bleiyu vige was only a littlerger than Range vige.


    And the patrolling soldiers were not here all of the time, so they had to defeat orcs themselves in order to acquire meat. And that was one of Ms. Delia¡¯s jobs.


    ¡°Well, the vigers do get injured sometimes. But they say it is not much different than cutting down trees. That work leads to injuries too, you know. Of course, it¡¯s usually just scratches.¡±


    I suppose that if they were careful, a few armed vigers could hunt an orc or two without much problem. Even in Range vige, they did say that they worked together to deal with monsters when they appeared.


    And wood cutters would have axes.


    ¡°I see. But Ms. Delia. It sounds like you go and hunt orcs alone?¡±


    ¡°Yes, alone. It¡¯s easy, because orcs have such simple movements. Serpents are a little less predictable inparison. If you lower your guard, they can wrap around you¡­ I¡¯ve been bitten by them several times¡­¡±


    ¡°Well¡­as long as you are safe¡­¡±I had fought orcs myself, and knew that they tended to just charge in a straight line and swing their arms.


    Still, I had been injured while fighting two of them¡­ And Sherry had been knocked out of the air.


    But then again, Ms. Delia likely had better reflexes. She was very cat-like.


    ¡°Well, now that we have assigned our roles, we should go and visit the chief.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I¡¯m sorry. Usually, the chief would visit you¡­¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. We are just ordinary travelers, after all. It would be strange for us to be treated like special guests.¡±


    After a good lunch, we cleaned up and went outside in order to visit the chief.


    Apparently, he had hurt his back and could not leave the house.


    ording to Ms. Delia, he had tried to pick up something that was too heavy. Sheined that he should think about his age more often.


    ¡°Oh, you are with Delia. I was just about to go to the house.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Kanat.¡±


    ¡°You¡¯rete.¡±


    ¡°I thought you told the others, Delia. but since you hadn¡¯t, I had to spread the word to the other vigers.¡±


    ¡°Ah, I forgot¡­ I got some smoked meat, and rushed to give it to Mr. Takumi and the others.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s what I thought. Don¡¯t worry, I told the others for you.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s nothing. So, where are you going now? Are you giving them a tour?¡±


    ¡°To the chief¡¯s house.¡±


    ¡°Ah, I see. I told him earlier that the guests had arrived. But he seems to be better now, and might appreciate having someone to talk to.¡±


    ¡°Is the chief bored?¡±


    ¡°Yes. He practically asked me to send someone else there when I left. I suppose it¡¯s because he can¡¯t move.¡±


    ¡°What a pig.¡±


    ¡°¡­Pig?¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­¡±


    It was something I was not used to hearing, and so I had to confirm it.


    Ms. Delia¡¯s eyes and mouth widened as if she had made a mistake¡­ Unlike in Ractos, she was more expressive here, as she was familiar with the ce.

 Chapter 864

    Chapter 864


    We visited the chief¡¯s house<hr>


    ¡°Hahaha! Delia made that mistake a long time ago. However, she¡¯s continued to call him Mr. Pig ever since. Though, recently she has been too embarrassed to say it out loud¡­ I suppose she had lowered her guard?¡±


    ¡°Hey, Mr. Kanat! Stop! Don¡¯t say that in front of Mr. Takumi! Arghhh¡­¡±


    ¡°Uh, Ms. Delia. I think it¡¯s a cute mistake. So please don¡¯t be too embarrassed¡­¡±


    Ms. Delia was so overtaken by her mistake, that she covered her face and squatted on the ground.


    Her tail drooped and her ears were folded. She looked terribly depressed.


    And so I had to pat her on the head encouragingly for some time¡­


    ¡°Excuse me. Chief, I brought you some guests!¡±


    After Ms. Delia had recovered, we continued on to the chief¡¯s house, and called to him, as he appeared to be resting in his room.His house was slightlyrger than Mr. Hanes¡¯s house, and seemed to have a lot of rooms.


    His wife and son, as well as the son¡¯s wife, were also there, and we greeted them.


    ¡°Oh, Delia. I see that you are doing well. As for the guests, wee to Bleiyu vige.¡±


    ¡°Ah, chief. You don¡¯t have to get up. You have to rest easy, don¡¯t you?¡±


    ¡°Still, it is rude to greet guests while lying down.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. We know what happened. Please do not worry about us.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry you have to see me like this¡­¡±


    The chiefy in his bed, and only his head moved as he greeted us.


    He appeared to be slightly younger than Mr. Hanes, but looked quite weak. Well, Mr. Hanes traveled a lot, and was probably just more healthy.


    The chief¡¯s name was Yanesafka.


    ¡°Well, we will be waiting outside then.¡±


    After introductions were made, Phillip and Nichs went outside to meet up with Mr. Kanat.


    Ms. Delia went with them, and also asked for some tea to be brought up.


    As for me, I stayed in the room in order to talk to the chief a little longer.


    ¡°Thank you for entertaining an old man¡­ Ouch¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, please don¡¯t sit up¡­!¡±


    ¡°No, even if you¡­Takumi, say you do not mind. I do not feelfortable talking to you like this. Now, will you lend me a hand?¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­¡±


    The chief had tried to get up after Ms. Delia left, but his face contorted with pain. It was clear that moving was not easy for him, but he would not listen to my protests.


    And so I slowly helped him to sit up.


    ¡°Now¡­Takumi. Did youe here because of Delia? I heard you two met in Ractos.¡±


    ¡°Uh, no¡­ I would not say that¡­ Though, that is where we met.¡±


    I answered the chief honestly.


    I could not tell him everything about my purpose, but I said what I could without lying. Sebastian and I had discussed this in advance.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ I don¡¯t think you are lying. But you aren¡¯t telling me the whole truth, are you?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­¡±


    ¡°I can tell. But Delia seems to be fond of you, so you can¡¯t be a bad person. Besides, I am the chief here, and have met enough visitors to be a good judge of character. Though¡­I am thinking of letting my son and his wife take over soon.¡±


    The chief was looking at me sharply, as if trying to read me.


    It reminded me of the first time I met Mr. Ekenhart. Though, the chief was not quite as intimidating.


    Perhaps his bad back was the reason.


    In any case, as Ms. Delia was happy to see us, he seemed to have a mostly positive impression of me, at the very least¡­

 Chapter 865

    Chapter 865


    The chief was rather sharp-witted<hr>


    ¡°In that case, the other two guests¡­ They did not seem like ordinary travelers of merchants when entering the room. They were looking around guardedly.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s¡­¡±


    ¡°And you too, Takumi. The way you carry yourself is a little different¡­ I get the impression that you know how to fight as well.¡±


    Indeed, I had fought orcs¡­ But had I changed so much that he could detect it like that? Perhaps the training had changed me in ways that I did not realize yet.


    I did gain muscle, which might have improved my posture.


    ¡°You said earlier that you were here to thank Delia and gain knowledge. But is that really it?¡±


    What I had discussed with Sebastian.


    There was the excuse of thanking Delia for catching the thief and helping me. As well as wanting to travel around and see different viges.I had met Phillip and Nichs on the way, and we became friends. The part of wanting to learn more was true, though.


    Now that Ms. Delia was gone, the chief was using the chance to find out more about me¡­


    ¡°It is as I said. Well¡­mostly. I do want to learn and experience more, and that is why I am here.¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ And?¡±


    ¡°I ate the konjac in Ractos.¡±


    ¡°You did? Ah, Kanat did go to sell it. Apparently, he was able to sell all that he took with him.¡±


    ire had bought almost all of it. But Ractos was quite receptive to unusual things, so it probably would have sold fine even if she didn¡¯t.


    Also, Ms. Delia would have eaten some of it too.


    ¡°Yes. I saw that he was selling it, and so I ate some as well.¡±


    ¡°Hmmm. Still, it is not exactly something that is delicious.¡±


    ¡°True¡­ But it is quite good whenbined with other foods. The women like it quite a lot.¡±


    ¡°Did they? But I heard that it was the duke¡¯s daughter who bought a lot of Kanat¡¯s stock?¡±


    Oh¡­ So he had already told the chief about that.


    Well, it was no surprise.


    ¡°Uh, I just got what was left. And so we don¡¯t have enough¡­¡±


    ¡°Not enough¡­? Is it that much in demand then¡­ Is it popr in Ractos?


    The other thing that Sebastian and I had decided that I should talk about.


    The possibility of regrly buying more of the konjac.


    Well, it had been ire¡¯s request.


    Of course, I was not really a merchant, nor was it my job to stock up the pantries. So it was mostly just a cover to make my visit seem more natural.


    As for what would happen if I did buy a lot of the konjac, I would then have to take it back with me and then sell it to the mansion.


    Sebastian had promised to purchase whatever I brought back, and since ire and the others were expectant, it was probably safe for me to buy as much as possible.


    ¡°¡­So I think it will sell well with women. And once its reputation spreads, more people will want to buy it. As I think it is very promising, I thought that I shoulde here myself, and see how it is made.¡±

 Chapter 866

    Chapter 866


    I seeded in changing the subject<hr>


    ¡°I see¡­ I never thought about konjac like that before. However¡­I hope you don¡¯t think that we¡¯re really going to show you everything in terms of how it is made?¡±


    ¡°That is fine. It is not that I want to know how you make it. As I am thinking about buying it anyway.¡±


    ¡°Hmmm¡­ Well, it seems like you will be staying here for some time. So tomorrow or the day after, I will tell someone to negotiate with you.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    For the vige, if there was a possibility that their products could sell well, they would be highly interested¡­ Or so Sebastian said. Bleiyu vige was not poor, but they would still wee any business that would enrich their lives.


    Regardless, it seemed like I was able to avoid talking about myself. Ms. Delia had thought about exining things to the chief first. But in the end, it was decided that we should talk one on one.


    Well, I would have to talk to a lot more people, when managing the herb fields. And so this was good practice for me in terms of setting the pace and guiding the conversation.


    Obviously, I didn¡¯t mean to fool others for my own gain. Most of what I said was Sebastian¡¯s idea. And so I could not boast¡­¡°Hmm¡­¡±


    ¡°¡­¡±


    There was silence for some time, and I had to wait nervously, wondering if he really believed me or not. Perhaps I should have just told him the truth.


    I really was not suited for this kind of thing.


    ¡°I¡¯m back, Mr. Takumi. Chief. Here is the tea¡­ Ah! You must rest!¡±


    ¡°Oh, Ms. Delia.¡±


    ¡°Delia¡­ Thank you. I just thought it would be rude to be lying down the whole time¡­¡±


    ¡°But Mr. Takumi just said that he didn¡¯t mind? Now, please lie down¡­¡±


    ¡°Mm¡­thank you, Delia. You are so kind¡­¡±


    The chief had been gritting his teeth. So he was likely actually in pain. And so he obeyed and allowed Ms. Delia to help him lie down in the bed again.


    ¡°Oh, chief. You tter me!¡±


    ¡°Agh! Hey, Delia¡­stop! Ahh!¡±


    ¡°Ah, Ms. Delia. I don¡¯t think you should move him so¡­!¡±


    Perhaps due to being embarrassed, Ms. Delia started to shake the chief violently.


    The sudden movement caused the pain in his back to increase, and the chief let out a shriek, and I had to intervene so that she would stop.


    As Ms. Delia¡¯s ears and tail were moving, it was clear that she was happy. But perhaps making her happy was not a very good thing.


    ¡°Hah¡­ Finally things have settled down.


    ¡°¡­I¡¯m sorry.¡±


    ¡°Well, please be careful in the future¡­¡±


    After calming down, Ms. Delia helped the chief sit up so that he could drink some tea.


    Still, the fact that he continued to talk to her in a soft voice showed how genuine his affection for her was.


    I suppose she was like a grandchild to him.


    Now that I thought about it, the son and his wife had said that he would be happy to see Ms. Delia, and would recover more quickly¡­


    Well, she certainly did not help with his recovery, but he did seem more cheerful around her¡­


    The Novel will be updated first on this website. Come back and


    continue reading tomorrow, everyone!

 Chapter 867

    Chapter 867


    I was surrounded by the old people of the vige<hr>


    ¡°Well, we will be staying here for some time. So I look forward to seeing more of the vige.¡±


    ¡°Mmm. There is not much to see, but please enjoy your stay. Delia, please look after them.¡±


    ¡°Yes. I will show them around!¡±


    We drank tea and chatted for a little longer. And then it was time to take my leave.


    ¡°Perhaps I really am getting old. I did feel something special¡­ But I don¡¯t know. I really should let my son take over¡­¡±


    The chief muttered just as I was leaving, but I pretended that I didn¡¯t hear.


    It was likely not about me anyway¡­


    ¡°Ah, thank you.¡±¡°It¡¯s fine. Don¡¯t be modest. It¡¯s rare to have young people like you visit this vige.¡±


    After leaving the chief¡¯s house, we met up with Phillip, Nichs and Mr. Kanat. And then, as if they had been waiting, the old men and women came out and surrounded us in the center of the vige.


    One of the old men handed me a basket full of produce.


    Aside from a well, there was a long table and chairs in the za, and people used it to rest and talk.


    ¡°People are talking about how Delia brought a young man. She is that age, after all¡­¡±


    ¡°Hey, grandmother, don¡¯t say such strange things. It¡¯s just a rumor¡­ Mr. Kanat already told everyone about Mr. Takumi¡­¡±


    ¡°Haha. I just came here to thank Ms. Delia for helping me in Ractos. Also, I wanted to visit this vige¡­¡±


    As there was little excitement here, news of our arrival had already spread.


    Well, most of the talk was about me and Ms. Delia¡­


    ¡°Normally, it¡¯s just merchants whoe through here. Also people who buy wood.¡±


    ¡°Since theye regrly, they are well-known here. And most are on the older side. So we don¡¯t get people like you.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    ¡°Oh, on close inspection, you are not bad looking.¡±


    ¡°What are you saying? Are you trying to scare him away, old woman?¡±


    ¡°How rude! Fifty years ago, I was so beautiful that Mr. Takumi would have fallen for me in an instant!¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ve known you for a long time, but I don¡¯t remember you being like that ever?¡±


    ¡°Perhaps it was because you were too busy crying after being turned down by every woman you approached!¡±


    ¡°Ahaha¡­well¡­¡±


    The old men and women started talking about something else, and my mind started to wander.


    No, no. I should focus when talking to others. This was a bad habit.


    In any case, fifty years¡­ I suppose she would be about the same age as me now.


    Though, I was not born at that time, and would not be in this world.


    Regardless, I chuckled as the old friends argued.


    The others watched as if this kind of thing happened all of the time.


    ¡°Hah¡­ I¡¯m a little tired.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. I am usually not surrounded by so many people.¡±


    ¡°Me too¡­ People always surround Leo, not me.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, I didn¡¯t think that they would alle out like this. I think all the elders of the vige are here.¡±


    By the time that the sun started to set, we finally escaped the group of old folks, and we were able to return to our house and rest.

 Chapter 868

    Chapter 868


    I didn¡¯t want to drink the serpent wine<hr>


    ¡°Well, at least they gave us a lot of food. Perhaps a little too much.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. I was thinking about buying some from them, but there is no need for that now. As for the amount¡­we are three men, so we should be able to finish it.¡±


    ¡°It is all food that is grown here. Let¡¯s take it with gratitude.¡±


    ¡°Old people really like feeding youngsters. They often give me food as well.¡±


    Aside from the farm produce, Ms. Delia also brought blocks of orc meat as well.


    There was so much that it looked like we would not have to worry about food during our stay.


    ¡°While the food is nice. I am not so sure about the wine¡­¡±


    ¡°You really should have just epted it¡­ Though, the appearance was a little intimidating.¡±¡°Phillip just really likes to drink. I would have hesitated as well.¡±


    ¡°Ms. Delia. Do they really enjoy drinking that stuff?¡±


    ¡°Yes. I was scared when I first saw it as well¡­ In fact, I burst into tears when I was a child. But I got used to it now.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that would make children cry. I would not want to show it to Tilura or Liza.¡±


    There was also konjac and smoked meat. However, some of the old men asked us if we liked to drink, and then they brought some bottles.


    They appeared to be wine¡­which had chopped up serpent pieces inside.


    I had heard that such things were done to preserve them, but I had never heard of it being done with wine¡­ It looked like a serpent in blood.


    There were some bottles that had a whole serpent inside, and its eyes were open.


    Apparently, the poison sacs were washed out first, so that after a few days in the wine, they gave your tongue a pleasant tingle.


    Regardless, I did not feel like drinking it. Only Phillip seemed like he wanted to taste it.


    ¡°Um¡­ Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°What is it, Ms. Delia?¡±


    As I was thinking about the serpent wine, Ms. Delia suddenly looked at me hesitantly.


    Was something wrong?


    ¡°Um, if it is not too much trouble. Could I join you for dinner?¡±


    ¡°Ah, we don¡¯t mind at all. It is better to eat with more people.¡±


    ¡°Yes, yes. It will be nice to have a woman around.¡±


    ¡°Th-thank you!¡±


    Ms. Delia wanted to eat with us, just as we had during lunch time.


    I suppose she was lonely, as she usually ate alone in her house¡­ Well, I¡¯m sure she could eat with the other vigers sometimes.


    Regardless, her face lit up and she smiled with a bow when we gave our permission.


    After that, we started preparations for dinner.


    It was my job to get the water, which I wanted to finish before the sun setpletely. It took a lot of energy, but I will do my best¡­


    ¡°Hah¡­ I ate a lot. Ms. Delia, is a very good cook¡­ I suppose it¡¯s because she has to cook for herself. She is so different from me.¡±


    After eating dinner, I returned to my room and muttered to myself.


    Ms. Delia had helped Nichs with the cooking.


    When I lived alone, I did not have enough time to cook. So she was much better than me. Nichs was very serious, and carefully measured all of the ingredients, but she worked quickly and measured by sight alone. But the results were still delicious.


    That was proof that she was used to cooking.

 Chapter 869

    Chapter 869


    The wine ended up being drunk<hr>


    ¡°Ah, Phillip, Nichs¡­ There you are¡­ Hey, Phillip, are you drinking¡­?¡±


    ¡°Oh, Takumi. Want to drink with us?¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­ I¡¯m sorry, Mr. Takumi. Apparently, one of the old men gave it to him while I wasn¡¯t looking.¡±


    I hade downstairs in order to get some hot water and wipe myself clean. That was when I saw Phillip drinking, and Nichs sighing.


    He was holding a cup of red liquid. And I could tell it was wine from the smell.


    ¡°This is quite delicious. There is a tingling sensation, not just on your tongue, but your throat as well!¡±


    ¡°Does that mean it is the¡­¡±


    ¡°I tasted it too, just in case. And it does seem to be the serpent venom.¡±¡°Are you sure you want to drink that?¡±


    ¡°It definitely is weakened. Besides, the venom does not evenst half a day, so it should be safe.¡±


    Even if the wine diluted it, going out of your way to drink poison¡­ Well, I suppose people enjoyed the feel of it. But I did not feel like doing the same.


    Still, it was definitely interesting how the poison was affected by the alcohol.


    What if the alcohol was also affected? Maybe you didn¡¯t get as drunk, or there was no hangover?


    Well, the vigers seemed healthy, so I doubted there were any negative side-effects.


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right. Phillip¡­will likely not be able to talk properly, so I will just say it to you, Nichs.¡±


    ¡°Yes, he is useless. So, what is it?¡±


    ¡°What! I can be useful, even when drunk! I am still young!¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s about the chief we met today. I think we better be careful.¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Are you saying that he is up to no good?¡±


    ¡°Ah, it¡¯s nothing like that. It¡¯s just¡­I suppose a difference in life experience¡­ He is a little suspicious. He thinks I am not telling the truth about why we are here. I told him it was because of the konjac¡­¡±


    ¡°Considering your purpose, it¡¯s best that they do not know. Very well, we will be more careful. I will tell Phillip tomorrow when he is sober.¡±


    ¡°Thank you. Now¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, Takumi! Let¡¯s drink together!¡±


    As I was about to leave in order to boil some water, I heard a voice call me from behind. But I ignored it and left the room.


    If I let him, I would be dragged into it.


    He was not drinking like he did in Range vige, and Nichs was there. So I didn¡¯t have to worry about him.


    Ah, that¡¯s right¡­


    ¡°Nichs. Give these herbs to Phillip if necessary.¡±


    ¡°These¡­Karabi. Did you make them for this?¡±


    ¡°Well, while I was waiting for the water to boil. I¡¯m used to making them. Now, I know it probably won¡¯t be necessary, but just in case.¡±


    Karabi was the name of the herb that healed serpent poison. It was yellow and looked a little like wasabi.


    Of course, I had transformed its state before handing it to Nichs.


    In this paste-like state, it could also heal petrification. When drunk, it heals the serpent poison.


    I had heard that wasabi had some light disinfecting effects, so they must be quite simr¡­

 Chapter 870

    Chapter 870


    I went to see the fields first<hr>


    ¡°Thank you. He looks fine¡­ But he¡¯s starting to eat the serpent chunks as well. So I was getting worried.¡±


    ¡°Haha. I don¡¯t need to see any of that.¡±


    I suppose it tasted like wine. Was it good?


    ¡°Well, I¡¯m going back to my room before he tries to drag me into this. Good night, Nichs.¡±


    ¡°Yes, good night¡­¡±


    And so I quickly took my hot water back to my room.


    ¡°In any case, if he drinks too much that it affects our activities tomorrow, or if he causes trouble in the vige, I will have to tell Sebastian.¡±


    I decided while using the hot water and a towel to clean my body.¡ª


    The following day, Ms. Delia joined us for breakfast, and she gave us a tour of the vige¡­ That being said, there was nothing particrly unusual. But it gave us a good grasp of theyout.


    The ce really was just a littlerger than Range vige. So there was little worry of getting lost.


    ¡°And here is the field where everyone works!¡±


    After seeing the vige, we went to the fields, which stretched from the east to the north of the vige.


    Many of the vigers worked here during the day, and so we went to say hello.


    As for Phillip, he was perfectly fine the next morning. And so the herbs were not needed. Still, he decided toe with us, as he wanted to say thank you for the wine. Also, it was his duty as a guard.


    ¡°Even from a distance, I can see that there are a lot of different crops.¡±


    ¡°Yes. We have things that everyone eats, and things to sell.¡±


    Instead of growing just one type, the fields were separated so that they could grow a variety of crops.


    There were tall nts and short nts.


    ¡°Is that the potato field?¡±


    ¡°Yes. We make a lot of potatoes just for eating. The ones for the konjac don¡¯t take up as much space.¡±


    ¡°Huh, I see.¡±


    ¡°You knew that it was made of potatoes, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Uh, yes¡­¡±


    ¡°Most people can¡¯t tell due to their appearance. That is very impressive, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    Now that I thought about it, we had not actually talked about what it was made of¡­ Well, I might have discussed it with Ms. Helena, but not with Ms. Delia.


    Though, it wasmon knowledge where I was from, so it was strange for her to be impressed by it.


    ¡°Uhaha¡­ In any case, why is the field so small?¡±


    ¡°Because not much of it is sent out of the vige¡­ It was Mr. Kanat who first started taking them to Ractos.¡±


    ¡°So it was made to eat here in the vige. That¡¯s why the others around me did not know of it either.¡±


    Ms. Helena knew, but not ire.


    Regardless, the konjac field was much smaller than the others.


    ¡°Oh, Delia. So these are the visitors who came yesterday.¡±


    ¡°Yes. Mr. Takumi and Mr. Nichs!¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m Takumi. Uh, we will be staying here for a short while.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m Nichs. We wanted to get a look¡­¡±

 Chapter 871

    Chapter 871


    I talked to the people who worked in the field<hr>


    As I talked with Ms. Delia and watched the fields close up, one man who was carrying a basket called out to Ms. Delia.


    He appeared to be in his thirties. And so Ms. Delia introduced us to him.


    ¡°I see, I see. When I returned to the vige yesterday, they said you had already returned to the house, so I could not see you. Still, why are you showing them the fields, Delia?¡±


    ¡°Because they said that they wanted to see it.¡±


    ¡°Huh¡­ Indeed. But there really is nothing interesting here. You people sure are strange.¡±


    ¡°Hey, that is rude to our guests!¡±


    ¡°Haha¡­¡±


    Even if it was not very interesting for people in this world, it was interesting for me.In the ce I used to live, there were no fields that stretched out as far as they did here.


    After that, we went around to the other fields, and talked with the other vigers.


    Apparently, it was rare for outsiders toe here and watch the fields¡­


    Besides, Ms. Delia was with us, and so people were eager to talk.


    I noticed how they smiled andughed when they saw her. And it was clear how she was well loved in the vige.


    ¡°¡­Well, we received a lot of food again. Even though it wasn¡¯t why we came out here¡­¡±


    ¡°They were just happy to see some new people. Especially since you took an interest in their work. They must be very pleased.¡±


    ¡°I received a lot too. Even though I was just tagging along¡­¡±


    By the time we were finished seeing the fields, Nichs, Ms. Delia and I had our arms filled with vegetables.


    We still had stuff left from yesterday, and I was worried if we would be able to eat all of it¡­


    ¡°Delia, are these the young men who are interested in the fields?¡±


    ¡°Ah, Mr. Peter.¡±


    As we carried the food and made our way back to the house, an old man called out to us while sitting on a chair.


    He had not been among the old people who surrounded us yesterday, so perhaps he was always here.


    ¡°Hello. I am Takumi.¡±


    ¡°And I am Nichs.¡±


    ¡°Aye. I am Peter. Just a petty, senile old man.¡±


    ¡°Senile! But Mr. Peter, it was your knowledge that allowed these fields to grow and expand as much as they have.¡±


    ¡°Ah, but that was some time ago, when I was young. Back when I could work in the fields as well. I cannot even swing a hoe now. All I do is sit here and watch.¡±


    In spite of what he said, he did not appear to be senile.


    Even his posture was straight.


    ¡°What knowledge was that?¡±


    ¡°Oh, nothing difficult. Just things the vige had not started to do back in those days.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Peter suggested they use horses, which allowed them to ploughrger fields.¡±


    ¡°It would have been done eventually even without me. Because they were doing it in other viges.¡±


    ¡°It was Mr. Peter¡¯s idea to use horses who could not run much. Because they are often difficult to care for, especially in a vige.¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ I see.¡±


    If a horse could not run, and there was no other use for it, it might be put down.


    A wealthy person might look after it until the end, but that was notmon.


    While I felt bad, the vigers had to do what they could in order to live.


    The Novel will be updated first on this website. Come back and


    continue reading tomorrow, everyone!

 Chapter 872

    Chapter 872


    Mr. Peter knew a lot about farming<hr>


    ¡°Healthy horses can carry things, and there is plenty of work to do. But if they are old or injured¡­¡±


    ¡°And so Mr. Peter suggested they attach some special tools to them so they could plough the fields. Well, that is what I heard.¡±


    ¡°If they work, they will live longer. And the bigger the fields, the more produce, and people will be able to afford to take care of them. Of course, it was being done in other viges. So it is not as if I got the idea on my own.¡±


    ¡°Still, you helped many horses, Mr. Peter. I am sure they are all very thankful to you!¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know if horses would feel that¡­ Well, you are a beastkin, Delia. So perhaps you can talk to them.¡±


    ¡°Yes, Ms. Delia knows a lot about horses.¡±


    Liza was like that as well. So she probably understood the emotions of horses more than humans.


    ¡°Aside from that, Mr. Peter also made other suggestions regarding the soil, and ways to help the crops grow better. And everyone is indebted to him!¡±¡°I merely suggested that they let the soil rest, and also mix soil and dead leaves from the forest. That was also knowledge I got from other viges¡­¡±


    Mr. Peter looked embarrassed as Ms. Delia continued to praise him. He was a humble person.


    But even if it was done in other viges, being the one to suggest it here first, and seeding was quite an achievement.


    ¡°Obviously, the first person to think of it is impressive¡­ But putting it into action here is also verymendable.¡±


    ¡°Oh, now the visitor is siding with Delia¡­¡±


    ¡°His name is Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Oh, Takumi. Yes.¡±


    After that, we spent some time there, talking to Mr. Peter.


    As he was old now, he was not as involved with the field work, but he still liked to sit here and watch.


    Aside from the soil of the fields, he also knew a lot about different growing methods, and was like a farming expert.


    If he wanted to, perhaps it might be a good idea to invite him to Range vige¡­ They would not have many people there who were as knowledgeable about farming. I could hire someone, but they may not know as much as Mr. Peter.


    In any case, I would think about whether I should ask him or not.


    Besides, I would have to tell him about myself and the duke before any of that.


    In any case, we then left him there and returned to the vige¡­


    ¡°Here, here. Eat more!¡±


    ¡°Eat as much as you can. Or you won¡¯t grow.¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s nice to drink during the day!¡±


    ¡°The grandmothers are usually strict about it, but we can drink without worry now, because there are guests.¡±


    ¡°Really, you are always looking for opportunities to drink¡­ Mr. Takumi, I hope you do note like these old geezers?¡±


    ¡°Ahaha¡­ Thank you. I am eating a lot. But I don¡¯t know if I can eat more¡­¡±


    When we returned to the vige, the grandmothers brought out some food they had prepared, and we had a lunch party in the za.


    Some of the old men brought drinks, but as it was the same serpent wine, I politely declined.


    Though, they tried to make me eat more instead, and I was already quite full¡­ Besides, I was at the age where I would only grow horizontally¡­

 Chapter 873

    Chapter 873


    I ate as much as possible<hr>


    ¡°Oh, so you have a taste for it!¡±


    ¡°Haha! I can drink even more!¡±


    ¡°Phillip, I don¡¯t know it¡­¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s fine, Nichs. I¡¯m just pretending, and am not actually drinking that much.¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­ If you say so. But if you cause any trouble to Mr. Takumi or the others, I will let Sebastian know.¡±


    ¡°Gah! We-well, I will keep it moderate.¡±


    The old men were giving Phillip more wine to drink.


    And while I was a little worried, I had to deal with all the food that the old women were trying to make me eat, so I just left him to Nichs.Even now, they were bringing more meat and vegetable dishes to the table.


    I wasn¡¯t apetitive eater, but the time may havee for me to test my own limits¡­


    ¡°Ugh¡­I reached my limit.¡±


    ¡°Are you alright, Mr. Takumi? I¡¯m sorry that they kept feeding you¡­I was not able to stop them.¡±


    ¡°Haha. Don¡¯t worry, they were just trying to be nice¡­¡±


    I held my stomach as I returned to the house and sat down in the dining room. I was doing my best to keep it down.


    I had not been able to eat everything¡­ Did they just like fattening up any guests that came here? That is what I felt like.


    ¡°Takumi, perhaps you will feel better if you let it all out?¡±


    ¡°No, I couldn¡¯t do that¡­ Phew¡­¡±


    Nichs¡¯s suggestion felt wasteful. I just needed to rest a little, and I would feel better.


    I had many experiences feeling sick after drinking, and ended up throwing up. But just thinking about their faces as they brought the food, I could not treat it the same way.


    ¡°Throwing up wine is more wasteful! No matter how much you drink¡­ Even if it affects my training tomorrow¡­ I would never do that¡­¡±


    ¡°Phillip, you should rest too.¡±


    Phillip protested while getting up from his chair. But he was so unstable that he quickly sat back down.


    While I wouldn¡¯t say that he had drunk too much, it would still be best for him to rest for now.


    ¡°I would have liked to see more of the vige, but it seems that a short break is in order.¡±


    ¡°Yes. You wouldn¡¯t want to press yourself too hard. I have to go and meet the children soon¡­ But I could do that some other time?¡±


    ¡°No, it¡¯s fine. It¡¯s not as if we require any looking after. We will be fine soon enough. Still, the children?¡±


    ¡°It is almost time for them to be finished with their studies. The old men and women take care of them while the others are working.¡±


    ording to Ms. Delia, after the parents went out to work, the children were gathered together so that they could study. That was how they learned to read and write. It had been the same for Ms. Delia when she was young.


    They would take a break for lunch and then study again. After that, they would all y in the za.


    While not every day, Ms. Delia tried to go there and y with them when she could.

 Chapter 874

    Chapter 874


    There were a lot of energetic children<hr>


    ¡°Recently, a lot of them grab my tail, which is quite troublesome¡­¡±


    Ms. Delia said with augh. It was clear that she enjoyed ying with them.


    Children could be like that. I remember that I used to have to warn them to be gentle when touching Leo¡¯s tail.


    ¡°Well, while I don¡¯t think Phillip can, I might go and have a lookter on. It¡¯s in the central za?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I¡¯ll be waiting for you. I¡¯m sure they will be happy as well!¡±


    ¡°Haha. They might be wary of a stranger. So you¡¯ll have to introduce me.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m sure they won¡¯t be frightened of someone like you¡­ But I will do what I can then.¡±


    I still did not feelfortable moving, but I should be fine soon.In the meantime, Nichs brought some water for Phillip to drink.


    He had it pretty hard too¡­


    In any case, I would do my best so that he could restter, since it was my turn to prepare dinner.


    ¡°Oh, they sure are energetic.¡±


    After I had rested enough, I went to see Ms. Delia and the children.


    Several of them were chasing after Ms. Delia¡¯s tail as she ran around.


    But no matter how they pounced and came from different directions, she was always able to dodge them with ease.


    ¡°Hmm¡­ It looks like it could be an effective way to train. Observe Ms. Delia and try to predict how she will move. And with some cooperation, capture the target..¡±


    ¡°Nichs. Why are you always thinking about training?¡±


    ¡°You say that, but is that not very simr to how you train? When you are trying to hit Leo with your sword?¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­ Well, I suppose it is quite simr.¡±


    Now that he mentioned it, it was kind of simr to how Tilura and I trained, where we would see if we could hit Leo.


    Of course, carefully coordinating our movements to try and strike something with a sword was not really the same as chasing a tail.


    ¡°Ah!¡±


    ¡°Hmm? They seem to have noticed us.¡±


    ¡°It looks like it¡­ But why is she grabbing the children?¡±


    I thought that she would run to us after we arrived, but instead, she began to grab the children and gather them together.


    What was she going to do? I had a bad feeling about it¡­


    ¡°Alright now. All of you, charge at that man!¡±


    ¡°Ah, old man!¡±


    ¡°Charge!¡±


    ¡°Hey, wai¡­¡±


    ¡°Takumi, I¡¯ll leave them to you¡­ I will watch the area. It is my duty as a guard.¡±


    ¡°Hey, Nichs¡­ Ah!¡±


    Ms. Delia had pointed at me and given the order.


    And then about ten children came running towards me at top speed¡­


    I tried to run after Nichs, but the children quickly jumped on me, grabbing my legs so that I couldn¡¯t move.


    After that, Ms. Delia forced me to participate in their games.


    ¡°Hah¡­hah¡­phew¡­¡±


    ¡°Good work, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­ They really seem to never run out of energy. Phew¡­¡±


    I answered Ms. Delia while trying to catch my breath.


    As Leo yed with Tilura and Liza, as well as other children, I had known it¡­but it still surprised me.


    Aside from being chased around, they also wanted me to pick them up, and I had to move with all of my strength from beginning to end.


    Had I not been trained, I don¡¯t know if I would have been able to survive that¡­

 Chapter 875

    Chapter 875


    The children were rather curious<hr>


    ¡°They are so full of energy after their studies. And since they have grown so much, they are starting to get so much faster, that I am in danger of being caught.¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­hah¡­ Do you think they are getting stronger because they chase after your tail so much?¡±


    Even if they were doing it as a game, they probably put some thought into coordination and how they move. So it might be effective as training.


    ¡°Here, Mr. Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Thank you.¡±


    ¡°Hey, old man!¡±


    ¡°¡­Uh, as I said before, how about ¡®mister¡¯?¡±


    After I caught my breath, Ms. Delia gave me a cup of water. As I drank, one of the girls called to me.¡°Uh, mister. I¡¯m sorry.¡±


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s fine. So, what is it?¡±


    ¡°Are you married to Delia?¡±


    ¡°What!?¡±


    ¡°Wh-wh-what are you talking about! Me and Mr. Takumi¡­ As if that would ever¡­¡±


    The girl was younger than Liza, and seemed like she didn¡¯t quite understand what she was saying.


    Regardless, Ms. Delia was even more surprised than me by what she said.


    ¡°My papa and mama are close, just like you and Delia! So I thought¡­¡±


    ¡°Uhh¡­ Well¡­ Yes, Ms. Delia and I get along well. But we are not married.¡±


    ¡°Really?¡±


    She looked at us doubtfully.


    ¡°It¡¯s true. Mr. Takumi has someone who is a much better match for him. Yes, he seems much happier when he is with her.¡±


    ¡°Huh?¡±


    ¡°What?¡±


    I looked at her in surprise, and then she looked at me with a puzzled expression.


    I suppose she was talking about ire. Regardless, before I dealt with that, I had to convince the little girl first.


    ¡°Anyway, Ms. Delia and I are not like that.¡±


    ¡°Yes. We are not married. That¡¯spletely wrong!¡±


    ¡°I see!¡±


    The girl was finally convinced and then went away and returned to ying with the others.


    I sighed with relief, as did Ms. Delia. We then looked at each other and nodded, as we were both thinking about the same thing.


    It was time to gather the children together and find the next target¡­ I mean, viins to be punished.


    ¡°Look over there. Those old men who are just standing there. Charge!¡±


    ¡°Hey, hey, Takumi!?¡±


    ¡°Wait! We didn¡¯t do¡­!¡±


    ¡°We were just watching because Delia finally found a nice man!¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t listen to them children. Let¡¯s go!¡±


    ¡°They want to y with you!¡±


    ¡°Yaaay!!¡±

 Chapter 876

    Chapter 876


    The Attack was a Sess<hr>


    After Ms. Delia and I gave the order, the children ran towards Nichs and the elders.


    And while they were making some excuses, the children ignored them.


    ¡°¡­Evil really should be destroyed.¡±


    ¡°Hah¡­ Hah¡­! Sending the children to attack us like that. Have you no shame, Takumi?¡±


    ¡°No, it was you who abandoned me first, Nichs. Regardless, you are the only target who is not old. So you better stop resting and go back to y with them. As you said before, it will be effective training.¡±


    After he managed to escape the children, Nichs made his objections while trying to catch his breath.


    However, I quickly sent him back into the ring of children.


    ¡°By the way, Ms. Delia.¡±¡°Climb that man over there! Yes, hold onto his hair, and then you won¡¯t fall! Oh, what is it, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°Uh, I don¡¯t think they should be pulling people¡¯s hair. Hey! Don¡¯t do that! It will hurt!¡±


    ¡°Okay!¡±


    Ms. Delia was still busy with giving out orders, but she then turned to look at me with a puzzled expression.


    ¡°Ms. Delia, when you talk about how there was another girl¡­¡±


    ¡°Oh, that was nothing. I wasn¡¯t really thinking¡­¡±


    After that, the children finally calmed down a little, and so I talked with the older men and rested.


    And seeing his opportunity, Nichs red at me angrily as he began to protest again.


    ¡°¡­That was really terrible of you, Takumi.¡±


    ¡°You deserved it for what you did. Also, I just thought it was unfair for me to y with the children and exclude you. Besides, you looked like you wanted to do some training¡­¡±


    ¡°After experiencing that, I know I was right topare it to training. However, it wasn¡¯t so much fun as just exhausting¡­¡±


    Indeed, I had meant it as a form of revenge, as Nichs had run away first.


    However, I wasn¡¯t lying when I said that I wanted him to enjoy ying with the children.


    But it did not seem like he enjoyed it that much. Perhaps it was different with me, because I was used to ying with Liza and Tilura.


    Well, even then, it was Leo who did most of the running and ying.


    ¡°Still, why didn¡¯t you just dodge them like Ms. Delia does?¡±


    He was a well-trained guard. Compared to his fights with Mr. Ekenhart, it should be easy to step out of the way of charging children.


    ¡°Ms. Delia has abnormal reflexes. Besides, children are less predictable. And I am not used to dealing with them.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    Ms. Delia was a beastkin, and her reaction speed was definitely impressive.


    Also, she knew the children well, so she could probably read them better.


    I suppose that was why Nichs was at a disadvantage.


    ¡°I really have some ways to go¡­¡±


    ¡°Why don¡¯t you train with them some more then?¡±


    ¡°I¡­don¡¯t think I will. I cannot concentrate well, which will make it less effective.¡±


    Apparently, freedom andck of rules were not good for his pace.


    ¡°Mr. Takumi!¡±


    ¡°What is it, Ms. Delia?¡±


    As we were talking, Ms. Delia shouted while running towards me.


    ¡°It¡¯s the chief. Preparations are made. So it will be sent to your house now.¡±


    ¡°Prepared? What is?¡±


    Had I forgotten about something?


    I don¡¯t remember making any requests¡­

 Chapter 877

    Chapter 877


    Konjac Negotiation<hr>


    ¡°He said it was about the konjac. Were you two talking about that?¡±


    ¡°Ah¡­I see. Yes, we did talk about that. Since we are here, I thought that I might as well buy some before I leave.¡±


    ¡°So that is why. Uh, did the others like it too then?¡±


    ¡°The women liked it. Also it is easy to add it to other dishes.¡±


    ¡°Oh, is that so? While I do like it myself, it is nice to hear that people in other ces appreciate it as well!¡±


    It was something they made in this vige, after all.


    As someone who made herbs, I had an idea of what that was like.


    ¡°So, it¡¯s the house that we are staying in?¡±¡°Yes. Well, the chief cannot move yet, so someone will be there in his stead. In any case, you should go, as they will arrive soon.¡±


    ¡°I see. But since you only just heard it, perhaps there is a little time.¡±


    ¡°Yes. You could go around the time that dinner is being prepared.¡±


    ¡°Very well. So, Ms. Delia and Nichs¡­let¡¯s go!¡±


    ¡°Uh? Me too! But it¡¯s usually Phillip that does such things.¡±


    I didn¡¯t know who it was, but if they were sent by the chief, we should not be toote.


    However, since we had a little time, and I saw that the children were starting to be bored, and so I called Nichs and Ms. Delia, so that we could charge at them.


    While Nichs was resisting, I pulled him by the hand.


    I suppose Phillip was lucky that he was resting from drinking too much¡­


    ¡°Excuse me. Oh, you¡¯re all here¡­ Even Delia.¡±


    ¡°Huh? Mr. Kanat?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I thought I would join Mr. Takumi and listen. Especially since I will be working for him in the future.¡±


    ¡°Ah, you did say something about that before.¡±


    After ying with the children, we returned to the house and waited for our guest to arrive.


    Just as the sun started to set, Mr. Kanat came to the house.


    ¡°But why are you here? I didn¡¯t see you at all today, and thought that you wouldn¡¯te¡­¡±


    ¡°Well, I was sent by the chief, that is why. It¡¯s about the konjac, right? And I am the one who goes to sell it in Ractos. Not only that, but I¡¯m the one who managed to sell my whole stock. So I suppose I know more about it than anyone else here.¡±


    ¡°I see.¡±


    ¡°Well, most of it was bought by Takumi¡­ And what I had left sold well too. I am not really good at negotiating, but if it is with Takumi, then it will be easier.¡±


    ¡°Indeed. I was thinking the same thing. You understand the situation, and the reason that we want it.¡±


    ¡°So, she liked it then? I was worried that she might not after buying so much. It might have a negative effect on the vige¡­ Not that I¡¯m saying she would have done something to harm us.¡±


    ¡°Yes¡­it was well received. And I assure you, even if she was disappointed with it, she would not have med you.¡±


    Mr. Kanat was relieved to hear this, and so I thought about getting to business immediately¡­ But now that I think about it, if they mostly ate it here, and rarely sold it outside¡­ Could they really prepare enough for me to buy?

 Chapter 878

    Chapter 878


    Konjac was used as emergency food<hr>


    The potato fields in the vige were small, and so I doubted they could produce that much to be eaten by outsiders.


    If it was just one person, then it would not be a problem. But you would need a lot to feed all of the people at the mansion.


    He had brought quite a lot to Ractos, but as for whether he could produce more than that¡­and regrly. I would have to ask about it.


    ¡°Do you really have enough to be selling it to outsiders?¡±


    ¡°Yes, I thought that you would be curious about that. Well, it was originally not meant to be sold outside. We keep it as emergency food. Along with the smoked meats.¡±


    ¡°It started as a way of dealing with times when the crops fail us. As they are able to be harvested more consistently.¡±


    ¡°I see¡­¡±


    ¡°The potatoes themselves can be stored for quite a long time, but there are still limits. Regardless, as it is for emergency, we do not care about the taste as much.¡±¡°In other words, it does not taste too good by itself.¡±


    ¡°Aye. It does not taste as good as other potatoes. And so we usually don¡¯t eat it.¡±


    ¡°And that is when they started to turn it into konjac. That is what I heard from the elders.¡±


    ¡°Yes, I heard that as well. It was a very long time ago.¡±


    ¡°I suppose they did not want the food to go to waste.


    So the potatoes really did not taste good if you ate them as they were. I had heard something simr about the potatoes they used back on earth.


    Though, I think it also had something to do with poison.


    ¡°It is very easy to make. You crush it and mix it with ash water so that it hardens. And then you boil it.¡±


    ¡°Ash?¡±


    ¡°Aye. I don¡¯t know why, but that makes it harder. It was a method devised in this vige.¡±


    Well, they used different ingredients here. It was no wonder I thought that the taste was also quite different.


    ¡°Still, are you really allowed to tell me how to make it? The chief said that I would not be allowed to see it being made¡­¡±


    ¡°Bah, I don¡¯t mind. The chief doesn¡¯t know the situation with you. He thinks you are just an ordinary merchant. But you will not try to imitate it or do anything that will hurt this vige.¡±


    Well, I suppose it was because he saw me as someone rted to the duke.


    ¡°Oh, back to the konjac. We have to negotiate. That being said, there is not a lot to talk about now¡­¡±


    ¡°Indeed. In any case, while we still have some konjac left, we have decided to purchase some more.¡±


    ¡°So the question is¡­the price.¡±


    It wasn¡¯t that I absolutely had to buy it. But the people at the mansion might be expecting it, and so it was best to not disappoint them.


    ¡°Should I ask the grandmothers to make more of it?¡±


    ¡°No, there are not that many potatoes to begin with, so we will run out.¡±


    ¡°And we cannot use the ones that are being saved for an emergency¡­¡±


    ¡°Perhaps a little is fine. But it is being saved for a reason. Well, the fields will probably have to be expanded in the future. But for now, we should think about how much we can sell.¡±


    Ms. Delia had suggested they just make more of it, but Mr. Kanat objected.


    For a moment, I wondered if I could just use Weed Cultivation to help them grow more, but then I remembered that it was impossible to grow such crops.


    ¡­Besides, I would not want to take the jobs of the people who worked in the fields¡­

 Chapter 879

    Chapter 879


    We started to negotiate<hr>


    ¡°Indeed¡­ The chief told me about the amount of potatoes and konjac remaining. Well, excluding the amount that is stored in each house. So, in terms of the amount and how much it would cost¡­¡±


    The amount that Mr. Kanat then said was both more and cheaper than I was expecting.


    I had seen the prices in Ractos, but it was even cheaper now. I wondered if it was because the duke was buying them¡­


    ¡°No, even if the duke¡¯s opinion does matter to us. But as we do not have to deliver it to Ractos, it is only natural that it would be cheaper.¡±


    I see¡­well, it was not strange that the price would change depending on location.


    After all, he would have to carry to Ractos with a wagon. And that would not be cheap.


    Hmm¡­he was going to be able to prepare twice as much as what ire bought previously¡­it was more expensive than buying it in Japan, but considering that it was all made by hand, it was not expensive.


    ¡°So, one barrel is the same as what we saw in Ractos?¡±¡°Ah, I didn¡¯t tell you that part yet. Well, that was the first time we went to sell it outside of the vige. But actually, it is a little different. A barrel here is slightlyrger.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi. I brought a barrel of it yesterday?¡±


    ¡°Ah, you¡¯re right. I wasn¡¯t thinking about negotiations, and didn¡¯t really notice the size¡­¡±


    ¡°Takumi. This is the remaining konjac.¡±


    ¡°Thank you, Phillip. So, it is quiterger than the ones we bought in Ractos.¡±


    ¡°Aye. As it was the first time we were selling it, we did not bring too much. The barrels in this


    vige are a littlerger.¡±


    Indeed, the konjac here was a littlerger than my hand. So I suppose it was 1.5 times bigger¡­ Definitelyrger than what was sold in supermarkets.


    ¡°I see¡­this size for that price.¡±


    I thought about what I should do.


    I had to think about the amount that would be consumed at the mansion, as well as how long it could be stored.


    That being said, the people there had eaten quite a lot, so I doubt it would go to waste.


    ¡°¡­Is there a problem?¡±


    It was then that I noticed that the others were looking at me.


    Especially Mr. Kanat and Ms. Delia.


    ¡°¡­You are usually smiling and soid back, so I was a little surprised. Still, I am d that you are thinking about it seriously.¡±


    ¡°Sorry, I was a little too focused.¡±


    Usually, I tried to smile, so as to not give a bad impression to other people..


    Also, there was the fact that I was in a new environment, and had a lot of fun¡­ So unlike when I was in Japan, I had a lot of reasons to smile and look pleasant.


    There were a lot of kind people here, and I simply enjoyed my time, especially because of Leo.


    ¡°Well, leaving my facial expressions aside¡­¡±


    ¡°Ah, are you blushing, Mr. Takumi?¡±


    ¡°What! No, nevermind that¡­¡±


    I felt a little embarrassed to realize the others were focused on my expression, and so I forcefully changed the subject.


    Even thought Ms. Delica was wagging her tail and looking at me happily¡­

 Chapter 880

    Chapter 880


    We finished the negotiations<hr>


    ¡°For now¡­I would like to buy the same number of barrels as in Ractos. They don¡¯t have to be cut.¡±


    ¡°I understand. That is quite a lot, but I¡¯m not surprised after thest time.


    ¡°Yes, that was very sudden¡­ Even I was surprised.¡±


    Mr. Kanat nodded. Apparently, he was so surprisedst time when ire bought most of his stock, that this was nothing.


    ¡°Also, could we perhaps talk about the possibility of having more delivered to the mansion regrly?¡±


    ¡°Hmm¡­ As for that, I would have to discuss it with the others. Selling it is not a problem, but delivering it regrly might be difficult. Ah, is that why you didn¡¯t buy all of it at once?¡±


    ¡°Uh, yes. After all, we would not be able to eat all of it.¡±


    Even though it kept quite well¡­ I thought it would be better to buy it regrly in manageable quantities.That would give them time to make more of it, and if it continued to sell well, they might consider expanding their fields as well.


    ¡°In any case, selling it regrly would result in a connection with the duke¡¯s house. And that should help with future sales.¡±


    ¡°¡­You really have thought this through. The chief and I really have not thought that far ahead¡­¡±


    If it had value as a product, it would be easier for the vige to produce more of it. Also, it might help to improve the quality.


    Not that I had anyints about how it was now.


    ¡°Indeed¡­six barrels. That and the transportation feels¡­I suppose around five gold.¡±


    ¡°I understand, five gold¡­ That seems rather cheap?¡±


    I had expected it to cost more.


    ¡°You noticed¡­ Well, I lowered it just a little, since you are buying that much. It is more than enough profit for the vige.¡±


    ¡°If you say so.¡±


    ¡°Ah, as for the transportation, please take it to a store managed by a Mr. Kalis in Ractos. It is owned by the duke, so it should be easy to find.¡±


    If he took it there, it could be delivered to the mansion quickly.


    Sebastian would have already talked to them, and so Nick could deliver it whenever he came by.


    ¡°Alright. Well, that is all that needed to be discussed.¡±


    Unlike normal negotiations, it seemed like we were trying to sell cheaply or buy more expensive.


    ¡°As for the regr deliveries, I will speak to the chief and the other vigers about it¡­ But I doubt anyone will be against it. After all, it was not something we usually sell, so it will be extra profits. And it will give the old women something to do.¡±


    ¡°Yes, thank you.¡±


    ¡°I am the one who should be bowing my head. Everything is going to help the vige.¡±


    After that, I asked him questions about how to preserve the konjac after it was delivered.


    They were put in barrels with clean water and covered by a lid, which was enough for some time. But he said that it was best to change the water after it arrived.


    Also, Phillip realized that he would probably have to carry it again, and looked rather glum. But Nichs told him that it served him right for not ying with the children¡­


    The Novel will be updated first on this website. Come back and


    continue reading tomorrow, everyone!

 Chapter 881

    Chapter 881


    I asked about monster hunting<hr>


    ¡°Oh, I shouldn¡¯t stay here too long. Delia, I¡¯ll be taking my leave then.¡±


    ¡°Ah, I¡¯m going to stay here for dinner. Just like yesterday.¡±


    ¡°I see. Well, it is better to eat with others if you can. Ah, by the way, there was something the chief asked me to tell you.¡±


    ¡°What is it? Does he want me to visit because he is bored?¡±


    ¡°That is one reason. But it is about tomorrow. The woodcutters are going out to hunt. And so they want you to help them.¡±


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s fine. I will go with them to the forest tomorrow then.¡±


    So, Ms. Delia was going to hunt with them in the forest.


    It was clear that she could hunt orcs and serpents without trouble, so I was not worried.¡°Still, it is a little sudden, isn¡¯t it? He usually tells me in advance.¡±


    ¡°They want new meat. Also, they found traces¡­of it.¡±


    ¡°It?¡±


    ¡°Ah, then I definitely need to go!¡±


    ¡°Thank you. I will tell the chief and the others then.¡±


    Said Mr. Kanat, and then he left.


    He sure seemed busy. Negotiating for the chief and delivering messages. But I wondered what he was usually doing?


    I would have to ask himter.


    ¡°Ms. Delia, what did he mean by ¡®it¡¯?¡±


    ¡°Ah, you wouldn¡¯t have understood that. It is a certain monster. Quiterge for a vige like ours, but it is popr because it tastes good. And they try their best to hunt it if it ever appears.¡±


    ¡°Huh. What kind of monster is it?¡±


    ¡°In terms of size¡­it is close to Leo. Well, at least when they are adults.¡±


    ¡°That is quite big.¡±


    ¡°Yes. And they are also so fast, so they often run away even when we find them. I think that is why they called me. So that it doesn¡¯t get away.¡±


    ¡°Large, fast and delicious¡­ Are you talking about Audhum?¡±


    ¡°So you know about them, Mr. Phillip. Yes, that is what they are called.¡±


    As he worked as a guard and a soldier, he had a decent amount of knowledge concerning monsters.


    Nichs was also nodding, so he must know about them as well.


    Audhum, huh¡­ I felt as if I had heard that name in some myth before.


    Of course, there was no guarantee that they were the same in this world.


    ¡°Apart from the size, what can you tell me about them?¡±


    I was quite curious now.


    ¡°Well, they have white fur¡­¡±


    ¡°No, Phillip. That is only the females. And they are not eaten, as people usually just collect the milk.¡±


    ¡°Ah, that¡¯s right. It¡¯s the males that are eaten, and they have ck fur. And due to their speed, it is harder to keep track of them when it¡¯s dark.¡±


    ¡°Though, their heavy weight ensures that they leave tracks. But they have sharp senses and are quick to run. That cowardly nature means they rarely evene near viges or ces where humans live.¡±


    ¡°They eat leaves and nts, and rarely attack other living creatures.¡±


    Herbivores that could be milked? Were they like cows then? If their meat tasted anything like beef, it would exin why they were more popr than orc.


    Well, I suppose some people preferred pork to beef. But I always thought of beef as being more expensive and luxurious.


    ¡°Does this monster have horns and walk on four legs?¡±


    ¡°They walk on four legs, but they do not have horns.¡±


    No horns.


    Well, there were some cows that did not have horns. Of course, perhaps these were quite different¡­


    The Novel will be updated first on this website. Come back and


    continue reading tomorrow, everyone!

 Chapter 882

    Chapter 882


    The Audhum had a powerful charge<hr>


    ¡°However, thebination of their speed and weight make their charges even more dangerous than that of orcs.¡±


    ¡°Now that I think about it, I remember someone saying that they could easily knock a troll off of its feet.¡±


    ¡°Even a troll? That is something¡­¡±


    After Phillip, Nichs also told me about the Audhum.


    Trolls were three meters tall and incredibly strong. How powerful would it have to be to knock down something like that?


    ¡°Not only that, but they are also good at quick turns. Still, you just have to be able to dodge them. And turns can be seen as a chance to attack.¡±


    ¡°Well, you would have to be very skilled to take advantage of that¡­¡±


    ¡°But after seeing Ms. Delia ying with the children, it makes sense.¡±She had the speed of a horse, after all.


    It was no wonder that the woodcutters wanted her help.


    ¡°Hmm, Ms. Delia. Do you think I could participate in this Audhum hunt?¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi!?¡±


    ¡°Uh¡­don¡¯t call me ¡®mister,¡¯ Phillip.¡±


    ¡°¡­Oh, I was just surprised. But surely there is no need to go out and hunt monsters? It is dangerous.¡±


    ¡°Mr. Takumi, why do you want to go? I have not known you for that long, but you do not seem like the type who enjoys going on hunts.¡±


    Ms. Delia was right to wonder about that.


    Indeed, if I had a choice, I would generally prefer to avoid fighting.


    Still, I had to exin that it wasn¡¯t mere interest.


    ¡°I have not got to meet the woodcutters yet, so there is that. Also, I feel like I should experience this. Hunting¡­or watching something other than an orc be hunted.¡±


    I had been able to meet the people who worked in the fields, but not the others yet.


    Well, it wasn¡¯t as if I had to, but since I wanted to view different people at their jobs, it seemed like a good idea.


    ¡°Well, there was that serpent that you caught¡­ But I have not seen that many monsters here.¡±


    ¡°There are people who live in the cities who have never even seen an orc.¡±


    ¡°Well, they are generally protected by walls and guards. So if you do not leave, it is no surprise that you¡¯ve never seen one.¡±


    ¡°Still, I have fought against orcs. It was part of my training. And so I think I should see others as much as possible. Of course, I will be sure to not get in anyone¡¯s way. I just want to watch, not really participate.¡±


    After all, a stranger joining suddenly would affect their teamwork.


    I did not know much about this monster and would not know what to do or how to be helpful to the others.


    And thest thing I wanted to do was to cause trouble.


    ¡°Well, if that is all, then it shouldn¡¯t be a problem. And if something happens, I will protect you.¡±


    ¡°¡­But that is our job. Ms. Delia, do not worry. We will protect Takumi.¡±


    ¡°Oh, I forgot that you two are guards.¡±


    ¡°And so you can focus on hunting the Audhum. Leave Takumi to us.¡±


    After thinking about it for a moment, Ms. Delia nodded her head and agreed. She also said that she would protect me, but Phillip and Nichs insisted that it was her duty.


    Well, I did want her to focus on the hunt without worrying about me¡­


    The Novel will be updated first on this website. Come back and


    continue reading tomorrow, everyone!